<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://prole.wiki/w/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=The+Phantom+Bull</id>
	<title>ProleWiki - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://prole.wiki/w/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=The+Phantom+Bull"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://prole.wiki/wiki/Special:Contributions/The_Phantom_Bull"/>
	<updated>2026-10-25T06:05:21Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.43.11</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=Democratic_People%27s_Republic_of_Korea&amp;diff=92647</id>
		<title>Democratic People&#039;s Republic of Korea</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=Democratic_People%27s_Republic_of_Korea&amp;diff=92647"/>
		<updated>2026-09-07T17:45:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;The Phantom Bull: I changed the orthographic territory map and its caption, in line with the DPRK&amp;#039;s official abandonment of Korean reunification. Check the description of the uploaded SVG file to learn more. Also, feel free to undo this change, if it&amp;#039;s incorrect.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#SEO:&lt;br /&gt;
|image=Chollima_monument_at_night.jpg}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Infobox country&lt;br /&gt;
| name = Democratic People&#039;s Republic of Korea&lt;br /&gt;
| native_name = 조선민주주의인민공화국&lt;br /&gt;
| image_coat = Emblem of the DPRK.svg&lt;br /&gt;
| image_flag = Flag of the DPRK.svg&lt;br /&gt;
| symbol_type = Emblem&lt;br /&gt;
|national_anthem=애국가&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Aegukka&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(&amp;quot;The Patriotic Song&amp;quot;)| image_map = DPRK No RoK (orthographic projection).svg&lt;br /&gt;
| map_caption = Territory currently claimed by the DPRK, after Korean reunification was officially abandoned in January 2024.&lt;br /&gt;
| map_width = 220px&lt;br /&gt;
| capital = [[Pyongyang]]&lt;br /&gt;
| largest_city = capital&lt;br /&gt;
|mode_of_production=[[Socialism]]| government_type = Unitary &#039;&#039;[[Juche]]&#039;&#039; [[socialist state]]&lt;br /&gt;
| established_event2 = Founding of the DPRK&lt;br /&gt;
| established_date2 = 9 September 1948&lt;br /&gt;
| established_event1 = Start of partial US occupation&lt;br /&gt;
| established_date1 = 8 September 1945&lt;br /&gt;
|area_km2=120,540| population_estimate = 25,845,400 &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;(77,048,000 including Koreans under [[neocolonialism|neocolonial]] occupation)&lt;br /&gt;
| population_estimate_year    = 2020&lt;br /&gt;
|unemployment=2.8%&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;UNdata&amp;quot;&amp;gt;UNData (2021). &#039;&#039;[https://data.un.org/en/iso/kp.html DPRK – UNData]&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;|GDP_nominal=$16.3 billion&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;UNdata&amp;quot;&amp;gt;UNData (2021). &#039;&#039;[https://data.un.org/en/iso/kp.html DPRK – UNData]&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;|GDP_nominal_per_capita=$639.6&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;UNdata&amp;quot;&amp;gt;UNData (2021). &#039;&#039;[https://data.un.org/en/iso/kp.html DPRK – UNData]&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;|GDP_nominal_year=2021|export=$1.1 billion&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;UNdata&amp;quot;&amp;gt;UNData (2021). &#039;&#039;[https://data.un.org/en/iso/kp.html DPRK – UNData]&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;|export_year=2020|import=$3.46 billion&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;UNdata&amp;quot;&amp;gt;UNData (2021). &#039;&#039;[https://data.un.org/en/iso/kp.html DPRK – UNData]&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;|import_year=2020|HDI=.785 (High)|currency=Korean People&#039;s Won|currency_code=KPW|drives_on=right|calling_code=+850|iso3166code=KP|cctld=.kp| leader_title1               = General Secretary of the Workers&#039; Party&lt;br /&gt;
| leader_name1                = [[Kim Jong-un]]&lt;br /&gt;
| leader_title2               = President of the Presidium&lt;br /&gt;
| leader_name2                = [[Choe Ryong-hae]]&lt;br /&gt;
| leader_title3               = First Vice Chairman of the State Affairs Commission&lt;br /&gt;
| leader_name3                = Choe Ryong-hae&lt;br /&gt;
| leader_title4               = Premier of the Cabinet&lt;br /&gt;
| leader_name4                = [[Kim Tok-hun]]&lt;br /&gt;
| leader_title5               = Chairman of the Supreme People&#039;s Assembly&lt;br /&gt;
| leader_name5                = Pak Thae-song&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Democratic People&#039;s Republic of Korea&#039;&#039;&#039; (&#039;&#039;&#039;DPRK&#039;&#039;&#039;; Korean: 조선민주주의인민공화국, &#039;&#039;Chosŏn Minjujuŭi Inmin Konghwaguk&#039;&#039;), sometimes referred to as &#039;&#039;&#039;People&#039;s Korea&#039;&#039;&#039; and incorrectly, but best-known, as &#039;&#039;&#039;North Korea&#039;&#039;&#039;, is a socialist country in [[East Asia]]. [[Korea]] is one nation, but the southern half of Korea is occupied by the [[United States of America|US]]-backed [[Anti-communism|anti-communist]] [[Republic of Korea]], also known as Capitalist Korea. DPRK&#039;s capital city is [[Pyongyang]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The DPRK is led by the [[Workers&#039; Party of Korea]] (WPK) and the [[Democratic Front for the Reunification of Korea]]. According to its constitution, the DPRK is an &amp;quot;independent [[socialist state]]&amp;quot;, guided by the ideology of [[Juche]] which is a derivative of [[Marxism–Leninism|Marxism–Leninism]] originally codified by [[Kim Il-sung|Kim Il-Sung]].&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Articles 1 and 3 of the [https://www.constituteproject.org/constitution/Peoples_Republic_of_Korea_1998.pdf?lang=en Constitution of the DPRK]&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While the DPRK distanced itself from [[Union of Soviet Socialist Republics|USSR]]&#039;s ideological leadership in the 1960s, some authors still consider it a [[Marxism–Leninism|Marxist–Leninist]] socialist state.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{Textcite|author=Thomas Stock|year=2019|title=North Korea’s Marxism-Leninism: fraternal criticisms and the development of North Korean ideology in the 1960s|pdf=|lg=http://libgen.gs/scimag/ads.php?doi=10.1215%2F21581665-7258081&amp;amp;downloadname=|doi=10.1215/21581665-7258081}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 2017, DPRK&#039;s Minister of Foreign affairs, Ri Yong Ho, stated at the [[United Nations]] General Assembly that &amp;quot;The U.S. had put [[Economic sanctions|sanctions]] against our country from the very first day of its foundation, and the over 70-year long history of the DPRK can be said in a sense a history of struggle, persevering along the road of self-development under the harshest sanctions in the world.&amp;quot; Ri also stated that the essence of the situation of the Korean peninsula is a confrontation between the DPRK and the US, where the DPRK tries to defend its national dignity and sovereignty against the hostile policy and nuclear threats of the US, and points out that it was the US who first introduced [[Nuclear weapon|nuclear weapons]] to the Korean peninsula. Ri stated that &amp;quot;The very reason the DPRK had to possess nuclear weapons is because of the U.S., and it had to strengthen and develop its nuclear force onto the current level to cope with the U.S. [...] Our national nuclear force is, to all intents and purposes, a war deterrent for putting an end to nuclear threat of the U.S. and for preventing its military invasion&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:0&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Ri Yong Ho, DPRK Minister for Foreign Affairs. [https://gadebate.un.org/sites/default/files/gastatements/72/kp_en.pdf &amp;quot;Statement by H.E. Mr. RI YONG HO, Minister for Foreign Affairs of the Democratic People&#039;s Republic of Korea at the General Debate of the 72 Session of the United Nations General Assembly.&amp;quot;] New York, 23rd September 2017. gadebate.un.org. [https://web.archive.org/web/20220709114619/https://gadebate.un.org/sites/default/files/gastatements/72/kp_en.pdf Archived] 2022-08-28.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Minister Ri also clarified DPRK&#039;s nuclear policy by quoting [[Kim Jong-un]] as saying that international justice can only be achieved when the [[Anti-imperialism|anti-imperialist]] independent countries are strong enough, and that possession of nuclear deterrence by the DPRK is a righteous self-defensive measure taken as an ultimate option, pursuant to this principle, and further clarified that the DPRK &amp;quot;do[es] not have any intention at all to use or threaten to use nuclear weapons against the countries that do not join in the U.S. military actions against the DPRK.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:0&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
DPRK representative Kim Song stated at the 2021 UN General Assembly, &amp;quot;If the U.S. wants to see the Korean war, the most prolonged and long-lasting war in the world, come to an end, and if it is really desirous of peace and reconciliation on the Korean peninsula, it should take the first step towards giving up its hostile policy against the DPRK by stopping permanently the joint military exercises and the deployment of all kinds of strategic weapons which are levelled at the DPRK in and around the Korean peninsula.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Kim Song. [https://estatements.unmeetings.org/estatements/10.0010/20210927/f9hI1UVcyVQ6/Ina2tpqa5rlW_en.pdf &amp;quot;Statement by Head of the DPRK Delegation H.E. Mr. KIM SONG, Permanent Representative of the Democratic People’s Republic of Korea to the United Nations At the General Debate of the 76th session of the United Nations General Assembly.&amp;quot;] New York, 27 September 2021. UNmeetings.org. [https://web.archive.org/web/20220828072554/https://estatements.unmeetings.org/estatements/10.0010/20210927/f9hI1UVcyVQ6/Ina2tpqa5rlW_en.pdf Archived] 2022-08-28.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1965 [[Che Guevara]] said that the DPRK &amp;quot;was a model to which revolutionary [[Republic of Cuba|Cuba]] should aspire&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{Web citation|author=Stephen Gowans|newspaper=What&#039;s Left|title=Understanding North Korea|date=2007-03-03|url=https://gowans.blog/2007/03/03/understanding-north-korea/|archive-url=https://archive.is/2esBE|archive-date=2022-08-19|retrieved=2025-08-21}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{Textcite|author=Bruce Cumings|year=2005|title=Korea’s place in the sun: a modern history|pdf=|publisher=W.W. Norton &amp;amp; Company; p. 404|lg=}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==History==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Early history and Japanese occupation ===&lt;br /&gt;
{{Main article|Korea}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Division of Korea===&lt;br /&gt;
Following the defeat of [[Japanese Empire|Japan]] and the end of the [[Second World War]], Japan lost control of its colonies, including what was formerly the [[Korean Empire]]. As a result of negotiations between the Soviet Union and the United States, the [[Korea|Korean Peninsula]] was divided into occupation zones along the 38th Parallel North. Although there was an attempt at establishing the [[People&#039;s Republic of Korea]], the nascent state was outlawed by U.S. forces. In the northern zone, the Soviets allowed Koreans to govern themselves, and a system of people&#039;s committees developed into a full provisional government.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:12&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{Citation|author=Stephen Gowans|year=2018|title=Patriots, Traitors and Empires: The Story of Korea’s Struggle for Freedom|chapter=The Patriot State|page=88–93|pdf=https://ipfs.io/ipfs/bafykbzaced4iiga4ngtxusr2civjxewbili5jne2sbpefbx2s3im2kphattzc?filename=Stephen%20Gowans%20-%20Patriots%2C%20Traitors%20and%20Empires_%20The%20Story%20of%20Korea%E2%80%99s%20Struggle%20for%20Freedom-Baraka%20Books%20%282018%29.pdf|city=Montreal|publisher=Baraka Books|isbn=9781771861427|lg=https://libgen.rs/book/index.php?md5=8435F6FF91279531705764823FDC2A7F}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Originally, the division of Korea was not intended to be an actual dividing line nor a border to split the country, but simply meant as designated areas where Soviet and U.S. forces would be temporarily assisting Korea as it stabilized after liberation from Japan and formed an independent Korean state. However, the U.S. sought to prolong Korea&#039;s division in order to form Korea into a state subordinate to U.S. interests, pushing for separate elections in the south despite opposition from the [[The people|masses]] and despite attempts among the Korean populace to form a unified nation.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:9&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Under conditions in which the U.S. imperialists were occupying south Korea and foreign and domestic [[Reactionary|reactionaries]] were gathered together in the occupied zone and opposing the founding of a unified independent Korean state, the policy of constructing a powerful democratic base in the northern half of Korea was adopted. The formation of a broad united front to rally the masses of people in all walks of life was the first question to be solved. Thus, early in 1946, a [[united front]] was formed of different parties and groupings, democratic forces of various social strata.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:9&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Democratic and economic reforms in the north ===&lt;br /&gt;
On the basis of the people&#039;s committees, the Provisional People&#039;s Committee of North Korea (Korean: 북조선림시인민위원회; Hanja: 北朝鮮臨時人民委員會) was formed on February 8 of 1946.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;[https://dprktoday.com/news/43457 &amp;quot;북조선림시인민위원회.&amp;quot; (&amp;quot;North Korea Provisional People&#039;s Committee​​​.&amp;quot;)] 조선의 오늘, 주체109(2020)년 2월 8일. DPRK Today, February 8, Juche 109 (2020). [https://web.archive.org/web/20231004150520/https://dprktoday.com/news/43457 Archived] 2023-10-05.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;[https://encykorea.aks.ac.kr/Article/E0070131 “북조선임시인민위원회(北朝鮮臨時人民委員會).”] Encyclopedia of Korean Culture. [[Archived]] 2023-10-05.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The leaders of the Korean resistance agreed to make Kim Il-sung the new leader of Korea, and he became president of the provisional government on 8 February 1946.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:12&amp;quot; /&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In March of 1946, the [[20-Point Platform]] (Korean: 20개조정강) for realizing Korea&#039;s [[Anti-imperialism|anti-imperialist]], anti-[[Feudalism|feudal]] [[Democracy|democratic]] reforms was announced, including such items as thorough liquidation of all remnants of Japanese imperialist rule, waging an implacable struggle against reactionary and anti-democratic elements, carrying out land reform, [[Nationalization|nationalizing]] important industries, direct and equal suffrage, and the institution of free medical care for the poor, among other points.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Kim Han Gil. [https://archive.org/details/ModernHistoryOfKorea/page/n1/mode/2up &amp;quot;Modern History of Korea.&amp;quot;] Foreign Languages Publishing House. Pyongyang, Korea, 1979.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;[http://www.jajusibo.com/58698 &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;“[헌법으로 보는 북한-서문] 사회 전 분야의 방향이 제시된 20개조 정강.” (&amp;quot;[North Korea as seen through the Constitution - Preface] A 20-point platform that sets out the direction for all areas of society.&amp;quot;)&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;] 자주시보, 2022-02-25. [https://web.archive.org/web/20220707211557/http://www.jajusibo.com/58698 Archived] 2022-07-07.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:15&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[https://www.tongiltimes.com/news/articleView.html?idxno=767 &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;“[북 현대사] 북조선림시인민위원회와 토지개혁 (4).” (&amp;quot;[North Korea Modern History] North Korea Provisional People’s Committee and Land Reform (4)&amp;quot;)&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;] 통일시대. April 6, 2022. [https://web.archive.org/web/20231004152620/https://www.tongiltimes.com/news/articleView.html?idxno=767 Archived] 2023-10-04.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; On November 3, 1946, the first democratic election in the history of Korea was held in the north, and the People&#039;s Committee of North Korea (Korean: 북조선인민위원회; Hanja: 北朝鮮人民委員會), which was no longer provisional, was created in February of 1947, functioning as the organ of the [[dictatorship of the proletariat]].&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:9&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The new government redistributed land from [[Landlord|landlords]] and Japanese officials to [[Peasantry|peasants]], nationalized large companies, shortened the work day to eight hours (seven for dangerous occupations), banned [[Child labour|child labor]], established social security and paid vacations, and enforced gender equality.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:12&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As a result of land reform, feudal landownership, which was the social and economic base of the undemocratic reactionary forces, was done away with in the rural villages of the north. At the time, the matter of land reform was of great concern, due to a large percentage of Korea&#039;s population being peasant farmers, many engaged in [[sharecropping]] and being [[Exploitation|exploited]] in feudal relations as well as by Japanese colonialism.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:15&amp;quot; /&amp;gt; In addition to land reform, the nationalization of key industries was undertaken, wiping out the political and economic bases of imperialists and domestic reactionaries and promoting the general rehabilitation and development of the national economy in the wake of the Japanese colonial period. The Provisional People&#039;s Committee implemented the Law on the Nationalization of Important Industries in August 1946. Under it, all large factories, mines, power stations, railway transport, telecommunication facilities, banks and commercial and cultural establishments were made the property of the Korean people. Factories and other enterprises which had been owned by pro-Japanese elements were confiscated without compensation and became the property of the people, to be used for their own benefit rather than for the extraction of Korea&#039;s wealth for imperial Japan&#039;s benefit. Democratic reforms, beginning with the Labor Law and the Law on the Equality of the Sexes, were enforced, putting an end to unlimited exploitation of the working class and liberating women from feudal subordination.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:9&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Author [[Kim Byong Sik]] describes the changes in social, economic, and class relations in the north during this time, noting that as a result of the reforms following liberation, capitalist economic relations were reduced to a small scale in limited areas of the economy, while socialist economic relations became dominant in all areas of the economy:&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;Radical changes were effected in social, economic and class relations in the northern half of the Republic, a people’s democratic system was established and a powerful revolutionary base for an all-Korea victory was founded. In other words, all colonial and semi-feudal components were removed, and socialist economic relations, based on state and cooperative economy, came to occupy a leading position in all areas of the people’s economy, with capitalist relations confined to only small commodity production by private farms and handicraft enterprises in urban areas and to some commerce and small-scale industry. Concerning class relations, landlords, comprador capitalists, pro-Japanese elements and traitors were eliminated and working people became the masters of the country, the leading role of the working class increased and the worker-peasant alliance was consolidated. In this way, the balance of forces developed decisively in favor of the revolution.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:9&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;As the above author later notes, by 1947 state-controlled industry accounted for 80.2% of industrial output, and private industry for only 19.8% of industrial output. In addition, mining was completely state-controlled. Industrial production jumped 70 per cent, and labor productivity 51 per cent, in fiscal 1947 in comparison with the previous year. 1947 was the first year in which an [[Planned economy|economic plan]] was implemented. 1948 also saw a successfully implemented economic plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Founding of Korean People&#039;s Army ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Provisional People&#039;s Committee trained national cadres and prepared a revolutionary armed force to defend the people&#039;s democratic system, establishing the [[Korean People&#039;s Army]] on February 8, 1948.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Reactionary regime forms in the south ===&lt;br /&gt;
Throughout this time, reactionary and imperialist forces in the U.S.-occupied portion of Korea had been seeking ways to prolong Korea&#039;s division in order to form a state which was subordinate to U.S. interests and in which anti-communist forces would remain in power. As democratic reforms were taking place in the north and the base of power was being removed from feudal landlords, Japanese collaborators, and other reactionary forces in the north, the reactionaries were moving south, some of them forming right-wing anti-communist paramilitary groups such as the [[Northwest Youth League]] (Korean: 서북청년회), who later committed atrocities against ordinary citizens in the name of the southern regime, and many of whom went on to become police and members of the local government.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Flenniken, Lauren. [https://www.jejuweekly.com/news/articleView.html?idxno=1435 “The Northwest Youth League.”] Jejuweekly.com. 2011-04-10. [https://web.archive.org/web/20231005035904/https://www.jejuweekly.com/news/articleView.html?idxno=1435 Archived] 2023-10-05.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Among the imperialists&#039; plans was the plan to hold a separate election in the south, which was opposed by many of the Korean masses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this context, Kim Il Sung submitted the draft Provisional Constitution of Korea for discussion by all the people north and south and he proposed the election of an all-Korea supreme legislative assembly through a general, direct, equal and secret ballot. At the same time he called on the political parties and social organizations of south Korea to hold a south-north joint conference to oppose the separate election and to discuss ways and means of saving the nation. In response to this call, a joint conference was held in Pyongyang on April 20, 1948, with attendants representing a range of political orientations. A resolution was adopted to boycott the separate elections. At the time of the controversial separate election held in May 1948, more than 140 polling stations and a number of police stations were destroyed and burned. The U.S.-backed southern regime resorted to fascist terror to suppress the opposition. After proceeding with the elections, the regime formed as a puppet regime consisting of collaborators, landlords, and subservient capitalists.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:9&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Founding of the DPRK ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Democratic People&#039;s Republic of Korea was founded on 9 September 1948. The illegitimate government of the occupied portion of Korea (often referred to as South Korea, or [[Republic of Korea]]) had been established earlier the same year, when dictator [[Syngman Rhee]], who was referred to as an &amp;quot;imported expatriate&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;extreme rightist&amp;quot; in a CIA document of the time,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;[https://digitalarchive.wilsoncenter.org/document/220065.pdf?v=d41d8cd98f00b204e9800998ecf8427e &amp;quot;March 18, 1948 Central Intelligence Agency, ORE 15/48, &#039;The Current Situation in Korea&#039;&amp;quot;]. &#039;&#039;Wilson Center Digital Archive&#039;&#039;. [https://web.archive.org/web/20220729051304/https://digitalarchive.wilsoncenter.org/document/220065.pdf?v=d41d8cd98f00b204e9800998ecf8427e Archived] from the original.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; came to power due to U.S. influence despite many Koreans opposing the holding of separate elections in the south. In DPRK, Kim Il-Sung became the first [[Premier of the DPRK]], a position he would hold until 1972. DPRK soon requested for U.S. and Soviet troops to leave Korea. The Soviets left on 25 September, but the U.S. occupiers refused to leave.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:1102&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{Citation|author=Stephen Gowans|year=2018|title=Patriots, Traitors and Empires: The Story of Korea’s Struggle for Freedom|chapter=The Political Partition of Korea|page=114|pdf=https://ipfs.io/ipfs/bafykbzaced4iiga4ngtxusr2civjxewbili5jne2sbpefbx2s3im2kphattzc?filename=Stephen%20Gowans%20-%20Patriots%2C%20Traitors%20and%20Empires_%20The%20Story%20of%20Korea%E2%80%99s%20Struggle%20for%20Freedom-Baraka%20Books%20%282018%29.pdf|city=Montreal|publisher=Baraka Books|isbn=9781771861427|lg=https://libgen.rs/book/index.php?md5=8435F6FF91279531705764823FDC2A7F}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Occupied Korean government was hostile to socialism and to the DPRK. Even though Western media accuses the DPRK of initiating the [[Fatherland Liberation War]] (often referred to as the Korean War), numerous acts of violence were perpetrated by the illegitimate southern government that were tantamount to war—namely the [[Jeju Uprising|massacre on Jeju Island]] that targeted communists. The people of Jeju had been protesting the formation of a separate southern regime and the holding of separate elections in the south, but were eventually violently suppressed by the US-backed southern regime. The death toll was composed of thousands of civilians, many of whom were not affiliated with the [[Workers&#039; Party of South Korea]] or communism at all. In addition, the [[Yeosu-Suncheon rebellion]] of 1948 was a rebellion among soldiers in the south who began guerrilla-style fights against the military, as the rebelling soldiers refused to participate in the brutal suppression of the Jeju uprising. Suppression of this rebellion by the southern regime led to hundreds of civilian deaths.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;[https://english.hani.co.kr/arti/english_edition/e_national/332032.html “439 Civilians Confirmed Dead in Yeosu-Suncheon Uprising of 1948.”] Jan. 8, 2009. Hankyoreh. [https://web.archive.org/web/20230614174428/https://english.hani.co.kr/arti/english_edition/e_national/332032.html Archived] 2023-06-14.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Furthermore, paramilitary groups from the Republic of Korea illegally crossed the border into the DPRK on multiple occasions. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In DPRK, a two-year economic plan for 1949-1950 was adopted on the basis of the previous plans of 1947 and 1948, with plans for furthering the socialist transformation of the economy as well as the continued correction of distortions in the economy which were the result of the colonial period. However, this plan had to be suspended due to the escalation of the war in 1950.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:9&amp;quot; /&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Fatherland Liberation War===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CIA document pages 1 and 2.jpg|thumb|1950 CIA document stating that after the Korean People&#039;s Army entered Seoul, more than 50% of students were actively aiding communists, many volunteering for the army, and that the working class of Seoul generally supported the north.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{Web citation|newspaper=CIA Reading Room|title=SUBJECT: The Korean Situstion|date=1950-07-19|url=https://www.cia.gov/readingroom/docs/1950-07-19b.pdf|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210608142706/https://www.cia.gov/readingroom/docs/1950-07-19b.pdf|archive-date=2021-06-08|retrieved=2025-08-21}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Main article|Fatherland Liberation War}}&lt;br /&gt;
During the Fatherland Liberation War, DPRK forces almost repelled the illegal occupation army; however, the [[United Nations]] and the United States sent extra forces to fight DPRK troops. Western forces pushed DPRK forces all the way to the border of the newly formed [[China|People&#039;s Republic of China]], which had itself repelled reactionary [[Kuomintang]] forces from the [[People&#039;s Republic of China|mainland]]. PRC forces intervened to protect Korean sovereignty, repelling Western troops once more as part of the War to Resist the U.S. Aggression and Aid Korea campaign. The majority of the fighting during the rest of the [[Fatherland Liberation War]] took place near the 38th Parallel North, with only minor border changes occurring after a ceasefire was signed. The DPRK technically remains at war with its illegitimate southern neighbour as no truce has been signed between the two.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Thatched huts go up in flames after B-26 bombers unload napalm bombs on a village near Hanchon, North Korea, on May 10, 1951 (AP photo).png|thumb|Thatched huts go up in flames after B-26 bombers unload napalm bombs on a village near Hanchon, DPRK, on May 10, 1951.]]&lt;br /&gt;
Virtually all of the major cities in DPRK were severely damaged and hundreds of thousands of civilians killed by U.S. saturation bombing during the war. The tonnage of bombs dropped on the north was about the same as the total dropped by the U.S. against Japan during the Second World War. By 1952, the bombing was so complete that the U.S. Air Force had run out of targets. According to an AP News article, the U.S. dropped 635,000 tons of bombs on Korea during the war, most of it in the north, including 32,500 tons of [[napalm]]. In the present day, DPRK citizens continue to find unexploded ordinance and be injured by old bombs that were dropped by the US and UN forces, and have to evacuate areas and send in bomb squads where such bombs are found, as well as educate citizens, especially children, about the explosives.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Talmadge, Eric. [https://apnews.com/article/international-news-asia-pacific-ap-top-news-north-korea-dd6256bad51e458cb2e8a1bf64b5c2b6 “64 Years after Korean War, North Still Digging up Bombs.”] AP NEWS. Associated Press. April 22, 2021. [https://web.archive.org/web/20230313163201/https://apnews.com/article/international-news-asia-pacific-ap-top-news-north-korea-dd6256bad51e458cb2e8a1bf64b5c2b6 Archived] 2023-03-13.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
US sanctions on DPRK began in conjunction with the 1950 escalation of the war, with the US imposing an export ban on DPRK and forbidding financial transactions by or on behalf of DPRK. This began with U.S. President [[Harry S. Truman]] ordering naval blockade of Korean coast and imposing a total trade embargo against the DPRK in June of 1950. This was followed by the Trading with the Enemy Act in December 1950, to terminate all US economic contacts with the DPRK and freezing its assets. Truman also imposed an embargo against China, freezing Chinese assets in US at this time. In 1952, an embargo was imposed on all exports of industrial equipment and raw materials.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:2&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Gary Clyde Hufbauer (PIIE), Jeffrey J. Schott (PIIE), Kimberly Ann Elliott (PIIE) and Barbara Oegg (PIIE). [https://www.piie.com/commentary/speeches-papers/case-50-1-and-93-1 “US and UN v. North Korea: Case 50-1 and 93-1.”] 2016. Peterson Institute for International Economics. May 1, 2008. [https://web.archive.org/web/20220909082604/https://www.piie.com/commentary/speeches-papers/case-50-1-and-93-1 Archived] 2022-09-09.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
‌&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Post-Fatherland Liberation War===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Pyongyang after U.S. Air Force bombing.jpg|thumb|Pyongyang after its destruction by U.S. Air Force bombing during the war.]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Chollima monument at night.jpg|thumb|The Chollima Monument at night, with the [[Pyongyang]] skyline in the background.]]&lt;br /&gt;
Following the war, the people of DPRK were faced with the task of converting the armistice into a lasting peace, rebuilding the destroyed economy as soon as possible, improving the people&#039;s living conditions, and strengthening the country politically, economically, and militarily as the base of the Korean revolution and converting it into a powerful material force for the reunification of Korea. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The sixth plenum of the Central Committee of the Korean Workers&#039; Party was called on August 5, 1953 to consider these pressing tasks. A decision was made to promote postwar rehabilitation and development of the people&#039;s economy in three basic stages, according to a proposal by Kim II Sung. The first stage would be a period of six months to a year in which preparations and adjustments would be made for general rehabilitation. In the second stage, a Three Year Plan would be carried out to recover the economy to pre-war levels. In the third stage, a Five Year Plan would be worked out to complete the first stage of industrialization, to lay the foundation for socialist industrialization.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:9&amp;quot; /&amp;gt; Author Kim Han Gil writes that the general task of laying the foundations of socialism was largely defined in two aspects: [[Relations of production|production relations]] and [[productive forces]]. In the first aspect, the task was to transform all the relations of production along socialist lines. In the second aspect the task was to establish the solid foundation of an independent national economy while laying the foundation for industrialization.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Kim Han Gil. [https://archive.org/details/ModernHistoryOfKorea/mode/1up?q=peasant&amp;amp;view=theater &amp;quot;Modern History of Korea.&amp;quot;] Foreign Languages Publishing House, Pyongyang, Korea, 1979.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A focus was placed on developing heavy industry as a priority, while simultaneously developing light industry and agriculture. Heavy industry was needed in order to maintain an independent national economy and to make the development of light industry and agriculture possible, while light industry and agriculture were necessary for improving the living conditions of the people, impoverished by the wartime destruction.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:9&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After nine months, the first stage of the three-stage recovery and development plan was successfully carried out. During this stage, several thousands of temporary houses were built in the towns and countryside and rehabilitation and construction in the countryside were started. Prices were lowered, cities began being rebuilt, factories were restored and repaired, and various industrial and agricultural enterprises went into operation, beginning with the Kangson Steel Works, Songjin Steel Works, Sunghori Cement Factory and Komusan Cement Factory, with various enterprises in light industry such as Nampo Glass Factory and Pyongyang Spinning Mill being prepared for full-scale operation.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:9&amp;quot; /&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following this preparatory stage, the Party proposed a Three Year Plan for 1954-1956, the second stage of the recovery and development plan adopted after the war&#039;s end. The Three Year Plan aimed to restore the economy to pre-war levels, further raise the peoples&#039; living standards, as well as correct the distortions of the economy resulting from the Japanese colonial period, and to continue developing heavy industry to lay a basis for socialist industrialization. The plan aimed to increase industrial production beyond 1949 levels, to produce grain at 1949 levels (the highest recorded previous grain production), further mechanization of agriculture, and to double the output of foodstuff and daily necessities compared to 1949 levels, as well as a five-fold increase in the production of cotton fabrics and a three-fold increase in production of rubber shoes. According to &#039;&#039;Modern Korea&#039;&#039;, these aims were met in two years and four months, and by the end of January 1955, industrial production of state-run and cooperative enterprises exceeded the level set for 1956 in the Three Year Plan. Additionally, on the basis of results accomplished during an experimental period in 1953-1954, the trend toward agricultural cooperatives was phased into a mass movement in 1956, and by the end of February 1956, 14,651 agricultural cooperatives were organized, comprising 65.2% of total farm households and accounting for 62.1% of the total land under cultivation.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:9&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After the armistice agreement, the US continued to prohibit all US economic contacts with DPRK in line with its general strategic controls against socialist countries.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:2&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1988, South Korean and the US eased isolation of People&#039;s Korea by opening bilateral dialogue and allowing limited export of goods to the North for humanitarian purposes. Some travel restrictions were also lifted on a case-by-case basis. However, in that same year, DPRK was added to the [[U.S. State Department]] [[State Sponsors of Terrorism]] list.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[https://nodutdol.org/sanctions-of-empire/ &amp;quot;제국의 제재 - Sanctions of Empire.&amp;quot;] Nodutdol. October 20, 2020. [https://nodutdol.org/wp-content/uploads/2020/10/Sanctions-of-Empire.pdf PDF]. [https://web.archive.org/web/20220520095404/https://nodutdol.org/wp-content/uploads/2020/10/Sanctions-of-Empire.pdf Archive].&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;[https://www.state.gov/reports/country-reports-on-terrorism-2019/democratic-peoples-republic-of-korea/ “Democratic People’s Republic of Korea.”] United States Department of State.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A unified team under the name Korea (KOR) competed in 1991 World Table Tennis Championships and FIFA World Youth Championship with athletes from both North and South Korea. In 1991, the team used the Unification Flag and the anthem &amp;quot;Arirang&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1992, the ROK announced suspension of the &amp;quot;Team Spirit&amp;quot; military training exercise normally conducted each year in conjunction with US forces stationed in South Korea. On January 22, US Undersecretary of State Arnold Kanter and Korean Workers&#039; Party Secretary Kim Yong Sun held the first of a series of bilateral talks, focusing on the future of US–People&#039;s Korean relations and unification issues on the peninsula. However, following difficulties regarding the Joint Nuclear Control Committee, the US and ROK decided to conduct the Team Spirit exercise after all, and DPRK refused to negotiate bilateral nuclear inspections unless the Team Spirit exercise would be cancelled. By 1993, the US and South Korea confirmed that Team Spirit would proceed as planned, and DPRK ended negotiations.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:2&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In July 1993, President [[Bill Clinton]], during a visit to the South Korean side of the DMZ, warned that the United States would respond to DPRK use of nuclear weapons with massive conventional or nuclear retaliation. In later January/early February of 1994, US officials in Washington let it be known they were considering transferring Patriot missiles to South Korea as a defensive move. In Seoul, a Defense Ministry official called for the resumption of Team Spirit unless the North agreed to full nuclear inspections. The US warned DPRK that unless it would allow inspections, it would bring a sanctions resolution before the UN Security Council.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:2&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In July 1994, Kim Il-sung passed away at the age of 82.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Arduous March===&lt;br /&gt;
The period of economic crisis, floods, and famine in DPRK known as the Arduous March (Korean: 고난의 행군) lasted from approximately 1994 to 1998. Compounding factors such as the [[overthrow of the Soviet Union]] (and subsequent worldwide economic shifts), unprecedented natural disasters, and economic sanctions imposed on the DPRK all contributed to the severity of the crisis at that time. The thriving Korean economy, which had exceeded south Korea&#039;s in production of electricity, coal, fertilizer, machine tools and steel even into the 1980s, was thrown into turmoil as it faced these factors in the 1990s.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Kim, Crystal. [https://www.liberationnews.org/north-koreans-mourn-death-of-html/ “North Koreans Mourn Death of Leader Kim Jong Il.”] Liberation News, 22 Dec. 2011, Accessed 10 Apr. 2023. [https://web.archive.org/web/20230410044940/https://www.liberationnews.org/north-koreans-mourn-death-of-html/ Archived] 2023-04-10.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;[https://www.north-korea-travel.com/north-korean-history.html “North Korean History 1980s &amp;amp; 1990s | KTG® Tours.”] North-Korea-Travel.com.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The imperialist United States and its allies took advantage of this period, attempting to make the situation more deadly and more economically devastating via economic sanctions, to push DPRK into total collapse. It was at this time that the &amp;quot;military-first&amp;quot; policy of Songun (Korean: 선군; Hanja: 先軍) was initiated under the leadership of Kim Jong Il, in response to the constant threat of military aggression from the United States aimed at DPRK&#039;s destruction. The policy came of the determination that maintaining a strong military was essential for the defense of the country and the protection of its socialist system, and that the military was the backbone of the revolution and that it was necessary to give military affairs priority in order to proceed with socialist construction.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;[https://exploredprk.com/articles/the-evolution-of-dprks-socialist-lifestyle/ &amp;quot;The Evolution of DPRK’s Socialist Lifestyle.&amp;quot;] Explore DPRK. [https://web.archive.org/web/20230928110755/https://exploredprk.com/articles/the-evolution-of-dprks-socialist-lifestyle/ Archived] 1012-09-28.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:14&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Ri Jong Chol. &amp;quot;Songun Politics in Korea.&amp;quot; Foreign Languages Publishing House. Pyongyang, Korea, Juche 101 (2012). [https://web.archive.org/web/20230523072842/https://kkfonline.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/09/Songun-Politics-In-Korea.pdf &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[PDF]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;[https://www.tongiltimes.com/news/articleView.html?idxno=1435 &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;quot;[북현대사] 선군정치의 시작.&amp;quot; (&amp;quot;[North Modern History] The beginning of Songun politics.&amp;quot;)&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;] 한반도정론: 북 바로알기. 통일시대. 2023-02-27. [https://web.archive.org/web/20230927173059/https://www.tongiltimes.com/news/articleView.html?idxno=1435 Archived] 2023-09-27.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During this time, DPRK deployed the People&#039;s Army to major construction sites as well as rural areas for flood recovery and food production, in order to overcome the Arduous March in each region and sector. Notably, they were able to construct important infrastructure such as the Anbyon Youth Power Station at this time, erected by the service personnel of the People&#039;s Army in spite of harsh environmental conditions. Rather than yielding to the economic pressures imposed by the U.S. in combination with the environmental disasters and the worldwide economic upheavals, DPRK endured the hardships, defended the socialist system, and built structures of lasting value.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;[https://www.tongiltimes.com/news/articleView.html?idxno=1421&amp;amp;page=2&amp;amp;total=125 &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;quot;[북현대사] 고난의 행군과 강계정신&amp;quot; (&amp;quot;[North Modern History] Arduous March and Ganggye Spirit&amp;quot;)&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;], 한반도정론: 북 바로알기. 통일시대. 2023-02-18. [https://web.archive.org/web/20230927171532/https://www.tongiltimes.com/news/articleView.html?idxno=1421&amp;amp;page=2&amp;amp;total=125 Archived] 2023-09-27.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;[https://archive.org/details/juche-destiny/page/n75/mode/2up &amp;quot;Man&#039;s Destiny and Juche Idea.&amp;quot;] Foreign Languages Publishing House. Pyongyang, Korea, Juche 101 (2012).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:14&amp;quot; /&amp;gt; The end of the Arduous March was declared in October 2000.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;[https://www.tongiltimes.com/news/articleView.html?idxno=1544 &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;quot;[북현대사] 36년 만에 열린 조선로동당 제7차 대회&amp;quot; (&amp;quot;[North Modern History] The 7th Congress of the Workers&#039; Party of Korea held after 36 years&amp;quot;).&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;] 한반도정론: 북 바로알기. 통일시대. 2023-05-06. [https://web.archive.org/web/20230928173958/https://www.tongiltimes.com/news/articleView.html?idxno=1544 Archived] 2023-09-28.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===6.15 Declaration and ROK&#039;s &amp;quot;Sunshine Policy&amp;quot;===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:President Kim Dae-jung and Chairman Kim Jong-il join hands at Inter-Korean summit.jpg|thumb|[[Republic of Korea|South Korean]] President [[Kim Dae-jung]] and Chairman [[Kim Jong-il]] join hands at the 2000 Inter-Korean summit, which resulted in the 6.15 Inter-Korean Joint Declaration.]]&lt;br /&gt;
The South Korean policy towards DPRK from the late 1990s to mid 2000s is known as the &amp;quot;Sunshine Policy&amp;quot; and is primarily associated with the [[Kim Dae-jung]] administration (1998–2003) and the [[Roh Moo-hyun]] administration (2003–2008). During this time, a notable attitude of reconciliation between north and south Korea was expressed by south Korean leadership.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On June 13-15, 2000  leaders of the ROK and DPRK meet for the first time since the war. South Korean president Kim Dae-jung and DPRK leader Kim Jong-il signed an agreement calling for family reunions, economic cooperation, social and cultural exchanges and follow-up governmental contacts between the North and South to ease tensions.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:2&amp;quot; /&amp;gt; This is known as the June 15th North–South Joint Declaration or the 6.15 Inter-Korean Joint Declaration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The date &amp;quot;6.15&amp;quot; would subsequently become a popular reference among the Korean reunification movement. Additionally, the phrase &#039;&#039;uri minjok kkiri&#039;&#039; (Hangeul: 우리 민족끼리), which can be translated as &amp;quot;among our nation&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;between our people&amp;quot; can be found in the joint document signed by Kim Dae Jung and Kim Jong Il at the 6.15 talks. The phrase implies the idea of solving the questions of unification and peace on the Korean peninsula without the influence or meddling of outside powers. The numbers &amp;quot;6.15&amp;quot; and the phrase &amp;quot;uri minjok kkiri&amp;quot; can frequently be seen and heard in Korean unification-oriented media, publications, and activism. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2000s–present===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Kim-Jiang.jpg|thumb|Kim Jong-il with [[People&#039;s Republic of China|Chinese]] president, [[Jiang Zemin]] in 2000.]]&lt;br /&gt;
In 2002, President Bush&#039;s State of the Union address singled out [[Islamic Republic of Iran|Iran]], [[Republic of Iraq|Iraq]] and DPRK as the so-called &amp;quot;[[Axis of Evil]]&amp;quot; for their supposed pursuit of weapons of mass destruction.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:2&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
According to Nodutdol, in 2018, 3,968 people in the DPRK, who were mostly children under the age of 5, died as a result of shortages and delays to UN aid programs caused by sanctions.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:3&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Talks between General secretary [[Kim Jong-un]] and U.S. [[President of the United states|President]] [[Donald Trump]] began on June of 2019 to discuss disarmament and potential reunification with the [[Republic of Korea]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In January 2020, South Korean President [[Moon Jae-in]] expressed interest in developing tourism to People&#039;s Korea, but the US ambassador Harry Harris blocked this effort. Harris claimed that &amp;quot;independent&amp;quot; tourism plans would have to undergo US consultation. He emphasized that the items inside South Korean tourists&#039; luggage could violate sanctions, demonstrating the extent of US interference in inter-Korean affairs.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:3&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Yoon Suk Yeol]]&#039;s presidency in the Republic of Korea (in office 2022-2025) marked a turn away from rapprochement with the North. Yoon abandoned Sunshine Policy and strengthened ties with the US, shown most overtly in his April visit to the Pentagon.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{Web citation|author=Jim Garamone|newspaper=U.S. Department of Defense|title=South Korean President Yoon Visits Pentagon, Discusses Deterrence|date=2023-04-27|url=https://www.defense.gov/News/News-Stories/Article/Article/3377397/south-korean-president-yoon-visits-pentagon-discusses-deterrence/|retrieved=2024-3-3}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Since 2022, the Republic of Korea has stepped up joint military exercises with the United States,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{Web citation|author=Hyonhee Shin|newspaper=Reuters|title=Defence chiefs of U.S., S.Korea vow to step up drills to counter North|date=2023-01-31|url=https://www.reuters.com/world/austin-south-korea-yoon-seeks-greater-us-nuclear-assurances-2023-01-30/|retrieved=2024-3-3}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; covertly sent artillery shells to Ukraine (via the United States to avoid official state policy against sending weapons to an active warzone),&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{Web citation|author=Lee Bon-young, Kwon Hyuk-chul|newspaper=Hankyoreh|title=WaPo: Seoul supplied more shells to Ukraine than all of Europe|date=2023-12-06|url=https://english.hani.co.kr/arti/english_edition/e_international/1119320|retrieved=2024-3-3}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and suspended a military agreement with the North designed to deescalate tensions.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{Web citation|author=Jean Mackenzie|newspaper=BBC|title=North Korea spy satellite: South partially suspends military deal after launch|date=2023-11-22|url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-asia-67494007|retrieved=2024-3-3}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In response to the ROK&#039;s apparent inseparability from US occupation, the DPRK announced in January that it was ending its long-standing policy of peaceful reunification with the ROK.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{Web citation|author=Justin McCurry|newspaper=The Guardian|title=Unification with South Korea no longer possible, says Kim Jong-un|date=2024-01-15|url=https://www.theguardian.com/world/2024/jan/16/unification-with-south-korea-no-longer-possible-says-kim-jong-un|retrieved=2024-3-3}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; This demonstrates a recognition that a &amp;quot;[[Library:The governance of China/Chapter 10: &amp;quot;One Country, Two Systems&amp;quot;|one country two systems]]&amp;quot; style reunification with the South is no longer possible, as the North would never accept such a reunification if the US military was still allowed to occupy the peninsula. Reunification is only possible with the end of US military occupation and dismantling of the ROK state. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Nuclear weapons program ====&lt;br /&gt;
The DPRK joined the [[Treaty on the Non-Proliferation of Nuclear Weapons|Nuclear Non-Proliferation Treaty]] in 1985. It withdrew in 1993 according to the terms of the treaty in order to preserve its sovereignty against U.S. aggression.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:11022&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{Citation|author=Stephen Gowans|year=2018|title=Patriots, Traitors and Empires: The Story of Korea’s Struggle for Freedom|chapter=Byungjin|page=208–214|pdf=https://ipfs.io/ipfs/bafykbzaced4iiga4ngtxusr2civjxewbili5jne2sbpefbx2s3im2kphattzc?filename=Stephen%20Gowans%20-%20Patriots%2C%20Traitors%20and%20Empires_%20The%20Story%20of%20Korea%E2%80%99s%20Struggle%20for%20Freedom-Baraka%20Books%20%282018%29.pdf|city=Montreal|publisher=Baraka Books|isbn=9781771861427|lg=https://libgen.rs/book/index.php?md5=8435F6FF91279531705764823FDC2A7F}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since the beginning of the DPRK nuclear tests in 2003, the [[George W. Bush|Bush]] and [[Barack Obama|Obama]] regimes respectively lifted some sanctions to facilitate negotiations around DPRK denuclearization, and then reinstated them when the negotiations failed to produce the results desired by the US.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:3&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The DPRK detonated its first nuclear bomb on 2006 October 9. The invasions of [[Republic of Iraq|Iraq]] and [[Libyan Arab Jamahiriya (1977–2011)|Libya]] proved this decision correct when those countries fell to [[North Atlantic Treaty Organization|NATO]] occupation after giving up their nuclear programs.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:11022&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Economy==&lt;br /&gt;
The DPRK has maintained one of the most centralized economies in the world since the 1940s. For several decades, it has followed the Soviet pattern of five-year plans with the ultimate goal of achieving self-sufficiency. DPRK is also one of the most sanctioned countries in the world, and has been subject to sanctions since just after its foundation. The economy is heavily nationalized. Food and housing are extensively subsidized by the state, education and healthcare are free, and the payment of taxes was officially abolished in 1974.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{Web citation|author=Zak Brown|newspaper=Anti-Imperialism.org|title=Towards a concrete analysis of the DPRK|date=2023-11-18|url=https://anti-imperialism.org/2013/11/18/towards-a-concrete-analysis-of-the-dprk/|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200118135119/https://anti-imperialism.org/2013/11/18/towards-a-concrete-analysis-of-the-dprk/|archive-date=2020-01-18|retrieved=2023-03-12}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The DPRK follows policy of &#039;&#039;[[Byungjin]]&#039;&#039;, meaning it simultaneously develops its nuclear weapons program and the economy.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{News citation|author=Ankit Panda|newspaper=[[The Diplomat]]|title=Is North Korea’s ‘Byungjin Line’ on the US-China Strategic Agenda?|url=https://thediplomat.com/2015/06/is-north-koreas-byungjin-line-on-the-us-china-strategic-agenda/|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220321104122/https://thediplomat.com/2015/06/is-north-koreas-byungjin-line-on-the-us-china-strategic-agenda/|archive-date=2022-03-21|retrieved=2022-04-24}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A 2020 book published in DPRK summarizes the DPRK&#039;s economic line of development as follows: &amp;quot;The DPRK has consistently adhered to the line of building an independent national economy in economic construction. In Juche 42 (1953) it put put forward the basic line of socialist economic construction, developing heavy industry preferentially and ensuring the simultaneous development of light industry and agriculture. True to this line, it laid solid material and technological foundations for an independent national economy. In the 1960s when the hostile forces’ moves of aggression became undisguised, the WPK advanced the line of simultaneously carrying on economic construction and building up defences, thus establishing a socialist industrial state while increasing its defence capabilities.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;[https://archive.org/details/dprk-photobook/page/n53/mode/1up &amp;quot;DPRK Photobook.&amp;quot;] Foreign Languages Publishing House, Printing Plant of Foreign Languages Publishing House, October Juche 109 (2020).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
According to DPRK&#039;s constitution, the DPRK regards the steady improvement of the material and cultural standards of the people as &amp;quot;the supreme principle of its activities&amp;quot;, and holds that the state &amp;quot;shall provide all the working people with every condition for obtaining food, clothing and housing.&amp;quot; Furthermore, the constitution states that DPRK&#039;s economy relies on socialist relations of production and on the foundation of an independent national economy, with the means of production owned in some cases by the state and in other cases owned collectively by social cooperative organizations. The eventual goal of the DPRK is to &amp;quot;combine the two forms of property in an organic way&amp;quot;, and to gradually transform the means of production owned by cooperative organizations into the property of the people as a whole (i.e., into state property), based on the voluntary will of the social cooperative organizations&#039; members. While the means of production are under the ownership of the working class in the form of state property and social cooperative organizations, property that is owned and consumed by individual citizens is also legally protected, including products of individual sideline activities such as products from kitchen gardens and income from other legal economic activities. This type of personal property is protected by the state and guaranteed by law the right for people to inherit it.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:11&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[https://en.wikisource.org/wiki/Socialist_Constitution_of_the_Democratic_People%27s_Republic_of_Korea_(2019) &amp;quot;Socialist Constitution of the Democratic People&#039;s Republic of Korea (2019).&amp;quot;] Wikisource. [https://manoa.hawaii.edu/koreanstudies/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/DPRK-Constitution-2019-EN.pdf &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[PDF]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;] on manoa.hawaii.edu.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Socialist economic management ===&lt;br /&gt;
Throughout DPRK&#039;s development, systems of socialist economic management and methods of work have been developed, adapted to the country&#039;s particular needs. Notable among them is the Taean (or Daean) work system, an industrial management system which grew out of the Chongsanri agricultural management system. Each system has been described by Korean author and politician [[Kim Byong Sik]] as implementations of the [[mass line]] in production, which were developed in response to DPRK&#039;s changing needs as it transitioned away from individualistic, bureaucratic capitalist-style management toward collective socialist-style management in production. As Kim Byong Sik explains, &amp;quot;the Daean work system means, in a word, to embody the mass line in economic control; to get rid of survivals of capitalism in economic management such as bureaucracy, over-centralization and individualism, and to implement the Chongsanri spirit and method, enabling workers to contribute to the maximum in accelerating [[socialist construction]].&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:9&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Kim Byong Sik]]. [https://archive.org/details/ModernKoreaKimByongSik/ &amp;quot;Modern Korea: The Socialist North, Revolutionary Perspectives in the South, and Unification.&amp;quot;] International Publishers, 1970.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each method is named after a location in which it saw early implementation: Chongsanri refers to Chongsanri Cooperative Farm in Kangso county, South Pyongan province, while the Taean work system is named after Taean Electric Machine Factory.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:9&amp;quot; /&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kim Il Sung noted that in the DPRK&#039;s early development, the factory management system &amp;quot;still retained many capitalist elements&amp;quot; despite being socialist. These lingering capitalist elements in management led to bureaucracy, departmentalism, and individualism hampering the activity and initiative of the workers, as well as led to a lack of cooperative spirit between workshops and to insufficient worker participation in management. Quoted in Kim Byong Sik&#039;s &#039;&#039;Modern Korea&#039;&#039;, Kim Il Sung described the problem as follows:  &amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;It must be admitted that the old system of factory management, though socialist, still retained many capitalist elements. Bureaucracy, departmentalism, and individualism were found in large measure. Superiors shouted commands at their subordinates in a bureaucratic manner instead of going to help them; a spirit of cooperation between workshops was lacking; and among some people there was a tendency toward individualism of the “You attend to your business, I’ll stick to mine!” variety. Therefore, under the old system of work, it was not possible to give full play to the activity and initiative of workers, people busied themselves for nothing, and no sizable achievements were made in production.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:9&amp;quot; /&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;Kim Byong Sik adds that in factories administered exclusively by managers, the lingering capitalist elements were the most concentrated. In such factories, workers lacked interest in whether production was going well or not because they did not have sufficient participation in management. The managers who held sole decision-making powers engaged in arbitrary control, subjective discretion, and other bureaucratic methods, and so the workers felt their job was to &amp;quot;work for eight hours, as assigned, and then go home&amp;quot; which gave little room for stimulating their &amp;quot;political, moral and material interest&amp;quot; in their work or giving full play to their creativity and talent. Therefore it was necessary to bring factory management in line with a socialist management system. In contrast with the lingering capitalist style of management, in the Daean work system, the people cooperate with each other and work units help one another in economic management, with the essential purpose of the Daean work system being to enable people to give maximum play to their revolutionary enthusiasm and creative talent, to increase production, and to control and to manage the economy through promoting comradely accommodation and close cooperation among producers and producing units. Kim Byong Sik also notes that the Daean work system, as a socialist management system, is a prototype of communist economic management, stating &amp;quot;it is clear that economic management in a communist society will take the form of collective management by millions of conscious, communist working people.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:9&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Special Economic Zones ===&lt;br /&gt;
Foreign trade surpassed pre-crisis levels in 2005 and continues to expand. The DPRK has a number of special economic zones (SEZs) and Special Administrative Regions where foreign companies can operate with tax and tariff incentives while DPRK establishments gain access to improved technology.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{News citation|title=Special Economic Zones in the DPRK|url=https://www.ncnk.org/resources/briefing-papers/all-briefing-papers/special-economic-zones-dprk}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{News citation|title=North Korea’s Special Economic Zones: Plans vs. Progress|url=https://www.38north.org/reports/2015/11/nk-sez-plans-vs-progress/}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Economic sanctions ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;See also: [[Economic sanctions#Democratic People&#039;s Republic of Korea]]&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The US first imposed sanctions on DPRK during the 1950s.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:2&amp;quot; /&amp;gt; The United States has repeatedly targeted the DPRK with sanctions, citing its nuclear weapons program as their reason.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{News citation|newspaper=[[TeleSur]]|title=US Reps Pass &amp;quot;Harshest Sanctions Ever&amp;quot; Against North Korea|date=2017-10-25|url=https://wp.telesurtv.net/english/news/US-Reps-Pass-Harshest-Sanctions-Ever-Against-North-Korea-20171025-0006.html|retrieved=2022-04-24}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Following the country’s 2006 nuclear test, the US, EU, and others added more stringent sanctions, which have periodically intensified since then. In 2017, sanctions imposed by the UN caused thousands of DPRK workers who had been working abroad to be forced to return to DPRK as well as led to the closure of numerous DPRK companies and joint ventures.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;[https://www.asianews.it/news-en/North-Korean-workers-leave-China-because-of-UN-sanctions-41942.html “North Korean Workers Leave China because of UN Sanctions.”] Asianews.it. 2017. [https://web.archive.org/web/20220909073331/https://www.asianews.it/news-en/North-Korean-workers-leave-China-because-of-UN-sanctions-41942.html Archived] 2022-09-09.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Sanctions now target oil imports, and cover most finance and trade, and the country’s key minerals sector.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Galant, Michael. [https://cepr.net/cepr-sanctions-watch-may-june-2022/ “CEPR Sanctions Watch, May-June 2022”] Center for Economic and Policy Research. July 8, 2022. [https://web.archive.org/web/20220907145545/https://cepr.net/cepr-sanctions-watch-may-june-2022/ Archived] 2022-09-07&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; However, 49 countries, including [[Republic of Cuba|Cuba]], [[Islamic Republic of Iran|Iran]], and [[Syrian Arab Republic|Syria]] have violated these sanctions and traded with the DPRK anyways.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{News citation|author=Rishi Iyengar|newspaper=[[CNN]]|title=Report: 49 countries have been busting sanctions on North Korea|date=2017-12-06|url=https://money.cnn.com/2017/12/06/news/north-korea-sanctions-countries-violation/index.html|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210508065837/https://money.cnn.com/2017/12/06/news/north-korea-sanctions-countries-violation/index.html|archive-date=2021-05-08|retrieved=2022-04-24}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
According to Foreign Policy in Focus, sanctions on DPRK have &amp;quot;demonstrably failed.&amp;quot; FPIF notes that sanctions didn’t deter DPRK from pursuing a nuclear weapons program, nor have they been subsequently responsible for pushing it toward denuclearization, and adds that DPRK has been under sanctions for nearly its entire existence and it doesn’t have a strong international economic presence that can be penalized, and &amp;quot;has been willing to suffer the effects of isolation in order to build what it considers to be a credible deterrence against foreign attack.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Feffer, John. 2021. [https://fpif.org/the-problem-of-sanctions-against-north-korea/ “The Problem of Sanctions against North Korea.”] Foreign Policy in Focus. November 22, 2021. [https://web.archive.org/web/20220909072424/https://fpif.org/the-problem-of-sanctions-against-north-korea/ Archived] 2022-09-09. ‌&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Government==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Central government===&lt;br /&gt;
The highest organ of state power is the [[Supreme People&#039;s Assembly]], which is elected for a term of five years. It elects a Speaker and Deputy Speaker to preside over its sessions. While the Supreme People&#039;s Assembly is not in session, the Presidium is the highest organ of state power. It consists of a President, Vice-Presidents, and other members. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Supreme People&#039;s Assembly also elects a [[State Affairs Commission]] consisting of a Chairman, multiple Vice-Chairmen, and other members and a Cabinet consisting of a Premier, Vice-Premiers, Chairmen, Ministers, and other members. The Premier organizes the work of the cabinet and is the head of government of the DPRK.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:6&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{Citation|author=12th Supreme People&#039;s Assembly|year=2016|title=Socialist Constitution of the Democratic People&#039;s Republic of Korea|title-url=https://en.wikisource.org/wiki/Socialist_Constitution_of_the_Democratic_People%27s_Republic_of_Korea_(2016)|chapter=State Organs}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Local government===&lt;br /&gt;
Provinces, cities, and counties elect local people&#039;s assemblies for a term of four years. The local people&#039;s assembly elects a speaker to preside over its sessions and a local people&#039;s committee. Local people&#039;s assemblies and committees are subordinate to the Supreme People&#039;s Assembly and Cabinet.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:6&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Administrative divisions ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Provinces of Korea.png|thumb|333x333px|Provinces of Korea.]]&lt;br /&gt;
DPRK is divided into nine provinces, the direct-administered capital city, and three special cities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The nine provinces (Korean: 도; Hanja: 道) of DPRK are [[Chagang Province|Chagang]], [[North Hamgyong Province|North Hamgyong]], [[South Hamgyong Province|South Hamgyong]], [[North Hwanghae Province|North Hwanghae]], [[South Hwanghae Province|South Hwanghae]], [[Kangwon Province|Kangwon]], [[North Pyongan Province|North Pyongan]], [[South Pyongan Province|South Pyongan]], and [[Ryanggang Province|Ryanggang]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pyongyang is designated as the capital city, or the direct-administered city (Korean: 직할시; Hanja: 直轄市) while three other cities, namely [[Rason]], [[Nampo]], [[Kaesong]], are special cities (Korean: 특별시; Hanja: 特別市).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A 2014 demographic survey of DPRK, conducted as a joint project between DPRK&#039;s Central Bureau of Statistics and the [[United Nations]] Population Fund, found that the majority of the country&#039;s population resides in four contiguous provinces: South Pyongan (17% of population), Pyongyang (14%), South Hamgyong (13%), and North Pyongan (12%). Together, these four contiguous provinces account for over 55% of the country&#039;s population. The highest population density area was in the capital city of Pyongyang, while the lowest population density was in Ryanggang. It was also found that more than six out of ten persons reside in urban areas in the country, at 61.2% of the population, while 38.8% of the population lives in rural areas.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Central Bureau of Statistics, Pyongyang and United Nations Population Fund. [https://archive.org/details/2014SDHSReportEFinal &amp;quot;Democratic People&#039;s Republic of Korea Socio-Economic, Demographic and Health Survey, 2014.&amp;quot;] December, Juche 104 (2015).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
DPRK&#039;s method of administrative division is similar to that in south Korea, as both are based on the common system in Korea as a whole, having its roots in the mid-Goryo dynasty in the 11th century.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;DPRK Explained. [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=CWmNve0oUkU “DPRK Provinces EXPLAINED - Part One | North Korea’s Provinces.”] YouTube Video.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As a result of the division of Korea, three provinces, namely Hwanghae, Gyeonggi, and Kangwon, were split due to being on the line of division. The smaller portions of post-division Hwanghae and Gyeonggi provinces were mostly incorporated into nearby provinces, with the larger part of Hwanghae ending up in DPRK and the larger part of Gyeonggi in south Korea. However, Kangwon was divided roughly in half, and as a result, both DPRK and south Korea have a Kangwon province, romanized as Kangwon in DPRK and Gangwon in the south.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Foreign relations==&lt;br /&gt;
Article 17 of the DPRK&#039;s constitution states that independence, peace, and friendship are the basic ideals of the foreign relations of the DPRK. Additionally, the constitution holds that the state &amp;quot;shall establish diplomatic as well as political, economic and cultural relations with all friendly countries, on the principles of complete equality, independence, mutual respect, non-interference in each other’s affairs and mutual benefit&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;promote unity with people all over the world who defend their independence, and resolutely support and encourage the struggles of all people who oppose all forms of aggression and interference and fight for their countries’ independence and national and class emancipation.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:11&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
DPRK does not reject foreign exchange, nor reject foreign knowledge, nor adhere to an [[Isolationism|isolationist]] policy, nor does it aim to promote national [[chauvinism]].&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{Citation|author=Kim Il Sung|title=Collected Works Volume 17|chapter=On Further Developing the Chollima Workteam Movement|page=276|quote=In educating the working people in socialist patriotism, care should be taken to prevent the growth of tendencies to national chauvinism and restorationism. One may be apt to head for chauvinism on the plea of building an independent national economy by one’s own efforts and promoting national pride. If we steer in the direction of chauvinism as Regent Taewongun pursued a policy of national isolation, we will come to reject international exchange and advanced science and technology from other countries and, accordingly, hinder the development of our country.|pdf=https://www.marxists.org/archive/kim-il-sung/cw/17.pdf}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Rather, DPRK upholds [[proletarian internationalism]], [[national liberation]], and [[anti-imperialism]], and aims for international exchanges based in mutual respect. Speaking on DPRK&#039;s attitude toward international exchange and the study and adoption of foreign knowledge, Kim Il Sung clarifies that it is not DPRK&#039;s position to reject foreign things, but rather to adopt them critically and non-[[Dogmatism|dogmatically]], with Korea&#039;s sovereignty and particular conditions in mind: &amp;quot;What we are opposing is the [[Nihilism|nihilistic]] attitude of looking down upon our nation, while looking up to foreign countries, as well as the dogmatist attitude of uncritically swallowing up foreign things in disregard of the actual conditions of our country.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Kim Il Sung. [https://www.marxists.org/archive/kim-il-sung/cw/17.pdf &amp;quot;On Improving Education in Universities.&amp;quot;] April 18, 1963. Collected Works, Volume 17.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kim Il-sung has said that completing the Korean revolution is the internationalist duty of the Korean people, and explained that, in the modern conditions where imperialism and borders still exist (as opposed to a stateless, communist future), and in conditions where Korea currently remains divided and antagonized by imperialism, DPRK&#039;s socialist patriotism is &amp;quot;indispensable for us who have to drive out the US imperialist aggressors and accomplish the national-liberation revolution&amp;quot;, and that &amp;quot;the Korean revolution is the internationalist duty devolving on the Korean people. For this reason, only when the Korean people satisfactorily carry out the Korean revolution as their first priority, will they be performing their internationalist duty faithfully.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:13&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Kim Il Sung. [https://www.marxists.org/archive/kim-il-sung/cw/17.pdf &amp;quot;Our People&#039;s Army Is an Army of the Working Class, An Army of the Revolution; Class and Political Education Should Be Continuously Strengthened.&amp;quot;] February 8, 1963. Kim Il Sung Collected Works, Volume 17. [https://web.archive.org/web/20230403214034/https://www.marxists.org/archive/kim-il-sung/cw/17.pdf Archived] 2023-04-03.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Opposing chauvinism and promoting proletarian internationalism, Kim Il-sung has emphasized that care should be taken to prevent the growth of national chauvinism when promoting socialist patriotism, explaining that DPRK should not pursue a chauvinist policy or national isolation, and that Koreans should be educated in the spirit of internationalism &amp;quot;to fight in close unity with many other peoples of the world&amp;quot; against imperialism as well as against both right and left opportunism.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Kim Il Sung. [https://www.marxists.org/archive/kim-il-sung/cw/17.pdf &amp;quot;On Strengthening the Work of Factory Party Committees And Further Developing the Chollima Workteam Movement.&amp;quot;] Collected Works Volume 17. May 15, 1963. [https://web.archive.org/web/20230403214034/https://www.marxists.org/archive/kim-il-sung/cw/17.pdf Archived] 2023-04-03.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; While in the present day, defense of national sovereignty and socialist patriotism holds importance in DPRK, Kim Il-sung notes: &amp;quot;Needless to say, it will be another matter after imperialism is completely overthrown and socialism and communism emerge victorious throughout the world in the future, and the boundaries of nations vanish and states cease to exist.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:13&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Support for anti-imperialist liberation ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DPRK Che Guevara poster.png|thumb|Korean poster of [[Ernesto Guevara|Che Guevara]]]]&lt;br /&gt;
The DPRK&#039;s revolutionary government has supported other liberation struggles around the world. The support has at times included material support such as providing weapons and military training to various movements, hosting delegations representing various liberation struggles, as well as gestures and expressions of solidarity such as in speeches at the UN General Assembly and support for liberation movements written about in official DPRK publications. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The DPRK trained two thousand guerrilla fighters from twenty-five countries from the mid-1960s to the late 1980s, including members of the [[Japanese Red Army]], [[Palestinian Liberation Organization]], and the [[Official Irish Republican Army]]. The training in these camps lasted from six to eighteen months, and during that time, the DPRK military taught foreign revolutionaries Korean martial arts. The foreign revolutionaries were also put through training such as running through the mountains at night while carrying one hundred pound sandbags.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:7&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[https://apjjf.org/2015/13/12/Benjamin-Young/4303.html “Juche in the United States: The Black Panther Party’s Relations with North Korea, 1969-1971.”] 2015. The Asia-Pacific Journal: Japan Focus. [https://web.archive.org/web/20230325033325/https://apjjf.org/2015/13/12/Benjamin-Young/4303.html Archived] 2023-03-25. &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
DPRK has supported liberation struggles in [[Africa]] both materially and through expressions of solidarity.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;[https://libya360.wordpress.com/2017/04/17/president-kim-il-sungs-immortal-contributions-to-african-liberation/ President Kim Il Sung’s Immortal Contributions to African Liberation]  APRIL 17, 2017 by Internationalist 360º on libya360.wordpress.com &amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; President Kim Il Sung was a staunch opponent of both [[Republic of South Africa|South African]] and [[Zionism|Zionist]] [[apartheid]].&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:8&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[https://threadreaderapp.com/thread/1006972472015708160.html &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;“Thread by @Uhusofree: ‘a Quick Thread on the DPRK and African and Diaspora Liberation Movements. I Hope It Reaches Someone Who Didn’t Know Before. President Kim Il […].’”&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;] Threadreaderapp.com. Thread Reader. [https://web.archive.org/web/20230325040407/https://threadreaderapp.com/thread/1006972472015708160.html Archived] 2023-03-25.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When [[Kwame Nkrumah]]&#039;s government in [[Republic of Ghana|Ghana]] was overthrown in a CIA-backed coup in 1966, Kim Il-sung sent a letter to Nkrumah shortly afterword, stating, &amp;quot;We are especially enraged at the reactionary coup d’état which took place in Ghana at the instigation of the imperialists [...] The imperialists engineer similar plots and perpetrate subversive activities against progressive countries everywhere. We resolutely condemn the machinations of the imperialists against the just cause of the peoples for national liberation, independence and progress. We express our unreserved support to your Excellency’s determination to fight for the freedom of Ghana on your return to Africa.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Nkrumah, Kwame. [https://archive.org/details/san_0975/page/160/mode/1up?view=theater&amp;amp;q=Pyongyang &#039;&#039;Dark Days in Ghana&#039;&#039;. &amp;quot;Appendix.&amp;quot;] 1968.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On March 31, 1970, nine members of the Japanese Red Army (JRA) hijacked a Japan Air Lines plane and landed it in Pyongyang. These nine members eventually settled in a housing complex on the outskirts of Pyongyang and the DPRK government used the JRA connection to send money and arms to various Third World-oriented organizations, such as the PLO, the [[Red Army Faction]], and the [[Italian Red Brigades]].&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:7&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During the 1980s, the DPRK sent free weapons to Cuba.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{News citation|author=David Iocanangelo|newspaper=Latin Times|title=Fidel Castro Says North Korea Sent Cuba Free Weapons During Cold War|date=2013-08-14|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200118135109/https://www.latintimes.com/fidel-castro-says-north-korea-sent-cuba-free-weapons-during-cold-war-130279|archive-date=2020-01-18}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
DPRK Minister of Foreign Affairs Ri Yong Ho&#039;s 2017 UN General Assembly statements of solidarity with Cuba, [[Bolivarian Republic of Venezuela|Venezuela]], and [[Syrian Arab Republic|Syria]] and condemning [[State of Israel|Israel]]:&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;My delegation takes this opportunity to extend strong support to and solidarity with the Cuban government and people who are fighting to defend national sovereignty and realize international justice against the high-handedness, arbitrariness and unilateral embargo of the U.S. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We also express strong support to and solidarity with the government and people of Venezuela who are fighting to defend the national sovereignty and the cause of socialism. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The unjust and contemptible acts such as turning a blind eye to the heinous acts of Israel while condemning in every manner only the Syrian government fighting to protect its national sovereignty and security should not be tolerated any longer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The DPRK government will certainly defend peace and security of the country with its powerful nuclear deterrence and also contribute to safeguarding world peace and security.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:0&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;The DPRK representative Kim Song at the 2021 UN General Assembly spoke on the DPRK delegation extending &amp;quot;its full support and encouragement to the Cuban government and people who continue to move forward holding aloft the banner of socialism in the face of the U.S. moves to impose illegal sanctions and blockade and to undermine Cuba from within&amp;quot; and expressed &amp;quot;constant support to and solidarity with the independent countries including Syria and [[State of Palestine|Palestine]] and their peoples in their unyielding struggle to defend the national dignity, sovereignty and territorial integrity.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:1&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Support for Black liberation in the United States ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Korean BPP poster.png|thumb|Korean poster of [[Huey P. Newton|Huey Newton]]]]&lt;br /&gt;
Kim Il-sung praised the [[Black Panther Party]] (BPP) for their &amp;quot;just struggle to abolish the cursed system of racial discrimination of the US imperialists&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{Web citation|author=Tania Branigan|newspaper=The Guardian|title=How Black Panthers turned to North Korea in fight against US imperialism|date=2014-06-19|url=https://www.theguardian.com/world/2014/jun/19/black-panthers-north-korea-us-imperialism|archive-url=https://archive.is/yJajx|archive-date=2022-09-13|retrieved=2025-08-21|quote=Meanwhile, the then leader Kim Il-sung hailed the American party’s “just struggle to abolish the cursed system of racial discrimination of the US imperialists”.}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The Black Panther Party sent a delegation to the DPRK to meet with President Kim Il Sung and other officials to exchange ideas.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:8&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;{{Better source needed|helper-text=Twitter is not a reliable source}} Numerous examples of writings in support of the DPRK and against U.S. imperialism can be found in BPP publications, while many articles in support of the BPP and denouncing U.S. imperialism and systemic racism can be found in DPRK publications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to specific support of the BPP, it is common to find DPRK publications calling out and denouncing the United States as racist, and voicing support for Black people and other racial minorities of the U.S. in their struggle against it. For example, DPRK state media commented on the shooting of [[Trayvon Martin]], stating: &amp;quot;The U.S. true colors as a kingdom of racial discrimination was fully revealed by last year’s case that the [[Florida]] Court gave a verdict of not guilty to a white policeman who shot to death an innocent Black boy.&amp;quot; DPRK has also made commentary on the case of [[George Floyd protests|George Floyd]], emphasizing the hypocrisy for the US to preach about human rights while perpetrating racial oppression against its own citizens. An official from Central Committee stated via the state newspaper [[Rodong Sinmun]]: &amp;quot;Demonstrators enraged by the extreme racists throng even to the White House. This is the reality in the U.S. today&amp;quot; and further stated &amp;quot;American liberalism and democracy put the cap of leftist on the demonstrators and threaten to unleash even dogs for suppression.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;[https://www.youngpioneertours.com/dprk-black-civil-rights-movement/ “North Korea and the Black Civil Rights Movement.”] Young Pioneer Tours. December 23, 2020. [https://web.archive.org/web/20221129235716/https://www.youngpioneertours.com/dprk-black-civil-rights-movement/ Archived] 2022-11-29.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===DPRK-US relations===&lt;br /&gt;
The core of US policy toward DPRK has been summarized in a 2008 book from DPRK as follows: &amp;quot;The US attempt to crush the DPRK and realize domination over the whole Korean peninsula constitutes the core of its policy towards the DPRK and the key to its building of a foundation on which to achieve world hegemony.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;[https://archive.org/details/terrorismwar/page/n1/mode/1up?view=theater &amp;quot;The United States: &#039;War Against Terrorism&#039;.&amp;quot;] Foreign Languages Publishing House, Pyongyang, Korea. Juche 97 (2008).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a 2021 speech to the United Nations General Assembly, the DPRK&#039;s representative Kim Song stated, &amp;quot;In the course of the DPRK-U.S. showdown spanning over half a century, we have been very much accustomed to the U.S. military threats, and we know well how to deal with the U.S., the most hostile country. We have learned the mode of existence to cope with the U.S. hostile policy and accumulated rich experience.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:1&amp;quot; /&amp;gt; The representative further characterized the DPRK-US relationship in the following way:&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;From the first day of the foundation of the DPRK, the U.S. has not recognized our sovereignty, treating us as an enemy state, and openly showed its hostility towards the socialist system chosen by our people. The U.S. designated the DPRK as a &amp;quot;communist state&amp;quot; and a &amp;quot;state of non-market economy&amp;quot;, and it completely blocked, both institutionally and legislatively, the establishment of relations between the DPRK and the U.S. in the fields of politics, economy and trade, under the unreasonable pretexts of &amp;quot;human rights issue&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;proliferation of the WMD&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;sponsoring of terrorism&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;oppression of religion&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;money laundering&amp;quot; and etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If it is not a hostile policy, should it be called a &amp;quot;friendly policy&amp;quot;? &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The U.S. hostile policy against the DPRK finds its clearest expression in its military threats against us. Not a single foreign troop, not a single foreign military base exists in the territory of the DPRK. But in south Korea, almost 30,000 U.S. troops are stationing at numerous military bases, maintaining a war posture to take military action against the DPRK at any moment. The DPRK has no record of having conducted a military exercise even a single time around the U.S., but the U.S. has annually staged all sorts of war drills on and around the Korean peninsula and in the Korean waters for the last several decades, by mobilizing army, naval and air forces across the world including the U.S. troops in south Korea, and it has threatened us through military demonstrations of intimidating nature while deploying numerous armaments to south Korea from time to time.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:1&amp;quot; /&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;The representative also noted that the possible outbreak of a new war on the Korean peninsula is contained &amp;quot;not because of the U.S.’s mercy on the DPRK&amp;quot; but because the DPRK &amp;quot;is growing reliable deterrent that can control the hostile forces in their attempts for military invasion&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:1&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kim Yo Jong, First Vice Department Director of Central Committee of Workers’ Party of Korea, in response to being called a “rogue state” by the US Defense Secretary, has been quoted by Nodutdol as saying, &amp;quot;the sufferings imposed upon us by the U.S. have now turned into the hatred for the U.S., and this hatred would drive us to break through the blockade of persistent sanctions led by the U.S. and to live our own way by our own efforts.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:3&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 2018 book &#039;&#039;Origin of the Korean Question&#039;&#039; published in DPRK analyzes the USA&#039;s long history of imperialist aggression toward Korea, even prior to the division of the Korean nation into north and south. The book explains: &amp;quot;From the first days of its emergence from the sea of blood of [[American Indians]], the US waged ceaseless wars of conquest with the ambition of territorial expansion. [...] Having accomplished transition from capitalism to imperialism by achieving [[Primitive accumulation of capital|forced initial accumulation of capital]] through aggression and plunder, in the 19th century the US and European powers made their colony of extensive regions in Africa, America, Southeast Asia and on the shores of the Pacific. Not satisfied with it, they plunged into a competition for seizing before anyone else Korea, [[Qing dynasty (1636–1912)|Qing China]] and Japan that had been still outside of any other country&#039;s influence. [...] The US, a latecomer in this competition, tried to contain the intervention of other powers in the Far East; its primary efforts in the Far East were directed to Korea.&amp;quot; The authors further explain that towards the end of the Second World War, the US began to advocate a &amp;quot;new order of the US-led world,&amp;quot; backpedaling on its commitments to the [[Anti-fascism|anti-fascist]] Allied Powers, and that since then, it has openly pursued policy of stamping out socialism on the globe and seeking to achieve world supremacy. The authors note that the Asia-Pacific area has since become the center of global trade and that the US has a &amp;quot;huge economic dependence&amp;quot; on it. Due to the growing influence of Asian economies, the US is &amp;quot;hell bent on winning control over Asia&amp;quot;, and has determined that it must dominate the Korean peninsula, a regional strategic point politically, militarily and economically, in order to complete its goal of hegemonic power. For this reason, the US regards it as a major goal to stamp out the DPRK and dominate the Korean peninsula as a whole, setting the DPRK as a major target in the &amp;quot;axis of evil&amp;quot;, and &amp;quot;resorting to every means to internationalize the Korean question&amp;quot;, treating the issue arbitrarily in international arenas such as the UN, in collaboration with its satellite countries.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:10&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[https://archive.org/details/origin-of-the-korean-question-foreign-languages-publishing-house-pyongyang-juche-107-2018/ &amp;quot;Origin of the Korean Question.&amp;quot;] Foreign Languages Publishing House, Pyongyang, Juche 107 (2018).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Describing the history of the USA&#039;s imperialist designs on Korea, which continues to this day in modern Korea-US relations, the book&#039;s authors note that the USA has had its eyes on Korea since the 1800s, due to the importance of Korea&#039;s strategic position, the Korean peninsula being good springboard for advance into Asia. Additionally, the authors explain that the USA was compelled toward imperialist expansion by the fact that its industry demanded overseas markets for selling its products, and that the USA saw Korea as a suitable market for its commodities. Finally, Korea was seen as a key location where ships from the USA could refuel on their way to China. Several incidents, such as the criminal intrusion of the USA&#039;s ship &#039;&#039;General Sherman&#039;&#039; into the [[Taedong river]] in 1866, which, demanding &amp;quot;trade&amp;quot; and refusing to leave, perpetrated theft, violence, and kidnapping and killing of Koreans until Pyongyang citizens finally were able to set the boat on fire and sink it, was followed by other incidents with USA&#039;s naval vessels continuing to intrude into Korean territory as well as conducting illegal gold prospecting in Korea.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:10&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Eventually, after a Korea-US treaty was made in 1882, the US won many privileges including the extraterritorial right and &amp;quot;most favoured nation&amp;quot; treatment. Thus the US moved to reduce Korea to its commodity market, a source of precious metals and other raw materials, and an object of capital investment. The US capitalists brought surplus goods like old firearms, petroleum, tobacco and drops to sell them at exorbitant prices, meanwhile purchasing Korea&#039;s precious metals including gold and silver at low prices. Over time, [[Christianity|Christian]] missionaries promoted pro-US sentiment and sent &amp;quot;bourgeois sycophants&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;traitors to the nation&amp;quot; such as future dictator [[Syngman Rhee]] to the US to study, &amp;quot;at the expense of part of the colossal wealth obtained by bleeding the Korean people white.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:10&amp;quot; /&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By 1905, in a meeting referred to as the [[Taft-Katsura agreement]], the USA&#039;s secretary of war and soon-to-be president, [[William Howard Taft]], and Japan&#039;s prime minister [[Katsura Taro]] had a confidential discussion in which they expressed their respective views on control over nations in the Pacific, with Japan emphasizing that it had no designs on the [[Republic of the Philippines|Philippines]], and the USA expressing that it would be &amp;quot;logical&amp;quot; for Japan to assert control over Korea. The USA&#039;s secretary of war and future president expressed his view that &amp;quot;the establishment by Japan of a [[suzerainty]] over Corea to the extent of requiring that Corea enter into no foreign treaties without the consent of Japan&amp;quot; would directly contribute to &amp;quot;permanent peace&amp;quot; in East Asia.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;[https://www.icasinc.org/history/katsura.html &amp;quot;The Taft-Katsura Agreed Memorandum, July 29, 1905.&amp;quot;] ICAS Historical Document, Institute for Corean-American Studies. [https://www.icasinc.org/history/katsura.pdf PDF] of document. [https://web.archive.org/web/20230829070912/https://www.icasinc.org/history/katsura.pdf Archived] 2023-08-29.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;[https://kls.law.columbia.edu/content/korea-legal-history &amp;quot;Korea: A Legal History: Taft-Katsura Agreed Memorandum.&amp;quot;] Korean Legal Studies. Columbia.edu. [https://web.archive.org/web/20230829072908/https://kls.law.columbia.edu/content/korea-legal-history Archived] 2023-08-29.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The authors of &#039;&#039;Origin of the Korean Question&#039;&#039; point out that in the Taft-Katsura Agreement, the US recognized Japan&#039;s protection of Korea and, in return, Japan promised not to interfere with the US supremacy over the Philippines. Placing this agreement in the context of the USA&#039;s series of aggressions and intrusions into Korea, its imperialistic trade relations, its promotion of pro-US bourgeois ideology through Christian missionaries, and its disregard for agreements made in the 1882 Korea-US treaty, it demonstrates the USA&#039;s longstanding record of aggressive, imperialist self-interest in its dealings with Korea as a key country for the US to subjugate on its path to imperialist world hegemony. In line with this history, the authors evaluate that the US of the present day spreads misinformation about the DPRK and misuses the UN and other international apparatuses to &amp;quot;isolate and suffocate the recalcitrant country that aspires after independence [...] to bring the Korean people to their knees by internationalizing the Korean question at all costs in pursuit of its world strategy.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:10&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===DPRK-ROK relations===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Unification vs Peaceful Coexistence 2016-2021.png|thumb|Attitudes in South Korea towards unification vs peaceful coexistence with DPRK, according to the 2021 KINU Unification Survey.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:5&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Dr. Sang Sin Lee, et. al. [https://www.kinu.or.kr/pyxis-api/1/digital-files/87cb5812-a81a-4fdc-824c-8d359544e8f7 &amp;quot;KINU Unification Survey 2021: Executive Summary.&amp;quot;] July, 2021. Korea Institute for National Unification.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
Among the political leadership, bourgeoisie, and working people of South Korea, there is variation in attitudes toward DPRK. For the majority of South Korea&#039;s history, its leaders have been far-right anti-communist military dictators as well as corrupt oligarchs. A handful of ROK presidents are notable for their &amp;quot;Sunshine Policy&amp;quot; stance toward DPRK, a stance of reconciliation. Most notably associated with this attitude are Kim Dae-jung and Roh Moo-hyun. The more recent president, [[Moon Jae-in]], has been described as having revived certain elements of the Sunshine Policy era. However, his presidency was followed by the right-wing [[Yoon Suk-yeol]] who took office in 2022, and has a much more aggressive pro-US stance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In regard to public opinion in South Korea, the 2021 KINU Unification Survey&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:5&amp;quot; /&amp;gt; reported that positive responses to the question “If North Korea open the borders to each other and cooperate on political and economic matters, such a state can be considered unification even if the two Koreas are not one country” have reached 63.2%. In addition, the survey found there is a growing tendency to be indifferent to DPRK and to &amp;quot;give up expectations&amp;quot; rather than a negative view for the future of inter-Korean relations. The IMF generation and millennial generations clearly show a high level of indifference toward the DPRK compared to the older generations. (IMF generation 68.3%, Millennial generation 74.1%). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
According to the survey, the gap between ‘Prefers unification’ and ‘Prefers peaceful coexistence’ is very huge in the millennial generation. In the 2021 survey, the percentage of ‘Prefers peaceful coexistence’ was 71.4% and the percentage of ‘Prefers unification’ was 12.4%, showing a difference of 59%P. The summary of the results suggests that &amp;quot;the trend that younger generations view North Korea as the subject of coexistence and not unification will become stronger in the future.&amp;quot; The younger generation tends to loosely favor confederations. The Millennial generation most actively preferred confederations and has the lowest percentage of preference for unitary state system at only 6.5%. The preference for unification in the unitary state system, which is the traditional unification view, was relatively high among the war generation (17.8%). However, more` than half of the War generation (52.1%) preferred confederations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
67.7% of survey respondents agreed to the statement “The agreements between the two Koreas should be continued regardless of the government&#039;s change” and 90.3% of the respondents said ‘necessary’ to the question “Do you think that U.S. Armed Forces in Korea is needed now?” 69% of respondents showed a positive attitude toward the question “Do you think U.S. President [[Joe Biden|Biden]] should hold a summit with North Korean leader Kim Jong-un?” The survey also found that people under 30 are apparently more vulnerable to fake news about DPRK than those over 40. Income level, residence area, political ideology, and party identification also seem to influence the reception of fake news on DPRK and unification issues.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:5&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The US consistently interferes in inter-Korean affairs and polices Korean reunification efforts by citing sanctions. According to Nodutdol, only a few months after the Korean leaders signed the Panmunjeom Declaration, the US-led UN Command which oversees the DMZ, blocked development of the inter-Korean railway. In January 2020, South Korean President Moon Jae-In expressed interest in developing tourism to People&#039;s Korea, but the US ambassador Harry Harris blocked this effort. Harris claimed that &amp;quot;independent&amp;quot; tourism plans would have to undergo US consultation. He emphasized that the items inside South Korean tourists&#039; luggage could violate sanctions, demonstrating the extent of US interference.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:3&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During Moon Jae-in&#039;s presidency, a number of inter-Korean activities took place, such as the 2018 inter-Korean summit. In the 2018 Winter Olympics, the teams representing DPRK and south Korea entered the Opening Ceremony marching under the Korean Unification Flag, while in women&#039;s ice hockey there was a single united Korean team. A music concert titled &amp;quot;Spring is Coming&amp;quot; was also held in 2018, in which a number of south Korean artists performed alongside People&#039;s Korean artists in [[Pyongyang]], DPRK.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pro-DPRK voices in South Korea are stifled by the existence of the National Security Law. The National Security Law is a south Korean law enforced since 1948 following events such as the [[Jeju Uprising]] where Koreans opposed the division of the country into north and south. The National Security Law has the avowed purpose &amp;quot;to secure the security of the State and the subsistence and freedom of nationals, by regulating any anticipated activities compromising the safety of the State.&amp;quot; Behaviors or speeches in favor of the DPRK or communism can be punished by the National Security Law. In an article from The Diplomat, it was referred to as a &amp;quot;Cold War holdover&amp;quot; that &amp;quot;allows the government to selectively prosecute anyone who &#039;praises, incites or propagates the activities of an anti-government organization&#039;&amp;quot; which the article describes as &amp;quot;a deliberately vague clause that broadly implies the North Korean state and its sympathizers.&amp;quot; The article continues, explaining &amp;quot;Under Article 7, individuals have been prosecuted and imprisoned for merely possessing North Korean publications or satirically tweeting North Korean propaganda. In recent years this clause has been harshly criticized by [[Amnesty International]] and [[Human Rights Watch]], who claim the government abuses the law to repress dissenting voices.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Meredith Shaw and Joseph Yi. (2022-03-15). [https://thediplomat.com/2022/03/will-yoon-suk-yeol-finally-reform-south-koreas-national-security-law/ &amp;quot;Will Yoon Suk-yeol Finally Reform South Korea’s National Security Law?&amp;quot;] &#039;&#039;The Diplomat&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
According to the [[People&#039;s Democracy Party]] (PDP), a revolutionary workers&#039; party in south Korea, the continued U.S. military occupation of south Korea is the primary barrier to peaceful reunification of the Korean peninsula.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;People&#039;s Democracy Party and Liberation School. [https://www.liberationschool.org/korean-war-70-years/ “70 Years Too Long: The Struggle to End the Korean War – Liberation School.”] &#039;&#039;Liberation School – Revolutionary Marxism for a New Generation of Fighters&#039;&#039;, 25 June 2020. [https://web.archive.org/web/2/https://www.liberationschool.org/korean-war-70-years/ Archived]. ‌&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On August 13, 2022, thousands of south Korean unionists and their progressive supporters rallied in downtown Seoul to protest against joint US-south Korea war game exercises. In a video uploaded by [[Press TV]], Oh Eun-Jung of the National Teachers Union was quoted as saying: &amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;quot;The threat of nuclear war is growing on the Korean peninsula, conservative forces of Yoon Suk-yeol in south Korea and those in the U.S. are frantically conducting aggressive war drills in the sky, the land, and the sea, and are about to start large-scale military exercises, aimed at the invasion of North Korea. We must stamp out this behavior of anti-reunification forces.&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;In the same video, construction worker Lee Seung-Woo stated: &amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;quot;We not only oppose the war exercises, but we want the U.S. Forces Korea, which is actually controlling and interfering with the Korean peninsula to leave this land. We believe that only then will the eighty million Koreans from both north and south be able to live peacefully.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Frank Smith. [https://www.presstv.ir/Detail/2022/08/13/687322/South-Korean-unionists-protest-US-South-Korea-war-games “‘South Korean Unionists Protest US-South Korea War Games.’”] PressTV News. August 13, 2022. [https://web.archive.org/web/20220826124551/https://www.presstv.ir/Detail/2022/08/13/687322/South-Korean-unionists-protest-US-South-Korea-war-games Archived] 2022-08-28.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;[[File:Unconverted long-term prisoners in south Korea.jpg|alt=People stand in a row at a demonstration calling for a second repatriation of unconverted long-term prisoners in south Korea. Their Korean-language sign reads &amp;quot;비전향장기수 송환 촉구&amp;quot;. (Meaning &amp;quot;Call for repatriation of non-converted long-term prisoners&amp;quot;)|thumb|A demonstration calling for a repatriation to DPRK for unconverted long-term prisoners in south Korea.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Unconverted long-term prisoners====&lt;br /&gt;
{{Main article|Unconverted long-term prisoners}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unconverted long-term prisoners is a term which refers to political prisoners who have been imprisoned in south Korea, generally on charges of &amp;quot;anti-state&amp;quot; activities or views in support of communism or DPRK. The term commonly refers to people who were mostly arrested from the 1950s to 1980s and imprisoned and tortured for decades and who refused to sign a &amp;quot;conversion&amp;quot; statement renouncing communist or left-wing ideology, which had been a condition for their release. It can also refer to those who ultimately did sign the so-called &amp;quot;conversion&amp;quot; statement but do not consider it a true conversion as it was extracted under torture.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:4&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[https://www.liberationschool.org/interview-with-ahn-hak-sop/ &amp;quot;Still fighting for Korea’s liberation: An interview with Ahn Hak-sop&amp;quot;] &#039;&#039;Liberation School&#039;&#039;, June 27, 2023. [https://web.archive.org/web/20240227201454/https://www.liberationschool.org/interview-with-ahn-hak-sop/ Archived] 2024-02-27.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:16&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Kim Dong-won. [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=1xu2mEvU29Q &#039;&#039;Repatriation&#039;&#039; (2003).] Documentary.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the 1990s, some of the elderly prisoners began being released, and began living in the south under difficult economic, legal, and social conditions. Many sought to be repatriated to DPRK, and 63 of them were allowed to do so in the year 2000. Many who participated in the repatriation in 2000 and many of those who remained in south Korea made their decisions based on their impression at the time that there was going to be more freedom of movement between ROK and DPRK thereafter. However, further repatriations have not taken place, despite a continued movement calling for it. Meanwhile, those who remained in the south have had to live under strict surveillance by the south Korean state.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:4&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:16&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Further reading==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Library:DPRK Study Guide|DPRK study guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[:Category:Library works about the DPRK|All library works about the DPRK]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[:Category:Library documents from the DPRK|All library works from the DPRK]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Library:Patriots, Traitors and Empires|&#039;&#039;Patriots, Traitors and Empires: The Story of Korea’s Struggle for Freedom&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==External links==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Government, party, and other organization webpages ===&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.dprkportal.kp Portal Site of Democratic People&#039;s Republic of Korea]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.mfa.gov.kp/ Ministry of Foreign Affairs of DPR Korea]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.korart.sca.kp/ Ministry of Culture of DPR Korea]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.moph.gov.kp/ Ministry of Public Health of DPR Korea]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.ryomyong.edu.kp/ Ministry of Education of DPR Korea]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.tourismdprk.gov.kp/ National Tourism Administration]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.mirae.aca.kp/ State Commission of Science and Technology of DPR Korea]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.naenara.com.kp/sites/kfpd Central Committee of the Korean Federation for Protection of the Disabled]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.friend.com.kp/dprkrcs/ The Red Cross Society of the Democratic People’s Republic of Korea]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.kass.org.kp/ Korean Association of Social Scientists] (KASS)&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.gpsh.edu.kp/ Grand People&#039;s Study House]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DPRK publications and news media sites ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.kcna.kp/ Korean Central News Agency]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.rodong.rep.kp Rodong Sinmun]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.korean-books.com.kp/index.php/Main/firstpage/en Foreign Languages Publishing House]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.naenara.com.kp/ Naenara]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.pyongyangtimes.com.kp/ Pyongyang Times]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.kftrade.com.kp/ Foreign Trade of DPR Korea]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.mediaryugyong.com.kp/ Ryugyong Programming Centre]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.youth.rep.kp/ Chongnyon Jonwi] (Youth Vanguard)&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://archive.org/search?query=Foreign+Languages+Publishing+House%2C+Pyongyang &amp;quot;Foreign Languages Publishing House, Pyongyang&amp;quot;] results on [[Internet Archive]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Universities ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.ryongnamsan.edu.kp/ Kim Il Sung University]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.kut.edu.kp/ Kim Chaek University of Technology]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.pust.co/ Pyongyang University of Science and Technology]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Other links ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://exploredprk.com/ Explore DPRK], site with many articles about DPRK&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.youtube.com/@DPRKExplained DPRK Explained], YouTube channel with videos about DPRK&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://dprk360.com/ DPRK 360], blog featuring panoramic photos and articles about DPRK&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.youngpioneertours.com/ Young Pioneer Tours], tourism company with many articles about DPRK&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.youtube.com/@DefendKorea DefendKorea / NatalieRevolts], DPRK-focused YouTube channel&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.youtube.com/@tvminjoktv7260/ 민족TV (Minjok TV, Minjok Tongshin)], YouTube channel featuring many interviews conducted in DPRK by unification activist Noh Gil-nam (Korean: 노길남)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*https://fightbacknews.org/articles/korea-stands-strong-kim-jong-il-context&lt;br /&gt;
*https://www.lalkar.org/article/2654/the-democratic-structure-of-the-dprk&lt;br /&gt;
==References==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Countries]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Democratic People&#039;s Republic of Korea]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Targets of regime change operations]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Targets of bourgeois media]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Marxist-Leninist states]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Asian countries]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Countries invaded by the United States]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Countries sanctioned by the US]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Juche]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>The Phantom Bull</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=File:DPRK_No_RoK_(orthographic_projection).svg&amp;diff=92646</id>
		<title>File:DPRK No RoK (orthographic projection).svg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=File:DPRK_No_RoK_(orthographic_projection).svg&amp;diff=92646"/>
		<updated>2026-09-07T17:41:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;The Phantom Bull: The DPRK&amp;#039;s current (as of September 7th, 2026) claimed territory, on an orthographic map projection. Korean reunification was officially abandoned by the DPRK in January 2024, so the DPRK no longer claims the RoK as part of its territory.

Kikorangi wrote this in the official ProleWiki Discord server:

&amp;quot;The DPRK officially changed its constitution and refers to itself as bordering the Russian Federation, People&amp;#039;s Republic of China, and the Republic of Korea.

Although the government has made...&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Summary ==&lt;br /&gt;
The DPRK&#039;s current (as of September 7th, 2026) claimed territory, on an orthographic map projection. Korean reunification was officially abandoned by the DPRK in January 2024, so the DPRK no longer claims the RoK as part of its territory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kikorangi wrote this in the official ProleWiki Discord server:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;The DPRK officially changed its constitution and refers to itself as bordering the Russian Federation, People&#039;s Republic of China, and the Republic of Korea.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Although the government has made references to this and announced its intention to update the constitution, it hadn&#039;t updated the constitution until this year, so it de jure recognised south Korea as part of its territory even though it de facto did not. Now that the constitution has been updated and it both de fact and de jure recognises the ROK as a separate country, I believe updating the map shouldn&#039;t be controversial.&amp;quot;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>The Phantom Bull</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=Ted_Kaczynski&amp;diff=92495</id>
		<title>Ted Kaczynski</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=Ted_Kaczynski&amp;diff=92495"/>
		<updated>2026-08-26T15:10:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;The Phantom Bull: I added a paragraph describing Kaczynski&amp;#039;s personal motivations behind his crimes.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Infobox person|name=Ted Kaczynski|birth_date=May 22, 1942|birth_place=[[Chicago]], [[State of Illinois|Illinois]], [[United States of America|United States]]|nationality=Statesian|image=Ted Kaczynski Mugshot.jpg|death_date=June 10, 2023 (aged 81)|death_place=[[Federal Medical Center, Butner|FMC, Butner]], [[State of North Carolina|North Carolina]], United States}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Theodore John Kaczynski&#039;&#039;&#039; (May 22, 1942 – June 10, 2023), also known as the &#039;&#039;&#039;Unabomber&#039;&#039;&#039;, was a [[Statesian]] [[Primitivism|primitivist]] and [[Fascism|eco-fascist]] and serial bomber, known for mailing/delivering 16 bombs over a duration of almost 17 years, killing 3 people and injuring 23 more. His targets included scientists, engineers, industrialists, lobbyists, and airlines; people and institutions he felt were furthering technological progress to the detriment of society.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{Web citation|date=2023-06-09|title=Ted Kaczynski, known as the Unabomber for years of attacks that killed 3, dies in prison at 81|url=https://apnews.com/article/ted-kaczynski-unabomber-dies-federal-prison-95fdd4f398fbfe20aaadf5d53a91dc26|newspaper=The Associated Press|retrieved=2023-06-10|author=Micheal Balsamo and Lindsay Whitehearst}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== His Motivations Behind His Crimes ==&lt;br /&gt;
Despite the fact that his ideological convictions professed a proposal for giving humanity its freedom back, Kaczynski committed his crimes merely out of a personal desire for revenge. In a journal entry, he stated that he did not expect to accomplish anything productive with his crimes, and even acknowledged that his crimes might be counterproductive to his ultimate aims for humanity, yet he decided to commit his acts of murder and attempted murder anyway, due to him feeling the need to &amp;quot;content himself with just a little revenge&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{Web citation|author=Ted Kaczynski|newspaper=The Ted K Archive|title=Journal Entry, April 6, 1971|date=1971-04-06|url=https://www.thetedkarchive.com/library/ted-kaczynski-excerpts-from-unabomber-s-journal.html|retrieved=2026-08-26}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{DEFAULTSORT:Kaczynski, Ted}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Articles with unsourced statements]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Statesians of Polish descent]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Reactionaries]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:MKUltra victims]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>The Phantom Bull</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=Liberalism&amp;diff=92483</id>
		<title>Liberalism</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=Liberalism&amp;diff=92483"/>
		<updated>2026-08-24T13:56:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;The Phantom Bull: I slightly clarified what constitutes capitalist realism.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Message box/Missing Sources}}{{Quote|First, I must confess that over the past few years I have been gravely disappointed with the [[white people|white]] moderate. I have almost reached the regrettable conclusion that the [[African|Negro]]&#039;s great stumbling block in his stride toward freedom is not the White Citizen&#039;s Counciler or the [[Ku Klux Klan|Ku Klux Klanner]], but the white moderate, who is more devoted to &amp;quot;order&amp;quot; than to justice; who prefers a negative peace which is the absence of tension to a positive peace which is the presence of justice; who constantly says: &amp;quot;I agree with you in the goal you seek, but I cannot agree with your methods of [[revolution|direct action]]&amp;quot;|[[Martin Luther King Jr.]]|[[Library:Letter from Birmingham Jail|Letter from Birmingham Jail]]|1963}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Losurdo tree liberalism.png|thumb|The liberal view of [[human rights]] is based on [[private property]] while the [[Marxism|Marxist]] view is based on [[self-determination]].&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;Boer&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{Citation|author=Roland Boer|year=2021|title=Sovereignty and Human Rights: A Comparison Between Western Liberal and Chinese Marxist Traditions|publisher=Political Theology 23(1–2), 13–28.|doi=10.1080/1462317X.2021.1932341}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Liberalism&#039;&#039;&#039; is an [[Idealism|idealist]] [[ideology]] that promotes [[capitalism]], [[free market]] principles, [[individualism]], [[fundamental rights]] (also known as [[Bourgeoisie|bourgeois]] privileges), [[separation of church and state]], [[popular sovereignty]], and [[rule of law]]. Liberalism emerged in the [[17th Century|17th century]] as the ideological component of [[capitalism]], and gained administrative power as a result of the [[Bourgeois revolution|bourgeois revolutions]] of the [[18th Century|18th]] and [[19th Century|19th centuries]] in [[North America]] and [[Europe]].&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:0&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{Citation|author=I. G. Nemanov|year=1973|chapter=Liberalism|chapter-url=https://encyclopedia2.thefreedictionary.com/Liberalism|title=[[Great Soviet Encyclopedia]] (3rd ed.)|volume=14|page=396-398|city=Moscow|pdf=https://ia804601.us.archive.org/2/items/B-001-032-507-748-ALL/БСЭ_3изд_т14_731.pdf|trans-title=Boljšaja sovjetskaja enciklopjedija|trans-lang=Russian}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Liberalism, the philosophy behind the [[dictatorship of the bourgeoisie]], has consistently changed over the centuries, as a result of advancement in the productive forces and the development of the [[Feudalism|feudal]] serfdom into the industrial [[proletariat]], and has now turned into [[neoliberalism]], as a result of the consolidation of capital into the hands of the few, and to protect the [[ruling class]] from [[socialism]], which is currently in the process of replacing capitalism as the primary [[mode of production]].  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== History ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Creation ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Base-superstructure Dialectic.png|thumb|Diagram showing how the base and superstructure relate to each other in dialectics.]]&lt;br /&gt;
Liberalism developed as an ideology and was adopted by members of society as capitalism (or the premises of capitalism) developed. This is generally exemplified by the [[base and superstructure]]; as the material conditions develop and factories emerge, there is a need for the superstructure to provide the institutions required for the base to survive. Since capitalism requires the free market to exist, there needed to be a guiding ideology that would allow the free market to exist and justify the existence of capitalism, the base. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Early on, liberalism expressed the interests of the young bourgeoisie in Western Europe against feudalism, absolutism, and clericalism.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:0&amp;quot; /&amp;gt; Liberalism became codified during the [[Age of Enlightenment]], which lasted from about the mid 17th century to the late 18th century, and culminated perhaps with the bourgeois [[French Revolution]] of 1789.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:0&amp;quot; /&amp;gt; Some notable liberal theorists include [[René Descartes]], [[Jean-Jacques Rousseau]], or economist [[Adam Smith]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this sense, both [[Social democracy|social-democrats]] and classical liberals, who may seem at the opposite ends of a spectrum, are liberals since both will strive towards establishing capitalism.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Modern times ===&lt;br /&gt;
In modern times, liberalism remains the dominant ideology of the world at large. As it is inextricably linked to capitalism, and capitalism is the dominant mode of production, it follows that liberalism is the dominant guiding ideology in the world.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the ideas of a society are the ideas of the ruling class (the bourgeoisie in capitalist societies), liberalism has become the only &#039;&#039;realistic&#039;&#039; ideology for most people living in a capitalist mode of production, as it permeates their lives from birth. It is indoctrinated into them via the media, the educational system etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most people therefore do not realize that they are ideological, and that their ideology is liberalism. As they have lived their whole lives in capitalism, it is difficult for them to imagine another system (this is a phenomenon known as [[capitalist realism]]) and therefore that liberalism is the only existing or viable ideology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Idealist component ==&lt;br /&gt;
Liberalism is considered to be an [[Idealism|idealist]] ideology, as opposed to a materialist ideology, because it claims that ideas shape the material world, as opposed to the material world shaping ideas. In their pursuit for the cult of the individual, liberal philosophers used to embrace the Great Man theory of history, which states that progress is driven by great people who have high natural abilities. Therefore they had progressive ideas, and these ideas shaped the material world. As such, in classical liberal reasoning, [[Napoleon Bonaparte]] was instrumental in spreading capitalism and destroying the [[Feudalism|old order]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Marxism, which is a materialist philosophy, understands that material conditions drive change (the [[Dialectics|dialectic]]) and will influence the ideas that people have and how they act on them. Marxism holds that capitalism was instrumental in creating a Napoleon Bonaparte and that, if he had not existed, someone else would have taken his place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After the impact of [[scientific socialism]] in Europe, liberal thinkers started moving away from such idealist notions and co-opted some materialist theory so as to reinforce theirs and prevent communism from becoming a major ideology in the world. As such, even liberal theorists today have to admit that, to some extent, change is driven by &#039;&#039;forces&#039;&#039; at large. Liberals admit that the Industrial Revolution largely affected our daily life, in a way that completely modified it from what existed previously (e.g. the division of the work day and the importance it has in a worker&#039;s life as compared to the feudal journeyman&#039;s). However, they see this progress as an abstract, without relation to the base or superstructure, and would rather focus on the abstract consequences than the material causes. If life changed so much for the average worker after the introduction of the steam engine, it is precisely because the mode of production at large changed and required new policies to create more surplus value.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Principles ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Private property ===&lt;br /&gt;
Liberalism teaches that only private property, with guaruntees of freedom for certain people, can ensure social harmony and human progress. Within this is the underlying assumption that common welfare results from individuals realizing their personal goals.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:0&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Free market ===&lt;br /&gt;
Perhaps best laid down by Adam Smith, though already existing before his work [[The Wealth of Nations|&#039;&#039;The Wealth of Nations&#039;&#039;]], free market policies encompass a large range of principles and laws that govern trade inside and outside a nation, so as to remove as many barriers as possible to trade.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Free trade was originally required by the bourgeoisie to destroy the old order of the nobility, who used to own monopolies and form cartels to reinforce their power. Today, free trade is also used as a vector for imperialism, notably in the [[Opium Wars]] that sought to dismantle [[Qing dynasty (1636–1912)|China]]&#039;s protectionist trade policies in the late 19th century.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Individualism ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fundamental rights ===&lt;br /&gt;
Fundamental rights, in liberal philosophy, are rights with which all individuals are imbued with on the grounds of being human. They are more aptly described as privileges the bourgeois reluctantly allows the proletariat to enjoy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Neoliberalism]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Dictatorship of the bourgeoisie]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Compatible Left]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Libertarianism]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Liberalism:Quotes]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Further reading ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Liberalism: A Counter-History|Liberalism: A Counter-History]]&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==References==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Political ideology]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Right-wing ideologies]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>The Phantom Bull</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=Library:Vladimir_Lenin/What_is_to_be_done%3F&amp;diff=92403</id>
		<title>Library:Vladimir Lenin/What is to be done?</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=Library:Vladimir_Lenin/What_is_to_be_done%3F&amp;diff=92403"/>
		<updated>2026-08-14T14:26:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;The Phantom Bull: I fixed a sentence where part of one of Lenin&amp;#039;s notes was incorrectly inserted into the main text, which interrupted a sentence.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Library work&lt;br /&gt;
| title = What is to be done?&lt;br /&gt;
| author=Vladimir Lenin&lt;br /&gt;
| written in = 1901–1902&lt;br /&gt;
| published = 1902&lt;br /&gt;
| type = Book&lt;br /&gt;
| source= [https://www.marxists.org/archive/lenin/works/1901/witbd/ Marxists Internet Archive]&lt;br /&gt;
| image =&lt;br /&gt;
| image_size =&lt;br /&gt;
| image_upright =&lt;br /&gt;
| image_alt =&lt;br /&gt;
| caption =&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
== Preface ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;quot;...Party struggles lend a party strength and vitality; the greatest proof of a party’s weakness is its diffuseness and the blurring of clear demarcations; a party becomes stronger by purging itself...&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;(From a letter of Lassalle to Marx, of June 24, 1852)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
According to the author’s original plan, the present pamphlet was to have been devoted to a detailed development of the ideas expressed in the article &amp;quot;Where To Begin&amp;quot;, (&#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;, No. 4, May 1901). We must first apologise to the reader for the delay in fulfilling the promise made in that article (and repeated in response to many private inquiries and letters). One of the reasons for this delay was the attempt, undertaken in June of the past year (1901), to unite all the Social-Democratic organisations abroad. It was natural to wait for the results of this attempt, for, had the effort proved successful, it would perhaps have been necessary to expound &#039;&#039;Iskra’s&#039;&#039; conceptions of organisation from a somewhat different approach; in any case, such a success promised to put an end very quickly to the existence of the two trends in the Russian Social-Democratic movement. As the reader knows, the attempt failed, and, as we propose to show, was bound to fail after the new swing, of &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;, in its issue No. 10, towards Economism. It was found to be absolutely essential to begin a determined struggle against this trend, diffuse and ill-defined, but for that reason the more persistent, the more capable of reasserting itself in diverse forms. Accordingly, the original plan of the pamphlet was altered and considerably enlarged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Its main theme was to have been the three questions raised in the article &amp;quot;Where To Begin&amp;quot; – the character and main content of our political agitation; our organisational tasks; and the plan for building, simultaneously and from various sides, a militant, all-Russia organisation. These questions have long engaged the mind of the author, who tried to raise them in &#039;&#039;Rabochaya Gazeta&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Rabochaya Gazeta&#039;&#039; (&#039;&#039;Workers’ Gazette&#039;&#039;) — an illegal newspaper issued by the Kiev group of Social-Democrats. Two issues appeared — No. 1 in August and No. 2 in December (dated November) 1897.{{Br}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The First Congress of the R.S.D.L.P. adopted &#039;&#039;Rabochaya Gazeta&#039;&#039; as the official organ of the Party, but the newspaper discontinued publication shortly after the Congress, as a result of a police raid on the printing-press and the arrest of the Central Committee.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; during one of the unsuccessful attempts to revive that paper (see Chapter V). But the original plan to confine the pamphlet to an analysis of only these three questions and to set forth our views as far as possible in a positive form, without, or almost without, entering into polemics, proved wholly impracticable, for two reasons. On the one hand, Economism proved to be much more tenacious than we had supposed (we employ the term Economism in the broad sense, as explained in &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;, No. 12 (December 1901), in the article entitled &amp;quot;A Talk With Defenders of Economism&amp;quot;, which was a synopsis, so to speak, of the present pamphlet). It became clear beyond doubt that the differences regarding the solution of the three questions mentioned were explainable to a far greater degree by the basic antithesis between the two trends in the Russian Social-Democratic movement than by differences over details. On the other hand, the perplexity of the Economists over the practical application of our views in &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; clearly revealed that we often speak literally in different tongues and therefore &#039;&#039;cannot&#039;&#039; arrive at an understanding without beginning &#039;&#039;ab ovo&#039;&#039;, and that an attempt must be made, in the simplest possible style, illustrated by numerous and concrete examples, &#039;&#039;systematically to &amp;quot;clarify&amp;quot; all&#039;&#039; our basic points of difference with &#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039; the Economists. I resolved to make such an attempt at &amp;quot;clarification&amp;quot;, fully realising that it would greatly increase the size of the pamphlet and delay its publication; I saw &#039;&#039;no other way&#039;&#039; of meeting my pledge I had made in the article &amp;quot;Where To Begin&amp;quot;. Thus, to the apologies for the delay, I must add others for the serious literary shortcomings of the pamphlet. I had to work &#039;&#039;in great haste&#039;&#039;, with frequent interruptions by a variety of other tasks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The examination of the above three questions still constitutes the main theme of this pamphlet, but I found it necessary to begin with two questions of a more general nature – why such an &amp;quot;innocent&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;natural&amp;quot; slogan as &amp;quot;freedom of criticism&amp;quot; should be for us a veritable war-cry, and why we cannot come to an understanding even on the fundamental question of the role of Social-Democrats in relation to the spontaneous mass movement. Further, the exposition of our views on the character and substance of political agitation developed into an explanation of the difference between trade-unionist politics and Social-Democratic politics, while the exposition of our views on organisational tasks developed into an explanation of the difference between the amateurish methods which satisfy the Economists, and the organisation of revolutionaries which we hold to be indispensable. Further, I advance the &amp;quot;plan&amp;quot; for an all-Russia political newspaper with all the more insistence because the objections raised against it are untenable, and because no real answer has been given to the question I raised in the article &amp;quot;Where To Begin&amp;quot; as to how we can set to work from all sides simultaneously to create the organisation we need. Finally, in the concluding part, I hope to show that we did all we could to prevent a decisive break with the Economists, a break which nevertheless proved inevitable; that &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; acquired a special significance, a &amp;quot;historical&amp;quot; significance, if you will, because it expressed fully and strikingly, not consistent Economism, but the confusion and vacillation which constitute the distinguishing feature of &#039;&#039;an entire period&#039;&#039; in the history of Russian Social-Democracy; and that therefore the polemic with &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;, which may upon first view seem excessively detailed, also acquires significance, for we can make no progress until we have completely put an end to this period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Preface-sign|Lenin&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
February 1902}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dogmatism and &amp;quot;freedom of criticism&amp;quot; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== What does &amp;quot;freedom of criticism&amp;quot; mean? ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Freedom of criticism&amp;quot; is undoubtedly the most fashionable slogan at the present time, and the one most frequently employed in the controversies between socialists and democrats in all countries. At first sight, nothing would appear to be more strange than the solemn appeals to freedom of criticism made by one of the parties to the dispute. Have voices been raised in the advanced parties against the constitutional law of the majority of European countries which guarantees freedom to science and scientific investigation? &amp;quot;Something must be wrong here,&amp;quot; will be the comment of the onlooker who has heard this fashionable slogan repeated at every turn but has not yet penetrated the essence of the disagreement among the disputants; evidently this slogan is one of the conventional phrases which, like nicknames, become legitimised by use, and become almost generic terms.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In fact, it is no secret for anyone that two trends have taken form in present-day international {{Refn|Incidentally, in the history of modern socialism this is a phenomenon, perhaps unique and in its way very consoling, namely, that the strife of the various trends within the socialist movement has from national become international. Formerly, the disputes between Lassalleans and Eisenachers &amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot; name=&amp;quot;lasseisen&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;, between Guesdists and Possibilists &amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot; name=&amp;quot;guesbilist&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;, between Fabians and Social-Democrats, and between Narodnaya Volya adherents and Social-Democrats, remained confined within purely national frameworks, reflecting purely national features, and proceeding, as it were, on different planes. At the present time (as is now evident), the English Fabians, the French Ministerialists, the German Bernsteinians, and the Russian Critics – all belong to the same family, all extol each other, learn from each other, and together take up arms against “dogmatic” Marxism. In this first really international battle with socialist opportunism, international revolutionary Social-Democracy will perhaps become sufficiently strengthened to put an end to the political reaction that has long reigned in Europe?|group=Lenin}} Social-Democracy. The conflict between these trends now flares up in a bright flame and now dies down and smoulders under the ashes of imposing &amp;quot;truce resolutions&amp;quot;. The essence of the &amp;quot;new&amp;quot; trend, which adopts a &amp;quot;critical&amp;quot; attitude towards &amp;quot;obsolete dogmatic&amp;quot; Marxism, has been clearly enough &#039;&#039;presented&#039;&#039; by Bernstein and &#039;&#039;demonstrated&#039;&#039; by Millerand.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Social-Democracy must change from a party of social revolution into a democratic party of social reforms. Bernstein has surrounded this political demand with a whole battery of well-attuned &amp;quot;new&amp;quot; arguments and reasonings. Denied was the possibility of putting socialism on a scientific basis and of demonstrating its necessity and inevitability from the point of view of the materialist conception of history. Denied was the fact of growing impoverishment, the process of proletarisation, and the intensification of capitalist contradictions; the very concept, &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;ultimate aim&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;, was declared to be unsound, and the idea of the dictatorship of the proletariat was completely rejected. Denied was the antithesis in principle between liberalism and socialism. Denied was &#039;&#039;the theory of the class struggle,&#039;&#039; on the alleged grounds that it could not be applied to a strictly democratic society governed according to the will of the majority, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus, the demand for a decisive turn from revolutionary Social-Democracy to bourgeois social-reformism was accompanied by a no less decisive turn towards bourgeois criticism of all the fundamental ideas of Marxism. In view of the fact that this criticism of Marxism has long been directed from the political platform, from university chairs, in numerous pamphlets and in a series of learned treatises, in view of the fact that the entire younger generation of the educated classes has been systematically reared for decades on this criticism, it is not surprising that the &amp;quot;new critical&amp;quot; trend in Social-Democracy should spring up, all complete, like Minerva from the head of Jove. The content of this new trend did not have to grow and take shape, it was transferred bodily from bourgeois to socialist literature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To proceed. If Bernstein’s theoretical criticism and political yearnings were still unclear to anyone, the French took the trouble strikingly to demonstrate the &amp;quot;new method&amp;quot;. In this instance, too, France has justified its old reputation of being &amp;quot;the land where, more than anywhere else, the historical class struggles were each time fought out to a decision...&amp;quot; (Engels, Introduction to Marx’s &#039;&#039;Der 18 Brumaire&#039;&#039;). The French socialists have begun, not to theorise, but to act. The democratically more highly developed political conditions in France have permitted them to put &amp;quot;Bernsteinism into practice&amp;quot; immediately, with all its consequences. Millerand has furnished an excellent example of practical Bernsteinism; not without reason did Bernstein and Vollmar rush so zealously to defend and laud him. Indeed, if Social-Democracy, in essence, is merely a party of reform and must be bold enough to admit this openly, then not only has a socialist the right to join a bourgeois cabinet, but he must always strive to do so. If democracy, in essence, means the abolition of class domination, then why should not a socialist minister charm the whole bourgeois world by orations on class collaboration? Why should he not remain in the cabinet even after the shooting-down of workers by gendarmes has exposed, for the hundredth and thousandth time, the real nature of the democratic collaboration of classes? Why should he not personally take part in greeting the tsar, for whom the French socialists now have no other name than hero of the gallows, knout, and exile (&#039;&#039;knouteur, pendeur et deportateur)&#039;&#039;? And the reward for this utter humiliation and self-degradation of socialism in the face of the whole world, for the corruption of the socialist consciousness of the working masses – the only basis that can guarantee our victory – the reward for this is pompous &#039;&#039;projects&#039;&#039; for miserable reforms, so miserable in fact that much more has been obtained from bourgeois governments!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He who does not deliberately close his eyes cannot fail to see that the new &amp;quot;critical&amp;quot; trend in socialism is nothing more nor less than a new variety of &#039;&#039;opportunism&#039;&#039;. And if we judge people, not by the glittering uniforms they don or by the highsounding appellations they give themselves, but by their actions and by what they actually advocate, it will be clear that &amp;quot;freedom of criticism&amp;quot; means’ freedom for an opportunist trend in Social-Democracy, freedom to convert Social-Democracy into a democratic party of reform, freedom to introduce bourgeois ideas and bourgeois elements into socialism.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Freedom&amp;quot; is a grand word, but under the banner of freedom for industry the most predatory wars were waged, under the banner of freedom of labour, the working people were robbed. The modern use of the term &amp;quot;freedom of criticism&amp;quot; contains the same inherent falsehood. Those who are really convinced that they have made progress in science would not demand freedom for the new views to continue side by side with the old, but the substitution of the new views for the old. The cry heard today, &amp;quot;Long live freedom of criticism&amp;quot;, is too strongly reminiscent of the fable of the empty barrel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We are marching in a compact group along a precipitous and difficult path, firmly holding each other by the hand. We are surrounded on all sides by enemies, and we have to advance almost constantly under their fire. We have combined, by a freely adopted decision, for the purpose of fighting the enemy, and not of retreating into the neighbouring marsh, the inhabitants of which, from the very outset, have reproached us with having separated ourselves into an exclusive group and with having chosen the path of struggle instead of the path of conciliation. And now some among us begin to cry out: Let us go into the marsh! And when we begin to shame them, they retort: What backward people you are! Are you not ashamed to deny us the liberty to invite you to take a better road! Oh, yes, gentlemen! You are free not only to invite us, but to go yourselves wherever you will, even into the marsh. In fact, we think that the marsh is your proper place, and we are prepared to render you every assistance to get there. Only let go of our hands, don’t clutch at us and don’t besmirch the grand word freedom, for we too are &amp;quot;free&amp;quot; to go where we please, free to fight not only against the marsh, but also against those who are turning towards the marsh!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The new advocates of &amp;quot;freedom of criticism&amp;quot;===&lt;br /&gt;
Now, this slogan (&amp;quot;freedom of criticism&amp;quot;) has in recent times been solemnly advanced by &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; (No. 10), organ of the Union of Russian Social-Democrats Abroad, not as a theoretical postulate, but as a political demand, as a reply to the question, &amp;quot;Is it possible to unite the Social-Democratic organisations operating abroad?&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;For a durable unity, there must be freedom of criticism&amp;quot; (p. 36).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From this statement two definite conclusions follow: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# that &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; has taken under its wing the opportunist trend in international Social-Democracy in general, and&lt;br /&gt;
# that &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; demands freedom for opportunism in Russian Social-Democracy. Let us examine these conclusions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; is &amp;quot;particularly&amp;quot; displeased with the &amp;quot;inclination of &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Zarya&#039;&#039; to predict a rupture between the &#039;&#039;Mountain&#039;&#039; and the &#039;&#039;Gironde&#039;&#039; in international Social-Democracy&amp;quot;. {{Refn|A comparison of the two trends within the revolutionary proletariat (the revolutionary and the opportunist), and the two trends within the revolutionary bourgeoisie in the eighteenth century (the Jacobin, known as the Mountain, and the Girondist) was made in the leading article in No. 2 of Iskra (February 1901). The article was written by Plekhanov. The Cadets,&amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot; name=&amp;quot;cadets&amp;quot; /&amp;gt; the Bezzaglavtsi,&amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot; name=&amp;quot;bezzaglavtsi&amp;quot; /&amp;gt; and the Mensheviks to this day love to refer to Jacobinism in Russian Social-Democracy. But how Plekhanov came to apply this concept for the first time against the Right wing of Social-Democracy – about this they prefer to keep silent or to forget|group=Lenin}}&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;quot;Generally speaking,&amp;quot; writes B. Krichevsky, editor of &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;, &amp;quot;this talk of the &#039;&#039;Mountain&#039;&#039; and the &#039;&#039;Gironde&#039;&#039; heard in the ranks of Social-Democracy represents a shallow historical analogy, a strange thing to come from the pen of a Marxist. The Mountain and the Gironde did not represent different temperaments-, or intellectual trends, as the historians of social thought may think, but different classes or strata – the middle bourgeoisie, on the one hand, and the petty bourgeoisie and the proletariat, on the other. In the modern socialist movement, however, there is no conflict of class interests; the socialist movement in its entirety, in &#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039; of its diverse forms (Krichevsky’s italics), including the most pronounced Bernsteinians, stands on the basis of the class interests of the proletariat and its class struggle for political and economic emancipation&amp;quot; (pp. 32-33).&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;A bold assertion! Has not Krichevsky heard of the fact, long ago noted, that it is precisely the extensive participation of an &amp;quot;academic&amp;quot; &#039;&#039;stratum&#039;&#039; in the socialist movement in recent years that has promoted such a rapid spread of Bernsteinism? And what is most important – on what does our author found his opinion that even &amp;quot;the most pronounced Bernsteinians&amp;quot; stand on the basis of the class struggle for the political and economic emancipation of the proletariat? No one knows. This determined defence of the most pronounced Bernsteinians is not supported by any argument or reasoning whatever. Apparently, the author believes that if he repeats what the most pronounced Bernsteinians say about themselves his assertion requires no proof. But can anything more &amp;quot;shallow&amp;quot; be imagined than this judgement of an entire trend based on nothing more than what the representatives of that trend say about themselves? Can anything more shallow be imagined than the subsequent &amp;quot;homily&amp;quot; on the two different and even diametrically opposite types, or paths, of party development? (&#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;, pp. 34-35.) The German Social-Democrats, in other words, recognise complete freedom of criticism, but the French do not, and it is precisely their example that demonstrates the &amp;quot;bane of intolerance&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To this we can only say that the very example B. Krichevsky affords us attests to the fact that the name Marxists is at times assumed by people who conceive history literally in the &amp;quot;Ilovaisky manner&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Ilovaisky, D. I.&#039;&#039; (1832–1920) — historian; author of numerous official textbooks of history that were extensively used in primary and secondary schools in pre-revolutionary Russia. In Ilovaisky’s texts history was reduced mainly to acts of kings and generals; the historical process was explained through secondary and fortuitous circumstances.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; To explain the unity of the German Socialist Party and the disunity of the French Socialist Party, there is no need whatever to go into the special features in the history of these countries, to contrast the conditions of military semiabsolutism in the one with republican parliamentarism in the other, to analyse the effects of the Paris Commune and the effects of the Exceptional Law Against the Socialists, to compare the economic life and economic development of the two countries, or to recall that &amp;quot;the unexampled growth of German Social-Democracy&amp;quot; was accompanied by a strenuous struggle, unique in the history of socialism, not only against erroneous theories (Mühlberger, Dühring &amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;Lenin&amp;quot;&amp;gt;At the time Engels dealt his blows at Duhring, many representatives of German Social-Democracy inclined towards the latter’s views, and accusations of acerbity, intolerance, uncomradely polemics, etc., were hurled at Engels even publicly at a Party Congress.{{Br}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the Congress of 1877, Most, and his supporters, introduced a resolution to prohibit the publication of Engels’s articles in &#039;&#039;Vorwarts&#039;&#039; because “they do not interest the overwhelming majority of the readers”, and VahIteich declared that their publication had caused great damage to the Party, that Duhring too had rendered services to Social-Democracy: “We must utilise everyone in the interests of the Party; let the professors engage in polemics if they care to do so, but &#039;&#039;Vorwarts&#039;&#039; is not the place in which to conduct them” (&#039;&#039;Vorwarts&#039;&#039;, No. 65, June 6, 1877). {{Br}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here we have another example of the defence of “freedom of criticism”, and our legal critics and illegal opportunists, who love so much to cite the example of the Germans, would do well to ponder it&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;, the &#039;&#039;Katheder&#039;&#039;-Socialists &amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Katheder-Socialism&#039;&#039; — a trend in bourgeois political economy that emerged in Germany in the seventies and eighties of the nineteenth century. Under the guise of socialism the Katheder-Socialists preached bourgeois-liberal reformism from university chairs (&#039;&#039;Katheder&#039;&#039;). {{Br}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They maintained that the bourgeois state was above classes, that it was capable of reconciling hostile classes and gradually introducing “socialism”, without affecting the interests of the capitalists, while, at the same time, taking the demands of the workers as far as possible into consideration. In Russia the views of the Katheder-Socialists were disseminated by the “legal marxists”.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;) but also against erroneous tactics (Lassalle), etc., etc. All that is superfluous! The French quarrel among themselves because they are intolerant; the Germans are united because they are good boys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And observe, this piece of matchless profundity is designed to &amp;quot;refute&amp;quot; the fact that puts to rout the defence of the Bernsteinians. The question whether or not the Bernsteinians &#039;&#039;stand&#039;&#039; on the basis of the class struggle of the proletariat is one that can be completely and irrevocably answered only by historical experience. Consequently, the example of France holds greatest significance in this respect, because France is the only country in which the Bernsteinians attempted &#039;&#039;to stand&#039;&#039; independently, on their own feet, with the warm approval of their German colleagues (and partly also of the Russian opportunists; cf. &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;, No. 2-3, pp. 83-84). The reference to the &amp;quot;intolerance&amp;quot; of the French, apart from its &amp;quot;historical&amp;quot; significance (in the Nozdryov &amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Nozdryov&#039;&#039; — a character In Gogol’s &#039;&#039;Dead Souls&#039;&#039; whom the author called “an historical personage” for the reason that wherever he went he left behind him a scandalous “history”.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; sense), turns out to be merely an attempt to –hush up very unpleasant facts with angry invectives.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nor are we inclined to make a present of the Germans to Krichevsky and the numerous other champions of &amp;quot;freedom of criticism&amp;quot;. If the &amp;quot;most pronounced Bernsteinians&amp;quot; are still tolerated in the ranks of the German party, it is only to the extent that they &#039;&#039;submit&#039;&#039; to the Hanover resolution &amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The Hanover&#039;&#039; resolution — resolution on “Attacks on the Fundamental Views and Tactics of the Party”, adopted by the German Social-Democratic Party Congress at Hanover, September 27 – October 2 (October 9–14), 1899. A discussion of this question at the Congress and the adoption of a special resolution were necessitated by the fact that the opportunists, led by Bernstein, launched a revisionist attack on Marxist theory and demanded a reconsideration of Social-Democratic revolutionary policy and tactics.{{Br}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The resolution adopted by the Congress rejected the demands of the revisionists, but failed to criticise and expose Bernsteinism. Bernstein’s supporters also voted for the resolution.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;, which emphatically rejected Bernstein’s &amp;quot;amendments&amp;quot;, and to the Lubeck resolution, which (notwithstanding the diplomatic terms in which it is couched) contains a direct warning to Bernstein. It is debatable, from the standpoint of the interests of the German party, whether diplomacy was appropriate and whether, in this case, a bad peace is better than a good quarrel; in short, opinions may differ as to the expediency of any one of the &#039;&#039;methods&#039;&#039; employed to reject Bernsteinism, but that the German party &#039;&#039;did reject&#039;&#039; Bernsteinism on two occasions, is a fact no one can fail to see. Therefore, to think that the German example confirms the thesis that &amp;quot;the most pronounced Bernsteinians stand on the basis of the class struggle of the proletariat, for political and economic emancipation&amp;quot;, means to fail completely to understand what is going on under our very eyes. {{Refn|It should be observed that Rabocheye Dyelo has always confined itself to a bare statement of facts concerning Bernsteinism in the German party and completely “refrained” from expressing its own opinion. &lt;br /&gt;
See, for instance, the reports of the Stuttgart Congress &amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot; name=&amp;quot;stuttcong&amp;quot; /&amp;gt; in No. 2-3 (p. 66), in which all the disagreements are reduced to “tactics” and the statement is merely made that the overwhelming majority remain true to the previous revolutionary tactics. Or, No. 4-5 (p. 25, et seq.), in which we have nothing but a paraphrasing of the speeches delivered at the Hanover Congress, with a reprint of Bebel’s resolution. An exposition and a criticism of Bernstein’s views are again put olf (as was the case in No. 2-8) to be dealt with in a “special article”. Curiously enough, in No. 4-5 (p. 33), we read the following: “...the views expounded by Bebel have the support of the vast majority of the Congress,” and a few lines thereafter: “... David defended Bernstein’s views.... First of all, he tried to show that ... Bernstein and his friends, after all is said and done (sic!), stand on the basis of the class struggle...” This was written in December 1899, and in September 1901 Rabocheye Dyelo, apparently no longer believing that Bebel was right, repeats David’s views as its own!|group=Lenin}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nor is that all. As we have seen, &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; demands &amp;quot;freedom of criticism&amp;quot; and defends Bernsteinism before &#039;&#039;Russian&#039;&#039; Social-Democracy. Apparently it convinced itself that we were unfair to our &amp;quot;Critics&amp;quot; and Bernsteinians. But to which ones? who? where? when? What did the unfairness represent? About this, not a word. &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; does not name a single Russian Critic or Bernsteinian! We are left with but one of two possible suppositions. &#039;&#039;Either&#039;&#039; the unfairly treated party is none other than &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; itself (this is confirmed by the fact that in the two articles in No. 10 reference is made only to the wrongs suffered by &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; at the hands of &#039;&#039;Zarya&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;). If that is the case, how is the strange fact to be explained that &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;, which always vehemently dissociated itself from all solidarity with Bernsteinism, could not defend itself without putting in a word in defence of the &amp;quot;most pronounced Bernsteinians&amp;quot; and of freedom of criticism? Or some third persons have been treated unfairly. if this is the case, then what reasons may there be for not naming them?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We see, therefore, that &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; is continuing to play the game of hide-and-seek it has played (as we shall show below) ever since its founding. And let us note further this &#039;&#039;first&#039;&#039; practical application of the vaunted &amp;quot;freedom of criticism&amp;quot;. In actual fact, not only was it forthwith reduced to abstention from all criticism, but also to abstention from expressing independent views altogether. The very &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;, which avoids mentioning Russian Bernsteinism as if it were a shameful disease (to use Starover’s &amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Starover&#039;&#039; (Old Believer)—the pseudonym of A. N. Potresov, a member of the &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; Editorial Board; he subsequently became a Menshevik.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; apt expression), proposes, for the treatment of this disease, to copy word for word the latest German prescription for the German variety of the malady! Instead of freedom of criticism slavish (worse: apish) imitation! The very same social and political content of modern international opportunism reveals itself in a variety of ways according to national peculiarities. In one country the opportunists have long ago come out under a separate flag; in another, they have ignored theory and in fact pursued the policy of the Radicals-Socialists; in a third, some members of the revolutionary party have deserted to the camp of opportunism and strive to achieve their aims, not in open struggle for principles and for new tactics, but by gradual, imperceptible, and, if one may so put it, unpunishable corruption of their party; in a fourth country, similar deserters employ the same methods in the gloom of political slavery, and with a completely original combination of &amp;quot;legal&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;illegal&amp;quot; activity, etc. To talk of freedom of criticism and of Bernsteinism as a condition for uniting the &#039;&#039;Russian&#039;&#039; Social Democrats and not to explain how &#039;&#039;Russian&#039;&#039; Bernsteinism has manifested itself and what particular fruits it has borne, amounts to talking with the aim of saying nothing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let us ourselves try, if only in a few words, to say what &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; did not want to say (or which was, perhaps, beyond its comprehension).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Criticism in Russia===&lt;br /&gt;
The chief distinguishing feature of Russia in regard to the point we are examining is that &#039;&#039;the very beginning&#039;&#039; of the spontaneous working-class movement, on the one hand, and of the turn of progressive public opinion towards Marxism, on the other, was marked by the combination of manifestly heterogeneous elements under a common flag to fight the common enemy (the obsolete social and political world outlook). We refer to the heyday of &amp;quot;legal Marxism&amp;quot;. Speaking generally, this was an altogether curious phenomenon that no one in the eighties or the beginning of the nineties would have believed possible. In a country ruled by an autocracy, with a completely enslaved press, in a period of desperate political reaction in which even the tiniest outgrowth of political discontent and protest is persecuted, the theory of revolutionary Marxism suddenly forces its way into the &#039;&#039;censored&#039;&#039; literature and, though expounded in Aesopian language, is understood by all the &amp;quot;interested&amp;quot;. The government had accustomed itself to regarding only the theory of the (revolutionary) Narodnaya Volya as dangerous, without, as is usual, observing its internal evolution, and rejoicing at any criticism levelled against it. Quite a considerable time elapsed (by our Russian standards) before the government realised what had happened and the unwieldy army of censors and gendarmes discovered the new enemy and flung itself upon him. Meanwhile, Marxist books were published one after another, Marxist journals and newspapers were founded, nearly everyone became a Marxist, Marxists were flattered, Marxists were courted, and the book publishers rejoiced at the extraordinary, ready sale of Marxist literature. It was quite natural, therefore, that among the Marxian neophytes who were caught up in this atmosphere, there should be more than one &amp;quot;author who got a swelled head...&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We can now speak calmly of this period as of an event of the past. It is no secret that the brief period in which Marxism blossomed on the surface of our literature was called forth by an alliance between people of extreme and of very moderate views. In point of fact, the latter were bourgeois democrats; this conclusion (so markedly confirmed by their subsequent &amp;quot;critical&amp;quot; development) suggested itself to some even when the &amp;quot;alliance&amp;quot; was still intact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That being the case, are not the revolutionary Social-Democrats who entered into the alliance with the future &amp;quot;Critics&amp;quot; mainly responsible for the subsequent &amp;quot;confusion&amp;quot;? This question, together with a reply in the affirmative, is sometimes heard from people with too rigid a view. But such people are entirely in the wrong. Only those who are not sure of themselves can fear to enter into temporary alliances even with unreliable people; not a single political party could exist without such alliances. The combination with the legal Marxists was in its way the first really political alliance entered into by Russian Social -Democrats. Thanks to this alliance, an astonishingly rapid victory was obtained over Narodism, and Marxist ideas (even though in a vulgarised form) became very widespread. Moreover, the alliance was not concluded altogether without &amp;quot;conditions&amp;quot;. Evidence of this is the burning by the censor, in 1895, of the Marxist collection &#039;&#039;Material on the Question of the Economic Development of Russia&#039;&#039;. If the literary agreement with the legal Marxists can be compared with a political alliance, then that book can be compared with a political treaty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The rupture, of course, did not occur because the &amp;quot;allies&amp;quot; proved to be bourgeois democrats. On the contrary, the representatives of the latter trend are natural and desirable allies of Social-Democracy insofar as its democratic tasks, brought to the fore by the prevailing situation in Russia, are concerned. But an essential condition for such an alliance must be the full opportunity for the socialists to reveal to the working class that its interests are diametrically opposed to the interests of the bourgeoisie. However, the Bernsteinian and &amp;quot;critical&amp;quot; trend, to which the majority of the legal Marxists turned, deprived the socialists of this opportunity and demoralised the socialist consciousness by vulgarising Marxism, by advocating the theory of the blunting of social contradictions, by declaring the idea of the social revolution and of the dictatorship of the proletariat to be absurd, by reducing the working-class movement and the class struggle to narrow trade-unionism and to a &amp;quot;realistic&amp;quot; struggle for petty, gradual reforms. This was synonymous with bourgeois democracy’s denial of socialism’s right to independence and, consequently, of its right to existence; in practice it meant a striving to convert the nascent working-class movement into an appendage of the liberals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Naturally, under such circumstances the rupture was necessary. But the &amp;quot;peculiar&amp;quot; feature of Russia manifested itself in the fact that this rupture simply meant the elimination of the Social-Democrats from the most accessible and widespread &amp;quot;legal&amp;quot; literature. The &amp;quot;ex-Marxists&amp;quot;, who took up the flag of &amp;quot;criticism&amp;quot; and who obtained almost a monopoly to &amp;quot;demolish Marxism, entrenched themselves in this literature. Catchwords like &amp;quot;Against orthodoxy&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Long live freedom of criticism&amp;quot; (now repeated by &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;) forthwith became the vogue, and the fact that neither the censor nor the gendarmes could resist this vogue is apparent from the publication of &#039;&#039;three&#039;&#039; Russian editions of the work of the celebrated Bernstein (celebrated in the Herostratean sense) and from the fact that the works of Bernstein, Mr. Prokopovich, and others were recommended by Zubatov (&#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;, No. 10). A task now devolved upon the Social Democrats that was difficult in itself and was made incredibly more difficult by purely external obstacles – the task of combating the new trend. This trend did not confine itself to the sphere of literature. The turn towards &amp;quot;criticism&amp;quot; was accompanied by an infatuation for Economism among Social-Democratic practical workers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manner in which the connection between, and interdependence of, legal criticism and illegal Economism arose and grew is in itself an interesting subject, one that could serve as the theme of a special article. We need only note here that this connection undoubtedly existed. The notoriety deservedly acquired by the &#039;&#039;Credo&#039;&#039; was due precisely to the frankness with which it formulated this connection and blurted out the fundamental political tendency of Economism – let the workers carry on the economic struggle (it would be more correct to say the trade unionist struggle, because the latter also embraces specifically working class politics) and let the Marxist intelligentsia merge with the liberals for the political &amp;quot;struggle.&amp;quot; Thus, trade-unionist work &amp;quot;among the people&amp;quot; meant fulfilling the first part of this task, while legal criticism meant fulfilling the second. This statement was such an excellent weapon against Economism that, had there been no &#039;&#039;Credo&#039;&#039;, it would have been worth inventing one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Credo was not invented, but it was published without the consent and perhaps even against the will of its authors. At all events, the present writer, who took part in dragging this new &amp;quot;programme&amp;quot; into the light of day, has heard complaints and reproaches to the effect that copies of the resume of the speakers’ views were distributed, dubbed the &#039;&#039;Credo&#039;&#039;, and even published in the press together with the protest! We refer to this episode because it reveals a very peculiar feature of our Economism – fear of publicity. This is a feature of Economism generally, and not of the authors of the &#039;&#039;Credo&#039;&#039; alone. It was revealed by that most outspoken and honest advocate of Economism, &#039;&#039;Rabochaya Mysl&#039;&#039;, and by &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; (which was indignant over the publication of &amp;quot;Economist&amp;quot; documents in the Vademecum), as well as by the Kiev Committee, which two years ago refused to permit the publication of its &#039;&#039;profession de foi&#039;&#039;, together with a repudiation of it, and by many other individual representatives of Economism.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This fear of criticism displayed by the advocates of freedom of criticism cannot be attributed solely to craftiness (although, on occasion, no doubt craftiness is brought into play: it would be improvident to expose the young and as yet frail shoots of the new trend. to attacks by opponents). No, the majority of the Economists look with sincere resentment (as by the very nature of Economism they must) upon all theoretical controversies, factional disagreements, broad political questions, plans for organising revolutionaries, etc. &amp;quot;Leave all that to the people abroad!&amp;quot; said a fairly consistent Economist to me one day, thereby expressing a very widespread (and again purely trade-unionist) view; our concern is the working-class movement, the workers, organisations here, in our localities; all the rest is merely the invention of doctrinaires, &amp;quot;the overrating of ideology&amp;quot;, as the authors of the letter, published in &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;, No. 12, expressed it, in unison with &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;, No. 10.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The question now arises: such being the peculiar features of Russian &amp;quot;criticism&amp;quot; and Russian Bernsteinism, what should have been the task of those who sought to oppose opportunism in deeds and not merely in words? First, they should have made efforts to resume the theoretical work that had barely begun in the period of legal Marxism and that fell anew on the shoulders of the comrades working underground. Without such work the successful growth of the movement was impossible. Secondly, they should have actively combated the legal &amp;quot;criticism&amp;quot; that was perverting people’s minds on a considerable scale. Thirdly, they should have actively opposed confusion and vacillation in the practical movement, exposing and repudiating every conscious or unconscious attempt to degrade our programme and our tactics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; did none of these things is well known; we shall have occasion below to deal with this well-known fact in detail and from various aspects. At the moment, however, we desire merely to show the glaring contradiction that exists between the demand for &amp;quot;freedom of criticism&amp;quot; and the specific features of our native criticism and Russian Economism. It suffices but to glance at the text of the resolution in which the Union of Russian Social Democrats Abroad endorsed the point of view of &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;quot;In the interests of the further ideological development of Social-Democracy, we recognise the freedom of criticism of Social-Democratic theory in Party literature to be absolutely necessary insofar as the criticism does not run counter to the class and revolutionary character of this theory&amp;quot; (&#039;&#039;Two Conferences&#039;&#039;, p. 10).&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;And the motivation? The resolution &amp;quot;in its first part coincides with the resolution of the Lubeck Party Congress on Bernstein&amp;quot;. . . . In the simplicity of their souls the &amp;quot;Unionists&amp;quot; failed to observe what a &#039;&#039;testimonium paupertatis&#039;&#039; (attestation of poverty) they betray with this copying. . .. &amp;quot;But ... in its second part, it restricts freedom of criticism much more than did the Lubeck Party Congress.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The resolution of the Union Abroad, then, is directed against the Russian Bernsteinians? If it is not, then the reference to Lubeck would be utterly absurd. But it is not true to say that it &amp;quot;restricts freedom of criticism&amp;quot;. In adopting their Hanover resolution, the Germans, point by point, rejected &#039;&#039;precisely&#039;&#039; the amendments proposed by Bernstein, while in their Lubeck resolution they cautioned &#039;&#039;Bernstein personally&#039;&#039;, by naming him. Our &amp;quot;free&amp;quot; imitators, however, make &#039;&#039;not a single allusion&#039;&#039; to a &#039;&#039;single&#039;&#039; manifestation of specifically Russian &amp;quot;criticism&amp;quot; and Russian Economism. In view of this omission, the bare reference to the class and revolutionary character of the theory leaves far wider scope for misinterpretation, particularly when the Union Abroad refuses to identify &amp;quot;so-called Economism&amp;quot; with opportunism (&#039;&#039;Two Conferences&#039;&#039;, p. 8, Paragraph 1). But all this, in passing. The main thing to note is that the positions of the opportunists in relation to the revolutionary Social-Democrats in Russia are diametrically opposed to those in Germany. In that country, as we know, the revolutionary Social-Democrats are in favour of preserving that which exists – the old programme and the tactics, which are universally known and have been elucidated in all their details by many decades of experience. But the &amp;quot;Critics&amp;quot; desire to introduce changes, and since these Critics represent an insignificant minority, and since they are very timid in their revisionist efforts, one can understand the motives of the majority in confining themselves to the dry rejection of &amp;quot;innovations&amp;quot;. In Russia, however, it is the Critics and the Economists who are in favour of preserving that which exists: the &amp;quot;Critics&amp;quot; want us to go on regarding them as Marxists and to guarantee them the &amp;quot;freedom of criticism&amp;quot; they enjoyed to the full (for, in fact, they never recognised any kind of &#039;&#039;party&#039;&#039; ties &amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;Lenin&amp;quot;&amp;gt;The fact alone of the absence of public party ties and party traditions, representing as it does a cardinal difference between Russia and Germany, should have warned all sensible socialists against blind imitation. But here is an instance of the lengths to which “freedom of criticism” goes in Russia. Mr. Bulgakov, the Russian Critic, utters the following reprimand to the Austrian Critic, Hertz: “Notwithstanding the independence of his conclusions, Hertz on this point on the question of co-operative societies) apparently remains excessively bound by the opinions of his party, and although he disagrees with it in details, he dare not reject the common principle” (&#039;&#039;Capitalism and Agriculture&#039;&#039;, Vol. II, p. 287). The subject of a politically enslaved state, in which nine hundred and ninety-nine out of a thousand of the population are corrupted to the marrow by political subservience and completely lack the conception of party honour and party ties, superciliously reproves a citizen of a constitutional state for being excessively “bound by the opinions of his party”! Our illegal organisations have nothing else to do, of course, but draw up resolutions on freedom of criticism....&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;, and, moreover, we never had a generally recognised party body that could &amp;quot;restrict&amp;quot; freedom of criticism, if only by counsel); the Economists want the revolutionaries to recognise the sovereign character of the present movement&amp;quot; (&#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;, No. 10, p. 25), i.e., to recognise the &amp;quot;legitimacy&amp;quot; of that which exists; they want the &amp;quot;ideologists&amp;quot; not to try to &amp;quot;divert&amp;quot; the movement from the path that &amp;quot;is determined by the interaction of material. elements and material environment&amp;quot; (&amp;quot;Letter&amp;quot; in &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;, No. 12); they want to have that struggle recognised as desirable &amp;quot;which it is possible for the workers to wage under the present conditions&amp;quot;, and as the only possible struggle, that &amp;quot;which they are actually waging at the present time&amp;quot; (&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;Separate Supplement&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; to &#039;&#039;Rabochaya Mysl&#039;&#039;, p. 14). We revolutionary Social-Democrats, on the contrary, are dissatisfied with this worship of spontaneity, i.e., of that which exists &amp;quot;at the present moment&amp;quot;. We demand that the tactics that have prevailed in recent years he changed; we declare that &amp;quot;before we can unite, and in order that we may unite, we must first of all draw firm and definite lines of demarcation&amp;quot;. In a word, the Germans stand for that which exists and reject changes; we demand a change of that which exists, and reject subservience thereto and reconciliation to it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This &amp;quot;slight&amp;quot; difference our &amp;quot;free&amp;quot; copyists of German resolutions failed to notice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Engels on the importance of the theoretical struggle===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Dogmatism, doctrinairism&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;ossification of the party – the inevitable retribution that follows the violent strait-lacing of thought&amp;quot; – these are the enemies against which the knightly champions of &amp;quot;freedom of criticism&amp;quot; in &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; rise up in arms. We are very glad that this question has been placed on the order of the day and we would only propose to add to it one other:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And who are the judges?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have before us two publishers’ announcements. One, &amp;quot;The Programme of the Periodical Organ of the Union of Russian Social Democrats Abroad – &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; (reprint from No. 1 of &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;), and the other, the &amp;quot;Announcement of the Resumption of the Publications of the Emancipation of Labour Group&amp;quot;. Both are dated 1899, when the &amp;quot;crisis of Marxism&amp;quot; had long been under discussion. And what do we find? We would seek in vain in the first announcement for any reference to this phenomenon, or a definite statement of the position the new organ intends to adopt on this question. Not a word is said about theoretical work and the urgent tasks that now confront it, either in this programme or in the supplements to it that were adopted by the Third Congress of the Union Abroad in 1901 (&#039;&#039;Two Conferences&#039;&#039;, pp. 15-18). During this entire time the Editorial Board of &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; ignored theoretical questions, in spite of the fact that these were questions that disturbed the minds of all Social-Democrats the world over.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The other announcement, on the contrary, points first of all to the declining interest in theory in recent years, imperatively demands &amp;quot;vigilant attention to the theoretical aspect of the revolutionary movement of the proletariat&amp;quot;, and calls for &amp;quot;ruthless criticism of the Bernsteinian and other anti-revolutionary tendencies&amp;quot; in our movement. The issues of &#039;&#039;Zarya&#039;&#039; to date show how this programme has been carried out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus, we see that high-sounding phrases against the ossification of thought, etc., conceal unconcern and helplessness with regard to the development of theoretical thought. The case of the Russian Social-Democrats manifestly illustrates the general European phenomenon (long ago noted also by the German Marxists) that the much vaunted freedom of criticism does not imply substitution of one theory for another, but freedom from all integral and pondered theory; it implies eclecticism and lack of principle. Those who have the slightest acquaintance with the actual state of our movement cannot but see that the wide spread of Marxism was accompanied by a certain lowering of the theoretical level. Quite a number of people with very little, and even a total lack of theoretical training joined the movement because of its practical significance and its practical successes. We can judge from that how tactless &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; is when, with an air of triumph, it quotes Marx’s statement: &amp;quot;Every step of real movement is more important than a dozen programmes.&amp;quot; To repeat these words in a period of theoretical disorder is like wishing mourners at a funeral many happy returns of the day. Moreover, these words of Marx are taken from his letter on the Gotha Programme &amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The Gotha Programme&#039;&#039; — the programme adopted by the German Social-Democratic Party at the Gotha Congress in 1875 when the Eisenachers and Lassalleans united. The programme suffered from eclecticism and opportunism, since the Eisenachers made concessions to the Lassalleans on the most important points and accepted their formulations. Marx and Engels subjected the Gotha Programme to scathing criticism and characterised it as a retrograde step as compared with the Eisenach Programme of 1869&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;, in which he &#039;&#039;sharply condemns&#039;&#039; eclecticism in the formulation of principles. If you must unite, Marx wrote to the party leaders, then enter into agreements to satisfy the practical aims of the movement, but do not allow any bargaining over principles, do not make theoretical &amp;quot;concessions&amp;quot;. This was Marx’s idea, and yet there are people among us who seek-in his name to belittle the significance of theory!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Without revolutionary theory there can be no revolutionary movement. This idea cannot be insisted upon too strongly at a time when the fashionable preaching of opportunism goes hand in hand with an infatuation for the narrowest forms of practical activity. Yet, for Russian Social-Democrats the importance of theory is enhanced by three other circumstances, which are often forgotten: first, by the fact that our Party is only in process of formation, its features are only just becoming defined, and it has as yet far from settled accounts with the other trends of revolutionary thought that threaten to divert the movement from the correct path. On the contrary, precisely the very recent past was marked by a revival of non-Social-Democratic revolutionary trends (an eventuation regarding which Axelrod long ago warned the Economists). Under these circumstances, what at first sight appears to be an &amp;quot;unimportant&amp;quot; error may lead to most deplorable consequences, and only short-sighted people can consider factional disputes and a strict differentiation between shades of opinion inopportune or superfluous. The fate of Russian Social-Democracy for very many years to come may depend on the strengthening of one or the other &amp;quot;shade&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Secondly, the Social-Democratic movement is in its very essence an international movement. This means, not only that we must combat national chauvinism, but that an incipient movement in a young country can be successful only if it makes use of the experiences of other countries. In order to make use of these experiences it is not enough merely to be acquainted with them, or simply to copy out the latest resolutions. What is required is the ability to treat these experiences critically and to test them independently. He who realises how enormously the modern working-class movement has grown and branched out will understand what a reserve of theoretical forces and political (as well as revolutionary) experience is required to carry out this task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thirdly, the national tasks of Russian Social-Democracy are such as have never confronted any other socialist party in the world. We shall have occasion further on to deal with the political and organisational duties which the task of emancipating the whole people from the yoke of autocracy imposes upon us. At this point, we wish to state only that the &#039;&#039;role of vanguard fighter can be fulfilled only by a party that is guided by the most advanced theory.&#039;&#039; To have a concrete understanding of what this means, let the reader recall such predecessors of Russian Social Democracy as Herzen, Belinsky, Chernyshevsky, and the brilliant galaxy of revolutionaries of the seventies; let him ponder over the world significance which Russian literature is now acquiring; let him. . . but be that enough!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let us quote what Engels said in 1874 concerning the significance of theory in the Social-Democratic movement. Engels recognizes, &#039;&#039;not two&#039;&#039; forms of the great struggle of Social Democracy (political and economic), as is the fashion among us, &#039;&#039;but three, placing the theoretical struggle on a par with the first two&#039;&#039;. His recommendations to the German working-class movement, which had become strong, practically and politically, are so instructive from the standpoint of present-day problems and controversies, that we hope the reader will not be vexed with us for quoting a long passage from his prefatory note to &#039;&#039;Der deutsche Bauernkrieg&#039;&#039;, which has long become a great bibliographical rarity:&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;quot;The German workers have two important advantages over those of the rest of Europe. First, they belong to the most theoretical people of Europe; and they have retained that sense of theory which the so-called ’educated’ classes of Germany have almost completely lost. Without German philosophy, which preceded it, particularly that of Hegel, German scientific socialism – the only scientific socialism that has ever existed – would never have come into being. Without a sense of theory among the workers, this scientific socialism would never have entered their flesh and blood as much as is the case. What an immeasurable advantage this is may be seen, on the one hand, from the indifference towards all theory, which is one of the main reasons why the English working-class movement crawls along so slowly in spite of the splendid organisation of the individual unions; on the other hand, from the mischief and confusion wrought by Proudhonism, in its original form, among the French and Belgians, and, in the form further caricatured by Bakunin, among the Spaniards and Italians.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;The second advantage is that, chronologically speaking, the Germans were about the last to come into the workers’ movement. Just as German theoretical socialism will never forget that it rests on the shoulders of Saint-Simon, Fourier, and Owen – three men who, in spite of all their fantastic notions and all their utopianism, have their place among the most eminent thinkers of all times, and whose genius anticipated innumerable things, the correctness of which is now being scientifically proved by us – so the practical workers’ movement in Germany ought never to forget that it has developed on the shoulders of the English and French movements, that it was able simply to utilise their dearly bought experience, and could now avoid their mistakes, which in their time were mostly unavoidable. Without the precedent of the English trade unions and French workers’ political struggles, without the gigantic impulse given especially by the Paris Commune, where would we be now?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;It must be said to the credit of the German workers that they have exploited the advantages of their situation with rare understanding. For the first time since a workers’ movement has existed, the struggle is being conducted pursuant to its three sides – the. theoretical, the political, and the practical-economic (resistance to the capitalists) – in harmony and in its interconnections, and in a systematic way. It is precisely in this, as it were, concentric attack, that the strength and invincibility of the German movement lies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Due to this advantageous situation, on the one hand, and to the insular peculiarities of the English and the forcible suppression of the French movement, on the other, the German workers have for the moment been placed in the vanguard of the proletarian struggle. How long events will allow them to occupy this post of honour cannot be foretold. But let us hope that as long as they occupy it, they will fill it fittingly. This demands redoubled efforts in every field of struggle and agitation. In particular, it will be the duty of the leaders to gain an ever clearer insight into all theoretical questions, to free themselves more and more from the influence of traditional phrases inherited from the old world outlook, and constantly to keep in mind that socialism, since it has become a science, demands that it be pursued as a science, i.e., that it be studied. The task will be to spread with increased zeal among the masses of the workers the ever more clarified understanding thus acquired, to knit together ever more firmly the organisation both of the party and of the trade unions (...)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;If the German workers progress in this way, they will not. be marching exactly at the head of the movement – it is not at all in the interest of this movement that the workers of any particular country should march at its head – but they will occupy an honourable place in the battle line; and they will stand armed for battle when either unexpectedly grave trials or momentous events demand of them increased courage, increased determination and energy.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;Engels’s words proved prophetic. Within a few years the German workers were subjected to unexpectedly grave trials in the form of the Exceptional Law Against the Socialists. And they met those trials armed for battle and succeeded in emerging from them victorious.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Russian proletariat will have to undergo trials immeasurably graver; it will have to fight a monster compared with which an antisocialist law in a constitutional country seems but a dwarf. History has now confronted us with an immediate task which is the &#039;&#039;most revolutionary&#039;&#039; of all the &#039;&#039;immediate&#039;&#039; tasks confronting the proletariat of any country. The fulfilment of this task, the destruction of the most powerful bulwark, not only of European, but (it may now be said) of Asiatic reaction, would make the Russian proletariat the vanguard of the international revolutionary proletariat. And we have the right to count upon acquiring this honourable title, already earned by our predecessors, the revolutionaries of the seventies, if we succeed in inspiring our movement, which is a thousand times broader and deeper, with the same devoted determination and vigour.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The spontaneity of the masses and the consciousness of the social-democrats ==&lt;br /&gt;
We have said that our movement, much more extensive and deep than the movement of the seventies, must be inspired with the same devoted determination and energy that inspired the movement at that time. Indeed, no one, we think, has until now doubted that the strength of the present-day movement lies in the awakening of the masses (principally, the industrial proletariat) and that its weakness lies in the lack of consciousness and initiative among the revolutionary leaders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, of late a staggering discovery has been made, which threatens to disestablish all hitherto prevailing views on this question. This discovery was made by &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;, which in its polemic with &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Zarya&#039;&#039; did not confine itself to making objections on separate points, but tried to ascribe &amp;quot;general disagreements&amp;quot; to a more profound cause — to the &amp;quot;different appraisals of the &#039;&#039;relative&#039;&#039; importance of the spontaneous and consciously ‘methodical’ element&amp;quot;. &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; formulated its indictment as a &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;belittling of the significance of the objective or the spontaneous element of development&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;. To this we say: Had the polemics with &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Zarya&#039;&#039; resulted in nothing more than causing &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; to hit upon these &amp;quot;general disagreements&amp;quot;, that alone would give us considerable satisfaction, so significant is this thesis and so clear is the light it sheds on the quintessence of the present-day theoretical and political differences that exist among Russian Social-Democrats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For this reason the question of the relation between consciousness and spontaneity is of such enormous general interest, and for this reason the question must be dealt with in great detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The beginning of the spontaneous upsurge===&lt;br /&gt;
In the previous chapter we pointed out how &#039;&#039;universally&#039;&#039; absorbed the educated youth of Russia was in the theories of Marxism in the middle of the nineties. In the same period the strikes that followed the famous St. Petersburg industrial war of 1896 assumed a similar general character. Their spread over the whole of Russia clearly showed the depth of the newly awakening popular movement, and if we are to speak of the &amp;quot;spontaneous element&amp;quot; then, of course, it is this strike movement which, first and foremost, must be regarded as spontaneous. But there is spontaneity and spontaneity. Strikes occurred in Russia in the seventies and sixties (and even in the first half of the nineteenth century), and they were accompanied by the &amp;quot;spontaneous&amp;quot; destruction of machinery, etc. Compared with these &amp;quot;revolts&amp;quot;, the strikes of the nineties might even be described as &amp;quot;conscious&amp;quot;, to such an extent do they mark the progress which the working-class movement made in that period. This shows that the &amp;quot;spontaneous element&amp;quot;, in essence, represents nothing more nor less than. consciousness in an &#039;&#039;embryonic form&#039;&#039;. Even the primitive revolts expressed the awakening of consciousness to a certain extent. The workers were losing their age-long faith in the permanence of the system which oppressed them and began... I shall not say to understand, but to sense the necessity for collective resistance, definitely abandoning their slavish submission to the authorities. But this was, nevertheless, more in the nature of outbursts of desperation and vengeance than of &#039;&#039;struggle&#039;&#039;. The strikes of the nineties revealed far greater flashes of consciousness; definite demands were advanced, the strike was carefully timed, known cases and instances in other places were discussed, etc. The revolts were simply the resistance of the oppressed, whereas the systematic strikes represented the class struggle in embryo, but only in embryo. Taken by themselves, these strikes were simply trade union struggles, not yet Social Democratic struggles. They marked the awakening antagonisms between workers and employers; but the workers, were not, and could not be, conscious of the irreconcilable antagonism of their interests to the whole of the modern political and social system, i.e., theirs was not yet Social-Democratic consciousness. In this sense, the strikes of the nineties, despite the enormous progress they represented as compared with the &amp;quot;revolts&amp;quot;, remained a purely spontaneous movement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have said that &#039;&#039;there could not have been&#039;&#039; Social-Democratic consciousness among the workers. It would have to be brought to them from without. The history of all countries shows that the working class, exclusively by its own effort, is able to develop only trade union consciousness, i.e., the conviction that it is necessary to combine in unions, fight the employers, and strive to compel the government to pass necessary labour legislation, etc. &amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;Lenin&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Trade-unionism does not exclude “politics” altogether, as some imagine. Trade unions have always conducted some political (but not Social-Democratic) agitation and struggle. We shall deal with the difference between trade union politics and Social-Democratic politics in the next chapter.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The theory of socialism, however, grew out of the philosophic, historical, and economic theories elaborated by educated representatives of the propertied classes, by intellectuals. By their social status the founders of modern scientific socialism, Marx and Engels, themselves belonged to the bourgeois intelligentsia. In the very same way, in Russia, the theoretical doctrine of Social-Democracy arose altogether independently of the spontaneous growth of the working-class movement; it arose as a natural and inevitable outcome of the development of thought among the revolutionary socialist intelligentsia. In the period under discussion, the middle nineties, this doctrine not only represented the completely formulated programme of the Emancipation of Labour group, but had already won over to its side the majority of the revolutionary youth in Russia.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hence, we had both the spontaneous awakening of the working masses, their awakening to conscious life and conscious struggle, and a revolutionary youth, armed with Social-Democratic theory and straining towards the workers. In this connection it is particularly important to state the oft-forgotten (and comparatively little-known) fact that, although the &#039;&#039;early&#039;&#039; Social-Democrats of that period &#039;&#039;zealously carried on economic agitation&#039;&#039; (being guided in this activity by the truly useful indications contained in the pamphlet &#039;&#039;On Agitation&#039;&#039;, &amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;The pamphlet &#039;&#039;On Agitation&#039;&#039; was written by A. Kremer (later an organiser of the Bund) and edited by Y. O. Tsederbaum (Martov) in Vilno in 1894; it was at first circulated in handwritten and hectographed copies, but at the end of 1897 it was printed in Geneva and supplied with a preface and a concluding piece by P. B. Axelrod. The pamphlet summarised the experiences gained in Social-Democratic work in Vilno and exerted a great influence on Russian Social-Democrats, since it called on them to reject narrow study-circle propaganda and to go over to mass agitation among the workers on issues of their everyday needs and demands. It exaggerated the role of the purely economic struggle, however, to the detriment of political agitation on issues of general democratic demands, and was the embryo of the future “Economism”. P. B. Axelrod not ed the one-sidedness of the “Vilno Economism” in his concluding piece to the Geneva edition; G. V. Plekhanov made a critical analysis of the pamphlet &#039;&#039;On Agitation&#039;&#039; in his &#039;&#039;Once More on Socialism and the Political Struggle&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; then still in manuscript), they did not regard this as their sole task. On the contrary, &#039;&#039;from the very beginning&#039;&#039; they set for Russian Social-Democracy the most far-reaching historical tasks, in general, and the task of overthrowing the autocracy, in particular. Thus, towards the end of 1895, the St. Petersburg group of Social-Democrats, which founded the League of Struggle for the Emancipation of the Working Class, prepared the first issue of a newspaper called &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;. This issue was ready to go to press when it was seized by the gendarmes, on the night of December 8, 1895, in a raid on the house of one of the members of the group, Anatoly Alexeyevich Vaneyey, &amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;Lenin&amp;quot;&amp;gt;A. A. Vaneyev died in Eastern Siberia in 1899 from consumption, which he contracted during solitary confinement in prison prior to his banishment. That is why we considered it possible to publish the above information, the authenticity of which we guarantee, for it comes from persons who were closely and directly acquainted with A. A. Vaneyev.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; so that the first edition of &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; was not destined to see the light of day. The leading article in this issue (which perhaps thirty years hence some &#039;&#039;Russkaya Starina&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Russkaya Starina&#039;&#039; (&#039;&#039;The Russian Antiquary&#039;&#039;) — a monthly magazine dealing with historical problems published in St. Petersburg from 1870 to 1918.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; will unearth in the archives of the Department of Police) outlined the historical tasks of the working class in Russia and placed the achievement of political liberty at their head. The issue also contained an article entitled &amp;quot;What Are Our Ministers Thinking About?&amp;quot; which dealt with the crushing of the elementary education committees by the police. In addition, there was some correspondence from St. Petersburg, and from other parts of Russia (e.g., a letter on the massacre of the workers in Yaroslavl Gubernia). This, &amp;quot;first effort&amp;quot;, if we are not mistaken, of the Russian Social-Democrats of the nineties was not a purely local, or less still, &amp;quot;Economic&amp;quot;, newspaper, but one that aimed to unite the strike movement with the revolutionary movement against the autocracy, and to win over to the side of Social-Democracy all who were oppressed by the policy of reactionary obscurantism. No one in the slightest degree acquainted with the state of the movement at that period could doubt that such a paper would have met with warm response among the workers of the capital and the revolutionary intelligentsia and would have had a wide circulation. The failure of the enterprise merely showed that the Social-Democrats of that period were unable to meet the immediate requirements of the time owing to their lack of revolutionary experience and practical training. This must be said, too, with regard to the &#039;&#039;S. Peterburgsky Rabochy Listok&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;S. Peterburgsky Rabochy Listok&#039;&#039; (&#039;&#039;St.Petersburg Workers’ Paper&#039;&#039;) — an illegal newspaper, organ of the St. Petersburg League of Struggle for the Emancipation of the Working Class. Two issues appeared: No. 1 in February 1897 (dated January and mimeographed in Russia in an edition of 300—400 copies) and No. 2 in September 1897 in Geneva.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and particularly with regard to Rabochaya Gazeta and the &#039;&#039;Manifesto&#039;&#039; of the Russian Social-Democratic Labour Party, founded in the spring of 1898. Of course, we would not dream of blaming the Social Democrats of that time for this unpreparedness. But in order to profit from the experience of that movement, and to draw practical lessons from it, we must thoroughly understand the causes and significance of this or that shortcoming. It is therefore highly important to establish the fact that a part (perhaps even a majority) of the Social-Democrats, active in the period of 1895-98, justly considered it possible even then, at the very beginning of the &amp;quot;spontaneous&amp;quot; movement, to come forward with a most extensive programme and a militant tactical line. &amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;Lenin&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;“In adopting a hostile attitude towards the activities of the Social-Democrats of the late nineties, Iskra ignores the absence at that time of conditions for any work other than the struggle for petty demands,”&#039;&#039; declare the Economists in their “Letter to Russian Social-Democratic Organs” (&#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; No. 12). The facts given above show that the assertion about “absence of conditions” &#039;&#039;is diametrically opposed to the truth.&#039;&#039; Not only at the end, but even in the mid-nineties, all the conditions existed for other work, besides the struggle for petty demands — all the conditions except adequate training of leaders. Instead of frankly admitting that we, the ideologists, the leaders, lacked sufficient training — the Economists seek to shift the blame entirely upon the “absence of conditions”, upon the effect of material environment that determines the road from which no ideologist will be able to divert the movement. What is this but slavish cringing before spontaneity, what but the infatuation of the “ideologists” with their own shortcomings?&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Lack of training of the majority of the revolutionaries, an entirely natural phenomenon, could not have roused any particular fears. Once the tasks were correctly defined, once the energy existed for repeated attempts to fulfil them, temporary failures represented only part misfortune. Revolutionary experience and organisational skill are things that can be acquired, provided the desire is there to acquire them, provided the shortcomings are recognised, which in revolutionary activity is more than half-way towards their removal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But what was only part misfortune became full misfortune when this consciousness began to grow dim (it was very much alive among the members of the groups mentioned), when there appeared people—and even Social -Democratic organs—that were prepared to regard shortcomings as virtues, that even tried to invent a &#039;&#039;theoretical&#039;&#039; basis for their &#039;&#039;slavish cringing before spontaneity&#039;&#039;. It is time to draw conclusions from this trend, the content of which is incorrectly and too narrowly characterised as Economism.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Bowing to spontaneity. &#039;&#039;Rabochaya Mysl&#039;&#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Before dealing with the literary manifestation of this subservience to spontaneity, we should like to note the following characteristic fact (communicated to us from the above-mentioned source), which throws light on the conditions in which the two future conflicting trends in Russian Social-Democracy arose and grew among the comrades working in St. Petersburg. In the beginning of 1897, just prior to their banishment, A. A. Vaneyev and several of his comrades attended a private meeting &amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;A private meeting&#039;&#039; referred to here was held in St. Petersburg between February 14 and 17 (February 26 and March 1), 1897. It was attended by V. I. Lenin, A. A. Vaneyev, G. M. Krzhizhanovsky, and other members of the St. Petersburg League of Struggle for the Emancipation of the Working Class, that is, by the “veterans” who had been released from prison for three days before being sent into exile to Siberia, as well as by the “young” leaders of the League of Struggle who had taken over the leadership of the League after Lenin’s arrest in December 1895.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; at which &amp;quot;old&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;young&amp;quot; members of the League of Struggle for the Emancipation of the Working Class gathered. The conversation centred chiefly about the question of organisation, particularly about the &amp;quot;rules for the workers’ mutual benefit fund&amp;quot;, which, in their final form, were published in &#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Listok&amp;quot; Rabotnika&#039;&#039;, &amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;“&#039;&#039;Listok&#039;&#039;” &#039;&#039;Rabotnika&#039;&#039; (&#039;&#039;The Workingman’s Paper&#039;&#039;) — published in Geneva by the Union of Russian Social-Democrats Abroad from 1896 to 1899; altogether there appeared 10 issues. Issues 1—8 were edited by the Emancipation of Labour group. But after the majority of the Union Abroad went over to “Economism”, the Emancipation of Labour group refused to continue editing the paper. Nos. 9 and 10 were issued by a new editorial board set up by the Union of Russian Social-Democrats Abroad.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; No. 9-10, p. 46. Sharp differences immediately showed themselves between the &amp;quot;old&amp;quot; members (&amp;quot;Decembrists&amp;quot;, as the St. Petersburg Social Democrats jestingly called them) and several the &amp;quot;young&amp;quot; members (who subsequently took an active part in the work of &#039;&#039;Rabochaya Mysl&#039;&#039;), with a heated discussion ensuing. The &amp;quot;young&amp;quot; members defended the main principles of the rules in the form in which they were published. The &amp;quot;old&amp;quot; members contended that the prime necessity was not this, but the consolidation of the League of Struggle into an organisation of revolutionaries to which all the various workers’ mutual benefit funds, students’ propaganda circles, etc., should be subordinated. It goes without saying that the disputing sides far from realised at the time that these disagreements were the beginning of a cleavage; on the contrary, they regarded them as something isolated and casual. But this fact shows that in Russia, too, Economism did not arise and spread without a struggle against the &amp;quot;old&amp;quot; Social-Democrats (which the Economists of today are apt to forget). And if, in the main, this struggle has not left &amp;quot;documentary&amp;quot; traces behind it, it is &#039;&#039;solely&#039;&#039; because the membership of the circles then functioning underwent such constant change that no continuity was established and, consequently, differences in point of view were not recorded in any documents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The founding of &#039;&#039;Rabochaya Mysl&#039;&#039; brought Economism to the light of day, but not at one stroke. We must picture to ourselves concretely the conditions for activity and the short-lived character of the majority of the Russian study circles (a thing that is possible only for those who have themselves experienced it) in order to understand how much there was of the fortuitous in the successes and failures of the new trend in various towns, and the length of time during which neither the advocates nor the opponents of the &amp;quot;new&amp;quot; could make up their minds — and literally had no opportunity of so doing — as to whether this really expressed a distinct trend or merely the lack of training of certain individuals. For example, the first mimeographed copies of &#039;&#039;Rabochaya Mysl&#039;&#039; never reached the great majority of Social-Democrats, and if we are able to refer to the leading article in the first number, it is only because it was reproduced in an article by V. I. (&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Listok&amp;quot; Rabotnika&#039;&#039;, No. 9-10, p. 47, et seq.), who, of course, did not fail to extol with more zeal than reason the new paper, which was so different from the papers and projects for papers mentioned above. &amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;Lenin&amp;quot;&amp;gt;It should be stated in passing that the praise of &#039;&#039;Rabochaya Mysl&#039;&#039; in November 1898, when Economism had become fully defined, especially abroad, emanated from the selfsame V. I, who very soon after became one of the editors of &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;. And yet &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; denied that there were two trends in Russian Social-Democracy, and continues to deny It to this day!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It is well worth dwelling on this leading article because it brings out in bold relief &#039;&#039;the entire spirit of Rabochaya Mysl&#039;&#039; and Economism generally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After stating that the arm of the &amp;quot;blue-coats&amp;quot; &amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;The tsarist gendarmes wore blue uniforms&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; could never halt the progress of the working-class movement, the leading article goes on to say: &amp;quot;. . . The virility of the working-class movement is due to the fact that the workers themselves are at last taking their fate into their own hands, and out of the hands of the leaders&amp;quot;; this fundamental thesis is then developed in greater detail. Actually, the leaders (i.e., the Social-Democrats, the organisers of the League of Struggle) were, one might say, torn out of the hands of the workers &amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;Lenin&amp;quot;&amp;gt;That this simile is a correct one is shown by the following characteristic fact. When, after the arrest of the “Decembrists”, the news spread among the workers of the Schlüsselburg Highway that the discovery and arrest were facilitated by an &#039;&#039;agent provocateur&#039;&#039;, N. N. Mikhailov, a dentist, who had been in contact with a group associated with the “Decembrists”, the workers were so enraged that they decided to kill him.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; by the police; yet it is made to appear that the workers were fighting against the leaders and liberated themselves from their yoke! Instead of sounding the call to go forward towards the consolidation of the revolutionary organisation and the expansion of political activity, the call was issued for a &#039;&#039;retreat&#039;&#039; to the purely trade union struggle. It was announced that &amp;quot;the economic basis of the movement is eclipsed by the effort never to forget the political ideal&amp;quot;, and that the watchword for the working-class movement was &amp;quot;Struggle for economic conditions&amp;quot; (!) or, better still, &amp;quot;The workers for the workers&amp;quot;. It was declared that strike funds &amp;quot;are more valuable to the movement than a hundred other Organisations&amp;quot; (compare this statement made in October 1897, with the polemic between the &amp;quot;Decembrists&amp;quot; and the young members in the beginning of 1897), etc. Catchwords like &amp;quot;We must concentrate, not on the ’cream’ of the workers, but on the ’average’, mass worker&amp;quot;; &amp;quot;Politics always obediently follows economics&amp;quot;, {{Refn|These quotations are taken from the same leading article in the first number of Rabochaya Mysl. One can judge from this the degree of theoretical training possessed by these “V. V.s of Russian Social-Democracy”&amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot; name=&amp;quot;VVs&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;, who kept repeating the crude vulgarisation of “economic materialism” at a time when the Marxists were carrying on a literary war against the real Mr. V. V., who had long ago been dubbed “a past master of reactionary deeds” for holding similar views on the relations between politics and economics!|group=Lenin}} etc., etc., became the fashion, exercising an irresistible influence upon the masses of the youth who were attracted to the movement but who, in the majority of cases, were acquainted only with such fragments of Marxism as were expounded in legally appearing publications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Political consciousness was completely overwhelmed by spontaneity — the spontaneity of the &amp;quot;Social-Democrats&amp;quot; who repeated Mr. V. V.’s &amp;quot;ideas&amp;quot;, the spontaneity of those workers who were carried away by the arguments that a kopek added to a ruble was worth more than any socialism or politics, and that they must &amp;quot;fight, knowing that they are fighting, not for the sake of some future generation, but for themselves and their children&amp;quot; (leader in &#039;&#039;Rabochaya Mysl&#039;&#039;, No. 1). Phrases like these have always been a favourite weapon of the West-European bourgeois, who, in their hatred for socialism, strove (like the German &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;Sozial-Politiker&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; Hirsch) to transplant English trade-unionism to their native soil and to preach to the workers that by engaging in the purely trade union struggle &amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;Lenin&amp;quot;&amp;gt;The Germans even have a special expression, &#039;&#039;Nur-Gewerkschaftler&#039;&#039;, which means an advocate of the “pure trade union” struggle.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; they would be fighting for themselves and for their children, and not for some future generations with some future socialism. And now the &amp;quot;V. V.s of Russian Social-Democracy&amp;quot; have set about repeating these bourgeois phrases. It is important at this point to note three circumstances that will be useful to our further analysis of &#039;&#039;contemporary&#039;&#039; differences. &amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;Lenin&amp;quot;&amp;gt;We emphasise the word &#039;&#039;contemporary&#039;&#039; for the benefit of those who may pharisaically shrug their shoulders and say: It is easy enough to attack &#039;&#039;Rabochaya Mysl&#039;&#039; now, but is not all this ancient history? &#039;&#039;Mutato nomine de te fabula narratur&#039;&#039; [change the name and the tale is about you] is our answer to such contemporary Pharisees, whose complete subjection to the ideas of Rabochaya Mysl will be &#039;&#039;proved&#039;&#039; further on.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;	 	 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Secondly, in the very first literary expression of Economism we observe the exceedingly curious phenomenon — highly characteristic for an understanding of all the differences prevailing among presentday Social Democrats — that the adherents of the &amp;quot;labour movement pure and simple&amp;quot;, worshippers of the closest &amp;quot;organic&amp;quot; contacts (&#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;’s term) with the proletarian struggle, opponents of any non-worker intelligentsia (even a socialist intelligentsia), are compelled, in order to defend their positions, to resort to the arguments of the &#039;&#039;bourgeois&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;pure trade-unionists&amp;quot;. This shows that from the very outset &#039;&#039;Rabochaya Mysl&#039;&#039; began — unconsciously — to implement the programme of the &#039;&#039;Credo&#039;&#039;. This shows (something &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; cannot grasp) that &#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039; worship of the spontaneity of the working class movement, all belittling of the role of &amp;quot;the conscious element&amp;quot;, of the role of Social-Democracy, &#039;&#039;means, quite independently of whether he who belittles that role desires it or not, a strengthening of the influence of bourgeois ideology upon the workers.&#039;&#039; All those who talk about &amp;quot;overrating the importance of ideology&amp;quot;, about exaggerating the role of the conscious element, etc., imagine that the labour movement pure and simple can elaborate, and will elaborate, an independent ideology for itself, if only the workers &amp;quot;wrest their fate from the hands of the leaders&amp;quot;. But this is a profound mistake. To supplement what has been said above, we shall quote the following profoundly true and important words of Karl. Kautsky on the new draft programme of the Austrian Social-Democratic Party:&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;quot;Many of our revisionist critics believe that Marx asserted that economic development and the class struggle create, not only the conditions for socialist production, but also, and directly, the &#039;&#039;consciousness&#039;&#039; [K. K.’s italics] of its necessity. And these critics assert that England, the country most highly developed capitalistically, is more remote than any other from this consciousness Judging by the draft, one might assume that this allegedly orthodox Marxist view, which is thus refuted, was shared by the committee that drafted the Austrian programme. In the draft programme it is stated: ‘The more capitalist development increases the numbers of the proletariat, the more the proletariat is compelled and becomes fit to fight against capitalism. The proletariat becomes conscious of the possibility and of the necessity for socialism.’ In this connection socialist consciousness appears to be a necessary and direct result of the proletarian class struggle. But this is absolutely untrue. Of course, socialism, as a doctrine, has its roots in modern economic relationships just as the class struggle of the proletariat has, and, like the latter, emerges from the struggle against the capitalist-created poverty and misery of the masses. But socialism and the class struggle arise side by side and not one out of the other; each arises under different conditions. Modern socialist consciousness can arise only on the basis of profound scientific knowledge. Indeed, modern economic science is as much a condition for socialist production as, say, modern technology, and the proletariat can create neither the one nor the other, no matter how much it may desire to do so; both arise out of the modern social process. The vehicle of science is not the proletariat, but the &#039;&#039;bourgeois intelligentsia&#039;&#039; [K. K.’s italics]: it was in the minds of individual members of this stratum that modern socialism originated, and it was they who communicated it to the more intellectually developed proletarians who, in their turn, introduce it into the proletarian class struggle where conditions allow that to be done. Thus, socialist consciousness is something introduced into the proletarian class struggle from without [&#039;&#039;von Aussen Hineingetragenes&#039;&#039;] and not something that arose within it spontaneously [&#039;&#039;urwüchsig&#039;&#039;]. Accordingly, the old Hainfeld programme quite rightly stated that the task of Social-Democracy is to imbue the proletariat (literally: saturate the proletariat) with the &#039;&#039;consciousness&#039;&#039; of its position and the consciousness of its task. There would be no need for this if consciousness arose of itself from the class struggle. The new draft copied this proposition from the old programme, and attached it to the proposition mentioned above. But this completely broke the line of thought...&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;Since there can be no talk of an independent ideology formulated by the working masses themselves in the process of their movement &amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;Lenin&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This does not mean, of course, that the workers have no part in creating such an ideology. They take part, however, not as workers, but as socialist theoreticians, as Proudhons and Weitlings; in other words, they take part only when they are able, and to the extent that they are able, more or less, to acquire the knowledge of their age and develop that knowledge. But in order that working men &#039;&#039;may succeed in this more often&#039;&#039;, every effort must be made to raise the level of the consciousness of the workers in general; it is necessary that the workers do not confine themselves to the artificially restricted limits of “&#039;&#039;literature for workers&#039;&#039;” but that they learn to an increasing degree to master &#039;&#039;general literature&#039;&#039;. It would be even truer to say “are not confined”, instead of “do not confine themselves”, because the workers themselves wish to read and do read all that is written for the intelligentsia, and only a few (bad) intellectuals believe that it is enough “for workers” to be told a few things about factory conditions and to have repeated to them over and over again what has long been known.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;, the only choice is — either bourgeois or socialist ideology. There is no middle course (for mankind has not created a &amp;quot;third&amp;quot; ideology, and, moreover, in a society torn by class antagonisms there can never be a non-class or an above-class ideology). Hence, to belittle the socialist ideology &#039;&#039;in any way, to turn aside from it in the slightest degree&#039;&#039; means to strengthen bourgeois ideology. There is much talk of spontaneity. But the &#039;&#039;spontaneous&#039;&#039; development of the working-class movement leads to its subordination to bourgeois ideology, &#039;&#039;to its development along the lines of the Credo programme;&#039;&#039; for the spontaneous working-class movement is trade-unionism, is &#039;&#039;Nur-Gewerkschaftlerei&#039;&#039;, and trade unionism means the ideological enslavement of the workers by the bourgeoisie. Hence, our task, the task of Social-Democracy, is &#039;&#039;to combat spontaneity, to divert&#039;&#039; the working-class movement from this spontaneous, trade-unionist striving to come under the wing of the bourgeoisie, and to bring it under the wing of revolutionary Social Democracy. The sentence employed by the authors of the Economist letter published in &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;, No. 12, that the efforts of the most inspired ideologists fail to divert the working-class movement from the path that is determined by the interaction of the material elements and the material environment is therefore &#039;&#039;tantamount to renouncing socialism&#039;&#039;. If these authors were capable of fearlessly, consistently, and thoroughly considering what they say, as everyone who enters the arena of literary and public activity should be, there would be nothing left for them but to &amp;quot;fold their useless arms over their empty breasts&amp;quot; and surrender the field of action to the Struves and Prokopoviches, who are dragging the working-class movement &amp;quot;along the line of least resistance&amp;quot;, i.e., along the line of bourgeois trade-unionism, or to the Zubatovs, who are dragging it along the line of clerical and gendarme &amp;quot;ideology&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let us recall the example of Germany. What was the historic service Lassalle rendered to the German working-class movement? It was that he &#039;&#039;diverted&#039;&#039; that movement from the path of progressionist trade-unionism and co-operativism towards which it had been spontaneously moving (&#039;&#039;with the benign assistance of Schulze-Delitzsch and his like&#039;&#039;). To fulfil such a task it was necessary to do something quite different from talking of underrating the spontaneous element, of tactics-as-process, of the interaction between elements and environment, etc. &#039;&#039;A fierce struggle against spontaneity&#039;&#039; was necessary, and only after such a struggle, extending over many years, was it possible, for instance, to convert the working population of Berlin from a bulwark of the progressionist party into one of the finest strongholds of Social-Democracy. This struggle is by no means over even today (as might seem to those who learn the history of the German movement from Prokopovich, and its philosophy from Struve). Even now the German working class is, so to speak, split up among a number of ideologies. A section of the workers is organised in Catholic and monarchist trade unions; another section is organised in the Hirsch-Duncker unions &amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The Hirsch-Duncker Unions&#039;&#039; were established in Germany in 1868 by Hirsch and Duncker, two bourgeois liberals. They preached the “harmony of class interests”, drew the workers away from the revolutionary class struggle against the bourgeoisie, and restricted the role of the trade unions to that of mutual benefit societies and educational bodies.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;, founded by the bourgeois worshippers of English trade-unionism; the third is organised in Social-Democratic trade unions. The last-named group is immeasurably more numerous than the rest, but the Social-Democratic ideology was able to achieve this superiority, and will be able to maintain it, only in an unswerving struggle against all other ideologies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But why, the reader will ask, does the spontaneous movement, the movement along the line of least resistance, lead to the domination of bourgeois ideology? For the simple reason that bourgeois ideology is far older in origin than socialist ideology, that it is more fully developed, and that it has at its disposal &#039;&#039;immeasurably&#039;&#039; more means of dissemination. &amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;Lenin&amp;quot;&amp;gt;It is often said that the working class &#039;&#039;spontaneously&#039;&#039; gravitates towards socialism. This is perfectly true in the sense that socialist theory reveals the causes of the misery of the working class more profoundly and more correctly than any other theory, and for that reason the workers are able to assimilate it so easily, &#039;&#039;provided&#039;&#039;, however, this theory does not itself yield to spontaneity, &#039;&#039;provided&#039;&#039; it subordinates spontaneity to itself. Usually this is taken for granted, but it is precisely this which &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; forgets or distorts. The working class spontaneously gravitates towards socialism; nevertheless, most widespread (and continuously and diversely revived) bourgeois ideology spontaneously imposes itself upon the working class to a still greater degree.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; And the younger the socialist movement in any given country, the more vigorously it must struggle against all attempts to entrench non-socialist ideology, and the more resolutely the workers must be warned against the bad counsellors who shout against &amp;quot;overrating the conscious element&amp;quot;, etc. The authors of the Economist letter, in unison with &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;, inveigh against the intolerance that is characteristic of the infancy of the movement. To this we reply: Yes, our movement is indeed in its infancy, and in order that it may grow up faster, it must become imbued with intolerance against those who retard its growth by their subservience to spontaneity. Nothing is so ridiculous and harmful as pretending that we are &amp;quot;old hands&amp;quot; who have long ago experienced all the decisive stages of the struggle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thirdly, the first issue of Rabochaya Mysl shows that the term &amp;quot;Economism&amp;quot; (which, of course, we do not propose to abandon, since, in one way or another, this designation has already established itself) does not adequately convey the real character of the new trend. &#039;&#039;Rabochaya Mysl&#039;&#039; does not altogether repudiate the political struggle; the rules for a workers’ mutual benefit fund published in its first issue contain a reference to combating the government. &#039;&#039;Rabochaya Mysl&#039;&#039; believes, however, that &amp;quot;politics always obediently follows economics&amp;quot; (&#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; varies this thesis when it asserts in its programme that &amp;quot;in Russia more than in any other country, the economic struggle is &#039;&#039;inseparable&#039;&#039; from the political struggle&amp;quot;). &#039;&#039;If by politics is meant Social-Democratic politics,&#039;&#039; then the theses of Rabochaya Mysl and &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; are utterly incorrect. The economic struggle of the workers is very often connected (although not inseparably) with bourgeois politics, clerical politics, etc., as we have seen. &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;’s theses are correct, if by politics is meant trade union politics, viz., the common striving of all workers to secure from the government measures for alleviating the distress to which their condition gives rise, but which do not abolish that condition, i.e., which do not remove the subjection of labour to capital. That striving indeed is common to the English trade-unionists, who are hostile to socialism, to the Catholic workers, to the &amp;quot;Zubatov&amp;quot; workers, etc. There is politics and politics. Thus, we see that &#039;&#039;Rabochaya Mysl&#039;&#039; does not so much deny the political struggle, as it bows to its &#039;&#039;spontaneity&#039;&#039;, to its unconsciousness. While fully recognising the political struggle (better: the political desires and demands of the workers), which arises spontaneously from the working-class movement itself, it absolutely refuses &#039;&#039;independently to work out&#039;&#039; a specifically &#039;&#039;Social-Democratic politics&#039;&#039; corresponding to the general tasks of socialism and to present-day conditions in Russia. Further on we shall show that &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; commits the same error.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The self-emancipation group and &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
We have dealt at such length with the little-known and now almost forgotten leading article in the first issue of Rabochaya Mysl because it was the first and most striking expression of that general stream of thought which afterwards emerged into the light of day in innumerable streamlets. V. I. was perfectly right when, in praising the first issue and the leading article of &#039;&#039;Rabochaya Mysl&#039;&#039;, he said that the article had been written in a &amp;quot;sharp and fervent&amp;quot; manner (&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Listok&amp;quot; Rabotnika&#039;&#039;, No. 9-10, p. 49). Every man with convictions who thinks he has something new to say writes &amp;quot;fervently&amp;quot; and in such a way as to make his views stand out in bold relief. Only those who are accustomed to sitting between two stools lack &amp;quot;fervour&amp;quot;; only such people are able to praise the fervour of &#039;&#039;Rabochaya Mysl&#039;&#039; one day and attack the &amp;quot;fervent polemics&amp;quot; of its opponents the next.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We shall not dwell on the &#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Separate Supplement&amp;quot; to Rabochaya Mysl&#039;&#039; (below we shall have occasion, on various points, to refer to this work, which expresses the ideas of the Economists more consistently than any other) but shall briefly mention the &amp;quot;Appeal of the Self-Emancipation of the Workers Group&amp;quot; (March 1899, reprinted in the London &#039;&#039;Nakanune&#039;&#039;, No. 7, July 1899). The authors of the &amp;quot;Appeal&amp;quot; rightly say that &amp;quot;the workers of Russia are &#039;&#039;only just awakening,&#039;&#039; are just beginning to look about them, and are &#039;&#039;instinctively clutching at the first available means of struggle&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;. Yet they draw from this the same false conclusion as that drawn by &#039;&#039;Rabochaya Mysl&#039;&#039;, forgetting that the instinctive is the unconscious (the spontaneous) to the aid of which socialists must come; that the &amp;quot;first available means of struggle&amp;quot; will always be, in modern society, the trade union means of struggle, and the &amp;quot;first available&amp;quot; ideology the bourgeois (trade union) ideology. Similarly, these authors do not &amp;quot;repudiate&amp;quot; politics, they merely (merely!) echo Mr. V. V. that politics is the superstructure, and therefore, &amp;quot;political agitation must be the superstructure to the agitation carried on in favour of the economic struggle; it must arise on the basis of this struggle and follow in its wake&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As for &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;, it began its activity with the &amp;quot;defence&amp;quot; of the Economists. It stated a &#039;&#039;downright untruth&#039;&#039; in its opening issue (No. 1, pp. 141-42) in claiming that it &amp;quot;does not know to which young comrades Axelrod referred&amp;quot; when he warned the Economists in his well-known pamphlet. In the polemic that flared up with Axelrod and Plekhanov over this untruth, &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; had to admit that &amp;quot;in form of perplexity, it sought &#039;&#039;to defend&#039;&#039; all the younger Social-Democrats abroad from this unjust accusation&amp;quot; (the charge of narrowness levelled by Axelrod at the Economists). In reality this accusation was completely justified, and &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; knew perfectly well that, among others, it applied also to V. I., a member of its Editorial Board. Let me note in passing that in this polemic Axelrod was entirely right and &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; entirely wrong in their respective interpretations of my pamphlet &#039;&#039;The Tasks of the Russian Social-Democrats&#039;&#039;. The pamphlet was written in 1897, before the appearance of &#039;&#039;Rabochaya Mysl&#039;&#039;, when I thought, rightly, that the &#039;&#039;original tendency&#039;&#039; of the St. Petersburg League of Struggle, which I characterised above, was dominant. And this tendency was dominant at least until the middle of 1898. Consequently, &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; had no right whatever, in its attempt to deny the existence and danger of Economism, to refer to a pamphlet that expressed views &#039;&#039;forced out&#039;&#039; by Economist views in St. Petersburg in 1897-98. &amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;Lenin&amp;quot;&amp;gt;In defending its first untruth (“we do not know to which young comrades Axelrod referred”), &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; added a second, when it wrote in its &#039;&#039;Reply&#039;&#039;: &amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;“Since the review of &#039;&#039;The Tasks&#039;&#039; was published, tendencies have arisen, or become more or less clearly defined, among certain Russian Social-Democrats, towards economic one-sidedness, which represent a step backwards from the state of our movement as described in &#039;&#039;The Tasks&#039;&#039;” (p. 9). &amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;This, in the &#039;&#039;Reply&#039;&#039;, published &#039;&#039;in 1900&#039;&#039;. But the first issue of &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; (containing the review) appeared in &#039;&#039;April 1899&#039;&#039;. Did Economism really arise only in 1899? No. The year 1899 saw the first protest of the &#039;&#039;Russian&#039;&#039; Social-Democrats against Economism (the protest against the &#039;&#039;Credo&#039;&#039;). Economism arose in 1897, as &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; very well knows, for already in &#039;&#039;November 1898&#039;&#039;, V. I. was praising Rabochaya Mysl (see &#039;&#039;“Listok” Rabotnika&#039;&#039;, No. 9-10)&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; not only &amp;quot;defended&amp;quot; the Economists, it itself constantly fell into their fundamental errors. The source of this confusion is to be found in the ambiguity of the interpretation given to the following thesis of the &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; programme: &amp;quot;We consider that the most important phenomenon of Russian life, the one that will mainly &#039;&#039;determine the tasks&#039;&#039; [our italics] and the character of the publication activity of the Union, is the &#039;&#039;mass working-class movement&#039;&#039; [&#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;’s italics] which has arisen in recent years.&amp;quot; That the mass movement is a most important phenomenon is a fact not to be disputed. But the crux of the matter is, how is one to understand the statement that the mass working class movement will &amp;quot;determine the tasks&amp;quot;? It may be interpreted in one of two ways. &#039;&#039;Either&#039;&#039; it means bowing to the spontaneity of this movement, i.e., reducing the role of Social-Democracy to mere subservience to the working-class movement as such (the interpretation of &#039;&#039;Rabochaya Mysl&#039;&#039;, the Self-Emancipation Group, and other Economists), or it means that the mass movement places before us new theoretical, political, and organisational tasks, far more complicated than those that might have satisfied us in the period before the rise of the mass movement. &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; inclined and still inclines towards the first interpretation, for it has said nothing definite about any new tasks, but has argued constantly as though the &amp;quot;mass movement&amp;quot; &#039;&#039;relieves&#039;&#039; us of the necessity of clearly understanding and fulfilling the tasks it sets before us. We need only point out that &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; considered that it was impossible to set the overthrow of the autocracy as the &#039;&#039;first&#039;&#039; task of the mass working-class movement, and that it degraded this task (in the name of the mass movement) to that of a struggle for immediate political demands (Reply, p. 25).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We shall pass over the article by B. Krichevsky, editor of &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;, entitled &amp;quot;The Economic and the Political Struggle in the Russian Movement&amp;quot;, published in No. 7 of that paper, in which these very mistakes &amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;Lenin&amp;quot;&amp;gt;The “stages theory”, or the theory of “timid zigzags”, in the political struggle is expressed, for example, in this article, in the following way: “Political demands, which in their character are common to the whole of Russia, should, however, at first (this was written in August 1900!) correspond to the experience gained by the given stratum (&#039;&#039;sic&#039;&#039;!) of workers in the economic struggle. Only [!] on the basis of this experience can and should political agitation be taken up,” etc. (p. 11). On page 4, the author, protesting against what he regards as the absolutely unfounded charge of Economist heresy, pathetically exclaims: “What Social-Democrat does not know that according to the theories of Marx and Engels the economic interests of certain classes play a decisive role in history, and, &#039;&#039;consequently&#039;&#039;, that particularly the proletariat’s struggle for its economic interests must be of paramount importance in its class development and struggle for emancipation?” (Our italics.) The word “consequently” is completely irrelevant. The fact that economic interests play a decisive role &#039;&#039;does not in the least imply&#039;&#039; that the economic (i.e., trade union) struggle is of prime importance; for the most essential, the “decisive” interests of classes can be satisfied &#039;&#039;only by&#039;&#039; radical &#039;&#039;political&#039;&#039; changes in general. In particular the fundamental economic interests of the proletariat can be satisfied only by a political revolution that will replace the dictatorship of the bourgeoisie by the dictatorship of the proletariat. Krichevsky repeats the arguments of the “V. V.’s of Russian Social-Democracy” (viz., that politics follows economics, etc.) and of the Bernsteinians of German Social-Democracy (e.g., by similar arguments Woltmann sought to prove that the workers must first of all acquire “economic power” before they can think about political revolution)&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; are repeated, and proceed directly to &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;, No. 10. We shall not, of course, enter in detail into the various objections raised by Krichevsky and Martynov against &#039;&#039;Zarya&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;. We are here interested solely in the basis of principles on which &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;, in its tenth issue, took its stand. Thus, we shall not examine the strange fact that &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; saw a &amp;quot;diametrical contradiction&amp;quot; between the proposition:&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;quot;Social-Democracy does not, tie its hands, it does not restrict its activities to some one preconceived plan or method of political struggle; it recognises all means of struggle as long as they correspond to the forces at-the disposal of the Party,&amp;quot; etc. (&#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;, No. 1).&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;and the proposition:&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;quot;Without a strong organisation skilled in waging political struggle under all circumstances and at all times, there can be no question of that systematic plan of action, illumined by firm principles and steadfastly carried out, which alone is worthy of the name of tactics&amp;quot; (&#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;, No. 4).&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;To confound recognition, &#039;&#039;in principle&#039;&#039;, of all means of struggle, of all plans and methods, provided they are expedient, with the demand &#039;&#039;at a given political moment&#039;&#039; to be guided by a strictly observed plan is tantamount, if we are to talk of tactics, to confounding the recognition by medical science of various methods of treating diseases with the necessity for adopting a certain definite method of treatment for a given disease. The point is, however, that &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;, itself the victim of a disease which we have called bowing to spontaneity, refuses to recognise any &amp;quot;method of treatment&amp;quot; for that disease. Hence, it has made the remarkable discovery that &amp;quot;tactics-as-plan contradicts the fundamental spirit of Marxism&amp;quot; (No. 10, p. 18), that tactics are &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;a process of growth of Party tasks, which grow together with the Party&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; (p. 11, &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;’s italics). This remark has every chance of becoming a celebrated maxim, a permanent monument to the &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;trend&amp;quot;. To the question, whither? the leading organ replies: Movement is a process of changing the distance between the starting-point and subsequent points of the movement. This matchless example of profundity is not merely a curiosity (were it that, it would not be worth dealing with at length), but &#039;&#039;the programme of a whole trend&#039;&#039;, the very programme which R. M. (in the &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;Separate Supplement&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; to &#039;&#039;Rabochaya Mysl&#039;&#039;) expressed in the words: That struggle is desirable which is possible, and the struggle which is possible is that which is going on at the given moment. This is precisely the trend of unbounded opportunism, which passively adapts itself to spontaneity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Tactics-as-plan contradicts the essence of Marxism!&amp;quot; But this is a slander of Marxism; it means turning Marxism into the caricature held up by the Narodniks in their struggle against us. It means belittling the initiative and energy of class-conscious fighters, whereas Marxism, on the contrary, gives a gigantic impetus to the initiative and energy of the Social-Democrat, opens up for him the widest perspectives, and (if one may so express it) places at his disposal the mighty force of many millions of workers &amp;quot;spontaneously&amp;quot; rising for the struggle. The entire history of international Social-Democracy teems with plans advanced now by one, now by another political leader, some confirming the far-sightedness and the correct political and organisational views of their authors and others revealing their short-sightedness and their political errors. At the time when Germany was at one of the crucial turning-points in its history — the formation of the Empire, the opening of the Reichstag, and the granting of universal suffrage — Liebknecht had one plan for Social-Democratic politics and work in general, and Schweitzer had another. When the anti-socialist law came down on the heads of the German socialists, Most and Hasselmann had one plan — they were prepared then and there to call for violence and terror; Hochbert, Schramm, and (partly) Bernstein had another — they began to preach to the Social-Democrats that they themselves had provoked the enactment of the law by being unreasonably bitter and revolutionary, and must now earn forgiveness by their exemplary conduct. There was yet a third plan, proposed by those who prepared and carried out the publication of an illegal organ. It is easy, of course, with hindsight, many years after the struggle over the selection of the path to be followed, and after history has pronounced its verdict as to the expediency of the path selected, to utter profound maxims about the growth of Party tasks, which grow together with the Party. But at a time of confusion, when the Russian &amp;quot;Critics&amp;quot; and Economists are degrading Social-Democracy to the level of trade-unionism, and when the terrorists are strongly advocating the adoption of &amp;quot;tactics-as-plan&amp;quot; that repeats the old mistakes, at such a time, to confine oneself to profundities of this kind, means simply to issue to oneself a &amp;quot;certificate of poverty&amp;quot;. At a time when many Russian Social-Democrats suffer from a lack of initiative and energy, from an inadequate &amp;quot;scope of political propaganda, agitation, and organisation,&amp;quot; from a lack of &amp;quot;plans&amp;quot; for a broader organisation of revolutionary work, at such a time, to declare that &amp;quot;tactics-as-plan&amp;quot; contradicts the essence of Marxism means not only to vulgarise Marxism in the realm of theory, but &#039;&#039;to drag the Party backward&#039;&#039; in practice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; goes on to sermonise:&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;quot;The task of the revolutionary Social-Democrat is only to accelerate objective development by his conscious work, not to obviate it or substitute his own subjective plans for this development. &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; knows all this in theory; but the enormous importance which Marxism justly attaches to conscious revolutionary work causes it in practice, owing to its doctrinaire view of tactics, &#039;&#039;to belittle the significance of the objective or the spontaneous element of development&amp;quot;&#039;&#039; (p. 18).&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;Another example of the extraordinary theoretical confusion worthy of Mr. V. V. and his fraternity. We would ask our philosopher: how may a designer of subjective plans &amp;quot;belittle&amp;quot; objective development? Obviously by losing sight of the fact that this objective development creates or strengthens, destroys or weakens certain classes, strata, or groups, certain nations or groups of nations, etc., and in this way serves to determine a given international political alignment of forces, or the position adopted by revolutionary parties, etc. If the designer of plans did that, his guilt would not be that he belittled the spontaneous element, but, on the contrary, that he belittled the &#039;&#039;conscious&#039;&#039; element, for he would then show that he lacked the &amp;quot;consciousness&amp;quot; properly to understand objective development. Hence, the very talk of &amp;quot;estimating the &#039;&#039;relative&#039;&#039; significance&amp;quot; (&#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;’s italics) of spontaneity and consciousness itself reveals a complete lack of &amp;quot;consciousness&amp;quot;. If certain &amp;quot;spontaneous elements of development&amp;quot; can be grasped at all by human understanding, then an incorrect estimation of them will be tantamount to &amp;quot;belittling the conscious element&amp;quot;. But if they cannot be grasped, then we do not know them, and therefore cannot speak of them. What then is Krichevsky discussing? If he thinks that &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;’s &amp;quot;subjective plans&amp;quot; are erroneous (as he in fact declares them to be), he should have shown what objective facts they ignore, and only then charged &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; with &#039;&#039;lacking political consciousness&#039;&#039; for ignoring them, with &amp;quot;belittling the conscious element&amp;quot;, to use his own words. If, however, displeased with subjective plans, he can bring forward no argument other than that of &amp;quot;belittling the spontaneous element&amp;quot; (!), he merely shows: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# that, theoretically, he understands Marxism &#039;&#039;a la&#039;&#039; Kareyev and Mikhailovsky, who have been sufficiently ridiculed by Beltov; and &lt;br /&gt;
# that, practically, he is quite satisfied with the &amp;quot;spontaneous elements of development&amp;quot; that have drawn our legal Marxists towards Bernsteinism and our Social-Democrats towards Economism, and that he is &amp;quot;full of wrath&amp;quot; against those who have determined at all costs &#039;&#039;to divert&#039;&#039; Russian Social-Democracy from the path of &amp;quot;spontaneous&amp;quot; development.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Further, there follow things that are positively droll. &amp;quot;Just as human beings will reproduce in the old-fashioned way despite all the discoveries of natural science, so the birth of a new social order will come about, in the future too, &#039;&#039;mainly&#039;&#039; as a result of elemental outbursts, despite all the discoveries of social science and the increase in the number of conscious fighters&amp;quot; (p. 19). Just as our grandfathers in their old-fashioned wisdom used to say, Anyone can bring children into the world, so today the &amp;quot;modern socialists&amp;quot; (&#039;&#039;a la&#039;&#039; Nartsis Tuporylov) &amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Nartsis Tuporylov&#039;&#039; (&#039;&#039;Narcissus Blunt-Snout&#039;&#039;) was the pseudonym under which Y. O. Martov published his satirical poem “Hymn of the Contemporary Russian Socialist” in &#039;&#039;Zarya&#039;&#039;, No. 1, April 1901. The “Hymn” ridiculed the “Economists” and their adaptations to spontaneous events.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; say in their wisdom, Anyone can participate in the spontaneous birth of a new social order. We too hold that anyone can. All that is required for participation of that kind is &#039;&#039;to yield&#039;&#039; to Economism when Economism reigns and to terrorism when terrorism arises. Thus, in the spring of this year, when it was so important to utter a note of warning against infatuation with terrorism, &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; stood in amazement, confronted by a problem that was &amp;quot;new&amp;quot; to it. And now, six months after, when the problem has become less topical, it presents us at one and the same time with the declaration: &amp;quot;We think that it is not and should not be the task of Social-Democracy to counteract the rise of terroristic sentiments&amp;quot; (&#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;, No. 10, p. 23), and with the Conference resolution: &amp;quot;The Conference regards systematic and aggressive terror as being inopportune&amp;quot; (&#039;&#039;Two Conferences&#039;&#039;, p. 18). How beautifully clear and coherent this is! Not to counteract, but to declare inopportune, and to declare it in such a way that unsystematic and defensive terror does not come within the scope of the &amp;quot;resolution&amp;quot;. It must be admitted that such a resolution is extremely safe and is fully insured against error, just as a man who talks, but says nothing, insures himself against error. All that is needed to frame such a resolution is an ability to keep &#039;&#039;at the tail end&#039;&#039; of the movement. When &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; ridiculed &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; for declaring the question of terror to be new, the latter angrily accused &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; of &amp;quot;having the incredible effrontery to impose upon the Party organisation solutions of tactical questions proposed by a group of emigrant writers more than fifteen years ago&amp;quot; (p. 24). Effrontery. indeed, and what an overestimation of the conscious element — first to resolve questions theoretically beforehand, and then to try to convince the organisation, the Party, and the masses of the correctness of this solution! &amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;Lenin&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nor must it be forgotten that in solving “theoretically” the problem of terror, the Emancipation of Labour group &#039;&#039;generalised&#039;&#039; the experience of the antecedent revolutionary movement&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; How much better it would be to repeat the elements and, without &amp;quot;imposing&amp;quot; anything upon anybody, swing with every &amp;quot;turn&amp;quot; — whether in the direction of Economism or in the direction of terrorism. &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; even generalises this great precept of worldly wisdom and accuses &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Zarya&#039;&#039; of &amp;quot;setting up their programme against the movement, like a spirit hovering over the formless chaos&amp;quot; (p. 29). But what else is the function of Social-Democracy if not to be a &amp;quot;spirit&amp;quot; that not only hovers over the spontaneous movement, but also &#039;&#039;raises&#039;&#039; this movement &#039;&#039;to the level of &amp;quot;its programme&amp;quot;?&#039;&#039; Surely, it is not its function to drag at the &#039;&#039;tail&#039;&#039; of the movement. At best, this would be of no service to the movement; at worst, it would be exceedingly harmful. &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;, however, not only follows this &amp;quot;tactics-as-process&amp;quot;, but elevates it to a principle, so that it would be more correct to describe its tendency not as opportunism, but as &#039;&#039;tail-ism&#039;&#039; (from the word &#039;&#039;tail&#039;&#039;). And it must be admitted that those who are determined always to follow behind the movement and be its tail are absolutely and forever guaranteed against &amp;quot;belittling the spontaneous element of development&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And so, we have become convinced that the fundamental error committed by the &amp;quot;new trend&amp;quot; in Russian Social-Democracy is its bowing to spontaneity and its failure to understand that the spontaneity of the masses demands a high degree of consciousness from us Social-Democrats. The greater the spontaneous upsurge of the masses and the more widespread the movement, the more rapid, incomparably so, the demand for greater consciousness in the theoretical, political and organisational work of Social-Democracy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The spontaneous upsurge of the masses in Russia proceeded (and continues) with such rapidity that the young Social Democrats proved unprepared to meet these gigantic tasks. This unpreparedness is our common misfortune, the misfortune of &#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039; Russian Social-Democrats. The upsurge of the masses proceeded and spread with uninterrupted continuity; it not only continued in the places where it began, but spread to new localities and to new strata of the population (under the influence of the working class movement, there was a renewed ferment among the student youth, among the intellectuals generally, and even among the peasantry). Revolutionaries, however, &#039;&#039;lagged behind&#039;&#039; this upsurge, both in their &amp;quot;theories&amp;quot; and in their activity; they failed to establish a constant and continuous organisation capable of &#039;&#039;leading&#039;&#039; the whole movement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Chapter I, we established that &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; belittled our theoretical tasks and that it &amp;quot;spontaneously&amp;quot; repeated the fashionable catchword &amp;quot;freedom of criticism&amp;quot;; those who repeated this catchword lacked the &amp;quot;consciousness&amp;quot; to understand that the positions of the opportunist &amp;quot;Critics&amp;quot; and those of the revolutionaries in Germany and in Russia are diametrically opposed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the following chapters, we shall show how this bowing to spontaneity found expression in the sphere of the political tasks and in the organisational work of Social-Democracy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Trade-unionist politics and social-democratic politics==&lt;br /&gt;
We shall again begin by praising &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;. &amp;quot;Literature of Exposure and the Proletarian Struggle&amp;quot; is the title Martynov gave the article on his differences with &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; published in &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;, No. 10. He formulated the substance of the differences as follows: &amp;quot;We cannot confine ourselves solely to exposing the system that stands in its (the working-class party’s) path of development. We must also react to the immediate and current interests of the proletariat.... &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; . . . is in fact an organ of revolutionary opposition that exposes the state of affairs in our country, particularly the political state of affairs.... We, however, work and shall continue to work for the cause of the working class in close organic contact with the proletarian struggle&amp;quot; (p. 63). One cannot help being grateful to Martynov for this formula. It is of outstanding general interest, because substantially it embraces not only our disagreements with &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;, but the general disagreement between ourselves and the Economists on the political struggle. We have shown that the Economists do not altogether repudiate &amp;quot;politics&amp;quot;, but that they are constantly straying from the Social-Democratic to the trade-unionist conception of politics. Martynov strays in precisely this way, and we shall therefore take his views as a &#039;&#039;model&#039;&#039; of Economist error on this question. As we shall endeavour to prove, neither the authors of the &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;Separate Supplement&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; to &#039;&#039;Rabochaya Mysl&#039;&#039; nor the authors of the manifesto issued by the Self-Emancipation Group, nor the authors of the Economist letter published in &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;, No. 12, will have any right to complain against this choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Political agitation and its restriction by the economists===&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone knows that the economic&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[1]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; &amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[1]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; To avoid misunderstanding, we must point out that here, and throughout this pamphlet, by economic struggle, we imply (in keeping with the accepted usage among us) the &amp;quot;practical economic struggle&amp;quot;, which Engels, in the passage quoted above, described as &amp;quot;resistance to the capitalists&amp;quot;, and which in free countries is known as the organised-labour syndical, or trade union struggle.—&#039;&#039;Lenin&#039;&#039; struggle of the Russian workers underwent widespread development and consolidation simultaneously with the production of &amp;quot;literature&amp;quot; exposing economic (factory and occupational) conditions. The &amp;quot;leaflets&amp;quot; were devoted mainly to the exposure of the factory system, and very soon a veritable passion for exposures was roused among the workers. As soon as the workers realised that the Social-Democratic study circles desired to, and could, supply them with a new kind of leaflet that told the whole truth about their miserable existence, about their unbearably hard toil, and their lack of rights, they began to send in, actually flood us with, correspondence from the factories and workshops. This &amp;quot;exposure literature&amp;quot; created a tremendous sensation, not only in the particular factory exposed in the given leaflet, but in all the factories to which news of the, revealed facts spread. And since the poverty and want among the workers in the various enterprises and in the various trades are much the same, the &amp;quot;truth about the life of the workers&amp;quot; stirred everyone. Even among the most backward workers, a veritable passion arose to &amp;quot;get into print&amp;quot; — a noble passion for this rudimentary form of war against the whole of the present social system which is based upon robbery and oppression. And in the overwhelming majority of cases these &amp;quot;leaflets&amp;quot; were in truth a declaration of war, because the exposures served greatly to agitate the workers; they evoked among them common demands for the removal of the most glaring outrages and roused in them a readiness to support the demands with strikes. Finally, the employers themselves were compelled to recognise the significance of these leaflets as a declaration of war, so much so that in a large number of cases they did not even wait for the outbreak of hostilities. As is always the case, the mere publication of these exposures made them effective, and they acquired the significance of a strong moral influence. On more than one occasion, the mere appearance of a leaflet proved sufficient to secure the satisfaction of all or part of the demands put forward. In a word, economic (factory) exposures were and remain an important lever in the economic struggle. And they will continue to retain this significance as long as there is capitalism, which makes it necessary for the workers to defend themselves. Even in the most advanced countries of Europe it can still be seen that the exposure of abuses in some backward trade, or in some forgotten branch of domestic industry, serves as a starting-point for the awakening of class-consciousness, for the beginning of a trade union struggle, and for the spread of socialism.&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[2]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overwhelming majority of Russian Social-Democrats have of late been almost entirely absorbed by this work of organising the exposure of factory conditions. Suffice it to recall Rabochaya Mysl to see the extent to which they have been absorbed by it — so much so, indeed, that they have lost sight of the fact that this, &#039;&#039;taken by itself&#039;&#039;, is in essence still not Social-Democratic work, but merely trade union work. As a matter of fact, the exposures merely dealt with the relations between the workers &#039;&#039;in a given trade&#039;&#039; and their employers, and all they achieved was that the sellers of labour power learned to sell their &amp;quot;commodity&amp;quot; on better terms and to fight the purchasers over a purely commercial deal. These exposures could have served (if properly utilised by an organisation of revolutionaries) as a beginning and a component part of Social-Democratic activity; but they could also have led (and, given a worshipful attitude towards spontaneity, were bound to lead) to a &amp;quot;purely trade union&amp;quot; struggle and to a non-Social-Democratic working-class movement. Social-Democracy leads the struggle of the working class, not only for better terms for the sale of labour-power, but for the abolition of the social system that compels the propertyless to sell themselves to the rich. Social-Democracy represents the working class, not in its relation to a given group of employers alone, but in its relation to all classes of modern society and to the state as an organised political force. Hence, it follows that not only must Social-Democrats not confine themselves exclusively to the economic struggle, but that they must not allow the organisation of economic exposures to become the predominant part of their activities. We must take up actively the political education of the working class and the development of its political consciousness. &#039;&#039;Now&#039;&#039; that &#039;&#039;Zarya&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; have made the first attack upon Economism, &amp;quot;all are agreed&amp;quot; on this (although some agree only in words, as we shall soon see).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The question arises, what should political education consist in? Can it be confined to the propaganda of working-class hostility to the autocracy? Of course not. It is not enough &#039;&#039;to explain&#039;&#039; to the workers that they are politically oppressed (any more than it is &#039;&#039;to explain&#039;&#039; to them that their interests are antagonistic to the interests of the employers). Agitation must be conducted with regard to every concrete example of &#039;&#039;this&#039;&#039; oppression (as we have begun to carry on agitation round concrete examples of economic oppression). Inasmuch as this oppression affects the most diverse classes of society, inasmuch as it manifests itself in the most varied spheres of life and activity — vocational, civic, personal, family, religious, scientific, etc., etc. — is it not evident that &#039;&#039;we shall not be fulfilling our task&#039;&#039; of developing the political consciousness of the workers if we do not &#039;&#039;undertake&#039;&#039; the organisation of the &#039;&#039;political exposure&#039;&#039; of the autocracy in &#039;&#039;all its aspects?&#039;&#039; In order to carry on agitation round concrete instances of oppression, these instances must be exposed (as it is necessary to expose factory abuses in order to carry on economic agitation).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One might think this to be clear enough. It turns out, however, that it is only in words that &amp;quot;all&amp;quot; are agreed on the need to develop political consciousness, &#039;&#039;in all its aspects&#039;&#039;. It turns out that &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;, for example, far from tackling the task of organising (or making a start in organising) comprehensive political exposure, is even trying &#039;&#039;to drag Iskra&#039;&#039;, which has undertaken this task, &#039;&#039;away from it&#039;&#039;. Listen to the following: &amp;quot;The political struggle of the working class is merely [it is certainly not ‘merely’] the most developed, wide, and effective form of economic struggle&amp;quot; (programme of &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;, published in issue No. 1, p. 3). &amp;quot;The Social-Democrats are now confronted with the task of lending the economic struggle itself, as far as possible, a political character&amp;quot; (Martynov, &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;, No. 10, p. 42). &amp;quot;The economic struggle is the most widely applicable means of drawing the masses into active political struggle&amp;quot; (resolution adopted by the Conference of the Union Abroad and &amp;quot;amendments&amp;quot; thereto, &#039;&#039;Two Conferences&#039;&#039;, pp. 11 and 17). As the reader will observe, all these theses permeate &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; from its very first number to the latest &amp;quot;Instructions to the Editors&amp;quot;, and all of them evidently express a single view regarding political agitation and struggle. Let us examine this view from the standpoint of the opinion prevailing among all Economists, that political agitation must &#039;&#039;follow&#039;&#039; economic agitation. Is it true that, in general,&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[3]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; the economic struggle &amp;quot;is the most widely applicable means&amp;quot; of drawing the masses into the political struggle? It is entirely untrue. &#039;&#039;Any and every&#039;&#039; manifestation of police tyranny and autocratic outrage, not only in connection with the economic struggle, is not one whit less &amp;quot;widely applicable&amp;quot; as a means of &amp;quot;drawing in&amp;quot; the masses. The rural superintendents and the flogging of peasants, the corruption of the officials and the police treatment of the &amp;quot;common people&amp;quot; in the cities, the fight against the famine-stricken and the suppression of the popular striving towards enlightenment and knowledge, the extortion of taxes and the persecution of the religious sects, the humiliating treatment of soldiers and the barrack methods in the treatment of the students and liberal intellectuals — do all these and a thousand other similar manifestations of tyranny, though not directly connected with the &amp;quot;economic&amp;quot; struggle, represent, in general, &#039;&#039;less&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;widely applicable&amp;quot; means and occasions for political agitation and for drawing the masses into the political struggle? The very opposite is true. Of the sum total of cases in which the workers suffer (either on their own account or on account of those closely connected with them) from tyranny, violence, and the lack of rights, undoubtedly only a small minority represent cases of police tyranny in the trade union struggle as such. Why then should we, beforehand, &#039;&#039;restrict&#039;&#039; the scope of political agitation by declaring only &#039;&#039;one&#039;&#039; of the means to be &amp;quot;the most widely applicable&amp;quot;, when Social-Democrats must have, in addition, other, generally speaking, no less &amp;quot;widely applicable&amp;quot; means?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the dim and distant past (a full year ago! &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; wrote: &amp;quot;The masses begin to understand immediate political demands after one strike, or at all events, after several&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;as soon as the government sets the police and gendarmerie against them&amp;quot; [&#039;&#039;August&#039;&#039; (No. 7) 1900, p. 15]. This opportunist theory of stages has now been rejected by the Union Abroad, which makes a concession to us by declaring: &amp;quot;There is no need whatever to conduct political agitation right from the beginning, exclusively on an economic basis&amp;quot; (&#039;&#039;Two Conferences&#039;&#039;, p. 11). The Union’s repudiation of part of its former errors will show the future historian of Russian Social-Democracy better than any number of lengthy arguments the depths to which our Economists have degraded socialism! But the Union Abroad must be very naive indeed to imagine that the abandonment of one form of restricting politics will induce us to agree to another form. Would it not be more logical to say, in this case too, that the economic struggle should be conducted on the widest possible basis, that it should always be utilised for political agitation, but that &amp;quot;there is no need whatever&amp;quot; to regard the economic struggle as the &#039;&#039;most&#039;&#039; widely applicable means of drawing the masses into active political struggle?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Union Abroad attaches significance to the fact that it has substituted the phrase &amp;quot;most widely applicable means&amp;quot; for the phrase &amp;quot;the best means&amp;quot; contained in one of the resolutions of the Fourth Congress of the Jewish Workers’ Union (Bund). We confess that we find it difficult to say which of these resolutions is the better one. In our opinion they are &#039;&#039;both worse&#039;&#039;. Both the Union Abroad and the Bund fall into the error (partly, perhaps unconsciously, under the influence of tradition) of giving an Economist, trade-unionist interpretation to politics. Whether this is done by employing the word &amp;quot;best&amp;quot; or the words &amp;quot;most widely applicable&amp;quot; makes no essential difference whatever. Had the Union Abroad said that &amp;quot;political agitation on an economic basis&amp;quot; is the most widely applied (not &amp;quot;applicable&amp;quot;) means, it would have been right in regard to a certain period in the development of our Social-Democratic movement. It would have been right in regard to the &#039;&#039;Economists&#039;&#039; and to many (if not the majority) of the practical workers of 1898-1901; for these practical Economists &#039;&#039;applied&#039;&#039; political agitation (to the extent that they applied it at all) &#039;&#039;almost exclusively on an economic basis&#039;&#039;. Political agitation on such lines was recognised and, as we have seen, even recommended by Rabochaya Mysl and the Self-Emancipation Group. &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; should have &#039;&#039;strongly condemned&#039;&#039; the fact that the useful work of economic agitation was accompanied by the harmful restriction of the political struggle; instead, it declares the means most widely &#039;&#039;applied (by the Economists)&#039;&#039; to be the most widely &#039;&#039;applicable&#039;&#039;! It is not surprising that when we call these people Economists, they can do nothing but pour every manner of abuse upon us; call us &amp;quot;mystifiers&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;disrupters&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;papal nuncios&amp;quot;, and &amp;quot;slanderers&amp;quot;&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[4]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; go complaining to the whole world that we have mortally offended them; and declare almost on oath that &amp;quot;not a single Social-Democratic organisation is now tinged with Economism&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[5]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; Oh, those evil, slanderous politicians! They must have deliberately invented this Economism, out of sheer hatred of mankind, in order mortally to offend other people.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What concrete, real meaning attaches to Martynov’s words when he sets before Social-Democracy the task of &amp;quot;lending the economic struggle itself a political character&amp;quot;? The economic struggle is the collective struggle of the workers against their employers for better terms &#039;&#039;in the sale of their labour-power&#039;&#039;, for better living and working conditions. This struggle is necessarily a trade union struggle, because working conditions differ greatly in different trades, and, consequently, the struggle &#039;&#039;to improve&#039;&#039; them can only be conducted on the basis of trade organisations (in the Western countries, through trade unions; in Russia, through temporary trade associations and through leaflets, etc.). Lending &amp;quot;the economic struggle itself a political character&amp;quot; means, therefore, striving to secure satisfaction of these trade demands, the improvement of working conditions in each separate trade by means of &amp;quot;legislative and administrative measures&amp;quot; (as Martynov puts it on the ensuing page of his article, p. 43). This is precisely what all workers’ trade unions do and always have done. Read the works of the soundly scientific (and &amp;quot;soundly&amp;quot; opportunist) Mr. and Mrs. Webb and you will see that the British trade unions long ago recognised, and have long been carrying out, the task of &amp;quot;lending the economic struggle itself a political character&amp;quot;; they have long been fighting for the right to strike, for the removal of all legal hindrances to the co-operative and trade union movements, for laws to protect women and children, for the improvement of labour conditions by means of health and factory legislation, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus, the pompous phrase about &amp;quot;lending the economic struggle &#039;&#039;itself&#039;&#039; a political character&amp;quot;, which sounds so &amp;quot;terrifically&amp;quot; profound and revolutionary, serves as a screen to conceal what is in fact the traditional striving &#039;&#039;to degrade&#039;&#039; Social-Democratic politics to the level of trade union politics. Under the guise of rectifying the onesidedness of &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;, which, it is alleged, places &amp;quot;the revolutionising of dogma higher than the revolutionising of life&amp;quot;,&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[6]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; we are presented with the &#039;&#039;struggle for economic reforms&#039;&#039; as if it were something entirely new. In point of fact, the phrase &amp;quot;lending the economic struggle itself a political character&amp;quot; means nothing more than the struggle for economic reforms. Martynov himself might have come to this simple conclusion, had he pondered over the significance of his own words. &amp;quot;Our Party,&amp;quot; he says, training his heaviest guns on &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;, &amp;quot;could and should have presented concrete demands to the government for legislative and administrative measures against economic exploitation, unemployment, famine, etc.&amp;quot; (&#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;, No. 10, pp. 42-43). Concrete demands for measures — does not this mean demands for social reforms? Again we ask the impartial reader: Are we slandering the &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;-ites (may I be forgiven for this awkward, currently used designation!) by calling them concealed Bernsteinians when, as their point of &#039;&#039;disagreement with Iskra&#039;&#039;, they advance their thesis on the necessity of struggling for economic reforms?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Revolutionary Social-Democracy has always included the struggle for reforms as part of its activities. But it utilises &amp;quot;economic&amp;quot; agitation for the purpose of presenting to the government, not only demands for all sorts of measures, but also (and primarily) the demand that it cease to be an autocratic government. Moreover, it considers it its duty to present this demand to the government on the basis, not of the economic struggle &#039;&#039;alone&#039;&#039;, but of all manifestations in general of public and political life. In a word, it subordinates the struggle for reforms, as the part to the whole, to the revolutionary struggle for freedom and for socialism. Martynov, however, resuscitates the theory of stages in a new form and strives to prescribe, as it were, an exclusively economic path of development for the political struggle. By advancing at this moment, when the revolutionary movement is on the upgrade, an alleged special &amp;quot;task&amp;quot; of struggling for reforms, he is dragging the Party backwards and is playing into the hands of both &amp;quot;Economist&amp;quot; and liberal opportunism.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To proceed. Shamefacedly hiding the struggle for reforms behind the pompous thesis of &amp;quot;lending the economic struggle itself a political character&amp;quot;, Martynov advanced, as if it were a special point, &#039;&#039;exclusively economic&#039;&#039; (indeed, exclusively factory) &#039;&#039;reforms&#039;&#039;. As to the reason for his doing that, we do not know it. Carelessness, perhaps? Yet if he had in mind something else besides &amp;quot;factory&amp;quot; reforms, then the whole of his thesis, which we have cited, loses all sense. Perhaps he did it because he considers it possible and probable that the government will make &amp;quot;concessions&amp;quot; only in the economic sphere?&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[7]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; If so, then it is a strange delusion. Concessions are also possible and are made in the sphere of legislation concerning flogging, passports, land redemption payments, religious sects, the censorship, etc., etc. &amp;quot;Economic&amp;quot; concessions (or pseudo-concessions) are, of course, the cheapest and most advantageous from the government’s point of view, because by these means it hopes to win the confidence of the working masses. For this very reason, we Social-Democrats &#039;&#039;must not&#039;&#039; under any circumstances or in any way whatever create grounds for the belief (or the misunderstanding) that we attach greater value to economic reforms, or that we regard them as being particularly important, etc. &amp;quot;Such demands,&amp;quot; writes Martynov, speaking of the concrete demands for legislative and administrative measures referred to above, &amp;quot;would not be merely a hollow sound, because, promising certain palpable results, they might be actively supported by the working masses....&amp;quot; We are not Economists, oh no! We only cringe as slavishly before the &amp;quot;palpableness&amp;quot; of concrete results as do the Bernsteins, the Prokopoviches, the Struves, the R.M.s, and &#039;&#039;tutti quanti!&#039;&#039; We only wish to make it understood (together with Nartsis Tuporylov) that all which &amp;quot;does not promise palpable results&amp;quot; is merely a &amp;quot;hollow sound&amp;quot;! We are only trying to argue as if the working masses were incapable (and had not already proved their capabilities, notwithstanding those who ascribe their own philistinism to them) of actively supporting &#039;&#039;every&#039;&#039; protest against the autocracy, even if it &#039;&#039;promises absolutely no palpable results whatever!&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let us take, for example, the very &amp;quot;measures&amp;quot; for the relief of unemployment and the famine that Martynov himself advances. &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; is engaged, judging by what it has promised, in drawing up and elaborating a programme of &amp;quot;concrete [in the form of bills?] demands for legislative and administrative measures&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;promising palpable results&amp;quot;, while &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;, which &amp;quot;constantly places the revolutionising of dogma higher than the revolutionising of life&amp;quot;, has tried to explain the inseparable connection between unemployment and the whole capitalist system, has given warning that &amp;quot;famine is coming&amp;quot;, has exposed the police &amp;quot;fight against the famine-stricken&amp;quot;, and the outrageous &amp;quot;provisional penal servitude regulations&amp;quot;; and &#039;&#039;Zarya&#039;&#039; has published a special reprint, in the form of an agitational pamphlet, of a section of its &amp;quot;Review of Home Affairs&amp;quot;, dealing with the famine.&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[8]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; But good God! How &amp;quot;onesided&amp;quot; were these incorrigibly narrow and orthodox doctrinaires, how deaf to the calls of &amp;quot;life itself&amp;quot;! Their articles contained — oh horror! — &#039;&#039;not a single&#039;&#039;, can you imagine it? not a single &amp;quot;concrete demand&amp;quot; &amp;quot;promising palpable results&amp;quot;! Poor doctrinaires! They ought to be sent to Krichevsky and Martynov to be taught that tactics are a process of growth, of that which grows, etc., and that the economic struggle &#039;&#039;itself&#039;&#039; should be given a political character!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;In addition to its immediate revolutionary significance, the economic struggle of the workers against the employers and the government [&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;economic&#039;&#039; struggle against the government&amp;quot;!] has also this significance: it constantly brings home to the workers the fact that they have no political rights&amp;quot; (Martynov, p. 44). We quote this passage, not in order to repeat for the hundredth and thousandth time what has been said above, but in order to express particular thanks to Martynov for this excellent new formula: &amp;quot;the economic struggle of the workers against the employers and the government&amp;quot;. What a gem! With what inimitable skill and mastery in eliminating all partial disagreements and shades of differences among Economists this clear and concise proposition expresses the &#039;&#039;quintessence&#039;&#039; of Economism, from summoning the workers &amp;quot;to the political struggle, which they carry on in the general interest, for the improvement of the conditions of all the workers&amp;quot;,&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[9]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; continuing through the theory of stages, and ending in the resolution of the Conference on the &amp;quot;most widely applicable&amp;quot;, etc. &amp;quot;Economic struggle against the government&amp;quot; is precisely trade-unionist politics, which is still very far from being Social-Democratic politics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How Martynov rendered Plekhanov more profound===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;What a large number of Social-Democratic Lomonosovs have appeared among us lately!&amp;quot; observed a comrade one day, having in mind the astonishing propensity of many who are inclined toward Economism to, arrive, &amp;quot;necessarily, by their own under standing&amp;quot;, at great truths (e.g., that the economic struggle stimulates the workers to ponder over their lack of rights) and in doing so to ignore, with the supreme contempt of born geniuses, all that has been produced by the antecedent development of revolutionary thought and of the revolutionary movement. Lomonosov-Martynov is precisely such a born genius. We need but glance at his article &amp;quot;Urgent Questions&amp;quot; to see how by &amp;quot;his own understanding&amp;quot; he &#039;&#039;arrives at&#039;&#039; what was long ago said by Axelrod (of whom our Lomonosov, naturally, says not a word); how, for instance, he is &#039;&#039;beginning&#039;&#039; to understand that we cannot ignore the opposition of such or such strata of the bourgeoisie (&#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;, No. 9, pp. 61, 62, 71; compare this with Rabocheye Dyelo’s Reply to Axelrod, pp. 22, 23-24), etc. But alas, he is only &amp;quot;arriving&amp;quot; and is only &amp;quot;beginning&amp;quot;, not more than that, for so little has he understood Axelrod’s ideas, that hetalks about &amp;quot;the economic struggle against the employers and the government&amp;quot;. For three years (1898-1901) &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; has tried hard to understand Axelrod, but has so far not understood him! Can one of the reasons be that Social-Democracy, &amp;quot;like mankind&amp;quot;, always sets itself only tasks that can be achieved?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But the Lomonosovs are distinguished not only by their ignorance of many things (that would be but half misfortune!), but also by their unawareness of their own ignorance. Now this is a real misfortune; and it is this misfortune that prompts them without further ado to attempt to render Plekhanov &amp;quot;more profound&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;quot;Much water,&amp;quot; Lomonosov-Martynov says, &amp;quot;has flowed under the bridge since Plekhanov wrote his book (&#039;&#039;Tasks of the Socialists in the Fight Against the Famine in Russia&#039;&#039;). The Social-Democrats who for a decade led the economic struggle of the working class ... have failed as yet to lay down a broad theoretical basis for Party tactics. This question has now come to a head, and if we should wish to lay down such a theoretical basis, we should certainly have to deepen considerably the principles of tactics developed at one time by Plekhanov.... Our present definition of the distinction between propaganda and agitation would have to be different from Plekhanov’s (Martynov has just quoted PIekhanov’s words: &amp;quot;A propagandist presents many ideas to one or a few persons; an agitator presents only one or a few ideas, but he presents them to a mass of people.&amp;quot;) By propaganda we would understand the revolutionary explanation of the present social system, entire or in its partial manifestations, whether that be done in a form intelligible to individuals or to broad masses. By agitation, in the strict sense of the word (&#039;&#039;sic&#039;&#039;!), we would understand the call upon the masses to undertake definite, concrete actions and the promotion of the direct revolutionary intervention of the proletariat in social life.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;We congratulate Russian-and international-Social-Democracy on having found, thanks to Martynov, a new terminology, more strict and more profound. Hitherto we thought (with Plekhanov, and with all the leaders of the international working class movement) that the propagandist, dealing with, say, the question of unemployment, must explain the capitalistic nature of crises, the cause of their inevitability in modern society, the necessity for the transformation of this society into a socialist society, etc. In a word, he must present &amp;quot;many ideas&amp;quot;, so many, indeed, that they will be understood as an integral whole only by a (comparatively) few persons. The agitator, however, speaking on the same subject, will take as an illustration a fact that is most glaring and most widely known to his audience, say, the death of an unemployed worker’s family from starvation, the growing impoverishment, etc., and, utilising this fact, known to all, will direct his efforts to presenting a &#039;&#039;single idea&#039;&#039; to the &amp;quot;masses&amp;quot;, e.g., the senselessness of the contradiction between the increase of wealth and the increase of poverty; he will strive &#039;&#039;to rouse&#039;&#039; discontent and indignation among the masses against this crying injustice, leaving a more complete explanation of this contradiction to the propagandist. Consequently, the propagandist operates chiefly by means of the &#039;&#039;printed&#039;&#039; word; the agitator by means of the &#039;&#039;spoken&#039;&#039; word. The propagandist requires qualities different from those of the agitator. Kautsky and Lafargue, for example, we term propagandists; Bebel and Guesde we term agitators. To single out a third sphere, or third function, of practical activity, and to include in this function &amp;quot;the call upon the masses to undertake definite concrete actions&amp;quot;, is sheer nonsense, because the &amp;quot;call&amp;quot;, as a single act, either naturally and inevitably supplements the theoretical treatise, propagandist pamphlet, and agitational speech, or represents a purely executive function. Let us take, for example, the struggle the German Social-Democrats are now waging against the corn duties. The theoreticians write research works on tariff policy, with the &amp;quot;call&amp;quot;, say, to struggle for commercial treaties and for Free Trade. The propagandist does the same thing in the periodical press, and the agitator in public speeches. At the present time, the &amp;quot;concrete action&amp;quot; of the masses takes the form of signing petitions to the Reichstag against raising the corn duties. The call for this action comes indirectly from the theoreticians, the propagandists, and the agitators, and, directly, from the workers who take the petition lists to the factories and to private homes for the gathering of signatures. According to the &amp;quot;Martynov terminology&amp;quot;, Kautsky and Bebel are both propagandists, while those who solicit the signatures are agitators. Isn’t it clear?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The German example recalled to my mind the German word which, literally translated, means &amp;quot;Ballhorning&amp;quot;. Johann Ballhorn, a Leipzig publisher of the sixteenth century, published a child’s reader in which, as was the custom, he introduced a drawing of a cock, but a cock without spurs and with a couple of eggs lying near it. On the cover he printed the legend, &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;Revised&#039;&#039; edition by Johann Ballhorn&amp;quot;. Ever since then, the Germans describe any &amp;quot;revision&amp;quot; that is really a worsening as &amp;quot;ballhorning&amp;quot;. And one cannot help recalling Ballhorn upon seeing how the Martynovs try to render Plekhanov &amp;quot;more profound&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Why did our Lomonosov &amp;quot;invent&amp;quot; this confusion? In order to illustrate how &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;devotes attention only to one side of the case, just as Pleklianov did a decade and a half ago&amp;quot; (39). &amp;quot;With &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;, propagandist tasks force agitational tasks into the background, at least for the present&amp;quot; (52). If we translate this last proposition from the language of Martynov into ordinary human language (because mankind has not yet managed to learn the newly-invented terminology), we shall get the following: with &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;, the tasks of political propaganda and political agitation force into the background the task of &amp;quot;presenting to the government concrete demands for legislative and administrative measures&amp;quot; that &amp;quot;promise certain palpable results&amp;quot; (or demands for social reforms, that is, if we are permitted once again to employ the old terminology of the old mankind not yet grown to Martynov’s level). We suggest that the reader compare this thesis with the following tirade:&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;quot;What also astonishes us in these programmes [the programmes advanced by revolutionary Social-Democrats] is their constant stress upon the benefits of workers’ activity in parliament (non-existent in Russia), though they completely ignore (thanks to their revolutionary nihilism) the importance of workers’ participation in the legislative manufacturers’ assemblies on factory affairs [which do exist in Russia] ... or at least the importance of workers’ participation in municipal bodies....&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;The author of this tirade expresses in a somewhat more forthright and clearer manner the very idea which Lomonosov-Martynov discovered by his own understanding. The author is R. M., in the &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;Separate Supplement&amp;quot; to Rabochaya Mysl&#039;&#039; (p. 15).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span name=&amp;quot;03_C&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Political exposures and &amp;quot;training in revolutionary activity&amp;quot;===&lt;br /&gt;
In advancing against &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; his theory of &amp;quot;raising the activity of the working masses&amp;quot;, Martynov actually betrayed an urge &#039;&#039;to belittle&#039;&#039; that activity, for he declared the very economic struggle before which all economists grovel to be the preferable, particularly important, and &amp;quot;most widely applicable&amp;quot; means of rousing this activity and its broadest field. This error is characteristic, precisely in that it is by no means peculiar to Martynov. In reality, it is possible to &amp;quot;raise the activity of the working masses&amp;quot; &#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039; when this activity &#039;&#039;is not restricted&#039;&#039; to &amp;quot;political agitation on an economic basis&amp;quot;. A basic condition for the necessary expansion of political agitation is the organisation of &#039;&#039;comprehensive&#039;&#039; political exposure. &#039;&#039;In no way&#039;&#039; except by means of such exposures &#039;&#039;can&#039;&#039; the masses be trained in political consciousness and revolutionary activity. Hence, activity of this kind is one of the most important functions of international Social-Democracy as a whole, for even political freedom does not in any way eliminate exposures; it merely shifts somewhat their sphere of direction. Thus, the German party is especially strengthening its positions and spreading its influence, thanks particularly to the untiring energy with which it is conducting its campaign of political exposure. Working-class consciousness cannot be genuine political consciousness unless the workers are trained to respond to &#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039; cases of tyranny, oppression, violence, and abuse, no matter &#039;&#039;what class&#039;&#039; is affected — unless they are trained, moreover, to respond from a Social-Democratic point of view and no other. The consciousness of the working masses cannot be genuine class-consciousness, unless the workers learn, from concrete, and above all from topical, political facts and events to observe &#039;&#039;every&#039;&#039; other social class in &#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039; the manifestations of its intellectual, ethical, and political life; unless they learn to apply in practice the materialist analysis and the materialist estimate of &#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039; aspects of the life and activity of &#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039; classes, strata, and groups of the population. Those who concentrate the attention, observation, and consciousness of the working class exclusively, or even mainly, upon itself alone are not Social-Democrats; for the self-knowledge of the working class is indissolubly bound up, not solely with a fully clear theoretical understanding — or rather, not so much with the theoretical, as with the practical, understanding — of the relationships between &#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039; the various classes of modern society, acquired through the experience of political life. For this reason the conception of the economic struggle as the most widely applicable means of drawing the masses into the political movement, which our Economists preach, is so extremely harmful and reactionary in its practical significance. In order to become a Social-Democrat, the worker must have a clear picture in his mind of the economic nature and the social and political features of the landlord and the priest, the high state official and the peasant, the student and the vagabond; he must know their strong and weak points; he must grasp the meaning of all the catchwords and sophisms by which each class and each stratum &#039;&#039;camouflages&#039;&#039; its selfish strivings and its real &amp;quot;inner workings&amp;quot;; he must understand what interests are reflected by certain institutions and certain laws and how they are reflected. But this &amp;quot;clear picture&amp;quot; cannot be obtained from any book. It can be obtained only from living examples and from exposures that follow close upon what is going on about us at a given moment; upon what is being discussed, in whispers perhaps, by each one in his own way; upon what finds expression in such and such events, in such and such statistics, in such and such court sentences, etc., etc. These comprehensive political exposures are an essential and &#039;&#039;fundamental&#039;&#039; condition for training the masses in revolutionary activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Why do the Russian workers still manifest little revolutionary activity in response to the brutal treatment of the people by the police, the persecution of religious sects, the flogging of peasants, the outrageous censorship, the torture of soldiers, the persecution of the most innocent cultural undertakings, etc.? Is it because the &amp;quot;economic struggle&amp;quot; does not &amp;quot;stimulate&amp;quot; them to this, because such activity does not &amp;quot;promise palpable results&amp;quot;, because it produces little that is &amp;quot;positive&amp;quot;? To adopt such an opinion, we repeat, is merely to direct the charge where it does not belong, to blame the working masses for one’s own philistinism (or Bernsteinism). We must blame ourselves, our lagging behind the mass movement, for still being unable to organise sufficiently wide, striking, and rapid exposures of all the shameful outrages. When we do that (and we must and can do it), the most backward worker will understand, &#039;&#039;or will feel&#039;&#039;, that the students and religious sects, the peasants and the authors are being abused and outraged by those same dark forces that are oppressing and crushing him at every step of his life. Feeling that, he himself will be filled with an irresistible desire to react, and he will know how to hoot the censors one day, on another day to demonstrate outside the house of a governor who has brutally suppressed a peasant uprising, on still another day to teach a lesson to the gendarmes in surplices who are doing the work of the Holy Inquisition, etc. As yet we have done very little, almost nothing, &#039;&#039;to bring&#039;&#039; before the working masses prompt exposures on all possible issues. Many of us as yet do not recognise this as our &#039;&#039;bounden duty&#039;&#039; but trail spontaneously in the wake of the &amp;quot;drab everyday struggle&amp;quot;, in the narrow confines of factory life. Under such circumstances to say that &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; displays a tendency to minimise the significance of the forward march of the drab everyday struggle in comparison with the propaganda of brilliant and complete ideas&amp;quot; (Martynov, op. cit., p. 61), means to drag the Party back, to defend and glorify our unpreparedness and backwardness.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As for calling the masses to action, that will come of itself as soon as energetic political agitation, live and striking exposures come into play. To catch some criminal red-handed and immediately to brand him publicly in all places is of itself far more effective than any number of &amp;quot;calls&amp;quot;; the effect very often is such as will make it impossible to tell exactly who it was that &amp;quot;called&amp;quot; upon the masses and who suggested this or that plan of demonstration, etc. Calls for action, not in the general, but in the concrete, sense of the term can be made only at the place of action; only those who themselves go into action, and do so immediately, can sound such calls. Our business as Social-Democratic publicists is to deepen, expand, and intensify political exposures and political agitation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A word in passing about &amp;quot;calls to action&amp;quot;. The &#039;&#039;only newspaper&#039;&#039; which &#039;&#039;prior&#039;&#039; to the spring events &#039;&#039;called upon&#039;&#039; the workers to intervene actively in a matter that certainly did not &#039;&#039;promise&#039;&#039; any &#039;&#039;palpable results&#039;&#039; whatever for the workers, i.e., the drafting of the students into the army, was &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;. Immediately after the publication of the order of January 11, on &amp;quot;drafting the 183 students into the army&amp;quot;, &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; published an article on the matter (in its February issue, No. 2),&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[10]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; and, &#039;&#039;before&#039;&#039; any demonstration was begun, forthwith &#039;&#039;called upon&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;the workers to go to the aid of the students&amp;quot;, called upon the &amp;quot;people&amp;quot; openly to take up the government’s arrogant challenge. We ask: how is the remarkable fact to be explained that although Martynov talks so much about &amp;quot;calls to action&amp;quot;, and even suggests &amp;quot;calls to action&amp;quot; as a special form of activity, he said not a word about &#039;&#039;this&#039;&#039; call? After this, was it not sheer philistinism on Martynov’s part to allege that &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; was &#039;&#039;one-sided&#039;&#039; because it did not issue sufficient &amp;quot;calls&amp;quot; to struggle for demands &amp;quot;promising palpable results&amp;quot;?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our Economists, including &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;, were successful because they adapted themselves to the backward workers. But the Social-Democratic worker, the revolutionary worker (and the number of such workers is growing) will indignantly reject all this talk about struggle for demands &amp;quot;promising palpable results&amp;quot;, etc., because he will understand that this is only a variation of the old song about adding a kopek to the ruble. Such a worker will say to his counsellors from &#039;&#039;Rabochaya Mysl&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;: you are busying yourselves in vain, gentlemen, and shirking your proper duties, by meddling with such excessive zeal in a job that we can very well manage ourselves. There is nothing clever in your assertion that the Social-Democrats’ task is to lend the economic struggle itself a political character; that is only the beginning, it is not the main task of the Social-Democrats. For all over the world, including Russia, &#039;&#039;the police themselves often take the initiative in lending&#039;&#039; the economic struggle a political character, and the workers themselves learn to understand whom the government supports.&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[11]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; &amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[11]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; The demand &amp;quot;to lend the economic struggle itself a political character&amp;quot; most strikingly expresses &#039;&#039;subservience to spontaneity&#039;&#039; in the sphere of political activity. Very often the economic struggle &#039;&#039;spontaneously&#039;&#039; assumes a political character, that is to say, without the intervention of the &amp;quot;revolutionary bacilli — the intelligentsia&amp;quot;, without the intervention of the class-conscious Social-Democrats. The economic struggle of the English workers, for instance, also assumed a political character without any intervention on the part of the socialists. The task of the Social-Democrats, however, is not exhausted by political agitation on an economic basis; their task is &#039;&#039;to convert&#039;&#039; trade-unionist politics into Social-Democratic political struggle, &#039;&#039;to utilise&#039;&#039; the sparks of political consciousness which the economic struggle generates among the workers, for the purpose of &#039;&#039;raising&#039;&#039; the workers to the level of &#039;&#039;Social-Democratic&#039;&#039; political consciousness. The Martynovs, however, instead of raising and stimulating the spontaneously awakening political consciousness of the workers, &#039;&#039;bow to spontaneity&#039;&#039; and repeat over and over &#039;&#039;ad nauseam&#039;&#039;, that the economic struggle &amp;quot;Impels&amp;quot; the workers to realise their own lack of political rights. It is unfortunate, gentlemen, that the spontaneously awakening trade-unionist political consciousness does not &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;impel&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; you to an understanding of your Social-Democratic tasks.—&#039;&#039;Lenin&#039;&#039; The &amp;quot;economic struggle of the workers against the employers and the government&amp;quot;, about which you make as much fuss as if you had discovered a new America, is being waged in all parts of Russia, even the most remote, by the workers themselves who have heard about strikes, but who have heard almost nothing about socialism. The &amp;quot;activity&amp;quot; you want to stimulate among us workers, by advancing concrete demands that promise palpable results, we are already displaying and in our everyday, limited trade union work we put forward these concrete demands, very often without any assistance whatever from the intellectuals. But &#039;&#039;such&#039;&#039; activity is not enough for us; we are not children to be fed on the thin gruel of &amp;quot;economic&amp;quot; politics alone; we want to know everything that others know, we want to learn the details of &#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039; aspects of political life and to take part &#039;&#039;actively&#039;&#039; in every single political event. In order that we may do this, the intellectuals must talk to us less of what we already know.&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[12]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; and tell us more about what we do not yet know and what we can never learn from our factory and &amp;quot;economic&amp;quot; experience, namely, political knowledge. You intellectuals can acquire this knowledge, and it is your &#039;&#039;duty&#039;&#039; to bring it to us in a hundred- and a thousand-fold greater measure than you have done up to now; and you must bring it to us, not only in the form of discussions, pamphlets, and articles (which very often — pardon our frankness — are rather dull), but precisely in the form of vivid &#039;&#039;exposures&#039;&#039; of what our government and our governing classes are doing at this very moment in all spheres of life. Devote more zeal to carrying out this duty and talk less about &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;raising the activity of the working masses&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;. We are far more active than you think, and we are quite able to support, by open street fighting, even demands that do not promise any &amp;quot;palpable results&amp;quot; whatever. It is not for you to &amp;quot;raise&amp;quot; our activity, because &#039;&#039;activity is precisely the thing you yourselves lack.&#039;&#039; Bow less in subservience to spontaneity, and think more about raising your own activity, gentlemen!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===What is there in common between economism and terrorism? ===&lt;br /&gt;
In the last footnote we cited the opinion of an Economist and of a non-Social -Democratic terrorist, who showed themselves to be accidentally in agreement. Speaking generally, however, there is not an accidental, but a necessary, inherent connection between the two, of which we shall have need to speak later, and which must be mentioned here in connection with the question of education for revolutionary activity. The Economists and the root, namely, &#039;&#039;subservience to spontaneity&#039;&#039;, with which we dealt in the preceding chapter as a general phenomenon and which we shall now examine in relation to its effect upon political activity and the political struggle. At first sight, our assertion may appear paradoxical, so great is the difference between those who stress the &amp;quot;drab everyday struggle&amp;quot; and those who call for the most self sacrificing struggle of individuals. But this is no paradox. The Economists and the terrorists merely bow to different poles of spontaneity; the Economists bow to the spontaneity of &amp;quot;the labour movement pure and simple&amp;quot;, while the terrorists bow to the spontaneity of the passionate indignation of intellectuals, who lack the ability or opportunity to connect the revolutionary struggle and the working-class movement into an integral whole. It is difficult indeed for those who have lost their belief, or who have never believed, that this is possible, to find some outlet for their indignation and revolutionary energy other than terror. Thus, both forms of subservience to spontaneity we have mentioned are nothing but &#039;&#039;the beginning of the implementation&#039;&#039; of the notorious &#039;&#039;Credo&#039;&#039; programme: Let the workers wage their &amp;quot;economic struggle against the employers and the government&amp;quot; (we apologise to the author of the &#039;&#039;Credo&#039;&#039; for expressing her views in Martynov’s words. We think we have a right to do so since the &#039;&#039;Credo&#039;&#039;, too, says that in the economic struggle the workers &amp;quot;come up against the political regime and let the intellectuals conduct the political struggle by their own efforts — with the aid of terror, of course! This is an absolutely logical and inevitable &#039;&#039;conclusion&#039;&#039; which must be insisted on — &#039;&#039;even though those&#039;&#039; who are beginning to carry out this programme &#039;&#039;do not themselves realise&#039;&#039; that it is inevitable. Political activity has its logic quite apart from the consciousness of those who, with the best intentions, call either for terror or for lending the economic struggle itself a political character. The road to hell is paved with good intentions, and, in this case, good intentions cannot save one from being spontaneously drawn &amp;quot;along the line of least resistance&amp;quot;, along the line of the &#039;&#039;purely bourgeois Credo&#039;&#039; programme. Surely it is no accident either that many Russian liberals — avowed liberals and liberals that wear the mask of Marxism — whole-heartedly sympathise with terror and try to foster the terrorist moods that have surged up in the present time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The formation of the Revolutionary-Socialist &#039;&#039;Svoboda&#039;&#039; Group which set itself the aim of helping the working-class movement in every possible way, but which included in its &#039;&#039;programme&#039;&#039; terror, and emancipation, so to speak, from Social-Democracy — once again confirmed the remarkable perspicacity of P. B. Axelrod, who &#039;&#039;literally foretold&#039;&#039; these results of Social-Democratic waverings &#039;&#039;as far back as the end of 1897 (Present Tasks and Tactics)&#039;&#039;, when he outlined his famous &amp;quot;two perspectives&amp;quot;. All the subsequent disputes and disagreements among Russian Social-Democrats are contained, like a plant in the seed, in these two perspectives.&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[13]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From this point of view it also becomes clear why &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;, unable to withstand the spontaneity of Economism, has likewise been unable to withstand the spontaneity of terrorism. It is highly interesting to note here the specific arguments that &#039;&#039;Svoboda&#039;&#039; has advanced in defence of terrorism. It &amp;quot;completely denies&amp;quot; the deterrent role of terrorism (&#039;&#039;The Regeneration of Revolutionism&#039;&#039;, p. 64), but instead stresses its &amp;quot;excitative significance&amp;quot;. This is characteristic, first, as representing one of the stages of the breakup and decline of the traditional (pre-Social-Democratic) cycle of ideas which insisted upon terrorism. The admission that the government cannot now be &amp;quot;terrified&amp;quot; and hence disrupted, by terror, is tantamount to a complete condemnation of terror as a system of struggle, as a sphere of activity sanctioned by the programme. Secondly, it is still more characteristic as an example of the failure to understand our immediate tasks in regard to &amp;quot;education for revolutionary activity&amp;quot;. &#039;&#039;Svoboda&#039;&#039; advocates terror as a means of &amp;quot;exciting&amp;quot; the working-class movement and of giving it a &amp;quot;strong impetus&amp;quot;. It is difficult to imagine an argument that more thoroughly disproves itself. Are there not enough outrages committed in Russian life without special &amp;quot;excitants&amp;quot; having to be invented? On the other hand, is it not obvious that those who are not, and cannot be, roused to excitement even by Russian tyranny will stand by &amp;quot;twiddling their thumbs&amp;quot; and watch a handful of terrorists engaged in single combat with the government? The fact is that the working masses are roused to a high pitch of excitement by the social evils in Russian life, but we are unable to gather, if one may so put it, and concentrate all these drops and streamlets of popular resentment that are brought forth to a far larger extent than we imagine by the conditions of Russian life, and that must be combined into a single gigantic torrent. That this can be accomplished is irrefutably proved by the enormous growth of the working-class movement and the eagerness, noted above, with which the workers clamour for political literature. On the other hand, calls for terror and calls to lend the economic struggle itself a political character are merely two different forms of &#039;&#039;evading&#039;&#039; the most pressing duty now resting upon Russian revolutionaries, namely, the organisation of comprehensive political agitation. &#039;&#039;Svoboda&#039;&#039; desires to &#039;&#039;substitute&#039;&#039; terror for agitation, openly admitting that &amp;quot;as soon as intensified and strenuous agitation is begun among the masses the excitative function of terror will be ended&amp;quot; (&#039;&#039;The Regeneration of Revolutionism&#039;&#039;, p. 68). This proves precisely that both the terrorists and the Economists &#039;&#039;underestimate&#039;&#039; the revolutionary activity of the masses, despite the striking evidence of the events that took place in the spring,&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[14]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; and whereas the one group goes out in search of artificial &amp;quot;excitants&amp;quot;, the other talks about &amp;quot;concrete demands&amp;quot;. But both fail to devote sufficient attention to the development of &#039;&#039;their own activity&#039;&#039; in political agitation and in the organisation of political exposures. And no other work can serve as a &#039;&#039;substitute&#039;&#039; for this task either at the present time or at any other.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The working class as vanguard fighter for democracy===&lt;br /&gt;
We have seen that the conduct of the broadest political agitation and, consequently, of all-sided political exposures is an absolutely necessary and a &#039;&#039;paramount&#039;&#039; task of our activity, if this activity is to be truly Social-Democratic. However, we arrived at this conclusion solely on the grounds of the pressing needs of the working class for political knowledge and political training. But such a presentation of the question is too narrow, for it ignores the general democratic tasks of Social-Democracy, in particular of present-day Russian Social-Democracy. In order to explain the point more concretely we shall approach the subject from an aspect that is &amp;quot;nearest&amp;quot; to the Economist, namely, from the practical aspect. &amp;quot;Everyone agrees&amp;quot; that it is necessary to develop the political consciousness of the working class. The question is, &#039;&#039;how&#039;&#039; that is to be done and what is required to do it. The economic struggle merely &amp;quot;impels&amp;quot; the workers to realise the government’s attitude towards the working class. Consequently, &#039;&#039;however much we may try&#039;&#039; to &amp;quot;lend the economic, struggle itself a political character&amp;quot;, &#039;&#039;we shall never be able&#039;&#039; to develop the political consciousness of the workers (to the level of Social-Democratic political consciousness) by keeping within the framework of the economic struggle, for &#039;&#039;that framework is too narrow.&#039;&#039; The Martynov formula has some value for us, not because it illustrates Martynov’s aptitude for confusing things, but because it pointedly expresses the basic error that all the Economists commit, namely, their conviction that it is possible to develop the class political consciousness of the workers &#039;&#039;from within&#039;&#039;, so to speak, from their economic struggle, i.e., by making this struggle the exclusive (or, at least, the main) starting-point, by making it the exclusive (or, at least, the main) basis. Such a view is radically wrong. Piqued by our polemics against them, the Economists refuse to ponder deeply over the origins of these disagreements, with the result that we simply cannot understand one another. It is as if we spoke in different tongues.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Class political consciousness can be brought to the workers &#039;&#039;only from without&#039;&#039;, that is, only from outside the economic struggle, from outside the sphere of relations between workers and employers. The sphere from which alone it is possible to obtain this knowledge is the sphere of relationships of &#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039; classes and strata to the state and the government, the sphere of the interrelations between &#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039; classes. For that reason, the reply to the question as to what must be done to bring political knowledge to the workers cannot be merely the answer with which, in the majority of cases, the practical workers, especially those inclined towards Economism, mostly content themselves, namely: &amp;quot;To go among the workers.&amp;quot; To bring political knowledge to the &#039;&#039;workers&#039;&#039; the Social Democrats must &#039;&#039;go among all classes of the population&#039;&#039;; they must dispatch units of their army &#039;&#039;in all directions&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We deliberately select this blunt formula, we deliberately express ourselves in this sharply simplified manner, not because we desire to indulge in paradoxes, but in order to &amp;quot;impel&amp;quot; the Economists to a realisation of their tasks which they unpardonably ignore, to suggest to them strongly the difference between trade-unionist and Social-Democratic politics, which they refuse to understand. We therefore beg the reader not to get wrought up, but to hear us patiently to the end.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let us take the type of Social-Democratic study circle that has become most widespread in the past few years and examine its work. It has &amp;quot;contacts with the workers&amp;quot; and rests content with this, issuing leaflets in which abuses in the factories, the government’s partiality towards the capitalists, and the tyranny of the police are strongly condemned. At workers’ meetings the discussions never, or rarely ever, go beyond the limits of these subjects. Extremely rare are the lectures and discussions held on the history of the revolutionary movement, on questions of the government’s home and foreign policy, on questions of the economic evolution of Russia and of Europe, on the position of the various classes in modern society, etc. As to systematically acquiring and extending contact with other classes of society, no one even dreams of that. In fact, the ideal leader, as the majority of the members of such circles picture him, is something far more in the nature of a trade union secretary than a socialist political leader. For the secretary of any, say English, trade union always helps the workers to carry on the economic struggle, he helps them to expose factory abuses, explains the injustice of the laws and of measures that hamper the freedom to strike and to picket (i. e., to warn all and sundry that a strike is proceeding at a certain factory), explains the partiality of arbitration court judges who belong to the bourgeois classes, etc., etc. In a word, every trade union secretary conducts and helps to conduct &amp;quot;the economic struggle against the employers and the government&amp;quot;. It cannot be too strongly maintained that &#039;&#039;this is still not&#039;&#039; Social-Democracy, that the Social-Democrat’s ideal should not be the trade union secretary, but &#039;&#039;the tribune of the people&#039;&#039;, who is able to react to every manifestation of tyranny and oppression, no matter where it appears, no matter what stratum or class of the people it affects; who is able to generalise all these manifestations and produce a single picture of police violence and capitalist exploitation; who is able to take advantage of every event, however small, in order to set forth &#039;&#039;before all&#039;&#039; his socialist convictions and his democratic demands, in order to clarify for &#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039; and everyone the world-historic significance of the struggle for the emancipation of the proletariat. Compare, for example, a leader like Robert Knight (the well-known secretary and leader of the Boiler-Makers’ Society, one of the most powerful trade unions in England), with Wilhelm Liebknecht, and try to apply to them the contrasts that Martynov draws in his controversy with &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;. You will see — I am running through Martynov’s article — that Robert Knight engaged more in &amp;quot;calling the masses to certain concrete actions&amp;quot; (Martynov, op. cit., p. 39), while Willielin Liebknecht engaged more in &amp;quot;the revolutionary elucidation of the whole of the present system or partial manifestations of it&amp;quot; (38-39); that Robert Knight &amp;quot;formulated the immediate demands of the proletariat and indicated the means by which they can be achieved&amp;quot; (41), whereas Wilhelm Liebknecht, while doing this, did not hold back from &amp;quot;simultaneously guiding the activities of various opposition strata&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;dictating a positive programme of action for them&amp;quot;&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[15]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (41); that Robert Knight strove &amp;quot;as far as possible to lend the economic struggle itself a political character&amp;quot; (42) and was excellently able &amp;quot;to submit to the government concrete demands promising certain palpable results&amp;quot; (43), whereas Liebknecht engaged to a much greater degree in &amp;quot;one-sided&amp;quot; &amp;quot;exposures&amp;quot; (40); that Robert Knight attached more significance to the &amp;quot;forward march of the drab everyday struggle&amp;quot; (61), whereas Liebknecht attached more significance to the &amp;quot;propaganda of brilliant and completed ideas&amp;quot; (61); that Liebknecht converted the paper he was directing into &amp;quot;an organ of revolutionary opposition that exposed the state of affairs in our country, particularly the political state of affairs, insofar as it affected the interests of the most varied strata of the population&amp;quot; (63), whereas Robert Knight &amp;quot;worked for the cause of the working class in close organic connection with the proletarian struggle&amp;quot; (63) — if by &amp;quot;close and organic connection&amp;quot; is meant the subservience to spontaneity which we examined above, by taking the examples of Krichevsky and Martynov — and &amp;quot;restricted the sphere of his influence&amp;quot;, convinced, of course, as is Martynov, that &amp;quot;by doing so he deepened that influence&amp;quot; (63). In a word, you will see that &#039;&#039;de facto&#039;&#039; Martynov reduces Social-Democracy to the level of trade-unionism, though he does so, of course, not because he does not desire the good of Social-Democracy, but simply because he is a little too much in a hurry to render Plekhanov more profound, instead of taking the trouble to understand him.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let us return, however, to our theses. We said that a Social Democrat, if he really believes it necessary to develop comprehensively the political consciousness of the proletariat, must &amp;quot;go among all classes of the population&amp;quot;. This gives rise to the questions: how is this to be done? have we enough forces to do this? is there a basis for such work among all the other classes? will this not mean a retreat, or lead to a retreat, from the class point of view? Let us deal with these questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We must &amp;quot;go among all classes of the population&amp;quot; as theoreticians, as proagandists, as agitators, and as organisers. Noone doubts that the theoretical work of Social-Democrats should aim at studying all the specific features of the social and political condition of the various classes. But extremely little is done in this direction as compared with the work that is done in studying the specific features of factory life. In the committees and study circles, one can meet people who are immersed in the study even of some special branch of the metal industry; but one can hardly ever find members of organisations (obliged, as often happens, for some reason or other to give up practical work) who are especially engaged in gathering material on some pressing question of social and political life in our country which could serve as a means for conducting Social-Democratic work among other strata of the population. In dwelling upon the fact that the majority of the present-day leaders of the working-class movement lack training, we cannot refrain from mentioning training in this respect also, for it too is bound up with the Economist conception of &amp;quot;close organic connection with the proletarian struggle&amp;quot;. The principal thing, of course, is &#039;&#039;propaganda&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;agitation&#039;&#039; among all strata of the people. The work of the West European Social-Democrat is in this respect facilitated by the public meetings and rallies which &#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039; are free to attend, and by the fact that in parliament he addresses the representatives of &#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039; classes. We have neither a parliament nor freedom of assembly; nevertheless, we are able to arrange meetings of workers who desire to listen to &#039;&#039;a Social-Democrat&#039;&#039;. We must also find ways and means of calling meetings of representatives of all social classes that desire to listen to &#039;&#039;a democrat&#039;&#039;; for he is no Social-Democrat who forgets in practice that &amp;quot;the Communists support every revolutionary movement&amp;quot;, that we are obliged for that reason to expound and emphasise &#039;&#039;general democratic tasks before the whole people&#039;&#039;, without for a moment concealing our socialist convictions. He is no Social-Democrat who forgets in practice his obligation to be &#039;&#039;ahead of all&#039;&#039; in raising, accentuating, and solving &#039;&#039;every&#039;&#039; general democratic question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;But everyone agrees with this!&amp;quot; the impatient reader will exclaim, and the new instructions adopted by the last conference of the Union Abroad for the Editorial Board of &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; definitely say: &amp;quot;All events of social and political life that affect the proletariat either directly as a special class or as &#039;&#039;the vanguard of all the revolutionary forces in the struggle for freedom&#039;&#039; should serve as subjects for political propaganda and agitation&amp;quot; (&#039;&#039;Two Conferences&#039;&#039;, p. 17, our italics). Yes, these are very true and very good words, and we would be fully satisfied if &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; understood them &#039;&#039;and if it refrained from saying in the next breath things that contradict them&#039;&#039;. For it is not enough to call ourselves the &amp;quot;vanguard&amp;quot;, the advanced contingent; we must act in such a way that all the other contingents recognise and are obliged to admit that we are marching in the vanguard. And we ask the reader: Are the representatives of the other &amp;quot;contingents&amp;quot; such fools as to take our word for it when we say that we are the &amp;quot;vanguard&amp;quot;? just picture to yourselves the following: a Social-Democrat comes to the &amp;quot;contingent&amp;quot; of Russian educated radicals, or liberal constitutionalists, and says, We are the vanguard; &amp;quot;the task confronting us now is, as far as possible, to lend the economic struggle itself a political character&amp;quot;. The radical, or constitutionalist, if he is at all intelligent (and there are many intelligent men among Russian radicals and constitutionalists), would only smile at such a speech and would say (to himself, of course, for in the majority of cases he is an experienced diplomat): &amp;quot;Your ’vanguard’ must be made up of simpletons. They do not even understand that it is our task, the task of the progressive representatives of bourgeois democracy to lend the workers’ economic struggle &#039;&#039;itself&#039;&#039; a political character. Why, we too, like the West-European bourgeois, want to draw the workers into politics, &#039;&#039;but only into trade-unionist, not into Social-Democratic politics.&#039;&#039; Trade-unionist politics of the working class is precisely &#039;&#039;bourgeois politics&#039;&#039; of the working class, and this ‘vanguard’s’ formulation of its task is the formulation of trade-unionist politics! Let them call themselves Social-Democrats to their heart’s content, I am not a child to get excited over a label. But they must not fall under the influence of those pernicious orthodox doctrinaires, let them allow ’freedom of criticism’ to those who unconsciously are driving Social-Democracy into trade-unionist channels.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And the faint smile of our constitutionalist will turn into Homeric laughter when he learns that the Social-Democrats who talk of Social-Democracy as the vanguard, today, when spontaneity almost completely dominates our movement, fear nothing so much as &amp;quot;belittling the spontaneous element&amp;quot;, as &amp;quot;underestimating the significance of the forward movement of the drab everyday struggle, as compared with the propaganda of brilliant and completed ideas&amp;quot;, etc., etc.! A &amp;quot;vanguard&amp;quot; which fears that consciousness will outstrip spontaneity, which fears to put forward a bold &amp;quot;plan&amp;quot; that would compel general recognition even among those who differ with us. Are they not confusing &amp;quot;vanguard&amp;quot; with &amp;quot;rearguard&amp;quot;?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indeed, let us examine the following piece of reasoning by Martynov. On page 40 he says that &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; is one-sided in its tactics of exposing abuses, that &amp;quot;however much we may spread distrust and hatred of the government, we shall not achieve our aim until we have succeeded in developing sufficient active social energy for its overthrow&amp;quot;. This, it may be said parenthetically, is the familiar solicitude for the activation of the masses, with a simultaneous striving to restrict one’s own activity. But that is not the main point at the moment. Martynov speaks here, accordingly, of &#039;&#039;revolutionary&#039;&#039; energy (&amp;quot;for overthrowing&amp;quot;). And what conclusion does he arrive at? Since in ordinary times various social strata inevitably march separately, &amp;quot;it is therefore, clear that we Social-Democrats cannot simultaneously guide the activities of various opposition strata, we cannot dictate to them a positive programme of action, we cannot point out to them in what manner they should wage a day-to-day struggle for their interests.... The liberal strata will themselves take care of the active struggle for their immediate interests, the struggle that will bring them face to face with our political regime&amp;quot; (p. 41). Thus, having begun with talk about revolutionary energy, about the active struggle for the overthrow of the autocracy, Martynov immediately turns toward trade union energy and active struggle for immediate interests! It goes without saying that we cannot guide the struggle of the students, liberals, etc., for their &amp;quot;immediate interests&amp;quot;; but this was not the point at issue, most worthy Economist! The point we were discussing was the possible and necessary participation of various social strata in the overthrow of the autocracy; and not only are we &#039;&#039;able&#039;&#039;, but it is our bounden duty, to guide &#039;&#039;these&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;activities of the various opposition strata&amp;quot;, if we desire to be the &amp;quot;vanguard&amp;quot;. Not only will our students and liberals, etc., themselves take care of &amp;quot;the struggle that brings them face to face with our political regime&amp;quot;; the police and the officials of the autocratic government will see to this first and foremost. But if &amp;quot;we&amp;quot; desire to be front-rank democrats, we must make it our concern to &#039;&#039;direct&#039;&#039; the thoughts of those who are dissatisfied only with conditions at the university, or in the Zemstvo, etc., to the idea that the entire political system is worthless. &#039;&#039;We&#039;&#039; must take upon ourselves the task of organising an all-round political struggle under the leadership of our Party in such a manner as to make it possible for all oppositional strata to render their fullest support to the struggle and to our Party. &#039;&#039;We&#039;&#039; must train our Social-Democratic practical workers to become political leaders, able to guide all the manifestations of this all-round struggle, able at the right time to &amp;quot;dictate a positive programme of action&amp;quot; for the aroused students, the discontented Zemstvo people, the incensed religious sects, the offended elementary schoolteachers, etc., etc. For that reason, Martynov’s assertion that &amp;quot;with regard to these, we can function &#039;&#039;merely in the negative&#039;&#039; role of exposers of abuses... we can only dissipate their hopes in various government commissions&amp;quot; &#039;&#039;is completely false&#039;&#039; (our italics). By saying this, Martynov shows that he &#039;&#039;absolutely fails to understand&#039;&#039; the role that the revolutionary &amp;quot;vanguard&amp;quot; must really play. If the reader bears this in mind, he will be clear as to the &#039;&#039;real meaning&#039;&#039; of Martynov’s concluding remarks: &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; is the organ of the revolutionary opposition which exposes the state of affairs in our country, particularly the political state of affairs, insofar as it affects the interests of the most varied strata of the population. We, however, work and will continue to work for the cause of the working class in close organic contact with the proletarian struggle. By restricting the sphere of our active influence we deepen that influence&amp;quot; (63). The true sense of this conclusion is as follows: &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; desires &#039;&#039;to elevate&#039;&#039; the trade-unionist politics of the working class (to which, through misconception, through lack of training, or through conviction, our practical workers frequently confine themselves) to the level of Social-Democratic politics. &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;, however, desires &#039;&#039;to degrade&#039;&#039; Social-Democratic politics to trade-unionist politics. Moreover, it assures the world that the two positions are &amp;quot;entirely compatible within the common cause&amp;quot; (63). &#039;&#039;0, sancta simplicitas!&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To proceed. Have we sufficient forces to direct our propaganda and agitation among &#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039; social classes? Most certainly. Our Economists, who are frequently inclined to deny this, lose sight of the gigantic progress our movement has made from (approximately) 1894 to 1901. Like real &amp;quot;tail-enders&amp;quot; they often go on living in the bygone stages of the movement’s inception. In the earlier period , indeed, we had astonishingly few forces, and it was perfectly natural and legitimate then to devote ourselves exclusively to activities among the workers and to condemn severely any deviation from this course. The entire task then was to consolidate our position in the working class. At the present time, however, gigantic forces have been attracted to the movement. The best representatives of the younger generation of the educated classes are coming over to us. Everywhere in the provinces there are people, resident there by dint of circumstance, who have taken part in the movement in the past or who desire to do so now and who, are gravitating towards Social-Democracy (whereas in 1894 one could count the Social-Democrats on the fingers of one’s hand). A basic political and organisational shortcoming of our movement is our &#039;&#039;inability&#039;&#039; to utilise all these forces and give them appropriate work (we shall deal with this more fully in the next chapter). The overwhelming majority of these forces entirely lack the opportunity of &amp;quot;going among the workers&amp;quot;, so that there are no grounds for fearing that we shall divert forces from our main work. In order to be able to provide the workers with real, comprehensive, and live political knowledge, we must have &amp;quot;our own people&amp;quot;, Social-Democrats, everywhere, among all social strata, and in all positions from which we can learn the inner springs of our state mechanism. Such people are required, not only for propaganda and agitation, but in a still larger measure for organisation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Is there a basis for activity among all classes of the population? Whoever doubts this lags in his consciousness behind the spontaneous awakening of the masses. The working-class movement has aroused and is continuing to arouse discontent in some, hopes of support for the opposition in others, and in still others the realisation that the autocracy is unbearable and must inevitably fall. We would be &amp;quot;politicians&amp;quot; and Social-Democrats in name only (as all too often happens in reality), if we failed to realise that our task is to utilise every manifestation of discontent, and to gather and turn to the best account every protest, however small. This is quite apart from the fact that the millions of the labouring peasantry, handicraftsmen, petty artisans, etc., would always listen eagerly to the speech of any Social-Democrat who is at all qualified. Indeed, is there a single social class in which there are no individuals, groups, or circles that are discontented with the lack of rights and with tyranny and, therefore, accessible to the propaganda of Social-Democrats as the spokesmen of the most pressing general democratic needs? To those who desire to have a clear idea of what the political agitation of a Social-Democrat among &#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039; classes and strata of the population should be like, we would point to &#039;&#039;political exposures&#039;&#039; in the broad sense of the word as the principal (but, of course, not the sole) form of this agitation.&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;quot;We must arouse in every section of the population that is at all politically conscious a passion for &#039;&#039;political&#039;&#039; exposure,&amp;quot; I wrote in my article &amp;quot;Where To Begin&amp;quot; [&#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;, May (No. 4), 1901], with which I shall deal in greater detail later. &amp;quot;We must not be discouraged by the fact that the voice of political exposure is today so feeble, timid, and infrequent. This is not because of a wholesale submission to police despotism, but because those who are able and ready to make exposures have no tribune from which to speak, no eager and encouraging audience, they do not see anywhere among the people that force to which it would be worth while directing their complaint against the ’omnipotent’ Russian Government.... We are now in a position to provide a tribune for the nation-wide exposure of the tsarist government, and it is our duty to do this. That tribune must be a Social-Democratic newspaper.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[16]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;The ideal audience for political exposure is the working class, which is first and foremost in need of all-round and live political knowledge, and is most capable of converting this knowledge into active struggle, even when that struggle does not promise &amp;quot;palpable results&amp;quot;. A tribune for &#039;&#039;nation-wide&#039;&#039; exposures can be only an all-Russia newspaper. &amp;quot;Without a political organ, a political movement deserving that name is inconceivable in the Europe of today&amp;quot;; in this respect Russia must undoubtedly be included in present-day Europe. The press long ago became a power in our country, otherwise the government would not spend tens of thousands of rubles to bribe it and to subsidise the Katkovs and Meshcherskys. And it is no novelty in autocratic Russia for the underground press to break through the wall of censorship and &#039;&#039;compel&#039;&#039; the legal and conservative press to speak openly of it. This was the case in the seventies and even in the fifties. How much broader and deeper are now the sections of the people willing to read the illegal underground press, and to learn from it &amp;quot;how to live and how to die&amp;quot;, to use the expression of a worker who sent a letter to &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; (No. 7).&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[25]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; Political exposures are as much a declaration of war against the &#039;&#039;government&#039;&#039; as economic exposures are a declaration of war against the factory owners. The moral significance of this declaration of war will be all the greater, the wider and more powerful the campaign of exposure will be and the more numerous and determined the social &#039;&#039;class&#039;&#039; that has &#039;&#039;declared war in order to begin the war&#039;&#039;. Hence, political exposures in themselves serve as a powerful instrument for &#039;&#039;disintegrating&#039;&#039; the system we oppose, as a means for diverting from the enemy his casual or temporary allies, as a means for spreading hostility and distrust among the permanent partners of the autocracy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In our time only a party that will &#039;&#039;organise&#039;&#039; really &#039;&#039;nation-wide&#039;&#039; exposures can become the vanguard of the revolutionary forces. The word &amp;quot;nation-wide&amp;quot; has a very profound meaning. The overwhelming majority of the non-working- class exposers (be it remembered that in order to become the vanguard, we must attract other classes) are sober politicians and level-headed men of affairs. They know perfectly well how dangerous it is to &amp;quot;complain&amp;quot; even against a minor official, let alone against the &amp;quot;omnipotent&amp;quot; Russian Government. And they will come &#039;&#039;to us&#039;&#039; with their complaints only when they see that these complaints can really have effect, and that we represent &#039;&#039;a political force&#039;&#039;. In order to become such a force in the eyes of outsiders, much persistent and stubborn work is required &#039;&#039;to raise&#039;&#039; our own consciousness, initiative, and energy.. To accomplish this it is not enough to attach a &amp;quot;vanguard&amp;quot; label to rearguard theory and practice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But if we have to undertake the organisation of a really nationwide exposure of the government, in what way will then the class character of our movement be expressed? — the overzealous advocate of &amp;quot;close organic contact with the proletarian struggle&amp;quot; will ask us, as indeed he does. The reply is manifold: we Social-Democrats will organise these nation-wide exposures; all questions raised by the agitation will he explained in a consistently Social-Democratic spirit, without any concessions to deliberate or undeliberate distortions of Marxism; the all-round political agitation will be conducted by a party which unites into one inseparable whole the assault on the government in the name of the entire people, the revolutionary training of the proletariat, and the safeguarding of its political independence, the guidance of the economic struggle of the working class, and the utilisation of all its spontaneous conflicts with its exploiters which rouse and bring into our camp increasing numbers of the proletariat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But a most characteristic feature of Economism is its failure to understand this connection, more, this identity of the most pressing need of the proletariat (a comprehensive political education through the medium of political agitation and political exposures) with the need of the general democratic movement. This lack of understanding is expressed, not only in &amp;quot;Martynovite&amp;quot; phrases, but in the references to a supposedly class point of view identical in meaning with these phrases. Thus, the authors of the Economist letter in &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;, No. 12, state:&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[17]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; &amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[17]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; Lack of space has prevented us from replying in detail, in &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;, to this letter, which is highly characteristic of the Economists. We were very glad at its appearance, for the allegations that &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; did not maintain a consistent class point of view had reached us long before that from various sources, and we were waiting for an appropriate occasion, or for a formulated expression of this fashionable charge, to give our reply. Moreover, it is our habit to reply to attacks, not by defence, but by counter-attack.—&#039;&#039;Lenin&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;This basic drawback of &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; (overestimation of ideology) is also the cause of its inconsistency on the question of the attitude of Social-Democracy to the various social classes and tendencies. By theoretical reasoning (not by &amp;quot;the growth of Party tasks, which grow together with the Party&amp;quot;), &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; solved the problem of the immediate transition to the struggle against absolutism. In all probability it senses the difficulty of such a task for the workers under the present state of affairs (not only senses, but knows full well that this task appears less difficult to the workers than to the Economist intellectuals with their nursemaid concern, for the workers are prepared to fight even for demands which, to use the language of the never-to-be-forgotten Martynov, do not &amp;quot;promise palpable results&amp;quot;) but lacking the patience to wait until the workers will have gathered sufficient forces for this struggle, &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; begins to seek allies in the ranks of the liberals and intellectuals&amp;quot;. . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yes, we have indeed lost all &amp;quot;patience&amp;quot; &amp;quot;waiting&amp;quot; for the blessed time, long promised us by diverse &amp;quot;conciliators&amp;quot;, when the Economists will have stopped charging the workers with their own backwardness and justifying their own lack of energy with allegations that the workers lack strength. We ask our Economists: What do they mean by &amp;quot;the gathering of workingclass strength for the struggle&amp;quot;? Is it not evident that this means the political training of the workers, so that all the aspects of our vile autocracy are revealed to them? And is it not clear that &#039;&#039;precisely for this work&#039;&#039; we need &amp;quot;allies in the ranks of the liberals and intellectuals&amp;quot;, who are prepared to join us in the exposure of the political attack on the Zemstvos, on the teachers, on the statisticians, on the students, etc.? Is this surprisingly &amp;quot;intricate mechanism&amp;quot; really so difficult to understand? Has not P. B. Axelrod constantly repeated since 1897 that &amp;quot;the task before the Russian Social-Democrats of acquiring adherents and direct and indirect allies among the non-proletarian classes will be solved principally and primarily by the character of the propagandist activities conducted among the proletariat itself&amp;quot;? But the Martynovs and the other Economists continue to imagine that &amp;quot;by economic struggle against the employers and the government&amp;quot; the workers must &#039;&#039;first&#039;&#039; gather strength (for trade-unionist politics) and &#039;&#039;then&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;go over&amp;quot; — we presume from trade-unionist &amp;quot;training for activity&amp;quot; to Social-Democratic activity!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;...In this quest,&amp;quot; continue the Economists, &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; not infrequently departs from the class point of view, obscures class antagonisms, and puts into the forefront the common nature of the discontent with the government, although the causes and the degree of the discontent vary considerably among the ’allies’. Such, for example, is &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;’s attitude towards the Zemstvo . . .&amp;quot; &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;, it is alleged, &amp;quot;promises the nobles that are dissatisfied with the government’s sops the assistance of the working class, but it does not say a word about the class antagonism that exists between these social strata.&amp;quot; If the reader will turn to the article &amp;quot;The Autocracy and the Zemstvo&amp;quot; (&#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;, Nos. 2 and 4), to which, &#039;&#039;in all probability&#039;&#039;, the authors of the letter refer, he will find that they&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[18]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; deal with the attitude of the &#039;&#039;government&#039;&#039; towards the &amp;quot;mild agitation of the bureaucratic Zemstvo, which is based on the social-estates&amp;quot;, and towards the &amp;quot;independent activity of even the propertied classes&amp;quot;. The article states that the workers cannot look on indifferently while the government is waging a struggle against the Zemstvo, and the Zemstvos are called upon to stop making mild speeches and to speak firmly and resolutely when revolutionary Social-Democracy confronts the government in all its strength. What the authors of the letter do not agree with here is not clear. Do they think that the workers will &amp;quot;not understand&amp;quot; the phrases &amp;quot;propertied classes&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;bureaucratic Zemstvo based on the social-estates&amp;quot;? Do they think that &#039;&#039;urging&#039;&#039; the Zemstvo to abandon mild speeches and to speak firmly is &amp;quot;overestimating ideology&amp;quot;? Do they imagine the workers can &amp;quot;gather strength&amp;quot; for the struggle against the autocracy if they know nothing about the attitude of the autocracy towards the Zemstvo &#039;&#039;as well?&#039;&#039; All this too remains unknown. One thing alone is clear and that is that the authors of the letter have a very vague idea of what the political tasks of Social-Democracy are. This is revealed still more clearly by their remark: &amp;quot;Such, too, is &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;’s attitude towards the student movement&amp;quot; (i.e., it also &amp;quot;obscures the class antagonisms&amp;quot;). Instead of calling on the workers to declare by means of public demonstrations that the real breeding-place of unbridled violence, disorder, and outrage is not the university youth but the Russian Government (&#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;, No. 2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[19]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;) we ought probably to have inserted arguments in the spirit of &#039;&#039;Rabochaya Mysl&#039;&#039;! Such ideas were expressed by Social-Democrats in the autumn of 1901, after the events of February and March, on the eve of a fresh upsurge of the student movement, which reveals that even in this sphere the &amp;quot;spontaneous&amp;quot; protest against the autocracy is &#039;&#039;outstripping&#039;&#039; the conscious Social-Democratic leadership of the movement. The spontaneous striving of the workers to defend the students who are being assaulted by the police and the Cossacks surpasses the conscious activity of the Social-Democratic organisation!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;And yet in other articles,&amp;quot; continue the authors of the letter, &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; sharply condemns all compromise and defends, for instance, the intolerant conduct of the Guesdists.&amp;quot; We would advise those who are wont so conceitedly and frivolously to declare that the present disagreements among the Social-Democrats are unessential and do not justify a split, to ponder these words. Is it possible for people to work together in the same organisation, when some among them contend that we have done extremely little to explain the hostility of the autocracy to the various classes and to inform the workers of the opposition displayed by the various social strata to the autocracy, while others among them see in this clarification a &amp;quot;compromise&amp;quot; — evidently a compromise with the theory of &amp;quot;economic struggle against the employers and the government&amp;quot;?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We urged the necessity of carrying the class struggle into the rural districts in connection with the fortieth anniversary of the emancipation of the peasantry (issue No. 3&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[20]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; and spoke of the irreconcilability of the local government bodies and the autocracy in relation to Witte’s secret Memorandum (No. 4). In connection with the new law we attacked the feudal landlords and the government which serves them (No. 8&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[21]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;) and we welcomed the illegal Zemstvo congress. We urged the Zemstvo to pass over from abject petitions (No. 8&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[22]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;) to struggle. We encouraged the students, who had begun to understand the need for the political struggle, and to undertake this struggle (No. 3), while, at the same time, we lashed out at the &amp;quot;outrageous incomprehension&amp;quot; revealed by the adherents of the &amp;quot;purely student&amp;quot; movement, who called upon the students to abstain from participating in the street demonstrations (No. 3, in connection with the manifesto issued by the Executive Committee of the Moscow students on February 25). We exposed the &amp;quot;senseless dreams&amp;quot; and the &amp;quot;lying hypocrisy&amp;quot; of the cunning liberals of &#039;&#039;Rossiya&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[26]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; (No. 5), while pointing to the violent fury with which the government-gaoler persecuted &amp;quot;peaceful writers, aged professors, scientists, and well-known liberal Zemstvo members&amp;quot; (No. 5, &amp;quot;Police Raid on Literature&amp;quot;). We exposed the real significance of the programme of &amp;quot;state protection for the welfare of the workers&amp;quot; and welcomed the &amp;quot;valuable admission&amp;quot; that &amp;quot;it is better, by granting reforms from above, to forestall the demand for such reforms from below than to wait for those demands to be put forward&amp;quot; (No. 6&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[23]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;). We encouraged the protesting statisticians (No. 7) and censured the strike-breaking statisticians (No. 9). He who sees in these tactics an obscuring of the class-consciousness of the proletariat and &#039;&#039;a compromise with liberalism&#039;&#039; reveals his utter failure to understand the true significance of the programme of the &#039;&#039;Credo&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;carries out that programme de facto&#039;&#039;, however much he may repudiate it. For by &#039;&#039;such an approach&#039;&#039; he drags Social-Democracy towards the &amp;quot;economic struggle against the employers and the government&amp;quot; and &#039;&#039;yields to liberalism&#039;&#039;, abandons the task of actively intervening in every &amp;quot;liberal&amp;quot; issue and of determining &#039;&#039;his own&#039;&#039;, Social-Democratic, attitude towards this question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Once more &amp;quot;slanderers&amp;quot;, once more &amp;quot;mystifiers&amp;quot;===&lt;br /&gt;
These polite expressions, as the reader will recall, belong to &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;, which in this way answers our charge that it &amp;quot;is indirectly preparing the ground for converting the working-class movement into an instrument of bourgeois democracy&amp;quot;. In its simplicity of heart &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; decided that this accusation was nothing more than a polemical sally: these malicious doctrinaires are bent on saying all sorts of unpleasant things about us, and, what can be more unpleasant than being an instrument of bourgeois democracy? And so they print in bold type a &amp;quot;refutation&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Nothing but downright slander&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;mystification&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;mummery&amp;quot; (&#039;&#039;Two Conferences&#039;&#039;, pp. 30, 31, 33). Like Jove, &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; (although bearing little resemblance to that deity) is wrathful because it is wrong, and proves by its hasty abuse that it is incapable of understanding its opponents’ mode of reasoning. And yet, with only a little reflection it would have understood why &#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039; subservience to the spontaneity of the mass movement and &#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039; degrading of Social-Democratic politics to the level of trade-unionist politics mean preparing the ground for converting the working-class movement into an instrument of bourgeois democracy. The spontaneous working-class movement is by itself able to create (and inevitably does create) only trade-unionism, and working-class trade-unionist politics is precisely working-class bourgeois politics. The fact that the working class participates in the political struggle, and even in the political revolution, does not in itself make its politics Social-Democratic politics. Will &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; make bold to deny this? Will it, at long last, publicly, plainly, and without equivocation explain how it understands the urgent questions of international and of Russian Social-Democracy? Hardly. It will never do anything of the kind, because it holds fast to the trick, which might be described as the &amp;quot;not here&amp;quot; method — &amp;quot;It’s not me, it’s not my horse, I’m not the driver. We are not Economists; &#039;&#039;Rabochaya Mysl&#039;&#039; does not stand for E’conomism; there is no Economism at all in Russia.&amp;quot; This is a remarkably adroit and &amp;quot;political&amp;quot; trick, which suffers from the slight defect, however, that the publications practising it are usually nicknamed, &amp;quot;At your service, sir&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; imagines that bourgeois democracy in Russia is, in general, merely a &amp;quot;phantom&amp;quot; (&#039;&#039;Two Conferences&#039;&#039;, p. 32).&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[24]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; &amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[24]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; There follows a reference to the &amp;quot;concrete Russian conditions which fatalistically impel the working-class movement on to the revolutionary path&amp;quot;. But these people refuse to understand that the revolutionary path of the working-class movement might not be a Social-Democratic path. When absolutism reigned, the entire West-European bourgeoisie &amp;quot;impelled&amp;quot;, deliberately impelled, the workers on to the path of revolution. We Social-Democrats, however, cannot be satisfied with that. And if we, by any means whatever, degrade Social-Democratic politics to the level of spontaneous trade-unionist politics, we thereby play into the hands of bourgeois democracy.—&#039;&#039;Lenin&#039;&#039; Happy people! Ostrich-like, they bury their heads in the sand and imagine that everything around has disappeared. Liberal publicists who month after month proclaim to the world their triumph over the collapse and even the disappearance of Marxism; liberal newspapers (&#039;&#039;S. Peterburgskiye Vedomosti&#039;&#039;,&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[27]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;Russkiye Vedomosti&#039;&#039;, and many others) which encourage the liberals who bring to the workers the Brentano&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[28]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; conception of the class struggle and the trade-unionist conception of politics; the galaxy of critics of Marxism, whose real tendencies were so very well disclosed by the &#039;&#039;Credo&#039;&#039; and whose literary products alone circulate in Russia without let or hindrance; the revival of revolutionary &#039;&#039;non&#039;&#039;-Social-Democratic tendencies, particularly after the February and March events — all these, apparently, are just phantoms! All these have nothing at all to do with bourgeois democracy!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; and the authors of the Economist letter published in &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;, No. 12, should &amp;quot;ponder over the reason why the events of the spring brought about such a revival of revolutionary non-Social-Democratic tendencies instead of increasing the authority and the prestige of Social-Democracy&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The reason lies in the fact that we failed to cope with our tasks. The masses of the workers proved to be more active than we. We lacked adequately trained revolutionary leaders and organisers possessed of a thorough knowledge of the mood prevailing among all the opposition strata and able to head the movement, to turn a spontaneous demonstration into a political one, broaden its political character, etc. Under such circumstances, our backwardness will inevitably be utilised by the more mobile and more energetic non-Social-Democratic revolutionaries, and the workers, however energetically and self-sacrificingly they may fight the police and the troops, however revolutionary their actions may be, will prove to be merely a force supporting those revolutionaries, the rearguard of bourgeois democracy, and not the Social-Democratic vanguard. Let us take, for example, the German Social-Democrats, whose weak aspects alone our Economists desire to emulate. Why is there &#039;&#039;not a single&#039;&#039; political event in Germany that does not add to the authority and prestige of Social-Democracy? Because Social-Democracy is always found to be in advance of all others in furnishing the most revolutionary appraisal of every given event and in championing every protest against tyranny. It does not lull itself with arguments that the economic struggle brings the workers to realise that they have no political rights and that the concrete conditions unavoidably impel the working-class movement on to the path of revolution. It intervenes in every sphere and in every question of social and political life; in the matter of Wilhelm’s refusal to endorse a bourgeois progressist as city mayor (our Economists have not yet managed to educate. the Germans to the understanding that such an act is, in fact, a compromise with liberalism!); in the matter of the law against &amp;quot;obscene&amp;quot; publications and pictures; in the matter of governmental influence on the election of professors, etc., etc. Everywhere the Social-Democrats are found in the forefront, rousing political discontent among all classes, rousing the sluggards, stimulating the laggards, and providing a wealth of material for the development of the political consciousness and the political activity of the proletariat. As a result, even the avowed enemies of socialism are filled with respect for this advanced political fighter, and not infrequently an important document from bourgeois, and even from bureaucratic and Court circles, makes its way by some miraculous means into the editorial office of &#039;&#039;Vorwarts.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This, then, is the resolution of the seeming &amp;quot;contradiction&amp;quot; that surpasses &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;’s powers of understanding to such an extent that it can only throw up its hands and cry, &amp;quot;Mummery!&amp;quot; Indeed, just think of it: We, &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;, regard the &#039;&#039;mass&#039;&#039; working-class movement as the &#039;&#039;corner-stone&#039;&#039; (and say so in bold type!); we warn all and sundry against belittling the significance of the element of spontaneity; we desire to lend the economic struggle itself — &#039;&#039;itself&#039;&#039; — a political character; we desire to maintain close and organic contact with the proletarian struggle. And yet we are told that we are preparing the ground for the conversion of the working-class movement into an instrument of bourgeois democracy! And who are they that presume to say this? People who &amp;quot;compromise&amp;quot; with liberalism by intervening in every &amp;quot;liberal&amp;quot; issue (what a gross misunderstanding of &amp;quot;organic contact with the proletarian struggle&amp;quot;!), by devoting so much attention to the students and even (oh horror!) to the Zemstvos! People who in general wish to devote a greater percentage (compared with the Economists) of their efforts to activity among non-proletarian classes of the population! What is this but &amp;quot;mummery&amp;quot;?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Poor &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo!&#039;&#039; Will it ever find the solution to this perplexing puzzle?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The primitiveness of the economists and the organization of the revolutionaries ==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo’s&#039;&#039; assertions, which we have analyzed, that the economic struggle is the most widely applicable means of political agitation and that our task now is to lend the economic struggle itself a political character, etc., express a narrow view, not only of our political, but also of our organizational tasks. The &amp;quot;economic struggle against the employers and the government&amp;quot; does not at all require an all-Russia centralized organization, and hence this struggle can never give rise to such an organization as will combine, in one general assault, all the manifestations of political opposition, protest, and indignation, an organization that will consist of professional revolutionaries and be led by the real political leaders of the entire people. This stands to reason. The character of any organization is naturally and inevitably determined by the content of its activity. Consequently, &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;, by the assertions analyzed above, sanctifies and legitimizes not only narrowness of political activity, but also of organizational work. In this case, &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;, as always, proves itself an organ whose consciousness yields to spontaneity. Yet subservience to spontaneously developing forms of organisation, failure to realise the narrowness and primitiveness of our organisational work, of our &amp;quot;handicraft&amp;quot; methods in this most important sphere, failure to realise this, I say, is a veritable ailment from which our movement suffers. It is not an ailment that comes with decline, but one, of course, that comes with growth. It is however at the present time, when the wave of spontaneous indignation, as it were, is sweeping over us, leaders and organisers of the movement, that an irreconcilable struggle must be waged against all defence of backwardness, against any legitimation of narrowness in this matter. It is particularly necessary to arouse in all who participate in practical work, or are preparing to take up that work, discontent with the &#039;&#039;amateurism&#039;&#039; prevailing among us and an unshakable determination to rid ourselves of it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===What is primitiveness?===&lt;br /&gt;
We shall try to answer this question by giving a brief description of the activity of a typical Social-Democratic study circle of the period 1894-1901. We have noted that the entire student youth of the period was absorbed in Marxism. Of course, these students were not only, or even not so much, interested in Marxism as a theory; they were interested in it as an answer to the question, &amp;quot;What is to be done?&amp;quot;, as a call to take the field against the enemy. These new warriors marched to battle with astonishingly primitive equipment and training. In a vast number of cases they had almost no equipment and absolutely no training. They marched to war like peasants from the plough, armed only with clubs. A students’ circle establishes contacts with workers and sets to work, without any connection with the old members of the movement, without any connection with study circles in other districts, or even in other parts of the same city (or in other educational institutions), without any organisation of the various divisions of revolutionary work, without any systematic plan of activity covering any length of time. The circle gradually expands its propaganda and agitation; by its activities it wins the sympathies of fairly large sections of workers and of a certain section of the educated strata, which provide it with money and from among whom the &amp;quot;committee&amp;quot; recruits new groups of young people. The attractive power of the committee (or League of Struggle) grows, its sphere of activity becomes wider, and the committee expands this activity quite spontaneously; the very people who a year or a few months previously spoke at the students’ circle gatherings and discussed the question, &amp;quot;Whither?&amp;quot;, who established and maintained contacts with the workers and wrote and published leaflets, now, establish contacts with other groups of revolutionaries, procure literature, set to work to publish a local newspaper, begin to talk of organising a demonstration, and finally turn to open warfare (which may, according to circumstances, take the form of issuing the first agitational leaflet or the first issue of a newspaper, or of organising the first demonstration). Usually the initiation of such actions ends in an immediate and complete fiasco. Immediate and complete, because this open warfare was not the result of a systematic and carefully thought-out and gradually prepared plan for a prolonged and stubborn struggle, but simply the result of the spontaneous growth of traditional study circle work; because, naturally, the police, in almost every case, knew the principal leaders of the local movement, since they had already &amp;quot;gained a reputation&amp;quot; for themselves in their student days, and the police waited only for the right moment to make their raid. They deliberately allowed the study circle sufficient time to develop its work so that they might, obtain a palpable &#039;&#039;corpus delicti&#039;&#039;, and they always permitted several of the persons known to them to remain at liberty &amp;quot;for breeding&amp;quot; (which, as far as I know, is the technical term used both by our people and by the gendarmes). One cannot help comparing this kind of warfare with that conducted by a mass of peasants, armed with clubs, against modern troops. And one can only wonder at the vitality of the movement which expanded, grew, and scored victories despite the total lack of training on the part of the fighters. True, from the historical point of view, the primitiveness of equipment was not only inevitable at first, but &#039;&#039;even legitimate&#039;&#039; as one of the conditions for the wide recruiting of fighters, but as soon as serious war operations began (and they began in fact with the strikes in the summer of 1896), the defects in our fighting organisations made themselves felt to an ever-increasing degree. The government, at first thrown into confusion and committing a number of blunders (e.g., its appeal to the public describing the misdeeds of the socialists, or the banishment of workers from the capitals to provincial industrial centres), very soon adapted itself to the new conditions of the struggle and managed to deploy well its perfectly equipped detachments of &#039;&#039;agents provocateurs&#039;&#039;, spies, and gendarmes. Raids became so frequent, affected such a vast number of people, and cleared out the local study circles so thoroughly that the masses of the workers lost literally all their leaders, the movement assumed an amazingly sporadic character, and it became utterly impossible to establish continuity and coherence in the work. The terrible dispersion of the local leaders; the fortuitous character of the study circle memberships; the lack of training in, and the narrow outlook on, theoretical, political, and organisational questions were all the inevitable result of the conditions described above. Things have reached such a pass that in several places the workers, because of our lack of self-restraint and the inability to maintain secrecy, begin to lose faith in the intellectuals and to avoid them; the intellectuals, they say, are much too careless and cause police raids!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Anyone who has the slightest knowledge of the movement is aware that all thinking Social-Democrats have at last begun to regard these amateurish methods as a disease. In order that the reader who is not acquainted with the movement may have no grounds for thinking that we are &amp;quot;inventing&amp;quot; a special stage or special disease of the movement, we shall refer once again to the witness we have quoted. We trust we shall be forgiven for the length of the passage:&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;quot;While the gradual transition to more extensive practical activity,&amp;quot; writes B-v in &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;, No. 6, &amp;quot;a transition that is directly dependent on the general transitional period through which the Russian working-class movement is now passing, is a characteristic feature, . . . there is, however, another, no less interesting feature in the general mechanism of the Russian workers’ revolution. &#039;&#039;We refer to the general lack of revolutionary forces fit for action&#039;&#039;, [all italics ours — Lenin] which is felt not only in St. Petersburg, but throughout Russia. With the general revival of the working-class movement, with the general development of the working masses, with the growing frequency of strikes, with the increasingly open mass struggle of the workers, and with the intensified government persecution, arrests, deportation, and exile, this &#039;&#039;lack of highly skilled revolutionary forces is becoming more and more marked&#039;&#039; and, without a doubt, &#039;&#039;cannot but affect the depth and the general character of the movement.&#039;&#039; Many strikes take place without any strong and direct influence upon them by the revolutionary organisations.... A shortage of agitational leaflets and illegal literature Is felt.... The workers’ study circles are left without agitators.... In addition, there is a constant dearth of funds. In a word, &#039;&#039;the growth of the working class movement is outstripping the growth and development of the revolutionary organisations.&#039;&#039; The numerical strength of the active revolutionaries is too small to enable them to concentrate in their own hands the influence exercised upon the whole mass of discontented workers, or to give this discontent even a shadow of coherence and organisation.... The separate study circles, the separate revolutionaries, scattered, uncombined, do not represent a single, strong, and disciplined organisation with proportionately developed parts. . . .&amp;quot; Admitting that the immediate organization of fresh study circles to replace those that have been broken up merely proves the vitality of the movement ... but does not prove the existence of an adequate number of adequately prepared revolutionary workers, the author concludes: &amp;quot;The lack of practical training among the St. Petershurg revolutionaries is seen in the results of their work. The recent trials, especially that of the Self-Emancipation Group and the Labour-against-Capital group,&amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;The full name of this small organisation was &#039;&#039;Workers’ Group for the Struggle Against Capital&#039;&#039;; its views were close to those of the “Economists”. The group was formed in St. Petersburg in the spring of 1899; it prepared a mimeographed leaflet, “Our Programme”, which was never circulated, owing to the arrest of the group.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; clearly showed that the young agitator, lacking a detailed knowledge of working class conditions and, consequently, of the conditions under which agitation can be carried on in a given factory, ignorant of the principles of secrecy, and understanding only the general principles of Social-Democracy [if he does], is able to carry on his work for perhaps four, five, or six months. Then come arrests, which frequently lead to the break-up of the entire organisation, or at all events, of part of it. The question arises, therefore, can the group conduct successful activity if its existence is measured by months?... Obviously, the defects of the existing organisations cannot be wholly ascribed to the transitional period.... Obviously, the numerical, and above all the qualitative, make-up of the functioning organisations is no small factor, and the first task our Social-Democrats must undertake ... is that of &#039;&#039;effectively combining the organisations and making a strict selection of their membership.&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span name=&amp;quot;04_B&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Primitiveness and economism===&lt;br /&gt;
We must now deal with a question that has undoubtedly come to the mind of every reader. Can a connection be established between primitiveness as growing pains that affect the &#039;&#039;whole&#039;&#039; movement, and Economism, which is &#039;&#039;one&#039;&#039; of the currents in Russian Social-Democracy? We think that it can. Lack of practical training, of ability to carry on organisational work is certainly common &#039;&#039;to us all&#039;&#039;, including those who have from the very outset unswervingly stood for revolutionary Marxism. Of course, were it only lack of practical training, no one could blame the practical workers. But the term &amp;quot;primitiveness&amp;quot; embraces something more than lack of training; it denotes a narrow scope of revolutionary work generally, failure to understand that a good organisation of revolutionaries cannot be built on the basis of such narrow activity, and lastly — and this is the main thing — attempts to justify this narrowness and to elevate it to a special &amp;quot;theory&amp;quot;, i.e., subservience to spontaneity on this question too. Once such attempts were revealed, it became clear that primitiveness is connected with Economism and that we shall never rid ourselves of this narrowness of our organisational activity until we rid ourselves of Economism generally (i.e., the narrow conception of Marxist theory, as well as of the role of Social-Democracy and of its political tasks). These attempts manifested themselves in a twofold direction. Some began to say that the working masses themselves have not yet advanced the broad and militant political tasks which the revolutionaries are attempting to &amp;quot;impose&amp;quot; on them; that they must continue to struggle for &#039;&#039;immediate&#039;&#039; political demands, to conduct &amp;quot;the economic struggle against the employers and the government&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;Lenin&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Rabochaya Mysl&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;, especially the &#039;&#039;Reply&#039;&#039; to Plekhanov.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; (and, naturally, corresponding to this struggle which is &amp;quot;accessible&amp;quot; to the mass movement there must be an organisation that will be &amp;quot;accessible&amp;quot; to the most untrained youth). Others, far removed from any theory of &amp;quot;gradualness&amp;quot;, said that it is possible and necessary to &amp;quot;bring about a political revolution&amp;quot;, but that this does not require building a strong organisation of revolutionaries to train the proletariat in steadfast and stubborn struggle. All we need do is to snatch up our old friend, the &amp;quot;accessible&amp;quot; cudgel. To drop metaphor, it means that we must organise a general strike,&amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;Lenin&amp;quot;&amp;gt;See “Who Will Bring About the Political Revolution?” in the collection published in Russia, entitled &#039;&#039;The Proletarian Struggle.&#039;&#039; Re-issued by the Kiev Committee.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; or that we must stimulate the &amp;quot;spiritless&amp;quot; progress of the working-class movement by means of &amp;quot;excitative terror&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;Lenin&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Regeneration of Revolutionism&#039;&#039; and the journal &#039;&#039;Svoboda&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Both these trends, the opportunists and the &amp;quot;revolutionists&amp;quot;, bow to the prevailing amateurism; neither believes that it can be eliminated, neither understands our primary and imperative practical task to establish &#039;&#039;an organisation of revolutionaries&#039;&#039; capable of lending energy, stability, and continuity to the political struggle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have quoted the words of B-v: &amp;quot;The growth of the working-class movement is outstripping the growth and development of the revolutionary organisations.&amp;quot; This &amp;quot;valuable remark of a close observer&amp;quot; (&#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;’s comment on B-v’s article) has a twofold value for us. It shows that we were right in our opinion that the principal cause of the present crisis in Russian Social-Democracy is the &#039;&#039;lag of the leaders&#039;&#039; (&amp;quot;ideologists&amp;quot;, revolutionaries, Social-Democrats) behind &#039;&#039;the spontaneous upsurge of the masses&#039;&#039;. It shows that all the arguments advanced by the authors of the Economist letter (in &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;, No. 12), by Krichevsky and by Martynov, as to the danger of belittling the significance of the spontaneous element, of the drab everyday struggle, as to tactics-as-process, etc., are nothing more than a glorification and a defence of primitiveness. These people who cannot pronounce the word &amp;quot;theoretician&amp;quot; without a sneer, who describe their genuflections to common lack of training and backwardness as a &amp;quot;sense for the realities of life&amp;quot;, reveal in practice a failure to understand our most imperative &#039;&#039;practical&#039;&#039; tasks. To laggards they shout: Keep in step! Don’t run ahead! To people suffering from a lack of energy and initiative in organisational work, from a lack of &amp;quot;plans&amp;quot; for wide and bold activity, they prate about &amp;quot;tactics-as-process&amp;quot;! The worst sin we commit is that we &#039;&#039;degrade&#039;&#039; our political &#039;&#039;and organisational&#039;&#039; tasks to the level of the immediate, &amp;quot;palpable&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;concrete&amp;quot; interests of the everyday economic struggle; yet they keep singing to us the same refrain: Lend the economic struggle itself a political character! We repeat: this kind of thing displays as much &amp;quot;sense for the realities of life&amp;quot; as was displayed by the hero in the popular fable who cried out to a passing funeral procession, &amp;quot;Many happy returns of the day!&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Recall the matchless, truly &amp;quot;Narcissus-like&amp;quot; superciliousness with which these wiseacres lectured Plekhanov on the &amp;quot;workers’ &#039;&#039;circles&#039;&#039; generally&amp;quot; (sic!) being &amp;quot;unable to cope with political tasks in the real and &#039;&#039;practical&#039;&#039; sense of the word, i.e., in the sense of the expedient and successful &#039;&#039;practical&#039;&#039; struggle for political demands&amp;quot; (&#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo’s Reply,&#039;&#039; p. 24). There are circles and circles, gentlemen! Circles of &amp;quot;amateurs&amp;quot; are not, of course, capable of coping with political tasks so long as they have not become aware of their amateurism and do not abandon it. If, besides this, these amateurs are enamoured of their primitive methods, and insist on writing the word &amp;quot;practical&amp;quot; in italics, and imagine that being practical demands that one’s tasks be reduced to the level of understanding of the most backward strata of the masses, then they are hopeless amateurs and, of course, certainly cannot &#039;&#039;in general cope with any political tasks&#039;&#039;. But a circle of leaders, of the type of Alexeyev and Myshkin, of Khalturin and Zhelyabov, is capable of coping with political tasks in the genuine and most practical sense of the term, for the reason and to the extent that their impassioned propaganda meets with response among the spontaneously awakening masses, and their sparkling energy is answered and supported by the energy of the revolutionary class. Plekhanov was profoundly right, not only in pointing to this revolutionary class and proving that its spontaneous awakening was inevitable, but in setting even the &amp;quot;workers’ circles&amp;quot; a great and lofty political task. But you refer to the mass movement that has sprung up since that time in order to &#039;&#039;degrade&#039;&#039; this task, to &#039;&#039;curtail&#039;&#039; the energy and scope of activity of the &amp;quot;workers’ circles&amp;quot;. If you are not amateurs enamoured of your primitive methods, what are you then? You boast that you are practical, but you fail to see what every Russian practical worker knows, namely, the miracles that the energy, not only of a circle, but even of an individual person is able to perform in the revolutionary cause. Or do you think that our movement cannot produce leaders like those of the seventies? If so, why do you think so? Because we lack training? But we are training ourselves, we will go on training ourselves, and we will be trained! Unfortunately it is true that the surface of the stagnant waters of the &amp;quot;economic struggle against the employers and the government&amp;quot; is overgrown with fungus; people have appeared among us who kneel in prayer to spontaneity, gazing with awe (to take an expression from Plekhanov) upon the &amp;quot;posterior&amp;quot; of the Russian proletariat. But we will get rid of this fungus. The time has come when Russian revolutionaries, guided by a genuinely revolutionary theory, relying upon the genuinely revolutionary and spontaneously awakening class, can at last — at long last! — rise to full stature in all their giant strength. All that is required is for the masses of our practical workers, and the still larger masses of those who dreamed of practical work when they were still at school, to pour scorn and ridicule upon any suggestion that may be made to degrade our political tasks and to restrict the scope of our organisational work. And we will achieve that, rest assured, gentlemen!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the article &amp;quot;Where To Begin&amp;quot;, I wrote in opposition to &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;: &amp;quot;The tactics of agitation in relation to some special question, or the tactics with regard to some detail of party organisation may be changed in twenty-four hours; but only people devoid of all principle are capable of changing, in twenty-four hours, or, for that matter, in twenty-four months, their view on the necessity — in general, constantly, and absolutely — of an organisation of struggle and of political agitation among the masses.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;See &#039;&#039;Collected Works&#039;&#039;, Vol. 5, p. 18&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; To this &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; replied: &amp;quot;This, the only one of &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;’s charges that makes a pretence of being based on facts, is totally without foundation. Readers of &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; know very well that from the outset we not only called for political agitation, without waiting for the appearance of &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; ... [saying at the same time that not only the workers’ study circles, &amp;quot;but also the mass working-class movement could not regard as its first political task the overthrow of absolutism&amp;quot;, but only the struggle for immediate political demands, and that &amp;quot;the masses begin to understand immediate political demands after one, or at all events, after several strikes&amp;quot;], . . . but that with our publications which we furnished from abroad for the comrades working in Russia, we provided the &#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039; Social-Democratic political and agitational material ... [and in this sole material you not only based the widest political agitation exclusively on the economic struggle, but you even went to the extent of claiming that this restricted agitation was the &amp;quot;most widely applicable&amp;quot;. And do you not observe, gentlemen, that your own argument — that this was the &#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039; material provided — proves the necessity for &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;’s appearance, and its struggle against &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;?].... On the other hand, our publishing activity actually prepared the ground for the tactical unity of the Party... [unity in the conviction that tactics is a process of growth of Party tasks that grow together with the Party? A precious unity indeed!]... and by that rendered possible the creation of a ’militant organisation’ for which the Union Abroad did all that an organisation abroad could do&amp;quot; (&#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;, No. 10, p. 15). A vain attempt at evasion! I would never dream of denying that you did all you possibly could. I have asserted and assert now that the &#039;&#039;limits&#039;&#039; of what is &amp;quot;possible&amp;quot; for you to do are restricted by the narrowness of your outlook. It is ridiculous to talk of a &amp;quot;militant organisation&amp;quot; to fight for &amp;quot;immediate political demands&amp;quot;, or to conduct the economic struggle against the employers and the government&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But if the reader wishes to see the pearls of &amp;quot;Economist&amp;quot; infatuation with amateurism, he must, of course, turn from the eclectic and vacillating &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; to the consistent and determined &#039;&#039;Rabochaya Mysl&#039;&#039;. In its &#039;&#039;Separate Supplement&#039;&#039;, p. 13, R. M. wrote: &amp;quot;Now two words about the so-called revolutionary intelligentsia proper. True, on more than one occasion it has proved itself prepared ’to enter into determined battle with tsarism’. The unfortunate thing, however, is that our revolutionary intelligentsia, ruthlessly persecuted by the political police, imagined the struggle against the political police to be the political struggle against the autocracy. That is why, to this day, it cannot understand ’where the forces for the struggle against the autocracy are to be obtained’.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Truly matchless is the lofty contempt for the struggle against the police displayed by this worshipper (in the worst sense of the word) of the &#039;&#039;spontaneous&#039;&#039; movement! He is prepared &#039;&#039;to justify&#039;&#039; our inability to organise secret activity by the argument that with the spontaneous mass movement it is not at all important for us to struggle against the political police! Very few people indeed would subscribe to this appalling conclusion; to such an extent have our deficiencies in revolutionary organisations become a matter of acute importance. But if Martynov, for example, refuses to subscribe to this, it will only be because he is unable, or lacks the courage, to think out his ideas to their logical conclusion. Indeed, does the &amp;quot;task&amp;quot; of advancing concrete demands by the masses, demands that promise palpable results, call for special efforts to create a stable, centralised, militant organisation of revolutionaries? Cannot such a &amp;quot;task&amp;quot; be carried out even by masses that do not &amp;quot;struggle against the political police&amp;quot; at all? Could this task, moreover, be fulfilled if, in addition to the few leaders, it were not undertaken by such workers (the overwhelming majority) as are quite &#039;&#039;incapable&#039;&#039; of &amp;quot;struggling against the political police&amp;quot;? Such workers, average people of the masses, are capable of displaying enormous energy and selfsacrifice in strikes and in street, battles with the police and the troops, and are capable (in fact, are alone capable) of &#039;&#039;determining&#039;&#039; the outcome of our entire movement — but the struggle against the &#039;&#039;political&#039;&#039; police requires special qualities; it requires &#039;&#039;professional&#039;&#039; revolutionaries. And we must see to it, not only that the masses &amp;quot;advance&amp;quot; concrete demands, but that the masses of the workers &amp;quot;advance&amp;quot; an increasing number of such professional revolutionaries. Thus, we have reached the question of the relation between an organisation of professional revolutionaries and the labour movement pure and simple. Although this question has found little reflection in literature, it has greatly engaged us &amp;quot;politicians&amp;quot; in conversations and polemics with comrades who gravitate more or less towards Economism. It is a question meriting special treatment. But before taking it up, let us offer one further quotation by way of illustrating our thesis on the connection between primitiveness and Economism.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In his &#039;&#039;Reply&#039;&#039;, Mr. N. N.&amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;N. N.&#039;&#039;—pseudonym of S. N. Prokopovich, an active “Economist” who later became a Cadet.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; wrote: &amp;quot;The Emancipation of Labour group demands direct struggle against the government without first considering where the material forces for this struggle are to be obtained, and without indicating the &#039;&#039;path of the struggle&#039;&#039;.&amp;quot; Emphasising the last words, the author adds the following footnote to the word &amp;quot;Path&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;This cannot be explained by purposes of secrecy, because the programme does not refer to a plot but to &#039;&#039;a mass movement.&#039;&#039; And the masses cannot proceed by secret paths. Can we conceive of a secret strike? Can we conceive of secret demonstrations and petitions?&amp;quot; (&#039;&#039;Vademecum&#039;&#039;, p. 59.) Thus, the author comes quite close to the question of the &amp;quot;material forces&amp;quot; (organisers of strikes and demonstrations) and to the &amp;quot;paths&amp;quot; of the struggle, but, nevertheless, is still in a state of consternation, because he &amp;quot;worships&amp;quot; the mass movement, i.e., he regards it as something that &#039;&#039;relieves&#039;&#039; us of the necessity of conducting revolutionary activity and not as something that should encourage us and &#039;&#039;stimulate&#039;&#039; our revolutionary activity. It is impossible for a strike to remain a secret to those participating in it and to those immediately associated with it, but it may (and in the majority of cases does) remain a &amp;quot;secret&amp;quot; to the masses of the Russian workers, because the government takes care to cut all communication with the strikers, to prevent all news of strikes from spreading. Here indeed is where a special &amp;quot;struggle against the political police&amp;quot; is required, a struggle that can never be conducted actively by such large masses as take part in strikes. This struggle must be organised, according to &amp;quot;all the rules of the art&amp;quot;, by people who are professionally engaged in revolutionary activity. The fact that the masses are spontaneously being drawn into the movement does not make the organisation of this struggle &#039;&#039;less necessary&#039;&#039;. On the contrary, it makes it &#039;&#039;more necessary;&#039;&#039; for we socialists would be failing in our direct duty to the masses if we did not prevent the police from making a secret of every strike and every demonstration (and if we did not ourselves from time to time secretly prepare strikes and demonstrations). And we &#039;&#039;will succeed in doing this&#039;&#039;, because the spontaneously awakening masses will &#039;&#039;also produce&#039;&#039; increasing, numbers of &amp;quot;professional revolutionaries&amp;quot; &#039;&#039;from their own ranks&#039;&#039; (that is, if we do not take it into our heads to advise the workers to keep on marking time).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Organisation of workers and organisation of revolutionaries===&lt;br /&gt;
It is only natural to expect that for a Social-Democrat whose conception of the political struggle coincides with the conception of the &amp;quot;economic struggle against the employers and the government&amp;quot;, the &amp;quot;organisation of revolutionaries&amp;quot; will more or less coincide with the &amp;quot;organisation of workers&amp;quot;. This, in fact, is what actually happens; so that when we speak of organisation, we literally speak in different tongues. I vividly recall, for example, a conversation I once had with a fairly consistent Economist, with whom I had not been previously acquainted. We were discussing the pamphlet, &#039;&#039;Who Will Bring About the Political Revolution?&#039;&#039; and were soon of a mind that its principal defect was its ignoring of the question of organisation. We had begun to assume full agreement between us; but, as the conversation proceeded, it became evident that we were talking of different things. My interlocutor accused the author of ignoring strike funds, mutual benefit societies, etc., whereas I had in mind an organisation of revolutionaries as an essential factor in &amp;quot;bringing about&amp;quot; the political revolution. As soon as the disagreement became clear, there was hardly, as I remember, a single question of principle upon which I was in agreement with the Economist!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What was the source of our disagreement? It was the fact that on questions both of organisation and of politics the Economists are forever lapsing from Social-Democracy into trade-unionism. The political struggle of Social-Democracy is far more extensive and complex than the economic struggle of the workers against the employers and the government. Similarly (indeed for that reason), the organisation of the revolutionary Social-Democratic Party must inevitably be of &#039;&#039;a kind different&#039;&#039; from the organisation of the workers designed for this struggle. The workers’ organisation must in the first place be a trade union organisation; secondly, it must be as broad as possible; and thirdly, it must be as public as conditions will allow (here, and further on, of course, I refer only to absolutist Russia). On the other hand, the organisation of the revolutionaries must consist first and foremost of people who make revolutionary activity their profession (for which reason I speak of the organisation of &#039;&#039;revolutionaries&#039;&#039;, meaning revolutionary Social-Democrats). In view of this common characteristic of the members of such an organisation, &#039;&#039;all distinctions as between workers and intellectuals&#039;&#039;, not to speak of distinctions of trade and profession, in both categories, &#039;&#039;must be effaced&#039;&#039;. Such an organisation must perforce not be very extensive and must be as secret as possible. Let us examine this threefold distinction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In countries where political liberty exists the distinction between a trade union and a political organisation is clear enough, as is the distinction between trade unions and Social-Democracy. The relations between the latter and the former will naturally vary in each country according to historical, legal, and other conditions; they may be more or less close, complex, etc. (in our opinion they should be as close and as little complicated as possible); but there can be no question in free countries of the organisation of trade unions coinciding with the organisation of the Social-Democratic Party. In Russia, however, the yoke of the autocracy appears at first glance to obliterate all distinctions between the Social-Democratic organisation and the workers’ associations, since &#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039; workers’ associations and &#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039; study circles are prohibited, and since the principal manifestation and weapon of the workers’ economic struggle — the strike — is regarded as a criminal (and sometimes even as a political!) offence. Conditions in our country, therefore, on the one hand, strongly &amp;quot;impel&amp;quot; the workers engaged in economic struggle to concern themselves with political questions, and, on the other, they &amp;quot;impel&amp;quot; Social-Democrats to confound trade-unionism with Social-Democracy (and our Krichevskys, Martynoys, and Co., while diligently discussing the first kind of &amp;quot;impulsion&amp;quot;, fail to notice the second). Indeed, picture to yourselves people who are immersed ninety-nine per cent in &amp;quot;the economic struggle against the employers and the government&amp;quot;. Some of them will never, during the &#039;&#039;entire&#039;&#039; course of their activity (from four to six months), be impelled to think of the need for a more complex organisation of revolutionaries. Others, perhaps, will come across the fairly widely distributed Bernsteinian literature, from which they will become convinced of the profound importance of the forward movement of &amp;quot;the drab everyday struggle&amp;quot;. Still others will be carried away, perhaps, by the seductive idea of showing the world a new example of &amp;quot;close and organic contact with the proletarian struggle&amp;quot; — contact between the trade union and the Social Democratic movements. Such people may argue that the later a country enters the arena of capitalism and, consequently, of the working-class movement, the more the socialists in that country may take part in, and support, the trade union movement, and the less the reason for the existence of non-Social-Democratic trade unions. So far the argument is fully correct; unfortunately, however, some go beyond that and dream of a complete fusion of Social-Democracy with trade-unionism. We shall soon see, from the example of the Rules of the St. Petersburg League of Struggle, what a harmful effect such dreams have upon our plans of organisation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The workers’ organisations for the economic struggle should be trade union organisations. Every Social-Democratic worker should as far as possible assist and actively work in these organisations. But, while this is true, it is certainly not in our interest to demand that only Social-Democrats should be eligible for membership in the &amp;quot;trade&amp;quot; unions, since that would only narrow the scope of our influence upon the masses. Let every worker who understands the need to unite for the struggle against the employers and the government join the trade unions. The very aim of the trade unions would be impossible of achievement, if they did not unite all who have attained at least this elementary degree of understanding, if they were not very &#039;&#039;broad&#039;&#039; organisations. The broader these organisations, the broader will be our influence over them — an influence due, not only to the &amp;quot;spontaneous&amp;quot; development of the economic struggle, but to the direct and conscious effort of the socialist trade union members to influence their comrades. But a broad organisation cannot apply methods of strict secrecy (since this demands far greater training than is required for the economic struggle). How is the contradiction between the need for a large membership and the need for strictly secret methods to be reconciled? How are we to make the trade unions as public as possible? Generally speaking, there can be only two ways to this end: either the trade unions become legalised (in some countries this preceded the legalisation of the socialist and political unions), or the organisation is kept secret, but so &amp;quot;free&amp;quot; and amorphous, &#039;&#039;lose&#039;&#039; as the Germans say, that the need for secret methods becomes almost negligible as far as the bulk of the members is concerned.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The legalisation of non-socialist and non-political labour unions in Russia has begun, and there is no doubt that every advance made by our rapidly growing Social-Democratic working-class movement will multiply and encourage attempts at legalisation — attempts proceeding for the most part from supporters of the existing order, but partly also from the workers themselves and from liberal intellectuals. The banner of legality has already been hoisted by the Vasilyevs and the Zubatovs. Support has been promised and rendered by the Ozerovs and the Wormses, and followers of the new tendency are now to be found among the workers. Henceforth, we cannot but reckon with this tendency. How we are to reckon with it, on this there can be no two opinions among Social-Democrats. We must steadfastly expose any part played in this movement by the Zubatovs and the Vasilyeys, the gendarmes and the priests, and explain their real intentions to the workers. We must also expose all the conciliatory, &amp;quot;harmonious&amp;quot; notes that will be heard in the speeches of liberal politicians at legal meetings of the workers, irrespective of whether the speeches are motivated by an earnest conviction of the desirability of peaceful class collaboration, by a desire to curry favour with the powers that be, or whether they are simply the result of clumsiness. Lastly, we must warn the workers against the traps often set by the police, who at such open meetings and permitted societies spy out the &amp;quot;fiery ones&amp;quot; and try to make use of legal organisations to plant their &#039;&#039;agents provocateurs&#039;&#039; in the illegal organisations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Doing all this does not at all mean forgetting that &#039;&#039;in the long&#039;&#039; run the legalisation of the working-class movement will be, to our advantage, and not to that of the Zubatovs. On the contrary, it is precisely our campaign of exposure that will help us to separate the tares from the wheat. What the tares are, we have already indicated. By the wheat we mean attracting the attention of ever larger numbers, including the most backward sections, of the workers to social and political questions, and freeing ourselves, the revolutionaries, from functions that are essentially legal (the distribution of legal books, mutual aid, etc.), the development of which will inevitably provide us with an increasing quantity of material for agitation. In this sense, we may, and should, say to the Zubatovs and the Ozerovs: Keep at it, gentlemen, do your best! Whenever you place a trap in the path of the workers (either by way of direct provocation, or by the &amp;quot;honest&amp;quot; demoralisation of the workers with the aid of &amp;quot;Struvism&amp;quot;) we will see to it that you are exposed. But whenever you take a real step forward, though it be the most &amp;quot;timid zigzag&amp;quot;, we will say: Please continue! And the only step that can be a real step forward is a real, if small, extension of the workers’ field of action. Every such extension will be to our advantage and will help to hasten the advent of legal societies of the kind in which it will not be &#039;&#039;agents provocateurs&#039;&#039; who are detecting socialists, but socialists who are gaining adherents. in a word, our task is to fight the tares. It is not our business to grow wheat in flower-pots. By pulling up the tares, we clear the soil for the wheat. And while the Afanasy Ivanoviches and Pulkheria Ivanovnas are tending their flower-pot crops, we must prepare the reapers, not only to cut down the tares of today, but to reap the wheat of tomorrow.&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[6]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus, we cannot by means of legalisation &#039;&#039;solve&#039;&#039; the problem of creating a trade union organisation that will be as little secret and as extensive as possible (but we should be extremely glad if the Zubatovs and the Ozerovs disclosed to us even a partial opportunity for such a solution — to this end, however, &#039;&#039;we must&#039;&#039; strenuously combat them). There remain secret trade union organisations, and we must give all possible assistance to the workers who (as we definitely know) are adopting this course. Trade union organisations, not only can be of tremendous value in developing and consolidating the economic struggle, but can also become a very important auxiliary to political agitation and revolutionary organisation. In order to achieve this purpose, and in order to guide the nascent trade union movement in the channels desired by Social-Democracy, we must first understand clearly the absurdity of the plan of organisation the St. Petersburg Economists have been nursing for nearly five years. That plan is set forth in the &amp;quot;Rules for a Workers’ Mutual Benefit Fund&amp;quot; of July 1897 (&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;Listok&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; &#039;&#039;Rabotnika&#039;&#039;, No. 9-10, p. 46, taken from &#039;&#039;Rabochaya Mysl&#039;&#039;, No. 1), as well as in the &amp;quot;Rules for a Trade Union Workers’ Organisation&amp;quot; of October 1900 (special leaflet printed in St. Petersburg and referred to in &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;, No. 1). Both these sets of rules have one main shortcoming: they set up the broad workers’ organisation in a rigidly specified structure and confound it with the organisation of revolutionaries. Let us take the last-mentioned set of rules, since it is drawn up in greater detail. The body consists of &#039;&#039;fifty-two&#039;&#039; paragraphs. Twenty-three deal with the structure, the method of functioning, and the competence of the &amp;quot;workers’ circles&amp;quot;, which are to be organised in every factory (&amp;quot;a maximum of ten persons&amp;quot;) and which elect &amp;quot;central (factory) groups&amp;quot;. &amp;quot;The central group,&amp;quot; says paragraph 2, &amp;quot;observes all that goes on in its factory or workshop and keeps a record of events.&amp;quot; &amp;quot;The central group presents to subscribers a monthly financial account&amp;quot; (par. 17), etc. Ten paragraphs are devoted to the &amp;quot;district organisation&amp;quot;, and nineteen to the highly complex interconnection between the Committee of the Workers’ Organisation and the Committee of the St. Petersburg League of Struggle (elected representatives of each district and of the &amp;quot;executive groups&amp;quot; — &amp;quot;groups of propagandists, groups for maintaining contact with the provinces, and with the organisation abroad, groups for managing stores; publications, and funds&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Social-Democracy = &amp;quot;executive groups&amp;quot; in relation to the economic struggle of the workers! It would be difficult to show more glaringly how the Economists’ ideas deviate from Social-Democracy to trade-unionism, and how alien to them is any idea that a Social-Democrat must concern himself first and foremost with an organisation of revolutionaries capable of guiding the &#039;&#039;entire&#039;&#039; proletarian struggle for emancipation. To talk of &amp;quot;the political emancipation of the working class&amp;quot; and of the struggle against &amp;quot;tsarist despotism&amp;quot;, and at the same time to draft rules like these, means to have no idea whatsoever of the real political tasks of Social-Democracy. Not one of the fifty or so paragraphs reveals even a glimmer of understanding that it is necessary to conduct the widest possible political agitation among the masses, an agitation highlighting every aspect of Russian absolutism and the specific features of the various social classes in Russia. Rules like these are of no use even for the achievement of trade union, let alone political, aims, since trade unions are organised by &#039;&#039;trades&#039;&#039;, of which no mention is made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But most characteristic, perhaps, is the amazing top-heaviness of the whole &amp;quot;system&amp;quot;, which attempts to bind each single factory and its &amp;quot;committee&amp;quot; by a permanent string of uniform and ludicrously petty rules and a three-stage system of election. Hemmed in by the narrow outlook of Economism, the mind is lost in details that positively reek of red tape and bureaucracy. In practice, of course, three-fourths of the clauses are never applied; on the other hand, a &amp;quot;secret&amp;quot; organisation of this kind, with its central group in each factory, makes it very easy for the gendarmes to carry out raids on a vast scale. The Polish cornrades have passed through a similar phase in their movement, with everybody enthusiastic about the extensive organisation of workers’ benefit funds; but they very quickly abandoned this idea when they saw that such organisations only provided rich harvests for the gendarmes. If we have in mind broad workers’ organisations, and not widespread arrests, if we do not want to provide satisfaction to the gendarmes, we must see to it that these organisations remain without any rigid formal structure. But will they be able to function in that case?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let us see what the functions are: &amp;quot;. . . To observe all that goes on in the factory and keep a record of events&amp;quot; (par. 2 of the Rules). Do we really require a formally established group for this purpose? Could not the purpose be better served by correspondence conducted in the illegal papers without the setting up of special groups? &amp;quot;. . . To lead the struggles of the workers for the improvement of their workshop conditions&amp;quot; (par. 3). This, too, requires no set organisational form. Any sensible agitator can in the course of ordinary conversation gather what the demands of the workers are and transmit them to a narrow — not a broad — organisation of revolutionaries for expression in a leaflet. &amp;quot; ... To organise a fund ... to which subscriptions of two kopeks per ruble&amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Of wages earned.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; should be made&amp;quot; (par. 9) — and then to present to subscribers a monthly financial account (par. 17), to expel members who fail to pay their contributions (par. 10), and so forth. Why, this is a very paradise for the police; for nothing would be easier for them than to penetrate into such a secrecy of a &amp;quot;central factory fund&amp;quot;, confiscate the money, and arrest the best people. Would it not be simpler to issue one-kopek or two-kopek coupons bearing the official stamp of a well-known (very narrow and very secret) organisation, or to make collections without coupons of any kind and to print reports in a certain agreed code in an illegal paper? The object would thereby be attained, but it would be a hundred times more difficult for the gendarmes to pick up clues.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I could go on analysing the Rules, but I think that what has been said will suffice. A small, compact core of the most reliable, experienced, and hardened workers, with responsible representatives in the principal districts and connected by all the rules of strict secrecy with the organisation of revolutionaries, can, with the widest support of the masses and without any formal organisation, perform &#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039; the functions of a trade union organisation, in a manner, moreover, desirable to Social-Democracy. Only in this way can we secure the &#039;&#039;consolidation&#039;&#039; and development of a &#039;&#039;Social-Democratic&#039;&#039; trade union movement, despite all the gendarmes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It may be objected that an organisation which is so &#039;&#039;lose&#039;&#039; that it is not even definitely formed, and which has not even an enrolled and registered membership, cannot be called an organisation at all. Perhaps so. Not the name is important. What is important is that this &amp;quot;organisation without members&amp;quot; shall do everything that is required, and from the very outset ensure a solid connection between our future trade unions and socialism. Only an incorrigible utopian would have a &#039;&#039;broad&#039;&#039; organisation of workers, with elections, reports, universal suffrage, etc., under the autocracy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The moral to be drawn from this is simple. If we begin with the solid foundation of a strong organisation of revolutionaries, we can ensure the stability of the movement as a whole and carry out the aims both of Social-Democracy and of trade unions proper. If, however, we begin with a broad workers’ organisation, which is supposedly most &amp;quot;accessible&amp;quot; to the masses (but which is actually most accessible to the gendarmes and makes revolutionaries most accessible to the police), we shall achieve neither the one aim nor the other; we shall not eliminate our rule-of-thumb methods, and, because we remain scattered and our forces are constantly broken up by the police, we shall only make trade unions of the Zubatov and Ozerov type the more accessible to the masses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What, properly speaking, should be the functions of the organisation of revolutionaries? We shall deal with this question in detail. First, however, let us examine a very typical argument advanced by our terrorist, who (sad fate!) in this matter also is a next-door neighbour to the Economist. &#039;&#039;Svoboda&#039;&#039;, a journal published for workers, contains in its first issue an article entitled &amp;quot;Organisation&amp;quot;, the author of which tries to defend his friends, the Economist workers of Ivanovo-Voznesensk. He writes:&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;quot;It is bad when the masses are mute and unenlightened, when the movement does not come from the rank and file. For instance, the students of a university town leave for their homes during the summer and other holidays, and immediately the workers’ movement comes to a standstill. Can a workers’ movement which has to be pushed on from outside be a real force? No, indeed.... It has not yet learned to walk, it is still in leading-strings. So it is in all matters. The students go off, and everything comes to a standstill. The most capable are seized; the cream is skimmed and the milk turns sour. If the ’committee’ is arrested, everything comes to a standstill until a new one can he formed. And one never knows what sort of committee will be set up next — it may be nothing like the former. The first said one thing, the second may say the very opposite. Continuity between yesterday and tomorrow is broken, the experience of the past does not serve as a guide for the future. And all because no roots have been struck in depth, in the masses; the work is carried on not by a hundred fools, but by a dozen wise men. A dozen wise men can be wiped out at a snap, but when the organisation embraces masses, everything proceeds from them, and nobody, however he tries, can wreck the cause&amp;quot; (p. 63).&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;The facts are described correctly. The picture of our amateurism is well drawn. But the conclusions are worthy of &#039;&#039;Rabochaya Mysl&#039;&#039;, both as regards their stupidity and their lack of political tact. They represent the height of stupidity, because the author confuses the philosophical and social-historical question of the &amp;quot;depth&amp;quot; of the &amp;quot;roots&amp;quot; of the movement with the technical and organisational question of the best method in combating the gendarmes. They represent the height of political tactlessness, because, instead of appealing from bad leaders to good leaders, the author appeals from the leaders in general to the &amp;quot;masses&amp;quot; . This is as much an attempt to drag us back organisationally as the idea of substituting excitative terrorism for political agitation drags us back politically. Indeed, I am experiencing a veritable &#039;&#039;embarras de richesses&#039;&#039;, and hardly know where to begin to disentangle the jumble offered up by &#039;&#039;Svoboda&#039;&#039;. For clarity, let me begin by citing an example. Take the Germans. It will not be denied, I hope, that theirs is a mass organisation, that in Germany everything proceeds from the masses, that the working-class movement there has learned to walk. Yet observe how these millions value their &amp;quot;dozen&amp;quot; tried political leaders, how firmly they cling to them. Members of the hostile parties in parliament have often taunted the socialists by exclaiming: &amp;quot;Fine democrats you are indeed! Yours is a working-class movement only in name; in actual fact the same clique of leaders is always in evidence, the same Bebel and the same Liebknecht, year in and year out, and that goes on for decades. Your supposedly elected workers’ deputies are more permanent than the officials appointed by the Emperor!&amp;quot; But the Germans only smile with contempt at these demagogic attempts to set the &amp;quot;masses&amp;quot; against the &amp;quot;leaders&amp;quot;, to arouse bad and ambitious instincts in the former, and to rob the movement of its solidity and stability by undermining the confidence of the masses in their &amp;quot;dozen wise men&amp;quot;. Political thinking is sufficiently developed among the Germans, and they have accumulated sufficient political experience to understand that without the &amp;quot;dozen&amp;quot; tried and talented leaders (and talented men are not born by the hundreds), professionally trained, schooled by long experience, and working in perfect harmony, no class in modern society can wage a determined struggle. The Germans too have had demagogues in their ranks who have flattered the &amp;quot;hundred fools&amp;quot;, exalted them above the &amp;quot;dozen wise men&amp;quot;, extolled the &amp;quot;horny hand&amp;quot; of the masses, and (like Most and Hasselmann) have spurred them on to reckless &amp;quot;revolutionary&amp;quot; action and sown distrust towards the firm and steadfast leaders. It was only by stubbornly and relentlessly combating all demagogic elements within the socialist movement that German socialism has managed to grow and become as strong as it is. Our wiseacres, however, at a time when Russian Social-Democracy is passing through a crisis entirely due to the lack of sufficiently trained, developed, and experienced leaders to guide the spontaneously awakening masses, cry out ,with the profundity of fools: &amp;quot;It is a bad business when the movement does not proceed from the rank and file.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;A committee of students is of no use; it is not stable.&amp;quot; Quite true. But the conclusion to be drawn from this is that we must have a committee of professional &#039;&#039;revolutionaries&#039;&#039;, and it is immaterial whether a student or a worker is capable of becoming a professional revolutionary. The conclusion you draw, how. ever, is that the working-class movement must not be pushed on from outside! In your political innocence you fail to notice that you are playing into the hands of our Economists and fostering our amateurism. Wherein, may I ask, did our students &amp;quot;push on&amp;quot; our workers? &#039;&#039;In the sense&#039;&#039; that the student brought to the worker the fragments of political knowledge he himself possesses, the crumbs of socialist ideas he has managed to acquire (for the principal intellectual diet of the present-day student, legal Marxism, could furnish only the rudiments, only scraps of knowledge). There has never been too much of &#039;&#039;such&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;pushing on from outside&amp;quot;; on the contrary, there has so far been all too little of it in our movement, for we have been stewing too assiduously in our own juice; we have bowed far too slavishly to the elementary &amp;quot;economic struggle of the workers against the employers and the government&amp;quot;. We professional revolutionaries must and will make it our business to engage in &#039;&#039;this kind&#039;&#039; of &amp;quot;pushing on&amp;quot; a hundred times more forcibly than we have done hitherto. But the very fact that you select so hideous a phrase as &amp;quot;pushing on from outside&amp;quot; — a phrase which cannot but rouse in the workers (at least in the workers who are as unenlightened as you yourselves) a sense of distrust towards &#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039; who bring them political knowledge and revolutionary experience from outside, which cannot but rouse in them an instinctive desire to resist &#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039; such people — proves you to be demagogues, and &#039;&#039;demagogues&#039;&#039; are the worst enemies of the working class.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And, please — don’t hasten howling about my &amp;quot;uncomradely methods&amp;quot; of debating. I have not the least desire to doubt the purity of your intentions. As I have said, one may become a demagogue out of sheer political innocence. But I have shown that you have descended to demagogy, and I will never tire of repeating that demagogues are the worst enemies of the working class. The worst enemies, because they arouse base instincts in the masses, because the unenlightened worker is unable to recognise his enemies in men who represent themselves, and sometimes sincerely so, as his friends. The worst enemies, because in the period of disunity and vacillation, when our movement is just beginning to take shape, nothing is easier than to employ demagogic methods to mislead the masses, who can realise their error only later by bitter experience. That is why the slogan of the day for the Russian Social-Democrat must be — resolute struggle against Svoboda and &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;, both of which have sunk to the level of demagogy. We shall deal with this further in greater detail.&amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;Lenin&amp;quot;&amp;gt;For the moment let us observe merely that our remarks on “pushing on from outside” and &#039;&#039;Svoboda’s&#039;&#039; other disquisitions on organisation apply in &#039;&#039;their entirety to all&#039;&#039; the Economists, including the adherents of &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;; for some of them have actively preached and defended such views on organisation, while others among them have drifted into them.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;A dozen wise men can be more easily wiped out than a hundred fools.&amp;quot; This wonderful truth (for which the hundred fools will always applaud you) appears obvious only because in the very midst of the argument you have skipped from one question to another. You began by talking and continued to talk of the unearthing of a &amp;quot;committee&amp;quot;, of the unearthing of an &amp;quot;organisation&amp;quot;, and now you skip to the question of unearthing the movement’s &amp;quot;roots&amp;quot; in their &amp;quot;depths&amp;quot;. The fact is, of course, that our movement cannot be unearthed, for the very reason that it has countless thousands of roots deep down among the masses; but that is not the point at issue. As far as &amp;quot;deep roots&amp;quot; are concerned, we cannot be &amp;quot;unearthed&amp;quot; even now, despite all our amateurism, and yet we all complain, and cannot but complain, that the &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;organisations&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; are being unearthed and as a result it is impossible to maintain continuity in the movement. But since you raise the question of &#039;&#039;organisations&#039;&#039; being unearthed and persist in your opinion, I assert that it is far more difficult to unearth a dozen wise men than a hundred fools. This position I will defend, no matter how much you instigate the masses against me for my &amp;quot;anti-democratic&amp;quot; views, etc. As I have stated repeatedly, by &amp;quot;wise men&amp;quot;, in connection with organisation, I mean &#039;&#039;professional revolutionaries&#039;&#039;, irrespective of whether they have developed from among students or working men. I assert:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# that no revolutionary movement can endure without a stable organisation of leaders maintaining continuity;&lt;br /&gt;
# that the broader the popular mass drawn spontaneously into the struggle, which forms the basis of the movement and participates in it, the more urgent the need for such an organisation, and the more solid this organisation must be (for it is much easier for all sorts of demagogues to side-track the more backward sections of the masses);&lt;br /&gt;
# that such an organisation must consist chiefly of people professionally engaged in revolutionary activity;&lt;br /&gt;
# that in an autocratic state, the more we &#039;&#039;confine&#039;&#039; the membership of such an organisation to people who are professionally engaged in revolutionary activity and who have been professionally trained in the art of combating the political police, the more difficult will it be to unearth the organisation; and &lt;br /&gt;
# the &#039;&#039;greater&#039;&#039; will be the number of people from the working class and from the other social classes who will be able to join the movement and perform active work in it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I invite our Economists, terrorists, and &amp;quot;Economists-terrorists&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;Lenin&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This term is perhaps more applicable to &#039;&#039;Svoboda&#039;&#039; than the former, for in an article entitled “The Regeneration of Revolutionisin” the publication defends terrorism, while in the article at present under review it defends Economism. One might say of &#039;&#039;Svoboda&#039;&#039; that “it would if it could, but it can’t”. Its wishes and intentions are of the very best — but the result is utter confusion; this is chiefly due to the fact that, while &#039;&#039;Svoboda&#039;&#039; advocates continuity of organisation, it refuses to recognise continuity of revolutionary thought and Social-Democratic theory. It wants to revive the professional revolutionary (“The Regeneration of Revolutionism”), and to that end proposes, first, excitative terrorism, and, secondly, — an organisation of average workers&amp;quot; (&#039;&#039;Svoboda&#039;&#039;, No. 1, p. 66, et seq.), as less likely to be “pushed on from outside”. In other words, it proposes to pull the house down to use the timber for heating it.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; to confute these propositions. At the moment, I shall deal only with the last two points. The question as to whether it is easier to wipe out &amp;quot;a dozen wisemen&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;a hundred fools&amp;quot; reduces itself to the question, above considered, whether it is possible to have a mass &#039;&#039;organisation&#039;&#039; when the maintenance of strict secrecy is essential. We can never give a mass organisation that degree of secrecy without which there can be no question of persistent and continuous struggle against the government. To concentrate all secret functions in the hands of as small a number of professional revolutionaries as possible does not mean that the latter will &amp;quot;do the thinking for all&amp;quot; and that the rank and file will not take an active part in the &#039;&#039;movement&#039;&#039;. On the contrary, the membership will promote increasing numbers of the professional revolutionaries from its ranks; for it will know that it is not enough for a few students and for a few working men waging the economic struggle to gather in order to form a &amp;quot;committee&amp;quot;, but that it takes years to train oneself to be a professional revolutionary; and the rank and file will &amp;quot;think&amp;quot;, not only of amateurish methods, but of such training. Centralisation of the secret functions of the &#039;&#039;organisation&#039;&#039; by no means implies centralisation of all the functions of the &#039;&#039;movement&#039;&#039;. Active participation of the widest masses in the illegal press will not diminish because a &amp;quot;dozen&amp;quot; professional revolutionaries centralise the secret functions connected with this work; on the contrary, it will &#039;&#039;increase&#039;&#039; tenfold. In this way, and in this way alone, shall we ensure that reading the illegal press, writing for it, and to some extent even distributing it, will &#039;&#039;almost cease to be secret work&#039;&#039;, for the police will soon come to realise the folly and impossibility of judicial and administrative red-tape procedure over every copy of a publication that is being distributed in the thousands. This holds not only for the press, but for every function of the movement, even for demonstrations. The active and widespread participation of the masses will not suffer; on the contrary, it will benefit by the fact that a &amp;quot;dozen&amp;quot; experienced revolutionaries, trained professionally no less than the police, will centralise all the secret aspects of the work — the drawing up of leaflets, the working out of approximate plans; and the appointing of bodies of leaders for each urban district, for each institution, etc. (I know that exception will be taken to my &amp;quot;undemocratic&amp;quot; views, but I shall reply below fully to this anything but intelligent objection.) Centralisation of the most secret functions in an organisation of revolutionaries will not diminish, but rather increase the extent and enhance the quality of the activity of a large number of other organisations that are intended for a broad public and are therefore as loose and as non-secret as possible, such as workers’ trade unions; workers’ self-education circles and circles for reading illegal literature; and socialist, as well as democratic, circles among &#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039; other sections of the population; etc., etc. We must have such circles, trade unions, and organisations everywhere in &#039;&#039;as large a number as possible&#039;&#039; and with the widest variety of functions; but it would be absurd and harmful &#039;&#039;to confound&#039;&#039; them with the organisation of &#039;&#039;revolutionaries&#039;&#039;, to efface the border-line between them, to make still more hazy the all too faint recognition of the fact that in order to &amp;quot;serve&amp;quot; the mass movement we must have people who will devote themselves exclusively to Social-Democratic activities, and that such people must &#039;&#039;train&#039;&#039; themselves patiently and steadfastly to be professional revolutionaries.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yes, this recognition is incredibly dim. Our worst sin with regard to organisation consists in the fact that by &#039;&#039;our primitiveness we have lowered the prestige of revolutionaries in Russia&#039;&#039;. A person who is flabby and shaky on questions of theory, who has a narrow outlook, who pleads the spontaneity of the masses as an excuse for his own sluggishness, who resembles a trade union secretary more than a spokesman of the people, who is unable to conceive of a broad and bold plan that would command the respect even of opponents, and who is inexperienced and clumsy in his own professional art — the art of combating the political police — such a man is not a revolutionary, but a wretched amateur!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let no active worker take offence at these frank remarks, for as far as insufficient training is concerned, I apply them first and foremost to myself. I used to work in a study circle&amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Lenin refers here to his own revolutionary activity in St. Petersburg in 1893-95.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; that set itself very broad, all-embracing tasks; and all of us, members of that circle, suffered painfully and acutely from the realisation that we were acting as amateurs at a moment in history when we might have been able to say, varying a well-known statement: &amp;quot;Give us an organisation of revolutionaries, and we will overturn Russia&amp;quot; The more I recall the burning sense of shame I then experienced, the bitterer become my feelings towards those pseudo-Social-Democrats whose preachings &amp;quot;bring disgrace on the calling of a revolutionary&amp;quot;, who fail to understand that our task is not to champion the degrading of the revolutionary to the level of an amateur, but to &#039;&#039;raise&#039;&#039; the amateurs to the level of revolutionaries.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The scope of organisational work===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have heard B-v tell us about &amp;quot;the lack of revolutionary forces fit for action which is felt not only in St. Petersburg, but throughout Russia&amp;quot;. Hardly anyone will dispute this fact. But the question is, how is it to be explained? B-v writes:&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;quot;We shall not go into an explanation of the historical causes of this phenomenon; we shall merely state that a society, demoralised by prolonged political reaction and split by past and present economic changes, promotes from its own ranks an &#039;&#039;extremely small number of persons fit for revolutionary work&#039;&#039;; that the working class does produce revolutionary workers who to some extent reinforce the ranks of the illegal organisations, but that the number of such revolutionaries is inadequate to meet the requirements of the times. This is all the more so because the worker who spends eleven and a half hours a day in the factory is in such a position that he can, in the main, perform only the functions of an agitator; but propaganda and organisation, the delivery and reproduction of illegal literature, the issuance of leaflets, etc., are duties which must necessarily fall mainly upon the shoulders of an extremely small force of intellectuals&amp;quot; (&#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;, No. 6, pp. 38-39).&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;On many points we disagree with B-v, particularly with those we have emphasised, which most saliently reveal that, although weary of our amateurism (as is every thinking practical worker), B-v cannot find the way out of this intolerable situation because he is weighted down by Economism. The fact is that society produces very &#039;&#039;many&#039;&#039; persons fit for &amp;quot;the cause&amp;quot;, but we are unable to make use of them all. The critical, transitional state of our movement in this respect may be formulated as follows: &#039;&#039;There are no people — yet there is a mass of people&#039;&#039;. There is a mass of people, because the working class and increasingly varied social strata, year after year, produce from their ranks an increasing number of discontented people who desire to protest, who are ready to render all the assistance they can in the struggle against absolutism, the intolerableness of which, though not yet recognised by all, is more and more acutely sensed by increasing masses of the people. At the same time, we have no people, because we have no leaders, no political leaders, no talented organisers capable of arranging. extensive and at the same time uniform and harmonious work that would employ all forces, even the most inconsiderable. &amp;quot;The growth and development of the revolutionary organisations&amp;quot; lag, not only behind the growth of the working-class movement, which even B-v admits, but behind that of the general democratic movement among all strata of the people. (In passing, probably B-V would now regard this as supplementing his conclusion.) The scope of revolutionary work is too narrow, as compared with the breadth of the spontaneous basis of the movement. It is too hemmed in by the wretched theory of &amp;quot;economic struggle against the employers and the government&amp;quot;. Yet, at the present time, not only Social-Democratic political agitators, but Social-Democratic organisers must &amp;quot;go among all classes of the population&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;Lenin&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Thus, an undoubted revival of the democratic spirit has recently been	 observed among persons in military service, partly as a consequence of the more frequent street battles with “enemies” like workers and students. As soon as our available forces permit, we must without fail devote the most serious attention to propaganda and agitation among soldiers and officers, and to the creation of “military organisations” affiliated to our Party.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; There is hardly a single practical worker who will doubt that the Social-Democrats could distribute the thousand and one minute functions of their organisational work among individual representatives of the most varied classes. Lack of specialisation is one of the most serious defects of our technique, about which B-v justly and bitterly complains. The smaller each separate &amp;quot;operation&amp;quot; in our common cause the more people we can find capable of carrying out such operations (people who, in the majority of cases, are completely incapable of becoming professional revolutionaries); more difficult will it be for the police to &amp;quot;net&amp;quot; all these &amp;quot;detail workers&amp;quot;, and the more difficult will it be for them to frame up, out of an arrest for some petty affair, a &amp;quot;case&amp;quot; that would justify the government’s expenditure on &amp;quot;security&amp;quot;. As for the number of people ready to help us, we referred in the preceding chapter to the gigantic change that has taken place in this respect in the last five years or so. On the other hand, in order to unite all these tiny fractions into one whole, in order not to break up the movement while breaking up its functions, and in order to imbue the people who carry out the minute functions with the conviction that their work is necessary and important, without which conviction they will never do the work,&amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;Lenin&amp;quot;&amp;gt;I recall that once a comrade told me of a factory inspector who	 wanted to help the Social-Democrats, and actually did, but complained bitterly that he did not know whether his “information” reached the proper revolutionary centre, how much his help was really required, and what possibilities there were for utilising his small and petty services. Every practical worker can, of course, cite many similar instances in which our primitiveness deprived us of allies. These services, each “small” in itself, but invaluable when taken in the mass, could and would be rendered to us by office employees and officials, not only in factories, but in the postal service, on the railways, in the Customs, among the nobility, among the clergy, and in &#039;&#039;every&#039;&#039; other walk of life, including even the police and the Court! Had we a real party, a real militant organisation of revolutionaries, we would not make undue demands on every one of these “aides”, we would not hasten always and invariably to bring them right into the very heart of our “illegality”, but, on the contrary, we would husband them most carefully and would even train people especially for such functions, bearing in mind that many students could be of much greater service to the Party as “aides” holding some official post than as “short-term” revolutionaries. But, I repeat, only an organisation that is firmly established and has no lack of active forces would have the right to apply such tactics.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; it is necessary to have a strong organisation of tried revolutionaries. The more secret such an organisation is, the stronger and more widespread will be the confidence in the Party. As we know, in time of war, it is not only of the utmost importance to imbue one’s own army with confidence in its strength, but it is important also to convince the enemy and all &#039;&#039;neutral&#039;&#039; elements of this strength; friendly neutrality may sometimes decide the issue. If such an organisation existed, one built up on a firm theoretical foundation and possessing a Social-Democratic organ, we should have no reason to fear that the movement might be diverted from its path by the numerous &amp;quot;outside&amp;quot; elements that are attracted to it. (On the contrary, it is precisely at the present time, with amateurism prevalent, that we see many Social-Democrats leaning towards the &#039;&#039;Credo&#039;&#039; and only imagining that they are Social Democrats.) In a word, specialisation necessarily presupposes centralisation, and in turn imperatively calls for it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But B-v himself, who has so excellently described the necessity for specialisation, underestimates its importance, in our opinion, in the second part of the argument we have quoted. The number of working-class revolutionaries is inadequate, he says. This is perfectly true, and once again we stress that the &amp;quot;valuable communication of a close observer&amp;quot; fully confirms our view of the causes of the present crisis in Social-Democracy, and, consequently, of the means required to overcome it. Not only are revolutionaries in general lagging behind the spontaneous awakening of the masses, but even worker-revolutionaries are lagging behind the spontaneous awakening of the working-class masses. This &#039;&#039;fact&#039;&#039; confirms with clear evidence, from the &amp;quot;practical&amp;quot; point of view, too, not only the absurdity but even the &#039;&#039;politically reactionary nature&#039;&#039; of the &amp;quot;pedagogics&amp;quot; to which we are so often treated in the discussion of our duties to the workers. This fact proves that our very first and most pressing duty is to help to train working-class revolutionaries who will he on the same level &#039;&#039;in regard to Party activity&#039;&#039; as the revolutionaries from amongst the intellectuals (we emphasise the words &amp;quot;in regard to Party activity&amp;quot;, for, although necessary, it is neither so easy nor so pressingly necessary to bring the workers up to the level of intellectuals in other respects). Attention, therefore, must be devoted &#039;&#039;principally to raising&#039;&#039; the workers to the level of revolutionaries; it is not at all our task &#039;&#039;to descend&#039;&#039; to the level of the &amp;quot;working masses&amp;quot; as the Economists wish to do, or to the level of the &amp;quot;average worker&amp;quot; as &#039;&#039;Svoboda&#039;&#039; desires to do (and by this ascends to the second grade of Economist &amp;quot;pedagogics&amp;quot;). I am far from denying the necessity for popular literature for the workers, and especially popular (of course, not vulgar) literature for the especially backward workers. But what annoys me is this constant confusion of pedagogics with questions of politics and organisation. You, gentlemen, who are so much concerned about the &amp;quot;average worker&amp;quot;, as a matter of fact, rather insult the workers by your desire &#039;&#039;to talk down&#039;&#039; to them when discussing working-class politics and working-class organisation. Talk about serious things in a serious manner; leave pedagogics to the pedagogues, and not to politicians and organisers! Are there not advanced people, &amp;quot;average people&amp;quot;, and &amp;quot;masses&amp;quot; among the intelligentsia too? Does not everyone recognise that popular literature is also required for the intelligentsia, and is not such literature written? Imagine someone, in an article on organising college or high-school students, repeating over and over again, as if he had made a new discovery, that first of all we must have an organisation of &amp;quot;average students&amp;quot;. The author of such an article would be ridiculed, and rightly so. Give us your ideas on organisation, if you have any, he would be told, and we ourselves will decide who is &amp;quot;average&amp;quot;, who above average, and who below. But if you have no organisational ideas &#039;&#039;of your own&#039;&#039;, then all your exertions in behalf of the &amp;quot;masses&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;average people&amp;quot; will be simply boring. You must realise that these questions of &amp;quot;politics&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;organisation&amp;quot; are so serious in themselves that they cannot be dealt with in any other but a serious way. We can and must &#039;&#039;educate&#039;&#039; workers (and university and Gymnasium students) so that we &#039;&#039;may be able to discuss&#039;&#039; these questions with them. But once you do bring up these questions, you must give real replies to them; do not fall back on the &amp;quot;average&amp;quot;, or on the &amp;quot;masses&amp;quot;; do not try to dispose of the matter with facetious remarks and mere phrases.&amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;Lenin&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Svoboda&#039;&#039;, No. 1, p. 66, in the article “Organisation”: “The heavy tread of the army of workers will reinforce all the demands that will be advanced in behalf of Russian Labour” — Labour with a capital L, of course. And the author exclaims: “I am not in the least hostile towards the intelligentsia, but [but — the word that Shchedrin translated as meaning: The ears never grow higher than the forehead!] — but I always get frightfully annoyed when a man comes to me uttering beautiful and charming words and demands that they be accepted for their [his?] beauty and other virtues” (p. 62). Yes, I always get “frightfully annoyed”, too.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be fully prepared for his task, the worker-revolutionary must likewise become a professional revolutionary. Hence B-v is wrong in saying that since the worker spends eleven and a half hours in the factory, the brunt of all other revolutionary functions (apart from agitation) &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;must necessarily&#039;&#039; fall mainly upon the shoulders of an extremely small force of intellectuals&amp;quot;. But this condition does not obtain out of sheer &amp;quot;necessity&amp;quot;. It obtains because we are backward, because we do not recognise our duty to assist every capable worker to become a &#039;&#039;professional&#039;&#039; agitator, organiser, propagandist, literature distributor, etc., etc. In this respect, we waste our strength in a positively shameful manner; we lack the ability to husband that which should be tended and reared with special care. Look at the Germans: their forces are a hundredfold greater than ours. But they understand perfectly well that really capable agitators, etc., are not often promoted from the ranks of the &amp;quot;average&amp;quot;. For this reason they immediately try to place every capable working man in conditions that will enable him to develop and apply his abilities to the fullest: he is made a professional agitator, he is encouraged to widen the field of his activity, to spread it from one factory to the whole of the industry, from a single locality to the whole country. He acquires experience and dexterity in his profession; he broadens his outlook and increases his knowledge; he observes at close quarters the prominent political leaders from other localities and of other parties; he strives to rise to their level and combine in himself the knowledge of the working-class environment and the freshness of socialist convictions with professional skill, without which. the proletariat &#039;&#039;cannot&#039;&#039; wage a stubborn struggle against its excellently trained enemies. In this way alone do the working masses produce men of the stamp of Bebel and Auer. But what is to a great extent automatic in a politically free country must in Russia be done deliberately and systematically by our organisations. A worker-agitator who is at all gifted and &amp;quot;promising&amp;quot; &#039;&#039;must not be left&#039;&#039; to work eleven hours a day in a factory. We must arrange that he be maintained by the Party; that he may go underground in good time; that he change the place of his activity, if he is to enlarge his experience, widen his outlook, and be able to hold out for at least a few years in the struggle against the gendarmes. As the spontaneous rise of their movement becomes broader and deeper, the working-class masses promote from their ranks not only an increasing number of talented agitators, but also talented organisers, propagandists, and &amp;quot;practical workers&amp;quot; in the best sense of the term (of whom there are so few among our intellectuals who, for the most part, in the Russian manner, are somewhat careless and sluggish in their habits). When we have forces of specially trained worker-revolutionaries who have gone through extensive preparation (and, of course, revolutionaries &amp;quot;of all arms of the service&amp;quot;), no political police in the world will then be able to contend with them, for these forces, boundlessly devoted to the revolution, will enjoy the boundless confidence of the widest masses of the workers. We are directly to &#039;&#039;blame&#039;&#039; for doing too little to &amp;quot;stimulate&amp;quot; the workers to take this path, common to them and to the &amp;quot;intellectuals&amp;quot;, of professional revolutionary training, and for all too often dragging them back by our silly speeches about what is &amp;quot;accessible&amp;quot; to the masses of the workers, to the &amp;quot;average workers&amp;quot;, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this, as in other respects, the narrow scope of our organisational work is without a doubt due directly to the fact (although the overwhelming majority of the &amp;quot;Economists&amp;quot; and the novices in practical work do not perceive it) that we restrict our theories and our political tasks to a narrow field. Subservience to spontaneity seems to inspire a fear of taking even one step away from what is &amp;quot;accessible&amp;quot; to the masses, a fear of rising too high above mere attendance on the immediate and direct requirements of the masses. Have no fear, gentlemen! Remember that we stand so low on the plane of organisation that the very idea that we could rise &#039;&#039;too&#039;&#039; high is absurd!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;quot;Conspiratorial&amp;quot; organisation and &amp;quot;democratism&amp;quot;===&lt;br /&gt;
Yet there are many people among us who are so sensitive to the &amp;quot;voice of life&amp;quot; that they fear it more than anything in the world and charge the adherents of the views here expounded with following a Narodnaya Volya line, with failing to understand &amp;quot;democratism&amp;quot;, etc. These accusations, which, of course, have been echoed by &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;, need to be dealt with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The writer of these lines knows very well that the St. Petersburg Economists levelled the charge of Narodnaya Volya tendencies also against &#039;&#039;Rabochaya Gazeta&#039;&#039; (which is quite understandable when one compares it with &#039;&#039;Rabochaya Mysl&#039;&#039;). We were not in the least surprised, therefore, when, soon after the appearance of &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;, a comrade informed us that the Soclal-Democrats in the town of X describe &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; as a Narodnaya Volya organ. We, of course, were flattered by this accusation; for what decent Social-Democrat has not been accused by the Economists of being a Narodnaya Volya sympathiser?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These accusations are the result of a twofold misunderstanding. First, the history of the revolutionary movement is so little known among us that the name &amp;quot;Narodnaya Volya&amp;quot; is used to denote any idea of a militant centralised organisation which declares determined war upon tsarism. But the magnificent organisation that the revolutionaries had in the seventies, and that should serve us as a model, was not established by the Narodnaya Volya, but by the &#039;&#039;Zemlya i Volya&#039;&#039;, which split up into the Chorny Peredel and the Narodnaya Volya. Consequently, to regard a militant revolutionary organisation as something specifically Narodnaya Volya in character is absurd both historically and logically; for &#039;&#039;no&#039;&#039; revolutionary trend, if it seriously thinks of struggle, can dispense with such an organisation. The mistake the Narodnaya Volya committed was not in striving to enlist all the discontented in the organisation and to direct this organisation to resolute struggle against the autocracy; on the contrary, that was its great historical merit. The mistake was in relying on a theory which in substance was not a revolutionary theory at all, and the Narodnaya Volya members either did not know how, or were unable, to link their movement inseparably with the class struggle in the developing capitalist society. Only a gross failure to understand Marxism (or an &amp;quot;understanding&amp;quot; of it in the spirit of &amp;quot;Struveism&amp;quot;) could prompt the opinion that the rise of a mass, spontaneous working-class movement &#039;&#039;relieves&#039;&#039; us of the duty of creating as good an organisation of revolutionaries as the Zemlya i Volya had, or, indeed, an incomparably better one. On the contrary, this movement &#039;&#039;imposes&#039;&#039; the duty upon us; for the spontaneous struggle of the proletariat will not become its genuine &amp;quot;class struggle&amp;quot; until this struggle is led by a strong organisation of revolutionaries.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Secondly, many people, including apparently B. Krichevsky (&#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;, No. 10, p. 18), misunderstand the polemics that Social-Democrats have always waged against the &amp;quot;conspiratorial&amp;quot; view of the political struggle. We have always protested, and will, of course, continue to protest against &#039;&#039;confining&#039;&#039; the political struggle to conspiracy.&amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;Lenin&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Cf&#039;&#039;. The Tasks of the Russian Social-Democrats, p. 21,&#039;&#039; polemics against P. L. Lavrov.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; But this does not, of course, mean that we deny the need for a strong revolutionary organisation. Thus, in the pamphlet mentioned in the preceding footnote, after the polemics against reducing the political struggle to a conspiracy, a description is given (as a Social-Democratic ideal) of an organisation so strong as to be able to &amp;quot;resort to. . .rebellion&amp;quot; and to every other form of attack, in order to &amp;quot;deliver a smashing blow against absolutism&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;Lenin&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The Tasks of the Russian Social-Democrats, p. 23.&#039;&#039; Apropos, we shall give another illustration &#039;&#039;of&#039;&#039; the fact that &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; either does not understand what it is talking about or changes its views “with the wind”. In No. 1 of &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;, we find the following passage in italics: “&#039;&#039;The substance set forth in the pamphlet accords entirely with the editorial programme of ’Rabocheye Dyelo’” (p. 142).&#039;&#039; Really? Does the view that the overthrow of the autocracy must not be set as the first task &#039;&#039;of&#039;&#039; the mass movement accord with the views expressed in &#039;&#039;The Tasks of the Russian Social-Democrats?&#039;&#039; Do the theory of “the economic struggle against the employers and the government” and the stages theory accord with the views expressed in that pamphlet? We leave it to the reader to judge whether a periodical that understands the meaning of “accordance in opinion” in this peculiar manner can have firm principles.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In &#039;&#039;form&#039;&#039; such a strong revolutionary organisation in an autocratic country may also be described as a &amp;quot;conspiratorial&amp;quot; organisation, because the French word &amp;quot;conspiration&amp;quot; is the equivalent of the Russian word &#039;&#039;&amp;quot;zagovar&amp;quot;&#039;&#039; (&amp;quot;conspiracy&amp;quot;), and such an organisation must have the utmost secrecy. Secrecy is such a necessary condition for this kind of organisation that all the other conditions (number and selection of members, functions, etc.) must be made to conform to it. It would be extremely naive indeed, therefore, to fear the charge that we Social-Democrats desire to create a conspiratorial organisation. Such a charge should be as flattering to every opponent of Economism as the charge of following a Narodnaya Volya line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The objection may be raised that such a powerful and strictly secret organisation, which concentrates in its hands all the threads of secret activities, an organisation which of necessity is centralised, may too easily rush into a premature attack, may thoughtlessly intensify the movement before the growth of political discontent, the intensity of the ferment and anger of the working class, etc., have made such an attack possible and necessary. Our reply to this is: Speaking abstractly, it cannot be denied, of course, that a militant organisation may thoughtlessly engage in battle, which &#039;&#039;may&#039;&#039; end in a defeat entirely avoidable under other conditions. But we cannot confine ourselves to abstract reasoning on such a question, because every battle bears within itself the abstract possibility of defeat, and there is no way of &#039;&#039;reducing&#039;&#039; this possibility except by organised preparation for battle. If, however, we proceed from the concrete conditions at present obtaining in Russia, we must come to the positive conclusion that a strong revolutionary organisation is absolutely necessary precisely for the purpose of giving stability to the movement and of &#039;&#039;safeguarding&#039;&#039; it against the possibility of making thoughtless attacks. Precisely at the present time, when no such organisation yet exists, and when the revolutionary movement is rapidly and spontaneously growing, we &#039;&#039;already observe&#039;&#039; two opposite extremes (which, as is to be expected, &amp;quot;meet&amp;quot;). These are: the utterly unsound Economism and the preaching of moderation, and the equally unsound &amp;quot;excitative terror&amp;quot;, which strives &amp;quot;artificially to call forth symptoms of the end of the movement, which is developing and strengthening itself, when this movement is as yet nearer to the start than to the end&amp;quot; (V. Zasulich, in &#039;&#039;Zarya&#039;&#039;, No. 2-3, p. 353). And the instance of &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; shows that &#039;&#039;there&#039;&#039; exist Social-Democrats who give way to both these extremes. This is not surprising, for, apart from other reasons, the &amp;quot;economic struggle against the employers and the government&amp;quot; can &#039;&#039;never&#039;&#039; satisfy revolutionaries, and opposite extremes will therefore always appear here and there. Only a centralised, militant organisation that consistently carries out a Social-Democratic policy, that satisfies, so to speak, all revolutionary instincts and strivings, can safeguard the movement against making thoughtless attacks and prepare attacks that hold out the promise of success.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A further objection may be raised, that the views on organisation here expounded contradict the &amp;quot;democratic principle&amp;quot;. Now, while the earlier accusation was specifically Russian in origin, this one &#039;&#039;is specifically foreign&#039;&#039; in character. And only an organisation abroad (the Union of Russian Social-Democrats Abroad) was capable of giving its Editorial Board instructions like the following:&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;Organisational Principle.&#039;&#039; In order to secure the successful development and unification of Social-Democracy, the broad democratic principle of Party organisation must be emphasised, developed, and fought for; this is particularly necessary in view of the anti-democratic tendencies that have revealed themselves in the ranks of our Party&amp;quot; (&#039;&#039;Two Conferences&#039;&#039;, p. 18).&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;We shall see in the next chapter how &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; combats &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;’s &amp;quot;anti-democratic tendencies&amp;quot;. For the present, we shall examine more closely the &amp;quot;principle&amp;quot; that the Economists advance. Everyone will probably agree that &amp;quot;the broad democratic principle&amp;quot; presupposes the two following conditions: first, full publicity, and secondly, election to all offices. It would be absurd to speak of democracy without publicity, moreover, without a publicity that is not limited to the membership of the organisation. We call the German Socialist Party a democratic organisation because all its activities are carried out publicly; even its party congresses are held in public. But no one would call an organisation democratic that is hidden from every one but its members by a veil of secrecy. What is the use, then, of advancing &amp;quot;the &#039;&#039;broad&#039;&#039; democratic principle&amp;quot; when the fundamental condition for this principle &#039;&#039;cannot be fulfilled&#039;&#039; by a secret organisation? &amp;quot;The broad principle&amp;quot; proves itself simply to be a resounding but hollow phrase. Moreover, it reveals a total lack of understanding of the urgent tasks of the moment in regard to organisation. Everyone knows how great the lack of secrecy is among the &amp;quot;broad&amp;quot; masses of our revolutionaries. We have heard the bitter complaints of B-v on this score and his absolutely just demand for a &amp;quot;strict selection of members&amp;quot; (&#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;, No. 6, p. 42). Yet, persons who boast a keen &amp;quot;sense of realities&amp;quot; &#039;&#039;urge&#039;&#039;, in a situation like this, not the strictest secrecy and the strictest (consequently, more restricted) selection, of members, but &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;the broad&#039;&#039; democratic principle&amp;quot;! This is what you call being wide of the mark.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nor is the situation any better with regard to the second attribute of democracy, the principle of election. In politically free countries, this condition is taken for granted. &amp;quot;They are members of the Party who accept the principles of the Party programme and render the Party all possible support,&amp;quot; reads Clause 1 of the Rules of the German Social-Democratic Party. Since the entire political arena is as open to the public view as is a theatre stage to the audience, this acceptance or non-acceptance, support or opposition, is known to all from the press and from public meetings. Everyone knows that a certain political figure began in such and such a way, passed through such and such an evolution, behaved in a trying moment in such and such a manner, and possesses such and such qualities; consequently, &#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039; party members, knowing all the facts, can elect or refuse to elect this person to a particular party office. The general control (in the literal sense of the term) exercised over every act of a party man in the political field brings into existence an automatically operating mechanism which produces what in biology is called the &amp;quot;survival of the fittest&amp;quot;. &amp;quot;Natural selection&amp;quot; by full publicity, election, and general control provides the assurance that, in the last analysis, every political figure will be &amp;quot;in his proper place&amp;quot;, do the work for which lie is best fitted by his powers and abilities, feel the effects of his mistakes on himself, and prove before all the world his ability to recognise mistakes and to avoid them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Try to fit this picture into the frame of our autocracy! Is it conceivable in Russia for all who accept the principles of the Party programme and render the Party all possible support to control every action of the revolutionary working in secret? Is it possible for all to elect one of these revolutionaries to any particular office, when, in the very interests of the work, the revolutionary must conceal his identity from nine out of ten of these &amp;quot;all&amp;quot;? Reflect somewhat over the real meaning of the high-sounding phrases to which&#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; gives utterance, and you will realise that &amp;quot;broad democracy&amp;quot; in Party organisation, amidst the gloom of the autocracy and the domination of gendarmerie, is nothing more than a &#039;&#039;useless and harmful&#039;&#039; toy. It is a useless toy because, in point of fact, no revolutionary organisation has ever practiced, or could practice, &#039;&#039;broad&#039;&#039; democracy, however much it may have desired to do so. It is a harmful toy because any attempt to practise &amp;quot;the broad democratic principle&amp;quot; will simply facilitate the work of the police in carrying out large-scale raids, will perpetuate the prevailing primitiveness, and will divert the thoughts of the practical workers from the serious and pressing task of training themselves to become professional revolutionaries to that of drawing up detailed &amp;quot;paper&amp;quot; rules for election systems. Only abroad, where very often people with no opportunity for conducting really active work gather, could this &amp;quot;playing at democracy&amp;quot; develop here and there, especially in small groups.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To show the unseemliness of &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;’s favourite trick of advancing the plausible &amp;quot;principle&amp;quot; of democracy in revolutionary affairs, we shall again summon a witness. This witness, Y. Serebryakov, editor of the London magazine, &#039;&#039;Nakanune&#039;&#039;, has a soft spot for &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; and is filled with a great hatred for Plekhanov and the &amp;quot;Plekhanovites&amp;quot;. In its articles on the split in the Union of Russian Social-Democrats Abroad, &#039;&#039;Nakanune&#039;&#039; definitely sided with &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; and poured a stream of petty abuse upon Plekhanov. All the more valuable, therefore, is this witness in the question at issue. In &#039;&#039;Nakanune&#039;&#039; for July (No. 7) 1899, an article entitled &amp;quot;Concerning the Manifesto of the Self-Emancipation of the Workers Group&amp;quot;, Serebryakov argued that it was &amp;quot;indecent&amp;quot; to talk about such things as &amp;quot;self-deception, leadership, and the so-called Areopagus in a serious revolutionary movement&amp;quot; and, &#039;&#039;inter alia&#039;&#039;, wrote:&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;quot;Myshkin, Rogachov, Zhelyabov, Mikhailov, Perovskaya, Figner, and others never regarded themselves as leaders, and no one ever elected or appointed them as such, although in actuality, they were leaders, because, in the propaganda period, as well as in the period of the struggle against the government, they took the brunt of the work upon themselves, they went into the most dangerous places, and their activities were the most fruitful. They became leaders, not because they wished it, but because the comrades surrounding them had confidence in their wisdom, in their energy, in their loyalty. To be afraid of some kind of Areopagus (if it is not feared, why write about it?) that would arbitrarily govern the movement is far too naive. Who would pay heed to it?&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;We ask the reader, in what way does the &amp;quot;Areopagus&amp;quot; differ from &amp;quot;anti democratic tendencies&amp;quot;? And is it not evident that &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;’s &amp;quot;plausible&amp;quot; organisational principle is equally naive and indecent; naive, because no one would pay heed to the &amp;quot;Areopagus&amp;quot;, or people with &amp;quot;anti- democratic tendencies&amp;quot;, if &amp;quot;the comrades surrounding them had&amp;quot; no &amp;quot;confidence in their wisdom, energy, and loyalty&amp;quot;; indecent, because it is a demagogic sally calculated to play on the conceit of some, on the ignorance of others regarding the actual state of our movement, and on the lack of training and the ignorance of the history of the revolutionary movement on the part of still others. The only serious organisational principle for the active workers of our movement should he the strictest secrecy, the strictest selection of members, and the training of professional revolutionaries. Given these qualities, something even more than &amp;quot;democratism&amp;quot; would be guaranteed to us, namely, complete, comradely, mutual confidence among revolutionaries. This is absolutely essential for us, because there can be no question of replacing it by general democratic control in Russia. It would be a great mistake to believe that the impossibility of establishing real &amp;quot;democratic&amp;quot; control renders the members of the revolutionary organisation beyond control altogether. They have not the time to think about toy forms of democratism (democratism within a close and compact body of comrades in which complete, mutual confidence prevails), but they have a lively sense of their &#039;&#039;responsibility&#039;&#039;, knowing as they do from experience that an organisation of real revolutionaries will stop at nothing to rid itself of an unworthy member. Moreover, there is a fairly well-developed public opinion in Russian (and international) revolutionary circles which has a long history behind it, and which sternly and ruthlessly punishes every departure from the duties of comradeship (and &amp;quot;democratism&amp;quot;, real and not toy democratism, certainly forms a component part of the conception of comradeship). Take all this into consideration and you will realise that this talk and these resolutions about &amp;quot;anti-democratic tendencies&amp;quot; have the musty odour of the playing at generals which is indulged in abroad.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It must be observed also that the other source of this talk, viz., naivete is likewise fostered by the confusion of ideas concerning the meaning of democracy. In Mr. and Mrs. Webb’s book on the English trade unions there is an interesting chapter entitled &amp;quot;Primitive Democracy&amp;quot;. In it the authors relate how the English workers, in the first period of existence of their unions, considered it an indispensable sign of democracy for all the members to do all the work of managing the unions; not only were all questions decided by the vote of all the members, but all official duties were fulfilled by all the members in turn. A long period of historical experience was required for worker’s to realise the absurdity of such a conception of democracy and to make them understand the necessity for representative institutions, on the one hand, and for full-time officials, on the other. Only after a number of cases of financial bankruptcy of trade union treasuries had occurred did the workers realise that the rates of contributions and benefits cannot be decided merely by a democratic vote, but that this requires also the advice of insurance experts. Let us take also Kautsky’s book on parliamentarism and legislation by the people. There we find that the conclusions drawn by the Marxist theoretician coincide with the lessons learned from many years of practical experience by the workers who organised &amp;quot;spontaneously&amp;quot;. Kautsky strongly protests against Rittinghausen’s primitive conception of democracy; he ridicules those who in the name of democracy demand that &amp;quot;popular newspapers shall be edited directly by the people&amp;quot;; he shows the’ need for &#039;&#039;professional&#039;&#039; journalists, parliamentarians, etc., for the Social-Democratic leadership of the proletarian class struggle; he attacks the socialism of anarchists and &#039;&#039;litterateurs&#039;&#039; who in their &amp;quot;striving for effect&amp;quot; extol direct legislation by the whole people, completely failing to understand that this idea can be applied only relatively in modern society.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Those who have performed practical work in our movement know how widespread the &amp;quot;primitive&amp;quot; conception of democracy is among the masses of the students and workers. It is not surprising that this conception penetrates also into rules of organisations and into literature. The Economists of the Bernsteinian persuasion included in their rules the following: &amp;quot;§ 10. All affairs affecting the interests of the whole of the union organisation shall be decided by a majority vote of all its members.&amp;quot; The Economists of the terrorist persuasion repeat after them. &amp;quot;The decisions of the committee shall become effective only after they have been referred to all the circles&amp;quot; &#039;&#039;(Svoboda&#039;&#039;, No. 1, p. 67). Observe that this proposal for a widely applied referendum is advanced &#039;&#039;in addition&#039;&#039; to the demand that &#039;&#039;the whole of&#039;&#039; the organisation be built on an elective basis! We would not, of course, on this account condemn practical workers who have had too few opportunities for studying the theory and practice of real democratic organisations. But when &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;, which lays claim to leadership, confines itself, under such conditions, to a resolution on broad democratic principles, can this be described as anything but a mere &amp;quot;striving for effect&amp;quot;?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Local and all-Russia work===&lt;br /&gt;
The objections raised against the plan of organisation here outlined on the grounds that it is undemocratic and conspiratorial are totally unsound. Nevertheless, there remains a question which is frequently put and which deserves detailed examination. This is the question of the relations between local work and all-Russia work. Fears are expressed that the formation of a centralised organisation may shift the centre of gravity from the former to the latter, damage the movement through weakening our contacts with the working masses and the continuity of local agitation generally. To these fears we reply that our movement in the past few years has suffered precisely from the fact that local workers have been too absorbed in local work; that therefore it is absolutely necessary to shift the centre of gravity somewhat to national work; and that, far from weakening this would strengthen our ties and the continuity of our local agitation. Let us take the question of central and local newspapers. I would ask the reader not to forget that we cite the publication of newspapers only as &#039;&#039;an example&#039;&#039; illustrating an immeasurably broader and more varied revolutionary activity in general.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the first period of the mass movement (1896-98), an attempt was made by local revolutionary workers to publish an all-Russia paper — &#039;&#039;Rabochaya Gazeta&#039;&#039;. In the next period (1898-1900), the movement made an enormous stride forward, but the attention of the leaders was wholly absorbed by local publications. If we compute the total number of the local papers that were published, we shall find that on the average one issue per month was published.{{Refn|See &#039;&#039;Report to the Paris Congress&#039;&#039;,&amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot; name=&amp;quot;paris-congress&amp;quot; /&amp;gt; p. 14. From that time (1897) to the spring of 1900, thirty issues of various papers were published in various places.... On an average, over one issue per month was published&amp;quot;.|group=&amp;quot;Lenin&amp;quot;}} Does this not clearly illustrate our amateurism? Does this not clearly show that our revolutionary organisation lags behind the spontaneous growth of the movement? If &#039;&#039;the same number&#039;&#039; of issues had been published, not by scattered local groups, but by a single organisation, we would not only have saved an enormous amount of effort, but we would have secured immeasurably greater stability and continuity in our work. This simple point is frequently lost sight of by those practical workers who work &#039;&#039;actively&#039;&#039; and almost exclusively on local publications (unfortunately this is true even now in the overwhelming majority of cases), as well as by the publicists who display an astonishing quixotism on this question. The practical workers usually rest content with the argument that &amp;quot;it is difficult&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;Lenin&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This difficulty is more apparent than real. In fact, &#039;&#039;there is not&#039;&#039; a single local study circle that lacks the opportunity of taking up some function or other in connection with all-Russia work. “Don’t say, I can’t; say, I won’t.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; for local workers to engage in the organisation of an all-Russia newspaper, and that local newspapers are better than no newspapers at all. This argument is, of course, perfectly just, and we, no less than any practical worker, appreciate the enormous importance and usefulness of local newspapers &#039;&#039;in general.&#039;&#039; But not this is the point. The point is, can we not overcome the fragmentation and primitiveness that are so glaringly expressed in the thirty issues of local newspapers that have been published throughout Russia in the course of two and a half years? Do not restrict yourselves to the indisputable, but too general, statement about the usefulness of local newspapers generally; have the courage frankly to admit their negative aspects revealed by the experience of two and a half years. This experience has shown that under the conditions in which we work, these local newspapers prove, in the majority of cases, to be unstable in their principles, devoid of political significance, extremely costly in regard to expenditure of revolutionary forces, and totally unsatisfactory from a technical point of view (I have in mind, of course, not the technique of printing, but the frequency and regularity of publication). These defects are riot accidental; they are the inevitable outcome of the fragmentation which, on the one hand, explains the predominance of local newspapers in the period under review, and, on the other, is &#039;&#039;fostered by&#039;&#039; this predominance. It is positively beyond the strength of a separate local organisation to raise its newspaper to the level of a political organ maintaining stability of principles; it is &#039;&#039;beyond its strength&#039;&#039; to collect and utilise sufficient material to shed light on the whole of our political life. The argument usually advanced to support the need for numerous local newspapers in free countries that the cost of printing by local workers is low and that the people can be kept more fully and quickly informed — this argument as experience has shown, speaks &#039;&#039;against&#039;&#039; local newspapers in Russia. They turn out to be excessively costly in regard to the expenditure of revolutionary forces, and appear very rarely, for the simple reason that the publication of an &#039;&#039;illegal&#039;&#039; newspaper, however small its size, requires an extensive secret apparatus, such as is possible with large-scale factory production; for this apparatus cannot be created in a small, handicraft workshop. Very frequently, the primitiveness of the secret apparatus (every practical worker can cite numerous cases) enables the police to take advantage of the publication and distribution of one or two issues to make &#039;&#039;mass&#039;&#039; arrests, which result in such a clean sweep that it becomes necessary to start all over again. A well-organised secret apparatus requires professionally well-trained revolutionaries and a division of labour applied with the greatest consistency, but both these requirements are beyond the strength of a separate local organisation, however strong it may be at any given moment. Not only the general interests of our movement as a whole (training of the workers in consistent socialist and political principles) but also specifically local interests are &#039;&#039;better served by non-local newspapers&#039;&#039;. This may seem paradoxical at first sight, but it has been proved to the hilt by the two and a half years of experience referred to. Everyone will agree that had all the local forces that were engaged in the publication of the thirty issues of newspapers worked on a single newspaper, sixty, if not a hundred, issues could easily have been published, with a fuller expression, in consequence, of all the specifically local features of the movement. True, it is no easy matter to attain such a degree of organisation, but we must realise the need for it. Every local study circle must think about it and &#039;&#039;work actively&#039;&#039; to achieve it, without waiting for an impetus from outside, without being tempted by the popularity and closer proximity of a local newspaper which, as our revolutionary experience has shown, proves to a large extent to be illusory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And it is a bad service indeed those publicists render to the practical work who, thinking themselves particularly (close to the practical workers, fail to see this illusoriness, and make shift with the astoundingly hollow and cheap argument that we must have local newspapers, we must have district newspapers, and we must have all-Russia newspapers. Generally speaking, of course, all these are necessary, but once the solution of a concrete organisational problem is undertaken, surely time and circumstances must be taken into consideration. Is it not quixotic for &#039;&#039;Svoboda&#039;&#039; (No. 1, p. 68) to write in a special article &amp;quot;dealing with &#039;&#039;the question of a newspaper&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;It seems to us that every locality, with any appreciable number of workers, should have its own workers’ newspaper; not a newspaper imported from somewhere, but its very own.&amp;quot; If the publicist who wrote these words refuses to think of their meaning, then at least the reader may do it for him. How many scores, if not hundreds, of &amp;quot;localities&amp;quot; with any appreciable number of workers there are in Russia, and what a perpetuation of our amateurish methods this would mean if indeed every local organisation set about publishing its own. newspaper! How this diffusion would facilitate the gendarmerie’s task of netting — and without &amp;quot;any appreciable&amp;quot; effort — the local revolutionary workers at the very outset of their activity and of preventing them from developing into real revolutionaries. A reader of an all-Russia newspaper, continues the author, would find little interest in the descriptions of the. malpractices of the factory owners and the &amp;quot;details of factory life in various towns not his own&amp;quot;. But &amp;quot;an inhabitant of Orel would not find Orel affairs dull reading. In every issue he would learn who had been ’picked for a lambasting’ and who had been ’flayed’, and he would be in high spirits&amp;quot; (p. 69). Certainly, the Orel reader is in high spirits, but our publicist’s flights of imagination are also high — too high. He should have asked himself whether such concern with trivialities is tactically in order. We are second to none in appreciating the importance and necessity of factory exposures, but it must be borne in mind that we have reached a stage when St. Petersburg folk find it dull reading the St. Petersburg correspondence of the St. Petersburg &#039;&#039;Rabochaya Mysl&#039;&#039;. Leaflets are the medium through which local factory exposures have always been &#039;&#039;and must continue&#039;&#039; to be made, but we must raise the level of the &#039;&#039;newspaper&#039;&#039;, not lower it to the level of a factory leaflet. What we ask of a newspaper is not so much &amp;quot;petty&amp;quot; exposures, as exposures of the major, typical evils of factory life, exposures based on especially striking facts and capable, therefore, of arousing the interest of all workers and all leaders of the movement, of really enriching their knowledge, broadening their outlook, and serving as a starting-point for awakening new districts and workers from ever-newer trade areas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Moreover, in a local newspaper, all the malpractices of the factory administration and other authorities may he denounced then and there. In the case of a general, distant newspaper, however, by the time the news reaches it the facts will have been forgotten in the source localities. The reader, on getting the paper, will exclaim: ’When was that-who remembers it?’&amp;quot; (&#039;&#039;ibid&#039;&#039;.). Precisely — who remembers it! From the same source we learn that the 30 issues of newspapers which appeared in the course of two and a half years were published in six cities. This averages &#039;&#039;one issue per city per half-year&#039;&#039;! And even if our frivolous publicist &#039;&#039;trebled&#039;&#039; his estimate of the productivity of local work (which would be wrong in the case of an average town, since it is impossible to increase productivity to any considerable extent by our rule-of-thumb methods), we would still get only one issue every two months, i.e., nothing at all like &amp;quot;denouncing then and there&amp;quot;. It would suffice, however, for ten local organisations to combine and send their delegates to take an active part in organising a general newspaper, to enable us every fortnight to &amp;quot;denounce&amp;quot;, over the &#039;&#039;whole of Russia&#039;&#039;, not petty, but really outstanding and typical evils. No one who knows the state of affairs in our organisations can have the slightest doubt on that score. As for catching the enemy red-handed — if we mean it seriously and not merely as a pretty phrase — that is quite beyond the ability of an illegal paper generally. It can be done only by a leaflet, because the time limit for exposures of that nature can be a day or two at the most (e.g., the usual brief strikes, violent factory clashes, demonstrations, etc.).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;The workers live not only at the factory, but also in the city,&amp;quot; continues our author, rising from the particular to the general, with a strict consistency that would have done honour to Boris Krichevsky himself; and he refers to matters like municipal councils, municipal hospitals, municipal schools, and demands that workers’ newspapers should not ignore municipal affairs in general.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This demand — excellent in itself — serves as a particularly vivid illustration of the empty abstraction to which discussions of local newspapers are all too frequently limited. In the first place, if indeed newspapers appeared &amp;quot;in every locality with any appreciable number of workers&amp;quot; with such detailed information on municipal affairs as &#039;&#039;Svoboda&#039;&#039; desires, this would, under our Russian conditions, inevitably degenerate into actual concern with trivialities, lead to a weakening of the consciousness of the importance of an all-Russia revolutionary assault upon the tsarist autocracy, and strengthen the extremely virile shoots — not uprooted but rather hidden or temporarily suppressed — of the tendency that has become noted as a result of the famous remark about revolutionaries who talk a great deal about non-existent parliaments and too little about existent municipal councils. We say &amp;quot;inevitably&amp;quot;, in order to emphasise that &#039;&#039;Svoboda&#039;&#039; obviously does not desire this, but the contrary, to come about. But good intentions are not enough. For municipal affairs to be dealt with in their proper perspective, in relation to our entire work, this perspective must &#039;&#039;first&#039;&#039; be clearly conceived, firmly established, not only by argument, but by numerous examples, so that it may acquire the stability of a &#039;&#039;tradition&#039;&#039;. This is still far from being the case with us. Yet this must be done &#039;&#039;first&#039;&#039;, before we can allow ourselves to think and talk about an extensive local press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Secondly, to write really well and interestingly about municipal affairs, one must have first-hand knowledge, not book knowledge, of the issues. But there are hardly any Social-Democrats &#039;&#039;anywhere in Russia&#039;&#039; who possess such knowledge. To be able to write in newspapers (not in popular pamphlets) about municipal and state affairs, one must have fresh and varied material gathered and written up by able people. And in order to be able to gather and write up such material, we must have something more than the &amp;quot;primitive democracy&amp;quot; of a primitive circle, in which everybody does everything and all entertain themselves by playing at referendums. It is necessary to have a staff of expert writers and correspondents, an army of Social-Democratic reporters who establish contacts far and wide, who are able to fathom all sorts of &amp;quot;state secrets&amp;quot; (the knowledge of which makes the Russian government official so puffed up, but the blabbing of which is such an easy matter to him), who are able to penetrate &amp;quot;behind the scenes&amp;quot; — an army of’ people who must, as their &amp;quot;official duty&amp;quot;, be ubiquitous and omniscient. And we, the Party that fights against all economic, political, social, and national oppression, can and must find, gather, train, mobilise, and set into motion such an army of omniscient people — all of which requires still to be done. Not only has not a single step in this direction been taken in the overwhelming majority of localities, but even the recognition of its necessity is very often lacking. One will search in vain in our Social-Democratic press for lively and interesting articles, correspondence, and exposures dealing with our big and little affairs — diplomatic, military, ecclesiastical, municipal, financial, etc., etc. There is &#039;&#039;almost nothing&#039;&#039;, or very little, about these matters.{{Refn|That is why even examples of exceptionally good local newspapers fully confirm our point of view. For example, &#039;&#039;Yuzhny Rabochy&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot; name=&amp;quot;yuzhny&amp;quot; /&amp;gt; is an excellent newspaper, entirely free of instability of principle. But it has been unable to provide what it desired for the local movement, owing to the infrequency of its publication and to extensive police raids. Principled presentation of the fundamental questions of the movement and wide political agitation, which our Party most urgently requires at the present time, has proved too big a job for the local newspaper. The material of particular value it has published, like the articles on the mine owners’ convention and on unemployment, was not strictly local material, &#039;&#039;it was required for the whole of Russia&#039;&#039;, not for the South alone. No such articles have appeared in any of our Social-Democratic newspapers.|group=&amp;quot;Lenin&amp;quot;}} That is why &amp;quot;it always annoys me frightfully when a man comes to me, utters beautiful and charming words&amp;quot; about the need for newspapers in &amp;quot;every locality with any appreciable number of workers&amp;quot; that will expose factory, municipal, and government evils.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The predominance of the local papers over a central press may be a sign of either poverty or luxury. Of poverty, when the movement has not yet developed the forces for large-scale production, continues to flounder in amateurism, and is all but swamped with &amp;quot;the petty details of factory life&amp;quot;. Of luxury, when the movement &#039;&#039;has fully mastered&#039;&#039; the task of comprehensive exposure and comprehensive agitation, and it becomes necessary to publish numerous local newspapers in addition to the central organ. Let each decide for himself what the predominance of local newspapers implies in present-day Russia. I shall limit myself to a precise formulation of my own conclusion, to leave no grounds for misunderstanding. Hitherto, the majority of our local organisations have thought almost exclusively in terms of local newspapers, and have devoted almost all their activities to this work. This is abnormal; the very opposite should have been the case. The majority of the local organisations should think principally of the publication of an all-Russia newspaper and devote their activities chiefly to it. Until this is done, we shall not be able to establish a &#039;&#039;single&#039;&#039; newspaper capable, to any degree, of serving the movement with &#039;&#039;comprehensive&#039;&#039; press agitation. When this is done, however, normal relations between the necessary central newspaper and the necessary local newspapers will be established automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It would seem at first glance that the conclusion on the necessity for shifting the centre of gravity from local to all-Russia work does not apply to the sphere of the specifically economic struggle. In this struggle, the immediate enemies of the workers are the individual employers or groups of employers, who are not bound by any organisation having even the remotest resemblance to the purely military, strictly centralised organisation of the Russian Government — our immediate enemy in the political struggle — which is led in all its minutest details by a single will.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But that is not the case. As we have repeatedly pointed out, the economic struggle is a trade struggle, and for that reason it requires that the workers be organised according to trades, not only according to place of employment. Organisation by trades becomes all the more urgently necessary, the more rapidly our employers organise in all sorts of companies and syndicates. Our fragmentation and our amateurism are an outright hindrance to this work of organisation which requires the existence of a single, all-Russia body of revolutionaries capable of giving leadership to the all-Russia trade unions. We have described above the type of organisation that is needed for this purpose; we shall now add but a few words on the question of our press in this connection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hardly anyone will doubt the necessity for every Social-Democratic newspaper to have a &#039;&#039;special department&#039;&#039; devoted to the trade union (economic) struggle. But the growth of the trade union movement compels us to think about the creation of a trade union press. It seems to us, however, that with rare exceptions, there can be no question of trade union newspapers in Russia at the present time; they would be a luxury, and many a time we lack even our daily bread. The form of trade union press that would suit the conditions of our illegal work and is already required at the present time is &#039;&#039;trade union pamphlets.&#039;&#039; In these pamphlets, &#039;&#039;legal&#039;&#039; and illegal material should be gathered and grouped systematically, on the working conditions in a given trade, on the differences in this respect in the various parts of, Russia; on the main demands advanced by the workers in the given trade; on the inadequacies of legislation affecting that trade; on outstanding instances of economic struggle by the workers in the trade; on the beginnings, the present state, and the requirements of their trade union organisation, etc. Such pamphlets would, in the first place, relieve our Social-Democratic press of a mass of trade details that are of interest only to workers in the given trade. Secondly, they would record the results of our experience in the trade union struggle, they would preserve the gathered material, which now literally gets lost in a mass of leaflets and fragmentary correspondence; and they would summarise this material. Thirdly, they could serve as guides for agitators, because working conditions change relatively slow ly and the main demands of the workers in a given trade are extremely stable (cf., for example, the demands advanced by the weavers in the Moscow district in 1885 and in the St. Petersburg district in 1896). A compilation of such demands and needs might serve for years as an excellent handbook for agitators on economic questions in backward localities or among the backward strata of the workers. Examples of successful strikes in a given region, information on higher living standards, on improved working conditions, in one locality, would encourage the workers in other localities to take up the fight again and again. Fourthly, having made a start in generalising the trade union struggle and in this way strengthening the link between the Russian trade union movement and socialism, the Social-Democrats would at the same time see to it that our trade union work occupied neither too small nor too large a place in our Social-Democratic work as a whole. A local organisation that is cut off from organisations in other towns finds it very difficult, sometimes almost impossible, to maintain a correct sense of pro portion (the example of &#039;&#039;Rabochaya Mysl&#039;&#039; shows what a monstrous exaggeration can be made in the direction of trade-unionism) But an all-Russia organisation of revolutionaries that stands undeviatingly on the basis of Marxism, that leads the entire political struggle and possesses a staff of professional agitators, will never find it difficult to determine the proper proportion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The &amp;quot;plan&amp;quot; for an all-Russia political newspaper==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;The most serious blunder &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; committed in this connection&amp;quot; writes B. Krichevsky (&#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo,&#039;&#039; No. 10, p. 30), charging us with a tendency to &amp;quot;convert theory into a lifeless doctrine by isolating it from practice&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;was its ’plan’ for a general party organisation&amp;quot; (viz., the article entitled &amp;quot;Where To Begin&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;See &#039;&#039;Collected Works&#039;&#039;, Vol. 5, pp. 13-24&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;). Martynov echoes this idea in declaring that &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;’s tendency to belittle the significance of the forward march of the drab everyday struggle in comparison with the propaganda of brilliant and completed ideas ... was crowned with the plan for the organisation of a party which it sets forth in the article entitled ’Where To Begin’ in issue No. 4&amp;quot; (ibid., p. 61). Finally, L. Nadezhdin has of late joined in the chorus of indignation against this &amp;quot;plan&amp;quot; (the quotation marks were meant to express sarcasm). In his pamphlet, which we have just received, entitled &#039;&#039;The Eve of the Revolution&#039;&#039; (published by the &amp;quot;Revolutionary-Socialist Group&amp;quot; &#039;&#039;Svoboda&#039;&#039;, whose acquaintance we have made), he declares (p. 126): &amp;quot;To speak now of an organisation held together by an all-Russia newspaper means propagating armchair ideas and armchair work&amp;quot; and represents a manifestation of &amp;quot;bookishness&amp;quot;, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That our terrorist turns out to be in agreement with the champions of the &amp;quot;forward march of the drab everyday struggle&amp;quot; is not surprising, since we have traced the roots of this intimacy between them in the chapters on politics and organisation. But must draw attention here to the fact that Nadezhdin is the only one who has conscientiously tried to grasp the train of thought in an article he disliked and has made an attempt to reply to the point, whereas &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;, has said nothing that is material to the subject, but has tried merely to confuse the question by a series of unseemly, demagogic sallies. Unpleasant though the task may be, we must first spend some time in cleansing this Augean stable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Who was offended by the article &#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Where to begin&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Let us present a small selection of the expletives and exclamations that &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; hurled at us. &amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;quot;It is not a newspaper that can create a party organisation, but vice versa....&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;A newspaper, standing above the party, outside of its control, and independent of it, thanks to its having its own staff of agents. &amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;quot;By what miracle has &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; forgotten about the actually existing Social-Democratic organisations of the party to which it belongs?....&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Those who possess firm principles and a corresponding plan are the supreme regulators of the real struggle of the party and dictate to it their plan....&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;The plan drives our active and virile organisations into the kingdom of shadows and desires to call into being a fantastic network of agents....&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Were &#039;&#039;Iskra’s&#039;&#039; plan carried into effect, every trace of the Russian Social-Democratic Labour Party, which is taking shape, would be obliterated....&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;A propagandist organ becomes an uncontrolled autocratic law-maker for the entire practical revolutionary struggle....&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;How should our Party react to the suggestion that it be &#039;&#039;completely&#039;&#039; subordinated to an autonomous editorial board?&amp;quot;, etc., etc.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;As the reader can see from the contents and the tone of these above quotations, &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo has taken offence.&#039;&#039; Offence, not for its own sake, but for the sake of the organisations and committees of our Party which it alleges &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; desires to drive into the kingdom of shadows and whose very traces it would obliterate. How terrible! But a curious thing should be noted. The article &amp;quot;Where To Begin&amp;quot; appeared in May 1901. The articles in &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; appeared in September 1901. Now we are in mid-January 1902. During these five months (prior to and after September), &#039;&#039;not a single&#039;&#039; committee and &#039;&#039;not a single&#039;&#039; organisation of the Party protested formally against this monster that seeks to drive them into the kingdom of shadows; and yet scores and hundreds of communications from all parts of Russia have appeared during this period in &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;, as well as in numerous local and non-local publications. How could it happen that those who would be driven into the realm of shadows are not aware of it and have not taken offence, though a third party has?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The explanation is that the committees and other organisations are engaged in real work and are not playing at &amp;quot;democracy&amp;quot;. The committees read the article &amp;quot;Where To Begin&amp;quot;, saw that it represented an attempt &amp;quot;to elaborate a definite plan for an organisation, so &#039;&#039;that its formation may be undertaken from all aspects&amp;quot;;&#039;&#039; and since they knew and saw very well that &#039;&#039;not one&#039;&#039; of these &amp;quot;sides&amp;quot; would dream of &amp;quot;setting about to build it&amp;quot; until it was convinced of its necessity, and of the correctness of the architectural plan, it has naturally never occurred to them to take offence at the boldness of the people who said in &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;:&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;quot;In view of the pressing importance of the question we, on our part, take the liberty of submitting to the comrades a skeleton plan to be developed in greater detail in a pamphlet now in preparation for the print.&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;With a conscientious approach to the work, was it possible to view things otherwise than that if the comrades &#039;&#039;accepted&#039;&#039; the plan submitted to them, they would carry it out, not because they are &amp;quot;subordinate&amp;quot;, but because they would be convinced of its necessity for our common cause, and that if they &#039;&#039;did not accept it&#039;&#039;, then the &amp;quot;skeleton&amp;quot; (a pretentious word, is it not?) would remain merely a skeleton? Is it not demagogy to fight against the skeleton of a plan, not only by &amp;quot;picking it to pieces&amp;quot; and advising comrades to reject it, but by &#039;&#039;inciting&#039;&#039; people inexperienced in revolutionary matters against its authors &#039;&#039;merely on the grounds&#039;&#039; that they &#039;&#039;dare&#039;&#039; to &amp;quot;legislate&amp;quot; and come out as the &amp;quot;supreme regulators&amp;quot;, i.e., because they dare &#039;&#039;to propose&#039;&#039; an outline of a plan? Can our Party develop and make progress if an attempt &#039;&#039;to raise&#039;&#039; local functionaries to broader views, tasks, plans, etc., is objected to, not only with the claim that these views are erroneous, but on the grounds that the very &amp;quot;desire&amp;quot; &#039;&#039;to&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;raise&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; us gives &amp;quot;offence&amp;quot;? Nadezhdin, too, &amp;quot;picked&amp;quot; our plan &amp;quot;to pieces&amp;quot;, but he did not sink to such demagogy as cannot be explained solely by naivete or by primitiveness of political views. From the outset, he emphatically rejected the charge that we intended to establish an &amp;quot;inspectorship over the Party&amp;quot;. That is why Nadezhdin’s criticism of the plan can and should be answered on its merits, while &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; deserves only to be treated with contempt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But contempt for a writer who sinks so low as to shout about autocracy and &amp;quot;subordination&amp;quot; does not relieve us of the duty of disentangling the confusion that such people create in the minds of their readers. Here we can clearly demonstrate to the world the nature of catchwords like &amp;quot;broad democracy&amp;quot;. We are accused of forgetting the committees, of desiring or attempting to drive them into the kingdom of shadows, etc. How can we reply to these charges when, out of considerations of secrecy, we can give the reader &#039;&#039;almost no facts&#039;&#039; regarding our real relationships with the committees? Persons hurling vehement accusations calculated to provoke the crowd prove to be ahead of us because of their brazenness and their disregard of the duty of a revolutionary to conceal carefully from the eyes of the world the relationships and contacts which he maintains, which he is establishing or trying to establish. Naturally, we refuse once and for all to compete with such people in the field of &amp;quot;democratism&amp;quot;. As to the reader who is not initiated in all Party affairs, the only way in which we can discharge our duty to him is to acquaint him, not with what is and what is &#039;&#039;im Werden&#039;&#039; but with &#039;&#039;a particle&#039;&#039; of what has taken place and what may be told as a thing of the past.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Bund hints that we are &amp;quot;impostors&amp;quot;;&amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;Lenin&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;, No. 8.The reply of the Central Committee of the General Jewish Union of Russia and Poland to our article on the national question.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; the Union Abroad accuses us of attempting to obliterate all traces of the Party. Gentlemen, you will get complete satisfaction when we relate to the public &#039;&#039;four facts&#039;&#039; concerning the past.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First fact.{{Refn|We deliberately refrain from relating these facts&amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot; name=&amp;quot;secret-facts&amp;quot; /&amp;gt; in the sequence of their occurrence.|group=&amp;quot;Lenin&amp;quot;}} The members of one of the Leagues of Struggle, who took a direct part in founding our Party and in sending a delegate to the Inaugural Party Congress, reached agreement with a member of the &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; group regarding the publication of a series of books for workers that were to serve the entire movement. The attempt to publish the series failed and the pamphlets written for it, &#039;&#039;The Tasks of the Russian Social-Democrats&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;The New Factory Law&#039;&#039;,&amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;See &#039;&#039;Collected Works,&#039;&#039; Vol. 2, pp. 323-51 and 267-315&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; by a circuitous course and through the medium of third parties, found their way abroad, where they were published.&amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;The reference is to the negotiations between the St. Petersburg League of Struggle for the Emancipation of the Working Class and Lenin who, in the second half of 1897, wrote the two pamphlets mentioned.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Second fact. Members of the Central Committee of the Bund approached a member of the &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; group with the proposal to organise what the Bund then described as a &amp;quot;literary laboratory&amp;quot;. In making the proposal, they stated that unless this was done, the movement would greatly retrogress. The result of these negotiations was the appearance of the pamphlet &#039;&#039;The Working-Class Cause in Russia&#039;&#039;.{{Refn|The author requests me to state that, like his previous pamphlets, this one was sent to the Union Abroad on the assumption that its publications were edited by the Emancipation of Labour group (owing to certain circumstances, he could not then — February 1899 — know of the change in editorship). The pamphlet will be republished by the League&amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot; name=&amp;quot;league&amp;quot; /&amp;gt; at an early date.|group=&amp;quot;Lenin&amp;quot;}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Third fact. The Central Committee of the Bund, via a provincial town, approached a member of the &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; group with the proposal that he undertake the editing of the revived &#039;&#039;Rabochaya Gazeta&#039;&#039; and, of course, obtained his consent. The offer was later modified: the comrade in question was invited to act as a contributor, in view of a new plan for the composition of the Editorial Board. Also this proposal, of course, obtained his consent.&amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;The reference is to the negotiations between Lenin and the Central Committee of the Bund.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Articles were sent (which we managed to preserve): &amp;quot;Our Programme&amp;quot; which was a direct protest against Bernsteinism, against the change in the line of the legal literature and of &#039;&#039;Rabochaya Mysl&#039;&#039;; &amp;quot;Our Immediate Task&amp;quot; (&amp;quot;to publish a Party organ that shall appear regularly and have close contacts with all the local groups&amp;quot;, the drawbacks of the prevailing &amp;quot;amateurism&amp;quot;), &amp;quot;An Urgent Question&amp;quot; (an examination of the objection that it is necessary &#039;&#039;first&#039;&#039; to develop the activities of local groups before undertaking the publication of a common organ; an insistence on the paramount importance of a &amp;quot;revolutionary organisation&amp;quot; and on the necessity of &amp;quot;developing organisation, discipline, and the technique of secrecy to the highest degree of perfection&amp;quot;).&amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;See &#039;&#039;Collected Works,&#039;&#039; Vol. 4, pp. 210-14, 215-20, 221-26&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The proposal to resume publication of &#039;&#039;Rabochaya Gazeta&#039;&#039; was not carried out, and the articles were not published.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fourth fact. A member of the committee that was organising the second regular congress of our Party communicated to a member of the &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; group the programme of the congress and proposed that group as editorial board of the revived &#039;&#039;Rabochaya Gazeta&#039;&#039;. This preliminary step, as it were, was later sanctioned by the committee to which this member belonged, and by the Central Committee of the Bund.&amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;The “&#039;&#039;fourth fact&#039;&#039;” of which Lenin speaks was the attempt of the Union of Russian Social-Democrats Abroad and the Bund to convene the Second Congress of the R.S.D.L.P. in the spring of 1900. The “&#039;&#039;member of the committee&#039;&#039;” referred to was I. H. Lalayants (a member of the Ekaterinoslav Social-Democratic Committee) who came to Moscow in February 1900 for talks with Lenin.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; group was notified of the place and time of the congress and (uncertain of being able, for certain reasons, to send a delegate) drew up a written report for the congress. In the report, the idea was suggested that the mere election of a Central Committee would not only fail to solve the question of unification at a time of such complete disorder as the present, but would even compromise the grand idea of establishing a party, in the event of an early, swift, and thorough police round-up, which was more than likely in view of the prevailing lack of secrecy; that therefore, a beginning should be made by inviting all committees and all other organisations to support the revived common organ, which would establish &#039;&#039;real&#039;&#039; contacts between all the committees and &#039;&#039;really&#039;&#039; train a group of leaders for the entire movement; and that the committees and the Party would very easily be able to transform such a group into a Central Committee as soon as the group had grown and become strong. In consequence of a number of police raids and arrests, however, the congress could not take place. For security reasons the report was destroyed, having been read only by a few comrades, including the representatives of one committee.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let the reader now judge for himself the character of the methods employed by the Bund in hinting that we were impostors, or by &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;, which accuses us of trying to relegate the committees to the kingdom of shadows and to &amp;quot;substitute&amp;quot; for the organisation of a party an organisation disseminating the ideas advocated by a single newspaper. It was to the committees, &#039;&#039;on their repeated invitation&#039;&#039;, that we reported on the necessity for adopting a definite plan of concerted activities. It was precisely for the Party organisation that we elaborated this plan, in articles sent to &#039;&#039;Rabochaya Gazeta&#039;&#039;, and in the report to the Party congress, again on the invitation of those who held such an influential position in the Party that they took the initiative in its (actual) restoration. Only after the &#039;&#039;twice&#039;&#039; repeated attempts of the Party organisation, &#039;&#039;in conjunction with ourselves, officially&#039;&#039;to revive the central organ of the Party had failed, did we consider it our bounden duty to publish an &#039;&#039;unofficial&#039;&#039; organ, in order that with the &#039;&#039;third&#039;&#039; attempt the comrades might have before them the results of &#039;&#039;experience&#039;&#039; and not merely conjectural proposals. Now certain results of this experience are present for all to see, and all comrades may now judge whether we properly understood our duties and what should be thought of people that strive to mislead those unacquainted with the immediate past, simply because they are piqued at our having pointed out to some their inconsistency on the &amp;quot;national&amp;quot; question, and to others the inadmissibility of their vacillation in matters of principle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Can a newspaper be a collective organiser?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The quintessence of the article &amp;quot;Where To Begin&amp;quot; consists in the fact that it discusses &#039;&#039;precisely&#039;&#039; this question and gives an affirmative reply to it. As far as we know, the only attempt to examine this question on its merits and to prove that it must be answered in the negative was made by L. Nadezhdin, whose argument we reproduce in full:&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;quot;... It pleased us greatly to see &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; (No. 4) present the question of the need for an all-Russia newspaper; but we cannot agree that this presentation bears relevance to the title ’Where To Begin’. Undoubtedly this is an extremely important matter, but neither a newspaper, nor a series of popular leaflets, nor a mountain of manifestoes, can serve as the basis for a militant organisation in revolutionary times. We must set to work to build strong political organisations in the localities. We lack such organisations; we have been carrying on our work mainly among enlightened workers, while the masses have been engaged almost exclusively in the economic struggle. &#039;&#039;If strong political organisations are not trained locally, what significance will even an excellently organised all-Russia newspaper have?&#039;&#039; It will be a burning bush, burning without being consumed, but firing no one! &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; thinks that around it and in the activities in its behalf people will gather and organise. &#039;&#039;But they will find it far easier to gather and organise around activities that are more concrete&#039;&#039;. This something more concrete must and should be the extensive organisation of local newspapers, the immediate preparation of the workers’ forces for demonstrations, the constant activity of local organisations among the unempIoyed (indefatigable distribution of pamphlets and leaflets, convening of meetings, appeals to actions of protest against the government, etc.). We must begin live political work in the localities, and when the time comes to unite on this real basis, it will not he an artificial, paper unity; not by means of newspapers can such a unification of local work into an all-Russia cause be achieved!&amp;quot; (&#039;&#039;The Eve of the Revolution&#039;&#039;, p. 54.)&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;We have emphasised the passages in this eloquent tirade that most clearly show the author’s incorrect judgement of our plan, as well as the incorrectness of his point of view in general, which is here contraposed to that of &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;. Unless we train strong political organisations in the localities, even an excellently organised all-Russia newspaper will be of no avail. This is incontrovertible. But the whole point is that &#039;&#039;there is no other way&#039;&#039; of &#039;&#039;training&#039;&#039; strong political organisations except through the medium of an all-Russia newspaper. The author missed the most important statement &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; made &#039;&#039;before it proceeded&#039;&#039; to set forth its &amp;quot;plan&amp;quot;: that it was necessary &amp;quot;to call for the formation of a revolutionary organisation, capable of uniting all forces and guiding the movement in actual practice and &#039;&#039;not in name alone&#039;&#039;, that is, &#039;&#039;an organisation ready at any time to support every protest and every outbrea’&#039;&#039; and use it to build up and consolidate the fighting forces suitable for the decisive struggle&amp;quot;. But now after the February and March events, everyone will agree with this in principle, continues &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;. Yet what we need is not a solution of the question in principle, but its &#039;&#039;practical solution;&#039;&#039; we must immediately advance a definite constructive plan through which all may immediately set to work to build &#039;&#039;from every side&#039;&#039;. Now we are again being dragged away from the practical solution towards something which in principle is correct, indisputable, and great, but which is entirely inadequate and incomprehensible to the broad masses of workers, namely, &amp;quot;to rear strong political organisations&amp;quot;! This is not the point at issue, most worthy author. The point is how to go about the rearing and how to accomplish it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is not true to say that &amp;quot;we have been carrying on our work mainly among enlightened workers, while the masses have been engaged almost exclusively in the economic struggle&amp;quot;. Presented in such a form, the thesis reduces itself to &#039;&#039;Svoboda&#039;&#039;’s usual but fundamentally false contraposition of the enlightened workers to the &amp;quot;masses&amp;quot;. In recent years, even the enlightened workers have been &amp;quot;engaged almost exclusively in the economic struggle&amp;quot;. That is the first point. On the other hand, the masses will never learn to conduct the political struggle until we help &#039;&#039;to train&#039;&#039; leaders for this struggle, both from among the enlightened workers and from among the intellectuals. Such leaders can acquire training &#039;&#039;solely&#039;&#039; by systematically evaluating &#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039; the everyday aspects of our political life, &#039;&#039;all attempts&#039;&#039; at protest and struggle on the part of the various classes and on various grounds. Therefore, to talk of &amp;quot;rearing political organisations&amp;quot; and at the same time &#039;&#039;to contrast&#039;&#039; the &amp;quot;paper work&amp;quot; of a political newspaper to &amp;quot;live political work in the localities&amp;quot; is plainly ridiculous. &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; has adapted its &amp;quot;plan&amp;quot; for a newspaper to the &amp;quot;plan&amp;quot; for creating a &amp;quot;militant preparedness&amp;quot; to support the unemployed movement, peasant revolts, discontent among, the Zemstvo people, &amp;quot;popular indignation against some tsarist bashi-bazouk on the rampage&amp;quot;, etc. Anyone who is at all acquainted with the movement knows full well that the vast majority of local organisations have &#039;&#039;never even dreamed&#039;&#039; of these things; that many of the prospects of &amp;quot;live political work&amp;quot; here indicated &#039;&#039;have never&#039;&#039; been realised by a single organisation; that the attempt, for example, to call attention to the growth of discontent and protest among the Zemstvo intelligentsia rouses feelings of consternation and perplexity in Nadezhdin (&amp;quot;Good Lord, is this newspaper intended for Zemstvo people?&amp;quot;—The &#039;&#039;Eve&#039;&#039;, p. 129), among the Economists (Letter to &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;, No. 12), and among many practical workers. Under these circumstances, it is possible to &amp;quot;begin&amp;quot; &#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039; by inducing people &#039;&#039;to think&#039;&#039; about all these things, to summarise and generalise all the diverse signs of ferment and active struggle. In our time, when Social-Democratic tasks are being degraded, &#039;&#039;the only way&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;live political work&amp;quot; can be &#039;&#039;begun is&#039;&#039; with live political agitation, which is impossible unless we have an all-Russia newspaper, frequently issued and regularly distributed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Those who regard the &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;plan&amp;quot; as a manifestation of &amp;quot;bookishness&amp;quot; have totally failed to understand its substance and take for the goal that which is suggested as the most suitable means for the present time. These people have not taken the trouble to study the two comparisons that were drawn to present a clear illustration of the plan. &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; wrote: The publication of an all-Russia political newspaper must be &#039;&#039;the main line&#039;&#039; by which we may unswervingly develop, deepen, and expand the organisation (viz., the revolutionary organisation that is ever ready to support every protest and every outbreak). Pray tell me, when bricklayers lay bricks in, various parts of an enormous, unprecedentedly large structure, is it &amp;quot;paper&amp;quot; work to use a line to help them find the correct place for the bricklaying; to indicate to them the ultimate goal of the common work; to enable them to use, not only every brick, but even every piece of brick which, cemented to the bricks laid before and after it, forms a finished, continuous line? And are we not now passing through precisely such a period in our Party life when we have bricks and bricklayers, but lack the guide line for all to see and follow? Let them shout that in stretching out the line, we want to command. Had we desired to command, gentlemen, we would have written on the title page, not &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;, No. 1&amp;quot;, but &amp;quot;Rabochaya &#039;&#039;Gazeta&#039;&#039;, No. 3&amp;quot;, as we were invited to do by certain comrades, and &#039;&#039;as we would have had a perfect right to do&#039;&#039; after the events described above. But we did not do that. We wished to have our hands free to wage an irreconcilable struggle against all pseudo-Social-Democrats; we wanted our line, if properly laid, to be respected because it was correct, and not because it had been laid by an official organ.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;The question of uniting local activity in central bodies runs in a vicious circle,&amp;quot; Nadezhdin lectures us; &amp;quot;unification requires homogeneity of the elements, and the homogeneity can be created only by something that unites; but the unifying element may be the product of strong local organisations which at the present time are by no means distinguished for their homogeneity.&amp;quot; This truth is as revered and as irrefutable as that we must train strong political organisations. And it is equally barren. &#039;&#039;Every&#039;&#039; question &amp;quot;runs in a vicious circle&amp;quot; because political life as a whole is an endless chain consisting of an infinite number of links. The whole art of politics lies in finding and taking as firm a grip as we can of the link that is least likely to be struck from our hands, the one that is most important at the given moment, the one that most of all guarantees its possessor the possession of the whole chain.&amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;Lenin&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Comrade Krichevsky and Comrade Martynov! I call your attention to this outrageous manifestation of “autocracy”, “uncontrolled authority”, “supreme regulating”, etc. just think of it: a desire to &#039;&#039;possess&#039;&#039; the whole chain!! Send in a complaint at once. Here you have a ready-made topic for two leading articles for No. 12 of &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo!&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; If we had a crew of experienced bricklayers who had learned to work so well together that they could lay their bricks exactly as required without a guide line (which, speaking abstractly, is by no means impossible), then perhaps we might take hold of some other link. But it is unfortunate that as yet we have no experienced bricklayers trained for teamwork, that bricks are often laid where they are not needed at all, that they are not laid according to the general line, but are so scattered that the enemy can shatter the structure as if it were made of sand and not of bricks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
’Another comparison: &amp;quot;A newspaper is not only a collective propagandist and a collective agitator, it is also a collective organiser. In this respect &#039;&#039;it may be compared to the scaffolding&#039;&#039; erected round a building under construction; it marks the contours of the structure and facilitates communication between the builders, permitting them to distribute the work and to view the common results achieved by their organised labour.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;Lenin&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Martynov, in quoting the first sentence of this passage in &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; (No. 10, p. 62), omitted the second, as if desiring to emphasise either his unwillingness to discuss the essentials of the question or his inability to understand them.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Does this sound anything like the attempt of an armchair author to exaggerate his role? The scaffolding is not required at all for the dwelling; it is made of cheaper material, is put up only temporarily, and is scrapped for firewood as soon as the shell of the structure is completed. As for the building of revolutionary organisations, experience shows that sometimes they may be built without scaffolding, as the seventies showed. But at the present time we cannot even imagine the possibility of erecting the building we require without scaffolding.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nadezhdin disagrees with this, saying:&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; thinks that around it and in the activities in its behalf people will gather and organise. &#039;&#039;But they will find it far easier&#039;&#039; to gather and organise around &#039;&#039;activities that are more concrete!&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; &amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;Indeed, &amp;quot;far easier around activities that are more concrete&amp;quot;. A Russian proverb holds: &amp;quot;Don’t spit into a well, you may want to drink from it.&amp;quot; But there are people who do not object to drinking from a well that has been spat into. What despicable things our magnificent, legal &amp;quot;Critics of Marxism&amp;quot; and illegal admirers of &#039;&#039;Rabochaya Mysl&#039;&#039; have said in the name of this something more concrete! How restricted our movement is by our own narrowness, lack of initiative, and hesitation, which are justified with the traditional argument about finding it &amp;quot;far easier to gather around something more concrete&amp;quot;! And Nadezhdin — who regards himself as possessing a particularly keen sense of the &amp;quot;realities of life&amp;quot;, who so severely condemns &amp;quot;armchair&amp;quot; authors and (with pretensions to wit) accuses &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; of a weakness for seeing Economism everywhere, and who sees himself standing far above the division between the orthodox and the Critics — fails to see that with his arguments he contributes to the narrowness that arouses his indignation and that he is drinking from the most spat-in well! The sincerest indignation against narrowness, the most passionate desire to raise its worshippers from their knees, will not suffice if the indignant one is swept along without sail or rudder and, as &amp;quot;spontaneously&amp;quot; as the revolutionaries of the seventies, clutches at such things as &amp;quot;excitative terror&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;agrarian terror&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;sounding the tocsin etc. Let us take a glance at these &amp;quot;more concrete&amp;quot; activities around which he thinks it will be &amp;quot;far easier&amp;quot; to gather and organise: (1) local newspapers; (2) preparations for demonstrations; (3) work among the unemployed. It is immediately apparent that all these things have been seized upon at random as a pretext for saying something; for, however we may regard them, it would be absurd to see in them anything especially suitable for &amp;quot;gathering and organising&amp;quot;. The selfsame Nadezhdin says a few pages further: &amp;quot;It is time we simply stated the fact that activity of a very pitiable kind is being carried on in the localities, the committees are not doing a tenth of what they could do ... the coordinating centres we have at present are the purest fiction, representing a sort of revolutionary bureaucracy, whose members mutually grant generalships to one another; and so it will continue until strong local organisations grow up.&amp;quot; These remarks, though exaggerating the position somewhat, no doubt contain many a bitter truth; but can it be said that Nadezhdin does not perceive the connection between the pitiable activity in the localities and the narrow mental outlook of the functionaries, the narrow scope of their activities, inevitable in the circumstances of the lack of training of Party workers confined to local organisations? Has he, like the author of the article on organisation, published in &#039;&#039;Svoboda&#039;&#039;, forgotten how the transition to a broad local press (from 1898) was accompanied by a strong intensification of Economism and &amp;quot;primitiveness&amp;quot;? Even if a &amp;quot;broad local press&amp;quot; could be established at all satisfactorily (and we have shown this to be impossible, save in very, exceptional cases) — even then the local organs could not &amp;quot;gather and organise&amp;quot; &#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039; the revolutionary forces for a &#039;&#039;general&#039;&#039; attack upon the autocracy and for leadership of the &#039;&#039;united&#039;&#039; struggle. Let us not forget that we are here discussing &#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039; the &amp;quot;rallying&amp;quot;, organising significance of the newspaper, and we could put to Nadezhdin, who defends fragmentation, the question he himself has ironically put: &amp;quot;Have we been left a legacy of 200,000 revolutionary organisers?&amp;quot; Furthermore, &amp;quot;preparations for demonstrations&amp;quot; cannot be &#039;&#039;contraposed&#039;&#039; to &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;’s plan, for the very reason that this plan includes the organisation of the broadest possible demonstrations &#039;&#039;as one of its aims&#039;&#039;; the point under discussion is the selection of the practical &#039;&#039;means&#039;&#039;. On this point also Nadezhdin is confused, for he has lost sight of the fact that only forces that are &amp;quot;gathered and organised&amp;quot; can &amp;quot;prepare for&amp;quot; demonstrations (which hitherto, in the overwhelming majority of cases, have taken place spontaneously) and that we &#039;&#039;lack&#039;&#039; precisely &#039;&#039;the ability&#039;&#039; to rally and organise. &amp;quot;Work among the unemployed.&amp;quot; Again the same confusion; for this too represents one of the field operations of the mobilised forces and not a plan for mobilising the forces. The extent to which Nadezhdin here too underestimates the harm caused by our fragmentation, by our lack of &amp;quot;200,000 organisers&amp;quot;, can be seen from the fact that: many people (including Nadezhdin) have reproached &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; for the paucity of the news it gives on unemployment and for the casual nature of the correspondence it publishes about the most common affairs of rural life. The reproach is justified; but &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; is &amp;quot;guilty without sin&amp;quot;. We strive &amp;quot;to stretch a line&amp;quot; through the countryside too, where there are hardly any bricklayers anywhere, and we are &#039;&#039;obliged&#039;&#039; to encourage &#039;&#039;everyone&#039;&#039; who informs us even as regards the most common facts, in the hope that this will increase the number of our contributors in the given field and will ultimately &#039;&#039;train us all&#039;&#039; to select facts that are really the most outstanding. But the material on which we can train is so scanty that, unless we generalise it for the whole of Russia, we shall have very little to train on at all. No doubt, one with at least as much ability as an agitator and as much knowledge of the life of the vagrant as Nadezhdin manifests could render priceless service to the movement by carrying on agitation among the unemployed; but such a person would be simply hiding his light under a bushel if he failed to inform all comrades in Russia as regards every step he took in his work, so that others, who, in the mass, still lack the ability to undertake new kinds of work, might learn from his example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All without exception now talk of the importance of unity, of the necessity for &amp;quot;gathering and organising&amp;quot;; but in the majority of cases what is lacking is a definite idea of where to begin and how to bring about this unity. Probably all will agree that if we &amp;quot;unite&amp;quot;, say, the district circles in a given town, it will be necessary to have for this purpose common institutions, i.e., not merely the common title of &amp;quot;League&amp;quot;, but genuinely common work, exchange of material, experience, and forces, distribution of functions, not only by districts, but through specialisation on a town-wide scale. All will agree that a big secret apparatus will not pay its way (to use a commercial expression) &amp;quot;with the resources&amp;quot; (in both money and manpower, of course) of a single district, and that this narrow field will not provide sufficient scope for a specialist to develop his talents. But the same thing applies to the co-ordination of activities of a number of towns, since even a specific locality will be and, in the history of our Social-Democratic movement, has proved to be, far too narrow a field; we have demonstrated this above in detail with regard to political agitation and organisational work. What we require foremost and imperatively is to broaden the field, establish real contacts between the towns on the basis of regular, common work; for fragmentation weighs down on the people and they are &amp;quot;stuck in a hole&amp;quot; (to use the expression employed by a correspondent to &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;), not knowing what is happening in the world, from whom to learn, or how to acquire experience and satisfy their desire to engage in broad activities. I continue to insist that we can start establishing real contacts only with the aid of a common newspaper, as the only regular, all-Russia enterprise, one which will summarise the results of the most diverse forms of activity and thereby stimulate people to march forward untiringly along all the innumerable paths leading to revolution, in the same way as all roads lead to Rome. If we do not want unity in name only, we must arrange for all local study circles immediately to assign, say, a fourth of their forces to active work for the common cause, and the newspaper will immediately convey to them&amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;Lenin&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;A reservation&#039;&#039;: that is, if a given study circle sympathises	 with the policy of the newspaper and considers it useful to become a collaborator, meaning by that, not only for literary collaboration, but for revolutionary collaboration generally. &#039;&#039;Note for Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;: Among revolutionaries who attach value to the cause and not to playing at democracy, who do not separate “sympathy” from the most active and lively participation, this reservation is taken for granted.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; the general design, scope, and character of the cause; it will give them a precise indication of the most keenly felt shortcomings in the all-Russia activity, where agitation is lacking and contacts are weak, and it will point out which little wheels in the vast general mechanism a given study circle might repair or replace with better ones. A study circle that has not yet begun to work, but which is only just seeking activity, could then start, not like a craftsman in an isolated little workshop unaware of the earlier development in &amp;quot;industry&amp;quot; or of the general level of production methods prevailing in industry, but as a participant in an extensive enterprise that reflects the whole general revolutionary attack on the autocracy. The more perfect the finish of each little wheel and the larger the number of detail workers engaged in the common cause, the closer will our network become and the less will be the disorder in the ranks consequent on inevitable police, raids.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The mere function of distributing a newspaper would help to establish actual contacts (if it is a newspaper worthy of the name, i.e., if it is issued regularly, not once a month like a magazine, but at least four times a month). At the present time, communication between towns on revolutionary business is an extreme rarity, and, at all events, is the exception rather than the rule. If we had a newspaper, however, such communication would become the rule and would secure, not only the distribution of the newspaper, of course, but (what is more important) an exchange of experience, of material, of forces, and of resources. Organisational work would immediately acquire much greater scope, and the success of one locality would serve as a standing encouragement to further perfection; it would arouse the desire to utilise the experience gained by comrades working in other parts of the country. Local work would become far richer and more varied than it is at present. Political and economic exposures gathered from all over Russia would provide mental food for workers of all trades and &#039;&#039;all stages&#039;&#039; of &#039;&#039;development&#039;&#039;; they would provide material and occasion for talks and readings on the most diverse subjects, which would, in addition, be suggested by hints in the legal press, by talk among the people, and by &amp;quot;shamefaced&amp;quot; government statements. Every outbreak, every demonstration, would be weighed and, discussed in its every aspect in all parts of Russia and would thus stimulate a desire to keep up with, and even surpass, the others (we socialists do not by any means flatly reject all emulation or all &amp;quot;competition&amp;quot;!) and consciously prepare that which at first, as it were, sprang up spontaneously, a desire to take advantage of the favourable conditions in a given district or at a given moment for modifying the plan of attack, etc. At the same time, this revival of local work would obviate that desperate, &amp;quot;convulsive&amp;quot; exertion of all efforts and risking of &#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039; forces which every single demonstration or the publication of every single issue of a local newspaper now frequently entails. On the one hand, the police would find it much more difficult to get at the &amp;quot;roots&amp;quot;, if they did not know in what district to dig down for them. On the other hand, regular common work would train our people to adjust the force of a &#039;&#039;given&#039;&#039; attack to the strength of the given contingent of the common army (at the present time hardly anyone ever thinks of doing that, because in nine cases out of ten these attacks occur spontaneously); such regular common work would facilitate the &amp;quot;transportation&amp;quot; from one place to another, not only of literature, but also of revolutionary forces.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a great many cases these forces are now being bled white on restricted local work, but under the circumstances we are discussing it would be possible to transfer a capable agitator or organiser from one end of the country to the other, and the occasion for doing this would constantly arise. Beginning with short journeys on Party business at the Party’s expense, the comrades would become accustomed to being maintained by the Party, to becoming professional revolutionaries, and to training themselves as real political leaders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And if indeed we succeeded in reaching the point when all, or at least a considerable majority, of the local committees local groups, and study circles took up active work for the common cause, we could, in the not distant future, establish a weekly newspaper for regular distribution in tens of thousands of copies throughout Russia. This newspaper would become part of an enormous pair of smith’s bellows that would fan every spark of the class struggle and of popular indignation into a general conflagration. Around what is in itself still a very innocuous and very small, but regular and &#039;&#039;common&#039;&#039;, effort, in the full sense of the word, a regular army of tried fighters would systematically gather and receive their training. On the ladders and scaffolding of this general organisational structure there would soon develop and come to the fore Social-Democratic Zhelyabovs from among our revolutionaries and Russian Bebels from among our workers, who would take their place at the head of the mobilised army and rouse the whole people to settle accounts with the shame and the curse of Russia.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That is what we should dream of!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;We should dream!&amp;quot; I wrote these words and became alarmed. I imagined myself sitting at a &amp;quot;unity conference&amp;quot; and opposite me were the &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; editors and contributors. Comrade Martynov rises and, turning to me, says sternly: &amp;quot;Permit me to ask you, has an autonomous editorial board the right to dream without first soliciting the opinion of the Party committees?&amp;quot; He is followed by Comrade Krichevsky; who (philosophically deepening Comrade Martynov, who long ago rendered Comrade Plekhanov more profound) continues even more sternly: &amp;quot;I go further. I ask, has a Marxist any right at all to dream, knowing that according to Marx, mankind always sets itself the tasks it can solve and that tactics is a process of the growth of Party tasks which grow together with the Party?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The very thought of these stern questions sends a cold shiver down my spine and makes me wish for nothing but a place to hide in. I shall try to hide behind the back of Pisarev.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;There are rifts and rifts,&amp;quot; wrote Pisarev of the rift between dreams and reality. &amp;quot;My dream may run ahead of the natural march of events or may fly off at a tangent in a direction in which no natural march of events will ever proceed. In the first case my dream will not cause any harm; it may even support and augment the energy of the working men.... There is nothing in such dreams that would distort or paralyse labour-power. On the contrary, if man were completely deprived of the ability to dream in this way, if he could not from time to time run ahead and mentally conceive, in an entire and completed picture, the product to which his hands are only just beginning to lend shape, then I cannot at all imagine what stimulus there would be to induce man to undertake and complete extensive and strenuous work in the sphere of art, science, and practical endeavour.... The rift between dreams and reality causes no harm if only the person dreaming believes seriously in his dream, if he attentively observes life, compares his observations with his castles in the air, and if, generally speaking, he works conscientiously for the achievement of his fantasies. If there is some connection between dreams and life then all is well.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Lenin cites the article by D. I. Pisarev “Blunders of Immature Thinking”.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of this kind of dreaming there is unfortunately too little in our movement. And the people most responsible for this are those who boast of their sober views, their &amp;quot;closeness&amp;quot; to the &amp;quot;concrete&amp;quot;, the representatives of legal criticism and of illegal &amp;quot;tail-ism&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===What type of organisation do we require? ===&lt;br /&gt;
From what has been said the reader will see that our &amp;quot;tactics. as-plan&amp;quot; consists in rejecting an immediate &#039;&#039;call&#039;&#039; for assault; in demanding &amp;quot;to lay effective siege to the enemy fortress&amp;quot;; or, in other words, in demanding that all efforts be directed towards gathering, organising, and &#039;&#039;mobilising&#039;&#039; a permanent army. When we ridiculed &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; for its leap from Economism to shouting for an assault (for which it clamoured in &#039;&#039;April 1901,&#039;&#039; in &#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Listok&amp;quot; Rabochego Dyela&#039;&#039;, 157 No. 6) it of course came down on us with accusations of being &amp;quot;doctrinaire&amp;quot;, of failing to understand our revolutionary duty, of calling for caution, etc. Of course, we were not in the least surprised to hear these accusations from those who totally lack principles and who evade all arguments by references to a profound &amp;quot;tactics-as-process&amp;quot;, any more than we were surprised by the fact that these charges were repeated by Nadezhdin, who in general has a supreme contempt for durable programmes and the fundamentals of tactics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is said that history does not repeat itself. But Nadezhdin exerts every effort to cause it to repeat itself and he zealously imitates Tkachov&amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Tkachov, P. N.&#039;&#039; (1844-1885)—one of the ideologists of revolutionary Narodism, a follower of the Auguste Blanqui.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; in strongly condemning &amp;quot;revolutionary culturism&amp;quot;, in shouting about &amp;quot;sounding the tocsin&amp;quot; and about a special &amp;quot; eve-of-the-revolution point of view&amp;quot;, etc., Apparently, he has forgotten the well-known maxim that while an original historical event represents a tragedy, its replica is merely a farce.&amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Lenin refers to the following passage from Marx’s &#039;&#039;The Eighteenth Brumaire of Louis Bonaparte&#039;&#039;: “Hegel remarks somewhere that all facts and personages of great importance in world history occur, as it were, twice. He forgot to add: the first time as tragedy, the second as farce” (see Marx and Engels, &#039;&#039;Selected Works&#039;&#039;, Vol. 1, Moscow, 1958, p. 247).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The attempt to seize power, which was prepared by the preaching of Tkachov and carried out by means of the &amp;quot;terrifying&amp;quot; terror that did really terrify, had grandeur, but the &amp;quot;excitative&amp;quot; terror of a Tkachov the Little is simply ludicrous, particularly so when it is supplemented with the idea of an organisation of average people.&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;If &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; would only emerge from its sphere of bookishness,&amp;quot; wrote Nadezhdin, &amp;quot;it would realise that these (instances like the worker’s letter to &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;, No. 7, etc.) are symptoms of the fact that soon, very soon, the ’assault’ will begin, and to speak now [sic!] of an organisation linked with an all-Russia newspaper means to propagate armchair ideas and armchair activity.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What an unimaginable muddle — on the one hand, excitative terror and an &amp;quot;organisation of average people&amp;quot;, along with the opinion that it is far &amp;quot;easier&amp;quot; to gather around something &amp;quot;more concrete&amp;quot;, like a local newspaper, and, on the other, the view that to talk &amp;quot;now&amp;quot; about an all-Russia organisation means to propagate armchair thoughts, or, bluntly put, &amp;quot;now&amp;quot; it is already too late! But what of the &amp;quot;extensive organisation of local newspapers&amp;quot; — is it not too late for that, my dear L. Nadezhdin? And compare with this &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;’s point of view and tactical line: excitative terror is nonsense; to talk of an organisation of average people and of the &#039;&#039;extensive&#039;&#039; publication of local newspapers means to fling the door wide open to Economism. We must speak of a single all-Russia organisation of revolutionaries, and it will never be too late to talk of that until the real, not a paper, assault begins.&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;quot;Yes, as far as organisation is concerned the situation is anything but brilliant,&amp;quot; continues Nadezhdin. &amp;quot;Yes, &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; is entirely right in saying that the mass of our fighting forces consists of volunteers and insurgents.... You do well to give such a sober picture of the state of our forces. But why, at the same time, do you forget that &#039;&#039;the masses are not ours at all&#039;&#039;, and consequently, will &#039;&#039;not ask us&#039;&#039; when to begin military operations; they will simply go and ’rebel’.... When the crowd itself breaks out with its elemental destructive force it &#039;&#039;may&#039;&#039; overwhelm and sweep aside the ’regular troops’ among whom we prepared all the time to introduce extremely systematic organisation, but never &#039;&#039;managed&#039;&#039; to do so.&amp;quot; (Our italics.)&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;Astounding logic! &#039;&#039;For the very reason&#039;&#039; that the &amp;quot;masses are not ours&amp;quot; it is stupid and unseemly to shout about an immediate &amp;quot;assault&amp;quot;, for assault means attack by regular troops and not a spontaneous mass upsurge. For the very reason that the masses &#039;&#039;may&#039;&#039; overwhelm and sweep aside the regular troops we must without fail &amp;quot;manage to keep up&amp;quot; with the spontaneous upsurge by our work of &amp;quot;introducing extremely systematic organisation&amp;quot; in the regular troops, for the more we &amp;quot;manage&amp;quot; to introduce such organisation the more probably will the regular troops not be overwhelmed by the masses, but will take their place at their head. Nadezhdin is confused because he imagines that troops in the course of systematic organisation are engaged in something that isolates them from the masses, when in actuality they are engaged exclusively in all-sided and all-embracing political. agitation, i.e., precisely in work that &#039;&#039;brings closer and merges into a single whole&#039;&#039; the elemental destructive force of the masses and the conscious destructive force of the organisation of revolutionaries. You, gentlemen, wish to lay the blame where it does not belong. For it is precisely the &#039;&#039;Svoboda&#039;&#039; group that, by including terror &#039;&#039;in its programme&#039;&#039;, calls for an organisation of terrorists, and such an organisation would indeed prevent our troops from establishing closer contacts with the masses, which, unfortunately, are still not ours, and which, unfortunately, do not yet ask us, or rarely ask us, when and how to launch their military operations.&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;quot;We shall miss the revolution itself,&amp;quot; continues Nadezhdin in his attempt to scare &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;, &amp;quot;in the same way as we missed ..the recent events, which came upon us like a bolt from the blue.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;This sentence, taken in connection with what has been quoted above, clearly demonstrates the absurdity of the &amp;quot;eve-of-therevolution point of view&amp;quot; invented by &#039;&#039;Svoboda&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;Lenin&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The Eve of the Revolution, p. 62.&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Plainly put, this special &amp;quot;point of view&amp;quot; boils down to this that it is too late &amp;quot;now&amp;quot; to discuss and prepare. If that is the case, most worthy opponent of &amp;quot;bookishness&amp;quot;, what was the use of writing a pamphlet of 132 pages on questions of theory&amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;Lenin&amp;quot;&amp;gt;In his &#039;&#039;Review of Questions of Theory&#039;&#039;, Nadezhdin, by the way, made almost no contribution whatever to the discussion of questions of theory, apart, perhaps, from the following passage, a most peculiar one from the “eve-of-the-revolution point of view”: “Bernsteinism, on the whole, is losing its acuteness for us at the present moment, as is the question whether Mr. Adamovich will prove that Mr. Struve has already earned a lacing, or, on the contrary, whether Mr. Struve will refute Mr. Adamovich and will refuse to resign — it really makes no difference, because the hour of revolution has struck” (p. 110). One can hardly imagine a more glaring illustration of Nadezhdin’s infinite disregard for theory. We have proclaimed “the eve of the revolution”, &#039;&#039;therefore&#039;&#039; “it really makes no difference” whether or not the orthodox will succeed in finally driving the Critics from their positions! Our wiseacre fails to see that it is precisely during the revolution that we shall stand in need of the results of our theoretical battles with the Critics in order to be able resolutely to combat their &#039;&#039;practical&#039;&#039; positions!&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and tactics&amp;quot;? Don’t you think it would have been more becoming for the &amp;quot;eve-of-the-revolution point of view&amp;quot; to have issued 132,000 leaflets containing the summary call, &amp;quot;Bang them — knock’em down!&amp;quot;?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Those who make nation-wide political agitation the cornerstone of their programme, &#039;&#039;their tactics, and their organisational work&#039;&#039;, as &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039; does, stand the least risk of missing the revolution. The people who are now engaged throughout Russia in weaving the network of connections that spread from the all-Russia newspaper not only did not miss the spring events, but, on the contrary, gave us an opportunity to foretell them. Nor did they miss the demonstrations that were described in &#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;, Nos. 13 and 14; on the contrary, they took part in them, clearly realising that it was their duty to come to the aid of the spontaneously rising masses and, at the same time, through the medium of the newspaper, help all the comrades in Russia to inform themselves of the demonstrations and to make use of their gathered experience. And if they live they &#039;&#039;will&#039;&#039; not miss the revolution, which, first and foremost, will demand of us experience in agitation, ability to support (in a Social-Democratic manner) every protest, as well as direct the spontaneous movement, while safeguarding it from the mistakes of friends and the traps of enemies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have thus come to the last reason that compels us so strongly to insist on the plan of an organisation centred round an all-Russia newspaper, through the common work for the common newspaper. Only such organisation will ensure the &#039;&#039;flexibility&#039;&#039; required of a militant Social-Democratic organisation, viz., the ability to adapt itself immediately to the most diverse and rapidly changing conditions of struggle, the ability, &amp;quot;on the one hand, to avoid an open battle against an overwhelming enemy, when the enemy has concentrated all his forces at one spot and yet, on the other, to take advantage of his unwieldiness and to attack him when and where he least expects it&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;Lenin&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Iskra&#039;&#039;, No. 4, “Where To Begin”. “Revolutionary culturists, who do not accept the eve-of-the-revolution point of view, are not in the least perturbed by the prospect of working for a long period of time,” writes Nadezhdin (p. 62). This brings us to observe: Unless we are able to devise political tactics and an organisational plan for &#039;&#039;work over a very long period&#039;&#039;, while ensuring, in &#039;&#039;the very process of this work&#039;&#039;, our Party’s readiness to be at its post and fulfil its duty in every contingency whenever the march of events is accelerated — unless we succeed in doing this, we shall prove to he but miserable political adventurers. Only Nadezhdin, who began but yesterday to describe himself as a Social-Democrat, can forget that the aim of Social-Democracy is to transform radically the conditions of life of the whole of mankind and that for this reason it is not permissible for a Social-Democrat to be 	“perturbed” by the question of the duration of the work.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It would be a grievous error indeed to build the Party organisation in anticipation only of outbreaks and street fighting, or only upon the &amp;quot;forward march of the drab everyday struggle&amp;quot;. We must &#039;&#039;always&#039;&#039; conduct our everyday work and always be prepared for every situation, because very frequently it is almost impossible to foresee when a period of outbreak will give way to a period of calm. In the instances, however, when it is possible to do so, we could not turn this foresight to account for the purpose of reconstructing our organisation; for in an autocratic country these changes take place with astonishing rapidity, being sometimes connected with a single night raid by the tsarist janizaries.&amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Janizaries&#039;&#039;—privileged Turkish infantry, abolished in 1826. The janizaries plundered the population and were known for their unusual brutality. Lenin called the tsarist police “janizaries”.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; And the revolution itself must not by any means be regarded as a single act (as the Nadezhdins apparently imagine), but as a series of more or less powerful outbreaks rapidly alternating with periods of more or less complete calm. For that reason, the principal content of the activity of our Party organisation, the focus of this activity, should be work that is both possible and essential in the period of a most powerful outbreak as well as in the period of complete calm, namely, work of political agitation, connected throughout Russia, illuminating all aspects of life, and conducted among the broadest possible strata of the masses. But this work &#039;&#039;is unthinkable&#039;&#039; in present-day Russia without an all-Russia newspaper, issued very frequently. The organisation, which will form round this newspaper, the organisation of its &#039;&#039;collaborators&#039;&#039; (in the broad sense of the word, i.e., all those working for it), will be ready &#039;&#039;for&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;everything&#039;&#039;, from upholding the honour, the prestige, and the continuity of the Party in periods of acute revolutionary &amp;quot;depression&amp;quot; to preparing for, appointing the time for, and carrying out the &#039;&#039;nation-wide armed uprising.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indeed, picture to yourselves a very ordinary occurrence in Russia-the total round-up of our comrades in one or several localities. In the absence of a &#039;&#039;single&#039;&#039;, common, regular activity that combines all the local organisations, such round-ups frequently result in the interruption of the work for many months. if, however, all the local organisations had one common activity, then, even in the event of a very serious round-up, two or three energetic persons could in the course of a few weeks establish contact between the common centre and new youth circles, which, as we know, spring up very quickly even now. And when the common activity, hampered by the arrests, is apparent to all, new circles will be able to come into being and make connections with the centre even more rapidly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the other hand, picture to yourselves a popular uprising. Probably everyone will now agree that we must think of this and prepare for it. But how? Surely the Central Committee cannot appoint agents to all localities for the purpose of preparing the uprising. Even if we had a Central Committee, it could achieve absolutely nothing by such appointments under present-day Russian conditions. But a network of agents&amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;Lenin&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Alas, alas! Again I have let slip that awful word “agents”, which jars so much on the democratic cars of the Martynovs! I wonder why this word did not offend the heroes of the seventies and yet off ends the amateurs of the nineties? I like the word, because it clearly and trenchantly indicates &#039;&#039;the common cause&#039;&#039; to which all the agents bend their thoughts and actions, and if I had to replace this word by another, the only word I might select would be the word “collaborator”, if it did not suggest a certain bookishness and vagueness. The thing we need is a military organisation of agents. However, the numerous Martynovs (particularly abroad), whose favourite pastime is “mutual grants of generalships to one another”, may instead of saying “passport agent” prefer to say, “Chief of the Special Department for Supplying Revolutionaries with Passports”. etc.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; that would form in the course of establishing and distributing the common newspaper would not have to &amp;quot;sit about and wait&amp;quot; for the call for an uprising, but could carry on the regular activity that would guarantee the highest probability of success in the event of an uprising. Such activity would strengthen our contacts with the broadest strata of the working masses and with all social strata that are discontented with the autocracy, which is of such importance for an uprising. Precisely such activity would serve to cultivate the ability to estimate correctly the general political situation and, consequently, the ability to select the proper moment for an uprising. Precisely such activity would train all local organisations to respond simultaneously to the same political questions, incidents, and events that agitate the whole of Russia and to react to such &amp;quot;incidents&amp;quot; in the most vigorous, uniform, and expedient manner possible; for an uprising is in essence the most vigorous, most uniform, and most expedient &amp;quot;answer&amp;quot; of the entire people to the government. Lastly, it is precisely such activity that would train all revolutionary organisations throughout Russia to maintain the most continuous, and at the same time the most secret, contacts with one another, thus creating &#039;&#039;real&#039;&#039; Party unity; for without such contacts it will be impossible collectively to discuss’ the plan for the uprising and to take the necessary preparatory measures on the eve, measures that must be kept in the strictest secrecy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a word, the &amp;quot;plan for an all-Russia political newspaper&amp;quot;, far from representing the fruits of the labour of armchair workers, infected with dogmatism and bookishness (as it seemed to those who gave but little thought to it), is the most practical plan for immediate and all-round preparation of the uprising, with, at the same time, no loss of sight for a moment of the pressing day-to-day work.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Conclusion==&lt;br /&gt;
The history of Russian Social-Democracy can be distinctly divided into three periods:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first period embraces about ten years, approximately from 1884 to 1894. This was the period of the rise and consolidation of the theory and programme of Social-Democracy. The adherents of the new trend in Russia were very few in number. Social-Democracy existed without a working-class movement, and as a political party it was at the embryonic stage of development.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second period embraces three or four years—1894-98, In this period Social-Democracy appeared on the scene as a social movement, as the upsurge of the masses of the people, as a political party. This is the period of its childhood and adolescence. The intelligentsia was fired with a vast and general zeal for struggle against Narodism and for going among the workers; the workers displayed a general enthusiasm for strike action. The movement made enormous strides. The majority of the leaders were young people who had not reached &amp;quot;the age of thirty-five&amp;quot; which to Mr. N. Mikhailovsky appeared to be a sort of natural border-line. Owing to their youth, they proved to be untrained for practical work and they left the scene with astonishing rapidity. But in the majority of cases the scope of their activity was very wide. Many of them had begun their revolutionary thinking as adherents of Narodnaya Volya. Nearly all had in their early youth enthusiastically worshipped the terrorist heroes. It required a struggle to abandon the captivating impressions of those heroic traditions, and the struggle was accompanied by the breaking off of personal relations with people who were determined to remain loyal to the Narodnaya Volya and for whom the young Social-Democrats had profound respect. The struggle compelled the youthful leaders to educate themselves to read illegal literature of every trend, and to study closely the questions of legal Narodism. Trained in this struggle, Social-Democrats went into the working-class movement without &amp;quot;for a moment&amp;quot; forgetting either the theory of Marxism, which brightly illumined their path, or the task of overthrowing the autocracy. The formation of the Party in the spring of 1898 was the most striking and at the same time the last act of the Social-Democrats of this period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The third period, as we have seen, was prepared in 1897 and it definitely cut off the second period in 1898 (1898-?). This was a period of disunity, dissolution, and vacillation. During adolescence a youth’s voice breaks. And so, in this period, the voice of Russian Social-Democracy began to break, to strike a false note — on the one hand, in the writings of Messrs. Struve and Prokopovich, of Bulgakov and Berdyaev, and on the other, in those of V. l-n and R. M., of B. Krichevsky and Martynov. But it was only the leaders who wandered about separately and drew back; the movement itself continued to grow, and it advanced with enormous strides. The proletarian struggle spread to new strata of the workers and extended to the whole of Russia, at the same time indirectly stimulating the revival of the democratic spirit among the students and among other sections of the population. The political consciousness of the leaders, however, capitulated before the breadth and power of the spontaneous upsurge; among the Social-Democrats, another type had become dominant — the type of functionaries, trained almost exclusively on &amp;quot;legal Marxist&amp;quot; literature, which proved to be all the more inadequate the more the spontaneity of the masses demanded political consciousness on the part of the leaders. The leaders not only lagged behind in regard to theory (&amp;quot;freedom of criticism&amp;quot;) and practice (&amp;quot;primitiveness&amp;quot;), but they sought to justify their backwardness by all manner of high-flown arguments. Social-Democracy was degraded to the level of trade-unionism by the Brentano adherents in legal literature, and by the tail-enders in illegal literature. The &#039;&#039;Credo&#039;&#039; programme began to be put into operation, especially when the &amp;quot;primitive methods&amp;quot; of the Social-Democrats caused a revival of revolutionary non-Social-Democratic tendencies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the reader should feel critical that I have dealt at too great length with a certain &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;I&#039;&#039; can say only that &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; acquired &amp;quot;historical&amp;quot; significance because it most notably reflected the &amp;quot;spirit&amp;quot; of this third period.&amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;Lenin&amp;quot;&amp;gt;I could also reply with the German proverb: &#039;&#039;Den Sack schlägt man, den Esel meint man&#039;&#039; (you beat the sack, but you mean the donkey). Not &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; alone, but also &#039;&#039;the broad mass of&#039;&#039; practical workers &#039;&#039;and theoreticians&#039;&#039; was carried away by the “criticism” &#039;&#039;a la mode&#039;&#039;, becoming confused in regard to the question of spontaneity and lapsing from the Social-Democratic to the trade-unionist conception of our political and organisational tasks.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It was not the consistent R. M., but the weathercock Krichevskys and Martynovs who were able properly to express the disunity and vacillation, the readiness to make concessions to &amp;quot;criticism&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;Economism&amp;quot;, and to terrorism. Not the lofty contempt for practical work displayed by some worshipper of the &amp;quot;absolute&amp;quot; is characteristic of this period, but the combination of pettifogging practice and utter disregard for theory. It was not so much in the direct rejection of &amp;quot;grandiose phrases&amp;quot; that the heroes of this period engaged as in their vulgarisation. Scientific socialism ceased to be an integral revolutionary theory and became a hodgepodge &amp;quot;freely&amp;quot; diluted with the content of every new German textbook that appeared; the slogan &amp;quot;class struggle&amp;quot; did not impel to broader and more energetic activity but served as a balm, since &amp;quot;the economic struggle is inseparably linked with the political struggle&amp;quot;; the idea of a party did not serve as a call for the creation of a militant organisation of revolutionaries, but was used to justify some sort of &amp;quot;revolutionary bureaucracy&amp;quot; and infantile playing at &amp;quot;democratic&amp;quot; forms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the third period will come to an end and the fourth (now heralded by many portents) will begin we do not know. We are passing from the sphere of history to the sphere of the present and, partly, of the future. But we firmly believe that the fourth period will lead to the consolidation of militant Marxism, that Russian Social-Democracy will emerge from the crisis in the full flower of manhood, that the opportunist rearguard will be &amp;quot;replaced&amp;quot; by the genuine vanguard of the most revolutionary class.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the sense of calling for such a &amp;quot;replacement&amp;quot; and by way of summing up what has been expounded above, we may meet the question, What is to be done? with the brief reply:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Put an End to the Third Period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Lenin&#039;s notes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references group=&amp;quot;Lenin&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Notes==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references group=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;lasseisen&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Lassalleans&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Eisenachers&#039;&#039; — two parties in the German working-class movement in the sixties and early seventies of the nineteenth century.&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Lassalleans&#039;&#039; — supporters of Ferdinand Lassalle (1825–1864) and adherents of his theories; Lassalle was a German petty-bourgeois socialist who played an active part in organising (in 1863) the General Association of German Workers, a political organisation that existed up to 1875. The programmatic demands of the Association were formulated by Lassalle in a number of articles and speeches. Lassalle regarded the state as a supra-class organisation and, in conformity with that philosophically idealist view, believed that the Prussian state could be utilised to solve the social problem through the setting up of producers’ co-operatives with its aid. Marx said that Lassalle advocated a “Royal-Prussian state socialism”. Lassalle directed the workers towards peaceful, parliamentary forms of struggle, believing that the introduction of universal suffrage would make Prussia a “free people’s state”. To obtain universal suffrage he promised Bismarck the support of his Association against the liberal opposition and also in the implementation of Bismarck’s plan to reunite Germany “from above” under the hegemony of Prussia. Lassalle repudiated the revolutionary class struggle, denied the importance of trade unions and of strike action, ignored the international tasks of the working class, and infected the German workers with nationalist ideas. His contemptuous attitude towards the peasantry, which he regarded as a reactionary force, did much damage to the German working-class movement. Marx and Engels fought his harmful utopian dogmatism and his reformist views. Their criticism helped free the German workers from the influence of Lassallean opportunism.&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Eisenachers&#039;&#039; — members of the Social-Democratic Workers’ Party of Germany, founded in 1869 at the Eisenach Congress. The leaders of the Eisenachers were August Bebel and Wilhelm Liebknecht, who were under the ideological influence of Marx and Engels. The Eisenach programme stated that the Social-Democratic Workers’ Party of Germany considered itself “a section of the International Working Men’s Association and shared its aspirations”. Thanks to the regular advice and criticism of Marx and Engels, the Eisenachers pursued a more consistent revolutionary policy than did Lassalle’s General Association of German Workers; in particular, on the question of German reunification, they followed “the democratic and proletarian road, struggling against the slightest concession to Prussianism, Bismarckism, and nationalism”. Under the influence of the growing working-class movement and of increased government repressions, the two parties united at the Gotha Congress in 1875 to form the Socialist Workers’ Party of Germany, of which the Lassalleans formed the opportunist wing.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;guesbilist&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Guesdists and Possibilists&#039;&#039; — two trends in the French socialist movement arising out of the split in the French Workers’ Party in 1882.&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Guesdists&#039;&#039; — followers of Jules Guesde, constituted the Marxist wing of the movement and advocated an independent revolutionary policy of the proletariat. In 1901 they formed the Socialist Party of France.&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Possibilists&#039;&#039; — a petty-bourgeois, reformist trend that sought to divert the proletariat from revolutionary methods of struggle. The Possibilists advocated the restriction of working-class activity to what is “possible” under capitalism. In 1902, in conjunction with other reformist groups, the Possibilists organised the French Socialist Party.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;In 1905 the Socialist Party of France and the French Socialist Party united to form a single party. During the imperialist war of 1944–18, Jules Guesde, together with the entire leadership of the French Socialist Party, went over to the camp of social-chauvinism.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;cadets&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Cadets&#039;&#039; — the Constitutional-Democratic Party, the principal bourgeois party in Russia, representing the liberal-monarchist bourgeoisie. It was formed in October 1905. Parading as democrats and calling themselves the party of “people’s freedom”, the Cadets tried to win the following of the peasantry. Their aim was to preserve tsarism in the form of a constitutional monarchy. After the victory of the October Socialist Revolution, the Cadets organised counter-revolutionary conspiracies and revolts against the Soviet Republic.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;bezzaglavtsi&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Bezzaglavtsi&#039;&#039; — from the title of the journal Bes Zaglaviya (Without a Title)—were organisers of, and contributors to, the journal published in St. Petersburg in 1906 by S. N. Prokopovich, Y. D. Kuskova, V. Y. Bogucharsky, and others. The journal openly advocated revisionism, supported the Mensheviks and liberals, and opposed an independent proletarian policy. Lenin called the group “pro-Menshevik Cadets or pro-Cadet Mensheviks”.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;stuttcong&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The Stuttgart Congress of the German Social-Democratic Party&#039;&#039; held on September 21–26 (October 3–8), 1898, was the first congress to discuss the question of revisionism in the German Social-Democratic Party. A statement from Bernstein (who did not attend) was read to the Congress; it amplified and defended the opportunist views he had previously set forth in a number of articles. There was, however, no unity among his opponents at the Congress. Some (Bebel, Kautsky, and others) called for an ideological struggle and a criticism of Bernstein’s errors, but opposed the adoption of organisational measures toward him. The others, led by Rosa Luxemburg—the minority—urged a more vigorous struggle against Bernsteinism.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;VVs&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;V. V.&#039;&#039; — pseudonym of V. P. Vorontsov, an ideologist of liberal Narodism in the eighties and nineties of the nineteenth century. By the “V. V.’s of Russian Social-Democracy” Lenin understands the “Economists” who represented the opportunist trend in the Russian Social-Democratic movement.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;secret-facts&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Lenin added this footnote for purposes of secrecy. The facts are enumerated in the order in which they actually took place.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;league&amp;quot;&amp;gt;The reference is to the League of Russian Revolutionary Social-Democracy Abroad.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;yuzhny&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;Yuzhny Rabochy&#039;&#039; (The Southern Worker) — a Social-Democratic newspaper, illegally published from January 1900 to April 1903 by a group of that name; twelve issues appeared.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;paris-congress&amp;quot;&amp;gt; The reference is to the pamphlet &#039;&#039;Report on the Russian Social-Democratic Movement to International Socialist Congress in Paris&#039;&#039;, 1900. The Report was submitted to the Congress by the Editorial Board of &#039;&#039;Rabocheye Dyelo&#039;&#039; on behalf of the Union of Russian Social-Democrats Abroad and was published as a separate pamphlet in Geneva in 1901; the pamphlet also contained the report of the Bund (“The History of the Jewish Working-Class Movement in Russia and Poland”).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/references&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Library works by Vladimir Lenin]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Basic Marxism–Leninism study plan by r/communism]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{DEFAULTSORT:What is to be done?}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>The Phantom Bull</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=Israel_Defense_Forces&amp;diff=92094</id>
		<title>Israel Defense Forces</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=Israel_Defense_Forces&amp;diff=92094"/>
		<updated>2026-07-26T16:50:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;The Phantom Bull: I added quotation marks around the word &amp;quot;defense&amp;quot;, for obvious reasons.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:IDF logo.png|thumb|Emblem]]&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;Israel&amp;quot; &amp;quot;Defense&amp;quot; Forces&#039;&#039;&#039; (&#039;&#039;&#039;IDF&#039;&#039;&#039;), more accurately referred to as the &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Israel&amp;quot; Offensive Forces&#039;&#039;&#039; or the &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Israel&amp;quot; Occupation Forces&#039;&#039;&#039; (&#039;&#039;&#039;IOF&#039;&#039;&#039;), is a [[Settler colonialism|settler-colonial]] terrorist organization. Along with its predecessor, the [[Haganah]], it is responsible for the ongoing [[Colonialism|colonization]] and [[Palestinian genocide|genocide of Palestinians]]. Military service is mandatory in the [[State of Israel|Zionist Entity]], and people who refuse to join the IOF may spend months in prison.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{Web citation|author=Lee Camp|newspaper=[[MintPress News]]|title=The One Thing the Israeli Military Is Terrified of|date=2022-09-28|url=https://www.mintpressnews.com/israel-military-terrified-of-conscientious-objectors/282062/|retrieved=2022-10-01}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The IOF&#039;s current Chief of Staff is [[Herzi Halevi]].&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:0&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{Web citation|author=Miko Peled|newspaper=[[MintPress News]]|title=Despite What Media Claim, New IDF Chief of Staff Is a Particularly Gruesome War Criminal|date=2022-09-20|url=https://www.mintpressnews.com/new-idf-chief-herzi-halevi-particularly-gruesome-war-criminal/281965/}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== War crimes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;See also: [[Palestinian genocide]]&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;In 2008, the IOF killed close to 1,500 unarmed civilians in [[Gaza Strip|Gaza]] during Operation Cast Lead. During an assault on Gaza in 2019, the IOF killed more than twenty people, including several children.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:0&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Over 30084 Palestinians have been martyred – including 10000 children, 7000 women, 326 medical staff and 112 journalists – by the IOF since the launch of [[Operation Flood of Al-Aqsa]].&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{Web citation|newspaper=Palestinian Information Centre|title=Gaza Government Media calls on the World to Intervene to stop the Humanitarian Catastrophe in Gaza|date=2024-01-08|url=https://palinfo.com/news/2024/01/08/871113/|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240228010707/https://palinfo.com/news/2024/01/08/871113/|archive-date=2024-02-28|retrieved=2024-03-02|quote=قال المكتب الإعلامي الحكومي في غزة، اليوم الإثنين، إنّه ومع مرور (94) يوماً على حرب الإبادة الجماعية، فقد ارتكب خلالها جيش الاحتلال (1,932) مجزرة، راح ضحيتها (30,084) شهيداً ومفقوداً، بينهم (23,084) شهيداً ممن وصلوا إلى المستشفيات، منهم (10,000) شهيد من الأطفال، و(7,000) شهيدة من النساء، و(326) شهداء من الطواقم الطبية، و(45) شهيداً من الدفاع المدني، و(112) شهداء من الصحفيين، مناشدًا العالم التدخل لوقف العدوان وفتح المعابر لإدخال المساعدات الطبية والغذائية وتوفير الوحدات السكنية لأهل غزة.}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; After the IDF withdrew from Gaza on April 7, 2024,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{Web citation|newspaper=Al Jazeera|title=Israel ‘pulls out troops’ from southern Gaza as attacks enter seventh month|date=2024-04-07|url=https://www.aljazeera.com/news/2024/4/7/israel-pulls-out-troops-from-southern-gaza-as-attacks-enter-seventh-month|retrieved=2024-06-09}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; almost 400 bodies were discovered in mass graves at Nasser hospital. Many of these bodies had signs of torture, some Palestinian civilians had been buried alive, and others executed.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{Web citation|newspaper=Al Jazeera|title=Evidence of torture as nearly 400 bodies found in Gaza mass graves|date=2024-04-25|url=https://www.aljazeera.com/news/2024/4/25/signs-of-torture-as-nearly-400-bodies-found-at-gaza-hospitals-mass-graves|retrieved=2024-06-09}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Imperialist organizations]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Zionism]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>The Phantom Bull</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=Climate_change&amp;diff=92089</id>
		<title>Climate change</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=Climate_change&amp;diff=92089"/>
		<updated>2026-07-25T22:42:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;The Phantom Bull: I rephrased the first sentence to remove the reference to human activity in general, because climate change is far too often blamed on &amp;quot;human nature&amp;quot; rather than just capitalism.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:Global warming map.png|thumb|Change in average surface temperatures from 1956–1976 to 2011–2021]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Climate change&#039;&#039;&#039; is the rise in global temperatures and resulting changes in weather caused by the productive forces as utilized under [[capitalism]]. Greenhouse gases including carbon dioxide (CO&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;), methane (CH&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;4&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;), and nitrous oxide (N&amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/sub&amp;gt;O) increase temperatures. Average temperatures have already increased by 1.3 ºC since the [[Industrial Revolution]],&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:2&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{Web citation|author=Moira Cassidy|newspaper=[[Liberation News]]|title=The evil twins: Climate change and ocean acidification|date=2019-09-15|url=https://www.liberationnews.org/the-evil-twins-climate-change-and-ocean-acidification/|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210506055618/https://www.liberationnews.org/the-evil-twins-climate-change-and-ocean-acidification/|archive-date=2021-05-06|retrieved=2022-10-02}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and carbon dioxide in the atmosphere has risen from 280 to 400 parts per million. In addition to rising temperatures, higher levels of carbon dioxide make the oceans more acidic, destroying coral reefs and killing marine animals.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:0&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{Web citation|author=Jon Britton|newspaper=[[Liberation School]]|title=The UN Climate Summit—words versus deeds|date=2014-10-04|url=https://www.liberationschool.org/un-climate-summit-words-versus-deeds/|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220124202746/https://www.liberationschool.org/un-climate-summit-words-versus-deeds/|archive-date=2022-01-24|retrieved=2022-10-02}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In late 2023, the average global temperature temporarily exceeded 2 ºC  of warming compared to the preindustrial level, providing an alarming indication of the speed of global warming and the extreme conditions that accompany it.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{Web citation|author=Andrew Freedman|newspaper=AXIOS|title=Earth likely briefly passed critical warming threshold on Friday and Saturday|date=2023-11-21|url=https://www.axios.com/2023/11/20/earth-2c-warming-threshold-passed-report|retrieved=2023-12-2}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Technology already exists to replace fossil fuels with renewable or nuclear energy, but the transition would not be profitable under a short-sighted capitalist [[market economy]],&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{Web citation|author=Collin L. Chambers|newspaper=[[Liberation School]]|title=How to really avoid a climate disaster: A response to Bill Gates’ deceptive climate book|date=2021-04-14|url=https://www.liberationschool.org/how-to-really-avoid-a-climate-disaster/|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220124191553/https://www.liberationschool.org/how-to-really-avoid-a-climate-disaster/|archive-date=2022-01-24|retrieved=2022-10-02}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; thus rendering the odds of capitalist states adopting these technologies remote.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sources of greenhouse gases ==&lt;br /&gt;
Burning hydrocarbons, including fossil fuels, releases carbon dioxide. Agriculture releases methane through meat production and nitrous oxide through overuse of fertilizers. Rising temperatures are melting permafrost in the Arctic, releasing methane trapped in the ice and causing more warming.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:0&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 companies cause 70% of total world greenhouse gas emissions.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:2&amp;quot; /&amp;gt; Electricity generation causes 27% of greenhouse gas emissions and steel production causes an additional 7–9%. The [[United States Department of Defense|U.S. Department of Defense]] is one of the largest polluters in the world.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:1&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== By country ===&lt;br /&gt;
Per capita, China emits less than half as much greenhouse gases as the [[United States of America|United States]], and its current emission levels are similar to Western countries in 1885. The USA releases eight times as much greenhouse gases as [[Republic of India|India]] per capita.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{Web citation|author=Hezri A. Adnan, Jomo Kwame Sundaram|newspaper=JOMO|title=Rich nations doubly responsible for greenhouse gas emissions|date=2022-12-07|url=https://www.ksjomo.org/post/rich-nations-doubly-responsible-for-greenhouse-gas-emissions|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221206121748/https://www.ksjomo.org/post/rich-nations-doubly-responsible-for-greenhouse-gas-emissions|archive-date=2022-12-06|retrieved=2022-12-07}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Global warming by degree ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* At 1.5 ºC of warming, all coral reefs on Earth would die.&lt;br /&gt;
* At 2 ºC, polar ice would melt enough to flood many major cities and droughts would affect 400 million people.&lt;br /&gt;
* At 3 ºC, wildfires would increase by six times in the United States and damage from river flooding would increase at least 30 times.&lt;br /&gt;
* At 4 ºC, sea levels would rise by 30 meters, global grain harvest would decrease by 50%, and millions of people would contract Dengue Fever in [[Latin America]] every year.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:2&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Ecofascism]], the reactionary &amp;quot;response&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Ecosocialism]], the revolutionary response&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Green capitalism]], capitalist propaganda alleging that capitalism can be ecologically sustainable&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Climate change denial]]  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Climate change]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Environment]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>The Phantom Bull</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=Library:The_Colonizer%27s_Model_of_the_World&amp;diff=91896</id>
		<title>Library:The Colonizer&#039;s Model of the World</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=Library:The_Colonizer%27s_Model_of_the_World&amp;diff=91896"/>
		<updated>2026-07-15T19:05:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;The Phantom Bull: I added a correction to an incorrect claim about the big bang.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Library work|title=The Colonizer&#039;s Model of the World|author=J. M. Blaut|published_date=1993|source=https://annas-archive.gl/md5/ac90d2ead54c271679c5e9bef00192f3}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Acknowledgments ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Many people contributed in many important ways to the writing of this book. Peter Taylor and Wilbur Zelinsky gave me great encouragement and wise counsel (not always heeded) during the years that I have been struggling with the issues and ideas discussed here. Among many others who contributed immensely to the book, and are happily given credit for many of the ideas it contains (the good ideas, not the errors), I wish particularly to mention Abdul Alkalimat, Samir Amin, William Denevan, Loida Figueroa, Andre Gunder Frank, William Loren Katz, José López, Kent Mathewson, Antonio Ríos-Bustamante, América Sorrentini de Blaut, and Ben Wisner. Over the years many other people have set me to thinking about the problems discussed in the book and have shown me the answers to some of these problems. Among these friends, teachers, and students, I would like to mention Chao-li Chi, Ghazi Falah, Fred Hardy, Fred Kniffen, Juan Mari Brás, Francis Mark, Sidney Mintz, Ng Hong, Doris Pizarro, Randolph Rawlins, Anselme Rémy, Waldo Rodríguez, Digna Sánchez, Howard Stanton, David Stea, and Lakshman Yapa. Peter Wissoker and Anna Brackett edited the book with patience and skill. A number of paragraphs in Chapters 3 and 4 and one in Chapter 2 are taken from an article in &#039;&#039;Political Geography&#039;&#039; (Blaut 1992b), and are reproduced here with the kind permission of the publisher of that journal, Butterworth-Heinemann.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= CHAPTER 1: History Inside Out =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Argument ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The purpose of this book is to undermine one of the most powerful beliefs of our time concerning world history and world geography. This belief is the notion that European civilization—&amp;quot;The West&amp;quot;—has had some unique historical advantage, some special quality of race or culture or environment or mind or spirit, which gives this human community a permanent superiority over all other communities, at all times in history and down to the present.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The belief is both historical and geographical. Europeans are seen as the &amp;quot;makers of history.&amp;quot; Europe eternally advances, progresses, modernizes. The rest of the world advances more sluggishly, or stagnates: it is &amp;quot;traditional society.&amp;quot; Therefore, the world has a permanent geographical center and a permanent periphery: an Inside and an Outside. Inside leads, Outside lags. Inside innovates, Outside imitates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This belief is diffusionism, or more precisely Eurocentric diffusionism. It is a theory about the way cultural processes tend to move over the surface of the world as a whole. They tend to flow out of the European sector and toward the non-European sector. This is the natural, normal, logical, and ethical flow of culture, of innovation, of human causality. Europe, eternally, is Inside. Non-Europe is Outside. Europe is the source of most diffusions; non-Europe is the recipient.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In this book the word &amp;quot;Europe&amp;quot; refers to the continent of Europe and to regions dominated by European culture elsewhere, regions like the United States and Canada.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Diffusionism lies at the very root of historical and geographical scholarship. Some parts of the belief have been questioned in recent years, but its most fundamental tenets remain unchallenged, and so the belief as a whole has not been uprooted or very much weakened by modern scholarship.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The most important tenet of diffusionism is the theory of &amp;quot;the autonomous rise of Europe,&amp;quot; sometimes (rather more grandly) called the idea of &amp;quot;the European Miracle.&amp;quot; It is the idea that Europe was more advanced and more progressive than all other regions prior to 1492, prior, that is, to the beginning of the period of colonialism, the period in which Europe and non-Europe came into intense interaction. If one believes this to be the case—and most modern scholars seem to believe it to be the case—then it must follow that the economic and social modernization of Europe is fundamentally a result of Europe&#039;s internal qualities, not of interaction with the societies of Africa, Asia, and America after 1492. Therefore: the main building blocks of modernity must be European. Therefore: colonialism cannot have been really important for Europe&#039;s modernization. Therefore: colonialism must mean, for the Africans, Asians, and Americans, not spoliation and cultural destruction but, rather, the receipt-by-diffusion of European civilization: modernization.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This book will analyze and criticize Eurocentric diffusionism as a general body of ideas, and will try to undermine the more concrete theory of the autonomous rise of Europe. The first chapter of the book discusses the nature and history of diffusionism. Chapter 2 analyzes the theory of the autonomous rise of Europe as a body of propositions about European superiority (and &amp;quot;the European miracle&amp;quot;), then tries to disprove these propositions, one after the other. Chapter 3 discusses world history and historical geography prior to 1492, attempting to show that Europe was not superior to other civilizations and regions in those times. Chapter 4 argues that colonialism was the basic process after 1492, which led to the selective rise of Europe, the modernization or development of Europe (and outlying Europeanized culture areas like the United States), and the underdevelopment of Asia, Africa, and Latin America. Chapter 4 also argues that the conquest of America and thereafter the expansion of European colonialism is not to be explained in terms of any internal characteristics of Europe, but instead reflects the mundane realities of location. The chain of argument in Chapters 2, 3, and 4, as a whole, therefore, is an attempt to show that Europe did not have historical priority—historical superiority—over what we now call the Third World.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This may seem to be too ambitious a project for one small book. I am really making just one claim. I am asserting that a fundamental and rather explicit error has been made in our conventional past thinking about geography and history, and this error has distorted many fields of thought and action. I am going to present enough evidence to show that the belief in Eurocentric diffusionism and Europe&#039;s historical superiority or priority is not convincing: not well grounded in the facts of history and geography, although firmly grounded in Western culture. It is in a sense folklore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Tunnel of Time ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you had gone to school in Europe or Anglo-America 150 years ago, around the middle of the nineteenth century, you would have been taught a very curious kind of history. You would have learned, for one thing, that every important thing that ever happened to humanity happened in one part of the world, the region we will call &amp;quot;Greater Europe,&amp;quot; meaning the geographical continent of Europe itself, plus (for ancient times only) an enlargement of it to the southeast, the &amp;quot;Bible Lands&amp;quot;—from North Africa to Mesopotamia—plus (for modern times only) the countries of European settlement overseas. You would have been taught that God created Man in this region: the Garden of Eden was mentioned as the starting point of human history in typical world history textbooks of the period, and these textbooks placed Eden at various points between the shores of the Mediterranean Sea and the mountains of Inner Asia.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some of your teachers would have also claimed that only the people of this region are really human: God created the people of other places as a different, nonhuman, or rather infrahuman, species. And all of your teachers of science as well as history would have agreed that non-Europeans are not as intelligent, not as honorable, and (for the most part) not as courageous as Europeans: God made them inferior. If you had asked your teachers why Europeans are more human and more intelligent than everyone else you would perhaps have been chastised for asking such a question. You would have been told that a Christian God created and now manages the world, and it would be both silly and blasphemous to suggest that He might show the same favor to non-Europeans, non-Christians, that He does to those people who worship the True God and moreover worship Him with the proper sacrament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you had been studying geography as well as history back in the middle of the nineteenth century, you would indeed have learned something about the non-European world. The people living in Africa and Asia would have been depicted not only as inferior but as in some sense evil. They are the people who refused to accept God&#039;s grace and so have fallen from His favor. Africans are thus cruel savages, for whom the best possible fate is to be put to useful work, and Christianized. Chinese and Indians for some unknown reason managed to build barbaric civilizations of their own, but because they are not Europeans and not Christians, their civilizations long ago began to stagnate and regress. And, for all their splendor, these never were real civilizations: they are cruel &amp;quot;Oriental despotisms.&amp;quot; Only Europeans know true freedom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ideas of course change, and if you had gone to school some 50 years later, around the turn of the century, you would have been taught a much more secular form of history, and it would have had a strongly evolutionary (though not yet Darwinian) flavor. You would have learned that the earth is very old, that life is old, and that our species itself has been around for a long time. But everything important still happened in Europe (that is, in Greater Europe). The first true man, Cro-Magnon, lived in Europe. Agriculture was invented in Greater Europe (perhaps in the continent, perhaps in the Bible Lands, Europe&#039;s self-proclaimed cultural hearth). You would have been told in world history class that the first barbaric beginnings of civilization occurred in the Bible Lands. There in the Bible Lands emerged the two Caucasian peoples who make all of history. The Semites invented cities and empires, and gave us monotheism and Christianity, but stopped at that point and then sank back into Oriental decadence. The Aryans or Indo-Europeans, freedom-loving though backward folk, built on these foundations, migrating from southeastern Europe or western Asia into and through geographical Europe, and creating the first genuinely civilized society, that of ancient Greece. Then the Romans raised civilization to its next level, and thereafter world history marched inexorably northwestward. If your school was in England you would have been told that History marched from &amp;quot;the Orient&amp;quot; (the Bible Lands) to Athens, to Rome, to feudal France, and finally to modern England—a kind of westbound Orient Express.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By now a secular picture of the geography of non-Europe had begun to be taught in European schools. Africans continued to be described as savages and Oriental societies as decadent and despotic. But important changes had taken place in the relations between Europe and non-Europe during the course of the nineteenth century, and by 1900 a particular theory about this relationship had become fixed in popular discourse and was now taught in schools as standard world geography. This was the theory (described later in this chapter) according to which non-Europeans can and do rise to a civilizational level, if not equal to that of Europeans at least near that level, under European tutelage, that is, under European colonial control.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suppose we move forward another half century, to the history and geography taught around the end of World War II. Not much change. The first True Man is still the Cro-Magnon of Europe. Agriculture was invented in the Bible Lands; so too was barbaric civilization. True civilization still marches from Athens to Rome to Paris to London, and perhaps sets sail then for New York. Non-Europeans do not contribute much to world history, although they begin to do so as a result of European influence. (Colonial peoples learn from their tutors; Japanese imitate successfully, and so on.) Europeans are still brighter, better, and bolder than everyone else.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;This quick survey of 150 years or so of world history textbooks is, of course, very schematic and impressionistic. Some further comments may be of use. In textbooks of the first period, around 1850 (plus or minus a decade or so), the original home of Man is often stated to be the Garden of Eden, which is located by different textbook writers in different parts of western Asia. For instance: somewhere east of Canaan and near Mesopotamia (Robbins, &#039;&#039;The World Displayed in its History and Geography&#039;&#039;, 1832, p. 13); somewhere in the &amp;quot;healthful&amp;quot; mountains between the Caspian Sea and Kashmir or Tibet (Müller, &#039;&#039;The History of the World to 1783&#039;&#039;, 1842, pp. 27, 43-44); perhaps near the borders of the Mediterranean Sea (Tytler, &#039;&#039;Universal history, From the Creation to the beginning of the Eighteenth Century&#039;&#039;, vol. 1, 1844, p. 17); in the Vale of Kashmir (Willard, &#039;&#039;Universal History in Perspective&#039;&#039;, 1845, p. 34); somewhere between the Caucasus Mountains and the Himalayas (Keightley, &#039;&#039;Outlines of History&#039;&#039;, 1849); in the Himalayas (Weber, &#039;&#039;Outlines of Universal History&#039;&#039;, 1853, p. 6); in Armenia (Collier, &#039;&#039;Outlines of General History&#039;&#039;, 1868). There seems to be a kind of median location of Eden near the Caucasus Mountains, which was also, by no coincidence, the supposed place of origin of the &amp;quot;Caucasian race.&amp;quot; Noah, of course, began postdeluvian history on Mt. Ararat, in Armenia (also roughly in the region of the Caucasus). Noah is supposed to have migrated then to Europe (Whelpley, &#039;&#039;A Compound of History, From the Earliest Times&#039;&#039;, vol. 1, 1844, p. 10), or Mesopotamia (Robbins, 1832, p. 20), or Palestine, or some other part of the Bible Lands. Noah&#039;s three sons are supposed, then, to have dispersed and to have founded the branches of mankind—the first great diffusion process. In most textbooks of this period history tends to move west; some textbooks present the Hegelian notion that history proceeds inexorably westward, following the sun, with the implication that the United States, farther west still, will replace Europe as the next center of world civilization.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It was widely believed in this period that nonwhites were not truly and fully human. One version of this theory, the notion of &amp;quot;polygenesis,&amp;quot; claimed that God had created true humans in the Garden of Eden and other races—or at least the &amp;quot;black race&amp;quot;—in other places and times. This theory questioned the standard interpretation of the Old Testament (that everyone is descended from Adam and Eve), so, not surprisingly, it was not stated as truth in the textbooks I consulted. (I have not, however, looked at textbooks used in the antebellum South, and the theory of polygenesis was most popular in slaveholding regions, as an ideological grounding for the treatment of blacks as things rather than people.) Yet polygenesis was important enough to be mentioned and then rejected—in favor of the view that all humans are descendants of Adam and Eve—in some textbooks, down to the end of the century (see, for example, Dew, &#039;&#039;A Digest of the Laws, Customs, Manners, and Institutions of the Ancient and Modern Nations&#039;&#039;, 1853; Fisher, &#039;&#039;Outlines of Universal History&#039;&#039;, 1885; Duruy and Grosvenor, &#039;&#039;A General History of the World&#039;&#039;, 1901). But polygenesis was not needed; the belief that nonwhites are inferior to whites is asserted in one way or another in all the textbooks I examined. The theory of &amp;quot;degeneration&amp;quot; served just as well as polygenesis. It was the notion that the descendants of Ham, and perhaps other biblical peoples, migrated away from the Bible Lands, eastward and southward, and degenerated from civilization toward savagery, or even lower, as they did so, because they had not accepted Christ, or because they migrated into inferior environments, or for some other reason. (See, for instance, Keightley, 1849, 5-6: &amp;quot;the savage is a degeneration from the civilized life,&amp;quot; and Africans are near the apes.) Degeneration was asserted in some textbooks, but in most the simple fact of white superiority was stated and left unexplained. The history of the world is, in general, the history of the white race, or the Semitic and Aryan peoples (see below). For times later than the Roman era, non-Europe is scarcely discussed, except as a backdrop for discussions of the Crusades, the building of colonial empires, and the like. (See Harris, &#039;&#039;The Rise of Anthropological Theory&#039;&#039;, 1968, for an excellent discussion of polygenesis and degeneration.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nearly all textbooks of the period around 1900 (give or take a few years) accepted the newer scientific theories about the age of the earth and the fact of biological evolution (though not the Darwinian theory of evolution). The biblical account of human history, however, was retained in many books, although fewer of them accepted the formerly standard Old Testament chronologies (for instance, that things began in 4004 B.C.). Books of this period tended to present the so-called &amp;quot;Aryan theory,&amp;quot; a theory derived from philology but expanded into a theory of culture history. Earlier philologists had identified an &amp;quot;Aryan&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Indo-European&amp;quot; language family, and also a &amp;quot;Semitic&amp;quot; family (which many authorities, including textbook writers, identified with Noah&#039;s sons Japheth and Shem, respectively). The white race consists of these two peoples. One branch of the Aryans supposedly migrated west into Europe (from the supposed &amp;quot;Aryan hearth,&amp;quot; somewhere southwest or northwest of the Caucasus). These were progressive, energetic people, who founded European civilization mainly after they had acquired Christianity from the Semites, who invented the first barbaric civilizations and monotheism but then stagnated into a dreamy, decadent, unambitious culture and thereafter ceased to advance civilization. No other culture, apart from these two, had much to do with history. (According to Freeman, &#039;&#039;General Sketch of History&#039;&#039;, 1872, p. 2, history &amp;quot;in the highest and truest sense is the history of the Aryan nations of Europe&amp;quot;; see also Collier, 1868; Swinton, &#039;&#039;Outlines of the World&#039;s History&#039;&#039;, 1874; Gilman, &#039;&#039;First Steps in General History&#039;&#039;, 1874; Anderson, &#039;&#039;New Manual of General History&#039;&#039;, 1882; Steele and Steele, &#039;&#039;A Brief History of Ancient, Medieval, and Modern Peoples&#039;&#039;, 1883; Fisher, 1896; Quackenbos, &#039;&#039;Illustrated School History of the World&#039;&#039;, 1889; Thalheimer, &#039;&#039;Outline of General History for the Use of Schools&#039;&#039;, 1883; Sanderson, &#039;&#039;History of the World from the Earliest Time to the Year 1898&#039;&#039;; Duruy and Grosvenor, 1901. Ploetz and Tillinghast presented this theory in &#039;&#039;Epitome of Ancient, Medieval, and Modern History&#039;&#039;, first published in 1883, in its many editions down to 1925 when, in an edition edited by H. E. Barnes, the theory was finally eliminated.) See Bernal&#039;s &#039;&#039;Black Athena&#039;&#039; (1987, 1991) for an insightful discussion of the Aryan theory and related topics in the history of European thought.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because the Old Testament spoke of agriculture—Cain knew farming and Abraham herded domesticated animals—the history textbooks tended not to address the problem of where agriculture was invented until very late in the nineteenth century, the period when science was beginning to deal with this problem. Some scientists and some textbook writers then began to speculate that, just possibly, agriculture was as old in continental Europe as it was in western Asia and Egypt. (From the point of view of science, see Joly, &#039;&#039;Man Before Metals&#039;&#039;, 1897.) But the idea that agriculture originated in the Bible Lands remained dominant although now it was viewed (by most) as an invention, not an artifact of original creation. The ethnographic fact that some tribal peoples (for instance, in Australia) did not practice agriculture was commonly explained, in the textbooks of the earlier nineteenth century, in terms of the theory of degeneration: their ancestors had somehow lost the art. Later in the century it became more common to use the diffusionist conception that agriculture had been invented by west Asian or (conceivably) European peoples, then diffused outward over the rest of the world, and cultures that did not practice it in modern times simply had not yet acquired it, either because of their isolation or because they were too stupid to take it up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Orient Express was a famous train that ran between western Europe and western Asia. Although various routes were used in different eras, the basic line ran from Constantinople (Istanbul) through Greece to northern Italy or Austria, then on to France, and (via Ostend) England. Most of the history textbooks write about world history as though it marched northwesterward, rather like the westbound Orient Express, with stations (so to speak) in Athens, Rome, Paris, and London. (See Chapter 2 for further discussion of the Orient Express model.)&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We can sum all of this up with an image that will prove quite useful in this book. This is the idea that the world has an Inside and an Outside. World history thus far has been, basically, the history of Inside. Outside has been, basically, irrelevant. History and historical geography as it was taught, written, and thought by Europeans down to the time of World War II, and still (as we will see) in most respects today, lies, as it were, in a tunnel of time. The walls of this tunnel are, figuratively, the spatial boundaries of Greater Europe. History is a matter of looking back or down in this European tunnel of time and trying to decide what happened where, when, and why. &amp;quot;Why&amp;quot; of course calls for connections among historical events, but only among the events that lie in the European tunnel. Outside its walls everything seems to be rockbound, timeless, changeless tradition. I will call this way of thinking &amp;quot;historical tunnel vision,&amp;quot; or simply &amp;quot;tunnel history.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The older form of tunnel history simply ignored the non-European world: typical textbooks and historical atlases devoted very few pages to areas outside of Greater Europe (that is, Europe and countries of European settlement overseas plus, for ancient history and the Crusades, the Near East), until one came to the year 1492. Non-Europe (Africa, Asia east of the Bible Lands, Latin America, Oceania) received significant notice only as the venue of European colonial activities, and most of what was said about this region was essentially the history of empire.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In nineteenth-century world history textbooks, Turkey was given some attention because of its political involvement with European affairs. World geography, in contrast to world history, always covered the entire world, and textbooks as well as the great multivolume descriptive geographies (like Reclus&#039;s classic 19-volume &#039;&#039;Nouvelle Géographie Universelle&#039;&#039;, published between 1876 and 1894) gave considerable attention to Asia, Africa, and Latin America. This should not mislead us, however. One of the primary functions of geography throughout this entire period was to teach European children what they needed to know about non-Europe in order to participate in their countries&#039; imperial and commercial activities in these regions. See Hudson, &amp;quot;The New Geography and the New Imperialism: 1870-1918&amp;quot; (1977) and McKay, &amp;quot;Colonialism in the French Geographical Movement&amp;quot; (1943), on the close relation between geography and colonial activities.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Not only was the great bulk of attention devoted to Greater Europe in these older textbooks and historical atlases, but world history was described as flowing steadily westward with the passage of time, from the Bible Lands to eastern Mediterranean Europe, to northwestern Europe. This pattern is readily discernible if we notice the salience of places mentioned in these sources, that is, the frequency of place-name mentions for different regions at different periods. For the earliest period, place-name mentions cluster in the Bible Lands and the extreme eastern Mediterranean. For successively later periods, place-name mentions cluster farther and farther to the west and northwest, finally clustering in northwestern Europe for the period after about A.D. 1000: this is the &amp;quot;Orient Express&amp;quot; pattern to which we referred previously.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After World War II, however, history textbooks began to exhibit another, more subtle, form of tunnel history. The non-European world was now beginning to insert itself very firmly in European consciousness, in the aftermath of the war with Japan and in the midst of the intensified decolonization struggles, the Civil Rights movement in the United States, and the like. Most newer textbooks enlarged the discussion of non-European history, and said something about the historical achievements of non-European cultures. Most textbooks gave a flavor of historicity, of evolutionary progress, to non-European history, thus departing from the older pattern, which dismissed these societies as stagnant and nonevolving. Asian societies were now described as having had an evolutionary motion, though a motion slower than that of Europe. Africa was still described as stagnant, history-less, prior to the colonial era. More salience was given to Asia. However, Africa and the Western Hemisphere still received little mention for eras prior to 1492. The pattern of place-name mentions in most (not all) texts and historical atlases still suggested a flow to the west and northwest, from the Near East to western Europe. And tunnel history dominated most textbooks in the most important matter of all, the question of &amp;quot;why,&amp;quot; of explanation. Historical progress still came about because Europeans invented or initiated most of the crucial innovations, which only later spread out to the rest of the world. So the textbooks depicted a world in which historical causes were to be found basically inside the European tunnel of time, although historical effects were to be seen basically everywhere.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The character of this newer approach can be seen if we look at two well-known modern university-level texts, one written by W. H. McNeill of the University of Chicago (&#039;&#039;A World History&#039;&#039;, 3rd ed., 1979), the other by J. M. Roberts of Oxford University (&#039;&#039;The Hutchinson History of the World&#039;&#039;, 2d ed., 1987; published in the United States as &#039;&#039;The Penguin History of the World&#039;&#039;). For pre-Christian-era world history, more than three-quarters of the place-name mentions in both books are places in Europe and the Middle East (including North Africa); less than one-quarter of the place-name mentions are places in other parts of the world and only about 1% are in Africa. For the Christian era to A.D. 1491 there is significant divergence between the two books. In Roberts&#039;s text, European and Middle Eastern places constitute about 85% of place-name mentions. In McNeill&#039;s text, European and Middle Eastern places constitute only 60% of the place names mentioned, a significant departure from the older tradition although still well out of proportion to this region&#039;s size in area and population. (Sub-Saharan Africa accounts for only 2% of mentions for the period A.D. 1-1491.) In both books, therefore, the region I have been calling &amp;quot;Greater Europe&amp;quot; has considerably lower salience for pre-1492 history than was typically the case in older world history textbooks. As to explanation, however, both books retain much of the traditional perspective. Roberts gives almost no causal role to the cultures and regions of the world other than Europe and the Middle East (including North Africa) for any period prior to 1492. McNeill gives considerable weight to East Asia and some to South Asia for certain historical periods, but almost all of the world history-making forces emanate from Europe, western Asia, and North Africa for the period before 1492. (An exception is the Black Death, which, according to McNeill, swept westward into these regions from farther Asia. On this matter, see also McNeill&#039;s &#039;&#039;Plagues and Peoples&#039;&#039;, 1976.) Examples of the Eurocentric explanations offered by both authors will be given in Chapter 2 of the present book.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is, however, insufficient to look only at those present-day textbooks that are clearly identified as &amp;quot;world history&amp;quot; textbooks. Quite frequently university courses covering the subject of world history use history textbooks that carry titles like &amp;quot;The History of Western Civilization.&amp;quot; (See, for instance, Lerner, et al., &#039;&#039;Western Civilizations: Their History and Their Culture&#039;&#039;, 1988; Kagan, et al., &#039;&#039;The Western Heritage&#039;&#039;, 1987; Chambers, et al., &#039;&#039;The Western Experience&#039;&#039;, 1987.) If such a textbook neglects the non-Western world, there can be no complaint that it is misleading: the title clearly specifies &amp;quot;West&amp;quot; not &amp;quot;World.&amp;quot; But if the course is designated as &amp;quot;world history&amp;quot; and the textbook is designated as &amp;quot;Western history,&amp;quot; then we have a problem. The worst scenario would be one in which world-history teaching continues to be Eurocentric history in disguise. I do not know of any research which tests the following hypotheses: (1) Given that, today, historians are sensitive to the need to avoid Eurocentric bias in the teaching of world history, do some of them simply change the title to &amp;quot;Western&amp;quot; so that Eurocentrism becomes, then, licit? And (2) is it possible that there is a trend away from the teaching of &amp;quot;World&amp;quot; history and toward &amp;quot;Western&amp;quot; (etc.) history and that this trend reflects a reaction (or adjustment) to present-day demands for nontechnocentrism and &amp;quot;fairness?&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Textbooks are an important window into a culture; more than just books, they are semiofficial statements of exactly what the opinion-forming elite of the culture want the educated youth of that culture to believe to be true about the past and present world.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;A school textbook is truly a key social document, a kind of modern stele. In the typical case, a book becomes accepted as a high school (or lower-level) textbook only after it has been reviewed very carefully by the publisher, school boards, and administrators, all of whom are intensely sensitive to the need to print acceptable doctrine; they are concerned to make it certain that children will read only those facts in their textbook which are considered to be acceptable as facts by the opinion-forming elite of the culture. The resulting textbook is, therefore, less an ordinary authored book than a vetted social statement of what is considered valid and acceptable for entry into the mind of the child. For this reason, research on textbooks (including college textbooks, in which the same process is at work, though more subtly) is, in fact, ethnographic research. It tells us about the belief system of the opinion-forming elite of the culture as a whole. Therefore, geography texts in the United States are really ethnogeography documents. Likewise, history texts are really ethnohistory documents. They are probably as useful as cultural artifacts as any old potsherd or inscription. See the final section of this chapter.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; As we have seen, European and Anglo-American history textbooks assert that most of the causes of historical progress occur, or originate, in the European sector of the world. Textbooks of the early and middle nineteenth century tended to give a rather openly religious grounding for this Eurocentric tunnel history. In later textbooks the Bible is no longer considered a source of historical fact, but causality seems to be rooted in an implicit theory that combines a belief that Christian peoples make history with a belief that white peoples make history, the whole becoming a theory that it is natural for Europeans to innovate and progress and for non-Europeans to remain stagnant and unchanging (&amp;quot;traditional&amp;quot;), until, like Sleeping Beauty, they are awakened by the Prince. This view still, in the main, prevails, although racism has been discarded and non-Europe is no longer considered to have been absolutely stagnant and traditional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Schools are always a little behind the time when it comes to the teaching of newer topics and ideas. I wish I could report that the old notions about Inside and Outside are today just artifacts, still taught in some schools because of the usual lag between research and pedagogy, but which have been discarded by Real Scholars, those who pursue historical research and write the important and influential books on world history. But this is not the case. In the matter that concerns us most, that of explaining the larger flows of world history, the views put forward by historical scholars today tend to be quite consonant with the theories projected in textbooks. We can set aside the fact that many of the most widely used textbooks, today as in the past, are written by prominent historical scholars. There are many complex cultural reasons why historical scholarship remains committed to Eurocentric explanations for most of the crucial developments in world history: we will discuss some of these reasons later in the present chapter and return to the question at various points throughout the book. Suffice it at this point to notice a very peculiar paradox. Historians have amassed a fine record of meticulous scholarship, and rarely indeed do we encounter prejudice or deliberate distortion in their work. Moreover, their judgments about historical causation are constrained by the same methodological rigor as we find in any other field of scholarship. It is only when we come to the larger issues of causation, matters of explaining historical progress over long periods and for larger regions, and matters of explaining profound revolutions in history, that Eurocentrism exerts an important influence on discourse, and often—as we will see—leads to the acceptance of poor theories in spite of a lack of supporting evidence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most European historians still maintain that most of the really crucial historical events, those that &amp;quot;changed history,&amp;quot; happened in Europe, or happened because of some causal impetus from Europe. (&amp;quot;Europe&amp;quot; continues to mean &amp;quot;Greater Europe.&amp;quot;) To illustrate this fact, I will list now, in historical order, a series of crucial Europe-centered propositions. All of them are accepted as true by the majority, in some cases the great majority, of European historical scholars. Some of them indeed are true, but that is beside the present point, which is to show that historical reasoning still focuses on Greater Europe as the perpetual fountainhead of history.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. The Neolithic Revolution—the invention of agriculture and the beginnings of a settled way of life for humanity—occurred in the Middle East (or the Bible Lands). This view was unopposed before about 1930, and is still the majority view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. The second major step in cultural evolution toward modern civilization, the emergence of the earliest states, cities, organized religions, writing systems, division of labor, and the like, was taken in the Middle East.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The Age of Metals began in the Middle East. Ironworking was invented in the Middle East or eastern Europe and the &amp;quot;Iron Age&amp;quot; first appeared in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Monotheism appeared first in the Middle East.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Democracy was invented in Europe (in ancient Greece).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Likewise most of pure science, mathematics, philosophy, history, and geography.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Class society and class struggle emerged first in the Greco-Roman era and region.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;This argument is given much weight by Eurocentric Marxists, since class struggle, for Marxists, is the central force in historical evolution.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. The Roman Empire was the first great imperial state. Romans invented bureaucracy, law, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9. The next great stage in social evolution, feudalism, was developed in Europe, with Frenchmen taking the lead.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;A form of political feudalism is sometimes conceded to have been developed earlier by the Chinese, but the great majority of European scholars, including most Marxists, believe that European feudalism was unique in representing a form of society that was a crucial, essential, stepping stone to modernity. See Chapter 3.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
10. Europeans invented a host of technological traits in the Middle Ages which gave them superiority over non-Europeans. (On this matter there are considerable differences of opinion.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
11. Europeans invented the modern state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
12. Europeans invented capitalism.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
13. Europeans, uniquely &amp;quot;venturesome,&amp;quot; were the great explorers, &amp;quot;discoverers,&amp;quot; etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
14. Europeans invented industry and created the Industrial Revolution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
... and so on down to the present.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All of the propositions in this list are widely accepted tenets of European historical scholarship today, although (as we will see) there is scholarly dispute about some of the propositions. All of this means that you and I learned these things, perhaps in elementary school, perhaps in university, perhaps in books and newspapers. We learned that all of this is the truth. But is it? Clearly, some of these propositions are true. Some others are true with qualifications. But some, as I will argue in this book, are not true at all: they are artifacts of the old tunnel history, in which Outside plays no crucial role and Inside is credited with everything important and everything efficacious.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Eurocentric Diffusionism ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Eurocentrism ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What we are talking about here is generally called, these days, &amp;quot;Eurocentrism.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Samir Amin&#039;s &#039;&#039;Eurocentrism&#039;&#039; (1988) for an excellent discussion of this notion. The word &amp;quot;Eurocentrism&amp;quot; apparently was coined quite recently, to assemble &amp;quot;European ethnocentrism&amp;quot; into one word. However, I (like Amin) do not think of Eurocentrism as merely a species of ethnocentrism, as the following paragraphs will make clear.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; This word is a label for all the beliefs that postulate past or present superiority of Europeans over non-Europeans (and over minority people of non-European descent). A strong critique of Eurocentrism is underway in all fields of social thought, and this book is certainly part of that critique.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is, however, a problem with the word &amp;quot;Eurocentrism.&amp;quot; In most discourse it is thought of as a sort of prejudice, an &amp;quot;attitude,&amp;quot; and therefore something that can be eliminated from modern enlightened thought in the same way we eliminate other relic attitudes such as racism, sexism, and religious bigotry. But the really crucial part of Eurocentrism is not a matter of attitudes in the sense of values and prejudices, but rather a matter of science, and scholarship, and informed and expert opinion. To be precise, Eurocentrism includes a set of beliefs that are statements about empirical reality, statements educated and usually unprejudiced Europeans accept as true, as propositions supported by &amp;quot;the facts.&amp;quot; Consider, for instance, the 14 propositions about Europe&#039;s priority in historical innovation which we listed above. Historians who accept these propositions as true would be most indignant if we described the propositions as &amp;quot;Eurocentric beliefs.&amp;quot; Every historian in this category would deny emphatically that he or she holds any Eurocentric prejudices, and very few of them actually do hold such prejudices. If they assert that Europeans invented democracy, science, feudalism, capitalism, the modern nation-state, and so on, they make these assertions because they think that all of this is fact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Eurocentrism, therefore, is a very complex thing. We can banish all the value meanings of this word, all the prejudices, and we still have Eurocentrism as a set of empirical beliefs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This, in a way, is the central problem for this book. We confront statements of presumed historical and scientific fact, not prejudices and biases, and we try to show, with history and science, that the presumptions are wrong: these statements are false.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How is it that Eurocentric historical statements which are not valid—that is, not confirmed by evidence and sometimes contradicted by evidence—are able to gain acceptance in European historical thought, and thereafter survive as accepted beliefs, hardly ever questioned, for generations and even centuries? This is a crucial problem for historiography and the history of ideas. To deal with it satisfactorily would take us well beyond the scope of this book, the main concern of which is empirical history and geography. Yet the problem cannot be avoided here. Libraries are full of scholarly studies that support the Eurocentric historical positions we are rejecting and refuting in this book. The sheer quantity of this work, and the respect that is properly owed to the scholars who assembled it, makes it certain that one cannot convincingly refute these positions with the factual arguments that can be presented in one book. No matter how persuasive these arguments may be, they cannot be placed, so to speak, on one arm of a balance and be expected to outweigh all of the accumulated writings of generations of European scholars, textbook writers, journalists, publicists, and the rest, heaped up on the other arm of the balance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, in this book, we must make a sort of two-level argument. The main level is the empirical one: What did happen inside and outside of Europe in the medieval and early modern centuries, and what connections did take place between the two sectors in that period? At the second level, we will look at some pertinent aspects of the history of Eurocentric ideas and the social context surrounding these ideas. This will be done mainly in the present chapter, which analyzes the nature and history of diffusionist ideas and concludes with a discussion of the process of social licensing by which these ideas gain currency and hegemony, and in Chapter 2, which rather systematically examines the most important arguments for European superiority prior to 1492 and to an extent discusses their historical genealogies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scholars today are aware, as most were not a few decades ago, that the empirical, factual beliefs of history, geography, and social science very often gain acceptance for reasons that have little to do with evidence. Scholarly beliefs are embedded in culture, and are shaped by culture. This helps to explain the paradox that Eurocentric historical beliefs are so strangely persistent; that old myths continue to be believed in long after the rationale for their acceptance has been forgotten or rejected (as in the arguments grounded in belief in the Old Testament as literal history); that newer candidate beliefs gain acceptance without supporting evidence if they are properly Eurocentric; and that, most generally, the Eurocentric body of beliefs as a whole retains its persuasiveness and power. But there is more to the matter than this. Eurocentrism is, as I will argue at great length in this book, a unique set of beliefs, and uniquely powerful, because it is the intellectual and scholarly rationale for one of the most powerful social interests of the European elite. I will argue not only that European colonialism initiated the development of Europe (and the underdevelopment of non-Europe) in 1492, but that since then the wealth obtained from non-Europe, through colonialism in its many forms, including neocolonial forms, has been a necessary and very important basis for the continued development of Europe and the continued power of Europe&#039;s elite. For this reason, the development of a body of Eurocentric beliefs, justifying and assisting Europe&#039;s colonial activities, has been, and still is, of very great importance. Eurocentrism is quite simply the colonizer&#039;s model of the world.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Eurocentrism is the colonizer&#039;s model of the world in a very literal sense: it is not merely a set of beliefs, a bundle of beliefs. It has evolved, through time, into a very finely sculpted model, a structured whole; in fact a single theory; in fact a super theory, a general framework for many smaller theories, historical, geographical, psychological, sociological, and philosophical. This supertheory is diffusionism.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Diffusionism ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When culture change takes place in a human community, that change can be the result of an invention that occurred within this community. Or it can be the result of a process in which the idea or its material effect (such as a tool, an art style, etc.) came into the community, having originated in some other community, in some other part of the landscape. The first sort of event is called &amp;quot;independent invention.&amp;quot; The second is called &amp;quot;diffusion.&amp;quot; Both processes occur everywhere. So far so good. But some scholars believe that independent invention is rather uncommon, and therefore not very important in culture change in the short run and cultural evolution in the long run. These scholars believe that most humans are imitators, not inventors. Therefore diffusion, in their view, is the main mechanism for change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The scholars who hold this view are called &amp;quot;diffusionists.&amp;quot; Whenever they encounter a cultural innovation in a particular region, they are inclined to look diligently for a process of diffusion into that region from somewhere else, somewhere the trait is already in use. For instance, the fact that the blow-gun is traditionally used among some Native American peoples as well as some Old World peoples is explained by diffusionists as being the result of the diffusion of this trait from the Old World to the New: the New World people, they believe, probably did not invent the trait for themselves. Why? Because they probably were not inventive enough to do so. A larger form of this same diffusionist argument claims that the great pre-Columbian civilizations of the Americas must be, ultimately, the result of transpacific or transatlantic diffusions, because these civilizing traits (agriculture, temple architecture, writing, and so on) were found much earlier in the Old World than the New, and Native Americans probably were not inventive enough to think up these things on their own. Some scholars, those who have been traditionally described as &amp;quot;extreme diffusionists,&amp;quot; believe that all civilization diffused from one original place on earth: some of them think that this original source of civilization was ancient Egypt, others place it somewhere in Central Asia (for instance, the Caucasus region—which scholars used to think was the original home of the &amp;quot;white&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Caucasian&amp;quot; race).&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See, for instance, Eliot Smith, &#039;&#039;The Diffusion of Culture&#039;&#039; (1933), Perry, &#039;&#039;The Primordial Ocean&#039;&#039; (1935), and Taylor, &#039;&#039;Environment and Nation&#039;&#039; (1945). Eliot Smith flatly asserts that the ancient diffusion process radiating mainly from Egypt and Phoenicia &amp;quot;continued for many centuries to play upon the Pacific littoral of America, where it is responsible for ... the remarkable Pre-Columbian civilizations&amp;quot; (quoted in Zwernemann, &#039;&#039;Culture History and African Anthropology&#039;&#039;, 1983, p. 15).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The debates between diffusionists and their opponents have been going on for more than a century in anthropology, geography, history, and all fields concerned about long-term, large-scale cultural evolution.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;On these matters, see Harris, &#039;&#039;The Rise of Anthropological Theory&#039;&#039; (1968) and Steward, &#039;&#039;Theory of Culture Change: The Methodology of Multilinear Evolution&#039;&#039; (1955).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; There are two basic criticisms of diffusionism.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Diffusionists hold much too sour a view of human ingenuity: people are in fact quite inventive and innovative, so the possibility that new culture traits will appear as a result of independent invention is actually vastly greater than diffusionists admit. So investigators should consider the possibility of independent invention in any given case, rather than assuming a priori that a diffusion process explains the situation at which one is looking.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Diffusionists are elitists. Every diffusion must start somewhere. An invention must take place in some one community before it begins to spread (diffuse) to others. If we accept the quite fundamental assumption that all human groups are truly human in their thinking apparatuses, and therefore broadly similar in their ability to invent and innovate—this assumption is known as &amp;quot;the psychic unity of mankind,&amp;quot; a nineteenth-century label that is quaint but still in use—we would expect inventions to occur everywhere across the human landscape.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Koepping, &#039;&#039;Adolf Bastian and the Psychic Unity of Mankind&#039;&#039; (1983), Stocking &#039;&#039;Race, Culture, and Evolution&#039;&#039; (1968), and Harris, &#039;&#039;The Rise of Anthropological Theory&#039;&#039; (1968).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; But most diffusionists claim that only certain select communities are inventive. In other words, most communities change only as a result of receiving new traits by diffusion, but some places are uniquely inventive and are the original sources of the new traits. The people of these communities are more inventive than are people elsewhere. The psychic unity of mankind is denied: some people, or cultures, are simply smarter than others. They are permanent centers of invention and innovation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is spatial elitism. If we make a map of this landscape, we find that it has a permanent center and a permanent periphery. For the &amp;quot;extreme diffusionists&amp;quot; the entire world was mapped out this way, at least for the pre-Christian era: the permanent center of invention and innovation was thought to be Egypt, or the &amp;quot;Ancient Aryan Homeland&amp;quot; (a mythical place located somewhere in western Asia or southeastern Europe), or the Caucasus, or some other supposed navel of the ancient world. But the charge was leveled more broadly: diffusionists as a group tended to imagine that some few places, or some one place, was the primary source from which culture spread to all the other places.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It should be evident that diffusionism is very nicely suited to the idea that the world has an Inside and an Outside. In fact, diffusionism was the most fully developed scientific (or pseudoscientific) rationale for the idea of Inside and Outside. That idea, as we saw, postulates one permanent world center for new ideas; cultural evolution everywhere else results, broadly, from the diffusion of new ideas from this permanent center. This is simply the diffusionists&#039; map on a world scale.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We come now to a fascinating anomaly. The critics of diffusionism, in the nineteenth century and even in the twentieth century, failed entirely to grasp the full implications of their critique. None of them denied that the world has an Inside and an Outside. While criticizing the diffusionists for their rejection of the principle of the psychic unity of mankind, the antidiffusionists nonetheless believed that cultural evolution has been centered in Europe, and they therefore accepted the idea—explicitly or implicitly—that Europeans are more inventive, more innovative than everyone else.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Often the antidiffusionist camp was labeled the &amp;quot;cultural evolutionist&amp;quot; camp, and the debate as a whole was labeled &amp;quot;diffusionism versus evolutionism.&amp;quot; But, as I argue here, evolutionists were to some extent diffusionists and diffusionists were to some extent evolutionists. Moreover, I want to use the term &amp;quot;cultural evolution&amp;quot; in this book in a much broader and much less controversial sense, as indicating merely the search for explanation in larger questions of historical and cultural change. A problem that is &amp;quot;historical&amp;quot; becomes a problem of &amp;quot;cultural evolution&amp;quot; when we ask, broadly, &amp;quot;why?&amp;quot; Some scholars, of course, are not comfortable with this usage of the phrase &amp;quot;cultural evolution.&amp;quot; For some it carries baggage of economic determinism or environmental determinism or technological determinism, or it signifies the notion of an invariant sequence of cultural stages through which all human groups must pass—but I mean none of that. Most cultural geographers use the phrase &amp;quot;cultural evolution&amp;quot; just about as I use it here.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; This is made explicit when they write about recent centuries, and particularly when they discuss the modernizing, missionarizing effect of European colonialism. It is also implicit in their writings about ancient times. These anthropologists, archaeologists, geographers, and historians of the second half of the nineteenth century and the present century do not focus on the Bible Lands, and their scholarly writings do not display any acceptance of religious assumptions. Yet Inside and Outside are explicit. They write about the Near Eastern origins of agriculture, of urbanization, and so forth. They then move smoothly to arguments about European origins of most of the rest of civilization.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
My basic argument is this: all scholarship is diffusionist insofar as it axiomatically accepts the Inside-Outside model, the notion that the world as a whole has one permanent center from which culture-changing ideas tend to originate, and a vast periphery that changes as a result (mainly) of diffusion from that single center. I do not argue that the formal theory of diffusionism, as it was advanced and defended by scholars in the nineteenth and early twentieth centuries, explains the Inside-Outside model, the mythology of Europe&#039;s permanent geographical superiority and priority. Rather, the theory developed as a result of broad social forces in Europe, and entered the world of scholarship from outside of that world—from European society. Diffusionist scholars were, in essence, elaborating and codifying this theory in the realms of scholarship within which they worked: realms like archaeology, world history, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before we proceed further I must post a warning: the word &amp;quot;diffusionist&amp;quot; has some ambiguities, and these should not be allowed to bring confusion into the present discussion. In any given debate as to whether a novel trait in a certain place was invented by the people of that place or was received from elsewhere by diffusion, those scholars who take the latter view are supporters of a &amp;quot;diffusionist&amp;quot; position, that is, they favor the specific hypothesis of diffusion as against that of independent invention. This does not necessarily mean that they have a general propensity to favor diffusion as a causal formula. Sometimes the specific issue can be a very major problem. For instance, some scholars argue that important West African culture traits diffused across the Atlantic to America before 1492. Whether they are right or wrong in this matter, they are not arguing any sort of Eurocentric diffusionism, nor do they necessarily favor diffusion over independent invention in other contexts. But most scholars who are consistent diffusionists are also Eurocentric diffusionists.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now I will describe Eurocentric diffusionism in somewhat formal terms as a scientific theory. That theory has changed through time, but its basic structure has remained essentially unchanged. I will describe what can be called the classical (essentially nineteenth-century) form of the theory, leaving until a later section of this chapter a discussion of the not very dissimilar modern form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Diffusionism is grounded, as we saw, in two axioms: (1) Most human communities are uninventive. (2) A few human communities (or places, or cultures) are inventive and thus remain the permanent centers of culture change, of progress. At the global scale, this gives us a model of a world with a single center—roughly, Greater Europe—and a single periphery; an Inside and an Outside. There are a number of variants of this two-sector model. Sometimes the two sectors are treated as sharply distinct, with a definite boundary between them. (This form of the model is the familiar one. It is sometimes called the &amp;quot;Center-Periphery Model of the World.&amp;quot;) Another form sees the world in a slightly different way: there is a clear and definite center, but outside of it there is gradual change, gradual decline in degree of civilization or progressiveness or innovativeness, as one moves outward into the periphery. Another variant depicts the world as divided into zones, each representing a level of modernity or civilization or development.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Both forms are sometimes combined; for instance, in the nineteenth century northwestern Europe was considered (by northwestern Europeans) to be absolutely civilized, Africa absolutely uncivilized, and all other areas (of the Eastern Hemisphere) somewhere in between. These matters are discussed later in this book.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The classical division was one with three great bands: &amp;quot;civilization,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;barbarism,&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;savagery.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basic model of diffusionism in its classical form depicts a world divided into the prime two sectors, one of which (Greater Europe, Inside) invents and progresses, the other of which (non-Europe, Outside) receives progressive innovations by diffusion from Inside. From this base, diffusionism asserts seven fundamental arguments about the two sectors and the interactions between them:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Europe naturally progresses and modernizes. That is, the natural state of affairs in the European sector (Inside) is to invent, innovate, change things for the better. Europe changes; Europe is &amp;quot;historical.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Non-Europe (Outside) naturally remains stagnant, unchanging, traditional, and backward. Invention, innovation, and change are not the natural state of affairs, and not to be expected, in non-European countries. Non-Europe does not change; non-Europe is &amp;quot;ahistorical.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Propositions 3 and 4 explain the difference between the two sectors:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The basic cause of European progress is some intellectual or spiritual factor, something characteristic of the &amp;quot;European mind,&amp;quot; the &amp;quot;European spirit,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;Western Man,&amp;quot; etc., something that leads to creativity, imagination, invention, innovation, rationality, and a sense of honor or ethics: &amp;quot;European values.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. The reason for non-Europe&#039;s nonprogress is a lack of this same intellectual or spiritual factor. This proposition asserts, in essence, that the landscape of the non-European world is empty, or partly so, of &amp;quot;rationality,&amp;quot; that is, of ideas and proper spiritual values. There are a number of variations of this proposition in classical (mainly late-nineteenth-century) diffusionism. Two are quite important:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a. For much of the non-European world, this proposition asserts an emptiness also of basic cultural institutions, and even an emptiness of people. This can be called the diffusionist myth of emptiness, and it has particular connection to settler colonialism (the physical movement of Europeans into non-European regions, displacing or eliminating the native inhabitants). This proposition of emptiness makes a series of claims, each layered upon the others: (i) A non-European region is empty or nearly empty of people (hence settlement by Europeans does not displace any native peoples). (ii) The region is empty of settled population: the inhabitants are mobile, nomadic, wanderers (hence European settlement violates no political sovereignty, since wanderers make no claim to territory). (iii) The cultures of this region do not possess an understanding of private property—that is, the region is empty of property rights and claims (hence colonial occupiers can freely give land to settlers since no one owns it). The final layer, applied to all of the Outside sector, is an emptiness of intellectual creativity and spiritual values, sometimes described by Europeans (as, for instance, by Max Weber) as an absence of &amp;quot;rationality.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Max Weber&#039;s notion of &amp;quot;European rationality&amp;quot; is discussed in Chapter 2.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b. Some non-European regions, in some historical epochs, are assumed to have been &amp;quot;rational&amp;quot; in some ways and to some degree. Thus, for instance, the Middle East during biblical times was rational. China was somewhat rational for a certain period in its history.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The varying conceptions of China, and also India, as semirational or intermittently rational or rational in some ways but not in others are discussed in Chapters 2 and 3.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Other regions, always including Africa, are unqualifiedly lacking in rationality.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. The normal, natural way that the non-European part of the world progresses, changes for the better, modernizes, and so on, is by the diffusion (or spread) of innovative, progressive ideas from Europe, which flow into it as air flows into a vacuum. This diffusion may take the form of the spread of European ideas as such, or the spread of new products in which the European ideas are concretized, or the spread (migration, settlement) of Europeans themselves, bearers of these new and innovative ideas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Proposition 5, you will observe, is a simple justification for European colonialism. It asserts that colonialism, including settler colonialism, brings civilization to non-Europe; is in fact the natural way that the non-European world advances out of its stagnation, backwardness, traditionalism.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But under colonialism, wealth is drawn out of the non-European colonies and enriches the European colonizers. In Eurocentric diffusionism this too is seen as a normal relationship between Inside and Outside:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Compensating in part for the diffusion of civilizing ideas from Europe to non-Europe, is a counterdiffusion of material wealth from non-Europe to Europe, consisting of plantation products, minerals, art objects, labor, and so on. Nothing can fully compensate the Europeans for their gift of civilization to the colonies, so the exploitation of colonies and colonial peoples is morally justified. (Colonialism gives more than it receives.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And there is still another form of interaction between Inside and Outside. It is the opposite of the diffusion of civilizing ideas from Europe to non-Europe (proposition 5):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Since Europe is advanced and non-Europe is backward, any ideas that diffuse into Europe must be ancient, savage, atavistic, uncivilized, evil—black magic, vampires, plagues, &amp;quot;the bogeyman,&amp;quot; and the like.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The &amp;quot;bogeyman&amp;quot; refers to the Buginese, a Malay people who fought fiercely against the Europeans and so were stigmatized in this way. The most famous fictional vampire, Count Dracula, came to England from Outside (a barbarous mountain region on the frontier of the Turkish empire).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Associated with this conception is the diffusionist myth which has been called &amp;quot;the theory of our contemporary ancestors.&amp;quot; It asserts that, as we move farther and farther away from civilized Europe, we encounter people who, successively, reflect earlier and earlier epochs of history and culture. Thus the so-called &amp;quot;stone-age people&amp;quot; of the Antipodes are likened to the Paleolithic Europeans. The argument here is that diffusion works in successive waves, spreading outward, such that the farther outward we go the farther backward we go in terms of cultural evolution. But conversely, there is the possibility that these ancient, atavistic, etc., traits will counterdiffuse back into the civilized core, in the form of ancient, magical, evil things like black magic, Dracula, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The main oppositions between the two sectors can be shown in tabular form. The following contrast-sets are quite typical in nineteenth-century diffusionist thought:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Characteristic of Core !! Characteristic of Periphery&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Inventiveness || Imitativeness&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Rationality, intellect || Irrationality, emotion, instinct&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Abstract thought || Concrete thought&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Theoretical reasoning || Empirical, practical reasoning&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Mind || Body, matter&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Discipline || Spontaneity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Adulthood || Childhood&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Sanity || Insanity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Science || Sorcery&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Progress || Stagnation&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What I have described thus far is, of course, a highly simplified version of the diffusionist world model. We will add qualifications and modifications as we proceed, and in particular we will see that there are significant differences between the classical form of diffusionism and the modern form of the model.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So much for what diffusionism is. What does it do? In this book I will show in some detail how diffusionism has shaped our views of history, both European and non-European. Later in the present chapter and in Chapter 2 I will show some of the concrete influences of diffusionism on theories outside of history, some in psychology, some in geography, some in economics, some in sociology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But this discussion will be more meaningful after a different question has been addressed. This is the question of how and why diffusionism became such a foundation theory in Western thought. To this question we now turn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Colonizer&#039;s Model ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Perhaps all civilizations have a somewhat ethnocentric view of themselves in relation to their neighbors, believing themselves better, brighter, and bolder than every other human community and constructing empirical theories to explain why this is the case, and to explain away embarrassments. Perhaps we would find the seeds of diffusionism in all these beliefs: the idea that progress is natural and calls for no explanation in &amp;quot;our&amp;quot; society but is unnatural or at any rate, less impressive in &amp;quot;their&amp;quot; societies; the idea that &amp;quot;they&amp;quot; progress by borrowing from &amp;quot;us&amp;quot; and imitating &amp;quot;our&amp;quot; ideas; and so on. But this does not add up to the theory of diffusionism, nor is it very important for an understanding of diffusionism. Diffusionism as I have been discussing it is a product of modern European colonialism. It is the colonizer&#039;s model of the world.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Origins ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Diffusionism became a fully formed scientific theory during the nineteenth century. The origins of the theory, however, go back to the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries in Western Europe, where a belief system was being constructed to give some coherence to the new reality of change within Europe and colonial expansion outside Europe. The conception of a two-sector world, the diffusionist distinction between Inside and Outside, emerged from a very old conception of Christendom and the Roman imperial legacy (which meant, for most of western and southern Europe, a common source of legitimacy for the political and landholding elites). But it is certainly not true that medieval Europeans saw Christendom as a sharply defined space, naturally in conflict with surrounding societies. Nor did medieval European thinkers have many illusions about the relative power, wealth, and technological prowess of Christendom as compared with Islamic and Oriental civilizations. But certainly they had some idea, not of a collective identity, but of a distinction between the lands inhabited by Christians, given divine guidance and protection for this reason, and the lands of non-Christians. Nevertheless, it was only after 1492 that Inside acquired a sharp geographical definition, less as a result of medieval ideas than of colonialism in the early modern period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
European ideas about European progressiveness, Europe&#039;s somehow inevitable progress, are also essentially postmedieval. Obviously, these ideas were being discussed during the Middle Ages, and certainly there was hope, prayer, and struggle for betterment, but medieval folk tended rather to see their society as being in a relative state of equilibrium; their religion spoke of the Fall, and of the need to accept existing conditions (and rules), while the reality of medieval life (particularly fourteenth- and fifteenth-century life) was not one of perceptible forward progress for the mass of people. But European thinkers of the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries were coming to conceive of history—their own history—as a progressive process. Real progress (or at any rate accelerating change) indeed was taking place in the communities occupied by these thinkers, and the climate of ideas was changing in a complex but close association with the rise of capitalism, the expansion of opportunity for individuals in many regions, and the like.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One of the main problems confronted by these early modern thinkers, both secular and religious, was the need to establish a belief system, an ideology, that would convince conservative sectors of the European community to accept the idea that progress is inevitable, natural, and desirable, and thus to accept changes in the legal system which would permit more rapid and widespread capital accumulation, to persuade the landowning classes to treat land as a commodity and invest their real holdings in risk enterprises, to introduce laws and practices to mobilize labor for emerging capitalist activities at home and abroad, to persuade Europeans in general to accept the painful changes being imposed on them, and so on. Equally important was the need to explain progress in ways that accorded with religion. This was done by seeing God&#039;s guidance of (European) history, and by conceptualizing progressive innovations as being products of the European mind or spirit and thus ultimately products of the Christian soul. (We will go into these matters later in this book.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus emerged the conception of Inside as being naturally progressive (diffusionist proposition 1), and as being progressive because of the workings of an intellectual or spiritual force, &amp;quot;European rationality&amp;quot; (diffusionist proposition 3). By the eighteenth century it had become the practice in secular writings to discuss causality in history and philosophy without referencing God and Scriptures, but the basic model of European progress as natural, as rational, remained unchanged in its essence; became, indeed, much fortified.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;On the history of the idea of progress in European thought, see, for instance, G. H. Mead, &#039;&#039;Movements of Thought in the Nineteenth Century&#039;&#039; (1936), Toulmin and Goodfield, &#039;&#039;The Discovery of Time&#039;&#039; (1965), Nisbet, &#039;&#039;History of the Idea of Progress&#039;&#039; (1980), and Bowler, &#039;&#039;The Invention of Progress&#039;&#039; (1989). It is true that the idea of progress as the normal condition was doubted by some thinkers during the nineteenth century (and especially in opposition to the idea of biological evolution), but this was a minor and intermittent countercurrent. See Stocking, &#039;&#039;Race, Culture, and Evolution&#039;&#039; (1987) and Bowler, &#039;&#039;The Invention of Progress&#039;&#039; (1989).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In none of this thought was there any real suspicion that non-European civilizations might have had much to do with the earlier, medieval progress of Christian Europe, or much to do with its modern (sixteenth- to eighteenth-century) progress except in the purely passive role of provider of labor, commodities, and land for settlement, and, marginally, in some traits of technology and art. Nor was there very much awareness that colonialism and its windfalls—inflow of capital, intensification of intra- as well as extra-European trade, increase in employment opportunities in mercantile centers and in the colonial world, and much more—was an important cause of European progress. Then, as later, the European conception of its own dynamic society attributed dynamism not to external causes but to internal causes, and to God. This relatively constant blindness to the importance of colonialism, historically and even today, will claim our attention at various points in this book.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The development of a conception of Outside proceeded in a more complicated way. The sixteenth-century Spanish debates about the nature of New World Indians—Are they human? Can they receive the True Religion and, if so, can they be made slaves?—was a crucial part of the early formulation of diffusionism, because it entailed an attempt to conceptualize European expansion and explain why it was, somehow, natural, desirable, and profitable, and to conceptualize the societies that were being conquered and exploited, explaining why it was, again, natural for them to succumb and to provide Europeans with labor, land, and products.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Huddleston, &#039;&#039;Origins of the American Indians: European Concepts, 1492-1729&#039;&#039; (1967), Williams, &#039;&#039;The American Indian in Western Legal Thought&#039;&#039; (1990); Hulme, &#039;&#039;Colonial Encounters: Europe and the Native Caribbean 1492-1797&#039;&#039; (1992); Gossett, &#039;&#039;Race: The History of an Idea in America&#039;&#039; (1963).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; European views of New World peoples were formed rather quickly because in that region the basic pattern of colonialism emerged quickly. The enterprise was immensely profitable from the very beginning, from the first great shipments of gold in the early sixteenth century (see Chapter 4). Resistance was rapidly overcome in Spanish colonies and surviving Americans were rather quickly forced to submit to colonial exploitation. (I refer here to the major centers of early colonialism, such as central Mexico, the Greater Antilles, and the Andes.) In the next century the profitability of slave plantations in Brazil and the Antilles, and the fact that African slaves could, in spite of their resistance, be forced to work and produce profit for Europeans, added further to the conception of Outside: these people were naturally inferior to Europeans, naturally less brave, less freedom loving, less rational, and so on, and progress for them depended on acceptance of European domination, hence diffusion. In sum, the New World experience, with Native Americans, Africans, mestizos, and mulattos, in areas of mining, large-scale estate agriculture, commercial plantations, and so forth, produced the kernel of the diffusionist propositions (2, 4, and 5), which assert that non-Europe naturally depends on Europe for progress and this is due to a lack of the intellectual and spiritual qualities that Europeans possessed. It also produced the diffusionist proposition (6) that European expansion is natural and leads naturally to the transfer of wealth from non-Europe to Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But these activities were taking place only in the New World and the slave-trading coasts of Africa. The civilizations of Sudanic, southern, and eastern Africa were not conquered by Europeans until (in most cases) the nineteenth century; the Ottoman Empire was not only formidable throughout this period, but was indeed expanding its territorial control in southeastern Europe at the same time that Iberians were conquering the New World. And the other great empires did not begin to succumb to colonialism before the mid-eighteenth century: European activities in nearly all parts of Asia and Africa were mainly matters of trade, with dominance of long-distance maritime trade, small territorial footholds here and there on certain coasts, and the like (see Chapter 4). Thus, in the sixteenth, seventeenth, and eighteenth centuries, the diffusionist model of Outside which had been applied to Americans and to the groups of Africans transported to America as slaves could not be applied to the civilizations of the Old World.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For these Eastern Hemisphere civilizations a limited and somewhat tentative form of the diffusionist model was accepted during this period. These civilizations were indisputably rich and technically advanced. Rationality in the sense of inventiveness was clearly present, or at least had been present in the past, when the great and impressive innovations (technology, architecture, banking, and so on) had occurred. What these civilizations lacked was the moral component of rationality, because, fundamentally, they were not Christians. These were &amp;quot;Oriental despotisms,&amp;quot; societies in which there was, naturally, cruelty, lack of freedom, lack of a decent life for the common people (while the elite wallowed in decadence and sin), etc. (We discuss this concept at some length in Chapter 2.) The moral failing necessarily led to an inability of these societies to progress in the present, the era when Europe is naturally progressing, although Europeans could not deny, even though they found it most puzzling, that these despotic civilizations had, indisputably, progressed in the past. (At times the puzzle was resolved by declaring that they had progressed in pre-Christian times, and had lost the Grace of God through having refused to accept Christianity.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;At times the notion was advanced that these civilizations had somehow evolved in antediluvian times and had not been wiped out in the Flood (see, for example, Keightley, &#039;&#039;Outlines of History&#039;&#039;, 1849). Haskel (&#039;&#039;Chronology and Universal History&#039;&#039;, 1848, p. 9) speculates that Noah migrated to China where he or his descendants founded the Chinese monarchy. &amp;quot;The early improvement and populousness of the east, seems to favor this idea.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;) Only in the nineteenth century, with the rapid colonization of India, Southeast Asia, interior Africa, and (as a kind of collective colony) China, did the diffusionist propositions about Outside, and about the natural relations between Inside and Outside, become generalized to all of non-Europe. It was in this late period, I think, that the final diffusionist proposition, the notion of counterdiffusion of evil and savagery and disease from Outside to Inside, become fully developed. The bogeyman (from the Malay Buginese people) came from Outside. So too did Dracula, whose homeland lay on the edge of Asia.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;From the mid-nineteenth century or perhaps earlier, the literature on the occult, on ghosts and monsters, and the like, tended to focus on extra-European origins or homes or sources of the witches, monsters, demons, zombies, walking mummies, evil spells (&amp;quot;black magic&amp;quot;), artifacts with supernatural powers, and so on, all of which have a tendency to diffuse into Europe as a kind of counterdiffusion, an undertow beneath European expansionism. See Brantlinger, &#039;&#039;Rule of Darkness: British Literature and Imperialism&#039;&#039; (1988).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Classical Diffusionism ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The nineteenth century was the classical era for colonialism, and the era when Eurocentric diffusionism assumed what I will call its classical form. After the Napoleonic Wars colonialism expanded and intensified with remarkable rapidity. Between 1810 and 1860 or thereabouts Europeans subdued most of Asia, settled most of North America, and began the penetration of Africa. Between 1860 and the start of World War I, the rest of Asia and Africa was occupied and the profits from colonialism, the value of capital accumulated in Asia, Africa, and Latin America, along with the riches flowing from newly settled areas of European settlement, expanded enormously. In the latter part of the century the rate of growth in colonial agricultural enterprise exceeded that of industrial development on a world scale, and other forms of development, such as the mining of nonprecious metals, were becoming important for the first time.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See W. A. Lewis, ed., &#039;&#039;Tropical development, 1880-1913&#039;&#039; (1970).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; There is profound disagreement as to how important all of this was for European social and intellectual evolution in this period. I will enter this debate in Chapter 4, but for the present it is sufficient to assert that the overall effect of European expansion, through colonialism in the narrow sense, through settlement, and through semicolonial economic dominance, was profound enough to create a very large intellectual model, the classical form of diffusionism.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By 1870 or thereabouts there was broad agreement among European thinkers about the basic nature and dynamics of the world. Few doubted that biological and social evolution—that is, progress—were fundamental truths, although evolutionary processes were more often explained in religious or metaphysical ways than in naturalistic ways, as in Darwin&#039;s theory.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Bowler, &#039;&#039;The Invention of Progress&#039;&#039; (1989), Stocking, &#039;&#039;Victorian Anthropology&#039;&#039; (1987), Mandelbaum, &#039;&#039;History, Man and Reason&#039;&#039; (1971).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It seemed clear that Europeans were naturally to experience permanent social evolution, that this had been God&#039;s or Nature&#039;s plan throughout history. Some historical thinkers described the general process in holistic terms, as the evolution of society or the state; others treated it in reductionist (in a sense, psychological) terms as an intellectual ascent, a matter of the steady advance of human reason, with capitalism, industry, and so on, treated as products of mind; but many thinkers (among them Herbert Spencer) saw no opposition between the social and intellectual models, treating progress as a kind of flowing stream, which carried with it an evolution both of society and of mind.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Spencer, &#039;&#039;The Man Versus the State&#039;&#039; (1969). The complex interplay between individualistic and holistic theories of historical progress during the nineteenth century is discussed in G. H. Mead, &#039;&#039;Movements of Thought in the Nineteenth Century&#039;&#039; (1936) and Mandelbaum, &#039;&#039;History, Man and Reason&#039;&#039; (1971). I try to show in Blaut, &#039;&#039;The National Question: Decolonizing the Theory of Nationalism&#039;&#039; (1987b) how most theories of nationality and national evolution emerge from one or the other of these intellectual streams, one essentially Kantian and psychologistic, the other essentially Romantic and Hegelian.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Thus by the 1870s at the latest the central diffusionist proposition, the notion of natural, continuous, internally generated progress in the European (or west European) core, was very firmly in place. Its truth was no longer really questioned by mainstream thinkers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There was, at the same time, a convergence of views about the nature and historical dynamics of the non-European world. By the middle of the nineteenth century the biblical time scale had been rather definitively rejected (though not yet in all history textbooks), and it was no longer necessary to argue that differences between Europeans and all other cultures had to have evolved in the space of a few thousand years unless they had been there from the start, unless, that is, polygenists were right and some human groups had been created separately from, and perhaps much earlier than, Adam and Eve. This gave room for wide-ranging theorization about the way cultural differences had evolved. Paralleling this change was a general rejection of the literal biblical beliefs about the original nature of human society. Culture was now (after midcentury) quite generally seen as a product of evolution from very primitive beginnings, exemplified in the notion of a primordial &amp;quot;stone age.&amp;quot; (According to the Old Testament, humans had possessed advanced technology, including agriculture and the use of metals, in the days of Genesis.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The reasons for the rapid crystallization of beliefs about non-Europeans are complex, but the most important underlying reason was the progress of colonialism. This produced two effects in particular. One was a flood of information about non-European people and places, such that, for the first time, a coherent—though highly distorted—description could be given in the European literature about non-Europeans, both civilized and &amp;quot;savage.&amp;quot; The second reason was a practical, political and economic interest in proving certain things to be true, and other things untrue, about the extra-European world and its people. The two processes were tightly interconnected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Colonialism in its various forms, direct and indirect, was an immensely profitable business and considerable sums of money were invested in efforts to learn as much as possible about the people and resources of the regions to be conquered, dominated, and perhaps settled, and to learn as much as possible about the regions already conquered in order to facilitate the administration and economic exploitation of these regions. The nineteenth century was the age of scientific exploration—Darwin in the Beagle, Livingstone in Africa, Powell in the Rockies, and so on—but the sources of support for these efforts tended to be institutions with very practical interest in the regions being studied. Paralleling all of this was the great surge of missionary activity that supported some exploration (including Livingstone&#039;s) but most crucially led to the gathering of important, detailed, information about ethnography, languages, and geography by hundreds of dedicated missionaries throughout the non-European world. Also of great importance were the detailed reports that colonial administrators everywhere were required to submit, reports providing information about native legal systems, land tenure rules, production, and much more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of what was learned about non-Europeans came from these sources. It is not necessary for me to dwell on the fact that the people who supplied the information were Europeans with very definite points of view, cultural, political, and religious lenses that forced them to see &amp;quot;natives&amp;quot; in ways that were highly distorted. A missionary might have great love and respect for the people among whom he or she worked but could not be expected to believe that the culture and mind of these non-Christians was on a par with that of Christian Europeans. A colonial administrator not only had cultural distortions but usually worked with economic interests and classes (European planters, mining corporations, zamindars, and so on) and consciously or unconsciously put forward views about common people, and about resources, that reflected the biases and concrete interests of these elite groups. Strictly speaking, missionaries and colonial administrators were in the business of diffusing Europe to non-Europe. Thus the entire corpus of information about non-Europeans that was gathered in this process has certain quite definite distortions. It was immensely valuable in spite of this fact, but the plain fact is that theories constructed from this information—and this includes the great bulk of nineteenth-century anthropological, geographic, and politicoeconomic theories about non-Europeans—are systematically distorted. The distortions are, broadly, those of diffusionism.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But colonial interest added an additional kind of distortion, a matter of shaping knowledge into theories that would prove useful for colonialism. Scientific and legal theories were constructed in general by policymakers and by intellectuals who were either themselves policymakers or were close to policy. (In England, for instance, an extraordinary percentage of the influential historians, social theorists, even novelists and poets, had direct connections with the East India Company, the Colonial Office, and other private and public agencies of empire.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Among them: Malthus, J. S. Mill, T. Macauley, and Thackeray. See Brantlinger, &#039;&#039;Rule of Darkness: British Literature and Imperialism, 1830-1914&#039;&#039; (1987). Also see Williams, &#039;&#039;British Historians and the West Indies&#039;&#039; (1966) and Said, &#039;&#039;Orientalism&#039;&#039; (1979).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;) I include under the label &amp;quot;theory&amp;quot; a wide range of general arguments, including the larger constructs of history.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the most general level, intellectuals were shaping theories of social evolution which were in essence demonstrations that the postulates of diffusionism are natural law. As we noticed previously, the nineteenth-century debates between those called &amp;quot;evolutionists&amp;quot; and those called &amp;quot;diffusionists&amp;quot; were essentially debates between two versions of diffusionism. A great range of theories in both camps were constructs aimed to assist in colonial activity, and to develop and strengthen the doctrine that European colonialism is scientifically natural, a matter of the inevitable working out of social laws of human progress (development of the family, law, the state, etc.). Also at the very general level, seminal works of the middle and later nineteenth century on ancient and modern history presented various sophisticated diffusionist ideas, mainly about the reasons for and the facts of Europe&#039;s natural and persistent progress compared with other peoples, those now being colonized. These historical constructs were important in building support for colonial activities among European populations; and later, as colonial educational systems appeared, for convincing the natives that colonialism was natural, inevitable, and progressive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Chapter 2 I will discuss a number of these diffusionist theories which emerged, or became concrete, in the nineteenth century in the complex association of scholarship and colonialism, focusing on those theories that today underlie the myth of Europe&#039;s historical and cultural superiority. Here I need only show how classical diffusionism arose in tandem with classical colonialism, and for this purpose a pair of representative theories can be singled out by way of illustration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One such theory was the postulate that non-Europeans have not developed concepts of private property in important material resources such as land. The theory asserted that private property emerged from ancient European roots, notably Roman land law and various putative Germanic traits relating to individualism; that other civilizations, lacking this history (and, by implication, lacking the mental and cultural qualities associated with this history), remained in a stage of evolution in which true individual ownership could not be fully conceptualized. These people, therefore, needed to have capitalism imposed on them. In fact, the theory was developed mainly by lawyers and administrators in the European colonial corporations and colonial offices, and had one very concrete purpose: to establish the legal basis for expropriating land from colonized peoples, on the fiction that the colonized had no property rights to this land because they had no concept of property rights in land.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Thapar, &#039;&#039;Ancient Indian Social History: Some Interpretations&#039;&#039; (1978) and &amp;quot;Ideology and the Interpretation of Early Indian History&amp;quot; (1982), and B. Chandra, &amp;quot;Karl Marx, His Theories of Asian Societies, and Colonial Rule&amp;quot; (1981). We return to this issue in Chapter 2.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Yet the theory became essentially an axiom in nineteenth-century intellectual thought. Even Karl Marx accepted it, and doing so produced a large theory about the evolution of private property—a major part of his theory about the origins of capitalism—in which it was argued (or rather assumed) that this evolution was peculiarly a European phenomenon, and that colonialism, for all its horrors, did at least bring about the diffusion of capitalism to the non-European world, a necessary though painful process for the non-Europeans. Thus even Marxism, perhaps the most antisystemic doctrine to come out of nineteenth-century Europe, was strongly shaped by diffusionism.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See in particular Marx&#039;s article, &amp;quot;The British Rule in India&amp;quot; (1979). In later work, Marx and Engels adopted a much more negative opinion about colonialism, developing to some extent the idea of colonial underdevelopment: see Blaut, &#039;&#039;The National Question: Decolonizing the Theory of Nationalism&#039;&#039; (1987b) for a discussion.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A larger form of this doctrine, the more general &amp;quot;myth of emptiness,&amp;quot; the diffusionist idea that a colonized or colonizable territory was empty of population, or was populated only by wandering nomads, people with no fixed abode and therefore no claim to territory, or lacked people with a concept of political sovereignty or economic property, had similar colonialist functions, and arose in a similar way. The same is true of a closely related doctrine, the theory of &amp;quot;Oriental despotism&amp;quot; (older in point of origin, but developed fully in nineteenth-century diffusionist thought), according to which non-Europeans lack the concept of freedom, hence suffer despotic governments that stifle all progress—until Europeans bring freedom to them in the form of colonialism (which ironically is the purest negation of freedom). These and other theories that arose from classical diffusionism are still employed today to reinforce the myth of Europe&#039;s historical and cultural superiority; we will discuss them in Chapter 2, which seeks to refute this myth.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The era of classical diffusionism was the era of classical colonialism, the era when European expansion was so swift and so profitable that European superiority seemed almost to be a law of nature. Diffusionism, in its essence, codified this apparent fact into a general theory about European historical, cultural, and psychological superiority, non-European inferiority, and the inevitability and absolute righteousness of the process by which Europe and its traits diffused to non-Europe. Diffusionism then ramified the general theory into innumerable empirical beliefs in all the human sciences, in philosophy, in the arts.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Chapter 2.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; And it applied these beliefs in particular cases, explaining and justifying the individual acts of conquest, of repression, of exploitation. All of it was right, rational, and natural.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Modern Diffusionism ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The nineteenth century, or more precisely the interval between the defeat of Napoleon and the beginning of World War I, was a time of relative peace and relative progress for Europeans. Colonialism fueled this process with resources, markets, cheap labor, and lands for settlement by Europeans, and colonialism resolved many of Europe&#039;s internal contradictions in the process. The idea that progress in European civilization and expansion of that civilization in space were different dimensions of the same historical force was the dominant idea of the time, and this was, of course, the central notion of diffusionism.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But all of this changed early in the twentieth century. The world is finite in size, so spatial expansion had to come to an end, and by 1900 all of the non-European world had been carved up into colonies, semicolonial spheres of control, and territories of settlement. This change of conditions produced a change in thought: the essential problem now was exploitation and the maintenance of control in the face of native resistance. Thus it became a question not of expansion but of equilibrium. At the same time tensions among European powers—some of the tensions were connected to conflicts over colonies—boiled over into general war among the European powers. Soon after World War I came the Great Depression. Then, immediately, World War II. Between 1914 and 1945, then, the minds of European intellectuals were focused not on the idea of progress and expansion, but on the question of how to prevent disaster: how to maintain, or return to, peace and prosperity. The code word was &amp;quot;normalcy.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The central notion of diffusionism did not fit this intellectual mood. The prevailing doctrines of this period were theories of stasis, of equilibrium, not theories of expansion. Economics dwelled on Keynesian ideas of equilibrium. In geography, the doctrine known as &amp;quot;regionalism&amp;quot; prevailed, the idea that the various parts of the world are stable, coherent, well-demarcated regions and tend to remain that way. Anthropology was emphasizing two equilibrium theories: &amp;quot;functionalism,&amp;quot; a model of social systems (and cultures) as stable and self-correcting systems, and &amp;quot;cultural relativism,&amp;quot; a doctrine that declared in essence that each culture has intrinsic worth. Anthropologists of course worked primarily among colonized peoples, and these two theories were closely integrated with colonial policy, mainly as a basis for policies designed to prevent native unrest while allowing European exploitation of land, minerals, and labor.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Asad, &#039;&#039;Anthropology and the Colonial Encounter&#039;&#039; (1975), and Temu and Swai, &#039;&#039;Historians and Africanist History&#039;&#039; (1981).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Thus equilibrium doctrines were very widespread, probably dominant, in European thought throughout most of the first half of the twentieth century.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Diffusionism, in this period, seems to have gone into a partial eclipse. History and geography textbooks were still sublimely diffusionist, in an essentially nineteenth-century mood, emphasizing the beneficial spread of civilization to Africa, Asia, and Latin America (&amp;quot;where our bananas come from&amp;quot;), the teleological rise of &amp;quot;the West,&amp;quot; and so on. In social thought, the doctrines of &amp;quot;extreme diffusionism&amp;quot; (discussed earlier) were still being advanced, and still debated.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Important examples are Eliot Smith &#039;&#039;The Diffusion of Culture&#039;&#039; (1933), Perry, &#039;&#039;The Primordial Ocean&#039;&#039; (1935), Schmidt, &#039;&#039;The Culture Historical Method of Ethnology&#039;&#039; (1939), Griffith Taylor, &#039;&#039;Environment and Nation&#039;&#039; (1945). See critiques in Radin, &#039;&#039;The Method and Theory of Ethnology&#039;&#039; (1965), Lowie, &#039;&#039;The History of Ethnological Theory&#039;&#039; (1937), and Harris &#039;&#039;The Rise of Anthropological Theory&#039;&#039; (1968).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; And it should not be thought that the decline of diffusionism as a doctrine of cultural dynamics implied a decline in prejudice. The notion that non-Europeans are less rational, less innovative, and so on, was as intense as ever: perhaps even more intense since this was the period of Nazism and like doctrines, and since genetic racism seemed, in this era, to be science, not prejudice. We return to this matter in Chapter 2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A new and modern form of diffusionism gained prominence after the end of World War II, in the period of collapsing colonial empires and an emerging &amp;quot;Third World&amp;quot; of underdeveloped but legally sovereign countries. This doctrine, generally known today by the title &amp;quot;modernization,&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;the diffusion of modernization,&amp;quot; arose in the late 1940s and the 1950s. Immediately after the Japanese surrender in 1945 it became clear that a number of colonies would gain independence immediately: liberation forces were now very strong and, in the wake of the world war, all of the colonial powers except the United States were now quite weak. All of them wanted to hold on to their colonies, the sources of great profit in the past and presumably also in the future. Each of the colonial powers maneuvered in its own way to hold on to its colonies, sometimes resorting to forcible efforts to suppress independence movements, sometimes conceding political independence grudgingly but peacefully where continued colonial control seemed patently impossible.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Here I am of course rejecting the view, common among European scholars, that colonies were relinquished voluntarily. This view has been rejected almost universally by scholars in the formerly colonial world. It may conceivably have been true for a few small islands from which profits no longer flowed to the colonizing power, but even such cases are debatable. It is worth noting that the United States has not given independence to any of the colonies it held at the close of World War II; has not even formally conceded the right of full self-determination (including independence) to Puerto Rico, the Virgin Islands, the Marianas, etc. The other colonial powers would presumably have taken the same position, had they had the power to do so in the face of colonial pro-independence forces; in such cases as the Dutch East Indies, French Indochina, Kenya, Angola, Mozambique, and so on, the colonizers tried to hold on to their possession by force of arms and failed. My view is set forth in Blaut, &#039;&#039;The National Question&#039;&#039; (1987b), chap. 4, and Blaut and Figueroa, &#039;&#039;Aspectos de la cuestion nacional en Puerto Rico&#039;&#039; (1988).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All colonies had been saturated during the classical colonial era with the ideological message that economic and social progress for the colonial people had to come through the diffusion of &amp;quot;modernization&amp;quot; from the colonizing power. &amp;quot;Modernization&amp;quot; meant the diffusion of a modern economy (with major corporations owned by the colonizer), a modern public administration (the colonial political structure), a modern technical infrastructure (bridges, dams, and the like, built by the colonizer), and so on. I call this an ideological message, but it was in fact believed in profoundly by the colonizers, who felt that their mission was, indeed, to diffuse their own civilization to the peoples who were under their &amp;quot;colonial tutelage,&amp;quot; and the fact that this mission produced wealth for their own country seemed only logical (recall diffusionist proposition 6). In the new situation the colonizers had to persuade the colonized that the &amp;quot;modernization&amp;quot; message was still valid. Doing so, they might convince the colonized to voluntarily relinquish the ideal of political independence in favor of the more pragmatic ideal of economic and social development under a wise and benevolent colonial rule. Or, if independence was insisted upon, this ideology would convince the people of the country now acquiring freedom that the only way to develop that country economically and socially was to retain the colonial economy, that is, to allow the colonizer&#039;s corporations and banks to continue their (profitable) work under the new regime: a system everyone today describes as &amp;quot;neocolonialism.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now all colonial powers began a major campaign to intensify the process of colonial economic development.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Representative examples include &amp;quot;Operation Bootstrap&amp;quot; in Puerto Rico, the Colonial Development and Welfare programs in parts of the British Empire, the increased funding for colonial agriculture and health departments, the establishment of colonial universities, and so on. These programs, regardless of their underlying political purposes (often hidden from the technical personnel involved) were, overall, very impressive.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; This should not be thought of as cynical or hypocritical: remember that diffusionism defined the colonial process as beneficial for the colonized as well as the colonizer, and the technical and other personnel involved in the new colonial development activities were utterly convinced that they were working for the advancement of the colonized people. At the same time, a parallel campaign was developed to further the same form of economic development in the independent countries, partly through agencies of the United Nations, partly through bilateral aid agreements.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Often this work was a direct continuation of colonial technical work, often with the same personnel, now &amp;quot;foreign advisor&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;United Nations expert&amp;quot; rather than &amp;quot;colonial technical officer.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The United States, now the leading economic power, began to establish its own aid programs in countries throughout the underdeveloped world. Again, this should not be dismissed as cynical and political: there was, in this period, a tremendously euphoric ideology that saw the end of the world war as the beginning of an Age of Development, a time when the advanced nations would work to bring—that is, diffuse—prosperity and advancement to the poor nations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Decolonization spread, and many liberation movements and newly independent countries refused to accept the neocolonial option, either ejecting foreign corporations (as did Indonesia) or opting for a specifically socialist society. This added a new impetus to the diffusion-of-modernization project. Efforts to bring about development through diffusion were intensified in hopes that their success would lead countries to reject the anticapitalist and antifeign options. But the choice of either of these two options seemed to imply a political alignment with the Soviet Union and China, so the diffusion-of-modernization project now became important as a matter of foreign policy in the Cold War. In 1959 the Cuban revolutionary victory gave the project very high priority for the United States, which now treated modernization and economic development, particularly in Latin America, as a matter of the highest priority, calling for very large investment.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Thus the Alliance for Progress, the Peace Corps, the elevated funding of technical and financial agencies of the Organization of American States, and the like.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Modern diffusionism is the body of ideas which underlay, and still underlies, this new set of conditions in the Third World. The diffusion of modernization, as it is carried out by public policy makers and private corporations and theorized by intellectuals (at least in the metropolitan, formerly colonizing, countries), is considered to be essentially the process by which Third World countries gain prosperity by accepting the continuous and increasing diffusion of economic and technological plums from the formerly colonial countries, a process that now, as in the past, is supremely profitable for the latter. In the diffusionist belief system, it is profitable for everybody, and also is right, rational, and natural, just as it had been a century earlier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ideas of 1993 are of course very different from the ideas of 1893, so it would be wrong to think that modern diffusionism is the same as classical diffusionism. Biological racism is no longer part of the model (as we will see in Chapter 2), and few modern European thinkers believe that non-Europeans simply do not have the potential to develop eventually to the level of Europeans. Religious undertones are largely absent, and the notion that a Christian god began things with the putative ancestors of Europeans, in the Bible Lands, and thereafter guided Europeans, Christians, to persistent superiority over all others, is no longer very popular. The historical greatness of some non-European civilizations is now fully conceded. (But with one vital qualification: less rationality, less innovativeness, than European civilization. We deal with this in Chapter 2.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After about a quarter-century of blind faith that the diffusion of modernization would bring about economic development everywhere, European experts and scholars now qualify their belief in this model, and in particular draw back from their former naive faith that the diffusion of modern technology, particularly in agriculture, is the key to economic development, the key to what used to be called &amp;quot;the take-off into sustained growth.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But, all of this notwithstanding, the basic propositions of diffusionism remain in place. Europeans still believe that Inside has one fundamental cultural nature and Outside another, now admitting Japan into the Inside sector. It is still believed that Europe in the past displayed a progressiveness not found in any other civilizations, except in one or two places, at one or two moments of history. Although European scholars no longer insist that this fundamental difference between a progressive Inside and a stagnant or slow-moving Outside will persist into the indefinite future, most of them write and speak about the present and future as though this fundamental dynamic will continue (again qualifying the picture to admit Japan, and perhaps a few small East Asian societies, into the dynamic of Inside). But today, as we will see in the next chapter, there is a growing, though still small, group of European scholars, mainly responding to the newer ideas that now emanate from non-European scholarship in postcolonial societies, who question the overall diffusionist model, and who deny its historical conceptions about the superiority of Inside over Outside.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== World Models and Worldly Interests ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Diffusionism is a poor theory. Diffusionism, as I argue in this book, is not good geography and not good history. Yet it exerts a tremendous influence on scholarship, and has done so for a very long time. How do we account for the fact that a bad theory can be so widely believed to be true, and for such a long time? We should briefly consider this question before we shift from the discussion of the nature and evolution of diffusionism as a theory to the discussion of empirical history, the topic of later chapters. It is important to understand how this (and every) theory interlocks with other ideas and responds to social interests.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Ethnography of Beliefs ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this discussion we will look at ideas as cultural facts: we will look at them ethnographically, as beliefs held by human beings who belong to specific sorts of communities and categories. We will see that a study of ideas-as-beliefs is quite different from an inquiry into the validity or truth of ideas, and that the study of ideas-as-beliefs is in some cases the more important and more basic of the two sorts of inquiry. We will see, in addition, that scientific beliefs arrange themselves in larger structures, belief systems, and that belief systems (like diffusionism) have certain crucial relationships of compatibility to one another and conformality to the values or interests of the groups of people who hold them to be valid. Pursuing this ethnographic exploration of the character of ideas-as-beliefs we will, I think, discover why the theory of diffusionism has had a life history that is more clearly explained by the life history of European society, and more particularly European colonialism, than it is by any intellectual or social process within the scientific community.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scientific ideas, and empirical ideas in general, can be examined in two ways. One is comfortable and traditional. It considers ideas in terms of their communicated meaning. Are they logical; that is, do they reflect an internally consistent argument? Are they valid in the sense that what they assert about the real world seems to have evidential support? This combination of logic, or structure of argument, and evidential basis is the kind of thing we look for whenever we evaluate scientific ideas—indeed all ideas that concern empirical reality. The second way of looking at ideas inquires about the people who believe a given idea, who communicate it to others as a belief, and about the people who listen and in turn accept the idea as a belief. The question whether a person believes in the validity of an idea is not at all the same as the question whether the idea is in fact a valid one. Questions about belief status are matters of ethnography: of finding out why beliefs are held by given people; how beliefs come to be accepted and rejected by these people; how given beliefs are connected in the minds of these people with other beliefs held by them; how new candidate beliefs are weighed and accepted or rejected; and how beliefs as such are connected to other parts of culture, including values, social organization, class organization, politics, and so on. What makes this kind of inquiry threatening is the fact that it can provide independent and reliable evidence that a given group of people holds a given idea to be true for reasons that have little to do with logic and evidence, for reasons grounded in culture.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Interestingly, we experience no discomfort and sense no threat when we read an account written by some anthropologist or cultural geographer about the beliefs, values, myths, and so on, of some small and obscure society in some far corner of the earth. Indeed, we expect an anthropologist to tell us more about the social or cultural reason why the &amp;quot;natives&amp;quot; hold to these ideas than about the validity of the ideas. In this kind of context it is quite normal to have a description of ideas that distinguishes between the matter of their logical and evidential basis and the matter of their cultural binding. But when this ethnographic approach is applied to what are called &amp;quot;Western&amp;quot; ideas, in the realms of science, history, and the like, the results are disturbing and the enterprise itself seems somehow improper.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ideas are, so to speak, surrounded by culture, and we can examine the surroundings and the way ideas are embedded in their surroundings. This is the ethnographic study of ideas. Now it happens to be a terminological convention in the field of anthropology to attach the prefix &#039;&#039;ethno-&#039;&#039; to a word designating a particular field of knowledge, such as medicine, botany, geography, and the like, when our purpose is to study that body of knowledge ethnographically. The study of &amp;quot;medicine,&amp;quot; for instance, is different from the study of &amp;quot;ethnomedicine.&amp;quot; The latter is an ethnographic field, asking what the medical beliefs are in a given culture, how these beliefs relate to the rest of that culture, and how to generalize cross-culturally about medical beliefs in all (or some set) of cultures. When we put together along with ethnomedicine all the other scientific fields prefixed by &amp;quot;ethno-,&amp;quot; we get, naturally enough, ethnoscience, meaning the ethnographic study of all sciences; more broadly, all fields of empirical belief. Ethnohistory is part of that corpus.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;On ethnoscience, see, for example, Conklin, &amp;quot;Lexicographical Treatment of Folk Taxonomies&amp;quot; (1969), Frake, &amp;quot;The Ethnographic Study of Cognitive Systems&amp;quot; (1969), Blaut, &amp;quot;Some Principles of Ethnogeography&amp;quot; (1978), and Spradley and McCurdy, &#039;&#039;Anthropology: A Cultural Perspective&#039;&#039; (1975). In my view, the categories &amp;quot;history&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;science&amp;quot; cannot be distinguished ontologically, although historiography is hardly an exact science.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; So, too, is ethnogeography.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The subject matter of ethnoscience is belief. Ordinarily we look at beliefs as they are enshrined in empirical statements, generally sentences that assert some predicate to be true about some subject. The fundamental, though not the smallest, unit of study in ethnoscience is the statement of belief and the person or group who makes—and holds to—this belief statement. For every empirical statement in social science there is an ethnoscientific question about its belief status and there is a profoundly different question about its truth status. The two questions do not forever remain separate, but they come together only at the conclusion of a long analysis. That analysis explains in the end why so many diffusionist statements in which historians and geographers firmly believe are really false.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The study of beliefs is also the study of belief-holding groups. Two very important points have to be made about belief-holding groups. A belief-holding group can be a group of any type. However, among the various types of belief-holding groups, the most fundamentally important are cultures, classes, and combinations that can be thought of as ethnoclasses. None of these types is an abstraction, except in the matter of defining units and boundaries. Cultures are highly variable from place to place and person to person, but the analytical unit itself is real and concrete. Its individual members also have concrete reality. There is no philosophical conundrum about the cultural whole &amp;quot;versus&amp;quot; its individual (human) parts in the matters we are discussing now. Thus there is an ethnoscience of each individual human being and also an ethnoscience of groups as collectives. Classes are a bit more problematic. However, most people accept the broad idea that there is a basic division between two class communities, one, the working class, the other an elite class, deploying political power and generally accumulating wealth. I will simply take it as given here that a rough class bifurcation exists in most societies of this and the preceding century, while conceding that it is not always possible to tell whether a given group in a given society belongs to the working (producing) class or to the elite class or to some ambiguous or uncertain grouping that does not fit comfortably in either of the two. One such problematic grouping that relates closely to the issues discussed in this book includes professors and others engaged in studying and writing about society and the environment. They are not members of the accumulating class, the elite, but scholars and writers are in most cases (not all) strongly bound to that class, and for all their intellectual penetration, discipline, and honesty, they tend to think, say, and write down ideas that are useful to the elite. This is true most pointedly for ideas of the sort related to diffusionism.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Culture and class intersect in ethnoclass communities. There is a crucial use in this book for the concept of an ethnoclass community. I will argue strongly that the elite groupings of European countries together, in spite of their cultural (and national) differences, are a basic and permanent belief-holding group, and that their beliefs form, to a large extent, a single ethnogeography and ethnoscience. This reflects the fact that, for the period with which we are mainly concerned, the nineteenth and twentieth centuries, these elites have had a common set of interests in relation to the working classes of their own countries and of the non-European world, and they have together underwritten the production of a coherent belief system about the European world, the non-European world, and the interactions between the two. The most important proposition in this book, in fact, is the assertion that diffusionist ideas are at the core of the single belief system generated under the influence of, and for the interests of, the European elite. Although it should not be thought that the science and history produced under the stimulus of this ethnoclass is &amp;quot;biased,&amp;quot; nevertheless we will see that the entire body of ideas concerning geography, history, and social science are strongly influenced by their ethnoclass patronage. Overall, and through the two-century-long flow of ideas, the product is a body of diffusionist beliefs which persist, and continue to influence social practice, although they are quite unscientific.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beliefs assemble themselves into belief systems. The difference is not exactly a matter of relative complexity. Most simple beliefs are just those ideas that can be expressed in simple declarative sentences (although some call for a poem or a painting), and which people do express as assertions, with more or less confidence as to their veracity. We are interested in three things about these belief sentences and the acts in which they are expressed. They are empirical (not purely logical or purely evaluative). They are expressed as true, or possibly true. And they are thought of by the belief holders as cognitively whole or discriminable, as, putting it crudely, &amp;quot;concept,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;ideas.&amp;quot; What makes such a hard-to-be-precise-about unit important is the fact that individual humans do not simply think up such ideas or concepts out of thin air or immediate perceptual experience. These unit beliefs tend to retain their character as beliefs through long intervals of time, often generations, and among large numbers of people. Still more structure is to be found in a belief system that consists of chains of statements connected together by implication (&amp;quot;because...&amp;quot;). This kind of belief system I will call, unoriginally, an argument. It simply needs to be noted that the chain of statements in an argument may or may not proceed from simple to complex. A tighter structure is to be found in those systems called theories. Simple beliefs, then, are aggregated in various ways into belief structures, belief systems. Each belief system, in turn, is assembled (psychologically) into various sorts of higher order systems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The highest level, comprehending all of the empirical beliefs held by a given belief-holding unit—including some beliefs that contradict one another—is the group&#039;s (or individual&#039;s) ethnoscience as a whole. Included here are all of the beliefs held to be true, or possibly true, about the external world, natural and social; beliefs about the self or person; and beliefs about technique—the self&#039;s capability to manipulate and influence the world. The ethnoscience, in a way, is an encyclopedia.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How does it happen that a new belief is admitted into a belief system? The question is not where new ideas come from but how they become validated, that is, given a kind of social license that admits them to the status of a belief, a belief that is at least accepted as a tenable hypothesis, a &amp;quot;reasonable idea,&amp;quot; and at most accepted as fact. Three quite distinct judgments—I think also distinct procedures—are involved in this licensing process. One is a judgment of compatibility. The second is a judgment of verifiability (the matter of empirical verification). The third is a judgment of conformity (or value conformality). Scholarly conceits to the contrary notwithstanding, verification is the least important of the three.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All the belief systems held by a given group are in one way or another interrelated. Some are tightly connected: one theory may seem to follow directly from another, for example. Normally the relationship is much looser. But all belief systems have one basic and common relationship with all other belief systems held by a group. They are compatible. This means that they can coexist peacefully in the same ethnoscience: they are not cognitively or culturally dissonant. Although beliefs may occasionally contradict one another, total lack of relationship is not in principle possible: directly or indirectly, all beliefs held by a given belief-holding group (or individual) are somehow linked together, and some judgment of their compatibility will be made more or less often. Typically, belief systems reinforce one another: &amp;quot;If P is true, it is reasonable to suppose that Q is true.&amp;quot; Or &amp;quot;If P is true, it follows necessarily that Q is true.&amp;quot; What counts here, because this is an ethnographic scenario, is the fact that the belief systems are judged to be compatible. The judgment of compatibility is not simply a definition, an assertion to the effect that when the group holds two or more beliefs at the same time they are merely labeled &amp;quot;compatible.&amp;quot; Compatibility is the outcome of an important social process. The process is most transparent when new candidate beliefs are introduced: when some new hypothesis is proposed within a belief-holding group and must, as it were, apply for a license. One of the most crucial tests it must pass is that of compatibility with existing beliefs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Compatibility is the loosest of all relations among theories and other beliefs within an ethnoscience. Compatibility is, in a sense, a bridge that must be built over gaps in the overall body of thought. One sort of gap is obvious: it is the incompleteness of knowledge. The other sort, less obvious, is highly significant for the argument of this book. Here, the gap among theories (and other beliefs) is actually filled, but not by argument. In ordinary language, &amp;quot;it seems reasonable&amp;quot; to suppose that one theory lends support to another, or one historical belief is explained by another. This matter of &amp;quot;reasonableness&amp;quot; bears very close examination, because &amp;quot;reasonableness&amp;quot; is that form of the relation of compatibility which allows the most absurdly unreasonable ideas to pass for well-founded scientific argument.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Broadly speaking, there are two important ways in which gaps are bridged with &amp;quot;reasonableness&amp;quot; in place of—and disguising the lack of—an explicit, defensible argument. One way calls for an insertion of value statements in place of belief statements; we will explore this device in the next section. The other device lies within the belief system itself. It substitutes, for an explicit argument, an implicit one. To understand how it works we have to distinguish between explicit and implicit beliefs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Implicit beliefs are usually matters &amp;quot;too obvious to mention,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;beneath notice,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;obviously true,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;taken for granted.&amp;quot; They are ordinary beliefs (and theories) which tend not to surface in discourse. There is nothing mysterious about most implicit beliefs; they are not somehow buried in the unconscious, or deliberately hidden from view. Some beliefs simply tend to be more often thought about consciously and verbalized than others, for a variety of unsurprising reasons. Those readily verbalized are explicit beliefs, those not, are implicit beliefs. There is no hard line of demarcation in a case of this sort, involving informal communication of belief.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But the demarcation is quite sharp in the case of formal, written and published, expositions of belief. The implicit beliefs are simply not written about. If they emerge in print at all, it is in the form of explicitly stated assumptions, or &amp;quot;axioms.&amp;quot; Here, the conclusion that terminates an implicit argument is exposed to view, but not the argument itself. Rarely is there any attempt to deceive or obfuscate. The writer merely takes it for granted that the reader holds the same set of implicit beliefs and is willing to accept the &amp;quot;reasonableness&amp;quot; of unsupported assumptions. Both share the same ethnoscience and the same value system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Implicit beliefs, as we will see, are the weakest link in the diffusionist world model. Throughout this book we will encounter diffusionist theories that simply hang in the air, unsupported by argument and evidence. In fact we will find, for large chunks of the diffusionist world model, that most of the propositions which would be needed to make these areas of belief coherent and sound are simply missing. In other words, relatively few of the beliefs are explicit and grounded. And these few are not connected together, so the fabric as a whole is incomplete. It seems complete only to those who are prepared to take a great deal for granted, who fill in the gaps with implicit beliefs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Verification is the matter of testing a candidate belief to see whether it fits the facts. There are various kinds of test and various controversies about the nature of verification, but such questions need not detain us. The normal sort of verification involves a search for evidence that would seem to support or contradict the new hypothesis, the candidate belief. The process is never complete: everyone, of every culture and community, has to be satisfied with partial confirmation (and disconfirmation) of empirical beliefs. For us the important point about verification is this: verification is never sufficient grounds for converting a hypothesis into an accepted belief. Nor is it even necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The judgment of compatibility is more crucial than that of verifiability, and this holds true among social scientists as it does among all other groups of natives. Part of verification is itself a matter of judging compatibility. The words and procedures used in verification, the criteria on which a test is deemed adequate, and much more besides, are drawn from the stock of existing beliefs, and the test of a candidate belief is therefore only partly a matter of direct confrontation with new evidence. But this is not the main point. In any belief-holding group, a new idea, a candidate belief, tends to be judged more on the basis of the way it fits into the existing belief system than on the basis of its directly apprehended meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The same thing happens in self-conscious scholarship. It has long been a truism that existing scientific beliefs tend to be defended in the face of new hypotheses that question them, and the defense is often fierce, bitter, and dogmatic. (Whitehead once called scientists &amp;quot;the leading dogmatists. Advance in detail is admitted: fundamental novelty is barred.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Whitehead, &#039;&#039;Science and Philosophy&#039;&#039; (1948), p. 129.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;) The truism was popularized by Thomas Kuhn in a dramatic scenario that he called a theory of scientific revolutions: in essence, crucial scientific beliefs gain a position of suzeriegnity, their supporters gain positions of academic power, and so the beliefs become entrenched and hold sway for long periods of time, even after evidence against these beliefs has massively accumulated. Eventually there is a historic break: a &amp;quot;scientific revolution&amp;quot; which overthrows the existing ruling theory or paradigm and installs another one, which, in turn, holds sway for a period of time.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Kuhn, &#039;&#039;The Structure of Scientific Revolutions&#039;&#039; (1970). More relevant is Fleck&#039;s &#039;&#039;Genesis and Development of a Scientific Fact&#039;&#039; (1979).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; But Kuhn&#039;s frame of reference (in his &#039;&#039;Structure of Scientific Revolutions&#039;&#039;) was physical science, and we are told very little about the historic process by which beliefs gain, and retain, hegemony in social science, including history and cultural geography. In these fields the process is fundamentally different. For one thing, influential beliefs hold sway for reasons that reflect much more directly the interests of elite groups outside of the scholarly field itself, and the replacement of one theory by another reflects mainly these external interests, not a Kuhn-like intellectual revolution within the community of scholars itself. Secondly, in these fields it is much less easy to attack old theories with new evidence, in part because scientific methods here are usually very inexact and in part because the collecting of evidence itself is guided and sometimes determined by existing beliefs. Thus it is that large belief structures, like diffusionism, persist for generations, untroubled by &amp;quot;scientific revolutions.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
People have a tendency, sometimes slight, sometimes strong, to believe what they want to believe. Another way of putting this is to say that beliefs are influenced by values, or that cognition interacts with valuation to produce what Tolman elegantly called the &amp;quot;belief-value matrix.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Tolman, &amp;quot;A Psychological Model&amp;quot; (1951).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The most straightforward (or at least modest) notion of &amp;quot;values&amp;quot; finds them to be judgments of preference, assertions of what is good and bad, right and wrong, liked and disliked, by individuals and groups. Values, like beliefs, are aggregated into systems. But value systems are very different from empirical belief systems. The latter, broadly put, assert things to be true (or untrue) about the world; the former assert things to be preferable (or not), hence they call for action upon the things uncovered by belief, and John Dewey was right in describing such assertions as &amp;quot;agendas.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Dewey, &amp;quot;The Logic of Judgements of Practice,&amp;quot; in his &#039;&#039;Essays in Experimental Logic&#039;&#039; (1916).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Viewed in this way, the realm of value is not autonomous and opaque. It is mainly a transition zone between belief and practice. Values are interests.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Values interact with beliefs in a belief-value matrix. A belief system and a value system tend to maintain some degree of consistency with each other during limited periods (except in times of very rapid social change). This somewhat regular relation between the two systems I will call conformality, and it works both ways. Statements do not ordinarily become validated beliefs if they do not conform to the values, and therefore the interests, of the group. But value judgments indicate preferences for future action, and a given judgment is likely to be rejected by a group, sooner or later, if the future action it calls for is flagrantly impractical: if the action clearly cannot succeed given the nature of the real world as depicted in the belief system. Obviously, matters are more complex than this and also less predictable. In any case, the dominant belief system for a group must in the long run conform to the value system, and when the two fall out of conformality, one or the other will be forced to change. Since values are the expression of concrete worldly interests, the belief system will tend, in ordinary times, to bend more readily to the value system, and to worldly interests, than vice versa.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The judgment of value conformality is a crucial part of the binding of belief to culture. The notion that beliefs are culture-bound is of course a familiar one, but the idea that this proposition applies fully to the belief systems of scholars is not really accepted except in the most general and abstract way and therefore in a way that does not usually permit an analysis of the manner in which a particular scholar&#039;s values (or interests) affect his or her empirical statements. The stronger proposition, that all new ideas in social science are vetted for their conformality to values, and more precisely to the value system of the elite of the society—which is not necessarily the value system of the scholars themselves—and that this process of validation normally and frequently leads to the acceptance and persistence of really unscientific ideas, is hardly even considered, even though it is normal doctrine in ethnoscience (normal, at least, when applied to natives other than ourselves).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But there is an even stronger proposition that I will defend in this book with concrete arguments and evidence: the proposition that our world-scale models, and many of our specific theories and factual truisms, are accepted mainly—and in some cases only—because of their conformality to the values of the European elites; that this has been the case since the beginning of the nineteenth century, and is true today. Many of these demonstrably false beliefs are built into the world model of diffusionism, and this is so because diffusionism is the central intellectual doctrine that explains and rationalizes the actions and interests of European colonialism and neocolonialism.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Conformality is really the crucial part of validation. This is not ordinarily a matter of the &amp;quot;establishment&amp;quot; suppressing free speech (although this happens quite frequently). The judgment of conformality is a complex binding process. At all times the dominant group (a class or ethnoclass) has a fairly definite set of concrete worldly interests. Some of these conflict with others, but all tend toward the maintenance of the elite group&#039;s power and position. Because of its power to reward, punish, and control, this group succeeds in convincing most people, including most scholars, that its interests are the interests of everyone. These interests are social, economic, and political agendas, and it is a simple transformation to insert the word &amp;quot;ought&amp;quot; and turn them into values. Viewed statically, the interests are always clear, and the values derived from them cohere into a dominant value system that more or less mirrors these interests. Hence we have at all times a kind of environment of values, surrounding and influencing the ongoing validation process in scholarship.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The way this influence is exerted is very complex in our society today, but it was quite simple and transparent in the last century, when the main lineaments of diffusionism and other beliefs related to colonialism were being sketched in. In those days, not only was it true, as Marx said, that the ruling ideas are the ideas of the ruling class, but it was also true that almost nobody but the ruling class, and its subalterns, had the opportunity to render those ideas effective, in the form of publication, lecturing at influential schools and universities, and participating in policy formation and execution. Conformality, in those times and places, was accomplished largely through the social vetting process by which only those people who adhered to the dominant value system were in a good position to tender hypotheses as candidate beliefs. I do not believe that the process is altogether different today, but it would take us far afield to discuss it here at length. We can simply take note of the background of most professors (very few of whom are the offspring of poor or minority families), the reward structure in universities and consultantships, and other elements that jointly produce this result: few professional social scientists want to propose candidate beliefs which do not conform. This explains why, in spite of the most rigorous adherence to scientific method and scholarly canons, our theories remain, to a large degree, conformal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In sum, validation proceeds by subjecting any candidate belief to three tests: compatibility, verifiability, and value conformality. Of these three, perhaps only conformality is essential (and then only in relatively tranquil times). Verification can be waived on occasion, provided that the hypothesis is both conformal to interests and nicely compatible with existing beliefs, be they explicit theories or implicit beliefs emerging as stated or unstated assumptions. Strong verification is, in any case, pretty hard to come by in the social sciences (a methodological fact that is often mistaken for an epistemological verity). In these fields, a judgment of compatibility is always rendered—if not on the candidate belief then on the person who proposes it—and it is most unusual for a new hypothesis or theory to become accepted as a belief if it contradicts the corpus of accepted beliefs in its field. But it is always the case that society and its elite need to be supplied with answers to pressing problems confronting them. So there is an important countercurrent. New hypotheses that display a touch of the novel and hold some possibility of solving an already recognized problem are encouraged, indeed rewarded. They must be compatible but not completely so.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is simply no way that a scholar, once installed in the profession, can prevent conformal values from creeping into his or her work. This in spite of the fact that nearly all are honest, careful, and competent. The reason why my argument seems, incorrectly, to be an attack on scholarship is because the problem is almost always seen in connection with explicit beliefs, and with consciously held attitudes. The fields that study human society are a weak infusion of explicit theory within a body of belief that is largely implicit. Scientific method prevents us from accepting the arguments of an explicit theory merely because we want to do so. But the main grounding for each such theory is its compatibility with other beliefs in the system, expressed as a matter of &amp;quot;reasonableness.&amp;quot; It is &amp;quot;reasonable&amp;quot; to accept certain assumptions (reflecting certain implicit beliefs) and not others. One theory seems &amp;quot;reasonable,&amp;quot; or plausible, because it is compatible with another, accepted theory, although no explicit chain of connection exists: most links in the chain are buried in the realm of implicit belief. Finally, it seems &amp;quot;reasonable&amp;quot; to seek verification for a hypothesis with certain observations and not with others.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It should be added that the disciplined work of social scientists usually prevents them from unwittingly validating a hypothesis on grounds of value conformality. The problem, and it is a severe one, is that, thinking that our explicit beliefs are not validated by value conformality, we let value conformality control our implicit beliefs. These then provide a bridge across gaps between explicit theories, rendering them compatible, or serve up the assumptions which provide the starting point for new explicit theories, formal and informal. Scientific and scholarly method demands rigor only for the explicit theories.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Diffusionism as a Belief System ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The discussion thus far has been designed to lay the foundation for an understanding of three aspects of the diffusionist belief system: its structure, its binding to certain groups in certain societies, and its evolution, this last aspect including the important questions of why diffusionism became prominent and why it has persisted. It would not be much of an oversimplification to say that diffusionism developed as the belief system appropriate to one powerful and permanent European interest: colonialism. From 1492 to the present the wealth drawn into Europe—meaning, as in all of this discussion, Greater Europe—from the non-European world has been a vital nutriment for the elite classes of Europe: for their maintenance of status within their societies, and for their progress. Whether this statement can be generalized to include all classes within European society, whether, that is, colonialism was an interest of the nonelite classes of Europe in most times and places, is a contentious issue which I do not need to address. I am merely asserting that (1) Europe&#039;s elite depended on colonialism; (2) Europe&#039;s elite was tremendously influential in the evolution of European ideas and more specifically European scholarship; and (3) Europe&#039;s elite held a permanent social interest in the creation and development of a conformal belief system, a body of thought that would rationalize, justify, and, most importantly, assist the colonial enterprise. As that enterprise evolved and changed, so too did the body of ideas constituting diffusionism.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of this book is devoted to a delineation and critique of diffusionist beliefs, so I do not need to review the nature of the belief system here. Suffice it to say, the doctrine ranges over all scales of fact, from world geography and world history to ideas about the qualities of individual human beings, European and non-European, and descriptions and explanations of particular local events. The scope of the diffusionist belief structure encompasses a fair share of European ethnoscience. That is, a fair share of the licensed belief statements in European ethnoscience are used within the diffusionist belief structure, although they are also used in other structures. (Some examples to be discussed in Chapter 2 are: beliefs about demographic behavior, about intelligence, about the origins of civilization, about the fertility of tropical soils.) These statements range from modest assertions of evidential fact to complex and elaborate theories, both formal and informal. They enter the diffusionist canon through all of the licensing procedures for belief acceptance discussed above. Over time, all of them go through the screening process of conformality with the value or interest of colonialism, or go through the indirect screening process that accords them the status of being compatible with other beliefs which are themselves conformal. Over time, the belief system accretes new diffusionist beliefs and discards those that contradict the canon or that have lost their relevance in a changing world. Since colonialism, in various newer forms such as neocolonialism, remains an interest of the elite, and since implicit beliefs go unnoticed and uncriticized, the process of adding, subtracting, and modifying diffusionist beliefs continues in the present. Were this not the case, the multitude of beliefs about Eurocentric history which claim our attention in this book would long since have been discarded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Diffusionist beliefs at the space-time scale that embraces the whole world and the whole of history, tend to form a rather tightly structured theory, as we saw earlier in this chapter. The theory, in brief, describes the essential processes that take place in an &amp;quot;inner,&amp;quot; essentially European, core sector of the world, describes those that take place in an &amp;quot;outer,&amp;quot; essentially non-European sector, and describes the modes of interaction between the two sectors, the most important of which is the inner-to-outer diffusion of innovative ideas, people, and commodities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We can describe this world-scale space-time theory as the &amp;quot;diffusionist world model.&amp;quot; It is the colonizer&#039;s model of the world.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The obvious question arises: what would we conceive to be a nondiffusionist world model? This would be a world in which the processes at work in any one sector are expected also to be at work in the other sectors. In essence, this model is driven by a concept of equal capability of human beings—psychological unity—in all cultures and regions, and from this argument it demands that any spatial inequalities in matters relating to cultural evolution, and more specifically economic development, be explained. Stated differently: equality is the normal condition and inequalities need to be explained. Diffusionism, in contrast, expects basic inequality between the Inner and the Outer sectors of the world—and of humanity. The uniformitarian principle is not one of uniformity; it is the principle of human equality.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At space-time scales smaller than the world, the diffusionist belief system is very diffuse, parts of it hanging together as formally elegant theories, parts of it floating around as compatible but weakly connected belief statements. It would take us far beyond the scope of this book to attempt a description of all of the parts, levels, and subsystems in the diffusionist model as a whole, ranging upward and downward from the world model to the level of particular space-time event descriptions. But we can make a start.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Notes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. In this book the word &amp;quot;Europe&amp;quot; refers to the continent of Europe and to regions dominated by European culture elsewhere, regions like the United States and Canada.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. This quick survey of 150 years or so of world history textbooks is, of course, very schematic and impressionistic. Some further comments may be of use. In textbooks of the first period, around 1850 (plus or minus a decade or so), the original home of Man is often stated to be the Garden of Eden, which is located by different textbook writers in different parts of western Asia. For instance: somewhere east of Canaan and near Mesopotamia (Robbins, &#039;&#039;The World Displayed in its History and Geography&#039;&#039;, 1832, p. 13); somewhere in the &amp;quot;healthful&amp;quot; mountains between the Caspian Sea and Kashmir or Tibet (Müller, &#039;&#039;The History of the World to 1783&#039;&#039;, 1842, pp. 27, 43-44); perhaps near the borders of the Mediterranean Sea (Tytler, &#039;&#039;Universal history, From the Creation to the beginning of the Eighteenth Century&#039;&#039;, vol. 1, 1844, p. 17); in the Vale of Kashmir (Willard, &#039;&#039;Universal History in Perspective&#039;&#039;, 1845, p. 34); somewhere between the Caucasus Mountains and the Himalayas (Keightley, &#039;&#039;Outlines of History&#039;&#039;, 1849); in the Himalayas (Weber, &#039;&#039;Outlines of Universal History&#039;&#039;, 1853, p. 6); in Armenia (Collier, &#039;&#039;Outlines of General History&#039;&#039;, 1868). There seems to be a kind of median location of Eden near the Caucasus Mountains, which was also, by no coincidence, the supposed place of origin of the &amp;quot;Caucasian race.&amp;quot; Noah, of course, began postdeluvian history on Mt. Ararat, in Armenia (also roughly in the region of the Caucasus). Noah is supposed to have migrated then to Europe (Whelpley, &#039;&#039;A Compound of History, From the Earliest Times&#039;&#039;, vol. 1, 1844, p. 10), or Mesopotamia (Robbins, 1832, p. 20), or Palestine, or some other part of the Bible Lands. Noah&#039;s three sons are supposed, then, to have dispersed and to have founded the branches of mankind—the first great diffusion process. In most textbooks of this period history tends to move west; some textbooks present the Hegelian notion that history proceeds inexorably westward, following the sun, with the implication that the United States, farther west still, will replace Europe as the next center of world civilization.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It was widely believed in this period that nonwhites were not truly and fully human. One version of this theory, the notion of &amp;quot;polygenesis,&amp;quot; claimed that God had created true humans in the Garden of Eden and other races—or at least the &amp;quot;black race&amp;quot;—in other places and times. This theory questioned the standard interpretation of the Old Testament (that everyone is descended from Adam and Eve), so, not surprisingly, it was not stated as truth in the textbooks I consulted. (I have not, however, looked at textbooks used in the antebellum South, and the theory of polygenesis was most popular in slaveholding regions, as an ideological grounding for the treatment of blacks as things rather than people.) Yet polygenesis was important enough to be mentioned and then rejected—in favor of the view that all humans are descendants of Adam and Eve—in some textbooks, down to the end of the century (see, for example, Dew, &#039;&#039;A Digest of the Laws, Customs, Manners, and Institutions of the Ancient and Modern Nations&#039;&#039;, 1853; Fisher, &#039;&#039;Outlines of Universal History&#039;&#039;, 1885; Duruy and Grosvenor, &#039;&#039;A General History of the World&#039;&#039;, 1901). But polygenesis was not needed; the belief that nonwhites are inferior to whites is asserted in one way or another in all the textbooks I examined. The theory of &amp;quot;degeneration&amp;quot; served just as well as polygenesis. It was the notion that the descendants of Ham, and perhaps other biblical peoples, migrated away from the Bible Lands, eastward and southward, and degenerated from civilization toward savagery, or even lower, as they did so, because they had not accepted Christ, or because they migrated into inferior environments, or for some other reason. (See, for instance, Keightley, 1849, 5-6: &amp;quot;the savage is a degeneration from the civilized life,&amp;quot; and Africans are near the apes.) Degeneration was asserted in some textbooks, but in most the simple fact of white superiority was stated and left unexplained. The history of the world is, in general, the history of the white race, or the Semitic and Aryan peoples (see below). For times later than the Roman era, non-Europe is scarcely discussed, except as a backdrop for discussions of the Crusades, the building of colonial empires, and the like. (See Harris, &#039;&#039;The Rise of Anthropological Theory&#039;&#039;, 1968, for an excellent discussion of polygenesis and degeneration.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nearly all textbooks of the period around 1900 (give or take a few years) accepted the newer scientific theories about the age of the earth and the fact of biological evolution (though not the Darwinian theory of evolution). The biblical account of human history, however, was retained in many books, although fewer of them accepted the formerly standard Old Testament chronologies (for instance, that things began in 4004 B.C.). Books of this period tended to present the so-called &amp;quot;Aryan theory,&amp;quot; a theory derived from philology but expanded into a theory of culture history. Earlier philologists had identified an &amp;quot;Aryan&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Indo-European&amp;quot; language family, and also a &amp;quot;Semitic&amp;quot; family (which many authorities, including textbook writers, identified with Noah&#039;s sons Japheth and Shem, respectively). The white race consists of these two peoples. One branch of the Aryans supposedly migrated west into Europe (from the supposed &amp;quot;Aryan hearth,&amp;quot; somewhere southwest or northwest of the Caucasus). These were progressive, energetic people, who founded European civilization mainly after they had acquired Christianity from the Semites, who invented the first barbaric civilizations and monotheism but then stagnated into a dreamy, decadent, unambitious culture and thereafter ceased to advance civilization. No other culture, apart from these two, had much to do with history. (According to Freeman, &#039;&#039;General Sketch of History&#039;&#039;, 1872, p. 2, history &amp;quot;in the highest and truest sense is the history of the Aryan nations of Europe&amp;quot;; see also Collier, 1868; Swinton, &#039;&#039;Outlines of the World&#039;s History&#039;&#039;, 1874; Gilman, &#039;&#039;First Steps in General History&#039;&#039;, 1874; Anderson, &#039;&#039;New Manual of General History&#039;&#039;, 1882; Steele and Steele, &#039;&#039;A Brief History of Ancient, Medieval, and Modern Peoples&#039;&#039;, 1883; Fisher, 1896; Quackenbos, &#039;&#039;Illustrated School History of the World&#039;&#039;, 1889; Thalheimer, &#039;&#039;Outline of General History for the Use of Schools&#039;&#039;, 1883; Sanderson, &#039;&#039;History of the World from the Earliest Time to the Year 1898&#039;&#039;; Duruy and Grosvenor, 1901. Ploetz and Tillinghast presented this theory in &#039;&#039;Epitome of Ancient, Medieval, and Modern History&#039;&#039;, first published in 1883, in its many editions down to 1925 when, in an edition edited by H. E. Barnes, the theory was finally eliminated.) See Bernal&#039;s &#039;&#039;Black Athena&#039;&#039; (1987, 1991) for an insightful discussion of the Aryan theory and related topics in the history of European thought.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because the Old Testament spoke of agriculture—Cain knew farming and Abraham herded domesticated animals—the history textbooks tended not to address the problem of where agriculture was invented until very late in the nineteenth century, the period when science was beginning to deal with this problem. Some scientists and some textbook writers then began to speculate that, just possibly, agriculture was as old in continental Europe as it was in western Asia and Egypt. (From the point of view of science, see Joly, &#039;&#039;Man Before Metals&#039;&#039;, 1897.) But the idea that agriculture originated in the Bible Lands remained dominant although now it was viewed (by most) as an invention, not an artifact of original creation. The ethnographic fact that some tribal peoples (for instance, in Australia) did not practice agriculture was commonly explained, in the textbooks of the earlier nineteenth century, in terms of the theory of degeneration: their ancestors had somehow lost the art. Later in the century it became more common to use the diffusionist conception that agriculture had been invented by west Asian or (conceivably) European peoples, then diffused outward over the rest of the world, and cultures that did not practice it in modern times simply had not yet acquired it, either because of their isolation or because they were too stupid to take it up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Orient Express was a famous train that ran between western Europe and western Asia. Although various routes were used in different eras, the basic line ran from Constantinople (Istanbul) through Greece to northern Italy or Austria, then on to France, and (via Ostend) England. Most of the history textbooks write about world history as though it marched northwesterward, rather like the westbound Orient Express, with stations (so to speak) in Athens, Rome, Paris, and London. (See Chapter 2 for further discussion of the Orient Express model.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. In nineteenth-century world history textbooks, Turkey was given some attention because of its political involvement with European affairs. World geography, in contrast to world history, always covered the entire world, and textbooks as well as the great multivolume descriptive geographies (like Reclus&#039;s classic 19-volume &#039;&#039;Nouvelle Géographie Universelle&#039;&#039;, published between 1876 and 1894) gave considerable attention to Asia, Africa, and Latin America. This should not mislead us, however. One of the primary functions of geography throughout this entire period was to teach European children what they needed to know about non-Europe in order to participate in their countries&#039; imperial and commercial activities in these regions. See Hudson, &amp;quot;The New Geography and the New Imperialism: 1870-1918&amp;quot; (1977) and McKay, &amp;quot;Colonialism in the French Geographical Movement&amp;quot; (1943), on the close relation between geography and colonial activities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. The character of this newer approach can be seen if we look at two well-known modern university-level texts, one written by W. H. McNeill of the University of Chicago (&#039;&#039;A World History&#039;&#039;, 3rd ed., 1979), the other by J. M. Roberts of Oxford University (&#039;&#039;The Hutchinson History of the World&#039;&#039;, 2d ed., 1987; published in the United States as &#039;&#039;The Penguin History of the World&#039;&#039;). For pre-Christian-era world history, more than three-quarters of the place-name mentions in both books are places in Europe and the Middle East (including North Africa); less than one-quarter of the place-name mentions are places in other parts of the world and only about 1% are in Africa. For the Christian era to A.D. 1491 there is significant divergence between the two books. In Roberts&#039;s text, European and Middle Eastern places constitute about 85% of place-name mentions. In McNeill&#039;s text, European and Middle Eastern places constitute only 60% of the place names mentioned, a significant departure from the older tradition although still well out of proportion to this region&#039;s size in area and population. (Sub-Saharan Africa accounts for only 2% of mentions for the period A.D. 1-1491.) In both books, therefore, the region I have been calling &amp;quot;Greater Europe&amp;quot; has considerably lower salience for pre-1492 history than was typically the case in older world history textbooks. As to explanation, however, both books retain much of the traditional perspective. Roberts gives almost no causal role to the cultures and regions of the world other than Europe and the Middle East (including North Africa) for any period prior to 1492. McNeill gives considerable weight to East Asia and some to South Asia for certain historical periods, but almost all of the world history-making forces emanate from Europe, western Asia, and North Africa for the period before 1492. (An exception is the Black Death, which, according to McNeill, swept westward into these regions from farther Asia. On this matter, see also McNeill&#039;s &#039;&#039;Plagues and Peoples&#039;&#039;, 1976.) Examples of the Eurocentric explanations offered by both authors will be given in Chapter 2 of the present book.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is, however, insufficient to look only at those present-day textbooks that are clearly identified as &amp;quot;world history&amp;quot; textbooks. Quite frequently university courses covering the subject of world history use history textbooks that carry titles like &amp;quot;The History of Western Civilization.&amp;quot; (See, for instance, Lerner, et al., &#039;&#039;Western Civilizations: Their History and Their Culture&#039;&#039;, 1988; Kagan, et al., &#039;&#039;The Western Heritage&#039;&#039;, 1987; Chambers, et al., &#039;&#039;The Western Experience&#039;&#039;, 1987.) If such a textbook neglects the non-Western world, there can be no complaint that it is misleading: the title clearly specifies &amp;quot;West&amp;quot; not &amp;quot;World.&amp;quot; But if the course is designated as &amp;quot;world history&amp;quot; and the textbook is designated as &amp;quot;Western history,&amp;quot; then we have a problem. The worst scenario would be one in which world-history teaching continues to be Eurocentric history in disguise. I do not know of any research which tests the following hypotheses: (1) Given that, today, historians are sensitive to the need to avoid Eurocentric bias in the teaching of world history, do some of them simply change the title to &amp;quot;Western&amp;quot; so that Eurocentrism becomes, then, licit? And (2) is it possible that there is a trend away from the teaching of &amp;quot;World&amp;quot; history and toward &amp;quot;Western&amp;quot; (etc.) history and that this trend reflects a reaction (or adjustment) to present-day demands for nontechnocentrism and &amp;quot;fairness?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. A school textbook is truly a key social document, a kind of modern stele. In the typical case, a book becomes accepted as a high school (or lower-level) textbook only after it has been reviewed very carefully by the publisher, school boards, and administrators, all of whom are intensely sensitive to the need to print acceptable doctrine; they are concerned to make it certain that children will read only those facts in their textbook which are considered to be acceptable as facts by the opinion-forming elite of the culture. The resulting textbook is, therefore, less an ordinary authored book than a vetted social statement of what is considered valid and acceptable for entry into the mind of the child. For this reason, research on textbooks (including college textbooks, in which the same process is at work, though more subtly) is, in fact, ethnographic research. It tells us about the belief system of the opinion-forming elite of the culture as a whole. Therefore, geography texts in the United States are really ethnogeography documents. Likewise, history texts are really ethnohistory documents. They are probably as useful as cultural artifacts as any old potsherd or inscription. See the final section of this chapter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. This argument is given much weight by Eurocentric Marxists, since class struggle, for Marxists, is the central force in historical evolution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. A form of political feudalism is sometimes conceded to have been developed earlier by the Chinese, but the great majority of European scholars, including most Marxists, believe that European feudalism was unique in representing a form of society that was a crucial, essential, stepping stone to modernity. See Chapter 3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. See Samir Amin&#039;s &#039;&#039;Eurocentrism&#039;&#039; (1988) for an excellent discussion of this notion. The word &amp;quot;Eurocentrism&amp;quot; apparently was coined quite recently, to assemble &amp;quot;European ethnocentrism&amp;quot; into one word. However, I (like Amin) do not think of Eurocentrism as merely a species of ethnocentrism, as the following paragraphs will make clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9. I use the word &amp;quot;community&amp;quot; to refer to any social unit, of any size. In this discussion, for the sake of simplicity, the &amp;quot;communities&amp;quot; will be thought of as villages distributed across a rural landscape. I neglect here the cases in which culture change results from the combination of an independent invention and a diffusion event. See my &amp;quot;Two Views of Diffusion&amp;quot; (1977) and &amp;quot;Diffusionism: A Uniformitarian Critique&amp;quot; (1987a).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
10. See Jett, &amp;quot;Further Information on the Geography of the Blowgun and Its Implications for Transoceanic Contact&amp;quot; (1991); also see Carter, &#039;&#039;Man and the Land&#039;&#039; (1968), and Edmonson, &amp;quot;Neolithic Diffusion Rates&amp;quot; (1961).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
11. See, for instance, Eliot Smith, &#039;&#039;The Diffusion of Culture&#039;&#039; (1933), Perry, &#039;&#039;The Primordial Ocean&#039;&#039; (1935), and Taylor, &#039;&#039;Environment and Nation&#039;&#039; (1945). Eliot Smith flatly asserts that the ancient diffusion process radiating mainly from Egypt and Phoenicia &amp;quot;continued for many centuries to play upon the Pacific littoral of America, where it is responsible for ... the remarkable Pre-Columbian civilizations&amp;quot; (quoted in Zwernemann, &#039;&#039;Culture History and African Anthropology&#039;&#039;, 1983, p. 15).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
12. On these matters, see Harris, &#039;&#039;The Rise of Anthropological Theory&#039;&#039; (1968) and Steward, &#039;&#039;Theory of Culture Change: The Methodology of Multilinear Evolution&#039;&#039; (1955).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
13. See Koepping, &#039;&#039;Adolf Bastian and the Psychic Unity of Mankind&#039;&#039; (1983), Stocking &#039;&#039;Race, Culture, and Evolution&#039;&#039; (1968), and Harris, &#039;&#039;The Rise of Anthropological Theory&#039;&#039; (1968).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
14. Often the antidiffusionist camp was labeled the &amp;quot;cultural evolutionist&amp;quot; camp, and the debate as a whole was labeled &amp;quot;diffusionism versus evolutionism.&amp;quot; But, as I argue here, evolutionists were to some extent diffusionists and diffusionists were to some extent evolutionists. Moreover, I want to use the term &amp;quot;cultural evolution&amp;quot; in this book in a much broader and much less controversial sense, as indicating merely the search for explanation in larger questions of historical and cultural change. A problem that is &amp;quot;historical&amp;quot; becomes a problem of &amp;quot;cultural evolution&amp;quot; when we ask, broadly, &amp;quot;why?&amp;quot; Some scholars, of course, are not comfortable with this usage of the phrase &amp;quot;cultural evolution.&amp;quot; For some it carries baggage of economic determinism or environmental determinism or technological determinism, or it signifies the notion of an invariant sequence of cultural stages through which all human groups must pass—but I mean none of that. Most cultural geographers use the phrase &amp;quot;cultural evolution&amp;quot; just about as I use it here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
15. Both forms are sometimes combined; for instance, in the nineteenth century northwestern Europe was considered (by northwestern Europeans) to be absolutely civilized, Africa absolutely uncivilized, and all other areas (of the Eastern Hemisphere) somewhere in between. These matters are discussed later in this book.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
16. Max Weber&#039;s notion of &amp;quot;European rationality&amp;quot; is discussed in Chapter 2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
17. The varying conceptions of China, and also India, as semirational or intermittently rational or rational in some ways but not in others are discussed in Chapters 2 and 3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
18. The &amp;quot;bogeyman&amp;quot; refers to the Buginese, a Malay people who fought fiercely against the Europeans and so were stigmatized in this way. The most famous fictional vampire, Count Dracula, came to England from Outside (a barbarous mountain region on the frontier of the Turkish empire).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
19. On the history of the idea of progress in European thought, see, for instance, G. H. Mead, &#039;&#039;Movements of Thought in the Nineteenth Century&#039;&#039; (1936), Toulmin and Goodfield, &#039;&#039;The Discovery of Time&#039;&#039; (1965), Nisbet, &#039;&#039;History of the Idea of Progress&#039;&#039; (1980), and Bowler, &#039;&#039;The Invention of Progress&#039;&#039; (1989). It is true that the idea of progress as the normal condition was doubted by some thinkers during the nineteenth century (and especially in opposition to the idea of biological evolution), but this was a minor and intermittent countercurrent. See Stocking, &#039;&#039;Race, Culture, and Evolution&#039;&#039; (1987) and Bowler, &#039;&#039;The Invention of Progress&#039;&#039; (1989).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
20. See Huddleston, &#039;&#039;Origins of the American Indians: European Concepts, 1492-1729&#039;&#039; (1967), Williams, &#039;&#039;The American Indian in Western Legal Thought&#039;&#039; (1990); Hulme, &#039;&#039;Colonial Encounters: Europe and the Native Caribbean 1492-1797&#039;&#039; (1992); Gossett, &#039;&#039;Race: The History of an Idea in America&#039;&#039; (1963).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
21. At times the notion was advanced that these civilizations had somehow evolved in antediluvian times and had not been wiped out in the Flood (see, for example, Keightley, &#039;&#039;Outlines of History&#039;&#039;, 1849). Haskel (&#039;&#039;Chronology and Universal History&#039;&#039;, 1848, p. 9) speculates that Noah migrated to China where he or his descendants founded the Chinese monarchy. &amp;quot;The early improvement and populousness of the east, seems to favor this idea.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
22. From the mid-nineteenth century or perhaps earlier, the literature on the occult, on ghosts and monsters, and the like, tended to focus on extra-European origins or homes or sources of the witches, monsters, demons, zombies, walking mummies, evil spells (&amp;quot;black magic&amp;quot;), artifacts with supernatural powers, and so on, all of which have a tendency to diffuse into Europe as a kind of counterdiffusion, an undertow beneath European expansionism. See Brantlinger, &#039;&#039;Rule of Darkness: British Literature and Imperialism&#039;&#039; (1988).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
23. See W. A. Lewis, ed., &#039;&#039;Tropical development, 1880-1913&#039;&#039; (1970).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
24. See Bowler, &#039;&#039;The Invention of Progress&#039;&#039; (1989), Stocking, &#039;&#039;Victorian Anthropology&#039;&#039; (1987), Mandelbaum, &#039;&#039;History, Man and Reason&#039;&#039; (1971).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
25. Spencer, &#039;&#039;The Man Versus the State&#039;&#039; (1969). The complex interplay between individualistic and holistic theories of historical progress during the nineteenth century is discussed in G. H. Mead, &#039;&#039;Movements of Thought in the Nineteenth Century&#039;&#039; (1936) and Mandelbaum, &#039;&#039;History, Man and Reason&#039;&#039; (1971). I try to show in Blaut, &#039;&#039;The National Question: Decolonizing the Theory of Nationalism&#039;&#039; (1987b) how most theories of nationality and national evolution emerge from one or the other of these intellectual streams, one essentially Kantian and psychologistic, the other essentially Romantic and Hegelian.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
26. Among them: Malthus, J. S. Mill, T. Macauley, and Thackeray. See Brantlinger, &#039;&#039;Rule of Darkness: British Literature and Imperialism, 1830-1914&#039;&#039; (1987). Also see Williams, &#039;&#039;British Historians and the West Indies&#039;&#039; (1966) and Said, &#039;&#039;Orientalism&#039;&#039; (1979).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
27. See Thapar, &#039;&#039;Ancient Indian Social History: Some Interpretations&#039;&#039; (1978) and &amp;quot;Ideology and the Interpretation of Early Indian History&amp;quot; (1982), and B. Chandra, &amp;quot;Karl Marx, His Theories of Asian Societies, and Colonial Rule&amp;quot; (1981). We return to this issue in Chapter 2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
28. See in particular Marx&#039;s article, &amp;quot;The British Rule in India&amp;quot; (1979). In later work, Marx and Engels adopted a much more negative opinion about colonialism, developing to some extent the idea of colonial underdevelopment: see Blaut, &#039;&#039;The National Question: Decolonizing the Theory of Nationalism&#039;&#039; (1987b) for a discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
29. See Chapter 2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
30. See Asad, &#039;&#039;Anthropology and the Colonial Encounter&#039;&#039; (1975), and Temu and Swai, &#039;&#039;Historians and Africanist History&#039;&#039; (1981).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
31. Important examples are Eliot Smith &#039;&#039;The Diffusion of Culture&#039;&#039; (1933), Perry, &#039;&#039;The Primordial Ocean&#039;&#039; (1935), Schmidt, &#039;&#039;The Culture Historical Method of Ethnology&#039;&#039; (1939), Griffith Taylor, &#039;&#039;Environment and Nation&#039;&#039; (1945). See critiques in Radin, &#039;&#039;The Method and Theory of Ethnology&#039;&#039; (1965), Lowie, &#039;&#039;The History of Ethnological Theory&#039;&#039; (1937), and Harris &#039;&#039;The Rise of Anthropological Theory&#039;&#039; (1968).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
32. Here I am of course rejecting the view, common among European scholars, that colonies were relinquished voluntarily. This view has been rejected almost universally by scholars in the formerly colonial world. It may conceivably have been true for a few small islands from which profits no longer flowed to the colonizing power, but even such cases are debatable. It is worth noting that the United States has not given independence to any of the colonies it held at the close of World War II; has not even formally conceded the right of full self-determination (including independence) to Puerto Rico, the Virgin Islands, the Marianas, etc. The other colonial powers would presumably have taken the same position, had they had the power to do so in the face of colonial pro-independence forces; in such cases as the Dutch East Indies, French Indochina, Kenya, Angola, Mozambique, and so on, the colonizers tried to hold on to their possession by force of arms and failed. My view is set forth in Blaut, &#039;&#039;The National Question&#039;&#039; (1987b), chap. 4, and Blaut and Figueroa, &#039;&#039;Aspectos de la cuestion nacional en Puerto Rico&#039;&#039; (1988).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
33. Representative examples include &amp;quot;Operation Bootstrap&amp;quot; in Puerto Rico, the Colonial Development and Welfare programs in parts of the British Empire, the increased funding for colonial agriculture and health departments, the establishment of colonial universities, and so on. These programs, regardless of their underlying political purposes (often hidden from the technical personnel involved) were, overall, very impressive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
34. Often this work was a direct continuation of colonial technical work, often with the same personnel, now &amp;quot;foreign advisor&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;United Nations expert&amp;quot; rather than &amp;quot;colonial technical officer.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
35. Thus the Alliance for Progress, the Peace Corps, the elevated funding of technical and financial agencies of the Organization of American States, and the like.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
36. On ethnoscience, see, for example, Conklin, &amp;quot;Lexicographical Treatment of Folk Taxonomies&amp;quot; (1969), Frake, &amp;quot;The Ethnographic Study of Cognitive Systems&amp;quot; (1969), Blaut, &amp;quot;Some Principles of Ethnogeography&amp;quot; (1978), and Spradley and McCurdy, &#039;&#039;Anthropology: A Cultural Perspective&#039;&#039; (1975). In my view, the categories &amp;quot;history&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;science&amp;quot; cannot be distinguished ontologically, although historiography is hardly an exact science.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
37. Whitehead, &#039;&#039;Science and Philosophy&#039;&#039; (1948), p. 129.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
38. Kuhn, &#039;&#039;The Structure of Scientific Revolutions&#039;&#039; (1970). More relevant is Fleck&#039;s &#039;&#039;Genesis and Development of a Scientific Fact&#039;&#039; (1979).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
39. Tolman, &amp;quot;A Psychological Model&amp;quot; (1951).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
40. Dewey, &amp;quot;The Logic of Judgements of Practice,&amp;quot; in his &#039;&#039;Essays in Experimental Logic&#039;&#039; (1916).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= CHAPTER 2: The Myth of the European Miracle =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most European historians believe in some form of the theory of &amp;quot;the European miracle.&amp;quot; This is the argument that Europe forged ahead of all other civilizations far back in history—in prehistoric or ancient or medieval times—and that this internally generated historical superiority or priority explains world history and geography after 1492: the modernization of Europe, the rise of capitalism, the conquest of the world. Most historians do not see anything miraculous in this process, but the phrase &amp;quot;the European miracle&amp;quot; became in the 1980s a very popular label for the whole family of theories about the supposedly unique rise of Europe before 1492. The phrase acquired its new popularity mainly from a book by Eric L. Jones which appeared in 1981, a book simply entitled &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Although Eric L. Jones&#039;s 1981 book &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; popularized the phrase &amp;quot;the European miracle,&amp;quot; it had been in use for a long time with the same essential meaning: the unique rise of Europe before or during the Middle Ages. Not every historian would describe this as a &amp;quot;miracle,&amp;quot; but the term has wide acceptance, as evidence the fact that an international symposium entitled &amp;quot;The European Miracle&amp;quot; was held at Cambridge University in 1985.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The historians do not agree among themselves on the question why the miracle occurred: why Europe forged ahead in this perhaps miraculous way. Is it because Europeans are genetically superior? are culturally superior? live in a superior environment? Is it because one special, wonderful thing happened in Europe, or happened to Europeans at a special moment in history, giving Europeans a decisive advantage over other societies?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nor do the historians agree about when the miracle occurred or began. Did it occur back in the prehistoric age in what some still call the &amp;quot;Aryan&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Indo-European&amp;quot; culture? in the late-prehistoric &amp;quot;European &#039;Iron Age&#039;?&amp;quot; Did it begin with the Greeks? with the Romans? in the early Middle Ages? in the late Middle Ages? Did it happen continuously throughout history—a series of miracles—each pushing the Europeans farther and farther ahead of the rest of humanity?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The historians debate these matters, the questions &amp;quot;why&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;when,&amp;quot; but not the question &amp;quot;whether&amp;quot;—whether a miracle happened at all. Or, to be more precise, they do not even consider the possibility that the rise of Europe above other civilizations did not begin until 1492, that it resulted not from any European superiority of mind, culture, or environment, but rather from the riches and spoils obtained in the conquest and colonial exploitation of America and, later, Africa and Asia. This possibility is not debated at all, nor is it even discussed, although a very few historians (notably Janet Abu-Lughod, Samir Amin, Andre Gunder Frank, and Immanuel Wallerstein) have come close to doing so in very recent years.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Apparently my 1976 article, &amp;quot;Where Was Capitalism Born?&amp;quot; was the first publication to reject the &amp;quot;miracle&amp;quot; theory absolutely, that is, without qualification. In 1990 Samir Amin, commenting on a later paper of mine, indicated his basic agreement with this rejectionist position. (Amin, &amp;quot;Colonialism and the Rise of Capitalism: A Comment,&amp;quot; 1990; Blaut, &amp;quot;Colonialism and the Rise of Capitalism,&amp;quot; 1989; also see Blaut, &amp;quot;Fourteen Ninety-Two,&amp;quot; 1992; and Amin, &amp;quot;On Jim Blaut&#039;s &#039;Fourteen Ninety-Two,&#039;&amp;quot; 1992.) A few other historians have taken positions approaching this one; their views are discussed later in this chapter.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
My task in this chapter and in Chapter 3 (&amp;quot;Before 1492&amp;quot;) is to show that Europeans indeed had no superiority over non-Europeans at any time prior to 1492: they were not more advanced, not more modern, not more progressive. Then in Chapter 4 (&amp;quot;After 1492&amp;quot;) I will show how colonial riches brought about the rise of Europe and led to Europe&#039;s ultimate hegemony over the world, showing also that Europe&#039;s internal characteristics do not explain 1492—do not, that is, explain the origins of colonialism.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There seem to be two basic ways to argue that the myth of the European miracle is wrong, that Europe did not surpass other world civilizations before 1492. The best way by far is to look at the facts of history, and demonstrate that the evolutionary processes that were going on in Europe during and before the Middle Ages were essentially like the processes taking place elsewhere in the world in terms of rate and direction of development. I will try to demonstrate precisely this in Chapter 3, which compares the medieval landscapes of Europe, Africa, and Asia, and shows how a transition from feudalism and toward capitalism was occurring in many parts of the Eastern Hemisphere just prior to 1492.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But the myth of Europe&#039;s unique &amp;quot;rise,&amp;quot; its &amp;quot;miracle,&amp;quot; is so deeply embedded in European historical thought that an ordinary argument from the facts probably would not be persuasive. As we saw in Chapter 1, the dominant theory has been defended by generations of historians, with practically no dissenting argument; it is supported as well by many other ideas which are accepted as unquestioned truth in European culture; and it fits in with and supports the interests of European countries (and corporations) in their dealings with the non-European world. For these reasons, I have decided to use another kind of argument—to demonstrate the fallacies in the dominant theory—as a sort of ground-laying for the empirical argument.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the present chapter I will examine the most common arguments used by historians today to support the theory of the European miracle, and will try to show that they are unconvincing. This task is rendered somewhat complicated, for a small book like the present one, by the sheer number of different arguments currently in circulation and the number of historians who are writing books and articles on the subject of, and in support of, the theory of the European miracle. How, then, to proceed? I will advance by stages. First I will present a brief discussion of the ways in which historians have tended to argue the myth of the European miracle in recent decades, and I will show how a critical, revisionist point of view has begun to appear. Next I will lay out, in a kind of menu or classification or checklist, the most important arguments in support of this myth that are being put forward today, and I will try to show, for each argument in turn, how unconvincing it really is. In the third stage, I will summarize the empirical argument against the &amp;quot;miracle&amp;quot; position in two parts (the topics of Chapters 3 and 4, respectively): the evidence that Europe was not ahead of Africa and Asia (at a continental scale of attention) prior to 1492, and the evidence that colonialism after 1492 accounts for the selective rise of Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Mythmakers and Critics ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The idea that Europe was more advanced and more progressive than all other civilizations prior to 1492 was the central idea of classical Eurocentric diffusionism, as we saw in Chapter 1. Therefore we do not have to consider the origins of the European miracle theory: it is our inheritance from earlier times. However, after World War II the doctrine assumed a distinctly modern form. First of all, the racist arguments had been decisively rejected: no longer was it argued that non-Europeans are genetically inferior to Europeans and that it is this inferiority that explains why they lagged behind in history. Historians now generally accepted the idea that European historical advantages reflected facts and happenings of much earlier times. European superiority was a matter of prior arrival by Europeans at a stage of development that all other people could aspire to reach in the future: a matter, therefore, of priority, not innate superiority. Second, there was a rapid increase in historical scholarship concerning the non-European world after 1945, grounded in rather pragmatic political and economic interests, and emanating in part from government- and foundation-sponsored &amp;quot;foreign area studies programs,&amp;quot; but this scholarship nonetheless added greatly to the knowledge available in Western countries concerning non-Western history. The new knowledge was fairly quickly put to rather limited use: some of the wilder fables were discarded but the basic ideas about the non-Western world did not significantly change. Third, and most importantly, the postwar world came to embrace the crucial new theory of &amp;quot;modernization,&amp;quot; the theory that the diffusion of European ideas, things, and influence would bring about the economic development of the non-Western world in the coming Age of Development. This theory had important effects on history writing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Modernization as History ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The theory of modernization addressed the present and the future but it was fundamentally historical. Its basic principle was the notion that whatever had led in the past to European superiority could now be diffused out into the non-European world and assist that world to more or less catch up. As we saw in the last chapter, this new doctrine went through two phases of development, the first in the post-World War II period of decolonization, the second—an intensification of the diffusion effort—after the rise of socialist countries in the Third World, and particularly after the Cuban revolutionary victory in 1959.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A number of historical works appeared in the 1960s as part of this intellectual process. Their central purpose was to show that the European pattern of development, including most particularly the development of capitalism, had been somehow the one, the natural course of human progress, and many of these volumes quite explicitly drew the ideological conclusion that the proper, natural course of future development in the Third World would be to follow this natural European pattern (but not, of course, slavishly). The most influential of these works was Rostow&#039;s 1960 volume, &#039;&#039;The Stages of Economic Growth: A Non-Communist Manifesto&#039;&#039;. This book was a plain assertion that Europe&#039;s past formula for development, up to and including capitalism, was the only workable formula for non-Europe&#039;s future development. Rostow married world history to world development in a single diffusionist argument.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Another seminal work was Cyril Black&#039;s &#039;&#039;The Dynamics of Modernization: A Study in Comparative History&#039;&#039; (1966). Other such works in various fields will be discussed later in this chapter.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But there was a problem. Precisely what had caused the unique rise of Europe? Now we must return for a moment to the classical diffusionist period. European historians of the prior century were unanimous (I think) in their acceptance of the fundamental idea that Europe has been naturally and uniquely progressive. For most of them the basic force underlying the process was unquestioned: some drew on their religious faith, others built on metaphysical ideas (like Hegel&#039;s evolving &amp;quot;spirit&amp;quot;), others appealed to a Smithian or Utilitarian idea of individual human activity and purpose, and still others invoked the natural environment, or demographic behavior, or class struggle, or something else, but I think it likely that all of them held a common conception of an underlying force of Progress, a basic directional force like the Solar Wind, in relation to which partial facts (economic, psychological, environmental, and so on) were epiphenomenal or merely symptomatic. After World War II, however, a profoundly different set of basic beliefs became the norm. Now the problem of explaining the rise of Europe was seen as a total problem. That is, all of the phenomenon, including its most fundamental dynamics, required explanation, or, stated differently, had to be put into an explicit model in which explicit variables or &amp;quot;factors&amp;quot; were identified. There were, doubtless, many reasons for this new—or rather newly popular—approach, among them the maturation of the discipline of history itself, the loss of faith (in this age of chaos) in the idea of inevitable progress, the general secularization of European thought, and the development of social science disciplines. But whatever the overall explanation, what emerged was a set of historical models, some new, others (like Weberianism) refurbished, that explicitly tried to explain the &amp;quot;European miracle&amp;quot; in terms of specific causal factors. This was the signature of the modern form of diffusionist history. The effect of the modernization perspective was not, by any means, dominant in all of historical scholarship, but it was so in writings that sought to explain the larger transformations of European history, and particularly the problem of explaining the medieval changes that brought about the rise of capitalism and modernity—the &amp;quot;European miracle.&amp;quot; We will review many of these explanatory propositions later in the present chapter.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Perhaps one reason was the maturation of the discipline of history itself. Another was the influence, not entirely salutary, of positivistic scientific method on history, which led to an attempt to specify variables and &amp;quot;factors,&amp;quot; and, if possible, quantify each of them. Another reason was the loss of faith in the nineteenth-century idea of inevitable progress: after nearly a half century of chaos and war, progress definitely did not appear to be something natural and inevitable; it had to be explained and also produced. Still a third reason was the general secularization of European thought, including history, such that human events could not be assumed to reflect guidance of a higher power. Another reason, possibly a very important one, was the general development of academic disciplines, and their involvement in (and nutrition from) international and domestic policy. This implied that each discipline, seeing the world with some degree of bias in favor of its own subject-as-factor (for economists, the market factor; for psychologists, the motivation factor; for sociologists, the demographic factor and the social-structural factor; for geographers, the resource factor; etc.) tended to argue in favor of historical models that treated our factor as crucial and those of others as secondary. Since many social scientists wrote history in this process, this led to some special pleading.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Critique ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The modernization approach was quickly challenged because it gave no real role to non-Europe, past and present, save as an essentially passive recipient of diffusions from Europe. For the period before 1492, it claimed that the significant evolutionary processes took place in Greater Europe. For the period from 1492 to World War II, it claimed that evolutionary processes continued to effloresce mainly in Europe and that colonialism brought the fruits of this progress to non-Europe. For the present and the future, progress for non-Europe (the Third World) would consist of the continued spread of innovations, mainly through mechanisms basically inherited from the colonial era. These propositions were distinctly unpopular among intellectuals of the Third World, and the rapid development of Third World scholarship in this postcolonial period led rather quickly to the emergence of a critical, even rejectionist, body of thought, including a new historiography.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basic thinking went about as follows: For the precolonial era, it was necessary to resurrect one&#039;s own history and find out how it had contributed to the history of the world. (Colonialist history dismissed precolonial history for some colonies and distorted it for others. Therefore, as Amilcar Cabral said with deep irony, when the colonies gain their independence, they re-enter history.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Cabral, &#039;&#039;Unity and Struggle&#039;&#039; (1979).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;) For the colonial era, the belief that colonialism itself the was source of all progress was patently untrue and colonial history had to be rewritten to show how it had led to poverty rather than to progress. On a world scale, new models had to be developed to show that colonialism, far from diffusing modernization to non-European societies, had diffused a mixture of good and bad innovations, which, for much of the world, had been a process not of development but of underdevelopment.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;As to the present and future, Third World intellectuals tended to make two arguments. Those who supported the idea of a capitalist form of development argued that economic development must consist of the defense of native capital against the corrosive diffusion into one&#039;s country of the economic and political dominance of European countries and corporations. For socialists, influence and dominance by international capitalism quite obviously had to be rejected. Both groups tended to adopt &amp;quot;dependency theory&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;underdevelopment theory,&amp;quot; which was a theory both of history and of modern social processes and development. A relatively small minority of Third World intellectuals, usually reflecting the thinking and interests of the very wealthy and very right-wing sectors, welcomed the idea of economic domination by foreign capitalist interests. Since the wealthy social sectors dominated most Third World societies, this minority point of view often determined policy. Also, it received much more prominence than it deserved in the journals of the First World.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; This body of thought came to be known as &amp;quot;underdevelopment theory&amp;quot; in Africa and Asia and as &amp;quot;dependency theory&amp;quot; in Latin America. Out of it came the first serious critique of Eurocentric historiography.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One can trace the origins of this critique to earlier writings by a small number of historians, most of them colonial subjects, often writing in exile. Their main theme was a documentation of the negative effects of colonialism on a particular place and people. Some of the writers—among them W. E. B. DuBois, R. Palme Dutt, K. M. Panikkar, M. N. Roy, J. C. Van Leur, C. L. R. James, George Padmore, and Eric Williams—developed arguments on colonial processes at a world scale, and on the role of colonialism in the postmedieval and modern rise of capitalism and Europe. James showed that Caribbean slaves had played a role in the development of capitalism not fundamentally different from that of the working class in Europe. Williams&#039;s work ultimately had the strongest impact on Eurocentric history. He showed that the wealth from slavery and the slave plantation had been the crucial factor in the amassing of capital for the Industrial Revolution in England. This argument was the first major demonstration that non-Europe had played a central role in modernization itself, and a sizeable literature has grown up among European historians arguing about, and generally trying to counter, what is now generally called &amp;quot;the Williams thesis.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See James, &#039;&#039;A History of Pan-African Revolt&#039;&#039; (1938), &#039;&#039;The Black Jacobins&#039;&#039; (1938), &amp;quot;The Atlantic Slave Trade and Slavery&amp;quot; (1970); Williams, &#039;&#039;Capitalism and Slavery&#039;&#039; (1944). We discuss these matters in Chapter 4.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; During and after the period of decolonization this critical historical literature expanded greatly, and a large number of scholars began a direct attack on the diffusionist history of the colonial period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Much of this work will be discussed in later chapters. Here I want to make several concrete points about the critique. First of all, a number of historians from the European world (Bernal, Frank, Wallerstein, and others) joined Third World historians as central figures in the movement. Second, while the critique focused a good deal of attention on the pre-1492 period, showing that development had taken place in non-Europe—for instance, Sharma and Habib documented the development of feudal and postfeudal society in medieval India—for a long time very little scholarly attention, within this critical tradition, was focused on pre-1492 Europe; the first major work that dealt with this problematic from a non-Eurocentric point of view, that is—was Amin&#039;s 1974 volume &#039;&#039;Accumulation on a World Scale&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Amin, &#039;&#039;Accumulation on a World Scale&#039;&#039; (1974) and later works. My articles &amp;quot;Geographic Models of Imperialism&amp;quot; (1970) and &amp;quot;Where Was Capitalism Born?&amp;quot; (1976) laid out the skeleton of a general theory.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; This is perhaps understandable since most of the critical historians were themselves from the Third World, not from Europe, and European history was not often a major interest. Yet it was anomalous nonetheless. The core of the modernization doctrine in history was, after all, the argument that Europe had begun to modernize before other regions and before it established colonial control of other regions. Thus, to refute the basic thesis one would have to show (as I try to now in this book) that pre-1492 Europe was not uniquely progressive. Of course, part of this argument consists of demonstrations that other regions were progressive. But part of it must consist of refutations of the various &amp;quot;miracle&amp;quot; propositions, those that claim to find in ancient or medieval Europe some special quality of progressiveness.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is another, quite curious anomaly in the relative lack of attention to pre-1492 Europe by historians in this critical tradition, the tradition associated with underdevelopment or dependency theory and the critique of colonialism. This has to do with the curious relation between Third World scholarship, much of which is Marxist, and the Marxist scholarship of the European world. European Marxists were among the main critics of colonialism and among the main contributors to dependency-underdevelopment theory. Marxist theory also inherited from former times a strong anticolonial flavor and a profound skepticism regarding the theories propounded by nineteenth-century mainstream European historians.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;I deal with this matter in &#039;&#039;The National Question&#039;&#039; (1987b).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Yet, oddly, most European Marxist historians writing about pre-1492 Europe have tended to argue in favor of the uniqueness-of-Europe doctrine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mainstream European historians have also contributed to the critique of the central Eurocentric doctrine. This is not an anomaly. Scholars try to pursue the truth and accept it whether or not it accords with their ideological or cultural preferences. To some extent they succeed. Thus a number of European scholars specializing in non-Europe have uncovered some of the most important evidence against the Eurocentric model of pre-1492 world history. The work of the Dutch historian J. C. Van Leur in the 1930s, concerning the economic history of South and Southeast Asia is a classic example of this antisystemic scholarship.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Van Leur&#039;s 1934 essay &amp;quot;On Early Indonesian trade,&amp;quot; reprinted in his &#039;&#039;Indonesian Trade and Society&#039;&#039; (1955).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Another example relates to Chinese history. Half a century ago Duyvendak uncovered truly crucial facts about China&#039;s long-range voyaging in medieval times. Later, Needham and his associates produced a series of studies about the history of Chinese science and technology that had a profound impact on the Eurocentric model and (as we will see) forced Eurocentric historians to abandon a large piece of their argument concerning the supposed uniqueness of medieval European technology. Other Western scholars, like Wheatley and Elvin, delving into the empirical history of China with indifference to ideological questions, have produced other sorts of evidence about China&#039;s progressiveness in ancient and medieval times. All of this damages the miracle theory, although, as we will see later in this chapter, Eurocentric historians have found ways to repair most of the damage.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Duyvendak, &#039;&#039;Ma Huan Re-examined&#039;&#039; (1933); Needham and collaborators, &#039;&#039;Science and Civilization in China&#039;&#039;, published in 6 volumes between 1965 and 1984; Wheatley, &#039;&#039;The Golden Khersonese&#039;&#039; (1961) and &#039;&#039;The Pivot of the Four Quarters&#039;&#039; (1971); Elvin, &#039;&#039;The Pattern of the Chinese Past&#039;&#039; (1973).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The critique of Eurocentric history is a very large subject, and our concern in this volume is with just one part of it: the critique of European miracle theories about the world before 1492, and related theories which treat early modern world history as though non-Europe, and colonialism, were merely marginal to evolutionary processes. On these issues the critique has not progressed very far. I will give a few examples of important recent contributions, and others will be cited throughout this book. Janet Abu-Lughod&#039;s recent (1989) book, &#039;&#039;Before European Hegemony: The World System A.D. 1250-1350&#039;&#039;, is a seminal study that demonstrates (I think conclusively) that Europe was not more progressive and not more advanced than other civilizations in A.D. 1350. Having made this demonstration, she offers only a tentative and partial explanation for the selective rise of Europe, and decline of the Orient, after 1350. She suggests that the divergence took place in the period between 1350 and 1492. (I argue in this book that the divergence occurred only after 1492, with the beginnings of massive accumulation in the Western Hemisphere, a windfall that did not accrue to non-European civilizations of the Eastern Hemisphere, and so gave Europeans their first and decisive advantage over these other civilizations. See Chapter 4 below.) Samir Amin has argued in various recent works that Europe was not more advanced than Africa and Asia at the end of the Middle Ages, but rather was more unstable: because of its marginal location at the edge of the hemispheric zone of civilization, medieval class society was less fully seated, less stable, less indurated in Europe than elsewhere, and so Europe changed toward capitalism more readily. This argument, although it does not grant any &amp;quot;miracle&amp;quot; to pre-1492 Europe, nonetheless allows one of the old beliefs to stand: that Europe was more dynamic than non-Europe during the Middle Ages.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Amin, &#039;&#039;Unequal Development&#039;&#039; (1976), &#039;&#039;Eurocentrism&#039;&#039; (1988), &amp;quot;Colonialism and the Rise of Capitalism: A Comment&amp;quot; (1990).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Martin Bernal&#039;s new book &#039;&#039;Black Athena&#039;&#039; appears to have little connection to the subject of the present volume, yet his arguments are very closely connected indeed. Bernal shows that European historians have created a myth about ancient Europe according to which African and Asian origins and innovations are written out of history: the goddess Athena was African. Bernal&#039;s work undercuts the still very popular theories about ancient Europe&#039;s supposed uniqueness, and also exposes the ethnocentric and ideological roots of much of the European scholarship that underlies the classical diffusionist model.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Bernal, &#039;&#039;Black Athena&#039;&#039;, vol. 1 (1987) and vol. 2 (1991).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Edward Said&#039;s 1979 volume, &#039;&#039;Orientalism&#039;&#039;, a seminal critique of this process by which Eurocentrism and conservative ideology has dominated European scholarly writing about the Near East and Asia, is also important and quite relevant to our argument here. Other such works will be referred to as we proceed.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mention should also be made of Eric Wolf&#039;s 1982 book &#039;&#039;Europe and the Peoples Without History&#039;&#039; which provides a useful and important survey of the history of both European and non-European civilizations and shows how unconvincing is the theory that non-European civilizations, historically, were stagnant and unprogressive (that they were &amp;quot;peoples without history&amp;quot;). Wolf, however, stops short of questioning the truly crucial Eurocentric belief that Europeans were more progressive than non-Europeans in several ways that are crucial to the &amp;quot;European miracle&amp;quot; theory, and so he does not directly confront that theory. (It should be noted that most mainstream historians no longer argue that non-European civilizations are, or were, totally unprogressive, totally &amp;quot;unhistorical,&amp;quot; arguing instead about slow rates of change, &amp;quot;blockages&amp;quot; inhibiting change, and the like—a difference of phrasing which, as we will see, is not always a difference of argument.)&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Countercritique ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In recent years there has been an outpouring of writings that strongly defend the traditional Eurocentric view, upholding the European miracle theory in some of its various forms: we discuss many of these writings in this chapter. In the same stream of writings there are counterattacks against the more specific theories that question the traditional European views about slavery, colonialism, and the like (see Chapter 4), views that treat these processes and events as marginal in social evolution. And new theories (or modified forms of old theories) about the precise reason for the uniqueness of Europe are being put forward and discussed. I have a hunch that this is a scholarly movement that resonates with the new political attitudes concerning the Third World. In any event, the decade of the 1980s saw a number of writings of this sort and they appear to embody a rather conscious counterattack against the critical history discussed above.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;It is always risky to try to explain broad changes of fashion in scholarship, especially when the changes are still underway, so this interpretation cannot be more than a hunch, or hypothesis. Scholarly attitudes toward the Third World were very positive in the period of anticolonial and civil rights struggles. After the late 1960s the mood changed. Not only did more conservative views come to dominate the Western world, but rather unexpected difficulties emerged in the Third World itself: national conflicts, failure of development programs, and more. Western scholarship had never really abandoned the traditional view of Europe and its relations to non-Europe, including the diffusionist view of colonialism, and it appears that this older paradigm, never abandoned, simply became, once again, thoroughly dominant. Certainly the attention that had been paid previously to dependency theory and related views fell away among mainstream scholars. Among Marxists the process was even more dramatic, because it was less expected. In brief, Eurocentric Marxists who dismissed the role of the Third World both historically and in the present now became virtually the only Marxists within the academic world to pronounce upon issues related to the Third World. It became quite fashionable to insist, once again, that only the working class of the advanced capitalist countries can bring about socialism because each stage of history commences in this part of the world (Inside) before it spreads to the rest of the world (Outside). In the conservative camp, not only did Eurocentric views regain their hegemony, but one began, now, to hear whispers of views not far distant from racism: views about Third World peoples not having the potential to develop.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some of the writers in this new literature are very self-consciously engaged in such a counterattack. A number of them are Marxists and are insisting that the true, the original, the correct Marxist doctrine recognizes the priority, past and present, of Europe. Robert Brenner, for example, boldly argues that capitalism was invented by northwestern Europeans, with no help from others, and therefore (600 years later) we must acknowledge the continued priority of Europe. A number of other Marxists, like Perry Anderson and Bill Warren, argue similar positions.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Brenner, &amp;quot;The Origins of Capitalist Development: A Critique of Neo-Smithian Marxism&amp;quot; (1977), &amp;quot;Agrarian class structure and economic development in pre-industrial Europe&amp;quot; (1985), &amp;quot;The Agrarian roots of European capitalism&amp;quot; (1985b); Anderson, &#039;&#039;Passages from Antiquity to Feudalism&#039;&#039; (1974), &#039;&#039;Lineages of the Absolute State&#039;&#039; (1974); Warren, &#039;&#039;Imperialism: Pioneer of Capitalism&#039;&#039; (1980).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Among mainstream historians the most dramatic event was the appearance in 1981 of Eric L. Jones&#039;s &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039;. This book is a remarkable recital of a goodly share of the colonial-era ideas about the precocity of Europe and the backwardness and irrationality of non-Europe. More remarkable still is the positive reception this book has received among many scholars, as though most of these old doctrines had not long since been disproved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another movement at present is an attempt to find qualities present in ancient and medieval European culture, and absent in other cultures, which were the reasons for European development: qualities in the European family, the European political system, the European mind, and so forth. This movement is actively resurrecting the turn-of-the-century views of Max Weber about Europe&#039;s supposed &amp;quot;rationality&amp;quot; and the like; indeed, most (not all) of these scholars can be thought of as Weberians and many of them define themselves in that way. I will discuss Weber&#039;s views later in this chapter, along with the views of some modern Weberian scholars, among them Michael Mann and John A. Hall.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the next section of this chapter I will try to extract the most important of these newer views proclaiming Europe&#039;s pre-1492 &amp;quot;miracle,&amp;quot; and I will try to show that these views are mistaken.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Myth ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The myth of the European miracle is the doctrine that the rise of Europe resulted, essentially, from historical forces generated within Europe itself; that Europe&#039;s rise above other civilizations, in terms of level of development or rate of development or both, began before the dawn of the modern era, before 1492; that the post-1492 modernization of Europe came about essentially because of the working out of these older internal forces, not because of the inflowing of wealth and innovations from non-Europe; and that the post-1492 history of the non-European (colonial) world was essentially an outflowing of modernization from Europe. The core of the myth is the set of arguments about ancient and medieval Europe that allow the claim to be made, as truth, that Europe in 1492 was more modernized, or was modernizing more rapidly, than the rest of the world.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is a myth in the classical sense of the word: a story about the rise of a culture that is believed widely by the members of that culture. It is also a myth in the sense of the word that implies something not true. In the following discussion I will unravel the fabric of this myth and show that the strands of belief that compose it are very feeble.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;I will discuss only the more important beliefs, perhaps neglecting a few of these. And I will give just enough evidence to show that these beliefs are not self-evidently true. Much fuller evidence is given, to dispute some of the beliefs, in Chapters 3 and 4.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The number of distinguishable belief statements that make up this myth are, I am sure, uncountable. One of the many reasons the myth is so durable is the fact that the basic generalization, the doctrine of the miracle, is supported by such a great variety of individual beliefs that historians of a given era can disprove some subset of these beliefs and yet the supporters of the myth can merely shift to other beliefs as grounding for the myth.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A more fundamental problem has to do with the way beliefs are licensed. Beliefs tend to gain acceptance if they support the myth, and are either rejected or denied attention if they do not do so. One part of this problem of belief licensing (and relicensing, delicensing, etc.) poses a particularly, perhaps uniquely, serious difficulty for efforts to critique the miracle theory. Many of the beliefs that support this theory are implicit, not explicit; that is, they do not enter into the scholarly discourse of historians, and sometimes they do not enter even into conscious discourse in general. (Recall the discussion of implicit beliefs in Chapter 1.) Many of these beliefs we learn as children. Others seem self-evidently &amp;quot;reasonable&amp;quot; because they accord with deep values of the culture, or with other, accepted beliefs (historical, practical, religious, and so on). Thus, the conviction that ancient and medieval Europe was more progressive than other civilizations is supported by explicit beliefs, but these lie in a matrix of implicit beliefs—unquestioned and usually unnoticed—about the progressive Europeans who &amp;quot;were our ancestors.&amp;quot; By contrast, the matrix of implicit beliefs about historical non-Europe includes ideas of alienness, savagery, cruelty, cannibalism, deceitfulness, stupidity, cupidity, immodesty, dirtiness, disease, and so on—a matrix firmly supporting the general belief that non-Europe cannot have been progressive. Examples of these sorts of implicit beliefs, both positive and negative, will appear as we proceed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One kind of explicit belief about European superiority will not be discussed here in detail. This is the openly religious statement, grounded in faith, that a Christian god will naturally raise His people higher than all others. Although we will refer to this view in various contexts, it is not the kind of argument that can be analyzed or criticized, because it is grounded in a faith that cannot be tested empirically; some believe it to be true and others do not, and that is as far as the matter can be taken. Suffice it to say at this point: the religious argument was so nearly universally accepted down to the nineteenth century that other arguments were not seen as necessary to many European intellectuals. Why, indeed, ask for the reasons that Christian Europeans are superior when we know that unbelievers will not go to heaven and, in this world, will not enjoy the grace of God? Unbelievers will naturally be rendered less intelligent, less fortunate, and so on. So long as scholars and educated people believed that religion underlies all things, including science, and that God intervenes to control human affairs, then it could simply be assumed that Europeans were superior because that was God&#039;s will. It is what you would expect a Christian god to do for Christians, particularly for those Christians who worship Him in the right way. By the middle of the nineteenth century, when Eurocentric diffusionism was at its height, when Europeans hardly ever doubted their superiority over everyone else, although the explicitly religious arguments were disappearing from scholarly discourse, they were still there implicitly, as implicit beliefs. I rather suspect that the great majority of arguments for the superiority of Europeans were finally grounded in a religious faith: if the European environment is superior, that is because God made it so; if the white race is superior, that is because God made it so; if Europeans are more rational than everyone else and this has no explicit explanation, one can infer that it is the work of God; and so on. I do not know to what extent this kind of implicit appeal to the Deity is still present but unnoticed in the thinking of contemporary Eurocentric scholars, but I am certain that it quite often is so. We will from time to time discuss the ideas of scholars (like Lynn White, Jr. and K. F. Werner) who explicitly connect their views about history with their religious beliefs; in such thinkers the directionality of the causal arguments will be noted but not in any sense condemned. Sometimes a scholar makes such arguments unconsciously and implicitly. The only really disturbing cases are those that exhibit conscious hypocrisy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Biology ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Basically two sorts of argument have been used to explain the uniqueness, the superiority, of Europe and Europeans. One sort appeals to some noncultural force or factor as prime cause; the other finds the prime cause within culture itself. Setting aside the doctrine of divine intervention (which one would generally think of as a cause external to human culture, although the point is theologically rather complicated), two kinds of noncultural, external causation are common. One appeals to human biology, the other to the natural environment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Race ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Biological arguments assert, in general, that Europeans are superior, biologically, to non-Europeans. The classical and typical form of this argument was biological racism, the idea that Europeans had superior heredity, and so were born with abilities greater than those displayed by non-Europeans. Europeans were brighter, better, and bolder than non-Europeans because of their heredity. Generally the descriptive category used was not &amp;quot;Europeans&amp;quot; but rather &amp;quot;members of the white race,&amp;quot; but the distinction was not usually very important. Non-Europeans who were classified as members of the white (so-called) race were nonetheless believed to be inferior because they belonged to inferior subraces. Sometimes Europeans themselves were divided into superior and inferior subraces. Early in the nineteenth century it was widely, though not dominantly, believed that white people were not even of the same biological species as people of other races. This theory, &amp;quot;polygenesis,&amp;quot; claimed to have both biblical and scientific support.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Chapter 1, note 2.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Its primary importance was its use as a rationalization for slavery: if Africans were not truly human, why, enslaving them could not be an evil act. This theory melted away during the course of the nineteenth century, mainly because it was offensive to liberal, modern, antislavery thought; what replaced it, however, was not much of an improvement. This was the doctrine we call classical racism, the belief that different human races have different endowments, just as different breeds of domestic animals have such differences—differences of intelligence, aggressiveness, courage, and the rest—and these different endowments are matters of biological inheritance. It was then argued, for instance, that Africans were endowed with lower intelligence than Europeans, so it was both natural and moral for Europeans to colonize Africa and make all decisions on behalf of the Africans who, themselves, either did not have the innate ability to make these decisions, to govern themselves, or were just sufficiently less intelligent than the Europeans that a period of European control and tutelage was necessary while these slow-thinking Africans learned how to govern themselves. Racism, in a word, had as its main function the justification of colonialism and all other forms of oppression visited upon non-Europeans, including minority peoples in countries such as the United States.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Toward the end of the nineteenth century racism acquired a pseudoscientific aura of apparent truth. Scientists claimed to have proof of the differences among races, particularly as to intelligence. Now, also, they were armed with Mendelian genetics, so it seemed eminently reasonable for scientists who were, themselves, racists, now to assert that they had proof of the truth of the racist theories in which they already believed. These so-called proofs were unmasked as pseudoscience in a slow process that continued down to World War II: indeed, even today there are more than a few so-called &amp;quot;scientific racists.&amp;quot; What we need to notice about scientific racism is that it merely provided a new way of justifying something that was already almost universally believed to be true among Europeans. This meant, on the one hand, that it did not do much to intensify racism—which was in fact reaching a crescendo of intellectual and scholarly importance around the turn of the century for social reasons, having to do mainly with the growing importance of colonialism—and, on the other hand, that the disproving of scientific racism did not have much to do with the decline of racism&#039;s popularity in the present century. Racism emerged from prescientific roots and survived so long as it was useful, science or no science.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is not to deny that scientific racism gave strong impetus to racist beliefs in society; in a time when science was acquiring great prestige and influence, scientific arguments were indeed important.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Bowler, &#039;&#039;The Invention of Progress&#039;&#039; (1989); Harris, &#039;&#039;The Rise of Anthropological Theory&#039;&#039; (1968); Gossett, &#039;&#039;Race: The History of an Idea in America&#039;&#039; (1963); Jackson, &#039;&#039;Race and Racism: Essays in Social Geography&#039;&#039; (1987); Stocking, &#039;&#039;Race, Culture, and Evolution&#039;&#039; (1968); Trigger, &#039;&#039;A History of Archeological Thought&#039;&#039; (1989).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; And scientific racism helped in some special ways. One important example here has to do with supposed differences in endowment among the supposed subraces within the so-called white race. Anti-Semitism, along with anti-Muslim attitudes relating to colonialism in the Middle East, led to a proliferation of theories about the inferiority of the so-called &amp;quot;Semitic&amp;quot; subrace. (&amp;quot;Semite,&amp;quot; of course, should refer only to someone who speaks a Semitic language, such as Hebrew or Arabic.) This racist underpinning for anti-Semitism, then, became extremely useful for the general argument about the superiority of Europeans in history over all non-Europeans.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Bernal, &#039;&#039;Black Athena&#039;&#039;, vol. 1 (1987).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Semitic peoples were acknowledged to belong to the white race. Now it could be argued that only Europeans belonged to the really superior subrace of whites. Semites were inferior. So were the non-Semitic peoples of western Asia (Persians, Turks, and so forth). Indeed, in certain situations it was even argued that scientific racism proved the inferiority of southern and eastern Europeans: the northern, British and Germanic stock was truly superior to Italians, Slavs, and the rest. One famous instance of this sort of argument was the series of pseudoscientific testimonials given before the U.S. Congress at the time it was debating the first important immigration legislation in the 1920s. Scientists solemnly assured the Congress that southern Europeans were inferior people, and so should be excluded from free immigration to the United States in order to maintain the high racial quality of American stock.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Gossett, &#039;&#039;Race&#039;&#039; (1963).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today very few educated Europeans believe that there are genetic, inherited differences among the races as to intelligence or any other quality that might favor or inhibit social progress. Although a few people believe in the doctrine of classical racism, most of them are careful to keep their views to themselves, because today the doctrine is so thoroughly rejected, and viewed with such repugnance. If this were a book dealing with the history of ideas, we could go into the explanation for this transformation—the decline and fall of classical racism over a period of no more than two scholarly generations. During the 1920s the belief in the influence, major or minor, of inherited or racial differences was very widespread. After 1945 the theory was very rarely defended. Probably the key factor was Nazism. The Nazis grounded their ideology in this belief, claiming that the so-called Nordics were a Master Race, that inferior kinds of Europeans, inferior (so-called) subraces of whites—like the so-called Semitic race—and all other races as a whole deserved to be ruled by the Master Race. The Master Race, moreover, had the right to eliminate inferior subraces by genocide. Racism therefore was seen, and still is seen, as a component of the horrible ideology of Nazism. It is true that a small and fanatic group still preaches classical racism, and that a very small number of academics still proclaim its validity. The need to fight against the doctrine has not entirely ended. But this no longer is the important issue when we talk about Eurocentric prejudices, because another doctrine has largely replaced classical racism and performs much the same function, rooting its argument not in genetics but in culture. This doctrine can be thought of as cultural racism.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Blaut, &amp;quot;The Theory of Cultural Racism&amp;quot; (1992).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Classical racism was so pervasive, down through the 1920s, that it probably figured as an explicit or implicit foundation for most arguments about the superiority of Europeans in history. It is as though the scholars who asked why Europe had risen and other societies had not done so had part of their answer at the outset: Europeans began with a genetic advantage, large or small, and then, throughout later history, they were always to a greater or lesser extent favored by the influence of their genetic superiority in matters intellectual, giving them superior decision-making ability, inventive ability, and so on. Here was an important reason why it did not, in those times, seem crucial to ask the question, &amp;quot;Why?&amp;quot; At root, the answer was considered self-evident. Even moderate racists, such as Max Weber (whose views we examine below), could therefore assume that European superiority was carried along by a kind of subtle undertow of genetics, that this made Europeans at all times slightly more &amp;quot;rational&amp;quot; (Weber&#039;s favorite word), and, therefore, slightly more progressive. It is very interesting that modern scholars retain the notion of the superiority of European &amp;quot;rationality,&amp;quot; a notion derived from Weber and through him from all of nineteenth-century social thought, yet they vigorously deny that the source of this &amp;quot;rationality&amp;quot; is racial superiority. The intellectual contortions they have to go through to retain the one without the other will claim our interest when we discuss this matter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Among the historians whose theories about the &amp;quot;European miracle&amp;quot; are at present widely supported, only Max Weber uses classical racist argument in a clear and overt way. But Weber was writing in the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries, when classical racism was accepted by the majority of European scholars. Weber&#039;s arguments are a rather mild form of racism. He did indeed write of the &amp;quot;hereditary . . . hysteria of the Indian,&amp;quot; a basis for his argument that Indian religion prevented Indian development.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&amp;quot;Hereditary neuralgia of the presumably strong tendency toward hysteria and autohypnosis of the Indian...&amp;quot; Max Weber, &#039;&#039;The Religion of India&#039;&#039; (1967), p. 387. This postulate is basic to Weber&#039;s analysis of Brahminism as prime cause for India&#039;s lack of development.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; He considered Africans to be genetically incapable of factory work.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&amp;quot;[The] ... negroes long ago showed themselves unsuitable for factory work and the operation of machines; they have not seldom sunk into a cataleptic sleep. Here is one case in economic history where tangible racial distinctions are present&amp;quot; Weber, &#039;&#039;General Economic History&#039;&#039; (1981), p. 379. Although Weber says here that this is merely &amp;quot;one case&amp;quot; of racial influences, note that the case is crucial for Weber&#039;s analysis both of &amp;quot;rationality&amp;quot; and of modernization; the &amp;quot;racial distinctions&amp;quot; here separate out Africans in a fundamental way: a clear case of moderate yet crucial racism. In the same vein, &amp;quot;it was found that the American Indians were entirely unsuitable for plantation labor&amp;quot; (p. 299).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Chinese have a &amp;quot;slowness in reacting to unusual [intellectual] stimuli,&amp;quot; a &amp;quot;credulity&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;docility&amp;quot; that Weber thinks are wholly or partly hereditary traits.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Weber, &#039;&#039;The Religion of China&#039;&#039; (1951), pp. 231-232. Weber considers these to be &amp;quot;racial qualities of the Chinese&amp;quot; (p. 230) although cultural factors may be involved.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; And Europe&#039;s greater &amp;quot;rationality&amp;quot; has a definite hereditary basis.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Weber, &#039;&#039;The Protestant Ethic and the Spirit of Capitalism&#039;&#039; (1958), p. 30. Weber says here that &amp;quot;it would be natural to suspect that the most important reason&amp;quot; for the rationality of the Occident lies in &amp;quot;differences of heredity,&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;the importance of biological heredity,&amp;quot; he thinks, is &amp;quot;very great&amp;quot; (p. 30). But we do not yet know how to measure its influence, so our attention should focus mainly on the cultural factors (pp. 30-31). This was typical moderate racism (as I call it) for the time the work was published (1904-1905).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; But the fact remains that Weber gave much greater weight to nonracial factors. And Weber, for his time, was only a moderate racist.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moderate racism is, today, a more serious problem in the world of scholars than is classical racism, because it is mainly an implicit theory. We noted that Weber believed in the significance of racial differences, but he referred to the matter very rarely; yet it must have been an unstated, perhaps implicit, part of many of his arguments about social evolution in general and the comparative evolution of Europe and non-Europe in particular. This was fairly typical of early twentieth-century scholarship, hence the racism in that scholarship often is too difficult to identify, and the arguments presented by scholars seem not to be racist when they do not explicitly mention race as a factor. But more serious still is the surviving influence of what I call very moderate racism. A great number, perhaps the majority, of mainstream scholars, in the period, say, of the 1920s, believed that racial differences were very slight and that the individual human being&#039;s capabilities and potentialities would not be predictable from his or her race, that race differences only appeared influential on a statistical basis for large groups: for instance, a slightly higher average &amp;quot;intelligence quotient&amp;quot; for whites as against blacks. This belief was consistent with militant opposition to racial discrimination. But it was not much better than classical racism when applied to questions of social evolution and comparison between European and non-European history. This is so because the historical arguments did not need to postulate large racial differences. If whites, on the average, held a tiny advantage over non-whites in, let us say, inventiveness, that tiny advantage, working out its influence over the centuries and millennia, would produce the result that whites built high civilization and nonwhites did not. In a sense, this very moderate racism was a more serious problem than ordinary racism, because it allowed scholars to take liberal positions in opposition to overt racial discrimination yet continue to believe that whites are superior genetically to nonwhites within the subject matter of their own fields—anthropology, geography, history, and so on. It did reduce the significance of race to that of one &amp;quot;factor&amp;quot; among many, but it did not eliminate racial explanations in the matter of Europe&#039;s supposed superiority.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;I have not discussed the question whether biological racism remains important today as a genuinely implicit theory, that is, one still accepted but not consciously so. I suspect that it does. Some Eurocentric historians hold to positions regarding individual differences between Europeans and non-Europeans that are so extreme, and so bigoted, that it is difficult to avoid the conclusion that at least a few of them may hold to an implicitly racist infratheory, perhaps unconsciously believing, that is, that the inferiority of non-Europeans is genetically determined.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Probably it is unnecessary to say here that there is no credible evidence in support of the idea that races differ in genetic inheritance except in trivial matters like skin color. Even the idea of race is a vague abstraction and not really useful. For our purposes, the generalization that counts is this: racial differences explain nothing about culture or cultural evolution.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Among many sources on the racism fallacy, see Franz Boas&#039; classic book, &#039;&#039;Race, Language, and Culture&#039;&#039; (1948); also Blum, &#039;&#039;Pseudoscience and Mental Ability&#039;&#039; (1978); Gossett, &#039;&#039;Race&#039;&#039; (1965); Haller, &#039;&#039;Outcasts from Evolution&#039;&#039; (1971); Jackson, &#039;&#039;Race and Racism&#039;&#039; (1987); Magubane, &#039;&#039;The Ties that Bind: African-American Consciousness and Africa&#039;&#039; (1987); Gill and Levidow, &#039;&#039;Anti-Racist Science Teaching&#039;&#039; (1987).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Demography ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Demographic behavior is usually considered the second important biological factor in explanations for the European miracle. Causality here is very murky. The specific form of theory with which I am concerned claims that Europeans, historically, controlled their population growth, whereas other peoples did not, so that Europe tended not to suffer overpopulation, and did not encounter what many historians call the &amp;quot;Malthusian disasters&amp;quot; that supposedly prevented forward progress in non-European societies. Malthusianism postulates, in its essence, that ordinary people do not control their sexual urges and so have more offspring than can be fed; a disaster of some sort ensues, with famine, pestilence, or war now reducing the population; and then people again breed more children than they should, and the cycle renews. Malthus considered this uncontrollable sexual urge to be general in the human species, although the educated classes could control themselves to some degree. Modern explanations for the &amp;quot;European miracle&amp;quot; modify this theory in a key respect: they assert that Europeans, historically, have had a cultural pattern of limiting the number of offspring whereas non-Europeans lacked this pattern; as a result, European population was maintained, throughout history, in rough long-term proportion to resources, in spite of periodic Malthusian crises, crises which were important in explaining various facts of European history but were vastly less significant than the supposed permanent grip of Malthusian forces—lack of demographic control and perennial overpopulation and misery—in non-European societies. Moreover, according to these historians, whenever technological advance or some other fortunate circumstance led to a rise in living standards, Europeans, unlike non-Europeans, did not allow their population to rise and thus eliminate the fruits of progress. We need to notice that this argument does not really center on the biology of reproduction but, again, on rationality: it is claimed or assumed that Europeans think about the problem of population and others do not. So demographic arguments for the superiority of Europe in history always return either to culture or to race: Europeans are more rational either because they have superior heredity or because they have superior culture. If non-Europeans have uncontrollable sexual urges, if they behave like the beasts in the field, this is either a sign of genetic inferiority or a cultural quirk. In the arguments most frequently encountered today, either culture is invoked or the matter is left ambiguous. Yet there is a paradox. Many historians believe that demography is an independent causal force in history. This belief is generally grounded in a quasi-biological argument: ordinary people have only partial success in controlling their sexual urges, and only partial success (or none at all) in controlling and spacing the birth of children.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The idea that demographic behavior is not fully under social control, is a primordial biological fact or factor, seems to underlie the thinking of most Eurocentric historians (conspicuously Eric L. Jones, Michael Mann, and John Hall). The basic proposition seems to be that population will necessarily grow beyond the rational limits, and so overpopulation must result unless societies find nondemographic solutions, notably by increasing food supply to feed the inexorably increasing population. See, for instance, Michael Mann, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039;, vol. 1 (1986): If agricultural yields had not increased in medieval Europe, &amp;quot;the continent would ... have experienced a similar Malthusian cycle every century or so—and would not have generated capitalism&amp;quot; (p. 402). This view is even encountered, occasionally, in the radical and feminist movements. Note the following view put forward by a Marxist-feminist: &amp;quot;(We) assume (given the ubiquity of the sex drive ...) that the total number of conceptions in a population will tend to exceed those desired within a given incentive structure, and this unintended surplus will be greater, the more imperfect are the means at hand. ... A given fertility pattern then is taken to be &#039;rational&#039; ... except for a small but variable excess (of births),&amp;quot; Seccombe, &amp;quot;Marxism and Demography,&amp;quot; (1983), p. 31. The context is a discussion of European medieval social evolution, but the argument is given mainly in support of Brenner&#039;s theory about the strictly European rise of capitalism. Most radicals and feminists reject Malthusianism and would reject Seccombe&#039;s view as Malthusian.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Many supporters of the miracle myth simply argue, then, that Europeans have greater, though still partial, success in controlling their behavior than do non-Europeans. For instance, Eric L. Jones claims that this is what he calls &amp;quot;the quality of Europeanness&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Europe did not spend the gifts of its environment as rapidly as it got them in a mere insensate multiplication of the common life.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), p. 3. Part of the passage is a quotation.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In other words, Europeans do not simply reproduce thoughtlessly, as non-Europeans do. Jones makes the same point in many different ways; for instance, he says of Chinese peasants that they preferred &amp;quot;breeding new people&amp;quot; to improving their economic and political circumstances.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), p. 219.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; John A. Hall makes a similar point:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expansion of the European economy did not occur [through expansion of cultivated acreage], as in late traditional China, because improvements in output were not eaten up by a massive growth in population. The ratio between population and [cultivated] acreage in Europe remained favourable ultimately because of the relative continence of the European family.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties: The Causes and Consequences of the Rise of the West&#039;&#039; (1985), p. 131. Italics added.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Europeans are sexually &amp;quot;continent.&amp;quot; Europeans, therefore, do not suffer overpopulation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another point worthy of notice: the historians have no difficulty invoking population growth as a positive factor in European history, as an indication of progress—for instance, the growth of Europe&#039;s population in the eleventh century and thereafter is seen as proof that medieval Europe was healthily advancing—whereas population growth in non-European societies is seen as negative, as the working out of Malthusian laws of &amp;quot;overpopulation.&amp;quot; We will encounter examples of this very one-sided form of argument as we proceed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is now abundant evidence that all societies practice population control.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;As F. Hassan points out, &amp;quot;Among human populations the practice of population control in one form or another is universal.&amp;quot; (&amp;quot;Demographic Archeology,&amp;quot; 1978, p. 71.)&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; They seem to do so very effectively at the aggregate level: although individual family groups may or may not succeed in controlling the incidence of conception—because the methods of birth control are often rather hit or miss—the society as a whole seems able to encourage population growth or discourage it quite successfully.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Some families will of course have more conceptions than desired, and others fewer, because birth control techniques are imperfect, but the average for the larger group will be broadly in line with the group&#039;s values and population targets. The techniques run the gamut from variable age of marriage and variable dowry or bride price, to complexity of marriage rules (defining who, in a kin system, is eligible to be one&#039;s spouse), to timing of sexual relations, to the use of antiterility and abortive devices, to infanticide, and other practices.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It is most unlikely that population growth takes place when the society would, in the long run, suffer as a consequence; or, to put the matter more precisely, the members of a society change their demographic behavior in the space of a couple of generations when it becomes clear to them, as they observe changes around them in the probability of infants surviving to adulthood, and so on, that such change is desirable. The knowledge that all of this is indeed the case has only appeared recently.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Much of the scholarship comes from India, where colonial ideology used to claim that poverty is a result of people having too many children. Now demographers and other social scientists have disproven this myth. See, for instance, Mamdani, &#039;&#039;The Myth of Population Control&#039;&#039; (1972), and Nag, &amp;quot;How Modernization Can Also Increase Fertility&amp;quot; (1980). For Africa, see, for example, Kitching, &amp;quot;Proto-Industrialization and Demographic Change&amp;quot; (1983); Swindell, &amp;quot;Domestic Production, Labor Mobility, and Population Change in West Africa, 1900-1980&amp;quot; (1981); Cordell and Gregory, the introduction to &#039;&#039;African Population and Capitalism&#039;&#039; (1987).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; But this accumulating evidence really cuts the ground from under all Malthusian theories, historical and contemporary, European and non-European. The argument that population growth is an automatic, biological process, which occurs whether or not there is food enough to feed additional mouths, is simply wrong.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See, for instance, numerous studies showing the plasticity of birthrates, including Nag &amp;quot;How Modernization Can Also Increase Fertility&amp;quot; (1980), Collyer, &#039;&#039;Birth Rates in Latin America&#039;&#039; (1965), and Harewood, &amp;quot;Population Growth in Grenada&amp;quot; (1966).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the evidence began to accumulate that historic European populations did indeed practice population control, some scholars decided, appropriately, that the old Malthusian models do not make sense in Europe: family size was kept small, births were controlled, and so forth, back in the Middle Ages. This called for rejection of one traditional theory, the idea that there is a general pattern for all so-called preindustrial societies (or &amp;quot;traditional societies,&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;peasant societies&amp;quot;), involving high and uncontrolled birth rates, large families, etc., and thus, inevitably, a Malthusian trend toward overpopulation. Most historians today seem still to be wedded to the Malthusian theory, and still believe that medieval social change in Europe was mainly, or at least partly, produced by Malthusian cycles of overpopulation.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Aston and Philipn, eds., &#039;&#039;The Brenner Debate&#039;&#039; (1985), especially the introduction by R. Hilton.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; But some historians now reject this perspective: population, in essence, is viewed by them as a dependent variable, not an independent variable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But only in Europe. This newer, essentially anti-Malthusian, theory was rapidly shaped into a new explanation for the European &amp;quot;miracle.&amp;quot; It was simply asserted that European people, historically, controlled their population, and so, when they accumulated surpluses of food and commodities and wealth, these were not subsequently dissipated as population grew out of control and stole away the savings. This pattern, said these historians, was uniquely European and it was one important reason why Europeans were able to accumulate wealth and eventually rise into modernity and capitalism. Non-Europeans, by contrast, continued in their unmoden, traditional pattern, with overpopulation wiping out all benefits of forward progress. These Eurocentric historians, in a manner characteristic of tunnel history, did not notice that new scholarship on demography, some of it on historical demography—in various non-European parts of the world, from India to Barbados—was tending to overturn Malthusian notions as they apply to non-Europe just as readily as had been the case a decade earlier in European scholarship.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Perhaps more readily, because the Malthusian explanation for poverty in Third World countries has been a rather troublesome issue for scholars and planners in these countries, and it has been important to show that poverty in their countries is not somehow caused by the demographic misbehavior of ordinary people.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We will take up a related matter, theories about the uniqueness of the European family, at a later point in this chapter. For now, it is enough to say, simply, that the demographic arguments in support of the European miracle are utterly unconvincing. This holds true both for the theories grounded in the belief in baleful Malthusian forces and for those which assert that Europeans, uniquely, know how to avoid those forces.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Environment ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Environmental determinism, the theory that the natural environment strongly influences human affairs and human history, is no longer a popular doctrine, but it is still used quite regularly in explanations for the European &amp;quot;miracle.&amp;quot; The point should, however, be qualified: Environmental determinism, in the form it is used in these arguments today, is a &amp;quot;determinism&amp;quot; in a limited sense only. It does not claim that the environment explains everything, or that the environment is the most important explanatory factor. It is deterministic in the sense that it treats the environment as a separate, simple cause or &amp;quot;factor&amp;quot; not mediated by culture: something external to culture and influencing it from the outside. One finds each Eurocentric historian adding one or a number of environmentalistic arguments or factors to the mix, which, as a whole, explains the superiority of Europe. Even the historians who want to build their case mainly on social or political or intellectual foundations nonetheless manage (I know of very few exceptions) to throw one or more environmentalistic arguments into the stewpot, to give it body or flavor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Environmentalistic arguments can be stacked into two piles. One consists of the set of claims about the superior qualities of Europe&#039;s environment and how they help to explain the rise of Europe. The other pile consists of arguments as to why the nasty environments of other places have blocked development there. The two sorts of argument are—perhaps surprisingly—very different in form. Let us begin with the latter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Two classical environmentalistic theories have been used over and over again, and still remain in use, to explain the (supposed) nondevelopment of Africa and Asia. The first theory argues that tropical regions are innately inferior to cooler regions. This theory is used, for the most part, to dispose of Africa. The second theory argues that peoples in arid regions are held back from development because aridity necessitates irrigation, and irrigation along with related features of irrigated river-valley life leads, again necessarily, to the kind of civilization that is historically stagnant. This theory disposes of Asian civilizations, along with Egypt. (Most of Asia is not, in fact, arid.) I will discuss both of these theories, and more briefly a few other environmentalistic explanations for the backwardness of Africa and Asia.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Nasty-Tropical Africa ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The idea that tropical climates are nasty, and inhibit the forward march of civilization, is a very old one in European thought.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;For instance Montesquieu, in &#039;&#039;The Spirit of the Laws&#039;&#039; ((1748) 1949) &amp;quot;People are ... more vigorous in cold climates&amp;quot; (pt. xiv.2). &amp;quot;There are countries where the excess of heat enervates the body, and renders men ... slothful and dispirited&amp;quot; (pt. xv.7).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; During the nineteenth century this notion was widely used to show why Africans have (supposedly) remained uncivilized, and must naturally accept European colonial control; it was one of the core theories of classical diffusionism.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&amp;quot;Africa&amp;quot; almost always refers to &amp;quot;Africa south of the Sahara&amp;quot; in the discourse I am criticizing, so I will use &amp;quot;Africa&amp;quot; in the same sense in the present discussion.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It was routinely built in to theories about the uniqueness of Europe, the European miracle, although I must add that historians did not usually consider the reasons for Africa&#039;s nonrise worth bothering about: the matter was considered self-explanatory, and labors were devoted to the seemingly more important question why Asia (and North Africa) did not rise. And the tropical-nastiness theory is still quite regularly employed in historians&#039; arguments. It is, for instance, crucial to Jones&#039;s argument in &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039;. It is also significant in a special arena: the debates among historians about African slavery, the slave trade, and the slave plantation system. By contrast, geographers, who in general know something about the natural environment and have long grappled with the theories of environmental determinism, do not, today, take the nasty-tropics theory very seriously.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Blaut, &amp;quot;The Ecology of Tropical Farming Systems&amp;quot; (1963).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The tropical-nastiness doctrine consists mainly of three distinct theories. The first concerns itself with the supposed negative effect of a hot, humid climate on the human mind and body; the second, with the supposed inferiority of tropical climates for food production; the third, with the supposed prevalence of disease in tropical regions. Down to the 1940s, or thereabouts, there was some ambivalence among Europeans as to the thesis that humans cannot labor as effectively in the humid tropics as in other climates. The majority opinion had been that Africans can labor under the hot sun—a convenient rationalization for plantation slavery—but that Europeans cannot do so, although some diffusionist arguments were built on the idea that tropical conditions induce sloth, indolence, etc., in everyone, and thus the need for control-at-a-distance from temperate-climate civilizations. Eventually it became clear, from many sources of evidence including physiological studies, that human bodies of all sorts can labor as effectively in the tropics as elsewhere if the bodies in question have had time to adjust to tropical conditions.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See, for example, Collins and Roberts, eds., &#039;&#039;Capacity for Work in the Tropics&#039;&#039; (1988), which fails to find convincing evidence suggesting negative tropical effects.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Although the claim that people in humid tropical regions cannot think as well as people in temperate regions—the tropical sun &amp;quot;boils the brain&amp;quot;—was almost universally accepted by Europeans in the last century and was incorporated into some well-known theories about European civilizational superiority put forward (for instance by Huntington and Markham) in the first half of the present century, this theory, never grounded in evidence, is now rejected across the board. Eric L. Jones is one of the few present-day European historians who is unaware that this theory of &amp;quot;climatic energy&amp;quot; (as it was called in the old days) has been exploded. Not only does Jones accept it as valid but he gives it some considerable significance:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Civilizations had long been rising and falling in warm latitudes, although they appear to have been springing up farther and farther north. Such explanation as the literature offers for this shift is essentially climatic (Gilfillan 1920; Lambert 1971). On the one hand it correlates mean temperature and the output of human energy, and on the other it claims that in warm regions man was subject to the build-up of endoparasitic infestation which caused each society there to reach a plateau of attainment and then stagnate.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The two citations (Gilfillan, &amp;quot;The Coldward Course of Progress,&amp;quot; 1920, and Lambert, &amp;quot;The Role of Climate in the Economic Development of Nations,&amp;quot; 1971) are hardly indicative of modern scholarly literature.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It should be noted that &amp;quot;the literature&amp;quot; does not support any of this. The scholarly literature roundly rejects the theory of &amp;quot;climatic energy,&amp;quot; which has not in fact been seriously defended since the 1950s. Climatic determinism as a whole is almost a dead letter. There has been no northward &amp;quot;shift&amp;quot; of civilization (ancient civilizations were located from the equator to 45° latitude). The notion that tropical regions are so parasite-infested that cultures stagnate is false (it will briefly claim our attention later). Jones&#039;s general belief that hot climates are &amp;quot;debilitating&amp;quot; has little if any scholarly support, and does not in turn support the idea that Europe&#039;s climate led to a European miracle.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;India&#039;s &amp;quot;debilitating climate&amp;quot; is one reason why India fell behind Europe, according to Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), p. 198.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; There simply is no basis for arguing that midlatitude climates are superior to tropical climates in terms of psychological or physical effects on human beings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fruitfulness of tropical environments was much debated by nineteenth-century European scholars. Some argued that tropical regions are lush and bountiful, but used this proposition not as a basis for asserting high development potential but rather the contrary: tropical environments are too bountiful to offer what Arnold Toynbee might have called a sufficient challenge to humanity, and so progress did not take place except under colonial guidance. We deal with this thesis later in the chapter. Our concern now is with the exact opposite thesis, which asserts, quite simply, that tropical environments are miserably poor in their potential for agriculture and it is this that prevents tropical regions from developing. (The term &amp;quot;tropics,&amp;quot; or more properly &amp;quot;humid tropics,&amp;quot; refers to regions with no cold season and with moderate to high rainfall: roughly 750 mm. of rain or more per year. Most of sub-Saharan Africa falls within the humid tropics, as does most of southern and southeastern Asia and most of Middle and South America.) According to this thesis, little food can be produced on a given piece of land in the humid tropics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now this thesis—low agricultural productivity of tropical land—is hard to defend on the evidence, since population densities in the humid tropics range from very low (in parts of the Amazon Basin, for instance) to extraordinarily high (in Java, Bangladesh, El Salvador, Barbados, Rwanda, and many other regions). The argument is grounded, rather, in a theory about the nature of tropical soils. To put matters in perspective, the scientific study of tropical soils is a very young field; few contributions of any consequence can be dated earlier than World War II if we exclude highly particular studies about the soils used for plantation crops like sugar-cane.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Among the pioneer works which have importance for peasant agriculture, we may mention Fred Hardy&#039;s &amp;quot;Some Aspects of Tropical Soils&amp;quot; (1936) and various of his articles in &#039;&#039;Tropical Agriculture&#039;&#039;, and the work of Robert Pendleton (especially Pendleton, &amp;quot;Land Use in North-Eastern Thailand,&amp;quot; 1943, and Prescott and Pendleton, &#039;&#039;Laterites and Lateritic Soils&#039;&#039;, 1952), and G. Milne &amp;quot;A Soil Reconnaissance Journey Through Parts of Tanganyika Territory&amp;quot; (1947). The first comprehensive textbook on tropical soils embodying modern knowledge is Mohr and van Baren, &#039;&#039;Tropical Soils&#039;&#039; (1954).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The really crucial information, relevant to the proof or disproof of the traditional theories, was obtained in research carried out in a number of experimental centers in the late 1940s and thereafter, and then slowly disseminated to the world scholarly community. The result is that some historians (including some current writers about the &amp;quot;miracle&amp;quot;) can still, today, make use of quite fantastic theories about the supposedly evil nature of tropical soils. Some of these theories were refuted quite recently; others are now, today, very close to refutation; a few others, hardly defensible, nonetheless still lie around in the scholarly literature, unrefuted. A brief, only slightly technical, comment on these theories is necessary at this point of the discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The old standard theory about tropical soils runs about as follows: Because of the high heat and abundant rainfall in the humid tropics, these soils cannot accumulate organic topsoil, since organic matter decomposes rapidly and is quickly leached out as rainwater seeps downward in the soil. Tropical soils, therefore, are low in plant nutrients. Also, they are subject to severe erosion, partly because tropical landforms tend to have high average slopes, partly because high rainfall means high runoff and therefore much surface erosion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These two basic physical propositions, about infertility of the soil and erosion respectively, were then married to a cultural proposition, in the following argument. Because of the low fertility and erodibility of tropical soils, farmers must practice what is called &amp;quot;shifting agriculture.&amp;quot; (This is a farming system in which a field is prepared by clearing a piece of forest with the use of fire, and then, after one or more years of cultivation, is abandoned, another field being then cleared in turn and in its turn abandoned, in a continuous process of shifting fields.) The standard theory (as it was argued before the 1950s or thereabouts) then makes a series of sweeping generalizations about the combined effects of infertile, erodible tropical soils and shifting agriculture. It was claimed that farmers cannot return to the original piece of land after it has been abandoned and left fallow for some time, since the soils are too poor to regenerate and since burning the piece of land permanently damages the soil. Even where the environment is lush enough so that farmers can return and re-use each field, the production from each field will be less and less as the cycles of use and abandonment continue, and the soil will become more and more infertile until finally it is unusable. All of this implied that peasant communities would be unable to remain in any one region permanently; that the villages themselves would have to be moved as large expanses of forest land were used and then abandoned and the people needed to move elsewhere to find fresh, cultivable lands. The result would be grave indeed: a very sparse and highly mobile population with little or no chance of developing large-scale trade, cities, and stable states.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The entire argument was inserted at this point into world history and world geography. Most of sub-Saharan Africa is tropical. Therefore, shifting agriculture must be used there and no civilization can develop there. Or if civilization manages somehow to evolve to one extent or another, it must sooner or later collapse. (The decline of the classical lowland Mayan civilization was regularly used as the type example of this historical outcome; it is still so used by a few scholars.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This traditional model of tropical soils and shifting agriculture was gradually softened as more information became available to students of tropical soils and tropical agriculture. By the 1960s it was generally known to the specialist community (though not yet to the majority of historians and social scientists) that shifting agriculture does not damage the soil under normal—that is, typical and widespread—circumstances.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Nye and Greenland, &#039;&#039;The Soil Under Shifting Cultivation&#039;&#039; (1960); Blaut, &amp;quot;The Nature and Effects of Shifting Agriculture&amp;quot; (1962); Ahn, &#039;&#039;West African Soils&#039;&#039; (1970).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Almost never do shifting cultivators move their villages because of soil exhaustion. (It became known, also, that shifting cultivation had been widespread for many centuries in Europe, and there it had not apparently done any damage to the environment.) From this emerged a softer cultural model: if population densities are low, so that farmers can leave each abandoned field for the many years required for soil and vegetation regeneration, then shifting agriculture will remain an equilibrium farming system, and there will be no long-term deterioration of the environment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But even this modification would not much alter the historical judgment about Africa and some other tropical regions: historians might still believe that any civilization arising in such a tropical area cannot be very complex under ordinary circumstances, because a low population density of food producers would not seem to provide the basis for a substantial complex of urban centers, religious centers, states, and the like. (As to the lowland Mayan civilization, some scholars continued to claim that shifting agriculture had destroyed the subsistence base of that civilization, while others claimed that the decline and abandonment of cultural centers like Tikal had been due to other sorts of processes.) In any event, the prevailingly Malthusian view of peasants led to the general assumption that population would grow out of control and regions of tropical shifting agriculture would never rise very high in places like tropical Africa, anyway.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The model in this form is still current among historians. It is common in the European miracle literature, as the primary environmental basis for claiming that Africa could not have &amp;quot;risen&amp;quot; in the same way that Europe did. It is explicit in the work of some non-African Africanist historians.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Miller, &#039;&#039;Way of Death&#039;&#039; (1988); Curtin, &#039;&#039;The Rise and Fall of the Plantation Complex&#039;&#039; (1990). The view is echoed in many world history textbooks, for example, Roberts, &#039;&#039;The Hutchinson History of The World&#039;&#039; (1987), pp. 54-56; McNeill, &#039;&#039;A World History&#039;&#039; (1967), pp. 273-278.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Evidence is now available to reject this entire theory, the notion that tropical soils are bad for agriculture and therefore somehow inhibit human history. First of all, we now know that tropical soils are not inferior. They are different. Because of the higher rate of chemical and physical weathering under humid-tropical conditions, soil production from the underlying rock is much more rapid than is the case in cooler climates. Therefore, soils maintain their fertility in considerable degree from the dissolution of minerals, and much less from the accumulation of organic matter. Erosion tends to be more serious, but regeneration tends to be more rapid. Tropical soils that have developed on rocks that are rich in plant-nutrient minerals are exceptionally fertile. Those developed on rocks that are not nutrient-rich are exceptionally infertile. There is no basis for comparing tropical and temperate &amp;quot;averages&amp;quot;: neither is better; they are different.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Evidence is also available now to reject the old view of shifting agriculture. Farmers practice it on poor soils, being careful not to let fires get out of control. They use a great number of techniques to assist the natural vegetation to regenerate, and to increase soil fertility in the cultivated fields, including green and animal manuring. When there is a land shortage, the shifting rotation is shortened, by the use of various techniques of intensification such as mounding or terracing, increased labor applied to such matters as weeding, adoption of different crops and different varieties, and many more.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Wilken, &#039;&#039;Good Farmers: Traditional Agricultural Resource Management in Mexico and Central America&#039;&#039; (1987); also Nye and Greenland, &#039;&#039;The Soil Under Shifting Agriculture&#039;&#039; (1960); Blaut, &amp;quot;The Ecology of Tropical Farming Systems&amp;quot; (1963).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The correlation between shifting agriculture and low population density is a function of history, not ecology. In the Americas it reflects in part the post-Columbian depopulation. (The Amazon Basin, which today may have a farming population of perhaps one million, probably had seven times that number in 1492.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Denevan, &#039;&#039;The Native Population of the Americas in 1492&#039;&#039; (1976).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;) In part also it reflects the often unnoticed fact that in most regions of the American tropics giant cattle ranches have pushed farmers off the better land, giving a statistical appearance of low population density: cattle have replaced people.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Cockburn and Hecht, &#039;&#039;The Fate of the Forest&#039;&#039; (1989).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The same process occurred in white-settled regions of southern Africa. Elsewhere in tropical Africa, most farmers practice forms of agriculture that should not be described as shifting agriculture except in marginal regions, like mountainsides and semi-arid wastes.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;These marginal areas often are regions in which agriculture is practiced, in preference to some less intensive system of land use, because human communities have been pushed off better land by historical forces, notably colonialism.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Typically, they are sedentary or semisedentary farming systems, involving such things as semipermanent yam mounds and tree-crop farming, or irrigated farming, or mixed farming, or they are systems in which the period of cultivation exceeds the period of fallow, and fertility is maintained by many different cultural practices including the use of green and animal manure. But the most important generalization is this simple one: where there is soil degradation, and hunger, and poor farming, it reflects cultural causes from recent history or colonial history. It does not reflect inherent limitations of tropical agriculture and it does not reflect technological ignorance on the part of farmers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A few variant theories about the low food production potential of the humid-tropical in general and Africa in particular are invoked by some historians. Some claim that Africans were unable even to farm in Africa&#039;s humid-tropical regions until new technology, invented by non-Africans, diffused into the continent. One form of this argument claims that ironworking was brought into Africa a little over 2,000 years ago, perhaps by the Romans, and only then were Africans able to tackle the tropical forests.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;For a typical instance, the Oxford historian J. M. Roberts, in his popular world history textbook, &#039;&#039;The Hutchinson History of the World&#039;&#039; (1987), makes the following quite ignorant statement: &amp;quot;Probably the greatest importance of (the) spread of iron-working (in tropical Africa) was the difference it made to agriculture. It made possible a new penetration of the forests, new tilling of the soil (which may be connected with the arrival of new food-crops from Asia ... This suggests once again the important limiting factor of the African environment. Most of the continent&#039;s history is the story of response to influences from the outside (including iron-working and new crops)&amp;quot; (pp. 511-512). African farmers, like farmers in Europe and many other regions, practiced agriculture with stone tools before iron arrived, and continued to do so afterward whenever and wherever iron was hard to obtain. On the age of ironworking in tropical Africa, see, for example, Wai-Andah, &amp;quot;West Africa Before the Seventh Century&amp;quot; (1981) and Sinclair, &amp;quot;Archeology in Eastern Africa&amp;quot; (1991).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Since shifting agriculture was practiced with stone implements in ancient Europe, and since ironworking appeared in Africa—possibly after independent invention—around 800 B.C. or earlier, this theory is invalid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An even more outlandish theory builds on the fact that some Southeast Asian crops diffused into East Africa two millennia ago. Some historians blandly assert that Africans could not farm in the tropical forests until these tropical crops, domesticated by non-Africans, became available for planting in the African forests.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See, for example, Roberts (note 53 above); also Irwin, &amp;quot;Sub-Saharan Africa,&amp;quot; in Garraty and Gay, eds. &#039;&#039;The Columbia History of the World&#039;&#039; (1981), p. 299.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It has, in fact, been well known for a long time that Africans domesticated a great number of crops for humid-tropical regions, notably many varieties of the yam (&#039;&#039;Dioscorea&#039;&#039; spp.) the prime staple food there.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See for instance Irvine&#039;s classical work, &#039;&#039;A Textbook of West African Agriculture&#039;&#039; (1934); Coursey, &#039;&#039;Yams&#039;&#039; (1967).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Both of these diffusionist myths seem to be connected to an important colonialist belief—now important as an excuse for apartheid in South Africa. The belief is that advanced African cultures, with agriculture, trade, and states, expanded southward through the continent only very late in history, mainly because of the forbidding nature of the tropical part of the continent which held back their southward movement. According to this myth of emptiness (see Chapter 1), they had not arrived in (most of) South Africa when the Europeans took over that region, and supporters of white supremacy in South Africa claim, on this basis, that whites, having arrived first, have political and economic rights to own the land of South Africa.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;According to Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), &amp;quot;the Negroid peoples ... were still pushing east and south into the territories of the pygmies and the bushmen when the Boers undertook the Great Trek north from the Cape in the 1830s,&amp;quot; (p. 155). Also see Roberts &#039;&#039;The Hutchinson History of the World&#039;&#039; (1987), p. 178.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In fact, the expansion of agricultural peoples in Africa occurred thousands of years ago; recent archaeology has shown that rain forest regions were settled by farmers at least 3,000 years ago, and whites did not arrive first in South Africa.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another variant of the myth of tropical nastiness as applied to Africa is the notion that rainfall variability in tropical Africa is uniquely and devastatingly high, such that agriculture could not, in precolonial times, be dependably practiced and famines were frequent and widespread. This then leads into various arguments about African backwardness. For some historians (among them Philip Curtin) there was a basic tendency toward mobility of populations and internal slave trading; for others (notoriously Joseph Miller), there was savagery and cannibalism.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Curtin, &#039;&#039;Economic Change in Pre-Colonial Africa&#039;&#039; (1975); Curtin, &#039;&#039;The Rise and Fall of the Plantation Complex&#039;&#039; (1990); Miller, &#039;&#039;Way of Death&#039;&#039; (1988).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; These historians belong to what I will call the &amp;quot;absolutionist&amp;quot; school of Eurocentric Africanist history, which absolves Europeans of most of the responsibility for slavery and the problems of modern Africa by finding explanations for such matters within Africa itself, often in the African environment. The European miracle historians make regular use of these arguments for purposes of comparison. It happens to be the case that rainfall variability is a serious problem in all semi-arid regions, including the Sahel zone south of the Sahara in Africa and also the Great Plains in the central United States, the steppes of Russia, and so on. Africa is not unique. The more humid parts of this continent do not have a peculiar problem of climatic uncertainty: this is a historians&#039; myth, partly traditional, partly resurrected after the recent Sahelian-Sudanic famines. The latter did not reflect drought-proneness of the region. They reflected human problems, mostly inherited from the colonial period, which became disasters when ordinary rainfall cycles went through their dry phases.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Wisner and Mbithi, &amp;quot;Drought in Eastern Kenya&amp;quot; (1974); Wisner, &#039;&#039;Power and Need in Africa&#039;&#039; (1989); O&#039;Keefe and Wisner, &amp;quot;African Drought: The State of the Game&amp;quot; (1975).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Much the same sort of argument applies to other parts of the tropics. In southern and southeastern Asia we tend, broadly, to find permanent, that is, sedentary, agriculture on lands with relatively high fertility, and shifting agriculture or tree crops on lands with low fertility. The experience of colonialism during the past two centuries or so has muddled that picture somewhat, since there have been major population movements and large population increases in some areas—with consequent distortions of farming systems in reaction to land shortage and other nonenvironmental pressures. Yet the generalization still holds in regard to the environment: tropical conditions do not carry the implication of poor agricultural potential.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The same arguments apply, with no need for qualification, in Western Hemisphere agriculture. In relatively limited parts of the South American rain forest the ecosystem is so fragile, as a result of local geological conditions (rocks forming infertile kaolinitic clay soils in some areas, almost pure sands in other areas), that cropping systems must employ shifting agriculture (or tree crops). But such areas are the exception within the present-day distribution of rain forest environments. In general, the great sweep of Amazonian and Guianan rain forest is a zone of non-sedentary agriculture because of cultural-historical factors, notably depopulation and the massive increase in cattle ranching. It is in fact cattle ranching, and not shifting agriculture, that leads to agriculturally caused long-term environmental degradation in the rainforest region, because (1) ranchers burn forest to the maximum extent possible and without control, in order to expand the area of pasture, and (2) the resulting pasture leads to steady soil degradation because coarse pasture grasses do not maintain the soil ecosystem as does the original forest. Shifting cultivators, by contrast, burn only under controlled conditions, burn small areas only, and carefully encourage the regrowth of forest. If the forest disappears, their livelihood disappears. Shifting agriculturists should not be blamed for deforestation anywhere in the humid tropics. See Hecht and Cockburn, &#039;&#039;The Fate of the Forest&#039;&#039; (1989); Blaut, &amp;quot;The Nature and Effects of Shifting Agriculture&amp;quot; (1963).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What of the opposing theory, that the tropics are lush and bountiful? Down through the middle of the nineteenth century this theory was very widely accepted, and also this corollary: Since the fruits of the earth are so easily obtained in tropical climes, humans do not have to exert themselves to make a living. And so they do not progress. The argument was then woven into many different theories. Buckle put forward one such theory.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Buckle, &#039;&#039;The History of Civilization in England&#039;&#039;, 2nd ed., (1913), chap. 2. Also see Bowler, &#039;&#039;The Invention of Progress&#039;&#039; (1989), pp. 28-29.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Marx put forward another, rather tersely, in a footnote in Volume 1 of &#039;&#039;Capital&#039;&#039;, asserting without discussion that tropical regions do not develop toward capitalism because here &amp;quot;Nature is too lavish . . . She does not impose upon [man] any necessity to develop himself.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Marx, &#039;&#039;Capital&#039;&#039;, vol. 1 (1976), p. 513n.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; This brief comment seems to be the only occasion on which Marx raised the question why humid-tropical regions, including Africa, did not develop as Europe did.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The bountiful-tropics theory is still used today in some theories that try to explain the uniqueness of Europe&#039;s rise. I suppose that every European child of our own time has seen some version of the cartoon showing the native sitting under the coconut tree, waiting patiently for his food to drop into his hands. This is not merely a relic of oldtime thought or an implicit theory. Eric L. Jones uses the bountiful-tropics theory in &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039;. (In West Africa &amp;quot;living was easy.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Jones in fact manages to use both of the opposing theories toward the same end. In wetter regions of Africa &amp;quot;living was easy.&amp;quot; In drier areas &amp;quot;agriculture was not productive.&amp;quot; Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), p. 154. Also see Jones, &#039;&#039;Growth Recuring: Economic Change in World History&#039;&#039; (1988).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;) John A. Hall uses it.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&amp;quot;In Africa the bountifulness and extent of the land makes for a mobile peasantry, necessarily therefore poor material on which to build states. Something like this is probably true of all slash-and-burn agriculture,&amp;quot; John Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties&#039;&#039; (1985), p. 27. (&amp;quot;Slash-and-burn agriculture&amp;quot; is shifting agriculture.)&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Occasionally it is used by Marxists, faithful to the letter of Marx&#039;s comment quoted above.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Laibman, &amp;quot;Modes of Production and Theories of Transition&amp;quot; (1984), p. 284. However, Laibman&#039;s overall argument is not at all Eurocentric.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Probably there is no need to explain why these bountiful-tropics theories are unacceptable, since this—as we have seen—is done time and again by scholars who insist that tropical regions are not bountiful; rather, they are barren and nasty. Neither the one view nor the other makes sense. And note that both are used toward the same end: to show that tropical regions have inferior potential in history.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, we come to the theory that tropical environments are so disease-ridden that historical progress there is slowed, stopped, or prevented. Some historians develop this argument specifically with reference to Africa. Some others apply it sweepingly to all tropical regions: for Eric L. Jones it is a major reason why both Asia and Africa remained backward by comparison to Europe. Like the tropical-nastiness theories discussed previously, this one is traditional in European thought, and this fact is critically important for an understanding of the survival of the theory down to the present and its use in the European miracle paradigm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One of the axioms of classical diffusionism, as we have seen in Chapter 1, is the idea that diseases and other evil things naturally counterdiffuse into Europe from non-Europe. It was therefore assumed by many scholars (including, for instance, Buckle) that non-Europe is both the source and the natural home of many—and the worst—maladies.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Buckle, &#039;&#039;History of Civilization in England&#039;&#039;, vol. 1, 2nd ed. (1913), p. 93: &amp;quot;(The) great plagues by which Europe has at different periods been scourged, have, for the most part, proceeded from the East, which is their natural birthplace, and where they are most fatal. Indeed, of those cruel diseases now existing in Europe, scarcely one is indigenous; and the worst of them were imported from tropical countries in and after the first century of the Christian era.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; That axiomatic belief is still with us: plagues from the Black Death to AIDS are still assumed—for it is always an assumption, whether or not reinforced by evidence—to come from the non-European world.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The theory that the HIV virus which causes AIDS in humans is another one of these African plagues descending upon the Western World may very well be just the newest myth in this old diffusionist tradition. Whether or not this virus originated in Africa, which has not been proven, the myth has already taken on ugly overtones, as in the completely unfounded (yet classical) belief that AIDS was transmitted from monkeys to humans because of some strange sexual practices in some obscure African tribes. (This myth is naively reported in Shannon and Pyle, &amp;quot;The Origin and Diffusion of AIDS,&amp;quot; 1989. See the critique of this paper by Watts and Okello, &amp;quot;Medical Geography and AIDS,&amp;quot; 1990. Also see R. C. and R. J. Chirimuuta, &#039;&#039;AIDS, Africa and racism&#039;&#039;, 2nd ed., 1989.)&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This foundation belief was reinforced during the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries by the reports of upper-class European travelers about the, to them, dirty, disgusting, diseased communities they found outside of Europe. This was both a class phenomenon and a cultural one: alien lifeways necessarily seemed to be unhealthy. But the belief gained powerful reinforcement during the nineteenth century, when the growing wealth and modernization of (much of) Europe led to a dramatic improvement in health conditions, grounded in general improvement in living conditions, improved sanitation, and, finally, progress in medicine. Europe, therefore, seemed to be somehow healthy, non-Europe, somehow unhealthy. This error is still very widespread. Underdeveloped countries are poor. With poverty comes ill health. But the ill health is thought, incorrectly, to somehow stem from the natural environments of these regions or from the cultures of their inhabitants, not from poverty. However disease-ridden India, Africa, China, etc., may have been in this period, Europe itself had been just as disease-ridden a century or so earlier (a fact known in part from the demographic facts about life expectancy of ordinary Europeans down to the eighteenth century).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this same period European colonial territories were expanding, and it became evident that Europeans living in colonies tended to fall prey to various kinds of exotic diseases. The most extreme case apparently was West Africa, which was called in those times &amp;quot;the white man&#039;s grave.&amp;quot; Here the insecurity of the quite small coastal settlements—colonial territories in sub-Saharan Africa did not really expand until very late in the nineteenth century—combined with the massive effects of the movement of slaves (many of whom died in these settlements) produced peculiarly unhealthy conditions, though the Europeans thought the source of the problem was the innate unhealthfulness of Africa itself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the important diseases of humans and their domesticated animals are not peculiarly tropical. Smallpox, typhoid, pneumonia, diphtheria, measles, bubonic plague, anthrax, and many other diseases are found across many physical environments, and their severity from place to place tends to reflect, more than anything else, conditions of human poverty, crowding, and the like. To some extent this is true even of the supposedly &amp;quot;tropical diseases,&amp;quot; such as malaria (which, in fact, used to plague extratropical areas, including New York). Some forms of malaria tend to be associated with stagnant water, and thus with irrigated agriculture, in a wide range of climates. Other forms, including some of the most serious ones, are associated with tropical forest conditions, the mosquito vector often breeding in bromeliad growths on the trees themselves. It is true that these forms of malaria are especially associated with shifting cultivation in the humid tropics. But farmers spend relatively little time in the forest, if indeed there is forest. And they develop immunities such that malaria does not ravage their communities (as it does ravage communities of foreigners in their midst: traders, colonial military personnel, and so on).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The question is: after all such matters have been taken into consideration, is there, then, a remainder that can be called &amp;quot;the innate unhealthiness of the tropics?&amp;quot; Probably the answer is no.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Although this generalization is now widely accepted, some historians cling tenaciously to the idea that Africa is and always has been a uniquely disease-ridden place. This is given as one reason for Africa&#039;s (supposed) marginal role in world history, at least in modern world history. (According to William McNeill, disease &amp;quot;more than anything else, is why Africa remained backward in the development of civilization when compared to temperate lands.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;McNeill, &#039;&#039;Plagues and Peoples&#039;&#039; (1976), p. 43.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;) In the view of some of the absolutonist historians, notably Curtin, the disease-ridden character of West and Central Africa in and after the sixteenth century is a key part of the explanation for the complementary facts that this region became the source of slaves for the Atlantic plantation economy and that this region, instead of &amp;quot;rising&amp;quot; with the growth of the Atlantic economy, instead remained undeveloped. It is important to put this theory into perspective in terms of the confrontation mentioned at the beginning of this chapter between traditional European historians and the Third-Worldist, revisionist school. Traditional scholars (at least those of the absolutonist school) claim that Africa in the sixteenth century had a rather small and mobile population, with little development of complex civilization and state organization, and with slave raiding and slave trading as important features of its society. Africa had not risen above this very low level of civilization mainly because of the prevalence of human and animal diseases—with other environmental factors of the sort previously discussed being added on as additional factors. Africa thus quite naturally became the prime source of plantation slaves; and, also naturally, the slave trade did not fundamentally alter the reality of African life.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Third World historians tend to dispute all of this. Africa was densely populated before the slave trade, and the slave trade utterly devastated the continent, destroying states and civilizations, depopulating vast regions, and leading, overall, to disastrous underdevelopment. The slave trade mainly reflected Europe&#039;s power relative to coastal African societies in the seventeenth century and thereafter, in consequence of the immensely profitable American plantations and—as we discuss in Chapter 4—the fact that militarily and commercially powerful West African states were mostly located some distance from the coast. Disease increased in intensity because of the devastation caused by the slave trade: depopulation, the abandonment of large areas formerly cultivated and grazed (now turned to forest and scrub), wars, economic decline, and so on. One crucial example of this devastation has to do with the tsetse fly and trypanosomiasis or African sleeping sickness. Traditional scholars claim that tsetse fly infestation prevented Africans from developing extensive cattle herding in earlier times and in many other ways contributed to historical stagnation. The response is that trypanosomiasis, like anthrax, is a disease with many mammalian hosts. Depopulation led to the massive expansion of wastelands, and of wild animal host populations, and thus to the spread of conditions in which the tsetse fly could flourish. This in turn changed trypanosomiasis from an endemic disease to which both humans and cattle had some immunity and exposure, which was kept in check by the relatively full occupation of lands, into a devastating disease that, since the end of the last century, has indeed prevented the development of animal husbandry in some areas of Africa. There is considerable evidence that the expansion of bushland led to the expansion of tsetse-fly-infested areas and thus to economic and social misery.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See, for instance, Giblin, &amp;quot;Trypanosomiasis Control in African History: An Evaded Issue?&amp;quot; (1990); Turshen, &amp;quot;Population Growth and the Deterioration of Health: Mainland Tanzania, 1920-1960&amp;quot; (1987).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Beyond this, there is little solid evidence either way about the history of health conditions in Africa and among Africans (not colonial visitors), and there are many reasons to doubt the inherited diffusionist assumptions and prejudices on this matter. In any event, one cannot make a case that disease was an independent force that &amp;quot;blocked&amp;quot; development in sub-Saharan Africa.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Arid, Despotic Asia ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Asia is a large place and contains a large variety of environments. There is, understandably, a very long and varied list of traditional environmentalistic arguments, most of them particular to some one part of Asia and inapplicable to other parts. Back in the early nineteenth century, a pious form of environmental determinism prevailed in geography, and it seemed sensible to invoke a single explanation for all of this variety: God had placed different natural obstacles in the paths of different Asian peoples—heat in one place, cold in another, drought in a third. Today it is more common to find, among historians writing about the &amp;quot;European miracle,&amp;quot; not a list of Asia&#039;s environmental infirmities but rather a set of separate comparative judgments, each centered on Europe, and each referring to a specific period in European history. Europe, or some part of Europe, at some particular time, was superior to all of Asia in environmental qualities X and Y and Z. Or, more typically, the comparison will invoke environmental obstacles for one Asian region, political obstacles for another, religious obstacles for a third, and so on, in a very eclectic sort of argument.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For these reasons I will not review all the environmentalistic theories as to why Asia supposedly remained backward in comparison to Europe. I will deal with the comparative judgments about climate, landforms, and so on, one by one, in the following section of this chapter (&amp;quot;Temperate Europe&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is, however, one very large and coherent theory that is used today, much as it was in the last century, to deal with Asia as a whole in one grand and sweeping judgment of inferiority. This theory has a number of variants which are known by various names, among them &amp;quot;the Asiatic mode of production,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;hydraulic society,&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Oriental despotism.&amp;quot; The theory is not usually thought of as an example of environmental determinism, since it seems to start its argument with technology, claiming that irrigation-based (&amp;quot;hydraulic&amp;quot;) societies have certain highly distinctive characteristics that inhibit historical development. But one of the roots of this argument is environmental. It is the claim that aridity in Asia made irrigation necessary. One can properly ask how a theory of this sort can be applied to parts of Asia that are not at all arid. (It has even been invoked as an explanation for Stalinism in wet, cold Russia.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Wittfogel, &#039;&#039;Oriental Despotism&#039;&#039; (1957).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;) To understand this contradiction, and to understand accordingly why this theory is untenable in all its forms and variants, we must look briefly at the history of the doctrine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
European writers of the past half-millennium have tended to view Asia as a place where people are inherently unfree and society is inherently unchanging. It would take us far afield to go into the evolution of this belief, but by the eighteenth century it had become a significant part of the emerging doctrine of diffusionism.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Venturi &amp;quot;The History of the Concept of &#039;Oriental Despotism&#039; in Europe&amp;quot; (1963); P. Anderson, &#039;&#039;Lineages of the Absolute State&#039;&#039; (1974); B. Chandra, &amp;quot;Karl Marx, His Theories of Asian Societies, and Colonial Rule&amp;quot; (1981).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It was accepted as an axiomatic truth, rarely questioned, but efforts were made to explain this inherent &amp;quot;Oriental despotism&amp;quot; (as it came to be called) in terms of everything from theology to race to environment. The belief seems to have been applied mainly to the Ottoman Empire, which was in that period a political and military threat to some European societies and a commercial threat to others, until the late eighteenth-century expansion of direct European colonialism in India and Southeast Asia gave the theory new functions. Not only was the notion of Oriental despotism useful as a justification and rationalization for colonial expansion, but it became the basis for colonial legal doctrines that were being fashioned at that time. In Asia, it was decided, there is no private property in land because the ruler, despotically, owns everything. Therefore, when we Europeans depose the ruler, we own everything. And if we take over a despotic state, we acquire the rights of despotic rule over a people who were unfree to begin with. (But European rule, however despotic—colonies had no democracy—was described as bestowing &amp;quot;freedom.&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The modern form of Oriental despotism was often connected back to the biblical &amp;quot;Orient.&amp;quot; When modern Asian societies were described as &amp;quot;stagnant,&amp;quot; it seemed fair to assert that they basically retained the character described for them in the Old Testament. (The Old Testament, we recall, spoke of the existence of great cities, empires, agriculture, etc.) While it was necessary to explain modern wonders like the Taj Mahal and great modern Asian states, it was not difficult to view these as relatively minor advances over the original biblical civilization, and to find secondary explanations for the evident fact that Asian civilizations had advanced somewhat—but long ago they had ceased to advance, and so remained essentially biblical and essentially stagnant.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Similar judgments are still commonly made by theoreticians of the European miracle. For instance, John Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties&#039;&#039; (1985), p. 12: &amp;quot;Chinese society was stuck in the same stage for over two thousand years, while Europe, in comparison, progressed like a champion hurdler.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I think it likely that the geographical connection between aridity and &amp;quot;Orient&amp;quot; comes partly from this source, that is, from the biblical images of arid regions like Mesopotamia and Egypt. Partly, no doubt, it comes from the fact that early modern Europe, down through the mid-eighteenth century, thought mainly of the dry western Asian regions, the Ottoman realm and the Persian-Inner-Asian region, as &amp;quot;the Orient,&amp;quot; because the farther Orient, from India to Japan, was still somewhat remote from European attention. In any event, early nineteenth-century geographers like the great Karl Ritter were describing one special type of geographical-cultural system, the type associated with Asian civilizations of the great river valleys of arid Asia and northeastern Africa, notably the Nile, the Tigris-Euphrates, the Indus, and smaller valleys of similar character, and ascribing the traditional Asiatic traits of despotism to regions of this type. They seem to have extended this model somehow to comprehend the river valleys of wetter parts of Asia, through a logical leap from the idea of irrigated river-valley civilizations in arid regions to irrigated river-valley civilizations in Asia as a whole.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The general association of Oriental despotism with river-valley civilizations, from Egypt to China, was commonplace in the nineteenth century.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;And also earlier. It is discussed for instance by Montesquieu, Bernier, Adam Smith, and Hegel (see, for instance, &amp;quot;Introduction,&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;The Oriental World&amp;quot; in Hegel&#039;s &#039;&#039;Philosophy of History&#039;&#039;, 1956). Also see the historical reviews in Venturi, &amp;quot;The History of the Concept of &#039;Oriental Despotism&#039; in Europe&amp;quot; (1963); P. Anderson, &#039;&#039;Lineages of the Absolute State&#039;&#039; (1974); and B. Chandra, &amp;quot;Karl Marx, his Theories of Asian Societies, and Colonial Review&amp;quot; (1981).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Marx and Engels, however, took the idea a definitive step forward by advancing a theory that derived Oriental despotism from propositions about aridity and irrigation.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;This idea, too, had its forerunners. Possibly Marx got the idea from Karl Ritter, his professor of geography at Berlin.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In the 1850s Marx and Engels were, for the first time, seriously confronting the question of how their essential theory of historical evolution could be applied on a world scale. It needs to be said first that they were probably the most skeptical European thinkers of their time as regards all of the traditional and (as they insisted) elitist social theories then in vogue. But their skepticism had inevitable limits, since they were products of an elitist German education and since they knew almost nothing about the world outside of Europe apart from what they learned in the press, and in books and official papers presenting the colonial point of view with all its prejudices. Accordingly, Marx and Engels did not seriously question the prevailing doctrine that the Orient is in some sense despotic and to some degree historically stagnant and unprogressive. But their skepticism about European social theory, with its elitist foundations, immunized them from the usual explanations for Asian despotism and stagnation. Asians were no less rational than Europeans, and no less willing to struggle against economic exploitation. This reasoning led Marx and Engels to speculate that the cause of Asiatic despotism and unprogressiveness lay, not in human society, but in the natural environment. In Asia, it appeared, social evolution had not led to private property ownership: the ruler, despotically, owned the land, except where it remained as original communal property. Hence this speculation from Engels:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The absence of property in land is indeed the key to the whole of the East. Herein lies its political and religious history. But how does it come about that the Orientals did not arrive at landed property, even in its feudal form? I think it is mainly due to the climate, taken in connection with the nature of the soil, especially with the great stretches of desert which extend from the Sahara straight across Arabia, Persia, India and Tartary up to the highest Asian plateau. Artificial irrigation is here the first condition of agriculture. ... An Oriental government never had more than three departments: finance (plunder at home), war (plunder at home and abroad), and public works.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Marx and Engels, &#039;&#039;Selected Correspondence&#039;&#039; (1975).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This theory was advanced very tentatively by Marx and Engels, and was modified in later writings; it appears that Engels rejected it altogether in his late writings.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Marx and Engels considered other factors as well, and it is fair to say that their analysis remained speculative. I believe that Engels withdrew from the idea of &amp;quot;Oriental despotism&amp;quot; in late life. See the discussion of this topic in P. Anderson, &#039;&#039;Lineages of the Absolute State&#039;&#039; (1974); Blaut, &amp;quot;Colonialism and the Rise of Capitalism&amp;quot; (1989); and B. Chandra, &amp;quot;Karl Marx, His Theories of Asian Societies, and Colonial Rule&amp;quot; (1981).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Our interest lies in the fact that the environmentalistic component remains influential today, even though it is now obvious that Marx and Engels were mistaken in the notion that Asia is arid. The theory nonetheless has had an effect on recent Marxist discussions about the European rise of capitalism and the (supposed) nonrise of capitalism in Asia.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Laibman, &amp;quot;Modes of Production and Theories of Transition&amp;quot; (1984), and Bailey and Llobera, &#039;&#039;The Asiatic Mode of Production&#039;&#039; (1981).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; More crucially, it has been woven into the mainstream European miracle literature in an interesting intellectual sea change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Max Weber, early in the present century, and Karl Wittfogel, at midcentury, are probably the key figures in the transformation of this rather archaic doctrine into a modern environmentalistic argument for the European miracle. Weber had little to say about the natural environment per se. Drawing on various scholarly ideas which were in circulation in turn-of-the-century Europe, including Marxian ideas, he argued that the development of private property in Europe&#039;s Antiquity and Middle Ages was indeed one of the primary features of social evolution toward capitalism. He stressed what he saw as a fundamental difference between the rise of feudal (seigneurial) property, which was close to, and moving toward, full private property, and a contrasting form that he associated with the Asian river-valley civilizations (and ancient Egypt). He saw that social form as being associated closely with the need to irrigate in such environments, hence associated, inferentially, with the environment. These latter societies were, he said, despotic and land was not, in general, passed fully into the hands of officials, but rather lent to them on temporary tenure, on condition of service, as a means of providing them with rental income, men for military levies, and so on. Irrigation required collective labor appropriation under despotic rule, for maintenance of canals and waterworks. In forested lands of Europe, such despotic rule over peasants had not been needed.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Weber, &#039;&#039;The Agrarian Sociology of Ancient Civilizations&#039;&#039; (1976), pp. 84, 131, 157, &#039;&#039;The Religion of China&#039;&#039; (1951), pp. 16, 21, 25, and &amp;quot;The Origin of Seigneurial Proprietorship,&amp;quot; part 1, chap. 3, esp. pp. 56-57 in &#039;&#039;General Economic History&#039;&#039; (1981). Also see McNeill, &#039;&#039;Plagues and Peoples&#039;&#039; (1976), pp. 93, 207, 259.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Thus in Greece and elsewhere in Europe yeoman farmers, individualists, became the signature of rural society. Cities, instead of being mainly the seat of despotic power, became truly urban. Thus, in general, there was a peculiarly western trajectory, toward modern urban and capitalist society.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The crucial factor which made Near Eastern development so different (from Greek development) was the need for irrigation systems, as a result of which the cities were closely connected with building canals and constant regulation of waters and rivers, all of which demanded the existence of a unified bureaucracy. There was an irreversible character to this development, and with it went subjugation of the individual. ... On the other hand in Greece ... the position of the monarchs declined ... and so began a development which ended ... with an army recruited from yeoman farmers who provided their own arms. Political power necessarily passed to this class, and therewith started to emerge that purely secular civilization which characterized Greek society and caused capitalist development in Greece to differ from that in the Near East.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Weber, &#039;&#039;The Agrarian Sociology of Ancient Civilizations&#039;&#039; (1976), pp. 157-158. Also, on p. 84: &amp;quot;The basis of the economy (in Egypt) was irrigation, for this was the crucial factor in all exploitation of land resources. Every new settlement demanded construction of a canal ... Now canal construction is necessarily a large-scale operation, demanding some sort of collective social organization; it is very different from the relatively individualistic activity of clearing virgin forest. Here then is the fundamental economic cause for the overwhelmingly dominant position of the monarchy in Mesopotamia (and) Egypt.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Weber&#039;s formulation of the difference between Oriental societies and Western societies has become one of the fundamental arguments of the miracle theory as it is put forward in our own time. But Weber did not put firmly in place one important part of the edifice. This is the matter of showing why irrigation societies acquired the special characteristics assigned to them: despotism and stagnation, and, beyond that, lack of private property, lack of full urban development, and so on. This essential technical and environmental elaboration of the theory was introduced in 1955 by Karl Wittfogel, in his book &#039;&#039;Oriental Despotism&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wittfogel, an ex-Marxist who started his argument with the Marxian proposition which we have discussed, tried to show that societies grounded in irrigation, &amp;quot;hydraulic societies&amp;quot; as he called them, are necessarily despotic and must necessarily have the kinds of social and political properties that earlier writers had associated with Oriental despotism. The same is true of societies that somehow acquire-at-a-distance the characteristics of hydraulic societies, by diffusion. (Hence, according to Wittfogel, nonhydraulic Soviet Russia became despotic.) Wittfogel&#039;s reasoning was environmentalistic, in a manner less ignorant of physical geography than Marx and Weber but nonetheless quite naive. Wittfogel believed that irrigating a tract of land necessarily, deterministically, increases its productivity. Some societies will thus choose to adopt irrigated agriculture, and so the great river valleys of Asia were occupied. But, according to Wittfogel, irrigation requires major public works for the creation and maintenance of canals, and hence requires a command-type political structure—he says this was the origin of the state as a political form—which also functions to control the distribution of water.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus hydraulic societies are necessarily despotic. There are a number of fallacies in this argument, as many scholars have pointed out. Three of the fallacies concern the environmental proposition, the idea that irrigation necessarily increases productivity massively, and therefore leads to the development of complex social stratification, the state, and so on. First fallacy: irrigation increases productivity substantially only when the ecologically limiting factor on crop growth is lack of water; but quite often—in Asia as elsewhere—this is not the case. This means that the elaboration of great irrigation systems is not a natural response to the environment. Rather, a small-scale irrigation system in a river-valley can become enlarged into the great system as an effect, not a cause, of political and social inequality: pressure to deliver surplus pushes the process, enlarges the irrigation network, and leads, logically, to ever greater inequality. In other words, the large irrigation systems are preceded by, and explained by, existing despotism or social complexity, not by environmental mandates. (Wittfogel argues in roughly the opposite direction: the need to irrigate in a dry region leads a society to develop coercive command structures to manage the irrigation system, and thence leads to class oppression and the state—and despotic Oriental civilization.) The one ecological generalization that makes undoubted sense is the correlation of land productivity with population size and density, which is basic to the elaboration of social hierarchies and such things as religious ceremonial centers and states. But irrigation does not, magically, make land productive. Some land is highly productive without it. In the classical Mesopotamian and Nile cases we do not know whether the ruling classes forced increases in productivity, and this created the large irrigation systems, or whether the process worked the other way around. The second fallacy is the belief that the irrigation of truly dry river valleys made these valleys immensely productive, overall. Irrigation allowed agriculture to be practiced in lands otherwise desertic, but water was always in short supply and we know very little about crop yields. What we do know is that the really high productivity, and large social entities (in terms of population size as well as density), were found in wetter regions, mainly rice-farming regions, where elaborate irrigation systems usually were unnecessary for agriculture (and sometimes rainwater alone filled the paddies, as on the lower Irrawaddy plain and part of northern Luzon). Third fallacy: There is good reason to believe that some of the oldest civilizations were grounded not in irrigation, but in drainage, an ecological response that does not ordinarily involve large-scale waterworks. Drainage systems seem to have preceded irrigation in the earliest Mesoamerican civilizations. It is quite possible that the earliest Eastern Hemisphere irrigation systems, in such places as the Nile, the Tigris-Euphrates, the Indus, the Wei, the Yellow, the Niger, etc., were originally drainage systems, opening up swampy riverine regions and perhaps elaborating polities long before the societies became committed to major engineering works and so became &amp;quot;hydraulic.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See, for instance, Denevan, &#039;&#039;The Aboriginal Cultural Geography of the Llanos de Mojos of Bolivia&#039;&#039; (1966), and &amp;quot;Hydraulic Agriculture in the American Tropics&amp;quot; (1982), on ancient drained-field or raised-field agriculture in the tropics; Golson, &amp;quot;No Room at the Top: Agricultural Intensification in the New Guinea Highlands&amp;quot; (1977), on ancient drainage in highland New Guinea; Doolittle, &#039;&#039;Canal Irrigation in Prehistoric Mexico&#039;&#039; (1990), on drainage and early agriculture in Mexico; Harrison and Turner &#039;&#039;Pre-Hispanic Maya Agriculture&#039;&#039; (1978), on early drainage in the Maya lowlands.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wittfogel&#039;s environmentalistic argument, bringing down to our own time the old ideas of Marx and Engels about aridity, irrigation, despotism, and stagnation, juxtaposed with Weber&#039;s arguments about the difference between Oriental despotism and the rest, is seminal for many present-day European miracle historians, although most of them modify Wittfogel&#039;s theory in important ways. The essential concept is the notion of hydraulic society, explicitly or implicitly seen as a natural product of arid Asian river valleys (and the Nile). The way this leads to &amp;quot;miracle&amp;quot; arguments in the writings of such historians as Eric L. Jones, Michael Mann, and John Hall deserves a moment&#039;s attention.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Eric L. Jones, in &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039;, lays stress on what he conceives to be the fundamental difference between &amp;quot;rainfall-farming&amp;quot; societies of Europe and irrigating societies of Asia. Wittfogel, he says, was essentially right. Irrigating societies suffered the &amp;quot;political consequences of a society with a huge, manipulated peasant mass.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
European agricultural society was able to avoid a comparable history of authoritarianism—a kind of political infantilism—by virtue of an open-ended productive environment of forest land and rainfall farming.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), pp. 8-9.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Jones then adds to all of this his theory that farmers who work in warm standing water become diseased—a fallacy, as we saw above, that confuses the consequences of poverty with those of ecological settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fairy tale (for it is that) which associates marvelous social consequences with &amp;quot;rainfall farming&amp;quot; of the European variety will claim our attention shortly. Here it should simply be noted that all of the supposedly dire effects that Jones—like Wittfogel before him—attributes to irrigation societies are, in point of fact, the normal attributes of ancient class society and ancient civilization. That is, when these civilizations emerge, we find, as part of the process, reduction in peasant freedom, recruiting of masses of people for various purposes, and the like. The romantic image of free peasants is an image drawn from preserfdom, prefeudal times. After Franco-Roman colonization European peasants were as unfree as any peasants of the Asian river valleys or anywhere else. And of course rainfall farming, along with forested frontiers, was characteristic of much of Asia.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
John A. Hall, in &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties: The Causes and Consequences of the Rise of the West&#039;&#039;, wants to distance himself from Wittfogel&#039;s &amp;quot;fantasy&amp;quot; (as he calls it) about the inherently despotic nature of Oriental society. He then promptly absorbs a good part of Wittfogel&#039;s theory into his own formulation of reasons for the European &amp;quot;miracle.&amp;quot; Hall, like most miracle theorists, tries to make use of the greatest possible range of traditional arguments for the miracle, then pushes certain arguments forward as supposedly the most important ones. He thinks that political forces and Malthusian demographic forces are the most important, although he sees as a deeper force the Weberian notion of European &amp;quot;rationality.&amp;quot; Hall does not accept the formula that leads to the generalization that Oriental states were despotic. No, he says, they were arbitrary, cruel, and unwilling or unable to encourage economic development, and they held Oriental society stagnant (or, much the same thing, going through repetitive cycles). But they were not despotic. By this he means that Oriental states were not truly strong, appearances to the contrary notwithstanding. We will see, shortly, how he says that medieval European states had some sort of inner strength, an organic quality, with progressive change somehow teleologically prefigured in their medieval form. So, according to Hall, there was Oriental despotism but the despots were weak.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties&#039;&#039; (1985), pp. 12-13, 27-28, 36, 42-3, 53, 59, 99, 102, 137.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Hall then introduces irrigation as another independent factor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[In Europe] there was no need for irrigation. It is quite likely that this encouraged, or at least allowed for, a decentred agricultural civilization based on individual initiative.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties&#039;&#039; (1985), p. 11. Also see pp. 41, 123, 132.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus a &amp;quot;need&amp;quot; for irrigation in Asia, which must have been an environmental need. Thus, the old Wittfogelian equation of irrigation with despotism (as against &amp;quot;individual initiative&amp;quot;). Then Hall moves to other factors on his very long list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Michael Mann is another contemporary theorist of the &amp;quot;European miracle,&amp;quot; and he too has a long laundry list of factors which, he thinks, contributed to the miracle.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mann, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986). Also see his essay, &amp;quot;European Development: Approaching a Historical Explanation&amp;quot; (1988).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; He tends to emphasize the importance of ancient Europe&#039;s acquisition of political and especially military power. Mann takes pains to distance himself from Wittfogel, but in the end he incorporates most of Wittfogel&#039;s model—perhaps I should call it the Marx-Weber-Wittfogel model—into his own theory. Like Marx, Weber, Wittfogel, Jones, and Hall, he accepts the characterization of ancient Oriental societies (from Egypt to China) as unfree and unprogressive. But he points out that the despotisms did not extend to true large-scale political military power. And the ancient Oriental civilizations, although they were rooted in irrigation agriculture, also made use of other forms of resource use in areas adjoining the river valleys. Mainly for these reasons, Mann claims that Wittfogel &amp;quot;overextended his model.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mann, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986), p. 94.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Ancient irrigating societies were despotic but they were not powerful, and this, for Mann, is what counts. Mann then rephrases the model and puts it, more or less entire, into his own theory. The distinction that counts is indeed, he says, the one between &amp;quot;irrigating&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;rainfall&amp;quot; farming societies. Asian societies are sweepingly categorized as the former, European societies as the latter. According to Mann, the fact that European farmers, starting with the ancient Greeks, used iron plows and farmed unirrigated (&amp;quot;rainfall&amp;quot;) land, is the one most fundamental reasons that Europe forged ahead of Asia and North Africa. This was the first great miracle. It put Europe ahead of all other areas, and Europe has remained ahead ever since.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here, in brief, is Mann&#039;s argument. We start with the ancient Near Eastern civilizations, grounded mainly in irrigation. Conceding that irrigation was the innovation that caused these civilizations to rise in the first place, Mann argues that the irrigation base somehow &amp;quot;caged,&amp;quot; or confined, the population; this metaphor is meant to convey the idea that these people are unfree, and also in some sense constrained from further social progress. (It is a metaphor and not an argument.) Around 1800 B.C., says Mann, &amp;quot;the Middle Eastern empires of domination were shaken by two immense challenges . . . from the north,&amp;quot; from Indo-European invaders—this seems to be a version of the discredited &amp;quot;Aryan migrations&amp;quot; theory—who brought two revolutions with them, based in charioteer warfare and the use of iron tools and particularly iron plows. The &amp;quot;balance of power now shifted northward.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mann, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986), p. 179.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Mann concedes in passing that these northern folk did not actually invent chariot warfare and ironworking (which came perhaps from Anatolia), but he passes without pause (or logic) to the thesis that the northern peoples, Indo-Europeans, acquired dominance in politicomilitary terms and in terms of productive power. From this point forward, Mann contrasts two civilizations, the &amp;quot;irrigating&amp;quot; ones of the Middle East and the iron-plow-using, rainwater-farming peoples of the north—Greece and, broadly, Europe. Mainly because the Europeans were iron-plow-rainfall-farming peoples, they acquired, initially in Greece, modern civilization, including democracy, classes, private (more or less) property, science, and a respect for human reason.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The fact that Mann attributes the ancient European takeoff mainly to chariot warfare and iron-plow rainfall-farming, yet concedes that both innovations were initiated by Middle Easterners themselves, suggests to me that Mann&#039;s fundamental causal reasoning centers on the notion of European rationality: regardless of who invented these things, the Europeans put the things to work. That this Weberian notion is indeed basic for Mann will be demonstrated later in this chapter.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Why? The centerpiece of the model is the image of an individual peasant-farming family which is fundamentally independent. It gets its water from the skies, not from a despotically managed irrigation system. Iron, says Mann, is abundant, so the peasant farmer does not depend upon cities and long-distance trade networks to acquire iron for plows and axes. This independent peasant, a true yeoman farmer (as Weber also had said), is the prototypical democratic, civilized, energetic, forward-looking European.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
None of this makes sense. To begin with, it is geographically absurd to imagine that the Middle East was a region without plow agriculture, one basically of irrigated river-valley populations. Plows were used in irrigated farming. Rainfall-based farming was dominant, not in Egypt and Mesopotamia, but in most of the Levant, Anatolia, Iran, and of course much of Asia farther east, not to mention Africa. Iron working was not invented by Europeans and was used as much by non-Europeans as by Europeans. The same is true of the iron plow, which was as important in early China, for instance, as in early Europe.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Bray, &#039;&#039;Agriculture&#039;&#039;, vol. 6, part 2, of Needham and collaborators, &#039;&#039;Science and Civilization in China&#039;&#039; (1984).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; (It is an old myth that Indo-European speakers, Aryans, spread the use of the plow to, and only to, the regions they settled or conquered.) Workable-grade iron ore deposits are not as abundant as Mann thinks they are (except in certain special regions, such as some of the laterite deposits of the humid tropics).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But the silliest part of Mann&#039;s thesis is the environmental determinism. We have an image of an arid region fit for nothing but irrigated farming, which is assumed to be a tether on the progress of civilization. We have an image of an open region of good soil, forested, in which iron-using peasant farmers not only produce an unmatched abundance but also acquire from their ecology a democratic, bold, bright, form of society which marches forward then to modernity. Let me add just a word about each of these images.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Irrigation, in the eyes of many miracle theorists, is somehow unproductive. Jones, Mann, and others make the assertion that more food is produced per worker on rain-watered lands. This is not true. In fact, irrigation was developed to increase food production, whether or not the source of the process was the aspirations of village people themselves or the surplus requirements of a political or religious superstructure. When an irrigated district has reached the point where there is serious land shortage, that is, late in its social and geographic evolution (along one possible line of development), the productivity per person declines. This is obvious. It means, first of all, that farm workers spend more time during the year producing and have less time for nonfarming activities, including village cultural life and work on such things as monumental structures. Eventually this situation may lead to the collapse of the farming system, with salinization, and so on, and finally, perhaps, starvation. Contrast this now with nonirrigated agriculture. Normally, there is poorer nutrient status of soil (irrigation brings dissolved nutrients in the water, and alluvial soils tend to have good nutrient status). Normally, there is greater moisture deficit, given the dependence on unpredictable rains. Thus natural fertility tends to be lower on nonirrigated land, all other things being equal (which they often are not). Now it is true that early iron-age farmers, clearing forested land and making new farms, achieved high production on this fresh land, but that phenomenon is transitory, and in any case it did not have much effect in the semi-arid valleys of Greece. Early European farmers tended in fact to settle on alluvial lands and lowland terraces, and quite early they were using irrigation and drainage—because it enhanced labor productivity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The notion that European agriculture was somehow conducive to independent living in a way contrasted with Asian agriculture is another part of this myth. Early European farmers were not to any great extent, as Mann depicts them, living in isolation from one another, surrounded by forest. In the cases where they did live this way it was, again, a frontier phenomenon, in Asia as well as Europe. Farmers mostly lived in social aggregates, villages, large or small, compact or linear, depending upon many circumstances. There is no reason to doubt that the upland farming communities of Asia were quite similar to those in Europe. We return to this matter later in the chapter when we discuss the myth of the unique European family. For now I will simply categorize as mythic the idea that early European agricultural communities were somehow more individualistic, more independent-minded, more progressive than were communities elsewhere.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The most fundamental error made by the nineteenth-century thinkers and Weber and now mechanically repeated by historians such as Jones, Hall, and Mann, is to believe, or assume, that one type of environment produces a particular type of society and the latter then persists down through history. You simply cannot contrast the very ancient irrigating civilizations of Asia and North Africa with the later nonirrigating farming civilizations of Europe—or indeed of Asia—and then suppose that two contrasting civilizational types have been, thereby, created so as to remain in place down through history. Culture changes. Farmers move from one environment to another. In many places farmers practice both irrigation and nonirrigated agriculture on different soil types when appropriate land is available to them.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Blaut, &amp;quot;Two Views of Diffusion&amp;quot; (1977).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Thus the theory which asserts that arid Asian agricultural civilization produces a stagnant, despotic form of society down through later times, one which will not develop toward modernity, is purely a myth.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Temperate Europe ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have already seen how historians constructed a mythic model of &amp;quot;rainfall-farming&amp;quot; European society, supposing that rainfall brings benefits not associated with irrigation and that Europeans alone, in their hemisphere, practice &amp;quot;rainfall farming.&amp;quot; Historians like Mann, Jones, and Hall carry the argument farther along. Europe&#039;s rainfall-based farming, combined with Europe&#039;s supposedly fine and fertile soils, produced an environmental basis for agricultural production unmatched elsewhere. Although these historians give a lot of credit to the supposedly uniquely rational, inventive, European mind, they give much of the credit to Europe&#039;s natural environment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, Michael Mann draws a picture of a steady northwestward movement of European history—what we described in Chapter 1 as an Orient Express model—which he sees as an essential continuance down into the Middle Ages of the northwestern trajectory of that individualistic, creative, bumptious peasant society which, he thinks, emerged in the Iron Age with the uniquely European marriage of farming, iron, and rain-watered land. His model of the evolution of Europe&#039;s society (its &amp;quot;miracle&amp;quot;) is much more complex than this, but a key part of that model is the inexorable, steady, historically pregnant geographical movement—what he calls a northwestern &amp;quot;drift,&amp;quot; with a permanent northwest &amp;quot;leading edge.&amp;quot; Eschewing philosophical determinism, he nonetheless gives the whole process a strongly Hegelian, teleological flavor.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mann, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986), pp. 247, 406, 408, 412, 504-510, 520, 530, 539-540.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; One of two main reasons for this northwestern movement is the beckoningly fine environment of northwest Europe. And the main reason why this environment is so fine is its &amp;quot;deeper, wetter, more fertile soils.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mann, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986), p. 509.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
John Hall, similarly, extols the &amp;quot;northern European clay soils,&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties&#039;&#039; (1985), p. 99.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; northwest Europe&#039;s &amp;quot;deep and productive clay soils fed by rainfall&amp;quot; (&amp;quot;There was no need for irrigation&amp;quot;).&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties&#039;&#039; (1985), p. 110.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Eric L. Jones, in &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039;, makes much the same claim, if slightly qualified. He writes of Europe&#039;s &amp;quot;open-ended productive environment of forest land and rainfall farming,&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), p. 10.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; of Europe&#039;s &amp;quot;High, even rainfall and passable summers.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), p. 47.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Jones (unlike Mann and Hall) recognizes the fact that Asian land supports a higher farming population, with the implication that the land is more productive, but he merely notes that Europe&#039;s productive land comes in smaller, separated regions, and then he gives us one of the myths of Oriental despotism:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The very impracticability of hydraulic agriculture freed a fraction of European energies for other purposes. The rainfall farmers of Europe might be fewer in number than the farmers of China and India, but the former spent less time on all aspects of farmwork than the latter spent on water control work.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), p. 8. Jones makes the common error of assuming that productivity per worker is low in irrigated agriculture in comparison with unirrigated agriculture. This is not the case. Even with draft animals, medieval peasant production per worker was not high. And draft animals are used in irrigated farming, abundantly so in some Asian wet-rice farming systems.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The implication, of course, is that European peasant farmers didn&#039;t have to spend much time at farm work in order to satisfy their needs and their quota of surplus, whereas Asians worked much harder for the same product. This is plainly absurd unless we abandon historical method and try to compare Asian peasants under modern conditions of extreme land shortage with ancient European frontier conditions or modern European capitalist farmers. Stated differently, this makes no sense in terms of actual agricultural technique—irrigation is intended to increase productivity per worker, and usually does so—and in terms of any model of the historical European peasant as poor, oppressed, and overburdened.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;wet soils&amp;quot; of which these historians speak are usually excessively wet: acidic podzols and gleys that are difficult to work and infertile until heavily manured. The &amp;quot;high, even rainfall and passable summers&amp;quot; are in fact a climate so wet that solar energy is often severely limited, grain crops sometimes cannot do well (recall how important was the post-1492 introduction of the potato), and soils do not dry out until late in spring, if at all. I do not want to caricature the situation. It is merely the case that northwest European soils, across their entire range of variability, are not superior to the soils of many other regions. In ecological terms, the lands of warmer, drier regions that have either good rainfall regimes or possibilities for irrigation or drainage tend to be rather higher in productivity. My point is more limited. There is nothing about Europe&#039;s agricultural environment that explains the so-called miracle, or that might lead one to believe (as the authors I have cited believe) that European history throughout its course has been favored over Asian history by the European agricultural environment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Europe&#039;s supposed environmental superiority is by no means limited to farming. I will close our discussion of environmentalism by briefly commenting on four other comparative judgments which are routinely made by present historians of the European &amp;quot;miracle.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First is the classical &amp;quot;capes and bays&amp;quot; argument, familiar to most European and Anglo-American schoolchildren. Supposedly, Europe&#039;s configuration of peninsulas and bays, and Europe&#039;s possession of navigable rivers, gave this continent a natural basis for communication, trade, and accessibility denied to other continents. This, then, is supposed to have had a lot to do with the rise of markets and eventually capitalism in Europe.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mann, &amp;quot;European Development&amp;quot; (1988), p. 10, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986), p. 406; Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), pp. 90, 227; Crone, &#039;&#039;Pre-Industrial Societies&#039;&#039; (1989), p. 150; McNeill, &#039;&#039;Plagues and Peoples&#039;&#039; (1976), p. 295.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Part of the argument, like the emperor&#039;s clothes, is transparently false when looked at directly. For instance, accessibility by sea along the coasts of the Indian Ocean and much of the South China Sea was considerably easier in the Middle Ages than it was in Atlantic Europe. (If monsoonal wind patterns posed a problem in the Indian Ocean, storms posed a greater problem in the North Atlantic.) Trading cities dotted the Indian coast, and trading vessels plied up and down this coast, and on to Indonesia and Arabia, carrying bulk commodities like rice and iron as well as high-value goods, long before Italian galleys inaugurated a regular commodity trade between the Mediterranean and the northwest Atlantic. I do not belittle the great seamanship of the Atlantic fishermen, the Iceland traders, and the Hanseatic League when I note, simply, that other regions were using the sea as effectively as the Europeans were at comparable times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As to rivers, Europe&#039;s endowment of navigable rivers is impressive but not unique. It is not better than India&#039;s and China&#039;s. Interisland navigation in insular Southeast Asia was much easier than was navigation up and down the Rhine, say, or the Danube. Again it is a matter simply of reducing comparisons to reality. The &amp;quot;capes and bays&amp;quot; errors are normally followed by another error: the idea that Europe had, in early times, an advantage over civilizations that had to transport commodities overland. Many of the &amp;quot;miracle&amp;quot; historians repeat the theory that overland transport necessarily was much more costly than water transport. This is in fact a multiplicity of comparisons. When Mann and others quote the old formulas about draft animals consuming their weight in fodder over a limited distance (some say this takes place within 100-150 km), they ignore the fact that most draft animals graze or browse along the way: hence the great Inner-Asian Silk Road and the Sudanic caravans are easily comprehensible.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mann, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986, chap. 5). Mann in fact builds a theory of ancient warfare upon the basis of this sort of calculation, here also ignoring the fact that armies then as now provision themselves and their animals on the route of march.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Canals in China were much more effective than circuitous coastal shipping routes in Europe. And water transport—particularly upwind and upriver—may not have had advantages over land transport 1,000 or so years ago.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Eric L. Jones, in &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039;, makes the large claim that Asia suffered so much more than Europe from natural disasters of all sorts that Asian development was strongly inhibited by this presumed fact.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), chap. 2 and elsewhere. Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties&#039;&#039; (1985), p. 132, makes the same claim, citing Jones.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; He carries the argument to the point of claiming that the risk of natural disaster was so high as to frighten ordinary people into unusual demographic behavior, to close off trade possibilities, and more. Setting aside the fact that we have very little historical data on this subject, the main error is a simple matter of scale. Jones&#039;s &amp;quot;Europe&amp;quot; is really West and Central Europe. This region is roughly the size of the Indian subcontinent and perhaps one-fourth the size of the settled portion of Asia. So it might well have one-fourth as many natural disasters, ceteris paribus. It is true that floods are more serious in regions where people farm river valleys, but populations make adjustments which keep this one risk small enough so that it does not affect long-term development, and I suspect that winter-weather dangers in rural Europe were as great as flood risk in Asia, on a per capita basis. Hurricanes are no worse than the worst North Atlantic winter storms. The theory as a whole is unsupported by evidence and empty of credibility as an argument for the European &amp;quot;miracle.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The miracle historians point repeatedly to Europe&#039;s environmental differentiation, claiming that this leads to a unique potential for interregional trade and thus, again, for capitalism.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties&#039;&#039; (1985), p. 111; Jones &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), pp. 90, 105, 107, 226-227; Mann, &amp;quot;European Development: Approaching a Historical Explanation&amp;quot; (1988), p. 10; Mann, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986), p. 406.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; One need merely note that Europe does not possess an unusually large range of environments, and natural products, by comparison with other regions of comparable size. China, for instance, has roughly the same range of midlatitude environments plus a tropical south coast.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The last environmentalistic fable to be discussed here is the claim that Europe&#039;s topographic differentiation into many small &amp;quot;core regions,&amp;quot; separated by mountains and forests, somehow led to a number of supposedly unique features of ancient and medieval European society, including even the development of a unique trading system and a unique system of moderate-sized states and the many benefits supposedly deriving therefrom. Since this issue ties in with the parts of the &amp;quot;miracle&amp;quot; literature that concern Europe&#039;s supposed uniqueness in economic and political development, I will postpone discussing the geography of the matter until later in this chapter. Suffice it to say now that this idea of &amp;quot;cores&amp;quot; is partly a myth, and insofar as it is valid the same sorts of &amp;quot;cores&amp;quot; can be found in other continents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rationality ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We turn now to the theories about Europe&#039;s historical superiority or priority—Europe&#039;s &amp;quot;miracle&amp;quot;—which ground themselves, not in biology, not in environment, but in culture. First I will deal with theories which start from a conception of the superior &amp;quot;rationality&amp;quot; of Europeans. &amp;quot;Rationality&amp;quot; in such theories embraces many psychological attributes, always including inventiveness and innovativeness (or progressiveness), usually a capacity for abstract thought, and often a certain ability to make moral or ethical judgments. The issue is not whether such things are or are not fundamental causes in history; the issue is whether Europeans had more rationality, or higher rationality, than every other human community, and whether this was the principal reason, or at any rate one of the principal reasons, for the unique rise of Europe. The plain assertion that Europeans are smarter than everyone else seems to have a certain antique or Victorian ring to it, but this is deceptive: theories about &amp;quot;Western rationality&amp;quot; and the like are just as important today as they were for prior generations of scholars. Sometimes they are difficult to identify as rationality theories because they display other plumage. An explanation may focus on, say, technology, arguing that European technological innovations produced various forward movements in European history; looked at closely, however, the technological explanation usually dissolves into a theory about the inventiveness of Europeans, that is, their rationality. By the same token, an explanation may start with the state, or free markets, or the family, but usually (not always) it derives such structures from the more basic trait, rationality. Sometimes it works the other way around. Classical racist theories were rationality theories: to be white is to be more intelligent. Some (not all) Marxist theories are rationality theories: the defeat of feudalism released creative energies which then led to technological innovation, etc. Another complication is that superior rationality may be posited just for one crucial period and place, a magic key that started the whole process: Periclean Athens, Gutenberg&#039;s workshop, etc. I will try to sort these matters out by dealing first with the category &amp;quot;rationality theories&amp;quot; as such, then turning to other sorts of theories, technological and institutional, some of which are also rooted in the idea of European rationality.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Rationality Doctrine ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the beginning of this century most European scholars accepted the basic proposition that Europeans are more rational than non-Europeans. This was explained by a great variety of competing theories, biological racism being perhaps the most prominent, but I suspect that most Europeans accepted the proposition as indisputably correct regardless of the explanation. It was simply obvious that European countries had attained a higher level of wealth and civilization than other countries and had done so on their own, mainly through invention, innovation, and creativity. Europeans also now controlled the entire world and this, too, had to reflect some intellectual and probably also moral superiority. This was the heyday of the doctrine of classical diffusionism (discussed in Chapter 1), and few people doubted the doctrine&#039;s basic propositions: Europe develops; non-Europe does not develop or does so more slowly; Europe&#039;s development is based ultimately in some intellectual or spiritual principle; the normal and natural way for non-Europe to modernize and progress is by receiving the diffusion of rational European ideas, brought by European colonial administrators, settlers, planters, missionaries, and purveyors of commodities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By this time most European thinkers had come to accept the doctrine of &amp;quot;the psychic unity of mankind,&amp;quot; at least to the extent of agreeing that all of humanity shares a common ability to progress toward modernity. This doctrine crystallized into a theory, widely though not universally accepted in the early part of this century, that can be called the dualistic-developmental conception of human rationality. The elementary dualism was a distinction between the mentality of child and that of adult. The human mind has developed from a prehistoric condition which was mental childhood. European history is either to be explained as the fruit of human mental development or has been intimately accompanied by such mental development, in a process that was fundamentally the same as the psychological development from childhood to adulthood. Europeans became more rational as history progressed, just as children acquire rationality in the course of ontogenetic development. Ancient people had been not merely less intelligent but also much more governed by emotions and passions than by intellect, just as is the case with modern children. With some modification, the same was thought to be the case for modern European women, who were less intelligent and more governed by emotion than men, that is, they were less rational than men. But women, too, would experience mental development, and would eventually be rational enough to vote, hold public office, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Non-Europeans, within the same theory, were seen as psychically undeveloped, as more or less childlike. But, given the psychic unity of mankind, non-Europeans could of course be brought to adulthood, to rationality, to modernity, through a set of learning experiences, mainly colonial. (The phrase &amp;quot;colonial tutelage&amp;quot; was a signature of the doctrine, and this conception is encountered in most history and geography textbooks of the time.) It was not simply a case of &amp;quot;the natives are like children.&amp;quot; The idea of non-European nonrationality was a definite, putatively scientific principle, widely accepted: non-Europeans think somewhat like children, and will be led toward adulthood by Europeans. Non-Europeans were of course graded. &amp;quot;Savages&amp;quot; were mental children without qualification. Problematic peoples, like the Indians, Ottomans, and Chinese, were thought to be childlike in some respects and not in others. Indeed they were governed by emotion and passion much more than Europeans. (Colonial revolts were obviously irrational—were outbursts of childlike emotion.) As far as scientific and abstract philosophical thinking was concerned, the people of these cultures were clearly not up to full adult standards, but in some respects, notably in arts and crafts, they were perhaps gifted adolescents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So we have a model which has, as its centerpiece, the Rational Modern Adult European Man. History is his progression to mental adulthood. He is contrasted with ancient European man; with modern European children; with modern European women; with modern non-Europeans. The contrast was often extended, also, to psychotics; in some schools of thought they were explicitly seen as having a developmentally arrested mentality and this was indeed used as a therapeutic principle.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Occasionally &amp;quot;the criminal mind&amp;quot; was seen to reflect another dimension of contrast.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; What needs to be emphasized is the fact that this was considered to be a scientific theory. Thus it was valid to exchange principles across these various dimensions of contrast. For our purposes, the most important of these principles was the attribution of mental development to European history and the attribution of mental nondevelopment to non-Europe, past and present; hence Europeans had naturally acquired a unique rationality.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It would be wrong to reduce to caricature the scholarly theories of a few generations back, and the model I have just described looks, on the face of it, like a caricature. Most scholars did not literally believe, say, that the American Indian was a mental child, or that ontogenetic mental development exactly recapitulates the mental development of our species. But the model was a dominant force in European thought in certain precise ways. The equation of child, ancient, and non-European was explicitly accepted in nonscholarly discourse (newspapers, Tarzan novels, and so on). American educational policy toward Indians and other colonials was explicitly grounded in this model, even if it was a smoothed-down version of it. A very large number of writings in history, geography, and all of social science made use of one or another part of the model. And several very widely accepted theories were really forms of the same model. Three examples will be helpful.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most anthropologists accepted the idea that there are two distinct mental types, one being the so-called &amp;quot;primitive mind,&amp;quot; the mind of tribal peoples just about everywhere (some added: peasants everywhere). The &amp;quot;primitive mind&amp;quot; was very explicitly described—the most famous description is found in Lévy-Bruhl&#039;s influential book, &#039;&#039;How Natives Think&#039;&#039;—as being incapable of higher theoretical and abstract ideas, as being emotion driven, and so on.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Lévy-Bruhl, &#039;&#039;How Natives Think&#039;&#039; (1966).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Some anthropologists opposed this notion (Boas, Radin, and Mead perhaps most notably&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See, for example, Boas, &#039;&#039;The Mind of Primitive Man&#039;&#039; (1938); Radin, &#039;&#039;Primitive Man as Philosopher&#039;&#039; (1927); M. Mead, &#039;&#039;Growing Up in New Guinea&#039;&#039; (1930).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;); most anthropologists accepted it with some qualifications; some accepted it literally. Lévy-Bruhl&#039;s rather stark form of the theory had great influence on psychologists and all of social science. Closely connected to this theory was the notion that there are &amp;quot;primitive languages,&amp;quot; languages incapable of expressing higher theoretical and abstract thought. This old notion (which had been used in one form by William von Humboldt) was joined to the proposition that people cannot think beyond the limitations of their natural language, and so a primitive language entails a primitive mind.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Stocking, &#039;&#039;Victorian Anthropology&#039;&#039; (1987), p. 59; Bowler, &#039;&#039;The Invention of Progress&#039;&#039; (1989), p. 66; Whitman &amp;quot;From Philology to Anthropology in Mid-Nineteenth-Century Germany&amp;quot; (1984); Bernal, &#039;&#039;Black Athena&#039;&#039;, vol. 1 (1987); Said, &#039;&#039;Orientalism&#039;&#039; (1978). A recent expression of this theory came in a Soviet debate about &amp;quot;Oriental despotism&amp;quot; (Lelekov, &amp;quot;Round-Table: State and Law in the Ancient Orient,&amp;quot; 1978). L. Lelekov, a historian, claimed that words meaning &amp;quot;freedom&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;right&amp;quot; were basic in the original Indo-European language or languages but not in Near Eastern languages, and asserted that this must have affected &amp;quot;social thinking&amp;quot; (p. 190). This contention was refuted by the philologist V. Ivanov (p. 193).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Beyond that, the old philological theory about the innate superiority of Indo-European languages still had many adherents, and this theory extended the notion of primitive language to most of the non-European languages of the world. The third example is a broad family of theories in psychology that made use of the idea that mental development in the individual is homologous to mental development in the species, and that modern primitive peoples have the mentality of children and ancients, sometimes extending the concept to the putative psychological makeup (and limitations) of non-European peoples in general. In the twentieth century this theory received its most influential expression in the psychoanalytic viewpoint of Carl Jung and his followers. Jung swept broadly across non-Western cultures (Arabs, Indians, Africans, African-Americans, and others) declaring, basically, that only modern European man has fully developed an individual consciousness, an ego, an ability to think, even an ability to conceive of himself as an individual separate from the external world. Only European man is rational.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Dalal, &amp;quot;The Racism of Jung&amp;quot; (1988). In Jung&#039;s work, see in particular &#039;&#039;Psychological Types&#039;&#039; (1971) (for instance: &amp;quot;(If) we go right back to primitive psychology, we find absolutely no trace of the concept of the individual,&amp;quot; p. 10); &#039;&#039;Memories, Dreams, Reflections&#039;&#039; (1963), and &amp;quot;The Dreamlike World of India,&amp;quot; in &#039;&#039;Civilization in Transition&#039;&#039; (1927). See also the 1954 work by Jung&#039;s disciple Erich Neumann, &#039;&#039;The Origins and History of Consciousness&#039;&#039; (for instance: &amp;quot;The evolution of consciousness as a form of creative evolution is the peculiar achievement of Western man ... The creative character of consciousness is a central feature of the cultural canon of the West ... In stationary cultures, or in primitive societies where the original features of human culture are still preserved, the earliest stages of man&#039;s psychology predominate,&amp;quot; pp. xviii-xxix).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The doctrine went through some important changes as it became absorbed into the &amp;quot;modernization&amp;quot; paradigm, the body of ideas which, as we have seen, came to dominate European social thought in the 1950s and still does so to some extent today. &amp;quot;Colonial tutelage&amp;quot; gave way to &amp;quot;diffusion of modernizing innovations.&amp;quot; Non-Europeans no longer were &amp;quot;natives,&amp;quot; and no longer were described as &amp;quot;childlike.&amp;quot; In place of the notions of &amp;quot;primitive mind&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;primitive language&amp;quot; came the notion of traditional mentality. Non-Europeans are &amp;quot;traditional&amp;quot; in two senses: they lack &amp;quot;modern cognitive abilities,&amp;quot; that is, the ability to think theoretically and scientifically, and they lack &amp;quot;modern attitudes&amp;quot; of the sort that push a person to achieve higher things, to reject the old, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This appears still to be the primitive mind, but there is an important difference. &amp;quot;Traditional minds&amp;quot; are simply waiting to be awakened, to be modernized. The larger picture was one of a vast landscape of traditional societies, containing people with traditional mentalities, and modernization would set the drama into motion. Mentalities would change. Social structure would change. New ideas and technology would diffuse into the modernizing societies from the already-modernized European societies, and so on. Recall that the modernization doctrine is not only a concept of the spatial spread of European ideas, attitudes, and the like, in the present-day postcolonial world. It is also a historical concept: modernization as history. &amp;quot;Traditional society&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;traditional mentality&amp;quot; came to be used to describe early Europe, the rise of Europe was now seen as a modernization process, and the start of that process was a much debated matter of deciding when Europe began its &amp;quot;takeoff&amp;quot;—its rise from the level of traditionalism and toward modernity. History is appealed to for the basic causal principle: Europe modernized, and now non-Europe will follow—though not slavishly—in its path. We will come back to this point in a moment. First I want to comment on the main causal principles that are thought to lead in the other direction. I will show that schools have arisen in psychology, sociology, and other disciplines that claim to provide scientific demonstrations as to what, exactly, is the nature of the &amp;quot;traditional mind,&amp;quot; and the output from these scholars tends, then, to seep back into history, where it finds its way into the newer writings about the European miracle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In psychology, the important figure is Jean Piaget. His basic theory of mental development postulated an invariant series of &amp;quot;stages&amp;quot; of development through which all children must progress. Piaget was influenced by Lévy-Bruhl and the primitive mind doctrine, and as late as 1971 he thought that&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
it is quite possible, and this is the impression we have from known ethnographical work, that in many societies, adult thought does not go beyond the level of &amp;quot;concrete&amp;quot; operations, and therefore does not reach that of propositional operations which develop between the ages of twelve and fifteen in our milieus.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Piaget, &#039;&#039;Psychology and Epistemology&#039;&#039; (1971), p. 61.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Propositional operations&amp;quot; means, roughly, logic. &amp;quot;Concrete&amp;quot; is childish prelogical thought, unable to deal with the abstract and the theoretical. Now Piaget was a great psychologist, but he did not have, or claim to have, direct knowledge of non-European psychology. He was arguing from the traditional dualistic-developmental model that equates the child and the primitive. (And he was about 30 years out of date as to ethnography.) But many of his disciples, seeking to connect their theory with the modernization doctrine, took up the theme and began to carry out research to find out whether non-Western people (particularly Africans) do, indeed, have inferior cognitive abilities. It is no oversimplification to say that virtually all of these studies made the same mistake and came up with the same, predictable conclusions. They used the tests of cognitive ability that Piaget had used with European children and, scarcely modifying them, administered these tests to non-European children and adults and found, predictably, that these people do not have full adult cognitive abilities. By now the error has become well known, and most present-day Piagetian psychologists do not seem to assert that non-Europeans are cognitively childlike. Along with the Piagetian studies of the 1960s and 1970s, there appeared, in this era, many studies carried out by psychologists from other schools of thought (like the Heinz Werner school) which took the old primitive-mind doctrine as fact,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See, for example, Werner and Kaplan, &#039;&#039;Symbol Formation&#039;&#039; (1964).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; along with studies carried out by white South African psychologists comparing white and black subjects, other Europeans studying other African populations, and a few Israeli psychologists comparing the cognitive abilities of Arabs and Jews. With few exceptions, the European psychologists found the non-European subjects to be deficient in cognitive ability, and so to be &amp;quot;traditional.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See the first 16 volumes (through 1985) of &#039;&#039;The Journal of Cross-Cultural Psychology&#039;&#039; for a great many examples of this phenomenon. For this period something like one-tenth of all the empirical articles in this U.S. journal were studies by white Southern Africans purporting to show the cognitive inferiority of black Africans.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In nearly all of these studies the testing was such that the &amp;quot;natives&amp;quot; didn&#039;t really stand a chance because the tests were European, administered by Europeans or their native assistants, in Europeanized settings. The error became so well known that the entire field of &amp;quot;cross-cultural psychology&amp;quot; gained a bad name—as an apologia for ethnocentrism—until, in the 1980s, it changed direction. The point is that while most cross-cultural psychologists today, apparently, deny that non-Europeans are less rational than Europeans, they established a body of publications that are still used by others to make the opposite point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The rationality doctrine was perhaps most influential in those parts of sociology and economics that were closest to the modernization doctrine, particularly among academics who were involved in making and implementing the policies being put into place in the 1950s and 1960s to develop the underdeveloped countries. As we saw in Chapter 1, this sphere of ideas was crucial to the politics of modernization for at least three reasons: First and most basic was the need to validate diffusionism. Second, development of the sort that involved only the spread of new ideas and new techniques was much cheaper, in principle, than development involving massive flows of capital, industrial development, and the like. And third, along the same lines, development at the level of ideas, of research, extension, education, and so on, was not threatening; it would not produce the dangers of revolution and counterrevolution implicit in efforts to change the relation of power groups, to effectuate land reform, and the like. For these reasons, scholars were encouraged, indeed were given lavish grants and were well paid, to produce analyses of modernization that would lead to workable policies for bringing about development mainly through an influence at the level of ideas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everett Rogers, a rural sociologist; David McClelland, a social psychologist; and Everett Hagen, an economist, provided highly influential contributions that I will describe briefly and with some caricature. Rogers was one of the leaders in a movement to sort out peasant mentalities into those that are prodevelopment (&amp;quot;cosmopolitan&amp;quot;) and those that are noninnovative and &amp;quot;laggard.&amp;quot; The crucial notion was the idea of the diffusion of rationality into rural non-European communities. The key to development (with some qualification) was the transmittal of new ideas to innovative &amp;quot;adopters.&amp;quot; The fact that most of the ideas were not, themselves, workable (thus were not rational), and that adoption of them would have required of peasants not more knowledge, but more power and landownership, was ignored. McClelland claimed that non-Western peoples in general have not modernized because they lack the proper &amp;quot;need-achievement&amp;quot; motivation. They will modernize when and if they acquire this need to achieve, which had been of crucial importance in earlier European development, from ancient Greece on up. Hagen produced an elaborate theory, based in no evidence whatever, that non-Western peoples, and particularly peasants, have a traditional mentality that resists change of all sorts. The model starts with a mythic peasant unconscious mind that is uncreative, submissive to paternal authority (and therefore oppressive of innovative children), and unwilling to change. All three of these scholars, and dozens of their acolytes, produced a general model of peasant mentality as defective in both cognitive and attitudinal (affective) characteristics, but, of course, not hopelessly so.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Rogers, &#039;&#039;The Diffusion of Innovations&#039;&#039; (1962); Rogers and Shoemaker, &#039;&#039;Communication of Innovations&#039;&#039; (1971), pp. 187-191; McClelland, &#039;&#039;The Achieving Society&#039;&#039; (1961); Hagen, &#039;&#039;On the Theory of Social Change&#039;&#039; (1962) and &amp;quot;A Framework for Analyzing Economic and Political Change,&amp;quot; in Brookings Institution, ed., &#039;&#039;Development of the Emerging Countries: An Agenda for Research&#039;&#039; (1962), pp. 1-39. I have cited only the initial statements: much literature emerged from these works.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; One of many recent outgrowths of this doctrine is Stephen Marglin&#039;s theory of the Western mental &amp;quot;episteme,&amp;quot; a marriage of the old &amp;quot;primitive mind&amp;quot; idea and the newer ideas about traditionalism, which argues, in essence, that the Western mind is, and historically has been, scientific, rational, and intellectually hardheaded—the &amp;quot;episteme&amp;quot;—while the non-Western mind is traditionally given to technique and art (&amp;quot;techne&amp;quot;) but not to science. Marglin&#039;s new twist on this old doctrine is to say that some of the non-Western &amp;quot;techne&amp;quot; should be incorporated in development along with the Western &amp;quot;episteme&amp;quot; because &amp;quot;techne,&amp;quot; less intellectual but more feeling, is less likely to destroy the natural environment and causes less psychic damage to non-Western people, a distinction rather like the older duality between scientific thought and emotion-laden concrete thought.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;S. Marglin, &amp;quot;Losing Touch: The Cultural Conditions of Worker Accommodation and Resistance,&amp;quot; in F. and S. Marglin, eds., &#039;&#039;Dominating knowledge: Development, Culture, and Resistance&#039;&#039; (1990).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Marglin&#039;s ideas provide an example of much theorizing in the economic development world (like Hagen, he is a development economist) about non-Western nonrationality.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It would take us far afield to examine the parallel arguments in all the other fields of social thought. The following should suffice: In geography, the diffusion-of-innovative-ideas approach has been important since the 1960s and remains so today. The same old assumptions about peasant and non-Western traditionalism are still dominant. Some geographers claim even that non-Europeans are mentally not capable of using all available means of coping with natural hazards like drought and hurricane. One geographer, Robert Sack, has come up with a classically Eurocentric theory about spatial cognition: most non-Western people (primitives and most peasants) cannot think in spatial terms the way modern Western adults can. Among the authorities he uses—the argument is from authority, not evidence—are Lévy-Bruhl and Piaget.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Sack, &#039;&#039;Conceptions of Space in Social Thought&#039;&#039; (1980). Geographers prominent in the diffusion paradigm discussed here are L. Brown (&#039;&#039;The Diffusion of Innovations&#039;&#039;, 1981) and P. Gould (&#039;&#039;Spatial Diffusion&#039;&#039;, 1969). On peasant traditionalism in relation to natural hazards, see G. White, ed., &#039;&#039;Natural Hazards&#039;&#039; (1974), as an example of the abundant literature. I criticize these and other arguments about non-Western nonrationality in Blaut, &amp;quot;Two Views of Diffusion&amp;quot; (1977), &amp;quot;Diffusionism: A Unitarian Critique&amp;quot; (1987a), and &amp;quot;Natural Mapping&amp;quot; (1991).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In the field of education in the United States the newer forms of the dualistic-developmental theory of (Western) rationality are highly influential in many areas, including testing.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In the field of education in the United States the dominant standardized college entrance tests (SAT and ACT) are skewed by culture-specific and sex-specific internal (as well as situational) characteristics, such that women do more poorly than men although they actually perform at higher levels in terms of university grades, while the ACT and SAT test scores of Latinos (African-Americans have not yet been studied in this way), which are very low, have no correlation whatever with their performance in college. Thus the tests effectively minimize female and minority college attendance. Why the tests are almost universally used, even so, is a fascinating question. The same biases are so prominent in IQ testing that such tests have been barred as diagnostic instruments in California schools. The &amp;quot;primitive mind&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;primitive languages&amp;quot; biases sometimes combine, as in U.S. debates about the so-called &amp;quot;English-only&amp;quot; issue and about the question whether non-European literature deserves to be included in the college curriculum along with European literature. In Boston not long ago, 30% of Hispanic children aged six to eight were not attending elementary school because their inability to speak English had been judged to be evidence of mental retardation, and Boston claimed not to have sufficient resources to educate these children in &amp;quot;special schools.&amp;quot; Testing in general in U.S. education remains very racist.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In the field of philosophy, there is a strong relationship between the stream of ideas about rationality, discussed above, and the resurgence of mind-body dualism, such as one finds in the Cartesian and Kantian traditions and particularly in the modern neo-Kantians.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Rorty, &#039;&#039;Philosophy and the Mirror of Nature&#039;&#039; (1980), and earlier works by Dewey (for instance &#039;&#039;The Quest for Certainty&#039;&#039;, 1929), Whitehead (for instance, &#039;&#039;Modes of Thought&#039;&#039;, 1938), and G. H. Mead (for instance, &#039;&#039;Philosophy of the Act&#039;&#039;, 1938).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I do not suggest that the doctrine of non-Western nonrationality is fully hegemonic in modern scholarship, or that the above formulations have not been challenged. In general, however, the doctrine remains somewhat dominant in all fields of thought except, perhaps, anthropology and economics. Anthropology in recent decades has, with some lapses, maintained quite firmly that primitive minds are not primitive.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;This is a general assessment. Some anthropologists continue to maintain either the &amp;quot;primitive mind&amp;quot; doctrine or the closely related &amp;quot;traditional mind&amp;quot; doctrine. An example of the latter is George Foster&#039;s well-known and influential book &#039;&#039;Traditional Cultures&#039;&#039; (1962), of the former, Hallpike&#039;s &#039;&#039;The Foundations of Primitive Thought&#039;&#039; (1979). For a critique, see Schweder, &amp;quot;Cultural Psychology: What Is It?&amp;quot; (1990).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; And some schools of economics need the principle of universal economic rationality so badly, as axioms for their theories, that they are willing to concede rationality to everyone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rationality and the European Miracle ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The idea of European rationality is often called &amp;quot;Weberian,&amp;quot; because Max Weber made important use of the idea in various explanations for European social evolution and various negative judgments about the lesser rationality of other societies. The rationality doctrine was, however, widely held in early twentieth-century Europe when Weber&#039;s important writings on this subject were published. But he codified the traditional doctrine and added something of his own to it, so the doctrine can indeed be called Weberian from the present-day perspective. It is also Weberian in another and perhaps more important sense: Weber placed European social evolution in a framework emphasizing the modernization process, and contrasting Europe&#039;s modernization with the &amp;quot;traditionalism,&amp;quot; as he sometimes called it, of Asian civilizations. When the modernization paradigm locked into place among scholars just after World War II, Max Weber was the most obvious, and most logical, source of basic sociological doctrine for the paradigm. From that time on, scholars who wrote about the rise of Europe and chose to emphasize the individual trait of rationality, or social-level traits and institutions which Weber had treated as primary (and, in the main, as consequences of European rationality), were Weberians to one degree or another (even if they rejected some parts of Weber&#039;s model). The importance of Weber for our discussion of present-day theories about the &amp;quot;European miracle,&amp;quot; is the fact that the most influential, probably dominant, school of thought concerning the &amp;quot;miracle&amp;quot; today is more or less Weberian. Weber&#039;s views about rationality therefore require at least brief discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Weber analyzed Western capitalist society of the late nineteenth- to early twentieth-century epoch in meticulous detail and with great insight, although there were important limits to his insight. He held to the typical conceit of his time and place and class in thinking that contemporary European capitalism is the culmination of a process of social evolution that was, at root, an intellectual progression, an ascent of human &amp;quot;rationality,&amp;quot; meaning intellect and ethics, from ancient to modern society. (He had doubts about the likelihood of further ascent in the future.) At each stage of that progression people invented new social forms, such as higher forms of the state, the legal system, the bureaucracy, the economy, the city, and so forth, but these forms were, basically, products of evolving rationality rather than primary causes of progress in their own right. But the march toward ever more rational society took place in Europe, among Europeans. Outside of the European tunnel of time, all societies were in varying degrees traditional and in varying degrees irrational.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Weber said rather little about the question of why Europeans came to display this rationality in the first place, that is, as a basal cause. He invoked several factors, one of which, as we noted previously, was race and another, the natural environment. Others seem to lie deep within culture. Yet Weber rarely discussed causality at this basal level, that is, attempting to explain why Europeans have unique rationality, and have had it since a long time before the Protestant Reformation and modernity.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;On the question of Weber&#039;s use of &amp;quot;rationality,&amp;quot; its basal status in his theorizing, and yet its uncertain definition and provenance, see, for instance: Cohen&#039;s introduction to the 1981 ed. of Weber&#039;s &#039;&#039;General Economic History&#039;&#039; (1981), pp. xxv-xxvii; Löwith, &#039;&#039;Max Weber and Karl Marx&#039;&#039; (1982), pp. 40-42, 53-54, n. 49; Freund, &#039;&#039;The Sociology of Max Weber&#039;&#039; (1968), pp. 140-149. In Weber, see &#039;&#039;General Economic History&#039;&#039; (1981), chaps. 29, 30, &#039;&#039;The Protestant Ethic and the Spirit of Capitalism&#039;&#039; (1958), pp. 13-31, 59-60, 79, 118-120, 191, n. 19, 265, n. 31, &#039;&#039;The Religion of China&#039;&#039; (1951), chap. 8, &#039;&#039;The Religion of India&#039;&#039; (1967), p. 387, and other works.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; One reason seems to lie in his view of social causality, with ideas and values, and the evolution of ideas and values, treated as prime causes of social processes, social structures, and social change. Given this conception, he would not be expected to look for nonideological-level causes for ideas and values. Doubtless there were other reasons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Whatever Weber considered to have been the basic cause of the differences between rational, progressive European society and irrational, traditional Asian society (Africa and America were scarcely noticed), he delineated these supposed differences very carefully. The most crucial arguments are found in his &#039;&#039;General Economic History&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;The Protestant Ethic and the Spirit of Capitalism&#039;&#039;. The development of rationality among Europeans—however that had happened—led to a special sort of &amp;quot;economic ethic,&amp;quot; a body of values, aspirations, and logical thought processes that emerged primarily in connection with the Reformation (and particularly Puritanism) but which, more fundamentally, produced capitalism. The important point here is that basal rationality produced both the &amp;quot;economic ethic&amp;quot; of capitalism and the Protestant movement: Weber is not (as some think) explaining capitalism and modernity in terms narrowly of religion. He does invoke religion to explain many aspects of the supposed traditionalism of Asians, but here too a primordial irrationality is seen as underlying religion. (He writes, for instance, of the &amp;quot;magical traditionalism&amp;quot; of Indians and Chinese.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Weber, &#039;&#039;General Economic History&#039;&#039; (1981), p. 161. Also see pp. 339, 355-368. Weber makes a large number of comments about the irrationality of Asians.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The superior rationality of Europeans produces other major historical differences between Europe and non-Europe. Europeans are basically freedom loving, not ground under by Oriental despotism; this devolves into a form of city that is much freer than the Asian city, the latter being conceived by Weber as (in essence) merely a physical entity wholly controlled by the overarching empire, and the former as a truly new form of society, emerging in the Middle Ages and inaugurating modernity.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Weber, &#039;&#039;Economy and Society&#039;&#039;, vol. 2 (1968), pp. 1212-1374.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; (As we discuss in Chapter 3, Asian cities were not as Weber described them. Some were free city-states, others were virtually free under a loose imperial umbrella. European cities, on the other hand, were much less independent than Weber thought.) Landholding systems were also different because of differences in rationality: only in Europe, says Weber (here putting forward a purely traditional European view) does the concept of private property truly emerge. The feudal estate is almost genuinely private property. The Asian estate is seen as merely a temporary assignment of land as a source of revenue for dignitaries, a form of salary given for service and ordinarily returned to the state. But European feudal estates were also, legally and actually, granted on service tenure, and in both continents these sorts of estates tended in general to become hereditary and thus eventually private property (see Chapter 3). Of course, Weber talks about other supposed differences between Europe and non-Europe, but the examples given here will suffice to show his overall approach.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Weber did not originate most of these arguments, although he codified them and developed them in a brilliant way. Yet Weber is given credit overall, and &amp;quot;Weberianism&amp;quot; is now the most important form of theory in explaining the European &amp;quot;miracle.&amp;quot; The basic form can be summarized very simply. Rationality is the causal root. The effect of differential rationality is, in Europe, permanent progress, modernization, and capitalism. In non-Europe it is stagnation, traditionalism, and various irrational cultural attributes such as superstition. The model here is simple diffusionism: rationality and therefore modernization are permanent in Europe. Non-Europe does not modernize except by the diffusion of these traits from Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The doctrine of &amp;quot;Western rationality&amp;quot; is widely used today in explanations for Europe&#039;s unique rise, its &amp;quot;miracle.&amp;quot; No longer is the superior rationality of Europeans attributed, even implicitly, to racial superiority, but how the historians manage to assert the one without the other is not an easy question to answer. Generally, causality is consigned to the impenetrable mists of ancient history, with perhaps an occasional speculation about ancient free-living European peasants or the evils of Oriental despotism, or with a ritual citation of Max Weber. For many historians, I suspect, the idea of European rationality is simply axiomatic. Europeans, for whatever reason, are just built that way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Eric L. Jones dwells very heavily on rationality as an explanation for Europe&#039;s historical superiority in &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039;. His claim is that there is a fundamental lack of rationality among Asians and Africans. The assertions are laid on so thickly, and with so little attempt to account for this putative irrationality, that it is difficult to avoid the suspicion that Jones, perhaps alone among modern &amp;quot;miracle&amp;quot; historians, holds some deep prejudices. Africans are dismissed, in a brief discussion, as having had no significance in history. They are characterized in a way that suggests, not very subtly, that they are closer to the beasts than are other humans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Africa man adapted himself to nature. The hunter felt part of the ecosystem, not outside it looking in with wonder, and definitely not above it and superior. After all, there were large carnivores who sought man as a prey. The most evocative symbol of this ecological oneness may be the honey guides ... birds commensal with man. They fly, chattering loudly, ahead of bands of hunters, leading them ... to the tree hives of wild bees and feeding on the wax after the men have broken open the hives. (154)&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Numbers in parentheses are page numbers in &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is a Tarzan image. Most Africans were farmers, not hunters (we discussed this previously). The scavenging house sparrow is also commensal with humans in the suburbs of London, but Jones speaks of &amp;quot;commensalism&amp;quot; only for Africans. (Ethology, as we will see, is evoked somewhat similarly for Asians.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The ecologists&#039; term &amp;quot;commensalism&amp;quot; refers to a form of tight interspecific cooperation between animal species, but hardly ever is it applied to humans.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There was scant incentive or pressure for development or invention. ... Any pressure ... was apparently offset by the use of slaves instead of the improvement of methods. ... Otherwise wealth was spent on luxury items. ... [There was] pervasive insecurity as a result of conflict and slave-raiding. (155-156)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Africans thus were noninventive, were aggressive, were lovers of luxury, were slavers and slaves. And also hunters close to the beasts they hunted. So: it &amp;quot;is not clear what indigenous developments were possible&amp;quot; (156).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Asians do not think logically. There is &amp;quot;relative absence of the empirical enquiry and criticism of the Graeco-Judeo-Christian tradition&amp;quot; (161), and &amp;quot;lack of a crisp tradition of logical debate,&amp;quot; which may explain the &amp;quot;failure&amp;quot; of Asian science&amp;quot; (162). &amp;quot;The notion of a consensus in interpreting nature may have seemed absurd&amp;quot; (162)—that is, Asians may not even have had an ability to conceptualize scientific verification, to distinguish empirical truth from falsity. They were uncreative: &amp;quot;Asian institutions suppressed creativity or diverted it into producing voluptuous luxuries&amp;quot; (231).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Asians have attitudes and values that inhibit progress. &amp;quot;Oriental philosophies [emphasize] emotions, values and cosmologies,&amp;quot; at the expense of empirical thought (161). Orientals are lazy (163). They (like Africans) have a &amp;quot;love of luxury&amp;quot; (170), and they love to buy things like &amp;quot;kingfisher feathers ... precious stones ... drugs no modern pharmacopeia would own&amp;quot; (164). They have a &amp;quot;servile spirit,&amp;quot; their armies lack &amp;quot;tough&amp;quot; petty officers (167). They are, as a rule, introverted, inward looking; they are &amp;quot;increasingly immobile societies undergoing &#039;curious experiences,&#039;&amp;quot; given to self-imposed &amp;quot;isolation&amp;quot; (170), lacking an urge to explore (168, 177, 203, 231). They are given to senseless warfare (169, 188, 197), do not have a written legal system (164, 188, 197), and do not have a concept of political boundary (167, 194). There is much thievery and piracy (189, 199, 209, 229-30).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In most judgments of this type (of which I have given only a sample), Jones is referring to Asians in general and through all times in their history.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Typical of Jones&#039;s method is to find some objectionable feature of very early Asian society, compare it with some pleasing feature of modern, post-industrial-revolution European society, and then treat both features as though they were permanent characteristics of the respective societies, giving a picture of awful primitiveness to Asians and marvelous modernity to Europeans thereby.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Some judgments are more specific. Islamic society was for a time somewhat innovative, borrowing technology from other societies, and preserving ancient Greek sciences. (This is a standard Eurocentric belief: Arabs preserved Greek science during the Dark Ages and then handed it back to Europe for further development, something like an intellectual left-luggage office.) The Ottoman Empire (the single real example of Islamic culture discussed by Jones, with the imputation that it stands as symbol for Islam as a whole and at all times) stamped out original thought. It produced unreason, backwardness, and retrogression, a &amp;quot;mist of obscurantist thought&amp;quot; (183). Ottomans didn&#039;t even know &amp;quot;the elementary facts of geography&amp;quot; (184) and couldn&#039;t even make decent maps (179). (Jones himself doesn&#039;t know much about geography and maps.) Rulers were often &amp;quot;degenerates,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;drunkards,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;mental defectives,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;lechers,&amp;quot; ruling with despotism and terror (186-187), their &amp;quot;philosophy&amp;quot; being theft and despoilment, against which there was &amp;quot;no legal shield&amp;quot; (187-189).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indian society was socially and psychologically &amp;quot;frozen&amp;quot; (192), with values that were deleterious to economic progress. Religion was invoked to sanction all acts, but the advice of religious counsellors was &amp;quot;malicious or random&amp;quot; (195). The Mughal rulers were, like the Ottomans, degenerates, running society for their own benefit, given to &amp;quot;voluptuous selfishness,&amp;quot; harems, jewels, menageries, intrigues, treason (196). The state was purely predatory. Technology was &amp;quot;almost stagnant,&amp;quot; not even copying from abroad (199). &amp;quot;No written legal code existed,&amp;quot; says Jones in a quite bizarre misstatement (197).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
China was technologically inventive and innovative until the early Middle Ages, when progress stopped. There was thereafter a &amp;quot;retreat&amp;quot; (203); some skills were even forgotten. Chinese became &amp;quot;inward-looking&amp;quot; (203, 216, 220). China &amp;quot;backed away&amp;quot; from technology, from trade, from exploration. Technological development stopped even in agriculture, and only the cultivation of new land, with irrational cutting of irreplaceable forests, and the fortunate, timely, arrival of New World crops such as maize and sweet potato, saved the Chinese temporarily from disaster, although cutting down these forests was &amp;quot;one of mankind&#039;s greatest acts of ecological stupidity,&amp;quot; stupidity which led to &amp;quot;soil erosion, gullying, silting and floods&amp;quot; (213). (Apparently the deforestation of Europe and North American was not &amp;quot;stupid.&amp;quot;) Peasants were given to &amp;quot;envy and suspicion&amp;quot; (206), were stupid as farmers (212-217), and were stupid also in preferring &amp;quot;maximal reproduction&amp;quot; over &amp;quot;affluence&amp;quot; (218). The state was despotic, a &amp;quot;revenue-pump&amp;quot; for the rulers, providing no services (206). There was (again) a love of luxury, an attitude of &amp;quot;empty cultural superiority&amp;quot; (205), a corrupt, venal, parasitic ruling class. Chinese had &amp;quot;anti-social customs&amp;quot; (7) and were diseased.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ethology, the science of comparative animal behavior, is invoked repeatedly by Jones in his characterization of Asians and Africans. Oriental courts were given to displays of &amp;quot;the dominance relationship&amp;quot; (109, 209). Multiple wives had &amp;quot;ethological significance,&amp;quot; as also, perhaps, did the &amp;quot;amassing&amp;quot; of slaves for &amp;quot;display purposes.&amp;quot; &amp;quot;Great attention was paid to submission symbols, kneeling, prostration, the kotow&amp;quot; (209). In India, a &amp;quot;similar calculus ... underlay human demographic behavior and veneration of the cow&amp;quot; (19). Recall the &amp;quot;commensalism&amp;quot; in Africa.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These beliefs about the intellectual and moral inferiority of non-Europeans are old colonial-era prejudices, which Jones merely recites. The fact that &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; is taken seriously by some historians is partly, I think, a reflection of the degree to which these old prejudices still lurk within our scholarship as implicit beliefs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Many other historians of the &amp;quot;miracle&amp;quot; try to insert European rationality at or near the base of their explanatory theories. Michael Mann can be taken as a typical representative of the genre. We have already discussed his contrived little theory about the marvelous Iron Age Indo-Europeans of the northern forests, uniquely individualistic, aggressive, freedom loving (all notions from nineteenth-century and earlier scholarship, none grounded in solid evidence for Europe or, comparatively, for non-Europe). Mann moves smoothly to ancient Greece, which he sees as the product of this earlier Indo-European root rationalism. The Greeks invented most things rational, from science to democracy to ethics (a respect for humanity). Other Mediterranean peoples contributed rather little by comparison with the rational Indo-Europeans who swept down from the north. (Even the Roman influence, which subjugated the European peasant, is seen as vaguely &amp;quot;un-European.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&amp;quot;Frankish feudalism, in many ways proto-typical of later feudalism, was ... a mixture of the very, very old, deep-rooted drift of &#039;European&#039; peasant society and of the brand new the opportunistic, the &#039;un-European,&#039;&amp;quot; Mann, &amp;quot;European Development&amp;quot; (1988), p. 16.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;) History then moves northwestward as northern Europeans clear the forest and move what Mann calls the &amp;quot;leading edge&amp;quot; of European society forward toward what seems to be its foreordained goal, Britain.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mann, &amp;quot;European Development&amp;quot; (1988), p. 17. Also see his &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986), for instance pp. 190, 195, 213, 377, 404, 412, 510. (&amp;quot;At the end of all these processes stood one organic, medium-sized, wet-soil island state, perfectly situated for take-off: Great Britain,&amp;quot; p. 510.)&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Early in the Middle Ages, around A.D. 800, a newer stage of rationality emerges, combining the old culture and the new Christianity. Europeans now demonstrate their &amp;quot;rational restlessness&amp;quot; and their unique inventiveness, producing a revolutionary agricultural system and much more. The explanation is the ancient rationality, the newer Christian rationality, and the marvelous European environment.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mann, &amp;quot;European Development&amp;quot; (1988), pp. 8-9, 11-12, 15-18 and &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986), pp. 377-378, 397-398, 402-408, 412, 500-510. Also, on Europe&#039;s rationality and its historical significance, see McNeill, &#039;&#039;Plagues and Peoples&#039;&#039; (1976), pp. 41, 97, 106-107, 236, 238, 249, 256, 259, 264.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; This, for Mann, is the kernel of the European miracle. The only part of this construct that requires further comment is the theory of a medieval technological revolution; this we discuss in the following section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lynn White, Jr., contributed a very influential form of the rationality doctrine with his theory about the unique technological inventiveness of medieval Europeans, a theory we discuss in the next section. John Hall contributes another version, much like Mann&#039;s except for its emphasis on the invention of rational politics by Europeans and its tendency to follow Eric L. Jones in various negative judgments about Asian history. Space does not permit me to review the way some other present-day historians invoke, and use, the theory of Western rationality as grounding for their theories about the European miracle. I should simply note that some of them are Marxists and near-Marxists. Perry Anderson, for instance, argues from ancient Greek rationality to European medieval progress. So does M. I. Finley. Robert Brenner contributes a very different Marxist rationality theory: there was no rationality until, quite suddenly, capitalism appeared among the English yeoman farmers, who promptly became amazingly inventive and started a technological revolution that has not yet ended.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See P. Anderson, &#039;&#039;Passages from Antiquity to Feudalism&#039;&#039; (1974), part 3; Finley, &#039;&#039;The Use and Abuse of History&#039;&#039; (1975), chap. 6; Aston and Philipn, &#039;&#039;The Brenner Debate&#039;&#039; (1985), pp. 32-33, 42-51, 59, 63n, 214-215, 234-236, 306-316.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Technology ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Among all of the narrow-minded ways of looking at history, technological determinism is the one most congenial to Eurocentric tunnel vision. It has the appearance, the illusion, of cold-blooded scientific fact. &amp;quot;X was invented here, on this date, and produced these effects.&amp;quot; In talking about matters of technology, one can deny that ethnocentrism enters the picture: &amp;quot;this is hard fact, indisputable.&amp;quot; And the significance of technology seems equally indisputable: a new tool does produce more food, a new weapon more casualties, whereas a new social form might have historical significance; then again, it might not. But technological determinism gets its greatest strength from the error known as &amp;quot;telescoping history.&amp;quot; When we travel, mentally, back to medieval Europe, we pass backward through the eras in which Europeans clearly were technologically superior to everyone else, and so we tend to expect that superiority to have been the state of things at all prior times. But Europe advanced technologically beyond Asia and Africa mainly after the beginning of the industrial revolution. Europe did not even begin to forge ahead of other civilizations in technology or science until the seventeenth century or even later. By telescoping history we imbue the Middle Ages with the marvelous technological attributes of modern Europe. It is then but a small step to the conclusion that, since technology is so obviously a powerful cause in history, and since Europe has always been so technological, here is the root of the European miracle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But tools do not invent themselves or reproduce themselves. If you invoke technological determinism, you must not only show that the technology appeared and had such-and-such effects, you must also explain why it was invented, and by whom. In nearly all (I think) technologically deterministic arguments made as part of some explanation for Europe&#039;s historical progress, technological arguments end up being arguments about the inventors, not the inventions. They end up in some Weberian claim that Europeans are more inventive, innovative, &amp;quot;rational,&amp;quot; than non-Europeans. Technological determinism then differs from other kinds of tunnel-historical theories mainly in its claim that rational Europeans moved their society forward by inventing new technology, rather than doing so by inventing new political systems, new forms of social organization, new religions, or whatever.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Claims are made by Eurocentric historians that technology was a prime mover in all epochs from the post-Neolithic on down. Nowadays it would be hard to ignore the evidence that in ancient times the greatest technological innovations, in agriculture, transportation, and other spheres, entered Europe from the south and east, so technological arguments tend to begin with the Middle Ages. There are, however, exceptions. Michael Mann, as we noted previously, has revived the old notion that the invention of iron somehow revolutionized European peasant society in a way it did not do elsewhere, that it produced a wondrously inventive, acquisitive (etc.) type of society, rooted in iron-plowing Indo-European-speaking peasants, and he claims, in parallel, that Oriental despotisms of the ancient Middle East held back technological inventiveness, where peasants were supposedly held in tight control by the political system that irrigation technology necessitated. But this theory is contradicted by a great deal of evidence. So much is known about technological progress in the Middle East during this period (from the late Neolithic to the &amp;quot;Iron Age&amp;quot; and beyond) that the notion of noninventiveness is unreasonable. But iron working was not invented in Europe. Probably it came from the Middle East, but there are hints from farther afield (including West Africa). Plows were used in Middle Eastern agriculture, irrigated and nonirrigated, as well as in European agriculture. Plows may have been used earlier in China than in Europe. So the technological argument put forward by Mann (and others) is unsound and the psychological and social deductions are fallacious.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Many other &amp;quot;miracle&amp;quot; historians are prepared to start with the ancient Greeks and define these folk as the original uniquely inventive Europeans, but the Greeks did not contribute more to technological progress than their neighbors did to the south and east, so arguments of this sort must revert to the abstract idea of &amp;quot;rationality,&amp;quot; thus, of potentiality, not actuality, a point we have already discussed. The Romans, in turn, were moderately inventive, but so were their neighbors. In the European Dark Ages, as everyone agrees, technological progress was hardly impressive, and was in fact going on at a healthier pace in parts of Africa and Asia. I suspect that the majority of historians today are not willing to go along with Michael Mann and others who claim to find a unique technological progress in Europe prior to the Middle Ages, although this view was quite widespread until a few decades ago. Most would disagree with Eric L. Jones, in &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039;, that Europe has always been &amp;quot;a mutant civilization in its uninterrupted amassing of knowledge about technology&amp;quot; (p. 45), since there is nothing unusual about this process in human society.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is with the Middle Ages that technological arguments come to prominence. It is here that the notion of a technological &amp;quot;takeoff to modernity&amp;quot; is most frequently encountered among historians of the European &amp;quot;miracle.&amp;quot; The common argument form is about as follows: Northern Europeans indeed were rather backward folk until late in the Dark Ages, the early Middle Ages, when a kind of awakening occurred, and northern Europeans now suddenly emerged as the people we know—the most dynamic, most progressive, most innovative, most rapidly rising (etc.) people in the world—and the key to this rise was a set of early medieval technological innovations, based mainly, these historians claim, on European inventions, neglecting non-Europe and thus presenting us with a typical sort of Eurocentric tunnel history.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lynn White, Jr., is an American historian whose book &#039;&#039;Medieval Technology and Social Change&#039;&#039; presents this kind of technologically deterministic tunnel-historical argument in perhaps its purest form. This book, published in 1962, has been highly influential; its arguments are built in to the theories of many &amp;quot;miracle&amp;quot; historians, including Mann, Jones, and Hall (who not only cite the book repeatedly in their writings but rely on it for many technological arguments they invoke in support of their theories). The book is an effort to show that technological invention and innovation was the central cause of the rise of Europe during the Middle Ages. White lists a series of supposedly European inventions, and shows, for each in turn, what marvelous effects it had on European history. Here, for starters, is an example. The early medieval invention of the iron stirrup had a &amp;quot;catalytic ... influence on history.&amp;quot; It permitted a new form of mounted warfare, created the phenomenon of the medieval knight, and produced feudalism (knights became manorial lords). And so, &amp;quot;The Man on Horseback, as we have known him during the past millennium, was made possible by the stirrup.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;White, &#039;&#039;Medieval Technology and Social Change&#039;&#039; (1962), p. 38); also McNeill, &#039;&#039;Plagues and Peoples&#039;&#039; (1976), p. 234.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But White&#039;s crucial arguments concern productive technology, and particularly agricultural technology. He claims that an agricultural revolution occurred in Europe (or rather in northern Europe) in the early Middle Ages, and this quite revolutionized European society and became a large part of the explanation for modernization and the rise of capitalism. He believes that three European inventions were the crux of the matter: the heavy plow, the horse collar (and therefore the use of horsepower), and the three-field rotation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The heavy plow, pulled by teams of (typically) eight oxen, is assigned, by White, a tentative central European origin in the sixth century; it then diffused quickly throughout northwestern Europe, and &amp;quot;does much to account for the bursting vitality of the Carolingian realm in the eighth century.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;White, &#039;&#039;Medieval Technology and Social Change&#039;&#039; (1962), p. 54.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; White is correct in calling attention, as others before him have done, to the importance of the heavy plow as an agricultural innovation in the wetter and colder parts of Europe. It was highly advantageous in opening the deep, heavy soils of the North European Plain and the deep-working of soil was critical in view of northern Europe&#039;s moist weather. It was in fact necessary for the areal spread of farming into some of the wetter soils. Therefore, the heavy plow had much to do with the overall increase in medieval agricultural production. But the heavy plow was not in fact invented in Europe in the Middle Ages. Plows pulled by teams of 24 oxen were used in northern India before the time of Christ.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Kosambi, &#039;&#039;Ancient India&#039;&#039; (1969), p. 89; R. S. Sharma, &#039;&#039;Light on Early Indian Society and Economy&#039;&#039; (1966), p. 57.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Southern Europe used lighter plows, because the soils were generally lighter and drier, but the technology was not significantly different. It seems certain that the heavy plow was either diffused into northern Europe from elsewhere or was a local adaptation of a widely used tool-form. So this is not a European technological revolution. And the effects of the innovation in northern Europe probably should be attributed to the social forces that led to the introduction of the heavy plow, not to the technology itself. We know, for instance, that the growth of feudalism led to massive expansion of cultivation, partly at the incentive of the lords, who wished to increase their wealth and power by expanding their demesnes, partly as a reaction by peasants to the persistently increased demands from the lords for surplus product, increments of demand which could not be met without endangering the subsistence of the peasant family unless the peasants found a way to increase their total production. It appears that whatever historical effects are attributed by White to the plow should rather be attributed to feudalism as a social system. And the effects claimed by him are indeed quite miraculous.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thanks to the adoption of the heavy plow, says White, there was a tremendous growth in population. Then there was a changeover to the &amp;quot;open field&amp;quot; system of cultivation and this led, according to White, to the invention of &amp;quot;communal patterns&amp;quot; of human cooperation (as though communal life had not been known previously and was unknown elsewhere). This was a social revolution, a &amp;quot;reshaping of peasant society.&amp;quot; It was &amp;quot;the essence of the manorial economy,&amp;quot; ignoring the fact that the manors were owned by lords, not villagers.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;White, &#039;&#039;Medieval Technology and Social Change&#039;&#039; (1962), p. 44.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; More important still, there came then &amp;quot;a change [in] the northern peasants&#039; attitude towards nature and thus our own&amp;quot; (my emphasis). Why? Because many families had to collaborate to mount one plow team, and so their allotments now were proportional to their social contribution, not to their needs. (&amp;quot;No more fundamental change in the idea of man&#039;s relation to the soil can be imagined: once man had been part of nature; now he became her exploiter.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;White, &#039;&#039;Medieval Technology and Social Change&#039;&#039; (1962), p. 56; McNeill, &#039;&#039;Plagues and Peoples&#039;&#039; (1976), p. 237.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But all of this is nonsense. Neither the technical arguments nor the social deductions make any sense. The Domesday Book gives household-to-plow-team ratios of between 2:3 and 3:5.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See C. T. Smith, &#039;&#039;An Historical Geography of Western Europe&#039;&#039; (1967), p. 203; Darby, &#039;&#039;The Domesday Geography of Eastern England&#039;&#039; (1952).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The open-field system seems to be quite old and was widespread in Europe and known in Asia and North Africa in early times.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Orwin and Orwin, &#039;&#039;The Open Fields&#039;&#039; (1967), chap. 3; C. T. Smith, &#039;&#039;An Historical Geography of Western Europe&#039;&#039; (1967), chap. 4.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Northern villages, using big teams and heavy plows, were no more cooperative than southern villages, using light plows. Communal ownership of fields in some societies implied greater cooperation than that found in the European open field system. The manorial economy was a social system, not a technological invention. And so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
White&#039;s second revolutionary advance is labelled &amp;quot;the discovery of horse-power.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;White, &#039;&#039;Medieval Technology and Social Change&#039;&#039; (1962), p. 57.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Horses had been around for some time, of course. The essential innovation, for White, was the modern horse collar, which he thinks was probably developed in the Occident some time before the ninth century. According to White, the horse collar transformed agriculture and grain transport in northern Europe by permitting horses to replace oxen in pulling plows and wagons. Horses pull about the same weight as oxen but do so about 50% faster. From this fact White draws awesome conclusions. There was, he says, a large increase in agricultural production. Commerce became intensified because transport by horsepower was vastly cheaper than by ox power. Villages became much larger, almost townlike, because now there could be a larger radius of travel from home to field. The enlargement of villages yielded the &amp;quot;virtue of a more &#039;urban&#039; life,&amp;quot; permitting the village to have a church, tavern, school (now boys &amp;quot;could learn their letters&amp;quot;).&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;White, &#039;&#039;Medieval Technology and Social Change&#039;&#039; (1962), p. 67.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; And now there could be &amp;quot;news from distant parts.&amp;quot; A transformation, overall, of profound importance. It &amp;quot;urbanized&amp;quot; the village, giving peasants the &amp;quot;psychological preparation&amp;quot; for &amp;quot;the change in Occidental culture from country to city.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;White, &#039;&#039;Medieval Technology and Social Change&#039;&#039; (1962), p. 68.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; All this and more from one innovation: the horse collar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But the horse collar was widespread in Eurasia from an early date, and probably was invented for harnessing not horses but camels.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Bray, &#039;&#039;Science and Civilization in China&#039;&#039;, vol. 6, part 2, &#039;&#039;Agriculture&#039;&#039; (1984), pp. 304-328.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; And the presumption that horses held advantages over oxen in plowing and transport is widely disputed: the horse was more efficient, but more costly in upkeep, and generally required that cropland be devoted to feed crops. In England the horse did not replace the ox. Village size had nothing to do with horsepower. In many parts of the world where horses were not used, villages were much larger than they were in northern Europe. In countries like China, long-distance grain transport was often by canal, much more efficient than horse-drawn wagons. And so, again, neither the technical arguments nor the social deductions make any sense.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, White attributes equally marvelous effects to the introduction of the three-field system. Part of this argument is familiar to every European schoolchild, who learned that the three-field rotation was a great advance over the older two-field system because (mainly) it reduced the proportion of the land in fallow from roughly 1/2 to 1/3. But White adds a cornucopia of additional blessings. Oats could now be planted widely, hence there was greater use of horsepower. In a section of &#039;&#039;Medieval Technology and Social Change&#039;&#039;, &amp;quot;The Three-Field Rotation and Improved Nutrition,&amp;quot; he claims that the three-field system somehow permitted farmers now to grow legumes, and this vastly improved the European diet, which, in turn, &amp;quot;goes far towards explaining ... the startling expansion of population, the growth and multiplication of cities, the rise of industrial production, the outreach of commerce, and the new exuberance of spirits which enlivened that age.&amp;quot; In short, says Lynn White, Jr., &amp;quot;the Middle Ages were full of beans.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;White, &#039;&#039;Medieval Technology and Social Change&#039;&#039; (1962), p. 76.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But none of this (least of all the pun) can be taken seriously. There is no basis for White&#039;s argument that population was held down by an unbalanced diet (overloaded, he says, with carbohydrates, undersupplied with proteins). Farmers using the two-field system were not protein-starved, because legume cultivation long antedated the three-field system, grains also contained proteins, and fruits, animal products, and so on, were widely consumed. The three-field system was not a technological revolution. First of all, even more intensive rotations, including fallowless systems, were in use in many parts of the world long before the Middle Ages, and I suspect were common in parts of Europe (such as portions of the Po plain) where deep, nutrient-rich soils and good soil-water relations were found. Second, the two-field system was preferred, and was not supplanted, in many ecological situations, and in areas where fallow was needed for grazing. The picture is complex, but the generalization is clear: the three-field system was neither a technical revolution nor a fountainhead for social change. And it had close relatives in other continents, so it cannot be said to have been something uniquely European.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In &#039;&#039;Medieval Technology and Social Change&#039;&#039;, White says little about the causes of the revolutionary technology. He does so elsewhere, however, and we find that his basic argument is really quite Weberian.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;White, &#039;&#039;Machina Ex Deo&#039;&#039; (1968). See in particular the essay—quite a famous one—called &amp;quot;The Historical Roots of Our Ecological Crisis&amp;quot; (chap. 5).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Technological determinism dissolves into an ideological determinism, focused on the inventiveness—the rationality—of Europeans. This White attributes, basically, to religion: in part to &amp;quot;the Judeo-Christian teleology,&amp;quot; and in larger part to &amp;quot;Western Christianity.&amp;quot; The former underlies the European&#039;s unique &amp;quot;faith in perpetual progress,&amp;quot; which leads to a faith in the virtues of inventiveness and technology.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;White, &amp;quot;The Historical Roots of Our Ecological Crisis.&amp;quot; In White, &#039;&#039;Machina Ex Deo&#039;&#039; (1967), p. 85.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The latter produces &amp;quot;an Occidental, voluntarist realization of the Christian dogma of man&#039;s transcendence of, and rightful mastery over, nature&amp;quot;—that is, the separation of Man and Nature. To a Western Christian, nature is inert, valueless. It is blasphemy to &amp;quot;assume spirit in nature.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;White, &#039;&#039;Machina Ex Deo&#039;&#039; (1967), p. 90.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; This gives the Western Christian a desire and right to manipulate, use, transform nature—to invent new technology. The errors here are glaring. First, there is ignorance of the teachings of religions other than Christianity. Second, White resurrects the ethnocentric myth that ancient pagans and followers of modern non-Christian religions somehow are unable to fully separate Man from Nature and share the primitive view that spirits reside in all things. Actually, medieval Christians did perceive spirit in all things. (It was God&#039;s way.) They did not treat humans as absolutely separate from nature. This dualism is a product of modern times, mainly of the commoditization of nature with the rise of capitalism. Dualism is a doctrine of post-Cartesian thought, not something residing deep in &amp;quot;Western Christianity.&amp;quot; Medieval Christians believed that the world is one, a plenum, an uninterrupted chain of being. Medieval folk did not, in general, believe, as White claims they did, in &amp;quot;perpetual progress&amp;quot;: they believed in the Fall, and they believed, on the whole, that Creation had been perfect and complete. White is simply telescoping history in order to claim that modern European attitudes about technology and technological change are actually basic and ancient attributes of the culture of Europeans, and only Europeans. His central thesis is basic tunnel history: Europeans are uniquely inventive, so they create unique technology, so they progress.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I believe that all of the claims for European technological superiority in the Middle Ages can be countered, and eventually disproven, in much the same way. I think it will become clear that all of the civilizations of the hemisphere were inventing new technology and sharing it around; the &amp;quot;sharing&amp;quot; being the usual mechanisms of diffusion as they operated in two spheres of reality: agricultural techniques passed from farmer to farmer and other techniques (including some of those involved in commercial agriculture) moving through the mainly urban network of trade and transportation, or occasionally (as with some military technology) moving around the map along with conquest. Thus I see a rather even building up of technology in Europe, Africa, and Asia. It was only after 1492, with its utterly revolutionary consequences, that European technology acquired the beginning of an edge over Asian and African. Did medieval technological evolution produce, as cause, the major medieval social changes? I leave the answer to that question to others. My purpose in this book is not to defend any one theory of social change, merely to show that the processes were not uniquely European.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Chapter 3 I will discuss this matter further, showing how technological and economic surfaces emerged in medieval Europe, Africa, and Asia, and that processes of change in all three continents were—as to technology and economy—quite similar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before we leave the subject of technology, something must be said about one fascinating issue: what I will call &amp;quot;the China formula.&amp;quot; Since the end of World War II a great deal has become known about the history of technology in China, much of it through the work of Joseph Needham and his associates.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Needham et al., &#039;&#039;Science and Civilization in China&#039;&#039; (1954-1984).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In prior times, the European miracle theorists were prone to ignore Chinese technological achievements. (Weber did so less than most.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Some historians today simply ignore this evidence and repeat the old notions about China&#039;s lack of technological prowess. See, for example, Roberts, &#039;&#039;The Hutchinson History of the World&#039;&#039; (1987), pp. 493-495, 502.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;) The usual pattern was to admit Chinese priority for some innovations but claim that, overall, the main technological advances took place in Europe and the Mediterranean. Where there were truly notable Chinese inventions, it was often claimed that the Chinese invented these things in a ludic vein whereas the Europeans put these things to work. (The paradigm, of course, is gunpowder, which the Chinese were supposed to have invented merely for fireworks.) One could bundle such propositions into a classical diffusionist model of the Chinese: they had, in prior ages, progressed somewhat, but then they slowed to a stop, starting up again only when Europeans brought new ideas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the information about Chinese technology increased, it was necessary to make somewhat more subtle arguments. Today, these arguments fit into a formula with two basic propositions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. &amp;quot;If indeed the development of technology in medieval China forces us to ask why China did not, then, have its own miracle, we can at least assert that China was the only civilization outside of Europe about which such questions arise.&amp;quot; In other words, European superiority over everybody else is not put into doubt. This is convenient for those, for instance, who want to show that India, Africa, the Middle East, and so on, had no potential for development.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. &amp;quot;Whatever technological advances took place in medieval China, the important point is that they stopped.&amp;quot; In the formula, this argument is expressed in different ways for different spheres of technology, but the central argument is fairly standard: something characteristic of Chinese medieval culture forced it to cease developing and so to stagnate. In other words, what is plugged in here is the old doctrine of Oriental stagnation. Most typically, Weber is used to make this point: just about all of the Weberian claims about the reasons for Chinese lack of progress are regularly paraded at this point. Some historians balk at using Weber&#039;s thin argument about the stultifying effect of Confucianism. Others prefer not to notice Weber&#039;s ethnocentrism when he describes Chinese personality traits. But Weber&#039;s arguments about the city, landowning, bureaucracy, and empire are still quite regularly employed. The Chinese city was not &amp;quot;free&amp;quot; and did not have a real bourgeoisie. Chinese landowning was not close to private property. The Chinese bureaucracy and the Chinese imperial state were not &amp;quot;rational&amp;quot; and so held back the society from progress.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One can respond to this argument in two steps. First, as Purcell has pointed out, the important question really is how and why these Chinese advances happened, not how and why they stopped happening (if indeed they did stop). In other words, historians must explain how China came to be such a technologically innovative society that it outstripped other civilizations in many spheres of technology for many centuries. Weber doesn&#039;t help in this process one bit. The whole Weberian scheme is an explanation for stagnation, and what we are talking about is impressive progress, not stagnation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second step in the argument requires a focus on the precise period when, according to European miracle historians, the Chinese advance is supposed to have stopped. According to Elvin, broad-spectrum technical advances in China ended after the early fourteenth century. China at this time had perhaps the most advanced and most highly commercialized agriculture in the world. Chinese industrial technology was unexcelled in such fields as textile manufacture. Mechanical clocks were well known.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Needham et al., &#039;&#039;Science and Civilization in China&#039;&#039;, vol. 4, part 2 (1965), chap. 27.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Chinese merchant ships were plying throughout Southeast Asia and into the Indian ocean. Chinese guns were unexcelled. Canal technology was impressive. And so on. Broadly, the changes associated with the rise and travails of the Ming dynasty are associated with the slowing of technical advance, although advances continued to take place in some spheres of technology (shipbuilding, cannons, printing with movable metal type—invented circa 1400, probably in Korea&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Needham et al., &#039;&#039;Science and Civilization in China&#039;&#039; vol. 4, part 2 (1965), p. 33). Arnold Pacey places the innovation in Korea. See Pacey&#039;s &#039;&#039;Technology in World History&#039;&#039; (1990), p. 56.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;—and much more). But Europe at this time was not experiencing a major technical advance either. After 1350 Europe stagnated both economically and technically. There is little evidence that European technology was advancing prior to 1492. The Renaissance was not a technological revolution, as historians have long realized.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See, for example, Lopez, &amp;quot;Hard Times and Investment in Culture&amp;quot; (1953), Thorndyke, &amp;quot;Renaissance or Renaissance?&amp;quot; (1943).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; After 1492 important European advances began again in some technical spheres (notably shipbuilding). Whether truly revolutionary technological change really began before the eighteenth century is a matter of contention among European historians.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What does this say comparatively about China? It suggests that there is no problem of &amp;quot;stagnation.&amp;quot; There was, instead, a slowing of progress during two centuries, in a scenario well known in all human cultures, because uneven progress is the norm. It suggests, rather, a problem that Third World historians focus some attention on but European historians tend to ignore. As a result of the European commercial expansion in the sixteenth century—we argue in this book that the year 1492 was the real birthdate of this process—aggressive European merchant communities began competing and trading with the Chinese in various places, notably Manila and some South China ports. Why did the Chinese merchant community not assert its dominance in this trade? Why did the commercial advantage steadily move in the direction of Europeans, not Chinese (and other Asians)? In other words, there is no stagnation to be explained. There is, rather, a problem as to how and why Europeans gained substantial control of long-distance trade in Asia after about 1600. Anticipating the discussion of later chapters, I will comment simply that this process does not reflect any internal cultural &amp;quot;blockages&amp;quot; in any Asian civilizations. Rather, it reflects the tremendously rapid increase in the profitability, scale, and organization of European enterprise overseas after 1492, which nobody else could really take advantage of, because of the constantly increasing flow of New World bullion into European mercantile coffers (a point we will discuss in some detail in Chapter 4).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During the first half of the fifteenth century, a number of Chinese fleets of combined military, diplomatic, and merchant character were sent into Southeast Asia and the Indian Ocean. Some of the ships held hundreds of men; some were so large that vegetable gardens were placed on the decks. We will discuss the significance of these great voyages in the next chapter; my point now is to notice the way European miracle historians try to accommodate these facts into their theories about Chinese nonprogress. The standard comment is: &amp;quot;But they stopped.&amp;quot; In fact, the last voyage did end around 1440. But the purposes of the voyages had been accomplished. Chinese merchant ships continued to trade in Southeast Asia. Nothing stopped. It is true that the emperors banned Chinese shipping for a time (mainly the early sixteenth century), but such bans were a means of extracting bribes (in effect easements) and they were not, in any case, enforced. For the &amp;quot;miracle&amp;quot; historians, the fact of the imperial ban is proof that China had stopped progressing, and that only Europe contained the potential for the &amp;quot;miracle.&amp;quot; This does not accord with the facts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chinese may have invented guns; in any case, they were as advanced in firearms technology as any other culture down to the end of the Middle Ages. Typical of the way European miracle historians deal with this sphere of technology (as with others) is Carlo Cipolla&#039;s account of the process in his well-known and influential book &#039;&#039;Guns, Sails, and Empires: Technological Innovation and the Early Phase of European Expansion, 1400-1700&#039;&#039;. He concedes, to begin with, that &amp;quot;Chinese guns were at least as good as Western guns, if not better, up to the beginning of the fifteenth century.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Cipolla, &#039;&#039;Guns, Sails, Empires&#039;&#039; (1965), p. 106.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; But when the Portuguese appeared off Canton and fired off their cannon in salute a century later (1517), the Chinese had, magically, retrogressed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The roar of European ordnance awoke Chinese ... to the frightening reality of a strange, alien people that unexpectedly had appeared along their coasts under the protection and with the menace of superior, formidable weapons. ... How to deal with the &amp;quot;foreign devils&amp;quot;? To fight them or to ignore them? To copy and adopt their techniques and give up local habits and traditions or to sever all contacts with them and seek refuge in a dream of isolation? To be or not to be? ... a dilemma that was tragically unanswerable.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Cipolla, &#039;&#039;Guns, Sails, Empires&#039;&#039; (1965), pp. 108-109.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus does rhetoric replace fact in the mythology of Asian stagnation and the European miracle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Chinese formula&amp;quot; seems to be losing credence. But I have no doubt that an &amp;quot;Indian formula,&amp;quot; an &amp;quot;Islamic formula,&amp;quot; an &amp;quot;African formula,&amp;quot; and so on, will be contrived to shore up Eurocentric history as we learn more about Indian, Middle-Eastern, and African technological development prior to 1492.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Society ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Chapter 3 we will take a look at medieval European society and compare it to medieval Asian and African society in terms of those social categories that seem to be important in the process of change toward capitalism and modernity. Among these categories (forms, facts) are class, the state, landholding, trade, and urbanization. Our present task is the more modest one of criticizing theories that claim that one or another social category somehow led Europe to rise above all other civilizations before the end of the Middle Ages, before 1492. For this task we can select a few of the categories that present-day historians of the European miracle claim as favored candidates for this role of historical leadership, of causal motor propelling the so-called &amp;quot;takeoff to modernity.&amp;quot; The favored ones seem to be the state, the church, class, and the family. Most frequently these categories are, themselves, explained in terms of supposedly more basic forces: European rationality, European technology, European demographic uniqueness, or European environmental superiority. These have been discussed at sufficient length already. The following discussion, therefore, will be brief.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== State ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A typical sort of argument begins with a model of the modern European nation-state, the kind of medium-sized, well-integrated, moderately democratic state that emerged after the rise of capitalism, after modernization, after the French and American revolutions. Nobody denies that this form is unique. But European miracle historians tend to make one of two claims about this state form: either it appeared very early in European history, early enough to play a causal role in modernization, or it was somehow immanent in European culture, a state form that was created, naturally and rationally, by freedom-loving, individualistic, antidyspotic Europeans of medieval or earlier times. Sometimes both claims are made: a reduction to European moral rationality and, at the same time, a holistic argument at the level of the state itself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Eric L. Jones, for instance, does precisely that in &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039;. Europe&#039;s medieval political system, says Jones, was near &amp;quot;the heart of the European miracle.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), p. 124.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Here the argument combines the traditional prejudice about Europe&#039;s innate and unique love of freedom with some very odd environmentalistic arguments. First the latter. Jones takes the familiar argument that Europe in early times had a number of fertile core areas, each of which became the hearth of a regional culture, and he turns it into a curious argument to the effect that Europe&#039;s ecological core areas naturally led to a pattern of medium-sized states, unlike, he says, the &amp;quot;imperial&amp;quot; pattern of Asian societies. Empires, in Jones&#039;s view, are innately despotic, and innately given to interfering with the development of the economy. Europe&#039;s geography saved it from this fate. If a number of Europe&#039;s modern states have ecological &amp;quot;core areas,&amp;quot; most do not, and rather few of these core areas became states. The model is environmentalistic and invalid. In any case, comparable core areas are found in many other parts of the world. Medium-sized, separate units of productive agricultural environments are, for instance, typical for Southeast Asia, including the rather discrete mainland cores, like the Irrawaddy and the Chao Phraya basins, the middle Mekong, and the Red River, and even more so the insular region, with cores in Sumatra (two or three), Java (three), Bali, Lombok, Sulawesi, Luzon, and so on. India and China too are moderately dissected in this way. Distinctive cores in Africa include the Middle Niger, Chad, and Congo, among others; in western Asia, Mesopotamia, the Iranian Plateau, and so on.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Among the modern states that do not surround such simple ecological core areas: Spain, Italy, Germany, Poland, Greece, Sweden, Russia, etc. Prior to the 20th century, perhaps only parts of Great Britain (southern England) and France (the Paris Basin) came close to fitting this highly abstract model, a model that is useful for some purposes but not for the purpose of explaining the political history of the continent. Some of these core areas are nuclei of states; others are not. In modern Southeast Asia, Burma, Thailand, and Cambodia fit the model as well as any European case.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Next, Jones builds the image of these natural European Ur-states as somehow naturally forming into what he calls &amp;quot;a states system,&amp;quot; a grid of roughly equal-sized independent states. These, in the Middle Ages, acted toward one another as though they were Hegelian individuals, competing yet cooperating, and marching forward, together, as a kind of members&#039; club, toward modernity. Thus Jones discerns deep in the Middle Ages what amounts to the modern nation-state and the League of Nations. Telescoping history, he imbues the medieval European polities with all the virtues of the modern state: they provided public services, they encouraged the free development of the economy, they were incipiently democratic, and so on. All of this because of their environmental basis and because freedom-loving Europeans lived in them. In reality, the kind of state, and state system, that he describes does not appear until roughly the seventeenth century. Jones finds political characteristics of already-modernizing Europe, falsely claims that these were present long before—some, being environmental, were always present—and so claims to have proven that Europe&#039;s modern democratic political system was, somehow, always present in Europe (and nowhere else). In fact, medieval Europe was a hodge-podge of semisovereign feudal political units, a map so confused that states as such were not always identifiable, and with few of the modern state characteristics attributed to these polities by Jones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But to understand the absurdity of this model of political history, we must notice the way Jones talks about the supposedly barbaric, despotic states of non-Europe. In non-Europe, a natural irrationality combines with environmental disadvantages to produce the opposite of the wonderful European state and system of states: the huge Oriental empire. Why did Asia not develop politically as Europe did? The political &amp;quot;infantilism&amp;quot; of Asia is explained by Jones in terms of (1) a psychological deficiency, consisting of irrationality in matters of intellectual vitality and innovativeness and a sort of moral failing in attitudes relating to the desire for progress, resistance to domination, will to forego animal pleasures, and the like, and (2) an inferior natural environment. The effects of these failings (and some lesser ones), and thus the effective reasons for Asia&#039;s political nondevelopment and nonprogress, are (1) uncontrolled population growth, and (2) bad government, &amp;quot;Oriental despotism&amp;quot; or, as Jones prefers to label it, empire. Throughout &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039;, the main argument supporting the theory about how Europe&#039;s system of states favors development is Jones&#039;s countertheory about the evil nature of the Asian imperial state. Yet, in the end, the countertheory turns out to be as empty as the theory. Jones does not, in fact, give any credible explanation as to why such large empires exist in Asia and not in Europe. But neither does he give a credible argument as to why large states are worse for progress than medium-sized or small ones. (And he is blind to the very real progress that occurred in Asia, and to the many nonimperial states in Asia.) When we examine Jones&#039;s theory about Asian empires, then, we find that it has nothing to do with size or kind of state and everything to do with a conception about the basic nature of politics in non-European societies. This is nothing more than the old idea of &amp;quot;Oriental despotism.&amp;quot; Asians, and indeed all non-Europeans, naturally suffer nasty, despotic, capricious, irresponsible, evil governments. Only Europeans understand and thus enjoy freedom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is not an atypical theory among historians who wish to argue that European political processes and forms were causal forces leading to a medieval &amp;quot;miracle.&amp;quot; The basic form of the theory is traditional. It consists mainly of three propositions: Europeans have an old, deep-seated rationality that impels them toward modern, implicitly democratic, political forms (or, less directly, toward individualistic economic behavior and thus a preference for a minimalistic state); non-Europeans suffer gladly and naturally a despotic, imperial form of state, sometimes powerful but always arbitrary; and Europe&#039;s natural environment gives political modernization one or another sort of unique boost (ecological cores, fertile soil, capes-and-bays accessibility, or whatever). Other propositions figure in most arguments, but these three seem to be the most widely used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They combine with a methodological principle of great significance: whatever causal forces were at work, they were at work early—that is, they set the process of modernization in motion long before the end of the Middle Ages. This, of course, is the crux of the matter. In the present book I argue that modernization (or whatever you want to call it) was indeed going on in medieval Europe, but not only in medieval Europe. Thus the events after 1492 did not start modernization but enabled European changes to increase in magnitude and effect and eventually produce a uniquely &amp;quot;rising&amp;quot; society. Therefore we argue from the uniformitarian hypothesis that Europe had no potential greater than that possessed by non-Europe during the Middle Ages. The fact that there were forces pushing toward democratization and the modern state in medieval Europe tells us nothing about European uniqueness.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
John A. Hall uses the basic Jones model, emphasizing what he calls the &amp;quot;blockages&amp;quot; that prevented China, India, and the Islamic Middle East from developing modern state forms. In brief: China suffered under empire. India suffered under caste (and so had no politics whatever).&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In this connection, see Dirks, &#039;&#039;The Hollow Crown&#039;&#039; (1987).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Islamic-region politics reflected tribalism. Hall describes very old and not really typical forms for each of these civilizations, assuming them to be frozen and permanent, contrasts these with late postmedieval European forms with the inference that these too have been present at least in embryo for a long time, and then builds an argument that non-Europe always lacked the potential for a &amp;quot;miracle,&amp;quot; while Europe always had it.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties&#039;&#039; (1985), &amp;quot;States and Societies: The Miracle in Historical Perspective&amp;quot; (1988).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Michael Mann addresses himself to the abstract entity &amp;quot;power&amp;quot; instead of the more visible &amp;quot;state,&amp;quot; but his argument is not fundamentally different. Mann, like a number of other &amp;quot;miracle&amp;quot; historians, tries to interpret the political chaos of early medieval feudalism, with its fragmentation of polities and sovereignties, into an argument for incipient modernity. The smallness of these politicosocial units implies, somehow, that they were more &amp;quot;intensive,&amp;quot; more meaningful, more pregnant with development potential, than the supposedly vast imperial polities of non-Europe. Mann&#039;s notion of &amp;quot;intensiveness&amp;quot; is basically a notion of value, not of fact.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mann, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986), &amp;quot;European Development&amp;quot; (1988).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In this context we may recall the Magna Carta myth: devolution of power from king to barons is traditionally described as a movement toward democracy, even though the barons in those times were hardly democratic, and poor people preferred to be able to appeal above their heads to the king. (And later the rise of royal power is described as a further step toward democracy, except that you can&#039;t have it both ways.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;This is not the only example of the way arguments centering on the European state have a way of contradicting one another. The Roman state is said, on the one hand, by Hall among others, to have been a crucial innovation, the source of many political features characteristic of, and only of, Europe. On the other hand, the Roman state is dismissed by others (including Mann) as just another &amp;quot;imperial state,&amp;quot; like the despotic Oriental states; Europe supposedly innovated politically by avoiding the imperial form of state and developing instead a kind of smaller and somehow more democratic state.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;) Jean Baechler uses roughly the same model—although, unlike Hall and Mann but rather like Jones, he downplays the role of Christianity in political evolution—with one additional argument: Baechler believes that the medieval European aristocracy (originally an Indo-European &amp;quot;warrior aristocracy&amp;quot;) was itself the original source of democracy, claiming, in a curious reading of history, that aristocrats not only dealt democratically (respectfully) with one another, but they also respected the rights of their peasants.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Baechler, &amp;quot;The Origins of Modernity: Caste and Feudality (India, Europe and Japan)&amp;quot; (1988).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yet there was no democracy in the Middle Ages: European states were as despotic as any found anywhere else. Just as we noted with regard to the ancient Greeks, political forms found in Europe had counterparts elsewhere. If city-states were (perhaps) the closest to democracy—some of them were republican, and were in essence merchant-oligarchies—one need only note that city-states of many sorts lined the coasts of the Indian and Pacific oceans. Nor was the republican form unknown in Asia and Africa.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Church ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Many theories assign one or another causal role to the church as a social institution in the modernization of Europe and the rise of capitalism.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See, for instance, White, &#039;&#039;Machina Ex Deo&#039;&#039; (1968); Mann, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986), &amp;quot;European Development&amp;quot; (1988); Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties&#039;&#039; (1985); Baechler, &amp;quot;The Origins of Modernity&amp;quot; (1988); K. F. Werner, &amp;quot;Political and Social Structures of the West&amp;quot; (1988); and Hallam, &amp;quot;The Medieval Social Picture&amp;quot; (1975).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; (Many other theories assign such a role to Christianity itself, but I will not comment on these.) Of course, the church did have such a role. The problems lie elsewhere. Most of them concern the question whether the church (or churches) provided Europe, and Europeans, with something that was not provided to non-Europeans by their own religious institutions or by other institutions in their own cultures. For instance, the claim has been made that the Catholic church in the Middle Ages unified Europe in cultural terms, to a degree not found elsewhere. But elsewhere comparable or parallel processes were at work. For instance, the much-maligned empires, such as the Chinese empire, provided unity in many ways, while the Islamic religion provided it in the Muslim world. It has also been argued that the medieval church compensated for the political fragmentation of Europe, allowing pan-European development to take place in spite of the lack of a clear pattern of strong states. True. The question is comparative: did the church thereby give Europe some developmental advantage over other civilizations, in which, quite often, there was political unity throughout most historical epochs? I think the answer must be that the church did not give Europe some special cultural quality, lacking in other civilizations, such that Europe could thereby leap into the forefront of social evolution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore I see no basis in fact for suggestions that the medieval church led to European historical superiority in a way that other religious institutions, in other civilizations, did not do. John A. Hall, for instance, asserts that &amp;quot;Christianity provided the best shell for the emergence of states.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties&#039;&#039; (1985), p. 135.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Michael Mann claims that the medieval church &amp;quot;encouraged a drive for moral and social improvement even against worldly authority&amp;quot;—a statement that one might question not merely as a comparison, but also as a factual assertion about the role played by the church in Europe.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mann, &amp;quot;European Development&amp;quot; (1988), p. 12.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; For H. E. Hallam, &amp;quot;the medieval Latin church was the seed-bed of the early modern idea of capitalism.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hallam, &amp;quot;The Medieval Social Picture&amp;quot; (1975), p. 49.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; K. F. Werner maintains that &amp;quot;the &#039;European miracle&#039; [took place] ... because of the existence of a Christian world dominated in the west by Catholic doctrines.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;K. F. Werner. &amp;quot;Political and Social Structures of the West&amp;quot; (1988), p. 172. This German medievalist argues that the central force underlying the &amp;quot;miracle&amp;quot; was Christianity. He refers here to the Catholic church, to the body of doctrine (Catholic and later also Protestant), to the social and political institutions that were influenced both by church and by doctrine, and to the faith of European people, which, in Werner&#039;s opinion, had much to do with their innovativeness, their sense of &amp;quot;restlessness,&amp;quot; their rationality. Werner acknowledges that many causal factors were at work in bringing about the rise of Europe, and he does not hesitate to claim a role for the natural environment. But it is clear that his theory is primarily based on religion. And beyond this, one senses that this scholar himself may see the hand of a Christian god in the rise of Christian Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Werner first of all makes a strong case to the effect that European history maintained a continuity of institutions, and of progress, from the time of the Roman Empire down through the Middle Ages, and that the late Empire established both ecclesiastical and lay institutions which continued down through the Middle Ages and gave that era its character. Chief among the institutions is the Catholic church. Werner wishes to depict the church as having a determining influence on history from the time of its founding. He sees the rise of Europe as a process that was guided throughout by the Christian religion, as institution and doctrine. If Werner were simply presenting a theory of history that accords religion a dominant role, I would not be discussing his views in this book. I would agree that its role has been underemphasized by historians, conservative no less than Marxist. The reason I deal with Werner&#039;s views is that he makes clear his belief that it is not religion in general but the Christian religion which played the historically efficacious role in the European &amp;quot;miracle.&amp;quot; Werner&#039;s views are distinctly Eurocentric. Perhaps the key comment is the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(If) we had to choose one word that, by itself alone, were capable of expressing an essential factor in what we understand by the &amp;quot;European miracle,&amp;quot; we would choose the philosophical term ... &amp;quot;unrest&amp;quot; ... &amp;quot;restlessness&amp;quot; ... Ruhelosigkeit ... Whilst Asia and its wisdom and, in its train, the great religions and philosophies, strive toward the art of ... seeking out the centre of the soul and of the world, and of resting in God, of having arrived, the European of the European miracle is a man who is always ready to take off once more, once he has arrived ... But where must be sought the causa causans of this mentality? The spur to anxiety is to be seen in the pangs of sin ... in the search for pardon and grace. The importance of the deliverance of the soul gave an hitherto unheard-of prominence to the individual, independent of his social rank, the individual who ... (does not abandon himself) to destiny ... (The) sense of responsibility seems to me to be one of the strengths of the Europeans that are to accomplish the &amp;quot;miracle&amp;quot; (p. 185).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus: Europe&#039;s religion, Christianity, instills a kind of mentality in &amp;quot;European man&amp;quot; which explains the basic source of the &amp;quot;European miracle.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The objection to this is the same one we put forward to all of the notions about Europe&#039;s supposedly unique &amp;quot;rationality.&amp;quot; Whether that putative trait comes from religion (Werner) or from the post-Neolithic European tribes (Mann) or from any other source, the basic objection is: how can you really justify a statement that makes Europeans brighter, better, bolder than non-Europeans, if you accept the fundamental axiom that all human communities have the same ration of mind as all others? It is one thing, and indeed an unexceptionable thing, to credit the human mind with prime causality in culture change, through the innovation of social, technical, and purely intellectual things. But it is something quite different, and quite suspect, to credit the minds of human beings from some communities—and not others—with all of these qualities of innovativeness, restlessness, sense of responsibility, intellectual eagerness, respect for others, and so on, qualities usually summed up in the word &amp;quot;rationality.&amp;quot; Europeans are rational but so too are non-Europeans.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Such statements fail as comparisons with other religions, and other civilizations; but they also fail because the postulated rise of Europe did not take place in the Middle Ages but somewhat later. That Christianity helped in that eventual rise is not at all in question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is not necessary to discuss Max Weber&#039;s celebrated argument about the role of religion in the rise of Europe, or his celebrated argument about the special role of the Protestant Reformation in the rise of capitalism. Weber of course held the views that I criticized above. But the causal role of religion is not at issue in this book, the concern of which is a uniformitarian view of European and non-European civilizations and their dynamism.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Class ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Three kinds of argument concerning class are relevant to our discussion. The first of these is a two-tiered argument for Europe&#039;s ancient and medieval historical superiority that can be summarized as follows: (1) Classless (or &amp;quot;preclass&amp;quot;) regions and peoples are simply irrelevant in the matter of explaining Europe&#039;s superiority and the world&#039;s historical progress, because classless societies are necessarily both unprogressive and primitive. (2) Therefore, the real problems calling for explanation concern the question why some class-stratified societies (the European ones) are progressive while others (principally Asian) are stagnant and backward. Africa below the Sahara is then declared sweepingly to be classless and thus irrelevant to world history. This argument is still widely used, in some analytical works (among them Eric L. Jones&#039;s &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039;), in some world-history textbooks (as we noted in Chapter 1), and in some (probably most) modern atlases of world history. (Many of these atlases have no maps of Africa for the whole of history from the Upper Paleolithic to 1492!&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See, for example, Palmer, &#039;&#039;Atlas of Modern History&#039;&#039; (1957); Bjørklund, Hølmhoe, Røhr, and Lie, &#039;&#039;Historical Atlas of the World&#039;&#039; (1970); and Kinder and Hilgemann, &#039;&#039;The Anchor Atlas of World History&#039;&#039;, vol. 1 (1974).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;) In place of an extended discussion of this issue I will just offer these comments: Africa was not classless in 1492 (a point to which we return in Chapter 3), classless societies are not stagnant,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;I discuss this in &#039;&#039;The National Question&#039;&#039; (1987b).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and the historians who make this sort of argument about classlessness quite regularly contradict themselves by declaring that the classless European peoples of ancient and medieval times—the &amp;quot;barbarian tribes,&amp;quot; Germans, Celts, Slavs, etc.—were very progressive: after borrowing the idea of classes and a few other things from the Romans, these primitive but supposedly progressive, innovative, aggressive, inquisitive, achievement-oriented Europeans than surged forward to modernity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is customary and quite proper to examine the class structure of a society in history and ask how the different classes acted to favor or resist change, and in which directions. In the absence of such an examination, we usually get an analysis with a bias toward ascribing causality solely to kings and other sorts of elites. Eurocentrism becomes a problem only if the assertion is made that a given class did something historically efficacious in Europe but that this class did not exist in civilizations outside of Europe. This kind of argument is very common in the European miracle literature. Although especially favored among conservative historians, it is also found quite often among those Marxists who cling to the old formulas about the &amp;quot;stages of class society.&amp;quot; Fairly representative of the latter is Padgug&#039;s argument that a slave mode of production, in its pure form—with slavery dominant in commodity production and with implications for economic progress, the development of private property, and class struggle—existed in ancient times only in Greece and Rome, and that lack of this feature in Asia accounts in part for the tendency of Asian societies to &amp;quot;stagnate.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Padgug, &amp;quot;The Problem of the Theory of Slavery and Slave Society&amp;quot; (1976).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; (Roughly the same argument is then used by some Marxists to assert that the slave-plantation system of later times was not properly capitalist because the workers were slaves, not wage-earners. We deal with this point in Chapter 4.) This issue is important, but I will set it aside after one comment: I believe that those scholars who assert that the slave class was more important in the classical Mediterranean than Asia make a very elementary error, perhaps easiest to do if one is not a geographer. It may just be a question of geographical scale. The Athenian empire was perhaps one-hundredth the size of the Ch&#039;in empire. In small, highly developed regions of China, slavery was very likely as important as it was in Attica or in the plantation regions of Roman Italy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Jean Baechler, a French historical sociologist, has argued that one uniquely European class, the medieval aristocracy, was the central causal force in the European miracle.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Baechler, &amp;quot;The Origins of Modernity&amp;quot; (1988).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; He dismisses Africa out of hand, then asks why it is that modernity arose in Europe and not in Asia.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Baechler, in &amp;quot;The Origins of Modernity&amp;quot; (1988), p. 39, suggests that we should &amp;quot;juxtapose the barbarous Europe of the Halstatt period (about 600 B.C.) ... and Africa on the verge of colonization in the nineteenth century (A.D.).&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Accepting many of the standard arguments as partial explanations, he argues that the most important reason the miracle occurred was the existence in Europe of a true aristocracy. Baechler describes an ancient Indo-European society characterized by its warrior aristocracy. In India, the aristocracy became corrupted, but not so in Europe.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Baechler finds a true aristocracy also in Japan but believes that Japan failed to emulate Europe for various other reasons.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; He carefully defines the medieval aristocracy and its special social quality, &amp;quot;feudality,&amp;quot; in such a way as to distinguish it from a mere landlord class, or a class of landlords with added seigneurial powers. The aristocracy was a band of comrades, equals joined by bonds of feudal loyalty, a democracy in its own right. It did not, he says, hold the political power in society, and this was a key to its unique character. Elsewhere, either the aristocracy was ground under by the (imperial, despotic) polity, or it became corrupted into a caste form, as in India; in such cases there was to be no modernization. The European aristocracy had a special sort of private power, one original source of capitalist power. (Baechler contradicts himself here, since in the feudal era the aristocracy was indeed the political power. He simply notes that there was a time of political chaos, and passes on to other matters.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Baechler considers it quite unremarkable that the political chaos of the Dark Ages gave way smoothly to strong states in Europe. &amp;quot;Inevitably&amp;quot; there will be the &amp;quot;reconstitution of larger polities&amp;quot; (Baechler, &amp;quot;The Origins of Modernity&amp;quot; 1988, p. 50). But it is equally inevitable for India that the political chaos of 1000 years ago will not be cured and permanently, thereafter, the &amp;quot;polity ... is not a reality in India&amp;quot; (p. 45).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;) In sum, the aristocracy invents democracy and incipient capitalist property. The European peasants are also incipient capitalists from early on. Baechler casts aside the idea that Europe&#039;s peasantry was an unfree, oppressed community in the Middle Ages and gives it quite remarkable qualities: The peasant village was self-governed, a kind of &amp;quot;republic,&amp;quot; with characteristics reminiscent of urban life.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Baechler, &amp;quot;The Origins of Modernity&amp;quot; (1988), p. 59.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; &amp;quot;A peasant is an entrepreneur in miniature.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Baechler, &amp;quot;The Origins of Modernity&amp;quot; (1988), p. 53.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; By the fourteenth century this incipiently capitalist peasant is the real peasant of Europe. The peasant village is a little democracy. The peasants are autonomous decision-makers. Baechler simply ignores serfdom, ignores, likewise, the importance of the fact that the lords owned the land, exploited the peasants, and controlled their lives. Feudalism becomes a kind of democratic society in which the aristocrats play a democratic role and the peasants live as free people. Moreover, these peasants, deep in the Middle Ages, had all of the attributes of the capitalist farmer that we associate with the eighteenth century and thereafter: investment, profit orientation, capital accumulation. (And they were smart enough, Baechler says, to avoid the extended family.) All of this is fantasy. It is a simple telescoping of history, pushing the modern world (and particularly the modern capitalist farmer) back into the Middle Ages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Baechler contrasts all of this with India. His depiction of India is bizarre. India had no aristocracy throughout history, as a result of the caste system, and this is the &amp;quot;deepest cause&amp;quot; for its failure to develop throughout history.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Baechler, &amp;quot;The Origins of Modernity&amp;quot; (1988), p. 56.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; (India did have a very formidable aristocracy.) Indian society had no political dimension: &amp;quot;The polity ... is not a reality in India.&amp;quot; Therefore &amp;quot;the sense of identity in India could never be political&amp;quot;—not to say democratic.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Baechler, &amp;quot;The Origins of Modernity&amp;quot; (1988), p. 45.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; (Nonsense.) Caste was invented to take the place of the missing polity. (More nonsense.) India didn&#039;t have a peasantry, it merely had &amp;quot;agricultural workers.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Baechler, &amp;quot;The Origins of Modernity&amp;quot; (1988), p. 53.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; How can this be true? Because real peasants were entrepreneurial decisionmakers, something supposedly absent in India (but in reality no more so than in Europe). Baechler thus uses a mythical India as a counterpoint to his basic argument: In Europe, aristocrats and the free society created by them (and their allies the peasants) were the principal source of the &amp;quot;miracle.&amp;quot; But Europe&#039;s aristocracy and peasantry did not have these romanticized qualities, and, more crucially, comparable classes existed in many other regions in the same period, as we will see in Chapter 3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Marxist theory, the concept of class is part of a larger and more consequential notion, that of class struggle. For all class-stratified societies, said Marx and Engels, class struggle is the motor of progress. Most present-day Marxists consider cultural evolution to be very much more complex than this, but they continue to emphasize the idea, and process, of class struggle. Again we must notice that there is nothing inherently Eurocentric about this concept unless one argues that genuine class struggle, or some phase or form of it, occurs only in Europe. But many Marxists argue precisely that way. According to Maurice Godelier, for example, the West displays &amp;quot;the purest forms of class struggle&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;alone has created the conditions for transcending ... class organization.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Godelier, &#039;&#039;Sobre el Modo de Producción Asiático&#039;&#039; (1969), p. 58.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Probably the most influential recent formulation of this sort of argument is Robert Brenner&#039;s theory about the rise of capitalism.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Brenner, &amp;quot;The Origins of Capitalist Development: A Critique of Neo-Smithian Marxism&amp;quot; (1977); &amp;quot;Agrarian Class Structure and Economic Development in Pre-Industrial Europe&amp;quot; (1985, originally published 1976), and &amp;quot;The Agrarian Roots of European Capitalism&amp;quot; (1985). After the 1976 article first appeared in the journal, &#039;&#039;Past and Present&#039;&#039;, a series of critiques was published in that journal, and Brenner replied in 1982 with the article, &amp;quot;The Agrarian Roots of European Capitalism.&amp;quot; A volume, &#039;&#039;The Brenner Debate: Agrarian Class Structure and Economic Development in Pre-Industrial Europe&#039;&#039;, containing the two &#039;&#039;Past and Present&#039;&#039; articles and several critiques, and edited by Aston and Philip, appeared in 1985.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Brenner tries to demonstrate that the rise of capitalism prior to 1492 was a result of class struggle, but class struggle only in Europe. Then he uses this argument as evidence against what he calls &amp;quot;Third-Worldism,&amp;quot; the belief that non-Europe has been of great importance historically and is so (politically) in the present. This conclusion has strongly influenced not only Marxist but also conservative thought in history, geography, sociology, and economic-development theory. Certainly the Brenner theory deserves our attention in this book. And it is not at all a complicated theory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
According to Brenner, class struggle between serfs and lords, influenced by depopulation, led to the decline of feudalism in northwestern Europe. (Brenner does not mention non-Europe and scarcely mentions southern Europe.) In most parts of northwestern Europe, the peasants won this class struggle and became in essence petty landowners, now satisfied with their bucolic existence and unwilling to innovate. Only in England did the lords maintain their grip on the land; peasants thus remained tenants. The peasantry then became differentiated, producing a class of landless laborers and a rising class of larger tenant farmers, wealthy enough to rent substantial holdings and forced (because they had to pay rent) to commercialize, innovate technologically, and thus become capitalists. (Brenner thinks that serfs, lords, and landowning peasants did not innovate, and that towns, even English towns, had only a minor role in the rise of capitalism.) English yeoman tenant farmers, therefore, were the founders of capitalism. Stated differently: capitalism arose because English peasants lost the class struggle. In reality, however, peasants were not predominantly landowners in the other countries of the region; capitalism grew more rapidly in and near the towns than in the rural countryside; and the technological innovativeness that Brenner attributes to fourteenth and fifteenth century English farmers really occurred much later, too late to fit into his theory. More importantly, commercial farming and indeed urban protocapitalism were developing during this period in southern Europe and (as I will argue) in other continents. Brenner&#039;s theory is simply wrong.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In my opinion the popularity of this thin theory is due principally to two things. First, put forward as a Marxist view, grounded in class struggle, it proves to be, on inspection, a theory that is fairly conventional, if somewhat rural in bias. It seems to follows that class-struggle theories lead to conventional conclusions. And secondly, Brenner uses his theory (&amp;quot;The Origins of Capitalist Development: A Critique of Neo-Smithian Marxism,&amp;quot; 1977, pp. 77-92) to attack the unpopular &amp;quot;Third-Worldist&amp;quot; perspectives of dependency theory, underdevelopment theory, and in particular three other neo-Marxists—Sweezy, Frank, and Wallerstein—who argue that European colonialism had much to do with the later rise of capitalism. Brenner is a thoroughgoing Eurocentric tunnel historian: non-Europe had no important role in social evolution at any historical period. Unaware that colonialism involves capitalist relations of production—see Chapter 4 below—he claims that the extra-European world merely had commercial effects on Europe, whereas the rise of capitalism was in no way a product of commerce: it took place in the countryside of England and reflected class struggle, not trade. See critiques of Brenner collected in Aston and Philip (1985) by Hilton, Croot and Parker, Wunder, Leroy, Ladurie, Bois, Cooper, and others. Also see Torras, &amp;quot;Class struggle in Catalonia&amp;quot; (1980) and Hoyle, &amp;quot;Tenure and the land market in early modern England: Or a late contribution to the Brenner debate.&amp;quot; (1990).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Family ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is nothing new about the belief that the European family is in some fundamental sense more rational and more civilized than the family types found elsewhere. When the modernization doctrine became dominant, this belief seems to have faded into the background; there was now a near-consensus among social scientists that differences in family type should be strung along the continuum from &amp;quot;traditional&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;modern&amp;quot; or, as a variation, from &amp;quot;folk&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;urban.&amp;quot; Traditional families, it was argued, have tended to reflect strong kinship ties at a scale larger and wider than the nuclear family; they have tended to form large, extended-family households; and they have tended to be associated with high birthrates. In the absence of much evidence concerning the medieval European family and household, it was rather widely assumed that earlier European families had conformed to the traditional model, which was seen as the &amp;quot;preindustrial&amp;quot; family, contrasted with the modern, post-industrial-revolution nuclear family, forming a small household, with looser kin ties beyond the household, and with fewer children. This transformation was thought to be associated with what was called the &amp;quot;demographic transition,&amp;quot; the process of change from a &amp;quot;traditional&amp;quot; demographic pattern, with high birthrate and high deathrate, characteristic of preindustrial conditions, to a &amp;quot;modern,&amp;quot; postindustrial demographic pattern, with low birthrate and low deathrate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the modernization theory of the family, the non-European world of underdeveloped countries would go through essentially the same transformation as it modernized. Extended family households would be replaced by nuclear family households. This would instill modern prodevelopment attitudes: people would have fewer children (thus combating overpopulation), and they would tend, now, to think more individualistically and thus entrepreneurial.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All of this was a bundle of assumptions. There was no evidence of a causal link between birthrate and size of household (or strength of kin ties beyond the nuclear family); there was merely a correlation within rich, modern societies: both nuclear families and lower birthrates were characteristic of these societies. (One leading demographer pointed out that nuclear families might, in principle, be likely to have more children per couple than extended families.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Taeuber, in Freedman, &#039;&#039;Family and Kinship in Chinese Society&#039;&#039; (1970).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;) In addition, the idea that an adult breadwinner would be more entrepreneurial, more prone to accumulate capital, more competitive, and so on, if he (assumed to be male) was working only for his wife and children and not for a large family including his parents, cousins, and other relations, was a tenuous assumption. Large, tightly knit families had proven to be powerful accumulators, for instance, among many immigrant groups engaged in commerce. Why, indeed, should an adult want to work harder only for spouse and children, and not for parents, sisters, and so on? (One can in fact construct an argument to the effect that an extended family with multiple working adults has definite economic advantages in a developing economy.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;(1) If only one family member is a wageworker, loss of employment is a disaster. If several are wageworkers, normally some will be earning an income when others are laid off. (2) If we assume an ability to save a certain percentage of income, multiple income earners will provide a larger absolute amount of savings, that is, capital; and the absolute amount of capital can be critical in entrepreneurship. (3) Having kin to borrow from is useful for small-scale entrepreneurship. (4) Kinfolk can supply unpaid labor. These principles are well known in Third World communities.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;) As the modernization doctrine itself developed, after about 1960, these ideas began to dissipate. It became clear that various forms of social organization can be equally modern, and that the root causes of change and nonchange do not lie in the family structure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rather dramatically, in the mid-1960s, the notion of a peculiarly European family pattern was reinserted into historians&#039; common discourse, partly as a result of an influential paper by John Hajnal.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hajnal, &amp;quot;European Marriage Patterns in Perspective&amp;quot; (1965), pp. 101-146. This paper is one of the most widely cited publications on the subject of demography in the European miracle literature.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; As we noted at an earlier point in this chapter, in the discussion of demographic arguments for the &amp;quot;miracle,&amp;quot; historical demography was at that time uncovering evidence that preindustrial Europe (or part of Europe) had a lower birthrate than one would expect of a &amp;quot;traditional society.&amp;quot; It seemed that Europeans had been marrying later in life than would be expected in a traditional society with Malthusian controls and therefore maximum birthrate. Instead of scrapping the Malthusian model itself, and arguing instead that all human societies actively control their population dynamics by using such tactics as adjusting the age of marriage, these historians began to assert, simply, the uniqueness of Europe. Other preindustrial societies exhibited the &amp;quot;traditional&amp;quot; pattern, with high and uncontrolled birthrates (and therefore superrapid population growth when mortality declined in the &amp;quot;transition&amp;quot;). Preindustrial Europe, in complete contrast, had a rational family system, with rational population control. It was then argued, without evidence, that preindustrial Europe had a higher level of living and a lower mortality rate than non-Europe, from which it was deduced that Europe kept its birthrate down in proper, rational, adjustment to its lower deathrate, mainly using the mechanism of delayed marriage. Those who put forward this argument simply failed to consider the possibility that families in other societies have acted pretty much the same way. Evidence to this effect was beginning to appear from a number of non-European societies. Some societies had much lower birthrates than would be expected from the classic model. Other societies had demonstrated major shifts in birthrate, either upward or downward, in response to changes in economic and other conditions.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See note 37 above.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hajnal began his 1965 essay with this flat statement:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The marriage pattern of most of Europe as it existed for at least two centuries up to 1940 was, as far as we can tell, unique or almost unique in the world. There is no known example of a population of non-European civilization which has had a similar pattern. The distinctive marks of the &amp;quot;European pattern&amp;quot; are (1) a high age of marriage and (2) a high proportion of people who never marry at all.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hajnal, &amp;quot;European Marriage Patterns in Perspective&amp;quot; (1965), p. 101.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hajnal&#039;s argument was in some ways very careful and in others very casual. He noted carefully that the evidence for late marriage and (somewhat) low marriage frequency in Europe for periods before the seventeenth century was inconclusive, and that the &amp;quot;fragmentary&amp;quot; evidence for the European Middle Ages suggested a &amp;quot;non-European pattern.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hajnal, &amp;quot;European Marriage Patterns in Perspective&amp;quot; (1965), p. 134.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; He introduced absolutely no historical data for non-European regions, casually comparing historical Europe with twentieth-century non-Europe. The theoretical constraint is very clear: non-European patterns are &amp;quot;traditional&amp;quot; and permanent, hence a comparison of seventeenth-century Europe with mid-twentieth-century Asia or Africa is perfectly acceptable.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hajnal concedes that he has only contemporary data for non-Europe, but merely suggests that historical data would prove his point even more clearly because modern non-European family patterns, in his view, are changing in the direction of European patterns: are being Europeanized. And when &amp;quot;all the qualifications about the data have been made, there can be no doubt that our original generalization remains&amp;quot; (&amp;quot;European Marriage Patterns in Perspective,&amp;quot; 1965, p. 106).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This proposition about the unique European pattern of later marriages and lower marriage frequencies was widely and quickly incorporated into the broader theory of Europe&#039;s historical &amp;quot;miracle.&amp;quot; Without much supporting evidence, the proposition was firmly pushed backward into the Middle Ages. According to Lawrence Stone, writing in 1977, &amp;quot;it has now been established beyond any doubt&amp;quot; that over most of northwest Europe the middle and lower classes &amp;quot;married remarkably late, certainly from the fifteenth century onward. ... This custom of delayed marriage is an extraordinary and unique feature of north-west European civilization.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Stone, &#039;&#039;The Family, Sex and Marriage in England 1500-1800&#039;&#039; (1977), p. 509.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Here one notices particularly the word &amp;quot;remarkably.&amp;quot; This is &amp;quot;remarkable&amp;quot; only if there is something to compare it with; yet non-European historical data are not given or even sought. Michael Mann derives the pattern from the Iron Age Indo-European peasant society. Patricia Crone speculates that it is perhaps an ancient Germanic trait. Eric L. Jones thinks that it goes back three or four thousand years. Alan Macfarlane thinks that it has its roots in &amp;quot;a particular amalgam of Christianity and Germanic customs.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mann, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986), p. 408; Crone, &#039;&#039;Pre-Industrial Societies&#039;&#039; (1989), p. 152; Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), pp. 15-16; Macfarlane, &#039;&#039;Marriage and Love in England: Modes of Reproduction 1300-1840&#039;&#039; (1986).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; And so on. In a word: the pattern is very old in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The matter of dates, or age, is certainly crucial. Western Europe was undergoing major transformations from the seventeenth century onward, and a delayed and lower marriage rate could well be explained by a number of the newer facts: mobility, loss of holdings due to enclosures, urbanization, and, later, the well-understood demographic and social effects of the industrial revolution. Even the sixteenth century was somewhat chaotic in western Europe. But if the marriage pattern emerged before 1492, a date before these disruptions began, then one can speak of a definite &amp;quot;European pattern,&amp;quot; not merely a &amp;quot;preindustrial&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;traditional&amp;quot; pattern. And one can begin to build a general causal theory for the subsequent changes—the &amp;quot;European miracle.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additional propositions were added. It had long been known that nuclear family households and neolocal residence (the married couple establishes a household well separated from those of the parents) have been characteristic of western Europe during recent centuries, and this is to be expected as a feature of modernization. It fits with standard modernization theory: the process is supposed to lead from extended family to nuclear family. But the European miracle historians now argue that nuclear families and neolocal residence are part of a unique &amp;quot;European familial system&amp;quot; (Laslett).&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Laslett, &amp;quot;The European Family and Early Industrialization&amp;quot; (1989).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; And again they locate its origin far back in history. And again they sweepingly assert that non-Europeans lack these patterns. In fact, there is good evidence that nuclear-family households were common in many parts of non-Europe. Taeuber, analyzing Buck&#039;s data, found that more than 60% of peasant households in China were nuclear in the early twentieth century.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Taeuber, &amp;quot;The Families of Chinese Farmers&amp;quot; (1970), pp. 63-86.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; These are not historical data, but the point is that China is supposed, according to modernization theory, to be especially &amp;quot;traditional&amp;quot; as regards family and many other things; indeed, there is common confusion between the notion of the Chinese lineage or &amp;quot;sib&amp;quot;—made famous by Weber—and the idea of the extended family. Larger, extended families are uncommon in Latin America. In India, as well as in China, the notion of an extended family is ambiguous because of the ambiguity of the notion of &amp;quot;neolocal residence&amp;quot; (in a cramped village, house-building space can be a problem), and the association sometimes found between neolocality and available land upon which to begin a small holding. Further confusion is added over the association between extended (and/or joint) family and inheritance rights, power, mobility, and more.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Freedman, &#039;&#039;Chinese Lineage and Society&#039;&#039; (1966), p. 49.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Meanwhile, back in Europe, the model of a supposedly characteristic nuclear-neolocal pattern is subject to very serious questions for the Middle Ages. (For even earlier times the idea of a unique pattern is speculative, and belongs with other old and suspect ideas—discussed earlier in this chapter—about the ancient Germanic tribes and their unique individualism, progressiveness, and the like.) Medieval marital residence patterns may sometimes have reflected manor rules (such as assignment of holdings) rather than cultural residence rules in circumstances of serfdom and insecure tenancy, and a distinction has to be made between different types of rural regions, such as the areas with off-farm employment (like woolen areas of southeastern England), those with &amp;quot;frontier&amp;quot; characteristics, and so on. There is even reason to question the notion of a persistent west European marriage pattern.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See, for example, Handler &amp;quot;Review of Macfarlane, A., &#039;&#039;Marriage and love in England&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; (1989); Hilton, &amp;quot;Individualism and the English Peasantry&amp;quot; (1980); Kertzer, &amp;quot;The Joint Family Household Revisited: Demographic Constraints and Household Complexity in the European Past&amp;quot; (1989); and Berkner, &amp;quot;The Use and Misuse of Census Data for the Historical Analysis of Family Structures&amp;quot; (1975), and &amp;quot;The Stem Family and the Developmental Cycle of the Peasant Household&amp;quot; (1989).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; But even granting the generalization about western Europe, there is no basis for considering the European pattern to have been, historically, unique.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;For instance, G. Lee, &amp;quot;Comparative Perspectives&amp;quot; (1987), p. 65, points out that &amp;quot;(Many) scholars contend that the majority of families in any society are and always have been nuclear, regardless of the cultural elements favoring extended families.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, the model is embellished with some rather gaudy ornamentation. It is claimed that the unique European pattern is not merely a matter of neolocality, nuclear households, and age and frequency of marriage. West European marriages were grounded in love. Elsewhere, marriages were arranged. (But arranged marriages seem to have been the rule in premodern Europe, prior to the periods of high mobility and social disruption. The notion, regularly invoked here, that non-European couples are strangers to one another prior to their being shoved into marriage is colonial-era prejudice supported by a few unusual cultural situations. Romantic love in this argument is considered an attribute of European rationality. Non-European couples are certainly as loving as European couples.) It is claimed, next, that the unique European family, because it is nuclear, produces a unique European personality type. The theory is that the small (European) household leads inevitably to individualistic, competitive, acquisitive, yet caring behavior. Mann and Jones, as we saw earlier, put forward the image of an ancient peasant household, a Hansel and Gretel house deep in the forest, as the historical source of this individualistic pattern. Macfarlane, who presents perhaps the most extreme form of this theory (and is chided by some of his colleagues not for his theory but for his claim that it applies mainly to the English), argues that the early medieval English family produced a person with the psychological and behavioral traits of (in essence) Weber&#039;s capitalist personality, that the causal chain runs from tribal customs and religion to family, from family to personality, and from personality to the beginnings of capitalism (a point we return to below). This argument is advanced mainly by erecting a model of what Macfarlane considers to be &amp;quot;peasant society,&amp;quot; with a peasant family and peasant mentality. Early English rural folk don&#039;t fit this model. Therefore they were not peasants, and did not have the traditional traits of peasantry, like a traditional family type and traditional mentality.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Macfarlane, &#039;&#039;The Origins of English Individualism&#039;&#039; (1978), chap. 1 and &amp;quot;The Cradle of Capitalism&amp;quot; (1988), p. 344.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; As many have commented, Macfarlane&#039;s notion of &amp;quot;peasant&amp;quot; is a straw man, uncharacteristic of modern non-Europe, much less of historical non-Europe, and his view of the medieval English farm folk as nonpeasants is historically invalid.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See, for example, Hilton, &amp;quot;Individualism and the English Peasantry&amp;quot; (1980) and Handler, &amp;quot;Review of Mcfarlane, A., &#039;&#039;Marriage and Love in England&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; (1989).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The theory of the unique European family is an important part of the European miracle theory as it is being propagated today. It is used in two distinct arguments. The first of these combines the family theory with Malthusianism. The argument runs as follows: Humans in general are not rational enough to control their sexual behavior and limit the number of offspring to suit the prevailing conditions of food supply and the like. Therefore, ordinary humans experience permanent, or periodic, crises, in which overpopulation leads to famine and war and pestilence, after which the now-reduced population begins again to overproduce offspring. The root axiom is irrationality. People behave not intelligently, but (as Malthus said 200 years ago) rather like barnyard beasts.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&amp;quot;(It) seems likely that (primitive peoples&#039;) patterns of behavior in ... respect (to fertility and mortality) bore a strong resemblance to those which can be observed in many animals,&amp;quot; Wrigley, &#039;&#039;Population and History&#039;&#039; (1969), p. 37. Wrigley is writing about present-day hunting-gathering-fishing peoples. A &amp;quot;description of the relationship between animal social conventions and the regulation of animal population numbers&amp;quot; is &amp;quot;a convenient point of departure for the study of primitive man&amp;quot; (p. 37).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The historical result of this process is to prevent development. Any improvement in, for instance, productive technology merely leads to population growth, to crisis, to depopulation, and thus back to the status quo ante—a cycle of stagnation. This is one and perhaps the crucial cause of the nondevelopment of non-European societies in general. Europeans, by contrast, have always (or perhaps for just a millennium or so) exhibited rational behavior in all matters relating to population. This includes decisions about marriage and about childbearing. The unique European late-marrying, nuclear, neolocal, companionate family is the crucial institution in which this rational decision-making process takes place. Thus the European family has permitted Europeans (or west Europeans, or northwest Europeans) to check population growth, and thereby accumulate material wealth that would otherwise be dissipated in the feeding of excess babies. This primordial accumulation underlies the permanent progress of Europe. This theory, in one form or another, is advanced by many of the historians whom we have been discussing, among them Crone, Hall, Jones, Laslett, Macfarlane, and Mann.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Crone, &#039;&#039;Pre-Industrial Societies&#039;&#039; (1989), p. 153; Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties: The Causes and Consequences of the Rise of the West&#039;&#039; (1985), pp. 130-132; Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), pp. 3, 13-15, 217-19, 226-227, 231, and elsewhere; Laslett, &amp;quot;The European Family and Early Industrialization&amp;quot; (1989), pp. 235-240; Macfarlane, &amp;quot;The Cradle of Capitalism&amp;quot; (1988), chap. 14; Mann, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986), p. 408.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Hall expresses one form of the theory in the following comment (part of which we quoted earlier):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[The] European family has long been small, late marrying, nuclear and notably sensitive to Malthusian pressure. ... The expansion of the European economy did not occur laterally, as in late traditional China, because improvements in output were not eaten up by a massive growth in population. The ratio between population and acreage in Europe remained favourable ultimately because of the relative continence of the European family.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties&#039;&#039; (1985), pp. 130-131.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Malthusian theory reduces humans to beasts. But even for those scholars who accept Malthusianism, the notion that the European family staves off the Malthusian disasters is hardly credible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second way in which the &amp;quot;unique European family&amp;quot; theory is used in arguments for the European &amp;quot;miracle&amp;quot; is a matter of deducing ways that the European family produces various sorts of uniquely progressive attitudes and actions on the part of Europeans, attitudes and actions that then lead toward the miracle. A very widely used form of this argument is expressed thusly by Laslett:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[The] European familial system may have been responsible for a whole series of features conducive to economic progress, and perhaps innovation. The conditions laid down for marriage and procreation imposed on all individuals ... the necessity of saving, accumulating. ... [The] European familial system fostered the spirit of hoarding and parsimony.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Laslett, &amp;quot;The European Family and Early Industrialization&amp;quot; (1989), p. 237.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The family thus generates the personality traits of an incipient capitalist, and does so deep in the Middle Ages. This, too, is hardly credible and hardly in accord with the realities of life (and psychology) before 1492. Laslett, like Macfarlane and many others, makes the false assumption that a typical medieval European family does, in fact, have choices permitting saving, hoarding, accumulating, and so on. This argument requires that the peasant family be a substantial landholder, or at least a tenant with firm security, such that capital accumulation can take place and not be bled off by master or landlord. There is much dispute about the degree of landownership in late-medieval western Europe, but it is certain that family behavior of the sort described by Laslett could not have been common under serfdom and, after the decline of serfdom, could not have been common in places where peasants did not own the land. And this seems to have been the rule, not the exception.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Croot and Parker, &amp;quot;Agrarian Class Structure and the Development of Capitalism: France and England Compared&amp;quot; (1985). This essay, and others in the Aston and Philipin book, &#039;&#039;The Brenner Debate: Agrarian Class Structure and Economic Development in Pre-Industrial Europe&#039;&#039; (1985), discuss in detail the low level of landownership in medieval Europe.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It appears that this argument is, again, a telescoping of history. The entrepreneurial yeoman farmer of, say, the eighteenth century, is pushed back into the Middle Ages, and an effect becomes a cause.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Many other European-family-to-European-miracle arguments are common in present-day scholarly discourse, but space permits me to give only one additional example, from Lawrence Stone:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several consequences which must have followed from the late marriage pattern. ... [It] is reasonable to assume that for many young men this delay involved considerable sexual denial at a time of optimum male sexual drive. ... If one follows Freudian theory, this could lead to neuroses. ... [It] could help to explain the high level of group aggression, which lay behind the extraordinary expansionist violence of western nation-states at this time. It could also have been a stimulus to capitalist economic enterprise ... stimulating saving in order to marry, and generating activist social and economic dynamism.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Stone, &#039;&#039;The Family, Sex and Marriage in England, 1500-1800&#039;&#039; (1977), pp. 53-54.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Again:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The sublimation of sex among young male adults may well account for the extraordinary military aggressiveness, the thrift, the passion for hard work, and the entrepreneurial and intellectual enterprise of modern Western man.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Stone, &#039;&#039;The Family, Sex and Marriage in England, 1500-1800&#039;&#039; (1977), p. 652.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Europeans conquered the world because their young men were sexually frustrated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Space does not permit us to list and discuss all of the other common or garden-variety explanations for the so-called European miracle. Some additional explanations will be mentioned in various contexts at later points in this book. But I hope that the discussion in this chapter has sufficiently made the point that no characteristic of Europe&#039;s environment, Europe&#039;s people, or Europe&#039;s culture, at any time prior to 1492, can be convincingly shown to have had anything to do with the fact that Europe developed while other civilizations did not do so.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I will try, in the next two chapters, to show that the whole question must be phrased in a different way and answered in a different way. Europe did not rise, relative to the other civilizations, prior to 1492. When Europe did rise, after 1492, this reflected, not some special quality of &amp;quot;Europeanness,&amp;quot; but the immense wealth which came into Europe as a result of colonialism in the sixteenth century and thereafter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Notes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Although Eric L. Jones&#039;s 1981 book &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; popularized the phrase &amp;quot;the European miracle,&amp;quot; it had been in use for a long time with the same essential meaning: the unique rise of Europe before or during the Middle Ages. Not every historian would describe this as a &amp;quot;miracle,&amp;quot; but the term has wide acceptance, as evidence the fact that an international symposium entitled &amp;quot;The European Miracle&amp;quot; was held at Cambridge University in 1985.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Apparently my 1976 article, &amp;quot;Where Was Capitalism Born?&amp;quot; was the first publication to reject the &amp;quot;miracle&amp;quot; theory absolutely, that is, without qualification. In 1990 Samir Amin, commenting on a later paper of mine, indicated his basic agreement with this rejectionist position. (Amin, &amp;quot;Colonialism and the Rise of Capitalism: A Comment,&amp;quot; 1990; Blaut, &amp;quot;Colonialism and the Rise of Capitalism,&amp;quot; 1989; also see Blaut, &amp;quot;Fourteen Ninety-Two,&amp;quot; 1992; and Amin, &amp;quot;On Jim Blaut&#039;s &#039;Fourteen Ninety-Two,&#039;&amp;quot; 1992.) A few other historians have taken positions approaching this one; their views are discussed later in this chapter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Another seminal work was Cyril Black&#039;s &#039;&#039;The Dynamics of Modernization: A Study in Comparative History&#039;&#039; (1966). Other such works in various fields will be discussed later in this chapter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Perhaps one reason was the maturation of the discipline of history itself. Another was the influence, not entirely salutary, of positivistic scientific method on history, which led to an attempt to specify variables and &amp;quot;factors,&amp;quot; and, if possible, quantify each of them. Another reason was the loss of faith in the nineteenth-century idea of inevitable progress: after nearly a half century of chaos and war, progress definitely did not appear to be something natural and inevitable; it had to be explained and also produced. Still a third reason was the general secularization of European thought, including history, such that human events could not be assumed to reflect guidance of a higher power. Another reason, possibly a very important one, was the general development of academic disciplines, and their involvement in (and nutrition from) international and domestic policy. This implied that each discipline, seeing the world with some degree of bias in favor of its own subject-as-factor (for economists, the market factor; for psychologists, the motivation factor; for sociologists, the demographic factor and the social-structural factor; for geographers, the resource factor; etc.) tended to argue in favor of historical models that treated our factor as crucial and those of others as secondary. Since many social scientists wrote history in this process, this led to some special pleading.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. I do not mean to imply that all of this was a dominant theory for the discipline of history as a whole. The great majority of historical scholars worked on smaller problems, carefully delving into events and developing limited explanations for those events. The modernization perspective influenced some of the smaller generalizations, for instance proffering explanations in which the factors most supportive of modernizationism were favored—factors like population, technology, and the like. And there were some areas of research where lack of attention to the history of non-Europe was a critical source of error (most notably, as we will see, in studies of the history of European technology). In addition, there were (and are) many different points of view in the vast and diverse field of professional history, so it would be questionable to characterize a particular historiographic period as being dominated by a particular governing theory (or &amp;quot;paradigm&amp;quot;). I suspect that my own concern with the body of literature relating to the &amp;quot;European miracle&amp;quot; problem probably leads me to overemphasize the significance of the modernization view on history as a whole. It should also be noticed that most of the prominent writers about the specific problem of explaining the unique rise of Europe were specialist historians—economic historians, historical sociologists, and so forth—and not historians of the standard breed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Cabral, &#039;&#039;Unity and Struggle&#039;&#039; (1979).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. As to the present and future, Third World intellectuals tended to make two arguments. Those who supported the idea of a capitalist form of development argued that economic development must consist of the defense of native capital against the corrosive diffusion into one&#039;s country of the economic and political dominance of European countries and corporations. For socialists, influence and dominance by international capitalism quite obviously had to be rejected. Both groups tended to adopt &amp;quot;dependency theory&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;underdevelopment theory,&amp;quot; which was a theory both of history and of modern social processes and development. A relatively small minority of Third World intellectuals, usually reflecting the thinking and interests of the very wealthy and very right-wing sectors, welcomed the idea of economic domination by foreign capitalist interests. Since the wealthy social sectors dominated most Third World societies, this minority point of view often determined policy. Also, it received much more prominence than it deserved in the journals of the First World.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. See James, &#039;&#039;A History of Pan-African Revolt&#039;&#039; (1938), &#039;&#039;The Black Jacobins&#039;&#039; (1938), &amp;quot;The Atlantic Slave Trade and Slavery&amp;quot; (1970); Williams, &#039;&#039;Capitalism and Slavery&#039;&#039; (1944). We discuss these matters in Chapter 4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9. Amin, &#039;&#039;Accumulation on a World Scale&#039;&#039; (1974) and later works. My articles &amp;quot;Geographic Models of Imperialism&amp;quot; (1970) and &amp;quot;Where Was Capitalism Born?&amp;quot; (1976) laid out the skeleton of a general theory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
10. I deal with this matter in &#039;&#039;The National Question&#039;&#039; (1987b).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
11. Duyvendak, &#039;&#039;Ma Huan Re-examined&#039;&#039; (1933); Needham and collaborators, &#039;&#039;Science and Civilization in China&#039;&#039;, published in 6 volumes between 1965 and 1984; Wheatley, &#039;&#039;The Golden Khersonese&#039;&#039; (1961) and &#039;&#039;The Pivot of the Four Quarters&#039;&#039; (1971); Elvin, &#039;&#039;The Pattern of the Chinese Past&#039;&#039; (1973).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
12. Amin, &#039;&#039;Unequal Development&#039;&#039; (1976), &#039;&#039;Eurocentrism&#039;&#039; (1988), &amp;quot;Colonialism and the Rise of Capitalism: A Comment&amp;quot; (1990).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
13. Bernal, &#039;&#039;Black Athena&#039;&#039;, vol. 1 (1987) and vol. 2 (1991).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
14. Mention should also be made of Eric Wolf&#039;s 1982 book &#039;&#039;Europe and the Peoples Without History&#039;&#039; which provides a useful and important survey of the history of both European and non-European civilizations and shows how unconvincing is the theory that non-European civilizations, historically, were stagnant and unprogressive (that they were &amp;quot;peoples without history&amp;quot;). Wolf, however, stops short of questioning the truly crucial Eurocentric belief that Europeans were more progressive than non-Europeans in several ways that are crucial to the &amp;quot;European miracle&amp;quot; theory, and so he does not directly confront that theory. (It should be noted that most mainstream historians no longer argue that non-European civilizations are, or were, totally unprogressive, totally &amp;quot;unhistorical,&amp;quot; arguing instead about slow rates of change, &amp;quot;blockages&amp;quot; inhibiting change, and the like—a difference of phrasing which, as we will see, is not always a difference of argument.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
15. It is always risky to try to explain broad changes of fashion in scholarship, especially when the changes are still underway, so this interpretation cannot be more than a hunch, or hypothesis. Scholarly attitudes toward the Third World were very positive in the period of anticolonial and civil rights struggles. After the late 1960s the mood changed. Not only did more conservative views come to dominate the Western world, but rather unexpected difficulties emerged in the Third World itself: national conflicts, failure of development programs, and more. Western scholarship had never really abandoned the traditional view of Europe and its relations to non-Europe, including the diffusionist view of colonialism, and it appears that this older paradigm, never abandoned, simply became, once again, thoroughly dominant. Certainly the attention that had been paid previously to dependency theory and related views fell away among mainstream scholars. Among Marxists the process was even more dramatic, because it was less expected. In brief, Eurocentric Marxists who dismissed the role of the Third World both historically and in the present now became virtually the only Marxists within the academic world to pronounce upon issues related to the Third World. It became quite fashionable to insist, once again, that only the working class of the advanced capitalist countries can bring about socialism because each stage of history commences in this part of the world (Inside) before it spreads to the rest of the world (Outside). In the conservative camp, not only did Eurocentric views regain their hegemony, but one began, now, to hear whispers of views not far distant from racism: views about Third World peoples not having the potential to develop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
16. See Brenner, &amp;quot;The Origins of Capitalist Development: A Critique of Neo-Smithian Marxism&amp;quot; (1977), &amp;quot;Agrarian class structure and economic development in pre-industrial Europe&amp;quot; (1985), &amp;quot;The Agrarian roots of European capitalism&amp;quot; (1985b); Anderson, &#039;&#039;Passages from Antiquity to Feudalism&#039;&#039; (1974), &#039;&#039;Lineages of the Absolute State&#039;&#039; (1974); Warren, &#039;&#039;Imperialism: Pioneer of Capitalism&#039;&#039; (1980).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
17. I will discuss only the more important beliefs, perhaps neglecting a few of these. And I will give just enough evidence to show that these beliefs are not self-evidently true. Much fuller evidence is given, to dispute some of the beliefs, in Chapters 3 and 4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
18. See Chapter 1, note 2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
19. Bowler, &#039;&#039;The Invention of Progress&#039;&#039; (1989); Harris, &#039;&#039;The Rise of Anthropological Theory&#039;&#039; (1968); Gossett, &#039;&#039;Race: The History of an Idea in America&#039;&#039; (1963); Jackson, &#039;&#039;Race and Racism: Essays in Social Geography&#039;&#039; (1987); Stocking, &#039;&#039;Race, Culture, and Evolution&#039;&#039; (1968); Trigger, &#039;&#039;A History of Archeological Thought&#039;&#039; (1989).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
20. See Bernal, &#039;&#039;Black Athena&#039;&#039;, vol. 1 (1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
21. See Gossett, &#039;&#039;Race&#039;&#039; (1963).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
22. Blaut, &amp;quot;The Theory of Cultural Racism&amp;quot; (1992).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
23. &amp;quot;Hereditary neuralgia of the presumably strong tendency toward hysteria and autohypnosis of the Indian...&amp;quot; Max Weber, &#039;&#039;The Religion of India&#039;&#039; (1967), p. 387. This postulate is basic to Weber&#039;s analysis of Brahminism as prime cause for India&#039;s lack of development.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
24. &amp;quot;(The) ... negroes long ago showed themselves unsuitable for factory work and the operation of machines; they have not seldom sunk into a cataleptic sleep. Here is one case in economic history where tangible racial distinctions are present&amp;quot; Weber, &#039;&#039;General Economic History&#039;&#039; (1981), p. 379. Although Weber says here that this is merely &amp;quot;one case&amp;quot; of racial influences, note that the case is crucial for Weber&#039;s analysis both of &amp;quot;rationality&amp;quot; and of modernization; the &amp;quot;racial distinctions&amp;quot; here separate out Africans in a fundamental way: a clear case of moderate yet crucial racism. In the same vein, &amp;quot;it was found that the American Indians were entirely unsuitable for plantation labor&amp;quot; (p. 299).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
25. Weber, &#039;&#039;The Religion of China&#039;&#039; (1951), pp. 231-232. Weber considers these to be &amp;quot;racial qualities of the Chinese&amp;quot; (p. 230) although cultural factors may be involved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
26. Weber, &#039;&#039;The Protestant Ethic and the Spirit of Capitalism&#039;&#039; (1958), p. 30. Weber says here that &amp;quot;it would be natural to suspect that the most important reason&amp;quot; for the rationality of the Occident lies in &amp;quot;differences of heredity,&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;the importance of biological heredity,&amp;quot; he thinks, is &amp;quot;very great&amp;quot; (p. 30). But we do not yet know how to measure its influence, so our attention should focus mainly on the cultural factors (pp. 30-31). This was typical moderate racism (as I call it) for the time the work was published (1904-1905).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
27. I have not discussed the question whether biological racism remains important today as a genuinely implicit theory, that is, one still accepted but not consciously so. I suspect that it does. Some Eurocentric historians hold to positions regarding individual differences between Europeans and non-Europeans that are so extreme, and so bigoted, that it is difficult to avoid the conclusion that at least a few of them may hold to an implicitly racist infratheory, perhaps unconsciously believing, that is, that the inferiority of non-Europeans is genetically determined.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
28. Among many sources on the racism fallacy, see Franz Boas&#039; classic book, &#039;&#039;Race, Language, and Culture&#039;&#039; (1948); also Blum, &#039;&#039;Pseudoscience and Mental Ability&#039;&#039; (1978); Gossett, &#039;&#039;Race&#039;&#039; (1965); Haller, &#039;&#039;Outcasts from Evolution&#039;&#039; (1971); Jackson, &#039;&#039;Race and Racism&#039;&#039; (1987); Magubane, &#039;&#039;The Ties that Bind: African-American Consciousness and Africa&#039;&#039; (1987); Gill and Levidow, &#039;&#039;Anti-Racist Science Teaching&#039;&#039; (1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
29. The idea that demographic behavior is not fully under social control, is a primordial biological fact or factor, seems to underlie the thinking of most Eurocentric historians (conspicuously Eric L. Jones, Michael Mann, and John Hall). The basic proposition seems to be that population will necessarily grow beyond the rational limits, and so overpopulation must result unless societies find nondemographic solutions, notably by increasing food supply to feed the inexorably increasing population. See, for instance, Michael Mann, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039;, vol. 1 (1986): If agricultural yields had not increased in medieval Europe, &amp;quot;the continent would ... have experienced a similar Malthusian cycle every century or so—and would not have generated capitalism&amp;quot; (p. 402). This view is even encountered, occasionally, in the radical and feminist movements. Note the following view put forward by a Marxist-feminist: &amp;quot;(We) assume (given the ubiquity of the sex drive ...) that the total number of conceptions in a population will tend to exceed those desired within a given incentive structure, and this unintended surplus will be greater, the more imperfect are the means at hand. ... A given fertility pattern then is taken to be &#039;rational&#039; ... except for a small but variable excess (of births),&amp;quot; Seccombe, &amp;quot;Marxism and Demography,&amp;quot; (1983), p. 31. The context is a discussion of European medieval social evolution, but the argument is given mainly in support of Brenner&#039;s theory about the strictly European rise of capitalism. Most radicals and feminists reject Malthusianism and would reject Seccombe&#039;s view as Malthusian.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
30. Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), p. 3. Part of the passage is a quotation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
31. Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), p. 219.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
32. Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties: The Causes and Consequences of the Rise of the West&#039;&#039; (1985), p. 131. Italics added.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
33. As F. Hassan points out, &amp;quot;Among human populations the practice of population control in one form or another is universal.&amp;quot; (&amp;quot;Demographic Archeology,&amp;quot; 1978, p. 71.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
34. Some families will of course have more conceptions than desired, and others fewer, because birth control techniques are imperfect, but the average for the larger group will be broadly in line with the group&#039;s values and population targets. The techniques run the gamut from variable age of marriage and variable dowry or bride price, to complexity of marriage rules (defining who, in a kin system, is eligible to be one&#039;s spouse), to timing of sexual relations, to the use of antiterility and abortive devices, to infanticide, and other practices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
35. Much of the scholarship comes from India, where colonial ideology used to claim that poverty is a result of people having too many children. Now demographers and other social scientists have disproven this myth. See, for instance, Mamdani, &#039;&#039;The Myth of Population Control&#039;&#039; (1972), and Nag, &amp;quot;How Modernization Can Also Increase Fertility&amp;quot; (1980). For Africa, see, for example, Kitching, &amp;quot;Proto-Industrialization and Demographic Change&amp;quot; (1983); Swindell, &amp;quot;Domestic Production, Labor Mobility, and Population Change in West Africa, 1900-1980&amp;quot; (1981); Cordell and Gregory, the introduction to &#039;&#039;African Population and Capitalism&#039;&#039; (1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
36. See, for instance, numerous studies showing the plasticity of birthrates, including Nag &amp;quot;How Modernization Can Also Increase Fertility&amp;quot; (1980), Collyer, &#039;&#039;Birth Rates in Latin America&#039;&#039; (1965), and Harewood, &amp;quot;Population Growth in Grenada&amp;quot; (1966).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
37. See Aston and Philipn, eds., &#039;&#039;The Brenner Debate&#039;&#039; (1985), especially the introduction by R. Hilton.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
38. Perhaps more readily, because the Malthusian explanation for poverty in Third World countries has been a rather troublesome issue for scholars and planners in these countries, and it has been important to show that poverty in their countries is not somehow caused by the demographic misbehavior of ordinary people.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
39. For instance Montesquieu, in &#039;&#039;The Spirit of the Laws&#039;&#039; ((1748) 1949) &amp;quot;People are ... more vigorous in cold climates&amp;quot; (pt. xiv.2). &amp;quot;There are countries where the excess of heat enervates the body, and renders men ... slothful and dispirited&amp;quot; (pt. xv.7).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
40. &amp;quot;Africa&amp;quot; almost always refers to &amp;quot;Africa south of the Sahara&amp;quot; in the discourse I am criticizing, so I will use &amp;quot;Africa&amp;quot; in the same sense in the present discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
41. Blaut, &amp;quot;The Ecology of Tropical Farming Systems&amp;quot; (1963).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
42. See, for example, Collins and Roberts, eds., &#039;&#039;Capacity for Work in the Tropics&#039;&#039; (1988), which fails to find convincing evidence suggesting negative tropical effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
43. The two citations (Gilfillan, &amp;quot;The Coldward Course of Progress,&amp;quot; 1920, and Lambert, &amp;quot;The Role of Climate in the Economic Development of Nations,&amp;quot; 1971) are hardly indicative of modern scholarly literature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
44. India&#039;s &amp;quot;debilitating climate&amp;quot; is one reason why India fell behind Europe, according to Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), p. 198.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
45. Among the pioneer works which have importance for peasant agriculture, we may mention Fred Hardy&#039;s &amp;quot;Some Aspects of Tropical Soils&amp;quot; (1936) and various of his articles in &#039;&#039;Tropical Agriculture&#039;&#039;, and the work of Robert Pendleton (especially Pendleton, &amp;quot;Land Use in North-Eastern Thailand,&amp;quot; 1943, and Prescott and Pendleton, &#039;&#039;Laterites and Lateritic Soils&#039;&#039;, 1952), and G. Milne &amp;quot;A Soil Reconnaissance Journey Through Parts of Tanganyika Territory&amp;quot; (1947). The first comprehensive textbook on tropical soils embodying modern knowledge is Mohr and van Baren, &#039;&#039;Tropical Soils&#039;&#039; (1954).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
46. See Nye and Greenland, &#039;&#039;The Soil Under Shifting Cultivation&#039;&#039; (1960); Blaut, &amp;quot;The Nature and Effects of Shifting Agriculture&amp;quot; (1962); Ahn, &#039;&#039;West African Soils&#039;&#039; (1970).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
47. See Miller, &#039;&#039;Way of Death&#039;&#039; (1988); Curtin, &#039;&#039;The Rise and Fall of the Plantation Complex&#039;&#039; (1990). The view is echoed in many world history textbooks, for example, Roberts, &#039;&#039;The Hutchinson History of The World&#039;&#039; (1987), pp. 54-56; McNeill, &#039;&#039;A World History&#039;&#039; (1967), pp. 273-278.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
48. See Wilken, &#039;&#039;Good Farmers: Traditional Agricultural Resource Management in Mexico and Central America&#039;&#039; (1987); also Nye and Greenland, &#039;&#039;The Soil Under Shifting Agriculture&#039;&#039; (1960); Blaut, &amp;quot;The Ecology of Tropical Farming Systems&amp;quot; (1963).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
49. Denevan, &#039;&#039;The Native Population of the Americas in 1492&#039;&#039; (1976).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
50. Cockburn and Hecht, &#039;&#039;The Fate of the Forest&#039;&#039; (1989).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
51. These marginal areas often are regions in which agriculture is practiced, in preference to some less intensive system of land use, because human communities have been pushed off better land by historical forces, notably colonialism.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
52. For a typical instance, the Oxford historian J. M. Roberts, in his popular world history textbook, &#039;&#039;The Hutchinson History of the World&#039;&#039; (1987), makes the following quite ignorant statement: &amp;quot;Probably the greatest importance of (the) spread of iron-working (in tropical Africa) was the difference it made to agriculture. It made possible a new penetration of the forests, new tilling of the soil (which may be connected with the arrival of new food-crops from Asia ... This suggests once again the important limiting factor of the African environment. Most of the continent&#039;s history is the story of response to influences from the outside (including iron-working and new crops)&amp;quot; (pp. 511-512). African farmers, like farmers in Europe and many other regions, practiced agriculture with stone tools before iron arrived, and continued to do so afterward whenever and wherever iron was hard to obtain. On the age of ironworking in tropical Africa, see, for example, Wai-Andah, &amp;quot;West Africa Before the Seventh Century&amp;quot; (1981) and Sinclair, &amp;quot;Archeology in Eastern Africa&amp;quot; (1991).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
53. See, for example, Roberts (note 53 above); also Irwin, &amp;quot;Sub-Saharan Africa,&amp;quot; in Garraty and Gay, eds. &#039;&#039;The Columbia History of the World&#039;&#039; (1981), p. 299.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
54. See for instance Irvine&#039;s classical work, &#039;&#039;A Textbook of West African Agriculture&#039;&#039; (1934); Coursey, &#039;&#039;Yams&#039;&#039; (1967).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
55. According to Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), &amp;quot;the Negroid peoples ... were still pushing east and south into the territories of the pygmies and the bushmen when the Boers undertook the Great Trek north from the Cape in the 1830s,&amp;quot; (p. 155). Also see Roberts &#039;&#039;The Hutchinson History of the World&#039;&#039; (1987), p. 178.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
56. Curtin, &#039;&#039;Economic Change in Pre-Colonial Africa&#039;&#039; (1975); Curtin, &#039;&#039;The Rise and Fall of the Plantation Complex&#039;&#039; (1990); Miller, &#039;&#039;Way of Death&#039;&#039; (1988).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
57. See Wisner and Mbithi, &amp;quot;Drought in Eastern Kenya&amp;quot; (1974); Wisner, &#039;&#039;Power and Need in Africa&#039;&#039; (1989); O&#039;Keefe and Wisner, &amp;quot;African Drought: The State of the Game&amp;quot; (1975).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
58. The same arguments apply, with no need for qualification, in Western Hemisphere agriculture. In relatively limited parts of the South American rain forest the ecosystem is so fragile, as a result of local geological conditions (rocks forming infertile kaolinitic clay soils in some areas, almost pure sands in other areas), that cropping systems must employ shifting agriculture (or tree crops). But such areas are the exception within the present-day distribution of rain forest environments. In general, the great sweep of Amazonian and Guianan rain forest is a zone of non-sedentary agriculture because of cultural-historical factors, notably depopulation and the massive increase in cattle ranching. It is in fact cattle ranching, and not shifting agriculture, that leads to agriculturally caused long-term environmental degradation in the rainforest region, because (1) ranchers burn forest to the maximum extent possible and without control, in order to expand the area of pasture, and (2) the resulting pasture leads to steady soil degradation because coarse pasture grasses do not maintain the soil ecosystem as does the original forest. Shifting cultivators, by contrast, burn only under controlled conditions, burn small areas only, and carefully encourage the regrowth of forest. If the forest disappears, their livelihood disappears. Shifting agriculturists should not be blamed for deforestation anywhere in the humid tropics. See Hecht and Cockburn, &#039;&#039;The Fate of the Forest&#039;&#039; (1989); Blaut, &amp;quot;The Nature and Effects of Shifting Agriculture&amp;quot; (1963).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
59. Buckle, &#039;&#039;The History of Civilization in England&#039;&#039;, 2nd ed., (1913), chap. 2. Also see Bowler, &#039;&#039;The Invention of Progress&#039;&#039; (1989), pp. 28-29.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
60. Marx, &#039;&#039;Capital&#039;&#039;, vol. 1 (1976), p. 513n.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
61. Jones in fact manages to use both of the opposing theories toward the same end. In wetter regions of Africa &amp;quot;living was easy.&amp;quot; In drier areas &amp;quot;agriculture was not productive.&amp;quot; Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), p. 154. Also see Jones, &#039;&#039;Growth Recuring: Economic Change in World History&#039;&#039; (1988).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
62. &amp;quot;In Africa the bountifulness and extent of the land makes for a mobile peasantry, necessarily therefore poor material on which to build states. Something like this is probably true of all slash-and-burn agriculture,&amp;quot; John Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties&#039;&#039; (1985), p. 27. (&amp;quot;Slash-and-burn agriculture&amp;quot; is shifting agriculture.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
63. Laibman, &amp;quot;Modes of Production and Theories of Transition&amp;quot; (1984), p. 284. However, Laibman&#039;s overall argument is not at all Eurocentric.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
64. Buckle, &#039;&#039;History of Civilization in England&#039;&#039;, vol. 1, 2nd ed. (1913), p. 93: &amp;quot;(The) great plagues by which Europe has at different periods been scourged, have, for the most part, proceeded from the East, which is their natural birthplace, and where they are most fatal. Indeed, of those cruel diseases now existing in Europe, scarcely one is indigenous; and the worst of them were imported from tropical countries in and after the first century of the Christian era.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
65. The theory that the HIV virus which causes AIDS in humans is another one of these African plagues descending upon the Western World may very well be just the newest myth in this old diffusionist tradition. Whether or not this virus originated in Africa, which has not been proven, the myth has already taken on ugly overtones, as in the completely unfounded (yet classical) belief that AIDS was transmitted from monkeys to humans because of some strange sexual practices in some obscure African tribes. (This myth is naively reported in Shannon and Pyle, &amp;quot;The Origin and Diffusion of AIDS,&amp;quot; 1989. See the critique of this paper by Watts and Okello, &amp;quot;Medical Geography and AIDS,&amp;quot; 1990. Also see R. C. and R. J. Chirimuuta, &#039;&#039;AIDS, Africa and racism&#039;&#039;, 2nd ed., 1989.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
66. McNeill, &#039;&#039;Plagues and Peoples&#039;&#039; (1976), p. 43.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
67. See, for instance, Giblin, &amp;quot;Trypanosomiasis Control in African History: An Evaded Issue?&amp;quot; (1990); Turshen, &amp;quot;Population Growth and the Deterioration of Health: Mainland Tanzania, 1920-1960&amp;quot; (1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
68. See Venturi &amp;quot;The History of the Concept of &#039;Oriental Despotism&#039; in Europe&amp;quot; (1963); P. Anderson, &#039;&#039;Lineages of the Absolute State&#039;&#039; (1974); B. Chandra, &amp;quot;Karl Marx, His Theories of Asian Societies, and Colonial Rule&amp;quot; (1981).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
69. Similar judgments are still commonly made by theoreticians of the European miracle. For instance, John Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties&#039;&#039; (1985), p. 12: &amp;quot;Chinese society was stuck in the same stage for over two thousand years, while Europe, in comparison, progressed like a champion hurdler.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
70. And also earlier. It is discussed for instance by Montesquieu, Bernier, Adam Smith, and Hegel (see, for instance, &amp;quot;Introduction,&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;The Oriental World&amp;quot; in Hegel&#039;s &#039;&#039;Philosophy of History&#039;&#039;, 1956). Also see the historical reviews in Venturi, &amp;quot;The History of the Concept of &#039;Oriental Despotism&#039; in Europe&amp;quot; (1963); P. Anderson, &#039;&#039;Lineages of the Absolute State&#039;&#039; (1974); and B. Chandra, &amp;quot;Karl Marx, his Theories of Asian Societies, and Colonial Review&amp;quot; (1981).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
71. This idea, too, had its forerunners. Possibly Marx got the idea from Karl Ritter, his professor of geography at Berlin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
72. Marx and Engels, &#039;&#039;Selected Correspondence&#039;&#039; (1975).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
73. Marx and Engels considered other factors as well, and it is fair to say that their analysis remained speculative. I believe that Engels withdrew from the idea of &amp;quot;Oriental despotism&amp;quot; in late life. See the discussion of this topic in P. Anderson, &#039;&#039;Lineages of the Absolute State&#039;&#039; (1974); Blaut, &amp;quot;Colonialism and the Rise of Capitalism&amp;quot; (1989); and B. Chandra, &amp;quot;Karl Marx, His Theories of Asian Societies, and Colonial Rule&amp;quot; (1981).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
74. See Laibman, &amp;quot;Modes of Production and Theories of Transition&amp;quot; (1984), and Bailey and Llobera, &#039;&#039;The Asiatic Mode of Production&#039;&#039; (1981).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
75. Weber, &#039;&#039;The Agrarian Sociology of Ancient Civilizations&#039;&#039; (1976), pp. 84, 131, 157, &#039;&#039;The Religion of China&#039;&#039; (1951), pp. 16, 21, 25, and &amp;quot;The Origin of Seigneurial Proprietorship,&amp;quot; part 1, chap. 3, esp. pp. 56-57 in &#039;&#039;General Economic History&#039;&#039; (1981). Also see McNeill, &#039;&#039;Plagues and Peoples&#039;&#039; (1976), pp. 93, 207, 259.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
76. Weber, &#039;&#039;The Agrarian Sociology of Ancient Civilizations&#039;&#039; (1976), pp. 157-158. Also, on p. 84: &amp;quot;The basis of the economy (in Egypt) was irrigation, for this was the crucial factor in all exploitation of land resources. Every new settlement demanded construction of a canal ... Now canal construction is necessarily a large-scale operation, demanding some sort of collective social organization; it is very different from the relatively individualistic activity of clearing virgin forest. Here then is the fundamental economic cause for the overwhelmingly dominant position of the monarchy in Mesopotamia (and) Egypt.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
77. Wittfogel, &#039;&#039;Oriental Despotism&#039;&#039; (1957).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
78. See, for instance, Denevan, &#039;&#039;The Aboriginal Cultural Geography of the Llanos de Mojos of Bolivia&#039;&#039; (1966), and &amp;quot;Hydraulic Agriculture in the American Tropics&amp;quot; (1982), on ancient drained-field or raised-field agriculture in the tropics; Golson, &amp;quot;No Room at the Top: Agricultural Intensification in the New Guinea Highlands&amp;quot; (1977), on ancient drainage in highland New Guinea; Doolittle, &#039;&#039;Canal Irrigation in Prehistoric Mexico&#039;&#039; (1990), on drainage and early agriculture in Mexico; Harrison and Turner &#039;&#039;Pre-Hispanic Maya Agriculture&#039;&#039; (1978), on early drainage in the Maya lowlands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
79. Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), pp. 8-9.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
80. Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties&#039;&#039; (1985), pp. 12-13, 27-28, 36, 42-3, 53, 59, 99, 102, 137.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
81. Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties&#039;&#039; (1985), p. 11. Also see pp. 41, 123, 132.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
82. Mann, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986). Also see his essay, &amp;quot;European Development: Approaching a Historical Explanation&amp;quot; (1988).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
83. Mann, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986), p. 94.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
84. Mann, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986), p. 179.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
85. The fact that Mann attributes the ancient European takeoff mainly to chariot warfare and iron-plow rainfall-farming, yet concedes that both innovations were initiated by Middle Easterners themselves, suggests to me that Mann&#039;s fundamental causal reasoning centers on the notion of European rationality: regardless of who invented these things, the Europeans put the things to work. That this Weberian notion is indeed basic for Mann will be demonstrated later in this chapter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
86. Bray, &#039;&#039;Agriculture&#039;&#039;, vol. 6, part 2, of Needham and collaborators, &#039;&#039;Science and Civilization in China&#039;&#039; (1984).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
87. Blaut, &amp;quot;Two Views of Diffusion&amp;quot; (1977).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
88. Mann, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986), pp. 247, 406, 408, 412, 504-510, 520, 530, 539-540.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
89. Mann, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986), p. 509.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
90. Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties&#039;&#039; (1985), p. 99.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
91. Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties&#039;&#039; (1985), p. 110.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
92. Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), p. 10.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
93. Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), p. 47.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
94. Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), p. 8. Jones makes the common error of assuming that productivity per worker is low in irrigated agriculture in comparison with unirrigated agriculture. This is not the case. Even with draft animals, medieval peasant production per worker was not high. And draft animals are used in irrigated farming, abundantly so in some Asian wet-rice farming systems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
95. Mann, &amp;quot;European Development&amp;quot; (1988), p. 10, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986), p. 406; Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), pp. 90, 227; Crone, &#039;&#039;Pre-Industrial Societies&#039;&#039; (1989), p. 150; McNeill, &#039;&#039;Plagues and Peoples&#039;&#039; (1976), p. 295.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
96. Mann, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986, chap. 5). Mann in fact builds a theory of ancient warfare upon the basis of this sort of calculation, here also ignoring the fact that armies then as now provision themselves and their animals on the route of march.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
97. Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), chap. 2 and elsewhere. Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties&#039;&#039; (1985), p. 132, makes the same claim, citing Jones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
98. Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties&#039;&#039; (1985), p. 111; Jones &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), pp. 90, 105, 107, 226-227; Mann, &amp;quot;European Development: Approaching a Historical Explanation&amp;quot; (1988), p. 10; Mann, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986), p. 406.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
99. Levy-Bruhl, &#039;&#039;How Natives Think&#039;&#039; (1966).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100. See, for example, Boas, &#039;&#039;The Mind of Primitive Man&#039;&#039; (1938); Radin, &#039;&#039;Primitive Man as Philosopher&#039;&#039; (1927); M. Mead, &#039;&#039;Growing Up in New Guinea&#039;&#039; (1930).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
101. Stocking, &#039;&#039;Victorian Anthropology&#039;&#039; (1987), p. 59; Bowler, &#039;&#039;The Invention of Progress&#039;&#039; (1989), p. 66; Whitman &amp;quot;From Philology to Anthropology in Mid-Nineteenth-Century Germany&amp;quot; (1984); Bernal, &#039;&#039;Black Athena&#039;&#039;, vol. 1 (1987); Said, &#039;&#039;Orientalism&#039;&#039; (1978). A recent expression of this theory came in a Soviet debate about &amp;quot;Oriental despotism&amp;quot; (Lelekov, &amp;quot;Round-Table: State and Law in the Ancient Orient,&amp;quot; 1978). L. Lelekov, a historian, claimed that words meaning &amp;quot;freedom&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;right&amp;quot; were basic in the original Indo-European language or languages but not in Near Eastern languages, and asserted that this must have affected &amp;quot;social thinking&amp;quot; (p. 190). This contention was refuted by the philologist V. Ivanov (p. 193).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
102. See Dalal, &amp;quot;The Racism of Jung&amp;quot; (1988). In Jung&#039;s work, see in particular &#039;&#039;Psychological Types&#039;&#039; (1971) (for instance: &amp;quot;(If) we go right back to primitive psychology, we find absolutely no trace of the concept of the individual,&amp;quot; p. 10); &#039;&#039;Memories, Dreams, Reflections&#039;&#039; (1963), and &amp;quot;The Dreamlike World of India,&amp;quot; in &#039;&#039;Civilization in Transition&#039;&#039; (1927). See also the 1954 work by Jung&#039;s disciple Erich Neumann, &#039;&#039;The Origins and History of Consciousness&#039;&#039; (for instance: &amp;quot;The evolution of consciousness as a form of creative evolution is the peculiar achievement of Western man ... The creative character of consciousness is a central feature of the cultural canon of the West ... In stationary cultures, or in primitive societies where the original features of human culture are still preserved, the earliest stages of man&#039;s psychology predominate,&amp;quot; pp. xviii-xxix).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
103. Piaget, &#039;&#039;Psychology and Epistemology&#039;&#039; (1971), p. 61.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
104. See, for example, Werner and Kaplan, &#039;&#039;Symbol Formation&#039;&#039; (1964).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
105. See the first 16 volumes (through 1985) of &#039;&#039;The Journal of Cross-Cultural Psychology&#039;&#039; for a great many examples of this phenomenon. For this period something like one-tenth of all the empirical articles in this U.S. journal were studies by white Southern Africans purporting to show the cognitive inferiority of black Africans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
106. Rogers, &#039;&#039;The Diffusion of Innovations&#039;&#039; (1962); Rogers and Shoemaker, &#039;&#039;Communication of Innovations&#039;&#039; (1971), pp. 187-191; McClelland, &#039;&#039;The Achieving Society&#039;&#039; (1961); Hagen, &#039;&#039;On the Theory of Social Change&#039;&#039; (1962) and &amp;quot;A Framework for Analyzing Economic and Political Change,&amp;quot; in Brookings Institution, ed., &#039;&#039;Development of the Emerging Countries: An Agenda for Research&#039;&#039; (1962), pp. 1-39. I have cited only the initial statements: much literature emerged from these works.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
107. S. Marglin, &amp;quot;Losing Touch: The Cultural Conditions of Worker Accommodation and Resistance,&amp;quot; in F. and S. Marglin, eds., &#039;&#039;Dominating knowledge: Development, Culture, and Resistance&#039;&#039; (1990).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
108. Sack, &#039;&#039;Conceptions of Space in Social Thought&#039;&#039; (1980). Geographers prominent in the diffusion paradigm discussed here are L. Brown (&#039;&#039;The Diffusion of Innovations&#039;&#039;, 1981) and P. Gould (&#039;&#039;Spatial Diffusion&#039;&#039;, 1969). On peasant traditionalism in relation to natural hazards, see G. White, ed., &#039;&#039;Natural Hazards&#039;&#039; (1974), as an example of the abundant literature. I criticize these and other arguments about non-Western nonrationality in Blaut, &amp;quot;Two Views of Diffusion&amp;quot; (1977), &amp;quot;Diffusionism: A Unitarian Critique&amp;quot; (1987a), and &amp;quot;Natural Mapping&amp;quot; (1991).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
109. In the field of education in the United States the dominant standardized college entrance tests (SAT and ACT) are skewed by culture-specific and sex-specific internal (as well as situational) characteristics, such that women do more poorly than men although they actually perform at higher levels in terms of university grades, while the ACT and SAT test scores of Latinos (African-Americans have not yet been studied in this way), which are very low, have no correlation whatever with their performance in college. Thus the tests effectively minimize female and minority college attendance. Why the tests are almost universally used, even so, is a fascinating question. The same biases are so prominent in IQ testing that such tests have been barred as diagnostic instruments in California schools. The &amp;quot;primitive mind&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;primitive languages&amp;quot; biases sometimes combine, as in U.S. debates about the so-called &amp;quot;English-only&amp;quot; issue and about the question whether non-European literature deserves to be included in the college curriculum along with European literature. In Boston not long ago, 30% of Hispanic children aged six to eight were not attending elementary school because their inability to speak English had been judged to be evidence of mental retardation, and Boston claimed not to have sufficient resources to educate these children in &amp;quot;special schools.&amp;quot; Testing in general in U.S. education remains very racist.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110. Rorty, &#039;&#039;Philosophy and the Mirror of Nature&#039;&#039; (1980), and earlier works by Dewey (for instance &#039;&#039;The Quest for Certainty&#039;&#039;, 1929), Whitehead (for instance, &#039;&#039;Modes of Thought&#039;&#039;, 1938), and G. H. Mead (for instance, &#039;&#039;Philosophy of the Act&#039;&#039;, 1938).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
111. This is a general assessment. Some anthropologists continue to maintain either the &amp;quot;primitive mind&amp;quot; doctrine or the closely related &amp;quot;traditional mind&amp;quot; doctrine. An example of the latter is George Foster&#039;s well-known and influential book &#039;&#039;Traditional Cultures&#039;&#039; (1962), of the former, Hallpike&#039;s &#039;&#039;The Foundations of Primitive Thought&#039;&#039; (1979). For a critique, see Schweder, &amp;quot;Cultural Psychology: What Is It?&amp;quot; (1990).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
112. On the question of Weber&#039;s use of &amp;quot;rationality,&amp;quot; its basal status in his theorizing, and yet its uncertain definition and provenance, see, for instance: Cohen&#039;s introduction to the 1981 ed. of Weber&#039;s &#039;&#039;General Economic History&#039;&#039; (1981), pp. xxv-xxvii; Löwith, &#039;&#039;Max Weber and Karl Marx&#039;&#039; (1982), pp. 40-42, 53-54, n. 49; Freund, &#039;&#039;The Sociology of Max Weber&#039;&#039; (1968), pp. 140-149. In Weber, see &#039;&#039;General Economic History&#039;&#039; (1981), chaps. 29, 30, &#039;&#039;The Protestant Ethic and the Spirit of Capitalism&#039;&#039; (1958), pp. 13-31, 59-60, 79, 118-120, 191, n. 19, 265, n. 31, &#039;&#039;The Religion of China&#039;&#039; (1951), chap. 8, &#039;&#039;The Religion of India&#039;&#039; (1967), p. 387, and other works.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
113. Weber, &#039;&#039;General Economic History&#039;&#039; (1981), p. 161. Also see pp. 339, 355-368. Weber makes a large number of comments about the irrationality of Asians.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
114. Weber, &#039;&#039;Economy and Society&#039;&#039;, vol. 2 (1968), pp. 1212-1374.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
115. Typical of Jones&#039;s method is to find some objectionable feature of very early Asian society, compare it with some pleasing feature of modern, post-industrial-revolution European society, and then treat both features as though they were permanent characteristics of the respective societies, giving a picture of awful primitiveness to Asians and marvelous modernity to Europeans thereby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
116. &amp;quot;Frankish feudalism, in many ways proto-typical of later feudalism, was ... a mixture of the very, very old, deep-rooted drift of &#039;European&#039; peasant society and of the brand new the opportunistic, the &#039;un-European,&#039;&amp;quot; Mann, &amp;quot;European Development&amp;quot; (1988), p. 16.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
117. Mann, &amp;quot;European Development&amp;quot; (1988), p. 17. Also see his &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986), for instance pp. 190, 195, 213, 377, 404, 412, 510. (&amp;quot;At the end of all these processes stood one organic, medium-sized, wet-soil island state, perfectly situated for take-off: Great Britain,&amp;quot; p. 510.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
118. Mann, &amp;quot;European Development&amp;quot; (1988), pp. 8-9, 11-12, 15-18 and &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986), pp. 377-378, 397-398, 402-408, 412, 500-510. Also, on Europe&#039;s rationality and its historical significance, see McNeill, &#039;&#039;Plagues and Peoples&#039;&#039; (1976), pp. 41, 97, 106-107, 236, 238, 249, 256, 259, 264.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
119. See P. Anderson, &#039;&#039;Passages from Antiquity to Feudalism&#039;&#039; (1974), part 3; Finley, &#039;&#039;The Use and Abuse of History&#039;&#039; (1975), chap. 6; Aston and Philipn, &#039;&#039;The Brenner Debate&#039;&#039; (1985), pp. 32-33, 42-51, 59, 63n, 214-215, 234-236, 306-316.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
120. White, &#039;&#039;Medieval Technology and Social Change&#039;&#039; (1962), p. 38); also McNeill, &#039;&#039;Plagues and Peoples&#039;&#039; (1976), p. 234.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
121. White, &#039;&#039;Medieval Technology and Social Change&#039;&#039; (1962), p. 54.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
122. Kosambi, &#039;&#039;Ancient India&#039;&#039; (1969), p. 89; R. S. Sharma, &#039;&#039;Light on Early Indian Society and Economy&#039;&#039; (1966), p. 57.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
123. White, &#039;&#039;Medieval Technology and Social Change&#039;&#039; (1962), p. 44.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
124. White, &#039;&#039;Medieval Technology and Social Change&#039;&#039; (1962), p. 56; McNeill, &#039;&#039;Plagues and Peoples&#039;&#039; (1976), p. 237.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
125. See C. T. Smith, &#039;&#039;An Historical Geography of Western Europe&#039;&#039; (1967), p. 203; Darby, &#039;&#039;The Domesday Geography of Eastern England&#039;&#039; (1952).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
126. Orwin and Orwin, &#039;&#039;The Open Fields&#039;&#039; (1967), chap. 3; C. T. Smith, &#039;&#039;An Historical Geography of Western Europe&#039;&#039; (1967), chap. 4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
127. White, &#039;&#039;Medieval Technology and Social Change&#039;&#039; (1962), p. 57.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
128. White, &#039;&#039;Medieval Technology and Social Change&#039;&#039; (1962), p. 67.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
129. White, &#039;&#039;Medieval Technology and Social Change&#039;&#039; (1962), p. 68.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130. Bray, &#039;&#039;Science and Civilization in China&#039;&#039;, vol. 6, part 2, &#039;&#039;Agriculture&#039;&#039; (1984), pp. 304-328.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
131. White, &#039;&#039;Medieval Technology and Social Change&#039;&#039; (1962), p. 76.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
132. White, &#039;&#039;Machina Ex Deo&#039;&#039; (1968). See in particular the essay—quite a famous one—called &amp;quot;The Historical Roots of Our Ecological Crisis&amp;quot; (chap. 5).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
133. White, &amp;quot;The Historical Roots of Our Ecological Crisis.&amp;quot; In White, &#039;&#039;Machina Ex Deo&#039;&#039; (1967), p. 85.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
134. White, &#039;&#039;Machina Ex Deo&#039;&#039; (1967), p. 90.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
135. Needham et al., &#039;&#039;Science and Civilization in China&#039;&#039; (1954-1984).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
136. Some historians today simply ignore this evidence and repeat the old notions about China&#039;s lack of technological prowess. See, for example, Roberts, &#039;&#039;The Hutchinson History of the World&#039;&#039; (1987), pp. 493-495, 502.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
137. Needham et al., &#039;&#039;Science and Civilization in China&#039;&#039;, vol. 4, part 2 (1965), chap. 27.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
138. Needham et al., &#039;&#039;Science and Civilization in China&#039;&#039; vol. 4, part 2 (1965), p. 33). Arnold Pacey places the innovation in Korea. See Pacey&#039;s &#039;&#039;Technology in World History&#039;&#039; (1990), p. 56.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
139. See, for example, Lopez, &amp;quot;Hard Times and Investment in Culture&amp;quot; (1953), Thorndyke, &amp;quot;Renaissance or Renaissance?&amp;quot; (1943).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
140. Cipolla, &#039;&#039;Guns, Sails, Empires&#039;&#039; (1965), p. 106.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
141. Cipolla, &#039;&#039;Guns, Sails, Empires&#039;&#039; (1965), pp. 108-109.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
142. See, for instance, White, &#039;&#039;Machina Ex Deo&#039;&#039; (1968); Mann, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986), &amp;quot;European Development&amp;quot; (1988); Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties&#039;&#039; (1985); Baechler, &amp;quot;The Origins of Modernity&amp;quot; (1988); K. F. Werner, &amp;quot;Political and Social Structures of the West&amp;quot; (1988); and Hallam, &amp;quot;The Medieval Social Picture&amp;quot; (1975).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
143. Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties&#039;&#039; (1985), p. 135.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
144. Mann, &amp;quot;European Development&amp;quot; (1988), p. 12.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
145. Hallam, &amp;quot;The Medieval Social Picture&amp;quot; (1975), p. 49.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
146. K. F. Werner. &amp;quot;Political and Social Structures of the West&amp;quot; (1988), p. 172. This German medievalist argues that the central force underlying the &amp;quot;miracle&amp;quot; was Christianity. He refers here to the Catholic church, to the body of doctrine (Catholic and later also Protestant), to the social and political institutions that were influenced both by church and by doctrine, and to the faith of European people, which, in Werner&#039;s opinion, had much to do with their innovativeness, their sense of &amp;quot;restlessness,&amp;quot; their rationality. Werner acknowledges that many causal factors were at work in bringing about the rise of Europe, and he does not hesitate to claim a role for the natural environment. But it is clear that his theory is primarily based on religion. And beyond this, one senses that this scholar himself may see the hand of a Christian god in the rise of Christian Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Werner first of all makes a strong case to the effect that European history maintained a continuity of institutions, and of progress, from the time of the Roman Empire down through the Middle Ages, and that the late Empire established both ecclesiastical and lay institutions which continued down through the Middle Ages and gave that era its character. Chief among the institutions is the Catholic church. Werner wishes to depict the church as having a determining influence on history from the time of its founding. He sees the rise of Europe as a process that was guided throughout by the Christian religion, as institution and doctrine. If Werner were simply presenting a theory of history that accords religion a dominant role, I would not be discussing his views in this book. I would agree that its role has been underemphasized by historians, conservative no less than Marxist. The reason I deal with Werner&#039;s views is that he makes clear his belief that it is not religion in general but the Christian religion which played the historically efficacious role in the European &amp;quot;miracle.&amp;quot; Werner&#039;s views are distinctly Eurocentric. Perhaps the key comment is the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(If) we had to choose one word that, by itself alone, were capable of expressing an essential factor in what we understand by the &amp;quot;European miracle,&amp;quot; we would choose the philosophical term ... &amp;quot;unrest&amp;quot; ... &amp;quot;restlessness&amp;quot; ... Ruhelosigkeit ... Whilst Asia and its wisdom and, in its train, the great religions and philosophies, strive toward the art of ... seeking out the centre of the soul and of the world, and of resting in God, of having arrived, the European of the European miracle is a man who is always ready to take off once more, once he has arrived ... But where must be sought the causa causans of this mentality? The spur to anxiety is to be seen in the pangs of sin ... in the search for pardon and grace. The importance of the deliverance of the soul gave an hitherto unheard-of prominence to the individual, independent of his social rank, the individual who ... (does not abandon himself) to destiny ... (The) sense of responsibility seems to me to be one of the strengths of the Europeans that are to accomplish the &amp;quot;miracle&amp;quot; (p. 185).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus: Europe&#039;s religion, Christianity, instills a kind of mentality in &amp;quot;European man&amp;quot; which explains the basic source of the &amp;quot;European miracle.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The objection to this is the same one we put forward to all of the notions about Europe&#039;s supposedly unique &amp;quot;rationality.&amp;quot; Whether that putative trait comes from religion (Werner) or from the post-Neolithic European tribes (Mann) or from any other source, the basic objection is: how can you really justify a statement that makes Europeans brighter, better, bolder than non-Europeans, if you accept the fundamental axiom that all human communities have the same ration of mind as all others? It is one thing, and indeed an unexceptionable thing, to credit the human mind with prime causality in culture change, through the innovation of social, technical, and purely intellectual things. But it is something quite different, and quite suspect, to credit the minds of human beings from some communities—and not others—with all of these qualities of innovativeness, restlessness, sense of responsibility, intellectual eagerness, respect for others, and so on, qualities usually summed up in the word &amp;quot;rationality.&amp;quot; Europeans are rational but so too are non-Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
147. See, for example, Palmer, &#039;&#039;Atlas of Modern History&#039;&#039; (1957); Bjørklund, Hølmhoe, Røhr, and Lie, &#039;&#039;Historical Atlas of the World&#039;&#039; (1970); and Kinder and Hilgemann, &#039;&#039;The Anchor Atlas of World History&#039;&#039;, vol. 1 (1974).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
148. I discuss this in &#039;&#039;The National Question&#039;&#039; (1987b).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
149. Padgug, &amp;quot;The Problem of the Theory of Slavery and Slave Society&amp;quot; (1976).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
150. Baechler, &amp;quot;The Origins of Modernity&amp;quot; (1988).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151. Baechler, in &amp;quot;The Origins of Modernity&amp;quot; (1988), p. 39, suggests that we should &amp;quot;juxtapose the barbarous Europe of the Halstatt period (about 600 B.C.) ... and Africa on the verge of colonization in the nineteenth century (A.D.).&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
152. Baechler finds a true aristocracy also in Japan but believes that Japan failed to emulate Europe for various other reasons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
153. Baechler considers it quite unremarkable that the political chaos of the Dark Ages gave way smoothly to strong states in Europe. &amp;quot;Inevitably&amp;quot; there will be the &amp;quot;reconstitution of larger polities&amp;quot; (Baechler, &amp;quot;The Origins of Modernity&amp;quot; 1988, p. 50). But it is equally inevitable for India that the political chaos of 1000 years ago will not be cured and permanently, thereafter, the &amp;quot;polity ... is not a reality in India&amp;quot; (p. 45).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
154. Baechler, &amp;quot;The Origins of Modernity&amp;quot; (1988), p. 59.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
155. Baechler, &amp;quot;The Origins of Modernity&amp;quot; (1988), p. 53.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
156. Baechler, &amp;quot;The Origins of Modernity&amp;quot; (1988), p. 56.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
157. Baechler, &amp;quot;The Origins of Modernity&amp;quot; (1988), p. 45.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
158. Baechler, &amp;quot;The Origins of Modernity&amp;quot; (1988), p. 53.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
159. Godelier, &#039;&#039;Sobre el Modo de Producción Asiático&#039;&#039; (1969), p. 58.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
160. Brenner, &amp;quot;The Origins of Capitalist Development: A Critique of Neo-Smithian Marxism&amp;quot; (1977); &amp;quot;Agrarian Class Structure and Economic Development in Pre-Industrial Europe&amp;quot; (1985, originally published 1976), and &amp;quot;The Agrarian Roots of European Capitalism&amp;quot; (1985). After the 1976 article first appeared in the journal, &#039;&#039;Past and Present&#039;&#039;, a series of critiques was published in that journal, and Brenner replied in 1982 with the article, &amp;quot;The Agrarian Roots of European Capitalism.&amp;quot; A volume, &#039;&#039;The Brenner Debate: Agrarian Class Structure and Economic Development in Pre-Industrial Europe&#039;&#039;, containing the two &#039;&#039;Past and Present&#039;&#039; articles and several critiques, and edited by Aston and Philip, appeared in 1985.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
161. In my opinion the popularity of this thin theory is due principally to two things. First, put forward as a Marxist view, grounded in class struggle, it proves to be, on inspection, a theory that is fairly conventional, if somewhat rural in bias. It seems to follows that class-struggle theories lead to conventional conclusions. And secondly, Brenner uses his theory (&amp;quot;The Origins of Capitalist Development: A Critique of Neo-Smithian Marxism,&amp;quot; 1977, pp. 77-92) to attack the unpopular &amp;quot;Third-Worldist&amp;quot; perspectives of dependency theory, underdevelopment theory, and in particular three other neo-Marxists—Sweezy, Frank, and Wallerstein—who argue that European colonialism had much to do with the later rise of capitalism. Brenner is a thoroughgoing Eurocentric tunnel historian: non-Europe had no important role in social evolution at any historical period. Unaware that colonialism involves capitalist relations of production—see Chapter 4 below—he claims that the extra-European world merely had commercial effects on Europe, whereas the rise of capitalism was in no way a product of commerce: it took place in the countryside of England and reflected class struggle, not trade. See critiques of Brenner collected in Aston and Philip (1985) by Hilton, Croot and Parker, Wunder, Leroy, Ladurie, Bois, Cooper, and others. Also see Torras, &amp;quot;Class struggle in Catalonia&amp;quot; (1980) and Hoyle, &amp;quot;Tenure and the land market in early modern England: Or a late contribution to the Brenner debate.&amp;quot; (1990).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
162. (1) If only one family member is a wageworker, loss of employment is a disaster. If several are wageworkers, normally some will be earning an income when others are laid off. (2) If we assume an ability to save a certain percentage of income, multiple income earners will provide a larger absolute amount of savings, that is, capital; and the absolute amount of capital can be critical in entrepreneurship. (3) Having kin to borrow from is useful for small-scale entrepreneurship. (4) Kinfolk can supply unpaid labor. These principles are well known in Third World communities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
163. Hajnal, &amp;quot;European Marriage Patterns in Perspective&amp;quot; (1965), pp. 101-146. This paper is one of the most widely cited publications on the subject of demography in the European miracle literature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
164. Hajnal, &amp;quot;European Marriage Patterns in Perspective&amp;quot; (1965), p. 101.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
165. Hajnal, &amp;quot;European Marriage Patterns in Perspective&amp;quot; (1965), p. 134.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
166. Hajnal concedes that he has only contemporary data for non-Europe, but merely suggests that historical data would prove his point even more clearly because modern non-European family patterns, in his view, are changing in the direction of European patterns: are being Europeanized. And when &amp;quot;all the qualifications about the data have been made, there can be no doubt that our original generalization remains&amp;quot; (&amp;quot;European Marriage Patterns in Perspective,&amp;quot; 1965, p. 106).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
167. Stone, &#039;&#039;The Family, Sex and Marriage in England 1500-1800&#039;&#039; (1977), p. 509.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
168. Mann, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986), p. 408; Crone, &#039;&#039;Pre-Industrial Societies&#039;&#039; (1989), p. 152; Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), pp. 15-16; Macfarlane, &#039;&#039;Marriage and Love in England: Modes of Reproduction 1300-1840&#039;&#039; (1986).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
169. Laslett, &amp;quot;The European Family and Early Industrialization&amp;quot; (1989).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
170. Taeuber, &amp;quot;The Families of Chinese Farmers&amp;quot; (1970), pp. 63-86.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
171. See Freedman, &#039;&#039;Chinese Lineage and Society&#039;&#039; (1966), p. 49.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
172. See, for example, Handler &amp;quot;Review of Macfarlane, A., &#039;&#039;Marriage and love in England&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; (1989); Hilton, &amp;quot;Individualism and the English Peasantry&amp;quot; (1980); Kertzer, &amp;quot;The Joint Family Household Revisited: Demographic Constraints and Household Complexity in the European Past&amp;quot; (1989); and Berkner, &amp;quot;The Use and Misuse of Census Data for the Historical Analysis of Family Structures&amp;quot; (1975), and &amp;quot;The Stem Family and the Developmental Cycle of the Peasant Household&amp;quot; (1989).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
173. For instance, G. Lee, &amp;quot;Comparative Perspectives&amp;quot; (1987), p. 65, points out that &amp;quot;(Many) scholars contend that the majority of families in any society are and always have been nuclear, regardless of the cultural elements favoring extended families.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
174. Macfarlane, &#039;&#039;The Origins of English Individualism&#039;&#039; (1978), chap. 1 and &amp;quot;The Cradle of Capitalism&amp;quot; (1988), p. 344.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
175. See, for example, Hilton, &amp;quot;Individualism and the English Peasantry&amp;quot; (1980) and Handler, &amp;quot;Review of Mcfarlane, A., &#039;&#039;Marriage and Love in England&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; (1989).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
176. &amp;quot;(It) seems likely that (primitive peoples&#039;) patterns of behavior in ... respect (to fertility and mortality) bore a strong resemblance to those which can be observed in many animals,&amp;quot; Wrigley, &#039;&#039;Population and History&#039;&#039; (1969), p. 37. Wrigley is writing about present-day hunting-gathering-fishing peoples. A &amp;quot;description of the relationship between animal social conventions and the regulation of animal population numbers&amp;quot; is &amp;quot;a convenient point of departure for the study of primitive man&amp;quot; (p. 37).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
177. Crone, &#039;&#039;Pre-Industrial Societies&#039;&#039; (1989), p. 153; Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties: The Causes and Consequences of the Rise of the West&#039;&#039; (1985), pp. 130-132; Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), pp. 3, 13-15, 217-19, 226-227, 231, and elsewhere; Laslett, &amp;quot;The European Family and Early Industrialization&amp;quot; (1989), pp. 235-240; Macfarlane, &amp;quot;The Cradle of Capitalism&amp;quot; (1988), chap. 14; Mann, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986), p. 408.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
178. Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties&#039;&#039; (1985), pp. 130-131.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
179. Laslett, &amp;quot;The European Family and Early Industrialization&amp;quot; (1989), p. 237.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
180. See Croot and Parker, &amp;quot;Agrarian Class Structure and the Development of Capitalism: France and England Compared&amp;quot; (1985). This essay, and others in the Aston and Philipin book, &#039;&#039;The Brenner Debate: Agrarian Class Structure and Economic Development in Pre-Industrial Europe&#039;&#039; (1985), discuss in detail the low level of landownership in medieval Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
181. Stone, &#039;&#039;The Family, Sex and Marriage in England, 1500-1800&#039;&#039; (1977), pp. 53-54.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
182. Stone, &#039;&#039;The Family, Sex and Marriage in England, 1500-1800&#039;&#039; (1977), p. 652.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= CHAPTER 3: Before 1492 =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this chapter and the following one I will argue three broad propositions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Prior to 1492, the progress toward modernization and capitalism which was taking place in parts of Europe was also taking place in parts of Asia and Africa. The basic process was hemispheric in scale. It was a process of change out of a precapitalist, agrarian form of class-structured society and toward a primitive form of capitalism. There was nothing teleological about this process; it was not some sort of evolutionary striving toward a foreordained goal, capitalist society. Merely, I argue, whatever happened in Europe also happened in other parts of the Eastern Hemisphere. I will use the word &amp;quot;feudalism&amp;quot; to describe the class-structured agrarian societies of Africa and Asia as well as Europe (and will give my reasons for using this word in this way). The later, emerging formation I will call &amp;quot;protocapitalism.&amp;quot; In 1492, it is likely that more than half of each continent in the Eastern Hemisphere was basically dominated by a feudal social formation. Protocapitalist centers were rising in various parts of all three continents, and were interconnected in a single web or network, stretching from western Europe to southern Africa to eastern Asia.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. This hemisphere-wide system began to break apart shortly after 1492, because of the wealth and power acquired by Europeans in America. America was conquered by Europeans, not by Asians or Africans, because of Europe&#039;s location on the globe, not because of any European superiority in level or rate of development or &amp;quot;potential&amp;quot; for development.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The massive flow of wealth into Europe from colonial accumulation in America and later in Asia and Africa was the one basic force that explains the fact that Europe became transformed rapidly into a capitalist society, and the complementary fact that Asian and African protocapitalist centers began to decline first in relative and then in absolute importance. Development began in Europe and underdevelopment began elsewhere. Many processes internal to Europe were important causes of change, of development, in that continent, but the one basic process, which ignited and then continuously fueled the transformation, was the wealth from colonialism.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first proposition is the topic of the present chapter; the second and third are the topics of Chapter 4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I will not and cannot demonstrate the truth of these propositions. I will simply present a substantial amount of evidence that supports them, and will show that the propositions fit in with other known facts in a coherent theory—a theory that, I suggest, makes sense. That is as far toward &amp;quot;demonstration of truth&amp;quot; as I can go, given the evidence of which I have knowledge and the amount of detailed argumentation that can be squeezed into this chapter. Some parts of this argument (such as the pre-1492 development of Africa) will theorize well beyond the available evidence, because, in my view, the facts needed to confirm or disconfirm these parts of the argument have not yet been obtained, have not yet been sought with sufficient diligence by diffusionist scholarship. For the most part, however, the theorizing will be grounded in strong empirical evidence. In addition to this evidence, there is the weight of evidence presented in the last chapter against various opposing theories, those that deny the importance of non-Europe before and after 1492. This has given us, so to speak, a level playing field for considering the issues to be discussed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Medieval Landscapes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before 1492, the various civilizations of Asia, Africa, and Europe were very different from one another in many ways, but they were very like one another in other ways. I believe that the ways in which they were different did not have significance for cultural evolution. In Chapter 2 I outlined various theories that claim that particular differences between Europe and other civilizations do explain the unique rise of Europe, and I tried to show that these theories are unconvincing. In the following discussion I will deal with some parts of culture that clearly are crucial for cultural evolution, and I will try to show that the patterns found in medieval Europe were not significantly different from the patterns found in other civilizations. I will argue that modes of production, class structures, systems of spatial exchange, and urbanization were broadly similar across many civilizations, were evolving in much the same way, and to some extent were parts of a common hemisphere-wide process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During the century or so preceding 1492, most of humanity lived in class-stratified agricultural societies. The great majority of people in these societies were peasant farmers, producing their own subsistence and forced to deliver a significant share of their output (or labor, or cash income) to an elite, or ruling class, a class that usually held claim to the land and almost always held both formal and real power over the peasants. What I have described here is a mode of production, that is, a complex of traits including material resources such as land, material culture (tools and the like), labor employed in production and distribution, social rules governing access to material resources and distribution of the output, and some related traits. For medieval Europe this mode of production is called &amp;quot;feudal.&amp;quot; It is part of a larger concept, &amp;quot;feudal society.&amp;quot; One of the important features of European feudal society was the nature of states and political power. Another was the culture of the landlord class, with its titles, its chivalry, and the rest. A third was the importance, in some regions and epochs, of serfdom. But underlying (or at any rate accompanying) these features was the general fact of feudalism as a mode of production, a landlord-peasant, class-stratified, agricultural society in which the landlord class was fed by surplus extracted (always with some degree of force) from peasant producers. This mode of production, with variations, was also a basic feature of almost all of the other class-stratified agricultural societies of the Eastern Hemisphere.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The discussion in this section of the chapter mainly deals with the Eastern Hemisphere. The Western Hemisphere will be discussed separately in Chapter 4.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; I will therefore use the term &amp;quot;feudal mode of production&amp;quot; for all such societies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Others have used the term in this way but have encountered various important objections. Those scholars who insist that the peculiarly European features are, indeed, the evolutionary engines of change will naturally reject the description of other sorts of society as &amp;quot;feudal.&amp;quot; Max Weber, for instance, thought that European feudal estates were unique and were crucial causes (or conditions) of progress. Those Marxists who consider serfdom to be a crucial feature in evolutionary terms would not want to use the term &amp;quot;feudalism&amp;quot; for societies that did not have serfdom (although many outside of Europe did).&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Dobbs, &#039;&#039;Studies in the Development of Capitalism&#039;&#039; (1947).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Samir Amin rejects this broad usage of the term &amp;quot;feudalism,&amp;quot; on the grounds that it tends to require of us that we use European feudalism as a model against which to measure other similar societies in other continents. Therefore, he prefers the term &amp;quot;tributary&amp;quot; to the term &amp;quot;feudal,&amp;quot; arguing, correctly, that the various forms of surplus extraction in this mode of production (tax and rent; cash, labor, and product) can be assimilated to the concept of tribute paying.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Amin, &#039;&#039;Unequal Development&#039;&#039; (1976) and &amp;quot;Modes of Production: History and Unequal Development&amp;quot; (1985).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; My view is that Eurocentric historians do not have a copyright on the term &amp;quot;feudalism&amp;quot; and so it is not only valid but also in a sense just to use this term for the mode of production wherever we observe it, in any continent and any social formation. There remain other objections. What of the small urbanized societies found here and there across the map during this period? We will come to this matter in a later section of the chapter. How should we describe societies that are very aberrant from the basic landlord-peasant model? What about class-stratified pastoral societies? What about the class-stratified societies in which there is kinship linkage between producing class and ruling class? These matters of definition are important and I will try to deal with them in the context of the discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are many unanswered questions about the origins and evolution both of agriculture and of the feudal mode of production. Until recently most scholars believed that agriculture, class stratification, and many other attributes of civilization had originated in the ancient Near and Middle East. (We discussed this in Chapter 1.) Given this set of propositions, combined with explicit and implicit beliefs about the cultural backwardness and unprogressiveness of Asians and Africans, it was almost axiomatic that the agricultural landscapes of feudal Europe must have attained a qualitatively higher level of development—or, alternatively, must have had greater potential for rapid change—than those of many parts, and perhaps all parts, of medieval Asia and Africa. It seemed logical to believe that agriculture as such was still in the process of diffusing outward in some peripheral parts of the hemisphere during that period. For instance, as we noted in Chapter 2, historians tended to believe that most of southern Africa was &amp;quot;preeagricultural&amp;quot; even in early modern times. Scholars speculated, and legitimately so given the basic model, as to the dates when agriculture in general, and each form of domesticated plant and animal in particular, had first reached each peripheral region in the general diffusion process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This model began to crumble fairly recently. Very early dates for the Agricultural (Neolithic) Revolution began to appear for parts of Southeast Asia, dates of perhaps 9,000 years ago (the generally accepted idea is that agriculture in the Middle East is 10-12,000 years old). Pottery seemed to be just about that old in northeastern Asia and Japan. Soon afterward, very early dates for agriculture emerged for India, New Guinea, and other regions. Today, although the majority view still seems to be that agriculture first arose in the Middle East, very many scholars believe otherwise. Many argue for independent and perhaps simultaneous origins in the Middle East and Southeast Asia; some would add West Africa. But it is also possible that the Agricultural Revolution occurred everywhere more or less at once. By this I mean that the complex of crops, animals, tools, and ideas was being developed in many societies simultaneously (probably over a very long period), and each new trait tended to diffuse rapidly to those other parts of the hemisphere in which such a trait was a useful innovation, in an overall process that I call &amp;quot;criss-cross diffusion.&amp;quot; This process gradually built up an agricultural landscape over a vast region of the hemisphere, extending (with unimportant gaps) across the entire swathe of tropical and midlatitude lands possessing moderately favorably climate and soil.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Kabaker, &amp;quot;A Radiocarbon Chronology Relevant to the Origins of Agriculture&amp;quot; (1977); Megaw, &#039;&#039;Hunters, Gatherers and First Farmers Beyond Europe&#039;&#039; (1977); Vishnu-Mittre, &amp;quot;Origin and History of Agriculture in the Indian Subcontinent&amp;quot; (1978). See the review in Blaut, &amp;quot;Diffusionism: A Uniformitarian Critique.&amp;quot; (1987a).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Blaut, &amp;quot;Diffusionism&amp;quot; (1987a).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In any event, it is now generally accepted that the diffusion of agriculture took place fairly long ago and by the Middle Ages agriculture had reached most of those regions in the Eastern Hemisphere in which environmental conditions are favorable for farming. Agriculture was still spreading at this time, but it could no longer be considered the Agricultural Revolution. Farming had been pushed poleward to a point not far short of its present latitudinal limits. In the Western Hemisphere the northern limit of maize in 1492 was not far south of the present limit of grain cultivation in central Canada. In both hemispheres almost all of the crops and livestock types that are important today had already been domesticated, although varietal improvement was still going on. As a generalization, it can be argued that each agricultural region had by this time selected for itself, from the long list of hemispheric domesticates, the combination of crops and stock best suited to its environmental conditions and cultures; most groups of related domesticated crop forms in any one part of the hemisphere were also known in many other parts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One very dramatic bit of evidence in this matter was the swift spread of Western Hemisphere crops through the Eastern Hemisphere after 1492. This extremely rapid diffusion of maize, cassava, tobacco, sweet potato, white potato, and other crops, and the rapid way in which these domesticates became culturally important, shows how rapidly the diffusion of domesticates would occur when the process was one of the diffusion of previously unknown innovations: we can assume that most Eastern Hemisphere domesticates were no longer diffusing very rapidly. Where agriculture was spreading, it was taking place mainly in peripheral zones such as highlands, some forested regions, and remote islands, as a result mainly of social processes like migration, conquest, and land shortage.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Examples of this process include the eastward movement of the medieval agricultural frontier in the forests of eastern Europe and the reclaiming of swampland in Iraq. Cropland was being expanded in these and other ways in many regions. In addition, it seems certain that some societies that had not previously practiced agriculture were being pushed into smaller or less favorable regions and therefore were turning to agriculture as a means of increasing food production to meet the land shortage.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In the years before 1492, agriculture was practiced, from southern Africa to northern Europe, northern Asia, southeastern Asia, and most regions of the Pacific Ocean, including Hawaii. For the most part, cultures we would describe as &amp;quot;nonagricultural&amp;quot; had chosen not to practice farming; they were not, therefore, &amp;quot;preeagricultural.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See R. Lee, &amp;quot;Art, Science, or Politics? The Crisis in Hunter-Gatherer Studies&amp;quot; (1992).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Probably the same holds true for the more complex forms of agricultural technology. The knowledge of irrigation, the plow, the use of fertilizers, complex rotations (including fallowless rotations), and other features of intensive agriculture had probably diffused by this time to all those parts of the agricultural landscape where farmers found it desirable to use them, either to increase output, to reduce labor requirements, to meet the demand for surplus delivery, or for any cultural reason whatever.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Water-control systems in farming, including irrigation, drainage, broad-based terracing, raised- or drained-field construction, and natural-levee adaptations are probably as old as agriculture itself, because (1) all farmers everywhere know the problem of moisture control (adding moisture when there is deficit; removing moisture when there is a surplus and a danger of root drowning); (2) all of these procedures are initially small-scale actions taken on an individual farm (recall our discussion in Chapter 2 of the fallacies of the &amp;quot;hydraulic theory&amp;quot;); and (3) there is direct archaeological evidence of very ancient (9,000-year-old) drainage systems in New Guinea (Golson, &amp;quot;No room at the top: Agricultural intensification in the New Guinea Highlands,&amp;quot; 1977), and drained- or raised-field systems in tropical America (Denevan, &amp;quot;Hydraulic Agriculture in the American Tropics: Forms, Measures, and Recent Research,&amp;quot; 1982). Thus we can infer the primitivity of irrigation and these other water-management systems: probably they are as old as the Neolithic, along with drainage and raised-field systems. All this shows that intensive technology had already diffused insofar as it was going to do so, and nonadoption reflected something other than lack of information. As we noted in Chapter 2, irrigation systems diffuse as a social process, associated with class society. Concerning the myth that the plow was not used in Africa, see Hopkins, &#039;&#039;An Economic History of West Africa&#039;&#039; (1973) and Onimode, &#039;&#039;Imperialism and Underdevelopment in Nigeria&#039;&#039; (1982). Note that plows are used in tropical agriculture very sparingly—mainly for some operations in rice paddies.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; I would take the argument even a step farther. Throughout most of this landscape the diffusion of significant innovations had gone so far that the productivity of human labor was hardly ever limited by lack of technical knowledge of a kind available to other farmers in some other part of the hemisphere.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In classless societies, I speculate that the bundle of choices concerning crops, tools, field systems, labor input, and the like, led to roughly a common level of output per person, unaffected by differences in environmental quality over a great range of environments. In some areas very extensive systems like shifting cultivation would be used; in others, intensive systems, like wet-rice cultivation, would be used. But the productivity of labor in terms of product per hour input would tend to be about the same in this model for both intensive and extensive systems. This would hold true if two assumptions are accepted: (1) that rapid and thorough diffusion had taken place, and (2) that population was controlled by farming peoples so as to optimize the situation concerning output and leisure time. None of this would be true in a class society, where the constraints on technology and labor use are influenced profoundly by the demands and power of the ruling class.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; But this is speculation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Agricultural societies are not always class stratified. But there is abundant evidence that most agricultural regions across the hemisphere displayed, in this period, a combination of agriculture and the landlord-peasant system of stratification, thus a mode of production I label &amp;quot;feudal.&amp;quot; This point will be contested on two grounds. One of the objections, commonly heard from (some) Marxists, argues that medieval non-European agricultural modes of production were somehow lacking in the potential for change that we associate with the European feudal mode. This argument (the &amp;quot;Asiatic mode of production,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;Oriental despotism,&amp;quot; etc.) was discussed sufficiently in Chapter 2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second difficulty is a matter of the spatial pattern. Where, on the map of the medieval Eastern Hemisphere, do we find class-stratified agricultural societies, and where do we find classless agricultural societies? The answer must be given in two parts. First, we know beyond dispute that the class-stratified mode was dominant in nearly all agricultural regions of Asia, with clear patterns of landlord-peasant conflict. Arguments tend to focus on Africa. But there is little doubt that the landlord-peasant exploitative relation was dominant in much of northeastern Africa (for example, Ethiopia), the Sudanic zone from the Atlantic east beyond Lake Chad, some parts of the Lake Region of East Africa, southeastern Africa around the Zimbabwe imperial zone, and part of coastal East Africa. It is now known, also, that many of the forest-zone and dry-forest-zone states of West and Central Africa (Akan, Yoruba, Congo, and so forth), displayed this mode of production or something very like it, and research on the historical geography of this large region has just, in essence, begun.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See, for example, Kea, &#039;&#039;Settlements, Trade, and Politics in the Seventeenth Century Gold Coast&#039;&#039; (1982); Isichei, &#039;&#039;A History of Nigeria&#039;&#039; (1983); Rodney, &#039;&#039;A History of the Upper Guinea Coast 1545-1800&#039;&#039; (1970); A. Smith, &amp;quot;The Early States of the Central Sudan&amp;quot; (1971); Usman, &#039;&#039;The Transformation of Katsina (1400-1883)&#039;&#039; (1981).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Therefore the map of the feudal mode of production in Africa is very extensive. Second, I would argue (following Samir Amin) that nearly all state-organized societies were class societies, that the medieval state functioned in a tight relationship to the exploitative process and ruling-class politics. More than half of medieval Africa, in terms of area and population, was state-organized and therefore, I reason, more or less class stratified. I conclude, from this very sketchy examination of the medieval spatial patterns of agriculture, technically complex agriculture, and class, that the feudal mode of production dominated more than half of Africa, Europe, and Asia, and some parts of Oceania, in this period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ruling class in feudal societies is, almost everywhere, a landlord class, although the control of land by this class may take any of several legal forms. Some members of this class are bedecked with titles, but the distinction between nobility and gentry is not crucial in evolutionary terms and both forms (as well as others) were widespread across the hemisphere.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Blaut, &amp;quot;Colonialism and the Rise of Capitalism&amp;quot; (1989). It is also true that in all these societies there were parallel high-status groups, clergy, bureaucrats, military people, and so on, but there seems not to have been any case of a large, clearly feudal society—I exclude a few cases of small urbanized power centers in dry, pastoral regions, and a few large cities—in which wealth and status was clearly divorced from land ownership and from the surplus extracted from peasants.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; This class is, after all, self-perpetuating, and it may use inherited titles as a signal of class membership or it may use other devices to the same effect, or both. Indeed, membership in the nontitled gentry may, as in China at various times, improve a family&#039;s chances of retaining ruling-class status and wealth amid the changing winds of state politics. Nor is the distinction critical, in this context, between higher and lower grades of nobility, and between landlords and government officials (who likewise derive their wealth from land). As we discussed in Chapters 1 and 2, there is no substance to the traditional view that the European medieval landlord class somehow was closer to pure private land ownership than were the landlord classes of other places. Marx was wrong in accepting this traditional view, because he knew little about non-European class structures. Weber, likewise, was wrong in drawing a sharp distinction between the supposedly European pattern of seigneurial tenure, with land held firmly by the landlord under some sort of arrangement with higher-order lords and kings, and the &amp;quot;service tenures&amp;quot; which he thought to be characteristic of most other societies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The distinction between hereditary and service tenures is very fuzzy. In Europe, service tenure was the typical form in strict terms (with grants conditional upon pledges of fealty, military support, etc.), but grants tended to become hereditary. Broadly, the same held true in other societies. Holders of fiefs or grants on service tenure might move from fief to fief (or hold a changing portfolio of fiefs), but the important point is that class membership permitted one to hold a fief, and to draw one&#039;s wealth from it (and its occupants), so long as one retained membership in the ruling class. In a crucial sense, property is private so long as an individual or kin group continues to hold valid control, and this was the case in many regions, in spite of periodic upheavals and replacements. But land can be called private in another sense, that of its value in a land market. But this implies a basically (or nearly) capitalist situation, found only in a few highly commercialized rural regions, European and non-European, before 1492.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Apparently such private (saleable) ownership of agricultural land was found mainly near important urban areas, ports, mining areas, etc. See Rawski, &#039;&#039;Agricultural Change and the Peasant Economy of South China&#039;&#039; (1972); Das Gupta, &#039;&#039;Malabar in Asian Trade: 1740-1800&#039;&#039; (1967); Nicholas, &amp;quot;Town and Countryside: Social and Economic Tensions in 14th Century Flanders&amp;quot; (1967-1968); Kea, &#039;&#039;Settlements, Trade, and Politics in the Seventeenth-Century Gold Coast&#039;&#039; (1982); Rodney, &#039;&#039;A History of the Upper Guinea Coast&#039;&#039; (1970); Usman, &#039;&#039;The Transformation of Katsina&#039;&#039; (1981); Sherif, &#039;&#039;Slaves, Spices and Ivory in Zanzibar&#039;&#039; (1987).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The Chinese gentry, the Hindu fief-holders, even the Mughal jagirdars who had been granted fiefs on service tenure and quickly farmed them out, or converted them into private, saleable property, were well along the road to private ownership, and had gone at least as far as their European counterparts.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;On the importance of hereditary fiefs and landed property in Asia, see, for example, Elvin, &#039;&#039;The Pattern of the Chinese Past&#039;&#039; (1973); Sharma, &#039;&#039;Indian Feudalism, c. 300-1200&#039;&#039; (1965); Fei Hsiao-tung, &#039;&#039;China&#039;s Gentry&#039;&#039; (1953); Fu and Li, &#039;&#039;The Sprouts of Capitalistic Factors Within China&#039;s Feudal Society&#039;&#039; (1956); Rawski, &#039;&#039;Agricultural Change and the Peasant Economy of South China&#039;&#039; (1972); Tung, &#039;&#039;An Outline History of China&#039;&#039; (1979); Liceria, &amp;quot;Emergence of Brahmans as Landed Intermediaries in Karnataka, c. A.D. 1000-1300 (1974); Mahalingam, &#039;&#039;Economic Life in the Vijayanagar Empire&#039;&#039; (1951); Hasan, &amp;quot;The Position of the Zamindars in the Mughal Empire (1969); Raychaudhuri, &amp;quot;The Agrarian System of Mughal India&amp;quot; (1965); Yadav, &amp;quot;Secular Land Grants of the Post-Gupta Period and Some Aspects of the Growth of the Feudal Complex in Northern India&amp;quot; (1966). For Africa south of the Sahara (for which there is as yet only fragmentary evidence), see, for example, A. Smith, &amp;quot;The Early States of the Central Sudan&amp;quot; (1971); Mabogunji, &amp;quot;The Land and Peoples of West Africa&amp;quot; (1971); Kea, &#039;&#039;Settlements, Trade, and Politics in the Seventeenth-Century Gold Coast&#039;&#039; (1982); Isichei, &#039;&#039;A History of Nigeria&#039;&#039; (1983); Onimode, &#039;&#039;Imperialism and Underdevelopment in Nigeria&#039;&#039; (1982); FRELIMO, &#039;&#039;Historia de Mozambique&#039;&#039; (1971); Rodney, &#039;&#039;A History of the Upper Guinea Coast&#039;&#039; (1970); and Usman, &#039;&#039;The Transformation of Katsina&#039;&#039; (1981).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The European feudal-era landlord class was not more advanced, more ready (as it were) for capitalism and modernity, than the landlord classes in many other regions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The so-called European manorial system is sometimes said to have been a distinguishing feature of feudalism, a peculiarly European giant step toward private ownership and large-scale labor use, something largely absent from non-European areas and critical in the evolution toward capitalism. Large estates were widespread across the hemisphere, but the special organizational form of demesne farming by unpaid peasant labor was found in fewer areas. The manorial system in the narrow sense of the term, including coordinated demesne farming with corvée labor in gangs as well as peasant holdings, and with some manufacture along with agricultural production on the manor, was found in several areas outside of Europe. It was important in China and in southern India.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;On the manorial system of China, see Elvin, &#039;&#039;The Pattern of the Chinese Past&#039;&#039; (1973). For India, see Gopal, &amp;quot;Quasi-Manorial Rights in Ancient India&amp;quot; (1963); Mahalingam, &#039;&#039;Economic Life in the Vijayanagar Empire&#039;&#039; (1951); Yadav, &amp;quot;Secular Land Grants of the Post-Gupta Period&amp;quot; (1966); Yadav, &amp;quot;Immobility and Subjugation of Indian Peasantry in Early Medieval Complex&amp;quot; (1974). Indian historians recognize important differences between the Indian and European forms of the manor, however. In early Indian feudalism manorial labor had some of the characteristics of serfs, some of wage laborers, and some of tenant farmers. Early Indian feudal estates also seem to have been less autarkic and insulated than the stereotypical European manor.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; But demesne farming was not dominant throughout Europe (it was uncommon in the Mediterranean zone), bore no resemblance to capitalist agriculture, and in any case had nearly died out in western Europe by the fourteenth century. Hence the relatively stronger development of this trait in Europe than most other regions (such as northern India) cannot account for the transition, much later, to capitalism in one area and not the others.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Related to this question is the old European misdefinition of Indian villages, unfortunately accepted by Marx, as closed, corporate entities (hence, for Marx, as survivals of primitive communal society). The medieval Indian village did indeed have corporate characteristics; it did have communal control of usufruct (though not, apparently, communal ownership); and it did display the tight combination of farming and handicrafts which Marx found to be highly significant and seemed, to him, to explain the cohesiveness of the village, its ability to remain unchanged in the face of external shocks from colonial capitalism, yet, by the same token, to resist social transformation. But European villages also retained certain corporate characteristics, perhaps even more pronounced than those of Hindu villages, where caste communities correlated very poorly with village settlement patterns.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Marx&#039;s view is set forth in &amp;quot;The British rule in India&amp;quot; (1979). Irfan Habib, in part following Kosambi (both are Marxists), writes of &amp;quot;the creation of the traditional Indian village, closed and self-sufficient&amp;quot; (my emphasis) between 200 B.C. and 650 A.D., in a process involving &amp;quot;ruralization of crafts&amp;quot; and somewhat planned settlement of landless people in villages: Habib, in &amp;quot;The Social Distribution of Landed Property in Pre-British India&amp;quot; (1965).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In this matter we may be confronting the classic error of telescoping history, perceiving the breakup of the European village after the rise of capitalism, and assuming therefore that these villages had been dissolving as corporate entities many centuries earlier. Furthermore, communal land ownership was relatively unimportant in this period for both India and Europe; the villages normally held only delegated rights (including the right to common land), which could be and sometimes were violated by landlords. The true owners of most of the productive land, holders of hereditary and transferrable estates, were, in both areas, the ruling class. Finally, the combination of agriculture and handicrafts was also present in European villages.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;On the unity of agriculture and handicraft industry in medieval European villages, see, for example, Sylvia Thrupp, &amp;quot;Medieval Industry 1000-1500&amp;quot; (1972).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Apparently it dissolved well after 1492 with the rise of capitalism. In sum, although Indian feudalism was in no sense identical to the European variety (or varieties), it bore the same general characteristics as a mode of production and the same potential for evolution toward capitalism. This argument can probably be made also for many regions of Asia and Africa. The medieval European village seems not to have been very unusual among the array of village settlement and social forms across the hemisphere.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The producing class in feudalism consists, usually, of peasants, who farm the landlord&#039;s estate in household-scale units and provide labor, produce, or cash as rent. Serfdom is often thought to be the characteristic labor form of feudalism, on the European model.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Dobb, &#039;&#039;Studies in the Development of Capitalism&#039;&#039; (1947).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Serfs of the basically European sort were indeed found here and there in Africa and Asia, although the specific history of enserfment in late-Roman Europe was unique and its legal form was rarely encountered elsewhere. What we find, rather, is a panorama of forms of unfree labor, that is, labor of peasants tied somehow to the landlord&#039;s estate, through all three continents.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Serfdom was not characteristic of all parts of medieval Europe. On unfree labor in Asia and Africa, see, for example, Yadava, &amp;quot;Immobility and Subjugation of Indian Peasantry in Early Medieval Complex&amp;quot; (1974); Levitzion, &amp;quot;The Early States of the Western Sudan to 1500&amp;quot; (1972); Elvin, &#039;&#039;The Pattern of the Chinese Past&#039;&#039; (1973).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; On the other hand, some scholars (among them Brenner, a Marxist, and Baechler, a conservative) rather idealize the European peasant of the fourteenth and fifteenth centuries in western Europe and see in that person a freehold farmer, imbued with the entrepreneurial spirit and so forth.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Brenner and critics in Aston and Philpin, &#039;&#039;The Brenner Debate: Agrarian Class Structure and Economic Development in Pre-Industrial Europe&#039;&#039; (1988); Brenner, &amp;quot;The Origins of Capitalist Development: A Critique of Neo-Smithian Marxism.&amp;quot; (1977); Baechler, &amp;quot;The Origins of Modernity: Caste and Feudality (India, Europe and Japan).&amp;quot; (1988). See comments on Brenner and Baechler in Chapter 2 above.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; This is again a telescoping of history. Those peasants were tenants, still tied to estates in manifold ways; not until later times, well after 1492, was there a strong emergence of an important freehold, capital-accumulating, kulak-style class, ready for rural capitalism. The European peasant was not particularly unusual. Peasants who were forced to give labor service, or product, or cash, as rent or tribute or tax (paid to the landlord), who were not free to move from the landlord&#039;s domain, and whose status was inherited by later generations, were found in many parts of medieval Asia and Africa as well as Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There was a measure of interconnectedness among the feudal agricultural societies, enough to suggest that we should think of the whole hemisphere-wide zone of class-based agricultural societies not as separate social entities but as a single feudal landscape with regional variations that sometimes included sharp boundaries and sometimes did not. Clearly there was a great deal of criss-cross diffusion among these regions, as evidence, for instance, the commonality of agricultural techniques over large areas. (The claim made by some European historians,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;including Lynn White, Jr. in &#039;&#039;Medieval Technology and Social Change&#039;&#039; (1968); Michael Mann, &amp;quot;European Development: Approaching a Historical Explanation&amp;quot; (1988); Perry Anderson, &#039;&#039;Lineages of the Absolute State&#039;&#039; (1974).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; that medieval European agriculture was unique in technological level and thus somehow ignited progress toward capitalism, is invalid, as we discussed in Chapter 2. European agriculture shared most traits with other regions and was not uniquely advanced or peculiarly pregnant with social change.) It seems likely that the evolution of feudalism over much of the hemispheric landscape involved a steady deepening of the oppression on peasants, as more and more surplus was demanded, and the response by peasants included technological development and borrowing (diffusion), as well as migration toward peripheral regions and toward towns. At the same time, the ruling classes, as they exhausted the potential of their own subjects to increase surplus delivery, tried to conquer and exploit other communities of producers, to acquire external as well as internal fields of exploitation, and this also led to further interconnectedness of regions.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Blaut, &#039;&#039;The National Question&#039;&#039; (1987b), chap. 7.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Yet, at the same time, feudal ruling class communities were united in webs of kinship, or bureaucracy, or caste, which sometimes extended over very large areas. We know that the neat parcelling of societies into nation-states did not exist in those times, that language regions were ill-defined and language barriers of little significance, even that religious differences did not set up barriers to the movement of ideas, things, and people. Thus we should think of all (or most) feudal societies as sharing a common space, through which social forces and pressures diffused in all directions, over great distances, easily crossing the boundaries of states. Given this conception, it is not difficult to understand why the general evolution of feudalism as a mode of production was proceeding in about the same way over much of the hemisphere.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the late Middle Ages there were signs of profound change in many agricultural regions of all three continents. There were indications of two sorts: signs of decay, or even imminent collapse, in the feudal system, and signs of change toward commercialized agriculture and toward rural capitalism. Throughout much of the hemisphere, the mode of production appears to have been in a state of decay, and we find increasing exactions, peasant revolts, migrations to agricultural frontiers and towns, intense warfare among ruling classes for access to producer populations, and more. By the fourteenth century, feudalism had entered a stage of crisis—although not of collapse—in Europe, but it appears that there were similar crises in parts of Asia and probably—as we will doubtless learn from further research—Africa.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;For India, see, for example, A. Chicherov, &amp;quot;On the Multiplicity of Socio-Economic Structures in India in the Seventeenth and Eighteenth Century&amp;quot; (1976); I. Habib, &amp;quot;Problems of Marxist Historical Analysis&amp;quot; (1969); S. Gopal, Nobility and the Mercantile Community in India&amp;quot; (1972); Radhakamal Mukherjee, &#039;&#039;The Economic History of India, 1600-1800&#039;&#039; (1967); Ramkrishna Mukherjee, &#039;&#039;The Rise and Fall of the East India Company&#039;&#039; (1958); Jha, &#039;&#039;Studies in the Development of Capitalism in India&#039;&#039; (1963); Nurul Hasan, &amp;quot;The Silver Currency Output of the Mughal Empire and Prices in India During the 16th and 17th Centuries&amp;quot; (1969); Yadava, &amp;quot;Immobility and Subjugation of Indian Peasantry in Early Medieval Complex&amp;quot; (1974). For West Africa, see Kea, &#039;&#039;Settlements, Trade, and Politics in the Seventeenth-Century Gold Coast&#039;&#039; (1982). For China, see Harrison, &#039;&#039;The Communists and Chinese Peasant Rebellions&#039;&#039; (1969); Parsons, &#039;&#039;Peasant Rebellions in the Late Ming Dynasty&#039;&#039; (1970); Fu and Li, &#039;&#039;The Sprouts of Capitalistic Factors Within China&#039;s Feudal Society&#039;&#039; (1956).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In all three continents there was a movement of peasants to the towns, perhaps at roughly comparable rates. In no large region, European or non-European, could this have become a flood of rural-urban migrants, since urban population was still a small percentage of total population everywhere at the end of the fifteenth century. Still, it was an effect of crises in the rural areas. Whether these crises were indications that the mode of production was truly near collapse, and this from internal contradictions, perhaps cannot as yet be decided, but in any case feudalism in Europe was no closer to its final demise, prior to 1492, than were the feudalism of many extra-European regions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At this point in the argument, a disclaimer and a speculation. I am not arguing that the landlord-peasant mode of production had somehow gone through its allotted historical span and was about to collapse, or to transform itself into capitalism. The question whether capitalism had its earliest growth in an urban setting or a rural setting is a very complex one indeed; I will discuss the matter further below but I do not propose any sort of general historical theory of causation. I will argue only that the transition, or decay, or whatever one wants to call it, was far from complete in 1492, and the wealth from America precipitated the rise of capitalism and, simultaneously, the final decay of the feudal mode of production in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I speculate as follows: Given our overall model of an extremely rapid criss-cross diffusion of the cultural traits of agriculture (crops, stock, tools, water-management systems, etc.), and given the parallel conception of tight and intricate interlacing among class-organized agricultural societies in the medieval Eastern Hemisphere, one would expect that the general growth and evolution of the class-stratified agricultural form of society would proceed in a relatively even manner from one region to the next, as traits diffused, as social pressures were transmitted in space by migration, conquest, and the like, as ruling-class alliances proliferated, and so on. Perhaps the evolution of this feudal mode of production was everywhere conditioned by one common social fact: the steady and unrelenting demand of the landlord class and its allies (merchants, nobility, etc.) for more and more wealth, a demand that translated into constant pressure on peasants to increase production so that they could increase delivery of surplus. I view this as a long-term secular trend that led to specific responses in the peasant sector, including technological development, criss-cross diffusion of technology, asserting and pioneering, peasant revolts, rural-urban migration, participation in ruling-class military adventures, and more. I speculate, then, that these mechanisms evened out the social tensions that were created in many places by the increasing ruling-class demand for delivery of surplus. This would allow us to argue that, if the mode of production was in decay or in crisis in one part of the hemisphere, very likely the same was the case in many other parts of the hemisphere. In a word: the mode of production rose and then ebbed on a hemispheric scale, and what was happening in Europe in 1492 was also happening in Africa and Asia.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But why would we expect the feudal mode of production to decay or decline? This is the final point of speculation. We cannot assert simply that feudalism is a &amp;quot;stage&amp;quot; of evolution, and must eventually give way to the next, higher &amp;quot;stage&amp;quot; of evolution (capitalism), as some mechanistic Marxists argue. Nor can we accept the conservative form of this argument, which sees feudalism giving way to a higher and more &amp;quot;modern&amp;quot; form of society (capitalism) as a result of humanity&#039;s inevitable forward progress, social, intellectual, and moral. Nor can we invoke a Malthusian force of inevitably heightening population pressure (a thesis which was shown to be false in Chapter 2, on grounds mainly that human cultures always control their demographic behavior, more or less rationally). I would propose the following explanatory model. There are two essential facts about this form of society: first, the fact of family-scale farming as a way of life; second, the fact of a landlord class extracting, or trying to extract, an ever-increasing absolute surplus from farmers. Peasant farmers respond to this pressure in many ways, as we noted above. They certainly try to increase their population so long as each additional human being in the community can produce the requisite surplus, that is, contribute labor which yields more production than is needed for consumption by the incremental member of the community and for that individual&#039;s contribution to surplus delivery. Certainly they try to add additional land for cultivation, and sometimes try to move to another location, seeking agricultural or other land. But mainly they intensify. That is, they increase agricultural productivity by continuously experimenting with new crop varieties, new tools, new techniques, and they are ever on the alert for news about innovations that have been tried successfully elsewhere—in the next village, the next valley, the next island.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process of technological improvement has no limit, but a point will be reached when the rate of increase in labor productivity declines, generation by generation, century by century. Doubtless the rate was at its highest during the period when many new crops and stock types were being domesticated at a rapid rate, and when the main tools, and iron, were being brought into the system. By the Middle Ages, the rate of improvement overall would have declined to a level insufficient to permit farmers to meet the landlords&#039; incremental demands for surplus. If we set aside some of the alternative responses, such as pioneering and rural-urban migration, which must have been available in some regions but not in others, we are left with the following situation: a general crisis in the feudal mode of production.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now this discussion has been grounded in one assumption: that improvements in agricultural production are taking place through innovations mainly on the farm itself. This is largely the case for family-scale farming in medieval and premedieval times. Of course, production is also improved by importing water and nutrients into the farm through irrigation or drainage. And always there is some off-the-farm sale or other exchange of products, and sale or exchange of products from the farm for inputs like fertilizer, seed, and labor. So the individual peasant farm, or family farm, is a relatively but not absolutely self-contained microgeographic system. We know very well, and farmers in those days also knew very well, that the best strategy for engineering a dramatic increase in production from a microgeographic system like the peasant farm is to integrate it more fully into a larger, macrogeographic system. Mainly this involves increasing the input of water and fertility elements, like lime and manure, and changing the pattern of crops and stock from one which must primarily feed the farm family to one which can involve some specialization in products that are saleable and that are well-suited to the ecological conditions of the farm. (This would commonly mean some specialization in one or a few food products, which are both sold and consumed, or specialization in an industrial product, like cotton.) When, today, we speak of the &amp;quot;agricultural revolution&amp;quot; of recent centuries, we are describing a revolution at this macrogeographic level: modern family farms import huge amounts of fertility; they import (purchase) many tools, pesticides, and like elements which are produced elsewhere; they use substantial amounts of nonfamily labor; and they specialize in ways that (sometimes) involve ecological optimization. This list pretty much exhausts the revolutionary changes that occurred prior to the present century, and it suggests that internal, microgeographic improvements—which never ceased to take place—played a secondary role at this stage in the development of agriculture.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For these macrogeographic improvements to take place there must be a high level of commercialization of farming, because moving things into and out of the farm microsystem (or at any rate the village microsystem) is mainly a process of buying and selling. It would seem to follow that a general crisis of the feudal mode of production would have one of two possible outcomes. One of these is a relatively smooth transition to an economy in which there is massive off-the-farm cash demand for farm products and supply of purchasable inputs, along with cash payment of rent (or payment on shares to a landlord who then markets the share for cash). This scenario takes place in a landscape in which there is a large nonagricultural population, hence a landscape that is either urbanizing or participating in major long-distance trade. Stated differently: the crisis can be met if commercialization and urbanization are taking place. Alternatively, there can be revolutionary changes of another sort: peasant revolts, either mild (such as withholding of rent) or violent, major cultural transformation in social, political, or religious life, or something else equally revolutionary. Perhaps both alternatives must occur in some combination for the crisis to be resolved. I conclude that the rather clear pattern in which feudal contradictions intensify, as a result of increasing demands for surplus and decreasing ability of farm families to increase the level of surplus, must lead to a revolutionary change of some sort. Most of the changes that I have mentioned did, in fact, occur in Europe in the late Middle Ages and involved the overthrow of feudalism as a political and social system and its replacement by the modern system after the model of England&#039;s &amp;quot;Glorious Revolution.&amp;quot; But I am not arguing that this rural set of processes explains the rise of capitalism. Certainly it contributed to the rise of capitalism, and specifically to the processes of increasing urbanization and increasing long-distance commodity movements which characterized the late Middle Ages throughout the hemisphere, processes which I label &amp;quot;protocapitalist,&amp;quot; and which we discuss in the following section of this chapter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Protocapitalism in Asia, Africa, and Europe ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I use the word &amp;quot;protocapitalism&amp;quot; not to introduce a technical term but to avoid the problem of defining another term, &amp;quot;capitalism.&amp;quot; Obviously, the kind of economic system that we ordinarily think of as capitalist did not exist in the Middle Ages; we are dealing with its forebear, which (as I will argue) exhibited most of the basic traits of capitalism, but on a spatially and socially small scale, and generally within, or on the edge of, a much larger, dominant economic system associated with the feudal mode of production. Protocapitalism, therefore, is incipient capitalism, or near-capitalism, or adolescent capitalism. It is the system as it existed prior to the two revolutionary transformations which brought modern capitalism into existence. The first of these was the political transformation which is usually, and conventionally, called &amp;quot;the bourgeois revolution&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;bourgeois revolutions&amp;quot;—the creation of large polities that were dominated, not by the feudal landlord class, but by an elite of townsmen (burghers, bourgeoisie) and their entrepreneurial allies in the countryside. The most famous example, and in a way the defining case, was Britain&#039;s &amp;quot;Glorious Revolution&amp;quot; of 1688, and I will use the date 1688 as the symbol or token for the political triumph of capitalism. The second transformation was, of course, the Industrial Revolution, which did not really begin in a big way until the last quarter of the eighteenth century. In Chapter 4 we will examine the role played by colonialism and non-Europe in both of these transformations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In all three continents we find relatively small rural regions (they were generally hinterlands of major port cities) along with a few highly commercialized agricultural and mining regions, which were clearly being penetrated by capitalism—were protocapitalist—in the period just prior to 1492. Among these were Flanders, southeastern England, northern Italy, sugar-planting regions of Morocco, the Nile valley, the Gold Coast, Kilwa, Sofala (and hypothetically part of Zimbabwe), Malabar, Coromandel, Bengal, northern Java, and south-coastal China. Land was owned by commerce-minded landlords or by urban protocapitalists.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Appadorai, &#039;&#039;Economic Conditions in Southern India&#039;&#039; (1936); Elvin, &#039;&#039;The Pattern of the Chinese Past&#039;&#039; (1974); Nicholas, &amp;quot;Town and Countryside: Social and Economic Tensions in 14th Century Flanders&amp;quot; (1967-1968), pp. 458-485; Rawski, &#039;&#039;Agricultural Change and the Peasant Economy of South China&#039;&#039; (1972); T. Raychaudhuri, &#039;&#039;Jan Company in Coromandel&#039;&#039; (1962).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Rents were generally paid in cash except in those areas, like Fukien, where more money profit could be extracted by landlords if they collected the farm produce and sold it themselves.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Rawski, &#039;&#039;Agricultural Change and the Peasant Economy of South China&#039;&#039; (1972).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Agricultural production was organized in various ways, ranging from peasant-scale farming to plantations, and very significant quantities of a number of agricultural products were grown, sold, and exported: rice, cotton, sugar, pepper, etc. Industrial production was spreading out into the countryside in all three continents: the early putting-out system was actually de-urbanizing industry in northwestern Europe, as the control by guilds became loosened; probably the same was occurring in parts of Asia and Africa (where merchant and artisan guilds were also well developed and strong in the Middle Ages).&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Appadorai, &#039;&#039;Economic Conditions in Southern India&#039;&#039; (1936); Gernet, &#039;&#039;Daily Life in China on the Eve of the Mongol Invasion&#039;&#039; (1962); Habib, &amp;quot;Problems of Marxist Historical Analysis&amp;quot; (1969); Mahalingam, &#039;&#039;Economic Life in the Vijayanagar Empire&#039;&#039; (1951); K. Nilikanta Sastri, &#039;&#039;A History of South India&#039;&#039; (1966); Tung, &#039;&#039;An Outline History of China&#039;&#039; (1979); Kea, &#039;&#039;Settlements, Trade, and Politics in the Seventeenth-Century Gold Coast&#039;&#039; (1982), Sherif, &#039;&#039;Slaves, Spices and Ivory in Zanzibar&#039;&#039; (1987).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Over a much broader area, commodity production had fully penetrated the agricultural economy, and it is extremely doubtful whether west European peasant agriculture was more highly commercialized than that of many parts of China and India, as well as some other extra-European regions. Probably we can assume that level of urbanization is a good comparative indicator of level of agricultural commercialization for this period, since it must represent the main off-the-farm demand for agricultural products. By this measure, Chinese and Indian agriculture would have been more highly commercialized than European agriculture, because a larger percentage of total population was urban in those regions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cities dotted the landscape from northern Europe to southern Africa to eastern Asia. Some of these cities were seats of power for major feudal societies. Others were socially and geographically marginal to these societies, and were usually to be found along sea coasts, where they had mainly an interstitial relationship to the larger feudal societies, moving and trading goods among them and producing manufactured commodities for them. Probably it would be incorrect to speak of two distinct classes of urban place, internal and marginal (or peripheral), because many variations and gradations existed, and also because the internal, seat-of-power cities were in many cases also major centers for intersocietal trade and for nonagricultural production. Nevertheless, we can distinguish a special group of cities that were strongly oriented toward manufacturing and trade, were more or less marginal to powerful feudal states (some were within these states; some were small city-dominated states or even city-states), and were heavily engaged in long-distance maritime trade. Cities of this sort stretched around all of the coasts of western Europe, the Mediterranean, East Africa, and South, Southeast, and East Asia. In these cities the mode of production could probably be best described as incipient capitalism, protocapitalism—certainly it was not feudalism—with wageworkers being, apparently, the largest working-class sector, merchants, merchant-landlords, or merchant-manufacturers the ruling class, and economic activity a mixture of trade (movement of commodities, banking, and so on), manufacture (both large- and small-scale), and commercial agriculture.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some of these mercantile-maritime cities were quite small, others quite large, but it appears that most of them were at roughly the same level in the development of protocapitalist institutions, classes, and technology. This is not surprising since they were intimately connected to one another in a tight network of trade, along which ideas, techniques, goods, and people flowed in all directions, in constant criss-cross diffusion.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Blaut, &amp;quot;Where Was Capitalism Born?&amp;quot; (1976).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; (For example: Malacca, when the Portuguese first arrived, was trading with the Mediterranean, Inner Asia, East Africa, the Middle East, India, China, and probably Japan as well as all of Southeast Asia. The chronicler Tome Pires assures us that, at the beginning of the sixteenth century, 84 different languages are spoken in that city, and, boosting its importance for the Portuguese, asserts that &amp;quot;whoever is lord of Malacca has his hand on the throat of Venice.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Pires, &#039;&#039;The Suma Oriental&#039;&#039; (1944 edition).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; A second example from a much earlier period: the Tenasserim port of Kalah, in the tenth century, was trading with China and Arabia. According to Ibn al-Faqih, the parrots of Kalah talked in Persian, Arabic, Chinese, Indian, and Greek.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Pires, &#039;&#039;The Suma Oriental&#039;&#039; (1944); Di Meglio, &amp;quot;Arab Trade with Indonesia and the Malay Peninsula from the 8th to the 16th Century&amp;quot; (1970). The location of Kalah is tentatively placed in the Mergui region: see Wheatley, &#039;&#039;The Golden Khersonese&#039;&#039; (1961).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The network of mercantile-maritime centers stretched, like a string of pearls, from the Baltic to the eastern Mediterranean, and from there southward to Sofala (or beyond—the history of East and southern Africa is still buried in colonial slumber) and eastward to Japan. The network also extended inland in all three continents, but the mercantile-maritime cities and oceanic routes were eventually of greater evolutionary importance in the rise of capitalism than were the inland centers. This was true for two (main) reasons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First, foreign trade was the most peripheral of protocapitalist activities; it was literally beyond the reach of the law. (Inland cities that bordered on deserts would also have had this peripheral quality to some extent.) Thus, a protocapitalist port city could move products to and from any other oceanic port without having to pass through state-organized territories, and thereby avoid paying tolls, being forced to buy and sell goods to foreign merchants at intermediate trading centers, or perhaps even being denied permission to enter a state. It is worth noting, in this regard, that a substantial part of the high cost of Asian spices in European markets before 1492 resulted from the fact that shipments coming from India via overland routes ordinarily had to be passed from merchant to merchant at several trading points enroute, with profit taken at each intermediate market. The cheapness of Asian spices carried by the Portuguese in the sixteenth century therefore reflected, to a considerable extent, the fact that the spices could be on-loaded at an Asian port, and then transported direct to a European port with no intermediate transactions; perhaps this factor was more important than the generally lower cost of sea transport over land transport (a factor that is often overemphasized).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Second, long-distance commodity movement by sea, involving as it did the transport of vital staples as well as luxuries, was, among protocapitalist activities of the late Middle Ages, perhaps the closest we get to industrial capitalism in the urban economy of that time. It involved not merely an exchange of commodities but the production of many commodities including ships, and incorporated sophisticated technology, a large work force, complex transactions, and massive capital accumulation. This matter brings us back, inescapably, to the problem of defining &amp;quot;protocapitalism.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a widespread tendency, often encountered among Marxists but by no means confined to that school of thought, which argues the following position. Money, cash exchange, and trade have been going on for millennia but they do not signify capitalism or even the seeds of capitalism. This is so because capitalism is a matter of production, not exchange. &amp;quot;Real&amp;quot; capitalism requires the application of wage labor and the production of commodities. Exchange is merely buying and selling; it does not add value. For Marx, it produces wealth mainly as a result of unequal exchange (higher prices in one market than another, and the like), not as a result of labor input and the production of use-value.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From this model come a series of highly important theses. One is the argument that medieval European towns were not central to the rise of capitalism because their main activity was trade, exchange, not production. Therefore the rise of capitalism must have occurred, not in medieval towns but in medieval agriculture.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;This thesis is central to the famous debate over the role of urbanization in the medieval rise of capitalism; in Marxist literature this view is associated with Maurice Dobb (who in fact presented it very cautiously), and its opposition—emphasis on the role of towns in the rise of capitalism—is associated with Paul Sweezy. See Dobb, &#039;&#039;Studies in the Development of Capitalism&#039;&#039; (1947), Sweezy, &amp;quot;A Critique&amp;quot; (1976). The thesis is also central to the debates over &amp;quot;dependency theory.&amp;quot; For instance, Robert Brenner argues that towns and trade were essentially irrelevant precisely because the issue is production, not exchange, and Brenner believes (wrongly) that towns were not really important points of production in the medieval world. See Brenner, &amp;quot;The Agrarian Roots of European Capitalism&amp;quot; (1985), pp. 38-39. Also see Chapter 2, note 172, above.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; But a second thesis is more crucial for the issues discussed here. This is the argument that starts out by conceding that the great medieval trading cities and trading routes of Asia were much more impressive in scale than those of Europe and the Mediterranean, but this did not make them more significant for the rise of capitalism—because it was production, not exchange (trade, commerce), that was the crucial process. No matter how highly developed the trading routes and cities of Asia were, Europe&#039;s feudal agricultural production (in this argument) was closer to capitalism than either the rural or urban production systems of non-Europe and it is this fact—the nature of European rural society as contrasted with non-European rural society—that is crucial in explaining why capitalism arose in Europe, not in Asia (or Africa). The fallacy regarding rural production was discussed previously. But equally fallacious is the idea that Asian (and African) port cities, mercantile-maritime centers, were somehow purely or largely concerned with exchange, with &amp;quot;commerce.&amp;quot; Here there are in fact three errors. First, production involves not merely change of form but also change of place. It is metaphysical to argue that there is something ontologically distinctive about the process of shaping nature into a &amp;quot;thing,&amp;quot; a commodity. When a farmer produces an agricultural &amp;quot;thing,&amp;quot; he or she must not only grow it but also transport it from field to farmstead and then to market, and must also transport inputs of water or fertilizer or labor from outside the farm. Farm production, therefore, involves both change of form and change of place. An automobile assembly line is a process of change both of form and of place. Thus, overall, spatial movement is part of production. It has nothing whatever to do with the entirely distinct process by which commodities are purchased and sold. Indeed, the farmer&#039;s crop can be subject to exchange right on the farm as well as in an off-the-farm market. Therefore, the medieval activities involved in moving commodities over long distances were not, ontologically, &amp;quot;exchange&amp;quot;; they were spatial transport. They involved huge labor forces, massive capital investment, major technologies—of navigation, ship construction, banking and insurance, and more—and significant tonnages. They produced use-value at the destination from commodities that had none, or less, at the point of departure. In a word, what is called &amp;quot;medieval trade&amp;quot; was a complex process in which production and manufacture played as great a role as did exchange.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second error is the idea, very widely held today among historians, that the cities, the commodity movement, and the rest of the complex, was somehow a trivial process involving only the moving of a few luxury items to a tiny ruling class. In fact, most of the medieval seaborne trade was a matter of staple commodities, things like crude textiles, iron implements, rice, wheat, lumber, ships (which often were sailed from the place of construction to some other port where they were sold), and the like. But beyond that, the tonnage and value of products that would not be considered staples, things like pepper, sugar, finer textiles, pottery, and so forth, was, in and of itself, immensely important, because the market for such products was very large: the medieval elites were by no means insignificant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The third error is a failure to perceive how important industrial production was in these medieval cities and their hinterlands. Thus, I conclude that the medieval mercantile-maritime system was very much a nursery bed of capitalism, in Asia and Africa as well as Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The protocapitalist port cities of Europe were not more highly developed than those of Africa and Asia in the fifteenth century. This holds true regardless of the kinds of criteria chosen as measures. European cities, first, were not larger in absolute or relative population. In fact, urbanization in Europe was probably less advanced than urbanization in China, India, the Arab region, and no doubt many other non-European areas. The urban population in early Ming China was perhaps 10% of the total population.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Elvin, &#039;&#039;The Pattern of the Chinese Past&#039;&#039; (1973).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In the Vijayanagar Empire of southern India it must have been at least as high: the inland capital alone held about 3% of the population—comparable centers in Europe, such as Paris, may have had half that percentage—and the coastal port cities were both numerous and large.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Elvin, &#039;&#039;The Pattern of the Chinese Past&#039;&#039; (1973); Mahalingam, &#039;&#039;Economic Life in the Vijayanagar Empire&#039;&#039; (1951); Naqvi, &#039;&#039;Urban Centres in Upper India, 1556-1803&#039;&#039; (1968); Satish Chandra, &amp;quot;Commerce and Industry in the Medieval Period&amp;quot; (1964).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Second, the development of the techniques of business was fully as advanced, fully as complex, and fully as wideflung in space among the merchants and bankers of Asia and Africa as among those of Europe. (Tome Pires said of Gujarati businessmen in 1515: &amp;quot;They are men who understand merchandise; they are ... properly steeped in the sound and harmony of it&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;those of our people who want to be clerks and factors ought to go there and learn, because the business of trade is a science.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Pires, &#039;&#039;The Suma Oriental&#039;&#039; (1944). Also see K. N. Chaudhuri, &#039;&#039;Trade and Civilization in the Indian Ocean&#039;&#039; (1985); Chan-Cheung, &amp;quot;The Smuggling Trade Between China and Southeast Asia During the Ming Dynasty (1967); Di Meglio, &amp;quot;Arab Trade with Indonesia and the Malay Peninsula from the 8th to the 16th Century&amp;quot; (1970); Elvin, &amp;quot;China as a Counterfactual&amp;quot; (1988); Gupta, &#039;&#039;Industrial Structure of India During Medieval Period&#039;&#039; (1970); I. Habib, &amp;quot;Usury in Medieval India&amp;quot; (1964); Jha, &#039;&#039;Studies in the Development of Capitalism in India&#039;&#039; (1963); Pires, &#039;&#039;The Suma Oriental&#039;&#039; (1944); Prakash, &amp;quot;Organization of Industrial Production in Urban Centres in India During the Seventeenth Century with Special Reference to Textiles&amp;quot; (1964); Victor Purcell, &#039;&#039;The Chinese in Southeast Asia&#039;&#039;, 2nd ed. (1965); Jan Qaisar, &amp;quot;The Role of Brokers in Medieval India&amp;quot; (1974); Simkin, &#039;&#039;The Traditional Trade of Asia&#039;&#039; (1968); Toyoda, &#039;&#039;History of Pre-Meiji Commerce in Japan&#039;&#039; (1969); Udovitch, &amp;quot;Commercial Techniques in Early Medieval Islamic Trade&amp;quot; (1974).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;) Third, the technical and material means of production seem to have been at about the same level of development in many mercantile-maritime centers of all three continents, allowing for differences in the volume of production and trade, the kinds of merchandise, and the like. Maritime techniques were also comparable across the hemisphere: though they differed from ocean to ocean, it cannot be said that ships of one ocean were technologically more advanced than those of the others.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Needham and collaborators, &#039;&#039;Science and Civilization in China&#039;&#039; (1954-1984), vol. 4, part 3; Lewis, &amp;quot;Maritime Skills in the Indian Ocean, 1368-1500&amp;quot; (1973); Lo, &amp;quot;China as a Sea Power&amp;quot; (1955); Ma Huan, &#039;&#039;The Overall Survey of the Ocean&#039;s Shores&#039;&#039; (1970); Purcell, &#039;&#039;The Chinese in Southeast Asia&#039;&#039;, 2d ed. (1965).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Manufactures in port cities and other industrial centers of Europe, Africa, and Asia were also roughly comparable in gross scale and level of development.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;S. Chaudhuri, &amp;quot;Textile Trade and Industry in Bengal Suba, 1650-1720&amp;quot; (1974); Elvin, &amp;quot;China as a Counterfactual&amp;quot; (1988); Gernet, &#039;&#039;Daily Life in China on the Eve of the Mongol Invasion&#039;&#039; (1962); Jha, &#039;&#039;Studies in the Development of Capitalism in India&#039;&#039; (1963); Naqvi, &#039;&#039;Urban Centres in Upper India, 1556-1803&#039;&#039; (1968); Needham and collaborators, &#039;&#039;Science and Civilization in China&#039;&#039; (1965-1984); Jan Qaisar, &amp;quot;The Role of Brokers in Medieval India&amp;quot; (1974); Rodinson, &amp;quot;Le Marchand Musulman&amp;quot; (1974); Rodinson, &#039;&#039;Islam and Capitalism&#039;&#039; (1973); Bodo Wiethoff, &#039;&#039;Die Chinesische Seeverbotspolitik und der Private Überseehandel von 1368 bis 1567&#039;&#039; (1963); Yang, &amp;quot;Government Control of Urban Merchants in Traditional China&amp;quot; (1970).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Fourth, the urban class composition of Asian and African centers appears to have been similar to that of European centers: in all regions there existed a powerful class of protocapitalists and a wage-earning class of workers, with or without involvement also of other classes such as feudal landlords, slaves, and so on. And finally, the old European myth, codified by Weber—that European cities were somehow more free than non-European cities, which were under the tight control of the surrounding polity—is essentially an inheritance from classical Eurocentric diffusionism, which imagined that everything important in early Europe was imbued with freedom while everything important in Asia (not to mention Africa) was ground under a stultifying &amp;quot;Oriental despotism&amp;quot; until the Europeans arrived there and brought freedom. The so-called &amp;quot;free cities&amp;quot; of central Europe were hardly the norm and were not central to the rise of capitalism. The partial autonomy of many mercantile-maritime port cities of Europe, from Italy to the Baltic, was of course a reality, and usually reflected either the dominance by the city of a relatively small polity (often a city-state) or the gradual accommodation of feudal states to their urban sectors, allowing the latter considerable autonomy for reasons of profit or power. But all of this held true also in various parts of Africa and Asia. Small city-states were common around the shores of the Indian Ocean, in the Maghreb, and in Southeast Asia; also common were quasi-independent cities, giving loose allegiance to larger states. This point was discussed in the previous chapter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The preceding discussion was not a theory of the rise of capitalism. My aim was simply to show that all of the theories that claim causal superiority for Europe on the basis of Asia and Africa&#039;s supposed lack of progressive urbanization or because extra-European urban processes were not important since urban processes in general were of minor importance compared to rural processes—European rural feudalism—are very unconvincing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is not an exaggeration to describe this entire network of mercantile-maritime cities as a single protocapitalist system.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;I proposed this idea in Blaut, &amp;quot;Where Was Capitalism Born?&amp;quot; (1976). Janet Abu-Lughod&#039;s important book &#039;&#039;Before European Hegemony: The World System A.D. 1250-1350&#039;&#039; (1989) is the first effort to show in precise detail how this system worked in the fourteenth century. Also see S. Chaudhuri, &amp;quot;Textile Trade and Industry in Bengal Suba&amp;quot; (1985); Simkin, &#039;&#039;The Traditional Trade of Asia&#039;&#039; (1968); Amin, &#039;&#039;Accumulation on a World Scale&#039;&#039; (1974) and &#039;&#039;Unequal Development&#039;&#039; (1976).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The surrounding space of class-organized agricultural societies was, as I argued previously, made up of separate societies and polities in separate regions but was, nonetheless, integrated enough so that persistent criss-cross diffusion and other movements led to a degree of unity; perhaps even a degree of intercontinental equilibrium. The unity was very much more intense for the network of protocapitalist cities. The image I have in mind for this is a network of strings of electric lights of various sizes and colors illuminating a garden party. The current, so to speak, which flowed among those port cities consisted of human beings (sailors, workers, merchants, etc.), material things (commodities, ships, fertile seeds and cuttings of crops, musical instruments, and much more), and ideas—technological ideas, innovative social, economic, and religious ideas, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All of this is well known in qualitative terms but not fully so in terms of its intensity, its spatial extent, and, most critically, its unity. The entire system can be viewed as a single entity, so tightly integrated that there must have been rapid, almost instantaneous, criss-cross diffusion throughout the system of essentially every material or immaterial culture trait that is relevant to the economic and technical and ecological progress of this form of society. I believe it is an error, built into our way of conceptualizing cultures and cultural differences, to believe that the very profound differences of culture among the various societies that comprised this system would, somehow, have been reflected in a lack of integration across cultural boundaries in matters concerning the technical-economic-ecological dimension of culture. (Recall our discussion above concerning the distinction between evolutionary and nonevolutionary or partly non-evolutionary aspects of culture, in the theoretical tradition of anthropologists like Steward.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Steward, &#039;&#039;Theory of Culture Change: The Methodology of Multilinear Evolution&#039;&#039; (1955). See note 1.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;) In those times, differences of language did not seem to interfere with the quest for profit among merchants and other participants in this system. (Recall the Greek-speaking parrots of Kalah, the 84 languages spoken in Malacca.) Nor were differences of religion any great impediment (as has been amply documented for Muslim-Christian-Jewish trade in the medieval Mediterranean&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Braudel, &#039;&#039;The Mediterranean&#039;&#039; (1972); Goitein, &#039;&#039;A Mediterranean Society&#039;&#039; (1967); Lane, &#039;&#039;Venice: A Maritime Republic&#039;&#039; (1973).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;). Certainly there were limited social networks, membership in which was a matter of religion or nationality or even kinship. Abu-Lughod has shown that the pattern of connections and distinctions produced a set of eight overlapping social regions—she writes of &amp;quot;The Eight Circuits of the Thirteenth-Century World System&amp;quot;—although her data and argument are consistent with my present thesis that all regions were in fact subregions of one protocapitalist system.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Abu-Lughod, &#039;&#039;Before European Hegemony: The World System A.D. 1250-1350&#039;&#039; (1989), fig. 1, p. 34. One of the eight regions is the nonmaritime circuit extending from China through Central Asia to the Black Sea.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; State boundaries do not seem to have played an important inhibiting role in the flows across the system, except in certain fairly limited periods when either political conflict or specific imperial policies and practices did, indeed, disrupt trade through one or another political partition; the truly nationalistic forms of capitalist enterprise become important much later; in fact, after 1492.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Blaut, &#039;&#039;The National Question&#039;&#039; (1987b).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The network, or system, seems to have evolved over a period of several centuries, mainly from the tenth to the fifteenth. Without attributing cause, I would emphasize the fact that the period during which this system grew most rapidly in scale and intensity was the period during which the technology of oceangoing shipping increased explosively, in what may be thought of as a (or the) Spatial Revolution. In the Agricultural Revolution, we do not know whether the technical-ecological transformation was cause, or effect, or both, in relation to social transformation, although most scholars tend to treat agriculture as cause and social change as effect, rightly or wrongly. In the case of the medieval Spatial Revolution, it is most likely that the technological-ecological aspect was more a reflection of the economic and social processes associated with emergent protocapitalism and urban development than a cause of the latter. Nevertheless, the medieval Spatial Revolution was in one critical way a sequel to the Agricultural Revolution: it intensified spatial flows much as the earlier revolution intensified in situ production. This is not to say that earlier boat technology and earlier long-distance sailing out of sight of land was insignificant: the question is one of intensity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Perhaps, as a final speculation, we might think of the Spatial Revolution as part of a larger process which was responding to the maturation and decline of the feudal mode of production. Certainly it is true that increasing commodity demand by elites was a major stimulus, but it is also possible that the emerging crisis of feudalism—the decreasing rate at which an absolute increase in surplus could be extracted from peasant producers, and the resulting stresses and strains—had much to do with the rise of the intercontinental protocapitalist system. In any case, the dramatic long-distance voyages of discovery of the later Middle Ages, voyages by Chinese, Indians, Polynesians, Europeans, and others, should be conceptualized as moments in a genuine Spatial Revolution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Much of this is speculation beyond the empirical data. But we have important data about the parallels of development from one urban system to another, and from one trading region to another. We also have dramatic cases of almost instantaneous diffusion: for instance, the appearance of the cannon in the Mediterranean region and in China almost simultaneously; perhaps in the same decade.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Needham and collaborators, &#039;&#039;Science and Civilization in China&#039;&#039; (1965-1984), Vol. 5, part 7; Needham, &#039;&#039;Gunpowder as the Fourth Power, East and West&#039;&#039; (1985).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; For the argument of this book, the one crucial generalization is the following: It is not surprising that the processes that I have called protocapitalist were going on across the Eastern Hemisphere in the later Middle Ages. Africa, Asia, and Europe were about equally close to—or distant from—capitalism and modernity in 1492. After 1492, the pace of development quickened for Europe and slowed for Africa and Asia, because of the wealth brought to Europe from America.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Notes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Concerning my use of the term &amp;quot;cultural evolution,&amp;quot; see Chapter 1, note 14.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. The discussion in this section of the chapter mainly deals with the Eastern Hemisphere. The Western Hemisphere will be discussed separately in Chapter 4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. See Dobbs, &#039;&#039;Studies in the Development of Capitalism&#039;&#039; (1947).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Amin, &#039;&#039;Unequal Development&#039;&#039; (1976) and &amp;quot;Modes of Production: History and Unequal Development&amp;quot; (1985).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Kabaker, &amp;quot;A Radiocarbon Chronology Relevant to the Origins of Agriculture&amp;quot; (1977); Megaw, &#039;&#039;Hunters, Gatherers and First Farmers Beyond Europe&#039;&#039; (1977); Vishnu-Mittre, &amp;quot;Origin and History of Agriculture in the Indian Subcontinent&amp;quot; (1978). See the review in Blaut, &amp;quot;Diffusionism: A Uniformitarian Critique.&amp;quot; (1987a).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Blaut, &amp;quot;Diffusionism&amp;quot; (1987a).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. The assumption here is that agriculture itself was evolving because it was useful, but there is the corollary assumption that humanity realized this not just in one favored place but in many places and among many peoples. This should not be surprising, given the fact that agriculture is useful nearly everywhere today. But it is definitely contradictory to the assumptions of Eurocentric diffusionism.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Examples of this process include the eastward movement of the medieval agricultural frontier in the forests of eastern Europe and the reclaiming of swampland in Iraq. Cropland was being expanded in these and other ways in many regions. In addition, it seems certain that some societies that had not previously practiced agriculture were being pushed into smaller or less favorable regions and therefore were turning to agriculture as a means of increasing food production to meet the land shortage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9. See R. Lee, &amp;quot;Art, Science, or Politics? The Crisis in Hunter-Gatherer Studies&amp;quot; (1992).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
10. Water-control systems in farming, including irrigation, drainage, broad-based terracing, raised- or drained-field construction, and natural-levee adaptations are probably as old as agriculture itself, because (1) all farmers everywhere know the problem of moisture control (adding moisture when there is deficit; removing moisture when there is a surplus and a danger of root drowning); (2) all of these procedures are initially small-scale actions taken on an individual farm (recall our discussion in Chapter 2 of the fallacies of the &amp;quot;hydraulic theory&amp;quot;); and (3) there is direct archaeological evidence of very ancient (9,000-year-old) drainage systems in New Guinea (Golson, &amp;quot;No room at the top: Agricultural intensification in the New Guinea Highlands,&amp;quot; 1977), and drained- or raised-field systems in tropical America (Denevan, &amp;quot;Hydraulic Agriculture in the American Tropics: Forms, Measures, and Recent Research,&amp;quot; 1982). Thus we can infer the primitivity of irrigation and these other water-management systems: probably they are as old as the Neolithic, along with drainage and raised-field systems. All this shows that intensive technology had already diffused insofar as it was going to do so, and nonadoption reflected something other than lack of information. As we noted in Chapter 2, irrigation systems diffuse as a social process, associated with class society. Concerning the myth that the plow was not used in Africa, see Hopkins, &#039;&#039;An Economic History of West Africa&#039;&#039; (1973) and Onimode, &#039;&#039;Imperialism and Underdevelopment in Nigeria&#039;&#039; (1982). Note that plows are used in tropical agriculture very sparingly—mainly for some operations in rice paddies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
11. In classless societies, I speculate that the bundle of choices concerning crops, tools, field systems, labor input, and the like, led to roughly a common level of output per person, unaffected by differences in environmental quality over a great range of environments. In some areas very extensive systems like shifting cultivation would be used; in others, intensive systems, like wet-rice cultivation, would be used. But the productivity of labor in terms of product per hour input would tend to be about the same in this model for both intensive and extensive systems. This would hold true if two assumptions are accepted: (1) that rapid and thorough diffusion had taken place, and (2) that population was controlled by farming peoples so as to optimize the situation concerning output and leisure time. None of this would be true in a class society, where the constraints on technology and labor use are influenced profoundly by the demands and power of the ruling class.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
12. See, for example, Kea, &#039;&#039;Settlements, Trade, and Politics in the Seventeenth Century Gold Coast&#039;&#039; (1982); Isichei, &#039;&#039;A History of Nigeria&#039;&#039; (1983); Rodney, &#039;&#039;A History of the Upper Guinea Coast 1545-1800&#039;&#039; (1970); A. Smith, &amp;quot;The Early States of the Central Sudan&amp;quot; (1971); Usman, &#039;&#039;The Transformation of Katsina (1400-1883)&#039;&#039; (1981).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
13. See Blaut, &amp;quot;Colonialism and the Rise of Capitalism&amp;quot; (1989). It is also true that in all these societies there were parallel high-status groups, clergy, bureaucrats, military people, and so on, but there seems not to have been any case of a large, clearly feudal society—I exclude a few cases of small urbanized power centers in dry, pastoral regions, and a few large cities—in which wealth and status was clearly divorced from land ownership and from the surplus extracted from peasants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
14. Apparently such private (saleable) ownership of agricultural land was found mainly near important urban areas, ports, mining areas, etc. See Rawski, &#039;&#039;Agricultural Change and the Peasant Economy of South China&#039;&#039; (1972); Das Gupta, &#039;&#039;Malabar in Asian Trade: 1740-1800&#039;&#039; (1967); Nicholas, &amp;quot;Town and Countryside: Social and Economic Tensions in 14th Century Flanders&amp;quot; (1967-1968); Kea, &#039;&#039;Settlements, Trade, and Politics in the Seventeenth-Century Gold Coast&#039;&#039; (1982); Rodney, &#039;&#039;A History of the Upper Guinea Coast&#039;&#039; (1970); Usman, &#039;&#039;The Transformation of Katsina&#039;&#039; (1981); Sherif, &#039;&#039;Slaves, Spices and Ivory in Zanzibar&#039;&#039; (1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
15. On the importance of hereditary fiefs and landed property in Asia, see, for example, Elvin, &#039;&#039;The Pattern of the Chinese Past&#039;&#039; (1973); Sharma, &#039;&#039;Indian Feudalism, c. 300-1200&#039;&#039; (1965); Fei Hsiao-tung, &#039;&#039;China&#039;s Gentry&#039;&#039; (1953); Fu and Li, &#039;&#039;The Sprouts of Capitalistic Factors Within China&#039;s Feudal Society&#039;&#039; (1956); Rawski, &#039;&#039;Agricultural Change and the Peasant Economy of South China&#039;&#039; (1972); Tung, &#039;&#039;An Outline History of China&#039;&#039; (1979); Liceria, &amp;quot;Emergence of Brahmans as Landed Intermediaries in Karnataka, c. A.D. 1000-1300 (1974); Mahalingam, &#039;&#039;Economic Life in the Vijayanagar Empire&#039;&#039; (1951); Hasan, &amp;quot;The Position of the Zamindars in the Mughal Empire (1969); Raychaudhuri, &amp;quot;The Agrarian System of Mughal India&amp;quot; (1965); Yadav, &amp;quot;Secular Land Grants of the Post-Gupta Period and Some Aspects of the Growth of the Feudal Complex in Northern India&amp;quot; (1966). For Africa south of the Sahara (for which there is as yet only fragmentary evidence), see, for example, A. Smith, &amp;quot;The Early States of the Central Sudan&amp;quot; (1971); Mabogunji, &amp;quot;The Land and Peoples of West Africa&amp;quot; (1971); Kea, &#039;&#039;Settlements, Trade, and Politics in the Seventeenth-Century Gold Coast&#039;&#039; (1982); Isichei, &#039;&#039;A History of Nigeria&#039;&#039; (1983); Onimode, &#039;&#039;Imperialism and Underdevelopment in Nigeria&#039;&#039; (1982); FRELIMO, &#039;&#039;Historia de Mozambique&#039;&#039; (1971); Rodney, &#039;&#039;A History of the Upper Guinea Coast&#039;&#039; (1970); and Usman, &#039;&#039;The Transformation of Katsina&#039;&#039; (1981).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
16. On the manorial system of China, see Elvin, &#039;&#039;The Pattern of the Chinese Past&#039;&#039; (1973). For India, see Gopal, &amp;quot;Quasi-Manorial Rights in Ancient India&amp;quot; (1963); Mahalingam, &#039;&#039;Economic Life in the Vijayanagar Empire&#039;&#039; (1951); Yadav, &amp;quot;Secular Land Grants of the Post-Gupta Period&amp;quot; (1966); Yadav, &amp;quot;Immobility and Subjugation of Indian Peasantry in Early Medieval Complex&amp;quot; (1974). Indian historians recognize important differences between the Indian and European forms of the manor, however. In early Indian feudalism manorial labor had some of the characteristics of serfs, some of wage laborers, and some of tenant farmers. Early Indian feudal estates also seem to have been less autarkic and insulated than the stereotypical European manor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
17. Marx&#039;s view is set forth in &amp;quot;The British rule in India&amp;quot; (1979). Irfan Habib, in part following Kosambi (both are Marxists), writes of &amp;quot;the creation of the traditional Indian village, closed and self-sufficient&amp;quot; (my emphasis) between 200 B.C. and 650 A.D., in a process involving &amp;quot;ruralization of crafts&amp;quot; and somewhat planned settlement of landless people in villages: Habib, in &amp;quot;The Social Distribution of Landed Property in Pre-British India&amp;quot; (1965).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
18. On the unity of agriculture and handicraft industry in medieval European villages, see, for example, Sylvia Thrupp, &amp;quot;Medieval Industry 1000-1500&amp;quot; (1972).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
19. Dobb, &#039;&#039;Studies in the Development of Capitalism&#039;&#039; (1947).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
20. Serfdom was not characteristic of all parts of medieval Europe. On unfree labor in Asia and Africa, see, for example, Yadava, &amp;quot;Immobility and Subjugation of Indian Peasantry in Early Medieval Complex&amp;quot; (1974); Levitzion, &amp;quot;The Early States of the Western Sudan to 1500&amp;quot; (1972); Elvin, &#039;&#039;The Pattern of the Chinese Past&#039;&#039; (1973).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
21. See Brenner and critics in Aston and Philpin, &#039;&#039;The Brenner Debate: Agrarian Class Structure and Economic Development in Pre-Industrial Europe&#039;&#039; (1988); Brenner, &amp;quot;The Origins of Capitalist Development: A Critique of Neo-Smithian Marxism.&amp;quot; (1977); Baechler, &amp;quot;The Origins of Modernity: Caste and Feudality (India, Europe and Japan).&amp;quot; (1988). See comments on Brenner and Baechler in Chapter 2 above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
22. including Lynn White, Jr. in &#039;&#039;Medieval Technology and Social Change&#039;&#039; (1968); Michael Mann, &amp;quot;European Development: Approaching a Historical Explanation&amp;quot; (1988); Perry Anderson, &#039;&#039;Lineages of the Absolute State&#039;&#039; (1974).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
23. Blaut, &#039;&#039;The National Question&#039;&#039; (1987b), chap. 7.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
24. For India, see, for example, A. Chicherov, &amp;quot;On the Multiplicity of Socio-Economic Structures in India in the Seventeenth and Eighteenth Century&amp;quot; (1976); I. Habib, &amp;quot;Problems of Marxist Historical Analysis&amp;quot; (1969); S. Gopal, Nobility and the Mercantile Community in India&amp;quot; (1972); Radhakamal Mukherjee, &#039;&#039;The Economic History of India, 1600-1800&#039;&#039; (1967); Ramkrishna Mukherjee, &#039;&#039;The Rise and Fall of the East India Company&#039;&#039; (1958); Jha, &#039;&#039;Studies in the Development of Capitalism in India&#039;&#039; (1963); Nurul Hasan, &amp;quot;The Silver Currency Output of the Mughal Empire and Prices in India During the 16th and 17th Centuries&amp;quot; (1969); Yadava, &amp;quot;Immobility and Subjugation of Indian Peasantry in Early Medieval Complex&amp;quot; (1974). For West Africa, see Kea, &#039;&#039;Settlements, Trade, and Politics in the Seventeenth-Century Gold Coast&#039;&#039; (1982). For China, see Harrison, &#039;&#039;The Communists and Chinese Peasant Rebellions&#039;&#039; (1969); Parsons, &#039;&#039;Peasant Rebellions in the Late Ming Dynasty&#039;&#039; (1970); Fu and Li, &#039;&#039;The Sprouts of Capitalistic Factors Within China&#039;s Feudal Society&#039;&#039; (1956).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
25. Appadorai, &#039;&#039;Economic Conditions in Southern India&#039;&#039; (1936); Elvin, &#039;&#039;The Pattern of the Chinese Past&#039;&#039; (1974); Nicholas, &amp;quot;Town and Countryside: Social and Economic Tensions in 14th Century Flanders&amp;quot; (1967-1968), pp. 458-485; Rawski, &#039;&#039;Agricultural Change and the Peasant Economy of South China&#039;&#039; (1972); T. Raychaudhuri, &#039;&#039;Jan Company in Coromandel&#039;&#039; (1962).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
26. Rawski, &#039;&#039;Agricultural Change and the Peasant Economy of South China&#039;&#039; (1972).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
27. See Appadorai, &#039;&#039;Economic Conditions in Southern India&#039;&#039; (1936); Gernet, &#039;&#039;Daily Life in China on the Eve of the Mongol Invasion&#039;&#039; (1962); Habib, &amp;quot;Problems of Marxist Historical Analysis&amp;quot; (1969); Mahalingam, &#039;&#039;Economic Life in the Vijayanagar Empire&#039;&#039; (1951); K. Nilikanta Sastri, &#039;&#039;A History of South India&#039;&#039; (1966); Tung, &#039;&#039;An Outline History of China&#039;&#039; (1979); Kea, &#039;&#039;Settlements, Trade, and Politics in the Seventeenth-Century Gold Coast&#039;&#039; (1982), Sherif, &#039;&#039;Slaves, Spices and Ivory in Zanzibar&#039;&#039; (1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
28. Blaut, &amp;quot;Where Was Capitalism Born?&amp;quot; (1976).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
29. Pires, &#039;&#039;The Suma Oriental&#039;&#039; (1944 edition).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
30. Pires, &#039;&#039;The Suma Oriental&#039;&#039; (1944); Di Meglio, &amp;quot;Arab Trade with Indonesia and the Malay Peninsula from the 8th to the 16th Century&amp;quot; (1970). The location of Kalah is tentatively placed in the Mergui region: see Wheatley, &#039;&#039;The Golden Khersonese&#039;&#039; (1961).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
31. This thesis is central to the famous debate over the role of urbanization in the medieval rise of capitalism; in Marxist literature this view is associated with Maurice Dobb (who in fact presented it very cautiously), and its opposition—emphasis on the role of towns in the rise of capitalism—is associated with Paul Sweezy. See Dobb, &#039;&#039;Studies in the Development of Capitalism&#039;&#039; (1947), Sweezy, &amp;quot;A Critique&amp;quot; (1976). The thesis is also central to the debates over &amp;quot;dependency theory.&amp;quot; For instance, Robert Brenner argues that towns and trade were essentially irrelevant precisely because the issue is production, not exchange, and Brenner believes (wrongly) that towns were not really important points of production in the medieval world. See Brenner, &amp;quot;The Agrarian Roots of European Capitalism&amp;quot; (1985), pp. 38-39. Also see Chapter 2, note 172, above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
32. Elvin, &#039;&#039;The Pattern of the Chinese Past&#039;&#039; (1973).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
33. Elvin, &#039;&#039;The Pattern of the Chinese Past&#039;&#039; (1973); Mahalingam, &#039;&#039;Economic Life in the Vijayanagar Empire&#039;&#039; (1951); Naqvi, &#039;&#039;Urban Centres in Upper India, 1556-1803&#039;&#039; (1968); Satish Chandra, &amp;quot;Commerce and Industry in the Medieval Period&amp;quot; (1964).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
34. Pires, &#039;&#039;The Suma Oriental&#039;&#039; (1944). Also see K. N. Chaudhuri, &#039;&#039;Trade and Civilization in the Indian Ocean&#039;&#039; (1985); Chan-Cheung, &amp;quot;The Smuggling Trade Between China and Southeast Asia During the Ming Dynasty (1967); Di Meglio, &amp;quot;Arab Trade with Indonesia and the Malay Peninsula from the 8th to the 16th Century&amp;quot; (1970); Elvin, &amp;quot;China as a Counterfactual&amp;quot; (1988); Gupta, &#039;&#039;Industrial Structure of India During Medieval Period&#039;&#039; (1970); I. Habib, &amp;quot;Usury in Medieval India&amp;quot; (1964); Jha, &#039;&#039;Studies in the Development of Capitalism in India&#039;&#039; (1963); Pires, &#039;&#039;The Suma Oriental&#039;&#039; (1944); Prakash, &amp;quot;Organization of Industrial Production in Urban Centres in India During the Seventeenth Century with Special Reference to Textiles&amp;quot; (1964); Victor Purcell, &#039;&#039;The Chinese in Southeast Asia&#039;&#039;, 2nd ed. (1965); Jan Qaisar, &amp;quot;The Role of Brokers in Medieval India&amp;quot; (1974); Simkin, &#039;&#039;The Traditional Trade of Asia&#039;&#039; (1968); Toyoda, &#039;&#039;History of Pre-Meiji Commerce in Japan&#039;&#039; (1969); Udovitch, &amp;quot;Commercial Techniques in Early Medieval Islamic Trade&amp;quot; (1974).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
35. Needham and collaborators, &#039;&#039;Science and Civilization in China&#039;&#039; (1954-1984), vol. 4, part 3; Lewis, &amp;quot;Maritime Skills in the Indian Ocean, 1368-1500&amp;quot; (1973); Lo, &amp;quot;China as a Sea Power&amp;quot; (1955); Ma Huan, &#039;&#039;The Overall Survey of the Ocean&#039;s Shores&#039;&#039; (1970); Purcell, &#039;&#039;The Chinese in Southeast Asia&#039;&#039;, 2d ed. (1965).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
36. S. Chaudhuri, &amp;quot;Textile Trade and Industry in Bengal Suba, 1650-1720&amp;quot; (1974); Elvin, &amp;quot;China as a Counterfactual&amp;quot; (1988); Gernet, &#039;&#039;Daily Life in China on the Eve of the Mongol Invasion&#039;&#039; (1962); Jha, &#039;&#039;Studies in the Development of Capitalism in India&#039;&#039; (1963); Naqvi, &#039;&#039;Urban Centres in Upper India, 1556-1803&#039;&#039; (1968); Needham and collaborators, &#039;&#039;Science and Civilization in China&#039;&#039; (1965-1984); Jan Qaisar, &amp;quot;The Role of Brokers in Medieval India&amp;quot; (1974); Rodinson, &amp;quot;Le Marchand Musulman&amp;quot; (1974); Rodinson, &#039;&#039;Islam and Capitalism&#039;&#039; (1973); Bodo Wiethoff, &#039;&#039;Die Chinesische Seeverbotspolitik und der Private Überseehandel von 1368 bis 1567&#039;&#039; (1963); Yang, &amp;quot;Government Control of Urban Merchants in Traditional China&amp;quot; (1970).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
37. I proposed this idea in Blaut, &amp;quot;Where Was Capitalism Born?&amp;quot; (1976). Janet Abu-Lughod&#039;s important book &#039;&#039;Before European Hegemony: The World System A.D. 1250-1350&#039;&#039; (1989) is the first effort to show in precise detail how this system worked in the fourteenth century. Also see S. Chaudhuri, &amp;quot;Textile Trade and Industry in Bengal Suba&amp;quot; (1985); Simkin, &#039;&#039;The Traditional Trade of Asia&#039;&#039; (1968); Amin, &#039;&#039;Accumulation on a World Scale&#039;&#039; (1974) and &#039;&#039;Unequal Development&#039;&#039; (1976).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
38. Steward, &#039;&#039;Theory of Culture Change: The Methodology of Multilinear Evolution&#039;&#039; (1955). See note 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
39. Braudel, &#039;&#039;The Mediterranean&#039;&#039; (1972); Goitein, &#039;&#039;A Mediterranean Society&#039;&#039; (1967); Lane, &#039;&#039;Venice: A Maritime Republic&#039;&#039; (1973).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
40. Abu-Lughod, &#039;&#039;Before European Hegemony: The World System A.D. 1250-1350&#039;&#039; (1989), fig. 1, p. 34. One of the eight regions is the nonmaritime circuit extending from China through Central Asia to the Black Sea.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
41. Blaut, &#039;&#039;The National Question&#039;&#039; (1987b).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
42. Needham and collaborators, &#039;&#039;Science and Civilization in China&#039;&#039; (1965-1984), Vol. 5, part 7; Needham, &#039;&#039;Gunpowder as the Fourth Power, East and West&#039;&#039; (1985).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= CHAPTER 4: After 1492 =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== EXPLAINING 1492 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1492, as we have seen, capitalism was slowly emerging in many parts of Asia, Africa, and Europe. In that year there would have been no reason whatever to predict that capitalism would triumph in Europe, and would triumph only two centuries later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By &amp;quot;the triumph of capitalism&amp;quot; I mean, in the present context, the political revolution that transferred power from the old feudal landlord elite to the bourgeoisie (the burghers, the capital-accumulating new elite): the bourgeois revolution. This was really a revolutionary epoch, not a single brief event, but I will follow convention by dating it to 1688, the year of England&#039;s &amp;quot;Glorious Revolution.&amp;quot; In that year (minor qualifications aside) the bourgeoisie definitively took power in England. This class already held power in Holland and in some small states of southern Europe, while in some other parts of Europe (like France) the bourgeoisie was vigorously &amp;quot;rising&amp;quot; in certain regions although the conflict with feudal polities had not yet been won at the level of state power. It should be emphasized that the capitalism that triumphed was not industrial capitalism. How this preindustrial capitalism should be conceptualized is a difficult question because it is something much larger than the &amp;quot;simple commodity production&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;merchant capital&amp;quot; of earlier times. But the Industrial Revolution did not really begin until a century later, in the late eighteenth century, and those who conceptualize the Industrial Revolution as simply a continuation of the bourgeois revolution are neglecting a large and important block of history, both inside and outside of Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The explanation for the rise of capitalism to political power in Europe in the (symbolic) year 1688 requires an understanding of (1) the reasons Europeans, not Africans and Asians, reached and conquered America, and thus garnered the first fruits of colonialism; (2) the reasons the conquest was successful; (3) the direct and indirect effects of the sixteenth-century plunder of American resources and exploitation of American workers on the transformation of Europe; and (4) the direct and indirect effects of seventeenth-century colonial and semicolonial European enterprise in America, Africa, and Asia on the further transformation of Europe and eventually the political triumph of capitalism in the bourgeois revolution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the following paragraphs we will summarize each of these processes in turn, and thus, so to speak, &amp;quot;explain 1492.&amp;quot; Then we will turn to the problem of explaining the rise of capitalism to political power in Europe—or more properly, part of Europe—in the period 1492–1688, in the sense of trying to sort out the significance of colonialism and the extra-European world in this epochal transformation. Finally, we will look at the significance of colonialism, and the role of non-Europe, in the initial stages of the Industrial Revolution, roughly, in the period of the late eighteenth and early nineteenth centuries, and will look at the complementary process: the beginnings of underdevelopment in Africa and Asia.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This inquiry should lead to an explanation for the fundamental fact that capitalism became centrated in Europe. I use the verb &amp;quot;centrate&amp;quot; to emphasize one crucial theoretical argument of this book: the rise of a more-or-less capitalist system had been going on in many parts of the world prior to 1492; after 1492, new forces entered which slowed, then stopped, its evolution outside of Europe and quickened it inside. Thus the rise of capitalism after 1492 was as much a matter of shifting its main headquarters to Europe as it was a matter of &amp;quot;rising&amp;quot; in a simple evolutionary sense.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Why America Was Conquered by Europeans and Not by Africans or Asians ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One of the core myths of Eurocentric diffusionism concerns the discovery (so-called) of America.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Europeans did not &amp;quot;discover&amp;quot; America: the hemisphere was settled millennia earlier by people who migrated in from Siberia and the Arctic. So I prefer not to conceptualize the European arrival as a &amp;quot;discovery.&amp;quot; Likewise, the idea that the Western Hemisphere is a &amp;quot;New World&amp;quot; is false since it was hardly new to those who lived there and greeted Columbus on his arrival in 1492. It is, however, very difficult to avoid using the phrase &amp;quot;New World&amp;quot; in certain contexts, and I will occasionally have to do so.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Typically it goes something like this: Europeans, being more progressive, venturesome, achievement-oriented, and modern than Africans and Asians in the late Middle Ages, and with superior technology as well as a more advanced economy, went forth to explore and conquer the world. And so they set sail down the African coast in the middle of the fifteenth century and out across the Atlantic to America in 1492. This myth is crucial for diffusionist ideology for two reasons: it explains the modern expansion of Europe in terms of internal, immanent forces, and it permits one to acknowledge that the conquest and its aftermath (Mexican mines, West Indian plantations, North American settler colonies, and the rest) had profound significance for European history without at the same time requiring one to give any credit in that process to non-Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In reality, the Europeans were doing what everyone else was doing across the hemisphere-wide network of protocapitalist, mercantile-maritime centers, and Europeans had no special qualities or advantages, no peculiar venturesomeness, no peculiarly advanced maritime technology, and so on. What they did have was opportunity: a matter of locational advantage in the broad sense of accessibility. The point deserves to be put very strongly. If the Western Hemisphere had been more accessible, say, to South Indian centers than to European centers, then very likely India would have become the home of capitalism, the site of the bourgeois revolution, and the ruler of the world.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the late Middle Ages long-distance oceanic voyaging was being undertaken by mercantile-maritime communities everywhere. In the fifteenth century Africans were sailing to Southeast Asia, Indians to Africa, Arabs to China, Chinese to Africa, and so on. Much of this voyaging was across open ocean and much of it involved exploration. Two non-European examples are well known: Cheng Ho&#039;s voyages to India and Africa between 1417 and 1433, and an Indian voyage around the Cape of Good Hope and apparently some 2,000 miles westward into the Atlantic circa 1420. In this period the radii of travel were becoming longer, as a function of the general evolution of protocapitalism, the expansion of trade, and the development of maritime technology. Maritime technology differed from region to region but no one region could be considered to have superiority in any sense implying evolutionary advantage, and novel ideas and techniques were being spread in all directions by rapid criss-cross diffusion. The entire hemisphere was participating and sharing in a Spatial Revolution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Certainly the growth of Europe&#039;s commercial economy led to the Portuguese and Spanish voyages of discovery. But the essence of the process was a matter of catching up with Asian and African protocapitalist communities by European communities, which were at the margin of the hemisphere-wide system and were emerging from a period of downturn relative to some other parts of the system. Iberian Christian states were in conflict with Maghreb states and European merchant communities were having commercial difficulties both there and in the eastern Mediterranean. The opening of a sea route to West African gold mining regions, along a sailing route known since antiquity, and using maritime technology known to non-Europeans as well as Europeans, was an obvious strategy. By the late fifteenth century the radii of travel had lengthened so that a sea route to India was found to be feasible (with piloting help from African and Indian sailors). The leap across the Atlantic in 1492 was certainly one of the great adventures of human history, but it has been in a context of shared technological and geographical knowledge, high potential for commercial success, and other factors that place it, in a hemispheric perspective, as something that could have been undertaken by non-Europeans just as easily as by Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Europeans had one advantage. America was vastly more accessible from Iberian ports than from any extra-European mercantile-maritime centers that had the capacity for long-distance sea voyages. Accessibility was in part a matter of sailing distance. Sofala, which is presumed to have been the southernmost major seaport in East Africa in that period (there may have been others farther south), is roughly 3,000 miles farther away from an American landfall than are the Canary Islands (Columbus&#039;s jumping-off point) and 5,000 miles farther from any densely populated coast with possibilities for trade or plunder. The distance from China to America&#039;s northwest coast was even greater, and greater still to the rich societies of Mexico.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To all of this we must add the sailing conditions on these various routes. Sailing from the Indian Ocean into the Atlantic one sails against prevailing winds. The North Pacific is somewhat stormy and winds are not reliable. From the Canaries to the West Indies, on the other hand, there blow the trade winds, and the return voyage is made northward into the westerlies. Obviously an explorer does not have this information at hand at the time of the voyage into unknown seas. The extent of the geographical knowledge possessed by Atlantic fishing communities in the fifteenth century remains, however, an unanswered and intriguing question, and there is speculation that these people fished around Newfoundland and the Grand Banks before 1492. More concretely, the Iberian sailors going to and from the Canaries, Madeira, and the Azores made use of the same basic wind circulation as did Columbus in crossing the entire ocean; Columbus knew that the trade winds (or easterlies) would assist him outbound and had good reason to believe that the westerlies would assist the return voyage. The point here is a matter of strong probabilities. Overall, it is vastly more probable that an Iberian ship would effect a passage (round trip) to America than would an African or Asian ship in the late fifteenth century, and, even if such a voyage were made by the latter, it is vastly more probable that Columbus&#039;s landfall in the West Indies would initiate historical consequences than would have been the case for an African ship reaching Brazil or a Chinese ship reaching California.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Is this environmental determinism? There is no more environmentalism here than there is in, say, some statement about the effect of oilfields on societies of the Middle East. I am asserting only the environmental conditions that support and hinder long-distance oceanic travel. In any case, if the choice were between an environmentalistic explanation and one that claimed superiority of one group over all others, as Eurocentric diffusionism does, we would certainly settle for environmentalism.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before we leave this topic, two important questions remain to be asked. First, why did not West Africans &amp;quot;discover&amp;quot; America since they were even closer to it than the Iberians were? The answer seems to be that mercantile, protocapitalist centers in West and Central Africa were not oriented to commerce by sea (as were those of East Africa). The great long-distance trade routes led across the Sudan to the Nile and the Middle East, across the Sahara to the Maghreb and the Mediterranean, and so forth. Sea trade existed all along the western coast, but it was not large in scale, given that civilizations were mainly inland and trading partners lay northward and eastward. Second, why did the trading cities of the Maghreb fail to reach America? This region (as Ibn Khaldun noted not long before) was in a political and commercial slump. In 1492 it was under pressure from the Iberians and the Turks. Just at that historical conjuncture, this region lacked a capacity for major long-distance oceanic expeditions. Also, these cities, which traded directly with the Sudan and the gold regions, did not have the economic incentive that Europeans had to bypass the Saharan land routes in search of a new—that is, cheaper—source of gold.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Why the Conquest Was Successful ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
America became significant in the rise of Europe, and the rise of capitalism, soon after the first contact in 1492. Immediately a process began, and explosively enlarged, involving the destruction of American states and civilizations, the plunder of precious metals, the exploitation of labor, and the occupation of American lands by Europeans. If we are to understand the impact of all of this on Europe (and capitalism), we have to understand how it occurred and why it happened so quickly—why, in a word, the conquest was successful.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a second crucial reason we need to understand the causality of the conquest. A nondiffusionist history starts all causal arguments with the working assumption that Europeans had no innate superiority, in any dimension of culture, over non-Europeans, no a priori &amp;quot;higher potential&amp;quot; for progress. This leads first to a recognition that Europeans in 1492 had no special advantage over Asians and Africans, ideological, social, or material. But it demands that we make the same working hypothesis about all human communities. Why, then, did Europeans discover America instead of Americans discovering Europe (or Africa, or Asia)? And why, after the first contact, did Europeans conquer the American civilizations instead of being defeated and driven from America&#039;s shores? The working assumption of cultural uniformitarianism—or, if you prefer, the psychic unity of humankind—here confronts the diffusionist tendency to dismiss the peoples of America as primitive and irrelevant.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Blaut, &amp;quot;Diffusionism: A Uniformitarian Critique&amp;quot; (1987).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There were several immediate reasons why American civilizations succumbed, but one of these is of paramount importance and probably constitutes a sufficient cause in and of itself. This is the massive depopulation caused by the pandemics of Eastern Hemisphere diseases that were introduced to America by Europeans.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;For general reviews, see Crosby, &#039;&#039;The Columbian Exchange&#039;&#039; (1972) and McNeill, &#039;&#039;Plagues and Peoples&#039;&#039; (1976). See Borah and Cooke, &amp;quot;La Demografía Histórica de América Latina: Necesidades y Perspectivas&amp;quot; (1972); Whitmore, &amp;quot;A Simulation of Sixteenth-Century Population Collapse in the Basin of Mexico&amp;quot; (1991); Alchon, &#039;&#039;Native Society and Disease in Colonial Ecuador&#039;&#039; (1991); Lovell, &amp;quot;&#039;Heavy Shadows and Black Night&#039;: Disease and Depopulation in Colonial America&amp;quot; (1992).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; A second factor was the considerable advantage Europeans held in military technology, but this advantage has to be kept in perspective. The technological gap was not so great that it could by itself bring military victory—after the initial battles—against American armies that were vastly larger and would sooner or later have adopted the enemy&#039;s technology. America is a vast territory, and in 1492 it had a very large population, numbering at least 50 million people and conceivably as many as 200 million, a goodly proportion of these people living in state-organized societies with significant military capability.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Denevan, &#039;&#039;The Native Population of the Americas in 1492&#039;&#039; (1976), for a review of the disputes concerning the American population at the time of the conquest.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Military technology tends, historically, to diffuse from one camp to the opposing camp in a relatively short time. Moreover, the superiority of the Spaniards&#039; primitive guns was not really very great when compared with the Americans&#039; bows and arrows. I think it is, therefore, certain that the tide would have turned against the Europeans had the matter been merely one of military capability. There would have been no conquest, or the conquest would have embraced only a limited territory, and certainly would not have swept south as far as the great civilizations of the central Andes. The point is that history went in a different direction because of the incredibly severe and incredibly rapid impact of introduced diseases. Resistance collapsed because the Americans were dying in epidemics even before the battles were joined.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Crosby, &#039;&#039;The Columbian Exchange&#039;&#039; (1972); Alchon, &#039;&#039;Native Society and Disease in Colonial Ecuador&#039;&#039; (1991).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Probably 90% of the population of central Mexico was wiped out during the sixteenth century; the majority of these deaths occurred early enough to assist the political conquest. Parallel processes took place in other parts of the hemisphere, especially where there were major concentrations of population, these in most cases being areas of state organization and high civilization. Perhaps three-quarters of the entire population of America was wiped out during that century.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;For a discussion of the various calculations, see Denevan, &#039;&#039;The Native Population of the Americas in 1492&#039;&#039; (1976); Denevan, &amp;quot;The Pristine Myth: The Landscape of the Americas in 1492&amp;quot; (1992); Lovell, &amp;quot;&#039;Heavy Shadows and Black Night&#039;&amp;quot; (1992); and Whitmore, &amp;quot;A Simulation of Sixteenth-Century Population Collapse in the Basin of Mexico&amp;quot; (1991).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Millions died in battle with the Spaniards and Portuguese and in forced-labor centers such as the mines of Mexico and Peru, but much greater numbers died in epidemics, and this was the reason that resistance to the conquest was rapidly overcome in most areas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Both the susceptibility of American populations to Eastern Hemisphere diseases and the lower level of military technology among Western Hemisphere peoples can be explained in fairly straightforward cultural evolutionary terms, although evidence bearing on the matter is partly indirect. The Western Hemisphere was not occupied by humans until very late in the Paleolithic period; there is dispute about the first arrivals, but most scholars do not believe that the Americas were occupied before 30,000 B.P. The first immigrants did not possess agriculture. The earliest migrations preceded the Agricultural Revolution in the Eastern Hemisphere; in addition, the source area for the migrations, northeastern Siberia, is generally too cold for agriculture, even for present-day agriculture, and we would not expect to find that these cultures were experimenting with incipient agriculture 20,000 years or so ago although some low-latitude cultures were doing so. Migrants to America were paleolithic hunters, gatherers, fishers, and shellfishers. They came in small numbers, apparently in a widely spaced series of relatively small population movements, and spread throughout both North and South America. Only after some millennia had passed was the stock of resources for hunting, fishing, gathering, and shellfishing under any significant pressure from humans. One assumes that population growth was slow but—this is of course speculative—that population growth eventually did reach the point where conditions were favorable to an Agricultural Revolution.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The assumption here is that population continued to grow so long as food resources for hunting, gathering, fishing, and shellfishing were abundant. At a certain purely hypothetical time, it is likely that people who had certainly already experimented with crop cultivation, found that a better supply of food (and fiber, etc.) would be obtained through agriculture, and so began the transformation. Note that this argument is in no way Malthusian.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In the Eastern Hemisphere the Agricultural Revolution seems to have occurred (as a qualitative change) roughly 10,000–12,000 years ago. In the Western Hemisphere that point may have been reached about 4,000 years later.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Fiedel, &#039;&#039;Prehistory of the Americas&#039;&#039; (1987).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Thereafter, cultural evolution in the Western Hemisphere proceeded along lines somewhat parallel to those of Eastern Hemisphere evolution: the development of agricultural societies, of monumental ceremonial centers, science, writing, cities, feudal class structures, and mercantile trade. It seems, indeed, that the Western Hemisphere societies were closing the gap. But in 1492, military technology in the most advanced and powerful states was still well behind that of Eastern Hemisphere states. Metal was just coming into use in this arena, and guns had not been invented. Hence the superiority of Cortes&#039;s armies over Moctezuma&#039;s and Pizarro&#039;s over the Incas&#039;. (When Cortes arrived at Tenochtitlán the Aztecs were already dying in great numbers from European diseases which, apparently, had been carried by American traders from Cuba to Mexico. Likewise, the Incas apparently were succumbing to these diseases before Pizarro arrived.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Crosby, &#039;&#039;The Columbian Exchange&#039;&#039; (1972), Lovell, &amp;quot;&#039;Heavy Shadows and Black Night,&#039;&amp;quot; and Alchon, &#039;&#039;Native Society and Disease in Colonial Ecuador&#039;&#039; (1991).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The susceptibility of American populations to Eastern Hemisphere diseases, and the consequent devastation of American settlements, collapse of states, and defeat and subjugation by the Europeans, is explained within the same general model. Small populations entered America and probably bore with them only a small subset of the diseases that existed in the Eastern Hemisphere at the time of their departure. They came, in addition, from a rather isolated, thinly populated part of the hemisphere, and a part which, having a cold climate, would have lacked some diseases characteristic of warm regions. Perhaps more important is the history of the diseases themselves. Many diseases originated or became epidemiologically significant during or after the Agricultural Revolution, and have ecological connections to agriculture, to urbanization, to zoological and botanical changes in the ecosystems strongly modified by human land use, and so on. In the Eastern Hemisphere humanity entered these ecological situations after the initial migrations to the Western Hemisphere, hence these migrants to America would not have carried these diseases with them. Later migrants may have done so (although this is again unlikely because they came from a cold and isolated part of Asia, and came in small numbers). But we can assume that the sparse settlement, the hunting-gathering-fishing-shellfishing way of life, and the absence of agricultural settlements and urbanization in the Americas during many millennia, would have caused a disappearance of some of the Eastern Hemisphere diseases that had been carried across to the Americas by migrants. After a time the American populations would have lost their physiological immunities to diseases no longer present in these populations, and they would of course lack immunities to diseases never before encountered. It is known, in this regard, that utter devastation was produced in the Americas from diseases to which Eastern Hemisphere populations had such high levels of immunity that they experienced these diseases as minor maladies only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hence there is no need to take seriously any longer the various myths that explain the defeat of the Americans in terms of imputed irrationality or superstitiousness or any of the other classical, often racist, myths about American civilizations in 1492. (The most widely known of these myths is the idea that Mexicans imagined that Cortés and his troops were gods, and fell down before them in awe instead of fighting. This did not happen.) The relatively minor difference in technology between the two communities, and the impact of Eastern Hemisphere diseases upon Western Hemisphere communities, can be explained in terms of the settlement history of the Western Hemisphere and its consequences. The Americans were not conquered: they were infected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Europe in 1492 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1492, European society was rather sluggishly moving out of feudalism and toward capitalism. Nothing in the landscape would suggest that a revolutionary transformation was imminent, or even that the social and economic changes taking place were very rapid. The growth of the English woolen trade in the fifteenth century was not (as it is often depicted) a sign of revolutionary economic change: it was complemented by a decline in competing woolen industries in southern Europe.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Miskimin, &#039;&#039;The Economy of Early Renaissance Europe, 1300-1460&#039;&#039; (1969).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Rural growth in this century reflected mainly population recovery (in some areas) after the great plagues of the preceding century, and the commercialization of agriculture that was then taking place had been doing so for some time.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Abel, &#039;&#039;Agricultural Fluctuations in Europe from the Thirteenth to the Twentieth Centuries&#039;&#039; (1980).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Towns were growing, but only slowly, and the urban population was still only a small fraction of total population (except in Italy and the Low Countries); and the urban population of Europe was smaller than it was in many non-European areas.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;de Vries, &#039;&#039;European Urbanization, 1500-1800&#039;&#039; (1984).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; There were strong signs even of economic contraction instead of growth.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hodgett, &#039;&#039;A Social and Economic History of Medieval Europe&#039;&#039; (1972) (&amp;quot;[The] 200 years after c.1320 may be said to be a period of down-turn in the [European] economy as a whole,&amp;quot; p. 212); Lopez and Miskimin, &amp;quot;The Economic Depression of the Renaissance,&amp;quot; (1961-1962); C. T. Smith, &#039;&#039;An Historical Geography of Western Europe Before 1800&#039;&#039; (1969).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The Italian Renaissance, in economic terms, did not raise the Italian centers above the level of many non-European centers, including those in nearby Islamic countries (for instance, Cairo), and the Renaissance was not at all a technological revolution.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Lopez, &amp;quot;Hard Times and Investment in Culture&amp;quot; (1953); Thorndyke, &amp;quot;Renaissance or Prenaissance?&amp;quot; (1943).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; All of this needs to be said by way of setting the stage. Before 1492 there was slow growth in Europe, perhaps even a downturn. Certainly—and this is accepted by the majority of European historians—no truly revolutionary transformation was underway in 1492.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within a few decades after 1492 the rate of growth and change speeded up dramatically, and Europe clearly entered a period of rapid metamorphosis. There is no dispute about this fact, which is seen in the known statistics relating to prices, urban growth, and much more beside.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Braudel, &amp;quot;Prices in Europe from 1450 to 1750&amp;quot; (1967); de Vries, &#039;&#039;European Urbanization&#039;&#039; (1984). On the rapid impact of these changes on Asia, see, for example, Atwell, &amp;quot;International Bullion Flows and the Chinese Economy circa 1530-1650&amp;quot; (1982); Aziza Hasan, &amp;quot;The Silver Currency Output of the Mughal Empire and Prices in India during the 16th and 17th centuries&amp;quot; (1969).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; What is disputable is the causal connection between these explosive sixteenth-century changes and the beginnings of economic exploitation in America (and, significantly but secondarily, in Africa and Asia). There is agreement that the effect was profound. But did it truly generate a qualitative transformation in Europe&#039;s economy? Or did it suddenly quicken a process already well underway? Or did it merely modify this process slightly with effects such as inflation? This question cannot be answered unless we break out of the European historical tunnel and look at what was going on in America, Asia, and Africa between 1492 and 1688, the symbolic date for Europe&#039;s bourgeois revolution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== COLONIALISM AND THE RISE OF EUROPE, 1492-1688 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Colonialism and Capitalism in the Sixteenth Century ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enterprise in the Americas was from the start a matter of capital accumulation: of profit. No matter if some elements of medieval law were incorporated in legal and land-granting systems in (for Europeans) the New World, and if the Iberian governments took a substantial, though usually overestimated, portion of the profits. The goal of all European individuals and groups involved in the enterprise, clergy apart, was to make money, for oneself or one&#039;s country (usually the former).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The leading group, almost everywhere, was the European protocapitalist class, not only merchants but also industrialists and profit-oriented landlords—not only Iberian but also Italian, Flemish, Dutch, German, English, and so on. This class community took its profit from American enterprise and invested part of it in Europe, buying land and developing commercial agriculture, developing industries (like shipbuilding, sugar refining, and so on) that were associated with the growing colonial enterprise, developing profitable businesses in spheres of activity which served the growing European economy (for instance, the burgeoning Atlantic fisheries), building urban structures, and the like. Part of the profit was plowed back into additional colonial risk enterprise, in America and in the new trading enterprises in southern Asia, Africa, and the Levant. One of the deceptively subtle aspects of the process was the immense increase in purchases of all sorts by European merchants in all markets, inside and outside of Europe, growing out of the fact that these merchants now had incredible amounts of precious metals or metal-based money at their command and could offer previously unheard-of prices. Perhaps half the gold and silver brought back from America in the sixteenth century was contraband, hence available directly for this kind of enterprise, but the remainder, after passing through the great customs houses, quickly entered circulation as the Iberian governments paid out gold and silver for goods and services.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Céspedes, &#039;&#039;Latin America: The Early Years&#039;&#039; (1974); McAlister, &#039;&#039;Spain and Portugal in the New World, 1492-1700&#039;&#039; (1984).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Colonial enterprise in the sixteenth century produced capital in a number of ways. One was gold and silver mining. A second was plantation agriculture, principally in Brazil. A third was the trade with Asia in spices, cloth, and the like. A fourth and by no means minor element was the profit returned to European investors from a variety of productive and commercial enterprises in the Americas, including profit on production for local use in Mexico, Peru, and elsewhere; profit on sale of goods imported from Europe; profit on a variety of secondary exports from America (leather, dyestuffs, etc.); profit on land sales in America; profit returned to Europe by families and corporations holding land grants in Mexico and other areas. A fifth was slaving. A sixth, piracy. Notice that all of this is normal capital accumulation; none of it is the mysterious thing called &amp;quot;primitive accumulation.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In classical political economy, and in some of modern Marxist economics, the idea of &amp;quot;primitive accumulation&amp;quot; serves as a kind of catchall for ways of accumulating capital that did not involve—in essence—capitalist enterprise. Pirate treasures and the like were &amp;quot;primitive accumulation,&amp;quot; and, in general, the kind of wealth brought from the American colonies in the sixteenth century was considered primitive accumulation. (According to Marx, &amp;quot;The treasures captured outside Europe by undisguised looting, enslavement and murder flowed back to the mother-country and were turned into capital there&amp;quot;: Marx, &#039;&#039;Capital&#039;&#039;, 1976, vol. 1, p. 918). But &amp;quot;primitive accumulation&amp;quot; cannot really be defined with any precision. I will argue here that the wealth accumulated in the Americas was primitive only in the sense that it was part of a preindustrial-capitalist economy. In other respects, notably in the involvement of labor and value produced by labor, it was regular accumulation. The distinction is very fundamental, as we will see, because, if what transpired in the colonies was not &amp;quot;real&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;ordinary&amp;quot; accumulation, scholars can claim that the colonial economy was backward and &amp;quot;feudal,&amp;quot; rather than a primitive sort of capitalism.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; (Value from wage labor, not to mention forced labor, was involved, and much of it was value from production, not simply from trade.) Accumulation from these sources was massive. It was massive enough so that the process cannot be dismissed as a minor adjunct of protocapitalist accumulation in Europe itself, and it was massive enough, I believe, to fuel a major transformation in Europe, the rise to power of the bourgeoisie and the immense efflorescence of preindustrial capitalism, in ways that we will discuss.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Precious Metals ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We notice first the export of gold and silver from the Americas and its insertion within the circuits of an Eastern Hemispheric market economy in which gold and silver already provide the common measure of value, directly or indirectly, in almost all markets. The flow of precious metals began immediately after the European discovery of America, and by 1640 at least 180 tons of gold and 17,000 tons of silver are known to have reached Europe.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;E. J. Hamilton, &#039;&#039;American Treasure and the Price Revolution in Spain, 1501-1650&#039;&#039; (1934); Brading and Cross, &amp;quot;Colonial Silver Mining: Mexico and Peru&amp;quot; (1972); H. and P. Chaunu, &#039;&#039;Séville et l&#039;Atlantique (1504-1650)&#039;&#039;, vol. 6, pt. 1 (1956); Cross, &amp;quot;American Bullion Production and Export 1550-1750&amp;quot; (1983).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; (The real figures must be at least double these amounts, since records were poor for some areas and periods and since contraband was immensely important.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See note 19 above.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;) Additional quantities of gold came from colonial activities in Africa. In the period 1561 to 1580 about 85% of the entire world&#039;s production of silver came from the Americas. The simple quantity of gold and silver in circulation in the Eastern Hemisphere economy as a whole was profoundly affected: hemispheric silver stock may have been tripled and gold stock increased by 20% during the course of the sixteenth century as a result of bullion brought from America.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Vicens Vives, &#039;&#039;An Economic History of Spain&#039;&#039; (1969).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The fact that much of the pre-existing stock must have been frozen in uses not permitting direct or indirect conversion to money suggests to me that American bullion may have as much as doubled the gold- and silver-based money supply of the Eastern Hemisphere as a whole. (In Europe, the circulation of metal coins increased eight- or ten-fold in the course of the century.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Vilar, &#039;&#039;A History of Gold and Money, 1450-1920&#039;&#039; (1976).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;) This process must be seen in perspective: it is money flowing constantly and in massive amounts into Europe, through Europe, and from Europe to Asia and Africa, constantly replenished at the entry points (Seville, Antwerp, Genoa, etc.) with more American supplies, and constantly permitting those who hold it to offer better prices for all goods—as well as labor and land—in all markets, than anyone else had ever been able to offer in prior times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The importance of these flows of gold and silver is routinely underestimated by scholars, mainly for three reasons (apart from implicit diffusionism, the simple tendency to undervalue causal events in non-Europe). First, the process is seen somehow as purely primitive accumulation. But the metals were mined by workers and transported by workers; the enterprise overall involved risk capital and all of the other familiar traits of the sorts of protocapitalist productive enterprises which were characteristic of that time (that it was partly state-controlled does not alter this argument, nor does the fact that some of the labor was unfree); and very major economic and social systems were built around the mines themselves in Mexico, Peru, and other parts of America.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Second, the argument that precious metal flows significantly affected the European economy is dismissed by some scholars as &amp;quot;monetarism&amp;quot; (roughly, the theory that changes in money alone are very significant for changes in the economy overall). The error in this charge is a failure to see the sixteenth-century economy in its own, appropriate, geographical and social context, and to impute to the economy of that time the liquidity of exchange and the relative lack of spatial friction that characterizes the capitalist economy of our own time. Two facts here are basic. First of all, the possession of precious metal was highly localized in space. European merchants, as a community, obtained it and set it in motion outward, toward rural Europe and toward markets outside of Europe. Second of all, the supply of precious metal was essentially continuous, and therefore the advantage held by European protocapitalists in terms of prices they could offer for commodities, labor, and land was persistently higher than the prices which competitors anywhere could offer. So the protocapitalist community very steadily undermined the competition in all markets across the Eastern Hemisphere, within Europe and without, eventually gaining control of most international seaborne trade in most of the mercantile-maritime centers from Sofala to Calicut to Malacca.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;There remained, nonetheless, a very large trade carried on by non-European merchants in the China Seas and the Indian Ocean.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The penetration of these markets, the acquisition of trading bases, and the control of a few small but important producing areas (like some islands of the Moluccas), was not a matter of European rationality or venturesomeness, but rather reflected the availability to Europeans of American gold and silver, trans-shipped through Lisbon, Antwerp, Acapulco (in the &amp;quot;Manila galleons&amp;quot;), and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A third sort of doubt about the importance of American gold and silver is associated with the critique of Earl Hamilton&#039;s classic theory that the precious metal supply produced an imbalance between factors of production in the European economy, produced thereby a windfall of profits, and thus in effect destabilized the economy and moved it toward capitalism.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;E. J. Hamilton, &amp;quot;American Treasure and the Rise of Capitalism&amp;quot; (1929), and &#039;&#039;American Treasure and the Price Revolution in Spain&#039;&#039; (1934). Also see the important book by Walter Prescott Webb, &#039;&#039;The Great Frontier&#039;&#039; (1951), which builds in part on Hamilton&#039;s theory to argue for the great importance of the Americas in the rise of Europe during this period and later.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Hamilton was one of the few economic historians to perceive that American gold and silver was a crucial, central cause of change in Europe, although he was (partly) wrong about the mechanisms that brought about this change. The metals did not transform the economy in any direct sense. Rather, they enriched the protocapitalist class and thereby gave them the power to immensely accelerate the transformation that was already underway—not only in Europe—toward capitalism as a political and social system, and to prevent non-European capitalists from sharing in the process. American bullion hastened the rise of capitalism and was crucial in the process by which it became centrated in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Plantations ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The impact of the slave plantation system on Europe&#039;s economy was felt mainly in the seventeenth century and thereafter. But part of the general undervaluing of the significance of early colonialism—of the world outside of Europe—is a tendency not to notice that the plantation system was of considerable importance even in the sixteenth century. Moreover, the early history of the Atlantic sugar plantation economy gives a revealing picture of the way in which the protocapitalist colonial economy was eroding the feudal economy. Sugar planting was not a new enterprise; sugar (contrary to myth) was not a rare commodity, and sugar planting (also contrary to myth) was not an insignificant economic curiosity at the fringe of capitalist development. Commercial and feudal cane sugar production was found throughout the Mediterranean in the fifteenth century.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Galloway, &#039;&#039;The Sugar Cane Industry: An Historical Geography from its Origins to 1914&#039;&#039; (1989); Deerr, &#039;&#039;The History of Sugar&#039;&#039; (1949-1950).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Although little is known about the way planting was organized, it is known that commercial sugar production was important in India 2,000 years ago (apparently it was a Mauryan state industry), and in the Middle Ages commercial sugar planting under various feudal and probably protocapitalist systems of organization was found in East Africa, part of West Africa, Morocco, Egypt, Cyprus, the Levant, various parts of Mediterranean Europe, and other regions.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See, for example, Galloway, &#039;&#039;The Sugar Cane Industry&#039;&#039; (1989); Deerr, &#039;&#039;The History of Sugar&#039;&#039; (1949-1950); Watson, &#039;&#039;Agricultural Innovation in the Early Islamic World: The Diffusion of Crops and Farming Techniques, 700-1100&#039;&#039; (1983); N. S. Gupta, &#039;&#039;Industrial Structure of India During the Medieval Period&#039;&#039; (1970); Niane, ed., &#039;&#039;UNESCO General History of Africa, Vol. 4&#039;&#039; (1984); Bray, &#039;&#039;Science and Civilization in China, Vol. 6, Part 2, Agriculture&#039;&#039; (1984).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; If cane sugar was not an important commodity in northern Europe this was because of its price, as against that of sweeteners like honey. Europeans first moved the commercial plantation system out into the newly settled Atlantic islands from Madeira to São Tomé and then vastly expanded production in the Americas. But throughout the sixteenth century the new plantations merely supplanted the older Mediterranean sugar-producing regions; total production for the Europe-Mediterranean market did not rise until later.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Deerr, &#039;&#039;The History of Sugar&#039;&#039; (1949-1950).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; This was capitalist production displacing feudal and semifeudal plantation production, using the twin advantages of colonialism: empty land and cheap labor. No other industry was as significant as the plantation system for the rise of capitalism before the nineteenth century.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1600 Brazil exported about 30,000 tons of sugar with a gross sale value of £2,000,000. This is about double the total annual value of all exports from England to all of the world in that period.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Simonsen, &#039;&#039;Historia Económica do Brasil, 1500-1820&#039;&#039; (1944); Furtado, &#039;&#039;The Economic Growth of Brazil&#039;&#039; (1963); Minchinton, &#039;&#039;The Growth of English Overseas Trade&#039;&#039; (1969). Also see the more general, but extremely important, works of I. Wallerstein, A. G. Frank, and S. Amin, particularly Wallerstein&#039;s &#039;&#039;The Modern World System&#039;&#039;, 3 vols. (1974-1988), Frank&#039;s &#039;&#039;Capitalism and underdevelopment in Latin America&#039;&#039; (1968) and his &#039;&#039;World Accumulation, 1492-1789&#039;&#039; (1978), and Amin&#039;s &#039;&#039;Accumulation on a World Scale&#039;&#039; (1974) as well as his &#039;&#039;Unequal Development&#039;&#039; (1976).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It will be recalled that British exports in that period, principally of wool, are sometimes considered paradigmatic for the &amp;quot;awakening,&amp;quot; indeed the &amp;quot;rise,&amp;quot; of early-modern Europe. Also in 1600, per capita earnings from sugar in Brazil, for all except Indians, was about equal to per capita income in Britain later in that century.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Edel, &amp;quot;The Brazilian Sugar Cycle of the 17th Century and the Rise of West Indian Competition&amp;quot; (1969).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The rate of accumulation in the Brazilian plantation industry was so high at the end of the sixteenth century that it was able to generate enough capital to finance a doubling of its capacity every two years.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Furtado, &#039;&#039;Economic Growth of Brazil&#039;&#039; (1963).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Early in the seventeenth century the Dutch protocapitalist community (which was heavily involved in the Brazilian sugar enterprise, mainly in the shipping and sales dimensions) calculated that profit rates in the industry were 56% per year, totalling nearly £1,000,000 per year. The rate of profit was higher still a bit earlier, at the close of the sixteenth century, when production costs, including the cost of purchasing slaves, amounted to only one-fifth of income from sugar sales. These statistics should be seen against the background of an industry that was not responding to some novel demand for some novel product in an already-rising Europe, but was merely (in essence) undercutting the precapitalist Mediterranean producers of Spain, Italy, Morocco, Egypt, and elsewhere, in the supply of a highly important commercial product.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sugar is of course the centerpiece of the plantation system down to the late eighteenth century. But other kinds of colonial production, mainly but not only agricultural, and fully as close to capitalism as was the Brazil plantation system, were of some significance even before the end of the sixteenth century. There was, for instance, some direct production of spices in the Moluccas and some European involvement with Indian merchant capitalists in the organization pepper production in South India. Dyes, tobacco, and other commercially valuable products were flowing from America to Europe. A very large agricultural economy existed in parts of America to supply food, fiber, leather, and other necessities to the mining settlements and other settlements. Immediately after 1492 (or before?) west European fishermen and whalers developed an immense industry in Newfoundland and elsewhere on the North American coast.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To all of this must be added the profits from other sorts of colonial and semicolonial activities in the Eastern Hemisphere.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See K. N. Chaudhuri, &#039;&#039;Trade and civilization in the Indian Ocean&#039;&#039; (1985); Satish Chandra, &#039;&#039;The Indian Ocean: Explorations in History, Commerce and Politics&#039;&#039; (1987); Magalhães-Godinho, &#039;&#039;L&#039;Economie de L&#039;Empire Portugais aux XV et XVI Siècles&#039;&#039; (1969).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The slave trade was highly profitable even in the sixteenth century. European merchant capitalists of all nations profited greatly from the Lisbon trade with Asia and East Africa in textiles and particularly spices (the Asian spices carried by the Portuguese and sold mainly through Antwerp did not replace the traditional Mediterranean flow but rather added to it, hence providing a novel and important source of accumulation). There was, in addition, considerable profit from the within-Asia trade resulting from the domination of long-distance oceanic trade in East Africa, India, and Southeast Asia by Portugal (with participation also by Spain and later Holland). Broadly speaking, however, accumulation deriving from Western Hemisphere colonial activities far outweighed that from Eastern Hemisphere activities, colonial and semicolonial, in the sixteenth century. Overall, both the quantitative significance, in that century, of production and trade in colonial and semicolonial areas and the immense profitability of the enterprise, that is, the rapid capital accumulation which it fostered directly and (in Europe) indirectly, add up to a significant vector force, easily able to change the process of economic transformation in Europe from sluggish evolution to rapid revolution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Effects ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There seem to be two particularly good ways to assess the real significance for the rise of capitalism of sixteenth-century colonial production in America, and some other areas, along with trading, piracy, and the like, in Asia and Africa. One way is to trace the direct and indirect effects of colonialism on European society, looking for movements of goods and capital, tracing labor flows into industries and regions stimulated or created by colonial enterprise, and looking at the way urbanization flourished in those cities that were engaged in colonial (and more generally extra-European) enterprise or closely connected to it, and the like. This processes overall would then be examined in relation to the totality of changes taking place in Europe in that century, to determine whether, in Europe itself, changes clearly resulting from the direct and indirect impact of extra-European activities were the prime movers for economic and social change. This task still remains undone. The second way is to attempt to arrive at a global calculation of the amount of labor (free and unfree) that was employed in European enterprises in America, Africa, and Asia, along with the amount of labor in Europe itself which was employed in activities derived from extra-European enterprise, and then to look at these quantities in relation to the total labor market in Europe for economic activities that can be thought of as connected to the rise of capitalism. This task has not been done either; indeed, as far as I know little research has been done on sixteenth-century labor forces and labor markets in American settlements or indeed in Europe. So the proposition which I am arguing here, concerning the significance of sixteenth-century colonialism (and related extra-European activities) for the rise of capitalism in Europe, perhaps cannot be tested as yet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Still, there are suggestive indications. Some of these have been mentioned already: matters of assessing the quantities and values of colonial exports to Europe. We can also speculate about labor. One approach is through population. The population of Spain and Portugal in the mid-sixteenth century may have been around nine million.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;de Vries, &#039;&#039;European Urbanization&#039;&#039; (1984).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Estimates of sixteenth-century populations for America vary widely and there is much controversy about population levels and rates of decline,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;William Denevan, &amp;quot;Introduction,&amp;quot; in Denevan, ed., &#039;&#039;The Native Population of the Americas in 1492&#039;&#039; (1976), and &amp;quot;The Pristine Myth: The Landscape of the Americas in 1492&amp;quot; (1992); Lovell, &amp;quot;&#039;Heavy Shadows and Black Night&#039;&amp;quot; (1992).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; but for the present, highly speculative, and essentially methodological, argument, I will ignore the controversies and play with global estimates. The population of Mexico at midcentury may have been around six million, a population that was undergoing continuous decline from its preconquest level of perhaps 30 million down to one-tenth of that figure (or perhaps less) in 1600.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Borah and Cook, &amp;quot;La demografía histórica de América Latina: necesidades y perspectivas&amp;quot; (1972); Whitmore, &amp;quot;A Simulation of Sixteenth-Century Population Collapse in the Basin of Mexico&amp;quot; (1991).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Populations in the Andean regions involved in mineral and textile production for the Spaniards may (I am speculating) have totalled five million in the late sixteenth century. Perhaps we can add an additional two million for the population of other parts of Ibero-America that were within regions of European control and presumably involved, more or less, in the European-dominated economy. Let us, then, use a ball-park estimate of 13 million for the American population that was potentially yielding surplus value to Europeans in the mid-to-late sixteenth century. The population seems larger than that of Iberia. Granted, the comparison should be made with a larger part of Europe, certainly including the Low Countries, which were intimately involved in the exploitation of America (and Asia) at this period, along with parts of Italy and other countries. Assume then a figure of 20 million for Europe as against 13 million for America.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I see no reason to argue that the European populations were more intimately involved in the rise of capitalism than the American populations—that is, the 13 million people who we assume were in European-dominated regions. It is likely that the proportion of the American population that was engaged in labor for Europeans, as wage work, as forced labor including slave labor, and as the labor of farmers delivering goods as tribute or rent in kind, was no lower than the proportion of Iberian people engaged in labor for commercialized sectors of the Spanish and Portuguese economy. Moreover, the level of exploitation for Indian labor must have been much higher than that for Iberian labor because portions of the Indian labor force were worked literally to death in this period—depopulation was due in part to forced labor—and so the capital generated by each American worker must have been higher than that generated by a European worker. (We need to remind ourselves again that we are dealing with a preindustrial, basically medieval economy in Europe. It cannot be argued, for instance, that technology or fixed capital in production was more advanced in the utilization of European than in that of American labor, so exploitation was in the last analysis a function of human effort.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We must next take into account the fact that the capital accumulated from the labor of Americans went directly to the economic sectors in Europe that were building capitalism, whereas most workers and peasants in Europe were still connected to essentially medieval sectors of the economy. Then we must add the labor of Africans and Asians. And finally, we must take into account the European workers, in Europe and elsewhere, whose labor must be considered part of the extra-European economy. By this admittedly speculative reasoning, free and unfree workers in the colonial and semicolonial economy of the late sixteenth century were providing as much or more surplus value and accumulated capital for European protocapitalism, the rising bourgeoisie, as were the workers of Europe itself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Little is known about the American work force in the sixteenth century, but, again, some speculations are possible. Las Casas asserted that three million or more Indians had been enslaved by the Spaniards in the northern part of Spanish America during the first half of the sixteenth century, and this figure, once dismissed, is now taken seriously.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Semo, &#039;&#039;Historia del Capitalismo en México: Los Orígenes, 1521-1763&#039;&#039; (1982).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It is known that more than 400,000 were enslaved in Nicaragua alone.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Radell, &amp;quot;The Indian Slave Trade and Population of Nicaragua During the Sixteenth Century&amp;quot; (1976).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It is realized also that Indian slave labor was extremely important in the European economy of America in that period, in Brazilian sugar planting, Mesoamerican and Antillean mining, and elsewhere. Let us speculate that 100,000 Indians were working as slaves for Spaniards in a given year in the mid-sixteenth century. Perhaps 20,000 Indians were working at free and forced labor in the mines of Mexico and the Andes in the latter part of the century,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Bakewell, &amp;quot;Mining in Colonial Spanish America&amp;quot; (1984).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and it is safe to assume that five times that number were involved in the mining economy overall. Potosí, the great Andean silver-mining city, had a population of 120,000 in the 1570s (larger than Paris, Rome, Madrid, Seville). A much greater but unknown number of Indians were workers on haciendas and other European enterprises, or provided periodic forced labor, or provided tribute and rent in kind. (The Cortés encomienda in Mexico included 50,000 Indians.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Semo, &#039;&#039;Historia del Capitalismo&#039;&#039; (1982).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;) There may have been 100,000 African slaves in America and on the island of São Tomé in the closing years of the century.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;For various calculations, see Curtin, &#039;&#039;The Atlantic Slave Trade&#039;&#039; (1969); Furtado, &#039;&#039;Economic Growth of Brazil&#039;&#039; (1963); Deerr, &#039;&#039;History of Sugar&#039;&#039; (1949-1950); Florescano, &amp;quot;The Formation and Economic Structure of the Hacienda in New Spain&amp;quot;; Inikori, &#039;&#039;The African Slave Trade from the Fifteenth to the Nineteenth Century&#039;&#039; (1979), esp. pp. 57 and 248; McAlister, &#039;&#039;Spain and Portugal in the New World&#039;&#039; (1984).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; There may have been 300,000 Europeans, Mulattos, and Mestizos in the Americas in 1570,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;McAlister, &#039;&#039;Spain and Portugal in the New World&#039;&#039; (1984).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; of whom conceivably as many as 250,000 were workers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Perhaps it would not be unreasonable to estimate that one million people were working in the European economy of the Western Hemisphere in the closing years of the sixteenth century, perhaps half of them engaged in productive labor in distinctly capitalist enterprises. Can this have been more than the European protocapitalist work force of the time? All of this is somewhat speculative, but it points toward the conclusion that American labor was a truly massive part of the total labor, and the surplus value it produced, that fueled the rise of capitalism in Europe in the early modern period. To this we must add three additional quantities: labor involved in the slave trade within continental Africa;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In the present discussion I am giving far too little attention to Africa and particularly to the effects of the slave trade in Africa. See Chapter 2.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; labor in other extra-European regions (São Tomé, Ternate, Calicut, and so on) that was incorporated into the European economy or produced goods for trade to Europeans; and labor of Europeans, inside and outside of Europe, which was part of the extra-European economy—sailors, soldiers, stevedores, teamsters, clerks, foremen, and the rest.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the sixteenth century the rise of Europe had well begun. As capital flowed into Europe, and as other effects of colonial enterprise also flowed into the European system or region, secondary causation appeared, including agricultural expansion and transformation, primitive manufacturing, urbanization, and expansion of rural settlements and the commercial economy. These latter have been looked at carefully but in a mainly tunnel-historical framework; as a result, the rise of Europe in the sixteenth century has appeared to be a process taking place wholly within the European spatial system, and caused wholly (or mainly) by autochthonous forces. As we have seen, this is an inaccurate picture and an incomplete one. Urbanization was taking place, but mainly in areas connected to the extra-European economy. Inflation was also (with some qualifications) most severe in these areas.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Fisher, &amp;quot;The Price Revolution: A Monetary Interpretation&amp;quot; (1989).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Among the sectors of the European economy that were growing in the sixteenth century, some, like piracy and shipbuilding, were tied directly to the extra-European economy, while others, like wheat production and North Atlantic fishing, were stimulated directly and indirectly by that economy.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Dunn, &#039;&#039;Sugar and Slaves: The Rise of the Planter Class in the English West Indies, 1624-1713&#039;&#039; (1972), pp. 10-11.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I would generalize as follows. The initiating condition, at the beginning of the sixteenth century, is a west and central European economy that is undergoing slow but definite change toward capitalism—as are many regions of Asia and Africa at that same time. Novel forces intrude into the European system, as impinging boundary processes, because of the conquest of America and the other extra-European events, intruding processes which consist mainly of capital and material products (and of course the labor embedded in these things). These then intersect with the ongoing evolving economic, technological, demographic, and other changes. Many new changes appear, as a result not of direct stimulus from the extra-European world but from the changes already underway, which themselves are mainly results of those extra-European boundary processes. The internal European changes of course feed forward to produce intensification of the processes going on in America, Asia, etc., and these, in turn, produce still more changes within Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We can see a geographical pattern in all of this. There is a tendency for major economic changes to occur first near the mercantile-maritime centers that participate in the extra-European processes. Obviously, not all of the centers that existed in 1492 were equal participants in that process, with some of the Iberian, Italian, and Flemish port cities taking the lead. But the network was sufficiently tight so that Hanseatic and English ports were early participants, as were inland cities with special economic characteristics, like Augsburg and Paris. From these many centers, the process spread into the interior of Europe, first into areas that supplied basic staple goods like wheat—the growth at that time of the Baltic wheat trade and manorial production of wheat in parts of central and east Europe is well known—and then elsewhere. At any given time we see a broad and irregular spatial pattern (of the type which geographers call &amp;quot;distance decay&amp;quot;) of descending levels of urbanization and commercial production as we move across the landscape toward interior Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other processes were underway as well, and so the pattern that I have mapped out here is much too simple. Population growth in some areas reflected sixteenth-century economic changes associated with extra-European events but in other areas it signified recovery from the fourteenth- and fifteenth-century population declines. Other changes, such as peasant revolts, reflected the general crisis of the late feudal economy, but the sixteenth-century rise of prices and (at least in some areas) rents was a contributing force in the unrest. As to the Reformation, I would argue in the Tawneyan tradition that it was broadly an effect, not an independent cause, of the economic changes that were taking place in Europe in the sixteenth century.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Tawney, &#039;&#039;Religion and the Rise of Capitalism&#039;&#039; (1952 edition).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; But which changes? The internal crumbling of feudalism? The forces impinging from the extra-European world? Both? Probably the spatial diffusion of the Reformation in the sixteenth century reflected mainly intra-European forces,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hannemann, &#039;&#039;The Diffusion of the Reformation in Southwestern Germany, 1518-1534&#039;&#039; (1975).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; but by the time of the seventeenth-century bourgeois revolutions, the areas most deeply involved in extra-European activities tended to be centers also of Protestantism. In short: the spatial patterns of change in sixteenth-century Europe reflect to some extent the integration of Europe with America, and secondarily Africa and Asia, but the pattern is still somewhat unclear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overall, the processes of transformation and modernization in sixteenth-century Europe were terribly complex, varying in time and place throughout most of that continent. But the generalization is nonetheless fairly straightforward. The extra-European component, after 1492, led to an immense stimulation of changes in Europe, those that produced on the one hand an increase in the rate of European economic change and growth, and on the other hand the beginnings of a centration of capitalism in Europe (a process discussed further below). By the end of the sixteenth century these extra-European forces had laid the foundation for the political and social triumph of (preindustrial) capitalism, or rather for the fact that the Glorious Revolution occurred in 1688, instead of much later, and in England, instead of Egypt or Zimbabwe or India or China (or all of these at once).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Colonialism and Capitalism in the Seventeenth Century ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the middle of the seventeenth century, changes were taking place in Europe at a rapid rate and on a massive scale, and the problem of sorting out the internal and external causes and effects for this period is a very complex matter. In this same period there occurred a massive expansion, in location and intensity, of formal and informal colonialism in the Americas and around the coasts of Africa and Asia, and for these extra-European processes the problem of complexity is compounded by a lack of quantitative data regarding volume of production, numbers in the labor forces, capital accumulation, and other information that would help us to judge the role of colonialism (as a broad concept) in the changes that were taking place within Europe. These matters are far too complex to permit us to discuss them satisfactorily here. I will limit myself to a rather sketchy intervention or (if you prefer to call it that) a model.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the beginning of the seventeenth century, the Netherlands and England had emerged as the centers (or center) of capitalist development in Europe.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;There is debate as to why the center shifted from Iberia to the lower Rhine-southern England region. Perhaps the same forces which had made this northern region a mercantile-maritime center in the Middle Ages permitted it to gain control of the overseas enterprise: namely, large population, abundant nearby fertile land and forest resources, access to many markets (the Rhine, the Baltic, etc.). Vis-à-vis Italy, it held most of these same advantages plus that of location on the Atlantic and possession of the requirements for rapid growth of oceanic shipping and fishing fleets.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Although Spain continued to feed huge quantities of silver and some gold into Europe in the first half of this century, and Portuguese plantations in Brazil and trading activities in Asia continued to be important fountains of accumulation, the main expansion of colonial enterprise after 1600 was Dutch and English. The crucial component was the West Indian plantation system, which expanded explosively after about 1640. (Fifty thousand slaves were imported into Barbados alone in the following 50 years. Probably two million slaves were imported into America in the course of the seventeenth century.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Deerr, &#039;&#039;The History of Sugar&#039;&#039; (1949-1950); Curtin, &#039;&#039;The Atlantic Slave Trade&#039;&#039; (1969); and Inikori, &#039;&#039;The African Slave Trade from the Fifteenth to the Nineteenth Century&#039;&#039; (1979). The question whether slave labor is or is not proletarian—a serious issue in discussions of the slave plantation system (see Mintz, &#039;&#039;Sweetness and Power: The Place of Sugar in Modern History&#039;&#039;, 1985)—will be taken up later in this chapter. In any event there is no disagreement about the contribution of slave (and other forced) labor to capital accumulation, hence to surplus value generation, using &amp;quot;surplus value&amp;quot; in a sense appropriate to modes of production different from industrial capitalism.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;) If we place the Dutch and British sugar colonies in the same economic space as the metropolitan countries themselves, it seems likely that the sugar plantation economy was the single largest productive sector in this expanded European economy (or &amp;quot;Atlantic economy,&amp;quot; as it is often called) aside from family farming, and by far the largest single generator of value. (Brazilian plantations, producing partly for Dutch capital, were still, in the mid-seventeenth century, more massive than the West Indian.) But British and Dutch enterprise in the Eastern Hemisphere was also expanding very rapidly; the East India companies were formed around 1600, and by 1650 the Dutch and British together controlled most of the intercontinental trade—unequal trade, and in a sense semicolonial trade—with Asia, as well as the slave trade in Africa. Meanwhile, Spanish enterprise was yielding substantial accumulation in America (whether or not there was a &amp;quot;seventeenth-century depression&amp;quot;). And we must not ignore the great variety of additional extra-European sources of accumulation: a now massive fishing industry in the northwestern Atlantic, resource extraction and the beginnings of European settlement in North America, the slave trade, piracy, Russian enterprise in Siberia, and much more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The key question is this: How central was the role played by colonial and semicolonial enterprise in the seventeenth-century rise of Europe and of capitalism within Europe? The model I would build involves two elements. The first is a continuation and enlargement of the sixteenth-century processes, which, as I argued, involved a sluggishly growing European economy quickened into rapid development by extra-European forces after 1492. By the middle of the next century the European bourgeoisie had strengthened their class position and (in the key locations) had enticed much of the feudal aristocracy into joining bourgeois enterprise,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;However, a good share of the old landowning elite joined in the new enterprise. It is not correct to assume that the new protocapitalist elite was in simple opposition to the old elite. There is much confusion on this matter, some of it occasioned by literal acceptance of Marx&#039;s idea that merchants are somehow not the class that evolves into the early capitalist, entrepreneurial, accumulating class. On the role of medieval merchants in protocapitalism, see Thrupp, &#039;&#039;The Merchant Class of Medieval London (1300-1500)&#039;&#039; (1948); Carus-Wilson, &#039;&#039;Medieval Merchant Venturers&#039;&#039; (1967).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and had well begun the process of destroying protocapitalist enterprise outside of Europe, as a result of the inflowing capital from America (and secondarily in that period, Africa and Asia).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, apart from stocks of precious metal, it is improbable that capital accumulated from extra-European enterprise in 1500-1650 amounted to a sizeable share of total invested capital in Europe, even in the more advanced regions of Europe, even in the economic sectors in which capital was more or less fluid. What it did do was provide a critical increment: everywhere it allowed the merchant-entrepreneurial community to offer higher prices for products, labor, and land; everywhere it put investment capital in the hands of classes and communities other than the traditional elite, the group less likely to accumulate beyond its social needs and less likely to reinvest profits in new ventures. Colonial capital, in a word, was new capital. Without it, the sluggish late-medieval economy of pre-1492 days would have continued its slow progress out of feudalism and toward capitalism (or something like capitalism), but there would have been no Seventeenth-Century Bourgeois Revolution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Perhaps the essence of capitalism, at a level of aggregation above the worker-capitalist class relation, is the reinvestment of profits to enlarge productive capacity. Capitalist enterprise can be technologically primitive or advanced but always, to survive, it must accumulate capital. It is never in equilibrium. This point leads us to focus on the conditions that permitted continued growth, exponential growth, in the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries. This growth did not involve technological change in any important way: production increases were mainly matters of drawing more workers and more productive materials into traditional productive processes to yield more output. Given the fact that capital for expansion was available because of the extra-European enterprises and other, related developments, the key problem in the seventeenth century must have been markets, or demand. The capitalist had access to capital, had access to labor—at the levels of production then prevailing a truly massive proletarianization was not necessary—and had access to raw materials (some European, some colonial). The growth of a capitalist enterprise in that period was perhaps constrained most seriously by the need to open up new markets: to sell more of the product so that more could be produced, more capital generated, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some of these markets were in Europe itself, reflecting at first the ability of capitalist enterprise to sell traditional products (like sugar) at lower costs than prevailed under the feudal economy, but gradually the urbanization and commercialization of the continent brought in feedback loops so that the newer way of life, generated by the rise of capitalism, itself generated more internal markets for capitalism. But probably the main growth of markets for protocapitalist enterprise in the seventeenth century, and thus the main stimulus for the rise of capitalism, was outside the system. This is well known in the case of trade with eastern Europe. It is known in the case of markets in America, Africa, and Asia, but the quantitative significance of these extra-European markets has not been fully evaluated. In the case of the English bourgeoisie, the main markets for capitalist enterprise, including agricultural and nonagricultural products from England and re-exported products from abroad, were in America, Africa, and Asia, along with nontraditional markets in the Baltic. For the Dutch, extra-European commerce was even more important. Italian communities continued to depend considerably on the eastern Mediterranean.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the seventeenth century, then, the crucial role of the extra-European world, added on to and perhaps more significant than its sixteenth-century role as provider of bullion and some other products, was to permit an expansion of demand—including forced demand, as on the slave plantations—for capitalist products, a demand sufficiently great so that productive capacity and output of capitalist enterprises could continue to grow at an incredibly fast rate. This growth in output was one of the two essential seventeenth-century forces involved in the rise of capitalism. The second force was, simply, the political triumph itself, the bourgeois revolution. This provided the bourgeoisie with the legal and political power to rip apart the fabric of the society in its quest for accumulation. Forced proletarianization thereby became possible, as did government support for almost any strategy that the new accumulating elite had in mind. And an Industrial Revolution, a transformation of the methods of production so that output could increase at an even greater rate, became (one might say) inevitable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== THE CENTRATION OF CAPITALISM ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The phrase &amp;quot;the rise of capitalism&amp;quot; generally evokes an image of factories, steam engines, masses of wage workers, cities grimy with coal dust: industrial capitalism. Our discussion thus far has not dealt with the rise of industrial capitalism—the Industrial Revolution—but with the precursors to that momentous event. But let me, for a moment, review some of these precursors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before 1492, most of the preconditions that would be critical for the eventual rise of industrial capitalism were present not merely in parts of Europe but also in parts of Asia and Africa. After 1492, in the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries, Europe acquired three additional preconditions. One was the very considerable accumulation of wealth from the mines and plantations of America and from trade in Asia and Africa. The second, closely related to the first, was the huge enlargement of markets outside of western Europe for products either produced in western Europe or imported and then reexported; that is, a very great and almost constantly growing demand. Third, and most important of all, the social sectors involved with capitalism took political power on a wide scale in western Europe, something that had not happened elsewhere except on very small terrains. This, the bourgeois revolution, allowed the emerging capitalist class-community to mobilize state power toward its further rise, such that the entire society contributed to the underwriting of colonial adventures and to the preparation of infrastructure such as cities and roads, while the state&#039;s police and military power could now be mobilized to force people off the land and into wage work, and to conscript people and resources for advantageous wars abroad. All three of these precursors, as I have argued, appeared because of—or would not have appeared had it not been for—colonialism.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Historians engage in fierce debates about the causes of the Industrial Revolution. Most of the candidate causes, or &amp;quot;factors,&amp;quot; are theories within the &amp;quot;European miracle&amp;quot; category which we discussed and tried to refute in Chapter 2. Propositions about, for instance, general medieval modernization of the European economy and polity, medieval technological revolutions, &amp;quot;rationality&amp;quot; in medieval and later times, and the like, are built into the most common explanations for the later emergence of an Industrial Revolution. We showed, I hope, that all of these processes were at work outside of Europe as well as inside, so that they cannot be enlisted as causes of an event that happened only in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is a problem where the sequence and dating of events is extremely important. The concept of the Industrial Revolution is usually bound up with two more specific transformations: the development of steam power and generally novel technology in industrial production, and the development of wage labor in industrial production. But the timing is wrong. The technological part of the Industrial Revolution became important very late in the process, too late to explain the revolution itself. It is certainly true that technological advances were taking place in European manufacturing during the period from 1492 to, say, 1750, but very little of this technology was unique to Europe, as we have seen, and, most crucially, the technological advances that eventually became important in increasing manufacturing production and increasing labor efficiency in that production occurred much later: in the last decades of the eighteenth century and, much more profusely, in the nineteenth century. In agriculture, the main technological advances were matters of increasing areal productivity in an environment of declining agricultural labor, but all of the essential technological changes that were involved in this process were traditional and were known outside of Europe. (A few scholars give great weight to newer crops like turnips, but such matters were of very minor importance—setting aside the much earlier introduction of the potato—compared to such things as the increased use of capital and purchased input nutrients. The fact that farmers in western Europe learned how to increase their production while decreasing labor inputs is not at all novel in the history and geography of agriculture. Thus the agricultural revolution of the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries can be considered an effect, not a cause, in the industrializing and urbanizing process.) So the technological side of the Industrial Revolution was not primary cause except as it may have been primary cause for a hemisphere-wide and very slow transformation, as we discussed previously. It appeared too late.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A somewhat similar argument can be given in response to the thesis that the development, by capitalism, of mass wage labor in manufacturing production was primary cause of the Industrial Revolution. This argument is most commonly put forth by those Marxist economists who hold to a strict construction of one of the arguments in Marx&#039;s &#039;&#039;Capital&#039;&#039;. It is indisputable that you cannot have fully mature industrial capitalism without basing it in a wage-labor setting that is also a (relatively) free labor market, one in which workers can go from employer to employer. But these conditions did not exist prior to the late eighteenth century. Wage labor was predominant, but little of it was employed in manufacturing, and hardly ever did a worker confront a really free labor market, with real choices as to place of employment. These were features of industrial capitalism as it emerged after the Industrial Revolution really got rolling.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All such theories about the causes of the Industrial Revolution are diffusionist in the sense, and to the degree, that they see the process as an internal evolution within European history and society. As we noted in Chapter 2, an antidiffusionist, anti-Eurocentric body of historical theory has been developing over the past 50-odd years, a body of theory developed mainly, but not solely, by scholars from the extra-European world. In no other arena of historical discussion has this emerging critical school had as great an impact as it has had on the debates about the origins of the Industrial Revolution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The thesis that industrial development in Europe depended in many ways on colonial processes was widely accepted in the eighteenth and early nineteenth centuries.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See R. W. Bailey, &amp;quot;Africa, the Slave Trade, and the Rise of Industrial Capitalism in Europe and the United States: A Historiographic Review&amp;quot; (1986); W. Darity, Jr., &amp;quot;British Industry and the West Indies Plantations&amp;quot; (1990).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Later, perhaps because of the growth of diffusionist ideology with its guiding proposition that Europe is the autonomous source of progress, this thesis fell into disfavor among European historians.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;There were, of course, exceptions. Brooks Adams, in his 1895 work &#039;&#039;The Law of Civilization and Decay&#039;&#039;, argued (pp. 259-260) that the British victory at Plassey in 1757, which immediately gave Britain access to cheap Indian cotton (and other Indian &amp;quot;plunder&amp;quot;) set into motion the explosive industrialization of Britain&#039;s cotton textile industry, leading directly and immediately to the major inventions of that industry: the spinning jenny in 1764, the mule in 1776, and Watt&#039;s steam engine in 1768.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It was forcefully advanced by a number of colonial scholars in the 1930s and 1940s. Perhaps understandably it was Indian scholars who emphasized the fact that a highly developed Indian cotton textile industry not only provided some of the new technology for Britain&#039;s industry, particularly in dyeing, but also had to be forcibly suppressed by Britain—in a process which some Indian scholars call &amp;quot;the de-industrialization of India&amp;quot;—in order to allow the British industry to develop in the late eighteenth and nineteenth centuries.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Palme Dutt, &#039;&#039;The Problem of India&#039;&#039; (1943); Alavi et al., &#039;&#039;Capitalism and Colonial Production&#039;&#039; (1982).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; (The cotton textile industry was the leading sector in the early Industrial Revolution.) Also in the 1930s, West Indian scholars, notably C. L. R. James and Eric Williams, began to advance the thesis that slave-based industry and the slave trade were crucial causal forces in British and French industrialization. This general argument evolved into a broad theory which is now widely argued both by Caribbean scholars—it is sometimes called &amp;quot;the Caribbean school of history,&amp;quot; rather too narrowly—and by others, many of whom are African-American and African scholars. This theory is of great importance, and I will try to summarize it briefly, ignoring a number of secondary disagreements among some of its proponents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The most basic and general argument, advanced first by C. L. R. James and Eric Williams, was the proposition that the West Indian slave-based plantation system in the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries was a highly advanced form of industrial system, implicitly the most advanced form in existence at that time. They, and later writers in the same scholarly tradition, showed that the plantation system involved very heavy capitalization, complex business organization, very advanced industrial technology (in milling, rum manufacture, transport, and so on), a large labor force in the sugar factory as well as in the fields, a considerable force of free workers and supervisors as well as slaves, and, most important of all, immense profits—profits not only from the plantation and its production but also from the slave trade and many ancillary components of what Williams called &amp;quot;the triangular trade.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;C. L. R. James, &#039;&#039;The Black Jacobins: Toussaint L&#039;Ouverture and the San Domingo Revolution&#039;&#039; (1938) and &#039;&#039;A History of Negro Revolt&#039;&#039; (1938); Eric Williams, &#039;&#039;Capitalism and Slavery&#039;&#039; (1944). Also see the later work by James, &amp;quot;The Atlantic Slave Trade and Slavery: Some Interpretations of their Significance in the Development of the United States and the Western World&amp;quot; (1970); and the later work by Williams, &#039;&#039;British Historians and the West Indies&#039;&#039; (1966). Important recent contributions include: R. W. Bailey, &amp;quot;The Slave(ry) Trade and the Development of Capitalism in the United States: The Textile Industry of New England&amp;quot; (1990); W. Darity, &amp;quot;British Industry and the West Indian Plantations&amp;quot; (1990); J. Inikori, &amp;quot;Slavery and the Revolution in Cotton Textile Production in England&amp;quot; (1989). Also see note 60 below.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; (Said James in his classic history of the Haitian revolution, &#039;&#039;The Black Jacobins&#039;&#039;, &amp;quot;the slave-trade and slavery were the economic basis of the French revolution ... Nearly all the industries which developed in France during the eighteenth century had their origin in goods or commodities destined either for the coast of Guinea or for the Americas.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The Black Jacobins&#039;&#039; (1938), pp. 47-48.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;) I would extend this argument to a slightly more general proposition: Within the overall economic space which the Europeans controlled in the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries, they found it possible to advance the capitalist industrial production system—large-scale, organized, semimechanized—to its highest level, for that era, mainly in the plantation system, using slave labor, until the evolution of industrial production as an overall system had evolved sufficiently so that profits could be made even when the labor force was paid a living wage, a wage permitting subsistence and reproduction of the working class, and the system could then be centrated, imported into Europe itself.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;I have argued elsewhere (Blaut, &#039;&#039;The National Question&#039;&#039;, 1987b, chap. 7) that the level of oppression and exploitation associated with slave labor as it was used in the plantations could not have been applied to members of the European cultural community itself. (This was indeed tried, but quickly abandoned in favor of slave labor.) Generally, cultural rules and practices limit the level of exploitation of producers within a society—a matter of maintaining social peace in a society—but no such rules apply to external or foreign workers.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Stated differently, the earliest phase of the Industrial Revolution was so crude, undeveloped, and indeed barbaric that free labor could not be used, if the output was to be profitable. Therefore, the capture and forced labor of slaves was necessary for production, or, alternatively, colonial rule elsewhere (as in India) was needed to force the delivery of commodities at very low prices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Both James and Williams argued that the profits from this complex were crucial in providing much, perhaps most, of the capital required in the early phase of the Industrial Revolution. Williams&#039;s book, &#039;&#039;Capitalism and Slavery&#039;&#039;, provided the classic statement of and argument for this thesis. He showed in great detail how the profits from the slave trade, the slave plantation, and the ancillary economic sectors flowed into England and then into the forms of investment that fueled the Industrial Revolution and its infrastructure (canals, ports, and the like). Most of the mainstream (European) community of scholars has rejected this theoretical position. The general view is that the industrial revolution was an almost entirely intra-European phenomenon, and such matters as the slave trade, the slave plantation, and the profits from all of this had to be merely a detail or footnote.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See the excellent review by C. Robinson, &amp;quot;Capitalism, Slavery and Bourgeois Historiography&amp;quot; (1987). Also excellent is Bailey, &amp;quot;The Slave(ry) Trade and the Development of Capitalism in the United States&amp;quot; (1990).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Periodically, efforts have been made to refute the theory, but the only part of the theory which has really been subjected to empirical critique is the most limited and in a way least crucial part. Engerman and some others tried to show that, if various assumptions of neoclassical economics are made about the eighteenth-century British economy, and if traditionally low calculations are used as regards the number of slaves brought to America, then it would appear that the slave trade was not really very profitable. But in fact the slave trade itself was only a part of the overall complex that Williams and others were looking at; in fact, the plantation as an industrial system was much closer to the center of their attention because it was here that labor was put to use in generating mass commodities. Inikori and others have shown that the numbers of slave transported to the Americas has been underestimated. Finally, the neoclassical assumptions (among them the argument that there were &amp;quot;normal&amp;quot; profits in an eighteenth-century industry, as though the Industrial Revolution and factor and product markets had already matured) are widely questioned.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another stream of criticism has come from some Marxists, among them Brenner and Laclau, who share the Eurocentric-diffusionist views of the conventional historical school just discussed.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Brenner&#039;s &amp;quot;The Origins of Capitalist Development: A Critique of Neo-Smithian Marxism&amp;quot; (1977); E. Laclau, &#039;&#039;Politics and Ideology in Marxist Theory&#039;&#039; (1977).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Their positions tend to be grounded in two arguments, one of which is dogmatic and the other fallacious. First, they claim that unfree labor cannot, by definition, be considered part of capitalism. This has been answered by C. L. R. James who showed that the error is that of trying to judge a seventeenth- and eighteenth-century labor system by the standards of the mid-nineteenth century, the era of mature competitive capitalism as described by Marx. Even more effective has been the demonstration by Immanuel Wallerstein that capitalism uses a range of alternative labor systems under alternative production conditions, and forced labor is one of these alternative systems.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Wallerstein, &#039;&#039;The Modern World System&#039;&#039; (1974-1988).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Second, the Marxist critics claim that processes that occurred outside of Europe and involved then the import of commodities and capital into Europe, must be denominated &amp;quot;exchange&amp;quot; rather than &amp;quot;production,&amp;quot; and so cannot be considered crucial for industrial development or capitalism. This thesis is simply false: production on a slave plantation is just as much production as is production in a Birmingham needle factory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scholars such as Bailey, Beckles, Darity, Mintz, Sheridan, Solow, Robinson, and Rodney, and (on a world-scale canvas) Amin, Wallerstein, and Frank, have, in recent years, given strong backing to the critical theory I have outlined here.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Bailey, &amp;quot;The Slave(ry) Trade and the Development of Capitalism in the United States&amp;quot; (1990), Darity, &amp;quot;British Industry and the West Indian Plantations&amp;quot; (1990), Mintz, &#039;&#039;Sweetness and Power: The Place of Sugar in Modern History&#039;&#039; (1985), and Robinson, &amp;quot;Capitalism, Slavery and Bourgeois Historiography&amp;quot; (1987); also see Beckles, &amp;quot;&#039;The Williams Effect&#039;: Eric Williams&#039; Capitalism and Slavery and the Growth of West Indian Political Economy&amp;quot; (1987); Sheridan, &#039;&#039;Sugar and Slavery&#039;&#039; (1973), and his &amp;quot;Eric Williams and Capitalism and Slavery: A Biographical and Historiographical Essay&amp;quot; (1987); Solow, &amp;quot;Capitalism and Slavery in the Exceedingly Long Run&amp;quot; (1987); Inikori, &amp;quot;Slavery and the Development of Industrial Capitalism&amp;quot; (1989); Rodney, &#039;&#039;How Europe Underdeveloped Africa&#039;&#039; (1972).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Conventional historians sometimes label it &amp;quot;the Williams thesis.&amp;quot; My point is that this &amp;quot;thesis&amp;quot; is something much larger: it is the current state of the body of theory that pays adequate attention to the role played by colonialism in the Industrial Revolution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One other point of contention concerns the significance of demand. All parties concede that the decisions to increase productive capacity, decisions which, in aggregate, led to the Industrial Revolution, were made on the basis of judgments that additional commodities, if produced, could be sold. The conventional historians generally treat the increase in demand as a somehow natural product of the modernization of Europe.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Some Marxists treat it this way, too: &amp;quot;(What) distinguished the English industrial development of the early modern period was its continuous character, its ability to sustain itself and to provide its own self-perpetuating dynamic. Here ... the key was to be found in the capitalist structure of (English) agriculture&amp;quot; (Brenner, &amp;quot;Agrarian Class Structure and Economic Development in Pre-Industrial Europe,&amp;quot; 1985, p. 53).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The critical historians insist, rather, that colonialism was itself required in order to increase the level of demand such that industrialists would make efforts to increase capacity, efforts which, when the revolution got truly underway, involved the use of powerful new productive technology. The critical historians have indeed shown that an immense amount of demand was generated by the slave trade, by the plantations (demand for food, clothing, machinery, ships, and so on), and by the overall expansion of the trading sphere in which European commodities moved in the eighteenth century and thereafter. I would generalize the case as follows: there would not have been an Industrial Revolution had it not been for the immense demand that Europeans were able to generate in the colonies, and it was this fact that, more than anything else, pushed the Industrial Revolution forward.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Capitalism arose as a world-scale process: as a world system. Capitalism became centrated in Europe because colonialism gave Europeans the power both to develop their own society and to prevent development from occurring elsewhere. It is this dynamic of development and underdevelopment which mainly explains the modern world.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this chapter and the two preceding ones I have tried to show, with empirical evidence, that there was no &amp;quot;European miracle.&amp;quot; Africa, Asia, and Europe shared equally in the rise of capitalism prior to 1492. After that date, Europe took the lead. This happened, as I have tried to demonstrate in this chapter, because of Europe&#039;s location near America and because of the immense wealth obtained by Europeans in America and later in Asia and Africa—not because Europeans were brighter or bolder or better than non-Europeans, or more modern, more advanced, more progressive, more rational. These are myths of Eurocentric diffusionism and are best forgotten.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== NOTES ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Europeans did not &amp;quot;discover&amp;quot; America: the hemisphere was settled millennia earlier by people who migrated in from Siberia and the Arctic. So I prefer not to conceptualize the European arrival as a &amp;quot;discovery.&amp;quot; Likewise, the idea that the Western Hemisphere is a &amp;quot;New World&amp;quot; is false since it was hardly new to those who lived there and greeted Columbus on his arrival in 1492. It is, however, very difficult to avoid using the phrase &amp;quot;New World&amp;quot; in certain contexts, and I will occasionally have to do so.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. See K. N. Chaudhuri, &#039;&#039;Trade and Civilization in the Indian Ocean&#039;&#039; (1985); Simkin, &#039;&#039;The Traditional Trade of Asia&#039;&#039; (1968); Sherif, &#039;&#039;Slaves, Spices and Ivory in Zanzibar&#039;&#039; (1987). It is highly likely that West Africans sailed across to the Americas before 1492. (See DeVisse and Labib, &amp;quot;Africa in Intercontinental Relations,&amp;quot; 1984.) However, because there seem not to have been major mercantile-maritime port cities in West Africa—unlike East Africa—it is not likely that transatlantic voyages before 1492 had significant impact on Africa or on America. This is probable for several reasons. First, in the absence of such major port cities and large-volume long-distance sea commerce, it is likely that ships along the coast were rather small. They would easily have been capable of a westward voyage to America, given the strong and steady trade winds blowing westward, but a return voyage would have to have been made far to the north or the south, in the zone of the westerlies—roughly as far north as the latitude of southern Europe or as far south as the latitude of Namibia. Therefore the round trip would have been a very formidable undertaking. On the other hand, we may indeed learn from future scholarship that West African sailors, Moroccan sailors, and West European sailors all were fishing and whaling quite regularly off the coast of America (perhaps on the Grand Banks) before 1492; if strong evidence for this emerges, then we would consider it likely that West Africans were familiar with the round-trip voyage and with some parts of the American coast. But we do not have such evidence at present, and we have to consider it more likely that any West African ships that reached America were blown off course, in which case a return voyage would have been very difficult. It would have to have been made without prior knowledge of the long, circuitous route (unless American sailors knew the route and gave navigational information to the African sailors—but we do not have convincing evidence at present that Americans crossed the Atlantic before 1492). Secondly, the portion of the American coast that is closest to Africa, roughly the Brazilian coast south of the mouth of the Amazon, seems not to have had major population concentrations and abundant gold and silver artifacts inviting trade or plunder. (Granted, if West Africans reached the West Indies, they would have found such artifacts in abundance, as did Columbus.) And thirdly, the complex of historical conditions that would turn a single voyage into the beginning of a massive conquest seem unlikely to have been present in coastal West Africa. Large-scale trade, a class of merchant-capitalists, banking and other institutions of capitalism, and the like, were found in interior West African urban centers, but not, it seems, in the urban centers along the coast: these were not important as mercantile-maritime centers. For the interior cities, major long-distance trade went northward and eastward overland, and it is unlikely that attempts would have been made to develop large-scale oceanic travel from a coastal harbor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some scholars maintain the truth of two propositions about West African transatlantic voyaging that I cannot accept. The first of these asserts that Africans exerted an important influence on American cultures before 1492. The second asserts that West Africans crossed the Atlantic in much the same way as did Columbus, but they had different values than the Europeans, and did not choose to murder, plunder, enslave, and enrich themselves at the expense of Americans as did the Europeans; and therefore they did not attempt conquest. Most of the evidence offered in support of important precolumbian diffusion from Africa to America is taken from the old arguments of European scholars of the &amp;quot;extreme diffusionism&amp;quot; school we discussed in Chapter 1. The extreme diffusionists claimed that ancient Egyptians or Phoenicians crossed the Atlantic, and, in essence, brought civilization to the Americans. Some modern scholars modify this mainly by insisting that because Egypt was a clearly African civilization—this I am certain is true—it was an African people, not a putatively European people, who brought civilization to the Americas. A second source of evidence is the apparently African facial features of the great Olmec head sculptures of southern Mexico. But some precolumbian Americans must have had these features, too: they are not rare among modern Latin American Indians. But the most serious objection to this theory is the following: The Olmec civilization is the oldest known civilization in the Americas. If Olmec civilization came from Africa, and was not developed indigenously by people of America, then we would have to say that Americans simply did not have the ability to civilize themselves; civilization had to be something brought in from elsewhere, by diffusion. This is viewed as a deep insult by Latin Americans, who maintain, I am sure correctly, that Western Hemisphere peoples developed civilization on their own. Perhaps they acquired a few domesticates from sailors arriving from across the Atlantic or the Pacific. But the real cultural development was a matter of independent invention, not diffusion. Again we notice that the form of argument comes from classical diffusionism: some human communities are inventive and others merely imitative. Based only on the thin and questionable evidence that has been presented thus far that Africans brought major cultural advances to America, this thesis is not persuasive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Somewhat more troublesome to me is the argument that when Africans crossed the Atlantic before or at the same time as Columbus did, they did not have the savage values of the Europeans, and so did not try to conquer, loot, and enslave. To accept this, one would have to believe that there is something absolutely fundamental in European culture, something very old, and very deeply embedded, that makes Europeans different from other humans. This admits a good part of the Eurocentric claim that Europeans are unique among humans; it merely inverts the argument and claims that their uniqueness lies not in progressiveness but in aggressiveness, predatoriness, and cupidity. I am much more comfortable with an argument that begins with the idea of a common basal human mentality (&amp;quot;psychic unity&amp;quot;). It then explains the bloodthirstiness of the European conquistadors as an effect of the kind of civilization they represented: its development of an oppressive class structure in feudalism, and its further development of protocapitalism, a system in which wealth is obtained at all cost and in any way possible. Bloodthirsty protocapitalist communities, ready and anxious to conquer, loot, and enslave wherever this brought a profit, were found in many parts of the Eastern Hemisphere, in all three continents. My argument in this book is that the key factor favoring European moves of conquest in the Americas, and not favoring West African moves of this sort, was the existence of major mercantile-maritime centers in coastal Europe, protocapitalist centers of the sort found in the interior of Africa but with the added features associated with long-distance oceanic trade. Sofala and Kilwa in East Africa had these features but Sofala and Kilwa were—as we note in this chapter—very much farther from the American looting grounds than were the Iberian ports and the Canary outports. (I have not cited specific scholars who hold these views that I criticize because a full and fair review of their theories is not possible in the space of a single long footnote. Obviously, I do not agree with the theory of Ivan Van Sertima, as presented in his important work &#039;&#039;They Came Before Columbus&#039;&#039; [1976], concerning the precolumbian diffusion of major civilizing traits from Africa to America, although he is very probably correct in his view that Africans did come to America before Columbus did.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Filesi, &#039;&#039;China and Africa in the Middle Ages&#039;&#039; (1972); Ma Huan, &#039;&#039;The Overall Survey of the Ocean&#039;s Shores&#039;&#039; (1970); Panikkar, &#039;&#039;Asia and Western Influence&#039;&#039; (1959).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. I have not learned of documented evidence that North Africans or West Africans regularly sailed up and down the coast past Cape Bojador. (See DeVisse and Labib, &amp;quot;Africa in Intercontinental Relations,&amp;quot; 1984.) Apparently medieval sailing techniques—European and non-European—had difficulty with the passage prior to the time when Portuguese voyages began in the fifteenth century. However, there was no question of &amp;quot;discovery.&amp;quot; The sea route was known in antiquity. Important land routes paralleled the entire length of the coast, from Fez south to Takrur (near modern Dakar) and beyond (see Niane, &amp;quot;Mali and the Second Mandingo Expansion,&amp;quot; 1984, and Levitzion, &amp;quot;The Early States of the Western Sudan to 1500,&amp;quot; 1971), and there were medieval-era settlements in the Canaries and along the coast itself. Basically, it was much cheaper to travel overland, and probably faster. What the Portuguese &amp;quot;discovered&amp;quot; was a method of outflanking the competing merchant interests of North and West Africa, by applying sailing technology known to Europeans and East Africans but not known (or at any rate used, or at any rate known to have been used) by West Africans in that period. It should be noted also that the Portuguese navigational strategy in passing Bojador was basically the same strategy used for voyages to the Atlantic islands, and probably known to Moroccan sailors as well as Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Blaut, &amp;quot;Diffusionism: A Uniformitarian Critique&amp;quot; (1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. For general reviews, see Crosby, &#039;&#039;The Columbian Exchange&#039;&#039; (1972) and McNeill, &#039;&#039;Plagues and Peoples&#039;&#039; (1976). See Borah and Cooke, &amp;quot;La Demografía Histórica de América Latina: Necesidades y Perspectivas&amp;quot; (1972); Whitmore, &amp;quot;A Simulation of Sixteenth-Century Population Collapse in the Basin of Mexico&amp;quot; (1991); Alchon, &#039;&#039;Native Society and Disease in Colonial Ecuador&#039;&#039; (1991); Lovell, &amp;quot;&#039;Heavy Shadows and Black Night&#039;: Disease and Depopulation in Colonial America&amp;quot; (1992).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. See Denevan, &#039;&#039;The Native Population of the Americas in 1492&#039;&#039; (1976), for a review of the disputes concerning the American population at the time of the conquest.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Crosby, &#039;&#039;The Columbian Exchange&#039;&#039; (1972); Alchon, &#039;&#039;Native Society and Disease in Colonial Ecuador&#039;&#039; (1991).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9. For a discussion of the various calculations, see Denevan, &#039;&#039;The Native Population of the Americas in 1492&#039;&#039; (1976); Denevan, &amp;quot;The Pristine Myth: The Landscape of the Americas in 1492&amp;quot; (1992); Lovell, &amp;quot;&#039;Heavy Shadows and Black Night&#039;&amp;quot; (1992); and Whitmore, &amp;quot;A Simulation of Sixteenth-Century Population Collapse in the Basin of Mexico&amp;quot; (1991).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
10. The assumption here is that population continued to grow so long as food resources for hunting, gathering, fishing, and shellfishing were abundant. At a certain purely hypothetical time, it is likely that people who had certainly already experimented with crop cultivation, found that a better supply of food (and fiber, etc.) would be obtained through agriculture, and so began the transformation. Note that this argument is in no way Malthusian.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
11. See Fiedel, &#039;&#039;Prehistory of the Americas&#039;&#039; (1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
12. See Crosby, &#039;&#039;The Columbian Exchange&#039;&#039; (1972), Lovell, &amp;quot;&#039;Heavy Shadows and Black Night,&#039;&amp;quot; and Alchon, &#039;&#039;Native Society and Disease in Colonial Ecuador&#039;&#039; (1991).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
13. Miskimin, &#039;&#039;The Economy of Early Renaissance Europe, 1300-1460&#039;&#039; (1969).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
14. Abel, &#039;&#039;Agricultural Fluctuations in Europe from the Thirteenth to the Twentieth Centuries&#039;&#039; (1980).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
15. de Vries, &#039;&#039;European Urbanization, 1500-1800&#039;&#039; (1984).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
16. Hodgett, &#039;&#039;A Social and Economic History of Medieval Europe&#039;&#039; (1972) (&amp;quot;[The] 200 years after c.1320 may be said to be a period of down-turn in the [European] economy as a whole,&amp;quot; p. 212); Lopez and Miskimin, &amp;quot;The Economic Depression of the Renaissance,&amp;quot; (1961-1962); C. T. Smith, &#039;&#039;An Historical Geography of Western Europe Before 1800&#039;&#039; (1969).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
17. Lopez, &amp;quot;Hard Times and Investment in Culture&amp;quot; (1953); Thorndyke, &amp;quot;Renaissance or Prenaissance?&amp;quot; (1943).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
18. Braudel, &amp;quot;Prices in Europe from 1450 to 1750&amp;quot; (1967); de Vries, &#039;&#039;European Urbanization&#039;&#039; (1984). On the rapid impact of these changes on Asia, see, for example, Atwell, &amp;quot;International Bullion Flows and the Chinese Economy circa 1530-1650&amp;quot; (1982); Aziza Hasan, &amp;quot;The Silver Currency Output of the Mughal Empire and Prices in India during the 16th and 17th centuries&amp;quot; (1969).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
19. Céspedes, &#039;&#039;Latin America: The Early Years&#039;&#039; (1974); McAlister, &#039;&#039;Spain and Portugal in the New World, 1492-1700&#039;&#039; (1984).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
20. In classical political economy, and in some of modern Marxist economics, the idea of &amp;quot;primitive accumulation&amp;quot; serves as a kind of catchall for ways of accumulating capital that did not involve—in essence—capitalist enterprise. Pirate treasures and the like were &amp;quot;primitive accumulation,&amp;quot; and, in general, the kind of wealth brought from the American colonies in the sixteenth century was considered primitive accumulation. (According to Marx, &amp;quot;The treasures captured outside Europe by undisguised looting, enslavement and murder flowed back to the mother-country and were turned into capital there&amp;quot;: Marx, &#039;&#039;Capital&#039;&#039;, 1976, vol. 1, p. 918). But &amp;quot;primitive accumulation&amp;quot; cannot really be defined with any precision. I will argue here that the wealth accumulated in the Americas was primitive only in the sense that it was part of a preindustrial-capitalist economy. In other respects, notably in the involvement of labor and value produced by labor, it was regular accumulation. The distinction is very fundamental, as we will see, because, if what transpired in the colonies was not &amp;quot;real&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;ordinary&amp;quot; accumulation, scholars can claim that the colonial economy was backward and &amp;quot;feudal,&amp;quot; rather than a primitive sort of capitalism.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
21. E. J. Hamilton, &#039;&#039;American Treasure and the Price Revolution in Spain, 1501-1650&#039;&#039; (1934); Brading and Cross, &amp;quot;Colonial Silver Mining: Mexico and Peru&amp;quot; (1972); H. and P. Chaunu, &#039;&#039;Séville et l&#039;Atlantique (1504-1650)&#039;&#039;, vol. 6, pt. 1 (1956); Cross, &amp;quot;American Bullion Production and Export 1550-1750&amp;quot; (1983).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
22. See note 19 above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
23. Vicens Vives, &#039;&#039;An Economic History of Spain&#039;&#039; (1969).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
24. Vilar, &#039;&#039;A History of Gold and Money, 1450-1920&#039;&#039; (1976).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
25. There remained, nonetheless, a very large trade carried on by non-European merchants in the China Seas and the Indian Ocean.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
26. E. J. Hamilton, &amp;quot;American Treasure and the Rise of Capitalism&amp;quot; (1929), and &#039;&#039;American Treasure and the Price Revolution in Spain&#039;&#039; (1934). Also see the important book by Walter Prescott Webb, &#039;&#039;The Great Frontier&#039;&#039; (1951), which builds in part on Hamilton&#039;s theory to argue for the great importance of the Americas in the rise of Europe during this period and later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
27. Galloway, &#039;&#039;The Sugar Cane Industry: An Historical Geography from its Origins to 1914&#039;&#039; (1989); Deerr, &#039;&#039;The History of Sugar&#039;&#039; (1949-1950).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
28. See, for example, Galloway, &#039;&#039;The Sugar Cane Industry&#039;&#039; (1989); Deerr, &#039;&#039;The History of Sugar&#039;&#039; (1949-1950); Watson, &#039;&#039;Agricultural Innovation in the Early Islamic World: The Diffusion of Crops and Farming Techniques, 700-1100&#039;&#039; (1983); N. S. Gupta, &#039;&#039;Industrial Structure of India During the Medieval Period&#039;&#039; (1970); Niane, ed., &#039;&#039;UNESCO General History of Africa, Vol. 4&#039;&#039; (1984); Bray, &#039;&#039;Science and Civilization in China, Vol. 6, Part 2, Agriculture&#039;&#039; (1984).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
29. Deerr, &#039;&#039;The History of Sugar&#039;&#039; (1949-1950).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
30. Simonsen, &#039;&#039;Historia Económica do Brasil, 1500-1820&#039;&#039; (1944); Furtado, &#039;&#039;The Economic Growth of Brazil&#039;&#039; (1963); Minchinton, &#039;&#039;The Growth of English Overseas Trade&#039;&#039; (1969). Also see the more general, but extremely important, works of I. Wallerstein, A. G. Frank, and S. Amin, particularly Wallerstein&#039;s &#039;&#039;The Modern World System&#039;&#039;, 3 vols. (1974-1988), Frank&#039;s &#039;&#039;Capitalism and underdevelopment in Latin America&#039;&#039; (1968) and his &#039;&#039;World Accumulation, 1492-1789&#039;&#039; (1978), and Amin&#039;s &#039;&#039;Accumulation on a World Scale&#039;&#039; (1974) as well as his &#039;&#039;Unequal Development&#039;&#039; (1976).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
31. Edel, &amp;quot;The Brazilian Sugar Cycle of the 17th Century and the Rise of West Indian Competition&amp;quot; (1969).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
32. Furtado, &#039;&#039;Economic Growth of Brazil&#039;&#039; (1963).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
33. See K. N. Chaudhuri, &#039;&#039;Trade and civilization in the Indian Ocean&#039;&#039; (1985); Satish Chandra, &#039;&#039;The Indian Ocean: Explorations in History, Commerce and Politics&#039;&#039; (1987); Magalhães-Godinho, &#039;&#039;L&#039;Economie de L&#039;Empire Portugais aux XV et XVI Siècles&#039;&#039; (1969).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
34. de Vries, &#039;&#039;European Urbanization&#039;&#039; (1984).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
35. William Denevan, &amp;quot;Introduction,&amp;quot; in Denevan, ed., &#039;&#039;The Native Population of the Americas in 1492&#039;&#039; (1976), and &amp;quot;The Pristine Myth: The Landscape of the Americas in 1492&amp;quot; (1992); Lovell, &amp;quot;&#039;Heavy Shadows and Black Night&#039;&amp;quot; (1992).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
36. See Borah and Cook, &amp;quot;La demografía histórica de América Latina: necesidades y perspectivas&amp;quot; (1972); Whitmore, &amp;quot;A Simulation of Sixteenth-Century Population Collapse in the Basin of Mexico&amp;quot; (1991).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
37. Semo, &#039;&#039;Historia del Capitalismo en México: Los Orígenes, 1521-1763&#039;&#039; (1982).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
38. Radell, &amp;quot;The Indian Slave Trade and Population of Nicaragua During the Sixteenth Century&amp;quot; (1976).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
39. Bakewell, &amp;quot;Mining in Colonial Spanish America&amp;quot; (1984).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
40. Semo, &#039;&#039;Historia del Capitalismo&#039;&#039; (1982).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
41. For various calculations, see Curtin, &#039;&#039;The Atlantic Slave Trade&#039;&#039; (1969); Furtado, &#039;&#039;Economic Growth of Brazil&#039;&#039; (1963); Deerr, &#039;&#039;History of Sugar&#039;&#039; (1949-1950); Florescano, &amp;quot;The Formation and Economic Structure of the Hacienda in New Spain&amp;quot;; Inikori, &#039;&#039;The African Slave Trade from the Fifteenth to the Nineteenth Century&#039;&#039; (1979), esp. pp. 57 and 248; McAlister, &#039;&#039;Spain and Portugal in the New World&#039;&#039; (1984).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
42. McAlister, &#039;&#039;Spain and Portugal in the New World&#039;&#039; (1984).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
43. In the present discussion I am giving far too little attention to Africa and particularly to the effects of the slave trade in Africa. See Chapter 2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
44. Fisher, &amp;quot;The Price Revolution: A Monetary Interpretation&amp;quot; (1989).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
45. Dunn, &#039;&#039;Sugar and Slaves: The Rise of the Planter Class in the English West Indies, 1624-1713&#039;&#039; (1972), pp. 10-11.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
46. Tawney, &#039;&#039;Religion and the Rise of Capitalism&#039;&#039; (1952 edition).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
47. Hannemann, &#039;&#039;The Diffusion of the Reformation in Southwestern Germany, 1518-1534&#039;&#039; (1975).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
48. There is debate as to why the center shifted from Iberia to the lower Rhine-southern England region. Perhaps the same forces which had made this northern region a mercantile-maritime center in the Middle Ages permitted it to gain control of the overseas enterprise: namely, large population, abundant nearby fertile land and forest resources, access to many markets (the Rhine, the Baltic, etc.). Vis-à-vis Italy, it held most of these same advantages plus that of location on the Atlantic and possession of the requirements for rapid growth of oceanic shipping and fishing fleets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
49. See Deerr, &#039;&#039;The History of Sugar&#039;&#039; (1949-1950); Curtin, &#039;&#039;The Atlantic Slave Trade&#039;&#039; (1969); and Inikori, &#039;&#039;The African Slave Trade from the Fifteenth to the Nineteenth Century&#039;&#039; (1979). The question whether slave labor is or is not proletarian—a serious issue in discussions of the slave plantation system (see Mintz, &#039;&#039;Sweetness and Power: The Place of Sugar in Modern History&#039;&#039;, 1985)—will be taken up later in this chapter. In any event there is no disagreement about the contribution of slave (and other forced) labor to capital accumulation, hence to surplus value generation, using &amp;quot;surplus value&amp;quot; in a sense appropriate to modes of production different from industrial capitalism.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
50. However, a good share of the old landowning elite joined in the new enterprise. It is not correct to assume that the new protocapitalist elite was in simple opposition to the old elite. There is much confusion on this matter, some of it occasioned by literal acceptance of Marx&#039;s idea that merchants are somehow not the class that evolves into the early capitalist, entrepreneurial, accumulating class. On the role of medieval merchants in protocapitalism, see Thrupp, &#039;&#039;The Merchant Class of Medieval London (1300-1500)&#039;&#039; (1948); Carus-Wilson, &#039;&#039;Medieval Merchant Venturers&#039;&#039; (1967).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
51. See R. W. Bailey, &amp;quot;Africa, the Slave Trade, and the Rise of Industrial Capitalism in Europe and the United States: A Historiographic Review&amp;quot; (1986); W. Darity, Jr., &amp;quot;British Industry and the West Indies Plantations&amp;quot; (1990).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
52. There were, of course, exceptions. Brooks Adams, in his 1895 work &#039;&#039;The Law of Civilization and Decay&#039;&#039;, argued (pp. 259-260) that the British victory at Plassey in 1757, which immediately gave Britain access to cheap Indian cotton (and other Indian &amp;quot;plunder&amp;quot;) set into motion the explosive industrialization of Britain&#039;s cotton textile industry, leading directly and immediately to the major inventions of that industry: the spinning jenny in 1764, the mule in 1776, and Watt&#039;s steam engine in 1768.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
53. See Palme Dutt, &#039;&#039;The Problem of India&#039;&#039; (1943); Alavi et al., &#039;&#039;Capitalism and Colonial Production&#039;&#039; (1982).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
54. C. L. R. James, &#039;&#039;The Black Jacobins: Toussaint L&#039;Ouverture and the San Domingo Revolution&#039;&#039; (1938) and &#039;&#039;A History of Negro Revolt&#039;&#039; (1938); Eric Williams, &#039;&#039;Capitalism and Slavery&#039;&#039; (1944). Also see the later work by James, &amp;quot;The Atlantic Slave Trade and Slavery: Some Interpretations of their Significance in the Development of the United States and the Western World&amp;quot; (1970); and the later work by Williams, &#039;&#039;British Historians and the West Indies&#039;&#039; (1966). Important recent contributions include: R. W. Bailey, &amp;quot;The Slave(ry) Trade and the Development of Capitalism in the United States: The Textile Industry of New England&amp;quot; (1990); W. Darity, &amp;quot;British Industry and the West Indian Plantations&amp;quot; (1990); J. Inikori, &amp;quot;Slavery and the Revolution in Cotton Textile Production in England&amp;quot; (1989). Also see note 60 below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
55. &#039;&#039;The Black Jacobins&#039;&#039; (1938), pp. 47-48.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
56. I have argued elsewhere (Blaut, &#039;&#039;The National Question&#039;&#039;, 1987b, chap. 7) that the level of oppression and exploitation associated with slave labor as it was used in the plantations could not have been applied to members of the European cultural community itself. (This was indeed tried, but quickly abandoned in favor of slave labor.) Generally, cultural rules and practices limit the level of exploitation of producers within a society—a matter of maintaining social peace in a society—but no such rules apply to external or foreign workers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
57. See the excellent review by C. Robinson, &amp;quot;Capitalism, Slavery and Bourgeois Historiography&amp;quot; (1987). Also excellent is Bailey, &amp;quot;The Slave(ry) Trade and the Development of Capitalism in the United States&amp;quot; (1990).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
58. See Brenner&#039;s &amp;quot;The Origins of Capitalist Development: A Critique of Neo-Smithian Marxism&amp;quot; (1977); E. Laclau, &#039;&#039;Politics and Ideology in Marxist Theory&#039;&#039; (1977).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
59. Wallerstein, &#039;&#039;The Modern World System&#039;&#039; (1974-1988).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
60. See Bailey, &amp;quot;The Slave(ry) Trade and the Development of Capitalism in the United States&amp;quot; (1990), Darity, &amp;quot;British Industry and the West Indian Plantations&amp;quot; (1990), Mintz, &#039;&#039;Sweetness and Power: The Place of Sugar in Modern History&#039;&#039; (1985), and Robinson, &amp;quot;Capitalism, Slavery and Bourgeois Historiography&amp;quot; (1987); also see Beckles, &amp;quot;&#039;The Williams Effect&#039;: Eric Williams&#039; Capitalism and Slavery and the Growth of West Indian Political Economy&amp;quot; (1987); Sheridan, &#039;&#039;Sugar and Slavery&#039;&#039; (1973), and his &amp;quot;Eric Williams and Capitalism and Slavery: A Biographical and Historiographical Essay&amp;quot; (1987); Solow, &amp;quot;Capitalism and Slavery in the Exceedingly Long Run&amp;quot; (1987); Inikori, &amp;quot;Slavery and the Development of Industrial Capitalism&amp;quot; (1989); Rodney, &#039;&#039;How Europe Underdeveloped Africa&#039;&#039; (1972).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
61. Some Marxists treat it this way, too: &amp;quot;(What) distinguished the English industrial development of the early modern period was its continuous character, its ability to sustain itself and to provide its own self-perpetuating dynamic. Here ... the key was to be found in the capitalist structure of (English) agriculture&amp;quot; (Brenner, &amp;quot;Agrarian Class Structure and Economic Development in Pre-Industrial Europe,&amp;quot; 1985, p. 53).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= CHAPTER 5: Conclusion =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This book has two basic themes or arguments. First, in Chapter 1, I try to explain what Eurocentric diffusionism is as a body of ideas, and to show how this theory—or supertheory, or world model—came to dominate European scholarship long ago and why it still does so to a considerable extent today. And second, in Chapters 2 through 4, I carefully examine the single most important part of diffusionism, the theory of Europe&#039;s historical superiority or priority, the theory of &amp;quot;the European miracle,&amp;quot; and I try to refute it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Diffusionism needs to be analyzed much more thoroughly than I have been able to do in this book. Many diffusionist theories and programs that, today, exert an important and unfortunate influence on many fields of thought and action have not been discussed here. In other writings I have explored the influence of diffusionism on theory and practice concerning the national question, or nationalism,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Blaut, &#039;&#039;The National Question&#039;&#039; (1987b); Blaut and Figueroa, &#039;&#039;Aspectos de la cuestion nacional en Puerto Rico&#039;&#039; (1988).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and on theory and practice concerning the development of peasant agriculture.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Blaut, &amp;quot;Two Views of Diffusion&amp;quot; (1977) and &amp;quot;Diffusionism: A Uniformitarian Critique&amp;quot; (1987a).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Other writers have, of course, examined many aspects of diffusionism and problems caused by diffusionism.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Reference has been made to this work in Chapters 2, 3, and 4.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; But, overall, the critique of diffusionism has barely begun.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The critique will have to range across many fields of scholarship and practice. Here—just to make this point clear—are four examples.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Philosophical dualism, the body of epistemological and ontological doctrine developed in European thought from Descartes to Kant and the neo-Kantians, appears to be, in part, a projection of the dualism of Inside and Outside. Reason is Inside. Mere matter, mere sensuousness, is Outside—the non-European world and the irrational mentation of its inhabitants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. The so-called Big Bang Theory, the theory that everything began at one space-time point and this point was here, seems to be diffusionism on the largest canvas of all. Big Bang cosmogony appears to be fortified less by empirical evidence than by a hunch that the whole idea is &amp;quot;reasonable&amp;quot;—the essential judgment (as we noticed in Chapter 1) by which culture projects its prejudices into science.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Talkington, &amp;quot;But the Editor Looks at the Universe from a Different Frame of Reference&amp;quot; (1986); Frankel, &amp;quot;Marxism and Physics: A New Look&amp;quot; (1991).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref group=&amp;quot;Correction&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Correction by ProleWiki: The modern scientific consensus on the big bang does not actually claim that everything began at one single point in spacetime, nor does it claim that everything began anywhere near Earth.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The theory that AIDS diffused out of Africa is very reminiscent of a historical chain of theories, each explaining some plague as a counterdiffusion from non-Europe to Europe. (We discussed aspects of this question in Chapters 1 and 2.) A recent book entitled &#039;&#039;AIDS, Africa and Racism&#039;&#039; gives important evidence that the AIDS-out-of-Africa doctrine may, indeed, be simply a new incarnation of this diffusionist view of human disease.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Chirimuuta and Chirimuuta, &#039;&#039;AIDS, Africa and Racism&#039;&#039; (1989). A naively diffusionist view of AIDS is given in Shannon and Pyle, &amp;quot;The Origin and Diffusion of AIDS&amp;quot; (1989); see the critique of this view in Watts, Okello, and Watts, &amp;quot;Medical Geography and AIDS&amp;quot; (1990).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; If this is the case, the matter of causality of HIV-retrovirus-caused disease may have to be rethought. The forms found outside of Africa may be more relevant for explanation and cure than those inside Africa.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Many theories about economic history since the beginning of the Industrial Revolution, and about economic development today, seem to be steeped in diffusionism. The Industrial Revolution has not diffused outward from Europe to non-Europe. Not only does it have origins in non-Europe as well as Europe (we discussed this matter in Chapter 4), but the notion that industrialization has been spreading to the non-European world is largely a false (conformal) idea. The diffusion of maquiladora-style assembly-plant activities in the Third World is not genuine industrialization but rather a kind of world-scale putting-out system: Outside provides cheap labor, Inside provides most of the raw materials and most of the consumption, and garners nearly all of the profit as well as the permanent infrastructure. The industrialization of Japan began long ago and was not an effect of diffusion.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Japan became industrialized precisely because of a lack of diffusion. It was the only major non-European country that managed to avoid European domination, and this resulted from its inaccessibility. It was, among major societies, the farthest and most inaccessible from the standpoint of Europeans, and by the time European power had subdued China, in the nineteenth century, Japan had been able to begin its military modernization; hence the victory over Russia, the beginnings of colonial expansion, and the onset of an industrial revolution around 1900.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The industrialization of Korea and one or two East Asian ministates in recent decades has not been imitated elsewhere.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;At the other end of the scale, giant countries like India and Brazil have a great deal of industry but in proportion to their size—and on a per capita measurement—they are no more industrialized than are smaller Third world countries. See Amin, &#039;&#039;Delinking: Toward a Polycentric World&#039;&#039; (1990).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The diffusion of industrialization, therefore, is not a simple and natural diffusion process, but a political agenda. And an agenda for scholarly inquiry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This book, therefore, has no real conclusion. The book itself is an introduction: an introduction to the study, to the diagnosis and treatment, of a serious malady of the mind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Notes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Blaut, &#039;&#039;The National Question&#039;&#039; (1987b); Blaut and Figueroa, &#039;&#039;Aspectos de la cuestion nacional en Puerto Rico&#039;&#039; (1988).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Blaut, &amp;quot;Two Views of Diffusion&amp;quot; (1977) and &amp;quot;Diffusionism: A Uniformitarian Critique&amp;quot; (1987a).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Reference has been made to this work in Chapters 2, 3, and 4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. See Talkington, &amp;quot;But the Editor Looks at the Universe from a Different Frame of Reference&amp;quot; (1986); Frankel, &amp;quot;Marxism and Physics: A New Look&amp;quot; (1991).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Chirimuuta and Chirimuuta, &#039;&#039;AIDS, Africa and Racism&#039;&#039; (1989). A naively diffusionist view of AIDS is given in Shannon and Pyle, &amp;quot;The Origin and Diffusion of AIDS&amp;quot; (1989); see the critique of this view in Watts, Okello, and Watts, &amp;quot;Medical Geography and AIDS&amp;quot; (1990).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Japan became industrialized precisely because of a lack of diffusion. It was the only major non-European country that managed to avoid European domination, and this resulted from its inaccessibility. It was, among major societies, the farthest and most inaccessible from the standpoint of Europeans, and by the time European power had subdued China, in the nineteenth century, Japan had been able to begin its military modernization; hence the victory over Russia, the beginnings of colonial expansion, and the onset of an industrial revolution around 1900.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. At the other end of the scale, giant countries like India and Brazil have a great deal of industry but in proportion to their size—and on a per capita measurement—they are no more industrialized than are smaller Third world countries. See Amin, &#039;&#039;Delinking: Toward a Polycentric World&#039;&#039; (1990).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Bibliography =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Abel, W. (1980). &#039;&#039;Agricultural fluctuations in Europe from the thirteenth to the twentieth centuries&#039;&#039;. London: Methuen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Abu-Lughod, J. (1987-1988). The shape of the world system in the thirteenth century. &#039;&#039;Studies in Comparative International Development&#039;&#039; 22(4):3-25.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1989). &#039;&#039;Before European hegemony: The world system A.D. 1250-1350&#039;&#039;. New York: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adams, B. (1895). &#039;&#039;The law of civilization and decay&#039;&#039;. New York: Macmillan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adams, W., Van Gerven, D., and Levy, R. (1978). The retreat from migrationism. &#039;&#039;Annual Review of Anthropology&#039;&#039; 7:483-532.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ahn, P. (1970). &#039;&#039;West African soils&#039;&#039;. London: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ajayi, J., and Crowder, M., eds. (1972). &#039;&#039;History of West Africa&#039;&#039;. Vol. 1. New York: Columbia University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alavi, H. (1982). India: The transition to colonial capitalism. In H. Alavi, et al., eds., &#039;&#039;Capitalism and colonial production&#039;&#039;. London: Croom Helm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------, Burns, P., Knight, G., Mayer, P., and McEachem, D., eds. (1982). &#039;&#039;Capitalism and colonial production&#039;&#039;. London: Croom Helm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alchon, S. (1991). &#039;&#039;Native society and disease in colonial Ecuador&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Amin, S. (1973). &#039;&#039;Neocolonialism in West Africa&#039;&#039;. New York: Monthly Review Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1974). &#039;&#039;Accumulation on a world scale&#039;&#039;. New York: Monthly Review Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1976). &#039;&#039;Unequal development&#039;&#039;. New York: Monthly Review Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1985). Modes of production: History and unequal development. &#039;&#039;Science and Society&#039;&#039; 49:194-207.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1988). &#039;&#039;Eurocentrism&#039;&#039;. New York: Monthly Review Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1990). Colonialism and the rise of capitalism: A comment. &#039;&#039;Science and Society&#039;&#039; 54:67-72.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1990). &#039;&#039;Delinking: Toward a polycentric world&#039;&#039;. London: Zed Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1992). On Jim Blaut&#039;s &amp;quot;Fourteen ninety-two.&amp;quot; &#039;&#039;Political Geography&#039;&#039; 11:394-396.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Anderson, J. (1882). &#039;&#039;New manual of general history&#039;&#039;. New York: Clark and Maynard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Anderson, P. (1974). &#039;&#039;Passages from antiquity to feudalism&#039;&#039;. London: New Left Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1974). &#039;&#039;Lineages of the absolute state&#039;&#039;. London: New Left Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Appadorai, A. (1936). &#039;&#039;Economic conditions in southern India (1000-1500 A.D.)&#039;&#039;. 2 vols. Madras: University of Madras Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Asad, T., ed. (1975). &#039;&#039;Anthropology and the colonial encounter&#039;&#039;. London: Ithaca Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aston, T., and Philpin, C., eds. (1985). &#039;&#039;The Brenner debate: Agrarian class structure and economic development in pre-industrial Europe&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Atwell, W. (1982). International bullion flows and the Chinese economy circa 1530-1650. &#039;&#039;Past and Present&#039;&#039; 95:68-91.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Baechler, J. (1988). The origins of modernity: Caste and feudality (India, Europe and Japan). In J. Baechler, J. A. Hall, and M. Mann, eds. &#039;&#039;Europe and the rise of capitalism&#039;&#039;. Oxford: Basil Blackwell.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------, Hall, J. A., and Mann, M., eds. (1988). &#039;&#039;Europe and the rise of capitalism&#039;&#039;. Oxford: Basil Blackwell.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bailey, A., and Llobera, J., eds. (1981). &#039;&#039;The Asiatic mode of production: Science and politics&#039;&#039;. London: Routledge and Kegan Paul.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bailey, R. (1986). Africa, the slave trade, and the rise of industrial capitalism in Europe and the United States: A historiographic review. &#039;&#039;American History: A Bibliographic Review&#039;&#039; 2:1-91.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1990). The slave(ry) trade and the development of capitalism in the United States: The textile industry of New England. &#039;&#039;Social Science History&#039;&#039; 14(3):373-414.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bakewell, Peter. (1984). Mining in colonial Spanish America. In L. Bethell, ed., &#039;&#039;The Cambridge history of Latin America: Colonial Latin America&#039;&#039;, Vol. 2. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Baran, P., and Sweezy, P. (1966). &#039;&#039;Monopoly capital&#039;&#039;. New York: Monthly Review Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Barnes, H. E., ed. (1925). &#039;&#039;Ploetz&#039;s manual of universal history&#039;&#039;. New York: Blue Ribbon Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beckles, H. (1987). &amp;quot;The Williams effect&amp;quot;: Eric Williams&#039; &#039;&#039;Capitalism and slavery&#039;&#039; and the growth of West Indian political economy. In B. Solow, and S. Engerman, eds., &#039;&#039;British capitalism and Caribbean slavery: The legacy of Eric Williams&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Berkner, L. (1975). The use and misuse of census data for the historical analysis of family structures. &#039;&#039;Journal of Interdisciplinary History&#039;&#039; 5:721-738.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1989). The stem family and the developmental cycle of the peasant household, &#039;&#039;American Historical Review&#039;&#039; 77:398-428.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bernal, M. (1987). &#039;&#039;Black Athena: The Afroasiatic roots of classical civilization&#039;&#039;, Vol. 1, &#039;&#039;The fabrication of ancient Greece&#039;&#039;. London: Free Association Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1991). &#039;&#039;Black Athena: The Afroasiatic roots of classical civilization&#039;&#039;, Vol. 2, &#039;&#039;The archeological and documentary evidence&#039;&#039;. London: Free Association Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bhatia, B. (1967). &#039;&#039;Famines in India&#039;&#039;. Bombay: Asia Publishing House.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bjørklund, O., Hølmhoe, H., Røhr, A., and Lie, B. (1970). &#039;&#039;Historical atlas of the world&#039;&#039;. New York: Barnes and Noble.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Black, C. (1966). &#039;&#039;The dynamics of modernization: A study in comparative history&#039;&#039;. New York: Harper and Row.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Blaikie, P. (1978). The theory of the spatial diffusion of innovations: a spacious cul-de-sac. &#039;&#039;Progress in Human Geography&#039;&#039; 2:268-295.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Blaut, J. (1962). The nature and effects of shifting agriculture. In &#039;&#039;Symposium on the impact of man on humid-tropics vegetation&#039;&#039;. Canberra: UNESCO and Australian Government Printer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1963). The ecology of tropical farming systems. &#039;&#039;Revista Geográfica&#039;&#039; 28:47-67.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1970). Geographic models of imperialism. &#039;&#039;Antipode&#039;&#039; 2(1):65-85.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1973). The theory of development. &#039;&#039;Antipode&#039;&#039; 5(2):22-26.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1976). Where was capitalism born? &#039;&#039;Antipode&#039;&#039; 8(2):1-11.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1977). Two views of diffusion. &#039;&#039;Annals of the Association of American Geographers&#039;&#039; 67:343-349.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1979). Some principles of ethnogeography. In S. Gale, and G. Olsson, eds., &#039;&#039;Philosophy in geography&#039;&#039;. Dordrecht: Reidel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1982). Nationalism as an autonomous force. &#039;&#039;Science and Society&#039;&#039; 46:1-23.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1984). Modesty and the movement. In T. Saarinen, et al., eds., &#039;&#039;Environmental perception and behavior: An inventory and prospect&#039;&#039;. Chicago: University of Chicago Department of Geography, Research Paper No. 209.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1987a). Diffusionism: A uniformitarian critique. &#039;&#039;Annals of the Association of American Geographers&#039;&#039; 77:30-47.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1987b). &#039;&#039;The national question: Decolonizing the theory of nationalism&#039;&#039;. London: Zed Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1989). Colonialism and the rise of capitalism. &#039;&#039;Science and Society&#039;&#039; 53:260-296.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1989). Review of J. Baechler, J. Hall, and M. Mann, eds., &#039;&#039;Europe and the rise of capitalism&#039;&#039;. &#039;&#039;Progress in Human Geography&#039;&#039; 13(3):441-448.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1991). Natural mapping. &#039;&#039;Transactions of the Institute of British Geographers&#039;&#039; 16(n.s.):55-74.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1991). Review of P. Curtin, &#039;&#039;The plantation complex&#039;&#039;. &#039;&#039;Journal of Historical Geography&#039;&#039; 17:472-474.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1992a). The theory of cultural racism. &#039;&#039;Antipode&#039;&#039; 24(4):289-299.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1992b). Fourteen ninety-two. &#039;&#039;Political Geography&#039;&#039; 11(3):355-385.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------, and Figueroa, L. (1988). &#039;&#039;Aspectos de la cuestion nacional en Puerto Rico&#039;&#039;. San Juan: Editorial Claridad.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------, Frank, A. G., Amin, S., Dodgshon, R., Palan, R., and Taylor. P. (1992). &#039;&#039;Fourteen ninety-two: The debate on colonialism, Eurocentrism, and history&#039;&#039;. Trenton, NJ: Africa World Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------, and Rios-Bustamante, A. (1984). Commentary on Nostrand&#039;s &amp;quot;Hispanos&amp;quot; and their &amp;quot;Homeland.&amp;quot; &#039;&#039;Annals of the Association of American Geographers&#039;&#039; 74:157-164.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Blum, J. (1978). &#039;&#039;Pseudoscience and mental ability&#039;&#039;. New York: Monthly Review Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Boas, F. (1938). &#039;&#039;The mind of primitive man&#039;&#039;. New York: Macmillan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1948). &#039;&#039;Race, language and culture&#039;&#039;. New York: Macmillan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bois, G. (1985). Against the neo-Malthusian orthodoxy. In Aston, T., and Philpin, C., eds., &#039;&#039;The Brenner debate: Agrarian class structure and economic development in pre-industrial Europe&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Borah, W., and Cook, S. F. (1972). La demografía histórica de América Latina: necesidades y perspectivas. In J. Bezant et al., eds., &#039;&#039;La historia económica en América Latina&#039;&#039;. México, D.F.: Sep-Setentas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bowler, P. (1989). &#039;&#039;The invention of progress&#039;&#039;. Oxford: Basil Blackwell.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brading, D. A., and Cross, H. C. (1972). Colonial silver mining: Mexico and Peru. &#039;&#039;Hispanic-American Historical Review&#039;&#039; 52:545-79.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brantlinger, P. (1988). &#039;&#039;Rule of darkness: British literature and imperialism, 1830-1914&#039;&#039;. Ithaca: Cornell University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Braudel, F. (1967). Prices in Europe from 1450 to 1750. In E. Rich, and C. Wilson, eds. &#039;&#039;The Cambridge economic history of Europe&#039;&#039;, Vol. 4: &#039;&#039;The economy of expanding Europe in the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1972). &#039;&#039;The Mediterranean&#039;&#039;. New York: Harper and Row.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bray, Francesca. (1984). &#039;&#039;Science and civilization in China&#039;&#039;, Vol. 6, part 2, &#039;&#039;Agriculture&#039;&#039;. (Joseph Needham, principal author and editor.) Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brenner, R. (1977). The origins of capitalist development: A critique of neo-Smithian Marxism. &#039;&#039;New Left Review&#039;&#039; 104:25-93.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1985). Agrarian class structure and economic development in pre-industrial Europe. In T. Aston and C. Philpin, eds., &#039;&#039;The Brenner debate: Agrarian class structure and economic development in pre-industrial Europe&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press. (Originally in &#039;&#039;Past and Present&#039;&#039; No. 70, 1976.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1985). The Agrarian roots of European capitalism. In T. Aston, and C. Philpin, eds., &#039;&#039;The Brenner debate: Agrarian class structure and economic development in pre-industrial Europe&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press. (Originally in &#039;&#039;Past and Present&#039;&#039;, no. 97, 1982.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1986). The social basis of economic development. In J. Roemer, ed., &#039;&#039;Analytical Marxism&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Browett, J. (1980). Development, the diffusionist paradigm and geography. &#039;&#039;Progress in Human Geography&#039;&#039; 4:56-79.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brown, L. (1981). &#039;&#039;Innovation diffusion: A new perspective&#039;&#039;. London: Methuen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Buckle, H. T. (1913). &#039;&#039;History of civilization in England&#039;&#039;. 4 vols., 2d ed., rev. New York: Hearst&#039;s International Library.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bury, J. B. (1932). &#039;&#039;The idea of progress&#039;&#039;. New York: Macmillan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cabral, A. (1979). &#039;&#039;Unity and struggle: Speeches and writings of Amilcar Cabral&#039;&#039;. New York: Monthly Review Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Carter, G. (1968). &#039;&#039;Man and the land: A cultural geography&#039;&#039;. New York: Holt, Rinehart, and Winston.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Carus-Wilson, E. M. (1967). &#039;&#039;Medieval merchant venturers&#039;&#039;. 2d ed. London: Methuen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Césaire, A. (1972). &#039;&#039;Discourse on colonialism&#039;&#039;. New York: Monthly Review Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Céspedes, G. (1974). &#039;&#039;Latin America: The early years&#039;&#039;. New York: Alfred A. Knopf.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chambers, M., et al. (1987). &#039;&#039;The Western experience&#039;&#039;. 2 vols., 4th ed. New York: Alfred A. Knopf.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chan-Cheung, J. (1967). The smuggling trade between China and Southeast Asia during the Ming Dynasty. In F. Drake, ed., &#039;&#039;Symposium on historical, archeological, and linguistic studies on southern China&#039;&#039;. Hong Kong: Hong Kong University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chandra, B. (1981). Karl Marx, his theories of Asian societies, and colonial rule. &#039;&#039;Review&#039;&#039; 5(1):13-94.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chandra, S. (1964). Commerce and industry in the medieval period. In B. Ganguli, ed., &#039;&#039;Readings in Indian economic history&#039;&#039;. Bombay.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------, ed. (1987). &#039;&#039;The Indian Ocean: Explorations in history, commerce and politics&#039;&#039;. New Delhi: Sage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chaudhuri, K. N. (1978). &#039;&#039;The trading world of Asia and the English East India Company, 1660-1760&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1985). &#039;&#039;Trade and civilization in the Indian Ocean&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chaudhuri, S. (1974). Textile trade and industry in Bengal Suba, 1650-1720. &#039;&#039;Indian Historical Review&#039;&#039; 1:262-278.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chaunu, H., and Chaunu, P. (1956). &#039;&#039;Séville et l&#039;Atlantique (1504-1650)&#039;&#039;. Part 1. Paris: SEVPEN.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chicherov, A. (1976). On the multiplicity of socio-economic structures in India in the 17th and 18th century. In G. Abramov, ed., &#039;&#039;New Indian studies by Soviet scholars&#039;&#039;. Moscow: USSR Academy of Sciences.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Childe, V. G. (1951). &#039;&#039;Social evolution&#039;&#039;. New York: Henry Schuman.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chirimuuta, R. C., and Chirimuuta, R. J. (1989). &#039;&#039;AIDS, Africa and Racism&#039;&#039;, 2d ed. London: Free Association Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chisholm, M. (1982). &#039;&#039;Modern world development&#039;&#039;. Totowa, N.J.: Barnes and Noble.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choudhary, A. (1974). &#039;&#039;Early medieval village in north-eastern India (A.D. 600-1200)&#039;&#039;. Calcutta: Punthi Pustak.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cipolla, C. (1965). &#039;&#039;Guns, sails, and empires: Technological innovation and the early phase of European expansion, 1400-1700&#039;&#039;. New York: Pantheon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cockburn, A., and Hecht, S. (1989). &#039;&#039;The fate of the forest&#039;&#039;. London: Verso.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cohen, I. (1981). Introduction to Weber, M., &#039;&#039;General economic history&#039;&#039;. New Brunswick, NJ: Transactions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cohen, M. (1977). &#039;&#039;The food crisis in prehistory&#039;&#039;. New Haven: Yale University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Collier, W. F. (1868). &#039;&#039;Outlines of general history&#039;&#039;. London: T. Nelson and Sons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Collins, K., and Roberts, D., eds. (1988). &#039;&#039;Capacity for work in the tropics&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Collyer, O. (1965). &#039;&#039;Birth rates in Latin America&#039;&#039;. Berkeley: Institute of International Studies, University of California at Berkeley.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Conklin, H. (1969). Lexicographical treatment of folk taxonomies. In Tyler, ed., &#039;&#039;Cognitive anthropology&#039;&#039;. New York: Holt, Rinehart, and Winston.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cooper, J. (1985). In search of agrarian capitalism. In T. Aston, and C. Philpin, eds., &#039;&#039;The Brenner debate: Agrarian class structure and economic development in pre-industrial Europe&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Corbridge, S. (1986). &#039;&#039;Capitalist world development&#039;&#039;. Totowa, NJ: Rowman and Littlefield.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cordell, D., and Gregory, J. (1987). Introduction to D. Cordell and J. Gregory, eds., &#039;&#039;African population and capitalism: Historical perspectives&#039;&#039;. Boulder, CO: Westview Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Coursey, D. (1967). &#039;&#039;Yams&#039;&#039;. London: Longmans, Green.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Crone, P. (1989). &#039;&#039;Pre-industrial societies&#039;&#039;. Oxford: Basil Blackwell.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Croot, P., and Parker, D. (1985). Agrarian class structure and the development of capitalism: France and England compared. In T. Aston, and C. Philpin, eds., &#039;&#039;The Brenner debate: Agrarian class structure and economic development in pre-industrial Europe&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Crosby, A. W. (1972). &#039;&#039;The Columbian exchange: Biological and cultural consequences of 1492&#039;&#039;. Westport, CO: Greenwood Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cross, H. (1983). South American bullion production and export 1550-1750. In J. Richards, ed., &#039;&#039;Precious metals and the late medieval and early modern worlds&#039;&#039;. Durham, NC: Carolina Academic Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Curtin, P. (1969). &#039;&#039;The Atlantic slave trade&#039;&#039;. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1975). &#039;&#039;Economic change in pre-colonial Africa: Senegambia in the era of the slave trade&#039;&#039;. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1990). &#039;&#039;The rise and fall of the plantation complex&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dalai, F. (1988). The racism of Jung. &#039;&#039;Race and Class&#039;&#039; 29(3):1-22.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Darby, H. (1952). &#039;&#039;The Domesday geography of eastern England&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Darity, W., Jr. (1990). British industry and the West Indies plantations. &#039;&#039;Social Science History&#039;&#039; 14(1):117-148.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Das Gupta, A. (1967). &#039;&#039;Malabar in Asian trade: 1740-1800&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
de Vries, J. (1984). &#039;&#039;European urbanization, 1500-1800&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deerr, Noel. (1949-1950). &#039;&#039;The history of sugar&#039;&#039;. 2 vols. London: Chapman and Hall.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Denevan, W. (1966). &#039;&#039;The aboriginal cultural geography of the llanos de Mojos of Bolivia&#039;&#039;. Iberoamericana, no. 48. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1976). Introduction to W. Denevan, ed., &#039;&#039;The native population of the Americas in 1492&#039;&#039;, 1-12. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1982). Hydraulic agriculture in the American tropics: Forms, measures, and recent research. In K. Flannery, ed., &#039;&#039;Maya subsistence: Studies in memory of Dennis E. Puleston&#039;&#039;. New York: Academic Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1992). The pristine myth: The landscape of the Americas in 1492. &#039;&#039;Annals of the Association of American Geographers&#039;&#039; 82:369-385.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------, ed. (1976). &#039;&#039;The native population of the Americas in 1492&#039;&#039;. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
DeVisse, J., and Labib, S. (1984). Africa in intercontinental relations. In D. Niane, ed., &#039;&#039;UNESCO general history of Africa&#039;&#039;, Vol. 4. Paris: UNESCO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dew, T. (1853). &#039;&#039;A digest of the laws, customs, manners, and institutions of the ancient and modern nations&#039;&#039;. New York: Appleton.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dewey, J. (1916). The logic of judgments of practice. In &#039;&#039;Essays in experimental logic&#039;&#039;. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1929). &#039;&#039;The quest for certainty&#039;&#039;. New York: G. P. Putnam.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Di Meglio, R. (1970). Arab trade with Indonesia and the Malay Peninsula from the 8th to the 16th century. In D. S. Richards, ed., &#039;&#039;Islam and the trade of Asia&#039;&#039;. Oxford: Cassirer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dirks, N. (1987). &#039;&#039;The hollow crown: Ethnohistory of an Indian kingdom&#039;&#039;. New York: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dobb, Maurice. (1947). &#039;&#039;Studies in the development of capitalism&#039;&#039;. New York: International Publishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Doolittle, W. (1990). &#039;&#039;Canal irrigation in prehistoric Mexico: The sequence of technological change&#039;&#039;. Austin: University of Texas Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
DuBois, W. E. B. (1965). &#039;&#039;The world and Africa: An inquiry into the part which Africa has played in world history&#039;&#039;. New York: International Publishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dunn, R. S. (1972). &#039;&#039;Sugar and slaves: The rise of the planter class in the English West Indies, 1624-1713&#039;&#039;. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Duruy, V., and Grosvenor, E. (1901). &#039;&#039;A general history of the world&#039;&#039;. New York: Crowell.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dutt, R. P. (1943). &#039;&#039;The problem of India&#039;&#039;. New York: International Publishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Duyvendak, J. (1933). Ma Huan re-examined. &#039;&#039;Verhandlungen der Koninklijke Akademie van Wetenschappen te Amsterdam, afdeeling letterkunde, nieuwe reeks&#039;&#039;. Part 33(3):1-74.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Edel, M. (1969). The Brazilian sugar cycle of the 17th century and the rise of West Indian competition. &#039;&#039;Caribbean Studies&#039;&#039; 9(1):24-45.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Edmonson, M. (1961). Neolithic diffusion rates. &#039;&#039;Current Anthropology&#039;&#039; 2(2):71-86.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Eliot Smith, G. (1928). &#039;&#039;In the beginning: The origin of civilization&#039;&#039;. New York: Morrow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1933). &#039;&#039;The diffusion of culture&#039;&#039;. London: Watts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Elvin, M. (1973). &#039;&#039;The pattern of the Chinese past&#039;&#039;. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1988). China as a counterfactual. In J. Baechler, J. A. Hall, and M. Mann, eds., &#039;&#039;Europe and the rise of capitalism&#039;&#039;, 101-112. Oxford: Basil Blackwell.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Engels, F. (1970). The origin of the family, private property, and the state. In &#039;&#039;Marx and Engels: Selected works&#039;&#039;, Vol. 3. Moscow: Progress.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1974). What have the working classes to do with Poland? In D. Fernbach, ed., &#039;&#039;Karl Marx: Political writings&#039;&#039;, Vol. 3. New York: Vintage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1975). Letter to K. Marx, June 6, 1853. In &#039;&#039;Marx and Engels: Selected correspondence&#039;&#039;. Moscow: Progress.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fei Hsiao-tung. (1953). &#039;&#039;China&#039;s gentry&#039;&#039;. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fiedel, S. (1987). &#039;&#039;Prehistory of the Americas&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Filesi, T. (1972). &#039;&#039;China and Africa in the Middle Ages&#039;&#039;. London: Frank Cass.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finley, M. (1975). &#039;&#039;The use and abuse of history&#039;&#039;. New York: Viking Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fisher, D. (1989). The price revolution: A monetary interpretation. &#039;&#039;Journal of Economic History&#039;&#039; 49:883-902.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fisher, G. (1885). &#039;&#039;Outlines of universal history&#039;&#039;. New York: Ivison, Blakeman, Taylor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1896). &#039;&#039;A brief history of the nations and their progress in history&#039;&#039;. New York: American Book Co.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fleck, L. (1979). &#039;&#039;Genesis and development of a scientific fact&#039;&#039;. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Florescano, E. (1984). The formation and economic structure of the hacienda in New Spain. In L. Bethell, ed., &#039;&#039;The Cambridge history of Latin America: Colonial Latin America&#039;&#039;, Vol. 2. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Foster, G. (1962). &#039;&#039;Traditional cultures: And the impact of technological change&#039;&#039;. New York: Harper and Row.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Frake, C. (1969). The ethnographic study of cognitive systems. In S. Tyler, ed., &#039;&#039;Cognitive anthropology&#039;&#039;. New York: Holt, Rinehart, and Winston.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Frank, A. G. (1968). &#039;&#039;Capitalism and underdevelopment in Latin America&#039;&#039;. New York: Monthly Review Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1969). Sociology of development and underdevelopment of sociology. In his &#039;&#039;Latin America: Underdevelopment or revolution&#039;&#039;. New York: Monthly Review Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1978). &#039;&#039;World accumulation, 1492-1789&#039;&#039;. New York: Monthly Review Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Frankel, H. (1991). Marxism and physics: A new look. &#039;&#039;Science and Society&#039;&#039; 55:336-347.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Freedman, M. (1966). &#039;&#039;Chinese lineage and society&#039;&#039;. London: University of London Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Freeman, E. (1874). &#039;&#039;General sketch of history&#039;&#039;. New York: Holt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Freire, P. (1972). &#039;&#039;Pedagogy of the oppressed&#039;&#039;. New York: Herder and Herder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
FRELIMO (Frente de Libertação de Moçambique). (1971). &#039;&#039;Historia de Moçambique&#039;&#039;. Porto, Portugal: Afrontamento.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Freund, J. (1969). &#039;&#039;The sociology of Max Weber&#039;&#039;. New York: Vintage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fu Chu-fu and Li Ching-neng. (1956). &#039;&#039;The sprouts of capitalistic factors within China&#039;s feudal society&#039;&#039;. Program in East Asian Studies, Western Washington State University, Occasional Paper no. 7.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furtado, C. (1963). &#039;&#039;The economic growth of Brazil&#039;&#039;. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fyfe, C., and McMaster, D., eds. (1981). &#039;&#039;African historical demography&#039;&#039;. Edinburgh, Scotland: Centre of African Studies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Galeano, E. (1972). &#039;&#039;The open veins of Latin America&#039;&#039;. New York: Monthly Review Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Galloway, J. H. (1977). The Mediterranean sugar industry. &#039;&#039;Geographical Review&#039;&#039; 67:177-192.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1989). &#039;&#039;The sugar cane industry: An historical geography from its origins to 1914&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Garraty, J., and Gay, P., eds. (1981). &#039;&#039;The Columbia history of the world&#039;&#039;. New York: Dorset Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gernet, J. (1962). &#039;&#039;Daily life in China on the eve of the Mongol invasion, 1250-1276&#039;&#039;. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Giblin, J. (1990). Trypanosomiasis control in African history: An evaded issue? &#039;&#039;Journal of African History&#039;&#039; 31:59-80.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gilfillan, S. (1920). The coldward course of progress. &#039;&#039;Political Science Quarterly&#039;&#039; 35:393-410.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gill, D. and Levidow, L., eds. (1987). &#039;&#039;Anti-racist science teaching&#039;&#039;. London: Free Association Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gilman, A. (1874). &#039;&#039;First steps in general history&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, MA: Riverside Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Godelier, M. (1969). &#039;&#039;Sobre el modo de producción asiático&#039;&#039;. Barcelona, Spain: Ediciones Martínez Roca.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Goitein, S. (1967). &#039;&#039;A Mediterranean society&#039;&#039;. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Golson, J. (1977). No room at the top: Agricultural intensification in the New Guinea Highlands. In J. Allen et al., eds., &#039;&#039;Sunda and Sahul: Prehistoric studies in Southeast Asia, Melanesia and Australia&#039;&#039;. London: Academic Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Goodrich, S. G. (1843). &#039;&#039;Peter Parley&#039;s common school history&#039;&#039;. Philadelphia: E. H. Butler.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gopal, L. (1963). Quasi-manorial rights in ancient India. &#039;&#039;Journal of the Economic and Social History of the Orient&#039;&#039; 6:296-308.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gopal, S. (1972). Nobility and the mercantile community in India. &#039;&#039;Journal of Indian History&#039;&#039; 50:793-802.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gorman, C. (1977). A priori models and Thai prehistory: A reconsideration of the beginnings of agriculture in Southeast Asia. In C. A. Reed, ed., &#039;&#039;Origins of agriculture&#039;&#039;. The Hague: Mouton.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gossett, T. (1963). &#039;&#039;Race: The history of an idea in America&#039;&#039;. Dallas: Southern Methodist University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gould, P. (1969). &#039;&#039;Spatial diffusion&#039;&#039;. Commission on College Geography, Association of American Geographers, Resource Paper no. 4, Washington, DC: Association of American Geographers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Graebner, F. (1911). &#039;&#039;Methode der ethnologie&#039;&#039;. Heidelberg, Germany.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gupta, N. S. (1970). &#039;&#039;Industrial structure of India during the medieval period&#039;&#039;. Delhi: Chand.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Habib, I. (1963). &#039;&#039;The agrarian system of Mughal India&#039;&#039;. London: Asia Publishing House.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1964). Usury in medieval India. &#039;&#039;Comparative Studies in Society and History&#039;&#039; 6:392-419.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1965). The social distribution of landed property in pre-British India. &#039;&#039;Enquiry&#039;&#039; 2(2,n.s.):21-75.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1969). Problems of Marxist historical analysis. &#039;&#039;Enquiry&#039;&#039; 3(2,n.s.):52-67.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hagen, E. (1962). &#039;&#039;The theory of social change: How economic growth begins&#039;&#039;. Homewood, IL: Dorsey Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1962). A framework for analyzing economic and political change. In Brookings Institution, ed., &#039;&#039;Development of the emerging countries: An agenda for research&#039;&#039;, 1-39. Washington, DC: Brookings Institution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hägerstrand, T. (1967). &#039;&#039;Innovation diffusion as a spatial process&#039;&#039;. Translated by A. Pred. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hajnal, J. (1965). European marriage patterns in perspective. In D. Glass and D. Eversley, eds., &#039;&#039;Population in history: Essays in historical demography&#039;&#039;. Chicago: Aldine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hall, J. (1985). &#039;&#039;Powers and liberties: The causes and consequences of the rise of the West&#039;&#039;. Oxford: Basil Blackwell.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1988). States and societies: The miracle in historical perspective. In J. Baechler, J. A. Hall, and M. Mann, eds., &#039;&#039;Europe and the rise of capitalism&#039;&#039;. Oxford: Basil Blackwell.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hallam, H. (1975). The medieval social picture. In E. Kamenka and R. Neale, eds., &#039;&#039;Feudalism, capitalism and beyond&#039;&#039;. London: Edward Arnold.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Haller, J. (1971). &#039;&#039;Outcasts from evolution: Scientific attitudes of racial inferiority, 1859-1900&#039;&#039;. Urbana: University of Illinois Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hamilton, E. J. (1929). American treasure and the rise of capitalism. &#039;&#039;Economica&#039;&#039; 9:338-357.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1934). &#039;&#039;American treasure and the price revolution in Spain, 1501-1650&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hamilton, G. S. (1985). Why no capitalism in China? Negative questions in historical, comparative research. &#039;&#039;Journal of Developing Societies&#039;&#039; 1:187-211.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Handler, R. (1989). Review of Macfarlane, A., &#039;&#039;Marriage and love in England&#039;&#039;. &#039;&#039;American Anthropologist&#039;&#039; 91:1078-1079.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hannemann, M. (1975). &#039;&#039;The diffusion of the Reformation in Southwestern Germany, 1518-1534&#039;&#039;. Department of Geography, University of Chicago, Research Paper no. 167.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hansis, R. (1976). Ethnogeography and science: Viticulture in Argentina. Ph.D. diss., Pennsylvania State University.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hardy, F. (1936). Some aspects of tropical soils. &#039;&#039;Transactions of the Third International Congress of Soil Science&#039;&#039; 2:150-163.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Harewood, J. (1966). Population growth in Grenada. &#039;&#039;Social and Economic Studies&#039;&#039; 15:61-84.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Harris, M. (1968). &#039;&#039;The rise of anthropological theory&#039;&#039;. New York: Crowell.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Harrison, P. (1969). &#039;&#039;The communists and Chinese peasant rebellions&#039;&#039;. New York: Atheneum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------, and Turner, B. L., eds. (1978). &#039;&#039;Pre-Hispanic Maya agriculture&#039;&#039;. Albuquerque: University of New Mexico Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hasan, A. (1969). The silver currency output of the Mughal Empire and prices in India during the 16th and 17th centuries. &#039;&#039;Indian Economic and Social History Review&#039;&#039; 6:85-116.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Haskel, D. (1848). &#039;&#039;Chronology and universal history&#039;&#039;. New York: J. H. Colton.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hassan, F. (1978). Demographic archeology. In M. B. Schaffer, ed., &#039;&#039;Advances in archeological method and theory&#039;&#039;, Vol. 1. New York: Columbia University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hegel, G. (1956). &#039;&#039;The philosophy of history&#039;&#039;. New York: Dover Publications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hilton, R. (1980). Individualism and the English peasantry. &#039;&#039;New Left Review&#039;&#039;, no. 120, pp. 109-111.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1985). Introduction. In T. Aston, and C. Philpin, eds., &#039;&#039;The Brenner debate: Agrarian class structure and economic development in pre-industrial Europe&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------, ed. (1976). &#039;&#039;The transition from feudalism to capitalism&#039;&#039;. London: New Left Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ho Ping-ti. (1977). The indigenous origins of Chinese agriculture. In C. A. Reed, ed., &#039;&#039;Origins of agriculture&#039;&#039;. The Hague: Mouton.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hodgett, A. J. (1972). &#039;&#039;A social and economic history of medieval Europe&#039;&#039;. London: Methuen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hopkins, A. (1973). &#039;&#039;An economic history of West Africa&#039;&#039;. New York: Columbia University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Howard, A. (1975). Pre-colonial centers and regional systems in Africa. &#039;&#039;Pan-African Journal&#039;&#039; 8(3):247-270.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Huddleston, L. (1967). &#039;&#039;Origins of the American Indians: European concepts, 1492-1729&#039;&#039;. Austin: University of Texas Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hoyle, R. (1990). Tenure and the land market in early modern England: Or a late contribution to the Brenner debate. &#039;&#039;Economic History Review&#039;&#039; 43:1-20.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hudson, B. (1977). The new geography and the new imperialism: 1870-1918. &#039;&#039;Antipode&#039;&#039; 9(1):12-19.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hulme, P. (1992). &#039;&#039;Colonial encounters: Europe and the Native Caribbean 1492-1797&#039;&#039;. London: Routledge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Huntington, E. (1924). &#039;&#039;Principles of human geography&#039;&#039;. 3d ed. New York: John Wiley.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Inikori, J. (1987). Slavery and the development of industrial capitalism. In B. Solow and S. Engerman, eds. (1987). &#039;&#039;British capitalism and Caribbean slavery: The legacy of Eric Williams&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1989). Slavery and the revolution in cotton textile production in England. &#039;&#039;Social Science History&#039;&#039; 13(4):343-379.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------, ed. (1979). &#039;&#039;The African slave trade from the fifteenth to the nineteenth century&#039;&#039;. Paris: UNESCO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Irvine, F. (1934). &#039;&#039;A textbook of West African agriculture: Soils and crops&#039;&#039;. London: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Irwin, G. (1982). Sub-Saharan Africa. In J. Garraty, and P. Gay, eds., &#039;&#039;Columbia history of the world&#039;&#039;. New York: Columbia University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Isichei, E. (1982). &#039;&#039;A history of Nigeria&#039;&#039;. London: Longmans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ivanov, V. (1985). Round-table: State and law in the ancient Orient. (Discussion.) &#039;&#039;Social Sciences (USSR Academy of Sciences)&#039;&#039; 16(3):177-201.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Jackson, P., ed. (1987). &#039;&#039;Race and racism: Essays in social geography&#039;&#039;. London: Allen and Unwin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
James, C. L. R. (1938a). &#039;&#039;The Black Jacobins: Toussaint L&#039;Ouverture and the San Domingo revolution&#039;&#039;. London: Secker and Warburg.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1938b). &#039;&#039;A history of Negro revolt&#039;&#039;. London: Fact. Rev. ed. (1969), &#039;&#039;A history of Pan-African revolt&#039;&#039;. Washington, DC: Drum and Spear Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1970). The Atlantic slave trade and slavery: Some interpretations of their significance in the development of the United States and the Western World. In J. A. Williams and C. F. Harris, eds, &#039;&#039;Amistad I&#039;&#039;, 119-164. New York: Vintage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Jett, S. C. (1991). Further information on the geography of the blowgun and its implications for transoceanic contacts. &#039;&#039;Annals of the Association of American Geographers&#039;&#039; 81:89-102.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Jha, S. C. (1963). &#039;&#039;Studies in the development of capitalism in India&#039;&#039;. Calcutta: Mukhopadhyay.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Johnson, K. (1977). Do as the land bids: A study of Otomi resource use on the eve of irrigation. Ph.D. diss., Clark University.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Joly, N. (1897). &#039;&#039;Man before metals&#039;&#039;. New York: Appleton.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Jones, E. L. (1981). &#039;&#039;The European miracle&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1988). &#039;&#039;Growth recurring: Economic change in world history&#039;&#039;. Oxford: Clarendon Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Jung, C. (1963). &#039;&#039;Memories, dreams, reflections&#039;&#039;. New York: Random House.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1964). The dreamlike world of India. In his &#039;&#039;Civilization in transition&#039;&#039; (Collected works, vol. 10). Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1971). &#039;&#039;Psychological types&#039;&#039; (Collected works, vol. 6). Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kabaker, A. (1977). A radiocarbon chronology relevant to the origins of agriculture. In C. A. Reed, ed., &#039;&#039;Origins of agriculture&#039;&#039;. The Hague: Mouton.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kagan, D., Ozment, S., and Turner, F. (1987). &#039;&#039;The Western heritage&#039;&#039;, 2 vols., 3rd ed. New York: Macmillan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kea, R. (1982). &#039;&#039;Settlements, trade, and politics in the seventeenth-century Gold Coast&#039;&#039;. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keightley, T. (1849). &#039;&#039;Outlines of history&#039;&#039;. Rev. ed. London: Longmans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kerridge, E. (1968). &#039;&#039;The agricultural revolution&#039;&#039;. New York: A. M. Kelley.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kertzer, D. (1989). The joint family household revisited: Demographic constraints and household complexity in the European past. &#039;&#039;Journal of Family History&#039;&#039; 14:1-16.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kinder, H., and Hilgemann, W. (1974). &#039;&#039;The Anchor atlas of world history&#039;&#039;, Vol. 1. New York: Anchor Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kitching, G. (1983). Proto-industrialization and demographic change. &#039;&#039;Journal of African History&#039;&#039; 24:221-240.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kniffen, F. (1965). Folk housing: Key to diffusion. &#039;&#039;Annals of the Association of American Geographers&#039;&#039; 55:549-577.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Koepping, K.-P. (1983). &#039;&#039;Adolf Bastian and the psychic unity of mankind&#039;&#039;. St. Lucia, Australia: University of Queensland Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kosambi, D. D. (1969). &#039;&#039;Ancient India&#039;&#039;. New York: Meridian Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kroeber, A. (1937). Diffusionism. In &#039;&#039;Encyclopedia of the social sciences&#039;&#039;, 5:139-142. New York: Macmillan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kuhn, T. (1970). &#039;&#039;The structure of scientific revolutions&#039;&#039;. 2nd ed. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Laclau, E. (1977). &#039;&#039;Politics and ideology in Marxist theory&#039;&#039;. London: New Left Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Laibman, D. (1984). Modes of production and theories of transition. &#039;&#039;Science and Society&#039;&#039; 48(3):257-294.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lambert, D. (1971). The role of climate in the economic development of the tropics. &#039;&#039;Land Economics&#039;&#039; 47:339-344.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lane, F. (1973). &#039;&#039;Venice: A maritime republic&#039;&#039;. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Laslett, P. (1988). The European family and early industrialization. In J. Baechler, J. A. Hall, and M. Mann, eds., &#039;&#039;Europe and the rise of capitalism&#039;&#039;. Oxford: Basil Blackwell.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lattimore, O. (1980). The periphery as locus of innovation. In J. Gottmann, ed., &#039;&#039;Centre and periphery: Spatial variation and politics&#039;&#039;. Beverly Hills. CA: Sage Publications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lee, G. (1987). Comparative perspectives. In M. B. Sussman and S. K. Steinmetz, eds., &#039;&#039;Handbook of marriage and the family&#039;&#039;. New York: Plenum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lee, R. (1992). Art, science, or politics? The crisis in hunter-gatherer studies. &#039;&#039;American Anthropologist&#039;&#039; 94:31-54.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lelekov, L. (1985). Round-table: State and law in the ancient Orient. (Discussion.) &#039;&#039;Social Sciences (USSR Academy of Sciences)&#039;&#039; 16(3):177-201.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lentnek, B. (1969). Economic transition from traditional to commercial agriculture. &#039;&#039;Annals of the Association of American Geographers&#039;&#039; 59:65-84.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lerner, R., Meacham, S., and Burns, E. (1988). &#039;&#039;Western civilizations: Their history and their culture&#039;&#039;. 11th ed. New York: Norton.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le Roy Ladurie, E. (1985). A reply to Robert Brenner. In T. Aston and C. Philpin, eds., &#039;&#039;The Brenner debate: Agrarian class structure and economic development in pre-industrial Europe&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Levitzion, N. (1972). The early states of the Western Sudan to 1500. In J. Ajayi and M. Crowder, eds., &#039;&#039;History of West Africa&#039;&#039;, Vol. 1. New York: Columbia University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lévy-Bruhl, L. (1966). &#039;&#039;How natives think&#039;&#039;. New York: Washington Square Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lewis, A. (1973). Maritime skills in the Indian Ocean, 1368-1500. &#039;&#039;Journal of the Economic and Social History of the Orient&#039;&#039; 16:238-264.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lewis, W. A., ed. (1970). &#039;&#039;Tropical development, 1880-1913&#039;&#039;. Evanston, IL: Northwestern University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Liceria, M. A. C. (1974). Emergence of Brahmanas as landed intermediaries in Karnataka, c. A.D. 1000-1300. &#039;&#039;Indian Historical Review&#039;&#039; 1(1):28-35.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lloyd, G. (1990). &#039;&#039;Demystifying mentalities&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lo Jung-pang. (1955). China as a sea power. &#039;&#039;Far Eastern Quarterly&#039;&#039; 14:489-503.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lopez, R. (1953). Hard times and investment in culture. In R. Lopez, ed., &#039;&#039;The Renaissance: A symposium&#039;&#039;. New York: Metropolitan Museum of Art.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------, and Miskimin, H. (1961-1962). The economic depression of the Renaissance. &#039;&#039;Economic History Review&#039;&#039; 14:408-426.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lord, J. (1869). &#039;&#039;Ancient states and empires: For colleges and schools&#039;&#039;. New York: Charles Scribner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lovell, W. G. (1992). &amp;quot;Heavy shadows and black night&amp;quot;: Disease and depopulation in Colonial Spanish America. &#039;&#039;Annals of the Association of American Geographers&#039;&#039; 82:426-443.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lowie, R. (1937). &#039;&#039;The history of ethnological theory&#039;&#039;. New York: Rinehart.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Löwith, K. (1982). &#039;&#039;Max Weber and Karl Marx&#039;&#039;. London: Allen and Unwin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ma Huan. (1970). &#039;&#039;The overall survey of the ocean&#039;s shores&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mabogunji, A. (1972). The land and peoples of West Africa. In J. Ajayi and M. Crowder, eds., &#039;&#039;History of West Africa&#039;&#039;, Vol. 1. New York: Columbia University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Macauley, T. (1850-1861). &#039;&#039;The history of England from the accession of James the Second&#039;&#039;. 5 vols. London: Longman.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Macfarlane, A. (1978). &#039;&#039;The origins of English individualism&#039;&#039;. Oxford: Basil Blackwell.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1986). &#039;&#039;Marriage and love in England: Modes of reproduction 1300-1840&#039;&#039;. Oxford: Basil Blackwell.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1988). The cradle of capitalism. In J. Baechler, J. A. Hall, and M. Mann, eds., &#039;&#039;Europe and the rise of capitalism&#039;&#039;. Oxford: Basil Blackwell.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Magalhães-Godinho, V. (1969). &#039;&#039;L&#039;économie de l&#039;empire portugais aux XV et XVI siècles&#039;&#039;. Paris: SEVPEN.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Magubane, B. (1987). &#039;&#039;The ties that bind: African-American consciousness and Africa&#039;&#039;. Trenton, NJ: Africa World Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mahalingam, T. (1951). &#039;&#039;Economic life in the Vijayanagar Empire&#039;&#039;. Madras: University of Madras Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Malinowski, B. (1927). The life of culture. In G. Eliot Smith, ed., &#039;&#039;Culture: The diffusion controversy&#039;&#039;. New York: Norton.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mamdani, M. (1972). &#039;&#039;The myth of population control&#039;&#039;. New York: Monthly Review Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mandelbaum, M. (1971). &#039;&#039;History, man and reason: A study in nineteenth-century thought&#039;&#039;. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mann, M. (1986). &#039;&#039;The sources of social power: Vol. 1. A history of power from the beginning to A.D. 1760&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1988). European development: Approaching a historical explanation. In J. Baechler, J. A. Hall, and M. Mann, eds., &#039;&#039;Europe and the rise of capitalism&#039;&#039;. Oxford: Basil Blackwell.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mannheim, K. (1936). &#039;&#039;Ideology and utopia&#039;&#039;. New York: Harcourt, Brace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Marglin, S. (1990). Losing touch: The cultural conditions of worker accommodation and resistance. In F. Marglin and S. Marglin, eds., &#039;&#039;Dominating knowledge: Development, culture, and resistance&#039;&#039;. Oxford: Clarendon Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Markham, S. (1944). &#039;&#039;Climate and the energy of nations&#039;&#039;. London: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Marx, K. (1976). &#039;&#039;Capital&#039;&#039;. New York: Vintage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1979). The British rule in India. In &#039;&#039;Marx and Engels: Collected Works&#039;&#039;, 12:125-33. Moscow: Progress.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------, and Engels, F. (1975). &#039;&#039;Selected correspondence&#039;&#039;. 3d ed. Moscow: Progress.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------, and Engels, F. (1976). &#039;&#039;The German ideology&#039;&#039;. Moscow: Progress.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
McAlister, L. (1984). &#039;&#039;Spain and Portugal in the New World, 1492-1700&#039;&#039;. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
McClelland, D. (1961). &#039;&#039;The achieving society&#039;&#039;. Princeton, NJ: Van Nostrand.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
McKay, D. (1943). Colonialism in the French geographical movement. &#039;&#039;Geographical Review&#039;&#039; 33:214-232.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
McNeill, W. (1967). &#039;&#039;A world history&#039;&#039;. New York: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1976). &#039;&#039;Plagues and peoples&#039;&#039;. Garden City, NY: Anchor Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mead, G. H. (1936). &#039;&#039;Movements of thought in the nineteenth century&#039;&#039;. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1938). &#039;&#039;The philosophy of the act&#039;&#039;. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mead, M. (1930). &#039;&#039;Growing up in New Guinea&#039;&#039;. New York: Blue Ribbon Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Megaw, J., ed. (1977). &#039;&#039;Hunters, gatherers and first farmers beyond Europe: An archeological survey&#039;&#039;. Leicester, England: Leicester University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Merriman, T. (1875). &#039;&#039;The trail of history&#039;&#039;. 3d ed. Boston: Merriman and Stewart.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Miller, J. (1982). The significance of drought, disease, and famine in the agriculturally marginal zones of West-Central Africa. &#039;&#039;Journal of African History&#039;&#039; 23:17-61.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1988). &#039;&#039;Way of death&#039;&#039;. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Milne, G. (1947). A soil reconnaissance journey through parts of Tanganyika Territory, December 1935 to February 1936. &#039;&#039;Journal of Ecology&#039;&#039; 35:192-265.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Minchinton, W. (1969). &#039;&#039;The growth of English overseas trade&#039;&#039;. London: Methuen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mintz, S. W. (1985). &#039;&#039;Sweetness and power: The place of sugar in modern history&#039;&#039;. New York: Penguin Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Miskimin, H. (1969). &#039;&#039;The economy of early Renaissance Europe, 1300-1460&#039;&#039;. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mohr, E., and van Baren, F. (1954). &#039;&#039;Tropical soils&#039;&#039;. Amsterdam: Royal Tropical Institute.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Montesquieu. (1949). &#039;&#039;The spirit of the laws&#039;&#039;. New York: Hafner Press. (Originally published in 1748.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mukherjee, Radhakamal. (1967). &#039;&#039;The economic history of India, 1600-1800&#039;&#039;. Allahabad, India: Kitab Mahal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mukherjee, Ramkrishna. (1958). &#039;&#039;The rise and fall of the East India Company&#039;&#039;. 2d ed. Berlin: VEB Deutscher Verlag der Wissenschaften.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Müller, J. (1842). &#039;&#039;The history of the world to 1783&#039;&#039;. 4 vols. Boston: Webb.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nag, M. (1980). How modernization can also increase fertility. &#039;&#039;Current Anthropology&#039;&#039; 21:571-588.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Naqvi, H. K. (1968). &#039;&#039;Urban centres in Upper India, 1556-1803&#039;&#039;. Bombay: Asia Publishing House.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Needham, J. (1985). &#039;&#039;Gunpowder as the fourth estate east and west&#039;&#039;. Hong Kong: Hong Kong University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------, and collaborators. (1954-1984). &#039;&#039;Science and civilization in China&#039;&#039;. 6 vols. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Neumann, E. (1954). &#039;&#039;The origins and history of consciousness&#039;&#039;. New York: Scribner&#039;s.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Newsom, L. (1985). Indian population patterns in colonial Spanish America. &#039;&#039;Latin American Research Review&#039;&#039; 20(3):41-74.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Niane, D. (1984). Mali and the second Mandingo expansion. In D. Niane, ed., &#039;&#039;UNESCO general history of Africa&#039;&#039;, Vol. 4. Paris: UNESCO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------, ed. (1984). &#039;&#039;UNESCO general history of Africa&#039;&#039;, Vol. 4. Paris: UNESCO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nicholas, D. M. (1967-68). Town and countryside: Social and economic tensions in 14th century Flanders. &#039;&#039;Comparative Studies in Society and History&#039;&#039; 10:458-485.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nisbet, R. (1980). &#039;&#039;History of the idea of progress&#039;&#039;. New York: Basic Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nurul Hasan, S. (1969). The position of the Zamindars in the Mughal Empire. In R. Frykenberg, ed., &#039;&#039;Land control and social structure in Indian history&#039;&#039;. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nye, P., and Greenland, D. (1960). &#039;&#039;The soil under shifting cultivation&#039;&#039;. Farnham Royal, England: Commonwealth Agricultural Bureaux.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
O&#039;Keefe, P., and Wisner, B. (1975). African drought: The state of the game. In P. Richards, ed., &#039;&#039;African environment: Problems and perspectives&#039;&#039;. London: International African Institute.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Onimode, B. (1982). &#039;&#039;Imperialism and underdevelopment in Nigeria&#039;&#039;. London: Zed Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Orwin, C., and Orwin, C. (1967). &#039;&#039;The open fields&#039;&#039;. Oxford: Clarendon Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Osae, T., Nwabara, S., and Odunsi, A. (1973). &#039;&#039;A short history of West Africa&#039;&#039;. New York: Hill and Wang.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pacey, A. (1990). &#039;&#039;Technology in world history: A thousand-year history&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Padgug, R. (1976). Problems in the theory of slavery and slave society. &#039;&#039;Science and Society&#039;&#039; 40:3-28.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Palmer, R., ed. (1957). &#039;&#039;Atlas of world history&#039;&#039;. Chicago: Rand McNally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Panikkar, K. M. (1959). &#039;&#039;Asia and Western influence&#039;&#039;. London: Allen and Unwin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Parsons, J. B. (1970). &#039;&#039;Peasant rebellions of the late Ming Dynasty&#039;&#039;. Tucson: University of Arizona Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pearse, A. (1980). &#039;&#039;Seeds of plenty, seeds of want: Social and economic implications of the green revolution&#039;&#039;. Oxford: Clarendon Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pendleton, R. (1943). Land use in north-eastern Thailand. &#039;&#039;Geographical Review&#039;&#039; 33:14-41.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Perry, W. (1935). &#039;&#039;The primordial ocean&#039;&#039;. London: Methuen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Piaget, J. (1971). &#039;&#039;Psychology and epistemology&#039;&#039;. New York: Grossman Publishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pinar, W. (1974). &#039;&#039;Heightened consciousness, cultural revolution, and curriculum theory&#039;&#039;. Berkeley, CA: McCutchan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pires, T. (1944). &#039;&#039;The Suma Oriental&#039;&#039;. London: Hakluyt Society.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ploetz, C., and Tillinghast, W. (1883). &#039;&#039;Epitome of ancient, medieval, and modern history&#039;&#039;. Boston: Houghton-Mifflin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prakash, I. (1964). Organization of industrial production in urban centres in India during the 17th century with special reference to textiles. In B. Ganguli, ed., &#039;&#039;Readings in Indian economic history&#039;&#039;. Bombay, India.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prescott, J., and Pendleton, R. (1952). &#039;&#039;Laterites and lateritic soils&#039;&#039;. Slough, England: Commonwealth Agricultural Bureaux.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Purcell, V. (1965). &#039;&#039;The Chinese in Southeast Asia&#039;&#039;. 2d ed. London: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Qaisar, A. J. (1974). The role of brokers in medieval India. &#039;&#039;Indian Historical Review&#039;&#039; 1:220-246.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Quackenbos, J. (1889). &#039;&#039;Illustrated school history of the world&#039;&#039;. New York: American Book Company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Radell, D. R. (1976). The Indian slave trade and population of Nicaragua during the sixteenth century. In W. Denevan, ed., &#039;&#039;The Native Population of the Americas in 1492&#039;&#039;. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Radin, P. (1927). &#039;&#039;Primitive man as philosopher&#039;&#039;. New York: Appleton.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1965). &#039;&#039;The method and theory of ethnology&#039;&#039;. New York: Basic Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ratzel, F. (1896). &#039;&#039;The history of mankind (Völkerkunde)&#039;&#039;. 2 vols. London: Macmillan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rawski, E. (1972). &#039;&#039;Agricultural change and the peasant economy of South China&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Raychaudhuri, T. (1962). &#039;&#039;Jan Company in Coromandel&#039;&#039;. The Hague: Nijhoff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1965). The agrarian system of Mughal India. &#039;&#039;Enquiry&#039;&#039; 2(1,n.s.):92-121.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reclus, E. (1876-1894). &#039;&#039;Nouvelle géographie universelle&#039;&#039;. Paris: Hachette.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reed, C. A., ed. (1977). &#039;&#039;Origins of agriculture&#039;&#039;. The Hague: Mouton.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Richards, P., ed. (1975). &#039;&#039;African environment: Problems and perspectives&#039;&#039;. London: International African Institute.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Robbins, R. (1832). &#039;&#039;The world displayed in its history and geography: Embracing a history of the world from the Creation to the present day&#039;&#039;. New York: W. W. Reed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Roberts, J. (1987). &#039;&#039;The Hutchinson history of the world&#039;&#039;. 2d ed. London: Hutchinson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Robinson, C. (1987). Capitalism, slavery and bourgeois historiography. &#039;&#039;History Workshop&#039;&#039; 23:122-141.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rodinson, M. (1973). &#039;&#039;Islam and capitalism&#039;&#039;. New York: Pantheon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1974). Le marchand musulman. In D. S. Richards, ed., &#039;&#039;Islam and the trade of Asia&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cassirer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rodney, W. (1970). &#039;&#039;A history of the Upper Guinea Coast, 1545-1800&#039;&#039;. New York: Monthly Review Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1972). &#039;&#039;How Europe underdeveloped Africa&#039;&#039;. London: Bogle-L&#039;Ouverture Publications, and Dar es Salaam: Tanzania Publishing House.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rogers, E. (1962). &#039;&#039;The diffusion of innovations&#039;&#039;. New York: Free Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------, and Shoemaker, F. (1971). &#039;&#039;Communication of innovations&#039;&#039;. New York: Free Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rorty, R. (1980). &#039;&#039;Philosophy and the mirror of nature&#039;&#039;. Oxford: Basil Blackwell.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rouse, I. (1961). Comments on Edmonson&#039;s Neolithic diffusion rates. &#039;&#039;Current Anthropology&#039;&#039; 2:96.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1986). &#039;&#039;Migrations in prehistory&#039;&#039;. New Haven: Yale University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Roxborough, I. (1979). &#039;&#039;Theories of underdevelopment&#039;&#039;. London: Macmillan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sack, R. (1980). &#039;&#039;Conceptions of space in social thought&#039;&#039;. London: Macmillan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Said, E. (1979). &#039;&#039;Orientalism&#039;&#039;. New York: Random House.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sanderson, E. (1898). &#039;&#039;History of the world from the earliest time to the year 1898&#039;&#039;. New York: Appleton.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sastri, K. N. (1966). &#039;&#039;A history of South India from prehistoric times to the fall of Vijayanagar&#039;&#039;. 3d ed. Madras: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Schmidt, W. (1939). &#039;&#039;The culture historical method of ethnology&#039;&#039;. New York: Fortuny.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Schweder, R. (1990). Cultural psychology: What is it? In J. Stigler, R. Schweder, and G. Herdt, eds., &#039;&#039;Cultural psychology: Essays on comparative human development&#039;&#039;. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Seccombe, W. (1983). Marxism and demography. &#039;&#039;New Left Review&#039;&#039; no. 137, pp. 22-47.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Semo, E. (1982). &#039;&#039;Historia del capitalismo en México: Los orígenes, 1521-1763&#039;&#039;. Mexico, D.F.: Ediciones Era.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shannon, G., and Pyle, G. (1989). The origin and diffusion of AIDS. &#039;&#039;Annals of the Association of American Geographers&#039;&#039; 79:1-24.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sharma, R. S. (1965). &#039;&#039;Indian feudalism, c.300-1200&#039;&#039;. Calcutta: University of Calcutta Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1966). &#039;&#039;Light on early Indian society and economy&#039;&#039;. Bombay: Manaktalas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shepherd, W. (1911). &#039;&#039;Historical atlas&#039;&#039;. New York: Henry Holt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sheridan, R. (1974). &#039;&#039;Sugar and slavery&#039;&#039;. Baltimore, MD: Johns Hopkins University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1987). Eric Williams and &#039;&#039;Capitalism and slavery&#039;&#039;: A biographical and historiographical essay. In B. Solow and S. Engerman, eds. &#039;&#039;British capitalism and Caribbean slavery: The legacy of Eric Williams&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sherif, A. (1987). &#039;&#039;Slaves, spices and ivory in Zanzibar&#039;&#039;. London: James Currey.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Simkin, C. (1968). &#039;&#039;The traditional trade of Asia&#039;&#039;. London: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Simonsen, R. (1944). &#039;&#039;Historia económica do Brasil, 1500-1820&#039;&#039;. 2d ed. São Paulo, Brazil: Companhia Editora Nacional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sinclair, P. (1991). Archeology in eastern Africa: An overview of current chronological issues. &#039;&#039;Journal of African History&#039;&#039; 32:179-219.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Smith, A. (1972). The early states of the Central Sudan. In J. Ajayi and M. Crowder, eds., &#039;&#039;History of West Africa&#039;&#039;, Vol. 1. New York: Columbia University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Smith, C. T. (1969). &#039;&#039;An historical geography of Western Europe before 1800&#039;&#039;. London: Longmans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Smith, P. (1868). &#039;&#039;An ancient history: From the earliest records to the fall of the Western Empire&#039;&#039;. 3 vols. London: Walton.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So Kwan-wai. (1975). &#039;&#039;Japanese piracy in Ming China during the 16th century&#039;&#039;. East Lansing: Michigan State University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Solow, B. (1987). Capitalism and slavery in the exceedingly long run. In B. Solow and S. Engerman, eds. &#039;&#039;British capitalism and Caribbean slavery: The legacy of Eric Williams&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------, and Engerman, S., eds. (1987). &#039;&#039;British capitalism and Caribbean slavery: The legacy of Eric Williams&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Spencer, H. (1969). &#039;&#039;The man versus the state&#039;&#039;. Baltimore: Penguin Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Spradley, J., and McCurdy, D. (1975). &#039;&#039;Anthropology: A cultural perspective&#039;&#039;. New York: Wiley.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Steele, J., and Steele, E. (1883). &#039;&#039;A brief history of ancient, medieval, and modern peoples&#039;&#039;. New York: American Book Co.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Steward, J. (1955). &#039;&#039;Theory of culture change: The methodology of multilinear evolution&#039;&#039;. Urbana: University of Illinois Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Stocking, G. (1968). &#039;&#039;Race, culture, and evolution&#039;&#039;. New York: Free Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1987). &#039;&#039;Victorian anthropology&#039;&#039;. New York: Free Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------, ed. (1984). &#039;&#039;Functionalism historicized: Essays on British social anthropology&#039;&#039;. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Stone, L. (1977). &#039;&#039;The family, sex and marriage in England 1500-1800&#039;&#039;. New York: Harper and Row.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sweezy, P. (1976). A critique. In R. Hilton, ed., &#039;&#039;The transition from feudalism to capitalism&#039;&#039;. London: New Left Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Swindell, K. (1981). Domestic production, labor mobility, and population change in West Africa, 1900-1980. In C. Fyfe and D. McMaster, eds., &#039;&#039;African historical demography&#039;&#039;. Edinburgh, Scotland: Centre of African Studies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Swinton, W. (1874). &#039;&#039;Outlines of the world&#039;s history&#039;&#039;. New York: Ivison, Blakeman, Taylor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Taeuber, I. (1970). The families of Chinese farmers. In M. Freedman, ed., &#039;&#039;Family and kinship in Chinese society&#039;&#039;. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Talkington, L. (1986). But the editor looks at the universe from a different frame of reference. &#039;&#039;Science and Nature&#039;&#039;, nos. 7-8, pp. 94-100.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tarde, G. (1903). &#039;&#039;The laws of imitation&#039;&#039;. New York: Henry Holt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tawney, R. H. (1952). &#039;&#039;Religion and the rise of capitalism&#039;&#039;. New York: Harcourt Brace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Taylor, G. (1945). &#039;&#039;Environment and nation&#039;&#039;. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Temu, A., and Swai, B. (1981). &#039;&#039;Historians and Africanist history: A critique&#039;&#039;. London: Zed Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thalheimer, M. (1883). &#039;&#039;Outline of general history for the use of schools&#039;&#039;. New York: American Book Co.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thapar, R. (1978). &#039;&#039;Ancient Indian social history: Some interpretations&#039;&#039;. New Delhi, India: Orient Longman.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1982). Ideology and the interpretation of early Indian history. &#039;&#039;Review&#039;&#039; 5:389-412.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thorndyke, L. (1943). Renaissance or prenaissance? &#039;&#039;Journal of the History of Ideas&#039;&#039; 4:65-74.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thrupp, S. (1948). &#039;&#039;The merchant class of medieval London (1300-1500)&#039;&#039;. Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1972). Medieval industry 1000-1500. In C. Cipolla, ed., &#039;&#039;The Fontana economic history of Europe: The Middle Ages&#039;&#039;. London: Collins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tiedemann, C., and Van Doren, C. (1964). &#039;&#039;The diffusion of hybrid seed corn in Iowa: A spatial diffusion study&#039;&#039;. Institute for Community Development and Services, Michigan State University, Bulletin B-44.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Titow, J. Z. (1969). &#039;&#039;English rural society, 1200-1350&#039;&#039;. London: Allen and Unwin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tolman, E. (1951). A Psychological model. In T. Parsons and E. Shils, eds., &#039;&#039;Towards a general theory of action&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Torras, J. (1980). Class struggle in Catalonia. &#039;&#039;Review&#039;&#039; 4:253-265.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Toulmin, S., and Goodfield, J. (1965). &#039;&#039;The discovery of time&#039;&#039;. New York: Harper and Row.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Toyoda, T. (1969). &#039;&#039;History of pre-Meiji commerce in Japan&#039;&#039;. Tokyo: Japan Cultural Society.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Trigger, B. (1989). &#039;&#039;A history of archeological thought&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tung, C. (1979). &#039;&#039;Outline history of China&#039;&#039;. Hong Kong: Joint Publishing Co.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Turner, B. (1978). &#039;&#039;Marx and the end of Orientalism&#039;&#039;. London: Allen and Unwin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Turshen, M. (1987). Population growth and the deterioration of health: Mainland Tanzania, 1920-1960. In D. Cordell and J. Gregory, eds., &#039;&#039;African population and capitalism: Historical perspectives&#039;&#039;. Boulder, CO: Westview Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tyler, S., ed. (1969). &#039;&#039;Cognitive anthropology&#039;&#039;. New York: Holt, Rinehart, and Winston.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tytler, A. (1844). &#039;&#039;Universal history, from the Creation to the beginning of the eighteenth century&#039;&#039;. Rev. ed. Boston: Massey.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Udovitch, A. (1974). Commercial techniques in early medieval Islamic trade. In D. S. Richards, ed., &#039;&#039;Islam and the trade of Asia&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cassirer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Usman, Y. B. (1981). &#039;&#039;The transformation of Katsina (1400-1883)&#039;&#039;. Zaria, Nigeria: Ahmadu Bello University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Van Leur, J. C. (1955). &#039;&#039;Indonesian trade and society&#039;&#039;. The Hague: W. van Hoeve.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Van Sertima, I. (1976). &#039;&#039;They came before Columbus&#039;&#039;. New York: Random House.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Van Young, E. (1983). Mexican rural history since Chevalier: The historiography of the colonial hacienda. &#039;&#039;Latin American Research Review&#039;&#039; 28(3):5-61.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vavilov, N. (1951). &#039;&#039;The origin, variation, immunity, and breeding of cultivated plants&#039;&#039;. New York: Ronald Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Venturi, F. (1963). The history of the concept of &amp;quot;oriental despotism&amp;quot; in Europe. &#039;&#039;The Journal of the History of Ideas&#039;&#039; 24:133-143.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vilar, P. (1976). &#039;&#039;A history of gold and money, 1450-1920&#039;&#039;. London: New Left Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vishnu-Mittre. (1978). Origin and history of agriculture in the Indian subcontinent. &#039;&#039;Journal of Human Evolution&#039;&#039; 7:31-36.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vives, J. Vicens. (1969). &#039;&#039;An economic history of Spain&#039;&#039;. Princeton: Princeton University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wachtel, N. (1984). The Indian and Spanish conquest. In Bethell, L., ed., &#039;&#039;The Cambridge history of Latin America: Colonial Latin America&#039;&#039;, Vol. 1. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wai Andah, B. (1981). West Africa before the seventh century. In G. Mokhtar, ed., &#039;&#039;UNESCO general history of Africa: Vol. 2. Ancient civilizations of Africa&#039;&#039;. Paris: UNESCO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wallerstein, I. (1974-1988). &#039;&#039;The modern world system&#039;&#039;. 3 vols. New York: Academic Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Warren, B. (1980). &#039;&#039;Imperialism: Pioneer of capitalism&#039;&#039;. London: New Left Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Watson, A. (1983). &#039;&#039;Agricultural innovation in the early Islamic world: The diffusion of crops and farming techniques, 700-1100&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Watts, S. J., Okello, R., and Watts, S. (1990). Medical geography and AIDS. &#039;&#039;Annals of the Association of American Geographers&#039;&#039; 80:301-304.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Webb, W. P. (1951). &#039;&#039;The great frontier&#039;&#039;. Austin: University of Texas Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Weber, G. (1853). &#039;&#039;Outlines of universal history&#039;&#039;. Rev. ed. Edited by F. Brown. Boston: Brewer and Tileston.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Weber, M. (1951). &#039;&#039;The religion of China&#039;&#039;. New York: Free Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1958). &#039;&#039;The Protestant ethic and the spirit of capitalism&#039;&#039;. New York: Scribner&#039;s.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1967). &#039;&#039;The religion of India&#039;&#039;. New York: Free Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1968). &#039;&#039;Economy and society&#039;&#039;. 2 vols. New York: Bedminster Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1976). &#039;&#039;The agrarian sociology of ancient civilizations&#039;&#039;. London: New Left Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1981). &#039;&#039;General economic history&#039;&#039;. New Brunswick, NJ: Transaction Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wendorf, F., and Schild, R. (1980). &#039;&#039;Prehistory of the Eastern Sahara&#039;&#039;. New York: Academic Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Werner, K. F. (1988). Political and social structures of the West, 300-1300. In J. Baechler, J. A. Hall, and M. Mann, eds., &#039;&#039;Europe and the rise of capitalism&#039;&#039;. Oxford: Basil Blackwell.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Werner, H., and Kaplan, B. (1964). &#039;&#039;Symbol formation&#039;&#039;. New York: John Wiley.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wheatley, P. (1961). &#039;&#039;The Golden Khersonese: Studies in the historical geography of the Malay Peninsula before A.D. 1500&#039;&#039;. Kuala Lumpur: University of Malaya Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1971). &#039;&#039;The pivot of the four quarters: A preliminary inquiry into the origins and character of the ancient Chinese city&#039;&#039;. Chicago: Aldine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Whelpley, S. (1844). &#039;&#039;A compound of history, from the earliest times&#039;&#039;. 12th ed. New York: Collins Brothers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
White, G., ed. (1974). &#039;&#039;Natural hazards: Local, national, global&#039;&#039;. New York: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
White, Lynn, Jr. (1962). &#039;&#039;Medieval technology and social change&#039;&#039;. London: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1968). &#039;&#039;Machina ex deo: Essays in the dynamism of Western culture&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1968). The historical roots of our ecological crisis. In his &#039;&#039;Machina ex deo: Essays in the dynamism of Western culture&#039;&#039;, 75-94. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Whitehead, A. N. (1929). &#039;&#039;Process and reality&#039;&#039;. New York: Humanities Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1938). &#039;&#039;Modes of thought&#039;&#039;. New York: Macmillan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1948). &#039;&#039;Science and philosophy&#039;&#039;. New York: Philosophical Library.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Whitman, J. (1984). Philology to anthropology in mid-nineteenth-century Germany. In G. Stocking, ed., &#039;&#039;Functionalism historicized: Essays on British social anthropology&#039;&#039;. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Whitmore, T. (1991). A simulation of sixteenth-century population collapse in the Basin of Mexico. &#039;&#039;Annals of the Association of American Geographers&#039;&#039; 81:464-487.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wiethoff, B. (1963). &#039;&#039;Die Chinesische Seeverbotspolitik und der Private Überseehandel von 1368 bis 1567&#039;&#039;. Hamburg, Germany: Gesellschaft für Natur- und Völkerkunde Ostasiens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wilken, G. (1987). &#039;&#039;Good farmers: Traditional resource management in Mexico and Central America&#039;&#039;. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Willard, E. (1845). &#039;&#039;Universal history in perspective&#039;&#039;. 2d ed. New York: Barnes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Williams, E. (1944). &#039;&#039;Capitalism and slavery&#039;&#039;. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1966). &#039;&#039;British historians and the West Indies&#039;&#039;. London: Andre Deutsch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Williams, R. (1990). &#039;&#039;The American Indian in Western legal thought: The discourses of conquest&#039;&#039;. New York: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wisner, B. (1989). &#039;&#039;Power and need in Africa&#039;&#039;. Trenton, NJ: Africa World Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------, and Mbithi, P. (1974). Drought in Eastern Kenya. In G. White, ed., &#039;&#039;Natural hazards: Local, national, global&#039;&#039;. New York: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wittfogel, K. (1957). &#039;&#039;Oriental despotism&#039;&#039;. New Haven: Yale University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wolf, E. (1982). &#039;&#039;Europe and the peoples without history&#039;&#039;. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wrigley, E. (1969). &#039;&#039;Population and history&#039;&#039;. New York: McGraw-Hill.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wunder, H. (1985). Peasant organization and class conflict in eastern and western Germany. In T. Aston and C. Philpin, eds., &#039;&#039;The Brenner debate: Agrarian class structure and economic development in pre-industrial Europe&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yadava, B. (1966). Secular land grants of the post-Gupta period and some aspects of the growth of the feudal complex in northern India. In D. Sircar, ed., &#039;&#039;Land system and feudalism in ancient India&#039;&#039;. Calcutta, India.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1974). Immobility and subjugation of Indian peasantry in early medieval complex. &#039;&#039;Indian Historical Review&#039;&#039; 1:18-74.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yang Lien-sheng (1970). Government control of urban merchants in traditional China. &#039;&#039;Tsinghua Journal of Chinese Studies&#039;&#039; 8:186-206.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yapa, L. (1980). Diffusion, development, and ecopolitical economy. In J. Agnew, ed., &#039;&#039;Innovation research and public policy&#039;&#039;. Syracuse, NY: Department of Geography, Syracuse University.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Zwernemann, J. (1983). &#039;&#039;Culture history and African anthropology&#039;&#039;. Acta Universitatis Upsaliensis, Uppsala Studies in Cultural Anthropology. Uppsala, Sweden: Uppsala University.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Index =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Abel, W., 209&lt;br /&gt;
Abu-Lughod, J., 51, 57, 172, 177, 178&lt;br /&gt;
Acapulco, 190&lt;br /&gt;
Accessibility. See Location&lt;br /&gt;
Accumulation, 129, 152, 187, 189, 192, 195, 199, 204-206, 212&lt;br /&gt;
primitive, 188, 189, 210&lt;br /&gt;
Adams, B., 212&lt;br /&gt;
Adulthood, 17, 95-98&lt;br /&gt;
Africa, Africans, 4, 15, 20-22, 45, 51, 57, 62, 64, 98-99, 103, 105-107, 109, 116, 119, 120, 123-124, 138, 140, 149, 153, 155-158, 160, 162, 166, 168-169, 171, 173-174, 180, 183, 187, 188, 189, 193, 195, 196, 197, 200, 201, 203, 206, 209&lt;br /&gt;
East, 167, 182-183, 191, 192, 207-209&lt;br /&gt;
South, 89, 141, 144, 152, 155-157, 166-167&lt;br /&gt;
apartheid in, 75, 141, 144&lt;br /&gt;
myth of emptiness in, 75&lt;br /&gt;
North, 3, 46, 82-90, 157, 209&lt;br /&gt;
tropical, 69-80, 140, 141&lt;br /&gt;
West, 79, 155, 181-183, 191, 204, 207-209&lt;br /&gt;
African-Americans, 98&lt;br /&gt;
Agriculture, 29, 44-45, 117, 154-165, 169&lt;br /&gt;
aridity and, 80-90, 143&lt;br /&gt;
drainage, 85-86, 143, 164, 174&lt;br /&gt;
and industrial revolution, 213&lt;br /&gt;
intensification and commercialization, 157-158, 161, 163-164, 166&lt;br /&gt;
irrigated, 74-78, 80-90, 109-110, 143, 162, 164, 174&lt;br /&gt;
labor productivity in, 89, 91, 143, 157, 174&lt;br /&gt;
medieval, 110-115, 157-165, 168&lt;br /&gt;
origins. See Agricultural revolution&lt;br /&gt;
peasant. See Peasants&lt;br /&gt;
plantation. See Plantations&lt;br /&gt;
rain-fed (dry field), 74-76, 84, 86, 88-91&lt;br /&gt;
sedentary, 74-76&lt;br /&gt;
shifting, 72-76, 141-142, 174&lt;br /&gt;
tropical, 70-77, 140, 174&lt;br /&gt;
Agricultural revolution, 4, 7, 23, 44-45, 155-157, 164, 172, 174, 185-186, 209&lt;br /&gt;
Ahn, P., 140&lt;br /&gt;
AIDS, 77, 215-216&lt;br /&gt;
and Africa, 142, 215-216&lt;br /&gt;
Ajayi, J., 176&lt;br /&gt;
Akan, 157&lt;br /&gt;
Alavi, H., 212&lt;br /&gt;
Alchon, S., 209&lt;br /&gt;
Alliance for Progress, 49&lt;br /&gt;
Amazon river and basin, 71, 74, 207&lt;br /&gt;
America, 51, 103, 152, 162, 173, 180, 183-184, 187, 200, 204, 206, 208-209&lt;br /&gt;
Latin, 22, 76, 131&lt;br /&gt;
North, 180&lt;br /&gt;
South, 141&lt;br /&gt;
Americans, Native, 97, 138, 194, 195&lt;br /&gt;
Amin, S., 51, 56, 57, 47, 135, 136, 137, 154, 173, 177, 205, 211&lt;br /&gt;
Andean region, 20, 184, 194, 195&lt;br /&gt;
Anderson, J., 44&lt;br /&gt;
Anderson, P., 58, 108, 138, 142, 146, 176&lt;br /&gt;
Angola, 49&lt;br /&gt;
Anthrax, 78&lt;br /&gt;
Anthropology, 23-24, 30-33, 65, 97, 102&lt;br /&gt;
and primitive mind, 97, 102&lt;br /&gt;
Antilles. See West Indies, Antilles&lt;br /&gt;
Antwerp, 189-190, 192&lt;br /&gt;
Appadorai, A., 176&lt;br /&gt;
Arabia, 92, 167&lt;br /&gt;
Arabs, 98, 99, 181&lt;br /&gt;
Aristocracy, medieval, 123, 125-127&lt;br /&gt;
Armenia, 43&lt;br /&gt;
Aryan theory, 12, 84, 89&lt;br /&gt;
Asad, T., 48&lt;br /&gt;
Asia, 21-22, 77, 80-90, 103-107, 123, 155-158, 160, 162, 165-166, 171, 173, 180, 183, 187-189, 193, 195, 196, 197, 200, 206&lt;br /&gt;
aridity in, 80-90&lt;br /&gt;
East, 30, 46, 152, 167&lt;br /&gt;
South, 46, 56, 76, 167&lt;br /&gt;
Southeast, 21, 56, 76, 117-120, 167, 171, 181&lt;br /&gt;
Asiatic mode of production, 81-83, 125, 157&lt;br /&gt;
Aston, T., 140, 149, 150&lt;br /&gt;
Athenian empire, 125&lt;br /&gt;
Atlantic Ocean, 181-182, 211&lt;br /&gt;
crossing, 14, 181, 207-209&lt;br /&gt;
Atwell, W., 210&lt;br /&gt;
Augsburg, 197&lt;br /&gt;
Australians, 45&lt;br /&gt;
Azores Islands, 182&lt;br /&gt;
Aztecs, 185&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Baechler, J., 122-123, 125-127, 147, 149, 160, 176&lt;br /&gt;
Bailey, A., 142&lt;br /&gt;
Bailey, R., 205, 212, 213&lt;br /&gt;
Bakewell, P., 211&lt;br /&gt;
Bali, 120&lt;br /&gt;
Baltic Sea, 167, 171, 197, 200, 211&lt;br /&gt;
Bangladesh, 71&lt;br /&gt;
Barbados, 68, 71, 197&lt;br /&gt;
Barbarism, zone of, 14&lt;br /&gt;
Barnes, H. E., 44&lt;br /&gt;
Beckles, H., 205, 213&lt;br /&gt;
Belief-value matrix, 38&lt;br /&gt;
Beliefs, 30-43&lt;br /&gt;
compatibility of, 34-37&lt;br /&gt;
conformality and binding of, 35-41&lt;br /&gt;
ethnography of, 30-41&lt;br /&gt;
explicit and implicit, 36, 40-41, 65&lt;br /&gt;
truth and, 30-32&lt;br /&gt;
Bengal, 166&lt;br /&gt;
Berkner, L., 150&lt;br /&gt;
Bernal, M., 44, 55, 57, 137, 138, 144&lt;br /&gt;
Bernier, F., 142&lt;br /&gt;
Bible Lands, 3, 5, 7, 29, 43-45, 81&lt;br /&gt;
Big Bang Theory, 214-216&lt;br /&gt;
Birth&lt;br /&gt;
conception and, 67, 139&lt;br /&gt;
control, 66-67, 129, 139&lt;br /&gt;
rates, 128-130, 140&lt;br /&gt;
Bjørklund, O., 149&lt;br /&gt;
Black, C., 136&lt;br /&gt;
Black death, 46, 77&lt;br /&gt;
Black magic, 16&lt;br /&gt;
Blaut, J., 48, 49, 136, 138, 140, 141, 142, 143, 145, 149, 173, 174, 175, 176, 177, 178, 209, 212, 215&lt;br /&gt;
Blockages, historical, 69, 80, 117, 137&lt;br /&gt;
Blow-gun, 11&lt;br /&gt;
Blum, J., 139&lt;br /&gt;
Boas, F., 97, 139, 144&lt;br /&gt;
Bogeyman, 16, 47&lt;br /&gt;
Bois, G., 150&lt;br /&gt;
Bojador, Cape, 209&lt;br /&gt;
Borah, W., 209, 211&lt;br /&gt;
Bourgeois revolutions, 165, 179-180, 187, 199, 200&lt;br /&gt;
Bourgeoisie, 179, 195&lt;br /&gt;
Bowler, P., 48, 138, 141, 144&lt;br /&gt;
Brading, D., 210&lt;br /&gt;
Brantlinger, P., 48&lt;br /&gt;
Braudel, F., 178, 210&lt;br /&gt;
Bray, Francesca, 143, 146, 211&lt;br /&gt;
Brazil, 20, 182, 188, 191-192, 195, 197, 216&lt;br /&gt;
Brenner, R., 58, 108, 127-128, 138, 146, 149, 150, 151, 160, 176, 177, 205, 213&lt;br /&gt;
Britain, 108, 146-147, 150, 166, 179, 187-188, 191-192, 197, 203, 211, 213&lt;br /&gt;
Brown, L., 145&lt;br /&gt;
Buck, J. L., 131&lt;br /&gt;
Buckle, H. T., 76, 77, 141, 142&lt;br /&gt;
Burghers. See Bourgeoisie&lt;br /&gt;
Burma, 147&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cabral, A., 54, 136&lt;br /&gt;
Cairo, 187&lt;br /&gt;
Calicut, 190, 196&lt;br /&gt;
Cambodia, 147&lt;br /&gt;
Cambridge University, 135&lt;br /&gt;
Canada, 43, 156&lt;br /&gt;
Canals, in China, 93, 113&lt;br /&gt;
Canary Islands, 182, 208, 209&lt;br /&gt;
Cape Bojador, 209&lt;br /&gt;
Cape of Good Hope, 181&lt;br /&gt;
Capes and bays theory, 92, 122&lt;br /&gt;
Capitalism, 8, 51, 102, 152, 161-163, 165, 167, 169-170, 179-180, 187-206, 210&lt;br /&gt;
centration of, 180, 191, 197, 201-206&lt;br /&gt;
in colonial America, 55&lt;br /&gt;
origins and rise, 55, 102, 127-128, 150&lt;br /&gt;
triumph of, 179&lt;br /&gt;
Caribbean. See under West Indies&lt;br /&gt;
Carter, G., 47&lt;br /&gt;
Carus-Wilson, E., 212&lt;br /&gt;
Cassava, 156&lt;br /&gt;
Caucasus, 11, 43&lt;br /&gt;
Center-periphery model, 14&lt;br /&gt;
Centration of capitalism. See Capitalism, centration of&lt;br /&gt;
Céspedes, G., 210&lt;br /&gt;
Ch&#039;in empire, 125&lt;br /&gt;
Chad, Lake and region, 120, 157&lt;br /&gt;
Chambers, M., 46&lt;br /&gt;
Chan-Cheung, J., 177&lt;br /&gt;
Chandra, B., 48, 142&lt;br /&gt;
Chandra, S., 177, 211&lt;br /&gt;
Chao Phraya Basin, 120&lt;br /&gt;
Chariots, 143&lt;br /&gt;
Chaudhuri, K. N., 177, 207, 211&lt;br /&gt;
Chaudhuri, S., 177&lt;br /&gt;
Chaunu, H. and P., 210&lt;br /&gt;
Cheng Ho, 181, 182, 207&lt;br /&gt;
Chicherov, A., 176&lt;br /&gt;
Childhood, 17, 95-98&lt;br /&gt;
China, 15, 21, 29, 46-47, 56-57, 78, 82, 87, 94, 96, 110, 113, 115-120, 122-123, 125, 131, 158-159, 166-167, 169-170, 173, 181-182, 198, 216&lt;br /&gt;
Jones on, 67, 106-107&lt;br /&gt;
Weber on, 64, 103, 116&lt;br /&gt;
Chirimuuta, R. C. and R. J., 142, 216&lt;br /&gt;
Christendom, 18&lt;br /&gt;
Christianity, 123-124&lt;br /&gt;
and diffusionism, 18-19, 21, 60-61, 108&lt;br /&gt;
Western (L. White, Jr.), 114-115&lt;br /&gt;
Church, 119, 123-124, 147-149&lt;br /&gt;
Cipolla, C., 118-119, 147&lt;br /&gt;
Cities, 153, 161, 167, 196, 207&lt;br /&gt;
ancient, 84&lt;br /&gt;
European, 84, 128, 188, 193&lt;br /&gt;
medieval, 113, 167, 175, 177&lt;br /&gt;
mercantile-maritime, 167-173, 181, 196, 207&lt;br /&gt;
Weber on, 84, 103-104, 116&lt;br /&gt;
City-states, 104, 123, 167, 171&lt;br /&gt;
Civil Rights movement, 5, 137&lt;br /&gt;
Civilization, zone of, 14&lt;br /&gt;
Class, 33-34, 41, 57, 88, 119, 123-128, 154, 157-158, 170&lt;br /&gt;
Baechler on, 125-127&lt;br /&gt;
Brenner on, 127-128, 150&lt;br /&gt;
Godelier on, 127&lt;br /&gt;
in precolonial Africa, 124-125&lt;br /&gt;
Class struggle, 8, 53, 127, 149, 150&lt;br /&gt;
Classless society, 123-125&lt;br /&gt;
Climate and personality, 70-71&lt;br /&gt;
Climatic determinism or energy, 70-71, 140&lt;br /&gt;
Clocks, in China, 117&lt;br /&gt;
Cockburn, A., 140, 141&lt;br /&gt;
Cognition, 98&lt;br /&gt;
of environmental hazards, 93, 101&lt;br /&gt;
of space, 101&lt;br /&gt;
Cohen, I., 145&lt;br /&gt;
Collier, W., 43, 44&lt;br /&gt;
Collins, K., 140&lt;br /&gt;
Collyer, O., 140&lt;br /&gt;
Colonial Development and Welfare, 49&lt;br /&gt;
Colonial Office, British, 24&lt;br /&gt;
Colonialism, 2, 4, 10, 18-30, 41, 49, 53-57, 62, 70-71, 75, 81, 96, 135, 140, 150, 152-153, 179, 187-206&lt;br /&gt;
and diffusionism, 16, 18-30, 53-58&lt;br /&gt;
classical, 21-25&lt;br /&gt;
modern, 26-30&lt;br /&gt;
and rise of Europe, 2, 17-29, 187-205&lt;br /&gt;
settler, 15, 21-22, 25, 183&lt;br /&gt;
Colonizer&#039;s model, 10, 17-30, 41-42&lt;br /&gt;
Columbus, C., 209&lt;br /&gt;
Congo, 157&lt;br /&gt;
Conklin, H., 49&lt;br /&gt;
Conquest of America, 179-186&lt;br /&gt;
disease and, 183-186&lt;br /&gt;
technology and, 182-184&lt;br /&gt;
Consciousness, 98, 100-101, 144&lt;br /&gt;
Contemporary ancestors, theory of, 16&lt;br /&gt;
Continence, European sexual, 66-68, 121, 133-135&lt;br /&gt;
Hall on, 134&lt;br /&gt;
Jones on, 67, 121&lt;br /&gt;
Cook, S. F., 209, 211&lt;br /&gt;
Cooper, J., 150&lt;br /&gt;
Cordell, D., 139&lt;br /&gt;
Core areas, ecological and political, 93-97, 120, 122&lt;br /&gt;
Coromandel, 166&lt;br /&gt;
Cortés, H., 185, 186&lt;br /&gt;
Cotton, cotton textile industry, 164, 166, 212&lt;br /&gt;
in Britain and India, 203&lt;br /&gt;
Counterdiffusion, 17, 77. See also Black magic; Dracula; AIDS; Plagues&lt;br /&gt;
Coursey, D., 141&lt;br /&gt;
Cro-Magnon, 4&lt;br /&gt;
Crone, P., 131, 133, 144, 150, 151&lt;br /&gt;
Croot, P., 150, 151&lt;br /&gt;
Crosby, A., 209&lt;br /&gt;
Cross, H. C., 210&lt;br /&gt;
Crowder, M., 176&lt;br /&gt;
Cuba, 29, 53, 185&lt;br /&gt;
Culture, 11, 27, 32-33, 94, 123, 172, 183, 208, 212&lt;br /&gt;
Curtin, P., 76, 79, 140, 141, 211, 212&lt;br /&gt;
Cyprus, 191&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dalai, F., 144&lt;br /&gt;
Danube R., 93&lt;br /&gt;
Darby, H., 146&lt;br /&gt;
Darity, W., Jr., 205, 212, 213&lt;br /&gt;
Darwin, C., 4, 23&lt;br /&gt;
Das Gupta, A., 175&lt;br /&gt;
Decolonization, 28-30, 49, 55, 137&lt;br /&gt;
Deerr, Noel, 210, 211, 212&lt;br /&gt;
Degeneration, 44-45&lt;br /&gt;
Demesnes, farming, 112, 159&lt;br /&gt;
Democracy, 8, 88, 107, 120-121, 126&lt;br /&gt;
Demography, and diffusionism, 42, 53, 66-68, 93, 119, 139&lt;br /&gt;
Denevan, W., 140, 143, 174, 209, 211&lt;br /&gt;
Dependency theory, 55, 137, 149, 177&lt;br /&gt;
Depopulation&lt;br /&gt;
of America, 141, 184-186, 194&lt;br /&gt;
of Mexico, 184, 194&lt;br /&gt;
of West Africa, 76, 78-79&lt;br /&gt;
Development, 27-30, 53-55, 100-101, 105, 129, 133, 136, 152-153, 214-215&lt;br /&gt;
even and uneven, 152-153, 162&lt;br /&gt;
DeVisse, J., 207, 209&lt;br /&gt;
Dew, T., 44&lt;br /&gt;
Dewey, J., 38, 49, 145&lt;br /&gt;
Di Meglio, R., 176, 177&lt;br /&gt;
Diffusion, 11, 47, 98, 100-101, 115, 136, 145, 155-157, 161-162, 171, 173-174, 215&lt;br /&gt;
criss-cross, 115, 156, 160-162, 167, 171, 173&lt;br /&gt;
Diffusionism, 11-30, 52-54, 70, 100, 104, 137, 142, 180, 183, 189, 203, 205, 208, 214-215&lt;br /&gt;
as a belief system, 41-43&lt;br /&gt;
classical, 21-26, 81, 95-98, 170&lt;br /&gt;
extreme, 11-12, 27, 47, 49&lt;br /&gt;
modern, 26-30&lt;br /&gt;
origins of, 18-21&lt;br /&gt;
Dirks, N., 147&lt;br /&gt;
Disasters, natural, 93, 145&lt;br /&gt;
Disease, 60, 107, 142. See also Plagues&lt;br /&gt;
and conquest of America, 184-186&lt;br /&gt;
and Africa, 77-80, 142&lt;br /&gt;
and Europe, 77-78&lt;br /&gt;
and tropics, 77-80, 142&lt;br /&gt;
Dobb, M., 173, 176, 177&lt;br /&gt;
Doolittle, W., 143&lt;br /&gt;
Dracula, 16, 21, 47&lt;br /&gt;
Dualism, 95-97&lt;br /&gt;
Man and Nature, 112&lt;br /&gt;
mind-body, 101&lt;br /&gt;
philosophical, 101, 145, 214&lt;br /&gt;
Dualistic-developmental theory of rationality, 95-98&lt;br /&gt;
DuBois, W. E. B., 55&lt;br /&gt;
Dunn, R. S., 211&lt;br /&gt;
Duruy, V., 44&lt;br /&gt;
Dutt, R. P., 55, 212&lt;br /&gt;
Duyvendak, J., 56, 137&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
East India companies, 24, 197&lt;br /&gt;
East Indies, Dutch, 49&lt;br /&gt;
Edel, M., 211&lt;br /&gt;
Eden, Garden of, 3, 43-44&lt;br /&gt;
Edmonson, M., 47&lt;br /&gt;
Education, U. S., 101, 145&lt;br /&gt;
Egypt, 12, 47, 82-83, 87, 143, 191-192, 197, 208&lt;br /&gt;
El Salvador, 71&lt;br /&gt;
Eliot Smith, G., 47, 49&lt;br /&gt;
Elvin, M., 57, 117, 137, 175, 176, 177&lt;br /&gt;
Empires, 120, 147&lt;br /&gt;
Chinese, 123&lt;br /&gt;
Oriental. See Oriental despotism&lt;br /&gt;
Roman, 147&lt;br /&gt;
Emptiness, myth of, 15, 25, 75&lt;br /&gt;
Engels, F., 48, 82-84, 86, 127, 142&lt;br /&gt;
Engerman, S., 205&lt;br /&gt;
England. See Britain&lt;br /&gt;
Environment, 69-94, 119&lt;br /&gt;
arid, 80-90&lt;br /&gt;
European, 90-94&lt;br /&gt;
humid-tropical, 69-80, 141&lt;br /&gt;
Environmentalism, environmental determinism, 69, 140, 141, 182, 183&lt;br /&gt;
Episteme, Western (Marglin), 101&lt;br /&gt;
Equilibrium theories, 27-28&lt;br /&gt;
Ethiopia, 157&lt;br /&gt;
Ethnogeography, 23, 32&lt;br /&gt;
Ethnography of beliefs. See Beliefs&lt;br /&gt;
Ethnohistory, 32&lt;br /&gt;
Ethnoscience, 2, 32-43, 49&lt;br /&gt;
Ethology, 105, 107, 151&lt;br /&gt;
Eurocentrism, 1-2, 7-11, 47. See also Diffusionism&lt;br /&gt;
Europe, 43, 45, 51, 90-94, 152, 186-187&lt;br /&gt;
Greater, 3-8, 14, 46&lt;br /&gt;
European intellect, 1, 15-17, 20, 95-108, 121&lt;br /&gt;
mind, 58&lt;br /&gt;
miracle, myth of, 2, 50-151, 214&lt;br /&gt;
personality, 132-135, 144&lt;br /&gt;
rationality. See Rationality, European&lt;br /&gt;
spirit, 1, 15-17, 20, 103-104, 121&lt;br /&gt;
Evolution, cultural, 11, 16-17, 22-26, 47, 57, 65, 85, 127, 152-153, 172, 174, 185, 209&lt;br /&gt;
Evolutionism, 12, 24, 47&lt;br /&gt;
Exploitation, internal and external, 161&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Family, 58, 68, 119, 128-135&lt;br /&gt;
extended and nuclear, 128-134, 150&lt;br /&gt;
European, 90, 126, 128-135&lt;br /&gt;
Hajnal on, 129-130&lt;br /&gt;
Macfarlane on, 131-134&lt;br /&gt;
modern, 128&lt;br /&gt;
preindustrial, traditional, 68, 128&lt;br /&gt;
Stone on, 130-135&lt;br /&gt;
Fei Hsiao-tung, 175&lt;br /&gt;
Feminism, 139&lt;br /&gt;
Feudal mode of production, 154, 157-165, 171, 173&lt;br /&gt;
Feudal property and tenure, 83, 104, 158&lt;br /&gt;
Feudalism, 8, 46, 51, 95, 110, 112, 126-128, 146, 152-154, 158-165, 197, 210&lt;br /&gt;
in Africa, 157-158&lt;br /&gt;
in India, 55, 158, 160, 175&lt;br /&gt;
Fez, 209&lt;br /&gt;
Fiedel, S., 209&lt;br /&gt;
Fiefs, 158, 175&lt;br /&gt;
Figueroa, L., 215&lt;br /&gt;
Filesi, T., 209&lt;br /&gt;
Finley, M., 108, 146&lt;br /&gt;
Fisher, D., 211&lt;br /&gt;
Fisher, G., 44&lt;br /&gt;
Fisheries, Atlantic, 92, 182, 188, 192, 196-197, 207&lt;br /&gt;
Flanders, 166, 188, 197&lt;br /&gt;
Fleck, L., 49&lt;br /&gt;
Florescano, E., 211&lt;br /&gt;
Forests, 89, 106, 140, 143&lt;br /&gt;
and ancient Europeans, 84, 107&lt;br /&gt;
European, 89-90, 94, 108&lt;br /&gt;
tropical, 71-76&lt;br /&gt;
Foster, G., 145&lt;br /&gt;
Frake, C., 49&lt;br /&gt;
France, 147, 179, 203, 204&lt;br /&gt;
Frank, A. G., 51, 149, 205, 211&lt;br /&gt;
Frankel, H., 216&lt;br /&gt;
Freedman, M., 150&lt;br /&gt;
Freedom, love of, in Europe, 26, 107, 119, 120-121, 171&lt;br /&gt;
Freeman, E., 44&lt;br /&gt;
FRELIMO, 175&lt;br /&gt;
Freund, J., 145&lt;br /&gt;
Fu Chu-fu, 175, 176&lt;br /&gt;
Fukien, 166&lt;br /&gt;
Functionalism, 27&lt;br /&gt;
Furtado, C., 211&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Galloway, J. H., 210&lt;br /&gt;
Garraty, J., 141&lt;br /&gt;
Gay, P., 141&lt;br /&gt;
Genesis, Book of, 23, 43-45&lt;br /&gt;
Genoa, 189&lt;br /&gt;
Gentry and nobility, 158&lt;br /&gt;
Geography, 1, 3-8, 17, 23-24, 31-32, 45, 47, 65, 96-97, 101, 125, 127, 136&lt;br /&gt;
in 19th-century education, 3-7, 96&lt;br /&gt;
Germanic culture, ancient, 25, 131-132&lt;br /&gt;
Germany, 147&lt;br /&gt;
Gernet, J., 176, 177&lt;br /&gt;
Giblin, J., 142&lt;br /&gt;
Gilfillan, S., 71, 140&lt;br /&gt;
Gill, D., 139&lt;br /&gt;
Gilman, A., 44&lt;br /&gt;
Glorious revolution (English), 165, 197&lt;br /&gt;
Godelier, M., 127, 149&lt;br /&gt;
Goitein, S., 178&lt;br /&gt;
Gold, 183, 188-191&lt;br /&gt;
American production, 188-191&lt;br /&gt;
and Asian trade, 118, 190&lt;br /&gt;
stock in E. Hemisphere, 189&lt;br /&gt;
Gold Coast, 166&lt;br /&gt;
Golson, J., 143, 174&lt;br /&gt;
Goodfield, J., 48&lt;br /&gt;
Gopal, L., 175&lt;br /&gt;
Gopal, S., 176&lt;br /&gt;
Gossett, T., 48, 138, 139&lt;br /&gt;
Gould, P., 145&lt;br /&gt;
Grand Banks, 182, 207&lt;br /&gt;
Greece, 4, 8, 50, 88, 107-108, 123, 147&lt;br /&gt;
Greenland, D., 140&lt;br /&gt;
Gregory, J., 139&lt;br /&gt;
Grosvenor, E., 44&lt;br /&gt;
Guilds, medieval, 166&lt;br /&gt;
Gunpowder, 115, 117&lt;br /&gt;
Guns, cannon, in China, 117-119, 173&lt;br /&gt;
Gupta, N. S., 177, 210&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Habib, I., 55, 175, 176, 177&lt;br /&gt;
Hagen, E., 100-101, 144&lt;br /&gt;
Haitian revolution, 204&lt;br /&gt;
Hajnal, J., 129-130, 150&lt;br /&gt;
Hall, J. A., 59, 67, 77, 86-87, 91, 108, 122-124, 139, 141, 143, 144, 147, 151&lt;br /&gt;
Hallam, H., 124, 147&lt;br /&gt;
Haller, J., 139&lt;br /&gt;
Hallpike, C., 145&lt;br /&gt;
Ham, 44&lt;br /&gt;
Hamilton, E. J., 190-191, 210&lt;br /&gt;
Handler, R., 150, 151&lt;br /&gt;
Hannemann, M., 211&lt;br /&gt;
Hanseatic League and cities, 197&lt;br /&gt;
Hardy, F., 140&lt;br /&gt;
Harewood, J., 140&lt;br /&gt;
Harris, M., 44, 47, 49, 138&lt;br /&gt;
Harrison, P., 143, 176&lt;br /&gt;
Hasan, A., 175, 210&lt;br /&gt;
Haskel, D., 48&lt;br /&gt;
Hassan, F., 139&lt;br /&gt;
Hawaii, 156&lt;br /&gt;
Hecht, S., 140, 141&lt;br /&gt;
Hegel, G. W. F., 53, 142&lt;br /&gt;
Hegelianism, 43, 48, 91, 120&lt;br /&gt;
Hilgemann, W., 149&lt;br /&gt;
Hilton, R., 140, 150&lt;br /&gt;
Historians, 52-59, 65, 136&lt;br /&gt;
absolutionist, 76, 79-80&lt;br /&gt;
Historical and ahistorical societies, 137&lt;br /&gt;
Historical atlases, 124&lt;br /&gt;
Historiography, modernization and, 53-59&lt;br /&gt;
History, 1, 3-8, 97, 127&lt;br /&gt;
in 19th-century education, 3-7, 43-46&lt;br /&gt;
march of (Mann), 91, 108&lt;br /&gt;
textbooks, 3-7, 43-46, 96, 124&lt;br /&gt;
Western, 46&lt;br /&gt;
world, 46&lt;br /&gt;
Hodgett, A. J., 210&lt;br /&gt;
Holism and reductionism, 22, 33, 41, 48, 119&lt;br /&gt;
Hølmhoe, H., 149&lt;br /&gt;
Hopkins, A., 174&lt;br /&gt;
Horse-collar, horse power, 111, 112-114&lt;br /&gt;
Household, extended-family and nuclear-family, 128-129&lt;br /&gt;
Hoyle, R., 150&lt;br /&gt;
Huddleston, L., 48&lt;br /&gt;
Hudson, B., 45&lt;br /&gt;
Hulme, P., 48&lt;br /&gt;
Humboldt, W. von, 97&lt;br /&gt;
Huntington, E., 70&lt;br /&gt;
Hydraulic society. See Agriculture, irrigated; Asiatic mode of production; Oriental despotism&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Iberia, 181-182, 183-184, 188, 197, 211&lt;br /&gt;
Ibn al-Faqih, 167&lt;br /&gt;
Ibn Khaldun, 183&lt;br /&gt;
Iceland, 93&lt;br /&gt;
India, 21, 47, 69, 82, 96, 98, 103, 106, 111, 116, 119-120, 122, 131&lt;br /&gt;
caste in, 122, 126, 161&lt;br /&gt;
classes, 126&lt;br /&gt;
de-industrialization of, 203&lt;br /&gt;
medieval polity, 122&lt;br /&gt;
personality (Weber), 64, 103, 138&lt;br /&gt;
Indian Ocean, 92, 117-118, 171, 182&lt;br /&gt;
Individual(ism), 25, 87, 90-91, 119, 132, 135, 144&lt;br /&gt;
English, 132&lt;br /&gt;
European, 87, 90-91, 107, 109, 132-133&lt;br /&gt;
Indo-European peoples, languages, 44, 50, 88, 97, 109, 131&lt;br /&gt;
Indo-European warrior aristocracy (Baechler), 123, 126&lt;br /&gt;
Indochina, French, 49&lt;br /&gt;
Indonesia, 92&lt;br /&gt;
Indus valley, 82&lt;br /&gt;
Industrial revolution, 8, 55, 107, 165, 179, 180, 201-206, 213, 215-216&lt;br /&gt;
and mechanization, 202&lt;br /&gt;
Industrial production, medieval, 110-115&lt;br /&gt;
Inflation, 16th-century,&lt;br /&gt;
in Asia, 210&lt;br /&gt;
in Europe, 187, 196&lt;br /&gt;
Inikori, J., 212, 213&lt;br /&gt;
Inner Asia, 93&lt;br /&gt;
Innovation, 15, 110-115, 116, 128, 149, 163&lt;br /&gt;
Insanity. See Sanity&lt;br /&gt;
Inside and Outside, 1, 5, 12-17, 30, 42, 138, 214&lt;br /&gt;
Interests and values, 30-31, 37-41&lt;br /&gt;
Invention, independent, 11-12, 47, 208&lt;br /&gt;
Inventiveness, 12-14, 17, 105, 108-109, 110-115, 208&lt;br /&gt;
Iron, 88-89, 169&lt;br /&gt;
early use, 7, 75, 88-89, 109, 141&lt;br /&gt;
iron age, 7, 50, 88-89, 91, 107, 109, 131&lt;br /&gt;
Irrawaddy plain, 85&lt;br /&gt;
Irvine, F., 141&lt;br /&gt;
Irwin, G., 141&lt;br /&gt;
Isichei, E., 175&lt;br /&gt;
Islam, 119, 122, 123&lt;br /&gt;
Italy, 166, 171, 187, 192, 197, 211&lt;br /&gt;
Ivanov, V., 144&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Jackson, P., 138, 139&lt;br /&gt;
Jagirdars, 158&lt;br /&gt;
James, C. L. R., 55, 137, 203-206, 212&lt;br /&gt;
Japan, 5, 30, 82, 149, 155, 167, 216&lt;br /&gt;
Japheth, 44&lt;br /&gt;
Java, 71, 120, 166&lt;br /&gt;
Jett, S. C., 47&lt;br /&gt;
Jews, 99&lt;br /&gt;
Jha, S. C., 176, 177&lt;br /&gt;
Joly, N., 45&lt;br /&gt;
Jones, E. L., 50, 58, 67, 70-71, 77, 86-87, 89, 91, 93, 104-108, 110, 120-121, 123-124, 131-133, 135, 139, 140, 141, 142, 143, 144, 147, 150, 151&lt;br /&gt;
Judeo-Christian teleology, 114&lt;br /&gt;
Jung, C., 98, 144&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kabaker, A., 173&lt;br /&gt;
Kagan, D., 46&lt;br /&gt;
Kalah, 167, 172, 277&lt;br /&gt;
Kant, I., 214&lt;br /&gt;
Kantianism, Neo-Kantianism, 48, 101, 214&lt;br /&gt;
Kaplan, B., 144&lt;br /&gt;
Kea, R., 174, 175, 176&lt;br /&gt;
Keightley, T., 43, 44, 48&lt;br /&gt;
Kenya, 49&lt;br /&gt;
Kertzer, D., 150&lt;br /&gt;
Keynesianism, 27&lt;br /&gt;
Kilwa, 166, 208&lt;br /&gt;
Kinder, H., 149&lt;br /&gt;
Kitching, G., 139&lt;br /&gt;
Koepping, K.-P., 47&lt;br /&gt;
Korea, 147&lt;br /&gt;
Kosambi, D. D., 146, 175&lt;br /&gt;
Kuhn, T., 37, 49&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Labib, S., 207, 209&lt;br /&gt;
Labor,&lt;br /&gt;
counterdiffusion of, 16&lt;br /&gt;
colonial, 193-196&lt;br /&gt;
Labor force, colonial Americas and Europe, 193, 195, 196&lt;br /&gt;
Laclau, E., 205, 213&lt;br /&gt;
Laibman, D., 142&lt;br /&gt;
Lambert, D., 71, 140&lt;br /&gt;
Landlords, 158-160, 162, 170&lt;br /&gt;
Landownership,&lt;br /&gt;
medieval European, 104, 159, 160&lt;br /&gt;
peasant, 127, 160&lt;br /&gt;
Lane, F., 178&lt;br /&gt;
Languages, primitive, 97, 145&lt;br /&gt;
Las Casas, B., 195&lt;br /&gt;
Laslett, P., 131, 133-134, 150, 151&lt;br /&gt;
Le Roy Ladurie, E., 150&lt;br /&gt;
Lee, G., 150&lt;br /&gt;
Lee, R., 174&lt;br /&gt;
Lelekov, L., 144&lt;br /&gt;
Levant, 191&lt;br /&gt;
Levidow, L., 139&lt;br /&gt;
Levitzion, N., 176, 209&lt;br /&gt;
Lévy-Bruhl, L., 97, 101, 144&lt;br /&gt;
Lewis, A., 177&lt;br /&gt;
Lewis, W. A., 48&lt;br /&gt;
Li Ching-neng, 175, 176&lt;br /&gt;
Liceria, M. A. C., 175&lt;br /&gt;
Lie, B., 149&lt;br /&gt;
Lisbon, 190&lt;br /&gt;
Livingstone, D., 23&lt;br /&gt;
Llobera, J., 142&lt;br /&gt;
Lo Jung-pang, 177&lt;br /&gt;
Location, accessibility, 2, 157, 161-162, 169-173, 181, 182, 197&lt;br /&gt;
Lombok, 120&lt;br /&gt;
Lopez, R., 147, 210&lt;br /&gt;
Love and marriage, in Europe, 132-133&lt;br /&gt;
Lovell, W. G., 209, 211&lt;br /&gt;
Lowie, R., 49&lt;br /&gt;
Löwith, K., 145&lt;br /&gt;
Luzon, 85, 120&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ma Huan, 177, 209&lt;br /&gt;
Mabogunji, A., 175&lt;br /&gt;
Macauley, T., 48&lt;br /&gt;
Macfarlane, A., 131-133, 150, 151&lt;br /&gt;
Madeira, 182, 191&lt;br /&gt;
Madrid, 195&lt;br /&gt;
Magalhães-Godinho, V., 211&lt;br /&gt;
Maghreb, 171, 181, 183&lt;br /&gt;
Magna Carta, 122&lt;br /&gt;
Magubane, B., 139&lt;br /&gt;
Mahalingam, T., 175, 176, 177&lt;br /&gt;
Maize, 107, 156&lt;br /&gt;
Malabar, 166&lt;br /&gt;
Malacca, 167, 172, 190&lt;br /&gt;
Malaria, 78&lt;br /&gt;
Malthus, T., 48, 66-68, 133&lt;br /&gt;
Malthusian theory, 66-68, 73, 87, 129, 133-134, 139-140, 162, 209&lt;br /&gt;
Mamdani, M., 139&lt;br /&gt;
Mandelbaum, M., 48&lt;br /&gt;
Manila Galleons, 190&lt;br /&gt;
Manila, 117&lt;br /&gt;
Mann, M., 59, 86-91, 93, 107-110, 122-124, 131-133, 139, 143, 144, 146, 147, 148, 150, 151, 176&lt;br /&gt;
Manorial system, 159-160&lt;br /&gt;
Maquiladora plants, 215&lt;br /&gt;
Marglin, F., 145&lt;br /&gt;
Marglin, S., 101, 145&lt;br /&gt;
Mariana Islands, 49&lt;br /&gt;
Markets, 17th-century, 199-201&lt;br /&gt;
Markham, S., 70&lt;br /&gt;
Marriage pattern, European and non-European, 129-135, 139&lt;br /&gt;
Marx, K., 25, 39, 48, 76, 82-84, 86, 127, 141, 142, 158, 159, 175, 202, 205, 210, 212&lt;br /&gt;
Marxism, 46, 55-57, 77, 94-95, 137, 148, 168, 177, 202, 210, 212&lt;br /&gt;
Marxists, Eurocentric, 46, 56, 58, 83, 108, 125, 137-138, 149, 157, 162, 205, 213&lt;br /&gt;
Maya civilization, 72-73&lt;br /&gt;
Mbithi, P., 141&lt;br /&gt;
McAlister, L., 210, 211&lt;br /&gt;
McClelland, D., 100, 144&lt;br /&gt;
McCurdy, D., 49&lt;br /&gt;
McKay, D., 45&lt;br /&gt;
McNeill, W., 45, 46, 79, 140, 142, 143, 144, 146, 209&lt;br /&gt;
Mead, G. H., 48, 145&lt;br /&gt;
Mead, M., 97, 144&lt;br /&gt;
Mediterranean, 43-44, 92, 159, 167-168, 172, 181, 183, 200&lt;br /&gt;
Megaw, J., 173&lt;br /&gt;
Mekong valley, 120&lt;br /&gt;
Merchant capital, 179, 188, 192, 207-208, 212&lt;br /&gt;
Mesoamerica, 86, 195&lt;br /&gt;
Mesopotamia, 82, 85, 120, 143&lt;br /&gt;
Metals&lt;br /&gt;
age of, 7&lt;br /&gt;
precious. See Gold; Silver&lt;br /&gt;
Mexico, 20, 180, 182, 185-186, 188, 190, 194-195, 208&lt;br /&gt;
Middle East, 4, 7-8, 45-46, 63, 82-90, 109, 110, 116, 155, 156, 167, 170, 183&lt;br /&gt;
Migration, rural-urban, 161-162&lt;br /&gt;
Mill, J. S., 48&lt;br /&gt;
Miller, J., 76, 140, 141&lt;br /&gt;
Milne, G., 140&lt;br /&gt;
Minchinton, W., 211&lt;br /&gt;
Mind&lt;br /&gt;
criminal, 144&lt;br /&gt;
European. See European mind&lt;br /&gt;
female, 96&lt;br /&gt;
and matter. See Dualism&lt;br /&gt;
primitive, 17, 95-102, 144-145, 148, 151, 206&lt;br /&gt;
traditional, 15, 98-102, 145&lt;br /&gt;
Mintz, S. W., 205, 212, 213&lt;br /&gt;
Miskimin, H., 209, 210&lt;br /&gt;
Moctezuma, 185&lt;br /&gt;
Modernization, 2, 27-30, 52-54, 59, 98-102, 206&lt;br /&gt;
as history, 53-54, 136&lt;br /&gt;
theory, 27-30, 98, 128-129, 131&lt;br /&gt;
Mohr, E., 140&lt;br /&gt;
Moluccas, 190, 192&lt;br /&gt;
Montesquieu, 140, 142&lt;br /&gt;
Morocco, 166, 191-192, 207, 209&lt;br /&gt;
Motivation, need-achievement (McClelland), 100, 125&lt;br /&gt;
Mozambique, 49&lt;br /&gt;
Mukherjee, Radhakamal, 176&lt;br /&gt;
Mukherjee, Ramkrishna, 176&lt;br /&gt;
Müller, J., 43&lt;br /&gt;
Myth, 59&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nag, M., 139, 140&lt;br /&gt;
Naqvi, H. K., 177&lt;br /&gt;
Nationalism, nation-state, 119-120, 172, 214&lt;br /&gt;
Nazism, 27, 63-64&lt;br /&gt;
Needham, J., 56, 115, 137, 143, 146, 147, 177, 178&lt;br /&gt;
Neocolonialism, 26-30&lt;br /&gt;
Neo-Kantianism. See Kantianism&lt;br /&gt;
Neolithic revolution. See Agricultural revolution&lt;br /&gt;
Neolocality, 131-133&lt;br /&gt;
Netherlands, Holland, 187-188, 194, 197&lt;br /&gt;
Neumann, E., 144&lt;br /&gt;
New Guinea, 155&lt;br /&gt;
New World (term), 207&lt;br /&gt;
Newfoundland, 192&lt;br /&gt;
Niane, D., 209, 211&lt;br /&gt;
Nicaragua, 195&lt;br /&gt;
Nicholas, D., 175, 176&lt;br /&gt;
Niger Valley, 86&lt;br /&gt;
Nile river and valley, 82, 86, 166, 183&lt;br /&gt;
Nisbet, R., 48&lt;br /&gt;
Noah, 43, 44, 48&lt;br /&gt;
Nurul Hasan, S., 176&lt;br /&gt;
Nye, P., 140&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
O&#039;Keefe, P., 141&lt;br /&gt;
Oceania, 158&lt;br /&gt;
Okello, R., 142, 216&lt;br /&gt;
Olmec civilization, 208&lt;br /&gt;
Onimode, B., 174, 175&lt;br /&gt;
Operation Bootstrap, 49&lt;br /&gt;
Orient Express model, 4, 45, 91&lt;br /&gt;
Oriental despotism, 3, 4, 25, 80-92, 120, 142, 157, 171, 174&lt;br /&gt;
Hall on, 87, 147&lt;br /&gt;
Jones on, 86-87, 120&lt;br /&gt;
Mann on, 87-89, 109, 147&lt;br /&gt;
Marx and Engels on, 81-82&lt;br /&gt;
Weber on, 83-84, 86, 103-104&lt;br /&gt;
Wittfogel on, 84-88&lt;br /&gt;
Orwin, C. S., 146&lt;br /&gt;
Ottoman empire, region, 20, 45, 81, 96&lt;br /&gt;
Outside. See Inside&lt;br /&gt;
Overpopulation, 66-68, 121, 129, 133, 139. See also Demography; Malthusianism&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pacey, A., 147&lt;br /&gt;
Padgug, R., 125, 149&lt;br /&gt;
Padmore, G., 55&lt;br /&gt;
Paleolithic, 124&lt;br /&gt;
Palmer, R., 149&lt;br /&gt;
Panikkar, K. M., 55, 209&lt;br /&gt;
Paris Basin, 170, 195, 197&lt;br /&gt;
Parker, D., 150, 151&lt;br /&gt;
Parsons, J. B., 176&lt;br /&gt;
Peace Corps, 49&lt;br /&gt;
Peasants, 100-101, 107, 109, 112, 133-134, 154, 161-162, 214&lt;br /&gt;
Chinese, 166&lt;br /&gt;
European, 104&lt;br /&gt;
Indian, 127, 166, 175&lt;br /&gt;
Pendleton, R., 140&lt;br /&gt;
Pepper, 166, 169&lt;br /&gt;
Perry, W., 47, 49&lt;br /&gt;
Peru, 184-185, 188, 190&lt;br /&gt;
Philosophy, 26, 101, 106, 145, 214&lt;br /&gt;
Philpin, C., 140, 149, 150&lt;br /&gt;
Phoenicians, 47, 208&lt;br /&gt;
Piaget, J., 99, 101, 144&lt;br /&gt;
Piracy, 188, 196-197&lt;br /&gt;
Pires, T., 167, 170, 176, 177&lt;br /&gt;
Pizarro, F., 185&lt;br /&gt;
Plagues, 78, 142. See also AIDS; Disease, Black death&lt;br /&gt;
counterdiffusion from non-Europe, 16, 77&lt;br /&gt;
Plantations, 166, 188, 191-193, 197-201, 204-205, 212. See also Slave plantation&lt;br /&gt;
Brazil, 191-193&lt;br /&gt;
Caribbean, 198-201&lt;br /&gt;
Ploetz, C., 44&lt;br /&gt;
Plow, 88-89, 110-112, 174&lt;br /&gt;
Poland, 147&lt;br /&gt;
Polygenesis, theory of, 3, 23, 43-45, 61&lt;br /&gt;
Portugal, 181, 188, 192, 194, 197, 209&lt;br /&gt;
Potato, 156&lt;br /&gt;
in Europe, 92, 201&lt;br /&gt;
Potosí, 195&lt;br /&gt;
Powell, J., 23&lt;br /&gt;
Prakash, I., 177&lt;br /&gt;
Precious metals. See Gold; Silver&lt;br /&gt;
Prescott, J., 140&lt;br /&gt;
Printing, in China, Korea, 117&lt;br /&gt;
Production versus exchange, 168-170, 177, 205&lt;br /&gt;
Progress, 1, 14, 16, 19, 20, 22, 24, 48, 53-54, 60, 102, 114, 132, 136, 155, 180, 206&lt;br /&gt;
Progressiveness. See Progress&lt;br /&gt;
Property, private, 15, 25-26, 83-84, 88, 104, 116, 158&lt;br /&gt;
concept of, 15, 25-26&lt;br /&gt;
in medieval Europe, 83-84, 104, 127&lt;br /&gt;
in non-Europe, 25-26, 83-84, 116, 158, 175&lt;br /&gt;
Protocapitalism, 152, 165-173, 181&lt;br /&gt;
in Asia and Africa, 153, 165-173, 190, 195, 197&lt;br /&gt;
Protocapitalist system, network, 168-173, 177&lt;br /&gt;
Psychic Unity of Mankind, 12, 47, 94-96, 184, 208&lt;br /&gt;
Psychology, 17, 94-100. See also Mind, Reasoning&lt;br /&gt;
cross-cultural, 98-100, 144&lt;br /&gt;
primitive. See Mind, primitive&lt;br /&gt;
Puerto Rico, 49&lt;br /&gt;
Putting-out system, 166, 215&lt;br /&gt;
Purcell, V., 116, 177&lt;br /&gt;
Pyle, G., 142, 216&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Qaisar, A. J., 177&lt;br /&gt;
Quackenbos, J., 44&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Racism, 27, 29, 43-44, 61-65, 138&lt;br /&gt;
cultural, 64&lt;br /&gt;
moderate, 64-65&lt;br /&gt;
and myth of European miracle, 1, 4, 29, 61-65, 186&lt;br /&gt;
Weber and, 64-65, 138&lt;br /&gt;
Radell, D. R., 211&lt;br /&gt;
Radin, P., 49, 97, 144&lt;br /&gt;
Rain forest, 72-76, 141&lt;br /&gt;
Rational Modern Adult European Man, 96-97&lt;br /&gt;
Rationality, 15, 17, 19, 21, 94-109, 145, 149, 186, 214&lt;br /&gt;
and diffusionism, 17, 60, 94-108, 214&lt;br /&gt;
European, 15, 17, 19, 27, 30, 47, 88, 94-108, 110, 114, 120, 129, 135, 139, 143, 149, 206&lt;br /&gt;
Hall on, 87&lt;br /&gt;
Indo-European, 107, 109&lt;br /&gt;
Jones on, 58, 104-107, 120&lt;br /&gt;
Jung on, 98&lt;br /&gt;
Lévy-Bruhl on, 97&lt;br /&gt;
Mann on, 107-110&lt;br /&gt;
Piaget on, 99, 101&lt;br /&gt;
Weber on, 102-104, 145&lt;br /&gt;
Rawski, E., 175, 176&lt;br /&gt;
Raychaudhuri, T., 175, 176&lt;br /&gt;
Reasoning. See also Thought, abstract and concrete&lt;br /&gt;
theoretical vs. empirical, 17, 96-101, 105&lt;br /&gt;
Reclus, E., 45&lt;br /&gt;
Red R. (Vietnam), 120&lt;br /&gt;
Reductionism. See Holism&lt;br /&gt;
Reformation, Protestant, 103, 124, 197&lt;br /&gt;
Regionalism, 27&lt;br /&gt;
Relativism, cultural, 27&lt;br /&gt;
Religion and rise of Europe, 8, 18-19, 29, 60-61&lt;br /&gt;
Renaissance, 117, 187&lt;br /&gt;
Restlessness, of Europeans, 108&lt;br /&gt;
Rhine R., 93, 211&lt;br /&gt;
Rice&lt;br /&gt;
wet, agriculture, 85, 143, 166, 169, 174&lt;br /&gt;
Ritter, K., 82, 142&lt;br /&gt;
Robbins, R., 43&lt;br /&gt;
Roberts, D., 140&lt;br /&gt;
Roberts, J., 45, 46, 140, 141, 147&lt;br /&gt;
Robinson, C., 205, 212, 213&lt;br /&gt;
Rodinson, M., 177&lt;br /&gt;
Rodney, W., 175, 205, 213&lt;br /&gt;
Rogers, E., 100, 144&lt;br /&gt;
Røhr, A., 149&lt;br /&gt;
Roman land law, 25&lt;br /&gt;
Rome, 4, 8, 25, 50, 107, 110, 125, 147, 195&lt;br /&gt;
Rorty, R., 145&lt;br /&gt;
Rostow, W., 53&lt;br /&gt;
Rotation, 74, 111, 113-114&lt;br /&gt;
fallowless, 114&lt;br /&gt;
shifting, 74&lt;br /&gt;
three-field, 111, 113-114&lt;br /&gt;
two-field, 113-114&lt;br /&gt;
Roy, M. N., 55&lt;br /&gt;
Rules, cultural, and exploitation, 212&lt;br /&gt;
Russia, 147&lt;br /&gt;
Rwanda, 71&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sack, R., 102, 145&lt;br /&gt;
Sahara, 76, 183&lt;br /&gt;
Sahel, 76&lt;br /&gt;
Said, E., 48, 58, 144&lt;br /&gt;
Sanderson, E., 44&lt;br /&gt;
Sanity, insanity, 17, 96&lt;br /&gt;
São Tomé, 191, 195-196&lt;br /&gt;
Sastri, K. N., 176&lt;br /&gt;
Savagery, zone of, 14, 44&lt;br /&gt;
Savages, 4, 60, 96&lt;br /&gt;
Schmidt, W., 49&lt;br /&gt;
Schweder, R., 145&lt;br /&gt;
Science, social, 31, 37, 38-41, 54, 97&lt;br /&gt;
Seccombe, W., 139&lt;br /&gt;
Semitic peoples, 44, 63&lt;br /&gt;
Semo, E., 211&lt;br /&gt;
Serfs, 127-128, 134, 154, 160, 175-176&lt;br /&gt;
Service tenure, 158&lt;br /&gt;
Seville, 189, 195&lt;br /&gt;
Sexual frustration, and rise of Europe (Stone), 134-135&lt;br /&gt;
Shannon, G., 142, 216&lt;br /&gt;
Sharma, R. S., 55, 146, 175&lt;br /&gt;
Shem, 44&lt;br /&gt;
Sheridan, R., 205, 213&lt;br /&gt;
Sherif, A., 175, 176, 207&lt;br /&gt;
Shipping, 169-170, 181, 196&lt;br /&gt;
African and Asian, 117-118, 170, 181&lt;br /&gt;
medieval, 117-118, 169-170&lt;br /&gt;
Shoemaker, F., 144&lt;br /&gt;
Siberia, 199&lt;br /&gt;
Silver, 183, 188-191&lt;br /&gt;
American production, 188-191&lt;br /&gt;
and Asian trade, 118, 190&lt;br /&gt;
stock in E. Hemisphere, 189&lt;br /&gt;
Simkin, C., 177&lt;br /&gt;
Simonsen, R., 211&lt;br /&gt;
Sinclair, P., 141&lt;br /&gt;
Slave plantation, 70, 125, 191-198, 204-205&lt;br /&gt;
Slave trade, 70, 79, 188, 192, 199, 203-205&lt;br /&gt;
Slavery, 62, 70, 79, 107, 125, 170, 192, 195, 197, 203-205, 208, 212&lt;br /&gt;
Smallpox, 78&lt;br /&gt;
Smith, Abdullahi, 175&lt;br /&gt;
Smith, Adam, 142&lt;br /&gt;
Smith, C. T., 146, 210&lt;br /&gt;
Sofala, 166, 208&lt;br /&gt;
Soils. See also Agriculture&lt;br /&gt;
fertility, 72-77, 85, 89, 91&lt;br /&gt;
gley, in Europe, 92&lt;br /&gt;
podzolic, in Europe, 92&lt;br /&gt;
temperate, 90-92&lt;br /&gt;
tropical, 42, 71-76, 140&lt;br /&gt;
waterlogged, 92&lt;br /&gt;
Solow, B., 205, 213&lt;br /&gt;
South China Sea, 92&lt;br /&gt;
Sovereignty, concept of, 15, 25&lt;br /&gt;
Soviet Union, Russia, 29, 76, 81, 84&lt;br /&gt;
Spain, 181, 188, 192, 194, 197&lt;br /&gt;
Spatial revolution, medieval, 169-173, 181&lt;br /&gt;
Spatial transport of commodities. See Location; Spatial revolution&lt;br /&gt;
Spencer, H., 22, 48&lt;br /&gt;
Spices, 168, 192&lt;br /&gt;
Spradley, J., 49&lt;br /&gt;
Stages, evolutionary, 125&lt;br /&gt;
Stagnation, cultural, 6, 17, 84, 90, 116, 124-125&lt;br /&gt;
Stagnation of Chinese society, theory of, 115-119, 142, 147&lt;br /&gt;
Stalinism, and theory of Oriental despotism, 81&lt;br /&gt;
State, 8, 58, 81, 85, 87, 94, 119-123, 141, 147, 157, 161, 172&lt;br /&gt;
in Asia, 123, 126. See also Empire; Oriental despotism&lt;br /&gt;
medieval European, 122&lt;br /&gt;
modern, 120-122&lt;br /&gt;
size of, 94, 119-122&lt;br /&gt;
Steele, E., 44&lt;br /&gt;
Steele, J., 44&lt;br /&gt;
Steward, J., 47, 172, 178&lt;br /&gt;
Stirrup, iron, 111&lt;br /&gt;
Stocking, G., 47, 48, 138, 144&lt;br /&gt;
Stone, L., 130, 134-135, 150, 151&lt;br /&gt;
Sudan, 157, 183&lt;br /&gt;
Sudanic caravans, 93&lt;br /&gt;
Sugar, 166, 169, 191, 200&lt;br /&gt;
Sugar-cane. See Sugar&lt;br /&gt;
Sulawesi, 120&lt;br /&gt;
Sumatra, 120&lt;br /&gt;
Swai, B., 48&lt;br /&gt;
Sweden, 147&lt;br /&gt;
Sweet potato, 107, 156&lt;br /&gt;
Sweezy, P., 149, 177&lt;br /&gt;
Swindell, K., 139&lt;br /&gt;
Swinton, W., 44&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Taeuber, I., 131, 150&lt;br /&gt;
Takrur, 209&lt;br /&gt;
Talkington, L., 216&lt;br /&gt;
Tarzan, 97, 105&lt;br /&gt;
Tawney, R. H., 211&lt;br /&gt;
Taylor, G., 47, 49&lt;br /&gt;
Technological determinism, 108-109&lt;br /&gt;
Technology, 29, 57, 94, 108-119, 161, 184, 186, 202&lt;br /&gt;
ancient, 109-110&lt;br /&gt;
Chinese medieval, 116-119&lt;br /&gt;
European medieval, 110-115, 128, 160-161, 163&lt;br /&gt;
Temu, A., 48&lt;br /&gt;
Tenochtitlán, 185&lt;br /&gt;
Ternate, 196&lt;br /&gt;
Testing (ACT, SAT, IQ), 101, 145&lt;br /&gt;
Textbooks, as cultural windows, 6, 43-46&lt;br /&gt;
Textiles, 169, 192, 203. See also Cotton&lt;br /&gt;
Thackeray, W., 48&lt;br /&gt;
Thailand, 147&lt;br /&gt;
Thalheimer, M., 44&lt;br /&gt;
Thapar, R., 48&lt;br /&gt;
Theory, scientific, 17, 24, 31-32, 34&lt;br /&gt;
Third World, 54&lt;br /&gt;
Third Worldism, 79, 125, 149&lt;br /&gt;
Thorndyke, L., 147, 210&lt;br /&gt;
Thought, abstract and concrete, 17, 96-99, 103. See also Reasoning&lt;br /&gt;
Thrupp, S., 176, 212&lt;br /&gt;
Tigris-Euphrates valley, 82, 86&lt;br /&gt;
Tillinghast, W., 44&lt;br /&gt;
Tobacco, 156, 192&lt;br /&gt;
Tolman, E., 38, 49&lt;br /&gt;
Torras, J., 150&lt;br /&gt;
Toulmin, S., 48&lt;br /&gt;
Toynbee, A., 71&lt;br /&gt;
Toyoda, T., 177&lt;br /&gt;
Trade winds, 182&lt;br /&gt;
Traditional society, 6, 68, 98, 128&lt;br /&gt;
Traditionalism, 15, 98-102, 145&lt;br /&gt;
Transoceanic diffusion, 11, 14, 207-209&lt;br /&gt;
Travel, radii, 181&lt;br /&gt;
Tributary mode of production, 154&lt;br /&gt;
Trigger, B., 138&lt;br /&gt;
Tropical soils. See Soils&lt;br /&gt;
Tropical-nastiness theory, 69-80&lt;br /&gt;
Tropics, humid (term), 71&lt;br /&gt;
Trypanosomiasis, 79-80&lt;br /&gt;
Tung, C., 176&lt;br /&gt;
Tunnel history, 3-8, 103, 109-110, 115, 150, 180, 187&lt;br /&gt;
Turkey, 45, 183&lt;br /&gt;
Turner, B. L., 143&lt;br /&gt;
Turshen, M., 142&lt;br /&gt;
Tytler, A., 43&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Udovitch, A., 177&lt;br /&gt;
Underdevelopment, 153, 180&lt;br /&gt;
Underdevelopment theory, 55-56, 137, 149&lt;br /&gt;
Uniformitarianism, cultural, 42, 47, 122, 124, 184, 208&lt;br /&gt;
United Nations, 28&lt;br /&gt;
United States, 28, 43&lt;br /&gt;
Urbanization. See Cities&lt;br /&gt;
Usman, Y. B., 175&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Validation of belief, 34&lt;br /&gt;
Values, 15, 30-31, 37-41, 103, 207&lt;br /&gt;
Vampires, 16, 21, 47&lt;br /&gt;
Van Baren, F., 140&lt;br /&gt;
Van Leur, J. C., 55, 56, 137&lt;br /&gt;
Van Sertima, I., 208-209&lt;br /&gt;
Venice, 167&lt;br /&gt;
Venturi, F., 142&lt;br /&gt;
Verifiability, 34, 36, 40&lt;br /&gt;
Verification of belief. See Verifiability&lt;br /&gt;
Vijayanagar, 170&lt;br /&gt;
Vilar, P., 210&lt;br /&gt;
Village, 90&lt;br /&gt;
European, 159-160, 176&lt;br /&gt;
Indian, 127, 159-160, 175-176&lt;br /&gt;
Virgin Islands, US, 49&lt;br /&gt;
Vishnu-Mittre, 173&lt;br /&gt;
Vives, J. Vicens, 210&lt;br /&gt;
de Vries, J., 209, 210, 211&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wage labor, 167, 202-205&lt;br /&gt;
and slave labor, 203-206, 212&lt;br /&gt;
in post-Conquest America, 189&lt;br /&gt;
Wai Andah, B., 141&lt;br /&gt;
Wallerstein, I., 51, 149, 205, 211, 213&lt;br /&gt;
Warren, B., 58, 138&lt;br /&gt;
Watson, A., 210&lt;br /&gt;
Watts, S., 142, 216&lt;br /&gt;
Watts, S. J., 216&lt;br /&gt;
Webb, W. P., 210&lt;br /&gt;
Weber, G., 43&lt;br /&gt;
Weber, M., 15, 47, 59, 64-65, 83-84, 86-90, 102-104, 115-116, 124, 131, 138, 142, 143, 145, 158, 170&lt;br /&gt;
Weberianism, 54, 64-65, 87, 102-104, 114, 117&lt;br /&gt;
Wei R., 86&lt;br /&gt;
Werner, H., 99, 144&lt;br /&gt;
Werner, K. F., 61, 124, 147-149&lt;br /&gt;
West, the, 1, 46, 94&lt;br /&gt;
West Indies, 20, 55, 180, 182, 203, 207. See also under specific topics&lt;br /&gt;
and industrial revolution in Britain, 203-206&lt;br /&gt;
Whaling, 207, 192&lt;br /&gt;
Wheat, 169, 197&lt;br /&gt;
Wheatley, P., 57, 137, 177&lt;br /&gt;
Whelpley, S., 43&lt;br /&gt;
White, G., 145&lt;br /&gt;
White, Lynn, Jr., 61, 108, 110-115, 146, 147, 176&lt;br /&gt;
White man&#039;s grave, 78&lt;br /&gt;
Whitehead, A. N., 37, 49, 145&lt;br /&gt;
Whitman, J., 144&lt;br /&gt;
Whitmore, T., 209, 211&lt;br /&gt;
Wiethoff, B., 177&lt;br /&gt;
Wilken, G., 140&lt;br /&gt;
Willard, E., 43&lt;br /&gt;
Williams, E., 48, 137, 203-206, 212, 213&lt;br /&gt;
Williams, R., 48&lt;br /&gt;
Williams thesis, 55, 205&lt;br /&gt;
Wisner, B., 141&lt;br /&gt;
Wittfogel, K., 83-88, 142&lt;br /&gt;
Wolf, E., 137&lt;br /&gt;
Women, and rationality, 96-97&lt;br /&gt;
Woolen trade, English, 191-192&lt;br /&gt;
World models, 30-31, 41-43, 214&lt;br /&gt;
World system, capitalist, 206&lt;br /&gt;
Wrigley, E., 151&lt;br /&gt;
Wunder, H., 150&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yadava, B., 175, 176&lt;br /&gt;
Yam, 74-75&lt;br /&gt;
Yang Lien-sheng, 177&lt;br /&gt;
Yellow R., 86&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Zamindars, 24, 175&lt;br /&gt;
Zimbabwe, 157, 166, 197&lt;br /&gt;
Zwernemann, J., 47&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>The Phantom Bull</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=Library:The_Colonizer%27s_Model_of_the_World&amp;diff=91865</id>
		<title>Library:The Colonizer&#039;s Model of the World</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=Library:The_Colonizer%27s_Model_of_the_World&amp;diff=91865"/>
		<updated>2026-07-14T21:53:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;The Phantom Bull: I created a library page for The Colonizer&amp;#039;s Model of the World by J. M. Blaut.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Library work|title=The Colonizer&#039;s Model of the World|author=J. M. Blaut|published_date=1993|source=https://annas-archive.gl/md5/ac90d2ead54c271679c5e9bef00192f3}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Acknowledgments ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Many people contributed in many important ways to the writing of this book. Peter Taylor and Wilbur Zelinsky gave me great encouragement and wise counsel (not always heeded) during the years that I have been struggling with the issues and ideas discussed here. Among many others who contributed immensely to the book, and are happily given credit for many of the ideas it contains (the good ideas, not the errors), I wish particularly to mention Abdul Alkalimat, Samir Amin, William Denevan, Loida Figueroa, Andre Gunder Frank, William Loren Katz, José López, Kent Mathewson, Antonio Ríos-Bustamante, América Sorrentini de Blaut, and Ben Wisner. Over the years many other people have set me to thinking about the problems discussed in the book and have shown me the answers to some of these problems. Among these friends, teachers, and students, I would like to mention Chao-li Chi, Ghazi Falah, Fred Hardy, Fred Kniffen, Juan Mari Brás, Francis Mark, Sidney Mintz, Ng Hong, Doris Pizarro, Randolph Rawlins, Anselme Rémy, Waldo Rodríguez, Digna Sánchez, Howard Stanton, David Stea, and Lakshman Yapa. Peter Wissoker and Anna Brackett edited the book with patience and skill. A number of paragraphs in Chapters 3 and 4 and one in Chapter 2 are taken from an article in &#039;&#039;Political Geography&#039;&#039; (Blaut 1992b), and are reproduced here with the kind permission of the publisher of that journal, Butterworth-Heinemann.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= CHAPTER 1: History Inside Out =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Argument ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The purpose of this book is to undermine one of the most powerful beliefs of our time concerning world history and world geography. This belief is the notion that European civilization—&amp;quot;The West&amp;quot;—has had some unique historical advantage, some special quality of race or culture or environment or mind or spirit, which gives this human community a permanent superiority over all other communities, at all times in history and down to the present.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The belief is both historical and geographical. Europeans are seen as the &amp;quot;makers of history.&amp;quot; Europe eternally advances, progresses, modernizes. The rest of the world advances more sluggishly, or stagnates: it is &amp;quot;traditional society.&amp;quot; Therefore, the world has a permanent geographical center and a permanent periphery: an Inside and an Outside. Inside leads, Outside lags. Inside innovates, Outside imitates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This belief is diffusionism, or more precisely Eurocentric diffusionism. It is a theory about the way cultural processes tend to move over the surface of the world as a whole. They tend to flow out of the European sector and toward the non-European sector. This is the natural, normal, logical, and ethical flow of culture, of innovation, of human causality. Europe, eternally, is Inside. Non-Europe is Outside. Europe is the source of most diffusions; non-Europe is the recipient.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In this book the word &amp;quot;Europe&amp;quot; refers to the continent of Europe and to regions dominated by European culture elsewhere, regions like the United States and Canada.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Diffusionism lies at the very root of historical and geographical scholarship. Some parts of the belief have been questioned in recent years, but its most fundamental tenets remain unchallenged, and so the belief as a whole has not been uprooted or very much weakened by modern scholarship.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The most important tenet of diffusionism is the theory of &amp;quot;the autonomous rise of Europe,&amp;quot; sometimes (rather more grandly) called the idea of &amp;quot;the European Miracle.&amp;quot; It is the idea that Europe was more advanced and more progressive than all other regions prior to 1492, prior, that is, to the beginning of the period of colonialism, the period in which Europe and non-Europe came into intense interaction. If one believes this to be the case—and most modern scholars seem to believe it to be the case—then it must follow that the economic and social modernization of Europe is fundamentally a result of Europe&#039;s internal qualities, not of interaction with the societies of Africa, Asia, and America after 1492. Therefore: the main building blocks of modernity must be European. Therefore: colonialism cannot have been really important for Europe&#039;s modernization. Therefore: colonialism must mean, for the Africans, Asians, and Americans, not spoliation and cultural destruction but, rather, the receipt-by-diffusion of European civilization: modernization.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This book will analyze and criticize Eurocentric diffusionism as a general body of ideas, and will try to undermine the more concrete theory of the autonomous rise of Europe. The first chapter of the book discusses the nature and history of diffusionism. Chapter 2 analyzes the theory of the autonomous rise of Europe as a body of propositions about European superiority (and &amp;quot;the European miracle&amp;quot;), then tries to disprove these propositions, one after the other. Chapter 3 discusses world history and historical geography prior to 1492, attempting to show that Europe was not superior to other civilizations and regions in those times. Chapter 4 argues that colonialism was the basic process after 1492, which led to the selective rise of Europe, the modernization or development of Europe (and outlying Europeanized culture areas like the United States), and the underdevelopment of Asia, Africa, and Latin America. Chapter 4 also argues that the conquest of America and thereafter the expansion of European colonialism is not to be explained in terms of any internal characteristics of Europe, but instead reflects the mundane realities of location. The chain of argument in Chapters 2, 3, and 4, as a whole, therefore, is an attempt to show that Europe did not have historical priority—historical superiority—over what we now call the Third World.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This may seem to be too ambitious a project for one small book. I am really making just one claim. I am asserting that a fundamental and rather explicit error has been made in our conventional past thinking about geography and history, and this error has distorted many fields of thought and action. I am going to present enough evidence to show that the belief in Eurocentric diffusionism and Europe&#039;s historical superiority or priority is not convincing: not well grounded in the facts of history and geography, although firmly grounded in Western culture. It is in a sense folklore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Tunnel of Time ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you had gone to school in Europe or Anglo-America 150 years ago, around the middle of the nineteenth century, you would have been taught a very curious kind of history. You would have learned, for one thing, that every important thing that ever happened to humanity happened in one part of the world, the region we will call &amp;quot;Greater Europe,&amp;quot; meaning the geographical continent of Europe itself, plus (for ancient times only) an enlargement of it to the southeast, the &amp;quot;Bible Lands&amp;quot;—from North Africa to Mesopotamia—plus (for modern times only) the countries of European settlement overseas. You would have been taught that God created Man in this region: the Garden of Eden was mentioned as the starting point of human history in typical world history textbooks of the period, and these textbooks placed Eden at various points between the shores of the Mediterranean Sea and the mountains of Inner Asia.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some of your teachers would have also claimed that only the people of this region are really human: God created the people of other places as a different, nonhuman, or rather infrahuman, species. And all of your teachers of science as well as history would have agreed that non-Europeans are not as intelligent, not as honorable, and (for the most part) not as courageous as Europeans: God made them inferior. If you had asked your teachers why Europeans are more human and more intelligent than everyone else you would perhaps have been chastised for asking such a question. You would have been told that a Christian God created and now manages the world, and it would be both silly and blasphemous to suggest that He might show the same favor to non-Europeans, non-Christians, that He does to those people who worship the True God and moreover worship Him with the proper sacrament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you had been studying geography as well as history back in the middle of the nineteenth century, you would indeed have learned something about the non-European world. The people living in Africa and Asia would have been depicted not only as inferior but as in some sense evil. They are the people who refused to accept God&#039;s grace and so have fallen from His favor. Africans are thus cruel savages, for whom the best possible fate is to be put to useful work, and Christianized. Chinese and Indians for some unknown reason managed to build barbaric civilizations of their own, but because they are not Europeans and not Christians, their civilizations long ago began to stagnate and regress. And, for all their splendor, these never were real civilizations: they are cruel &amp;quot;Oriental despotisms.&amp;quot; Only Europeans know true freedom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ideas of course change, and if you had gone to school some 50 years later, around the turn of the century, you would have been taught a much more secular form of history, and it would have had a strongly evolutionary (though not yet Darwinian) flavor. You would have learned that the earth is very old, that life is old, and that our species itself has been around for a long time. But everything important still happened in Europe (that is, in Greater Europe). The first true man, Cro-Magnon, lived in Europe. Agriculture was invented in Greater Europe (perhaps in the continent, perhaps in the Bible Lands, Europe&#039;s self-proclaimed cultural hearth). You would have been told in world history class that the first barbaric beginnings of civilization occurred in the Bible Lands. There in the Bible Lands emerged the two Caucasian peoples who make all of history. The Semites invented cities and empires, and gave us monotheism and Christianity, but stopped at that point and then sank back into Oriental decadence. The Aryans or Indo-Europeans, freedom-loving though backward folk, built on these foundations, migrating from southeastern Europe or western Asia into and through geographical Europe, and creating the first genuinely civilized society, that of ancient Greece. Then the Romans raised civilization to its next level, and thereafter world history marched inexorably northwestward. If your school was in England you would have been told that History marched from &amp;quot;the Orient&amp;quot; (the Bible Lands) to Athens, to Rome, to feudal France, and finally to modern England—a kind of westbound Orient Express.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By now a secular picture of the geography of non-Europe had begun to be taught in European schools. Africans continued to be described as savages and Oriental societies as decadent and despotic. But important changes had taken place in the relations between Europe and non-Europe during the course of the nineteenth century, and by 1900 a particular theory about this relationship had become fixed in popular discourse and was now taught in schools as standard world geography. This was the theory (described later in this chapter) according to which non-Europeans can and do rise to a civilizational level, if not equal to that of Europeans at least near that level, under European tutelage, that is, under European colonial control.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suppose we move forward another half century, to the history and geography taught around the end of World War II. Not much change. The first True Man is still the Cro-Magnon of Europe. Agriculture was invented in the Bible Lands; so too was barbaric civilization. True civilization still marches from Athens to Rome to Paris to London, and perhaps sets sail then for New York. Non-Europeans do not contribute much to world history, although they begin to do so as a result of European influence. (Colonial peoples learn from their tutors; Japanese imitate successfully, and so on.) Europeans are still brighter, better, and bolder than everyone else.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;This quick survey of 150 years or so of world history textbooks is, of course, very schematic and impressionistic. Some further comments may be of use. In textbooks of the first period, around 1850 (plus or minus a decade or so), the original home of Man is often stated to be the Garden of Eden, which is located by different textbook writers in different parts of western Asia. For instance: somewhere east of Canaan and near Mesopotamia (Robbins, &#039;&#039;The World Displayed in its History and Geography&#039;&#039;, 1832, p. 13); somewhere in the &amp;quot;healthful&amp;quot; mountains between the Caspian Sea and Kashmir or Tibet (Müller, &#039;&#039;The History of the World to 1783&#039;&#039;, 1842, pp. 27, 43-44); perhaps near the borders of the Mediterranean Sea (Tytler, &#039;&#039;Universal history, From the Creation to the beginning of the Eighteenth Century&#039;&#039;, vol. 1, 1844, p. 17); in the Vale of Kashmir (Willard, &#039;&#039;Universal History in Perspective&#039;&#039;, 1845, p. 34); somewhere between the Caucasus Mountains and the Himalayas (Keightley, &#039;&#039;Outlines of History&#039;&#039;, 1849); in the Himalayas (Weber, &#039;&#039;Outlines of Universal History&#039;&#039;, 1853, p. 6); in Armenia (Collier, &#039;&#039;Outlines of General History&#039;&#039;, 1868). There seems to be a kind of median location of Eden near the Caucasus Mountains, which was also, by no coincidence, the supposed place of origin of the &amp;quot;Caucasian race.&amp;quot; Noah, of course, began postdeluvian history on Mt. Ararat, in Armenia (also roughly in the region of the Caucasus). Noah is supposed to have migrated then to Europe (Whelpley, &#039;&#039;A Compound of History, From the Earliest Times&#039;&#039;, vol. 1, 1844, p. 10), or Mesopotamia (Robbins, 1832, p. 20), or Palestine, or some other part of the Bible Lands. Noah&#039;s three sons are supposed, then, to have dispersed and to have founded the branches of mankind—the first great diffusion process. In most textbooks of this period history tends to move west; some textbooks present the Hegelian notion that history proceeds inexorably westward, following the sun, with the implication that the United States, farther west still, will replace Europe as the next center of world civilization.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It was widely believed in this period that nonwhites were not truly and fully human. One version of this theory, the notion of &amp;quot;polygenesis,&amp;quot; claimed that God had created true humans in the Garden of Eden and other races—or at least the &amp;quot;black race&amp;quot;—in other places and times. This theory questioned the standard interpretation of the Old Testament (that everyone is descended from Adam and Eve), so, not surprisingly, it was not stated as truth in the textbooks I consulted. (I have not, however, looked at textbooks used in the antebellum South, and the theory of polygenesis was most popular in slaveholding regions, as an ideological grounding for the treatment of blacks as things rather than people.) Yet polygenesis was important enough to be mentioned and then rejected—in favor of the view that all humans are descendants of Adam and Eve—in some textbooks, down to the end of the century (see, for example, Dew, &#039;&#039;A Digest of the Laws, Customs, Manners, and Institutions of the Ancient and Modern Nations&#039;&#039;, 1853; Fisher, &#039;&#039;Outlines of Universal History&#039;&#039;, 1885; Duruy and Grosvenor, &#039;&#039;A General History of the World&#039;&#039;, 1901). But polygenesis was not needed; the belief that nonwhites are inferior to whites is asserted in one way or another in all the textbooks I examined. The theory of &amp;quot;degeneration&amp;quot; served just as well as polygenesis. It was the notion that the descendants of Ham, and perhaps other biblical peoples, migrated away from the Bible Lands, eastward and southward, and degenerated from civilization toward savagery, or even lower, as they did so, because they had not accepted Christ, or because they migrated into inferior environments, or for some other reason. (See, for instance, Keightley, 1849, 5-6: &amp;quot;the savage is a degeneration from the civilized life,&amp;quot; and Africans are near the apes.) Degeneration was asserted in some textbooks, but in most the simple fact of white superiority was stated and left unexplained. The history of the world is, in general, the history of the white race, or the Semitic and Aryan peoples (see below). For times later than the Roman era, non-Europe is scarcely discussed, except as a backdrop for discussions of the Crusades, the building of colonial empires, and the like. (See Harris, &#039;&#039;The Rise of Anthropological Theory&#039;&#039;, 1968, for an excellent discussion of polygenesis and degeneration.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nearly all textbooks of the period around 1900 (give or take a few years) accepted the newer scientific theories about the age of the earth and the fact of biological evolution (though not the Darwinian theory of evolution). The biblical account of human history, however, was retained in many books, although fewer of them accepted the formerly standard Old Testament chronologies (for instance, that things began in 4004 B.C.). Books of this period tended to present the so-called &amp;quot;Aryan theory,&amp;quot; a theory derived from philology but expanded into a theory of culture history. Earlier philologists had identified an &amp;quot;Aryan&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Indo-European&amp;quot; language family, and also a &amp;quot;Semitic&amp;quot; family (which many authorities, including textbook writers, identified with Noah&#039;s sons Japheth and Shem, respectively). The white race consists of these two peoples. One branch of the Aryans supposedly migrated west into Europe (from the supposed &amp;quot;Aryan hearth,&amp;quot; somewhere southwest or northwest of the Caucasus). These were progressive, energetic people, who founded European civilization mainly after they had acquired Christianity from the Semites, who invented the first barbaric civilizations and monotheism but then stagnated into a dreamy, decadent, unambitious culture and thereafter ceased to advance civilization. No other culture, apart from these two, had much to do with history. (According to Freeman, &#039;&#039;General Sketch of History&#039;&#039;, 1872, p. 2, history &amp;quot;in the highest and truest sense is the history of the Aryan nations of Europe&amp;quot;; see also Collier, 1868; Swinton, &#039;&#039;Outlines of the World&#039;s History&#039;&#039;, 1874; Gilman, &#039;&#039;First Steps in General History&#039;&#039;, 1874; Anderson, &#039;&#039;New Manual of General History&#039;&#039;, 1882; Steele and Steele, &#039;&#039;A Brief History of Ancient, Medieval, and Modern Peoples&#039;&#039;, 1883; Fisher, 1896; Quackenbos, &#039;&#039;Illustrated School History of the World&#039;&#039;, 1889; Thalheimer, &#039;&#039;Outline of General History for the Use of Schools&#039;&#039;, 1883; Sanderson, &#039;&#039;History of the World from the Earliest Time to the Year 1898&#039;&#039;; Duruy and Grosvenor, 1901. Ploetz and Tillinghast presented this theory in &#039;&#039;Epitome of Ancient, Medieval, and Modern History&#039;&#039;, first published in 1883, in its many editions down to 1925 when, in an edition edited by H. E. Barnes, the theory was finally eliminated.) See Bernal&#039;s &#039;&#039;Black Athena&#039;&#039; (1987, 1991) for an insightful discussion of the Aryan theory and related topics in the history of European thought.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because the Old Testament spoke of agriculture—Cain knew farming and Abraham herded domesticated animals—the history textbooks tended not to address the problem of where agriculture was invented until very late in the nineteenth century, the period when science was beginning to deal with this problem. Some scientists and some textbook writers then began to speculate that, just possibly, agriculture was as old in continental Europe as it was in western Asia and Egypt. (From the point of view of science, see Joly, &#039;&#039;Man Before Metals&#039;&#039;, 1897.) But the idea that agriculture originated in the Bible Lands remained dominant although now it was viewed (by most) as an invention, not an artifact of original creation. The ethnographic fact that some tribal peoples (for instance, in Australia) did not practice agriculture was commonly explained, in the textbooks of the earlier nineteenth century, in terms of the theory of degeneration: their ancestors had somehow lost the art. Later in the century it became more common to use the diffusionist conception that agriculture had been invented by west Asian or (conceivably) European peoples, then diffused outward over the rest of the world, and cultures that did not practice it in modern times simply had not yet acquired it, either because of their isolation or because they were too stupid to take it up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Orient Express was a famous train that ran between western Europe and western Asia. Although various routes were used in different eras, the basic line ran from Constantinople (Istanbul) through Greece to northern Italy or Austria, then on to France, and (via Ostend) England. Most of the history textbooks write about world history as though it marched northwesterward, rather like the westbound Orient Express, with stations (so to speak) in Athens, Rome, Paris, and London. (See Chapter 2 for further discussion of the Orient Express model.)&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We can sum all of this up with an image that will prove quite useful in this book. This is the idea that the world has an Inside and an Outside. World history thus far has been, basically, the history of Inside. Outside has been, basically, irrelevant. History and historical geography as it was taught, written, and thought by Europeans down to the time of World War II, and still (as we will see) in most respects today, lies, as it were, in a tunnel of time. The walls of this tunnel are, figuratively, the spatial boundaries of Greater Europe. History is a matter of looking back or down in this European tunnel of time and trying to decide what happened where, when, and why. &amp;quot;Why&amp;quot; of course calls for connections among historical events, but only among the events that lie in the European tunnel. Outside its walls everything seems to be rockbound, timeless, changeless tradition. I will call this way of thinking &amp;quot;historical tunnel vision,&amp;quot; or simply &amp;quot;tunnel history.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The older form of tunnel history simply ignored the non-European world: typical textbooks and historical atlases devoted very few pages to areas outside of Greater Europe (that is, Europe and countries of European settlement overseas plus, for ancient history and the Crusades, the Near East), until one came to the year 1492. Non-Europe (Africa, Asia east of the Bible Lands, Latin America, Oceania) received significant notice only as the venue of European colonial activities, and most of what was said about this region was essentially the history of empire.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In nineteenth-century world history textbooks, Turkey was given some attention because of its political involvement with European affairs. World geography, in contrast to world history, always covered the entire world, and textbooks as well as the great multivolume descriptive geographies (like Reclus&#039;s classic 19-volume &#039;&#039;Nouvelle Géographie Universelle&#039;&#039;, published between 1876 and 1894) gave considerable attention to Asia, Africa, and Latin America. This should not mislead us, however. One of the primary functions of geography throughout this entire period was to teach European children what they needed to know about non-Europe in order to participate in their countries&#039; imperial and commercial activities in these regions. See Hudson, &amp;quot;The New Geography and the New Imperialism: 1870-1918&amp;quot; (1977) and McKay, &amp;quot;Colonialism in the French Geographical Movement&amp;quot; (1943), on the close relation between geography and colonial activities.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Not only was the great bulk of attention devoted to Greater Europe in these older textbooks and historical atlases, but world history was described as flowing steadily westward with the passage of time, from the Bible Lands to eastern Mediterranean Europe, to northwestern Europe. This pattern is readily discernible if we notice the salience of places mentioned in these sources, that is, the frequency of place-name mentions for different regions at different periods. For the earliest period, place-name mentions cluster in the Bible Lands and the extreme eastern Mediterranean. For successively later periods, place-name mentions cluster farther and farther to the west and northwest, finally clustering in northwestern Europe for the period after about A.D. 1000: this is the &amp;quot;Orient Express&amp;quot; pattern to which we referred previously.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After World War II, however, history textbooks began to exhibit another, more subtle, form of tunnel history. The non-European world was now beginning to insert itself very firmly in European consciousness, in the aftermath of the war with Japan and in the midst of the intensified decolonization struggles, the Civil Rights movement in the United States, and the like. Most newer textbooks enlarged the discussion of non-European history, and said something about the historical achievements of non-European cultures. Most textbooks gave a flavor of historicity, of evolutionary progress, to non-European history, thus departing from the older pattern, which dismissed these societies as stagnant and nonevolving. Asian societies were now described as having had an evolutionary motion, though a motion slower than that of Europe. Africa was still described as stagnant, history-less, prior to the colonial era. More salience was given to Asia. However, Africa and the Western Hemisphere still received little mention for eras prior to 1492. The pattern of place-name mentions in most (not all) texts and historical atlases still suggested a flow to the west and northwest, from the Near East to western Europe. And tunnel history dominated most textbooks in the most important matter of all, the question of &amp;quot;why,&amp;quot; of explanation. Historical progress still came about because Europeans invented or initiated most of the crucial innovations, which only later spread out to the rest of the world. So the textbooks depicted a world in which historical causes were to be found basically inside the European tunnel of time, although historical effects were to be seen basically everywhere.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The character of this newer approach can be seen if we look at two well-known modern university-level texts, one written by W. H. McNeill of the University of Chicago (&#039;&#039;A World History&#039;&#039;, 3rd ed., 1979), the other by J. M. Roberts of Oxford University (&#039;&#039;The Hutchinson History of the World&#039;&#039;, 2d ed., 1987; published in the United States as &#039;&#039;The Penguin History of the World&#039;&#039;). For pre-Christian-era world history, more than three-quarters of the place-name mentions in both books are places in Europe and the Middle East (including North Africa); less than one-quarter of the place-name mentions are places in other parts of the world and only about 1% are in Africa. For the Christian era to A.D. 1491 there is significant divergence between the two books. In Roberts&#039;s text, European and Middle Eastern places constitute about 85% of place-name mentions. In McNeill&#039;s text, European and Middle Eastern places constitute only 60% of the place names mentioned, a significant departure from the older tradition although still well out of proportion to this region&#039;s size in area and population. (Sub-Saharan Africa accounts for only 2% of mentions for the period A.D. 1-1491.) In both books, therefore, the region I have been calling &amp;quot;Greater Europe&amp;quot; has considerably lower salience for pre-1492 history than was typically the case in older world history textbooks. As to explanation, however, both books retain much of the traditional perspective. Roberts gives almost no causal role to the cultures and regions of the world other than Europe and the Middle East (including North Africa) for any period prior to 1492. McNeill gives considerable weight to East Asia and some to South Asia for certain historical periods, but almost all of the world history-making forces emanate from Europe, western Asia, and North Africa for the period before 1492. (An exception is the Black Death, which, according to McNeill, swept westward into these regions from farther Asia. On this matter, see also McNeill&#039;s &#039;&#039;Plagues and Peoples&#039;&#039;, 1976.) Examples of the Eurocentric explanations offered by both authors will be given in Chapter 2 of the present book.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is, however, insufficient to look only at those present-day textbooks that are clearly identified as &amp;quot;world history&amp;quot; textbooks. Quite frequently university courses covering the subject of world history use history textbooks that carry titles like &amp;quot;The History of Western Civilization.&amp;quot; (See, for instance, Lerner, et al., &#039;&#039;Western Civilizations: Their History and Their Culture&#039;&#039;, 1988; Kagan, et al., &#039;&#039;The Western Heritage&#039;&#039;, 1987; Chambers, et al., &#039;&#039;The Western Experience&#039;&#039;, 1987.) If such a textbook neglects the non-Western world, there can be no complaint that it is misleading: the title clearly specifies &amp;quot;West&amp;quot; not &amp;quot;World.&amp;quot; But if the course is designated as &amp;quot;world history&amp;quot; and the textbook is designated as &amp;quot;Western history,&amp;quot; then we have a problem. The worst scenario would be one in which world-history teaching continues to be Eurocentric history in disguise. I do not know of any research which tests the following hypotheses: (1) Given that, today, historians are sensitive to the need to avoid Eurocentric bias in the teaching of world history, do some of them simply change the title to &amp;quot;Western&amp;quot; so that Eurocentrism becomes, then, licit? And (2) is it possible that there is a trend away from the teaching of &amp;quot;World&amp;quot; history and toward &amp;quot;Western&amp;quot; (etc.) history and that this trend reflects a reaction (or adjustment) to present-day demands for nontechnocentrism and &amp;quot;fairness?&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Textbooks are an important window into a culture; more than just books, they are semiofficial statements of exactly what the opinion-forming elite of the culture want the educated youth of that culture to believe to be true about the past and present world.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;A school textbook is truly a key social document, a kind of modern stele. In the typical case, a book becomes accepted as a high school (or lower-level) textbook only after it has been reviewed very carefully by the publisher, school boards, and administrators, all of whom are intensely sensitive to the need to print acceptable doctrine; they are concerned to make it certain that children will read only those facts in their textbook which are considered to be acceptable as facts by the opinion-forming elite of the culture. The resulting textbook is, therefore, less an ordinary authored book than a vetted social statement of what is considered valid and acceptable for entry into the mind of the child. For this reason, research on textbooks (including college textbooks, in which the same process is at work, though more subtly) is, in fact, ethnographic research. It tells us about the belief system of the opinion-forming elite of the culture as a whole. Therefore, geography texts in the United States are really ethnogeography documents. Likewise, history texts are really ethnohistory documents. They are probably as useful as cultural artifacts as any old potsherd or inscription. See the final section of this chapter.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; As we have seen, European and Anglo-American history textbooks assert that most of the causes of historical progress occur, or originate, in the European sector of the world. Textbooks of the early and middle nineteenth century tended to give a rather openly religious grounding for this Eurocentric tunnel history. In later textbooks the Bible is no longer considered a source of historical fact, but causality seems to be rooted in an implicit theory that combines a belief that Christian peoples make history with a belief that white peoples make history, the whole becoming a theory that it is natural for Europeans to innovate and progress and for non-Europeans to remain stagnant and unchanging (&amp;quot;traditional&amp;quot;), until, like Sleeping Beauty, they are awakened by the Prince. This view still, in the main, prevails, although racism has been discarded and non-Europe is no longer considered to have been absolutely stagnant and traditional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Schools are always a little behind the time when it comes to the teaching of newer topics and ideas. I wish I could report that the old notions about Inside and Outside are today just artifacts, still taught in some schools because of the usual lag between research and pedagogy, but which have been discarded by Real Scholars, those who pursue historical research and write the important and influential books on world history. But this is not the case. In the matter that concerns us most, that of explaining the larger flows of world history, the views put forward by historical scholars today tend to be quite consonant with the theories projected in textbooks. We can set aside the fact that many of the most widely used textbooks, today as in the past, are written by prominent historical scholars. There are many complex cultural reasons why historical scholarship remains committed to Eurocentric explanations for most of the crucial developments in world history: we will discuss some of these reasons later in the present chapter and return to the question at various points throughout the book. Suffice it at this point to notice a very peculiar paradox. Historians have amassed a fine record of meticulous scholarship, and rarely indeed do we encounter prejudice or deliberate distortion in their work. Moreover, their judgments about historical causation are constrained by the same methodological rigor as we find in any other field of scholarship. It is only when we come to the larger issues of causation, matters of explaining historical progress over long periods and for larger regions, and matters of explaining profound revolutions in history, that Eurocentrism exerts an important influence on discourse, and often—as we will see—leads to the acceptance of poor theories in spite of a lack of supporting evidence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most European historians still maintain that most of the really crucial historical events, those that &amp;quot;changed history,&amp;quot; happened in Europe, or happened because of some causal impetus from Europe. (&amp;quot;Europe&amp;quot; continues to mean &amp;quot;Greater Europe.&amp;quot;) To illustrate this fact, I will list now, in historical order, a series of crucial Europe-centered propositions. All of them are accepted as true by the majority, in some cases the great majority, of European historical scholars. Some of them indeed are true, but that is beside the present point, which is to show that historical reasoning still focuses on Greater Europe as the perpetual fountainhead of history.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. The Neolithic Revolution—the invention of agriculture and the beginnings of a settled way of life for humanity—occurred in the Middle East (or the Bible Lands). This view was unopposed before about 1930, and is still the majority view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. The second major step in cultural evolution toward modern civilization, the emergence of the earliest states, cities, organized religions, writing systems, division of labor, and the like, was taken in the Middle East.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The Age of Metals began in the Middle East. Ironworking was invented in the Middle East or eastern Europe and the &amp;quot;Iron Age&amp;quot; first appeared in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Monotheism appeared first in the Middle East.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Democracy was invented in Europe (in ancient Greece).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Likewise most of pure science, mathematics, philosophy, history, and geography.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Class society and class struggle emerged first in the Greco-Roman era and region.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;This argument is given much weight by Eurocentric Marxists, since class struggle, for Marxists, is the central force in historical evolution.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. The Roman Empire was the first great imperial state. Romans invented bureaucracy, law, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9. The next great stage in social evolution, feudalism, was developed in Europe, with Frenchmen taking the lead.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;A form of political feudalism is sometimes conceded to have been developed earlier by the Chinese, but the great majority of European scholars, including most Marxists, believe that European feudalism was unique in representing a form of society that was a crucial, essential, stepping stone to modernity. See Chapter 3.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
10. Europeans invented a host of technological traits in the Middle Ages which gave them superiority over non-Europeans. (On this matter there are considerable differences of opinion.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
11. Europeans invented the modern state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
12. Europeans invented capitalism.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
13. Europeans, uniquely &amp;quot;venturesome,&amp;quot; were the great explorers, &amp;quot;discoverers,&amp;quot; etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
14. Europeans invented industry and created the Industrial Revolution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
... and so on down to the present.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All of the propositions in this list are widely accepted tenets of European historical scholarship today, although (as we will see) there is scholarly dispute about some of the propositions. All of this means that you and I learned these things, perhaps in elementary school, perhaps in university, perhaps in books and newspapers. We learned that all of this is the truth. But is it? Clearly, some of these propositions are true. Some others are true with qualifications. But some, as I will argue in this book, are not true at all: they are artifacts of the old tunnel history, in which Outside plays no crucial role and Inside is credited with everything important and everything efficacious.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Eurocentric Diffusionism ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Eurocentrism ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What we are talking about here is generally called, these days, &amp;quot;Eurocentrism.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Samir Amin&#039;s &#039;&#039;Eurocentrism&#039;&#039; (1988) for an excellent discussion of this notion. The word &amp;quot;Eurocentrism&amp;quot; apparently was coined quite recently, to assemble &amp;quot;European ethnocentrism&amp;quot; into one word. However, I (like Amin) do not think of Eurocentrism as merely a species of ethnocentrism, as the following paragraphs will make clear.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; This word is a label for all the beliefs that postulate past or present superiority of Europeans over non-Europeans (and over minority people of non-European descent). A strong critique of Eurocentrism is underway in all fields of social thought, and this book is certainly part of that critique.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is, however, a problem with the word &amp;quot;Eurocentrism.&amp;quot; In most discourse it is thought of as a sort of prejudice, an &amp;quot;attitude,&amp;quot; and therefore something that can be eliminated from modern enlightened thought in the same way we eliminate other relic attitudes such as racism, sexism, and religious bigotry. But the really crucial part of Eurocentrism is not a matter of attitudes in the sense of values and prejudices, but rather a matter of science, and scholarship, and informed and expert opinion. To be precise, Eurocentrism includes a set of beliefs that are statements about empirical reality, statements educated and usually unprejudiced Europeans accept as true, as propositions supported by &amp;quot;the facts.&amp;quot; Consider, for instance, the 14 propositions about Europe&#039;s priority in historical innovation which we listed above. Historians who accept these propositions as true would be most indignant if we described the propositions as &amp;quot;Eurocentric beliefs.&amp;quot; Every historian in this category would deny emphatically that he or she holds any Eurocentric prejudices, and very few of them actually do hold such prejudices. If they assert that Europeans invented democracy, science, feudalism, capitalism, the modern nation-state, and so on, they make these assertions because they think that all of this is fact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Eurocentrism, therefore, is a very complex thing. We can banish all the value meanings of this word, all the prejudices, and we still have Eurocentrism as a set of empirical beliefs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This, in a way, is the central problem for this book. We confront statements of presumed historical and scientific fact, not prejudices and biases, and we try to show, with history and science, that the presumptions are wrong: these statements are false.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How is it that Eurocentric historical statements which are not valid—that is, not confirmed by evidence and sometimes contradicted by evidence—are able to gain acceptance in European historical thought, and thereafter survive as accepted beliefs, hardly ever questioned, for generations and even centuries? This is a crucial problem for historiography and the history of ideas. To deal with it satisfactorily would take us well beyond the scope of this book, the main concern of which is empirical history and geography. Yet the problem cannot be avoided here. Libraries are full of scholarly studies that support the Eurocentric historical positions we are rejecting and refuting in this book. The sheer quantity of this work, and the respect that is properly owed to the scholars who assembled it, makes it certain that one cannot convincingly refute these positions with the factual arguments that can be presented in one book. No matter how persuasive these arguments may be, they cannot be placed, so to speak, on one arm of a balance and be expected to outweigh all of the accumulated writings of generations of European scholars, textbook writers, journalists, publicists, and the rest, heaped up on the other arm of the balance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, in this book, we must make a sort of two-level argument. The main level is the empirical one: What did happen inside and outside of Europe in the medieval and early modern centuries, and what connections did take place between the two sectors in that period? At the second level, we will look at some pertinent aspects of the history of Eurocentric ideas and the social context surrounding these ideas. This will be done mainly in the present chapter, which analyzes the nature and history of diffusionist ideas and concludes with a discussion of the process of social licensing by which these ideas gain currency and hegemony, and in Chapter 2, which rather systematically examines the most important arguments for European superiority prior to 1492 and to an extent discusses their historical genealogies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scholars today are aware, as most were not a few decades ago, that the empirical, factual beliefs of history, geography, and social science very often gain acceptance for reasons that have little to do with evidence. Scholarly beliefs are embedded in culture, and are shaped by culture. This helps to explain the paradox that Eurocentric historical beliefs are so strangely persistent; that old myths continue to be believed in long after the rationale for their acceptance has been forgotten or rejected (as in the arguments grounded in belief in the Old Testament as literal history); that newer candidate beliefs gain acceptance without supporting evidence if they are properly Eurocentric; and that, most generally, the Eurocentric body of beliefs as a whole retains its persuasiveness and power. But there is more to the matter than this. Eurocentrism is, as I will argue at great length in this book, a unique set of beliefs, and uniquely powerful, because it is the intellectual and scholarly rationale for one of the most powerful social interests of the European elite. I will argue not only that European colonialism initiated the development of Europe (and the underdevelopment of non-Europe) in 1492, but that since then the wealth obtained from non-Europe, through colonialism in its many forms, including neocolonial forms, has been a necessary and very important basis for the continued development of Europe and the continued power of Europe&#039;s elite. For this reason, the development of a body of Eurocentric beliefs, justifying and assisting Europe&#039;s colonial activities, has been, and still is, of very great importance. Eurocentrism is quite simply the colonizer&#039;s model of the world.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Eurocentrism is the colonizer&#039;s model of the world in a very literal sense: it is not merely a set of beliefs, a bundle of beliefs. It has evolved, through time, into a very finely sculpted model, a structured whole; in fact a single theory; in fact a super theory, a general framework for many smaller theories, historical, geographical, psychological, sociological, and philosophical. This supertheory is diffusionism.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Diffusionism ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When culture change takes place in a human community, that change can be the result of an invention that occurred within this community. Or it can be the result of a process in which the idea or its material effect (such as a tool, an art style, etc.) came into the community, having originated in some other community, in some other part of the landscape. The first sort of event is called &amp;quot;independent invention.&amp;quot; The second is called &amp;quot;diffusion.&amp;quot; Both processes occur everywhere. So far so good. But some scholars believe that independent invention is rather uncommon, and therefore not very important in culture change in the short run and cultural evolution in the long run. These scholars believe that most humans are imitators, not inventors. Therefore diffusion, in their view, is the main mechanism for change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The scholars who hold this view are called &amp;quot;diffusionists.&amp;quot; Whenever they encounter a cultural innovation in a particular region, they are inclined to look diligently for a process of diffusion into that region from somewhere else, somewhere the trait is already in use. For instance, the fact that the blow-gun is traditionally used among some Native American peoples as well as some Old World peoples is explained by diffusionists as being the result of the diffusion of this trait from the Old World to the New: the New World people, they believe, probably did not invent the trait for themselves. Why? Because they probably were not inventive enough to do so. A larger form of this same diffusionist argument claims that the great pre-Columbian civilizations of the Americas must be, ultimately, the result of transpacific or transatlantic diffusions, because these civilizing traits (agriculture, temple architecture, writing, and so on) were found much earlier in the Old World than the New, and Native Americans probably were not inventive enough to think up these things on their own. Some scholars, those who have been traditionally described as &amp;quot;extreme diffusionists,&amp;quot; believe that all civilization diffused from one original place on earth: some of them think that this original source of civilization was ancient Egypt, others place it somewhere in Central Asia (for instance, the Caucasus region—which scholars used to think was the original home of the &amp;quot;white&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Caucasian&amp;quot; race).&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See, for instance, Eliot Smith, &#039;&#039;The Diffusion of Culture&#039;&#039; (1933), Perry, &#039;&#039;The Primordial Ocean&#039;&#039; (1935), and Taylor, &#039;&#039;Environment and Nation&#039;&#039; (1945). Eliot Smith flatly asserts that the ancient diffusion process radiating mainly from Egypt and Phoenicia &amp;quot;continued for many centuries to play upon the Pacific littoral of America, where it is responsible for ... the remarkable Pre-Columbian civilizations&amp;quot; (quoted in Zwernemann, &#039;&#039;Culture History and African Anthropology&#039;&#039;, 1983, p. 15).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The debates between diffusionists and their opponents have been going on for more than a century in anthropology, geography, history, and all fields concerned about long-term, large-scale cultural evolution.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;On these matters, see Harris, &#039;&#039;The Rise of Anthropological Theory&#039;&#039; (1968) and Steward, &#039;&#039;Theory of Culture Change: The Methodology of Multilinear Evolution&#039;&#039; (1955).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; There are two basic criticisms of diffusionism.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Diffusionists hold much too sour a view of human ingenuity: people are in fact quite inventive and innovative, so the possibility that new culture traits will appear as a result of independent invention is actually vastly greater than diffusionists admit. So investigators should consider the possibility of independent invention in any given case, rather than assuming a priori that a diffusion process explains the situation at which one is looking.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Diffusionists are elitists. Every diffusion must start somewhere. An invention must take place in some one community before it begins to spread (diffuse) to others. If we accept the quite fundamental assumption that all human groups are truly human in their thinking apparatuses, and therefore broadly similar in their ability to invent and innovate—this assumption is known as &amp;quot;the psychic unity of mankind,&amp;quot; a nineteenth-century label that is quaint but still in use—we would expect inventions to occur everywhere across the human landscape.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Koepping, &#039;&#039;Adolf Bastian and the Psychic Unity of Mankind&#039;&#039; (1983), Stocking &#039;&#039;Race, Culture, and Evolution&#039;&#039; (1968), and Harris, &#039;&#039;The Rise of Anthropological Theory&#039;&#039; (1968).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; But most diffusionists claim that only certain select communities are inventive. In other words, most communities change only as a result of receiving new traits by diffusion, but some places are uniquely inventive and are the original sources of the new traits. The people of these communities are more inventive than are people elsewhere. The psychic unity of mankind is denied: some people, or cultures, are simply smarter than others. They are permanent centers of invention and innovation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is spatial elitism. If we make a map of this landscape, we find that it has a permanent center and a permanent periphery. For the &amp;quot;extreme diffusionists&amp;quot; the entire world was mapped out this way, at least for the pre-Christian era: the permanent center of invention and innovation was thought to be Egypt, or the &amp;quot;Ancient Aryan Homeland&amp;quot; (a mythical place located somewhere in western Asia or southeastern Europe), or the Caucasus, or some other supposed navel of the ancient world. But the charge was leveled more broadly: diffusionists as a group tended to imagine that some few places, or some one place, was the primary source from which culture spread to all the other places.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It should be evident that diffusionism is very nicely suited to the idea that the world has an Inside and an Outside. In fact, diffusionism was the most fully developed scientific (or pseudoscientific) rationale for the idea of Inside and Outside. That idea, as we saw, postulates one permanent world center for new ideas; cultural evolution everywhere else results, broadly, from the diffusion of new ideas from this permanent center. This is simply the diffusionists&#039; map on a world scale.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We come now to a fascinating anomaly. The critics of diffusionism, in the nineteenth century and even in the twentieth century, failed entirely to grasp the full implications of their critique. None of them denied that the world has an Inside and an Outside. While criticizing the diffusionists for their rejection of the principle of the psychic unity of mankind, the antidiffusionists nonetheless believed that cultural evolution has been centered in Europe, and they therefore accepted the idea—explicitly or implicitly—that Europeans are more inventive, more innovative than everyone else.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Often the antidiffusionist camp was labeled the &amp;quot;cultural evolutionist&amp;quot; camp, and the debate as a whole was labeled &amp;quot;diffusionism versus evolutionism.&amp;quot; But, as I argue here, evolutionists were to some extent diffusionists and diffusionists were to some extent evolutionists. Moreover, I want to use the term &amp;quot;cultural evolution&amp;quot; in this book in a much broader and much less controversial sense, as indicating merely the search for explanation in larger questions of historical and cultural change. A problem that is &amp;quot;historical&amp;quot; becomes a problem of &amp;quot;cultural evolution&amp;quot; when we ask, broadly, &amp;quot;why?&amp;quot; Some scholars, of course, are not comfortable with this usage of the phrase &amp;quot;cultural evolution.&amp;quot; For some it carries baggage of economic determinism or environmental determinism or technological determinism, or it signifies the notion of an invariant sequence of cultural stages through which all human groups must pass—but I mean none of that. Most cultural geographers use the phrase &amp;quot;cultural evolution&amp;quot; just about as I use it here.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; This is made explicit when they write about recent centuries, and particularly when they discuss the modernizing, missionarizing effect of European colonialism. It is also implicit in their writings about ancient times. These anthropologists, archaeologists, geographers, and historians of the second half of the nineteenth century and the present century do not focus on the Bible Lands, and their scholarly writings do not display any acceptance of religious assumptions. Yet Inside and Outside are explicit. They write about the Near Eastern origins of agriculture, of urbanization, and so forth. They then move smoothly to arguments about European origins of most of the rest of civilization.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
My basic argument is this: all scholarship is diffusionist insofar as it axiomatically accepts the Inside-Outside model, the notion that the world as a whole has one permanent center from which culture-changing ideas tend to originate, and a vast periphery that changes as a result (mainly) of diffusion from that single center. I do not argue that the formal theory of diffusionism, as it was advanced and defended by scholars in the nineteenth and early twentieth centuries, explains the Inside-Outside model, the mythology of Europe&#039;s permanent geographical superiority and priority. Rather, the theory developed as a result of broad social forces in Europe, and entered the world of scholarship from outside of that world—from European society. Diffusionist scholars were, in essence, elaborating and codifying this theory in the realms of scholarship within which they worked: realms like archaeology, world history, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before we proceed further I must post a warning: the word &amp;quot;diffusionist&amp;quot; has some ambiguities, and these should not be allowed to bring confusion into the present discussion. In any given debate as to whether a novel trait in a certain place was invented by the people of that place or was received from elsewhere by diffusion, those scholars who take the latter view are supporters of a &amp;quot;diffusionist&amp;quot; position, that is, they favor the specific hypothesis of diffusion as against that of independent invention. This does not necessarily mean that they have a general propensity to favor diffusion as a causal formula. Sometimes the specific issue can be a very major problem. For instance, some scholars argue that important West African culture traits diffused across the Atlantic to America before 1492. Whether they are right or wrong in this matter, they are not arguing any sort of Eurocentric diffusionism, nor do they necessarily favor diffusion over independent invention in other contexts. But most scholars who are consistent diffusionists are also Eurocentric diffusionists.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now I will describe Eurocentric diffusionism in somewhat formal terms as a scientific theory. That theory has changed through time, but its basic structure has remained essentially unchanged. I will describe what can be called the classical (essentially nineteenth-century) form of the theory, leaving until a later section of this chapter a discussion of the not very dissimilar modern form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Diffusionism is grounded, as we saw, in two axioms: (1) Most human communities are uninventive. (2) A few human communities (or places, or cultures) are inventive and thus remain the permanent centers of culture change, of progress. At the global scale, this gives us a model of a world with a single center—roughly, Greater Europe—and a single periphery; an Inside and an Outside. There are a number of variants of this two-sector model. Sometimes the two sectors are treated as sharply distinct, with a definite boundary between them. (This form of the model is the familiar one. It is sometimes called the &amp;quot;Center-Periphery Model of the World.&amp;quot;) Another form sees the world in a slightly different way: there is a clear and definite center, but outside of it there is gradual change, gradual decline in degree of civilization or progressiveness or innovativeness, as one moves outward into the periphery. Another variant depicts the world as divided into zones, each representing a level of modernity or civilization or development.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Both forms are sometimes combined; for instance, in the nineteenth century northwestern Europe was considered (by northwestern Europeans) to be absolutely civilized, Africa absolutely uncivilized, and all other areas (of the Eastern Hemisphere) somewhere in between. These matters are discussed later in this book.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The classical division was one with three great bands: &amp;quot;civilization,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;barbarism,&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;savagery.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basic model of diffusionism in its classical form depicts a world divided into the prime two sectors, one of which (Greater Europe, Inside) invents and progresses, the other of which (non-Europe, Outside) receives progressive innovations by diffusion from Inside. From this base, diffusionism asserts seven fundamental arguments about the two sectors and the interactions between them:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Europe naturally progresses and modernizes. That is, the natural state of affairs in the European sector (Inside) is to invent, innovate, change things for the better. Europe changes; Europe is &amp;quot;historical.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Non-Europe (Outside) naturally remains stagnant, unchanging, traditional, and backward. Invention, innovation, and change are not the natural state of affairs, and not to be expected, in non-European countries. Non-Europe does not change; non-Europe is &amp;quot;ahistorical.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Propositions 3 and 4 explain the difference between the two sectors:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The basic cause of European progress is some intellectual or spiritual factor, something characteristic of the &amp;quot;European mind,&amp;quot; the &amp;quot;European spirit,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;Western Man,&amp;quot; etc., something that leads to creativity, imagination, invention, innovation, rationality, and a sense of honor or ethics: &amp;quot;European values.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. The reason for non-Europe&#039;s nonprogress is a lack of this same intellectual or spiritual factor. This proposition asserts, in essence, that the landscape of the non-European world is empty, or partly so, of &amp;quot;rationality,&amp;quot; that is, of ideas and proper spiritual values. There are a number of variations of this proposition in classical (mainly late-nineteenth-century) diffusionism. Two are quite important:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a. For much of the non-European world, this proposition asserts an emptiness also of basic cultural institutions, and even an emptiness of people. This can be called the diffusionist myth of emptiness, and it has particular connection to settler colonialism (the physical movement of Europeans into non-European regions, displacing or eliminating the native inhabitants). This proposition of emptiness makes a series of claims, each layered upon the others: (i) A non-European region is empty or nearly empty of people (hence settlement by Europeans does not displace any native peoples). (ii) The region is empty of settled population: the inhabitants are mobile, nomadic, wanderers (hence European settlement violates no political sovereignty, since wanderers make no claim to territory). (iii) The cultures of this region do not possess an understanding of private property—that is, the region is empty of property rights and claims (hence colonial occupiers can freely give land to settlers since no one owns it). The final layer, applied to all of the Outside sector, is an emptiness of intellectual creativity and spiritual values, sometimes described by Europeans (as, for instance, by Max Weber) as an absence of &amp;quot;rationality.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Max Weber&#039;s notion of &amp;quot;European rationality&amp;quot; is discussed in Chapter 2.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b. Some non-European regions, in some historical epochs, are assumed to have been &amp;quot;rational&amp;quot; in some ways and to some degree. Thus, for instance, the Middle East during biblical times was rational. China was somewhat rational for a certain period in its history.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The varying conceptions of China, and also India, as semirational or intermittently rational or rational in some ways but not in others are discussed in Chapters 2 and 3.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Other regions, always including Africa, are unqualifiedly lacking in rationality.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. The normal, natural way that the non-European part of the world progresses, changes for the better, modernizes, and so on, is by the diffusion (or spread) of innovative, progressive ideas from Europe, which flow into it as air flows into a vacuum. This diffusion may take the form of the spread of European ideas as such, or the spread of new products in which the European ideas are concretized, or the spread (migration, settlement) of Europeans themselves, bearers of these new and innovative ideas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Proposition 5, you will observe, is a simple justification for European colonialism. It asserts that colonialism, including settler colonialism, brings civilization to non-Europe; is in fact the natural way that the non-European world advances out of its stagnation, backwardness, traditionalism.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But under colonialism, wealth is drawn out of the non-European colonies and enriches the European colonizers. In Eurocentric diffusionism this too is seen as a normal relationship between Inside and Outside:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Compensating in part for the diffusion of civilizing ideas from Europe to non-Europe, is a counterdiffusion of material wealth from non-Europe to Europe, consisting of plantation products, minerals, art objects, labor, and so on. Nothing can fully compensate the Europeans for their gift of civilization to the colonies, so the exploitation of colonies and colonial peoples is morally justified. (Colonialism gives more than it receives.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And there is still another form of interaction between Inside and Outside. It is the opposite of the diffusion of civilizing ideas from Europe to non-Europe (proposition 5):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Since Europe is advanced and non-Europe is backward, any ideas that diffuse into Europe must be ancient, savage, atavistic, uncivilized, evil—black magic, vampires, plagues, &amp;quot;the bogeyman,&amp;quot; and the like.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The &amp;quot;bogeyman&amp;quot; refers to the Buginese, a Malay people who fought fiercely against the Europeans and so were stigmatized in this way. The most famous fictional vampire, Count Dracula, came to England from Outside (a barbarous mountain region on the frontier of the Turkish empire).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Associated with this conception is the diffusionist myth which has been called &amp;quot;the theory of our contemporary ancestors.&amp;quot; It asserts that, as we move farther and farther away from civilized Europe, we encounter people who, successively, reflect earlier and earlier epochs of history and culture. Thus the so-called &amp;quot;stone-age people&amp;quot; of the Antipodes are likened to the Paleolithic Europeans. The argument here is that diffusion works in successive waves, spreading outward, such that the farther outward we go the farther backward we go in terms of cultural evolution. But conversely, there is the possibility that these ancient, atavistic, etc., traits will counterdiffuse back into the civilized core, in the form of ancient, magical, evil things like black magic, Dracula, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The main oppositions between the two sectors can be shown in tabular form. The following contrast-sets are quite typical in nineteenth-century diffusionist thought:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Characteristic of Core !! Characteristic of Periphery&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Inventiveness || Imitativeness&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Rationality, intellect || Irrationality, emotion, instinct&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Abstract thought || Concrete thought&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Theoretical reasoning || Empirical, practical reasoning&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Mind || Body, matter&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Discipline || Spontaneity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Adulthood || Childhood&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Sanity || Insanity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Science || Sorcery&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Progress || Stagnation&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What I have described thus far is, of course, a highly simplified version of the diffusionist world model. We will add qualifications and modifications as we proceed, and in particular we will see that there are significant differences between the classical form of diffusionism and the modern form of the model.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So much for what diffusionism is. What does it do? In this book I will show in some detail how diffusionism has shaped our views of history, both European and non-European. Later in the present chapter and in Chapter 2 I will show some of the concrete influences of diffusionism on theories outside of history, some in psychology, some in geography, some in economics, some in sociology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But this discussion will be more meaningful after a different question has been addressed. This is the question of how and why diffusionism became such a foundation theory in Western thought. To this question we now turn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Colonizer&#039;s Model ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Perhaps all civilizations have a somewhat ethnocentric view of themselves in relation to their neighbors, believing themselves better, brighter, and bolder than every other human community and constructing empirical theories to explain why this is the case, and to explain away embarrassments. Perhaps we would find the seeds of diffusionism in all these beliefs: the idea that progress is natural and calls for no explanation in &amp;quot;our&amp;quot; society but is unnatural or at any rate, less impressive in &amp;quot;their&amp;quot; societies; the idea that &amp;quot;they&amp;quot; progress by borrowing from &amp;quot;us&amp;quot; and imitating &amp;quot;our&amp;quot; ideas; and so on. But this does not add up to the theory of diffusionism, nor is it very important for an understanding of diffusionism. Diffusionism as I have been discussing it is a product of modern European colonialism. It is the colonizer&#039;s model of the world.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Origins ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Diffusionism became a fully formed scientific theory during the nineteenth century. The origins of the theory, however, go back to the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries in Western Europe, where a belief system was being constructed to give some coherence to the new reality of change within Europe and colonial expansion outside Europe. The conception of a two-sector world, the diffusionist distinction between Inside and Outside, emerged from a very old conception of Christendom and the Roman imperial legacy (which meant, for most of western and southern Europe, a common source of legitimacy for the political and landholding elites). But it is certainly not true that medieval Europeans saw Christendom as a sharply defined space, naturally in conflict with surrounding societies. Nor did medieval European thinkers have many illusions about the relative power, wealth, and technological prowess of Christendom as compared with Islamic and Oriental civilizations. But certainly they had some idea, not of a collective identity, but of a distinction between the lands inhabited by Christians, given divine guidance and protection for this reason, and the lands of non-Christians. Nevertheless, it was only after 1492 that Inside acquired a sharp geographical definition, less as a result of medieval ideas than of colonialism in the early modern period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
European ideas about European progressiveness, Europe&#039;s somehow inevitable progress, are also essentially postmedieval. Obviously, these ideas were being discussed during the Middle Ages, and certainly there was hope, prayer, and struggle for betterment, but medieval folk tended rather to see their society as being in a relative state of equilibrium; their religion spoke of the Fall, and of the need to accept existing conditions (and rules), while the reality of medieval life (particularly fourteenth- and fifteenth-century life) was not one of perceptible forward progress for the mass of people. But European thinkers of the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries were coming to conceive of history—their own history—as a progressive process. Real progress (or at any rate accelerating change) indeed was taking place in the communities occupied by these thinkers, and the climate of ideas was changing in a complex but close association with the rise of capitalism, the expansion of opportunity for individuals in many regions, and the like.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One of the main problems confronted by these early modern thinkers, both secular and religious, was the need to establish a belief system, an ideology, that would convince conservative sectors of the European community to accept the idea that progress is inevitable, natural, and desirable, and thus to accept changes in the legal system which would permit more rapid and widespread capital accumulation, to persuade the landowning classes to treat land as a commodity and invest their real holdings in risk enterprises, to introduce laws and practices to mobilize labor for emerging capitalist activities at home and abroad, to persuade Europeans in general to accept the painful changes being imposed on them, and so on. Equally important was the need to explain progress in ways that accorded with religion. This was done by seeing God&#039;s guidance of (European) history, and by conceptualizing progressive innovations as being products of the European mind or spirit and thus ultimately products of the Christian soul. (We will go into these matters later in this book.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus emerged the conception of Inside as being naturally progressive (diffusionist proposition 1), and as being progressive because of the workings of an intellectual or spiritual force, &amp;quot;European rationality&amp;quot; (diffusionist proposition 3). By the eighteenth century it had become the practice in secular writings to discuss causality in history and philosophy without referencing God and Scriptures, but the basic model of European progress as natural, as rational, remained unchanged in its essence; became, indeed, much fortified.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;On the history of the idea of progress in European thought, see, for instance, G. H. Mead, &#039;&#039;Movements of Thought in the Nineteenth Century&#039;&#039; (1936), Toulmin and Goodfield, &#039;&#039;The Discovery of Time&#039;&#039; (1965), Nisbet, &#039;&#039;History of the Idea of Progress&#039;&#039; (1980), and Bowler, &#039;&#039;The Invention of Progress&#039;&#039; (1989). It is true that the idea of progress as the normal condition was doubted by some thinkers during the nineteenth century (and especially in opposition to the idea of biological evolution), but this was a minor and intermittent countercurrent. See Stocking, &#039;&#039;Race, Culture, and Evolution&#039;&#039; (1987) and Bowler, &#039;&#039;The Invention of Progress&#039;&#039; (1989).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In none of this thought was there any real suspicion that non-European civilizations might have had much to do with the earlier, medieval progress of Christian Europe, or much to do with its modern (sixteenth- to eighteenth-century) progress except in the purely passive role of provider of labor, commodities, and land for settlement, and, marginally, in some traits of technology and art. Nor was there very much awareness that colonialism and its windfalls—inflow of capital, intensification of intra- as well as extra-European trade, increase in employment opportunities in mercantile centers and in the colonial world, and much more—was an important cause of European progress. Then, as later, the European conception of its own dynamic society attributed dynamism not to external causes but to internal causes, and to God. This relatively constant blindness to the importance of colonialism, historically and even today, will claim our attention at various points in this book.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The development of a conception of Outside proceeded in a more complicated way. The sixteenth-century Spanish debates about the nature of New World Indians—Are they human? Can they receive the True Religion and, if so, can they be made slaves?—was a crucial part of the early formulation of diffusionism, because it entailed an attempt to conceptualize European expansion and explain why it was, somehow, natural, desirable, and profitable, and to conceptualize the societies that were being conquered and exploited, explaining why it was, again, natural for them to succumb and to provide Europeans with labor, land, and products.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Huddleston, &#039;&#039;Origins of the American Indians: European Concepts, 1492-1729&#039;&#039; (1967), Williams, &#039;&#039;The American Indian in Western Legal Thought&#039;&#039; (1990); Hulme, &#039;&#039;Colonial Encounters: Europe and the Native Caribbean 1492-1797&#039;&#039; (1992); Gossett, &#039;&#039;Race: The History of an Idea in America&#039;&#039; (1963).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; European views of New World peoples were formed rather quickly because in that region the basic pattern of colonialism emerged quickly. The enterprise was immensely profitable from the very beginning, from the first great shipments of gold in the early sixteenth century (see Chapter 4). Resistance was rapidly overcome in Spanish colonies and surviving Americans were rather quickly forced to submit to colonial exploitation. (I refer here to the major centers of early colonialism, such as central Mexico, the Greater Antilles, and the Andes.) In the next century the profitability of slave plantations in Brazil and the Antilles, and the fact that African slaves could, in spite of their resistance, be forced to work and produce profit for Europeans, added further to the conception of Outside: these people were naturally inferior to Europeans, naturally less brave, less freedom loving, less rational, and so on, and progress for them depended on acceptance of European domination, hence diffusion. In sum, the New World experience, with Native Americans, Africans, mestizos, and mulattos, in areas of mining, large-scale estate agriculture, commercial plantations, and so forth, produced the kernel of the diffusionist propositions (2, 4, and 5), which assert that non-Europe naturally depends on Europe for progress and this is due to a lack of the intellectual and spiritual qualities that Europeans possessed. It also produced the diffusionist proposition (6) that European expansion is natural and leads naturally to the transfer of wealth from non-Europe to Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But these activities were taking place only in the New World and the slave-trading coasts of Africa. The civilizations of Sudanic, southern, and eastern Africa were not conquered by Europeans until (in most cases) the nineteenth century; the Ottoman Empire was not only formidable throughout this period, but was indeed expanding its territorial control in southeastern Europe at the same time that Iberians were conquering the New World. And the other great empires did not begin to succumb to colonialism before the mid-eighteenth century: European activities in nearly all parts of Asia and Africa were mainly matters of trade, with dominance of long-distance maritime trade, small territorial footholds here and there on certain coasts, and the like (see Chapter 4). Thus, in the sixteenth, seventeenth, and eighteenth centuries, the diffusionist model of Outside which had been applied to Americans and to the groups of Africans transported to America as slaves could not be applied to the civilizations of the Old World.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For these Eastern Hemisphere civilizations a limited and somewhat tentative form of the diffusionist model was accepted during this period. These civilizations were indisputably rich and technically advanced. Rationality in the sense of inventiveness was clearly present, or at least had been present in the past, when the great and impressive innovations (technology, architecture, banking, and so on) had occurred. What these civilizations lacked was the moral component of rationality, because, fundamentally, they were not Christians. These were &amp;quot;Oriental despotisms,&amp;quot; societies in which there was, naturally, cruelty, lack of freedom, lack of a decent life for the common people (while the elite wallowed in decadence and sin), etc. (We discuss this concept at some length in Chapter 2.) The moral failing necessarily led to an inability of these societies to progress in the present, the era when Europe is naturally progressing, although Europeans could not deny, even though they found it most puzzling, that these despotic civilizations had, indisputably, progressed in the past. (At times the puzzle was resolved by declaring that they had progressed in pre-Christian times, and had lost the Grace of God through having refused to accept Christianity.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;At times the notion was advanced that these civilizations had somehow evolved in antediluvian times and had not been wiped out in the Flood (see, for example, Keightley, &#039;&#039;Outlines of History&#039;&#039;, 1849). Haskel (&#039;&#039;Chronology and Universal History&#039;&#039;, 1848, p. 9) speculates that Noah migrated to China where he or his descendants founded the Chinese monarchy. &amp;quot;The early improvement and populousness of the east, seems to favor this idea.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;) Only in the nineteenth century, with the rapid colonization of India, Southeast Asia, interior Africa, and (as a kind of collective colony) China, did the diffusionist propositions about Outside, and about the natural relations between Inside and Outside, become generalized to all of non-Europe. It was in this late period, I think, that the final diffusionist proposition, the notion of counterdiffusion of evil and savagery and disease from Outside to Inside, become fully developed. The bogeyman (from the Malay Buginese people) came from Outside. So too did Dracula, whose homeland lay on the edge of Asia.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;From the mid-nineteenth century or perhaps earlier, the literature on the occult, on ghosts and monsters, and the like, tended to focus on extra-European origins or homes or sources of the witches, monsters, demons, zombies, walking mummies, evil spells (&amp;quot;black magic&amp;quot;), artifacts with supernatural powers, and so on, all of which have a tendency to diffuse into Europe as a kind of counterdiffusion, an undertow beneath European expansionism. See Brantlinger, &#039;&#039;Rule of Darkness: British Literature and Imperialism&#039;&#039; (1988).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Classical Diffusionism ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The nineteenth century was the classical era for colonialism, and the era when Eurocentric diffusionism assumed what I will call its classical form. After the Napoleonic Wars colonialism expanded and intensified with remarkable rapidity. Between 1810 and 1860 or thereabouts Europeans subdued most of Asia, settled most of North America, and began the penetration of Africa. Between 1860 and the start of World War I, the rest of Asia and Africa was occupied and the profits from colonialism, the value of capital accumulated in Asia, Africa, and Latin America, along with the riches flowing from newly settled areas of European settlement, expanded enormously. In the latter part of the century the rate of growth in colonial agricultural enterprise exceeded that of industrial development on a world scale, and other forms of development, such as the mining of nonprecious metals, were becoming important for the first time.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See W. A. Lewis, ed., &#039;&#039;Tropical development, 1880-1913&#039;&#039; (1970).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; There is profound disagreement as to how important all of this was for European social and intellectual evolution in this period. I will enter this debate in Chapter 4, but for the present it is sufficient to assert that the overall effect of European expansion, through colonialism in the narrow sense, through settlement, and through semicolonial economic dominance, was profound enough to create a very large intellectual model, the classical form of diffusionism.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By 1870 or thereabouts there was broad agreement among European thinkers about the basic nature and dynamics of the world. Few doubted that biological and social evolution—that is, progress—were fundamental truths, although evolutionary processes were more often explained in religious or metaphysical ways than in naturalistic ways, as in Darwin&#039;s theory.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Bowler, &#039;&#039;The Invention of Progress&#039;&#039; (1989), Stocking, &#039;&#039;Victorian Anthropology&#039;&#039; (1987), Mandelbaum, &#039;&#039;History, Man and Reason&#039;&#039; (1971).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It seemed clear that Europeans were naturally to experience permanent social evolution, that this had been God&#039;s or Nature&#039;s plan throughout history. Some historical thinkers described the general process in holistic terms, as the evolution of society or the state; others treated it in reductionist (in a sense, psychological) terms as an intellectual ascent, a matter of the steady advance of human reason, with capitalism, industry, and so on, treated as products of mind; but many thinkers (among them Herbert Spencer) saw no opposition between the social and intellectual models, treating progress as a kind of flowing stream, which carried with it an evolution both of society and of mind.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Spencer, &#039;&#039;The Man Versus the State&#039;&#039; (1969). The complex interplay between individualistic and holistic theories of historical progress during the nineteenth century is discussed in G. H. Mead, &#039;&#039;Movements of Thought in the Nineteenth Century&#039;&#039; (1936) and Mandelbaum, &#039;&#039;History, Man and Reason&#039;&#039; (1971). I try to show in Blaut, &#039;&#039;The National Question: Decolonizing the Theory of Nationalism&#039;&#039; (1987b) how most theories of nationality and national evolution emerge from one or the other of these intellectual streams, one essentially Kantian and psychologistic, the other essentially Romantic and Hegelian.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Thus by the 1870s at the latest the central diffusionist proposition, the notion of natural, continuous, internally generated progress in the European (or west European) core, was very firmly in place. Its truth was no longer really questioned by mainstream thinkers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There was, at the same time, a convergence of views about the nature and historical dynamics of the non-European world. By the middle of the nineteenth century the biblical time scale had been rather definitively rejected (though not yet in all history textbooks), and it was no longer necessary to argue that differences between Europeans and all other cultures had to have evolved in the space of a few thousand years unless they had been there from the start, unless, that is, polygenists were right and some human groups had been created separately from, and perhaps much earlier than, Adam and Eve. This gave room for wide-ranging theorization about the way cultural differences had evolved. Paralleling this change was a general rejection of the literal biblical beliefs about the original nature of human society. Culture was now (after midcentury) quite generally seen as a product of evolution from very primitive beginnings, exemplified in the notion of a primordial &amp;quot;stone age.&amp;quot; (According to the Old Testament, humans had possessed advanced technology, including agriculture and the use of metals, in the days of Genesis.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The reasons for the rapid crystallization of beliefs about non-Europeans are complex, but the most important underlying reason was the progress of colonialism. This produced two effects in particular. One was a flood of information about non-European people and places, such that, for the first time, a coherent—though highly distorted—description could be given in the European literature about non-Europeans, both civilized and &amp;quot;savage.&amp;quot; The second reason was a practical, political and economic interest in proving certain things to be true, and other things untrue, about the extra-European world and its people. The two processes were tightly interconnected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Colonialism in its various forms, direct and indirect, was an immensely profitable business and considerable sums of money were invested in efforts to learn as much as possible about the people and resources of the regions to be conquered, dominated, and perhaps settled, and to learn as much as possible about the regions already conquered in order to facilitate the administration and economic exploitation of these regions. The nineteenth century was the age of scientific exploration—Darwin in the Beagle, Livingstone in Africa, Powell in the Rockies, and so on—but the sources of support for these efforts tended to be institutions with very practical interest in the regions being studied. Paralleling all of this was the great surge of missionary activity that supported some exploration (including Livingstone&#039;s) but most crucially led to the gathering of important, detailed, information about ethnography, languages, and geography by hundreds of dedicated missionaries throughout the non-European world. Also of great importance were the detailed reports that colonial administrators everywhere were required to submit, reports providing information about native legal systems, land tenure rules, production, and much more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of what was learned about non-Europeans came from these sources. It is not necessary for me to dwell on the fact that the people who supplied the information were Europeans with very definite points of view, cultural, political, and religious lenses that forced them to see &amp;quot;natives&amp;quot; in ways that were highly distorted. A missionary might have great love and respect for the people among whom he or she worked but could not be expected to believe that the culture and mind of these non-Christians was on a par with that of Christian Europeans. A colonial administrator not only had cultural distortions but usually worked with economic interests and classes (European planters, mining corporations, zamindars, and so on) and consciously or unconsciously put forward views about common people, and about resources, that reflected the biases and concrete interests of these elite groups. Strictly speaking, missionaries and colonial administrators were in the business of diffusing Europe to non-Europe. Thus the entire corpus of information about non-Europeans that was gathered in this process has certain quite definite distortions. It was immensely valuable in spite of this fact, but the plain fact is that theories constructed from this information—and this includes the great bulk of nineteenth-century anthropological, geographic, and politicoeconomic theories about non-Europeans—are systematically distorted. The distortions are, broadly, those of diffusionism.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But colonial interest added an additional kind of distortion, a matter of shaping knowledge into theories that would prove useful for colonialism. Scientific and legal theories were constructed in general by policymakers and by intellectuals who were either themselves policymakers or were close to policy. (In England, for instance, an extraordinary percentage of the influential historians, social theorists, even novelists and poets, had direct connections with the East India Company, the Colonial Office, and other private and public agencies of empire.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Among them: Malthus, J. S. Mill, T. Macauley, and Thackeray. See Brantlinger, &#039;&#039;Rule of Darkness: British Literature and Imperialism, 1830-1914&#039;&#039; (1987). Also see Williams, &#039;&#039;British Historians and the West Indies&#039;&#039; (1966) and Said, &#039;&#039;Orientalism&#039;&#039; (1979).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;) I include under the label &amp;quot;theory&amp;quot; a wide range of general arguments, including the larger constructs of history.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the most general level, intellectuals were shaping theories of social evolution which were in essence demonstrations that the postulates of diffusionism are natural law. As we noticed previously, the nineteenth-century debates between those called &amp;quot;evolutionists&amp;quot; and those called &amp;quot;diffusionists&amp;quot; were essentially debates between two versions of diffusionism. A great range of theories in both camps were constructs aimed to assist in colonial activity, and to develop and strengthen the doctrine that European colonialism is scientifically natural, a matter of the inevitable working out of social laws of human progress (development of the family, law, the state, etc.). Also at the very general level, seminal works of the middle and later nineteenth century on ancient and modern history presented various sophisticated diffusionist ideas, mainly about the reasons for and the facts of Europe&#039;s natural and persistent progress compared with other peoples, those now being colonized. These historical constructs were important in building support for colonial activities among European populations; and later, as colonial educational systems appeared, for convincing the natives that colonialism was natural, inevitable, and progressive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Chapter 2 I will discuss a number of these diffusionist theories which emerged, or became concrete, in the nineteenth century in the complex association of scholarship and colonialism, focusing on those theories that today underlie the myth of Europe&#039;s historical and cultural superiority. Here I need only show how classical diffusionism arose in tandem with classical colonialism, and for this purpose a pair of representative theories can be singled out by way of illustration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One such theory was the postulate that non-Europeans have not developed concepts of private property in important material resources such as land. The theory asserted that private property emerged from ancient European roots, notably Roman land law and various putative Germanic traits relating to individualism; that other civilizations, lacking this history (and, by implication, lacking the mental and cultural qualities associated with this history), remained in a stage of evolution in which true individual ownership could not be fully conceptualized. These people, therefore, needed to have capitalism imposed on them. In fact, the theory was developed mainly by lawyers and administrators in the European colonial corporations and colonial offices, and had one very concrete purpose: to establish the legal basis for expropriating land from colonized peoples, on the fiction that the colonized had no property rights to this land because they had no concept of property rights in land.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Thapar, &#039;&#039;Ancient Indian Social History: Some Interpretations&#039;&#039; (1978) and &amp;quot;Ideology and the Interpretation of Early Indian History&amp;quot; (1982), and B. Chandra, &amp;quot;Karl Marx, His Theories of Asian Societies, and Colonial Rule&amp;quot; (1981). We return to this issue in Chapter 2.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Yet the theory became essentially an axiom in nineteenth-century intellectual thought. Even Karl Marx accepted it, and doing so produced a large theory about the evolution of private property—a major part of his theory about the origins of capitalism—in which it was argued (or rather assumed) that this evolution was peculiarly a European phenomenon, and that colonialism, for all its horrors, did at least bring about the diffusion of capitalism to the non-European world, a necessary though painful process for the non-Europeans. Thus even Marxism, perhaps the most antisystemic doctrine to come out of nineteenth-century Europe, was strongly shaped by diffusionism.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See in particular Marx&#039;s article, &amp;quot;The British Rule in India&amp;quot; (1979). In later work, Marx and Engels adopted a much more negative opinion about colonialism, developing to some extent the idea of colonial underdevelopment: see Blaut, &#039;&#039;The National Question: Decolonizing the Theory of Nationalism&#039;&#039; (1987b) for a discussion.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A larger form of this doctrine, the more general &amp;quot;myth of emptiness,&amp;quot; the diffusionist idea that a colonized or colonizable territory was empty of population, or was populated only by wandering nomads, people with no fixed abode and therefore no claim to territory, or lacked people with a concept of political sovereignty or economic property, had similar colonialist functions, and arose in a similar way. The same is true of a closely related doctrine, the theory of &amp;quot;Oriental despotism&amp;quot; (older in point of origin, but developed fully in nineteenth-century diffusionist thought), according to which non-Europeans lack the concept of freedom, hence suffer despotic governments that stifle all progress—until Europeans bring freedom to them in the form of colonialism (which ironically is the purest negation of freedom). These and other theories that arose from classical diffusionism are still employed today to reinforce the myth of Europe&#039;s historical and cultural superiority; we will discuss them in Chapter 2, which seeks to refute this myth.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The era of classical diffusionism was the era of classical colonialism, the era when European expansion was so swift and so profitable that European superiority seemed almost to be a law of nature. Diffusionism, in its essence, codified this apparent fact into a general theory about European historical, cultural, and psychological superiority, non-European inferiority, and the inevitability and absolute righteousness of the process by which Europe and its traits diffused to non-Europe. Diffusionism then ramified the general theory into innumerable empirical beliefs in all the human sciences, in philosophy, in the arts.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Chapter 2.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; And it applied these beliefs in particular cases, explaining and justifying the individual acts of conquest, of repression, of exploitation. All of it was right, rational, and natural.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Modern Diffusionism ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The nineteenth century, or more precisely the interval between the defeat of Napoleon and the beginning of World War I, was a time of relative peace and relative progress for Europeans. Colonialism fueled this process with resources, markets, cheap labor, and lands for settlement by Europeans, and colonialism resolved many of Europe&#039;s internal contradictions in the process. The idea that progress in European civilization and expansion of that civilization in space were different dimensions of the same historical force was the dominant idea of the time, and this was, of course, the central notion of diffusionism.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But all of this changed early in the twentieth century. The world is finite in size, so spatial expansion had to come to an end, and by 1900 all of the non-European world had been carved up into colonies, semicolonial spheres of control, and territories of settlement. This change of conditions produced a change in thought: the essential problem now was exploitation and the maintenance of control in the face of native resistance. Thus it became a question not of expansion but of equilibrium. At the same time tensions among European powers—some of the tensions were connected to conflicts over colonies—boiled over into general war among the European powers. Soon after World War I came the Great Depression. Then, immediately, World War II. Between 1914 and 1945, then, the minds of European intellectuals were focused not on the idea of progress and expansion, but on the question of how to prevent disaster: how to maintain, or return to, peace and prosperity. The code word was &amp;quot;normalcy.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The central notion of diffusionism did not fit this intellectual mood. The prevailing doctrines of this period were theories of stasis, of equilibrium, not theories of expansion. Economics dwelled on Keynesian ideas of equilibrium. In geography, the doctrine known as &amp;quot;regionalism&amp;quot; prevailed, the idea that the various parts of the world are stable, coherent, well-demarcated regions and tend to remain that way. Anthropology was emphasizing two equilibrium theories: &amp;quot;functionalism,&amp;quot; a model of social systems (and cultures) as stable and self-correcting systems, and &amp;quot;cultural relativism,&amp;quot; a doctrine that declared in essence that each culture has intrinsic worth. Anthropologists of course worked primarily among colonized peoples, and these two theories were closely integrated with colonial policy, mainly as a basis for policies designed to prevent native unrest while allowing European exploitation of land, minerals, and labor.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Asad, &#039;&#039;Anthropology and the Colonial Encounter&#039;&#039; (1975), and Temu and Swai, &#039;&#039;Historians and Africanist History&#039;&#039; (1981).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Thus equilibrium doctrines were very widespread, probably dominant, in European thought throughout most of the first half of the twentieth century.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Diffusionism, in this period, seems to have gone into a partial eclipse. History and geography textbooks were still sublimely diffusionist, in an essentially nineteenth-century mood, emphasizing the beneficial spread of civilization to Africa, Asia, and Latin America (&amp;quot;where our bananas come from&amp;quot;), the teleological rise of &amp;quot;the West,&amp;quot; and so on. In social thought, the doctrines of &amp;quot;extreme diffusionism&amp;quot; (discussed earlier) were still being advanced, and still debated.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Important examples are Eliot Smith &#039;&#039;The Diffusion of Culture&#039;&#039; (1933), Perry, &#039;&#039;The Primordial Ocean&#039;&#039; (1935), Schmidt, &#039;&#039;The Culture Historical Method of Ethnology&#039;&#039; (1939), Griffith Taylor, &#039;&#039;Environment and Nation&#039;&#039; (1945). See critiques in Radin, &#039;&#039;The Method and Theory of Ethnology&#039;&#039; (1965), Lowie, &#039;&#039;The History of Ethnological Theory&#039;&#039; (1937), and Harris &#039;&#039;The Rise of Anthropological Theory&#039;&#039; (1968).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; And it should not be thought that the decline of diffusionism as a doctrine of cultural dynamics implied a decline in prejudice. The notion that non-Europeans are less rational, less innovative, and so on, was as intense as ever: perhaps even more intense since this was the period of Nazism and like doctrines, and since genetic racism seemed, in this era, to be science, not prejudice. We return to this matter in Chapter 2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A new and modern form of diffusionism gained prominence after the end of World War II, in the period of collapsing colonial empires and an emerging &amp;quot;Third World&amp;quot; of underdeveloped but legally sovereign countries. This doctrine, generally known today by the title &amp;quot;modernization,&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;the diffusion of modernization,&amp;quot; arose in the late 1940s and the 1950s. Immediately after the Japanese surrender in 1945 it became clear that a number of colonies would gain independence immediately: liberation forces were now very strong and, in the wake of the world war, all of the colonial powers except the United States were now quite weak. All of them wanted to hold on to their colonies, the sources of great profit in the past and presumably also in the future. Each of the colonial powers maneuvered in its own way to hold on to its colonies, sometimes resorting to forcible efforts to suppress independence movements, sometimes conceding political independence grudgingly but peacefully where continued colonial control seemed patently impossible.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Here I am of course rejecting the view, common among European scholars, that colonies were relinquished voluntarily. This view has been rejected almost universally by scholars in the formerly colonial world. It may conceivably have been true for a few small islands from which profits no longer flowed to the colonizing power, but even such cases are debatable. It is worth noting that the United States has not given independence to any of the colonies it held at the close of World War II; has not even formally conceded the right of full self-determination (including independence) to Puerto Rico, the Virgin Islands, the Marianas, etc. The other colonial powers would presumably have taken the same position, had they had the power to do so in the face of colonial pro-independence forces; in such cases as the Dutch East Indies, French Indochina, Kenya, Angola, Mozambique, and so on, the colonizers tried to hold on to their possession by force of arms and failed. My view is set forth in Blaut, &#039;&#039;The National Question&#039;&#039; (1987b), chap. 4, and Blaut and Figueroa, &#039;&#039;Aspectos de la cuestion nacional en Puerto Rico&#039;&#039; (1988).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All colonies had been saturated during the classical colonial era with the ideological message that economic and social progress for the colonial people had to come through the diffusion of &amp;quot;modernization&amp;quot; from the colonizing power. &amp;quot;Modernization&amp;quot; meant the diffusion of a modern economy (with major corporations owned by the colonizer), a modern public administration (the colonial political structure), a modern technical infrastructure (bridges, dams, and the like, built by the colonizer), and so on. I call this an ideological message, but it was in fact believed in profoundly by the colonizers, who felt that their mission was, indeed, to diffuse their own civilization to the peoples who were under their &amp;quot;colonial tutelage,&amp;quot; and the fact that this mission produced wealth for their own country seemed only logical (recall diffusionist proposition 6). In the new situation the colonizers had to persuade the colonized that the &amp;quot;modernization&amp;quot; message was still valid. Doing so, they might convince the colonized to voluntarily relinquish the ideal of political independence in favor of the more pragmatic ideal of economic and social development under a wise and benevolent colonial rule. Or, if independence was insisted upon, this ideology would convince the people of the country now acquiring freedom that the only way to develop that country economically and socially was to retain the colonial economy, that is, to allow the colonizer&#039;s corporations and banks to continue their (profitable) work under the new regime: a system everyone today describes as &amp;quot;neocolonialism.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now all colonial powers began a major campaign to intensify the process of colonial economic development.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Representative examples include &amp;quot;Operation Bootstrap&amp;quot; in Puerto Rico, the Colonial Development and Welfare programs in parts of the British Empire, the increased funding for colonial agriculture and health departments, the establishment of colonial universities, and so on. These programs, regardless of their underlying political purposes (often hidden from the technical personnel involved) were, overall, very impressive.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; This should not be thought of as cynical or hypocritical: remember that diffusionism defined the colonial process as beneficial for the colonized as well as the colonizer, and the technical and other personnel involved in the new colonial development activities were utterly convinced that they were working for the advancement of the colonized people. At the same time, a parallel campaign was developed to further the same form of economic development in the independent countries, partly through agencies of the United Nations, partly through bilateral aid agreements.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Often this work was a direct continuation of colonial technical work, often with the same personnel, now &amp;quot;foreign advisor&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;United Nations expert&amp;quot; rather than &amp;quot;colonial technical officer.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The United States, now the leading economic power, began to establish its own aid programs in countries throughout the underdeveloped world. Again, this should not be dismissed as cynical and political: there was, in this period, a tremendously euphoric ideology that saw the end of the world war as the beginning of an Age of Development, a time when the advanced nations would work to bring—that is, diffuse—prosperity and advancement to the poor nations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Decolonization spread, and many liberation movements and newly independent countries refused to accept the neocolonial option, either ejecting foreign corporations (as did Indonesia) or opting for a specifically socialist society. This added a new impetus to the diffusion-of-modernization project. Efforts to bring about development through diffusion were intensified in hopes that their success would lead countries to reject the anticapitalist and antifeign options. But the choice of either of these two options seemed to imply a political alignment with the Soviet Union and China, so the diffusion-of-modernization project now became important as a matter of foreign policy in the Cold War. In 1959 the Cuban revolutionary victory gave the project very high priority for the United States, which now treated modernization and economic development, particularly in Latin America, as a matter of the highest priority, calling for very large investment.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Thus the Alliance for Progress, the Peace Corps, the elevated funding of technical and financial agencies of the Organization of American States, and the like.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Modern diffusionism is the body of ideas which underlay, and still underlies, this new set of conditions in the Third World. The diffusion of modernization, as it is carried out by public policy makers and private corporations and theorized by intellectuals (at least in the metropolitan, formerly colonizing, countries), is considered to be essentially the process by which Third World countries gain prosperity by accepting the continuous and increasing diffusion of economic and technological plums from the formerly colonial countries, a process that now, as in the past, is supremely profitable for the latter. In the diffusionist belief system, it is profitable for everybody, and also is right, rational, and natural, just as it had been a century earlier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ideas of 1993 are of course very different from the ideas of 1893, so it would be wrong to think that modern diffusionism is the same as classical diffusionism. Biological racism is no longer part of the model (as we will see in Chapter 2), and few modern European thinkers believe that non-Europeans simply do not have the potential to develop eventually to the level of Europeans. Religious undertones are largely absent, and the notion that a Christian god began things with the putative ancestors of Europeans, in the Bible Lands, and thereafter guided Europeans, Christians, to persistent superiority over all others, is no longer very popular. The historical greatness of some non-European civilizations is now fully conceded. (But with one vital qualification: less rationality, less innovativeness, than European civilization. We deal with this in Chapter 2.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After about a quarter-century of blind faith that the diffusion of modernization would bring about economic development everywhere, European experts and scholars now qualify their belief in this model, and in particular draw back from their former naive faith that the diffusion of modern technology, particularly in agriculture, is the key to economic development, the key to what used to be called &amp;quot;the take-off into sustained growth.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But, all of this notwithstanding, the basic propositions of diffusionism remain in place. Europeans still believe that Inside has one fundamental cultural nature and Outside another, now admitting Japan into the Inside sector. It is still believed that Europe in the past displayed a progressiveness not found in any other civilizations, except in one or two places, at one or two moments of history. Although European scholars no longer insist that this fundamental difference between a progressive Inside and a stagnant or slow-moving Outside will persist into the indefinite future, most of them write and speak about the present and future as though this fundamental dynamic will continue (again qualifying the picture to admit Japan, and perhaps a few small East Asian societies, into the dynamic of Inside). But today, as we will see in the next chapter, there is a growing, though still small, group of European scholars, mainly responding to the newer ideas that now emanate from non-European scholarship in postcolonial societies, who question the overall diffusionist model, and who deny its historical conceptions about the superiority of Inside over Outside.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== World Models and Worldly Interests ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Diffusionism is a poor theory. Diffusionism, as I argue in this book, is not good geography and not good history. Yet it exerts a tremendous influence on scholarship, and has done so for a very long time. How do we account for the fact that a bad theory can be so widely believed to be true, and for such a long time? We should briefly consider this question before we shift from the discussion of the nature and evolution of diffusionism as a theory to the discussion of empirical history, the topic of later chapters. It is important to understand how this (and every) theory interlocks with other ideas and responds to social interests.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Ethnography of Beliefs ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this discussion we will look at ideas as cultural facts: we will look at them ethnographically, as beliefs held by human beings who belong to specific sorts of communities and categories. We will see that a study of ideas-as-beliefs is quite different from an inquiry into the validity or truth of ideas, and that the study of ideas-as-beliefs is in some cases the more important and more basic of the two sorts of inquiry. We will see, in addition, that scientific beliefs arrange themselves in larger structures, belief systems, and that belief systems (like diffusionism) have certain crucial relationships of compatibility to one another and conformality to the values or interests of the groups of people who hold them to be valid. Pursuing this ethnographic exploration of the character of ideas-as-beliefs we will, I think, discover why the theory of diffusionism has had a life history that is more clearly explained by the life history of European society, and more particularly European colonialism, than it is by any intellectual or social process within the scientific community.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scientific ideas, and empirical ideas in general, can be examined in two ways. One is comfortable and traditional. It considers ideas in terms of their communicated meaning. Are they logical; that is, do they reflect an internally consistent argument? Are they valid in the sense that what they assert about the real world seems to have evidential support? This combination of logic, or structure of argument, and evidential basis is the kind of thing we look for whenever we evaluate scientific ideas—indeed all ideas that concern empirical reality. The second way of looking at ideas inquires about the people who believe a given idea, who communicate it to others as a belief, and about the people who listen and in turn accept the idea as a belief. The question whether a person believes in the validity of an idea is not at all the same as the question whether the idea is in fact a valid one. Questions about belief status are matters of ethnography: of finding out why beliefs are held by given people; how beliefs come to be accepted and rejected by these people; how given beliefs are connected in the minds of these people with other beliefs held by them; how new candidate beliefs are weighed and accepted or rejected; and how beliefs as such are connected to other parts of culture, including values, social organization, class organization, politics, and so on. What makes this kind of inquiry threatening is the fact that it can provide independent and reliable evidence that a given group of people holds a given idea to be true for reasons that have little to do with logic and evidence, for reasons grounded in culture.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Interestingly, we experience no discomfort and sense no threat when we read an account written by some anthropologist or cultural geographer about the beliefs, values, myths, and so on, of some small and obscure society in some far corner of the earth. Indeed, we expect an anthropologist to tell us more about the social or cultural reason why the &amp;quot;natives&amp;quot; hold to these ideas than about the validity of the ideas. In this kind of context it is quite normal to have a description of ideas that distinguishes between the matter of their logical and evidential basis and the matter of their cultural binding. But when this ethnographic approach is applied to what are called &amp;quot;Western&amp;quot; ideas, in the realms of science, history, and the like, the results are disturbing and the enterprise itself seems somehow improper.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ideas are, so to speak, surrounded by culture, and we can examine the surroundings and the way ideas are embedded in their surroundings. This is the ethnographic study of ideas. Now it happens to be a terminological convention in the field of anthropology to attach the prefix &#039;&#039;ethno-&#039;&#039; to a word designating a particular field of knowledge, such as medicine, botany, geography, and the like, when our purpose is to study that body of knowledge ethnographically. The study of &amp;quot;medicine,&amp;quot; for instance, is different from the study of &amp;quot;ethnomedicine.&amp;quot; The latter is an ethnographic field, asking what the medical beliefs are in a given culture, how these beliefs relate to the rest of that culture, and how to generalize cross-culturally about medical beliefs in all (or some set) of cultures. When we put together along with ethnomedicine all the other scientific fields prefixed by &amp;quot;ethno-,&amp;quot; we get, naturally enough, ethnoscience, meaning the ethnographic study of all sciences; more broadly, all fields of empirical belief. Ethnohistory is part of that corpus.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;On ethnoscience, see, for example, Conklin, &amp;quot;Lexicographical Treatment of Folk Taxonomies&amp;quot; (1969), Frake, &amp;quot;The Ethnographic Study of Cognitive Systems&amp;quot; (1969), Blaut, &amp;quot;Some Principles of Ethnogeography&amp;quot; (1978), and Spradley and McCurdy, &#039;&#039;Anthropology: A Cultural Perspective&#039;&#039; (1975). In my view, the categories &amp;quot;history&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;science&amp;quot; cannot be distinguished ontologically, although historiography is hardly an exact science.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; So, too, is ethnogeography.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The subject matter of ethnoscience is belief. Ordinarily we look at beliefs as they are enshrined in empirical statements, generally sentences that assert some predicate to be true about some subject. The fundamental, though not the smallest, unit of study in ethnoscience is the statement of belief and the person or group who makes—and holds to—this belief statement. For every empirical statement in social science there is an ethnoscientific question about its belief status and there is a profoundly different question about its truth status. The two questions do not forever remain separate, but they come together only at the conclusion of a long analysis. That analysis explains in the end why so many diffusionist statements in which historians and geographers firmly believe are really false.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The study of beliefs is also the study of belief-holding groups. Two very important points have to be made about belief-holding groups. A belief-holding group can be a group of any type. However, among the various types of belief-holding groups, the most fundamentally important are cultures, classes, and combinations that can be thought of as ethnoclasses. None of these types is an abstraction, except in the matter of defining units and boundaries. Cultures are highly variable from place to place and person to person, but the analytical unit itself is real and concrete. Its individual members also have concrete reality. There is no philosophical conundrum about the cultural whole &amp;quot;versus&amp;quot; its individual (human) parts in the matters we are discussing now. Thus there is an ethnoscience of each individual human being and also an ethnoscience of groups as collectives. Classes are a bit more problematic. However, most people accept the broad idea that there is a basic division between two class communities, one, the working class, the other an elite class, deploying political power and generally accumulating wealth. I will simply take it as given here that a rough class bifurcation exists in most societies of this and the preceding century, while conceding that it is not always possible to tell whether a given group in a given society belongs to the working (producing) class or to the elite class or to some ambiguous or uncertain grouping that does not fit comfortably in either of the two. One such problematic grouping that relates closely to the issues discussed in this book includes professors and others engaged in studying and writing about society and the environment. They are not members of the accumulating class, the elite, but scholars and writers are in most cases (not all) strongly bound to that class, and for all their intellectual penetration, discipline, and honesty, they tend to think, say, and write down ideas that are useful to the elite. This is true most pointedly for ideas of the sort related to diffusionism.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Culture and class intersect in ethnoclass communities. There is a crucial use in this book for the concept of an ethnoclass community. I will argue strongly that the elite groupings of European countries together, in spite of their cultural (and national) differences, are a basic and permanent belief-holding group, and that their beliefs form, to a large extent, a single ethnogeography and ethnoscience. This reflects the fact that, for the period with which we are mainly concerned, the nineteenth and twentieth centuries, these elites have had a common set of interests in relation to the working classes of their own countries and of the non-European world, and they have together underwritten the production of a coherent belief system about the European world, the non-European world, and the interactions between the two. The most important proposition in this book, in fact, is the assertion that diffusionist ideas are at the core of the single belief system generated under the influence of, and for the interests of, the European elite. Although it should not be thought that the science and history produced under the stimulus of this ethnoclass is &amp;quot;biased,&amp;quot; nevertheless we will see that the entire body of ideas concerning geography, history, and social science are strongly influenced by their ethnoclass patronage. Overall, and through the two-century-long flow of ideas, the product is a body of diffusionist beliefs which persist, and continue to influence social practice, although they are quite unscientific.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beliefs assemble themselves into belief systems. The difference is not exactly a matter of relative complexity. Most simple beliefs are just those ideas that can be expressed in simple declarative sentences (although some call for a poem or a painting), and which people do express as assertions, with more or less confidence as to their veracity. We are interested in three things about these belief sentences and the acts in which they are expressed. They are empirical (not purely logical or purely evaluative). They are expressed as true, or possibly true. And they are thought of by the belief holders as cognitively whole or discriminable, as, putting it crudely, &amp;quot;concept,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;ideas.&amp;quot; What makes such a hard-to-be-precise-about unit important is the fact that individual humans do not simply think up such ideas or concepts out of thin air or immediate perceptual experience. These unit beliefs tend to retain their character as beliefs through long intervals of time, often generations, and among large numbers of people. Still more structure is to be found in a belief system that consists of chains of statements connected together by implication (&amp;quot;because...&amp;quot;). This kind of belief system I will call, unoriginally, an argument. It simply needs to be noted that the chain of statements in an argument may or may not proceed from simple to complex. A tighter structure is to be found in those systems called theories. Simple beliefs, then, are aggregated in various ways into belief structures, belief systems. Each belief system, in turn, is assembled (psychologically) into various sorts of higher order systems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The highest level, comprehending all of the empirical beliefs held by a given belief-holding unit—including some beliefs that contradict one another—is the group&#039;s (or individual&#039;s) ethnoscience as a whole. Included here are all of the beliefs held to be true, or possibly true, about the external world, natural and social; beliefs about the self or person; and beliefs about technique—the self&#039;s capability to manipulate and influence the world. The ethnoscience, in a way, is an encyclopedia.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How does it happen that a new belief is admitted into a belief system? The question is not where new ideas come from but how they become validated, that is, given a kind of social license that admits them to the status of a belief, a belief that is at least accepted as a tenable hypothesis, a &amp;quot;reasonable idea,&amp;quot; and at most accepted as fact. Three quite distinct judgments—I think also distinct procedures—are involved in this licensing process. One is a judgment of compatibility. The second is a judgment of verifiability (the matter of empirical verification). The third is a judgment of conformity (or value conformality). Scholarly conceits to the contrary notwithstanding, verification is the least important of the three.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All the belief systems held by a given group are in one way or another interrelated. Some are tightly connected: one theory may seem to follow directly from another, for example. Normally the relationship is much looser. But all belief systems have one basic and common relationship with all other belief systems held by a group. They are compatible. This means that they can coexist peacefully in the same ethnoscience: they are not cognitively or culturally dissonant. Although beliefs may occasionally contradict one another, total lack of relationship is not in principle possible: directly or indirectly, all beliefs held by a given belief-holding group (or individual) are somehow linked together, and some judgment of their compatibility will be made more or less often. Typically, belief systems reinforce one another: &amp;quot;If P is true, it is reasonable to suppose that Q is true.&amp;quot; Or &amp;quot;If P is true, it follows necessarily that Q is true.&amp;quot; What counts here, because this is an ethnographic scenario, is the fact that the belief systems are judged to be compatible. The judgment of compatibility is not simply a definition, an assertion to the effect that when the group holds two or more beliefs at the same time they are merely labeled &amp;quot;compatible.&amp;quot; Compatibility is the outcome of an important social process. The process is most transparent when new candidate beliefs are introduced: when some new hypothesis is proposed within a belief-holding group and must, as it were, apply for a license. One of the most crucial tests it must pass is that of compatibility with existing beliefs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Compatibility is the loosest of all relations among theories and other beliefs within an ethnoscience. Compatibility is, in a sense, a bridge that must be built over gaps in the overall body of thought. One sort of gap is obvious: it is the incompleteness of knowledge. The other sort, less obvious, is highly significant for the argument of this book. Here, the gap among theories (and other beliefs) is actually filled, but not by argument. In ordinary language, &amp;quot;it seems reasonable&amp;quot; to suppose that one theory lends support to another, or one historical belief is explained by another. This matter of &amp;quot;reasonableness&amp;quot; bears very close examination, because &amp;quot;reasonableness&amp;quot; is that form of the relation of compatibility which allows the most absurdly unreasonable ideas to pass for well-founded scientific argument.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Broadly speaking, there are two important ways in which gaps are bridged with &amp;quot;reasonableness&amp;quot; in place of—and disguising the lack of—an explicit, defensible argument. One way calls for an insertion of value statements in place of belief statements; we will explore this device in the next section. The other device lies within the belief system itself. It substitutes, for an explicit argument, an implicit one. To understand how it works we have to distinguish between explicit and implicit beliefs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Implicit beliefs are usually matters &amp;quot;too obvious to mention,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;beneath notice,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;obviously true,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;taken for granted.&amp;quot; They are ordinary beliefs (and theories) which tend not to surface in discourse. There is nothing mysterious about most implicit beliefs; they are not somehow buried in the unconscious, or deliberately hidden from view. Some beliefs simply tend to be more often thought about consciously and verbalized than others, for a variety of unsurprising reasons. Those readily verbalized are explicit beliefs, those not, are implicit beliefs. There is no hard line of demarcation in a case of this sort, involving informal communication of belief.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But the demarcation is quite sharp in the case of formal, written and published, expositions of belief. The implicit beliefs are simply not written about. If they emerge in print at all, it is in the form of explicitly stated assumptions, or &amp;quot;axioms.&amp;quot; Here, the conclusion that terminates an implicit argument is exposed to view, but not the argument itself. Rarely is there any attempt to deceive or obfuscate. The writer merely takes it for granted that the reader holds the same set of implicit beliefs and is willing to accept the &amp;quot;reasonableness&amp;quot; of unsupported assumptions. Both share the same ethnoscience and the same value system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Implicit beliefs, as we will see, are the weakest link in the diffusionist world model. Throughout this book we will encounter diffusionist theories that simply hang in the air, unsupported by argument and evidence. In fact we will find, for large chunks of the diffusionist world model, that most of the propositions which would be needed to make these areas of belief coherent and sound are simply missing. In other words, relatively few of the beliefs are explicit and grounded. And these few are not connected together, so the fabric as a whole is incomplete. It seems complete only to those who are prepared to take a great deal for granted, who fill in the gaps with implicit beliefs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Verification is the matter of testing a candidate belief to see whether it fits the facts. There are various kinds of test and various controversies about the nature of verification, but such questions need not detain us. The normal sort of verification involves a search for evidence that would seem to support or contradict the new hypothesis, the candidate belief. The process is never complete: everyone, of every culture and community, has to be satisfied with partial confirmation (and disconfirmation) of empirical beliefs. For us the important point about verification is this: verification is never sufficient grounds for converting a hypothesis into an accepted belief. Nor is it even necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The judgment of compatibility is more crucial than that of verifiability, and this holds true among social scientists as it does among all other groups of natives. Part of verification is itself a matter of judging compatibility. The words and procedures used in verification, the criteria on which a test is deemed adequate, and much more besides, are drawn from the stock of existing beliefs, and the test of a candidate belief is therefore only partly a matter of direct confrontation with new evidence. But this is not the main point. In any belief-holding group, a new idea, a candidate belief, tends to be judged more on the basis of the way it fits into the existing belief system than on the basis of its directly apprehended meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The same thing happens in self-conscious scholarship. It has long been a truism that existing scientific beliefs tend to be defended in the face of new hypotheses that question them, and the defense is often fierce, bitter, and dogmatic. (Whitehead once called scientists &amp;quot;the leading dogmatists. Advance in detail is admitted: fundamental novelty is barred.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Whitehead, &#039;&#039;Science and Philosophy&#039;&#039; (1948), p. 129.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;) The truism was popularized by Thomas Kuhn in a dramatic scenario that he called a theory of scientific revolutions: in essence, crucial scientific beliefs gain a position of suzeriegnity, their supporters gain positions of academic power, and so the beliefs become entrenched and hold sway for long periods of time, even after evidence against these beliefs has massively accumulated. Eventually there is a historic break: a &amp;quot;scientific revolution&amp;quot; which overthrows the existing ruling theory or paradigm and installs another one, which, in turn, holds sway for a period of time.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Kuhn, &#039;&#039;The Structure of Scientific Revolutions&#039;&#039; (1970). More relevant is Fleck&#039;s &#039;&#039;Genesis and Development of a Scientific Fact&#039;&#039; (1979).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; But Kuhn&#039;s frame of reference (in his &#039;&#039;Structure of Scientific Revolutions&#039;&#039;) was physical science, and we are told very little about the historic process by which beliefs gain, and retain, hegemony in social science, including history and cultural geography. In these fields the process is fundamentally different. For one thing, influential beliefs hold sway for reasons that reflect much more directly the interests of elite groups outside of the scholarly field itself, and the replacement of one theory by another reflects mainly these external interests, not a Kuhn-like intellectual revolution within the community of scholars itself. Secondly, in these fields it is much less easy to attack old theories with new evidence, in part because scientific methods here are usually very inexact and in part because the collecting of evidence itself is guided and sometimes determined by existing beliefs. Thus it is that large belief structures, like diffusionism, persist for generations, untroubled by &amp;quot;scientific revolutions.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
People have a tendency, sometimes slight, sometimes strong, to believe what they want to believe. Another way of putting this is to say that beliefs are influenced by values, or that cognition interacts with valuation to produce what Tolman elegantly called the &amp;quot;belief-value matrix.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Tolman, &amp;quot;A Psychological Model&amp;quot; (1951).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The most straightforward (or at least modest) notion of &amp;quot;values&amp;quot; finds them to be judgments of preference, assertions of what is good and bad, right and wrong, liked and disliked, by individuals and groups. Values, like beliefs, are aggregated into systems. But value systems are very different from empirical belief systems. The latter, broadly put, assert things to be true (or untrue) about the world; the former assert things to be preferable (or not), hence they call for action upon the things uncovered by belief, and John Dewey was right in describing such assertions as &amp;quot;agendas.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Dewey, &amp;quot;The Logic of Judgements of Practice,&amp;quot; in his &#039;&#039;Essays in Experimental Logic&#039;&#039; (1916).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Viewed in this way, the realm of value is not autonomous and opaque. It is mainly a transition zone between belief and practice. Values are interests.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Values interact with beliefs in a belief-value matrix. A belief system and a value system tend to maintain some degree of consistency with each other during limited periods (except in times of very rapid social change). This somewhat regular relation between the two systems I will call conformality, and it works both ways. Statements do not ordinarily become validated beliefs if they do not conform to the values, and therefore the interests, of the group. But value judgments indicate preferences for future action, and a given judgment is likely to be rejected by a group, sooner or later, if the future action it calls for is flagrantly impractical: if the action clearly cannot succeed given the nature of the real world as depicted in the belief system. Obviously, matters are more complex than this and also less predictable. In any case, the dominant belief system for a group must in the long run conform to the value system, and when the two fall out of conformality, one or the other will be forced to change. Since values are the expression of concrete worldly interests, the belief system will tend, in ordinary times, to bend more readily to the value system, and to worldly interests, than vice versa.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The judgment of value conformality is a crucial part of the binding of belief to culture. The notion that beliefs are culture-bound is of course a familiar one, but the idea that this proposition applies fully to the belief systems of scholars is not really accepted except in the most general and abstract way and therefore in a way that does not usually permit an analysis of the manner in which a particular scholar&#039;s values (or interests) affect his or her empirical statements. The stronger proposition, that all new ideas in social science are vetted for their conformality to values, and more precisely to the value system of the elite of the society—which is not necessarily the value system of the scholars themselves—and that this process of validation normally and frequently leads to the acceptance and persistence of really unscientific ideas, is hardly even considered, even though it is normal doctrine in ethnoscience (normal, at least, when applied to natives other than ourselves).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But there is an even stronger proposition that I will defend in this book with concrete arguments and evidence: the proposition that our world-scale models, and many of our specific theories and factual truisms, are accepted mainly—and in some cases only—because of their conformality to the values of the European elites; that this has been the case since the beginning of the nineteenth century, and is true today. Many of these demonstrably false beliefs are built into the world model of diffusionism, and this is so because diffusionism is the central intellectual doctrine that explains and rationalizes the actions and interests of European colonialism and neocolonialism.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Conformality is really the crucial part of validation. This is not ordinarily a matter of the &amp;quot;establishment&amp;quot; suppressing free speech (although this happens quite frequently). The judgment of conformality is a complex binding process. At all times the dominant group (a class or ethnoclass) has a fairly definite set of concrete worldly interests. Some of these conflict with others, but all tend toward the maintenance of the elite group&#039;s power and position. Because of its power to reward, punish, and control, this group succeeds in convincing most people, including most scholars, that its interests are the interests of everyone. These interests are social, economic, and political agendas, and it is a simple transformation to insert the word &amp;quot;ought&amp;quot; and turn them into values. Viewed statically, the interests are always clear, and the values derived from them cohere into a dominant value system that more or less mirrors these interests. Hence we have at all times a kind of environment of values, surrounding and influencing the ongoing validation process in scholarship.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The way this influence is exerted is very complex in our society today, but it was quite simple and transparent in the last century, when the main lineaments of diffusionism and other beliefs related to colonialism were being sketched in. In those days, not only was it true, as Marx said, that the ruling ideas are the ideas of the ruling class, but it was also true that almost nobody but the ruling class, and its subalterns, had the opportunity to render those ideas effective, in the form of publication, lecturing at influential schools and universities, and participating in policy formation and execution. Conformality, in those times and places, was accomplished largely through the social vetting process by which only those people who adhered to the dominant value system were in a good position to tender hypotheses as candidate beliefs. I do not believe that the process is altogether different today, but it would take us far afield to discuss it here at length. We can simply take note of the background of most professors (very few of whom are the offspring of poor or minority families), the reward structure in universities and consultantships, and other elements that jointly produce this result: few professional social scientists want to propose candidate beliefs which do not conform. This explains why, in spite of the most rigorous adherence to scientific method and scholarly canons, our theories remain, to a large degree, conformal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In sum, validation proceeds by subjecting any candidate belief to three tests: compatibility, verifiability, and value conformality. Of these three, perhaps only conformality is essential (and then only in relatively tranquil times). Verification can be waived on occasion, provided that the hypothesis is both conformal to interests and nicely compatible with existing beliefs, be they explicit theories or implicit beliefs emerging as stated or unstated assumptions. Strong verification is, in any case, pretty hard to come by in the social sciences (a methodological fact that is often mistaken for an epistemological verity). In these fields, a judgment of compatibility is always rendered—if not on the candidate belief then on the person who proposes it—and it is most unusual for a new hypothesis or theory to become accepted as a belief if it contradicts the corpus of accepted beliefs in its field. But it is always the case that society and its elite need to be supplied with answers to pressing problems confronting them. So there is an important countercurrent. New hypotheses that display a touch of the novel and hold some possibility of solving an already recognized problem are encouraged, indeed rewarded. They must be compatible but not completely so.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is simply no way that a scholar, once installed in the profession, can prevent conformal values from creeping into his or her work. This in spite of the fact that nearly all are honest, careful, and competent. The reason why my argument seems, incorrectly, to be an attack on scholarship is because the problem is almost always seen in connection with explicit beliefs, and with consciously held attitudes. The fields that study human society are a weak infusion of explicit theory within a body of belief that is largely implicit. Scientific method prevents us from accepting the arguments of an explicit theory merely because we want to do so. But the main grounding for each such theory is its compatibility with other beliefs in the system, expressed as a matter of &amp;quot;reasonableness.&amp;quot; It is &amp;quot;reasonable&amp;quot; to accept certain assumptions (reflecting certain implicit beliefs) and not others. One theory seems &amp;quot;reasonable,&amp;quot; or plausible, because it is compatible with another, accepted theory, although no explicit chain of connection exists: most links in the chain are buried in the realm of implicit belief. Finally, it seems &amp;quot;reasonable&amp;quot; to seek verification for a hypothesis with certain observations and not with others.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It should be added that the disciplined work of social scientists usually prevents them from unwittingly validating a hypothesis on grounds of value conformality. The problem, and it is a severe one, is that, thinking that our explicit beliefs are not validated by value conformality, we let value conformality control our implicit beliefs. These then provide a bridge across gaps between explicit theories, rendering them compatible, or serve up the assumptions which provide the starting point for new explicit theories, formal and informal. Scientific and scholarly method demands rigor only for the explicit theories.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Diffusionism as a Belief System ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The discussion thus far has been designed to lay the foundation for an understanding of three aspects of the diffusionist belief system: its structure, its binding to certain groups in certain societies, and its evolution, this last aspect including the important questions of why diffusionism became prominent and why it has persisted. It would not be much of an oversimplification to say that diffusionism developed as the belief system appropriate to one powerful and permanent European interest: colonialism. From 1492 to the present the wealth drawn into Europe—meaning, as in all of this discussion, Greater Europe—from the non-European world has been a vital nutriment for the elite classes of Europe: for their maintenance of status within their societies, and for their progress. Whether this statement can be generalized to include all classes within European society, whether, that is, colonialism was an interest of the nonelite classes of Europe in most times and places, is a contentious issue which I do not need to address. I am merely asserting that (1) Europe&#039;s elite depended on colonialism; (2) Europe&#039;s elite was tremendously influential in the evolution of European ideas and more specifically European scholarship; and (3) Europe&#039;s elite held a permanent social interest in the creation and development of a conformal belief system, a body of thought that would rationalize, justify, and, most importantly, assist the colonial enterprise. As that enterprise evolved and changed, so too did the body of ideas constituting diffusionism.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of this book is devoted to a delineation and critique of diffusionist beliefs, so I do not need to review the nature of the belief system here. Suffice it to say, the doctrine ranges over all scales of fact, from world geography and world history to ideas about the qualities of individual human beings, European and non-European, and descriptions and explanations of particular local events. The scope of the diffusionist belief structure encompasses a fair share of European ethnoscience. That is, a fair share of the licensed belief statements in European ethnoscience are used within the diffusionist belief structure, although they are also used in other structures. (Some examples to be discussed in Chapter 2 are: beliefs about demographic behavior, about intelligence, about the origins of civilization, about the fertility of tropical soils.) These statements range from modest assertions of evidential fact to complex and elaborate theories, both formal and informal. They enter the diffusionist canon through all of the licensing procedures for belief acceptance discussed above. Over time, all of them go through the screening process of conformality with the value or interest of colonialism, or go through the indirect screening process that accords them the status of being compatible with other beliefs which are themselves conformal. Over time, the belief system accretes new diffusionist beliefs and discards those that contradict the canon or that have lost their relevance in a changing world. Since colonialism, in various newer forms such as neocolonialism, remains an interest of the elite, and since implicit beliefs go unnoticed and uncriticized, the process of adding, subtracting, and modifying diffusionist beliefs continues in the present. Were this not the case, the multitude of beliefs about Eurocentric history which claim our attention in this book would long since have been discarded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Diffusionist beliefs at the space-time scale that embraces the whole world and the whole of history, tend to form a rather tightly structured theory, as we saw earlier in this chapter. The theory, in brief, describes the essential processes that take place in an &amp;quot;inner,&amp;quot; essentially European, core sector of the world, describes those that take place in an &amp;quot;outer,&amp;quot; essentially non-European sector, and describes the modes of interaction between the two sectors, the most important of which is the inner-to-outer diffusion of innovative ideas, people, and commodities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We can describe this world-scale space-time theory as the &amp;quot;diffusionist world model.&amp;quot; It is the colonizer&#039;s model of the world.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The obvious question arises: what would we conceive to be a nondiffusionist world model? This would be a world in which the processes at work in any one sector are expected also to be at work in the other sectors. In essence, this model is driven by a concept of equal capability of human beings—psychological unity—in all cultures and regions, and from this argument it demands that any spatial inequalities in matters relating to cultural evolution, and more specifically economic development, be explained. Stated differently: equality is the normal condition and inequalities need to be explained. Diffusionism, in contrast, expects basic inequality between the Inner and the Outer sectors of the world—and of humanity. The uniformitarian principle is not one of uniformity; it is the principle of human equality.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At space-time scales smaller than the world, the diffusionist belief system is very diffuse, parts of it hanging together as formally elegant theories, parts of it floating around as compatible but weakly connected belief statements. It would take us far beyond the scope of this book to attempt a description of all of the parts, levels, and subsystems in the diffusionist model as a whole, ranging upward and downward from the world model to the level of particular space-time event descriptions. But we can make a start.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Notes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. In this book the word &amp;quot;Europe&amp;quot; refers to the continent of Europe and to regions dominated by European culture elsewhere, regions like the United States and Canada.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. This quick survey of 150 years or so of world history textbooks is, of course, very schematic and impressionistic. Some further comments may be of use. In textbooks of the first period, around 1850 (plus or minus a decade or so), the original home of Man is often stated to be the Garden of Eden, which is located by different textbook writers in different parts of western Asia. For instance: somewhere east of Canaan and near Mesopotamia (Robbins, &#039;&#039;The World Displayed in its History and Geography&#039;&#039;, 1832, p. 13); somewhere in the &amp;quot;healthful&amp;quot; mountains between the Caspian Sea and Kashmir or Tibet (Müller, &#039;&#039;The History of the World to 1783&#039;&#039;, 1842, pp. 27, 43-44); perhaps near the borders of the Mediterranean Sea (Tytler, &#039;&#039;Universal history, From the Creation to the beginning of the Eighteenth Century&#039;&#039;, vol. 1, 1844, p. 17); in the Vale of Kashmir (Willard, &#039;&#039;Universal History in Perspective&#039;&#039;, 1845, p. 34); somewhere between the Caucasus Mountains and the Himalayas (Keightley, &#039;&#039;Outlines of History&#039;&#039;, 1849); in the Himalayas (Weber, &#039;&#039;Outlines of Universal History&#039;&#039;, 1853, p. 6); in Armenia (Collier, &#039;&#039;Outlines of General History&#039;&#039;, 1868). There seems to be a kind of median location of Eden near the Caucasus Mountains, which was also, by no coincidence, the supposed place of origin of the &amp;quot;Caucasian race.&amp;quot; Noah, of course, began postdeluvian history on Mt. Ararat, in Armenia (also roughly in the region of the Caucasus). Noah is supposed to have migrated then to Europe (Whelpley, &#039;&#039;A Compound of History, From the Earliest Times&#039;&#039;, vol. 1, 1844, p. 10), or Mesopotamia (Robbins, 1832, p. 20), or Palestine, or some other part of the Bible Lands. Noah&#039;s three sons are supposed, then, to have dispersed and to have founded the branches of mankind—the first great diffusion process. In most textbooks of this period history tends to move west; some textbooks present the Hegelian notion that history proceeds inexorably westward, following the sun, with the implication that the United States, farther west still, will replace Europe as the next center of world civilization.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It was widely believed in this period that nonwhites were not truly and fully human. One version of this theory, the notion of &amp;quot;polygenesis,&amp;quot; claimed that God had created true humans in the Garden of Eden and other races—or at least the &amp;quot;black race&amp;quot;—in other places and times. This theory questioned the standard interpretation of the Old Testament (that everyone is descended from Adam and Eve), so, not surprisingly, it was not stated as truth in the textbooks I consulted. (I have not, however, looked at textbooks used in the antebellum South, and the theory of polygenesis was most popular in slaveholding regions, as an ideological grounding for the treatment of blacks as things rather than people.) Yet polygenesis was important enough to be mentioned and then rejected—in favor of the view that all humans are descendants of Adam and Eve—in some textbooks, down to the end of the century (see, for example, Dew, &#039;&#039;A Digest of the Laws, Customs, Manners, and Institutions of the Ancient and Modern Nations&#039;&#039;, 1853; Fisher, &#039;&#039;Outlines of Universal History&#039;&#039;, 1885; Duruy and Grosvenor, &#039;&#039;A General History of the World&#039;&#039;, 1901). But polygenesis was not needed; the belief that nonwhites are inferior to whites is asserted in one way or another in all the textbooks I examined. The theory of &amp;quot;degeneration&amp;quot; served just as well as polygenesis. It was the notion that the descendants of Ham, and perhaps other biblical peoples, migrated away from the Bible Lands, eastward and southward, and degenerated from civilization toward savagery, or even lower, as they did so, because they had not accepted Christ, or because they migrated into inferior environments, or for some other reason. (See, for instance, Keightley, 1849, 5-6: &amp;quot;the savage is a degeneration from the civilized life,&amp;quot; and Africans are near the apes.) Degeneration was asserted in some textbooks, but in most the simple fact of white superiority was stated and left unexplained. The history of the world is, in general, the history of the white race, or the Semitic and Aryan peoples (see below). For times later than the Roman era, non-Europe is scarcely discussed, except as a backdrop for discussions of the Crusades, the building of colonial empires, and the like. (See Harris, &#039;&#039;The Rise of Anthropological Theory&#039;&#039;, 1968, for an excellent discussion of polygenesis and degeneration.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nearly all textbooks of the period around 1900 (give or take a few years) accepted the newer scientific theories about the age of the earth and the fact of biological evolution (though not the Darwinian theory of evolution). The biblical account of human history, however, was retained in many books, although fewer of them accepted the formerly standard Old Testament chronologies (for instance, that things began in 4004 B.C.). Books of this period tended to present the so-called &amp;quot;Aryan theory,&amp;quot; a theory derived from philology but expanded into a theory of culture history. Earlier philologists had identified an &amp;quot;Aryan&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Indo-European&amp;quot; language family, and also a &amp;quot;Semitic&amp;quot; family (which many authorities, including textbook writers, identified with Noah&#039;s sons Japheth and Shem, respectively). The white race consists of these two peoples. One branch of the Aryans supposedly migrated west into Europe (from the supposed &amp;quot;Aryan hearth,&amp;quot; somewhere southwest or northwest of the Caucasus). These were progressive, energetic people, who founded European civilization mainly after they had acquired Christianity from the Semites, who invented the first barbaric civilizations and monotheism but then stagnated into a dreamy, decadent, unambitious culture and thereafter ceased to advance civilization. No other culture, apart from these two, had much to do with history. (According to Freeman, &#039;&#039;General Sketch of History&#039;&#039;, 1872, p. 2, history &amp;quot;in the highest and truest sense is the history of the Aryan nations of Europe&amp;quot;; see also Collier, 1868; Swinton, &#039;&#039;Outlines of the World&#039;s History&#039;&#039;, 1874; Gilman, &#039;&#039;First Steps in General History&#039;&#039;, 1874; Anderson, &#039;&#039;New Manual of General History&#039;&#039;, 1882; Steele and Steele, &#039;&#039;A Brief History of Ancient, Medieval, and Modern Peoples&#039;&#039;, 1883; Fisher, 1896; Quackenbos, &#039;&#039;Illustrated School History of the World&#039;&#039;, 1889; Thalheimer, &#039;&#039;Outline of General History for the Use of Schools&#039;&#039;, 1883; Sanderson, &#039;&#039;History of the World from the Earliest Time to the Year 1898&#039;&#039;; Duruy and Grosvenor, 1901. Ploetz and Tillinghast presented this theory in &#039;&#039;Epitome of Ancient, Medieval, and Modern History&#039;&#039;, first published in 1883, in its many editions down to 1925 when, in an edition edited by H. E. Barnes, the theory was finally eliminated.) See Bernal&#039;s &#039;&#039;Black Athena&#039;&#039; (1987, 1991) for an insightful discussion of the Aryan theory and related topics in the history of European thought.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because the Old Testament spoke of agriculture—Cain knew farming and Abraham herded domesticated animals—the history textbooks tended not to address the problem of where agriculture was invented until very late in the nineteenth century, the period when science was beginning to deal with this problem. Some scientists and some textbook writers then began to speculate that, just possibly, agriculture was as old in continental Europe as it was in western Asia and Egypt. (From the point of view of science, see Joly, &#039;&#039;Man Before Metals&#039;&#039;, 1897.) But the idea that agriculture originated in the Bible Lands remained dominant although now it was viewed (by most) as an invention, not an artifact of original creation. The ethnographic fact that some tribal peoples (for instance, in Australia) did not practice agriculture was commonly explained, in the textbooks of the earlier nineteenth century, in terms of the theory of degeneration: their ancestors had somehow lost the art. Later in the century it became more common to use the diffusionist conception that agriculture had been invented by west Asian or (conceivably) European peoples, then diffused outward over the rest of the world, and cultures that did not practice it in modern times simply had not yet acquired it, either because of their isolation or because they were too stupid to take it up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Orient Express was a famous train that ran between western Europe and western Asia. Although various routes were used in different eras, the basic line ran from Constantinople (Istanbul) through Greece to northern Italy or Austria, then on to France, and (via Ostend) England. Most of the history textbooks write about world history as though it marched northwesterward, rather like the westbound Orient Express, with stations (so to speak) in Athens, Rome, Paris, and London. (See Chapter 2 for further discussion of the Orient Express model.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. In nineteenth-century world history textbooks, Turkey was given some attention because of its political involvement with European affairs. World geography, in contrast to world history, always covered the entire world, and textbooks as well as the great multivolume descriptive geographies (like Reclus&#039;s classic 19-volume &#039;&#039;Nouvelle Géographie Universelle&#039;&#039;, published between 1876 and 1894) gave considerable attention to Asia, Africa, and Latin America. This should not mislead us, however. One of the primary functions of geography throughout this entire period was to teach European children what they needed to know about non-Europe in order to participate in their countries&#039; imperial and commercial activities in these regions. See Hudson, &amp;quot;The New Geography and the New Imperialism: 1870-1918&amp;quot; (1977) and McKay, &amp;quot;Colonialism in the French Geographical Movement&amp;quot; (1943), on the close relation between geography and colonial activities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. The character of this newer approach can be seen if we look at two well-known modern university-level texts, one written by W. H. McNeill of the University of Chicago (&#039;&#039;A World History&#039;&#039;, 3rd ed., 1979), the other by J. M. Roberts of Oxford University (&#039;&#039;The Hutchinson History of the World&#039;&#039;, 2d ed., 1987; published in the United States as &#039;&#039;The Penguin History of the World&#039;&#039;). For pre-Christian-era world history, more than three-quarters of the place-name mentions in both books are places in Europe and the Middle East (including North Africa); less than one-quarter of the place-name mentions are places in other parts of the world and only about 1% are in Africa. For the Christian era to A.D. 1491 there is significant divergence between the two books. In Roberts&#039;s text, European and Middle Eastern places constitute about 85% of place-name mentions. In McNeill&#039;s text, European and Middle Eastern places constitute only 60% of the place names mentioned, a significant departure from the older tradition although still well out of proportion to this region&#039;s size in area and population. (Sub-Saharan Africa accounts for only 2% of mentions for the period A.D. 1-1491.) In both books, therefore, the region I have been calling &amp;quot;Greater Europe&amp;quot; has considerably lower salience for pre-1492 history than was typically the case in older world history textbooks. As to explanation, however, both books retain much of the traditional perspective. Roberts gives almost no causal role to the cultures and regions of the world other than Europe and the Middle East (including North Africa) for any period prior to 1492. McNeill gives considerable weight to East Asia and some to South Asia for certain historical periods, but almost all of the world history-making forces emanate from Europe, western Asia, and North Africa for the period before 1492. (An exception is the Black Death, which, according to McNeill, swept westward into these regions from farther Asia. On this matter, see also McNeill&#039;s &#039;&#039;Plagues and Peoples&#039;&#039;, 1976.) Examples of the Eurocentric explanations offered by both authors will be given in Chapter 2 of the present book.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is, however, insufficient to look only at those present-day textbooks that are clearly identified as &amp;quot;world history&amp;quot; textbooks. Quite frequently university courses covering the subject of world history use history textbooks that carry titles like &amp;quot;The History of Western Civilization.&amp;quot; (See, for instance, Lerner, et al., &#039;&#039;Western Civilizations: Their History and Their Culture&#039;&#039;, 1988; Kagan, et al., &#039;&#039;The Western Heritage&#039;&#039;, 1987; Chambers, et al., &#039;&#039;The Western Experience&#039;&#039;, 1987.) If such a textbook neglects the non-Western world, there can be no complaint that it is misleading: the title clearly specifies &amp;quot;West&amp;quot; not &amp;quot;World.&amp;quot; But if the course is designated as &amp;quot;world history&amp;quot; and the textbook is designated as &amp;quot;Western history,&amp;quot; then we have a problem. The worst scenario would be one in which world-history teaching continues to be Eurocentric history in disguise. I do not know of any research which tests the following hypotheses: (1) Given that, today, historians are sensitive to the need to avoid Eurocentric bias in the teaching of world history, do some of them simply change the title to &amp;quot;Western&amp;quot; so that Eurocentrism becomes, then, licit? And (2) is it possible that there is a trend away from the teaching of &amp;quot;World&amp;quot; history and toward &amp;quot;Western&amp;quot; (etc.) history and that this trend reflects a reaction (or adjustment) to present-day demands for nontechnocentrism and &amp;quot;fairness?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. A school textbook is truly a key social document, a kind of modern stele. In the typical case, a book becomes accepted as a high school (or lower-level) textbook only after it has been reviewed very carefully by the publisher, school boards, and administrators, all of whom are intensely sensitive to the need to print acceptable doctrine; they are concerned to make it certain that children will read only those facts in their textbook which are considered to be acceptable as facts by the opinion-forming elite of the culture. The resulting textbook is, therefore, less an ordinary authored book than a vetted social statement of what is considered valid and acceptable for entry into the mind of the child. For this reason, research on textbooks (including college textbooks, in which the same process is at work, though more subtly) is, in fact, ethnographic research. It tells us about the belief system of the opinion-forming elite of the culture as a whole. Therefore, geography texts in the United States are really ethnogeography documents. Likewise, history texts are really ethnohistory documents. They are probably as useful as cultural artifacts as any old potsherd or inscription. See the final section of this chapter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. This argument is given much weight by Eurocentric Marxists, since class struggle, for Marxists, is the central force in historical evolution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. A form of political feudalism is sometimes conceded to have been developed earlier by the Chinese, but the great majority of European scholars, including most Marxists, believe that European feudalism was unique in representing a form of society that was a crucial, essential, stepping stone to modernity. See Chapter 3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. See Samir Amin&#039;s &#039;&#039;Eurocentrism&#039;&#039; (1988) for an excellent discussion of this notion. The word &amp;quot;Eurocentrism&amp;quot; apparently was coined quite recently, to assemble &amp;quot;European ethnocentrism&amp;quot; into one word. However, I (like Amin) do not think of Eurocentrism as merely a species of ethnocentrism, as the following paragraphs will make clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9. I use the word &amp;quot;community&amp;quot; to refer to any social unit, of any size. In this discussion, for the sake of simplicity, the &amp;quot;communities&amp;quot; will be thought of as villages distributed across a rural landscape. I neglect here the cases in which culture change results from the combination of an independent invention and a diffusion event. See my &amp;quot;Two Views of Diffusion&amp;quot; (1977) and &amp;quot;Diffusionism: A Uniformitarian Critique&amp;quot; (1987a).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
10. See Jett, &amp;quot;Further Information on the Geography of the Blowgun and Its Implications for Transoceanic Contact&amp;quot; (1991); also see Carter, &#039;&#039;Man and the Land&#039;&#039; (1968), and Edmonson, &amp;quot;Neolithic Diffusion Rates&amp;quot; (1961).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
11. See, for instance, Eliot Smith, &#039;&#039;The Diffusion of Culture&#039;&#039; (1933), Perry, &#039;&#039;The Primordial Ocean&#039;&#039; (1935), and Taylor, &#039;&#039;Environment and Nation&#039;&#039; (1945). Eliot Smith flatly asserts that the ancient diffusion process radiating mainly from Egypt and Phoenicia &amp;quot;continued for many centuries to play upon the Pacific littoral of America, where it is responsible for ... the remarkable Pre-Columbian civilizations&amp;quot; (quoted in Zwernemann, &#039;&#039;Culture History and African Anthropology&#039;&#039;, 1983, p. 15).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
12. On these matters, see Harris, &#039;&#039;The Rise of Anthropological Theory&#039;&#039; (1968) and Steward, &#039;&#039;Theory of Culture Change: The Methodology of Multilinear Evolution&#039;&#039; (1955).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
13. See Koepping, &#039;&#039;Adolf Bastian and the Psychic Unity of Mankind&#039;&#039; (1983), Stocking &#039;&#039;Race, Culture, and Evolution&#039;&#039; (1968), and Harris, &#039;&#039;The Rise of Anthropological Theory&#039;&#039; (1968).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
14. Often the antidiffusionist camp was labeled the &amp;quot;cultural evolutionist&amp;quot; camp, and the debate as a whole was labeled &amp;quot;diffusionism versus evolutionism.&amp;quot; But, as I argue here, evolutionists were to some extent diffusionists and diffusionists were to some extent evolutionists. Moreover, I want to use the term &amp;quot;cultural evolution&amp;quot; in this book in a much broader and much less controversial sense, as indicating merely the search for explanation in larger questions of historical and cultural change. A problem that is &amp;quot;historical&amp;quot; becomes a problem of &amp;quot;cultural evolution&amp;quot; when we ask, broadly, &amp;quot;why?&amp;quot; Some scholars, of course, are not comfortable with this usage of the phrase &amp;quot;cultural evolution.&amp;quot; For some it carries baggage of economic determinism or environmental determinism or technological determinism, or it signifies the notion of an invariant sequence of cultural stages through which all human groups must pass—but I mean none of that. Most cultural geographers use the phrase &amp;quot;cultural evolution&amp;quot; just about as I use it here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
15. Both forms are sometimes combined; for instance, in the nineteenth century northwestern Europe was considered (by northwestern Europeans) to be absolutely civilized, Africa absolutely uncivilized, and all other areas (of the Eastern Hemisphere) somewhere in between. These matters are discussed later in this book.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
16. Max Weber&#039;s notion of &amp;quot;European rationality&amp;quot; is discussed in Chapter 2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
17. The varying conceptions of China, and also India, as semirational or intermittently rational or rational in some ways but not in others are discussed in Chapters 2 and 3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
18. The &amp;quot;bogeyman&amp;quot; refers to the Buginese, a Malay people who fought fiercely against the Europeans and so were stigmatized in this way. The most famous fictional vampire, Count Dracula, came to England from Outside (a barbarous mountain region on the frontier of the Turkish empire).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
19. On the history of the idea of progress in European thought, see, for instance, G. H. Mead, &#039;&#039;Movements of Thought in the Nineteenth Century&#039;&#039; (1936), Toulmin and Goodfield, &#039;&#039;The Discovery of Time&#039;&#039; (1965), Nisbet, &#039;&#039;History of the Idea of Progress&#039;&#039; (1980), and Bowler, &#039;&#039;The Invention of Progress&#039;&#039; (1989). It is true that the idea of progress as the normal condition was doubted by some thinkers during the nineteenth century (and especially in opposition to the idea of biological evolution), but this was a minor and intermittent countercurrent. See Stocking, &#039;&#039;Race, Culture, and Evolution&#039;&#039; (1987) and Bowler, &#039;&#039;The Invention of Progress&#039;&#039; (1989).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
20. See Huddleston, &#039;&#039;Origins of the American Indians: European Concepts, 1492-1729&#039;&#039; (1967), Williams, &#039;&#039;The American Indian in Western Legal Thought&#039;&#039; (1990); Hulme, &#039;&#039;Colonial Encounters: Europe and the Native Caribbean 1492-1797&#039;&#039; (1992); Gossett, &#039;&#039;Race: The History of an Idea in America&#039;&#039; (1963).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
21. At times the notion was advanced that these civilizations had somehow evolved in antediluvian times and had not been wiped out in the Flood (see, for example, Keightley, &#039;&#039;Outlines of History&#039;&#039;, 1849). Haskel (&#039;&#039;Chronology and Universal History&#039;&#039;, 1848, p. 9) speculates that Noah migrated to China where he or his descendants founded the Chinese monarchy. &amp;quot;The early improvement and populousness of the east, seems to favor this idea.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
22. From the mid-nineteenth century or perhaps earlier, the literature on the occult, on ghosts and monsters, and the like, tended to focus on extra-European origins or homes or sources of the witches, monsters, demons, zombies, walking mummies, evil spells (&amp;quot;black magic&amp;quot;), artifacts with supernatural powers, and so on, all of which have a tendency to diffuse into Europe as a kind of counterdiffusion, an undertow beneath European expansionism. See Brantlinger, &#039;&#039;Rule of Darkness: British Literature and Imperialism&#039;&#039; (1988).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
23. See W. A. Lewis, ed., &#039;&#039;Tropical development, 1880-1913&#039;&#039; (1970).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
24. See Bowler, &#039;&#039;The Invention of Progress&#039;&#039; (1989), Stocking, &#039;&#039;Victorian Anthropology&#039;&#039; (1987), Mandelbaum, &#039;&#039;History, Man and Reason&#039;&#039; (1971).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
25. Spencer, &#039;&#039;The Man Versus the State&#039;&#039; (1969). The complex interplay between individualistic and holistic theories of historical progress during the nineteenth century is discussed in G. H. Mead, &#039;&#039;Movements of Thought in the Nineteenth Century&#039;&#039; (1936) and Mandelbaum, &#039;&#039;History, Man and Reason&#039;&#039; (1971). I try to show in Blaut, &#039;&#039;The National Question: Decolonizing the Theory of Nationalism&#039;&#039; (1987b) how most theories of nationality and national evolution emerge from one or the other of these intellectual streams, one essentially Kantian and psychologistic, the other essentially Romantic and Hegelian.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
26. Among them: Malthus, J. S. Mill, T. Macauley, and Thackeray. See Brantlinger, &#039;&#039;Rule of Darkness: British Literature and Imperialism, 1830-1914&#039;&#039; (1987). Also see Williams, &#039;&#039;British Historians and the West Indies&#039;&#039; (1966) and Said, &#039;&#039;Orientalism&#039;&#039; (1979).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
27. See Thapar, &#039;&#039;Ancient Indian Social History: Some Interpretations&#039;&#039; (1978) and &amp;quot;Ideology and the Interpretation of Early Indian History&amp;quot; (1982), and B. Chandra, &amp;quot;Karl Marx, His Theories of Asian Societies, and Colonial Rule&amp;quot; (1981). We return to this issue in Chapter 2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
28. See in particular Marx&#039;s article, &amp;quot;The British Rule in India&amp;quot; (1979). In later work, Marx and Engels adopted a much more negative opinion about colonialism, developing to some extent the idea of colonial underdevelopment: see Blaut, &#039;&#039;The National Question: Decolonizing the Theory of Nationalism&#039;&#039; (1987b) for a discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
29. See Chapter 2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
30. See Asad, &#039;&#039;Anthropology and the Colonial Encounter&#039;&#039; (1975), and Temu and Swai, &#039;&#039;Historians and Africanist History&#039;&#039; (1981).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
31. Important examples are Eliot Smith &#039;&#039;The Diffusion of Culture&#039;&#039; (1933), Perry, &#039;&#039;The Primordial Ocean&#039;&#039; (1935), Schmidt, &#039;&#039;The Culture Historical Method of Ethnology&#039;&#039; (1939), Griffith Taylor, &#039;&#039;Environment and Nation&#039;&#039; (1945). See critiques in Radin, &#039;&#039;The Method and Theory of Ethnology&#039;&#039; (1965), Lowie, &#039;&#039;The History of Ethnological Theory&#039;&#039; (1937), and Harris &#039;&#039;The Rise of Anthropological Theory&#039;&#039; (1968).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
32. Here I am of course rejecting the view, common among European scholars, that colonies were relinquished voluntarily. This view has been rejected almost universally by scholars in the formerly colonial world. It may conceivably have been true for a few small islands from which profits no longer flowed to the colonizing power, but even such cases are debatable. It is worth noting that the United States has not given independence to any of the colonies it held at the close of World War II; has not even formally conceded the right of full self-determination (including independence) to Puerto Rico, the Virgin Islands, the Marianas, etc. The other colonial powers would presumably have taken the same position, had they had the power to do so in the face of colonial pro-independence forces; in such cases as the Dutch East Indies, French Indochina, Kenya, Angola, Mozambique, and so on, the colonizers tried to hold on to their possession by force of arms and failed. My view is set forth in Blaut, &#039;&#039;The National Question&#039;&#039; (1987b), chap. 4, and Blaut and Figueroa, &#039;&#039;Aspectos de la cuestion nacional en Puerto Rico&#039;&#039; (1988).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
33. Representative examples include &amp;quot;Operation Bootstrap&amp;quot; in Puerto Rico, the Colonial Development and Welfare programs in parts of the British Empire, the increased funding for colonial agriculture and health departments, the establishment of colonial universities, and so on. These programs, regardless of their underlying political purposes (often hidden from the technical personnel involved) were, overall, very impressive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
34. Often this work was a direct continuation of colonial technical work, often with the same personnel, now &amp;quot;foreign advisor&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;United Nations expert&amp;quot; rather than &amp;quot;colonial technical officer.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
35. Thus the Alliance for Progress, the Peace Corps, the elevated funding of technical and financial agencies of the Organization of American States, and the like.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
36. On ethnoscience, see, for example, Conklin, &amp;quot;Lexicographical Treatment of Folk Taxonomies&amp;quot; (1969), Frake, &amp;quot;The Ethnographic Study of Cognitive Systems&amp;quot; (1969), Blaut, &amp;quot;Some Principles of Ethnogeography&amp;quot; (1978), and Spradley and McCurdy, &#039;&#039;Anthropology: A Cultural Perspective&#039;&#039; (1975). In my view, the categories &amp;quot;history&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;science&amp;quot; cannot be distinguished ontologically, although historiography is hardly an exact science.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
37. Whitehead, &#039;&#039;Science and Philosophy&#039;&#039; (1948), p. 129.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
38. Kuhn, &#039;&#039;The Structure of Scientific Revolutions&#039;&#039; (1970). More relevant is Fleck&#039;s &#039;&#039;Genesis and Development of a Scientific Fact&#039;&#039; (1979).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
39. Tolman, &amp;quot;A Psychological Model&amp;quot; (1951).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
40. Dewey, &amp;quot;The Logic of Judgements of Practice,&amp;quot; in his &#039;&#039;Essays in Experimental Logic&#039;&#039; (1916).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= CHAPTER 2: The Myth of the European Miracle =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most European historians believe in some form of the theory of &amp;quot;the European miracle.&amp;quot; This is the argument that Europe forged ahead of all other civilizations far back in history—in prehistoric or ancient or medieval times—and that this internally generated historical superiority or priority explains world history and geography after 1492: the modernization of Europe, the rise of capitalism, the conquest of the world. Most historians do not see anything miraculous in this process, but the phrase &amp;quot;the European miracle&amp;quot; became in the 1980s a very popular label for the whole family of theories about the supposedly unique rise of Europe before 1492. The phrase acquired its new popularity mainly from a book by Eric L. Jones which appeared in 1981, a book simply entitled &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Although Eric L. Jones&#039;s 1981 book &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; popularized the phrase &amp;quot;the European miracle,&amp;quot; it had been in use for a long time with the same essential meaning: the unique rise of Europe before or during the Middle Ages. Not every historian would describe this as a &amp;quot;miracle,&amp;quot; but the term has wide acceptance, as evidence the fact that an international symposium entitled &amp;quot;The European Miracle&amp;quot; was held at Cambridge University in 1985.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The historians do not agree among themselves on the question why the miracle occurred: why Europe forged ahead in this perhaps miraculous way. Is it because Europeans are genetically superior? are culturally superior? live in a superior environment? Is it because one special, wonderful thing happened in Europe, or happened to Europeans at a special moment in history, giving Europeans a decisive advantage over other societies?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nor do the historians agree about when the miracle occurred or began. Did it occur back in the prehistoric age in what some still call the &amp;quot;Aryan&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Indo-European&amp;quot; culture? in the late-prehistoric &amp;quot;European &#039;Iron Age&#039;?&amp;quot; Did it begin with the Greeks? with the Romans? in the early Middle Ages? in the late Middle Ages? Did it happen continuously throughout history—a series of miracles—each pushing the Europeans farther and farther ahead of the rest of humanity?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The historians debate these matters, the questions &amp;quot;why&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;when,&amp;quot; but not the question &amp;quot;whether&amp;quot;—whether a miracle happened at all. Or, to be more precise, they do not even consider the possibility that the rise of Europe above other civilizations did not begin until 1492, that it resulted not from any European superiority of mind, culture, or environment, but rather from the riches and spoils obtained in the conquest and colonial exploitation of America and, later, Africa and Asia. This possibility is not debated at all, nor is it even discussed, although a very few historians (notably Janet Abu-Lughod, Samir Amin, Andre Gunder Frank, and Immanuel Wallerstein) have come close to doing so in very recent years.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Apparently my 1976 article, &amp;quot;Where Was Capitalism Born?&amp;quot; was the first publication to reject the &amp;quot;miracle&amp;quot; theory absolutely, that is, without qualification. In 1990 Samir Amin, commenting on a later paper of mine, indicated his basic agreement with this rejectionist position. (Amin, &amp;quot;Colonialism and the Rise of Capitalism: A Comment,&amp;quot; 1990; Blaut, &amp;quot;Colonialism and the Rise of Capitalism,&amp;quot; 1989; also see Blaut, &amp;quot;Fourteen Ninety-Two,&amp;quot; 1992; and Amin, &amp;quot;On Jim Blaut&#039;s &#039;Fourteen Ninety-Two,&#039;&amp;quot; 1992.) A few other historians have taken positions approaching this one; their views are discussed later in this chapter.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
My task in this chapter and in Chapter 3 (&amp;quot;Before 1492&amp;quot;) is to show that Europeans indeed had no superiority over non-Europeans at any time prior to 1492: they were not more advanced, not more modern, not more progressive. Then in Chapter 4 (&amp;quot;After 1492&amp;quot;) I will show how colonial riches brought about the rise of Europe and led to Europe&#039;s ultimate hegemony over the world, showing also that Europe&#039;s internal characteristics do not explain 1492—do not, that is, explain the origins of colonialism.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There seem to be two basic ways to argue that the myth of the European miracle is wrong, that Europe did not surpass other world civilizations before 1492. The best way by far is to look at the facts of history, and demonstrate that the evolutionary processes that were going on in Europe during and before the Middle Ages were essentially like the processes taking place elsewhere in the world in terms of rate and direction of development. I will try to demonstrate precisely this in Chapter 3, which compares the medieval landscapes of Europe, Africa, and Asia, and shows how a transition from feudalism and toward capitalism was occurring in many parts of the Eastern Hemisphere just prior to 1492.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But the myth of Europe&#039;s unique &amp;quot;rise,&amp;quot; its &amp;quot;miracle,&amp;quot; is so deeply embedded in European historical thought that an ordinary argument from the facts probably would not be persuasive. As we saw in Chapter 1, the dominant theory has been defended by generations of historians, with practically no dissenting argument; it is supported as well by many other ideas which are accepted as unquestioned truth in European culture; and it fits in with and supports the interests of European countries (and corporations) in their dealings with the non-European world. For these reasons, I have decided to use another kind of argument—to demonstrate the fallacies in the dominant theory—as a sort of ground-laying for the empirical argument.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the present chapter I will examine the most common arguments used by historians today to support the theory of the European miracle, and will try to show that they are unconvincing. This task is rendered somewhat complicated, for a small book like the present one, by the sheer number of different arguments currently in circulation and the number of historians who are writing books and articles on the subject of, and in support of, the theory of the European miracle. How, then, to proceed? I will advance by stages. First I will present a brief discussion of the ways in which historians have tended to argue the myth of the European miracle in recent decades, and I will show how a critical, revisionist point of view has begun to appear. Next I will lay out, in a kind of menu or classification or checklist, the most important arguments in support of this myth that are being put forward today, and I will try to show, for each argument in turn, how unconvincing it really is. In the third stage, I will summarize the empirical argument against the &amp;quot;miracle&amp;quot; position in two parts (the topics of Chapters 3 and 4, respectively): the evidence that Europe was not ahead of Africa and Asia (at a continental scale of attention) prior to 1492, and the evidence that colonialism after 1492 accounts for the selective rise of Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Mythmakers and Critics ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The idea that Europe was more advanced and more progressive than all other civilizations prior to 1492 was the central idea of classical Eurocentric diffusionism, as we saw in Chapter 1. Therefore we do not have to consider the origins of the European miracle theory: it is our inheritance from earlier times. However, after World War II the doctrine assumed a distinctly modern form. First of all, the racist arguments had been decisively rejected: no longer was it argued that non-Europeans are genetically inferior to Europeans and that it is this inferiority that explains why they lagged behind in history. Historians now generally accepted the idea that European historical advantages reflected facts and happenings of much earlier times. European superiority was a matter of prior arrival by Europeans at a stage of development that all other people could aspire to reach in the future: a matter, therefore, of priority, not innate superiority. Second, there was a rapid increase in historical scholarship concerning the non-European world after 1945, grounded in rather pragmatic political and economic interests, and emanating in part from government- and foundation-sponsored &amp;quot;foreign area studies programs,&amp;quot; but this scholarship nonetheless added greatly to the knowledge available in Western countries concerning non-Western history. The new knowledge was fairly quickly put to rather limited use: some of the wilder fables were discarded but the basic ideas about the non-Western world did not significantly change. Third, and most importantly, the postwar world came to embrace the crucial new theory of &amp;quot;modernization,&amp;quot; the theory that the diffusion of European ideas, things, and influence would bring about the economic development of the non-Western world in the coming Age of Development. This theory had important effects on history writing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Modernization as History ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The theory of modernization addressed the present and the future but it was fundamentally historical. Its basic principle was the notion that whatever had led in the past to European superiority could now be diffused out into the non-European world and assist that world to more or less catch up. As we saw in the last chapter, this new doctrine went through two phases of development, the first in the post-World War II period of decolonization, the second—an intensification of the diffusion effort—after the rise of socialist countries in the Third World, and particularly after the Cuban revolutionary victory in 1959.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A number of historical works appeared in the 1960s as part of this intellectual process. Their central purpose was to show that the European pattern of development, including most particularly the development of capitalism, had been somehow the one, the natural course of human progress, and many of these volumes quite explicitly drew the ideological conclusion that the proper, natural course of future development in the Third World would be to follow this natural European pattern (but not, of course, slavishly). The most influential of these works was Rostow&#039;s 1960 volume, &#039;&#039;The Stages of Economic Growth: A Non-Communist Manifesto&#039;&#039;. This book was a plain assertion that Europe&#039;s past formula for development, up to and including capitalism, was the only workable formula for non-Europe&#039;s future development. Rostow married world history to world development in a single diffusionist argument.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Another seminal work was Cyril Black&#039;s &#039;&#039;The Dynamics of Modernization: A Study in Comparative History&#039;&#039; (1966). Other such works in various fields will be discussed later in this chapter.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But there was a problem. Precisely what had caused the unique rise of Europe? Now we must return for a moment to the classical diffusionist period. European historians of the prior century were unanimous (I think) in their acceptance of the fundamental idea that Europe has been naturally and uniquely progressive. For most of them the basic force underlying the process was unquestioned: some drew on their religious faith, others built on metaphysical ideas (like Hegel&#039;s evolving &amp;quot;spirit&amp;quot;), others appealed to a Smithian or Utilitarian idea of individual human activity and purpose, and still others invoked the natural environment, or demographic behavior, or class struggle, or something else, but I think it likely that all of them held a common conception of an underlying force of Progress, a basic directional force like the Solar Wind, in relation to which partial facts (economic, psychological, environmental, and so on) were epiphenomenal or merely symptomatic. After World War II, however, a profoundly different set of basic beliefs became the norm. Now the problem of explaining the rise of Europe was seen as a total problem. That is, all of the phenomenon, including its most fundamental dynamics, required explanation, or, stated differently, had to be put into an explicit model in which explicit variables or &amp;quot;factors&amp;quot; were identified. There were, doubtless, many reasons for this new—or rather newly popular—approach, among them the maturation of the discipline of history itself, the loss of faith (in this age of chaos) in the idea of inevitable progress, the general secularization of European thought, and the development of social science disciplines. But whatever the overall explanation, what emerged was a set of historical models, some new, others (like Weberianism) refurbished, that explicitly tried to explain the &amp;quot;European miracle&amp;quot; in terms of specific causal factors. This was the signature of the modern form of diffusionist history. The effect of the modernization perspective was not, by any means, dominant in all of historical scholarship, but it was so in writings that sought to explain the larger transformations of European history, and particularly the problem of explaining the medieval changes that brought about the rise of capitalism and modernity—the &amp;quot;European miracle.&amp;quot; We will review many of these explanatory propositions later in the present chapter.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Perhaps one reason was the maturation of the discipline of history itself. Another was the influence, not entirely salutary, of positivistic scientific method on history, which led to an attempt to specify variables and &amp;quot;factors,&amp;quot; and, if possible, quantify each of them. Another reason was the loss of faith in the nineteenth-century idea of inevitable progress: after nearly a half century of chaos and war, progress definitely did not appear to be something natural and inevitable; it had to be explained and also produced. Still a third reason was the general secularization of European thought, including history, such that human events could not be assumed to reflect guidance of a higher power. Another reason, possibly a very important one, was the general development of academic disciplines, and their involvement in (and nutrition from) international and domestic policy. This implied that each discipline, seeing the world with some degree of bias in favor of its own subject-as-factor (for economists, the market factor; for psychologists, the motivation factor; for sociologists, the demographic factor and the social-structural factor; for geographers, the resource factor; etc.) tended to argue in favor of historical models that treated our factor as crucial and those of others as secondary. Since many social scientists wrote history in this process, this led to some special pleading.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Critique ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The modernization approach was quickly challenged because it gave no real role to non-Europe, past and present, save as an essentially passive recipient of diffusions from Europe. For the period before 1492, it claimed that the significant evolutionary processes took place in Greater Europe. For the period from 1492 to World War II, it claimed that evolutionary processes continued to effloresce mainly in Europe and that colonialism brought the fruits of this progress to non-Europe. For the present and the future, progress for non-Europe (the Third World) would consist of the continued spread of innovations, mainly through mechanisms basically inherited from the colonial era. These propositions were distinctly unpopular among intellectuals of the Third World, and the rapid development of Third World scholarship in this postcolonial period led rather quickly to the emergence of a critical, even rejectionist, body of thought, including a new historiography.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basic thinking went about as follows: For the precolonial era, it was necessary to resurrect one&#039;s own history and find out how it had contributed to the history of the world. (Colonialist history dismissed precolonial history for some colonies and distorted it for others. Therefore, as Amilcar Cabral said with deep irony, when the colonies gain their independence, they re-enter history.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Cabral, &#039;&#039;Unity and Struggle&#039;&#039; (1979).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;) For the colonial era, the belief that colonialism itself the was source of all progress was patently untrue and colonial history had to be rewritten to show how it had led to poverty rather than to progress. On a world scale, new models had to be developed to show that colonialism, far from diffusing modernization to non-European societies, had diffused a mixture of good and bad innovations, which, for much of the world, had been a process not of development but of underdevelopment.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;As to the present and future, Third World intellectuals tended to make two arguments. Those who supported the idea of a capitalist form of development argued that economic development must consist of the defense of native capital against the corrosive diffusion into one&#039;s country of the economic and political dominance of European countries and corporations. For socialists, influence and dominance by international capitalism quite obviously had to be rejected. Both groups tended to adopt &amp;quot;dependency theory&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;underdevelopment theory,&amp;quot; which was a theory both of history and of modern social processes and development. A relatively small minority of Third World intellectuals, usually reflecting the thinking and interests of the very wealthy and very right-wing sectors, welcomed the idea of economic domination by foreign capitalist interests. Since the wealthy social sectors dominated most Third World societies, this minority point of view often determined policy. Also, it received much more prominence than it deserved in the journals of the First World.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; This body of thought came to be known as &amp;quot;underdevelopment theory&amp;quot; in Africa and Asia and as &amp;quot;dependency theory&amp;quot; in Latin America. Out of it came the first serious critique of Eurocentric historiography.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One can trace the origins of this critique to earlier writings by a small number of historians, most of them colonial subjects, often writing in exile. Their main theme was a documentation of the negative effects of colonialism on a particular place and people. Some of the writers—among them W. E. B. DuBois, R. Palme Dutt, K. M. Panikkar, M. N. Roy, J. C. Van Leur, C. L. R. James, George Padmore, and Eric Williams—developed arguments on colonial processes at a world scale, and on the role of colonialism in the postmedieval and modern rise of capitalism and Europe. James showed that Caribbean slaves had played a role in the development of capitalism not fundamentally different from that of the working class in Europe. Williams&#039;s work ultimately had the strongest impact on Eurocentric history. He showed that the wealth from slavery and the slave plantation had been the crucial factor in the amassing of capital for the Industrial Revolution in England. This argument was the first major demonstration that non-Europe had played a central role in modernization itself, and a sizeable literature has grown up among European historians arguing about, and generally trying to counter, what is now generally called &amp;quot;the Williams thesis.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See James, &#039;&#039;A History of Pan-African Revolt&#039;&#039; (1938), &#039;&#039;The Black Jacobins&#039;&#039; (1938), &amp;quot;The Atlantic Slave Trade and Slavery&amp;quot; (1970); Williams, &#039;&#039;Capitalism and Slavery&#039;&#039; (1944). We discuss these matters in Chapter 4.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; During and after the period of decolonization this critical historical literature expanded greatly, and a large number of scholars began a direct attack on the diffusionist history of the colonial period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Much of this work will be discussed in later chapters. Here I want to make several concrete points about the critique. First of all, a number of historians from the European world (Bernal, Frank, Wallerstein, and others) joined Third World historians as central figures in the movement. Second, while the critique focused a good deal of attention on the pre-1492 period, showing that development had taken place in non-Europe—for instance, Sharma and Habib documented the development of feudal and postfeudal society in medieval India—for a long time very little scholarly attention, within this critical tradition, was focused on pre-1492 Europe; the first major work that dealt with this problematic from a non-Eurocentric point of view, that is—was Amin&#039;s 1974 volume &#039;&#039;Accumulation on a World Scale&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Amin, &#039;&#039;Accumulation on a World Scale&#039;&#039; (1974) and later works. My articles &amp;quot;Geographic Models of Imperialism&amp;quot; (1970) and &amp;quot;Where Was Capitalism Born?&amp;quot; (1976) laid out the skeleton of a general theory.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; This is perhaps understandable since most of the critical historians were themselves from the Third World, not from Europe, and European history was not often a major interest. Yet it was anomalous nonetheless. The core of the modernization doctrine in history was, after all, the argument that Europe had begun to modernize before other regions and before it established colonial control of other regions. Thus, to refute the basic thesis one would have to show (as I try to now in this book) that pre-1492 Europe was not uniquely progressive. Of course, part of this argument consists of demonstrations that other regions were progressive. But part of it must consist of refutations of the various &amp;quot;miracle&amp;quot; propositions, those that claim to find in ancient or medieval Europe some special quality of progressiveness.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is another, quite curious anomaly in the relative lack of attention to pre-1492 Europe by historians in this critical tradition, the tradition associated with underdevelopment or dependency theory and the critique of colonialism. This has to do with the curious relation between Third World scholarship, much of which is Marxist, and the Marxist scholarship of the European world. European Marxists were among the main critics of colonialism and among the main contributors to dependency-underdevelopment theory. Marxist theory also inherited from former times a strong anticolonial flavor and a profound skepticism regarding the theories propounded by nineteenth-century mainstream European historians.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;I deal with this matter in &#039;&#039;The National Question&#039;&#039; (1987b).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Yet, oddly, most European Marxist historians writing about pre-1492 Europe have tended to argue in favor of the uniqueness-of-Europe doctrine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mainstream European historians have also contributed to the critique of the central Eurocentric doctrine. This is not an anomaly. Scholars try to pursue the truth and accept it whether or not it accords with their ideological or cultural preferences. To some extent they succeed. Thus a number of European scholars specializing in non-Europe have uncovered some of the most important evidence against the Eurocentric model of pre-1492 world history. The work of the Dutch historian J. C. Van Leur in the 1930s, concerning the economic history of South and Southeast Asia is a classic example of this antisystemic scholarship.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Van Leur&#039;s 1934 essay &amp;quot;On Early Indonesian trade,&amp;quot; reprinted in his &#039;&#039;Indonesian Trade and Society&#039;&#039; (1955).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Another example relates to Chinese history. Half a century ago Duyvendak uncovered truly crucial facts about China&#039;s long-range voyaging in medieval times. Later, Needham and his associates produced a series of studies about the history of Chinese science and technology that had a profound impact on the Eurocentric model and (as we will see) forced Eurocentric historians to abandon a large piece of their argument concerning the supposed uniqueness of medieval European technology. Other Western scholars, like Wheatley and Elvin, delving into the empirical history of China with indifference to ideological questions, have produced other sorts of evidence about China&#039;s progressiveness in ancient and medieval times. All of this damages the miracle theory, although, as we will see later in this chapter, Eurocentric historians have found ways to repair most of the damage.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Duyvendak, &#039;&#039;Ma Huan Re-examined&#039;&#039; (1933); Needham and collaborators, &#039;&#039;Science and Civilization in China&#039;&#039;, published in 6 volumes between 1965 and 1984; Wheatley, &#039;&#039;The Golden Khersonese&#039;&#039; (1961) and &#039;&#039;The Pivot of the Four Quarters&#039;&#039; (1971); Elvin, &#039;&#039;The Pattern of the Chinese Past&#039;&#039; (1973).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The critique of Eurocentric history is a very large subject, and our concern in this volume is with just one part of it: the critique of European miracle theories about the world before 1492, and related theories which treat early modern world history as though non-Europe, and colonialism, were merely marginal to evolutionary processes. On these issues the critique has not progressed very far. I will give a few examples of important recent contributions, and others will be cited throughout this book. Janet Abu-Lughod&#039;s recent (1989) book, &#039;&#039;Before European Hegemony: The World System A.D. 1250-1350&#039;&#039;, is a seminal study that demonstrates (I think conclusively) that Europe was not more progressive and not more advanced than other civilizations in A.D. 1350. Having made this demonstration, she offers only a tentative and partial explanation for the selective rise of Europe, and decline of the Orient, after 1350. She suggests that the divergence took place in the period between 1350 and 1492. (I argue in this book that the divergence occurred only after 1492, with the beginnings of massive accumulation in the Western Hemisphere, a windfall that did not accrue to non-European civilizations of the Eastern Hemisphere, and so gave Europeans their first and decisive advantage over these other civilizations. See Chapter 4 below.) Samir Amin has argued in various recent works that Europe was not more advanced than Africa and Asia at the end of the Middle Ages, but rather was more unstable: because of its marginal location at the edge of the hemispheric zone of civilization, medieval class society was less fully seated, less stable, less indurated in Europe than elsewhere, and so Europe changed toward capitalism more readily. This argument, although it does not grant any &amp;quot;miracle&amp;quot; to pre-1492 Europe, nonetheless allows one of the old beliefs to stand: that Europe was more dynamic than non-Europe during the Middle Ages.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Amin, &#039;&#039;Unequal Development&#039;&#039; (1976), &#039;&#039;Eurocentrism&#039;&#039; (1988), &amp;quot;Colonialism and the Rise of Capitalism: A Comment&amp;quot; (1990).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Martin Bernal&#039;s new book &#039;&#039;Black Athena&#039;&#039; appears to have little connection to the subject of the present volume, yet his arguments are very closely connected indeed. Bernal shows that European historians have created a myth about ancient Europe according to which African and Asian origins and innovations are written out of history: the goddess Athena was African. Bernal&#039;s work undercuts the still very popular theories about ancient Europe&#039;s supposed uniqueness, and also exposes the ethnocentric and ideological roots of much of the European scholarship that underlies the classical diffusionist model.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Bernal, &#039;&#039;Black Athena&#039;&#039;, vol. 1 (1987) and vol. 2 (1991).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Edward Said&#039;s 1979 volume, &#039;&#039;Orientalism&#039;&#039;, a seminal critique of this process by which Eurocentrism and conservative ideology has dominated European scholarly writing about the Near East and Asia, is also important and quite relevant to our argument here. Other such works will be referred to as we proceed.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mention should also be made of Eric Wolf&#039;s 1982 book &#039;&#039;Europe and the Peoples Without History&#039;&#039; which provides a useful and important survey of the history of both European and non-European civilizations and shows how unconvincing is the theory that non-European civilizations, historically, were stagnant and unprogressive (that they were &amp;quot;peoples without history&amp;quot;). Wolf, however, stops short of questioning the truly crucial Eurocentric belief that Europeans were more progressive than non-Europeans in several ways that are crucial to the &amp;quot;European miracle&amp;quot; theory, and so he does not directly confront that theory. (It should be noted that most mainstream historians no longer argue that non-European civilizations are, or were, totally unprogressive, totally &amp;quot;unhistorical,&amp;quot; arguing instead about slow rates of change, &amp;quot;blockages&amp;quot; inhibiting change, and the like—a difference of phrasing which, as we will see, is not always a difference of argument.)&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Countercritique ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In recent years there has been an outpouring of writings that strongly defend the traditional Eurocentric view, upholding the European miracle theory in some of its various forms: we discuss many of these writings in this chapter. In the same stream of writings there are counterattacks against the more specific theories that question the traditional European views about slavery, colonialism, and the like (see Chapter 4), views that treat these processes and events as marginal in social evolution. And new theories (or modified forms of old theories) about the precise reason for the uniqueness of Europe are being put forward and discussed. I have a hunch that this is a scholarly movement that resonates with the new political attitudes concerning the Third World. In any event, the decade of the 1980s saw a number of writings of this sort and they appear to embody a rather conscious counterattack against the critical history discussed above.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;It is always risky to try to explain broad changes of fashion in scholarship, especially when the changes are still underway, so this interpretation cannot be more than a hunch, or hypothesis. Scholarly attitudes toward the Third World were very positive in the period of anticolonial and civil rights struggles. After the late 1960s the mood changed. Not only did more conservative views come to dominate the Western world, but rather unexpected difficulties emerged in the Third World itself: national conflicts, failure of development programs, and more. Western scholarship had never really abandoned the traditional view of Europe and its relations to non-Europe, including the diffusionist view of colonialism, and it appears that this older paradigm, never abandoned, simply became, once again, thoroughly dominant. Certainly the attention that had been paid previously to dependency theory and related views fell away among mainstream scholars. Among Marxists the process was even more dramatic, because it was less expected. In brief, Eurocentric Marxists who dismissed the role of the Third World both historically and in the present now became virtually the only Marxists within the academic world to pronounce upon issues related to the Third World. It became quite fashionable to insist, once again, that only the working class of the advanced capitalist countries can bring about socialism because each stage of history commences in this part of the world (Inside) before it spreads to the rest of the world (Outside). In the conservative camp, not only did Eurocentric views regain their hegemony, but one began, now, to hear whispers of views not far distant from racism: views about Third World peoples not having the potential to develop.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some of the writers in this new literature are very self-consciously engaged in such a counterattack. A number of them are Marxists and are insisting that the true, the original, the correct Marxist doctrine recognizes the priority, past and present, of Europe. Robert Brenner, for example, boldly argues that capitalism was invented by northwestern Europeans, with no help from others, and therefore (600 years later) we must acknowledge the continued priority of Europe. A number of other Marxists, like Perry Anderson and Bill Warren, argue similar positions.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Brenner, &amp;quot;The Origins of Capitalist Development: A Critique of Neo-Smithian Marxism&amp;quot; (1977), &amp;quot;Agrarian class structure and economic development in pre-industrial Europe&amp;quot; (1985), &amp;quot;The Agrarian roots of European capitalism&amp;quot; (1985b); Anderson, &#039;&#039;Passages from Antiquity to Feudalism&#039;&#039; (1974), &#039;&#039;Lineages of the Absolute State&#039;&#039; (1974); Warren, &#039;&#039;Imperialism: Pioneer of Capitalism&#039;&#039; (1980).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Among mainstream historians the most dramatic event was the appearance in 1981 of Eric L. Jones&#039;s &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039;. This book is a remarkable recital of a goodly share of the colonial-era ideas about the precocity of Europe and the backwardness and irrationality of non-Europe. More remarkable still is the positive reception this book has received among many scholars, as though most of these old doctrines had not long since been disproved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another movement at present is an attempt to find qualities present in ancient and medieval European culture, and absent in other cultures, which were the reasons for European development: qualities in the European family, the European political system, the European mind, and so forth. This movement is actively resurrecting the turn-of-the-century views of Max Weber about Europe&#039;s supposed &amp;quot;rationality&amp;quot; and the like; indeed, most (not all) of these scholars can be thought of as Weberians and many of them define themselves in that way. I will discuss Weber&#039;s views later in this chapter, along with the views of some modern Weberian scholars, among them Michael Mann and John A. Hall.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the next section of this chapter I will try to extract the most important of these newer views proclaiming Europe&#039;s pre-1492 &amp;quot;miracle,&amp;quot; and I will try to show that these views are mistaken.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Myth ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The myth of the European miracle is the doctrine that the rise of Europe resulted, essentially, from historical forces generated within Europe itself; that Europe&#039;s rise above other civilizations, in terms of level of development or rate of development or both, began before the dawn of the modern era, before 1492; that the post-1492 modernization of Europe came about essentially because of the working out of these older internal forces, not because of the inflowing of wealth and innovations from non-Europe; and that the post-1492 history of the non-European (colonial) world was essentially an outflowing of modernization from Europe. The core of the myth is the set of arguments about ancient and medieval Europe that allow the claim to be made, as truth, that Europe in 1492 was more modernized, or was modernizing more rapidly, than the rest of the world.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is a myth in the classical sense of the word: a story about the rise of a culture that is believed widely by the members of that culture. It is also a myth in the sense of the word that implies something not true. In the following discussion I will unravel the fabric of this myth and show that the strands of belief that compose it are very feeble.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;I will discuss only the more important beliefs, perhaps neglecting a few of these. And I will give just enough evidence to show that these beliefs are not self-evidently true. Much fuller evidence is given, to dispute some of the beliefs, in Chapters 3 and 4.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The number of distinguishable belief statements that make up this myth are, I am sure, uncountable. One of the many reasons the myth is so durable is the fact that the basic generalization, the doctrine of the miracle, is supported by such a great variety of individual beliefs that historians of a given era can disprove some subset of these beliefs and yet the supporters of the myth can merely shift to other beliefs as grounding for the myth.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A more fundamental problem has to do with the way beliefs are licensed. Beliefs tend to gain acceptance if they support the myth, and are either rejected or denied attention if they do not do so. One part of this problem of belief licensing (and relicensing, delicensing, etc.) poses a particularly, perhaps uniquely, serious difficulty for efforts to critique the miracle theory. Many of the beliefs that support this theory are implicit, not explicit; that is, they do not enter into the scholarly discourse of historians, and sometimes they do not enter even into conscious discourse in general. (Recall the discussion of implicit beliefs in Chapter 1.) Many of these beliefs we learn as children. Others seem self-evidently &amp;quot;reasonable&amp;quot; because they accord with deep values of the culture, or with other, accepted beliefs (historical, practical, religious, and so on). Thus, the conviction that ancient and medieval Europe was more progressive than other civilizations is supported by explicit beliefs, but these lie in a matrix of implicit beliefs—unquestioned and usually unnoticed—about the progressive Europeans who &amp;quot;were our ancestors.&amp;quot; By contrast, the matrix of implicit beliefs about historical non-Europe includes ideas of alienness, savagery, cruelty, cannibalism, deceitfulness, stupidity, cupidity, immodesty, dirtiness, disease, and so on—a matrix firmly supporting the general belief that non-Europe cannot have been progressive. Examples of these sorts of implicit beliefs, both positive and negative, will appear as we proceed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One kind of explicit belief about European superiority will not be discussed here in detail. This is the openly religious statement, grounded in faith, that a Christian god will naturally raise His people higher than all others. Although we will refer to this view in various contexts, it is not the kind of argument that can be analyzed or criticized, because it is grounded in a faith that cannot be tested empirically; some believe it to be true and others do not, and that is as far as the matter can be taken. Suffice it to say at this point: the religious argument was so nearly universally accepted down to the nineteenth century that other arguments were not seen as necessary to many European intellectuals. Why, indeed, ask for the reasons that Christian Europeans are superior when we know that unbelievers will not go to heaven and, in this world, will not enjoy the grace of God? Unbelievers will naturally be rendered less intelligent, less fortunate, and so on. So long as scholars and educated people believed that religion underlies all things, including science, and that God intervenes to control human affairs, then it could simply be assumed that Europeans were superior because that was God&#039;s will. It is what you would expect a Christian god to do for Christians, particularly for those Christians who worship Him in the right way. By the middle of the nineteenth century, when Eurocentric diffusionism was at its height, when Europeans hardly ever doubted their superiority over everyone else, although the explicitly religious arguments were disappearing from scholarly discourse, they were still there implicitly, as implicit beliefs. I rather suspect that the great majority of arguments for the superiority of Europeans were finally grounded in a religious faith: if the European environment is superior, that is because God made it so; if the white race is superior, that is because God made it so; if Europeans are more rational than everyone else and this has no explicit explanation, one can infer that it is the work of God; and so on. I do not know to what extent this kind of implicit appeal to the Deity is still present but unnoticed in the thinking of contemporary Eurocentric scholars, but I am certain that it quite often is so. We will from time to time discuss the ideas of scholars (like Lynn White, Jr. and K. F. Werner) who explicitly connect their views about history with their religious beliefs; in such thinkers the directionality of the causal arguments will be noted but not in any sense condemned. Sometimes a scholar makes such arguments unconsciously and implicitly. The only really disturbing cases are those that exhibit conscious hypocrisy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Biology ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Basically two sorts of argument have been used to explain the uniqueness, the superiority, of Europe and Europeans. One sort appeals to some noncultural force or factor as prime cause; the other finds the prime cause within culture itself. Setting aside the doctrine of divine intervention (which one would generally think of as a cause external to human culture, although the point is theologically rather complicated), two kinds of noncultural, external causation are common. One appeals to human biology, the other to the natural environment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Race ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Biological arguments assert, in general, that Europeans are superior, biologically, to non-Europeans. The classical and typical form of this argument was biological racism, the idea that Europeans had superior heredity, and so were born with abilities greater than those displayed by non-Europeans. Europeans were brighter, better, and bolder than non-Europeans because of their heredity. Generally the descriptive category used was not &amp;quot;Europeans&amp;quot; but rather &amp;quot;members of the white race,&amp;quot; but the distinction was not usually very important. Non-Europeans who were classified as members of the white (so-called) race were nonetheless believed to be inferior because they belonged to inferior subraces. Sometimes Europeans themselves were divided into superior and inferior subraces. Early in the nineteenth century it was widely, though not dominantly, believed that white people were not even of the same biological species as people of other races. This theory, &amp;quot;polygenesis,&amp;quot; claimed to have both biblical and scientific support.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Chapter 1, note 2.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Its primary importance was its use as a rationalization for slavery: if Africans were not truly human, why, enslaving them could not be an evil act. This theory melted away during the course of the nineteenth century, mainly because it was offensive to liberal, modern, antislavery thought; what replaced it, however, was not much of an improvement. This was the doctrine we call classical racism, the belief that different human races have different endowments, just as different breeds of domestic animals have such differences—differences of intelligence, aggressiveness, courage, and the rest—and these different endowments are matters of biological inheritance. It was then argued, for instance, that Africans were endowed with lower intelligence than Europeans, so it was both natural and moral for Europeans to colonize Africa and make all decisions on behalf of the Africans who, themselves, either did not have the innate ability to make these decisions, to govern themselves, or were just sufficiently less intelligent than the Europeans that a period of European control and tutelage was necessary while these slow-thinking Africans learned how to govern themselves. Racism, in a word, had as its main function the justification of colonialism and all other forms of oppression visited upon non-Europeans, including minority peoples in countries such as the United States.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Toward the end of the nineteenth century racism acquired a pseudoscientific aura of apparent truth. Scientists claimed to have proof of the differences among races, particularly as to intelligence. Now, also, they were armed with Mendelian genetics, so it seemed eminently reasonable for scientists who were, themselves, racists, now to assert that they had proof of the truth of the racist theories in which they already believed. These so-called proofs were unmasked as pseudoscience in a slow process that continued down to World War II: indeed, even today there are more than a few so-called &amp;quot;scientific racists.&amp;quot; What we need to notice about scientific racism is that it merely provided a new way of justifying something that was already almost universally believed to be true among Europeans. This meant, on the one hand, that it did not do much to intensify racism—which was in fact reaching a crescendo of intellectual and scholarly importance around the turn of the century for social reasons, having to do mainly with the growing importance of colonialism—and, on the other hand, that the disproving of scientific racism did not have much to do with the decline of racism&#039;s popularity in the present century. Racism emerged from prescientific roots and survived so long as it was useful, science or no science.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is not to deny that scientific racism gave strong impetus to racist beliefs in society; in a time when science was acquiring great prestige and influence, scientific arguments were indeed important.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Bowler, &#039;&#039;The Invention of Progress&#039;&#039; (1989); Harris, &#039;&#039;The Rise of Anthropological Theory&#039;&#039; (1968); Gossett, &#039;&#039;Race: The History of an Idea in America&#039;&#039; (1963); Jackson, &#039;&#039;Race and Racism: Essays in Social Geography&#039;&#039; (1987); Stocking, &#039;&#039;Race, Culture, and Evolution&#039;&#039; (1968); Trigger, &#039;&#039;A History of Archeological Thought&#039;&#039; (1989).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; And scientific racism helped in some special ways. One important example here has to do with supposed differences in endowment among the supposed subraces within the so-called white race. Anti-Semitism, along with anti-Muslim attitudes relating to colonialism in the Middle East, led to a proliferation of theories about the inferiority of the so-called &amp;quot;Semitic&amp;quot; subrace. (&amp;quot;Semite,&amp;quot; of course, should refer only to someone who speaks a Semitic language, such as Hebrew or Arabic.) This racist underpinning for anti-Semitism, then, became extremely useful for the general argument about the superiority of Europeans in history over all non-Europeans.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Bernal, &#039;&#039;Black Athena&#039;&#039;, vol. 1 (1987).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Semitic peoples were acknowledged to belong to the white race. Now it could be argued that only Europeans belonged to the really superior subrace of whites. Semites were inferior. So were the non-Semitic peoples of western Asia (Persians, Turks, and so forth). Indeed, in certain situations it was even argued that scientific racism proved the inferiority of southern and eastern Europeans: the northern, British and Germanic stock was truly superior to Italians, Slavs, and the rest. One famous instance of this sort of argument was the series of pseudoscientific testimonials given before the U.S. Congress at the time it was debating the first important immigration legislation in the 1920s. Scientists solemnly assured the Congress that southern Europeans were inferior people, and so should be excluded from free immigration to the United States in order to maintain the high racial quality of American stock.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Gossett, &#039;&#039;Race&#039;&#039; (1963).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today very few educated Europeans believe that there are genetic, inherited differences among the races as to intelligence or any other quality that might favor or inhibit social progress. Although a few people believe in the doctrine of classical racism, most of them are careful to keep their views to themselves, because today the doctrine is so thoroughly rejected, and viewed with such repugnance. If this were a book dealing with the history of ideas, we could go into the explanation for this transformation—the decline and fall of classical racism over a period of no more than two scholarly generations. During the 1920s the belief in the influence, major or minor, of inherited or racial differences was very widespread. After 1945 the theory was very rarely defended. Probably the key factor was Nazism. The Nazis grounded their ideology in this belief, claiming that the so-called Nordics were a Master Race, that inferior kinds of Europeans, inferior (so-called) subraces of whites—like the so-called Semitic race—and all other races as a whole deserved to be ruled by the Master Race. The Master Race, moreover, had the right to eliminate inferior subraces by genocide. Racism therefore was seen, and still is seen, as a component of the horrible ideology of Nazism. It is true that a small and fanatic group still preaches classical racism, and that a very small number of academics still proclaim its validity. The need to fight against the doctrine has not entirely ended. But this no longer is the important issue when we talk about Eurocentric prejudices, because another doctrine has largely replaced classical racism and performs much the same function, rooting its argument not in genetics but in culture. This doctrine can be thought of as cultural racism.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Blaut, &amp;quot;The Theory of Cultural Racism&amp;quot; (1992).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Classical racism was so pervasive, down through the 1920s, that it probably figured as an explicit or implicit foundation for most arguments about the superiority of Europeans in history. It is as though the scholars who asked why Europe had risen and other societies had not done so had part of their answer at the outset: Europeans began with a genetic advantage, large or small, and then, throughout later history, they were always to a greater or lesser extent favored by the influence of their genetic superiority in matters intellectual, giving them superior decision-making ability, inventive ability, and so on. Here was an important reason why it did not, in those times, seem crucial to ask the question, &amp;quot;Why?&amp;quot; At root, the answer was considered self-evident. Even moderate racists, such as Max Weber (whose views we examine below), could therefore assume that European superiority was carried along by a kind of subtle undertow of genetics, that this made Europeans at all times slightly more &amp;quot;rational&amp;quot; (Weber&#039;s favorite word), and, therefore, slightly more progressive. It is very interesting that modern scholars retain the notion of the superiority of European &amp;quot;rationality,&amp;quot; a notion derived from Weber and through him from all of nineteenth-century social thought, yet they vigorously deny that the source of this &amp;quot;rationality&amp;quot; is racial superiority. The intellectual contortions they have to go through to retain the one without the other will claim our interest when we discuss this matter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Among the historians whose theories about the &amp;quot;European miracle&amp;quot; are at present widely supported, only Max Weber uses classical racist argument in a clear and overt way. But Weber was writing in the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries, when classical racism was accepted by the majority of European scholars. Weber&#039;s arguments are a rather mild form of racism. He did indeed write of the &amp;quot;hereditary . . . hysteria of the Indian,&amp;quot; a basis for his argument that Indian religion prevented Indian development.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&amp;quot;Hereditary neuralgia of the presumably strong tendency toward hysteria and autohypnosis of the Indian...&amp;quot; Max Weber, &#039;&#039;The Religion of India&#039;&#039; (1967), p. 387. This postulate is basic to Weber&#039;s analysis of Brahminism as prime cause for India&#039;s lack of development.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; He considered Africans to be genetically incapable of factory work.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&amp;quot;[The] ... negroes long ago showed themselves unsuitable for factory work and the operation of machines; they have not seldom sunk into a cataleptic sleep. Here is one case in economic history where tangible racial distinctions are present&amp;quot; Weber, &#039;&#039;General Economic History&#039;&#039; (1981), p. 379. Although Weber says here that this is merely &amp;quot;one case&amp;quot; of racial influences, note that the case is crucial for Weber&#039;s analysis both of &amp;quot;rationality&amp;quot; and of modernization; the &amp;quot;racial distinctions&amp;quot; here separate out Africans in a fundamental way: a clear case of moderate yet crucial racism. In the same vein, &amp;quot;it was found that the American Indians were entirely unsuitable for plantation labor&amp;quot; (p. 299).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Chinese have a &amp;quot;slowness in reacting to unusual [intellectual] stimuli,&amp;quot; a &amp;quot;credulity&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;docility&amp;quot; that Weber thinks are wholly or partly hereditary traits.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Weber, &#039;&#039;The Religion of China&#039;&#039; (1951), pp. 231-232. Weber considers these to be &amp;quot;racial qualities of the Chinese&amp;quot; (p. 230) although cultural factors may be involved.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; And Europe&#039;s greater &amp;quot;rationality&amp;quot; has a definite hereditary basis.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Weber, &#039;&#039;The Protestant Ethic and the Spirit of Capitalism&#039;&#039; (1958), p. 30. Weber says here that &amp;quot;it would be natural to suspect that the most important reason&amp;quot; for the rationality of the Occident lies in &amp;quot;differences of heredity,&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;the importance of biological heredity,&amp;quot; he thinks, is &amp;quot;very great&amp;quot; (p. 30). But we do not yet know how to measure its influence, so our attention should focus mainly on the cultural factors (pp. 30-31). This was typical moderate racism (as I call it) for the time the work was published (1904-1905).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; But the fact remains that Weber gave much greater weight to nonracial factors. And Weber, for his time, was only a moderate racist.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moderate racism is, today, a more serious problem in the world of scholars than is classical racism, because it is mainly an implicit theory. We noted that Weber believed in the significance of racial differences, but he referred to the matter very rarely; yet it must have been an unstated, perhaps implicit, part of many of his arguments about social evolution in general and the comparative evolution of Europe and non-Europe in particular. This was fairly typical of early twentieth-century scholarship, hence the racism in that scholarship often is too difficult to identify, and the arguments presented by scholars seem not to be racist when they do not explicitly mention race as a factor. But more serious still is the surviving influence of what I call very moderate racism. A great number, perhaps the majority, of mainstream scholars, in the period, say, of the 1920s, believed that racial differences were very slight and that the individual human being&#039;s capabilities and potentialities would not be predictable from his or her race, that race differences only appeared influential on a statistical basis for large groups: for instance, a slightly higher average &amp;quot;intelligence quotient&amp;quot; for whites as against blacks. This belief was consistent with militant opposition to racial discrimination. But it was not much better than classical racism when applied to questions of social evolution and comparison between European and non-European history. This is so because the historical arguments did not need to postulate large racial differences. If whites, on the average, held a tiny advantage over non-whites in, let us say, inventiveness, that tiny advantage, working out its influence over the centuries and millennia, would produce the result that whites built high civilization and nonwhites did not. In a sense, this very moderate racism was a more serious problem than ordinary racism, because it allowed scholars to take liberal positions in opposition to overt racial discrimination yet continue to believe that whites are superior genetically to nonwhites within the subject matter of their own fields—anthropology, geography, history, and so on. It did reduce the significance of race to that of one &amp;quot;factor&amp;quot; among many, but it did not eliminate racial explanations in the matter of Europe&#039;s supposed superiority.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;I have not discussed the question whether biological racism remains important today as a genuinely implicit theory, that is, one still accepted but not consciously so. I suspect that it does. Some Eurocentric historians hold to positions regarding individual differences between Europeans and non-Europeans that are so extreme, and so bigoted, that it is difficult to avoid the conclusion that at least a few of them may hold to an implicitly racist infratheory, perhaps unconsciously believing, that is, that the inferiority of non-Europeans is genetically determined.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Probably it is unnecessary to say here that there is no credible evidence in support of the idea that races differ in genetic inheritance except in trivial matters like skin color. Even the idea of race is a vague abstraction and not really useful. For our purposes, the generalization that counts is this: racial differences explain nothing about culture or cultural evolution.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Among many sources on the racism fallacy, see Franz Boas&#039; classic book, &#039;&#039;Race, Language, and Culture&#039;&#039; (1948); also Blum, &#039;&#039;Pseudoscience and Mental Ability&#039;&#039; (1978); Gossett, &#039;&#039;Race&#039;&#039; (1965); Haller, &#039;&#039;Outcasts from Evolution&#039;&#039; (1971); Jackson, &#039;&#039;Race and Racism&#039;&#039; (1987); Magubane, &#039;&#039;The Ties that Bind: African-American Consciousness and Africa&#039;&#039; (1987); Gill and Levidow, &#039;&#039;Anti-Racist Science Teaching&#039;&#039; (1987).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Demography ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Demographic behavior is usually considered the second important biological factor in explanations for the European miracle. Causality here is very murky. The specific form of theory with which I am concerned claims that Europeans, historically, controlled their population growth, whereas other peoples did not, so that Europe tended not to suffer overpopulation, and did not encounter what many historians call the &amp;quot;Malthusian disasters&amp;quot; that supposedly prevented forward progress in non-European societies. Malthusianism postulates, in its essence, that ordinary people do not control their sexual urges and so have more offspring than can be fed; a disaster of some sort ensues, with famine, pestilence, or war now reducing the population; and then people again breed more children than they should, and the cycle renews. Malthus considered this uncontrollable sexual urge to be general in the human species, although the educated classes could control themselves to some degree. Modern explanations for the &amp;quot;European miracle&amp;quot; modify this theory in a key respect: they assert that Europeans, historically, have had a cultural pattern of limiting the number of offspring whereas non-Europeans lacked this pattern; as a result, European population was maintained, throughout history, in rough long-term proportion to resources, in spite of periodic Malthusian crises, crises which were important in explaining various facts of European history but were vastly less significant than the supposed permanent grip of Malthusian forces—lack of demographic control and perennial overpopulation and misery—in non-European societies. Moreover, according to these historians, whenever technological advance or some other fortunate circumstance led to a rise in living standards, Europeans, unlike non-Europeans, did not allow their population to rise and thus eliminate the fruits of progress. We need to notice that this argument does not really center on the biology of reproduction but, again, on rationality: it is claimed or assumed that Europeans think about the problem of population and others do not. So demographic arguments for the superiority of Europe in history always return either to culture or to race: Europeans are more rational either because they have superior heredity or because they have superior culture. If non-Europeans have uncontrollable sexual urges, if they behave like the beasts in the field, this is either a sign of genetic inferiority or a cultural quirk. In the arguments most frequently encountered today, either culture is invoked or the matter is left ambiguous. Yet there is a paradox. Many historians believe that demography is an independent causal force in history. This belief is generally grounded in a quasi-biological argument: ordinary people have only partial success in controlling their sexual urges, and only partial success (or none at all) in controlling and spacing the birth of children.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The idea that demographic behavior is not fully under social control, is a primordial biological fact or factor, seems to underlie the thinking of most Eurocentric historians (conspicuously Eric L. Jones, Michael Mann, and John Hall). The basic proposition seems to be that population will necessarily grow beyond the rational limits, and so overpopulation must result unless societies find nondemographic solutions, notably by increasing food supply to feed the inexorably increasing population. See, for instance, Michael Mann, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039;, vol. 1 (1986): If agricultural yields had not increased in medieval Europe, &amp;quot;the continent would ... have experienced a similar Malthusian cycle every century or so—and would not have generated capitalism&amp;quot; (p. 402). This view is even encountered, occasionally, in the radical and feminist movements. Note the following view put forward by a Marxist-feminist: &amp;quot;(We) assume (given the ubiquity of the sex drive ...) that the total number of conceptions in a population will tend to exceed those desired within a given incentive structure, and this unintended surplus will be greater, the more imperfect are the means at hand. ... A given fertility pattern then is taken to be &#039;rational&#039; ... except for a small but variable excess (of births),&amp;quot; Seccombe, &amp;quot;Marxism and Demography,&amp;quot; (1983), p. 31. The context is a discussion of European medieval social evolution, but the argument is given mainly in support of Brenner&#039;s theory about the strictly European rise of capitalism. Most radicals and feminists reject Malthusianism and would reject Seccombe&#039;s view as Malthusian.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Many supporters of the miracle myth simply argue, then, that Europeans have greater, though still partial, success in controlling their behavior than do non-Europeans. For instance, Eric L. Jones claims that this is what he calls &amp;quot;the quality of Europeanness&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Europe did not spend the gifts of its environment as rapidly as it got them in a mere insensate multiplication of the common life.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), p. 3. Part of the passage is a quotation.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In other words, Europeans do not simply reproduce thoughtlessly, as non-Europeans do. Jones makes the same point in many different ways; for instance, he says of Chinese peasants that they preferred &amp;quot;breeding new people&amp;quot; to improving their economic and political circumstances.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), p. 219.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; John A. Hall makes a similar point:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expansion of the European economy did not occur [through expansion of cultivated acreage], as in late traditional China, because improvements in output were not eaten up by a massive growth in population. The ratio between population and [cultivated] acreage in Europe remained favourable ultimately because of the relative continence of the European family.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties: The Causes and Consequences of the Rise of the West&#039;&#039; (1985), p. 131. Italics added.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Europeans are sexually &amp;quot;continent.&amp;quot; Europeans, therefore, do not suffer overpopulation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another point worthy of notice: the historians have no difficulty invoking population growth as a positive factor in European history, as an indication of progress—for instance, the growth of Europe&#039;s population in the eleventh century and thereafter is seen as proof that medieval Europe was healthily advancing—whereas population growth in non-European societies is seen as negative, as the working out of Malthusian laws of &amp;quot;overpopulation.&amp;quot; We will encounter examples of this very one-sided form of argument as we proceed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is now abundant evidence that all societies practice population control.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;As F. Hassan points out, &amp;quot;Among human populations the practice of population control in one form or another is universal.&amp;quot; (&amp;quot;Demographic Archeology,&amp;quot; 1978, p. 71.)&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; They seem to do so very effectively at the aggregate level: although individual family groups may or may not succeed in controlling the incidence of conception—because the methods of birth control are often rather hit or miss—the society as a whole seems able to encourage population growth or discourage it quite successfully.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Some families will of course have more conceptions than desired, and others fewer, because birth control techniques are imperfect, but the average for the larger group will be broadly in line with the group&#039;s values and population targets. The techniques run the gamut from variable age of marriage and variable dowry or bride price, to complexity of marriage rules (defining who, in a kin system, is eligible to be one&#039;s spouse), to timing of sexual relations, to the use of antiterility and abortive devices, to infanticide, and other practices.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It is most unlikely that population growth takes place when the society would, in the long run, suffer as a consequence; or, to put the matter more precisely, the members of a society change their demographic behavior in the space of a couple of generations when it becomes clear to them, as they observe changes around them in the probability of infants surviving to adulthood, and so on, that such change is desirable. The knowledge that all of this is indeed the case has only appeared recently.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Much of the scholarship comes from India, where colonial ideology used to claim that poverty is a result of people having too many children. Now demographers and other social scientists have disproven this myth. See, for instance, Mamdani, &#039;&#039;The Myth of Population Control&#039;&#039; (1972), and Nag, &amp;quot;How Modernization Can Also Increase Fertility&amp;quot; (1980). For Africa, see, for example, Kitching, &amp;quot;Proto-Industrialization and Demographic Change&amp;quot; (1983); Swindell, &amp;quot;Domestic Production, Labor Mobility, and Population Change in West Africa, 1900-1980&amp;quot; (1981); Cordell and Gregory, the introduction to &#039;&#039;African Population and Capitalism&#039;&#039; (1987).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; But this accumulating evidence really cuts the ground from under all Malthusian theories, historical and contemporary, European and non-European. The argument that population growth is an automatic, biological process, which occurs whether or not there is food enough to feed additional mouths, is simply wrong.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See, for instance, numerous studies showing the plasticity of birthrates, including Nag &amp;quot;How Modernization Can Also Increase Fertility&amp;quot; (1980), Collyer, &#039;&#039;Birth Rates in Latin America&#039;&#039; (1965), and Harewood, &amp;quot;Population Growth in Grenada&amp;quot; (1966).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the evidence began to accumulate that historic European populations did indeed practice population control, some scholars decided, appropriately, that the old Malthusian models do not make sense in Europe: family size was kept small, births were controlled, and so forth, back in the Middle Ages. This called for rejection of one traditional theory, the idea that there is a general pattern for all so-called preindustrial societies (or &amp;quot;traditional societies,&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;peasant societies&amp;quot;), involving high and uncontrolled birth rates, large families, etc., and thus, inevitably, a Malthusian trend toward overpopulation. Most historians today seem still to be wedded to the Malthusian theory, and still believe that medieval social change in Europe was mainly, or at least partly, produced by Malthusian cycles of overpopulation.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Aston and Philipn, eds., &#039;&#039;The Brenner Debate&#039;&#039; (1985), especially the introduction by R. Hilton.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; But some historians now reject this perspective: population, in essence, is viewed by them as a dependent variable, not an independent variable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But only in Europe. This newer, essentially anti-Malthusian, theory was rapidly shaped into a new explanation for the European &amp;quot;miracle.&amp;quot; It was simply asserted that European people, historically, controlled their population, and so, when they accumulated surpluses of food and commodities and wealth, these were not subsequently dissipated as population grew out of control and stole away the savings. This pattern, said these historians, was uniquely European and it was one important reason why Europeans were able to accumulate wealth and eventually rise into modernity and capitalism. Non-Europeans, by contrast, continued in their unmoden, traditional pattern, with overpopulation wiping out all benefits of forward progress. These Eurocentric historians, in a manner characteristic of tunnel history, did not notice that new scholarship on demography, some of it on historical demography—in various non-European parts of the world, from India to Barbados—was tending to overturn Malthusian notions as they apply to non-Europe just as readily as had been the case a decade earlier in European scholarship.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Perhaps more readily, because the Malthusian explanation for poverty in Third World countries has been a rather troublesome issue for scholars and planners in these countries, and it has been important to show that poverty in their countries is not somehow caused by the demographic misbehavior of ordinary people.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We will take up a related matter, theories about the uniqueness of the European family, at a later point in this chapter. For now, it is enough to say, simply, that the demographic arguments in support of the European miracle are utterly unconvincing. This holds true both for the theories grounded in the belief in baleful Malthusian forces and for those which assert that Europeans, uniquely, know how to avoid those forces.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Environment ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Environmental determinism, the theory that the natural environment strongly influences human affairs and human history, is no longer a popular doctrine, but it is still used quite regularly in explanations for the European &amp;quot;miracle.&amp;quot; The point should, however, be qualified: Environmental determinism, in the form it is used in these arguments today, is a &amp;quot;determinism&amp;quot; in a limited sense only. It does not claim that the environment explains everything, or that the environment is the most important explanatory factor. It is deterministic in the sense that it treats the environment as a separate, simple cause or &amp;quot;factor&amp;quot; not mediated by culture: something external to culture and influencing it from the outside. One finds each Eurocentric historian adding one or a number of environmentalistic arguments or factors to the mix, which, as a whole, explains the superiority of Europe. Even the historians who want to build their case mainly on social or political or intellectual foundations nonetheless manage (I know of very few exceptions) to throw one or more environmentalistic arguments into the stewpot, to give it body or flavor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Environmentalistic arguments can be stacked into two piles. One consists of the set of claims about the superior qualities of Europe&#039;s environment and how they help to explain the rise of Europe. The other pile consists of arguments as to why the nasty environments of other places have blocked development there. The two sorts of argument are—perhaps surprisingly—very different in form. Let us begin with the latter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Two classical environmentalistic theories have been used over and over again, and still remain in use, to explain the (supposed) nondevelopment of Africa and Asia. The first theory argues that tropical regions are innately inferior to cooler regions. This theory is used, for the most part, to dispose of Africa. The second theory argues that peoples in arid regions are held back from development because aridity necessitates irrigation, and irrigation along with related features of irrigated river-valley life leads, again necessarily, to the kind of civilization that is historically stagnant. This theory disposes of Asian civilizations, along with Egypt. (Most of Asia is not, in fact, arid.) I will discuss both of these theories, and more briefly a few other environmentalistic explanations for the backwardness of Africa and Asia.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Nasty-Tropical Africa ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The idea that tropical climates are nasty, and inhibit the forward march of civilization, is a very old one in European thought.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;For instance Montesquieu, in &#039;&#039;The Spirit of the Laws&#039;&#039; ((1748) 1949) &amp;quot;People are ... more vigorous in cold climates&amp;quot; (pt. xiv.2). &amp;quot;There are countries where the excess of heat enervates the body, and renders men ... slothful and dispirited&amp;quot; (pt. xv.7).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; During the nineteenth century this notion was widely used to show why Africans have (supposedly) remained uncivilized, and must naturally accept European colonial control; it was one of the core theories of classical diffusionism.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&amp;quot;Africa&amp;quot; almost always refers to &amp;quot;Africa south of the Sahara&amp;quot; in the discourse I am criticizing, so I will use &amp;quot;Africa&amp;quot; in the same sense in the present discussion.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It was routinely built in to theories about the uniqueness of Europe, the European miracle, although I must add that historians did not usually consider the reasons for Africa&#039;s nonrise worth bothering about: the matter was considered self-explanatory, and labors were devoted to the seemingly more important question why Asia (and North Africa) did not rise. And the tropical-nastiness theory is still quite regularly employed in historians&#039; arguments. It is, for instance, crucial to Jones&#039;s argument in &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039;. It is also significant in a special arena: the debates among historians about African slavery, the slave trade, and the slave plantation system. By contrast, geographers, who in general know something about the natural environment and have long grappled with the theories of environmental determinism, do not, today, take the nasty-tropics theory very seriously.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Blaut, &amp;quot;The Ecology of Tropical Farming Systems&amp;quot; (1963).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The tropical-nastiness doctrine consists mainly of three distinct theories. The first concerns itself with the supposed negative effect of a hot, humid climate on the human mind and body; the second, with the supposed inferiority of tropical climates for food production; the third, with the supposed prevalence of disease in tropical regions. Down to the 1940s, or thereabouts, there was some ambivalence among Europeans as to the thesis that humans cannot labor as effectively in the humid tropics as in other climates. The majority opinion had been that Africans can labor under the hot sun—a convenient rationalization for plantation slavery—but that Europeans cannot do so, although some diffusionist arguments were built on the idea that tropical conditions induce sloth, indolence, etc., in everyone, and thus the need for control-at-a-distance from temperate-climate civilizations. Eventually it became clear, from many sources of evidence including physiological studies, that human bodies of all sorts can labor as effectively in the tropics as elsewhere if the bodies in question have had time to adjust to tropical conditions.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See, for example, Collins and Roberts, eds., &#039;&#039;Capacity for Work in the Tropics&#039;&#039; (1988), which fails to find convincing evidence suggesting negative tropical effects.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Although the claim that people in humid tropical regions cannot think as well as people in temperate regions—the tropical sun &amp;quot;boils the brain&amp;quot;—was almost universally accepted by Europeans in the last century and was incorporated into some well-known theories about European civilizational superiority put forward (for instance by Huntington and Markham) in the first half of the present century, this theory, never grounded in evidence, is now rejected across the board. Eric L. Jones is one of the few present-day European historians who is unaware that this theory of &amp;quot;climatic energy&amp;quot; (as it was called in the old days) has been exploded. Not only does Jones accept it as valid but he gives it some considerable significance:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Civilizations had long been rising and falling in warm latitudes, although they appear to have been springing up farther and farther north. Such explanation as the literature offers for this shift is essentially climatic (Gilfillan 1920; Lambert 1971). On the one hand it correlates mean temperature and the output of human energy, and on the other it claims that in warm regions man was subject to the build-up of endoparasitic infestation which caused each society there to reach a plateau of attainment and then stagnate.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The two citations (Gilfillan, &amp;quot;The Coldward Course of Progress,&amp;quot; 1920, and Lambert, &amp;quot;The Role of Climate in the Economic Development of Nations,&amp;quot; 1971) are hardly indicative of modern scholarly literature.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It should be noted that &amp;quot;the literature&amp;quot; does not support any of this. The scholarly literature roundly rejects the theory of &amp;quot;climatic energy,&amp;quot; which has not in fact been seriously defended since the 1950s. Climatic determinism as a whole is almost a dead letter. There has been no northward &amp;quot;shift&amp;quot; of civilization (ancient civilizations were located from the equator to 45° latitude). The notion that tropical regions are so parasite-infested that cultures stagnate is false (it will briefly claim our attention later). Jones&#039;s general belief that hot climates are &amp;quot;debilitating&amp;quot; has little if any scholarly support, and does not in turn support the idea that Europe&#039;s climate led to a European miracle.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;India&#039;s &amp;quot;debilitating climate&amp;quot; is one reason why India fell behind Europe, according to Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), p. 198.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; There simply is no basis for arguing that midlatitude climates are superior to tropical climates in terms of psychological or physical effects on human beings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fruitfulness of tropical environments was much debated by nineteenth-century European scholars. Some argued that tropical regions are lush and bountiful, but used this proposition not as a basis for asserting high development potential but rather the contrary: tropical environments are too bountiful to offer what Arnold Toynbee might have called a sufficient challenge to humanity, and so progress did not take place except under colonial guidance. We deal with this thesis later in the chapter. Our concern now is with the exact opposite thesis, which asserts, quite simply, that tropical environments are miserably poor in their potential for agriculture and it is this that prevents tropical regions from developing. (The term &amp;quot;tropics,&amp;quot; or more properly &amp;quot;humid tropics,&amp;quot; refers to regions with no cold season and with moderate to high rainfall: roughly 750 mm. of rain or more per year. Most of sub-Saharan Africa falls within the humid tropics, as does most of southern and southeastern Asia and most of Middle and South America.) According to this thesis, little food can be produced on a given piece of land in the humid tropics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now this thesis—low agricultural productivity of tropical land—is hard to defend on the evidence, since population densities in the humid tropics range from very low (in parts of the Amazon Basin, for instance) to extraordinarily high (in Java, Bangladesh, El Salvador, Barbados, Rwanda, and many other regions). The argument is grounded, rather, in a theory about the nature of tropical soils. To put matters in perspective, the scientific study of tropical soils is a very young field; few contributions of any consequence can be dated earlier than World War II if we exclude highly particular studies about the soils used for plantation crops like sugar-cane.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Among the pioneer works which have importance for peasant agriculture, we may mention Fred Hardy&#039;s &amp;quot;Some Aspects of Tropical Soils&amp;quot; (1936) and various of his articles in &#039;&#039;Tropical Agriculture&#039;&#039;, and the work of Robert Pendleton (especially Pendleton, &amp;quot;Land Use in North-Eastern Thailand,&amp;quot; 1943, and Prescott and Pendleton, &#039;&#039;Laterites and Lateritic Soils&#039;&#039;, 1952), and G. Milne &amp;quot;A Soil Reconnaissance Journey Through Parts of Tanganyika Territory&amp;quot; (1947). The first comprehensive textbook on tropical soils embodying modern knowledge is Mohr and van Baren, &#039;&#039;Tropical Soils&#039;&#039; (1954).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The really crucial information, relevant to the proof or disproof of the traditional theories, was obtained in research carried out in a number of experimental centers in the late 1940s and thereafter, and then slowly disseminated to the world scholarly community. The result is that some historians (including some current writers about the &amp;quot;miracle&amp;quot;) can still, today, make use of quite fantastic theories about the supposedly evil nature of tropical soils. Some of these theories were refuted quite recently; others are now, today, very close to refutation; a few others, hardly defensible, nonetheless still lie around in the scholarly literature, unrefuted. A brief, only slightly technical, comment on these theories is necessary at this point of the discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The old standard theory about tropical soils runs about as follows: Because of the high heat and abundant rainfall in the humid tropics, these soils cannot accumulate organic topsoil, since organic matter decomposes rapidly and is quickly leached out as rainwater seeps downward in the soil. Tropical soils, therefore, are low in plant nutrients. Also, they are subject to severe erosion, partly because tropical landforms tend to have high average slopes, partly because high rainfall means high runoff and therefore much surface erosion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These two basic physical propositions, about infertility of the soil and erosion respectively, were then married to a cultural proposition, in the following argument. Because of the low fertility and erodibility of tropical soils, farmers must practice what is called &amp;quot;shifting agriculture.&amp;quot; (This is a farming system in which a field is prepared by clearing a piece of forest with the use of fire, and then, after one or more years of cultivation, is abandoned, another field being then cleared in turn and in its turn abandoned, in a continuous process of shifting fields.) The standard theory (as it was argued before the 1950s or thereabouts) then makes a series of sweeping generalizations about the combined effects of infertile, erodible tropical soils and shifting agriculture. It was claimed that farmers cannot return to the original piece of land after it has been abandoned and left fallow for some time, since the soils are too poor to regenerate and since burning the piece of land permanently damages the soil. Even where the environment is lush enough so that farmers can return and re-use each field, the production from each field will be less and less as the cycles of use and abandonment continue, and the soil will become more and more infertile until finally it is unusable. All of this implied that peasant communities would be unable to remain in any one region permanently; that the villages themselves would have to be moved as large expanses of forest land were used and then abandoned and the people needed to move elsewhere to find fresh, cultivable lands. The result would be grave indeed: a very sparse and highly mobile population with little or no chance of developing large-scale trade, cities, and stable states.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The entire argument was inserted at this point into world history and world geography. Most of sub-Saharan Africa is tropical. Therefore, shifting agriculture must be used there and no civilization can develop there. Or if civilization manages somehow to evolve to one extent or another, it must sooner or later collapse. (The decline of the classical lowland Mayan civilization was regularly used as the type example of this historical outcome; it is still so used by a few scholars.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This traditional model of tropical soils and shifting agriculture was gradually softened as more information became available to students of tropical soils and tropical agriculture. By the 1960s it was generally known to the specialist community (though not yet to the majority of historians and social scientists) that shifting agriculture does not damage the soil under normal—that is, typical and widespread—circumstances.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Nye and Greenland, &#039;&#039;The Soil Under Shifting Cultivation&#039;&#039; (1960); Blaut, &amp;quot;The Nature and Effects of Shifting Agriculture&amp;quot; (1962); Ahn, &#039;&#039;West African Soils&#039;&#039; (1970).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Almost never do shifting cultivators move their villages because of soil exhaustion. (It became known, also, that shifting cultivation had been widespread for many centuries in Europe, and there it had not apparently done any damage to the environment.) From this emerged a softer cultural model: if population densities are low, so that farmers can leave each abandoned field for the many years required for soil and vegetation regeneration, then shifting agriculture will remain an equilibrium farming system, and there will be no long-term deterioration of the environment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But even this modification would not much alter the historical judgment about Africa and some other tropical regions: historians might still believe that any civilization arising in such a tropical area cannot be very complex under ordinary circumstances, because a low population density of food producers would not seem to provide the basis for a substantial complex of urban centers, religious centers, states, and the like. (As to the lowland Mayan civilization, some scholars continued to claim that shifting agriculture had destroyed the subsistence base of that civilization, while others claimed that the decline and abandonment of cultural centers like Tikal had been due to other sorts of processes.) In any event, the prevailingly Malthusian view of peasants led to the general assumption that population would grow out of control and regions of tropical shifting agriculture would never rise very high in places like tropical Africa, anyway.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The model in this form is still current among historians. It is common in the European miracle literature, as the primary environmental basis for claiming that Africa could not have &amp;quot;risen&amp;quot; in the same way that Europe did. It is explicit in the work of some non-African Africanist historians.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Miller, &#039;&#039;Way of Death&#039;&#039; (1988); Curtin, &#039;&#039;The Rise and Fall of the Plantation Complex&#039;&#039; (1990). The view is echoed in many world history textbooks, for example, Roberts, &#039;&#039;The Hutchinson History of The World&#039;&#039; (1987), pp. 54-56; McNeill, &#039;&#039;A World History&#039;&#039; (1967), pp. 273-278.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Evidence is now available to reject this entire theory, the notion that tropical soils are bad for agriculture and therefore somehow inhibit human history. First of all, we now know that tropical soils are not inferior. They are different. Because of the higher rate of chemical and physical weathering under humid-tropical conditions, soil production from the underlying rock is much more rapid than is the case in cooler climates. Therefore, soils maintain their fertility in considerable degree from the dissolution of minerals, and much less from the accumulation of organic matter. Erosion tends to be more serious, but regeneration tends to be more rapid. Tropical soils that have developed on rocks that are rich in plant-nutrient minerals are exceptionally fertile. Those developed on rocks that are not nutrient-rich are exceptionally infertile. There is no basis for comparing tropical and temperate &amp;quot;averages&amp;quot;: neither is better; they are different.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Evidence is also available now to reject the old view of shifting agriculture. Farmers practice it on poor soils, being careful not to let fires get out of control. They use a great number of techniques to assist the natural vegetation to regenerate, and to increase soil fertility in the cultivated fields, including green and animal manuring. When there is a land shortage, the shifting rotation is shortened, by the use of various techniques of intensification such as mounding or terracing, increased labor applied to such matters as weeding, adoption of different crops and different varieties, and many more.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Wilken, &#039;&#039;Good Farmers: Traditional Agricultural Resource Management in Mexico and Central America&#039;&#039; (1987); also Nye and Greenland, &#039;&#039;The Soil Under Shifting Agriculture&#039;&#039; (1960); Blaut, &amp;quot;The Ecology of Tropical Farming Systems&amp;quot; (1963).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The correlation between shifting agriculture and low population density is a function of history, not ecology. In the Americas it reflects in part the post-Columbian depopulation. (The Amazon Basin, which today may have a farming population of perhaps one million, probably had seven times that number in 1492.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Denevan, &#039;&#039;The Native Population of the Americas in 1492&#039;&#039; (1976).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;) In part also it reflects the often unnoticed fact that in most regions of the American tropics giant cattle ranches have pushed farmers off the better land, giving a statistical appearance of low population density: cattle have replaced people.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Cockburn and Hecht, &#039;&#039;The Fate of the Forest&#039;&#039; (1989).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The same process occurred in white-settled regions of southern Africa. Elsewhere in tropical Africa, most farmers practice forms of agriculture that should not be described as shifting agriculture except in marginal regions, like mountainsides and semi-arid wastes.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;These marginal areas often are regions in which agriculture is practiced, in preference to some less intensive system of land use, because human communities have been pushed off better land by historical forces, notably colonialism.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Typically, they are sedentary or semisedentary farming systems, involving such things as semipermanent yam mounds and tree-crop farming, or irrigated farming, or mixed farming, or they are systems in which the period of cultivation exceeds the period of fallow, and fertility is maintained by many different cultural practices including the use of green and animal manure. But the most important generalization is this simple one: where there is soil degradation, and hunger, and poor farming, it reflects cultural causes from recent history or colonial history. It does not reflect inherent limitations of tropical agriculture and it does not reflect technological ignorance on the part of farmers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A few variant theories about the low food production potential of the humid-tropical in general and Africa in particular are invoked by some historians. Some claim that Africans were unable even to farm in Africa&#039;s humid-tropical regions until new technology, invented by non-Africans, diffused into the continent. One form of this argument claims that ironworking was brought into Africa a little over 2,000 years ago, perhaps by the Romans, and only then were Africans able to tackle the tropical forests.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;For a typical instance, the Oxford historian J. M. Roberts, in his popular world history textbook, &#039;&#039;The Hutchinson History of the World&#039;&#039; (1987), makes the following quite ignorant statement: &amp;quot;Probably the greatest importance of (the) spread of iron-working (in tropical Africa) was the difference it made to agriculture. It made possible a new penetration of the forests, new tilling of the soil (which may be connected with the arrival of new food-crops from Asia ... This suggests once again the important limiting factor of the African environment. Most of the continent&#039;s history is the story of response to influences from the outside (including iron-working and new crops)&amp;quot; (pp. 511-512). African farmers, like farmers in Europe and many other regions, practiced agriculture with stone tools before iron arrived, and continued to do so afterward whenever and wherever iron was hard to obtain. On the age of ironworking in tropical Africa, see, for example, Wai-Andah, &amp;quot;West Africa Before the Seventh Century&amp;quot; (1981) and Sinclair, &amp;quot;Archeology in Eastern Africa&amp;quot; (1991).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Since shifting agriculture was practiced with stone implements in ancient Europe, and since ironworking appeared in Africa—possibly after independent invention—around 800 B.C. or earlier, this theory is invalid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An even more outlandish theory builds on the fact that some Southeast Asian crops diffused into East Africa two millennia ago. Some historians blandly assert that Africans could not farm in the tropical forests until these tropical crops, domesticated by non-Africans, became available for planting in the African forests.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See, for example, Roberts (note 53 above); also Irwin, &amp;quot;Sub-Saharan Africa,&amp;quot; in Garraty and Gay, eds. &#039;&#039;The Columbia History of the World&#039;&#039; (1981), p. 299.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It has, in fact, been well known for a long time that Africans domesticated a great number of crops for humid-tropical regions, notably many varieties of the yam (&#039;&#039;Dioscorea&#039;&#039; spp.) the prime staple food there.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See for instance Irvine&#039;s classical work, &#039;&#039;A Textbook of West African Agriculture&#039;&#039; (1934); Coursey, &#039;&#039;Yams&#039;&#039; (1967).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Both of these diffusionist myths seem to be connected to an important colonialist belief—now important as an excuse for apartheid in South Africa. The belief is that advanced African cultures, with agriculture, trade, and states, expanded southward through the continent only very late in history, mainly because of the forbidding nature of the tropical part of the continent which held back their southward movement. According to this myth of emptiness (see Chapter 1), they had not arrived in (most of) South Africa when the Europeans took over that region, and supporters of white supremacy in South Africa claim, on this basis, that whites, having arrived first, have political and economic rights to own the land of South Africa.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;According to Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), &amp;quot;the Negroid peoples ... were still pushing east and south into the territories of the pygmies and the bushmen when the Boers undertook the Great Trek north from the Cape in the 1830s,&amp;quot; (p. 155). Also see Roberts &#039;&#039;The Hutchinson History of the World&#039;&#039; (1987), p. 178.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In fact, the expansion of agricultural peoples in Africa occurred thousands of years ago; recent archaeology has shown that rain forest regions were settled by farmers at least 3,000 years ago, and whites did not arrive first in South Africa.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another variant of the myth of tropical nastiness as applied to Africa is the notion that rainfall variability in tropical Africa is uniquely and devastatingly high, such that agriculture could not, in precolonial times, be dependably practiced and famines were frequent and widespread. This then leads into various arguments about African backwardness. For some historians (among them Philip Curtin) there was a basic tendency toward mobility of populations and internal slave trading; for others (notoriously Joseph Miller), there was savagery and cannibalism.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Curtin, &#039;&#039;Economic Change in Pre-Colonial Africa&#039;&#039; (1975); Curtin, &#039;&#039;The Rise and Fall of the Plantation Complex&#039;&#039; (1990); Miller, &#039;&#039;Way of Death&#039;&#039; (1988).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; These historians belong to what I will call the &amp;quot;absolutionist&amp;quot; school of Eurocentric Africanist history, which absolves Europeans of most of the responsibility for slavery and the problems of modern Africa by finding explanations for such matters within Africa itself, often in the African environment. The European miracle historians make regular use of these arguments for purposes of comparison. It happens to be the case that rainfall variability is a serious problem in all semi-arid regions, including the Sahel zone south of the Sahara in Africa and also the Great Plains in the central United States, the steppes of Russia, and so on. Africa is not unique. The more humid parts of this continent do not have a peculiar problem of climatic uncertainty: this is a historians&#039; myth, partly traditional, partly resurrected after the recent Sahelian-Sudanic famines. The latter did not reflect drought-proneness of the region. They reflected human problems, mostly inherited from the colonial period, which became disasters when ordinary rainfall cycles went through their dry phases.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Wisner and Mbithi, &amp;quot;Drought in Eastern Kenya&amp;quot; (1974); Wisner, &#039;&#039;Power and Need in Africa&#039;&#039; (1989); O&#039;Keefe and Wisner, &amp;quot;African Drought: The State of the Game&amp;quot; (1975).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Much the same sort of argument applies to other parts of the tropics. In southern and southeastern Asia we tend, broadly, to find permanent, that is, sedentary, agriculture on lands with relatively high fertility, and shifting agriculture or tree crops on lands with low fertility. The experience of colonialism during the past two centuries or so has muddled that picture somewhat, since there have been major population movements and large population increases in some areas—with consequent distortions of farming systems in reaction to land shortage and other nonenvironmental pressures. Yet the generalization still holds in regard to the environment: tropical conditions do not carry the implication of poor agricultural potential.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The same arguments apply, with no need for qualification, in Western Hemisphere agriculture. In relatively limited parts of the South American rain forest the ecosystem is so fragile, as a result of local geological conditions (rocks forming infertile kaolinitic clay soils in some areas, almost pure sands in other areas), that cropping systems must employ shifting agriculture (or tree crops). But such areas are the exception within the present-day distribution of rain forest environments. In general, the great sweep of Amazonian and Guianan rain forest is a zone of non-sedentary agriculture because of cultural-historical factors, notably depopulation and the massive increase in cattle ranching. It is in fact cattle ranching, and not shifting agriculture, that leads to agriculturally caused long-term environmental degradation in the rainforest region, because (1) ranchers burn forest to the maximum extent possible and without control, in order to expand the area of pasture, and (2) the resulting pasture leads to steady soil degradation because coarse pasture grasses do not maintain the soil ecosystem as does the original forest. Shifting cultivators, by contrast, burn only under controlled conditions, burn small areas only, and carefully encourage the regrowth of forest. If the forest disappears, their livelihood disappears. Shifting agriculturists should not be blamed for deforestation anywhere in the humid tropics. See Hecht and Cockburn, &#039;&#039;The Fate of the Forest&#039;&#039; (1989); Blaut, &amp;quot;The Nature and Effects of Shifting Agriculture&amp;quot; (1963).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What of the opposing theory, that the tropics are lush and bountiful? Down through the middle of the nineteenth century this theory was very widely accepted, and also this corollary: Since the fruits of the earth are so easily obtained in tropical climes, humans do not have to exert themselves to make a living. And so they do not progress. The argument was then woven into many different theories. Buckle put forward one such theory.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Buckle, &#039;&#039;The History of Civilization in England&#039;&#039;, 2nd ed., (1913), chap. 2. Also see Bowler, &#039;&#039;The Invention of Progress&#039;&#039; (1989), pp. 28-29.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Marx put forward another, rather tersely, in a footnote in Volume 1 of &#039;&#039;Capital&#039;&#039;, asserting without discussion that tropical regions do not develop toward capitalism because here &amp;quot;Nature is too lavish . . . She does not impose upon [man] any necessity to develop himself.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Marx, &#039;&#039;Capital&#039;&#039;, vol. 1 (1976), p. 513n.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; This brief comment seems to be the only occasion on which Marx raised the question why humid-tropical regions, including Africa, did not develop as Europe did.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The bountiful-tropics theory is still used today in some theories that try to explain the uniqueness of Europe&#039;s rise. I suppose that every European child of our own time has seen some version of the cartoon showing the native sitting under the coconut tree, waiting patiently for his food to drop into his hands. This is not merely a relic of oldtime thought or an implicit theory. Eric L. Jones uses the bountiful-tropics theory in &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039;. (In West Africa &amp;quot;living was easy.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Jones in fact manages to use both of the opposing theories toward the same end. In wetter regions of Africa &amp;quot;living was easy.&amp;quot; In drier areas &amp;quot;agriculture was not productive.&amp;quot; Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), p. 154. Also see Jones, &#039;&#039;Growth Recuring: Economic Change in World History&#039;&#039; (1988).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;) John A. Hall uses it.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&amp;quot;In Africa the bountifulness and extent of the land makes for a mobile peasantry, necessarily therefore poor material on which to build states. Something like this is probably true of all slash-and-burn agriculture,&amp;quot; John Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties&#039;&#039; (1985), p. 27. (&amp;quot;Slash-and-burn agriculture&amp;quot; is shifting agriculture.)&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Occasionally it is used by Marxists, faithful to the letter of Marx&#039;s comment quoted above.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Laibman, &amp;quot;Modes of Production and Theories of Transition&amp;quot; (1984), p. 284. However, Laibman&#039;s overall argument is not at all Eurocentric.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Probably there is no need to explain why these bountiful-tropics theories are unacceptable, since this—as we have seen—is done time and again by scholars who insist that tropical regions are not bountiful; rather, they are barren and nasty. Neither the one view nor the other makes sense. And note that both are used toward the same end: to show that tropical regions have inferior potential in history.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, we come to the theory that tropical environments are so disease-ridden that historical progress there is slowed, stopped, or prevented. Some historians develop this argument specifically with reference to Africa. Some others apply it sweepingly to all tropical regions: for Eric L. Jones it is a major reason why both Asia and Africa remained backward by comparison to Europe. Like the tropical-nastiness theories discussed previously, this one is traditional in European thought, and this fact is critically important for an understanding of the survival of the theory down to the present and its use in the European miracle paradigm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One of the axioms of classical diffusionism, as we have seen in Chapter 1, is the idea that diseases and other evil things naturally counterdiffuse into Europe from non-Europe. It was therefore assumed by many scholars (including, for instance, Buckle) that non-Europe is both the source and the natural home of many—and the worst—maladies.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Buckle, &#039;&#039;History of Civilization in England&#039;&#039;, vol. 1, 2nd ed. (1913), p. 93: &amp;quot;(The) great plagues by which Europe has at different periods been scourged, have, for the most part, proceeded from the East, which is their natural birthplace, and where they are most fatal. Indeed, of those cruel diseases now existing in Europe, scarcely one is indigenous; and the worst of them were imported from tropical countries in and after the first century of the Christian era.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; That axiomatic belief is still with us: plagues from the Black Death to AIDS are still assumed—for it is always an assumption, whether or not reinforced by evidence—to come from the non-European world.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The theory that the HIV virus which causes AIDS in humans is another one of these African plagues descending upon the Western World may very well be just the newest myth in this old diffusionist tradition. Whether or not this virus originated in Africa, which has not been proven, the myth has already taken on ugly overtones, as in the completely unfounded (yet classical) belief that AIDS was transmitted from monkeys to humans because of some strange sexual practices in some obscure African tribes. (This myth is naively reported in Shannon and Pyle, &amp;quot;The Origin and Diffusion of AIDS,&amp;quot; 1989. See the critique of this paper by Watts and Okello, &amp;quot;Medical Geography and AIDS,&amp;quot; 1990. Also see R. C. and R. J. Chirimuuta, &#039;&#039;AIDS, Africa and racism&#039;&#039;, 2nd ed., 1989.)&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This foundation belief was reinforced during the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries by the reports of upper-class European travelers about the, to them, dirty, disgusting, diseased communities they found outside of Europe. This was both a class phenomenon and a cultural one: alien lifeways necessarily seemed to be unhealthy. But the belief gained powerful reinforcement during the nineteenth century, when the growing wealth and modernization of (much of) Europe led to a dramatic improvement in health conditions, grounded in general improvement in living conditions, improved sanitation, and, finally, progress in medicine. Europe, therefore, seemed to be somehow healthy, non-Europe, somehow unhealthy. This error is still very widespread. Underdeveloped countries are poor. With poverty comes ill health. But the ill health is thought, incorrectly, to somehow stem from the natural environments of these regions or from the cultures of their inhabitants, not from poverty. However disease-ridden India, Africa, China, etc., may have been in this period, Europe itself had been just as disease-ridden a century or so earlier (a fact known in part from the demographic facts about life expectancy of ordinary Europeans down to the eighteenth century).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this same period European colonial territories were expanding, and it became evident that Europeans living in colonies tended to fall prey to various kinds of exotic diseases. The most extreme case apparently was West Africa, which was called in those times &amp;quot;the white man&#039;s grave.&amp;quot; Here the insecurity of the quite small coastal settlements—colonial territories in sub-Saharan Africa did not really expand until very late in the nineteenth century—combined with the massive effects of the movement of slaves (many of whom died in these settlements) produced peculiarly unhealthy conditions, though the Europeans thought the source of the problem was the innate unhealthfulness of Africa itself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the important diseases of humans and their domesticated animals are not peculiarly tropical. Smallpox, typhoid, pneumonia, diphtheria, measles, bubonic plague, anthrax, and many other diseases are found across many physical environments, and their severity from place to place tends to reflect, more than anything else, conditions of human poverty, crowding, and the like. To some extent this is true even of the supposedly &amp;quot;tropical diseases,&amp;quot; such as malaria (which, in fact, used to plague extratropical areas, including New York). Some forms of malaria tend to be associated with stagnant water, and thus with irrigated agriculture, in a wide range of climates. Other forms, including some of the most serious ones, are associated with tropical forest conditions, the mosquito vector often breeding in bromeliad growths on the trees themselves. It is true that these forms of malaria are especially associated with shifting cultivation in the humid tropics. But farmers spend relatively little time in the forest, if indeed there is forest. And they develop immunities such that malaria does not ravage their communities (as it does ravage communities of foreigners in their midst: traders, colonial military personnel, and so on).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The question is: after all such matters have been taken into consideration, is there, then, a remainder that can be called &amp;quot;the innate unhealthiness of the tropics?&amp;quot; Probably the answer is no.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Although this generalization is now widely accepted, some historians cling tenaciously to the idea that Africa is and always has been a uniquely disease-ridden place. This is given as one reason for Africa&#039;s (supposed) marginal role in world history, at least in modern world history. (According to William McNeill, disease &amp;quot;more than anything else, is why Africa remained backward in the development of civilization when compared to temperate lands.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;McNeill, &#039;&#039;Plagues and Peoples&#039;&#039; (1976), p. 43.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;) In the view of some of the absolutonist historians, notably Curtin, the disease-ridden character of West and Central Africa in and after the sixteenth century is a key part of the explanation for the complementary facts that this region became the source of slaves for the Atlantic plantation economy and that this region, instead of &amp;quot;rising&amp;quot; with the growth of the Atlantic economy, instead remained undeveloped. It is important to put this theory into perspective in terms of the confrontation mentioned at the beginning of this chapter between traditional European historians and the Third-Worldist, revisionist school. Traditional scholars (at least those of the absolutonist school) claim that Africa in the sixteenth century had a rather small and mobile population, with little development of complex civilization and state organization, and with slave raiding and slave trading as important features of its society. Africa had not risen above this very low level of civilization mainly because of the prevalence of human and animal diseases—with other environmental factors of the sort previously discussed being added on as additional factors. Africa thus quite naturally became the prime source of plantation slaves; and, also naturally, the slave trade did not fundamentally alter the reality of African life.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Third World historians tend to dispute all of this. Africa was densely populated before the slave trade, and the slave trade utterly devastated the continent, destroying states and civilizations, depopulating vast regions, and leading, overall, to disastrous underdevelopment. The slave trade mainly reflected Europe&#039;s power relative to coastal African societies in the seventeenth century and thereafter, in consequence of the immensely profitable American plantations and—as we discuss in Chapter 4—the fact that militarily and commercially powerful West African states were mostly located some distance from the coast. Disease increased in intensity because of the devastation caused by the slave trade: depopulation, the abandonment of large areas formerly cultivated and grazed (now turned to forest and scrub), wars, economic decline, and so on. One crucial example of this devastation has to do with the tsetse fly and trypanosomiasis or African sleeping sickness. Traditional scholars claim that tsetse fly infestation prevented Africans from developing extensive cattle herding in earlier times and in many other ways contributed to historical stagnation. The response is that trypanosomiasis, like anthrax, is a disease with many mammalian hosts. Depopulation led to the massive expansion of wastelands, and of wild animal host populations, and thus to the spread of conditions in which the tsetse fly could flourish. This in turn changed trypanosomiasis from an endemic disease to which both humans and cattle had some immunity and exposure, which was kept in check by the relatively full occupation of lands, into a devastating disease that, since the end of the last century, has indeed prevented the development of animal husbandry in some areas of Africa. There is considerable evidence that the expansion of bushland led to the expansion of tsetse-fly-infested areas and thus to economic and social misery.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See, for instance, Giblin, &amp;quot;Trypanosomiasis Control in African History: An Evaded Issue?&amp;quot; (1990); Turshen, &amp;quot;Population Growth and the Deterioration of Health: Mainland Tanzania, 1920-1960&amp;quot; (1987).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Beyond this, there is little solid evidence either way about the history of health conditions in Africa and among Africans (not colonial visitors), and there are many reasons to doubt the inherited diffusionist assumptions and prejudices on this matter. In any event, one cannot make a case that disease was an independent force that &amp;quot;blocked&amp;quot; development in sub-Saharan Africa.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Arid, Despotic Asia ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Asia is a large place and contains a large variety of environments. There is, understandably, a very long and varied list of traditional environmentalistic arguments, most of them particular to some one part of Asia and inapplicable to other parts. Back in the early nineteenth century, a pious form of environmental determinism prevailed in geography, and it seemed sensible to invoke a single explanation for all of this variety: God had placed different natural obstacles in the paths of different Asian peoples—heat in one place, cold in another, drought in a third. Today it is more common to find, among historians writing about the &amp;quot;European miracle,&amp;quot; not a list of Asia&#039;s environmental infirmities but rather a set of separate comparative judgments, each centered on Europe, and each referring to a specific period in European history. Europe, or some part of Europe, at some particular time, was superior to all of Asia in environmental qualities X and Y and Z. Or, more typically, the comparison will invoke environmental obstacles for one Asian region, political obstacles for another, religious obstacles for a third, and so on, in a very eclectic sort of argument.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For these reasons I will not review all the environmentalistic theories as to why Asia supposedly remained backward in comparison to Europe. I will deal with the comparative judgments about climate, landforms, and so on, one by one, in the following section of this chapter (&amp;quot;Temperate Europe&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is, however, one very large and coherent theory that is used today, much as it was in the last century, to deal with Asia as a whole in one grand and sweeping judgment of inferiority. This theory has a number of variants which are known by various names, among them &amp;quot;the Asiatic mode of production,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;hydraulic society,&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Oriental despotism.&amp;quot; The theory is not usually thought of as an example of environmental determinism, since it seems to start its argument with technology, claiming that irrigation-based (&amp;quot;hydraulic&amp;quot;) societies have certain highly distinctive characteristics that inhibit historical development. But one of the roots of this argument is environmental. It is the claim that aridity in Asia made irrigation necessary. One can properly ask how a theory of this sort can be applied to parts of Asia that are not at all arid. (It has even been invoked as an explanation for Stalinism in wet, cold Russia.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Wittfogel, &#039;&#039;Oriental Despotism&#039;&#039; (1957).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;) To understand this contradiction, and to understand accordingly why this theory is untenable in all its forms and variants, we must look briefly at the history of the doctrine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
European writers of the past half-millennium have tended to view Asia as a place where people are inherently unfree and society is inherently unchanging. It would take us far afield to go into the evolution of this belief, but by the eighteenth century it had become a significant part of the emerging doctrine of diffusionism.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Venturi &amp;quot;The History of the Concept of &#039;Oriental Despotism&#039; in Europe&amp;quot; (1963); P. Anderson, &#039;&#039;Lineages of the Absolute State&#039;&#039; (1974); B. Chandra, &amp;quot;Karl Marx, His Theories of Asian Societies, and Colonial Rule&amp;quot; (1981).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It was accepted as an axiomatic truth, rarely questioned, but efforts were made to explain this inherent &amp;quot;Oriental despotism&amp;quot; (as it came to be called) in terms of everything from theology to race to environment. The belief seems to have been applied mainly to the Ottoman Empire, which was in that period a political and military threat to some European societies and a commercial threat to others, until the late eighteenth-century expansion of direct European colonialism in India and Southeast Asia gave the theory new functions. Not only was the notion of Oriental despotism useful as a justification and rationalization for colonial expansion, but it became the basis for colonial legal doctrines that were being fashioned at that time. In Asia, it was decided, there is no private property in land because the ruler, despotically, owns everything. Therefore, when we Europeans depose the ruler, we own everything. And if we take over a despotic state, we acquire the rights of despotic rule over a people who were unfree to begin with. (But European rule, however despotic—colonies had no democracy—was described as bestowing &amp;quot;freedom.&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The modern form of Oriental despotism was often connected back to the biblical &amp;quot;Orient.&amp;quot; When modern Asian societies were described as &amp;quot;stagnant,&amp;quot; it seemed fair to assert that they basically retained the character described for them in the Old Testament. (The Old Testament, we recall, spoke of the existence of great cities, empires, agriculture, etc.) While it was necessary to explain modern wonders like the Taj Mahal and great modern Asian states, it was not difficult to view these as relatively minor advances over the original biblical civilization, and to find secondary explanations for the evident fact that Asian civilizations had advanced somewhat—but long ago they had ceased to advance, and so remained essentially biblical and essentially stagnant.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Similar judgments are still commonly made by theoreticians of the European miracle. For instance, John Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties&#039;&#039; (1985), p. 12: &amp;quot;Chinese society was stuck in the same stage for over two thousand years, while Europe, in comparison, progressed like a champion hurdler.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I think it likely that the geographical connection between aridity and &amp;quot;Orient&amp;quot; comes partly from this source, that is, from the biblical images of arid regions like Mesopotamia and Egypt. Partly, no doubt, it comes from the fact that early modern Europe, down through the mid-eighteenth century, thought mainly of the dry western Asian regions, the Ottoman realm and the Persian-Inner-Asian region, as &amp;quot;the Orient,&amp;quot; because the farther Orient, from India to Japan, was still somewhat remote from European attention. In any event, early nineteenth-century geographers like the great Karl Ritter were describing one special type of geographical-cultural system, the type associated with Asian civilizations of the great river valleys of arid Asia and northeastern Africa, notably the Nile, the Tigris-Euphrates, the Indus, and smaller valleys of similar character, and ascribing the traditional Asiatic traits of despotism to regions of this type. They seem to have extended this model somehow to comprehend the river valleys of wetter parts of Asia, through a logical leap from the idea of irrigated river-valley civilizations in arid regions to irrigated river-valley civilizations in Asia as a whole.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The general association of Oriental despotism with river-valley civilizations, from Egypt to China, was commonplace in the nineteenth century.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;And also earlier. It is discussed for instance by Montesquieu, Bernier, Adam Smith, and Hegel (see, for instance, &amp;quot;Introduction,&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;The Oriental World&amp;quot; in Hegel&#039;s &#039;&#039;Philosophy of History&#039;&#039;, 1956). Also see the historical reviews in Venturi, &amp;quot;The History of the Concept of &#039;Oriental Despotism&#039; in Europe&amp;quot; (1963); P. Anderson, &#039;&#039;Lineages of the Absolute State&#039;&#039; (1974); and B. Chandra, &amp;quot;Karl Marx, his Theories of Asian Societies, and Colonial Review&amp;quot; (1981).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Marx and Engels, however, took the idea a definitive step forward by advancing a theory that derived Oriental despotism from propositions about aridity and irrigation.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;This idea, too, had its forerunners. Possibly Marx got the idea from Karl Ritter, his professor of geography at Berlin.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In the 1850s Marx and Engels were, for the first time, seriously confronting the question of how their essential theory of historical evolution could be applied on a world scale. It needs to be said first that they were probably the most skeptical European thinkers of their time as regards all of the traditional and (as they insisted) elitist social theories then in vogue. But their skepticism had inevitable limits, since they were products of an elitist German education and since they knew almost nothing about the world outside of Europe apart from what they learned in the press, and in books and official papers presenting the colonial point of view with all its prejudices. Accordingly, Marx and Engels did not seriously question the prevailing doctrine that the Orient is in some sense despotic and to some degree historically stagnant and unprogressive. But their skepticism about European social theory, with its elitist foundations, immunized them from the usual explanations for Asian despotism and stagnation. Asians were no less rational than Europeans, and no less willing to struggle against economic exploitation. This reasoning led Marx and Engels to speculate that the cause of Asiatic despotism and unprogressiveness lay, not in human society, but in the natural environment. In Asia, it appeared, social evolution had not led to private property ownership: the ruler, despotically, owned the land, except where it remained as original communal property. Hence this speculation from Engels:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The absence of property in land is indeed the key to the whole of the East. Herein lies its political and religious history. But how does it come about that the Orientals did not arrive at landed property, even in its feudal form? I think it is mainly due to the climate, taken in connection with the nature of the soil, especially with the great stretches of desert which extend from the Sahara straight across Arabia, Persia, India and Tartary up to the highest Asian plateau. Artificial irrigation is here the first condition of agriculture. ... An Oriental government never had more than three departments: finance (plunder at home), war (plunder at home and abroad), and public works.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Marx and Engels, &#039;&#039;Selected Correspondence&#039;&#039; (1975).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This theory was advanced very tentatively by Marx and Engels, and was modified in later writings; it appears that Engels rejected it altogether in his late writings.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Marx and Engels considered other factors as well, and it is fair to say that their analysis remained speculative. I believe that Engels withdrew from the idea of &amp;quot;Oriental despotism&amp;quot; in late life. See the discussion of this topic in P. Anderson, &#039;&#039;Lineages of the Absolute State&#039;&#039; (1974); Blaut, &amp;quot;Colonialism and the Rise of Capitalism&amp;quot; (1989); and B. Chandra, &amp;quot;Karl Marx, His Theories of Asian Societies, and Colonial Rule&amp;quot; (1981).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Our interest lies in the fact that the environmentalistic component remains influential today, even though it is now obvious that Marx and Engels were mistaken in the notion that Asia is arid. The theory nonetheless has had an effect on recent Marxist discussions about the European rise of capitalism and the (supposed) nonrise of capitalism in Asia.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Laibman, &amp;quot;Modes of Production and Theories of Transition&amp;quot; (1984), and Bailey and Llobera, &#039;&#039;The Asiatic Mode of Production&#039;&#039; (1981).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; More crucially, it has been woven into the mainstream European miracle literature in an interesting intellectual sea change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Max Weber, early in the present century, and Karl Wittfogel, at midcentury, are probably the key figures in the transformation of this rather archaic doctrine into a modern environmentalistic argument for the European miracle. Weber had little to say about the natural environment per se. Drawing on various scholarly ideas which were in circulation in turn-of-the-century Europe, including Marxian ideas, he argued that the development of private property in Europe&#039;s Antiquity and Middle Ages was indeed one of the primary features of social evolution toward capitalism. He stressed what he saw as a fundamental difference between the rise of feudal (seigneurial) property, which was close to, and moving toward, full private property, and a contrasting form that he associated with the Asian river-valley civilizations (and ancient Egypt). He saw that social form as being associated closely with the need to irrigate in such environments, hence associated, inferentially, with the environment. These latter societies were, he said, despotic and land was not, in general, passed fully into the hands of officials, but rather lent to them on temporary tenure, on condition of service, as a means of providing them with rental income, men for military levies, and so on. Irrigation required collective labor appropriation under despotic rule, for maintenance of canals and waterworks. In forested lands of Europe, such despotic rule over peasants had not been needed.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Weber, &#039;&#039;The Agrarian Sociology of Ancient Civilizations&#039;&#039; (1976), pp. 84, 131, 157, &#039;&#039;The Religion of China&#039;&#039; (1951), pp. 16, 21, 25, and &amp;quot;The Origin of Seigneurial Proprietorship,&amp;quot; part 1, chap. 3, esp. pp. 56-57 in &#039;&#039;General Economic History&#039;&#039; (1981). Also see McNeill, &#039;&#039;Plagues and Peoples&#039;&#039; (1976), pp. 93, 207, 259.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Thus in Greece and elsewhere in Europe yeoman farmers, individualists, became the signature of rural society. Cities, instead of being mainly the seat of despotic power, became truly urban. Thus, in general, there was a peculiarly western trajectory, toward modern urban and capitalist society.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The crucial factor which made Near Eastern development so different (from Greek development) was the need for irrigation systems, as a result of which the cities were closely connected with building canals and constant regulation of waters and rivers, all of which demanded the existence of a unified bureaucracy. There was an irreversible character to this development, and with it went subjugation of the individual. ... On the other hand in Greece ... the position of the monarchs declined ... and so began a development which ended ... with an army recruited from yeoman farmers who provided their own arms. Political power necessarily passed to this class, and therewith started to emerge that purely secular civilization which characterized Greek society and caused capitalist development in Greece to differ from that in the Near East.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Weber, &#039;&#039;The Agrarian Sociology of Ancient Civilizations&#039;&#039; (1976), pp. 157-158. Also, on p. 84: &amp;quot;The basis of the economy (in Egypt) was irrigation, for this was the crucial factor in all exploitation of land resources. Every new settlement demanded construction of a canal ... Now canal construction is necessarily a large-scale operation, demanding some sort of collective social organization; it is very different from the relatively individualistic activity of clearing virgin forest. Here then is the fundamental economic cause for the overwhelmingly dominant position of the monarchy in Mesopotamia (and) Egypt.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Weber&#039;s formulation of the difference between Oriental societies and Western societies has become one of the fundamental arguments of the miracle theory as it is put forward in our own time. But Weber did not put firmly in place one important part of the edifice. This is the matter of showing why irrigation societies acquired the special characteristics assigned to them: despotism and stagnation, and, beyond that, lack of private property, lack of full urban development, and so on. This essential technical and environmental elaboration of the theory was introduced in 1955 by Karl Wittfogel, in his book &#039;&#039;Oriental Despotism&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wittfogel, an ex-Marxist who started his argument with the Marxian proposition which we have discussed, tried to show that societies grounded in irrigation, &amp;quot;hydraulic societies&amp;quot; as he called them, are necessarily despotic and must necessarily have the kinds of social and political properties that earlier writers had associated with Oriental despotism. The same is true of societies that somehow acquire-at-a-distance the characteristics of hydraulic societies, by diffusion. (Hence, according to Wittfogel, nonhydraulic Soviet Russia became despotic.) Wittfogel&#039;s reasoning was environmentalistic, in a manner less ignorant of physical geography than Marx and Weber but nonetheless quite naive. Wittfogel believed that irrigating a tract of land necessarily, deterministically, increases its productivity. Some societies will thus choose to adopt irrigated agriculture, and so the great river valleys of Asia were occupied. But, according to Wittfogel, irrigation requires major public works for the creation and maintenance of canals, and hence requires a command-type political structure—he says this was the origin of the state as a political form—which also functions to control the distribution of water.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus hydraulic societies are necessarily despotic. There are a number of fallacies in this argument, as many scholars have pointed out. Three of the fallacies concern the environmental proposition, the idea that irrigation necessarily increases productivity massively, and therefore leads to the development of complex social stratification, the state, and so on. First fallacy: irrigation increases productivity substantially only when the ecologically limiting factor on crop growth is lack of water; but quite often—in Asia as elsewhere—this is not the case. This means that the elaboration of great irrigation systems is not a natural response to the environment. Rather, a small-scale irrigation system in a river-valley can become enlarged into the great system as an effect, not a cause, of political and social inequality: pressure to deliver surplus pushes the process, enlarges the irrigation network, and leads, logically, to ever greater inequality. In other words, the large irrigation systems are preceded by, and explained by, existing despotism or social complexity, not by environmental mandates. (Wittfogel argues in roughly the opposite direction: the need to irrigate in a dry region leads a society to develop coercive command structures to manage the irrigation system, and thence leads to class oppression and the state—and despotic Oriental civilization.) The one ecological generalization that makes undoubted sense is the correlation of land productivity with population size and density, which is basic to the elaboration of social hierarchies and such things as religious ceremonial centers and states. But irrigation does not, magically, make land productive. Some land is highly productive without it. In the classical Mesopotamian and Nile cases we do not know whether the ruling classes forced increases in productivity, and this created the large irrigation systems, or whether the process worked the other way around. The second fallacy is the belief that the irrigation of truly dry river valleys made these valleys immensely productive, overall. Irrigation allowed agriculture to be practiced in lands otherwise desertic, but water was always in short supply and we know very little about crop yields. What we do know is that the really high productivity, and large social entities (in terms of population size as well as density), were found in wetter regions, mainly rice-farming regions, where elaborate irrigation systems usually were unnecessary for agriculture (and sometimes rainwater alone filled the paddies, as on the lower Irrawaddy plain and part of northern Luzon). Third fallacy: There is good reason to believe that some of the oldest civilizations were grounded not in irrigation, but in drainage, an ecological response that does not ordinarily involve large-scale waterworks. Drainage systems seem to have preceded irrigation in the earliest Mesoamerican civilizations. It is quite possible that the earliest Eastern Hemisphere irrigation systems, in such places as the Nile, the Tigris-Euphrates, the Indus, the Wei, the Yellow, the Niger, etc., were originally drainage systems, opening up swampy riverine regions and perhaps elaborating polities long before the societies became committed to major engineering works and so became &amp;quot;hydraulic.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See, for instance, Denevan, &#039;&#039;The Aboriginal Cultural Geography of the Llanos de Mojos of Bolivia&#039;&#039; (1966), and &amp;quot;Hydraulic Agriculture in the American Tropics&amp;quot; (1982), on ancient drained-field or raised-field agriculture in the tropics; Golson, &amp;quot;No Room at the Top: Agricultural Intensification in the New Guinea Highlands&amp;quot; (1977), on ancient drainage in highland New Guinea; Doolittle, &#039;&#039;Canal Irrigation in Prehistoric Mexico&#039;&#039; (1990), on drainage and early agriculture in Mexico; Harrison and Turner &#039;&#039;Pre-Hispanic Maya Agriculture&#039;&#039; (1978), on early drainage in the Maya lowlands.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wittfogel&#039;s environmentalistic argument, bringing down to our own time the old ideas of Marx and Engels about aridity, irrigation, despotism, and stagnation, juxtaposed with Weber&#039;s arguments about the difference between Oriental despotism and the rest, is seminal for many present-day European miracle historians, although most of them modify Wittfogel&#039;s theory in important ways. The essential concept is the notion of hydraulic society, explicitly or implicitly seen as a natural product of arid Asian river valleys (and the Nile). The way this leads to &amp;quot;miracle&amp;quot; arguments in the writings of such historians as Eric L. Jones, Michael Mann, and John Hall deserves a moment&#039;s attention.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Eric L. Jones, in &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039;, lays stress on what he conceives to be the fundamental difference between &amp;quot;rainfall-farming&amp;quot; societies of Europe and irrigating societies of Asia. Wittfogel, he says, was essentially right. Irrigating societies suffered the &amp;quot;political consequences of a society with a huge, manipulated peasant mass.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
European agricultural society was able to avoid a comparable history of authoritarianism—a kind of political infantilism—by virtue of an open-ended productive environment of forest land and rainfall farming.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), pp. 8-9.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Jones then adds to all of this his theory that farmers who work in warm standing water become diseased—a fallacy, as we saw above, that confuses the consequences of poverty with those of ecological settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fairy tale (for it is that) which associates marvelous social consequences with &amp;quot;rainfall farming&amp;quot; of the European variety will claim our attention shortly. Here it should simply be noted that all of the supposedly dire effects that Jones—like Wittfogel before him—attributes to irrigation societies are, in point of fact, the normal attributes of ancient class society and ancient civilization. That is, when these civilizations emerge, we find, as part of the process, reduction in peasant freedom, recruiting of masses of people for various purposes, and the like. The romantic image of free peasants is an image drawn from preserfdom, prefeudal times. After Franco-Roman colonization European peasants were as unfree as any peasants of the Asian river valleys or anywhere else. And of course rainfall farming, along with forested frontiers, was characteristic of much of Asia.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
John A. Hall, in &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties: The Causes and Consequences of the Rise of the West&#039;&#039;, wants to distance himself from Wittfogel&#039;s &amp;quot;fantasy&amp;quot; (as he calls it) about the inherently despotic nature of Oriental society. He then promptly absorbs a good part of Wittfogel&#039;s theory into his own formulation of reasons for the European &amp;quot;miracle.&amp;quot; Hall, like most miracle theorists, tries to make use of the greatest possible range of traditional arguments for the miracle, then pushes certain arguments forward as supposedly the most important ones. He thinks that political forces and Malthusian demographic forces are the most important, although he sees as a deeper force the Weberian notion of European &amp;quot;rationality.&amp;quot; Hall does not accept the formula that leads to the generalization that Oriental states were despotic. No, he says, they were arbitrary, cruel, and unwilling or unable to encourage economic development, and they held Oriental society stagnant (or, much the same thing, going through repetitive cycles). But they were not despotic. By this he means that Oriental states were not truly strong, appearances to the contrary notwithstanding. We will see, shortly, how he says that medieval European states had some sort of inner strength, an organic quality, with progressive change somehow teleologically prefigured in their medieval form. So, according to Hall, there was Oriental despotism but the despots were weak.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties&#039;&#039; (1985), pp. 12-13, 27-28, 36, 42-3, 53, 59, 99, 102, 137.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Hall then introduces irrigation as another independent factor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[In Europe] there was no need for irrigation. It is quite likely that this encouraged, or at least allowed for, a decentred agricultural civilization based on individual initiative.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties&#039;&#039; (1985), p. 11. Also see pp. 41, 123, 132.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus a &amp;quot;need&amp;quot; for irrigation in Asia, which must have been an environmental need. Thus, the old Wittfogelian equation of irrigation with despotism (as against &amp;quot;individual initiative&amp;quot;). Then Hall moves to other factors on his very long list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Michael Mann is another contemporary theorist of the &amp;quot;European miracle,&amp;quot; and he too has a long laundry list of factors which, he thinks, contributed to the miracle.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mann, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986). Also see his essay, &amp;quot;European Development: Approaching a Historical Explanation&amp;quot; (1988).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; He tends to emphasize the importance of ancient Europe&#039;s acquisition of political and especially military power. Mann takes pains to distance himself from Wittfogel, but in the end he incorporates most of Wittfogel&#039;s model—perhaps I should call it the Marx-Weber-Wittfogel model—into his own theory. Like Marx, Weber, Wittfogel, Jones, and Hall, he accepts the characterization of ancient Oriental societies (from Egypt to China) as unfree and unprogressive. But he points out that the despotisms did not extend to true large-scale political military power. And the ancient Oriental civilizations, although they were rooted in irrigation agriculture, also made use of other forms of resource use in areas adjoining the river valleys. Mainly for these reasons, Mann claims that Wittfogel &amp;quot;overextended his model.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mann, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986), p. 94.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Ancient irrigating societies were despotic but they were not powerful, and this, for Mann, is what counts. Mann then rephrases the model and puts it, more or less entire, into his own theory. The distinction that counts is indeed, he says, the one between &amp;quot;irrigating&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;rainfall&amp;quot; farming societies. Asian societies are sweepingly categorized as the former, European societies as the latter. According to Mann, the fact that European farmers, starting with the ancient Greeks, used iron plows and farmed unirrigated (&amp;quot;rainfall&amp;quot;) land, is the one most fundamental reasons that Europe forged ahead of Asia and North Africa. This was the first great miracle. It put Europe ahead of all other areas, and Europe has remained ahead ever since.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here, in brief, is Mann&#039;s argument. We start with the ancient Near Eastern civilizations, grounded mainly in irrigation. Conceding that irrigation was the innovation that caused these civilizations to rise in the first place, Mann argues that the irrigation base somehow &amp;quot;caged,&amp;quot; or confined, the population; this metaphor is meant to convey the idea that these people are unfree, and also in some sense constrained from further social progress. (It is a metaphor and not an argument.) Around 1800 B.C., says Mann, &amp;quot;the Middle Eastern empires of domination were shaken by two immense challenges . . . from the north,&amp;quot; from Indo-European invaders—this seems to be a version of the discredited &amp;quot;Aryan migrations&amp;quot; theory—who brought two revolutions with them, based in charioteer warfare and the use of iron tools and particularly iron plows. The &amp;quot;balance of power now shifted northward.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mann, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986), p. 179.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Mann concedes in passing that these northern folk did not actually invent chariot warfare and ironworking (which came perhaps from Anatolia), but he passes without pause (or logic) to the thesis that the northern peoples, Indo-Europeans, acquired dominance in politicomilitary terms and in terms of productive power. From this point forward, Mann contrasts two civilizations, the &amp;quot;irrigating&amp;quot; ones of the Middle East and the iron-plow-using, rainwater-farming peoples of the north—Greece and, broadly, Europe. Mainly because the Europeans were iron-plow-rainfall-farming peoples, they acquired, initially in Greece, modern civilization, including democracy, classes, private (more or less) property, science, and a respect for human reason.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The fact that Mann attributes the ancient European takeoff mainly to chariot warfare and iron-plow rainfall-farming, yet concedes that both innovations were initiated by Middle Easterners themselves, suggests to me that Mann&#039;s fundamental causal reasoning centers on the notion of European rationality: regardless of who invented these things, the Europeans put the things to work. That this Weberian notion is indeed basic for Mann will be demonstrated later in this chapter.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Why? The centerpiece of the model is the image of an individual peasant-farming family which is fundamentally independent. It gets its water from the skies, not from a despotically managed irrigation system. Iron, says Mann, is abundant, so the peasant farmer does not depend upon cities and long-distance trade networks to acquire iron for plows and axes. This independent peasant, a true yeoman farmer (as Weber also had said), is the prototypical democratic, civilized, energetic, forward-looking European.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
None of this makes sense. To begin with, it is geographically absurd to imagine that the Middle East was a region without plow agriculture, one basically of irrigated river-valley populations. Plows were used in irrigated farming. Rainfall-based farming was dominant, not in Egypt and Mesopotamia, but in most of the Levant, Anatolia, Iran, and of course much of Asia farther east, not to mention Africa. Iron working was not invented by Europeans and was used as much by non-Europeans as by Europeans. The same is true of the iron plow, which was as important in early China, for instance, as in early Europe.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Bray, &#039;&#039;Agriculture&#039;&#039;, vol. 6, part 2, of Needham and collaborators, &#039;&#039;Science and Civilization in China&#039;&#039; (1984).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; (It is an old myth that Indo-European speakers, Aryans, spread the use of the plow to, and only to, the regions they settled or conquered.) Workable-grade iron ore deposits are not as abundant as Mann thinks they are (except in certain special regions, such as some of the laterite deposits of the humid tropics).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But the silliest part of Mann&#039;s thesis is the environmental determinism. We have an image of an arid region fit for nothing but irrigated farming, which is assumed to be a tether on the progress of civilization. We have an image of an open region of good soil, forested, in which iron-using peasant farmers not only produce an unmatched abundance but also acquire from their ecology a democratic, bold, bright, form of society which marches forward then to modernity. Let me add just a word about each of these images.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Irrigation, in the eyes of many miracle theorists, is somehow unproductive. Jones, Mann, and others make the assertion that more food is produced per worker on rain-watered lands. This is not true. In fact, irrigation was developed to increase food production, whether or not the source of the process was the aspirations of village people themselves or the surplus requirements of a political or religious superstructure. When an irrigated district has reached the point where there is serious land shortage, that is, late in its social and geographic evolution (along one possible line of development), the productivity per person declines. This is obvious. It means, first of all, that farm workers spend more time during the year producing and have less time for nonfarming activities, including village cultural life and work on such things as monumental structures. Eventually this situation may lead to the collapse of the farming system, with salinization, and so on, and finally, perhaps, starvation. Contrast this now with nonirrigated agriculture. Normally, there is poorer nutrient status of soil (irrigation brings dissolved nutrients in the water, and alluvial soils tend to have good nutrient status). Normally, there is greater moisture deficit, given the dependence on unpredictable rains. Thus natural fertility tends to be lower on nonirrigated land, all other things being equal (which they often are not). Now it is true that early iron-age farmers, clearing forested land and making new farms, achieved high production on this fresh land, but that phenomenon is transitory, and in any case it did not have much effect in the semi-arid valleys of Greece. Early European farmers tended in fact to settle on alluvial lands and lowland terraces, and quite early they were using irrigation and drainage—because it enhanced labor productivity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The notion that European agriculture was somehow conducive to independent living in a way contrasted with Asian agriculture is another part of this myth. Early European farmers were not to any great extent, as Mann depicts them, living in isolation from one another, surrounded by forest. In the cases where they did live this way it was, again, a frontier phenomenon, in Asia as well as Europe. Farmers mostly lived in social aggregates, villages, large or small, compact or linear, depending upon many circumstances. There is no reason to doubt that the upland farming communities of Asia were quite similar to those in Europe. We return to this matter later in the chapter when we discuss the myth of the unique European family. For now I will simply categorize as mythic the idea that early European agricultural communities were somehow more individualistic, more independent-minded, more progressive than were communities elsewhere.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The most fundamental error made by the nineteenth-century thinkers and Weber and now mechanically repeated by historians such as Jones, Hall, and Mann, is to believe, or assume, that one type of environment produces a particular type of society and the latter then persists down through history. You simply cannot contrast the very ancient irrigating civilizations of Asia and North Africa with the later nonirrigating farming civilizations of Europe—or indeed of Asia—and then suppose that two contrasting civilizational types have been, thereby, created so as to remain in place down through history. Culture changes. Farmers move from one environment to another. In many places farmers practice both irrigation and nonirrigated agriculture on different soil types when appropriate land is available to them.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Blaut, &amp;quot;Two Views of Diffusion&amp;quot; (1977).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Thus the theory which asserts that arid Asian agricultural civilization produces a stagnant, despotic form of society down through later times, one which will not develop toward modernity, is purely a myth.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Temperate Europe ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have already seen how historians constructed a mythic model of &amp;quot;rainfall-farming&amp;quot; European society, supposing that rainfall brings benefits not associated with irrigation and that Europeans alone, in their hemisphere, practice &amp;quot;rainfall farming.&amp;quot; Historians like Mann, Jones, and Hall carry the argument farther along. Europe&#039;s rainfall-based farming, combined with Europe&#039;s supposedly fine and fertile soils, produced an environmental basis for agricultural production unmatched elsewhere. Although these historians give a lot of credit to the supposedly uniquely rational, inventive, European mind, they give much of the credit to Europe&#039;s natural environment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, Michael Mann draws a picture of a steady northwestward movement of European history—what we described in Chapter 1 as an Orient Express model—which he sees as an essential continuance down into the Middle Ages of the northwestern trajectory of that individualistic, creative, bumptious peasant society which, he thinks, emerged in the Iron Age with the uniquely European marriage of farming, iron, and rain-watered land. His model of the evolution of Europe&#039;s society (its &amp;quot;miracle&amp;quot;) is much more complex than this, but a key part of that model is the inexorable, steady, historically pregnant geographical movement—what he calls a northwestern &amp;quot;drift,&amp;quot; with a permanent northwest &amp;quot;leading edge.&amp;quot; Eschewing philosophical determinism, he nonetheless gives the whole process a strongly Hegelian, teleological flavor.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mann, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986), pp. 247, 406, 408, 412, 504-510, 520, 530, 539-540.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; One of two main reasons for this northwestern movement is the beckoningly fine environment of northwest Europe. And the main reason why this environment is so fine is its &amp;quot;deeper, wetter, more fertile soils.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mann, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986), p. 509.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
John Hall, similarly, extols the &amp;quot;northern European clay soils,&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties&#039;&#039; (1985), p. 99.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; northwest Europe&#039;s &amp;quot;deep and productive clay soils fed by rainfall&amp;quot; (&amp;quot;There was no need for irrigation&amp;quot;).&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties&#039;&#039; (1985), p. 110.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Eric L. Jones, in &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039;, makes much the same claim, if slightly qualified. He writes of Europe&#039;s &amp;quot;open-ended productive environment of forest land and rainfall farming,&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), p. 10.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; of Europe&#039;s &amp;quot;High, even rainfall and passable summers.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), p. 47.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Jones (unlike Mann and Hall) recognizes the fact that Asian land supports a higher farming population, with the implication that the land is more productive, but he merely notes that Europe&#039;s productive land comes in smaller, separated regions, and then he gives us one of the myths of Oriental despotism:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The very impracticability of hydraulic agriculture freed a fraction of European energies for other purposes. The rainfall farmers of Europe might be fewer in number than the farmers of China and India, but the former spent less time on all aspects of farmwork than the latter spent on water control work.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), p. 8. Jones makes the common error of assuming that productivity per worker is low in irrigated agriculture in comparison with unirrigated agriculture. This is not the case. Even with draft animals, medieval peasant production per worker was not high. And draft animals are used in irrigated farming, abundantly so in some Asian wet-rice farming systems.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The implication, of course, is that European peasant farmers didn&#039;t have to spend much time at farm work in order to satisfy their needs and their quota of surplus, whereas Asians worked much harder for the same product. This is plainly absurd unless we abandon historical method and try to compare Asian peasants under modern conditions of extreme land shortage with ancient European frontier conditions or modern European capitalist farmers. Stated differently, this makes no sense in terms of actual agricultural technique—irrigation is intended to increase productivity per worker, and usually does so—and in terms of any model of the historical European peasant as poor, oppressed, and overburdened.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;wet soils&amp;quot; of which these historians speak are usually excessively wet: acidic podzols and gleys that are difficult to work and infertile until heavily manured. The &amp;quot;high, even rainfall and passable summers&amp;quot; are in fact a climate so wet that solar energy is often severely limited, grain crops sometimes cannot do well (recall how important was the post-1492 introduction of the potato), and soils do not dry out until late in spring, if at all. I do not want to caricature the situation. It is merely the case that northwest European soils, across their entire range of variability, are not superior to the soils of many other regions. In ecological terms, the lands of warmer, drier regions that have either good rainfall regimes or possibilities for irrigation or drainage tend to be rather higher in productivity. My point is more limited. There is nothing about Europe&#039;s agricultural environment that explains the so-called miracle, or that might lead one to believe (as the authors I have cited believe) that European history throughout its course has been favored over Asian history by the European agricultural environment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Europe&#039;s supposed environmental superiority is by no means limited to farming. I will close our discussion of environmentalism by briefly commenting on four other comparative judgments which are routinely made by present historians of the European &amp;quot;miracle.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First is the classical &amp;quot;capes and bays&amp;quot; argument, familiar to most European and Anglo-American schoolchildren. Supposedly, Europe&#039;s configuration of peninsulas and bays, and Europe&#039;s possession of navigable rivers, gave this continent a natural basis for communication, trade, and accessibility denied to other continents. This, then, is supposed to have had a lot to do with the rise of markets and eventually capitalism in Europe.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mann, &amp;quot;European Development&amp;quot; (1988), p. 10, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986), p. 406; Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), pp. 90, 227; Crone, &#039;&#039;Pre-Industrial Societies&#039;&#039; (1989), p. 150; McNeill, &#039;&#039;Plagues and Peoples&#039;&#039; (1976), p. 295.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Part of the argument, like the emperor&#039;s clothes, is transparently false when looked at directly. For instance, accessibility by sea along the coasts of the Indian Ocean and much of the South China Sea was considerably easier in the Middle Ages than it was in Atlantic Europe. (If monsoonal wind patterns posed a problem in the Indian Ocean, storms posed a greater problem in the North Atlantic.) Trading cities dotted the Indian coast, and trading vessels plied up and down this coast, and on to Indonesia and Arabia, carrying bulk commodities like rice and iron as well as high-value goods, long before Italian galleys inaugurated a regular commodity trade between the Mediterranean and the northwest Atlantic. I do not belittle the great seamanship of the Atlantic fishermen, the Iceland traders, and the Hanseatic League when I note, simply, that other regions were using the sea as effectively as the Europeans were at comparable times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As to rivers, Europe&#039;s endowment of navigable rivers is impressive but not unique. It is not better than India&#039;s and China&#039;s. Interisland navigation in insular Southeast Asia was much easier than was navigation up and down the Rhine, say, or the Danube. Again it is a matter simply of reducing comparisons to reality. The &amp;quot;capes and bays&amp;quot; errors are normally followed by another error: the idea that Europe had, in early times, an advantage over civilizations that had to transport commodities overland. Many of the &amp;quot;miracle&amp;quot; historians repeat the theory that overland transport necessarily was much more costly than water transport. This is in fact a multiplicity of comparisons. When Mann and others quote the old formulas about draft animals consuming their weight in fodder over a limited distance (some say this takes place within 100-150 km), they ignore the fact that most draft animals graze or browse along the way: hence the great Inner-Asian Silk Road and the Sudanic caravans are easily comprehensible.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mann, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986, chap. 5). Mann in fact builds a theory of ancient warfare upon the basis of this sort of calculation, here also ignoring the fact that armies then as now provision themselves and their animals on the route of march.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Canals in China were much more effective than circuitous coastal shipping routes in Europe. And water transport—particularly upwind and upriver—may not have had advantages over land transport 1,000 or so years ago.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Eric L. Jones, in &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039;, makes the large claim that Asia suffered so much more than Europe from natural disasters of all sorts that Asian development was strongly inhibited by this presumed fact.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), chap. 2 and elsewhere. Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties&#039;&#039; (1985), p. 132, makes the same claim, citing Jones.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; He carries the argument to the point of claiming that the risk of natural disaster was so high as to frighten ordinary people into unusual demographic behavior, to close off trade possibilities, and more. Setting aside the fact that we have very little historical data on this subject, the main error is a simple matter of scale. Jones&#039;s &amp;quot;Europe&amp;quot; is really West and Central Europe. This region is roughly the size of the Indian subcontinent and perhaps one-fourth the size of the settled portion of Asia. So it might well have one-fourth as many natural disasters, ceteris paribus. It is true that floods are more serious in regions where people farm river valleys, but populations make adjustments which keep this one risk small enough so that it does not affect long-term development, and I suspect that winter-weather dangers in rural Europe were as great as flood risk in Asia, on a per capita basis. Hurricanes are no worse than the worst North Atlantic winter storms. The theory as a whole is unsupported by evidence and empty of credibility as an argument for the European &amp;quot;miracle.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The miracle historians point repeatedly to Europe&#039;s environmental differentiation, claiming that this leads to a unique potential for interregional trade and thus, again, for capitalism.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties&#039;&#039; (1985), p. 111; Jones &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), pp. 90, 105, 107, 226-227; Mann, &amp;quot;European Development: Approaching a Historical Explanation&amp;quot; (1988), p. 10; Mann, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986), p. 406.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; One need merely note that Europe does not possess an unusually large range of environments, and natural products, by comparison with other regions of comparable size. China, for instance, has roughly the same range of midlatitude environments plus a tropical south coast.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The last environmentalistic fable to be discussed here is the claim that Europe&#039;s topographic differentiation into many small &amp;quot;core regions,&amp;quot; separated by mountains and forests, somehow led to a number of supposedly unique features of ancient and medieval European society, including even the development of a unique trading system and a unique system of moderate-sized states and the many benefits supposedly deriving therefrom. Since this issue ties in with the parts of the &amp;quot;miracle&amp;quot; literature that concern Europe&#039;s supposed uniqueness in economic and political development, I will postpone discussing the geography of the matter until later in this chapter. Suffice it to say now that this idea of &amp;quot;cores&amp;quot; is partly a myth, and insofar as it is valid the same sorts of &amp;quot;cores&amp;quot; can be found in other continents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rationality ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We turn now to the theories about Europe&#039;s historical superiority or priority—Europe&#039;s &amp;quot;miracle&amp;quot;—which ground themselves, not in biology, not in environment, but in culture. First I will deal with theories which start from a conception of the superior &amp;quot;rationality&amp;quot; of Europeans. &amp;quot;Rationality&amp;quot; in such theories embraces many psychological attributes, always including inventiveness and innovativeness (or progressiveness), usually a capacity for abstract thought, and often a certain ability to make moral or ethical judgments. The issue is not whether such things are or are not fundamental causes in history; the issue is whether Europeans had more rationality, or higher rationality, than every other human community, and whether this was the principal reason, or at any rate one of the principal reasons, for the unique rise of Europe. The plain assertion that Europeans are smarter than everyone else seems to have a certain antique or Victorian ring to it, but this is deceptive: theories about &amp;quot;Western rationality&amp;quot; and the like are just as important today as they were for prior generations of scholars. Sometimes they are difficult to identify as rationality theories because they display other plumage. An explanation may focus on, say, technology, arguing that European technological innovations produced various forward movements in European history; looked at closely, however, the technological explanation usually dissolves into a theory about the inventiveness of Europeans, that is, their rationality. By the same token, an explanation may start with the state, or free markets, or the family, but usually (not always) it derives such structures from the more basic trait, rationality. Sometimes it works the other way around. Classical racist theories were rationality theories: to be white is to be more intelligent. Some (not all) Marxist theories are rationality theories: the defeat of feudalism released creative energies which then led to technological innovation, etc. Another complication is that superior rationality may be posited just for one crucial period and place, a magic key that started the whole process: Periclean Athens, Gutenberg&#039;s workshop, etc. I will try to sort these matters out by dealing first with the category &amp;quot;rationality theories&amp;quot; as such, then turning to other sorts of theories, technological and institutional, some of which are also rooted in the idea of European rationality.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Rationality Doctrine ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the beginning of this century most European scholars accepted the basic proposition that Europeans are more rational than non-Europeans. This was explained by a great variety of competing theories, biological racism being perhaps the most prominent, but I suspect that most Europeans accepted the proposition as indisputably correct regardless of the explanation. It was simply obvious that European countries had attained a higher level of wealth and civilization than other countries and had done so on their own, mainly through invention, innovation, and creativity. Europeans also now controlled the entire world and this, too, had to reflect some intellectual and probably also moral superiority. This was the heyday of the doctrine of classical diffusionism (discussed in Chapter 1), and few people doubted the doctrine&#039;s basic propositions: Europe develops; non-Europe does not develop or does so more slowly; Europe&#039;s development is based ultimately in some intellectual or spiritual principle; the normal and natural way for non-Europe to modernize and progress is by receiving the diffusion of rational European ideas, brought by European colonial administrators, settlers, planters, missionaries, and purveyors of commodities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By this time most European thinkers had come to accept the doctrine of &amp;quot;the psychic unity of mankind,&amp;quot; at least to the extent of agreeing that all of humanity shares a common ability to progress toward modernity. This doctrine crystallized into a theory, widely though not universally accepted in the early part of this century, that can be called the dualistic-developmental conception of human rationality. The elementary dualism was a distinction between the mentality of child and that of adult. The human mind has developed from a prehistoric condition which was mental childhood. European history is either to be explained as the fruit of human mental development or has been intimately accompanied by such mental development, in a process that was fundamentally the same as the psychological development from childhood to adulthood. Europeans became more rational as history progressed, just as children acquire rationality in the course of ontogenetic development. Ancient people had been not merely less intelligent but also much more governed by emotions and passions than by intellect, just as is the case with modern children. With some modification, the same was thought to be the case for modern European women, who were less intelligent and more governed by emotion than men, that is, they were less rational than men. But women, too, would experience mental development, and would eventually be rational enough to vote, hold public office, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Non-Europeans, within the same theory, were seen as psychically undeveloped, as more or less childlike. But, given the psychic unity of mankind, non-Europeans could of course be brought to adulthood, to rationality, to modernity, through a set of learning experiences, mainly colonial. (The phrase &amp;quot;colonial tutelage&amp;quot; was a signature of the doctrine, and this conception is encountered in most history and geography textbooks of the time.) It was not simply a case of &amp;quot;the natives are like children.&amp;quot; The idea of non-European nonrationality was a definite, putatively scientific principle, widely accepted: non-Europeans think somewhat like children, and will be led toward adulthood by Europeans. Non-Europeans were of course graded. &amp;quot;Savages&amp;quot; were mental children without qualification. Problematic peoples, like the Indians, Ottomans, and Chinese, were thought to be childlike in some respects and not in others. Indeed they were governed by emotion and passion much more than Europeans. (Colonial revolts were obviously irrational—were outbursts of childlike emotion.) As far as scientific and abstract philosophical thinking was concerned, the people of these cultures were clearly not up to full adult standards, but in some respects, notably in arts and crafts, they were perhaps gifted adolescents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So we have a model which has, as its centerpiece, the Rational Modern Adult European Man. History is his progression to mental adulthood. He is contrasted with ancient European man; with modern European children; with modern European women; with modern non-Europeans. The contrast was often extended, also, to psychotics; in some schools of thought they were explicitly seen as having a developmentally arrested mentality and this was indeed used as a therapeutic principle.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Occasionally &amp;quot;the criminal mind&amp;quot; was seen to reflect another dimension of contrast.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; What needs to be emphasized is the fact that this was considered to be a scientific theory. Thus it was valid to exchange principles across these various dimensions of contrast. For our purposes, the most important of these principles was the attribution of mental development to European history and the attribution of mental nondevelopment to non-Europe, past and present; hence Europeans had naturally acquired a unique rationality.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It would be wrong to reduce to caricature the scholarly theories of a few generations back, and the model I have just described looks, on the face of it, like a caricature. Most scholars did not literally believe, say, that the American Indian was a mental child, or that ontogenetic mental development exactly recapitulates the mental development of our species. But the model was a dominant force in European thought in certain precise ways. The equation of child, ancient, and non-European was explicitly accepted in nonscholarly discourse (newspapers, Tarzan novels, and so on). American educational policy toward Indians and other colonials was explicitly grounded in this model, even if it was a smoothed-down version of it. A very large number of writings in history, geography, and all of social science made use of one or another part of the model. And several very widely accepted theories were really forms of the same model. Three examples will be helpful.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most anthropologists accepted the idea that there are two distinct mental types, one being the so-called &amp;quot;primitive mind,&amp;quot; the mind of tribal peoples just about everywhere (some added: peasants everywhere). The &amp;quot;primitive mind&amp;quot; was very explicitly described—the most famous description is found in Lévy-Bruhl&#039;s influential book, &#039;&#039;How Natives Think&#039;&#039;—as being incapable of higher theoretical and abstract ideas, as being emotion driven, and so on.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Lévy-Bruhl, &#039;&#039;How Natives Think&#039;&#039; (1966).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Some anthropologists opposed this notion (Boas, Radin, and Mead perhaps most notably&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See, for example, Boas, &#039;&#039;The Mind of Primitive Man&#039;&#039; (1938); Radin, &#039;&#039;Primitive Man as Philosopher&#039;&#039; (1927); M. Mead, &#039;&#039;Growing Up in New Guinea&#039;&#039; (1930).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;); most anthropologists accepted it with some qualifications; some accepted it literally. Lévy-Bruhl&#039;s rather stark form of the theory had great influence on psychologists and all of social science. Closely connected to this theory was the notion that there are &amp;quot;primitive languages,&amp;quot; languages incapable of expressing higher theoretical and abstract thought. This old notion (which had been used in one form by William von Humboldt) was joined to the proposition that people cannot think beyond the limitations of their natural language, and so a primitive language entails a primitive mind.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Stocking, &#039;&#039;Victorian Anthropology&#039;&#039; (1987), p. 59; Bowler, &#039;&#039;The Invention of Progress&#039;&#039; (1989), p. 66; Whitman &amp;quot;From Philology to Anthropology in Mid-Nineteenth-Century Germany&amp;quot; (1984); Bernal, &#039;&#039;Black Athena&#039;&#039;, vol. 1 (1987); Said, &#039;&#039;Orientalism&#039;&#039; (1978). A recent expression of this theory came in a Soviet debate about &amp;quot;Oriental despotism&amp;quot; (Lelekov, &amp;quot;Round-Table: State and Law in the Ancient Orient,&amp;quot; 1978). L. Lelekov, a historian, claimed that words meaning &amp;quot;freedom&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;right&amp;quot; were basic in the original Indo-European language or languages but not in Near Eastern languages, and asserted that this must have affected &amp;quot;social thinking&amp;quot; (p. 190). This contention was refuted by the philologist V. Ivanov (p. 193).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Beyond that, the old philological theory about the innate superiority of Indo-European languages still had many adherents, and this theory extended the notion of primitive language to most of the non-European languages of the world. The third example is a broad family of theories in psychology that made use of the idea that mental development in the individual is homologous to mental development in the species, and that modern primitive peoples have the mentality of children and ancients, sometimes extending the concept to the putative psychological makeup (and limitations) of non-European peoples in general. In the twentieth century this theory received its most influential expression in the psychoanalytic viewpoint of Carl Jung and his followers. Jung swept broadly across non-Western cultures (Arabs, Indians, Africans, African-Americans, and others) declaring, basically, that only modern European man has fully developed an individual consciousness, an ego, an ability to think, even an ability to conceive of himself as an individual separate from the external world. Only European man is rational.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Dalal, &amp;quot;The Racism of Jung&amp;quot; (1988). In Jung&#039;s work, see in particular &#039;&#039;Psychological Types&#039;&#039; (1971) (for instance: &amp;quot;(If) we go right back to primitive psychology, we find absolutely no trace of the concept of the individual,&amp;quot; p. 10); &#039;&#039;Memories, Dreams, Reflections&#039;&#039; (1963), and &amp;quot;The Dreamlike World of India,&amp;quot; in &#039;&#039;Civilization in Transition&#039;&#039; (1927). See also the 1954 work by Jung&#039;s disciple Erich Neumann, &#039;&#039;The Origins and History of Consciousness&#039;&#039; (for instance: &amp;quot;The evolution of consciousness as a form of creative evolution is the peculiar achievement of Western man ... The creative character of consciousness is a central feature of the cultural canon of the West ... In stationary cultures, or in primitive societies where the original features of human culture are still preserved, the earliest stages of man&#039;s psychology predominate,&amp;quot; pp. xviii-xxix).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The doctrine went through some important changes as it became absorbed into the &amp;quot;modernization&amp;quot; paradigm, the body of ideas which, as we have seen, came to dominate European social thought in the 1950s and still does so to some extent today. &amp;quot;Colonial tutelage&amp;quot; gave way to &amp;quot;diffusion of modernizing innovations.&amp;quot; Non-Europeans no longer were &amp;quot;natives,&amp;quot; and no longer were described as &amp;quot;childlike.&amp;quot; In place of the notions of &amp;quot;primitive mind&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;primitive language&amp;quot; came the notion of traditional mentality. Non-Europeans are &amp;quot;traditional&amp;quot; in two senses: they lack &amp;quot;modern cognitive abilities,&amp;quot; that is, the ability to think theoretically and scientifically, and they lack &amp;quot;modern attitudes&amp;quot; of the sort that push a person to achieve higher things, to reject the old, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This appears still to be the primitive mind, but there is an important difference. &amp;quot;Traditional minds&amp;quot; are simply waiting to be awakened, to be modernized. The larger picture was one of a vast landscape of traditional societies, containing people with traditional mentalities, and modernization would set the drama into motion. Mentalities would change. Social structure would change. New ideas and technology would diffuse into the modernizing societies from the already-modernized European societies, and so on. Recall that the modernization doctrine is not only a concept of the spatial spread of European ideas, attitudes, and the like, in the present-day postcolonial world. It is also a historical concept: modernization as history. &amp;quot;Traditional society&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;traditional mentality&amp;quot; came to be used to describe early Europe, the rise of Europe was now seen as a modernization process, and the start of that process was a much debated matter of deciding when Europe began its &amp;quot;takeoff&amp;quot;—its rise from the level of traditionalism and toward modernity. History is appealed to for the basic causal principle: Europe modernized, and now non-Europe will follow—though not slavishly—in its path. We will come back to this point in a moment. First I want to comment on the main causal principles that are thought to lead in the other direction. I will show that schools have arisen in psychology, sociology, and other disciplines that claim to provide scientific demonstrations as to what, exactly, is the nature of the &amp;quot;traditional mind,&amp;quot; and the output from these scholars tends, then, to seep back into history, where it finds its way into the newer writings about the European miracle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In psychology, the important figure is Jean Piaget. His basic theory of mental development postulated an invariant series of &amp;quot;stages&amp;quot; of development through which all children must progress. Piaget was influenced by Lévy-Bruhl and the primitive mind doctrine, and as late as 1971 he thought that&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
it is quite possible, and this is the impression we have from known ethnographical work, that in many societies, adult thought does not go beyond the level of &amp;quot;concrete&amp;quot; operations, and therefore does not reach that of propositional operations which develop between the ages of twelve and fifteen in our milieus.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Piaget, &#039;&#039;Psychology and Epistemology&#039;&#039; (1971), p. 61.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Propositional operations&amp;quot; means, roughly, logic. &amp;quot;Concrete&amp;quot; is childish prelogical thought, unable to deal with the abstract and the theoretical. Now Piaget was a great psychologist, but he did not have, or claim to have, direct knowledge of non-European psychology. He was arguing from the traditional dualistic-developmental model that equates the child and the primitive. (And he was about 30 years out of date as to ethnography.) But many of his disciples, seeking to connect their theory with the modernization doctrine, took up the theme and began to carry out research to find out whether non-Western people (particularly Africans) do, indeed, have inferior cognitive abilities. It is no oversimplification to say that virtually all of these studies made the same mistake and came up with the same, predictable conclusions. They used the tests of cognitive ability that Piaget had used with European children and, scarcely modifying them, administered these tests to non-European children and adults and found, predictably, that these people do not have full adult cognitive abilities. By now the error has become well known, and most present-day Piagetian psychologists do not seem to assert that non-Europeans are cognitively childlike. Along with the Piagetian studies of the 1960s and 1970s, there appeared, in this era, many studies carried out by psychologists from other schools of thought (like the Heinz Werner school) which took the old primitive-mind doctrine as fact,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See, for example, Werner and Kaplan, &#039;&#039;Symbol Formation&#039;&#039; (1964).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; along with studies carried out by white South African psychologists comparing white and black subjects, other Europeans studying other African populations, and a few Israeli psychologists comparing the cognitive abilities of Arabs and Jews. With few exceptions, the European psychologists found the non-European subjects to be deficient in cognitive ability, and so to be &amp;quot;traditional.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See the first 16 volumes (through 1985) of &#039;&#039;The Journal of Cross-Cultural Psychology&#039;&#039; for a great many examples of this phenomenon. For this period something like one-tenth of all the empirical articles in this U.S. journal were studies by white Southern Africans purporting to show the cognitive inferiority of black Africans.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In nearly all of these studies the testing was such that the &amp;quot;natives&amp;quot; didn&#039;t really stand a chance because the tests were European, administered by Europeans or their native assistants, in Europeanized settings. The error became so well known that the entire field of &amp;quot;cross-cultural psychology&amp;quot; gained a bad name—as an apologia for ethnocentrism—until, in the 1980s, it changed direction. The point is that while most cross-cultural psychologists today, apparently, deny that non-Europeans are less rational than Europeans, they established a body of publications that are still used by others to make the opposite point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The rationality doctrine was perhaps most influential in those parts of sociology and economics that were closest to the modernization doctrine, particularly among academics who were involved in making and implementing the policies being put into place in the 1950s and 1960s to develop the underdeveloped countries. As we saw in Chapter 1, this sphere of ideas was crucial to the politics of modernization for at least three reasons: First and most basic was the need to validate diffusionism. Second, development of the sort that involved only the spread of new ideas and new techniques was much cheaper, in principle, than development involving massive flows of capital, industrial development, and the like. And third, along the same lines, development at the level of ideas, of research, extension, education, and so on, was not threatening; it would not produce the dangers of revolution and counterrevolution implicit in efforts to change the relation of power groups, to effectuate land reform, and the like. For these reasons, scholars were encouraged, indeed were given lavish grants and were well paid, to produce analyses of modernization that would lead to workable policies for bringing about development mainly through an influence at the level of ideas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everett Rogers, a rural sociologist; David McClelland, a social psychologist; and Everett Hagen, an economist, provided highly influential contributions that I will describe briefly and with some caricature. Rogers was one of the leaders in a movement to sort out peasant mentalities into those that are prodevelopment (&amp;quot;cosmopolitan&amp;quot;) and those that are noninnovative and &amp;quot;laggard.&amp;quot; The crucial notion was the idea of the diffusion of rationality into rural non-European communities. The key to development (with some qualification) was the transmittal of new ideas to innovative &amp;quot;adopters.&amp;quot; The fact that most of the ideas were not, themselves, workable (thus were not rational), and that adoption of them would have required of peasants not more knowledge, but more power and landownership, was ignored. McClelland claimed that non-Western peoples in general have not modernized because they lack the proper &amp;quot;need-achievement&amp;quot; motivation. They will modernize when and if they acquire this need to achieve, which had been of crucial importance in earlier European development, from ancient Greece on up. Hagen produced an elaborate theory, based in no evidence whatever, that non-Western peoples, and particularly peasants, have a traditional mentality that resists change of all sorts. The model starts with a mythic peasant unconscious mind that is uncreative, submissive to paternal authority (and therefore oppressive of innovative children), and unwilling to change. All three of these scholars, and dozens of their acolytes, produced a general model of peasant mentality as defective in both cognitive and attitudinal (affective) characteristics, but, of course, not hopelessly so.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Rogers, &#039;&#039;The Diffusion of Innovations&#039;&#039; (1962); Rogers and Shoemaker, &#039;&#039;Communication of Innovations&#039;&#039; (1971), pp. 187-191; McClelland, &#039;&#039;The Achieving Society&#039;&#039; (1961); Hagen, &#039;&#039;On the Theory of Social Change&#039;&#039; (1962) and &amp;quot;A Framework for Analyzing Economic and Political Change,&amp;quot; in Brookings Institution, ed., &#039;&#039;Development of the Emerging Countries: An Agenda for Research&#039;&#039; (1962), pp. 1-39. I have cited only the initial statements: much literature emerged from these works.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; One of many recent outgrowths of this doctrine is Stephen Marglin&#039;s theory of the Western mental &amp;quot;episteme,&amp;quot; a marriage of the old &amp;quot;primitive mind&amp;quot; idea and the newer ideas about traditionalism, which argues, in essence, that the Western mind is, and historically has been, scientific, rational, and intellectually hardheaded—the &amp;quot;episteme&amp;quot;—while the non-Western mind is traditionally given to technique and art (&amp;quot;techne&amp;quot;) but not to science. Marglin&#039;s new twist on this old doctrine is to say that some of the non-Western &amp;quot;techne&amp;quot; should be incorporated in development along with the Western &amp;quot;episteme&amp;quot; because &amp;quot;techne,&amp;quot; less intellectual but more feeling, is less likely to destroy the natural environment and causes less psychic damage to non-Western people, a distinction rather like the older duality between scientific thought and emotion-laden concrete thought.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;S. Marglin, &amp;quot;Losing Touch: The Cultural Conditions of Worker Accommodation and Resistance,&amp;quot; in F. and S. Marglin, eds., &#039;&#039;Dominating knowledge: Development, Culture, and Resistance&#039;&#039; (1990).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Marglin&#039;s ideas provide an example of much theorizing in the economic development world (like Hagen, he is a development economist) about non-Western nonrationality.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It would take us far afield to examine the parallel arguments in all the other fields of social thought. The following should suffice: In geography, the diffusion-of-innovative-ideas approach has been important since the 1960s and remains so today. The same old assumptions about peasant and non-Western traditionalism are still dominant. Some geographers claim even that non-Europeans are mentally not capable of using all available means of coping with natural hazards like drought and hurricane. One geographer, Robert Sack, has come up with a classically Eurocentric theory about spatial cognition: most non-Western people (primitives and most peasants) cannot think in spatial terms the way modern Western adults can. Among the authorities he uses—the argument is from authority, not evidence—are Lévy-Bruhl and Piaget.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Sack, &#039;&#039;Conceptions of Space in Social Thought&#039;&#039; (1980). Geographers prominent in the diffusion paradigm discussed here are L. Brown (&#039;&#039;The Diffusion of Innovations&#039;&#039;, 1981) and P. Gould (&#039;&#039;Spatial Diffusion&#039;&#039;, 1969). On peasant traditionalism in relation to natural hazards, see G. White, ed., &#039;&#039;Natural Hazards&#039;&#039; (1974), as an example of the abundant literature. I criticize these and other arguments about non-Western nonrationality in Blaut, &amp;quot;Two Views of Diffusion&amp;quot; (1977), &amp;quot;Diffusionism: A Unitarian Critique&amp;quot; (1987a), and &amp;quot;Natural Mapping&amp;quot; (1991).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In the field of education in the United States the newer forms of the dualistic-developmental theory of (Western) rationality are highly influential in many areas, including testing.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In the field of education in the United States the dominant standardized college entrance tests (SAT and ACT) are skewed by culture-specific and sex-specific internal (as well as situational) characteristics, such that women do more poorly than men although they actually perform at higher levels in terms of university grades, while the ACT and SAT test scores of Latinos (African-Americans have not yet been studied in this way), which are very low, have no correlation whatever with their performance in college. Thus the tests effectively minimize female and minority college attendance. Why the tests are almost universally used, even so, is a fascinating question. The same biases are so prominent in IQ testing that such tests have been barred as diagnostic instruments in California schools. The &amp;quot;primitive mind&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;primitive languages&amp;quot; biases sometimes combine, as in U.S. debates about the so-called &amp;quot;English-only&amp;quot; issue and about the question whether non-European literature deserves to be included in the college curriculum along with European literature. In Boston not long ago, 30% of Hispanic children aged six to eight were not attending elementary school because their inability to speak English had been judged to be evidence of mental retardation, and Boston claimed not to have sufficient resources to educate these children in &amp;quot;special schools.&amp;quot; Testing in general in U.S. education remains very racist.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In the field of philosophy, there is a strong relationship between the stream of ideas about rationality, discussed above, and the resurgence of mind-body dualism, such as one finds in the Cartesian and Kantian traditions and particularly in the modern neo-Kantians.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Rorty, &#039;&#039;Philosophy and the Mirror of Nature&#039;&#039; (1980), and earlier works by Dewey (for instance &#039;&#039;The Quest for Certainty&#039;&#039;, 1929), Whitehead (for instance, &#039;&#039;Modes of Thought&#039;&#039;, 1938), and G. H. Mead (for instance, &#039;&#039;Philosophy of the Act&#039;&#039;, 1938).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I do not suggest that the doctrine of non-Western nonrationality is fully hegemonic in modern scholarship, or that the above formulations have not been challenged. In general, however, the doctrine remains somewhat dominant in all fields of thought except, perhaps, anthropology and economics. Anthropology in recent decades has, with some lapses, maintained quite firmly that primitive minds are not primitive.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;This is a general assessment. Some anthropologists continue to maintain either the &amp;quot;primitive mind&amp;quot; doctrine or the closely related &amp;quot;traditional mind&amp;quot; doctrine. An example of the latter is George Foster&#039;s well-known and influential book &#039;&#039;Traditional Cultures&#039;&#039; (1962), of the former, Hallpike&#039;s &#039;&#039;The Foundations of Primitive Thought&#039;&#039; (1979). For a critique, see Schweder, &amp;quot;Cultural Psychology: What Is It?&amp;quot; (1990).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; And some schools of economics need the principle of universal economic rationality so badly, as axioms for their theories, that they are willing to concede rationality to everyone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rationality and the European Miracle ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The idea of European rationality is often called &amp;quot;Weberian,&amp;quot; because Max Weber made important use of the idea in various explanations for European social evolution and various negative judgments about the lesser rationality of other societies. The rationality doctrine was, however, widely held in early twentieth-century Europe when Weber&#039;s important writings on this subject were published. But he codified the traditional doctrine and added something of his own to it, so the doctrine can indeed be called Weberian from the present-day perspective. It is also Weberian in another and perhaps more important sense: Weber placed European social evolution in a framework emphasizing the modernization process, and contrasting Europe&#039;s modernization with the &amp;quot;traditionalism,&amp;quot; as he sometimes called it, of Asian civilizations. When the modernization paradigm locked into place among scholars just after World War II, Max Weber was the most obvious, and most logical, source of basic sociological doctrine for the paradigm. From that time on, scholars who wrote about the rise of Europe and chose to emphasize the individual trait of rationality, or social-level traits and institutions which Weber had treated as primary (and, in the main, as consequences of European rationality), were Weberians to one degree or another (even if they rejected some parts of Weber&#039;s model). The importance of Weber for our discussion of present-day theories about the &amp;quot;European miracle,&amp;quot; is the fact that the most influential, probably dominant, school of thought concerning the &amp;quot;miracle&amp;quot; today is more or less Weberian. Weber&#039;s views about rationality therefore require at least brief discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Weber analyzed Western capitalist society of the late nineteenth- to early twentieth-century epoch in meticulous detail and with great insight, although there were important limits to his insight. He held to the typical conceit of his time and place and class in thinking that contemporary European capitalism is the culmination of a process of social evolution that was, at root, an intellectual progression, an ascent of human &amp;quot;rationality,&amp;quot; meaning intellect and ethics, from ancient to modern society. (He had doubts about the likelihood of further ascent in the future.) At each stage of that progression people invented new social forms, such as higher forms of the state, the legal system, the bureaucracy, the economy, the city, and so forth, but these forms were, basically, products of evolving rationality rather than primary causes of progress in their own right. But the march toward ever more rational society took place in Europe, among Europeans. Outside of the European tunnel of time, all societies were in varying degrees traditional and in varying degrees irrational.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Weber said rather little about the question of why Europeans came to display this rationality in the first place, that is, as a basal cause. He invoked several factors, one of which, as we noted previously, was race and another, the natural environment. Others seem to lie deep within culture. Yet Weber rarely discussed causality at this basal level, that is, attempting to explain why Europeans have unique rationality, and have had it since a long time before the Protestant Reformation and modernity.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;On the question of Weber&#039;s use of &amp;quot;rationality,&amp;quot; its basal status in his theorizing, and yet its uncertain definition and provenance, see, for instance: Cohen&#039;s introduction to the 1981 ed. of Weber&#039;s &#039;&#039;General Economic History&#039;&#039; (1981), pp. xxv-xxvii; Löwith, &#039;&#039;Max Weber and Karl Marx&#039;&#039; (1982), pp. 40-42, 53-54, n. 49; Freund, &#039;&#039;The Sociology of Max Weber&#039;&#039; (1968), pp. 140-149. In Weber, see &#039;&#039;General Economic History&#039;&#039; (1981), chaps. 29, 30, &#039;&#039;The Protestant Ethic and the Spirit of Capitalism&#039;&#039; (1958), pp. 13-31, 59-60, 79, 118-120, 191, n. 19, 265, n. 31, &#039;&#039;The Religion of China&#039;&#039; (1951), chap. 8, &#039;&#039;The Religion of India&#039;&#039; (1967), p. 387, and other works.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; One reason seems to lie in his view of social causality, with ideas and values, and the evolution of ideas and values, treated as prime causes of social processes, social structures, and social change. Given this conception, he would not be expected to look for nonideological-level causes for ideas and values. Doubtless there were other reasons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Whatever Weber considered to have been the basic cause of the differences between rational, progressive European society and irrational, traditional Asian society (Africa and America were scarcely noticed), he delineated these supposed differences very carefully. The most crucial arguments are found in his &#039;&#039;General Economic History&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;The Protestant Ethic and the Spirit of Capitalism&#039;&#039;. The development of rationality among Europeans—however that had happened—led to a special sort of &amp;quot;economic ethic,&amp;quot; a body of values, aspirations, and logical thought processes that emerged primarily in connection with the Reformation (and particularly Puritanism) but which, more fundamentally, produced capitalism. The important point here is that basal rationality produced both the &amp;quot;economic ethic&amp;quot; of capitalism and the Protestant movement: Weber is not (as some think) explaining capitalism and modernity in terms narrowly of religion. He does invoke religion to explain many aspects of the supposed traditionalism of Asians, but here too a primordial irrationality is seen as underlying religion. (He writes, for instance, of the &amp;quot;magical traditionalism&amp;quot; of Indians and Chinese.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Weber, &#039;&#039;General Economic History&#039;&#039; (1981), p. 161. Also see pp. 339, 355-368. Weber makes a large number of comments about the irrationality of Asians.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The superior rationality of Europeans produces other major historical differences between Europe and non-Europe. Europeans are basically freedom loving, not ground under by Oriental despotism; this devolves into a form of city that is much freer than the Asian city, the latter being conceived by Weber as (in essence) merely a physical entity wholly controlled by the overarching empire, and the former as a truly new form of society, emerging in the Middle Ages and inaugurating modernity.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Weber, &#039;&#039;Economy and Society&#039;&#039;, vol. 2 (1968), pp. 1212-1374.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; (As we discuss in Chapter 3, Asian cities were not as Weber described them. Some were free city-states, others were virtually free under a loose imperial umbrella. European cities, on the other hand, were much less independent than Weber thought.) Landholding systems were also different because of differences in rationality: only in Europe, says Weber (here putting forward a purely traditional European view) does the concept of private property truly emerge. The feudal estate is almost genuinely private property. The Asian estate is seen as merely a temporary assignment of land as a source of revenue for dignitaries, a form of salary given for service and ordinarily returned to the state. But European feudal estates were also, legally and actually, granted on service tenure, and in both continents these sorts of estates tended in general to become hereditary and thus eventually private property (see Chapter 3). Of course, Weber talks about other supposed differences between Europe and non-Europe, but the examples given here will suffice to show his overall approach.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Weber did not originate most of these arguments, although he codified them and developed them in a brilliant way. Yet Weber is given credit overall, and &amp;quot;Weberianism&amp;quot; is now the most important form of theory in explaining the European &amp;quot;miracle.&amp;quot; The basic form can be summarized very simply. Rationality is the causal root. The effect of differential rationality is, in Europe, permanent progress, modernization, and capitalism. In non-Europe it is stagnation, traditionalism, and various irrational cultural attributes such as superstition. The model here is simple diffusionism: rationality and therefore modernization are permanent in Europe. Non-Europe does not modernize except by the diffusion of these traits from Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The doctrine of &amp;quot;Western rationality&amp;quot; is widely used today in explanations for Europe&#039;s unique rise, its &amp;quot;miracle.&amp;quot; No longer is the superior rationality of Europeans attributed, even implicitly, to racial superiority, but how the historians manage to assert the one without the other is not an easy question to answer. Generally, causality is consigned to the impenetrable mists of ancient history, with perhaps an occasional speculation about ancient free-living European peasants or the evils of Oriental despotism, or with a ritual citation of Max Weber. For many historians, I suspect, the idea of European rationality is simply axiomatic. Europeans, for whatever reason, are just built that way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Eric L. Jones dwells very heavily on rationality as an explanation for Europe&#039;s historical superiority in &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039;. His claim is that there is a fundamental lack of rationality among Asians and Africans. The assertions are laid on so thickly, and with so little attempt to account for this putative irrationality, that it is difficult to avoid the suspicion that Jones, perhaps alone among modern &amp;quot;miracle&amp;quot; historians, holds some deep prejudices. Africans are dismissed, in a brief discussion, as having had no significance in history. They are characterized in a way that suggests, not very subtly, that they are closer to the beasts than are other humans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Africa man adapted himself to nature. The hunter felt part of the ecosystem, not outside it looking in with wonder, and definitely not above it and superior. After all, there were large carnivores who sought man as a prey. The most evocative symbol of this ecological oneness may be the honey guides ... birds commensal with man. They fly, chattering loudly, ahead of bands of hunters, leading them ... to the tree hives of wild bees and feeding on the wax after the men have broken open the hives. (154)&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Numbers in parentheses are page numbers in &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is a Tarzan image. Most Africans were farmers, not hunters (we discussed this previously). The scavenging house sparrow is also commensal with humans in the suburbs of London, but Jones speaks of &amp;quot;commensalism&amp;quot; only for Africans. (Ethology, as we will see, is evoked somewhat similarly for Asians.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The ecologists&#039; term &amp;quot;commensalism&amp;quot; refers to a form of tight interspecific cooperation between animal species, but hardly ever is it applied to humans.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There was scant incentive or pressure for development or invention. ... Any pressure ... was apparently offset by the use of slaves instead of the improvement of methods. ... Otherwise wealth was spent on luxury items. ... [There was] pervasive insecurity as a result of conflict and slave-raiding. (155-156)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Africans thus were noninventive, were aggressive, were lovers of luxury, were slavers and slaves. And also hunters close to the beasts they hunted. So: it &amp;quot;is not clear what indigenous developments were possible&amp;quot; (156).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Asians do not think logically. There is &amp;quot;relative absence of the empirical enquiry and criticism of the Graeco-Judeo-Christian tradition&amp;quot; (161), and &amp;quot;lack of a crisp tradition of logical debate,&amp;quot; which may explain the &amp;quot;failure&amp;quot; of Asian science&amp;quot; (162). &amp;quot;The notion of a consensus in interpreting nature may have seemed absurd&amp;quot; (162)—that is, Asians may not even have had an ability to conceptualize scientific verification, to distinguish empirical truth from falsity. They were uncreative: &amp;quot;Asian institutions suppressed creativity or diverted it into producing voluptuous luxuries&amp;quot; (231).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Asians have attitudes and values that inhibit progress. &amp;quot;Oriental philosophies [emphasize] emotions, values and cosmologies,&amp;quot; at the expense of empirical thought (161). Orientals are lazy (163). They (like Africans) have a &amp;quot;love of luxury&amp;quot; (170), and they love to buy things like &amp;quot;kingfisher feathers ... precious stones ... drugs no modern pharmacopeia would own&amp;quot; (164). They have a &amp;quot;servile spirit,&amp;quot; their armies lack &amp;quot;tough&amp;quot; petty officers (167). They are, as a rule, introverted, inward looking; they are &amp;quot;increasingly immobile societies undergoing &#039;curious experiences,&#039;&amp;quot; given to self-imposed &amp;quot;isolation&amp;quot; (170), lacking an urge to explore (168, 177, 203, 231). They are given to senseless warfare (169, 188, 197), do not have a written legal system (164, 188, 197), and do not have a concept of political boundary (167, 194). There is much thievery and piracy (189, 199, 209, 229-30).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In most judgments of this type (of which I have given only a sample), Jones is referring to Asians in general and through all times in their history.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Typical of Jones&#039;s method is to find some objectionable feature of very early Asian society, compare it with some pleasing feature of modern, post-industrial-revolution European society, and then treat both features as though they were permanent characteristics of the respective societies, giving a picture of awful primitiveness to Asians and marvelous modernity to Europeans thereby.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Some judgments are more specific. Islamic society was for a time somewhat innovative, borrowing technology from other societies, and preserving ancient Greek sciences. (This is a standard Eurocentric belief: Arabs preserved Greek science during the Dark Ages and then handed it back to Europe for further development, something like an intellectual left-luggage office.) The Ottoman Empire (the single real example of Islamic culture discussed by Jones, with the imputation that it stands as symbol for Islam as a whole and at all times) stamped out original thought. It produced unreason, backwardness, and retrogression, a &amp;quot;mist of obscurantist thought&amp;quot; (183). Ottomans didn&#039;t even know &amp;quot;the elementary facts of geography&amp;quot; (184) and couldn&#039;t even make decent maps (179). (Jones himself doesn&#039;t know much about geography and maps.) Rulers were often &amp;quot;degenerates,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;drunkards,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;mental defectives,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;lechers,&amp;quot; ruling with despotism and terror (186-187), their &amp;quot;philosophy&amp;quot; being theft and despoilment, against which there was &amp;quot;no legal shield&amp;quot; (187-189).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indian society was socially and psychologically &amp;quot;frozen&amp;quot; (192), with values that were deleterious to economic progress. Religion was invoked to sanction all acts, but the advice of religious counsellors was &amp;quot;malicious or random&amp;quot; (195). The Mughal rulers were, like the Ottomans, degenerates, running society for their own benefit, given to &amp;quot;voluptuous selfishness,&amp;quot; harems, jewels, menageries, intrigues, treason (196). The state was purely predatory. Technology was &amp;quot;almost stagnant,&amp;quot; not even copying from abroad (199). &amp;quot;No written legal code existed,&amp;quot; says Jones in a quite bizarre misstatement (197).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
China was technologically inventive and innovative until the early Middle Ages, when progress stopped. There was thereafter a &amp;quot;retreat&amp;quot; (203); some skills were even forgotten. Chinese became &amp;quot;inward-looking&amp;quot; (203, 216, 220). China &amp;quot;backed away&amp;quot; from technology, from trade, from exploration. Technological development stopped even in agriculture, and only the cultivation of new land, with irrational cutting of irreplaceable forests, and the fortunate, timely, arrival of New World crops such as maize and sweet potato, saved the Chinese temporarily from disaster, although cutting down these forests was &amp;quot;one of mankind&#039;s greatest acts of ecological stupidity,&amp;quot; stupidity which led to &amp;quot;soil erosion, gullying, silting and floods&amp;quot; (213). (Apparently the deforestation of Europe and North American was not &amp;quot;stupid.&amp;quot;) Peasants were given to &amp;quot;envy and suspicion&amp;quot; (206), were stupid as farmers (212-217), and were stupid also in preferring &amp;quot;maximal reproduction&amp;quot; over &amp;quot;affluence&amp;quot; (218). The state was despotic, a &amp;quot;revenue-pump&amp;quot; for the rulers, providing no services (206). There was (again) a love of luxury, an attitude of &amp;quot;empty cultural superiority&amp;quot; (205), a corrupt, venal, parasitic ruling class. Chinese had &amp;quot;anti-social customs&amp;quot; (7) and were diseased.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ethology, the science of comparative animal behavior, is invoked repeatedly by Jones in his characterization of Asians and Africans. Oriental courts were given to displays of &amp;quot;the dominance relationship&amp;quot; (109, 209). Multiple wives had &amp;quot;ethological significance,&amp;quot; as also, perhaps, did the &amp;quot;amassing&amp;quot; of slaves for &amp;quot;display purposes.&amp;quot; &amp;quot;Great attention was paid to submission symbols, kneeling, prostration, the kotow&amp;quot; (209). In India, a &amp;quot;similar calculus ... underlay human demographic behavior and veneration of the cow&amp;quot; (19). Recall the &amp;quot;commensalism&amp;quot; in Africa.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These beliefs about the intellectual and moral inferiority of non-Europeans are old colonial-era prejudices, which Jones merely recites. The fact that &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; is taken seriously by some historians is partly, I think, a reflection of the degree to which these old prejudices still lurk within our scholarship as implicit beliefs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Many other historians of the &amp;quot;miracle&amp;quot; try to insert European rationality at or near the base of their explanatory theories. Michael Mann can be taken as a typical representative of the genre. We have already discussed his contrived little theory about the marvelous Iron Age Indo-Europeans of the northern forests, uniquely individualistic, aggressive, freedom loving (all notions from nineteenth-century and earlier scholarship, none grounded in solid evidence for Europe or, comparatively, for non-Europe). Mann moves smoothly to ancient Greece, which he sees as the product of this earlier Indo-European root rationalism. The Greeks invented most things rational, from science to democracy to ethics (a respect for humanity). Other Mediterranean peoples contributed rather little by comparison with the rational Indo-Europeans who swept down from the north. (Even the Roman influence, which subjugated the European peasant, is seen as vaguely &amp;quot;un-European.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&amp;quot;Frankish feudalism, in many ways proto-typical of later feudalism, was ... a mixture of the very, very old, deep-rooted drift of &#039;European&#039; peasant society and of the brand new the opportunistic, the &#039;un-European,&#039;&amp;quot; Mann, &amp;quot;European Development&amp;quot; (1988), p. 16.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;) History then moves northwestward as northern Europeans clear the forest and move what Mann calls the &amp;quot;leading edge&amp;quot; of European society forward toward what seems to be its foreordained goal, Britain.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mann, &amp;quot;European Development&amp;quot; (1988), p. 17. Also see his &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986), for instance pp. 190, 195, 213, 377, 404, 412, 510. (&amp;quot;At the end of all these processes stood one organic, medium-sized, wet-soil island state, perfectly situated for take-off: Great Britain,&amp;quot; p. 510.)&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Early in the Middle Ages, around A.D. 800, a newer stage of rationality emerges, combining the old culture and the new Christianity. Europeans now demonstrate their &amp;quot;rational restlessness&amp;quot; and their unique inventiveness, producing a revolutionary agricultural system and much more. The explanation is the ancient rationality, the newer Christian rationality, and the marvelous European environment.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mann, &amp;quot;European Development&amp;quot; (1988), pp. 8-9, 11-12, 15-18 and &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986), pp. 377-378, 397-398, 402-408, 412, 500-510. Also, on Europe&#039;s rationality and its historical significance, see McNeill, &#039;&#039;Plagues and Peoples&#039;&#039; (1976), pp. 41, 97, 106-107, 236, 238, 249, 256, 259, 264.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; This, for Mann, is the kernel of the European miracle. The only part of this construct that requires further comment is the theory of a medieval technological revolution; this we discuss in the following section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lynn White, Jr., contributed a very influential form of the rationality doctrine with his theory about the unique technological inventiveness of medieval Europeans, a theory we discuss in the next section. John Hall contributes another version, much like Mann&#039;s except for its emphasis on the invention of rational politics by Europeans and its tendency to follow Eric L. Jones in various negative judgments about Asian history. Space does not permit me to review the way some other present-day historians invoke, and use, the theory of Western rationality as grounding for their theories about the European miracle. I should simply note that some of them are Marxists and near-Marxists. Perry Anderson, for instance, argues from ancient Greek rationality to European medieval progress. So does M. I. Finley. Robert Brenner contributes a very different Marxist rationality theory: there was no rationality until, quite suddenly, capitalism appeared among the English yeoman farmers, who promptly became amazingly inventive and started a technological revolution that has not yet ended.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See P. Anderson, &#039;&#039;Passages from Antiquity to Feudalism&#039;&#039; (1974), part 3; Finley, &#039;&#039;The Use and Abuse of History&#039;&#039; (1975), chap. 6; Aston and Philipn, &#039;&#039;The Brenner Debate&#039;&#039; (1985), pp. 32-33, 42-51, 59, 63n, 214-215, 234-236, 306-316.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Technology ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Among all of the narrow-minded ways of looking at history, technological determinism is the one most congenial to Eurocentric tunnel vision. It has the appearance, the illusion, of cold-blooded scientific fact. &amp;quot;X was invented here, on this date, and produced these effects.&amp;quot; In talking about matters of technology, one can deny that ethnocentrism enters the picture: &amp;quot;this is hard fact, indisputable.&amp;quot; And the significance of technology seems equally indisputable: a new tool does produce more food, a new weapon more casualties, whereas a new social form might have historical significance; then again, it might not. But technological determinism gets its greatest strength from the error known as &amp;quot;telescoping history.&amp;quot; When we travel, mentally, back to medieval Europe, we pass backward through the eras in which Europeans clearly were technologically superior to everyone else, and so we tend to expect that superiority to have been the state of things at all prior times. But Europe advanced technologically beyond Asia and Africa mainly after the beginning of the industrial revolution. Europe did not even begin to forge ahead of other civilizations in technology or science until the seventeenth century or even later. By telescoping history we imbue the Middle Ages with the marvelous technological attributes of modern Europe. It is then but a small step to the conclusion that, since technology is so obviously a powerful cause in history, and since Europe has always been so technological, here is the root of the European miracle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But tools do not invent themselves or reproduce themselves. If you invoke technological determinism, you must not only show that the technology appeared and had such-and-such effects, you must also explain why it was invented, and by whom. In nearly all (I think) technologically deterministic arguments made as part of some explanation for Europe&#039;s historical progress, technological arguments end up being arguments about the inventors, not the inventions. They end up in some Weberian claim that Europeans are more inventive, innovative, &amp;quot;rational,&amp;quot; than non-Europeans. Technological determinism then differs from other kinds of tunnel-historical theories mainly in its claim that rational Europeans moved their society forward by inventing new technology, rather than doing so by inventing new political systems, new forms of social organization, new religions, or whatever.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Claims are made by Eurocentric historians that technology was a prime mover in all epochs from the post-Neolithic on down. Nowadays it would be hard to ignore the evidence that in ancient times the greatest technological innovations, in agriculture, transportation, and other spheres, entered Europe from the south and east, so technological arguments tend to begin with the Middle Ages. There are, however, exceptions. Michael Mann, as we noted previously, has revived the old notion that the invention of iron somehow revolutionized European peasant society in a way it did not do elsewhere, that it produced a wondrously inventive, acquisitive (etc.) type of society, rooted in iron-plowing Indo-European-speaking peasants, and he claims, in parallel, that Oriental despotisms of the ancient Middle East held back technological inventiveness, where peasants were supposedly held in tight control by the political system that irrigation technology necessitated. But this theory is contradicted by a great deal of evidence. So much is known about technological progress in the Middle East during this period (from the late Neolithic to the &amp;quot;Iron Age&amp;quot; and beyond) that the notion of noninventiveness is unreasonable. But iron working was not invented in Europe. Probably it came from the Middle East, but there are hints from farther afield (including West Africa). Plows were used in Middle Eastern agriculture, irrigated and nonirrigated, as well as in European agriculture. Plows may have been used earlier in China than in Europe. So the technological argument put forward by Mann (and others) is unsound and the psychological and social deductions are fallacious.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Many other &amp;quot;miracle&amp;quot; historians are prepared to start with the ancient Greeks and define these folk as the original uniquely inventive Europeans, but the Greeks did not contribute more to technological progress than their neighbors did to the south and east, so arguments of this sort must revert to the abstract idea of &amp;quot;rationality,&amp;quot; thus, of potentiality, not actuality, a point we have already discussed. The Romans, in turn, were moderately inventive, but so were their neighbors. In the European Dark Ages, as everyone agrees, technological progress was hardly impressive, and was in fact going on at a healthier pace in parts of Africa and Asia. I suspect that the majority of historians today are not willing to go along with Michael Mann and others who claim to find a unique technological progress in Europe prior to the Middle Ages, although this view was quite widespread until a few decades ago. Most would disagree with Eric L. Jones, in &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039;, that Europe has always been &amp;quot;a mutant civilization in its uninterrupted amassing of knowledge about technology&amp;quot; (p. 45), since there is nothing unusual about this process in human society.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is with the Middle Ages that technological arguments come to prominence. It is here that the notion of a technological &amp;quot;takeoff to modernity&amp;quot; is most frequently encountered among historians of the European &amp;quot;miracle.&amp;quot; The common argument form is about as follows: Northern Europeans indeed were rather backward folk until late in the Dark Ages, the early Middle Ages, when a kind of awakening occurred, and northern Europeans now suddenly emerged as the people we know—the most dynamic, most progressive, most innovative, most rapidly rising (etc.) people in the world—and the key to this rise was a set of early medieval technological innovations, based mainly, these historians claim, on European inventions, neglecting non-Europe and thus presenting us with a typical sort of Eurocentric tunnel history.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lynn White, Jr., is an American historian whose book &#039;&#039;Medieval Technology and Social Change&#039;&#039; presents this kind of technologically deterministic tunnel-historical argument in perhaps its purest form. This book, published in 1962, has been highly influential; its arguments are built in to the theories of many &amp;quot;miracle&amp;quot; historians, including Mann, Jones, and Hall (who not only cite the book repeatedly in their writings but rely on it for many technological arguments they invoke in support of their theories). The book is an effort to show that technological invention and innovation was the central cause of the rise of Europe during the Middle Ages. White lists a series of supposedly European inventions, and shows, for each in turn, what marvelous effects it had on European history. Here, for starters, is an example. The early medieval invention of the iron stirrup had a &amp;quot;catalytic ... influence on history.&amp;quot; It permitted a new form of mounted warfare, created the phenomenon of the medieval knight, and produced feudalism (knights became manorial lords). And so, &amp;quot;The Man on Horseback, as we have known him during the past millennium, was made possible by the stirrup.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;White, &#039;&#039;Medieval Technology and Social Change&#039;&#039; (1962), p. 38); also McNeill, &#039;&#039;Plagues and Peoples&#039;&#039; (1976), p. 234.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But White&#039;s crucial arguments concern productive technology, and particularly agricultural technology. He claims that an agricultural revolution occurred in Europe (or rather in northern Europe) in the early Middle Ages, and this quite revolutionized European society and became a large part of the explanation for modernization and the rise of capitalism. He believes that three European inventions were the crux of the matter: the heavy plow, the horse collar (and therefore the use of horsepower), and the three-field rotation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The heavy plow, pulled by teams of (typically) eight oxen, is assigned, by White, a tentative central European origin in the sixth century; it then diffused quickly throughout northwestern Europe, and &amp;quot;does much to account for the bursting vitality of the Carolingian realm in the eighth century.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;White, &#039;&#039;Medieval Technology and Social Change&#039;&#039; (1962), p. 54.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; White is correct in calling attention, as others before him have done, to the importance of the heavy plow as an agricultural innovation in the wetter and colder parts of Europe. It was highly advantageous in opening the deep, heavy soils of the North European Plain and the deep-working of soil was critical in view of northern Europe&#039;s moist weather. It was in fact necessary for the areal spread of farming into some of the wetter soils. Therefore, the heavy plow had much to do with the overall increase in medieval agricultural production. But the heavy plow was not in fact invented in Europe in the Middle Ages. Plows pulled by teams of 24 oxen were used in northern India before the time of Christ.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Kosambi, &#039;&#039;Ancient India&#039;&#039; (1969), p. 89; R. S. Sharma, &#039;&#039;Light on Early Indian Society and Economy&#039;&#039; (1966), p. 57.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Southern Europe used lighter plows, because the soils were generally lighter and drier, but the technology was not significantly different. It seems certain that the heavy plow was either diffused into northern Europe from elsewhere or was a local adaptation of a widely used tool-form. So this is not a European technological revolution. And the effects of the innovation in northern Europe probably should be attributed to the social forces that led to the introduction of the heavy plow, not to the technology itself. We know, for instance, that the growth of feudalism led to massive expansion of cultivation, partly at the incentive of the lords, who wished to increase their wealth and power by expanding their demesnes, partly as a reaction by peasants to the persistently increased demands from the lords for surplus product, increments of demand which could not be met without endangering the subsistence of the peasant family unless the peasants found a way to increase their total production. It appears that whatever historical effects are attributed by White to the plow should rather be attributed to feudalism as a social system. And the effects claimed by him are indeed quite miraculous.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thanks to the adoption of the heavy plow, says White, there was a tremendous growth in population. Then there was a changeover to the &amp;quot;open field&amp;quot; system of cultivation and this led, according to White, to the invention of &amp;quot;communal patterns&amp;quot; of human cooperation (as though communal life had not been known previously and was unknown elsewhere). This was a social revolution, a &amp;quot;reshaping of peasant society.&amp;quot; It was &amp;quot;the essence of the manorial economy,&amp;quot; ignoring the fact that the manors were owned by lords, not villagers.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;White, &#039;&#039;Medieval Technology and Social Change&#039;&#039; (1962), p. 44.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; More important still, there came then &amp;quot;a change [in] the northern peasants&#039; attitude towards nature and thus our own&amp;quot; (my emphasis). Why? Because many families had to collaborate to mount one plow team, and so their allotments now were proportional to their social contribution, not to their needs. (&amp;quot;No more fundamental change in the idea of man&#039;s relation to the soil can be imagined: once man had been part of nature; now he became her exploiter.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;White, &#039;&#039;Medieval Technology and Social Change&#039;&#039; (1962), p. 56; McNeill, &#039;&#039;Plagues and Peoples&#039;&#039; (1976), p. 237.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But all of this is nonsense. Neither the technical arguments nor the social deductions make any sense. The Domesday Book gives household-to-plow-team ratios of between 2:3 and 3:5.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See C. T. Smith, &#039;&#039;An Historical Geography of Western Europe&#039;&#039; (1967), p. 203; Darby, &#039;&#039;The Domesday Geography of Eastern England&#039;&#039; (1952).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The open-field system seems to be quite old and was widespread in Europe and known in Asia and North Africa in early times.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Orwin and Orwin, &#039;&#039;The Open Fields&#039;&#039; (1967), chap. 3; C. T. Smith, &#039;&#039;An Historical Geography of Western Europe&#039;&#039; (1967), chap. 4.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Northern villages, using big teams and heavy plows, were no more cooperative than southern villages, using light plows. Communal ownership of fields in some societies implied greater cooperation than that found in the European open field system. The manorial economy was a social system, not a technological invention. And so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
White&#039;s second revolutionary advance is labelled &amp;quot;the discovery of horse-power.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;White, &#039;&#039;Medieval Technology and Social Change&#039;&#039; (1962), p. 57.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Horses had been around for some time, of course. The essential innovation, for White, was the modern horse collar, which he thinks was probably developed in the Occident some time before the ninth century. According to White, the horse collar transformed agriculture and grain transport in northern Europe by permitting horses to replace oxen in pulling plows and wagons. Horses pull about the same weight as oxen but do so about 50% faster. From this fact White draws awesome conclusions. There was, he says, a large increase in agricultural production. Commerce became intensified because transport by horsepower was vastly cheaper than by ox power. Villages became much larger, almost townlike, because now there could be a larger radius of travel from home to field. The enlargement of villages yielded the &amp;quot;virtue of a more &#039;urban&#039; life,&amp;quot; permitting the village to have a church, tavern, school (now boys &amp;quot;could learn their letters&amp;quot;).&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;White, &#039;&#039;Medieval Technology and Social Change&#039;&#039; (1962), p. 67.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; And now there could be &amp;quot;news from distant parts.&amp;quot; A transformation, overall, of profound importance. It &amp;quot;urbanized&amp;quot; the village, giving peasants the &amp;quot;psychological preparation&amp;quot; for &amp;quot;the change in Occidental culture from country to city.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;White, &#039;&#039;Medieval Technology and Social Change&#039;&#039; (1962), p. 68.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; All this and more from one innovation: the horse collar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But the horse collar was widespread in Eurasia from an early date, and probably was invented for harnessing not horses but camels.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Bray, &#039;&#039;Science and Civilization in China&#039;&#039;, vol. 6, part 2, &#039;&#039;Agriculture&#039;&#039; (1984), pp. 304-328.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; And the presumption that horses held advantages over oxen in plowing and transport is widely disputed: the horse was more efficient, but more costly in upkeep, and generally required that cropland be devoted to feed crops. In England the horse did not replace the ox. Village size had nothing to do with horsepower. In many parts of the world where horses were not used, villages were much larger than they were in northern Europe. In countries like China, long-distance grain transport was often by canal, much more efficient than horse-drawn wagons. And so, again, neither the technical arguments nor the social deductions make any sense.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, White attributes equally marvelous effects to the introduction of the three-field system. Part of this argument is familiar to every European schoolchild, who learned that the three-field rotation was a great advance over the older two-field system because (mainly) it reduced the proportion of the land in fallow from roughly 1/2 to 1/3. But White adds a cornucopia of additional blessings. Oats could now be planted widely, hence there was greater use of horsepower. In a section of &#039;&#039;Medieval Technology and Social Change&#039;&#039;, &amp;quot;The Three-Field Rotation and Improved Nutrition,&amp;quot; he claims that the three-field system somehow permitted farmers now to grow legumes, and this vastly improved the European diet, which, in turn, &amp;quot;goes far towards explaining ... the startling expansion of population, the growth and multiplication of cities, the rise of industrial production, the outreach of commerce, and the new exuberance of spirits which enlivened that age.&amp;quot; In short, says Lynn White, Jr., &amp;quot;the Middle Ages were full of beans.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;White, &#039;&#039;Medieval Technology and Social Change&#039;&#039; (1962), p. 76.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But none of this (least of all the pun) can be taken seriously. There is no basis for White&#039;s argument that population was held down by an unbalanced diet (overloaded, he says, with carbohydrates, undersupplied with proteins). Farmers using the two-field system were not protein-starved, because legume cultivation long antedated the three-field system, grains also contained proteins, and fruits, animal products, and so on, were widely consumed. The three-field system was not a technological revolution. First of all, even more intensive rotations, including fallowless systems, were in use in many parts of the world long before the Middle Ages, and I suspect were common in parts of Europe (such as portions of the Po plain) where deep, nutrient-rich soils and good soil-water relations were found. Second, the two-field system was preferred, and was not supplanted, in many ecological situations, and in areas where fallow was needed for grazing. The picture is complex, but the generalization is clear: the three-field system was neither a technical revolution nor a fountainhead for social change. And it had close relatives in other continents, so it cannot be said to have been something uniquely European.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In &#039;&#039;Medieval Technology and Social Change&#039;&#039;, White says little about the causes of the revolutionary technology. He does so elsewhere, however, and we find that his basic argument is really quite Weberian.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;White, &#039;&#039;Machina Ex Deo&#039;&#039; (1968). See in particular the essay—quite a famous one—called &amp;quot;The Historical Roots of Our Ecological Crisis&amp;quot; (chap. 5).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Technological determinism dissolves into an ideological determinism, focused on the inventiveness—the rationality—of Europeans. This White attributes, basically, to religion: in part to &amp;quot;the Judeo-Christian teleology,&amp;quot; and in larger part to &amp;quot;Western Christianity.&amp;quot; The former underlies the European&#039;s unique &amp;quot;faith in perpetual progress,&amp;quot; which leads to a faith in the virtues of inventiveness and technology.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;White, &amp;quot;The Historical Roots of Our Ecological Crisis.&amp;quot; In White, &#039;&#039;Machina Ex Deo&#039;&#039; (1967), p. 85.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The latter produces &amp;quot;an Occidental, voluntarist realization of the Christian dogma of man&#039;s transcendence of, and rightful mastery over, nature&amp;quot;—that is, the separation of Man and Nature. To a Western Christian, nature is inert, valueless. It is blasphemy to &amp;quot;assume spirit in nature.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;White, &#039;&#039;Machina Ex Deo&#039;&#039; (1967), p. 90.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; This gives the Western Christian a desire and right to manipulate, use, transform nature—to invent new technology. The errors here are glaring. First, there is ignorance of the teachings of religions other than Christianity. Second, White resurrects the ethnocentric myth that ancient pagans and followers of modern non-Christian religions somehow are unable to fully separate Man from Nature and share the primitive view that spirits reside in all things. Actually, medieval Christians did perceive spirit in all things. (It was God&#039;s way.) They did not treat humans as absolutely separate from nature. This dualism is a product of modern times, mainly of the commoditization of nature with the rise of capitalism. Dualism is a doctrine of post-Cartesian thought, not something residing deep in &amp;quot;Western Christianity.&amp;quot; Medieval Christians believed that the world is one, a plenum, an uninterrupted chain of being. Medieval folk did not, in general, believe, as White claims they did, in &amp;quot;perpetual progress&amp;quot;: they believed in the Fall, and they believed, on the whole, that Creation had been perfect and complete. White is simply telescoping history in order to claim that modern European attitudes about technology and technological change are actually basic and ancient attributes of the culture of Europeans, and only Europeans. His central thesis is basic tunnel history: Europeans are uniquely inventive, so they create unique technology, so they progress.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I believe that all of the claims for European technological superiority in the Middle Ages can be countered, and eventually disproven, in much the same way. I think it will become clear that all of the civilizations of the hemisphere were inventing new technology and sharing it around; the &amp;quot;sharing&amp;quot; being the usual mechanisms of diffusion as they operated in two spheres of reality: agricultural techniques passed from farmer to farmer and other techniques (including some of those involved in commercial agriculture) moving through the mainly urban network of trade and transportation, or occasionally (as with some military technology) moving around the map along with conquest. Thus I see a rather even building up of technology in Europe, Africa, and Asia. It was only after 1492, with its utterly revolutionary consequences, that European technology acquired the beginning of an edge over Asian and African. Did medieval technological evolution produce, as cause, the major medieval social changes? I leave the answer to that question to others. My purpose in this book is not to defend any one theory of social change, merely to show that the processes were not uniquely European.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Chapter 3 I will discuss this matter further, showing how technological and economic surfaces emerged in medieval Europe, Africa, and Asia, and that processes of change in all three continents were—as to technology and economy—quite similar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before we leave the subject of technology, something must be said about one fascinating issue: what I will call &amp;quot;the China formula.&amp;quot; Since the end of World War II a great deal has become known about the history of technology in China, much of it through the work of Joseph Needham and his associates.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Needham et al., &#039;&#039;Science and Civilization in China&#039;&#039; (1954-1984).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In prior times, the European miracle theorists were prone to ignore Chinese technological achievements. (Weber did so less than most.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Some historians today simply ignore this evidence and repeat the old notions about China&#039;s lack of technological prowess. See, for example, Roberts, &#039;&#039;The Hutchinson History of the World&#039;&#039; (1987), pp. 493-495, 502.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;) The usual pattern was to admit Chinese priority for some innovations but claim that, overall, the main technological advances took place in Europe and the Mediterranean. Where there were truly notable Chinese inventions, it was often claimed that the Chinese invented these things in a ludic vein whereas the Europeans put these things to work. (The paradigm, of course, is gunpowder, which the Chinese were supposed to have invented merely for fireworks.) One could bundle such propositions into a classical diffusionist model of the Chinese: they had, in prior ages, progressed somewhat, but then they slowed to a stop, starting up again only when Europeans brought new ideas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the information about Chinese technology increased, it was necessary to make somewhat more subtle arguments. Today, these arguments fit into a formula with two basic propositions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. &amp;quot;If indeed the development of technology in medieval China forces us to ask why China did not, then, have its own miracle, we can at least assert that China was the only civilization outside of Europe about which such questions arise.&amp;quot; In other words, European superiority over everybody else is not put into doubt. This is convenient for those, for instance, who want to show that India, Africa, the Middle East, and so on, had no potential for development.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. &amp;quot;Whatever technological advances took place in medieval China, the important point is that they stopped.&amp;quot; In the formula, this argument is expressed in different ways for different spheres of technology, but the central argument is fairly standard: something characteristic of Chinese medieval culture forced it to cease developing and so to stagnate. In other words, what is plugged in here is the old doctrine of Oriental stagnation. Most typically, Weber is used to make this point: just about all of the Weberian claims about the reasons for Chinese lack of progress are regularly paraded at this point. Some historians balk at using Weber&#039;s thin argument about the stultifying effect of Confucianism. Others prefer not to notice Weber&#039;s ethnocentrism when he describes Chinese personality traits. But Weber&#039;s arguments about the city, landowning, bureaucracy, and empire are still quite regularly employed. The Chinese city was not &amp;quot;free&amp;quot; and did not have a real bourgeoisie. Chinese landowning was not close to private property. The Chinese bureaucracy and the Chinese imperial state were not &amp;quot;rational&amp;quot; and so held back the society from progress.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One can respond to this argument in two steps. First, as Purcell has pointed out, the important question really is how and why these Chinese advances happened, not how and why they stopped happening (if indeed they did stop). In other words, historians must explain how China came to be such a technologically innovative society that it outstripped other civilizations in many spheres of technology for many centuries. Weber doesn&#039;t help in this process one bit. The whole Weberian scheme is an explanation for stagnation, and what we are talking about is impressive progress, not stagnation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second step in the argument requires a focus on the precise period when, according to European miracle historians, the Chinese advance is supposed to have stopped. According to Elvin, broad-spectrum technical advances in China ended after the early fourteenth century. China at this time had perhaps the most advanced and most highly commercialized agriculture in the world. Chinese industrial technology was unexcelled in such fields as textile manufacture. Mechanical clocks were well known.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Needham et al., &#039;&#039;Science and Civilization in China&#039;&#039;, vol. 4, part 2 (1965), chap. 27.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Chinese merchant ships were plying throughout Southeast Asia and into the Indian ocean. Chinese guns were unexcelled. Canal technology was impressive. And so on. Broadly, the changes associated with the rise and travails of the Ming dynasty are associated with the slowing of technical advance, although advances continued to take place in some spheres of technology (shipbuilding, cannons, printing with movable metal type—invented circa 1400, probably in Korea&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Needham et al., &#039;&#039;Science and Civilization in China&#039;&#039; vol. 4, part 2 (1965), p. 33). Arnold Pacey places the innovation in Korea. See Pacey&#039;s &#039;&#039;Technology in World History&#039;&#039; (1990), p. 56.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;—and much more). But Europe at this time was not experiencing a major technical advance either. After 1350 Europe stagnated both economically and technically. There is little evidence that European technology was advancing prior to 1492. The Renaissance was not a technological revolution, as historians have long realized.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See, for example, Lopez, &amp;quot;Hard Times and Investment in Culture&amp;quot; (1953), Thorndyke, &amp;quot;Renaissance or Renaissance?&amp;quot; (1943).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; After 1492 important European advances began again in some technical spheres (notably shipbuilding). Whether truly revolutionary technological change really began before the eighteenth century is a matter of contention among European historians.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What does this say comparatively about China? It suggests that there is no problem of &amp;quot;stagnation.&amp;quot; There was, instead, a slowing of progress during two centuries, in a scenario well known in all human cultures, because uneven progress is the norm. It suggests, rather, a problem that Third World historians focus some attention on but European historians tend to ignore. As a result of the European commercial expansion in the sixteenth century—we argue in this book that the year 1492 was the real birthdate of this process—aggressive European merchant communities began competing and trading with the Chinese in various places, notably Manila and some South China ports. Why did the Chinese merchant community not assert its dominance in this trade? Why did the commercial advantage steadily move in the direction of Europeans, not Chinese (and other Asians)? In other words, there is no stagnation to be explained. There is, rather, a problem as to how and why Europeans gained substantial control of long-distance trade in Asia after about 1600. Anticipating the discussion of later chapters, I will comment simply that this process does not reflect any internal cultural &amp;quot;blockages&amp;quot; in any Asian civilizations. Rather, it reflects the tremendously rapid increase in the profitability, scale, and organization of European enterprise overseas after 1492, which nobody else could really take advantage of, because of the constantly increasing flow of New World bullion into European mercantile coffers (a point we will discuss in some detail in Chapter 4).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During the first half of the fifteenth century, a number of Chinese fleets of combined military, diplomatic, and merchant character were sent into Southeast Asia and the Indian Ocean. Some of the ships held hundreds of men; some were so large that vegetable gardens were placed on the decks. We will discuss the significance of these great voyages in the next chapter; my point now is to notice the way European miracle historians try to accommodate these facts into their theories about Chinese nonprogress. The standard comment is: &amp;quot;But they stopped.&amp;quot; In fact, the last voyage did end around 1440. But the purposes of the voyages had been accomplished. Chinese merchant ships continued to trade in Southeast Asia. Nothing stopped. It is true that the emperors banned Chinese shipping for a time (mainly the early sixteenth century), but such bans were a means of extracting bribes (in effect easements) and they were not, in any case, enforced. For the &amp;quot;miracle&amp;quot; historians, the fact of the imperial ban is proof that China had stopped progressing, and that only Europe contained the potential for the &amp;quot;miracle.&amp;quot; This does not accord with the facts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chinese may have invented guns; in any case, they were as advanced in firearms technology as any other culture down to the end of the Middle Ages. Typical of the way European miracle historians deal with this sphere of technology (as with others) is Carlo Cipolla&#039;s account of the process in his well-known and influential book &#039;&#039;Guns, Sails, and Empires: Technological Innovation and the Early Phase of European Expansion, 1400-1700&#039;&#039;. He concedes, to begin with, that &amp;quot;Chinese guns were at least as good as Western guns, if not better, up to the beginning of the fifteenth century.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Cipolla, &#039;&#039;Guns, Sails, Empires&#039;&#039; (1965), p. 106.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; But when the Portuguese appeared off Canton and fired off their cannon in salute a century later (1517), the Chinese had, magically, retrogressed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The roar of European ordnance awoke Chinese ... to the frightening reality of a strange, alien people that unexpectedly had appeared along their coasts under the protection and with the menace of superior, formidable weapons. ... How to deal with the &amp;quot;foreign devils&amp;quot;? To fight them or to ignore them? To copy and adopt their techniques and give up local habits and traditions or to sever all contacts with them and seek refuge in a dream of isolation? To be or not to be? ... a dilemma that was tragically unanswerable.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Cipolla, &#039;&#039;Guns, Sails, Empires&#039;&#039; (1965), pp. 108-109.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus does rhetoric replace fact in the mythology of Asian stagnation and the European miracle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Chinese formula&amp;quot; seems to be losing credence. But I have no doubt that an &amp;quot;Indian formula,&amp;quot; an &amp;quot;Islamic formula,&amp;quot; an &amp;quot;African formula,&amp;quot; and so on, will be contrived to shore up Eurocentric history as we learn more about Indian, Middle-Eastern, and African technological development prior to 1492.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Society ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Chapter 3 we will take a look at medieval European society and compare it to medieval Asian and African society in terms of those social categories that seem to be important in the process of change toward capitalism and modernity. Among these categories (forms, facts) are class, the state, landholding, trade, and urbanization. Our present task is the more modest one of criticizing theories that claim that one or another social category somehow led Europe to rise above all other civilizations before the end of the Middle Ages, before 1492. For this task we can select a few of the categories that present-day historians of the European miracle claim as favored candidates for this role of historical leadership, of causal motor propelling the so-called &amp;quot;takeoff to modernity.&amp;quot; The favored ones seem to be the state, the church, class, and the family. Most frequently these categories are, themselves, explained in terms of supposedly more basic forces: European rationality, European technology, European demographic uniqueness, or European environmental superiority. These have been discussed at sufficient length already. The following discussion, therefore, will be brief.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== State ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A typical sort of argument begins with a model of the modern European nation-state, the kind of medium-sized, well-integrated, moderately democratic state that emerged after the rise of capitalism, after modernization, after the French and American revolutions. Nobody denies that this form is unique. But European miracle historians tend to make one of two claims about this state form: either it appeared very early in European history, early enough to play a causal role in modernization, or it was somehow immanent in European culture, a state form that was created, naturally and rationally, by freedom-loving, individualistic, antidyspotic Europeans of medieval or earlier times. Sometimes both claims are made: a reduction to European moral rationality and, at the same time, a holistic argument at the level of the state itself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Eric L. Jones, for instance, does precisely that in &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039;. Europe&#039;s medieval political system, says Jones, was near &amp;quot;the heart of the European miracle.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), p. 124.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Here the argument combines the traditional prejudice about Europe&#039;s innate and unique love of freedom with some very odd environmentalistic arguments. First the latter. Jones takes the familiar argument that Europe in early times had a number of fertile core areas, each of which became the hearth of a regional culture, and he turns it into a curious argument to the effect that Europe&#039;s ecological core areas naturally led to a pattern of medium-sized states, unlike, he says, the &amp;quot;imperial&amp;quot; pattern of Asian societies. Empires, in Jones&#039;s view, are innately despotic, and innately given to interfering with the development of the economy. Europe&#039;s geography saved it from this fate. If a number of Europe&#039;s modern states have ecological &amp;quot;core areas,&amp;quot; most do not, and rather few of these core areas became states. The model is environmentalistic and invalid. In any case, comparable core areas are found in many other parts of the world. Medium-sized, separate units of productive agricultural environments are, for instance, typical for Southeast Asia, including the rather discrete mainland cores, like the Irrawaddy and the Chao Phraya basins, the middle Mekong, and the Red River, and even more so the insular region, with cores in Sumatra (two or three), Java (three), Bali, Lombok, Sulawesi, Luzon, and so on. India and China too are moderately dissected in this way. Distinctive cores in Africa include the Middle Niger, Chad, and Congo, among others; in western Asia, Mesopotamia, the Iranian Plateau, and so on.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Among the modern states that do not surround such simple ecological core areas: Spain, Italy, Germany, Poland, Greece, Sweden, Russia, etc. Prior to the 20th century, perhaps only parts of Great Britain (southern England) and France (the Paris Basin) came close to fitting this highly abstract model, a model that is useful for some purposes but not for the purpose of explaining the political history of the continent. Some of these core areas are nuclei of states; others are not. In modern Southeast Asia, Burma, Thailand, and Cambodia fit the model as well as any European case.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Next, Jones builds the image of these natural European Ur-states as somehow naturally forming into what he calls &amp;quot;a states system,&amp;quot; a grid of roughly equal-sized independent states. These, in the Middle Ages, acted toward one another as though they were Hegelian individuals, competing yet cooperating, and marching forward, together, as a kind of members&#039; club, toward modernity. Thus Jones discerns deep in the Middle Ages what amounts to the modern nation-state and the League of Nations. Telescoping history, he imbues the medieval European polities with all the virtues of the modern state: they provided public services, they encouraged the free development of the economy, they were incipiently democratic, and so on. All of this because of their environmental basis and because freedom-loving Europeans lived in them. In reality, the kind of state, and state system, that he describes does not appear until roughly the seventeenth century. Jones finds political characteristics of already-modernizing Europe, falsely claims that these were present long before—some, being environmental, were always present—and so claims to have proven that Europe&#039;s modern democratic political system was, somehow, always present in Europe (and nowhere else). In fact, medieval Europe was a hodge-podge of semisovereign feudal political units, a map so confused that states as such were not always identifiable, and with few of the modern state characteristics attributed to these polities by Jones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But to understand the absurdity of this model of political history, we must notice the way Jones talks about the supposedly barbaric, despotic states of non-Europe. In non-Europe, a natural irrationality combines with environmental disadvantages to produce the opposite of the wonderful European state and system of states: the huge Oriental empire. Why did Asia not develop politically as Europe did? The political &amp;quot;infantilism&amp;quot; of Asia is explained by Jones in terms of (1) a psychological deficiency, consisting of irrationality in matters of intellectual vitality and innovativeness and a sort of moral failing in attitudes relating to the desire for progress, resistance to domination, will to forego animal pleasures, and the like, and (2) an inferior natural environment. The effects of these failings (and some lesser ones), and thus the effective reasons for Asia&#039;s political nondevelopment and nonprogress, are (1) uncontrolled population growth, and (2) bad government, &amp;quot;Oriental despotism&amp;quot; or, as Jones prefers to label it, empire. Throughout &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039;, the main argument supporting the theory about how Europe&#039;s system of states favors development is Jones&#039;s countertheory about the evil nature of the Asian imperial state. Yet, in the end, the countertheory turns out to be as empty as the theory. Jones does not, in fact, give any credible explanation as to why such large empires exist in Asia and not in Europe. But neither does he give a credible argument as to why large states are worse for progress than medium-sized or small ones. (And he is blind to the very real progress that occurred in Asia, and to the many nonimperial states in Asia.) When we examine Jones&#039;s theory about Asian empires, then, we find that it has nothing to do with size or kind of state and everything to do with a conception about the basic nature of politics in non-European societies. This is nothing more than the old idea of &amp;quot;Oriental despotism.&amp;quot; Asians, and indeed all non-Europeans, naturally suffer nasty, despotic, capricious, irresponsible, evil governments. Only Europeans understand and thus enjoy freedom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is not an atypical theory among historians who wish to argue that European political processes and forms were causal forces leading to a medieval &amp;quot;miracle.&amp;quot; The basic form of the theory is traditional. It consists mainly of three propositions: Europeans have an old, deep-seated rationality that impels them toward modern, implicitly democratic, political forms (or, less directly, toward individualistic economic behavior and thus a preference for a minimalistic state); non-Europeans suffer gladly and naturally a despotic, imperial form of state, sometimes powerful but always arbitrary; and Europe&#039;s natural environment gives political modernization one or another sort of unique boost (ecological cores, fertile soil, capes-and-bays accessibility, or whatever). Other propositions figure in most arguments, but these three seem to be the most widely used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They combine with a methodological principle of great significance: whatever causal forces were at work, they were at work early—that is, they set the process of modernization in motion long before the end of the Middle Ages. This, of course, is the crux of the matter. In the present book I argue that modernization (or whatever you want to call it) was indeed going on in medieval Europe, but not only in medieval Europe. Thus the events after 1492 did not start modernization but enabled European changes to increase in magnitude and effect and eventually produce a uniquely &amp;quot;rising&amp;quot; society. Therefore we argue from the uniformitarian hypothesis that Europe had no potential greater than that possessed by non-Europe during the Middle Ages. The fact that there were forces pushing toward democratization and the modern state in medieval Europe tells us nothing about European uniqueness.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
John A. Hall uses the basic Jones model, emphasizing what he calls the &amp;quot;blockages&amp;quot; that prevented China, India, and the Islamic Middle East from developing modern state forms. In brief: China suffered under empire. India suffered under caste (and so had no politics whatever).&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In this connection, see Dirks, &#039;&#039;The Hollow Crown&#039;&#039; (1987).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Islamic-region politics reflected tribalism. Hall describes very old and not really typical forms for each of these civilizations, assuming them to be frozen and permanent, contrasts these with late postmedieval European forms with the inference that these too have been present at least in embryo for a long time, and then builds an argument that non-Europe always lacked the potential for a &amp;quot;miracle,&amp;quot; while Europe always had it.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties&#039;&#039; (1985), &amp;quot;States and Societies: The Miracle in Historical Perspective&amp;quot; (1988).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Michael Mann addresses himself to the abstract entity &amp;quot;power&amp;quot; instead of the more visible &amp;quot;state,&amp;quot; but his argument is not fundamentally different. Mann, like a number of other &amp;quot;miracle&amp;quot; historians, tries to interpret the political chaos of early medieval feudalism, with its fragmentation of polities and sovereignties, into an argument for incipient modernity. The smallness of these politicosocial units implies, somehow, that they were more &amp;quot;intensive,&amp;quot; more meaningful, more pregnant with development potential, than the supposedly vast imperial polities of non-Europe. Mann&#039;s notion of &amp;quot;intensiveness&amp;quot; is basically a notion of value, not of fact.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mann, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986), &amp;quot;European Development&amp;quot; (1988).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In this context we may recall the Magna Carta myth: devolution of power from king to barons is traditionally described as a movement toward democracy, even though the barons in those times were hardly democratic, and poor people preferred to be able to appeal above their heads to the king. (And later the rise of royal power is described as a further step toward democracy, except that you can&#039;t have it both ways.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;This is not the only example of the way arguments centering on the European state have a way of contradicting one another. The Roman state is said, on the one hand, by Hall among others, to have been a crucial innovation, the source of many political features characteristic of, and only of, Europe. On the other hand, the Roman state is dismissed by others (including Mann) as just another &amp;quot;imperial state,&amp;quot; like the despotic Oriental states; Europe supposedly innovated politically by avoiding the imperial form of state and developing instead a kind of smaller and somehow more democratic state.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;) Jean Baechler uses roughly the same model—although, unlike Hall and Mann but rather like Jones, he downplays the role of Christianity in political evolution—with one additional argument: Baechler believes that the medieval European aristocracy (originally an Indo-European &amp;quot;warrior aristocracy&amp;quot;) was itself the original source of democracy, claiming, in a curious reading of history, that aristocrats not only dealt democratically (respectfully) with one another, but they also respected the rights of their peasants.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Baechler, &amp;quot;The Origins of Modernity: Caste and Feudality (India, Europe and Japan)&amp;quot; (1988).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yet there was no democracy in the Middle Ages: European states were as despotic as any found anywhere else. Just as we noted with regard to the ancient Greeks, political forms found in Europe had counterparts elsewhere. If city-states were (perhaps) the closest to democracy—some of them were republican, and were in essence merchant-oligarchies—one need only note that city-states of many sorts lined the coasts of the Indian and Pacific oceans. Nor was the republican form unknown in Asia and Africa.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Church ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Many theories assign one or another causal role to the church as a social institution in the modernization of Europe and the rise of capitalism.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See, for instance, White, &#039;&#039;Machina Ex Deo&#039;&#039; (1968); Mann, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986), &amp;quot;European Development&amp;quot; (1988); Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties&#039;&#039; (1985); Baechler, &amp;quot;The Origins of Modernity&amp;quot; (1988); K. F. Werner, &amp;quot;Political and Social Structures of the West&amp;quot; (1988); and Hallam, &amp;quot;The Medieval Social Picture&amp;quot; (1975).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; (Many other theories assign such a role to Christianity itself, but I will not comment on these.) Of course, the church did have such a role. The problems lie elsewhere. Most of them concern the question whether the church (or churches) provided Europe, and Europeans, with something that was not provided to non-Europeans by their own religious institutions or by other institutions in their own cultures. For instance, the claim has been made that the Catholic church in the Middle Ages unified Europe in cultural terms, to a degree not found elsewhere. But elsewhere comparable or parallel processes were at work. For instance, the much-maligned empires, such as the Chinese empire, provided unity in many ways, while the Islamic religion provided it in the Muslim world. It has also been argued that the medieval church compensated for the political fragmentation of Europe, allowing pan-European development to take place in spite of the lack of a clear pattern of strong states. True. The question is comparative: did the church thereby give Europe some developmental advantage over other civilizations, in which, quite often, there was political unity throughout most historical epochs? I think the answer must be that the church did not give Europe some special cultural quality, lacking in other civilizations, such that Europe could thereby leap into the forefront of social evolution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore I see no basis in fact for suggestions that the medieval church led to European historical superiority in a way that other religious institutions, in other civilizations, did not do. John A. Hall, for instance, asserts that &amp;quot;Christianity provided the best shell for the emergence of states.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties&#039;&#039; (1985), p. 135.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Michael Mann claims that the medieval church &amp;quot;encouraged a drive for moral and social improvement even against worldly authority&amp;quot;—a statement that one might question not merely as a comparison, but also as a factual assertion about the role played by the church in Europe.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mann, &amp;quot;European Development&amp;quot; (1988), p. 12.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; For H. E. Hallam, &amp;quot;the medieval Latin church was the seed-bed of the early modern idea of capitalism.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hallam, &amp;quot;The Medieval Social Picture&amp;quot; (1975), p. 49.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; K. F. Werner maintains that &amp;quot;the &#039;European miracle&#039; [took place] ... because of the existence of a Christian world dominated in the west by Catholic doctrines.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;K. F. Werner. &amp;quot;Political and Social Structures of the West&amp;quot; (1988), p. 172. This German medievalist argues that the central force underlying the &amp;quot;miracle&amp;quot; was Christianity. He refers here to the Catholic church, to the body of doctrine (Catholic and later also Protestant), to the social and political institutions that were influenced both by church and by doctrine, and to the faith of European people, which, in Werner&#039;s opinion, had much to do with their innovativeness, their sense of &amp;quot;restlessness,&amp;quot; their rationality. Werner acknowledges that many causal factors were at work in bringing about the rise of Europe, and he does not hesitate to claim a role for the natural environment. But it is clear that his theory is primarily based on religion. And beyond this, one senses that this scholar himself may see the hand of a Christian god in the rise of Christian Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Werner first of all makes a strong case to the effect that European history maintained a continuity of institutions, and of progress, from the time of the Roman Empire down through the Middle Ages, and that the late Empire established both ecclesiastical and lay institutions which continued down through the Middle Ages and gave that era its character. Chief among the institutions is the Catholic church. Werner wishes to depict the church as having a determining influence on history from the time of its founding. He sees the rise of Europe as a process that was guided throughout by the Christian religion, as institution and doctrine. If Werner were simply presenting a theory of history that accords religion a dominant role, I would not be discussing his views in this book. I would agree that its role has been underemphasized by historians, conservative no less than Marxist. The reason I deal with Werner&#039;s views is that he makes clear his belief that it is not religion in general but the Christian religion which played the historically efficacious role in the European &amp;quot;miracle.&amp;quot; Werner&#039;s views are distinctly Eurocentric. Perhaps the key comment is the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(If) we had to choose one word that, by itself alone, were capable of expressing an essential factor in what we understand by the &amp;quot;European miracle,&amp;quot; we would choose the philosophical term ... &amp;quot;unrest&amp;quot; ... &amp;quot;restlessness&amp;quot; ... Ruhelosigkeit ... Whilst Asia and its wisdom and, in its train, the great religions and philosophies, strive toward the art of ... seeking out the centre of the soul and of the world, and of resting in God, of having arrived, the European of the European miracle is a man who is always ready to take off once more, once he has arrived ... But where must be sought the causa causans of this mentality? The spur to anxiety is to be seen in the pangs of sin ... in the search for pardon and grace. The importance of the deliverance of the soul gave an hitherto unheard-of prominence to the individual, independent of his social rank, the individual who ... (does not abandon himself) to destiny ... (The) sense of responsibility seems to me to be one of the strengths of the Europeans that are to accomplish the &amp;quot;miracle&amp;quot; (p. 185).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus: Europe&#039;s religion, Christianity, instills a kind of mentality in &amp;quot;European man&amp;quot; which explains the basic source of the &amp;quot;European miracle.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The objection to this is the same one we put forward to all of the notions about Europe&#039;s supposedly unique &amp;quot;rationality.&amp;quot; Whether that putative trait comes from religion (Werner) or from the post-Neolithic European tribes (Mann) or from any other source, the basic objection is: how can you really justify a statement that makes Europeans brighter, better, bolder than non-Europeans, if you accept the fundamental axiom that all human communities have the same ration of mind as all others? It is one thing, and indeed an unexceptionable thing, to credit the human mind with prime causality in culture change, through the innovation of social, technical, and purely intellectual things. But it is something quite different, and quite suspect, to credit the minds of human beings from some communities—and not others—with all of these qualities of innovativeness, restlessness, sense of responsibility, intellectual eagerness, respect for others, and so on, qualities usually summed up in the word &amp;quot;rationality.&amp;quot; Europeans are rational but so too are non-Europeans.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Such statements fail as comparisons with other religions, and other civilizations; but they also fail because the postulated rise of Europe did not take place in the Middle Ages but somewhat later. That Christianity helped in that eventual rise is not at all in question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is not necessary to discuss Max Weber&#039;s celebrated argument about the role of religion in the rise of Europe, or his celebrated argument about the special role of the Protestant Reformation in the rise of capitalism. Weber of course held the views that I criticized above. But the causal role of religion is not at issue in this book, the concern of which is a uniformitarian view of European and non-European civilizations and their dynamism.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Class ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Three kinds of argument concerning class are relevant to our discussion. The first of these is a two-tiered argument for Europe&#039;s ancient and medieval historical superiority that can be summarized as follows: (1) Classless (or &amp;quot;preclass&amp;quot;) regions and peoples are simply irrelevant in the matter of explaining Europe&#039;s superiority and the world&#039;s historical progress, because classless societies are necessarily both unprogressive and primitive. (2) Therefore, the real problems calling for explanation concern the question why some class-stratified societies (the European ones) are progressive while others (principally Asian) are stagnant and backward. Africa below the Sahara is then declared sweepingly to be classless and thus irrelevant to world history. This argument is still widely used, in some analytical works (among them Eric L. Jones&#039;s &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039;), in some world-history textbooks (as we noted in Chapter 1), and in some (probably most) modern atlases of world history. (Many of these atlases have no maps of Africa for the whole of history from the Upper Paleolithic to 1492!&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See, for example, Palmer, &#039;&#039;Atlas of Modern History&#039;&#039; (1957); Bjørklund, Hølmhoe, Røhr, and Lie, &#039;&#039;Historical Atlas of the World&#039;&#039; (1970); and Kinder and Hilgemann, &#039;&#039;The Anchor Atlas of World History&#039;&#039;, vol. 1 (1974).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;) In place of an extended discussion of this issue I will just offer these comments: Africa was not classless in 1492 (a point to which we return in Chapter 3), classless societies are not stagnant,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;I discuss this in &#039;&#039;The National Question&#039;&#039; (1987b).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and the historians who make this sort of argument about classlessness quite regularly contradict themselves by declaring that the classless European peoples of ancient and medieval times—the &amp;quot;barbarian tribes,&amp;quot; Germans, Celts, Slavs, etc.—were very progressive: after borrowing the idea of classes and a few other things from the Romans, these primitive but supposedly progressive, innovative, aggressive, inquisitive, achievement-oriented Europeans than surged forward to modernity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is customary and quite proper to examine the class structure of a society in history and ask how the different classes acted to favor or resist change, and in which directions. In the absence of such an examination, we usually get an analysis with a bias toward ascribing causality solely to kings and other sorts of elites. Eurocentrism becomes a problem only if the assertion is made that a given class did something historically efficacious in Europe but that this class did not exist in civilizations outside of Europe. This kind of argument is very common in the European miracle literature. Although especially favored among conservative historians, it is also found quite often among those Marxists who cling to the old formulas about the &amp;quot;stages of class society.&amp;quot; Fairly representative of the latter is Padgug&#039;s argument that a slave mode of production, in its pure form—with slavery dominant in commodity production and with implications for economic progress, the development of private property, and class struggle—existed in ancient times only in Greece and Rome, and that lack of this feature in Asia accounts in part for the tendency of Asian societies to &amp;quot;stagnate.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Padgug, &amp;quot;The Problem of the Theory of Slavery and Slave Society&amp;quot; (1976).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; (Roughly the same argument is then used by some Marxists to assert that the slave-plantation system of later times was not properly capitalist because the workers were slaves, not wage-earners. We deal with this point in Chapter 4.) This issue is important, but I will set it aside after one comment: I believe that those scholars who assert that the slave class was more important in the classical Mediterranean than Asia make a very elementary error, perhaps easiest to do if one is not a geographer. It may just be a question of geographical scale. The Athenian empire was perhaps one-hundredth the size of the Ch&#039;in empire. In small, highly developed regions of China, slavery was very likely as important as it was in Attica or in the plantation regions of Roman Italy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Jean Baechler, a French historical sociologist, has argued that one uniquely European class, the medieval aristocracy, was the central causal force in the European miracle.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Baechler, &amp;quot;The Origins of Modernity&amp;quot; (1988).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; He dismisses Africa out of hand, then asks why it is that modernity arose in Europe and not in Asia.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Baechler, in &amp;quot;The Origins of Modernity&amp;quot; (1988), p. 39, suggests that we should &amp;quot;juxtapose the barbarous Europe of the Halstatt period (about 600 B.C.) ... and Africa on the verge of colonization in the nineteenth century (A.D.).&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Accepting many of the standard arguments as partial explanations, he argues that the most important reason the miracle occurred was the existence in Europe of a true aristocracy. Baechler describes an ancient Indo-European society characterized by its warrior aristocracy. In India, the aristocracy became corrupted, but not so in Europe.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Baechler finds a true aristocracy also in Japan but believes that Japan failed to emulate Europe for various other reasons.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; He carefully defines the medieval aristocracy and its special social quality, &amp;quot;feudality,&amp;quot; in such a way as to distinguish it from a mere landlord class, or a class of landlords with added seigneurial powers. The aristocracy was a band of comrades, equals joined by bonds of feudal loyalty, a democracy in its own right. It did not, he says, hold the political power in society, and this was a key to its unique character. Elsewhere, either the aristocracy was ground under by the (imperial, despotic) polity, or it became corrupted into a caste form, as in India; in such cases there was to be no modernization. The European aristocracy had a special sort of private power, one original source of capitalist power. (Baechler contradicts himself here, since in the feudal era the aristocracy was indeed the political power. He simply notes that there was a time of political chaos, and passes on to other matters.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Baechler considers it quite unremarkable that the political chaos of the Dark Ages gave way smoothly to strong states in Europe. &amp;quot;Inevitably&amp;quot; there will be the &amp;quot;reconstitution of larger polities&amp;quot; (Baechler, &amp;quot;The Origins of Modernity&amp;quot; 1988, p. 50). But it is equally inevitable for India that the political chaos of 1000 years ago will not be cured and permanently, thereafter, the &amp;quot;polity ... is not a reality in India&amp;quot; (p. 45).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;) In sum, the aristocracy invents democracy and incipient capitalist property. The European peasants are also incipient capitalists from early on. Baechler casts aside the idea that Europe&#039;s peasantry was an unfree, oppressed community in the Middle Ages and gives it quite remarkable qualities: The peasant village was self-governed, a kind of &amp;quot;republic,&amp;quot; with characteristics reminiscent of urban life.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Baechler, &amp;quot;The Origins of Modernity&amp;quot; (1988), p. 59.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; &amp;quot;A peasant is an entrepreneur in miniature.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Baechler, &amp;quot;The Origins of Modernity&amp;quot; (1988), p. 53.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; By the fourteenth century this incipiently capitalist peasant is the real peasant of Europe. The peasant village is a little democracy. The peasants are autonomous decision-makers. Baechler simply ignores serfdom, ignores, likewise, the importance of the fact that the lords owned the land, exploited the peasants, and controlled their lives. Feudalism becomes a kind of democratic society in which the aristocrats play a democratic role and the peasants live as free people. Moreover, these peasants, deep in the Middle Ages, had all of the attributes of the capitalist farmer that we associate with the eighteenth century and thereafter: investment, profit orientation, capital accumulation. (And they were smart enough, Baechler says, to avoid the extended family.) All of this is fantasy. It is a simple telescoping of history, pushing the modern world (and particularly the modern capitalist farmer) back into the Middle Ages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Baechler contrasts all of this with India. His depiction of India is bizarre. India had no aristocracy throughout history, as a result of the caste system, and this is the &amp;quot;deepest cause&amp;quot; for its failure to develop throughout history.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Baechler, &amp;quot;The Origins of Modernity&amp;quot; (1988), p. 56.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; (India did have a very formidable aristocracy.) Indian society had no political dimension: &amp;quot;The polity ... is not a reality in India.&amp;quot; Therefore &amp;quot;the sense of identity in India could never be political&amp;quot;—not to say democratic.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Baechler, &amp;quot;The Origins of Modernity&amp;quot; (1988), p. 45.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; (Nonsense.) Caste was invented to take the place of the missing polity. (More nonsense.) India didn&#039;t have a peasantry, it merely had &amp;quot;agricultural workers.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Baechler, &amp;quot;The Origins of Modernity&amp;quot; (1988), p. 53.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; How can this be true? Because real peasants were entrepreneurial decisionmakers, something supposedly absent in India (but in reality no more so than in Europe). Baechler thus uses a mythical India as a counterpoint to his basic argument: In Europe, aristocrats and the free society created by them (and their allies the peasants) were the principal source of the &amp;quot;miracle.&amp;quot; But Europe&#039;s aristocracy and peasantry did not have these romanticized qualities, and, more crucially, comparable classes existed in many other regions in the same period, as we will see in Chapter 3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Marxist theory, the concept of class is part of a larger and more consequential notion, that of class struggle. For all class-stratified societies, said Marx and Engels, class struggle is the motor of progress. Most present-day Marxists consider cultural evolution to be very much more complex than this, but they continue to emphasize the idea, and process, of class struggle. Again we must notice that there is nothing inherently Eurocentric about this concept unless one argues that genuine class struggle, or some phase or form of it, occurs only in Europe. But many Marxists argue precisely that way. According to Maurice Godelier, for example, the West displays &amp;quot;the purest forms of class struggle&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;alone has created the conditions for transcending ... class organization.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Godelier, &#039;&#039;Sobre el Modo de Producción Asiático&#039;&#039; (1969), p. 58.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Probably the most influential recent formulation of this sort of argument is Robert Brenner&#039;s theory about the rise of capitalism.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Brenner, &amp;quot;The Origins of Capitalist Development: A Critique of Neo-Smithian Marxism&amp;quot; (1977); &amp;quot;Agrarian Class Structure and Economic Development in Pre-Industrial Europe&amp;quot; (1985, originally published 1976), and &amp;quot;The Agrarian Roots of European Capitalism&amp;quot; (1985). After the 1976 article first appeared in the journal, &#039;&#039;Past and Present&#039;&#039;, a series of critiques was published in that journal, and Brenner replied in 1982 with the article, &amp;quot;The Agrarian Roots of European Capitalism.&amp;quot; A volume, &#039;&#039;The Brenner Debate: Agrarian Class Structure and Economic Development in Pre-Industrial Europe&#039;&#039;, containing the two &#039;&#039;Past and Present&#039;&#039; articles and several critiques, and edited by Aston and Philip, appeared in 1985.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Brenner tries to demonstrate that the rise of capitalism prior to 1492 was a result of class struggle, but class struggle only in Europe. Then he uses this argument as evidence against what he calls &amp;quot;Third-Worldism,&amp;quot; the belief that non-Europe has been of great importance historically and is so (politically) in the present. This conclusion has strongly influenced not only Marxist but also conservative thought in history, geography, sociology, and economic-development theory. Certainly the Brenner theory deserves our attention in this book. And it is not at all a complicated theory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
According to Brenner, class struggle between serfs and lords, influenced by depopulation, led to the decline of feudalism in northwestern Europe. (Brenner does not mention non-Europe and scarcely mentions southern Europe.) In most parts of northwestern Europe, the peasants won this class struggle and became in essence petty landowners, now satisfied with their bucolic existence and unwilling to innovate. Only in England did the lords maintain their grip on the land; peasants thus remained tenants. The peasantry then became differentiated, producing a class of landless laborers and a rising class of larger tenant farmers, wealthy enough to rent substantial holdings and forced (because they had to pay rent) to commercialize, innovate technologically, and thus become capitalists. (Brenner thinks that serfs, lords, and landowning peasants did not innovate, and that towns, even English towns, had only a minor role in the rise of capitalism.) English yeoman tenant farmers, therefore, were the founders of capitalism. Stated differently: capitalism arose because English peasants lost the class struggle. In reality, however, peasants were not predominantly landowners in the other countries of the region; capitalism grew more rapidly in and near the towns than in the rural countryside; and the technological innovativeness that Brenner attributes to fourteenth and fifteenth century English farmers really occurred much later, too late to fit into his theory. More importantly, commercial farming and indeed urban protocapitalism were developing during this period in southern Europe and (as I will argue) in other continents. Brenner&#039;s theory is simply wrong.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In my opinion the popularity of this thin theory is due principally to two things. First, put forward as a Marxist view, grounded in class struggle, it proves to be, on inspection, a theory that is fairly conventional, if somewhat rural in bias. It seems to follows that class-struggle theories lead to conventional conclusions. And secondly, Brenner uses his theory (&amp;quot;The Origins of Capitalist Development: A Critique of Neo-Smithian Marxism,&amp;quot; 1977, pp. 77-92) to attack the unpopular &amp;quot;Third-Worldist&amp;quot; perspectives of dependency theory, underdevelopment theory, and in particular three other neo-Marxists—Sweezy, Frank, and Wallerstein—who argue that European colonialism had much to do with the later rise of capitalism. Brenner is a thoroughgoing Eurocentric tunnel historian: non-Europe had no important role in social evolution at any historical period. Unaware that colonialism involves capitalist relations of production—see Chapter 4 below—he claims that the extra-European world merely had commercial effects on Europe, whereas the rise of capitalism was in no way a product of commerce: it took place in the countryside of England and reflected class struggle, not trade. See critiques of Brenner collected in Aston and Philip (1985) by Hilton, Croot and Parker, Wunder, Leroy, Ladurie, Bois, Cooper, and others. Also see Torras, &amp;quot;Class struggle in Catalonia&amp;quot; (1980) and Hoyle, &amp;quot;Tenure and the land market in early modern England: Or a late contribution to the Brenner debate.&amp;quot; (1990).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Family ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is nothing new about the belief that the European family is in some fundamental sense more rational and more civilized than the family types found elsewhere. When the modernization doctrine became dominant, this belief seems to have faded into the background; there was now a near-consensus among social scientists that differences in family type should be strung along the continuum from &amp;quot;traditional&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;modern&amp;quot; or, as a variation, from &amp;quot;folk&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;urban.&amp;quot; Traditional families, it was argued, have tended to reflect strong kinship ties at a scale larger and wider than the nuclear family; they have tended to form large, extended-family households; and they have tended to be associated with high birthrates. In the absence of much evidence concerning the medieval European family and household, it was rather widely assumed that earlier European families had conformed to the traditional model, which was seen as the &amp;quot;preindustrial&amp;quot; family, contrasted with the modern, post-industrial-revolution nuclear family, forming a small household, with looser kin ties beyond the household, and with fewer children. This transformation was thought to be associated with what was called the &amp;quot;demographic transition,&amp;quot; the process of change from a &amp;quot;traditional&amp;quot; demographic pattern, with high birthrate and high deathrate, characteristic of preindustrial conditions, to a &amp;quot;modern,&amp;quot; postindustrial demographic pattern, with low birthrate and low deathrate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the modernization theory of the family, the non-European world of underdeveloped countries would go through essentially the same transformation as it modernized. Extended family households would be replaced by nuclear family households. This would instill modern prodevelopment attitudes: people would have fewer children (thus combating overpopulation), and they would tend, now, to think more individualistically and thus entrepreneurial.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All of this was a bundle of assumptions. There was no evidence of a causal link between birthrate and size of household (or strength of kin ties beyond the nuclear family); there was merely a correlation within rich, modern societies: both nuclear families and lower birthrates were characteristic of these societies. (One leading demographer pointed out that nuclear families might, in principle, be likely to have more children per couple than extended families.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Taeuber, in Freedman, &#039;&#039;Family and Kinship in Chinese Society&#039;&#039; (1970).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;) In addition, the idea that an adult breadwinner would be more entrepreneurial, more prone to accumulate capital, more competitive, and so on, if he (assumed to be male) was working only for his wife and children and not for a large family including his parents, cousins, and other relations, was a tenuous assumption. Large, tightly knit families had proven to be powerful accumulators, for instance, among many immigrant groups engaged in commerce. Why, indeed, should an adult want to work harder only for spouse and children, and not for parents, sisters, and so on? (One can in fact construct an argument to the effect that an extended family with multiple working adults has definite economic advantages in a developing economy.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;(1) If only one family member is a wageworker, loss of employment is a disaster. If several are wageworkers, normally some will be earning an income when others are laid off. (2) If we assume an ability to save a certain percentage of income, multiple income earners will provide a larger absolute amount of savings, that is, capital; and the absolute amount of capital can be critical in entrepreneurship. (3) Having kin to borrow from is useful for small-scale entrepreneurship. (4) Kinfolk can supply unpaid labor. These principles are well known in Third World communities.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;) As the modernization doctrine itself developed, after about 1960, these ideas began to dissipate. It became clear that various forms of social organization can be equally modern, and that the root causes of change and nonchange do not lie in the family structure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rather dramatically, in the mid-1960s, the notion of a peculiarly European family pattern was reinserted into historians&#039; common discourse, partly as a result of an influential paper by John Hajnal.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hajnal, &amp;quot;European Marriage Patterns in Perspective&amp;quot; (1965), pp. 101-146. This paper is one of the most widely cited publications on the subject of demography in the European miracle literature.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; As we noted at an earlier point in this chapter, in the discussion of demographic arguments for the &amp;quot;miracle,&amp;quot; historical demography was at that time uncovering evidence that preindustrial Europe (or part of Europe) had a lower birthrate than one would expect of a &amp;quot;traditional society.&amp;quot; It seemed that Europeans had been marrying later in life than would be expected in a traditional society with Malthusian controls and therefore maximum birthrate. Instead of scrapping the Malthusian model itself, and arguing instead that all human societies actively control their population dynamics by using such tactics as adjusting the age of marriage, these historians began to assert, simply, the uniqueness of Europe. Other preindustrial societies exhibited the &amp;quot;traditional&amp;quot; pattern, with high and uncontrolled birthrates (and therefore superrapid population growth when mortality declined in the &amp;quot;transition&amp;quot;). Preindustrial Europe, in complete contrast, had a rational family system, with rational population control. It was then argued, without evidence, that preindustrial Europe had a higher level of living and a lower mortality rate than non-Europe, from which it was deduced that Europe kept its birthrate down in proper, rational, adjustment to its lower deathrate, mainly using the mechanism of delayed marriage. Those who put forward this argument simply failed to consider the possibility that families in other societies have acted pretty much the same way. Evidence to this effect was beginning to appear from a number of non-European societies. Some societies had much lower birthrates than would be expected from the classic model. Other societies had demonstrated major shifts in birthrate, either upward or downward, in response to changes in economic and other conditions.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See note 37 above.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hajnal began his 1965 essay with this flat statement:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The marriage pattern of most of Europe as it existed for at least two centuries up to 1940 was, as far as we can tell, unique or almost unique in the world. There is no known example of a population of non-European civilization which has had a similar pattern. The distinctive marks of the &amp;quot;European pattern&amp;quot; are (1) a high age of marriage and (2) a high proportion of people who never marry at all.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hajnal, &amp;quot;European Marriage Patterns in Perspective&amp;quot; (1965), p. 101.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hajnal&#039;s argument was in some ways very careful and in others very casual. He noted carefully that the evidence for late marriage and (somewhat) low marriage frequency in Europe for periods before the seventeenth century was inconclusive, and that the &amp;quot;fragmentary&amp;quot; evidence for the European Middle Ages suggested a &amp;quot;non-European pattern.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hajnal, &amp;quot;European Marriage Patterns in Perspective&amp;quot; (1965), p. 134.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; He introduced absolutely no historical data for non-European regions, casually comparing historical Europe with twentieth-century non-Europe. The theoretical constraint is very clear: non-European patterns are &amp;quot;traditional&amp;quot; and permanent, hence a comparison of seventeenth-century Europe with mid-twentieth-century Asia or Africa is perfectly acceptable.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hajnal concedes that he has only contemporary data for non-Europe, but merely suggests that historical data would prove his point even more clearly because modern non-European family patterns, in his view, are changing in the direction of European patterns: are being Europeanized. And when &amp;quot;all the qualifications about the data have been made, there can be no doubt that our original generalization remains&amp;quot; (&amp;quot;European Marriage Patterns in Perspective,&amp;quot; 1965, p. 106).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This proposition about the unique European pattern of later marriages and lower marriage frequencies was widely and quickly incorporated into the broader theory of Europe&#039;s historical &amp;quot;miracle.&amp;quot; Without much supporting evidence, the proposition was firmly pushed backward into the Middle Ages. According to Lawrence Stone, writing in 1977, &amp;quot;it has now been established beyond any doubt&amp;quot; that over most of northwest Europe the middle and lower classes &amp;quot;married remarkably late, certainly from the fifteenth century onward. ... This custom of delayed marriage is an extraordinary and unique feature of north-west European civilization.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Stone, &#039;&#039;The Family, Sex and Marriage in England 1500-1800&#039;&#039; (1977), p. 509.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Here one notices particularly the word &amp;quot;remarkably.&amp;quot; This is &amp;quot;remarkable&amp;quot; only if there is something to compare it with; yet non-European historical data are not given or even sought. Michael Mann derives the pattern from the Iron Age Indo-European peasant society. Patricia Crone speculates that it is perhaps an ancient Germanic trait. Eric L. Jones thinks that it goes back three or four thousand years. Alan Macfarlane thinks that it has its roots in &amp;quot;a particular amalgam of Christianity and Germanic customs.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mann, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986), p. 408; Crone, &#039;&#039;Pre-Industrial Societies&#039;&#039; (1989), p. 152; Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), pp. 15-16; Macfarlane, &#039;&#039;Marriage and Love in England: Modes of Reproduction 1300-1840&#039;&#039; (1986).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; And so on. In a word: the pattern is very old in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The matter of dates, or age, is certainly crucial. Western Europe was undergoing major transformations from the seventeenth century onward, and a delayed and lower marriage rate could well be explained by a number of the newer facts: mobility, loss of holdings due to enclosures, urbanization, and, later, the well-understood demographic and social effects of the industrial revolution. Even the sixteenth century was somewhat chaotic in western Europe. But if the marriage pattern emerged before 1492, a date before these disruptions began, then one can speak of a definite &amp;quot;European pattern,&amp;quot; not merely a &amp;quot;preindustrial&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;traditional&amp;quot; pattern. And one can begin to build a general causal theory for the subsequent changes—the &amp;quot;European miracle.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additional propositions were added. It had long been known that nuclear family households and neolocal residence (the married couple establishes a household well separated from those of the parents) have been characteristic of western Europe during recent centuries, and this is to be expected as a feature of modernization. It fits with standard modernization theory: the process is supposed to lead from extended family to nuclear family. But the European miracle historians now argue that nuclear families and neolocal residence are part of a unique &amp;quot;European familial system&amp;quot; (Laslett).&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Laslett, &amp;quot;The European Family and Early Industrialization&amp;quot; (1989).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; And again they locate its origin far back in history. And again they sweepingly assert that non-Europeans lack these patterns. In fact, there is good evidence that nuclear-family households were common in many parts of non-Europe. Taeuber, analyzing Buck&#039;s data, found that more than 60% of peasant households in China were nuclear in the early twentieth century.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Taeuber, &amp;quot;The Families of Chinese Farmers&amp;quot; (1970), pp. 63-86.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; These are not historical data, but the point is that China is supposed, according to modernization theory, to be especially &amp;quot;traditional&amp;quot; as regards family and many other things; indeed, there is common confusion between the notion of the Chinese lineage or &amp;quot;sib&amp;quot;—made famous by Weber—and the idea of the extended family. Larger, extended families are uncommon in Latin America. In India, as well as in China, the notion of an extended family is ambiguous because of the ambiguity of the notion of &amp;quot;neolocal residence&amp;quot; (in a cramped village, house-building space can be a problem), and the association sometimes found between neolocality and available land upon which to begin a small holding. Further confusion is added over the association between extended (and/or joint) family and inheritance rights, power, mobility, and more.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Freedman, &#039;&#039;Chinese Lineage and Society&#039;&#039; (1966), p. 49.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Meanwhile, back in Europe, the model of a supposedly characteristic nuclear-neolocal pattern is subject to very serious questions for the Middle Ages. (For even earlier times the idea of a unique pattern is speculative, and belongs with other old and suspect ideas—discussed earlier in this chapter—about the ancient Germanic tribes and their unique individualism, progressiveness, and the like.) Medieval marital residence patterns may sometimes have reflected manor rules (such as assignment of holdings) rather than cultural residence rules in circumstances of serfdom and insecure tenancy, and a distinction has to be made between different types of rural regions, such as the areas with off-farm employment (like woolen areas of southeastern England), those with &amp;quot;frontier&amp;quot; characteristics, and so on. There is even reason to question the notion of a persistent west European marriage pattern.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See, for example, Handler &amp;quot;Review of Macfarlane, A., &#039;&#039;Marriage and love in England&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; (1989); Hilton, &amp;quot;Individualism and the English Peasantry&amp;quot; (1980); Kertzer, &amp;quot;The Joint Family Household Revisited: Demographic Constraints and Household Complexity in the European Past&amp;quot; (1989); and Berkner, &amp;quot;The Use and Misuse of Census Data for the Historical Analysis of Family Structures&amp;quot; (1975), and &amp;quot;The Stem Family and the Developmental Cycle of the Peasant Household&amp;quot; (1989).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; But even granting the generalization about western Europe, there is no basis for considering the European pattern to have been, historically, unique.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;For instance, G. Lee, &amp;quot;Comparative Perspectives&amp;quot; (1987), p. 65, points out that &amp;quot;(Many) scholars contend that the majority of families in any society are and always have been nuclear, regardless of the cultural elements favoring extended families.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, the model is embellished with some rather gaudy ornamentation. It is claimed that the unique European pattern is not merely a matter of neolocality, nuclear households, and age and frequency of marriage. West European marriages were grounded in love. Elsewhere, marriages were arranged. (But arranged marriages seem to have been the rule in premodern Europe, prior to the periods of high mobility and social disruption. The notion, regularly invoked here, that non-European couples are strangers to one another prior to their being shoved into marriage is colonial-era prejudice supported by a few unusual cultural situations. Romantic love in this argument is considered an attribute of European rationality. Non-European couples are certainly as loving as European couples.) It is claimed, next, that the unique European family, because it is nuclear, produces a unique European personality type. The theory is that the small (European) household leads inevitably to individualistic, competitive, acquisitive, yet caring behavior. Mann and Jones, as we saw earlier, put forward the image of an ancient peasant household, a Hansel and Gretel house deep in the forest, as the historical source of this individualistic pattern. Macfarlane, who presents perhaps the most extreme form of this theory (and is chided by some of his colleagues not for his theory but for his claim that it applies mainly to the English), argues that the early medieval English family produced a person with the psychological and behavioral traits of (in essence) Weber&#039;s capitalist personality, that the causal chain runs from tribal customs and religion to family, from family to personality, and from personality to the beginnings of capitalism (a point we return to below). This argument is advanced mainly by erecting a model of what Macfarlane considers to be &amp;quot;peasant society,&amp;quot; with a peasant family and peasant mentality. Early English rural folk don&#039;t fit this model. Therefore they were not peasants, and did not have the traditional traits of peasantry, like a traditional family type and traditional mentality.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Macfarlane, &#039;&#039;The Origins of English Individualism&#039;&#039; (1978), chap. 1 and &amp;quot;The Cradle of Capitalism&amp;quot; (1988), p. 344.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; As many have commented, Macfarlane&#039;s notion of &amp;quot;peasant&amp;quot; is a straw man, uncharacteristic of modern non-Europe, much less of historical non-Europe, and his view of the medieval English farm folk as nonpeasants is historically invalid.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See, for example, Hilton, &amp;quot;Individualism and the English Peasantry&amp;quot; (1980) and Handler, &amp;quot;Review of Mcfarlane, A., &#039;&#039;Marriage and Love in England&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; (1989).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The theory of the unique European family is an important part of the European miracle theory as it is being propagated today. It is used in two distinct arguments. The first of these combines the family theory with Malthusianism. The argument runs as follows: Humans in general are not rational enough to control their sexual behavior and limit the number of offspring to suit the prevailing conditions of food supply and the like. Therefore, ordinary humans experience permanent, or periodic, crises, in which overpopulation leads to famine and war and pestilence, after which the now-reduced population begins again to overproduce offspring. The root axiom is irrationality. People behave not intelligently, but (as Malthus said 200 years ago) rather like barnyard beasts.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&amp;quot;(It) seems likely that (primitive peoples&#039;) patterns of behavior in ... respect (to fertility and mortality) bore a strong resemblance to those which can be observed in many animals,&amp;quot; Wrigley, &#039;&#039;Population and History&#039;&#039; (1969), p. 37. Wrigley is writing about present-day hunting-gathering-fishing peoples. A &amp;quot;description of the relationship between animal social conventions and the regulation of animal population numbers&amp;quot; is &amp;quot;a convenient point of departure for the study of primitive man&amp;quot; (p. 37).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The historical result of this process is to prevent development. Any improvement in, for instance, productive technology merely leads to population growth, to crisis, to depopulation, and thus back to the status quo ante—a cycle of stagnation. This is one and perhaps the crucial cause of the nondevelopment of non-European societies in general. Europeans, by contrast, have always (or perhaps for just a millennium or so) exhibited rational behavior in all matters relating to population. This includes decisions about marriage and about childbearing. The unique European late-marrying, nuclear, neolocal, companionate family is the crucial institution in which this rational decision-making process takes place. Thus the European family has permitted Europeans (or west Europeans, or northwest Europeans) to check population growth, and thereby accumulate material wealth that would otherwise be dissipated in the feeding of excess babies. This primordial accumulation underlies the permanent progress of Europe. This theory, in one form or another, is advanced by many of the historians whom we have been discussing, among them Crone, Hall, Jones, Laslett, Macfarlane, and Mann.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Crone, &#039;&#039;Pre-Industrial Societies&#039;&#039; (1989), p. 153; Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties: The Causes and Consequences of the Rise of the West&#039;&#039; (1985), pp. 130-132; Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), pp. 3, 13-15, 217-19, 226-227, 231, and elsewhere; Laslett, &amp;quot;The European Family and Early Industrialization&amp;quot; (1989), pp. 235-240; Macfarlane, &amp;quot;The Cradle of Capitalism&amp;quot; (1988), chap. 14; Mann, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986), p. 408.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Hall expresses one form of the theory in the following comment (part of which we quoted earlier):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[The] European family has long been small, late marrying, nuclear and notably sensitive to Malthusian pressure. ... The expansion of the European economy did not occur laterally, as in late traditional China, because improvements in output were not eaten up by a massive growth in population. The ratio between population and acreage in Europe remained favourable ultimately because of the relative continence of the European family.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties&#039;&#039; (1985), pp. 130-131.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Malthusian theory reduces humans to beasts. But even for those scholars who accept Malthusianism, the notion that the European family staves off the Malthusian disasters is hardly credible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second way in which the &amp;quot;unique European family&amp;quot; theory is used in arguments for the European &amp;quot;miracle&amp;quot; is a matter of deducing ways that the European family produces various sorts of uniquely progressive attitudes and actions on the part of Europeans, attitudes and actions that then lead toward the miracle. A very widely used form of this argument is expressed thusly by Laslett:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[The] European familial system may have been responsible for a whole series of features conducive to economic progress, and perhaps innovation. The conditions laid down for marriage and procreation imposed on all individuals ... the necessity of saving, accumulating. ... [The] European familial system fostered the spirit of hoarding and parsimony.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Laslett, &amp;quot;The European Family and Early Industrialization&amp;quot; (1989), p. 237.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The family thus generates the personality traits of an incipient capitalist, and does so deep in the Middle Ages. This, too, is hardly credible and hardly in accord with the realities of life (and psychology) before 1492. Laslett, like Macfarlane and many others, makes the false assumption that a typical medieval European family does, in fact, have choices permitting saving, hoarding, accumulating, and so on. This argument requires that the peasant family be a substantial landholder, or at least a tenant with firm security, such that capital accumulation can take place and not be bled off by master or landlord. There is much dispute about the degree of landownership in late-medieval western Europe, but it is certain that family behavior of the sort described by Laslett could not have been common under serfdom and, after the decline of serfdom, could not have been common in places where peasants did not own the land. And this seems to have been the rule, not the exception.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Croot and Parker, &amp;quot;Agrarian Class Structure and the Development of Capitalism: France and England Compared&amp;quot; (1985). This essay, and others in the Aston and Philipin book, &#039;&#039;The Brenner Debate: Agrarian Class Structure and Economic Development in Pre-Industrial Europe&#039;&#039; (1985), discuss in detail the low level of landownership in medieval Europe.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It appears that this argument is, again, a telescoping of history. The entrepreneurial yeoman farmer of, say, the eighteenth century, is pushed back into the Middle Ages, and an effect becomes a cause.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Many other European-family-to-European-miracle arguments are common in present-day scholarly discourse, but space permits me to give only one additional example, from Lawrence Stone:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several consequences which must have followed from the late marriage pattern. ... [It] is reasonable to assume that for many young men this delay involved considerable sexual denial at a time of optimum male sexual drive. ... If one follows Freudian theory, this could lead to neuroses. ... [It] could help to explain the high level of group aggression, which lay behind the extraordinary expansionist violence of western nation-states at this time. It could also have been a stimulus to capitalist economic enterprise ... stimulating saving in order to marry, and generating activist social and economic dynamism.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Stone, &#039;&#039;The Family, Sex and Marriage in England, 1500-1800&#039;&#039; (1977), pp. 53-54.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Again:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The sublimation of sex among young male adults may well account for the extraordinary military aggressiveness, the thrift, the passion for hard work, and the entrepreneurial and intellectual enterprise of modern Western man.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Stone, &#039;&#039;The Family, Sex and Marriage in England, 1500-1800&#039;&#039; (1977), p. 652.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Europeans conquered the world because their young men were sexually frustrated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Space does not permit us to list and discuss all of the other common or garden-variety explanations for the so-called European miracle. Some additional explanations will be mentioned in various contexts at later points in this book. But I hope that the discussion in this chapter has sufficiently made the point that no characteristic of Europe&#039;s environment, Europe&#039;s people, or Europe&#039;s culture, at any time prior to 1492, can be convincingly shown to have had anything to do with the fact that Europe developed while other civilizations did not do so.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I will try, in the next two chapters, to show that the whole question must be phrased in a different way and answered in a different way. Europe did not rise, relative to the other civilizations, prior to 1492. When Europe did rise, after 1492, this reflected, not some special quality of &amp;quot;Europeanness,&amp;quot; but the immense wealth which came into Europe as a result of colonialism in the sixteenth century and thereafter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Notes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Although Eric L. Jones&#039;s 1981 book &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; popularized the phrase &amp;quot;the European miracle,&amp;quot; it had been in use for a long time with the same essential meaning: the unique rise of Europe before or during the Middle Ages. Not every historian would describe this as a &amp;quot;miracle,&amp;quot; but the term has wide acceptance, as evidence the fact that an international symposium entitled &amp;quot;The European Miracle&amp;quot; was held at Cambridge University in 1985.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Apparently my 1976 article, &amp;quot;Where Was Capitalism Born?&amp;quot; was the first publication to reject the &amp;quot;miracle&amp;quot; theory absolutely, that is, without qualification. In 1990 Samir Amin, commenting on a later paper of mine, indicated his basic agreement with this rejectionist position. (Amin, &amp;quot;Colonialism and the Rise of Capitalism: A Comment,&amp;quot; 1990; Blaut, &amp;quot;Colonialism and the Rise of Capitalism,&amp;quot; 1989; also see Blaut, &amp;quot;Fourteen Ninety-Two,&amp;quot; 1992; and Amin, &amp;quot;On Jim Blaut&#039;s &#039;Fourteen Ninety-Two,&#039;&amp;quot; 1992.) A few other historians have taken positions approaching this one; their views are discussed later in this chapter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Another seminal work was Cyril Black&#039;s &#039;&#039;The Dynamics of Modernization: A Study in Comparative History&#039;&#039; (1966). Other such works in various fields will be discussed later in this chapter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Perhaps one reason was the maturation of the discipline of history itself. Another was the influence, not entirely salutary, of positivistic scientific method on history, which led to an attempt to specify variables and &amp;quot;factors,&amp;quot; and, if possible, quantify each of them. Another reason was the loss of faith in the nineteenth-century idea of inevitable progress: after nearly a half century of chaos and war, progress definitely did not appear to be something natural and inevitable; it had to be explained and also produced. Still a third reason was the general secularization of European thought, including history, such that human events could not be assumed to reflect guidance of a higher power. Another reason, possibly a very important one, was the general development of academic disciplines, and their involvement in (and nutrition from) international and domestic policy. This implied that each discipline, seeing the world with some degree of bias in favor of its own subject-as-factor (for economists, the market factor; for psychologists, the motivation factor; for sociologists, the demographic factor and the social-structural factor; for geographers, the resource factor; etc.) tended to argue in favor of historical models that treated our factor as crucial and those of others as secondary. Since many social scientists wrote history in this process, this led to some special pleading.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. I do not mean to imply that all of this was a dominant theory for the discipline of history as a whole. The great majority of historical scholars worked on smaller problems, carefully delving into events and developing limited explanations for those events. The modernization perspective influenced some of the smaller generalizations, for instance proffering explanations in which the factors most supportive of modernizationism were favored—factors like population, technology, and the like. And there were some areas of research where lack of attention to the history of non-Europe was a critical source of error (most notably, as we will see, in studies of the history of European technology). In addition, there were (and are) many different points of view in the vast and diverse field of professional history, so it would be questionable to characterize a particular historiographic period as being dominated by a particular governing theory (or &amp;quot;paradigm&amp;quot;). I suspect that my own concern with the body of literature relating to the &amp;quot;European miracle&amp;quot; problem probably leads me to overemphasize the significance of the modernization view on history as a whole. It should also be noticed that most of the prominent writers about the specific problem of explaining the unique rise of Europe were specialist historians—economic historians, historical sociologists, and so forth—and not historians of the standard breed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Cabral, &#039;&#039;Unity and Struggle&#039;&#039; (1979).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. As to the present and future, Third World intellectuals tended to make two arguments. Those who supported the idea of a capitalist form of development argued that economic development must consist of the defense of native capital against the corrosive diffusion into one&#039;s country of the economic and political dominance of European countries and corporations. For socialists, influence and dominance by international capitalism quite obviously had to be rejected. Both groups tended to adopt &amp;quot;dependency theory&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;underdevelopment theory,&amp;quot; which was a theory both of history and of modern social processes and development. A relatively small minority of Third World intellectuals, usually reflecting the thinking and interests of the very wealthy and very right-wing sectors, welcomed the idea of economic domination by foreign capitalist interests. Since the wealthy social sectors dominated most Third World societies, this minority point of view often determined policy. Also, it received much more prominence than it deserved in the journals of the First World.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. See James, &#039;&#039;A History of Pan-African Revolt&#039;&#039; (1938), &#039;&#039;The Black Jacobins&#039;&#039; (1938), &amp;quot;The Atlantic Slave Trade and Slavery&amp;quot; (1970); Williams, &#039;&#039;Capitalism and Slavery&#039;&#039; (1944). We discuss these matters in Chapter 4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9. Amin, &#039;&#039;Accumulation on a World Scale&#039;&#039; (1974) and later works. My articles &amp;quot;Geographic Models of Imperialism&amp;quot; (1970) and &amp;quot;Where Was Capitalism Born?&amp;quot; (1976) laid out the skeleton of a general theory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
10. I deal with this matter in &#039;&#039;The National Question&#039;&#039; (1987b).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
11. Duyvendak, &#039;&#039;Ma Huan Re-examined&#039;&#039; (1933); Needham and collaborators, &#039;&#039;Science and Civilization in China&#039;&#039;, published in 6 volumes between 1965 and 1984; Wheatley, &#039;&#039;The Golden Khersonese&#039;&#039; (1961) and &#039;&#039;The Pivot of the Four Quarters&#039;&#039; (1971); Elvin, &#039;&#039;The Pattern of the Chinese Past&#039;&#039; (1973).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
12. Amin, &#039;&#039;Unequal Development&#039;&#039; (1976), &#039;&#039;Eurocentrism&#039;&#039; (1988), &amp;quot;Colonialism and the Rise of Capitalism: A Comment&amp;quot; (1990).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
13. Bernal, &#039;&#039;Black Athena&#039;&#039;, vol. 1 (1987) and vol. 2 (1991).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
14. Mention should also be made of Eric Wolf&#039;s 1982 book &#039;&#039;Europe and the Peoples Without History&#039;&#039; which provides a useful and important survey of the history of both European and non-European civilizations and shows how unconvincing is the theory that non-European civilizations, historically, were stagnant and unprogressive (that they were &amp;quot;peoples without history&amp;quot;). Wolf, however, stops short of questioning the truly crucial Eurocentric belief that Europeans were more progressive than non-Europeans in several ways that are crucial to the &amp;quot;European miracle&amp;quot; theory, and so he does not directly confront that theory. (It should be noted that most mainstream historians no longer argue that non-European civilizations are, or were, totally unprogressive, totally &amp;quot;unhistorical,&amp;quot; arguing instead about slow rates of change, &amp;quot;blockages&amp;quot; inhibiting change, and the like—a difference of phrasing which, as we will see, is not always a difference of argument.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
15. It is always risky to try to explain broad changes of fashion in scholarship, especially when the changes are still underway, so this interpretation cannot be more than a hunch, or hypothesis. Scholarly attitudes toward the Third World were very positive in the period of anticolonial and civil rights struggles. After the late 1960s the mood changed. Not only did more conservative views come to dominate the Western world, but rather unexpected difficulties emerged in the Third World itself: national conflicts, failure of development programs, and more. Western scholarship had never really abandoned the traditional view of Europe and its relations to non-Europe, including the diffusionist view of colonialism, and it appears that this older paradigm, never abandoned, simply became, once again, thoroughly dominant. Certainly the attention that had been paid previously to dependency theory and related views fell away among mainstream scholars. Among Marxists the process was even more dramatic, because it was less expected. In brief, Eurocentric Marxists who dismissed the role of the Third World both historically and in the present now became virtually the only Marxists within the academic world to pronounce upon issues related to the Third World. It became quite fashionable to insist, once again, that only the working class of the advanced capitalist countries can bring about socialism because each stage of history commences in this part of the world (Inside) before it spreads to the rest of the world (Outside). In the conservative camp, not only did Eurocentric views regain their hegemony, but one began, now, to hear whispers of views not far distant from racism: views about Third World peoples not having the potential to develop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
16. See Brenner, &amp;quot;The Origins of Capitalist Development: A Critique of Neo-Smithian Marxism&amp;quot; (1977), &amp;quot;Agrarian class structure and economic development in pre-industrial Europe&amp;quot; (1985), &amp;quot;The Agrarian roots of European capitalism&amp;quot; (1985b); Anderson, &#039;&#039;Passages from Antiquity to Feudalism&#039;&#039; (1974), &#039;&#039;Lineages of the Absolute State&#039;&#039; (1974); Warren, &#039;&#039;Imperialism: Pioneer of Capitalism&#039;&#039; (1980).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
17. I will discuss only the more important beliefs, perhaps neglecting a few of these. And I will give just enough evidence to show that these beliefs are not self-evidently true. Much fuller evidence is given, to dispute some of the beliefs, in Chapters 3 and 4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
18. See Chapter 1, note 2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
19. Bowler, &#039;&#039;The Invention of Progress&#039;&#039; (1989); Harris, &#039;&#039;The Rise of Anthropological Theory&#039;&#039; (1968); Gossett, &#039;&#039;Race: The History of an Idea in America&#039;&#039; (1963); Jackson, &#039;&#039;Race and Racism: Essays in Social Geography&#039;&#039; (1987); Stocking, &#039;&#039;Race, Culture, and Evolution&#039;&#039; (1968); Trigger, &#039;&#039;A History of Archeological Thought&#039;&#039; (1989).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
20. See Bernal, &#039;&#039;Black Athena&#039;&#039;, vol. 1 (1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
21. See Gossett, &#039;&#039;Race&#039;&#039; (1963).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
22. Blaut, &amp;quot;The Theory of Cultural Racism&amp;quot; (1992).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
23. &amp;quot;Hereditary neuralgia of the presumably strong tendency toward hysteria and autohypnosis of the Indian...&amp;quot; Max Weber, &#039;&#039;The Religion of India&#039;&#039; (1967), p. 387. This postulate is basic to Weber&#039;s analysis of Brahminism as prime cause for India&#039;s lack of development.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
24. &amp;quot;(The) ... negroes long ago showed themselves unsuitable for factory work and the operation of machines; they have not seldom sunk into a cataleptic sleep. Here is one case in economic history where tangible racial distinctions are present&amp;quot; Weber, &#039;&#039;General Economic History&#039;&#039; (1981), p. 379. Although Weber says here that this is merely &amp;quot;one case&amp;quot; of racial influences, note that the case is crucial for Weber&#039;s analysis both of &amp;quot;rationality&amp;quot; and of modernization; the &amp;quot;racial distinctions&amp;quot; here separate out Africans in a fundamental way: a clear case of moderate yet crucial racism. In the same vein, &amp;quot;it was found that the American Indians were entirely unsuitable for plantation labor&amp;quot; (p. 299).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
25. Weber, &#039;&#039;The Religion of China&#039;&#039; (1951), pp. 231-232. Weber considers these to be &amp;quot;racial qualities of the Chinese&amp;quot; (p. 230) although cultural factors may be involved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
26. Weber, &#039;&#039;The Protestant Ethic and the Spirit of Capitalism&#039;&#039; (1958), p. 30. Weber says here that &amp;quot;it would be natural to suspect that the most important reason&amp;quot; for the rationality of the Occident lies in &amp;quot;differences of heredity,&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;the importance of biological heredity,&amp;quot; he thinks, is &amp;quot;very great&amp;quot; (p. 30). But we do not yet know how to measure its influence, so our attention should focus mainly on the cultural factors (pp. 30-31). This was typical moderate racism (as I call it) for the time the work was published (1904-1905).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
27. I have not discussed the question whether biological racism remains important today as a genuinely implicit theory, that is, one still accepted but not consciously so. I suspect that it does. Some Eurocentric historians hold to positions regarding individual differences between Europeans and non-Europeans that are so extreme, and so bigoted, that it is difficult to avoid the conclusion that at least a few of them may hold to an implicitly racist infratheory, perhaps unconsciously believing, that is, that the inferiority of non-Europeans is genetically determined.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
28. Among many sources on the racism fallacy, see Franz Boas&#039; classic book, &#039;&#039;Race, Language, and Culture&#039;&#039; (1948); also Blum, &#039;&#039;Pseudoscience and Mental Ability&#039;&#039; (1978); Gossett, &#039;&#039;Race&#039;&#039; (1965); Haller, &#039;&#039;Outcasts from Evolution&#039;&#039; (1971); Jackson, &#039;&#039;Race and Racism&#039;&#039; (1987); Magubane, &#039;&#039;The Ties that Bind: African-American Consciousness and Africa&#039;&#039; (1987); Gill and Levidow, &#039;&#039;Anti-Racist Science Teaching&#039;&#039; (1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
29. The idea that demographic behavior is not fully under social control, is a primordial biological fact or factor, seems to underlie the thinking of most Eurocentric historians (conspicuously Eric L. Jones, Michael Mann, and John Hall). The basic proposition seems to be that population will necessarily grow beyond the rational limits, and so overpopulation must result unless societies find nondemographic solutions, notably by increasing food supply to feed the inexorably increasing population. See, for instance, Michael Mann, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039;, vol. 1 (1986): If agricultural yields had not increased in medieval Europe, &amp;quot;the continent would ... have experienced a similar Malthusian cycle every century or so—and would not have generated capitalism&amp;quot; (p. 402). This view is even encountered, occasionally, in the radical and feminist movements. Note the following view put forward by a Marxist-feminist: &amp;quot;(We) assume (given the ubiquity of the sex drive ...) that the total number of conceptions in a population will tend to exceed those desired within a given incentive structure, and this unintended surplus will be greater, the more imperfect are the means at hand. ... A given fertility pattern then is taken to be &#039;rational&#039; ... except for a small but variable excess (of births),&amp;quot; Seccombe, &amp;quot;Marxism and Demography,&amp;quot; (1983), p. 31. The context is a discussion of European medieval social evolution, but the argument is given mainly in support of Brenner&#039;s theory about the strictly European rise of capitalism. Most radicals and feminists reject Malthusianism and would reject Seccombe&#039;s view as Malthusian.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
30. Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), p. 3. Part of the passage is a quotation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
31. Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), p. 219.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
32. Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties: The Causes and Consequences of the Rise of the West&#039;&#039; (1985), p. 131. Italics added.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
33. As F. Hassan points out, &amp;quot;Among human populations the practice of population control in one form or another is universal.&amp;quot; (&amp;quot;Demographic Archeology,&amp;quot; 1978, p. 71.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
34. Some families will of course have more conceptions than desired, and others fewer, because birth control techniques are imperfect, but the average for the larger group will be broadly in line with the group&#039;s values and population targets. The techniques run the gamut from variable age of marriage and variable dowry or bride price, to complexity of marriage rules (defining who, in a kin system, is eligible to be one&#039;s spouse), to timing of sexual relations, to the use of antiterility and abortive devices, to infanticide, and other practices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
35. Much of the scholarship comes from India, where colonial ideology used to claim that poverty is a result of people having too many children. Now demographers and other social scientists have disproven this myth. See, for instance, Mamdani, &#039;&#039;The Myth of Population Control&#039;&#039; (1972), and Nag, &amp;quot;How Modernization Can Also Increase Fertility&amp;quot; (1980). For Africa, see, for example, Kitching, &amp;quot;Proto-Industrialization and Demographic Change&amp;quot; (1983); Swindell, &amp;quot;Domestic Production, Labor Mobility, and Population Change in West Africa, 1900-1980&amp;quot; (1981); Cordell and Gregory, the introduction to &#039;&#039;African Population and Capitalism&#039;&#039; (1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
36. See, for instance, numerous studies showing the plasticity of birthrates, including Nag &amp;quot;How Modernization Can Also Increase Fertility&amp;quot; (1980), Collyer, &#039;&#039;Birth Rates in Latin America&#039;&#039; (1965), and Harewood, &amp;quot;Population Growth in Grenada&amp;quot; (1966).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
37. See Aston and Philipn, eds., &#039;&#039;The Brenner Debate&#039;&#039; (1985), especially the introduction by R. Hilton.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
38. Perhaps more readily, because the Malthusian explanation for poverty in Third World countries has been a rather troublesome issue for scholars and planners in these countries, and it has been important to show that poverty in their countries is not somehow caused by the demographic misbehavior of ordinary people.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
39. For instance Montesquieu, in &#039;&#039;The Spirit of the Laws&#039;&#039; ((1748) 1949) &amp;quot;People are ... more vigorous in cold climates&amp;quot; (pt. xiv.2). &amp;quot;There are countries where the excess of heat enervates the body, and renders men ... slothful and dispirited&amp;quot; (pt. xv.7).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
40. &amp;quot;Africa&amp;quot; almost always refers to &amp;quot;Africa south of the Sahara&amp;quot; in the discourse I am criticizing, so I will use &amp;quot;Africa&amp;quot; in the same sense in the present discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
41. Blaut, &amp;quot;The Ecology of Tropical Farming Systems&amp;quot; (1963).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
42. See, for example, Collins and Roberts, eds., &#039;&#039;Capacity for Work in the Tropics&#039;&#039; (1988), which fails to find convincing evidence suggesting negative tropical effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
43. The two citations (Gilfillan, &amp;quot;The Coldward Course of Progress,&amp;quot; 1920, and Lambert, &amp;quot;The Role of Climate in the Economic Development of Nations,&amp;quot; 1971) are hardly indicative of modern scholarly literature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
44. India&#039;s &amp;quot;debilitating climate&amp;quot; is one reason why India fell behind Europe, according to Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), p. 198.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
45. Among the pioneer works which have importance for peasant agriculture, we may mention Fred Hardy&#039;s &amp;quot;Some Aspects of Tropical Soils&amp;quot; (1936) and various of his articles in &#039;&#039;Tropical Agriculture&#039;&#039;, and the work of Robert Pendleton (especially Pendleton, &amp;quot;Land Use in North-Eastern Thailand,&amp;quot; 1943, and Prescott and Pendleton, &#039;&#039;Laterites and Lateritic Soils&#039;&#039;, 1952), and G. Milne &amp;quot;A Soil Reconnaissance Journey Through Parts of Tanganyika Territory&amp;quot; (1947). The first comprehensive textbook on tropical soils embodying modern knowledge is Mohr and van Baren, &#039;&#039;Tropical Soils&#039;&#039; (1954).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
46. See Nye and Greenland, &#039;&#039;The Soil Under Shifting Cultivation&#039;&#039; (1960); Blaut, &amp;quot;The Nature and Effects of Shifting Agriculture&amp;quot; (1962); Ahn, &#039;&#039;West African Soils&#039;&#039; (1970).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
47. See Miller, &#039;&#039;Way of Death&#039;&#039; (1988); Curtin, &#039;&#039;The Rise and Fall of the Plantation Complex&#039;&#039; (1990). The view is echoed in many world history textbooks, for example, Roberts, &#039;&#039;The Hutchinson History of The World&#039;&#039; (1987), pp. 54-56; McNeill, &#039;&#039;A World History&#039;&#039; (1967), pp. 273-278.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
48. See Wilken, &#039;&#039;Good Farmers: Traditional Agricultural Resource Management in Mexico and Central America&#039;&#039; (1987); also Nye and Greenland, &#039;&#039;The Soil Under Shifting Agriculture&#039;&#039; (1960); Blaut, &amp;quot;The Ecology of Tropical Farming Systems&amp;quot; (1963).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
49. Denevan, &#039;&#039;The Native Population of the Americas in 1492&#039;&#039; (1976).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
50. Cockburn and Hecht, &#039;&#039;The Fate of the Forest&#039;&#039; (1989).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
51. These marginal areas often are regions in which agriculture is practiced, in preference to some less intensive system of land use, because human communities have been pushed off better land by historical forces, notably colonialism.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
52. For a typical instance, the Oxford historian J. M. Roberts, in his popular world history textbook, &#039;&#039;The Hutchinson History of the World&#039;&#039; (1987), makes the following quite ignorant statement: &amp;quot;Probably the greatest importance of (the) spread of iron-working (in tropical Africa) was the difference it made to agriculture. It made possible a new penetration of the forests, new tilling of the soil (which may be connected with the arrival of new food-crops from Asia ... This suggests once again the important limiting factor of the African environment. Most of the continent&#039;s history is the story of response to influences from the outside (including iron-working and new crops)&amp;quot; (pp. 511-512). African farmers, like farmers in Europe and many other regions, practiced agriculture with stone tools before iron arrived, and continued to do so afterward whenever and wherever iron was hard to obtain. On the age of ironworking in tropical Africa, see, for example, Wai-Andah, &amp;quot;West Africa Before the Seventh Century&amp;quot; (1981) and Sinclair, &amp;quot;Archeology in Eastern Africa&amp;quot; (1991).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
53. See, for example, Roberts (note 53 above); also Irwin, &amp;quot;Sub-Saharan Africa,&amp;quot; in Garraty and Gay, eds. &#039;&#039;The Columbia History of the World&#039;&#039; (1981), p. 299.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
54. See for instance Irvine&#039;s classical work, &#039;&#039;A Textbook of West African Agriculture&#039;&#039; (1934); Coursey, &#039;&#039;Yams&#039;&#039; (1967).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
55. According to Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), &amp;quot;the Negroid peoples ... were still pushing east and south into the territories of the pygmies and the bushmen when the Boers undertook the Great Trek north from the Cape in the 1830s,&amp;quot; (p. 155). Also see Roberts &#039;&#039;The Hutchinson History of the World&#039;&#039; (1987), p. 178.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
56. Curtin, &#039;&#039;Economic Change in Pre-Colonial Africa&#039;&#039; (1975); Curtin, &#039;&#039;The Rise and Fall of the Plantation Complex&#039;&#039; (1990); Miller, &#039;&#039;Way of Death&#039;&#039; (1988).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
57. See Wisner and Mbithi, &amp;quot;Drought in Eastern Kenya&amp;quot; (1974); Wisner, &#039;&#039;Power and Need in Africa&#039;&#039; (1989); O&#039;Keefe and Wisner, &amp;quot;African Drought: The State of the Game&amp;quot; (1975).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
58. The same arguments apply, with no need for qualification, in Western Hemisphere agriculture. In relatively limited parts of the South American rain forest the ecosystem is so fragile, as a result of local geological conditions (rocks forming infertile kaolinitic clay soils in some areas, almost pure sands in other areas), that cropping systems must employ shifting agriculture (or tree crops). But such areas are the exception within the present-day distribution of rain forest environments. In general, the great sweep of Amazonian and Guianan rain forest is a zone of non-sedentary agriculture because of cultural-historical factors, notably depopulation and the massive increase in cattle ranching. It is in fact cattle ranching, and not shifting agriculture, that leads to agriculturally caused long-term environmental degradation in the rainforest region, because (1) ranchers burn forest to the maximum extent possible and without control, in order to expand the area of pasture, and (2) the resulting pasture leads to steady soil degradation because coarse pasture grasses do not maintain the soil ecosystem as does the original forest. Shifting cultivators, by contrast, burn only under controlled conditions, burn small areas only, and carefully encourage the regrowth of forest. If the forest disappears, their livelihood disappears. Shifting agriculturists should not be blamed for deforestation anywhere in the humid tropics. See Hecht and Cockburn, &#039;&#039;The Fate of the Forest&#039;&#039; (1989); Blaut, &amp;quot;The Nature and Effects of Shifting Agriculture&amp;quot; (1963).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
59. Buckle, &#039;&#039;The History of Civilization in England&#039;&#039;, 2nd ed., (1913), chap. 2. Also see Bowler, &#039;&#039;The Invention of Progress&#039;&#039; (1989), pp. 28-29.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
60. Marx, &#039;&#039;Capital&#039;&#039;, vol. 1 (1976), p. 513n.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
61. Jones in fact manages to use both of the opposing theories toward the same end. In wetter regions of Africa &amp;quot;living was easy.&amp;quot; In drier areas &amp;quot;agriculture was not productive.&amp;quot; Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), p. 154. Also see Jones, &#039;&#039;Growth Recuring: Economic Change in World History&#039;&#039; (1988).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
62. &amp;quot;In Africa the bountifulness and extent of the land makes for a mobile peasantry, necessarily therefore poor material on which to build states. Something like this is probably true of all slash-and-burn agriculture,&amp;quot; John Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties&#039;&#039; (1985), p. 27. (&amp;quot;Slash-and-burn agriculture&amp;quot; is shifting agriculture.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
63. Laibman, &amp;quot;Modes of Production and Theories of Transition&amp;quot; (1984), p. 284. However, Laibman&#039;s overall argument is not at all Eurocentric.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
64. Buckle, &#039;&#039;History of Civilization in England&#039;&#039;, vol. 1, 2nd ed. (1913), p. 93: &amp;quot;(The) great plagues by which Europe has at different periods been scourged, have, for the most part, proceeded from the East, which is their natural birthplace, and where they are most fatal. Indeed, of those cruel diseases now existing in Europe, scarcely one is indigenous; and the worst of them were imported from tropical countries in and after the first century of the Christian era.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
65. The theory that the HIV virus which causes AIDS in humans is another one of these African plagues descending upon the Western World may very well be just the newest myth in this old diffusionist tradition. Whether or not this virus originated in Africa, which has not been proven, the myth has already taken on ugly overtones, as in the completely unfounded (yet classical) belief that AIDS was transmitted from monkeys to humans because of some strange sexual practices in some obscure African tribes. (This myth is naively reported in Shannon and Pyle, &amp;quot;The Origin and Diffusion of AIDS,&amp;quot; 1989. See the critique of this paper by Watts and Okello, &amp;quot;Medical Geography and AIDS,&amp;quot; 1990. Also see R. C. and R. J. Chirimuuta, &#039;&#039;AIDS, Africa and racism&#039;&#039;, 2nd ed., 1989.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
66. McNeill, &#039;&#039;Plagues and Peoples&#039;&#039; (1976), p. 43.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
67. See, for instance, Giblin, &amp;quot;Trypanosomiasis Control in African History: An Evaded Issue?&amp;quot; (1990); Turshen, &amp;quot;Population Growth and the Deterioration of Health: Mainland Tanzania, 1920-1960&amp;quot; (1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
68. See Venturi &amp;quot;The History of the Concept of &#039;Oriental Despotism&#039; in Europe&amp;quot; (1963); P. Anderson, &#039;&#039;Lineages of the Absolute State&#039;&#039; (1974); B. Chandra, &amp;quot;Karl Marx, His Theories of Asian Societies, and Colonial Rule&amp;quot; (1981).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
69. Similar judgments are still commonly made by theoreticians of the European miracle. For instance, John Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties&#039;&#039; (1985), p. 12: &amp;quot;Chinese society was stuck in the same stage for over two thousand years, while Europe, in comparison, progressed like a champion hurdler.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
70. And also earlier. It is discussed for instance by Montesquieu, Bernier, Adam Smith, and Hegel (see, for instance, &amp;quot;Introduction,&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;The Oriental World&amp;quot; in Hegel&#039;s &#039;&#039;Philosophy of History&#039;&#039;, 1956). Also see the historical reviews in Venturi, &amp;quot;The History of the Concept of &#039;Oriental Despotism&#039; in Europe&amp;quot; (1963); P. Anderson, &#039;&#039;Lineages of the Absolute State&#039;&#039; (1974); and B. Chandra, &amp;quot;Karl Marx, his Theories of Asian Societies, and Colonial Review&amp;quot; (1981).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
71. This idea, too, had its forerunners. Possibly Marx got the idea from Karl Ritter, his professor of geography at Berlin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
72. Marx and Engels, &#039;&#039;Selected Correspondence&#039;&#039; (1975).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
73. Marx and Engels considered other factors as well, and it is fair to say that their analysis remained speculative. I believe that Engels withdrew from the idea of &amp;quot;Oriental despotism&amp;quot; in late life. See the discussion of this topic in P. Anderson, &#039;&#039;Lineages of the Absolute State&#039;&#039; (1974); Blaut, &amp;quot;Colonialism and the Rise of Capitalism&amp;quot; (1989); and B. Chandra, &amp;quot;Karl Marx, His Theories of Asian Societies, and Colonial Rule&amp;quot; (1981).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
74. See Laibman, &amp;quot;Modes of Production and Theories of Transition&amp;quot; (1984), and Bailey and Llobera, &#039;&#039;The Asiatic Mode of Production&#039;&#039; (1981).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
75. Weber, &#039;&#039;The Agrarian Sociology of Ancient Civilizations&#039;&#039; (1976), pp. 84, 131, 157, &#039;&#039;The Religion of China&#039;&#039; (1951), pp. 16, 21, 25, and &amp;quot;The Origin of Seigneurial Proprietorship,&amp;quot; part 1, chap. 3, esp. pp. 56-57 in &#039;&#039;General Economic History&#039;&#039; (1981). Also see McNeill, &#039;&#039;Plagues and Peoples&#039;&#039; (1976), pp. 93, 207, 259.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
76. Weber, &#039;&#039;The Agrarian Sociology of Ancient Civilizations&#039;&#039; (1976), pp. 157-158. Also, on p. 84: &amp;quot;The basis of the economy (in Egypt) was irrigation, for this was the crucial factor in all exploitation of land resources. Every new settlement demanded construction of a canal ... Now canal construction is necessarily a large-scale operation, demanding some sort of collective social organization; it is very different from the relatively individualistic activity of clearing virgin forest. Here then is the fundamental economic cause for the overwhelmingly dominant position of the monarchy in Mesopotamia (and) Egypt.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
77. Wittfogel, &#039;&#039;Oriental Despotism&#039;&#039; (1957).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
78. See, for instance, Denevan, &#039;&#039;The Aboriginal Cultural Geography of the Llanos de Mojos of Bolivia&#039;&#039; (1966), and &amp;quot;Hydraulic Agriculture in the American Tropics&amp;quot; (1982), on ancient drained-field or raised-field agriculture in the tropics; Golson, &amp;quot;No Room at the Top: Agricultural Intensification in the New Guinea Highlands&amp;quot; (1977), on ancient drainage in highland New Guinea; Doolittle, &#039;&#039;Canal Irrigation in Prehistoric Mexico&#039;&#039; (1990), on drainage and early agriculture in Mexico; Harrison and Turner &#039;&#039;Pre-Hispanic Maya Agriculture&#039;&#039; (1978), on early drainage in the Maya lowlands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
79. Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), pp. 8-9.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
80. Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties&#039;&#039; (1985), pp. 12-13, 27-28, 36, 42-3, 53, 59, 99, 102, 137.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
81. Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties&#039;&#039; (1985), p. 11. Also see pp. 41, 123, 132.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
82. Mann, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986). Also see his essay, &amp;quot;European Development: Approaching a Historical Explanation&amp;quot; (1988).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
83. Mann, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986), p. 94.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
84. Mann, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986), p. 179.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
85. The fact that Mann attributes the ancient European takeoff mainly to chariot warfare and iron-plow rainfall-farming, yet concedes that both innovations were initiated by Middle Easterners themselves, suggests to me that Mann&#039;s fundamental causal reasoning centers on the notion of European rationality: regardless of who invented these things, the Europeans put the things to work. That this Weberian notion is indeed basic for Mann will be demonstrated later in this chapter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
86. Bray, &#039;&#039;Agriculture&#039;&#039;, vol. 6, part 2, of Needham and collaborators, &#039;&#039;Science and Civilization in China&#039;&#039; (1984).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
87. Blaut, &amp;quot;Two Views of Diffusion&amp;quot; (1977).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
88. Mann, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986), pp. 247, 406, 408, 412, 504-510, 520, 530, 539-540.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
89. Mann, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986), p. 509.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
90. Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties&#039;&#039; (1985), p. 99.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
91. Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties&#039;&#039; (1985), p. 110.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
92. Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), p. 10.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
93. Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), p. 47.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
94. Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), p. 8. Jones makes the common error of assuming that productivity per worker is low in irrigated agriculture in comparison with unirrigated agriculture. This is not the case. Even with draft animals, medieval peasant production per worker was not high. And draft animals are used in irrigated farming, abundantly so in some Asian wet-rice farming systems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
95. Mann, &amp;quot;European Development&amp;quot; (1988), p. 10, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986), p. 406; Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), pp. 90, 227; Crone, &#039;&#039;Pre-Industrial Societies&#039;&#039; (1989), p. 150; McNeill, &#039;&#039;Plagues and Peoples&#039;&#039; (1976), p. 295.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
96. Mann, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986, chap. 5). Mann in fact builds a theory of ancient warfare upon the basis of this sort of calculation, here also ignoring the fact that armies then as now provision themselves and their animals on the route of march.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
97. Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), chap. 2 and elsewhere. Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties&#039;&#039; (1985), p. 132, makes the same claim, citing Jones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
98. Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties&#039;&#039; (1985), p. 111; Jones &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), pp. 90, 105, 107, 226-227; Mann, &amp;quot;European Development: Approaching a Historical Explanation&amp;quot; (1988), p. 10; Mann, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986), p. 406.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
99. Levy-Bruhl, &#039;&#039;How Natives Think&#039;&#039; (1966).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100. See, for example, Boas, &#039;&#039;The Mind of Primitive Man&#039;&#039; (1938); Radin, &#039;&#039;Primitive Man as Philosopher&#039;&#039; (1927); M. Mead, &#039;&#039;Growing Up in New Guinea&#039;&#039; (1930).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
101. Stocking, &#039;&#039;Victorian Anthropology&#039;&#039; (1987), p. 59; Bowler, &#039;&#039;The Invention of Progress&#039;&#039; (1989), p. 66; Whitman &amp;quot;From Philology to Anthropology in Mid-Nineteenth-Century Germany&amp;quot; (1984); Bernal, &#039;&#039;Black Athena&#039;&#039;, vol. 1 (1987); Said, &#039;&#039;Orientalism&#039;&#039; (1978). A recent expression of this theory came in a Soviet debate about &amp;quot;Oriental despotism&amp;quot; (Lelekov, &amp;quot;Round-Table: State and Law in the Ancient Orient,&amp;quot; 1978). L. Lelekov, a historian, claimed that words meaning &amp;quot;freedom&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;right&amp;quot; were basic in the original Indo-European language or languages but not in Near Eastern languages, and asserted that this must have affected &amp;quot;social thinking&amp;quot; (p. 190). This contention was refuted by the philologist V. Ivanov (p. 193).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
102. See Dalal, &amp;quot;The Racism of Jung&amp;quot; (1988). In Jung&#039;s work, see in particular &#039;&#039;Psychological Types&#039;&#039; (1971) (for instance: &amp;quot;(If) we go right back to primitive psychology, we find absolutely no trace of the concept of the individual,&amp;quot; p. 10); &#039;&#039;Memories, Dreams, Reflections&#039;&#039; (1963), and &amp;quot;The Dreamlike World of India,&amp;quot; in &#039;&#039;Civilization in Transition&#039;&#039; (1927). See also the 1954 work by Jung&#039;s disciple Erich Neumann, &#039;&#039;The Origins and History of Consciousness&#039;&#039; (for instance: &amp;quot;The evolution of consciousness as a form of creative evolution is the peculiar achievement of Western man ... The creative character of consciousness is a central feature of the cultural canon of the West ... In stationary cultures, or in primitive societies where the original features of human culture are still preserved, the earliest stages of man&#039;s psychology predominate,&amp;quot; pp. xviii-xxix).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
103. Piaget, &#039;&#039;Psychology and Epistemology&#039;&#039; (1971), p. 61.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
104. See, for example, Werner and Kaplan, &#039;&#039;Symbol Formation&#039;&#039; (1964).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
105. See the first 16 volumes (through 1985) of &#039;&#039;The Journal of Cross-Cultural Psychology&#039;&#039; for a great many examples of this phenomenon. For this period something like one-tenth of all the empirical articles in this U.S. journal were studies by white Southern Africans purporting to show the cognitive inferiority of black Africans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
106. Rogers, &#039;&#039;The Diffusion of Innovations&#039;&#039; (1962); Rogers and Shoemaker, &#039;&#039;Communication of Innovations&#039;&#039; (1971), pp. 187-191; McClelland, &#039;&#039;The Achieving Society&#039;&#039; (1961); Hagen, &#039;&#039;On the Theory of Social Change&#039;&#039; (1962) and &amp;quot;A Framework for Analyzing Economic and Political Change,&amp;quot; in Brookings Institution, ed., &#039;&#039;Development of the Emerging Countries: An Agenda for Research&#039;&#039; (1962), pp. 1-39. I have cited only the initial statements: much literature emerged from these works.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
107. S. Marglin, &amp;quot;Losing Touch: The Cultural Conditions of Worker Accommodation and Resistance,&amp;quot; in F. and S. Marglin, eds., &#039;&#039;Dominating knowledge: Development, Culture, and Resistance&#039;&#039; (1990).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
108. Sack, &#039;&#039;Conceptions of Space in Social Thought&#039;&#039; (1980). Geographers prominent in the diffusion paradigm discussed here are L. Brown (&#039;&#039;The Diffusion of Innovations&#039;&#039;, 1981) and P. Gould (&#039;&#039;Spatial Diffusion&#039;&#039;, 1969). On peasant traditionalism in relation to natural hazards, see G. White, ed., &#039;&#039;Natural Hazards&#039;&#039; (1974), as an example of the abundant literature. I criticize these and other arguments about non-Western nonrationality in Blaut, &amp;quot;Two Views of Diffusion&amp;quot; (1977), &amp;quot;Diffusionism: A Unitarian Critique&amp;quot; (1987a), and &amp;quot;Natural Mapping&amp;quot; (1991).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
109. In the field of education in the United States the dominant standardized college entrance tests (SAT and ACT) are skewed by culture-specific and sex-specific internal (as well as situational) characteristics, such that women do more poorly than men although they actually perform at higher levels in terms of university grades, while the ACT and SAT test scores of Latinos (African-Americans have not yet been studied in this way), which are very low, have no correlation whatever with their performance in college. Thus the tests effectively minimize female and minority college attendance. Why the tests are almost universally used, even so, is a fascinating question. The same biases are so prominent in IQ testing that such tests have been barred as diagnostic instruments in California schools. The &amp;quot;primitive mind&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;primitive languages&amp;quot; biases sometimes combine, as in U.S. debates about the so-called &amp;quot;English-only&amp;quot; issue and about the question whether non-European literature deserves to be included in the college curriculum along with European literature. In Boston not long ago, 30% of Hispanic children aged six to eight were not attending elementary school because their inability to speak English had been judged to be evidence of mental retardation, and Boston claimed not to have sufficient resources to educate these children in &amp;quot;special schools.&amp;quot; Testing in general in U.S. education remains very racist.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110. Rorty, &#039;&#039;Philosophy and the Mirror of Nature&#039;&#039; (1980), and earlier works by Dewey (for instance &#039;&#039;The Quest for Certainty&#039;&#039;, 1929), Whitehead (for instance, &#039;&#039;Modes of Thought&#039;&#039;, 1938), and G. H. Mead (for instance, &#039;&#039;Philosophy of the Act&#039;&#039;, 1938).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
111. This is a general assessment. Some anthropologists continue to maintain either the &amp;quot;primitive mind&amp;quot; doctrine or the closely related &amp;quot;traditional mind&amp;quot; doctrine. An example of the latter is George Foster&#039;s well-known and influential book &#039;&#039;Traditional Cultures&#039;&#039; (1962), of the former, Hallpike&#039;s &#039;&#039;The Foundations of Primitive Thought&#039;&#039; (1979). For a critique, see Schweder, &amp;quot;Cultural Psychology: What Is It?&amp;quot; (1990).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
112. On the question of Weber&#039;s use of &amp;quot;rationality,&amp;quot; its basal status in his theorizing, and yet its uncertain definition and provenance, see, for instance: Cohen&#039;s introduction to the 1981 ed. of Weber&#039;s &#039;&#039;General Economic History&#039;&#039; (1981), pp. xxv-xxvii; Löwith, &#039;&#039;Max Weber and Karl Marx&#039;&#039; (1982), pp. 40-42, 53-54, n. 49; Freund, &#039;&#039;The Sociology of Max Weber&#039;&#039; (1968), pp. 140-149. In Weber, see &#039;&#039;General Economic History&#039;&#039; (1981), chaps. 29, 30, &#039;&#039;The Protestant Ethic and the Spirit of Capitalism&#039;&#039; (1958), pp. 13-31, 59-60, 79, 118-120, 191, n. 19, 265, n. 31, &#039;&#039;The Religion of China&#039;&#039; (1951), chap. 8, &#039;&#039;The Religion of India&#039;&#039; (1967), p. 387, and other works.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
113. Weber, &#039;&#039;General Economic History&#039;&#039; (1981), p. 161. Also see pp. 339, 355-368. Weber makes a large number of comments about the irrationality of Asians.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
114. Weber, &#039;&#039;Economy and Society&#039;&#039;, vol. 2 (1968), pp. 1212-1374.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
115. Typical of Jones&#039;s method is to find some objectionable feature of very early Asian society, compare it with some pleasing feature of modern, post-industrial-revolution European society, and then treat both features as though they were permanent characteristics of the respective societies, giving a picture of awful primitiveness to Asians and marvelous modernity to Europeans thereby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
116. &amp;quot;Frankish feudalism, in many ways proto-typical of later feudalism, was ... a mixture of the very, very old, deep-rooted drift of &#039;European&#039; peasant society and of the brand new the opportunistic, the &#039;un-European,&#039;&amp;quot; Mann, &amp;quot;European Development&amp;quot; (1988), p. 16.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
117. Mann, &amp;quot;European Development&amp;quot; (1988), p. 17. Also see his &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986), for instance pp. 190, 195, 213, 377, 404, 412, 510. (&amp;quot;At the end of all these processes stood one organic, medium-sized, wet-soil island state, perfectly situated for take-off: Great Britain,&amp;quot; p. 510.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
118. Mann, &amp;quot;European Development&amp;quot; (1988), pp. 8-9, 11-12, 15-18 and &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986), pp. 377-378, 397-398, 402-408, 412, 500-510. Also, on Europe&#039;s rationality and its historical significance, see McNeill, &#039;&#039;Plagues and Peoples&#039;&#039; (1976), pp. 41, 97, 106-107, 236, 238, 249, 256, 259, 264.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
119. See P. Anderson, &#039;&#039;Passages from Antiquity to Feudalism&#039;&#039; (1974), part 3; Finley, &#039;&#039;The Use and Abuse of History&#039;&#039; (1975), chap. 6; Aston and Philipn, &#039;&#039;The Brenner Debate&#039;&#039; (1985), pp. 32-33, 42-51, 59, 63n, 214-215, 234-236, 306-316.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
120. White, &#039;&#039;Medieval Technology and Social Change&#039;&#039; (1962), p. 38); also McNeill, &#039;&#039;Plagues and Peoples&#039;&#039; (1976), p. 234.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
121. White, &#039;&#039;Medieval Technology and Social Change&#039;&#039; (1962), p. 54.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
122. Kosambi, &#039;&#039;Ancient India&#039;&#039; (1969), p. 89; R. S. Sharma, &#039;&#039;Light on Early Indian Society and Economy&#039;&#039; (1966), p. 57.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
123. White, &#039;&#039;Medieval Technology and Social Change&#039;&#039; (1962), p. 44.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
124. White, &#039;&#039;Medieval Technology and Social Change&#039;&#039; (1962), p. 56; McNeill, &#039;&#039;Plagues and Peoples&#039;&#039; (1976), p. 237.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
125. See C. T. Smith, &#039;&#039;An Historical Geography of Western Europe&#039;&#039; (1967), p. 203; Darby, &#039;&#039;The Domesday Geography of Eastern England&#039;&#039; (1952).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
126. Orwin and Orwin, &#039;&#039;The Open Fields&#039;&#039; (1967), chap. 3; C. T. Smith, &#039;&#039;An Historical Geography of Western Europe&#039;&#039; (1967), chap. 4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
127. White, &#039;&#039;Medieval Technology and Social Change&#039;&#039; (1962), p. 57.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
128. White, &#039;&#039;Medieval Technology and Social Change&#039;&#039; (1962), p. 67.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
129. White, &#039;&#039;Medieval Technology and Social Change&#039;&#039; (1962), p. 68.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130. Bray, &#039;&#039;Science and Civilization in China&#039;&#039;, vol. 6, part 2, &#039;&#039;Agriculture&#039;&#039; (1984), pp. 304-328.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
131. White, &#039;&#039;Medieval Technology and Social Change&#039;&#039; (1962), p. 76.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
132. White, &#039;&#039;Machina Ex Deo&#039;&#039; (1968). See in particular the essay—quite a famous one—called &amp;quot;The Historical Roots of Our Ecological Crisis&amp;quot; (chap. 5).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
133. White, &amp;quot;The Historical Roots of Our Ecological Crisis.&amp;quot; In White, &#039;&#039;Machina Ex Deo&#039;&#039; (1967), p. 85.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
134. White, &#039;&#039;Machina Ex Deo&#039;&#039; (1967), p. 90.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
135. Needham et al., &#039;&#039;Science and Civilization in China&#039;&#039; (1954-1984).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
136. Some historians today simply ignore this evidence and repeat the old notions about China&#039;s lack of technological prowess. See, for example, Roberts, &#039;&#039;The Hutchinson History of the World&#039;&#039; (1987), pp. 493-495, 502.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
137. Needham et al., &#039;&#039;Science and Civilization in China&#039;&#039;, vol. 4, part 2 (1965), chap. 27.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
138. Needham et al., &#039;&#039;Science and Civilization in China&#039;&#039; vol. 4, part 2 (1965), p. 33). Arnold Pacey places the innovation in Korea. See Pacey&#039;s &#039;&#039;Technology in World History&#039;&#039; (1990), p. 56.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
139. See, for example, Lopez, &amp;quot;Hard Times and Investment in Culture&amp;quot; (1953), Thorndyke, &amp;quot;Renaissance or Renaissance?&amp;quot; (1943).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
140. Cipolla, &#039;&#039;Guns, Sails, Empires&#039;&#039; (1965), p. 106.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
141. Cipolla, &#039;&#039;Guns, Sails, Empires&#039;&#039; (1965), pp. 108-109.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
142. See, for instance, White, &#039;&#039;Machina Ex Deo&#039;&#039; (1968); Mann, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986), &amp;quot;European Development&amp;quot; (1988); Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties&#039;&#039; (1985); Baechler, &amp;quot;The Origins of Modernity&amp;quot; (1988); K. F. Werner, &amp;quot;Political and Social Structures of the West&amp;quot; (1988); and Hallam, &amp;quot;The Medieval Social Picture&amp;quot; (1975).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
143. Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties&#039;&#039; (1985), p. 135.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
144. Mann, &amp;quot;European Development&amp;quot; (1988), p. 12.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
145. Hallam, &amp;quot;The Medieval Social Picture&amp;quot; (1975), p. 49.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
146. K. F. Werner. &amp;quot;Political and Social Structures of the West&amp;quot; (1988), p. 172. This German medievalist argues that the central force underlying the &amp;quot;miracle&amp;quot; was Christianity. He refers here to the Catholic church, to the body of doctrine (Catholic and later also Protestant), to the social and political institutions that were influenced both by church and by doctrine, and to the faith of European people, which, in Werner&#039;s opinion, had much to do with their innovativeness, their sense of &amp;quot;restlessness,&amp;quot; their rationality. Werner acknowledges that many causal factors were at work in bringing about the rise of Europe, and he does not hesitate to claim a role for the natural environment. But it is clear that his theory is primarily based on religion. And beyond this, one senses that this scholar himself may see the hand of a Christian god in the rise of Christian Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Werner first of all makes a strong case to the effect that European history maintained a continuity of institutions, and of progress, from the time of the Roman Empire down through the Middle Ages, and that the late Empire established both ecclesiastical and lay institutions which continued down through the Middle Ages and gave that era its character. Chief among the institutions is the Catholic church. Werner wishes to depict the church as having a determining influence on history from the time of its founding. He sees the rise of Europe as a process that was guided throughout by the Christian religion, as institution and doctrine. If Werner were simply presenting a theory of history that accords religion a dominant role, I would not be discussing his views in this book. I would agree that its role has been underemphasized by historians, conservative no less than Marxist. The reason I deal with Werner&#039;s views is that he makes clear his belief that it is not religion in general but the Christian religion which played the historically efficacious role in the European &amp;quot;miracle.&amp;quot; Werner&#039;s views are distinctly Eurocentric. Perhaps the key comment is the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(If) we had to choose one word that, by itself alone, were capable of expressing an essential factor in what we understand by the &amp;quot;European miracle,&amp;quot; we would choose the philosophical term ... &amp;quot;unrest&amp;quot; ... &amp;quot;restlessness&amp;quot; ... Ruhelosigkeit ... Whilst Asia and its wisdom and, in its train, the great religions and philosophies, strive toward the art of ... seeking out the centre of the soul and of the world, and of resting in God, of having arrived, the European of the European miracle is a man who is always ready to take off once more, once he has arrived ... But where must be sought the causa causans of this mentality? The spur to anxiety is to be seen in the pangs of sin ... in the search for pardon and grace. The importance of the deliverance of the soul gave an hitherto unheard-of prominence to the individual, independent of his social rank, the individual who ... (does not abandon himself) to destiny ... (The) sense of responsibility seems to me to be one of the strengths of the Europeans that are to accomplish the &amp;quot;miracle&amp;quot; (p. 185).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus: Europe&#039;s religion, Christianity, instills a kind of mentality in &amp;quot;European man&amp;quot; which explains the basic source of the &amp;quot;European miracle.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The objection to this is the same one we put forward to all of the notions about Europe&#039;s supposedly unique &amp;quot;rationality.&amp;quot; Whether that putative trait comes from religion (Werner) or from the post-Neolithic European tribes (Mann) or from any other source, the basic objection is: how can you really justify a statement that makes Europeans brighter, better, bolder than non-Europeans, if you accept the fundamental axiom that all human communities have the same ration of mind as all others? It is one thing, and indeed an unexceptionable thing, to credit the human mind with prime causality in culture change, through the innovation of social, technical, and purely intellectual things. But it is something quite different, and quite suspect, to credit the minds of human beings from some communities—and not others—with all of these qualities of innovativeness, restlessness, sense of responsibility, intellectual eagerness, respect for others, and so on, qualities usually summed up in the word &amp;quot;rationality.&amp;quot; Europeans are rational but so too are non-Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
147. See, for example, Palmer, &#039;&#039;Atlas of Modern History&#039;&#039; (1957); Bjørklund, Hølmhoe, Røhr, and Lie, &#039;&#039;Historical Atlas of the World&#039;&#039; (1970); and Kinder and Hilgemann, &#039;&#039;The Anchor Atlas of World History&#039;&#039;, vol. 1 (1974).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
148. I discuss this in &#039;&#039;The National Question&#039;&#039; (1987b).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
149. Padgug, &amp;quot;The Problem of the Theory of Slavery and Slave Society&amp;quot; (1976).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
150. Baechler, &amp;quot;The Origins of Modernity&amp;quot; (1988).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151. Baechler, in &amp;quot;The Origins of Modernity&amp;quot; (1988), p. 39, suggests that we should &amp;quot;juxtapose the barbarous Europe of the Halstatt period (about 600 B.C.) ... and Africa on the verge of colonization in the nineteenth century (A.D.).&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
152. Baechler finds a true aristocracy also in Japan but believes that Japan failed to emulate Europe for various other reasons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
153. Baechler considers it quite unremarkable that the political chaos of the Dark Ages gave way smoothly to strong states in Europe. &amp;quot;Inevitably&amp;quot; there will be the &amp;quot;reconstitution of larger polities&amp;quot; (Baechler, &amp;quot;The Origins of Modernity&amp;quot; 1988, p. 50). But it is equally inevitable for India that the political chaos of 1000 years ago will not be cured and permanently, thereafter, the &amp;quot;polity ... is not a reality in India&amp;quot; (p. 45).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
154. Baechler, &amp;quot;The Origins of Modernity&amp;quot; (1988), p. 59.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
155. Baechler, &amp;quot;The Origins of Modernity&amp;quot; (1988), p. 53.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
156. Baechler, &amp;quot;The Origins of Modernity&amp;quot; (1988), p. 56.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
157. Baechler, &amp;quot;The Origins of Modernity&amp;quot; (1988), p. 45.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
158. Baechler, &amp;quot;The Origins of Modernity&amp;quot; (1988), p. 53.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
159. Godelier, &#039;&#039;Sobre el Modo de Producción Asiático&#039;&#039; (1969), p. 58.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
160. Brenner, &amp;quot;The Origins of Capitalist Development: A Critique of Neo-Smithian Marxism&amp;quot; (1977); &amp;quot;Agrarian Class Structure and Economic Development in Pre-Industrial Europe&amp;quot; (1985, originally published 1976), and &amp;quot;The Agrarian Roots of European Capitalism&amp;quot; (1985). After the 1976 article first appeared in the journal, &#039;&#039;Past and Present&#039;&#039;, a series of critiques was published in that journal, and Brenner replied in 1982 with the article, &amp;quot;The Agrarian Roots of European Capitalism.&amp;quot; A volume, &#039;&#039;The Brenner Debate: Agrarian Class Structure and Economic Development in Pre-Industrial Europe&#039;&#039;, containing the two &#039;&#039;Past and Present&#039;&#039; articles and several critiques, and edited by Aston and Philip, appeared in 1985.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
161. In my opinion the popularity of this thin theory is due principally to two things. First, put forward as a Marxist view, grounded in class struggle, it proves to be, on inspection, a theory that is fairly conventional, if somewhat rural in bias. It seems to follows that class-struggle theories lead to conventional conclusions. And secondly, Brenner uses his theory (&amp;quot;The Origins of Capitalist Development: A Critique of Neo-Smithian Marxism,&amp;quot; 1977, pp. 77-92) to attack the unpopular &amp;quot;Third-Worldist&amp;quot; perspectives of dependency theory, underdevelopment theory, and in particular three other neo-Marxists—Sweezy, Frank, and Wallerstein—who argue that European colonialism had much to do with the later rise of capitalism. Brenner is a thoroughgoing Eurocentric tunnel historian: non-Europe had no important role in social evolution at any historical period. Unaware that colonialism involves capitalist relations of production—see Chapter 4 below—he claims that the extra-European world merely had commercial effects on Europe, whereas the rise of capitalism was in no way a product of commerce: it took place in the countryside of England and reflected class struggle, not trade. See critiques of Brenner collected in Aston and Philip (1985) by Hilton, Croot and Parker, Wunder, Leroy, Ladurie, Bois, Cooper, and others. Also see Torras, &amp;quot;Class struggle in Catalonia&amp;quot; (1980) and Hoyle, &amp;quot;Tenure and the land market in early modern England: Or a late contribution to the Brenner debate.&amp;quot; (1990).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
162. (1) If only one family member is a wageworker, loss of employment is a disaster. If several are wageworkers, normally some will be earning an income when others are laid off. (2) If we assume an ability to save a certain percentage of income, multiple income earners will provide a larger absolute amount of savings, that is, capital; and the absolute amount of capital can be critical in entrepreneurship. (3) Having kin to borrow from is useful for small-scale entrepreneurship. (4) Kinfolk can supply unpaid labor. These principles are well known in Third World communities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
163. Hajnal, &amp;quot;European Marriage Patterns in Perspective&amp;quot; (1965), pp. 101-146. This paper is one of the most widely cited publications on the subject of demography in the European miracle literature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
164. Hajnal, &amp;quot;European Marriage Patterns in Perspective&amp;quot; (1965), p. 101.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
165. Hajnal, &amp;quot;European Marriage Patterns in Perspective&amp;quot; (1965), p. 134.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
166. Hajnal concedes that he has only contemporary data for non-Europe, but merely suggests that historical data would prove his point even more clearly because modern non-European family patterns, in his view, are changing in the direction of European patterns: are being Europeanized. And when &amp;quot;all the qualifications about the data have been made, there can be no doubt that our original generalization remains&amp;quot; (&amp;quot;European Marriage Patterns in Perspective,&amp;quot; 1965, p. 106).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
167. Stone, &#039;&#039;The Family, Sex and Marriage in England 1500-1800&#039;&#039; (1977), p. 509.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
168. Mann, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986), p. 408; Crone, &#039;&#039;Pre-Industrial Societies&#039;&#039; (1989), p. 152; Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), pp. 15-16; Macfarlane, &#039;&#039;Marriage and Love in England: Modes of Reproduction 1300-1840&#039;&#039; (1986).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
169. Laslett, &amp;quot;The European Family and Early Industrialization&amp;quot; (1989).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
170. Taeuber, &amp;quot;The Families of Chinese Farmers&amp;quot; (1970), pp. 63-86.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
171. See Freedman, &#039;&#039;Chinese Lineage and Society&#039;&#039; (1966), p. 49.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
172. See, for example, Handler &amp;quot;Review of Macfarlane, A., &#039;&#039;Marriage and love in England&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; (1989); Hilton, &amp;quot;Individualism and the English Peasantry&amp;quot; (1980); Kertzer, &amp;quot;The Joint Family Household Revisited: Demographic Constraints and Household Complexity in the European Past&amp;quot; (1989); and Berkner, &amp;quot;The Use and Misuse of Census Data for the Historical Analysis of Family Structures&amp;quot; (1975), and &amp;quot;The Stem Family and the Developmental Cycle of the Peasant Household&amp;quot; (1989).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
173. For instance, G. Lee, &amp;quot;Comparative Perspectives&amp;quot; (1987), p. 65, points out that &amp;quot;(Many) scholars contend that the majority of families in any society are and always have been nuclear, regardless of the cultural elements favoring extended families.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
174. Macfarlane, &#039;&#039;The Origins of English Individualism&#039;&#039; (1978), chap. 1 and &amp;quot;The Cradle of Capitalism&amp;quot; (1988), p. 344.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
175. See, for example, Hilton, &amp;quot;Individualism and the English Peasantry&amp;quot; (1980) and Handler, &amp;quot;Review of Mcfarlane, A., &#039;&#039;Marriage and Love in England&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; (1989).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
176. &amp;quot;(It) seems likely that (primitive peoples&#039;) patterns of behavior in ... respect (to fertility and mortality) bore a strong resemblance to those which can be observed in many animals,&amp;quot; Wrigley, &#039;&#039;Population and History&#039;&#039; (1969), p. 37. Wrigley is writing about present-day hunting-gathering-fishing peoples. A &amp;quot;description of the relationship between animal social conventions and the regulation of animal population numbers&amp;quot; is &amp;quot;a convenient point of departure for the study of primitive man&amp;quot; (p. 37).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
177. Crone, &#039;&#039;Pre-Industrial Societies&#039;&#039; (1989), p. 153; Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties: The Causes and Consequences of the Rise of the West&#039;&#039; (1985), pp. 130-132; Jones, &#039;&#039;The European Miracle&#039;&#039; (1981), pp. 3, 13-15, 217-19, 226-227, 231, and elsewhere; Laslett, &amp;quot;The European Family and Early Industrialization&amp;quot; (1989), pp. 235-240; Macfarlane, &amp;quot;The Cradle of Capitalism&amp;quot; (1988), chap. 14; Mann, &#039;&#039;The Sources of Social Power&#039;&#039; (1986), p. 408.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
178. Hall, &#039;&#039;Powers and Liberties&#039;&#039; (1985), pp. 130-131.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
179. Laslett, &amp;quot;The European Family and Early Industrialization&amp;quot; (1989), p. 237.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
180. See Croot and Parker, &amp;quot;Agrarian Class Structure and the Development of Capitalism: France and England Compared&amp;quot; (1985). This essay, and others in the Aston and Philipin book, &#039;&#039;The Brenner Debate: Agrarian Class Structure and Economic Development in Pre-Industrial Europe&#039;&#039; (1985), discuss in detail the low level of landownership in medieval Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
181. Stone, &#039;&#039;The Family, Sex and Marriage in England, 1500-1800&#039;&#039; (1977), pp. 53-54.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
182. Stone, &#039;&#039;The Family, Sex and Marriage in England, 1500-1800&#039;&#039; (1977), p. 652.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= CHAPTER 3: Before 1492 =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this chapter and the following one I will argue three broad propositions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Prior to 1492, the progress toward modernization and capitalism which was taking place in parts of Europe was also taking place in parts of Asia and Africa. The basic process was hemispheric in scale. It was a process of change out of a precapitalist, agrarian form of class-structured society and toward a primitive form of capitalism. There was nothing teleological about this process; it was not some sort of evolutionary striving toward a foreordained goal, capitalist society. Merely, I argue, whatever happened in Europe also happened in other parts of the Eastern Hemisphere. I will use the word &amp;quot;feudalism&amp;quot; to describe the class-structured agrarian societies of Africa and Asia as well as Europe (and will give my reasons for using this word in this way). The later, emerging formation I will call &amp;quot;protocapitalism.&amp;quot; In 1492, it is likely that more than half of each continent in the Eastern Hemisphere was basically dominated by a feudal social formation. Protocapitalist centers were rising in various parts of all three continents, and were interconnected in a single web or network, stretching from western Europe to southern Africa to eastern Asia.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. This hemisphere-wide system began to break apart shortly after 1492, because of the wealth and power acquired by Europeans in America. America was conquered by Europeans, not by Asians or Africans, because of Europe&#039;s location on the globe, not because of any European superiority in level or rate of development or &amp;quot;potential&amp;quot; for development.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The massive flow of wealth into Europe from colonial accumulation in America and later in Asia and Africa was the one basic force that explains the fact that Europe became transformed rapidly into a capitalist society, and the complementary fact that Asian and African protocapitalist centers began to decline first in relative and then in absolute importance. Development began in Europe and underdevelopment began elsewhere. Many processes internal to Europe were important causes of change, of development, in that continent, but the one basic process, which ignited and then continuously fueled the transformation, was the wealth from colonialism.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first proposition is the topic of the present chapter; the second and third are the topics of Chapter 4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I will not and cannot demonstrate the truth of these propositions. I will simply present a substantial amount of evidence that supports them, and will show that the propositions fit in with other known facts in a coherent theory—a theory that, I suggest, makes sense. That is as far toward &amp;quot;demonstration of truth&amp;quot; as I can go, given the evidence of which I have knowledge and the amount of detailed argumentation that can be squeezed into this chapter. Some parts of this argument (such as the pre-1492 development of Africa) will theorize well beyond the available evidence, because, in my view, the facts needed to confirm or disconfirm these parts of the argument have not yet been obtained, have not yet been sought with sufficient diligence by diffusionist scholarship. For the most part, however, the theorizing will be grounded in strong empirical evidence. In addition to this evidence, there is the weight of evidence presented in the last chapter against various opposing theories, those that deny the importance of non-Europe before and after 1492. This has given us, so to speak, a level playing field for considering the issues to be discussed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Medieval Landscapes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before 1492, the various civilizations of Asia, Africa, and Europe were very different from one another in many ways, but they were very like one another in other ways. I believe that the ways in which they were different did not have significance for cultural evolution. In Chapter 2 I outlined various theories that claim that particular differences between Europe and other civilizations do explain the unique rise of Europe, and I tried to show that these theories are unconvincing. In the following discussion I will deal with some parts of culture that clearly are crucial for cultural evolution, and I will try to show that the patterns found in medieval Europe were not significantly different from the patterns found in other civilizations. I will argue that modes of production, class structures, systems of spatial exchange, and urbanization were broadly similar across many civilizations, were evolving in much the same way, and to some extent were parts of a common hemisphere-wide process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During the century or so preceding 1492, most of humanity lived in class-stratified agricultural societies. The great majority of people in these societies were peasant farmers, producing their own subsistence and forced to deliver a significant share of their output (or labor, or cash income) to an elite, or ruling class, a class that usually held claim to the land and almost always held both formal and real power over the peasants. What I have described here is a mode of production, that is, a complex of traits including material resources such as land, material culture (tools and the like), labor employed in production and distribution, social rules governing access to material resources and distribution of the output, and some related traits. For medieval Europe this mode of production is called &amp;quot;feudal.&amp;quot; It is part of a larger concept, &amp;quot;feudal society.&amp;quot; One of the important features of European feudal society was the nature of states and political power. Another was the culture of the landlord class, with its titles, its chivalry, and the rest. A third was the importance, in some regions and epochs, of serfdom. But underlying (or at any rate accompanying) these features was the general fact of feudalism as a mode of production, a landlord-peasant, class-stratified, agricultural society in which the landlord class was fed by surplus extracted (always with some degree of force) from peasant producers. This mode of production, with variations, was also a basic feature of almost all of the other class-stratified agricultural societies of the Eastern Hemisphere.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The discussion in this section of the chapter mainly deals with the Eastern Hemisphere. The Western Hemisphere will be discussed separately in Chapter 4.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; I will therefore use the term &amp;quot;feudal mode of production&amp;quot; for all such societies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Others have used the term in this way but have encountered various important objections. Those scholars who insist that the peculiarly European features are, indeed, the evolutionary engines of change will naturally reject the description of other sorts of society as &amp;quot;feudal.&amp;quot; Max Weber, for instance, thought that European feudal estates were unique and were crucial causes (or conditions) of progress. Those Marxists who consider serfdom to be a crucial feature in evolutionary terms would not want to use the term &amp;quot;feudalism&amp;quot; for societies that did not have serfdom (although many outside of Europe did).&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Dobbs, &#039;&#039;Studies in the Development of Capitalism&#039;&#039; (1947).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Samir Amin rejects this broad usage of the term &amp;quot;feudalism,&amp;quot; on the grounds that it tends to require of us that we use European feudalism as a model against which to measure other similar societies in other continents. Therefore, he prefers the term &amp;quot;tributary&amp;quot; to the term &amp;quot;feudal,&amp;quot; arguing, correctly, that the various forms of surplus extraction in this mode of production (tax and rent; cash, labor, and product) can be assimilated to the concept of tribute paying.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Amin, &#039;&#039;Unequal Development&#039;&#039; (1976) and &amp;quot;Modes of Production: History and Unequal Development&amp;quot; (1985).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; My view is that Eurocentric historians do not have a copyright on the term &amp;quot;feudalism&amp;quot; and so it is not only valid but also in a sense just to use this term for the mode of production wherever we observe it, in any continent and any social formation. There remain other objections. What of the small urbanized societies found here and there across the map during this period? We will come to this matter in a later section of the chapter. How should we describe societies that are very aberrant from the basic landlord-peasant model? What about class-stratified pastoral societies? What about the class-stratified societies in which there is kinship linkage between producing class and ruling class? These matters of definition are important and I will try to deal with them in the context of the discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are many unanswered questions about the origins and evolution both of agriculture and of the feudal mode of production. Until recently most scholars believed that agriculture, class stratification, and many other attributes of civilization had originated in the ancient Near and Middle East. (We discussed this in Chapter 1.) Given this set of propositions, combined with explicit and implicit beliefs about the cultural backwardness and unprogressiveness of Asians and Africans, it was almost axiomatic that the agricultural landscapes of feudal Europe must have attained a qualitatively higher level of development—or, alternatively, must have had greater potential for rapid change—than those of many parts, and perhaps all parts, of medieval Asia and Africa. It seemed logical to believe that agriculture as such was still in the process of diffusing outward in some peripheral parts of the hemisphere during that period. For instance, as we noted in Chapter 2, historians tended to believe that most of southern Africa was &amp;quot;preeagricultural&amp;quot; even in early modern times. Scholars speculated, and legitimately so given the basic model, as to the dates when agriculture in general, and each form of domesticated plant and animal in particular, had first reached each peripheral region in the general diffusion process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This model began to crumble fairly recently. Very early dates for the Agricultural (Neolithic) Revolution began to appear for parts of Southeast Asia, dates of perhaps 9,000 years ago (the generally accepted idea is that agriculture in the Middle East is 10-12,000 years old). Pottery seemed to be just about that old in northeastern Asia and Japan. Soon afterward, very early dates for agriculture emerged for India, New Guinea, and other regions. Today, although the majority view still seems to be that agriculture first arose in the Middle East, very many scholars believe otherwise. Many argue for independent and perhaps simultaneous origins in the Middle East and Southeast Asia; some would add West Africa. But it is also possible that the Agricultural Revolution occurred everywhere more or less at once. By this I mean that the complex of crops, animals, tools, and ideas was being developed in many societies simultaneously (probably over a very long period), and each new trait tended to diffuse rapidly to those other parts of the hemisphere in which such a trait was a useful innovation, in an overall process that I call &amp;quot;criss-cross diffusion.&amp;quot; This process gradually built up an agricultural landscape over a vast region of the hemisphere, extending (with unimportant gaps) across the entire swathe of tropical and midlatitude lands possessing moderately favorably climate and soil.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Kabaker, &amp;quot;A Radiocarbon Chronology Relevant to the Origins of Agriculture&amp;quot; (1977); Megaw, &#039;&#039;Hunters, Gatherers and First Farmers Beyond Europe&#039;&#039; (1977); Vishnu-Mittre, &amp;quot;Origin and History of Agriculture in the Indian Subcontinent&amp;quot; (1978). See the review in Blaut, &amp;quot;Diffusionism: A Uniformitarian Critique.&amp;quot; (1987a).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Blaut, &amp;quot;Diffusionism&amp;quot; (1987a).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In any event, it is now generally accepted that the diffusion of agriculture took place fairly long ago and by the Middle Ages agriculture had reached most of those regions in the Eastern Hemisphere in which environmental conditions are favorable for farming. Agriculture was still spreading at this time, but it could no longer be considered the Agricultural Revolution. Farming had been pushed poleward to a point not far short of its present latitudinal limits. In the Western Hemisphere the northern limit of maize in 1492 was not far south of the present limit of grain cultivation in central Canada. In both hemispheres almost all of the crops and livestock types that are important today had already been domesticated, although varietal improvement was still going on. As a generalization, it can be argued that each agricultural region had by this time selected for itself, from the long list of hemispheric domesticates, the combination of crops and stock best suited to its environmental conditions and cultures; most groups of related domesticated crop forms in any one part of the hemisphere were also known in many other parts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One very dramatic bit of evidence in this matter was the swift spread of Western Hemisphere crops through the Eastern Hemisphere after 1492. This extremely rapid diffusion of maize, cassava, tobacco, sweet potato, white potato, and other crops, and the rapid way in which these domesticates became culturally important, shows how rapidly the diffusion of domesticates would occur when the process was one of the diffusion of previously unknown innovations: we can assume that most Eastern Hemisphere domesticates were no longer diffusing very rapidly. Where agriculture was spreading, it was taking place mainly in peripheral zones such as highlands, some forested regions, and remote islands, as a result mainly of social processes like migration, conquest, and land shortage.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Examples of this process include the eastward movement of the medieval agricultural frontier in the forests of eastern Europe and the reclaiming of swampland in Iraq. Cropland was being expanded in these and other ways in many regions. In addition, it seems certain that some societies that had not previously practiced agriculture were being pushed into smaller or less favorable regions and therefore were turning to agriculture as a means of increasing food production to meet the land shortage.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In the years before 1492, agriculture was practiced, from southern Africa to northern Europe, northern Asia, southeastern Asia, and most regions of the Pacific Ocean, including Hawaii. For the most part, cultures we would describe as &amp;quot;nonagricultural&amp;quot; had chosen not to practice farming; they were not, therefore, &amp;quot;preeagricultural.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See R. Lee, &amp;quot;Art, Science, or Politics? The Crisis in Hunter-Gatherer Studies&amp;quot; (1992).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Probably the same holds true for the more complex forms of agricultural technology. The knowledge of irrigation, the plow, the use of fertilizers, complex rotations (including fallowless rotations), and other features of intensive agriculture had probably diffused by this time to all those parts of the agricultural landscape where farmers found it desirable to use them, either to increase output, to reduce labor requirements, to meet the demand for surplus delivery, or for any cultural reason whatever.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Water-control systems in farming, including irrigation, drainage, broad-based terracing, raised- or drained-field construction, and natural-levee adaptations are probably as old as agriculture itself, because (1) all farmers everywhere know the problem of moisture control (adding moisture when there is deficit; removing moisture when there is a surplus and a danger of root drowning); (2) all of these procedures are initially small-scale actions taken on an individual farm (recall our discussion in Chapter 2 of the fallacies of the &amp;quot;hydraulic theory&amp;quot;); and (3) there is direct archaeological evidence of very ancient (9,000-year-old) drainage systems in New Guinea (Golson, &amp;quot;No room at the top: Agricultural intensification in the New Guinea Highlands,&amp;quot; 1977), and drained- or raised-field systems in tropical America (Denevan, &amp;quot;Hydraulic Agriculture in the American Tropics: Forms, Measures, and Recent Research,&amp;quot; 1982). Thus we can infer the primitivity of irrigation and these other water-management systems: probably they are as old as the Neolithic, along with drainage and raised-field systems. All this shows that intensive technology had already diffused insofar as it was going to do so, and nonadoption reflected something other than lack of information. As we noted in Chapter 2, irrigation systems diffuse as a social process, associated with class society. Concerning the myth that the plow was not used in Africa, see Hopkins, &#039;&#039;An Economic History of West Africa&#039;&#039; (1973) and Onimode, &#039;&#039;Imperialism and Underdevelopment in Nigeria&#039;&#039; (1982). Note that plows are used in tropical agriculture very sparingly—mainly for some operations in rice paddies.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; I would take the argument even a step farther. Throughout most of this landscape the diffusion of significant innovations had gone so far that the productivity of human labor was hardly ever limited by lack of technical knowledge of a kind available to other farmers in some other part of the hemisphere.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In classless societies, I speculate that the bundle of choices concerning crops, tools, field systems, labor input, and the like, led to roughly a common level of output per person, unaffected by differences in environmental quality over a great range of environments. In some areas very extensive systems like shifting cultivation would be used; in others, intensive systems, like wet-rice cultivation, would be used. But the productivity of labor in terms of product per hour input would tend to be about the same in this model for both intensive and extensive systems. This would hold true if two assumptions are accepted: (1) that rapid and thorough diffusion had taken place, and (2) that population was controlled by farming peoples so as to optimize the situation concerning output and leisure time. None of this would be true in a class society, where the constraints on technology and labor use are influenced profoundly by the demands and power of the ruling class.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; But this is speculation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Agricultural societies are not always class stratified. But there is abundant evidence that most agricultural regions across the hemisphere displayed, in this period, a combination of agriculture and the landlord-peasant system of stratification, thus a mode of production I label &amp;quot;feudal.&amp;quot; This point will be contested on two grounds. One of the objections, commonly heard from (some) Marxists, argues that medieval non-European agricultural modes of production were somehow lacking in the potential for change that we associate with the European feudal mode. This argument (the &amp;quot;Asiatic mode of production,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;Oriental despotism,&amp;quot; etc.) was discussed sufficiently in Chapter 2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second difficulty is a matter of the spatial pattern. Where, on the map of the medieval Eastern Hemisphere, do we find class-stratified agricultural societies, and where do we find classless agricultural societies? The answer must be given in two parts. First, we know beyond dispute that the class-stratified mode was dominant in nearly all agricultural regions of Asia, with clear patterns of landlord-peasant conflict. Arguments tend to focus on Africa. But there is little doubt that the landlord-peasant exploitative relation was dominant in much of northeastern Africa (for example, Ethiopia), the Sudanic zone from the Atlantic east beyond Lake Chad, some parts of the Lake Region of East Africa, southeastern Africa around the Zimbabwe imperial zone, and part of coastal East Africa. It is now known, also, that many of the forest-zone and dry-forest-zone states of West and Central Africa (Akan, Yoruba, Congo, and so forth), displayed this mode of production or something very like it, and research on the historical geography of this large region has just, in essence, begun.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See, for example, Kea, &#039;&#039;Settlements, Trade, and Politics in the Seventeenth Century Gold Coast&#039;&#039; (1982); Isichei, &#039;&#039;A History of Nigeria&#039;&#039; (1983); Rodney, &#039;&#039;A History of the Upper Guinea Coast 1545-1800&#039;&#039; (1970); A. Smith, &amp;quot;The Early States of the Central Sudan&amp;quot; (1971); Usman, &#039;&#039;The Transformation of Katsina (1400-1883)&#039;&#039; (1981).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Therefore the map of the feudal mode of production in Africa is very extensive. Second, I would argue (following Samir Amin) that nearly all state-organized societies were class societies, that the medieval state functioned in a tight relationship to the exploitative process and ruling-class politics. More than half of medieval Africa, in terms of area and population, was state-organized and therefore, I reason, more or less class stratified. I conclude, from this very sketchy examination of the medieval spatial patterns of agriculture, technically complex agriculture, and class, that the feudal mode of production dominated more than half of Africa, Europe, and Asia, and some parts of Oceania, in this period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ruling class in feudal societies is, almost everywhere, a landlord class, although the control of land by this class may take any of several legal forms. Some members of this class are bedecked with titles, but the distinction between nobility and gentry is not crucial in evolutionary terms and both forms (as well as others) were widespread across the hemisphere.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Blaut, &amp;quot;Colonialism and the Rise of Capitalism&amp;quot; (1989). It is also true that in all these societies there were parallel high-status groups, clergy, bureaucrats, military people, and so on, but there seems not to have been any case of a large, clearly feudal society—I exclude a few cases of small urbanized power centers in dry, pastoral regions, and a few large cities—in which wealth and status was clearly divorced from land ownership and from the surplus extracted from peasants.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; This class is, after all, self-perpetuating, and it may use inherited titles as a signal of class membership or it may use other devices to the same effect, or both. Indeed, membership in the nontitled gentry may, as in China at various times, improve a family&#039;s chances of retaining ruling-class status and wealth amid the changing winds of state politics. Nor is the distinction critical, in this context, between higher and lower grades of nobility, and between landlords and government officials (who likewise derive their wealth from land). As we discussed in Chapters 1 and 2, there is no substance to the traditional view that the European medieval landlord class somehow was closer to pure private land ownership than were the landlord classes of other places. Marx was wrong in accepting this traditional view, because he knew little about non-European class structures. Weber, likewise, was wrong in drawing a sharp distinction between the supposedly European pattern of seigneurial tenure, with land held firmly by the landlord under some sort of arrangement with higher-order lords and kings, and the &amp;quot;service tenures&amp;quot; which he thought to be characteristic of most other societies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The distinction between hereditary and service tenures is very fuzzy. In Europe, service tenure was the typical form in strict terms (with grants conditional upon pledges of fealty, military support, etc.), but grants tended to become hereditary. Broadly, the same held true in other societies. Holders of fiefs or grants on service tenure might move from fief to fief (or hold a changing portfolio of fiefs), but the important point is that class membership permitted one to hold a fief, and to draw one&#039;s wealth from it (and its occupants), so long as one retained membership in the ruling class. In a crucial sense, property is private so long as an individual or kin group continues to hold valid control, and this was the case in many regions, in spite of periodic upheavals and replacements. But land can be called private in another sense, that of its value in a land market. But this implies a basically (or nearly) capitalist situation, found only in a few highly commercialized rural regions, European and non-European, before 1492.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Apparently such private (saleable) ownership of agricultural land was found mainly near important urban areas, ports, mining areas, etc. See Rawski, &#039;&#039;Agricultural Change and the Peasant Economy of South China&#039;&#039; (1972); Das Gupta, &#039;&#039;Malabar in Asian Trade: 1740-1800&#039;&#039; (1967); Nicholas, &amp;quot;Town and Countryside: Social and Economic Tensions in 14th Century Flanders&amp;quot; (1967-1968); Kea, &#039;&#039;Settlements, Trade, and Politics in the Seventeenth-Century Gold Coast&#039;&#039; (1982); Rodney, &#039;&#039;A History of the Upper Guinea Coast&#039;&#039; (1970); Usman, &#039;&#039;The Transformation of Katsina&#039;&#039; (1981); Sherif, &#039;&#039;Slaves, Spices and Ivory in Zanzibar&#039;&#039; (1987).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The Chinese gentry, the Hindu fief-holders, even the Mughal jagirdars who had been granted fiefs on service tenure and quickly farmed them out, or converted them into private, saleable property, were well along the road to private ownership, and had gone at least as far as their European counterparts.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;On the importance of hereditary fiefs and landed property in Asia, see, for example, Elvin, &#039;&#039;The Pattern of the Chinese Past&#039;&#039; (1973); Sharma, &#039;&#039;Indian Feudalism, c. 300-1200&#039;&#039; (1965); Fei Hsiao-tung, &#039;&#039;China&#039;s Gentry&#039;&#039; (1953); Fu and Li, &#039;&#039;The Sprouts of Capitalistic Factors Within China&#039;s Feudal Society&#039;&#039; (1956); Rawski, &#039;&#039;Agricultural Change and the Peasant Economy of South China&#039;&#039; (1972); Tung, &#039;&#039;An Outline History of China&#039;&#039; (1979); Liceria, &amp;quot;Emergence of Brahmans as Landed Intermediaries in Karnataka, c. A.D. 1000-1300 (1974); Mahalingam, &#039;&#039;Economic Life in the Vijayanagar Empire&#039;&#039; (1951); Hasan, &amp;quot;The Position of the Zamindars in the Mughal Empire (1969); Raychaudhuri, &amp;quot;The Agrarian System of Mughal India&amp;quot; (1965); Yadav, &amp;quot;Secular Land Grants of the Post-Gupta Period and Some Aspects of the Growth of the Feudal Complex in Northern India&amp;quot; (1966). For Africa south of the Sahara (for which there is as yet only fragmentary evidence), see, for example, A. Smith, &amp;quot;The Early States of the Central Sudan&amp;quot; (1971); Mabogunji, &amp;quot;The Land and Peoples of West Africa&amp;quot; (1971); Kea, &#039;&#039;Settlements, Trade, and Politics in the Seventeenth-Century Gold Coast&#039;&#039; (1982); Isichei, &#039;&#039;A History of Nigeria&#039;&#039; (1983); Onimode, &#039;&#039;Imperialism and Underdevelopment in Nigeria&#039;&#039; (1982); FRELIMO, &#039;&#039;Historia de Mozambique&#039;&#039; (1971); Rodney, &#039;&#039;A History of the Upper Guinea Coast&#039;&#039; (1970); and Usman, &#039;&#039;The Transformation of Katsina&#039;&#039; (1981).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The European feudal-era landlord class was not more advanced, more ready (as it were) for capitalism and modernity, than the landlord classes in many other regions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The so-called European manorial system is sometimes said to have been a distinguishing feature of feudalism, a peculiarly European giant step toward private ownership and large-scale labor use, something largely absent from non-European areas and critical in the evolution toward capitalism. Large estates were widespread across the hemisphere, but the special organizational form of demesne farming by unpaid peasant labor was found in fewer areas. The manorial system in the narrow sense of the term, including coordinated demesne farming with corvée labor in gangs as well as peasant holdings, and with some manufacture along with agricultural production on the manor, was found in several areas outside of Europe. It was important in China and in southern India.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;On the manorial system of China, see Elvin, &#039;&#039;The Pattern of the Chinese Past&#039;&#039; (1973). For India, see Gopal, &amp;quot;Quasi-Manorial Rights in Ancient India&amp;quot; (1963); Mahalingam, &#039;&#039;Economic Life in the Vijayanagar Empire&#039;&#039; (1951); Yadav, &amp;quot;Secular Land Grants of the Post-Gupta Period&amp;quot; (1966); Yadav, &amp;quot;Immobility and Subjugation of Indian Peasantry in Early Medieval Complex&amp;quot; (1974). Indian historians recognize important differences between the Indian and European forms of the manor, however. In early Indian feudalism manorial labor had some of the characteristics of serfs, some of wage laborers, and some of tenant farmers. Early Indian feudal estates also seem to have been less autarkic and insulated than the stereotypical European manor.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; But demesne farming was not dominant throughout Europe (it was uncommon in the Mediterranean zone), bore no resemblance to capitalist agriculture, and in any case had nearly died out in western Europe by the fourteenth century. Hence the relatively stronger development of this trait in Europe than most other regions (such as northern India) cannot account for the transition, much later, to capitalism in one area and not the others.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Related to this question is the old European misdefinition of Indian villages, unfortunately accepted by Marx, as closed, corporate entities (hence, for Marx, as survivals of primitive communal society). The medieval Indian village did indeed have corporate characteristics; it did have communal control of usufruct (though not, apparently, communal ownership); and it did display the tight combination of farming and handicrafts which Marx found to be highly significant and seemed, to him, to explain the cohesiveness of the village, its ability to remain unchanged in the face of external shocks from colonial capitalism, yet, by the same token, to resist social transformation. But European villages also retained certain corporate characteristics, perhaps even more pronounced than those of Hindu villages, where caste communities correlated very poorly with village settlement patterns.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Marx&#039;s view is set forth in &amp;quot;The British rule in India&amp;quot; (1979). Irfan Habib, in part following Kosambi (both are Marxists), writes of &amp;quot;the creation of the traditional Indian village, closed and self-sufficient&amp;quot; (my emphasis) between 200 B.C. and 650 A.D., in a process involving &amp;quot;ruralization of crafts&amp;quot; and somewhat planned settlement of landless people in villages: Habib, in &amp;quot;The Social Distribution of Landed Property in Pre-British India&amp;quot; (1965).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In this matter we may be confronting the classic error of telescoping history, perceiving the breakup of the European village after the rise of capitalism, and assuming therefore that these villages had been dissolving as corporate entities many centuries earlier. Furthermore, communal land ownership was relatively unimportant in this period for both India and Europe; the villages normally held only delegated rights (including the right to common land), which could be and sometimes were violated by landlords. The true owners of most of the productive land, holders of hereditary and transferrable estates, were, in both areas, the ruling class. Finally, the combination of agriculture and handicrafts was also present in European villages.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;On the unity of agriculture and handicraft industry in medieval European villages, see, for example, Sylvia Thrupp, &amp;quot;Medieval Industry 1000-1500&amp;quot; (1972).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Apparently it dissolved well after 1492 with the rise of capitalism. In sum, although Indian feudalism was in no sense identical to the European variety (or varieties), it bore the same general characteristics as a mode of production and the same potential for evolution toward capitalism. This argument can probably be made also for many regions of Asia and Africa. The medieval European village seems not to have been very unusual among the array of village settlement and social forms across the hemisphere.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The producing class in feudalism consists, usually, of peasants, who farm the landlord&#039;s estate in household-scale units and provide labor, produce, or cash as rent. Serfdom is often thought to be the characteristic labor form of feudalism, on the European model.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Dobb, &#039;&#039;Studies in the Development of Capitalism&#039;&#039; (1947).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Serfs of the basically European sort were indeed found here and there in Africa and Asia, although the specific history of enserfment in late-Roman Europe was unique and its legal form was rarely encountered elsewhere. What we find, rather, is a panorama of forms of unfree labor, that is, labor of peasants tied somehow to the landlord&#039;s estate, through all three continents.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Serfdom was not characteristic of all parts of medieval Europe. On unfree labor in Asia and Africa, see, for example, Yadava, &amp;quot;Immobility and Subjugation of Indian Peasantry in Early Medieval Complex&amp;quot; (1974); Levitzion, &amp;quot;The Early States of the Western Sudan to 1500&amp;quot; (1972); Elvin, &#039;&#039;The Pattern of the Chinese Past&#039;&#039; (1973).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; On the other hand, some scholars (among them Brenner, a Marxist, and Baechler, a conservative) rather idealize the European peasant of the fourteenth and fifteenth centuries in western Europe and see in that person a freehold farmer, imbued with the entrepreneurial spirit and so forth.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Brenner and critics in Aston and Philpin, &#039;&#039;The Brenner Debate: Agrarian Class Structure and Economic Development in Pre-Industrial Europe&#039;&#039; (1988); Brenner, &amp;quot;The Origins of Capitalist Development: A Critique of Neo-Smithian Marxism.&amp;quot; (1977); Baechler, &amp;quot;The Origins of Modernity: Caste and Feudality (India, Europe and Japan).&amp;quot; (1988). See comments on Brenner and Baechler in Chapter 2 above.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; This is again a telescoping of history. Those peasants were tenants, still tied to estates in manifold ways; not until later times, well after 1492, was there a strong emergence of an important freehold, capital-accumulating, kulak-style class, ready for rural capitalism. The European peasant was not particularly unusual. Peasants who were forced to give labor service, or product, or cash, as rent or tribute or tax (paid to the landlord), who were not free to move from the landlord&#039;s domain, and whose status was inherited by later generations, were found in many parts of medieval Asia and Africa as well as Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There was a measure of interconnectedness among the feudal agricultural societies, enough to suggest that we should think of the whole hemisphere-wide zone of class-based agricultural societies not as separate social entities but as a single feudal landscape with regional variations that sometimes included sharp boundaries and sometimes did not. Clearly there was a great deal of criss-cross diffusion among these regions, as evidence, for instance, the commonality of agricultural techniques over large areas. (The claim made by some European historians,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;including Lynn White, Jr. in &#039;&#039;Medieval Technology and Social Change&#039;&#039; (1968); Michael Mann, &amp;quot;European Development: Approaching a Historical Explanation&amp;quot; (1988); Perry Anderson, &#039;&#039;Lineages of the Absolute State&#039;&#039; (1974).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; that medieval European agriculture was unique in technological level and thus somehow ignited progress toward capitalism, is invalid, as we discussed in Chapter 2. European agriculture shared most traits with other regions and was not uniquely advanced or peculiarly pregnant with social change.) It seems likely that the evolution of feudalism over much of the hemispheric landscape involved a steady deepening of the oppression on peasants, as more and more surplus was demanded, and the response by peasants included technological development and borrowing (diffusion), as well as migration toward peripheral regions and toward towns. At the same time, the ruling classes, as they exhausted the potential of their own subjects to increase surplus delivery, tried to conquer and exploit other communities of producers, to acquire external as well as internal fields of exploitation, and this also led to further interconnectedness of regions.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Blaut, &#039;&#039;The National Question&#039;&#039; (1987b), chap. 7.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Yet, at the same time, feudal ruling class communities were united in webs of kinship, or bureaucracy, or caste, which sometimes extended over very large areas. We know that the neat parcelling of societies into nation-states did not exist in those times, that language regions were ill-defined and language barriers of little significance, even that religious differences did not set up barriers to the movement of ideas, things, and people. Thus we should think of all (or most) feudal societies as sharing a common space, through which social forces and pressures diffused in all directions, over great distances, easily crossing the boundaries of states. Given this conception, it is not difficult to understand why the general evolution of feudalism as a mode of production was proceeding in about the same way over much of the hemisphere.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the late Middle Ages there were signs of profound change in many agricultural regions of all three continents. There were indications of two sorts: signs of decay, or even imminent collapse, in the feudal system, and signs of change toward commercialized agriculture and toward rural capitalism. Throughout much of the hemisphere, the mode of production appears to have been in a state of decay, and we find increasing exactions, peasant revolts, migrations to agricultural frontiers and towns, intense warfare among ruling classes for access to producer populations, and more. By the fourteenth century, feudalism had entered a stage of crisis—although not of collapse—in Europe, but it appears that there were similar crises in parts of Asia and probably—as we will doubtless learn from further research—Africa.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;For India, see, for example, A. Chicherov, &amp;quot;On the Multiplicity of Socio-Economic Structures in India in the Seventeenth and Eighteenth Century&amp;quot; (1976); I. Habib, &amp;quot;Problems of Marxist Historical Analysis&amp;quot; (1969); S. Gopal, Nobility and the Mercantile Community in India&amp;quot; (1972); Radhakamal Mukherjee, &#039;&#039;The Economic History of India, 1600-1800&#039;&#039; (1967); Ramkrishna Mukherjee, &#039;&#039;The Rise and Fall of the East India Company&#039;&#039; (1958); Jha, &#039;&#039;Studies in the Development of Capitalism in India&#039;&#039; (1963); Nurul Hasan, &amp;quot;The Silver Currency Output of the Mughal Empire and Prices in India During the 16th and 17th Centuries&amp;quot; (1969); Yadava, &amp;quot;Immobility and Subjugation of Indian Peasantry in Early Medieval Complex&amp;quot; (1974). For West Africa, see Kea, &#039;&#039;Settlements, Trade, and Politics in the Seventeenth-Century Gold Coast&#039;&#039; (1982). For China, see Harrison, &#039;&#039;The Communists and Chinese Peasant Rebellions&#039;&#039; (1969); Parsons, &#039;&#039;Peasant Rebellions in the Late Ming Dynasty&#039;&#039; (1970); Fu and Li, &#039;&#039;The Sprouts of Capitalistic Factors Within China&#039;s Feudal Society&#039;&#039; (1956).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In all three continents there was a movement of peasants to the towns, perhaps at roughly comparable rates. In no large region, European or non-European, could this have become a flood of rural-urban migrants, since urban population was still a small percentage of total population everywhere at the end of the fifteenth century. Still, it was an effect of crises in the rural areas. Whether these crises were indications that the mode of production was truly near collapse, and this from internal contradictions, perhaps cannot as yet be decided, but in any case feudalism in Europe was no closer to its final demise, prior to 1492, than were the feudalism of many extra-European regions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At this point in the argument, a disclaimer and a speculation. I am not arguing that the landlord-peasant mode of production had somehow gone through its allotted historical span and was about to collapse, or to transform itself into capitalism. The question whether capitalism had its earliest growth in an urban setting or a rural setting is a very complex one indeed; I will discuss the matter further below but I do not propose any sort of general historical theory of causation. I will argue only that the transition, or decay, or whatever one wants to call it, was far from complete in 1492, and the wealth from America precipitated the rise of capitalism and, simultaneously, the final decay of the feudal mode of production in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I speculate as follows: Given our overall model of an extremely rapid criss-cross diffusion of the cultural traits of agriculture (crops, stock, tools, water-management systems, etc.), and given the parallel conception of tight and intricate interlacing among class-organized agricultural societies in the medieval Eastern Hemisphere, one would expect that the general growth and evolution of the class-stratified agricultural form of society would proceed in a relatively even manner from one region to the next, as traits diffused, as social pressures were transmitted in space by migration, conquest, and the like, as ruling-class alliances proliferated, and so on. Perhaps the evolution of this feudal mode of production was everywhere conditioned by one common social fact: the steady and unrelenting demand of the landlord class and its allies (merchants, nobility, etc.) for more and more wealth, a demand that translated into constant pressure on peasants to increase production so that they could increase delivery of surplus. I view this as a long-term secular trend that led to specific responses in the peasant sector, including technological development, criss-cross diffusion of technology, asserting and pioneering, peasant revolts, rural-urban migration, participation in ruling-class military adventures, and more. I speculate, then, that these mechanisms evened out the social tensions that were created in many places by the increasing ruling-class demand for delivery of surplus. This would allow us to argue that, if the mode of production was in decay or in crisis in one part of the hemisphere, very likely the same was the case in many other parts of the hemisphere. In a word: the mode of production rose and then ebbed on a hemispheric scale, and what was happening in Europe in 1492 was also happening in Africa and Asia.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But why would we expect the feudal mode of production to decay or decline? This is the final point of speculation. We cannot assert simply that feudalism is a &amp;quot;stage&amp;quot; of evolution, and must eventually give way to the next, higher &amp;quot;stage&amp;quot; of evolution (capitalism), as some mechanistic Marxists argue. Nor can we accept the conservative form of this argument, which sees feudalism giving way to a higher and more &amp;quot;modern&amp;quot; form of society (capitalism) as a result of humanity&#039;s inevitable forward progress, social, intellectual, and moral. Nor can we invoke a Malthusian force of inevitably heightening population pressure (a thesis which was shown to be false in Chapter 2, on grounds mainly that human cultures always control their demographic behavior, more or less rationally). I would propose the following explanatory model. There are two essential facts about this form of society: first, the fact of family-scale farming as a way of life; second, the fact of a landlord class extracting, or trying to extract, an ever-increasing absolute surplus from farmers. Peasant farmers respond to this pressure in many ways, as we noted above. They certainly try to increase their population so long as each additional human being in the community can produce the requisite surplus, that is, contribute labor which yields more production than is needed for consumption by the incremental member of the community and for that individual&#039;s contribution to surplus delivery. Certainly they try to add additional land for cultivation, and sometimes try to move to another location, seeking agricultural or other land. But mainly they intensify. That is, they increase agricultural productivity by continuously experimenting with new crop varieties, new tools, new techniques, and they are ever on the alert for news about innovations that have been tried successfully elsewhere—in the next village, the next valley, the next island.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process of technological improvement has no limit, but a point will be reached when the rate of increase in labor productivity declines, generation by generation, century by century. Doubtless the rate was at its highest during the period when many new crops and stock types were being domesticated at a rapid rate, and when the main tools, and iron, were being brought into the system. By the Middle Ages, the rate of improvement overall would have declined to a level insufficient to permit farmers to meet the landlords&#039; incremental demands for surplus. If we set aside some of the alternative responses, such as pioneering and rural-urban migration, which must have been available in some regions but not in others, we are left with the following situation: a general crisis in the feudal mode of production.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now this discussion has been grounded in one assumption: that improvements in agricultural production are taking place through innovations mainly on the farm itself. This is largely the case for family-scale farming in medieval and premedieval times. Of course, production is also improved by importing water and nutrients into the farm through irrigation or drainage. And always there is some off-the-farm sale or other exchange of products, and sale or exchange of products from the farm for inputs like fertilizer, seed, and labor. So the individual peasant farm, or family farm, is a relatively but not absolutely self-contained microgeographic system. We know very well, and farmers in those days also knew very well, that the best strategy for engineering a dramatic increase in production from a microgeographic system like the peasant farm is to integrate it more fully into a larger, macrogeographic system. Mainly this involves increasing the input of water and fertility elements, like lime and manure, and changing the pattern of crops and stock from one which must primarily feed the farm family to one which can involve some specialization in products that are saleable and that are well-suited to the ecological conditions of the farm. (This would commonly mean some specialization in one or a few food products, which are both sold and consumed, or specialization in an industrial product, like cotton.) When, today, we speak of the &amp;quot;agricultural revolution&amp;quot; of recent centuries, we are describing a revolution at this macrogeographic level: modern family farms import huge amounts of fertility; they import (purchase) many tools, pesticides, and like elements which are produced elsewhere; they use substantial amounts of nonfamily labor; and they specialize in ways that (sometimes) involve ecological optimization. This list pretty much exhausts the revolutionary changes that occurred prior to the present century, and it suggests that internal, microgeographic improvements—which never ceased to take place—played a secondary role at this stage in the development of agriculture.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For these macrogeographic improvements to take place there must be a high level of commercialization of farming, because moving things into and out of the farm microsystem (or at any rate the village microsystem) is mainly a process of buying and selling. It would seem to follow that a general crisis of the feudal mode of production would have one of two possible outcomes. One of these is a relatively smooth transition to an economy in which there is massive off-the-farm cash demand for farm products and supply of purchasable inputs, along with cash payment of rent (or payment on shares to a landlord who then markets the share for cash). This scenario takes place in a landscape in which there is a large nonagricultural population, hence a landscape that is either urbanizing or participating in major long-distance trade. Stated differently: the crisis can be met if commercialization and urbanization are taking place. Alternatively, there can be revolutionary changes of another sort: peasant revolts, either mild (such as withholding of rent) or violent, major cultural transformation in social, political, or religious life, or something else equally revolutionary. Perhaps both alternatives must occur in some combination for the crisis to be resolved. I conclude that the rather clear pattern in which feudal contradictions intensify, as a result of increasing demands for surplus and decreasing ability of farm families to increase the level of surplus, must lead to a revolutionary change of some sort. Most of the changes that I have mentioned did, in fact, occur in Europe in the late Middle Ages and involved the overthrow of feudalism as a political and social system and its replacement by the modern system after the model of England&#039;s &amp;quot;Glorious Revolution.&amp;quot; But I am not arguing that this rural set of processes explains the rise of capitalism. Certainly it contributed to the rise of capitalism, and specifically to the processes of increasing urbanization and increasing long-distance commodity movements which characterized the late Middle Ages throughout the hemisphere, processes which I label &amp;quot;protocapitalist,&amp;quot; and which we discuss in the following section of this chapter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Protocapitalism in Asia, Africa, and Europe ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I use the word &amp;quot;protocapitalism&amp;quot; not to introduce a technical term but to avoid the problem of defining another term, &amp;quot;capitalism.&amp;quot; Obviously, the kind of economic system that we ordinarily think of as capitalist did not exist in the Middle Ages; we are dealing with its forebear, which (as I will argue) exhibited most of the basic traits of capitalism, but on a spatially and socially small scale, and generally within, or on the edge of, a much larger, dominant economic system associated with the feudal mode of production. Protocapitalism, therefore, is incipient capitalism, or near-capitalism, or adolescent capitalism. It is the system as it existed prior to the two revolutionary transformations which brought modern capitalism into existence. The first of these was the political transformation which is usually, and conventionally, called &amp;quot;the bourgeois revolution&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;bourgeois revolutions&amp;quot;—the creation of large polities that were dominated, not by the feudal landlord class, but by an elite of townsmen (burghers, bourgeoisie) and their entrepreneurial allies in the countryside. The most famous example, and in a way the defining case, was Britain&#039;s &amp;quot;Glorious Revolution&amp;quot; of 1688, and I will use the date 1688 as the symbol or token for the political triumph of capitalism. The second transformation was, of course, the Industrial Revolution, which did not really begin in a big way until the last quarter of the eighteenth century. In Chapter 4 we will examine the role played by colonialism and non-Europe in both of these transformations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In all three continents we find relatively small rural regions (they were generally hinterlands of major port cities) along with a few highly commercialized agricultural and mining regions, which were clearly being penetrated by capitalism—were protocapitalist—in the period just prior to 1492. Among these were Flanders, southeastern England, northern Italy, sugar-planting regions of Morocco, the Nile valley, the Gold Coast, Kilwa, Sofala (and hypothetically part of Zimbabwe), Malabar, Coromandel, Bengal, northern Java, and south-coastal China. Land was owned by commerce-minded landlords or by urban protocapitalists.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Appadorai, &#039;&#039;Economic Conditions in Southern India&#039;&#039; (1936); Elvin, &#039;&#039;The Pattern of the Chinese Past&#039;&#039; (1974); Nicholas, &amp;quot;Town and Countryside: Social and Economic Tensions in 14th Century Flanders&amp;quot; (1967-1968), pp. 458-485; Rawski, &#039;&#039;Agricultural Change and the Peasant Economy of South China&#039;&#039; (1972); T. Raychaudhuri, &#039;&#039;Jan Company in Coromandel&#039;&#039; (1962).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Rents were generally paid in cash except in those areas, like Fukien, where more money profit could be extracted by landlords if they collected the farm produce and sold it themselves.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Rawski, &#039;&#039;Agricultural Change and the Peasant Economy of South China&#039;&#039; (1972).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Agricultural production was organized in various ways, ranging from peasant-scale farming to plantations, and very significant quantities of a number of agricultural products were grown, sold, and exported: rice, cotton, sugar, pepper, etc. Industrial production was spreading out into the countryside in all three continents: the early putting-out system was actually de-urbanizing industry in northwestern Europe, as the control by guilds became loosened; probably the same was occurring in parts of Asia and Africa (where merchant and artisan guilds were also well developed and strong in the Middle Ages).&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Appadorai, &#039;&#039;Economic Conditions in Southern India&#039;&#039; (1936); Gernet, &#039;&#039;Daily Life in China on the Eve of the Mongol Invasion&#039;&#039; (1962); Habib, &amp;quot;Problems of Marxist Historical Analysis&amp;quot; (1969); Mahalingam, &#039;&#039;Economic Life in the Vijayanagar Empire&#039;&#039; (1951); K. Nilikanta Sastri, &#039;&#039;A History of South India&#039;&#039; (1966); Tung, &#039;&#039;An Outline History of China&#039;&#039; (1979); Kea, &#039;&#039;Settlements, Trade, and Politics in the Seventeenth-Century Gold Coast&#039;&#039; (1982), Sherif, &#039;&#039;Slaves, Spices and Ivory in Zanzibar&#039;&#039; (1987).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Over a much broader area, commodity production had fully penetrated the agricultural economy, and it is extremely doubtful whether west European peasant agriculture was more highly commercialized than that of many parts of China and India, as well as some other extra-European regions. Probably we can assume that level of urbanization is a good comparative indicator of level of agricultural commercialization for this period, since it must represent the main off-the-farm demand for agricultural products. By this measure, Chinese and Indian agriculture would have been more highly commercialized than European agriculture, because a larger percentage of total population was urban in those regions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cities dotted the landscape from northern Europe to southern Africa to eastern Asia. Some of these cities were seats of power for major feudal societies. Others were socially and geographically marginal to these societies, and were usually to be found along sea coasts, where they had mainly an interstitial relationship to the larger feudal societies, moving and trading goods among them and producing manufactured commodities for them. Probably it would be incorrect to speak of two distinct classes of urban place, internal and marginal (or peripheral), because many variations and gradations existed, and also because the internal, seat-of-power cities were in many cases also major centers for intersocietal trade and for nonagricultural production. Nevertheless, we can distinguish a special group of cities that were strongly oriented toward manufacturing and trade, were more or less marginal to powerful feudal states (some were within these states; some were small city-dominated states or even city-states), and were heavily engaged in long-distance maritime trade. Cities of this sort stretched around all of the coasts of western Europe, the Mediterranean, East Africa, and South, Southeast, and East Asia. In these cities the mode of production could probably be best described as incipient capitalism, protocapitalism—certainly it was not feudalism—with wageworkers being, apparently, the largest working-class sector, merchants, merchant-landlords, or merchant-manufacturers the ruling class, and economic activity a mixture of trade (movement of commodities, banking, and so on), manufacture (both large- and small-scale), and commercial agriculture.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some of these mercantile-maritime cities were quite small, others quite large, but it appears that most of them were at roughly the same level in the development of protocapitalist institutions, classes, and technology. This is not surprising since they were intimately connected to one another in a tight network of trade, along which ideas, techniques, goods, and people flowed in all directions, in constant criss-cross diffusion.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Blaut, &amp;quot;Where Was Capitalism Born?&amp;quot; (1976).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; (For example: Malacca, when the Portuguese first arrived, was trading with the Mediterranean, Inner Asia, East Africa, the Middle East, India, China, and probably Japan as well as all of Southeast Asia. The chronicler Tome Pires assures us that, at the beginning of the sixteenth century, 84 different languages are spoken in that city, and, boosting its importance for the Portuguese, asserts that &amp;quot;whoever is lord of Malacca has his hand on the throat of Venice.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Pires, &#039;&#039;The Suma Oriental&#039;&#039; (1944 edition).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; A second example from a much earlier period: the Tenasserim port of Kalah, in the tenth century, was trading with China and Arabia. According to Ibn al-Faqih, the parrots of Kalah talked in Persian, Arabic, Chinese, Indian, and Greek.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Pires, &#039;&#039;The Suma Oriental&#039;&#039; (1944); Di Meglio, &amp;quot;Arab Trade with Indonesia and the Malay Peninsula from the 8th to the 16th Century&amp;quot; (1970). The location of Kalah is tentatively placed in the Mergui region: see Wheatley, &#039;&#039;The Golden Khersonese&#039;&#039; (1961).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The network of mercantile-maritime centers stretched, like a string of pearls, from the Baltic to the eastern Mediterranean, and from there southward to Sofala (or beyond—the history of East and southern Africa is still buried in colonial slumber) and eastward to Japan. The network also extended inland in all three continents, but the mercantile-maritime cities and oceanic routes were eventually of greater evolutionary importance in the rise of capitalism than were the inland centers. This was true for two (main) reasons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First, foreign trade was the most peripheral of protocapitalist activities; it was literally beyond the reach of the law. (Inland cities that bordered on deserts would also have had this peripheral quality to some extent.) Thus, a protocapitalist port city could move products to and from any other oceanic port without having to pass through state-organized territories, and thereby avoid paying tolls, being forced to buy and sell goods to foreign merchants at intermediate trading centers, or perhaps even being denied permission to enter a state. It is worth noting, in this regard, that a substantial part of the high cost of Asian spices in European markets before 1492 resulted from the fact that shipments coming from India via overland routes ordinarily had to be passed from merchant to merchant at several trading points enroute, with profit taken at each intermediate market. The cheapness of Asian spices carried by the Portuguese in the sixteenth century therefore reflected, to a considerable extent, the fact that the spices could be on-loaded at an Asian port, and then transported direct to a European port with no intermediate transactions; perhaps this factor was more important than the generally lower cost of sea transport over land transport (a factor that is often overemphasized).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Second, long-distance commodity movement by sea, involving as it did the transport of vital staples as well as luxuries, was, among protocapitalist activities of the late Middle Ages, perhaps the closest we get to industrial capitalism in the urban economy of that time. It involved not merely an exchange of commodities but the production of many commodities including ships, and incorporated sophisticated technology, a large work force, complex transactions, and massive capital accumulation. This matter brings us back, inescapably, to the problem of defining &amp;quot;protocapitalism.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a widespread tendency, often encountered among Marxists but by no means confined to that school of thought, which argues the following position. Money, cash exchange, and trade have been going on for millennia but they do not signify capitalism or even the seeds of capitalism. This is so because capitalism is a matter of production, not exchange. &amp;quot;Real&amp;quot; capitalism requires the application of wage labor and the production of commodities. Exchange is merely buying and selling; it does not add value. For Marx, it produces wealth mainly as a result of unequal exchange (higher prices in one market than another, and the like), not as a result of labor input and the production of use-value.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From this model come a series of highly important theses. One is the argument that medieval European towns were not central to the rise of capitalism because their main activity was trade, exchange, not production. Therefore the rise of capitalism must have occurred, not in medieval towns but in medieval agriculture.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;This thesis is central to the famous debate over the role of urbanization in the medieval rise of capitalism; in Marxist literature this view is associated with Maurice Dobb (who in fact presented it very cautiously), and its opposition—emphasis on the role of towns in the rise of capitalism—is associated with Paul Sweezy. See Dobb, &#039;&#039;Studies in the Development of Capitalism&#039;&#039; (1947), Sweezy, &amp;quot;A Critique&amp;quot; (1976). The thesis is also central to the debates over &amp;quot;dependency theory.&amp;quot; For instance, Robert Brenner argues that towns and trade were essentially irrelevant precisely because the issue is production, not exchange, and Brenner believes (wrongly) that towns were not really important points of production in the medieval world. See Brenner, &amp;quot;The Agrarian Roots of European Capitalism&amp;quot; (1985), pp. 38-39. Also see Chapter 2, note 172, above.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; But a second thesis is more crucial for the issues discussed here. This is the argument that starts out by conceding that the great medieval trading cities and trading routes of Asia were much more impressive in scale than those of Europe and the Mediterranean, but this did not make them more significant for the rise of capitalism—because it was production, not exchange (trade, commerce), that was the crucial process. No matter how highly developed the trading routes and cities of Asia were, Europe&#039;s feudal agricultural production (in this argument) was closer to capitalism than either the rural or urban production systems of non-Europe and it is this fact—the nature of European rural society as contrasted with non-European rural society—that is crucial in explaining why capitalism arose in Europe, not in Asia (or Africa). The fallacy regarding rural production was discussed previously. But equally fallacious is the idea that Asian (and African) port cities, mercantile-maritime centers, were somehow purely or largely concerned with exchange, with &amp;quot;commerce.&amp;quot; Here there are in fact three errors. First, production involves not merely change of form but also change of place. It is metaphysical to argue that there is something ontologically distinctive about the process of shaping nature into a &amp;quot;thing,&amp;quot; a commodity. When a farmer produces an agricultural &amp;quot;thing,&amp;quot; he or she must not only grow it but also transport it from field to farmstead and then to market, and must also transport inputs of water or fertilizer or labor from outside the farm. Farm production, therefore, involves both change of form and change of place. An automobile assembly line is a process of change both of form and of place. Thus, overall, spatial movement is part of production. It has nothing whatever to do with the entirely distinct process by which commodities are purchased and sold. Indeed, the farmer&#039;s crop can be subject to exchange right on the farm as well as in an off-the-farm market. Therefore, the medieval activities involved in moving commodities over long distances were not, ontologically, &amp;quot;exchange&amp;quot;; they were spatial transport. They involved huge labor forces, massive capital investment, major technologies—of navigation, ship construction, banking and insurance, and more—and significant tonnages. They produced use-value at the destination from commodities that had none, or less, at the point of departure. In a word, what is called &amp;quot;medieval trade&amp;quot; was a complex process in which production and manufacture played as great a role as did exchange.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second error is the idea, very widely held today among historians, that the cities, the commodity movement, and the rest of the complex, was somehow a trivial process involving only the moving of a few luxury items to a tiny ruling class. In fact, most of the medieval seaborne trade was a matter of staple commodities, things like crude textiles, iron implements, rice, wheat, lumber, ships (which often were sailed from the place of construction to some other port where they were sold), and the like. But beyond that, the tonnage and value of products that would not be considered staples, things like pepper, sugar, finer textiles, pottery, and so forth, was, in and of itself, immensely important, because the market for such products was very large: the medieval elites were by no means insignificant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The third error is a failure to perceive how important industrial production was in these medieval cities and their hinterlands. Thus, I conclude that the medieval mercantile-maritime system was very much a nursery bed of capitalism, in Asia and Africa as well as Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The protocapitalist port cities of Europe were not more highly developed than those of Africa and Asia in the fifteenth century. This holds true regardless of the kinds of criteria chosen as measures. European cities, first, were not larger in absolute or relative population. In fact, urbanization in Europe was probably less advanced than urbanization in China, India, the Arab region, and no doubt many other non-European areas. The urban population in early Ming China was perhaps 10% of the total population.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Elvin, &#039;&#039;The Pattern of the Chinese Past&#039;&#039; (1973).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In the Vijayanagar Empire of southern India it must have been at least as high: the inland capital alone held about 3% of the population—comparable centers in Europe, such as Paris, may have had half that percentage—and the coastal port cities were both numerous and large.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Elvin, &#039;&#039;The Pattern of the Chinese Past&#039;&#039; (1973); Mahalingam, &#039;&#039;Economic Life in the Vijayanagar Empire&#039;&#039; (1951); Naqvi, &#039;&#039;Urban Centres in Upper India, 1556-1803&#039;&#039; (1968); Satish Chandra, &amp;quot;Commerce and Industry in the Medieval Period&amp;quot; (1964).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Second, the development of the techniques of business was fully as advanced, fully as complex, and fully as wideflung in space among the merchants and bankers of Asia and Africa as among those of Europe. (Tome Pires said of Gujarati businessmen in 1515: &amp;quot;They are men who understand merchandise; they are ... properly steeped in the sound and harmony of it&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;those of our people who want to be clerks and factors ought to go there and learn, because the business of trade is a science.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Pires, &#039;&#039;The Suma Oriental&#039;&#039; (1944). Also see K. N. Chaudhuri, &#039;&#039;Trade and Civilization in the Indian Ocean&#039;&#039; (1985); Chan-Cheung, &amp;quot;The Smuggling Trade Between China and Southeast Asia During the Ming Dynasty (1967); Di Meglio, &amp;quot;Arab Trade with Indonesia and the Malay Peninsula from the 8th to the 16th Century&amp;quot; (1970); Elvin, &amp;quot;China as a Counterfactual&amp;quot; (1988); Gupta, &#039;&#039;Industrial Structure of India During Medieval Period&#039;&#039; (1970); I. Habib, &amp;quot;Usury in Medieval India&amp;quot; (1964); Jha, &#039;&#039;Studies in the Development of Capitalism in India&#039;&#039; (1963); Pires, &#039;&#039;The Suma Oriental&#039;&#039; (1944); Prakash, &amp;quot;Organization of Industrial Production in Urban Centres in India During the Seventeenth Century with Special Reference to Textiles&amp;quot; (1964); Victor Purcell, &#039;&#039;The Chinese in Southeast Asia&#039;&#039;, 2nd ed. (1965); Jan Qaisar, &amp;quot;The Role of Brokers in Medieval India&amp;quot; (1974); Simkin, &#039;&#039;The Traditional Trade of Asia&#039;&#039; (1968); Toyoda, &#039;&#039;History of Pre-Meiji Commerce in Japan&#039;&#039; (1969); Udovitch, &amp;quot;Commercial Techniques in Early Medieval Islamic Trade&amp;quot; (1974).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;) Third, the technical and material means of production seem to have been at about the same level of development in many mercantile-maritime centers of all three continents, allowing for differences in the volume of production and trade, the kinds of merchandise, and the like. Maritime techniques were also comparable across the hemisphere: though they differed from ocean to ocean, it cannot be said that ships of one ocean were technologically more advanced than those of the others.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Needham and collaborators, &#039;&#039;Science and Civilization in China&#039;&#039; (1954-1984), vol. 4, part 3; Lewis, &amp;quot;Maritime Skills in the Indian Ocean, 1368-1500&amp;quot; (1973); Lo, &amp;quot;China as a Sea Power&amp;quot; (1955); Ma Huan, &#039;&#039;The Overall Survey of the Ocean&#039;s Shores&#039;&#039; (1970); Purcell, &#039;&#039;The Chinese in Southeast Asia&#039;&#039;, 2d ed. (1965).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Manufactures in port cities and other industrial centers of Europe, Africa, and Asia were also roughly comparable in gross scale and level of development.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;S. Chaudhuri, &amp;quot;Textile Trade and Industry in Bengal Suba, 1650-1720&amp;quot; (1974); Elvin, &amp;quot;China as a Counterfactual&amp;quot; (1988); Gernet, &#039;&#039;Daily Life in China on the Eve of the Mongol Invasion&#039;&#039; (1962); Jha, &#039;&#039;Studies in the Development of Capitalism in India&#039;&#039; (1963); Naqvi, &#039;&#039;Urban Centres in Upper India, 1556-1803&#039;&#039; (1968); Needham and collaborators, &#039;&#039;Science and Civilization in China&#039;&#039; (1965-1984); Jan Qaisar, &amp;quot;The Role of Brokers in Medieval India&amp;quot; (1974); Rodinson, &amp;quot;Le Marchand Musulman&amp;quot; (1974); Rodinson, &#039;&#039;Islam and Capitalism&#039;&#039; (1973); Bodo Wiethoff, &#039;&#039;Die Chinesische Seeverbotspolitik und der Private Überseehandel von 1368 bis 1567&#039;&#039; (1963); Yang, &amp;quot;Government Control of Urban Merchants in Traditional China&amp;quot; (1970).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Fourth, the urban class composition of Asian and African centers appears to have been similar to that of European centers: in all regions there existed a powerful class of protocapitalists and a wage-earning class of workers, with or without involvement also of other classes such as feudal landlords, slaves, and so on. And finally, the old European myth, codified by Weber—that European cities were somehow more free than non-European cities, which were under the tight control of the surrounding polity—is essentially an inheritance from classical Eurocentric diffusionism, which imagined that everything important in early Europe was imbued with freedom while everything important in Asia (not to mention Africa) was ground under a stultifying &amp;quot;Oriental despotism&amp;quot; until the Europeans arrived there and brought freedom. The so-called &amp;quot;free cities&amp;quot; of central Europe were hardly the norm and were not central to the rise of capitalism. The partial autonomy of many mercantile-maritime port cities of Europe, from Italy to the Baltic, was of course a reality, and usually reflected either the dominance by the city of a relatively small polity (often a city-state) or the gradual accommodation of feudal states to their urban sectors, allowing the latter considerable autonomy for reasons of profit or power. But all of this held true also in various parts of Africa and Asia. Small city-states were common around the shores of the Indian Ocean, in the Maghreb, and in Southeast Asia; also common were quasi-independent cities, giving loose allegiance to larger states. This point was discussed in the previous chapter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The preceding discussion was not a theory of the rise of capitalism. My aim was simply to show that all of the theories that claim causal superiority for Europe on the basis of Asia and Africa&#039;s supposed lack of progressive urbanization or because extra-European urban processes were not important since urban processes in general were of minor importance compared to rural processes—European rural feudalism—are very unconvincing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is not an exaggeration to describe this entire network of mercantile-maritime cities as a single protocapitalist system.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;I proposed this idea in Blaut, &amp;quot;Where Was Capitalism Born?&amp;quot; (1976). Janet Abu-Lughod&#039;s important book &#039;&#039;Before European Hegemony: The World System A.D. 1250-1350&#039;&#039; (1989) is the first effort to show in precise detail how this system worked in the fourteenth century. Also see S. Chaudhuri, &amp;quot;Textile Trade and Industry in Bengal Suba&amp;quot; (1985); Simkin, &#039;&#039;The Traditional Trade of Asia&#039;&#039; (1968); Amin, &#039;&#039;Accumulation on a World Scale&#039;&#039; (1974) and &#039;&#039;Unequal Development&#039;&#039; (1976).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The surrounding space of class-organized agricultural societies was, as I argued previously, made up of separate societies and polities in separate regions but was, nonetheless, integrated enough so that persistent criss-cross diffusion and other movements led to a degree of unity; perhaps even a degree of intercontinental equilibrium. The unity was very much more intense for the network of protocapitalist cities. The image I have in mind for this is a network of strings of electric lights of various sizes and colors illuminating a garden party. The current, so to speak, which flowed among those port cities consisted of human beings (sailors, workers, merchants, etc.), material things (commodities, ships, fertile seeds and cuttings of crops, musical instruments, and much more), and ideas—technological ideas, innovative social, economic, and religious ideas, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All of this is well known in qualitative terms but not fully so in terms of its intensity, its spatial extent, and, most critically, its unity. The entire system can be viewed as a single entity, so tightly integrated that there must have been rapid, almost instantaneous, criss-cross diffusion throughout the system of essentially every material or immaterial culture trait that is relevant to the economic and technical and ecological progress of this form of society. I believe it is an error, built into our way of conceptualizing cultures and cultural differences, to believe that the very profound differences of culture among the various societies that comprised this system would, somehow, have been reflected in a lack of integration across cultural boundaries in matters concerning the technical-economic-ecological dimension of culture. (Recall our discussion above concerning the distinction between evolutionary and nonevolutionary or partly non-evolutionary aspects of culture, in the theoretical tradition of anthropologists like Steward.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Steward, &#039;&#039;Theory of Culture Change: The Methodology of Multilinear Evolution&#039;&#039; (1955). See note 1.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;) In those times, differences of language did not seem to interfere with the quest for profit among merchants and other participants in this system. (Recall the Greek-speaking parrots of Kalah, the 84 languages spoken in Malacca.) Nor were differences of religion any great impediment (as has been amply documented for Muslim-Christian-Jewish trade in the medieval Mediterranean&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Braudel, &#039;&#039;The Mediterranean&#039;&#039; (1972); Goitein, &#039;&#039;A Mediterranean Society&#039;&#039; (1967); Lane, &#039;&#039;Venice: A Maritime Republic&#039;&#039; (1973).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;). Certainly there were limited social networks, membership in which was a matter of religion or nationality or even kinship. Abu-Lughod has shown that the pattern of connections and distinctions produced a set of eight overlapping social regions—she writes of &amp;quot;The Eight Circuits of the Thirteenth-Century World System&amp;quot;—although her data and argument are consistent with my present thesis that all regions were in fact subregions of one protocapitalist system.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Abu-Lughod, &#039;&#039;Before European Hegemony: The World System A.D. 1250-1350&#039;&#039; (1989), fig. 1, p. 34. One of the eight regions is the nonmaritime circuit extending from China through Central Asia to the Black Sea.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; State boundaries do not seem to have played an important inhibiting role in the flows across the system, except in certain fairly limited periods when either political conflict or specific imperial policies and practices did, indeed, disrupt trade through one or another political partition; the truly nationalistic forms of capitalist enterprise become important much later; in fact, after 1492.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Blaut, &#039;&#039;The National Question&#039;&#039; (1987b).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The network, or system, seems to have evolved over a period of several centuries, mainly from the tenth to the fifteenth. Without attributing cause, I would emphasize the fact that the period during which this system grew most rapidly in scale and intensity was the period during which the technology of oceangoing shipping increased explosively, in what may be thought of as a (or the) Spatial Revolution. In the Agricultural Revolution, we do not know whether the technical-ecological transformation was cause, or effect, or both, in relation to social transformation, although most scholars tend to treat agriculture as cause and social change as effect, rightly or wrongly. In the case of the medieval Spatial Revolution, it is most likely that the technological-ecological aspect was more a reflection of the economic and social processes associated with emergent protocapitalism and urban development than a cause of the latter. Nevertheless, the medieval Spatial Revolution was in one critical way a sequel to the Agricultural Revolution: it intensified spatial flows much as the earlier revolution intensified in situ production. This is not to say that earlier boat technology and earlier long-distance sailing out of sight of land was insignificant: the question is one of intensity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Perhaps, as a final speculation, we might think of the Spatial Revolution as part of a larger process which was responding to the maturation and decline of the feudal mode of production. Certainly it is true that increasing commodity demand by elites was a major stimulus, but it is also possible that the emerging crisis of feudalism—the decreasing rate at which an absolute increase in surplus could be extracted from peasant producers, and the resulting stresses and strains—had much to do with the rise of the intercontinental protocapitalist system. In any case, the dramatic long-distance voyages of discovery of the later Middle Ages, voyages by Chinese, Indians, Polynesians, Europeans, and others, should be conceptualized as moments in a genuine Spatial Revolution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Much of this is speculation beyond the empirical data. But we have important data about the parallels of development from one urban system to another, and from one trading region to another. We also have dramatic cases of almost instantaneous diffusion: for instance, the appearance of the cannon in the Mediterranean region and in China almost simultaneously; perhaps in the same decade.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Needham and collaborators, &#039;&#039;Science and Civilization in China&#039;&#039; (1965-1984), Vol. 5, part 7; Needham, &#039;&#039;Gunpowder as the Fourth Power, East and West&#039;&#039; (1985).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; For the argument of this book, the one crucial generalization is the following: It is not surprising that the processes that I have called protocapitalist were going on across the Eastern Hemisphere in the later Middle Ages. Africa, Asia, and Europe were about equally close to—or distant from—capitalism and modernity in 1492. After 1492, the pace of development quickened for Europe and slowed for Africa and Asia, because of the wealth brought to Europe from America.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Notes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Concerning my use of the term &amp;quot;cultural evolution,&amp;quot; see Chapter 1, note 14.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. The discussion in this section of the chapter mainly deals with the Eastern Hemisphere. The Western Hemisphere will be discussed separately in Chapter 4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. See Dobbs, &#039;&#039;Studies in the Development of Capitalism&#039;&#039; (1947).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Amin, &#039;&#039;Unequal Development&#039;&#039; (1976) and &amp;quot;Modes of Production: History and Unequal Development&amp;quot; (1985).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Kabaker, &amp;quot;A Radiocarbon Chronology Relevant to the Origins of Agriculture&amp;quot; (1977); Megaw, &#039;&#039;Hunters, Gatherers and First Farmers Beyond Europe&#039;&#039; (1977); Vishnu-Mittre, &amp;quot;Origin and History of Agriculture in the Indian Subcontinent&amp;quot; (1978). See the review in Blaut, &amp;quot;Diffusionism: A Uniformitarian Critique.&amp;quot; (1987a).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Blaut, &amp;quot;Diffusionism&amp;quot; (1987a).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. The assumption here is that agriculture itself was evolving because it was useful, but there is the corollary assumption that humanity realized this not just in one favored place but in many places and among many peoples. This should not be surprising, given the fact that agriculture is useful nearly everywhere today. But it is definitely contradictory to the assumptions of Eurocentric diffusionism.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Examples of this process include the eastward movement of the medieval agricultural frontier in the forests of eastern Europe and the reclaiming of swampland in Iraq. Cropland was being expanded in these and other ways in many regions. In addition, it seems certain that some societies that had not previously practiced agriculture were being pushed into smaller or less favorable regions and therefore were turning to agriculture as a means of increasing food production to meet the land shortage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9. See R. Lee, &amp;quot;Art, Science, or Politics? The Crisis in Hunter-Gatherer Studies&amp;quot; (1992).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
10. Water-control systems in farming, including irrigation, drainage, broad-based terracing, raised- or drained-field construction, and natural-levee adaptations are probably as old as agriculture itself, because (1) all farmers everywhere know the problem of moisture control (adding moisture when there is deficit; removing moisture when there is a surplus and a danger of root drowning); (2) all of these procedures are initially small-scale actions taken on an individual farm (recall our discussion in Chapter 2 of the fallacies of the &amp;quot;hydraulic theory&amp;quot;); and (3) there is direct archaeological evidence of very ancient (9,000-year-old) drainage systems in New Guinea (Golson, &amp;quot;No room at the top: Agricultural intensification in the New Guinea Highlands,&amp;quot; 1977), and drained- or raised-field systems in tropical America (Denevan, &amp;quot;Hydraulic Agriculture in the American Tropics: Forms, Measures, and Recent Research,&amp;quot; 1982). Thus we can infer the primitivity of irrigation and these other water-management systems: probably they are as old as the Neolithic, along with drainage and raised-field systems. All this shows that intensive technology had already diffused insofar as it was going to do so, and nonadoption reflected something other than lack of information. As we noted in Chapter 2, irrigation systems diffuse as a social process, associated with class society. Concerning the myth that the plow was not used in Africa, see Hopkins, &#039;&#039;An Economic History of West Africa&#039;&#039; (1973) and Onimode, &#039;&#039;Imperialism and Underdevelopment in Nigeria&#039;&#039; (1982). Note that plows are used in tropical agriculture very sparingly—mainly for some operations in rice paddies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
11. In classless societies, I speculate that the bundle of choices concerning crops, tools, field systems, labor input, and the like, led to roughly a common level of output per person, unaffected by differences in environmental quality over a great range of environments. In some areas very extensive systems like shifting cultivation would be used; in others, intensive systems, like wet-rice cultivation, would be used. But the productivity of labor in terms of product per hour input would tend to be about the same in this model for both intensive and extensive systems. This would hold true if two assumptions are accepted: (1) that rapid and thorough diffusion had taken place, and (2) that population was controlled by farming peoples so as to optimize the situation concerning output and leisure time. None of this would be true in a class society, where the constraints on technology and labor use are influenced profoundly by the demands and power of the ruling class.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
12. See, for example, Kea, &#039;&#039;Settlements, Trade, and Politics in the Seventeenth Century Gold Coast&#039;&#039; (1982); Isichei, &#039;&#039;A History of Nigeria&#039;&#039; (1983); Rodney, &#039;&#039;A History of the Upper Guinea Coast 1545-1800&#039;&#039; (1970); A. Smith, &amp;quot;The Early States of the Central Sudan&amp;quot; (1971); Usman, &#039;&#039;The Transformation of Katsina (1400-1883)&#039;&#039; (1981).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
13. See Blaut, &amp;quot;Colonialism and the Rise of Capitalism&amp;quot; (1989). It is also true that in all these societies there were parallel high-status groups, clergy, bureaucrats, military people, and so on, but there seems not to have been any case of a large, clearly feudal society—I exclude a few cases of small urbanized power centers in dry, pastoral regions, and a few large cities—in which wealth and status was clearly divorced from land ownership and from the surplus extracted from peasants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
14. Apparently such private (saleable) ownership of agricultural land was found mainly near important urban areas, ports, mining areas, etc. See Rawski, &#039;&#039;Agricultural Change and the Peasant Economy of South China&#039;&#039; (1972); Das Gupta, &#039;&#039;Malabar in Asian Trade: 1740-1800&#039;&#039; (1967); Nicholas, &amp;quot;Town and Countryside: Social and Economic Tensions in 14th Century Flanders&amp;quot; (1967-1968); Kea, &#039;&#039;Settlements, Trade, and Politics in the Seventeenth-Century Gold Coast&#039;&#039; (1982); Rodney, &#039;&#039;A History of the Upper Guinea Coast&#039;&#039; (1970); Usman, &#039;&#039;The Transformation of Katsina&#039;&#039; (1981); Sherif, &#039;&#039;Slaves, Spices and Ivory in Zanzibar&#039;&#039; (1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
15. On the importance of hereditary fiefs and landed property in Asia, see, for example, Elvin, &#039;&#039;The Pattern of the Chinese Past&#039;&#039; (1973); Sharma, &#039;&#039;Indian Feudalism, c. 300-1200&#039;&#039; (1965); Fei Hsiao-tung, &#039;&#039;China&#039;s Gentry&#039;&#039; (1953); Fu and Li, &#039;&#039;The Sprouts of Capitalistic Factors Within China&#039;s Feudal Society&#039;&#039; (1956); Rawski, &#039;&#039;Agricultural Change and the Peasant Economy of South China&#039;&#039; (1972); Tung, &#039;&#039;An Outline History of China&#039;&#039; (1979); Liceria, &amp;quot;Emergence of Brahmans as Landed Intermediaries in Karnataka, c. A.D. 1000-1300 (1974); Mahalingam, &#039;&#039;Economic Life in the Vijayanagar Empire&#039;&#039; (1951); Hasan, &amp;quot;The Position of the Zamindars in the Mughal Empire (1969); Raychaudhuri, &amp;quot;The Agrarian System of Mughal India&amp;quot; (1965); Yadav, &amp;quot;Secular Land Grants of the Post-Gupta Period and Some Aspects of the Growth of the Feudal Complex in Northern India&amp;quot; (1966). For Africa south of the Sahara (for which there is as yet only fragmentary evidence), see, for example, A. Smith, &amp;quot;The Early States of the Central Sudan&amp;quot; (1971); Mabogunji, &amp;quot;The Land and Peoples of West Africa&amp;quot; (1971); Kea, &#039;&#039;Settlements, Trade, and Politics in the Seventeenth-Century Gold Coast&#039;&#039; (1982); Isichei, &#039;&#039;A History of Nigeria&#039;&#039; (1983); Onimode, &#039;&#039;Imperialism and Underdevelopment in Nigeria&#039;&#039; (1982); FRELIMO, &#039;&#039;Historia de Mozambique&#039;&#039; (1971); Rodney, &#039;&#039;A History of the Upper Guinea Coast&#039;&#039; (1970); and Usman, &#039;&#039;The Transformation of Katsina&#039;&#039; (1981).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
16. On the manorial system of China, see Elvin, &#039;&#039;The Pattern of the Chinese Past&#039;&#039; (1973). For India, see Gopal, &amp;quot;Quasi-Manorial Rights in Ancient India&amp;quot; (1963); Mahalingam, &#039;&#039;Economic Life in the Vijayanagar Empire&#039;&#039; (1951); Yadav, &amp;quot;Secular Land Grants of the Post-Gupta Period&amp;quot; (1966); Yadav, &amp;quot;Immobility and Subjugation of Indian Peasantry in Early Medieval Complex&amp;quot; (1974). Indian historians recognize important differences between the Indian and European forms of the manor, however. In early Indian feudalism manorial labor had some of the characteristics of serfs, some of wage laborers, and some of tenant farmers. Early Indian feudal estates also seem to have been less autarkic and insulated than the stereotypical European manor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
17. Marx&#039;s view is set forth in &amp;quot;The British rule in India&amp;quot; (1979). Irfan Habib, in part following Kosambi (both are Marxists), writes of &amp;quot;the creation of the traditional Indian village, closed and self-sufficient&amp;quot; (my emphasis) between 200 B.C. and 650 A.D., in a process involving &amp;quot;ruralization of crafts&amp;quot; and somewhat planned settlement of landless people in villages: Habib, in &amp;quot;The Social Distribution of Landed Property in Pre-British India&amp;quot; (1965).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
18. On the unity of agriculture and handicraft industry in medieval European villages, see, for example, Sylvia Thrupp, &amp;quot;Medieval Industry 1000-1500&amp;quot; (1972).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
19. Dobb, &#039;&#039;Studies in the Development of Capitalism&#039;&#039; (1947).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
20. Serfdom was not characteristic of all parts of medieval Europe. On unfree labor in Asia and Africa, see, for example, Yadava, &amp;quot;Immobility and Subjugation of Indian Peasantry in Early Medieval Complex&amp;quot; (1974); Levitzion, &amp;quot;The Early States of the Western Sudan to 1500&amp;quot; (1972); Elvin, &#039;&#039;The Pattern of the Chinese Past&#039;&#039; (1973).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
21. See Brenner and critics in Aston and Philpin, &#039;&#039;The Brenner Debate: Agrarian Class Structure and Economic Development in Pre-Industrial Europe&#039;&#039; (1988); Brenner, &amp;quot;The Origins of Capitalist Development: A Critique of Neo-Smithian Marxism.&amp;quot; (1977); Baechler, &amp;quot;The Origins of Modernity: Caste and Feudality (India, Europe and Japan).&amp;quot; (1988). See comments on Brenner and Baechler in Chapter 2 above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
22. including Lynn White, Jr. in &#039;&#039;Medieval Technology and Social Change&#039;&#039; (1968); Michael Mann, &amp;quot;European Development: Approaching a Historical Explanation&amp;quot; (1988); Perry Anderson, &#039;&#039;Lineages of the Absolute State&#039;&#039; (1974).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
23. Blaut, &#039;&#039;The National Question&#039;&#039; (1987b), chap. 7.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
24. For India, see, for example, A. Chicherov, &amp;quot;On the Multiplicity of Socio-Economic Structures in India in the Seventeenth and Eighteenth Century&amp;quot; (1976); I. Habib, &amp;quot;Problems of Marxist Historical Analysis&amp;quot; (1969); S. Gopal, Nobility and the Mercantile Community in India&amp;quot; (1972); Radhakamal Mukherjee, &#039;&#039;The Economic History of India, 1600-1800&#039;&#039; (1967); Ramkrishna Mukherjee, &#039;&#039;The Rise and Fall of the East India Company&#039;&#039; (1958); Jha, &#039;&#039;Studies in the Development of Capitalism in India&#039;&#039; (1963); Nurul Hasan, &amp;quot;The Silver Currency Output of the Mughal Empire and Prices in India During the 16th and 17th Centuries&amp;quot; (1969); Yadava, &amp;quot;Immobility and Subjugation of Indian Peasantry in Early Medieval Complex&amp;quot; (1974). For West Africa, see Kea, &#039;&#039;Settlements, Trade, and Politics in the Seventeenth-Century Gold Coast&#039;&#039; (1982). For China, see Harrison, &#039;&#039;The Communists and Chinese Peasant Rebellions&#039;&#039; (1969); Parsons, &#039;&#039;Peasant Rebellions in the Late Ming Dynasty&#039;&#039; (1970); Fu and Li, &#039;&#039;The Sprouts of Capitalistic Factors Within China&#039;s Feudal Society&#039;&#039; (1956).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
25. Appadorai, &#039;&#039;Economic Conditions in Southern India&#039;&#039; (1936); Elvin, &#039;&#039;The Pattern of the Chinese Past&#039;&#039; (1974); Nicholas, &amp;quot;Town and Countryside: Social and Economic Tensions in 14th Century Flanders&amp;quot; (1967-1968), pp. 458-485; Rawski, &#039;&#039;Agricultural Change and the Peasant Economy of South China&#039;&#039; (1972); T. Raychaudhuri, &#039;&#039;Jan Company in Coromandel&#039;&#039; (1962).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
26. Rawski, &#039;&#039;Agricultural Change and the Peasant Economy of South China&#039;&#039; (1972).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
27. See Appadorai, &#039;&#039;Economic Conditions in Southern India&#039;&#039; (1936); Gernet, &#039;&#039;Daily Life in China on the Eve of the Mongol Invasion&#039;&#039; (1962); Habib, &amp;quot;Problems of Marxist Historical Analysis&amp;quot; (1969); Mahalingam, &#039;&#039;Economic Life in the Vijayanagar Empire&#039;&#039; (1951); K. Nilikanta Sastri, &#039;&#039;A History of South India&#039;&#039; (1966); Tung, &#039;&#039;An Outline History of China&#039;&#039; (1979); Kea, &#039;&#039;Settlements, Trade, and Politics in the Seventeenth-Century Gold Coast&#039;&#039; (1982), Sherif, &#039;&#039;Slaves, Spices and Ivory in Zanzibar&#039;&#039; (1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
28. Blaut, &amp;quot;Where Was Capitalism Born?&amp;quot; (1976).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
29. Pires, &#039;&#039;The Suma Oriental&#039;&#039; (1944 edition).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
30. Pires, &#039;&#039;The Suma Oriental&#039;&#039; (1944); Di Meglio, &amp;quot;Arab Trade with Indonesia and the Malay Peninsula from the 8th to the 16th Century&amp;quot; (1970). The location of Kalah is tentatively placed in the Mergui region: see Wheatley, &#039;&#039;The Golden Khersonese&#039;&#039; (1961).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
31. This thesis is central to the famous debate over the role of urbanization in the medieval rise of capitalism; in Marxist literature this view is associated with Maurice Dobb (who in fact presented it very cautiously), and its opposition—emphasis on the role of towns in the rise of capitalism—is associated with Paul Sweezy. See Dobb, &#039;&#039;Studies in the Development of Capitalism&#039;&#039; (1947), Sweezy, &amp;quot;A Critique&amp;quot; (1976). The thesis is also central to the debates over &amp;quot;dependency theory.&amp;quot; For instance, Robert Brenner argues that towns and trade were essentially irrelevant precisely because the issue is production, not exchange, and Brenner believes (wrongly) that towns were not really important points of production in the medieval world. See Brenner, &amp;quot;The Agrarian Roots of European Capitalism&amp;quot; (1985), pp. 38-39. Also see Chapter 2, note 172, above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
32. Elvin, &#039;&#039;The Pattern of the Chinese Past&#039;&#039; (1973).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
33. Elvin, &#039;&#039;The Pattern of the Chinese Past&#039;&#039; (1973); Mahalingam, &#039;&#039;Economic Life in the Vijayanagar Empire&#039;&#039; (1951); Naqvi, &#039;&#039;Urban Centres in Upper India, 1556-1803&#039;&#039; (1968); Satish Chandra, &amp;quot;Commerce and Industry in the Medieval Period&amp;quot; (1964).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
34. Pires, &#039;&#039;The Suma Oriental&#039;&#039; (1944). Also see K. N. Chaudhuri, &#039;&#039;Trade and Civilization in the Indian Ocean&#039;&#039; (1985); Chan-Cheung, &amp;quot;The Smuggling Trade Between China and Southeast Asia During the Ming Dynasty (1967); Di Meglio, &amp;quot;Arab Trade with Indonesia and the Malay Peninsula from the 8th to the 16th Century&amp;quot; (1970); Elvin, &amp;quot;China as a Counterfactual&amp;quot; (1988); Gupta, &#039;&#039;Industrial Structure of India During Medieval Period&#039;&#039; (1970); I. Habib, &amp;quot;Usury in Medieval India&amp;quot; (1964); Jha, &#039;&#039;Studies in the Development of Capitalism in India&#039;&#039; (1963); Pires, &#039;&#039;The Suma Oriental&#039;&#039; (1944); Prakash, &amp;quot;Organization of Industrial Production in Urban Centres in India During the Seventeenth Century with Special Reference to Textiles&amp;quot; (1964); Victor Purcell, &#039;&#039;The Chinese in Southeast Asia&#039;&#039;, 2nd ed. (1965); Jan Qaisar, &amp;quot;The Role of Brokers in Medieval India&amp;quot; (1974); Simkin, &#039;&#039;The Traditional Trade of Asia&#039;&#039; (1968); Toyoda, &#039;&#039;History of Pre-Meiji Commerce in Japan&#039;&#039; (1969); Udovitch, &amp;quot;Commercial Techniques in Early Medieval Islamic Trade&amp;quot; (1974).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
35. Needham and collaborators, &#039;&#039;Science and Civilization in China&#039;&#039; (1954-1984), vol. 4, part 3; Lewis, &amp;quot;Maritime Skills in the Indian Ocean, 1368-1500&amp;quot; (1973); Lo, &amp;quot;China as a Sea Power&amp;quot; (1955); Ma Huan, &#039;&#039;The Overall Survey of the Ocean&#039;s Shores&#039;&#039; (1970); Purcell, &#039;&#039;The Chinese in Southeast Asia&#039;&#039;, 2d ed. (1965).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
36. S. Chaudhuri, &amp;quot;Textile Trade and Industry in Bengal Suba, 1650-1720&amp;quot; (1974); Elvin, &amp;quot;China as a Counterfactual&amp;quot; (1988); Gernet, &#039;&#039;Daily Life in China on the Eve of the Mongol Invasion&#039;&#039; (1962); Jha, &#039;&#039;Studies in the Development of Capitalism in India&#039;&#039; (1963); Naqvi, &#039;&#039;Urban Centres in Upper India, 1556-1803&#039;&#039; (1968); Needham and collaborators, &#039;&#039;Science and Civilization in China&#039;&#039; (1965-1984); Jan Qaisar, &amp;quot;The Role of Brokers in Medieval India&amp;quot; (1974); Rodinson, &amp;quot;Le Marchand Musulman&amp;quot; (1974); Rodinson, &#039;&#039;Islam and Capitalism&#039;&#039; (1973); Bodo Wiethoff, &#039;&#039;Die Chinesische Seeverbotspolitik und der Private Überseehandel von 1368 bis 1567&#039;&#039; (1963); Yang, &amp;quot;Government Control of Urban Merchants in Traditional China&amp;quot; (1970).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
37. I proposed this idea in Blaut, &amp;quot;Where Was Capitalism Born?&amp;quot; (1976). Janet Abu-Lughod&#039;s important book &#039;&#039;Before European Hegemony: The World System A.D. 1250-1350&#039;&#039; (1989) is the first effort to show in precise detail how this system worked in the fourteenth century. Also see S. Chaudhuri, &amp;quot;Textile Trade and Industry in Bengal Suba&amp;quot; (1985); Simkin, &#039;&#039;The Traditional Trade of Asia&#039;&#039; (1968); Amin, &#039;&#039;Accumulation on a World Scale&#039;&#039; (1974) and &#039;&#039;Unequal Development&#039;&#039; (1976).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
38. Steward, &#039;&#039;Theory of Culture Change: The Methodology of Multilinear Evolution&#039;&#039; (1955). See note 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
39. Braudel, &#039;&#039;The Mediterranean&#039;&#039; (1972); Goitein, &#039;&#039;A Mediterranean Society&#039;&#039; (1967); Lane, &#039;&#039;Venice: A Maritime Republic&#039;&#039; (1973).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
40. Abu-Lughod, &#039;&#039;Before European Hegemony: The World System A.D. 1250-1350&#039;&#039; (1989), fig. 1, p. 34. One of the eight regions is the nonmaritime circuit extending from China through Central Asia to the Black Sea.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
41. Blaut, &#039;&#039;The National Question&#039;&#039; (1987b).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
42. Needham and collaborators, &#039;&#039;Science and Civilization in China&#039;&#039; (1965-1984), Vol. 5, part 7; Needham, &#039;&#039;Gunpowder as the Fourth Power, East and West&#039;&#039; (1985).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= CHAPTER 4: After 1492 =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== EXPLAINING 1492 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1492, as we have seen, capitalism was slowly emerging in many parts of Asia, Africa, and Europe. In that year there would have been no reason whatever to predict that capitalism would triumph in Europe, and would triumph only two centuries later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By &amp;quot;the triumph of capitalism&amp;quot; I mean, in the present context, the political revolution that transferred power from the old feudal landlord elite to the bourgeoisie (the burghers, the capital-accumulating new elite): the bourgeois revolution. This was really a revolutionary epoch, not a single brief event, but I will follow convention by dating it to 1688, the year of England&#039;s &amp;quot;Glorious Revolution.&amp;quot; In that year (minor qualifications aside) the bourgeoisie definitively took power in England. This class already held power in Holland and in some small states of southern Europe, while in some other parts of Europe (like France) the bourgeoisie was vigorously &amp;quot;rising&amp;quot; in certain regions although the conflict with feudal polities had not yet been won at the level of state power. It should be emphasized that the capitalism that triumphed was not industrial capitalism. How this preindustrial capitalism should be conceptualized is a difficult question because it is something much larger than the &amp;quot;simple commodity production&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;merchant capital&amp;quot; of earlier times. But the Industrial Revolution did not really begin until a century later, in the late eighteenth century, and those who conceptualize the Industrial Revolution as simply a continuation of the bourgeois revolution are neglecting a large and important block of history, both inside and outside of Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The explanation for the rise of capitalism to political power in Europe in the (symbolic) year 1688 requires an understanding of (1) the reasons Europeans, not Africans and Asians, reached and conquered America, and thus garnered the first fruits of colonialism; (2) the reasons the conquest was successful; (3) the direct and indirect effects of the sixteenth-century plunder of American resources and exploitation of American workers on the transformation of Europe; and (4) the direct and indirect effects of seventeenth-century colonial and semicolonial European enterprise in America, Africa, and Asia on the further transformation of Europe and eventually the political triumph of capitalism in the bourgeois revolution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the following paragraphs we will summarize each of these processes in turn, and thus, so to speak, &amp;quot;explain 1492.&amp;quot; Then we will turn to the problem of explaining the rise of capitalism to political power in Europe—or more properly, part of Europe—in the period 1492–1688, in the sense of trying to sort out the significance of colonialism and the extra-European world in this epochal transformation. Finally, we will look at the significance of colonialism, and the role of non-Europe, in the initial stages of the Industrial Revolution, roughly, in the period of the late eighteenth and early nineteenth centuries, and will look at the complementary process: the beginnings of underdevelopment in Africa and Asia.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This inquiry should lead to an explanation for the fundamental fact that capitalism became centrated in Europe. I use the verb &amp;quot;centrate&amp;quot; to emphasize one crucial theoretical argument of this book: the rise of a more-or-less capitalist system had been going on in many parts of the world prior to 1492; after 1492, new forces entered which slowed, then stopped, its evolution outside of Europe and quickened it inside. Thus the rise of capitalism after 1492 was as much a matter of shifting its main headquarters to Europe as it was a matter of &amp;quot;rising&amp;quot; in a simple evolutionary sense.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Why America Was Conquered by Europeans and Not by Africans or Asians ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One of the core myths of Eurocentric diffusionism concerns the discovery (so-called) of America.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Europeans did not &amp;quot;discover&amp;quot; America: the hemisphere was settled millennia earlier by people who migrated in from Siberia and the Arctic. So I prefer not to conceptualize the European arrival as a &amp;quot;discovery.&amp;quot; Likewise, the idea that the Western Hemisphere is a &amp;quot;New World&amp;quot; is false since it was hardly new to those who lived there and greeted Columbus on his arrival in 1492. It is, however, very difficult to avoid using the phrase &amp;quot;New World&amp;quot; in certain contexts, and I will occasionally have to do so.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Typically it goes something like this: Europeans, being more progressive, venturesome, achievement-oriented, and modern than Africans and Asians in the late Middle Ages, and with superior technology as well as a more advanced economy, went forth to explore and conquer the world. And so they set sail down the African coast in the middle of the fifteenth century and out across the Atlantic to America in 1492. This myth is crucial for diffusionist ideology for two reasons: it explains the modern expansion of Europe in terms of internal, immanent forces, and it permits one to acknowledge that the conquest and its aftermath (Mexican mines, West Indian plantations, North American settler colonies, and the rest) had profound significance for European history without at the same time requiring one to give any credit in that process to non-Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In reality, the Europeans were doing what everyone else was doing across the hemisphere-wide network of protocapitalist, mercantile-maritime centers, and Europeans had no special qualities or advantages, no peculiar venturesomeness, no peculiarly advanced maritime technology, and so on. What they did have was opportunity: a matter of locational advantage in the broad sense of accessibility. The point deserves to be put very strongly. If the Western Hemisphere had been more accessible, say, to South Indian centers than to European centers, then very likely India would have become the home of capitalism, the site of the bourgeois revolution, and the ruler of the world.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the late Middle Ages long-distance oceanic voyaging was being undertaken by mercantile-maritime communities everywhere. In the fifteenth century Africans were sailing to Southeast Asia, Indians to Africa, Arabs to China, Chinese to Africa, and so on. Much of this voyaging was across open ocean and much of it involved exploration. Two non-European examples are well known: Cheng Ho&#039;s voyages to India and Africa between 1417 and 1433, and an Indian voyage around the Cape of Good Hope and apparently some 2,000 miles westward into the Atlantic circa 1420. In this period the radii of travel were becoming longer, as a function of the general evolution of protocapitalism, the expansion of trade, and the development of maritime technology. Maritime technology differed from region to region but no one region could be considered to have superiority in any sense implying evolutionary advantage, and novel ideas and techniques were being spread in all directions by rapid criss-cross diffusion. The entire hemisphere was participating and sharing in a Spatial Revolution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Certainly the growth of Europe&#039;s commercial economy led to the Portuguese and Spanish voyages of discovery. But the essence of the process was a matter of catching up with Asian and African protocapitalist communities by European communities, which were at the margin of the hemisphere-wide system and were emerging from a period of downturn relative to some other parts of the system. Iberian Christian states were in conflict with Maghreb states and European merchant communities were having commercial difficulties both there and in the eastern Mediterranean. The opening of a sea route to West African gold mining regions, along a sailing route known since antiquity, and using maritime technology known to non-Europeans as well as Europeans, was an obvious strategy. By the late fifteenth century the radii of travel had lengthened so that a sea route to India was found to be feasible (with piloting help from African and Indian sailors). The leap across the Atlantic in 1492 was certainly one of the great adventures of human history, but it has been in a context of shared technological and geographical knowledge, high potential for commercial success, and other factors that place it, in a hemispheric perspective, as something that could have been undertaken by non-Europeans just as easily as by Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Europeans had one advantage. America was vastly more accessible from Iberian ports than from any extra-European mercantile-maritime centers that had the capacity for long-distance sea voyages. Accessibility was in part a matter of sailing distance. Sofala, which is presumed to have been the southernmost major seaport in East Africa in that period (there may have been others farther south), is roughly 3,000 miles farther away from an American landfall than are the Canary Islands (Columbus&#039;s jumping-off point) and 5,000 miles farther from any densely populated coast with possibilities for trade or plunder. The distance from China to America&#039;s northwest coast was even greater, and greater still to the rich societies of Mexico.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To all of this we must add the sailing conditions on these various routes. Sailing from the Indian Ocean into the Atlantic one sails against prevailing winds. The North Pacific is somewhat stormy and winds are not reliable. From the Canaries to the West Indies, on the other hand, there blow the trade winds, and the return voyage is made northward into the westerlies. Obviously an explorer does not have this information at hand at the time of the voyage into unknown seas. The extent of the geographical knowledge possessed by Atlantic fishing communities in the fifteenth century remains, however, an unanswered and intriguing question, and there is speculation that these people fished around Newfoundland and the Grand Banks before 1492. More concretely, the Iberian sailors going to and from the Canaries, Madeira, and the Azores made use of the same basic wind circulation as did Columbus in crossing the entire ocean; Columbus knew that the trade winds (or easterlies) would assist him outbound and had good reason to believe that the westerlies would assist the return voyage. The point here is a matter of strong probabilities. Overall, it is vastly more probable that an Iberian ship would effect a passage (round trip) to America than would an African or Asian ship in the late fifteenth century, and, even if such a voyage were made by the latter, it is vastly more probable that Columbus&#039;s landfall in the West Indies would initiate historical consequences than would have been the case for an African ship reaching Brazil or a Chinese ship reaching California.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Is this environmental determinism? There is no more environmentalism here than there is in, say, some statement about the effect of oilfields on societies of the Middle East. I am asserting only the environmental conditions that support and hinder long-distance oceanic travel. In any case, if the choice were between an environmentalistic explanation and one that claimed superiority of one group over all others, as Eurocentric diffusionism does, we would certainly settle for environmentalism.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before we leave this topic, two important questions remain to be asked. First, why did not West Africans &amp;quot;discover&amp;quot; America since they were even closer to it than the Iberians were? The answer seems to be that mercantile, protocapitalist centers in West and Central Africa were not oriented to commerce by sea (as were those of East Africa). The great long-distance trade routes led across the Sudan to the Nile and the Middle East, across the Sahara to the Maghreb and the Mediterranean, and so forth. Sea trade existed all along the western coast, but it was not large in scale, given that civilizations were mainly inland and trading partners lay northward and eastward. Second, why did the trading cities of the Maghreb fail to reach America? This region (as Ibn Khaldun noted not long before) was in a political and commercial slump. In 1492 it was under pressure from the Iberians and the Turks. Just at that historical conjuncture, this region lacked a capacity for major long-distance oceanic expeditions. Also, these cities, which traded directly with the Sudan and the gold regions, did not have the economic incentive that Europeans had to bypass the Saharan land routes in search of a new—that is, cheaper—source of gold.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Why the Conquest Was Successful ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
America became significant in the rise of Europe, and the rise of capitalism, soon after the first contact in 1492. Immediately a process began, and explosively enlarged, involving the destruction of American states and civilizations, the plunder of precious metals, the exploitation of labor, and the occupation of American lands by Europeans. If we are to understand the impact of all of this on Europe (and capitalism), we have to understand how it occurred and why it happened so quickly—why, in a word, the conquest was successful.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a second crucial reason we need to understand the causality of the conquest. A nondiffusionist history starts all causal arguments with the working assumption that Europeans had no innate superiority, in any dimension of culture, over non-Europeans, no a priori &amp;quot;higher potential&amp;quot; for progress. This leads first to a recognition that Europeans in 1492 had no special advantage over Asians and Africans, ideological, social, or material. But it demands that we make the same working hypothesis about all human communities. Why, then, did Europeans discover America instead of Americans discovering Europe (or Africa, or Asia)? And why, after the first contact, did Europeans conquer the American civilizations instead of being defeated and driven from America&#039;s shores? The working assumption of cultural uniformitarianism—or, if you prefer, the psychic unity of humankind—here confronts the diffusionist tendency to dismiss the peoples of America as primitive and irrelevant.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Blaut, &amp;quot;Diffusionism: A Uniformitarian Critique&amp;quot; (1987).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There were several immediate reasons why American civilizations succumbed, but one of these is of paramount importance and probably constitutes a sufficient cause in and of itself. This is the massive depopulation caused by the pandemics of Eastern Hemisphere diseases that were introduced to America by Europeans.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;For general reviews, see Crosby, &#039;&#039;The Columbian Exchange&#039;&#039; (1972) and McNeill, &#039;&#039;Plagues and Peoples&#039;&#039; (1976). See Borah and Cooke, &amp;quot;La Demografía Histórica de América Latina: Necesidades y Perspectivas&amp;quot; (1972); Whitmore, &amp;quot;A Simulation of Sixteenth-Century Population Collapse in the Basin of Mexico&amp;quot; (1991); Alchon, &#039;&#039;Native Society and Disease in Colonial Ecuador&#039;&#039; (1991); Lovell, &amp;quot;&#039;Heavy Shadows and Black Night&#039;: Disease and Depopulation in Colonial America&amp;quot; (1992).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; A second factor was the considerable advantage Europeans held in military technology, but this advantage has to be kept in perspective. The technological gap was not so great that it could by itself bring military victory—after the initial battles—against American armies that were vastly larger and would sooner or later have adopted the enemy&#039;s technology. America is a vast territory, and in 1492 it had a very large population, numbering at least 50 million people and conceivably as many as 200 million, a goodly proportion of these people living in state-organized societies with significant military capability.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Denevan, &#039;&#039;The Native Population of the Americas in 1492&#039;&#039; (1976), for a review of the disputes concerning the American population at the time of the conquest.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Military technology tends, historically, to diffuse from one camp to the opposing camp in a relatively short time. Moreover, the superiority of the Spaniards&#039; primitive guns was not really very great when compared with the Americans&#039; bows and arrows. I think it is, therefore, certain that the tide would have turned against the Europeans had the matter been merely one of military capability. There would have been no conquest, or the conquest would have embraced only a limited territory, and certainly would not have swept south as far as the great civilizations of the central Andes. The point is that history went in a different direction because of the incredibly severe and incredibly rapid impact of introduced diseases. Resistance collapsed because the Americans were dying in epidemics even before the battles were joined.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Crosby, &#039;&#039;The Columbian Exchange&#039;&#039; (1972); Alchon, &#039;&#039;Native Society and Disease in Colonial Ecuador&#039;&#039; (1991).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Probably 90% of the population of central Mexico was wiped out during the sixteenth century; the majority of these deaths occurred early enough to assist the political conquest. Parallel processes took place in other parts of the hemisphere, especially where there were major concentrations of population, these in most cases being areas of state organization and high civilization. Perhaps three-quarters of the entire population of America was wiped out during that century.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;For a discussion of the various calculations, see Denevan, &#039;&#039;The Native Population of the Americas in 1492&#039;&#039; (1976); Denevan, &amp;quot;The Pristine Myth: The Landscape of the Americas in 1492&amp;quot; (1992); Lovell, &amp;quot;&#039;Heavy Shadows and Black Night&#039;&amp;quot; (1992); and Whitmore, &amp;quot;A Simulation of Sixteenth-Century Population Collapse in the Basin of Mexico&amp;quot; (1991).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Millions died in battle with the Spaniards and Portuguese and in forced-labor centers such as the mines of Mexico and Peru, but much greater numbers died in epidemics, and this was the reason that resistance to the conquest was rapidly overcome in most areas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Both the susceptibility of American populations to Eastern Hemisphere diseases and the lower level of military technology among Western Hemisphere peoples can be explained in fairly straightforward cultural evolutionary terms, although evidence bearing on the matter is partly indirect. The Western Hemisphere was not occupied by humans until very late in the Paleolithic period; there is dispute about the first arrivals, but most scholars do not believe that the Americas were occupied before 30,000 B.P. The first immigrants did not possess agriculture. The earliest migrations preceded the Agricultural Revolution in the Eastern Hemisphere; in addition, the source area for the migrations, northeastern Siberia, is generally too cold for agriculture, even for present-day agriculture, and we would not expect to find that these cultures were experimenting with incipient agriculture 20,000 years or so ago although some low-latitude cultures were doing so. Migrants to America were paleolithic hunters, gatherers, fishers, and shellfishers. They came in small numbers, apparently in a widely spaced series of relatively small population movements, and spread throughout both North and South America. Only after some millennia had passed was the stock of resources for hunting, fishing, gathering, and shellfishing under any significant pressure from humans. One assumes that population growth was slow but—this is of course speculative—that population growth eventually did reach the point where conditions were favorable to an Agricultural Revolution.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The assumption here is that population continued to grow so long as food resources for hunting, gathering, fishing, and shellfishing were abundant. At a certain purely hypothetical time, it is likely that people who had certainly already experimented with crop cultivation, found that a better supply of food (and fiber, etc.) would be obtained through agriculture, and so began the transformation. Note that this argument is in no way Malthusian.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In the Eastern Hemisphere the Agricultural Revolution seems to have occurred (as a qualitative change) roughly 10,000–12,000 years ago. In the Western Hemisphere that point may have been reached about 4,000 years later.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Fiedel, &#039;&#039;Prehistory of the Americas&#039;&#039; (1987).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Thereafter, cultural evolution in the Western Hemisphere proceeded along lines somewhat parallel to those of Eastern Hemisphere evolution: the development of agricultural societies, of monumental ceremonial centers, science, writing, cities, feudal class structures, and mercantile trade. It seems, indeed, that the Western Hemisphere societies were closing the gap. But in 1492, military technology in the most advanced and powerful states was still well behind that of Eastern Hemisphere states. Metal was just coming into use in this arena, and guns had not been invented. Hence the superiority of Cortes&#039;s armies over Moctezuma&#039;s and Pizarro&#039;s over the Incas&#039;. (When Cortes arrived at Tenochtitlán the Aztecs were already dying in great numbers from European diseases which, apparently, had been carried by American traders from Cuba to Mexico. Likewise, the Incas apparently were succumbing to these diseases before Pizarro arrived.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Crosby, &#039;&#039;The Columbian Exchange&#039;&#039; (1972), Lovell, &amp;quot;&#039;Heavy Shadows and Black Night,&#039;&amp;quot; and Alchon, &#039;&#039;Native Society and Disease in Colonial Ecuador&#039;&#039; (1991).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The susceptibility of American populations to Eastern Hemisphere diseases, and the consequent devastation of American settlements, collapse of states, and defeat and subjugation by the Europeans, is explained within the same general model. Small populations entered America and probably bore with them only a small subset of the diseases that existed in the Eastern Hemisphere at the time of their departure. They came, in addition, from a rather isolated, thinly populated part of the hemisphere, and a part which, having a cold climate, would have lacked some diseases characteristic of warm regions. Perhaps more important is the history of the diseases themselves. Many diseases originated or became epidemiologically significant during or after the Agricultural Revolution, and have ecological connections to agriculture, to urbanization, to zoological and botanical changes in the ecosystems strongly modified by human land use, and so on. In the Eastern Hemisphere humanity entered these ecological situations after the initial migrations to the Western Hemisphere, hence these migrants to America would not have carried these diseases with them. Later migrants may have done so (although this is again unlikely because they came from a cold and isolated part of Asia, and came in small numbers). But we can assume that the sparse settlement, the hunting-gathering-fishing-shellfishing way of life, and the absence of agricultural settlements and urbanization in the Americas during many millennia, would have caused a disappearance of some of the Eastern Hemisphere diseases that had been carried across to the Americas by migrants. After a time the American populations would have lost their physiological immunities to diseases no longer present in these populations, and they would of course lack immunities to diseases never before encountered. It is known, in this regard, that utter devastation was produced in the Americas from diseases to which Eastern Hemisphere populations had such high levels of immunity that they experienced these diseases as minor maladies only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hence there is no need to take seriously any longer the various myths that explain the defeat of the Americans in terms of imputed irrationality or superstitiousness or any of the other classical, often racist, myths about American civilizations in 1492. (The most widely known of these myths is the idea that Mexicans imagined that Cortés and his troops were gods, and fell down before them in awe instead of fighting. This did not happen.) The relatively minor difference in technology between the two communities, and the impact of Eastern Hemisphere diseases upon Western Hemisphere communities, can be explained in terms of the settlement history of the Western Hemisphere and its consequences. The Americans were not conquered: they were infected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Europe in 1492 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1492, European society was rather sluggishly moving out of feudalism and toward capitalism. Nothing in the landscape would suggest that a revolutionary transformation was imminent, or even that the social and economic changes taking place were very rapid. The growth of the English woolen trade in the fifteenth century was not (as it is often depicted) a sign of revolutionary economic change: it was complemented by a decline in competing woolen industries in southern Europe.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Miskimin, &#039;&#039;The Economy of Early Renaissance Europe, 1300-1460&#039;&#039; (1969).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Rural growth in this century reflected mainly population recovery (in some areas) after the great plagues of the preceding century, and the commercialization of agriculture that was then taking place had been doing so for some time.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Abel, &#039;&#039;Agricultural Fluctuations in Europe from the Thirteenth to the Twentieth Centuries&#039;&#039; (1980).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Towns were growing, but only slowly, and the urban population was still only a small fraction of total population (except in Italy and the Low Countries); and the urban population of Europe was smaller than it was in many non-European areas.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;de Vries, &#039;&#039;European Urbanization, 1500-1800&#039;&#039; (1984).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; There were strong signs even of economic contraction instead of growth.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hodgett, &#039;&#039;A Social and Economic History of Medieval Europe&#039;&#039; (1972) (&amp;quot;[The] 200 years after c.1320 may be said to be a period of down-turn in the [European] economy as a whole,&amp;quot; p. 212); Lopez and Miskimin, &amp;quot;The Economic Depression of the Renaissance,&amp;quot; (1961-1962); C. T. Smith, &#039;&#039;An Historical Geography of Western Europe Before 1800&#039;&#039; (1969).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The Italian Renaissance, in economic terms, did not raise the Italian centers above the level of many non-European centers, including those in nearby Islamic countries (for instance, Cairo), and the Renaissance was not at all a technological revolution.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Lopez, &amp;quot;Hard Times and Investment in Culture&amp;quot; (1953); Thorndyke, &amp;quot;Renaissance or Prenaissance?&amp;quot; (1943).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; All of this needs to be said by way of setting the stage. Before 1492 there was slow growth in Europe, perhaps even a downturn. Certainly—and this is accepted by the majority of European historians—no truly revolutionary transformation was underway in 1492.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within a few decades after 1492 the rate of growth and change speeded up dramatically, and Europe clearly entered a period of rapid metamorphosis. There is no dispute about this fact, which is seen in the known statistics relating to prices, urban growth, and much more beside.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Braudel, &amp;quot;Prices in Europe from 1450 to 1750&amp;quot; (1967); de Vries, &#039;&#039;European Urbanization&#039;&#039; (1984). On the rapid impact of these changes on Asia, see, for example, Atwell, &amp;quot;International Bullion Flows and the Chinese Economy circa 1530-1650&amp;quot; (1982); Aziza Hasan, &amp;quot;The Silver Currency Output of the Mughal Empire and Prices in India during the 16th and 17th centuries&amp;quot; (1969).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; What is disputable is the causal connection between these explosive sixteenth-century changes and the beginnings of economic exploitation in America (and, significantly but secondarily, in Africa and Asia). There is agreement that the effect was profound. But did it truly generate a qualitative transformation in Europe&#039;s economy? Or did it suddenly quicken a process already well underway? Or did it merely modify this process slightly with effects such as inflation? This question cannot be answered unless we break out of the European historical tunnel and look at what was going on in America, Asia, and Africa between 1492 and 1688, the symbolic date for Europe&#039;s bourgeois revolution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== COLONIALISM AND THE RISE OF EUROPE, 1492-1688 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Colonialism and Capitalism in the Sixteenth Century ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enterprise in the Americas was from the start a matter of capital accumulation: of profit. No matter if some elements of medieval law were incorporated in legal and land-granting systems in (for Europeans) the New World, and if the Iberian governments took a substantial, though usually overestimated, portion of the profits. The goal of all European individuals and groups involved in the enterprise, clergy apart, was to make money, for oneself or one&#039;s country (usually the former).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The leading group, almost everywhere, was the European protocapitalist class, not only merchants but also industrialists and profit-oriented landlords—not only Iberian but also Italian, Flemish, Dutch, German, English, and so on. This class community took its profit from American enterprise and invested part of it in Europe, buying land and developing commercial agriculture, developing industries (like shipbuilding, sugar refining, and so on) that were associated with the growing colonial enterprise, developing profitable businesses in spheres of activity which served the growing European economy (for instance, the burgeoning Atlantic fisheries), building urban structures, and the like. Part of the profit was plowed back into additional colonial risk enterprise, in America and in the new trading enterprises in southern Asia, Africa, and the Levant. One of the deceptively subtle aspects of the process was the immense increase in purchases of all sorts by European merchants in all markets, inside and outside of Europe, growing out of the fact that these merchants now had incredible amounts of precious metals or metal-based money at their command and could offer previously unheard-of prices. Perhaps half the gold and silver brought back from America in the sixteenth century was contraband, hence available directly for this kind of enterprise, but the remainder, after passing through the great customs houses, quickly entered circulation as the Iberian governments paid out gold and silver for goods and services.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Céspedes, &#039;&#039;Latin America: The Early Years&#039;&#039; (1974); McAlister, &#039;&#039;Spain and Portugal in the New World, 1492-1700&#039;&#039; (1984).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Colonial enterprise in the sixteenth century produced capital in a number of ways. One was gold and silver mining. A second was plantation agriculture, principally in Brazil. A third was the trade with Asia in spices, cloth, and the like. A fourth and by no means minor element was the profit returned to European investors from a variety of productive and commercial enterprises in the Americas, including profit on production for local use in Mexico, Peru, and elsewhere; profit on sale of goods imported from Europe; profit on a variety of secondary exports from America (leather, dyestuffs, etc.); profit on land sales in America; profit returned to Europe by families and corporations holding land grants in Mexico and other areas. A fifth was slaving. A sixth, piracy. Notice that all of this is normal capital accumulation; none of it is the mysterious thing called &amp;quot;primitive accumulation.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In classical political economy, and in some of modern Marxist economics, the idea of &amp;quot;primitive accumulation&amp;quot; serves as a kind of catchall for ways of accumulating capital that did not involve—in essence—capitalist enterprise. Pirate treasures and the like were &amp;quot;primitive accumulation,&amp;quot; and, in general, the kind of wealth brought from the American colonies in the sixteenth century was considered primitive accumulation. (According to Marx, &amp;quot;The treasures captured outside Europe by undisguised looting, enslavement and murder flowed back to the mother-country and were turned into capital there&amp;quot;: Marx, &#039;&#039;Capital&#039;&#039;, 1976, vol. 1, p. 918). But &amp;quot;primitive accumulation&amp;quot; cannot really be defined with any precision. I will argue here that the wealth accumulated in the Americas was primitive only in the sense that it was part of a preindustrial-capitalist economy. In other respects, notably in the involvement of labor and value produced by labor, it was regular accumulation. The distinction is very fundamental, as we will see, because, if what transpired in the colonies was not &amp;quot;real&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;ordinary&amp;quot; accumulation, scholars can claim that the colonial economy was backward and &amp;quot;feudal,&amp;quot; rather than a primitive sort of capitalism.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; (Value from wage labor, not to mention forced labor, was involved, and much of it was value from production, not simply from trade.) Accumulation from these sources was massive. It was massive enough so that the process cannot be dismissed as a minor adjunct of protocapitalist accumulation in Europe itself, and it was massive enough, I believe, to fuel a major transformation in Europe, the rise to power of the bourgeoisie and the immense efflorescence of preindustrial capitalism, in ways that we will discuss.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Precious Metals ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We notice first the export of gold and silver from the Americas and its insertion within the circuits of an Eastern Hemispheric market economy in which gold and silver already provide the common measure of value, directly or indirectly, in almost all markets. The flow of precious metals began immediately after the European discovery of America, and by 1640 at least 180 tons of gold and 17,000 tons of silver are known to have reached Europe.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;E. J. Hamilton, &#039;&#039;American Treasure and the Price Revolution in Spain, 1501-1650&#039;&#039; (1934); Brading and Cross, &amp;quot;Colonial Silver Mining: Mexico and Peru&amp;quot; (1972); H. and P. Chaunu, &#039;&#039;Séville et l&#039;Atlantique (1504-1650)&#039;&#039;, vol. 6, pt. 1 (1956); Cross, &amp;quot;American Bullion Production and Export 1550-1750&amp;quot; (1983).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; (The real figures must be at least double these amounts, since records were poor for some areas and periods and since contraband was immensely important.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See note 19 above.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;) Additional quantities of gold came from colonial activities in Africa. In the period 1561 to 1580 about 85% of the entire world&#039;s production of silver came from the Americas. The simple quantity of gold and silver in circulation in the Eastern Hemisphere economy as a whole was profoundly affected: hemispheric silver stock may have been tripled and gold stock increased by 20% during the course of the sixteenth century as a result of bullion brought from America.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Vicens Vives, &#039;&#039;An Economic History of Spain&#039;&#039; (1969).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The fact that much of the pre-existing stock must have been frozen in uses not permitting direct or indirect conversion to money suggests to me that American bullion may have as much as doubled the gold- and silver-based money supply of the Eastern Hemisphere as a whole. (In Europe, the circulation of metal coins increased eight- or ten-fold in the course of the century.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Vilar, &#039;&#039;A History of Gold and Money, 1450-1920&#039;&#039; (1976).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;) This process must be seen in perspective: it is money flowing constantly and in massive amounts into Europe, through Europe, and from Europe to Asia and Africa, constantly replenished at the entry points (Seville, Antwerp, Genoa, etc.) with more American supplies, and constantly permitting those who hold it to offer better prices for all goods—as well as labor and land—in all markets, than anyone else had ever been able to offer in prior times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The importance of these flows of gold and silver is routinely underestimated by scholars, mainly for three reasons (apart from implicit diffusionism, the simple tendency to undervalue causal events in non-Europe). First, the process is seen somehow as purely primitive accumulation. But the metals were mined by workers and transported by workers; the enterprise overall involved risk capital and all of the other familiar traits of the sorts of protocapitalist productive enterprises which were characteristic of that time (that it was partly state-controlled does not alter this argument, nor does the fact that some of the labor was unfree); and very major economic and social systems were built around the mines themselves in Mexico, Peru, and other parts of America.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Second, the argument that precious metal flows significantly affected the European economy is dismissed by some scholars as &amp;quot;monetarism&amp;quot; (roughly, the theory that changes in money alone are very significant for changes in the economy overall). The error in this charge is a failure to see the sixteenth-century economy in its own, appropriate, geographical and social context, and to impute to the economy of that time the liquidity of exchange and the relative lack of spatial friction that characterizes the capitalist economy of our own time. Two facts here are basic. First of all, the possession of precious metal was highly localized in space. European merchants, as a community, obtained it and set it in motion outward, toward rural Europe and toward markets outside of Europe. Second of all, the supply of precious metal was essentially continuous, and therefore the advantage held by European protocapitalists in terms of prices they could offer for commodities, labor, and land was persistently higher than the prices which competitors anywhere could offer. So the protocapitalist community very steadily undermined the competition in all markets across the Eastern Hemisphere, within Europe and without, eventually gaining control of most international seaborne trade in most of the mercantile-maritime centers from Sofala to Calicut to Malacca.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;There remained, nonetheless, a very large trade carried on by non-European merchants in the China Seas and the Indian Ocean.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The penetration of these markets, the acquisition of trading bases, and the control of a few small but important producing areas (like some islands of the Moluccas), was not a matter of European rationality or venturesomeness, but rather reflected the availability to Europeans of American gold and silver, trans-shipped through Lisbon, Antwerp, Acapulco (in the &amp;quot;Manila galleons&amp;quot;), and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A third sort of doubt about the importance of American gold and silver is associated with the critique of Earl Hamilton&#039;s classic theory that the precious metal supply produced an imbalance between factors of production in the European economy, produced thereby a windfall of profits, and thus in effect destabilized the economy and moved it toward capitalism.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;E. J. Hamilton, &amp;quot;American Treasure and the Rise of Capitalism&amp;quot; (1929), and &#039;&#039;American Treasure and the Price Revolution in Spain&#039;&#039; (1934). Also see the important book by Walter Prescott Webb, &#039;&#039;The Great Frontier&#039;&#039; (1951), which builds in part on Hamilton&#039;s theory to argue for the great importance of the Americas in the rise of Europe during this period and later.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Hamilton was one of the few economic historians to perceive that American gold and silver was a crucial, central cause of change in Europe, although he was (partly) wrong about the mechanisms that brought about this change. The metals did not transform the economy in any direct sense. Rather, they enriched the protocapitalist class and thereby gave them the power to immensely accelerate the transformation that was already underway—not only in Europe—toward capitalism as a political and social system, and to prevent non-European capitalists from sharing in the process. American bullion hastened the rise of capitalism and was crucial in the process by which it became centrated in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Plantations ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The impact of the slave plantation system on Europe&#039;s economy was felt mainly in the seventeenth century and thereafter. But part of the general undervaluing of the significance of early colonialism—of the world outside of Europe—is a tendency not to notice that the plantation system was of considerable importance even in the sixteenth century. Moreover, the early history of the Atlantic sugar plantation economy gives a revealing picture of the way in which the protocapitalist colonial economy was eroding the feudal economy. Sugar planting was not a new enterprise; sugar (contrary to myth) was not a rare commodity, and sugar planting (also contrary to myth) was not an insignificant economic curiosity at the fringe of capitalist development. Commercial and feudal cane sugar production was found throughout the Mediterranean in the fifteenth century.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Galloway, &#039;&#039;The Sugar Cane Industry: An Historical Geography from its Origins to 1914&#039;&#039; (1989); Deerr, &#039;&#039;The History of Sugar&#039;&#039; (1949-1950).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Although little is known about the way planting was organized, it is known that commercial sugar production was important in India 2,000 years ago (apparently it was a Mauryan state industry), and in the Middle Ages commercial sugar planting under various feudal and probably protocapitalist systems of organization was found in East Africa, part of West Africa, Morocco, Egypt, Cyprus, the Levant, various parts of Mediterranean Europe, and other regions.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See, for example, Galloway, &#039;&#039;The Sugar Cane Industry&#039;&#039; (1989); Deerr, &#039;&#039;The History of Sugar&#039;&#039; (1949-1950); Watson, &#039;&#039;Agricultural Innovation in the Early Islamic World: The Diffusion of Crops and Farming Techniques, 700-1100&#039;&#039; (1983); N. S. Gupta, &#039;&#039;Industrial Structure of India During the Medieval Period&#039;&#039; (1970); Niane, ed., &#039;&#039;UNESCO General History of Africa, Vol. 4&#039;&#039; (1984); Bray, &#039;&#039;Science and Civilization in China, Vol. 6, Part 2, Agriculture&#039;&#039; (1984).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; If cane sugar was not an important commodity in northern Europe this was because of its price, as against that of sweeteners like honey. Europeans first moved the commercial plantation system out into the newly settled Atlantic islands from Madeira to São Tomé and then vastly expanded production in the Americas. But throughout the sixteenth century the new plantations merely supplanted the older Mediterranean sugar-producing regions; total production for the Europe-Mediterranean market did not rise until later.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Deerr, &#039;&#039;The History of Sugar&#039;&#039; (1949-1950).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; This was capitalist production displacing feudal and semifeudal plantation production, using the twin advantages of colonialism: empty land and cheap labor. No other industry was as significant as the plantation system for the rise of capitalism before the nineteenth century.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1600 Brazil exported about 30,000 tons of sugar with a gross sale value of £2,000,000. This is about double the total annual value of all exports from England to all of the world in that period.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Simonsen, &#039;&#039;Historia Económica do Brasil, 1500-1820&#039;&#039; (1944); Furtado, &#039;&#039;The Economic Growth of Brazil&#039;&#039; (1963); Minchinton, &#039;&#039;The Growth of English Overseas Trade&#039;&#039; (1969). Also see the more general, but extremely important, works of I. Wallerstein, A. G. Frank, and S. Amin, particularly Wallerstein&#039;s &#039;&#039;The Modern World System&#039;&#039;, 3 vols. (1974-1988), Frank&#039;s &#039;&#039;Capitalism and underdevelopment in Latin America&#039;&#039; (1968) and his &#039;&#039;World Accumulation, 1492-1789&#039;&#039; (1978), and Amin&#039;s &#039;&#039;Accumulation on a World Scale&#039;&#039; (1974) as well as his &#039;&#039;Unequal Development&#039;&#039; (1976).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It will be recalled that British exports in that period, principally of wool, are sometimes considered paradigmatic for the &amp;quot;awakening,&amp;quot; indeed the &amp;quot;rise,&amp;quot; of early-modern Europe. Also in 1600, per capita earnings from sugar in Brazil, for all except Indians, was about equal to per capita income in Britain later in that century.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Edel, &amp;quot;The Brazilian Sugar Cycle of the 17th Century and the Rise of West Indian Competition&amp;quot; (1969).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The rate of accumulation in the Brazilian plantation industry was so high at the end of the sixteenth century that it was able to generate enough capital to finance a doubling of its capacity every two years.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Furtado, &#039;&#039;Economic Growth of Brazil&#039;&#039; (1963).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Early in the seventeenth century the Dutch protocapitalist community (which was heavily involved in the Brazilian sugar enterprise, mainly in the shipping and sales dimensions) calculated that profit rates in the industry were 56% per year, totalling nearly £1,000,000 per year. The rate of profit was higher still a bit earlier, at the close of the sixteenth century, when production costs, including the cost of purchasing slaves, amounted to only one-fifth of income from sugar sales. These statistics should be seen against the background of an industry that was not responding to some novel demand for some novel product in an already-rising Europe, but was merely (in essence) undercutting the precapitalist Mediterranean producers of Spain, Italy, Morocco, Egypt, and elsewhere, in the supply of a highly important commercial product.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sugar is of course the centerpiece of the plantation system down to the late eighteenth century. But other kinds of colonial production, mainly but not only agricultural, and fully as close to capitalism as was the Brazil plantation system, were of some significance even before the end of the sixteenth century. There was, for instance, some direct production of spices in the Moluccas and some European involvement with Indian merchant capitalists in the organization pepper production in South India. Dyes, tobacco, and other commercially valuable products were flowing from America to Europe. A very large agricultural economy existed in parts of America to supply food, fiber, leather, and other necessities to the mining settlements and other settlements. Immediately after 1492 (or before?) west European fishermen and whalers developed an immense industry in Newfoundland and elsewhere on the North American coast.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To all of this must be added the profits from other sorts of colonial and semicolonial activities in the Eastern Hemisphere.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See K. N. Chaudhuri, &#039;&#039;Trade and civilization in the Indian Ocean&#039;&#039; (1985); Satish Chandra, &#039;&#039;The Indian Ocean: Explorations in History, Commerce and Politics&#039;&#039; (1987); Magalhães-Godinho, &#039;&#039;L&#039;Economie de L&#039;Empire Portugais aux XV et XVI Siècles&#039;&#039; (1969).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The slave trade was highly profitable even in the sixteenth century. European merchant capitalists of all nations profited greatly from the Lisbon trade with Asia and East Africa in textiles and particularly spices (the Asian spices carried by the Portuguese and sold mainly through Antwerp did not replace the traditional Mediterranean flow but rather added to it, hence providing a novel and important source of accumulation). There was, in addition, considerable profit from the within-Asia trade resulting from the domination of long-distance oceanic trade in East Africa, India, and Southeast Asia by Portugal (with participation also by Spain and later Holland). Broadly speaking, however, accumulation deriving from Western Hemisphere colonial activities far outweighed that from Eastern Hemisphere activities, colonial and semicolonial, in the sixteenth century. Overall, both the quantitative significance, in that century, of production and trade in colonial and semicolonial areas and the immense profitability of the enterprise, that is, the rapid capital accumulation which it fostered directly and (in Europe) indirectly, add up to a significant vector force, easily able to change the process of economic transformation in Europe from sluggish evolution to rapid revolution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Effects ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There seem to be two particularly good ways to assess the real significance for the rise of capitalism of sixteenth-century colonial production in America, and some other areas, along with trading, piracy, and the like, in Asia and Africa. One way is to trace the direct and indirect effects of colonialism on European society, looking for movements of goods and capital, tracing labor flows into industries and regions stimulated or created by colonial enterprise, and looking at the way urbanization flourished in those cities that were engaged in colonial (and more generally extra-European) enterprise or closely connected to it, and the like. This processes overall would then be examined in relation to the totality of changes taking place in Europe in that century, to determine whether, in Europe itself, changes clearly resulting from the direct and indirect impact of extra-European activities were the prime movers for economic and social change. This task still remains undone. The second way is to attempt to arrive at a global calculation of the amount of labor (free and unfree) that was employed in European enterprises in America, Africa, and Asia, along with the amount of labor in Europe itself which was employed in activities derived from extra-European enterprise, and then to look at these quantities in relation to the total labor market in Europe for economic activities that can be thought of as connected to the rise of capitalism. This task has not been done either; indeed, as far as I know little research has been done on sixteenth-century labor forces and labor markets in American settlements or indeed in Europe. So the proposition which I am arguing here, concerning the significance of sixteenth-century colonialism (and related extra-European activities) for the rise of capitalism in Europe, perhaps cannot be tested as yet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Still, there are suggestive indications. Some of these have been mentioned already: matters of assessing the quantities and values of colonial exports to Europe. We can also speculate about labor. One approach is through population. The population of Spain and Portugal in the mid-sixteenth century may have been around nine million.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;de Vries, &#039;&#039;European Urbanization&#039;&#039; (1984).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Estimates of sixteenth-century populations for America vary widely and there is much controversy about population levels and rates of decline,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;William Denevan, &amp;quot;Introduction,&amp;quot; in Denevan, ed., &#039;&#039;The Native Population of the Americas in 1492&#039;&#039; (1976), and &amp;quot;The Pristine Myth: The Landscape of the Americas in 1492&amp;quot; (1992); Lovell, &amp;quot;&#039;Heavy Shadows and Black Night&#039;&amp;quot; (1992).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; but for the present, highly speculative, and essentially methodological, argument, I will ignore the controversies and play with global estimates. The population of Mexico at midcentury may have been around six million, a population that was undergoing continuous decline from its preconquest level of perhaps 30 million down to one-tenth of that figure (or perhaps less) in 1600.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Borah and Cook, &amp;quot;La demografía histórica de América Latina: necesidades y perspectivas&amp;quot; (1972); Whitmore, &amp;quot;A Simulation of Sixteenth-Century Population Collapse in the Basin of Mexico&amp;quot; (1991).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Populations in the Andean regions involved in mineral and textile production for the Spaniards may (I am speculating) have totalled five million in the late sixteenth century. Perhaps we can add an additional two million for the population of other parts of Ibero-America that were within regions of European control and presumably involved, more or less, in the European-dominated economy. Let us, then, use a ball-park estimate of 13 million for the American population that was potentially yielding surplus value to Europeans in the mid-to-late sixteenth century. The population seems larger than that of Iberia. Granted, the comparison should be made with a larger part of Europe, certainly including the Low Countries, which were intimately involved in the exploitation of America (and Asia) at this period, along with parts of Italy and other countries. Assume then a figure of 20 million for Europe as against 13 million for America.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I see no reason to argue that the European populations were more intimately involved in the rise of capitalism than the American populations—that is, the 13 million people who we assume were in European-dominated regions. It is likely that the proportion of the American population that was engaged in labor for Europeans, as wage work, as forced labor including slave labor, and as the labor of farmers delivering goods as tribute or rent in kind, was no lower than the proportion of Iberian people engaged in labor for commercialized sectors of the Spanish and Portuguese economy. Moreover, the level of exploitation for Indian labor must have been much higher than that for Iberian labor because portions of the Indian labor force were worked literally to death in this period—depopulation was due in part to forced labor—and so the capital generated by each American worker must have been higher than that generated by a European worker. (We need to remind ourselves again that we are dealing with a preindustrial, basically medieval economy in Europe. It cannot be argued, for instance, that technology or fixed capital in production was more advanced in the utilization of European than in that of American labor, so exploitation was in the last analysis a function of human effort.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We must next take into account the fact that the capital accumulated from the labor of Americans went directly to the economic sectors in Europe that were building capitalism, whereas most workers and peasants in Europe were still connected to essentially medieval sectors of the economy. Then we must add the labor of Africans and Asians. And finally, we must take into account the European workers, in Europe and elsewhere, whose labor must be considered part of the extra-European economy. By this admittedly speculative reasoning, free and unfree workers in the colonial and semicolonial economy of the late sixteenth century were providing as much or more surplus value and accumulated capital for European protocapitalism, the rising bourgeoisie, as were the workers of Europe itself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Little is known about the American work force in the sixteenth century, but, again, some speculations are possible. Las Casas asserted that three million or more Indians had been enslaved by the Spaniards in the northern part of Spanish America during the first half of the sixteenth century, and this figure, once dismissed, is now taken seriously.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Semo, &#039;&#039;Historia del Capitalismo en México: Los Orígenes, 1521-1763&#039;&#039; (1982).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It is known that more than 400,000 were enslaved in Nicaragua alone.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Radell, &amp;quot;The Indian Slave Trade and Population of Nicaragua During the Sixteenth Century&amp;quot; (1976).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It is realized also that Indian slave labor was extremely important in the European economy of America in that period, in Brazilian sugar planting, Mesoamerican and Antillean mining, and elsewhere. Let us speculate that 100,000 Indians were working as slaves for Spaniards in a given year in the mid-sixteenth century. Perhaps 20,000 Indians were working at free and forced labor in the mines of Mexico and the Andes in the latter part of the century,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Bakewell, &amp;quot;Mining in Colonial Spanish America&amp;quot; (1984).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and it is safe to assume that five times that number were involved in the mining economy overall. Potosí, the great Andean silver-mining city, had a population of 120,000 in the 1570s (larger than Paris, Rome, Madrid, Seville). A much greater but unknown number of Indians were workers on haciendas and other European enterprises, or provided periodic forced labor, or provided tribute and rent in kind. (The Cortés encomienda in Mexico included 50,000 Indians.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Semo, &#039;&#039;Historia del Capitalismo&#039;&#039; (1982).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;) There may have been 100,000 African slaves in America and on the island of São Tomé in the closing years of the century.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;For various calculations, see Curtin, &#039;&#039;The Atlantic Slave Trade&#039;&#039; (1969); Furtado, &#039;&#039;Economic Growth of Brazil&#039;&#039; (1963); Deerr, &#039;&#039;History of Sugar&#039;&#039; (1949-1950); Florescano, &amp;quot;The Formation and Economic Structure of the Hacienda in New Spain&amp;quot;; Inikori, &#039;&#039;The African Slave Trade from the Fifteenth to the Nineteenth Century&#039;&#039; (1979), esp. pp. 57 and 248; McAlister, &#039;&#039;Spain and Portugal in the New World&#039;&#039; (1984).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; There may have been 300,000 Europeans, Mulattos, and Mestizos in the Americas in 1570,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;McAlister, &#039;&#039;Spain and Portugal in the New World&#039;&#039; (1984).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; of whom conceivably as many as 250,000 were workers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Perhaps it would not be unreasonable to estimate that one million people were working in the European economy of the Western Hemisphere in the closing years of the sixteenth century, perhaps half of them engaged in productive labor in distinctly capitalist enterprises. Can this have been more than the European protocapitalist work force of the time? All of this is somewhat speculative, but it points toward the conclusion that American labor was a truly massive part of the total labor, and the surplus value it produced, that fueled the rise of capitalism in Europe in the early modern period. To this we must add three additional quantities: labor involved in the slave trade within continental Africa;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In the present discussion I am giving far too little attention to Africa and particularly to the effects of the slave trade in Africa. See Chapter 2.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; labor in other extra-European regions (São Tomé, Ternate, Calicut, and so on) that was incorporated into the European economy or produced goods for trade to Europeans; and labor of Europeans, inside and outside of Europe, which was part of the extra-European economy—sailors, soldiers, stevedores, teamsters, clerks, foremen, and the rest.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the sixteenth century the rise of Europe had well begun. As capital flowed into Europe, and as other effects of colonial enterprise also flowed into the European system or region, secondary causation appeared, including agricultural expansion and transformation, primitive manufacturing, urbanization, and expansion of rural settlements and the commercial economy. These latter have been looked at carefully but in a mainly tunnel-historical framework; as a result, the rise of Europe in the sixteenth century has appeared to be a process taking place wholly within the European spatial system, and caused wholly (or mainly) by autochthonous forces. As we have seen, this is an inaccurate picture and an incomplete one. Urbanization was taking place, but mainly in areas connected to the extra-European economy. Inflation was also (with some qualifications) most severe in these areas.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Fisher, &amp;quot;The Price Revolution: A Monetary Interpretation&amp;quot; (1989).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Among the sectors of the European economy that were growing in the sixteenth century, some, like piracy and shipbuilding, were tied directly to the extra-European economy, while others, like wheat production and North Atlantic fishing, were stimulated directly and indirectly by that economy.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Dunn, &#039;&#039;Sugar and Slaves: The Rise of the Planter Class in the English West Indies, 1624-1713&#039;&#039; (1972), pp. 10-11.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I would generalize as follows. The initiating condition, at the beginning of the sixteenth century, is a west and central European economy that is undergoing slow but definite change toward capitalism—as are many regions of Asia and Africa at that same time. Novel forces intrude into the European system, as impinging boundary processes, because of the conquest of America and the other extra-European events, intruding processes which consist mainly of capital and material products (and of course the labor embedded in these things). These then intersect with the ongoing evolving economic, technological, demographic, and other changes. Many new changes appear, as a result not of direct stimulus from the extra-European world but from the changes already underway, which themselves are mainly results of those extra-European boundary processes. The internal European changes of course feed forward to produce intensification of the processes going on in America, Asia, etc., and these, in turn, produce still more changes within Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We can see a geographical pattern in all of this. There is a tendency for major economic changes to occur first near the mercantile-maritime centers that participate in the extra-European processes. Obviously, not all of the centers that existed in 1492 were equal participants in that process, with some of the Iberian, Italian, and Flemish port cities taking the lead. But the network was sufficiently tight so that Hanseatic and English ports were early participants, as were inland cities with special economic characteristics, like Augsburg and Paris. From these many centers, the process spread into the interior of Europe, first into areas that supplied basic staple goods like wheat—the growth at that time of the Baltic wheat trade and manorial production of wheat in parts of central and east Europe is well known—and then elsewhere. At any given time we see a broad and irregular spatial pattern (of the type which geographers call &amp;quot;distance decay&amp;quot;) of descending levels of urbanization and commercial production as we move across the landscape toward interior Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other processes were underway as well, and so the pattern that I have mapped out here is much too simple. Population growth in some areas reflected sixteenth-century economic changes associated with extra-European events but in other areas it signified recovery from the fourteenth- and fifteenth-century population declines. Other changes, such as peasant revolts, reflected the general crisis of the late feudal economy, but the sixteenth-century rise of prices and (at least in some areas) rents was a contributing force in the unrest. As to the Reformation, I would argue in the Tawneyan tradition that it was broadly an effect, not an independent cause, of the economic changes that were taking place in Europe in the sixteenth century.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Tawney, &#039;&#039;Religion and the Rise of Capitalism&#039;&#039; (1952 edition).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; But which changes? The internal crumbling of feudalism? The forces impinging from the extra-European world? Both? Probably the spatial diffusion of the Reformation in the sixteenth century reflected mainly intra-European forces,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hannemann, &#039;&#039;The Diffusion of the Reformation in Southwestern Germany, 1518-1534&#039;&#039; (1975).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; but by the time of the seventeenth-century bourgeois revolutions, the areas most deeply involved in extra-European activities tended to be centers also of Protestantism. In short: the spatial patterns of change in sixteenth-century Europe reflect to some extent the integration of Europe with America, and secondarily Africa and Asia, but the pattern is still somewhat unclear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overall, the processes of transformation and modernization in sixteenth-century Europe were terribly complex, varying in time and place throughout most of that continent. But the generalization is nonetheless fairly straightforward. The extra-European component, after 1492, led to an immense stimulation of changes in Europe, those that produced on the one hand an increase in the rate of European economic change and growth, and on the other hand the beginnings of a centration of capitalism in Europe (a process discussed further below). By the end of the sixteenth century these extra-European forces had laid the foundation for the political and social triumph of (preindustrial) capitalism, or rather for the fact that the Glorious Revolution occurred in 1688, instead of much later, and in England, instead of Egypt or Zimbabwe or India or China (or all of these at once).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Colonialism and Capitalism in the Seventeenth Century ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the middle of the seventeenth century, changes were taking place in Europe at a rapid rate and on a massive scale, and the problem of sorting out the internal and external causes and effects for this period is a very complex matter. In this same period there occurred a massive expansion, in location and intensity, of formal and informal colonialism in the Americas and around the coasts of Africa and Asia, and for these extra-European processes the problem of complexity is compounded by a lack of quantitative data regarding volume of production, numbers in the labor forces, capital accumulation, and other information that would help us to judge the role of colonialism (as a broad concept) in the changes that were taking place within Europe. These matters are far too complex to permit us to discuss them satisfactorily here. I will limit myself to a rather sketchy intervention or (if you prefer to call it that) a model.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the beginning of the seventeenth century, the Netherlands and England had emerged as the centers (or center) of capitalist development in Europe.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;There is debate as to why the center shifted from Iberia to the lower Rhine-southern England region. Perhaps the same forces which had made this northern region a mercantile-maritime center in the Middle Ages permitted it to gain control of the overseas enterprise: namely, large population, abundant nearby fertile land and forest resources, access to many markets (the Rhine, the Baltic, etc.). Vis-à-vis Italy, it held most of these same advantages plus that of location on the Atlantic and possession of the requirements for rapid growth of oceanic shipping and fishing fleets.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Although Spain continued to feed huge quantities of silver and some gold into Europe in the first half of this century, and Portuguese plantations in Brazil and trading activities in Asia continued to be important fountains of accumulation, the main expansion of colonial enterprise after 1600 was Dutch and English. The crucial component was the West Indian plantation system, which expanded explosively after about 1640. (Fifty thousand slaves were imported into Barbados alone in the following 50 years. Probably two million slaves were imported into America in the course of the seventeenth century.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Deerr, &#039;&#039;The History of Sugar&#039;&#039; (1949-1950); Curtin, &#039;&#039;The Atlantic Slave Trade&#039;&#039; (1969); and Inikori, &#039;&#039;The African Slave Trade from the Fifteenth to the Nineteenth Century&#039;&#039; (1979). The question whether slave labor is or is not proletarian—a serious issue in discussions of the slave plantation system (see Mintz, &#039;&#039;Sweetness and Power: The Place of Sugar in Modern History&#039;&#039;, 1985)—will be taken up later in this chapter. In any event there is no disagreement about the contribution of slave (and other forced) labor to capital accumulation, hence to surplus value generation, using &amp;quot;surplus value&amp;quot; in a sense appropriate to modes of production different from industrial capitalism.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;) If we place the Dutch and British sugar colonies in the same economic space as the metropolitan countries themselves, it seems likely that the sugar plantation economy was the single largest productive sector in this expanded European economy (or &amp;quot;Atlantic economy,&amp;quot; as it is often called) aside from family farming, and by far the largest single generator of value. (Brazilian plantations, producing partly for Dutch capital, were still, in the mid-seventeenth century, more massive than the West Indian.) But British and Dutch enterprise in the Eastern Hemisphere was also expanding very rapidly; the East India companies were formed around 1600, and by 1650 the Dutch and British together controlled most of the intercontinental trade—unequal trade, and in a sense semicolonial trade—with Asia, as well as the slave trade in Africa. Meanwhile, Spanish enterprise was yielding substantial accumulation in America (whether or not there was a &amp;quot;seventeenth-century depression&amp;quot;). And we must not ignore the great variety of additional extra-European sources of accumulation: a now massive fishing industry in the northwestern Atlantic, resource extraction and the beginnings of European settlement in North America, the slave trade, piracy, Russian enterprise in Siberia, and much more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The key question is this: How central was the role played by colonial and semicolonial enterprise in the seventeenth-century rise of Europe and of capitalism within Europe? The model I would build involves two elements. The first is a continuation and enlargement of the sixteenth-century processes, which, as I argued, involved a sluggishly growing European economy quickened into rapid development by extra-European forces after 1492. By the middle of the next century the European bourgeoisie had strengthened their class position and (in the key locations) had enticed much of the feudal aristocracy into joining bourgeois enterprise,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;However, a good share of the old landowning elite joined in the new enterprise. It is not correct to assume that the new protocapitalist elite was in simple opposition to the old elite. There is much confusion on this matter, some of it occasioned by literal acceptance of Marx&#039;s idea that merchants are somehow not the class that evolves into the early capitalist, entrepreneurial, accumulating class. On the role of medieval merchants in protocapitalism, see Thrupp, &#039;&#039;The Merchant Class of Medieval London (1300-1500)&#039;&#039; (1948); Carus-Wilson, &#039;&#039;Medieval Merchant Venturers&#039;&#039; (1967).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and had well begun the process of destroying protocapitalist enterprise outside of Europe, as a result of the inflowing capital from America (and secondarily in that period, Africa and Asia).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, apart from stocks of precious metal, it is improbable that capital accumulated from extra-European enterprise in 1500-1650 amounted to a sizeable share of total invested capital in Europe, even in the more advanced regions of Europe, even in the economic sectors in which capital was more or less fluid. What it did do was provide a critical increment: everywhere it allowed the merchant-entrepreneurial community to offer higher prices for products, labor, and land; everywhere it put investment capital in the hands of classes and communities other than the traditional elite, the group less likely to accumulate beyond its social needs and less likely to reinvest profits in new ventures. Colonial capital, in a word, was new capital. Without it, the sluggish late-medieval economy of pre-1492 days would have continued its slow progress out of feudalism and toward capitalism (or something like capitalism), but there would have been no Seventeenth-Century Bourgeois Revolution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Perhaps the essence of capitalism, at a level of aggregation above the worker-capitalist class relation, is the reinvestment of profits to enlarge productive capacity. Capitalist enterprise can be technologically primitive or advanced but always, to survive, it must accumulate capital. It is never in equilibrium. This point leads us to focus on the conditions that permitted continued growth, exponential growth, in the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries. This growth did not involve technological change in any important way: production increases were mainly matters of drawing more workers and more productive materials into traditional productive processes to yield more output. Given the fact that capital for expansion was available because of the extra-European enterprises and other, related developments, the key problem in the seventeenth century must have been markets, or demand. The capitalist had access to capital, had access to labor—at the levels of production then prevailing a truly massive proletarianization was not necessary—and had access to raw materials (some European, some colonial). The growth of a capitalist enterprise in that period was perhaps constrained most seriously by the need to open up new markets: to sell more of the product so that more could be produced, more capital generated, and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some of these markets were in Europe itself, reflecting at first the ability of capitalist enterprise to sell traditional products (like sugar) at lower costs than prevailed under the feudal economy, but gradually the urbanization and commercialization of the continent brought in feedback loops so that the newer way of life, generated by the rise of capitalism, itself generated more internal markets for capitalism. But probably the main growth of markets for protocapitalist enterprise in the seventeenth century, and thus the main stimulus for the rise of capitalism, was outside the system. This is well known in the case of trade with eastern Europe. It is known in the case of markets in America, Africa, and Asia, but the quantitative significance of these extra-European markets has not been fully evaluated. In the case of the English bourgeoisie, the main markets for capitalist enterprise, including agricultural and nonagricultural products from England and re-exported products from abroad, were in America, Africa, and Asia, along with nontraditional markets in the Baltic. For the Dutch, extra-European commerce was even more important. Italian communities continued to depend considerably on the eastern Mediterranean.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the seventeenth century, then, the crucial role of the extra-European world, added on to and perhaps more significant than its sixteenth-century role as provider of bullion and some other products, was to permit an expansion of demand—including forced demand, as on the slave plantations—for capitalist products, a demand sufficiently great so that productive capacity and output of capitalist enterprises could continue to grow at an incredibly fast rate. This growth in output was one of the two essential seventeenth-century forces involved in the rise of capitalism. The second force was, simply, the political triumph itself, the bourgeois revolution. This provided the bourgeoisie with the legal and political power to rip apart the fabric of the society in its quest for accumulation. Forced proletarianization thereby became possible, as did government support for almost any strategy that the new accumulating elite had in mind. And an Industrial Revolution, a transformation of the methods of production so that output could increase at an even greater rate, became (one might say) inevitable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== THE CENTRATION OF CAPITALISM ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The phrase &amp;quot;the rise of capitalism&amp;quot; generally evokes an image of factories, steam engines, masses of wage workers, cities grimy with coal dust: industrial capitalism. Our discussion thus far has not dealt with the rise of industrial capitalism—the Industrial Revolution—but with the precursors to that momentous event. But let me, for a moment, review some of these precursors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before 1492, most of the preconditions that would be critical for the eventual rise of industrial capitalism were present not merely in parts of Europe but also in parts of Asia and Africa. After 1492, in the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries, Europe acquired three additional preconditions. One was the very considerable accumulation of wealth from the mines and plantations of America and from trade in Asia and Africa. The second, closely related to the first, was the huge enlargement of markets outside of western Europe for products either produced in western Europe or imported and then reexported; that is, a very great and almost constantly growing demand. Third, and most important of all, the social sectors involved with capitalism took political power on a wide scale in western Europe, something that had not happened elsewhere except on very small terrains. This, the bourgeois revolution, allowed the emerging capitalist class-community to mobilize state power toward its further rise, such that the entire society contributed to the underwriting of colonial adventures and to the preparation of infrastructure such as cities and roads, while the state&#039;s police and military power could now be mobilized to force people off the land and into wage work, and to conscript people and resources for advantageous wars abroad. All three of these precursors, as I have argued, appeared because of—or would not have appeared had it not been for—colonialism.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Historians engage in fierce debates about the causes of the Industrial Revolution. Most of the candidate causes, or &amp;quot;factors,&amp;quot; are theories within the &amp;quot;European miracle&amp;quot; category which we discussed and tried to refute in Chapter 2. Propositions about, for instance, general medieval modernization of the European economy and polity, medieval technological revolutions, &amp;quot;rationality&amp;quot; in medieval and later times, and the like, are built into the most common explanations for the later emergence of an Industrial Revolution. We showed, I hope, that all of these processes were at work outside of Europe as well as inside, so that they cannot be enlisted as causes of an event that happened only in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is a problem where the sequence and dating of events is extremely important. The concept of the Industrial Revolution is usually bound up with two more specific transformations: the development of steam power and generally novel technology in industrial production, and the development of wage labor in industrial production. But the timing is wrong. The technological part of the Industrial Revolution became important very late in the process, too late to explain the revolution itself. It is certainly true that technological advances were taking place in European manufacturing during the period from 1492 to, say, 1750, but very little of this technology was unique to Europe, as we have seen, and, most crucially, the technological advances that eventually became important in increasing manufacturing production and increasing labor efficiency in that production occurred much later: in the last decades of the eighteenth century and, much more profusely, in the nineteenth century. In agriculture, the main technological advances were matters of increasing areal productivity in an environment of declining agricultural labor, but all of the essential technological changes that were involved in this process were traditional and were known outside of Europe. (A few scholars give great weight to newer crops like turnips, but such matters were of very minor importance—setting aside the much earlier introduction of the potato—compared to such things as the increased use of capital and purchased input nutrients. The fact that farmers in western Europe learned how to increase their production while decreasing labor inputs is not at all novel in the history and geography of agriculture. Thus the agricultural revolution of the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries can be considered an effect, not a cause, in the industrializing and urbanizing process.) So the technological side of the Industrial Revolution was not primary cause except as it may have been primary cause for a hemisphere-wide and very slow transformation, as we discussed previously. It appeared too late.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A somewhat similar argument can be given in response to the thesis that the development, by capitalism, of mass wage labor in manufacturing production was primary cause of the Industrial Revolution. This argument is most commonly put forth by those Marxist economists who hold to a strict construction of one of the arguments in Marx&#039;s &#039;&#039;Capital&#039;&#039;. It is indisputable that you cannot have fully mature industrial capitalism without basing it in a wage-labor setting that is also a (relatively) free labor market, one in which workers can go from employer to employer. But these conditions did not exist prior to the late eighteenth century. Wage labor was predominant, but little of it was employed in manufacturing, and hardly ever did a worker confront a really free labor market, with real choices as to place of employment. These were features of industrial capitalism as it emerged after the Industrial Revolution really got rolling.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All such theories about the causes of the Industrial Revolution are diffusionist in the sense, and to the degree, that they see the process as an internal evolution within European history and society. As we noted in Chapter 2, an antidiffusionist, anti-Eurocentric body of historical theory has been developing over the past 50-odd years, a body of theory developed mainly, but not solely, by scholars from the extra-European world. In no other arena of historical discussion has this emerging critical school had as great an impact as it has had on the debates about the origins of the Industrial Revolution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The thesis that industrial development in Europe depended in many ways on colonial processes was widely accepted in the eighteenth and early nineteenth centuries.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See R. W. Bailey, &amp;quot;Africa, the Slave Trade, and the Rise of Industrial Capitalism in Europe and the United States: A Historiographic Review&amp;quot; (1986); W. Darity, Jr., &amp;quot;British Industry and the West Indies Plantations&amp;quot; (1990).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Later, perhaps because of the growth of diffusionist ideology with its guiding proposition that Europe is the autonomous source of progress, this thesis fell into disfavor among European historians.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;There were, of course, exceptions. Brooks Adams, in his 1895 work &#039;&#039;The Law of Civilization and Decay&#039;&#039;, argued (pp. 259-260) that the British victory at Plassey in 1757, which immediately gave Britain access to cheap Indian cotton (and other Indian &amp;quot;plunder&amp;quot;) set into motion the explosive industrialization of Britain&#039;s cotton textile industry, leading directly and immediately to the major inventions of that industry: the spinning jenny in 1764, the mule in 1776, and Watt&#039;s steam engine in 1768.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It was forcefully advanced by a number of colonial scholars in the 1930s and 1940s. Perhaps understandably it was Indian scholars who emphasized the fact that a highly developed Indian cotton textile industry not only provided some of the new technology for Britain&#039;s industry, particularly in dyeing, but also had to be forcibly suppressed by Britain—in a process which some Indian scholars call &amp;quot;the de-industrialization of India&amp;quot;—in order to allow the British industry to develop in the late eighteenth and nineteenth centuries.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Palme Dutt, &#039;&#039;The Problem of India&#039;&#039; (1943); Alavi et al., &#039;&#039;Capitalism and Colonial Production&#039;&#039; (1982).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; (The cotton textile industry was the leading sector in the early Industrial Revolution.) Also in the 1930s, West Indian scholars, notably C. L. R. James and Eric Williams, began to advance the thesis that slave-based industry and the slave trade were crucial causal forces in British and French industrialization. This general argument evolved into a broad theory which is now widely argued both by Caribbean scholars—it is sometimes called &amp;quot;the Caribbean school of history,&amp;quot; rather too narrowly—and by others, many of whom are African-American and African scholars. This theory is of great importance, and I will try to summarize it briefly, ignoring a number of secondary disagreements among some of its proponents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The most basic and general argument, advanced first by C. L. R. James and Eric Williams, was the proposition that the West Indian slave-based plantation system in the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries was a highly advanced form of industrial system, implicitly the most advanced form in existence at that time. They, and later writers in the same scholarly tradition, showed that the plantation system involved very heavy capitalization, complex business organization, very advanced industrial technology (in milling, rum manufacture, transport, and so on), a large labor force in the sugar factory as well as in the fields, a considerable force of free workers and supervisors as well as slaves, and, most important of all, immense profits—profits not only from the plantation and its production but also from the slave trade and many ancillary components of what Williams called &amp;quot;the triangular trade.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;C. L. R. James, &#039;&#039;The Black Jacobins: Toussaint L&#039;Ouverture and the San Domingo Revolution&#039;&#039; (1938) and &#039;&#039;A History of Negro Revolt&#039;&#039; (1938); Eric Williams, &#039;&#039;Capitalism and Slavery&#039;&#039; (1944). Also see the later work by James, &amp;quot;The Atlantic Slave Trade and Slavery: Some Interpretations of their Significance in the Development of the United States and the Western World&amp;quot; (1970); and the later work by Williams, &#039;&#039;British Historians and the West Indies&#039;&#039; (1966). Important recent contributions include: R. W. Bailey, &amp;quot;The Slave(ry) Trade and the Development of Capitalism in the United States: The Textile Industry of New England&amp;quot; (1990); W. Darity, &amp;quot;British Industry and the West Indian Plantations&amp;quot; (1990); J. Inikori, &amp;quot;Slavery and the Revolution in Cotton Textile Production in England&amp;quot; (1989). Also see note 60 below.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; (Said James in his classic history of the Haitian revolution, &#039;&#039;The Black Jacobins&#039;&#039;, &amp;quot;the slave-trade and slavery were the economic basis of the French revolution ... Nearly all the industries which developed in France during the eighteenth century had their origin in goods or commodities destined either for the coast of Guinea or for the Americas.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The Black Jacobins&#039;&#039; (1938), pp. 47-48.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;) I would extend this argument to a slightly more general proposition: Within the overall economic space which the Europeans controlled in the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries, they found it possible to advance the capitalist industrial production system—large-scale, organized, semimechanized—to its highest level, for that era, mainly in the plantation system, using slave labor, until the evolution of industrial production as an overall system had evolved sufficiently so that profits could be made even when the labor force was paid a living wage, a wage permitting subsistence and reproduction of the working class, and the system could then be centrated, imported into Europe itself.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;I have argued elsewhere (Blaut, &#039;&#039;The National Question&#039;&#039;, 1987b, chap. 7) that the level of oppression and exploitation associated with slave labor as it was used in the plantations could not have been applied to members of the European cultural community itself. (This was indeed tried, but quickly abandoned in favor of slave labor.) Generally, cultural rules and practices limit the level of exploitation of producers within a society—a matter of maintaining social peace in a society—but no such rules apply to external or foreign workers.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Stated differently, the earliest phase of the Industrial Revolution was so crude, undeveloped, and indeed barbaric that free labor could not be used, if the output was to be profitable. Therefore, the capture and forced labor of slaves was necessary for production, or, alternatively, colonial rule elsewhere (as in India) was needed to force the delivery of commodities at very low prices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Both James and Williams argued that the profits from this complex were crucial in providing much, perhaps most, of the capital required in the early phase of the Industrial Revolution. Williams&#039;s book, &#039;&#039;Capitalism and Slavery&#039;&#039;, provided the classic statement of and argument for this thesis. He showed in great detail how the profits from the slave trade, the slave plantation, and the ancillary economic sectors flowed into England and then into the forms of investment that fueled the Industrial Revolution and its infrastructure (canals, ports, and the like). Most of the mainstream (European) community of scholars has rejected this theoretical position. The general view is that the industrial revolution was an almost entirely intra-European phenomenon, and such matters as the slave trade, the slave plantation, and the profits from all of this had to be merely a detail or footnote.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See the excellent review by C. Robinson, &amp;quot;Capitalism, Slavery and Bourgeois Historiography&amp;quot; (1987). Also excellent is Bailey, &amp;quot;The Slave(ry) Trade and the Development of Capitalism in the United States&amp;quot; (1990).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Periodically, efforts have been made to refute the theory, but the only part of the theory which has really been subjected to empirical critique is the most limited and in a way least crucial part. Engerman and some others tried to show that, if various assumptions of neoclassical economics are made about the eighteenth-century British economy, and if traditionally low calculations are used as regards the number of slaves brought to America, then it would appear that the slave trade was not really very profitable. But in fact the slave trade itself was only a part of the overall complex that Williams and others were looking at; in fact, the plantation as an industrial system was much closer to the center of their attention because it was here that labor was put to use in generating mass commodities. Inikori and others have shown that the numbers of slave transported to the Americas has been underestimated. Finally, the neoclassical assumptions (among them the argument that there were &amp;quot;normal&amp;quot; profits in an eighteenth-century industry, as though the Industrial Revolution and factor and product markets had already matured) are widely questioned.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another stream of criticism has come from some Marxists, among them Brenner and Laclau, who share the Eurocentric-diffusionist views of the conventional historical school just discussed.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Brenner&#039;s &amp;quot;The Origins of Capitalist Development: A Critique of Neo-Smithian Marxism&amp;quot; (1977); E. Laclau, &#039;&#039;Politics and Ideology in Marxist Theory&#039;&#039; (1977).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Their positions tend to be grounded in two arguments, one of which is dogmatic and the other fallacious. First, they claim that unfree labor cannot, by definition, be considered part of capitalism. This has been answered by C. L. R. James who showed that the error is that of trying to judge a seventeenth- and eighteenth-century labor system by the standards of the mid-nineteenth century, the era of mature competitive capitalism as described by Marx. Even more effective has been the demonstration by Immanuel Wallerstein that capitalism uses a range of alternative labor systems under alternative production conditions, and forced labor is one of these alternative systems.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Wallerstein, &#039;&#039;The Modern World System&#039;&#039; (1974-1988).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Second, the Marxist critics claim that processes that occurred outside of Europe and involved then the import of commodities and capital into Europe, must be denominated &amp;quot;exchange&amp;quot; rather than &amp;quot;production,&amp;quot; and so cannot be considered crucial for industrial development or capitalism. This thesis is simply false: production on a slave plantation is just as much production as is production in a Birmingham needle factory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scholars such as Bailey, Beckles, Darity, Mintz, Sheridan, Solow, Robinson, and Rodney, and (on a world-scale canvas) Amin, Wallerstein, and Frank, have, in recent years, given strong backing to the critical theory I have outlined here.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Bailey, &amp;quot;The Slave(ry) Trade and the Development of Capitalism in the United States&amp;quot; (1990), Darity, &amp;quot;British Industry and the West Indian Plantations&amp;quot; (1990), Mintz, &#039;&#039;Sweetness and Power: The Place of Sugar in Modern History&#039;&#039; (1985), and Robinson, &amp;quot;Capitalism, Slavery and Bourgeois Historiography&amp;quot; (1987); also see Beckles, &amp;quot;&#039;The Williams Effect&#039;: Eric Williams&#039; Capitalism and Slavery and the Growth of West Indian Political Economy&amp;quot; (1987); Sheridan, &#039;&#039;Sugar and Slavery&#039;&#039; (1973), and his &amp;quot;Eric Williams and Capitalism and Slavery: A Biographical and Historiographical Essay&amp;quot; (1987); Solow, &amp;quot;Capitalism and Slavery in the Exceedingly Long Run&amp;quot; (1987); Inikori, &amp;quot;Slavery and the Development of Industrial Capitalism&amp;quot; (1989); Rodney, &#039;&#039;How Europe Underdeveloped Africa&#039;&#039; (1972).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Conventional historians sometimes label it &amp;quot;the Williams thesis.&amp;quot; My point is that this &amp;quot;thesis&amp;quot; is something much larger: it is the current state of the body of theory that pays adequate attention to the role played by colonialism in the Industrial Revolution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One other point of contention concerns the significance of demand. All parties concede that the decisions to increase productive capacity, decisions which, in aggregate, led to the Industrial Revolution, were made on the basis of judgments that additional commodities, if produced, could be sold. The conventional historians generally treat the increase in demand as a somehow natural product of the modernization of Europe.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Some Marxists treat it this way, too: &amp;quot;(What) distinguished the English industrial development of the early modern period was its continuous character, its ability to sustain itself and to provide its own self-perpetuating dynamic. Here ... the key was to be found in the capitalist structure of (English) agriculture&amp;quot; (Brenner, &amp;quot;Agrarian Class Structure and Economic Development in Pre-Industrial Europe,&amp;quot; 1985, p. 53).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The critical historians insist, rather, that colonialism was itself required in order to increase the level of demand such that industrialists would make efforts to increase capacity, efforts which, when the revolution got truly underway, involved the use of powerful new productive technology. The critical historians have indeed shown that an immense amount of demand was generated by the slave trade, by the plantations (demand for food, clothing, machinery, ships, and so on), and by the overall expansion of the trading sphere in which European commodities moved in the eighteenth century and thereafter. I would generalize the case as follows: there would not have been an Industrial Revolution had it not been for the immense demand that Europeans were able to generate in the colonies, and it was this fact that, more than anything else, pushed the Industrial Revolution forward.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Capitalism arose as a world-scale process: as a world system. Capitalism became centrated in Europe because colonialism gave Europeans the power both to develop their own society and to prevent development from occurring elsewhere. It is this dynamic of development and underdevelopment which mainly explains the modern world.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this chapter and the two preceding ones I have tried to show, with empirical evidence, that there was no &amp;quot;European miracle.&amp;quot; Africa, Asia, and Europe shared equally in the rise of capitalism prior to 1492. After that date, Europe took the lead. This happened, as I have tried to demonstrate in this chapter, because of Europe&#039;s location near America and because of the immense wealth obtained by Europeans in America and later in Asia and Africa—not because Europeans were brighter or bolder or better than non-Europeans, or more modern, more advanced, more progressive, more rational. These are myths of Eurocentric diffusionism and are best forgotten.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== NOTES ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Europeans did not &amp;quot;discover&amp;quot; America: the hemisphere was settled millennia earlier by people who migrated in from Siberia and the Arctic. So I prefer not to conceptualize the European arrival as a &amp;quot;discovery.&amp;quot; Likewise, the idea that the Western Hemisphere is a &amp;quot;New World&amp;quot; is false since it was hardly new to those who lived there and greeted Columbus on his arrival in 1492. It is, however, very difficult to avoid using the phrase &amp;quot;New World&amp;quot; in certain contexts, and I will occasionally have to do so.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. See K. N. Chaudhuri, &#039;&#039;Trade and Civilization in the Indian Ocean&#039;&#039; (1985); Simkin, &#039;&#039;The Traditional Trade of Asia&#039;&#039; (1968); Sherif, &#039;&#039;Slaves, Spices and Ivory in Zanzibar&#039;&#039; (1987). It is highly likely that West Africans sailed across to the Americas before 1492. (See DeVisse and Labib, &amp;quot;Africa in Intercontinental Relations,&amp;quot; 1984.) However, because there seem not to have been major mercantile-maritime port cities in West Africa—unlike East Africa—it is not likely that transatlantic voyages before 1492 had significant impact on Africa or on America. This is probable for several reasons. First, in the absence of such major port cities and large-volume long-distance sea commerce, it is likely that ships along the coast were rather small. They would easily have been capable of a westward voyage to America, given the strong and steady trade winds blowing westward, but a return voyage would have to have been made far to the north or the south, in the zone of the westerlies—roughly as far north as the latitude of southern Europe or as far south as the latitude of Namibia. Therefore the round trip would have been a very formidable undertaking. On the other hand, we may indeed learn from future scholarship that West African sailors, Moroccan sailors, and West European sailors all were fishing and whaling quite regularly off the coast of America (perhaps on the Grand Banks) before 1492; if strong evidence for this emerges, then we would consider it likely that West Africans were familiar with the round-trip voyage and with some parts of the American coast. But we do not have such evidence at present, and we have to consider it more likely that any West African ships that reached America were blown off course, in which case a return voyage would have been very difficult. It would have to have been made without prior knowledge of the long, circuitous route (unless American sailors knew the route and gave navigational information to the African sailors—but we do not have convincing evidence at present that Americans crossed the Atlantic before 1492). Secondly, the portion of the American coast that is closest to Africa, roughly the Brazilian coast south of the mouth of the Amazon, seems not to have had major population concentrations and abundant gold and silver artifacts inviting trade or plunder. (Granted, if West Africans reached the West Indies, they would have found such artifacts in abundance, as did Columbus.) And thirdly, the complex of historical conditions that would turn a single voyage into the beginning of a massive conquest seem unlikely to have been present in coastal West Africa. Large-scale trade, a class of merchant-capitalists, banking and other institutions of capitalism, and the like, were found in interior West African urban centers, but not, it seems, in the urban centers along the coast: these were not important as mercantile-maritime centers. For the interior cities, major long-distance trade went northward and eastward overland, and it is unlikely that attempts would have been made to develop large-scale oceanic travel from a coastal harbor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some scholars maintain the truth of two propositions about West African transatlantic voyaging that I cannot accept. The first of these asserts that Africans exerted an important influence on American cultures before 1492. The second asserts that West Africans crossed the Atlantic in much the same way as did Columbus, but they had different values than the Europeans, and did not choose to murder, plunder, enslave, and enrich themselves at the expense of Americans as did the Europeans; and therefore they did not attempt conquest. Most of the evidence offered in support of important precolumbian diffusion from Africa to America is taken from the old arguments of European scholars of the &amp;quot;extreme diffusionism&amp;quot; school we discussed in Chapter 1. The extreme diffusionists claimed that ancient Egyptians or Phoenicians crossed the Atlantic, and, in essence, brought civilization to the Americans. Some modern scholars modify this mainly by insisting that because Egypt was a clearly African civilization—this I am certain is true—it was an African people, not a putatively European people, who brought civilization to the Americas. A second source of evidence is the apparently African facial features of the great Olmec head sculptures of southern Mexico. But some precolumbian Americans must have had these features, too: they are not rare among modern Latin American Indians. But the most serious objection to this theory is the following: The Olmec civilization is the oldest known civilization in the Americas. If Olmec civilization came from Africa, and was not developed indigenously by people of America, then we would have to say that Americans simply did not have the ability to civilize themselves; civilization had to be something brought in from elsewhere, by diffusion. This is viewed as a deep insult by Latin Americans, who maintain, I am sure correctly, that Western Hemisphere peoples developed civilization on their own. Perhaps they acquired a few domesticates from sailors arriving from across the Atlantic or the Pacific. But the real cultural development was a matter of independent invention, not diffusion. Again we notice that the form of argument comes from classical diffusionism: some human communities are inventive and others merely imitative. Based only on the thin and questionable evidence that has been presented thus far that Africans brought major cultural advances to America, this thesis is not persuasive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Somewhat more troublesome to me is the argument that when Africans crossed the Atlantic before or at the same time as Columbus did, they did not have the savage values of the Europeans, and so did not try to conquer, loot, and enslave. To accept this, one would have to believe that there is something absolutely fundamental in European culture, something very old, and very deeply embedded, that makes Europeans different from other humans. This admits a good part of the Eurocentric claim that Europeans are unique among humans; it merely inverts the argument and claims that their uniqueness lies not in progressiveness but in aggressiveness, predatoriness, and cupidity. I am much more comfortable with an argument that begins with the idea of a common basal human mentality (&amp;quot;psychic unity&amp;quot;). It then explains the bloodthirstiness of the European conquistadors as an effect of the kind of civilization they represented: its development of an oppressive class structure in feudalism, and its further development of protocapitalism, a system in which wealth is obtained at all cost and in any way possible. Bloodthirsty protocapitalist communities, ready and anxious to conquer, loot, and enslave wherever this brought a profit, were found in many parts of the Eastern Hemisphere, in all three continents. My argument in this book is that the key factor favoring European moves of conquest in the Americas, and not favoring West African moves of this sort, was the existence of major mercantile-maritime centers in coastal Europe, protocapitalist centers of the sort found in the interior of Africa but with the added features associated with long-distance oceanic trade. Sofala and Kilwa in East Africa had these features but Sofala and Kilwa were—as we note in this chapter—very much farther from the American looting grounds than were the Iberian ports and the Canary outports. (I have not cited specific scholars who hold these views that I criticize because a full and fair review of their theories is not possible in the space of a single long footnote. Obviously, I do not agree with the theory of Ivan Van Sertima, as presented in his important work &#039;&#039;They Came Before Columbus&#039;&#039; [1976], concerning the precolumbian diffusion of major civilizing traits from Africa to America, although he is very probably correct in his view that Africans did come to America before Columbus did.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Filesi, &#039;&#039;China and Africa in the Middle Ages&#039;&#039; (1972); Ma Huan, &#039;&#039;The Overall Survey of the Ocean&#039;s Shores&#039;&#039; (1970); Panikkar, &#039;&#039;Asia and Western Influence&#039;&#039; (1959).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. I have not learned of documented evidence that North Africans or West Africans regularly sailed up and down the coast past Cape Bojador. (See DeVisse and Labib, &amp;quot;Africa in Intercontinental Relations,&amp;quot; 1984.) Apparently medieval sailing techniques—European and non-European—had difficulty with the passage prior to the time when Portuguese voyages began in the fifteenth century. However, there was no question of &amp;quot;discovery.&amp;quot; The sea route was known in antiquity. Important land routes paralleled the entire length of the coast, from Fez south to Takrur (near modern Dakar) and beyond (see Niane, &amp;quot;Mali and the Second Mandingo Expansion,&amp;quot; 1984, and Levitzion, &amp;quot;The Early States of the Western Sudan to 1500,&amp;quot; 1971), and there were medieval-era settlements in the Canaries and along the coast itself. Basically, it was much cheaper to travel overland, and probably faster. What the Portuguese &amp;quot;discovered&amp;quot; was a method of outflanking the competing merchant interests of North and West Africa, by applying sailing technology known to Europeans and East Africans but not known (or at any rate used, or at any rate known to have been used) by West Africans in that period. It should be noted also that the Portuguese navigational strategy in passing Bojador was basically the same strategy used for voyages to the Atlantic islands, and probably known to Moroccan sailors as well as Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Blaut, &amp;quot;Diffusionism: A Uniformitarian Critique&amp;quot; (1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. For general reviews, see Crosby, &#039;&#039;The Columbian Exchange&#039;&#039; (1972) and McNeill, &#039;&#039;Plagues and Peoples&#039;&#039; (1976). See Borah and Cooke, &amp;quot;La Demografía Histórica de América Latina: Necesidades y Perspectivas&amp;quot; (1972); Whitmore, &amp;quot;A Simulation of Sixteenth-Century Population Collapse in the Basin of Mexico&amp;quot; (1991); Alchon, &#039;&#039;Native Society and Disease in Colonial Ecuador&#039;&#039; (1991); Lovell, &amp;quot;&#039;Heavy Shadows and Black Night&#039;: Disease and Depopulation in Colonial America&amp;quot; (1992).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. See Denevan, &#039;&#039;The Native Population of the Americas in 1492&#039;&#039; (1976), for a review of the disputes concerning the American population at the time of the conquest.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Crosby, &#039;&#039;The Columbian Exchange&#039;&#039; (1972); Alchon, &#039;&#039;Native Society and Disease in Colonial Ecuador&#039;&#039; (1991).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9. For a discussion of the various calculations, see Denevan, &#039;&#039;The Native Population of the Americas in 1492&#039;&#039; (1976); Denevan, &amp;quot;The Pristine Myth: The Landscape of the Americas in 1492&amp;quot; (1992); Lovell, &amp;quot;&#039;Heavy Shadows and Black Night&#039;&amp;quot; (1992); and Whitmore, &amp;quot;A Simulation of Sixteenth-Century Population Collapse in the Basin of Mexico&amp;quot; (1991).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
10. The assumption here is that population continued to grow so long as food resources for hunting, gathering, fishing, and shellfishing were abundant. At a certain purely hypothetical time, it is likely that people who had certainly already experimented with crop cultivation, found that a better supply of food (and fiber, etc.) would be obtained through agriculture, and so began the transformation. Note that this argument is in no way Malthusian.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
11. See Fiedel, &#039;&#039;Prehistory of the Americas&#039;&#039; (1987).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
12. See Crosby, &#039;&#039;The Columbian Exchange&#039;&#039; (1972), Lovell, &amp;quot;&#039;Heavy Shadows and Black Night,&#039;&amp;quot; and Alchon, &#039;&#039;Native Society and Disease in Colonial Ecuador&#039;&#039; (1991).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
13. Miskimin, &#039;&#039;The Economy of Early Renaissance Europe, 1300-1460&#039;&#039; (1969).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
14. Abel, &#039;&#039;Agricultural Fluctuations in Europe from the Thirteenth to the Twentieth Centuries&#039;&#039; (1980).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
15. de Vries, &#039;&#039;European Urbanization, 1500-1800&#039;&#039; (1984).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
16. Hodgett, &#039;&#039;A Social and Economic History of Medieval Europe&#039;&#039; (1972) (&amp;quot;[The] 200 years after c.1320 may be said to be a period of down-turn in the [European] economy as a whole,&amp;quot; p. 212); Lopez and Miskimin, &amp;quot;The Economic Depression of the Renaissance,&amp;quot; (1961-1962); C. T. Smith, &#039;&#039;An Historical Geography of Western Europe Before 1800&#039;&#039; (1969).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
17. Lopez, &amp;quot;Hard Times and Investment in Culture&amp;quot; (1953); Thorndyke, &amp;quot;Renaissance or Prenaissance?&amp;quot; (1943).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
18. Braudel, &amp;quot;Prices in Europe from 1450 to 1750&amp;quot; (1967); de Vries, &#039;&#039;European Urbanization&#039;&#039; (1984). On the rapid impact of these changes on Asia, see, for example, Atwell, &amp;quot;International Bullion Flows and the Chinese Economy circa 1530-1650&amp;quot; (1982); Aziza Hasan, &amp;quot;The Silver Currency Output of the Mughal Empire and Prices in India during the 16th and 17th centuries&amp;quot; (1969).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
19. Céspedes, &#039;&#039;Latin America: The Early Years&#039;&#039; (1974); McAlister, &#039;&#039;Spain and Portugal in the New World, 1492-1700&#039;&#039; (1984).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
20. In classical political economy, and in some of modern Marxist economics, the idea of &amp;quot;primitive accumulation&amp;quot; serves as a kind of catchall for ways of accumulating capital that did not involve—in essence—capitalist enterprise. Pirate treasures and the like were &amp;quot;primitive accumulation,&amp;quot; and, in general, the kind of wealth brought from the American colonies in the sixteenth century was considered primitive accumulation. (According to Marx, &amp;quot;The treasures captured outside Europe by undisguised looting, enslavement and murder flowed back to the mother-country and were turned into capital there&amp;quot;: Marx, &#039;&#039;Capital&#039;&#039;, 1976, vol. 1, p. 918). But &amp;quot;primitive accumulation&amp;quot; cannot really be defined with any precision. I will argue here that the wealth accumulated in the Americas was primitive only in the sense that it was part of a preindustrial-capitalist economy. In other respects, notably in the involvement of labor and value produced by labor, it was regular accumulation. The distinction is very fundamental, as we will see, because, if what transpired in the colonies was not &amp;quot;real&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;ordinary&amp;quot; accumulation, scholars can claim that the colonial economy was backward and &amp;quot;feudal,&amp;quot; rather than a primitive sort of capitalism.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
21. E. J. Hamilton, &#039;&#039;American Treasure and the Price Revolution in Spain, 1501-1650&#039;&#039; (1934); Brading and Cross, &amp;quot;Colonial Silver Mining: Mexico and Peru&amp;quot; (1972); H. and P. Chaunu, &#039;&#039;Séville et l&#039;Atlantique (1504-1650)&#039;&#039;, vol. 6, pt. 1 (1956); Cross, &amp;quot;American Bullion Production and Export 1550-1750&amp;quot; (1983).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
22. See note 19 above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
23. Vicens Vives, &#039;&#039;An Economic History of Spain&#039;&#039; (1969).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
24. Vilar, &#039;&#039;A History of Gold and Money, 1450-1920&#039;&#039; (1976).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
25. There remained, nonetheless, a very large trade carried on by non-European merchants in the China Seas and the Indian Ocean.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
26. E. J. Hamilton, &amp;quot;American Treasure and the Rise of Capitalism&amp;quot; (1929), and &#039;&#039;American Treasure and the Price Revolution in Spain&#039;&#039; (1934). Also see the important book by Walter Prescott Webb, &#039;&#039;The Great Frontier&#039;&#039; (1951), which builds in part on Hamilton&#039;s theory to argue for the great importance of the Americas in the rise of Europe during this period and later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
27. Galloway, &#039;&#039;The Sugar Cane Industry: An Historical Geography from its Origins to 1914&#039;&#039; (1989); Deerr, &#039;&#039;The History of Sugar&#039;&#039; (1949-1950).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
28. See, for example, Galloway, &#039;&#039;The Sugar Cane Industry&#039;&#039; (1989); Deerr, &#039;&#039;The History of Sugar&#039;&#039; (1949-1950); Watson, &#039;&#039;Agricultural Innovation in the Early Islamic World: The Diffusion of Crops and Farming Techniques, 700-1100&#039;&#039; (1983); N. S. Gupta, &#039;&#039;Industrial Structure of India During the Medieval Period&#039;&#039; (1970); Niane, ed., &#039;&#039;UNESCO General History of Africa, Vol. 4&#039;&#039; (1984); Bray, &#039;&#039;Science and Civilization in China, Vol. 6, Part 2, Agriculture&#039;&#039; (1984).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
29. Deerr, &#039;&#039;The History of Sugar&#039;&#039; (1949-1950).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
30. Simonsen, &#039;&#039;Historia Económica do Brasil, 1500-1820&#039;&#039; (1944); Furtado, &#039;&#039;The Economic Growth of Brazil&#039;&#039; (1963); Minchinton, &#039;&#039;The Growth of English Overseas Trade&#039;&#039; (1969). Also see the more general, but extremely important, works of I. Wallerstein, A. G. Frank, and S. Amin, particularly Wallerstein&#039;s &#039;&#039;The Modern World System&#039;&#039;, 3 vols. (1974-1988), Frank&#039;s &#039;&#039;Capitalism and underdevelopment in Latin America&#039;&#039; (1968) and his &#039;&#039;World Accumulation, 1492-1789&#039;&#039; (1978), and Amin&#039;s &#039;&#039;Accumulation on a World Scale&#039;&#039; (1974) as well as his &#039;&#039;Unequal Development&#039;&#039; (1976).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
31. Edel, &amp;quot;The Brazilian Sugar Cycle of the 17th Century and the Rise of West Indian Competition&amp;quot; (1969).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
32. Furtado, &#039;&#039;Economic Growth of Brazil&#039;&#039; (1963).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
33. See K. N. Chaudhuri, &#039;&#039;Trade and civilization in the Indian Ocean&#039;&#039; (1985); Satish Chandra, &#039;&#039;The Indian Ocean: Explorations in History, Commerce and Politics&#039;&#039; (1987); Magalhães-Godinho, &#039;&#039;L&#039;Economie de L&#039;Empire Portugais aux XV et XVI Siècles&#039;&#039; (1969).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
34. de Vries, &#039;&#039;European Urbanization&#039;&#039; (1984).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
35. William Denevan, &amp;quot;Introduction,&amp;quot; in Denevan, ed., &#039;&#039;The Native Population of the Americas in 1492&#039;&#039; (1976), and &amp;quot;The Pristine Myth: The Landscape of the Americas in 1492&amp;quot; (1992); Lovell, &amp;quot;&#039;Heavy Shadows and Black Night&#039;&amp;quot; (1992).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
36. See Borah and Cook, &amp;quot;La demografía histórica de América Latina: necesidades y perspectivas&amp;quot; (1972); Whitmore, &amp;quot;A Simulation of Sixteenth-Century Population Collapse in the Basin of Mexico&amp;quot; (1991).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
37. Semo, &#039;&#039;Historia del Capitalismo en México: Los Orígenes, 1521-1763&#039;&#039; (1982).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
38. Radell, &amp;quot;The Indian Slave Trade and Population of Nicaragua During the Sixteenth Century&amp;quot; (1976).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
39. Bakewell, &amp;quot;Mining in Colonial Spanish America&amp;quot; (1984).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
40. Semo, &#039;&#039;Historia del Capitalismo&#039;&#039; (1982).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
41. For various calculations, see Curtin, &#039;&#039;The Atlantic Slave Trade&#039;&#039; (1969); Furtado, &#039;&#039;Economic Growth of Brazil&#039;&#039; (1963); Deerr, &#039;&#039;History of Sugar&#039;&#039; (1949-1950); Florescano, &amp;quot;The Formation and Economic Structure of the Hacienda in New Spain&amp;quot;; Inikori, &#039;&#039;The African Slave Trade from the Fifteenth to the Nineteenth Century&#039;&#039; (1979), esp. pp. 57 and 248; McAlister, &#039;&#039;Spain and Portugal in the New World&#039;&#039; (1984).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
42. McAlister, &#039;&#039;Spain and Portugal in the New World&#039;&#039; (1984).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
43. In the present discussion I am giving far too little attention to Africa and particularly to the effects of the slave trade in Africa. See Chapter 2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
44. Fisher, &amp;quot;The Price Revolution: A Monetary Interpretation&amp;quot; (1989).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
45. Dunn, &#039;&#039;Sugar and Slaves: The Rise of the Planter Class in the English West Indies, 1624-1713&#039;&#039; (1972), pp. 10-11.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
46. Tawney, &#039;&#039;Religion and the Rise of Capitalism&#039;&#039; (1952 edition).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
47. Hannemann, &#039;&#039;The Diffusion of the Reformation in Southwestern Germany, 1518-1534&#039;&#039; (1975).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
48. There is debate as to why the center shifted from Iberia to the lower Rhine-southern England region. Perhaps the same forces which had made this northern region a mercantile-maritime center in the Middle Ages permitted it to gain control of the overseas enterprise: namely, large population, abundant nearby fertile land and forest resources, access to many markets (the Rhine, the Baltic, etc.). Vis-à-vis Italy, it held most of these same advantages plus that of location on the Atlantic and possession of the requirements for rapid growth of oceanic shipping and fishing fleets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
49. See Deerr, &#039;&#039;The History of Sugar&#039;&#039; (1949-1950); Curtin, &#039;&#039;The Atlantic Slave Trade&#039;&#039; (1969); and Inikori, &#039;&#039;The African Slave Trade from the Fifteenth to the Nineteenth Century&#039;&#039; (1979). The question whether slave labor is or is not proletarian—a serious issue in discussions of the slave plantation system (see Mintz, &#039;&#039;Sweetness and Power: The Place of Sugar in Modern History&#039;&#039;, 1985)—will be taken up later in this chapter. In any event there is no disagreement about the contribution of slave (and other forced) labor to capital accumulation, hence to surplus value generation, using &amp;quot;surplus value&amp;quot; in a sense appropriate to modes of production different from industrial capitalism.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
50. However, a good share of the old landowning elite joined in the new enterprise. It is not correct to assume that the new protocapitalist elite was in simple opposition to the old elite. There is much confusion on this matter, some of it occasioned by literal acceptance of Marx&#039;s idea that merchants are somehow not the class that evolves into the early capitalist, entrepreneurial, accumulating class. On the role of medieval merchants in protocapitalism, see Thrupp, &#039;&#039;The Merchant Class of Medieval London (1300-1500)&#039;&#039; (1948); Carus-Wilson, &#039;&#039;Medieval Merchant Venturers&#039;&#039; (1967).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
51. See R. W. Bailey, &amp;quot;Africa, the Slave Trade, and the Rise of Industrial Capitalism in Europe and the United States: A Historiographic Review&amp;quot; (1986); W. Darity, Jr., &amp;quot;British Industry and the West Indies Plantations&amp;quot; (1990).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
52. There were, of course, exceptions. Brooks Adams, in his 1895 work &#039;&#039;The Law of Civilization and Decay&#039;&#039;, argued (pp. 259-260) that the British victory at Plassey in 1757, which immediately gave Britain access to cheap Indian cotton (and other Indian &amp;quot;plunder&amp;quot;) set into motion the explosive industrialization of Britain&#039;s cotton textile industry, leading directly and immediately to the major inventions of that industry: the spinning jenny in 1764, the mule in 1776, and Watt&#039;s steam engine in 1768.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
53. See Palme Dutt, &#039;&#039;The Problem of India&#039;&#039; (1943); Alavi et al., &#039;&#039;Capitalism and Colonial Production&#039;&#039; (1982).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
54. C. L. R. James, &#039;&#039;The Black Jacobins: Toussaint L&#039;Ouverture and the San Domingo Revolution&#039;&#039; (1938) and &#039;&#039;A History of Negro Revolt&#039;&#039; (1938); Eric Williams, &#039;&#039;Capitalism and Slavery&#039;&#039; (1944). Also see the later work by James, &amp;quot;The Atlantic Slave Trade and Slavery: Some Interpretations of their Significance in the Development of the United States and the Western World&amp;quot; (1970); and the later work by Williams, &#039;&#039;British Historians and the West Indies&#039;&#039; (1966). Important recent contributions include: R. W. Bailey, &amp;quot;The Slave(ry) Trade and the Development of Capitalism in the United States: The Textile Industry of New England&amp;quot; (1990); W. Darity, &amp;quot;British Industry and the West Indian Plantations&amp;quot; (1990); J. Inikori, &amp;quot;Slavery and the Revolution in Cotton Textile Production in England&amp;quot; (1989). Also see note 60 below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
55. &#039;&#039;The Black Jacobins&#039;&#039; (1938), pp. 47-48.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
56. I have argued elsewhere (Blaut, &#039;&#039;The National Question&#039;&#039;, 1987b, chap. 7) that the level of oppression and exploitation associated with slave labor as it was used in the plantations could not have been applied to members of the European cultural community itself. (This was indeed tried, but quickly abandoned in favor of slave labor.) Generally, cultural rules and practices limit the level of exploitation of producers within a society—a matter of maintaining social peace in a society—but no such rules apply to external or foreign workers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
57. See the excellent review by C. Robinson, &amp;quot;Capitalism, Slavery and Bourgeois Historiography&amp;quot; (1987). Also excellent is Bailey, &amp;quot;The Slave(ry) Trade and the Development of Capitalism in the United States&amp;quot; (1990).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
58. See Brenner&#039;s &amp;quot;The Origins of Capitalist Development: A Critique of Neo-Smithian Marxism&amp;quot; (1977); E. Laclau, &#039;&#039;Politics and Ideology in Marxist Theory&#039;&#039; (1977).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
59. Wallerstein, &#039;&#039;The Modern World System&#039;&#039; (1974-1988).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
60. See Bailey, &amp;quot;The Slave(ry) Trade and the Development of Capitalism in the United States&amp;quot; (1990), Darity, &amp;quot;British Industry and the West Indian Plantations&amp;quot; (1990), Mintz, &#039;&#039;Sweetness and Power: The Place of Sugar in Modern History&#039;&#039; (1985), and Robinson, &amp;quot;Capitalism, Slavery and Bourgeois Historiography&amp;quot; (1987); also see Beckles, &amp;quot;&#039;The Williams Effect&#039;: Eric Williams&#039; Capitalism and Slavery and the Growth of West Indian Political Economy&amp;quot; (1987); Sheridan, &#039;&#039;Sugar and Slavery&#039;&#039; (1973), and his &amp;quot;Eric Williams and Capitalism and Slavery: A Biographical and Historiographical Essay&amp;quot; (1987); Solow, &amp;quot;Capitalism and Slavery in the Exceedingly Long Run&amp;quot; (1987); Inikori, &amp;quot;Slavery and the Development of Industrial Capitalism&amp;quot; (1989); Rodney, &#039;&#039;How Europe Underdeveloped Africa&#039;&#039; (1972).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
61. Some Marxists treat it this way, too: &amp;quot;(What) distinguished the English industrial development of the early modern period was its continuous character, its ability to sustain itself and to provide its own self-perpetuating dynamic. Here ... the key was to be found in the capitalist structure of (English) agriculture&amp;quot; (Brenner, &amp;quot;Agrarian Class Structure and Economic Development in Pre-Industrial Europe,&amp;quot; 1985, p. 53).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= CHAPTER 5: Conclusion =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This book has two basic themes or arguments. First, in Chapter 1, I try to explain what Eurocentric diffusionism is as a body of ideas, and to show how this theory—or supertheory, or world model—came to dominate European scholarship long ago and why it still does so to a considerable extent today. And second, in Chapters 2 through 4, I carefully examine the single most important part of diffusionism, the theory of Europe&#039;s historical superiority or priority, the theory of &amp;quot;the European miracle,&amp;quot; and I try to refute it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Diffusionism needs to be analyzed much more thoroughly than I have been able to do in this book. Many diffusionist theories and programs that, today, exert an important and unfortunate influence on many fields of thought and action have not been discussed here. In other writings I have explored the influence of diffusionism on theory and practice concerning the national question, or nationalism,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Blaut, &#039;&#039;The National Question&#039;&#039; (1987b); Blaut and Figueroa, &#039;&#039;Aspectos de la cuestion nacional en Puerto Rico&#039;&#039; (1988).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and on theory and practice concerning the development of peasant agriculture.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Blaut, &amp;quot;Two Views of Diffusion&amp;quot; (1977) and &amp;quot;Diffusionism: A Uniformitarian Critique&amp;quot; (1987a).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Other writers have, of course, examined many aspects of diffusionism and problems caused by diffusionism.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Reference has been made to this work in Chapters 2, 3, and 4.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; But, overall, the critique of diffusionism has barely begun.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The critique will have to range across many fields of scholarship and practice. Here—just to make this point clear—are four examples.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Philosophical dualism, the body of epistemological and ontological doctrine developed in European thought from Descartes to Kant and the neo-Kantians, appears to be, in part, a projection of the dualism of Inside and Outside. Reason is Inside. Mere matter, mere sensuousness, is Outside—the non-European world and the irrational mentation of its inhabitants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. The so-called Big Bang Theory, the theory that everything began at one space-time point and this point was here, seems to be diffusionism on the largest canvas of all. Big Bang cosmogony appears to be fortified less by empirical evidence than by a hunch that the whole idea is &amp;quot;reasonable&amp;quot;—the essential judgment (as we noticed in Chapter 1) by which culture projects its prejudices into science.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Talkington, &amp;quot;But the Editor Looks at the Universe from a Different Frame of Reference&amp;quot; (1986); Frankel, &amp;quot;Marxism and Physics: A New Look&amp;quot; (1991).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The theory that AIDS diffused out of Africa is very reminiscent of a historical chain of theories, each explaining some plague as a counterdiffusion from non-Europe to Europe. (We discussed aspects of this question in Chapters 1 and 2.) A recent book entitled &#039;&#039;AIDS, Africa and Racism&#039;&#039; gives important evidence that the AIDS-out-of-Africa doctrine may, indeed, be simply a new incarnation of this diffusionist view of human disease.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Chirimuuta and Chirimuuta, &#039;&#039;AIDS, Africa and Racism&#039;&#039; (1989). A naively diffusionist view of AIDS is given in Shannon and Pyle, &amp;quot;The Origin and Diffusion of AIDS&amp;quot; (1989); see the critique of this view in Watts, Okello, and Watts, &amp;quot;Medical Geography and AIDS&amp;quot; (1990).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; If this is the case, the matter of causality of HIV-retrovirus-caused disease may have to be rethought. The forms found outside of Africa may be more relevant for explanation and cure than those inside Africa.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Many theories about economic history since the beginning of the Industrial Revolution, and about economic development today, seem to be steeped in diffusionism. The Industrial Revolution has not diffused outward from Europe to non-Europe. Not only does it have origins in non-Europe as well as Europe (we discussed this matter in Chapter 4), but the notion that industrialization has been spreading to the non-European world is largely a false (conformal) idea. The diffusion of maquiladora-style assembly-plant activities in the Third World is not genuine industrialization but rather a kind of world-scale putting-out system: Outside provides cheap labor, Inside provides most of the raw materials and most of the consumption, and garners nearly all of the profit as well as the permanent infrastructure. The industrialization of Japan began long ago and was not an effect of diffusion.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Japan became industrialized precisely because of a lack of diffusion. It was the only major non-European country that managed to avoid European domination, and this resulted from its inaccessibility. It was, among major societies, the farthest and most inaccessible from the standpoint of Europeans, and by the time European power had subdued China, in the nineteenth century, Japan had been able to begin its military modernization; hence the victory over Russia, the beginnings of colonial expansion, and the onset of an industrial revolution around 1900.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The industrialization of Korea and one or two East Asian ministates in recent decades has not been imitated elsewhere.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;At the other end of the scale, giant countries like India and Brazil have a great deal of industry but in proportion to their size—and on a per capita measurement—they are no more industrialized than are smaller Third world countries. See Amin, &#039;&#039;Delinking: Toward a Polycentric World&#039;&#039; (1990).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The diffusion of industrialization, therefore, is not a simple and natural diffusion process, but a political agenda. And an agenda for scholarly inquiry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This book, therefore, has no real conclusion. The book itself is an introduction: an introduction to the study, to the diagnosis and treatment, of a serious malady of the mind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Notes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Blaut, &#039;&#039;The National Question&#039;&#039; (1987b); Blaut and Figueroa, &#039;&#039;Aspectos de la cuestion nacional en Puerto Rico&#039;&#039; (1988).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Blaut, &amp;quot;Two Views of Diffusion&amp;quot; (1977) and &amp;quot;Diffusionism: A Uniformitarian Critique&amp;quot; (1987a).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Reference has been made to this work in Chapters 2, 3, and 4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. See Talkington, &amp;quot;But the Editor Looks at the Universe from a Different Frame of Reference&amp;quot; (1986); Frankel, &amp;quot;Marxism and Physics: A New Look&amp;quot; (1991).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Chirimuuta and Chirimuuta, &#039;&#039;AIDS, Africa and Racism&#039;&#039; (1989). A naively diffusionist view of AIDS is given in Shannon and Pyle, &amp;quot;The Origin and Diffusion of AIDS&amp;quot; (1989); see the critique of this view in Watts, Okello, and Watts, &amp;quot;Medical Geography and AIDS&amp;quot; (1990).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Japan became industrialized precisely because of a lack of diffusion. It was the only major non-European country that managed to avoid European domination, and this resulted from its inaccessibility. It was, among major societies, the farthest and most inaccessible from the standpoint of Europeans, and by the time European power had subdued China, in the nineteenth century, Japan had been able to begin its military modernization; hence the victory over Russia, the beginnings of colonial expansion, and the onset of an industrial revolution around 1900.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. At the other end of the scale, giant countries like India and Brazil have a great deal of industry but in proportion to their size—and on a per capita measurement—they are no more industrialized than are smaller Third world countries. See Amin, &#039;&#039;Delinking: Toward a Polycentric World&#039;&#039; (1990).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Bibliography =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Abel, W. (1980). &#039;&#039;Agricultural fluctuations in Europe from the thirteenth to the twentieth centuries&#039;&#039;. London: Methuen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Abu-Lughod, J. (1987-1988). The shape of the world system in the thirteenth century. &#039;&#039;Studies in Comparative International Development&#039;&#039; 22(4):3-25.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1989). &#039;&#039;Before European hegemony: The world system A.D. 1250-1350&#039;&#039;. New York: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adams, B. (1895). &#039;&#039;The law of civilization and decay&#039;&#039;. New York: Macmillan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adams, W., Van Gerven, D., and Levy, R. (1978). The retreat from migrationism. &#039;&#039;Annual Review of Anthropology&#039;&#039; 7:483-532.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ahn, P. (1970). &#039;&#039;West African soils&#039;&#039;. London: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ajayi, J., and Crowder, M., eds. (1972). &#039;&#039;History of West Africa&#039;&#039;. Vol. 1. New York: Columbia University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alavi, H. (1982). India: The transition to colonial capitalism. In H. Alavi, et al., eds., &#039;&#039;Capitalism and colonial production&#039;&#039;. London: Croom Helm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------, Burns, P., Knight, G., Mayer, P., and McEachem, D., eds. (1982). &#039;&#039;Capitalism and colonial production&#039;&#039;. London: Croom Helm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alchon, S. (1991). &#039;&#039;Native society and disease in colonial Ecuador&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Amin, S. (1973). &#039;&#039;Neocolonialism in West Africa&#039;&#039;. New York: Monthly Review Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1974). &#039;&#039;Accumulation on a world scale&#039;&#039;. New York: Monthly Review Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1976). &#039;&#039;Unequal development&#039;&#039;. New York: Monthly Review Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1985). Modes of production: History and unequal development. &#039;&#039;Science and Society&#039;&#039; 49:194-207.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1988). &#039;&#039;Eurocentrism&#039;&#039;. New York: Monthly Review Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1990). Colonialism and the rise of capitalism: A comment. &#039;&#039;Science and Society&#039;&#039; 54:67-72.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1990). &#039;&#039;Delinking: Toward a polycentric world&#039;&#039;. London: Zed Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1992). On Jim Blaut&#039;s &amp;quot;Fourteen ninety-two.&amp;quot; &#039;&#039;Political Geography&#039;&#039; 11:394-396.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Anderson, J. (1882). &#039;&#039;New manual of general history&#039;&#039;. New York: Clark and Maynard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Anderson, P. (1974). &#039;&#039;Passages from antiquity to feudalism&#039;&#039;. London: New Left Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1974). &#039;&#039;Lineages of the absolute state&#039;&#039;. London: New Left Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Appadorai, A. (1936). &#039;&#039;Economic conditions in southern India (1000-1500 A.D.)&#039;&#039;. 2 vols. Madras: University of Madras Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Asad, T., ed. (1975). &#039;&#039;Anthropology and the colonial encounter&#039;&#039;. London: Ithaca Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aston, T., and Philpin, C., eds. (1985). &#039;&#039;The Brenner debate: Agrarian class structure and economic development in pre-industrial Europe&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Atwell, W. (1982). International bullion flows and the Chinese economy circa 1530-1650. &#039;&#039;Past and Present&#039;&#039; 95:68-91.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Baechler, J. (1988). The origins of modernity: Caste and feudality (India, Europe and Japan). In J. Baechler, J. A. Hall, and M. Mann, eds. &#039;&#039;Europe and the rise of capitalism&#039;&#039;. Oxford: Basil Blackwell.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------, Hall, J. A., and Mann, M., eds. (1988). &#039;&#039;Europe and the rise of capitalism&#039;&#039;. Oxford: Basil Blackwell.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bailey, A., and Llobera, J., eds. (1981). &#039;&#039;The Asiatic mode of production: Science and politics&#039;&#039;. London: Routledge and Kegan Paul.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bailey, R. (1986). Africa, the slave trade, and the rise of industrial capitalism in Europe and the United States: A historiographic review. &#039;&#039;American History: A Bibliographic Review&#039;&#039; 2:1-91.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1990). The slave(ry) trade and the development of capitalism in the United States: The textile industry of New England. &#039;&#039;Social Science History&#039;&#039; 14(3):373-414.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bakewell, Peter. (1984). Mining in colonial Spanish America. In L. Bethell, ed., &#039;&#039;The Cambridge history of Latin America: Colonial Latin America&#039;&#039;, Vol. 2. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Baran, P., and Sweezy, P. (1966). &#039;&#039;Monopoly capital&#039;&#039;. New York: Monthly Review Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Barnes, H. E., ed. (1925). &#039;&#039;Ploetz&#039;s manual of universal history&#039;&#039;. New York: Blue Ribbon Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beckles, H. (1987). &amp;quot;The Williams effect&amp;quot;: Eric Williams&#039; &#039;&#039;Capitalism and slavery&#039;&#039; and the growth of West Indian political economy. In B. Solow, and S. Engerman, eds., &#039;&#039;British capitalism and Caribbean slavery: The legacy of Eric Williams&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Berkner, L. (1975). The use and misuse of census data for the historical analysis of family structures. &#039;&#039;Journal of Interdisciplinary History&#039;&#039; 5:721-738.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1989). The stem family and the developmental cycle of the peasant household, &#039;&#039;American Historical Review&#039;&#039; 77:398-428.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bernal, M. (1987). &#039;&#039;Black Athena: The Afroasiatic roots of classical civilization&#039;&#039;, Vol. 1, &#039;&#039;The fabrication of ancient Greece&#039;&#039;. London: Free Association Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1991). &#039;&#039;Black Athena: The Afroasiatic roots of classical civilization&#039;&#039;, Vol. 2, &#039;&#039;The archeological and documentary evidence&#039;&#039;. London: Free Association Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bhatia, B. (1967). &#039;&#039;Famines in India&#039;&#039;. Bombay: Asia Publishing House.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bjørklund, O., Hølmhoe, H., Røhr, A., and Lie, B. (1970). &#039;&#039;Historical atlas of the world&#039;&#039;. New York: Barnes and Noble.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Black, C. (1966). &#039;&#039;The dynamics of modernization: A study in comparative history&#039;&#039;. New York: Harper and Row.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Blaikie, P. (1978). The theory of the spatial diffusion of innovations: a spacious cul-de-sac. &#039;&#039;Progress in Human Geography&#039;&#039; 2:268-295.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Blaut, J. (1962). The nature and effects of shifting agriculture. In &#039;&#039;Symposium on the impact of man on humid-tropics vegetation&#039;&#039;. Canberra: UNESCO and Australian Government Printer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1963). The ecology of tropical farming systems. &#039;&#039;Revista Geográfica&#039;&#039; 28:47-67.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1970). Geographic models of imperialism. &#039;&#039;Antipode&#039;&#039; 2(1):65-85.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1973). The theory of development. &#039;&#039;Antipode&#039;&#039; 5(2):22-26.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1976). Where was capitalism born? &#039;&#039;Antipode&#039;&#039; 8(2):1-11.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1977). Two views of diffusion. &#039;&#039;Annals of the Association of American Geographers&#039;&#039; 67:343-349.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1979). Some principles of ethnogeography. In S. Gale, and G. Olsson, eds., &#039;&#039;Philosophy in geography&#039;&#039;. Dordrecht: Reidel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1982). Nationalism as an autonomous force. &#039;&#039;Science and Society&#039;&#039; 46:1-23.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1984). Modesty and the movement. In T. Saarinen, et al., eds., &#039;&#039;Environmental perception and behavior: An inventory and prospect&#039;&#039;. Chicago: University of Chicago Department of Geography, Research Paper No. 209.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1987a). Diffusionism: A uniformitarian critique. &#039;&#039;Annals of the Association of American Geographers&#039;&#039; 77:30-47.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1987b). &#039;&#039;The national question: Decolonizing the theory of nationalism&#039;&#039;. London: Zed Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1989). Colonialism and the rise of capitalism. &#039;&#039;Science and Society&#039;&#039; 53:260-296.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1989). Review of J. Baechler, J. Hall, and M. Mann, eds., &#039;&#039;Europe and the rise of capitalism&#039;&#039;. &#039;&#039;Progress in Human Geography&#039;&#039; 13(3):441-448.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1991). Natural mapping. &#039;&#039;Transactions of the Institute of British Geographers&#039;&#039; 16(n.s.):55-74.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1991). Review of P. Curtin, &#039;&#039;The plantation complex&#039;&#039;. &#039;&#039;Journal of Historical Geography&#039;&#039; 17:472-474.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1992a). The theory of cultural racism. &#039;&#039;Antipode&#039;&#039; 24(4):289-299.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1992b). Fourteen ninety-two. &#039;&#039;Political Geography&#039;&#039; 11(3):355-385.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------, and Figueroa, L. (1988). &#039;&#039;Aspectos de la cuestion nacional en Puerto Rico&#039;&#039;. San Juan: Editorial Claridad.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------, Frank, A. G., Amin, S., Dodgshon, R., Palan, R., and Taylor. P. (1992). &#039;&#039;Fourteen ninety-two: The debate on colonialism, Eurocentrism, and history&#039;&#039;. Trenton, NJ: Africa World Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------, and Rios-Bustamante, A. (1984). Commentary on Nostrand&#039;s &amp;quot;Hispanos&amp;quot; and their &amp;quot;Homeland.&amp;quot; &#039;&#039;Annals of the Association of American Geographers&#039;&#039; 74:157-164.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Blum, J. (1978). &#039;&#039;Pseudoscience and mental ability&#039;&#039;. New York: Monthly Review Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Boas, F. (1938). &#039;&#039;The mind of primitive man&#039;&#039;. New York: Macmillan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1948). &#039;&#039;Race, language and culture&#039;&#039;. New York: Macmillan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bois, G. (1985). Against the neo-Malthusian orthodoxy. In Aston, T., and Philpin, C., eds., &#039;&#039;The Brenner debate: Agrarian class structure and economic development in pre-industrial Europe&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Borah, W., and Cook, S. F. (1972). La demografía histórica de América Latina: necesidades y perspectivas. In J. Bezant et al., eds., &#039;&#039;La historia económica en América Latina&#039;&#039;. México, D.F.: Sep-Setentas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bowler, P. (1989). &#039;&#039;The invention of progress&#039;&#039;. Oxford: Basil Blackwell.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brading, D. A., and Cross, H. C. (1972). Colonial silver mining: Mexico and Peru. &#039;&#039;Hispanic-American Historical Review&#039;&#039; 52:545-79.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brantlinger, P. (1988). &#039;&#039;Rule of darkness: British literature and imperialism, 1830-1914&#039;&#039;. Ithaca: Cornell University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Braudel, F. (1967). Prices in Europe from 1450 to 1750. In E. Rich, and C. Wilson, eds. &#039;&#039;The Cambridge economic history of Europe&#039;&#039;, Vol. 4: &#039;&#039;The economy of expanding Europe in the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1972). &#039;&#039;The Mediterranean&#039;&#039;. New York: Harper and Row.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bray, Francesca. (1984). &#039;&#039;Science and civilization in China&#039;&#039;, Vol. 6, part 2, &#039;&#039;Agriculture&#039;&#039;. (Joseph Needham, principal author and editor.) Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brenner, R. (1977). The origins of capitalist development: A critique of neo-Smithian Marxism. &#039;&#039;New Left Review&#039;&#039; 104:25-93.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1985). Agrarian class structure and economic development in pre-industrial Europe. In T. Aston and C. Philpin, eds., &#039;&#039;The Brenner debate: Agrarian class structure and economic development in pre-industrial Europe&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press. (Originally in &#039;&#039;Past and Present&#039;&#039; No. 70, 1976.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1985). The Agrarian roots of European capitalism. In T. Aston, and C. Philpin, eds., &#039;&#039;The Brenner debate: Agrarian class structure and economic development in pre-industrial Europe&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press. (Originally in &#039;&#039;Past and Present&#039;&#039;, no. 97, 1982.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1986). The social basis of economic development. In J. Roemer, ed., &#039;&#039;Analytical Marxism&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Browett, J. (1980). Development, the diffusionist paradigm and geography. &#039;&#039;Progress in Human Geography&#039;&#039; 4:56-79.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brown, L. (1981). &#039;&#039;Innovation diffusion: A new perspective&#039;&#039;. London: Methuen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Buckle, H. T. (1913). &#039;&#039;History of civilization in England&#039;&#039;. 4 vols., 2d ed., rev. New York: Hearst&#039;s International Library.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bury, J. B. (1932). &#039;&#039;The idea of progress&#039;&#039;. New York: Macmillan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cabral, A. (1979). &#039;&#039;Unity and struggle: Speeches and writings of Amilcar Cabral&#039;&#039;. New York: Monthly Review Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Carter, G. (1968). &#039;&#039;Man and the land: A cultural geography&#039;&#039;. New York: Holt, Rinehart, and Winston.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Carus-Wilson, E. M. (1967). &#039;&#039;Medieval merchant venturers&#039;&#039;. 2d ed. London: Methuen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Césaire, A. (1972). &#039;&#039;Discourse on colonialism&#039;&#039;. New York: Monthly Review Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Céspedes, G. (1974). &#039;&#039;Latin America: The early years&#039;&#039;. New York: Alfred A. Knopf.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chambers, M., et al. (1987). &#039;&#039;The Western experience&#039;&#039;. 2 vols., 4th ed. New York: Alfred A. Knopf.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chan-Cheung, J. (1967). The smuggling trade between China and Southeast Asia during the Ming Dynasty. In F. Drake, ed., &#039;&#039;Symposium on historical, archeological, and linguistic studies on southern China&#039;&#039;. Hong Kong: Hong Kong University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chandra, B. (1981). Karl Marx, his theories of Asian societies, and colonial rule. &#039;&#039;Review&#039;&#039; 5(1):13-94.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chandra, S. (1964). Commerce and industry in the medieval period. In B. Ganguli, ed., &#039;&#039;Readings in Indian economic history&#039;&#039;. Bombay.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------, ed. (1987). &#039;&#039;The Indian Ocean: Explorations in history, commerce and politics&#039;&#039;. New Delhi: Sage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chaudhuri, K. N. (1978). &#039;&#039;The trading world of Asia and the English East India Company, 1660-1760&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1985). &#039;&#039;Trade and civilization in the Indian Ocean&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chaudhuri, S. (1974). Textile trade and industry in Bengal Suba, 1650-1720. &#039;&#039;Indian Historical Review&#039;&#039; 1:262-278.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chaunu, H., and Chaunu, P. (1956). &#039;&#039;Séville et l&#039;Atlantique (1504-1650)&#039;&#039;. Part 1. Paris: SEVPEN.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chicherov, A. (1976). On the multiplicity of socio-economic structures in India in the 17th and 18th century. In G. Abramov, ed., &#039;&#039;New Indian studies by Soviet scholars&#039;&#039;. Moscow: USSR Academy of Sciences.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Childe, V. G. (1951). &#039;&#039;Social evolution&#039;&#039;. New York: Henry Schuman.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chirimuuta, R. C., and Chirimuuta, R. J. (1989). &#039;&#039;AIDS, Africa and Racism&#039;&#039;, 2d ed. London: Free Association Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chisholm, M. (1982). &#039;&#039;Modern world development&#039;&#039;. Totowa, N.J.: Barnes and Noble.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choudhary, A. (1974). &#039;&#039;Early medieval village in north-eastern India (A.D. 600-1200)&#039;&#039;. Calcutta: Punthi Pustak.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cipolla, C. (1965). &#039;&#039;Guns, sails, and empires: Technological innovation and the early phase of European expansion, 1400-1700&#039;&#039;. New York: Pantheon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cockburn, A., and Hecht, S. (1989). &#039;&#039;The fate of the forest&#039;&#039;. London: Verso.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cohen, I. (1981). Introduction to Weber, M., &#039;&#039;General economic history&#039;&#039;. New Brunswick, NJ: Transactions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cohen, M. (1977). &#039;&#039;The food crisis in prehistory&#039;&#039;. New Haven: Yale University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Collier, W. F. (1868). &#039;&#039;Outlines of general history&#039;&#039;. London: T. Nelson and Sons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Collins, K., and Roberts, D., eds. (1988). &#039;&#039;Capacity for work in the tropics&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Collyer, O. (1965). &#039;&#039;Birth rates in Latin America&#039;&#039;. Berkeley: Institute of International Studies, University of California at Berkeley.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Conklin, H. (1969). Lexicographical treatment of folk taxonomies. In Tyler, ed., &#039;&#039;Cognitive anthropology&#039;&#039;. New York: Holt, Rinehart, and Winston.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cooper, J. (1985). In search of agrarian capitalism. In T. Aston, and C. Philpin, eds., &#039;&#039;The Brenner debate: Agrarian class structure and economic development in pre-industrial Europe&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Corbridge, S. (1986). &#039;&#039;Capitalist world development&#039;&#039;. Totowa, NJ: Rowman and Littlefield.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cordell, D., and Gregory, J. (1987). Introduction to D. Cordell and J. Gregory, eds., &#039;&#039;African population and capitalism: Historical perspectives&#039;&#039;. Boulder, CO: Westview Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Coursey, D. (1967). &#039;&#039;Yams&#039;&#039;. London: Longmans, Green.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Crone, P. (1989). &#039;&#039;Pre-industrial societies&#039;&#039;. Oxford: Basil Blackwell.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Croot, P., and Parker, D. (1985). Agrarian class structure and the development of capitalism: France and England compared. In T. Aston, and C. Philpin, eds., &#039;&#039;The Brenner debate: Agrarian class structure and economic development in pre-industrial Europe&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Crosby, A. W. (1972). &#039;&#039;The Columbian exchange: Biological and cultural consequences of 1492&#039;&#039;. Westport, CO: Greenwood Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cross, H. (1983). South American bullion production and export 1550-1750. In J. Richards, ed., &#039;&#039;Precious metals and the late medieval and early modern worlds&#039;&#039;. Durham, NC: Carolina Academic Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Curtin, P. (1969). &#039;&#039;The Atlantic slave trade&#039;&#039;. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1975). &#039;&#039;Economic change in pre-colonial Africa: Senegambia in the era of the slave trade&#039;&#039;. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1990). &#039;&#039;The rise and fall of the plantation complex&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dalai, F. (1988). The racism of Jung. &#039;&#039;Race and Class&#039;&#039; 29(3):1-22.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Darby, H. (1952). &#039;&#039;The Domesday geography of eastern England&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Darity, W., Jr. (1990). British industry and the West Indies plantations. &#039;&#039;Social Science History&#039;&#039; 14(1):117-148.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Das Gupta, A. (1967). &#039;&#039;Malabar in Asian trade: 1740-1800&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
de Vries, J. (1984). &#039;&#039;European urbanization, 1500-1800&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deerr, Noel. (1949-1950). &#039;&#039;The history of sugar&#039;&#039;. 2 vols. London: Chapman and Hall.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Denevan, W. (1966). &#039;&#039;The aboriginal cultural geography of the llanos de Mojos of Bolivia&#039;&#039;. Iberoamericana, no. 48. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1976). Introduction to W. Denevan, ed., &#039;&#039;The native population of the Americas in 1492&#039;&#039;, 1-12. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1982). Hydraulic agriculture in the American tropics: Forms, measures, and recent research. In K. Flannery, ed., &#039;&#039;Maya subsistence: Studies in memory of Dennis E. Puleston&#039;&#039;. New York: Academic Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1992). The pristine myth: The landscape of the Americas in 1492. &#039;&#039;Annals of the Association of American Geographers&#039;&#039; 82:369-385.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------, ed. (1976). &#039;&#039;The native population of the Americas in 1492&#039;&#039;. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
DeVisse, J., and Labib, S. (1984). Africa in intercontinental relations. In D. Niane, ed., &#039;&#039;UNESCO general history of Africa&#039;&#039;, Vol. 4. Paris: UNESCO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dew, T. (1853). &#039;&#039;A digest of the laws, customs, manners, and institutions of the ancient and modern nations&#039;&#039;. New York: Appleton.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dewey, J. (1916). The logic of judgments of practice. In &#039;&#039;Essays in experimental logic&#039;&#039;. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1929). &#039;&#039;The quest for certainty&#039;&#039;. New York: G. P. Putnam.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Di Meglio, R. (1970). Arab trade with Indonesia and the Malay Peninsula from the 8th to the 16th century. In D. S. Richards, ed., &#039;&#039;Islam and the trade of Asia&#039;&#039;. Oxford: Cassirer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dirks, N. (1987). &#039;&#039;The hollow crown: Ethnohistory of an Indian kingdom&#039;&#039;. New York: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dobb, Maurice. (1947). &#039;&#039;Studies in the development of capitalism&#039;&#039;. New York: International Publishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Doolittle, W. (1990). &#039;&#039;Canal irrigation in prehistoric Mexico: The sequence of technological change&#039;&#039;. Austin: University of Texas Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
DuBois, W. E. B. (1965). &#039;&#039;The world and Africa: An inquiry into the part which Africa has played in world history&#039;&#039;. New York: International Publishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dunn, R. S. (1972). &#039;&#039;Sugar and slaves: The rise of the planter class in the English West Indies, 1624-1713&#039;&#039;. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Duruy, V., and Grosvenor, E. (1901). &#039;&#039;A general history of the world&#039;&#039;. New York: Crowell.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dutt, R. P. (1943). &#039;&#039;The problem of India&#039;&#039;. New York: International Publishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Duyvendak, J. (1933). Ma Huan re-examined. &#039;&#039;Verhandlungen der Koninklijke Akademie van Wetenschappen te Amsterdam, afdeeling letterkunde, nieuwe reeks&#039;&#039;. Part 33(3):1-74.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Edel, M. (1969). The Brazilian sugar cycle of the 17th century and the rise of West Indian competition. &#039;&#039;Caribbean Studies&#039;&#039; 9(1):24-45.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Edmonson, M. (1961). Neolithic diffusion rates. &#039;&#039;Current Anthropology&#039;&#039; 2(2):71-86.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Eliot Smith, G. (1928). &#039;&#039;In the beginning: The origin of civilization&#039;&#039;. New York: Morrow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1933). &#039;&#039;The diffusion of culture&#039;&#039;. London: Watts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Elvin, M. (1973). &#039;&#039;The pattern of the Chinese past&#039;&#039;. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1988). China as a counterfactual. In J. Baechler, J. A. Hall, and M. Mann, eds., &#039;&#039;Europe and the rise of capitalism&#039;&#039;, 101-112. Oxford: Basil Blackwell.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Engels, F. (1970). The origin of the family, private property, and the state. In &#039;&#039;Marx and Engels: Selected works&#039;&#039;, Vol. 3. Moscow: Progress.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1974). What have the working classes to do with Poland? In D. Fernbach, ed., &#039;&#039;Karl Marx: Political writings&#039;&#039;, Vol. 3. New York: Vintage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1975). Letter to K. Marx, June 6, 1853. In &#039;&#039;Marx and Engels: Selected correspondence&#039;&#039;. Moscow: Progress.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fei Hsiao-tung. (1953). &#039;&#039;China&#039;s gentry&#039;&#039;. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fiedel, S. (1987). &#039;&#039;Prehistory of the Americas&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Filesi, T. (1972). &#039;&#039;China and Africa in the Middle Ages&#039;&#039;. London: Frank Cass.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finley, M. (1975). &#039;&#039;The use and abuse of history&#039;&#039;. New York: Viking Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fisher, D. (1989). The price revolution: A monetary interpretation. &#039;&#039;Journal of Economic History&#039;&#039; 49:883-902.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fisher, G. (1885). &#039;&#039;Outlines of universal history&#039;&#039;. New York: Ivison, Blakeman, Taylor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1896). &#039;&#039;A brief history of the nations and their progress in history&#039;&#039;. New York: American Book Co.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fleck, L. (1979). &#039;&#039;Genesis and development of a scientific fact&#039;&#039;. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Florescano, E. (1984). The formation and economic structure of the hacienda in New Spain. In L. Bethell, ed., &#039;&#039;The Cambridge history of Latin America: Colonial Latin America&#039;&#039;, Vol. 2. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Foster, G. (1962). &#039;&#039;Traditional cultures: And the impact of technological change&#039;&#039;. New York: Harper and Row.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Frake, C. (1969). The ethnographic study of cognitive systems. In S. Tyler, ed., &#039;&#039;Cognitive anthropology&#039;&#039;. New York: Holt, Rinehart, and Winston.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Frank, A. G. (1968). &#039;&#039;Capitalism and underdevelopment in Latin America&#039;&#039;. New York: Monthly Review Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1969). Sociology of development and underdevelopment of sociology. In his &#039;&#039;Latin America: Underdevelopment or revolution&#039;&#039;. New York: Monthly Review Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1978). &#039;&#039;World accumulation, 1492-1789&#039;&#039;. New York: Monthly Review Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Frankel, H. (1991). Marxism and physics: A new look. &#039;&#039;Science and Society&#039;&#039; 55:336-347.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Freedman, M. (1966). &#039;&#039;Chinese lineage and society&#039;&#039;. London: University of London Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Freeman, E. (1874). &#039;&#039;General sketch of history&#039;&#039;. New York: Holt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Freire, P. (1972). &#039;&#039;Pedagogy of the oppressed&#039;&#039;. New York: Herder and Herder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
FRELIMO (Frente de Libertação de Moçambique). (1971). &#039;&#039;Historia de Moçambique&#039;&#039;. Porto, Portugal: Afrontamento.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Freund, J. (1969). &#039;&#039;The sociology of Max Weber&#039;&#039;. New York: Vintage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fu Chu-fu and Li Ching-neng. (1956). &#039;&#039;The sprouts of capitalistic factors within China&#039;s feudal society&#039;&#039;. Program in East Asian Studies, Western Washington State University, Occasional Paper no. 7.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furtado, C. (1963). &#039;&#039;The economic growth of Brazil&#039;&#039;. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fyfe, C., and McMaster, D., eds. (1981). &#039;&#039;African historical demography&#039;&#039;. Edinburgh, Scotland: Centre of African Studies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Galeano, E. (1972). &#039;&#039;The open veins of Latin America&#039;&#039;. New York: Monthly Review Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Galloway, J. H. (1977). The Mediterranean sugar industry. &#039;&#039;Geographical Review&#039;&#039; 67:177-192.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1989). &#039;&#039;The sugar cane industry: An historical geography from its origins to 1914&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Garraty, J., and Gay, P., eds. (1981). &#039;&#039;The Columbia history of the world&#039;&#039;. New York: Dorset Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gernet, J. (1962). &#039;&#039;Daily life in China on the eve of the Mongol invasion, 1250-1276&#039;&#039;. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Giblin, J. (1990). Trypanosomiasis control in African history: An evaded issue? &#039;&#039;Journal of African History&#039;&#039; 31:59-80.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gilfillan, S. (1920). The coldward course of progress. &#039;&#039;Political Science Quarterly&#039;&#039; 35:393-410.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gill, D. and Levidow, L., eds. (1987). &#039;&#039;Anti-racist science teaching&#039;&#039;. London: Free Association Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gilman, A. (1874). &#039;&#039;First steps in general history&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, MA: Riverside Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Godelier, M. (1969). &#039;&#039;Sobre el modo de producción asiático&#039;&#039;. Barcelona, Spain: Ediciones Martínez Roca.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Goitein, S. (1967). &#039;&#039;A Mediterranean society&#039;&#039;. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Golson, J. (1977). No room at the top: Agricultural intensification in the New Guinea Highlands. In J. Allen et al., eds., &#039;&#039;Sunda and Sahul: Prehistoric studies in Southeast Asia, Melanesia and Australia&#039;&#039;. London: Academic Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Goodrich, S. G. (1843). &#039;&#039;Peter Parley&#039;s common school history&#039;&#039;. Philadelphia: E. H. Butler.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gopal, L. (1963). Quasi-manorial rights in ancient India. &#039;&#039;Journal of the Economic and Social History of the Orient&#039;&#039; 6:296-308.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gopal, S. (1972). Nobility and the mercantile community in India. &#039;&#039;Journal of Indian History&#039;&#039; 50:793-802.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gorman, C. (1977). A priori models and Thai prehistory: A reconsideration of the beginnings of agriculture in Southeast Asia. In C. A. Reed, ed., &#039;&#039;Origins of agriculture&#039;&#039;. The Hague: Mouton.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gossett, T. (1963). &#039;&#039;Race: The history of an idea in America&#039;&#039;. Dallas: Southern Methodist University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gould, P. (1969). &#039;&#039;Spatial diffusion&#039;&#039;. Commission on College Geography, Association of American Geographers, Resource Paper no. 4, Washington, DC: Association of American Geographers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Graebner, F. (1911). &#039;&#039;Methode der ethnologie&#039;&#039;. Heidelberg, Germany.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gupta, N. S. (1970). &#039;&#039;Industrial structure of India during the medieval period&#039;&#039;. Delhi: Chand.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Habib, I. (1963). &#039;&#039;The agrarian system of Mughal India&#039;&#039;. London: Asia Publishing House.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1964). Usury in medieval India. &#039;&#039;Comparative Studies in Society and History&#039;&#039; 6:392-419.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1965). The social distribution of landed property in pre-British India. &#039;&#039;Enquiry&#039;&#039; 2(2,n.s.):21-75.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1969). Problems of Marxist historical analysis. &#039;&#039;Enquiry&#039;&#039; 3(2,n.s.):52-67.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hagen, E. (1962). &#039;&#039;The theory of social change: How economic growth begins&#039;&#039;. Homewood, IL: Dorsey Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1962). A framework for analyzing economic and political change. In Brookings Institution, ed., &#039;&#039;Development of the emerging countries: An agenda for research&#039;&#039;, 1-39. Washington, DC: Brookings Institution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hägerstrand, T. (1967). &#039;&#039;Innovation diffusion as a spatial process&#039;&#039;. Translated by A. Pred. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hajnal, J. (1965). European marriage patterns in perspective. In D. Glass and D. Eversley, eds., &#039;&#039;Population in history: Essays in historical demography&#039;&#039;. Chicago: Aldine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hall, J. (1985). &#039;&#039;Powers and liberties: The causes and consequences of the rise of the West&#039;&#039;. Oxford: Basil Blackwell.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1988). States and societies: The miracle in historical perspective. In J. Baechler, J. A. Hall, and M. Mann, eds., &#039;&#039;Europe and the rise of capitalism&#039;&#039;. Oxford: Basil Blackwell.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hallam, H. (1975). The medieval social picture. In E. Kamenka and R. Neale, eds., &#039;&#039;Feudalism, capitalism and beyond&#039;&#039;. London: Edward Arnold.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Haller, J. (1971). &#039;&#039;Outcasts from evolution: Scientific attitudes of racial inferiority, 1859-1900&#039;&#039;. Urbana: University of Illinois Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hamilton, E. J. (1929). American treasure and the rise of capitalism. &#039;&#039;Economica&#039;&#039; 9:338-357.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1934). &#039;&#039;American treasure and the price revolution in Spain, 1501-1650&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hamilton, G. S. (1985). Why no capitalism in China? Negative questions in historical, comparative research. &#039;&#039;Journal of Developing Societies&#039;&#039; 1:187-211.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Handler, R. (1989). Review of Macfarlane, A., &#039;&#039;Marriage and love in England&#039;&#039;. &#039;&#039;American Anthropologist&#039;&#039; 91:1078-1079.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hannemann, M. (1975). &#039;&#039;The diffusion of the Reformation in Southwestern Germany, 1518-1534&#039;&#039;. Department of Geography, University of Chicago, Research Paper no. 167.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hansis, R. (1976). Ethnogeography and science: Viticulture in Argentina. Ph.D. diss., Pennsylvania State University.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hardy, F. (1936). Some aspects of tropical soils. &#039;&#039;Transactions of the Third International Congress of Soil Science&#039;&#039; 2:150-163.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Harewood, J. (1966). Population growth in Grenada. &#039;&#039;Social and Economic Studies&#039;&#039; 15:61-84.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Harris, M. (1968). &#039;&#039;The rise of anthropological theory&#039;&#039;. New York: Crowell.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Harrison, P. (1969). &#039;&#039;The communists and Chinese peasant rebellions&#039;&#039;. New York: Atheneum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------, and Turner, B. L., eds. (1978). &#039;&#039;Pre-Hispanic Maya agriculture&#039;&#039;. Albuquerque: University of New Mexico Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hasan, A. (1969). The silver currency output of the Mughal Empire and prices in India during the 16th and 17th centuries. &#039;&#039;Indian Economic and Social History Review&#039;&#039; 6:85-116.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Haskel, D. (1848). &#039;&#039;Chronology and universal history&#039;&#039;. New York: J. H. Colton.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hassan, F. (1978). Demographic archeology. In M. B. Schaffer, ed., &#039;&#039;Advances in archeological method and theory&#039;&#039;, Vol. 1. New York: Columbia University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hegel, G. (1956). &#039;&#039;The philosophy of history&#039;&#039;. New York: Dover Publications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hilton, R. (1980). Individualism and the English peasantry. &#039;&#039;New Left Review&#039;&#039;, no. 120, pp. 109-111.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1985). Introduction. In T. Aston, and C. Philpin, eds., &#039;&#039;The Brenner debate: Agrarian class structure and economic development in pre-industrial Europe&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------, ed. (1976). &#039;&#039;The transition from feudalism to capitalism&#039;&#039;. London: New Left Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ho Ping-ti. (1977). The indigenous origins of Chinese agriculture. In C. A. Reed, ed., &#039;&#039;Origins of agriculture&#039;&#039;. The Hague: Mouton.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hodgett, A. J. (1972). &#039;&#039;A social and economic history of medieval Europe&#039;&#039;. London: Methuen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hopkins, A. (1973). &#039;&#039;An economic history of West Africa&#039;&#039;. New York: Columbia University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Howard, A. (1975). Pre-colonial centers and regional systems in Africa. &#039;&#039;Pan-African Journal&#039;&#039; 8(3):247-270.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Huddleston, L. (1967). &#039;&#039;Origins of the American Indians: European concepts, 1492-1729&#039;&#039;. Austin: University of Texas Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hoyle, R. (1990). Tenure and the land market in early modern England: Or a late contribution to the Brenner debate. &#039;&#039;Economic History Review&#039;&#039; 43:1-20.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hudson, B. (1977). The new geography and the new imperialism: 1870-1918. &#039;&#039;Antipode&#039;&#039; 9(1):12-19.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hulme, P. (1992). &#039;&#039;Colonial encounters: Europe and the Native Caribbean 1492-1797&#039;&#039;. London: Routledge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Huntington, E. (1924). &#039;&#039;Principles of human geography&#039;&#039;. 3d ed. New York: John Wiley.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Inikori, J. (1987). Slavery and the development of industrial capitalism. In B. Solow and S. Engerman, eds. (1987). &#039;&#039;British capitalism and Caribbean slavery: The legacy of Eric Williams&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1989). Slavery and the revolution in cotton textile production in England. &#039;&#039;Social Science History&#039;&#039; 13(4):343-379.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------, ed. (1979). &#039;&#039;The African slave trade from the fifteenth to the nineteenth century&#039;&#039;. Paris: UNESCO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Irvine, F. (1934). &#039;&#039;A textbook of West African agriculture: Soils and crops&#039;&#039;. London: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Irwin, G. (1982). Sub-Saharan Africa. In J. Garraty, and P. Gay, eds., &#039;&#039;Columbia history of the world&#039;&#039;. New York: Columbia University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Isichei, E. (1982). &#039;&#039;A history of Nigeria&#039;&#039;. London: Longmans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ivanov, V. (1985). Round-table: State and law in the ancient Orient. (Discussion.) &#039;&#039;Social Sciences (USSR Academy of Sciences)&#039;&#039; 16(3):177-201.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Jackson, P., ed. (1987). &#039;&#039;Race and racism: Essays in social geography&#039;&#039;. London: Allen and Unwin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
James, C. L. R. (1938a). &#039;&#039;The Black Jacobins: Toussaint L&#039;Ouverture and the San Domingo revolution&#039;&#039;. London: Secker and Warburg.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1938b). &#039;&#039;A history of Negro revolt&#039;&#039;. London: Fact. Rev. ed. (1969), &#039;&#039;A history of Pan-African revolt&#039;&#039;. Washington, DC: Drum and Spear Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1970). The Atlantic slave trade and slavery: Some interpretations of their significance in the development of the United States and the Western World. In J. A. Williams and C. F. Harris, eds, &#039;&#039;Amistad I&#039;&#039;, 119-164. New York: Vintage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Jett, S. C. (1991). Further information on the geography of the blowgun and its implications for transoceanic contacts. &#039;&#039;Annals of the Association of American Geographers&#039;&#039; 81:89-102.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Jha, S. C. (1963). &#039;&#039;Studies in the development of capitalism in India&#039;&#039;. Calcutta: Mukhopadhyay.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Johnson, K. (1977). Do as the land bids: A study of Otomi resource use on the eve of irrigation. Ph.D. diss., Clark University.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Joly, N. (1897). &#039;&#039;Man before metals&#039;&#039;. New York: Appleton.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Jones, E. L. (1981). &#039;&#039;The European miracle&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1988). &#039;&#039;Growth recurring: Economic change in world history&#039;&#039;. Oxford: Clarendon Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Jung, C. (1963). &#039;&#039;Memories, dreams, reflections&#039;&#039;. New York: Random House.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1964). The dreamlike world of India. In his &#039;&#039;Civilization in transition&#039;&#039; (Collected works, vol. 10). Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1971). &#039;&#039;Psychological types&#039;&#039; (Collected works, vol. 6). Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kabaker, A. (1977). A radiocarbon chronology relevant to the origins of agriculture. In C. A. Reed, ed., &#039;&#039;Origins of agriculture&#039;&#039;. The Hague: Mouton.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kagan, D., Ozment, S., and Turner, F. (1987). &#039;&#039;The Western heritage&#039;&#039;, 2 vols., 3rd ed. New York: Macmillan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kea, R. (1982). &#039;&#039;Settlements, trade, and politics in the seventeenth-century Gold Coast&#039;&#039;. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keightley, T. (1849). &#039;&#039;Outlines of history&#039;&#039;. Rev. ed. London: Longmans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kerridge, E. (1968). &#039;&#039;The agricultural revolution&#039;&#039;. New York: A. M. Kelley.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kertzer, D. (1989). The joint family household revisited: Demographic constraints and household complexity in the European past. &#039;&#039;Journal of Family History&#039;&#039; 14:1-16.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kinder, H., and Hilgemann, W. (1974). &#039;&#039;The Anchor atlas of world history&#039;&#039;, Vol. 1. New York: Anchor Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kitching, G. (1983). Proto-industrialization and demographic change. &#039;&#039;Journal of African History&#039;&#039; 24:221-240.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kniffen, F. (1965). Folk housing: Key to diffusion. &#039;&#039;Annals of the Association of American Geographers&#039;&#039; 55:549-577.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Koepping, K.-P. (1983). &#039;&#039;Adolf Bastian and the psychic unity of mankind&#039;&#039;. St. Lucia, Australia: University of Queensland Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kosambi, D. D. (1969). &#039;&#039;Ancient India&#039;&#039;. New York: Meridian Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kroeber, A. (1937). Diffusionism. In &#039;&#039;Encyclopedia of the social sciences&#039;&#039;, 5:139-142. New York: Macmillan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kuhn, T. (1970). &#039;&#039;The structure of scientific revolutions&#039;&#039;. 2nd ed. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Laclau, E. (1977). &#039;&#039;Politics and ideology in Marxist theory&#039;&#039;. London: New Left Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Laibman, D. (1984). Modes of production and theories of transition. &#039;&#039;Science and Society&#039;&#039; 48(3):257-294.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lambert, D. (1971). The role of climate in the economic development of the tropics. &#039;&#039;Land Economics&#039;&#039; 47:339-344.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lane, F. (1973). &#039;&#039;Venice: A maritime republic&#039;&#039;. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Laslett, P. (1988). The European family and early industrialization. In J. Baechler, J. A. Hall, and M. Mann, eds., &#039;&#039;Europe and the rise of capitalism&#039;&#039;. Oxford: Basil Blackwell.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lattimore, O. (1980). The periphery as locus of innovation. In J. Gottmann, ed., &#039;&#039;Centre and periphery: Spatial variation and politics&#039;&#039;. Beverly Hills. CA: Sage Publications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lee, G. (1987). Comparative perspectives. In M. B. Sussman and S. K. Steinmetz, eds., &#039;&#039;Handbook of marriage and the family&#039;&#039;. New York: Plenum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lee, R. (1992). Art, science, or politics? The crisis in hunter-gatherer studies. &#039;&#039;American Anthropologist&#039;&#039; 94:31-54.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lelekov, L. (1985). Round-table: State and law in the ancient Orient. (Discussion.) &#039;&#039;Social Sciences (USSR Academy of Sciences)&#039;&#039; 16(3):177-201.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lentnek, B. (1969). Economic transition from traditional to commercial agriculture. &#039;&#039;Annals of the Association of American Geographers&#039;&#039; 59:65-84.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lerner, R., Meacham, S., and Burns, E. (1988). &#039;&#039;Western civilizations: Their history and their culture&#039;&#039;. 11th ed. New York: Norton.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le Roy Ladurie, E. (1985). A reply to Robert Brenner. In T. Aston and C. Philpin, eds., &#039;&#039;The Brenner debate: Agrarian class structure and economic development in pre-industrial Europe&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Levitzion, N. (1972). The early states of the Western Sudan to 1500. In J. Ajayi and M. Crowder, eds., &#039;&#039;History of West Africa&#039;&#039;, Vol. 1. New York: Columbia University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lévy-Bruhl, L. (1966). &#039;&#039;How natives think&#039;&#039;. New York: Washington Square Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lewis, A. (1973). Maritime skills in the Indian Ocean, 1368-1500. &#039;&#039;Journal of the Economic and Social History of the Orient&#039;&#039; 16:238-264.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lewis, W. A., ed. (1970). &#039;&#039;Tropical development, 1880-1913&#039;&#039;. Evanston, IL: Northwestern University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Liceria, M. A. C. (1974). Emergence of Brahmanas as landed intermediaries in Karnataka, c. A.D. 1000-1300. &#039;&#039;Indian Historical Review&#039;&#039; 1(1):28-35.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lloyd, G. (1990). &#039;&#039;Demystifying mentalities&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lo Jung-pang. (1955). China as a sea power. &#039;&#039;Far Eastern Quarterly&#039;&#039; 14:489-503.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lopez, R. (1953). Hard times and investment in culture. In R. Lopez, ed., &#039;&#039;The Renaissance: A symposium&#039;&#039;. New York: Metropolitan Museum of Art.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------, and Miskimin, H. (1961-1962). The economic depression of the Renaissance. &#039;&#039;Economic History Review&#039;&#039; 14:408-426.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lord, J. (1869). &#039;&#039;Ancient states and empires: For colleges and schools&#039;&#039;. New York: Charles Scribner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lovell, W. G. (1992). &amp;quot;Heavy shadows and black night&amp;quot;: Disease and depopulation in Colonial Spanish America. &#039;&#039;Annals of the Association of American Geographers&#039;&#039; 82:426-443.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lowie, R. (1937). &#039;&#039;The history of ethnological theory&#039;&#039;. New York: Rinehart.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Löwith, K. (1982). &#039;&#039;Max Weber and Karl Marx&#039;&#039;. London: Allen and Unwin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ma Huan. (1970). &#039;&#039;The overall survey of the ocean&#039;s shores&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mabogunji, A. (1972). The land and peoples of West Africa. In J. Ajayi and M. Crowder, eds., &#039;&#039;History of West Africa&#039;&#039;, Vol. 1. New York: Columbia University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Macauley, T. (1850-1861). &#039;&#039;The history of England from the accession of James the Second&#039;&#039;. 5 vols. London: Longman.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Macfarlane, A. (1978). &#039;&#039;The origins of English individualism&#039;&#039;. Oxford: Basil Blackwell.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1986). &#039;&#039;Marriage and love in England: Modes of reproduction 1300-1840&#039;&#039;. Oxford: Basil Blackwell.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1988). The cradle of capitalism. In J. Baechler, J. A. Hall, and M. Mann, eds., &#039;&#039;Europe and the rise of capitalism&#039;&#039;. Oxford: Basil Blackwell.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Magalhães-Godinho, V. (1969). &#039;&#039;L&#039;économie de l&#039;empire portugais aux XV et XVI siècles&#039;&#039;. Paris: SEVPEN.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Magubane, B. (1987). &#039;&#039;The ties that bind: African-American consciousness and Africa&#039;&#039;. Trenton, NJ: Africa World Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mahalingam, T. (1951). &#039;&#039;Economic life in the Vijayanagar Empire&#039;&#039;. Madras: University of Madras Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Malinowski, B. (1927). The life of culture. In G. Eliot Smith, ed., &#039;&#039;Culture: The diffusion controversy&#039;&#039;. New York: Norton.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mamdani, M. (1972). &#039;&#039;The myth of population control&#039;&#039;. New York: Monthly Review Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mandelbaum, M. (1971). &#039;&#039;History, man and reason: A study in nineteenth-century thought&#039;&#039;. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mann, M. (1986). &#039;&#039;The sources of social power: Vol. 1. A history of power from the beginning to A.D. 1760&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1988). European development: Approaching a historical explanation. In J. Baechler, J. A. Hall, and M. Mann, eds., &#039;&#039;Europe and the rise of capitalism&#039;&#039;. Oxford: Basil Blackwell.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mannheim, K. (1936). &#039;&#039;Ideology and utopia&#039;&#039;. New York: Harcourt, Brace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Marglin, S. (1990). Losing touch: The cultural conditions of worker accommodation and resistance. In F. Marglin and S. Marglin, eds., &#039;&#039;Dominating knowledge: Development, culture, and resistance&#039;&#039;. Oxford: Clarendon Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Markham, S. (1944). &#039;&#039;Climate and the energy of nations&#039;&#039;. London: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Marx, K. (1976). &#039;&#039;Capital&#039;&#039;. New York: Vintage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1979). The British rule in India. In &#039;&#039;Marx and Engels: Collected Works&#039;&#039;, 12:125-33. Moscow: Progress.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------, and Engels, F. (1975). &#039;&#039;Selected correspondence&#039;&#039;. 3d ed. Moscow: Progress.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------, and Engels, F. (1976). &#039;&#039;The German ideology&#039;&#039;. Moscow: Progress.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
McAlister, L. (1984). &#039;&#039;Spain and Portugal in the New World, 1492-1700&#039;&#039;. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
McClelland, D. (1961). &#039;&#039;The achieving society&#039;&#039;. Princeton, NJ: Van Nostrand.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
McKay, D. (1943). Colonialism in the French geographical movement. &#039;&#039;Geographical Review&#039;&#039; 33:214-232.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
McNeill, W. (1967). &#039;&#039;A world history&#039;&#039;. New York: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1976). &#039;&#039;Plagues and peoples&#039;&#039;. Garden City, NY: Anchor Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mead, G. H. (1936). &#039;&#039;Movements of thought in the nineteenth century&#039;&#039;. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1938). &#039;&#039;The philosophy of the act&#039;&#039;. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mead, M. (1930). &#039;&#039;Growing up in New Guinea&#039;&#039;. New York: Blue Ribbon Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Megaw, J., ed. (1977). &#039;&#039;Hunters, gatherers and first farmers beyond Europe: An archeological survey&#039;&#039;. Leicester, England: Leicester University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Merriman, T. (1875). &#039;&#039;The trail of history&#039;&#039;. 3d ed. Boston: Merriman and Stewart.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Miller, J. (1982). The significance of drought, disease, and famine in the agriculturally marginal zones of West-Central Africa. &#039;&#039;Journal of African History&#039;&#039; 23:17-61.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1988). &#039;&#039;Way of death&#039;&#039;. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Milne, G. (1947). A soil reconnaissance journey through parts of Tanganyika Territory, December 1935 to February 1936. &#039;&#039;Journal of Ecology&#039;&#039; 35:192-265.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Minchinton, W. (1969). &#039;&#039;The growth of English overseas trade&#039;&#039;. London: Methuen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mintz, S. W. (1985). &#039;&#039;Sweetness and power: The place of sugar in modern history&#039;&#039;. New York: Penguin Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Miskimin, H. (1969). &#039;&#039;The economy of early Renaissance Europe, 1300-1460&#039;&#039;. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mohr, E., and van Baren, F. (1954). &#039;&#039;Tropical soils&#039;&#039;. Amsterdam: Royal Tropical Institute.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Montesquieu. (1949). &#039;&#039;The spirit of the laws&#039;&#039;. New York: Hafner Press. (Originally published in 1748.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mukherjee, Radhakamal. (1967). &#039;&#039;The economic history of India, 1600-1800&#039;&#039;. Allahabad, India: Kitab Mahal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mukherjee, Ramkrishna. (1958). &#039;&#039;The rise and fall of the East India Company&#039;&#039;. 2d ed. Berlin: VEB Deutscher Verlag der Wissenschaften.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Müller, J. (1842). &#039;&#039;The history of the world to 1783&#039;&#039;. 4 vols. Boston: Webb.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nag, M. (1980). How modernization can also increase fertility. &#039;&#039;Current Anthropology&#039;&#039; 21:571-588.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Naqvi, H. K. (1968). &#039;&#039;Urban centres in Upper India, 1556-1803&#039;&#039;. Bombay: Asia Publishing House.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Needham, J. (1985). &#039;&#039;Gunpowder as the fourth estate east and west&#039;&#039;. Hong Kong: Hong Kong University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------, and collaborators. (1954-1984). &#039;&#039;Science and civilization in China&#039;&#039;. 6 vols. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Neumann, E. (1954). &#039;&#039;The origins and history of consciousness&#039;&#039;. New York: Scribner&#039;s.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Newsom, L. (1985). Indian population patterns in colonial Spanish America. &#039;&#039;Latin American Research Review&#039;&#039; 20(3):41-74.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Niane, D. (1984). Mali and the second Mandingo expansion. In D. Niane, ed., &#039;&#039;UNESCO general history of Africa&#039;&#039;, Vol. 4. Paris: UNESCO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------, ed. (1984). &#039;&#039;UNESCO general history of Africa&#039;&#039;, Vol. 4. Paris: UNESCO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nicholas, D. M. (1967-68). Town and countryside: Social and economic tensions in 14th century Flanders. &#039;&#039;Comparative Studies in Society and History&#039;&#039; 10:458-485.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nisbet, R. (1980). &#039;&#039;History of the idea of progress&#039;&#039;. New York: Basic Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nurul Hasan, S. (1969). The position of the Zamindars in the Mughal Empire. In R. Frykenberg, ed., &#039;&#039;Land control and social structure in Indian history&#039;&#039;. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nye, P., and Greenland, D. (1960). &#039;&#039;The soil under shifting cultivation&#039;&#039;. Farnham Royal, England: Commonwealth Agricultural Bureaux.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
O&#039;Keefe, P., and Wisner, B. (1975). African drought: The state of the game. In P. Richards, ed., &#039;&#039;African environment: Problems and perspectives&#039;&#039;. London: International African Institute.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Onimode, B. (1982). &#039;&#039;Imperialism and underdevelopment in Nigeria&#039;&#039;. London: Zed Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Orwin, C., and Orwin, C. (1967). &#039;&#039;The open fields&#039;&#039;. Oxford: Clarendon Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Osae, T., Nwabara, S., and Odunsi, A. (1973). &#039;&#039;A short history of West Africa&#039;&#039;. New York: Hill and Wang.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pacey, A. (1990). &#039;&#039;Technology in world history: A thousand-year history&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Padgug, R. (1976). Problems in the theory of slavery and slave society. &#039;&#039;Science and Society&#039;&#039; 40:3-28.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Palmer, R., ed. (1957). &#039;&#039;Atlas of world history&#039;&#039;. Chicago: Rand McNally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Panikkar, K. M. (1959). &#039;&#039;Asia and Western influence&#039;&#039;. London: Allen and Unwin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Parsons, J. B. (1970). &#039;&#039;Peasant rebellions of the late Ming Dynasty&#039;&#039;. Tucson: University of Arizona Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pearse, A. (1980). &#039;&#039;Seeds of plenty, seeds of want: Social and economic implications of the green revolution&#039;&#039;. Oxford: Clarendon Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pendleton, R. (1943). Land use in north-eastern Thailand. &#039;&#039;Geographical Review&#039;&#039; 33:14-41.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Perry, W. (1935). &#039;&#039;The primordial ocean&#039;&#039;. London: Methuen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Piaget, J. (1971). &#039;&#039;Psychology and epistemology&#039;&#039;. New York: Grossman Publishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pinar, W. (1974). &#039;&#039;Heightened consciousness, cultural revolution, and curriculum theory&#039;&#039;. Berkeley, CA: McCutchan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pires, T. (1944). &#039;&#039;The Suma Oriental&#039;&#039;. London: Hakluyt Society.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ploetz, C., and Tillinghast, W. (1883). &#039;&#039;Epitome of ancient, medieval, and modern history&#039;&#039;. Boston: Houghton-Mifflin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prakash, I. (1964). Organization of industrial production in urban centres in India during the 17th century with special reference to textiles. In B. Ganguli, ed., &#039;&#039;Readings in Indian economic history&#039;&#039;. Bombay, India.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prescott, J., and Pendleton, R. (1952). &#039;&#039;Laterites and lateritic soils&#039;&#039;. Slough, England: Commonwealth Agricultural Bureaux.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Purcell, V. (1965). &#039;&#039;The Chinese in Southeast Asia&#039;&#039;. 2d ed. London: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Qaisar, A. J. (1974). The role of brokers in medieval India. &#039;&#039;Indian Historical Review&#039;&#039; 1:220-246.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Quackenbos, J. (1889). &#039;&#039;Illustrated school history of the world&#039;&#039;. New York: American Book Company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Radell, D. R. (1976). The Indian slave trade and population of Nicaragua during the sixteenth century. In W. Denevan, ed., &#039;&#039;The Native Population of the Americas in 1492&#039;&#039;. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Radin, P. (1927). &#039;&#039;Primitive man as philosopher&#039;&#039;. New York: Appleton.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1965). &#039;&#039;The method and theory of ethnology&#039;&#039;. New York: Basic Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ratzel, F. (1896). &#039;&#039;The history of mankind (Völkerkunde)&#039;&#039;. 2 vols. London: Macmillan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rawski, E. (1972). &#039;&#039;Agricultural change and the peasant economy of South China&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Raychaudhuri, T. (1962). &#039;&#039;Jan Company in Coromandel&#039;&#039;. The Hague: Nijhoff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1965). The agrarian system of Mughal India. &#039;&#039;Enquiry&#039;&#039; 2(1,n.s.):92-121.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reclus, E. (1876-1894). &#039;&#039;Nouvelle géographie universelle&#039;&#039;. Paris: Hachette.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reed, C. A., ed. (1977). &#039;&#039;Origins of agriculture&#039;&#039;. The Hague: Mouton.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Richards, P., ed. (1975). &#039;&#039;African environment: Problems and perspectives&#039;&#039;. London: International African Institute.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Robbins, R. (1832). &#039;&#039;The world displayed in its history and geography: Embracing a history of the world from the Creation to the present day&#039;&#039;. New York: W. W. Reed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Roberts, J. (1987). &#039;&#039;The Hutchinson history of the world&#039;&#039;. 2d ed. London: Hutchinson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Robinson, C. (1987). Capitalism, slavery and bourgeois historiography. &#039;&#039;History Workshop&#039;&#039; 23:122-141.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rodinson, M. (1973). &#039;&#039;Islam and capitalism&#039;&#039;. New York: Pantheon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1974). Le marchand musulman. In D. S. Richards, ed., &#039;&#039;Islam and the trade of Asia&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cassirer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rodney, W. (1970). &#039;&#039;A history of the Upper Guinea Coast, 1545-1800&#039;&#039;. New York: Monthly Review Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1972). &#039;&#039;How Europe underdeveloped Africa&#039;&#039;. London: Bogle-L&#039;Ouverture Publications, and Dar es Salaam: Tanzania Publishing House.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rogers, E. (1962). &#039;&#039;The diffusion of innovations&#039;&#039;. New York: Free Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------, and Shoemaker, F. (1971). &#039;&#039;Communication of innovations&#039;&#039;. New York: Free Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rorty, R. (1980). &#039;&#039;Philosophy and the mirror of nature&#039;&#039;. Oxford: Basil Blackwell.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rouse, I. (1961). Comments on Edmonson&#039;s Neolithic diffusion rates. &#039;&#039;Current Anthropology&#039;&#039; 2:96.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1986). &#039;&#039;Migrations in prehistory&#039;&#039;. New Haven: Yale University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Roxborough, I. (1979). &#039;&#039;Theories of underdevelopment&#039;&#039;. London: Macmillan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sack, R. (1980). &#039;&#039;Conceptions of space in social thought&#039;&#039;. London: Macmillan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Said, E. (1979). &#039;&#039;Orientalism&#039;&#039;. New York: Random House.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sanderson, E. (1898). &#039;&#039;History of the world from the earliest time to the year 1898&#039;&#039;. New York: Appleton.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sastri, K. N. (1966). &#039;&#039;A history of South India from prehistoric times to the fall of Vijayanagar&#039;&#039;. 3d ed. Madras: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Schmidt, W. (1939). &#039;&#039;The culture historical method of ethnology&#039;&#039;. New York: Fortuny.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Schweder, R. (1990). Cultural psychology: What is it? In J. Stigler, R. Schweder, and G. Herdt, eds., &#039;&#039;Cultural psychology: Essays on comparative human development&#039;&#039;. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Seccombe, W. (1983). Marxism and demography. &#039;&#039;New Left Review&#039;&#039; no. 137, pp. 22-47.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Semo, E. (1982). &#039;&#039;Historia del capitalismo en México: Los orígenes, 1521-1763&#039;&#039;. Mexico, D.F.: Ediciones Era.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shannon, G., and Pyle, G. (1989). The origin and diffusion of AIDS. &#039;&#039;Annals of the Association of American Geographers&#039;&#039; 79:1-24.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sharma, R. S. (1965). &#039;&#039;Indian feudalism, c.300-1200&#039;&#039;. Calcutta: University of Calcutta Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1966). &#039;&#039;Light on early Indian society and economy&#039;&#039;. Bombay: Manaktalas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shepherd, W. (1911). &#039;&#039;Historical atlas&#039;&#039;. New York: Henry Holt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sheridan, R. (1974). &#039;&#039;Sugar and slavery&#039;&#039;. Baltimore, MD: Johns Hopkins University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1987). Eric Williams and &#039;&#039;Capitalism and slavery&#039;&#039;: A biographical and historiographical essay. In B. Solow and S. Engerman, eds. &#039;&#039;British capitalism and Caribbean slavery: The legacy of Eric Williams&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sherif, A. (1987). &#039;&#039;Slaves, spices and ivory in Zanzibar&#039;&#039;. London: James Currey.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Simkin, C. (1968). &#039;&#039;The traditional trade of Asia&#039;&#039;. London: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Simonsen, R. (1944). &#039;&#039;Historia económica do Brasil, 1500-1820&#039;&#039;. 2d ed. São Paulo, Brazil: Companhia Editora Nacional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sinclair, P. (1991). Archeology in eastern Africa: An overview of current chronological issues. &#039;&#039;Journal of African History&#039;&#039; 32:179-219.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Smith, A. (1972). The early states of the Central Sudan. In J. Ajayi and M. Crowder, eds., &#039;&#039;History of West Africa&#039;&#039;, Vol. 1. New York: Columbia University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Smith, C. T. (1969). &#039;&#039;An historical geography of Western Europe before 1800&#039;&#039;. London: Longmans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Smith, P. (1868). &#039;&#039;An ancient history: From the earliest records to the fall of the Western Empire&#039;&#039;. 3 vols. London: Walton.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So Kwan-wai. (1975). &#039;&#039;Japanese piracy in Ming China during the 16th century&#039;&#039;. East Lansing: Michigan State University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Solow, B. (1987). Capitalism and slavery in the exceedingly long run. In B. Solow and S. Engerman, eds. &#039;&#039;British capitalism and Caribbean slavery: The legacy of Eric Williams&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------, and Engerman, S., eds. (1987). &#039;&#039;British capitalism and Caribbean slavery: The legacy of Eric Williams&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Spencer, H. (1969). &#039;&#039;The man versus the state&#039;&#039;. Baltimore: Penguin Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Spradley, J., and McCurdy, D. (1975). &#039;&#039;Anthropology: A cultural perspective&#039;&#039;. New York: Wiley.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Steele, J., and Steele, E. (1883). &#039;&#039;A brief history of ancient, medieval, and modern peoples&#039;&#039;. New York: American Book Co.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Steward, J. (1955). &#039;&#039;Theory of culture change: The methodology of multilinear evolution&#039;&#039;. Urbana: University of Illinois Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Stocking, G. (1968). &#039;&#039;Race, culture, and evolution&#039;&#039;. New York: Free Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1987). &#039;&#039;Victorian anthropology&#039;&#039;. New York: Free Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------, ed. (1984). &#039;&#039;Functionalism historicized: Essays on British social anthropology&#039;&#039;. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Stone, L. (1977). &#039;&#039;The family, sex and marriage in England 1500-1800&#039;&#039;. New York: Harper and Row.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sweezy, P. (1976). A critique. In R. Hilton, ed., &#039;&#039;The transition from feudalism to capitalism&#039;&#039;. London: New Left Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Swindell, K. (1981). Domestic production, labor mobility, and population change in West Africa, 1900-1980. In C. Fyfe and D. McMaster, eds., &#039;&#039;African historical demography&#039;&#039;. Edinburgh, Scotland: Centre of African Studies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Swinton, W. (1874). &#039;&#039;Outlines of the world&#039;s history&#039;&#039;. New York: Ivison, Blakeman, Taylor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Taeuber, I. (1970). The families of Chinese farmers. In M. Freedman, ed., &#039;&#039;Family and kinship in Chinese society&#039;&#039;. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Talkington, L. (1986). But the editor looks at the universe from a different frame of reference. &#039;&#039;Science and Nature&#039;&#039;, nos. 7-8, pp. 94-100.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tarde, G. (1903). &#039;&#039;The laws of imitation&#039;&#039;. New York: Henry Holt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tawney, R. H. (1952). &#039;&#039;Religion and the rise of capitalism&#039;&#039;. New York: Harcourt Brace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Taylor, G. (1945). &#039;&#039;Environment and nation&#039;&#039;. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Temu, A., and Swai, B. (1981). &#039;&#039;Historians and Africanist history: A critique&#039;&#039;. London: Zed Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thalheimer, M. (1883). &#039;&#039;Outline of general history for the use of schools&#039;&#039;. New York: American Book Co.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thapar, R. (1978). &#039;&#039;Ancient Indian social history: Some interpretations&#039;&#039;. New Delhi, India: Orient Longman.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1982). Ideology and the interpretation of early Indian history. &#039;&#039;Review&#039;&#039; 5:389-412.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thorndyke, L. (1943). Renaissance or prenaissance? &#039;&#039;Journal of the History of Ideas&#039;&#039; 4:65-74.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thrupp, S. (1948). &#039;&#039;The merchant class of medieval London (1300-1500)&#039;&#039;. Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1972). Medieval industry 1000-1500. In C. Cipolla, ed., &#039;&#039;The Fontana economic history of Europe: The Middle Ages&#039;&#039;. London: Collins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tiedemann, C., and Van Doren, C. (1964). &#039;&#039;The diffusion of hybrid seed corn in Iowa: A spatial diffusion study&#039;&#039;. Institute for Community Development and Services, Michigan State University, Bulletin B-44.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Titow, J. Z. (1969). &#039;&#039;English rural society, 1200-1350&#039;&#039;. London: Allen and Unwin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tolman, E. (1951). A Psychological model. In T. Parsons and E. Shils, eds., &#039;&#039;Towards a general theory of action&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Torras, J. (1980). Class struggle in Catalonia. &#039;&#039;Review&#039;&#039; 4:253-265.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Toulmin, S., and Goodfield, J. (1965). &#039;&#039;The discovery of time&#039;&#039;. New York: Harper and Row.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Toyoda, T. (1969). &#039;&#039;History of pre-Meiji commerce in Japan&#039;&#039;. Tokyo: Japan Cultural Society.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Trigger, B. (1989). &#039;&#039;A history of archeological thought&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tung, C. (1979). &#039;&#039;Outline history of China&#039;&#039;. Hong Kong: Joint Publishing Co.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Turner, B. (1978). &#039;&#039;Marx and the end of Orientalism&#039;&#039;. London: Allen and Unwin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Turshen, M. (1987). Population growth and the deterioration of health: Mainland Tanzania, 1920-1960. In D. Cordell and J. Gregory, eds., &#039;&#039;African population and capitalism: Historical perspectives&#039;&#039;. Boulder, CO: Westview Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tyler, S., ed. (1969). &#039;&#039;Cognitive anthropology&#039;&#039;. New York: Holt, Rinehart, and Winston.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tytler, A. (1844). &#039;&#039;Universal history, from the Creation to the beginning of the eighteenth century&#039;&#039;. Rev. ed. Boston: Massey.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Udovitch, A. (1974). Commercial techniques in early medieval Islamic trade. In D. S. Richards, ed., &#039;&#039;Islam and the trade of Asia&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cassirer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Usman, Y. B. (1981). &#039;&#039;The transformation of Katsina (1400-1883)&#039;&#039;. Zaria, Nigeria: Ahmadu Bello University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Van Leur, J. C. (1955). &#039;&#039;Indonesian trade and society&#039;&#039;. The Hague: W. van Hoeve.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Van Sertima, I. (1976). &#039;&#039;They came before Columbus&#039;&#039;. New York: Random House.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Van Young, E. (1983). Mexican rural history since Chevalier: The historiography of the colonial hacienda. &#039;&#039;Latin American Research Review&#039;&#039; 28(3):5-61.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vavilov, N. (1951). &#039;&#039;The origin, variation, immunity, and breeding of cultivated plants&#039;&#039;. New York: Ronald Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Venturi, F. (1963). The history of the concept of &amp;quot;oriental despotism&amp;quot; in Europe. &#039;&#039;The Journal of the History of Ideas&#039;&#039; 24:133-143.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vilar, P. (1976). &#039;&#039;A history of gold and money, 1450-1920&#039;&#039;. London: New Left Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vishnu-Mittre. (1978). Origin and history of agriculture in the Indian subcontinent. &#039;&#039;Journal of Human Evolution&#039;&#039; 7:31-36.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vives, J. Vicens. (1969). &#039;&#039;An economic history of Spain&#039;&#039;. Princeton: Princeton University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wachtel, N. (1984). The Indian and Spanish conquest. In Bethell, L., ed., &#039;&#039;The Cambridge history of Latin America: Colonial Latin America&#039;&#039;, Vol. 1. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wai Andah, B. (1981). West Africa before the seventh century. In G. Mokhtar, ed., &#039;&#039;UNESCO general history of Africa: Vol. 2. Ancient civilizations of Africa&#039;&#039;. Paris: UNESCO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wallerstein, I. (1974-1988). &#039;&#039;The modern world system&#039;&#039;. 3 vols. New York: Academic Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Warren, B. (1980). &#039;&#039;Imperialism: Pioneer of capitalism&#039;&#039;. London: New Left Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Watson, A. (1983). &#039;&#039;Agricultural innovation in the early Islamic world: The diffusion of crops and farming techniques, 700-1100&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Watts, S. J., Okello, R., and Watts, S. (1990). Medical geography and AIDS. &#039;&#039;Annals of the Association of American Geographers&#039;&#039; 80:301-304.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Webb, W. P. (1951). &#039;&#039;The great frontier&#039;&#039;. Austin: University of Texas Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Weber, G. (1853). &#039;&#039;Outlines of universal history&#039;&#039;. Rev. ed. Edited by F. Brown. Boston: Brewer and Tileston.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Weber, M. (1951). &#039;&#039;The religion of China&#039;&#039;. New York: Free Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1958). &#039;&#039;The Protestant ethic and the spirit of capitalism&#039;&#039;. New York: Scribner&#039;s.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1967). &#039;&#039;The religion of India&#039;&#039;. New York: Free Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1968). &#039;&#039;Economy and society&#039;&#039;. 2 vols. New York: Bedminster Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1976). &#039;&#039;The agrarian sociology of ancient civilizations&#039;&#039;. London: New Left Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1981). &#039;&#039;General economic history&#039;&#039;. New Brunswick, NJ: Transaction Books.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wendorf, F., and Schild, R. (1980). &#039;&#039;Prehistory of the Eastern Sahara&#039;&#039;. New York: Academic Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Werner, K. F. (1988). Political and social structures of the West, 300-1300. In J. Baechler, J. A. Hall, and M. Mann, eds., &#039;&#039;Europe and the rise of capitalism&#039;&#039;. Oxford: Basil Blackwell.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Werner, H., and Kaplan, B. (1964). &#039;&#039;Symbol formation&#039;&#039;. New York: John Wiley.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wheatley, P. (1961). &#039;&#039;The Golden Khersonese: Studies in the historical geography of the Malay Peninsula before A.D. 1500&#039;&#039;. Kuala Lumpur: University of Malaya Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1971). &#039;&#039;The pivot of the four quarters: A preliminary inquiry into the origins and character of the ancient Chinese city&#039;&#039;. Chicago: Aldine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Whelpley, S. (1844). &#039;&#039;A compound of history, from the earliest times&#039;&#039;. 12th ed. New York: Collins Brothers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
White, G., ed. (1974). &#039;&#039;Natural hazards: Local, national, global&#039;&#039;. New York: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
White, Lynn, Jr. (1962). &#039;&#039;Medieval technology and social change&#039;&#039;. London: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1968). &#039;&#039;Machina ex deo: Essays in the dynamism of Western culture&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1968). The historical roots of our ecological crisis. In his &#039;&#039;Machina ex deo: Essays in the dynamism of Western culture&#039;&#039;, 75-94. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Whitehead, A. N. (1929). &#039;&#039;Process and reality&#039;&#039;. New York: Humanities Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1938). &#039;&#039;Modes of thought&#039;&#039;. New York: Macmillan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1948). &#039;&#039;Science and philosophy&#039;&#039;. New York: Philosophical Library.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Whitman, J. (1984). Philology to anthropology in mid-nineteenth-century Germany. In G. Stocking, ed., &#039;&#039;Functionalism historicized: Essays on British social anthropology&#039;&#039;. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Whitmore, T. (1991). A simulation of sixteenth-century population collapse in the Basin of Mexico. &#039;&#039;Annals of the Association of American Geographers&#039;&#039; 81:464-487.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wiethoff, B. (1963). &#039;&#039;Die Chinesische Seeverbotspolitik und der Private Überseehandel von 1368 bis 1567&#039;&#039;. Hamburg, Germany: Gesellschaft für Natur- und Völkerkunde Ostasiens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wilken, G. (1987). &#039;&#039;Good farmers: Traditional resource management in Mexico and Central America&#039;&#039;. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Willard, E. (1845). &#039;&#039;Universal history in perspective&#039;&#039;. 2d ed. New York: Barnes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Williams, E. (1944). &#039;&#039;Capitalism and slavery&#039;&#039;. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1966). &#039;&#039;British historians and the West Indies&#039;&#039;. London: Andre Deutsch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Williams, R. (1990). &#039;&#039;The American Indian in Western legal thought: The discourses of conquest&#039;&#039;. New York: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wisner, B. (1989). &#039;&#039;Power and need in Africa&#039;&#039;. Trenton, NJ: Africa World Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------, and Mbithi, P. (1974). Drought in Eastern Kenya. In G. White, ed., &#039;&#039;Natural hazards: Local, national, global&#039;&#039;. New York: Oxford University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wittfogel, K. (1957). &#039;&#039;Oriental despotism&#039;&#039;. New Haven: Yale University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wolf, E. (1982). &#039;&#039;Europe and the peoples without history&#039;&#039;. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wrigley, E. (1969). &#039;&#039;Population and history&#039;&#039;. New York: McGraw-Hill.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wunder, H. (1985). Peasant organization and class conflict in eastern and western Germany. In T. Aston and C. Philpin, eds., &#039;&#039;The Brenner debate: Agrarian class structure and economic development in pre-industrial Europe&#039;&#039;. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yadava, B. (1966). Secular land grants of the post-Gupta period and some aspects of the growth of the feudal complex in northern India. In D. Sircar, ed., &#039;&#039;Land system and feudalism in ancient India&#039;&#039;. Calcutta, India.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------. (1974). Immobility and subjugation of Indian peasantry in early medieval complex. &#039;&#039;Indian Historical Review&#039;&#039; 1:18-74.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yang Lien-sheng (1970). Government control of urban merchants in traditional China. &#039;&#039;Tsinghua Journal of Chinese Studies&#039;&#039; 8:186-206.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yapa, L. (1980). Diffusion, development, and ecopolitical economy. In J. Agnew, ed., &#039;&#039;Innovation research and public policy&#039;&#039;. Syracuse, NY: Department of Geography, Syracuse University.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Zwernemann, J. (1983). &#039;&#039;Culture history and African anthropology&#039;&#039;. Acta Universitatis Upsaliensis, Uppsala Studies in Cultural Anthropology. Uppsala, Sweden: Uppsala University.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Index =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Abel, W., 209&lt;br /&gt;
Abu-Lughod, J., 51, 57, 172, 177, 178&lt;br /&gt;
Acapulco, 190&lt;br /&gt;
Accessibility. See Location&lt;br /&gt;
Accumulation, 129, 152, 187, 189, 192, 195, 199, 204-206, 212&lt;br /&gt;
primitive, 188, 189, 210&lt;br /&gt;
Adams, B., 212&lt;br /&gt;
Adulthood, 17, 95-98&lt;br /&gt;
Africa, Africans, 4, 15, 20-22, 45, 51, 57, 62, 64, 98-99, 103, 105-107, 109, 116, 119, 120, 123-124, 138, 140, 149, 153, 155-158, 160, 162, 166, 168-169, 171, 173-174, 180, 183, 187, 188, 189, 193, 195, 196, 197, 200, 201, 203, 206, 209&lt;br /&gt;
East, 167, 182-183, 191, 192, 207-209&lt;br /&gt;
South, 89, 141, 144, 152, 155-157, 166-167&lt;br /&gt;
apartheid in, 75, 141, 144&lt;br /&gt;
myth of emptiness in, 75&lt;br /&gt;
North, 3, 46, 82-90, 157, 209&lt;br /&gt;
tropical, 69-80, 140, 141&lt;br /&gt;
West, 79, 155, 181-183, 191, 204, 207-209&lt;br /&gt;
African-Americans, 98&lt;br /&gt;
Agriculture, 29, 44-45, 117, 154-165, 169&lt;br /&gt;
aridity and, 80-90, 143&lt;br /&gt;
drainage, 85-86, 143, 164, 174&lt;br /&gt;
and industrial revolution, 213&lt;br /&gt;
intensification and commercialization, 157-158, 161, 163-164, 166&lt;br /&gt;
irrigated, 74-78, 80-90, 109-110, 143, 162, 164, 174&lt;br /&gt;
labor productivity in, 89, 91, 143, 157, 174&lt;br /&gt;
medieval, 110-115, 157-165, 168&lt;br /&gt;
origins. See Agricultural revolution&lt;br /&gt;
peasant. See Peasants&lt;br /&gt;
plantation. See Plantations&lt;br /&gt;
rain-fed (dry field), 74-76, 84, 86, 88-91&lt;br /&gt;
sedentary, 74-76&lt;br /&gt;
shifting, 72-76, 141-142, 174&lt;br /&gt;
tropical, 70-77, 140, 174&lt;br /&gt;
Agricultural revolution, 4, 7, 23, 44-45, 155-157, 164, 172, 174, 185-186, 209&lt;br /&gt;
Ahn, P., 140&lt;br /&gt;
AIDS, 77, 215-216&lt;br /&gt;
and Africa, 142, 215-216&lt;br /&gt;
Ajayi, J., 176&lt;br /&gt;
Akan, 157&lt;br /&gt;
Alavi, H., 212&lt;br /&gt;
Alchon, S., 209&lt;br /&gt;
Alliance for Progress, 49&lt;br /&gt;
Amazon river and basin, 71, 74, 207&lt;br /&gt;
America, 51, 103, 152, 162, 173, 180, 183-184, 187, 200, 204, 206, 208-209&lt;br /&gt;
Latin, 22, 76, 131&lt;br /&gt;
North, 180&lt;br /&gt;
South, 141&lt;br /&gt;
Americans, Native, 97, 138, 194, 195&lt;br /&gt;
Amin, S., 51, 56, 57, 47, 135, 136, 137, 154, 173, 177, 205, 211&lt;br /&gt;
Andean region, 20, 184, 194, 195&lt;br /&gt;
Anderson, J., 44&lt;br /&gt;
Anderson, P., 58, 108, 138, 142, 146, 176&lt;br /&gt;
Angola, 49&lt;br /&gt;
Anthrax, 78&lt;br /&gt;
Anthropology, 23-24, 30-33, 65, 97, 102&lt;br /&gt;
and primitive mind, 97, 102&lt;br /&gt;
Antilles. See West Indies, Antilles&lt;br /&gt;
Antwerp, 189-190, 192&lt;br /&gt;
Appadorai, A., 176&lt;br /&gt;
Arabia, 92, 167&lt;br /&gt;
Arabs, 98, 99, 181&lt;br /&gt;
Aristocracy, medieval, 123, 125-127&lt;br /&gt;
Armenia, 43&lt;br /&gt;
Aryan theory, 12, 84, 89&lt;br /&gt;
Asad, T., 48&lt;br /&gt;
Asia, 21-22, 77, 80-90, 103-107, 123, 155-158, 160, 162, 165-166, 171, 173, 180, 183, 187-189, 193, 195, 196, 197, 200, 206&lt;br /&gt;
aridity in, 80-90&lt;br /&gt;
East, 30, 46, 152, 167&lt;br /&gt;
South, 46, 56, 76, 167&lt;br /&gt;
Southeast, 21, 56, 76, 117-120, 167, 171, 181&lt;br /&gt;
Asiatic mode of production, 81-83, 125, 157&lt;br /&gt;
Aston, T., 140, 149, 150&lt;br /&gt;
Athenian empire, 125&lt;br /&gt;
Atlantic Ocean, 181-182, 211&lt;br /&gt;
crossing, 14, 181, 207-209&lt;br /&gt;
Atwell, W., 210&lt;br /&gt;
Augsburg, 197&lt;br /&gt;
Australians, 45&lt;br /&gt;
Azores Islands, 182&lt;br /&gt;
Aztecs, 185&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Baechler, J., 122-123, 125-127, 147, 149, 160, 176&lt;br /&gt;
Bailey, A., 142&lt;br /&gt;
Bailey, R., 205, 212, 213&lt;br /&gt;
Bakewell, P., 211&lt;br /&gt;
Bali, 120&lt;br /&gt;
Baltic Sea, 167, 171, 197, 200, 211&lt;br /&gt;
Bangladesh, 71&lt;br /&gt;
Barbados, 68, 71, 197&lt;br /&gt;
Barbarism, zone of, 14&lt;br /&gt;
Barnes, H. E., 44&lt;br /&gt;
Beckles, H., 205, 213&lt;br /&gt;
Belief-value matrix, 38&lt;br /&gt;
Beliefs, 30-43&lt;br /&gt;
compatibility of, 34-37&lt;br /&gt;
conformality and binding of, 35-41&lt;br /&gt;
ethnography of, 30-41&lt;br /&gt;
explicit and implicit, 36, 40-41, 65&lt;br /&gt;
truth and, 30-32&lt;br /&gt;
Bengal, 166&lt;br /&gt;
Berkner, L., 150&lt;br /&gt;
Bernal, M., 44, 55, 57, 137, 138, 144&lt;br /&gt;
Bernier, F., 142&lt;br /&gt;
Bible Lands, 3, 5, 7, 29, 43-45, 81&lt;br /&gt;
Big Bang Theory, 214-216&lt;br /&gt;
Birth&lt;br /&gt;
conception and, 67, 139&lt;br /&gt;
control, 66-67, 129, 139&lt;br /&gt;
rates, 128-130, 140&lt;br /&gt;
Bjørklund, O., 149&lt;br /&gt;
Black, C., 136&lt;br /&gt;
Black death, 46, 77&lt;br /&gt;
Black magic, 16&lt;br /&gt;
Blaut, J., 48, 49, 136, 138, 140, 141, 142, 143, 145, 149, 173, 174, 175, 176, 177, 178, 209, 212, 215&lt;br /&gt;
Blockages, historical, 69, 80, 117, 137&lt;br /&gt;
Blow-gun, 11&lt;br /&gt;
Blum, J., 139&lt;br /&gt;
Boas, F., 97, 139, 144&lt;br /&gt;
Bogeyman, 16, 47&lt;br /&gt;
Bois, G., 150&lt;br /&gt;
Bojador, Cape, 209&lt;br /&gt;
Borah, W., 209, 211&lt;br /&gt;
Bourgeois revolutions, 165, 179-180, 187, 199, 200&lt;br /&gt;
Bourgeoisie, 179, 195&lt;br /&gt;
Bowler, P., 48, 138, 141, 144&lt;br /&gt;
Brading, D., 210&lt;br /&gt;
Brantlinger, P., 48&lt;br /&gt;
Braudel, F., 178, 210&lt;br /&gt;
Bray, Francesca, 143, 146, 211&lt;br /&gt;
Brazil, 20, 182, 188, 191-192, 195, 197, 216&lt;br /&gt;
Brenner, R., 58, 108, 127-128, 138, 146, 149, 150, 151, 160, 176, 177, 205, 213&lt;br /&gt;
Britain, 108, 146-147, 150, 166, 179, 187-188, 191-192, 197, 203, 211, 213&lt;br /&gt;
Brown, L., 145&lt;br /&gt;
Buck, J. L., 131&lt;br /&gt;
Buckle, H. T., 76, 77, 141, 142&lt;br /&gt;
Burghers. See Bourgeoisie&lt;br /&gt;
Burma, 147&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cabral, A., 54, 136&lt;br /&gt;
Cairo, 187&lt;br /&gt;
Calicut, 190, 196&lt;br /&gt;
Cambodia, 147&lt;br /&gt;
Cambridge University, 135&lt;br /&gt;
Canada, 43, 156&lt;br /&gt;
Canals, in China, 93, 113&lt;br /&gt;
Canary Islands, 182, 208, 209&lt;br /&gt;
Cape Bojador, 209&lt;br /&gt;
Cape of Good Hope, 181&lt;br /&gt;
Capes and bays theory, 92, 122&lt;br /&gt;
Capitalism, 8, 51, 102, 152, 161-163, 165, 167, 169-170, 179-180, 187-206, 210&lt;br /&gt;
centration of, 180, 191, 197, 201-206&lt;br /&gt;
in colonial America, 55&lt;br /&gt;
origins and rise, 55, 102, 127-128, 150&lt;br /&gt;
triumph of, 179&lt;br /&gt;
Caribbean. See under West Indies&lt;br /&gt;
Carter, G., 47&lt;br /&gt;
Carus-Wilson, E., 212&lt;br /&gt;
Cassava, 156&lt;br /&gt;
Caucasus, 11, 43&lt;br /&gt;
Center-periphery model, 14&lt;br /&gt;
Centration of capitalism. See Capitalism, centration of&lt;br /&gt;
Céspedes, G., 210&lt;br /&gt;
Ch&#039;in empire, 125&lt;br /&gt;
Chad, Lake and region, 120, 157&lt;br /&gt;
Chambers, M., 46&lt;br /&gt;
Chan-Cheung, J., 177&lt;br /&gt;
Chandra, B., 48, 142&lt;br /&gt;
Chandra, S., 177, 211&lt;br /&gt;
Chao Phraya Basin, 120&lt;br /&gt;
Chariots, 143&lt;br /&gt;
Chaudhuri, K. N., 177, 207, 211&lt;br /&gt;
Chaudhuri, S., 177&lt;br /&gt;
Chaunu, H. and P., 210&lt;br /&gt;
Cheng Ho, 181, 182, 207&lt;br /&gt;
Chicherov, A., 176&lt;br /&gt;
Childhood, 17, 95-98&lt;br /&gt;
China, 15, 21, 29, 46-47, 56-57, 78, 82, 87, 94, 96, 110, 113, 115-120, 122-123, 125, 131, 158-159, 166-167, 169-170, 173, 181-182, 198, 216&lt;br /&gt;
Jones on, 67, 106-107&lt;br /&gt;
Weber on, 64, 103, 116&lt;br /&gt;
Chirimuuta, R. C. and R. J., 142, 216&lt;br /&gt;
Christendom, 18&lt;br /&gt;
Christianity, 123-124&lt;br /&gt;
and diffusionism, 18-19, 21, 60-61, 108&lt;br /&gt;
Western (L. White, Jr.), 114-115&lt;br /&gt;
Church, 119, 123-124, 147-149&lt;br /&gt;
Cipolla, C., 118-119, 147&lt;br /&gt;
Cities, 153, 161, 167, 196, 207&lt;br /&gt;
ancient, 84&lt;br /&gt;
European, 84, 128, 188, 193&lt;br /&gt;
medieval, 113, 167, 175, 177&lt;br /&gt;
mercantile-maritime, 167-173, 181, 196, 207&lt;br /&gt;
Weber on, 84, 103-104, 116&lt;br /&gt;
City-states, 104, 123, 167, 171&lt;br /&gt;
Civil Rights movement, 5, 137&lt;br /&gt;
Civilization, zone of, 14&lt;br /&gt;
Class, 33-34, 41, 57, 88, 119, 123-128, 154, 157-158, 170&lt;br /&gt;
Baechler on, 125-127&lt;br /&gt;
Brenner on, 127-128, 150&lt;br /&gt;
Godelier on, 127&lt;br /&gt;
in precolonial Africa, 124-125&lt;br /&gt;
Class struggle, 8, 53, 127, 149, 150&lt;br /&gt;
Classless society, 123-125&lt;br /&gt;
Climate and personality, 70-71&lt;br /&gt;
Climatic determinism or energy, 70-71, 140&lt;br /&gt;
Clocks, in China, 117&lt;br /&gt;
Cockburn, A., 140, 141&lt;br /&gt;
Cognition, 98&lt;br /&gt;
of environmental hazards, 93, 101&lt;br /&gt;
of space, 101&lt;br /&gt;
Cohen, I., 145&lt;br /&gt;
Collier, W., 43, 44&lt;br /&gt;
Collins, K., 140&lt;br /&gt;
Collyer, O., 140&lt;br /&gt;
Colonial Development and Welfare, 49&lt;br /&gt;
Colonial Office, British, 24&lt;br /&gt;
Colonialism, 2, 4, 10, 18-30, 41, 49, 53-57, 62, 70-71, 75, 81, 96, 135, 140, 150, 152-153, 179, 187-206&lt;br /&gt;
and diffusionism, 16, 18-30, 53-58&lt;br /&gt;
classical, 21-25&lt;br /&gt;
modern, 26-30&lt;br /&gt;
and rise of Europe, 2, 17-29, 187-205&lt;br /&gt;
settler, 15, 21-22, 25, 183&lt;br /&gt;
Colonizer&#039;s model, 10, 17-30, 41-42&lt;br /&gt;
Columbus, C., 209&lt;br /&gt;
Congo, 157&lt;br /&gt;
Conklin, H., 49&lt;br /&gt;
Conquest of America, 179-186&lt;br /&gt;
disease and, 183-186&lt;br /&gt;
technology and, 182-184&lt;br /&gt;
Consciousness, 98, 100-101, 144&lt;br /&gt;
Contemporary ancestors, theory of, 16&lt;br /&gt;
Continence, European sexual, 66-68, 121, 133-135&lt;br /&gt;
Hall on, 134&lt;br /&gt;
Jones on, 67, 121&lt;br /&gt;
Cook, S. F., 209, 211&lt;br /&gt;
Cooper, J., 150&lt;br /&gt;
Cordell, D., 139&lt;br /&gt;
Core areas, ecological and political, 93-97, 120, 122&lt;br /&gt;
Coromandel, 166&lt;br /&gt;
Cortés, H., 185, 186&lt;br /&gt;
Cotton, cotton textile industry, 164, 166, 212&lt;br /&gt;
in Britain and India, 203&lt;br /&gt;
Counterdiffusion, 17, 77. See also Black magic; Dracula; AIDS; Plagues&lt;br /&gt;
Coursey, D., 141&lt;br /&gt;
Cro-Magnon, 4&lt;br /&gt;
Crone, P., 131, 133, 144, 150, 151&lt;br /&gt;
Croot, P., 150, 151&lt;br /&gt;
Crosby, A., 209&lt;br /&gt;
Cross, H. C., 210&lt;br /&gt;
Crowder, M., 176&lt;br /&gt;
Cuba, 29, 53, 185&lt;br /&gt;
Culture, 11, 27, 32-33, 94, 123, 172, 183, 208, 212&lt;br /&gt;
Curtin, P., 76, 79, 140, 141, 211, 212&lt;br /&gt;
Cyprus, 191&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dalai, F., 144&lt;br /&gt;
Danube R., 93&lt;br /&gt;
Darby, H., 146&lt;br /&gt;
Darity, W., Jr., 205, 212, 213&lt;br /&gt;
Darwin, C., 4, 23&lt;br /&gt;
Das Gupta, A., 175&lt;br /&gt;
Decolonization, 28-30, 49, 55, 137&lt;br /&gt;
Deerr, Noel, 210, 211, 212&lt;br /&gt;
Degeneration, 44-45&lt;br /&gt;
Demesnes, farming, 112, 159&lt;br /&gt;
Democracy, 8, 88, 107, 120-121, 126&lt;br /&gt;
Demography, and diffusionism, 42, 53, 66-68, 93, 119, 139&lt;br /&gt;
Denevan, W., 140, 143, 174, 209, 211&lt;br /&gt;
Dependency theory, 55, 137, 149, 177&lt;br /&gt;
Depopulation&lt;br /&gt;
of America, 141, 184-186, 194&lt;br /&gt;
of Mexico, 184, 194&lt;br /&gt;
of West Africa, 76, 78-79&lt;br /&gt;
Development, 27-30, 53-55, 100-101, 105, 129, 133, 136, 152-153, 214-215&lt;br /&gt;
even and uneven, 152-153, 162&lt;br /&gt;
DeVisse, J., 207, 209&lt;br /&gt;
Dew, T., 44&lt;br /&gt;
Dewey, J., 38, 49, 145&lt;br /&gt;
Di Meglio, R., 176, 177&lt;br /&gt;
Diffusion, 11, 47, 98, 100-101, 115, 136, 145, 155-157, 161-162, 171, 173-174, 215&lt;br /&gt;
criss-cross, 115, 156, 160-162, 167, 171, 173&lt;br /&gt;
Diffusionism, 11-30, 52-54, 70, 100, 104, 137, 142, 180, 183, 189, 203, 205, 208, 214-215&lt;br /&gt;
as a belief system, 41-43&lt;br /&gt;
classical, 21-26, 81, 95-98, 170&lt;br /&gt;
extreme, 11-12, 27, 47, 49&lt;br /&gt;
modern, 26-30&lt;br /&gt;
origins of, 18-21&lt;br /&gt;
Dirks, N., 147&lt;br /&gt;
Disasters, natural, 93, 145&lt;br /&gt;
Disease, 60, 107, 142. See also Plagues&lt;br /&gt;
and conquest of America, 184-186&lt;br /&gt;
and Africa, 77-80, 142&lt;br /&gt;
and Europe, 77-78&lt;br /&gt;
and tropics, 77-80, 142&lt;br /&gt;
Dobb, M., 173, 176, 177&lt;br /&gt;
Doolittle, W., 143&lt;br /&gt;
Dracula, 16, 21, 47&lt;br /&gt;
Dualism, 95-97&lt;br /&gt;
Man and Nature, 112&lt;br /&gt;
mind-body, 101&lt;br /&gt;
philosophical, 101, 145, 214&lt;br /&gt;
Dualistic-developmental theory of rationality, 95-98&lt;br /&gt;
DuBois, W. E. B., 55&lt;br /&gt;
Dunn, R. S., 211&lt;br /&gt;
Duruy, V., 44&lt;br /&gt;
Dutt, R. P., 55, 212&lt;br /&gt;
Duyvendak, J., 56, 137&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
East India companies, 24, 197&lt;br /&gt;
East Indies, Dutch, 49&lt;br /&gt;
Edel, M., 211&lt;br /&gt;
Eden, Garden of, 3, 43-44&lt;br /&gt;
Edmonson, M., 47&lt;br /&gt;
Education, U. S., 101, 145&lt;br /&gt;
Egypt, 12, 47, 82-83, 87, 143, 191-192, 197, 208&lt;br /&gt;
El Salvador, 71&lt;br /&gt;
Eliot Smith, G., 47, 49&lt;br /&gt;
Elvin, M., 57, 117, 137, 175, 176, 177&lt;br /&gt;
Empires, 120, 147&lt;br /&gt;
Chinese, 123&lt;br /&gt;
Oriental. See Oriental despotism&lt;br /&gt;
Roman, 147&lt;br /&gt;
Emptiness, myth of, 15, 25, 75&lt;br /&gt;
Engels, F., 48, 82-84, 86, 127, 142&lt;br /&gt;
Engerman, S., 205&lt;br /&gt;
England. See Britain&lt;br /&gt;
Environment, 69-94, 119&lt;br /&gt;
arid, 80-90&lt;br /&gt;
European, 90-94&lt;br /&gt;
humid-tropical, 69-80, 141&lt;br /&gt;
Environmentalism, environmental determinism, 69, 140, 141, 182, 183&lt;br /&gt;
Episteme, Western (Marglin), 101&lt;br /&gt;
Equilibrium theories, 27-28&lt;br /&gt;
Ethiopia, 157&lt;br /&gt;
Ethnogeography, 23, 32&lt;br /&gt;
Ethnography of beliefs. See Beliefs&lt;br /&gt;
Ethnohistory, 32&lt;br /&gt;
Ethnoscience, 2, 32-43, 49&lt;br /&gt;
Ethology, 105, 107, 151&lt;br /&gt;
Eurocentrism, 1-2, 7-11, 47. See also Diffusionism&lt;br /&gt;
Europe, 43, 45, 51, 90-94, 152, 186-187&lt;br /&gt;
Greater, 3-8, 14, 46&lt;br /&gt;
European intellect, 1, 15-17, 20, 95-108, 121&lt;br /&gt;
mind, 58&lt;br /&gt;
miracle, myth of, 2, 50-151, 214&lt;br /&gt;
personality, 132-135, 144&lt;br /&gt;
rationality. See Rationality, European&lt;br /&gt;
spirit, 1, 15-17, 20, 103-104, 121&lt;br /&gt;
Evolution, cultural, 11, 16-17, 22-26, 47, 57, 65, 85, 127, 152-153, 172, 174, 185, 209&lt;br /&gt;
Evolutionism, 12, 24, 47&lt;br /&gt;
Exploitation, internal and external, 161&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Family, 58, 68, 119, 128-135&lt;br /&gt;
extended and nuclear, 128-134, 150&lt;br /&gt;
European, 90, 126, 128-135&lt;br /&gt;
Hajnal on, 129-130&lt;br /&gt;
Macfarlane on, 131-134&lt;br /&gt;
modern, 128&lt;br /&gt;
preindustrial, traditional, 68, 128&lt;br /&gt;
Stone on, 130-135&lt;br /&gt;
Fei Hsiao-tung, 175&lt;br /&gt;
Feminism, 139&lt;br /&gt;
Feudal mode of production, 154, 157-165, 171, 173&lt;br /&gt;
Feudal property and tenure, 83, 104, 158&lt;br /&gt;
Feudalism, 8, 46, 51, 95, 110, 112, 126-128, 146, 152-154, 158-165, 197, 210&lt;br /&gt;
in Africa, 157-158&lt;br /&gt;
in India, 55, 158, 160, 175&lt;br /&gt;
Fez, 209&lt;br /&gt;
Fiedel, S., 209&lt;br /&gt;
Fiefs, 158, 175&lt;br /&gt;
Figueroa, L., 215&lt;br /&gt;
Filesi, T., 209&lt;br /&gt;
Finley, M., 108, 146&lt;br /&gt;
Fisher, D., 211&lt;br /&gt;
Fisher, G., 44&lt;br /&gt;
Fisheries, Atlantic, 92, 182, 188, 192, 196-197, 207&lt;br /&gt;
Flanders, 166, 188, 197&lt;br /&gt;
Fleck, L., 49&lt;br /&gt;
Florescano, E., 211&lt;br /&gt;
Forests, 89, 106, 140, 143&lt;br /&gt;
and ancient Europeans, 84, 107&lt;br /&gt;
European, 89-90, 94, 108&lt;br /&gt;
tropical, 71-76&lt;br /&gt;
Foster, G., 145&lt;br /&gt;
Frake, C., 49&lt;br /&gt;
France, 147, 179, 203, 204&lt;br /&gt;
Frank, A. G., 51, 149, 205, 211&lt;br /&gt;
Frankel, H., 216&lt;br /&gt;
Freedman, M., 150&lt;br /&gt;
Freedom, love of, in Europe, 26, 107, 119, 120-121, 171&lt;br /&gt;
Freeman, E., 44&lt;br /&gt;
FRELIMO, 175&lt;br /&gt;
Freund, J., 145&lt;br /&gt;
Fu Chu-fu, 175, 176&lt;br /&gt;
Fukien, 166&lt;br /&gt;
Functionalism, 27&lt;br /&gt;
Furtado, C., 211&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Galloway, J. H., 210&lt;br /&gt;
Garraty, J., 141&lt;br /&gt;
Gay, P., 141&lt;br /&gt;
Genesis, Book of, 23, 43-45&lt;br /&gt;
Genoa, 189&lt;br /&gt;
Gentry and nobility, 158&lt;br /&gt;
Geography, 1, 3-8, 17, 23-24, 31-32, 45, 47, 65, 96-97, 101, 125, 127, 136&lt;br /&gt;
in 19th-century education, 3-7, 96&lt;br /&gt;
Germanic culture, ancient, 25, 131-132&lt;br /&gt;
Germany, 147&lt;br /&gt;
Gernet, J., 176, 177&lt;br /&gt;
Giblin, J., 142&lt;br /&gt;
Gilfillan, S., 71, 140&lt;br /&gt;
Gill, D., 139&lt;br /&gt;
Gilman, A., 44&lt;br /&gt;
Glorious revolution (English), 165, 197&lt;br /&gt;
Godelier, M., 127, 149&lt;br /&gt;
Goitein, S., 178&lt;br /&gt;
Gold, 183, 188-191&lt;br /&gt;
American production, 188-191&lt;br /&gt;
and Asian trade, 118, 190&lt;br /&gt;
stock in E. Hemisphere, 189&lt;br /&gt;
Gold Coast, 166&lt;br /&gt;
Golson, J., 143, 174&lt;br /&gt;
Goodfield, J., 48&lt;br /&gt;
Gopal, L., 175&lt;br /&gt;
Gopal, S., 176&lt;br /&gt;
Gossett, T., 48, 138, 139&lt;br /&gt;
Gould, P., 145&lt;br /&gt;
Grand Banks, 182, 207&lt;br /&gt;
Greece, 4, 8, 50, 88, 107-108, 123, 147&lt;br /&gt;
Greenland, D., 140&lt;br /&gt;
Gregory, J., 139&lt;br /&gt;
Grosvenor, E., 44&lt;br /&gt;
Guilds, medieval, 166&lt;br /&gt;
Gunpowder, 115, 117&lt;br /&gt;
Guns, cannon, in China, 117-119, 173&lt;br /&gt;
Gupta, N. S., 177, 210&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Habib, I., 55, 175, 176, 177&lt;br /&gt;
Hagen, E., 100-101, 144&lt;br /&gt;
Haitian revolution, 204&lt;br /&gt;
Hajnal, J., 129-130, 150&lt;br /&gt;
Hall, J. A., 59, 67, 77, 86-87, 91, 108, 122-124, 139, 141, 143, 144, 147, 151&lt;br /&gt;
Hallam, H., 124, 147&lt;br /&gt;
Haller, J., 139&lt;br /&gt;
Hallpike, C., 145&lt;br /&gt;
Ham, 44&lt;br /&gt;
Hamilton, E. J., 190-191, 210&lt;br /&gt;
Handler, R., 150, 151&lt;br /&gt;
Hannemann, M., 211&lt;br /&gt;
Hanseatic League and cities, 197&lt;br /&gt;
Hardy, F., 140&lt;br /&gt;
Harewood, J., 140&lt;br /&gt;
Harris, M., 44, 47, 49, 138&lt;br /&gt;
Harrison, P., 143, 176&lt;br /&gt;
Hasan, A., 175, 210&lt;br /&gt;
Haskel, D., 48&lt;br /&gt;
Hassan, F., 139&lt;br /&gt;
Hawaii, 156&lt;br /&gt;
Hecht, S., 140, 141&lt;br /&gt;
Hegel, G. W. F., 53, 142&lt;br /&gt;
Hegelianism, 43, 48, 91, 120&lt;br /&gt;
Hilgemann, W., 149&lt;br /&gt;
Hilton, R., 140, 150&lt;br /&gt;
Historians, 52-59, 65, 136&lt;br /&gt;
absolutionist, 76, 79-80&lt;br /&gt;
Historical and ahistorical societies, 137&lt;br /&gt;
Historical atlases, 124&lt;br /&gt;
Historiography, modernization and, 53-59&lt;br /&gt;
History, 1, 3-8, 97, 127&lt;br /&gt;
in 19th-century education, 3-7, 43-46&lt;br /&gt;
march of (Mann), 91, 108&lt;br /&gt;
textbooks, 3-7, 43-46, 96, 124&lt;br /&gt;
Western, 46&lt;br /&gt;
world, 46&lt;br /&gt;
Hodgett, A. J., 210&lt;br /&gt;
Holism and reductionism, 22, 33, 41, 48, 119&lt;br /&gt;
Hølmhoe, H., 149&lt;br /&gt;
Hopkins, A., 174&lt;br /&gt;
Horse-collar, horse power, 111, 112-114&lt;br /&gt;
Household, extended-family and nuclear-family, 128-129&lt;br /&gt;
Hoyle, R., 150&lt;br /&gt;
Huddleston, L., 48&lt;br /&gt;
Hudson, B., 45&lt;br /&gt;
Hulme, P., 48&lt;br /&gt;
Humboldt, W. von, 97&lt;br /&gt;
Huntington, E., 70&lt;br /&gt;
Hydraulic society. See Agriculture, irrigated; Asiatic mode of production; Oriental despotism&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Iberia, 181-182, 183-184, 188, 197, 211&lt;br /&gt;
Ibn al-Faqih, 167&lt;br /&gt;
Ibn Khaldun, 183&lt;br /&gt;
Iceland, 93&lt;br /&gt;
India, 21, 47, 69, 82, 96, 98, 103, 106, 111, 116, 119-120, 122, 131&lt;br /&gt;
caste in, 122, 126, 161&lt;br /&gt;
classes, 126&lt;br /&gt;
de-industrialization of, 203&lt;br /&gt;
medieval polity, 122&lt;br /&gt;
personality (Weber), 64, 103, 138&lt;br /&gt;
Indian Ocean, 92, 117-118, 171, 182&lt;br /&gt;
Individual(ism), 25, 87, 90-91, 119, 132, 135, 144&lt;br /&gt;
English, 132&lt;br /&gt;
European, 87, 90-91, 107, 109, 132-133&lt;br /&gt;
Indo-European peoples, languages, 44, 50, 88, 97, 109, 131&lt;br /&gt;
Indo-European warrior aristocracy (Baechler), 123, 126&lt;br /&gt;
Indochina, French, 49&lt;br /&gt;
Indonesia, 92&lt;br /&gt;
Indus valley, 82&lt;br /&gt;
Industrial revolution, 8, 55, 107, 165, 179, 180, 201-206, 213, 215-216&lt;br /&gt;
and mechanization, 202&lt;br /&gt;
Industrial production, medieval, 110-115&lt;br /&gt;
Inflation, 16th-century,&lt;br /&gt;
in Asia, 210&lt;br /&gt;
in Europe, 187, 196&lt;br /&gt;
Inikori, J., 212, 213&lt;br /&gt;
Inner Asia, 93&lt;br /&gt;
Innovation, 15, 110-115, 116, 128, 149, 163&lt;br /&gt;
Insanity. See Sanity&lt;br /&gt;
Inside and Outside, 1, 5, 12-17, 30, 42, 138, 214&lt;br /&gt;
Interests and values, 30-31, 37-41&lt;br /&gt;
Invention, independent, 11-12, 47, 208&lt;br /&gt;
Inventiveness, 12-14, 17, 105, 108-109, 110-115, 208&lt;br /&gt;
Iron, 88-89, 169&lt;br /&gt;
early use, 7, 75, 88-89, 109, 141&lt;br /&gt;
iron age, 7, 50, 88-89, 91, 107, 109, 131&lt;br /&gt;
Irrawaddy plain, 85&lt;br /&gt;
Irvine, F., 141&lt;br /&gt;
Irwin, G., 141&lt;br /&gt;
Isichei, E., 175&lt;br /&gt;
Islam, 119, 122, 123&lt;br /&gt;
Italy, 166, 171, 187, 192, 197, 211&lt;br /&gt;
Ivanov, V., 144&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Jackson, P., 138, 139&lt;br /&gt;
Jagirdars, 158&lt;br /&gt;
James, C. L. R., 55, 137, 203-206, 212&lt;br /&gt;
Japan, 5, 30, 82, 149, 155, 167, 216&lt;br /&gt;
Japheth, 44&lt;br /&gt;
Java, 71, 120, 166&lt;br /&gt;
Jett, S. C., 47&lt;br /&gt;
Jews, 99&lt;br /&gt;
Jha, S. C., 176, 177&lt;br /&gt;
Joly, N., 45&lt;br /&gt;
Jones, E. L., 50, 58, 67, 70-71, 77, 86-87, 89, 91, 93, 104-108, 110, 120-121, 123-124, 131-133, 135, 139, 140, 141, 142, 143, 144, 147, 150, 151&lt;br /&gt;
Judeo-Christian teleology, 114&lt;br /&gt;
Jung, C., 98, 144&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kabaker, A., 173&lt;br /&gt;
Kagan, D., 46&lt;br /&gt;
Kalah, 167, 172, 277&lt;br /&gt;
Kant, I., 214&lt;br /&gt;
Kantianism, Neo-Kantianism, 48, 101, 214&lt;br /&gt;
Kaplan, B., 144&lt;br /&gt;
Kea, R., 174, 175, 176&lt;br /&gt;
Keightley, T., 43, 44, 48&lt;br /&gt;
Kenya, 49&lt;br /&gt;
Kertzer, D., 150&lt;br /&gt;
Keynesianism, 27&lt;br /&gt;
Kilwa, 166, 208&lt;br /&gt;
Kinder, H., 149&lt;br /&gt;
Kitching, G., 139&lt;br /&gt;
Koepping, K.-P., 47&lt;br /&gt;
Korea, 147&lt;br /&gt;
Kosambi, D. D., 146, 175&lt;br /&gt;
Kuhn, T., 37, 49&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Labib, S., 207, 209&lt;br /&gt;
Labor,&lt;br /&gt;
counterdiffusion of, 16&lt;br /&gt;
colonial, 193-196&lt;br /&gt;
Labor force, colonial Americas and Europe, 193, 195, 196&lt;br /&gt;
Laclau, E., 205, 213&lt;br /&gt;
Laibman, D., 142&lt;br /&gt;
Lambert, D., 71, 140&lt;br /&gt;
Landlords, 158-160, 162, 170&lt;br /&gt;
Landownership,&lt;br /&gt;
medieval European, 104, 159, 160&lt;br /&gt;
peasant, 127, 160&lt;br /&gt;
Lane, F., 178&lt;br /&gt;
Languages, primitive, 97, 145&lt;br /&gt;
Las Casas, B., 195&lt;br /&gt;
Laslett, P., 131, 133-134, 150, 151&lt;br /&gt;
Le Roy Ladurie, E., 150&lt;br /&gt;
Lee, G., 150&lt;br /&gt;
Lee, R., 174&lt;br /&gt;
Lelekov, L., 144&lt;br /&gt;
Levant, 191&lt;br /&gt;
Levidow, L., 139&lt;br /&gt;
Levitzion, N., 176, 209&lt;br /&gt;
Lévy-Bruhl, L., 97, 101, 144&lt;br /&gt;
Lewis, A., 177&lt;br /&gt;
Lewis, W. A., 48&lt;br /&gt;
Li Ching-neng, 175, 176&lt;br /&gt;
Liceria, M. A. C., 175&lt;br /&gt;
Lie, B., 149&lt;br /&gt;
Lisbon, 190&lt;br /&gt;
Livingstone, D., 23&lt;br /&gt;
Llobera, J., 142&lt;br /&gt;
Lo Jung-pang, 177&lt;br /&gt;
Location, accessibility, 2, 157, 161-162, 169-173, 181, 182, 197&lt;br /&gt;
Lombok, 120&lt;br /&gt;
Lopez, R., 147, 210&lt;br /&gt;
Love and marriage, in Europe, 132-133&lt;br /&gt;
Lovell, W. G., 209, 211&lt;br /&gt;
Lowie, R., 49&lt;br /&gt;
Löwith, K., 145&lt;br /&gt;
Luzon, 85, 120&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ma Huan, 177, 209&lt;br /&gt;
Mabogunji, A., 175&lt;br /&gt;
Macauley, T., 48&lt;br /&gt;
Macfarlane, A., 131-133, 150, 151&lt;br /&gt;
Madeira, 182, 191&lt;br /&gt;
Madrid, 195&lt;br /&gt;
Magalhães-Godinho, V., 211&lt;br /&gt;
Maghreb, 171, 181, 183&lt;br /&gt;
Magna Carta, 122&lt;br /&gt;
Magubane, B., 139&lt;br /&gt;
Mahalingam, T., 175, 176, 177&lt;br /&gt;
Maize, 107, 156&lt;br /&gt;
Malabar, 166&lt;br /&gt;
Malacca, 167, 172, 190&lt;br /&gt;
Malaria, 78&lt;br /&gt;
Malthus, T., 48, 66-68, 133&lt;br /&gt;
Malthusian theory, 66-68, 73, 87, 129, 133-134, 139-140, 162, 209&lt;br /&gt;
Mamdani, M., 139&lt;br /&gt;
Mandelbaum, M., 48&lt;br /&gt;
Manila Galleons, 190&lt;br /&gt;
Manila, 117&lt;br /&gt;
Mann, M., 59, 86-91, 93, 107-110, 122-124, 131-133, 139, 143, 144, 146, 147, 148, 150, 151, 176&lt;br /&gt;
Manorial system, 159-160&lt;br /&gt;
Maquiladora plants, 215&lt;br /&gt;
Marglin, F., 145&lt;br /&gt;
Marglin, S., 101, 145&lt;br /&gt;
Mariana Islands, 49&lt;br /&gt;
Markets, 17th-century, 199-201&lt;br /&gt;
Markham, S., 70&lt;br /&gt;
Marriage pattern, European and non-European, 129-135, 139&lt;br /&gt;
Marx, K., 25, 39, 48, 76, 82-84, 86, 127, 141, 142, 158, 159, 175, 202, 205, 210, 212&lt;br /&gt;
Marxism, 46, 55-57, 77, 94-95, 137, 148, 168, 177, 202, 210, 212&lt;br /&gt;
Marxists, Eurocentric, 46, 56, 58, 83, 108, 125, 137-138, 149, 157, 162, 205, 213&lt;br /&gt;
Maya civilization, 72-73&lt;br /&gt;
Mbithi, P., 141&lt;br /&gt;
McAlister, L., 210, 211&lt;br /&gt;
McClelland, D., 100, 144&lt;br /&gt;
McCurdy, D., 49&lt;br /&gt;
McKay, D., 45&lt;br /&gt;
McNeill, W., 45, 46, 79, 140, 142, 143, 144, 146, 209&lt;br /&gt;
Mead, G. H., 48, 145&lt;br /&gt;
Mead, M., 97, 144&lt;br /&gt;
Mediterranean, 43-44, 92, 159, 167-168, 172, 181, 183, 200&lt;br /&gt;
Megaw, J., 173&lt;br /&gt;
Mekong valley, 120&lt;br /&gt;
Merchant capital, 179, 188, 192, 207-208, 212&lt;br /&gt;
Mesoamerica, 86, 195&lt;br /&gt;
Mesopotamia, 82, 85, 120, 143&lt;br /&gt;
Metals&lt;br /&gt;
age of, 7&lt;br /&gt;
precious. See Gold; Silver&lt;br /&gt;
Mexico, 20, 180, 182, 185-186, 188, 190, 194-195, 208&lt;br /&gt;
Middle East, 4, 7-8, 45-46, 63, 82-90, 109, 110, 116, 155, 156, 167, 170, 183&lt;br /&gt;
Migration, rural-urban, 161-162&lt;br /&gt;
Mill, J. S., 48&lt;br /&gt;
Miller, J., 76, 140, 141&lt;br /&gt;
Milne, G., 140&lt;br /&gt;
Minchinton, W., 211&lt;br /&gt;
Mind&lt;br /&gt;
criminal, 144&lt;br /&gt;
European. See European mind&lt;br /&gt;
female, 96&lt;br /&gt;
and matter. See Dualism&lt;br /&gt;
primitive, 17, 95-102, 144-145, 148, 151, 206&lt;br /&gt;
traditional, 15, 98-102, 145&lt;br /&gt;
Mintz, S. W., 205, 212, 213&lt;br /&gt;
Miskimin, H., 209, 210&lt;br /&gt;
Moctezuma, 185&lt;br /&gt;
Modernization, 2, 27-30, 52-54, 59, 98-102, 206&lt;br /&gt;
as history, 53-54, 136&lt;br /&gt;
theory, 27-30, 98, 128-129, 131&lt;br /&gt;
Mohr, E., 140&lt;br /&gt;
Moluccas, 190, 192&lt;br /&gt;
Montesquieu, 140, 142&lt;br /&gt;
Morocco, 166, 191-192, 207, 209&lt;br /&gt;
Motivation, need-achievement (McClelland), 100, 125&lt;br /&gt;
Mozambique, 49&lt;br /&gt;
Mukherjee, Radhakamal, 176&lt;br /&gt;
Mukherjee, Ramkrishna, 176&lt;br /&gt;
Müller, J., 43&lt;br /&gt;
Myth, 59&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nag, M., 139, 140&lt;br /&gt;
Naqvi, H. K., 177&lt;br /&gt;
Nationalism, nation-state, 119-120, 172, 214&lt;br /&gt;
Nazism, 27, 63-64&lt;br /&gt;
Needham, J., 56, 115, 137, 143, 146, 147, 177, 178&lt;br /&gt;
Neocolonialism, 26-30&lt;br /&gt;
Neo-Kantianism. See Kantianism&lt;br /&gt;
Neolithic revolution. See Agricultural revolution&lt;br /&gt;
Neolocality, 131-133&lt;br /&gt;
Netherlands, Holland, 187-188, 194, 197&lt;br /&gt;
Neumann, E., 144&lt;br /&gt;
New Guinea, 155&lt;br /&gt;
New World (term), 207&lt;br /&gt;
Newfoundland, 192&lt;br /&gt;
Niane, D., 209, 211&lt;br /&gt;
Nicaragua, 195&lt;br /&gt;
Nicholas, D., 175, 176&lt;br /&gt;
Niger Valley, 86&lt;br /&gt;
Nile river and valley, 82, 86, 166, 183&lt;br /&gt;
Nisbet, R., 48&lt;br /&gt;
Noah, 43, 44, 48&lt;br /&gt;
Nurul Hasan, S., 176&lt;br /&gt;
Nye, P., 140&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
O&#039;Keefe, P., 141&lt;br /&gt;
Oceania, 158&lt;br /&gt;
Okello, R., 142, 216&lt;br /&gt;
Olmec civilization, 208&lt;br /&gt;
Onimode, B., 174, 175&lt;br /&gt;
Operation Bootstrap, 49&lt;br /&gt;
Orient Express model, 4, 45, 91&lt;br /&gt;
Oriental despotism, 3, 4, 25, 80-92, 120, 142, 157, 171, 174&lt;br /&gt;
Hall on, 87, 147&lt;br /&gt;
Jones on, 86-87, 120&lt;br /&gt;
Mann on, 87-89, 109, 147&lt;br /&gt;
Marx and Engels on, 81-82&lt;br /&gt;
Weber on, 83-84, 86, 103-104&lt;br /&gt;
Wittfogel on, 84-88&lt;br /&gt;
Orwin, C. S., 146&lt;br /&gt;
Ottoman empire, region, 20, 45, 81, 96&lt;br /&gt;
Outside. See Inside&lt;br /&gt;
Overpopulation, 66-68, 121, 129, 133, 139. See also Demography; Malthusianism&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pacey, A., 147&lt;br /&gt;
Padgug, R., 125, 149&lt;br /&gt;
Padmore, G., 55&lt;br /&gt;
Paleolithic, 124&lt;br /&gt;
Palmer, R., 149&lt;br /&gt;
Panikkar, K. M., 55, 209&lt;br /&gt;
Paris Basin, 170, 195, 197&lt;br /&gt;
Parker, D., 150, 151&lt;br /&gt;
Parsons, J. B., 176&lt;br /&gt;
Peace Corps, 49&lt;br /&gt;
Peasants, 100-101, 107, 109, 112, 133-134, 154, 161-162, 214&lt;br /&gt;
Chinese, 166&lt;br /&gt;
European, 104&lt;br /&gt;
Indian, 127, 166, 175&lt;br /&gt;
Pendleton, R., 140&lt;br /&gt;
Pepper, 166, 169&lt;br /&gt;
Perry, W., 47, 49&lt;br /&gt;
Peru, 184-185, 188, 190&lt;br /&gt;
Philosophy, 26, 101, 106, 145, 214&lt;br /&gt;
Philpin, C., 140, 149, 150&lt;br /&gt;
Phoenicians, 47, 208&lt;br /&gt;
Piaget, J., 99, 101, 144&lt;br /&gt;
Piracy, 188, 196-197&lt;br /&gt;
Pires, T., 167, 170, 176, 177&lt;br /&gt;
Pizarro, F., 185&lt;br /&gt;
Plagues, 78, 142. See also AIDS; Disease, Black death&lt;br /&gt;
counterdiffusion from non-Europe, 16, 77&lt;br /&gt;
Plantations, 166, 188, 191-193, 197-201, 204-205, 212. See also Slave plantation&lt;br /&gt;
Brazil, 191-193&lt;br /&gt;
Caribbean, 198-201&lt;br /&gt;
Ploetz, C., 44&lt;br /&gt;
Plow, 88-89, 110-112, 174&lt;br /&gt;
Poland, 147&lt;br /&gt;
Polygenesis, theory of, 3, 23, 43-45, 61&lt;br /&gt;
Portugal, 181, 188, 192, 194, 197, 209&lt;br /&gt;
Potato, 156&lt;br /&gt;
in Europe, 92, 201&lt;br /&gt;
Potosí, 195&lt;br /&gt;
Powell, J., 23&lt;br /&gt;
Prakash, I., 177&lt;br /&gt;
Precious metals. See Gold; Silver&lt;br /&gt;
Prescott, J., 140&lt;br /&gt;
Printing, in China, Korea, 117&lt;br /&gt;
Production versus exchange, 168-170, 177, 205&lt;br /&gt;
Progress, 1, 14, 16, 19, 20, 22, 24, 48, 53-54, 60, 102, 114, 132, 136, 155, 180, 206&lt;br /&gt;
Progressiveness. See Progress&lt;br /&gt;
Property, private, 15, 25-26, 83-84, 88, 104, 116, 158&lt;br /&gt;
concept of, 15, 25-26&lt;br /&gt;
in medieval Europe, 83-84, 104, 127&lt;br /&gt;
in non-Europe, 25-26, 83-84, 116, 158, 175&lt;br /&gt;
Protocapitalism, 152, 165-173, 181&lt;br /&gt;
in Asia and Africa, 153, 165-173, 190, 195, 197&lt;br /&gt;
Protocapitalist system, network, 168-173, 177&lt;br /&gt;
Psychic Unity of Mankind, 12, 47, 94-96, 184, 208&lt;br /&gt;
Psychology, 17, 94-100. See also Mind, Reasoning&lt;br /&gt;
cross-cultural, 98-100, 144&lt;br /&gt;
primitive. See Mind, primitive&lt;br /&gt;
Puerto Rico, 49&lt;br /&gt;
Putting-out system, 166, 215&lt;br /&gt;
Purcell, V., 116, 177&lt;br /&gt;
Pyle, G., 142, 216&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Qaisar, A. J., 177&lt;br /&gt;
Quackenbos, J., 44&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Racism, 27, 29, 43-44, 61-65, 138&lt;br /&gt;
cultural, 64&lt;br /&gt;
moderate, 64-65&lt;br /&gt;
and myth of European miracle, 1, 4, 29, 61-65, 186&lt;br /&gt;
Weber and, 64-65, 138&lt;br /&gt;
Radell, D. R., 211&lt;br /&gt;
Radin, P., 49, 97, 144&lt;br /&gt;
Rain forest, 72-76, 141&lt;br /&gt;
Rational Modern Adult European Man, 96-97&lt;br /&gt;
Rationality, 15, 17, 19, 21, 94-109, 145, 149, 186, 214&lt;br /&gt;
and diffusionism, 17, 60, 94-108, 214&lt;br /&gt;
European, 15, 17, 19, 27, 30, 47, 88, 94-108, 110, 114, 120, 129, 135, 139, 143, 149, 206&lt;br /&gt;
Hall on, 87&lt;br /&gt;
Indo-European, 107, 109&lt;br /&gt;
Jones on, 58, 104-107, 120&lt;br /&gt;
Jung on, 98&lt;br /&gt;
Lévy-Bruhl on, 97&lt;br /&gt;
Mann on, 107-110&lt;br /&gt;
Piaget on, 99, 101&lt;br /&gt;
Weber on, 102-104, 145&lt;br /&gt;
Rawski, E., 175, 176&lt;br /&gt;
Raychaudhuri, T., 175, 176&lt;br /&gt;
Reasoning. See also Thought, abstract and concrete&lt;br /&gt;
theoretical vs. empirical, 17, 96-101, 105&lt;br /&gt;
Reclus, E., 45&lt;br /&gt;
Red R. (Vietnam), 120&lt;br /&gt;
Reductionism. See Holism&lt;br /&gt;
Reformation, Protestant, 103, 124, 197&lt;br /&gt;
Regionalism, 27&lt;br /&gt;
Relativism, cultural, 27&lt;br /&gt;
Religion and rise of Europe, 8, 18-19, 29, 60-61&lt;br /&gt;
Renaissance, 117, 187&lt;br /&gt;
Restlessness, of Europeans, 108&lt;br /&gt;
Rhine R., 93, 211&lt;br /&gt;
Rice&lt;br /&gt;
wet, agriculture, 85, 143, 166, 169, 174&lt;br /&gt;
Ritter, K., 82, 142&lt;br /&gt;
Robbins, R., 43&lt;br /&gt;
Roberts, D., 140&lt;br /&gt;
Roberts, J., 45, 46, 140, 141, 147&lt;br /&gt;
Robinson, C., 205, 212, 213&lt;br /&gt;
Rodinson, M., 177&lt;br /&gt;
Rodney, W., 175, 205, 213&lt;br /&gt;
Rogers, E., 100, 144&lt;br /&gt;
Røhr, A., 149&lt;br /&gt;
Roman land law, 25&lt;br /&gt;
Rome, 4, 8, 25, 50, 107, 110, 125, 147, 195&lt;br /&gt;
Rorty, R., 145&lt;br /&gt;
Rostow, W., 53&lt;br /&gt;
Rotation, 74, 111, 113-114&lt;br /&gt;
fallowless, 114&lt;br /&gt;
shifting, 74&lt;br /&gt;
three-field, 111, 113-114&lt;br /&gt;
two-field, 113-114&lt;br /&gt;
Roy, M. N., 55&lt;br /&gt;
Rules, cultural, and exploitation, 212&lt;br /&gt;
Russia, 147&lt;br /&gt;
Rwanda, 71&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sack, R., 102, 145&lt;br /&gt;
Sahara, 76, 183&lt;br /&gt;
Sahel, 76&lt;br /&gt;
Said, E., 48, 58, 144&lt;br /&gt;
Sanderson, E., 44&lt;br /&gt;
Sanity, insanity, 17, 96&lt;br /&gt;
São Tomé, 191, 195-196&lt;br /&gt;
Sastri, K. N., 176&lt;br /&gt;
Savagery, zone of, 14, 44&lt;br /&gt;
Savages, 4, 60, 96&lt;br /&gt;
Schmidt, W., 49&lt;br /&gt;
Schweder, R., 145&lt;br /&gt;
Science, social, 31, 37, 38-41, 54, 97&lt;br /&gt;
Seccombe, W., 139&lt;br /&gt;
Semitic peoples, 44, 63&lt;br /&gt;
Semo, E., 211&lt;br /&gt;
Serfs, 127-128, 134, 154, 160, 175-176&lt;br /&gt;
Service tenure, 158&lt;br /&gt;
Seville, 189, 195&lt;br /&gt;
Sexual frustration, and rise of Europe (Stone), 134-135&lt;br /&gt;
Shannon, G., 142, 216&lt;br /&gt;
Sharma, R. S., 55, 146, 175&lt;br /&gt;
Shem, 44&lt;br /&gt;
Sheridan, R., 205, 213&lt;br /&gt;
Sherif, A., 175, 176, 207&lt;br /&gt;
Shipping, 169-170, 181, 196&lt;br /&gt;
African and Asian, 117-118, 170, 181&lt;br /&gt;
medieval, 117-118, 169-170&lt;br /&gt;
Shoemaker, F., 144&lt;br /&gt;
Siberia, 199&lt;br /&gt;
Silver, 183, 188-191&lt;br /&gt;
American production, 188-191&lt;br /&gt;
and Asian trade, 118, 190&lt;br /&gt;
stock in E. Hemisphere, 189&lt;br /&gt;
Simkin, C., 177&lt;br /&gt;
Simonsen, R., 211&lt;br /&gt;
Sinclair, P., 141&lt;br /&gt;
Slave plantation, 70, 125, 191-198, 204-205&lt;br /&gt;
Slave trade, 70, 79, 188, 192, 199, 203-205&lt;br /&gt;
Slavery, 62, 70, 79, 107, 125, 170, 192, 195, 197, 203-205, 208, 212&lt;br /&gt;
Smallpox, 78&lt;br /&gt;
Smith, Abdullahi, 175&lt;br /&gt;
Smith, Adam, 142&lt;br /&gt;
Smith, C. T., 146, 210&lt;br /&gt;
Sofala, 166, 208&lt;br /&gt;
Soils. See also Agriculture&lt;br /&gt;
fertility, 72-77, 85, 89, 91&lt;br /&gt;
gley, in Europe, 92&lt;br /&gt;
podzolic, in Europe, 92&lt;br /&gt;
temperate, 90-92&lt;br /&gt;
tropical, 42, 71-76, 140&lt;br /&gt;
waterlogged, 92&lt;br /&gt;
Solow, B., 205, 213&lt;br /&gt;
South China Sea, 92&lt;br /&gt;
Sovereignty, concept of, 15, 25&lt;br /&gt;
Soviet Union, Russia, 29, 76, 81, 84&lt;br /&gt;
Spain, 181, 188, 192, 194, 197&lt;br /&gt;
Spatial revolution, medieval, 169-173, 181&lt;br /&gt;
Spatial transport of commodities. See Location; Spatial revolution&lt;br /&gt;
Spencer, H., 22, 48&lt;br /&gt;
Spices, 168, 192&lt;br /&gt;
Spradley, J., 49&lt;br /&gt;
Stages, evolutionary, 125&lt;br /&gt;
Stagnation, cultural, 6, 17, 84, 90, 116, 124-125&lt;br /&gt;
Stagnation of Chinese society, theory of, 115-119, 142, 147&lt;br /&gt;
Stalinism, and theory of Oriental despotism, 81&lt;br /&gt;
State, 8, 58, 81, 85, 87, 94, 119-123, 141, 147, 157, 161, 172&lt;br /&gt;
in Asia, 123, 126. See also Empire; Oriental despotism&lt;br /&gt;
medieval European, 122&lt;br /&gt;
modern, 120-122&lt;br /&gt;
size of, 94, 119-122&lt;br /&gt;
Steele, E., 44&lt;br /&gt;
Steele, J., 44&lt;br /&gt;
Steward, J., 47, 172, 178&lt;br /&gt;
Stirrup, iron, 111&lt;br /&gt;
Stocking, G., 47, 48, 138, 144&lt;br /&gt;
Stone, L., 130, 134-135, 150, 151&lt;br /&gt;
Sudan, 157, 183&lt;br /&gt;
Sudanic caravans, 93&lt;br /&gt;
Sugar, 166, 169, 191, 200&lt;br /&gt;
Sugar-cane. See Sugar&lt;br /&gt;
Sulawesi, 120&lt;br /&gt;
Sumatra, 120&lt;br /&gt;
Swai, B., 48&lt;br /&gt;
Sweden, 147&lt;br /&gt;
Sweet potato, 107, 156&lt;br /&gt;
Sweezy, P., 149, 177&lt;br /&gt;
Swindell, K., 139&lt;br /&gt;
Swinton, W., 44&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Taeuber, I., 131, 150&lt;br /&gt;
Takrur, 209&lt;br /&gt;
Talkington, L., 216&lt;br /&gt;
Tarzan, 97, 105&lt;br /&gt;
Tawney, R. H., 211&lt;br /&gt;
Taylor, G., 47, 49&lt;br /&gt;
Technological determinism, 108-109&lt;br /&gt;
Technology, 29, 57, 94, 108-119, 161, 184, 186, 202&lt;br /&gt;
ancient, 109-110&lt;br /&gt;
Chinese medieval, 116-119&lt;br /&gt;
European medieval, 110-115, 128, 160-161, 163&lt;br /&gt;
Temu, A., 48&lt;br /&gt;
Tenochtitlán, 185&lt;br /&gt;
Ternate, 196&lt;br /&gt;
Testing (ACT, SAT, IQ), 101, 145&lt;br /&gt;
Textbooks, as cultural windows, 6, 43-46&lt;br /&gt;
Textiles, 169, 192, 203. See also Cotton&lt;br /&gt;
Thackeray, W., 48&lt;br /&gt;
Thailand, 147&lt;br /&gt;
Thalheimer, M., 44&lt;br /&gt;
Thapar, R., 48&lt;br /&gt;
Theory, scientific, 17, 24, 31-32, 34&lt;br /&gt;
Third World, 54&lt;br /&gt;
Third Worldism, 79, 125, 149&lt;br /&gt;
Thorndyke, L., 147, 210&lt;br /&gt;
Thought, abstract and concrete, 17, 96-99, 103. See also Reasoning&lt;br /&gt;
Thrupp, S., 176, 212&lt;br /&gt;
Tigris-Euphrates valley, 82, 86&lt;br /&gt;
Tillinghast, W., 44&lt;br /&gt;
Tobacco, 156, 192&lt;br /&gt;
Tolman, E., 38, 49&lt;br /&gt;
Torras, J., 150&lt;br /&gt;
Toulmin, S., 48&lt;br /&gt;
Toynbee, A., 71&lt;br /&gt;
Toyoda, T., 177&lt;br /&gt;
Trade winds, 182&lt;br /&gt;
Traditional society, 6, 68, 98, 128&lt;br /&gt;
Traditionalism, 15, 98-102, 145&lt;br /&gt;
Transoceanic diffusion, 11, 14, 207-209&lt;br /&gt;
Travel, radii, 181&lt;br /&gt;
Tributary mode of production, 154&lt;br /&gt;
Trigger, B., 138&lt;br /&gt;
Tropical soils. See Soils&lt;br /&gt;
Tropical-nastiness theory, 69-80&lt;br /&gt;
Tropics, humid (term), 71&lt;br /&gt;
Trypanosomiasis, 79-80&lt;br /&gt;
Tung, C., 176&lt;br /&gt;
Tunnel history, 3-8, 103, 109-110, 115, 150, 180, 187&lt;br /&gt;
Turkey, 45, 183&lt;br /&gt;
Turner, B. L., 143&lt;br /&gt;
Turshen, M., 142&lt;br /&gt;
Tytler, A., 43&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Udovitch, A., 177&lt;br /&gt;
Underdevelopment, 153, 180&lt;br /&gt;
Underdevelopment theory, 55-56, 137, 149&lt;br /&gt;
Uniformitarianism, cultural, 42, 47, 122, 124, 184, 208&lt;br /&gt;
United Nations, 28&lt;br /&gt;
United States, 28, 43&lt;br /&gt;
Urbanization. See Cities&lt;br /&gt;
Usman, Y. B., 175&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Validation of belief, 34&lt;br /&gt;
Values, 15, 30-31, 37-41, 103, 207&lt;br /&gt;
Vampires, 16, 21, 47&lt;br /&gt;
Van Baren, F., 140&lt;br /&gt;
Van Leur, J. C., 55, 56, 137&lt;br /&gt;
Van Sertima, I., 208-209&lt;br /&gt;
Venice, 167&lt;br /&gt;
Venturi, F., 142&lt;br /&gt;
Verifiability, 34, 36, 40&lt;br /&gt;
Verification of belief. See Verifiability&lt;br /&gt;
Vijayanagar, 170&lt;br /&gt;
Vilar, P., 210&lt;br /&gt;
Village, 90&lt;br /&gt;
European, 159-160, 176&lt;br /&gt;
Indian, 127, 159-160, 175-176&lt;br /&gt;
Virgin Islands, US, 49&lt;br /&gt;
Vishnu-Mittre, 173&lt;br /&gt;
Vives, J. Vicens, 210&lt;br /&gt;
de Vries, J., 209, 210, 211&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wage labor, 167, 202-205&lt;br /&gt;
and slave labor, 203-206, 212&lt;br /&gt;
in post-Conquest America, 189&lt;br /&gt;
Wai Andah, B., 141&lt;br /&gt;
Wallerstein, I., 51, 149, 205, 211, 213&lt;br /&gt;
Warren, B., 58, 138&lt;br /&gt;
Watson, A., 210&lt;br /&gt;
Watts, S., 142, 216&lt;br /&gt;
Watts, S. J., 216&lt;br /&gt;
Webb, W. P., 210&lt;br /&gt;
Weber, G., 43&lt;br /&gt;
Weber, M., 15, 47, 59, 64-65, 83-84, 86-90, 102-104, 115-116, 124, 131, 138, 142, 143, 145, 158, 170&lt;br /&gt;
Weberianism, 54, 64-65, 87, 102-104, 114, 117&lt;br /&gt;
Wei R., 86&lt;br /&gt;
Werner, H., 99, 144&lt;br /&gt;
Werner, K. F., 61, 124, 147-149&lt;br /&gt;
West, the, 1, 46, 94&lt;br /&gt;
West Indies, 20, 55, 180, 182, 203, 207. See also under specific topics&lt;br /&gt;
and industrial revolution in Britain, 203-206&lt;br /&gt;
Whaling, 207, 192&lt;br /&gt;
Wheat, 169, 197&lt;br /&gt;
Wheatley, P., 57, 137, 177&lt;br /&gt;
Whelpley, S., 43&lt;br /&gt;
White, G., 145&lt;br /&gt;
White, Lynn, Jr., 61, 108, 110-115, 146, 147, 176&lt;br /&gt;
White man&#039;s grave, 78&lt;br /&gt;
Whitehead, A. N., 37, 49, 145&lt;br /&gt;
Whitman, J., 144&lt;br /&gt;
Whitmore, T., 209, 211&lt;br /&gt;
Wiethoff, B., 177&lt;br /&gt;
Wilken, G., 140&lt;br /&gt;
Willard, E., 43&lt;br /&gt;
Williams, E., 48, 137, 203-206, 212, 213&lt;br /&gt;
Williams, R., 48&lt;br /&gt;
Williams thesis, 55, 205&lt;br /&gt;
Wisner, B., 141&lt;br /&gt;
Wittfogel, K., 83-88, 142&lt;br /&gt;
Wolf, E., 137&lt;br /&gt;
Women, and rationality, 96-97&lt;br /&gt;
Woolen trade, English, 191-192&lt;br /&gt;
World models, 30-31, 41-43, 214&lt;br /&gt;
World system, capitalist, 206&lt;br /&gt;
Wrigley, E., 151&lt;br /&gt;
Wunder, H., 150&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yadava, B., 175, 176&lt;br /&gt;
Yam, 74-75&lt;br /&gt;
Yang Lien-sheng, 177&lt;br /&gt;
Yellow R., 86&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Zamindars, 24, 175&lt;br /&gt;
Zimbabwe, 157, 166, 197&lt;br /&gt;
Zwernemann, J., 47&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>The Phantom Bull</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=Library:A_Basic_Call_to_Consciousness_by_the_Akwesasne_Notes_editorial_staff_of_the_Mohawk_Nation&amp;diff=91857</id>
		<title>Library:A Basic Call to Consciousness by the Akwesasne Notes editorial staff of the Mohawk Nation</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=Library:A_Basic_Call_to_Consciousness_by_the_Akwesasne_Notes_editorial_staff_of_the_Mohawk_Nation&amp;diff=91857"/>
		<updated>2026-07-14T19:57:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;The Phantom Bull: I removed the unnecessary table of contents, as well as the in-body publishing information (which is already covered by the library works template).&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Library work|title=A Basic Call to Consciousness|author=The Akwesasne Notes editorial staff of the Mohawk Nation|publisher=Summertown, TN : Book Pub. Co.|published_date=1991|type=Book|isbn=091399023X&lt;br /&gt;
9780913990230|pdf=https://vdoc.pub/documents/basic-call-to-consciouness-2fb0pk8k6hlg}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Foreword|foreword=The contents of this book were automatically transcribed into a docx format, which contained many incorrect glyphs and unusable formatting. DeepSeek was used to clean up the text and convert it into plaintext that could be posted on ProleWiki, so if there are any errors, please reach out to the ProleWiki editor team, so that we can correct the errors.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
John Mohawk&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It was during the era of the administration of President John F. Kennedy, an era that saw some of the highest tensions between the United States and the Soviet Union, that the issue of civil rights gained traction in American politics and opened the way for the U.S. civil rights legislation of the 1960s.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Civil Rights Movement reverberated around the world. At about the same time, American Indians began demanding rights of a somewhat different nature. African-Americans had been denied full rights as citizens, were widely segregated in ghettos, had poor access to education or job training, and suffered discriminatory hiring practices. In many places, people would not sell them housing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
American Indian nations, on the other hand, once had owned the entire continent, but had been attacked and/or swindled out of most of their properties and most of the practical rights of nationhood. They demanded &amp;quot;Indian rights,&amp;quot; which were much more collective and probably even more unpopular in white America than were the African-American demands. By the late 1960s, however, they were beginning to make headway.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indian tribes that had treaties guaranteeing them fishing rights in the Pacific Northwest challenged state laws prohibiting Indian fishing in violation of those treaties. The Columbia River became a scene of Indian demonstrations and arrests and eventually led to a court case in which Indian rights were at least somewhat upheld. This led to a backlash movement among some whites who wanted to pass legislation to end treaty rights, and the re-energized Indian movement mobilized to defend treaty rights. There was a historic demonstration at Alcatraz Island, at which Indians called attention to the centuries of abuses of their rights, and demonstrations in California, Oregon, Minnesota, and other places about land claims.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1968 in Minnesota, the American Indian Movement (AIM) was formed. It initially became a force for the rights of urban Indigenous people, but soon it gained national attention. The stated goals of AIM were to defend Indian sovereignty and advance Indian rights causes. Their constituency included people in Indian Country and in urban settings. Richard Oakes, a Mohawk college student, helped organize a demonstration occupation of an abandoned prison complex on Alcatraz Island in northern California. It garnered considerable publicity and became a touchstone for Native activists from across the continent. The occupation began on November 20, 1969, and continued for approximately nineteen months.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Around the country, Indians mounted protests and demonstrations demanding treaty rights and land returns and opposing encroachment by non-Indians on Indian land. Some of these demonstrations reached the Haudenosaunee Country where people opposed non-Indian encroachment on a trailer court at Tuscarora and, more famously, opposed widening a road at Route 81 on the Onondaga Territory. The mood in Indian Country was that there would be no further loss of land, not even a little land for widening a highway.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
American Indian Movement activists joined Indian rights activists nationally in raising an alarm that Indian ways were declining and Indian people were generally rendered powerless and in a state of abject poverty, especially on their lands. There was something of a national cultural revitalization and a concurrent complaint that there was a crisis in leadership in Indian Country, because the leaders had become co-opted by the U.S. government and non-Indian culture and could not see or act on Indian interests. Generations of colonization had taken their toll and had left Indian Country with leaders who seemed primarily interested in collecting federal grant money and not in exercising sovereignty. This was a message that came to resonate widely across Indian Country.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1972, a wide coalition of activists, including members of the American Indian Movement, organized a march on Washington to protest the treatment of Indians and to urge reforms of the Bureau of Indian Affairs. The event was dubbed the &amp;quot;Trail of Broken Treaties,&amp;quot; and hundreds of Indians initially made their way to Washington in October 1972, days before the presidential election. When building security tried to evict the demonstrators while negotiations went on in the main offices, the security forces were driven from the building and an occupation of a federal building in the capital—said to be the first since the War of 1812—ensued. The occupation lasted from November 3 to November 9, but the energy in Indian Country was rising, and during the winter of 1973, a small force of AIM supporters and local activists declared the historic village of Wounded Knee, site of a horrific massacre in 1890, as sovereign territory. The occupiers were surrounded by a military force, and an ensuing standoff lasted seventy-three days and resulted in Indian fatalities due to gunfire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1974, the International Indian Treaty Council (IITC) was organized and held its first national meeting at Wakpala on the Standing Rock Sioux Territory in North Dakota. IITC was organized to provide a platform to pursue the rights of Indigenous peoples under international law. After almost two hundred years, the United States, and most of the other nations of the Western Hemisphere, had failed to give meaningful recognition to the rights of a continued existence as a distinct people to any of the Indigenous peoples. Many who were involved in the Indian rights struggle felt that the nation states were hampered by a phenomenon known as the &amp;quot;tyranny of the majority&amp;quot; and would never be able to recognize even the rights bestowed by treaty. A partial remedy—but only one of many—would be the pursuit of the principles of indigenous rights under international law. It was acknowledged that international law had no enforcement powers, but it was felt that the so-called &amp;quot;civilized&amp;quot; nations of the world were generally embarrassed when their behaviors fell beneath the world standards for the treatment of individuals and peoples, and that the indigenous voice was an important and necessary part of the process of discussion around such principles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The IITC was one of several groups that approached the NGOs—the Non-Governmental Organizations of the United Nations—with a proposal to explore the creation of a process to recognize the rights of Indigenous nations, peoples, and individuals. It was a historic undertaking. It wasn&#039;t until early in 1977, when word reached the Grand Council of the Haudenosaunee, located at Onondaga in central New York, that the NGOs were willing to host a meeting. They had sent forward a request for response papers detailing the economic, legal, and social realities of the various Indigenous nations. Although the Iroquois Confederacy is composed of six member nations—the Mohawk, Oneida, Onondaga, Cayuga, Seneca and Tuscarora—the Confederacy acts as a single nation in response to such international requests.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The call for papers was duly discussed. Three individuals were chosen and each was asked to author one of the papers. When finished, the papers would be presented to the Haudenosaunee Grand Council, which would then make alterations and additions and produce a final draft. I was privileged to be chosen to write one of the papers. When the council reconvened, one of the other two individuals who had an assignment reported he would not be able to finish it. I had already finished the assignment I had, and the Council asked if I would be able to do the second paper. I did. The next meeting the third individual reported that he would be unable to complete his paper, and I was asked to write the third paper. Thus I authored the three position papers that appeared in Akwesasne Notes and later in Basic Call to Consciousness.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I did not go to Geneva in 1977 because we had a newspaper to run.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Daniel Bomberry, the Cayuga-Salish man whose father came from the Grand River Country, attended the meeting and took photographs, many of which appeared in Akwesasne Notes and editions of Basic Call. José Barreiro, who was co-editor of the Notes, wrote an exciting account of some important moments at the meeting. When the meeting was over, and we looked at all the material we had, we realized that we had a small book. Akwesasne Notes had long before published a short pamphlet on the life of Deskaheh, the Cayuga chief who had gone to Europe to argue against the British military invasion and occupation and disgraceful overthrow of the traditional government at Grand River in 1924. We added the pamphlet to the other material, and a first edition of Basic Call to Consciousness appeared in 1978.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The book, or at least significant parts of it, has been translated into many languages. For me, the most edifying feedback was an account I heard from Indian rights activists who met in Washington, DC, in 1980. An individual approached me and explained that Basic Call to Consciousness had been translated into Portuguese, and a group had carried the book to Indian communities across Brazil and had read it to the rainforest Indians. He said these Indians thoroughly enjoyed hearing it and stated that it represented their own thoughts and feelings. Nothing that has happened before or since ever brought the satisfaction of that conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Preamble ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chief Oren Lyons&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Why are you here?&amp;quot; a Swiss official of the customs and immigration asked. &amp;quot;Are you real red Indians?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;From the storybooks?&amp;quot; I answered with a question. He was taken aback by the thought. He was uncertain and didn&#039;t reply. We looked at each other, both for the first time. He slowly nodded in agreement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Perhaps,&amp;quot; he said. At that moment we both realized that this was going to be a long encounter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indeed we were &amp;quot;real.&amp;quot; Our presence—with our bright colors, ribbons, long hair, and feathers—at once reinforced stereotypes. At the same time, he was not prepared for the intense and intelligent challenge in our eyes. That was the context of our arrival in Europe in 1977. It was obvious to each of us that there would be a lot to learn from both camps, and so began our journey.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How Did We Get There? ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deskaheh, a Cayuga chief from the Six Nation Territory in Ohsweken, Ontario, Canada, traveled to Geneva in 1923 to register a complaint before the League of Nations. His complaint was against Canada for unilateral interference and removal of the governing body of traditional chiefs of the Haudenosaunee. His mission was blocked by Great Britain, which was the protectorate, as Canada was within the British Empire. However, Deskaheh did raise the support of other nations, and the Labor Party sponsored a public hearing in Geneva that continues to resonate even now. Deskaheh forged the trail for Indigenous nations today.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How we came to arrive in Geneva in 1977 is a long story. The stories of the many Indigenous delegations who journeyed to Geneva in 1977 are essentially the same, because our oppressors are the same and share the same institutions and purpose: to gain our lands and control their resources. We owe our survival to the political will and spiritual integrity of our grandfathers and grandmothers and Indigenous nations and peoples wherever they may be.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the Indigenous peoples of the Western Hemisphere, the landfall of Christopher Columbus brought disease, chaos, and catastrophe. Our oppression has been relentless, fueled by the greed of our brothers from Europe for God, glory, and gold. Sitting Bull, a Lakota patriot and spiritual leader, said &amp;quot;They kept but one promise. They promised to take our lands and they took them.&amp;quot; How did they accomplish this? Simply by declaration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Columbus sailed armed with not only cannons but with the Inter Caetera Bulls of Pope Nicholas V (Bulls Dum Diversas, 1452, and Romanus Pontifex, 1455) and Pope Alexander VI (1492 and Inter Caetera, 1493).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These Inter Caetera Bulls evolved quickly into a &amp;quot;doctrine of discovery&amp;quot; that became institutionalized into the Law of Nations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indigenous peoples native to North, Central, and South America were instantly disenfranchised by these racist declarations. We were stigmatized as &amp;quot;heathens,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;pagans,&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;barbarous infidels,&amp;quot; uncivilized and incapable of rational thought. But above all, we were not Christians. Using these self-serving declarations, the European Christians moved rapidly to establish Christian dominion over the entire Western Hemisphere. Indigenous peoples were designated as part of the flora and fauna and granted only the right of occupancy in our own lands. Because of this great conspiracy, Indigenous peoples have not been considered equals in the world of humanity. The Law of Nations decreed that any lands &amp;quot;discovered&amp;quot; by a Christian nation first secured the title. Other Christian nations must respect the right of &amp;quot;first discovery.&amp;quot; Further, if no Christians were living there, the lands were declared &amp;quot;empty,&amp;quot; terra nullius, open for the taking, regardless of Native populations inhabiting it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Law of Nations forever displaced Indigenous peoples in our own lands. The &amp;quot;doctrine of discovery&amp;quot; doomed us to centuries of merciless and tragic struggles that continue to the present. That&#039;s why we went to Geneva in 1977, and that&#039;s why states continue to refuse to recognize our right to self-determination today.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We came with the hope that we would find enlightened people with a sense of justice. Naively, we thought if people heard our truths that they would help correct these great injustices. We learned differently. We had exchanged one field of battle for another. We discovered that the conspiracy of 1492 continues today.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The five hundredth anniversary of the &amp;quot;discovery&amp;quot; of the Americas came and went, and the Roman Catholic Church adamantly refused to apologize to Indigenous peoples for the murders and suffering they caused in the name of God. I wonder if they at least apologized to God.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Indigenous peoples of the Americas saw the United Nations as a beacon of fairness and justice. We had read the 1948 Universal Declaration of Human Rights, and we considered ourselves human beings with those rights. We put a lot of faith in the principles espoused by the United Nations. We had great hopes and high expectations. We believed that people of authority and influence would respond to the outrages visited upon our peoples over the centuries. We didn&#039;t see the differences between invitations from the international non-governmental organizations (NGOs) and the member states of the United Nations. All we knew was that we were invited to the UN in Geneva to enter grievances and speak our minds. This news reverberated throughout Indian Country in the Americas. At last hope and the opportunity to speak on our own behalf. It was a historical moment, a watershed event that has affected millions of lives around the globe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These events did not occur in a vacuum. The sixties and seventies were decades of action in Indian Country. Drugs were a part of the war in Vietnam and the &amp;quot;scene&amp;quot; in America. The war in Vietnam was in full swing, creating an energy among young people that was enormous in scope and intensity. Peace versus war; flower children versus the establishment; the Civil Rights Movement of black America; the assassinations of John F. Kennedy, Robert Kennedy, and Martin Luther King, Jr.; the Kent State massacre of students; and the ominous and ever mounting body count of American soldiers in Vietnam. The contrary energies of the times produced hippies, great music, and counterculture heroes: Jack Kerouac, Timothy O&#039;Leary, Ram Dass, Harris Joplin, Muhammad Ali, Wavy Gravy, Santana, Pete Seeger, Jane Fonda, Jimmy Hendrix, Ina May and Stephen Gaskin, Bob Dylan, The Grateful Dead, The Doors, The Beatles, and Indians!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Images of Indians were everywhere. Indians were &amp;quot;in.&amp;quot; You saw them in many of the psychedelic posters of Bill Graham&#039;s Fillmore West. Indians were the perfect icon for the idealistic innocence and free spirit of the times. Indians represented integrity, courage, honor, and peace, and still do for that matter. Long hair was a statement of the times. Youth was on the move. They followed the music. They marched in protests and gathered at concerts like Woodstock that would be markers in the social history of America. America was on the road, challenging the direction of the U.S. military policies in Vietnam and supporting the Civil Rights Movement of American minorities. In this process they found Indian Country. This was the Age of Aquarius.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the same time, Indian Country was awash with actions and activities. The pan-Indian movement, based upon the return to the traditional values of Indian life, had morphed into the Unity Caravan. Iroquois and Hopi elders were the core of the campaign to reassert the importance of language; ceremony; and the values of community, service, and sharing back into our villages and nations. We challenged the hundred-year policies of the United States Bureau of Indian Affairs (BIA) and the Canadian Department of Indian Affairs (DIA), organized to destroy our languages, ceremonies, cultures, and spiritual centers. Despite these attacks—coupled with boarding schools, mission schools, and social engineering—our heathen and pagan instincts remained strong, and we clung to Mother Earth for survival. We still know who we are.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Traditional American Indian leaders became proactive. We gathered from Canada, Oklahoma, South Dakota, North Dakota, Montana, Arizona, California, Maine, Florida, New York, and Washington State. Our Unity Caravan circled the United States and parts of Canada four times from 1967 to 1971. The traditional leaders of that time were Thomas and Fermina Banyacya, David and Jack Monongye, and Mina Lansa, all from Hopi. Chief Leon Shenandoah, Cecelia and Chief Irving Powless, Sr., Audrey Shenandoah, and Chief Louie Farmer, all from Onondaga. Chief Becaman and Arlene Logan came from Seneca, Mad Bear Anderson from Tuscarora, Chief Moses Elavid and Chief Louie Thompson from Mohawk. Henry Knockwood, Mi&#039;Kmaq; Sam Sapio, Penobscot; Bill Gammanda, Algonquin; Buster McCurdy, Ute; Oscar Boland, Cherokee; Clifford Hill, Cherokee; Lame Deer, Lakota; Don McCloud and Janet McCloud, Puyallup and Tulalip; Al Bridges and Edith McCloud, Puyallup and Tulalip. Then there were the runners. That&#039;s where I was most useful. We would get directions from the elders and carry them out. My brother Lee Lyons was in that category, and a younger group was also very active. Notable among that group were Tracy and Jeanne Shenandoah, brother and sister from Onondaga, and Tom Porter, Mohawk.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There were more, but those who are named were the principal activists in the development and implementation of the Unity Caravan. My life was very much affected by those years of action and activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Indians of the Northwest Coast were embroiled in what is now known as the &amp;quot;fishing wars.&amp;quot; In the sixties and seventies, the American Indian Movement (AIM) developed in St. Paul and Minneapolis, Minnesota, to counteract work exploitation, discrimination, and police brutality suffered by the large American Indian population in the twin cities. Russell Means, Oglala Lakota, and Dennis Banks, Anishinabe, were co-leaders in the young activist movement that soon became a target for federal surveillance and harassment. AIM received requests for support from Indians under stress in Indian Country and urban centers in large cities across the country. The termination and relocation policies of the Eisenhower-Nixon administration were responsible for moving large American Indian populations off their native lands and territories into cities, causing great stress for the new arrivals and their neighbors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1969, Richard Oakes, a young Mohawk ironworker, led the occupation of the abandoned prison on Alcatraz Island in San Francisco Bay. This celebrated occupation gained international attention and galvanized Indian Country in support. Native youth were demanding a return to their heritage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In quick succession there was the occupation of the BIA building in Washington, DC, in 1972. Blunders by federal agencies resulted in the first occupation in Washington, DC, since the War of 1812, through no fault of the Indians. Four months later, AIM was invited to Pine Ridge, South Dakota, by the Oglala Sioux Civil Rights Organization and the traditional chiefs of the Oglala Sioux led by Chief Fools Crow. They wanted support of their fight to remove the Pine Ridge tribal chairman, Richard Wilson, who was accused of corruption and trading away Lakota land. This turned into a seventy-one-day occupation that caught the world&#039;s attention. The Lakota Treaty Council sent two representatives to the Onondaga Nation in New York to request support and advice. Larry Red Shirt and Louie Bad Wound gained that support, and in 1973 the Haudenosaunee and the Oglala Sioux made a Treaty of Peace and Mutual Support. The FBI, federal marshals, BIA tribal police, and local vigilantes had closed all access to Wounded Knee to the national and international media. Marlon Brando, who won an Oscar for playing Don Corleone in The Godfather, effectively broke that news blockade by sending Sasheen Little Feather to the Academy Awards in Hollywood in his place to refuse to accept the award because of the shameful behavior of United States forces at Wounded Knee. We experienced immediate relief as world attention was refocused back on Wounded Knee, South Dakota. The occupation came to a bitter end that resulted in incarceration for some and the ground end of Richard Wilson&#039;s regime. These are just a few of the incidents that led up to the trip to Geneva in 1977.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Decade of the Indigenous Peoples ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There were and continue to be many reasons for Indigenous peoples to be present in the halls of the United Nations. For North American Indians and other Indigenous peoples with treaties, the UN provides a forum for discussion, studies, and possible solutions to protect Native lands and territories. The UN provides a forum to finally do away with the effects of the racist &amp;quot;doctrine of discovery&amp;quot; foisted upon generations of Native peoples and secure a brighter future for the 300 million or so Indigenous peoples of the world.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have made great strides in the international forums on human rights over these past twenty-seven years. From the first discussion in 1970 by the UN Sub-Commission on the Prevention of Discrimination and Protection of Minorities on the rights of Indigenous populations and the appointment of José R. Martinez Cobo of Ecuador as Special Rapporteur for this study, to the opening of the third session of the Permanent Forum on Indigenous Issues (a subsidiary organ of the United Nations&#039; Economic and Social Council, known as ECOSOC) May 2004, there can be no doubt progress has been made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Much has taken place in between: in the halls of the United Nations; in the lands and territories of Indigenous peoples; and in world conferences on populations, social development, women, habitat, and treaties. There have been recommendations for ways to recognize and honor the needs of Indigenous peoples. Yet the central issues remain unresolved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Basic Call to Consciousness is essentially the report brought to Geneva in 1977 by the Haudenosaunee. Sotsisowah, John Mohawk, a Haudenosaunee scholar, was given the task of drafting our message to the world. The draft was presented to the Grand Council of the Chiefs and examined word by word. After many changes, refinements, additions, and deletions, the draft became our report to the world. Whatever the outcome of this conference would be, the Haudenosaunee Council of Chiefs were satisfied that our report was what we wanted to present at Geneva.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I was given the task to deliver the opening statement at the UN. We had discussed the importance of that message, and we decided to speak for the Natural World since they could not speak for themselves. Our message reflected our concern for the life of future generations. Their welfare is predicated on the health of the Earth. Our observation is that the message we delivered twenty-seven years ago fell upon the deaf ears of authority.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yes, our human rights have moved, almost imperceptibly, forward. Yes, the Working Group for Indigenous Populations (WGIP) was a major step forward when it was created in 1982. It provided the platform for the study by Special Rapporteur Professor Miguel Alfonso Martinez. This important study was commissioned in 1989 and completed in 1994. But you will note the treaties are between states and &amp;quot;populations&amp;quot; not peoples or nations. So the oppressive directives of the thirteenth century Papal Bulls live on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During the early years of our travels to Geneva we became increasingly aware that not only were we not recognized as peoples, which precludes us from human rights, but we had little or no rights in the eyes of the world. We were politically invisible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Working Group on Indigenous Populations made it possible to begin the task of drafting our own declaration of our rights. This evolved, after years of work, into the Draft Declaration on the Rights of the World&#039;s Indigenous Peoples. The draft provides a benchmark of minimum standards for Native peoples around the world. The draft declaration was adopted by the Sub-Commission on Prevention of Discrimination and Protection of Minorities in 1993. The Commission on Human Rights is now reviewing the draft. This review is dragging on; currently they have accepted only two of the forty-five articles. The draft is stuck on Article 3, which addresses self-determination:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indigenous peoples have the right to self-determination and can freely determine their own political status and identity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
States, particularly the United States with support from Australia, have blocked the passage of this article at every session and have threatened to withdraw unless the wording is revised. So much for democracy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The voices of Indigenous peoples were strong in Rio in 1992. At this United Nations&#039; Earth Summit, which focused on Agenda 21, women, children, and Indigenous peoples were included for special concern. We fought hard to be included, but little came from it. As a matter of fact, in the ten year follow-up at the World Summit on Sustainable Development, Johannesburg, South Africa, we were virtually unmentioned in the final report. If it wasn&#039;t for a few Indigenous representatives, luckily still at the conference, lobbying hard at the last hour of the last day for our continued inclusion in the Convention on Biological Diversity, we would have been completely eliminated from any reference at all. So the conspiracy of 1492 and 1493 lives on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1989 we began lobbying the United Nations to recognize 1992 as &amp;quot;the year of the World&#039;s Indigenous People.&amp;quot; This was to coincide with the 500th anniversary of the &amp;quot;discovery&amp;quot; of the Western Hemisphere by Columbus. We knew that countries were preparing big celebrations, including the reconstruction of the Santa Maria. Spain and Italy were foremost in these celebrations, with the United States and Central and South America scheduling similar events.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We, the Indigenous peoples of the North, Central, and South Americas, were just as determined to challenge the myths and lies that passed for the history of this event. Spain, Italy, and other member states of the United Nations defeated our efforts to have the initial recognition of Indigenous peoples fall on the anniversary of the so-called &amp;quot;discovery&amp;quot; of the Americas. However, we had generated so much pressure that the United Nations proclaimed 1993 as the &amp;quot;Year of the World&#039;s Indigenous People.&amp;quot; Ultimately it worked out for us, because, by my calculations, Indigenous peoples defeated Columbus in the international field of public opinion in 1992, and our issues continued to roll on into 1993 with great momentum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following that, the General Assembly proclaimed 1995 the International Decade of the World&#039;s Indigenous People. Great. We&#039;ll take it, along with the observation that we are no longer &amp;quot;populations,&amp;quot; we are &amp;quot;people,&amp;quot; not yet &amp;quot;peoples&amp;quot; (with an &amp;quot;s&amp;quot;), but that will come if we persevere. After all, we are peoples, are we not, in the full international sense of that word. And in the eyes of the Creator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The mandates of the Decade of the World&#039;s Indigenous People have not been met, and by all assessments the decade is an abysmal failure. There seems to be no political will on the part of states to take positive action on these issues. It may take another decade for any of them to be implemented.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yet again a benchmark step was taken with the establishment of the Permanent Forum on Indigenous Issues as a subsidiary organ of ECOSOC, July 2000. Indigenous organizations may participate in the forum&#039;s work as observers. With the establishment of the Special Rapporteur on the Situation of the Human Rights and Fundamental Freedoms of Indigenous Peoples, there now is an avenue for Indigenous peoples to register complaints, an avenue that previously did not exist.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Still, this is a forum on Indigenous &amp;quot;issues&amp;quot; and not peoples. So we&#039;re here not here. And the Inter Caetera Bulls of the Medieval Church of Rome continue to be the defining law for Indigenous peoples.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Throughout this entire time of the international history of contemporary Native peoples there has been little or no discussion about nature, Mother Earth, and Natural Law, the ultimate authority regarding life on Earth. This is where &amp;quot;all the King&#039;s men&amp;quot; will not prevail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some time ago, perhaps sixteen or seventeen years back, Indian leaders were together. The stars were brilliant. A camp coffeepot was hot by the fire, and we were talking about our greedy brother from across the sea. It was the usual talk of what he was doing now to the Earth, to the people, and to himself. Louie Bad Wound stood up and cursed in disgust. He said, &amp;quot;You know what we should do? Look at how many medicine people are here. We should put our medicines together and call in the winds and storms. Flood &#039;em out! We should call in the fires and burn &#039;em out! Maybe then he&#039;ll listen.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We were surprised by Louie&#039;s outburst and we said, &amp;quot;Louie, maybe we ought to think that one over.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Louie answered and said, &amp;quot;Well, he&#039;s not going to listen any other way!&amp;quot; We settled Louie down and talked about the damage being done to Mother Earth. I remember the sparks flying into the night and how we all grew silent thinking about Louie&#039;s words.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Louie has long gone to the &amp;quot;other side camp,&amp;quot; but I think of his words often. Now I think if Louie were here he would see that our greedy brother has brought the winds and fire himself. What Louie was asking for is here. Mother Earth is in the process of bringing balance back to herself, and we will begin to suffer the consequences. This is our opportunity to make him listen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These elements will only increase in intensity, and it will be very democratic. We all live under the law of flesh, bone, and blood, and we are subject to that law. There is no place to run. Disease is on the move, outsmarting modern medicine. We&#039;re depleting the resources of the world. Water will fuel the next wars. Global warming is on the march and world leaders continue to ignore it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Economies are so fragile that natural disasters will destroy national economies. We are so dependent on energy that we are helpless without it. Climate changes and weather patterns are now in flux, yet our leaders fight wars over oil, spending enormous sums of money for military arms that could be better spent for food, shelter, medicine, and education for our future generations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We need to mobilize for peace with the same energy that we use to mobilize for war. We need to produce better leaders with values of community and sharing. We need to exercise common sense.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Great Peacemaker came among our people a thousand years ago with a message of peace. He said people must have equity and good minds and health. He instructed our leaders on governance. He said, &amp;quot;When you sit in council for the welfare of the people, think not of yourself, your family, or even your generation. Make all of your decisions on behalf of the seventh generation coming, then you yourself will have peace.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We must look back and recognize those that sacrificed for us seven generations ago so that we may have what we have today. They set high moral standards and kept the laws that respected the Earth. We prosper today because of the work of those delegates and leaders who are no longer here. We must look forward and keep firm the standards they set for us, and continue to fight for the seventh generation coming. Our work represents peace for them. When they read and experience this Declaration on the Rights of the World Indigenous Peoples and experience their right to self-determination, in the full sense of the word, equal to all under law, they will think kindly of us and sing songs about us, because they will know that we loved them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dhnayto. Now I am finished.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Faithkeeper Onondaga Nation Haudenosaunee&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Six Nations Iroquois Confederacy&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Haudenosaunee: A Nation Since Time Immemorial ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee, more commonly known as the Iroquois Confederacy, are an ancient people of North America. Our tradition states that our people originated in the northeastern woodlands of North America. There are no stories within that tradition concerning migration across frozen lands to the area we occupy. We have been and continue to be the original inhabitants of these lands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our existence in these lands has not been one of absolute peace and tranquility. We have had to work hard to develop the civilization we enjoy. There was a time when our lands were torn by conflict and death. There were times when certain individuals attempted to establish themselves as the rulers of the people through exploitation and repression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We emerged from those times to establish a strong democratic and spiritual Way of Life. The confederate state of the Haudenosaunee became the embodiment of democratic principles that continue to guide our peoples today. The Haudenosaunee became the first &amp;quot;United Nations,&amp;quot; established on a firm foundation of peace, harmony, and respect.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the Haudenosaunee, all member nations are equal, regardless of size. Within their national territories the member nations are autonomous, but all adhere to the central principles of democracy that we agreed to at the formation of the Confederacy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The national Councils of Chiefs do not govern the people; instead they act as representatives of their clans in a process that coordinates the wishes of the people. They also act as judiciary in serious disputes that people cannot resolve among themselves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The confederated Council of Chiefs, or Grand Council, acts as the coordinating body of the will and determination of the member nations. The Grand Council also has the responsibility of conducting affairs with other states and nations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All of this political activity is set in the roots of an ancient tradition of the spirituality of our peoples. This cosmology places the Haudenosaunee in a balanced, familiar relationship with the universe and the Earth. In our languages, the Earth is our Mother Earth, the sun our Eldest Brother, the moon our Grandmother, and so on. It is the belief of our people that all elements of the Natural World were created for the benefit of all living things and that we, as humans, are one of the weakest of the whole Creation, since we are totally dependent on the whole Creation for our survival.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This philosophy taught us to treat the Natural World with great care. Our institutions, practices, and technologies were developed with a careful eye to their potential for disturbing the delicate balance in which we lived.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
European peoples first made contact with Haudenosaunee peoples early during the seventeenth century. The Dutch occupation of the Hudson River, and the English colonies on the Connecticut River and in Rhode Island, resulted in conflicts that rapidly escalated to warfare and that resulted in the massacre of the Algonkian speaking peoples in those areas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The European invasion of the North American Continent brought radical and permanent changes in the nature and objectives of warfare. The very first contact between Europeans and the people of the Haudenosaunee resulted in the deaths of a number of Mohawk people at the hands of a contingent under the command of Samuel de Champlain. Within three decades our people were embroiled in a life-and-death struggle that was triggered by conflicts between two imperialist powers over trade in furs and agricultural settler colonies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During this period of colonial warfare, our country received a massive influx of refugees fleeing from the invaders. At the same time, our lands were invaded on several occasions by European armies that carried out &amp;quot;burnt earth&amp;quot; policies against our people with an intensity that had never been seen in our part of the world. The Haudenosaunee survived those attacks, and we consummated numerous international treaties of peace and friendship with Holland, England, and France.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the time of the American Revolution, the people of the Haudenosaunee had experienced over one hundred fifty years of intermittent warfare. The conclusion of the revolution brought into existence the world&#039;s first settler state, and our struggle for survival entered a new phase. In 1784, our government negotiated a treaty of peace and friendship with the newly formed United States. Almost immediately, we were faced with the establishment of illegal American settlements within the lands defined in the treaty. Scattered skirmishes and conflicts were occurring throughout our lands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At about this time, the state of New York was attempting to negotiate its own treaties with our peoples. The settlers knew that our governing councils would never relinquish lands or allow their settlements. In response, New York began the practice of negotiating with any Native person who might grant them the concessions, especially the land concessions, they wished. Dozens of state treaties were signed by people who were under the influence of alcohol at the time and who often represented no one. A number of treaties were made that bear signatures that are outright forgeries.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All of this was occurring at a time when the years of warfare and disease had taken a heavy toll within our communities. The spirit of many people had been broken, and they had taken to drinking or had sunk into states of apathy. All of this was to the advantage of unscrupulous settlers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From 1784 to 1838, most of the Haudenosaunee territory was taken under fraudulent treaty or treaties obtained through coercion. Many of our people fled to lands promised them by the British Crown, lands that are now within the area shown on European maps as Canada. A number of our people were coerced, cajoled, and otherwise forced to relocate to lands in Oklahoma, Kansas, and Wisconsin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It was during this time that a chief of the Confederacy named Handsome Lake began to articulate a vision of liberation and resistance. His words became the guiding force that saved our peoples from complete cultural destruction during a period when Native culture was on the brink of annihilation throughout northeastern North America. His teachings continue to act as a guide for our people in the work we must carry on to ensure our survival as a distinct people of the world. His vision made clear the nature of the enemy, for he explained the way in which the colonizers would use their institutions and laws, not only to gain our lands, but also our minds and our self-esteem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Throughout the 1800s and 1900s, every aspect of this vision has proven true. The initial assaults against our culture were carried out by missionaries and &amp;quot;educators.&amp;quot; The historical record provides ample proof that there was a deliberate and concerted effort during this period to destroy our laws, customs, spiritual beliefs, and languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ultimate purpose of that strategy became clear as both the United States and the Canadian governments passed laws and adopted policies that were intended to assimilate our people and our remaining territories into these countries.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1892, New York State forcibly placed an illegal government in the Mohawk territory of Akwesasne and passed laws restricting the traditional governments in our territories. Canada acted with the same strategy at about the same time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1923, one of our leaders, a Cayuga chief named Deskaheh, attempted to take our complaints to the League of Nations in Geneva, Switzerland. He was unsuccessful, although he did receive the support of many sympathetic Swiss people. He died in exile when the Canadian government refused to allow him to return to his homeland.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The next year the United States passed citizenship laws that ostensibly imposed citizenship upon Indigenous peoples. The Haudenosaunee notified both the U.S. and Canada that we would not accept citizenship and that we would remain citizens of our own country. Canada responded by sending a military contingent to the Grand River Country and erecting a military barracks there, occupying the territory and forcibly expelling the traditional government.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1934, the United States passed the Indian Reorganization Act (IRA), which was designed to destroy the traditional governments and to place Native peoples under the supervision of the secretary of the Department of the Interior.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In two separate bills passed in 1948 and 1950, the United States Congress granted New York State civil and criminal jurisdiction over the Haudenosaunee territories.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During the early 1960s, the Haudenosaunee lost thousands of acres of land to dams, water reservoirs, highways, electrical and gas lines, and the St. Lawrence Seaway.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
None of these events has occurred without resistance from our peoples. In all of our territories there have been confrontations with police forces. There have been many attempts to stop these attacks against our land base, and many court battles have been fought.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During the 1970s, a new strategy began to unfold for the Haudenosaunee. In the Onondaga territory, New York State was stopped from expanding an interstate highway. The international bridge that passes through Akwesasne was blockaded until unrestricted passage for our people was obtained. In 1974, our people undertook the reoccupation of part of our homeland that had been illegally taken by the United States.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Throughout that time, several other Haudenosaunee communities underwent a revitalization of community culture with a strong emphasis on our economic, educational, and spiritual Way of Life. Between 1979 and 1981, the Mohawk Nation at Akwesasne gained international attention as the struggle against the colonial government imposed by the United States, involving hundreds of community residents, intensified.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have consistently been aggressive in asserting that we are a state, a government, and a people who have a right to a place in the international community. In 1977, we sent a twenty-one person delegation to take part in the International Non-Governmental Organizations&#039; conference on &amp;quot;Discrimination Against the Indigenous Populations of the Americas,&amp;quot; held in Geneva, Switzerland. All twenty-one people traveled on passports issued by our government and have since visited a number of other countries with these passports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The position papers we presented at that conference are in this book and serve to underline our position. As the 1980s began, we were a people confident about our future and clear about the nature of our struggle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Thoughts of Peace: The Great Law ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Haudenosaunee oral history relates that long before the Europeans arrived, Native peoples of the northeast woodlands had reached a crisis. It is said that during this time, a man or woman might be killed or injured by his or her enemies for any slight offense, and that blood feuds between clans and villages ravaged the people until no one was safe. It was during this time that a male child was born to a woman of the Wyandot people living on the north side of Lake Ontario near the Bay of Quinte. It would become the custom of the people of the Longhouse that this person&#039;s name would never be spoken except during the recounting of this oral history in the oral fashion (some say it during the Condolence Ceremony). At other times he is addressed simply as &amp;quot;the Peacemaker.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker became one of the great original philosophers and organizers in human history. It is impossible in this short essay to discuss more than a brief outline of his ideas and accomplishments, but it should become obvious that his vision for humankind was indeed extraordinary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He concluded early in life that the system of blood feuds, as practiced by the people inhabiting the forest at that time, needed to be abolished. His ideas were rejected by the Wyandot and other Huron peoples and while a young man, he journeyed to the land of the People of the Flint located on the southeast shore of Lake Ontario and extending to the areas called today the Mohawk Valley. The People of the Flint, or Kanien&#039;keha:ka, are known to English-speaking peoples as the Mohawks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon arrival in the Mohawk Country, he began seeking out those individuals who had the reputation as being the fiercest and most fearsome destroyers of human beings. He sought them out one at a time—murderers and hunters of humans, even Cannibals—and he brought to each one his message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One by one he &amp;quot;straightened out their minds&amp;quot; as each grasped the principles that he set forth. Nine men of the Mohawks—the nine most feared men in all Mohawk Country—grasped hold of his words and became his disciples.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first principle that the Peacemaker set forth was indisputable to those who heard his words. He said that it has come to pass that in this land human beings are seen to abuse one another. He pointed to the world in which people live and said that people should consider that some force or some thing must have created this world—the River of Life—that had not intended that human beings would abuse one another. Human beings whose minds are healthy always desire peace, and humans have minds that enable them to achieve peaceful resolutions of their conflicts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From that initial explanation—that the Creator of Life (later addressed as the Great Creator) did not intend that human beings abuse one another—he proposed that human societies must form governments that will serve to prevent the abuse of human beings by other human beings and that will ensure peace among nations and peoples. Government would be established for the purpose of abolishing war and robbery among brothers and to establish peace and quietness.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He drew the Mohawks together under those principles and then went to the Oneidas, Onondagas, Cayugas, and Senecas with the same teachings. What is unique about his work is that he not only set forth the argument that government is desirable, he also set forth the principle that government is specifically organized to prevent the abuse of human beings by cultivating a spiritually healthy society and the establishment of peace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other political philosophers and organizers have come to the conclusion that governments can be formed for the purpose of establishing tranquility, but the Peacemaker went considerably further than that. He argued not for the establishment of law and order, but for the full establishment of peace. Peace was to be defined not as the simple absence of war or strife, but as the active striving of humans for the purpose of establishing universal justice. Peace was defined as the product of a society that strives to establish concepts that correlate to the English words power, reason, and righteousness.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Righteousness&amp;quot; refers to something akin to the shared ideology of the people using their purest and most unselfish minds. It occurs when the people put their minds and emotions in harmony with the flow of the universe and the intentions of the &amp;quot;Good Mind&amp;quot; or the Great Creator. The principles of righteousness demand that all thoughts of prejudice, privilege, or superiority be swept away, and that recognition be given to the reality that the creation is intended for the benefit of all equally—even the birds, animals, trees, and insects, as well as the humans. The world does not belong to humans; it is the rightful property of the Great Creator. The gifts and benefits of the world, therefore, belong to all equally. The things that humans need for survival—food, clothing, shelter, protection—are things to which all are entitled because they are gifts of the Great Creator. Nothing belongs to human beings, not even their labor or their skills, for ambition and ability are also the gifts of the Great Creator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore all people have a right to the things they need for survival, even those who do not or cannot work, and no person or people has a right to deprive others of the fruits of those gifts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Reason&amp;quot; is perceived to be the power of the human mind to make righteous decisions about complicated issues. The Peacemaker began his teachings based on the principle that human beings were given the gift of the power of reason in order that they may settle their differences without the use of force. He proposed that in every instance humans should use every effort to counsel about, arbitrate, and negotiate their differences, and that force should be resorted to only as a defense against the certain use of force. All men whose minds are healthy can desire peace, he taught, and there is an ability within all human beings, and especially in the young human beings, to grasp and hold strongly to the principles of righteousness. The ability to grasp the principles of righteousness is a spark within the individual that society must fan and nurture so that it may grow. Reason is seen as the skill that humans must be encouraged to acquire in order that the objectives of justice may be attained and no one&#039;s rights abused.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Having established the concept of righteousness and reason, the Peacemaker went on to discuss the nature of &amp;quot;power.&amp;quot; The power to enact a true peace is the product of a unified people on the path of righteousness, and reason is the ability to enact the principles of peace through education, public opinion, and political, and when necessary, military power that the Peacemaker spoke of was intended to enable the followers of the law to call upon arms and to begin a peaceful settlement of their disputes. Peace, as the Peacemaker understood it, flourished only in a garden amply fertilized with absolute and pure justice. It was the product of a spiritually conscious society using its abilities of reason that resulted in a healthy society. The power to enact peace (which requires that people cease abusing one another) was conceived to be both spiritual and political.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But it was power in all the senses of the word—the power of persuasion and reason, the power of the inherent goodwill of humans, the power of a dedicated and united people, and, when all else failed, the power of force.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The principles of law set forth by the Peacemaker sought to establish a peaceful society by eliminating the causes of conflict between individuals and between peoples. It was a law that was conceived prior to the appearance of classes, and it sought to anticipate and eliminate anything that took the appearance of group or class interest, even in the forms of clan or tribal chauvinism, especially in the area of property. The law was also based to an impressive degree on a logic that looked to nature for its rules. It is one of the few examples of a &amp;quot;Natural Law&amp;quot; that is available to modern man. It is a law that clearly precedes &amp;quot;royal law,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;mercantile law,&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;bourgeois property-interest law.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The government that is established under the Great Law provides, in effect, that the leaders or &amp;quot;chiefs&amp;quot; are the servants of the people. Everyone in the Six Nations, wherever the law prevails, has direct participation in the workings of the government. Direct democracy, when it involves tens of thousands of people, is a very complex business, and there are many rules about how meetings are conducted. But the primary rule about the flow of power and authority is clearly that the power and authority of the people lies with the people and is transmitted by them through the &amp;quot;chiefs.&amp;quot; The fact that all the people have direct participation in the decision of their governments is the key factor for the success and longevity of the Haudenosaunee.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Internally, the law was to be the power by which the people were united ideologically and administratively under a dispute settlement process to which all had agreed to submit and to remove those customs of the past that had sparked conflict and fostered disunity. The path to unity was a difficult one indeed. The territory of the People of the Longhouse had been composed of five distinct countries, and each sometimes jealously guarded their hunting lands from intrusion by the others. The Peacemaker abolished the concept of separate territories. The law unified the peoples, saying that they were distinct from one another only because they spoke different languages. He said the territories were common to all and that each individual member of any of the nations had full rights of hunting and occupation of all the lands of all the nations of the People of the Longhouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In terms of the internal affairs of the People of the Longhouse, the first and most important principle was that under the law the people of the nations were one people. Since the Haudenosaunee call themselves the People of the Longhouse, the Peacemaker&#039;s admonition was that under the law the country of the Haudenosaunee was itself a Longhouse, with the sky as its roof and the earth as its floor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The peoples were assigned to clans by the Peacemaker, and so strong was to be the feeling of kinship and oneness between them that the members of the clan of one nation were admonished not to marry members of the same clan of another nation, so closely were they now related. The law bound them together as blood relatives.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In one motion he abolished exclusive national territories and the concept of national minorities. Any member of the Five Nations was to have full rights in the country of any of the Five Nations with only one restriction: he or she did not have the right to hold high public office, though that right could be conferred upon them by the host nation if they so wished.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The idea that the nations were united as one meant that the nations who were members of the Confederacy had agreed to surrender a part of their sovereignty to the other nations of the Confederacy. The Confederacy Council was to be the forum under which foreign nations and peoples could approach the People of the Longhouse. Any decision concerning the disposition of Seneca lands must first pass through the Confederacy Council where the other nations, who also have rights in Seneca lands, can participate in the decision-making process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker envisioned that the principles under which the Five Nations were governed could be extended far beyond the borders of the Haudenosaunee to all the peoples of the world. The law of the Peacemaker provides that any nation or people may find protection under the Great Tree of Peace, which symbolized the laws of the Confederacy. He expected that the principles of the Confederacy would be well received by many nations, and that the Haudenosaunee would venture forth with the offer of a union that would be designed to prevent hostilities and lay the basis of peaceful coexistence. With that in mind, the Constitution of the Five Nations provides that any nation may seek its protection through becoming knowledgeable about the laws and agreeing to them. Many Native nations accepted that offer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Five Nations agreed among themselves that in the event of an attack they would organize a military force to repel the invader and carry on the war in the invader&#039;s country until the war was concluded. The opponent had an absolute right to a cessation of the hostilities at any time by simply calling for a truce. At that point the process of negotiation went into action. The Constitution of the Five Nations prescribes that in the event another people are conquered, the Five Nations shall not impose upon them the Five Nations&#039; religion, nor collect tribute from them, nor subject them to any form of injustice. The Five Nations would not seize their territory. What was demanded was that the offending nation or people put away their weapons of war and that they cease military aggression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any individual or group of individuals had the right, according to the Constitution, to approach the Five Nations, learn the law, and agree to abide by it. When that happened, they were to be offered the protection of the law and the People of the Longhouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The vision of the Peacemaker that all the peoples of the world would live in peace under the protection of a law that required that hostilities be outlawed and disputes offered a settlement process is yet today an exciting prospect. When the idea of a United Nations of the world was proposed toward the end of World War II, researchers were dispatched to find models in history for such an organization. For all practical purposes, the only model they found concerned the Constitution of the Five Nations, whose author had envisioned exactly that.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a way, the Peacemaker was centuries ahead of his time. He set forth a system of government organization that was a marvelously complex enactment of the concept of participatory (as opposed to representative) democracy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Under the rules of the law, councils of Women appointed men who were to act more as conduits of the will of the people than as independent representatives of the people. The society was founded on concepts of moral justice, not statute law, and the rules of the society were designed to ensure that each member&#039;s rights were absolutely protected under the law. Women not only have rights but power as a community of people composing half of the population. The power of women has never been fully articulated by Western observers and interpreters of Haudenosaunee culture.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Peoples were recognized to have a right to exist unmolested as peoples in the articles of the Constitution. Individuals were recognized as having the full right to protection under the laws of the Confederacy—even individuals who were not members of the host nation—as long as they observed the rules of nonaggression and they didn&#039;t try to create factionalism among the people. The principle was set forth (and machinery to enact it was created) that provided that all peoples have a right to occupy their lands peacefully and that no one may deny them that right. A society was socialized to the ideology that, if an injustice occurs, it is their moral duty to defend the oppressed against their oppressors. The principle was set forth that no one has a right to deprive another of the fruits of his own labor, and that no one has a right to a greater share of the wealth of society than anyone else. The Peacemaker believed that if absolute justice was established in the world, peace would naturally follow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The genius of the Peacemaker was that he not only set forth the principles, he also designed the machinery to enforce those principles. He seems to have operated on the assumption that universal justice is the product of a spiritually strong society, and many of the rules that he proposed are designed to create a strong society rather than a strong government. That is one of the ideas that has not been widely accepted in the twentieth century and certainly not in a context that the Peacemaker would have understood.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker set out to give some order to society and to create peace among peoples and nations. The rules that he set down were called by the Mohawks the &amp;quot;Great Goodness,&amp;quot; and by the Senecas the &amp;quot;Great Law.&amp;quot; The English called that body of teachings the &amp;quot;Constitution of the Five Nations.&amp;quot; It has never been written down in English, despite allegations to the contrary by anthropologists. The versions that exist in English are highly inadequate efforts compared to the oral versions of the Great Law. This effort is no better—it does not compare in any way to the complexity, beauty, and eloquence of the Law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some people who have read the history of the Haudenosaunee will be able to point to episodes in the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries when some of the principles of this law appear to have been ignored. It is true that over nearly two centuries of intermittent warfare—warfare caused by pressures created by the expanding interests of European imperial nations—there was a considerable amount of social change and stress. French imperialist missionaries introduced the idea—an entirely foreign idea—that a divine will might guide the fortunes of people in government and in warfare. That kind of thinking was not to be found in the philosophies of the Peacemaker, but throughout history it has been an idea that has accompanied empire builders everywhere. Many ideas of European origin were adopted by different peoples of the Haudenosaunee at different times, ideas that were in conflict with the principles of the Great Law. In the almost two centuries since the beginning of the so-called &amp;quot;reservation&amp;quot; period, many more ideas that are in conflict with the principles of the Great Law have been imposed by the colonizers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of what passes as &amp;quot;Iroquois history&amp;quot; was an effort by English and French historians to discredit the Haudenosaunee and to justify the destruction of the Confederacy and the theft of Confederacy lands. There were few instances when officials of the Confederacy violated the laws of the Great Peace, although individuals in any society do violate its laws. Following the American Revolution, the United States, and especially New York State, did everything in its power to dissolve the Confederacy and to deal with the individual nations. Great Britain, Canada, Ontario, and Québec have done the same thing. Since the invasion of the Europeans, the Haudenosaunee have produced a number of patriots but few great philosophers. The outstanding Haudenosaunee philosopher and teacher of the post-contact period was also a Confederacy chief. His name was Handsome Lake, and he led a spiritual revitalization that produced an oral document called &amp;quot;The Good Word,&amp;quot; a teaching on the same level of significance and power in Haudenosaunee culture as the Great Law. Combined, the two are a powerful teaching. Against incredible odds, the Confederacy has survived and has continued to this day. Its chiefs continue to meet periodically at the capital at Onondaga, and they continue to carry the titles bestowed upon them by the Peacemaker long before written history began. The ideas of the Confederacy continue to live also, and little by little the world is being exposed to those ideas. As long as those ideas remain alive, the possibility remains that the Peacemaker&#039;s vision of a world in peace and harmony may yet be realized.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Deskaheh: An Iroquois Patriot&#039;s Fight for International Recognition ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The old chief, Clinton Rickard, lived in a little house near the Niagara County town of Sanborn on the reservation of his nation, the Tuscaroras. People of the Iroquois Confederacy will always remember that house—not merely because Clinton Rickard had done much for his people in his long lifetime, but because at his invitation, another fine man, a homeless exile, lived out his last days there. Though his name is known to few white people, no loyal Iroquois will forget Deskaheh, Chief of the Younger Bear Clan of the Cayuga Nation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deskaheh was a descendant of Mary Jemison, famous in Indian and colonial story, and he was born in Grand River Land, a reservation of the Six Nations People who fled or were driven to British lands, now Canada, from their lands below the border after the American Revolution. They chose these acres, gratefully guaranteed to them by the British through General Haldimand, because the Grand River, with its level flats, reminded them of their beloved lands taken over by New York State.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After his years of grammar school, Deskaheh, like many other Grand River people, exercised his rights, guaranteed by the Jay Treaty, to cross the U.S. boundary to become a lumberjack in the Allegheny Mountains, but after an accident, he returned to Grand River and took up farming. He married the daughter of a Cayuga mother and White father, and she bore him four daughters and five sons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By 1914, Deskaheh had reached the middle period of what white neighbors called a &amp;quot;successful reservation-Indian life.&amp;quot; His honesty, sincerity, and ability as an orator in Cayuga and English had brought him the deserved appointment as head speaker when the Canadian government, satisfied until the beginning of World War I to allow the Iroquois the status of a separate nation, decided on grounds of expediency to disregard the old treaties and assimilate the Indians, by force, if necessary. Deskaheh was the leader of the delegation that patiently explained in Ottawa, first, that the Canadian government had no jurisdiction over the little Iroquois nation, and second, that since the Indians had already volunteered in proportionately greater numbers than the people of any other nation in the World War, an enforced draft of its young men by a foreign ally would seem silly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They won this argument, but the end of the war brought other attempted encroachment. The Iroquois soon knew that the majority in the legislative halls of the Canadian Capitol planned further inroads on their rights as citizens or land. In 1921, to thwart the purposes of these schemers, Deskaheh, appointed &amp;quot;Speaker of the Six Nations Council,&amp;quot; presented as travel credentials a passport authorized by his nation and crossed the Atlantic to seek British aid. Since, as he pointed out, the treaty by which his people had their rights guaranteed was signed by George III, he asked for its confirmation by George V. The English authorities refused his request, saying that they would not deal with a Canadian domestic problem, and the Cayuga returned, disillusioned. Then the Canadian enemies grew bolder. Creation of a fifth-column party through persuasion, promises, and payments was easy. It was easier still to get the new minority to ask for a detail of the red-jacketed Royal Canadian Mounted Police to ride into the Grand River country to protect the &amp;quot;loyalist&amp;quot; Indians and &amp;quot;to keep the peace.&amp;quot; So obvious was this procedure that Deskaheh, who strongly opposed it and pleaded earnestly for arbitration, won many sympathizers among his neighbors, and through them, news of the coming raid reached him in time for a hasty flight across the border of the United States to the city of Rochester in western New York State.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The raiders arrested and jailed a number of Iroquois, and though Deskaheh was known to abstain from alcohol, they searched his house on the pretext of looking for illegal beverages. The Canadian government then ordered barracks built for the housing of their police, and Grand River was suddenly an occupied nation. Deskaheh now began to fight back desperately.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the Six Nations&#039; counsel, George P. Decker (a white, Rochester lawyer), as his companion, he again used his passport, this time to travel to Geneva to bring his peoples&#039; case before the League of Nations. He arrived in September 1923, took lodging in the Hotel des Familles, and began to work toward personally presenting to the Council of the League the petition of his people. Though he met with no success, he fought doggedly. Winter came and went, and in mid April he wrote to his wife and his sons and daughters, &amp;quot;I have no time to go anywhere, only sitting on the chair from morning till night, copying and answering letters as they come, and copying the documents, and I have many things to do.&amp;quot; May came to the city by beautiful Lake Leman, but his thoughts were with his people beside the Grand River, and like a good believer in the religion of the Longhouse, he was seeking aid through the prayer of his people to their God. To his brother Alex General, he wrote: &amp;quot;I believe it will be a good thing to have a meeting in one of the Longhouses, but you must combine all the good people and the children of the Longhouse, only those that are faithful believers in our religion and no other, and it must be very early in the morning to have this, so that our God may hear you and the children, and ask him to help us in our distress at this moment, and you must use Indian tobacco in our usual way when we ask help to our Great Spirit ... and you must have a uniform on ... and also ask God you wish the religion will keep up for a great many years to come and the Indian race also.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By June he had obtained the services of a Swiss lawyer who was preparing a statement of the case of the Six Nations in French. The money the Indians and their friends had raised in North America was almost gone, and some means of replenishing it was necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Again he wrote home from Geneva to his brother Alex: &amp;quot;And we had a meeting of the Iroquois of the Six Nations of the Grand River Land—really the committee devoted to the interests of the Six Nations—on the 27th of June, and the meeting decided to raffle off the two portrait pictures which they made and just think of it, these two pictures of myself with my costume on brought six thousand Swiss francs—it means a little over one thousand dollars of our money, and it gives me very great lift to our fight ... very strong committee, all big people, of high class people. When the meeting takes place everybody looks decent of their suit and dress very well.&amp;quot; If these informal reports written to his beloved family in unfamiliar language seem naive, the campaign Deskaheh and his good friend, George Decker, were waging was not. It was hard-hitting, simple, direct. The embarrassed officials who had to deny this representative of a small nation the right to speak before the League Council committed to the Wilsonian doctrine of autonomy for small nations. These two made the situation more awkward for the British interests by making public the prints distributed in Geneva, quotations from treaties, and documents that Canada had decided to abrogate as &amp;quot;scraps of paper.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Cayuga chief was also attracting much favorable attention as a person. To the Irish woman correspondent of the Freeman&#039;s Journal, he seemed a &amp;quot;good-looking, broad-shouldered man, about forty years of age (he was actually fifty-six) ... wearing ordinary dark clothes ... presenting every appearance of a well-to-do farmer with the one exception of his beautiful moccasins. She commented on the penetrating, quick glance of his dark eyes, his kindly mouth, firm chin, and finished her description with the sentence, &#039;His beautifully shaped but strong head and his clear cut features told the story of the strong man who knows his strength and believes in it, whilst his shining eyes were full of enthusiasm and idealism.&#039;&amp;quot; But in the middle of this enthusiastic and sentimental interview, the chief had persuaded her to quote from the text of a memorial address to the Grand River Indians, dated as late as December 1794, and filed by Great Britain:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Documents, Records, and Treaties between the British Governors in former times, and your wise Forefathers, of which, in consequence of your request, authentic copies are now transmitted to you, establish the Freedom and Independency of your Nations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Time wore on and though a few Englishmen and Canadians spoke up for the Six Nation Indians, though the representatives of the Netherlands and Albania listened sympathetically and spoke of supporting his petition, Deskaheh began to suspect that his cause was lost. News from the homeland was bad. The Canadian Government had announced a &amp;quot;free election,&amp;quot; which would in effect determine whether or not the Six Nations Government of Grand River Land should be dissolved. For this vote, the Canadian Government agent had taken possession of the Six Nation Council House, surrounding it with a guard of twenty police. In protest the Indians favoring their nation&#039;s continuance did not vote.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The authorities then broke open the safe holding the records of the Six Nations and took from there a number of wampum belts, revered as sacred by the Iroquois, refusing, on demand, to return them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deskaheh wrote to the editor of a Swiss journal:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is the heart broken that I must affirm that since several months I am witness to the most cruel indifference. ... My appeal to the Society of Nations has not been heard, and nothing in the attitude of Governments does not leave me any hope.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is in this dreadful agony that I take the advantage to cry out that injustice, by the means of your free review, to my Brothers from all races and all religions. Too long we have suffered from the tyranny of our neighbors who tread under feet our Right and which they laugh at the Pact which binds them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I do hereby in His Majesty&#039;s name, authorize and permit the said Mohawk Nation and such others of the Six Nations Indians as wish to settle in that quarter to take possession of and settle upon the banks of the river commonly called Ouse or Grand River ... which them and their posterity are to enjoy forever.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then he recited the tale of the broken pledge, the raid of the Royal Mounted Police, the rummaging of his own house, the building of the police barracks, and the seizure of the sacred wampum. The story would be incredible without evidence, he said, but he had foreseen this and had the proofs with him. Then he lifted the lid of the suitcase and with care and reverence drew from within the old beaded wampum on which might be read the sworn agreements of white governments with his people.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Speaking with deep feeling, translating these documents slowly and impressively, stopping now and then to make clear the meanings of the bead colors and of the representations of the symbols, he made his entranced listeners feel that this was not the narration of the grievances of a small racial unit, but the story of all minority peoples—the tragedy of every small nation that is a neighbor to a large one. When he finished, there was a moment of silence—then the roar of a tremendous ovation. Thousands rose to their feet to cheer him, and the great hall echoed and re-echoed with their applause. Straight, unsmiling, impassive, he waited until after many minutes the sound began to wane. Then, still expressionless, he left the platform.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As if to seal its own lack of interest, the secretary of the League that had notified Deskaheh of the denial of his petition, aware of the embarrassment he had caused, now denied both Deskaheh and George Decker the floor of a plenary session, where the two friends struck their last brave blow. Deskaheh hired the Salle Centrale, and advertised in the press that those who would come to listen would hear Deskaheh present the case of his nation to the world. The response was amazing. The &amp;quot;Red Indian&amp;quot; had been a popular figure in Europe since the time of Columbus, and the populace, the vast majority of whom had never seen an example of the &amp;quot;noble savage&amp;quot; as popularized by translations of the works of James Fenimore Cooper and other romanticists, attended in thousands. All the Geneva Boy Scouts were present, but not a single League of Nations Official. Members of the press of many nations, sensing possibilities of a picturesque if not politically important character, occupied their reserved tables, among them the distinguished Hungarian journalist Aloys Derso, who told amusing and pathetic incidents of the occasion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;I went to the evening to see my first American Indian. He was in the dressing room already in full regalia. I drew a few sketches of him and he was a good model, sitting with the aquiline nose, not the typical Indian profile, the nose not too sharp as I had expected. His eyes were tired and there was a great melancholy in his expression.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When Deskaheh appeared before the great audience, he walked in dignity and with no self-consciousness. There were giggles because, though he wore the elaborate dress of a Chief of the Cayuga Nation, he carried an enormous yellow suitcase that he placed carefully on a table. The giggles soon ceased, however, as Deskaheh related his story simply and sincerely. His people had heard in 1914, he said, of a repulsively homely little chief of the British people. The young Indian men had formed a regiment and gone across the water to fight for world freedom and justice as the allies of the government that had once so gratefully guaranteed his nation its lands. Here he repeated a passage from the Treaty of 1784, as worded by Sir Frederick Haldimand, governor-in-chief of Québec and territories depending hereon:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
... then he recited the tale of the broken pledge...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before the end of 1924, the Speaker of the Six Nations Council had returned to the United States, a disillusioned and discouraged man. An exile from Canada and from the nation he thought he had failed, he found refuge with Clinton Rickard in the house of the benign old chief. There, by the Niagara River, which marks the Canadian boundary, he found that the people for whom he had fought did not think him a failure. From their northern homes in Grand River Land, they journeyed here to see him and assure him of their loyalty. Though his disheartening experience had weakened him physically, his spirit took fire from their cheers and, with never-ending courage, he kept up his battle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Last Speech of Deskaheh ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
as if you had tried. You might have gotten a good share of it by fair means if you got openly and fairly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You young people of the United States may not believe what I am saying, but it is true. Do not take my word, but read your history. A good deal of true history about that has got into print now.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nearly everyone who is listening to me is a pale face, I suppose. I am not. My skin is not red, but that is what my people are called by others. My skin is brown, light brown, but our cheeks have a little flush and that is why we are called red skins. We don&#039;t mind that. There is no difference between us, under the skins, that any expert with a carving knife has ever discovered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
My home is on the Grand River. Until we sold off a large part, our country extended down to Lake Erie, where, one hundred forty winters ago, we had a little seashore of our own and a birch-bark navy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You would call it Canada. We do not. We call the little ten miles square we have left of the &amp;quot;Grand River Country.&amp;quot; We have the right to do that, for it is ours. We have the written pledge of George III that we should have it for ever as against him or his successors, and he promised to protect us in it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We didn&#039;t think we would ever live long enough to find that a British promise was not good. An enemy&#039;s foot is on our country, and George V knows it for I told him so, but he will not lift his finger to protect us, nor will any of his ministers. One who would take away our rights is, of course, our enemy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do you think that any government should stop to consider whether any selfish end is to be gained or lost in the keeping of its word?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In some respects, we are just like you. We like to tell our troubles. You do that. You told us you were in great trouble a few winters ago because a great big giant with a big stick was after you. We helped you whip him. Many of our young men volunteered and many gave their lives for you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You were very willing to let them fight in the front ranks in France. Now we want to tell our troubles to you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I do not mean that we are calling on your governments—we are tired of calling on the governments of pale-faced peoples in America and in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have tried that and found it was no use. They deal only in fine promises that our remaining territory can easily be gotten from us by first bribing our chiefs to sign treaties that you and your governments do not hesitate to take. Your governments of today learned that method from the British. The British have long practiced it on weaker peoples in carrying out their policy of subjugating the world, if they can, to British imperialism. Under cover of it, your lawmakers now assume to govern other peoples too weak to resist your courts. There are no three-mile limits or twelve-mile limits to strong governments who wish to do that.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
About three winters ago, the Canadian government set out to take mortgages on farms of our returned soldiers to secure loans made to them, intending to use Canadian courts to enforce these mortgages in the name of Canadian authority within our country. When Ottawa tried that, our people resented it. We knew that would mean the end of our government. Because we did so, the Canadian government began to enforce all sorts of dominion and provincial laws over us and quartered armed men among us to enforce Canadian laws and customs upon us. We appealed to Ottawa in the name of our right as a separate people and by right of our treaties, and the door was closed in our faces. We then went to London with our treaty and asked for the protection it promised and got no attention. Then we went to the League of Nations at Geneva with its covenant to protect little peoples and to enforce respect for treaties by its members, and we spent a whole year patiently waiting but got no hearing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To punish us for trying to preserve our rights, the Canadian government has now pretended to abolish our government by Royal Proclamation and has pretended to set up a Canadian-made government over us, composed of the few traitors among us who are willing to accept pay from Ottawa and do its bidding. Finally, Ottawa officials, under pretense of a friendly visit, asked to inspect our precious wampum belts, made by our Fathers centuries ago as records of our history, and when shown to them, these false-faced officials seized and carried away those belts as bandits take away your precious belongings. The only difference was that our aged wampum keeper did not put up his hands—our hands go up only when we address the Great Spirit. Yours go up, I hear, only when someone of you is going through the pockets of his own white brother. According to your newspapers, they are now up a good deal of the time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Ottawa government thought that with no wampum belts to read in the opening of our Six Nations Councils, we would give up our home rule and self-government, the victims of superstition. Any superstition of which the Grand River people have been victims are not in reverence for wampum belts, but in their trust in the honor of governments who boast of a higher civilization.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We entrusted the British, long ago, with large sums of our money to keep for us when we ceded back parts of their territory. They took $140,000 of that money seventy-five winters ago to use for their own selfish ends, and we have never been able to get it back.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your government of the United States, I hear, has just decided to take away the political liberties of all the red men you promised to protect forever, by passing such a law through your Congress in defiance of the treaties made by George Washington. That law, of course, would mean the breaking up of the tribes if enforced. Our people would rather be deprived of their money than their political liberties—so would you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I suppose some of you have never heard of my people before and that many of you, if you ever did, supposed we were all long gone to our happy hunting grounds. No! There are as many of us as there were a thousand winters ago. There are more of us than there used to be and that makes a great difference in the respect we ask of you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I ask you a question or two. Do not hurry with your answers. Do you believe—really believe—all peoples are entitled to equal protection of international law now that you are so strong? Do you believe—really believe that treaty pledges should be kept? Think these questions over and answer them to yourselves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fathers among us have been real men. They cry out now the injustice of being treated as something else and being called incompetents who must be governed by other people—which means the people who think that way about them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We are not as dependent in some ways as we were in the early days. We do not need interpreters now. We know your language and can understand your words for ourselves and we have learned to decide for ourselves what is good for us. It is bad for any people to take the advice of an alien people as to that.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You mothers, I hear you have a great deal to say about your government nowadays. Maybe you can do something to help us if you will. Our mothers have always had a hand in ours. Maybe you mothers are hard-hearted and will not, perhaps you boys and girls who are listening and who have loved to read stories about our people—the true ones, I mean—will help us when you grow up, if there are any of us left to be helped.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are found to treat us as though we were citizens under your government, then those of your people who are land-hungry will get our farms away from us by hooks and crooks under your property laws in your courts that we do not understand and do not wish to learn. We would then be homeless and have to drift into your big cities to work for wages, to buy bread, and have to pay rent, as you call it, to live on this Earth and to live in little rooms in which we would suffocate. We would then be scattered and lost to each other and lost among so many of you. Our boys and girls would then have to inter-marry with you, or not at all. If consumption (tuberculosis) took us off or if we brought no children into the world, or our children mixed with the ocean of your blood, then there would be no Iroquois left. So boys and girls, if you grow up and claim the right to live together and govern yourselves—and you ought to—and if you do not concede the same right to other peoples and you will be strong enough to have your own way—you will be tyrants, won&#039;t you? If you do not like that word, use a better one, if you find one, but don&#039;t deceive yourselves by the words you use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Boys, you respect your fathers because they are members of a free people and have a voice in the government and because they helped to make it and made it for themselves and will hand it down to you. If you knew that your fathers had nothing to do with government, but were mere subjects of other men&#039;s government, you could not look up to them and they could not look you in the face. They would not be real men then. Neither would we.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This story comes straight from Deskaheh, one of the chiefs of the Cayugas. I am the speaker of the Council of the Six Nations, the oldest League of Nations now existing. It was founded by Hiawatha. It is a league that is still alive and intends, as best it can, to defend the rights of the Iroquois to live under their own laws in their own little countries now left to them, to worship their Great Spirit in their own way, and to enjoy the rights that are as surely theirs as the white man&#039;s rights are his own.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you think the Iroquois are being wronged, write letters from Canada to your ministers of parliament, and from the United States to your congressmen and tell them so. They will listen to you, for you elect them. If they are against us, ask them to tell you when and how they got the right to govern people who have no part in your Government and do not live in your country but live in their own. They can&#039;t tell you that.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One word more so that you will be sure to remember our people. If it had not been for them you would not be here. If one hundred and sixty-six winters ago, our warriors had not helped the British at Québec, Québec would not have fallen to the British. The French would then have driven your English-speaking forefathers out of this land, bag and baggage. Their children would have been a French-speaking people here today, not you. That part of your history cannot be blotted out by the stealing of our wampum belts in which that is recorded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I could tell you much more about our people, and I may some other time, if you would like to have me.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One by one, Deskaheh told the story of those agreements solely made on the sworn good faith of each of the two big governments that had guaranteed the Indian his own land, fair treatment, and independence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sick, fever-ridden, despairing, Deskaheh raised his voice to speak his last proud message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The next morning, Deskaheh was in Rochester hospital. Eight weeks later he knew he was dying and asked to be taken back to Clinton Rickard&#039;s home on the Tuscarora Reservation. While his bed was made ready for his journey along the Milky Way to the Spirit World, his brother, wife, and children tried to cross the border at Niagara Falls to be with him, but were refused permission to do so.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On June 22, 1925, alone and with his eyes set toward the Six Nations Land he had tried to serve, he died.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Aku will not be free until the Indian walks.&amp;quot; —José Marti&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
White Americans and white Canadians have done little to keep the story of Deskaheh alive. Few have seen the small stone that marks his grave in the burial grounds of the Cayuga Longhouse. Fewer still care to remember his words. They make the white man uncomfortable because they bear so emphatically on contemporary thinking about the Native peoples, on proposed laws in the legislative bodies of the states and the nations that would still, despite their agreements (in Deskaheh&#039;s words) &amp;quot;protect little peoples and to enforce respect for treaties,&amp;quot; regard Indians as incompetents to be governed for their own good by wiser neighbors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But the Iroquois remember. And when they speak of Deskaheh, the white people sometimes listen, wondering if they and their governments could by some unlikely chance have dealt unjustly with a great man.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Geneva, 1977: A Report on the Hemispheric Movement of Indigenous Peoples ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
José Barreiro&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We were in a tall, cavernous room at the United Nations, and all around the wall and the doors there were people crowded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Indian delegates were all in the center, seated in rows, with long, thin tables before them, and they had earphones on. To their right and to their left, sitting on both sides of the room so that they faced each other and looked over the Indian people, were the representatives of the various governments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Segwalise of the Haudenosaunee delegation was about to speak. He was in front, facing us.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Next to him was Juan Condori, Aymara from Bolivia, and next to him was José Mendoza, Guaymi from Panama. Both had spoken. This was the last day. It had been up to them to summarize the conditions and aspirations of their Indian peoples in South and Central America, and as we had come to expect throughout that week, they had spoken out directly and well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now they had come, one hundred thirty people, representing Hopi and Lakota, Haudenosaunee and Guaymi, Misquito and Mapuche, Northern Cheyenne and Ojibway, Aymara and Muscogee, and more, and they had brought a message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The immigration guards and officials at the Geneva airport were perplexed. Twelve delegates from the Six Nation (Iroquois) Confederacy, the Haudenosaunee, were lined up, passports in hand, a little tired after a nine-hour overnight flight, but now serious and alert as one of their passports had been handed across the glass barrier and the blonde guards with caps on were turning it over in their hands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It was a small, brown book, covered in leather. On the cover: Haudenosaunee Passport.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;I don&#039;t know,&amp;quot; one guard said. &amp;quot;We have to study this.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee delegation went to sit down. &amp;quot;Well, here we go,&amp;quot; one said. &amp;quot;We may as well start here.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The men and the women sat around. One man went to the bathroom and came back. He looked over the group casually. &amp;quot;What seems to be the trouble?&amp;quot; he said, as if he didn&#039;t know, as if there was not reason. People smiled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Hey,&amp;quot; someone else said, &amp;quot;did you call the Iroquois Consulate?&amp;quot; Everyone laughed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One of the older women repeated the antics of one of the young Indian men who had gotten off the plane pretending to be an anthropologist. &amp;quot;Gee,&amp;quot; he had said, &amp;quot;this is how they live, eh? Did you get their picture?&amp;quot; That cracked everybody up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then the Swiss officials were back. They still seemed perplexed, but now they were offering a special entry permit. A young Swiss man acted as interpreter. The older Haudenosaunee chiefs and the women discussed the meanings and use of this special permit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;It seems to me,&amp;quot; one man said, &amp;quot;that this permit, by virtue of being a &#039;special&#039; permit, tends to negate the validity of our passport.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;That seems right,&amp;quot; one woman said, lifting her head. &amp;quot;And we didn&#039;t come here to be treated differently. We came here seeking recognition.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;It seems to me,&amp;quot; he told the Haudenosaunee spokesman, &amp;quot;this is not the place for a political fight.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another man smiled, nodding. &amp;quot;That is correct,&amp;quot; he said. &amp;quot;This is the whole reason that we are here.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The man looked past him silently.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;I think the important thing is to get in,&amp;quot; the young interpreter said.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;No,&amp;quot; the man said softly, &amp;quot;the important thing is not to get in—the important thing is to make sure that every step of the way our validity as Indian nations is recognized.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The young man nodded. He looked away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Swiss officials looked perplexed. They would have to consult with their superiors, they said.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Two men from the delegation wanted to know what was going on. Others began to take pictures. The young Swiss man who was interpreting looked nervous and fidgety. He kept looking at his watch. He was working with a reception committee member who had arranged for a bus to transport the delegations into Geneva. The bus was waiting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Soon, the officials came back. Once all the people gathered. It was to be this way: the permit being offered was the one regularly issued to passports from nations that had no formal relations with Switzerland. The Haudenosaunee had no formal relations with Geneva—but by this act, the Swiss were recognizing the Haudenosaunee&#039;s right to travel with their own passport.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee moved away from the officials and spoke among themselves. The procedure and explanation seemed reasonable. There was agreement to accept.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One of the Iroquois chiefs stood up, a quiet man, softly spoken. &amp;quot;Let us not forget,&amp;quot; he said, &amp;quot;that we are here as guests. In our own land we would not treat people this way. If it is the custom for these people to act in this way, let us allow them their words. It doesn&#039;t seem proper that we should travel halfway around the world seeking sympathy by insulting those very people who wish to hear us.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Soon, the Swiss officials were handing out the passports with the permits inserted. The Haudenosaunee delegation, with the chiefs leading the way, formed a single file and passed through the gate into Switzerland.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There was a large circle later—and it was of all the delegations—North, Central, and South America—and one of the Lakota, Russell Means, was standing and speaking and he was slamming down forceful words, angry words.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We had been discussing the agenda for the first day—how it was to go, how much time there was, who was to speak. There was in the room and among all of us the awareness of how much there needed to be said and explained and how important it was.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ours was a talking mission, a very complex one, and there wasn&#039;t much time. The first morning session, where a large audience and much press participation was expected, would be a crucial one. We had just become aware that the NGOs (Non-Governmental Organizations, the conference sponsors) had already scheduled several non-Indian speakers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;I am sick and tired of this,&amp;quot; Russell was saying, his arm extended, gesturing to the circle. &amp;quot;This is our conference. We came here, for the first time, to present our case to the world, and now we are told that we have to sit and give half our time to some damn white speakers to tell us how nice it is to have us here!&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Around the room there was much nodding among silent faces. Others spoke out, mostly young men.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Juan Condori, Aymara from Bolivia, stood up. He too was adamant. &amp;quot;We have heard their speeches,&amp;quot; he said. &amp;quot;All their polite words, all their empty words. No. I am here for my people. I am here to speak out, to tell what we are enduring. I don&#039;t have time to give.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A couple of people who had been working with the NGO committee then tried to explain the situation. It was customary, they said, that the hosts and the other observer groups represented would give welcoming addresses. There were about four such groups.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The young men, one by one, spoke again. They remained adamant. One spoke and then another, and as they went along, listening to each other, you could sense the rising circle of uncompromising anger taking hold.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;No, they are saying to us. Let us be heard and at least let us do that well and in that let us not give an inch.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then Kakwirakiron stood up. He was a young man with long braids. He was a spokesman and representative of Kanien:ke, a Mohawk settlement in the Adirondack Mountains. There was apprehension and that sort of expectation within an argument when a new speaker is watched carefully to see which side he will support. He spoke casually. He said that he, too, was a young man, a warrior. Then he told a little bit about Kanien:ke and the kinds of pressures that community had endured in the last four years of its existence. He spoke about the feelings one gets from living continually in a defensive stance, not knowing on many evenings whether the morning would bring an assault by the state troopers or a few shots from some rednecks. Then he spoke about the importance of those strong feelings. &amp;quot;These young men,&amp;quot; he said, &amp;quot;I understand them because they have been the ones in the last few years who have had the task of facing the enemy. This has been their job, and as such it is their duty to be suspicious. If they did it this way, they would not be fulfilling their obligations to the people.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Rut where I come from,&amp;quot; he said, &amp;quot;within the people that I represent, there are also old men and old women, and parents, and families, mothers, and there are little children. And they also have feelings which must be heard, and which we must represent here. That&#039;s what we are here for. We represent the whole people—not only the warriors, not only the angry feelings. This we must keep in our minds.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kakwirakiron sat down and around the room the people were quiet. It took a few moments, but then it seemed the anger had been focused, like the force of argument had been appropriately placed in that room.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Somehow the question of time for speakers that first day got resolved. It seemed much simpler then.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Phillip Deere sat in a straight-backed chair, with a red blanket folded on his lap. Now it was late at night and we were in the basement of a building in Geneva, and before him, sitting in a circle, were the group of six men who had been selected by all the delegates to be the principal speakers, to make the initial, unifying presentation, on that first day of the conference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There were Oren Lyons, from the Iroquois Confederacy; Juan Condori, Aymara from Bolivia; José Mendoza, Guaymi from Panama; Russell Means, Lakota from the United States; and Larry Red Shirt and Francis He Crow, both also Dakotas, pipe carriers who were to open up the first day&#039;s proceedings with a Pipe Ceremony.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Phillip had his hand up and, with his forefinger, was pointing at each of the men, and he had a light smile on his face, a sort of proud and knowing smile, a confident smile.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It had been a small but important meeting. We had come together in that room to discuss the various speeches that these men would deliver on the next day, and thus eliminate any possible repetition, and yet something much stronger, something much more telling of what had been carried to Geneva had emerged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Oren Lyons spoke first. He explained how he would address the duty of all human beings to respect not only &amp;quot;human rights,&amp;quot; but the rights of all the beings of the Creation. This he went over carefully and seriously, explaining that this was the foundation for any life that would be full and decent and that could begin to guarantee the rights of future generations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then José Mendoza spoke—and he spoke of territory, land, of the elements of the land, and how a people grew and developed according to that land and that sky, and what it offered and what it taught. He spoke of his people, the Guaymi, and of the other Indian nations, which in Panama, like in so many other countries, constituted a so called minority within the larger state. &amp;quot;But we are not a minority,&amp;quot; he said. &amp;quot;Within our territories we are simply us—the people—and it is only when we go outside of this—of our territories—that we become &#039;minorities,&#039; and then an even worse oppression begins. We become as the peasant, losing identity; family, language, representation—to be absorbed and thus hidden, manipulated, and exploited.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then Juan Condori spoke, and he knew a thing or two about exploitation. Bolivia where the Indian people are a majority—about four million in a country of five million—and he spoke about what it means to be an Indian and a peasant, because in his country, the two words can mean the same thing, because everyone has been displaced and the Indian, who live on but own no land, are considered inferior, less than human, by the controlling white minority.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He spoke about humiliation and poverty, and hunger—real hunger—where children don&#039;t eat, and grow malformed, and their minds don&#039;t work well, and where the parents work and work and produce so little, and even that is taken away, and all this, he said, all this is about to get even worse. A new migration, a new tide of racist White Rhodesians on the run from that part of the world and invited by the Bolivian government to settle a whole new region—more white settlers—sixty thousand men of a bearing age—ideologically trained in apartheid, tied into the development of the oppressive mining and the vast economic interests that control the country and everything going out, all the labor, all the minerals, the land destroyed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Russell Means spoke then. He also knew about the destruction of land, he said, referring to the Great Plains of North America. He had wanted to be last, he said, because he had a very special mission, and that was to nail the head of the monster. And the monster, the base and control of overwhelming exploitation—the force, economic and military, behind this process—this was the United States of America. It was there that the multi-nationals were based. It was there the counter-insurgency programs were generated. It was there where the sterilization programs were mapped out. It was there where the governments of Panama, Venezuela, Nicaragua, Chile, Brazil, Guatemala, Bolivia, Argentina, and Mexico got their military aid. And it was there where a society had been created that lived so richly on the destruction of other people&#039;s lands, the exploitation of their labor, the extraction and theft of their natural resources, and finally and most fundamentally, the very rape and destruction of the Natural World—the basis of all life the foundation, specifically, of everything the people represented—the sacred Mother Earth.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He wanted to make this clear, Russell said, to bring the total message back around to this, because his own people had no time left, and the Bolivians had no time left, nor the Guaymi. And in that room it became very clear as each of the men had spoken that there had emerged no repetition but instead a sort of fusion of the various arguments, and they seemed to fold together like the cloth that wraps the Sacred Pipe. Then Larry Red Shirt spoke.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He explained the meaning of the Sacred Pipe. This was his mission—to open the ceremony and to carry and offer the Pipe. He was moved, he said, by all the words he had heard, by the strength that they represented together; how it all fit, and he knew that it was good. Then he spoke of the Pipe, of the origins of the Lakota, of the power the Pipe had and of the many manifestations he had witnessed of that power, how it had been used at Wounded Knee, and at the many trials, how he had seen, over and over, the minds of men changed by the power of that prayer and what the smoke represented.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So Phillip Deere had his hand up and his forefinger was extended, and he was pointing at each of the men, and he was smiling.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;All of you men that are going to be speaking tomorrow,&amp;quot; he said, &amp;quot;you remind me of something that we do at home. And I&#039;d like to tell you about it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;At home, we have a fire-starting ceremony in which several men get around a circle, and there is some straw or hay or wood chips, something to ignite—and then each of the men will strike flint, hitting, hitting, trying to make that spark jump. But it is not going to be all of you that starts that fire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;At home, all of the young men strike the stone, over and over. Strike, strike, strike but only one makes the spark jump. And one spark ignites the fire. So it will be tomorrow. Each will strike. All of you will speak. And one spark will ignite the hearts of all those people, of the representatives of the various countries, of the NGOs, of the mass media. Your mission is to light the fire, to ignite the hearts. You remind me of those young men striking stone.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone nodded silently. Then Russell Means reached into his pocket and pulled out a butane lighter. &amp;quot;Here. Let&#039;s try this one too,&amp;quot; he said.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Phillip laughed. Juan Condori laughed too, nodding, looking pleased. He turned to the interpreter. &amp;quot;And how is it that the Lakota say to agree?&amp;quot; he asked in Spanish. Then he remembered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Ho!&amp;quot; he said loudly, &amp;quot;Ho!&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Grandfather David Monongye offered a prayer and everyone surrounded him. He was wrapped in a blanket, a short, wiry man with a face full of years. Everyone&#039;s thoughts came together on the hope that what would be said that morning would be heard. The old man looked to the Earth, and he looked to the sky, and he offered his prayer to the four directions, and he spoke as only a Hopi could speak, and then the drum sounded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
People lined up and the elders took their places, the chiefs, then everyone else—the young men drumming, their voices raised high.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There were photographers all around now (they had been restricted during the prayer) and they followed to the side and behind and some ran backwards in front, stumbling over each other. The delegations marched. Sacred Pipes leading as delegations march. The warriors carried the drum, the women held their shawls. Some of the young people half danced, half walked, and you could see many legs and feet on the hard pavement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Heya ... heya ... heya ... heya&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I remember running in front to take a few pictures running backwards too, and crouching down to shoot, and loom strong and beautiful the people looked and how they kept on coming. I ran way up ahead, trying to get a shot that would encompass them all, and through the lens of the camera there was the center leading, which was the men with the Pipes, the men carrying their Pipes very high and their serious proud faces and behind them the people spreading out, coming old, and all around them and rising behind them was the early morning light and the city of Geneva. Then I circled way around the back and by now the people were on the grounds of the Palais des Nations. Looking up over the backs of their heads at the windows of the United Nations buildings you could see many faces and heads sticking out, and out the doors were coming small crowds. It was obvious that the work of the whole place had been halted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
People smiled and a few waved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the entrance to the building the drum was silenced. Grandfather David offered a second prayer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then another song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And from the windows and doors of the United Nations&#039; buildings all those people began to clap and cheer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then the People went inside.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
North and South—the American contingent. The affluence of the North; the poverty of the South. The &amp;quot;underdevelopment&amp;quot; of the South; the &amp;quot;overdevelopment&amp;quot; of the North. And what does it all mean to Indian people?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A press conference. Many pretty words of welcome, an equal number of insulting questions. Will they ever understand that this is not a game?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Several spokesmen tried to explain it. The meaning of sovereignty. The respect for Mother Earth. The search for integrity, the circle of life.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The reporters wanted to see the medallion around Phillip Deere&#039;s neck.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Oh, very nice,&amp;quot; they said.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The next day we read the headlines: &amp;quot;INDIANS DO SCALP DANCE AT THE U.N.,&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;INDIANS HOME TO UNEARTH WAR HATCHET!&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Late at night in Geneva. Narrow European streets. Cobblestone. Eight, nine Indians walking in the dark, hands in pockets, hunched over shoulders, trying to guard off the chill.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is a drizzly night, full of shadows. Small cars race by, like miniature toys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The men walk against the wind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One throws back his head, sideways. &amp;quot;In my land I would be warm,&amp;quot; he says, the words carried by the wind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Ah-hah!&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Don&#039;t talk!&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Oh Yes!&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;And myself,&amp;quot; says another voice, &amp;quot;I would have my woman rub my neck.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Under the blanket!&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And they laugh. There&#039;s a strong wind now. Cold, cold.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the way and there is a bar restaurant. There is a glimpse through a window—vapor on the glass—and warm, light faces inside, some noise, a crowd, beer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They must go around the parked cars, spreading out once more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Just like at home. Ay!&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Walking against the wind, on the cobblestone street in Geneva very late.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;I don&#039;t know, my brothers. Sometimes it tires me—conferences, conferences—so much talk!&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Are you asking: is it worth it?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The men laugh.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;They do that, brothers, in my country. They push us to the side and drive their big cars through, through, through!&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Aymara pretends to hold a steering wheel, pushing, pushing. Now he is angry. &amp;quot;They think we are beasts!&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;They do. They do.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Indian people of Brazil could not come. There they are considered as children, minors who must travel with a guardian, a white Brazilian. &amp;quot;Do you need a guardian my brother?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;That they know already.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Oh, I see.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The men laugh sadly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;You know. In my country they call us pigs. It is the same as saying Indian!&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Brother. And will Geneva buy me a pair of shoes?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Laughter, laughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Brothers, we are here to talk. That is something. Let the words go out!&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;It makes a difference. Look, say it, let the words go out!&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Brother Constantine—it got him out of a cell.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Say enough—enough—we let it loose. It will carry itself.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;If enough of us say it together.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The nine figures are walking in a huddle in the shadows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One man sings a song—a lifting, beautiful song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Two men walk comfortably with their arms around each other&#039;s shoulders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Brothers, brothers, I love you all—but I don&#039;t want to see you again. Not here. Send someone else next time.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Send someone else!&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Yes. That is the spirit. We grow strong together. There is no doubt. We share it. Send someone else next time.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Sing another song then. Sing, will you. Sing.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Aymaras look down. But then: &amp;quot;Brothers,&amp;quot; one says, &amp;quot;if they want my picture, they can&#039;t have it.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He looks up, straight at the photographers. Under his breath he says, &amp;quot;It is going to take more than cameras to shoot me up.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And another one looks up—a dark face, with red, tired eyes. &amp;quot;They&#039;ll have to cut my heart out.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dan Bomberry, of the Haudenosaunee Delegation, is around. He too carries a camera, this one with a long lens. The Aymaras like him. He crouches down, shoots. He shoots again and again, from the sides, from the back.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The photographers shoot back at the Aymaras and at the Bolivian military attaché and his staff. They laugh at him scoffingly. Bomberry then shoots them. Stephen Gaskin, an Independent observer from the community, he is also recruited. He has a crummy, dinky camera, but wields it with flair, joining the skirmish, shooting, shooting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pretty soon the two photographers retreat. But the Bolivian military minister&#039;s face is red.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I remember a couple of tall, well-dressed, mustachioed Mexicans cornering young Natalio, a Nahuatl delegate. They loomed over him, with serious, threatening faces.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Mexican government will not have it said it mistreats &amp;quot;our&amp;quot; Indians, they said.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Furthermore,&amp;quot; one of the men said, &amp;quot;there are only eight million Indians in our country—not twelve million as your report said.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Natalio shrugged. &amp;quot;You know these figures are hard to ascertain.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Eight million!&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Natalio looked away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;And another thing we want mentioned: the Indians fought for Mexico, in many wars.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;I know,&amp;quot; Natalio said. &amp;quot;I know we did.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Nicaraguan ambassador to Geneva tried to call one of the Misquitos out of a meeting. The Indian wouldn&#039;t go.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;This is friendly,&amp;quot; the ambassador sent word.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They met for dinner one night. &amp;quot;Our position is very clear,&amp;quot; the Misquito said. &amp;quot;We are one hundred thousand people, within our territories. We are not you and you are not us.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One day the Yecuana from Venezuela looked troubled, withdrawn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;They are pressuring me,&amp;quot; he said. &amp;quot;There are threats.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And of course Bolivia—where the struggle is intensifying and the Indian people have vowed to dust off their old, hidden rifles because no longer can they tolerate the humiliation and oppression—and this is it: if the &amp;quot;Rhodesians&amp;quot; move in, apartheid becomes official.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the United States, the word is out that Russell Means will again be imprisoned—his parole broken too blatantly, too politically. The court won&#039;t tolerate it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So it goes. And some others too, that one cannot mention.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We were tired. Everyone was tired, but I don&#039;t mean tired in that way that one begins to forget things. No, rather I mean tired in that way that all your emotional reserves, your usual, everyday customary buffers have been used up, and so whatever is around you enters your being and flows through you and becomes part of what you are, and Segwalise was groping.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;As a person who has helped work to achieve this time, this first time when our people have come here as one people of the Western Hemisphere to talk to the world and try to explain the conditions that we face, that what I have seen in the past year of work on this is that there has been an organic growth, as when you put that seed into the Earth and you know that the various things of the Earth work together with that seed to bring about a good thing for the life of all the people. That cycle has been going on since the deepest concern in this work has always been that unfortunately the people who occupy our part of the world with us, for whatever reasons seem to have a vicious strain in them. It may be because their guilt is so overwhelming about how they treat us, that sometimes they have to murder us, or jail us, or assassinate our leaders, or carry on acts against our people.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;I hope that those of you who sit in this room with us, as representatives of the co-occupiers of our part of the world, you will be able to think before a little bit about our lives, our aspirations, our wants, our desires, before you send your final reports home. Before you send your reports home that may cause a ... a ... death. That may cause a death among a people that I have come to know and love. Because if one of them disappears from the face of this Earth, because they came here to speak the truth about the conditions we live in, and the things we have to face, the people who remember that man&#039;s death will be coming after you.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then he said: &amp;quot;I want to say,&amp;quot; he began slowly, and he looked toward the Bolivian government representatives. This was for them. It was from us to them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;We have a chance in the Western Hemisphere, to work together as human beings, as people. And as the Native people of this land we have come to this World Council to try to show you that even through all the things you have done to us, we still have a feeling of kindness in our hearts. If you continue, do not be surprised by the reaction the people reap upon you. What you create today, how you say it, how you feel it, how you manifest it as you walk upon the Earth, it comes back to you. It always goes in a full circle. If you find it in your heart to be human beings, to give a little bit of life, a little bit of consideration for us as human beings, then it comes back. And that&#039;s the balance of this Way of Life that we carry on our side of the world. And we always try, we always try to put it into your hearts and into your minds. Don&#039;t let your economic interests, don&#039;t let your military interests override your humanity. Because we are not going to go away, we are not going to disappear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;We are going to be here for a very long time. And every morning when you wake up, somehow, someplace, somewhere, you are going to have to face us again. So let&#039;s try in your reports home, and in our reports home, to look for ways that we can get back to the good life in the Western Hemisphere.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wild applause, everyone on their feet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Epilogue ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
José Mendoza, the Guaymi delegate came back with us for a visit. This was a few days after the conference, and we were sitting in one of the hilltop cabins at Nuri. Mendoza looked up from the table and said: &amp;quot;I must confess. I am truly confused.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It was his first visit to North America. We had flown into Syracuse and after a day&#039;s rest at Onondaga, had traveled the fast, easy highways north to Akwesasne.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;This is a strange land,&amp;quot; Mendoza kept saying.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Late at night he asked the crucial question: &amp;quot;Tell me,&amp;quot; he said, &amp;quot;in this country, just how does one know who are the Indians?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A big question—a big, big question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In his country, Mendoza said, Indians don&#039;t drive pick-up trucks; Indians don&#039;t work at big money jobs. Part of that is the poverty of the Panamanian society, he said. But also, it is widely recognized in the communities that once you begin to move into that life you cease to be an Indian. This began a long discussion that night, around the table. We talked about the People—how they defined themselves, what kind of principles they lived by. Then we talked about poverty and wealth—how they were two sides of the same force, how they could be used as instruments of oppression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We talked about North and South, about the attempt to live an integral life, and we came to understand how the way of life of Indian people is just as perversely (and maybe even more thoroughly) oppressed by wealth as it is by forced poverty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The next morning there was to be a report on Geneva in the Longhouse at Akwesasne. I stayed behind in the mountains to finish up some work, but Mendoza went along.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Longhouse was crowded with people—and, after the reports, which were delivered in Mohawk, there was much dancing and singing and a feast.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mendoza came back late that night. He was smiling.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;The consciousness,&amp;quot; he said. &amp;quot;I feel good tonight. Down there, at Akwesasne.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== A Basic Call to Consciousness ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Haudenosaunee Address to the Western World ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Geneva, Switzerland Autumn 1977 ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is impossible to overstate the power of thought that emerges from that document, today, it is almost impossible for us to recreate the scene of its birth. But centuries ago, a Natural World people gathered together at the head of a lake in the center of North America&#039;s then virgin forest, and there they counseled. The principles that emerged are unequaled in any political document that has yet emerged. They evolved a law that recognized that superbly complex organization rise internally of hierarchy, and they dedicated the organization of their society to function to prevent the abuse of humans by other humans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It was not long ago that the Haudenosaunee, or Six Nations, were a powerful people, occupying a vast territory stretching from Vermont to Ohio, and from present day Québec to Tennessee. At the period of first contact early during the seventeenth century, the Haudenosaunee occupied hundreds of towns and villages throughout the country.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Secondly, they looked into their own histories to discover the things that cause conflict among people. They saw, for times struggle over hunting territories, and they did a curious thing. They abolished the significance of such territories and guaranteed the safety of anyone entering the country of the Haudenosaunee. And they established universal laws about the treatment and taking of game, because the taking of game sometimes caused conflicts. In the country of the Haudenosaunee, the basic principle of peace went further than the simple absence of conflict. They created an ordered society that has the capability of protecting people against abuse and, at the same time, is dedicated to a containment of hierarchy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Great Tree of Peace. The Haudenosaunee sought to carry the principles of peace far from the council fires, into every dwelling in the country of the Haudenosaunee. Thus does the Great Law establish more than a code of conduct—it is also the bearing point for the modern clans. It embodies the foundations of all the explanations and messages on wampum, of assigning titles to leaders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee raised their children from the cradleboard to be participants in the culture. The ways of the Haudenosaunee have always been powerfully spiritual in nature, and it is true that the government, the economy, everything that is Haudenosaunee has deep spiritual roots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The papers that follow are the position papers that were presented by the Haudenosaunee to the Non-Governmental Organizations of the United Nations in Geneva, Switzerland, in September 1977. The Non-Governmental Organizations had called for papers that describe the conditions of oppression suffered by Native people under three subject headings, and asked that supportive statements be given to the Sub-Commissions. The Haudenosaunee, the Six Nations Council at Onondaga, sent these three papers that constitute an abbreviated summary of our history.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Natural World peoples as the clearest indicator that human beings are in trouble on this planet. It is a call to a basic consciousness that has ancient roots and ultramodern, even futuristic, manifestations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is a statement that points to the fact that humans are abusing one another, that they are abusing the planet they live on, and that they are even abusing themselves. It is a message, certainly the first ever delivered to a world body, that identifies the process of that abuse as Western civilization as a whole way of life—and acknowledges the immense complexity implied by that statement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What is presented here is nothing less audacious than a cosmology of the industrialized world presented by the most politically powerful and independent non-Western political body surviving in North America. It is, in a way, the modern world through Pleistocene eyes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scholars and casual readers alike should question the significance, in the age of the neutron bomb, Watergate, and nuclear energy plant proliferation, of a statement by a North American Indian people. But there is probably some argument to be made for the appropriateness of such a statement at this time. Most of the world&#039;s professed traditions are fairly recent in origin. Islam is perhaps fifteen hundred years old; Christianity claims a two thousand year history; Judaism is perhaps two thousand years older than Christianity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But the Native people can probably lay claim to a tradition that reaches back to at least the end of the Pleistocene, and which, in all probability, goes back much farther than that.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is some evidence that humanoid creatures have been present on the Earth for at least two million years, and that humans who looked very much like us were in evidence in the Northern Hemisphere at least as long ago as the second interglacial period. People who are familiar with the Haudenosaunee beliefs will recognize that modern scientific evidence shows that the Native customs of today are not markedly different from those practiced by ancient peoples at least seventy thousand years ago. Indeed, if an Iroquois traditionalist were to seek a career in the study of Pleistocene Man, he may find that he already knows more about the most ancient belief systems than do the modern scholars.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Be that as it may, the Haudenosaunee position is derived from a philosophy that sees The People with historical roots that extend back tens of thousands of years. It is a geological kind of perspective, which sees modern man as an infant, occupying a very short space of time in an incredibly long spectrum. It is the perspective of the oldest elder looking into the affairs of a young child and seeing that he is committing incredibly destructive folly. It is, in short, the statement of a people who are ageless but who trace their history as a people to the very beginning of life. And they are speaking, in this instance, to a world that dates back its existence from a little over five hundred years ago, and perhaps, in many cases, much more recently than that.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And it is, to our knowledge, the very first such statement to be issued by a Native nation. What follows are not research products of psychologists, historians, or anthropologists. The papers that follow are the first authentic analysis of the modern world ever committed to writing by an official body of Native people.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Spiritualism: The Highest Form of Political Consciousness ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== The Haudenosaunee Message to the Western World ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee, or the Six Nations Iroquois Confederacy, has existed on this land since the beginning of human memory. Our culture is among the most ancient, continuously existing cultures in the world. We still remember the earliest doings of human beings. We remember the original instructions of the Creators of Life on this place we call Ionkhi&#039;nisténha onhwéntsia—Mother Earth. We are the spiritual guardians of this place. We are the Onkwehon:we—the Real People.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the beginning, we were told that the human beings who walk about the Earth have been provided with all the things necessary for life. We were instructed to carry a love for one another, and to show a great respect for all the beings of this Earth. We are shown that our life exists with the tree life, that our well-being depends on the well-being of the vegetable life, that we are close relatives of the four-legged beings. In our ways, spiritual consciousness is the highest form of politics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ours is a Way of Life. We believe that all living things are spiritual beings. Spirits can be expressed as energy forms manifested in matter. A blade of grass is an energy form manifested in matter—grass matter. The spirit of the grass is that unseen force that produces the species of grass, and it is manifest to us in the form of real grass.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All things of the world are real, material things. The Creation is a true, material phenomenon, and the Creation manifests itself to us through reality. The spiritual universe, then, is manifest to man as the Creation, the Creation that supports life. We believe that man is real, a part of Creation, and that his duty is to support life in conjunction with the other beings. That is why we call ourselves Onkwehon:we—Real People.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The original instructions direct that we who walk about on the Earth are to express great respect, an affection, and a gratitude toward all the spirits that create and support the many supporters of our own lives—the corn, beans, squash, the winds, the sun. When people cease to respect and express attitude for these many things, then all life will be destroyed, and human life on this planet will come to an end.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our roots are deep in the lands where we live. We have a great love for our country, for our birthplace is there. The soil is rich from the bones of thousands of our generations. Each of us was created in those lands, and it is our duty to take great care of them, because from these lands will spring the future generations of the Onkwehon:we. We walk about with a great respect, for the Earth is a very sacred place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We are not a people who demand or ask anything of the Creators of Life; instead, we give feelings and thanks that all the forces of life are still at work. We deeply understand our relationship to all living things. To this day, the territories we still hold are filled with trees, animals, and the other gifts of the Creation. In these places we still receive our nourishment from our Mother Earth.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have seen that not all people of the Earth show the same kind of respect for this world and its beings. The Indo-European people who have colonized our lands have shown little respect for the things that create and support life. We believe that these people ceased their respect for the world a long time ago. Many thousands of years ago, all the people of the world believed in the same Way of Life, that of harmony with the universe. All lived according to the Natural Ways.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Around ten thousand years ago, peoples who spoke Indo-European languages lived in the area that today we know as the Steppes of Russia. At that time, they were a Natural World people who lived off the land. They had developed agriculture, and it is said that they had begun the practice of animal domestication. It is not known that they were the first people in the world to practice animal domestication. The hunters and gatherers who roamed the area probably acquired animals from the agricultural people and adopted an economy based on the herding and breeding of animals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Herding and breeding of animals signaled a basic alteration in the relationship of humans to other life forms. It set into motion one of the true revolutions in human history. Until herding, humans depended on nature for the reproductive powers of the animal world. With the advent of herding, humans assumed the functions that had for all time been the functions of the spirits of the animals. Sometime after this happened, history records the first appearance of the social organization known as &amp;quot;patriarchy.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The area between the Tigris and Euphrates Rivers was the homeland, in ancient times, of various peoples, many of whom spoke Semitic languages. The Semitic people were among the first in the world to develop irrigation technology. This development led to the early development of towns, and eventually cities. The manipulation of the waters, another form of spirit life, represented another way in which humans developed a technology that reproduced a function of nature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within these cultures, stratified hierarchical social organization crystallized. The ancient civilizations developed imperialism, partly because of the very nature of cities. Cities are obviously population concentrations. Most importantly though, they are places that must import the material needs of this concentration from the countryside. This means that the Natural World must be subjugated, extracted from, and exploited in the interest of the city. To give order to this process, the Semitic world developed early codes of law. They also developed the idea of monotheism to serve as a spiritual model for their material and political organization.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Much of the history of the ancient world accounts the struggles between the Indo-Europeans and the Semitic peoples. Over a period of several millennia, the two cultures clashed and blended. By the second millennium BC, some Indo-Europeans, most specifically the Greeks, had adopted the practice of building cities, thus becoming involved in the process they named &amp;quot;civilization.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Both cultures developed technologies peculiar to civilizations. The Semitic peoples invented kilns, which enabled the creation of pottery for trade and the storage of surpluses. These early kilns eventually evolved into ovens that could generate enough heat to smelt metals, notably copper, tin, and bronze. The Indo-Europeans developed a way of smelting iron.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rome fell heir to these two cultures and become the place where the final meshing occurs. Rome is also the true birth place of Christianity. The process that has become the culture of the West is historically and linguistically a Semitic/Judeo-European culture, but has been commonly termed the Judeo-Christian tradition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Christianity was an absolutely essential element in the early development of this kind of technology. Christianity advocated only one God. It was a religion that imposed itself exclusive of all other beliefs. The local people of the European forests were a people who believed in the spirits of the forests, waters, hills, and the land. Christianity attacked those beliefs and effectively despiritualized the European world. The Christian peoples, who possessed superior weaponry and a need for expansion, were able to militarily subjugate the tribal peoples of Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The availability of iron led to the development of tools that could cut down the forest, the source of charcoal to make more tools. The newly cleared land was then turned by the newly developed iron plow that was, for the first time, pulled by horses. With that technology, many fewer people would work much more land, and many other people were effectively displaced to become soldiers and landless peasants. The rise of that technology ushered in the Feudal Age and eventually made possible the rise of new cities and growing trade. It also spelled the beginning of the end of the European forest, although that process took a long time to complete.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The eventual rise of cities and the concurrent rise of the European state created the thrust of expansion and a search for markets that led men, such as Columbus, to set sail across the Atlantic. The development of sailing vessels and navigation technologies made the European &amp;quot;discovery&amp;quot; of the Americas inevitable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Americas provided Europeans a vast new area for expansion and material exploitation. Initially, the Americas provided new materials and even finished materials for the developing world economy that was based on Indo-European technologies. European civilization has a history of rising and falling as its technologies reach their material and cultural limits. The finite natural world has always provided a kind of built-in contradiction to Western expansion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Indo-Europeans attacked every aspect of North America with unparalleled zeal. The Native people were ruthlessly destroyed because they were an unassimilable element to the civilizations of the West. The forests provided materials for larger ships, the land was fresh and fertile for agricultural surpluses, and some areas provided sources of slave labor for the conquering invaders. By the time of the Industrial Revolution in the mid-nineteenth century, North America was already a leader in the area of the development of extractive technology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The hardwood forests of the Northeast were not cleared for the purpose of providing farmlands. Those forests were destroyed to create charcoal for the fires of the iron smelters and blacksmiths. By the 1890s, the West had turned to coal, a fossil fuel, to provide the energy necessary for the many new forms of machinery that had been developed. During the first half of the twentieth century, oil had replaced coal as a source of energy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Western culture has been horribly exploitative and destructive of the Natural World. Over one hundred forty species of birds and animals were utterly destroyed since the European arrival in the Americas, largely because they were unusable in the eyes of the invaders. The forests were leveled, the waters polluted, the Native people subjected to genocide. The vast herds of herbivores were reduced to mere handfuls; the buffalo nearly became extinct. Western technology and the people who have employed it have been the most amazingly destructive forces in all of human history. No natural disaster has ever destroyed as much. Not even the Ice Ages counted as many victims.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But like the hardwood forests, the fossil fuels are also finite resources. As the second half of the twentieth century progressed, the people of the West began looking to other forms of energy to motivate their technology. Their eyes settled on atomic energy, a form of energy production that has by-products that are the most poisonous substances ever known to man.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today, man is facing the very survival of the human species. The way of life known as &amp;quot;Western Civilization&amp;quot; is on a death path, and its culture has no viable answers. When faced with the reality of its own destructiveness, Western civilization can only go forward into areas of more efficient destruction. The appearance of plutonium on this planet is the clearest of signals that our species is in trouble. It is a signal that most Westerners have chosen to ignore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The air is foul, the waters poisoned, the trees dying, the animals are disappearing. We think even the systems of weather are changing. Our ancient teaching warned us that if man interfered with the natural laws, these things would come to be. When the last of the Natural Way of Life is gone, all hope for human survival will be gone with it. And our Way of Life is fast disappearing, a victim of the destructive processes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The other position papers of the Haudenosaunee have outlined our analysis of economic and legal oppression. But our essential message to the world is a basic call to consciousness. The destruction of the Native cultures and people is the same process that has destroyed and is destroying life on this planet. The technologies and social systems that have destroyed the animals and the forest life are also destroying the Native people. And that process is Western civilization.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We know that there are many people in the world who can quickly grasp the intent of our message. But experience has taught us that there are few who are willing to seek out a method for moving toward any real change. But if there is to be a future for all beings on this planet, we must begin to seek the avenues of change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The processes of colonialism and imperialism that have affected the Haudenosaunee are but a microcosm of the processes affecting the world.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system of reservations employed against our people is a microcosm of the system of exploitation used against the whole world. Since the time of Marco Polo, the West has been refining a process that mystified the peoples of the Earth.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The majority of the world does not find its roots in Western culture or traditions. The majority of the world finds its roots in the Natural World, and it is the Natural World and the traditions of the Natural World that must prevail if we are to develop truly free and egalitarian societies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is necessary at this time to begin a process of critical analysis of the West&#039;s historical processes, to seek out the actual nature of the roots of the exploitative and oppressive conditions that are forced upon humanity. At the same time, as we gain an understanding of those processes, we must reinterpret that history to the people of the world. It is the people of the West, ultimately, who are most oppressed and exploited. They are burdened by the weight of centuries of racism, sexism, and ignorance, which has rendered their people insensitive to the true nature of their lives.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We must all consciously and continuously challenge every model, every program, and every process that the West tries to force upon us. Paulo Freire wrote in his book Pedagogy of the Oppressed that the oppressed imitate the oppressor, and by such actions try to gain relief from the oppressive condition. We must learn to resist that response to oppression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The people who are living on this planet need to break with the concept of human liberation and begin to see liberation as something that needs to be extended to the whole of the Natural World. What is needed is the liberation of all the things that support life—the air, the waters, the trees—all the things that support the sacred Web of Life.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We feel that the Native peoples of the Western Hemisphere can continue to contribute to the survival potential of the human species. The majority of our peoples still live in accordance with the traditions that find their roots in the Mother Earth. But the Native peoples have need of a forum where our voice can be heard. And we need alliances with other peoples of the world to assist in our struggle to regain and maintain our ancestral lands and to protect the Way of Life we follow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We know that this is a very difficult task. Many nation states may feel threatened by the position that the protection and liberation of Natural World peoples and cultures represent a progressive direction that must be integrated into the political strategies of people who seek to uphold the dignity of man. But that position is growing in strength, and it represents a necessary strategy in the evolution of progressive thought.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The traditional Native peoples hold the key to the reversal of the processes in Western civilization that hold the promise of unimaginable future suffering and destruction. Spiritualism is the highest form of political consciousness. And we, the Native peoples of the Western Hemisphere, are among the world&#039;s surviving proprietors of that kind of consciousness. We are here to impart that message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Obvious Fact of Our Continuing Existence ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Legal History of the Haudenosaunee ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since the beginning of human time, the Haudenosaunee have occupied the distinct territories that we call our homelands. That occupation has been both organized and continuous. We have long defined the borders of our country, have long maintained the exclusive use-right of the areas within those borders—and have used those territories as the ethnic and cultural definitions of our nation. The Haudenosaunee are a distinct people, with our own laws, customs, territories, political organization, and economy. In short, the Haudenosaunee, or Six Nations, fits in every way every definition of nationhood.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ours is one of the most complex social-political structures still functioning in the world. The Haudenosaunee Council is one of the most ancient, continuously functioning governments anywhere on this planet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our society is one of the most complex anywhere. From our social and political institutions has come inspiration for some of the institutions and political philosophies of the modern world. The philosophies of the socialist world, too, are to some extent traceable to European contact with the Haudenosaunee. Lewis Henry Morgan noted the economic structure of the Haudenosaunee, which he termed both primitive and communistic. Karl Marx used Morgan&#039;s observations for the development of a model for a classless, post capitalist society. The modern world has been greatly influenced by the fact of our existence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It may seem strange, at this time, that we are here, asserting the obvious fact of our continuing existence. For countless centuries, the fact of our existence was unquestioned, and for all honest human beings, it remains unquestioned today. We have existed since time immemorial. We have always conducted our own affairs from our territories under our own laws and customs. We have never, under those laws and customs, willingly or fairly surrendered either our territories or our freedoms. Never, in the history of the Haudenosaunee, have our people or our government sworn allegiance to a European sovereign. In that simple fact lies the roots of our oppression as a people and the purpose of our journey here before the world community.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The problems incurred in the recent &amp;quot;legal history&amp;quot; of the Haudenosaunee began long before European contact with Native people. It began, at least, with the rise of a system called feudalism in Europe, for the only law that the colonizing countries of Europe ever recognized was feudal law, a fact that they have obscured from their own people as well as from Native people for many centuries. That fact, however, remains the essential reality of the legal relationships that exist between Native peoples and European societies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Feudal society in Europe appears to have arisen as the result of a number of conditions that existed following the dissolution of the Roman Empire. It was based on a system by which rulers or warrior castes became strong enough to demand and extract fealty from warriors. There arose, generally, an administrative center, usually a castle, and around these were agricultural people who were usually protected from outside aggression by their &amp;quot;lord,&amp;quot; the sovereign of the manor. It appears likely that new technologies arose that created economies that made the feudal society both possible and perhaps even inevitable in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The feudal lord often held dictatorial power over his &amp;quot;subjects,&amp;quot; especially the peasants. Military protection was necessary because of the continuous state of &amp;quot;fending&amp;quot; among the various lords. The &amp;quot;peaceful people,&amp;quot; or peasants, were caught in the middle. The land and everything on it, including the animals, plants, and people, were under the domination or dominion of the feudal &amp;quot;lords.&amp;quot; This lord demanded loyalty and a part of the peasant&#039;s crops, as well as some of his or her labor. Feudalism could be far more brutal and humiliating than is outlined in many histories. Some feudal lords exercised what was called &amp;quot;the right of the first night&amp;quot;—a custom that referred to the right of a lord to a peasant&#039;s bride.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prior to the rise of feudalism, it is fair to state that most of the agricultural people of Europe were local tribesmen of various kinds. Feudalism imposed the concept of sovereign, dictatorial rulers whose rule was imposed by military might and gave rise to the true European peasantry. The crystallization of centralized executive power served to separate civilized societies from primitive societies. It is immaterial whether such controls are located in a feudal castle or in the executive offices of the capitals of nation states. The appearance of the hierarchical state marks the transition of food cultivators in general to the more specific definition contained in the concepts of peasantry. When the cultivator becomes dependent upon and integrated into a society in which he is subject to the demands of people who are defined by a class other than his own, he becomes appropriately termed a peasant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The state of a medieval European peasant was not a pleasant one. Peasants have no rights, save those granted by their lord. They cannot own the land as a people. Only the sovereign owns or possesses sovereignty. Peasants were often treated as chattel. They were bought, sold, and inherited with the land. They were a people who had been dispossessed of their freedom. At some points in history, the tribal peoples of Europe became peasants through a combination of forces, the most direct being military pressure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A peasant is not a member of a true community of people. His society is incomplete without the town or city. It is trade with the town or city, an economic relationship, that defines the early stages of peasantry. As trade becomes more necessary, for whatever reasons, the tribesman becomes increasingly less of a tribesman and more of a peasant. The process is neither immediate nor is it necessarily absolute, but to the degree that a tribesman becomes dependent, he becomes less of a tribesman.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To a great extent, the process by which people lost their freedom in Europe was economic in nature. The medieval castles were military forts and functioned as kinds of storehouses, but they also developed into trade centers and eventually towns. In the early stages of feudalism, the agricultural worker &amp;quot;traded&amp;quot; his freedom for security from military aggression. But increasingly, over the centuries, a primary function of the medieval town became that of the marketplace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;It is the market, in one form or another, that pulls out from the compact social relations of self-contained primitive communities some parts of men&#039;s doings and puts people into fields of economic activity that are increasingly independent of the rest of what goes on in local life. The local traditional and moral world and the wider and more impersonal world of the market are in principle distinct, and opposed to each other.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The European &amp;quot;discovery&amp;quot; of North America led to the transposition of European medieval law and customs to the Americas. To be sure, Spanish medieval law differed in some respects from that of France, and both differed in some respects from that of England, but an understanding of Medieval Europe is essential to an analysis of European-Haudenosaunee legal history and also to any analysis of the process of colonialism. Medieval Europe is the period of the rise of growing centralization and anarchy; therefore Indians did not have government at all. And THEREFORE Europeans could not have been doing anything wrong—were in fact performing a noble mission—by bringing government and civilization to the poor savages. Today, as in medieval times, the Judeo-European government follows a &amp;quot;might makes right&amp;quot; policy. Colonialism is a process often misunderstood and misinterpreted. It is a policy that has long survived the medieval period in which it was born. Many Western institutions are in fact colonial institutions of Western culture. The churches, for example, operate in virtually the same manner as did the feudal lords. First, they identify a people whose loyalty they wish to secure in an expansionist effort. Then they charter a group to conduct a &amp;quot;mission.&amp;quot; If that group is successful, they become, in effect, the spiritual sovereigns or dictators of those whose loyalty they command. That process in organized Christianity may actually be more ancient than the process of political colonialism described here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Modern multinational corporations operate in much the same manner. They identify a market or an area that has the resources they want. They obtain a charter, or some form of protection, from a Western government, and they send what amounts to a colonizing force into the area. If they successfully penetrate the area, that area becomes a sort of economic colony of the multinational. The greatest resistance to that form of penetration has been mounted by local peoples.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In North America, educational institutions operate under the same colonial process. Schools are chartered by a sovereign (such as the state, or the Bureau of Indian Affairs) to penetrate the Native community. The purpose in doing so is to integrate the Native people into society as workers and consumers, the Industrial Society&#039;s version of peasants. The sovereign recognizes, and practically allows, no other form of socializing institution for the young. As in the days of the medieval castle the sovereign demands absolute fealty. Under this peculiar legal system, the Western sovereign denies the existence of those whose allegiance he cannot obtain. Some governments have created official statuses. In the United States, the colonizer has created two categories of Native peoples: federally recognized and non-federally recognized. In more recent years, the government has taken to a policy of nonrecognition of an entity entitled &amp;quot;Urban Indians.&amp;quot; In Canada there exist four legal definitions of Native people. They are divided into &amp;quot;status,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;non-status,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;metis,&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;enfranchised.&amp;quot; Both countries carry on the policy of &amp;quot;Indians and Eskimos,&amp;quot; as though Eskimos were a separate people of the Western Hemisphere.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The United States and Canada practice blatant colonialism in the areas affecting political institutions of the Native peoples. In 1924, Canada&#039;s new Indian Act established the legal sanction for the imposition of neocolonial &amp;quot;elective system&amp;quot; governments within the Native peoples&#039; territories. In the United States, the same goal was accomplished with the passage of the 1934 Indian Reorganization Act (IRA). Both pieces of legislation provided compulsory, chartered, political colonies among Native peoples. These &amp;quot;elective systems&amp;quot; owe their existence and fealty to the United States and Canada, and not to the Native peoples. They are, by definition, colonies that create classes of political peasants. They are governments only to the degree an external social caste allows them to be governments. They are, in most places in Native peoples&#039; territories, the only forms of government recognized by the colonizers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This concept of illegitimacy is then interpreted into official government policy. The colonizing governments have consistently denied the existence of the Haudenosaunee government. They have consistently asserted that the traditional chiefs have no authority. This has been done on the grounds that the U.S. Congress cannot commit fraud and that the courts cannot question Congress&#039; political judgment, although the United States courts find congressional acts in other areas of the law to be unconstitutional regularly. Because the Haudenosaunee refused to sell the land, the United States simply refused to recognize our government. Instead, they recognized those colonized individuals who would agree to sell the land and whose loyalties lie with Washington. In 1848, the United States simply recognized an &amp;quot;elective system&amp;quot; on the Seneca Nation lands, creating a colonial government on the largest of our remaining territories in what is called by the colonizers &amp;quot;New York State.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There followed a long list of moves by the United States to exterminate the Haudenosaunee. There were treaties that entirely dispossessed, for all practical purposes, the Cayuga and Oneida Nations in their ancestral lands. There were treaties, such as the Treaty of 1797, which recognized the sale by individuals of the territory of the Kanienkehaka, an area of nine million acres of land exchanged for the sum of one thousand dollars. There were attempts from 1821 to 1842 to remove the Haudenosaunee from the territories called &amp;quot;New York&amp;quot; by the colonists to other areas now called Wisconsin and Kansas. These efforts resulted in the displacement of some of our people to those areas. In 1851, there was an attempt to evict the Seneca people from their lands at Tonawanda.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1856, there was an attempt to divide the Haudenosaunee lands into severally under the Dawes Act, an attempt that was not entirely successful. In 1924, the United States passed The Indian Citizenship Act (ICA), which attempted to give United States citizenship to all Native people. The Haudenosaunee strongly rejected the concept that we could ever be United States citizens. But the feudal laws of the colonizers have been relentless.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also in 1924, Canada militarily invaded our territories on the Grand River and forcibly installed a colonial government there. The episode was repeated by Canada in 1934 on our territories at the Thames River community of Oneida.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1948 and 1950, Congress passed laws giving civil and criminal jurisdiction to New York State, although Congress was never given such jurisdiction by the Haudenosaunee. In 1964, Congress passed Public Law 88-533, the Kinzua Dam Act, which resulted in the flooding of almost all of the habitable lands of the Seneca at Alleghany, and virtually destroyed the Native communities and culture there. That act also provided for the termination of the Seneca Nation, a process that would have ended even the colonial government there, and which would have moved the denial of our existence a little closer to reality.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first contact with a Western government came in 1609 when a French military expedition under Samuel Champlain murdered some Mohawk people along the lake that now bears his name. Later, when the Dutch came, the first treaty (or agreement) that we made with a European power was the Two Row, which clarified our position—that we are a distinct, free, and sovereign people. The Dutch accepted that agreement. But the European nations have never honored that agreement. Many times France attempted to dominate the Haudenosaunee through conquest, and England often used every means possible, including coercion, threats, and military force, to extend her sovereignty over us. Each time we resisted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The United States entered into solemn treaties with the Haudenosaunee, and each time has ignored virtually each and every provision of the treaties that guarantee our rights as a separate nation. Many sections of the treaties that refer to land cessions, fraudulently obtained, have validity in the eyes of the United States courts and governments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The soil for the colonization of the Haudenosaunee territory is found in legal fiction in the United States Constitution. That document purports to give power to &amp;quot;regulate Commerce with foreign nations and among the several States, and with Indian tribes.&amp;quot; Contrary to every principle of international law, Congress has expanded that section to an assertion of &amp;quot;plenary&amp;quot; power, a doctrine that asserts absolute authority over our territories. This assertion has been repeatedly urged upon our people, although we have never agreed to that relationship and we have never been conquered in warfare. The Haudenosaunee are vassals to no people—we are a free nation, and we have never surrendered our rights as a free people.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the beginning of its existence, the United States has conducted a policy of terror in the Haudenosaunee territory. Colonial agents entered our country between 1784 and 1842 and returned to Washington with treaties for cessions of land fraudulently obtained with persons not authorized to make land transfers. The Haudenosaunee Council, which is the only legitimate body authorized to conduct land transactions, never signed any agreements surrendering the territories. The United States occupied the lands under a pretext that there were no acts that justified war measures. When the Haudenosaunee gathered evidence to prove that the treaties were fraudulent and therefore illegal under any interpretation of law, the United States courts countered by inventing the Political Question Doctrine. This doctrine basically says that the courts cannot question Congress&#039; political judgment, although the courts find congressional acts in other areas of the law to be unconstitutional regularly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to these legal kinds of colonization, the Haudenosaunee have been subjected to every other kind of colonization imaginable. Churches, school systems, and every form of Western penetration have made political, economic, and cultural peasants of some of our populations. The continuing denial of our political existence has been accomplished by an almost overwhelming psychological, economic, and spiritual attack by the colonial institutions of the West.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For over three hundred years, our people have been under a virtual state of siege. During this entire time we have never once given up our struggle. Our strategies have, of necessity, changed. But the will and determination to continue on remains the same. Throughout these years, European historians have recorded the position of the Haudenosaunee.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During the 1920s, one of our leaders, a man named Deskaheh, came to this city to seek help for his people. At that time, the international body that existed did not truly represent the world community. Many cultures and nations were not recognized. Now, years later, we have returned, and our message remains the same.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our elders have watched the rebirth of this international institution. In 1949, a delegation of the Haudenosaunee attended the foundation ceremony for the United Nations building in New York City. In 1972, our people journeyed to Sweden to take part in an international conference on the environment and ecology. All through these times we have taken notice of the changes that have occurred within this institution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now we find ourselves in Geneva, Switzerland, once again. For those of us present, and the many at home, we have assumed the duty of carrying on our peoples&#039; struggle. Invested in the names we carry today are the lives of thousands of generations of both the past and the future. On their behalf, also, we ask that the Non-Governmental Organizations join us in our struggle to obtain our full rights and protection under the rules of international law and the World Community.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Policies of Oppression in the Name of &amp;quot;Democracy&amp;quot; ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Economic History of the Haudenosaunee ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee, People of the Longhouse, who are known to many Europeans as the Six Nations Iroquois, have inhabited their territories since time immemorial. During the time prior to the coming of the Europeans, it is said that ours were a happy and prosperous people. Our lands provided abundantly for our needs. Our people lived long, healthy, and productive lives. Before the Europeans came, we were an affluent people, rich in the gifts of our country. We were a strong people in both our minds and bodies. Throughout most of that time, we lived in peace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prior to the arrival of the colonists, we were a people who lived by hunting and gathering, and practiced a form of agriculture that was not labor intensive. The economy of the people was an extremely healthful Way of Life, and our peoples were very healthy—among the finest athletes in the world. There were some, in those times, who lived to be one hundred twenty years and more, and our runners were unexcelled for speed and endurance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Among our people we refer to our culture as &amp;quot;Ongwe Honwekah.&amp;quot; This refers to a Way of Life that is peculiar to the Haudenosaunee. It is virtually impossible for us to recount, specifically, the history of &amp;quot;Haudenosaunee economics.&amp;quot; As will become evident, our economy, that way in which our people manage their resources and the relationship of that management to our traditional society, are processes completely bound to other aspects of our culture. Our economy is unlike that of Western peoples. We believe that the things in the world were created by what the English language forces us to call &amp;quot;Spiritual Beings,&amp;quot; including those that we call the Creator. All things in the world belong to the Creator and the spirits of the world. We also believe that we are required to live in respect of the gift of life.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In accordance with our ways, we are required to provide for our leaders, those whom the Anglo people insist are &amp;quot;chiefs,&amp;quot; and our leaders are both political and spiritual leaders. They are leaders of many feasts and ceremonies that require the distribution of great wealth. As spiritual and political leaders, they provide a kind of economic condition. To become a political leader, a person is required to be a spiritual leader; and to become a spiritual leader, a person must be extraordinarily generous in terms of material goods.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our leaders, in fact, are leaders of categories of large extended families. Those large extended families function as economic units in a Way of Life that has as its base the Domestic Mode of Production. Before the colonists came, we had our own means of production and distribution adequate to meet all the peoples&#039; needs. We would have been unable to exist as nations were it not so.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We were a people of a great forest. That forest was a source of great wealth. It was a place in which was to be found huge hardwoods, an unimaginable abundance and variety of nuts, berries, and herbs. In addition to these, the rivers teemed with fish and the forest and meadows abounded with game. It was, in fact, a kind of Utopia, a place where people were happy and healthy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our traditions were such that we were careful not to allow our populations to rise to numbers that would overtax the other forms of life. We practiced strict forms of conservation. Our culture is based on a principle that directs us to constantly think about the welfare of seven generations into the future. Our belief in this principle acts as a restraint to the suffering in the future. To this end, our people took only as many animals as were needed to meet our needs. Not until the arrival of the colonists did the wholesale slaughter of animals occur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We feel that many people will be confused when we say that ours is a spiritual Way of Life, and that our economy cannot be separated from the many aspects of our culture. The Haudenosaunee have no concept of private property. This concept would be a contradiction to a people who believe that the Earth belongs to the Creator. Property is an idea by which people can be excluded from access to lands or other means of producing a livelihood. That idea would destroy our culture, which requires that every individual live in service to the Spiritual Ways and The People. That idea (property) would produce slavery. The acceptance of the idea of property would produce leaders whose functions would favor excluding people from access to property, and they would cease to perform their functions as leaders of our societies and distributors of goods.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before the colonists came, we had no consciousness about a concept of commodities. Everything, even the things we make, belong to the Creators of Life and are to be returned ceremonially, and in reality, to the owners. Our people live a simple life, one unencumbered by the need for endless material commodities. The fact that their needs are few means that all the peoples&#039; needs are easily met. It is also true that our means of distribution is an eminently fair process, one in which all of the people share in all the material wealth all of the time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our Domestic Mode of Production has a number of definitions that are culturally specific. Our peoples&#039; economy requires a community of people and is not intended to define an economy based on the self-sufficient nuclear family. Some modern economists estimate that in most parts of the world the isolated nuclear family cannot produce enough to survive in a Domestic Mode of Production. In any case, that particular mode of subsistence, by our cultural definition, is not an economy at all.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ours was a wealthy society. No one suffered from want. All had the right to food, clothing, and shelter. All shared in the bounty of the spiritual ceremonies and the Natural World. No one stood in any material relationship of power over anyone else. No one could deny anyone access to the material goods they needed. All in all, before the colonists came, ours was a beautiful and rewarding Way of Life.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The colonists arrived with many institutions and strategies designed to destroy the Way of Life of the People of the Longhouse. In 1609, Samuel de Champlain led a French military expedition that attacked a part of the Mohawk people on the lake now named &amp;quot;Lake Champlain.&amp;quot; Champlain arrived in search of wealth and was specifically interested in generating some kind of trade in beaver pelts with the Algonquin people of the area. He demonstrated his firearms to them, letting them see, for the first time, the power of guns.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Champlain, accompanied by his newly found business partners, marched into the center of Mohawk territory. This war party encountered about two hundred Mohawks. The first volley of gunfire killed three men, and the second created such confusion that the Mohawks retreated, leaving twelve men who were taken captive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The period of warfare that followed this incident has come to be known as the &amp;quot;Beaver Wars.&amp;quot; The introduction of trade in beaver pelts inevitably triggered a long series of colonial wars. It represented the escalation of disputes among neighbors into a full-scale struggle for survival in the forests of the Native people of North America.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The European penetration affected every facet of the Native Way of Life from the very moment of contact. The natural economies, cultures, politics, and military affairs became totally altered. Nations learned that to be without firearms meant physical annihilation. To be without access to beaver pelts meant no means to buy firearms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trade in beaver pelts, and the now necessary weaponry, introduced factors never before encountered by the Native people. Trade meant that long routes over which goods were to be transported had to be secured. The only way that was possible was for the entire area to be in friendly hands. Any potential disruptor of the trade routes must either be pacified or eliminated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the introduction of firearms, war became a deadly business. It was made more deadly because the European strategy of economic penetration was to stimulate warfare among the Native nations to determine which would have the goods for trade. Out of necessity, to protect themselves from annihilation, the People of the Longhouse entered the Europeans&#039; beaver trade. The pelts were used to buy more firearms and goods that made it possible for more men to trap more beaver more efficiently. The marketplaces of France, Holland, and England were eager for the &amp;quot;New World&amp;quot; merchandise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shortly after the encounter on Lake Champlain, the Haudenosaunee began trading with Holland, which had established posts along the Hudson River. A large part of the trade involved firearms. French historians recount that the People of the Longhouse were very skillful at the strategies of battle, and within a short time the Algonquin people were defeated. Their defeat was aided by the fact that the French had not taken seriously their pledges of aid to the Algonquin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So intense became the need for European goods, especially firearms, that by 1640 the beaver were becoming scarce in the Haudenosaunee territories. Pressure from the newly created European frontiers was steadily increasing. Warfare was also common between the various Colonizers. The Haudenosaunee were well aware of what was occurring to the east. The Dutch, shortly after their arrival, began a series of genocidal wars that ended in the utter annihilation of the Native peoples of the Lower Hudson River Valley. In New England, the Pequot Nation was nearly obliterated by the Puritan and English colonists there.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Knowledge of these massacres greatly influenced Haudenosaunee defense policy. To the east were the Dutch and English, whose presence was necessary as a source of firearms. Yet, they represented a constant potential of movement of their frontiers westward into the Longhouse. To the north was the colony of France, which was supplying arms to the western Native nations. France also threatened to gain a monopoly over the beaver trade, which was increasingly centered to the north and west of Lake Erie and Lake Ontario.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
France made repeated attempts to send missionaries, especially Jesuits, among the nations of the Haudenosaunee. These missions were the major tool of propaganda for the European nations. Missionaries then, as today, were expected to carry more than the message of Christianity. They served as lay ambassadors of their culture, splitting off individuals from families, families from villages, and villages from nations, one by one. Some priests even served as the leaders of troops going into battle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The missionaries made persistent attacks on the economic structures of the People of the Longhouse. They specifically attacked the spiritual ceremonies as &amp;quot;pagan&amp;quot; and thereby sought to end the practice of giveaways and public feasts. In addition, they sought to break the power of the clans by causing a division that would split the people into nuclear households. The churches, especially in colonial practice, take on their feudal roles as economic institutions. Among Natural World people, they are the most dangerous agents of destruction. They invariably seek to destroy the spiritual/economic bonds of the people to the forests, land, and animals. They spread both ideologies and technologies that make people slaves to the extractive system that defines colonialism.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1704, the first Anglican missionaries were sent by England to the Mohawks living along the Mohawk River. In 1710, a delegation of Mohawk chiefs received an invitation from Queen Anne. But the missionaries also brought beyond chapel, gifts they needed a fort, and to propagate the faith, they needed a school. The warlike European kingdoms were constantly fighting among themselves. There were three wars during the eighteenth century just between France and England: Queen Anne&#039;s War (1702-1713), King George&#039;s War (1744 to 1748), and the French and Indian War, known to the European world as the War of the Spanish Succession (1759 to 1763). It is clear from the records of the time that the People of the Longhouse remained neutral throughout these conflicts, although individuals on the road to assimilation, such as the Anglicized Mohawk who had been coerced into roles as British peasants, could be called on to aid the colonizers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If France was unsuccessful in her attempts at military penetration of the territory of the Longhouse, England was far more successful in her social and religious colonization of the eastern part of our territories. William Johnson was an Irish immigrant who became famous for his influence over certain Mohawks. As agent of the British Crown, he maintained an embassy as an operation base close to the Mohawk country. He took several Native women as concubines and had several children by them, none of whom he ever recognized as his heirs. His position was known as British Superintendent of Indian Affairs for the Northern Department. He is widely credited, by European historians, as a successful manipulator of events and developments on the frontier during his tenure. In today&#039;s context, Johnson would be working as an ambassador to a foreign country, executing simultaneously diplomatic, military, intelligence, and foreign trade operations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During his tenure, he engineered the establishment of a beachhead from which the colony could move westward to broaden the colony.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Throughout this period, many other Native peoples had been moving into our territories to gain some respite from the colonial onslaught. Far to the south, in the colonized area known as the Carolinas, the Tuscarora were faced with imminent destruction. In their drive to gain some more land and economic advantage, English Colonizers were using the same techniques that were being employed in the northeast. In 1713, the dispossessed Tuscaroras withdrew from their homelands and sought protection in the territories of the Haudenosaunee. They were not the only people who were displaced. Delawares, Tuteloes, Shawnees, and others fled to the Haudenosaunee lands seeking peace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Peace, however, was not to be. At the approach of the American Revolution, the Haudenosaunee did everything possible to remain neutral. Mohawk lands along the Susquehanna and Mohawk Rivers were increasingly encroached upon by the British settlers, including Johnson himself. By the spring of 1765, the carefully managed Longhouse environment was in trouble, as ignorant and destructive peasant settlers almost eradicated deer herds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There was so much trouble with the peasant settlers that the Mohawks, who had so generously allowed them to share their lands, were actually considering moving westward into Oneida territories to gain some peace. By the spring of 1765, many Mohawks had already been displaced and were living as refugees among the other nations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
William Johnson was a master public relations man for the King. He would, on the one hand, apologize for the behavior of the frontiersmen and urge the Mohawks to be patient, and on the other hand encourage more settlers to move into the Mohawk lands. He would make a great show of protecting Haudenosaunee interests, and in that way encourage the People of the Longhouse to seek a resolution at the bargaining table, where they invariably ended up trading land to gain a temporary peace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the decline of France, and the increasing decline in the importance of trade, the settler bourgeoisie of the Anglo colonies cast an increasingly envious eye on the lands of the Longhouse. Still, our military power was formidable, and our resolve was to remain neutral.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The policy of England, however, was to involve the Haudenosaunee in the war. To accomplish this, they resorted to bribery, trickery, false propaganda, and emotional appeal. The Haudenosaunee continued its policy of neutrality throughout. Both the colonists and the &amp;quot;loyalists&amp;quot; entered our territories in search of mercenaries. The loyalist strategy was the more successful. They were able to draw some of our people into a battle with the revolting colonists.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Treaty of Paris in 1783, which ended the war, made no provision, at least in writing, for the Native nations that the British Crown had solemnly promised to protect. Thus the representatives of the People of the Longhouse held an international treaty meeting with the new federation, called the United States of America, in September of 1784. The U.S. demanded huge cessions of territory, especially from the Senecas. The warriors who had been delegated to the meeting eventually signed the treaty. However, they had not been authorized to commit the Haudenosaunee without consulting them. For a time, the terms of the treaty were not known, as the U.S. would not provide the Haudenosaunee with a copy of the document. As many Native people know, to their regret, signing a treaty and the ratification of a treaty are two separate acts, each necessary before a treaty becomes valid. Although the U.S. Congress ratified the treaty, the legislative council of the Haudenosaunee met at Buffalo Creek and renounced the agreement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Somehow the United States takes the position that the Haudenosaunee ceased to exist by the year 1784, although the Longhouse has continued to this day. There is ample evidence that all the nations continued to participate in the matters of the Great Council, the legislative body of the Confederacy. None of the nations of the League has ever declared themselves separate from the Confederation. The Oneidas, whose reputed allegiance to the United States was based on the existence of Oneida mercenaries, continued to send their delegates to the Council, and the Tuscarora remain firmly attached to the League. The Onondagas, Senecas, Cayugas, and Mohawks continue to hold their positions within the League. Although the policy of the dispossessing settler regimes began at first contact, dispossession took a number of approaches: the &amp;quot;just war&amp;quot; was a strategy by which elimination by fire and sword was justified. That was followed by the Treaty Period, in which Native nations were &amp;quot;induced&amp;quot; to sell their lands and move onward. The Treaty Period was in full swing at the beginning of the nineteenth century, and by 1815, the government of New York was agitating for the removal of Native peoples from the state for their own goods. The Trail of Tears was removal to Oklahoma. New York State was lobbying for a treaty in 1838 that was intended to remove the Haudenosaunee, who were on lands that the state wanted, away to an area that were later, the Removal Policy was eventually abandoned due in part to the bad press received during the Cherokee removal. During the process of the Cherokee removal, thousands of Cherokee men, women, children, and elders were subjected to neglect that caused them to die of exposure, starvation, and disease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1871, the U.S. Congress passed an act that included a clause that treaties would no longer be made with &amp;quot;Indian Nations.&amp;quot; It was at this point that United States policy toward Native people began to soften to a new strategy. Reports to Congress began to urge that the Native people be assimilated into U.S. society as quickly as possible. The policy of fire and sword simply began to become less popular among an increasingly significant percentage of the United States population. The principal hindrance to the assimilation of the Native people, according to its most vocal adherents, was the Indian land base. The Native land base was held in common, and this was perceived as an uncivilized and un-American practice. The assimilationists urged that if every Indian family owned its own farmstead, they could more readily acquire &amp;quot;civilized&amp;quot; traits. Thus the Dawes Act of 1887 ordered the Native nations stripped of their land base, resulting in the transfer of millions of acres to European hands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There was consistent pressure in the New York legislature to &amp;quot;civilize&amp;quot; the Haudenosaunee. To accomplish this, all vestiges of Haudenosaunee nationality needed to be destroyed. This is the nineteenth century origin of the policy to &amp;quot;educate&amp;quot; the Indian to be culturally European. It was thought that when the Indian was successfully Europeanized, he would no longer be distinct and separate, and that there would no longer be an Indigenous people with their own customs and economy. At that point, the Indian could simply be declared to have assimilated into the United States or Canadian society. The net effect would dispense with the entire concept of Native nations, and that would extinguish the claims of those nations to their lands. The report of the Whipple Committee to the New York legislature in 1858 was clear: &amp;quot;Exterminate the Tribe.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1924, the Canadian government &amp;quot;abolished&amp;quot; Haudenosaunee government at the Grand River territory. The Oneida and Akwesasne territories were invaded and occupied by Canadian troops in order to establish neocolonial &amp;quot;elective systems&amp;quot; in the name of democracy. Also in 1924, the United States government passed legislation declaring all American Indians to be United States citizens. The 1924 Citizenship Act was an attempt to deny the existence of Native nations and the rights of these Native nations to their lands. The denial of the existence of Native nations is a way of legitimizing the colonists&#039; claims to the lands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This concept is furthered by the imposition of non-Native forms of government. This also serves to fulfill the colonizer&#039;s need to destroy any semblance of sovereignty. The actual process for taking lands can be accomplished when the Native nation no longer exists in its original context—when it is less of a nation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With all semblance of a Native nation&#039;s original context destroyed, Canada and the United States can rationalize that integration has occurred. With this rationale in hand, both governments have set out to enact their final solutions to the &amp;quot;Indian Problem.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee vigorously objected to the Citizenship Act and maintains to this day that the People of the Longhouse are not citizens of Canada or the United States, but are citizens of their own nations of the League.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Termination Acts of the 1950s were efforts to simply declare that the Native nations no longer exist and to appropriate their lands. The acts were so disastrous that they caused something of a national scandal. &amp;quot;St. Regis,&amp;quot; the European name for Akwesasne, was one of our territories targeted by the Bureau of Indian Affairs (BIA) as &amp;quot;ready for integration.&amp;quot; The BIA based its recommendation on the fact that many Mohawks had acquired at least some of the material conditions that made their community outwardly indistinguishable from the white communities. In fact, however, Akwesasne was, and is, very different from the small towns in the area surrounding it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Termination submerged as an official policy in the late 1960s. But termination is simply a means to an end. The objective is the economic exploitation of a people and their lands. The taking of lands and the denial and destruction of Native nations are concrete and undeniable elements in colonization and the destruction of the culture and Native economy serve to force Native people into roles as industrial workers, just as in the nineteenth century the same processes forced Native people in the U.S. and Canada into roles as landless peasants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The effect of all these policies has been the destruction of the culture and therefore the economy of the People of the Longhouse. The traditional economy has been largely replaced by the colonial economy, which serves the interests of the colonizers. The colonial economy is one that extracts labor and materials from the people of the Haudenosaunee for the benefit of the multi-national corporate and the neocolonial elective systems all work towards these goals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today, we are an economically poor people. Few of us can afford to support the spiritual ceremonies that for centuries formed the foundations of the economy of our people. Few people can participate in the Domestic Mode of Production that defines our culture and more systematic attempts by the colonizer&#039;s education system, and by the governments on our territories, have placed neocolonial governments on some of the Haudenosaunee lands. The Canadian and United States governments have created a dependent class of potential leadership of the Haudenosaunee by administering programs and actively recruiting people away from the Domestic Mode of Production. The traditional economy is under heavy attack from many directions, and all else is the political oppression, the social oppression, the economic oppression, all have the same face. These are the tools of genocide in North America.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Genocide is alive and well in the territories of the Haudenosaunee. Its technicians are in Washington, Ottawa, and Albany, and its agents control the schools, the churches, and the neocolonial &amp;quot;elective system&amp;quot; offices found in our territories. The oppression of the Haudenosaunee has taken its toll—but the Haudenosaunee continues to meet in Council, and its members are on the rise. The Haudenosaunee, the People of the Longhouse, continue to resist the economic effects of the conditions we face. But, those strategies that we develop must be accompanied on sufficient lands within the ancient boundaries of our territories. This can only be accomplished through a revitalization of our social and political institutions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We are living in a period of time during which we expect to see great changes in the economy of the colonizers. The imperial powers of the world appear to be facing successful resistance to expansion in Africa, Asia, and other parts of the world. We will soon see the end of an economy based on the supply of cheap oil, natural gas, and other resources, and that will nearly change the face of the world.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the moment, there is more wealth, more goods and services, more automation than has ever existed in the history of mankind. The world is living in an age of manufactured affluence. But the people of the world have rarely been told the costs in terms of people&#039;s lives and the suffering that this affluence has extracted from each of us. Even the people in North America, who seemingly benefit from all these &amp;quot;advances,&amp;quot; seem to be unaware of the destruction they are experiencing. The &amp;quot;Modern Age&amp;quot; and its consumer values have altered, in very basic ways, the very structure of human society and the basic conditions of the Natural World.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The modern family is an institution that is presently under a great deal of stress. The family in Western society has undergone great changes over the last century. As the Westernization of the world continues, all peoples will be faced with similar stresses and turmoils.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We, the Haudenosaunee, have clear choices about the future. One of the choices which we have faced is whether to become Westernized, or to remain true to the Way of Life our forefathers developed for us. We have stated our understanding of the history of the changes that have created the present conditions. We have chosen to remain Haudenosaunee, and within the context of our Way of Life, to set a course of liberation for ourselves and the future generations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our liberation process is not one that is exclusive to us as humans, but also includes the other life forms that coexist and are as oppressed as we. The liberation of the Natural World is a process that is being undertaken in a most difficult environment. The people surrounding us seem to be intent on destroying themselves and every living thing on the planet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Throughout the past four hundred years, the Haudenosaunee have exerted a great influence on the lives of millions of people. Theories about democracy and a classless society have been developed from inadequate interpretations of the true nature of those ideals. This conference may be the time that begins a process that moves toward more real definitions of these concepts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In our homelands, our people are still struggling and developing strategies for survival. In the Mohawk country, our people have reoccupied lands for the purpose of revitalizing our culture and economy. This settlement, known as Kanien:ke, has been successfully held for more than three years.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Oneida people have been waging a court battle for several years to regain 250,000 acres illegally taken in the 1700s. The Cayugas have also been engaged in an effort to regain 100,000 acres taken during the same period as the theft from the Oneidas. The Onondagas and Tuscaroras have been carrying on an unceasing battle to gain control of the education that their children receive. The Senecas have been forced into a long struggle to protect the last pieces of their land still under traditional government, the lands at the Tonawanda territory. Every day of our lives finds us defending ourselves from some form of intrusion by the state of New York or the United States or Canadian governments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we are to continue to survive, we need the help of the international community. We need an external presence to bring some sort of stability to the situation of our people. We have learned, too frequently, that what is good law today can rapidly be changed into bad law. Both Canada and the United States have taught us that their legal systems are part of the political machinery that effects the oppression of our peoples.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We are nations by every definition of the term. We have been unable to obtain any semblance of justice in the court systems of the United States or Canada, and we suffer horrible legal injustices that have terrible economic and social consequences for our people. Many of our legal problems involve land and sovereignty over land, and land is the basis of our economy. We are seeking our rights in those areas under international law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lastly, we require economic assistance in the forms of economic aid and technical assistance. We are aware that there exist various international figures who have technical expertise and who are conscious of development in the context of specific cultures. Our case is appropriate to the deliberations of the United Nations Decolonization Committee. We are engaged in a struggle to decolonize our lands and our lives, but we cannot accomplish this goal alone and unaided.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For centuries we have known that each individual&#039;s action creates conditions and situations that affect the world. For centuries we have been careful to avoid any action unless it carried a long range prospect of promoting harmony and peace in the world. In that context, with our brothers and sisters of the Western Hemisphere, we have journeyed here to discuss these important matters with the other members of the Family of Man.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Our Strategy for Survival ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The invasion of the Western Hemisphere by European powers was preceded by centuries of social development that had resulted in societies in which the interests of the few had effectively become national policies, and the interests of the many were without a voice in national affairs. In order that we might formulate a strategy for survival in the modern world, it has been necessary that we look at the forces and processes that threaten survival and begin to understand the real motivations behind those forces. With such an analysis in mind, we may then begin to create viable alternatives and strategies that will enable us to survive in a predictable future.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When history has been presented to us by colonizers, the focal elements have always been political histories. Alexander the Great&#039;s armies conquered most of the known ancient world, and when ancient history is studied, Alexander is studied. But are political histories really the correct focus? Does it make any difference in the long run whether Alexander the Great, or Nebuchadnezzar, or Akhnaton, or any other figure in political history ever lived? Other than the effect that Julius Caesar&#039;s rise to power had on some individuals in the Roman aristocracy, would history have been any different if some other general had ever dared to cross the Rubicon? Are political histories the correct focus of history in the search for what has affected the lives of billions of the Earth&#039;s population?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The really crucial developments in world history have largely been ignored by historians. The most profound changes that have taken place have been in the areas of technological change. Social history has largely been the recounting of the fortunes of the interest groups, which were committed for one reason or another to some form of technological and/or cultural movement. When we are seeking the real cultural revolutions of history, do we not find that the rise of agriculture or animal husbandry or irrigation technology was a thousand times more significant in the history of humankind than were the adventures and political fortunes of the aristocracy and rulers of European countries?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is important that we who are seeking ways of survival in the twentieth century begin by establishing new definitions and new fields of vision as we try to better understand the past. We need to look to history primarily because the past offers us a laboratory in which we can search to find that inherent process of Western Civilization that paralyzes whole societies and makes them unable to resist the process of colonization. We need to identify the process that so often leads people who are honestly seeking to resist and destroy colonization to unconsciously recreate the elements of their own oppression. And, lastly, we need to understand that within colonization are the exact elements of social organization that are leading the world today to a crisis that promises a foreseeable future of mass starvation, deprivation, and untold hopelessness.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The current crisis that the world is facing is not difficult for people to understand. In the Western Hemisphere, the United States, with six percent of the world&#039;s population, uses forty percent of the world&#039;s energy resources. The world&#039;s supply of fossil fuels is finite, and it is estimated that within thirty years, at the present rate of consumption, the peoples of the world will begin to run out of some of those sources of energy, especially petroleum and natural gas. As the planet begins to run short of cheap energy, it is predictable that the world market economy will suffer and the people of the world who are dependent on that economy will suffer likewise. When the reality of world population growth is placed beside the reality of the current relationship of energy resources and food production, it becomes obvious that worldwide famine is a real possibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The spectre of regional famine, or even worldwide famines, cannot be interpreted as the simple product of a world of scarce resources overwhelmed by the needs of expanding human populations. The situation is not that simple. In the United States, for example, a program of energy conservation—insulation of dwellings, offices, and industrial buildings—would cut back energy consumption by more than twenty-five percent in ten years. Even given growth predictions in terms of populations and economy, the U.S. would conceivably enjoy the current standard of living.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fact is that it is highly unlikely the United States will adopt a program of energy conservation that would drastically cut back consumption. The present U.S. political system is controlled by energy interests that are concerned with profit growth, and energy lobbyists are not interested in conservation. In fact, there is no sector of the U.S. economy that will move toward energy conservation as a national energy policy, even though such a policy might conceivably conserve wasted energy that could go toward food production. The problems that we are facing today, as a species that inhabits a planet of limited resources, arise not simply out of physical limitations but from political realities. It is a hard fact of life that the misery that exists in the world will be manipulated in the interests of profit. Politics and economics are intricately linked in the West, and social considerations command inferior priorities in the world&#039;s capitals. Energy conservation is not likely to become a policy in the Western countries. The acceptable alternative in the eyes of the multinational energy corporations is the plan to create much more energy through the production of nuclear power plants, especially fast breeder reactors. The predictable misery caused by increases in energy prices that push up food prices (and thus drive the poor from the food marketplace) will also provide the grist for the promotion drives of the multinationals. Nuclear reactors will be made to sound more necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Technologies have political cousins. The same people who own the oil interests have enough clout in many governments to discourage serious and broad-based efforts at energy conservation. They have the ability to command governments to support energy development schemes that will leave them in control of the world&#039;s usable energy sources and also in control of the world&#039;s marketplace. The same people constitute a class of interest in the Western world that seeks to control every aspect of the economic life of all peoples. Practically every people in the West will be dependent on their technologies for energy and food production, and all who enter the marketplace they control will be colonized.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The roots of a future world that promises misery, poverty, starvation, and chaos lie in the processes that control and destroy the locally specific cultures of the peoples of the world. To the extent that peoples and areas of the world are dependent on the giant multinational corporations that control production, distribution, and consumption patterns, and to that extent only, is the future a dark and ominous one. For this reason, the definition of colonialism needs to be expanded in the consciousness of the peoples of the planet Earth. Colonialism is a process by which Indigenous cultures are subverted and ultimately destroyed in the interests of the worldwide market economy. The interests of the worldwide market economy, quite contrary to all of the teachings of the colonists, are exactly the interests that promise to create a crisis for humanity in the decades to come.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The dialectical opposite of that process would be the rekindling, on a planetary basis, of locally based culture. Prior to the advent of colonialism, culture was defined as the way of life by which people survived within their own environment, and their own environment was defined as the area in which they lived. Thus the process of survival involved the use of locally developed technologies that met the specific needs of the area. It was mentioned earlier that technologies have political cousins, and locally developed technologies have cousins, too. Decentralized technologies that meet the needs of the people those technologies serve will necessarily give life to a different kind of political structure, and it is safe to predict that the political structure that results will be anticolonial in nature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Colonialism is at the heart of the impending world crisis. The development of liberation technologies, many of which already exist but have been largely ignored by the political movements (even the anticolonial political movements), are a necessary part of the decolonization process. Liberation technologies are those technologies that can be implemented by a specific people in a specific locality and free those people from dependency on multinational corporations and the governments that multinational corporations control. Liberation technologies are those that meet people&#039;s needs within the parameters defined by the cultures they themselves created (or create), and which have no dependency upon the world marketplace. Windmills can be a form of liberation technology, as can water wheels, solar collectors, biomass plants, woodlots, underground home construction—the list is very long.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Given the impending world crisis in the areas of food and energy, a comprehensive strategy for survival will include a concept of liberation technologies that free peoples from dependency on economies that are controlled by external interests. Liberation technologies have political cousins, just as colonizing technologies have, and those political cousins need careful consideration. Liberation technologies are accompanied by liberation political structures and liberation theologies. Of these two entities, colonized peoples in the West would be well advised to place considerable energy into the creation of true liberation theologies as a very high priority.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Liberation theologies are belief systems that challenge the assumption, widely held in the West, that the Earth is simply a commodity that can be exploited thoughtlessly by humans for the purpose of material acquisition within an ever-expanding economic framework. A liberation theology will develop in people a consciousness that all life on Earth is sacred and that the sacredness of life is the key to human freedom and survival. It will be obvious to many non-Western peoples that it is the renewable quality of Earth&#039;s ecosystems that makes life possible for human beings on this planet, and that if anything is sacred, if anything determines both the quality and future possibility of life for our species on this planet, it is that renewable quality of life.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The renewable quality—the sacredness of every living thing, which connects human beings to the place they inhabit—that quality is the single most liberating aspect of our environment. Life is renewable and all the things that support life are renewable, and they are renewed by a force greater than any Government&#039;s, greater than any living or historical thing. A consciousness of the web that holds all things together, the spiritual element that connects us to reality and the manifestation of that power to renew that is present in the existence of an eagle or a mountain snowfall, that consciousness was the first thing that was destroyed by the colonizers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A strategy for survival must include a liberation theology—call it a philosophy or cosmology if you will, but we believe it to be a theology—or humankind will simply continue to view the Earth as a commodity and will continue to seek more efficient ways to exploit that which they have not come to respect. If these processes continue unabated and unchanged at the foundation of the colonizer&#039;s ideology, our species will never be liberated from the undeniable reality that we live on a planet of limited resources, and sooner or later we will exploit our environment beyond its ability to renew itself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our strategy for survival is to create and implement liberation technologies that are consistent with and complementary to a liberation theology that arises out of our culture and is the product of the Natural World. It happens that we, the Haudenosaunee, have fallen heir to a liberation political structure that may be the oldest continuously operating governmental system in the world. We know that our traditional world view and our political structure were largely products of the technological and world view elements of our Society.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee presented three papers to the Non-Governmental Organizations of the United Nations at Geneva, Switzerland, in 1977. Those papers were intended to introduce the people of the Western world to our understanding of the history of the West and the prospects for the future. We have taken many steps since the presentation of those papers to begin the process by which we may provide for the future of our people. Many of our communities are struggling against Colonialism in all of its forms. We have established food co-ops, survival schools, alternative technology projects, adult education programs, agricultural projects, and crafts programs, and serious efforts at cultural revitalization are underway.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Afterword: Indigenous into the 21st Century ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
José Barreiro&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A victory of substantial proportions was won on the final year of the twentieth century when the United Nations Economic and Social Council adopted a resolution establishing a Permanent Forum for Indigenous peoples within the international body. Although some still wonder about the worth of international representation, it is undeniable that the effort to reach out beyond the national borders that contain them has yielded some important results for tribal peoples.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1977, on the occasion of the first major meeting of Indigenous peoples at the United Nations in Geneva, Switzerland, as documented in this new edition of the much reprinted Basic Call to Consciousness, few people in the world were interested in the rights of Native nations. Just five years earlier, a case in Colombia had given evidence of the level of infamy and disdain to which Indian people were being subjected. In that instance, a gang of cowboys had lured a small tribe of Indians out of the forest with the promise of a feast. As the Native guests ate, the cowboys fell upon them, killing sixteen, including women and children. This atrocious act came to the public&#039;s attention and the cowboys were charged with murder; however, they were later acquitted of their crime. &amp;quot;They did not know,&amp;quot; the cowboys&#039; lawyer argued successfully, &amp;quot;that it was wrong to kill Indians.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Brazil, Bolivia, Paraguay, Guatemala, Mexico, and every other country in the Western Hemisphere with Indigenous populations, rapid depletion of forest was eradicating tribe after tribe from ancestral lands. When this type of rapacious development was opposed by tribes, severe repression often followed, including massacres of whole villages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the United States and Canada, the scale of anti-Indian carnage was not at massacre levels; nevertheless, a major current of intolerance and racism against Indians had generated high levels of violence. In several Western states with significant Indian populations, murder of Indians by whites met with lenient sentences in the courts all too frequently. In a policy climate still bent on dispossession of lands and other tribal resources, the Native movement exploded into Alcatraz, the Trail of Broken Treaties Caravan, the challenge at Wounded Knee, and many other confrontational events and situations that signaled the need to seek strategic alliances and proper legal forums everywhere possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As co-editors of the national Indian newspaper, Akwesasne Notes, during those years, John Mohawk and I, along with Katsi Cook, Carol Cornelious, Daniel Thomas (Rokwaho), Mary Muñoz, with the help of many other contributors, shared the bimonthly task of assembling, editing, and writing the news and perspectives of the Native world, often while hosting delegations of chiefs, clanmothers, and Native activists and journalists from around the globe. I remember the chiefs from the various Haudenosaunee nations coming to ask John to write these pieces, and how they later showed up to have the articles read to them. They would ask about the history, because most of all they wanted to know—as old Joe Mitchell, Turtle Clan chief from Akwesasne, asked us one night—&amp;quot;What makes the white man act the way he does in the world? What in their history makes them at war with the Earth?&amp;quot; As it turned out, in Geneva the Indian elders from the Southern Hemisphere had (and continue to have) the same questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Those years were the heyday of a major movement that has been developing for two generations over the nearly thirty years since the 1977 conference. Oren Lyons has described the North American Indian &amp;quot;Unity Caravans&amp;quot; of the 1960s and 1970s. Simultaneously in Latin America, Indigenous &amp;quot;runners&amp;quot; from the southern countries had begun to come north. One runner is the Mapuche veteran Nilo Cayuqueo, who as a young man was sent out by his elders to carry their word to other Native people. (Cayuqueo, among others, carried their message to Geneva in 1977). As well, northern Native nations, prominently the Iroquois and delegations of Lakota, Pueblo, and Hopi, among others, were quietly traveling south during those years. Visionary leaders, like Reuben Snake of the Winnebago, traveled Mexico seeking contact with Native leaders there. Meetings of Maya and Mohawk elders occurred in 1975-76 that became a cornerstone of a people-to-people alliance that has lasted over a generation. In Canada, a current of outreach instigated by Chief George Manuel would become known as the &amp;quot;Fourth World&amp;quot; movement. This first early dialogue with Indigenous peoples immediately went beyond the international concept of the Third World, thus declaring the existence of a Fourth World of peoples.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prominently, the Lakota Treaty Council and the Haudenosaunee chiefs and Treaty Council were represented, and a medicine elder, Phillip Deere, became a voice for millions when, holding his medicine bundle, he declared in Geneva: &amp;quot;We, the Indigenous peoples, are the evidence of the Western Hemisphere. No matter how small we may be, each of them has the right to be who they are.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the Mohawk Nation, we monitored dozens of situations involving violations of human rights—many quite horrendous. We found that our tools of communication—whether newspapers, telephone trees, or the many traveling groups that emerged from our camps to visit universities and reservations throughout the United States, Canada, and even Central America—could be central to the survival of the tribal nations. More than a few lives were saved and several impending atrocities were circumvented due to the communications work of the Emergency Response International Network (ERIN) from 1979 to 1984. Sometimes the ideological and political debates within the Indian international movement, as was the case during the Miskito-Sandinista War—were as painful as they were deeply instructive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As peace dawned on the traumatized region in the early 1990s, most of that same movement supported and applauded the awarding of the Nobel Peace Prize for 1992 to Rigoberta Menchu Tum, the Maya activist and author. The awarding of the Nobel Prize to an Indigenous woman symbolized an opening to crucial political space for Guatemala&#039;s Maya people; after horrible suffering, they would never again be invisible or voiceless.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By 1992, the Fourth World movement had expanded to represent the more than 300 million Indigenous peoples worldwide, including at least 40 million in the Americas. That same year, Indigenous peoples&#039; cultural and practical knowledge of ecological factors in their traditional territories was recognized at the United Nations Conference on Environment and Development (UNCED). And three years later, when the United Nations opened its program of activities for the International Decade of Indigenous Peoples (1995-2004), a main objective of the Decade was the establishment of a Permanent Forum at the United Nations. The United States, once a stumbling block to international Indigenous rights, voted in full support of the forum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the South, several countries with major populations, including Mexico, Guatemala, Bolivia, Ecuador, and Peru, have seen Indian-led movements exercise significant influence on their national societies, from the Zapatista movement in Mexico, which challenged globalization with a bank, to the political upsurges in Bolivia and Ecuador that have collapsed and elected national presidents. In the North, a major economic explosion has occurred, with over two hundred tribal nations gaining rapidly on financial independence and growing power through sovereignty-protected, highly profitable gaming enterprises. Even some of the Indian leaders at Geneva in 1977, such as the New York Oneida Ray Halbritter and the Wisconsin Oneida Artley Skenandore, went on to run major tribal businesses. These two trends from the North and South are only now starting to merge as tribes from both hemispheres continue to engage in dialogues during the international meetings every May in New York City.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Proposed in 1993 at the Vienna World Conference on Human Rights and approved in 2004, the Permanent Forum now provides Indigenous peoples of the world (delegates from over seventy countries attend) with the opportunity to inject the unique voice of the Native peoples of the world into the global human discourse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Americas, certainly, borders separating Indian peoples—as psychological, as linguistic, and as legalistic as those of national frontiers—are coming down. A sense of &amp;quot;all our relations&amp;quot; is increasingly apparent in the communications between Indians throughout North America, Central America, the Caribbean, and South America. It is a refreshing trend.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I am happy to note the recent (2003) repatriation of Taino human remains from the United States&#039; Smithsonian Institution&#039;s National Museum of the American Indian to a small Indian enclave in Cuba&#039;s eastern mountains, the community of Caridad de los Indios. Navajo, Mohawk, Algonquin, Kaw, Paiute, Chicano, and other peoples, including scholars and participants from several countries, witnessed the unique ceremony, which coalesced the forces of many people to guarantee its success. The reinterment gave evidence, too, of the survival of Native traditional cultures and peoples in the most remote and unpredictable places in the Americas. For the small enclave of Taino descendants at Caridad de los Indios, high up in the mountains of Guantanamo, Cuba, to finally make themselves known and respected at an international level, after nearly five hundred years of supposed extinction, is a marvel in itself. That a repatriation of our ancestral remains could be conducted between two countries still in the throes of ideological hostility gives evidence of the growing level of direct cooperation going on among Indian peoples of the countries of Latin America and North America.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unlike the situation at the start of the twentieth century, when many considered Indians &amp;quot;the Vanishing Americans,&amp;quot; there is nothing crestfallen about the present moment for the peoples of Indian Country and the Native Americas. The Indian peoples of the Americas are relatives to each other and constitute the primary cultural and sometimes human foundation of the modern American republics. All of this is quite different now as a result of the intense Indigenous effort for self-determination over the past thirty years. These are trends that usher in a new era of possibility for Native nations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Acknowledgments ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Special thanks goes out to the numerous people who worked hard to bring this revised edition to fruition. Thank you to Tonya Gonnella Frichner (Onondaga Nation-Snipe Clan) president and founder of the American Indian Law Alliance, and the hard working folks at the American Indian Law Alliance. The American Indian Law Alliance organizes and advocates on a national and international level on behalf of and with Indigenous peoples from around the world. Thank you to Chief Oren Lyons (Onondaga—Wolf Clan), John Mohawk (Seneca), and José Barreiro (Taino Nation of the Antilles) for their new contributions. Thank you to Stefan Disko who provided valuable fact-checking, as well as careful research for the endnotes and bibliography. Jerry Hutchens coordinated efforts. Thank you to the dozens of folks who donated time and talent. This work has been a labor of love. May it bring understanding and change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Notes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Haudenosaunee: A Nation Since Time Immemorial ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Treaty of Fort Stanwix, October 22, 1784, U.S.-Six Nations, 7 Stat. 15. For more on the Treaty of Fort Stanwix, see G. Peter Jemison and Anna M. Schein, eds., Treaty of Canandaigua 1794: 200 Years of Treaty Relations Between the Iroquois Confederacy and the United States (Santa Fe: Clear Light Publishers, 2000); and Barbara Graymont, The Iroquois in the American Revolution (Syracuse: Syracuse University Press, 1972).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. On the New York State treaties of this period, see Laurence M. Hauptman, Conspiracy of Interests: Iroquois Dispossession and the Rise of New York State (Syracuse: Syracuse University Press, 1999); and Barbara Graymont, The Iroquois in the American Revolution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. See Jemison/Schein, Treaty of Canandaigua 1794; and Hauptman, Conspiracy of Interests.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. The St. Regis Tribal Council, an &amp;quot;elected&amp;quot; entity that claims jurisdictional authority on the &amp;quot;U.S.&amp;quot; side of Akwesasne. Although members of the community at Akwesasne have consistently resisted this form of government, the St. Regis Tribal Council received federal recognition in 1972 and has become the government recognized by New York State and the U.S. federal government as the legal entity at Akwesasne. The traditional people of the Mohawk Nation continue to be represented by the Mohawk Nation Council of Chiefs, which is the connection of the Mohawk people to the Grand Council of the Haudenosaunee.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. In 1899, the government of Canada created the St. Regis Band Council (now called Mohawk Council of Akwesasne), and imposed it on the Mohawks by force of arms. The Mohawk Council of Akwesasne is an &amp;quot;elected&amp;quot; body that claims jurisdictional authority on the &amp;quot;Canadian&amp;quot; district of Akwesasne. See Doug George-Kanentiio, Iroquois Culture and Commentary (Santa Fe: Clear Light Publishers, 2000), 127-128, 179-180.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Citizenship Act of 1924, 43 Stat. 253, 8 U.S.C. 1401(a)(2). Note, however, that by virtue of various federal statutes and treaties, a significant number of Native people had already received United States citizenship before 1924 (with or without their consent). See General Allotment Act, Sec. 6, 24 Stat. 388 (1887), 25 U.S.C. 331 et seq. (Indians &amp;quot;to whom allotments shall have been made&amp;quot;); Act of August 9, 1888, ch. 818, sec. 2, 25 Stat. 392, 25 U.S.C. 152 (&amp;quot;marriage between white men and Indian women&amp;quot;); and Treaty with the Potawatomi, November 15, 1867, 12 Stat. 1191, Art. 3 (&amp;quot;competent&amp;quot; male heads of families). For more on these issues, see Laurence M. Hauptman, &amp;quot;Congress, Plenary Power, and the American Indian, 1870 to 1992,&amp;quot; in Jemison/Schein, Treaty of Canandaigua, 321-327; and Vine Deloria, Jr. and Clifford M. Lytle, American Indians, American Justice (Austin: University of Texas Press, 1983), 217-222.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. In 1920, the Canadian Indian Act had been amended to allow the compulsory enfranchisement of (i.e. imposition of Citizenship on) &amp;quot;any Indian, male or female, over the age of twenty-one years ... fit for enfranchisement.&amp;quot; According to the amendment, enfranchised Indians were no longer to be &amp;quot;deemed ... Indians within the meaning of any laws relating to Indians,&amp;quot; and were to &amp;quot;have, possess and enjoy all the legal powers, rights and privileges of His Majesty&#039;s other subjects&amp;quot; (An Act to amend the Indian Act, 10-11 Geo V, 1920 c.60, assented to July 1, 1920). The amendment was repealed two years later but was reintroduced in slightly modified form in 1933, and retained until the major revision of the Indian Act in 1951. A further modification was made in 1951 (and retained until 1985) that allowed the compulsory enfranchisement of Indian women who married non-Aboriginal, Métis, Inuit, or unregistered Indian men. See Royal Commission on Aboriginal Peoples, Report of the Royal Commission on Aboriginal Peoples (Ottawa: Canada Communication Group, 1996), Vol. 1(2), chapter 9, para. 0.13. See also Clinton Rickard (editor, Barbara Graymont), Fighting Tuscarora: The Autobiography of Chief Clinton Rickard, (Syracuse: Syracuse University Press, 1973), 59.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. For more detailed accounts, see Grace Li Xiu Woo, &amp;quot;Canada&#039;s Forgotten Founders: The Modern Significance of the Haudenosaunee (Iroquois) Application for Membership in the League of Nations,&amp;quot; Global Development Journal (GDJ) 2003 (1) (Coventry: University of Warwick, 2003), 9-10; Laurence M. Hauptman, The Iroquois and the New Deal (Syracuse: Syracuse University Press, 1981), 18; and Rickard, Autobiography, 60-62.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9. 48 Stat. 984, 25 U.S.C. 461-470. See Deloria/Lytle, American Indians, American Justice, 15; Vine Deloria, Jr., Behind the Trail of Broken Treaties: An Indian Declaration of Independence (New York: Dell Publishing, 1974), 157-206; and Hauptman, &amp;quot;Congress, Plenary Power, and the American Indian,&amp;quot; 326-327. For a discussion of the IRA in the context of the Haudenosaunee, see Hauptman, The Iroquois and the New Deal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
10. Act of July 2, 1948 (62 Stat. 1224; 25 U.S.C. 232) (criminal jurisdiction); Act of September 13, 1950 (64 Stat. 845; 25 U.S.C. 233) (civil jurisdiction). These two acts predate the more general application of state jurisdiction to Native peoples embodied in Public Law 280 of August 15, 1953, which was largely based on the acts of 1948 and 1950. Public Law 280 was one of the cornerstones of the Termination Policy of the 1950s. See also Laurence M. Hauptman, The Iroquois Struggle for Survival: World War II to Red Power (Syracuse: Syracuse University Press, 1986), 45-64; and Chief Irving Powless Jr., &amp;quot;The Haudenosaunee, Yesterday and Today: A Conflict of Concepts and Laws,&amp;quot; in Buffalo Law Review 46, No. 3 (1998), 1083-1084.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
11. For more detailed accounts, see Hauptman, The Iroquois Struggle for Survival; John Mohawk, &amp;quot;Epilogue,&amp;quot; in Paul Wallace, White Roots of Peace: The Iroquois Book of Life (Santa Fe: Clear Light Publishers, 1994), 139-150; and Rickard, Autobiography, 138-152.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
12. See Powless, &amp;quot;The Haudenosaunee, Yesterday and Today,&amp;quot; 1086-1087.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
13. See Notes, A Basic Call to Consciousness: The Haudenosaunee Address to the Western World, Policies of Oppression in the Name of Democracy, note 16 and accompanying text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
14. The conference was held at UN facilities, but was not officially a UN conference. For reports and documents related to this conference, see Akwesasne Notes, Vol. 9, No. 4 (December 1977); International Indian Treaty Council, &amp;quot;The Geneva Conference—Official Report by: International Indian Treaty Council&amp;quot; (Special Issue: Treaty Council News, October 1977, Vol. 1, No. 7); and Institute for the Development of Indian Law, &amp;quot;International NGO Conference on Discrimination Against Indigenous Peoples in the Americas—1977,&amp;quot; in American Indian Journal 3 (1977). For retrospectives on the significance and impact of this Conference, see Ingrid Washinawatok, &amp;quot;International Emergence: Twenty-One Years at the United Nations,&amp;quot; in New York City Law Review 3 (1999), 41-57; and Sharon H. Venne, Our Elders Understand Our Rights: Evolving International Law Regarding Indigenous Peoples (Penticton: Theytus Books, Ltd., 1998), 107-163. On the recent establishment of a Permanent Forum for Indigenous peoples within the United Nations, see IWGIA (International Work Group for Indigenous Affairs), &amp;quot;The Permanent Forum on Indigenous Issues,&amp;quot; in IWGIA, The Indigenous World 2001-2002 (Copenhagen: IWGIA, 2002), 444-451.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Deskaheh: An Iroquois Patriot&#039;s Fight for International Recognition ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. This is a revised version of an essay that originally appeared under the title &amp;quot;I Am a Cayuga&amp;quot; in Carl Carmer, Dark Trees to the Wind: A Cycle of York State Years (New York: William Sloan Associates, 1949), 105-117. It was also included in the pamphlet Deskaheh: Iroquois Statesman and Patriot, first published in the 1950s by Akwesasne Mohawk Counselor Organization, and later reprinted by Akwesasne Notes in 1976.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Haldimand Treaty/Deed, October 25, 1784. See Graymont, The Iroquois in the American Revolution, 293-294, 299. The rights to the lands granted by the Haldimand Treaty were further guaranteed by the Simcoe Treaty/Deed (&amp;quot;Patent&amp;quot; issued by Lieutenant-Governor J. Graves Simcoe on January 14, 1793). See Beverley K. Jacobs (Assembly of First Nations British Columbia), &amp;quot;The Effect of Delgamuukw on Treaties in Ontario&amp;quot; (January 2001), research paper posted on the Delgamuukw/Gisday&#039;wa National Process Web site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Jay Treaty (between Britain and the United States), concluded on November 19, 1794, ratified on June 24, 1795, proclaimed on February 29, 1796. Article III of the Treaty provides in part: &amp;quot;It is agreed that it shall at all times be free to His Majesty&#039;s subjects, and to the citizens of the United States, and also to the Indians dwelling on either side of the said boundary line, freely to pass and repass by land or inland navigation, into the respective territories and countries of the two parties, on the continent of America ... and to navigate all the lakes, rivers and waters thereof, and freely to carry on trade and commerce with each other ... No duty of entry shall ever be levied by either party on peltries brought by land or inland navigation into the said territories respectively, nor shall the Indians passing or repassing with their own proper goods and effects of whatever nature, pay for the same any impost or duty whatever.&amp;quot; See also Rickard, Autobiography, 59-69.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. During World War I (1914-1918), many Aboriginal people in Canada voluntarily enlisted in the Canadian army even before official permission for Indians to enlist was given in December 1915. At this point, formal recruiting campaigns for Aboriginal volunteers got under way, including at residential schools, which led to considerable suspicion and opposition among Aboriginal people. Then, in 1917, as general enlistment slowed and manpower needs increased, the Canadian government passed the Military Service Act of August 29, 1917, which provided for registration and conscription of all male British subjects from twenty to forty-five years of age, including Aboriginal people. No consideration was given to status Indians&#039; lack of citizenship or to treaty membership. The possibility of conscription was protested by Aboriginal communities and leaders, and on January 17, 1918, a provision was passed that exempted Aboriginal men from combative service (P.C. 111), on the basis that they were not qualified to vote. See Royal Commission on Aboriginal Peoples, Report of the Royal Commission, Vol. 1(2), chapter 12, para. 2; and R. Scott Sheffield, A Search for Equity: A Study of the Treatment Accorded to First Nations Veterans and Their Dependents of the Second World War and the Korean War (Report prepared for the National Roundtable on First Nations Veterans&#039; Issues, April 2000).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. See Rickard, Autobiography, 61; and Woo, &amp;quot;Canada&#039;s Forgotten Founders,&amp;quot; 8-10.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. See Notes, Deskaheh: An Iroquois Patriot&#039;s Fight for International Recognition, note 2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. For a detailed account of these incidents, see Woo, &amp;quot;Canada&#039;s Forgotten Founders,&amp;quot; 8-10, and Rickard, Autobiography, 60-62.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. See Rickard, Autobiography, 59.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9. Deskaheh to the League of Nations (League of Nations file 33687/28075); and Why We Are Here Again, London, August 1923. Both documents are contained in the George P. Decker Collection, Lavery Library, St. John Fisher College, Rochester, New York, as well as the Howard R. Berman Collection, Charles B. Sears Law Library, University of Buffalo, New York.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
10. See Rickard, Autobiography, 61-62; Hauptman, The Iroquois and the New Deal, 18; and Woo, &amp;quot;Canada&#039;s Forgotten Founders,&amp;quot; 9.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== A Basic Call to Consciousness: The Haudenosaunee Address to the Western World ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Spiritualism, the Highest Form of Political Consciousness&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Paulo Freire, Pedagogy of the Oppressed (New York: Continuum, 1970).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Obvious Fact of Our Continuing Existence&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. On the influences of the Great Law of Peace on the U.S. Constitution, see Chief Oren Lyons and John Mohawk, eds., Exiled in the Land of the Free: Democracy, Indian Nations, and the U.S. Constitution (Santa Fe: Clear Light Publishers, 1992); Bruce E. Johansen, Forgotten Founders: How the American Indian Helped Shape Democracy (Harvard and Boston: The Harvard Common Press, 1982); Bruce E. Johansen, Debating Democracy: Native American Legacy of Freedom (Santa Fe: Clear Light Publishers, 1995); José Barreiro, ed., Indian Roots of American Democracy (Ithaca: Akwe:kon Press, Cornell University, 1992); and Greg Schaaf, The Great Law of Peace and the Constitution of the United States of America (Pamphlet published by Tree of Peace Society, 1987). See also Senate Concurrent Resolution 76 of September 16, 1987, which recognizes and acknowledges the contribution of the Iroquois Confederacy of Nations to the development of the U.S. Constitution; and United States Congress Senate Select Committee on Indian Affairs Report 100-565, Acknowledging the Contribution of the Iroquois Confederacy of Nations to the Development of the United States Constitution (Washington, DC: U.S. Government Printing Office, 1988).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. See Lewis H. Morgan, League of the Ho-de&#039;-no-sau-nee, or Iroquois (Rochester: Sage &amp;amp; Brother, 1851).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. See Karl Marx and Lawrence Krader, eds., The Ethnological Notebooks of Karl Marx: Studies of Morgan, Phear, Maine, Lubbock (Assen: Van Gorcum, 1972); and Johansen, Forgotten Founders, 19, 121-123. See also Frederick Engels, The Origin of the Family, Private Property and the State: In the Light of the Researches of Lewis H. Morgan (New York: International Publishers, 1972; originally published 1884 in Hottingen-Zurich).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Eric R. Wolf, Peasants (Englewood Cliffs: Prentice Hall, Foundations of Modern Anthropology Series, 1966), 11. See Cyril S. Belshaw, Traditional Exchange and Modern Markets (Englewood Cliffs: Prentice-Hall, Modernization of Traditional Societies Series, 1965), 53-54.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Alfred L. Kroeber, Anthropology: Race, Language, Culture, Psychology, Prehistory—Revised Edition (New York: Harcourt, Brace and Company, 1948), 284. See Margaret Park Redfield, ed., Human Nature and the Study of Society: The Papers of Robert Redfield, Vol. 1 (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1962), I, 287.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Robert Redfield, Peasant Society and Culture: An Anthropological Approach to Civilization (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1956), 46-47.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Made in 1613. The Two Row Treaty was recorded by the Haudenosaunee in the Two Row Wampum Belt (Guswenta). Guswenta is a long belt of white and purple wampum beads: two long and parallel lines of purple, separated by three rows of white. The two purple lines in the belt symbolize the distinct identity of the two peoples and a mutual promise to coexist in peace without interference in the internal affairs of the other. On the symbolism of the Guswenta, see Chief Irving Powless Jr., &amp;quot;Treaty Making,&amp;quot; in Jemison/Schein, Treaty of Canandaigua, 22-23; Oren R. Lyons, &amp;quot;The American Indian in the Past,&amp;quot; in Lyons/Mohawk, Exiled in the Land of the Free, 40-42; and Robert W. Venables, &amp;quot;Some Observations on the Treaty of Canandaigua,&amp;quot; in Jemison/Schein, Treaty of Canandaigua, 107-108.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. U.S. Const., Art. I, Sec. 8, cl. 3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9. See Deloria/Lytle, American Indians, American Justice, 40-45; Deloria, Behind the Trail of Broken Treaties, 141-160, and Indian Law Resource Center, &amp;quot;United States Denial of Indian Property Rights: A Study in Lawless Power and Racial Discrimination,&amp;quot; in National Lawyers Guild Committee on Native American Struggles, ed., Reinventing Indian Law (New Haven: The Advocate Press, 1982), 24.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
10. See Robert T. Coulter, &amp;quot;The Denial of Legal Remedies to Indian Nations Under U.S. Law,&amp;quot; in National Lawyers Guild Committee on Native American Struggles, Reinventing Indian Law, 103-107.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
11. See Felix S. Cohen, Handbook of Federal Indian Law (Washington, DC: U.S. Government Printing Office, 1942), 421 (chapter 22, section 1, F.5.a.); Laurence M. Hauptman, &amp;quot;The State&#039;s Men, the Salvation Seekers, and the Seneca: The Supplemental Treaty of Buffalo Creek, 1842,&amp;quot; in New York History 78, No. 1 (January 1997): 54-61.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
12. In the case of the Cayuga Nation, in particular three &amp;quot;treaties&amp;quot; with the state of New York in 1789 (Treaty of Albany, February 25, 1789), in 1795 (Treaty of Albany, August 21, 1795), and in 1807 (Treaty of Albany, May 30, 1807). In the case of the Oneida Nation, the &amp;quot;treaties&amp;quot; with the state of New York in 1785 (Treaty of Otschwyler, September 22, 1788), and a long series of about twenty-five other written &amp;quot;agreements&amp;quot; with the state of New York between 1795 and 1846. See generally, Hauptman, Conspiracy of Interests; and Graymont, The Iroquois in the American Revolution. For details about the Cayuga treaties, see Clint Halftown, &amp;quot;The Haudenosaunee Cayuga Nation Land Claim: Cayuga Nation v. New York,&amp;quot; in Buffalo Law Review 46, No. 3 (1998), 1091-1095; and New York State Assembly, Report of the Special Committee to Investigate the Indian Problem of the State of New York—Appointed by the Assembly of 1888 (Albany: Troy Press, 1889) (&amp;quot;Whipple Report&amp;quot;), 216-229. For details about the Oneida treaties, see Jack Campisi, &amp;quot;The Treaty Period, 1783-1838,&amp;quot; in Jack Campisi and Laurence M. Hauptman, eds., The Oneida Indian Experience (Syracuse: Syracuse University Press, 1988), 48-64; Laurence M. Hauptman and L. Gordon McLester III, eds., The Oneida Indian Journey: From New York to Wisconsin, 1784-1860 (Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1999), 38-42, 86-89, 151-170; George C. Shattuck, The Oneida Land Claims: A Legal History (Syracuse: Syracuse University Press, 1991); and &amp;quot;Whipple Report,&amp;quot; 234-265.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
13. Conducted in Albany, New York, on March 29, 1797. In the United States referred to as &amp;quot;Treaty with the Mohawk&amp;quot; (7 Stat. 61).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
14. See Cohen, Handbook of Federal Indian Law, 420-21 (chapter 22, section 1.F.); and Hauptman, Conspiracy of Interests. Also see Notes, A Basic Call to Consciousness: The Haudenosaunee Address to the Western World, Policies of Oppression in the Name of Democracy, note 6.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
15. General Allotment Act, 24 Stat. 388 (1887), 25 U.S.C. 331 et seq. See Delos Sacket Otis, The Dawes Act and Allotment of Indian Lands (Norman: University of Oklahoma Press, 1973); and Deloria/Lytle, American Indians, American Justice, 8-12. For the impact of the Dawes Act on the Iroquois, see Hauptman, The Iroquois and the New Deal, 5, 22, 71-72, 90-92.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
16. Citizenship Act of 1924, 43 Stat. 253, 8 U.S.C. 1401(a)(2). See Notes, The Haudenosaunee: A Nation Since Time Immemorial, note 6 and accompanying text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
17. See Notes, Deskaheh: An Iroquois Patriot&#039;s Fight for International Recognition, note 10.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
18. See Eileen Antone, &amp;quot;The Oneida Move to Canada,&amp;quot; in Hauptman/McLester, The Oneida Indian Journey, 26-33.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
19. See Notes, The Haudenosaunee: A Nation Since Time Immemorial, note 10.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
20. Public Law 88-533 (August 31, 1964), 78 Stat. 738. For further details on the struggle around Kinzua Dam, see Joy A. Bilharz, The Allegany Senecas and Kinzua Dam: Forced Relocation through Two Generations (Lincoln: University of Nebraska Press, 1998); Hauptman, The Iroquois Struggle for Survival, 155-167; and Mohawk, &amp;quot;Epilogue,&amp;quot; 141-148.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
21. See Cohen, Handbook of Federal Indian Law, 420 (chapter 22, section 1, F.3.); and Reginald Horsman, &amp;quot;The Origins of Oneida Removal to Wisconsin, 1815-1822,&amp;quot; in Hauptman/McLester, The Oneida Indian Journey, 53-69.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
22. See Rickard, Autobiography, 131-132: &amp;quot;Beginning in 1948 and for several years thereafter, representatives of the Six Nations Confederacy made an annual trip to the United Nations headquarters in New York City. We brought our message of peace to this world body and reminded the delegates we met that we were the first United Nations. In 1949, a group of us from the Six Nations attended the cornerstone laying of the UN building in Manhattan. In 1950, we presented a petition to the United Nations protesting the attempts of Canada, the United States, and the state of New York to assume jurisdiction over our Six Nations Confederacy and called attention to our opposition to the attempts of these foreign powers to assimilate our people. In 1952, we petitioned the United Nations to admit the Six Nations Confederacy to membership. This petition was pigeonholed.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
23. The United Nations Conference on the Human Environment, Stockholm, June 5-12, 1972, the first major modern international gathering on human activities in relationship to the environment. The conference produced a set of principles in the Stockholm Declaration and led to the founding of the United Nations Environment Programme (UNEP). Among the Indigenous delegates attending the Conference were Alice Papineau (Onondaga), Thomas Banyacya (Hopi), John Cook (Mohawk), and George Manuel (Shuswap).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Policies of Oppression in the Name of &amp;quot;Democracy&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. See John C. Mohawk, &amp;quot;The Canandaigua Treaty,&amp;quot; in Jemison/Schein, Treaty of Canandaigua, 9.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. See Notes, The Haudenosaunee: A Nation Since Time Immemorial, note 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. See Graymont, The Iroquois in the American Revolution, 293-294, 299.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. See Cohen, Handbook of Federal Indian Law, 420 (chapter 22, section 1, F.3.).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Treaty of Buffalo Creek of January 15, 1838 (between the United States and &amp;quot;the New York Indians&amp;quot;), 7 Stat. 550. It is well established that the treaty was produced through bribery, coercion, and forgery, and it is generally considered fraudulent. See Morgan, League of the Ho-de&#039;-no-sau-nee, 52-54; Cohen, Handbook of Federal Indian Law, 420 (chapter 22, section 1, F.3.); Henry S. Manley, &amp;quot;The Treaty of Buffalo Creek,&amp;quot; in New York History 27 (July 1947), 313-328; Laurence M. Hauptman, &amp;quot;Congress, Plenary Power, and the American Indian,&amp;quot; 332-334; and Mohawk, &amp;quot;Epilogue,&amp;quot; 143-150.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Under the terms of the 1838 treaty, the Senecas ceded all of their remaining homelands in New York (the reservations at Allegany, Cattaraugus, Tonawanda, and Buffalo Creek), and relinquished their rights to Menominee lands in Wisconsin that had been purchased for them by the U.S. government. In exchange, the United States granted the Iroquois (as a whole) and the Stockbridge-Munsee rights to a 1,824,000 acre reservation in Kansas. In addition, the Indians were to receive some money from the U.S. government. However, the Senecas denounced the treaty due to its fraudulent nature and refused to move to Kansas or leave their homelands in New York. In 1842, a supplemental &amp;quot;compromise&amp;quot; treaty, the Treaty of Buffalo Creek of May 20, 1842 (7 Stat. 586), was concluded between the United States and the Senecas (without the consent of the Tonawanda chiefs). The Senecas regained the Allegany and Cattaraugus Reservations, but not the Buffalo Creek or Tonawanda Reservations. The Senecas on the Buffalo Creek Reservation, which was permanently lost, gradually moved to the other Seneca reservations. The Tonawanda Senecas, who did not recognize the treaties of either 1838 or 1842, still refused to move and on November 5, 1857, made another treaty with the United States (11 Stat. 735, 12 Stat. 991) that &amp;quot;allowed&amp;quot; them to repurchase part of their Reservation. See Cohen, Handbook of Federal Indian Law, 420 (chapter 22, section 1, F.3.); Hauptman, &amp;quot;The State&#039;s Men, the Salvation Seekers, and the Seneca: The Supplemental Treaty of Buffalo Creek, 1842,&amp;quot; 51-82.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. See Notes, The Haudenosaunee: A Nation Since Time Immemorial, note 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Act of March 3, 1871, 16 Stat. 566, 25 U.S.C. 71. The whole clause reads as follows: &amp;quot;Provided, That hereafter no Indian nation or tribe, within the territory of the United States shall be acknowledged or recognized as an independent nation tribe, or power with whom the United States may contract by treaty: Provided further, That nothing herein contained shall be construed to invalidate or impair the obligation of any treaty heretofore lawfully made and ratified with any such Indian nation or tribe.&amp;quot; This provision is still in effect.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. See John Ehle, Trail of Tears: The Rise and Fall of the Cherokee Nation (New York: Doubleday, 1988); and Theda Purdue and Michael D. Green, The Cherokee Removal: A Brief History with Documents (New York: Bedford Books of St. Martin&#039;s Press, 1995).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9. General Allotment Act, 24 Stat. 388 (1887), 25 U.S.C. 331 et seq. See Notes, A Basic Call to Consciousness: The Haudenosaunee Address to the Western World, The Obvious Fact of Our Continued Existence, note 20.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
10. As a result of the Dawes Act and subsequent legislation, American Indian land holdings were reduced from 138 million to 52 million acres between 1887 and 1954. See Hauptman, &amp;quot;Congress, Plenary Power, and the American Indian,&amp;quot; 321-327; Otis, The Dawes Act and the Allotment of Indian Lands; and Deloria/Lytle, American Indians, American Justice, 8-12.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
11. See Jorge Noriega, &amp;quot;American Indian Education in the United States: Indoctrination for Subordination to Colonialism,&amp;quot; in M. Annette Jaimes, ed., The State of Native America: Genocide, Colonization, and Resistance (Boston: South End Press, 1992), 371-402.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
12. New York State Assembly, Report of the Special Committee to Investigate the Indian Problem of the State of New York—Appointed by the Assembly of 1858 (Albany: Troy Press, 1859). The &amp;quot;Whipple Report&amp;quot; concluded (at page 79): &amp;quot;these Indian people have been kept as &#039;wards&#039; or children long enough. They should now be educated to be men, not Indians, and it is the earnest belief of the committee that when ... the Indians of the State are absorbed into the great mass of the American people, and not before, will the &#039;Indian problem&#039; be solved.&amp;quot; On the Whipple Committee and its report, see Laurence M. Hauptman, &amp;quot;Seneca Nation of Indians v. Christy: A Background Study,&amp;quot; in Buffalo Law Review, Vol. 46, No. 3 (Fall 1998), 948-953; and Hauptman, The Iroquois in the Civil War, 149-150.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
13. Citizenship Act of 1924, 43 Stat. 253, 8 U.S.C. 1401(a)(2). See Notes, The Haudenosaunee: A Nation Since Time Immemorial, note 6 and accompanying text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
14. A series of Congressional Acts between 1953 and 1958, by which federal recognition of a total of 109 Native nations, or parts of nations, was unilaterally withdrawn. Services to these nations provided by the Bureau of Indian Affairs were transferred to other federal, state, or local governmental agencies, or to the Indian nations themselves. Civil and criminal jurisdiction, to varying degrees, were transferred to the respective states. The two cornerstones of the &amp;quot;Termination Policy&amp;quot; were House Concurrent Resolution 108 of August 1, 1953 (67 Stat. B132) and Public Law 280 of August 15, 1953 (67 Stat. 588-590). The underlying goals of the policy were to integrate Indians, as individuals, into the mainstream of American society; to extinguish the collective political existence of the Indian nations; to abolish treaty rights; and to end the federal government&#039;s responsibility for Indian affairs. See Hauptman, &amp;quot;Congress, Plenary Power, and the American Indian,&amp;quot; 329-334; Deloria/Lytle, American Indians, American Justice, 15-21; and Rebecca L. Robbins, &amp;quot;Self-Determination and Subordination: The Past, Present, and Future of American Indian Governance,&amp;quot; in Jaimes, The State of Native America, 98-100. For a discussion of the Termination Policy in the context of the Haudenosaunee, see Hauptman, The Iroquois Struggle for Survival, 42-83.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
15. The settlement of Ganienkeh was originally established in May 1974 by a number of Mohawks who occupied an abandoned girls&#039; camp at Moss Lake in the Adirondacks in New York. In 1977, the people of Ganienkeh reached an agreement with the state of New York to resettle their community to a new site on Miner Lake near Altona, New York where it is still located today. See Greg Horn, &amp;quot;Ganienkeh celebrates 25th anniversary,&amp;quot; in The Native Door, Vol. 5, No. 15 (May 7, 1999); Greg Horn, &amp;quot;Ganienkeh since 1977,&amp;quot; in The Native Door, Vol. 5, No. 16 (May 14, 1999); Bruce E. Johansen and Barbara A. Mann, eds., Encyclopedia of the Haudenosaunee (Iroquois Confederacy) (Westport: Greenwood Press, 2000), 104; and Gail Landsman, Sovereignty and Symbol: Indian-White Conflict at Ganienkeh (Albuquerque: University of New Mexico Press, 1988).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
16. In 1970, the Oneidas filed a lawsuit in federal court challenging the validity of a 1795 &amp;quot;treaty&amp;quot; between the state of New York and the Oneida Indian Nation, based on the 1790 Trade and Intercourse Act (1 Stat. 137, 25 U.S.C. 177) and federal common law principles regarding the protection of Indian lands, which exclude states from making treaties with Indians. In 1974, the U.S. Supreme Court ruled in a landmark decision that &amp;quot;Indian title is a matter of federal law and can be extinguished only with federal consent,&amp;quot; and that the Oneidas could maintain a course of action in federal court pursuant to the Trade and Intercourse Act (See Oneida Indian Nation v. County of Oneida, 414 U.S. 661). The case then proceeded to trial on the merits, and in 1985 the U.S. Supreme Court held in County of Oneida v. Oneida Indian Nation of New York (470 U.S. 226) that the Oneidas&#039; land had been taken illegally in the 1795 &amp;quot;treaty.&amp;quot; Since then, the parties have attempted to negotiate a settlement, but so far there has not been a final resolution. For the history of the Oneida land claims, see Hauptman, The Iroquois Struggle for Survival, 179-203; Arlinda Locklear, &amp;quot;The Oneida Land Claims: A Legal Overview,&amp;quot; in Christopher Vecsey and William A. Starna, eds., Iroquois Land Claims (Syracuse: Syracuse University Press, 1988); Shattuck, The Oneida Land Claims; Arlinda Locklear, &amp;quot;The Buffalo Creek Treaty of 1838 and Its Legal Implications for Oneida Indian Land Claims,&amp;quot; in Hauptman/McLester, The Oneida Indian Journey, 85-89; and Curtis Berkey, &amp;quot;The Legal Basis for Iroquois Land Claims,&amp;quot; in Akwesasne Journal 16, No. 1 (Spring 1993), 23-25; and John Tahsuda, &amp;quot;The Oneida Land Claim: Yesterday and Today,&amp;quot; in Buffalo Law Review 46, No. 3 (1998), 1001-1009.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
17. After the U.S. Supreme Court&#039;s 1974 decision in the Oneida case (see supra note 16), the Cayuga Nation negotiated with New York State regarding two &amp;quot;treaties&amp;quot; in 1795 and 1807, in which the Cayugas ceded 64,027 acres, constituting all of their remaining homelands, to New York. Both of these &amp;quot;treaties&amp;quot; were entered into by New York State in patent violation of the 1790 Trade and Intercourse Act, which forbade states to make treaties with Indians. In 1979, New York State and the Cayuga Nation entered into a formal settlement agreement. However, the settlement was not approved by Congress, and in 1980 the Cayuga Nation filed a federal lawsuit against 11,000 New York State defendants for 64,027 acres of land and $350 million in damages (Cayuga Indian Nation of New York v. Cuomo). In 1992 the federal government joined the suit as a plaintiff-intervenor on behalf of the Cayuga Nation, which enabled the Cayugas to sue the state of New York. U.S. District judge Neal McCurn ruled that the Cayugas had a valid claim to the land because it was acquired by the state in violation of federal law, and in 2001 he found that the Cayugas are entitled to an award of $247.9 million in total damages (Cayuga Indian Nation of New York v. Pataki, 165 F.Supp.2d 266 N.D.N.Y. 2001). However, the state of New York as well as two counties have filed appeals, and the Cayugas filed counter appeals asking for $1.7 billion and all 64,027 acres. See Halftown, &amp;quot;The Haudenosaunee Cayuga Nation Land Claim&amp;quot;; Bob Herbert, &amp;quot;Justice, 200 Years Later,&amp;quot; in New York Times (column, November 26, 2001); and David L. Shaw, &amp;quot;Settlement urged in Cayuga Claim,&amp;quot; in Syracuse Post-Standard (October 7, 2001).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
18. One of the recommendations of the 1977 International NGO Conference on Discrimination Against Indigenous Populations in the Americas (see Notes, The Haudenosaunee: A Nation Since Time Immemorial, note 14 and accompanying text), to which this paper was originally presented, was &amp;quot;that the United Nations Special Committee on Decolonization hold hearings on all issues affecting Indigenous populations.&amp;quot; See International NGO Conference on Discrimination against Indigenous Populations in the Americas, &amp;quot;Report on Actions,&amp;quot; in International Indian Treaty Council, The Geneva Conference, 22-24.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sources ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Books ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Balsdon, J. P. V. D. The Story of the Roman Empire. New York: McGraw Hill, 1970.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Barreiro, José ed. Indian Roots of American Democracy. Ithaca: Akwe:kon Press, Cornell University, 1992.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Belshaw, Cyril S. Traditional Exchange and Modern Markets. Englewood Cliffs: Prentice-Hall, Modernization of Traditional Societies Series, 1965.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bilharz, Joy A. The Allegany Senecas and Kinzua Dam: Forced Relocation through Two Generations. Lincoln: University of Nebraska Press, 1998.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Campisi, Jack and Laurence M. Hauptman, eds. The Oneida Indian Experience. Syracuse: Syracuse University Press, 1988.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Carmer, Carl. Dark Trees to the Wind: A Cycle of York State Years. New York: David McKay Company, Inc., 1949.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cohen, Felix S. Handbook of Federal Indian Law. Washington, DC: U.S. Government Printing Office, 1942.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deloria, Vine Jr. Behind the Trail of Broken Treaties: An Indian Declaration of Independence. New York: Dell Publishing, 1974.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deloria, Vine Jr. and Clifford M. Lytle. American Indians, American Justice. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1983.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deskaheh. Why We Are Here Again (pamphlet). London, August 1923.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deskaheh to the League of Nations, file 33687/28075.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ehle, John. Trail of Tears: The Rise and Fall of the Cherokee Nation. New York: Doubleday, 1988.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Engels, Frederick. The Origin of the Family, Private Property and the State: In the Light of the Researches of Lewis H. Morgan. New York: International Publishers, 1972. Originally published 1884 in Hottingen-Zurich.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Freire, Paulo. Pedagogy of the Oppressed. New York: Continuum, 1970.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
George-Kanentiio, Doug. Iroquois Culture and Commentary. Santa Fe: Clear Light Publishers, 2000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Graymont, Barbara. The Iroquois in the American Revolution. Syracuse: Syracuse University Press, 1972.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hanke, Louis. The Spanish Struggle for Justice in the Conquest of America. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 1949.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hauptman, Laurence M. Conspiracy of Interests: Iroquois Dispossession and the Rise of New York State. Syracuse: Syracuse University Press, 1999.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hauptman, Laurence M. The Iroquois and the New Deal. Syracuse: Syracuse University Press, 1981.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hauptman, Laurence M. The Iroquois Struggle for Survival: World War II to Red Power. Syracuse: Syracuse University Press, 1986.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hauptman, Laurence M. The Iroquois in the Civil War. Syracuse: Syracuse University Press, 1993.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hauptman, Laurence M. and L. Gordon McLester III, eds. The Oneida Indian Journey: From New York to Wisconsin, 1784-1860. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1999.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Heiser, Charles B., Jr. Seed to Civilization: The Story of Man&#039;s Food. San Francisco: W.H. Freeman, 1973.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hodges, Henry. Technology in the Ancient World. New York: Alfred Knopf, 1970.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
International Work Group for Indigenous Affairs (IWGIA), The Indigenous World 2001-2002. Copenhagen: IWGIA, 2002.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Jaimes, M. Annette ed. The State of Native America: Genocide, Colonization, and Resistance. Boston: South End Press, 1992.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Jennings, Francis. The Invasion of America: Indians, Colonialism, and the Cant of Conquest. New York: W.W. Norton &amp;amp; Company, 1976.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Johansen, Bruce E. Debating Democracy: Native American Legacy of Freedom. Santa Fe: Clear Light Publishers, 1995.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Johansen, Bruce E. Forgotten Founders: How the American Indian Helped Shape Democracy. Harvard and Boston: The Harvard Common Press, 1982.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Johansen, Bruce E. and Barbara A. Mann, eds. Encyclopedia of the Haudenosaunee (Iroquois Confederacy). Westport: Greenwood Press, 2000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kroeber, Alfred L. Anthropology: Race, Language, Culture, Psychology, Prehistory—Revised Edition. New York: Harcourt, Brace and Company, 1948.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Landsman, Gail. Sovereignty and Symbol: Indian-White Conflict at Ganienkeh. Albuquerque: University of New Mexico Press, 1988.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lyons, Oren R. American Indian Sovereignty, Exiled in the Land of the Free. Santa Fe: Clear Light Publishers, 1992.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Marx, Karl and Lawrence Krader, eds. The Ethnological Notebooks of Karl Marx: Studies of Morgan, Phear, Maine, Lubbock. Assen: Van Gorcum, 1972.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Morgan, Lewis Henry. Ancient Society, or Researches in the Lines of Human Progress from Savagery, through Barbarism to Civilization. London: Macmillan &amp;amp; Co., 1877.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Morgan, Lewis Henry. League of the Ho-de&#039;-no-sau-nee, or Iroquois. Rochester: Sage &amp;amp; Brother, 1851.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
National Lawyers Guild Committee on Native American Struggles, ed. Reinventing Indian Law. New Haven: The Advocate Press, 1982.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Newcomb, Steven. A Matter of Religious Freedom. Self-published essay, 1992.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Otis, Delos Sacket. The Dawes Act and Allotment of Indian Lands. Norman: University of Oklahoma Press, 1973.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Purdue, Theda and Michael D. Green. The Cherokee Removal: A Brief History with Documents. New York: Bedford Books of St. Martin&#039;s Press, 1995.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Redfield, Margaret Park, ed. Human Nature and the Study of Society: The Papers of Robert Redfield, Vol. 1. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1962.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Redfield, Robert. Peasant Society and Culture: An Anthropological Approach to Civilization. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1956.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rickard, Clinton (ed. Barbara Graymont). Fighting Tuscarora: The Autobiography of Chief Clinton Rickard. Syracuse: Syracuse University Press, 1973.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahlins, Marshall. Stone Age Economics. Chicago: Aldine Press, 1972.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sauer, Carl O. Agricultural Origins and Dispersals. Cambridge: Massachusetts Institute of Technology Press, 1965.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Schaaf, Greg. The Great Law of Peace and the Constitution of the United States of America. Pamphlet published by Tree of Peace Society, 1987.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shattuck, George C. The Oneida Land Claims: A Legal History. Syracuse: Syracuse University Press, 1991.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tehanetorens. Roots of the Iroquois. Summertown, Tennessee: Native Voices, 2000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tehanetorens. Sacred Song of the Hermit Thrush. Summertown, Tennessee: Book Publishing Company, 1995.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tehanetorens. Wampum Belts of the Iroquois. Summertown, Tennessee: Book Publishing Company, 1999.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vecsey, Christopher and William A. Starna, eds. Iroquois Land Claims. Syracuse: Syracuse University Press, 1988.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Venne, Sharon H. Our Elders Understand Our Rights: Evolving International Law Regarding Indigenous Peoples. Penticton: Theytus Books, Ltd., 1998.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wagner, Sally Roesch. Sisters in Spirit: Haudenosaunee (Iroquois) Influence on Early American Feminists. Summertown, Tennessee: Native Voices, 2001.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wallace, Anthony F. C. The Death and Rebirth of the Seneca. New York: Alfred A. Knopf, 1970.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wallace, Paul. White Roots of Peace: The Iroquois Book of Life. Santa Fe: Clear Light Publishers, 1994.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
White, Lynn, Jr. Medieval Technology and Social Change. London: Oxford University Press, 1966.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wolf, Eric R. Peasants. Englewood Cliffs: Prentice-Hall, Foundations of Modern Anthropology Series, 1966.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Journals and Articles ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hauptman, Laurence M. &amp;quot;Four Eastern New Yorkers and Seneca Lands: A Study in Treaty Making,&amp;quot; in New York Valley Regional Review 13 (March 1996), 1-19.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hauptman, Laurence M. &amp;quot;The State&#039;s Men, the Salvation Seekers, and the Seneca: The Supplemental Treaty of Buffalo Creek, 1842,&amp;quot; in New York History 78, No. 1 (January 1997): 51-82.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Manley, Henry S. &amp;quot;The Treaty of Buffalo Creek,&amp;quot; in New York History 27 (July 1947), 313-328.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Powless, Irving Jr. &amp;quot;The Haudenosaunee, Yesterday and Today: A Conflict of Concepts and Laws,&amp;quot; in Buffalo Law Review 46, No. 3 (1998), 1083-1084.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Washinawatok, Ingrid. &amp;quot;International Emergence: Twenty-One Years at the United Nations,&amp;quot; in New York City Law Review 3 (1999), 41-57.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Woo, Grace Li Xiu. &amp;quot;Canada&#039;s Forgotten Founders: The Modern Significance of the Haudenosaunee (Iroquois) Application for Membership in the League of Nations,&amp;quot; in Global Development Journal (GDJ) 2003 (1) (Coventry: University of Warwick, 2003).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Government Publications ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
New York State Assembly, Report of the Special Committee to Investigate the Indian Problem of the State of New York—Appointed by the Assembly of 1888. Albany: Troy Press, 1889.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Royal Commission on Aboriginal Peoples, Report of the Royal Commission on Aboriginal Peoples. Ottawa: Canada Communication Group, 1996.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
United States Congress Senate Select Committee on Indian Affairs Report 100-565, Acknowledging the Contribution of the Iroquois Confederacy of Nations to the Development of the United States Constitution. Washington, DC: U.S. Government Printing Office, 1988.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Radio Broadcasts ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deskaheh, radio broadcast over station WHAM (Rochester, N.Y.), March 10, 1925.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Index ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Abrams, Frank, 72, 130&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Act of August 9, 1888, 134n. 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Act of March 3, 1871 (United States), 141n. 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aguilar, Juan, 20&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Akwesasne territory, 29, 30, 113, 133n. 4, 133n. 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alcatraz Island, occupation of, 9-10, 18&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Algonquin, 106, 107&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alleghany, 101&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
allotments, 134n. 6, 138n. 20&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
American Indian Movement (AIM), 10, 18&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
American Revolution, 110&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
animals, extinction rate, 89&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
assimilation policy&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Deskaheh&#039;s last speech, 49-53&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- missionaries, 107-108&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- political rationale, 97-98&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- strategy, 25, 111-114&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Termination Acts, 113, 142n. 15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aymara, 63&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bad Wound, Louie, 18, 24&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Banks, Dennis, 18&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Barreiro, José, 12&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beauvais, Thomas, 99&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bellecourt, Clyde, 20, 67&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Berman, Howard, 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bolivia&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- intimidation tactics, 73, 75&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Rhodesian settlers, 63, 74&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bomberry, Daniel, 12, 72, 75, 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Boots, Francis, 72&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brando, Marlon, 20&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Buffalo Creek, 110&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bureau of Indian Affairs (BIA) (United States), 10, 18&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canada&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- assimilation policy, 29, 42, 111&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- citizenship laws, 29, 134n. 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- colonialism of, 97, 99, 114&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- and Grand River, 29, 45, 95, 138n. 10&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Indian status, 98&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- police action, 42-43&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- and returning soldiers, 50&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- and Thames River government, 101&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- WWI draft, 42, 136n. 4&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canada Indian Act, 99, 134n. 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canadian Department of Indian Affairs (DIA), 16&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cayuga, 11, 80, 110&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- land claims, 117, 143n. 18&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- treaties, 101, 139n. 17&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cayuqueo, Nilo, 127&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Champlain, Samuel de, 100, 106&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Charlie, Rose, 20&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cherokee, 111&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Christianity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- goals of, 87-88, 98&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- missionaries, 107-108&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- and racism, 15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Roman Catholic Church, 14-15, 23, 96&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
citizenship&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Canada, 29, 134n. 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- separate, 111&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- United States, 29, 101, 112-113, 133n. 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Citizenship Act (United States) (1924), 133n. 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
clans, 35, 81, 107&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
colonialism&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- and Christianity, 107&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- decolonization process, 118, 125&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- definition, 68&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- and market economy, 98, 106-108, 111-115, 121&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- political rationale, 97-98&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- principles of, 95-97&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Columbia, Indian rights, 126&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Columbia River demonstrations, 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commission on Human Rights, 22&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Condori, Juan, 60, 62, 63, 66&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Constitution of the Five Nations, 36-39&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Constitution of the Six Nations, 92-93&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Convention on Biological Diversity, 22&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cook, Katsi, 127&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cornelious, Carol, 127&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cuba, 131&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dawes Act (United States), 101, 112, 142n. 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Decker, George P., 43&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deere, Phillip, 20, 62, 64-65, 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Delaware Indians, 110&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deskaheh&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- last speech, 48-54&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- legacy, 13, 29, 54&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- life of, 41-43&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- petition to League of Nations, 43-47&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
discovery, doctrine of, 15, 21&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
discovery of America, 14-15, 95&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- 500th anniversary of, 22-23&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Domestic Mode of Production, 104, 115&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Draft Declaration on the Rights of the World&#039;s Indigenous Peoples, 22, 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Economic and Social Council (ECOSOC), 21&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
education and assimilation, 98, 112, 114&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Elijah, Bruce, 72&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Emergency Response International Network (ERIN), 129&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
England. See Great Britain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
environmental issues&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- atomic energy, 90&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- delegates to UN conference, 102, 140n. 28&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- energy conservation, 120-121&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- extinction rate, 89&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Indian participation in, 22&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- natural resources, 85-89, 116, 120-121&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- nuclear power, 121&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- respect for Nature, 21, 23-24, 27, 86, 123&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Eskimos, 98&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
European culture. See Western Civilization&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
export crops, 122-123&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
family unit, 105, 116&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
firearms, 106-107&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
fire-starting ceremony, 64-65&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
fishing rights, 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
France, fur trade, 106-107&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Freire, Paulo, 91&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fujii, Nichidatsu, 89&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
fur trade, 106-107&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ganienkeh, 143n. 16&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gaskin, Stephen, 75&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
General Allotment Act (United States), 134n. 6, 139n. 20&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Geneva conference 1977&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- delegates to, 20, 30, 130&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- entrance procession, 66-68&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- epilogue, 77-78&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- experiences, 55-57, 69-72&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- first day agenda, 60-62&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- first day speakers, 62-66&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- intimidation tactics, 73-75&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- outcomes, 128-129&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- passport, Haudenosaunee, 57-60&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- picture taking tactics, 75&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- position papers, 11-12, 21, 81-84&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- press conference, 68-69&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- recommendation of, 144n. 19&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Segwalise&#039;s speech, 55-57, 75-77&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- status of, 135n. 14&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
genocide, 97, 115&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gilbert, Marci, 58&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
giveaways, 104, 107&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;The Good Word&amp;quot; (Handsome Lake), 40&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Grand Council of the Haudenosaunee, 11-12, 21, 27, 133n. 4&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Grand River Country&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- independence of, 42-43, 45&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- and traditional government, 29, 45, 101, 112, 138n. 10&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Great Britain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- colonial policy, 50, 100, 110, 114&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- settlers, 108-109&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Great Law of Peace, 34-39, 80-81, 92-93, 137n. 1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Great Peacemaker, the&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- legacy, 39-40, 92-93&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- principles of law, 34-39&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- teachings of, 24, 31-34, 80-81&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Great Tree of Peace, 36, 81&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Guaymi, 62-63&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Halbritter, Ray, 72, 130&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Haldimand Treaty (1784), 46-47, 135n. 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Handsome Lake, 28, 40&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Haudenosaunee&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- and assimilation, 111-115&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- attempt at international recognition, 102, 140n. 27&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- beaver trade, 106-107&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- and colonialism, 27-30, 100-102&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- the Confederacy, 110-111&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- definition, 80&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- displacement, 108-110&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- economic history, 103-118&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- and European ideas, 39&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- future of, 115-118&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Grand Council, 11-12, 21, 27, 133n. 4&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- historical roots, 80-84&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- legal history, 92-93, 98-102&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- as oppressed nation, 114&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- the Peacemaker, 24, 31-36, 39&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- political structure, 11, 26-27, 92-93&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- reoccupied lands, 116-117&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- spiritualism, 85-86, 104&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- traditional economy, 34-35, 38, 103-105, 115-116&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- traditional laws, 31-40&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- treaty period, 110-111&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He Crow, Francis, 62, 64&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Henry, Leo, 72, 130&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hiawatha. See Great Peacemaker&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hill, David, 99&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Holland, fur trade, 106-107&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Horne, Angus, 99&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
human rights&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- culture of the 1960s, 16&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- forum to register complaints, 23&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Indigenous peoples, 21-23, 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- violations, 129&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
hunting rights, 81&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
illegitimacy, in government policy, 98&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indian Act (Canada), 99, 134n. 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indian Citizenship Act (ICA) (United States), 101, 112&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indian Reorganization Act (IRA) (United States), 19, 29, 99&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indian rights movement, 9-12, 16-18, 22-23, 127-128, 129&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indian status, 98, 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indigenous peoples&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- definition, 68&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- destruction of, 63, 90-91, 126-127&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- financial independence, 129&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- future of, 126-131&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- historical roots, 83-84&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- human rights, 21-23, 125&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- international representation, 11-12, 21-23, 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- legal status, 98, 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- protection and liberation, 91, 117, 126-131&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
International Indian Treaty Council (IITC), 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
international law, 11-12, 21-23&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Iroquois Confederacy. See Haudenosaunee&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Jay Treaty, 41&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Jemison, Mary, 41&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Johnson, William, 108-109&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kakwirakiron, 61-62&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kanien:ke, 116&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kanienkehaka, 101&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kinzua Dam Act (United States), 101&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lake Champlain, 106&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lakota Treaty Council, 18&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
land, ownership&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- displacement, 101, 108-111&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- encroachment, 10, 29-30&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- lawsuits, 143n. 17, 143n. 18&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- principles of colonialism, 95-97&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- private property, 105&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- reoccupied lands, 116-117&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- tools of conquest, 113-114&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Law of Nations, 15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
leadership issues, 10, 104-105&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Leaf, Jimmy, 72, 130&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
League of Nations, 43, 46, 50&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
legal status, 98, 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
liberation technologies, 122, 123&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
liberation theology, 123, 125&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Little Feather, Sasheen, 20&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
locally based culture, 121-122&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lone Wolf, 99&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lyons, Lee, 17, 72, 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lyons, Oren, 14, 17, 20, 62, 72, 130&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Manuel, George, 127&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
market economy, 98, 115, 121, 122-123&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Martinez Cobo, José R., 21&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Marx, Karl, 92&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Maya, 71&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Means, Russell, 18, 60, 62, 63-64, 66, 74&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
media coverage&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Deskaheh in Geneva, 46-47&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Geneva conference 1977, 68-69&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Menchu Tum, Rigoberta, 129&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mendoza, José, 62, 77-78&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mexico&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- intimidation tactics, 74&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Zapatista movement, 129&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Military Service Act (Canada), 136n. 4&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Millape, Antonio, 20&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Misquito, 74&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mitchell, Joe, 127&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mohawk, 11, 110&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Akwesasne territory, 29, 30, 113, 133n. 4, 133n. 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- displacement, 108-110&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- reoccupied lands, 116-117&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mohawk, John, 21, 127&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mohawk Council of Akwesasne, 133n. 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mohawk Nation Council of Chiefs, 133n. 4&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mohawk River, 108&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Monongye, David, 66, 67, 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Montour, Art, 59, 72, 130&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Morgan, Lewis Henry, 93&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mother Earth, 23-24, 27, 85, 86&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Muñoz, Mary, 127&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Natalio, 74&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Native movement, 9-12, 16-18, 22-23, 127-128, 129&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Natural Law, 34&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
natural resources&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- depletion of, 120-121&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- history of use, 87-89, 116&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Natural World Peoples, 68, 81, 86&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
nature, respect for, 21, 23-24, 27, 86, 123&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
New York State&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- jurisdiction, 29, 101&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- obtaining of treaties, 28&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- removal policy, 111&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- treaties with, 101, 139n. 17&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NGOs (Non-Governmental Organizations), 11, 15, 60-61&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nicaragua, intimidation tactics, 74&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Oakes, Aaron, 72, 113, 130&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Oakes, Richard, 10, 18&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Oglala Sioux, 18&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Oneida, 11, 80, 110&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- land claims, 117, 143n. 17&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- treaties, 101, 139n. 17&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ongwe Honwekah. See Way of Life&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Onkwehon:we, 85, 86&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Onondaga, 11, 80, 114&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
oppressed nation, definition, 114&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Panama, 62&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
passport, Haudenosaunee (Six Nations), 42, 57-60&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Patterson, Harry, 99&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Patterson, Stuart, 72, 130&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
peace, definition, 33&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Peacemaker. See Great Peacemaker&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pedagogy of the Oppressed (Freire), 91&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pequot, 107&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Permanent Forum on Indigenous Issues, 21, 23, 126, 129, 130&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
plenary power, 100&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Political Question Doctrine, 100-101&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
poverty, 63, 122&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Public Law 280 (United States), 134n. 10, 142n. 15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Public Law 88-533 (United States), 101, 140n. 25&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
racism, 15, 97&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red Shirt, Larry, 17, 18, 62, 64, 65, 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
relocation policies, 18, 28, 101&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Removal Policy, 111&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rickard, Clinton, 41, 47, 99, 140n. 27&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Roman Catholic Church&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- lack of apology, 15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- papal donation, 14-15, 23, 96&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sacred Pipe Ceremony, 62, 64, 66&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sanchez, Marie, 20&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sasheen Little Feather, 20&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
schools and assimilation, 98, 112, 114&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Segwalise, 55-57, 75-77&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
self-determination&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- decolonization process, 115, 125&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Indian rights movement, 9-12, 16-18, 22-23, 127-128, 129&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- last speech of Deskaheh, 48-54&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- minority status, 62-63&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- of political institutions, 95-102&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- right to, 22, 25, 30&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Seneca, 11, 80, 101, 110, 117&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- treaties, 111, 141n. 5, 141n. 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
seven generations, 24-25, 104&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shawnee, 110&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shenandoah, Audrey, 17, 72, 130&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shenandoah, Leon, 72, 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Simcoe Treaty, 135n. 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sitting Bull, 14&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Six Nation Confederacy. See Haudenosaunee&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Skenandore, Artley, 72&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Smithsonian Institution, Taino human remains, 130-131&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Snake, Reuben, 127&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Solomon, Art, 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
sovereignty. See self-determination&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
spiritualism, 85-86, 104&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
spirituality, 33, 120, 125&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Spotted Horse, David, 20, 65&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
St. Regis, 113. See also Akwesasne territory&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
St. Regis Tribal Council, 133n. 4&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sundown, Corbett, 72, 130&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Susquehanna River, 108&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Taino human remains, 130-131&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
technological change&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- herding of animals, 86-87&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- importance of, 119-120&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- iron, use of, 88&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
termination policies, 18, 111, 113&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Termination Acts, 113, 142n. 15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thames River community, 101&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thomas, Daniel (Rokwaho), 127&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thompson, Loran, 72, 130&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thompson, Louie, 72, 130&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tonawanda, 117, 141n. 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Trade and Intercourse Act (United States), 143n. 17, 143n. 18&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
traditional economy, 34-35, 38, 103-105, 115-116&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
traditional government&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Grand Council, 11-12, 21, 27&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- interference in, 29, 45, 99-102, 112&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- principles of, 34-39&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- structure of, 26-27, 92-93&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
traditional values&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Indian identity, 77-78&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- liberation theology, 123, 125&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- renewal of, 16, 30, 125&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- teachings of Handsome Lake, 28, 40&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Way of Life, 26, 85-86, 103-105&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Trail of Broken Treaties, 10-11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Trail of Tears, 111&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
travel, U.S./Canada, 41&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
treaties&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- dishonoring of, 114-115&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- obtaining of, 28, 141n. 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- with the U.S., 100-101, 110-111&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Treaty of Amity, Commerce and Navigation, 135n. 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Treaty of Buffalo Creek of January 15, 1838, 141n. 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Treaty of Buffalo Creek of May 20, 1842, 141n. 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Treaty of Fort Stanwix, 133n. 1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Treaty of Paris (1783), 110&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
treaty rights, demonstrations for, 9-10&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Treaty with the Mohawk (1797), 101&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Treaty with the Potawatomi, 134n. 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tree of Peace, Great, 36&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
tribal self-government, 99-102&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tuscarora, demonstration at, 10&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tuscarora nation, 11, 108&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tuteloe, 110&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Two Row Treaty (1613), 100, 138n. 12&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Two Row Wampum Belt, 138n. 12&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
United Nations&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Earth Summit 1992, 22&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- and NGOs, 11, 15, 60-61&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- role of, 15-16, 21-23&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- study of treaty rights, 22&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
United Nations Decolonization Committee, 118&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
United States&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- assimilation policy, 29&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- citizenship laws, 29, 101, 112-113, 133n. 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- colonialism of, 97, 114&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- energy policy, 120-121&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- exploitation of Indigenous peoples, 63&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Indian status, 98&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- obtaining of treaties, 28, 100-101, 110-111&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- plenary power, 100&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
United States Bureau of Indian Affairs (BIA), 10, 18, 113&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
United States Constitution, 100, 137n. 1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unity Caravan, 16, 17-18, 127&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Urban Indians, 98&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Year of the World&#039;s Indigenous People,&amp;quot; 22-23&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wapepah, Bill, 20&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
warfare&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- and the beaver trade, 106-107&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- colonial, 27, 53-54, 110&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- and the Confederacy, 37&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- European, 108&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Washinawatok, Ingrid, 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Washington, DC, march of 1972, 10&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Way of Life, 26, 85-86, 103-105&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Western Civilization&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- definition, 68&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- feudalism, 93-95&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- future of, 90-91, 116, 120&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- legal systems, 95-101&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- market economy, 98, 115, 121, 122-123&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- political histories, 119&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- rise of, 86-85&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Whipple Report, 112, 139n. 17, 142n. 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wilson, Richard, 18&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
women&#039;s rights, 38&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Working Group for Indigenous Populations (WGIP), 21, 22&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
World War I, Aboriginal volunteers, 42, 136n. 4&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wounded Knee, occupation, 11, 18, 20&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Zephier, Greg, 20&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>The Phantom Bull</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=Library:Kayanerenk%C3%B3:wa:_The_Great_Law_of_Peace&amp;diff=91858</id>
		<title>Library:Kayanerenkó:wa: The Great Law of Peace</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=Library:Kayanerenk%C3%B3:wa:_The_Great_Law_of_Peace&amp;diff=91858"/>
		<updated>2026-07-14T19:50:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;The Phantom Bull: Via DeepSeek, I converted the text into the MediaWiki wiki format.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Library work|title=Kayanerenkó:wa: The Great Law of Peace|author=Kayanesenh Paul Williams|publisher=University of Manitoba Press|published_date=October 26, 2018|type=Book|isbn=0887558216 (ISBN-10), 978-0887558214 (ISBN-13)|source=https://annas-archive.gl/md5/ad82a96d29027a5641252ac3d8605a77}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== About Names ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To name something or someone is an act of power. In Genesis, God gave Adam authority to name the animals. The naming confirmed dominion over them. European explorers all over the world renamed places, mountains, and waters after their own people, eclipsing original names and the peoples who gave them. The people who provided the information and inspiration for this book often had several names in the course of their lifetimes. For the Haudenosaunee, people&#039;s personal names have coexisted with their European names for more than three centuries. Today, it is common to refer to &amp;quot;real names&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;English names,&amp;quot; using the former for some purposes and the latter for others.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use only English names would disrespect people&#039;s identities. To use only their Haudenosaunee names would lead to confusion when it came time to cite their publications or quote from historical accounts of their deeds and words.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
My solution has been to adopt the approach taken by the Haudenosaunee Documentation Committee for Haudenosaunee citizenship documents: that is, to place a person&#039;s Haudenosaunee name as that person&#039;s first name. This is consistent with the concept of the name being &#039;&#039;ón:kwe&#039;&#039;, first or original. The first reference in this text to any individual would follow this rule: Joagquisho Oren Lyons, for example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where a person has only a Haudenosaunee name or only a European name, there is no issue: Tekanissorens and Woodrow Wilson stand as they are.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where an individual becomes a &#039;&#039;royá:ner&#039;&#039;, a Confederacy chief, I deliberately use his title, which replaces his original name. Thus, Hai:wes became Deskahe Steven Jacobs. Using both the English name and the title helps to distinguish individuals and at the same time to acknowledge the continuity of titles: there have also been Deskahe Levi General, Deskahe Alexander General, and Deskahe Harvey Longboat. When referring to people who are no longer living, I have not used the traditional suffix &#039;&#039;–ken&#039;&#039; after their names. It would have been correct, but it would have meant further confusing those unfamiliar with Haudenosaunee customs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I had considered distinguishing between people who had been born Haudenosaunee and people who had received names through adoption. Since the law does not distinguish between them, I will not do so either. Warraghyhagey William Johnson and Dayodekane Seth Newhouse are named in the same way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Treating Haudenosaunee names as &amp;quot;first names&amp;quot; provides a solution to the issue of citations in footnotes. When an individual is mentioned for the first time, I use his or her full name. Subsequent references to the individual will use only the surname, unless it is necessary to distinguish between several individuals with the same surname.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It&#039;s complicated. It&#039;s important. It&#039;s right. You&#039;ll get used to it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Ohe’n:ton Karihwatékwen: Words Before All Else ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The enduring legal systems of the world are the result of people bringing their minds together to foster order and peace. For the People of the Longhouse, the Haudenosaunee, giving thanks is the first step towards law and the beginning of any meeting of the people.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In the 1862 Council at Cattaraugus, it is stated “when our forefathers finished the law they in the first place would return thanks.” Parker 1916, 145.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Words of thanksgiving, Kanonhweratonhsera, are spoken at the opening (and closing) of every council, whether internal or with other people or nations. Viewed through the lens of Kanonhweratonhsera, the world is an orderly place: every part of the natural world has been given instructions and responsibilities, and each continues to fulfill those instructions as well as it can. This gratitude reminds us, too, that we humans are no more important than the other living parts of the world. Kanonhweratonhsera is not a recitation of a hierarchy. It is not a prayer. Giving thanks as people gathered together is the beginning of being of one mind. As they come together, our minds are &amp;quot;bundled together&amp;quot; into one: entitewahwe’non:ni ne onkwa’nikonikon:ra.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The nations of the Haudenosaunee are also brought together into one family in the same way.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Kanonhweratonhsera reminds us that order is the natural and intentional condition of creation, and that being of one good mind is the ideal condition of the people.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Great Power came from up in the sky, and now it is functioning,&lt;br /&gt;
the Great Power that we accepted when we reached consensus.&lt;br /&gt;
So now our house has become complete.&lt;br /&gt;
Now, therefore, we shall give thanks, that is,&lt;br /&gt;
we shall thank the Creator of the earth, that is,&lt;br /&gt;
he who has planted all the kinds of weeds&lt;br /&gt;
and all the varieties of shrubs&lt;br /&gt;
and all the kinds of trees;&lt;br /&gt;
and springs,&lt;br /&gt;
flowing water, such as rivers&lt;br /&gt;
and large bodies of water, such as lakes;&lt;br /&gt;
and the sun that keeps moving by day,&lt;br /&gt;
and by night the moon,&lt;br /&gt;
and where the sky is, the stars, which no one is able to count;&lt;br /&gt;
moreover, the way it is on earth in relation to which&lt;br /&gt;
no one is able to tell the extent to which it is to their benefit, that is,&lt;br /&gt;
the people who he created and who will continue to live on earth.&lt;br /&gt;
This, then, is the reason we thank him, the one with great power,&lt;br /&gt;
the one who is the Creator,&lt;br /&gt;
for that which will now move forward,&lt;br /&gt;
the Good Message and the Power and the Peace; the Great Law.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Skaniatariio John Arthur Gibson 1912, 294–96. Ohe’n:ton karihwatékwen has been translated as “the words that come before all else.” The term is currently applied by many Mohawks to the Opening, or Thanksgiving Address, which, indeed, is spoken before all other business. Horatio Hale (1883) uses Ohe’n:ton karihwatékwen to describe the Three Bare Words spoken to visiting nations or delegations when they are met at the woods’ edge, before being allowed into the clearing surrounding the village. Those are also words spoken to the visitors before all others—words of comfort and condolence.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Several centuries ago, a new kind of law was born in the northeast of North America, or Turtle Island.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In the Haudenosaunee Creation story, the woman who fell from the Sky World spread the first land on the back of a sea turtle. Turtle Island can be North America, or it can be all the land in the world.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The Great Law of Peace—Kayanerenkó:wa&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hale (1883, 33) wrote: “The name by which their constitution or organic law is known among them is &#039;&#039;kayanerenh&#039;&#039;, to which the epitaph -&#039;&#039;kowa&#039;&#039;, ‘great,’ is frequently added. This word, &#039;&#039;kayanerenh&#039;&#039;, is sometimes rendered ‘law’ or ‘league,’ but its proper meaning seems to be ‘peace.’ . . . Its root is &#039;&#039;yanere&#039;&#039;, signifying ‘noble’ or ‘excellent’, which yields, among many derivatives, &#039;&#039;kayanere&#039;&#039;, ‘goodness’, and &#039;&#039;kayanerenh&#039;&#039;, ‘peace’ or ‘peacefulness.’” The concept of moral goodness pervades the law: it reappears in the word usually translated as “chiefs”: one is called a &#039;&#039;royaner&#039;&#039;, from &#039;&#039;ro&#039;&#039;, “he is” &#039;&#039;ianere&#039;&#039;, “of goodness”: that is, “a man of the Good.” The Good Message of Peace, Power, and Righteousness, as we shall see, goes beyond “good is better than evil because it is nicer,” and into the very nature of human beings. A deeper root is -&#039;&#039;yan&#039;&#039;, meaning “way” or “path,” so that &#039;&#039;iánere&#039;&#039; would mean a proper or good way or path (which reverberates with Taoism). See Momaday 1997, 38: “I believe that her word &#039;&#039;good&#039;&#039; meant many things; for one thing it meant ‘right’ or ‘appropriate.’” The prefix &#039;&#039;ka-&#039;&#039; indicates something that was made, generally by people, as distinct from something that exists naturally. In the end, it is a “great good way of being that was made.” If, as Tehahenteh Frank Miller suggests, the root &#039;&#039;ian&#039;&#039; refers to the stride that, once it gains direction, becomes a path, then the root is in effect a way of walking or conducting oneself. It is a way of life or living—as opposed to the way of death and killing that it replaced.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; —is a message of peace, power, and righteousness. The message was carried, at first, by one inspired messenger. With immense courage, patience, and authority, he took his message of peace and law to five nations trapped in cycles of bloodshed and revenge. This Peacemaker found a way to break those bloody cycles, and to shape a legal system that would maintain peace for the future. The five nations are the Mohawk, Oneida, Onondaga, Cayuga, and Seneca, and once the law bound them together as one family in one structure, they began to call themselves Haudenosaunee, the People of the Longhouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In places shattered in the early twenty-first century by internal warfare, like Rwanda, Ethiopia, Northern Ireland, Congo, Syria, Afghanistan, and the Balkans, fostering harmony and stability for the future is at least as challenging as stopping the violence. If the causes of the bloodshed—the ill will, feelings, and factors that caused and promoted the wars—are still present, the cycles will start again as soon as the forces that restrain them leave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker understood that, for peace to exist, people must not only be rational but must also accept that other people are capable of rationality, for rational minds will seek, create, and maintain peace. The story of the making of the Great Law is thus also about ways of restoring people to rationality. It charts a map for a healthy society, not just for healthy individuals.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Skén:nen&#039;&#039;, “peace,” includes the sense that health—of the body and the mind—is a vital element of peace, for a person without health will not be at peace, and a people without health will also be without peace.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The makers of the Great Law of Peace assumed that good-mindedness is a natural and proper state for human beings, and that a person, a family, or a nation taken to antisocial conduct by grief, anger, pain, or greed can be brought back to the right path.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the ceremony of Condolence, the Peacemaker created a compassionate way to break the cycle, clear the people&#039;s minds, and allow them to &amp;quot;put away the bones and blood that cried for revenge.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Among the Cherokees, as well, the dead called out for revenge: “crying blood” would haunt relatives who let a death go unanswered. Sturm 2002, 32.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It became sacred and honourable as well as logical to choose peace over war and to look to the future (and consider the welfare of future generations) instead of listening to the hurt and angry voices of the past. The Condolence opened the door to peace and harmony.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Great Law also accomplished the necessary second step: it built the structure that maintained the peace. It realistically recognized that peace is never static or secure, but needs to be maintained, preserved, recovered, and spread. Peace is a process, not a state.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Haudenosaunee languages are said to be made of verbs rather than nouns. This promotes understanding that things like “peace,” “fire,” and “treaty” are ongoing processes rather than objects or isolable events.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The law was not made up completely of new ideas. It was deliberately designed for the people who embraced it. It includes many elements of the societies and governments that were already in place. Its symbols—the longhouse, the pine, the eagle—are things the people would have seen every day. For a people whose language is metaphoric, the law was a long set of metaphors. The new law was pragmatic. It kept, strengthened, and extrapolated what worked well. It discarded what was not working. It broadened useful concepts. It protected government and society against some of the people&#039;s unchangeable weaknesses and harmful tendencies. It created a democracy without the confrontations inherent in choosing leaders by voting. Some of its elements were profoundly new. It was indeed a message of peace, power, and righteousness.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the Good Mind—Ka’nikonhrí:io—is a first element of the law, the next, pervasive one, woven throughout the law, is the idea of family. All the people are related.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The sense of family is not restricted to human beings. The Haudenosaunee call the Earth “our mother,” the moon “our grandmother,” the sun “our elder brother,” and the animals and birds “our brothers and sisters,” out of a sense of true kinship, and in recognition of the shared life force of all aspects of the world.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; They are kin, living within a single extended longhouse. As family, they cannot shed one another&#039;s blood, and they cannot make war on one another. As family, as well, they bear an obligation to help one another. Tribal peoples all over the world carry this sense of family. It can engender a strong, aggressive sense of ethnic identity, leading to blood vengeance when provoked.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Non-tribal peoples sometimes assert that tribalism has an inevitable primitive and violent streak (see, for example, Benjamin Barber’s 1995 book, &#039;&#039;Jihad vs. McWorld&#039;&#039;). Yet tribal societies need not be violent, and need not be unsophisticated, nor is technology a prerequisite to intelligence.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Instead, the Peacemaker transformed the nature of family, allowing it to break the bonds of blood and to generously embrace strangers, to take in outsiders by adoption and by welcome. The Great White Roots of the Tree of Peace not only spread the Great Law over the earth, fostering a landscape of peace: they also encouraged the people who were touched by them to become part of the family of peace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Great Law, despite its constant references to family terms, created a civic, not an ethnic, society.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In &#039;&#039;Blood and Belonging&#039;&#039;, Michael Ignatieff (1994) thoughtfully considered the nature and consequences of nationalism, including the difference between ethnic and civic nationalism.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Family&amp;quot; meant support, responsibility, and mutual aid. If humanity follows a path from band to tribe to nation to nation-state,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In the first theoretical anthropological expression of this thinking, Ta-ya-dao-wu-kah Lewis Henry Morgan wrote &#039;&#039;Ancient Society&#039;&#039; in 1877. He divided the stages of human social and political development into savagery, barbarism, and civilization. More modern anthropologists have mostly abandoned this linear model. The idea that some forms of social and political organization are far superior to others led almost inevitably to the idea that superior peoples have the right to colonize inferior ones, and in the process to take their lands and resources. The evolutionary theory of anthropology has since been discredited, though it found a home in British colonialist law with the case of &#039;&#039;Re Southern Rhodesia&#039;&#039; in 1919, followed by Canadian courts’ insistence that anyone claiming Aboriginal rights or title must show that they constituted, at the time of “first contact” with Europeans, an “organized society.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; one might say that most Indigenous (or tribal) peoples insist on family relationships as their identifiers, while most nations define themselves by bloodlines, without insisting on family relations between their citizens, and nation-states exhibit a spectrum from ethnic groups (like Serbs) to purely civic ones (like the United States). If it can be said that the Haudenosaunee moved from tribe to nation, it must also be said that, unlike other peoples in the world, they did away with the blood requirement while maintaining family as an essential element of society. Every Haudenosaunee citizen, according to traditional law, is so because he or she is a member of a family and a clan. Adoptees are brought into families and clans. Belonging to a family brings webs of reciprocal responsibility and relations—and a social support system. Within a family, people help one another.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another crucial aspect of the Great Law is its constant closeness to the natural world.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gonwaiannih Audrey Shenandoah (2006) pointed out that, in Haudenosaunee languages, “We have no word for nature.” When the law was made, there was no other kind of world. Today, we need to distinguish between the “natural world” and the world of cities and cleared lands, mines and forestry, just as we distinguish between an acoustic and an electric guitar, or an analogue or digital clock. At one time, for everyone, there was only the “natural world.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The obligation to help one another reflects how the Haudenosaunee see the natural world, as a balanced system that retains its balance through the efforts of all its components. The web and circle of life are maintained because each living thing is carrying out its own responsibilities. The natural world is a web of symbiotic relationships, of organisms that are partners, interdependent and mutually supportive.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Robert Venables (2010, 41) states that “since the Creator filled the world with symbiotic, equal souls who nevertheless carry out specific functions, the most logical premise upon which to base an organized human community was also communal.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furthermore, the law, like the longhouse that is one of its enduring symbols, requires maintenance. The maintenance is cooperative and collaborative: there is no room in this legal system for institutionalized opposition, or for adversarial relationships. While the principles behind its architecture remain constant, inevitably the processes and relationships that sustain it will evolve as society changes. There is a strong sense that the law and the peace are constantly being made, and are not ever going to be completed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also constant within the law is the idea of balance. There is balance between the authority of men and that of women. There is balance in council between the &amp;quot;Elder Brothers&amp;quot; and the &amp;quot;Younger Brothers.&amp;quot; When sorrow affects people&#039;s minds, the Condolence restores balance. In constitutional terms, such a system could be said to contain &amp;quot;checks and balances,&amp;quot; yet the Haudenosaunee would stress that the checks are less important than the balances. In this sense, balance can mean harmony, but it also evokes a sense of duality. In the natural world, examples of this duality abound: night and day; male and female; young and old; forest and meadow. The two sides of the longhouse, divided by the imaginary line down the middle of the building, reflect this, and so do many aspects of the law.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Haudenosaunee names also contain frequent reference to “two-ness”: Tekanawita; Tekarihoken; Tekanissorens; Tekahionhake; Thayendenega—all names of crucial or prominent people—contain &#039;&#039;teka-&#039;&#039;, the prefix meaning “two.” Haudenosaunee names contain fewer references to other numbers, while English names rarely refer to numbers at all. Many common Haudenosaunee words begin with &#039;&#039;ta-&#039;&#039;, signifying two-ness.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Several times in any account of the making of the Kayanerenkó:wa, tasks are assigned to two men—rarely to a single one.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;“Hayewatha sent two men to summon Tekanawita”; “Thereupon the chief chose two men to send”; “Now you two will depart to go and look for smoke” (all in twenty pages of Gibson 1899). Why send two? Several pragmatic reasons. A single messenger is vulnerable. He can get lonely. The two can share tasks. If something happens to one, the other carries on. Often, one is younger, and is learning along the way, by carrying out the task with a mentor or companion. Sometimes, the two represent different sides or factions in the community. Sometimes, they can corroborate what happened, where a single envoy might not be able to: it is useful to have a witness.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The great partners, the Peacemaker and Hiawatha, work together like the two sides, as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since it draws part of its inspiration from the way the people understand the natural world and how it works, Haudenosaunee leaders often call the Great Law &amp;quot;Natural Law.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;“There is one law which prevails over all law—and that’s the universal law, the natural law. And it will prevail no matter what this government says, no matter what any government says. And we are all subject to it. Indians recognize this, so they base their law on the natural law. The natural law and the original Indian governments are intertwined and they rest on one another” (Joagquisho Oren Lyons 1982, v). This is not to be confused with the “natural law” discussions of Western ethicists and philosophers—whether there exists a &#039;&#039;summum bonum&#039;&#039;, a set of things that is always good (or, conversely, whether there are acts that are always wrong), as a matter of nature rather than man-made values. Haudenosaunee law does not distinguish between human beings and other parts of the natural world in its reference to “natural law.” It is not a matter of good and bad, but rather of reflecting the way the world was created and operates naturally. We as humans can choose to live within its rules or to constantly defy them.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The inspiration from nature leads to an obligation: as a matter of responsibility, lawmakers must constantly consider the impact of their decisions on the natural world. This concern about the environment is not an aspect of most &amp;quot;modern&amp;quot; nation-state constitutions, and has only recently become a part of most administrative systems of government, now that climate change and the degradation of the global environment have made it urgent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As people who lived and travelled by rivers, the Haudenosaunee understood that the world flows; that time and space both flow; and that relationships also flow. They sought constant relationships, ones that would remain true through change. Within that sense of flow, the Haudenosaunee see the people who are alive at any one time as simply part of a larger people, one that includes those who have gone before and those who will come after. The nature of Haudenosaunee names is a reminder of this: names belong to a clan family,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Actually, a person’s name belongs to a family segment of a clan, an ohwátsi’re, but that detail will be addressed later. The important principle, for the purpose of this introduction, is that even names remind people of their place in a flowing, organic social and temporal environment.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; were carried by many other individuals in the past, and return to the clan to be carried by other people in the future. In the law, this sense of flow also places an express responsibility on lawmakers to consider the impact of their decisions on the coming seven generations, the people downstream from us, whose faces we will never see.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Compatible with this sense of flow is a consciousness of cycles: the year consists of seasons that are repetitions of the seasons of the previous year, and the ceremonies are the same as those of the year before and the year coming. They are re-enactments of earlier cycles and events. In that sense, the Haudenosaunee understanding of the nature of time is not the same as European or Euro-American perspectives, which explain time as a line rather than a cycle, and &amp;quot;progress&amp;quot; along that line as part of a deliberate path&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;There are many different ways of seeing time: for example, Maori tradition looks forward to the past, because it can be seen, while the future is still not revealed.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; towards a utopian ideal.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Sotsisowah John Mohawk (1999) began to address this fundamental difference in views in &#039;&#039;Utopian Legacies,&#039;&#039; seeking to explain the path of European destruction as a consequence of the thinking that a society that has a destination also acquires a sense of destiny, which in turn justifies the removal of other societies that stand in its way. Ronald Wright’s &#039;&#039;Short History of Progress&#039;&#039; (2011) examines the consequences of utopian societies’ ideologies and consumption.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Haudenosaunee history for the past four centuries can be understood not only in geopolitical and economic terms but also in terms of coping with the collisions between two very different views of humanity&#039;s purpose in the world.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Amber Meadow Adams has suggested that the principle of the Two Row Wampum can be found in the Creation Story: the victorious right-handed twin could have banished his brother far away, but instead says that, though they cannot live together, they should remain close because of their love for each other. So it is with the wampum between Haudenosaunee and Western society.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s oral and written versions of the narrative of the Great Law describe first how the Peacemaker brought this message to the people, and the challenges—physical, political, and spiritual—that he faced along the way. The story of how he brought the people together, and how he overcame and transformed obstacles, is a manual for the process of creating consensus (one-mindedness—ska’níkon:ra) as well as a series of demonstrations of the power of the Good Mind and Peace. The story inspires, for it is one of patience, thought, and strength.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon first reading or hearing the Great Law, one could easily conclude that the story of how the Peacemaker brought people and nations together is a pleasant legend, but not law. As a legend, it includes entertaining stories of the hero making a magical stone canoe; tricking a cannibal into changing his evil ways; surviving a great fall from a tree into raging waters; devising enchanting songs; and confronting monsters and evil wizards. These do not seem to be the stuff of law.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mark Twain wrote: “You believe in a book that has talking animals, wizards, witches, demons, sticks turning into snakes, burning bushes, food falling from the sky, people walking on water, and all sorts of magical, absurd and primitive stories, and you say that we are the ones that need help?”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; A North American lawyer looking for the Haudenosaunee constitution might conclude that the true lawmaking only began once the Peacemaker had gathered all the chiefs and clan mothers together in one place, and began to identify and create legislative authorities and structures. It would be easy to conclude this, but it would be wrong.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Kayanerenkó:wa is all law. Every part of it is law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The story of how the Peacemaker brought the people together is not just a story. Certainly it is full of metaphors and lessons, but the story also contains many of the fundamental concepts and principles of the law. All great messages are taught by metaphor. Jesus, in his &amp;quot;Good Message&amp;quot; (which is what &amp;quot;Gospel&amp;quot; means in Middle English), resorted to &amp;quot;parables.&amp;quot; Buddha told stories (and, as the Acoma Pueblo scholar Simon Ortiz said: &amp;quot;There are no truths, only stories&amp;quot;). Centuries later, history and metaphor become mixed. The message remains constant. Metaphor—the ability of human beings to think bridges between different concepts—is essential to visualizing any legal system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The meta-narrative of the Great Law provides the tone and spirit: the determination that the bloodshed must stop, and will stop. It also delivers the vital threshold of the law: the ceremony of Condolence, an act of caring, compassion, and respect that has no duplicate in any other legal system. The Condolence is a tool to stop the killing, open the path of peace, and raise up the minds of the people. It prepares them to accept the message of peace, power, and righteousness. It stands for a crucial concept: that before it can accept peace, a mind must be healed, and must be working properly and rationally. And another: that &amp;quot;peace&amp;quot; is a combination of factors, including health (mental and physical), for a person whose mind or body are in pain will be distracted from peace. And another: there is no mind so bad that it cannot be changed and healed by the right approach and the right power. This is not mere legend. It is the foundation of a distinct approach to law.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;It is the foundation of the Haudenosaunee approach to criminal law, for example. People do bad things because their minds cause them to do so. If they demonstrate that their mind has been made good again—usually by a sincere repentance—then there is no need to continue to punish them. For reconciliation, though, there must be both repentance and forgiveness:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Iroquois myths . . . make no promise about a future world. They are concerned completely with the foundations of a civil society, based on universal principles, natural law, and divine intervention, as a means of overcoming death. Not death in the abstract, but deaths of Iroquois caused by other Iroquois, deaths created by a fatal cycle of mourning and revenge. The myths define political, civil society as a means to comfort mourners and cleanse the mind of vengeance. (Vecsey 1988, 95)&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; And another: for a government of good minds to work, they must help one another, not oppose one another. People must recognize their fundamental kinship, their common humanity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The story of the making of the Great Law follows deliberate paths, temporally and geographically but also thoughtfully. The Peacemaker delivers his message first to individuals, then to communities, then to nations, and finally to the entire newly formed Confederacy. The themes of transformation and transcendence are constant: the Peacemaker is able to address what is dysfunctional, or not working properly, in individuals as well as in society, and to transform the power to injure into the responsibility to protect.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Part of the thinking behind judo, a Japanese way of self-defence as well as a sport, is to use an opponent’s strength and momentum against him. “Let him have his way,” a black-belt instructor once told me. The Peacemaker took this thinking a step further: he transformed the strength and power of his potential opponents (the Cannibal, Tsikonsaseh, Thadadaho, the warriors) into forces to create, maintain, and protect the peace. He did not allow them to attack him, and therefore never had to use his abilities to cause injury.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In many encounters described in the making of the law, the Peacemaker is confronted by a dangerous, angry person or group of people. One aspect of his genius was to recognize that there was nevertheless a capacity for rationality in these people. He dealt with their humanity. He was able to transform them from forces of chaos into peacekeepers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a modern world where the best minds can find no way to stop the killing in its &amp;quot;hot spots,&amp;quot; the Kayanerenkó:wa stands as an example of one people&#039;s way to end the violence and embrace peace. Of course, there have been other ways: Hobbes maintained that men form commonwealths (states) with the aim of &amp;quot;getting themselves out from that miserable condition of warre . . . of every man against every man,&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hobbes (1651) 1997, 67–70.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; which he saw as humanity&#039;s natural condition.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Is war a natural inclination for human beings? See Fry (2006), Wrangham (1997), and LeBlanc and Register (2003).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Nations, however, are as effective and efficient in pursuing war against others as they are in preventing internal strife. The League of Nations&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;There is a persistent legend that Woodrow Wilson, who had been a history professor at Princeton (his doctoral dissertation had addressed “Congressional Government”), commissioned research at the end of World War I into the nature and structure of the Haudenosaunee, as an example of a league of peace, and that he used that research in his promotion of the League of Nations. When Deskahe Levi General went to Geneva in 1924, he did so expecting a favourable reception from a league that he saw was a reflection, in its goals and ideals, of the principles of the Haudenosaunee.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; emerged from &amp;quot;the war to end all wars,&amp;quot; the First World War, and was unsuccessful in preventing a Second World War. Today&#039;s United Nations is intended to prevent aggression. Each of these leagues, in its statement of principles, recalls the Peacemaker&#039;s desire that the Great Peace should spread, as the white roots of the Tree of Peace would spread to the four directions. The inability of these leagues to achieve peace is often regarded as a failure of will, or a failure of true desire, on the part of the leaders of the nations for peace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A good mind will seek peace, create peace, maintain peace, and do so by uniting with other good minds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second part of the Kayanerenkó:wa is more technical and more constitutional.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Fenton (1998, 215–33) referred to the second part as “the by-laws of the League.” Perhaps, like most of the U.S. constitution, it consists of “by-laws.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Chiefs—&#039;&#039;rotiyanershon&#039;&#039;—are appointed, and given specific responsibilities. Procedures are set in place to maintain checks and balances among the nations of the League. Decision-making processes are firmed up, including ways to avoid and resolve disputes. The law provides for continuity, not transition. The distinct roles of men and women are set out. The rights of nations are clarified. The rights of foreigners, and the way the League will relate to foreign nations, are stated so that they will promote the spread of the Great Peace. The symbols of the law and the people are described. Provision is made for renewing commitments, for maintaining the law, and also for future changes consistent with the architecture of the longhouse, an architecture symbolizing the functional principles of the law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is this second part, the structural part, that is said to have inspired (or influenced) the Constitution of the United States of America,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In 1976, the U.S. Senate passed a resolution “to recognize the contribution of the Iroquois Confederacy of Nations to the development of the United States Constitution and to reaffirm the continuing government-to-government relationship between Indian tribes and the United States established in the Constitution. Whereas the original framers of the Constitution, including most notably, George Washington and Benjamin Franklin, are known to have greatly admired the concepts, principles and governmental practices of the Six Nations of the Iroquois Confederacy; and Whereas the Confederation of the original Thirteen Colonies into one republic was explicitly modeled upon the Iroquois Confederacy as were many of the democratic principles which were incorporated into the Constitution itself. . . . Now therefore, be it resolved . . . that the Congress, on the occasion of the two hundredth anniversary of the signing of the United States Constitution, acknowledges the historical debt which this Republic of the United States of America owes to the Iroquois Confederacy and other Indian nations for their demonstration of enlightened, democratic principles of government and their example of a free association of independent Indian nations.” (S. Con. Res. 76: S. Hrg. 100-610).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; a confederation of putatively equal partners, joining together voluntarily to form a government replete with checks and balances and mutual respect. Certainly at the Albany Conference in 1754, Tekarihoken Hendrick Peters&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;At that time, the holder of the Mohawk Turtle Clan title was the man also known as Theyanoguin, King Hendrick, and Henry Peters. It has been suggested that there were actually two men known as “Hendrick,” since the man who met Queen Anne in 1710 already appears middle-aged (and was named Teyoninhokarawen, and held a Wolf Clan title). The man who was Warraghihagey William Johnson’s elderly mentor died at the Battle of Lake George in 1755, forty-five years later (see Hinderaker 2011).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; encouraged the colonies to form a confederation.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Shannon (2000, 8) maintained that his work “proves conclusively that no evidence exists of an Iroquois influence in the drafting of the Albany Plan of Union,” and his work purports to “disprove the Iroquois Influence Thesis.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Some Haudenosaunee say that, in imitating the Great Law, the United States did so poorly, for their constitution neglects some of the most important aspects: peace, the Good Mind, obligations to the natural world, the importance of families, obligations to future generations, spirituality, respect for women (and, until the 1920s, women&#039;s part in government). Nevertheless, the influence of one powerful confederate system on the formation of the constitution of the other has been acknowledged, and is undeniable. Only the extent of that influence has become the subject of bitter debate among academics.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See, e.g., Johansen 1982 and 1998.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee constitution and the constitution of the United States share another feature that is not the result of the influence of the former upon the latter, and seldom receives comment. Because both were created by a small group of people during a short, dramatic period (a &amp;quot;constitutional moment&amp;quot;) that has become invested with a degree of sacredness over time, and both can be read (despite United States amendments and Haudenosaunee additions to the rafters of the longhouse) as the product of the minds of the &amp;quot;founding fathers&amp;quot; and as a fixed canon, the result, in legal and social terms, has been what some British commentators have called &amp;quot;ancestor worship&amp;quot;—an inability or unwillingness to evolve.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Bogdanor 2009.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; This manifests itself in U.S. courts&#039; tendency to seek the intentions of the framers of the Constitution (the &amp;quot;Founding Fathers&amp;quot;) in cases two centuries later, and in Haudenosaunee Condolence ceremonies wistfully referring to the acts of &amp;quot;my grandsires&amp;quot; as the days of greatness.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;This “ancestor worship” is not isolated. For example, Wahhabi Muslim belief maintains that the great days, those to be emulated, were those immediately after the Prophet’s time, so that the customs and dress of those days are to be maintained.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Kayanerenkó:wa establishes a democracy. It creates a system of government in which each person participates and has an effective place and voice. It does not meet the criteria of late twentieth-century participatory democracies, in which all people are theoretically absolutely equal and governments are selected in periodic elections. It answers some basic questions quite differently. It does not assume absolute equality, and instead assigns responsibility as well as authority according to ability,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;If this is a meritocracy, then why are the chiefs’ titles hereditary, ask some commentators. There are two answers to this. The first is that all a person inherits is the possibility of being chosen as his family’s representative, while the fundamental principle is still that the best person among those eligible should be chosen. The second is that where there are individuals of great merit who are not eligible for a family title, the institution of Pine Tree Chiefs permits adding them to the council as respected and protected advisers.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; assuming that each person has different gifts&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;This is a word that, in its frequent use by Haudenosaunee, means something subtly different from its usual English meaning. It refers to natural talents or attributes that have been given by the Creator to an individual. Thus, the purpose of a Haudenosaunee education is said to be the identification and fulfillment of that person’s gifts.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; to be fulfilled. It avoids elections, because elections divide the people into factions and parties,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The Haudenosaunee would agree with the maxim that democracy must consist of more than two wolves and a sheep voting on what is for dinner.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; whereas the law seeks one-mindedness and unity. It also avoids elections because they tend to install governments whose horizon of thought and vision is the next election, whereas the Kayanerenkó:wa admonishes decision makers to cast their minds to the welfare of the coming generations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Recognition of gifts also extends to the nations: the law creates an asymmetric confederation, in which each nation has specific authority and obligations. In Haudenosaunee legal thinking, authority and responsibility are inseparable.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;This is also true in other legal cultures. Giving meaning to the fiduciary relationship between the Crown and Aboriginal peoples, Chief Justice Dickson in &#039;&#039;Guerin&#039;&#039; explained that Crown authority must be reconciled with Crown responsibility—an early manifestation of the constitutional goal of reconciliation.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Only the Senecas can bring into council issues coming from the west, but they, as doorkeepers, are also charged with protecting that entrance to Haudenosaunee territory. The Onondagas, as firekeepers, both maintain and protect the central council and its continued functions.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;As an Onondaga spokesman explained to the British at Fort George on 3 August 1826 on behalf of the Six Nations:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brother: It is natural for us to wish to preserve our ancient customs and to walk in the paths of our forefathers … We consider each nation alike respectable and although we are the firekeepers and appointed to speak for the whole, yet we do not consider ourselves any better than the rest in point of power and respectability. (Library and Archives Canada, Portfolio of Upper Canada, 1826, 214; cited in the Reply of Great Britain, &#039;&#039;Cayuga Arbitration&#039;&#039;, Vol. II)&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In the United States and Canada, each state or province has identical and equal powers within the constitution.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;This is not quite so: while each state has an equal number of senators, the states have different numbers of members of the electoral college, which actually elects the president, who appoints the administration.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; If the Great Law&#039;s principles were to be applied, perhaps modern Québec would become the official steward of the French language; British Columbia might be the guardian of the forests; New York could protect its nation&#039;s finances; Washington could become the preserver of salmon fisheries. Each authority is balanced by a matching responsibility, which requires a degree of unselfishness. Morgan explained that &amp;quot;the tribe was neither weakened nor impaired by the confederate compact. Each was in vigorous life within its appropriate sphere.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Morgan 1871, 132.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Venables takes this description several steps further: &amp;quot;The Woods are the equal responsibility of the Confederacy as a whole and, in their different locales, the responsibility of one of the five founding nations. Because there is no ultimate sovereign power, these simultaneous and equal responsibilities have no real parallel in Western law, including Western property law. These simultaneous and equal responsibilities are also what make the Confederacy a unique and delicate balance of equal responsibilities among its confederate parts.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Venables 2010, 36.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where the Kayanerenkó:wa differs from modern Euro-American law, there are reasons for the differences. Some of those differences are the result of a different approach to law. Some are a reflection of their times and technologies. Others flow from the nature of the people themselves, for this legal system reflects the people for whom it was created. Some aspects of the law are exportable, universal, as the Peacemaker said that the Great White Roots of the Tree of Peace ought to spread over the world. Other aspects of the law make sense mainly in a Haudenosaunee context. For example, peoples who have no clan system would find no usefulness in that complex interweaving of relationships, or would have to invent their own.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Obversely, the destruction of clans is a tool for assimilation. Among Central Asian peoples, uncles and aunts are important parts of a person’s family constellation, part of the clan system. The twentieth-century Han Chinese population-control policy of one child per family would, over time, mean that there would be no uncles or aunts. England’s eighteenth-century efforts to break the cohesion of Scottish clans are another example.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nevertheless, the Great Law of Peace is intrinsically valuable. Sotsistowah John Mohawk, the pre-eminent Haudenosaunee thinker of the twentieth century, wrote: &amp;quot;The political thought of the Haudenosaunee deserves to be judged on its own merits, not as an artifact of the past. We should investigate it today, question it, expand on it, learn from it just as we would from any doctrine of political thought. It will stand against that kind of scrutiny.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mohawk 1989, 218.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There have been several efforts to reduce the Kayanerenkó:wa to writing. The first were by the Haudenosaunee themselves, as part of an effort to agree on processes, as well as to show that the governments created by the Great Law are respectable, consistent, complex, and legal. Some of these were simply an attempt to describe the system to outsiders, or to protect that system against those who claimed the Haudenosaunee had no law. Others were internal exercises in standardization. There was little written analysis. More recent writing about the Great Law has been, for the most part, by academics. In a demonstration of their own compartmentalization, each of the writers has come from a particular perspective. Anthropologist-ethnohistorians,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Morgan concluded that kinship was the basis of the law. His greatest treatise as the first anthropologist was on the nature of kinship, not only among the Haudenosaunee, but as an aspect of human societies. William Fenton’s 1998 &#039;&#039;The Great Law and the Longhouse&#039;&#039; lies somewhere between history and anthropology.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; linguists,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Kanuhsyuniké:ha (Gibson 1912), as set out by Hanni Woodbury and Shagohendehta Reg Henry, is to a great extent a linguistic exercise. The Onondaga text has a word-for-word English translation, with grammatical notations under it, and a more flowing, tighter English translation appears at the bottom of the page.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and political scientists&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Taiaiake Gerald Alfred’s &#039;&#039;Peace, Power and Righteousness&#039;&#039; (1999) is a Kahnawake Mohawk’s setting of the Kayanerenkó:wa in the context of 1990s political thought and speech.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; have each adopted anthropological, ethnohistorical, linguistic, or political approaches to the Kayanerenkó:wa.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Strangely—considering what is being analyzed and written about is, on its face, a legal system—there has been almost no &#039;&#039;legal&#039;&#039; writing about it. This is all the more curious since many of the people who were involved in its description, recording, and publication were lawyers, by profession or training. Morgan, Parker, Hale: the early recorders of the Great Law were lawyers. This is no coincidence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ta-ya-dao-wuk-kah Lewis Henry Morgan&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Morgan was adopted by the Hawk Clan of the Tonawanda Senecas on October 31, 1846, and given the name Ta-ya-dao-wuk-kah, &#039;&#039;One lying across&#039;&#039; (Beauchamp (1907) 1975, 406, described by Donehogowah Ely Parker). “One lying across” might allude to a person who lies between the canoe and the sailing ship, between the nations and their cultures, or the name may simply have been one that belonged to the Hawk Clan.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; was a practising lawyer in western New York State in the mid-1800s. His companion on his path into the Great Law and into Haudenosaunee society was Hasanonda—later Donehogowa—Ely S. Parker, a Tonawanda Seneca teenager Morgan had met in an Albany bookstore. Morgan has been called &amp;quot;the first anthropologist&amp;quot;: his work on the kinship system of the Haudenosaunee was truly seminal for the science of understanding human societies. Morgan was also intrigued by the Great Law. He created a semi-secret white society that imitated its structures.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Upstate New York in the mid-1800s was the birthplace of many of the college fraternities that came to dominate American campus social scenes.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; As both lawyer and adopted Seneca, he joined the fight for the preservation of Seneca land at Tonawanda. He came close to functioning within the circle of the law, but he also retained a sense of European superiority.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;It is possible that Morgan decided not to treat the Great Law as a complete, complex legal system because to do so would not accord with his theories of the evolution of human societies. As a people who had no domesticated animals or iron, the Haudenosaunee, by his reckoning, were somewhere between Lower and Middle Barbarism, well short of the “progress” and civilization required for a sophisticated legal system. See Morgan 1877.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; However, there are some indications that Morgan considered his &#039;&#039;League of the Hau-de-no-sau-nee&#039;&#039; as both an imperfect work and his final Iroquois effort, a way of getting the people out of his system.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Morgan wrote of the &#039;&#039;League of the Iroquois&#039;&#039;: “My principal object in writing this work, which exhibits abundant evidence of hasty execution, was to free myself of the subject. . . .I laid aside the Indian subject to devote time to my profession.” White 1957, 262.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It has been suggested that the academic, speculative parts of the book are Morgan&#039;s ruminations on &amp;quot;man&#039;s ascent to civilization,&amp;quot; while the more informative and factual parts are in a style different enough that it is most likely that they are actually Donehogowa Ely Parker&#039;s writing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Parker himself qualified to become a lawyer in New York State. Either he chose not to present himself to the bar, because that would require him to seek U.S. citizenship, or he was refused admission to the bar because he was not a citizen, or not white.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The modern Seneca explanation is that he did not want to become a U.S. citizen, as that would require him to lose his Haudenosaunee citizenship. Different biographies offer different reasons. Armstrong (1978, 41) affirms that he was refused admission by the courts because he could not become an American citizen. Brown (1970, 179) asserts that Parker was told that “only White male citizens could be admitted to law practice in New York. No Indians need apply.” Largent says that when Parker’s patron, William P. Angel, of Ellicotville, “fell out of favor with the ruling Democratic Party … Parker was declared ineligible for the bar because he was not an American citizen” (Largent 1996). Arthur C. Parker wrote that a Supreme Court decision had ruled that “only a male white man and a citizen” could be admitted to the bar (1919, 79).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; During the Civil War, as a Confederacy chief, he needed a special dispensation from his nation to be allowed to join the U.S. Army, where he became adjutant to his friend, Ulysses S. Grant. Later, when Grant became president, Parker was appointed commissioner of Indian Affairs. Long before that, though, he had become Donehogowa,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;How would a Confederacy chief, committed to the Great Peace, justify participating in a war? His title is one of the two that is of both a peace chief and a war chief. The United States was an ally, and its cause, to Parker, was just. See Armstrong 1978 and Hauptman 1995. Nevertheless, by joining a foreign army, and later by joining the U.S. government, it could be said that he had effectively stepped outside the circle of the law, and strictly speaking the “horns” of his office as royá:ner would have fallen from him, or been removed. While it might be said that, by acting in an administrative capacity rather than on the front lines, he had avoided taking part in war, Parker never made that argument. Whether promoting, managing, or fighting it, war is war, the antithesis of peace: that is the lesson to be drawn from Tsikonsaseh.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; one of the fifty &#039;&#039;rotiyanershon&#039;&#039;, or Lords&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;“Lord” appears to have been used as an appropriate translation because British members of the House of Lords also have continuity in titles and are supposed to have nobility of thought as well as pedigree.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; of the Confederacy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A third recorder of parts of the Great Law, Horatio Hale (1817–96), was also a lawyer (in Clinton, Ontario) by the time he became deeply involved with the Haudenosaunee, publishing two transcripts of the entire Condolence ceremony in his &#039;&#039;Iroquois Book of Rites.&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hale (1883) 1989. See also Hale 1882.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Hale had been a member of the United States Exploring Expedition when he was twenty-one; he never ceased from exploration. He may have been what is now called an anthropologist or ethnologist—but his initial fascination was with the people and their law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
My own path, half a lifetime long, has been marked by stages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At first, with the confidence of youth and the brashness of law school, I accepted intellectually that the Great Law represented a unique constitutional structure, with a powerful legend accompanying its creation. I was quite prepared to argue in court that the Iroquois Confederacy had an organized society, a sophisticated constitution, and a detailed system of landholding.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In the Union of Ontario Indians’ intervention in &#039;&#039;Isaac v. Davey&#039;&#039;, (1977) 2 SCR 897.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In the 1970s, that was all Canadian law required Indigenous societies to prove, in order to hold rights and to have Aboriginal title to land.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Hamlet of Baker Lake v. The Queen&#039;&#039; (1980), 107 DLR (3rd) 513. In contrast, anthropological consensus had moved on, concluding that the “organized society” standard was ethnocentric, obsolete, and unhelpful (Bell and Asch 1997).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; I had also read enough of the history books, treaties, and treaty conferences to see that the Confederacy had dealt with the French, the Dutch, the British, and the United States as equals, as partners or enemies, to be respected or challenged as political circumstances required. There were patterns and principles to the treaties. The people I associated with—at Oneida, at the Grand River Territory, and then throughout Haudenosaunee communities—were convinced of the power of the Great Law as a way of life, and of the sovereignty of the Confederacy. In 1980, my master&#039;s thesis in law concentrated on the Covenant Chain relationship between the Iroquois Confederacy and the British Crown, and on how that relationship was reflected in the history of several distinct issues: criminal jurisdiction, border-crossing rights, land rights, and political rights. For more than two centuries, representatives of the British Crown had understood, adopted, and used Iroquois law and metaphor in treaty relations, creating a well-defined relationship within the Iroquois legal system. At the time, I sought to find parallels in the law of nations, suggesting that the treaty relationship met the definitions of a protectorate relationship in modern international law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By 1990, my perspective had matured and deepened. I understood, as the Maoris had in Aotearoa, that it is important to retain the original names for things, because English translations are never exact and often misleading. To me, the Iroquois Confederacy became the Haudenosaunee; the chiefs became &#039;&#039;rotiyanershon&#039;&#039;; and the Great Law became the Kayanerenkó:wa. By 1990, I had also been personally transformed: I was now Kayanesenh of the Wolf Clan of the Onondaga Nation, and my wife and children Mohawks of the Turtle Clan. I attended ceremonies and Condolences and councils as an insider. Seeing things from within the circle gave me a fundamentally new perspective on the law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The events of 1990 were tumultuous and traumatic. In the early part of the summer, an internal war in Akwesasne showed how bad things must have been before the coming of the law: the sorrow and anger in that community were deep and bloody.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;People of the Pines&#039;&#039;, by Geoffrey York and Loreen Pindera (1991), is as good a history of that year as any yet written.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Mohawks had killed one another. There was blood on their hands. Twenty-five years later, many of the wounds remain unhealed. For me, 1990 culminated in desperate, principled, ultimately doomed autumn negotiations with Canada and Quebec as the Canadian Army encircled defiant warriors in Kanehsatake and laid siege to Kahnawake. All this caused me a great deal of soul-searching. Could we, as the Haudenosaunee negotiators, have done anything differently and remained true to the law? How much does law determine behaviour, and how much pragmatic flexibility does it allow? The warriors: were they something new, or just a modern face to an ancient challenge? How much of the original Longhouse still exists, in reality or in people&#039;s minds—or dreams?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Confederacy lives first and foremost in people&#039;s minds. It is a constant re-enactment of the way of the Peacemaker.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;It is said that some of the ceremonies in the Longhouse are both re-enactments of events in the Creation Story and reflections of simultaneous ceremonies in the Sky World. As above, so below. We repeat the actions and principles of the Peacemaker as part of a commitment that the Great Peace shall continue.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It is as real as people are prepared to believe it is. For some, it is a shining ideal in the distance, unattainable and largely irrelevant. For others, it is something to &#039;&#039;live&#039;&#039;. Those who lived the Confederacy in 1990, the ones I worked with, convinced me that the dream is real.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After 1990, with Tehatkarine (Arihote) Curtis Nelson and Kanatiio Allen Gabriel, I put together what has been called Kahswénhtha, the Haudenosaunee treaty study for the Canadian Royal Commission on Aboriginal Peoples. The message of that study can be summarized in four points. First: the Haudenosaunee are a people of law, with a respectable legal system of their own. Second: the British, in their dealings with Indigenous nations, accepted and worked effectively within that legal system for the first two centuries of their presence on this continent. Third: there is a continuum of treaty relations between the Crown and the Haudenosaunee. It resembles a river flowing through time rather than a succession of events. It is based on relationships more than on details, and on principles more than on politics. It is based in the concepts and thinking of the Great Law of Peace. Fourth: the more recent history of that treaty relationship reveals a record of neglect, ignorance, and bad faith on the part of the Crown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Twenty more years passed. With new tools, I continued to turn over the Kayanerenkó:wa in my mind. The publication of the most complete version, recited by Skaniatariio John Arthur Gibson, and access to other, unpublished versions by Dayodekane Seth Newhouse, Deyonwe’ton Jake Thomas, and J.N.B. Hewitt helped me see patterns where before I had seen mostly details. Long conversations with Sotsisowah John Mohawk, Deskahe Harvey Longboat, Kaientaronkwen Ernie Benedict, Hayadaha Rick Hill, Roronhiakewen Dan Longboat, and Amber Meadow Adams continued to point me towards principles and patterns. Moving out of Toronto, to the Six Nations Grand River Territory, helped change my outlook, legally, culturally, and socially. I could see and sense the natural world every day. The forest literally began to replace the trees, and I watched the river&#039;s flow every day. Where I had been learning &#039;&#039;what&#039;&#039; the law provided, I was now seeking to learn &#039;&#039;why&#039;&#039; it did so. The tone of my law practice had shifted from adversarial to conciliatory, and from seeking to win to seeking mutual benefit. There were successful, precedent-setting negotiations. I had not realized the extent to which the Great Law had influenced my approach to cases and courts. I began to recognize that one could practise the principles of that law in a pragmatic, principled, and effective way. In 2007, we negotiated a series of agreements with the City of Hamilton about the Red Hill Valley Parkway, using those principles in exciting, effective, contemporary ways.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The agreements reflected Haudenosaunee drafting as well as thinking. Thus, a clause stated “we are human beings, and as such, are likely to make mistakes. When we find we have omitted or misstated something, we will bring our minds together to amend our agreement.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In 2009, I taught a course in Haudenosaunee law at the University of Toronto, and discussions with the students helped temper the thinking in this book. A series of repatriations from museums, of wampum and haduwi medicine masks, left nothing behind but good will and friendships. In 2016, Sakom Hugh Akagi, Kanatiio Allen Gabriel, and I arranged a reaffirmation of Peskotomuhkati (Passamaquoddy) treaty relations with the Crown. The ways of the law have tempered many of my negotiations with the Crown on behalf of Indigenous peoples. Anishinaabe and Peskotomuhkati people also find those ways compatible with their own principles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canada&#039;s laws about Indigenous peoples had also evolved. The 2015 report of the Truth and Reconciliation Commission of Canada usefully distinguished between &amp;quot;Indigenous law,&amp;quot; the legal systems of Indigenous nations, and &amp;quot;Aboriginal law,&amp;quot; the laws of Canada about Indigenous peoples. It was Aboriginal law that was evolving quickly. In 1985, for the first time in over a century, the Supreme Court of Canada in the &#039;&#039;Guerin&#039;&#039; case clarified that the Crown bore a fiduciary, trust-like obligation in dealing with the lands of Indigenous peoples—a duty enforceable in courts of law. It also acknowledged that principles of law emanating from medieval England might not find counterparts in Indigenous North America. In 1990, the &#039;&#039;Sparrow&#039;&#039; decision showed that the protection of Aboriginal rights in the 1982 Constitution Act was not simply an &amp;quot;empty box.&amp;quot; At the end of 1997, the Supreme Court overturned a woefully ignorant judgement by the Chief Judge of British Columbia to craft its &#039;&#039;Delgam’uukw&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Delgam’uukw v. Attorney General of British Columbia&#039;&#039;, (1997) 3 SCR 1010: “Aboriginal title originates in part from pre-existing stems of aboriginal law. . . . The common law should develop to recognize aboriginal rights (and title, where necessary) as they were recognized by either &#039;&#039;de facto&#039;&#039; practice or by the aboriginal system of governance.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; decision. For the first time, that court spoke of Indigenous &amp;quot;nations&amp;quot; and of respecting their &amp;quot;laws&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;legal systems.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In &#039;&#039;Delgam’uukw&#039;&#039;, “Aboriginal nations” are mentioned at paragraph 84; at paragraph 114, the court states that “(there is) a second source for aboriginal title—the relationship between common law and pre-existing systems of aboriginal law.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; By the turn of the century, though, with the &#039;&#039;Donald Marshall&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Michael Mitchell (Kanentakeron)&#039;&#039; decisions, Canadian courts began to recede from forceful recognition of the rights of Indigenous nations. New limits and new obstacles to broad recognition of rights were being born. Generosity in allowing evidence into Canadian courts masked the way the courts had moved the goalposts. Only &amp;quot;established&amp;quot; Aboriginal title carried the same weight as actual land ownership, and the Tsilhqot&#039;in people had spent twenty years and $30 million to gain their limited victory—over part of their territory, an area where there were virtually no people but Tsilhqot&#039;ins—in 2014. Aboriginal peoples had to show their occupation and use of the land, but also prove that it met the principles of exclusivity,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;R. v. Marshall; R. v. Bernard&#039;&#039;, (2005) 2 SCR 220. On the same day that the Supreme Court of Canada insisted that an Indigenous nation’s Aboriginal title to land required continuous, exclusive occupation, a Canadian Armed Forces helicopter dropped the Minister of National Defence onto an island off Greenland for all of fifteen minutes—to assert Canada’s rights there.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and was not &amp;quot;incompatible with Canadian sovereignty.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Mitchell (Kanentakeron) v. Minister of National Revenue&#039;&#039;, (2001) 1 SCR 911. The case involved Mohawks’ rights to trade across the Canadian border with other Indigenous nations. At paragraph 62, the Supreme Court stated that “the doctrine of continuity . . . governed the absorption of aboriginal laws and customs into the new legal regime upon the assertion of Crown sovereignty over the region . . . this incorporation of local laws and customs into the common law was subject to an exception for those interests which were inconsistent with the sovereignty of the new regime.” The Haudenosaunee held land collectively, not as individuals. Their practice, noted by the Jesuits in the seventeenth century, of placing armed sentinels along the paths leading into their territory was the kind of thing that nations do: not enough exclusivity, and you have no title; too much, and it is “incompatible with Canadian sovereignty.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Recognition of the laws of Indigenous nations faded into a vague, less respectful requirement of taking &amp;quot;the Aboriginal perspective&amp;quot; into account. In &#039;&#039;Delgam’uukw,&#039;&#039; the Supreme Court of Canada explained that Aboriginal title had to be determined as of the date of the assertion of British Crown sovereignty, because the Crown and Indigenous land law systems would have to coexist and be reconciled. In &#039;&#039;Marshall &#039;&#039;and &#039;&#039;Bernard,&#039;&#039; the Supreme Court used the term &amp;quot;European sovereignty,&amp;quot; possibly to include the French regime, moving towards a racially based, doctrine-of-discovery approach to Aboriginal title. In &#039;&#039;Tsilhqot’in,&#039;&#039; the court affirmed that it had meant British Crown sovereignty all along—only to refer to &amp;quot;European sovereignty&amp;quot; again a few pages later. In that case, as well, the Supreme Court of Canada tempered the broad range of possible justifications for taking Aboriginal rights and land with a new requirement: that the project had to further the constitutionally mandated goal of reconciliation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The rest of the world was watching and changing, too. In Australia, the High Court&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Mabo v. Queensland&#039;&#039; (1992), 175 CLR 1 (Australian High Court). Eddie Mabo had been banished from Murray Island as a teenager and worked as a gardener in an Australian university. He died of cancer two months before the decision that recognized the Mer Islanders’ rights to their land. Three years later, his body was returned to his homeland. He was buried as a chief.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; had actually stated that the idea that a light-skinned people, happening upon land owned by a dark-skinned people, could take over that land was racist and had no place in a late twentieth-century world. At least, there was no place unless the concept lay at the very backbone of a nation&#039;s legal system. In Hawai&#039;i, the rights of the Kanaka Maoli, the Indigenous people, were coming under attack in ways that challenged concepts like blood quantum, culture, the sale of remaining Hawai&#039;ian lands, and Indigenous survival itself.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Rice v. Cayetano&#039;&#039;, 528 US 495 (2000); &#039;&#039;Doe v. Kamehameha Schools&#039;&#039;, US Ct. of Appeals, 9th Circuit, 8921 (2005). But see Alani Apio’s (2003) transcendent article, “New Hopes Arise for Ancestral Culture.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Canada and the United States were the two last holdouts in ratifying the United Nations Declaration on the Rights of Indigenous Peoples.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Canada’s November 2010 endorsement of the Declaration rang particularly hollow: like Australia, it recognizes it as an “aspirational” declaration—but then Canada further asserted that the Declaration “is a non-legally binding document that does not reflect customary international law nor change Canadian laws.” Canada’s full acceptance of the Declaration in 2016 still placed it within the limits of the Canadian constitution. See http://www.cbc.ca/news/indigenous/canada-adopting-implementing-un-rights-declaration-1.3575272.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canadian courts have admitted that racism has existed in the past (rejecting the &#039;&#039;Syliboy&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In &#039;&#039;R. v. Syliboy&#039;&#039;, (1929) 1 DLR 307, Ben Syliboy, the Grand Chief of the Mi’kmaq Nation, had been charged with trapping muskrats without a licence. Acting County Court Judge Campbell found that “the savages’ rights of sovereignty even of ownership were never recognized. Nova Scotia had passed to Britain not by gift or purchase from or even by conquest of the Indians but by treaty with France, which had acquired it by priority of discovery and ancient possession, and the Indians passed with it.” The Government of Canada continued to cite this decision as law well into the 1980s, basing its view that Aboriginal title had been “superseded by law,” relying upon what the Supreme Court of Canada later called “the biases and prejudice of another era in our history. Such language is no longer acceptable in Canadian law.” &#039;&#039;Guerin v. The Queen&#039;&#039;, (1985) 2 SCR 387 at 400.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; judgement, for example) but have avoided confronting or abandoning it in the present.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The Donald Marshall Inquiry, the Aboriginal Justice Inquiry of Manitoba, and even the Royal Commission on Aboriginal Peoples concluded that the existing criminal justice system is rife with racism and unsuited to Indigenous people, and that a separate justice system ought to be created. None of the more fundamental recommendations of any of these commissions have been implemented.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In the late 1990s, they concluded that the &amp;quot;magic date&amp;quot; that determines a people&#039;s Aboriginal rights is the &amp;quot;date of first contact with Europeans.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The &#039;&#039;Van der Peet&#039;&#039; trilogy: &#039;&#039;R. v. Van der Peet&#039;&#039;, (1996) 2 SCR 546; &#039;&#039;R. v. NTC Smokehouse&#039;&#039;, (1996) 2 SCR 672; &#039;&#039;R. v. Gladstone&#039;&#039;, (1996) 2 SCR 723. More recently, the courts have acknowledged that what is involved is a period of a few decades before and after first contact, rather than a single moment in time. However, acknowledging that Métis Aboriginal rights could not have existed until at least nine months after “first contact,” the Supreme Court of Canada decided that the “magic date” for Métis rights is when the Crown acquired practical control over the area—in some cases, nearly two centuries after “first contact” with Indians. &#039;&#039;R. v. Powley&#039;&#039;, (2003) 2 SCR 207. In 2016, the &#039;&#039;Daniels&#039;&#039; decision (&#039;&#039;Daniels v. Canada (Indian Affairs and Northern Development)&#039;&#039;), (2016) 1 SCR 99, declared the Métis to be “an aboriginal people of Canada.” In 2015, the Truth and Reconciliation Commission of Canada recommended that the federal and provincial governments abandon any reliance on the doctrine of discovery.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It does not matter that the contact may have been with a tiny number of Europeans,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In 1608, the year in which Mohawk rights were changed forever in Canadian law by contact with the French, there were six French families, totalling twenty-eight people, settled in New France. Twenty years later, there were seventy-six settlers. By 1640, there were still fewer than 300. Delage 1993, 243.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; or even that those Europeans merely shot at people and then ran away.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;This “bullet to the head school of first contact” describes what the courts decided about Mohawk Aboriginal rights: the crucial moment was when Champlain and two of his French friends stepped into the open and, with dangerously overloaded arquebuses, shot three Mohawks dead in 1609 (&#039;&#039;Mitchell, supra&#039;&#039;, and &#039;&#039;R. v. Adams&#039;&#039;, (1996) 3 SCR 101).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; What is it about Europeans that makes them so magical that they affect other peoples&#039; rights permanently, like a kind of reverse Midas touch? Why the first European? Why not the first African? Or Maya? Or Chinese? Racism is alive and well in the Canadian legal system: it just hides behind clouds of liberal language and legal sophistry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canadian courts have said that their understanding of Aboriginal title must be shaped by the legal systems of both Canada and the Indigenous people involved,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Delgam’uukw&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;v. Attorney General of British Columbia&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and their approach to implementing and respecting treaties must be shaped by the &amp;quot;Indian understanding&amp;quot; of those treaties.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Blueberry River Band v. The Queen&#039;&#039;, (1995) 4 SCR 344. &#039;&#039;R. v. Badger&#039;&#039;, (1996) 1 SCR 771, para. 52: “The words in the treaty . . . must be interpreted in the sense that they would naturally have been understood by the Indians at the time of the signing.” The term “the Indian understanding” is borrowed from the decisions of U.S. courts. This forms the basis of an “intention-based” approach that is used to override technicalities that might render a treaty or surrender void, in the name of respecting the intentions of the chiefs and principal men. Canadian law seeks a “reconciliation” of Aboriginal rights and title with Canadian laws and sovereignty, though generally this means seeking concessions from the Indigenous people rather than compatibility between the two legal systems.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In the United States,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The use of the word “reconciliation” began with the Supreme Court’s &#039;&#039;Guerin&#039;&#039; decision in 1984 ((1985) 2 SCR 335), in which the chief justice stated that Crown authority must be reconciled with Crown responsibility. From that point, one can trace an evolution of the word, ending with the court’s statement in &#039;&#039;Guerin&#039;&#039; that Crown authority must be reconciled with Crown responsibility, and in &#039;&#039;Mikisew&#039;&#039; in 2005 ((2005) 3 SCR 388) that “the fundamental objective of the modern law of aboriginal and treaty rights is the reconciliation of aboriginal peoples and non-aboriginal peoples and their respective claims, interests and ambitions.” What began with admonitions that indigenous legal systems ought to be reconciled &#039;&#039;with&#039;&#039; the common law has ended with the admonishment that they should reconcile themselves &#039;&#039;to&#039;&#039; it and its rule. Justice Binnie’s explanation that the two watercraft symbolized by the Two Row Wampum had become a single Canadian wood, iron, and canvas ship of state depicts this “reconciliation” (&#039;&#039;Mitchell&#039;&#039; at para. 130).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a persistent tendency in U.S. law to begin any examination of history with the American Revolution. In fact, 200 years of British colonial history and law are direct antecedents of the United States, and the politicians who represented the federal and state governments in the late eighteenth century were often the same men who had represented the colonial governments before 1776.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; &amp;quot;land claims&amp;quot; vacillate between court and negotiated settlements, but the courts insist that &amp;quot;the Indian understanding&amp;quot; of the treaties is relevant and vital.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;This insistence is tempered by the courts’ refusal to permit the introduction of contextual and historical evidence unless there is ambiguity in the treaty language: see &#039;&#039;The People v. Neil Patterson Jr.&#039;&#039;, New York Court of Appeals, 14 June 2005: “where the scope of a treaty right is unclear, we must look ‘beyond the written words to the larger context that frames the (t)reaty, including “the history of the treaty, the negotiations, and the practical construction adopted by the parties”’ (&#039;&#039;Mille Lacs&#039;&#039;, 526 U.S. at 196). Articles III and IV (of the Canandaigua Treaty), however, admit of no ambiguity. In contrast, the Supreme Court of Canada, in &#039;&#039;R. v. Marshall&#039;&#039;, (1999) 3 SCR 456, said that “extrinsic evidence of the historical and cultural context of a treaty may be received even absent any ambiguity on the face of the treaty” (Para. 10).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The time is ripe for texts in both Canada and the United States explaining the Haudenosaunee legal system, since it is the one within which the &amp;quot;Indian understanding&amp;quot; of many treaties exists. It is also the system that shaped the conduct and thinking of the representatives of the British Crown and of the United States of America in their treaties with many other Indigenous nations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The treaties between the Haudenosaunee and the Crown and the United States do not exist in a vacuum. They live in a universe of Haudenosaunee law, a long series of international councils, governed by rules of process and interpretation, assisted by precedents in the Kayanerenkó:wa itself. The images, words, and even the sequences of words used in treaty councils are linked not only to all other treaty councils, but to their sources in the laws of the Confederacy. This is important not just historically but also legally: both U.S. and Canadian courts have stated unequivocally that &amp;quot;the words of the treaty must be construed . . . in the sense in which they would naturally be understood by the Indians.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Justice Horace Gray, in &#039;&#039;Jones v. Meehan&#039;&#039;, 175 US 1 at 10–11 (1899), following &#039;&#039;Worcester v. Georgia&#039;&#039;, 6 Pet. (31 US) 515 at 552 (1832). The identical words appear in Lamer, C.J.’s decision in &#039;&#039;R. v. Sioui&#039;&#039;, (1990) 1 SCR 1025. There has been no judicial interpretation of the term “&#039;&#039;naturally&#039;&#039; understood.” It may be taken to refer to the way the Indians would have understood the matters in their own laws—as &#039;&#039;Delgam’uukw&#039;&#039; suggests—or it may be the equivalent of interpreting the records according to their “clear and plain meaning,” independent of “extrinsic” information.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Actually, the transaction itself must be placed within its proper &amp;quot;Indian&amp;quot; legal context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the mid-seventeenth century to the mid-eighteenth century, the Haudenosaunee were a powerful military and political force in northeastern North America. The European colonists met with the Haudenosaunee in designated locations (council fire places),&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The locations were pragmatically chosen: Albany at the confluence of the Mohawk and Hudson Rivers; Fort Stanwix at the portage between the Mohawk River and Lake Ontario; Niagara where Lake Ontario and Lake Erie meet; Detroit at the intersection of Lake Erie and Lake Huron.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and adhered to the forms and processes of Haudenosaunee councils. They did so for several reasons: because these processes were demanded by nations who were in a position to demand them; because they functioned on the basis of equality and respect, which often gave the Europeans power beyond their numbers; and because the processes were effective in accomplishing their goals. From 1755 to 1830, the British Imperial Indian Department was effectively controlled by the Johnson family, which maintained intimate ties with the Mohawks and was comfortable and familiar with Haudenosaunee processes and law. For nearly two centuries, the law that governed treaty making was Haudenosaunee law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The legal system that gave rise to the process of treaty councils also lent its forms, vocabulary, metaphors, and rules to the agreements and relationships that emerged from the treaty councils. Mutual obligations in the Covenant Chain relationship between the Haudenosaunee and the Crown are reflections of the internal obligations between the nations of the Haudenosaunee. Dispute resolution mechanisms in the treaties, including the 1664 Fort Albany Treaty with the Crown and the 1794 Canandaigua Treaty with the United States, are borrowed from the mechanisms used among Haudenosaunee families, clans, and nations. To properly understand the treaties, in their historical and legal context, one must have some grasp of Haudenosaunee law. It is the legal environment, the ecosystem, in which the treaties live and breathe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the Haudenosaunee at this crucial time, there has been no law textbook. There are history books, but almost all of them have been written by foreigners. There are cases in the courts of the United States and Canada. None of them has seriously considered Haudenosaunee law. There are written versions of the laws,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Faced with controversy over differing written versions of the law, the chiefs at Onondaga in the 1980s decided there was no single “official” version, nor would there ever be. This is the opposite of the reaction of the Grand River chiefs nearly a century before. To counter Newhouse’s “inaccurate” version, they formed a committee to consolidate a correct one.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; but no modern Haudenosaunee law books. The written versions of the law are like the statutes in a law library. There is also a need for textbooks, jurisprudence, analysis, and journals. Otherwise, there is not enough for &amp;quot;law&amp;quot;: there is only the meat chewed endlessly by anthropologists and historians, political scientists, ethnologists, and sociologists.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a legal system based on thinking, there has been precious little written about the thought behind the laws.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee themselves are in danger of becoming immersed in arguments about the details of the various versions of the law, and missing the fundamental principles upon which the law is based.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is a Haudenosaunee law book.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is written in the humble knowledge that possibly nobody else is in the same position to do it now as I am: those who know more about the law itself lack the legal training, or the writing skills, or the time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In humility, I begin with an apology, for I truly will not do as well as my elders would have, and my understanding is not as good as theirs. I miss my teachers, deeply and sadly. Much has been lost, and there is so much I have not learned, and may never learn. I can only do my best, and hope it is enough. For us, there is only the trying.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I would like to acknowledge the help of many people who guided my path. My brothers Roronhiakewen Dan Longboat, Kanakalût Roland Chrisjohn, Odatsehte Howard Elijah, Kanatiio Allen Gabriel, Tehennakarine Curtis Nelson, Hayadaha Rick Hill, and Sotsisowah John Mohawk, with whom long conversations always led to principles explained, are examples of how humans can be governed by the Kayanerenkó:wa today. My uncles, Kaientaronkwen Ernie Benedict, who taught me patience and perspective, and Tosawentsiadases Norm Jacobs, Tekaronianeken Jake Swamp, and Sakokwenonkwas Tom Porter, who taught me sweetness. My departed chiefs, Deskahe Harvey Longboat, Kanuhkitawi Bernie Parker, Donehogowa Hubert Buck, Coleman Powless, Deyonwe’ton Jake Thomas, and Orenrekowa Brian Skidders, who led and lived by example. So have Kawennokie Salli Benedict and Carol Jacobs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Amber Meadow Adams has been an editor and partner of compassion, kindness, erudition, affection, and vast thoughtfulness.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And of course, my daughters, Kahsenneyohsta Lauren and Kahyoh’no Karenna continue to teach me, support me, encourage me, and, despite all my faults, love me.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All these people changed and raised up my mind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Haii, Haii.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= PART I: CONTEXT =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Creation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;... how she fell ...&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee Creation Story is as important to an understanding of the Kayanerenkó:wa as the Bible is important to an understanding of the laws of Canada and the United States.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;“The Bible contains legendary, historical and ethical contents. It is quite possible to consider them separately, and one doesn’t have to accept the legends to get the ethics. Fundamentalists make a grave mistake to insist on the letter of the writings, because they drive away many who can’t swallow the Adam-and-Eve bit” (Isaac Asimov 1994).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The role of the Judeo-Christian tradition is more obvious in the United States, where money bears the motto “In God We Trust” and references to the Almighty exist within the constitution of the country itself.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The Oath of Allegiance recited by schoolchildren every day refers to “one nation under God.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It is equally present in Canadian law. The Constitution Act, 1982, begins: “Whereas Canada is founded upon principles that recognize the supremacy of God.” Each Canadian coin bears the words “Elizabeth D.G. Regina,” and the initials “D.G.” remind us that she is Queen &#039;&#039;dei gratia&#039;&#039;, “by the grace of God”—that is, by divine right. The existence of the monarchy owes its principles to a tradition that is both Christian and Biblical. Canada’s national anthem, in an increasingly secular society, still proclaims that “&#039;&#039;il sait porter la croix&#039;&#039;.”&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;“Your arm knows how to carry the cross” is a direct reference to the Catholic missionary heritage of French Canada, carrying the cross to “heathen” tribes.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The traditions are not irrelevant to law: they illustrate some of the basic societal assumptions that lie at the foundations of the legal system, even as both countries insist that they maintain a separation between church and state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Just as there are several versions of the Kayanerenkó:wa, there are several versions of the Creation story.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;There are also several versions of the Biblical Genesis. See, e.g., Fox 2000.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; While some versions are inconsistent with others, and some contain internal contradictions, the fundamental principles are in most cases the same. The most complete recital of the Creation story was provided by Skaniatariio John Arthur Gibson, and transcribed by J.N.B. Hewitt at the end of the nineteenth century.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hewitt 1928. Hewitt worked for the Bureau of American Ethnology (his papers are in the Smithsonian Museum of Natural History today), but he was Tuscarora, spending a great deal of time with the chiefs at the Grand River. They thought highly enough of him that he was given the task of some of the speaking at the Condolence at Oneida in 1917.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Sotsisowah John Mohawk&#039;s (2005) &#039;&#039;Iroquois Creation Story&#039;&#039; provides an edited version that reduces repetitiveness, updates the Victorian English, and seeks to remove Europeanizing elements.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mohawk 2005a.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Haudenosaunee story of creation, a woman fell from the Sky World to earth. The earth was covered in water, and only water creatures were living there. The water birds, ducks and geese, saw the woman falling and slowed her descent. A great turtle allowed her to land on his back. She met with the animals and persuaded them that she needed soil.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The meeting with the animals is itself a precursor of the structure of councils under the Great Law: it had two sides—Sky Woman on one side, and the animals on the other—and the exchange between them reflects the process followed in council. This meeting may also be a precursor of the division of things into male and female, for it appears all the animals in the council were male.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The muskrat brought up a little soil for her,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In this council, as in the councils of Haudenosaunee chiefs, the question asked was: “How can we help each other?” and the answer involved willing sacrifice for long-term benefits, for future generations. Muskrat died immediately after bringing the mud from the ocean depths.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and, dancing earth-wise (the direction of almost all Haudenosaunee ceremonies—counter-clockwise, like the Aeolian forces in the Northern Hemisphere), shuffling so that her feet never left the earth, she spread that soil all around Turtle Island, making the land habitable. She had grasped at the sides of the hole as she fell, and in her hands she carried the first seeds. She had been pregnant when she fell, and her daughter was born in the new land and grew quickly. They were still the only people in a cold, dark place, and they were always hungry. The daughter became pregnant in due course—but with no men around, Sky Woman was angry and suspicious. The daughter gave birth to twins. The left-handed twin, Tawiskaron (Flint), cut his way out of his mother’s side, killing her. The right-handed twin, Nikarondase (Sapling), was born in the normal way.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Taharonhiawakon, which means “He holds up the heavens,” is another of his names— probably more proper, but harder to read. He has also been called the Earth Grasper, a name that recalls the moment in the story when he takes a handful of earth and declares to his brother, “&#039;&#039;I tell you this is alive&#039;&#039;!” (Mohawk 2005a, i). Note the contrast between the names, animate and inanimate.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The twins are symbols of the duality, reciprocity, or two-sidedness that permeates Haudenosaunee thinking and law. Later writers would suggest that there was a &amp;quot;Good Twin&amp;quot; and an &amp;quot;Evil Twin&amp;quot;:&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The Biblical parallel may not be Christ and Satan but rather Cain and Abel: nothing in the book of Genesis suggests that the work of one brother was better than that of the other, yet God smiled on Abel’s efforts, and Cain slew Abel. Some versions of the Bible infer that God turned against Cain because of the latter’s negative attitude. The Jesuits in the 1600s pressed the parallels upon their converts.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; earlier versions are not nearly so simplistic. Nikarondase was good at creating things, and he made beautiful flowers, useful trees, graceful animals, while his twin made snakes and thorny bushes, inedible and poisonous creatures. Nikarondase made waters flow both ways; his brother installed falls and rapids and caused the rivers to flow in only one direction. What emerges from classic Haudenosaunee thinking about this, though, is not only that there are always two sides, but that there is also the need for balance. Without the thorns, the rose would be defenceless. Without the mosquitoes, the songbirds would lack food.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Niwadenraah Henry Lickers, personal communication, 1989. Taharionwakon, in some cases, modified his brother’s creations to cause them to fit more beneficially within the web of life.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The twins may have created different-looking things, but the totality of their creation was harmonious. At a time of uncertainty and hunger, each twin made decisions to the best of his ability, and each might have been right. The right-handed twin created human beings—today he is addressed in gratitude as Shonkwaiatíson—“He Completed Our Bodies.”&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;It is said that Shonkwaiatíson blew three times into the mouth of the first human to give him life. The three-ness of those first breaths is repeated in the law: in the three warnings to a chief before he is removed; in the three invitations to another nation to join the peace; in the three sharp cries to drive bad spirits away at a sunrise thanksgiving; in the three sighs, &#039;&#039;yo-ho-oh&#039;&#039;, at the end of a dance in the ceremonies.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Where Tawiskaron made ultimately harmful creatures, Nikarondase found ways to transform them into useful parts of a harmonious whole. Mary Arquette explains: &amp;quot;It was not his nature to destroy things, even those created by his brother, the Left-Handed Twin. Instead, he found an important role for most of them and gave them special duties.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Iotenerahtatenion Mary Arquette, in Haudenosaunee Environmental Task Force 2001, 84.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transforming or deflecting harmful forces into benevolence and benefit is typical of the strategies of the Peacemaker in forming Haudenosaunee government. That our Creator himself would have used the same principles in establishing the ecosystems of the land is both consistent and reassuring.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Shonkwaiatishon means “He finished our bodies.” That is, our Creator created us humans. He is by far not the only Creator: his twin brother made many things; from the grave of his mother grew tobacco, corn, potatoes, squash, and strawberries; his grandmother, Katsisayen, Sky Woman, danced the earth across the great Turtle’s back; and many other forces brought their contributions to creation.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At one point, Tawiskaron challenged Nikarondase to a gambling game. The stakes were the very highest: would life continue? The game was the Peach Stone Bowl Game: six stones, white on one side and dark on the other, are tossed into the air, landing in the bowl. The side that gets all six the same colour first wins it all. The boys&#039; grandmother, Katsisayen (Mature Flowers), better known today as Sky Woman, favoured Tawiskaron and sided with him. Nikarondase borrowed the heads of some chickadees and tossed them into the air. As they fell, turning, turning, all creation called out in support of that one throw, and the six heads all landed the same way. There would indeed be life.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mohawk 2005a, 50–51. The odds of getting all six the same colour are just over 1 percent.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Tawiskaron was sent away but not killed, and his influence over darkness and winter is still with us.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In Haudenosaunee cosmology and legend, there is recognition that matter and energy are constants—that they are not destroyed, but only set aside or sent away. In the case of evil or negative forces, their influence is still present, and we must seek to avoid it. The victorious Taharionwakon does not kill his brother, nor does he exile him into oblivion. Instead, in a precursor to the Two Row Wampum, he states that while they cannot live together, nevertheless he wants to keep him near.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Today, in every longhouse at Midwinter, the two sides of the house play the same game, in commemoration of that great gamble.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Blau 1967.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It remains one of the four great sacred ceremonies of the Haudenosaunee.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This story reminds us that life on earth is not a sure thing. It is a matter of chance. It is a close thing, too. It could as easily not have been, or not have been as it is. &amp;quot;Modern&amp;quot; scientists have only recently come to the same conclusion: that when those primordial strands of DNA were twisting in some lukewarm pool millions of years ago, if the sun had passed behind the clouds or a nearby volcano had erupted or a stone had rolled into the puddle, life as we know it might not have existed. Carol Jacobs, a Cayuga Bear clan mother, told the United Nations:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In one throw, supported by all the living forces of the natural world, our Creator won this bet. He won it all for us. He won it for all of us. We commemorate this each year in our Midwinter ceremonies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is not just a quaint legend. It is a reminder that, as scientists now agree, life on earth is a result of chance, as well as of intent. Life on earth is a fragile matter. That magnificent gamble could have gone the other way: life could just as easily not have been at all.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That is a reason for constantly giving thanks. We know very well how close life is to not being. The reminders are all around us.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Carol Jacobs, July 18, 1995, in &#039;&#039;Akwesasne Notes&#039;&#039;, Fall 1995.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If life is a close thing, then we must care for it, acknowledge it, and be constantly grateful for it. The words that open and close each meeting of the people, ohe’n:ton karihwatékwen, the &amp;quot;words that come before all else,&amp;quot; are words of gratitude for and to each part of the natural world. An attitude of modest gratitude—atenonhwaratonhtserakon—is pervasive.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;A careful observer will notice that many Christian “prayers” consist of asking for things—our daily bread, forgiveness for our trespasses—while Haudenosaunee orations at the same place in gatherings are expressions of gratitude, not desire.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gratitude is offered to the Creator for making the world a place that supports life, but in giving thanks, the Haudenosaunee also acknowledge the plants and animals that sacrifice their lives so that humans can survive. There are ceremonies to give thanks as each of the plants are harvested: maple, berries, beans, green corn, and white corn. Hunters greet the animals before hunting and thank each animal after it is taken. In thanking each part of the natural world, the Haudenosaunee are also thanking Creation itself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sostsisowah John Mohawk expanded on the traditional Haudenosaunee saying that we cannot see the Creator&#039;s face, a metaphoric reference to our inability to fully comprehend the complexity of the creative force of the universe:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the native tradition the Creator has a less specific personage, if it&#039;s even a personage at all. The Creator could be time or space or energy or all of those. The Creator could be everything there is. And the Creator could be our dream. But whatever it is, we don&#039;t know, so we ought to be humble about that. And we ought to be humble because we are really the tiniest little speck on a little star in a not-very-large galaxy, on the edge of other galaxies that may be among billions and billions of galaxies that we&#039;ve never heard of and never will.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mohawk 1996.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gratitude is perhaps an inadequate way of describing the thanksgiving. Wallace Chafe explained the inadequacy of English to match the Seneca thinking that goes with the words:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The word “thanksgiving” seems no worse a choice than any other and has been used by most previous writers. When confronted with the Seneca words involved, some speakers balk at any attempt to give an English equivalent. Others translate, to some extent according to context, as &#039;&#039;“thank, be grateful to or for, rejoice in, bless, greet.”&#039;&#039; The trouble is that the Seneca concept is broader than that expressed in any simple English term, and covers not only the conventionalized amenities of both thanksgiving and greeting, but also a more general feeling of happiness over the existence of something or someone.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Chafe 1961, 6. The English transcription of a detailed Seneca Thanksgiving is Chafe’s publication of Shogʌdzowa Corbett Sundown’s words (9–16). Sotsisowah John Mohawk believed that the Thanksgiving, in its present form, was developed by the Tonawanda Senecas in the two or three decades after the death of Handsome Lake—that is, in the early years of the nineteenth century—and based on the invocation that would accompany the burning of the white dog. However, he was not suggesting that either the attitude of gratitude or the words used were of recent invention. Gratitude permeates all the ceremonies. Thinking about structure and place is constant. It is just the particular wording that is a distillation of earlier ideas and has emerged from another set of dark times.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee story of creation provides principles that shape and affect many aspects of the law.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;“Since the time of Creation the population of the Onkwehonwe were instructed. That’s why we always go back to the time of Creation. We were always instructed from that time. Where did we come from? And what’s our purpose in being here? And how did that tradition come about?” Deyonwe’ton Jake Thomas, in RCAP 1995, 631.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Fundamental beliefs find their way into constitutional and statutory provisions. The separation of church and state, a relatively recent occurrence in Anglo-Saxon law in North America, is not a line drawn in Haudenosaunee law. The cycle of ceremonies of gratitude is not at all the same as a European organized church, though some anthropologists assert that they have coalesced into a religion with &amp;quot;deacons&amp;quot; (the faithkeepers) and an organized structure (the annual Six Nations meetings to recite the Karihwí:iyo, the Code of Handsome Lake). By law, the rotiyanershon are responsible for helping to maintain the Four Ceremonies.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The Four Ceremonies are: Atonwa, the personal chant to honour the Creator; Kaientowá:nen, the bowl game, to give thanks for Creation; Ohstow’kó:wa, the Great Feather Dance, to celebrate life together; and Kanehó:ron, the Drum Dance, to thank the spirits. They arrived, temporally, between the Creation Story and the Great Law. They were brought to the Haudenosaunee by a fatherless man as a means of giving thanks together. For information on the Four Ceremonies, see Native North American Travelling College 2000, and also Mohawk 2005a, 90. There is also a Skaniatariio John Arthur Gibson version, 1900, collected by J.N.B. Hewitt, NAA MS 2181 (271 pages).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; They have no other religious functions. The ceremonies, Sotsisowah John Mohawk explained, are at the heart of what it means to be Haudenosaunee:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Despite all the information which came to light about the existence of an Iroquois cosmology, anthropologists … generally failed to see a connection between the cosmology and the ceremonial life of the Iroquois. This is interesting because one of the major themes of the narrative pointedly answers a central question about Haudenosaunee identity. Who are we? We are the people who carry on the tradition of ceremonials of thanksgiving. Why do we do these ceremonials? Because we recognize our great good fortune as receivers of the gifts of the Giver of Life. The people who composed this narrative did so to transmit that message to future generations. As long as there are Haudenosaunee people, the narrative tells us, they will perform the Great Gamble for Life. For as long as the Haudenosaunee exist, according to this tradition, they will remember this story.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mohawk 2005a, v.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is to questions about the meaning of existence that grand mythologies, sometimes called meta-narratives, turn their attention. Mythologies construct visions of the past which address the question about how the world came to be the way it is and, equally important, how we, as cultural beings in a certain culture, came to be the way we are.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mohawk 2005a, ix.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Such a story was not intended to be a secret among a few selected individuals. It was heard by all, the young and old, together, as a group experience. In the same way that everyone who participates in modern American culture has heard of the child who was born in a manger, everyone in ancient Iroquoia heard about the woman who fell from the sky.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mohawk 2005a, viii&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[The Creation story offers] an Haudenosaunee vision of humankind&#039;s role in the universe, and [calls] upon the bearers of the culture to join that vision, to act it out, to join in with a dream, and to form a society which reflects it.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mohawk 2005a, x.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One fundamental principle that flows from the Creation story is the relationship between human beings and the natural world. The Book of Genesis gives human beings &amp;quot;dominion&amp;quot; over all parts of the natural world&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Genesis 1: 26–28.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and suggests that everything was created to serve the needs of humanity. More recent Christian thinkers have struggled to insert the concept of &amp;quot;stewardship&amp;quot; into these words.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The eviction of Adam and Eve from the Garden, condemned thereafter to derive their sustenance by scraping the soil, living by the sweat of their brows, has been seen as the end of a hunter-gatherer world and the beginning of agriculture. The Haudenosaunee did not suffer a similar condemnation by their Creator. In the 2015 encyclical &#039;&#039;Laudato Si’&#039;&#039;, Pope Francis stated that Christians “must forcefully reject the notion that our being created in God’s image and given dominion over the earth justifies absolute domination over other creatures. . . . Human life is grounded in three fundamental and closely intertwined relationships: with God, with our neighbour, and with the earth itself.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; While logic agrees with the approach, fundamentalists who see an obligation to develop and exploit wage theological war with environmentalists who feel a need to conserve. The Haudenosaunee Creation story places human beings squarely in the midst of a natural world in which they form an integral part, and in which each part has been given responsibilities. Sotsisowah explained:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee Creation Story, which we can assume predates the foundation of the League, is replete with symbols of a rational universe. In the Creation Story, the only creature with a potential for irrational thought is the human being. All the other creatures of Nature are natural, i.e. rational.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nature is depicted as a threatening and irrational aspect of existence in the West&#039;s cosmologies. The Haudenosaunee cosmology is quite different. It depicts the natural world as a rational existence&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The idea that the natural world is not only rational but also organized is reflected in the layered structure set out in the Thanksgiving Address. Modern Haudenosaunee insist that this is a specific way of looking at the world. For example, the Akwesasne science curriculum follows the structure of the Thanksgiving. The Haudenosaunee Environmental Task Force, in setting out a view of the natural world and the challenges it faces, also followed this structure (see Haudenosaunee Environmental Task Force 2001).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; while admitting that human beings possess an imperfect understanding of it. The idea that human beings have an imperfect understanding of the rational nature of existence is something of a caution to Haudenosaunee in their dealings with nature. Conversely, the idea that the natural world is disorganized and irrational has served as something of a permission in the West and may be the single cultural aspect which best explains the differences between these two societies&#039; relationships to Nature.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mohawk 1989, 223. John Mohawk has suggested that the difference between Haudenosaunee (and other natural world) religions and Christianity is the difference between magic and miracles. Haudenosaunee ceremonies call upon the powers of the natural world for assistance: if the power is beyond human, Western observers tend to call this “magic.” Haduwi, for example, the power behind the masked medicine societies, is in some ways a culmination of the forces of the natural world that we cannot control. Haudenosaunee medicine societies tend to be reflections of natural forces—the help of the Bears, the Otters, and the Buffalo, for example. Christianity, on the other hand, sees “miracles” as unnatural by definition. If a cure attributed to a saint’s intervention can be shown to have been the result of a natural cause, it is no longer considered to be a miracle.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The reason it&#039;s so important to get people to cease fearing nature is that negative emotions invade one&#039;s ability to think clearly. People who are afraid of nature have much more difficulty defending it than people who are not. All of those negative emotions give you permission to enact violence on nature.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mohawk 1996, 10.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The values and principles inherent in the Creation story remain close to the day-to-day thinking and conduct of traditional Haudenosaunee today. Neil Patterson confirms:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From a Haudenosaunee perspective, there is a personal mandate from the Creation to protect Mother Earth and all that inhabit her. We should all begin to look at what personal changes we can make to reduce waste that our waters will eventually receive. . . . If there are doubts in the minds of our leaders about action like this on the Natural World, the answer is obvious. These past mistakes of history serve as a guideline for future generations: not only our grandchildren, but for the fish and everything that is in the Circle of Life. Our elders have learned from their elders these rules and guidelines.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Neil Patterson Jr., “The Fish,” in Haudenosaunee Environmental Task Force 2001.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Creation story establishes relationships—family relationships—between its characters in ways that resound through Haudenosaunee society. The earth, receiving the body of our Creator&#039;s mother, becomes our mother. The moon is our grandmother (because she was formed when Nikarondase (Thaharionwakon) placed his grandmother&#039;s head in the heavens after her death).&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;One can find the same reverence for family in Polynesian creation stories: that Maui used his grandmother’s jawbone as the fishhook that brought the islands to the surface is an indicator of the affection and respect one must have for one’s elder relatives.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The animals and plants are our brothers and sisters. If the law is founded upon bringing disparate people into a single family, the Creation story sets the tone for doing so.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A second principle is the nature of good and evil. Christianity has wrestled with the issue of how an all-powerful God who is absolutely good could permit evil to exist and even to flourish. The Church answers: it is a mystery that we humans cannot fathom; we are told we must have faith. Haudenosaunee thinking recognizes that good and evil both exist, and have been here from the beginning. They &#039;&#039;are&#039;&#039;, and therefore the question is not why, but rather how to address them in our lives and societies, and how to find balance.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In the Creation story, the right-handed twin banishes his brother, but does not kill him. Indeed, he says that he thinks one day his twin may win (however, it would probably be wrong to simplify their conflict into a match between good and evil, rather than a typical Haudenosaunee account of different ways to think about survival). When Thadadaho has the snakes combed from his hair, the serpents are not killed. They go somewhere else, and Thadadaho is given a staff with which to keep crawling things away from the council fire. The snakes continue to exist; the balance between “good force” and “bad force” remains.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Evil will not go away: we must continue to recognize it, understand it, and guard against it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A third principle is the relationship between the real and the spiritual, or what Wade Davis has called an &amp;quot;inner horizon.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;“They don’t separate dreams from reality.” Davis 1998, 36. Just as Aboriginal Australians assert that there was a Dreamtime before there was this age of the earth, so the Haudenosaunee Creation story takes place in a Dreamtime in which the animals are also spirits, and in which the formation of the world is happening at the same time as its first inhabitants are both already existing and taking shape.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In &amp;quot;scientific&amp;quot; societies, things exist if their physical presence is provable.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;A proposed Canada Health Protection Act, for example, would have required clinical testing by “science and objective observation.” Haudenosaunee medicine, which sees a partnership between the patient, the healer, the plants, and the spirits that assist the healing, would have a difficult time providing scientific proof of its effectiveness.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In most Indigenous societies, a thing that is dreamed also exists. The Haudenosaunee Creation story reflects a society that recognizes (as quantum theory suggests) that beings can move between our world and the spirit world, and that each world influences the other.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;A stream of court cases in Canada and the United States reduce Indigenous realities to mere “subjective beliefs,” which results in a lack of protection for what has been argued as religious freedom: epitomized in the United States, &#039;&#039;Navajo Nation v. United States Forestry Service&#039;&#039;, 479 F.3d 1024 (9th Cir. 2007), reversed 535 F.3d 1058 (9th Cir. 2008); in Canada, &#039;&#039;Ktunaxa Nation v. British Columbia (Forests, Lands and Natural Resource Operations)&#039;&#039; 2017 SCC 54. Probably by no coincidence, both cases involve the protection of sacred mountain areas from ski resorts.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is another set of lessons in the Creation story, urgently relevant to people alive today. Sky Woman, the only person the story follows through her entire lifetime, is thrust into a dark, wet, cold world. She is pregnant and alone. She survives what can only be described as catastrophic environmental change: the loss of her entire world. She and her grandsons are hungry much of the time. The ways in which they coped—how they dealt with the issues of sharing, of adapting, of making decisions—are shapers and reflections of the kind of society the Haudenosaunee developed. The Creation story is old: the world its people faced has features of an ice age.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Amber Meadow Adams explores these issues in her 2014 dissertation, &#039;&#039;“Teyotsi’tsiahsonhatye: Medicine and Meaning in the Haudenosaunee Story of Life’s Renewal,”&#039;&#039; and has done so in our many conversations since.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is always friction between those who say &amp;quot;we were created here&amp;quot; and those who say &amp;quot;you&#039;re just immigrants like everyone else—your ancestors came over the ice bridge across the Bering Sea less than 25,000 years ago.&amp;quot; Those who support the &amp;quot;bridge&amp;quot; theory often use it to assert that Aboriginal title is only immigrant title; that nobody has a better claim to the land than anyone else; that human occupation of North America is not ancient.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hayadaha Richard Hill says that these people ought to get their Berings straight.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; From a scientific perspective, the same accusations could be levelled at the British, since human occupation of the British Isles is no older (humans crossed to England after the last ice age). In fact, &#039;&#039;humans&#039;&#039; as we know them have not been around that long compared to the age of the world. We are all very recent.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Paul Ehrlich (2002, 98–99) states that modern humans emerged from Africa “within the past 100,000 years, starting perhaps 60,000–45,000 years ago, or even more recently, and replaced premodern populations.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The Haudenosaunee do not believe (as the Bible seems to assume, in saying that we were made in God&#039;s image) that we are the ultimate beings in the world, the end of all evolution. Things change. Sotsisowah John Mohawk observed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Things flow from sources which have roots deeper than individual talents or society&#039;s gifts. They flow from nature, and the sacred beings who designed nature. If one embraces the initial premise, that human beings were extremely lucky that of all the places in the universe, they have a home just the right distance from a sun of just the right intensity, that there is enough water, grass, and enough of everything. From there, it&#039;s a small step to accept that whatever created all that is a force of unexcelled sacred dimensions and the will of that force is something people should try to cooperate with to perpetuate life. The way a group expresses its cooperation is through ceremonies which recreate the conditions present when people first came to consciousness of these things.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Humankind&#039;s relationship to nature projected in this precolonial, pre-patriarchal, pre-modern story carries a fundamental and unchanging truth, but one which subsequent generations would need to relearn over and over. Humans exist in a context of nature, and not vice versa. Everything we have ever had, everything we have, everything we will ever have—our health, our good looks, our intelligence, everything—is a product not of our own merit but of all that which created our world. That which created our world is not society, but the power of the universe. Nature, which is the context of our existence, is sacred. A significant manifestation of nature, the regenerative power of life, is also sacred, and we who walk about on the earth are not without obligations to perpetuate this system, the “work” of the Giver of Life, in the greater scheme of things.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mohawk 2005a, xviii.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Those who say &amp;quot;we were created here&amp;quot; may or may not be wrong in biological terms. For legal purposes, though, biological creation is irrelevant. It is enough to say &amp;quot;we were created here, &#039;&#039;as a people&#039;&#039;,&amp;quot; in social and legal terms. The land has shaped its societies. Given half a chance, the land will shape the people who came to the Americas from Europe, from Asia, from Africa. Haudenosaunee society is &amp;quot;Indigenous,&amp;quot; in legal terms. It exists nowhere else. The term carries two distinct legal meanings. One is that the people have a special connection to the land in which their society was formed (Gary Paul Nabhan calls Indigenous peoples &amp;quot;cultures of habitat,&amp;quot; existing effectively only within the ecosystems in which they evolved).&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Nabhan 1997.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The other is that they were here first, before all the waves of more recent immigrants—and as an Indigenous society, they have the rights that come from being first.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;“When Europeans arrived in North America, Aboriginal peoples were already here, living in communities on the land, and participating in distinctive cultures, as they had done for centuries.” &#039;&#039;R. v. Van der Peet&#039;&#039;, (1996) 2 SCR 507 at 538.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Land ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As a people with a culture of habitat, the Haudenosaunee developed, over millennia, a sense of balance and comfort with the land around them. The homeland of the Haudenosaunee was not, as is sometimes assumed, a forbidding, untouched, and wild forest. Engelbrecht observed: &amp;quot;A commonly held image in need of revision is that eastern North America was covered by unbroken virgin forest before European settlement. Europeans coming from regions that had been clear-cut may have thought the environment untouched, but long human presence in the northeast had affected the distribution of plant and animal communities even before the establishment of Native American horticulture . . . the environment in which Native Americans lived is increasingly viewed as an environment that Native Americans altered, both consciously and unconsciously.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Engelbrecht 2003, 9; Alfred Crosby 1986; and Charles Mann 2005.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fire was a powerful tool. Deliberately set fires were a means of maintaining meadows, encouraging the natural progression from meadow to thicket to forest and back to meadow again, propagating certain trees and plants. Fire was sometimes used to drive game, but there was also an understanding of its long-term role in supporting hunting by maintaining diverse habitats and therefore biodiversity itself.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Engelbrecht 2003; see also Russell 1983.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; There were natural meadows and prairies, so that it was not necessary to carve new village sites out of dense forests. Parker, though, explained that &amp;quot;by burning off tracts in the forest large clearings were made suitable for fields and towns.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker 1968, 21.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Warren Johnson, visiting his brother Sir William in 1760, noted Haudenosaunee restraint in using fire as a tool: &amp;quot;When clearing land, they Set fire to the Timber, &amp;amp; burn it to ashes, which they scatter about on the ground, they make Charcoal of Wood; they never clear more Land than Serves for their Own Use.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Johnson 1921, 13:195. The ashes scattered on the fields after Midwinter are known to be helpful in regenerating life in the spring.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The absence of many earthworms (introduced with European settlement in the seventeenth century) meant that the forest&#039;s understory was not mulched with the same intensity, and therefore it supported different plant life than it does today.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mann 2007. “In worm-free woodlands, leaf litter piles up in drifts on the forest floor. But when earthworms are introduced, they can do away with the litter in a few months. The problem is that northern trees and shrubs beneath the forest canopy depend on that litter for food. . . . These creatures literally changed the ground beneath the Indians’ feet” (32–33).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The Haudenosaunee deliberately encouraged some trees and plants: black walnut, for example, appears in areas of settlement, well north of its &amp;quot;normal&amp;quot; Carolinian range.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Wykoff 1991, 13. There is also archaeological evidence of deliberate planting of pawpaw, bladder-nut shrub, hickory, and nut trees. Until the arrival of a devastating blight, up to one-quarter of the trees of the Carolinian forest were American chestnuts, which are now nearly extinct.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The forests around the villages, to the Haudenosaunee before (and after) the arrival of Europeans, were managed ecosystems, not a wild frontier. The idea of managed fields and forests blurs the sharp human/non-human line between the clearing and the woods.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Until recently, archaeologists believed that the knowledge of how to deliberately plant crops arrived in northeastern North America about ten centuries ago, spreading northward from Mexico. It is likely that knowledge of different plants came at different times, and that some knowledge was imported while other plants were domesticated locally.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;“The recognition of eastern North America as an independent center of plant domestication has been one of the most exciting archaeological revelations of the late twentieth century.” Fritz 2002, 225.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Corn and beans came from the south a thousand years ago; squash and gourds (cucurbits) may have been bred locally a thousand years before that.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Keener and Kuhns 1997.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Sunflowers,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Bodner 1999.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; other fleshy flowers (chenopods and sumpweed), Jerusalem artichoke, and nut groves (hickory nuts, walnuts, acorns, chestnuts, and hazelnuts) may have been developed in the northeast and spread from there. The people also gathered fruit: plums and cherries, strawberries and raspberries, sumac and blackberries.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The cultivation of crops transformed the way of life of the peoples of the northeast of Turtle Island. Corn, beans, and squash became known as the Three Sisters, &amp;quot;our life supporters.&amp;quot; Fields around the villages and towns of the Haudenosaunee might stretch for a mile or two in all directions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What Gayle Fritz (drawing on Maxi&#039;diwaic&#039;s commentary in &#039;&#039;Buffalo Bird Woman&#039;s Garden&#039;&#039;) said of Hidatsa women and the land could equally apply to the Haudenosaunee: &amp;quot;The hoe and stick digging technique was labor intensive, but the women loved their fields and pampered their crops, even singing to them, and most of the work was appreciated for the comradeship, the natural beauty, and the emotional satisfaction it afforded.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Fritz 2000, 237; Wilson 1987.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The earth, say the Haudenosaunee, is a mother to all of us. We must treat her as we treat our own mothers, with respect and gentleness: &amp;quot;The feeling of reverence toward the earth itself is also to be found behind some of the lingering reluctance to adopt the white man&#039;s agricultural equipment. The &#039;Old People&#039; believe that since Mother Earth nurtured her children, they should not tear at her breasts with ploughs, but rather tickle them gently with a stick or hoe.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Snyderman 1951, 17. See also Stiles 1905; Day 1953, 329–46.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The transformation from a society of hunter-gatherers to a society of gardeners (horticulturalists) took place gradually: &amp;quot;By A.D. 900, cucurbits, chenopod, little barley and sunflower were being grown with maize in the West Branch of the Susquehanna River basin. . . . In Europe, the time between A.D. 900 and A.D. 1200 is known as the Medieval Warm Period or neo-Atlantic climate episode. It is suggested that a similar warm period in New York facilitated the spread of farming.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Engelbrecht 2003, 24.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It meant the people could live together in larger, more permanent settlements. These larger settlements required more permanent and sophisticated forms of government.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Not long after the growth of towns came the kinds of war that required palisades, not just to keep wild animals out, but for protection against human enemies.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Not all towns were palisaded. Archaeological evidence suggests that there were large palisaded towns and smaller “satellite hamlets” some distance away, whose people could seek refuge in the towns in times of peril.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Physically, there were visible and conceptual boundaries in the minds of the people (as every culture provides visible boundaries). They radiated outward from the family&#039;s hearth or fire,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The root-word in Mohawk for “fire”—ó:tsire—is the same as the root-word for “family” —ohwátsi’re.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; which itself was a circle of stones.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In wampum belts, council fires (and therefore nations) are depicted sometimes as hexagons, sometimes as squares. Were the real fires of these shapes, or were the wampums using these shapes because of the restrictions of working with beads? Probably the latter: but not much attention has yet been paid by archaeologists to the shape of fires in Haudenosaunee longhouses. They have noticed a difference between deeper hearths (probably for cooking and roasting) and shallower, shifting ones (probably for warmth) (Engelbrecht 2003, 77). The colder the weather, the closer the people slept to the fire.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The next boundary was the walls of the longhouse. Then came the walls of the town. They represented security from danger: within those walls the land was under almost complete human control. Outside the palisades, the fields and gardens were cleared by men and cultivated by women. The fields ran to the woods&#039; edge. The woods, which could be seen in a circle around the town, were another clear boundary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Between the settlements, and between the nations, there was a network of paths and trails, both by land and water.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See, e.g., Toriwawakon Paul A.W. Wallace 1971, 2: “Most Indian paths were so well planned that, until the invention of the internal combustion engine, there was little occasion for any but minor changes in route.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; People wishing to visit another settlement would travel along the wide paths of peace. The paths share another aspect with international relations: the more they are used, the plainer they are, and the smoother they become. Those wishing to do harm would move in swift silence through the woods. Those who came in peace would often come singing their peace songs&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In 1666, La Pause described a Haudenosaunee embassy to the French: “One of the more notable men walks at the head, and pronounces a long string of words which have been handed down to them by tradition, and which are repeated by the others after him. The ambassador who is to be the spokesman comes last of all, singing in a rather agreeable tone; he continues his song until he has entered his cabin; around which he walks five or six times, still singing; then he sits down. There the pledges of friendship are renewed, the presents are given to dispel fatigue; to wipe away tears; to remove scales from their eyes, so that they may easily see one another; and finally, to open their throats and give free passage to their voices.” &#039;&#039;Relation de l’Ambassade des Cinq Nations&#039;&#039;, Archives Nationales, Paris, CIIA 2: 264 v.(1666); RAPQ 1932-33-328. In May 1756, the British met with the Shawnees and Delawares. An observer wrote: “The Shawanese came over the River with the English Prisoners, beating a Drum &amp;amp; singing their Peace Song, agreeable to the Antient Custom of their Nation, which they continued ’till they entered the Council Room” (SWJP 11: 727). The Senecas recalled “dancing the peace dance” approaching other nations at a peace treaty at Detroit (Fenton 1953, 108). The Miamis met the French in 1667 as they “approached singing and dancing, bending their knees in turn almost to the ground” (La Potherie, in Blair 1911, 1:325–30); in 1710, the Haudenosaunee met Ottawas at Onondaga: the three Ottawa delegates were “singing the Song of Joy. They had long stone Pipes in their hands &amp;amp; under the Pipes hung Feathers as big as Eagles Wings. When they left off singing well we filled their Pipes &amp;amp; let them smoak, when They had done, They filled the Pipes for us to Smoak—this is the token of Friendship” (Wraxall (1754) 1915, 70). The calumet—the pipe with the hanging feathers—is the peace instrument of the western nations. In July 1751, Conrad Weiser described a Catawba peace delegation to the Haudenosaunee: “I went to meet them and Conducted them to their proper place they Came along Singing with their Collabashes dressed with feders in their hands, they Continued Singing for a while after they sat down” (du Simitière Collection, Yi 966, Ridgway Library, Library Company of Pennsylvania).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; to announce themselves. A watchful town would always have young men posted in the woods to guard against danger.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The watchers might be placed at some distance: “the Iroquois always have sentinels upon the routes of their enemies,” noted the Jesuit Relation of 1623 (Thwaites 1901, 1:105). When singing was combined with joyous firing of muskets (or as an additional way of announcing one’s coming), the safety factor could be reduced: William Johnson wrote of an incident at Niagara in which “a party of 30 Friend Indians who were coming in to joyn the rest I sent there, on passing an Outpost sang their Song and discharged their pieces as is always customary, but the Sergeant who commanded mistaking them for an Enemy fired upon them and dangerously wounded three of the Indians.” SWJP 4: 451. The &#039;&#039;feu de joie&#039;&#039; is a worldwide practice. It can get dangerous, as when celebrants fire their AK-47s in the air at an Afghan wedding.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Visitors would stop at the edge of the woods, and wait to be greeted.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In modern Europe and North America, the boundaries are different, but some of the etiquette is the same. When you go to visit someone, you stop at the front door of the house. In some societies, you wait in the car in the driveway for a short time before going to the door. Then you ring the bell, or knock on the door, and wait politely at this boundary between the house and the outside world.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The narratives of the Kayanerenkó:wa describe several instances where individuals stop some distance from a community and light a fire, so that the smoke &amp;quot;pierces the sky.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;“Piercing the sky” by making a smoky fire was a way of making one’s presence known from a distance. However, the term also applies to the smoke from burning tobacco, which rises through the sky we can see, and into the Sky World, calling the attention of the Creator to what is being said or requested. In Gibson 1899, it is used as a synonym for travelling southward.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; This would give the people of the community a chance to investigate who the visitor is, and what is his business. In the story of the making of the law, the Peacemaker and Hiawatha consistently make fires near the woods&#039; edge, and tell the men sent to meet them to go ahead and announce that they are coming, bringing a message.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 70, 96–99.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In uncertain times, it is prudent to be announced, and to be invited.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The woods&#039; edge is a place of visible transition, from the shadows of the forest to the soaring sky of the clearing.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Pollan 2008, 212, 215. Pollan asserts that the “trope of constriction and release resonates most powerfully in a culture raised on a deeply forested continent, in a place where the moment of coming into a clearing has had a special urgency and savor.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It is a dividing line between light and darkness.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the people know the visitors are coming, they will light the fire and wait for their arrival to perform the greeting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When he approached Hochelaga in 1534, Jacques Cartier described the broad path of peace to the town, and the greeting at the woods&#039; edge that he and his men received:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The City of Hochelaga is six miles from the riverside, and the road thither is as well-beaten and frequented as can be, leading through as fine a country as can be seen, full of fine oaks as any in France, the whole ground being strewn over with fine acorns. When we had gone four or five miles we were met by one of the great lords of the city, accompanied by a great many natives, who made us understand by signs that we must stop at a place where they had made a large fire, which we did accordingly. When we had rested there some time, the chief made a long discourse in token of welcome and friendship, showing a joyful countenance and every mark of goodwill.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Biggar 1924, cited in Hale (1883) 1989, 346. Hale recognized what Cartier could not have: that the French were being greeted by people familiar with the Woods’ Edge Ceremony as part of international relations. If the town was six miles from the river, and the fire of greeting was four or five miles along Cartier’s path, and the fields spread for a mile around the town—then the fire would have been at the woods’ edge, or very close to it. See Bonaparte 2006; also Lightall 1899.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nearly a century and a half later, another French visitor described a similar experience at Onondaga. By now, the French knew how to announce themselves:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is why he came two leagues to meet us, accompanied by four or five others of the Ancients,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The word would more commonly be translated into English as “Elder” nowadays. In Haudenosaunee society, age requires respect, but not every old person is revered as a leader or knowledge-keeper.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; an honor which they are never accustomed to give to the other ambassadors, to meet whom they are contented to go a little eighth of a league outside of the town. . . . I walked gravely between two rows of people, who give me a thousand benedictions. . . . I kept making my cry of Ambassador while walking . . . then having returned in two words&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Beauchamp (1907) 1975 wrote that “the &#039;&#039;two words&#039;&#039; were short speeches emphasized with strings or belts.” While “words” in Haudenosaunee metaphor are usually individual paragraphs or matters, it is equally likely that in the case of Father Le Moine, writing in French, “deux mots” would mean “briefly”—as in the famous speech in Corneille’s &#039;&#039;Le Cid&#039;&#039;—“&#039;&#039;A moi, Comte, deux mots.&#039;&#039;” In Haudenosaunee languages, a word, a matter, and a piece of business can all be described by the same term: oríhwa.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; my thanks for this good welcome, I continued my journey and my cry.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Beauchamp (1907) 1975, 421, describing Father Le Moine’s second visit to Onondaga in 1661.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The woods&#039; edge is like a front door. The host has less control over the world beyond it, but a great deal of control within the house. With the visitor standing and waiting at the front door, the host has time to get the house in order and to decide how the visitor will be greeted. For the visitor, the front door is also a place of decision: to stay or to leave. That decision becomes more difficult once he is inside the house, with the door closed behind him. Being welcomed in, he leaves behind him the safety of the woods, exchanging it for the hospitality of the house, becoming a guest. Stepping past the woods&#039; edge into the clearing is an act of trust.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The Senecas and Mohawks are the doorkeepers of the Longhouse: the Great Black Rafters at the doorway to Seneca country are perilous: true visitors are welcomed, while dangerous ones may be killed.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The visitors standing by the fire at the woods&#039; edge are able to leave if they choose: they have not made the commitment to come in; they have not yet been assured of their safety.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the triad described in the Covenant Chain relationship is respect, trust, and friendship, in that specific order, then the ceremony at the woods&#039; edge fits comfortably into the sequence. Acknowledgment, greeting, sharing the words of comfort—all are acts of respect, visible, palpable acts that demonstrate esteem and welcome. They are mutual efforts to send the message of trust that will enable the host to truly welcome the guest, and the visitor to feel safe in entering the host&#039;s domain as a friend.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1645, when the Mohawk speaker Kiotsaeton spoke to the French and Hurons at Three Rivers, he conducted the preliminaries of the treaty making from a canoe. Possibly, since the Haudenosaunee had arrived by canoe, by the water paths, standing near the water&#039;s edge was the river equivalent of standing at the woods&#039; edge. But the fact that he did not land, that he remained in the canoe, also sent a message: we are not sure of our welcome, and we do not yet have enough of a relationship, enough trust in you, to step onto the shore before being invited to do so.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Two hundred years later, when the Mi’kmaq and Maliseet chiefs would visit Peskotomuhkati (Passamaquoddy) or Penobscot country to condole and raise up a chief, they, too, would wait in their canoes to be greeted at the water’s edge.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today, the greeting at the woods&#039; edge is preserved in the ceremony of Condolence: the clear-minded people stop their walk some distance from the longhouse of those who are grieving, and they wait to be approached and welcomed. They have come singing the peace songs, to announce themselves, and they stop to give their friends the opportunity to prepare themselves and to be satisfied that the delegation is indeed coming in peace.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The Maori &#039;&#039;karanga&#039;&#039; is remarkably similar to the woods’ edge greeting in its spirit and its sequences. Peoples at the edge of war conduct deliberate, brave rituals together to accentuate both their desire for peace and their continuing capacity to defend themselves. Such meetings are often demonstrations of courage and spirit as well as friendship.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Present-day Haudenosaunee territories are an archipelago in ecological as well as cultural terms. They can be seen on satellite photographs and topographical maps as containing some of the last viable Carolinian forests in Ontario and Quebec, and among the last old-growth forest in New York (much of the landscape that is similar is in national, provincial, and state parks). Today, as in centuries past, the Haudenosaunee are people of clearings, not of cleared lands like their neighbours. The forests are deliberately preserved as places for hunting, for gathering food and medicines, and for spiritual comfort and strength.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fenton maintained that the cultivated land belonged to the women,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;At the inquiry into George Klock’s fraudulent purchase of Canajoharie Mohawk land, there was the following question and answer: “Being asked whether the Women were looked upon, as having any right in the Disposal of Lands, he answered: ‘They are the truest Owners being the persons who labour on the Lands, and therefore are esteemed in that Light.’” SWJP 4:56. Taylor states that women decided the locations of the villages: Taylor 2006, 18; citing Wallace 1969, 29; Shoemaker 2010, 18–19. See also Goldenweiser 1915, 15:696–97.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; while the woods were men&#039;s territory.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Snow (1994, 39) notes the absence of “men’s houses” in Haudenosaunee towns, and suggests that this was because the men were often away at trade, war or diplomacy, so “their domain was a lodge turned inside out.” But why the assumption that a people would have gendered houses?&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; He wrote that this reflects the duality that men were mainly concerned with killing (animals, fish, enemies, and even the trees they would clear for the fields), while women were concerned with promoting life (the crops and the children). Men take life; women give life. This perspective misses the deeply collaborative nature of the division of labour in Haudenosaunee communities, but it acknowledges that the woods, more dangerous than the fields, were more often considered men&#039;s business.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;A network of wayfarers’ huts and hunting shelters, a day’s travel from the village, made life in the woods easier. It is said that there were also huts at the woods’ edge, where the path of peace met the clearing, where the visitors could stay while they waited to be greeted.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Robert Venables writes of Haudenosaunee lands as &amp;quot;gendered landscapes,&amp;quot; though he rejects any suggestion that Haudenosaunee society was imbalanced as a result of women&#039;s rights to land. Venables also recognizes that Haudenosaunee perceptions that the elements of the natural world are linked to and equal to humans result in a different attitude towards the world as a whole:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because the Haudenosaunee worldview is incorporative and seeks to balance what is perceived to be a world inhabited by spiritually equal beings, the Haudenosaunee worldview is still evident today in their spiritual perception of the non-Indians who now occupy so much of their homelands. . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is not to say, either in history or today, that the Haudenosaunee never made mistakes, for indeed they have and they still do. But when they make mistakes, they ask different questions and pose different solutions based on their worldview—a worldview, it must be stressed, that is what the Creator intended them to follow, and not simply a human invention.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Venables 2010, 28.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One source of this balanced view is the constant contrast between the forest and the clearing. The forest is also the &amp;quot;hunting grounds,&amp;quot; a term that describes the major activity that takes place there, and one that took on additional legal significance as it became part of the vocabulary of dealings with European powers.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In 1701, the Haudenosaunee placed the Ohio country and southwestern Ontario under British protection: the area was called the “Beaver Hunting Ground,” in contrast to the “deer hunting ground” that lay south of Lake Ontario. Beaver hunting took place at a distance, and one returned home with pelts. Deer hunting meant bringing home the meat, unspoiled. In 1755, the British used the terms of the 1701 treaty as a recruiting tool—they announced that General Braddock had come to remove the French from their encroachments on Haudenosaunee hunting grounds. In 1763, the Royal Proclamation reserved all the lands west of the Appalachians and the Quebec boundary to the “Nations or Tribes of Indians with Whom We are Connected, or Who live under Our Protection” as their “Hunting Grounds.” Later literature and countless films refer to the afterlife as “the Happy Hunting Grounds.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As one moves away from one&#039;s town, one gradually moves into territory in which one has less and less control—through the territory of other settlements of one&#039;s own nation, and into the territory of other friendly nations where one remains a visitor, though the &amp;quot;Dish with One Spoon&amp;quot; provisions of the Kayanerenkó:wa allow one to hunt for food. Then one travels into the territory of less friendly or hostile nations. A journey moves one from being owner to guest to visitor to stranger.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;deep dark forest,&amp;quot; the woods beyond one&#039;s familiar territory, could be a place of danger and uncertainty. Light and darkness are important opposites in Haudenosaunee thought: day is our Creator&#039;s time, while night is said to belong to his brother (so councils are not held after sundown, when minds and bodies are tired); white wampum is the symbol of peace, as purple wampum is often associated with misfortune. The dark forest is a place of peril, populated not only by potential enemy humans but also by monsters: flying heads, stone giants, and serpents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the world&#039;s rim dwells Hadu&#039;wi, a being our Creator encountered in the early days of the world. A powerful figure, Hadu&#039;wi may symbolize all the elements of the natural world over which humans have no control. His alliance with us, arranged by the Creator, is invoked by the medicine society whose members wear the wooden masks bearing his image, and maintained by the tobacco burned for him. It is said that, in the deep woods, people can sometimes see him flitting between trees. The woods are a place of power, but it is not necessarily power that humans can command.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the forest—and the paths through it—is one dominant aspect of the landscape of the Haudenosaunee, a second important feature is the river. The people lived by both rivers and lakes—the core of the Haudenosaunee homeland is the Finger Lakes area, where it is said that the Creator scraped his fingers along the land, creating today&#039;s waters. The St. Lawrence, Susquehanna, Hudson, Mohawk, and Genesee Rivers were also crucial, as were the many smaller streams and creeks. The rivers, because they are flowing paths of communication, are a recurring metaphor in the thinking of the people and the law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Elder Brothers—the Mohawks and Senecas—sometimes refer to the Younger Brothers—the Oneidas and Cayugas—as &amp;quot;you who are downstream from us.&amp;quot; Geographically, this makes no sense. On the Mohawk River, the Oneidas are west, and upstream, from the Mohawks. To the west, the rivers flow north–south, and the Cayugas, in their homeland on Cayuga Lake, were not downstream from the Senecas on any river. But when one juxtaposes this affectionate term with its alternatives, &amp;quot;younger brothers&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;offspring,&amp;quot; one understands that the river in the Kayanerenkó:wa is not geographic and literal: it is a river of time.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Tehahenteh Frank Miller asserts that in Haudenosaunee language as in Haudenosaunee thought, time and space are treated differently than in English, and their boundaries are blurred.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Like fire, a river is a process, not an event.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Understanding a river in temporal terms comes naturally to people who see and use a river every day. When you stand on the shore, an object upstream from you now will soon be downstream. For the Haudenosaunee, three centuries ago, the rivers were highways, sources of water, food, and medicine, and a constant part of their landscape.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rivers are also metaphors of life, constantly changing. &amp;quot;You can never step into the same river twice&amp;quot; is not geographic, but temporal.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Heracleitus, the fifth-century BC Greek philosopher, actually wrote something more like: “The sum of things flows like a stream. . . . It is impossible to descend twice into the same river and it is impossible to touch a mortal substance twice in the same condition, but because of the impetuosity and speed of the changes, it is scattered and gathered together, it comes and goes.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The river that is placid and clear today may be overflowing its banks, muddy, and brown tomorrow. Like human life, rivers are affected by storms and high winds, drought, freezing and flood. It is their flowing nature, though, that finds its way into the Great Law, into the spirit of the law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Creation story, the people&#039;s clans are revealed to them when they go for water at the river.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mohawk 2005a, 92–93. Unlike many other people’s stories of creation, the Haudenosaunee story, very much located in the Carolinian biome in its description of plants and animals, does not name any specific places.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In the narrative part of the Great Law, many events take place by rivers or small lakes. The Cannibal lives by a river; so does Tsikonsaseh; so does Hiawatha in his hermit stage. The Peacemaker is tested by the Mohawks at Cohoes Falls on the Mohawk River. In the narrative, rivers are not important except as locators. In the substantive aspects of the law, the rivers become metaphors, vehicles for principles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An underground river sweeps the weapons of war away once they have been buried under the Tree of Peace. In that metaphor, the Confederacy stays in one place, &amp;quot;on the bank,&amp;quot; as it were, while the river becomes the agent of healing, change, and removal.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;One might also find another parallel: in the Creation story, Sky Woman falls through a hole in the sky created by an uprooted tree, and she falls towards the waters below.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The river is the symbol of travel through time and life. The words and ideas contained in wampum belts are intended to flow through time, so the wampums themselves are likened to that temporal river: kahswénhtha, &amp;quot;it flows.&amp;quot; The river stands for the idea that the principles of the law, and the relationships they foster, can remain constant, even as the temporal, social, and political landscape changes. Another word for a wampum belt, kahionni, is interpreted as &amp;quot;the river formed by the hand of man.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parmenter 2013, 84, citing Cuoq 1882, 160. Parmenter suggests that the metaphor is due to the linear form of the belt and the way “its constituent shell beads resemble ripples and waves.” He misses the way the principles embodied in wampum flow through time like a river, the most important aspect of how the wampum is used.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The term kahswénhtha is often applied, nowadays, to the Tekeni teyohá:te, the Two Row (or more properly &amp;quot;Two Path&amp;quot;) Wampum. In that wampum, the canoe of the Haudenosaunee and the sailing ship of the Europeans are said to be travelling down the River of Life, side by side, neither interfering in the path of the other. They remain close to each other, bound by friendship, trust, and respect, but they also keep a respectful distance from each other. It is easy to see the flowing nature of the relationship and commitments in a wampum that uses the river itself as a symbol.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Perhaps, with the increasing pace of change, the Haudenosaunee have come to see themselves less as the people who met the newcomers on the river’s banks, and more as a people in a fragile watercraft swept along on the current of the river of life, with its uncertainties and lack of control.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every wampum belt, though, includes the symbolism of the temporal river, and is thus called kahswénhtha.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See, e.g., Morgan (1851) 1995, 3:53, the illustration of “Ga-sweh-ta Ote-ko-a or belt of wampum” (otkó:wa refers to the “Great Shell,” the shell beads). The word also indicates a spine.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The Two Row is not the only wampum that flows. Every wampum that represents a relationship or a principle of law flows through time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Flowing through time&amp;quot; requires a second perspective. If the ship and the canoe are on the river together, they are moving through time at the same speed. Their relationship to each other, on the river, is constant, even as the river changes in relation to its banks and its bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Flowing through time also means flowing downstream.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In the Creation story, it is said that the right-handed twin made the rivers flow both ways, for the convenience of people’s travel, and then the left-handed twin caused them to flow only one way, and filled them with rapids and other obstacles. By smoothing the waters, Kiotsaeton was also re-enacting Teharionwakon’s calming of the rivers. Re-enacting parts of the law and re-enacting parts of the story of creation are often the same thing.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; On a river, it means flowing with the current, not fighting against it.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;When one gathers water for medicine, it is scooped with the current, not against it. One works with the forces of the natural world, not against them.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The nature and use of rivers lead to another powerful metaphor: on a river, going downstream, the most significant effort is not propulsion, but navigation. In the land of the Haudenosaunee, navigation meant avoiding rocks, falls, sunken logs, and fallen trees. The people were using light, quick, fragile canoes in fast-moving water. If the rivers were highways, it was important to keep them clear and safe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since the rivers were paths of communication, they—and the wampum belts that flowed—became part of symbolically keeping minds and paths open. Where the visitors to a council came on foot, both the greeting at the woods&#039; edge and the opening of the council would refer to keeping the path open and free from brambles and weeds, and removing fallen trees. Where they came by water, the concern would be to keep the rivers open. When Kiostaeton spoke to the French and Algonquins in 1645, he spoke of calming waters and opening the paths, by water and by land:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fifth (wampum “present”) was given to clear the river, and to drive away the enemy’s canoes, which might impede navigation. He made use of a thousand gestures, as if he had collected the waves and had caused a calm, from Quebec to the Iroquois country.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The sixth was to smooth the rapids and waterfalls, or the strong currents, that occur in the river on which one must sail to reach their country. “I thought that I would perish,” he said, “in those boiling waters. This is to appease them;” and with his hands and arms he smoothed and arrested the torrents.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Haudenosaunee travellers and traders, and the voyageurs who took up the fur trade with them, would put down tobacco before entering difficult rapids or dangerous waters. When Arendt van Curler not only refused to do this at an island in Lake Champlain, but showed his backside to the sacred place, the Mohawks were not surprised that he drowned in a storm on that lake three days later.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The seventh was to produce a profound calm on the great Lake Saint Louys&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Lake Ontario (the Beautiful Lake), also known as Cataraqui Lake.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; that has to be crossed. “Here,” he said, “is something to make it smooth as ice, to appease the winds, and to allay the anger of the waves.” Then, after having by his gestures rendered the route easy, he tied a collar of porcelain beads on the arm of a Frenchman, and pulled him straight across the square, to show that our canoes could go to their country without any difficulty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The eighth performed the whole journey that had to be made on land. You would have said that he felled trees; that he lopped off branches; that he pushed back the bushes; that he put earth in the deepest holes. “There,” said he, “is the road, quite smooth and straight.” He bent toward the ground, looking to see whether there were any more thorns or bushes, and whether there were any mounds over which one might stumble in walking. “It is all finished. We can see the smoke of our villages, from Quebec to the extremity of our country. All obstacles are removed.”&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Thwaites 1901, 27:96–98, in Jennings 1985, 137.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Jesuit recorder of the 1645 council saw a pantomime of a literal removal of physical obstacles.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;This was a very early council with the French, and sign language may have been deemed necessary to ensure understanding: in later councils, when there were reliable interpreters, some of the pantomime disappeared.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Kiotsaeton intended more: a metaphorical performance of the removal of obstacles to clear-minded communication. As his final statement after removing the obstacles suggests, seeing clearly is the beginning of understanding clearly.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Recall that the first “word” of the Condolence, as well as the first “word” at the Woods’ Edge, wipes away the tears so that the people can see clearly again.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The river is a part of the metaphor in the law for open communication and clear thought. Equally important, though, it is a metaphor for the need for constancy of principle amid the certainty of change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the forest and the river are two important landscape metaphors, the sky is the third. Haudenosaunee territory is not mountainous. Much of it is low rolling hills. Human presence would be detected, not by sight of village clearings from a distance, but by the smoke of the fires rising to the sky. The narrative of the Great Law contains dozens of references to the smoke rising—sometimes the fire a person lights at the woods&#039; edge to notify the people of the village of his presence; sometimes the stand for peace of villages unafraid to show themselves; sometimes the smoke of a fire of gratitude, of tobacco-burning. In each case, the smoke links the earth and its people to the Sky World, a constant reminder of the lessons of the Creation story.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;If the sky is part of people’s perception of what the world consists of, that explains why so many of the great Indigenous speeches (including those of Tecumseh) ask “Can you sell the sky? Can you sell the air? Then why do you think you can sell the land?” It took a few centuries before Euro-Americans concluded that it was possible to sell a legal part of the air, since that is what a condominium apartment partly consists of.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Haudenosaunee perspective on the relationship between the people and the land was explained to the Supreme Court of Canada in &#039;&#039;Ktunaxa Nation v. British Columbia&#039;&#039; in 2016:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While it is dangerous to generalize about Indigenous laws, they seem to share a key difference from the common law. It is exemplified in the Haudenosaunee Creation story, when Taharonhiawakon picks up a clod of earth in his hands and says: “I tell you the Earth is ALIVE!” Compare this to the origins of Canadian property law: centuries ago, when an Englishman bought a parcel of land, the transaction was not complete until he went to the place, picked up a lump of its earth, and declared: “This is MINE!” Seisin is not far from seizure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For many Indigenous peoples, the assumption that one can “own” land is as repugnant as the idea that one can “own” other human beings (abandoned by the Crown only in 1833). The theory that open land is there for the taking, that there is a broad individual or corporate right to develop, is foreign to Indigenous legal systems in which humans hold stewardship of Earth, not dominion, and in which so many things are relatives.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Factum of the Passamaquoddy Nation at Schoodic, &#039;&#039;Ktunaxa Nation v. British Columbia&#039;&#039;, heard 1 December 2016 (Paul Williams, Counsel).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The people did not own the land in some of the ways that modern Western &amp;quot;civilization&amp;quot; considers ownership. They had no practice of individual land ownership, and they also did not believe that the whole territory belonged only to the people who happened to be alive at the time. Since the Haudenosaunee see themselves as part of a continuum, to the extent that the land belongs to anyone, it is the property of everyone—past, present, and future.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In his commentary on concepts of land ownership among the Iroquois, Snyderman wrote that:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The belief that the land belonged not only to the present generation, but to all future generations was widely accepted. The present generation, it was believed, had no power to sell lands, for obviously the future generations could not express their wishes in council. The present generation acted as custodians of the land for the unborn; they could only utilize the land during the period of their actual existence.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The idea that the people have only a usufruct in the land is consistent with the view of Euro-American law about the land rights of Indigenous peoples. The problem is that Euro-American societies do not consider that their governments or people have only a usufruct: they believe in ownership and the right to exploit and dispose, for all time. The idea that one has the use of a matter during one’s lifetime, but that the thing will be used by future generations, is reflected in the way names are also passed on (see Thwaites 1901 27–28:96–98; Vachon 1992).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; This attitude is clearly discerned in the now famous speech of Cornplanter, Halftown, and Big Tree in 1790. In one of the opening paragraphs they stated quite dramatically that: “We will not conceal from you that the Great God and not men, has preserved the Cornplant from the hands of his nation. For they ask continually, where is the land on which our children and their children after them are to lie down upon?” (Drake, S.G., 1834, p.96)&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Snyderman 1951. “The land we live on, our fathers received from God, and they transmitted it to us, for our children, and we cannot part with it”: Kayantwakon (Cornplanter) John O’Bail to Kanatakarias George Washington, 1 December 1790; Lowrie and Clarke 1832–34, 2:142.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee did not &amp;quot;own&amp;quot; land the way the Europeans did. They expressed their relationship to land more in terms of their belonging to, and sharing an identity with, a specific region. Traditionally, one does not say just where one is from, but rather &amp;quot;that kind of clay I am made of&amp;quot; (niwaki’taró:ten)—which means the same thing.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hill 2017, 5. When one considers that “Adam” means “Red Earth,” the concept of Man made from the clay of the earth seems more universal.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Belonging,&amp;quot; in several aspects of Haudenosaunee relations, is more important than &amp;quot;owning,&amp;quot; and being made of the clay of a place is an expression of being part of it, just as identifying oneself as being Wolf Clan is not an expression of authority, but rather of belonging. One belongs to a family, to a clan, or to a medicine society in the sense that one bears privileges and protection as a result of the relationship, but also obligations. In the same way, and because the land is provident and protective, as we protect the land, we &amp;quot;belong&amp;quot; to the land more than it belongs to us. After all, it will be here long after our bodies have returned to it. Haudenosaunee views of relations with land are often expressed in terms of stewardship, a relationship between a person and a thing he or she is looking after. This is not dissimilar to the relationship between a person and a medicine mask: he or she looks after it as a custodian, a steward, but also as a companion of a thing that is alive, rather than as an owner. European societies and their laws did not have clear concepts and words to describe what they found in the Americas 500 years ago. Nor should one forget that, 500 years ago, the societies of western Europe often treated wives and children as a form of property, and did practise slavery. Land ownership was as often the result of recent conquest as of ancient intimacy. In European society, based increasingly on private property, many more things were typically individually owned than in Haudenosaunee society at the time. It is not unexpected that land should be considered fungible and often private in Euro-American society, and considered a relative, alive and to be cared for, in the view of the Haudenosaunee.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nevertheless, there were aspects of the connection between the people and the land that would be taken by Europeans as indicators of land ownership. Along the paths into Haudenosaunee country, young men were sentinels against any invaders or intruders. Haudenosaunee law provides that the hunting grounds shall be shared between allied nations—the metaphor is that the land is like a dish with a single wooden spoon—so the Haudenosaunee would welcome guest hunters. But they would, in the most forceful terms, resist anyone seeking to take the land without their consent, or threaten the safety of their villages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since the women cultivated the fields, they had primary authority for making decisions about that land.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;“In them resides all the real authority: the lands, fields and all their harvest belong to them,” wrote Lafitau in 1724 (1974, 69).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The earth, after all, is our mother, not some male entity.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The ancient Greeks recognized Gaia, wife of Uranus, as the earth mother.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Europeans, who for centuries had placed women in a subordinate position in which they rarely owned land, often found the authority of Haudenosaunee women difficult to accept. The Haudenosaunee had to explain the difference, often bluntly. Agwerondongwas, an Oneida royá:ner, stated: &amp;quot;Brothers! Our Ancestors considered it a great Transgression to reject the Counsels of their Women, particularly the female Governesses. Our Ancestors considered them the Mistresses of the Soil. Our Ancestors said who brings us forth, who cultivates our Land, who kindles our fires and boils our Pots, but the Women . . . they are the Life of the Nation.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Agwerondongwas (Good Peter), Oneida royá:ner, to Governor Clinton of New York, cited in Viau 2000, 263.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fact that the responsibility for speaking with outsiders was a men&#039;s matter&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Why was this the men’s responsibility? Possibly because the initial meeting with strangers might involve physical threats, and the defence of the community was the responsibility of the men.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; made it even more complicated—since the Europeans generally assumed that those who spoke were also the decision makers. Lafitau wrote of the chiefs that &amp;quot;it seems that they serve only to represent and aid the women in the matters in which decorum does not permit the latter to appear or act.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Lafitau (1724) 1974, 69. In this context, “decorum” really means protocol rather than etiquette.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Sometimes, though, the women had to speak for themselves, to take an exceptional step to make their position clear: &amp;quot;Your sisters, the women, have taken the same into great consideration, because that you and our sachems have said so much upon it . . . [Y]ou ought to hear &amp;amp; listen to what we women shall speak, as well as the sachems, for we are the owners of the land &amp;amp; it is ours; for it is we that plant it, for our and their use. Hear us, therefore, for we speak of things that concern us &amp;amp; our children &amp;amp; you must not think hard of us while our men shall say more to you; for we have told them.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Sakoyewatha (Red Jacket), speaking for the women on May 15, 1791. He also speaks for the women at the 1794 Canandaigua Treaty, “saying that it was they who made the men” and “that they had found themselves much distressed by being hemmed in,” as part of a statement supporting the men’s stated desire that the Erie Triangle be returned. Ganter 2006, 20, 62.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Modern Western law concerning land separates its consideration between the right of a nation or nation-state over its territory (sovereignty or jurisdiction) and the nature of land ownership within that polity. Haudenosaunee law does the same thing. Where internally, notions of stewardship, women&#039;s rights, and the concern for future generations governed land rights, a different set of considerations determined whether the land was Haudenosaunee land or the land of other nations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complicate matters further, the frequent tension between the chiefs and the warriors sometimes strayed into land issues. As constant war increased the perceived power of the warriors, they would sometimes claim to have authority for the land, too: a speaker for the warriors told the British: &amp;quot;Now Brother I let you know that our Kings having nothing to do with our Lands; for we, the Warriors fought for the Lands and so the right belongs to us &amp;amp; we will take Care of them.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1939, 5:284. The less visible part of this statement: these men may have fought for the land at the bidding of the women. There was direct communication between women and men, and it did not have to go through the rotiyanershon.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Conquest? It is unclear whether there was a pre-Columbian idea of conquest, but certainly the Haudenosaunee understood the idea by 1701, when they made a &amp;quot;trust deed&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The document drafted by the British states that the Haudenosaunee gave up all right of ownership of the land, keeping only the right to hunt. The Haudenosaunee understanding of the transaction, as confirmed by Sir William Johnson in 1755 and through a series of interactions at the beginning of the Seven Years’ War, was that the area was to remain Haudenosaunee land, but that it was being placed under British protection.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; concerning the &amp;quot;Beaver Hunting Ground&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Close to the towns were the deer hunting grounds, from which one could bring home the meat before it spoiled. Beaver hunting grounds, from which one brought furs, were more distant.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; —the territory of southwestern Ontario &amp;quot;won by the sword&amp;quot; from the Wendat, Tiionontate, and Attiwandaronon. To the Haudenosaunee in the seventeenth century, though, conquest of territory meant a permanent military solution, not a temporary one: as the chiefs explained to the British on February 13, 1688:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The French can have no title to those places which they possesse, nay not to Cadarachqui and Mount Royall nor none of our lands toward the Ottawawas, Dionondadas, Twichtwis; for by what means can they pretend them, because they came to the Maquase country formerly and now laterly to the Sinnekes country and burnt some bark houses and cut down our corne—if that be a good title then we can claim all Canida, for we not only did soe, but subdued whole nations of Indians who liv’d there, and demolished there castles in so much, that now great oake trees grow where they were built, and afterwards we plyed the French home in the warr with them, that they were not able to go over a door to pisse.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;NYCD, London Docs., 6:534. The last phrase was not just confusion about indoor plumbing: Haudenosaunee campaigns against New France included deliberate expeditions to take captives, and the French were apprehensive about venturing into the fields and woods alone, even as near to Montreal as Lachine. See Brandão 1997.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Newhouse asserts that the territory of an exterminated nation becomes territory of the Haudenosaunee by right of conquest, and that conquered nations have no voice in the council.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Newhouse and Cusick) 1916, 53. Newhouse’s versions of the law, though, tend to be more draconian and aggressive than other versions, on a number of points. This leaves open the question of whether nations that have joined voluntarily rather than through conquest would have a voice in council. The Tuscaroras, for example, retain their seats “under the wing” of the Oneidas, even as they are called the sixth nation. Their voice in council is not required for a decision, but they are seldom denied the right to speak when they request it.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a nation joined the Confederacy, its land came with it;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In 1793, Lieutenant Governor Simcoe wrote of the “Grounds between the Genesee &amp;amp; Buffalo Creek” that “the Senecas claim them, but Capt. Brant seems to think ‘as they were conquered Lands that they belong to the Confederacy of the Six Nations.’” If they were indeed “conquered lands,” the conquest had taken place more than 150 years earlier. Cruikshank 1923, 2:50.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; its people became indistinguishable from the component nations, and the external boundaries of the Haudenosaunee were extended as a longhouse would be extended. The British opportunistically applied their own beliefs about &amp;quot;empire&amp;quot; to this, and asserted that, since the Haudenosaunee were their subjects and had an empire, it was, in effect, a British empire.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Jennings 1990.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Prudently, they chose not to inform their Haudenosaunee brothers of this assertion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Concepts of land ownership evolved over time and with exposure to other cultures.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;By the eighteenth century, the Haudenosaunee also considered inheritance of land by nations. Sir William Johnson wrote to Governor Penn that “the Five Nations have desired that I shall acquaint you that as by the extinction of the Conestogas, the lands they possessed revert to them their relations &amp;amp; next heirs, that they therefore expect to have the liberty of disposing of them, or that a proper consideration be made for them” (SWJP 4:324). The Cayugas had adopted the remaining Conestogas (or Susquehannocks).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; They also evolved as European settlement spread and nations that were allied with the Haudenosaunee were displaced westward. George Snyderman asserted that &amp;quot;land was given or loaned by the League or its members to alien people for their use during good behavior.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Snyderman 1951, 22. The best-documented example of this is the Susquehanna Valley, loaned to the Delawares. When the Delawares signed agreements selling parts of the valley to colonial governments, the Haudenosaunee reasserted their own ownership in blunt, angry terms.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other nations were allowed to continue to use and occupy their lands, after being &amp;quot;subdued.&amp;quot; The Seneca chiefs Kayantwakon (Cornplanter), Halftown, and Great Tree told President Washington: &amp;quot;Many nations inhabited this country; but they had no wisdom, and, therefore, they warred together. The Six Nations were powerful, and compelled them to peace; the lands, for a greater extent, were given up to them; but the nations which were not destroyed, all continued on those lands, and claimed the protection of the Six Nations, as their brothers and their fathers.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Documents, Legislative and Executive, of the Congress of the United States, vol. 4, Washington, 1832. From written speech in Philadelphia in 1791. Thayendenega Joseph Brant suggested that “although the Five Nations have an equal right one with the other, the country having been obtained by their joint exertions in war with a powerful nation formerly living southward of Buffalo Creek called Eries, and another nation then living at Tioga Point, so that by our successes all the country between that and the Mississippi became joint property of the Five Nations” (Clark, cited in Murray 1931, 29).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fundamental relationship between the people and the land supplies some of the principles of the law. The law tells the people that they are part of a continuum of people who all have and share land rights; their presence on the land is not &amp;quot;ownership&amp;quot; in the sense that they may do what they wish, but a kind of stewardship, both for their own future generations and for the other living things with which they share the land. Their work with the land also finds its way into the ceremonies of thanksgiving—as they help, acknowledge, and renew the land, so it returns the stuff of life to the people.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Haudenosaunee law, ohwentsiá:ke, &amp;quot;on the earth,&amp;quot; includes the soil, the rocks, the waters, and all the parts of the world.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;“When Aboriginal people speak of the land they mean not only the ground that supports our feet: they also include waters, plants, animals, fish, birds, air, seasons—all the beings, elements and processes encompassed by the term ‘biosphere.’” RCAP 1995, 631.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; This is different from Euro-American law, in which &amp;quot;land&amp;quot; can be separated from &amp;quot;nature&amp;quot; in order to be developed or exploited. In Euro-American law, it is possible not only to draw lines on the land as boundaries between individual properties, but also to &amp;quot;own&amp;quot; mathematically calculated shares of undivided land with other people (a &amp;quot;condominium&amp;quot;); to own the crops or fruit but not the land (a &amp;quot;usufruct&amp;quot;); to own the right to cross or use the land (an &amp;quot;easement&amp;quot;); to own land only during one&#039;s lifetime; and to subdivide the land into increasingly smaller parcels. To the Haudenosaunee, land &amp;quot;ownership&amp;quot; was communal, not individual: the community extends back through the ancestors and ahead to the coming faces. Perhaps this difference is fundamental to cultures—the holistic approach of the Haudenosaunee contrasts with the Euro-American ability to break things into distinct and independent parts.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Byrne 2003.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In the same way, Euro-American science and medicine use the &amp;quot;scientific method,&amp;quot; where Haudenosaunee healing sees an entire human in his environment, and tends to be more comfortable with what is now called an &amp;quot;ecosystem approach&amp;quot; to earth sciences and an &amp;quot;environmental&amp;quot; approach to medicine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Communal landholding was the Haudenosaunee way before the arrival of the Europeans, but technological change brought a change in attitudes about land. Sotsisowah John Mohawk suggested that the advent of draft animals had the most impact: now one man with a horse could plow land that it had earlier taken twenty women to prepare. Horses and oxen transformed the way the people related to the land. Just as the fur trade was dying and the homelands were filling up with European settlers, the plow made it possible for Haudenosaunee men to become farmers, and for the single-family farm to become economically and socially viable. It is not difficult to understand the Karihwí:iyo, the Code of Skaniatariio (Handsome Lake) of the 1790s, as including a pragmatic effort to maintain the principles of traditional values in the face of this rapid societal change.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Ferris (2006) discusses the relative longevity and constancy of societal principles as technological and other changes occur.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The Code explains that it is acceptable to have draft animals like the white people, but that one should not become too proud of them; that it is acceptable, too, to have single-family houses, but that they should be modest, painted simply in white.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today, traditional Haudenosaunee values concerning land are evident in each of the communities, manifesting themselves in an &amp;quot;ownership&amp;quot; pattern that is a combination of private landholding and community values. The sense of shared stewardship, of responsibility to the land and the natural world and to future generations, is not formally visible to outsiders, but it remains real, more than vestigial, evident in a hundred ways.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hill 2017.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Joagquisho Oren Lyons explained: &amp;quot;We are the indigenous people to this land. We are like a conscience. We are small, but not a minority. We are the landholders; we are the landkeepers; we are not a minority. For our brothers are all the natural world, and by that we are far the majority.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Lyons 1981, 93.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Longhouse and the Village ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are precious few surviving contemporary depictions of a Haudenosaunee bark longhouse—so few that there is no consensus whether the roof was domed or peaked,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;That &#039;&#039;kanónhsa&#039;&#039;, the Mohawk word for the longhouse, looks to &#039;&#039;–nons&#039;&#039;, which is a root word denoting the dome of the top of a person’s head (and the repository of his mind), suggests the rounded rather than peaked or sharp shape. The dome of the longhouse roof recalls the Sky Dome, the dome of the heavens.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; or how tall the longhouses actually were.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The Haudenosaunee had really stopped living in bark longhouses by the early 1700s: the replacement buildings took advantage of sawed lumber, and kept many aspects of the original architecture. It may be that so few descriptions exist of early longhouses because the Norman and Breton explorers had themselves lived in &#039;&#039;longères&#039;&#039;, the elongated stone farmhouses of northeast France that would have resembled the bark longhouses in shape and size, and would therefore have seemed unremarkable.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; What is known with some precision is how long they were, and how wide, and what they were made of.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Modern archaeology extrapolates the nature of historic and prehistoric longhouse villages by examining the locations of postholes, fire pits, holes for stockades, and the locations of middens and graves.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The framework was cedar poles, for cedar does not rot in the ground and grows straight and clean. The building&#039;s skin was massive elm bark, from trees large enough and old enough that the bark provided insulation from the weather and the cold. As compared to the habitations of other peoples, there were several defining characteristics of the Haudenosaunee longhouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The most fundamental building block of Haudenosaunee society was the fire. The hearth, within the longhouse, was not a single-family fire. There was a family on each side of the fire. This duality that people would see upon waking every day reflects the two-sidedness of every aspect of the law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The longhouse contains many fires, and they are aligned. That straight line, running from the eastern to the western door, provides coherence to the way the families live, just as a string of wampum reflects the organization of what would otherwise be scattered beads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The longhouse reflects the clan family of the women who live in it. As such, it is a constant reminder of the role of women in society and government, for the women of that house are sisters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The longhouse is capable of being extended at either end. Archaeologists have concluded that perhaps one-third of excavated longhouses show evidence of having been extended during their lifetimes. The extendability of the longhouse became the metaphor for the flexibility and generosity of the law, designed to bring new people under its protection while remaining true to the original architecture.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Not only were the bark longhouses often extended during their lifetimes: those lifetimes were relatively short. In this age of steel and concrete, we tend to forget the limited lifespan of all the structures we are creating—most residential homes are designed to last about fifty years; most office buildings might last seventy-five. The bark longhouse tended to last a single generation.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The &#039;&#039;Jesuit Relations&#039;&#039; recorded Wendat longhouse villages moving nearly twice as frequently, though it is not clear whether this was because of needing fresh soil for the crops, or internal turmoil, or disease.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Its structural integrity began to weaken at the same time as the soil of the fields was becoming tired, and at the same time as the distance to walk for firewood was becoming longer. There was a built-in signal: the walls of the longhouse needed to be propped up from the outside. The leaning poles against the walls were the sign that the men should begin to look for a new location for the town. The poles—outside the house, but needed to hold it up—became the diagonal lines on wampum belts given by other nations who wished to become allies while remaining outside the Confederacy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
People stopped living in bark longhouses 300 years ago. The spread of European technology was quick: Harmen van den Bogaert, the first Dutchman to visit Oneida and Onondaga settlements, found that iron nails and hinges had preceded him. The spread was from east to west—so that the Senecas, least exposed to the Europeans, were the last to give up the bark structures. By the mid-1700s, Mohawks were living in barn-like structures that echoed the internal layout of the bark longhouse, while incorporating European sawn lumber and post-and-beam construction. By the end of the eighteenth century, the Onondagas of Oswegatchie were living in log houses that were home to two families each, with a shared hearth that reflected the two-sided fire in the original longhouses. In Seneca country at the same time, some people were living in log houses—with a shared fireplace between two houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The palisaded village of the seventeenth century became the &amp;quot;castle&amp;quot; of the eighteenth century. Defensive designs intended to protect against men with bows and arrows gave way to the cannons of the Mohawk village of Scoharie by the latter half of that century. There were still outlying settlements that were not fortified and temporary habitations in the hunting grounds; extended use of large territories continued.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The advent of single-family farms scattered communities further during the nineteenth century. Teyawentathe Susan Hill has demonstrated that fundamental Haudenosaunee principles about the relationship between people and land remained consistent and relatively constant as technologies and settlement patterns evolved. The same principles are reflected in Haudenosaunee law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Haudenosaunee ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before the arrival of the Europeans in this part of the world, a man carrying a message of Peace, Power, and Righteousness brought together five nations that had been trapped in a cycle of violence and revenge. This message—also called Karihwí:iyo, the Good Message&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Though this term is more often used today for the “Code of Handsome Lake,” the Good Message that was revealed to Skaniatariio in the 1790s, it also applies to the Great Law.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; —led to the five nations uniting in a league or confederacy, governed by law, bound by spirit and commitment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each of the original five nations carries responsibility within the structure of the League: the Mohawks and Senecas are doorkeepers, responsible for working with the nations approaching the Longhouse from the east and west. The Onondagas are firekeepers, carefully weighing and balancing decisions. The Oneidas and Cayugas have taken entire nations under their wings. The nations have different functions in the house, but as a chief explained in the 1600s, &amp;quot;we are all alike respectable.&amp;quot; Equality does not require sameness.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Confederacy is sometimes called &amp;quot;the Iroquois Confederacy.&amp;quot; The word &amp;quot;Iroquois&amp;quot; is of uncertain origin—possibly a name used by the enemies of the Haudenosaunee.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Bakker 1990, 89–93; see also Snow 1994, 2; Time-Life 1993, 25. These works suggest the word was originally the Basque &#039;&#039;hilokoa&#039;&#039;, “the killer people.” Champlain used “Irocois” in 1603, and while “the name became standardized and universally known very early . . . the ultimate origin and meaning of the name are unknown” (Fenton 1978, 320). See Day 1968. It has been suggested that the name comes from a call-and-reply sequence of approval of words in council. It is also possible that the name is Huron and refers to the use of smoking tobacco (Hale (1883) 1989, 172).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[Map 1: Five Nations Territory, c. 1650. Courtesy of Kanien’keháka Onkwawén:na Raotitióhkwa Language and Cultural Center.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The name &amp;quot;Haudenosaunee&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In this work, the Onondaga word is used, because there has been agreement that this will be the official spelling for international purposes. It appears on the letterhead of the traditional governments, as well as on Haudenosaunee passports and identification cards. Other nations with multiple languages arrive at other solutions: the Swiss, that other multilingual confederacy, use Latin on their currency and postage: &#039;&#039;Confoederatio Helvetica&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; refers to the longhouse,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;“The common designation of the Iroquois League in their own languages was by a series of names conveying the idea of ‘the people of the longhouse’, in reference to the usual metaphor for the League. One set of forms has &#039;&#039;–nonhs-&#039;&#039; ‘house’ and &#039;&#039;–yoni-&#039;&#039; ‘be extended, finished, whole, real’; Seneca &#039;&#039;hotinohsyoni&#039;&#039; ‘they who are of the extended lodge’ (Hewitt 1907c, 617, 620); Onondaga &#039;&#039;hotinohsyoni&#039;&#039; ‘their real house,’ Mohawk &#039;&#039;hotinosyó:ni&#039;&#039; (a borrowing from Seneca) or &#039;&#039;rotinohsyó:ni&#039;&#039; (with substitution of Mohawk prefix), Tuscarora &#039;&#039;yekwanehsyeni&#039;&#039; ‘our extended house’ (also a borrowing), Huron Hotinnonchiendi ‘the completed lodge’ (Thwaites 41:86) and hotinnonchiondi (Potier 1920, 154). A second set of forms has the same nominal root followed by &#039;&#039;–oni&#039;&#039;- ‘make’. . . In early recordings &#039;&#039;–yoni-&#039;&#039; ‘extended’ seems more common than &#039;&#039;–oni-&#039;&#039;‘make’” (Fenton 1981, 320). &#039;&#039;Nohs&#039;&#039; is indeed a house: the word describes the curved shape of the roof of an old longhouse.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;kanónhsa&#039;&#039;, the traditional extended bark-covered structure that became common after the arrival of corn (about AD 1000) and that faded after the arrival of metal axes and log and frame houses (between AD 1680 and 1720). Superficial histories assume that the name just describes the houses the people lived in. In fact, it describes the society and the law that binds it together.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The longhouse acts as a metaphor for many aspects of the League that the law created. Like a longhouse, the League requires active maintenance and periodically renewed commitment. Like a longhouse, it can be supported from the outside. Like a longhouse, it can be extended to bring additional nations into the house—and later the same idea was used with respect to the Silver Covenant Chain. Finally, like a longhouse, the architecture of the League could be amended, but only in ways consistent with the original structure, by “extending the rafters.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In some interpretations (the word changes with just a slight adjustment in sound), it is not just &amp;quot;people of the longhouse,&amp;quot; but &amp;quot;people making a longhouse&amp;quot;: an active concept, acknowledging that the work continues.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Longhouse is also geographic: from the Mohawk Eastern Door to the Seneca Western Door, the Five Nations were spread across the southern shore of Lake Ontario in a useful, deliberate way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before the coming of the Kayanerenkó:wa, the Five Nations were engaged in constant bloodshed. The Peacemaker declared them to be all one family. He used the symbol of the longhouse&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;There is sometimes confusion between the Longhouse “religion” or way of life and the longhouse used as the symbol of the Confederacy, within which all are relatives. The latter contains the former, but they are not the same thing. Virtually all followers of the religion support the political and moral ideals of the Confederacy. Many people who do not adhere to the Longhouse religion also support the Confederacy: in the 1880s, the Council at the Grand River acknowledged this by agreeing that the chiefs would “hang their hats at the door: inside the Council we are all wearing buckskins.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; to describe how the five fires of the nations could exist within a single structure. Within the one house, the five fires did not become one fire: they retained their distinctness. The term &amp;quot;Haudenosaunee&amp;quot; is more of a description of the relationship between all the people than it is a reference to their housing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The political system created by the Peacemaker continues to exist. It is actively maintained today by a rather small group of people within the fifteen Haudenosaunee communities (though it is supported by many more),&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;John Mohawk said that there have always been two “cultures” among the Haudenosaunee. The first is the “village culture”—people who go about the daily business of building their houses, growing their food, attending the ceremonies, raising their families, and generally living their lives. The second culture is much smaller: it is the “Confederacy culture,” made up of people in each community who maintain the ties between the communities, maintain the communications, attend the councils, assist in setting policies, and generally think about the nature of the law and the government it has created. The “Confederacy culture” has always been a small part of the people, and has only needed to be a small part of the people. This may be so in every society.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and it has been battered by high winds of change, war, and dispossession. Its survival—when so many other nations have been swept away by those winds—is remarkable in itself. Elements of the law that helped it work from the start have been the key to that survival.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;William Fenton maintained that the League and the Confederacy are different: that one is mainly spiritual and ritualistic, while the other is political and pragmatic. The Haudenosaunee disagree: they are both aspects of the same legal framework in action. Fenton (1998) also wrote that the maternal family is a physical reality, while the clan is a “legal fiction.” The Haudenosaunee would say that both are equally real. By extending the clan-family relationship across the nations, the Peacemaker used law to enhance the people’s likelihood of survival, by giving them one more level of relationships to bring them together.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee are a people of law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today, the Haudenosaunee live in an archipelago from Kahnawake and Kanehsatake, near Montreal, in the east, to the Oklahoma Seneca and Cayuga communities in the west. &amp;quot;Archipelago&amp;quot; is a particularly appropriate word, for Haudenosaunee communities are islands in many ways. Linguistically they are islands—places where languages are spoken that are heard nowhere else (linguists call these endangered languages &amp;quot;isolates&amp;quot;). Culturally and ethnically they are islands, surrounded by a sea of people of different cultures and origins. Ecologically, they are also islands, and most of them are visible on satellite photographs and topographical maps as the last &amp;quot;green&amp;quot; areas for miles around. Like the life forms in island ecosystems, Haudenosaunee communities are home to skills, thought, ceremonies, and ways of viewing the world that are uniquely adapted to the land, and that have evolved over centuries of challenge and experimentation. Like island life forms, too, they are vulnerable to introduced predators.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;For a review of the thinking on island ecologies, see Quammen 1996; or the seminal work of E.O. Wilson on island biogeographies. For the bridge between thought about protection of biological and cultural diversity in a Haudenosaunee context, see Rohoronhiakewen Dan Longboat 2007.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[Map 2: Territories of the Haudenosaunee Confederacy. Courtesy of Kanien’keháka Onkwawén:na Raotitióhkwa Language and Cultural Center.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There have never been very many Haudenosaunee. Archaeologists believe that the population of what is now upper New York State did not change much as a result of the shift from hunting, fishing, and gathering to a more agricultural society.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;While Snow (1994) has suggested that Haudenosaunee population was deliberately kept low so that their harvest of deer would not exceed a sustainable supply of hides for moccasins, there is no historic or cultural evidence of such a policy.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Instead, the people moved from living in small family-based camps to large, organized villages,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Engelbrecht (2003, 89) argues that a village of about 2000 people would be the “upper limit”: more people would strain local resources and increase the potential for internal conflict.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; without a change in overall population. Dennis explained:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What emerges from the archaeological reconstruction of later Owasco&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Archaeologists tend to name extinct or archaic peoples with the modern names of the places where they lived, or rather the places where significant archaeological evidence of them was found. “Owasco people,” ancestors of the modern Haudenosaunee, were named after Owasco Lake, one of the Finger Lakes. The archaeologists would not know the language of the people, nor their name for themselves. There is no reason to doubt that “Owasco people” were the ancestors of modern Haudenosaunee, sharing basic cultural and genetic traits.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; life (about 1000 A.D.) is a picture of increasingly localized, complexly organized, isolated, defensive and parochial people. At the same time that Owasco villages grew in size and decreased in number, they became more completely self-sufficient, because of a greater emphasis on horticulture and a declining dependence on hunting and fishing, though these subsistence activities remained important. Trade declined; in pre-Owasco times exchange networks had connected Woodland bands with the elaborate cultures of the Ohio Valley, and perhaps beyond to Cahokia in mid-America. The nature and frequency of travel changed as Owasco people settled further from waterways and developed forest routes that kept them closer to home.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Dennis 1993, 48.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like their descendants, Owasco people enjoyed abundance and prosperity in the diversity of their subsistence, and there was plenty to go around. Nevertheless, they increasingly found themselves living in a landscape of violence, a world of fear that humans, not impersonal environmental forces, had created.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Dennis 1993, 52. It is also possible that the “Little Ice Age” recorded in Europe beginning around AD 1300, which reduced crop yields and generally depressed people’s minds, could have contributed to the violence.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These were the Dark Times of bloodshed and scalping and revenge-taking,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Engelbrecht 2003, 7.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; of fear and isolation. They were the times before the coming of the Peacemaker. The tradition of the Great Law of Peace does not explain the reasons for the bloodshed: it only affirms that it existed for so long that people could not recall how it had begun. The story of the arrival of peace concentrates on the peacemaking, not on the warmaking that preceded it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The nature of a people and their culture shapes the nature of their law. Wallace asserted: &amp;quot;The legend [of the founding of the Confederacy] is important . . . both for the core of truth contained in it and for the influence it exerted in its elaborated form upon subsequent Iroquois history. . . . The legend itself, with its wisdom and its poetry, seized the imagination of the Iroquois people, who took to heart the message it conveyed and derived from it a sense of national mission: to make the Tree of Peace &#039;&#039;prevail.&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Toriwawakon Paul A.W. Wallace, in his introduction to Livingston 1956, 17.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;A sense of national mission&amp;quot;? Certainly. The Peacemaker set out that mission explicitly, in the clearest terms: &amp;quot;The law is now as young as the day when the sun is rising and lights the earth; just as it causes warmth all over the earth for all the people, we will help the people of every nation . . . This is what you will work at: everyone shall become related to one another, so that it will become a single family, consisting of every people on earth; and this is what will unite them, the Good Message and the Power and the Peace.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 128–29.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee have not hesitated to take that message of brotherhood to the nations of the world. In any international forum they can, their message has remained constant:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now we must all join together and know how strong we are. The Creator promised that if we followed the instructions then he would take care of us. He has proved that, because the people are still here. Mother Earth is still doing her duty, too. So we are still here and our children will be following us. Nobody can stop the generations. The important issue is how we will live. Will we live in fear and do as the authorities tell us and give us nothing in return? Or will we be strong enough to unite for the good of everybody? I say we will! We are now coming together, with all our brothers and sisters all over the world. You may not be seeing it yet, but it is happening. None of us are going to be victims anymore.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Thadadaho Leon Shenandoah, cited in Wall 2001, 55.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;Basic Call to Consciousness&#039;&#039; that accompanied the Haudenosaunee arrival at the United Nations in Geneva in the 1970s also extended the conversation about peace to the entire human family: &amp;quot;For centuries we have known that each individual&#039;s action creates conditions and situations that affect the world. For centuries we have been careful to avoid any action unless it carried a long-range prospect of promoting harmony and peace in the world. In that context, with our brothers and sisters of the Western Hemisphere, we have journeyed here to discuss these important matters with the Family of Man.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mohawk 1977, 1.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The United Nations Declaration on the Rights of Indigenous Peoples reflects thirty years of effort by waves of Haudenosaunee delegates to the United Nations, and these people were fully aware that they were treading in the footsteps not only of Deskahe Levi General in Geneva in 1924 but of centuries of delegations to other nations in the name of peace and dignity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Clans ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee maintain that they have been visited by three great visionaries: the one who brought them the clans and the ceremonies;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Antone 1987.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; the Peacemaker who brought the League together; and Skaniatariio (Handsome Lake),&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Skaniatariio is the title of a Seneca royá:ner. The man with the visions lived in the late 1700s; John Arthur Gibson carried the same title at the Grand River Territory in the late 1800s and early 1900s; today the title is maintained by the Senecas at Tonawanda.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; who brought the societal reforms of the early 1800s.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One version of the way the clans were brought has the young fatherless man pointing out how the people found themselves on opposite sides of a river, and how this provided a natural way for them to accomplish their social tasks. That is, the society was two-sided, and the duality was an advantage. The clan system is a reflection of the natural world.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The clans existed, as institutions of social and ceremonial organization, before the coming of the Great Peace.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Dennis 1993, 49: “Iroquoianists believe that clans originally formed about 1000 B.C. as a consequence of widespread Early and Middle Woodland patterns of trade and ritualism, not simply as an outgrowth of kinship groups. During the Owasco period clans probably developed further and assumed some of the new integrative functions characteristic of the Iroquois.” Snow (1994, 57) asserts that the clans arose to “facilitate trade and exchange between residential groups.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In Gibson&#039;s version of the Creation story, the young man who brought the clan system also made them cousins:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now we have seen that there are many different things in the world—the shrubs, the grasses, the trees. All have exclusive duties to perform, all are alive. There are different kinds of birds and animals. They differ among themselves, and we should emulate them. Now it is time that we should form clans. We have become numerous, and we should apportion the body of people. There should be a limited number of clans, and they should call themselves cousins in the future.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mohawk 2005a, 92. See also Hewitt 1928, 595–96 and Foster 1974, 72–73.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So then, do you consider in what manner exist all the things which he (the Creator) has completed; he thus made them to differ in kind and that causes everything to be good, and they are all charged with different duties to perform.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hewitt 1928, 596. This belief was explained by the Haudenosaunee to colonial governors in September 1722: “it has pleased God to make you Christians and us Heathens, but we hope we shall both act according to our Capacities &amp;amp; be faithful to our respective Promises &amp;amp; Engagements. Some are placed in high Stations &amp;amp; some in Low; but there is One above Who rules &amp;amp; governs All &amp;amp; will judge us according to our Actions” (Wraxall (1754) 1915, 143). It is worth understanding the difference between “heathens” and “pagans” (heathens are not Christian, Jewish, or Muslim, but are monotheists).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Several consistent principles of Haudenosaunee law are set out in that statement. First, the components of the societal and legal system are deliberately patterned after elements or principles of the natural world. Second, as each animal has distinct attributes and duties, so each person and family is different, and has different gifts, and these ought to be acknowledged, fostered, and used effectively.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Maybe this early recognition of individual attributes contributed not only to the individual freedoms in Haudenosaunee society, but also to resistance to assimilation into the kinds of European societies that value sameness.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Third, this part of the Creation story provides for the &amp;quot;two sides of the stream&amp;quot; in the Condolence, which reflects the two-sidedness of government and decision-making processes and institutions. Fourth, there are not just distinct clans: they are all related, and they call one another &#039;&#039;cousins&#039;&#039;. Fifth, all living parts of creation have specific duties to fulfill in order to maintain life.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One aspect of the genius of the Peacemaker was to work with these existing institutions as elements of a new kind of society. Seeing that clans—especially the Turtle, Wolf, and Bear Clans—crossed all the nations, he used them as another way to make everybody into relatives. The Peacemaker saw that the clan system could become a force for peace and understanding. Rather than seek to eliminate the clans, he extrapolated the clan system to the Confederacy level, so all the people would become a single family: &amp;quot;as clans are already established among the people, the several clans [shall] form relations as brothers and cousins.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker 1916, 93.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The clans also provide their members closer family relationships with the natural world. For Wolf Clan people, wolves are indeed relatives, and they share attributes. The relationship with the natural world extends well beyond clan animals, though: a people who refer to &amp;quot;Mother Earth,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;our Elder Brother the Sun,&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Our Grandfathers the Thunderers&amp;quot; see all aspects of the natural world as part of the family, and that, too affects their conduct.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Asked what clan he belongs to, a Mohawk will respond with the clan’s formal name and niwaki’taro:ten—“I am made of that clay.” Farmers are admonished not to plow too deeply, but only to “scratch our mother’s face gently”; upon the first thunder of the year, people put out tobacco in respect for the Thunderers bringing the rain.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; John Mohawk observed that urban detachment from nature leads to a change in environmental values: &amp;quot;There was a time among Indians when the animals were perceived as people who live under the forest canopy and who run about on four legs. If you think of them as anything else, they ultimately become disposable. If you cling to the logic that the animals are less precious than us, then they get less and less precious, until they&#039;re not precious at all. We Indians thought of ourselves as animals. That&#039;s why we called ourselves turtles and wolves and bears and deer.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mohawk 1996, 11. Several times in Gibson’s 1912 version of the law, messengers transform themselves into animals so that they can move more quickly—hawks, wolves, and fish.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has been suggested that a person&#039;s clan is indicative of personality,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Porter 1993.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; though in modern form this tends to resemble horoscopes. Of the Wolf Clan, the proper or formal name is Wakathahyón:ni, &amp;quot;they make paths&amp;quot;: an old term descriptive of the habits of the wolf. Of Turtles (Wakenayáhten), it is said they are slow to anger, and thoughtful. Bears (Wakskare:wake), as the legends suggest, are hospitable. True or not, these stereotypes add a layer of expected conduct that contributes in its own way to social norms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As one moves westward through the Longhouse of the Confederacy, one finds more clans in each nation. The Mohawks and Oneidas have only Turtle (or Tortoise), Wolf, and Bear, the three clans that cross the entire Confederacy. The Onondagas add Deer, Beaver, Ball, Snipe, and Eel. The Cayugas and Senecas have the same eight clans as the Onondagas, except that the Cayugas replace the Ball clan with the Hawk, and &amp;quot;among the Senecas both Ball and Eel disappear, and are replaced by Hawk and Heron.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hale (1883) 1989, 53.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; One explanation for the additional clans is the taking in of other peoples. Huron clans—Rock, Bear, Deer, and Potato&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The “Ball Clan”: the name was explained by Jacob Thomas as originating with a kind of deer that hides by rolling itself into a ball and resembling a rock. The Ball may also have been derived from the Huron Potato Clan.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; —might be reflected in modern Seneca clans. Little is known about the clans of the Wenro, Erie, and Attiwandaron peoples, whose survivors were absorbed by the Haudenosaunee—especially by the Senecas.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Hale (1883) 1989, 55: “Almost all the captives were incorporated with the three western nations of the league.” Hale believed that at the beginning of the Confederacy, there were only the three clans—Turtle, Wolf, and Bear. For basic histories of the absorbed nations, see Trigger 1976.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The absorption of these other nations in the seventeenth century would also explain why, though the Senecas have more clans than the other nations, they have only eight chiefs, and some of their clans have no direct representatives in the Grand Council.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Morgan (1877, 70) suggests that the differences are the result of different events: “certain gentes in some of the tribes have become extinct through the vicissitudes of time, and…others have been formed by the segmentation of over-full gentes.” In &#039;&#039;Ancient Society,&#039;&#039; Morgan uses the Roman &#039;&#039;gens&#039;&#039; as equivalent to a Haudenosaunee clan.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Venables asserts that &amp;quot;the number of clans was severely reduced by an epidemic disease accidentally introduced by the Europeans, and it is therefore unknown if each clan once existed in every one of the nations within the confederacy.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Venables 2010, 36.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Haudenosaunee tradition, one belongs to, and is raised within, one&#039;s mother&#039;s ohwátsi’re and clan. There are fifteen Haudenosaunee communities today, on both sides of the boundary between the United States and Canada, and when marriages take place between people from two different communities, a husband will often move to his wife&#039;s community, so the children may be raised in the midst of their own clan family (anthropologists would call this practice an indication of a &amp;quot;matrilocal&amp;quot; society).&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The anthropologists say that following one’s mother’s clan or line is “matrilineal”; moving to live with one’s wife’s people is “matrilocal”; being ruled by women is “matriarchal.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; As many people are not involved in issues of traditional government (Sotsisowah John Mohawk would say that only a few hundred people at a time would be engaged in &amp;quot;the Confederacy culture&amp;quot;), most Haudenosaunee would be conscious of their clan identity only at ceremonies (where seating in the longhouse is determined by clan) and in matters of marriage. Even non-traditional families take seriously the rules against marrying within one&#039;s own clan. Those rules have not only promoted genetic diversity: they have encouraged links between the components of community.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the members of a clan regarded themselves as brothers and sisters, marriages among them were not allowed.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Fenton asserts (in his notes to Gibson 1899, para. 62) that “one cannot marry into one’s father’s maternal family or into one’s mother’s (one’s own) maternal family, but other clans in the same moiety (as one’s father’s clan) are open. Can marry into one’s father’s clan but not into his lineage.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; This led, of course, to constant intermarriages between members of the different clans of which a nation was composed, thus binding the whole nation together. What the founders of the Iroquois League did was to extend this system of social alliances through the entire confederacy. . . . Mr. Morgan has well pointed out the wisdom shown by the Iroquois founders, in availing themselves of this powerful element of strength in the formation of their federal constitution.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Morgan (1851) 1995, 81.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Their government, though politically a league of nations, was socially a combination of clans. In this way Hiawatha and Dekanawidah may be deemed to have given to the system of clanship an extension and a force which it had not previously possessed.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hale (1883) 1989, 53.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What if one does not have a clan? That does not seem to be an obstacle to coming within the circle of the law. Odatsehte, the leading Oneida chief, explained to the Peacemaker: &amp;quot;As to us, we no longer have clans, we have lost them, indeed, the reason is this: the things going on such as the habitual slaughter among the people, that is where we lost them. Moreover, this large crowd followed us for they want to observe it progressing, the doings pertaining to the League as it gets completed in all ways.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 43.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker did not say that without clans they could not be Haudenosaunee. Instead, his response was to include them immediately by assigning them a clan:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereupon Tekanawita said, &amp;quot;Now, next, as to you Ho’tatshehte, whom have you drafted&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;“Drafted” seems inappropriate to describe what happened. In modern Haudenosaunee English, when a person of a different clan is placed in a position that a family does not have an appropriate representative to fill, the word used is “borrowed.” “Drafted” implies a lack of consent, and that is not the case.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; to help with the League?&amp;quot; Thereupon Ho’tatshehte said, &amp;quot;You two, come here, you drafted ones.&amp;quot; Thereupon they stood up there in front of the chiefs. Thereafter Tekanawaita said, &amp;quot;As to you, in fact, you are the ones not having a clan, and now they have chosen you. This, then, is what we shall call it: the Turtle clan, which will become their families’ clan.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 45.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is an important principle here: reaching out generously and including people willing and able to join the League takes precedence over whether they can prove membership in a clan.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In 1999, the Grand River Council considered the question of the large number of people in that community who either had no clan or did not know their clans. The council concluded that those who could not identify a clan through their mothers should be able to take their fathers’ clan. This would apply only to those who were living at the time of the decision.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The Peacemaker acted spontaneously and deliberately, assuming the authority to name a group of people and give them identity within society. This was not only a means of healing and weaving society back together. It was a statement of intent, an example of more than tolerance. It was an act of immediate generosity, but also of pragmatism. To function within the society he was creating, families required a clan. Given a choice between inclusion and anomaly, the Peacemaker unerringly chose inclusion. It is the spirit of the law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the clan system, there are further divisions. Thus, the Turtle Clan divides into Snapping Turtle, Painted Turtle, and Mud Turtle; the Bear Clan into large and small parts. For example, among the Mohawks, it has been said that Tekarihoken&#039;s family is the &amp;quot;Old Snapping Turtles,&amp;quot; while Hiawatha&#039;s is the &amp;quot;Younger Snapping Turtle.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Deborah Doxtator, personal communication through Teyawentathe Susan Hill, 2004.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Among the Cayugas, there is an Old Bear Clan and a Suckling Bear Clan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Many people today know their clans in a general, not subdivided, way. While in the Catholic communities of Kahnawake and Akwesasne, the Jesuits maintained clan identity within the church (in seating or in holiday processions, for example), and while in the Longhouse there are ceremonial reasons to remind one of one&#039;s clan, the clan subdivisions became less important to other people. Often an individual today will know that he is a Bear, or a Turtle, but not more than that. Genealogical research can connect the individuals with the titles of their chiefs, and through them to the parts of the clan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Personal Names ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At Midwinter and at Green Corn ceremonies each year, children are brought forward, and their names are formally announced in the longhouse. Their maternal uncle makes the announcement while carrying or walking with the child and then sings his atonwa, his personal chant of thanksgiving. The name is announced rather than given at this ceremony, because usually the name has been assigned to the child shortly after birth. The name is chosen by the women of the family, in consultation with the parents, from among the storehouse of names possessed by that ohwátsi’re or clan family.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lafitau, writing about Kahnawake in the early 1700s, described how names were preserved and kept alive:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In each family a certain number of ancestral names, both men&#039;s and women&#039;s, are kept. These names are their own and known to be taken by such and such a family. Now it is the custom in each family to requicken and resuscitate, in some manner, those who, issuing from that family, have made it illustrious. They exalt thus, at the same time, the names of those who they make live again, and impose them on their grand nephews destined to represent them. The latter assume more or less importance according as those who had borne their names were more or less important themselves by their qualities, virtues and deeds. These names change with age. A child either has no name, or takes that of another child, a young man, that of a warrior and an old man, that of some elder. As soon as a person dies, the name that he bore is buried with him and it is only several years afterward that it is renewed.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Lafitau (1724) 1974, 1:69–71.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this sense, a name belongs to a family as much as it does to an individual. The person bearing the name knows several important things: that the name is a link to a long line of ancestors; that he or she is the only person alive today carrying that name; that there will be people in the future who will be given that name; that the name is real and has reality on several levels. When a person is ill, and someone else goes to collect medicine for them, it is that person&#039;s real name (as distinct from his &amp;quot;English name&amp;quot;) that is used to address the plants and their forces, as well as to seek help from the Creator. In ceremonies and in the longhouse in general, one&#039;s real name is the one the people and the Creator know. Names provide identity, connection, and continuity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The custom of a person having several names in the course of a lifetime has waned but not disappeared. Sometimes, an individual is given a new name as a means of honouring him or her. Historically, there have been times when a Haudenosaunee individual will give their own name to an adoptee: the accounts do not clarify whether the giver of the name then has to return to their family to be given a new name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In conversation, a person is asked &amp;quot;what are you called,&amp;quot; and answers &amp;quot;they call me . . .&amp;quot; (yonkwats). In other words, the identity that accompanies a name comes from its use by other people. The name would be irrelevant if it were not used by others. In contrast, in some versions, when the Peacemaker announced himself, he tended to state &amp;quot;I &#039;&#039;am&#039;&#039; Tekanawita,&amp;quot; possibly because he had grown up in isolation, so there were no people around (other than his mother and grandmother) to call him anything.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Ceremonies ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The major ceremonies of traditional Haudenosaunee are said to have been brought by the same fatherless young man who brought the clans, long before the time of the Peacemaker.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;There are also four beings who are said to be messengers from the Creator. They visited Handsome Lake, in his visions, bringing him the Good News. Robert Jamieson, the late Interpreter for the Grand River Council, used to call them “angels”—and that bothered me, because it mixed Judeo-Christian symbolism with something that was clearly a matter that came before contact between the Haudenosaunee and Europeans. That is, it bothered me until I realized that “angel” originates from the Greek &#039;&#039;angelos&#039;&#039;—meaning “messenger.” Bob Jamieson had the spirit of the word right, and that is what an interpreter is supposed to do.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The Great Law was not intended to affect the ceremonies; the Peacemaker left unchanged the aspects of the society that promoted or maintained peace: &amp;quot;The rites and festivals of each nation shall remain undisturbed and shall continue as before they were given by the people of old times as useful and necessary for the good of men.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Newhouse and Cusick) 1916, 56.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The chiefs were given a duty in the law to help maintain the ceremonies:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It shall be the duty of the Lords of each brotherhood to confer at the approach of the time of the Midwinter Thanksgiving and to notify the people of the approaching festival. They shall hold a council over the matter and arrange its details and begin the Thanksgiving five days after the moon of Dis-ko-nah is new. The people shall assemble at the appointed place and the nephews shall notify the people of the time and place. From the beginning to the end the Lords shall preside over the Thanksgiving and address the people from time to time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The recognized festivals of thanksgiving shall be the Midwinter Thanksgiving, the Maple or Sugar-making Thanksgiving, the Raspberry Thanksgiving, the Strawberry Thanksgiving, the Corn-planting Thanksgiving, the Corn Hoeing Thanksgiving, the Little Festival of Green Corn, the Great Festival of Ripe Corn, and the complete Thanksgiving for the Harvest.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Newhouse and Cusick) 1916, 56. In some longhouses, there is also a Green Bean ceremony. Ohki:we, the “feast for the dead,” was brought by someone else.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As for the ceremonies other than Midwinter, the faithkeepers are responsible for ensuring they are properly conducted. Each chief works with a male and a female faithkeeper,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Fenton, perhaps to accentuate the similarity between the Longhouse religion and Christianity, called the faithkeepers “deacons.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; part of the &amp;quot;cluster&amp;quot; of government that includes the chief, clan mother, faithkeepers, sub-chief, and &amp;quot;runner&amp;quot; for each title: &amp;quot;It shall be the duty of the appointed managers of the Thanksgiving festivals to do all that is needful for carrying out the duties of the occasions. . . . When the Thanksgiving for the Green Corn comes the special managers, both the men and the women, shall give it careful attention and do their duties properly.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Newhouse and Cusick) 1916, 56. The chiefs may be responsible for Midwinter because it is a ceremony of renewal and rebirth, and they are the living examples of how a title remains living, or is reborn.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ceremonies predate the visions of Skaniatariio in the 1790s. Some Haudenosaunee continue to maintain and participate in the ceremonies without following the Karihwí:iyo,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Karihwí:iyo—Ka (it is; it is something which has been created); orihwa (word or matter); i:io (good)—“the Good Word,” or “the Good Message.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; the Code of Handsome Lake.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The cycle of ceremonies is not unrelated to the principles of the law. Each of the thanksgiving ceremonies is a celebration that gives thanks for the food that Creation is providing and renews and acknowledges the forces that provide it. An underlying principle is &#039;&#039;renewal,&#039;&#039; keeping things fresh and alive in people&#039;s minds—the same principle that requires periodic renewal of the people&#039;s commitment to the law, and later would require periodic renewal of treaty relations, or &amp;quot;repolishing&amp;quot; the Silver Covenant Chain between the Haudenosaunee and the British Crown. What Wade Davis wrote of African ceremonies also applies to the Haudenosaunee: &amp;quot;The religion cannot be abstracted from the day-to-day lives of the believers . . . there is no separation between the sacred and the secular, between the holy and the profane, between the material and the spiritual. Every dance, every song, every action is but a particle of the whole, each gesture a prayer for the survival of the entire community.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Davis 1998, 54.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In several parts of the ceremonies, the people are split into two sides of the longhouse (the anthropologists call them &amp;quot;moieties&amp;quot;).&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The Senecas, with their Hawk, Heron, and Snipe clans, have a “bird side” and an “animal side” in their ceremonies. Mohawks and Oneidas keep Wolves and Bears on one side, Turtles on the other. Some people note that the clan symbols cover water, land, and air life equally. Noting that in some nations the “moieties” are divided differently, Morgan supposed that “transfers of particular gentes from one phratry to the other must have occurred when the equilibrium in their respective numbers was disturbed.” Morgan (1871) 1997, 91. Today, in Longhouse ceremonies, one “side” sometimes borrows speakers from the other.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Without the two sides, the ceremonies could not be put through: as in council, having two parts of the people creates harmony rather than division. They help each other.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Helping one another is part of every Haudenosaunee medicine society, as well. Usually, a person who has been healed by a particular medicine or medicine society becomes a member of that society,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In a sense, by joining the society that person has “crossed over” from being part of the people outside the society to the other side of the fire.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; with the responsibility of maintaining and renewing its medicine, and of curing or healing other people who need its help.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In a functioning tribal society, individuals are valued not for their economic activity so much as for what they do to help. Over time, most traditional Haudenosaunee become members of some medicine society, and that provides another layer that binds them within society, providing them with more helpers, more esteem, and, in a sense, more family.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As John Mohawk has pointed out, the ceremonies are the way Haudenosaunee society expresses its cooperation with the will of the sacred forces that have created life, as well as its gratitude. The ceremonies &amp;quot;recreate the conditions present when people first came to consciousness of these things.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mohawk 2005a, xv. “At the time of the ceremonies, the longhouse becomes a reflection of the Sky World, the dances here those done there. Thus the ceremony not only celebrates the gifts of the creation, those who participate with their bodies in the music and the dance spend those moments recreating the Sky World on earth.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; By maintaining the ceremonies, society is maintaining, acknowledging, and renewing its relationship to its context within the natural world: &amp;quot;Our ceremonials acknowledge that in the time of the primeval universe there was a very remote chance that a place would be created which would support life and that, given a consciousness of this, expressions of gratitude are in order. Human beings who experience life should be grateful.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mohawk 2005a, xiii.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Participation in the ceremonies reaffirms a person&#039;s understanding of their place in society, by reminding them where they sit in the longhouse, who they sit with, who speaks for them—and also of their place in the natural world and its cycles and inhabitants. If Haudenosaunee kinships have kept that society in place where others have been swept away, the ceremonies are an occasion for renewing the sense of &amp;quot;joined arms&amp;quot; among the people and with the natural world.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Not mentioned in most written versions of the law is the winter ceremony of Ohki:we, or the Spirit Dance, in which the spirits of the people who have passed away during the year are gathered together in one last farewell, and it is said the spirits join with the living in the all-night women&#039;s dance. This may be a descendant of the great Dead Feasts of four and five centuries ago.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The Wendat (Hurons) would bury all the people who had died in the previous ten years or so in a large common grave, mixing the bones together and saying, “As we were one people in life, so we will be one people in death” (personal communication, Hayadaha Richard Wayne Hill, 2012). The Haudenosaunee themselves had less elaborate burial ceremonies but still brought the dead together. Gathering the dead together, for the Wendat, was a preliminary to leaving one village site for the next.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Concern for the dead, for their comfort and their journey, and for stilling their voices, appears in the law through the ceremony of Condolence.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hewitt (1892b, 131) goes further: “The body of the rites and customs pertaining to the ancient decennial Dead Feast common to many, if not all, of the Iroquois tribes and peoples, was mainly the basis upon which the institutions of the Extended House were established.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ohki:we is an aspect of the Haudenosaunee view of &amp;quot;the people.&amp;quot; Unlike societies that consider &amp;quot;the people&amp;quot; to be restricted to those alive at any given time, the Haudenosaunee include both those who have lived before and those who are yet unborn. From the ancestors, the living Haudenosaunee inherit names, clans, traditions, laws, land, and obligations. To the &amp;quot;coming faces,&amp;quot; the living owe a similar inheritance. People are told that they must walk softly on the earth, for the faces of the unborn generations are just below the surface of the soil. Reverence and respect for the dead and reverence and concern for the unborn are reflections of each other. These are further evinced in respect for elders, and a sense of respecting the independence and personhood of children.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In a child welfare case in an Ontario court, Oneida psychologist Kanakalut Roland Chrisjohn explained in an expert opinion that the Haudenosaunee consider children to be simple, small young people, so that their wishes as to whom they want to live with ought to be respected unless the result would harm them. In the “best interests of the child” analysis in that case, other psychologists argued that attachment, family ties, and culture were the most important factors.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In a modern North American society that tends to concentrate its respect on breadwinners, and its priority on the living, the Haudenosaunee value system stands in stark contrast.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Repetition, or rather re-creation, of the ceremonies reflects a common human trait. If something has been done with power and effect, we seek to repeat that, either to regain some of the original power, or to celebrate it. This is part of how humans learn. It can be seen in something as complex as a Catholic mass, which repeats the sequence of the Last Supper, and as simple as a baseball player&#039;s wearing the same shirt or eating the same meal as the last time he hit a home run. Ceremonies and legal rituals remind us of continuity, but they also imbue us with power—the power of our predecessors, or of their actions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As Haudenosaunee ceremonies are repeated each year, partly to keep them alive and partly to keep us alive, so the periodic reaffirmation of the law is conducted in the same way, and for the same purpose. The Canadian Royal Commission on Aboriginal Peoples recognized the connection between ceremony, law, and continuity: &amp;quot;The Great Law is infused with the same good mind that inspired the founders of the Great Peace and to which the children not yet born will also have access. The grandfathers and grandmothers who have gone to the spirit world and the generations not yet born are present in the ceremonies in a powerful way, and they are even visible to some with highly developed awareness.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;RCAP 1995, 640.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The cycle of ceremonies does more than renew and maintain the relationship between the Haudenosaunee and the natural world and the sacred forces that created it. The ceremonies also remind the people of their place in that world. Reminding is an essential element of the legal system, as well, and it is accomplished by some of the same paths as the ceremonies: public repetition, cooperative maintenance, individual reaffirmation. Since the ceremonies are so close in spirit to the law and its goals, it ought not to be surprising that they intersect, overlap, and complement each other. In Haudenosaunee society, church and state are not distinguishable concepts: both the spiritual practices and the governmental institutions have the same spirit and goals, and are maintained and conducted by many of the same people, so it is neither necessary nor possible to separate them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Date of the Creation of the League ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Euro-American scholars have been fascinated with the question of the date of the creation of the Great Law and the League it brought together. The Haudenosaunee do not share that concern. For them, it has been enough that it existed long ago, before the arrival of the Europeans, and has continued to exist ever since.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Euro-American scholars also discuss the span of seven generations, while for the Haudenosaunee the specific time is far less important than the knowledge that the coming faces seven generations downstream are ones that we will never see in our lifetimes.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Different peoples think about history (and time) in different ways, and it is likely that their understanding of the world affects their study of history and their concern about dates.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;For Hindu scholars, the world is cyclical, so a particular event is less relevant. For Christians, history is linear, with a crucial period running from the time of Jesus to the apocalyptic last days. For Muslim scholars, space may be more important than time. See also Boorstin 1985.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; For Europeans, time (and therefore history, as time past) is linear, and important dates and events are temporal landmarks, worthy of recall and often legally significant.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;To most lawyers, for example, the date something occurred immediately raises the important issue of limitation periods.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; For the Haudenosaunee, time is both linear (like a river)&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;A river is part of a cycle, too: from condensation to the clouds and the Thunderers, to the rain and the runoff and streams, to the ocean and the dew and back to the condensation.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and cyclical (in the sense that the annual cycle of ceremonies is repeated each year in the same way), so that what is being maintained and continuing is more important than what has occurred.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In political negotiations, Canadian federal negotiators request descriptions of specific treaty events, while their Haudenosaunee counterparts respond with descriptions of their ongoing relationship, often without reference to particular dates.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The written records confirm that the Five Nations had already joined together by the early 1600s: the Jesuits among the Montagnais reported their existence in the 1630s, and Champlain mentioned them twenty years earlier. In the 1740s, the Moravian minister Christopher Pyrlaeus wrote: &amp;quot;The alliance or confederacy of the Five Nations was established, as near as can be conjectured, one age (or the length of a man&#039;s life) before the white people (the Dutch) came into the country.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Fenton 1998, 53.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; This single statement became a focus of scholarly debate: what precise date did this suggest?&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Schoolcraft (1894) took Henry Hudson’s visit in 1609 as the date “the Dutch came into the country,” and applied the “patriarchal and scriptural rule”—that the length of a man’s life was seventy years—to arrive at 1539. Horatio Hale (1883, 177–180) suggested that Heckewelder had wrongly added the words “the Dutch,” and that the arrival of white people had been Cartier’s 1534 exploration of the St. Lawrence. With the “length of a man’s life” at seventy-five years, he arrived at 1460. Beauchamp (1921) also wrestled with Pyrlaeus’s dates, arguing that the League must have been founded after Cartier’s St. Lawrence voyage (since Beauchamp thought that all the Mohawks were then living on that river). Turning “a man’s lifetime” into a “generation,” or thirty years, he decided the most likely date of the founding was 1579. Hewitt took Pyraleus’s “one age” to be sixty years, which led him to 1559: he added that the war between the St. Lawrence Algonquins and the Iroquois had been going for over fifty years by 1622, when Champlain wrote about it, and this would have prompted the founding of a defensive league between 1550 and 1570 (see Schoolcraft 1894). Pyrlaeus had also observed that the Tuscaroras joined the League about 100 years after it was founded: since the Tuscaroras came in 1722, this would make the original date 1622.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Later writers took Pyrlaeus&#039;s statement to indicate between 1460 and 1579.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Daniel Richter, pointing to archaeological evidence of &amp;quot;homogenization of material culture&amp;quot; between the original five nations, suggests the political changes that led to the founding of the League would have taken place in the late 1400s.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Richter 1992, 31.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Haudenosaunee accounts are also spread over time. Sagonaquade Albert Cusick stated grandly that the League was formed 1,000 years before Columbus. Grand River tradition places the founding three lifetimes before the arrival of Cartier, or about 1390. Morgan and Hale, working with chiefs and informants on both sides of the border,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Skanawati John Buck told Hale in 1882 that he thought the League had been founded about 400 years earlier. The Onondaga chiefs in New York had told Hale that the founding was six generations before the arrival of white people. Hale chose 1459 as the appropriate date.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; separately concluded that the mid-1400s was a likely time. In 1895, the Council at the Grand River Territory issued a commemorative medal to celebrate the 500th anniversary of the founding of the Confederacy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Schoolcraft was told by the Senecas that the League was founded about 1605, four years before Henry Hudson explored the river that bears his name today. Beauchamp reported that some Onondagas told him the date was about 1600.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another approach to the date setting began with parts of collateral tradition. It was said that there was a total eclipse of the sun at the time the Senecas were considering joining the League, at a time when the grass was knee-high or the corn was ripening. In another version, the Mohawks were about to attack a Seneca village when the corn was receiving its last tilling. When the eclipse took place, it convinced them instead that war should end. Examining the times of total solar eclipses visible in upper New York State, Barbara Mann concluded that the Senecas had adopted the law on 31 August 1142, at a place that is now a football field in Victor, New York.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mann and Fields 1997; Johansen 1995, 62–63. There had been another eclipse in 1451, but its shadow fell over Pennsylvania. Barbara Mann also cited Paula Underwood’s calculations, based on family lineages—Underwood had arrived at a founding date of 1090. Mann averaged lifespans of European monarchs and popes and North American chief justices, adopting Tekaronieken Jake Swamp’s figure of 145 Thadadahos, to conclude that a date between 1090 and 1142 was justifiable. See also Wallace 1948, 399–400. But see Henige 1999, in which he argues that Mann and Fields lacked the evidence to prove their theory.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Elisabeth Tooker, reviewing all these accounts, leans towards a later date because of the &amp;quot;lack of wampum in prehistoric sites&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;the statement in the traditional accounts that wampum was not used before the League was founded.&amp;quot; She suggests &amp;quot;an approximate date of 1600.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Tooker 1978, 418–22. In fact, there &#039;&#039;was&#039;&#039; wampum in prehistoric sites; there was just not much of it, nor is much of it shaped like later tubular “council” wampum. The accounts of the founding of the League don’t require large amounts of wampum, though. Strings, not belts, were the order of the day before the arrival of metal tools—strings to conduct the Condolence, to create the “fire,” and to make the circle. As well, the earliest records of the Confederacy are made of white wampum: this suggests that they could have been made of softer white shell from the Finger Lakes area, rather than the harder periwinkles and whelks of the Atlantic coast, and without the hard quahog clamshells required for purple wampum.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Her conclusion is part of &amp;quot;a line of thought which attributes the origins of all Indian confederacies to European influence. Confederacies are interpreted as tribal groupings formed to be better able to resist European intrusion. Alternatively, it is suggested that tribes living in the interior made alliances in order to break restrictive trading covenants between coastal tribes and the Europeans and to be able to participate in this trade themselves.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Trigger 1976, 163.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other hints concerning the possible date of the founding of the League come from archaeology. The cultivation of beans, then squash and then corn arrived from the south about AD 900, allowing seminomadic people living in small groups to become more sedentary. In the area south of Lake Ontario, they were living in unfortified hamlets of about 200 people. Around the mid-fifteenth century, there was a rather sudden change: while the total population of the territory remained more or less the same, the people moved into large towns of up to 3,000 people. There were still also small, unfortified hamlets, but they were clearly linked to these larger, protected places of refuge. It is as if the need for palisades came with a culture of war—the bloody Dark Times that preceded the coming of the Great Law&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Snow 1994.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; —as well as with larger settlements that required more structured forms of government. Since archaeology can be imprecise, it is also possible to link these Dark Times to the Dark Ages in Europe, times when a mini–ice age, a change in climate, affected crops, temperatures, sunlight, and attitudes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The common traits that to archaeologists identify the Haudenosaunee—&amp;quot;the practice of horticulture, settlement in longhouses in villages, internecine warfare, burial of the dead in cemeteries, and distinctive ceramic assemblages&amp;quot;—coalesced in their homeland sometime between AD 1230 and 1375.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Atkins 2001, 27. Engelbrecht (2003, 88) points out that the fact that maize was “storable” made an important difference to the permanence and size of villages.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another possibility is that European diseases, which preceded the appearance of European humans, caused a breakdown in society. If people were dying of unknown causes, their relatives might tend to blame the death on malevolence by others, and this could have precipitated the blood feuds.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Stannard 1992; Crosby 1986. For the tendency of humans to blame others for deaths by disease, see the accounts of Europeans blaming “Jews and Gypsies” for the Black Plague in Barbara Tuchman’s &#039;&#039;A Distant Mirror&#039;&#039; (1978).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Some aspects of the ceremony of Condolence seem designed to prevent revenge-taking against anyone who sent death through disease, and some Seneca trickster stories recall a time of great terror as new diseases arrived for which there was no cure. Jacques Cartier, wintering in Stadacona in 1534, mentioned that about one fifth of the Stadaconaronon died that season of disease—these were the same people who had enough knowledge of herbal medicine to cure his crew&#039;s scurvy. The Laurentian Iroquoians who had greeted Cartier were gone when the French returned two generations later. Epidemic disease certainly played a part in their disappearance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1801, Thayendenega Joseph Brant wrote, simply: &amp;quot;We can say [no] farther respecting the date that it appears by the transaction to have been a considerable time before the arrival of the Europeans.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Boyce 1973, 290.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no clinically provable date of the creation of the League. Nor does there need to be, for the purpose of the laws of the Haudenosaunee or the nations they work with. It is enough, for the purpose of Canadian and U.S. law, that the League predated European contact—and it does—and was an integral part of the people&#039;s distinctive society at the time of first contact.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Sotsisowah John Mohawk simply says “around 500–1500 years ago.” Others have stated that history is irrelevant to the Haudenosaunee, for whom the story of the founding of the League is a form of renewal of what exists now.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In a world in which most nation-states and their constitutions have existed for less than a century, and in a North America where the United States of America was created in 1776 and the Dominion of Canada in 1867, a continuous government more than 500 years old is indeed a grandmother.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Nor are North American nation-states the only young ones. Modern Germany and Italy are products of the nineteenth century; the present forms, boundaries, and governments of most of central and eastern Europe were created in the twentieth century. Great Britain’s United Kingdom, the product of waves of invasions by Celts, Romans, Saxons and Angles, Danes, and Normans, and of subsuming Scotland and Wales, cannot claim to have a constitution older than the Great Law.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= PART II: THE NATURE OF THE LAW: PRINCIPLES AND PROCESSES =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Principles, Not Details ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To function effectively, a law preserved in memory rather than writing must place emphasis on principles rather than details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This becomes apparent when one considers the variations in the four versions of the narrative of the lawmaking. The Cannibal can be Hiawatha in one version, Thadadaho in another, Tekarihoken in a third, and just a cannibal in a fourth. But the basic message, the principle that a person who has engaged in too much killing has something wrong with his mind and spirit, and that he can be healed and return to the Good Mind, remains constant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The primacy of principle over detail is demonstrated at the opening and closing of every council and meeting: the Thanksgiving Address will be correct if it pays attention to each essential element in the proper order—it matters not how long or short it is.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some people believe literally in every part of the Kayanerenkó:wa.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hewitt, providing Skanawati John Buck’s 1888 version of the making of the Peace, suggested that “the greater part of the miraculous and mythic doings misapplied by the vulgar and uninitiated to Hai-on-hwat-ha, such as the story of the white canoe, the clearing of the rivers of obstructions and monsters, belong really to the sky god, Tharonhyawakon. Such confusion is not unusual among those who are uninitiated and unversed in the myths of their own people.” Hewitt 1892b, 131. Hewitt, though, was usually more careful than to call the right-handed twin of the Creation Story “the Sky God.” Haudenosaunee meta-narratives are not easily equated with European pantheons.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; They believe that Thadadaho really had snakes in his hair and grotesque twists and turns in his body. Others believe that these are metaphors: that he had a powerfully twisted mind and the physical deformities make the story more forceful.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Horatio Hale maintained that the Haudenosaunee themselves did not believe the “fantastical parts” of the story of the making of the law (Vecsey 1988, 98).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Those who believe literally can visualize the chief combing the snakes from his hair, rubbing the kinks from his body, making him normal in appearance. Those who feel the story is symbolic will still agree that Thadadaho was a real person whose evil stood in the way of the peace, and who had to be persuaded to come to the side of goodness and light, and that ceremony and spirit played an essential role in bringing Thadadaho&#039;s mind to the good.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Different versions of the law have Hiawatha losing two daughters, three daughters, or seven daughters. For the purposes of the law, the number of daughters is irrelevant. What matters is that his mind was clouded with grief at the loss of his family. Whether Thadadaho had real physical deformities is irrelevant: what matters is how his powerfully twisted mind and spirit were made good again. People who take the story of the making of the law literally, and people who see parables and symbols in the story all agree that what is most important are the principles and the lessons that emerge from the law. Just as there is a spectrum of Biblical interpretation between literalists and symbolists, so are the Haudenosaunee divided about the story of the making of the law. Similarly, the people are united in recognizing that the principles and the message, not the details, are what count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker said as much: &amp;quot;I will now leave all matters in the hands of your lords and you are to work and carry out the principles of all that I have just laid before you for the welfare of your people and others, and I now place the power in your hands and to add to the rules and regulations whenever necessary.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Chiefs) 1916, 103.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Order ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The law was born in a time of chaos. It sometimes seems as if it is designed to constantly pull people back from the brink of falling into that same chaos. When minds are scattered and tending towards anger in times of confusion or grief, the Condolence restores order. When people need to bring their minds together in council, the Thanksgiving (like the Condolence) reminds them of the basic order of the world, and then of how they fit into that order, with responsibilities mirrored by those of every other part of this great system. Haudenosaunee society seeks and recognizes order in dozens of things, insisting that speeches, ceremonies, and thinking be carried out in the appropriate sequences.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;It might be argued that just as the scientific method prescribes a deliberate, thoughtful approach to resolving questions, so does the Haudenosaunee method. Each facilitates resolution in its own way, the former by isolating the subject and reducing variables, the latter by taking matters one at a time and seeking balance.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Getting things in order often reflects pragmatism. The Condolence recognizes that one has to address and remove the physical obstacles to understanding—the ability to see, hear, and speak—before one can proceed to relieve the mental and spiritual burdens a person is carrying. The Covenant Chain recognizes that its three links have a logical order: one must respect a person before one can trust him or her; one must have trust in place before one can have friendship.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The Silver Covenant Chain is often described as having three links, symbolizing respect, trust, and friendship. Each of these has to be maintained, kept free from tarnish. Peace is frequently mentioned, though I prefer to think of it as the context for the relationship rather than as one of its elements. In the Two Row Wampum, the three white rows between the two parallel dark ones are peace, trust, and friendship, and the white background in general, the River of Life, is also the peace. I consider the Two Row Wampum to be a depiction of the Covenant Chain relationship, moving through time.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Especially for those whose introduction to Haudenosaunee culture is the Thanksgiving, there is a tendency to see hierarchy as well as order, particularly if those people are approaching the culture from a European perspective. The Thanksgiving does move gradually outward from the people and the earth to beyond the sky, and the temptation to find hierarchy in it is powerful. But the Thanksgiving is more a matter of space–time than authority. It describes how things are related and responsible to one another, rather than how some are more important than others.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
English uses &amp;quot;order&amp;quot; to mean two quite different things. One is &amp;quot;orderliness,&amp;quot; neatness. The other is sequence, getting things in the proper succession. In Haudenosaunee terms, getting matters in proper sequence helps restore the orderliness of peace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Versions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every Haudenosaunee gathering opens and closes in the same way. The &amp;quot;opening&amp;quot; is sometimes called the &amp;quot;opening thanksgiving,&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;the words that come before all else,&amp;quot; ohe’n:ton karihwatékwen:&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Older texts say that “the words that come before all else” are the ones spoken at the woods’ edge, as the Three Bare Words (“bare” because they are delivered by a speaker who is bare-handed, carrying no strings of wampum)—spoken before greeting the visitors who have come to the edge of the clearing, and are waiting to be welcomed. There are some references to them as the “Three &#039;&#039;Rare&#039;&#039; Words” (allegedly a reference to the “rare beauty” of the words, though “rare” is probably a misprint, the result of a Fenton mistranscription of Hewitt’s notes). See Haudenosaunee Environmental Task Force 2001; Swamp 1997.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Whenever the Confederate Lords shall assemble for the purpose of holding a council, the Onondaga Lords shall open it by expressing their gratitude to their cousin Lords and greeting them, and they shall make an address and offer thanks to the earth where men dwell, to the streams of water, the pools, the springs and the lakes, to the maize and fruits, to the medicinal herbs and trees, to the forest trees for their usefulness, to the animals that serve as food and give their pelts as clothing, to the great winds and lesser winds, to the Thunderers, to the Sun, the mighty warrior, to the moon, to the messengers of the Creator who reveal his wishes, and to the Great Creator who dwells in the heavens above, who gives all the things useful to men, and who is the source and the ruler of health and life.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Newhouse and Cusick), 32. Note: Gawasowane Arthur Parker’s 1916 &#039;&#039;New York State Museum Bulletin&#039;&#039; contains two very distinct versions of the law. The first is one of Dayodekane Seth Newhouse’s versions, edited by Sagonaquande Albert Cusick; the second is the version produced by the Grand River Chiefs, but probably edited by Tahawennontye Duncan Campbell Scott.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unlike the Lord&#039;s Prayer, which has words so well known to Christians that entire congregations recite them together, the opening thanksgiving has no set words. It is a series of ingredients, of concepts. As long as the speaker remembers to include them all, in the right order, he has done his job. A &amp;quot;full&amp;quot; opening can take about three-quarters of an hour, and most often a much shorter version is delivered, either because time is also short or because the speaker may not have the facility or gift to do the &amp;quot;full&amp;quot; opening. But each is complete and right.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Michael Foster found that traditional speakers considered their openings and closings to be “equivalent” versions, from the one-minute, seven-line version of Teyohtsiɂkrehkweh Howard Skye to the 48-minute, 419-line version of the opening by Tehanrahtihsokwa Enos Williams (Foster 1974, 177). Perhaps the longest published version is the one done by Shogʌdzowa Corbett Sundown in Chafe 1961.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; There is consistency of principle over time, in the opening as in the law: &amp;quot;When Morgan published the Thanksgiving Address in the 1850s, he had heard the Address given at Midwinter ceremonies and it was written down by Ely Parker who said this was his grandfather&#039;s version, describing it as &#039;the ancient address handed down from generation to generation. . . . Sose’ha’wa has delivered it thus for the past twenty five years at Tonawanda.&#039;&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Cornelius 1999, 71. It has been suggested that, in the days before the Karihwí:iyo, the Code of Handsome Lake, the words now used as the opening and closing thanksgiving were the speech that was spoken at the White Dog Ceremony. The words would be spoken to the dog. It was of a special breed; its burning evoked the way the Creator could travel to the Sky World by stepping into the fire (recall how tobacco smoke travels as a message to the Sky World and to the Creator): the white dog, the Creator’s favourite, would carry the message from the people to the Creator. If the ceremony is no longer performed today, its principles—communicating and in a sense reporting to the Creator—are still intact, and a basket of tobacco is burned in place of the dog (either because the breed died out or because of the distaste of the Victorian middle class for cruelty to animals). As for the modern opening thanksgiving, while similar sentiments are to be found in the records of the openings of historic councils (“we give thanks that we may meet here today”), the thanksgiving is not reproduced in lengthy detail, though the Condolence often is. That suggests the modern thanksgiving dates to the early 1800s.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;Iliad&#039;&#039; and the &#039;&#039;Odyssey&#039;&#039; were 1,000 years old before they were reduced to over 12,000 lines of writing. Scholars struggled with the issue of how, and how well, they could be remembered over the centuries, before they learned that &amp;quot;oral bards&amp;quot;—&amp;quot;wisdomkeepers&amp;quot;—in many societies had sophisticated techniques of recall, but did not require exact reproduction of the knowledge each time. &amp;quot;The oral bard who uses such formulaic language is not, as scholars in the nineteenth century who struggled with the problem of illiterate bards all assumed, a poet reciting from memory a fixed text. He is improvising, along known lines, relying on a huge stock of formulaic phrases, lines and even whole scenes; but he &#039;&#039;is&#039;&#039; improvising. And every time he sings the poem, he may do it differently. The outline remains the same, but the text, the oral text, is flexible. The poem is new every time it is performed.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Knox 1996, 16.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The same speaker may not necessarily use the same words twice in a row, either. He is not reciting: he is &amp;quot;doing.&amp;quot; As long as the ingredients are all there and in order, he is right. He has done the best he can, and that is all that is expected:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rather than &amp;quot;memorizing&amp;quot; speeches, good memories depended on recalling the structure of what was said and filling in with expected phrases and figures of speech. The speakers were relaying what the chiefs prompted them to say, but in their own words. They were accomplished and recognized virtuosos. This is what impressed colonial observers who were struck with the good memories of the speakers. &amp;quot;Verbatim recall&amp;quot; applies then to the structure if not to the identical words of the original.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;William Fenton, in Jennings 1985, 34.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Speeches are not memorized as wholes; at the same time the data demonstrate the relatively fixed nature of the formulaic phrases.… what is important is that the speaker preserve the three-fold division of the discourse and the rules governing section segments, for it is these things that the audience pays attention to, and give them the sense of sameness.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Foster 1974, 180–81.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Formulaic language&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;expected phrases&amp;quot; provide structure to any speech; they maintain consistency of principle as well as form—and &amp;quot;they were of admirable service when a man was at a loss . . . this proves they are not wholly unacquainted with the art of Rhetoric.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;NYSL MSS 13350-51: the manuscript, prepared in the late eighteenth century, was based on information obtained from Teyoninhokarawen John Norton, who made this remark. Cited in Johnston 1964, 28. Morgan ((1851) 1995, 107) suggested that “by the cultivation and exercise of (eloquence) … was opened the pathway to distinction, and the chief or warrior gifted with its magical power could elevate himself as rapidly as he who gained renown upon the warpath.” See also Bauman and Sherzer 1974.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the different &amp;quot;versions&amp;quot; of the Kayanerenkó:wa, the details sometimes shift, while the principles remain consistent and constant. Teyoninhokarawen John Norton&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;John Norton was made a Mohawk Pine Tree Chief, and the name given to him means “an open door.” It was carried before him by Theyanoguin, or “King Hendrick,” but it is also close in meaning to the Seneca royá:ner title Donehogowa, the title held by Hasanonda Ely Parker.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; noticed this in the early 1800s:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this tradition, there is also some variety in the manner it is related by the different nations; but all concur in substance: And whether they were induced to form this Confederacy, the more effectually to defend themselves, or to carry on hostillities against some neighbouring Nations, no traditions remain to inform us.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Norton 1970, 105.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These traditions, for the most part, have become imperfect and confused from the failures of the memories of some; and perhaps from the invention of others. (Norton was writing about a version of the Creation related by “an Onondaga chief of near a hundred years old”).&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Norton 1970, 91.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee pragmatically recognized that writing is also an efficient way of recording law. By the mid-1700s, while delivering the pro forma apology for possibly leaving something out, a speaker told Warraghyihagey William Johnson:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we are deficient in any manner of form, or should forget to answer in a particular manner any part of your speech, we hope you will excuse us. We only depend on our memories, and can not have recourse, as you may, to any written records.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Beauchamp 1907, 397. In contrast, Johnson several times displayed the “four great folio volumes” that constituted the records of the councils of New York and of British affairs with the Haudenosaunee.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You tell us you commit your affairs to Writing which we do not and so when you look to your Books you know what passed in former times but we keep our Treaties in our heads.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;NYCD 6:100–101, 1737, in council at Albany. Johnson, for his part, noted several times in council that the Indian Affairs records were kept in “four great folio volumes.” Two of those volumes are at Library and Archives Canada, the base of the Indian Affairs collection; the other two were ruined by water damage when they were buried at Johnson Hall during the American Revolution (see LAC, MG27).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Not long afterward, some Haudenosaunee did learn to write, and versions of the most important parts of the law were being transcribed onto paper.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several written &amp;quot;versions&amp;quot; of the Kayanerenkó:wa. Hanni Woodbury, in her introduction to &#039;&#039;Concerning the League,&#039;&#039; divides them into three main groups of texts: narratives given in a European language by non-Indians; texts composed in English by native speakers of an Iroquoian language; and texts by the same people in their own languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dayedokane Seth Newhouse, a Mohawk of the Grand River Territory, wrote several versions in English (and one in Mohawk) in the late nineteenth century&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Fenton 1949; cf. Weaver 1984. In Canada, the Indian Advancement Act emerged in the 1880s, and traditional governments at Akwesasne, the Bay of Quinte, and Kahnawake were “replaced” by 1900. But the written versions came from places where the traditional governments were not being directly threatened at the time—the Grand River Territory, Onondaga, and Tonawanda.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; — including one that was edited by Sagonaquande Albert Cusick of Onondaga&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Cusick had held the title of Thadadaho until he was removed, allegedly for becoming a Christian.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and published by Gawasowane Arthur Parker of Tonawanda in 1916—as one of the two versions Parker included in &#039;&#039;The Constitution of the Five Nations.&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;The Constitution of the Five Nations, or The Iroquois Book of the Great Law&#039;&#039;, by Arthur C. Parker; New York State Museum Bulletin No. 184, Albany, 1916. The Newhouse–Cusick version will be cited as Parker (Newhouse and Cusick) 1916; the version produced by the committee of Chiefs will be cited as Parker (Chiefs) 1916.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; He presented one version of his &amp;quot;rules and regulations&amp;quot; to the Council at the Grand River on 24 October 1899.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Six Nations Council Minutes, 24 October 1899. The minutes suggest that while he acknowledged that the information belonged to the Confederacy, he wanted to be paid for his work; and that rather than explain his stipulations, he left the council, prompting the chiefs to appoint their own committee to write down the constitution. Newhouse also offered one of his versions of the law to J.N.B. Hewitt—for a fee.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Newhouse and Hewitt translated some of Newhouse&#039;s English versions into Mohawk.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;National Anthropological Archives (NAA), mss. 1361, 3504.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Partly as a reaction to problems they had with the sequence and some contents of the &amp;quot;Newhouse version,&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Hewitt 1917, 430: the Council, he said, ultimately rejected Newhouse’s version “as faulty in arrangement and erroneous or spurious in many of its statements.” It seems they especially disliked the aspects of the Newhouse version that suggested that the Mohawks had some sort of primacy over the other nations, and the parts that gave the warriors the authority to execute errant chiefs.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; the Confederacy Council at the Grand River Territory appointed a committee of rotiyanershon,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The committee appointed on 24 October 1899 was comprised of John Frazer, John Arthur Gibson, David Sky, Thomas William Echo, William Wage, Nicodemus Porter, and Josiah Hill (according to the council minutes). According to the committee report, it consisted of Peter Powless (Mohawk); Nicodemus Porter (Oneida); William Wage (Cayuga); Abram Charles (Cayuga); John Arthur Gibson (Seneca); Thomas William Echo (Onondaga); and Josiah Hill (Tuscarora), with Josiah Hill (Delaware) and J.W.M. Elliott (Mohawk) as secretaries. The committee reflects a contemporary practice of including representatives of each of the nations in a joint endeavour. Gibson and Charles, as well as John Buck Sr., were J.N.B. Hewitt’s principal collaborators in recording many Haudenosaunee texts.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; who in 1900 produced a &amp;quot;Chiefs&#039; Version.&amp;quot; This was published (and probably adjusted) by Deputy Superintendent General of Indian Affairs Tahawennontye Duncan Campbell&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Haudenosaunee history has been repeatedly and often injuriously affected by Campbells. Scott, the architect of Canada’s “assimilation policies” of the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries, was prominent among these.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Scott in 1912&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Royal Society of Canada, Ottawa, 3rd series, vol. 5, section 2, 1912. Since the manuscript of the Chiefs’ Version has not survived, it is impossible to know the extent, if any, to which Scott edited the original.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and included in Parker&#039;s publication in 1916.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Ibid., 195–246; Parker (Chiefs) 1916, 61–113. Scott had been given the name Tahawennontye, which he translated as “Floating Voice,” but is more like “disembodied voice” (Dragland 1994). He later became the Confederacy Council’s worst enemy in Canada, and eventually was the prime mover behind its “replacement” by an elected system of government at the Grand River Territory (Titley 1986). He is better known as the architect of the genocidal residential school system.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One of the Newhouse versions is different from every other written version of the law in that it divides the law into numbered wampums (&amp;quot;Wampum XXVII,&amp;quot; for example). This is an obvious attempt (possibly assisted by Cusick) to make the Kayanerenkó:wa look more like British or American laws, with section numbers, to make it resemble &amp;quot;a law&amp;quot; as white readers would understand that concept. Ordered wampums were not alien to Haudenosaunee thinking—the Condolence strings are arranged in strict sequence—but Newhouse&#039;s attempt at &amp;quot;legitimizing&amp;quot; the law by making it simulate the sections and subsections of the neighbours&#039; laws was misguided and inauthentic, and the Chiefs&#039; Version does not take that path. The path has tempted others: Cusick&#039;s history of the Confederacy seeks to increase the resemblance to European histories by making Thadadaho a monarch (or pope) with numbered successors (&amp;quot;Atotarho XI&amp;quot;).&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In 1925, the anthropologist Frank Speck suggested to Deskahe Alexander General “a defense of the long house from critics by suggesting it is a form of Christianity.” Deskahe would not agree. See &#039;&#039;A Guide to Manuscripts Relating to the American Indian in the Library of the American Philosophical Society&#039;&#039;, American Philosophical Society, Philadelphia, 1966, 94.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Less insecure keepers of the law are careful to maintain the structure and details unchanged, without trying to validate it in the eyes of people more used to the numbering of European systems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Newhouse&#039;s Europeanized version was written after he had suffered a family tragedy, the death of his daughter, that he blamed on others, including the chiefs.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Six Nations Council Minutes, 14 February 1899: the council had found in favour of Dr. Secord with respect to Newhouse’s charges that the doctor had not properly cared for his daughter. Ironically, Newhouse’s withdrawal from his earlier versions of the law and his move towards the warriors and bloodshed—occasioned by the death of his daughter—echoes the life of Hiawatha.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; This version adopts a more mandatory tone, full of prohibitions and conditions, some of them difficult to fulfill. His bitterness shows through at times: this version fares poorly when compared to the expansive generosity, vision, and courage of the more definitive 1912 Skaniatariio John Arthur Gibson version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[Figure 1: Dayodekane Seth Newhouse with two family members, c. 1914. Canadian Museum of History, no. 17414. Photograph by Frederick Waugh.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1801, Thayendenega Joseph Brant, a Mohawk Pine Tree chief (that is, a man chosen by the council as an adviser), wrote answers to a series of questions about the Haudenosaunee system of government.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Boyce 1973, 288–91. Brant also allegedly wrote a history of the Confederacy, but unless it is contained in Norton’s published journal, it has not yet been found.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Another English description came from Teyoninhokarawen John Norton, Thayendenega&#039;s secretary and adopted nephew, who also became a Mohawk Pine Tree chief.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Norton 1970, 98–105. Teyoninhokarawen’s mother was Scottish; his father was Cherokee. As an adopted Haudenosaunee, he is one of a distinguished line of naturalized citizens that includes Warraghyihagey (Sir William Johnson), Thoregwi (the Duke of Northumberland), Sagoryos (Conrad Weiser), and Dehgewanus (Mary Jemison). Fenton, among others, sought to promote the idea that Norton had no “Indian blood,” though this would have been irrelevant to the Haudenosaunee in the eighteenth century, and Norton’s journal of his journey to Cherokee country richly contradicts this attack.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Possibly the richest source of recorded &amp;quot;versions&amp;quot; of the Kayanerenkó:wa are the ones written in their original language, since they have not suffered from the inconsistencies of translation. Hewitt, working with Skanawati John Buck&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Haudenosaunee tradition and law provides that when a person becomes a chief, he becomes known by his title rather than his personal name. Since there have been many people who carried the title of Skanawati, it is useful to combine the title with his English name, and as much as possible that approach will be followed in this work. Before the chiefs also had English names, one would be able to distinguish individuals only by the dates of the events, or by their use of their Haudenosaunee personal names.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; in the early 1890s, produced one such text.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;NAA ms. 3130; Hewitt 1892b.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Skaniatariio John Arthur Gibson, a Seneca chief who had been blinded in a lacrosse accident at the age of thirty-one, and who became a skilled rememberer,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Goldenweiser 1912, 692: “Horatio Hale, David Boyle, M.R. Harrington, A.C. Parker, J.N.B. Hewitt, and a host of others drew a wealth of ethnological information from the ever polite, somewhat formal, marvelously omniscient chief. Notwithstanding his blindness, Gibson repeatedly represented his people in their dealings with the Canadian government, not uncommonly with signal success.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; also dictated a version to Hewitt in Onondaga&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hewitt, NAA ms. 2316 and ms. 1517-a; mss. 1517-b, 1517-c, 3478, and 3689.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; in 1899.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;After he had been blinded, he was tutored by an Onondaga Firekeeper, possibly John Buck. See Foster 1974, 23. This version was finished off by William Fenton and Simeon Gibson in 1941, with some editorial comment.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Toriwawakon Paul Wallace asserts that this version was &amp;quot;revised by Chiefs Abram Charles, John Buck Sr. and Joshua Buck, from 1900 to 1914.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Wallace 1946, 27.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[Figure 2: Skaniatariio John Arthur Gibson and his family, 1912. Canadian Museum of History, no. 21436.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Two generations passed before efforts to write down the oral tradition resumed. The linguist Floyd Lounsbury worked with the Oneidas, and took down the recollections of Atsyatanunta Demas Elm, who by the 1970s was over ninety years old. Michael Foster, an anthropologist and linguist, worked with Deyonwe’ton Jacob &amp;quot;Jake&amp;quot; Thomas,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Where oral tradition is used as evidence, it is always useful to cite the people who taught the carrier of the tradition, if they are known. Deyonwe’ton Jake Thomas learned from his grandfather, David Skye, and from Thadadaho David Thomas, both rotiyanershon. Like his contemporaries, though, he also learned from a crowd of other people, and learned by doing the speeches and ceremonies and by attending the longhouse and councils over many years.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; a Snipe Clan Cayuga royá:ner, to record not only the law and the ceremonies but also aspects of council and treaty procedure. Thomas also did extensive recording—audiotape, videotape, and writing—on his own, and undertook several public recitations in Mohawk, Cayuga, and English. Some of these were recorded. In 2010, Tehahenteh Frank Miller taught a course based on one of these Mohawk versions, which provided me with additional insights into the relationship between language, thought, and law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Toriwawakon Paul A.W. Wallace, working with the 1912 Gibson version—which he felt &amp;quot;tells a more coherent story than is found in the other versions and which at the same time points the allegory with greater insight.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Wallace 1946, 27.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; —combined that and the 1899 Gibson version with the Newhouse and Chiefs&#039; versions to produce his &#039;&#039;White Roots of Peace&#039;&#039; in 1946. Wallace maintained that &amp;quot;the only way to get an approximation of the original is to attempt a composite narrative,&amp;quot; using his own &amp;quot;discretion in selecting the incidents or the words that best convey the central motif.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The foreword of the 1994 edition is by Thadadaho Leon Shenandoah; the epilogue is by Sotsisowah John Mohawk.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In effect, Wallace added a new version to the existing ones; his picking and choosing between those earlier versions produces a consistent narrative, though some of the spirit and detail of the majestic 1912 Gibson version is lost in translation and adaptation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are also versions of the law, or parts of it, in Haudenosaunee languages. In 1782, the Kahnawake Mohawk chief Ahsareko:wa (Big Knife) died. At that time, the Mohawks who had lived at Scoharie in the Mohawk Valley were living at Lachine, near Montreal, having been displaced by the American Revolution. John Deserontyon, one of their leaders, condoled the people of Kahnawake on behalf of the Mohawks. His written text of both the Condolence and the reply was transcribed and translated by Hewitt a century later.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The original document ended up in the Museum of the American Indian; the published version appeared in that museum’s periodical, &#039;&#039;Indian Notes&#039;&#039;, in 1928 (Deserontyon (1928)).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Newhouse wrote in Mohawk as well as in English.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Onondagehakageh: Ji Kanonses&#039;&#039;, 19 November 1880–22 March 1881, 126 pp., NAA ms. 3489.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Minutes of councils between the French, the British, the United States, and the Haudenosaunee frequently contain elements of, or references to, the Great Law. These appear in the greetings and Condolences that begin the councils (when they are not summarized by the recorder as &amp;quot;the usual ceremonies&amp;quot;), as well as in the occasional explanations by the Haudenosaunee of the legal reasons for their actions or positions. These council records are reproduced in a variety of collections, from the &#039;&#039;Jesuit Relations&#039;&#039; to the &#039;&#039;New York Colonial Documents&#039;&#039; to the &#039;&#039;Papers of Sir William Johnson&#039;&#039;. The council records run from the mid-1600s to the nineteenth century, with council minutes internal to Haudenosaunee communities often continuous to the present day. The treaty councils were run by the processes of the Great Law: they provide historic explanations for, or demonstration of, aspects of the law in action. However, one must always approach these records cautiously, since it is not always possible to separate original Haudenosaunee rules from European influence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the late 1700s, &amp;quot;David of Scoharie&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Scoharie, also known as Fort Hunter, was the Mohawk “castle” nearest Albany—that is, “lower” down the Mohawk River than Canajoharie, the “Upper Castle.” David of Scoharie may be Karonghyontye David Hill, who may be depicted in Benjamin West’s 1776 portrait of Guy Johnson.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; produced a Mohawk text of the parts of the law that deal with the Condolence. The text passed to a chief at the Grand River Territory who had Sakayengwaraton John Smoke Johnson copy it. The original was destroyed in a house fire in the 1830s. The copy became a central part of Horatio Hale&#039;s 1883 publication, &#039;&#039;The Iroquois Book of Rites&#039;&#039;. Hale also included a different copy of the Condolence, transcribed by John Green of the Grand River Territory in 1874, and kept by Skanawati John Buck.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hale (1883) 1989, 43. Hewitt collected (his term) a thirty-nine-page version from Joshua Buck after his father’s death (NAA ms. 3512).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Horatio Hale in 1875 and 1880 and then William Beauchamp used a mainly Mohawk version that had been kept by Ha-you-wehs Daniel LaFort at Onondaga.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Beauchamp (1907) 1975, 378; Hale (1883) 1989, 140–45; NAA ms. 3564.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Mrs. John A. Jones at Onondaga had a slightly different short version of part of the Condolence.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Erminnie Smith, Report No. 6, Bureau of American Ethnology, Washington, 31.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Kahynodoe George Key, a Grand River chief, had written another copy of the Mohawk songs, which he provided to another of the Elder Brothers, Ho-de-gweh Orris Farmer of Onondaga.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Beauchamp (1907) 1975, 378, 381–85.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; J.N.B. Hewitt transcribed several versions of the Condolence that remain among the unpublished materials in the Smithsonian American Museum of Natural History.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1883, Horatio Hale published &#039;&#039;The Iroquois Book of Rites&#039;&#039;. Its transcriptions of several of these earlier documents, written by Haudenosaunee, are still consulted when preparing for the Condolences today.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;William Fenton has written that “none of the books yet published satisfy the Iroquois ritualists. They rely on crib notes of their own, however, and the recordings that they made for me in 1945 follow the Book of Rites substantively if not precisely. . . . The Iroquois go on performing the rites nevertheless, and they have meanwhile become students of their own culture” (Hale (1883) 1989), xxiv). Fenton maintained in the 1950s that the Haudenosaunee were not sufficiently familiar with their culture, or practitioners (rather than students) of their culture enough, to deserve the return of their wampum belts from the New York State Museum (though he later tried to take some of the credit for the return of eleven wampum belts from the Museum of the American Indian in 1988—when in fact he had tried to sell the same wampum, which he acknowledged had “left the Grand River in dubious circumstances,” on an “as is” basis to the National Museum of Man in Ottawa, for $250,000).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some differences between versions of the law are the result of time eroding memory. Other differences stem from the personal agendas and biases of the recorders. Seth Newhouse was involved in the political struggle at the Grand River Territory between the Confederacy Council and the &amp;quot;Warriors&#039; Party.&amp;quot; He supported Mohawk primacy (against the Onondagas)&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;“Wampum 6” of one Newhouse version states: “I begin by choosing you, the Mohawk Nation, to be the ‘head and Leader’ of the Confederate Government and Legislative Body and Council; therefore you are the foundation of the Government of the Great Peace now hereby established.” Newhouse also stated that unless all nine Mohawk chiefs are present, Council shall not be opened, and cannot transact business except for “matters of little importance.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and above all the Haudenosaunee against intrusion by the Canadian government. Other recorders also did more than record: &amp;quot;J.N.B. Hewitt, for instance, was not above &#039;revising&#039; some of the legends in his search for a &#039;consistent historical background&#039; to the founding of the League (1931:175). For their part, Goldenweiser, Parker and Fenton have all become embroiled in the debate about the possibility of aboriginal Iroquois constitutionality, and their disagreement has colored their work.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Vecsey 1988, 97.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the early twentieth century, there were personal jealousies between the people who worked with the chiefs on the different versions. Hewitt attacked Parker&#039;s publication of the Newhouse and Chiefs&#039; versions, Scott&#039;s publication of the Chiefs&#039; Version, and Beauchamp&#039;s work on condoling councils: &amp;quot;These three publications . . . severally repeat old errors and so diffuse them broadcast under the patronage of learned institutions, and so the following strictures are made on the untrustworthy character of much of their contents, lest the unwary student be led into accepting misinformation for truth. . . . It is most unfortunate for the cause of historical truth that great institutions insist on publication at the expense of study and accuracy.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hewitt 1917, 429.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alexander Goldenweiser&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Wallis 1941, 250–55.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; also attacked Parker&#039;s publication, in a show of racism that would have shocked the Haudenosaunee whose company he kept: &amp;quot;[The Newhouse version] cannot justly be regarded as a genuine native product. It is, without doubt, based on a wide acquaintance, on the part of the compiler, with the beliefs, attitudes, and practices of the confederated Iroquois, but this native material has been welded into a highly formal and rationalized document, the product of a sophisticated mind, and, as such, conspicuously un-Indian in character.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Goldenweiser (1916, 436) and a reply by Arthur C. Parker (1918). Parker quoted Kipling’s &#039;&#039;Neolithic Age&#039;&#039;: “There are nine hundred and sixty ways of constructing tribal lays, and – every – single – one – of – them – is – right.” Goldenweiser (1912, 693) held that John Arthur Gibson was “one of those wide-awake, keen-witted Indians, so rare nowadays. . . .”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Goldenweiser was interested in compiling the law in as original a form as possible. While he was right in pointing out the &amp;quot;un-Indian&amp;quot; character of parts of Newhouse&#039;s text, the discrepancy was in form—Newhouse&#039;s attempt to imitate North American statutory structure—and not in content. As for sophistication, Goldenweiser, who transcribed but apparently did not analyze, seems himself to have completely missed the depth of the Great Law as a functioning legal system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a law text, it is tempting to &amp;quot;consolidate&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;standardize&amp;quot; the several versions, to seek consistency, to choose a &amp;quot;correct&amp;quot; version. To do so would mean going beyond interpretation and into the territory of judgement. As a matter of approach, I have generally chosen the structure of the 1912 John Arthur Gibson text as the most complete, but where other versions are different, I cite the differences. In some instances, other texts contain useful information or provisions missing in the Gibson version (Newhouse provides songs; David of Canajoharie provides a more detailed text of the Condolence; Jake Thomas provides cultural context; Hewitt&#039;s many fragments contain useful information from Gibson, Abram Charles, John Buck, and others).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 2005, John Mohawk published his edited version of the &#039;&#039;Iroquois Creation Story&#039;&#039;, based on Gibson and Hewitt&#039;s late nineteenth-century version. In doing so, he explained an approach to &amp;quot;editing&amp;quot; Haudenosaunee narratives that set a number of important goals:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[The editor] might consciously remove the various remnants of Victorian conventions and attitudes which sometimes surface in the original text along with some elements which clearly were added following contact with Europeans or people of European descent. . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The job of editor, which could never be accomplished perfectly, was to preserve the elements of the narrative in language consistent with that used at the end of the twentieth century. It was my goal to eliminate repetitive language, preserve as much as possible the elements of the narrative such that the original authors might recognize it as their own, to avoid as much as possible changing the spirit or intent of the story, and to add very few of my own thoughts. Above all, I tried to preserve the thoughts of the ancients. Because the tradition lends itself to a contemporary interpretation, I anticipate some skepticism about possible alterations to lend it a modernist, or even postmodernist interpretation. I have tried to be transparent about my own interventions, albeit in subtle ways.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mohawk 2005a, ii. To believe that John Mohawk simply modernized and streamlined the Gibson–Hewitt text is to miss the significance of this work. The reconciliation also reflects his own work with contemporary Haudenosaunee leaders, thinkers, and modern keepers of tradition, and his own experience as a member of the society that lives within the principles of the tradition.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
John Mohawk was able to implement this approach because he had grown up within the culture, constantly interacting with the carriers of its knowledge, and was therefore able to distinguish between Hewitt&#039;s occasional quasi-European additions and the original, purer stream.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Chiefs&#039; Version of the law was an effort to produce a simple, authoritative, consistent, and de-Europeanized edition of the law, in the same spirit as John Mohawk&#039;s approach to the Creation story. It omits some of the details of the 1912 Gibson version and the Newhouse versions, but it contains all the essentials, in a coherent, cohesive sequence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In approaching the Kayanerenkó:wa, I have adopted several of John Mohawk&#039;s methods. Since it is a living legal system, though, it is also important to cite how exposure to Europeans may have changed the law, or its interpretation. While I have eliminated some unnecessary repetition, and have added modern interpretation and commentary, I have also struggled with the challenge of reconciling several very distinct versions of the law. Where reconciliation is not possible, I point out the differences between the versions, and occasionally suggest which one is most consistent, either with the rest of the law, with historical reality, or with rational analysis.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In a way, the Chiefs’ committee that produced the Chiefs’ Version of 1900 also did this work. The committee produced a sleek, tight version of the law that omitted much of the rich detail of the narrative but also improved the internal consistency of the story, as compared to the various existing versions. It would seem that their priority, though, was not the narrative but the actual functioning of the laws—because the Newhouse version, which had provoked their creation as a committee, had failed to describe accurately the way the council ought to operate.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Because this is a work about law, my personal comments are overt and declared rather than subtle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Versions, Names, and Quotations ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Though the first note in this book explained my approach to Haudenosaunee names, some additional complexities should also be addressed. Since the law has been recorded in several languages over two centuries, people&#039;s names and key concepts appear in different forms in different versions. They also differ from language to language. Especially for those who speak no Haudenosaunee language, this can be confusing. Thadadaho is the same person as Atotarho and Tatadahoh. Except where the names appear in quotations, I have deliberately used a single spelling for each such name. I have generally chosen to use modern Mohawk orthography, for several reasons. More people speak Mohawk than all the other Haudenosaunee languages combined. The spelling systems for modern Oneida, Cayuga, and Onondaga were developed by different linguists and all require special diacritical marks, inconvenient to use and difficult for occasional readers to learn. Mohawk uses a standard keyboard and simpler spelling. Mohawk is the language of council.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Though none of the written versions of the law state this explicitly, there seems to be a consensus among the chiefs that this is the case, and the Chiefs’ Version, where it uses non-English terms and names, uses Mohawk.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; As a matter of convenience, and in the absence of a single standard Mohawk orthography, I use the spellings used by Kanatawakon David Maracle.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Kanatawakon David Maracle 2001. Kanatawakon uses “y” where standard (Eastern) Mohawk uses an “i.” My hometown Grand River Mohawk uses the “y.” The difference, trivial to outsiders, can become a linguist’s battleground.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
My decision to put people&#039;s Haudenosaunee names before their English names also applies to nicknames, which I have decided to cite in parentheses only where the individual was best known by that nickname. Thus, I mention Sagoyewatha (Red Jacket) and Kayantwakha (Cornplanter). Some people have several names during their lifetime,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;NYSL MSS 13350; cited in Johnston 1964, 29: “The same person at different periods of life is . . . commonly known by three different names the first belongs to the boy, 2d to the man, 3d to the old man.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and I tend in such cases to use the name by which they were best known, with others sometimes cited in parentheses or footnotes. By the 1600s, Haudenosaunee often had European names as well as their &amp;quot;real names,&amp;quot; and often they carried nicknames as well: the Onondaga chief Outrewati was also &amp;quot;Garangula&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;La Grande Gueule&amp;quot;; the Mohawk speaker Canaqueese Jan Smits also appears in history books as &amp;quot;the Flemish Bastard.&amp;quot; Theyanoguin (Teianoken) was also known by his English name (Henry Peters), his Dutch name (Hendrick Pieters), his nickname (King Hendrick), and his Mohawk chief&#039;s title, Tekarihoken. They would appear in this work as Outrewati, Canaqueese, and Teyanoken (later Tekarihoken).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It would be proper to refer to each of the nations in their own language. It would be a useful lesson in avoiding the imposition of foreign names. It would also be cumbersome, and make for difficult reading. It would be even more complex to refer to each nation by its council name, rather than its everyday name. But it is simply easier to refer to Mohawks rather than Kanienkehá:ka. On the principle of seeking the clearest communication possible, I use the usual English names for the nations, and not their names for themselves or their formal council designations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee have always enjoyed puns and double meanings in their own language—the kind of stuff that simply does not survive translation into English. If the versions of the law are full of these double meanings,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;It is not just the spoken law that is full of multiple—but not inconsistent—meanings. The symbols of the law are also layered: the Hiawatha Belt, for example, depicts a Tree of Peace that, upside down, is a heart, for Onondaga also lies at the heart of the Confederacy; each square is a nation’s fire, with the path of peace running from fire to fire; but the fires are also fires within the symbolic Longhouse, and the path is also the line that divides the Longhouse into its two sides. The three rows of beads that separate the dark rows of the Two Row Wampum are part of the river, but they are also the three elements of the Silver Covenant Chain.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; that, too, says something about the attitudes of the people. English-speaking peoples also appreciate multiple meanings (although it has become common to groan at puns as a &amp;quot;lower form&amp;quot; of humour), but they take their law very seriously. In English law, and the common-law legal systems that have grown from it, and in most European law, every word has a specific, deliberate meaning, and the intent is that every word should have only one meaning, to the point that many statutes begin with pages of definitions.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;It might be suggested that a legal system that aims at drafting unambiguously, so that each word has only one meaning, reflects a culture whose philosophy asserts that there is only one truth. European stories and fables have an explicit moral: Haudenosaunee stories, instead, are told in a way that different people can draw different conclusions, according to their ages, capacities, personal experiences, and talents.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We are entitled to believe that the law contains a linguistic logic that also reflects its culture of origin.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The debate about whether a person’s language inevitably colours their worldview began, in modern academic terms, with the work of Benjamin Lee Whorf, comparing the perspectives of Hopi-speakers and English-speakers. He arrived at the moderate conclusion that language (and, inevitably, culture) has some effect on perception. While linguists have debated the impact of language on worldview, lawyers and people engaged in thinking about law have given less thought to this issue. See Connelly 1999.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; If we work from English versions, and with twenty-first-century survivors, we can expect the law to suffer erosion of that logic. Maintaining the languages is therefore an important aspect of understanding and maintaining the law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Language ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Laws reflect aspects of the languages in which they are embedded, just as the languages reflect the cultures in which they live. Where it might be possible to make oneself understood in English with a succession of nouns and adverbs, Haudenosaunee languages require both action and relationship.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;This is true of other Indigenous languages of North America: “Aboriginal languages, and therefore the reality they describe and represent, are not made up of separate things with fixed characteristics. The focus is on relations between things or persons, and the nature of the thing or person can be defined by the relationship between the speaker and the object.” RCAP 1995, 621.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; That is, a Haudenosaunee sentence, because of its structure and the language&#039;s grammar, will cause a person to consider not only the object but also its state or activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The difference between some European languages and English is instructive in explaining the differences. Latin languages require a person to consider the gender of the thing that is spoken of—and often provide few clues as to why things are assigned one gender or another.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In Spanish, a finger (&#039;&#039;un dedo&#039;&#039;) is masculine, but a hand (&#039;&#039;una mano&#039;&#039;) is feminine; in French, &#039;&#039;la voiture&#039;&#039; travels on &#039;&#039;le chemin&#039;&#039; or on &#039;&#039;la route.&#039;&#039; There is often no good explanation for the gender assigned to things.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In those languages, as well, there are different forms of address for people with whom one is familiar and for those whom one respects, or does not know well. In French or Spanish, crossing the line that separates &#039;&#039;vosotros&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;vous&#039;&#039; from &#039;&#039;tu&#039;&#039; is a conscious, often delicate move. In Haudenosaunee languages, a greater number of things are considered animate than in English (the difference, in a way, between &#039;&#039;him&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;it&#039;&#039;). People are frequently addressed according to their relationship with the speaker. There are more precise and selective ways of addressing groups.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Modern Haudenosaunee will sometimes use “yous” to speak to more than one person. This may not be poor grammar: it may be an unconscious reflection of the precision afforded by Indigenous languages that is absent in English. That is, they are speaking good Mohawk in English.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Languages that encourage the speaker to consider his relationships with others are well suited to a legal system that is based on those relationships, and on maintaining them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Haudenosaunee languages, it is common to find interjections in speech that seek agreement or encourage consensus. Wahi, or &amp;quot;is it not so?&amp;quot; is a common interjection in everyday conversational Mohawk.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Modern Haudenosaunee, even those who do not speak a Haudenosaunee language, will often use terms like “innit?” or “ennit?” to seek the same agreement while they speak.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Duality, that persistent aspect of the Creation story and the Law, is also more frequent in Haudenosaunee languages than in modern European ones. Modern European languages distinguish between singular and plural, while Haudenosaunee languages have singular, dual, and plural forms (Arabic features dual forms, as did ancient Greek, and as do Gaelic, Slovenian, and some Polynesian languages).&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Some languages have dual forms of nouns; others have dual forms of pronouns; some have both. Some languages had them, but have shed them: Tagalog, Finnish, and Greenlandic Inuktitut, for example.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; On the one hand, this requires more specificity in normal conversation (&amp;quot;the two of us&amp;quot; rather than the more indefinite &amp;quot;us&amp;quot;). On the other, it promotes thinking about things in twos.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;We know that the dual mode provides or reflects some of the crucial underpinnings of Haudenosaunee culture: balance, reciprocity, divisions between genders. But what is the purpose of duality in these other languages and cultures? And why does a language drop that mode?&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Duality is accentuated by language structure, which adds useful prefixes to words and concepts. The prefix &#039;&#039;te-&#039;&#039; indicates that there are two of something involved—for example, tekká:nere, &amp;quot;me looking upon something,&amp;quot; is a reminder that we have two eyes—or that the two-ness of the matter is a question of balance—tewáton, &amp;quot;it becomes,&amp;quot; occurs in a balanced way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefixes carefully distinguish between uncertainty (for example, things that have not yet happened, and may not) and fact. The prefix &#039;&#039;wa-&#039;&#039; indicates that the matter being spoken of is, in the words of Tehahenteh Frank Miller, &amp;quot;an incontrovertible fact.&amp;quot; In conversations about law, this helps separate fact from opinion, and can be an indicator of which matters are firm or entrenched, a signal they are to be accommodated by the other side of the fire.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In English, one contradicts a statement by simply saying that it did not happen. In Haudenosaunee languages, one cannot negate, for example, the definite past: one can only express doubt about it by shifting into the indefinite mode.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The idea of a &amp;quot;matter&amp;quot; itself is quite different from the more precise English term. Orihwa can be translated as &amp;quot;matter,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;business,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;thing,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;word,&amp;quot; and as a component of &amp;quot;culture&amp;quot; (niionkwarihó:ten, our ways, or our business). The word allows a broad range of things to be considered. It also permits discussion—or, as John Mohawk would say, conversation—about matters before they must be described as disputes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Haudenosaunee languages are descriptive. Where English provides the noun &amp;quot;deer,&amp;quot; the Mohawk oskenonton can be interpreted as &amp;quot;it bears living bones,&amp;quot; a reference to the stag&#039;s antlers. When the antlers are placed on a person—the metaphor for making a man a Confederacy chief—the thought is present that the person acquires the stag&#039;s antenna-like sensitivity. &amp;quot;Car,&amp;quot; in English, becomes the Mohawk káse:re, &amp;quot;it (a created thing) drags itself.&amp;quot; Not only are the languages descriptive: in many cases the words are metaphorical, and they condition a person to more easily understand and use a legal system that is replete with symbol and metaphor. They are also active languages, and they encourage a person to think of the law as a living entity, one that is &#039;&#039;being&#039;&#039;, rather than as a passive or static concept. It is logical that a Mohawk would say that it is reconciling, not reconciliation, that is important.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Amber Meadow Adams, in conversation about the evolution of “reconciliation” from a term that described how Crown responsibility and authority had to be reconciled, to reconciliation between nations, to a near-religious requirement of reconciliation from Canada’s Truth and Reconciliation Commission, pointed out that “reconciling” is more compatible with Haudenosaunee thinking, and more descriptive of what is actually required—a process without definite end, rather than an event. As we had that conversation, a “reconciliation tour” was being arranged for the president of McMaster Children’s Hospital to smooth over the hard feelings left from the hospital’s unsuccessful attempt to force the Brant County Children’s Aid Society to take custody of an eleven-year-old girl so the hospital could apply chemotherapy rather than traditional Haudenosaunee medicine. The family avoided the event: reconciling requires more.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With such differences between Haudenosaunee languages and the English that surrounds the Haudenosaunee archipelago, it is not surprising that the leaders of the Confederacy want to sustain the languages and maintain their use in council. The Kayanerenkó:wa would be a poorer, weaker law if it existed for them only in English. Much would be lost in translation, including aspects of the spirit of the law:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has been argued, and has become almost a commonplace, that Native American languages are embedded in the local landscapes of First Nations; the verbs that speak exactly the voice of the west wind as it moves over the water, colors not generic browns and reds but the loam under pine needles and sumac buds when they are ready to eat. A worldview is lost, it has been said with greater and greater urgency, when an indigenous language is not spoken. Perhaps even more is lost when indigenous oral narrative is unspoken, when these stories lie quiet as truncated text, when they are gutted by the blades of academic discipline.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Adams 2007, n.p.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Haudenosaunee languages are in dire trouble. The terms used by linguists to describe the state of languages are the same as those used by biologists to describe the state of species. Tuscarora is virtually extinct. Languages are &amp;quot;moribund&amp;quot; if they have fewer than 300 speakers, and most of the speakers are over fifty years old: Oneida, Onondaga, Cayuga, and Seneca fit into that category. Only Mohawk, with over 2,000 speakers, may have much chance of survival. Efforts are being made in many communities to revitalize the languages, but the power of English is difficult to resist, as that language gains vocabulary and technical specificity in ways that outdistance other languages, and as it becomes the tongue of commerce and international communication. At any given moment, nearly 20 percent of the conversations in English happening in the world are between two people neither of whom have English as their first language. English is omnivorous.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Haudenosaunee languages, like Haudenosaunee traditional governments, are endangered. For purposes of the law, the English versions provide information about the substance, but fail to deliver the entire bundle of knowledge and understanding that the law carries in its original languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because several of the English versions are over a century old; because several of the translators were academics, with both broad vocabularies and a lack of concern for the intelligibility of their product to average readers; and because the original languages are very different from English, several of the translations of the law contain awkward or difficult English terms: &amp;quot;besom,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;downfended,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;condole,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;verily,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;whereupon,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;thus,&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;yonder.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Was Hewitt trying to lend solemnity to the speeches, or was he trying to replicate the tone of what he was hearing—or was he Victorian enough to actually speak and write that way himself? Hewitt’s account of his recording of the Creation story reflects a collegial and meticulous approach. John Arthur Gibson was the principal speaker, and Chiefs John Buck and Abram Charles would confirm and discuss five or six sentences at a time. When Gibson dictated the law to Goldenweiser, Hewitt had been confined to an office in the Smithsonian Institution in Washington due to political and financial changes—but the process had been established by the chiefs, not the anthropologists.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Other terms, like &amp;quot;repent,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;deacon,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;righteous,&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;sinful&amp;quot; carry powerful Christian baggage in English, and are explained quite differently by Haudenosaunee familiar with the meanings of the words used in their original languages. Using Christian terms has caused frustration and confusion, as Victorian speakers, either Anglo-American or Haudenosaunee, found no closer terms to translate essential parts of Haudenosaunee thought. Still other terms reflect the lack of colloquial English equivalents, and substitute obsolete or anthropological terms as a result: &amp;quot;moiety,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;gens&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;, and &amp;quot;matron.&amp;quot; Yet others reflect inadequate or awkward translations of Haudenosaunee grammar into English: &amp;quot;continually,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;repeatedly,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;presently.&amp;quot; When we read century-old translations of even older texts, we encounter linguistic difficulties not only across languages and cultures but across time.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Sotsisowah John Mohawk’s (2005) &#039;&#039;Iroquois Creation Story&#039;&#039; is an example of an effort to take an older text, remove the inappropriate or wrong effects of Victorian translation, restore cultural integrity, and deliver an intelligible, readable modern story. It is no coincidence that Russians who hear &#039;&#039;Hamlet&#039;&#039; translated into modern Russian connect quite differently with the story than do English-speaking people who continue to struggle with the majesty and difficulty of the sixteenth-century Elizabethan original.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Oral Tradition and the Rememberers ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Don’t forget the words he has spoken in front of us who are the elders. This is where they should rest, his words, in the bottom of our hearts, so that, whatever one’s age, one will keep remembering the story that he himself, Tekanawita, has told. Thereafter the children repeated it, reminding themselves of what he said in front of them.&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 64.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Longhouse today, there remains a prejudice against learning from tape recordings, especially recordings of sacred materials.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Even so, the recordings made by various anthropologists in the first half of the twentieth century are now being transcribed and analyzed critically by people at the Grand River Territory seeking to assemble and recover the entire panoply of Haudenosaunee ceremonial life.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; One is supposed to learn by listening, and by practising. This is not just technophobia.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Antagonism to “white man’s” technology does exist—and can be seen in the kerosene lights in the longhouse, the wood stoves, and the deliberate use of log rather than frame buildings.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; There is a sound principle involved: &amp;quot;We don&#039;t want machines or paper to become our storage device. The human mind is where we keep important things.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Across the ocean and the millennia, ancient Egyptians told of how, when the god Thoth presented Pharaoh Thamus with the gift of hieroglyphic writing, the king was hesitant, concerned that writing would kill memory, or the need for it.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It is portable, safe, flexible, reliable, and its information is easily transferred to other minds. Written materials, on the other hand, have often been misused, quoted out of context, or lost. A preference for memory as a storage device was supported, historically, by the presence of well-trained memories. As the Haudenosaunee described their ways: &amp;quot;We nevertheless have methods of transmitting from Father to Son an account of all these things, whereby you will find the rememberance of them is faithfully preserved, and our succeeding generations are made acquainted with what has passed, that it may not be forgot as long as the Earth remains.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Minutes of the Provincial Council of Pennsylvania 1851, 4:84.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
European observers confirmed that the Haudenosaunee had sophisticated, remarkable techniques for remembering the important things: &amp;quot;When any Foreign Ambassador comes to them &amp;amp; makes any proposal they contrive to remember every word he says: different people are appointed to learn by heart a separate sentence &amp;amp; no more; so when they come to put it together they know every word of it.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Johnston 1964, 29. Today, Haudenosaunee working groups divide up responsibility between their members when they meet with outsiders, but the memorization has been replaced by note taking.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Benjamin Franklin, who had attended Haudenosaunee councils with Pennsylvania and who as a printer had reproduced several of the treaties, asserted that the women were responsible for remembering council proceedings. Venables said that this was one more respect in which the Haudenosaunee maintained gender balance: &amp;quot;The old Men sit in the foremost Ranks, the Warriors in the next, and the Women and Children in the hindmost. The Business of the Women is to take exact notice of what passes, imprint it in their Memories, for they have no Writing, and communicate it to their Children. They are the Records of the Council, and they preserve Tradition of the Stipulations in Treaties a hundred Years back, which when we compare with our Writings we always find exact.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Franklin 1987, 970; see Venables 2010, 35.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sakokwenonkwas Tom Porter explained: &amp;quot;They believed it should never die, that if it is put into a person&#039;s head and heart, it will truly live. In a book it will sit on a shelf where dust and dirt will cover it.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Porter 1986, 52.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Teaching a course in Haudenosaunee law at the Faculty of Law at the University of Toronto gave me an unusual opportunity. I asked the students whether any of them could recite, with some accuracy, three sections of the Constitution of Canada. None could. How about three sections of the Criminal Code? None could, either. How about the story of Goldilocks and the Three Bears? With the exception of a recent immigrant, they all knew the story, in detail. I pointed out that nobody eats porridge for supper today—that European peasants did, four centuries ago. This is an old story. And that they all knew that it was the middle-sized bowl that was &amp;quot;too cold,&amp;quot; even though that defied the laws of physics, since the little bowl should have cooled sooner. The point, though, was that, especially for a people with low literacy rates, but even for a twenty-first-century modern nation-state, it makes sense to place one&#039;s basic values in a story everybody knows, rather than in a book nobody can remember. Sakokwenonkwas was right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The oral tradition has its disadvantages. Not least of these is the fact that some of it is being lost, that fewer people are devoting their lives to learning the skills of memory and the vast materials involved, and that with the passing of some of the older people, valuable information that they kept only in their minds is gone forever. The written versions have never been complete.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This has always been the case, though: times change, and the things remembered pass down the generations in changing forms. Thus, every good speaker begins humbly, noting that we who are alive today do not possess the knowledge of our forefathers, and that we have forgotten much.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Even a very good speaker begins by saying that he will do his best, and that his efforts will not be perfect. It has long been so: in 1743, a Haudenosaunee speaker meeting with Pennsylvania officials “praised their Grandfathers’ Wisdom in establishing the Union or Alliance, by which they became a formidable Body; that they (now living) were but fools to their wise Fathers.” Beauchamp 1907, 428.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Indigenous peoples, who have a relatively short tradition of writing, memory passed down through the generations is an important aspect of knowledge. Literacy among Europeans—especially widespread literacy—is quite recent, and before literacy, there was Memory. As Daniel Boorstin observed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before the printed book, Memory ruled daily life and the occult learning . . . The Memory of individuals and of communities carried knowledge through time and space. For millennia personal Memory reigned over entertainment and information, over the perpetuation and perfection of crafts, the practice of commerce, the conduct of professions. By Memory and in Memory the fruits of education were garnered, preserved and stored. Memory was an awesome faculty which everyone had to cultivate, in ways and for reasons we have long since forgotten. In these last five hundred years we see only pitiful relics of the empire and the power of Memory.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Boorstin 1985, 480.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The admission that we are not going to do this as well as our grandparents would, or as the men who first set these matters down, is probably true, but it is also a statement of modesty: &amp;quot;Now at present in some way, I may perform it improperly, compared to the way he used to do it, . . . my grandfather.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 85.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In the Haudenosaunee world, it is as normal as clearing one&#039;s throat before speaking. It is easily misunderstood. In &#039;&#039;R. v. Taylor and Williams,&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;(1981) 34 OR (2d) 360 at 363. Ojibway–British treaty council protocol had followed Haudenosaunee rules since the mid-1700s.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; the Ontario Supreme Court read the minutes of an 1818 treaty council with the Ojibways, in which they said: &amp;quot;Father: You see me here, I am to be pitied, I have no old men to instruct me; I am the Head Chief, but a young man. You must pity me, all the old people have gone to the other world. My hands are naked, I cannot speak as my ancestors were used to.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The court assumed that all the old chiefs had been killed in the War of 1812, and only young men were left. In fact, one would have heard chiefs in council—or, for that matter, in a ceremony of Condolence—200 years earlier making similar statements. Here are several examples:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We who are now here are but children; the ancients being deceased.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Sagoyewatha Red Jacket at Canandaigua, 1794, cited in Ganter 2006, 63.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now hearken while your grandchildren cry mournfully to you, because the Great League which you established has grown old. We hope that they may hear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hail, my grandsires! You have said that sad will be the fate of those who come in the latter times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Oh, my grandsires! Even now I may have failed to perform this ceremony in the order in which they were wont to perform it.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hale (1883) 1989, 123.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Maquase sachems who spoke formerly with you are dead, and we have not so much knowledge as they had. Nevertheless, although they are buried, yet let the old Covenant that was made with our ancestors be kept firm.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;NYCD 3:535–61. 18 September 1688.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Modesty or humility in opening remarks should not be taken as an admission of either ignorance or incapacity. It is a polite, proper element of a good speaker&#039;s words. It is also a recognition of the human condition. We make mistakes. We do the best we can.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;“We are human beings. We do the best we can. When we make mistakes, we will work together to correct them.” This paragraph has become standard in Haudenosaunee negotiations with Canadian entities: federal, provincial, and municipal lawyers initially express their discomfort about the wording, but soon acknowledge that it is all true, and generally accede to the use of the clause.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; &amp;quot;The public stance of the speaker is one of humility. In his opening lines he should stress the fact that he has been appointed to the task; he has not taken it upon himself to rise and speak. It is also considered good form to make a formal apology for any errors of omission or commission. If he is especially confident he may invite the opposite speaker to &#039;correct&#039; his errors in the response—an opportunity, however, usually declined.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Foster 1974, 31.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Memory has limits. Oral tradition has weaknesses. They show up in several distinct ways. People tend to remember recent events better than distant ones. People tend to remember important events better than insignificant ones. People tend to remember stories they have heard several times better than ones they have heard only once. They tend to recall the parts that affect them directly rather than the parts that describe strangers or foreigners. For the Haudenosaunee, the creation of the Confederacy and the Law is a remarkable story, often repeated: it is what John Mohawk called a meta-narrative. It is not surprising that, as an oral tradition, it remains forceful and clear in comparison to other legal knowledge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If modern institutions and practices reflect the traditions, they tend to corroborate the accuracy of the recall of the custodians of those traditions. Morgan approached the Haudenosaunee with the thinking of a lawyer as well as that of a proto-anthropologist.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Boorstin 1985, 636–46. “As a young lawyer without clients in the doldrums of the business depression that began in 1837, Morgan had ample time. . . .” By 1846 he was helping the Tonawanda Senecas fight for the return of their land.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; He sought evidence and proof of what he was told, and he confirmed that modern practices tended to confirm the oral traditions—at least as far back as the time of the Peacemaker:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Those traditions which reach beyond the formation of the League, are vague and unreliable, while all such as refer to its establishment assume a connected and distinctive form. It follows that confidence may be reposed in such inferences as are derived from these traditions, and corroborated by the internal structure of the government, and by the institutions of the League.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Morgan (1851) 1995, 89.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The present Iroquois are . . . perfectly familiar with the structure and principles of the ancient confederacy.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Morgan (1871) 1997, 132.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tradition interposes its feeble light from the confusion which time has wrought on some of the leading events which preceded and marked that political organization.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Converse 1908, 128.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee designated &amp;quot;rememberers,&amp;quot; not just for individual councils, but for specific ceremonies. An individual&#039;s gift of memory was acknowledged and cultivated: when Skaniatariio John Arthur Gibson was blinded in a lacrosse accident, the chiefs encouraged him to use and develop his powerful memory in the service of the people. In the twentieth century, the best-known Haudenosaunee ceremonial speakers were men who had avoided the Canadian education system, some to the point of illiteracy, and who had learned instead from their grandfathers.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Deyonwe’ton Jake Thomas and Hononwirehton Peter Skye, crucial rememberers of the twentieth century, both walked out of school in grade three. Gordon Buck, a Grand River Seneca who often did the speaking at ceremonies, was apparently absolutely impractical and seemed to have limited intellectual ability—but had a memory that enabled him to reproduce any ceremonial speech impeccably after hearing it once.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where Europeans supplemented memory with writing, the Haudenosaunee used wampum as a mnemonic device. Both sacred and permanent, the belts and strings of shell beads stood as symbols of the concepts of the law, and later as symbols and records of the promises and principles of the treaties. When wampum was not available, other objects were used to preserve words, even temporarily: history records councils in which sticks or furs were used in this way. Wampum—which was also more durable—made the commitments sacred.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Wampum comes in three main formats: individual beads, strings of beads, and woven “belts.” The French referred to the belts as “colliers” or necklaces, and there are historic depictions of Wendat (Huron) chiefs wearing their wampum, which had a distinctive diagonal weave, around their necks. In contrast, there are no historic depictions of Haudenosaunee leaders wearing their important wampums at all. The British called them “belts,” but modern Haudenosaunee tend to call them simply “wampums,” and I will follow that practice. A “wampum,” then, is a woven belt, and the other forms are “strings of wampum” and “wampum beads.” There is no record of the chiefs wearing the belts around their waists.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Haudenosaunee tradition states clearly that the use of wampum in connection with law dates to the time of the making of the Great Law of Peace.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Shell beads, including the cylindrical shell beads now known as wampum, existed well before the coming of the Great Law. Early shell beads were mostly discs, though—a limitation resulting from the stone and bone tools used to make the beads. Shell beads were used as ornaments, certainly. As for their uses in ceremonies, there is no record one way or another.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The first legal use of wampum was the ceremony of Condolence, and other wampum records came afterward.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hewitt stated that no Haudenosaunee ritual but the Condolence uses wampum in any form: 1928, 93. However, the Six Nations meetings to renew the Karihwí:iyo, the Code of Handsome Lake, involve a set of strings known as Katsistowá:nen, the Great Fire.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; What is important to note at this stage of thinking about the Great Law is the fact that, for centuries, strings and belts of shell beads have been used to assist human memory. Wampum is not writing. Some suggest that each individual bead in a belt has its own secret meaning, capable of being interpreted by those who have received the esoteric training associated with that belt. This is not so. In the case of the strings and belts, it is the patterns and the colours that symbolically recall the concepts that were originally associated with them. Those concepts were stated in words, and the wampum acts as a device of recall. The symbols on the belts have standard meanings. For example, a diagonal line symbolizes a nation propping up the Longhouse from the outside, as an ally. Short lines at the end of a belt can indicate the number of nations or villages that support the proposition. A square or hexagon symbolizes a fire, the expression of a nation&#039;s existence. However, a wampum belt cannot be &amp;quot;read&amp;quot; like a book.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Patterns on belts and strings often recall physical phenomena. The alternating black and white beads on a Condolence string resemble the teardrops shed by grieving eyes. On another string, the dark area in the middle evokes a fire. The connection between wampum symbols and natural phenomena is a precursor to alphabetical literacy. The Phoenician letter &amp;quot;A&amp;quot; evoked an ox&#039;s head and horns, and only much later detached itself from the image and became linked in people&#039;s minds only to sound, and then to a sound as a component of a word made of several sounds, so that &amp;quot;A&amp;quot; today means only &amp;quot;A.&amp;quot; Given time and isolation, wampum could have become a &amp;quot;literate&amp;quot; form of communication, in which its symbols would detach themselves from image.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Coe 1999, and Abram 1996, 130–33. I do not mean to suggest that phonetic writing systems are necessarily more sophisticated, or reflect more sophisticated ways of thought or life; only that the dominant alphabets of the world originated from picture-symbols.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wampum is &amp;quot;readable&amp;quot; in another sense, as well: it is a binary system, in which the two colours, white and dark, operate separately as symbols of the bright and dark sides of life, and combine to provide more subtle meanings: &amp;quot;This all white string is a sign of truth, peace and good will, this black string is a sign of hatred, of war and of a bad heart, the string with alternate beads, black and white, is a sign that peace should exist between the nations. The string with white on either end and black in the middle is a sign that wars must end and peace declared.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Soinowa Delos Big Kittle of Cattaraugus in 1905: cited in Parker (1923) 1989, 404. George Hamell of the New York State Museum developed a far more complex set of colour interpretations of wampum, including green, blue, and red (Hamell 1992). The problem with that approach is that, except for a few dark red pipestone Seneca belts (the Senecas, at the Western Door, would have better access to catlinite), and bright red war belts stained with the vermilion that symbolized blood, there are few records of wampum belts in any colours but natural white and dark purple.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some say that the wampum records &#039;&#039;are&#039;&#039; the treaties. This is as erroneous as to say that the written documents are the treaties. Both the wampums and the documents are &#039;&#039;evidence&#039;&#039; of the agreements that were made. Each has its particular virtues and weaknesses—but the treaties themselves are the coming together of minds, not the physical objects that record or symbolize the agreements. For the Haudenosaunee, as well, the &amp;quot;treaty&amp;quot; is less the event at which the agreement was made, or the specific matter that was agreed upon, and more the relationship that flows from or is reaffirmed by the event.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[Figure 3: The Hiawatha Wampum. The pine tree in the middle symbolizes the Tree of Peace, and also the fact that Onondaga, as the central nation of the Confederacy, is also the location of the council fire. Each of the squares represents another of the original Five Nations, from east to west. The white paths between them are the paths of peace and communication. The paths go beyond the Five Nations, as the Great White Roots of the Tree of Peace go to the four directions. Note: &amp;quot;A row of white wampum coming out of the white heart, right and left and which connects the four white square marks is the purest of all pure of the Great Peace and Charity of which compact is the Union of the Five Nations&amp;quot; (Newhouse 1898, 55). Jake Thomas suggested that the Oneida and Cayugas were symbolized by larger squares, since they are “adopting nations.” The Oneidas took the Tuscaroras under their wing; the Cayugas the Tutelos and Conestogas. But history indicates that the Senecas were by far the most absorbent of the Haudenosaunee nations, taking in the Erie, Wenro, Attiwandaron, Tiionontate, Wendat, and others.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some wampums are notorious—they have become icons. That is, they are symbols known and understood by hundreds, sometimes thousands, of people (much as the colours and symbols on national flags are broadly known). People &#039;&#039;know&#039;&#039; that the five shapes on the Hiawatha Belt symbolize the original Five Nations. They &#039;&#039;know&#039;&#039; that the tree in the middle of the five is the Tree of Peace as well as the heart&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;This was described as such in the Grand Council at Cattaraugus in 1862 (Parker 1916, 145).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; of the Confederacy. They &#039;&#039;know&#039;&#039; that the two lines on the Two Row Wampum&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Modern usage suggests that the Two Row Wampum is called Kahswénhtha; yet in older speeches and usage, the term is applied to any wampum belt. It is a reference to the “flowing-ness” of the wampum. As such, it could be taken as a reference to the River of Life that is said to be the background for the sailing ship and the canoe in the Two Row Wampum—or to refer to the way the commitments and ideas preserved in any wampum are to flow through time.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; symbolize the Indian canoe and the white man&#039;s ship, going side by side down the River of Life, neither interfering in the course of the other. They &#039;&#039;know&#039;&#039; that the thirteen men on the George Washington belt are the thirteen colonies, and that the two men on either side of a house on that belt are the doorkeepers of the Confederacy, the Mohawks and Senecas—and that the meaning of the belt is that the United States&#039; arms will pass over the Longhouse without trying to get inside it. In the case of other wampums, the meaning is less well-known, but no less well recorded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several kinds of wampum, from a Haudenosaunee legal perspective. The earliest, simplest, and most powerful are the strings associated with the ceremony of Condolence, the strings symbolizing the nations bringing their minds together in ronatennikonhraroron, collective thinking, and the Circle Wampum that is the symbol of the League&#039;s government. Then there are the wampum belts that record aspects of the Great Law of Peace. Following them, chronologically, are the wampums that record treaties and relations with other nations, both Indigenous and European. Other wampum also has legal significance: there are strings of adoption wampum;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Today’s adoption strings are white and a handspan long. Perhaps, when they were “a name hung around the neck,” they were actual necklaces (as the Tutelo adoption ceremony still uses a necklace), and the scarcity of wampum over the years caused their shrinkage.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; there are wampums that are linked to specific ceremonies; and the rotiyanershon each carry a short string they refer to as their &amp;quot;horns.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;“A bunch of white wampum strings, two spans of the hand in length (Deyoronhkarageh) being the symbol of a Lordship Title, be given to every one of the original forty-eight, now fifty, Awatchiras of the Five Confederate Nations.” Newhouse 1897, w. 52. The string is left in the dead man’s hands in the open coffin during his funeral, and then lifted before burial to pass on to his successor.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Clan mothers each carry the counterparts of these short strings—longer strings symbolizing their responsibility for the chief&#039;s title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
British law—Saxon and Norman—was originally customary, and as such quite distinct from the written, codified Roman system. This customary law was allowed to develop through jurisprudence, to spread to meet additional circumstances, while keeping its principles intact. Unless replaced by statutes passed by the legislature, the &amp;quot;common law&amp;quot; of the people continued to apply and govern. The &amp;quot;common law&amp;quot; was not codified, nor reduced to writing except as revealed by court decisions. Modern British—and therefore American and Canadian—laws contain reflections of the customary and oral traditions that lie at their roots. The laws of the United States and Canada are themselves a combination of custom, memory, and writing.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The Canadian system is perhaps more custom oriented, because it is more closely linked to the British model: nothing in the written law speaks of political parties, for example, nor of the ceremonies and procedures that operate Parliament.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; There are also instances in which objects and symbols rather than documents have legal significance: one has only to consider the importance of particular seals&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See, e.g., the Crown’s courts’ conclusion that the 1784 Haldimand Proclamation delivering the entire Grand River Valley to the Haudenosaunee was void because it bore his personal seal-at-arms rather than the Great Seal of the Province: &#039;&#039;Doe dem. Jackson v. Wilkes&#039;&#039; (1835), 4 UCKB (OS) 142. However, in the 1984 case of &#039;&#039;Attorney General of Ontario v. Bear Island Foundation,&#039;&#039; (1985) 1 CNLR 1, it was found that the absence of the seal, despite specific legislation requiring it for such a transaction to be valid, was no obstacle to the validity of a land surrender treaty.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; to realize that Anglo-American law also goes beyond writing. The Euro-American legal system teems with meaningful symbolism: any courtroom contains a display of heraldry, flags, and judicial robes that confirm tradition and provide a graphic display of legal principles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Haudenosaunee law is preserved in a different way. There has been more emphasis on memory, partly because literacy came later than for the settlers. It is also retained in memory because the law is a law of the mind—and if you keep your law in your mind, you will also keep it &#039;&#039;in mind&#039;&#039;, and it will influence your conduct. But the law is not kept only in memory. It is also preserved in action and in wampum, and for more than two centuries it has been finding its way into writing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because the relevant parts of the law would be recited or referred to at times when they were being applied, the thousands of pages of transcripts of &amp;quot;treaty councils&amp;quot; are actually a distinct source of recorded law. The people who put together the microfilmed &#039;&#039;Iroquois Indians: A Documentary History&#039;&#039; in the 1980s declared they were assembling the equivalent of the archives of the Iroquois Confederacy&#039;s Department of External Affairs.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Today’s Confederacy has an External Relations Committee, as well as designated diplomats.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The council records, though, also contain numerous references to specific parts of the law. Because the relationships that the Haudenosaunee built with the French, the Dutch, the British, and the United States are themselves reflections of provisions of the Kayanerenkó:wa, and are consistent with that law and its operation, the treaty councils illuminate the operations and principles of the law, as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While oral tradition has been recognized in U.S. and Canadian courts as a means of bringing in &amp;quot;the Indian view&amp;quot; of history, it rarely travels alone.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Williams 1996, 29–34. The validity of oral tradition as evidence has also been attacked: Alexander von Gernet, who had been hired as a consultant and expert witness for the Government of Canada in &#039;&#039;Mitchell v. Minister of National Revenue&#039;&#039; (and other governments, in other cases), produced &#039;&#039;Oral Narratives and Aboriginal Pasts: An Interdisciplinary Review of the Literature on Oral Traditions and Oral Histories&#039;&#039; (2 volumes, 1996), on contract with the Department of Indian Affairs’ Research and Analysis Directorate. Von Gernet—a favourite expert witness for governments in cases against Indigenous peoples—generally does not claim expertise on the subject matter of his testimony, but rather on the literature (or “academic consensus,” as he calls it) surrounding the subject matter.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It is a primary form of preservation of the law, but far from the only one. It is supplemented by writing, by scholars, by physical evidence, by wampum. All these flesh out the law, and make it more easily accepted and understood by the newcomer nations&#039; courts.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See &#039;&#039;Benoit v. Canada&#039;&#039; (Federal Court of Appeal), leave to appeal to the Supreme Court of Canada denied 2003 FCA 236.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some versions of the Great Law provide that the people should meet every five years to hear the entire law recited, and to reaffirm their commitment to it. This form of regular maintenance&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In &#039;&#039;Benoit,&#039;&#039; the Canadian Federal Court of Appeal suggested that oral tradition evidence would be acceptable if, like the ceremonial songs of the Git’ksan and Wetsuwelthen in &#039;&#039;Delgam’uukw&#039;&#039;, the oral tradition formed part of a system of public performances that left them open to challenge and scrutiny to maintain their correctness. However, recollections told repeatedly from a grandfather to a grandson, since they were private and unchallenged, were not admissible oral tradition.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; applies not only to keeping the law fresh, but also to all other relationships that keep the peace. As Sir William Johnson wrote to Thomas Gage: &amp;quot;As it is the Way of keeping peace made use of by the Indians to meet frequently, so we can never expect a continuance of peace with them unless We have annual meetings with the Confederacies, or at least as often as may be for repeating past Transactions &amp;amp; renewing Treaties which is the way they preserve these things in rememberance.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;SWJP 7:208, William Johnson to Thomas Gage, 7 October 1769. The metaphor used for the need to renew and refresh commitments was the removal of tarnish from the Silver Covenant Chain, and the removal of rust from the iron chain that preceded it.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Speakers ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Haudenosaunee society tends to think of individuals according to their &amp;quot;gifts&amp;quot;: the things they are good at doing. Some people have the gift of speaking, and they are asked to speak on behalf of others.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Deserontyon, in condoling Kahnawake over the death of Ahsare:kowa in 1784, also spoke on behalf of “Gorah” (or Corlaer), the local Superintendent of the Indian Department. In 1956, when the Haudenosaunee put through a “dead feast” at Tabor Hill in Scarborough, Ontario, the speaker, Thadadaho David Thomas, also spoke to the dead on behalf of the city council (as well as the chiefs). Sometimes a speaker will be “borrowed” to speak on behalf of a foreign people, or a visitor, who lack not only the standing but also the knowledge of how to speak properly.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; They are often speakers in the ceremonies, but they are also speakers in council, either internally or in meetings with other nations. &amp;quot;According to the Indian custom, the speaker regards himself as representing the whole party for whom he speaks, and he addresses the leader of the other party as the representative and embodiment of all who come with him. Throughout the speeches &#039;I&#039; and &#039;thou&#039; are used in the well-understood sense of &#039;we&#039; and &#039;ye.&#039; In like manner, tribes and nations are, as it were, personified.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hale (1883) 1989, 146.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Talented speakers can be asked to speak, on occasion, for different groups. They are careful to state for whom they speak. Thus, Deyagolasera Thomas King was sometimes a speaker for the women, and sometimes for the warriors, and sometimes for the whole Confederacy in dealings with the British or other Indigenous nations.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;He spoke for the women at the Treaty of Lancaster in 1744; for the warriors at the council with the Cherokees at Johnson Hall in 1768; and for the entire Confederacy in 1770 during an effort to create a single Confederacy with the Cherokees, Creeks, Shawnees, and Catawbas—the precursor to the Ohio Valley confederacy of the 1790s and Tecumseh’s efforts in the War of 1812.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Sakoyewatha (Red Jacket) spoke occasionally for each of those groups; he also had the opportunity to act as a &amp;quot;real&amp;quot; lawyer in the New York State murder trial of Soongise Tommy Jemmy, a Seneca who had executed a Seneca woman convicted of witchcraft.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;John Mohawk said that Red Jacket may be most easily understood as a lawyer. In his speech on behalf of Soongise, Red Jacket argued that the execution of witches on behalf of the state was something that nations did—and that knocking the woman over the head was humane compared to what he had heard about the white people at Salem burning witches alive, a century before. His client was convicted, and pardoned. In 1830, New York State passed laws proclaiming its jurisdiction over all crimes committed by Indians in the state.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Anglo-Saxon law also has a tradition of designated speakers in a legal context. Every lawyer in court is essentially a hired speaker, presenting a spoken case in ways that the client wishes he or she could.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the international political (rather than legal) context, Europeans had more difficulty with the Haudenosaunee concept of speakers. In council, speakers for the Europeans generally had executive authority, either as emissaries or negotiators or as governors themselves. They frequently had to be reminded that the person speaking to them was not a &amp;quot;chief,&amp;quot; or was not speaking as a chief, but had only been chosen because of his talent for speaking:&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Fenton (1998, 7) suggests that the speakers and negotiators, who were “front men for the sachem chiefs,” eventually “developed reputations as politicians who should be courted and heard.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You must not think that I am alone or that I speak for myself as I speak in the name of the whole, not only the Men, but the Women, who are here present. It seems as though you imagined that I spoke only for myself, and I assure you, I speak for the whole.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Thomson 1759.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Onontio, lend me ear. I am the mouth for the whole of my country; thou listenest to all the Iroquois, in hearing my words.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Thwaites 1901, 27:252.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What constitutes a good speaker? Haudenosaunee rhetoric, like most human arts of speaking, recognizes a sonorous voice with rich tone and volume. It involves rhythm and tone, emotion and power.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Slobin 1991.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; A good Haudenosaunee speaker will also use meaningful and powerful phrases from the law.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;A Maori speaker would use proverbs; an effective British speaker might include quotes from Shakespeare; a common-law lawyer would cite the maxims of equity.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; His attitude is one of pride and dignity without arrogance. Where the speech is a reply to a matter raised across the fire, a good speaker has the recall to address each point in the order it was received, and to repeat entire parts of the original propositions. Where it is part of a ceremony, a good speaker will sound natural, rather than as if he is reciting something memorized, but will include every part of the speech in the proper order, often including formulaic words. Haudenosaunee orators had a distinct advantage over their Euro-American counterparts, because so many aspects of their speeches were already laid out for them, and this left them more time to concentrate on the original parts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Michael Foster asserts that the Haudenosaunee distinguish between degrees of speaking talent. The distinctions range from hath’a:ha (&amp;quot;he speaks&amp;quot;), an ordinary speaker, to an exceptional speaker, kekyohkwaho’ hath’aha (&amp;quot;he speaks in crowds&amp;quot;).&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Foster 1974, 30–32. Today, the expression “he speaks in crowds” is still part of Grand River English.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Speakers were chosen for their ability to grasp principle and fact, for rhetorical gifts, and for retentive memory in a society in which most men and women were walking archives.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Fenton, in Jennings 1985, 13.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A good speaker will be clear; his words will not be &amp;quot;sharp-edged&amp;quot; or injurious; they will reflect a desire to promote conciliation, reconciliation, and arriving at one mind about the subject at hand. He will sometimes use self-deprecating humour to soften his words.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In part to ensure that the speaker delivers the speech or puts through the ceremony properly, there is often someone designated to sit beside him and remind him of any missing elements. This is more common where the speaker was less experienced, or in training, or where the matter is especially difficult or delicate.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The “reminder” or “helper” (Fenton calls this person a “prompter,” a theatrical term used for a hidden person who provides lines to forgetful actors) often sits at the speaker’s left elbow.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Persuasion, rather than compulsion, drove decisions in Haudenosaunee society. This made rhetoric, and convincing speaking, far more important than the announcements delivered by colonial governors, federal ministers, or presidents. A talented speaker was doing far more than delivering a message in an entertaining way. He was hoping to bring about consensus through the power of words and logic.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In this, as well, the analogy of the lawyer holds true. The lawyer seeks to convince the judge, or the jury, over neither of whom the lawyer has anything but the influence of words and logic.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Power of Song: The Song of Peace ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There was a time when a great speaker would &amp;quot;perk up the ears&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The expression, poorly translated into English, refers to the way a dog’s ears perk up when he is interested in something he hears.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; of his audience by &amp;quot;driving it into them with a song.&amp;quot; This is rarer today.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;The hymn, or &#039;&#039;karenna&#039;&#039;, deserves a special notice. In every important council of the Iroquois a song or chant is considered a proper and almost essential part of the proceedings. Such official songs are mentioned in many reports of treaty councils held with them by the French and English authorities. In this greatest of all councils, a song must, of course, have a distinguished place.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hale (1883) 1989, 62.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Haudenosaunee reality is slightly more complex than Horatio Hale understood. Song may have come to humans before language. It is a distinct means of expression, and a powerful one. Virtually every religion delivers important parts of its ceremonies in song—often the &#039;&#039;most&#039;&#039; powerful parts. The cantor in the synagogue, the muezzin in the mosque, the chanting lama, the Christian congregation with its hymns and spirituals, all share the understanding that song is a separate and essential means of communication, both between humans and between humans and the spirit world. Modern North American society integrates song into weddings and funerals, political campaigns and advertising, but not into legislatures and courts.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Is the absence of song from conversation a result of the way writing did not include notation? Dennis Tedlock (1983 and 1999) noted that transcription “takes the breath from the text.” In Hawai’i, &#039;&#039;mele oli,&#039;&#039; or what in English is called “chant,” became the record of historical events, genealogies, and relations with the land.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Haudenosaunee diplomacy and law have taken this realization to a slightly different place: a speaker wishing to deliver a message with additional force or clarity may lapse into song. This is seldom done today, except in ceremonies—just as it is rare today to see a Haudenosaunee speaker walk about while he speaks—but songs in council would not only be official songs, they would be original expressions, additional ways of communicating the ideas in the speech. &amp;quot;To our astonishment an old Oneida began to sing the message which he had for the council, in a very high tenor voice. He continued for more than half an hour.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Onondaga, 19 June 1750, cited in Beauchamp (1907) 1975, 423.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On 15 September 1685, Canondondawe, the Mohawk speaker, used the power of song to drive the message of peace into the governors of New York and Virginia:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Oh Brethren, Corlaer and Governor of Virginia, where will I look for the peace covenant, where else will I find it but on our path, and but where will this path lead but to this house, which is a house of peace and welfare, and started a song and sang completely the covenant song . . . Let us observe and keep to what has been commanded so sharply to us. Let me drive it into you with a song. Open now your ears, and he sang a song of admonishment, and gave one belt of wampum to the Governor and one belt to the Governor of Virginia, concluding all the proposals with a song and said that they were done for this time.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Livingston 1956, 89.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An individual Haudenosaunee person often has his or her own song. Today, a man&#039;s personal song—his atonwa—is sung on occasion in the Longhouse.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;When there are references in historic documents to a man “singing his war song,” it may be that man’s atonwa—at the end of which the singer would sink the head of his axe into a post. Similarly, where men are described as “singing their death songs,” these may also be atonwa (but see Thwaites 1901, 1:273). Yet in 1645, Kiotsaeton said in council: “I have only good songs in my mouth. We have a multitude of war songs in our country; we have cast them all on the ground; we have no longer anything but songs of rejoicing” (Jennings 1985, 139). War songs can also be personal and spontaneous: “when they come in sight of the enemy they advance each singing his war song; they are made in general &#039;&#039;ex tempore&#039;&#039;; they most commonly signify what they have before done against the people whom they are going to attack, or what they intend to do, or what number of scalps they will bring away” (Johnston 1964, 33). In this, the war songs would be similar to the tradition of the Maori &#039;&#039;haka&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It is ancient, one of the Four Sacred Ceremonies. An uncle sings his song before introducing his niece or nephew in a naming ceremony at Green Corn or Strawberries, and atonwa is sung by a person walking up and down with his arms linked with those of a person being adopted. A man may sing his song when renewing or joining the works of a medicine society. The song is a prayer, but also a statement of who a person is. An atonwa can be passed on from one person to another, as well,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;While names are unique to an individual and belong, ultimately, to the family, an atonwa can be used by several men alive at the same time, and is not linked to families. &#039;&#039;Atonwa&#039;&#039; is one of the Four Sacred Ceremonies—the others being the Great Feather Dance, the Peach Stone Bowl Game, and the Drum Dance—that are done at the major ceremonies of the year, and which it is the duty of the rotiyanershon to maintain.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; so the song does not die.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Songs are not only individual. Sung together, they are an expression of the power of a group of people, and also of their unity.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;When Spain threatened to take over Gibraltar in the 1960s, 10,000 inhabitants of the British colony massed on the border and defiantly, together, sang “God Save the Queen” and then “We All Live in a Yellow Submarine.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; For many peoples, voices joined together in hymn are thought to be a clearer message of praise to the Creator. Singing together creates solidarity, provides solace, and affirms companionship.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All these factors come together in the Song of Peace.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Different nations had different peace songs, which they would sing along the path when approaching a foreign village. To the hosts, who might not understand the words, it would still be obvious that this was a peace delegation: they would come singing (instead of silently), along the broad path (instead of through the woods), carrying their sacred pipes before them.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Composed by the Peacemaker, taught by Hiawatha,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hale (1883) 1989, 62. Hale correctly points out that most of the Condolence songs were written after the founding of the League, for they “appeal to the wisdom of their forefathers . . . and lament the degeneracy of the later times. They expressly declare that those who established the ‘great peace’ were in their graves, and had taken their work with them and placed it as a pillow under them.” Yet other parts of the songs are fresh, and express only the power of peace. Those parts, it is said, are the ones sung by the people as they went about the work of forming the peace.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; learned by the people as they walked the path from Oneida to Onondaga, the Song of Peace is a song of power.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Peace songs set the tone for treaty councils. In 1694, at a treaty at Albany, “ye (25) sachims were attended with many other Indians. When ye came to ye place where ye treaty was held, they came two in a rank, Rode, ye sachim of ye Maguase being ye leader, singing all ye way, songs of joy and peace. So, likewise, when ye were sat down, they sang two or three songs of peace before they began ye treaty.” Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll. Ser. 4, 1:106, in Beauchamp (1907) 1975, 420–21.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It is the song that pacified the fierce, scattered mind of Thadadaho. When people together sing a song, it is another layer of their unity of mind: &amp;quot;Long House used to sing when we were in power they went on in harmony.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Records of the December 1862 Council of the Six Nations at Cattaraugus (Parker 1916, 144).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the written versions of the Kayanerenkó:wa treat it as a prose text. Perhaps the most important exception to this is Horatio Hale&#039;s transcription of the two Condolence texts. Hale reproduced and translated the writing of Mohawks and Onondagas a century earlier, and the format appears as verse in short lines. The Condolence is intended to be recited, even chanted. There are pauses between the lines. The written versions came long after the words had been formed into a long song, a long poem—something that was oral, not written, and to be remembered, not read. The handwritten Newhouse versions are also clear about when the narrative switches into song: the lines become shortened, and stanzas appear. As with the research into how the &#039;&#039;Iliad&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Odyssey&#039;&#039; were preserved over the centuries, if one examined the Kayanerenkó:wa, one would find that the entire law, and not just the Condolence, is intended to be recited. Today&#039;s annual recitals embrace an increasing comfort with vibrant chant rather than monotone. It is therefore not unreasonable that the format of written versions of the law is better adapted to be written with a break at the end of each spoken or chanted &amp;quot;line,&amp;quot; the places where there would be real pauses in the speech. The translated Thanksgiving at the beginning of this text is my conversion of Gibson&#039;s 1912 text into a more rhythmic, poetic format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Having distinct lines leads to another element of long-remembered works: formulaic, repetitive strings of words that assist the reciter in recalling.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In the &#039;&#039;Odyssey&#039;&#039;, we find repeated formulae, most memorably “the wine-dark sea,” “the rosy fingers of dawn,” and “the man of twists and turns.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; We can see those in the law in its frequent repetition of specific groups of words: &amp;quot;Now it will end, the bloodshed, the scalping, the killing&amp;quot;; &amp;quot;the smoke pierced the sky&amp;quot;; &amp;quot;peace, power, and righteousness.&amp;quot; Why did transcribers such as Hewitt and Goldenweiser not write out the law in the &amp;quot;lines&amp;quot; in which it would be recited? Possibly because they were not hearing it in the way it would be done in public, but instead privately from a reciter in his home. Hewitt, in particular, would have an informant deliver two to six words at a time, write them down, check them again—and thus create a meticulous but not necessarily naturally flowing document.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;“Owing to the great difficulty of putting on paper an unwritten language, and especially a long legend therein, Ska-na-wa-ti was compelled to dictate from two to six words and then wait until they could be transferred to paper by me; so that the whole was related disconnectedly, many passages being repeated several times. For this reason the legend is rather too concise and sentential rather than diffuse, and its periods are not so rounded and full as they would be were this legend spoken or related connectedly and without interruption.” Hewitt 1892b, 131.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Perhaps these recorders did not see the importance of the poetic format, not being performers or poets themselves.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hewitt did much of his recording in the 1880s, and he no doubt witnessed some of the ceremonies at that time, but it was not until he was invited to put through part of the Condolence at Oneida in 1917 that he would have had a participant’s appreciation of how rhythmic and public the words were.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; They were transforming an oral text into a written one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If one thinks of the Kayanerenkó:wa as a recited, oral epic matter rather than as transcribed prose, it can be more easily understood as also being a periodically performed event, part of the living cycle of the people, rather than something to be used for legal reference.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;As a public event, in which the recitation is open to correction or discussion, the law becomes the kind of “oral tradition” that Canadian courts will accept. See the discussion of the acceptability of oral tradition in &#039;&#039;Delgam’uukw&#039;&#039; (SCC), &#039;&#039;Mitchell&#039;&#039; (Federal Court, Trial Division and SCC), and &#039;&#039;Benoit&#039;&#039; (Federal Court of Appeal). In the last case, the trial court accepted as oral tradition evidence Chief Francois Paulette’s recollections of his grandfather’s accounts of the treaty making, in which he had taken part. The Federal Court of Appeal rejected his evidence, adopting the standards proposed by the federal witness Alexander von Gernet, on the grounds that the accounts had not been delivered in a public manner.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== One Family ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;If you are one of us you are addressed as a relative&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;“It is common to address every one by some term of relationship, according to their age,” wrote Teyoninhokarawen John Norton in 1816. Norton 1970, 10. Maybury-Lewis (1992) himself begins and ends his memorable book, &#039;&#039;Millennium,&#039;&#039; with his acquisition of a name and family among the Xavante of the Amazon, his initiation into the world of tribal peoples.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; —David Maybury-Lewis&#039;s summary of how tribal peoples view the issue of &amp;quot;membership&amp;quot;—is crucially important to any understanding of the Great Law. From the outset, the Peacemaker&#039;s approach was to create one family, to make everyone relatives. His predecessor, centuries earlier, had succeeded in the first step, by creating the clan system, the extended families. The Peacemaker accomplished two further steps: first, he wove the nations together by declaring that the clans were families that transcended national boundaries; second, he extrapolated the family metaphor upward, so that the nations and their leaders became a single longhouse, a single extended family.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As nations become known to the Haudenosaunee, the relationship is described in family terms: &amp;quot;our nephews&amp;quot; the Delawares; &amp;quot;our brothers&amp;quot; the Ojibways; &amp;quot;our brothers&amp;quot; the English; &amp;quot;our cousins&amp;quot; the Cherokees. Those terms have both social and legal meaning. They imply a structure of mutual respect and obligation. They imply obligations of deference (from a nephew to an uncle, for example) or equality (between brothers, though elder brothers have some privileges). They are not merely terms of affection. When one becomes a relative of the Haudenosaunee—by adoption, for example—one steps into a complex web of protection and duty, rights and obligations.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In the seventeenth century, there are accounts of captured Europeans adopted to replace men who were killed in battle. They told not only of receiving the dead man’s name, but also his family and relationships, being treated as if the deceased had returned to life. Some historians suggest that the intertribal wars of those times were “mourning wars,” in which women encouraged the warriors not to seek revenge so much as to capture adoptees, to replenish families.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Kinship provides a person with a place to stay in a distant community;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;“One of the prominent aims of their first lawgiver . . . was to bind the people together by family ties of relationship, and thus create among them an universal spirit of hospitality, and lasting desire of social intercourse.” Morgan (1851) 1995, 165.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; with a place to sit in council or ceremonies; with providers, allies, and protectors; but also with people to whom one bears obligations;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;One explanation given for today’s reluctance to adopt outsiders is a family’s concern that it will be held accountable for the newcomer’s actions.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; in whose presence one is ashamed if one has erred; whom one must protect and help provide for.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before one wades into the complexities and technicalities of Haudenosaunee kinship, there is one important principle to keep in mind. In a tribal society, it is &#039;&#039;belonging&#039;&#039; that gives a person identity, an existence as part of a collective entity rather than primarily existing as an individual. It is the opposite of the loneliness an individual feels in a globalized, homogenized society. Belonging adds a layer of security as it adds more layers of complex social relationship.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thayendenega wrote in 1801: &amp;quot;The conditions of the confederacy seem to be expressed by the titles given each other as that of brothers and sons, representing that brotherly and filial love which was to guide their conduct to each other—this was further cemented by friendships between individuals of the several nations which was held very sacred;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;He may also be referring to the special relationship now called “medicine friends,” made famous in American cinema as “blood brothers.” Brant’s “special friend” was Lieutenant Augustine Prevost, who was transferred with his regiment to Jamaica in 1772. Brant was heartbroken, and became angry at a missionary who suggested he could take Prevost’s place: there is no substitution. It is a lifetime relationship. In the eighteenth century, there seems to have been no requirement that such a friend be Haudenosaunee.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; in consequence of this they considered themselves as mutually bound to partake in each others good or bad success.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Boyce 1973, 291.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every version of the Great Law of Peace makes frequent reference to family relationships. The rotiyanershon are &amp;quot;brothers&amp;quot; to one another,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Professor Adriano Santiemma of the University of Rome took the terms literally, and assumed they were like European relationships: he maintains that the Peacemaker and Hiawatha were biological brothers, and that Thadadaho was literally their uncle (Vecsey (1988), 108, suggests that Thadadaho and Hiawatha may have been half-brothers). But then, Santiemma (1994) also maintains that the fifty chiefs represent the fifty moons in an eight-year cosmic journey, and that unanimity was a requirement because “one dissenting vote was enough for the chain of cosmic kinship to be interrupted.” Santiemma concluded, on meeting modern Haudenosaunee, that their present mindset bears little resemblance to the cosmic governance of their forebears, as he sees it, since the people he met disagreed with his astrological/astronomical explanations of their history, culture, and laws.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and it is relevant which side of the fire are the &amp;quot;elder brothers&amp;quot; and which are the &amp;quot;younger,&amp;quot; for the elder brothers are the &amp;quot;well,&amp;quot; with the authority to introduce matters into council first. The clan mothers are the &amp;quot;sisters&amp;quot; to the rotiyanershon. People of the same clan are &amp;quot;cousins,&amp;quot; no matter which nation they come from. All the people together are a family: they constitute one longhouse. The clans, which existed before the coming of the law, are an essential part of what weaves the Confederacy together. As Sakokwenionkwas Tom Porter said at the recital of the law in 2013, &amp;quot;we are relatives and family, and family does not hurt each other. They do not make blood shed.&amp;quot; Gibson&#039;s 1912 version confirms: &amp;quot;I decree that a single family we shall become, our various nations. Furthermore, I decree that now it is at one house, from now on you shall all sit down together there, you of the five nations. Moreover, I decree, as to its name, that we shall say &#039;&#039;Kanuhsyuni&#039;&#039;, which means that now there is a single house and a single family, we having united.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 309–10.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The use of kinship terms throughout the Great Law is not just a matter of respect. It is an integral, basic part of how the people view the world in which they live. It is impossible to understand the functioning of this legal system if one ignores or underestimates the fundamental role of kinship in shaping it and keeping it together. Morgan did not turn his back on law when he putatively invented modern anthropology by publishing his study of Haudenosaunee kinship.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Morgan’s first technical paper, sixteen pages long, delivered to the American Association for the Advancement of Science in 1856, was entitled &#039;&#039;Laws of Descent of the Iroquois.&#039;&#039; See Boorstin 1985, 636–46. Morgan eventually concluded that the human world consisted of two main modes of kinship systems: Indo-European and Semitic on the one hand, and everyone else on the other. He also concluded that different races had distinguishing characteristics: all Indians, he asserted, addressed each other by kinship, wore loincloths, and slept in the nude.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; His writing demonstrated one of the lenses through which the people were able to see and construct the world, including their legal system:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Morgan pioneered the study of kinship systems, which became an important branch of anthropology. Anthropologists discovered that tribal peoples tend to see the world through the prism of kinship. Their mental world consists of various kinds of relatives, a view that sometimes extends to encompass all of society. In other words, if you are one of us you are addressed as a relative; if you are not addressed as a relative, you are not one of us. Kinship is then a kind of mental map, a map that differs sharply from one people to another. Morgan showed that you have to be able to read these maps in order to understand how other societies think and live.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Maybury-Lewis 1992, 92.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kinship systems are part of the cultural scaffolding of Haudenosaunee society. They are part of the structure an outsider must understand in order to function within the society or appreciate its laws.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When Morgan set out to explain Haudenosaunee kinship systems, he was laying the foundation for a foreigner&#039;s understanding of the Great Law. It would be pointless for anyone to study the law and remain ignorant of the meaning of the kinship terms used throughout that law—because those terms contain so much of the law&#039;s meaning, as well as its fundamental assumptions about how society works. He wrote:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon an extended examination of their institutions, it will become apparent, that the League was established upon the principles, and was designed to be but an elaboration, of the Family Relationships. These relationships are older than the notions of society or government, and are consistent alike with the hunter, the pastoral and the civilized state. The several nations of the Iroquois, united, constituted one Family, dwelling together in one Long House; and these ties of family relationship were carried throughout their civil and social system, from individuals to tribes, from tribes to nations, and from the nations to the League itself, and bound them together in one common, indissoluble brotherhood.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Morgan (1851) 1995, 57. Colleges in upstate New York, in the mid-1800s, were the birthplace of many of the extended fraternities that are part of the social fabric of post-secondary institutions in the United States. They drew their rituals and inspirations in part from Masonic rites, in part from would-be ancient Greek and Roman influence. When Morgan created and led his own Iroquois League, he was emulating the male brotherhoods that were springing up on college campuses, but trying to find North American roots for the organization. Donehogowa Ely Parker seems to have played along briefly, before returning to being a chief in a real Confederacy.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These relationships, so novel and original, did not exist simply in theory, but were actual, and of constant recognition, and lay at the foundation of their political as well as social organization.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Morgan (1851) 1995, 82.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The League was in effect established, and rested for its stability, upon the natural faith of kindred.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Morgan (1851) 1995, 86.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The cohesive principle of the confederacy did not spring exclusively from the benefits of an alliance for mutual protection, but had a deeper foundation in the bond of kin.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Morgan (1851) 1995, 133.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Just as the Great Law of Peace was constructed by people who saw the world through the lens of kinship and family—and used that vision as a source of strength for the law itself—so treaty relationships with other nations reflect the law&#039;s basis in kinship, are consistent with the law&#039;s processes and assumptions, and must be seen through the same lens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Europeans of the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries were not prepared for their encounter with a legal system that drew its metaphors and ideals from family terms. Some were not prepared to agree that this was a legal system at all: &amp;quot;From the time of first contact between Europeans and Indians the ideology of Europeans has insisted that tribal Indians had no &#039;true&#039; government because Indians ordered their communities by kin relationships instead of the impersonal, bureaucratic European state form. Only Europeans, in this view, had &#039;civil&#039; government, so only Europeans were civilized. Because politics were assumed to be exclusively associated with the civil government that Indians supposedly lacked, Europeans assumed further that Indians had no political history.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Jennings 1985, xiv. Euro-Americans, though, dealt with the Indigenous nations pragmatically, recognizing their governments and entering into formal relations with them. The same Europeans who denied the legitimacy of clan-based societies had drawn many of their own institutions from ancient Rome—a society based on &#039;&#039;gentes,&#039;&#039; or clans. It was almost certainly helpful to the British that many of their representatives and settlers were Highland Scots, to whom the clans were not foreign at all.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One of the first things Morgan noticed was that the Haudenosaunee have more terms for kinship than modern Europeans used.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Since Morgan’s time, even more Euro-American terms of kinship, and their social and legal meanings, have fallen into disuse as North American society moves towards the nuclear family as its essential, mobile, interchangeable unit, leaving the “extended family” behind.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Other, earlier writers had failed to understand the differences between specific kinship terms and used more general European near-equivalents,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Bruce Trigger has noted that the Hurons “did not use kinship terms in the same way that Europeans use them and the failure of French writers to take note of this creates serious ambiguities in their accounts of Huron life” (1976, 46).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; leading to confusion at both personal and legal levels. Fenton stated: &amp;quot;Europeans never appreciated the widespread network of kinship that encompassed the Eastern Woodlands, and they misunderstood the values that Indians gave to the terms &#039;brothers,&#039; &#039;cousins,&#039; &#039;uncles/nephews,&#039; &#039;fathers/sons,&#039; assigning these terms the meanings conventional in Europe. The English and the Iroquois had little difficulty over the reciprocal term &#039;Brethren,&#039; although they missed the nuances of &#039;elder/younger&#039; siblings that were important in Iroquois society.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Fenton, in Jennings 1985, 11. The Europeans readily adopted the notion that the King was the “Great Father” without recognizing that, in Haudenosaunee society, fathers did not command obedience and were not the closest relatives.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What do the terms used in the law mean?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Haudenosaunee languages, a word cannot stand on its own, as it does in English. A reference to a relative must include a reference to the person who is speaking—and often to that person&#039;s gender.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Just as English law often allows an individual to stand alone before a court without reference to his relationships with others, so the English language allows one to speak without reference to relationships, and to speak without deliberate reference to precise relationships. Haudenosaunee languages require one to specify relationships while speaking: they cannot be taken for granted, because one cannot communicate without thinking about them. Thus, in English, one might say, “Let’s go to the store,” without specifying whether the “us” is the speaker and one other person, or several, or which of the several. The difference between the languages lends different meaning to the old joke in which the Lone Ranger says: “Tonto, we’re surrounded by hostile Indians,” and Tonto replies: “What do you mean ‘we’?”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It makes a difference whether the relative is aunt to a male or a female person: the words change. Thus, an older brother of a male person is rohtsi’a; an older brother to a female person is ronwahtsi’a. The requirement for precision is such that there is no equivalent for the vague English term &amp;quot;sibling.&amp;quot; Many Haudenosaunee terms imply a sense of respect rather than power, a sense of care rather than authority.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ihst’a, &amp;quot;mother,&amp;quot; is another example of how Haudenosaunee society&#039;s different approach to relationships is reflected in the terms used in the languages. Kanatawakon David Maracle explains: &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;Ihsta’a&#039;&#039;: this term is similar to that given for &#039;aunt&#039; as it is based on the matrilineal tradition that a woman&#039;s sisters were also considered to be a mother to her children. There is the variation &#039;&#039;Istenha&#039;&#039; used by some speakers to differentiate between the biological mother and her sisters . . . The term &#039;&#039;Yethi’nihstenha&#039;&#039; is often used in place of &#039;&#039;Onkwa’nistenha&#039;&#039; in situations of ceremonial reference or importance, such as in the designation &#039;&#039;Yethi’nihstenha Onhwentsyakekha&#039;&#039; . . . &#039;our mother earth&#039; (lit.: &#039;she is to us mother of the earth&#039;).&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Maracle 2001, 322. Similarly, one would use Yethisótha ceremonially referring to our grandmother the moon, and Onkenisótha (“she is a grandmother to us”) in less formal references.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Blurring the words used for &amp;quot;mother&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;aunt&amp;quot; means, even today, that there is a great deal more &amp;quot;co-mothering&amp;quot; in Haudenosaunee communities than in Anglo North America. It has meant an easy transfer from sister to sister of children when families get in trouble. Informal adoptions even today require neither ceremony nor legal formality. Babies get used to being passed from woman to woman and are comfortable in many arms. Children have many aunties and uncles, not all related by blood or clan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In societies deeply involved with kinship, with metaphoric languages, the roles of relatives are sometimes explained by their synonyms. Thus, rakenahá:a, &amp;quot;he cares for your mind,&amp;quot; is descriptive of the role of an uncle as mentor, teacher, and guide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The language of Haudenosaunee diplomacy with other nations tends to be male, because it is the men who address one another across the fire. It uses terms based on kinship rather than &amp;quot;clan-ship,&amp;quot; because the clans are internal to the Haudenosaunee, while the international family relationships are both internal and external constructs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Christian tradition, it is &amp;quot;Our Father Who Art in Heaven.&amp;quot; Some feminists maintain that the patriarchal Judeo-Christian God has replaced the Goddess of earlier, matriarchal societies, paving the way for centuries of male aggression and paternalism. In Haudenosaunee tradition, a father is not irrelevant, but he is not considered to be one&#039;s closest male relative. He is not of one&#039;s own clan.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In the days before DNA, one could always be certain of one’s mother and her brothers and sisters, but one could not prove paternity. See, in British law, the 1592 &#039;&#039;Case of Swans&#039;&#039;, in which the cygnets were held to belong to the owner of the female swan.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The child&#039;s closest male relative—the man who carries a child around the longhouse when the child gets a name, singing his own atonwa&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;If the child has no mother’s brother, another man of the same family helps: in formal terms, all the older men of the family are the child’s uncles.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; —is the uncle, the child&#039;s mother&#039;s brother.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Seeking simplicity, some contemporary Haudenosaunee have concluded that one&#039;s father&#039;s family was irrelevant in &amp;quot;classical&amp;quot; times, and that only one&#039;s clan relatives were considered &amp;quot;real&amp;quot; relatives. The law does not support this view. While it is clear that paternal relatives were not considered as close as maternal ones, there was a real relationship with one&#039;s father&#039;s family, part of that wide web of relationships that protected and helped each individual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The law makes explicit provision for the link between father and child. According to one of Newhouse&#039;s versions of the law, a father with great love for a child could give that child a name from his family and clan. Today, as familiarity with the law has decreased and a sense of strict matrilinearity has set in, there has been little discussion about a father giving a child a name.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Accentuation of matrilineal ways may be a way of pushing back against the patrilineal systems of the United States and Canada, a way of drawing the line between the societies. There is a constant tension between traditional societies entrenched in protecting the mother’s line as a means of determining membership in the community, and the same societies’ equally fundamental desire to respect the inclusiveness of families. Neither of these values has anything to do with the blood-quantum approach taken by the United States and Canada to determining “Indianness.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Does this patrilinear name replace the child&#039;s original name, or is it intended to be an additional identifier, an additional layer of connection and protection? Is there a special naming ceremony—or is it the same process as any other naming? The possibility of patrilinear names creates opportunity to provide traditional identity to people who lack clans through their mothers, a means of reunifying communities divided by conflicts between Haudenosaunee law and Canadian federal legislation.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Stating that “it was not the children’s fault,” the Haudenosaunee Council at the Grand River in 1995 decided that a person could take their father’s clan and family if they had none through his mother, but that this would not apply to people born after the date of the decision.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most modern Haudenosaunee, while conscious of both extended family and clan relationships, live in single-family dwellings, in nuclear families in which the father is the main breadwinner. As a result, there has been change in Haudenosaunee perceptions of family; statements of relationships in the Kayanerenkó:wa reflect the intentions and realities of a time when the people were living in matrilocal bark longhouses. Some terms used in the law often carry legal baggage that is not reflected in the current society of the people who claim to follow the law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Despite the erosion of Haudenosaunee languages, the rise of nuclear families, and economic change, there remains a strong sense of community and family. It manifests itself most strongly in times of trouble, when people pull together to help those who have suffered misfortune. &#039;&#039;We help one another&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Helping One Another ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is not only the human world that the Haudenosaunee see in kinship terms. Careful attention to the opening thanksgiving alerts the listener to the fact that we humans are related to the entire natural world. In acknowledging and thanking them, the earth is addressed as our mother, the moon as our grandmother, the sun as our elder brother, the animals as our brothers, and the Thunderers as our grandfathers. This social and legal web of protection and obligation acts as a prism for understanding our place, as humans and human societies, in the web of life.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When Haudenosaunee lawmakers say they follow &amp;quot;natural law,&amp;quot; it is not in the sense that philosophers and ethicists understand—that there are constant laws of the universe reflected in nature. Rather, they are saying that the inspiration for principles of the laws of the Haudenosaunee is drawn from the structures and conduct the people see in the natural world around them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the fields, the Haudenosaunee planted corn, beans, and squash together in mounds. They are called &amp;quot;the Three Sisters,&amp;quot; because they help one another. The corn supports the climbing beans. The squash spreads across the ground, and its leaves shelter the roots of the corn and beans and reduce weeds.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Perkl 1998, 280.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Each of the three takes a different set of nutrients from the soil, and each gives back what is needed by the other two.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;White and Cronon 1988, 419–20.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; They help one another.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The help also extends to human nutrition: corn lacks the amino acids lysine and tryptophane, which are found in beans: a people who added bean protein to their corn staple would have more balanced, healthier diets (Engelbrecht 2003, 27).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the forests, the wolves help the deer by culling the weak and the sick, but also by keeping populations down to prevent overgrazing; the deer help the wolves by providing them sustenance. The world abounds with complex symbiotic relationships, with plants and animals that depend upon one another in the web of life. Sotsisowah wrote:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All the beings upon the Earth follow the Natural or Real ways—the ways of the Creation. And all of those beings are related in that they belong to the family of Creation. They support one another. The Oak Tree gives of its oxygen that the Rabbit may breathe, and the Rabbit gives of its flesh that the Fox may live. And the Fox, in death, returns to the Earth from which the Grasses feed, and the Grass gives of its flesh that the Rabbit may live. All things, in their real ways, support life. It is only when things leave their real ways that they cease to support Life—that they break away from the Life Cycle. It is the way of Creation that all things exist in real ways, and in the world of human beings, it is necessary that all things maintain real ways for all life to continue as we know it.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Barreiro 2010, 9.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In family relations with humans, in describing the way government should work, and in explaining the web of the natural world, the Haudenosaunee use several expressions to indicate that &amp;quot;they help one another.&amp;quot; Among the most fundamental is tha’teioneniienawa’khontie,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;“You and I are helping each other, upholding something.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; which embodies the spirit of cooperation implicit in two people upholding something together. Other terms used include kaya’takehuháhtsera, to be helping someone&#039;s body (as in assisting with physical healing) and serihwawá:se, to be helping with an issue or speech (containing orihwa, a matter, issue, or speech).&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;If Inuktitut has many words for snow, and this reflects the importance of snow to Inuit culture, then perhaps the many Haudenosaunee terms for helping indicate the cultural importance of assistance to Haudenosaunee culture.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mutual aid is part of Haudenosaunee society, not just a philosophy of its government. Carol Cornelius explained Haudenosaunee land use in similar terms:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee system of land use was based on the philosophy that the land was given to the people for everyone to use and work together on the land. The cornfields were communal, but it was also allowable for individuals to plant their own individual fields, but they had to continue to do their share of work in the communal fields. A portion of the communal crops were reserved for ceremonial usage. Planting the cornfields was a community event. Parker describes how the women chose a woman leader who arranged the helpers and supervised the planting. An ordinary planting day consisted of planting the field, with the woman leader, the owner of the field, providing a feast of corn soup. All of this work was &amp;quot;accompanied by singing, laughing, joking and inoffensive repartee, and the utmost humor prevails, topped off by a splash in the water to remove dust and fatigue.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Parker refers to this communal work as a &amp;quot;mutual aid society known as &#039;&#039;(in the) Good Rule they assist one another.&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Cornelius 1999, 105.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Helping one another&amp;quot; is a fundamental concept of the Kayanerenkó:wa, and also a fundamental concept of Haudenosaunee society. In the bark longhouse, the two families on either side of each hearth were to &amp;quot;help each other.&amp;quot; It is a relationship that every person would see in operation almost every day. The relationship is extrapolated to the council level: when an issue is brought into the council, the two sets of brothers, across the symbolic fire from each other, help each another deal with the matter. Together, they build a solution. This is in stark contrast to British-style parliaments, where a matter introduced by the government is, by definition, tested and assailed by the &amp;quot;Loyal Opposition.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The opposition was so real that, in the House of Commons, the government and opposition are separated by green carpet “two swords’ lengths apart,” so that the members cannot physically harm one another.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In part, the spirit of Parliament or Congress is adversarial because the opposition parties hope to defeat the government, either in votes or in the next election, and to become the next government. Their criticism is often constructive, but it remains adversarial because it is always tinged with ambition. In the parliamentary system, cooperation is a by-product rather than a founding principle.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Another indicator of the difference between the two systems appears when someone has made a powerful statement. In Haudenosaunee councils, there is an immediate sound of approbation (a deep, sonorous “moan,” sometimes described in historical documents as a “guttural approval,” sometimes as a “yo-hah”). In Parliament, the agreement is individual, not general, and appears in Hansard as: “Some Honourable Members: Hear, Hear,” as they pound their desks, cheer, jeer, and insult one another.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In the councils of the Haudenosaunee, the chiefs are installed for life. The two sides have permanent places, and there is no room for partisan ambition: the Mohawks and Senecas have no desire to become the Cayugas and Oneidas, and could not do so if they tried. There is therefore more room for the spirit of mutual aid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Anthropologists and ethnohistorians have sometimes described this spirit of mutual aid as &amp;quot;reciprocity,&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Richter (1992, 21) affirms that “reciprocity works at all levels of Iroquois society.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and indeed reciprocity is an important element of how it works. But the term falls far short of describing the spirit of good will that motivates and infuses helping each other at all levels of society and the law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Charles Darwin argued in 1871 that &amp;quot;a selfish and contentious people will not cohere, and without coherence nothing can be effected. A tribe rich in the above qualities (&#039;reasoning . . . and foresight . . . the habit of aiding his fellows . . . the habit of performing benevolent actions . . . social virtues . . . and social instincts&#039;) would spread and be victorious over other tribes. . . . Thus the social and moral qualities would tend slowly to advance and be diffused throughout the world.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Darwin (1871) 1989, 146–48.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Traditional Haudenosaunee, hearing these words, would immediately think of their own symbols: the coherence of the five arrows bound together, the emblem of the unity of the Five Nations; and the Great White Roots of the Tree of Peace, advancing the social and moral qualities of the Great Law of Peace to the four directions, throughout the world. They might also consider the crucial difference between coherence and coercion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beyond government, traditional Haudenosaunee society is a web of relationships within and between families and clans, creating relations and obligations of mutual aid and support. The ceremony of Condolence is the culmination of this spirit: the clear-minded ones have the obligation and responsibility to help the downcast ones in their time of need. Mutual aid and support allow society and the entire world to continue to function. Condoling the afflicted and grieving is an obligation: &amp;quot;Wherever it might be that one whose mind is left fresh and untouched shall at once readjust the several things again.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Deserontyon 1784, in Hewitt, 1928, 96.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It was the families, and not the offender and the victims, who conducted the peacemaking that constituted Haudenosaunee restorative criminal law. The presentation of wampum to &amp;quot;cover the grave&amp;quot; has sometimes been called &amp;quot;compensation,&amp;quot; especially since there is a tradition that a woman&#039;s death requires twice as much wampum as a man&#039;s,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The explanation most often given for this today is that a woman represents not only one life, but also the potential to give birth to more life.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; but it is rather an element of pacification:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As all quarrels were generally reconciled by the relatives of the parties, long-cherished animosities, and consequently homicides, were infrequent in ancient times. The present of white wampum was not in the nature of a compensation for the life of the deceased, but of a regretful confession of the crime, with a petition for forgiveness. It was a peace-offering, the acceptance of which was pressed by mutual friends, and under such influences that a reconciliation was usually effected, except, perhaps, in aggravated cases of premeditated murder.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Morgan (1851) 1995.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . . if as warrior kills people, or he rapes a woman, or he steals, as to that, this is what the chiefs should do; they should deliberate carefully, and if they find him guilty,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;We should be careful with the concept of “guilt.” When I was a court worker, in 1970, I found that Oneida people would translate “are you guilty” as “did you do it,” rather than “can they prove you did it” or “do you feel responsibility or guilt for your actions.” In this quote, what is intended is a factual inquiry: did he do it? Or rather, did his mind cause him to do it? Is he responsible?&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; then they will pick the matter up to consider sanctions, first trying to reach agreement for a settlement in order to keep the peace; and if it is impossible to reach agreement between the families—that is the people (lineage) of the guilty one and the other side, that is the family of the person who got killed—if it is impossible to agree, then the chiefs . . . will decide if they will cover it by placing another person there who will replace the one they have lost, the people of his family.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 59. In 1764, the Haudenosaunee agreed to relinquish to the Crown jurisdiction over cases of murder and robbery where the victim was white (Sir William Johnson recognized this as a variance from the original Covenant). Later oral tradition added rape to create the “three matters” handed over to the Crown’s courts.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Iroquoian societies also developed what anthropologists called &amp;quot;mutual aid societies,&amp;quot; more or less formal entities with a practical and economic spirit. Among the Cherokees, they were called &#039;&#039;gadugis&#039;&#039; and were an open and integral part of the way the towns functioned; when the Cherokees adopted some Euro-American technologies, the &#039;&#039;gadugis&#039;&#039; also evolved.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Some Cherokee mutual aid societies served as credit unions for their members. The American Philosophical Society in Philadelphia has, in its collections, a financial record book of a &#039;&#039;gadugi&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Haudenosaunee mutual aid societies tended to be more informal, and certainly less visible to outsiders. Few written records of them remain, yet it is clear that they were part of what helped society run smoothly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For nearly a decade in the latter half of the seventeenth century, according to Haudenosaunee oral tradition, the Mohawks and Oneidas concentrated on fighting the French, and the Senecas and Cayugas provided the two eastern nations with food. It would not be fifty elderly men in Onondaga who would operate the sophisticated, extended network that would be required to accomplish this. It would be a complex but mostly informal system of determined people, working together, in ways that would not have been obvious or even visible to European observers. Vestiges of that system are still functioning in Haudenosaunee longhouses and communities today: they appear most overtly in crises, spontaneously and generously assisting individuals, families and communities in times of need.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In 1990, as the Sureté du Québec and then the Canadian Armed Forces began to tighten their ring around Kahnewake and Kanesatake, carloads of food and other supplies came in from every other Haudenosaunee community, their drivers taking risks in avoiding checkpoints, the spirit of mutual aid powerful and awake in that crisis.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Structure of the Law ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Kayanerenkó:wa can be conveniently divided into two quite distinct parts. The first part is the narrative that describes how the Peacemaker brought his message of peace, power, and righteousness to the people of five nations and persuaded them to abandon bloodshed and adopt peace, order, and good government as their guiding principles. The second part, the &amp;quot;legislative&amp;quot; part of the law, was formulated once the chiefs met in the first council, and describes the form and rules of the government they created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The two parts are inseparable as a description of the legal system. The narrative is not only a story: it describes how the Peacemaker achieved a rational and persuasive dialogue with people who stood in the way of peace, and his methods became living examples for later generations to use. The narrative describes the thinking behind the ceremony of Condolence, the ultimate, compassionate way to restore rationality and the threshold to any lawmaking. It sets out the principles of inclusiveness, mutual aid, generosity, and reciprocity. It confirms family as the foundation of the legal system. The narrative is also a template for the creation of consensus, unity of mind. It sets a path to be followed by Haudenosaunee government in every council and in all dealings with other nations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Those who would seek something more legalistic and less legendary ought to recall that this is a &#039;&#039;constitution&#039;&#039;. That is, it &amp;quot;constitutes&amp;quot; a people and a way of living. As such, it ought not to be a dry recitation of processes and divisions of power between levels of government, but instead ought to embody the people&#039;s dreams and visions, songs and hopes. It ought to reflect the people, as they were at the time of its making, and as they hope&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Until 2016 Canada characterized the United Nations Declaration of the Rights of Indigenous Peoples as an “aspirational” rather than binding document—which allows them to maintain that it does not affect existing domestic laws. Similarly, environmental protocols and treaties are later described as merely aspirational by nation-states that have no intention of meeting their commitments. The United States of America was also one of the last four nation-states to affirm the Declaration.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; to become, within its framework.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The legislative, less narrative part of the law describes the structure and procedures of a system of government. It describes the way the fifty chiefs are divided among the five nations, and how the council functions. It provides rules for eligibility and appointment of chiefs, and the ratification of those appointments. It describes the checks and balances that protect the system against abuses of power. It sets limits to authority and provides for the removal of those who violate the rules or cannot function properly. It provides for the amendment of the constitution, in ways consistent with its original architecture. It describes how foreigners will be dealt with—both foreign individuals and foreign nations, through foreign relations, war and peace, and immigration. The constitution is a real constitution, allocating authority in an organized, thoughtful manner and creating principled governmental structures that are designed to reflect the constant values of its framers while retaining the ability to evolve to meet changing needs. Like the best constitutions in the world, it expresses not only the legal and governmental systems of the people, but also their principles and visions. Unlike most current nation-state constitutions, but consistent with the culture of a people with a sense of the constant presence of the spirit world, it contains warnings about changes and challenges to come.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Both parts of the Kayanerenkó:wa reflect the powerful vision of the Peacemaker—the desire to create a society based on peace and reason that could provide for and protect the coming generations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In some versions, once the Peacemaker and his allies establish peace, the chiefs take over finishing the law, responding to questions from the Peacemaker to create governmental structures. The dialogue reflects the process of consensus building that takes place in a Confederacy Council. In a sense, the chiefs create the protocols of council by performing them in their initial conversations. In other versions, the lawmaking around structures and processes is also the Peacemaker&#039;s work and his gift to the people.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;This is a significant difference between Skaniatariio John Arthur Gibson’s 1899 and 1912 versions.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Without the legislative part of the Great Law, the narrative would be the history of a peacemaking without the stable institutions it needed to continue. It is rare that the person who inspires the revolution is also successful in establishing a secure system of government in the revolution&#039;s wake. It is rarer that such a person shows an aptitude for governing. The Peacemaker did not govern. He left when his work was done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Certainty and Constancy ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Just as not having a good relationship with one&#039;s neighbour might cause one to consider preparing for possible confrontation, having a legal system that contains uncertain elements leaves room for doubts that can blossom into precipitate action, or vacuums in which anger, ambition, or greed can seek lodging. The Kayanerenkó:wa guards against this by providing many constant factors: known building blocks of the law. Constant and predictable factors remove risk and uncertainty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are a fixed number of core families&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Newhouse, seeking to make the rotiyanershon equivalent to British lords, would refer to “noble families.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and a fixed number of rotiyanershon. These men have constant names (titles) and constant roles. Their clan mothers and helpers are known. Each of these people knows what is expected of them. The council fire is in a fixed location. There is a permanent firekeeper: the Onondagas have fulfilled that role for centuries and know what their duties are. The nations have set roles in the procedures of council.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each time a matter is institutionalized in this way, it prevents potential problems. It removes ambition, from both individuals and nations, by limiting candidates and the pools from which they can be drawn.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The “downside” to this is that it can lead to the creation of oligarchies as the society expands beyond the original fifty families. It can prevent people of genuine merit from taking a role in leadership or decision making. One way to reduce the possibility of oligarchy, as we shall see, is the institution of Pine Tree Chiefs. Another is to ensure that there are many functions in the society in addition to those of chiefs and clan mothers. People can be kept busy with the work assigned to them.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It clarifies expectations—so that a person knows what they must do, and other people know what to expect or require from them.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Another example of Haudenosaunee provision for certainty is the way funerary matters are dealt with. For ten days after a death, the family is kept constantly busy with feasts and ceremonies, “letting go” of the one who has just died. The family is expected to perform these certain tasks, this business—and the result is not only that the people cannot dwell on their grief, but also, in the old days, that they could not turn their minds to revenge.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It sets limits to authority.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While the possibility—even necessity—of change is built into the architecture of the Great Law, that architecture itself provides a framework, a set of constant principles to ensure that change is consistent, careful, and conducted so that the certainties are maintained.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Having so many constants also means that radical change, when it occurs, results in total change, not adjustments to existing systems. The Seneca Nation’s adoption of a party system of elections is deeply inconsistent with the consensus government of the Kayanerenkó:wa—as is the elective system imposed by Canada on Haudenosaunee communities beginning in the 1880s.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The Longhouse can be extended, but only in ways consistent with its existing architecture. In this, the symbolic and legal Longhouse reflects the structures that the people would see every day: many of the longhouses that have been examined by archaeologists show evidence of having been extended during their short lifetimes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Having a legal system brought by a messenger from the Creator, though, means that its modern practitioners are often reluctant to effect even consistent change. Traditionalists are often pessimists about the future and optimists about the past, said Mark Twain. The people who maintain the Kayanerenkó:wa are certainly traditionalists. A tendency to focus on details rather than principles, as an aspect of maintaining and protecting the law, and a great sense of conservative caution accentuate an unwillingness to risk change. Many would rather have it said of them that they were faithful to the Peacemaker&#039;s prescriptions than that the changes they made caused collapse. The very constancy and certainty that prevent controversy tend to heighten their reluctance to make necessary changes. Yet change was clearly an element of the Peacemaker&#039;s vision. After all, his greatest accomplishment was change, from a time of darkness and war to one of light and peace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Confrontation Is a Last Resort ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Great Peace emerged from a time of bloodshed and feuding, in which vengeance and confrontation were often the first means of resolving any issue. The processes and structures of the Kayanerenkó:wa changed that. They make confrontation and violence a last resort, by placing deliberate, considered steps in the path of possible confrontations. As a matter of principle, in councils and negotiations, the easiest matters are dealt with first, and the most difficult (and therefore most potentially explosive) issues are approached last, though the commitment remains that what John Mohawk called &amp;quot;the rock hard things&amp;quot; must be dealt with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker placed Thadadaho towards the end of his work, since he knew this would be the most difficult task and would require actual confrontation. He also made sure that, when the confrontation occurred, the forces of peace had become so overwhelming in their physical and spiritual power that there could be no effective response. Thadadaho was not killed: he was transformed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another example of slowing the path to anger is the three requests that are made before any extreme action is taken. An errant chief is asked formally to return to the proper path, and the requests escalate, becoming gradually more public and more urgent.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In an Orthodox Jewish divorce, the husband repeats &#039;&#039;gett&#039;&#039; three times. While this is done in a single sequence today, it may be that the requirement of three repetitions was intended not only to impose deliberateness, but also to impose time for thinking—and rethinking—an important decision.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Only after repeated requests is the chief removed. In the same way, foreign nations are gently and repeatedly asked to join the Confederacy.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The final request could be accompanied by a visit in such force that the offer could not be refused.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The law requires not only a good mind and deliberate thought, but also the taking of specific steps in any situation that could result in confrontation or anger. These steps deliberately slow the people down,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In important councils, propositions would be answered the following day, allowing time for consideration, but also for the cooling of emotions. Visitors would be fed and given a chance to rest before council, so their minds and bodies would be healthy and not affected by fatigue. Another example is the long sequence of required tasks and ceremonies after a death—they keep people so busy they have no time for anger, no time to act while their minds are clouded, for a full ten days.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; compel careful thought, and prevent hasty or passionate actions. In assigning particular tasks or characteristics to each title holder, as well, the structure of the law makes sure that reflection and caution are imposed within the council by its own members. When, in council, one of the chiefs asks whether all sides of an issue have been considered, he may be cautious and rational, but he may also be fulfilling a role set for the man bearing his title five centuries ago. If an issue inflames passions, the council may decide to postpone a decision, putting the matter &amp;quot;under the pillow&amp;quot; until minds have cooled off. Confrontation in council can lead to the Onondagas &amp;quot;covering the fire,&amp;quot; ending the council for the day. Deliberate avoidance of internal conflict cuts both ways: it creates a legal system that avoids internal aggression, but it also makes for a slow process that sometimes avoids difficult, divisive issues. One needs to be reminded of the commitment to deal with the rock-hard things.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= PART III: BRINGING THE GREAT PEACE =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Patterns and Principles in the Narrative ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most versions of the Kayanerenkó:wa can be divided into two parts, the &amp;quot;narrative&amp;quot; and the &amp;quot;legislative&amp;quot;—the first part telling the story of how the law was made, and the second describing how the details of the workings of the government were created. The narrative part of the law discloses a pattern, and the elements of the pattern are first set out in the story of the Peacemaker and the Cannibal. The Peacemaker&#039;s journey is recounted as a series of successful encounters with difficult, powerful, often irrational people. Only after overcoming those obstacles could the law be set in place. Both the narrative and legislative aspects of the story of the law reveal &amp;quot;one protracted effort of legislation.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Morgan (1871) 1997, 127.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At each obstacle in the story of the making of the law, the Peacemaker met a person who was acting irrationally. He met the Cannibal who was killing and eating people; Tsikonsaseh who was encouraging destruction and war; Thadadaho who was ruling through fear; Hiawatha who had become a hermit with his mind clouded by grief. The narrative of the Great Law is a story of the Peacemaker meeting people whose minds are, for one reason or another, not working properly. Often these people are in places that block the path to peace: Tsikonsaseh on the Warriors&#039; Path;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;While the Mohawk words used to describe the dark times are translated as “they were roaming about,” the randomness involved was likely uncertainty about where and when violence would strike, rather than about what path the warriors might take. The uncertainty would increase the terror of the times.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Thadadaho at Onondaga Lake. In each case, the Peacemaker does something to create an opening, a moment of rationality. For the Cannibal, who had lost contact with reality, the Peacemaker resorts to a trick to jolt him back to his senses. For Hiawatha, who had suffered great loss, it is the compassionate ceremony of Condolence. For Tsikonsaseh, the woman who promoted war, it is simple rational persuasion and conversation. For Thadadaho, the last great obstacle to the peace, it is the Song of Peace and all the spiritual power of the united people, while transforming Thadadaho&#039;s political opposition with an offer of political authority and responsibility. To the Seneca warriors, the Peacemaker offers the opportunity to become protectors of the peace rather than its destroyers. A different device is used every time. But the template is the same: to think and observe carefully; and then to approach the irrational or fearful person and do whatever it takes to create a moment or opportunity of sanity, an opening through which the rest of the message of peace, power, and righteousness can enter and take root. In some cases, sweetness and reason are enough. In other cases, it takes trickery, demonstrations of courage, or displays of spiritual power. What is the name for a law with &amp;quot;whatever it takes&amp;quot; at its heart? Pragmatism, perhaps. The Haudenosaunee law of peace assumes that you will not achieve peace. But it assumes that you can reach enough of it to have something to work on so that you can &amp;quot;take the conflict from warfare to a place where, as they used to say, thinking can replace violence, and where the conversation about peace is ongoing.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mohawk 2004, n.p.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Peacemaker met people who were behaving rationally, they were often also lost, frightened, and desperate. They had covered their fires so the smoke would not reveal their location to their enemies. They yearned for peace, but did not know how to get there. The Peacemaker provided a way to deal with the ones who were the sources of the conflict, and enlisted the help and commitment of the right-thinking, clear-minded people: Odatsehte, Tekarihoken, and the other chiefs. He also enlisted the help of the people that he personally had caused to return to their right minds, converts like Hiawatha and Tsikonsaseh.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some of the people he restored to rationality became leaders as well as walking examples of the power of the Good Message. Others, like the Cannibal, simply stopped killing, and went on their way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Great Law created both a technique and an obligation to expand the peace, using the same pragmatic, rational approach: making relatives out of strangers. It enabled and spread the structure of mutual obligation, &amp;quot;helping each other,&amp;quot; that flows from being relatives.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is the other thing the Peacemaker did—and this is a little more complex. He came into a society in which the people already believed that they were related to everything. Their entire world was capable of functioning on the basis of kinship, and kinship was inextricably linked to mutual aid. This included their relations with the natural world—every part of it can be addressed as a relative. Our Mother the Earth, our Grandmother the Moon, our Elder Brother the Sun, our brothers and sisters the animals and birds, our Grandfathers the Thunderers. Within the village, every person could be addressed as a relative. Being related, to these people, meant a dynamic, two-way relationship. It meant reciprocity. It meant, for example, that tobacco and respect would be given to the Thunderers, but they would bring the rain for the crops. The concept that would link all the natural world to all the human world is that &amp;quot;they help one another&amp;quot;—like the Three Sisters, corn, beans, and squash, help one another. Within the village, the people also experienced kinship as not only the way to peace and stability but also as cooperation. Any individual, waking up in the morning, would see another family across the fire in the longhouse from his family. This other family would be relatives, and the relationship between the two families would be that &amp;quot;they help one another.&amp;quot; The Peacemaker politically knocked down the village palisades so that the family relations were extended across the nations, so that everyone became family, the people of a single longhouse. Then, using the same concept, he created a way to extend it even further through the Great White Roots of Peace, so that any person or nation the Haudenosaunee encountered in the world would have a way to become a relative and become part of the Great Peace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In contrast to this is the uncertainty resulting from encountering people with whom one has no relationship at all. How does one relate to them? If one cannot address them as relatives, they are strangers. One does not have any way of knowing how they will behave. No rules apply to them. They are fellow humans, potential friends. They are also fair game for war, since no rules of kinship restrain either side. The edges of the landscape would always shimmer with the uncertainty and danger that came from the presence of unrelated peoples. But the Great Law, and its Great White Roots, provided the technique, the obligation, and the template for transforming unrelated peoples into relatives and for spreading the peace. It contained an explanation of the thinking, the logic, behind proceeding in this way. The narrative part of the Great Law also provided examples of the kinds of devices that would work.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In building a working legal system, the Peacemaker took the institutions that the people already had, and strengthened and expanded the ones that worked well. He spread the brotherhood of clans across all the nations. The chiefs were transformed from local and national figures into Confederacy leaders, and eventually into ambassadors to other nations. He ensured that each family had a voice in the council. He got rid of the things that were causing trouble, if he could. The hunting grounds became a shared bowl or dish instead of a source of friction or competition. He transformed other harmful things: the warriors became protectors of the Confederacy rather than a threat; Thadadaho became a guardian of the processes of peace rather than an obstacle to them. As for the harmful things he could not get rid of, he built safeguards against their influence. If gossip would never go away, he at least provided that the chiefs would have skins so thick it would not affect their thinking, and that they would be deaf to the twittering of the little birds of rumour in the branches overhead. If tempers would flare, he devised council processes to minimize their effect.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker also removed a major source of conflict by bringing a new way for people to deal with death. He had come into a society where the dead were revered and sorely missed, and where their voices called out for revenge against their killers. Mourning could lead to bloody retaliation. Death will never go away, so society needs to learn how to deal with it. With the ceremony of Condolence, he brought a way to put the dead away, out of mind, out of hearing, through a process that brings all the people together, compassionately and with an overlay of peace. Through the law, death was transformed from a source of conflict to an opportunity to reaffirm and re-enact the peacemaking.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The narrative of the making of the law also provides a template for solving social problems. The Peacemaker began by taking his message to people he believed would support it. He worked carefully to build support, and the people he had enlisted helped along the way. By the time of the confrontation with Thadadaho, he was able to call upon the political, moral, and spiritual support of all the people united. The procedure of council—building consensus by having a matter considered in a deliberate sequence, one nation at a time—reflects this approach. One meaning of &amp;quot;Haudenosaunee&amp;quot; is &amp;quot;they are people making a longhouse,&amp;quot; and this recognizes that the work, like the conversation about peace, is always ongoing, never finished. The metaphor of building is reflected in the longhouse as the symbol of the people: it takes collaboration and effort to build it, and then to maintain it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the making of the law, the result of confrontation is not victory, in which the loser is relegated to an inferior status, but unity, in which there are no longer any losers. It is transformation from strangers and enemies to friends and relatives. Where the law describes the conversion of an individual, it may be reasonable to conclude that person brought with him or her relatives and followers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The law contains its own maintenance mechanisms. It provides that it must be kept in mind in order for it to guide the people&#039;s minds, so it contains numerous opportunities for contemporary people and their leaders to re-enact and renew the original thoughts and actions that brought about the peace. Repeating the actions of the ancestors, refreshing the peacemaking, the law becomes not only theirs but ours. Symbols of the law—the fire, the longhouse, the pine tree, the eagle—were things the people would see or use every day, and these reminders would also serve as maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Peacemaker ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker was born on the north shore of Lake Ontario, &amp;quot;in the land which was called Tkahaa’nayg’n, where there are bottom lands, but which at the present time is called Ganyéngeh, at the flint place (i.e., Mohawk place), situated on the north side of the great lake, originally called Sganyadaiîyo (Ontario), &amp;quot;the beautiful great lake.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1899, para. 2. Fenton’s footnote states that “the bottom lands lie around Bay of Quinte and in the vicinity of the present city of Kingston, Ontario.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Most Haudenosaunee agree that the Peacemaker&#039;s birthplace was somewhere on the shores of the Bay of Quinte.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Many people believe that the Peacemaker’s birthplace is within the Tyendinaga Mohawk Territory, and that John Deserontyon and other Mohawks deliberately chose that location in order to be close to the Peacemaker’s original home and to protect it.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He was either a Mohawk&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 2: “This was happening where the Mohawks resided, at the lake shore, on the northerly side of the lake, Lake Ontario.” Upon meeting Thoihwayei, the Mohawk, on the south shore of Lake Ontario, the Peacemaker tells him: “We are the same people” (Gibson 1912, 69).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; or a Wendat (Huron).&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Newhouse and Cusick) 1916, 14. “North of the beautiful lake (Ontario) in the land of the Crooked Tongues, was a long winding bay and at a certain spot was the Huron town, Ka-he-nah-yenh.” Hewitt (1917) claimed that the idea that the Peacemaker was Huron originated in “misunderstanding certain information which the present writer many years ago gave to Mr. Newhouse concerning the early inhabitants of what is now Ontario, Canada.” Later archaeological research indicates that the Wendat or Hurons did indeed live on the north shore of Lake Ontario before moving westward to the Penetanguishene area where they lived when they were first contacted by the French. Wright 1972, 75; Trigger 1976, 164–68.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; His mother Kahetehsuk (She Walks Ahead)&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912. In Gibson 1899, para. 16, she “indeed was named Djigohsaseeɂ (New Face).”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and his grandmother Kaheto’ktha’ (End of the Field) had gone to live apart from other people, for their own safety.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Rather than live on the shore of Lake Ontario, they found a hidden place on the Eagle River, according to Atahu’ta:yʌ Bob Brown in the 2013 recital of the law.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Killing and scalping had become commonplace. The cycle of war seemed endless. Oren Lyons and John Mohawk describe it:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[It was] our darkest hour when the good message of how to live had been cast aside and naked power ruled, fueled by vengeance and blood lust. A great war of attrition engulfed the lands, and women and children cowered in fear of their own men.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;During the 2013 recital of the law, Odatsehte Howard Elijah pointed out that we have not come so far from the dark days: we ought to be ashamed that in every Haudenosaunee community, there is a shelter where abused women and children can seek refuge.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The leaders were fierce and merciless. They were fighting in blind rage. Nations, homes and families were destroyed, and the people were scattered. It was a dismal world of dark disasters where there seemed to be no hope. It was a raging proof of what inhumanity man is capable of when the laws and principles of life are thrown away.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Joagquisho Oren Lyons, to the United States Senate Select Committee on Indian Affairs, December 2, 1987, Washington, DC; S. Hrg. 100–610, 7.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This was a time of great sorrow and terror for the Haudenosaunee. All order and safety had broken down completely and the rule of the headhunter dominated the culture. When a man or woman died, their relatives hired a soothsayer who then interpreted the death as the result of the magical charms of a specific other. The aggrieved family then sought vengeance and a member set forth with the purpose of finding the unsuspecting and arguably innocent offender and exacting revenge. That killing sparked a spiral of vengeance and reprisal which found assassins stalking the northeastern woodlands in a never-ending senseless bloodletting.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mohawk 1989, 219.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The two women lived alone for several years.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Where Newhouse says that Ka-he-nah-yenh was a Huron town, Gibson (1912) gives it as the name of the “place where no one travels, a place where the river forks.” Analysis of the meaning of the name is in Gibson 1912, 3.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; For them, isolation meant safety.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kahetesuk became pregnant. Kaheto’ktha’ was angry, especially since her daughter would not name the father of the expected child. She began to mistreat her daughter, and the two women got along poorly until the old woman had a dream.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereupon she questioned her daughter, saying &amp;quot;Who, then, is the father of the child you two are going to have?&amp;quot; Then Kahetehsuk said, &amp;quot;Mother, I do not know what happened nor how it is,&amp;quot; but the old woman did not believe what she said, her daughter. Thereupon the old woman began to get angry, and said, &amp;quot;Probably, it is not true what she said, Kahetehsuk.&amp;quot; That is how it was, every day and every night the old woman got angry, it seems, when she questioned her daughter . . . that is the way it was for quite some time: both the old woman and her daughter were unhappy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This, then, is what happened when it was night and they were asleep. The old woman dreamed&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In the 2013 recital of the law, the man arrived from the west, and not in a dream.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and she saw a man arrive where they had their house, and he said, &amp;quot;I have a message along which I shall tell you: you should stop the kinds of thoughts you are having. Indeed, your thinking is that it is probably not true what she says, your daughter. This, indeed, is the reason why it is not wholesome, your preoccupation with her confinement and her saying &#039;Indeed, I don&#039;t know where it came from nor how it is.&#039; Now I will tell you what happened to your daughter&#039;s life, for it is true that she does not know what happened. This is the reason why you should now stop: don&#039;t cause your daughter to worry. Moreover, you should ease her mind by apologizing to her.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;“Easing her mind” through the apology, a directed and not spontaneous apology, is a precursor of the ceremony of Condolence.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Actually, a great thing has happened, for he is appointing your daughter to be the instrument of a male child&#039;s birth. He is sending him, the one you all believe is the Ruler,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Raya’takwe’ni:yo, according to Fenton’s 1941 footnote in Gibson 1899, fn. 3, “means the master or ruler of things, the proprietor, or the Chief person in terms of rank or in terms of importance. It is used for head chief, and to designate the place or council as the chief or principal place of meeting where ambassadors and representatives foregather.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and he is coming from the sky above the earth; and he will be born of Kahetehsuk herself. Moreover, when he is born, the boy, I will give him a name; you will say, Tekanawita.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;“And the reason that he shall have such a name is that he will travel about on the earth” (Gibson 1899, para. 6).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; And when you will see him, the two of you will be kind to him, and don&#039;t bother him when, in the course of time, he becomes a man.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;“Moreover when it shall happen that he travels about, don’t either of you two interfere with the purposes of his mind (his intentions), for he is about to accomplish a most important work among mankind” (Gibson 1899, para. 7).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In fact, he is going to be working here beneath and on the other side of the sun. Moreover, once he is born, Tekanawita, he will grow rapidly, and it will not be long before you two will see many unusual things. He will reveal his powers, and all of the people will acknowledge them when they see Tekanawita.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 9.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A boy without a known father is an important figure in several core narratives of the Haudenosaunee. The first of these children were the twins born of the daughter of Sky Woman (though some accounts state that Sky Woman&#039;s own pregnancy also occurred without apparent male participation).&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson’s 1912 version has the Comet—a traveller between worlds—become the father of Sky Woman’s daughter. Later, the twins meet the Turtle, the ruler of the water world, who tells them he, too, is their father.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The twins then proceeded to create many of the plants and animals that surround us on earth; the &amp;quot;right-handed twin&amp;quot; created human beings.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Later accounts, influenced by Christianity, say there was a “Good Twin” and an “Evil Twin.” The earlier versions explain only that one twin was better at making things than the other. With two creative forces, the Haudenosaunee refer to the right-handed twin as Sonkwaiatison, “He Completed Our Bodies,” not as the creator of everything, but as the one who made &#039;&#039;us&#039;&#039;. Some historic missionary records have chiefs suggesting that white people were made by a “different God” than the one who made Indians—but there is no indication that the missionaries understood the implied insult in what they saw as quaint cosmological statements. The Creation story, as Amber Meadow Adams points out, actually describes several creators, not a single one. Sky Woman creates time, or at least brings it into order, and she dances the earth’s surface into being. From her daughter’s body grow corn, beans, squash, tobacco, and berries.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Centuries later, another fatherless child brought the clans and the ceremonies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Though a child derives its clan from its mother, Haudenosaunee meta-narratives, the Creation story and the Great Law, suggest that a person&#039;s father was important, and that fatherlessness was unusual. It would be strange for a people so fascinated with balance (between light and dark, good and evil, male and female) not to seek the balance brought by the mother and father in a family.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While the spirit announced to the grandmother that the Creator had &amp;quot;appointed&amp;quot; her daughter to be the mother of his messenger, there is no suggestion that the Creator was the child&#039;s father. The Peacemaker is not a son of God.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker stands on a long, clear path of Haudenosaunee tradition: fatherless boys have a special connection with the Creator.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Daniel Richter wonders if the Peacemaker was “perhaps a reincarnation of the Good Twin,” and was “a being of supernatural origins” (Richter 1992, 32). Vecsey suggests he is a “reincarnation of Tarenyawagon” (Vecsey 1988, 99). None of the Haudenosaunee versions state that the Peacemaker was anything other than an extraordinary human being, though Parker adds that “the animals loved him” (Parker 1916, 15). Some oral traditions suggest that three of the Four Beings who are messengers from the Creator have been sent to earth with messages, in human form. The first was the one who brought the Four Ceremonies; the second was the Peacemaker; the third was Skaniatariio. Yet Skaniatariio, in his visions, met with all four, and the Peacemaker makes reference to all four. A fourth messenger, with a final message, is yet to come. The four messengers also reflect the four winds, and the four directions.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; They are chosen to bring messages and teaching to the people.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The Haudenosaunee are not alone in according special powers to fatherless boys. In the Celtic tradition, Merlin was fatherless; in the Judeo-Christian tradition, Jesus himself had no earthly father. In their shared fatherlessness, some Haudenosaunee saw Jesus as the Peacemaker; others saw them as similar carriers of the same message of peace. In a matrilineal society, there would be less shame in not having an identifiable father, but one should never assume that fathers, in traditional Haudenosaunee society, were irrelevant.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The grandmother consumed with doubt, shame, and anger is also an archetype: in the Creation story, Sky Woman was angry at her daughter for becoming pregnant,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;There is irony here: in some versions of the story, Sky Woman herself had become pregnant by the Comet, a non-human spirit force. The powerful roles of the grandmothers in both the Creation story and the early years of the Peacemaker’s life reflect the authority of older women in Haudenosaunee society.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and pressed her to identify the man who had slept with her. Like Kahetehsuk, she was not able to say who he was, and this made her mother even angrier. Is the anger the result of the fact that the girl is pregnant, or the result of the woman&#039;s sense that her daughter is not telling the truth, and thus betraying her trust? If the issue is trust and not the pregnancy, the lesson involved is different. Gibson&#039;s 1899 version makes this clear: &amp;quot;Then at that time the old woman become depressed in her mind. She said, &#039;Certainly you do not love me, and the reason is that it is impossible for you to tell me the truth about what I have asked you.&#039;&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1899, para. 4. In Gibson’s 1912 version (1912, 1), “both the old woman and her daughter were unhappy”: for the Haudenosaunee, feelings are contagious, so that it is important to raise up any troubled mind.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Newhouse&#039;s account, the grandmother&#039;s anger at her daughter&#039;s unexplained pregnancy moved from attitude to action after the child was born:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;You refuse to tell me the father of the child,&amp;quot; she said, &amp;quot;and how do you know that great calamity will not befall us, and our nation? You must drown the child.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So then the mother took the child to the bay and chopped a hole in the ice where she customarily drew water and thrust him in, but when night came the child was found at his mother&#039;s bosom. So then the mother took the child again and threw him in the bay but at night the child returned. Then the third time the grandmother herself took the child and drowned him but in the morning the child nestled as before on its mother&#039;s own bosom.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In the 2013 recital of the law, the grandmother tries to kill the baby by drowning him, then by burning him in a fire, then by burying him.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So the grandmother marveled that the child, her grandson, could not be drowned. Then she said to her daughter: &amp;quot;Mother, now nurse your child for he may become an important man. He can not be drowned, we know, and you have borne him without having marriage with any man. Now I have never heard of such an occurrence nor has the world known of it before.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Newhouse and Cusick) 1916, 14. Some other versions have the grandmother making three attempts to kill the baby, including throwing him into the fire. The number three appears in the Great Law several times: the three warnings given to an erring royá:ner, for instance, or the three cries made on the death of a royá:ner, or the three calls of the Peacemaker’s name in the bushes when things are dark and hopeless and it is time for him to return.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The grandmother does not try to kill the infant directly: she relies on the waters to do the job (and in other versions, the fire and the earth).&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In ancient Greece, unwanted babies were left exposed on a mountainside to die of cold and neglect. They, too, were not put to death by clubbing, stabbing, or strangulation. It is as if the killers did not want blood on their hands too directly. Medieval Christian bishops carried maces into battle instead of swords, because they were prohibited from shedding blood.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; But the forces of the natural world refuse to harm him, just as later the Mohawks do not lay a hand on him but rely on gravity and the churning waters below Cohoes Falls to drown him, and once again nature does not injure him.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the case of the twins in the Creation story, the grandmother, Sky Woman, continued to dislike Nikarondase, perhaps because Tawiskaron blamed his brother for his mother&#039;s death.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;One explanation is that she became confused about which twin had cut his way out of his mother’s side, and so blamed Taharionwakon for her daughter’s death.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; She sided with his brother Tawiskaron in many ways, including in the crucial bowl game that decided the question of whether life would continue to exist.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the story of the Great Law, however, the grandmother repents of her hatred for the child—or of her distrust of her daughter—and begs forgiveness from her daughter. The daughter does forgive her, and harmony is restored.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In his account of the Peacemaker’s childhood, Tekaronianenken Jake Swamp would say that he was “born to a woman and her mother,” an interesting English expression of the Mohawk extended family. The expression is repeated in Gibson 1912, when the women visit their relatives.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The story is an important precedent for the thinking behind the Law. The Law requires collaboration between two sides; neither repentance without forgiveness, nor forgiveness without repentance, will restore peace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Gibson&#039;s versions, since the grandmother took no action against the baby, she regretted only her attitude of distrust: &amp;quot;Then when the old woman awakened again she at once told her daughter, saying, &#039;I am thankful that you told me the truth concerning the thing of which you did tell me. Indeed you do not know the source of the child that you are about to bring forth. So now it has been revealed to me in a dream as a certainty. So now I repent my former attitude. Now in truth a most important responsibility has been put on you.&#039;&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1899, para. 8. In the 2013 recital of the Law, the grandmother repented after being visited, not in a dream but in reality, by a man coming from the west.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Chiefs&#039; Version confirms that it was the grandmother&#039;s feeling that she could not trust her daughter, and not the pregnancy itself, that was the source of the anger: &amp;quot;My daughter, I ask you to pardon me for all the ill-treatment I have given you, because I have now been satisfied that you told me the truth when you told me that you did not know how you got the child which you are about to deliver.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Repent&amp;quot; is the word used most frequently nowadays to describe an important concept in Haudenosaunee tradition: the action of a person whose mind has caused him or her to do or think something profoundly wrong, and who is now sincerely sorry. In the Christian tradition, one repents for sinful acts. &amp;quot;Sin&amp;quot; is not an aspect of Haudenosaunee law. The grandmother&#039;s repentance is the first step in an essential part of Haudenosaunee peacemaking; her daughter&#039;s acceptance of that apology is the other side of it.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;This sequence of apology, repentance, and acceptance is the essence of much of traditional Haudenosaunee justice. Its modern manifestations include Akwesasne’s Kanikonhrí:io Council, a Mohawk institutionalization of peacemaking that brings together the families to witness the acceptance of responsibility, the repentance, and the acceptance of the apology. That the participants sit in a circle rather than as two sides is a reflection, in part, of the sentencing circle tradition in Canadian law, and in part of the equality symbolized by the Circle Wampum.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The prediction of the Peacemaker&#039;s future life, in his grandmother&#039;s dream, is not merely a counterpart of the Christian Annunciation.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The comparison is inevitable: in the Christian version, the angel (from the Greek &#039;&#039;angelos&#039;&#039;, “messenger”) appears directly to the Virgin Mary, the mother of the apparently fatherless boy, to calm her fears. Then at Jesus’s birth, angels appear to tell the shepherds of the newborn’s mission of “peace on earth, and good will among men.” In his telling of the Creation story, John Norton notes that he asked an old Mohawk “who in his youth had much conversation with the Roman Catholic Priests, if he remembered the name of the Mother of Teharonghyawago. He answered, “not in our language, but in that of the Europeans, she is called Maria.”” Norton 1970, 91. Teharionhawakon is our Creator, the right-handed twin, “He holds up the Heavens.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Dreams have always been important to the Haudenosaunee as a way of communicating with the spirit world.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Carl Jung drew upon Haudenosaunee treatment of dreams as part of the basis for his theories of psychoanalysis (he also believed that contact with Indians made Euro-Americans distinct in character from Europeans; see Jung 1928). Haudenosaunee believe the person’s entire environment affects well-being. Where Western medicine might treat a broken arm, Haudenosaunee medicine would be more inclined to also consider the person’s home life, work, activities, and other factors that could lead to the problem and might lead to its recurrence. “Health” includes physical, mental, and spiritual health, without clear dividing lines between them.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Why His Name Is Not Spoken ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It may seem odd that a name that is known to everyone&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;What does the Peacemaker’s name mean? Toriwawakon Paul Wallace (1946, 27) suggests that it means “Two water currents flowing together.” He also says Dewaserage William Loft, a Mohawk Wolf Clan chief, interpreted it as “Double row of teeth,” which would indicate that the Peacemaker had a speech impediment that forced him to use others (especially Hiawatha) as speakers, “like Moses used Aaron.” However, Haudenosaunee names are not often literal descriptions of those who bear them during their lifetimes, and no version of the law suggests that the Peacemaker could not explain the message he bore.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; is used so seldom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the Peacemaker&#039;s work in forming the Confederacy and its government was finished, he said it was time for him to leave. According to some people, he went away to the east—and returned some years later with holes in his hands and feet, saying &amp;quot;look what they did to me over there.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Others say that it was not the Peacemaker but the man who brought the ceremonies: “I have been instructed by my father to go across the salt water because there are people living over there who need to hear how to be grateful for the good way to live. They need to hear a message that will bring them closer to their Creator.” And then, when he returned, cut up and bloody, he said: “Don’t touch me. On the (other) side, they think they have killed me.” Native North American Travelling College 2000, 11 (Kanentakeron). In traditional Haudenosaunee communities, one’s father would have little authority: it is therefore very possible that this story of the Peacemaker being sent overseas has Christian roots, especially since most versions neither identify his father nor suggest that the father was divine. “Don’t touch me”—&#039;&#039;noli me tangere&#039;&#039;—the words used by Jesus after his resurrection, seem to confirm the story’s Christian origin.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Most accounts, though, say he went into the earth, covering himself with leaves and bark.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;When Sky Woman’s daughter died in childbirth and was buried, her body gave forth useful plants: potatoes from her feet, tobacco from her head, corn from her heart, beans from her belly. Going into the earth can be a reaffirmation of life, not a denial.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; &amp;quot;I shall now, therefore, go home, conceal and cover myself with bark.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker 1916, 105. Covering himself with bark has led some to suggest that he became or entered a tree. John Buck (Hewitt 1892b, 143) said he went to Sta:te, the home of his father’s people, “there he lies buried, his grave being lined and his body being covered two spans deep with hemlock boughs.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He told the people that he would never be far away: should the darkest times come, when there seemed to be no hope, they should call his name in the bushes, and he would return:&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Winston Churchill suggested, in his &#039;&#039;History of the English-Speaking Peoples&#039;&#039;, that Britain got the leaders it needed at the time it needed them. The Haudenosaunee prophecy may reflect that thinking—that a new Peacemaker, perhaps bearing the name of the first, would come when he was needed most. It could also be literal: many nations have a “culture hero” who left them but never died, and who will return when things are darkest. King Arthur, sore wounded, sleeps in the Island of Avalon. Frederick Barbarossa sleeps under the mountain with his army. Nanabojo, to the Ojibways, is the Sleeping Giant in the harbour of Thunder Bay. Quetzalcoatl said he would return one day, and Cortez took advantage of this to suggest he was Quetzalcoatl himself. Millions await the return of Jesus—and others believe Elvis never died. In one version of the Creation Story, Taharionwakon returns from the Sky World to give people the Four Sacred Ceremonies (Mohawk 2005a, 75–76).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If at any time through the negligence and carelessness of the lords, they fail to carry out the principles of the Good Tidings of Peace and Power and the rules and regulations of the Confederacy and the people are reduced to poverty and great suffering, I will return.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Chiefs) 1916, 105.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[Call on my name in the bushes] . . . if ever the law shall cease to function . . . then the law is nearing its end; and then again it is possible that I will stand there among your people here on earth.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1899, para. 128.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Let my name never be named (as an official of the League). No one shall be appointed to succeed me, as others can advise you; but having founded the Extended-House, a work which no other person could have done, I shall be seen no more of any man.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hewitt 1892b, 143.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That may be why many people tend not to use his name at all, while others use it only at particular times.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;It is possible that in earlier days, the prohibition against using the Peacemaker’s name was even stronger: this may explain why some second-hand writing about the Kayanerenkó:wa mentions only Hiawatha. Because the Peacemaker was not mentioned by name, the two men were blurred in the recounting of the story.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It is not yet time to call his name in the bushes. It would be wrong to bring him back inadvertently. It is also bad luck to misuse his name: &amp;quot;And it shall so happen that when you hear my name mentioned disrespectfully without reason or just cause, but spoken in levity, you shall then know that you are on the verge of trouble and sorrow. And it shall be that the only time when it shall be proper for my name to be mentioned is when the Condolence ceremonies are being performed or when the Good Tidings of Peace and Power which I have established and organized are being discussed or rehearsed.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Chiefs) 1916, 103–5. Just as the authority to name something is a use of power, both spiritual and political, so is the ability to use the name. The Bible contains prohibitions against “using the name of the Lord in vain,” and the Old Testament has several instances in which the Creator’s name is announced with importance. While the Biblical Creator’s name “YWH” is sometimes translated as “I am,” the Peacemaker has a real name, another indication that he was indeed a real human historic figure.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This textbook is an instance in which the law is being discussed. According to the Chiefs&#039; Version, therefore, it is probably proper to use his name in a legal text that discusses the Kayanerenkó:wa, especially when directly citing the law&#039;s various versions. Even so, I find myself reluctant to use his name, or to use it too often. . . . At the 2013 recital of the law, his name was used, and hearing the name used, in public, made it seem new and sparkling. The name had not been worn out with overuse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since the Peacemaker had not died, his name was not to be given to anyone else,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Haudenosaunee practice and tradition is to avoid duplication of names: a name is to be held by only one living person at a time.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and his title in council was not to be given to anyone else. He had no successor, for he did not die.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Morgan (1871) 1997, 131 asserts that the Peacemaker and Hiawatha both “consented to take office among the Mohawk sachems, and to leave their names on the list upon condition that after their demise the two should remain thereafter vacant.” Hiawatha remains an active Mohawk title, held today by a living person, and the Mohawks retain their full complement of nine chiefs. The Peacemaker’s name is not among them.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deyonwe’ton Jake Thomas noted that there is &amp;quot;no Iroquois equivalent for the most often used English alias: &amp;quot;The Peacemaker.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Spittal, in Parker 1916, 118.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Avoiding the use of the Peacemaker&#039;s name has led reciters of the law to the use of a number of substitutes: Hononhshonne:donh, &amp;quot;He constructed the house&amp;quot;; Tandaho’nehshan, &amp;quot;He has no father&amp;quot;; Honekho:wanenh, &amp;quot;He has a great mind.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Modern American “Peacemakers”: the Colt 1873 .45-calibre revolver and the Convair B-36 nuclear bomber.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; They are descriptions, not euphemisms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Peacemaker Meets His Own People First ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boy grew rapidly.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1899, para. 10. In other Haudenosaunee legends, people with special powers grow faster than others, as Sky Woman’s daughter did. In Gibson’s 1912 version, the women visit their relatives before the Peacemaker’s birth. They are asked: “Who is the father of the child you two are going to have?” It is a question interestingly put: the child will belong to both women, not just its mother. And once again, though the society is matrilineal and matrilocal, the identity of the father is important, not only, as we have seen, to the grandmother, but also to the other relatives.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; After a while he asked his mother and grandmother to introduce him to other people, &amp;quot;to see people of our own kind.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 25. Until then, suggests Tehahenteh Frank Miller, he had been “downfended,” sequestered, until he was able to think, speak, and travel for himself. The term “people of our own kind” suggests that there are other kinds of people as well. Gibson occasionally states that it is wrong to kill people of our own kind. Does this mean that it is permissible to kill people who are not of our own kind?&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The two women moved back to the nearest village, where the grandmother announced the dream she had been given.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 15–28. She says: “It is of great importance, the message we are all bringing along.” It is not just Tekanawita’s message. The grandmother’s dream, the mother’s unusual pregnancy, and the young man’s message are all part of the same powerful story and message, and it is brought by all three of them.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the children began walking around, and more especially, when they played, some of the children repeatedly quarrelled, and they wanted to fight. Thereupon Tekanawita prevented them, saying, &amp;quot;You will stop it because it is sinful&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;“Sinful” is probably an inappropriate translation for the kind of moral wrongness involved. While it is said that “sin” makes the Creator sad, the concept in the law does not involve the sense of personal guilt that the Christian, and especially Catholic, sense of the word implies. When the Old Testament God sees sin, it makes him angry. It has been said that “guilt” is what one feels oneself, while “shame” is what one feels around others; and that guilt is peculiarly European and Euro-American, while shame is more powerful in the rest of the world. Where the Old Testament God has the ability to punish sin drastically (with the great flood, or the destruction of Sodom and Gomorrah), the Haudenosaunee Creator does not punish. Not until the time of Skaniatariio in the 1790s does a Punisher appear, and he is distinct from the Creator. The Haudenosaunee Creator seeks to address the problem of sinful killing through his messenger. Is sending the Peacemaker as much as he is willing to do, or as much as he is able to do?&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; for people to hurt one another; you especially, for you are all relatives, and so it is necessary for you to be kind to one another as well as to other people, those you know and those people you do not know; and you should respect them equally—all of the people—you should be kind to everyone.&amp;quot; Thereupon the children were amazed at what Tekanawita was saying. When they got back to where they had their homes, they repeated what he had said, Tekanawita. Thereupon the elders said, &amp;quot;Now, indeed, they are beginning, the surprising events we heard about that he foretold, Tekanawita, for never, in fact, has it been the case that we might hear someone say, &#039;It is sinful for people to hurt one another,&#039; nor has anyone ever said, &#039;You should all respect one another,&#039; nor has someone said, &#039;You should be kind to the people you know as well as to those you don&#039;t know.&#039; Now, indeed, it is coming true, this kind of thing we have heard about.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 26–29.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He spoke to the children, saying: &amp;quot;Now you will listen well: now it is arriving, the Good Message, also the Power and the Peace. Moreover, now it will stop, the way in which matters are proceeding here on earth beneath the sky, such that they cause pools and streams of human blood to flow. Moreover, when it stops and when all the people are kind to one another, people of the same kind, then it will stop, human beings killing one another and also scalping one another, then all are relatives, they becoming brothers, the men, and all the women becoming sisters in future days to come, so that families will continue on.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 30–31.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The elders of the village invited the Peacemaker to meet with them. The young man asked them to prepare a feast and to gather the people together to hear his message. The women would make cornbread and the men would bring game animals. The feast would therefore reflect the collaborative efforts of both male and female, the clearing and the forest, the plants and the animals. In the story of the making of the law, many of the important events are accompanied by people eating together, either as a prelude to bringing their minds together or as a way of confirming that consensus has been reached. In the modern Haudenosaunee world, a feast is an important part of any healing, and a meal an important part of the ceremonies in the Longhouse. Food is medicine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker&#039;s message consisted of three &amp;quot;words&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;matters.&amp;quot; First, the Good Message would stop the killing. Second, the Power would bind the nations together into one. Third, the Peace would make everyone into one related family. It was the same message that he would repeat during his travels—the three words, the Good Message, Peace, and Power. He explained to his own people:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First I will answer what it means to say, &amp;quot;Now it is arriving, the Good Message.&amp;quot; This, indeed, is what it means: when it stops, the slaughter of your own people who live here on earth, then everywhere peace will come about, by day and also by night, and it will come about that as one travels around,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Travelling around in a landscape of peace would stand in stark contrast to the way things were before, when those roaming about were doing so with bloodshed in mind.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; everyone will be related . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . . Secondly, I say &amp;quot;Now it is arriving, the power,&amp;quot; and this means that the different nations, all of the nations, will become just a single one, and the Great Law will come into being, so that now all will be related to each other, and there will come to be just a single family, and in future, in days to come, this family will continue on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now in turn, my other, my third saying, &amp;quot;Now it is arriving, the peace&amp;quot;; this means that everyone will become related, men and also women, and also the young people and the children, and when all are relatives, every nation, then there will be peace as they roam about by day and also by night. Now, also, it will become possible for them to assemble in meetings. Then there will be truthfulness, and they will uphold hope and charity, so that it is peace that will unite all of the people, indeed it will be as though they have but one mind, and they are a single person with only one body and one head and one life, which means there will be unity. Moreover, and most importantly, one is going to assemble in meetings where it will be announced that all of mankind will repent of their sins, even evil people, and in the future, they will be kind to one another, one and all. When they are functioning, the Good Message and also the Power and the Peace, moreover, these will be the principal things everybody will live by; these will be the great values among the people.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then Tekanawita said, &amp;quot;Now that I have finished my task, I will depart.&amp;quot; Thereupon the older people said, &amp;quot;We are accepting the things that we have heard about the Good Message, and Power and also Peace.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 36–41.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Haudenosaunee languages—reflections of Haudenosaunee thought—do not treat the future with the same precision as do European languages. The English distinction between &amp;quot;would,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;could,&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;should&amp;quot; exists as a result of the context of the statement rather than differences in wording. The future is more frequently indefinite, something that &#039;&#039;may&#039;&#039; happen.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;English reflects this, too: “hap” is a chance occurrence, the root of “happening,” but also “mishap” and “happiness.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; As the Peacemaker delivered his message, his absolute certainty—&amp;quot;now it is arriving&amp;quot;—must have taken the people aback. Nobody would normally speak that way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Newhouse asserts that the Peacemaker was abused by his people because of &amp;quot;his handsome face and his good mind. . . . [He] was a peculiar man and his people did not understand him.&amp;quot; &amp;quot;Many things conspired to drive him away for the Crooked Tongues had no love for such a man. Their hearts were bitter against a man who loved not war better than all things.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Newhouse and Cusick) 1916, 14. “Crooked Tongues” is probably a translation of a Haudenosaunee name for a “people of a slightly different language,” like the Attiwandarons.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Barbara Graymont, without citing a source, adds details of her own: &amp;quot;Deganawida&#039;s ideas and actions were noticeably separating him from his people. The Wendots could not understand a man who loved peace more than war. They could not tolerate one whom they had known since childhood presenting himself to them as a prophet.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Graymont 1988, 24. If the Peacemaker and his mother and grandmother had lived apart from the people, they would not have “known him since childhood.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Chiefs&#039; Version, there is no mention of the Peacemaker having tried to bring his message to his own people first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Were the Wendat (Hurons) part of the Great Peace? They did form their own confederacy of four nations, on the southern shore of Lake Huron. They had similar ceremonies and governmental structures. In some historic documents, the Haudenosaunee and the Wendat acknowledge a past relationship: in 1656, for example, the Wendat were being asked for the ominous third time to reunite with the Haudenosaunee, as a Mohawk speaker stated: &amp;quot;Thou knowest, thou Huron, that formerly we were but one cabin and one country. I know not by what accident we became separated. It is time to unite again.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Thwaites 1901, 42:253.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No matter what the version, the Peacemaker was soon done with his own people, either because they had accepted his message and would now be at peace, or because they had rejected it and he hoped to find a better reception elsewhere. He continued to live with his grandmother and mother for a while: if there had been a reliable peace, it is likely they would have moved back among their own people. That they continued to live apart suggests that the peace was not secure, and that they were safer where they had been.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The White Stone Canoe ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker saw that it was necessary that the peace should spread:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It was not long before Deganawii’dah began to travel about. At that time then his grandmother said, &amp;quot;You alone must tell the two of us whether the time has arrived for you to depart.&amp;quot; Then Deganawii’dah said: &amp;quot;in fact understand that I have now already begun to make my preparations. I am looking for something with which I may construct a canoe, and I intend to have myself a fine canoe. For understand that far on lakes and many rivers I will go seeking the (council) smoke of some people, holding my course steadily toward the sunrise.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then the old woman said, &amp;quot;How long will it be, perhaps, before you return?&amp;quot; Then Deganawii’dah replied saying, &amp;quot;I am not able to tell that. So then this shall take place when I shall depart, because then yonder&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;“Yonder” is a word that has become obsolete in most English-speaking societies, but which indicates a distance that is intermediate between near and far. Often people in Haudenosaunee communities will use English terms that have become “archaic” among their neighbours but which reflect the precision or values of Haudenosaunee languages.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; forked tree standing there on the hill top (edge of bluff?) shall be of assistance to us. And then when I shall have gone away, if it becomes necessary for you to know for certain what my fortune is where I have gone, then you will go to that standing tree, and when you will have arrived there you will chop into it; if the blood should flow from it, immediately you shall infer that already misfortune has befallen Deganawii’dah; but if blood should not flow from it, you shall then infer that Deganawii’dah’s luck&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;“Luck” is another word that is used by the Haudenosaunee differently than by their neighbours, though it is hard to define the difference. It is not unusual for people to express sympathy for a death in a family by referring to the “bad luck,” and it is common to refer to a skilled hunter with a good relationship with the animals as having “good luck,” though in neither case does the word indicate chance.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; has been favourable.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1899, paras. 12–13. See also Parker (Chiefs) 1916, 67. Though the Peacemaker confidently announces that peace is on its way, his arranging this way of letting his relatives know his state indicates that he did not view it as a sure thing. In Gibson 1912, 49–50: “In the event that blood flows, it is a sign of this: that his luck will become bad and that they will not function, the Good Message, Power and Peace.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then he began to build his canoe out of a white rock . . .&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Skanawati John Buck told J.N.B. Hewitt that the story of the white stone canoe was actually about Thaharionwakon, the right-handed twin in the Creation story, rather than about Hiawatha. Hewitt 1892b, 131.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then the grandmother said, &amp;quot;How are you going to travel since your canoe is made out of stone? It will not float.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then Dekanawideh said, &amp;quot;This will be the first sign of wonder that man will behold; a canoe made of stone will float.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Chiefs) 1916, 67. Newhouse makes no mention of the canoe being made of stone. In another version, the bark canoe was “amazing” in that it “skimmed so rapidly upon the water” (Gibson 1899, para. 21); it was indeed “swift.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . . they saw a stone boat and paddles of stone. Thereupon Tekanawita turned it right side up, the boat. Thereupon he said, &amp;quot;Examine it, and you will know what kind of a boat I have made here on earth.&amp;quot; Thereupon Kahetoɂkthaɂ and Kahetehsuk examined it, and were surprised at the kind of boat that it was. Thereupon Kahetehsuk said &amp;quot;I love you, my child, but what are you doing in launching a stone boat, for surely, indeed, it will sink beneath the water&#039;s surface, the boat?&amp;quot; Thereupon Tekanawita said: &amp;quot;If it is true that it will sink, my boat, then I also may not survive nor can my work go forward here on earth … Now, indeed, you two will help me as we drag the boat; then, into the water, we will launch it, and you will watch as I get in. You, moreover, will be the first to see this surprising accomplishment, and it is you who are to be witnesses as I take this step&amp;quot;…Thereupon his grandmother and his mother watched it depart, Tekanawita&#039;s boat, with him in it; he was in the boat, paddling swiftly when it left, and in a short time it actually disappeared as he was paddling along.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 55–58.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The white stone canoe reappears (in Gibson&#039;s 1912 version) when the assembled chiefs are ready to confront Thadadaho. The Peacemaker, Hiawatha, and Tsikonsaseh travel across Onondaga Lake in it.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;There is no navigable water connection between Onondaga Lake and Lake Ontario, where the Peacemaker had left the canoe (probably near Oswego). The peace delegations were not coming to Onondaga from the north, in any event. And there is no record of the Peacemaker portaging a stone canoe.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What is the significance of the white stone canoe? Its whiteness symbolizes the purity and peace of the messenger it carried. Perhaps the stone symbolizes permanence and indestructibility. Perhaps it is a statement of spiritual power, because it is a floating contradiction: stones, almost by definition, are not boat-building material, because they sink. The majority of the discussion in the versions of the law about this canoe, though, is simply that it is a remarkable thing, a memorable thing. Nobody had built a stone canoe, before or since.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;After his beheading in AD 44, the body of Saint James was said to have been placed in a stone boat sailed by two disciples through the Mediterranean and the Straits of Gibraltar, to land in Galicia, where his relics were removed to the shrine in Compostela. In Mi’kmaq legend, the Creator, Glooskap, has a stone canoe (Paul 2007). In Anishinaabe legend, as recorded by Schoolcraft (1856, 223), a young man borrows a white stone canoe to travel to the land of souls.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The coming of the man in the white stone canoe would be remembered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the watercraft ready, the young man was prepared to leave. In Gibson&#039;s 1899 text, the canoe is of bark, and the leave-taking is emotional:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then Deganawii’dah said, &amp;quot;Now, then, both of you must assist me, you two must launch my canoe. So you both right this upturned canoe for me.&amp;quot; So at that time the mother and the grandmother of Deganawii’dah righted the canoe which was one of pure, white birch bark, and they dragged it and launched it on the water. Then Deganawii’dah said, &amp;quot;So now indeed we three must separate. Don&#039;t you two then let your minds mourn. We shall all meet again at some future time.&amp;quot; Then again bidding them farewell he said, &amp;quot;Now!&amp;quot; (O:nénh).&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;As in many Indigenous languages, Mohawk has no word for “Goodbye.” O:nenh ki wahi, or “Now (soon), indeed” is the usual form of leave-taking. In the 2013 recital of the law, Sakokwenionkwas Tom Porter translated the leave-taking movingly, as the mother said: “My son, I love you, because I raised you, and I will love you forever.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Just then his mother who indeed was named Djigohsaseeɂ (New Face) added, &amp;quot;Surely there where you will go, there too I will be.&amp;quot; At that time he got into the canoe; so then he now departed, holding his course toward the sunrise.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1899, para. 15–16.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the Bay of Quinte, near the place the Peacemaker is said to have been born, there is a strip of white rock near the water&#039;s edge that is said to be the underwater reminder of the place where the white stone canoe was launched. At that place, the water leaves small eddies, just like the short-lived trail that a canoe would leave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Man Without a Nation, Without a Family ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker grew up in isolation. He grew up without an extended family. The stories of the law do not mention his relatives, only his mother and his grandmother. Perhaps his lack of a set of cousins, the absence of uncles and aunts, had taught him how important a broad family is to survival. His plan for peace was based not on his own experience, but rather on what his own experience had shown him he lacked. Perhaps his seclusion allowed him time to think, pray, and prepare: &amp;quot;Without a tribe of his own, he was neutral. He had never been involved in any of the killing. Because no man&#039;s hand was against him, he could become a peace messenger among the tribes without disgrace or accusation of cowardice.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Graymont 1988, 26.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker had no relatives among the peoples to whom he was bringing the word. He was not implicated in seeking revenge. He had no one to mourn. His family had not been involved in the killing, so no one would seek revenge against him. As a complete outsider, he was neither a threat nor a victim. His relatives were not around him, so he had no protection—but nor could it be said that he was acting in his family&#039;s interest. The outsider, with no political or family baggage, was the ideal peacemaker. John Mohawk described all peacemakers in the same terms as this man: &amp;quot;The people who are going to manage that, who are going to lead the way out of that jungle, those people can never lie. They have to be completely honorable, all the time. They can&#039;t take sides. They have to be neutral. They have to be peacemakers. Peacemakers aren&#039;t people with an agenda. They don&#039;t come to your country to take your forest. They don&#039;t come there to kill your buffaloes. They&#039;re there to end the violence. That&#039;s all. So they have to be completely honorable, completely honest.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Sotsisowah John Mohawk, “Peace Talks,” KUNM radio, November 25, 2005.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The outsider was also the most vulnerable person, the one whose death would result in the fewest consequences for the killers.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;There is no record of the Peacemaker’s clan. When some elders are asked about this, they reply: he belongs to everyone. Similar thoughts were expressed in respect of the sons of Princess Diana after her death in 1999: they had become the children of the nation; they belonged to everyone. When someone is chosen as Thadadaho, it is said that he ceases to speak for or represent his own clan, but belongs to everyone.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; &amp;quot;[A stranger is an enemy] Then the men said, &#039;Perhaps it would not result in good if they should see you, for possibly they would kill you on sight, because they do not know you?&#039;&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1899, para. 22.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a culture of revenge with no concept of forgiveness, there would have been a tendency for people to avoid travel,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;This, for example, had been the situation in Papua, where people avoided travel between valleys for fear of ambush, and where hundreds of languages developed in isolation from one another. In northeastern North America, the advent of agriculture and of this culture of fear and revenge was also marked by a radical change in trade; it seems there had been a more vigorous trade in earlier times.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; to avoid the risk of being killed. For a stranger to appear alone in those days would have itself been remarkable. It would have aroused curiosity. It would have created an opportunity, an opening: &amp;quot;The word &#039;&#039;stranger&#039;&#039; denotes a living embodiment of that which is &#039;&#039;strange&#039;&#039;—from the Old French, &#039;&#039;estrange&#039;&#039;, extraordinary. Thus, the stranger functions as an unexpected messenger who can embody or mirror what is extraordinary within us, what is possible but yet unlived.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Nepo 1995, 17.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Mindless Warfare ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Dark Times into which the Peacemaker was born involved cycles of war, bloodshed,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Some versions blame the bloodshed on undisciplined young people, whose minds are restless—nithotiyén:sas ne tehonnatstikahwenhátye, “the young ones who are exploring about continually.” The theme of curious young people uncovering matters that they should not, even graves, is echoed in the words of the Condolence. The young, whose minds are not seasoned, can be influenced to support peace, but are particularly susceptible to be drawn into anger and war. In the 2013 recital, Sakokwenionkwas Tom Porter said that the Peacemaker knew he was going to bring his message to a “merciless people.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and revenge so dark and deep that nobody could remember how, or when, or why they had begun.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker, travelling swiftly, arrived at the mouth of the Oswego River, at the southeast end of Lake Ontario. There he found a timorous hunting party: people who had left their village because of the strife there,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In the 2013 recital of the law, Sakokwenionkwas Tom Porter said “they were too mean . . . they kill each other.” A few Mohawk families leaving a town that has become violent or strife-torn is part of a pattern: Akwesasne was formed by families from Kahnawake in 1749; Wahta was created by families from Kanehsatake in the 1870s; Kanienkeh in the 1970s and Kanatsiohareke in the 1990s are further examples.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; but who were also engaged in the practical activity of gathering food. He told them to return to their settlement, to announce the good tidings.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Chiefs) 1916, 67, 83.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moreover he had journeyed some distance when suddenly at a distance he saw human beings moving about at the lake shore, so he directed his course there. Now in a very short time he beached his canoe there. Then he got out. Then he conversed with those men he had seen. Now then Deganawii’dah said, &amp;quot;Where do the people reside.&amp;quot; The men replied saying, &amp;quot;Toward the sunrise (eastward).&amp;quot; Then Deganawii’dah said, &amp;quot;Indeed then it is a fact that no people lives here?&amp;quot; Then the men replied saying, &amp;quot;No&amp;quot; [&amp;quot;there are none.&amp;quot;] Then Deganawii’dah said, &amp;quot;So then what is the reason that you are stirring about here?&amp;quot; The men replied saying, &amp;quot;Actually we are fugitives.&amp;quot; Then Deganawii’dah asked saying &amp;quot;What is the reason that you are running away, for surely there is nothing amiss now?&amp;quot; The men said, &amp;quot;Understand that it so happened that where we lived our village was destroyed. So really we don&#039;t know the state of affairs there.&amp;quot; Then Deganawii’dah inquired, &amp;quot;Who are these people who have destroyed your village?&amp;quot; The men answered, &amp;quot;It is indeed that person who continually harms us named Dehohsaheh’hwa, He whose house obstructs (the path).&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Fenton (Gibson 1889, fn 13) suggests that a person whose house blocked communication within the symbolic Longhouse was “an obstructionist or saboteur of government.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Then Deganawii’dah said, &amp;quot;Now as for that, from now on that kind of work shall stop. Indeed understand that such an intention was not in the mind of the Creator of the earth and the sky-world. Moreover it is also my aim now to put a stop to the killing of one another, that too should cease. This is the reason that I am now traveling. So now you all must return home, go back there to the place where you all set out (which you abandoned).&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1899, paras. 17–20. The scattered people returning home is a recurring theme in the Kayanerenkó:wa, but it is also a theme in the eighteenth century, when the Haudenosaunee were spread from the Mohawk Valley to beyond the Ohio, and in the late seventeenth century, when the villages of the north shore of Lake Ontario were abandoned in a periodic strategic withdrawal. Consolidation and expansion seem to have been themes of Haudenosaunee history.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is not mere allegory. If the causes of the warfare had been known, a rational and powerful person like the Peacemaker would have sought to identify them, analyze them, and address them. Instead, he faced mindless warfare, without any discernible cause or origin. To stop the cycles of bloodshed, he could not go to their root. He had to address the symptoms first instead, to create the pause in the slaughter that would &amp;quot;allow the conversations to take place.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Sotsisowah John Mohawk saw peace as a process, and conversations as the medium by which the process worked. The conversation can begin only when there is a lull in the fighting, a pause in which the voice of reason can be heard.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this time of bloodshed, the women and children were &amp;quot;made poor,&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Odatsehte Howard Elijah, Great Law Recital, Oneida, 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; because the men who bore the responsibility to protect them were instead threatening their safety. The poverty is not a lack of prosperity: it is a poverty of spirit, a sadness, a loss.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Peacemaker and the Cannibal ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker&#039;s first challenge, after landing on the southeast shore of Lake Ontario,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In Gibson’s 1912 text, the Peacemaker deals with the Cannibal after he has persuaded the Mohawks to accept his message (72–95).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; was his encounter with a monster—a man who had become an eater of human flesh.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Abler 1980, 309–16, Engelbrecht 2003, 44. What Abler sees as evidence of cannibalism is in part the archaeological evidence of the desiccated cadavers of the elevated winter graves being stripped of their flesh before being buried in a communal dead feast. But he also provides some convincing historical evidence.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; &amp;quot;This man was a cannibal, and had left the settlement to which he belonged for a long time and lived by himself in an isolated place.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Chiefs) 1916, 70.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Joseph Campbell wrote that a monster, in the mythology of most peoples on earth, is a creature that cannot distinguish what is real from what is not. Heroes, he says, do not attack the monster&#039;s strength—for monsters are endowed with great physical or spiritual power, too much for the hero to take on directly. Instead, heroes show their ingenuity and power by attacking the monster&#039;s weakness. Thus, Jack tricks the giant into falling down the beanstalk to his death. Hansel tricks the witch into thinking that the twig is his skinny finger; he tricks her again into looking into the oven, then kicks her in to her death. Rumpelstiltskin is tricked into saying his name. In Haudenosaunee myth, the Flying Head is tricked into eating hot coals, thinking they are roasted chestnuts, and the Stone Giant is tricked into drowning in the river.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Bruchac 1985, 161, 184.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Human beings have no great speed, no fangs or claws or strength. They have a great mind as their most powerful weapon. The greatest heroes, in every culture, are the ones who demonstrate how that tool is used best.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In John Arthur Gibson&#039;s 1899 version, it is Hiawatha who is the Cannibal, and after his conversion to reason he becomes the Peacemaker&#039;s collaborator. In the Chiefs&#039; Version, the Cannibal is Thadadaho,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Chiefs) 1916, 69–70. Thadadaho appears early in some versions as the personification of all forms of obstacle and evil. In these versions, the changes in him take place in stages, and he is not completely transformed for the good until he is confronted directly, at his home, by all the chiefs and clan mothers together with the Peacemaker.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; though this does not really fit into a logical sequence. After all, if the Cannibal becomes a messenger for the Good Mind, then he should not backslide and become its greatest obstacle afterwards. More detailed versions tell of Thadadaho&#039;s slow descent into madness, at the same time as his ascent to Onondaga leadership. The latter is inconsistent with him becoming a hermit cannibal. In another version, the Cannibal is Tekarihoken, who not long afterwards is encountered again as a leader of the Mohawks, and later becomes their first sachem&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Native North American Travelling College 2000, 20. “The Peacemaker told Tekarihoken that because he was the first man who had accepted the ‘Great Law of Peace’ he would make him the first ‘Sachem’ in the Mohawk Nation.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; (as, in the 1899 version, Hiawatha becomes a Mohawk leader along his path of bringing peace). This, too, is unlikely. The Cannibal may be more of a symbol than a person: unlike most other personages in the story of the peacemaking, his original name is never mentioned, and the Peacemaker does not give him a new name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Perhaps the source of the confusion is that both Hiawatha and the Cannibal had left their communities and were living alone, in isolation. If the result of the Peacemaker&#039;s contact with the Cannibal is that the man&#039;s mind is completely changed for the good, then the Cannibal is not Hiawatha, who is found by the Peacemaker living alone, trying, in his grief, to raise up his mind again. The Peacemaker does not lift up the same person&#039;s mind twice. Hewitt suggested that Hiawatha was actually two different people, the Cannibal and the mourner.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hewitt 1907b, 537–39.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Contrast this, though, with Gibson&#039;s 1899 version, in which the Cannibal is (or becomes) Hiawatha, and years later, as a Mohawk leader, suffers the tragedies that drive him alone into the forest. One problem with that is that it prolongs the Peacemaker&#039;s efforts, since in the interval between the conversion of the Cannibal and the Condolence of Hiawatha, the latter&#039;s daughters would have had to grow up.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In this narrative, many children seem to grow very quickly.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The point of this encounter is that the Cannibal&#039;s mind is &#039;&#039;completely&#039;&#039; changed. John Arthur Gibson&#039;s 1912 version avoids the controversy by not naming the Cannibal, and that is probably the cleanest approach. This is the first demonstration of the Peacemaker&#039;s ability and desire to cause people to abandon irrational behaviour. Hiawatha, Thadadaho, and Tekarihoken are each examples of other men converted to the Good Mind by the Peacemaker. He uses a different approach for each of them. The Cannibal, probably, is just a cannibal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Skaniatariio John Arthur Gibson&#039;s 1912 version is detailed and structured:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After Dekanawidah had departed in that direction (south) he came to a house belonging to a cannibal who had his house there. Then Dekanawidah went close to the house. Then, when he saw the man coming out,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In the 1900 Chiefs’ Version, the Peacemaker first sees the Cannibal carrying a human body into the lodge.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; departing, sliding down the hill to the river, and dipping water, thereupon Dekanawidah hurriedly climbed onto the house to the place where there was a chimney for the smoke to escape; he lay down on his stomach and looking into the house he saw that the task of breaking up meat and piling it up had been completed. Then the man returned, and he was carrying a drum with water in it. Thereupon he poured it into a vessel, put meat into the liquid, and hung the vessel up over the fire until it boiled. Moreover, the man watched it, and when it was done, he took down the vessel, placing it near the embers. Thereupon he said &amp;quot;Now indeed it is done. Moreover, now I will eat.&amp;quot; Thereupon he set up a seat, a bench, thinking he will put it on there when he eats. Thereupon he went to where the vessel sat, intending to take the meat out of the liquid, when he saw, from inside the vessel, a man looking out. Thereupon he moved away without removing the meat, and sat down again on the long bench, for it was a surprise to him, seeing the man in the vessel. Thereupon he thought, &amp;quot;Let me look again.&amp;quot; Thereupon he, Dekanawidah, looked again from above where the smoke hole was, again causing a reflection in the vessel, and then the man, standing up again, went to where the vessel sat, looked into the vessel again, saw the man looking out, and he was handsome, he having a nice face. Thereupon the man moved away again, and he sat down again on the long bench, and he bowed his head, pondering and thinking, &amp;quot;I am exceedingly handsome and I have a nice face; it is probably not right, my habit of eating humans. So I will now stop, from now on I ought not to kill humans anymore.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In the Chiefs’ Version, the wondrousness and greatness of the reflection, not the beauty of the reflected face, causes the Cannibal to ponder: he says, “I did not know that I was so strange a man. My mode of living must be wrong”. . . . Then he arose, went to the kettle and looked into it again, and he saw the same object—the face of a great man and it was looking at him. Parker (Chiefs) 1916, 70.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Thereupon he stood up again, went to where the vessel sat, picked up the vessel with the meat in it, and then he went out, sliding straight down the slope beside the river and near an uprooted tree he poured out the vessel full of meat.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Something that will not be seen again is placed in the hole left by an uprooted tree—like the weapons of war later in the story of the lawmaking. But, unlike the Peacemaker, the Cannibal cannot put the tree up again.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Meanwhile Dekanawidah hurriedly climbed down again from on top of the house, and went to where he had gone, the man carrying the vessel containing human flesh. Just then, he having ascended the top of the hill, the one holding the vessel, the two met. Thereupon they both stopped, and the man said, &amp;quot;We two are meeting; where do you come from? We are strangers; what is your name?&amp;quot; Thereupon he began to speak, saying, &amp;quot;Really, it is true, we are strangers; it is the first time we have met. Now, moreover, I will tell you that the place I came from is the other side of the lake, and as to me, my name, indeed, is Dekanawidah.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The Chiefs’ Version repeats what may well be a reflection of Masonic ritual (many of the chiefs were Freemasons). The Cannibal asks the Peacemaker “who are you now speaking to me?” and the Peacemaker replies: “It is I who came from the west and am going eastward and am called Dekanawidah in the world.” The Masonic recognition sequence involves one man remarking: “I see you have travelled,” and the other responding, “Yes, from east to west.” Parker (Chiefs) 1916, 68, 70, 71.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Thereupon he said, &amp;quot;I will ask you what that is, that vessel you are holding?&amp;quot; and the man said, &amp;quot;It is surprising what happened: I was just about to take my meat out of the liquid to make a meal of it, when I examined it to see whether, indeed, it was done. And this: when I stood up next to the vessel, I looked into the vessel and I saw a man looking out. Now then, I went back to the long bench and sat down again and then I felt astonished at what was happening, for never had I looked and seen that kind of thing. Thereupon I thought &#039;I will repeat it and look again into the vessel.&#039; Thereupon I stood up again and moved over next to the vessel, and I stood looking over where the meat was cooking in the vessel, and I saw the man looking out again; he was handsome, very handsome. Thereupon I unhooked the vessel, and placed it beside the fire. Then I sat down again on the bench, pondering, and thought, &#039;It is an amazing thing that I, indeed, am handsome, very handsome.&#039; Thereupon I decided, &#039;Now I will stop eating humans, and now I will stop killing people.&#039; Thereupon I again stood up, picked up the vessel, came out of the house and went near the hill to a tree that had uprooted itself; there I poured out the human flesh; so now I am stopping that work of mine. Only this, the vessel, that is what will remain, and I will use it for cooking meals.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereupon Dekanawidah said, &amp;quot;Now I understand everything; so now you will return, going to the village to tell your people, &#039;Now it is arriving, the Good Message, and also the Power, and also the Peace.&#039; Now, indeed, you have ended your killing of humans.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 78–89.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker observes the Cannibal from hiding for a while, before deciding what to do. This is prudent. Dealing with a deranged murderer is always dangerous, and the times themselves were black and perilous. In several other instances—notably later in his journeys when he eavesdrops on Hiawatha&#039;s efforts to create a way to raise up grieving people&#039;s minds—the Peacemaker also seems to sneak up on people. He watches and listens and then &#039;&#039;thinks&#039;&#039; before acting. A man alone, a stranger without family or friends, walking unannounced into any situation, would be vulnerable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Observing before acting is not merely prudent; it is also a Haudenosaunee cultural trait.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In schools, Euro-Canadian teachers often express the wish that their Haudenosaunee students would be more “aggressive,” answer questions more quickly, move faster. But the children have been taught to watch carefully before acting, and also that if an older person asks a question, it is impolite to answer quickly, because the questioner—and therefore the question—deserves respect and the benefit of thought.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; As well, it is a sign of respect: repeatedly, in the story of the making of the Kayanerenkó:wa, the Peacemaker and Hiawatha do not rush to accept an invitation, but instead smoke or deliberate or think before doing so. To react in haste would be insulting, because it would imply that the proposition was not worthy of much thought.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Chiefs) 1916, 78.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The encounter attests to the Peacemaker&#039;s ingenuity and power of mind (and extreme handsomeness and peacefulness of visage).&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;There is a thread in the law, and in the culture, that appearance is linked to moral quality. The Peacemaker’s handsomeness and goodness are linked, as are Thadadaho’s twisted physical appearance and badness. In some versions of the law, physical deformities—lameness or blindness—disqualify a person being a chief.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Mainly, though, the story of the Cannibal serves as a metaphor, a statement of a fundamental principle of the Kayanerenkó:wa. Sotsisowah explains:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He began discussion in the bark hut of a man who was about to cut up a victim for the dinner pot. It was in that environment he offered the idea that all human beings possess the power of rational thought and that in the belief in rational thought is to be found the power to create peace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
His words required considerable thought and understandably much discussion before his first student could take ownership of the ideas. He was not saying that human beings do not possess the potential for irrational thought. He was saying that &#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039; human beings possess the potential for rational thought.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unless we believe that all human beings possess rational thought, we are powerless to act in any way that will bring peace short of the absolute destruction of the other. We cannot negotiate with irrational human beings. In order to negotiate with other human beings, we must believe in their rational nature. We must believe they are not suicidal or homicidal by nature, that we can reason with them. Thus the first principle that will bring us the power to act is the confidence in the belief that all people are rational human beings and that we can take measures to reach accord with them.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mohawk 1989, 220.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no person, and no mind, that is so far gone that it cannot be changed by the power of the Good Message. If the person is acting irrationally, the tools that the law provides can bring reason back again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Cannibal sees the Peacemaker&#039;s serene face and thinks: &amp;quot;That could be me,&amp;quot; another fundamental principle of Haudenosaunee law and society is being enacted. The Peacemaker is, in effect, leading by example, showing the Cannibal that peace is possible, just as later generations of chiefs would set their own examples of conduct for the people.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker is also a risk taker. Other people would have avoided the Cannibal, for obvious reasons. He confronted Thadadahoh, whose ill will could have killed him. He faced Tsikonsaseh, who no doubt had her own armed guardians. To bring peace, again and again he acted with boldness. The Peacemaker&#039;s combination of personal courage and personal humility is especially admired among the Haudenosaunee.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;These are qualities that propel modern ironworkers, for example.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker and the Cannibal, in Skaniatariio&#039;s 1899 version, become collaborators and close friends. It happens thus: when the Cannibal has thrown out his stew of human flesh, he meets the Peacemaker:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now he who was standing there said, &amp;quot;It is true that just now I am seeking a congenial friend.&amp;quot; Then he said, &amp;quot;Come, let&#039;s both go back inside.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At that time they both went back inside the house and now the homeowner set the pot in its accustomed place. Then the homeowner said, &amp;quot;Be seated over there across the fire, here on this side I will sit down. You who visit my house (my guest) and I shall sit with the fire between us (occupy opposite sides of the fire); and the reason that this shall occur is that I have a new experience (message) to relate. Therefore I will relate it. So as owner of the house (host) I shall begin and I will tell it clear to the end. Then you in turn shall relate your message to the end. For surely, perhaps, you must bring some message.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At that time Deganawii’dah now said, &amp;quot;You and I entirely agree. Come, therefore, let it start.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1899, paras. 41–43.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this version, it is the Cannibal who describes some of the basic rules of procedure and seating of any council.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The host speaks first, and is uninterrupted; the visitor replies in full. They sit across the fire from each other.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Either this process was already well-known to the people who became the Haudenosaunee before the Peacemaker brought the law, or this meeting of monster and lawbringer is another instance of collaborative lawmaking. Collaborative lawmaking, between the Peacemaker and Tsikonsaseh, between the Peacemaker and the chiefs, between the Peacemaker and Thadadaho, is the hallmark of Gibson&#039;s 1899 version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Cannibal describes the events that have led to his conversion. He then turns his mind to making things right:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Then I thought I should see someone, that maybe one would visit my house and that he would tell me perhaps what I should do to make restitution to those minds I had offended by killing the people belonging to various bands (tribes), so that there might be a just peace again. Then I arose and took up the pot and went out from the house and descended the river bank, and there where there is an uprooted tree&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Is this a fair description of a particular place—or a precursor of throwing the weapons of war into the pit created by the uprooted pine tree? Like the weapons, the meal of human flesh would never be seen again, like the covered bones of the dead after the Condolence. And in the Haudenosunee story of Creation, the uprooting of the Tree of Life is the precursor of the coming of death and the fall of Sky Woman to earth. Uprooting trees—and putting them back—is an essential image of Haudenosaunee meta-narrative and ceremony.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; I poured out the contents of the pot I carried, namely the flesh of a dead human being. Then I climbed the bank. I was surprised now, nearby you were walking along. At once my life rejoiced when I saw you. I thought &#039;That really fulfills my mind&#039;s desire, to meet a friend&#039;. So now then I have finished. Now then in turn it rests with you. Moreover I in turn will listen to whatever message you bring.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then Deganawii’dah stood up now and said, &amp;quot;Truly, what has happened this very day is indeed a wonderful story. Now you have changed the very pattern of your life. Now a new frame of mind has come to you, namely righteousness and peace. Right now you are seeking for someone to come tell you what you should do in order that peace shall prevail in the divers places in which you have done injury among mankind.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1899, para. 44–46.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker is replying in precisely the manner in which a skilled speaker moves matters along in council. He stands up—as speakers in council do, to be seen and heard, and out of respect—and he repeats the essence of what he has heard, to acknowledge it and to confirm that he has not misunderstood its import.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Since clear communication and understanding is essential to lawmaking and peacemaking, repeating the words back provides an opportunity to correct misunderstandings before they get worse. If there is an error in understanding a statement, it is gently corrected before the issue is fully considered and answered.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; But, just as a speaker in council uses his reply to add another layer towards consensus, he adds to his account of what he has heard, in a way that presages his own message. In this way he links together his host&#039;s story and his own, &amp;quot;bridging&amp;quot; the thinking between them: in Hewitt&#039;s translation of Skaniatariio John Arthur Gibson, the key indicator of this is the word &amp;quot;moreover&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Now moreover I will tell you (what to do). This is the very message that I bring. I too am seeking a certain man (a friend) who would work with me, he and I would collaborate to advance the matter of Righteousness and Peace. Now indeed you and I have met, our two minds meet on the level (are quite agreed). Therefore this shall come to pass. So then you and I shall work together at preparing food. Accordingly you shall go for fresh water and you shall dip it from the river as it flows along.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In making medicine, one always gathers water from the river in the direction of the flow. That is, one works with the water and its power, not against it. The Cannibal is assigned the task of bringing water partly as a means of purifying himself.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; As for me, I will go hunt for a game animal.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Kontírio, those animals that are destined to fall or give themselves to us, are a distinct kind of animal in Haudenosaunee languages.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Moreover it is enough that when you will arrive back that you shall have the water hot by the time I shall return. Then at the same time you and I will work together at boiling the meat. At that time you and I will merge our two minds.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At that time Deganawii’dah sat down again. Then the houseowner now stood up and said, &amp;quot;Exactly that is what I have in mind. Therefore it shall come about as you have outlined it.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;“Outlined” is an unusual choice of words, but appropriate for Haudenosaunee councils, in which the matters agreed upon are not always decided with precision, nor do they need to be. What they decided together was clear enough, and detailed enough, that they could proceed.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then Deganawii’dah arose and said, &amp;quot;So now in fact let us two depart. You shall go to fetch water, and I will go to hunt.&amp;quot; At that time the two set out.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1899, paras. 47–49.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The two men—all alone in the lodge—are nevertheless following the process of a formal council. Nor is it insignificant that the Peacemaker assigns separate tasks for each person: that is still a typical Haudenosaunee process for getting things done between meetings. The first thing they plan together as friends is a meal. Haudenosaunee tradition requires meals: &amp;quot;feasts&amp;quot; to mark transitions in life, as an integral part of ceremonies, including healing ceremonies, and as a prelude to councils.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Kaientaronkwen Ernie Benedict suggests that Jacques Cartier’s friends at the place he called Stadacona were really saying “Satekhón:ni”—“Let’s eat.” In the bleak uncertainty of the “Oka Crisis” of 1990, Sotsisowah John Mohawk set out as his fundamental rule of Haudenosaunee negotiations that “first, we eat: we don’t know when we’ll get another chance.” The two men—Peacemaker and Cannibal—preparing a meal together is a beginning of their collaboration.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Today, a feast shared by family and friends is an essential part of Haudenosaunee medicine, often used to assuage restless spirits, protect against those who send harm, and reconcile those who harbour hard feelings. Just as grief or fatigue are distractions to clear thinking, so is hunger. The meal is also a milestone: the Cannibal has changed what he eats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before the Dark Times, Haudenosaunee men lived by hunting. When times of war and revenge-taking came, they began to kill people; they became warriors. In that sense, the Cannibal was the ultimate warrior. When the Peacemaker taught him that he had to go back to eating venison,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hayadaha Richard Hill points out that diet has a profound effect on human behaviour, and that changing what we eat can change how we think and act. Again, as the Haudenosaunee are fond of saying, food is medicine.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; he was also saying that the men had to turn from war back to hunting, their proper role. It was not just a change in what he ate: it was a fundamental change in how he led his life.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker and the (former) cannibal continue to work together: their collaboration in preparing the meal and the Cannibal&#039;s repentance lead to the creation of some of the fundamental symbols and ideas of Haudenosaunee law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, the Peacemaker had killed a deer with quite large antlers. He then suggested to the former cannibal that &amp;quot;we two shall remove them and these antlers shall be placed here upon humans.&amp;quot; This would have been the beginning of the idea of deer&#039;s antlers as the emblem of chieftainship.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Together, the two men clarified some of the principles by which Haudenosaunee society lives. The Cannibal had killed and killed. Now he shared responsibility for burying the dead. Today, funerals bring the people together. So does the annual ceremony for the dead. So do the many times the ancestors are invoked, mentioned in other ceremonies and speeches. In Haudenosaunee thought, society is not only the people who are alive today, but also the dead and the unborn. By joining the Cannibal in burying the dead, the Peacemaker was providing another lesson in rejoining civil society.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The Peacemaker and the former cannibal went back to the place where the human remains had been dumped out of the pot, and they went to the edge of a high riverbank and dug a trench, and placed the body in it, and covered it with earth. The Peacemaker then said: “Now we two have finished it. So thus it shall continue to be in the future days to come that each individual shall be equally bound (responsible) to care for the body of a man.” Gibson 1899, para. 57. At the 2013 recital of the law, at Oneida, it was stated that the Peacemaker told the Cannibal to clean up his house, and all the bones that had been strewn around the house—a precursor of the way the bones of the dead would be hidden as part of the Condolence. Just as seeing the positive symbols of the peace—the eagle, longhouse, and pine tree—would remind people of the law, so seeing human remains and disorder would place them in a dark frame of mind.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Through their conversation and actions, the two helped develop the role of reason and &amp;quot;changing minds&amp;quot; in bringing peace:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then Deganawii’dah said: &amp;quot;Here in fact is the place where your wisdom (reasoning) lies.&amp;quot; At that time he placed his two hands on the houseowner&#039;s head and then passed them down over his face, and Deganawii’dah said, One (the Master of Life) has brought you mind (reason). Now moreover you and I will look into the pot.&amp;quot; At that time the two looked into the pot, and for a fact the two men saw that their two bodies appeared identical in the reflections from the depths of the pot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then the owner of the house said, &amp;quot;It is wonderful that you and I have similar forms (appearances).&amp;quot; Then Deganawii’dah said, &amp;quot;In fact it is true that he (the Master of Life) has endowed us both with reason (mind).&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1899, paras. 54–55.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As men&#039;s bodies are similar, so are they equal in their ability to reason, the Peacemaker was saying, and so are they equal in their potential to come within the peace that he was building. We are all human together, and therefore all potentially brothers and sisters. We have all been given minds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker passing his hands over the former cannibal&#039;s face presages Hiawatha&#039;s combing out Thadadaho&#039;s hair and straightening out the kinks in his body. The Peacemaker may have been removing the physical manifestations of the twisted nature of the Cannibal&#039;s mind, &amp;quot;rubbing him down.&amp;quot; By making the former cannibal look again at the reflections in the pot, the Peacemaker was both explaining the trick he had used and transforming that trick into a lesson about the nature of humanity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The story of the Peacemaker and the Cannibal is the first in a series of demonstrations of a basic principle of the law: that all humans are capable of rationality. They may be &#039;&#039;behaving&#039;&#039; irrationally, but if we are to have peace with them, we must find a way to address that behaviour and to restore the Good Mind in them. Otherwise, we will not have peace, since we will always have to be prepared to defend ourselves. We therefore have an obligation to help one another. When we find a person who is behaving irrationally, we have both an interest and an obligation to create peace through reason, for it is our peace as well as theirs. As Sotsisowah John Mohawk would say, we have to negotiate with their humanity. If there were any doubts that the lessons to be learned from the Peacemaker&#039;s conversion of a single demented individual could be extrapolated to address a whole people, the Peacemaker removed that doubt in their next conversation:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then the owner of the house said, &amp;quot;What do you mean when you say &#039;Justice and Peace&#039;? What will occur when these shall be accomplished?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then Deganawii’dah said: &amp;quot;By these I mean that this very day you have changed the disposition of your mind. And moreover it shall come about that all mankind shall change the disposition of their minds now prevalent. That means that this reformation shall begin at once, and Justice and Peace shall increase continually.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1899, paras. 59–60. The statement that “Justice and Peace shall increase continually” is a forerunner of the idea that the Great White Roots of Peace shall spread these principles to the four directions, across the earth.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Announcing Peace ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Peace is coming, announces the Peacemaker. The bloodshed and the warfare and the revenge-taking are ending. Peace is inevitable. It is on its way. In most versions of the law, the Peacemaker is careful not to say that &#039;&#039;he&#039;&#039; is making or bringing peace, but rather that peace is arriving. He is only its herald, not its author. In later accounts, and especially Euro-American accounts, this crucial humility is missed.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Similar modesty appears in most of the New Testament, in which Jesus refers to himself most consistently only as the “son of man,” rather than as the son of God.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Indeed, the word and idea of a &amp;quot;Peacemaker&amp;quot; is likely not Haudenosaunee, and not contemporaneous with the arrival of the Great Peace. Peace is coming as surely as the sunrise, Tekanawita assured the people. They had to believe it, and believe in it. Both culturally and linguistically, his use of terms of absolute certainty was part of the power of the message. To a people whose sense of the future is expressed grammatically in indefinite terms, the clarity and confidence of the words were stunning. To accentuate this certitude, he linked it to another: that the sun comes up every day:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moreover, at present it is young as the day is when the sun is rising and lights up the earth; just as it causes warmth all over the earth and for all the people, we will help the people of every nation.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The sun reappears in the ceremony of Condolence. The grieving people’s faces are cast down, and their clear-minded friends remind them that they must believe that the sun will come up again tomorrow, and that their families and children still need them. The sun represents hope as well as constancy.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; And just as all of the many things that grow on earth and sustain the people, the newly arriving Great Law will come to shed light on the minds of the people, the elders and the younger people, everybody, even the children, and this is what you will work at: everyone shall become related to one another, so that it will become a single family consisting of every tribe; and they will be kind to one another, all of the people; and this is what will unite them: the Good Message, and the Power, and the Peace.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 127–29.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By staying focussed on the message of peace and the impending peace itself, rather than upon the messenger, the Haudenosaunee avoided becoming adherents to a messianic religion. Instead, the Kayanerenkó:wa, and not its bringer, became the Way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The counterpoint to this message is not a denial, but an impatient, almost pestering question: in Gibson&#039;s 1899 version, Thadadaho repeatedly asks, Is it here yet?&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Why would Thadadaho keep asking this? Perhaps because the Peacemaker had met with him earlier, telling him that “I aim to prepare your mind (promise) for what shall happen so that you shall know that there shall come a day when I shall come with Hiawatha. And that will surely happen. We shall discuss together matters of Righteousness and Peace. At that time this man (stranger) replied, ‘When will this be…?’” (Gibson 1899, paras. 30–31). By 1912, and in the Chiefs’ Version, some of the contradictions and difficulties surrounding the role of Thadadaho are gone. The story is more cohesive if the killer is not Thadadaho, and if he is not both an obstacle to peace and impatient for it to arrive.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; His persistent question suggests that the people trapped in the cycle of bloodshed yearn to emerge, even as they maintain it. The question comes from the most unexpected source. The reply that it is still coming, still on its way, still being built, is part of the lesson that things take as long as they take; that one must have the patience to do things properly. It remains true that the peace is still, and will always be, being built.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;A theme of Haudenosaunee meta-narratives is the tension between impatience reflecting an immediate need, and the patience required to do things right. Amber Meadow Adams points out that tension in the Creation Story, a tension between the need to eat and survive right now, and the need to allow crops to mature, to store seed for the future, and to prepare foods carefully. It is the tension between the survival strategies of hunters and horticulturalists, and between Thaharionwakon, who is patiently preparing succulent corn, and his grandmother, who casts ashes on that corn because he will not share it immediately. “Is it here yet?” is properly answered with “Be patient. It is surely coming.”.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Skaniatariio John Arthur Gibson’s 1899 Version ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Skaniatariio John Arthur Gibson&#039;s 1899 narrative, dictated to J.N.B. Hewitt, follows a different pattern than others. The Peacemaker does not bring a complete message. He announces the Three Words, and then engages in a series of conversations and collaborations with the people he meets in his travels. His first collaboration is with Tsikonsaseh. His second and greatest is with the former cannibal Hiawatha. The constitutional aspects of the law result from later discussion among the chiefs, with the Peacemaker asking questions and the chiefs replying. It is almost like a bilateral Socratic conversation, with the Peacemaker each time guiding the flow of the discussion towards the structure he was seeking to build.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hiawatha and the Peacemaker create parts of the law through a combination of prophecy—the Peacemaker explains things to Hiawatha that will take place&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The Peacemaker predicts that Hiawatha will join the Mohawks, will marry the Chief’s daughter, and then will lose his family and exile himself in grief. The Peacemaker also makes predictions in dealing with Tsikonsaseh and Thadadaho; and generally, his vision of the law and the Longhouse can be called a prediction, as well. The ability to predict the future—to &#039;&#039;see&#039;&#039; the future—is supernatural (and is also a trait shared by other fatherless men of various cultures).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and then they happen—and suggestion and dialogue with the people they meet. This version reflects the back-and-forth nature of council proceedings, and also the way that Haudenosaunee decisions are not unilateral, and not one person&#039;s ideas, but rather the result of collaboration, cooperation, conversation, and thinking together. People are more likely to support and spread ideas if they believe they were among the originators of those ideas, the makers of the narrative. The Peacemaker acts as moderator as well as prophet. The Peacemaker is able to predict—but not prevent—misfortunes, and this is an indicator of his special powers. He is more of a catalyst, less of a lawbringer. He carries ideas, not stone tablets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tsikonsaseh: The Women’s Side ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker pursued a deliberate strategy of seeking out the very worst people, to show that even they could be converted to peace and goodness by the power of his message.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mohawk 1987, 10–17.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Again and again, he is told about a person who is feared, hated, or just dangerous, and he immediately finds that person and begins the conversation of peace. Sometimes it takes several meetings, spread over months and even years.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two sides to everything—night and day, old and young, good and bad—and so there are to all things a male and a female. Once he had dealt with a male monster—the Cannibal—and the grieving man—Hiawatha—the Peacemaker then turned to the female side.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In Gibson’s 1912 version, the Peacemaker deals with the Cannibal and Tsikonsaseh after bringing the Mohawks to support the message, but before condoling Hiawatha.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; A woman was keeping a house on the Warriors&#039; Path&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Sotsisowah John Mohawk, drawing on Seneca oral tradition, believed that Tsikonsaseh was a Neutral or Attiwandaron, with the Warriors’ Path running between Haudenosaunee and Huron country.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and was actively encouraging men to fight and kill one another. Her house lay along the path; just as later in the story, Thadadaho&#039;s location on the path made him an obstacle to the peace, so Tsikonsaseh&#039;s house permitted her to facilitate the conduct of war.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In the Federal Court trial &#039;&#039;Almrei v. Canada&#039;&#039;, I learned of Afghan “guest houses,” which the Government of Canada considered to be places that encouraged and fostered conflict because they would welcome all visitors, including active warriors. As places where fighters could congregate, they were suspected of being staging and planning areas. Some guest houses were well known as Al Qaeda quarters.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In some traditions, though, this woman was already an influence for peace, the Peacemaker&#039;s female counterpart, even as she lent sustenance to men along their path to make war:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So then thereafter the nations of them that were Oweh&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Ón:kwe—“original”; onkwehón—“original people.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; called the Great Woman, Yegowaneh, but through all the generations the Great Woman&#039;s name was Ji-kon-sa-she, the Lynx. Now in the territory of the Cultivators there was no war. Bands of warriors passed from east to west and from west to east through the paths of the Cultivators and delivered peace belts to Yegowaneh. So likewise, bands of warriors passed from south to north and from north to south through the territory of the Cultivators and delivered belts of peace because the Great Woman was the Mother of Nations. She would provide food for the War Captains and then exhort them to follow the paths of peace since all men are brothers who are Oweh. It was therefore said, &amp;quot;the path of war runs through the House of Peace.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker 1919, 45–46.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A woman living alone in a time of warfare and bloodshed probably also had strong spiritual power,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Though numerous early writings, and some of J.N.B. Hewitt’s work, refer to spiritual power among the Haudenosaunee as orenda, and some of the explanations are complex, there is both little mention of orenda as a factor in the law and little discussion of it today in modern Haudenosaunee communities. It may usefully be compared to &#039;&#039;mana&#039;&#039; in Maori law, as a concept of spiritual power that has no European equivalent or clear translation.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; perhaps even a reputation for witchcraft.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Witchcraft, in the Haudenosaunee sense, is a term applied to the work of a person, male or female, intended to harm others through the misuse of spiritual or spirit power. While some people use the term “bad medicine,” other thoughtful people say that the source is not potions or rituals, but rather the focused direction of ill will against another person. It implies the harmful use of the forces of the natural world. Generally, it is expected that this will return to harm the person practising the witchcraft. In Europe, the extended war of the Catholic Church against witchcraft was often directed against herbalists, practitioners of pre-Christian religions, and generally against those accused of using supernatural (rather than natural) powers. As well, in Europe, the majority of those accused of witchcraft were women.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; She had a great power of persuasion: the Peacemaker determined to transform that power for the good:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then Dekanawidah also said . . . I shall visit the west first. I shall visit there the house of this woman, Tsikonsaseh. The reason why I shall do this (go and visit this woman first) is because the path passes there which runs from the east to the west.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then after saying these words Dekanawidah went on his way and arrived at the house of Tsikonsaseh and said to her that he had come on this path which passed her home and which led from the east to the west, and on which traveled the men of blood-thirsty and destructive nature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then he said unto her, &amp;quot;It is your custom to feed these men when they are traveling on this path on their war expeditions.&amp;quot; He then told her that she must desist from practising this custom. He then told her that the reason she was to stop this custom was that the Kariwiio or Good Tidings of Peace and Power had come.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Chiefs) 1916, 71.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tsikonsaseh had been encouraging, supplying, and feeding the warriors. No good reason is provided for her doing so. As in the case of the Cannibal, one issue to be addressed with the coming of the peace is that people must change what and how they eat, or what and why they feed others. There is a tradition that Tsikonsaseh tried to poison the Peacemaker. Tsikonsaseh offered the Peacemaker what appeared to be a delicious meal. What he saw in the bowl, though, was a mass of writhing worms. He refused to eat this, and asked her to prepare him a proper meal. She did so, as part of repenting her evil ways and converting to peace.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Control over food is crucial to many societies. The women’s role in providing food, as Tsikonsaseh did, can be seen as an exercise of authority rather than subservience.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Part of the transformation was of the path itself: with her acceptance of the Good Message, the great east–west path of the Longhouse&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The present route of the New York State Thruway follows the Great Path rather faithfully. See Morgan (1851) 1995, 44–45: “This route of travel was so judiciously selected that after the country was surveyed, the turnpikes were laid out upon the Indian highway, with slight variations, through the whole length of the State. This trail not only connected the principal village of the Iroquois, but established the route of travel into Canada on the west, and over the Hudson on the east.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; changed from being the Warriors&#039; Path and became the path of peace depicted on the Hiawatha wampum, joining the nations together.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Gibson&#039;s 1912 recollection, after the Peacemaker changes the mind of the unnamed cannibal, he proceeds to reason with Tsikonsaseh:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereupon Dekanawidah departed and he arrived at the waterfalls on the easterly side of the river where she had her house, a lone female. Then Dekanawidah said, &amp;quot;As to you, I believe, this is your home.&amp;quot; Thereupon the woman said, &amp;quot;Indeed, it is I who have this house.&amp;quot; Thereupon Dekanawidah said, &amp;quot;What is your name?&amp;quot; and she said, &amp;quot;As to me, indeed, my name is Tsikonsaseh.&amp;quot; Then Dekanawidah said, &amp;quot;you are indeed the person who has done a lot of work in relation to the warpath. Furthermore a path passes through here and this is how they cross over here, the warriors. As to these, repeatedly when they show up here, you share food with them; indeed, repeatedly, when they finish eating, they go on to kill people and also to scalp them. And when these warriors return, they stop here again, and again you feed them, doing so repeatedly, and you help both sides, those living to the west and to the east. So now you will stop; now, indeed, it is coming, the Good Message, also the Power, and also the Peace. Now, moreover, you will depart and towards the east that is where you will go. On the third day, indeed, you will become a peace chief and a leader for the Good Message, the Power and the Peace.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 90–93.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker offered Tsikonsaseh political authority within the League (becoming &amp;quot;a peace chief and leader&amp;quot;) in exchange for her support. It was pragmatic to do so, and consistent with the approach he later used with Thadadaho and with the Seneca warriors. In each case he recognized ability, talent, and possibility, and instead of seeking to destroy a threat, he succeeded in transforming it into a power for peace. He also used the power of logic and persuasion, the power of reason and the Good Mind. She was not naturally irrational: by promoting war, she was just &#039;&#039;behaving&#039;&#039; irrationally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The crucial role played by Tsikonsaseh in the formation of the League illustrates the need to address both the male and the female side, and to keep them in balance.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Barbara Graymont, without citing a source, states that once she was persuaded to become an advocate of the peace, the Peacemaker gave the woman the name “Jigonsasee, or New Face, because she reflected the New Mind,” putting her past behind her (Graymont 1988, 25). Most other versions state that this was the woman’s name before she met the Peacemaker. The name can also mean “Fat Cheeks,” a term used to describe the lynx, which has led some to suggest that she was of the Erie or Cat Nation. Tom Hill says there is a legend that Thadadaho married Tsikonsaseh once he was transformed, the snakes combed from his hair, his limbs straightened, and his mind made good.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; She does not travel with the Peacemaker during his work with the nations, but she reappears towards the end of his work to add her powerful voice to the conversion of Thadadaho. Without her, without the women&#039;s voice, the work of peace would have failed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Gibson&#039;s 1899 version, Tsikonsaseh is the name of the Peacemaker&#039;s mother. But in that case it is likely that there is a second Tsikonsaseh, the great clan mother, Mother of the Nations,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;According to Seneca tradition, her name becomes a title, as her people become part of the Haudenosaunee (Parker 1919, 46). Thus, it was entirely possible for her to be of the Erie or “Cat Nation.” Historically, the Eries lived west of Niagara. They were absorbed by the Senecas, and another Tiskonsaseh, generations later, was the leader of a peace village near the Genesee River in Seneca country.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; with whom he discusses, and begins to formulate, the structure and laws that will bring peace. It is this Tsikonsaseh who helps him refine his ideas, and who suggests the women&#039;s role in the law—and the Peacemaker accepts that suggestion. By 1912, Gibson names Kahetehsuk as the Peacemaker&#039;s mother, but still refers at one point to Tsikonsaseh as his mother, as well:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At that time Deganawii’dah said, &amp;quot;Now moreover I will go on (continue traveling)(continue on my way).&amp;quot; The men replied saying, &amp;quot;Something which you might begin by doing is to visit the &#039;&#039;goyaanehgoo’nah&#039;&#039;,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;“The great female title holder or chieftainess, or matron, or clan mother, is the head of a clan and household in Iroquois society.” Fenton, in Gibson 1899, fn. 15.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; the great matron whose house stands not far away.&amp;quot; Then Deganawii’dah said, &amp;quot;Who is it? What is she named?&amp;quot; The men replied, &amp;quot;She is the one people call Djigohsa’hseh.&amp;quot; Deganawii’dah replied saying, &amp;quot;that is true, indeed&amp;quot; . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And so when he arrived at the place where her lodge stood he saw a woman; then he said, who is the owner of the lodge standing there? The woman responded saying, &amp;quot;I myself.&amp;quot; Then he inquired further, saying, &amp;quot;What then are you called?&amp;quot; She said, &amp;quot;Indeed, as for me, Djigonhsah’seh is my name.&amp;quot; Then he said, &amp;quot;She too is the one I am looking for.&amp;quot; Djigonhsah’seh now said, &amp;quot;Who then are you? From what place do you come?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then he replied saying, &amp;quot;In this direction from the north side of yonder beautiful lake&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;“Beautiful Lake” translates as “Oniatariio,” now Lake Ontario.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; I have come. As for me, I am the one who is named Deganawii’dah&amp;quot; (At once now she recognized him as her own son. Truly now they both were satisfied).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then at that time Djigonhsa’seh said, &amp;quot;Come, therefore, relate then the nature of the message which you bring.&amp;quot; Now then Deganawii’dah said, &amp;quot;The message itself which I am bringing is—&#039;&#039;ga:iwi’yoh&#039;&#039; (justice and righteousness); &#039;&#039;ske:non&#039;&#039; (peace), and &#039;&#039;ga’shasdeen’shen&#039;&#039; (civil authority).&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now the woman (his mother, &#039;&#039;honoo’ha&#039;&#039;) said, &amp;quot;That too shall come to be, and first of all you shall stop (remain) here. And in the first place I will prepare food. And when it is cooked (I have it cooked, ready) then at that time you and I shall eat, indeed we two will eat together, and the reason for this is because the nature of the message which you bring is indeed very important and I am pleased with it.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now then Deganawii’dah said, &amp;quot;I approve (accept – take hold of? –) of the inclination of your mind (proposal). I also am pleasantly surprised (pleased).&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1899, paras. 24a–27.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Why would the Peacemaker be pleasantly surprised that his mother would accept his message and show him hospitality? Why did she not already know the message he was carrying, since he had explained it to her before he left home? This woman was not his biological mother, but rather someone who had declared her kinship with him because of his mission. By adopting his message, she had also adopted the man himself. &amp;quot;Mother&amp;quot; is not a term of biology, in this context, but rather an address of respect. Their stay together is an opportunity for dialogue, a two-sided, back-and-forth conversation in which the Mother of Nations provides her own ideas and support, extending her protection to the man with the message. Rather than provide food for the warriors, she is about to prepare a feast to welcome the message of peace. The good health that the good food provides reflects the spiritual health fostered by their discussions and agreements. The Peacemaker and the Mother of Nations bring their minds together to give names and form to the symbolic Longhouse:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then at that time Djigonhsa’seh prepared food. When she had finished then indeed the two did eat together.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Sharing a meal comes before doing business. In historic times, the visitors would be welcomed at the woods’ edge; they would be fed; and then they would recover from their fatigue by delaying council until the next day. While the Peacemaker shares meals with his dangerous hosts, he does not risk falling asleep, but remains vigilant and moves directly to the business at hand after the meal.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; When they two had finished (eating) the woman said, &amp;quot;Now surely this is fulfilled, both our minds are fully satisfied. So now I will ask you, what use will you make then of the propositions which you bring, that is, of Peace and Righteousness (justice) and the force of Law? The situation in the direction you are going is dangerous. There are dwelling in the direction you are going men who are really evil. They hunt people and kill them and they eat their flesh. A male person moreover whose house stands not far from here likewise eats humans.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then Deganawii’dah said, &amp;quot;In fact understand that I am trying to have this kind of business stopped. (This is, I understand, the kind of business I am trying to have stopped.) (Nay’ehseh.)&amp;quot; And then he asked, saying, &amp;quot;What then do you think (what is your opinion) of the propositions that I have brought with me? Do you yourself accept the (principles of) justice, and of peace and civil authority?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Djigonsah’seh said, &amp;quot;So what is the meaning of the message, the significance of the principles, which you bring?&amp;quot; Deganawii’dah said, &amp;quot;Indeed the meaning of Righteousness and of Peace and of Order is just this: that when the habitual killing of human beings shall have stopped, then peace shall prevail, and bands of people shall travel about from place to place where they reside, and also the individual maternal families (may come and go freely); all mankind shall continue peacefully to love one another.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At that time Djigonhsa’seh said, &amp;quot;It is true indeed that the message which you bring is most important. So now I accept it; therefore I approve the work that you are advancing. What will you call it when it is completed?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then Deganawiid’dah said, &amp;quot;I will call it &#039;&#039;Ganonhsyo:ni&#039;&#039;, the Extended House (the League), and also I will designate it &#039;&#039;Gayenehsahgo:nah&#039;&#039;, the great law or commonwealth.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;“Commonwealth” is not about common “wealth” but rather “weal”: wellness, health, and goodness.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; And the reason it shall have the name the Extended House is that in fact it shall come to resemble only a single household (&#039;&#039;sganonh’sadah&#039;&#039;) when it is finished; and furthermore the mind or reason will become the source of law (&#039;&#039;Gayanenhseh&#039;&#039;), or human welfare; thinking shall replace killing and welfare eventuate; and thus we shall all be peacefully disposed in the minds of the constituent maternal families; therefore it will unite the minds, and it shall be called &#039;&#039;gayanehsa’goonah&#039;&#039;, the great law or commonwealth. Moreover, this (institution) shall endure as long as there continues to be a single maternal family and until that time when the Holder of the Heavens will bring about a transformation of things on the earth.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At that time Djigonhsa’seh now said, &amp;quot;Now apparently I understand (comprehend) the whole affair (proposition), so now I accept it (I have taken hold of it).&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;“Taking hold of it,” as a token of accepting a proposition, becomes physical when the representative of a nation accepts wampum put forward across the council fire.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Deganawii’dah said, &amp;quot;Moreover this shall come about in the future that then the women shall possess the title to chieftainship (&#039;&#039;gayaneh’dah&#039;&#039;) (belonging to her maternal family); and the reason for this is that you my mother were the first to approve (the principles) of Righteousness and Peace. So now then I shall move on.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1899, paras. 28–33.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Barbara Mann believes that Tsikonsaseh is even more important than the existing versions of the Kayanerenkó:wa suggest: she blames the &amp;quot;European-centered and male-centered nature of existing history&amp;quot; for largely ignoring her role in insisting on gender balance in the law.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;“(Jingosaseh’s) name has been obliterated from the white record because her story was a woman’s story and nineteenth-century male ethnographers simply failed to ask women, whose story hers was, about the history of the League.” Mann 1995; see also Mann 2000.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; &amp;quot;It is only after the Peacemaker agrees to her terms that she throws her considerable political weight behind him. . . . She was, in short, invaluable as an ally, invincible as a foe. To succeed, the Peacemaker needed her.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mann 1995. For a more modern reminder of the authority of individual women in Haudenosaunee history, and of European recognition of this power, consider Konwatsionnwenni Mary Brant, who was said to have been able to command more men to fight than any other Mohawk, and who was the wife of Warraghyihagey William Johnson, Imperial Superintendent General of Indian Affairs. It is also unlikely that Europeans would have been ignorant of the role of Haudenosaunee women in the “mourning wars” of the seventeenth century.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Yet it is equally gender centred to suggest that the Peacemaker was incapable on his own to require and recognize the role of women in the constitution, and it is Tsikonsaseh&#039;s conversion to the Good Mind, rather than her &amp;quot;terms,&amp;quot; that are important to the making of the law. Mann&#039;s interpretation might please some feminists, but there is no need to assume that &amp;quot;gender balance&amp;quot; was resisted by the Peacemaker—who designed balance into all other aspects of the law—or even that the balance was not his idea. Perhaps Tsikonsaseh is the only prominent woman named in the lawmaking and peacemaking process, yet for every chief there is a woman who selects and confirms him; for every male aspect of the law there is a corresponding female side. To an outsider, and especially one who sees only the Grand Council in operation as a government, the law does seem male dominated, with the female aspects not in evidence. To an insider, the influence of Haudenosaunee women is so powerful that it must trace its roots to before the founding of the law. The Peacemaker was raised by women, in isolation. The first Creator on earth was not the twins, but rather Sky Woman, who danced the earth into being on the turtle&#039;s back and planted the first seeds. To an insider, the equal presence of men and women at the civil ceremonies of the Haudenosaunee is a powerful indication of the vitality of the women&#039;s role in society.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker acknowledges Tsikonsaseh&#039;s power and creates a corresponding authority. He transforms her from a force for war to a force for peace. This is part of his approach to lawmaking: again and again, he recognizes the abilities and capacities of the people who challenge him, and once he has persuaded them to accept his vision, he explains to them how they will take part in bringing that vision to reality. From keeper of the house of war, Tsikonsaseh is changed by the Peacemaker into a keeper of the Good Message: &amp;quot;I shall, therefore, now change your disposition and practice. . . . I now charge you that you shall be the custodian of the Good Tidings of Peace and Power, so that the human race may live in peace in the future.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Chiefs) 1916, 71. “Charge,” in this context, means to place a burden upon someone.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He places a further burden upon her: to assist him in the final confrontation with Thadadaho: &amp;quot;You shall therefore now go east where I shall meet you at the place of danger (Onondaga) where all matters shall be finally settled and you must not fail to be there on the third day.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;This is one of the instances in the reciting of the law where it becomes clear that time is fluid. The Peacemaker could not have intended Tsikonsaseh to travel to Onondaga three days from then, because he still had not brought a single nation into agreement with his message, and Onondaga would have been three days’ travel away from the western lands where Tsikonsaseh lived.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tsikonsaseh is like the Peacemaker, in that her name does not become a title.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;There is, however, a Seneca tradition that the name did indeed become a title, and that in the mid-1800s Caroline Parker at Tonawanda carried it: see Morgan (1871) 1997.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; She becomes his female counterpart, a leader for peace (a &amp;quot;peace chief&amp;quot;) in her own right. As an Erie she would not have had a family among the Five Nations. Like the Peacemaker, she is an outsider of influence; like him, she has no successor today.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In the case of the Peacemaker, though, there is a second reason for not giving his name to anyone else: he did not die, and no two people alive at the same time should have the same name.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Hiawatha: The Man of Sorrows ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hiawatha,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;To avoid confusion, I have spelled the name “Hiawatha” throughout. John Norton, using late seventeenth-century Mohawk–English orthography, spelled it “Hayouwaghtengh.” More proper modern Mohawk spelling would be “Aionwat’ha”; others would spell it “Hayonwatha.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; it is generally agreed, was a great man among the Onondagas who had gone to live among the Mohawks.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In Gibson’s 1912 version of the Great Law, Hiawatha is a Mohawk chief who gathers his people together after the Peacemaker passes the “test” imposed by the Great Warrior. Only after the Mohawks accept the law does Hiawatha suffer the loss of his daughters and go off to live by himself. The other two Mohawk chiefs try to console him after the death of his first daughter, but the death of the second sends him into deep grief and withdrawal. Gibson 1912, 120, 134–35.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In some versions of the Kayanerenkó:wa, the Peacemaker either does not appear at all, or is relegated to a minor role, while Hiawatha is given the credit for the idea of the League and for most of the work of bringing it together. Among the modern Haudenosaunee, though, the strongest, most consistent tradition is that the two men worked closely as partners, each drawing from the strengths and gifts of the other. In Gibson&#039;s 1899 version, Hiawatha is the reformed cannibal, who later becomes a Mohawk leader&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hiawatha had rescued the Peacemaker from the gorge at Cohoes Falls, and the two had agreed that they would “exchange roles,” so that Hiawatha would emerge from the test and work with the Mohawks, while the Peacemaker would travel to Cayuga country. Gibson 1899, paras. 79–82. He is then given the Mohawk chief’s comeliest daughter in marriage (an unlikely scenario in a matrilineal society in which fathers had little influence over their daughters’ choices). He then becomes one of the three head chiefs of the Mohawks, and the other two chiefs, Tekarihoken and Satekariwate, attend and participate in Hiawatha’s wedding feast, at which he announces the coming league and law (Gibson 1899, paras. 94–105).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and (as predicted by the Peacemaker) suffers the loss of his entire family. In the 1912 version, the Peacemaker and Hiawatha have already worked together, and Hiawatha has taken his place as a Mohawk chief (that nation having accepted the peace), when tragedy strikes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hiawatha, married to a Mohawk woman and living among the Mohawks&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;What is the thinking behind matrilocality—moving to live with one’s wife’s people and family? Snow expressed the belief that it promoted peace within the community by breaking up the natural fighting unit, a band of brothers. The true reason may be simpler: the land was women’s business, because they worked together in groups, and therefore needed to get along together. Men, hunting and fishing, often alone, might be considered more interchangeable.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; as a leader, is stricken by a series of calamities.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In Gibson’s 1899 version, the Peacemaker had predicted this: “You shall know what will happen when Dehadodaaho becomes troubled in mind (impatient) and vengeful against you. It is such that your daughter will be carried away when there he raises his voice in shouting. Three times it will repeat and reverberate over the forests. So it is that as soon as you are bereft of all your daughters then at that time you shall go away (from home). And then moreover when you will leave then you shall say, ‘Now my heart is filled with anger (I am angered), furthermore I will split the sky (go southward), and at some distant place, perhaps, one will have pity on me, one there will wipe away my tears for what has befallen me.’ At that time you shall go away (depart). It is a fact of course that we two shall meet again at that place” (Gibson 1899, para. 84). Thus, in the 1899 version, the events that in other versions are meetings are actually reunions, predicted by the Peacemaker, as part of his power or gift.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Upon the death of his last daughter, he is plunged into the deepest grief. He leaves his people and goes to live by himself in the forest:&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Delos Big Kittle of Cattaraugus, in 1905, asserted that Hiawatha was living alone because “Thadahaho slew all my brothers and drove me away.” Parker (1923) 1989, 404.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now his mind was stricken with grief and Hiawatha now said, &amp;quot;Of course I shall be unable perhaps to perform work of the mind because of the awful thing which has befallen me.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, at that time, the people resident there thought of nothing that they could do to make Hiawatha have peaceful thoughts (be well disposed thereafter). It was Satekaríwate&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In the 1899 text, Shaɂdegaaihwaa’deɂ.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; who said, &amp;quot;It might be a good thing if we could divert the mind of our leader (great one).&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now the inhabitants assembled (got ready), and now indeed they attempted to divert his mind. But his mind refused to leave off grieving. They resorted to all those things which they thought would perhaps divert his mind . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before he can recover from this first tragedy, Hiawatha suffers the loss of the rest of his family (in some versions, his fellow Mohawk chiefs seek to console him by arranging a lacrosse game, the very sport that led to more death in Hiawatha&#039;s family):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then Hiawatha spoke, saying, &amp;quot;Awfully grave is the thing which has happened. Now, of course, the thing on which my mind depended has become extinct. Now, indeed, all my offspring have died out.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now it was that he went forth from the lodge and he stood there out of doors. At this time the company of warriors was engaged in a ball game on the flats.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;This earthly lacrosse game may be a reflection of the similar game in the Creation story that contributed to Sky Woman’s fall to earth. In Gibson’s 1912 version, it is not Hiawatha’s wife but his last surviving daughter who is killed. It is a double tragedy: the girl was pregnant.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; At this time the wife of Hiawatha too came out front and went down to the river bank there to fetch fresh water from the stream that flowed along there. So just as she turned about the crowd shouted saying &amp;quot;What kind of animal is it that is calling this way?&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In another version, an eagle flies overhead, dropping a feather that everyone pursues.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; At this moment everyone ran towards it and said, &amp;quot;Come, let&#039;s grab it.&amp;quot; Then Hiawatha saw for a fact it came flying there. It fell right where she who had gone for water had been walking at the moment the men ran up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They never noticed that the wife of Hiawatha was walking there as they were all looking up at what was flying there. They trampled her under foot crushing her and as a consequence she died there. For she was then about to have a child. Thereupon Hiawatha said, &amp;quot;Now indeed I am left utterly alone—a widower. So then I shall now go away. So then also I will split the sky (go directly south).&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In Gibson 1912, 138, “splitting the sky” accompanies travelling eastward.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; At some distant place someone may take pity on me and will wipe away my tears and also rub down my body.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1899, paras. 114–16. “Rubbing down his body” presages Hiawatha rubbing down the body of Thadadaho, straightening out his limbs, just as Hiawatha wished to be reassured and made straight again.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sakokwenionkwas Tom Porter explained in 2013: &amp;quot;Hiawatha walked aimlessly. If he were to die in his wandering he would not care.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So it is that when the Peacemaker meets him, Hiawatha is living far to the south, alone in his grief:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . . Dekanawidah arose when Hiawatha had entered and he said: &amp;quot;My younger brother I perceive that you have suffered from some deep grief. You are a chief among your people and yet you are wandering about.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hiawatha answered: &amp;quot;That person skilled in sorcery, Osinoh, has destroyed my family of seven daughters.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Thadadaho Leon Shenandoah stated that Hiawatha’s seven daughters were found dead in a gully with Thadadaho, who might have clubbed them to death with his massive penis: Wall 2001, 5. Vecsey notes that the people who calmed Thadadaho “made his penis harmless” (Vecsey 1988, 104).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It was truly a great calamity and I am now very miserable. My sorrow and my rage have been bitter. I can only rove about&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In the dark days, much of the roving about was done by bands of young men engaged in the constant killing. Hiawatha, though, withdraws from society for the opposite reason—as Christopher Vecsey says, not from killing too much, but from too much killing.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; since now I have cast myself away from my people. I am only a wanderer. I split the heavens when I went away from my house and my nation.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dekanawidah replied: &amp;quot;Dwell here with me. I will represent your sorrow to the people here dwelling.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So Hiawatha had found some one who considered his distress and he did stay. Then Dekanawidah told of his suffering and the people listened.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Newhouse and Cusick) 1916, 23.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are other descriptions of the events leading up to this meeting, and they are all tragic. All involve Hiawatha&#039;s loss of his family through the power of magic. In one version, the culprit is a sorcerer, Oghsinou:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hiawatha had three beautiful granddaughters—a man of the name of Oghsinou desired to have the oldest, but she refused him. He is said to have possessed supernatural powers, and having transformed himself every night into an Owl, perched on a tree near the house, and intermixed with the notes of his new assumed species, dreadful to children, human speech, repeating, &amp;quot;The granddaughter of Hiawatha must admit the embraces of Oghsinou.&amp;quot; In the day time, he repeated his addresses and entreaties; but notwithstanding these or his nocturnal visits, in a borrowed form, and mysterious commands, the lovely Maid persisted in refusing him. She was seized with sickness and died. Oghsinou continuing his visits, armed with Owlish dread, afflicting with the same notes, the disconsolate family, Hiawatha seized his bow and quiver, and going under the tree whence issued the disconsolate notes of the ill omened bird of night, he took aim, and down it came tumbling, resuming the natural form of Oghsinou as he expired . . .&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Norton 1970, 100.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In another version, Thadadaho, angry and impatient, sends the deaths:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The power of Tadadahoh yet followed them, and caused a high soaring Eagle to fall; it happened to reach the ground at the feet of the granddaughter of Hiawatha, who was far gone in pregnancy. The youth who crowded there to obtain the choice feathers, hurt her, that she died.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The loss so affected Hiawatha, that he rejected all comfort and nourishment: he laid himself down in his Cabin; the principal people assembled there, but he could not look upon them. After some days, he began to sing; they listened, caught the air &amp;amp; joined in the chorus; the burden of the song was, &amp;quot;I am about to leave you; for the solace of my old age has been taken from me!&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When he had finished his song, he took up his pouch, and bid them farewell, recommending his niece to fill his place: he rejected all their repeated entreaties to remain.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Norton 1970, 100.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the oral recital of this part of the story of the law, the speaker&#039;s voice drops sadly at the end of each sentence, and the speed of his speaking slows. There is sorrow, loneliness, and hopelessness in each sigh.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Baptist Thomas, an Onondaga, provided this version, which Arthur Parker edited and wrote:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a man&#039;s heart is heavy with sorrow because of death he wanders aimlessly. . . . That is why Hiawatha went away from the Mohawks. His only sister—he had only one sister—died. She was Da-si-yu and she died. She was not a comely woman but her brother loved her and so Hiawatha mourned and no one came to comfort him. Not one person came to him in his grief to comfort him, therefore his mind was clouded in darkness. His throat was dry and heavy and bitter. So he went away for he did not wish to stay among a people who had no hearts of sympathy for sorrow. The Mohawks had grown callous and so accustomed to troubled times that they did not care for the sorrows of others and even despised the tears of mourners. . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a time when another great sorrow came, some say it was because his daughters died, he again continued his journey.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker 1916, 114–15. Barbara Graymont (1988, 15–18) maintains that it was Thadadaho’s witchcraft that was responsible for the deaths of Hiawatha’s daughters, and that this triggered “a contest of will and power between two great men, one evil and one good.” Converse (1908, 117) says that Thadadaho killed three of Hiawatha’s brothers.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hiawatha was a beloved man, one who was able to resume leadership once he returned. But Baptist Thomas&#039;s observation that death had become so commonplace that the people had become hard-hearted and unmoved by tragedy is frightening. Living among people without empathy is an additional reason for self-exile. In the Creation story, Tawiskaron admits to his brother that he feels unable to bear any pity or empathy, and he is himself saddened by that loneliness. In both stories, there is a situation in which a person becomes aware of the reasons for his own sadness but cannot find a way out. They need help. That is part of the lesson in the design of every aspect of Haudenosaunee society. We all need help, at some point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thadadaho is in every case an obstacle to the creation of the law, and a man fascinated with evil, but it may be more consistent to conclude that the person responsible for the deaths of Hiawatha&#039;s family was not Thadadaho but some other sorcerer. There were certainly enough of them around in the dark days. Perhaps the most persuasive reason for this conclusion is that Thadadaho is never asked to account for, or repent for, the killings. Hiawatha is healed by the Condolence, but Thadadaho&#039;s actions would always stand between them unless repentance had taken place. Hiawatha, who would remain in council, could forgive but never forget.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If Thadadaho had been the killer, Hiawatha was setting the great example by not seeking revenge. It is Hiawatha, not the Peacemaker, who combs the snakes from Thadadaho&#039;s hair and straightens out the kinks in his body. To perform this act of compassion for a man who had killed one&#039;s family would be powerful, transcendent. Together, they would join in &amp;quot;putting the bodies away, so they may not be seen,&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Though the Haudenosaunee maintained a tradition of burying the dead, this was not always possible in winter, and sometimes the dead were kept on scaffolds (to keep them away from animals) or even inside the longhouse until it was possible to dig the graves.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; through the ceremony of Condolence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the other hand, if another sorcerer had been responsible, this would leave unresolved murders, and evil at large in the world, a residual threat to peace. The law tends to tie up loose ends: Haudenosaunee belief recognizes that there is both good and evil in the world, and that evil never really leaves us. The continued existence of evil affirms to the historical rather than mythical side of the lawmaking&#039;s narrative.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;As Amber Meadow Adams has pointed out, it is simplistic to look to the Creation story for this principle. The creator twins were not good and evil, but rather symbols of differing strategies for survival, perhaps eventually symbols for existence and non-existence. However, they are also symbols of duality, and of how entities in frequent conflict can coexist, in part by remaining at a safe distance from each other.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Regardless of the version of the law, Hiawatha had suffered deeply as a result of the deaths of his close female relatives, including the unborn child of one of his daughters.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Kayaneseh-oh (later Ya-ie-wa-noh) Harriet Maxwell Converse (1908, 118) preserved a legend in which Thadadaho was “bitterly opposed to Hiawatha and to defeat him put three of his brothers to death.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; He was suffering from not one death but a series of them. They were deaths in circumstances that strongly called out for revenge, but his reaction was not to urge or seek vengeance, but rather to withdraw in grief and pain. His first withdrawal was to leave his own people, the Onondagas,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In Gibson’s 1899 version, Hiawatha had already become a Mohawk leader when the tragedies struck, one after another.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and move eastward, to Mohawk country, to start over. His second withdrawal, after more family deaths, was away from all other people, to live by himself in the forest. He was alone in grief, and his behaviour had become odd: &amp;quot;Hayonwatha was &#039;noticed to be always talking about something, and constantly handling belts and strings made of curious white and purple shells.&#039;&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Ely Parker, in Converse 1908, 187–88. Parker says that Hiawatha invented the use of wampum when his canoe paddle brought up white and purple shells from the bottom of Oneida Lake.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hiawatha was moving towards the use of wampum, but in some versions, he was using substitutes, as did other people, as if they were groping towards the real thing but not achieving it. In these versions, purple sumac, white basswood, and the shafts of feathers were the precursors of shell wampum. True wampum, otkó:wa, the Great Shell, has a permanence that the substitutes do not offer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He cut off a sumac branch, cored it, cut it into short lengths, and then he strung up the sticks making several short strings. Thereupon he sat down next to the embers with his head bowed . . .&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 139.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . . they pondered the meaning of the short strands hung up in front of him, trying to understand the small basswood sticks which were cut into short lengths and cored, the sticks that were strung up.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 145. In the Chiefs’ Version (1916, 77), and in Gibson’s 1899 version, the white wooden beads are cut from elderberry twigs.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The chief of the nearby community, once he had heard what Hiawatha was doing, decided that he, too, would make short strands of beads, since he knew what the man needed: &amp;quot;The chief cut off the tips of feathers and strung them up into short strands and said, &#039;Now I am finished, the short strands are my words, and these will lead the man.&#039;&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 147 (in the Chiefs’ Version, “quills” are used, this may also be feathers, or it may be porcupine quills: Parker (Chiefs) 1916, 78). This string of white wampum would have been the first “invitation wampum.” In the Chiefs’ Version, it is the Peacemaker who describes how the process of invitation is to work: “You must not go unless the invitation is official. A woman shall first come to you early tomorrow morning who will be the first to see you, then you shall cut and prepare some elderberry twigs. You shall cut them into pieces and remove the heart pulp and then you shall string them up. Then the Lord (Royaner) shall send a messenger to invite you, but you must not accept the invitation until he shall send to you a string of twigs similar to your own.” Parker 1916, 77. Today, the invitation wampum is sent out with runners to call any Grand Council, and there have been numerous instances where invitations sent without wampum have not been accepted. See Foster 1974, 106 and n25, on invitation wampum.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The act of putting beads in a string, for Hiawatha, was a physical manifestation of his desire to gather his scattered thoughts and feelings and to restore a sense of order. Stringing beads, as any beadworker knows, is a way to impose coherent order and direction upon chaos. It is an act of reunification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Gibson&#039;s 1899 version, typically, there is collaboration. Hiawatha&#039;s stringing of objects leads others to emulate him, and together, the mourner and the clear-minded ones who are seeking to help raise up his mind develop both the practice and the meaning of Condolence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Delos Big Kittle of Cattaraugus, in 1905, has Hiawatha already collecting and stringing the shells as he develops the principles of the law: the Peacemaker, &amp;quot;from his hiding place,&amp;quot; observes Hiawatha at work before approaching him. The first strings of wampum, in this account, are not those of the Condolence, but the beginning of the laws of peace, white for peace, black for war, black and white for the process of peacemaking. How can this be reconciled with other versions? By recognizing that the Condolence is indeed a beginning of the laws of peace:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Presently, as (the Peacemaker) lay meditating, he heard the soft spattering of water sliding from a skillful paddle and peering out from his hiding place he saw in the red light of sunset a man leaning over his canoe and dipping into the shallow water with a basket. When he raised it up it was full of shells, the shells of the periwinkles that live in shallow pools. The man pushed his canoe toward the shore and sat down on the beach where he kindled a fire. Then he began to string his shells and finishing a string would touch the shells and talk. Then, as if satisfied, he would lay it down and make another until he had a large number. Dekanawida watched the strange proceeding with wonder . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After some deliberation he called out: &amp;quot;Kwe, I am a friend!&amp;quot; and stepping out upon the same stood before the man with the shells. &amp;quot;I am Dekanawida,&amp;quot; he said, &amp;quot;and I come from the Mohawk.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;I am Haio’wentha of the Onondaga,&amp;quot; came the reply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then Dekanawida inquired about the shell strings for he was very curious to know their import and Haio’wentha answered, &amp;quot;They are the rules of life and laws of good government. This all white string is a sign of truth, peace and good will, this black string is a sign of hatred, of war and of a bad heart, the string with the alternate beads, black and white, is a sign that peace should exist between the nations. This string with white on either end and black in the middle is a sign that wars must end and peace declared.&amp;quot; And so Haio’wentha lifted his strings and read the laws.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (1923) 1989, 404.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Gibson&#039;s 1912 version, while the movement towards restoration of rationality and health is the same, the details are quite different. Hiawatha is invited by Tekarihoken to the Mohawk village, where Tekarihoken explains to him, in an assembly of the people, what the Peacemaker has done to date, and how peace is coming. Hiawatha replies, confirming this, reciting his own sadness and misfortunes. Hiawatha agrees to stay at Tekarihoken&#039;s house, and that night the Peacemaker returns.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 149–71.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Peacemaker found him, Hiawatha was still in a state of deep depression,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Rather than accept Hiawatha as “the embodiment of the equable man, the ideal chief, who puts public concern above self and above family . . . (a) kind and generous man . . . the principal victim in the myth of the machinations of Atotarho,” William Fenton maintains that “there is a better case that both characters were pathological personalities” (elsewhere, he calls Hiawatha “a disturbed chief . . . a recidivist cannibal and a victim of witchcraft” (Jennings 1985, 10)). If, in saying this, he means that each man was suffering from a disease of the mind, a suffering that could be healed, he is probably right. In denying Hiawatha’s essential goodness, and suggesting that the source of his problems was innate “personality” rather than sorrow, Fenton was missing the whole point of the narrative (as he probably was about the “recidivist cannibal” accusation, which he gathered from the 1899 Gibson version).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; mulling over how he—and so many others who had suffered, or were suffering—would come out of it. Where many others had sought revenge, Hiawatha was seeking only solace. Where others might cause trouble—up to and including vengeful murder—with their antisocial conduct, Hiawatha withdrew from society. His choices were peaceful, where others might be vengeful. Yet his mind was so troubled, so clouded by grief, that he could not see his way clear to raising it up again. His choice of peace was more stunned, catatonic, than active. The task of restoring Hiawatha&#039;s reason, and both mental and physical health, fell to the Peacemaker, in the first demonstration that it takes two sides to raise up minds again, through the ceremony of Condolence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sotsisowah John Mohawk explains:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To bring this into contemporary thinking, if you say, &amp;quot;We don&#039;t negotiate with terrorists,&amp;quot; you have taken away your own power. You have to negotiate with them; they are the people who are trying to kill you. But to negotiate with them, you have to acknowledge they&#039;re human. Acknowledging that they are human means acknowledging that they have failings, but you don&#039;t concentrate on the failings. You concentrate on their humanity. You have to address their humanity if you are going to have any hope of stopping the blood feud. Thus, the first meeting, and subsequent meetings, begin with an acknowledgment that people on all sides have suffered loss and that their losses are traumatic ones.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;What John Mohawk (2004) is saying at the end of this explanation is different: instead of one grieving side and one clear-minded side, he says that in resolving the darkest times, &#039;&#039;all sides&#039;&#039; have suffered.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The First Condolence ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker observed Hiawatha for a while before meeting him directly. He crept close enough to hear the mourning man&#039;s words (just as he had crept up on the Cannibal to listen to his mutterings). Hiawatha was trying to console and condole himself. He had the essential idea, and understood the purpose, but he could not get past the first three &amp;quot;words,&amp;quot; the need to clear one&#039;s senses so that the rest of the message would be understood.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Delos Big Kittle’s 1905 story sees Hiawatha completing both the wampum strings (of periwinkle shells) and the laws. The strings he describes—all white, all dark, alternating black and white and white on either end—are among the strings of the Condolence ceremony, though he does not say how many Hiawatha made: “then, as if satisfied, he would lay it down and make another until he had a large number.” Parker (1923) 1989, 404.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In his efforts to create wampum, Hiawatha had been experimenting, without success, with substitutes—small tubes of purple sumac and white basswood, dark and white porcupine quills, and feather shafts. It is as if he had the idea, but was not getting things quite right, and working with an ephemeral personal concept where the Peacemaker would make it permanent and universal. The feathers and softwood were drafts, predecessors of the enduring Great Shell. The symbiosis between the two men—one who could not get things quite right, the other who was near perfection—recalls the relationship between the twins in the Creation story, except that the Peacemaker and Hiawatha forge a partnership to help each other, while the twins are partners in creation despite themselves, and end up as antagonists.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Late in the evening (Hiawatha, having gathered the wampum left by the ducks) came to a clearing and found a bark field hut. There he found a shelter and there he erected two poles, placed another across the tops and suspended three shell strings.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The wampum suspended from a horizontal pole stretched across two forked uprights reappears in numerous places. When Hermanus Van den Bogaert visited Onondaga in 1638, he saw this pole in the Confederacy’s council house and noted that it was the way the agenda of councils was made apparent. In 1645, in the council area at Three Rivers, “the Iroquois caused two poles to be planted, and a cord to be stretched from one to the other on which to hang and tie the words they were to bring us . . . which consisted of seventeen collars of porcelain beads, a portion of which were on their bodies” (Jennings 1985, 139). At international treaty councils, the wampum belts and strings were suspended from the horizontal pole, near the fire, to be removed and answered in the order in which they were given. Today, the same horizontal pole is placed between the two groups in a Condolence. In a “Small Condolence,” its role is taken by a cane stretched between two chairs, on which the twelve strings are placed. In modern council, the “fire” used to open the council is placed on pure white cloth, over a bench in the centre of the longhouse. While it is sometimes called “the Mace” (because it is a symbol that the House is in session), the way it is draped over the bench shows it is the direct descendant of the first wampum used by Hiawatha.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Looking at them he said: &amp;quot;Men boast what they would do in extremity but they do not do what they say. If I should see anyone in deep grief I would remove these shell strings from the pole and console them. The strings would become words and lift away the darkness with which they are covered. Moreover, what I say I would surely do.&amp;quot; This he repeated.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Newhouse and Cusick) 1916, 20. Baptist Thomas said Hiawatha “talked to himself about his sorrow. ‘I would comfort others in sorrow,’ he said, ‘but no one comforts me’” (Parker 1916, 114).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The chiefs deliberated over the sad events and then decided to do as Dekanawidah should say. He then should remedy the trouble. Then Dekanawidah went in perplexity to his lodge and as he came to it he heard Hiawatha say, &amp;quot;It is useless, for the people only boast what they will do, saying &#039;I would do it this way&#039;, but they do nothing at all. If what has befallen me should happen to them I would take down the three shell strings from the upright pole and I would address them and I would console them because they would be covered by heavy darkness.&amp;quot; Dekanawidah stood outside the door and heard all these words. So then Dekanawidah went forward into the house and he went up to the pole, then he said: &amp;quot;My younger brother, it has now become very plain to my eyes that your sorrow must be removed. Your griefs and your rage have been great. I shall now undertake to remove your sorrow so that your mind may be rested. Have you no more shell strings on your pole?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hiawatha replied. &amp;quot;I have no more strings but I have many shells in a tanned deer&#039;s skin.&amp;quot; So he opened his bundle and a great quantity of shells fell out.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker 1916, 23–24.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker recognized in Hiawatha a kindred soul: from the very beginning of their relationship, he addressed him as &amp;quot;my younger brother.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;A younger brother has certain obligations to an older brother: for example, when there is business to be transacted, generally the younger brother is expected to travel to the older brother’s place. While generally younger people owe deference to their elders, between brothers—equals—this is less accentuated, since their obligations are nearly symmetrical in reciprocity. Since Hiawatha is probably older chronologically than the Peacemaker, it is clear that the relationship has less to do with age than with the kind of seniority that comes from wisdom and spirituality.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; He also recognized that Hiawatha could not condole himself: that he could not, in his grieving condition, clear his own mind. He needed another person&#039;s help.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Part of the power of the Peacemaker is his generosity of spirit: he assumes the obligations and authority of kinship towards complete strangers, spontaneously, as a means of helping them. So he does to Hiawatha.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once again the Peacemaker meets a person who is behaving irrationally and brings him to the Good Mind. Each time he does so, in the narrative of the Great Law, the Peacemaker encounters a different kind of irrationality, stemming from a different source. In each case, the Peacemaker uses a different approach. In Hiawatha, the Peacemaker met an essentially good man whose mind was clouded by grief. This good man had already gone some distance towards restoring his own mind and reason, but he could not complete the task alone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hiawatha had conceived the idea of the Condolence ceremony. He had a great need to have his personal darkness lifted. In a way, he symbolized all the people, since each of them required the same attention, for they had all suffered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker was bringing the Good Message, and now understood that a powerful spiritual act was needed as the threshold of the law. People would not be prepared to accept his message unless their minds were first made good again. Where it had been enough to trick the Cannibal into rationality and to persuade Tsikonsaseh through power and reason, with Hiawatha the process reached a more powerful level. The path to restoring the rational mind was a deliberate, structured, deeply caring and compassionate ceremony, a ritual of both a spiritual and a legal character. It was necessary to learn how to deal with death. In the dark days, death was still all around.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Compassion is indeed the threshold of the Great Law of Peace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The two of them together—the clear-minded one and the grieving one whose mind was cast down on the ground—created the Condolence.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Dean Snow (1994, 56) provides a darker, more limited view of the meaning of the Condolence: “The elaborate funeral rite ensured that everyone was either grieving or condoling, and that no one could be blamed for causing the death. The process effectively shifted blame outside the close-knit immediate community . . . (and) unified the rage of the survivors.” Yet he can provide no examples of survivors’ rage.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; This is not merely a powerful partnership: it also shows how two-sidedness—helping each other—in building law and society can be effective and right.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The Condolence, or some form of it, likely predated the coming of the Peacemaker. In the Creation story, once the people were divided into clans, the duty of condolence was also created: “The clans should become the chief means we will employ in the matters befalling us now because we are separating ourselves from one another. When a death occurs among a Sisterhood—a clan—the minds of the opposite sisterhood will be clear and they (the second sisterhood) will arise as one and go to the place where one has been lost. It shall be the duty of the unaffected sisterhood to utter words which will repeatedly cheer up and encourage those who have suffered loss and to comfort those who have become enshrouded in darkness. . . . It will be their duty to speak, and they will encourage the minds of those who remain alive, so that their minds will become settled again.” Mohawk 2005a, 92–93.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; There would be no structure without the Peacemaker&#039;s great compassion; there would be no restoration of the Good Mind without Hiawatha&#039;s decision to accept the Condolence rather than take up the path of vengeance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker was already bringing peace by addressing the irrational behaviour of individuals. He was restoring the Good Mind. Hiawatha, in his grief, had understood that an individual cannot condole or console himself. Yet he had articulated not only the need for a Condolence, but also the beginning of a technique: the first three &amp;quot;words&amp;quot; or ideas, accompanied by the strings of the ceremony. The Peacemaker took up Hiawatha&#039;s invitation and provided not only the &amp;quot;words&amp;quot; that followed, but also the reciprocity and depth of caring that made the ceremony complete. The first Condolence raises up the mind. Later, after the government is created, the ceremony is extended to raising up a chief, in political terms, as well, by adding the last two &amp;quot;words.&amp;quot; The Condolence is the product of a partnership, a brotherhood between the two remarkable men.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Together, they had also established the use of shell wampum as a lawmaking tool, a device for not only remembering, but also consecrating and ratifying the steps and decisions taken by the mind.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In Delos Big Kittle’s 1905 story, Hiawatha has devised both the laws and the use of wampum to preserve and transmit them—but the Peacemaker, a Mohawk, induces him to bring the laws to his people: “Then come with me . . . and together let us go back to my people and explain the rules and laws.” Parker (1923) 1989, 405.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The first Condolence is the source of sacredness of wampum today, and using wampum is, every time, a way of recalling the beginning of law and peace. Every Condolence is a re-enactment of the first one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once again, the Peacemaker has accomplished a transformation. Hiawatha&#039;s mind has been restored to health, and he has been changed from a mourning hermit to a partner in peacemaking. Compassion has brought Hiawatha back from the borderlands of death. Compassion looks at the man in sorrow, not at the chief in a time of incapacity. It is about rejoining life, not about resuming duty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker says: &amp;quot;My junior brother,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In Haudenosaunee law, “Senior” and “Junior” are poor English translations that refer to age (Older Brother and Younger Brother) and not to authority. In 1990, though, a reference in the report of the Haudenosaunee External Relations Committee to a group of older Oneida chiefs as “senior” sparked resentment by some Oneidas against the committee. It lasted a decade.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; your mind being cleared and you being competent to judge, we shall now make our laws.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Newhouse and Cusick) 1916, 23.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Christopher Vecsey recognizes that the transformation of the Cannibal and the raising up of Hiawatha&#039;s mind are two sides of the same coin:&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;What Vecsey may be missing is that every significant step along the Peacemaker’s path is marked by a similar transformation. Dealing with Tsikonsaseh, Thadadaho, and the Seneca warriors are further instances of “transformational cures.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The transformation of the outsider into the peacemaker and chief is matched by the three parallel transformations, boundary-crossings, that are the heart of the legend. First, the cannibal—whether it is Hiawatha or Tadadaho does not matter—is transformed into a messenger of peace and power. The figure moves from the most depraved form of human activity to the work of nation-building, from chaotic immorality to the moral project of making political order. Second, the transformation of Hiawatha from grieving wanderer to powerful lawgiver and chief is a replication of the first. In both cases Deganawida cures a sick person—sick from killing too much, sick from too much killing, sick as aggressor, sick as victim—and transforms him into an upholder of social order. Third, the straightening of Tadadaho&#039;s mind and body repeats once again the pattern of curing and transformation in order to create an orderly state. The message of peace is repeated in these episodes and underscores the point that the Iroquois Confederacy exists in order to stop wanton killing and the mourning that produces a desire for revenge and more killing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The myth replicates its message through these transformations. The person of Hiawatha (as cannibal and as mourner) is cured twice, but it is essentially the same cure for the same disease: the disease of killing. The person of Tadadaho is cured twice (as cannibal and as monster) for the same reason. In order to stop the cycle of killing and mourning, and revenge and killing, Deganawida must cure those caught in the cycle. He must cure the cannibal from his monstrously excessive disregard for human life, and he must cure the mourner of his disastrously excessive attachment to his lost family members. The cannibal undervalues, the mourner overvalues, human life, and Deganawida must cure them both. To the cannibal he says, stop killing and form a social order. To the mourner he says, stop mourning and form a social order. The structure of the Confederacy is revealed in these transformational cures. The league exists to stop killing and to comfort the bereaved.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Vecsey 1988, 112.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ray John, the Oneida chief, has explained the thinking of the Condolence in more direct terms: sometimes, we feel there is nothing we can do but cry. Then, more than at any other time, we have to believe that there will be a tomorrow. We have to believe that our children still need us. It is up to our friends to help us see this.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The Municipality of Thames Centre, in May 2005, had lost one of its staff members. In the middle of a mediation about a burial ground, Ray John felt the need to condole the municipal council, as part of a growing relationship.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The obligation is not merely to perform the ceremony, but to truly mean it. Another current translation of the way of the Condolence is to say &amp;quot;We sit with you&amp;quot;—often in silent sympathy, for there is not much we can say.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To raise up Hiawatha&#039;s grieving mind and restore him to rationality, the Peacemaker completes the process that Hiawatha has been trying to devise. Hiawatha had been hanging the first three strings of the Condolence ceremony, the same three &amp;quot;words&amp;quot; that are repeated at the woods&#039; edge to welcome strangers. They are the first and most obvious steps to be taken to relieve grief. They address the physical symptoms, the outward manifestations, and the things that, if they continued to be obstructed, would block clear communication of the rest of the Condolence: the senses. The Condolence is sometimes called Teyonhonkwaráktha, &amp;quot;they pity them.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Ray John, of Oneida, points out that the Oneida term for “to have pity” is gan:do, which sounds close enough to the English “condole” that it may have been the source of the use of the word.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It would be more accurate in English to say &amp;quot;they have compassion for them&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now then, we say, we wipe away the tears, so that in peace you may look around you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And further, we suppose there is an obstruction in your ears.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In the 2013 recital of the law, Atahu’ta:yʌ Bob Brown and Sakokwenionkwas Tom Porter said: “The dust of death is in your ear . . . how strong it is. . . .”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Now then, we remove the obstruction carefully from your hearing, so that we trust you will easily hear the words spoken.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And also we imagine there is an obstruction in your throat. Now, therefore, we say, we remove the obstruction, so that you may speak freely in our mutual greetings.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hale (1883) 1989, 121. This extremely short “three words” is a “woods’ edge” version. For an even shorter version (omitting the ears, substituting the “bloody mat”), see Deserontyon 1928.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first wampum was all white: access to the purple quahog shells from the Atlantic would come later. The first three words of the Condolence are also white: the white deerskin to wipe the tears from the eyes, the white eagle feather to remove the dust from the ears, the white or clear water to remove the obstruction from the throat. The white beads reflect the whiteness and purity of the things that are used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Three Bare Words accomplish what John Mohawk explained: they recognize people&#039;s humanity; they acknowledge their losses, and that the losses have been traumatic; and they are the doorway to the conversation that is necessary to achieve peace. They are not simply the conversation that the Peacemaker had with Hiawatha: they are adaptable and useful in dozens of contemporary contexts. For example, in addressing the people suffering deeply damaging intergenerational effects of residential schools, Kanatiio Allan Gabriel began with the same words:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is said that, as we walk the path that is our life, there are times when the way is not clear. Things happen to make us lose our way. Perhaps a loved one is sick or has died—it could be something else that troubles us. When this happens we suddenly find ourselves stumbling through the brush.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As we struggle to push our way through the underbrush, looking for the clear path, we pick up burrs and thorns which cling to our clothing, pricking our skin. We get dusty and scared. Our fear causes us to cry and our hearts pound.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is good to see that you have arrived here safely and that we may spend some time together. I know that you have come from far away and that many obstacles were placed in your way. And yet, despite these obstacles, you are able to be here. I take you by the hand as a brother or a sister. I offer you words of greeting and respect. I offer you food and drink.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because that which you carry may cause you grief, we have gathered here together. We know that as an individual you are very strong. But we also know there are times when one needs the strength of others. We understand that when one is in pain, the mind is distracted and one finds it difficult to use the power of a good mind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I speak these words so that your mind may be put at ease and your load lightened. We come together in this way because you are grieving. We come to offer our thoughts and our support. We come to lift the weight of your burden from your shoulders and to share it among us.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First, I take the finest Eagle feather I can find, and with this Eagle feather, I sweep away the dust which clings to you. I remove any burrs or thorns or twigs which may be caught on your clothing. I remove these things because they surely cause you pain and discomfort. And so, I hope this makes you feel more comfortable and more at ease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your eyes may be filled with tears because of the grief you carry. These tears blur your vision and sting your eyes. There may be a sound like roaring in your ears because of the fear, pain and anger you may be feeling. And so, taking the finest and softest deer skin I can find, I gently wipe away your tears so that you may see the beauty that is all around you, and your friends and relations who have gathered here to support and help you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Next, I wipe away any obstruction in your ears which may prevent you from hearing the good words that people speak to help ease your suffering. We offer you a place to sit so that you may rest your weary body.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, your grief, your pain and your anger may cause an obstruction in your throat. It is important to remove that obstruction so that, when you speak, your words may come loudly and clearly so that all may understand what is troubling you. And so, I offer you a drink of pure, cool water. Water is indeed one of the most powerful medicines we have, for it has the ability to give and to sustain life.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In the 2013 recital of the law, Atahu’ta:yʌ Bob Brown and Sakokwenionkwas Tom Porter referred to “medicine water” rather than pure water—but indeed pure water is medicine water.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The water will help to remove that which clogs your throat. It soothes your insides and quenches your thirst.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And so, with all this I hope you are now more comfortable and we have helped to ease your burden. We hope these words have helped to restore a sound mind, body and spirit.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gabriel 2010. Kanatiio would often be called upon during his work with the Canadian Royal Commission on Aboriginal Peoples, which reported in 1994, to begin meetings with thanksgiving and Condolence. On September 30, 2016, he performed the three words at the reaffirmation of treaty relations between the Peskotomuhkatiq (Passamaquoddy) Nation and the Crown, for the Condolence is also part of their council rituals.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kanatiio&#039;s Three Bare Words reflect the ones that are used to greet visitors to a village—the greeting that was no doubt offered to Jacques Cartier at the woods&#039; edge at Hochelaga in 1534.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;A century later, French Jesuits would note of the Haudenosaunee, that “if the condition of the dead permit, one of them makes a speech, in which he employs all those arguments that the most eloquent speakers are wont to use for the solace of grief” (Thwaites 1901, 1:263).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In that context, it is the visitors who may be carrying grief, and the hosts who condole them. Where a chief has died in the village, though, it is the visitors who come to console, and they are the ones who deliver the words, without the greetings, the removal of dust and thorns, and the offer of food and drink.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[Figure 4: The pole of the clear-minded ones at the woods’ edge at Oneida, May 2010, when Odatsehte and Sonuhses were condoled. Photograph by author.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At a Condolence for raising up a chief, these three words are delivered outside the longhouse, with the grieving people lined up with their backs to the longhouse and the clear-minded ones lined up facing them, having come singing the songs of peace along the road, and now waiting at a respectful distance, but close enough to hear and see. The speaker for the grieving ones repeats and acknowledges what has been said,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In virtually every text on effective listening, this technique is recommended. At its core is respect: being able to assure the other person that you &#039;&#039;have&#039;&#039; been listening, that you have understood what was said.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; returning the first three wampum strings. Then everyone goes into the longhouse for the rest of the Condolence ceremony, to repeat and then complete the sequence.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The Three Bare Words are delivered “at the woods’ edge,” and in receiving them and acknowledging them, the grieving ones also greet their brothers and “rub them down,” symbolically removing the dust and thorns of the journey. “Rubbing down” also recalls the healing of Thadadaho, whose limbs were rubbed down as they were straightened out.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Inside the longhouse, the condolers will place the strings on a horizontal rod. Their speaker will recite and recall the names of the original lords of the Haudenosaunee (this has been called the &amp;quot;roll call of chiefs&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;At one point, Hewitt mixed the names and functions of the chiefs: “This is the role of you who completed these rules of the Great Law.” Hewitt 1892b, 144.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;), walking back and forth between the wood stoves. He carries a cane for cadence, and the recitation is in a sonorous voice, with the last words of each stanza fading out, falling.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The reciters of the &#039;&#039;Iliad&#039;&#039; and the &#039;&#039;Odyssey&#039;&#039;, the &#039;&#039;rhapsodos&#039;&#039;, would also mark their cadence with a staff, the &#039;&#039;skeptron&#039;&#039;, especially as they went through the “catalog” of the hundred ships that left Greece to fight on the sandy windswept plains of Troy. Williams 2007.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The clear-minded ones also sing the Six Songs, which are solemn, yearning reminders of the great days of the power and beauty of the League.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following is a composite, but extremely short, Condolence speech in modern English words.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Christopher Vecsey (1988, 102) notes that the Peacemaker only used eight of the present thirteen strings of Condolence with Hiawatha, for he was not raising up a new royá:ner, but only raising up the man’s mind again.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It contains the proper &amp;quot;elements,&amp;quot; but not in the exact form delivered in either a Condolence to install chiefs or in full council with other nations.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Slightly modified from Williams and Nelson 1994.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your eyes are constantly shedding tears for the ones who have departed, who have been gathered to the Creator&#039;s land. Because of these tears, you can no longer see your brothers clearly, and your ability to see the world around you has been affected. With this word we wipe the tears from your eyes, so that you may once again see clearly.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Gibson 1912, 81: “Moreover, you will keep in mind that he passed his hand through his tears, they wiping your tears with this white, soft cloth they use when they wipe your tears. Then, moreover, you will look around calmly, and you will see them all about you, roaming around, your nephews and nieces, and you will see the land again. Thereupon you will begin to think calmly again, moreover for at least one day.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The grief and sorrow you are suffering have stopped up your ears, so that you can no longer hear clearly what is being said to you. Perhaps there is a ringing or rushing sound in your ears. We take a pure white deerskin (cloth), and with this we once again open your ears, so that you can hear clearly what is being said.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Gibson 1912, 81: “My father’s kinsmen, thus it happens and it is dreadful that it should happen to one, that repeatedly one’s ears become plugged so that one cannot hear any more. . . . So now they are carefully reopening your ears. Now, moreover, they will be restored, and you will hear them speaking again, those moving about near you, your nephews and nieces. Now, also, you will hear again about how things are going at the settlement. Now, moreover, you will think calmly, and for at least one day you should continue thinking calmly.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your throats have been stopped up with grief, so that you are no longer able to speak. With this we once again open your throats, so that you will be able to say what you wish, without obstruction.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 82: “It is dreadful for it to happen that one is overpowered by unhappiness. Thus it is repeatedly obstructing the throat, one’s grief, so that it happens to you that your throat becomes clogged with grief. So now they free it from grief, your throat. Then, moreover, you will think calmly again, and then you will once more breathe peacefully, speaking out calmly, as we give thanks.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the purest white deerskin I clean the insides of your bodies of any impurities that may have lodged there, so that you can go about your lives in comfort and peace.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 89: “It happens . . . that repeatedly there is a great twisting around within one’s body, there being much bile in addition to the displacement of the organs within the body, and eventually it will fail, one’s spirit and one’s strength … and just so, it twists around in circles, your mind, and there is a lot of bile, your organs are being displaced within your body. . . . Then moreover they will say, ‘Now we are pouring in the liquid, the (?) Moreover, when the liquid settles down, it will begin to work in your body, it will strengthen your mind, and it will wipe away the widespread jaundice and readjust the organs within your body.’”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The memory of the people who have departed sometimes takes the form of the sight of blood on the space where you sit as Chiefs. With this we remove the bloodstains from your mat and once again prepare a safe and comfortable place for you to sit.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hale (1883) 1989, 123: “Every day you are losing your great men. They are being borne into the earth; also the warriors, and also your women, and also your grandchildren; so that in the midst of blood you are sitting. Now, therefore, we say, we wash the blood marks from your seat, so that it may be for a time that happily the place will be clean where you are seated and looking around you.” Gibson 1912, 90: “Now we are wiping off the red marks from where you have your space. Moreover, they are using a handkerchief to wipe the red marks from your ceremonial seat. Moreover, now your space will be very fine again.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In your sorrow and grief you sit in darkness in your mind. You cannot see your brothers who seek to raise your spirits once again. With this we remove the darkness you are seeing and feeling.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 90: “Now we are making it bright for you again. Then, moreover, you will see the daylight, you will notice them again, the ones wandering about in your vicinity, your nephews and nieces, and you will see the earth and you will be happy from then on.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you have suffered a great loss, you sometimes cannot see the sky above you and around you; you are blind to the beauties of creation. With this word we restore the sight of the sky to your eyes, so that you can gaze about you in calm and beauty.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 90: “Now we are clearing the sky for you. Moreover, you will see the sky. Thus when the sky is clear again, you can keep watching there. This, too: you will then think calmly.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In your sorrow and grief the sun is lost to you, and you can no longer feel his warmth and the light he casts about us. With this we restore the sun to the sky so that you can once again see the world around you.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hale (1883) 1989, 142: “You are mourning in the deep darkness. I will make the sky clear for you, so that you will not see a cloud. And also I will give the sun to shine upon you, so that you can look upon it peacefully when it goes down. You shall see it when it is going. Yea! The sun shall seem to be hanging over you, and you shall look upon it peacefully as it goes down. Now I have hope that you will yet see the pleasant days.” Hale 1883, 168: “The speaker reminds the mourners . . . that continued grief for the dead would not be consonant with the course of nature. Though all might seem dark to them now, the sky would be as clear, and the sun would shine as brightly for them, as if their friend had not died. Their loss had been inevitable, and equally sure would be the return of the “pleasant days.” Gibson 1912, 90: “We are restoring the sun to you. Moreover the next day when the sun rises, when it moves up over the forest, you will keep watching the sun move along. Moreover, when it is in the centre of the sky, the sun, then it will shine all around you, and this, at the same time, will remind you, as it carries it here and there, your mind, you will remember your work for the people’s welfare, and then you will think peacefully.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You have traveled far, and your path has been difficult. There are thorns in your feet, and you are in pain from your journey. With this we remove the thorns from your feet and once again make you comfortable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The memory of the people who have passed away is refreshed in your minds whenever you pass their graves. With this we remove the sight of the graves and level the earth over them, so that their sight no longer disturbs your peace of mind.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hale (1883) 1989, 142: “And we will say that we will try to do you good. When the grave has been made, we will make it still better. We will adorn it, and cover it with moss.” Gibson 1912, 91: “‘Now we are stirring up the earth where his grave is,’ and they reach out and grab all kinds of vegetation, and throw it there, and just there they put a piece of dressed lumber. Indeed, this is to accomplish two things: on the one hand great heat should not penetrate, and on the other hand great rains should not penetrate. Thus, peacefully, his bones will rest there, the one you used to depend on.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When grief and sorrow strike the people, their fires are sometimes scattered, as their thoughts are in disarray. With this we gather together the embers of your fire and rekindle the fire so that it can once again give you warmth and light.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hale (1883) 1989, 145: “We will now remake the fire, and cause it to burn again.” Gibson 1912, 91: “And from the fire container (Death) caused the firebrands to scatter . . . we are gathering together firebrands again for your fire container. Moreover, we rekindle it, smoke will rise again, beautiful smoke will rise again, and one will see again the number of fires we have rekindled in the vicinity. Moreover, we are raising your spirits again, you chiefs. We have repositioned you in ranks at the fires we rekindled for you.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Not only a person&#039;s close family but all the people suffer when a respected person passes away. With this we once again raise up the minds of the women and the young men, that they may resume their responsibility of supporting and advising the Rotiianeson in their deliberations.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 92: “The Creator . . . has given special importance to the women, decreeing that they will busy themselves around the fire, they being in charge of the foodstuffs . . . the source of newly born persons, they being the ones who will take care of raising the children.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are times when grief causes a person to behave in a way that is beyond reason, where they can injure or be injured by bad medicine. This can happen on earth, it is known to happen. With this we remove any shadow of insanity and all bad medicine from your minds, so that you can once again resume your place in our councils and our thoughts with a clear mind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a Roianer passes away, the deer horns that are the symbol of his title are said to fall from him, and fall apart. With this we put his horns back together again, so that the title may be passed on to another person who is worthy to carry that burden for the people.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hale (1883) 1989, 145: “If any one should fall—it may be a principal chief will fall and descend into the grave—then the horns will be left on the grave, and as soon as possible another shall be put in his place.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the first Condolence, the Peacemaker may only have used eight strings of wampum. As time passed, the people who carried out the ceremony added others, to make the compassion more complete. Today, when the Haudenosaunee condole another people over a death, they will sometimes restrict themselves to the first three words, and occasionally go beyond to other aspects that make people&#039;s minds easy, but unless it is time to raise up a new chief, the fifteenth string or matter is not used.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In condoling the United States upon the death of General Israel Chapin, Sagoyewatha Red Jacket, apologizing for being “destitute of a belt,” offered fourteen strings of black and white wampum (Ganter 2006, 69).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[Figure 5: The fifteen strings of the Condolence.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hayadaha Richard Hill has pointed out that dispelling the darkness is not only metaphor. In some versions of the Great Law, it is said that as one moves west, towards the sunset, the sky becomes darker, in reference not only to the Senecas&#039; ability to pile up the bones of those who approach without peace in their minds and hearts,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In the making of the Law, the Senecas retained war chiefs and warriors, because there were still enemy nations to the west. The two Seneca war chiefs were also rotiyanershon, but they had a special function as well: they were to check the sincerity of anyone trying to enter the longhouse from the west. They were allowed to kill those who meant harm.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; but also to the westward journey of the dead. Death itself is called a &amp;quot;thick darkness,&amp;quot; in which the Faceless One acts as an accessory, a facilitator of Death. Dispelling the darkness, then, removes not only death but also the influence of death on our minds. That influence makes itself felt in numerous negative ways, from thoughts of revenge to thoughts of suicide. Reference in the course of the Condolence to removing the darkness and restoring the light is therefore direct reference to taking away death&#039;s negative influence on the living. In modern Haudenosaunee communities, it is said that deaths come in clusters, often in threes. This is not just a spiritual belief: it is a pragmatic recognition by Haudenosaunee psychology that death engenders depression, anger, grief, and depths of emotion and change that must be addressed. Death suppressed, death uncondoled, can bring more death.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The structure of the Condolence ceremony, like that of the thanksgiving, is deliberate, orderly, and layered.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Foster (1974) uses the term “hierarchical” to describe the thanksgiving: how the speaker moves carefully and deliberately from the earth to the sky world, naming the parts of the world and of life in a specific order. The Condolence, too, has its “hierarchy.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It moves from relieving the simplest physical pain—of eyes, ears, throat—to removing external reminders of death and revenge, and finally to restoring harmony, making things as they should be. It moves from the easiest to the most difficult. It moves from symptoms to causes. Only at the end does it suggest that the minds of the &amp;quot;downfended&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The term “downfended” is used in connection with the Condolence, especially by William Fenton. It is an unusual word, and has given rise to unusual interpretations (including the idea that the Peacemaker was born with a caul, and would require unusual care and tutelage; or that his mother was protected by goose down and corn husks on the ground around her home—“down-defended”—so that one would be able to see if anyone had slipped in. I prefer to take the term to mean simply that the people’s minds are “downcast” by grief (see Gibson 1899, para. 131: Fenton’s explanation of Hewitt’s notes on this issue).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; people are ready to once again raise up a person to take the place of the departed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The message in this transaction is a very important one which needs attention in the area of political theory. The Peacemaker and Hiawatha seem both conscious of the fact that human beings reach places of psychological pain, or feelings of rage, or despairing of hope. They recognized that at such times it is difficult to reach clear thinking and they directed a considerable amount of attention to the pain being felt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this particular instance, the pain Hiawatha felt at the death of his daughters has led him to despair of life. On the day the Peacemaker found him sitting beside the small lake, Hiawatha&#039;s mind was clouded in grief. By countering the grief, by showing care and a commitment to brotherhood, the Peacemaker brought Hiawatha from a place of despair, eventually to a place of hope.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This encounter has powerful implications in the cultural history of the Haudenosaunee. The historical incident at which the Peacemaker recruited Hiawatha provided the model for the condolence practices in the installation of leaders, and provided some of the process by which peace treaties were to be conducted in this part of the world for a long time.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mohawk 1989, 222.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By converting the Cannibal, the Peacemaker had acquired a messenger: the man was a living demonstration of the power of the Good Message and would carry that demonstration among the people and nations he met. In Hiawatha, the Peacemaker had acquired a partner, someone who would carry the message with him. From this point on in the making of the law, most versions have the two men acting as a team, the man without a nation and the Mohawk/Onondaga; the messenger from the Creator and the reconstructed grieving hermit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several possible translations for the name &amp;quot;Hiawatha.&amp;quot; Each is linked to an aspect of the law. One says the name means &amp;quot;wampum seeker&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;wampum maker,&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hale (1883) 1989, 21 and 154: “This name . . . is rendered ‘He who seeks the wampum belt.’ Chief George Johnson thought it was derived from &#039;&#039;oyonwa&#039;&#039;, wampum-belt, and &#039;&#039;ratiewatha&#039;&#039;, to look for something, or rather, to seem to seek something that we know where to find. M. Cuoq refers the latter part of the word to the verb &#039;&#039;katha&#039;&#039;, to make. . . . The name would then mean ‘He who makes the wampum-belt’. . . The Senecas . . . render (the name) ‘he who combs.’”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; recalling how he experimented with other kinds of beads and strings of beads in his attempts to construct ceremonies of Condolence before he and the Peacemaker agreed on shell wampum. Hewitt suggests that it means &amp;quot;River Seeker.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hewitt 1907b.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; This could be a reference to wampum, again, since kahswénhtha, the old name given to wampum belts, can be a reference to how they flow through time like a river flows. Morgan calls him &amp;quot;He Who Combs,&amp;quot; commemorating how he would comb the snakes out of Thadadaho&#039;s hair.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Tooker 1978, 424 (citing Hale 1883a, 154; Beauchamp 1891, 296; Fenton 1950, 59); Morgan (1871) 1997, 130; (1851) 1995, 64.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Skaniatariio John Arthur Gibson, in 1899, translated the name as &amp;quot;He rises early,&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1899, para. 64—because when the Peacemaker arrived at his house, Hiawatha had already gone away to hunt. Assigning people new names is consistent with how the Peacemaker is creating a new peaceful world and giving people new lives. Power to name is power to define, and sometimes direct.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and also as &amp;quot;He Sifts.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1899, fn. 25.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Together, the two men devised a strategy for taking the message of peace to the five nations. They agreed that the Mohawks should receive the three words or principles of peace first. The Peacemaker approached them alone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Three Words: Peace, Power, and Righteousness ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker took his message to the Mohawk village&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In some versions of the Great Law, there is one village for each nation, it seems. By the time the Europeans arrived, it looks as if the Mohawks were living in clan villages—Bear, Turtle, and Wolf—and that some time afterward the villages became multi-clan. Archaeologically, it appears there would be a large palisaded or fortified village with several smaller hamlets up to four or five miles away. In wartime, the people of the outlying hamlets would retreat into the larger town.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; first. The people were assembled. They had to wait for three of their leaders, the chief, the Great Warrior, and his deputy.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;This contains the shadow of the suggestion that civil and military affairs were already separated, with the chief dealing with peace and civil matters, and the Great Warrior dealing with war.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For this plan to work the Peacemaker was required to convince a very skeptical audience that all human beings really did possess the potential for rational thought, that when encouraged to use rational thought they would inevitably seek peace, and that the belief in the principles would lead to the organized enactment of the vision . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker spent considerable time moving from individual to individual among the leadership of the people who much later would come to be known as the Mohawk, the Oneida, the Onondaga, the Cayuga and the Seneca nations. His mission appears to have taken time. He was interested in reaching the thinking of each of these human beings as individuals. He seemed to go right at the intended target individual to offer his hope for the future of mankind, his definition of a way of coming to power, to peace, and to a better tomorrow for all his people, indeed for all mankind.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mohawk 1989, 221.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In speaking to larger groups, the Peacemaker spoke more bluntly and simply. Where with Hiawatha he engaged in a long and caring Condolence, with the Mohawks he spoke of the three basic words:&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In a culture without writing, it is understandable that the word for a “matter” and for a “word” would be the same: orihwa. But “word,” the spoken part of speech, is also owenna.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; those that have been translated as Peace, Power, and Righteousness.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While in the law and in councils, there is frequent reference to &amp;quot;words,&amp;quot; in fact it would be better to think of these as &amp;quot;matters&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;ideas.&amp;quot; Each is something to be considered separately and in the order it was given or proposed, but each one is also inextricably linked to the others. In council, the &amp;quot;words&amp;quot; are deliberately of a manageable, understandable size, so that once all the matters have been addressed and decided, one at a time, together they form a coherent policy. A &amp;quot;word&amp;quot; may be complex. It may be part of a sequence. But it is an idea, a whole unto itself:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then Tekanawita stood up, saying, &amp;quot;I, indeed, am arriving with the Good Message and the Power and the Peace; now it will cease, the warfare and the scalping and the shedding of human blood. This, actually, is how it is on earth: there are pools and streams of human blood. And this now will cease. This, too: you are the first whose village I am visiting with this message you are hearing now.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereupon the chief and the Great Warrior and his deputy conversed in whispers, deciding that they would ask what was the meaning of the three words. Thereupon he stood up, the chief, saying, &amp;quot;We have heard you report the message you are bringing, and we want to ask you about the three words: first, what does &amp;quot;Good Message&amp;quot; mean? Secondly, what is &amp;quot;Power&amp;quot;, and thirdly, what does it mean that &amp;quot;Peace is now arriving&amp;quot;?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then Tekanawita stood up in front of the whole group and said, &amp;quot;You shall listen well, for you wanted to ask questions so as to understand what it means, &amp;quot;Good Message&amp;quot;; this is what it means: people respect each other as though they are one person; also everybody is related among the various nations, so that now they will stop, the sins and activities of evil people; now everyone will repent, the old people and the young people; now everyone will respect one another among all of the nations; and just this is what will operate again, the good, and that is what the &amp;quot;Good Message&amp;quot; means.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Part of the procedure of a modern Haudenosaunee council, or a modern treaty council, is illustrated in this encounter. The speaker stands, while everyone else sits. When the speaker for one side of the fire has done speaking, the people on the other side talk softly about what they intend to reply, and then someone stands up to deliver the response. The two-sidedness, the gradual building of consensus, and the designated speaker are all things that would be typical of Haudenosaunee councils, at the clan, nation, Confederacy, and international levels.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Secondly, this is what &amp;quot;Power&amp;quot; means. All of the Nations will unite all their affairs, and the group of several nations will become just a single one, and their power is that they shall join hands.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The joining of hands—tehatiatnetsha—is the symbolic way of becoming one family. It is repeated, later, in the making of peace with nations beyond the Longhouse, and in the making of the Covenant Chain with the British.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; This, moreover, shall be the basis upon which they will survive as a group. Forming a single family, similar to being one person having one head and one life, surrounded by the Good Message. This is how peace will now come about among all of the Nations, and power will arise for families to continue from here on in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thirdly, this is what &amp;quot;Peace&amp;quot; means. Now it will stop, the massacre of humans and the scalping and bloodletting among themselves, specifically, among the people of the various nations. Now as to that, it will end, the human slaughter, because the Great Spirit never planned for humans to hurt one another nor to slaughter one another. So now it will end, the warpath, and everywhere it will become peaceful; the different nations&#039; villages are as neighbours and as to the localized families and their children, what will happen is that they will all be very close relatives; and it will come to pass that they will become just like one family which will encompass every nation and every language. And this: when everyone can travel from village to village, then it will end, the danger and terror, and then everything will be peaceful, and they will rejoice by day and by night as the family continues on, there being no end to peace; that is what it means, the Great Law of Peace, that everyone will be united.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 101–8.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An English translation does not accurately convey the actual meaning of the three ideas. They are more complex than the English words imply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne’skén:nen means &amp;quot;peace,&amp;quot; but it has different meanings when applied to a society or a people—where it means peace, tranquility, or rest (with its opposite being war, strife, or contention)—and to a living individual, where the same word also means health, soundness, and a normal functioning condition (with their opposites being disease, illness, and possession by witchcraft).&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In his footnotes to the 1899 Gibson version of the law, William Fenton, writing Simeon Gibson’s views, explains the multiple meanings of the three words. He translates them as “reason, righteousness and justice, peace and health, and authority or the force of law.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Good health—physical, mental, and spiritual—is thus an important aspect of the law. Haudenosaunee greetings carry this dual meaning, a wish for peace&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Shalom, salaam aleikum, pax vobiscum—greetings conveying the desire for peace are widespread. They are often interpreted as intended to wish personal peace, but they can be understood in the wider context, as well. Other concepts are also both societal and personal: &#039;&#039;jihad&#039;&#039; can mean holy war, but it is said that the great &#039;&#039;jihad&#039;&#039; is the one that is waged within each person.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; in a social and a personal sense. The common Seneca greeting, &amp;quot;Kanien’ké:ha niyá:wen sken:nen,&amp;quot; conveys the hope that the other person is grateful for his peace and good health. The Haudenosaunee perception of health does not stop at the boundary of the human body or human society. It extends to the world around us: environmental health means both that humans thrive in an environment that is free of things that cause disease, and that humans must avoid doing things that cause harm to the natural world. The mandate or responsibility of people in the world can be seen through the lens of health, in which &amp;quot;first, do no harm&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In the Hippocratic oath taken by Western doctors, this is the preliminary thought, the equivalent of the Three Bare Words.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; is a minimum standard, and restoration and maintenance of a healthy environment is an ongoing task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Karihwí:iyo, which is translated as &amp;quot;righteousness,&amp;quot; is more literally &amp;quot;the good word,&amp;quot; but &amp;quot;word&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;way&amp;quot; are blurred. Fenton asserts: &amp;quot;Its first denotation is &#039;&#039;gospel&#039;&#039;, wholesome doctrine, what is good to be heard, ethical teaching, values, ethics—righteousness. As its second meaning, it denotes justice, right, as formulated in the customs, manners, religion and ritualistic summations of the past experiences of the people. The first is the teaching of good doctrine; the second is the establishment of the good doctrine in institutional forms.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1899, para. 133, fn. 5. Karihwí:iyo, today, is also used to describe the “Code of Handsome Lake,” the summation of what the Seneca chief and teacher Skaniatariio taught in the late eighteenth century, codified at Tonawanda in the decades after his death. The Code represents “a good way of living” and is seen as an addition to the Kayanerenkó:wa.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sotsisowah John Mohawk warned of the implications of choosing the English word &amp;quot;righteousness&amp;quot; as a translation. It has taken on both a Christian religious aura and a negative tone (when someone is accused of being &amp;quot;self-righteous&amp;quot;). He explains the pragmatism that flows from the Haudenosaunee concept: &amp;quot;Righteousness . . . is a very dangerous word in English history. But let me just give a sense of how it was used. Righteousness means that almost all of us agree that some things are right, correct, positive, which is to say that they may not all agree that some things are obviously right and wrong. But there are some things they will agree on. So those are the things you start to build on. You have your conversation and your negotiations until you hit the rock hard things.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mohawk 2005b.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yoyanere, the root word of the law, Kayanerenkó:wa, can be translated into English as &amp;quot;good&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;goodness,&amp;quot; but it has several other meanings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Its broad spectrum ranges from &amp;quot;correct, proper, right&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;righteous, righteousness,&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;a path, a way, a way of being,&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;welfare.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;This last meaning is put forward in Fenton and Simeon Gibson’s translation of Gibson 1899, para. 38.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The concept encompasses all of these positive meanings. In its breadth, it has no English equivalent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lack of an English equivalent to yoyanere points out how ideas that are crucial in one culture can be seen, by the lack of similar words, to be less important in another culture, or to be understood with different emphasis. In Haudenosaunee terms, yoyanere is an important legal concept. In English, none of these ideas has a great deal of legal meaning. In criminal law, the ability to distinguish right and wrong is meaningful, but &amp;quot;rightness,&amp;quot; as a moral concept, is not really what the legal system is about. Rather, it is about what is legal and illegal.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;There is an important exception: equity is a distinct stream of British and hence Canadian law, governed by principles or maxims of fairness rather than statutes and the common law. As such, it is closer to many Indigenous legal systems and to the fundamental questions those systems address.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Yoyanere has no Anglo-American legal equivalent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other legal cultures in the world, though, do understand &#039;&#039;law&#039;&#039; as based on the same spectrum of meaning as yoyanere in Haudenosaunee law.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The Highland Scots, too, carried a sense of righteousness. “The Gaelic word &#039;&#039;náire&#039;&#039; is usually translated into English as ‘shame’ or ‘modesty’, although it has a wider usage than this in Gaelic, referring to the sense of what is right, proper and honourable. It is a key concept in the operation of Gaelic society. ‘Am fear a chaill a náire is a modh, chaill e na bh’aige’ (The person who has lost his propriety and his manners lost all he had).” Newton 2009, 148.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One of those legal cultures is that of Hawai&#039;i. &#039;&#039;Law&#039;&#039;, in the Hawai&#039;ian language, is &#039;&#039;kanawai&#039;&#039;, a term translated as &amp;quot;responsibility for water.&amp;quot; A fundamental concept of the legal system is &#039;&#039;pono,&#039;&#039; which has been translated as &amp;quot;righteousness,&amp;quot; but which also carries the meanings of &amp;quot;good, proper, correct, righteous, a path, a way.&amp;quot; The concept of &#039;&#039;pono&#039;&#039; is important enough to have been made a part of the motto of Hawai&#039;i, created by its last king: &#039;&#039;Ua mau ke ea o ha aina i ka pono,&#039;&#039; the life of the land is perpetuated in righteousness. &#039;&#039;Pono&#039;&#039; is also a central concept in the criminal law system of traditional Hawai&#039;ian law, &#039;&#039;Ho’oponopono,&#039;&#039; which centres on &amp;quot;prayer, discussion, repentance, and mutual restitution or forgiveness.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Pukui and Elbert 1992.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another legal culture that seems to have placed yoyanere at its core is that of ancient Rome. The &#039;&#039;Lex Aquilia&#039;&#039; governed loss wrongfully inflicted on property (&#039;&#039;damnum iniuria datum&#039;&#039;). For the first time in Roman history, a law provided a process for adjudicating disputes arising from property damage, and the most essential underlying element of this was the &#039;&#039;wrongfulness&#039;&#039; of the damage. &#039;&#039;Iniuria&#039;&#039;, &amp;quot;injury,&amp;quot; does not mean &amp;quot;physical harm.&amp;quot; It means a lack of &#039;&#039;ius&#039;&#039;, which is usually translated as &amp;quot;justice.&amp;quot; An injury to property, then, is wrongful because it is unjust. &#039;&#039;Ius&#039;&#039; is defined in the &#039;&#039;Encyclopedic Dictionary of Roman Law&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Berger 1953, 525.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; as embracing the whole of the law, &amp;quot;what is always just and fair,&amp;quot; what is right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fact that &amp;quot;law&amp;quot; is linked to following a proper path of conduct is demonstrated by the way the Romans dealt with dispute resolution and compensation. A person who has been sued, and who has denied liability and been found responsible by the court, is obliged to pay a double indemnity, twice the compensation claimed. By denying responsibility, he acted in a &amp;quot;non-Roman&amp;quot; way, unrighteously. The &#039;&#039;Lex Aquilia&#039;&#039; does not specify standards of conduct in detail. Roman society at the time was that of a city state, not an empire. It was coherent and cohesive enough that people &#039;&#039;knew&#039;&#039; what was right. The Code did not need to set out the principles of justice because they were already well-known: they were the fabric of society itself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Halakha,&#039;&#039; traditional Jewish law, is derived from an archaic term that describes the path that leads directly to the water hole. So is &#039;&#039;Sharia,&#039;&#039; traditional Islamic law. In both cases, following the correct path is the key to maintaining life in the desert that both religions lived in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Asia, the Buddha taught the &#039;&#039;Way&#039;&#039; to release from sorrow, the doctrine of the Eightfold Path. He spoke of right views, right aspirations, right speech, right conduct, right meditation, and right rapture. Joseph Campbell points out that &amp;quot;right,&amp;quot; in this context, is the &amp;quot;Sanskrit &#039;&#039;samyak&#039;&#039;, &#039;appropriate, whole, complete, correct, proper, true.&#039;&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Campbell 1972, 133.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Yoyanere. Ius. Pono. Halahka. Sharia. Samyak.&#039;&#039; They are essentially the same broad set of concepts. The idea is that people know what is right and will recognize and implement it. There is a moral dimension to law, and it is that dimension that makes it enforceable by society. It is what one feels viscerally, in one&#039;s guts (&#039;&#039;na’au&#039;&#039; in Hawai&#039;i). There are times when this sense is manifested in modern North American society. When some of the financial firms the federal government had bailed out persisted in giving their executives generous bonuses, Congress&#039;s 2009 clawback of the bonuses was based on a groundswell of public opinion, based not on sentiment but on a sense of &#039;&#039;injustice&#039;&#039;. What they did, people said, was not &#039;&#039;right.&#039;&#039; The danger of translating yoyanere simply as &amp;quot;goodness&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;righteousness&amp;quot; is that those words do not imply the legality, in modern English, of the concepts. Having a law with yoyanere at its core presses towards a legal system based on principle rather than detail. The key questions, as John Mohawk insisted, are consistently: &#039;&#039;What is the thinking? Is the thinking right?&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The third &amp;quot;word&amp;quot; or principle of the peace, Ka’satsténshsera, is often translated into English as either &amp;quot;power&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;righteousness.&amp;quot; It is an imperfect translation. The concept can mean &amp;quot;the power of peace.&amp;quot; It is the power to get things done. John Mohawk explained:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He promised them power. Not military power, but the power of righteousness. Where would this power of righteousness come from? In some societies this is a negative idea because righteousness is often presumptive, unthinking, and uncaring. He defined righteousness as the result of the best thinking of collective minds operating from principles which assume that a sane world requires that we provide a safe environment for our children seven generations into the future.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mohawk 1989, 224.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Power, your power to act, depends upon your capacity to believe what it is that you set about doing can be done. In other words, you won&#039;t do what needs to be done if you think it is a futile gesture.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mohawk 2004, n.pag.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Simeon Gibson explained to William Fenton that the term&#039;s first meaning is &amp;quot;force, authority based on force, as expressed in the war power of the people; and its second meaning is the power, force or authority of the orenda or magic potency of the institutions of the people.&amp;quot; Both of these ideas are quite different from the thoughtful, pragmatic way John Mohawk explained the power to act.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The English word &amp;quot;power&amp;quot; derives part of its usefulness from its vagueness. It means two quite different concepts, ability and authority.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In French, &#039;&#039;pouvoir&#039;&#039; is verb as well as noun, and is much more linked to being able to do something.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Thus, when one says &#039;&#039;The Prime Minister has the power to chair cabinet meetings&#039;&#039; (a matter of authority), one is referring to something very different from &#039;&#039;Superman has the power to fly&#039;&#039; (a matter of ability).&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The example comes from Dr. Kanakalût Roland Chrisjohn. In French, &#039;&#039;pouvoir&#039;&#039; is much closer to its root in ability: the verb means that one &#039;&#039;can&#039;&#039; do something.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In the case of Thadadaho, the authority he ended up with in the law, as a result of the consent and consensus of the founders of the Confederacy, was quite different from the authority he had taken in his earlier form, which flowed from his &amp;quot;preternatural&amp;quot; ability to do harm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The dual meanings in Haudenosaunee languages of the Peacemaker&#039;s three basic messages were generally complementary, each word implying a range of desirable consequences, whether the peace was social or personal, a matter of health or tranquility; whether the righteousness was about justice or about religion; whether the power was the physical or the spiritual force of the people. Translated into English, the three concepts have acquired the further baggage of the English words. &amp;quot;Peace&amp;quot; tends to lose the health connotations of ne’skén:nen; &amp;quot;power&amp;quot; tends to accentuate its military meaning; &amp;quot;righteousness&amp;quot; takes on its Christian connotations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
John Mohawk would translate the three concepts as &amp;quot;peace, righteousness and reason.&amp;quot; Reason, he said, &amp;quot;means that you&#039;re going to do the rock hard things&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You&#039;re not going to settle them, really, but you&#039;re going to do the best you can with them. You&#039;re going to move them as far forward on as many points as possible. The Iroquois law of peace assumes that you will not achieve peace. You will not achieve a perfect agreement between two warring sides about how the world ought to be in the future. But it also assumes that you can reach enough of it to have something to work on so that you can take the conflict from physical warfare over to a place where, as they used to say, thinking can replace violence.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mohawk 2004, n.pag.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ability to grasp the principles of Righteousness is a spark within the individual which society must fan and nurture that it may grow. Reason is seen as the skill which humans must be encouraged to acquire, in order that the objectives of justice may be attained and no one&#039;s rights abused. The Power to enact a true Peace is the product of a unified people on the path of Righteousness and Reason—the ability to enact the principles of Peace through education, public opinion and political and, when necessary, military unity.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Ibid.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In explaining the three great ingredients of the law and the peace as a process, John Mohawk reflected on the difference between English, which would use statutes to establish standards, and Haudenosaunee languages, which look towards processes and relationships. Peace, he says, is permanently an objective rather than an achieved state.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Perhaps Canada and Australia applied this reasoning when they provided lukewarm endorsements of the United Nations Declaration on the Rights of Indigenous Peoples—which they had earlier voted against—as an “aspirational document.” It is more likely, though, that they were worried about the implications of the Declaration concerning land and consent.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee Environmental Health Model, a modern manifestation of the three great matters of the law, breaks these three words down into additional components:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Kanikonhriio&#039;&#039; is measured by assessing several areas:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Iakorihwenton&#039;&#039; – Commitment&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Karihwakwenienhtshera&#039;&#039; – Respect&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Kaiatakweniiotsera&#039;&#039; – Responsibility&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Skennenkowa&#039;&#039; is measured by assessing several areas:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Enskarihwakwarihshion&#039;&#039; – Ability to resolve issues&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Kanoronhkwahthsera&#039;&#039; – Love&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Atenonhwaratonhtserakon&#039;&#039; – Gratitude&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Kasatstenhsera&#039;&#039; is measured by assessing several areas:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Iakotahsnienonhskon&#039;&#039; – Generosity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Ronatennikonhraroron&#039;&#039; – Collective thinking&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Why three words? While they may be a reflection of the three words (eyes, ears, and throat) at the beginning of the Condolence, the words used without wampum in a greeting at the woods&#039; edge, the number three is itself significant.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;A chief is warned three times before he is removed. There are three attempts to persuade Thadadaho, and the third succeeds.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It recalls the three breaths that the Creator blew into the first human to give him life. Not all Haudenosaunee thinking involves duality: there are also triads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Taiaiake Gerald Alfred explains:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It starts with the rhetorical gestures that we call the &amp;quot;rare words&amp;quot;:&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Again, not “rare,” but “bare”: they are the words spoken at the edge of the woods without wampum in the speaker’s hands.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; wiping the eyes, cleansing the throat, and unblocking the ears. These are symbolic gestures to pacify grieving people, or the former adversary in a treaty process. The reason that you have to pacify these people is that they are in pain: they can&#039;t see properly, they can&#039;t hear, and they don&#039;t speak the truth. Something serious has happened to them, and the challenge for the strong-minded, the peacemakers, is to take them beyond the pain to a place of peace. What happened to bring them pain? In the ritual—and all your life, if you desire peace—you have to figure out a way of saying something to those people, doing something, or giving them something that will make them capable of seeing, hearing and speaking their way back to peace.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Alfred 1999, xx–xxi. Taiaiake uses the structure of the Condolence to suggest political and social paths to “requickening” the sovereignty of Indigenous peoples.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The three concepts can also be understood as a sequence. A person hears and is persuaded by the word, the Good Message. He becomes good-minded, and this infuses him with the power of righteousness. In turn, this enables him to seek, create, and maintain the peace.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;A person who has joined the peace has the obligation to maintain and spread it. Similarly, a person who has been healed by a Haudenosaunee medicine society becomes a member of that society, who then takes part in maintaining its medicine and healing other people.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The three concepts are, in a way, a mirror of the three concepts contained in the silver links of the Covenant Chain treaty relationship, made with the British Crown in 1677 and with the United States more than a century later: respect, trust, and friendship. Respect must be achieved first. Based on respect, one may build trust, and friendship may grow from that. But one cannot trust someone one does not respect, and one cannot build a friendship with someone who cannot be trusted. In each case, the three concepts have an order to them, and must be implemented in sequence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the three factors that led to the breakdown of the society of the five nations were greed, hatred, and jealousy, the three new words are their counterparts and antidotes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A constant element in the story of the making of the law is that the Cannibal, Hiawatha, and Tsikonsaseh are living alone—and the Peacemaker invites them not only to return to civil society, but also to learn to share again, for they were not only living but also eating alone. Refusing to share is selfishness, a denial of social responsibility. That is why these people share a meal with the Peacemaker once their minds accept the peace. It is a sign that they have once again accepted the proper way to live with other people. Restoring physical health, mental health, and social health are interwoven.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== From Individuals to Nations ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The building of the Great Law follows a deliberate strategy: to gather together individual minds first; to gather support and confidence; and to build from the conversion of individuals to the conversion of entire nations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker tests his tactics on the Cannibal. He tests his reason with Tsikonsaseh. He develops his compassionate and spiritual authority with Hiawatha. He tests political pragmatism on Thadadahoh. Then he begins to bring the chiefs onside, and with them their families and communities. At each step, the momentum of peace builds, gaining both detail and weight.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This strategy is later reflected in the way consensus is built in council, and even later in the way the Haudenosaunee would deal with other nations. An idea is put forward. It is stated positively but gently, tentatively, to avoid conveying any sense of aggressive or confrontational intent. The people on the other side of the fire then agree with it and add to it, equally constructively, so that, as the matter goes back and forth across the council fire, it gathers energy as it becomes more precise and focussed. Along the way, the talents and gifts of each participant are added to make the movement more effective. In negotiations as in council, the Haudenosaunee will tend to address the easiest issues first, to develop a set of agreements that will carry the parties into a mood of harmony as they develop the momentum to deal with the rock-hard things. They know the hard things are there, and are not going away. Amassing agreement on the easier things makes it more difficult to walk away from the hard ones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process of peace is also structured, in the sense that it follows a pattern, from the smaller to the larger, from the least powerful to the most powerful, and from the easiest to the most difficult.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This flow is reflected in the discussion in the law about the nature of government. That conversation, like many Haudenosaunee matters, is about the process of authority rather than its specific events. It is also about the flow of authority from the people through the chiefs and clan mothers, rather than the vesting of authority in the chiefs to make executive decisions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker&#039;s journey of bringing nations together is not simply an east-west path. Instead, he begins with the Mohawks, visits the Senecas, then moves across to the Oneidas and Cayugas, returns to the Mohawks and Senecas, and then faces the Onondagas.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In the Gibson 1912 version, the Peacemaker goes to Seneca country after persuading the Mohawks and being rebuffed by Thadadaho (1912, 174–75).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; He criss-crosses the Finger Lakes region. This geographical path of persuasion might also be said to reflect the path of an idea or proposal in council. The path flows from the Older Brothers across the fire to the Younger Brothers, then back again and at last to the firekeepers (that is, if one does not count overcoming the Seneca warriors&#039; opposition at the very end).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Mohawk: Testing the Peacemaker ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Mohawks did not at first accept the Peacemaker&#039;s message. Naturally, it was the warriors who had the greatest hesitation, since they had the responsibility of protecting the village, but also because they had the heaviest personal stake in seeing the bloodshed continue. War was the source of their influence. They would not give it up easily.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;An historic example of this occurred in Tahlequa, Oklahoma, in the summer of 1843. The Cherokees, recently arrived after the Trail of Tears, proposed to the seventeen nations gathered there that they should coexist under the principles of the Great Law, which the Haudenosaunee had brought to the Cherokees in 1770. According to one record, all the nations accepted the principles of peace, except the Choctaws, who stated that “we love our warriors too much to take their game away from them.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The Great Warrior issued a challenge to the Peacemaker, as diplomatically and indirectly as possible under the circumstances:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As to me, this is what I personally am questioning. What will happen if we accept the Good Message and the Power and the Peace, and the other tribes do not accept it? Subsequently this could happen: perhaps they will come to massacre us. Hence this is what I personally would say to this man who has arrived, Tekanawita . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I might believe it if he were able to climb that tree growing over there beside the river, on the high bank, and if when he sits on the top of the tree, subsequently we were to cut down the tree, which would get knocked down in the direction of the river, now if this man . . . were to pass the test, surviving until dawn tomorrow, then I will immediately accept whatever message he has along.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 108–10 (Native North American Travelling College 2000, 22; Parker (Newhouse and Cusick) 1916, 16; Parker (Chiefs) 1916, 72). Parker specifies that the tree is bitter hickory which stood at the doorway of a woman named Desiio, and that the Peacemaker, climbing the tree, sang six verses of the Pacification song (Parker (Chiefs) 1916, 73fn). Cutting down the tree is repeated in the Peacemaker’s uprooting of a tree so that the weapons of war would be thrown into the pit beneath it.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This test recalls the account of the Peacemaker&#039;s grandmother trying to kill him as an infant. In both cases, the actions involved near-certain death, but without anyone resorting to a weapon, or even using their hands. Burning, drowning, falling, burying, exposure: they relied on the forces of the natural world to do the killing. And the Peacemaker, like Taharonhiawakon before him, was allied with all the natural world.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The account of testing the Peacemaker shows that a good idea is often not enough: people want proof that the idea will work, that it has real, demonstrable power. Reluctance to join the peace is based on fear of what might happen if one community puts down its weapons and others do not. Their enemies may fall upon them. The fear is reasonable enough. People want peace. They just do not want to die as a result of accepting it. It is significant that, in all the versions of the law, nobody says that he rejects peace because he wants bloodshed to continue. Instead, they remain armed out of rational fear. They ask the Peacemaker for a demonstration of the power of his protection. If the power protected him, they reasoned, it would also protect them. In contrast to the Great Warrior and his deputy (for the deputy had issued the same challenge), the chief of the Mohawks fully and gladly accepted the Good Message, the Peace, and the Power on behalf of his family.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 113. Jamie Jacobs of Tonawanada pointed out, in the 2013 recital of the law, that the chiefs of the eastern Seneca village were able to accept the peace without much hesitation, while the chiefs of the western town, which faced numerous enemies at the western door of the proposed longhouse, had to continue to act as war leaders as well as peace chiefs.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; This is a precursor of the difference in attitude and function of the &amp;quot;peace chiefs&amp;quot; and the &amp;quot;warriors.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Tehahenteh uses Rotiskenrakéhte as a translation for “warrior.” It describes a person carrying a burden of red ochre, to remind him that he is of the earth. &#039;&#039;–kehte&#039;&#039; describes both a burden and a duty.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In token of this, the Peacemaker gave the chief a new name: &amp;quot;This is now your name and they will use it to address you: Hayewatha, and all of the people will live by it, your name, and it will help them in succeeding generations to say &#039;Hayewatha.&#039;&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 114–15.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each time a leader accepts the peace, renouncing violence, repenting for his past conduct, the Peacemaker recognizes this by giving the man a new name, a name that will become a chiefly title. It is a watershed moment, marking a personal transformation.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;If he gives a new name to the Cannibal, there is no record of it. But then, the Cannibal is not a leader nor part of government, and his name would not be passed on through the generations.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In a way, it is as if the person who refused the peace no longer existed. He had become a new kind of person. The Peacemaker&#039;s authority is reflected in his power to rename people.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker submitted to the ordeal proposed by the warriors. He climbed the tree,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In climbing to the top of the white pine, is the Peacemaker emulating the eagle?&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and the tree was cut down and fell into the gorge, disappearing into the turbulent waters. The next day, the people saw smoke rising from a fire downstream. They went to investigate.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In Gibson’s 1899 version, Hiawatha is waiting, hidden, below the falls. The two men meet, and agree that the Peacemaker will move on to persuade the Cayugas, while Hiawatha emerges to finish the work among the Mohawks. If the Peacemaker disappeared and Hiawatha took his place, though, the Mohawks would likely be unpersuaded of his power: by 1912, Gibson recounted how the Peacemaker showed himself, alive and well, to the Mohawks, before heading eastward to confront the Great Witch (1912, 125–32).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The Peacemaker was alive and well.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Other holy men, or men of power or divinity, across the world have been subjected to a similar test to prove their immortality or power. Odin was hung in a tree, then drowned, then burned. So, too, Merlin, when he came out of the forest, suffered the traditional Celtic “threefold death” by hanging, falling, and drowning (sometimes hanging, drowning, and clubbing on the head, which is often more final) and then lived as proof of his power. So, too, in a way, was Jesus: the cross has often been called a tree, and the proof of his power, just as in the case of the Peacemaker, was that he came back from what appeared to be certain death. In each case, another aspect of the man’s power was fatherlessness.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The Mohawks then embraced the message of peace.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;At probably the same time as the Mohawks were testing the power and truth of the Peacemaker’s message by having him risk his life, in many parts of Europe there was a practice of testing truthfulness by torture. The Inquisition in Catholic countries, and the war against witchcraft everywhere in Europe, reflected European reliance on torture in much the same spirit as the Mohawks’ test.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today, Cohoes Falls on the Mohawk River—which according to tradition is the scene of the test—is considered a sacred place by many Haudenosaunee, though its power and flow have been restrained by a hydroelectric dam.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To prove his power, the Peacemaker subjected himself to a test that was almost certain suicide. It is as if the legend of the making of the peace contains two streams: on the one hand, a rational path of teaching, preaching, and persuasion, and on the other, a series of powerful, unusual, magical demonstrations of power.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;According to Newhouse (Parker 1916, 16) the Peacemaker also asserted another difference between himself and ordinary humans: “I am able to demonstrate my power, for I am the messenger of the Creator, and he truly has given me my choice in the manner of my death.” In Haudenosaunee belief, the number of the days of our lives is known only to the Creator and is preordained: the Peacemaker has been given an additional portion of free will.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In the latter path lie the white stone canoe, the test imposed by the Mohawks, and the physical &amp;quot;straightening out&amp;quot; of Thadadaho.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;John Mohawk points out that a fundamental difference between European and North American religions is the difference between “magic” and “miracles.” “Magic” is something that is achieved as a result of the powers of the natural world—like the healing performed by the medicine societies. “Miracles,” by definition, are unnatural. That is, if it can be shown that a “miracle” associated with a candidate for sainthood was actually a natural occurrence, then the event cannot be counted as a true miracle.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; How can they be reconciled? Do they need to be reconciled? Perhaps one can acknowledge that the Peacemaker had a variety of tools he could use, and he selected the devices according to the nature of the challenge. He carried both &amp;quot;power&amp;quot; in the sense of the authority that stems from rationality and pragmatism and &amp;quot;power&amp;quot; in the sense of the ability to do wondrous things.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;After the ordeal, a Mohawk chief asks Hiawatha to choose one of his seven daughters in marriage: Hiawatha selects the youngest, to which the father replies “that one indeed is the one I most dearly love” (Gibson 1899, para. 35). While there are suggestions of arranged marriages in early times, the idea of a man choosing among sisters, or of a father giving away that choice, is not consistent with what we know about the rights of women in Haudenosaunee society. While Hiawatha is married, the Peacemaker, in contrast, remains chaste and unmarried.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In most accounts, the Mohawks had not debated whether the ideas proposed by the Peacemaker were correct, but rather whether he had sufficient power, ka’satsténshsera, both physically and spiritually. When he demonstrated that power, by his survival, he then explained to the Mohawks that, by the very process of their deciding to embrace his message, they had shown that the law he was proposing worked for them, and would continue to work. They had made their decision by talking the matter over as a single family—e’tho ní:yoht ne skahwá:tsire tsi ní:yoht tsi wa’tesewarihwayén:ta’ne.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;“They all began to speak with one another, the women, the children, even the old ones”: Ta’ónen yakoya’terí:onh kentyohkwánen wa’thatihtarónnyon, konnónkwe, ratiksa’okón:a akwékon rotiksten’okón:’a nityotiyén:’a, nithotiyén:sa akwékon wa’thatihtharónnyon. Thomas 2010, 203.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; They had taken hold of the law by spontaneously engaging in the process that would make the law work, and bringing themselves together as a people in the manner that the law required.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Thomas 2010, 203–4.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By making a correct decision as a single family, the Mohawks had demonstrated ka’nikonhrí:yo, the Good Mind, in both its rational side and its moral side. By choosing peace over war, they had taken the second step, skén:nen, bringing themselves both peace and health. These two steps, taken in order, would inevitably lead to ka’satsténshsera. By showing the people that he carried this power, the Peacemaker had caused them to enact the first step, accept the second, and bring about the third.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Mohawks needed yet more reassurance. What if their enemies should continue to kill them &amp;quot;now that we are letting go of protecting ourselves to survive&amp;quot;? The Peacemaker reassured them, and told them not to worry: &amp;quot;It will stop now, the entire matter of the warpath, now that the door is closing, because now it will be in operation, the Good Message, where the several villages are distributed across the bush; it will be in operation, their Power, as they unite, the several nations; and there will be Peace from this Power.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 129–30.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tekarihoken, Hiawatha, and Satekariwate: The First Mohawk Chiefs ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the Peacemaker carried the message of the Three Words forward, he was constantly building the more detailed, internal structures of what would become the Haudenosaunee. The great message is constantly repeated in the various versions of the law, as the ingredients of what would become the council fall into place. With the Mohawks, the Peacemaker established the concept that a chief&#039;s title would become permanent, passed on to his successors. That is, the name of the first person to occupy a position would become the title conferred upon each person to hold that position in the future. In the case of the Mohawk chiefs, the Peacemaker gave them new names to recognize the importance of their commitment to peace.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;When the Europeans arrived, the Haudenosaunee imposed this practice upon them. The Sieur de Montmagny received the title of Onontiio, a rendering of his name, the Beautiful Mountain. Every governor of Pennsylvania became Onas, the Big Feather, after William Penn. The first Dutch commissioner, Arendt van Curler, lent his name—usually spelled Corlaer—to successive governors of New York and then governors general of Canada, as well as to the superintendent general of Indian affairs. For the sake of continuity, a title-name becomes a permanent reminder of historic relationships.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
According to Teyoninhokarawen John Norton, writing in the early 1800s, the Mohawk chiefs were given their title-names as a direct result of their commitment to the peace and their will to confront Thadadaho: &amp;quot;Tekanawitagh laid down the wampum he appropriated for the occasion: another Chief laying down his proportion said, &#039;Sadekariwa-tegh, said, &#039;tekarigkogea wakerighwageron&#039;; I put mine among the whole affair.&#039; The first was called from this experience, Satekariwategh, the other Tekarihogea.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Norton 1970, 103. Thayendenega Joseph Brant, Norton’s adoptive uncle, was known to have been writing a detailed history of the Haudenosaunee. That document has been lost. Norton’s journal, which was published in England, probably contains elements of Brant’s written document, but certainly contains elements of his knowledge.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ely Parker stated that Hiawatha enlisted Tekarihoken as his speaker and brother, while he would work in the background.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Converse, 1908, 188–89. This is the reverse of Dewaserage William Loft’s theory that Tekanawita would stay in the background while Hiawatha would do the speaking.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In Gibson&#039;s 1899 version, Tekarihoken and Satekariwate are recruited at Hiawatha&#039;s wedding to the former&#039;s daughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At that time the chief said, &amp;quot;So what kind of names shall you and I have?&amp;quot; Hiawatha replied, &amp;quot;You of course are the proprietor of this place. You moreover gave out the information that you and your collaborators had reached a common opinion (decision). And so then, as for you, your name (title) hereafter shall be Degaaihoo’geh, people shall continue to say, and now as to your particular co-worker, he is the one they shall continue to call Cha’degaaiwaa’de, &#039;Of the Same Opinion&#039;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In Gibson 1912, the deputy to the Great Warrior, who had “accepted the entire Good Message,” was named Satekariwade (Tshaɂtekaihwate) by the Peacemaker (1912, 126).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; . . . these titles which I have bestowed upon you two shall then be confirmed by Deganawii’dah when he comes here.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1899, para. 91. The two chiefs are also chosen to give thanks after the wedding meal, another of the many feasts used to bind the people together. Confirmation of names by the Peacemaker is a precursor of today’s confirmation of position through the Condolence.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Gibson&#039;s 1912 version, the Great Warrior of the Mohawks had been uncertain about the authenticity of the Peacemaker&#039;s message, and that was the origin of his title: &amp;quot;You were of two minds, with one you were thinking that it is not true what you have heard about the Good Message, and with the second you were thinking that to the extent that you will see an affirmation, it might be true. So now you accept the Good Message and the Power and the Peace. Now, moreover, I will tell you that this is your name, they will say Tekaihokeɂ, and the people of all nations will be sustained by your name in future days and nights as the families continue on.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 125–26. In Gibson’s 1912 version, the Mohawks agree to join the peace before Hiawatha’s last daughter is killed and he retreats into the woods.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These three men became the first decision-making committee&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;“You will co-operate, you chiefs . . . now you will all work for the Good Message, and the Power, and the Peace.” Gibson 1912, 127. The use of the term “committee” is uncomfortable: it is used in contemporary North America to describe a group of people with detailed authority, while in a Haudenosaunee context, in modern usage, there is a reluctance to establish “committees” for fear that they might usurp authority from the chiefs and therefore from the people. Delegations of tasks (and less frequently, authority) are generally made to individuals, or to ad hoc groups that will last as long as the task. “Committee” is the wrong word, but it is an English word that has been used to describe a group of people who are expected to work together.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; of the council of the Haudenosaunee: Tekarihoken, Satekariwate, and Hiawatha. The council of the League was being built, one piece at a time. All three titles are of the Turtle Clan. This is consistent with the historical record, in the sense that when Europeans first encountered the Mohawks, each of the three clans had a separate village.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;By the late 1600s, the Turtle Clan villages were east of “Anthony’s Nose,” a peak on the Mohawk River near the present Westchester, New York. The Bears were a little west of there, and the Wolves several miles west. Bonaparte 2006; Sivertsen 1997. Since men would marry outside their clan and move to their wives’ villages, each village would contain people of several clans, but a “Turtle Clan village” would have Turtle Clan women and Turtle Clan chiefs.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Westward ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker&#039;s journey then took him to see the &amp;quot;Great Witch,&amp;quot; probably Thadadaho, to prepare him for the coming of peace: &amp;quot;So this is what my errand was: we two should talk, so that he might change his habits. And this: shortly, he would work for and accept the Good Message and the Power and the Peace. This, moreover, is what happened: I promised that several tribes and I would come, and that we will all co-operate with him.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 173–74.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process of building the confederation was slow and deliberate. Visiting a reluctant chief involved planting seeds that might grow later, leaving ideas that could germinate, and slowly accumulating trust. If a person does not accept an idea immediately, one should avoid confrontation, and instead seek to return with more persuasive evidence at some later time. The Peacemaker does not retreat from his proposals, but he may move laterally, gathering strength and support, before coming forward again. &amp;quot;We two should talk&amp;quot; indicates the need for conversation. Conversation, communication, the process, is the beginning of peacemaking.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;U.S. President Lyndon Johnson was fond of quoting the Bible: “Come, now, and let us reason together” (Isaiah 1:18).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Visiting the Great Witch alone, knowing that &amp;quot;he is the one who is able to kill; moreover, he has killed many people,&amp;quot; was an act of courage and power.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From Onondaga territory, the Peacemaker went to see the Senecas. They, too, were reluctant to embrace the Good Message, though neither did they reject it:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereupon I left again, going to where the Tionontowaneh live; I arrived at the Chief&#039;s house and talked to him, notifying him that they were arriving, the Good Message and the Great Law and the Peace, and then the chief said, &amp;quot;On the other side of the river is the house of my deputy,&amp;quot; so then we crossed over and, arriving at the chief&#039;s house, we saw him and talked about all the matters and I reported everything.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;One aspect of the peacemaking process is ensuring that everyone has the same information. “I reported everything” implies that steps were being taken to reassure the chiefs that there were no secrets: that all was in the open, that nobody was being told things that the others did not know.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Thereafter the two of them answered, saying we will consider it later. And then I said, &amp;quot;You two will be notified again when unanimity is reached.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 175–76.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Peacemaker returned to Mohawk country and met with Hiawatha again, the Great Peace had become a movement. It was spreading with the help of many other people, and was not relying only on the efforts of the two leaders. The movement&#039;s spread was visible in the brave white columns of smoke rising to meet the sky:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tekanawita said, &amp;quot;look half way between the East and the South,&amp;quot; and Hayewatha, looking there, saw smoke rising and piercing the sky. Thereupon Tekanawita said, &amp;quot;See the smoke rising, piercing the sky. Now as to that, they have heard about the Good Message. This also: they believe in the Power and the Peace.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 176.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The reason you see the smoke piercing the sky is because the Good Tidings of Peace and Power have come to the people of that settlement … you will now see as you turn around in every direction the columns of smoke arising.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Chiefs) 1916, 79, 81.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As communities accepted the message, they would indicate their adherence with a column of white smoke, the colour of peace. In times of war and uncertainty, settlements would not advertise their presence: they would keep their fires low, smokeless, and unobtrusive.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;There is a tradition that one factor in choosing village sites was the presence of shagbark hickory trees. These trees would be girdled and would eventually fall over. The bark would be used in cooking fires, because it provides heat without smoke. In longhouses with overhead smokeholes, it would be important to avoid excessively smoky cooking fires. Conversely, one would boldly announce one&#039;s peaceful presence with a pillar of thick white smoke from an outdoor fire, an intentional signal fire.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; As the message gained momentum, these columns of white smoke became visible all around: reassurance, power, and themselves a Good Message, gathering strength, piercing the sky, an impetus and invitation to their neighbours to join in the peace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Oneida: Odatsehte ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Mohawks, at the eastern end of the geographic Longhouse, had embraced the message of peace and power first. East of the Mohawks lived Algonkian peoples—the Algonquins to the northeast; the Abenakis to the east; the Mahicans to the southeast. Between the Mohawks and these Algonkian peoples there were linguistic, geographic, and cultural barriers: it made more sense to work with people who were more open to the Mohawks. The Oneidas, living just west of the Mohawks, were linguistically, culturally, and geographically as close as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tekanawitagh set off for Onondagui and ascending the rapid stream of the Mohawk River, he came to Tehikaghkwetsni, now called Utica: there he met an Onida, with a wolf skin quiver.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;That the law would recall unusual details—Odatsehte’s wolf skin quiver, or Hiawatha’s fawn-skin bag for the wampum—may be an indicator of its connection to historical reality. When modern historians examined the &#039;&#039;Iliad&#039;&#039;, they confirmed that the black-hulled ships described in the text would indeed have been the kind used at the time of the Trojan War, 1,000 years before the text was reduced to writing, and long after black-hulled ships had faded into disuse.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The Onida saluted him by the title of brother, cousin, friend. To all of which Tekanawitagh made no reply. He then said, &amp;quot;I salute you my father&amp;quot;—true, my son (returned Tekanawitagh) &amp;quot;for none of the trees of the forest are equal to me in age: the willows of the River&#039;s banks alone approach it.&amp;quot; He then continued, &amp;quot;where are you going my father?&amp;quot; He replied, &amp;quot;I am going to soothe the angry feelings of Thatotarho; to reform his rugged appearance, and endeavour to make him like other men.&amp;quot; He then named the Onida, Odatsheghte, or the Quiver Carrier,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1899, 53: “Then Deganawii’dah said, ‘People to whom you are the great one (the Chief) shall call you Ho’datcheh’de,’ “He carries a quiver,” and the reason for this is because indeed you are taking your quiver (on the way to see Thadadaho).’”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; who replied. &amp;quot;Father, the day is now too far spent; let us remain at home this night. In the morning, if you will return, I shall throw a tree across the path to detain you a little while, and then we shall proceed together to the place where the smoke of Thadadarho&#039;s fires arise.&amp;quot; This was spoken allegorically to the season.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tekanawitagh returned home, and in the spring got ready for his embassy. They came to the abode of Odatsheghte, who entertained them kindly. The people of the Village assembled together, Odatsheghte rose and sung: &amp;quot;This is my father; he is my superior, and I will follow him.&amp;quot; Tekanawitagh interrupting him said: &amp;quot;that will not do, you must sing: &#039;My father and I shall risk together—we are the same.&#039;&amp;quot; Odatsheghte immediately complied, which satisfied him.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Norton 1970, 103–4. One of the techniques promoted by Fisher and Ury (1985) in &#039;&#039;Getting to Yes&#039;&#039; is sharing: not “I have a problem with you,” but rather “we have a problem to address together.” In this case, “we shall risk together.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker had met Odatsehte beside a cornfield. The Oneida chief had been guarding the corn. He told the Peacemaker: &amp;quot;They roam about, people we don&#039;t know, and they may spoil it, or perhaps wild animals might spoil the corn field, and this is what will impoverish the people, the old people and the infants and the children.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In the 2013 recital of the law, Odatsehte Howard Elijah described the bloody days before the coming of the law, saying that the women and children “were made poor,” literally and spiritually, by the warfare.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Actually, it is our sustenance, the corn.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 192. It is ironic, linguistically, that the guardian of the corn should become a Confederate lord. The English word “lord” is derived from the Saxon &#039;&#039;hlaford,&#039;&#039; meaning “loaf-ward,” the keeper or guardian of the bread and therefore the sustainer of his people. Equally ironic, the “corn” the loaf-ward would have guarded would be what in North America is called “wheat”—what is called corn in North America is still called “maize” in England; the keepers of very different crops were both guarding “corn.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thayendenega&#039;s 1801 version has the Peacemaker (the &amp;quot;Elder Brother&amp;quot; of two chiefs of the Mohawks) seek help from the Oneidas. He sought both their protection from Thadadaho&#039;s spiritual or magical power and their support in persuading Thadadaho to join in the peace. The story carries the flavour of the Peacemaker bringing the Oneidas into a protective alliance against the evil power of Thadadaho.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The contrast between the peaceful and warlike brothers also recalls the twins in the Creation story.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Elder Brother being grieved at the cruel disposition of the younger, resolved to go westerly and look for people, and form an alliance with them, he consequently went and met Odadseghte of the Onidas, by their conversation the Mohawk was found to be the elder, and therefore the Onida stiled him father, the Mohawk chief promised to come back the next day meaning the ensuing year and proceeded farther on the business of the confederacy. The next year he went to the Onidas according to the promise, he explained his intentions naming the nine divisions forming the Mohawk nation—it consisting of three tribes, the wolf, turtle and bear, and again were each divided into three subdivisions—the Onida got up and sang, mentioning that his father and him were united, and that his father would be the superior on this; the Mohawk stopped him, and rose, expressing by a song that it should not be so but that they both should be equal (at this the Onidas were satisfied). Upon this being passed the Onida wished to stop him (to rest a little) saying that he would throw a tree in the way that he could not get over this the other stiled him the big tree and they are yet so called.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Boyce 1973, 290; and Bonaparte 2006, 54.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now that the Oneidas and Mohawks had committed themselves to the peace, the Peacemaker began to erect the structure that would sustain it. As the three Mohawk chiefs had formed a first brotherhood, so three Oneida chiefs—Odatsehte, Kanuhkwe’yotu, and Teyoha’kwete—would form a second. They would now cooperate in the manner of families on opposite sides of the council fire.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In Gibson’s 1912 version, Goldenweiser translates this as “from now on you are to be members of opposite moieties.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The narrative of the making of the peace is also the narrative of the creation of the architecture of the symbolic Longhouse. With two nations committed, the Peacemaker was already able to begin describing how decision making would work, as matters would be considered by small committees first and then by the nations, and as matters would be passed across the council fire between the two groups of brothers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Removing Distractions: Opening the Path and Keeping It Open ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Haudenosaunee law and treaties, the need for open, unobstructed communication is a recurrent, persistent theme. It appears in the Condolence in the clearing of the eyes and ears and opening of the throat. It appears in treaty discussions as the removal of brambles and brush from the path of peace and communication between the nations. It appears in wampum belts that depict a straight line, the path between the nations&#039; council fires.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Maintenance, keeping the paths open, renewing commitments, repeating Condolences, are all linked to the concept that the more a path of peace is used, the plainer and smoother it will become. Relationships are not assumed: they are actively maintained.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
War is often the result of misunderstanding; misunderstanding flows from a failure to communicate; that failure results, at times, from obstacles and obstructions. The path of peace&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The path is a symbol, not a physical road. Yet even scholars like Horatio Hale seem at times to have taken the metaphor literally. After the founding of the League, says Hale, one tradition “which is in itself highly probable,” has Hiawatha “devoting himself to the congenial work of clearing away the obstructions in the streams which intersect the country then inhabited by the confederate nations, and which formed the chief means of communication between them. That he thus, in some measure, anticipated the plans of DeWitt Clinton and his associates, on a smaller scale, but perhaps with a larger statesmanship, we may be willing enough to believe” (Hale (1883) 1989, 35). In fact, Hiawatha would have been continuing the work of peace by maintaining the openness of communication.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; is kept open through constant vigilance and renewal. The river is kept free of rapids and rocks. Neither should the path be obscured by darkness: one Delaware wampum had &amp;quot;sticks thrust through it, as torches to light the way.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;One of the seven wampum belts preserved by the Cherokees in Oklahoma also has sticks thrust through it.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Standing and Walking ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Haudenosaunee councils and ceremonies, the speaker stands while all the people he is speaking for remain seated. Standing is a mark of respect for the people being spoken to. It is not a suggestion that he stands &amp;quot;above&amp;quot; them. It is also a rhetorical and political act: it draws attention to the speaker. Today in the Condolence, and formerly in most political councils as well, the speaker does not stand in one place: &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;Enyonghdentyonko kanoghsakonghson&#039;&#039;—&#039;to and fro in the house.&#039; In councils and formal receptions, it is customary for the orator to walk slowly to and fro during the intervals of his speech. Sometimes, before beginning his address, he makes a circuit of the assembly with a meditative aspect, as if collecting his thoughts. All public acts of the Indians are marked with some sign of deliberation.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hale (1883) 1989, 151. “Some sign of deliberation” shows that the matter is worthy of respect and thought. To act quickly would indicate that the matter was of little import, or that the speaker was arrogant.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Especially during long speeches, and more so in the past than the present, a speaker would walk up and down. Today, Western politicians tend to remain in one place, tethered to their prompters and microphones. Their Roman antecedents used a fixed rostrum, a pulpit adorned with the prows of defeated enemy warships, to address both the people in the Forum and the Senate. Occupying the rostrum was a sign of authority, a place of power. Different nations have their own reasons for having speakers stand in one specific location or move about as they speak. Architecture and acoustics affect the rhetorical cultures. As well, a speaker&#039;s location in council or in Parliament indicates his political identity and seniority. When a Haudenosaunee speaker would walk back and forth while speaking, he would do so on his side of the council fire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Onondaga: Thadadaho ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To the west of Oneida territory lies the land of the Onondagas, the People of the Mountain. Blocking the path to peace was the despotic leader of that nation, Thadadaho. He is presented in most accounts as the greatest obstacle to peace. It took the combined efforts of all the nations, all the people, both men and women, and both mental and spiritual power to overcome him.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no doubt that, by the time he was a mature man, Thadadaho&#039;s mind had become powerfully twisted.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;His name means “entangled,” though Hewitt (1892b, 131) states that Skanawati John Buck translated it as “the Assassinator.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; One legend describes how he came to be this way:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In his youth he had been gentle and mild, fond of innocent amusements and the chase, and he was beloved by his people who looked forward to the time when he would be chosen their chief and become their counsellor. But one day when hunting in the mountains he chanced to kill a strange bird which, though beautiful in plumage, was virulently poisonous. Unaware of its deadly nature, Ot-to-tar-ho, delighted with his prize, plucked its bright feathers to decorate his head and while handling them inhaled their poison which entering his brain maddened him and upon his return to the village in an insane rage, he sought to kill those whom he met. Amazed at the strange transformation the people were in great consternation and fled from him in fear. No more the gentle Ot-to-tar-ho; no more did he care for their games; no more did he care for the chase, but was sullen and morose and shunned all companionship with his people who also avoided him for he had developed a mania for killing human beings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The poisonous fire that had burned in his brain had so distorted his features that he became hideous to behold; his long glossy hair fell from his head and in its stead there grew serpents that writhed and hissed when he brushed them back from his face and coiled around his pipe in rage when he smoked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Many believed he had been witched, that some ferocious animal had taken possession of him; others that he was controlled by an evil spirit who was seeking to destroy the nation. Various were the surmises of the people but the mystery baffled them and their appeals to the medicine men were received by these wise men in silence; yet they sought by long fasting and dancing in various incantations to appease the wrath of the evil one, but their efforts were in vain for still the demon if demon it was, continued to dominate Ot-to-tar-ho, who only became more furious and violent and seemed to have endowed him with supernatural powers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
His mind had become so powerful that it could project a thought many miles through the air and kill whomsoever he desired. Developing clairvoyance of vision and prophecy, he could divine other people&#039;s thoughts and through this power came to dominate the councils, assuming a control that none dared oppose, and ruled for many years with such insane and despotic sway that he broke their hearts and the once powerful, proud and most courageous of all the nations became abject and cowardly and weak.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Converse 1908, 118–19. Converse’s source about the inhalation of the poison was Donehogowa Ely Parker.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other versions add details, almost joyously enhancing the physical and spiritual distortions of Thadadaho:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
South of the Onondaga town there lived an evil minded man. His lodge was in a swale and his nest was made of bulrushes. His body was distorted by seven crooks and his long tangled locks were adorned by writhing living serpents.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Deyonwe’ton Jake Thomas used to say that the serpents were rattlesnakes that would strike at anyone coming close. Sakokwenionkwas Tom Porter has added that Thadadaho’s skin was like fish scales, and his hair like Rastafarian dreadlocks.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Moreover, this monster was a devourer of raw meat even of human flesh. He was also a master of wizardry and by his magic he destroyed men but he could not be destroyed. Adodarho was the name of the evil man.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Harriet M. Converse states that, becoming sullen and morose, he “developed a mania for killing people. His hair fell from his head.” She says that with “his fingers and toes terminating with the hissing snakes, and by a glance of his eye, turning to stone anyone who dared deny his authority.” The parallel with the snake-haired Medusa, whose glance turned ancient Greeks to stone, is too obvious (Converse 1908, 128, 129).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A thing—a shape—that was not human but rather supernatural and deformed; for the hair of Tha-do-da-ho was composed of writhing, hissing serpents, his hands were like unto the claws of a turtle, and his feet like unto bear&#039;s claws in size and were awry like those of a tortoise, and his body was cinctured with many folds of his &#039;&#039;membrum virile&#039;&#039;—truly a misshapen monster.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hewitt 1892b, 136.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He was a person of a frightful deformed aspect, with hissing serpents hanging from his head instead of hair.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Norton 1970, 103.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When they beheld him &amp;quot;A-do-dar-ho&amp;quot; they were so terrified that they was going to run right out of the Long House. For he was such Superhuman looking man, and of such preternatural of his humanity which he exist, never was seen or heard off amongst the Nations. &amp;quot;His hairs on his head was all full of living snakes. His finger ends were all snake heads, and little above both or his wrists was bent or crook.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Newhouse 1885, 21.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the mid-1800s, the physical twistedness of Thadadaho was recognized as a matter of metaphor and legend, an extension of his entangled mind and spirit.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hale (1883) 1989, 7 wrote that “the grave councillors of the Canadian Reservation, who recite his history as they have heard it from their fathers at every installation of a high chief, do not repeat these inventions of marvel-loving gossips, and only smile with good-humored derision when they are referred to.” Even so, physical deformity must at some point have been considered to reflect mental deficiency or deformity, as well, or there would not have been a tradition that a royá:ner must be physically whole and wholesome. In 1870, at the General Council, John Smoke Johnson summarized the story: “the leader (of the Onondagas) was almost inhuman, not only in appearance but in mind, ungovernable in temper and fierce to all, until he was persuaded by them. His appearance in body, a crooked sort of man, with uneven crooks. Yet the brothers persuaded him and he became one” (General Council, 1870, 7).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thadadaho drew his power—his ability—from the Dark Side, from spiritual and physical powers that complemented one another and that enabled him to threaten and injure people, both those near him and those at a distance. Through intimidation he ruled:&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Intimidation and imposition of authority stand in sharp contrast to the consent and affection that linked Thadadaho to the council and the people after his transformation. If a theme of the law is that individuals can be transformed and persuaded to stand for peace, the extreme spiritual, physical, and political transformation of Thadahaho is the most dramatic (but not the only) example.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Notwithstanding the evil character of Adodarho the people of Onondaga, the Nation of Many Hills, obeyed his commands and though it cost many lives they satisfied his insane whims, so much did they fear his sorcery.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Newhouse and Cusick) 1916, 17.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Though an element of the Dark Times was witchcraft—another contributor to the bloody revenge-taking, anger, and war—Thadadaho was exceptional, because his deformities of body and spirit, and consequent abilities, were so extreme that an entire nation was in thrall to them. To the peacemakers, he represented a true obstacle. If he could not be overcome, the peace would not be possible. As with the others that the Peacemaker met, the choice seemed to lie between changing him or removing him. In a time of uncertainty, the people working for peace recognized that there were many whose minds needed to be changed, but&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
the craziest of whom was the chief of the Onondagas . . . they found him sitting on a pile of thorned mats,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The thorned mats stand in contrast to the soft, down-lined mats prepared for the comfort of the chiefs, and in the Condolence. The physical discomfort caused by the thorny mats would contribute to the pain and anger in Thadadaho’s mind.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; with live snakes woven into his long hair. His eyes shook in horror and he could not focus them. He wanted to acquire power with murder. They offered him a chance to accept the good mind. Otherwise they would have to eliminate him. The only real threat to human survival is insanity—people unable to think clearly about other human beings. Clearly, he fit into that category.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mohawk 1987, 10–17. In the Condolence, one string is used to remove the insanity that is brought about by grief.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Over the Woods: Haii Haii ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Skaniatariio&#039;s 1912 version of the law, the Peacemaker and Hiawatha agree to meet in Oneida country. While Hiawatha conducts preliminary discussions with the Oneida chiefs, the Peacemaker has gone to see &amp;quot;the Great Witch,&amp;quot; the one who has the power to kill people (Oneida territory is just east of Onondaga country, Thadadaho&#039;s home). Even before the Oneidas agree to join the peace, the Peacemaker appears to have persuaded the Great Witch that the nations would work with him if he abandoned his evil ways.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;“Great Witch” is an unusual English equivalent for ho-otko-kowa, a person of great badness. Gibson 1912, 173. Gibson’s 1899 version makes reference, as well, to Tehononsae’ehwan, “He whose house obstructs the path.” It is suggested that the orientation of today’s Onondaga longhouses—north-south where every other longhouse is east-west—echoes this blocking of the path (Gibson 1899, para. 145, fn. 82).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The time had come to face Thadadaho. This is perhaps the only true, deliberate, face-to-face confrontation in the process of the making of the law.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The later confrontation with the Seneca warriors does not seem to have been planned.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It required planning, preparation, and courage. The Peacemaker took the time spent on the path from Oneida to Onondaga as an opportunity to teach the people the ideas and songs they would need and use in that confrontation. The songs would give them courage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And when Dekanawita&#039;s appointed time was due for them to go to Onondaga, the Mohawk chiefs and the people assemble together in their Long House. Dekanawida appointed a war chief to sing the Pacification (Confederating) Hymn (which Dekanawida did compose it) on their journey to Onondaga. So the (war) chief commence to sing thus &amp;quot;Haii Haii Haii haii&amp;quot; &amp;amp; so on as they went out of the Long House. And while (they were) journeying through the forest, and (were) passing by a certain tree, there was a very large knot in this tree, the tree spoke and said &amp;quot;Oh-ne-kenh, Ni-ya-wen-enh-ha-tyeh&amp;quot; (the meaning of this Mohawk words, &amp;quot;What&#039;s up&amp;quot;). Then Dekanawida answered and said &amp;quot;We are on our way to Onondaga to pacify and convert the (Great Sorcerer) monstrous (and) evil spirited Thadodaho. To establish peace. In the hostile nations (that it may all be done away).&amp;quot; The foregoing verses Dekanawida did compose in &amp;quot;Confederating Hymn&amp;quot; which he used when he established the Five Nations Confederacy he called &amp;quot;() wa-di-nonh-senh-deh-thah.&amp;quot; It begins as follows Haii haii. Haii haii. &amp;amp; so on. And the writer of this work succeeded in dividing it into thirty verses. And this is the hymn that Dekanawida&#039;s singer was singing on their way to Onondaga.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From here below, while Dekanawida&#039;s messenger was exploring the forests (where) to discover Thadadahoh&#039;s smoke ascending from the earth to the sky. The reader will see the &amp;quot;Pacification Hymn&amp;quot; that was sung all the way through the forest from the Mohawk River to Onondaga in the State of New York. And the said Hymn was submitted to the Mohawk Chiefs after Dekanawita composed, and confirmed by them. With the ceremony to create (Rodiyaner) Lords.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Newhouse 1885, 29. The song for the journey is called, in English, “Over the Woods.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The people, led by the Peacemaker and Hiawatha, were walking the path between Oneida and Onondaga.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The people involved were likely adults, male and female. The children would have been left at home, and the old people, who would have difficulty on long walks, would be looking after them.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It would not have been a terribly long path: the distance from Oneida Lake to Onondaga Lake would take a man a day at its shortest. The path may have been dangerous, and this would have been another reason for the people to announce themselves by singing as they walked. The song the Peacemaker taught them along the way is a song of dignity and power, a song unlike others. It is a slow, dignified song, with a leader who carries the main part and a response by the people as they walk. It is the song that the people sing &amp;quot;along the road&amp;quot; as they walk today to the longhouse to condole a grieving people and raise up a new chief.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As sung, it (Haii) is the most prominent feature, and is expressive of joy or sorrow according to the tone, as with some of our ejaculations. Hennepin said: &amp;quot;There was an Iroquese captain who, one day wanting his bowl, entered into the town of Montreal in Canada, crying &#039;Hai! Hai!&#039; which in their language is the sign of peace; he was received with many caresses of kindness.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Beauchamp (1907) 1975, 352–53.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While the songs themselves are probably unique to the Haudenosaunee, the use of haii haii within the songs is probably not. The sound is one of pacification, for several nations: Onondaga sentinels in the woods would have known that the walkers were coming in peace. Describing the Huron Feast of the Dead, Brebeuf wrote: &amp;quot;At the end of the feast, as a compliment to him who entertained them, they imitated, as they say, the cry of the souls, and issued from the cabin crying &#039;&#039;haéé, haéé&#039;&#039;, and reiterated this cry of the soul all the way. This cry, they say, comforts them greatly; otherwise this burden, though but of souls, would weigh heavily on the back, and cause them a pain in the side for the rest of their lives.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Beauchamp (1907) 1975, 353. Hewitt asserted that “the body of rites and customs pertaining to the ancient decennial dead feast common to many, if not all, of the Iroquoian tribes and peoples, was mainly the basis upon which the institutions of the Extended House were established” (Hewitt 1892b, 131). I suggest that the Dead Feast exhibits many of the principles shared with the constitution—continuity and commitment of the people; gathering minds together and making them good again by removing grief and anger; gratitude; and the combination of spiritual and political leadership—but that sharing influenced rather than spawned the law.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee &amp;quot;cry of the soul,&amp;quot; used in the original peacemaking, continued to be used in international councils. In 1723, meeting with representatives of Massachusetts, &amp;quot;The delegates made Three Moans, then their Speaker made a Procession thro&#039; them, lamenting and bemoaning, which continued a long time, being now and then prompted by the Tribes; The Procession and Lamentation being at an end, their Speaker took his Seat, and after some time the Delegates made another heavy Moan.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Journals of the House of Representatives of Massachusetts, 1723–24&#039;&#039;, Massachusetts Historical Society, 198.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Haudenosaunee political discourse (like Haudenosaunee music)&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Though Dvorak used Seneca women’s planting songs in his &#039;&#039;New World Symphony&#039;&#039;, there is little cross-fertilization between Haudenosaunee and Western music. Anton Kuerti told me this was because Western music tends to be audience-directed, where Indigenous music tends to be participatory.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; is participatory. There are appropriate times for the entire delegation to express its agreement with or support for the speaker&#039;s words, and when a ceremony is being done, there are places in the speech where the delegation joins in with song. In dealing with Thadadaho, this participation sent two messages: it gave the speaker their support at a time when he might be intimidated, and it told Thadadaho that their minds were all one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Pacification of Thadadaho ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The journey from Oneida country to Onondaga is different from all the earlier parts of the Peacemaker&#039;s journey: almost every other trip had been made by the Peacemaker or Hiawatha, either alone or the two of them together. Now, for the first time, all the people had gathered on a walk for peace. The song helped their unity of mind, for it was something they would learn together and sing together. The walk helped bring them together as a shared experience. Facing a great danger together—and preparing together to face that danger—added to the practical unification they were experiencing.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;A modern revival of the Peacemaker’s journey by Deyonwe’ton Jake Thomas took on aspects of this yearning for new unity. With this knowledgeable chief as their guide, participants would be told about the making of the law in the places where the incidents occurred. Falling somewhere between a guided tour and a pilgrimage, these journeys ended at the place of the Peacemaker’s departure.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To get to the place where Thadadaho&#039;s fire burned,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Skanawati John Buck recalled instead that the chiefs lit the fire: “When we have reached our destination, the habitation of Tha-da-da-hoh, we shall make a fire for him ‘at the woods’ edge.’ We shall speak to him and we shall hail him by congratulatory words” (Hewitt 1892b, 137).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; the delegations had to face spiritual obstacles in the form of tangible dangers. They had to cross Onondaga Lake, and Thadadaho&#039;s evil mind controlled the waters and winds of the lake. This was an opportunity for the Peacemaker to show once again that he, too, carried spiritual power: the power of Peace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They then entered the boat and he (Dekanawideh) stood in front of the boat and Hahyonwatha sat in the stern and the rest of the lords then noticed that the boat was made of white marble. Then they embarked in this boat from the shore and they had not proceeded far on their journey when they heard a voice calling out, &amp;quot;A-soh-kek-ne—eh,&amp;quot; and as soon as this voice had called out a strong wind arose and caused the lake to become very rough and troubled and great billows formed upon its surface and more especially around the boat.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Skanawati John Buck stated that Thadadaho had arrived at the peacemaking council place before anyone else, where “he seated himself facing the lake; there he sat with bowed head, silent but forbidding,” and brought on the hurricane.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Then those in the boat became frightened and said: &amp;quot;We are now going to die,&amp;quot; but Dekanawideh spoke and said: &amp;quot;There is no danger because Peace has prevailed.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then Dekanawideh further said to the wind and lake, &amp;quot;Be thou quiet, Ga-ha, and rest.&amp;quot; Then the wind and the roughness of the lake ceased. They had not gone much farther when the man across the lake called out &amp;quot;Asohkekne—eh,&amp;quot; and then the wind and roughness of the lake became still more violent. Then again Dekanawideh said: &amp;quot;you, the wind and the lake, be still, for we have not crossed the water yet.&amp;quot; Then again the lake became calm. Then Hahyonhwatha began to paddle hard and the boat went so swiftly that when they reached the shore, the boat plowed deeply into the dry land on the shore bank.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Chiefs) 1916, 88, 89. In the Newhouse version of the law, the dangerous passage of the lake is omitted: instead, there are three attempts to sing the peace song; the first two falter because the men are afraid and make an error in the singing—so the Peacemaker takes over, singing the song perfectly and proceeding to straighten out Thadadaho (Parker (Newhouse and Cusick) 1916, 28). When the boat was sent back to pick up Tsikonsaseh, she, too, stood up in front. Standing up in the bow of a canoe (as Kiatsaeton did in 1645) is a sign of authority, as well as of assumption of risk.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Newhouse says that part of the pacification of Thadadaho was the recital by the Peacemaker of the Three Bare Words, the &amp;quot;first three out of the thirteen strings of wampum&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1st Wampum String&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We now take the hand, and wipe the tears from off your eyes. So that you may see clearly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2nd Wampum String&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This it occurs when one of their number passes away by death. Then sorrowness and sadness is filled in their throat. Therefore we now take the sorrowness and sadness out of your throat, so you will now breathe more freely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3rd Wampum String&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This it occurs when one of their number is removed by death, it stops their ears from hearing. So now we unpluck (unplug) and clean out your ears, so you will now hear distinctly when any one address you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then and as the above three strings of wampums was read they was forwarded to the Onondaga chiefs one at a time. And was reread by them and were then brought back again to the Mohawk Chiefs. Dekanawita addresses to the chiefs of Thadadaho&#039;s attendants, and said we will finish the other part of the ceremony in your long house. The chiefs of Thadadaho&#039;s attendants left two warriors with Dekanawita, to lead him, the Mohawks and Oneidas, with their people into the Onondaga Long House.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Newhouse 1885, 48–49. These are the same three words that Hiawatha managed to set out on his own before the Peacemaker helped him with the rest of the Condolence. They are also the three words that are delivered to visitors at the woods’ edge. The greeting in treaty councils with other nations—the Three Words at the Woods’ Edge—is a re-enactment of the Condolence of Hiawatha and Thadadaho.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Condolence that, for Hiawatha, was an act of compassion, transforming him from mourner to optimist, became for Thadadaho a physically, mentally, and spiritually transformative ceremony. After going through the entire Condolence ceremony, the Peacemaker suggested that the people who had come with him to Onondaga should go outside and sleep at the woods&#039; edge, because it was after dark. The Onondaga chiefs had other ideas:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And (it was now way) late in the night when this ceremony ended. Dakanawida (orator) then (announce) propose to his comrade Lords for them to depart out from the Long House and go to the edge of the bushes, and lay down to sleep. &amp;quot;Come let us go out,&amp;quot; says Dekanawida, and as they were about to depart out of the House, then one of the Lords of the opposite side of the Council fire, spoke and said, &amp;quot;wait patiently for a few moments.&amp;quot; And so it was (complied with and) in a very little time the Lords of the opposite side of the council fire spoke again and said it was decided by my lords, that we will &amp;quot;en-de-wen-na-ka-ra-nyeh.&amp;quot; And be decided in your minds. But now we let our females go, (and be easy) (only don&#039;t be too much on them). So they did enjoy themselves by their Indian dance. For the progress (and success) did made in creating and installing new lords to a satisfactory and with joy.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Today, there are specific women’s songs and dances towards the end of the installation of a royá:ner. Often, after the conclusion of important ceremonies or in the evenings after business meetings, there are social dances at the longhouse. People say: these were given to us because it pleases the Creator for us to enjoy ourselves.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: of the above part of the ceremony, it is always performed accordingly, afterwards when Dekanawida completely established the confederacy. But at time he omitted on account that he had to perform that peculiar and wonderful act with a superior power. The people that were eye witness at the time had never seen before. As you will see with the foregoing his acts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dekanawida said to the Chiefs we will commence on Thadadaho and convert him from sorcery, his ferocity and evil spirit, and remedy (transform) his preternatural humanity. If we will succeed, then we will say we have accomplished our undertakings (as anticipated). And he said to the chiefs what will we say that we all lay down minds and spirit. The chiefs sanctioned his proposition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dekanawida then took one string of wampum in his hands and addressed Thadadaho in these words. &amp;quot;All the reptiles shall now be removed from under your hair, (it will now cease the malformation of your hair) and it shall become (clean like the hair of any other human being) like any other human hair.&amp;quot; Then he laid the wampums down on the ground and he laid his hand on Thadadaho&#039;s head and rubbed it (stroke it) downwards and the reptiles immediately disappeared (the malformation which was snakes before changed) and his hair became like any other human hair.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dekanawida took another string of wampum in his hands and addressed Thadadaho in these words: &amp;quot;Your mind shall now be transformed . . . and shall become like any human mind&amp;quot; and the sorcery and evil spirit left him completely.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Newhouse 1885, 63–65.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He was seated at the further end of his house, without any clothing to cover the deformities of his body, his hair was frightful serpents. Tekanawitagh and the other chiefs approached him; they spoke, delivering wampum until they removed all his deformities; they then covered his body with a garment and put moccasins on his feet. After they thought that they had restored him to his natural state, and removed every deformity, they returned towards home . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Next summer (Tekanawitagh) again set out, taking his son Odatsehte by the hand as he passed his village. They came to the abode of Tadadahoh, who now made a more comely appearance than he did at the former meeting: he seemed to improve under their hands. The task which yet remained for them to perform was to rectify the concealed parts, to interest his heart in the welfare of the confederacy by inducing him to think, that his own interest and honour was linked to that of the public, to insinuate by this means into his mind, the seeds of brotherly love and affection.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Norton 1970, 104.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thayendenega Joseph Brant has the Mohawks and Oneidas proceed together to Onondaga:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They went together to Onondaga, they found the chief there very obstinate, they with difficulty brought him to agree the Mohawk stiling him brother, and equal in the confederacy; when they went to return home, one of the young men had forgot his maukissins and went back to look for them, as he was by the side of the house he heard the Onondaga singing that what the father and son had proposed to him did not suit him and that he could not wear it—when he overtook them he told what he had heard—in consequence of which they agreed to return next year—they did and then the Mohawk proposed to the Onondaga, that he should keep the council fire of the confederacy, and that he should carry their title—these condescensions brought him to agree.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Boyce 1973; Bonaparte 2006, 55.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
John Buck described the chiefs meeting Thadadaho and going through the words at the woods&#039; edge, and then doing the entire Condolence ceremony, much as it is today:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Undaunted, De-ka-na-wi-da said: &amp;quot;We are now here. We came seeking Tha-da-da-ho. Now, chiefs, unwrap again your &#039;&#039;matters&#039;&#039;.&amp;quot; Obedient to this command they took the wampum strings out of the pouch one by one, thirteen in number, representing as many matters of importance and moment, and they placed them in order on a horizontal rod. This done, De-ka-na-wi-da said, &amp;quot;Let us express our thanks, for this is now being competed.&amp;quot; He then sang the Six Songs . . . When these Six Songs were being sung Tha-da-da-ho listened attentively to them and even manifested a feeling of pleasure. Lastly, he raised his horrid head, an act he had never been known to do. Whereupon De-ka-na-wi-da, elated by this propitious sign of mental regeneration, exclaimed, &amp;quot;So let it come to pass. What we have undertaken is being accomplished in the manifestation of returning reason and anthropic feelings.&amp;quot; Then Tha-da-da-ho spoke and said, &amp;quot;It gave me great pleasure to hear the singing of the Six Songs.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hewitt 1892b, 139. It is said that the Six Songs created an opening that gave the people the opportunity to persuade Thadadaho to change his mind.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In John Buck&#039;s 1888 version, Thadadaho is returned gradually to humanity, by song and words, step by step. The Peacemaker explains each step to him before it is performed. After the Woods&#039; Edge and the Condolence and the Six Songs, as he becomes increasingly rational, he is given his own song, which helps to &amp;quot;reconstruct and straighten out thy mind&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Hai-i, hai-i, hai-i, hai-i, hai-i, hai-i, hai-i, hai-i, a-kwe-wi’-yo e-kon-he-wa-tha (my beautiful thing, (it is a) besom).&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hewitt 1892b, 139. A besom is a broom made with a bundle of twigs. Thadadaho’s duties included keeping the council house clean, both literally and figuratively. Symbolically, his broom would sweep away the snakes of discord and the dirt of discomfort. The beauty lies in what it does, not in what it looks like.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Chiefs&#039; Version describes a gradual pacification, almost like a domestication of a wild animal:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then the man looked around and he saw these men (the lords) standing all around him, but he did not answer but kept silent. Then these lords looked at his head while he was sitting on the ground and they saw his hair moving as if it were all alive and they saw that the movements of the hair greatly resembled that of serpents, and they looked at his hands and saw that his fingers were twisting and contorting continually in all directions and in all manner of shapes, and they became impatient because he would not answer the message:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When Dekanawidah started to address this man, the man became troubled and after all of the lords finished addressing the man his sympathy was affected and he shed tears. Then Dekanawidah said: &amp;quot;We, the delegates of all the nations who have accepted the Good Tidings of Peace and Power, are now assembled here&amp;quot;. . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . . Then the twisting movements of the fingers and the snakelike movements of the hair of Thadadaho ceased.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then he spoke and said: &amp;quot;It is well. I will now answer the mission which brought you here. I now truly confirm and accept your message, the object of which brought you here.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Chiefs) 1916, 91.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most versions, written and oral, give Hiawatha the role of removing the snakes when Thadadaho&#039;s mind had been restored. Converse says Hiawatha combed the snakes from Thadadaho&#039;s hair with wampum.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Converse 1908, 117.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Newhouse says that the Peacemaker did the combing, and put wampum down before Thadadaho first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have now accomplished our great work and completed everything that was required with the exception of shaping and transforming him (by rubbing him down), removing the snake-like hair from him and circumcising him.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lords therefore all took part in doing this and Ohdahtshedeh was the first to rub down Thaddodahho and the others followed his example so that the appearance of Thaddodahho might be like that of other men.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Chiefs) 1916, 91. “Rubbing down” is a transformative and comforting act. It also appears at the woods’ edge, when the visitors are “rubbed down” by their hosts to remove any thorns or dust that they may have picked up on their path.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
His hands we will mend and adjust, so that they will be like those of other men; his hair of living serpents we will change from its snakehood, so that his hair may be like that of other men; and his hands, awry and misshapen as they are, we will make like those of a human being; his feet, also, deformed and unnatural as they are, we will change to the shape common to those of other men, and lastly, that with which he is trussed, his &#039;&#039;membrum virile&#039;&#039;, we will reduce to its proper length and size—we will make it six thumb widths in length.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hewitt 1892b, 139. Newhouse recounts the unsuccessful efforts of those who pacified Thadadaho to reduce the penis to a normal size (six thicknesses of the thumb). Gibson refers modestly to people seeing something hanging on Thadadaho.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There had been several steps. First, Thadadaho&#039;s opposition was checked. Second, he was pacified enough to be willing to be transformed. Third, he was physically transformed. Fourth, having been changed and comforted, his mind was also made good.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Combing Thadadaho&#039;s hair has another level of symbolic meaning. Ensnarled, matted hair indicated the ferment and confusion of the mind operating in the head that carried it. Just as Shonkwaiatíson straightened the rivers, smoothed the rapids, and opened the paths of communication, and just as, at the woods&#039; edge, those paths are straightened again and the obstacles and brambles removed, so combing and straightening the powerful man&#039;s hair—and straightening his limbs, too—indicates straightening out his mind. Just as the best path to a place would be the most direct, so the best way for a mind to function is to address issues in a way that is straight, not twisted. Transforming his hair and his body meant transforming his mind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If it is Hiawatha who combs the snakes from Thadadaho&#039;s hair and smooths out his body, this carries another layer of significance. Thadadaho had killed Hiawatha&#039;s family. Instead of seeking revenge, Hiawatha becomes a healer. It is an ultimate act of spiritual strength and reconciliation. He is both the most appropriate and the most unexpected person to heal Thadadaho.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once Thadadaho had been physically transformed, and had become rational, he was ready for the pragmatic political conversation necessary to accommodate him within the structure of the law. His mind was now functioning properly: a good mind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tsikonsaseh and the Peacemaker placed the deer&#039;s antlers on Thadadaho&#039;s brow:&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 29.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; the slender antlers of a Confederacy chief replaced the waving snakes.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The snakes would warn Thadadaho of anyone’s approach; the antlers are also said to be sensitive like antennae, “living bones” on the stag.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In doing so, she was acting as a clan mother would act. In placing the antlers on this crucial last chief, the chief responsible to all other chiefs, she was in effect acting as the clan mother for the entire Confederacy. Thadadaho became the keystone. &amp;quot;On this very day,&amp;quot; said the Peacemaker, the peace had arrived.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 29.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once it had become clear that the power of the Song of Peace and the concepts that the Peacemaker had brought would transform even Thadadaho, the people became convinced that the power of peace would indeed spread, to other nations and later generations. As Newhouse states the Peacemaker said then: &amp;quot;For it matters not how ferocious a Nation we may come in contact with. We now know it to be certain that we can always succeed and establish this Government of Peace among the hostile Nations.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Newhouse 1885, 65.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thadadaho had intimidated the entire Onondaga nation into supporting and obeying him. In this, the nation had taken part in the warfare and supported the evil. The Condolence of Thadadaho may have been directed at one powerful individual, but it was certainly also aimed at raising up and clearing the minds of the people around him.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The conversion of Thadadaho demonstrates several important principles of the law:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pursuit of peace is not merely the pursuit of the absence of violence, because peace is never achieved until justice is achieved. And justice is not achieved until everyone&#039;s interests are addressed. So you will never actually finish addressing everyone&#039;s issues. There will always be unfinished business. You can&#039;t achieve peace unless it&#039;s accompanied by constant striving to address the issues of justice. It means that your job will never end.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Ibid.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Iroquois law of peace assumes that you will not achieve peace. You will not achieve a perfect agreement between two warring sides about how the world ought to be in the future.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mohawk 2004, n.pag.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To deal with a difficult problem, the nations must remain committed to working together. Their unity of mind and purpose is their greatest strength.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker had tested his ways of dealing with irrational and dangerous people quite deliberately. He began with isolated individuals—the Cannibal and Tsikonsaseh. He did not shrink from testing, but he approached nations with caution and forethought. As a matter of tactics, it is often best to begin with the easiest and most obvious and to build towards the hardest challenges; to secure the agreement of the people most likely to support the proposition and to cause the holdouts to become increasingly more isolated as a means of persuading them that joining is their only viable option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process of securing peace had taken years, as the consensus built. The legend is a lesson in persistence and patience. Haudenosaunee teachers often explain that a thing worth doing can take years. They also say: &amp;quot;it takes as long as it takes&amp;quot;: better to do things right than to do them in haste.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;This thinking is reflected in sports, as well. Traditional Haudenosaunee sports and games are not time-limited: the game goes on until someone wins, by scoring, scoring a minimum number of points, or taking the opponent’s markers. This may explain modern Haudenosaunee adoption of baseball and golf (today’s organized lacrosse is time-controlled; lacrosse played traditionally, especially at ceremonies, is not).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The same idea of purposeful patience pervades the decision making of the councils, and that tends to frustrate deadline-governed business people and bureaucrats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The power of men and women must be balanced and combined. The pacification of Thadadaho did not happen—it does not matter which version one looks to—until Tsikonsaseh joined in the ceremonial effort. She provided the &amp;quot;women&#039;s side.&amp;quot; Gibson describes how Tsikonsaseh fulfilled the role of Thadadaho&#039;s clan mother: &amp;quot;Now she has arrived, our mother, the Great Matron whose name is Tsikonsaseh; now she has accepted the Good Message, and this, moreover, is what you should confirm and adopt, the Great Law, so that she may place antlers on you, our mother, and they together shall form a circle,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The term translated as “to become a circle” also means “to become unified.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; standing alongside your body.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 232. In a modern Condolence, when the candidate is identified and accepted, his clan mother stands by his side (and his faithkeepers and sub-chief are also with him), “standing alongside his body.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Thadadaho’s Political Interests ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some analysts downplay the spiritual side of the pacification of Thadadaho and concentrate on the Peacemaker&#039;s astute political sense. He had offered the &amp;quot;powerful wizard&amp;quot; the &amp;quot;head chieftainship&amp;quot; of the new Confederacy. What, in fact, had been offered? And how did that translate into the practical functions of Thadadaho in the historic Confederacy?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Peacemaker met with &amp;quot;the Great Witch,&amp;quot; early in the peacemaking efforts, he reported back to Hiawatha: &amp;quot;So this is what my errand was: we two should talk, that he may change his habits. And this: shortly, he would work for and accept the Good Message and the power and the Peace. This, moreover, is what happened: I promised that several tribes (nations) and I will come, and that we will all cooperate with him.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 174.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Chiefs&#039; Version attributes the idea of granting Thadadaho special authority to Odatsehte of the Oneidas: &amp;quot;In my opinion this man may approve of our mission if we all lay our heads before him.&amp;quot; (This means that the nations here represented would be submissive to this man Tha-do-dah-ho). Then Dekanawideh and Skanyadahriyo spoke and said: &#039;We acquiesce to all that Odatshedeh has said.&#039;&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Chiefs) 1916, 90.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the nations are committed to the peace, and the Onondagas, out of fear of Thadadaho, are seen as holdouts, the Peacemaker brings the delegation of chiefs to Thadadaho with their joint proposal to grant him special authority: &amp;quot;Moreover, everything reposes there, the minds of the several nations, and as to you, they place before you their proposition that it is you who are to be the title bearer, and Great Chief, and you are also to be fire keeper at the place where we will kindle the fire, whose rising smoke will pierce the sky.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 232. When a contemporary council is convened, and the white wampum “fire” is placed on its clean white cloth on the bench in the middle of the longhouse, it is also said that symbolically this “fire” pierces the sky—so that the Creator can see and hear everything that is said, and each person’s words and deeds are fully accountable.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Becoming the firekeeper involved great prestige, but also great responsibility. Virtually every aspect of Haudenosaunee law seeks this balance of authority and obligation. The power given to Thadadaho was neither unchecked nor arbitrary. It was as much a burden as it was an honour. Furthermore, the exercise of the authority required considerate and careful stewardship, the qualities that the old, irrational Thadadaho lacked. In converting Thadadaho, the Peacemaker had employed interest-based negotiations,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;For a modern explanation of the same approach to dispute resolution, see Fisher and Ury’s &#039;&#039;Getting to Yes&#039;&#039;. They advocate listening intently; going “easy on the people and hard on the issues;” collaborating on tough questions through an agreed-upon process; and seeking to understand and fulfill one another’s needs.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; understanding what Thadadaho and the Onondagas wanted and needed. This problem-solving technique is reflected in Haudenosaunee tactics and treaties over the following centuries.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Making the Onondagas the firekeepers was logical. Geographically, they were the central nation. Militarily, they were not numerous enough to be threatening or dominant. If their spiritual power was acknowledged, for good or evil, then their role as protectors of the council fire could become a powerful force for the good.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The combination of spiritual and political authority—and the understanding that these are separate concepts that gain further authority when they are combined—is not unique to the Haudenosaunee. The Queen of England opens Parliament as head of state&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In a leftover from the days when the King and the Commons were at odds, the monarch enters the House of Commons only with the permission of the House, and escorted by the Gentleman Usher of the Black Rod. The head of state is not the head of the government.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and as head of the Anglican Church, in a show of vestigial spiritual authority in a secular state.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In one example of the difference between Indigenous and settler thinking, a Cree delegation was prevented from opening its presentation to a Québec legislative committee with a prayer and sacred drumming. To the Crees, this was an insult. To the Québécois, who had until the 1950s chafed under the influence of the Catholic Church, allowing any religious practice in the legislature was seen as a possible opening of the floodgates.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; However, different peoples define the separation differently, as the Maoris and &#039;&#039;pakehas&#039;&#039; have discovered in their differing interpretations of the effects of the Treaty of Waitangi.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Retaining their &#039;&#039;mana,&#039;&#039; or spiritual authority, the Maori leaders believed they had delivered only administrative governance to the British. The British believed they had acquired full sovereignty, the authority to make all laws. The modern Waitangi Tribunal has been working its way through the actual intent of the treaty.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are really two separate transactions with Thadahaho. Before a rational political conversation can take place, the spiritual and emotional obstacles must be removed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The beginning of the pacification of Thadadaho is accomplished through the repeated singing of the Song of Peace. In contrast, the negative power of Thadadaho is manifested in his own songs and words, by which he daunts the Peacemaker&#039;s messengers, calling up the high winds, threatening to swamp their canoes on Onondaga Lake. His power is supernatural—or rather, it is power enlisted from aspects of the natural world—but if it is spiritual power, it comes from the dark aspects of the spirit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The transformation of Thadadaho is symbolized in a number of different ways. When he is a force for harm, he has snakes in his hair: when he becomes a keeper of the council fire, one of his responsibilities is to remove any &amp;quot;crawling things&amp;quot; that might find their way near the fire. He himself becomes the remover of snakes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Good-mindedness, health, and beauty are opposed to a twisted mind and body. Thus, the Peacemaker is able to call upon his own beautiful face to shock the Cannibal into right-mindedness; his opposite, Thadadaho, is twisted in limb and mind, but can be straightened out. Another contrast between the Peacemaker and Thadadaho is the former&#039;s association with the eagle, the highest flying of the animals of the air and sky world, while Thadadaho is linked with snakes, the messengers of bad news and the underworld&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;There is no suggestion that “the underworld” is equivalent to the Christian hell. The Thunderers, the Grandfather protectors of humanity, drive snakes underground to prevent them from injuring the people. It is said that the dinosaurs were also driven underground (and will re-emerge one day). What is underground is out of our sight, and unable to harm us, we who walk about on the earth’s surface.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; (once his mind is good again, he is also given a bird&#039;s wing to sweep the council area clean—usually said to be a white gull&#039;s wing for purity).&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;It is not the council place alone that gets swept: “for by this the land will be preserved free from dirt and evil things.” Hewitt 1892b, 138. There is also a reference to a “Great Black Wing” in a Newhouse version.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process of condoling the other rotiyanershon is that their nation proposes a person to its brother nation (Cayugas to Oneidas, for example), and then that side of the fire proposes the person to the nations on the other side of the fire. That is not the way with Thadadaho: he is proposed only by the Onondagas, without being joined by the other Older Brothers, the Mohawks and Senecas. He is proposed to all four of the other nations together, and it is up to them together to accept him. He is thus to be a chief responsible to all other chiefs.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;It occurs that, if a family does not have a man suitable to be its chief, it “borrows” from another family within that nation, or even from another nation. That has never been seriously considered for Thadadaho.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; He has no clan mother. His uniqueness is accentuated by the other name he is called: Desenagehte, He Carries the Name.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hohahes Leroy Hill, recital of the Kayanerenkó:wa, 2013.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It is possible to see this not only as a reflection of the idea that his &amp;quot;family&amp;quot; is the entire council, but also that his clan mother was Tsikonsaseh, a woman who, like the Peacemaker, had no successor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Fire ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For human beings all around the world, the fire is a symbol of warmth and light and protection. In many languages, &amp;quot;hearth&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;home&amp;quot; are synonyms.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The beginning of architecture may have been the deliberate decision by a nomadic family about how to arrange their persons and possessions around a fire.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; For the Haudenosaunee, a &amp;quot;fire&amp;quot; is also a symbol of a nation, and the symbol of the council.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most North Americans have only intermittent contact with fire—as a campfire or bonfire, an ornamental fireplace, or perhaps a wood stove. They know of the fire&#039;s destructive power from television pictures of forest fires. They do not see a fire used for warmth and light and cooking every day. For the people who made the Kayanerenkó:wa, fire was a practical constant in their lives. There was always a fire burning near their sleeping place. The fire was the focus and the symbol of the family.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As Firekeepers, the Onondagas look after not merely a symbol or thing, but also a process. Anyone who tends a fire, and anyone who spends time with a fire, is aware that it is a process of consumption and combustion, with a modest beginning and a quiet, smouldering end. Tending a fire, looking after its appetite for wood, is a matter of patience. It takes as long as it takes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fire is also potentially dangerous. Especially in a woodland environment, and in wooden or bark houses, fire can easily get out of control. Being Firekeepers, for the Onondagas, did not mean possessing control over the outcome of the councils, but rather control over the process of council. &amp;quot;Control&amp;quot; is probably the wrong word: the Onondagas carry the responsibility of ensuring that the council does not get out of control, in the sense that it should remain focussed on the work to be done, should not descend into anger or thoughtlessness, should not allow personalities or emotions to stand in the way of the good mind and its rational thought. As firekeepers, the Onondagas&#039; &amp;quot;control&amp;quot; over the council fire means protecting both the fire against attack and the council against loss of reason. It is a procedural rather than substantive responsibility. Part of that procedural responsibility is to ensure that only one issue is considered at a time. Another is to ensure that the fire does not go out before the council is over. Being hosts of the Grand Council is an honour and a burden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Great Law, fire is used for several purposes. It is mentioned briefly as the cooking fire. It is the fire by which one warms oneself. But it has three distinct purposes within the culture and eventually the law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First, in a woodland environment, fire is a way of calling attention to oneself. One could not see a village from a distance, but one could see the smoke rising from its fires, &amp;quot;piercing the sky.&amp;quot; An individual arriving at the edge of a clearing, and wanting to enter the village in peace, would probably have built a fire to announce himself. In the course of the making of the Great Law, the Peacemaker does this several times—for example, after he survives his test at Cohoes Falls. The smoke from fires to call attention to oneself always &amp;quot;pierce the sky.&amp;quot; These fires were deliberately smoky. Newhouse states: &amp;quot;This was the custom, to make a smoke so that the town might know that visitors were approaching and send word that they might enter without danger to their lives.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker 1916, 22. At the 2013 recital of the law, it was stated that, at the woods’ edge, there would often be a small hut for the visitors to rest in, and firewood piled for them to make the required signal fire.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Second, a fire is a council fire. It has been said that the first step in all architecture was when nomadic hunter-gatherers would stop for the night and decide where to make the fire: the location of the fire determines where people cook, sleep, and eat. The council fire of the Haudenosaunee sets the places for the nations to sit: it provides the focus for the structure of the council. In the various versions of the Great Law, when the council fire is referred to, it is less frequent that it is referred to as piercing the sky. The council fire is a focus, not a distraction.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Fire is a universal human concentrator—the candle flame is used in Buddhist meditation to focus attention and mindfulness, for example—and a means for many peoples to clear the mind of distraction. Fire burns away impurities, too.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; As council is to be a place of unobstructed communication, it would be counterproductive to have a smoky council fire, or one that distracted through its crackling and sparks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During the making of the Great Law, the villages that supported the peace would show that support by sending brave white smoke to the sky.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Controlling the colour of the smoke is also a practice of the Catholic Church, which sends a plume of black smoke from Saint Peter’s to indicate a failure to elect a pope, and a pure white plume to announce the election of a new pope.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Third, the smoke rises, and in rising, connects to the Sky World, calling the Creator&#039;s attention to what is happening at the fire. If the source of the fire is sacred, the Creator&#039;s attention is attracted even more. Thus, tobacco burning is a ceremony deliberately used for the purpose of calling upon the Creator for attention and help: the white smoke rises, and as the tobacco originated as a sacred plant of the Sky World, so the Creator notices. In modern councils, while there is a fire in the wood stove in the longhouse, the &amp;quot;council fire&amp;quot; or katsistowá:nen is a bunch of wampum strings, the symbols of the fire as well as of the nations bringing their minds together. These strings are held by one of the firekeepers during the opening thanksgiving, but then they are placed on a bench, on a pure white cloth. They are a constant visual reminder that the council has drawn all the nations together for the purpose of peace. It is said that the Creator pays attention to the symbolic smoke from the wampum fire, and that in turn is sometimes used to admonish the participants to behave properly. Just as a sacred fire calls for notice, so does the sacred wampum that symbolizes the fire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus, Sagoyewatha (Red Jacket) was able to say in council: &amp;quot;We consider ourselves in the presence of the Great Spirit, the Proprietor of us all.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Ganter 2006, 36.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Power of Unity ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thadadaho was persuaded and transformed partly by the unity of spirit and mind with which he was confronted. He also must have been persuaded by the quality of the people who had come together as chiefs to commit themselves to the peace: &amp;quot;Hiawatha and the Peacemaker also enlisted the pressure of public opinion to win over Thadadaho. They convinced him that he alone stood in the way of a goal that the overwhelming majority of other Iroquois leaders desired. By confronting Thadadaho with the combined support of chiefs from the Mohawk, Oneida and Cayuga Nations, as well as that of many Onondaga leaders, Hiawatha and the Peacemaker severely limited Thadadaho&#039;s ability to go against public consensus.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Bonvillain 1992, 49. It may also be that, by being the single, most prominent, and most dangerous holdout, Thadadaho provided everyone else with a focus for their peacemaking efforts.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thadadaho&#039;s conversion is also a lesson in what happens when there is a single holdout in a political or legal system that requires consensus and unanimity.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Twelve Angry Men&#039;&#039; is a demonstration of an opposite situation—in which the holdout was the only one whose mind was patient, calm, and observant.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In any Haudenosaunee council, it is theoretically possible for a single chief to prevent a matter from being decided. In times past, this would not happen: if he could not persuade the others, or find some compromise, the individual would give in graciously. Another aspect of Haudenosaunee unanimity is that it did not require absolute agreement, nor agreement on every detail. The chiefs were trained to recognize times when they might not agree completely, but were close enough that the matter proposed was acceptable. In the interest of unanimity, then, they offered flexibility.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Many Indigenous nations of the Americas have a similar state, with words that reflect the way a thing decided in council is not perfect but is agreed upon enough to proceed. In Choctaw, the word used in council is &#039;&#039;Yakoke,&#039;&#039; which has entered North American English as “okay” (though some dictionaries will attribute the origin of “okay” to “Oll Korrect” or the initials of George Washington’s quartermaster, “Old Kinderhook.” The concept of “okay” may be an important cultural division between North America and the more rigid requirements of European business and society.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The unanimity of the other nations helped persuade Thadadaho:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then Tyon-yonh-koh spoke and said to Thadodah-ho: &amp;quot;The Creator, the Great Ruler, created this day which is now shedding its light upon us; he also created man and he also created the earth and all things upon it. Now look up and see the delegates of the Four Nations sitting around you, you also see the chief warrior and this great woman our mother (Jikonsaseh), standing before you, all of whom have approved of this message. The lords and all the chief warriors and this great woman, our mother, have all agreed to submit the Good Tidings of Peace and Power to you, and thus if you approve and confirm the message, you will have the power to be the Fire-Keeper of our Confederate Council, and the smoke from it will arise and pierce the sky, and all the nations shall be subject to you.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Chiefs) 1916, 91.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereupon the man looked at Tekarioken and Hiawatha and Satekariwate (the Mohawks) and Hotatsehte (the Oneida) and Kanukweyotu (the Seneca) and Tiohaɂkwete and Hakaɂeyuk and Tsiɂnutawehe and Skanyataiyo and Tshaɂtekaehyes. Thereupon Tekanawita said: &amp;quot;Now you are looking at all of the ones who will be standing with you.&amp;quot; Thereupon the man bowed his head. Thereupon his hair stopped writhing and all of his fingers became quiet.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 233.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker consistently speaks unconditionally.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Once again, Haudenosaunee language provides tools for the creation of peace. The &#039;&#039;wa-&#039;&#039; prefix indicates certainty. In the mouth of a skilled orator, the people would be all the more persuaded that the peace was inevitable.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Peace &#039;&#039;will come&#039;&#039;. These men &#039;&#039;will be standing with you&#039;&#039;. These announcements are not negotiable. It is his power and nature to persuade by the sacred force of his words.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cayuga ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the minds of many modern Haudenosaunee, the pacification of Thadadaho is the climax of the making of the law, as he was the single terrifying remaining obstacle to the peace. Therefore, they would say, all the nations had already joined together, and this one Onondaga man was all that was left in the way. However, there are other versions. To the west of the Onondagas lay Cayuga country.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thayendenega states that, after satisfying Thadadaho, the peacemakers &amp;quot;proceeded to Cayuga their chief had a big pipe, for which reason they give the nation that name (Shononenaweandwane), they stiled him their son, and brother to the Onidas.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Boyce 1973; Bonaparte 2006, 55.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; This account would see the wave of peace sweeping from east to west, with one nation after another joining. It would explain how the wave did not stop with the Senecas, but continued—after the Seneca warriors joined—to absorb the nations westward to Niagara and beyond: Erie, Wenro, Attiwandaron, and eventually Tiionontate and Wendat. Today, the council name&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Each nation—like each clan—has both an informal or everyday name, and a name that is used formally, in council. Both names refer to characteristics of the people and their places.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; for the Cayugas commemorates that role and that first pipe, and the Cayugas supplied the pipes and tobacco that the chiefs would smoke together after council opened and closed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the bringing of the Great Peace had been pure legend, it would have been likely that each nation would represent a separate obstacle to be overcome. This is not the case: the Cayugas and Oneidas welcomed the peace, contributed to it, and supported it. Like the Mohawks, they had rational questions: what if we lay down our weapons and the other nations do not? What if, by embracing peace, we only set ourselves up to become the victims of those who are still devoted to war? They needed to be convinced, not of the rationality of peace rather than war, but of its inevitability. The accounts of the making of the law do not suggest that the Cayugas set tests for the Peacemaker, or challenged his authenticity. Instead, once they were persuaded, they welcomed the law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Seneca: The Doorkeepers ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thayendenega&#039;s 1801 version explains that after bringing the Cayugas into the Confederacy, &amp;quot;from there they went on to the Senecas, there was two principal chiefs of these, Kanyadariyoh and Shadekaroinyis, they also agreed to the confederacy; in consequence of their frontier situation they called them &#039;&#039;roninhohhont&#039;&#039;—or the doorkeeper.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Boyce 1973; Bonaparte 2006, 55. Hayadaha Richard Hill says that these two chiefs joined the Peacemaker on the journey to straighten out Thadadaho. Each had expressed a personal desire to support the peace, even as he feared the warriors. Both said that they could not see what to do. The first said that it was as if he were on a mist-covered lake, and the Peacemaker renamed him Skaniatariio, Handsome Lake, because despite the mist he could still see the beauty of the lake. The other chief also received a new name, for he could see the sky, despite the fog. The Peacemaker constantly showed people the good that they could see and do.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; He asserts that while bringing together the first four nations took four years, the Senecas joined &amp;quot;some time later.&amp;quot; Though the names are different, this is consistent with the way the Seneca warrior chiefs were brought into the peace by being assigned the work of protecting the Great Black Doorway, escorting outsiders into the council longhouse and winnowing out those who meant harm to the League.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The contrast between light and dark is repeated in connection with this doorway: just as emerging from the forest into the light of the clearing is marked by the meeting at the woods’ edge, so passing through the dark doorway into the light of the council fire is marked by the doorkeepers’ decision to admit or reject the visitors.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Senecas themselves explain their accession to the Confederacy more subtly. There were two Seneca towns at the time—as, historically in the eighteenth century, there were also two main towns, Kanedesaga (earlier Ganogaro), to the east, and Geneseo (on a bend on the Genesee River). While the chiefs of the eastern town were eager to join the peace, the western town faced a number of hostile nations, and its warriors were a bulwark against outside aggression. Making this town&#039;s chiefs into both rotiyanershon and war chiefs was pragmatic: it allowed the exercise of peace looking inward, while maintaining effective defence looking outward.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dayodekane Seth Newhouse asserts that the two western Seneca leaders agreed to become lords in order to avoid a blood feud between their two villages, arising from a lacrosse game.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Newhouse 1885, 176.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The two Seneca doorkeepers were the leaders of the Seneca men. The law was born during a time of warfare, when to survive virtually every man had to be prepared to fight, to protect his family and his own life. They were also times of aggressive and vengeful warfare. Even so, the terms used by the Haudenosaunee today to describe the men and their duties are not terms of war. They refer instead to the obligation to protect the peace: &amp;quot;(The speaker of the Peace Hymn then) salutes the &#039;&#039;oyenkondonh&#039;&#039;, a term which has been rendered &#039;warriors.&#039; This rendering, however, may have a misleading effect. The word has nothing to do with war, unless in the sense that every grown man in an Indian community is supposed to be a soldier. . . . The word comprises all the men (the &#039;manhood&#039; or mankind) of the nation.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hale (1883) 1989, 64. Several modern interpreters of the law, Huron Miller most prominent among them, have stated that the coming of the Great Peace meant that there were no more warriors, because there was no more war. But we know from history that wars continued to occur. We know that Haudenosaunee men were proud of their ability to wage war, whether protectively or aggressively towards enemies from outside the Confederacy. Peace did several things: it prevented internal warfare; it institutionalized the role of the warriors as supporters of the peace and the chiefs. As for the relationship between the warriors and the women, that complex matter requires a separate examination.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There were &amp;quot;warriors.&amp;quot; War and peace are one of the dualities reflected in the law: while its purpose was to create peace everywhere, the law is pragmatic enough to recognize that this is as impossible as creating universal goodness. There will always be war, and a rational government will be able to conduct it despite being designed to maintain and spread peace.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Barack Obama’s speech on accepting the Nobel Peace Prize refers to the difficulty of seeking peace while conducting necessary wars.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Yet the Peacemaker and the chiefs had to acknowledge that the warriors not only existed, but were the men who could decide whether the peace survived at all. Four nations had accepted the peace, and their leaders were beginning to discuss the internal structures and processes of their confederate government. The Peacemaker had brought about this state of affairs by facing personal risk to demonstrate the power of his message to the Mohawks; by persuading Hiawatha and Tsikonsaseh to become his clear-minded allies; and by overcoming the evil and demanding Thadadaho. With four nations committed, the western Senecas remained outside the peace, both physically and politically. This became utterly, dramatically clear when the two Great Warriors arrived at the place where the Great Law was coalescing. They came with a crowd of men who immediately surrounded the chiefs in a threatening manner:&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;There is an oral tradition that the warriors arrived with their hair combed down over their foreheads. When Mohawk warriors of the late twentieth century came to threaten the chiefs in council, they also combed their hair forward: the effect was disturbing, menacing, inhuman.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then they arrived, the two men walking together with a large crowd of warriors. Hiawatha said . . . so now we shall begin . . . so now you two shall listen well . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereupon the Great Warrior said: &amp;quot;I meanwhile will first say that they who are with me, my force, they shall surround the place where they are seated, the chiefs, and not until they are ready, shall he (Tekanawita) begin to speak, so that they can hear everything, the warriors. Thereupon they encircled the place where they were seated, the chiefs. Thereupon the Great Warrior said: &amp;quot;Now we are ready.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 36–37.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the benefit of the warriors, the Peacemaker explained the making of the Great Peace, and how the people will all become as one family and henceforth respect one another. Offering this alternative, he appealed to the warriors&#039; humanity. As Sotsisowah John Mohawk explains: &amp;quot;You have the power to make peace with an enemy only if you acknowledge that the enemy is human. To acknowledge that they are rational beings who want to live and who want their children to live enhances your power by giving you the capacity to speak to them. If you think they are not human, you won&#039;t have that capacity; you will have destroyed your own power to communicate with the very people you must communicate with if you are going to bring about peace.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a constant tension, historically, between the chiefs whose minds must yearn for peace, and the warriors whose bodies become the primary weapons of any war. The chiefs are slow to anger, slow to decide, while the young men are impatient. When the tension contributes to their collaboration, the young men stand behind the chiefs, sending a silent, muscular message to any other nation meeting with the Haudenosaunee: if you do not heed these wise old men, you will have to deal with us next. When the tension becomes too great, the warriors tend to act independently, often undermining the decisions of the chiefs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Faced with the danger and opportunity provided by the Senecas, the Peacemaker chose opportunity. He offered the warriors and their leaders a crucial function within the new order:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As to you and your deputy, you two Great Warriors, they the Chiefs chose you; it is you who shall guard the doors to the place of the Council Fire, of the Good Message and of the Power and the Peace. Moreover it is you who stand up in front, and the reason why it shall happen thus, is that you, as a matter of fact, shall have responsibility for the group; you shall control the warriors, that is to say all of them. And you shall be permanently in charge of the five nations&#039; warriors; moreover it shall continue on as it is at present, with you two holding the power.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 36–37.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Donehogowa and Kanuhkitawi, the two Seneca chiefs, had become the doorkeepers, responsible for determining the sincerity of other nations seeking to approach council, with responsibility as peace and war chiefs.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Donehogowa Ely Parker almost certainly used his duality to argue that he should be permitted to join the Union army during the Civil War. As Ulysses Grant’s adjutant, he administered one of the first technologically modern armies. As the possessor of the best handwriting among the Union staff, and, fittingly, as a peace chief, he wrote the terms of the peace at Appomattox. Was he Grant’s doorkeeper, as he was a Seneca doorkeeper?&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In the 2013 recital of the law, it was stated that Donehogowa was responsible for disarming the visitors, while Kanuhkitawi decided whether their minds were good.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;A purple Seneca wampum belt depicting two wolves is said to symbolize these two title holders.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; One stood outside the door of the longhouse, while the other stood inside. Hayadaha Richard Hill sees the metaphor of the Great Black Door as meaning that if an individual refuses to be reconciled to the accepted behaviours of Haudenosaunee society, that individual relinquishes the right to live in that society. In some versions, some of the Senecas were added to the League as a result of the extension of the rafters, and that is when their roles were assigned: &amp;quot;And it came to pass in later times that they judged it necessary to add to the (roof) poles other great black (roof) poles:&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The roof-poles or rafters become black with the soot of the fires. The darker the poles, the older the longhouse. The great black rafters indicate that the longhouse of the nations is old, and intended to be enduring.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Ka-no-ke-i-da’-wi and Tyo-nin-ho-ka’-we, who are cousins. These two are the doorkeepers.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Skanawati John Buck, in Hewitt 1892b, 144. The law provides that the two Seneca chiefs are the Confederacy chiefs who are also war leaders—leaders of all the warriors of all the nations. The versions that provide this also refer to only one Great Black Door to the Longhouse. Where did the tradition that the Mohawks were Keepers of the Eastern Door come from? And where did the additional “war chiefs” within the confederate structure come from?&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The tension must have been incredible. The warriors presented an immediate physical threat of violence to the chiefs. True to his earlier strategies, the Peacemaker drew them into the peace by acknowledging their abilities and authority—and then transforming them. The warriors had been a menacing and encircling body: they were transformed into a protective circle, doorkeepers,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Addressing Donehogowa and Kanuhkitawi, the Peacemaker said: “You two indeed for a long time argued to delay the completion of the work; you succeeded in causing them to engage in futile debate, you two caused them to be distracted, ensnarled, the minds of all those who have accepted Justice and Righteousness, also Order and Authority, as well as Peace and Health. . . . Now then, this affair has been settled, so consequently you two shall be the Doorkeepers, you two shall guard the doorway to the place where the Federal chiefs have kindled a council fire for Dehadodho, combining their minds in harmony at the main council fire of the Great Law (Commonwealth).” Gibson 1899, paras. 72–73.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and guarantors of the safety of the chiefs and the council. By recognizing their ability and offering them a new kind of authority, the Peacemaker secured their cooperation—in much the same way he had acknowledged Thadadaho&#039;s power and given him special responsibilities within the circle of the law. The warriors had undergone a transformation even as they stood around the chiefs in their circle: &amp;quot;it is you who shall protect it,&amp;quot; said the Peacemaker.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 37.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rather than reject or confront the warriors, the Peacemaker gave them a job to do. Nevertheless, in the centuries that followed, the tension between the chiefs and the warriors has been a constant factor in Haudenosaunee history and law. Newhouse&#039;s versions of the law encapsulate that tension: the warriors were always in a position to kill the chiefs and were sometimes angry or impatient enough to do so.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The four confederate nations had become five, with the Senecas accepting specific responsibility—and authority—to protect the institutions of government.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== One Mind: Ska’níkon:ra ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All along his path, the Peacemaker would show the power of the Good Mind as the first step towards peace. The concept of the Good Mind is made up of several components. A rational, right-thinking mind is not obstructed or twisted by emotions or thoughts of anger or grief. It is a mind that constantly tends towards goodness rather than evil. A mind that is rational and morally good will work towards peace. A good mind will seek to join with other good minds, for that is where the power lies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
People who join their minds together discover that, if they focus on an idea or on a state of mind together, they achieve synergy, a sum greater than the parts. Sagoyewatha (Red Jacket) spoke wistfully of how it used to be:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ancient times, when we were called to a treaty of peace, our discourse was of nothing but peace. We did not repeat misfortunes, when brightening the chain, because we put our minds on peace &amp;amp; friendship all in a heap. Now this was in old times. We not only made the chain of friendship very bright; but we locked arms, and took fast hold of each other&#039;s hands, and left the token of friendship.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, brother, I must tell you of some of our ancient rules: I believe you do not know our old customs: therefore make your mind easy. In ancient times, when we made peace, we cleared the path, and made it open both ways. Now I wish you would keep your mind easy &amp;amp; have no hard thoughts. You do not know our ancient ways, though you know the ways of the white people in doing business. When the two parties met together to make peace, we used to make it so bright that it was seen from the rising to the setting sun. Now you begin to see our way of doing business in the times of our forefathers. What we did, we did well. If any thing was bad, we did it afterwards.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Ganter 2006, 29.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Keep your mind easy and have no hard thoughts&amp;quot;? Sagoyewatha chose his words carefully, drawing them from a storehouse of formulaic expressions. An &amp;quot;easy&amp;quot; mind is one that is not distracted, one that is healthy, clear, and open. An &amp;quot;uneasy&amp;quot; mind would be carrying the baggage of grief, anger, or other distractions. Making one&#039;s mind easy—at ease—was not always something one could do oneself (and therefore one could call upon one&#039;s brothers for compassion and consolation), but it was an ideal, an intentional mindset to adopt before making difficult decisions.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Before a difficult council or meeting, Haudenosaunee leaders will often burn tobacco together as a group. While they are imploring the Creator for direction and assistance, they are also bringing their minds together in a good way. The power of the tobacco burning, and the unity of their minds, sets them at ease.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is useful to consider the Kayanerenkó:wa not only as a law but also, as its name suggests, as a &amp;quot;path&amp;quot; or a &amp;quot;way,&amp;quot; specifically a way of thinking about things and about doing them.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In the same sense, the education provided in law school can be said to be less about the information provided and more about the &#039;&#039;way&#039;&#039; it teaches about thinking and solving issues.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; As Mohawk explained:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From what we know, the Indians had a tradition of law and the Iroquois are our surviving example of it. The Iroquois possessed a tradition of law, and that tradition of law is what has created them as a people. That part is definitely true, but the Iroquois tradition is not a tradition of law, exactly. The Iroquois tradition is a tradition of responsible thinking. It is not something written in paragraphs and lines because it doesn&#039;t matter whether the letter of the thing is right. The questions that have to be before the people are &#039;&#039;What is the thinking? Is the thinking right?&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mohawk 1988, 16.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The essence of the law is its confidence that good minds that are thinking right, using the right process, and working together will come up with the right decisions for the future generations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unity Is Power ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a wampum that symbolizes the moment when all five nations have decided to bring their minds together as one, to form a single body. That it is made of strings, rather than woven into a belt, is testimony to its antiquity. Its simplicity is striking: it consists of five long strings, each the symbol of an individual nation. In 1722, a sixth string was added, as the Tuscaroras officially became the sixth nation of the Confederacy (the first five strings are white, the colour of peace: the sixth string is purple wampum, so that it can be distinguished from the original five). &amp;quot;We will begin now to use a single mind, and this we will do by being like a single person, working together to change the habits of the man.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 221. In 1924, the Indian agent at the Grand River sought to paralyze the Confederacy Council, which he was seeking to replace, by seizing this wampum. He managed to take only the spare set. The original was sold to an anthropologist in 1930, and returned by the Canadian Museum of Civilization in 1990. The spare set was returned by William Montour, the chief of the elected council, in 1988.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[Figure 6: The Nations Bring Their Minds Together: Five strings of wampum, bound together at one end. The dark sixth string, added later, is for the Tuscaroras: This is &amp;quot;The Fire.&amp;quot;]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today, at any Grand Council, the speaker who opens the council with the Thanksgiving holds these strings of wampum. They form a symbolic fire of the Haudenosaunee. Then, emulating the strings suspended from the pole in the Condolence, the strings are draped over a bench in the middle of the longhouse, a sign that the council is in session and the nations of the Haudenosaunee have brought their minds together.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon the convening of the council a string of white wampum beads, about a foot in length, is passed from chief to chief, each holding it in his hands for a moment; it is then laid on a table in the form of a circle, the ends touching; this signifies that the council is &amp;quot;open&amp;quot; and harmony prevails. During the session, if a &amp;quot;condolence&amp;quot; is &amp;quot;called,&amp;quot; by reason of death, a string of purple wampum is held by the side of the circled string, and so on. The &amp;quot;laying down of the wampum strings&amp;quot; one after another, each with its own significance, denotes the nature of the business or discussion of the council that is subject to consent, or rejection, by vote of the chiefs who are members thereof.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Converse 1908, 142. This is a description of the Onondaga councils at Syracuse. The “circle” wampum of the Haudenosaunee at the time was kept by the Mohawks at the Grand River Territory, so the single string in a circle may have been a substitute for that. Today, the strings are not passed around first.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the chronology of the making of the law, the first wampum was made by the Peacemaker of strung freshwater snail shells, in the form of the strings used to condole Hiawatha. With the exception of the very short strings sent with the runners bringing word of an impending Grand Council, those short strings are also the simplest wampum that continues to be used. The first cylindrical wampum, found in &amp;quot;pre-contact&amp;quot; archaeological sites, was painstakingly made with bone and stone tools. It makes sense that the earliest, most basic wampum would be in the form of strings, because there would not be much wampum around. The five strings converging and joining into a single mind echo that simplicity. It stands to reason that they would also be among the earliest wampum symbols of the Haudenosaunee.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A similar symbol of the unity of the Haudenosaunee is a bundle of five arrows bound together.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;On September 10, 1784, Tehonwaghsloweaghte, or Black Cap, the Oneida speaker, spoke to the New York commissioners: “No evil Spirit shall be able to break the Covenant Chain which we have this Day completed; for Union begets Strength. An individual is like the single Stick which I hold in my Hand; how easy it is broke (then breaks the Stick in three Pieces and grasps them together); how weak when single and how strong when together” (Hough 1861, 205).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The Peacemaker received one arrow from each of the five nations, showing that these could each be broken easily. He then took five more arrows and bound them tightly in a bundle, demonstrating that together they could not be broken:&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 306. The story is also told of the mother of the Mongol Nation, explaining the power of unity to her six sons. Five arrows bound together are on the coat of arms of the Scottish clan Cameron, symbolizing the unity of the clan’s five families, and also on the Rothschild arms, for Mayer Rothschild’s five sons. The thirteen arrows in the eagle’s talons on the United States’ coat of arms, symbolizing the original thirteen states, though, are probably derived from the Haudenosaunee rather than any European symbolism. See also Gibson 1899, para. 104: “and thus the power (strength) of the several nations (tribes, native lands) shall be now combined as one.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So now I will warn you (shall have warned you): the number of your united nations (the five tribes) that it will ruin the confederacy (will be inappropriate, not right) for one of the member nations to pull out its arrow, for then consequently the number of them bound together (in the bundle) would be that much less. So it would be still worse if two were withdrawn (&#039;&#039;dondwade’gwa&#039;&#039;, less in number) (diminished by) (if the number were lessened by two), for then it might be possible for someone to bend it, perhaps even to break it. And so I shall warn (say unto) you, &amp;quot;Do not anyone of the several tribes attempt to draw out (withdraw) its arrow. It will be well if it will continue the way it is now as we have now completed (founded) it.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1899, para. 105.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Symbols of unity are another way to remind the people and their leaders of their obligations and commitments. As they take on the historic patina of sacredness, they increase the burden of keeping the commitments, maintaining the ideals. Though the Peacemaker and Hiawatha had taken several years to bring the five nations together, the story of their achievement has been compressed into a single seminal narrative,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Depending on the version, the intervals between the incidents in the making of the law take days, weeks, or years—with the understanding that sometimes a symbolic “day” actually is a year. At this distance, time becomes relative. The peacemaking took a long time and a lot of effort.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; becoming a single extended event—and a continuing process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= PART IV: THE CONSTITUTION =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Overview ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Horatio Hale identified three significant accomplishments of those who had devised the Great Law: the continuity of titles and government; preventing murder and revenge from becoming causes of further bloodshed;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Did the Great Law stop cycles of revenge? One school of thought says it did so within the Longhouse but left those thoughts richly alive with respect to nations beyond the Great White Roots. Thus, a Seneca speaker would tell the Hurons in 1704: “You know, my brothers, our customs which are to avenge, or perish in avenging our dead” (Papers of Cadillac, 33:191; cited in Brandão 1997, 37).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and ending a fascination with death and the dead, replacing it with a ceremony of Condolence that raised up grieving minds. &amp;quot;In considering these remarkable laws, it becomes evident that the work which Hiawatha and Dekanawidah accomplished was really a Great Reformation, not merely political, but also social and religious. They desired not only to establish peace among the nations, but also to abolish or modify such usages and beliefs as in their opinion were injurious to their people.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hale (1883) 1989, 74.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In any overview of the Kayanerenkó:wa, it is useful to consider the way the peace was accomplished and maintained. Institutions, usages, and beliefs that promoted peace and stability were kept, and extrapolated to the level of nation and Confederacy.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Two and a half thousand years ago, in Athens, Cleisthenes reformed its political system in a somewhat similar way. “He did not tamper with existing social groups, with their cherished cults, or with their prestige. He had no need to: he merely created a new structure and gave it the authority.” Boardman, Griffin, and Murray 1991, 33.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Injurious practices were abolished, and where this was not possible, their effects were mitigated. The laws reflected the best features of the people for whom they were designed, but they took into account and addressed their worst tendencies as well. If in any society the greatest strengths are also mirrors of the greatest weaknesses, the Peacemaker&#039;s work had been transformative, replacing anger with thought, fear with compassion, and the ring of angry warriors threatening the society&#039;s peace with a ring of protectors caring for that peace. The laws are pragmatic as well as symbolic: they indicate thought that considers the natural consequences and outcomes of any decision or strategy. The construction of the law shows the way for government to conduct itself in future.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first phase of the Peacemaker&#039;s work had been accomplished: the people had made a commitment to peace, and the chiefs had been brought together at Onondaga. The three guiding principles had been accepted by all the nations. Thadadaho had been pacified and had accepted a major role in the new order. It remained to consolidate the accomplishments and to create the institutions that would perpetuate them. The Peacemaker set the tone with a dramatic announcement in council:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I am Dekanawidah and with the Five Nations&#039; Confederate Lords I plant the Tree of the Great Peace. I plant it in your territory, Adodarho, and the Onondaga Nation, in the territory of you who are Firekeepers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I name the tree the Tree of the Great Long Leaves. Under the shade of this Tree of the Great Peace we spread the soft white feathery down of the globe thistle as seats for you, Adodarhoh, and your cousin Lords.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We place you upon those seats, spread soft with the feathery down of the globe thistle, there beneath the shade of the spreading branches of the Tree of Peace. There shall you sit and watch the Council Fire of the Confederacy of the Five Nations, and all the affairs of the Five Nations shall be transacted at this place before you, Adodarhoh, and your cousin Lords, by the Confederate Lords of the Five Nations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Roots have spread out from the Tree of the Great Peace, one to the north, one to the east, one to the south and one to the west. The name of these roots is the Great White Roots and their nature is Peace and Strength.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Newhouse and Cusick) 1916, 30.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Longhouse of One Family ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today, in many Haudenosaunee communities, to speak of &amp;quot;the Longhouse&amp;quot; is to refer to a way of life that is sometimes called a religion, or to the building that the ceremonies of that traditional way of life are conducted in. This has led many people to think that &amp;quot;People of the Longhouse&amp;quot;—Haudenosaunee—includes only those people who follow that traditional way of life. That is, they have come to believe that it is a term that includes some people in the community and excludes others.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That was not the Peacemaker&#039;s intention.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker came upon a society with many institutions and a coherent way of life, but one that had become dysfunctional, its institutions struggling, its basic structure solid but its people having lost their way. He recognized that a society with internal peace and with war around its edges would still be a society at war. His plan, with the Great White Roots of the Tree of Peace gradually spreading to the four corners of the earth, was for universal peace, and that would mean that all the peoples of the world would eventually accept both the peace and the family relationships that would make it possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Morgan used the word &amp;quot;tribe&amp;quot; or &#039;&#039;gens&#039;&#039; to describe the clans. He recognized that the Confederacy had been built upon existing institutions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The founders of the Iroquois Confederacy did not seek to suspend the tribal divisions of the people, to introduce a different social organization; but on the contrary, they rested the League itself upon the tribes, and through them, sought to interweave the race into one political family.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Morgan (1851) 1995, 75.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . . the Confederacy was in effect a League of Tribes. With the ties of kindred as its principle of union, the whole race was interwoven into one great family, composed of tribes in its first subdivision (for the nations were counterparts of each other); and the tribes themselves, in their subdivisions, composed of many households. Without these close inter-relations, resting, as many of them do, on the strong impulses of nature, a mere alliance between the Iroquois nations would have been feeble and transitory.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Morgan (1851) 1995, 78.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Older and Younger Brothers ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kinship—knowing who you are by knowing who your people are—is crucial to understanding every part of the Great Law. The Peacemaker&#039;s achievement, in part, was to convince the Haudenosaunee that they were all one family, the people of a single longhouse. The same devotion to family that had fostered the desire for revenge in the dark days became the principle that brought and held the Confederacy together. The law provided the flexibility to bring in other nations as brothers, cousins, nephews, or other parts of the family. When the Europeans arrived, kinship worked in two distinct ways to protect the Haudenosaunee. One was that they were prepared to accept the Europeans as relations—to spread the roots of peace by greeting new relatives. But also the Great Law caused them to form a circle of people standing with their arms joined in brotherhood, so firmly that they could not be broken apart. This protective circle is the comfort and empathy of family. James Bradley, writing that the Onondagas had survived &amp;quot;when so many other, comparable cultural groups did not,&amp;quot; found kinship to be part of the explanation: &amp;quot;If locality served as the tangible focus for Onondaga culture, then kinship bonds were the glue that held it together. Kinship operated at several levels—family, clan, moiety, and village—and provided the definition of a person&#039;s roles and responsibilities. Taken together, these formed a social structure that was both flexible and resilient, one that was able to replenish itself through adoption and assimilation. As long as the structure of kinship was retained, Onondaga culture could (and did) accommodate a great deal of biological, ethnic, linguistic, and even material diversity and still remain coherent and functional.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Bradley 2001, 34.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In every real, effective sense, the joined arms of brotherhood, or family, were the people&#039;s protection against being swept away: &amp;quot;This is what &#039;Power&#039; means: all of the Nations will unite all their affairs,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;“Affairs” is one of the most common translations of the root &#039;&#039;–orihwa&#039;&#039;, which is also translated as “matter,” “word,” “thing,” and “substance.” None of the English words picks up the broad purpose of the Haudenosaunee concept.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and the group of several nations will become just a single one, and their power is that they shall join hands. This, moreover, will be the basis upon which they will survive as a group, forming a single family.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 104.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Haudenosaunee languages, it is difficult to simply say &amp;quot;Brother.&amp;quot; One must be specific—younger brother or older brother. The specificity that the language requires encourages each person to think about relationships far more frequently than if they were speaking English, or even thinking in English. The practice of addressing many people, including those not related by blood, as &amp;quot;Auntie&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Mother&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Brother&amp;quot; further served to bind the people together.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Council diplomatic kinship terms are generally male: the chiefs are male, and male terms are usually used in respect of nations.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The exception: the Delawares, after attacking another nation within the Peace, had their weapons taken away from them and symbolically were said to wear aprons and be treated as women. How do we explain the apparent contempt in which these “women” were held, when Haudenosaunee culture and politics reserve such respect for women and their roles? Perhaps because the Delaware men were humiliated into (symbolically) behaving inappropriately for their gender, as the same thinking that respected the women also was very careful to separate men’s and women’s responsibilities. Teasing the Delawares about being made into women, then, is not misogyny but rather the equivalent of teasing a person for being made to wear a dunce cap.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Onondaga Longhouse ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Haudenosaunee longhouse, today, is multi-purpose. While it is clearly designed to put through the annual cycle of ceremonies, it is also a place of family meetings, weddings, and funerals. The same large, single-roomed log building is used for social dances.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;A Maori &#039;&#039;marae&#039;&#039; offers the same multiplicity of purposes: social, ceremonial, political.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Virtually all the longhouses are built along an east-west axis running from fire to fire (wood stove to wood stove), and each has a men&#039;s door and a women&#039;s door. The exceptions are the Onondaga longhouses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two Onondaga longhouses in the world: one at Onondaga, near Syracuse, New York; the other in the Grand River Territory in Ontario. At these longhouses, councils of the Six Nations take place, and they have only one door,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The “new” longhouse in Onondaga, built in the 1970s, has a back door that is used once a year, during Midwinter ceremonies; for all practical purposes, it has only one door.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; in the middle of the building rather than at an end. It is said that this is so that the chiefs all go in together, so that they will more likely be of one mind. The entrance to the longhouse faces east, because the morning sun encourages clear thought. The shared doorway, at the heart of the Confederacy, confirms that this is &amp;quot;the Longhouse of All the Nations.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Line Down the Middle of the Longhouse ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If one enters one of the modern reconstructions of historic bark longhouses,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Archaeologists know where the postholes of historic longhouses were; they do not know what the superstructures looked like. There are few accurate drawings of the roofs. Reconstructions range from rounded roofs to steep triangles. The Mohawk word kahnónsa strongly suggests rounded roofs, since it shares its roots with the words for the dome of a person’s head and the dome of a turtle’s back.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; one can see immediately that a single line can be drawn from eastern to western door, passing through each firepit, each hearth.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A person living in such a longhouse would see that line every day. The line would serve as a reminder that many aspects of the world are divided in two parts: night and day, darkness and light, male and female, young and old. One family would live on each side of each fireplace, so that the people would be used to the idea of pairs of families, facing each other across the fire, living in harmony, with each family constantly instructed to help the other.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[Figure 7: Reconstructed, aging longhouse at Ska-na-doht, near Oneida, 2010. Photograph by author.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Someone walking into a modern longhouse in Haudenosaunee territories would be able to see the same line—from the men&#039;s door to a wood stove (a &amp;quot;fire&amp;quot;), to another wood stove, to the women&#039;s door.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In the two Onondaga longhouses, where there is only one door, the line still can be run between the wood stoves at each end of the longhouse. The wood stoves are indeed “fires,” both for warmth and for burning tobacco when the occasion arises.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The line down the middle of the longhouse becomes a real line in the ceremonies, when the two parts of the people (&amp;quot;moieties,&amp;quot; in anthropological terms) sit on opposite sides of the longhouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The line is also a political line, between the two sides of the fire in council: &amp;quot;we shall now have two sets of lords, one on each side of the council fire.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker 1916, 92. Morgan believed that “the phratric organization has existed since time immemorial. It is probably older than the confederacy.” If he meant the clan system, and its use in the internal government of communities, this is in accord with Haudenosaunee tradition. The Peacemaker used the existing organization as a model, reflected in the League itself. Morgan (1871) 1997, 93.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For modern Haudenosaunee, the two sides of the fire exist as visual realities in council and in ceremonies, and as conceptual principles in considering issues and strategies (that is, there are two sides to every matter—this being not a statement of inconsistency or confrontation but of a need to consider complexity and seek reconciliation). At the time the Great Law was being created, the two sides of the fire were part of every individual&#039;s daily family life. Duality and its companion, balance, were constant, physical presences. It seems it may have been persistent through changing technology and architecture, too: the people gave up bark longhouses for frame buildings in the late seventeenth and early eighteenth centuries, but in Seneca country and among the Onondagas at Oswegatchie, they were living in two-family log homes with shared hearths into the 1800s.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Archaeologists examining these “transitional dwellings” between the bark longhouse and the single-family farmstead do not seem to have considered how many families were living in a structure, nor how the social arrangements were made. Nor has there been much contemporaneous writing on this point.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Calling Council ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unlike other lawmaking and governing bodies, the Grand Council of the Haudenosaunee meets when necessary, without an appointed schedule or set dates. It meets occasionally: there have been times when a year would go by without a Grand Council. To outsiders and many insiders, both how a decision is made that a Grand Council is necessary, and how a Grand Council is brought together, can seem confusing, even mysterious.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Morgan asserts that any of the nations has the authority to &amp;quot;summon&amp;quot; the Grand Council.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Morgan (1871) 1997, 135.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Newhouse explains that the request shall go to the Onondagas, who, if they &amp;quot;find the case is worth the consideration of the Confederate Council,&amp;quot; will notify the rest of the chiefs to attend.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Newhouse 1885, 23.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The modern process for convening a Grand Council flows from any individual nation through Onondaga. The nation may request that a matter be considered by the Grand Council, or Onondaga may decide to hold one of its own initiative. Runners—today travelling by car—go from Onondaga to the fireplaces of the other nations—Oneida (Ontario), Tuscarora, Akwesasne (for the Mohawks), the Grand River and Tonawanda (for the Senecas)—carrying strings of wampum and the message about the date of the council. Just as in the days of the making of the law, there are usually two runners, travelling together.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;One is the person who has actually been given the task of delivering the invitation and notice; the other is his companion, protector, backup. This resembles the times when someone is given the task of opening and closing a council or delivering a message to another nation. Part of the thinking may involve a vague distrust of what a person may do on his own and, in the case of messages to, or meetings with, other nations, a distrust of the people across the fire or table. You want a witness to confirm what you said and did.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The string of wampum is attached to a stick that has been notched to indicate the number of days until the council will be held. The runners must find specific chiefs, the firekeepers of their nations, to deliver the message. The wampum delivered must be returned when the council convenes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Procedure in Council ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Council is ready to begin when representatives of all the nations are present. It is also to begin at mid-morning, and given the distances that some chiefs have to travel, there is a convention that council can proceed, as a &amp;quot;meeting&amp;quot; that will discuss matters in a preliminary way, if only three nations are present. At the Grand River, there has historically been a practice of designating someone to represent an absent nation.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Council at the Grand River requires the presence of all five nations, difficult since there are no local Oneida, Seneca, or Tuscarora Chiefs at the time of this writing. The council counts on chiefs from the other communities of those nations to attend.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Since opening council requires a full Thanksgiving, which can last up to half an hour, there are times when council is started, in the knowledge that the people who are still on their way may arrive late, but not so late that a true council cannot proceed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Though the basic process of nations speaking to one another across a council fire was not new to the nations, nor unique to the Haudenosaunee, the process of a Haudenosaunee council, carefully designed to promote consensus and avoid confrontation, was innovative. It is a complex, deliberate process, and as with many Haudenosaunee cultural processes, there is often concern about keeping things in the proper order and not omitting important steps. Council opens with everyone giving thanks together. The opening words of thanksgiving are delivered by an Onondaga chief. As the speaker completes each part of the speech, ending it with &amp;quot;and so our minds are one,&amp;quot; all the men present indicate their agreement with &amp;quot;yoh!&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;tho!&amp;quot; The thanksgiving opening reminds the participants in council that they are all human beings in a complex, structured world in which each part has its own responsibilities and instructions. The opening creates an atmosphere of good will, commitment, humility, and unity of mind. In a modern Haudenosaunee council, the chief who opened the meeting does so holding the &amp;quot;fire&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;mace,&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In British-style parliaments, the mace is the symbol of the Speaker’s authority, dating from the fifteenth century, when royal Serjeants at Arms would carry maces stamped with the royal arms as emblems of their authority to arrest without warrant. The House is not properly in session if the mace is not in the chamber. The mace sits on the clerk’s table. Members who interfere with the mace are generally suspended. It is an interesting contrast that the symbols of British authority are weapons of war, while symbols of Haudenosaunee authority are reminders that the weapons have been put away.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; the long strings of wampum symbolizing the nations putting their minds together.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In 1924, the Indian Agent at the Grand River Territory, Colonel Cecil Morgan, tried to seize all the Confederacy Council’s wampum as part of his efforts to install an elected system. Taking the “Fire,” it is said, was his attempt to prevent the chiefs from opening council at all. But the wampum seized in the council house was the spare set, and the chiefs continued to meet. When the main wampum also disappeared (it was eventually returned from the Museum of the American Indian in 1988), the chiefs simply took whatever loose wampum they had and made a new “Fire.” They showed that it is the principle, and not the artifact, that counts. If there had been no wampum, perhaps they would have reverted to sumac and basswood beads, or glass ones.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; He holds it by the end at which the strings are joined, as if holding their minds together in his hand. When he has finished the opening, he places the &amp;quot;fire&amp;quot; on the bench&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The bench is the same bench used in the longhouse for the ceremonies, generally the same one used for the sacred Great Feather Dance in the ceremonies of thanksgiving. The wampum is placed on a clean white cotton cloth, to signify that nothing impure should sully it. The cloth recalls the pure white deerskin of the first words of the Condolence.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; near the secretary, to symbolize that the council is now open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is useful to think of the council, in session, as actually consisting of five separate and simultaneous circles or councils. Once an issue has been placed before the chiefs, each nation becomes like a separate committee for the purpose of considering the matter. However, within each nation, the law provides for several permanent committees—chiefs who are to consider matters together. This process allows for multiple simultaneous discussions.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In British parliamentary terms, being able to break into smaller groups for the purpose of discussing a matter is either accomplished by a “caucus,” if the group is of one party, or by a “committee,” if it is a multi-partite group.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker first chose the chiefs as individuals. Not long afterward, when he was describing the workings of the council, he organized them into groups or committees for the purpose of their deliberations. Most of the men were already village chiefs. The Confederacy Council was a new entity, and their roles in that council would reflect the workings of a village or nation council,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Nation councils today seem to have two distinct decision-making structures. In formal meetings, in the longhouse, they will sit in their respective clans on their respective sides, with the issues being addressed back and forth as in a Grand Council. In informal working meetings, they will sit around a table, in no particular order or structure. Generally, the more important the decision, the more people are involved, and the more formal the meeting.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; extrapolated to a new level. However, some aspects of the processes in the Grand Council were new: they were adjustments and designs made to take into account that many of the chiefs of this new body were strangers to one another, whose nations and communities were far apart geographically, and unfamiliar politically. The fifty rotiyanershon are also a larger body than most village councils, and needed new rules to maintain order and direction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Part of the strategy of the council&#039;s process is to have matters discussed by small, manageable groups, in which each individual has the opportunity to speak and be heard. Generally, they consist of two to four of the chiefs. The English word &amp;quot;committee&amp;quot; is most often used to describe these smaller groups within the circle of the nation. Yet &amp;quot;committee&amp;quot; does not capture the nature of these groups, these slightly formalized clusters of thinkers—and no other English word comes close.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus, when a matter is considered, the first body to think about the issue is the &amp;quot;committee&amp;quot; within a nation. The Mohawk chiefs, for example, consist of three such groups, one for each of the three clans. The wampum symbolizing the Mohawk chiefs reflects this: instead of being a string with nine separate strings hanging from it, it has three clusters of three strings each.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker did not explain why he put specific individuals in particular committees. It may have been a matter of the unique capabilities of each member of the first group of chiefs. It may have been a desire to have the chiefs of each village discuss things first, before the matter was taken to the level of the nation. It may have been a way of weaving the clans closer together. Certainly the small committees were part of the larger design—the desire to promote agreement by creating political structures that were most likely to secure and devise consensus. At the committee level, this meant small groups of men who already knew and trusted each other, who could work compatibly, and who were likely to agree.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The momentum of agreement from a committee would then carry over into the nation council. The nation council would be able to discuss the matter in a microcosm of the Grand Council.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The council also consists of three distinct sides: most of the discussion will take place as the issue is passed back and forth between the Elder Brothers, the Mohawks and Senecas, and the Younger Brothers, the Oneidas and Cayugas (and Tuscaroras). The third side of the council, the Onondagas (who are actually Elder Brothers, too), becomes directly involved only after the first two sides have reached consensus, or if they ask for help, having failed to agree.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[Figure 8: Mohawk Chiefs’ Wampum. From &#039;&#039;Wampum Belts of the Iroquois&#039;&#039;, by Tehanetorens Ray Fadden. Used with permission of Six Nations Indian Museum, Onchiota, New York.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an issue is brought forth in council, the path it must follow—from the Elder Brothers to the Younger Brothers and back, and then to the Firekeepers—is such that one might assume that the matter is discussed only after it reaches one&#039;s fire. In fact, each group continues to discuss the matter as it makes its way through the process. While each nation formally has one speaker on an issue, it is not uncommon to see the matter addressed more informally as individual chiefs cross the fire to talk things over, or go outside to &amp;quot;talk behind the bushes,&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;This term is not used much anymore. It reflects the geography of the old longhouses, where the edge of the woods was never far away. It reflects the privacy of these discussions, and also the fact that compromises are often worked out informally, between individuals, in quiet conversations away from the structure and formality of the council.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; or seek advice from their clan mothers or members of their families, or other advisers. The spirit of council is contribution and accommodation. Opinions, when they are spoken openly, are not to be individual opinions but to reflect the thinking of groups of people: this prevents council from descending into personal attacks, and it prevents individuals from domineering by the force of their personalities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A matter coming into the longhouse is generally brought in through the Eastern or Western Door. That is, it is introduced in council by the Senecas or the Mohawks, the doorkeepers (also known as &amp;quot;the Well&amp;quot;). Once the matter has been introduced, the five circles will consider it carefully. If the Mohawks and the Senecas have reached one mind on the matter separately, they will then confer together to seek an agreement. If they agree, then a speaker stands&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Speakers stand—out of respect—and step forward. Anyone else standing in council is probably just getting up to leave to go to the bathroom.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; to state the thoughts of the Elder Brothers and to &amp;quot;send it across the fire&amp;quot; to seek the views and thoughts of the Younger Brothers. Benjamin Franklin described council decorum: &amp;quot;He that would speak, rises. The rest observe a profound Silence. When he has finished and sits down, they leave him five or six Minutes to recollect, that if he has omitted any thing he intended to say, or has any thing to add, he may rise again and deliver it. To interrupt another, even in Common conversation, is reckoned highly indecent.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Franklin 1987, 969–70. The pace of modern councils has increased, but the basic rules and courtesies remain.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The relationship between the Mohawks and Senecas, on one side of the fire, and the Oneidas and Cayugas, on the other side, is described in affectionate terms, terms of virtual equality. There is never any suggestion that, within this family, anyone is subordinate, lesser or inferior:&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;It would seem that the title of Tekarihoken rested with the Scoharie or Lower Mohawks rather than the Canajoharie or Upper Mohawks. John Deserontyon used that title generically in his Condolence at Kahnawake on the death of Ahsarekowa. Sir John Johnson took matters a step further in 1790, when he explained that opposition to the leadership of Thayendenegea Joseph Brant (of Canajoharie) was opposed by the chiefs of the Lower Mohawks, “with a view to keep up their former consequence, having always been considered as the heads of the Six Nations Confederacy.” Public Records Office, Colonial Office Records 42, 69:228.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; &amp;quot;This, moreover, is to be the relationship between the two sides, Tekarihoken and his (Mohawk and Seneca) colleagues (&#039;&#039;siblings – brothers&#039;&#039;) will raise issues, and when they address the other side of the fire they will say &#039;you are downstream from us,&#039; which means this: it is like saying (&#039;&#039;it means for one to say&#039;&#039;) &#039;you, our children.&#039;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Jacob Thomas rendered this as “my offspring”; Hewitt (1928, 93) as “my weanling.” Hewitt explains that symbolically, the mother is on the side of the children. The term “offspring” also appears in condoling councils, “konyennetaghkwen” (Hale (1883) 1989, 60).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Next, the other side of the fire, that is, Odatsehte and his (Oneida and Cayuga) tribal colleagues (&#039;&#039;brothers&#039;&#039;) they will address them, saying &#039;our father&#039;s kinsmen&#039; (&#039;&#039;yok-ni-sho&#039;&#039;) which means this: it is like saying &#039;they are our fathers.&#039;&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 431. When Governor Andros of New York addressed the Haudenosaunee as his “children,” the Mohawks reminded him of the making of the Covenant Chain: “Then we were called Brethren, and that was also well kept; therefore let that of Brethren continue.” Andros seemed to dismiss the difference: “You take notice of the words Brethren and Children, but leave it to mee: they are both words of relation and friendship, but Children the nearer.” By the next council, everyone had reverted to “Brothers.” New York Colonial Documents (NYCD) 3: 535; 557–61. See Jennings 1985, xv.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Oneidas and Cayugas then each consider the matter separately and then consult jointly. If they agree, their speaker explains their thoughts on the issue and sends it back to the Elder Brothers. In doing so, the speaker repeats the words of the Elder Brothers first and then either expresses agreement or adds the new elements for consideration. Repeating the words ensures that they have been understood. If in repeating the words it becomes clear there has been a misunderstanding, it is corrected gently in the reply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In modern councils, the chiefs dress modestly and comfortably, wearing their everyday clothes. Generally, an outsider&#039;s only way to recognize a person as a chief is the fact that he is sitting on a front bench. Sub-chiefs, secretaries, and ordinary people sit on the two or three rows of benches behind the chiefs. Clan mothers and other women sit at the other end of the longhouse—partly a reflection of the separation between men&#039;s and women&#039;s roles, partly as a reminder that the clan mothers take no active part in council decisions but nevertheless must watch their chiefs, advise them when the opportunity arises, and report back to their families with the chiefs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In modern councils, the Tuscarora chiefs sit with the Younger Brothers, and the speaker for that side speaks also for the Tuscaroras, who theoretically are &amp;quot;under the wing&amp;quot; of the Oneidas. In practice, the Tuscaroras are welcomed as equals and as an integral part of the decision making on the benches, but a Tuscarora chief will only speak to a matter to the entire council if there is agreement that he should. This is never denied:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereupon they refer the matter across the fire to the other moiety&#039;s side, and they themselves will let go of it. Thereupon Shakeɂsyone and his committee colleagues, now they will pick it up, consider it carefully, and when they reach consensus among themselves they will refer it back across the fire to the opposite moiety&#039;s side. Thereupon they will pick it up, placing it in front of the two firekeepers who will pick up the matter, consider it carefully, and confirm the matter; and it is this, their unanimous decision, this is what will become law where the people are.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 426.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;matter&amp;quot; is like a physical thing,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Where a responsibility is given to a specific group of people, it is described as a “bundle” that they are to carry. When they fulfill the responsibility and report back, it can be said that they are “unbundled.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; as well as something that has received thought: &amp;quot;letting go if it&amp;quot; means not only &amp;quot;delivering&amp;quot; it to the other side but also detaching oneself emotionally from the decision once it has been made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Council procedure is structured to promote reason and prevent passion. Each side of the fire has a &amp;quot;speaker&amp;quot; on every issue so that one should not see many voices raised from a single bench.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Unfortunately, another reason there are designated individuals to do the talking is that many of the rotiyanershon are not fluent in Haudenosaunee languages.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; A matter cannot be referred back and forth indefinitely: if there is a disagreement, the Onondagas can send it back, with their recommendations for consensus.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Newhouse 1885, 22. They can also send it back if they feel it is “ruinous, injurious, or disadvantageous to the confederate people.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; If passions are ignited—also rare—Thadadaho can close the council.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;His authority to close the council is related to his being given the “Wing” or dust fan to keep the council house clean and clear and to remove any “crawling things.” While closing any council is rare, especially considering the distances that the delegates have to travel, the decision to shut things down is made before matters get out of hand. Harsh words, anger, and deep disagreement can lead to closing council. In modern times, the decision is made by the Firekeepers together.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In modern councils, debate moves back and forth across the fire, as well as within the benches of each nation:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First, the Mohawks, who will consider all of the issues, co-operating with their moiety colleagues, the Seneca, and reaching consensus with them. Thereupon their speaker, now he will move the issue across the fire to the other moiety where he will let go of it. Thereupon the Oneida and their moiety colleagues, the Cayuga, these will co-operate when they pick up the issue to consider it, and if they agree, they will confirm it unanimously. Thereupon their speaker, now he will move the issue back across the fire, letting it go again to where they are seated, the nation group initiating the issue. Thereupon their speaker will be the one to pick it up and he will direct his words to where their cousins, the firekeepers are seated, letting go of it in front of them, the decision of the two firesides. Thereupon their cousins, the namebearers, now they will pick it up, considering it until they decide. Thereupon their speaker, now he will give an answer for the firekeepers, and when they confirm, then the matter will be a rule of the Great Law for the various nations accepting the League. Moreover, they hold the power, the firekeepers, and if it should happen that they differ, the two moieties, if it should happen that they voice two opinions, both sides differing in the outcome of their discussions, then the firekeepers have the power from among either of the two to choose one to support, or they can throw it back for them to reconsider on both sides of the fire—the Council as a whole, the two moieties—and if these reconsider, and if the same thing happens again, then again they will place both results together before the firekeepers, and whichever one they decide for they will support that outcome.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 430–34.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . . each of the opposing sides first takes up the proposition in a few words and sets forth all the reasons which have been alleged pro and con by those who first expressed their opinion. He (the speaker) then states his own opinion and concludes with these words: &amp;quot;That is my thought on the subject of this, our Council.&amp;quot; After their deliberation on whatever subject it may be, there is almost no reason, for or against, which they have not seen or weighed.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Lafitau (1724) 1974, 2:296–97.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any matter dealt with in council is addressed in the most positive manner possible: &amp;quot;they generally begin by some compliment to the last speaker, such as for instance they have listened attentively to the words he has uttered &amp;amp; maturely considered them that they are persuaded that they proceed from a sincere heart &amp;amp; desire for promoting the welfare of the 5 Nations; any sentence calling forth the glory of the nations or their antiquity is always well received &amp;amp; especially as they frequently use brethren of the same nation, friends to the same country, &amp;amp; similar expressions, they are always sure to obtain a favourable audience.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;NYSL MSS 13350, cited in Johnston 1964, 28.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The language of council is both decorous and indirect. It is considered deeply impolite to refer to anyone by name or to make an issue personal. Finger pointing is especially insulting (and may be associated with the ill will of medicine). Rather than present a complete position, anyone introducing a matter to council makes a point of designing it so that consensus can be built gradually and without disagreement.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;This is in stark contrast to the British parliamentary system, in which the government introduces a “Bill” in near-final form, and the “official opposition” then fulfills its function by challenging and attacking it, by proposing amendments, and eventually, often, by voting against the government’s proposal. The parliamentary system “improves” a bill by having it pass through the fire of adversary opposition; the Haudenosaunee system builds the same solution through cooperation. The parliamentary system culminates in a vote, with winners and losers. The Haudenosaunee system culminates in consensus, one-mindedness, or at least accommodation (or deferral).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Where there is disagreement, it is stated carefully but respectfully—often cloaked in statements like &amp;quot;we agree, and furthermore . . .&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That People have however a Piece of Civility peculiar to themselves: for a Man would be accounted very impertinent, if he contradicted anything that was said in their Council, and if he does not approve even the greatest Absurdities therein proposed; and therefore they always answer, Niawa, that is to say, Thou art in the right, Brother; that is well.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Though in some situations, niá:wen means “it is well,” the word today is used as the equivalent of the English “thanks.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notwithstanding this seeming approbation, they believe what they please and no more; and therefore &#039;tis impossible to know when they are really persuaded of those things you have mentioned unto them, which I take to be one of the greatest Obstructions to their Conversion; for their Civility hindering them from making any Objection, or contradicting what is said unto them, they seem to approve of it, though perhaps they laugh at it in private.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hennepin (1688) 1974, 86. What happens when the council disagrees with a proposed course of action? Often it will indicate the disagreement by making positive statements about an alternative. For example, a 2010 proposal from an individual that his team should replace the council’s negotiators was not met with a refusal, but instead the council asserted its confidence in the people it had appointed. Other decisions that amount to a refusal include putting the matter “under the pillow” for consideration and simply moving on to another matter.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To build towards agreement, a matter is sent back and forth across the fire, so that the approach to be taken by the Haudenosaunee to the matter is developed by the Mohawks and Senecas, on one hand, and by the Oneidas (and Tuscaroras) and Cayugas, on the other. If these four nations agree, the Mohawks and Senecas send the matter to the firekeepers, the Onondagas, who can either ratify the resolution or send it back for further discussion. In sending it back, the Onondagas will express the reasons for their hesitations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Seth Newhouse stirred up a political storm when he produced a version of the law that gave the Mohawks primacy, putting these words into the Peacemaker&#039;s mouth:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is provided thus: I begin by choosing you, the Mohawk Nation, to be the &amp;quot;Head and Leader&amp;quot; of the Confederate Government and Legislative Body, and Council. Therefore, you are the foundation of the Government of the &amp;quot;Great Peace&amp;quot; now hereby established. Therefore when in Council, if you disallow any proposition before the Council, or protest against any action of the Council, it shall not be lawful for the Legislative Body, or the Council to pass or the Firekeepers to confirm it.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Newhouse, 1885, “6th Wampum String.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is provided thus: The Council of the Five Confederate Nations Lords shall not be opened until all the &amp;quot;nine&amp;quot; of the Mohawk Lords are present, and in case any of them are absent (it) is not lawful business can be transacted to Council; if all the three parties of Mohawk Lords are represented by one or more Lords; such Council shall not be legal except for matters of little importance; all the &amp;quot;nine&amp;quot; Lords of the Mohawks must be present forming a full Council, for transacting business or matters of importance.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Newhouse 1885, “13th Wampum String.” Newhouse also provided that the Mohawks (rather than the Onondagas) would have the authority to make “final” pronouncements.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No other early version of the law makes the Mohawks so dominant. These clauses, as well as Newhouse&#039;s statements that the warriors had the authority to assassinate chiefs who disagreed with them, offended the council at the Grand River so deeply that the chiefs decided to produce an authoritative version of the law.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Newhouse produced several versions of the law. Only after 1885—after his daughter had died and the council’s investigation exonerated the doctor—did Newhouse begin to propose that the warriors could be justified in killing the chiefs. His anger at the Grand River Council may have led to his reorganization of the constitution.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In council, the Onondagas are the firekeepers, sitting by themselves at the head of the longhouse, in an arrangement that clearly has three components.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Woodbury (Gibson 1912, 427) suggests that they are the “tie-breakers in consensus decisions,” though in a consensus there can be no ties, but only one-mindedness. Other writers have suggested that the Onondaga chiefs have a deciding vote that they cast, but reluctantly. None of those writers was Haudenosaunee.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In Condolences, though, they are part of the Elder Brothers, the Three Brothers, one of the two sides of the fire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is often said that decisions of the Confederacy Council must be unanimous, and that any nation or any individual chief can stop a matter in its tracks. Potentially, this is true. It amounts to an individual and a national veto. Even so, this is rarely used. A Confederacy born out of a desire to create unity of mind maintains a deep aversion to disagreement. An individual who is alone in his disagreement with a decision, and who cannot persuade the rest of the chiefs to change their minds, would be ashamed to be the reason for the council&#039;s inability to decide—even where his position reflects the views of his clan family. The Peacemaker instructed the chiefs to strive towards agreement in all things: &amp;quot;I now charge each of you Lords that you must never seriously disagree among yourselves. You are all of equal standing and of equal power, and if you seriously disagree the consequences will be most serious and this disagreement will cause you to disregard each other . . . then your grandchildren will suffer and be reduced to poverty and disgrace.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Chiefs) 1916, 103. Once again, the chiefs are urged to take the long view, considering the impact of decisions on future generations.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One way to avoid disagreement is to concentrate on the principles of a matter rather than its details. Details can be delegated. Another common method is to secure agreement on the easy parts first and then build gradually, with a momentum of understanding, towards agreement on the more difficult parts of an issue.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In doing this, they are repeating the strategy of the Peacemaker and Hiawatha in the making of the law, bringing those inclined towards peace onside before tackling those who would oppose the good message.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; One technique useful in doing this is to break a matter into components, and then to create strategies for resolving the parts about which there is certain agreement. The harder issues (John Mohawk called them &amp;quot;the rock hard parts&amp;quot;) can be left for later, or they might be left for local or community decisions, which all the nations agree to respect.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;For example, in addressing the question of who would be entitled to receive a Haudenosaunee identification card—essentially, who is a citizen—the Grand Council concluded that each nation should be free to develop its own laws, within the principles of the Great Law, and that other nations would recognize the people accepted by each nation. This avoided the need to create a precise Haudenosaunee citizenship law.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; If it is clear that the two sides—Mohawk and Seneca, Oneida, Cayuga and Tuscarora—disagree, it is not unusual for the Onondagas, who have been watching the matter progress, to suggest some areas for agreement, or to send the matter back to the Elder Brothers with both an idea for resolution and words of encouragement. The words of encouragement often include citing aspects of the Peacemaker&#039;s message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If tempers begin to flare, or patience begins to fray, the Onondaga chiefs may call an end to the council, or a break, to allow minds to cool off. This also allows informal discussion—&amp;quot;speaking behind the bushes&amp;quot;—to seek resolution, often on a personal level. In some cases, a temporary adjournment is necessary to recover rationality. For example, in a council with the western nations in the Ohio country in 1792, the Shawnees bluntly accused the Haudenosaunee of making secret deals with the United States, and threw a string of wampum across the fire, into the dust. The measured Haudenosaunee response came from Honeyawus (Farmer&#039;s Brother), the Seneca chief:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brothers;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We desire you all to sit still, we shall move to a little distance to consult on what answer to give you. You have talked to us a little too roughly, you have thrown us on our backs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Farmer&#039;s Brother then put the String which had been thrown down, over his head &amp;amp; hanging down his back they then moved away &amp;amp; remained an hour.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Cruikshank 1923, 1:224. The western nations had actually decided to assassinate all the Haudenosaunee chiefs at this council, and only the intervention of Egushaway, the Ottawa war chief from the Detroit area, saved their lives. Picking up the wampum but placing it on his head, Honeyawus indicated that it had not been rejected, and that it was being considered. In 1990, during the “Oka negotiations,” when Mohawks from Kahnawake and Kanesatake began to accuse one another of bad faith, the Confederacy chiefs informed both groups that they would not take part in or listen to such disagreement, but instead would withdraw for an hour to permit them to sort matters out. Deskahe Harvey Longboat told them that “the only power we have is &#039;&#039;enskat nikanikonhra&#039;&#039;, one mind, and these sharp disagreements would injure and undermine that power.” When the delegation returned, the disagreement continued, the chiefs withdrew—and the negotiations collapsed.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exceptionally, blunt language from an ally is answered in kind: &amp;quot;You spoke very fierce &amp;amp; roughly to us &amp;amp; we hope you&#039;ll give us the same liberty.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Wraxall (1754) 1915, 201. June 27, 1737, at Albany: the Six Nations to Lieutenant Governor Clarke.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Sharp words&amp;quot; are capable of drawing blood, provoking violence, and breaking the peace. Just as the principle of shared hunting grounds allows no sharp edges in the Dish with One Spoon, to prevent bloodshed, so sharp words are not permitted in council. A speaker in a council between nations, after introducing himself, will often apologize in advance for anything he might say that could be taken as sharp or injurious, and explain that this is not his intention.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Haudenosaunee councils refuse to be rushed. They are the product of a time when there was always enough time to do things properly. Careful thought is unhurried, uncluttered thought and deliberate, consistent work.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Modern Haudenosaunee councils are hampered by a lack of time. Generally, they take place on weekends, rather than extending into as much time as required. Often, their agendas pile up, especially as many councils are cancelled as a result of deaths in the families that carry chiefs’ titles, so that discussions and decisions are postponed.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; If a matter is not agreed upon at one council, the chiefs can &amp;quot;put it under their pillow&amp;quot; to consider it further and deal with it at a future council.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another rule that promotes agreement is a determination to consider only one issue at a time—to avoid confusion caused by a multiplicity of matters. In theory, the Onondaga chief Hononwirehton has the responsibility of keeping council&#039;s mind focussed.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Another name for Hononwirehton is Nkwahokó’wa, the Great Wolf.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In former times, this principle had a physical presence in council, in the form of a visible agenda of wampum strings and belts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When Arendt van den Bogaert visited Onondaga in 1634—and he was the first European to do so—he described an unusual feature of the council house. There was a horizontal pole suspended upon two forked sticks. When there was council, the wampum that symbolized each item on the agenda was hung on this pole, each item in the order in which it was to be addressed. No matter was to be spoken of until the matter before it had been fully dealt with and removed from the pole. The mind of the council was to focus on one issue at a time, without distractions. If people began to drift on to other issues, Hononwirehton would walk over to the pole and tap one of the uprights with his cane. That would be all it took to bring the mind of the council back on track. He might also use the wing or fan to keep the council house clean of dust and distraction. This is why, in the Circle Wampum that symbolizes the council of chiefs, with its fifty strings radiating towards the centre or fire, the longest string represents not Thadadaho but Hononwirehton, for he must sit closest to the fire, in order to have easiest access to the pole.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Just as the Thanksgiving and the Condolence are recalled in part because they are set out in a logical, particular order, so matters raised in council are considered one at a time, and answered in the order in which they are originally stated. Getting things in their right order is an important aspect of planning the process of council. An intentional structure to the agenda allows for the setting of priorities—so the important matters are dealt with first and the least important (or the hard ones everyone wants to avoid) might not be dealt with before the council ends. Often outsiders are dealt with first, so they can be invited to leave as the council moves on to its internal business. Maintaining an orderly progression also requires attention to detail—a matter that is raised and not addressed is pointed out, so that nothing is left undone. Father Hennepin, in the late seventeenth century, described council procedure:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The next day the Iroquese answer&#039;d our Discourse and Presents Article by Article, having laid on the Ground several little pieces of Wood, to put them in mind of what had been said the day before in Council; their Speaker, or President, held in his hand one of these Pieces of Wood, and when he had answer&#039;d one Article of our Proposal, he laid it down, with some Presents of Black &amp;amp; White Porcelain, which they use to string upon the smallest Sinews of Beasts; and then he took up another Piece of Wood, and so all of the rest, till he had fully answer&#039;d our Speech, of which those Pieces of Wood, and our Presents, put them in Mind. When his Discourse was ended, the oldest Man of their Assembly cry&#039;d aloud for three times, Niaoua, that is to say, it is well, I thank thee; which was repeated with a full voice, and in a tuneful manner, by all the other Senators.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hennepin (1688) 1974, 86.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The aversion to disagreement can result in the Confederacy Council failing to agree at all, leaving individual nations to take action as they choose, or even allowing individual people that choice.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In the American Revolution, the Mohawk and Oneida chiefs, in the Confederacy Council, initially urged neutrality, and argued that the Haudenosaunee should not get involved in the war. The Senecas and Onondagas felt that the Haudenosaunee had an obligation to help the King. In the absence of any agreement, individuals like Thayendenega Joseph Brant, Hanyery, and Atiatoharongwen Louis Cook were able to draw groups of Haudenosaunee into different sides of the war. See LAC, MG29.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; This is accompanied by a sense of sorrow, especially since the Peacemaker warned against indecision by the chiefs at the time of the making of the law. Disagreement can result in the appointment by the council of individuals to work on the matter with the parties—for example, the Cayugas meeting with different Oneida groups—to report back to the next council. Even without a formal appointment, individual chiefs will continue to communicate and meet in small groups, seeking to resolve matters or to generate solutions that can be brought to the fire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Thick Skins ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the council to function properly, its members needed enormous patience. They would become targets in a dozen ways. Their families would seek to influence them to make short-term decisions, to satisfy immediate needs, rather than to focus on the next seven generations. They would be provoked by insults and accusations. Their gossip-prone society would ensure that ugly rumours would spread about them. Even within the council, there could be hard feelings between individuals. Every version of the law repeats the Peacemaker&#039;s admonition to the chiefs that their skins must be so thick that no barbs will be able to penetrate them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker understood that if communication and memory were strengths of Haudenosaunee society, they were also the sources of weakness: gossip was constant and rapid, and malicious gossip would never go away.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In the 1970s, when the State of New York was intent on building Interstate 81 through Onondaga Territory, rumours were so quick and persistent that the chiefs installed a telephone line called “Rumor Central,” which people could call about a rumour and find out whether it was true.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; This was one of the matters that he recognized he could not change, so he had to develop ways of guarding against it. He fortified the chiefs against it, in the law itself:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chiefs skin must be thick &amp;amp; have patience.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker 1916, 148; Council at Cattaraugus, December 1, 1862.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I shall therefore charge each of your lords, that your skin be of the thickness of seven spreads of the hands (from the thumb to the end of the great finger) so that no matter how sharp a cutting instrument may be used it will not penetrate the thickness of your skin. (The meaning of the great thickness of your skins is patience and forbearance, so that no matter what nature of question or business may come before you, no matter how sharp or aggravating it may be, it will not penetrate to your skins, but you will forbear with great patience and good will in all your deliberations and never disgrace yourselves by becoming angry.)&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Chiefs) 1916, 104.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will receive many scratches and the thickness of your skins shall be seven spans.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;A “span” means the length of a hand, from the tip of a little finger to the tip of the thumb. Short distances, to the Haudenosaunee, were measured in relation to parts of the human body (the wampum sent to the Cherokees in 1770 was “as long as a man is tall”). European measures of the time were no different: the inch is the length of a thumb knuckle (in French, &#039;&#039;une pouce&#039;&#039;); the foot &#039;&#039;is&#039;&#039; a foot. Gibson, 1899, 107: “the thickness of your skins shall be seven (inches) (times the first joint of thumb) (&#039;&#039;oyon-gaah&#039;&#039;).”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; You must be patient and henceforth work in unity.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Newhouse and Cusick) 1916, 29.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . . all of you yourselves shall be as standing trees&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In the inquiry into George Klock’s fraudulent purchase of Canajoharie lands, it was asked who were the principal persons of that Mohawk community for public matters. The answer was: “Those who are here are the Chiefs for all such matters, being the Sachems for transacting everything of consequence, and as such are known to the whole Six Nations, being as Trees rising up amongst us.” SWJP 4:56.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; where the people will rest their eyes and minds. And so this will be the system (rule) amongst the persons (body) of your chiefs; and the thickness of your skins shall be seven times the first joint of the thumb (&#039;&#039;oyonh’gaaɂ&#039;&#039;), and the reason for this is that when you are all legislating . . . no matter if your public may employ a sharp point (shoot a magic dart) or perhaps (else) they might even stick you with it, it won&#039;t penetrate. This is what it means: thou shalt be of a strong mind, O chief! Don&#039;t carry feelings of anger (grudge) or of spite. Thus it shall come to pass when thou are considering (deliberating) the affairs of the people, always continually employ good will (&#039;&#039;gaɂnigonii’yo&#039;&#039;) and peace as well. Do not ever consider only thyself, O Chief! And always remember the future generations of our families, the grandchildren, and those yet unborn, and even those whose faces are coming beneath the earth.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1899, para. 310.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We&#039;re taught that you&#039;ve got to have skin seven layers thick. You have to develop it. There&#039;s work to it. But when your skin is thick, nobody can get at you. They can&#039;t touch you. They can&#039;t hurt your feelings or cause you to have jealousy. Money won&#039;t tempt you. If somebody works bad medicine on you, it&#039;ll never find your weakness. It&#039;ll go right back on that person who sent it your way. That&#039;s why we say you&#039;ve got to have skin seven layers thick. If something touches you a little, you&#039;ll always have another layer of skin for protection.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Wall 2001, 34.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of course, by providing additional thickness for the skins of the chiefs, the law also provided a new metaphor for the people to keep in mind: a person who insisted on passing on rumours would be reminded that this kind of thing would not be allowed to penetrate anyone&#039;s skin. While some assume that the chiefs would build up the layers of their skin by toughening them from the outside, others maintain the layers are metaphors for internal character and fortitude.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The seven handspans recall other significant uses in the law of &amp;quot;seven&amp;quot;—the seven generations to look into the future when making decisions, for example.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Wright (1999), who purports to examine how numbers are significant to Iroquoian peoples, drawing mainly from the Jesuit Relations, omits any mention of the number seven. Thadadaho had seven crooks in his body; the chiefs’ skin is to be seven spans thick; the Seven Dancers of the Pleiades mark time for Midwinter; we are to think seven generations into the future.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Mentors of the People ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Europeans, emerging in the eighteenth century from a long tradition of absolute monarchies and executive authority, were often surprised at the lack of executive power that the chiefs of the Confederacy actually had. They led by example; they lived modestly and humbly. It was—and remains—a different kind of leadership: &amp;quot;Their Great Men, both Sachems and Captains, are generally poorer than the common People, for they affect to give away and distribute all the Presents or Plunder they get in their Treaties or War, so as to leave nothing to themselves.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Canadian law about equitable remedies assumes the highest and best use of the assets, and generally this is equated to investment. But in the 2016 &#039;&#039;Huu-ay-aht&#039;&#039; decision, the Specific Claims Tribunal pointed out that in Coast Salish culture, the highest and best use of assets can be to give them away in a potlatch, thereby creating social capital and prestige. Material poverty is only one measure of a person’s worth.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; If they should once be suspected of selfishness, they would grow mean in the opinion of their Countrymen, and would consequently lose their Authority.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Colden (1727) 1973, xx. After he is condoled, it is not unusual for a chief to say, “you have made me a poor man.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today, it is no longer expected that the chiefs give away their property, in part because it is also no longer the case that their extended clan families look after all their needs. There is no chiefs&#039; pension plan, and in most cases, beyond sometimes paying their travel expenses, there is no compensation for the time the chiefs put into their duties. &amp;quot;A free government for a free people,&amp;quot; Joagquisho Oren Lyons has said. While it is vital that the chiefs should lack greed or a thirst for power, perhaps the best way in English to describe the manner that is proper for a chief is &#039;&#039;sweetness&#039;&#039;. The duties are a burden, an honour, but not a livelihood.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Kayanerenkó:wa explains the attitude more elegantly:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Lords of the Confederacy shall be mentors of the people for all time. The thickness of their skin shall be seven spans—which is to say that they shall be proof against anger, offensive action and criticism. Their hearts shall be full of peace and good will and their minds filled with a yearning for the welfare of the people of the Confederacy. With endless patience they shall carry out their duty and their firmness shall be tempered with a tenderness for their people. Neither anger nor fury shall find lodgement in their minds and all their words and actions shall be marked with calm deliberation.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Newhouse and Cusick) 1916, 37.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Onondaga text cited in &#039;&#039;The Iroquois Book of Rites&#039;&#039;, care for the people was expressed in terms of both authority and obligation, the balance that runs like a current throughout the law:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The chiefs must all be honest, that they must all love one another, and that they must have a regard for their people, including the women, and also our children, and also those children whom we have not yet seen; so much they must care for, that all may be in peace, even the whole nation. It is the duty of the chiefs to do this, and they have the power to govern their people. If there is anything to be done for the good of the people it is their duty to do it.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hale (1883) 1989, 170.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You shall be a good person, and especially you shall be kind to all people, not differentiating among them—the people who are wealthy and the poor ones, the good-natured ones and the evil ones who sin readily. All of you shall act kindly, and you shall not differentiate among them. And as to your own fireside, never consider only yourself; you must always remember them, the old people and the younger people and the children and those still in the earth, yet unborn, and you will always take into account everyone&#039;s well-being, that of the ongoing families, so that they may continue to survive, your grandchildren.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 97.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Skanawati John Buck added: &amp;quot;Permit me to say to you, apply yourselves diligently to all the duties you have taken upon yourselves; faithfully perform every responsibility, because to you is entrusted the preservation and settlement of all things.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hewitt 1892b, 143.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sayenqueraghta, of the Seneca Nation, explained the role of a royá:ner in 1765: &amp;quot;a wise dispassionate man (who) &#039;&#039;thinks much&#039;&#039; &amp;amp; &#039;&#039;thinks slowly&#039;&#039;, with great caution and deliberation, before he speaks his &#039;&#039;whole mind&#039;&#039;.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Samuel Kirkland, April 1765, in Pilkington 1980, 25. For a European view of the powerlessness of Indian leadership see Loudon (1808) 1971.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The settler expectation of executive authority might have proceeded from the use of the word &amp;quot;chief.&amp;quot; Modern Haudenosaunee have often explained that the word is not appropriate, since it carries the wrong spirit:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The word &#039;&#039;chief&#039;&#039; in our language means a position or office. We call it &#039;&#039;royaner&#039;&#039; and if there are many of them we call them &#039;&#039;rotiyaneson&#039;&#039;. If we take that word apart, what does it mean?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is coming from the root word &#039;&#039;ioánere&#039;&#039;, which means, in English, &amp;quot;nice&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;good.&amp;quot; And then when you put &#039;&#039;io&#039;&#039; at the beginning of it, it means it is masculine, or a man who is of the &amp;quot;nice&amp;quot; or of the &amp;quot;good.&amp;quot; And so that is literally, when translated into English, what Iroquois people think of their leaders—those men who are of the good.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . . Those leaders are the most humble ones and they are the poorest people of all of the nation because they are always giving, always giving, always giving, both materially, psychologically, spiritually and politically of themselves to all the people of the nation; they are always giving.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Porter 1988, 8–12.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Were the chiefs supposed to be like the fathers (or rather, uncles) to their families? The relationships within families were not the same as they were in European society. Children and wives were not property in any sense, and whereas in a European family of the eighteenth century the primary obligations were the child&#039;s obedience and the parent&#039;s providing, in a Haudenosaunee family that duty to obey was singularly lacking. Just as traditional Haudenosaunee government was not executive, and had no coercive power over the people, parents would not exercise authority over their children. John Long, in 1791, wrote: &amp;quot;From their infant state they endeavour to promote an independent spirit; they are never known either to beat or scold them lest the martial disposition which is to adorn their future life and character, should be weakened: on all occasions they avoid anything compulsive, that the freedom with which they wish them to think and act should not be controuled [&#039;&#039;sic&#039;&#039;].&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Long 1791. Father Hennepin quoted LaSalle saying that “the Children shew but small Respect to their Parents: sometimes they beat them without being chastised for it; for they think Correction would intimidate them, and make them bad souldiers.” Hennepin (1688) 1974, 120–21.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Individual Haudenosaunee citizens carried a powerful sense of personal independence. It is no accident that the participants in the Boston Tea Party, defiantly sending a message about their own rebellious independence, dressed as Mohawks:&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In 1773, as the eighty costumed men threw imported tea into Boston harbour, a mob supporting them chanted “Rally, Mohawks, bring out your axes / And tell King George we’ll pay no taxes / on his foreign tea.” After that, patriots drank bergamot or Mohawk tea, while those loyal to the Crown drank the imported brew.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; the Haudenosaunee image of individuality and freedom did inspire some aspects of the American Revolution. Balancing that independence, though, was an equally powerful sense of belonging—to family, clan, and nation. It left each individual with a need to contribute, to fulfill duties and responsibilities. While the individual was expected to make up his own mind,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Haudenosaunee storytelling provides another example of that way of thinking. Unlike Aesop’s fables, where the moral is explained baldly at the end of the tale, Sostsisowah John Mohawk points out that “it would be an Iroquois way of doing things to tell a story and to refuse to tell the listener what he should have learned from the story.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; that mind was expected to work for the good of the community.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One way that Haudenosaunee law avoids creating expectations of executive authority is by making people stewards rather than owners, &amp;quot;keepers&amp;quot; rather than bosses. Even early European documents describing functionaries within Haudenosaunee government use the term &amp;quot;keepers&amp;quot;—firekeepers, doorkeepers, wampum-keepers,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The authority of an individual wampum-keeper to dispose of the objects of which he holds the stewardship for the nation was examined by the United States Supreme Court in &#039;&#039;Onondaga Nation v. Thacher&#039;&#039;, 189 US 306 (1903): the court decided that the wampum-keeper had the lawful authority to dispose of the national wampum as he saw fit—including making the State University his successor—and the State University acquired apparently absolute authority to retain and use the wampum, regardless of the decisions of the council. The wampum was finally returned to the Onondaga Nation in 1989, ninety-one years after it had left.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; faithkeepers.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Though Google is not a scientific method of determining the influence or prevalence of a term, it is interesting that a significant proportion of the “hits” for each of these terms are only Haudenosaunee—other peoples don’t use the “-keeper” concept nearly as frequently.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The term is not domestic;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Though Molly Brant’s modern feminist biographers were offended that in Sir William Johnson’s will he would describe a woman with whom he had shared a mansion and eight children as his “dear housekeeper,” he was in fact merely providing the most direct English translation of the term used in Mohawk for a “wife”: “she keeps the household.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; it refers to stewardship and the peculiar mix of responsibility and authority that characterizes Haudenosaunee government.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Another example of this “keeping” is the relationship between an individual and a haduwi or “false face mask.” As a living being, it is not owned by the individual who looks after it—at least, not owned in the sense of the power to dispose of freely or destroy it. The medicine society has an interest in the mask, as does all of Haudenosaunee society, which it is intended to protect. The English language does not lend itself, especially in legal terms, to describing this kind of relationship. See Williams 2010.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Chiefs: Permanence of Titles ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Many of the fifty men who became the first rotiyanershon of the Haudenosaunee were given new names by the Peacemaker. The new names were a sign of their transformation, of their accession to a higher level of chieftainship. They were no longer simply village chiefs. They were Confederacy chiefs, and in some cases, their names reflected their roles in bringing the peace, or the state they were in at the time of the peacemaking. Just as the Peacemaker&#039;s work was transformative, so the new names given to individuals reflected the way that individual had accepted a new set of responsibilities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The new names were also permanent. That is, if the Chief of the Small Bear Clan of the Cayugas died, a new person would be chosen by that family to take his place, and the new person would assume that title. Not only would he assume the title: he would also be expected to carry on the special duties and characteristics of his predecessor. &amp;quot;The principle that &#039;the chief dies but the office survives&#039;—the regular transmission of rank, title and authority, by a method partly hereditary and partly elective, was the principle on which the life and strength of the Iroquois constitution depended.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hale (1883) 1989, 68.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a title holder dies, his name is symbolically removed from him and given to his successor. The Condolence ceremony, in that sense, is also a &amp;quot;requickening&amp;quot; or making alive again. The death and rebirth of a leader is an ancient human practice: the myths of Osiris or the Fisher King are examples of the rebirth of the leader also restoring the spirit (and fertility) of the people and the land, with the new incarnation carrying the same name as his predecessor.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Though generally after Condolence a chief is known by his title while doing business, nowadays he also often retains his original personal name, at least for use within the family, and he retains his English name, since he has to continue to work with outsiders.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a way, the new person carrying the name is also the old person in a new body:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The savages have a custom of rescucitating or making their friends revive, particularly if they were men of distinction among them. They make some other bear the name of the deceased; and behold the dead man resuscitated and the grief of the relatives entirely gone. Observe that to the name given in a great assembly or feast, they add a present which is made on the part of the relatives or friends of the one whom they have revived, and he who accepts the name and the present is obliged to take care of the family of the deceased so well that the wards call him father.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Jesuit Relations of 1639, probably speaking of the Hurons; cited in Beauchamp (1907) 1975, 345.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is probably one of the reasons why the rotiyanershon were called &amp;quot;Confederate Lords,&amp;quot; a designation possibly originated by Seth Newhouse, who sought to show how Haudenosaunee law ought to be respected by British law, since the two systems had such similarities. The British House of Lords functions the same way with respect to hereditary peers. If the Duke of Northumberland dies, the title does not die with him; instead, his heir immediately becomes &amp;quot;Northumberland.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The Duke of Northumberland, serving in the British Army in North America, became friendly with the Mohawks and was given the name Thoregwi, which he translated as “The Pine Break.” He was especially fond of Thayendenega Joseph Brant. When Teyoninhokarawen John Norton went to England in 1807 as an emissary of the chiefs at the Grand River, the Duke of Northumberland supported him; when Ayonhwes John Brant went in 1821, another Duke of Northumberland welcomed him.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The British system is truly hereditary: the succession is automatic, passing to the eldest child, and merit and choice play no part in it. The Haudenosaunee system is not strictly hereditary: each male member of the clan family has an equal potential for becoming the successor, and merit and the choice of the family play the key roles in choosing the new title holder. Or, as Morgan explained: &amp;quot;The office of sachem was hereditary in the gens (clan), in the sense that it was filled as often as a vacancy occurred.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Morgan (1871) 1997, 71.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes the clan mother and women conclude that there is no man in the family who has the attributes needed to become its chief. In such situations, the family &amp;quot;borrows&amp;quot; a man from another family, and he is condoled into the title of the deceased chief. He holds that title for life, and once he has been condoled he is recognized by the entire Confederacy as that family&#039;s proper representative, carrying the duties within the Confederacy Council of that title. For the law to work, it is important that the family have the best representative possible, and also that his legitimacy should not be questioned.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Cluster: Chief, Clan Mother, Sub-Chief, Faithkeepers, Runner ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most Europeans engaged in political and legal dealings with the Haudenosaunee met with the chiefs and the warriors. While the women had authority, it was not their role to engage in negotiations with representatives of other nations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Europeans did not see that each Confederacy chief was actually the centre of a cluster of five people, often appointed and condoled at the same time. Each chief today has a clan mother, who is responsible to work with him on the women&#039;s side; a runner to carry his messages; a &amp;quot;sub-chief&amp;quot; to sit behind him in council, to learn from him, and to fill in for him when he is away; and a male and female faithkeeper to help with the ceremonies. This cluster of five people includes male and female, political and spiritual, young and old. It recognizes that the chief cannot carry the weight alone. As Morgan pointed out with Pine Tree chiefs, if authority is more widespread, it is more democratic.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;How these people fulfill their obligations provides the family with insight into their suitability for other functions. While often a sub-chief replaces the chief on the latter’s death, this is not always the case.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Alone among all the chiefs, Thadadahoh has no sub-chief and no runner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The sub-chief, according to Morgan, &amp;quot;was styled an &#039;aid.&#039; It was his duty to stand behind his superior on all occasions of ceremony, to act as his messenger, and in general to be subject to his directions. It gave to the aid the office of chief, and rendered probable his election as the successor of his principal after the decease of the latter. In their figurative language these aids of the sachems were styled &#039;Braces of the Long House,&#039; which symbolized the confederacy.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Morgan (1871) 1997, 132; (1851) 1995, 65.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today, both in council and in ceremonies, a sub-chief often sits behind his chief, a visible support&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;It is not unusual to see a sub-chief take physical care of the chief—getting him water in council, taking care of the driving to council and ceremonies. The time the two spend together, especially in travel, fosters a bond and ensures the transmission of knowledge and experience. Tehahenteh equates “sub-chief” with its more literal term: “protector.” Sitting behind the chief, in the old days, also meant watching his back—as the Spanish term for “bodyguard” is &#039;&#039;guardaespaldas&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; as well as an apprentice or occasional substitute. While the chief has a &amp;quot;runner&amp;quot; or messenger, this person is more often used to carry word within the clan, and the sub-chief, often a younger man, is sometimes sent with messages to other nations. While satisfactory performance as a sub-chief can indeed &amp;quot;render probable&amp;quot; his selection as future chief, unenthusiastic or mediocre performance as a sub-chief will generally ensure that the person will not become a chief at all.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Clan Mothers ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Several versions of the law do not describe in detail the authority and duties of the clan mothers. Possibly this is because the institution of clans and their matrons was already in place before the coming of the law—having been brought by the fatherless young man of an earlier meta-narrative—and therefore did not need to have new provisions made for it. Less likely, it is because the versions that became public were kept and explained by men, who had a less generous view, and less knowledge, of the role of the women. Most likely, the provisions of the law about clan mothers were simply not transcribed by the anthropologists at the same time as the rest of the law. Skaniatari:io John Arthur Gibson was not hesitant in describing &amp;quot;the Law of the Woman Chief&amp;quot; to J.N.B. Hewitt in 1909, not long before he dictated the long, authoritative version of the Great Law.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Why, when Hewitt had been recording the Haudenosaunee meta-narratives with Gibson for twenty years, did Gibson dictate the Great Law to Goldenweiser instead? Because in 1912, there had been a change in management in the Smithsonian, and Hewitt found himself virtually chained to a desk in Washington, being paid by the line rather than a reasonable salary doing fieldwork. He survived by writing the massive &#039;&#039;Seneca Fiction, Legends and Myths&#039;&#039; with Jeremiah Curtin (1918), but he was not seen at Grand River for several years. Blind John Arthur Gibson forged on without him.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since the position of clan mother was now linked inextricably with that of the chief, she became a visible participant in the Condolence ceremony that raised him up; her family would be condoled in the same way upon her death; and over time, things that were done to or for chiefs came to have their parallels with clan mothers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To some outsiders, the decision about who should be a clan mother seemed simple: the position would pass to the oldest living female in the family. Chadwick described his understanding of the process at the end of the nineteenth century:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The right of nomination vests in the oldest near female relative of the deceased chief, that is, the oldest of a class composed of his maternal grandmother and great aunts, if living, but if none of those are living, then the oldest of a class composed of his mother and her sisters (daughters of the mother&#039;s mother), or if none of these, then of his sisters, daughters of his mother, and if these are also wanting, then of his nieces, daughters of his mother&#039;s daughters; and if all these fail, then the right passes to collateral relatives of his mother&#039;s totem, and if there are none of these, no nomination can be made, and the chieftainship becomes extinct. The nominator consults with the two next senior women, ascertained by the same order, and classification of the family is thus made. It does not seem very clear what occurs if the three do not agree. . . . If a chiefship fails in consequence of the family to which it belongs becoming extinct, either in the person of a nominator, or of a qualified nominee, the Great Council has power to transfer the chiefship to another family (preferably one which is, or is considered to be akin to the extinct family), in which a chief is then nominated by the senior woman and her associates, and assumes the title in the usual manner, whereupon the succession goes in that family.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Chadwick, 36–38, cited in Beauchamp (1907) 1975, 349.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choosing a clan mother is more complex than simply finding the oldest woman in the family. Such a process would make little sense—no clan mother would last very long, and one of the key attributes of the system is its stability. In many families, it is the clan mother herself who names her successor, though often this is not necessary, because the choice will be obvious, since the clan mother will have been training someone—usually one of her daughters—in the duties and knowledge required. Different families have differing degrees of cohesiveness, adherence to tradition, and even their own internal traditions. Where no person has been designated before the death of a clan mother, and especially where there is some uncertainty about which families belong with that chief&#039;s title, there are situations in which the clan mother position remains vacant for years while rival claimants assert their entitlement. Since it is a family matter, and within a nation and a community, outsiders are reluctant to interfere: &amp;quot;On modern condolences one woman often has the sole nomination of a chief, but where several are to be consulted, the subject may be canvassed up to the last moment, and thus I have seen them running from house to house.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Beauchamp (1907) 1975, 347.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Haudenosaunee society does not have a formalized group of &amp;quot;elders,&amp;quot; but the clan mothers are often seen as people of wisdom and experience, whatever their ages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While a chief represents his nation as well as his clan family, the same cannot be said for the clan mother. Her duties are to her family, and it is the family alone that chooses her. In contrast, because the chief needs to work with the other members of the council, his appointment must be confirmed first by the other clans of his nation; then by the other nations on his side of the fire; and finally, through the Condolence, by the nations on the other side of the fire. No similar system of checks and balances exists for a clan mother. However, when a clan mother dies, there is a &amp;quot;Small Condolence&amp;quot; for her family, and the council does not sit for ten days after her death, because the mind of the entire community has been cast down and is clouded by sorrow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The clan mother has a number of duties related to the law, and most of them are about maintaining continuity. Generally, she is responsible for keeping the clan family&#039;s personal names, so that she is consulted, along with other older women, about a choice of name for a new child. She also ensures that the new child does not take the name of a living person. If it is necessary to appoint a speaker to address women&#039;s issues, she will appoint that speaker—but she will also convene a meeting of the women to develop their position first. In consultation with the women of the clan family, she selects the successor to a deceased chief. While the chief can be removed by the women, in fact it is his clan mother to whom he remains most actively responsible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Though today the situation varies from clan to clan, generally a clan mother is the custodian of three wampum strings: a white string representing her own office; a second white wampum as the &amp;quot;horns&amp;quot; or credentials of her chief;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The chief generally carries a duplicate of this. It becomes visible in public only when it is placed in his hands at his funeral, when the “horns” are lifted so they may be passed on to someone else. It may also be seen when a chief is publicly dehorned, and hands the string back.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and a purple string that is used to send notification of the death of her chief. While some clan mothers also hold strings of wampum associated with Pine Tree chiefs, those men are not appointed by or responsible to clan mothers but are appointed by and responsible to the condoled chiefs in council.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hill 2009. In some instances, women who somehow acquired strings of wampum believed that they had become clan mothers as a result. It is not possession of wampum that makes you a clan mother, it is being a clan mother that entitles you to possession of the wampum.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gibson describes the clan mother&#039;s responsibility to ensure that the chiefs in council are fed. The clan mothers do this today: in council at the Grand River, the responsibility for cooking for council rotates between several clan families, and the clan mothers both coordinate the cooking and take part in it. While to some this may seem menial, there are also good reasons for it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After each instance in which the Peacemaker transforms someone, or a group, from being a threat to peace into being a mainstay of peace, they eat together. Eating together is a fundamental step in Haudenosaunee society towards creating, restoring, or maintaining peace. Feasts are connected to medicine, restoring harmony, and removing harm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Food is medicine, in the Haudenosaunee understanding of the world. When the clan mother provides the meal for the chiefs in council, she is fulfilling an important role in maintaining their mental, physical, and spiritual health. Sken:nen is both health and peace. In the days when the women controlled the gardens, they were the economic mainstay of the community. Making the meals for the council was a reminder of the women&#039;s economic authority.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At council, after lunch, the chiefs always indicate their gratitude to the cooks: it is a public reaffirmation of their connection with, and debt to, the clan mothers. Yet it must be said that many people fail to understand the significance, the deep meaning, of providing the meal for the chiefs, and conclude that this practice today is a matter of subservience, a task that takes the clan mothers away from their true work of observing the chiefs in council and guiding them when they err. If some of the chiefs begin to forget why this work is important, they do begin to undervalue the role and responsibility of the clan mothers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The clan mothers are mentors, just as the chiefs are. They are consulted by the people in times of personal crisis. They take special responsibility for counselling families and for ensuring that children are properly looked after. Today, the clan mothers together have taken up some of the responsibilities of provincial or state child welfare authorities: meeting with parents who fail to look after their children properly; helping to find homes for children in need; mediating family disputes. The children are their particular concern, and they easily find themselves acting as advocates and protectors in difficult family situations. Part of the power of the clan mother is discretion: her work is conducted quietly, behind the scenes, in times when people count on her advice but hesitate to make their issues public.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Just as the chief, when he is being condoled, appears with a cluster of helpers (including the clan mother), so the clan mother, too, has an assistant. Skaniatari:io John Arthur Gibson describes the role and nature of the clan mother&#039;s principal helper: &amp;quot;the young man with no title he is stronger, also he walked around, also he is able he outwitted the game, the wild walking around in the forest, he has the power of survival of the people, whatever he was able to provide, everything will go well, they will work together, he and the Clan Mother.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Translation: 2013, Nora Carrier, Deyayohageh, Grand River Territory.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Why would a woman chief have a strong young male helper, a man without a title? First of all, this is another example of gender balance in Haudenosaunee law. A chief has a clan mother. The clan mother has a male helper. Today, the chief has a male and female faithkeeper. Authority is balanced as between men and women, even as roles are differentiated. While the clan mother can count on the support and help of all the women of the clan family, her young male helper has specific duties as her spokesman, as her liaison with the men, and, in the worst case, as The Man Without Pity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Why a young man? Partly to balance the clan mother&#039;s age, so that authority and communication span generations. Partly because the young man will be able to communicate with the hunters and warriors, and they are a crucial aspect of the family&#039;s social makeup. Beginning with the Jesuit Relations, Europeans observed that the women were the ones who would urge the young men to war or peace. Konwatsitsiaienni Mary (&amp;quot;Molly&amp;quot;) Brant was said to have the ability, as a clan mother, to put hundreds of warriors into the field. Historians assert that the &amp;quot;Mourning Wars&amp;quot; of the 1600s were instigated by the women, and particularly the clan mothers, seeking to replace men who had been killed. While European observers seldom saw or knew what was happening in the councils of Haudenosaunee women, or in their dealings with the young men, the connection between the women and the warriors was functional, constant, and important. As well, a young man would have the energy to carry out many of the tasks that a clan mother needed to do, and at times he would provide the personal physical protection a clan mother might need.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Among the responsibilities of the clan mothers are ensuring that there are people in the family who can deliver all the speeches associated with the wampums and responsibilities that accompany them; ensuring that there are always qualified candidates for leadership positions; ensuring that the people of the family are given an opportunity to express their views at clan meetings; ensuring that the names within the family are properly bestowed and not duplicated; and ensuring the safety of children in the homes and stability of families.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hill 2009.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Removing a clan mother is a process that reflects the one used to remove a chief.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The young man without a title who is the clan mother&#039;s constant helper may also be the person who, after the required number of warnings, announces the removal of a chief. That is, this young man may fulfill the role that is described as The Man Without Pity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is not quite symmetry between the way a chief is removed and the way a clan mother is removed. Once again, the primary mover in this process is her family, not outsiders. If a clan mother is not thinking or acting right, &amp;quot;at that time now the sisters of the mother now one of them will have to speak, she will remind her where her duties are.&amp;quot; If the clan mother does not agree and become remorseful for her actions, it falls to her assistant, the young man without a title, to speak with her and point out the error of her ways. If she does not listen to this, the matter passes to her entire family to discuss. If they decide to remove her, the matter is taken to the chief to be confirmed, and he will deliberate not only on the removal of the errant clan mother but also on the person the family has chosen as her replacement. If the chief agrees, &amp;quot;at that time the young man he will revoke her duties if she disregarded their word, now he will remove her, he will take her authority away at that time, and then he will stand up a new person.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1909, n.p.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The young man is placed in a complicated position: the person who selected him, and with whom he has been working closely, is now facing removal at his hands. The situation must be dire, and he would act not on his own initiative but impelled by the entire family.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Faithkeepers ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Morgan suggests a less structured system of faithkeepers, with some clans appointing them more as a sign of greater devotion, and with an informal division of responsibility between women and men:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They designated the days for holding the festivals, made the necessary arrangements for their celebration, and conducted the ceremonies in conjunction with the sachems and chiefs of the tribe, who were, ex officio, &amp;quot;Keepers of the Faith.&amp;quot; With no official head, and none of the marks of a priesthood, their functions were equal. The female &amp;quot;Keepers of the Faith&amp;quot; were more especially charged with the preparation of the feast, which was provided at all councils at the close of each day for all persons in attendance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Keepers of the Faith&amp;quot; were . . . selected by the wise men and matrons of each gens. After their selection they were raised up by a council of the tribe with ceremonies adapted to the occasion. Their names were taken away and new ones belonging to this class bestowed in their place. . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It was the duty of the individuals selected to accept the office; but after a reasonable service each might relinquish it, which was done by dropping his name as a Keeper of the Faith and resuming his former name.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Morgan (1871) 1997, 82.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today, it is rare that a faithkeeper would drop his or her personal name and assume a faithkeeper name. Rather than raise up faithkeepers &amp;quot;at a council of the tribe,&amp;quot; they are confirmed at the same time as their chief at a Condolence ceremony of the entire Confederacy.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;There is some controversy over whether people cease to be faithkeepers when their chief dies, and need to be reappointed (or even can be reappointed). Generally, as a matter of practice, faithkeepers continue to do their work, and are reaffirmed, so there is no practical issue involved. One indicator of the permanence of the faithkeeper appointment is that faithkeepers are seldom appointed to be chiefs, because they already have a function to fulfill, and you cannot be both a chief and a faithkeeper responsible to the same chief to carry out your duties. At the Condolence, when the chief is stood up and told his duties, his cluster of faithkeepers, clan mother, sub-chief, and runner stand with him: if there are any vacancies, the family uses the opportunity to fill them.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Faithkeepers, working together, have in practice become the managers of most longhouses, bringing together work crews for maintenance, arranging firewood, and keeping food in the cookhouses. In some anthropological works, they are referred to as &amp;quot;deacons,&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Goldenweiser translated yeyakweni:yo (clan mothers) as “deaconesses,” setting the stage for later anthropologists. The name diakonos means master or servant, but by the time of the New Testament it had acquired a religious meaning for Christians. St. Paul wrote Timothy (1 Timothy 3:8–9, 12) that “deacons must be chaste, not double tongued, not given to much wine, not greedy of filthy lucre, holding the mystery of faith in a pure conscience;” and that they should be married, “rule well their children and their own houses,” and not be criminals. In the early Christian church, as in the Longhouse, a deacon or faithkeeper had an administrative as well as a ceremonial function.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; an indication of their civilian but religious roles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the advent of the message of Handsome Lake in the 1790s—as codified in the 1830s at Tonawanda—the faithkeepers were given new additional functions, political ones, and their titles became more permanent. Today, in some communities, faithkeepers are being installed without attachment to a chief&#039;s title, allegedly for life, and in some cases attached to longhouses rather than to the family titles. The Karihwí:iyo, the Code of Handsome Lake, is recited and renewed annually, just as commitment to the law was a periodic matter. The annual autumn recitals of the Code became known as Conventions, and over time they became increasingly political. Seating in Convention is strict, not quite a mirror of Confederacy seating, since the delegations are not quite a reflection of the confederate structure, but instead represent the different longhouses. Today, they are attended by a significant number of the chiefs, though many of those who attend (they are called &amp;quot;delegates&amp;quot;) are not chiefs or faithkeepers. The creation of a process parallel to the Confederacy, one which includes the longhouses of Cattaraugus and Allegheny without their having a &amp;quot;fire,&amp;quot; a traditional government, may serve to undermine the surviving government of the Confederacy. In theory, a discussion in a Convention is then taken to the communities, and then to the Confederacy Council for a decision: in practice, some people consider a decision binding if it was made at Convention.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Criteria for Becoming a Chief ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The principle of choosing a chief is simple enough: they should be the best men, the most thoughtful and compassionate. They should be living examples of the way of life confirmed by the law: &amp;quot;When the Royaneh women, holders of a Lordship title, select one of their sons as a candidate, they shall select one who is trustworthy, of good character, one who manages his own affairs, supports his own family, if any, and who has proved a faithful man to his Nation. . . . Such a candidate shall not be the father of any Confederate Lord.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker 1916, 44. At the Six Nations Grand River Territory, an exception was made in the late 1800s, when Onwanonsyshon George H.M. Johnson was allowed to sit as a Mohawk chief at the same time as his father, Sakayengwaraton John “Smoke” Johnson.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The criteria have accumulated over the years (and people have become more imperfect over time, it seems) so that it is becoming increasingly difficult to find appropriate candidates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Newhouse set out specific criteria that would disqualify a candidate, and would make a sitting chief ineligible to take part in council: &amp;quot;infancy, idiocy, blindness, deafness, dumbness and impotency, in such cases another man shall be appointed to act for him in Council meetings of the Confederacy. The above defects shall not deprive his right to be installed in case of necessity.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;These “defects” did not prevent the installation of the blind John Arthur Gibson as Skaniatariio or blind David Thomas as Thadadaho at the Grand River. History records a number of instances of very young men being installed, but with older men as their guides and spokesmen.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sakokwenionkwas Tom Porter says the right ones have been chosen by the Creator when they are born (a small step away from having their positions preordained before birth). He also says that the man must be married; should have at least three children; must speak his language fluently, or he will not be able to function in council; and must be &amp;quot;clean&amp;quot;: that is, not married to someone of the same clan.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;This last criterion was used to block the Condolence of a Mohawk chief in Akwesasne in 2002. Some assert that the prohibition is not against sharing the same clan, but rather the same ohwátsi’re.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While many Haudenosaunee today believe that choosing a new chief is a matter for the women of the clan to decide, Morgan described a Seneca system in the mid-1800s that involved elections:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Indian system of consanguinity is considered, it will be found that all the male members of a gens were either brothers to each other, own or collateral, uncles or nephews, own or collateral, or collateral grandfathers and grandsons. This will explain the succession of the office of sachem which passed from brother to brother, or from uncle to nephew, and very rarely from grandfather to grandson. The choice, which was by free suffrage of both males and females of adult age, usually fell upon a brother of the deceased sachem, or upon one of the sons of a sister; an own brother, or the son of an own sister being most likely to be preferred. As between several brothers, own and collateral, on the one hand, there was no priority of right, for the reason that all the male members of the gens were equally eligible. To make a choice between them was the function of the elective principle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon the death of a sachem . . . among the Seneca-Iroquois, a council of his gentiles (clan members) was convened to name his successor. Two candidates, according to their usages, must be voted upon, both of them members of the gens. Each person of adult age was called upon to express his or her preference, and the one who received the highest number of affirmative declarations was nominated.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Morgan (1871) 1997, 73. This was several years after the Senecas at Cattaraugus and Allegheny had moved to an elective system of government; Morgan’s description may have been a reflection of the way things were done in some families at Tonawanda.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One thing most Haudenosaunee do agree about: a person who demonstrates overt ambition for office is not likely to be chosen. It is not only that the ambitious one has shown a lack of humility: it is that if he wants a title for himself, he will probably want other things, as well, and will be selfish and prone to corruption.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Raising Up Chiefs ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every ceremony of Condolence to raise up a new chief is itself a re-enactment of the time the Peacemaker condoled Hiawatha. It has been said that when a thing is re-enacted, myth and ritual become the same thing.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Throughout the Christian world, at Easter, there are re-enactments of the crucifixion of Jesus. Nikos Kazantzakis’s &#039;&#039;The Greek Passion&#039;&#039; depicts an extreme example of re-enactment becoming real. Every time the Catholic Mass is celebrated, what is actually taking place is a re-enactment of a sequence of events that lies at the heart of the Church itself.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; So, in every Condolence, all the people, in a way, become the Peacemaker.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since the making of the Confederacy would also be explained, wrote Morgan, &amp;quot;the council to raise up sachems became a teaching council, which maintained in perpetual freshness in the minds of the Iroquois the structure and principles of the Confederacy as well as the history of its formation.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Morgan (1871) 1997, 143.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The coronation of a European monarch is attended by the leadership of the nation, both political and spiritual, and by the heads of other states. It is a public legitimation of both the individual and the continuity of the state. The ceremony of Condolence, for the Haudenosaunee, fulfills some of the same functions: the presence of the leaders and the people confirms the legitimacy of the person who has been raised up. Until he is condoled, he has no security of title—he is called a &amp;quot;benchwarmer&amp;quot;—and does not receive the same respect. A &amp;quot;condoled chief&amp;quot; is a person whose identity and acceptability has been confirmed and is no longer open to question.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Canadian law applies this thinking to the acceptability of Indigenous oral tradition evidence in court; the courts have suggested that the fact that individuals can raise objections at public recital events is considered part of the checks and balances that make formal, regimented oral history reliable. See &#039;&#039;Benoit v. Canada (Minister of National Revenue)&#039;&#039;, (2003) FCA 236 at para. 110, citing &#039;&#039;Delgam’uukw v. Attorney General of British Columbia&#039;&#039;, (1997) 3 SCR 1010.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The fact that he is condoled enables him to conduct himself with the required humility but also the required authority. He has nothing to prove.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Women: Landholders and Clanholders ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The duality and balance between men and women is another theme that runs through the law. While there have been suggestions that the role of women has been downplayed over the years by a Haudenosaunee society that has come under the influence of Western patriarchal values and religions, constitutionally the women&#039;s role remains strong and well defined. Just as individuals are linked to the earth and clay from which they originate, the Creation Story began the connection between women and the earth, and the law continued it. European settlers, in contrast, endowed women with a far smaller bundle of rights. While nobody in Haudenosaunee society had ownership of the land in the way the common law of England had developed feudal fee simple, to the extent that anyone had authority over the land, it was the women. Virtually every version of the law confirms this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Women shall be considered the progenitors of the Nation. They shall own the land and the soil.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Chiefs) 1916, 76.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . . our Mothers the Females . . . shall be the proprietors as well as the soil . . .&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Newhouse and Cusick) 1916, art. 30.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . . and the soil of our land is all of our Mothers the Women of the Five Nations. They shall be the proprietors of the same.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Newhouse 1885, 156.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Mohawks of Canajoharie told Sir William Johnson on March 11, 1763: &amp;quot;Being asked whether the Women were looked upon as having any right in the disposal of the lands, he answered &#039;that they were the properest owners, being the persons who laboured on the lands and therefore were esteemed in that light.&#039;&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;LAC, RG10, vol. 1829, 273.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To suggest, as William Fenton has, that the division of labour and law between men and women in Haudenosaunee society is a reflection of a duality that assigns life to women and death to men is too stark, too harsh. True, the men hunted and fished and made war, and these involve death; while the women gardened and bore children, and these involve life. But the women also gather and harvest living plants; they would join hunting expeditions; they would sometimes encourage warfare. The roles of women and men were, and remain, very different, and there are often good reasons for this, but they cannot always be boiled down to life and death. They are more often explained as reflections of the different gifts of men and women.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Though the women were the landholders, the men were responsible for dealing with other nations. Thus, it might be the men who met with the European representatives about land matters, but decisions concerning the land belonged to the women. On May 15, 1791, women of the Six Nations met with Thomas Procter, a representative of the United States, at Buffalo Creek. They told him: &amp;quot;You ought to hear and listen to what we women shall speak, as well as to the sachems, for we are the owners of this land—and it is ours; for it is we that plant it, for our and their use. Hear us, therefore, for we speak of things that concern us and our children, and you must not think hard of us, while our men shall say more to you; for we have told them.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;American State Papers, Indian Affairs, vol. I, 155.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Seven years later, Thayendenegea Joseph Brant wrote to a British official that it would be legally wrong for the women to participate in a land surrender. But it is not clear from his writing whether he was saying that the women had no authority over the land, or just that the responsibility for such dealings with other peoples fell to the men: &amp;quot;Something further which I think of a very singular nature has been suggested to us by Mr. Stewart respecting a surrender to be made of the Land by our Women. Such a measure was however considered by them and the Chiefs as too singular and foreign from the known Customs of the Five Nations.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Brant to Russell, in Cruikshank and Hunter 1932, 85–90; Brant to Russell, February 19, 1798, cited in Johnston 1964, 101.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Possibly it is because the women have the firmest connection with the clay or soil of a place that they also have authority to choose the male leaders. The life sustainers, the products of the gardens and fields, were raised by women working together, and cooperation between women, in the fields and in the longhouse, remained essential for the unity of the family. Women provided family stability, the memory of its names, and the guidance for its youngest children. To provide balance against an excess of authority being vested in the men, it made sense to have the power of nomination rest with the women: &amp;quot;This is how these matters shall continue on: these are to be the principal ones, the women controlling the title names, because it is by means of all their suffering that people are born here on earth, and it is they who raise them. . . . From now on the women shall confer antlers upon the men. Indeed, the women, our mothers, this is with whom we are co-operating. So that is how it shall be done in our several nations, this kind of matter, among our ongoing families and our grandchildren and those in earth, still unborn.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 419–20.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Having authority without a means of expressing it would be frustrating. While generally the women, like the rest of the family, speak through their chief, there are numerous recorded instances when they made their feelings known collectively and directly. Sagoyewatha (Red Jacket) was a speaker for the women in several of his important speeches. So was Deyagorazera (Thomas King). Thus, the women of the Seneca town of Geneseo spoke through a male speaker when they intervened to reaffirm the legitimacy of the rotiyanershon (probably after the young men had attempted to take power):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I speak now in the name of the Women of our Castle. They sincerely pity your late situation, and as they know their own power and influence, they now plant the Sachims Horns on their heads so they may be as powerful as ever, and be distinguished from all the rest.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Belt to the 5 Nations.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;SWJP 11:323. This may be the “Women’s Nominating Belt” that for many years was held in the Seneca Nation Museum.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Europeans, the rights and influence of the women were surprising but not unnatural: &amp;quot;It is very remarkable that the Women are admitted to the Council fire &amp;amp; have the liberty of speaking, which is sometimes used; when the nature of the Education of this tribe (the Mohawks) is considered, the difference of the instruction of the girls &amp;amp; boys is so small, the sources of knowledge are so inconsiderable that I see no reason why a Woman with strong natural sense should not acquit herself in the Council with general Satisfaction.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;NYSL MSS 13350, cited in Johnston 1964, 29.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the women to have to intervene at all was considered remarkable, for when the women did make their feelings known, the men paid attention: &amp;quot;We flatter ourselves you will look upon this our speech, and take the same notice of it as all our men do, who, when they are addressed by the women, and desired to desist from any rash enterprise, they immediately give way, when, before, every body else tried to dissuade them from it, and could not prevail.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The women of Onondaga speaking to Sir William Johnson, in May 1758. SWJP 13:111–13; 3:707–12.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In some ways, the women stepping into a matter constituted a last step. It was a reminder that the key to bringing Thadadahoh to peace was Tsikonsaseh&#039;s intervention. It was a reminder that the women ultimately carried the authority to remove the chiefs when they failed to heed their duties.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When strangers or visitors came to the village, and waited at the woods&#039; edge, it was the young men who went out to meet them. If necessary, it was the young men who would meet the enemies in combat at the woods&#039; edge. They would bring the guests in after the preliminary greetings, to be properly welcomed in the village itself. The men took the responsibility and risk of meeting with strangers or foreigners. The women did not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Even where a matter was the women&#039;s by right to deal with, like land, and where the decision inside the circle was made by the women, it was the men who carried that decision to outsiders. The women ordinarily did not speak in council with outsiders. However, one should not think that the women&#039;s world was sealed off from contact with foreigners just because their role in government was internal. Haudenosaunee women were not shy. They were protected by the men, but they were not prevented from having contact with outsiders. The first official interpreter for the Haudenosaunee with the Dutch was Hille van Olinde, the daughter of a Mohawk woman and a Dutchman. To the Europeans, there was probably no Haudenosaunee institution more surprising than that of the clan mothers, often mistakenly called a matriarchy. To be sure, the clan mothers had distinct roles, and influence well beyond that of their European contemporaries. The proper way to consider those roles is through the lens of balance, in providing the women&#039;s perspective as a counterpart to that of the men rather than exercising control. Like the chiefs, the clan mothers wear no special marks of office. They hold the wampum strings that indicate their positions (some clan mothers carry these in their purses). Like the chiefs, the clan mothers are mentors to the people.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Just as the chiefs in council were expected to build decisions by discussing the issues in small committees first, and then nation circles, and then discussions of a &amp;quot;side&amp;quot; of the fire, before seeking council unanimity, so the women had their own forms and forums of discussion. For anyone to be a speaker for the women, there would have had to be a decision made by the women. In turn, that would indicate that the women would have met, discussed the issue, and formulated that decision.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Women&#039;s institutions would probably have usually functioned without the men present—to some extent, they still do. Men would not know their structures and functions in detail, and would tend not to explain them to outsiders anyway. The separation between &amp;quot;men&#039;s things&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;women&#039;s business&amp;quot; would mean, among other things, that it could have taken a female anthropologist speaking with a female Haudenosaunee &amp;quot;informant&amp;quot; to gather the descriptions. When Morgan, Hewitt, and Goldenweiser were receiving accounts from the men, they had no female counterparts.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Frederick Waugh, on the other hand, some years later, included female informants.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; While this creates an imbalance of information, leaving a more complete record of the &amp;quot;men&#039;s version&amp;quot; of things, it is not deliberately sexist. The failure to fully gather and recount the women&#039;s side is indeed a failure, but it reflects the male domination of early anthropology, and probably the greater sense of privacy accorded Haudenosaunee women&#039;s work. Historically, it was the men who met and worked with outsiders and developed relationships with them, allowing the outsiders to learn about Haudenosaunee men&#039;s thinking and institutions. Haudenosaunee women had reduced contact with outsiders, and they could and did protect their knowledge and institutions, even from Haudenosaunee men.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lack of documentation by anthropologists and writers has, ironically, had a double effect. On the one hand, it has left women&#039;s business relatively untouched by the opinions and speculation of outsiders. On the other hand, it has permitted the emergence of claims about women&#039;s authority, roles, and institutions that are not supported by established tradition or any historical or written record. The women have no visible equivalent of the Kayanerenkó:wa to document their doings. That protects them from the speculations of strangers while making them vulnerable to internal abuse.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Since the Condolence is a very public ceremony, it leaves little doubt about whether a man is a Confederacy chief. There is little room for someone to claim falsely that he is a royá:ner. In contrast, a clan mother is chosen without an equivalent ceremony (though she is confirmed when she stands up with her chief in his Condolence). This leaves room for multiple claimants to hold the same clan mother position. It is harder to prove that a person is (or is not) a clan mother than it is to prove that a person is a chief.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Circle of Protection of the Law ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The image of the chiefs standing in a circle with their arms joined is simple and striking: what is inside the circle is the people—past, present, and future—and the land. The Great Law and the Great Peace, intertwined and inseparable, are the perimeter of the circle, maintaining it, describing it. Skaniatariio John Gibson stated in 1899: &amp;quot;And quite possibly it will be appropriate to encircle the body of our people (the chiefs are going to join hands and surround the public of the Five Nations), and thus we shall roll up the minds of all our society. So now let us join hands and we the federal chiefs will encircle the crowd of our people.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1899, para. 106.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Encircling the people means protecting them. For the chiefs, as holders of the law, to encircle the people means that the Great Law and the Great Peace have also created that circle of protection. In this circle, there is a deliberate echo of the moment in the making of the law when the chiefs were surrounded by the Seneca warriors and the Peacemaker transformed the warriors from being a threat to the Confederacy and the peace into their protectors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Leaving the Circle ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Just as creating the circle and joining the peace was a matter of a person&#039;s will, so remaining within the circle is a matter of choice. Any person has the right to leave the circle, to live elsewhere, and to live under another system of law. The Great Law of Peace is not coercive. It recognizes that to keep a free person against their will is to invite trouble, to foster hard feelings. Where a person&#039;s mind is not for peace and harmony, it is better for the community that they should be allowed to leave, either for a while or permanently.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the person choosing to leave is a title holder, though, his family cannot be left without representation. His mind is no longer within the circle, so the family becomes free to choose another representative. The family cannot be deprived of a voice in council. The metaphor for this, with respect to a chief, is that the horns of his office will catch on the elbows of his fellow chiefs, who are standing in the circle of the law with their arms joined, as a stag&#039;s antlers catch in the bushes, and the &amp;quot;horns&amp;quot; of his title will thus fall within the circle, to be given by his family to someone else:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If any one go through, his horns would fall off from his head.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Minutes of the Six Nations Council at Cattaraugus, December 1, 1862 (Parker 1916, 145).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . . and if any of the Confederate Lords will go outside of the confederation, his crown of the deer&#039;s horns the emblem of his Lordship, together with his birthright, will lodge on the arms of the Confederate Lords, whose hands are joined. So that his crown of deer&#039;s horns falls off from his head, and forfeits his lordship title, together with his birthright, and they will remain inside of the confederation.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Newhouse 1885, 151. John Buck, in Hewitt 1892b, 145, says that leaving the circle is a permanent move: “Naked-bodied shall he go out; never will it do to permit him to come back; his course shall not be changed.” At the 2013 recital of the law, it was said that a chief who left the circle had his legs dangling over the edge of the earth.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And so it shall surely happen in the days to come that some one person might escape beneath the circle of you chiefs around the crowd of our people. And his chiefly title shall catch its antlers there (on the arms of the chiefs) and his horns will lie there inside the circle that they surround (embrace); and so he will be stripped (&#039;&#039;hoyaɂdo’goɂ&#039;&#039;) when he passes the circle and goes out free; and there his status (&#039;&#039;hoiwaɂge&#039;&#039;) will be reduced and becomes equal to that of the warriors, and he may never again hold any office.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1899, para. 309; see also Gibson 1912, 462.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an individual desires to leave, even a chief, he is free to do so. In other words, he leaves as an individual, so that the title can be picked up by his family and given to another individual to carry: &amp;quot;Thereupon the deaconess of the title, now she will take back the antlers. Thereupon she will choose a replacement, and this is the one on whom she will bestow the antlers, seating him instead on the former seat of the chief he is replacing.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 463.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a tradition that a chief who chooses to go to war can &amp;quot;hang up his horns,&amp;quot; or have his clan mother &amp;quot;lift his horns&amp;quot; while he is engaged in military activities. Newhouse confirms this: &amp;quot;If the Five Confederate Nations declare war and if any of the lords are desirous to take part in the war, he can do so by giving up the emblem of his Lordship Title which he has received from his women relatives, to whom the title reverts in such a case, for they are the proprietors of the Lordship title, until the war is over, when he may resume his title and seat in the Council.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Newhouse 1885, 32. The “emblem” would be the short string of white beads, his “horns.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a logic to this: in times of war, the council often hands over its authority to the war chiefs, who are more able to move swiftly to protect the people.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;A clear example of how the conduct of war was handed over to the peace chiefs, and how control was handed back at war’s end, is in the transcript of the April 24, 1815, council at Burlington Bay at the end of the War of 1812 (LAC, RG8, vol. 258(1), 204–8).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; With the council not sitting, the chief would have few duties, and his presence would not be missed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The two last Seneca chiefs to come into the peace, Kanuhkitawi and Donehogowa, were to be both war chiefs and peace chiefs. In Dayodekane&#039;s version, the Onondaga chief Skanawati is also told that half of his body will be Lord and half will be war chief.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Fenton 1949, 149.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What happens, though, when he engages in a war as part of someone else&#039;s army? Often, the Haudenosaunee will explain that they do so as allies, not as citizens or subjects. In the case of Donehogowa Ely Parker, according to Gawasowane Arthur Parker, there was celebration when he was granted an officer&#039;s commission in the American Civil War: &amp;quot;It was then that the Indians held a great council and asked their chief to remain to guide and protect them. A great feast was made in his honor and Do-ne-ho-ga-wa was commended to the care of the Great Spirit. A public thanksgiving was offered, thanking the Ruler of the Great-World-Above that the Keeper of the Western Door had indeed guarded it well. The &#039;Proclaimers of the Law&#039; chanted the &#039;&#039;Adoweh&#039;&#039; ritual and the Keepers of the Faith invoked the spirits to guard the sachem who was to go to battle.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker 1919, 106. Donehogowa Ely Parker’s title, as doorkeeper, in some versions, is that of both a peace and a war chief, so it would not be required to “lift” his horns for him to go to war. However, once he left, first for the war and then to a career in the United States civil service, it does not seem he ever resumed his duties as a Confederacy chief. There has been little discussion of whether his taking a position in the United States government constituted stepping outside the circle of the law.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Does a person so seated to replace a chief who has left the circle or been de-horned need to go through the ceremony of Condolence before he is recognized? There are two schools of thought: the first is that the Condolence is used only when someone has died and his family needs to be consoled, and a chief who has left the circle has not died. It would follow that even though the individual is no longer the holder of the title, his replacement would not be condoled, but would be acknowledged as sitting in that seat during the lifetime of the previous title holder. The second is that the Condolence is also necessary because it provides the necessary recognition and protection coming from the other nations of the Confederacy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Individuals are always free to return.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The oral tradition is that such a returned person shall not be eligible for any special duties within the Confederacy but shall sit quietly on the back benches of the longhouse, against the wall of the building.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It appears that the same principle applies to holders of other offices: &amp;quot;A Canienga matron, becoming a Christian, left her country, with two of her children, to enjoy greater freedom in her devotions among the French. The act, writes the missionary, so offended her family that, in a public meeting of the town, &#039;they degraded her from the rank of the nobility, and took from her the title of Oyander, that is, honorable, (&#039;&#039;considérable&#039;&#039;)—a title which they esteem highly, and which she had inherited from her ancestors, and deserved by her good judgment, her prudence, and her excellent conduct and at the same time they installed another in her place.&#039;&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hale (1883) 1989, 65; Thwaites 1901, 1671: 6.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In its simplest form, the law states that a citizen who takes up citizenship in another nation, or who submits to its laws and acknowledges allegiance to that nation and those laws, ceases to be a citizen of the Haudenosaunee, and is no longer considered to be &amp;quot;within the circle&amp;quot; of the law&#039;s protection. &amp;quot;And if at any time any of the Confederate Lords will submit to laws and regulations made by other people he or they are no longer in, but outside of the confederation, and shall be called &#039;Gone Through.&#039; And likewise if any of your people submit to the laws and regulations made by other people he or they shall forfeit his or their birthright, thereafter he or they shall have no interest or claim inside the Confederation.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Newhouse 1885, 151.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; An extreme interpretation of this would be that &#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039; obedience to other laws is an automatic loss of citizenship.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;This “thinking,” no doubt, is what impelled Stewart Myiow of Kahnawake to refuse to stop for the flashing red lights of a Mohawk school bus, since the laws requiring him to stop were made by a government other than the Haudenosaunee.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In colonial times, European powers competed for sovereignty over North America, with France and Britain claiming both ownership of territory and overlordship over its peoples. The Europeans avoided explaining their ideas of empire to their allies, and this led to a strange dichotomy. Generally, the same British and French governors who treated Indigenous peoples as allies on the ground would report to their superiors across the Atlantic that they had secured obedient subjects. There were exceptions, though. Warraghiyageh Sir William Johnson wrote bluntly, after General Braddock had taken a &amp;quot;surrender&amp;quot; from several Indigenous nations:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altho&#039; the words of the late Treaty (at Detroit, September 7–10, 1764) may at first appear extraordinary, yet, I am not at a loss to account for them, as I know it has been verry customary for many People to insinuate that the Indians call themselves Subjects, altho&#039; I am thoroughly convinced they were never so called, nor would they approve of it. Tis true when a Nation find themselves pushed, their Alliances broken, and themselves tired of a War, they are verry apt to say many civil things, and make any Submissions which are not agreeable to their Intentions, but are said merely to please those with whom they transact Affairs as they know we cannot enforce the observance of them. But you may be assured that none of the Six Nations, Western Nations &amp;amp;ca. Ever declared themselves to be Subjects, or will ever consider themselves in that light whilst they have any Men, or Open Country to retire to, the very Idea of subjection would fill them with horror.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indeed I have been just looking into the Indian records, where I find in the Minutes of 1751 that those who made ye Entry say, that Nine different Nations acknowledged themselves to be His Majestys Subjects, altho&#039; I sat at that Conference, made Entrys of all the Transactions, in which there was not a Word mentioned, which could imply a Subjection, however these Matters (notwithstanding all I have from time to time said on that subject) seem not to be well known at home, and therefore, it may prove of dangerous consequence to persuade them that the Indians have agreed to things which (had they even assented to) is so repugnant to their Principles that the attempting to enforce it, must lay the foundation of greater Calamities than ha(ve) yet been experienced in this Country.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is necessary to observe that no Nation of Indians have any word which can express, or convey the Idea of Subjection, they often say, &amp;quot;We acknowledge the Great King to be our Father, we hold him fast by the hand, and we shall do what he desires&amp;quot;; many such like words of course, for which our people too readily adopt &amp;amp; insert a Word verry different in signification, and never intended by the Indians without explaining to them what is meant by a Subjection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Imagine to yourself, Sir, how impossible it is to reduce a People to Subjection, who consider themselves Independent thereof by both Nature &amp;amp; Scituation.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;SWJP 11:395–96.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the case of the Haudenosaunee, independent-minded nations reflect their independent-minded citizens. Loyalty to the law leads naturally to a refusal to submit to other laws and other sovereigns. At the Six Nations Grand River Territory, in the 1950s, Haudenosaunee teachers who refused to swear the oath of allegiance required of Canadian civil servants lost their jobs. Meanwhile, as if to accentuate the difference in allegiances between the elected and traditional councils there, a person taking office in the elected band council would swear an oath not only to perform his or her duties properly but also of allegiance to Canada—an oath not sworn in other places by elected councillors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Calling People Home ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the people moved from their hunter-gatherer existence towards horticulture, they began to live in larger villages. A little more than 1,000 years ago, squash came first; then beans, corn, and sunflowers. It became possible to have towns of over 1,000 people. Archaeologists have concluded that the large towns had smaller satellite villages and hamlets, whose people would seek refuge behind the palisaded hubs in times of war and danger. At the same time, the people would often range farther from the towns in hunting season, for trapping, trading, or raiding, setting up temporary camps as they moved farther away from home.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With relatively small populations and vast territories, the people could spread out. As they became more distant from one another, communication between the groups became more difficult, and the risk of division and estrangement increased. When that distance became a problem, it would be time to call the people home. This cycle of expansion and contraction—a cycle which might take generations—reflected the cyclical nature of other aspects of Haudenosaunee life.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Calling people home&amp;quot; became an element of the law. As it was foreseen that the web of the League would be weakened as it was stretched, so the law provided a means of renewal and consolidation. Like other elements of the law, it is a way of healing things that have become injured or broken: &amp;quot;When any person or any of the people of the Five Nations emigrate and reside in a region distant from the territory of the Five Nations Confederacy, the Lords of the Five Nations at will may send a messenger carrying a broad belt of black shells and when the messenger arrives he shall call the people together or address them personally displaying the belt of shells and they shall know that this is an order for them to return to their original homes and to their council fires.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Newhouse and Cusick) 1916, 50. Newhouse 1885: “and when they understand the contents of the wampum belts, they then shall re-emigrate home with them again.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Individuals left. Families left.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;When there was conflict within a community that could not be resolved internally, one solution seems to have been the creation of a separate community by a group of families.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Entire clans and villages would move.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The earliest recorded European contact with Iroquoian people was with the “St. Lawrence Iroquians,” the people of Stadacona and Hochelaga, in 1534–35. By the time the French returned, two generations later, these people had disappeared. European diseases no doubt affected them (a fifth of the people of Stadacona died the winter Cartier spent among them, of diseases for which they had no cure). War with their Algonkian neighbours diminished them. The archeological record provides evidence that some joined the Wendat and Onondaga. Mohawk tradition, recorded in the 1600s, asserts that some of the ancestors of the Mohawk Valley people came from the St. Lawrence and met the French there.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The arrival of European settlers and missionaries brought more disruptions and attractions. In historic times, in the east, at least half the Mohawks moved to the St. Lawrence, to the settlements of Kahnawake,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Kahnawake was established as a “reserve,” an Indigenous community under the protection and supervision of the Jesuit Order, in 1640. A significant influx of Mohawk Valley people, including Tokwirowi, arrived in 1680. While the language and culture of the community was consistently Mohawk, it was in fact a composite community, incorporating people from all five Haudenosaunee nations as well as Ottawas, Algonquins, Nipissings, and others.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Kanehsatake,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Where Kahnawake was under Jesuit influence, Kanehsatake, eventually settled on the shores of the Lake of Two Mountains, was influenced by the Sulpician Order. In 1791, there was a detailed description of its creation in 1727, including an explanation that, when the town was created, the Mohawks made a wampum belt with a dog at each end, to indicate that their territory would be protected.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and Akwesasne.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Akwesasne itself was formed as a permanent community when, in 1750, fifty families from Kahnawake moved upstream to a place where they could be protected from the influences of the local French people and their liquor.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In the latter half of the seventeenth century, the north shore of Lake Ontario was home to numerous Seneca and Cayuga villages at its west end and Onondaga settlements at its east and. Many Onondagas, in the mid-eighteenth century, had moved to Oswegatchie on the St. Lawrence,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In the 1790s, after the site of Oswegatchie was taken up by American settlers and renamed Ogdensburg, the Onondagas moved up the Black River to the vicinity of Lisbon, New York, and by 1800 had moved across the St. Lawrence to the present Johnstown, Ontario, and in 1807 most (but probably not all) the people moved to Akwesasne, settling in the District of Chenail or Snye. Akwesasne’s present large Snipe and Deer clan population mainly owes its origin to the Onondaga people of Oswegatchie.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and fifty years later were in Akwesasne.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Calling people home&amp;quot; was a matter of law, but it was also pragmatic. There would be no point in calling people who would not come—or if there were no good reason to call them home. In the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries, the British would often state their desire for the Haudenosaunee—and especially the Mohawks—to call home their people on the St. Lawrence. While the British would give their reasons as wishing the Confederacy to remain strong, it was obviously in their interest to weaken the French alliance and to increase the numbers of British allies. The Haudenosaunee strategy, while unevenly implemented, remained one of either seeking balance between competing European interests or seeking to maintain an alliance with the winners. To British requests to call people home, the answers were sometimes blunt (&amp;quot;we can&#039;t persuade them&amp;quot;), sometimes ironic (&amp;quot;if you have the influence you say you have, why don&#039;t you call them home?&amp;quot;), sometimes suggestive that it was Haudenosaunee policy to have the people on both sides of the divide. &amp;quot;As to drawing home their Indians from Canada as they were Exhorted to do by the Gov&#039;r yesterday they say, that as the Gov&#039;r has a correspondence with those of Canada he can prevail more with them then they can do &amp;amp; desire he would do his Endeavour with those of Canada to draw their Indians home to their own Country.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Richter 1982, 64.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Consolidation was a natural reaction to attack: the Buffalo Creek reservation was such a refuge at the end of the American Revolutionary War; so was the Grand River Territory. There was strength not only in unity but in concentrated numbers. The nineteenth century was a turbulent time, with people moving under pressure from settler governments. By the 1830s, the United States had adopted an Indian Removal Policy, having concluded that moving Indian nations west of the Mississippi would provide both peace for the United States and land for the settlers. Following a series of disastrous land transactions, the Oneidas in New York bought land in Kansas but moved instead to Wisconsin. Internal differences led to a large group moving from Wisconsin to Ontario. Some Cayugas in New York had moved to Buffalo Creek. Another series of dubious land transactions left them landless, and many moved to the Grand River Territory in 1840.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;At the same time as the United States was implementing its removal policies, the British were making adjustments in their approach to dealing with Indian affairs. The single greatest expense of the British Indian Department was the annual presents, promised at the 1764 Niagara Congress and delivered faithfully since then, though at a reduced rate after the War of 1812. The British wanted to devolve the Indian Department to the provinces, which were eager to take on the patronage and the possibility of gaining access to Indian lands but reluctant to take on the expense of the presents. This was partly resolved by announcing that Indians from the United States would cease to receive presents as of 1840, while those who moved to British soil would continue to receive them forever. Among the Haudenosaunee, the Cayugas and Oneidas came to Canada with promises that the presents would be continued to them. About two-thirds of the Potowatomis from Michigan and Wisconsin came to Canada, settling around Lake Huron, though the United States’ attempt to place their people in malarial swamps in Iowa was also a strong reason for the removal to Canada. Ottawa, Ojibwa, and other communities also moved to Canada during the late 1830s.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Others settled among the Senecas at Cattaraugus. Senecas from the Ohio country&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The westernmost Seneca communities included many descendants of Huron, Tiionontate (Petun), Attiwandaron (Neutral), and Erie families. They had no great love for the British (as their destruction of the British forts south of Lake Erie demonstrated in 1763), and their ties with the other nations of the Haudenosaunee may have been looser than those of the core Seneca towns to the east.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; moved to Oklahoma. In the early 1800s, Mohawks from Kahnawake who had sided with the United States in the Revolutionary War moved to the &amp;quot;American side&amp;quot; of Akwesasne. Mohawk families from Kanehsatake later moved to Wahta, on southern Georgian Bay.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These large-scale movements of families and communities were the result of outside pressures: wars, government policies, economic opportunities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These movements on a larger scale were taking place while intermarriage and moving on a smaller scale continued as it always had. Intermarriage between communities was an important means of binding families and nations together, and remains so today. There are few people in any Haudenosaunee community who cannot point to ancestors from other communities. Individuals moved away, as emigration often matched immigration. The fur trade saw many men settle in trading locations—Mohawk communities in the Peace River country of northern Alberta; Michel Karihiio&#039;s community outside present-day Edmonton became &amp;quot;Michel&#039;s Band,&amp;quot; recognized under the Indian Act of Canada and enfranchised in 1954.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Frisch 1978, 544.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1954, Frank Thomas (&amp;quot;Standing Arrow&amp;quot;), moved &amp;quot;home&amp;quot; to the Mohawk Valley, partly in protest against the taking of Akwesasne land by the St. Lawrence Seaway. In 1974, after confrontations with the Quebec Provincial Police, some Mohawks in Kahnawake decided it was time for their people to return home. They circulated a broad belt of dark wampum to all Mohawk communities to announce their intention and invite the people to reassemble in traditional Mohawk territory. They had selected a former girls&#039; camp at Moss Lake in the Adirondacks and renamed the place Kanienekeh. While the Grand Council recognized the community—and it moved to a new site a few years later—the Mohawk council fire remained at Akwesasne. In 1980, Sakokwenionkwas Tom Porter announced his intention to return to the Mohawk Valley, to create a place of peace where Mohawk language and tradition would be maintained. This new community, Kanatsiohareke, has also been recognized as a Mohawk community by the Haudenosaunee.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Establishing new communities, then, does not seem remarkable to modern Haudenosaunee. It is something that has been done for centuries. It is provided for in the law—not so much in the creation of the new towns, which may have been taken for granted, as in provision for &amp;quot;calling people home&amp;quot; when those new towns become scattered too far afield, weakening communication and therefore weakening the Confederacy itself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Returning ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No matter how far away the people moved, physically or politically, they still remained, in the eyes of the Haudenosaunee, &amp;quot;our people.&amp;quot; When, during the latter half of the seventeentth century, perhaps half the Mohawks moved to the St. Lawrence, and became linked to the French, it was still common for visitors from the Mohawk Valley to come and spend weeks with them (to the frustration of the French), or for people from Kahnawake or Kanehsatake to head south to visit their relatives. The trade between Montreal and Albany used Mohawk middlemen (one judge called them &amp;quot;traders rather than merchants&amp;quot;). Both the French and the British despaired of getting Haudenosaunee to fight one another: they would instead provide intelligence about British or French intentions and strategies, and would warn one another of impending attacks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During the first half of the seventeenth century, the Haudenosaunee experienced a period of expansion. They took in nations from the east who were reeling from attacks by the colonists. They conquered and absorbed enemies, including the Andaste (Susquehannock) and Erie. They absorbed neighbours like the Wenro and Attiwandaronon. They absorbed many of the Hurons, decimated by war and disease. The north shore of Lake Ontario, from Niagara to the St. Lawrence, became settled with Haudenosaunee communities. By the early 1700s, though, there had come a sense that the Confederacy was stretched too thin. War with the Mississaugas, attacks from the French in the east, other pressure in the west, led to a decision to bring the people home, and by the 1720s there had been a consolidation back to the homelands. During the same period, there had been unsuccessful British pressure to bring home the people on the St. Lawrence, from the settlements of Kahnawake, Kanesatahke, Akwesasne, and Oswegatchie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Perhaps it is fair to consider the retention of links between apparently estranged communities as something like chewing gum or mozzarella cheese: the strands that make people family seem to be able to stretch indefinitely without breaking. The law contemplates this, and indeed it provides the mechanisms for eventual reconciliation. The first of these mechanisms is the perception that it is always possible to become one people again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Indians who live at Canada at least those of Cachnawage are part of the Five Nations and what ever Rough Treatment they receive will be resented by the Five Nations.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Original Indian Records ii&#039;&#039;, cited in Wraxall (1754) 1915, lii.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . . the Six Nation Deputies &amp;amp; Cagnawagas spoke very smartly to the French Governor &amp;amp; told him it appeared to them that he wanted nothing more than to set them who were Friends &amp;amp; Relatives by the Ears &amp;amp; have them destroyed.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;SWJP 9:606.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(In January, 1710) a Deputation from the 5 Nations to the Commissioners at Albany that they had sent some chosen Men to the Cagnawagas at Canada to endeavor to prevail upon those Indians to return to their Native Country to live.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Wraxall (1754) 1915, 80.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The most important procedural mechanism for reconciliation remains the Condolence. It is the way home: it reconciles after wars or separation, enabling people to forgive the most grievous offences. Historically, the Haudenosaunee had been split by several wars: the Seven Years&#039; War; the American Revolutionary War; the War of 1812, had each seen Haudenosaunee fighting one another. In each case, the reunification of the Confederacy was accompanied by a Condolence that would put away the bones, cover the graves, prevent the blood of the dead from calling out for revenge, and remind everyone of the great dream of peace that they shared. No matter how estranged communities and individuals might be, the Great Law provided a hope that they could reunite, become one people again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In September 1760, the British Army had taken Montreal. The Seven Nations of Canada had made a quiet arrangement with the Imperial Indian Department as early as 1757 that when the British attack came, they would remain neutral. Now, at a council in Kahnawake, the Haudenosaunee among the British forces met with the Seven Nations chiefs. Sir William Johnson confirmed earlier promises about land and peace. The Haudenosaunee proposed the reunification of the Confederacy. The Speaker for the Eight Nations&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;By this time the Seven Nations had become eight, with the addition either of Akwesasne (now distinct from Kahnawake) or Oswegatchie.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; replied:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brethren of the 5 Nat&#039;s.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(You) In return to your Belt of Yesterday Whereby you told us that as your Br. W&#039;y. (Sir William Johnson) had finished every thing with us, you on your part had something to say which was that as there had been during this war a division and disunion between us; and (thereby) desired us to reunite and be firm friends as heretofore, We hereby assure all present that we with pleasure agree to your friendly proposal and reunite as formerly.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;SWJP 13:162–64.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The reunification of the Confederacy at the end of August 1815 provides another example of reconciliation processes. The council was convened at the request of Deputy Superintendent General of Indian Affairs William Claus.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;At the council at Burlington Bay in April 1815, the chiefs had asked Claus to assist them in convening a council with the nations on the American side of the Niagara River, since hard feelings had made it difficult for them to bring the council together themselves. Claus acted as intermediary.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; On one side were the representatives from the Grand River Territory, in Canada. On the other were representatives of the Senecas, Onondagas, and Cayugas from Buffalo Creek, Tonawanda, and Allegheny. Claus opened the council with a Condolence&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Reference in the record to the “usual ceremony of condolence” indicates both that the recorder recognized the ceremony was a repetition of dozens of identical processes and that this recorder would tend to omit some details in the council.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and uncovered the fire by presenting a peace belt of white wampum. As in a normal Confederacy Council, the Mohawks put forward the matter for consideration. Significantly, the speaker was Tekarihoken: the matter was of great import. He said:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brothers and relations,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We the several Nations residing at the Grand River salute you from the other side we are the same people with you, we are relations of the same colour, notwithstanding having been opposed to each other in the Field during the late Contest between our Father the King of England and the Americans. Our friend who has just uncovered the Council Fire has removed all obstructions, our minds are set at ease. The River which separates us is opened that we may have a free passage at all times.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;At the April council at Burlington Bay, Claus had read Article III of the Treaty of Ghent, which restored the free border crossing rights provided for in the 1795 Jay Treaty.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The roads are cleared of all briars and rubbish, that we may again renew that friendly intercourse which formerly existed between us. I now speak to you in behalf of the Indians residing on the Grand River, and I am desired to assure you that all ill will is removed from their Hearts towards you from the ( ) American land.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Delivered a bunch of Strings of Wampum&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tekarihoken&#039;s words were followed by a speech by Echo, an Onondaga Chief:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brothers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I salute you in the name of the Hurons, Shawnees and Six Nations at the King&#039;s Council Fire which has just been uncovered. I speak to the Senecas, Cayugas and Onondagas from Buffalo Creek, Tehaniwandi and Allegany who are now present at our Father&#039;s Council Fire. I also address those who are at their homes, before our Father the Deputy Supt. General, the King&#039;s Officers who are now present, and tell you that all ill blood has been removed from our hearts. What has been done, is now forgotten. We are all of the same colour and ought to be friendly towards each other.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To make our Friendship lasting, we put the Tomahawk the depth of a Pine Tree under ground; and that it may not be removed we place over it a Tree that the roots may so cover it that it cannot be found again. . . . We condole with you from the bottom of our hearts for the loss of your friends, and wipe the tears from your eyes, we open your throats so no obstruction shall remain, that you may speak your mind freely and with the same friendship which formerly existed between us, as we now in the name of the Nations already mentioned address you as friends. If you will stand up we will take you by the hands. Should an idle young Man make use of any improper Language we request that you will not take any notice of it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Large bunch of Strings of black and white wampum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The American Indians stood up and the others took them by the hand repeating the assurances of friendship, after which the Old Eel, an Onondaga Chief spoke to the Deputy Supt. Genl. as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brothers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You have this day uncovered the King&#039;s Council Fire at this place where our forefathers were accustomed to assemble. I speak in behalf of the Indians who are now come here to meet our brethren from the Grand River. We salute you and wish you well. We have heard all that you have said now and last Spring, and are much pleased with it. We rejoice that the Great Spirit has brought us together to unite and be friends. Many have been the meetings at this place between the King and our Ancestors. I am an old man and have been present at many of these meetings when your Grand Father spoke to us.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;William Claus’s grandfather was Warraghyihagey Sir William Johnson, the first Imperial Superintendent General of Indian Affairs, appointed in 1755.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; We will always remember his words they are buried deep in our hearts. We look to you to be a friend to the Indians as he was. It is now late in the day, and as we are to answer you we will cover the fire and meet again tomorrow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A few Strings wampum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
September 1st&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tekarihoga&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brothers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We thank the Great Spirit for giving us a new day, and permitting us to meet again. We wait to hear what you may have to say.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red Jacket, Principal Seneca Speaker&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brothers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the name of the Indians from the other side of the River. I now address myself to the King, the Commanding Officers, and Colonel Claus our head, and to the Six Nations, Wyandots and Shawanese.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Strings wampum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brothers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I am happy now to meet you in the usual friendly manner, and you may be assured that what has happened was not from any animosity towards our ancient Father and friends. We are a poor people. We cannot do as we would. We are as Prisoners. But the fetters are now off and we are at liberty to communicate freely with our friends. We are not of the same Nations only, but of the same Families also. We therefore ought to be united and become one Body.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Strings of Wampum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . . The Road being now open, we will be glad to have a visit from you at Buffalo Creek. Eating and drinking together may be omitted at present, our time being so short, rising and shaking hands will do as well.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Eating and drinking together cements the relationship, as the Peacemaker’s feasts with the Cannibal, Tsikonsaseh, and Hiawatha recalled. Shaking hands is an act not only of peace (in many cultures, it is said that the handshake requires a warrior to drop his weapon) but of recognition. For example, it has been proposed that the way to recognize Tuscarora Chiefs would be for everyone to shake hands with them at a Condolence of Chiefs of another nation.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Strings of wampum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They then mixed with each other and spoke to the Deputy Supt. General as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tekarihoga, Speaker&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brothers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You have witnessed our proceedings which it has pleased the Ruler of the World to assist us in. It has finished as we could wish, and we desire that you will immediately acquaint our Western Brethren of the work we have been doing; and that we shall soon proceed to the west to meet them and perform the same ceremony there as was agreed upon last spring in Council. We now speak to you in One Body, and we hope that we shall be allowed to travel along the road peaceably and without being insulted by the inhabitants, and that you will give us provisions to enable us to travel homewards.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;LAC, RG8, vol. 258, pt. 1, 204–8.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee had again become &amp;quot;one body,&amp;quot; in a council facilitated by the British. They had shaken hands and then literally &amp;quot;mixed together,&amp;quot; becoming, in effect, one side of the council fire, with the British on the other side. Tekarihoken, by council&#039;s end, was speaking for the reunited Confederacy—and as speaker for the Mohawks, was once again properly addressing the British, who had originally arrived at the Eastern Door.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Kayanerenkó:wa provides explicitly for the reunification of the Confederacy after a disruption. Estranged relatives are, after all, still family. A polity that is brought together by the yearning for peace in people&#039;s minds, and kept together by will rather than coercion, will tend to permit people to leave and to return. In anticipating this in the constitution itself, Haudenosaunee law differs deeply from that of its neighbours. Canada, threatened by Québec secession, has barely managed (through litigation) to set rules for the dismantling of the nation, and has no law concerning its reconciliation. The Civil War in the United States carved deep rifts, &amp;quot;testing whether that nation or any nation so conceived and so dedicated can long endure,&amp;quot; in the words of Abraham Lincoln&#039;s Gettysburg Address. Historians have paid little attention to the way the Haudenosaunee heal their divisions: William Fenton ignored the reunification and declared the Confederacy finished after the American Revolution. Is the weakness of the law in its inability to hold the structure together the most important feature, or is the flexibility of the law, in providing a path for reconciliation, more remarkable and more noteworthy? In truth, they are another example of the system of balances contained within the entire legal system: the inability of the law to prevent people from leaving is balanced by the explicit ways within the law itself to bring them home.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Symbols of the Law ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Kayanerenkó:wa and the speeches and councils that accompany it are full of symbols and metaphors. The metaphors both explain and remind the people of the principles of the law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While the metaphors are mostly visual, Haudenosaunee law uses several senses to convey meaning. Visual symbols include the longhouse and its extendable framework; the Tree of Peace, the eagle atop it and the Great White Roots spreading under it; and all the minor elements that assist with council.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some symbols go underground. The weapons of war are buried deep underground, in the pit created by the uprooting of the great pine tree.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Of all the symbols of the Haudenosaunee, “burying the hatchet” seem to be the most acknowledged in modern North America, though the richness of the metaphor has been stripped away.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The blood and bones of the deceased are put away underground so that they, too, can never be seen again. In the Creation story, the terrible animals of an earlier age are also put underground, and kept there. Serpents, the companions of Thadadaho&#039;s bad-mindedness, venomous messengers, live underground. Underground means out of mind, the home of the negative.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other symbols are kept above ground, and even aloft, to be kept firmly in mind. The eagle perches atop the white pine tree. The pine itself soars above all the other trees. When wampum belts are read, they are held up. The things the people need to remember are constantly before their eyes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee use their other senses in the world that includes both law and ceremony. It is not only the smoke but the smell of tobacco that attracts the attention of the spirit world and the Creator. It is the sound of the songs in the ceremonies—ceremonies of thanksgiving, the soothing sounds of the Condolence, the powerful sound of the Great Feather Dance—that carry the power to heal, to persuade, to express gratitude. Thadadaho is rubbed down as part of the effort to restore his good mind, as the legs of visitors are symbolically rubbed to remove the thorns and burrs of the road.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yet, as with most legal systems, the symbolism is primarily visual, and the symbols themselves are things rather than concepts. Wisely, the Peacemaker chose things that the people would see often, so that in their daily lives they would be reminded of the law. What are modern Euro-American equivalents? Things that carry little practical meaning for the people themselves: eagles and crowns, coats of arms and flags. Their symbols are much more . . . well. . . symbolic. They are not part of the everyday lives of the people whose laws they represent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Tree of Peace ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Peacemaker chose the great white pine as the symbol of the peace, he did so deliberately, for reasons that would have been obvious to the people of his time. The pine is the tallest tree of the forest, superdominant, towering over the surrounding mixed hardwoods, projecting upward past the oak canopy. It can be ancient, living four centuries. It is used as medicine, restoring health, its purifying smoke clearing the senses. The miracle of its growth from a tiny seed mirrors the birth of the Great Peace from the dream of a single man.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker 1912.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the Peace and the Law were in place, the Peacemaker declared that the weapons of war should no longer be seen:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The war clubs, the killers of humans, and the tomahawks and other weapons,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The weapons of war were made from other trees: maple for war clubs; hickory and ash for bows; cedar for arrows. The pine, with its soft wood, was never used as raw material for weapons, and was indeed a Tree of Peace. And unlike those of many other conifers, the cones of the white pine are thornless, and the needles are soft rather than stiff and sharp.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; as to these, it will be better for us to hide them from them, so that they cannot see them again, our grandchildren.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereupon Tekanawita said: There is only one way for it to get done, for us to be able to hide the weapons from them: we will pull up our great tree, Great Tall Tree, Great Long Leaf, and it will pass right through, making a hole through the earth. Thereupon we will pick everything up and throw it down where the earth is opened up, all of the war clubs, and the strong current in the earth will carry these away. Thereupon we will replant the tree, and they will never see the war clubs again, our grandchildren. Thereupon we all will continue to think peacefully by day and by night as the families continue on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereupon the chiefs, all of them, supported the matter unanimously, the several nations saying: We will bury them, the war clubs, and then we will never again see the people shedding each other&#039;s blood.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 446–49. In Gibson 1899, para. 111, the weapons are tied in a bundle and wrapped in Thadadaho’s shirt before being “cast into where the earth is upheaved . . . so the running waters shall carry these down under the earth.” Water not only carries: it cleanses.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the tallest tree, the white pine also has strong roots, deep and widespread, rather than a single taproot. The deep, wide roots indicate stability, but they also become the carriers of the metaphor for the spreading of the peace. White pines are also relatively fire-resistant: they survive most surface fires due to their thick bark, branch-free trunks, and moderately deep roots. Metaphorically, they survive the fires of war.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Europeans had their metaphorical equivalent of the Haudenosaunee white pine: the May-Tree, around which the people of the villages of western Europe would gather in a spirit of reconciliation every spring. In February 1654, a Haudenosaunee delegation met with the Governor of New France. The third wampum they delivered, explained the speaker, &amp;quot;was a May-tree,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The pre-Christian European calendar had two days of reconciliation—May 1 and November 1 (and two days in which evil spirits were released—April 30 and October 31). May Day and Halloween are remnants of days that had legal significance, since grievances had to be resolved or abandoned by those dates. The “May Pole” that people dance around, with their hands joined in harmony, is the modern descendant of the “May-tree”—a happy convergence of French and Haudenosaunee symbolism. Replacing the May-tree with the May-pole is a retreat from an intimacy with nature that is paralleled in Greek temples, where the natural trees that were the first columns were replaced with Corinthian columns that retained the leaves at their tops, and then by Doric columns that allowed the symbols of the forest to fade into the past (Schama 1995).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; which he planted, he said, in the middle of the Great River St. Lawrence, opposite the fort of Quebec, the house of Onontio, the great Captain of the French . . . a May-tree which should rear its summit above the clouds, in order that all the Nations of the earth might be able to see it, and that it might be a rendez-vous where all the world could rest in peace under the shade of its leaves.&amp;quot; The governor said that he accepted the proposal, but that he would &amp;quot;transplant the May-tree to Montreal, in order that access to it might be easier, the latter place being on the frontier.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Thwaites 1901, 1653–54: chap 2, 51–63. Here, the French were mixing the symbolism of two trees. The Tree of Peace, the pine tree, indicates that peace exists in that place. The tree of council, the oak, with its sheltering canopy, indicates that nations will come together in that place to bring their minds together to maintain and continue peace. The French were proposing to hold councils in Montreal. There was no need to move the Tree of Peace. Rather, it would be desirable to plant new peace trees in other places, including Montreal, as the peace spread. Today, Tekaronieken Jake Swamp, with the Tree of Peace Society, has maintained that tradition.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;May-Tree&amp;quot; is a bad translation but a good interpretation, since it is the closest European equivalent to the most important aspects of the Tree of Peace. On May Day, throughout pre-Christian western Europe, a day of reconciliation and good will was celebrated. Wrongs that had not been adjusted by that date had to be forgotten (the equivalent of throwing them into the deep pit under the Tree of Peace), as the people joined hands (just as the brotherhood of chiefs would do around the Tree of Peace).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Just as Thadadaho was the keeper of the council house at Onondaga, so wherever a council place was appointed, a keeper was also named: &amp;quot;According to our ancient custom, whenever a council-fire was kindled up, and a Tree of Peace was planted, there was some person appointed to watch it.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Indian Affairs Papers&#039;&#039;, 31, German Flats council with the twelve colonies, August 1776.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Tree of Peace and the Tree of Council are two different trees, though. The Tree of Peace is the great white pine,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Newhouse 1885, 1. Newhouse translates “Jonerahdesegowah” as “Tree of Great Peace.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; the tallest tree, closest to the Sky World. As such, it is the tree most likely to communicate with the Creator.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;It is the maple, and not the white pine, that is named as the leader of the trees in the Thanksgiving. Each tree has its gifts and its purposes.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Alone among the pines of eastern North America, it has clusters of five needles, to remind us of the original Five Nations.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Tekaronianeken Jake Swamp would explain this when planting white pines for the Tree of Peace Society.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It is where the eagle perches, above the rest of the forest, to look out for danger coming from afar. The Tree of Council, on the other hand, is the oak. It has a canopy to shade the people meeting beneath it, and tends to shade flat, open areas.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;At Fort Johnson, New York (Warraghiyagey Sir William Johnson’s first home on the Mohawk River), two large oaks in the front garden are said to have been grown from acorns shed by the great Council Oak tree at Albany. All through eastern North America, there were council oaks. The Creeks left their names behind—both Tallahassee, Florida, and Tulsa, Oklahoma, mean “council oak.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The oak is also long-lived. It resists high winds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hiding the weapons from both the children and the warriors has a parallel: the admonition, as part of the Condolence, to hide the bones of the dead from the children, whose curious minds might be upset, and from the warriors, whose minds might then tend towards anger and revenge. Were the weapons actually hidden? The history of the Haudenosaunee for the past three centuries has been one of almost incessant warfare.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;When John Mohawk was being cross-examined during the &#039;&#039;Mitchell&#039;&#039; trial, in 1999, the lawyer for the Canadian government said: “I put it to you, sir, that the history of your people, the Seneca people, for the past three hundred years has been one of incessant warfare.” And John Mohawk replied: “I put it to you, sir, that the history of the &#039;&#039;world&#039;&#039; for the past three hundred years has been one of incessant warfare. What’s your point?”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Putting them away, in pragmatic terms, may have come to mean reducing their visibility and their prominence.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;At the beginning of Midwinter ceremonies, the first dance is the Standing Quiver Dance, in which the hunters symbolically put away their hunting equipment, for it is the end of deer hunting season.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Putting the weapons away in terms of their use within the community was paramount: that the Senecas guarded the Great Black Door indicated that the weapons could still be used against external enemies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Great White Wampum ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first wampum records of the Haudenosaunee are the simplest. They are the short strings of the ceremony of Condolence, the five strings that symbolize the coming together of the minds of the nations, and the circle that sets out the structure of the government. The originals would have been almost completely made of white beads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another of the first wampum records of the Haudenosaunee is the &amp;quot;great mat,&amp;quot; a wampum belt of pure white beads. This wampum is associated with the Peacemaker just as other great wampums are linked to Hiawatha and Thadadaho. Perhaps the Peacemaker&#039;s wampum is a mat, connected to the earth, because he returned to the earth when his work was done. Certainly it is a &amp;quot;mat&amp;quot; because he would make people&#039;s minds comfortable by making their bodies comfortable first. The wampum recalls this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lords have unanimously decided to spread before you (Thadadaho) on the ground this great white wampum belt Ska-no-dah-ken-rah-ko-wah and Ka-yah-ne-renh-ko-wah, which respectfully signify purity and great peace. . . .&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Chiefs) 1916, 98.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Article XIX:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus it shall be. I and the confederate chiefs now plant a tree of Peace or shelter, at your residence A-do-dar-hoh of the Fire Keepers the Onondagas. And this Tree of Peace or shelter I called &amp;quot;Jo-ne-rah-de-she-go-wah.&amp;quot; And in the shade of this tree of peace or shelter we spread out this &amp;quot;Jo-no-da-ken-rah-ko-wah&amp;quot; (meaning belts of white wampum is spread under the shade of the spreading branches of this tree of peace or shelter). And on this place which we prepare it for you A-do-dar-hoh, your brothers, and your cousin Chiefs will be your seats, and we do now put you A-do-dar-hoh, your brothers and your cousin chiefs on the wampums spread out under the shade of its spreading branches of this tree of peace or shelter.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Newhouse 1885, 24.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is said that part of this wampum was kept at the Grand River Territory. If so, part of it was returned in 1999 by the Royal Ontario Museum, where it had been since 1935.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hayadaha Richard Hill (personal communication) believes that the “mat” is both the very large wampum belt, and the actual mat that the chiefs would sit on in comfort in council, and the metaphor for the basis of the law. Is it a big mat, or just a big idea about the metaphorical mat?&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Another fragment was later returned from the National Museum of the American Indian.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Eagle ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Haudenosaunee legend, the eagle, flying higher than all other birds, has the best chance to see and visit the Sky World. It communicates between the worlds, like tobacco smoke. The eagle causes people to look up, to be inspired by its grace and strength:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moreover, I decree that a large creature, a free one, which flies high and has long distance vision, and which is watching all over the world, that this is what we shall seat at the top of the tree, the tree we have growing, Skaetsi:kona (Great Tall Tree Trunk), as to that, it is there that we are seating it now, the one called Eagle. Moreover, it will be protecting (&#039;&#039;holding&#039;&#039;) our power, for it will be watching all over the world where they are settled, the many nations. And therefore it will notice things at once and it will observe when, possibly, someone will see a root growing along, of Tsyoktehhaekeaeto:kona&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Newhouse 1885, 1. Newhouse translates “Ohderakenragowah” as “Big White Root.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; (the Great White Roots), and possibly someone will chop into the root enough so that it will be able to cause its blood to flow. . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moreover this is what will happen in the future, in days and nights to come, and if it so happens in future days, that wherever the roots extend, the Great White Roots—all of the nations seeing where those roots are—and if someone were to chop into them, at once it will holler, the one perched at the top of the tree, Eagle, and that is what everyone will hear, it notifying them.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 311 and 319.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . . So now at the very top of our standing tree, the Great Tall Pine, have I perched the Eagle (great talons) (the symbol of foresight). And so it shall have your collective power, and the reason for this is that it shall occur that this Eagle aloft goes to and fro over the earth, which means that your work for the Great Law and for Reason shall prevail on the earth and even toward the skyworld. Both things are reserved to you federal chiefs, and you shall regulate the minds of the public, and also the individual families, and also the territories and settlements of the people amid the forests.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1899, para. 110.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Eagles seek out nesting places at the tops of white pine trees that soar above the oak canopies. They seek places with open areas, where they can take off and land despite their broad wingspread. From their nesting places, they can see all around them. They are unusually alert. In choosing the eagle as a symbol, the Peacemaker was doing the same as he had done with the family, the fire and the longhouse: he had chosen something with which the people were familiar; something that would remind them of the law every time they saw it. In those days before DDT, there were many eagles in the forest, and along the rivers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Though no version of the Great Law says so, the eagle gradually became a symbol of the Confederacy itself, a symbol of the way the nations had joined together to become a single family or clan.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;There is no Eagle Clan among the Haudenosaunee. The Senecas have a Hawk Clan, though.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; As Yankee Spring of Tonawanda explained:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Eagle is the symbol of the Confederacy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Iroquois, or the Five Nations, began as separate entities and became known as such when they formed the League. When they learned the great natural law (Gayaneshagowa) the Creator told the people a way by which they might know each other. It should be by wearing of an eagle feather, because that bird was a far-seeing bird, and the Creator wanted his people to be far-seeing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The great mutual law was designed for the future. It did not rest upon the past. The Creator chose the eagle feather by which they might recognize each other in the future. He chose the eagle as the totem of the Iroquois as a people, and he ordained that collectively the Five Nations should belong to one clan, that of the eagle, which is called variously, oswegadage’a, oshada’ge’a, &amp;quot;Dew Eagle,&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The dew eagle flies in the western sky and helps put out forest fires.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; or do’nyonda, &amp;quot;Bald Eagle.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One feather he deemed enough for his people&#039;s headdress. In ceremonies they added to the single large whirling eagle feather by wearing a cap which had at the forehead a cluster of split feathers from which the quills had been removed.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Fenton 1953, 117. To this day, the Senecas can be recognized by the single eagle feather on the men’s kahstó:was. Different nations carry different numbers of feathers in different arrangements: the Mohawks have three upright eagle feathers; the Oneidas two eagle feathers up and one down; the Onondagas have two feathers, one up and one down; the Cayugas a single angled feather; and the Senecas a single upright feather. At some point in the second half of the nineteenth century, some Haudenosaunee began to wear Plains-style eagle feather headdresses, and this continued, in public shows, until perhaps the mid-twentieth century. However, these headdresses were recognized as foreign to the Haudenosaunee, and in matters internal to the Confederacy, the men continued to wear their kahstó:was. Those who persisted in wearing Plains-style headdresses were subjected to prolonged teasing.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Dish with One Spoon: Sharing the Hunting Grounds ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker had observed that one source of bloodshed had been disputes over hunting grounds. By this provision of the Kayanerenkó:wa he removed the idea of exclusive hunting grounds, replacing it with the concept of the Dish that would feed everyone: &amp;quot;Equally will we share the animals on which we will have to live (i.e. we shall have an equal right to hunt, etc.) as Haweni’yu, who dwells in the sky, has provided for us.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hewitt 1892b, 145.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In some renderings of the principle, it is stated that there is a single wooden spoon in the bowl—again, an implement that will assist in feeding the people, but without sharp edges, so that there will be no risk of bloodshed:&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See, e.g., RCAP 1995, 656.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereupon Dekanawidah said: &amp;quot;it will turn out well for us to do this: we will say, &amp;quot;We promise to have only one dish among us; in it will be beaver tail and no knife will be there.&#039;&amp;quot; Thereupon the chiefs confirmed that so it shall happen. Thereupon Dekanawidah said, &amp;quot;Now we have completed the matter; we will have one dish, which means that we will all have equal shares of the game roaming about in the hunting grounds and fields, and then everything will become peaceful among all of the people, and there will be no knife near our dish, which means that if a knife were there, someone might presently get out, causing bloodshed, and this is troublesome, should it happen thus, and for this reason there should be no knife near the dish.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 458–60.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Lords of the Confederacy shall eat together from one bowl the feast of cooked beaver&#039;s tail. While they are eating they are to use no sharp utensils for if they should they might accidentally cut one another and bloodshed would follow. All measures must be taken to prevent the spilling of blood in any way.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Newhouse and Cusick) 1916, 45.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . . I have decreed that all of you are federal chiefs; I have rolled up your publics (constituents) into one, as well as other tribes (at random) in neighbouring territories; so then there shall be only the common dish resting there for all of us, and this will contain beaver tail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And surely this will come to pass. It will contain nothing that is sharp-edged. And this is what will happen if we should put any sharp-edged thing into that dish which we have set down, for surely it will cut somebody touching it. Then some one will surely bleed. This is what it means. When we have set down our dish of wild game, we shall all enjoy equal portions where the people have hunted (the hunting grounds amongst the several tribal territories of native lands), and all human beings shall now bear good will for one another in their travels.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1899, para. 311.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then Dekanawideh continued and said: &amp;quot;We have still one matter left to be considered and that is with reference to the hunting grounds of our people from which they derive their living.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They, the lords, said with reference to this matter: &amp;quot;We shall now do this: We shall have only one dish (or bowl) in which will be placed one beaver&#039;s tail and we shall all have coequal right to it, and there shall be no knife in it, for if there be a knife in it, there would be danger that it might cut someone and blood would thereby be shed.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(This one dish or bowl signified that they will make their hunting grounds one common tract and all have a coequal right to hunt within it.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Diondowe’ta, hunting ground.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The knife being prohibited from being placed into the dish or bowl signifies that all danger would be removed from shedding blood by the people of these different nations of the confederacy caused by differences of the right of the hunting grounds.)&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Chiefs) 1916, 103.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Recall that in the dark days before the coming of the law, it was not uncommon for people to live alone, in isolation from one another. Examples of this in the story of making the law include the Peacemaker, living with his mother and grandmother; the Cannibal; Tsikonsaseh; and Hiawatha. Bringing them to their good minds was followed by returning them to society. The threshold to that return was the sharing of a meal. They had to learn to eat with other people again, and they had to learn to share their meals. The meals and feasts the Peacemaker had with each of these people are microcosms of the transformation of attitudes implicit in the Dish with One Spoon. Again, the Peacemaker had taken his piecemeal accomplishments and extrapolated them to an entire society.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is another aspect of the &amp;quot;no sharp edges&amp;quot; principle: it is that people will avoid using &amp;quot;cutting words&amp;quot; that might injure one another&#039;s feelings: &amp;quot;As the bowl circulated the Peacemaker said, &#039;We will drink from one common bowl. When we come here to the council, we will adopt civilized behavior. When people are here to put their minds to the problem of survival, we will be careful not to use words that cut anyone else. Our diplomacy is a version of our future as human beings.&#039;&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mohawk 1987, 10–17.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The wampum preserving this part of the Great Law is kept at the Grand River Territory,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;From 1931 to 1995, it was held by the Royal Ontario Museum in Toronto.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and several documented readings of it have been by chiefs from that community. In 1862, at the council at Cattaraugus, the Grand River chiefs came to read the Great Law, to seek a reaffirmation of the Confederacy&#039;s commitment to it: &amp;quot;Canada nations presented the wampum with a dark spot in the middle represent a bowl or dish with beaver tail in it . . . represented with beaver meat in it. They should eat together—use no knife for fear they should cut and draw blood.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Minutes of Council of the Six Nations at Cattaraugus, December 1, 1862; Parker 1916, 145.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Why beaver tail? Because, it is said, it is the chiefs&#039; favourite dish. It is also extremely high in fats and nutrients, a delicacy in a society where meat was sometimes scarce. Another explanation is that the conflict over hunting grounds might have begun or revived with the fur trade, and the beaver was the prime object of that trade.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The idea spread as an element of the peace. That is, peace depended not only on the original Five Nations refraining from internal wars but also on removing sources of friction with other nations.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Lytwyn 1997.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It is possible that the bloodshed of the Dark Times had its origins in conflicts over scarce resources—food. The source might have been a bad year, a starving year, and the bloodshed might have kept going, as blood feuds do. The Peacemaker, by addressing this conflict, went to the source of the problem rather than the symptoms. Sharing hunting grounds was an easy concept to grasp. The number of deer that visitors would take would have little effect on the overall population, and in any event shared hunting meant reciprocity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other readings of the wampum by Skanawati John Buck have been preserved, and they are consistent, both with one another and with the original terms of the Great Law. In 1887, Augusta Gilkison of Toronto recorded:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The firekeeper told the first belt, all white except for a round purple patch in the centre. This represents all the Indians on the continent. They have entered into one great league and contract and they will all be one and have one heart. The pot in the centre is a dish of beaver, indicating that they will have one dish and what belongs to one will belong to all.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gilkison 1928, 48–50. When Skanawati John Buck died, his family sold the Confederacy wampum belts, including this one, which ended up with Dr. Boyle. The chiefs found out about this and secured their return, reimbursing the money. In 1935, this was one of the four wampums delivered secretly to the Royal Ontario Museum. They were returned to the Grand River Territory in 1999.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The new treaty, confirmed by the exchange of wampum-belts and by a peculiar interlocking of the right arms, which has ever since been the special sign of amity between the Iroquois and the Ojibways, was understood to make them not merely allies but brothers. As the symbol on one of the belts which is still preserved indicates, they were to be relatives who are so nearly akin that they eat from the same dish. This treaty, made two centuries ago, has ever since been religiously maintained.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hale (1883) 1989, 91. The “peculiar interlocking of the right arms” resembles the old Roman military handshake. It is considered to be stronger and more respectful than shaking hands. Strangers can greet and acknowledge each other properly in this way: wa’thyatenonhwerá:ton wa’tyatatenéntsha—“they greeted each other by the arm.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like other elements of the Great Law, the sharing of hunting grounds was intended to expand, so that there would not be a territory of peace with conflict at all its edges:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The dish with one spoon referred to in this provision of the Great Law appears often in councils between the Haudenosaunee and other indigenous nations, as well as in relations with Europeans. It refers to the hunting grounds. As the dish of beaver tail stew is shared between the chiefs, the land is like a bowl to feed all the people. The wampum belt preserving this principle is white, with a round purple area as the bowl.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The concept of the dish with one spoon spread gradually, as the Great White Roots of Peace spread to other nations. . . . As treaties enshrining that principle were made with other nations, hunters would be able to use ever larger territories.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;RCAP 1995, 657.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Expansion of the hunting grounds, along with the spreading of the Great White Roots, are examples of the thinking reflected in &amp;quot;adding to the rafters&amp;quot;—expanding the Longhouse to take in other peoples and their lands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[Figure 9: The Dish with One Spoon Wampum. Photograph by Richard W. Hill.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Linking Arms Together ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker had extrapolated the structure of village and nation government to a new confederate level.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Morgan says that the council of the clan “was the germ of the higher council of the tribe, and of that still higher of the confederacy, each of which was composed exclusively of chiefs as representatives of the clans.” Morgan (1871) 1997, 85.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; He had used the complex terms of kinship that the people already knew as the glue to bind them together. Now he began to identify the metaphors and symbols that the people would use and recognize.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The terms of kinship did not just bind the people together—they also were the way the people related to the world around them. The thanksgiving address that begins any meeting or council has a careful structure&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See Foster 1974, for an analysis of a number of men’s renditions of the Thanksgiving, noting that the versions varied greatly in length (from one minute to nearly three-quarters of an hour) but not in their basic content and structure.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; that sets out the organization of the natural world and the place (and obligations) of people within it. Everything is related, and everything is linked. Michael Foster wrote: &amp;quot;There is a certain symmetry in the Iroquois conception of the ritual process which is an interlocking chain of obligations between man and the Creator.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Foster 1974, 125.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If people knew who they were—as individuals, family members, clan members, citizens of nations—they felt that much more secure. If they also knew where they fit into the natural world, those links, as well, would help them avoid being swept away. The Peacemaker recognized the need for a web-like structure of obligations and relationships that reminded them of the kinship that lay at the heart of the peace. He sought consistent, uncomplicated symbols as reminders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Circle Wampum—a simple circle of two intertwined strings of white wampum, with forty-nine strings going from the circumference towards the middle, was such a symbol.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Niwadenraah Henry Lickers says his great-grandmother described to him two important occasions on which Thadadaho at Grand River picked up the Circle Wampum: he held it by the circle part, with the strings symbolizing the chiefs hanging down together—occasions when it was necessary for them to hold together tightly, for the strings representing the chiefs were closer together than ever. In the 1862 council in Cattaraugus, there may be a suggestion that there were two Circle Wampums, one kept at the Grand River on the Canadian side, the other at Onondaga: “this belt represents the circling of the Six Nations similar to the one at Onondaga” (Parker 1916, 145).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Each string represents a title holder, a chief. The two intertwined white strings around the circumference represent the Great Law and the Great Peace, which are so interwoven as to be inseparable. There are three white beads between each of the strings—and these are reminders of the Peacemaker&#039;s Three Words. As with King Arthur&#039;s Round Table, the circle reminds the chiefs that they are all equal, with none higher than any other. The circle is the circle of the law around the people: it is their protection. It evokes the palisade around the town. As with many other symbols of the Haudenosaunee—including the longhouse itself—maintaining the circle of the law requires constant effort. The chiefs have formed this circle by linking arms, holding each other&#039;s arms so firmly that even if a tree fell upon them, it would not break their hold, or their resolve: &amp;quot;We therefore bind ourselves together by taking hold of each other&#039;s hands firmly and forming a circle so strong that if a tree fall prostrate upon it, it could neither shake nor break it, and thus our people and our grandchildren shall remain in the circle of security, peace and happiness.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Chiefs) 1916, 102.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[Figure 10: The Circle Wampum. Returned to the Grand River Territory by the Canadian Museum of Civilization, 1990. Photograph by Raymond Skye.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The degrees of closeness between individuals and peoples are indicated by how they take hold of one another&#039;s arms: shaking hands in friendship; taking one another by the arm being closer;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The Haudenosaunee and the Ojibways grasp each other’s arms (not hands) in greeting and in brotherhood—as the Ojibways were reminded at the council at Willow Grove in 1870.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; linking arms reflecting brotherhood. This gradual rapprochement was often repeated in the symbolism of the evolution of relations between the Haudenosaunee and the British:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We not only made the chain of friendship very bright; but we locked arms, and took fast hold of each other&#039;s hands, and left the token of friendship.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Ganter 2006, 29.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You, the Five Nations Confederate Lords, be firm so that if a tree falls upon your joined arms, it shall not separate you or weaken your hold. So shall the strength of the union be preserved.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Newhouse and Cusick) 1916, 45.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Holding hands, holding arms, and linking arms are three distinct acts of increasing closeness. The chiefs link their arms—the closest and firmest grasp, unbreakable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Skanatariio John Arthur Gibson also described the circle of the peace and the law: &amp;quot;This is where it burns, the Great Fire, its smoke rising and piercing the sky; where the family is, the single family we have created; where they are forming a circle, the chiefs, linking arms. Moreover this is what encircles the group: the Good Message, and the Power, and the Peace, and the Great Law; even if the wind were to rise and the tree to topple where they hold each other by the arms, the circle cannot break.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 462.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a difference in metaphor between &amp;quot;linked arms&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;joined hands.&amp;quot; The linking of arms is a sign of brotherhood, whereas shaking or joining hands is a weaker matter of friendship. Careful translation is necessary to keep the two concepts separate. In the &amp;quot;Newhouse&amp;quot; version published by Parker, the ideas are mixed: &amp;quot;There are now the Five Nations Confederate Lords standing with joined hands in a circle. This signifies and provides that should any one of the Confederate Lords leave the council and this Confederacy, his crown of deer&#039;s horns, the emblem of his Lordship title, shall lodge on the arms of the Union Lords whose hands are so joined.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Newhouse and Cusick) 1916, 45.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Chiefs&#039; Version speaks only of joined hands: &amp;quot;And if any lord . . . shall break through this circle of unity, his horns shall become fastened in the circle, and if he persists after warning from the chief matron, he shall go through it without his horns and the horns shall remain in the circle.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Chiefs) 1916, 102.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gibson does not describe joined hands, only linked arms: &amp;quot;Moreover, if a chief of one of our several nations or clans, if a chief passes through the circle surrounding the crowd, his antlers will get caught where they are linking arms, and there, underneath, on the side of the encircled crowd, they will remain.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 462.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This concept of joined arms in brotherhood was later used to describe the closeness or union of nations upon their joining in treaty relations with the Haudenosaunee. Perhaps the first such recorded description is the speech of Kitsaeton of the Mohawks at Three Rivers in 1645, when he described the new relationship between the Haudenosaunee, the Algonquins, and the French:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The tenth (belt of wampum) was given to bind us all very closely together. He took hold of a Frenchman, placed his arm within his, and with his other arm he clasped that of an Algonquin. Having thus joined himself to them, &amp;quot;Here,&amp;quot; he said, &amp;quot;is the knot that binds us inseparably; nothing can part us.&amp;quot; This collar was extraordinarily beautiful. &amp;quot;Even if the lightning were to fall upon us, it could not separate us; for, if it cuts off the arm that holds you to us, we will at once seize each other by the other arm.&amp;quot; And thereupon he turned around, and caught the Frenchman and the Algonquin by their two other arms—holding them so closely that he seemed unwilling ever to leave them.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Jennings 1985, 141. See also Williams 1999, 53.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In another instance: &amp;quot;the Iroquois set himself to sing and dance; he took a Frenchman on one side, an Algonquin and a Huron on the other, and holding themselves all bound with his arms, they danced in cadence and sang with a strong voice a song of peace.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Thwaites 1901, 7:261.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the proceedings of 1645 were completed, a Huron delegate declared the result: &amp;quot;It is done. We are brothers. The conclusion has been reached; now we are all relatives—Hiroquois, Huron, Algonquins and French; we are now but one and the same people.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Thwaites 1901, 7:289.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Linking arms together does more than recall the Kayanerenkó:wa and the circle of the rotiyanershon. It also reflects the Haudenosaunee ceremony of adoption. Today, in the Longhouse, when a person is adopted, they are walked up and down the length of the building, with their arms linked to another person on each side, while the people holding their arms sing their atonwa, and the men stamp their feet and women clap in unison,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Since women should retain their connection with the earth, they do not stamp their feet. The Haudenosaunee do not applaud by clapping, they voice their approval.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; in cadence, in approval and welcome.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;See, e.g., the adoptions of F.H. Furniss and William Beauchamp, in Beauchamp (1907) 1975, 407 and 410. The same linking of arms takes place in the Longhouse today when a couple is married; they walk up and down before the people and the fire, arms linked.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Of all the surviving Iroquois rites, the &#039;&#039;Adonwa&#039;&#039;, or Personal Chant ranks among the four most sacred. It is also pre-Columbian. When the Mohawk speaker took a Frenchman and a Huron on each arm, and marched them the length of the council space and return, to the accompaniment of his native auditors, he was dramatizing their adoption.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Jennings 1985, 129.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is not surprising that there is consistency between the linking arms in the Great Law, linking arms in a close treaty relationship, and linking arms in an adoption ceremony. They all deliver the same message: &amp;quot;Now we are one family. Now we are Brothers.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Council Fire ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The council fire, in historic times, burned in the centre of the council itself. The fire is not to be made from chestnut wood, because that wood crackles and throws sparks, and could distract the minds of the chiefs.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Newhouse and Cusick) 1916, 31. Converse (1908, 139) says that Thadadaho’s council fire was kindled from willow. Joyce King Mitchell says that willow is mentioned in the Gibson/Hewitt Creation Story as a fire whose smoke can be ascended to the Sky World by someone from that world.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Since the council is held in daytime, the fire is not needed for light. In winter councils in today&#039;s longhouses, the fires in the wood stoves are necessary for heat. The fire is started well before the council begins, to warm the place and make it welcoming and comfortable. It is the responsibility of the Onondagas to start the fire and keep it going, and individual Onondaga men—not chiefs—add wood during council, both to the stove at the men&#039;s end of the longhouse and the one at the women&#039;s end. The fire, like the council, is a process, and as the Onondagas are stewards of the council, their care for the fire reflects their care for the council itself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is no coincidence that the root word for &amp;quot;family&amp;quot; is also the root word for &amp;quot;fire.&amp;quot; In the old bark longhouses, where the central line from east to west would pass through several hearths, there would be one nuclear family on each side of each fire. They would care for and help the family on the other side of the fire in the same way the chiefs and nations would help and care for one another.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fire is life, in the sense that it provides warmth and light. It is evidence of human presence. When the Onondagas informed the French Governor of Quebec that they were going to extirpate the military outpost at Cataraqui (present-day Kingston, Ontario), they said, &amp;quot;Onontiio, your fyre shall burn no more in this place.&amp;quot; On fundamental wampum belts, the squares depicted at each end—with the path of peace and open communication between them—are the fires of the nations depicted in friendship. Thus, when Canadian courts described the removal of Aboriginal rights as &amp;quot;extinguishment,&amp;quot; they could not have chosen a more ominous word for many Indigenous nations, whose symbol of their very existence was the fire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Rod or Staff ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Though Thadadaho had great personal power, the lawmakers gave him some emblems and implements of authority. In each case, authority came with responsibility. Just as the eagle atop the Tree of Peace was to watch for danger from afar, Thadadaho was to be vigilant against subtle dangers from within the council itself. Metaphorically, the danger was called a &amp;quot;creeping thing,&amp;quot; both because of its subtle approach and because snakes were considered both dangerous and evil, connected to the dark underground world:&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The Thunderers, protectors of the people, hated snakes and would kill them with lightning when they could. The scales of particularly powerful snakes are part of the protective medicine used by some societies.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He was to have a stick when he could not do it (remove the crawling thing with the stick) he was to whoop and in less than no time the chiefs (would come). . . .&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Council of the Six Nations at Cattaraugus, December 1, 1862; Parker 1916, 145.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then Dekanawideh said: &amp;quot;The lords of this confederacy have unanimously decided to lay by you this rod (Ska-nah-ka-res) and whenever you see any creeping thing which might have a tendency to harm our grandchildren or see a thing creeping toward the great white wampum belt (meaning the Great Peace), then you shall take this rod and pry it away with it, and if you and your colleagues fail to pry the creeping, evil thing out, you shall call out loudly that all the Confederate Nations may hear and they will come immediately to your assistance.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Chiefs) 1916, 98. Gibson 1899, paras. 97–98: “also we have provided a pole for you, the Great Black Pole . . . it possibly might happen that some kind of thing might crawl in and it will be unaware that only you see it; and right then you shall pick up the great black pole (the emergency pole) which you will insert beneath the creature (its body) and flick it out of the council, casting it far outside into the distance. If you cannot by yourself lift it body with the pole, then at that time shout and call your body guards among the federal chiefs (the five chiefs in his cabinet) who shall then assist you; at which time you shall all work together (co-laborate) to heave its body way outside.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In international relations, as well, council fires are to be kept clean and clear:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1698, the Mohawks met with Virginia. Before replying to the Virginians’ speech, the Mohawk speaker said:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But before we give an answer, we make the appointed House clean by giving this Fathom of Wampum (by cleaning the House, they mean putting away Hypocrisy and Deceit). Colden (1727) 1973, 30.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A British speaker, familiar with Haudenosaunee symbols and metaphor, stated in 1691:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brethren&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I am glad to see you in this house which is and hath always been the appointed place to speak with you and ought to be kept clean for the purpose. NYCD London Documents VII: 773, June 1, 1691.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As a weapon against a crawling creature I lay a staff with you so that you may thrust it away from the Council Fire. If you fail to cast it out then call the rest of the United Lords to your aid.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Newhouse and Cusick) 1916, 31. In June 1755, the Haudenosaunee showed how this aspect of the Great Law had been extrapolated to relations with the British. In objection to the presence of Colonel Lydius, a participant in land frauds, one of the Oneida chiefs reminded Sir William Johnson about his home, Johnson Hall: “You promised us you would keep this place clean from all filth and that no snake should come into this Council Room. That man sitting there (pointing to Coll. Lydius) is a Devil and has stole our Lands.” Wraxall (1754) 1915, cvii.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And if ye see any crawling creature approching toward the confederate council fire, and I now lay a stick by your side &amp;quot;A-do-dar-hoh&amp;quot; and you will take the stick and pitch the crawling creature away from the confederate council fire, and your brothers and cousin chiefs will act with you at time or times. Dust and the crawling creature signifies any case, to be brought before the confederate council fire which would be injurious to the confederate nations. And if ye will fail to reject, ye will call the rest of the confederate chiefs to aid ye.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Newhouse 1885, 21. Is the staff also a physical symbol of power, like a mace?&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thadadaho can call on the other chiefs for help.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;There is also the suggestion that Thadadaho should call upon the two Seneca chiefs who are the doorkeepers to help him first.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; This is one of the parts of the Great Law that vests him with the authority to call a Grand Council when he perceives the Confederacy is threatened—or when there is important business that must be attended to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In June 1870, delegates from all the Haudenosaunee communities in Ontario and Quebec met at the Grand River with delegates from Ojibway communities. The purpose of this &amp;quot;general council&amp;quot; was to consider the new Canadian legislation about &amp;quot;Indians.&amp;quot; Chief John Smoke Johnson said: &amp;quot;The position of the Confederacy of the Six Nations was the firekeeper in his proper place, the door-keeper in his proper place, and the door properly tiled, yet the fire-keeper has noticed that a great monster has crept in; he finds he cannot eject the monster or whip him alone; he calls the delegates together to assist him in ejecting the imp or monster.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;General Council, 1870, 7.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The crawling thing is sometimes said to be an external threat, warfare with outsiders. A close examination of the law suggests instead that it can also be internal. It is different from a confrontational disruptor: it can be subtly erosive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Wing ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the metaphors of the law and of council, &amp;quot;dust&amp;quot; has several meanings, all negative. The whiteness and purity of the peace must not be allowed to become stained or dirty. Dust must not be allowed to accumulate on the law: that is, the law must remain fresh and visible in people&#039;s minds, and must not be neglected. Dust swirling in the air gets in people&#039;s eyes and distracts them, and interferes with their ability to see clearly. For all these reasons, the place of council must be kept clear of dust—it is a place of purity and cleanliness, literally and symbolically. As firekeeper, this responsibility fell to Thadahaho, who was given a symbolic wing with which to take care of the area of council:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lords have laid before you this great wing, Ska-weh-yeh-seh-ko-wah,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Newhouse 1885, 2: Shaweyesehko:wa Onerahóntsha, great seagull wing.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and whenever any dust or stain of any description falls upon the great belt of white wampum, then you shall take this great wing and sweep it clean. (Dust or stain means evil of any description which might have a tendency to cause trouble in the Confederate Council.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You, Atotarho, and your thirteen cousin Lords, shall faithfully keep the space about the Council Fire clean and you shall allow neither dust nor dirt to accumulate. I lay a Long Wing before you as a broom.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Newhouse and Cusick), 1916, 31.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . . will allow no dust or dirt to be seen, around the council fire, and if there is any dust or dirt to be seen. I now lay it a sea gull wing by your side &amp;quot;A-do-dar-hoh.&amp;quot; And you will take the wing and sweep the dust away from the confederate council fire.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Newhouse 1885, 21.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dust or darkness can also mean violent disagreement: &amp;quot;and if the place where it is situated gets dark, then he shall pick up the Great Black Wing, the Great Chief, sweeping the place where it is spread out, which means that if the argument becomes too intense—causing minds to spoil—then he shall stop it at once.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 434. Though some versions describe the Wing as a gull’s wing, with the whiteness of pure intentions, Gibson’s black wing stands in contrast to the Great White Mat that it is intended to sweep clean.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The symbol of the wing is one of the great wampums of the Haudenosaunee, the &amp;quot;Wing or Dust Fan&amp;quot; belt.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;A similar concern that the “Covenant House must be kept clean” appears in treaty councils with the British. See Colden (1727) 1973, 37.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Though the law contemplates great tolerance, and sees the need to take time to find consensus, nevertheless &amp;quot;spoiled&amp;quot; minds have to be removed, rather than allow their disruptions to injure the great goodness.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[Figure 12: The Thadadaho Belt, also known as the Wing or Dust Fan of the Confederacy. Returned to Onondaga by the New York State Museum, 1989.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== No Council after Dark ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;(And ye will) close the council before darkness sets in, for ye will not council after dark.&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Newhouse 1885, 22.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the people bringing their minds together are to work as well as possible, then they must guard against fatigue, because tired minds think more slowly and are quicker to anger. At sundown, the council is closed (the fire is covered). This does not mean an end to all business: often the participants will meet separately that evening to talk over the day&#039;s events. Perhaps there will be &amp;quot;talking in the bushes,&amp;quot; informal discussions between the parties to the council. The basic principle, though, is that no decisions can be made after dark. Council resumes when people can see one another clearly and when their minds are rested: &amp;quot;and if the place where (the Council) is situated gets dark, then he shall pick up the Great Black Wing, the Great Chief (Thadadaho), sweeping the place where it is spread out (the Great White Mat), which means that if the argument becomes too intense, causing minds to spoil, then he shall stop it at once.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 56.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the light is the Creator&#039;s time, the night belongs to his brother. As light is life, so darkness is death and depression, but it is also rest and regeneration. To continue council into the night would be to invite the influence of the dark side, but also to interfere with the balance between work and rest.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Birds in the Branches ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One problem with a culture that passes on its knowledge by word of mouth is gossip. It is a problem that the Peacemaker was aware of and that persists to this day. Nor is it something the Peacemaker felt he could do away with. Instead, the law admonishes the chiefs in council to pay no attention to it. They are told not to listen to the birds twittering in the branches overhead.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The irony of the role of Twitter, the micro-message social medium of the Trump presidency, is not lost on Haudenosaunee constitutional scholars.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In July 1764, Sir William Johnson was able to use the same metaphor in his peacemaking with the Haudenosaunee and the Western nations at Niagara: &amp;quot;All that is wanting on your parts to attain this, is that you never more listen to Stories told you by People who have nothing to do with the Management of Indian Affairs, that you shut your ears against all bad Birds, and be no longer deluded by their Whistling.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;SWJP 11:280.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1799, rumours spread by New York State officials through Atiatoharongwen Louis Cook alleged that Thayendenega Joseph Brant and Odeserundiye John Deserontyon had sold to New York all the land claimed by the Seven Nations of Canada in that state.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The accusations against Brant maintain hard feelings against him to this day among the eastern Mohawk communities. Brant maintained that he and Deserontyon had received compensation only for the lands they claimed, up to the boundary between the Mohawks of the Mohawk Valley and those of the Seven Nations of Canada, an east-west line drawn through a place on Lake Champlain. They had received fifteen hundred dollars, and felt shortchanged. The suggestion that Brant and Deserontyon had sold all the land allowed New York to reduce the offer it made to the Seven Nations, because Louis Cook believed the New York representatives—he had fought for the United States in the Revolutionary War.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; A council in Kahnawake between the Haudenosaunee and the Seven Nations of Canada set matters straight. The Kahnawake speaker said: &amp;quot;Brothers: On every turn along the road there is birds telling stories, our ancestors ordered that such things should not be listened to, but be cast behind our backs, let us Brethren do as our Forefathers commanded.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Michigan Pioneer and Historical Society, vol. XX, 643–48.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Why birds? Because birds, like rumours, fly quickly, lack substance, and lack much brain.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The deliberate removal of distractions from council is part of the Peacemaker&#039;s strategy: people are not going to listen to one another, and not going to focus on the issues at hand, if they carry the burdens of grief and sorrow; if they carry anger; or if their attention is diluted by outside influences. Building a fire of quiet hardwood is a message about concentration rather than distraction. Paying no attention to the little birds constitutes recognition that there will be other voices in the chiefs&#039; ears. The chiefs&#039; thick skins prevent personal barbs from penetrating their thinking. Every step is aimed at promoting civil civic engagement and helpful, focussed thinking.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Considering the Coming Seven Generations ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In weighing any decision, the rotiyanershon are instructed to consider the effects of their choices on the seven generations downstream from them. This long view is one of the arguments in favour of the stability of Haudenosaunee governments: men with a life term in office will be able to more confidently consider future generations, whereas leaders with a short election horizon will tend to be more eager to satisfy the short-term appetites and concerns of the voters:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How shall we do that our chil(dren) shall have many days. Therefore you consider carefully in regard to this matter.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Minutes of Council of the Six Nations at Cattaraugus, December 1, 1862 (Parker 1916, 148).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . . they must have a regard . . . also for those children whom we have not yet seen. . . .&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hale (1883) 1989, 170.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We must look to see how it&#039;s going to affect those future generations. How are we protecting? How are we safeguarding? You have to protect those future people. They don&#039;t have anyone else to protect them. When they stand there maybe sixty or a hundred years from now in a society which may be very hostile, when they stand there looking for a house or looking for a place to live, they are going to look back at this time and say &amp;quot;Who was that who gave away my land?&amp;quot; Everyone here will be gone but the names will be there.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Joagquisho Oren Lyons 1982, v; speaking to lawyers: “When you talk about client relationships, you are talking about the future of nations.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Why seven generations?&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;There have been attempts to analyze this scientifically—to try to state the length of a generation in the fifteenth century, and to multiply that by seven to set a fixed horizon. But this analysis misses the point. The point is that we must cast our minds to the coming faces, the ones that we cannot see, the ones we will never see.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Even the oldest and most productive among us can know and see only our great-grandchildren—four generations. We may know the people who came before us, as well. Looking forward, looking back, our perspective may span seven generations. But to consider unto the seventh generation is really to say that our thoughts must go beyond our physical capacity to see; they must go downstream and around the bend in the river. It is not an unreasonable period of time—but it is time beyond what we can see around us.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Life Terms ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Once they have antlers on (ka-wyen-eta-ih = completed task) the length of time a man will hold the title is as long as he lives here on earth and only death will remove it from him.&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 421.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is often said that the best person to appoint as a chief is the one who does not seek the title. Ambition is not a factor in the functioning of the Kayanerenkó:wa, neither for individuals nor for parties. In Parliament or in Congress, the governing party introduces legislation to find it immediately opposed and tested by parties whose ambition is to either defeat the government in the House, or to replace the government in the next election. In Haudenosaunee lawmaking, the people on the other side of the fire cannot seek to replace anyone, for they have no influence over who is chosen (other than to potentially reject a candidate in a Condolence), and there are no elections. The incentive to oppose the government is removed, and instead all the chiefs are part of the same government, and their obligation, instinct, and tone are directed towards helping one another.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Having no elections—having leaders who need not seek periodic approval from people whose self-interest is bound to be short-term—means that the chiefs in council can consider the far horizon and the welfare of the coming seven generations. Elected politicians must always keep an eye on the next election, and their actions and decisions are often influenced by that election well in advance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Head Chiefs? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Almost any written version of the Great Law will leave the reader with the impression that some chiefs are more important than others. Secondary sources carry this to another level: they ascribe executive authority to some of the chiefs, stating that Thadadaho became the &amp;quot;president&amp;quot; of the Confederacy; or that Tekarihoken was the &amp;quot;head chief&amp;quot; of the Mohawks. Morgan ascribes to Europeans a need to identify chief executives: &amp;quot;Thadadahoh was early seized upon by the inquisitive colonists to advance the person who held that title to the position of King of the Iroquois, but the misconception was refuted, and the institutions of the Iroquois were relieved of the burden of an impossible feature. In the general council he sat among his equals. The Confederacy had no chief magistrate.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Morgan 1877, 145.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In any written version, there are words that suggest the primacy of some chiefs. Newhouse refers to the councils of nations as &amp;quot;Tekarihoken and his brother chiefs; Deskahe and his brother chiefs.&amp;quot; Is this because they were named first by the Peacemaker, or do they have special functions and responsibilities? Today, messages to nations are passed through these particular individuals. Sometimes, they are the holders of their nations&#039; fires.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They are: Tekarihoken for the Mohawks; Odatsehte for the Oneidas, Thadadaho for the Onondagas; Deskahe for the Cayugas; and Kanuhkitawi for the Senecas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But did they have any form of executive authority? In the Thanksgiving, there is also hierarchy. The maple is head or chief of the trees;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Porter 1986, 11.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; the deer for the animals; the strawberry for the berries that crawl close to the earth; the raspberry for the bush berries; the eagle for the birds; the bee for the insects. The &amp;quot;leaders&amp;quot; of the animals are reflections of the rotiyanershon: they are more like speakers for their kind than like executives.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The hierarchy may be recent, even more recent than the layered Thanksgiving itself.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Specific Chiefs Have Specific Duties ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some of the chiefs have specific duties with respect to the process of the council or the maintenance of the law. Thadadaho&#039;s responsibility and authority was given to him as part of his pacification. The two Seneca doorkeepers were given the power to admit or reject visitors as part of what amounted to the transformation and pacification of the warriors. There are strong suggestions that each of the fifty lords has a specific bundle of responsibilities, though none of the written versions of the law mentions many of these. Individual chiefs can explain their particular understandings of their functions, passed down through oral tradition. Sometimes those functions are suggested by their title names. It is hard to tell, today, to what extent these personal functions are indeed part of the law and which have become added over the course of the past few centuries.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Hononwirehton&#039;&#039;&#039; of the Onondaga Deer Clan is represented in the Circle Wampum by a string that is longer than the others. This is because (according to Shimony&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Shimony 1961, 110.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;) he has the deciding vote among the Onondagas, and thus in any decisions of the League:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Honuwiyehti . . . he who is alone, he having two father&#039;s kinsmen (uncles on father&#039;s side) and two clans (according to Fenton) he of the Great Wolf Clan— everyone depends on him.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 427. Morgan (1871) 1997, 143 states that Hononwirehto has two “aids” or sub-chiefs who were “required to be versed” in the interpretation of the wampums.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(The wampum belts of the Onondagas) are deposited as public records . . . and are held in safe-keeping by the guardianship sachem, Hononwenhto, the hereditary &amp;quot;keeper of wampum&amp;quot; whose office as expounder of the law, is to &amp;quot;read&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;talk&amp;quot; the wampum at all the councils.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Converse 1908, 140. At the Grand River Territory, for the last half of the nineteenth century, Skanawati John Buck was the keeper of the wampums.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All these national compacts were &amp;quot;talked into&amp;quot; strings of wampum, to use the Indian expression, after which these were delivered into the custody of &#039;&#039;Ho-no-we-na-to&#039;&#039;, the Onondaga sachem, who was made hereditary keeper of the wampum, at the institution of the League, and from him and his successors, was to be sought their interpretation from generation to generation.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Morgan (1851) 1995, 336–37.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is his duty, as well, to bring the mind of the council back to the single matter that it is to focus upon at one time. He can do this by tapping the bench that the &amp;quot;fire&amp;quot; is resting on, with his cane.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Kanuhkitawi&#039;&#039;&#039; of the Snipe Clan of the Senecas had been a &amp;quot;Great Warrior.&amp;quot; Once the League was formed, he and his &amp;quot;deputy&amp;quot; (in Skaniatariio&#039;s version, the translation is more accurately &amp;quot;body-guard&amp;quot;) Deyoninhokarawen of the Wolf Clan, also formerly a great warrior, became the Keepers of the Western Door.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 315–18.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It became their duty, when a group of people approached with a message, following the Great White Roots, to decide whether to grant them access to council (&amp;quot;on the main bench where is spread the Great White Mat&amp;quot;), or to put them to death (in &amp;quot;the place where the elm bark is spread out and shove them inside the house where bones will come to pile up&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Deskahe&#039;&#039;&#039; of the Older Bear Clan of the Cayugas. During the making of the law, it is said that he deliberately stood off to the side. His name comes from the time the Peacemaker asked him how many families were with him, and he replied: &amp;quot;More than eleven.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Tekarihoken&#039;&#039;&#039; identifies consensus among the Mohawks. His clan is the old snapping turtle.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;According to Teyawentathe Susan Hill, personal communication, 2010.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Tehatkodons&#039;&#039;&#039; (&amp;quot;He is two-sighted,&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;He looks both ways&amp;quot;) sits at Thadadaho&#039;s left hand. He carries a special admonition to consider both sides of any question, and to urge consideration of alternatives. He is a &amp;quot;special aid and counsellor to Thadadaho.&amp;quot; He is Beaver Clan.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hale (1883) 1989, 157. Modern holders of the title consider it their duty to think especially carefully about both sides of an issue: Dehatkodons (Irving Powless Jr.) and Dehatkodons (Arnold General).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Enneserarenh&#039;&#039;&#039; is the other &amp;quot;special aid and counsellor to Thadadaho.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Skanawati&#039;&#039;&#039;, also, must carefully consider both sides of any issue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Tehatkarine&#039;&#039;&#039; is a &amp;quot;watcher of the land.&amp;quot; In conversations on the Mohawk bench, it is his duty to consider the impact of decisions on the land and environment, and to remind his fellow chiefs of that effect.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== When a Chief Dies ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a chief dies, the family meets immediately to begin the funeral process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within ten days,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;“It was a journey of ten days from earth to heaven for the departed spirit. . . . For ten days after the death of a departed person, mourners meet nightly to lament the deceased. . . . The dirge or wail was performed by women. It was an ancient custom to make a fire on the grave each night for the same period. On the eleventh day they held a feast; the spirit of the departed having reached heaven, the place of rest, there was no further cause for mourning. With the feast it terminated.” Morgan (1871) 1997, 96.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; the chiefs come together to perform the ceremony known as the &amp;quot;Small Condolence,&amp;quot; at the house of the deceased chief (but in the absence of his body).&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Skaniatariio John Arthur Gibson text of this transcribed by J.N.B. Hewitt, in National Anthropological Archives (NAA), ms. 612 (21 pages).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The chiefs sit in the living room, these days, on two sets of chairs, facing each other. The speaker for the clear-minded side delivers the first twelve parts or words of the Condolence, which are carried across the room by the &amp;quot;runner&amp;quot; and delivered to his opposite number. Each string is then strung across a cane that is lying across two chairs beside the speaker, for those whose minds are cast down, the grieving ones. This cane is today&#039;s equivalent of the pole van den Bogaert saw in the council house at Onondaga in 1638, and that pole is a direct descendant of the horizontal stick on which Hiawatha was stringing the first wampum, in his efforts to condole himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The chiefs, as brothers to the deceased chief, are not only responsible for condoling his family: they have their own role to play in part of the funeral. Their encircling the grave during the burial recalls the Circle Wampum; their three shovels of earth into the grave recall the three breaths that the Creator blows into people to give them life.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After the body had been deposited in the grave the sachems and chiefs formed a circle around it for the purpose of filling it with earth. Each in turn, commencing with the senior in years, cast in three shovelfuls, a typical number in their religious system; of which the first had relation to the Great Spirit, the second to the Sun, and the third to Mother Earth. When the grave was filled the senior sachem, by a figure of speech, deposited the &amp;quot;horns&amp;quot; of the departed sachem, emblematical of his office, upon the top of the grave over his head, there to remain until his successor was installed.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Morgan (1871) 1997, 96.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the Small Condolence, the grieving people sometimes announce, and install for the time being, some people to fill the seats&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Colloquially, an uncondoled chief is called a “benchwarmer.” In council, he sits in the place of that chief, but his influence is reduced by his informal status. His family has placed him there until they can name a permanent replacement for the deceased chief. Some families decide to honour the deceased by holding his seat completely vacant for a year.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; of the one who has died and the cluster of people who are with him.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ten days following the death of any person are said to be the time when the person&#039;s spirit can remain on earth. The family is busy with many funeral duties, feasts, and songs, culminating in the Ten-Day Feast, in which all the mourners come together and the songs go all night long. One aspect of the thinking behind the funeral process is &amp;quot;letting go,&amp;quot; convincing the spirit of the dead person that his family does not cling to his memory so tightly or miss him so much that he should stay around and postpone his trip along the strawberry-lined path, the Milky Way to the Creator&#039;s world. For the ten days following the death of a royá:ner, council cannot be held.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Newhouse 1885, 22.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a relative of a title holder&#039;s family dies, in some communities, all political business is suspended for ten days. In some places, a Small Condolence&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The Small Condolence, which uses all the wampums other than the ones used to raise up a chief, takes place in the home, and is aimed at raising up again the minds of the immediate family. This ceremony is not mentioned in any of the versions of the Great Law.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; is held for the family. If the dead person held a function, the clan mother can announce the successor. This announcement—there is no succession ceremony—can be done at the Small Condolence, the Ten-Day Feast (at the end of the official mourning period), or at any Condolence for installing a chief.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no complete agreement on when things must happen: it is suggested that the clan mother should be ready within three days to name a successor, so that the announcement can be made at the Ten-Day Feast. However, the person so appointed must wait until the &amp;quot;other side of the fire&amp;quot; agrees to a time for a Condolence ceremony. The principle is that the family should always have a voice in council, though its permanent representative should be installed only after its minds have been cleared and raised up again:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When it has become vacated, his chiefly space, thereupon the deaconesses (yeya:kweniyo = “body be most important”), the ones from the clans and the families, they are the ones who will repossess it (&#039;&#039;grasp – hold&#039;&#039;), they will decide, choosing again a new one to receive the antlers, and this new one will replace him, the one who has now passed back (&#039;&#039;through again&#039;&#039;), this one they shall rename with the title name, which she shall again give to the new one, conferring antlers on him and seating him in the place that had become empty, for they shall always be occupied, the places where the chiefs are seated.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 423.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The order of a discussion about a successor to the dead title holder follows a clear progression, from the immediate family, clan, and nation to the brother nations and then the entire Confederacy: &amp;quot;Hence at every occasion of filling vacancies, the character and merits of all the officers in the series and of all candidates, were liable to be passed upon: first, in the discussion of the families interested; secondly, in the convocation of the clans to which they belong; thirdly, in the meeting of the four clans, which occupied respectively the two ends of the council house; fourthly, by the assembled council of the particular nation; and fifthly, (by the) council at the Longhouse of the Six Nations.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Wright 1859, 310.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The clan mother can unilaterally name a candidate: the discussion about whether this person should become the permanent representative for the family then takes place among the women.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;There are differences between versions of the law as to whether the clan mothers are to consult together or only work with their own families.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The discussion then moves to other members of the family and the nation, beyond the immediate family and the clan. Once the nation has agreed upon a candidate, it meets with the other nation or nations on its side of the fire: the Oneidas with the Cayugas; the Mohawks with the Senecas and Onondagas. In theory, the &amp;quot;other side of the fire&amp;quot; does not know who the candidate is until he is put forward in the Condolence itself.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;There have been cases in which a nation on one’s side of the fire refuses to put a name across—saying that it wants to spare its brothers the humiliation of rejection.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Literally, a sheet is hung in the council house, so that the people on one side of the fire do not see the candidate until he is formally announced and put forward and the sheet is pulled aside. At the time of the Condolence of a chief, the clan mother can replace the entire cluster of people around him—sub-chief and faithkeepers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There have been instances of very young men being raised up as rotiyanershon, and in those cases they also had mentors appointed to work with them, to help them. The following explanation of this process to Sir William Johnson in the 1750s also shows another phenomenon—that sometimes it was difficult to bring the nations together to install new Confederacy chiefs, so that the vacancies would accumulate, and then a group would be filled at one time. The original intention of the Kayanerenkó:wa was to have an empty seat filled at once, so that the family would not lose its voice in council, and so that the people&#039;s minds would not be burdened with a sense of absence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[Figure 13: The Women&#039;s Nominating Belt. Symbol of the authority of the women to select the rotiyanershon. From &#039;&#039;Wampum Belts of the Iroquois&#039;&#039;, by Tehanetorens Ray Fadden. Used with permission of Six Nations Indian Museum, Onchiota, New York.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Raising up very young men as rotiyanershon suggests another problem, perhaps specific to Onondaga at the time, but one that has persisted: some families may have dwindled to the point where they had very few candidates:&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In 1750, about half the Onondagas were living at Oswegatchie, on the St. Lawrence River. It would seem that most of the Deer and Snipe clan people had moved there (and from there, by 1807, to Akwesasne). That would leave some families at Onondaga with few candidates for the vacant seats.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then the Speaker Teyawarunte Spoke as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brother before the General Meeting takes place we have Judged it proper to desire this Meeting with you in order to present to You those Young Men whom we appointed Sachims to assist us in our Councils as our Sachims are now too few to manage Matters properly, our place being ye proper Council fire for all the surrounding nations our Allies &amp;amp; Dependents them presented to Sir William Seven Young Men, whose names are as follows, viz&#039;t:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Snipe: Amadagia, Bunt&#039;s Son&lt;br /&gt;
Beaver: Onessarakung&lt;br /&gt;
Eel: Sagagare&lt;br /&gt;
Eel: Oyumanis&lt;br /&gt;
Deer: Wahagheirong&lt;br /&gt;
Wolf: Ononwisaghti&lt;br /&gt;
Turtle: Owigaiat&lt;br /&gt;
Turtle: Tawanasaroonda&lt;br /&gt;
Turtle: Tayiatquari&lt;br /&gt;
Bear: Wathatodarho&lt;br /&gt;
Turtle: Tawaskughta&lt;br /&gt;
Turtle: Tughhaghsi&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deiaquande takes ye care of one of ye new made Sachims, Gingia-quasunt, &amp;amp; Kaghniagarodo also assist in ye same. Oroondisaghti an Old Man takes care of another of ye Young Sachims—Saristageghte, &amp;amp; Geghtahare two old Men take care of two of the Young Sachims, Inayenqueraghto takes charge of another of the Young Sachims—Brother having now finished so far, we have only to wish that these new Sachims now appointed may act agreable to the Rules laid down to us by our Ancestors, &amp;amp; follow what is good &amp;amp; agreable to our Brethren the English which would give us ye utmost pleasure. Brother as You are sensible of the trouble &amp;amp; great hardships We the few Sachims now present, have had since ye trouble began, we hope you will consider it in a proper light.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;SWJP 11:709. While the Haudenosaunee are not asking Johnson for his consent to the putting up of these young men, they are presenting them across the council fire in a way that resembles some aspects of the Condolence ceremony.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Twelve young men are named, with seven older men &amp;quot;taking care&amp;quot; of them. What would &amp;quot;taking care&amp;quot; mean? That they were mentors and advisers? Or that they were more like regents, veterans from families who were not eligible to become sachems themselves, but who could wield power through their advisory positions? When would the young men emerge from the tutelage? Whether there were seven or twelve of these young sachems, the Onondagas had probably effectively doubled the size of their council (the law provides for fourteen Onondaga chiefs).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Condolence ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ceremony of Condolence to console a grieving family and raise up a new chief brings all the traditional Haudenosaunee together, even today. The ceremony is held at the community of the bereaved, so that all the downcast people can attend, and be heartened by the arrival of their clear-minded brothers and sisters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Re-enacting the trip from Oneida to Onondaga undertaken by the Peacemaker and all the chiefs, to confront and heal Thadadaho, the condolers walk in a long line, generally two by two, led by a man known as the Great Hanging Tobacco Pouch (as the warriors were sometimes referred to as &amp;quot;Tobacco Pouches&amp;quot;), who also leads the singing. They sing the same song that the Peacemaker taught the people—&amp;quot;Along the Way&amp;quot;—to announce themselves. Today, the journey takes less than half an hour for the hundreds of visitors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s Condolence procession re-enacts how the warriors would escort the chiefs from village to village, through the dangerous forest. In those days, the peace was internal, between the nations: it was not protection from external enemies. The escort stops at the woods&#039; edge: the grieving people take over responsibility for their guests&#039; safety once the condolers reach the village clearing. At the woods&#039; edge, by the thorny brush, they welcome them. There is a real role for the warriors in the Condolence and therefore in the maintenance and renewal of the League. In historical reality, it is based in true need for protection and safety. Today&#039;s song leaders and escorts recall a pragmatic need for the warriors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s Condolence ceremony fulfills a triple purpose of recall. First, it recalls the Peacemaker&#039;s raising up of Hiawatha&#039;s grieving mind—the use of the wampum strings re-enacts that first Condolence. Second, it evokes the transformation of Thadadaho—the use of the Six Songs does that. Third, it calls to mind the whole process of formation of the Great Peace, and the unity of the leaders—the &amp;quot;roll call&amp;quot; of the chiefs does that. Though the ceremony is seen by outsiders as the way to raise up and confirm new chiefs, and by insiders as that and as a means of expressing respect and consolation, it is also both a renewal of the Confederacy and a reminder to the people of the events that formed it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Condolence ceremony takes most of a day. People come from every community of the Confederacy to take part, to confirm and welcome the new leaders. The financial responsibility of the Condolence falls upon the family putting up the new chief, and it is not light. The visitors must not only be fed but feasted. Pipes must be made for all the chiefs. Sometimes, when there is more than one vacancy to be filled in a nation, two or more families will share the cost, and often the nation will contribute.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unlike other rotiyanershon, Thadadaho is chosen not by a clan mother but by the Onondaga chiefs, and his confirmation comes not from the Younger Brothers but rather from all the chiefs of the Six Nations together.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Wall 2001, 5. More recently, there has been insistence that Thadadaho must be chosen from the Eel Clan lineage.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Removing a Chief ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The primary authority to remove a chief has been said to rest with his clan, through his clan mother, if the chief is straying from his duties. That is, the people whom he represents and who selected him first ought to be the people with the first right to remove him. The process involves three formal warnings, each more stiff than its predecessor. The first comes from the clan mother&#039;s assistant or faithkeeper. The second comes from the clan mother herself. The third comes from the &amp;quot;Great Warrior,&amp;quot; the young man without a title who assists the clan mother, or the chief&#039;s sub-chief, and it includes the removal of the chief—by removing his &amp;quot;horns.&amp;quot; Sometimes the person carrying out this final task is called &amp;quot;The Man Without Pity.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;But if any should refuse to come back by three time, they should take them off.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Minutes of Council of the Six Nations at Cattaraugus, December 1, 1862 (Parker 1916, 145).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Several parts of the Great Law involve three warnings or statements. They are, in a way, a means of remembering that the Creator blew three times into the mouth of the first man, to give him life.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Sakokwenionkwas Tom Porter told me this. For the same reason, at the end of a sacred song, one calls out three times—“yo-ho-oooh.” The three can also signify the Sun, the Earth, and the Great Spirit.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Skaniatariio John Arthur Gibson describes how a chasm in the earth yawns open for the family if their chief disregards the second warning:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then again, there is another matter: &amp;quot;You, my uncle and your two nepotic relatives should continue to listen to one another for, actually, it is a serious matter if it happens thus, that you leave your path from where it ought to lead you, you chief. If this happens, she will look at you, your niece, for, actually, it is a fact that he has given her wisdom. This one, you will notice with surprise, standing in front of you, she will speak up, saying, &#039;It is an amazing matter, my uncle, you who are chief, now you are straying from your path and you are not consulting with your colleagues; over there the people are left standing while you are alone, and now you are straying from your path; so I will ask you to return to your path, my uncle, you who are chief,&#039;&amp;quot; and that is how she will do it, she will warn you and it is a dreadful thing to disregard her warning.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And this man, your nephew, he will see you, you who are chief, willingly working towards the extinction of the people. Thereupon you will notice with surprise that he is standing there in front of you; then he will speak up, saying, &amp;quot;My uncle, you who are chief, it is an amazing thing that you are working towards the extinction of the entire group, for you are the one who is alone, you are not consulting them or working together with them for the Great Law. Moreover, I ask you to return to your path, for it is your responsibility towards your colleagues.&amp;quot; Thereupon he will turn back, for it is a dreadful thing if he once more disregards the warning, for then it will be there, over the earth&#039;s edge, that all of the people will come to hang their feet. As to that, no one is able to lift them up when it happens in this way, except just this one is able to lift them up, our Father, our Creator, our Ruler.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moreover, when they see you—your nephew and niece—doing the same thing despite both of them having warned you to your face, you who are chief, they trying to cause you to return to your path, and you not having obeyed, thereupon they will summon the Great Warrior; they will all meet and you will notice them with surprise, standing up in front of you, he speaking up, the Great Warrior, saying, &amp;quot;it is amazing, my uncle, you who are chief, indeed you have not accepted their warning which was spoken by both the woman and the man, indeed, you have not accepted it. So now I am removing your antlers and hand them back to her, the deaconess of the title name. Moreover, you are free now and cannot wear antlers again; now you are an ordinary person. Now, moreover, you can go away, wherever you wish to go. Thereupon the people, the number of your followers, now they will notice that you no longer are wearing your antlers, and then they will let go of you.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 672–78. “Let go of you,” in this context, can also mean “throw you away, cast you off.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The version published by Tahawannontye Duncan C. Scott provides for three warnings as well, but the order is different: first the clan mother, then a warrior of the chief&#039;s clan, then the Great Warrior:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a Lord is guilty of unwarrantably opposing the object of the decisions of the Council and in that way showing disrespect for his brother Lords by urging that his own erroneous will in these matters be carried out, he shall be approached and admonished by the Chief Matron of his family and Clan to desist from such evil practices and urged to come back and act in harmony with his brother Lords.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the Lord refuses to comply with the request of the Chief Matron of his family and Clan and still persists in his evil practices of unwarrantably opposing his brother Lords, then a Warrior of his family and clan will also approach him and admonish him to desist from pursuing his evil course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the Lord still refuses to listen and obey, then the Chief Matron and Warrior shall go together to the Chief Warrior and they inform him that they have admonished their Lord and he refused to obey. Then the Chief Warrior will arise and go there to the Lord and will say to him: Your nephew and niece have admonished you to desist from your evil course, and you have refused to obey. Then the Chief Warrior will say, I will now admonish you for the last time and if you continue to resist to accede to and obey this request, then your duties as Lord of our family and Clan will cease, and I shall take the deer&#039;s horns from off your head, and with a broad-edged stone axe I shall cut the tree down, (meaning that he shall be deposed from his position as Lord or Chief of the Confederacy). Then the Chief Warrior shall hand back the deer&#039;s horns (the emblem of power) of the deposed Lord to the Chief Matron of his family or Clan.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Chiefs) 1916, 106–7.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Seth Newhouse&#039;s version provides a much shorter, though consistent, description of the removal of a chief:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Article XXX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We now finished all crowned ourselves with deer horns on our heads. We do now give this Honourable Noble and Sacred Titles and the Soil, to our Mothers the Females. They shall be the Proprietors. And if they see their Lords are gone out of the right course, and are not counciling for the interests of the people in general, then the females the relatives of the erroneous or erroneousness Lord shall come, before their Council to warn him, to return again and council for the interest of the people in general. Three times. If he disregard their warnings on the third time. They will discharge him. They will then notify the rest of the Lords of their own Nation, will sanction it. The Females then will select another one, out of the number of their sons, to fill the place of the expelled Lord, and will notify the rest of the Lords of their select to be their future Lord, and their Lords will only sanction it.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Newhouse 1885, 103.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system of repeated and escalating warnings is consistent with the basic assumption in the law that people are capable of reform—that they will take the opportunity offered to them to return to the good path. Just as the Cannibal and Thadadaho were brought back to the good mind, so an errant chief, with these warnings, is given the chance to return to his proper ways.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The three attempts made by the Peacemaker to bring Thadadaho to accept the Good Message may be a precursor of the three warnings—or opportunities—offered to a chief by his family.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee also offer other nations three formal opportunities to come within the Great Peace. Refusal for a third time can be a signal for war. In 1753, the Haudenosaunee gave the French three warnings to leave the Ohio country because, as Scarooyady explained, &amp;quot;the great Being who lives above, has ordered us to send Three Messages of Peace before we make War, and as the Half King had before this time delivered the third and last Message, we had nothing now to do but to strike the French.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Beauchamp 1905, 299.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In certain circumstances, a chief can be removed immediately by the other chiefs—for murder, rape, or theft: Gibson&#039;s 1912 version states:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moreover, this is what I now decree concerning you chiefs: whoever of you irresponsibly sins by killing a person—if this is how he performs his tasks, the chief—then his duties will get revoked, for one will remove his antlers without adjudication;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In cases of murder by a chief, it is the council that takes jurisdiction. Hale (1883) 1989, 69.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; the deaconess will take back the title, for it is in her power to appoint a new man—replacing the offender by bestowing the antlers on the new man—who will sit in the place of the one she removed, the former chief; and now that it is finished, as to the former chief, it is the warriors that he rejoins. It is impossible for this same person ever to carry out chiefly duties again, and it will happen in the same way if a chief forces women; it will happen in the same way in that without adjudication they will at once remove him and take his antlers from him, returning to the deaconess the title and at once she will appoint another, a new man, bestowing antlers on him, and this one will sit where he used to be seated, the one whose antlers they took back; he rejoins the warriors, and then it can never happen again, his holding a chiefly status. And if a chief steals something, then the chiefs will deliberate with care concerning him, proving whatever is the truth, and if he was responsible, then, at the council of chiefs, they will judge his case, the chief&#039;s, they will find he is responsible.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;While the English translation was “finding him guilty,” the more literal translation is more accurate: there is no concept of “guilty” in Haudenosaunee law—either a person is responsible for an act or he is not. When I was a courtworker in 1971, one of my most difficult tasks was to convince an accused person that pleading guilty or not guilty was an issue of the prosecution’s ability to prove the case, not of “did I do it.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Thereupon they will reach a decision to take his antlers from him, and these they will hand back to the deaconess with the title. Thereupon they will let him go again, the title will become vacated, and he will become a warrior again, it being impossible for him to assume chiefly duties again. Thereupon the matron will appoint another one, a new person, whom she will bestow antlers upon, and this is who will become chief. Thereupon he will sit in the seat, replacing the former chief.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 450–55.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Chiefs&#039; Version states:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a lord is found guilty of wilful murder, he shall be deposed without the warning (as shall be provided for later on) by the lords of the confederacy, and his horns (emblem of power) shall be handed back to the chief matron of his family and clan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a lord is guilty of rape, he shall be deposed without the usual warning by the lords of the confederacy, and his horns (the emblem of power) shall be handed back to the chief matron of his family and clan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a lord is found guilty of theft, he shall be deposed without the usual warning by the lords of the confederacy, and his horns (the emblem of power) shall be handed back to the chief matron of his family and clan.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Chiefs) 1916, 106. Jurisdiction over these three crimes is said to have been given by treaty to the British (see Noon 1949), but the only primary documentary evidence of this is the treaty in July 1764, in which the Geneseo Senecas agreed to hand over those guilty of robbery or murder “where the victims are white.” Since the version of the law that mentions these crimes as a reason for removal is a Grand River version, it is possible that the thinking was that being placed under the jurisdiction of a Crown court would amount to “stepping outside the circle.” It is equally possible, though, that these crimes were originally viewed as unthinkable and unacceptable conduct for a Confederacy Chief.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Newhouse, in his 1885 version, goes further: not only does the chief lose his title; so, too, does his family: it &amp;quot;forever forfeits the proprietorship of the title to the said Lordship to the other Lords of the Nation who shall transfer the proprietorship of the title of the aforesaid Lordship to a sister ahwatchira.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Newhouse 1885, 65.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Morgan asserts that &amp;quot;the council of the tribe also had the power to depose both sachems and chiefs without waiting for the action of a gens, and even against its wishes.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Morgan 1877, 74.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Immediate removal of an offender prevents his continued presence from causing hard feelings or disunity. While the three warnings from a family may take days or weeks, a removal by the council—which would require a degree of unanimity—is, in effect, the removal of a kind of &amp;quot;crawling thing.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A removed chief is said to have been &amp;quot;dehorned.&amp;quot; His wampum &amp;quot;horns&amp;quot; are taken away from him, to be placed with his successor. Generally, a dehorned chief leaves the community, in some disgrace. His ability to hold any office is finished. His reputation is shattered:&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;There have been cases during the past twenty years when a chief who has been dehorned has maintained that the action was unfair or invalid, and has continued to come to council. This has caused consternation, since the good-mindedness of the council is disrupted, but the chiefs are reluctant to physically eject the man.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; &amp;quot;it shall be that when a lord is deposed and the deer&#039;s horns . . . are taken from him, he shall no longer be allowed to sit in council or even hold an office again.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Chiefs) 1916, 107.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Elaborate as the process for removing chiefs has been, there is no agreed-upon procedure for removing a clan mother. There have been instances where individual chiefs have claimed to remove clan mothers, and others in which the chiefs of a nation have removed clan mothers. In the case of a deep disagreement between a chief and clan mother, the family generally seeks to reconcile them, though it has happened that the clash can split the family itself. Once again, detailed provision in the law for the removal of a chief, and a lack of provision with respect to clan mothers, suggests that the position of royá:ner was created by the Kayanerenkó:wa, which could therefore also create the processes for appointment and removal, while the position of clan mother antedated the making of the law, so that the law left already known processes unchanged (and unexplained).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In modern times, chiefs have been dehorned for various infractions. These have generally involved doing things without the knowledge or sanction of the council, failure to perform obligations or attend council, submission to foreign governments, failure to account financially, disruption of council, and the commission of criminal offences.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Right of Revolution ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alone among the versions of the Kayanerenkó:wa, Seth Newhouse&#039;s later tracts provide that the people have the right to remove—and kill—the chiefs as a body in certain circumstances. These versions appeared after the chiefs refused to support Newhouse&#039;s complaint against the doctor he alleged had contributed to his daughter&#039;s death, so they may reflect his growing animosity towards the council.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This string of wampum vests the people with the right to correct their erring Lords. In case a part or all the Lords pursue a course not vouched for by the people and heed not the third warning of their women relatives, then the matter shall be taken to the General Council of the women of the Five Nations. If the Lords notified and warned three times fail to heed, then the case falls into the hands of the men of the Five Nations. The War Chiefs shall then, by right of such power and authority, enter the open council to warn the Lord or Lords to return from their wrong course. If the Lords heed the warning they will say: &amp;quot;we will reply tomorrow.&amp;quot; If then an answer is returned in favour of justice and in accord with this Great Law, then the Lords shall individually pledge themselves again by again furnishing the necessary shells for the pledge. Then shall the War Chief or Chiefs exhort the Lords urging them to be just and true.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Should it happen that the Lords refuse to heed the third warning, then two courses are open: either the men may decide in their council to depose the Lord or Lords or to club them to death with war clubs. Should they in their council decide to take the first course the War Chief shall address the Lord or Lords, saying: &amp;quot;Since you the Lords of the Five Nations have refused to return to the procedure of the Constitution, we now declare your seats vacant; we take off your horns, the token of your Lordship, and others shall be chosen and installed in your seats, therefore vacate your seats.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Should the men in their council&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;These references in Newhouse’s versions to a “men’s council” have given rise to new bodies, separate from the Council of Chiefs, at Oneida, New York, and more recently at the Grand River. They are not recognized by the Haudenosaunee as aspects of government.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; adopt the second course, the War Chief shall order his men to enter the council, to take positions beside the Lords, sitting between them wherever possible. When this is accomplished the War Chief holding in his outstretched hand a bunch of black wampum strings shall say to the erring Lords: &amp;quot;so now, Lords of the Five United Nations, harken to these last words from your men. You have not heeded the warnings of the women relatives, you have not heeded the warnings of the General Council of women, and you have not heeded the warnings of the men of the nations, all urging you to return to the right course of action. Since you are determined to resist and to withhold justice from your people there is only one course for us to adopt.&amp;quot; At this point the War Chief shall let drop the bunch of black wampum and the men shall spring to their feet and club the erring Lords to death. Any erring Lord may submit before the War Chief lets fall the black wampum. Then his execution is withheld.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The black wampum here used symbolizes that the power to execute is buried but that it may be raised up again by the men. It is buried but when the occasion arises they may pull it up and derive their power and authority to act as here described.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Newhouse and Cusick) 1916, 46–47; Newhouse 1885, 56.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Karonhjakte Louis Hall of Kahnawake decided that this right of the &amp;quot;warriors&amp;quot; to execute the Confederacy chiefs formed the basis of a separate source of power.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In 1762, Kindarunty, a Seneca chief, was assassinated by the warriors for having been “bullying.” See SWJP 3:924, Thomas McKee to Johnson, November 2, 1762.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; He advocated the summary execution of the present generation of chiefs in &#039;&#039;The Warrior Manifesto&#039;&#039;, a proposal for the revitalization of the Confederacy.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hall 1983.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;Manifesto&#039;&#039; became a reference manual for the &amp;quot;Warrior&amp;quot; movement in Kahnawake and Akwesasne in 1990. Some people came to see the work as a companion to the Kayanerenkó:wa, a guide to its interpretation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== War and Peace ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;When warriors are leaders, then you will have war. We must raise leaders of peace.&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Thadadaho Leon Shenandoah to the General Assembly of the United Nations, October 25, 1985.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The purpose of the Great Law of Peace was to stop cycles of bloodshed and to establish peace. The Peacemaker understood that a house at peace within itself would still be of troubled mind if there were continued bloodshed around it. Thus, the Great White Roots of the Tree of Peace were intended to spread the message of peace to the four corners of the world, creating what has been called &amp;quot;a landscape of peace.&amp;quot; As Wallace put it:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The minimum purpose of the League was to maintain unity, strength and good will among the Five Nations, so as to make them invulnerable to attack from without and to division from within. The native philosophers who rationalized the League in later years conceived also a maximum purpose: the conversion of all mankind, so that peace and happiness should be the lot of the peoples of the whole earth, and all nations should abide by the same law and be members of the same confederacy. &amp;quot;The white roots of the Great Tree of Peace shall continue to grow,&amp;quot; the founder allegedly announced, &amp;quot;advancing the Good Mind and Righteousness and Peace, moving into territories of peoples scattered far through the forest. And when a nation, guided by the Great White Roots, shall approach the Tree, you shall welcome her here, and take her by the arm and seat her in the place of council. She will add a brace or leaning pole to the longhouse and will thus strengthen the edifice of Reason and Peace.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Wallace 1969, 43.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are some who maintain that the Great Law established internal peace within the Confederacy to enable the member nations to better defend themselves against their enemies—to wage war more effectively. Internal peace encouraged more external warfare. Indeed, Cayenderongue Cadwallader Colden stated that mutual self-defence was the main reason for the creation of the League: some Algonquins (Adirondacks&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Atíron:taks, “he eats bark,” is a porcupine, but also possibly a reference to Algonquin birch-bark-biting.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;) had killed some of the Five Nations out of jealousy over hunting: &amp;quot;(The Five Nations) conceiv&#039;d a vast Indignation against the Adirondacks, who being advised of the secret movements of the Five Nations, Resolv&#039;d to oblige them to submit to their Law, by force of Arms. The Five Nations apprehending their Power, retired to the Southward of Cadarackui Lake, where they now live, and defended themselves at first but faintly against the Vigorous Attacks of the Adirondacks. But afterwards becoming more expert, and more used to War, they not only made a brave Defence, but likewise made themselves masters of the great Lakes, and chased the Shawanons from thence.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Colden (1727) 1973, 6.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Without citing any authority for his statements, Allen Trelease goes beyond defence to an assertion that war was &amp;quot;a basic principle of the league&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;In addition to self-defence the original motivation for forming the league may have included a sincere aspiration for universal peace. This ideal was, however, grounded in a tribal superiority complex. The Iroquois were convinced that they constituted a master race, and if universal peace were to be achieved, it must be done within their fold. As time passed, the eventual aim became less apparent than the actual process of reducing the gentiles to submission. One of the basic principles of the league was that its members were at war with all tribes not positively allied to it.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Trelease, 1960, 21.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In contrast, others suggest that the coming of the Great Peace was the end of all warfare, and that from the time it was established there were to be no more &amp;quot;warriors.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;One consistent exponent of this view in modern times was Huron Miller, an Onondaga sub-chief of the Grand River Territory and a frequent speaker in Karihwí:iyo events.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Skanawati John Buck asserted: &amp;quot;And when this matter will extend itself in all directions, there may be some who will not be willing to receive it, but we shall not be reprehensible, since we have offered it to them—to the Nations of Natural Men living alongside any Great White Root of the Great Law. We have likewise laid our heads upon these Roots for mutual protection.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hewitt 1892b, 142.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Newhouse proposed a coercive view of the expansion of the law: a foreign nation was to be made an offer it could not refuse (or rather, the customary three offers):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A treaty was once impending between the Mohawks and one of the western nations, the Mohawks could not make them come to any moderate terms; and disliked the threats made against them, they sent at last this Laconic message: that if the western Nation would not enter into the Alliance, it was not their fault; they had conquered many enemies and driven them from their possessions &amp;amp; that if they would come they would fight them also.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;NYSL MSS 13350, in Johnston 1964, 29.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . . when warriors are ready to go on the warpath against an opposing obstinate nation that has refused to accept the Great Peace . . . one of the five War Chiefs shall be chosen by the Warriors of the Nation to lead the aforesaid war party on the war path and when that one is chosen, it shall be his duty and privilege to come forward and address a few words to the then ready and assembled Warriors and the whole tenor of his allocution to the warriors shall be to impress upon them the need and necessity of good behavior and strict obedience to all the commands of the war chiefs, enthusiastically exhorting them not to be cowards but to be brave and courageous.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Newhouse 1885, 60.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Newhouse version does not fully reflect history. When the Haudenosaunee made war on other nations, they often did so for reasons other than that those nations had failed to agree to join the Great Peace. The reasons may have been economic, political, or social, and sometimes involved a struggle over territory, but they were complex and not based in the Great Law. Most frequently, other nations joined the Great Peace through persuasion, logic, diplomacy, and protection. The written record shows that the chiefs were constantly striving for peace, whatever the warriors did.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Creation story, the right-handed twin defeats his brother, but he does not kill him. He banishes him, but even that is a limited banishment, for he keeps him close by, because of his affection for him. The twins are not Good and Evil, but they are two sides of creation. Haudenosaunee government and law is full of things that have two sides: men and women, the clearing and the forest, the two sides of the council. Similarly, war and peace are two different states, neither of which will go away completely. Whether we need war or not, it will always be with us, always close by. That is why the law provides for war chiefs. Another two-sided phenomenon found its place in the law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We should not presume that Haudenosaunee warfare, after the coming of the law, was the same as European warfare during that time. Champlain intervened in an arranged, mostly ritualized skirmish between his Algonquin, Wendat, and Innu allies and a Mohawk armed force. He killed people with his overloaded arquebus: before that, there had been no casualties, only teasing and insults, and everyone was preparing to go home. Joao Brandão noted, in &#039;&#039;Your Fyre Shall Burn No More,&#039;&#039; that during the ninety years of the most intense warfare between the Haudenosaunee and the French, more Frenchmen were taken for adoption than were killed.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Brandão 1997, 53. Brandão notes that between 1600 and 1701 the Haudenosaunee captured “well over 6,000 people,” and that 55 percent of their raids on New France resulted in captives being taken.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The purposes, weapons, tactics, and strategy of Haudenosaunee warfare were not the same as those of their European neighbours. The warriors, standing behind the rotiyanershon in councils with other nations, sent a powerful, visual, unspoken message that there was an unpleasant alternative to the peaceful proposals coming from the Haudenosaunee.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Historical reality is a matter of shades of grey, not black and white. The Great Law did bring internal peace to the five warring nations. The result was that they were better able to defend themselves against their enemies. From the early 1600s to the late 1700s, the Haudenosaunee were engaged in constant warfare, against both European and Indigenous enemies. The warriors were real. The Haudenosaunee did absorb other nations, both by adopting refugees from other wars and by conquest. Without the warriors, the Haudenosaunee would surely have been destroyed. Yet the existence of war and warriors is not proof that a basic principle of the League was that its members were at war with everyone but their allies. That would be irrational and suicidal. Instead, as the conduct of the Haudenosaunee as recorded in their documentary history shows, the Confederacy was intent on spreading the Great Peace to all nations, through rational persuasion rather than war. The basic principle of the League was that nations who were not yet within the peace should be invited to join, so that the Great White Roots should spread. The League would defend itself vigorously against enemies but reasoned that its interests, the interests of the coming generations, were best served in a landscape of peace: &amp;quot;They employ all their industry to engage the other nations to give themselves to (the Iroquois); they send them presents and the most able people of their nation to speak to them, and to let them know that if they do not give themselves to the Iroquois, they cannot avoid being destroyed . . . but on the other hand, if they want to give themselves up and disperse themselves among the longhouses, they will become masters of other men.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Randot 1904, 184.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The spreading of the Great White Roots gave other nations a number of options: they could seek to come within the Longhouse, becoming Haudenosaunee. They could choose to remain outside the Longhouse while grasping and adopting the principles of the Great Peace. In those cases, it would be said that they were supporting the Longhouse from the outside, as poles would be used to prop up a longhouse that had become unsteady with age.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[Figure 14: This is a pledge of alliance from a nation promising to support the Haudenosaunee from the outside: diagonal lines symbolize the poles set up as &amp;quot;props&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;braces&amp;quot; to the longhouse. Photograph by author, September 2018.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Weakness of the Council ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A system of government that depended upon unanimity, one-mindedness, was necessarily not agile. It was slow to react to threats and was often split into factions. The rotiyanershon led by example, by persuasion, and not by force or compulsion. All these factors made for a relatively weak Grand Council. Hurley, however, places this in a larger context:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Accepting the imperfection of such authority is, however, different from denying it altogether. If limited, the jurisdiction of the general Council of the Confederacy was nonetheless real. This fact was particularly apparent in its control over the accession to office of national sachems and chiefs. Further, the very raison d&#039;etre of the Iroquois Confederacy, the balanced distribution of power between the component nations and the General Council, dictated constraints upon the centralizing authority of the latter. Again, the absence of monopoly control over political power by the General Council does not equate with an absence of government in Iroquois society. Those jurisdictions not exercised by the General Council fell to other designated entities, of which the nation and clan councils were the most important.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hurley 1985, 47.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Part of the problem with seventeenth- and eighteenth-century descriptions of the relative weakness of Haudenosaunee central government originates from the experience of the European observers themselves—since they came from societies in which executive authority was powerful and centralized, they would consider anything looser to be excessively weak. Another problem with the descriptions is the fact that they were written by outsiders, not participants, in the society. Outsiders would not often see the exercise of authority by the women. Nor would they see (or understand, if they did see) the medicine societies healing the people and binding them together. Yet the observation that where the Grand Council did not govern, other entities picked up the torch, is essentially true:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The sachems&#039; job was to prevent &amp;quot;a disuniting of their minds.&amp;quot; In a nutshell that was what the Great Peace was all about, for to Indians of seventeenth- and eighteenth-century eastern North America, &amp;quot;peace&amp;quot; was primarily a matter of the mind. Headmen could not force anyone to forgo mourning-war raids; they could only advise, persuade, cajole and invoke the obligations of kinship. . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A League sachem, a man entrusted with preserving the Great Peace, had to be of a special breed. The chiefly virtues most prized in Iroquois folklore are those associated with peace and harmony: imperturbability, patience, good will, selflessness. &amp;quot;The thickness of their skin shall be seven spans—which is to say that they will be proof against anger, offensive actions and criticism,&amp;quot; Deganawidah decreed of the League sachems. . . . A character of such restraint—even passivity—is almost by definition incapable of the kind of strong and innovative leadership that the Five Nations needed to survive the ordeals of the European invasion. Moreover, had a League sachem exercised such leadership and thus necessarily provoked political opposition, he would have ceased to be a peacemaker. . . . If the League sachems were to fulfil their traditional duties, they must remain aloof from everyday politics and diplomacy.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Richter 1987, 19.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries, the names that appear in documents as speakers and leaders of the Haudenosaunee are mostly not &amp;quot;League sachem&amp;quot; titles. This led ethnohistorians like Richter, Fenton, and Jennings to conclude that there were actually two political entities, overlapping and parallel: the League and the Confederacy. The League&#039;s function was largely ceremonial, and consisted of maintaining the internal peace and the ceremonies, while the Confederacy was an active, aggressive, agile political body, whose business was conducted by chiefs who were not sachems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Horatio Hale, working with John Smoke Johnson in the 1880s, provides a simple alternative explanation. In council, the chiefs did not address or refer to one another using their titles. They used their proper names, usually their Haudenosaunee names, but sometimes their English names. The title would have been the name of the person who first bore it, but not the name of successors—only their title. Rarely did the chiefs use their titles, though they were well known. In historic documents, some titles do appear, especially the Mohawk Turtle Clan title Tekarihoken and the Onondaga Turtle Clan title Skanawati. But the use by the chiefs of their proper names to sign documents is not evidence—as Fenton suggests it is—that the chiefs were not involved.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hale’s correspondence on the subject is to William C. Bryant, and is in the Bryant Papers (B00-13) in the Buffalo Historical Society.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
My own conclusion, viewing the past through the lens of a Haudenosaunee present, is that things were more complex than this (as Richter admits, it is hard to ascertain exactly what was happening from the European records: &amp;quot;Europeans &#039;&#039;were&#039;&#039; dense, and Indians &#039;&#039;were&#039;&#039; secretive&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Richter 1987, 17.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;). Rather than two separate political entities, I suggest that the Haudenosaunee were probably less united than they wanted to be during this period of cultural, microbial, military, and political battering—but that institutions developed like &amp;quot;props&amp;quot; for the Longhouse; people came forward to provide necessary leadership; and the rotiyanershon were never out of the picture, but retained influence in ways that kept them at the core of the people&#039;s stability. If treaty councils record only a few names of &amp;quot;sachems,&amp;quot; that may be partly because the people present were using their personal names rather than their titles, and it must also be recalled that the councils were held with delegates, and that the rotiyanershon had probably directed the delegates&#039; words and strategies—generally in the form of the wampum strings and belts carried to the council by the speakers. The question is not whether the people at the council were rotiyanershon but whether they were legitimate representatives of the Haudenosaunee. There was also a flux between chiefs and sachems. Someone appearing in the records as a village chief one year might be condoled as a Confederacy chief three years later. Thus, Theyanoguin was also known as Henry Peters, &amp;quot;King Hendrick,&amp;quot; and by his Mohawk Turtle Clan title, Tekarihoken. The name he appears under in colonial records may not be his title; and the same can be said of the other forty-nine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There &#039;&#039;were&#039;&#039; Haudenosaunee rotiyanershon at all times, and they had respect and authority and influence. There &#039;&#039;were&#039;&#039; other chiefs, local chiefs, and war chiefs, and they, too, wielded authority. When the Confederacy worked, it worked because all these people—and the clan mothers and the faithkeepers and others whose functions have faded over time—fulfilled their duties and did the best they could for the survival of the people. The Grand Council never was a European-style government, especially not in the age of absolute monarchies. But neither was it a government that failed the people through weakness or niceness.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The need for formal Condolences, and for the coming together of the nations to raise up the rotiyanershon, had created a cumbersome system that worked well in times of peace but often led to vacancies—empty seats in council—in more difficult times. Thus, when the Senecas in 1764 explained that &amp;quot;we have few or no old Sachims qualified to transact business of this importance,&amp;quot; they were mentioning an extreme situation in what has been an ongoing problem.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The Catholic Church faces the same problem, in a way: choosing an elderly Pope ensures that the nominee is experienced, proven, and wise—but also that he will not last very long, and the Church will soon have to go through another process of selection.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During the latter part of the seventeenth century, according to a strong Seneca oral tradition, the Mohawks and Oneidas, at the Eastern Door of the Confederacy, were forced to spend much of their time and energy fighting the French. As a result, the western nations of the Confederacy worked together to grow the crops needed to supplement whatever the Mohawks and Oneidas could grow. This required a complex logistical effort—the transportation of thousands of pounds of food over a distance of more than 500 kilometres, passing through the territories of several nations. It is impossible to believe that fifty mostly elderly men could have co-ordinated this effort. It is quite possible that the &amp;quot;mutual aid societies&amp;quot; had the complexity and concentration to pull this off—and these societies would have been almost invisible to European observers (as indeed they remain today).&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The theory and the oral tradition were kept by Sotsisowah John Mohawk.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dealing with the &amp;quot;Warriors&amp;quot; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One of the problems associated with the issue of &amp;quot;warriors&amp;quot; is the word itself. The word does not exist in the Kayanerenkó:wa. Instead, the word sometimes translated as &amp;quot;warriors,&amp;quot; rotiskenrakéhte, is more properly translated as &amp;quot;they are upholding the House.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Other translations: “they are carrying the mat”; “they are carrying the bones of the ancestors”; “they are holding up the house”; “they are holding up the peace”; “they carry ochre”; or that it contains a reference to the Sun, the Older Brother—the Great Warrior (so that the old war dance, now done at Midwinter, is a request to the Sun for help in war).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; That is, they are the workers, the ones who implement the decisions of the chiefs, the rotiyanershon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The relationship between the chiefs and the &amp;quot;warriors&amp;quot; was often confusing to the Europeans:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Even in greatly agitated times, Iroquois chieftainship was two-headed. There was, on the one hand, a complex civil chieftainship, composed of male and female representatives of families, clans and nations and whose work consisted of creating a certain harmony within each social unit and between these social units. It could make decisions about war and peace, but its fundamental goal remained peace. It did not make war. Its operation rested upon discussion, consensus and the art of persuasion. It was a chieftainship founded on words that managed tranquility without coercion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There was, on the other hand, a military chieftainship, largely independent of the civil authority. It could agree with the civil authority, or dissociate itself from it. Its political role was to defend the honour and respectability of the social units from which it emerged, as well as the inviolability of the living spaces and values tending toward accommodation with the other groups. It faced exclusively toward the outside, but its viability depended on the support it received from the inside. It captured the outside to direct it inward—whether it be a person or just his scalp. When the warrior marked his capture by leaving his war-club on the spot of capture, he was also committing a political act.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The civil chieftainship played in words. The military chieftainship played in muscle. When the two were in accord, the first seemed to dominate, but the second was always watching, extremely attentively, ready to appear and present the other solution. The Europeans had a great deal of difficulty in understanding this organization. They could not understand how the civil chiefs could be acting in good faith when they councilled with them at the same time as the military chiefs were in the field. Europeans often concluded that this apparently contradictory diplomacy was a matter of bad faith, when in reality it reflected internal dissensions, conflicts of interests, and complementary visions of the universe of relations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Iroquoian warfare no longer exists, but the &amp;quot;warriors&amp;quot; are still here. Their existence raises questions: how do they attach themselves to tradition and ancient values? What is their role in modern societies? What do they represent? How to understand their evolution? What do they capture?&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Normand Clermont, introduction to Viau 1997, 12 (translated from French).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This confusion remained, and was accentuated by two factors. First, the degree of individual freedom in Haudenosaunee society prevented the Confederacy Council from imposing a tight peace: there were always individuals who could be persuaded to join a fight. Second, if there was constant warfare, the men who took leadership in the wars became de facto decision makers for the people, especially since war required quick decisions and the Confederacy Council was not designed for agility. War provided an outlet for ambition: &amp;quot;there are two kinds of Chieftains, the war Chief &amp;amp; the Civil Chief; the War Chief is wholly elective any amiable man remarkable for his bravery &amp;amp; courage, who has lived quietly &amp;amp; conducted himself with propriety is chosen a Chief—his good qualities render him eligible not his rank or possessions; the civil chief is nearly hereditary; they are almost always chosen from particular families tho&#039; not in what we would call regular succession; sometimes a Civil Chief (is) chosen a War Chief, &amp;amp; in this case supposing he has any talents for oratory, he has the greatest influence.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;NYSL MSS 13350-51, cited in Johnston 1964, 27.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The French and British in the seventeenth century were emerging from rigid feudalism, and were used to the exercise of coercive, decisive executive power. They assumed that their &amp;quot;savage&amp;quot; counterparts would have equal authority. In fact, Haudenosaunee chiefs had only the authority of persuasion and example, coupled with an extensive duty to consult and consider. Exchanges in council that reflect the difference between the societies were common:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They said when all the sachems were convened together they would answer that Point, but a little After a Sachem rose up &amp;amp; said, as to that Matter, we desire to be excused from giving any positive Answer, because it is the Young Men that must do the Service&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The young men would risk their lives, so they would have a say in the decisions. The women would till the soil, so they would have a say in decisions about land. There is no mystery to the idea that a democratic government should consult with the people most directly affected by the development of policies.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; &amp;amp; they must be consulted about it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
His Lordship replyed that he thought the Sachems had the sole Command of their Young Men without any controll.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They answered, We have often proposed something to you &amp;amp; you have told us you would write to the King our Great Master about it, which gave us satisfaction and we never importuned you any more about it, therefore pray be satisfied with what we have now answered. . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As to our Children to be sent to New York to be instructed to read &amp;amp; write, We answer, that we are not Masters or disposers of them that is a matter which relates to our Wives who are the sole disposers of our Children whilst they are under Age.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Wraxall 1754, 36–37. The chiefs were referring to the fact that the children were under the care of the women.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There has always been tension between the young and the old, in every society. More so, no doubt, in societies without coercion, without complex hierarchies:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We find divisions among us, the young men think to take the lead, who know nothing of our affairs, nor of what we suffered in the War.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Thayendenega Joseph Brant to William Claus, July 28, 1906; cited in Johnston 1964, 108.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While we are indeed sachems we cannot simply turn our backs on our soldiers, for they are our protectors, and have to fight for us since we are old people.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Livingston 1956, 40; June 4, 1677.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After generations of warfare, more and more of the conduct of the affairs of the nations was being taken by the &amp;quot;warriors.&amp;quot; In 1762 the Geneseo Senecas explained to Sir William Johnson why the chiefs were not present at a Six Nations congress: &amp;quot;The reason you do not see many of our Sachems at present here is, that the weather and roads having been very bad, they were less able than we to travel, &amp;amp; therefore, we the Warriors were made choice of to attend you, and transact business; and I beg you will consider that we, are in fact the people of consequence for managing affairs, our Sachems being generally a parcell of old people who say much, but who mean or act very little, so that we have both the power and ability to settle matters.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;SWJP 3:698.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alliances with the Europeans accentuated the imbalance. In &amp;quot;normal&amp;quot; times, the Great Law allowed a foreign nation to meet the Haudenosaunee in council and see the wise chiefs explaining the nature of the peace, while the foreigners could also see, standing behind the chiefs, the young men who represented the alternative to peace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In times of war, the people dealing with foreigners, and especially with their foreign military counterparts, were the war chiefs. Sending warriors as speakers also sent a message about Haudenosaunee intentions. When the French occupied Cataraqui (the present Kingston, Ontario) to control access to the St. Lawrence River from Lake Ontario, the Haudenosaunee sent a delegation of warriors to express their views in no uncertain terms:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Onontiio your fyre shall burn no more at Cataraqui it shall never be kindled again. You did steale that place from us &amp;amp; wee quenched the fyre with the blood of our children. You think your selfes the ancient inhabitants of this countrey &amp;amp; longest in possession yea all the Christian Inhabitants of New York &amp;amp; Cayenquiragoe thinke the same of themselves. Wee Warriours are the firste &amp;amp; the ancient people &amp;amp; greatest of you all, these parts and countrys were inhabited &amp;amp; trodd upon by us before any Christian (then stamping his foot upon the ground sayd) We shall not suffer Caderaqui to be inhabited againe. Onontiio we Canonssoené&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Kanonsionni—the People of The Longhouse.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; do say we will never suffer you to kindle your fire at Cadaraqui. I repeat this again and again.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;NYCD, London Documents 91, 122. Cayenquirago was “Great Swift Arrow,” the name given to Governor Fletcher of Maryland (but also later to Cadwallader Colden). The French forts at Cataraqui were destroyed several times by the Haudenosaunee.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
European desires for military allies, first in wars between the British and French, and then in the American Revolution and the War of 1812, meant a constant stream of favour to the warriors coming from outside Haudenosaunee society. European representatives would often speak with those who could help them in war, regardless of the imbalance this created within the Haudenosaunee. The tension between the chiefs and the warriors was probably constant throughout history—but the Euro-American influence turned the tension into an imbalance. By 1776, as Britain and the United States vied for the alliance or neutrality of the Haudenosaunee, reaching out to the warriors, the rotiyanershon began to despair of the changes: &amp;quot;Times are altered with us. Formerly the Warriors were governed by the wisdom of their uncles the Sachems but now they take their own way and dispose of themselves without consulting their uncles the sachems. While we wish for peace they are for war. Brothers, they must take the consequences.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Tenhoghskweaghta, an Onondaga chief, to delegates of the united colonies, March 10, 1776. &#039;&#039;Indian Affairs Papers&#039;&#039;, 115. In contrast, the colonists (who were headed for war) could say: “We warriors cannot break the orders of our Great Chiefs. We must execute the advice of our Sachems. We always attend to their voice.” Colonel Dayton, the speaker, was explaining in a conference with the Mohawks on May 20, 1776, why it was impossible to avoid the war. &#039;&#039;Indian Affairs Papers&#039;&#039;, 57.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While the &amp;quot;warriors&amp;quot; saw themselves as the protectors of the League in a state of extended emergency, the maintenance of a state of war was antithetical to the Great Peace and in the long run would undermine the constitution and the law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Oneidas in Wisconsin split, the people who moved to the &amp;quot;Canadian side&amp;quot; were called the &amp;quot;Chiefs&#039; Party,&amp;quot; while those who stayed in Wisconsin were the &amp;quot;Warriors&#039; Party.&amp;quot; When a group formed at the Grand River Territory after the First World War, with the objective of installing a Canadian-style democratic system of government, it called itself the &amp;quot;Warrior Society,&amp;quot; partly because many of its members were war veterans. Yet at the Grand River Territory in 1959, when the Confederacy resumed control of the territory, however briefly, the &amp;quot;Warrior Society&amp;quot; of that time was an integral part of the movement that supported the chiefs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Ceremonies: Spiritual Authority and Obligation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The advent of Christianity no doubt complicated Haudenosaunee government. Some of the people of every nation moved to the St. Lawrence, to join the French mission villages that became Kahnawake, Kanehsatake, Akwesasne, and Oswegatchie. While the Jesuits and Sulpicians permitted and even maintained the continuity of the clans, they also set themselves up as spiritual authorities, leaders of the communities in ways for which the chiefs had until then been the guides. To the south, the British provided Anglican missionaries and churches, and Queen Anne provided the silverware and the names for Royal Chapels for the Mohawks. Methodists made inroads by employing Indigenous preachers. Those who continued to follow traditional Haudenosaunee religion became the custodians of both the law and the ceremonies:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everything is together—spiritual and political—because when the Creator . . . made this world, he touched the world all together, and it automatically became spiritual and everything that comes from the world is spiritual and so that&#039;s what leaders are, they are both the spiritual mentors and the political mentors of the people.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Porter 1988, 8–12.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everything is laid out for you. Your path is straight ahead of you. Sometimes it&#039;s invisible but it&#039;s there. You may not know where it&#039;s going, but you have to follow that path. It&#039;s the path to the Creator. It&#039;s the only path there is.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Thadadaho Leon Shenandoah, in Wall 2001. When I was researching Australian national park co-ownership and co-management, especially at Uluru and Kakadu, I spoke with an official at the Australian High Commission in Ottawa. He told me (rather scornfully) that the Pitjanjaras believed that the world would end if they did not continue to put through their ceremonies at Uluru. It is intellectually arguable that &#039;&#039;their&#039;&#039; world—the world they had created through their beliefs—would die if the ceremonies ceased. But I asked the official: Would he be willing to take the chance that they are wrong?&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To maintain continuity in the face of this erosion of authority, the Haudenosaunee adopted several different approaches. Some people were able to practise both Christian and traditional ways. For example, Thayendenegea Joseph Brant translated two books of the New Testament into Mohawk, as a good Anglican. But his haduwi, his medicine mask, is still in existence and use. Some people considered the good messages of Jesus and the Haudenosaunee way to be essentially the same message, so they could accept both. Some today assert that Jesus and the Peacemaker were the same person. Rather than have the community divided over religion, the Grand River Chiefs declared in the 1880s that they would hang their hats at the door of the council house, so that once they sat in council, &amp;quot;we are all wearing buckskins.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With every community, as well, there is a division between those who follow the Karihwi:yo, the message that Skaniatariio (Handsome Lake) brought in the 1790s, and those who maintain that the Kayanerenkó:wa is a sufficient guide for their way of life. In Kahnawake, this has resulted in there being separate longhouses for each path. In other places, there are separate medicine societies. Today, the majority of the rotiyanershon are Handsome Lake adherents, and some opposition to traditional governments comes from people who feel that religion and government should be kept separate. &amp;quot;That is why there are faithkeepers,&amp;quot; reply some of the chiefs: while it is our responsibility to maintain the great ceremonies, and to set an example of spirituality, the faithkeepers are the ones who look after the details now. Even so, the traditional ceremonies, and respect for them, are part of the backbone of the legal system. Council is often postponed so that the major ceremonies, like Midwinter and Green Corn, can be completed (especially since the ceremonies and council take place in the same longhouses).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Mother’s Line ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
European and Euro-American legal systems made room for women&#039;s rights and women&#039;s equality during the twentieth century, removing aspects of laws that discriminated against women on the basis of gender. One of those laws was the Indian Act of Canada, which in 1869 was amended to strip Indian women of their status as Indians if they married non-Indian men. The Indian Act was amended in 1985, and women who had lost their status were reinstated and their children recognized as Indians. In 1870, the chiefs objected to the new provisions of Canadian law because they went against established Haudenosaunee customs. In 1924, Deskahe Levi General noted that the elected system Canada sought to impose in the Grand River Territory would remove women&#039;s political rights (women were not allowed to vote or hold political office under the Canadian system until 1951). The separation of the roles of men and women in government under the Kayanerenkó:wa is profound: it would be difficult to imagine male clan mothers or female chiefs, especially in the fulfillment of spiritual obligations. The principle of passing down identity, clan, and chiefs&#039; titles through the mother&#039;s line is deeply ingrained in Haudenosaunee law:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Not the least remarkable among their institutions, was that which confined the transmission of all titles, rights and property in the female line to the exclusion of the male. It is strangely unlike the canons of descent adopted by civilized nations, but it secured several important objects. If the Deer tribe of the Cayugas, for example, received a sachemship at the original distribution of these offices, the descent of such title being limited to the female line, it could never pass out of the tribe. It thus became instrumental in giving to the tribe individuality. A still more marked result, and perhaps a leading object of this enactment, was the perpetual disinheritance of the son. Being of the tribe of his mother formed an impassable barrier against him; and he could neither succeed his father as a sachem, nor inherit from him even his medal, or his tomahawk. The inheritance, for the protection of tribal rights, was thus directed from the lineal descendants of the sachem, to his brothers, or his sisters&#039; children, or, under certain circumstances, to some individual of the tribe at large; each and all of whom were in his tribe, while his children, being in another tribe . . . were placed out of the line of succession.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Morgan (1851) 1995, 80.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is how these matters will carry on, the women controlling the title names, because it is by means of all their suffering that people are here on earth, and it is they who raise them. Moreover, their blood, this is what we have, the people, for these are our mothers, the women, and this is why the families follow according to their bloodlines.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 419–20.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As long as their neighbours&#039; laws discriminated actively against women, the Haudenosaunee were able to maintain that their legal system was no more discriminatory than that of patriarchal, patrilocal Canada and the United States. At the beginning of the twenty-first century, most unequal treatment of women in the laws of those countries has been removed, and pressure on the Haudenosaunee to amend citizenship laws has increased.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The recommendations of the Truth and Reconciliation Commission of Canada include respect for Indigenous legal systems (the commission’s report distinguishes between “Indigenous” laws, made by Indigenous nations for themselves, and “Aboriginal” law, made by Canada about Indigenous peoples). The commission’s report significantly puts forward Haudenosaunee law as a distinct, powerful legal system. But the report also recommends that Indigenous legal systems remove gender discrimination.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The difficulty, for the Haudenosaunee, lies in reconciling two fundamental principles in the law. The first is that the roles of men and women are distinct and separate, but equally respectable. The second is that families must be respected. In theory, the inclusiveness and generosity of the law is the path to that reconciliation: family members excluded because their fathers rather than their mothers are their connection to the community would be brought in by adoption. However, the generosity and flexibility of the law has atrophied somewhat: adoptions, once common and often informal, have become rare.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Differing roles for men and women in traditional Indigenous societies are uncomfortable for neighbours who advocate for respect for Indigenous laws and governments. The most explicit recent statement of that discomfort is found in the report of Canada&#039;s Truth and Reconciliation Commission, which said:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As with the common law and civil law systems, Indigenous law is learned through a lifetime of work. Applying Indigenous law requires an acknowledgment that it exists in the real world and has relevance today. It is most helpful when applied to humankind&#039;s most troubling behaviours. . . . Contemporary issues concerning gender and other inequalities must necessarily be part of these laws for them to be persuasively applicable in the present day.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Truth and Reconciliation Commission of Canada 2015, 6:46, 54.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Names: Continuity ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Haudenosaunee names are not simply invented.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;There are ignorant jokes about “Indian names”—about how people are named after the weather or events on the day they were born. In western literature, “Indian names” are usually references to animals or things (“Big Bear,” “Dull Knife,” “Red Buffalo Woman”). Among the Haudenosaunee, names are more action-oriented, and less about things. “She Picks Sweetgrass,” “He Cuts Off Business,” “He Talks (Constantly),” “He Carries a Quiver” are all examples of Haudenosaunee names.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; They are often ancient, and they belong to the clan and family. When a new person is born, the women of the family meet, observe the child, and choose a name that reflects the child&#039;s personality, or the people&#039;s hopes for the child:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After the birth of a child a name was selected by its mother from those not in use belonging to the gens, with the concurrence of her nearest relatives, which was then bestowed upon the infant. But the child was not fully christened until its birth and name, together with the name and gens of its mother and the name of its father, had been announced at the next ensuing council of the tribe. Upon the death of a person his name could not be used again in the life-time of his oldest surviving son without the consent of the latter.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Morgan (1871) 1997, 78–79. The names of children today are confirmed in Longhouse ceremonies, in which there are specific days set apart for “names.” While few would agree with Morgan’s statement about a son having control over the use of a name, most people would agree that the name should be “given a rest” for a generation or so, before being brought back into use, though they would also agree that the name should eventually be kept alive.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The name may also recall a person who has died recently and left the name vacant—for a name does not simply disappear: it returns to the &amp;quot;storehouse&amp;quot; of names kept by the clan. The fundamental rule is that there should be only one person alive at any one time carrying a particular name.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The historic record shows that there were sometimes people in different villages with the same name. As traditions are eroded in modern times, there has been more duplication of names, as well as “borrowing” names from other clans or families. See Charles Cooke’s 1950s collection of Iroquois names, available online in the American Philosophical Society Digital Library, http://diglib.amphilsoc.org/. See also Cooke 1952.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Jesuit Relations described the Huron practice in 1644:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No name is ever lost; so when some one of the family has died, all the relatives assemble and deliberate together which among them shall bear the name of the deceased, giving his own to some other relative. He who takes a new name enters also upon the burdens which belong to it, and so he is captain, if the deceased was so.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Cited in Beauchamp (1907) 1975, 346.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The names now in use among the Iroquois . . . are, in the main, ancient names handed down in the gentes from time immemorial.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Morgan (1871) 1997, 80.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1724, Lafitau wrote that there was a practice of &amp;quot;requickening&amp;quot; or making alive again all the names belonging to a family. It is possible that he combined the practice of giving names from the family &amp;quot;storehouse&amp;quot; with the practice of &amp;quot;requickening&amp;quot; a chiefly title. However, it is also possible that, three centuries ago, every name brought with it the memory and honour of the people who had carried it before.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Until recently, Inuit naming involved giving a child the name of someone who had died recently, and the child, through the name, became related to all the deceased’s relatives. This increased chances of survival by increasing the number of people upon whom the child could count for help. In Canadian law, the case of Kiviaq (formerly David C. Ward) stands for the right of Inuit to reclaim their original names.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Lafitau wrote:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In every family a certain number of ancestral names, both men&#039;s and women&#039;s, are kept. These names are their own and known to be taken by such and such a family. Now it is the custom in each family to requicken and resuscitate, in some manner, those who, issuing from that family, have made it illustrious. They exalt thus, at the same time, the names of those whom they make live again, and impose them on those of their grand nephews destined to represent them. The latter assume more or less importance according as those who had borne their names were more or less important themselves by their qualities, virtues and deeds.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Lafitau (1724) 1974, 71.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Similarly, when Cadwallader Colden was adopted:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is customary among them to make a Compliment of Naturalization into the Five Nations; and considering how highly they value themselves above all others, this must be no small Compliment. This is not done by any general Act of the Nation, but every single person has a right to it, by a Kind of Adoption. The first time I was among the Mohawks, I had this Compliment from one of their old Sachems, which he did, by giving me his own name, Cayenderongue. He had been a notable Warrior; and he told me, that now I had a Right to assume to myself all the Acts of Valour he had performed, and that now my Name would echo from Hill to Hill all over the Five Nations. . . . When about ten or twelve years afterwards, my Business led me again among them, I directed the Interpreter to say something from me to the Sachems; he was for some time at a loss to understand their Answer, till he asked me whether I had any Name among them: I found that I was really known to them by that Name, and that the old Sachem, from the time he had given me his Name, had assumed another to himself. I was adopted, at that time, into the Tribe of the Bear, and for that reason, I often afterwards had the kind Compliment of Brother Bear.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Colden (1727) 1973, 1, 28.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
People&#039;s names can change, or be changed. Morgan, paying attention to names as well as families, explained:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Two classes of names were in use, one adapted to childhood, and the other to adult life, which were exchanged at the proper period in the same formal manner, one being taken away, to use their expression, and the other bestowed in its place. . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the age of sixteen or eighteen, the first name was taken away, usually by a chief of the gens, and one of the second class bestowed in its place. At the next council of the tribe the change of names was publicly announced, after which the person, if a male, assumed the duties of manhood. . . . After a severe illness it was not uncommon for a person, from superstitious considerations, to solicit and obtain a second change of name. It was sometimes done again in extreme old age.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Morgan (1871) 1997, 79.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lafitau adds: &amp;quot;These names change with age. A child either has no name, or takes that of another child, a young man, that of a warrior and an old man, that of some elder. As soon as a person dies, the name that he bore is buried with him and it is only several years afterward that it is renewed.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Lafitau (1724) 1974, 71.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a child receives a name in the Longhouse, at the Midwinter or Green Corn Thanksgiving, it is usually his uncle who carries him, singing his atonwa, and introducing him to the people—explaining that this new person is to be known henceforth by this name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The same ceremony takes place when an adult is adopted: &amp;quot;Another Chief led Mr. Furniss to the center, giving his Seneca name, To-an-do-ah, &#039;&#039;One First to See&#039;&#039;, afterward leading him up and down while he chanted the war song.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;There are suggestions that a man’s atonwa, his “personal chant,” used to be his personal war song. If this is true, it is no longer used or thought of in that way.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The Indians responded, the women keeping time by clapping hands.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Women keep time by clapping hands, men by stamping their feet.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; He was then led to his new mother in the Turtle Clan and kissed her, the clan welcoming him. . . . In adopting women, the war song is not sung as when men are received.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Beauchamp (1907) 1975, 407, describing an adoption by the Senecas in 1885. See also Akweks 1950, 6, 44–46; “A Seneca Adoption, &#039;&#039;Masterkey&#039;&#039; 26 (1952): 26, 94–96; Conover 1885; Keppler 1926, 3, 73–75.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When William Beauchamp was adopted into the Onondaga Eel Clan in 1904, as Wah-kat-yu&#039;-ten (Beautiful Rainbow), &amp;quot;Albert Cusick or Sa-go-na-qua-de . . . led the new brother up and down, singing the customary song of thanksgiving and then introducing him to those of his new relatives who were present. The song used was . . . one of the Adonwah or thanksgiving songs.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Beauchamp 1885, 411.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The same ceremony, essentially, is used when a person becomes a royá:ner. His old name is no longer used for him, and he is introduced under his new title:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ceremony of induction consisted in the formal bestowal of the new name by which he was henceforth to be known. A chief placed himself on each side of the candidate, and, grasping his arms, marched him to and fro in the Council House, between the lines of the assembled senators. As they walked they proclaimed his new name and office, and recited, in a measured chant, the duties to which he was now called, the audience responding at every pause with the usual chorus of assent.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hale (1883) 1989, 61. In one recent instance, a would-be Mohawk chief stated that an adoption was not valid because he had deliberately walked out of the longhouse before it was put through. It was pointed out to him that he had not openly objected; that the nation and clan involved was not his own; and eventually, when he persisted, that his own claim to a title was dubious.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In familiar intercourse and in formal salutation the American Indians address each other by the term of relationship the person spoken to sustains to the speaker. When related they salute by kin; when not related &amp;quot;my friend&amp;quot; is substituted. It would be esteemed an act of rudeness to address an Indian by his personal name, or to inquire his name directly from himself.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Morgan (1871) 1997, 80.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Usually, however, the Indians do not willingly hear themselves called by the name given them and an inquiry as to what that is, is a kind of affront which causes them to blush. In addressing each other, they call each other by names of kinship, brother, sister, uncle, nephew, etc. observing exactly the degrees of subordination and all the proper age relationship unless there is a real relationship by blood or adoption.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Lafitau (1724) 1974, 72.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The use of names, or the reluctance to use names, is relevant to the law in several ways. A practice of salutation &amp;quot;by kin&amp;quot; is another constant reminder of the relationship between individuals, crucial in a legal system based on relationships. Using a person&#039;s name instead would be both a step back from the relationship (since one is using a non-relationship word instead of, for example, &amp;quot;my cousin&amp;quot;) and an intrusion (since one&#039;s name is the name that the Creator knows one by, and the one that is used in ceremonies). Thus, while it is important to have a name, to link one to a clan and a family, the importance of the name lies not in its use but rather in the relations that it provides.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This point is apparent in the difference between English and Haudenosaunee languages. In English, it is easy to speak with someone, or about someone, without reference to the relationship between the two of you.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Haudenosaunee languages also require more precision in address: there is a difference between saying “You (singular) go for water,” and “You (two) go for water,” and “You (several of you) go for water,” whereas in English the same four words could be used for all three situations.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In Haudenosaunee languages, it is more difficult to do so. It is as if Mohawk &#039;&#039;allows&#039;&#039; one to speak without reference to relationship, while English &#039;&#039;encourages&#039;&#039; one to do so.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Names are identifiers: they provide identity.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The discussion about placement of Haudenosaunee names in Confederacy identity documents was instructive. The Documentation Committee concluded that the names, as “original names” or “real names,” should go first in an IATA-format international travel document. Thus they would come before a person’s &#039;&#039;prenom&#039;&#039;: “Deer, Teyowisonte Thomas Aaron.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In Haudenosaunee society, they do so to identify the individual not only as an individual but also as a member of a family, clan, and nation. Even in the most mundane ways, the way a name is thought about can be different. An American will introduce himself by saying, &amp;quot;I&#039;m Bill Smith,&amp;quot; whereas a Mohawk, speaking Mohawk, will say &amp;quot;Teyanoken ne yonkyats&amp;quot;—&amp;quot;they call me Teyanoken.&amp;quot; It is the difference between defining yourself by what you call yourself and defining yourself by your relationship with other people. It is true that in both societies, names are given to children by their parents; that names identify one in terms of family relations as well as individual identity; and that often there are public namings (including christenings and First Communion). The difference is subtle, but real.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Outsiders meeting the Haudenosaunee for the first time were often given names almost immediately. This was practical and legal. It gave them not only existence but also protection and obligation. Now they had a place to stay and relatives to stay with. Now they were related to the Haudenosaunee as members of the family, and it would not be legally possible for them to be enemies, to engage in war against the Confederacy, or to disturb the peace. Often those who were given names in this way understood the honour without grasping the reciprocity and obligation involved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Citizenship and Immigration ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee have been called a matrilineal, matrilocal&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;“Matrilocal residence, wherein a young newly married couple takes up residence with the woman’s family, was strongly developed among the Iroquoians. Matrilocality typically arises in dominant societies that expand into territories at the expense of hostile but subordinate societies already there. It is a form of social organization confined to societies operating at a tribal level of development. The matrilineage, a basic unit of Iroquois society five centuries ago, is a successful form of predatory organization in conflicts with other tribes.” Snow 1994, 35. Engelbrecht (2003, 68) suggests that chiefs might remain among their mothers’ people, basing this in part on Gibson’s version of the Creation story. Certainly the chiefs would need to consult with their family constantly, but this would not become difficult unless they moved to other villages.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; society. That means that people draw their identities from their mothers. They belong to their mother&#039;s clan. In the old days, it meant that upon marriage a man would move to live with his wife&#039;s people, in the longhouse of his wife and her clan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Traditionally, one&#039;s closest male relative is one&#039;s uncle: one&#039;s mother&#039;s brother.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The theory is that while paternity might be uncertain, one can always be certain about who one’s mother is, and about one’s mother’s brother. The Anglo-Saxons had a similar tradition of maternal uncles having authority. There are vestiges of that today: the loser in a fight between children will “say uncle” to the winner; this is called “knuckling under,” from the older English word “nuncle” (most famously used by the Fool in &#039;&#039;King Lear&#039;&#039;). One aspect of the resistance by tribal peoples in China to the “one child” policy of population control is that, within a generation, there would be no more uncles or aunts, and a child would be deprived of an important traditional support network.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; He is the person who has the responsibility of walking the new baby up and down the longhouse to introduce the new person to the people, when names are given or confirmed at Strawberries and Midwinter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alone among the versions of the law, the Newhouse version edited by Gawasowane Arthur Parker provides for passing a name and clan through the father:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The father of a child of great comeliness, learning ability or specially loved because of some circumstance may, at the will of the child&#039;s clan, select a name from his own (the father&#039;s) clan and bestow it by ceremony, such as provided. This naming is only temporary and shall be called &amp;quot;a name hung around the neck.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Newhouse) 1916, 49. Richard Hill believes this was actually Parker’s addition, adjusting Newhouse’s writing to address his own clanlessness.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
David Maybury-Lewis&#039;s description of a principle of tribal peoples—that if you can be addressed as a relative you are one of us, and if you cannot be addressed as a relative you are not one of us&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Maybury-Lewis 1992, 92.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; —could have led to a narrow, xenophobic view of the Haudenosaunee world and an increasingly inbred population. Instead, the Haudenosaunee used this principle in an empowering manner,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Vecsey (1988, 111) also suggests that “adoption became a motive for war, as clan mothers demanded more sons and nephews.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; generous and open in defining how an outsider could become a relative.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Right of Refuge ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choosing the longhouse as the symbol of the League was a deliberate message about how the peace would be expanded. Archaeologists say that about a third of the bark longhouse sites that have been excavated show that the houses had been extended after their original construction. Hale explained that, as a symbol, the longhouse was &amp;quot;a description and an invitation&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;When the number of families inhabiting these long dwellings was increased by marriage or adoption, and a new hearth was required, the end-wall . . . was removed, an addition of the required size was made to the edifice, and the closing wall was restored. It declared that the united nations were not distinct tribes, associated by a temporary league, but one great family, clustered for convenience around separate hearths in a common dwelling; and it proclaimed their readiness to receive new members into the general household.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hale (1883) 1989, 76.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Historically, the Haudenosaunee increased their population by taking in people from other nations—as individuals, as families, and sometimes as entire nations. Deaths from the epidemics and from war were balanced by these immigrants. Archaeologists suggest that the surviving St. Lawrence Iroquoians were absorbed by the Hurons and Onondagas. As the British colonies pressed inland from the Atlantic, Indigenous peoples sought refuge among the Haudenosaunee. The law was already in place to permit this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And whosoever finds these roots and traces it up, and come to the &amp;quot;Tree of Peace and Shelter&amp;quot; he is welcome to take shelter under its spreading branches.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Newhouse 1885, 150. There were once “towns of refuge” or sanctuary, in which a fugitive could be safe from any pursuit. Is this the same in spirit? Note that American Indian Movement leader Dennis Banks, when he was being pursued by the FBI in 1984, sought refuge at Onondaga under this provision of the Great Law, and the Onondaga Chiefs informed the United States that they were obliged to provide him shelter and safety.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If any man or nation outside the Five Nations shall obey the laws of Great Peace and make known their disposition to the Lords of the Confederacy, they may trace the Roots to the Tree and if their minds are clean and they are obedient and promise to obey the wishes of the Confederate Council, they shall be welcomed to take shelter beneath the Tree of the Long Leaves.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Newhouse and Cusick) 1916, 30.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The welcome was not automatic, and it was not unconditional. The Peacemaker had installed the Seneca war chiefs as doorkeepers, and their function included verifying the intentions of those who arrived at the longhouse, seeking to be taken in:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the various nations&#039; inhabitants—whichever direction they may come from, according to how the roots lead them, the Great White Roots, which will bring them—arrive where we have our house; and as to these beside the door they will meet the doorkeepers (Teyoninhokarawen and Kanuhkitawi). Thereupon the two will ask what messages they have along, and if what they bring along is an evil thing; then they will consider it, the doorkeepers, and if they see that it is bothersome and that they will use it to hurt them, the people living here, they shall try to settle it peacefully to avoid trouble, but if the others do not accept, then Kanuhkitawi will invite them to the place where the elm bark is spread out and shove them inside the house, where bones will come to pile up, and it is a serious matter if it were to happen thus.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 317–18.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adoption ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If other people—as individuals, families, or nations—had the right to seek refuge under the Tree of Peace, and to ask to enter the Longhouse, then ways to bring them in and include them had to be developed. The Haudenosaunee used adoption as their means to give these immigrants a place within civil society. Without a clan and a name, these people would not be accountable, and they would not know who spoke for them, who carried responsibility for them, or where to find their place in the ceremonies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Morgan states that the right of adoption belonged to the clan, not to individuals, and that adoption into a clan conferred &amp;quot;the nationality of the tribe.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Morgan (1871) 1997, 80. See also Parker 1940. Bloom (2001, 126) asserts that “newcomers to a Greek city (in ancient times) were often assigned a tribe at random—no matter who their forefathers might have been. But once you had your tribal label, it was unchangeable.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adoption meant that the adoptee became, in almost all respects, a member of the family:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The person adopting a captive placed him or her in the relation of a brother or sister; if a mother adopted, in that of a son or daughter; and ever afterwards treated the person in all respects as though born in that relation.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Morgan (1871) 1997, 80.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A prisoner, once adopted, was treated as if he had always been an Iroquois, and if he replaced someone who had died, he assumed all the rights and privileges of the deceased.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Boucher 1964, 125–26. See also Lafitau (1724) 1974, 2, 156.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1654, Father Simon le Moyne visited Onondaga. He remarked: &amp;quot;One calls me brother, another uncle, another a cousin: never have I had so many kinsfolk.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Thwaites 1901, 41:75.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adoption was crucial to the survival of the Haudenosaunee: it was used to &amp;quot;replace&amp;quot; people who had died by war or disease, to expand or increase the population of communities that had been decreased.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Lynch 1985. “The Iroquois Confederacy and the Adoption and Administration of Non-Iroquoian Individuals and Groups Priori to 1756.” &#039;&#039;Man in the Northeast&#039;&#039; 30, 83–99.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An adopted person is said to have his name &amp;quot;hung around his neck.&amp;quot; That is, it is not completely a part of him, and it can be removed if he misbehaves.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;When I was adopted, in 1990, Deskahe said to me “Now you are like us.” He was referring to the Confederacy chiefs, and the fact that a chief can be “dehorned”—his name taken away—in the same way that an adoptee’s name can be removed. He was also referring to the string of white wampum that both adoptees and chiefs are given. Though the expression and the principle are today well accepted, Hayadaha Richard Hill believes that Arthur Parker may have made this adjustment to one of Newhouse’s versions of the law.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; This is not qualitatively different from the concept of a &amp;quot;landed immigrant&amp;quot; in Canadian law: it is a stage between being a foreigner and becoming a citizen.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;A “landed immigrant” in Canada cannot vote in national elections, and is liable to be deported back to his country of origin if convicted of a criminal offence, but otherwise has virtually all the rights of a citizen.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The decision to remove a &amp;quot;name hung around the neck&amp;quot; is made by the family, clan, or nation that adopted the person.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes, historically, an adopted person was not &amp;quot;completely&amp;quot; adopted but was to be shared by both his adoptive people and his original nation. This was especially true of interpreters. It was also true of Warraghyhagey Sir William Johnson, the first Imperial Superintendent General of Indian Affairs—who had a Mohawk wife and children:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Six Nations answer&#039;d. That the one half of Coll. Johnson belonged to His Excellency (the Governor of New York), and the other to them.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;SWJP 1:342, Albany, July 3, 1751.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He is of our Nation, and a member of our Council, as well as of yours. When we adopted him, we divided him into two equal parts: One we kept for our selves, and one we left for you. He has had a great deal of Trouble with us, wore out his shoes in our Messages, and dirty&#039;d his Cloaths by being amongst us, so that he is become as nasty as an Indian.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Canesatego, speaking of Conrad Weiser, in council in Philadelphia, 1742.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The adoption of Lewis Henry Morgan provides a clear picture of the process in 1846—the first part is a transcript by Donehogowa Ely Parker of a speech in Tonawanda Longhouse by Hasge-sa-h Jesse Spring:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;They no doubt knew the fact that, when anyone chooses to become a member of our nation by making an application to some of our leading and influential men, and providing for a feast which is always customary on such occasions as our inducement to bring the people together, (they ought not) to be scrupulous in adopting. The matter of adoption was referred to the managers&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The “managers” are probably the faithkeepers.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and prompters, and they concluded that there was no reason why we should not adopt them.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;This approach to the issue mirrors the question the chiefs ask when faced with the Condolence of a chief of another nation: Is there some reason why he should not be accepted? It is a real question, not a matter of mostly ritual recitation like the declaration at a Christian wedding—“But first I am required to ask anyone present who knows a reason why these persons may not lawfully marry, to declare it now.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; They accordingly stated to our brothers that they had agreed to grant their request, and so soon as the means wanted to be furnished for assembling the people, the arrangements would be completed. The managers at the same time referred the giving of names to the chiefs.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;If the names being given were “real names” belonging to clans, it would seem that the assignment of them would have gone to the clan mothers. Referring the question to the chiefs might suggest that the names are honorific rather than real.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; But in this we have been disappointed. The managers have this evening been informed that the chiefs have made no arrangements so far as this is concerned, and it now becomes the duty of the tribes (clans) to which they are to respectively belong to come forward and present their proper names. The people will observe into what tribe they are adopted by watching who it is that leads the initiate around the room. The managers desire to request the warriors to keep perfect order, and to lend their aid in making the evening performances interesting. The first dance in order will be the War dance, and the second the Grand Religious (Great Feather) dance as the proper accompaniments of the occasion. These will also be for the benefit of our brothers. When these are over, we shall have the privilege of having as many more as we choose. But whether we have any more or not we want all to behave with propriety and decency.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Donehogowa continued with his own description:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The dancers then withdrew to dress for the dance. But before they withdrew, the initiation ceremony was performed. L.H. Morgan was first led around the room by John Bigfire of the Hawk tribe. Morgan therefore became a Hawk. The leader sang a Thanksgiving song (Personal Chant) while the initiate went around the room,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Morgan stated that the chiefs “taking the person by the arms then marched with him through the council house and back, chanting the song of adoption. To this the people responded in musical chorus at the end of each verse. The march continued until the verses were ended, which required three rounds.” Morgan (1871) 1997, 81.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; the warriors keeping time to the song by a low guttural sound. The women also kept time by clapping together their hands. The name given to Morgan was Da-ya-da-o-wo-ko; it signifies lies across. Porter was then announced as the next person to be led around the room. The name was Da-ya-a-we; (it) signifies he is bringing or fetching. He was then also led around the room, the leader singing a Thanksgiving song. The leader was Isaac Shanks of the Wolf tribe. Consequently Porter became a Wolf de facto. The third and last person announced was Darling. The name given him was Ga-e-we-yo; (it signifies religion, good news, or glad tidings). The leader sang a Thanksgiving song while leading him around the room. He was led by William Kennedy of the Deer tribe. Darling therefore became a Deer man to us. This closed the mere ceremony of initiation.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;“Ely S. Parker’s Report of the Adventures of Lewis H. Morgan, Charles T. Porter and Thomas Darling at Tonawanda on Saturday, the 31st of October 1846” in Tooker 2002, 38–39.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Giving names to groups of visitors is not just a Seneca practice of the nineteenth century. When the Boundary Commission set the line between Canada and the United States through Kanatakon (St. Regis village in Akwesasne), the members of the commission were also given names: &amp;quot;The Chiefs of the village assemble at our lodgings to execute a lease. . . . They . . . christened us all with Indian names, Judge Atwater they called Ska ro ya te (Beyond the Sky), Col. Hawkins, Ga ron gon tia (the Flying Moon), myself, Ga ra give ne gen (the Rising Sun), R. C. Atwater, Ga ra giv a na (the Full Moon), Judge Richards, Ze ra go rus (the Split or Half Moon).&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Delafield 1943, 145.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When Mary Jemison was adopted, the Seneca women took her to the river and washed her down, removing the &amp;quot;whiteness&amp;quot; from her. While this was a way of further removing her former identity, it also reflects the tradition, shared with the Cherokees, of &amp;quot;going to water&amp;quot; for purification. Water, after all, is recognized as the source of all life. Later Seneca adoptions also involved the adoptee having water poured over him.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Recall, in the Creation story, how the Earth was first covered in water; how the Peacemaker had the Cannibal “go to water” to clear his body; and how, in the Condolence, pure clean water is used to clear the throat and then a person’s insides, to restore harmony and balance.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Washing down also resembles the transformative rubbing down, of both Thadadaho and of visitors met at the woods&#039; edge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In more recent times, there has been unresolved discussion about the nature and consequences of adoption. One question is whether it is qualitatively different to bestow a made-up, honorary name as distinct from a name that belongs to a clan. Another discussion is whether the person who receives a name that belongs to a clan also receives all the legal rights and obligations that go with citizenship. William Fenton (Howan’eyo) describes the discussion at Tonawanda:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The speaker of the longhouse, Henry Redeye, said that he opposed giving names belonging to clans to white people. In recent cases white adoptees had claimed hunting and fishing rights on the reservation by virtue of adoption as &amp;quot;Indians.&amp;quot; The longhouse officers did not wish to confer the privilege on white men. Charles Butler, who interpreted for me that morning, said he disagreed that such conveyance of status was legally possible. . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I inferred from Henry&#039;s statement that some Senecas regarded adoption, when done wholeheartedly, as conferring complete status as a member of the Seneca Nation. Still other Senecas opposed adoption on principle, in as much as they expected persons adopted to behave as Indians, which would imply rights to hunt and fish, privileges which they did not wish to convey. Other Senecas who regarded adoption as honorary did not expect full participation from those whom they honored, and they would confine the honor to an exclusive few persons who were genuinely interested.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Fenton 2002, 94.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Nations Leave, Nations Return ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One important difference between the Haudenosaunee and other confederate entities is the provision in the constitution for nations (as well as individuals) leaving and returning. No doubt the Peacemaker recognized that if the League were held together only by the desire of its members&#039; minds to be together, then it would be possible for people and nations to drift away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Against this possibility he made provision for the commitment to be renewed frequently.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The same practice of frequent renewal is to be found in the Covenant Chain relationship, which requires “repolishing” on a regular basis to remove tarnish and reaffirm the desire of the participants to hold strongly to the Chain.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; It was not just a means of refreshing memory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Even so, people left from time to time. A legal system without coercive force could not make them stay. Whereas the United States fought a bloody civil war upon the secession of the thirteen southern states, and Canada continues to wrestle with the spectre of Quebec secession, inventing difficult rules along a rocky path 130 years into Confederation,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The rules are both political and legal. The legal rules are to be found in the Supreme Court of Canada’s decision in &#039;&#039;Re Quebec Secession&#039;&#039;, (1982) 2 SCR 17. The political rules, set out by the Government of Canada in 1999, would have included no shared currency or passports. Whereas the Canadian Confederation is brittle, as if held together by airplane glue, the Haudenosaunee have flexibility, as if the confederation were held together by mozzarella cheese or chewing gum.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; the Haudenosaunee provided at their Confederacy&#039;s inception for what might happen if nations or people left, and concentrated on creating ways for them to return.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The individual who &amp;quot;leaves the circle&amp;quot; does so as an individual. If the individual is a chief or clan mother, the title stays within the circle, to be given to another member of the family. There are two schools of thought about whether there is a need for a Condolence in this situation. One is that nobody has died, so there are no grieving ones to be consoled. The other is that something is necessary in order that the other nations should have the same opportunity to exercise their right of approval and acceptance (or rejection) as they had when the original chief was put forward.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a nation chooses to leave, it may do so as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In such a situation, the Condolence becomes the doorway back into the League. Once again, it serves as a means of putting sorrow, grief, anger, and hard feelings away where they cannot be brought out again. The Condolence serves as the agent of repair to seams in the Confederacy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus, William Johnson would continually advise the chiefs to &amp;quot;gather the scattered people together.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No matter where they went, they were still &amp;quot;our people,&amp;quot; connected by bonds of family. The kinship woven together through the clans was maintained no matter where people went. Mohawks from the Mohawk Valley would spend months in Kahnawake, to the confusion and frustration of the French. Kahnawake Mohawks would not fight other Mohawks in battles in which they were serving as allies to the French, and would warn other Haudenosaunee of the state of things.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;That is why Oriskany, at the beginning of the American Revolution, was such a nightmare: the Mohawks and Senecas who had come to see the British regulars give the rebels a drubbing suddenly found themselves not only in the thick of the battle but actually engaged in hand-to-hand combat with their Oneida and Tuscarora brothers. It was a bad start to a bad war.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The chiefs in the 1750s would accuse the French and British of causing the dispersion of the people. They were frank in their assessment of European strategies:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You are daily now making Disturbances &amp;amp; seem to forget the old Agreement. The Tree seems to be falling, let it now be put up, the Roots (——) and the leaves flourish as before. You formerly said, take this Bowl, &amp;amp; this piece of Meat, with this Spoon let us eat always friendly together out of one Dish; but now you forget &amp;amp; have separated the Indians very much as they can&#039;t well come together to eat out of this Dish, which is very hard as we have Children here &amp;amp; there scattered thro&#039; the country by your means.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The English your Brothers &amp;amp; you are the common Disturbers of this Country I say you as white people together. We term the English your Brothers as you must have some. We Indians you call Children—You both want to put us Indians a Quarrelling but we the Six Nations know better, if we begin we see nothing but an entire Ruin of us, as we should not leave off till all was gone, so we are resolved to keep Friends on both sides as long as possible &amp;amp; not meddle with the white People. Our arms shall be between you endeavouring to keep you asunder.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;SWJP 9:669.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the British took Montreal, there was a strong detachment of Haudenosaunee warriors with them. In September 1760, at Kahnawake, Sir William Johnson, the Imperial Superintendent General of Indian Affairs, invited the &amp;quot;Eight Nations,&amp;quot; including the Iroquois communities of Kahnawake, Kanehsatake, Akwesasne, and Oswegatchie, to officially take up their place within the Covenant Chain with the British. At the same council, those communities were invited back into the Confederacy, and they accepted:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brethren of the 5 Nat&#039;s.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(You) In return to your Belt of Yesterday Whereby you told us that as your Br. W&#039;y.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Johnson’s Mohawk name, Warraghyhagey, is most properly translated as “He Cuts Matters Short.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; (Sir William Johnson) had finished every thing with us, you on your part had something to say which was that as there had been during this war a division and disunion between us; and (thereby) desired us to reunite and be firm friends as heretofore, We hereby assure all present that we with pleasure agree to your friendly proposal and reunite as formerly.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;SWJP 13:162–64.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The American Revolution began with the Haudenosaunee determined to stay out of what they saw as a fratricidal war between their European brothers. As the war progressed, though, the Haudenosaunee were drawn in. Mohawks close to the Johnson family were impelled to defend them, encouraged by Mary Brant. Oneidas close to Samuel Kirkland joined the rebels, and the survival of the Continental Army at Valley Forge is attributed to Oneida food supplies. Senecas, Onondagas, and Cayugas who had mostly remained neutral joined the British with a vengeance after the 1779 Sullivan-Clinton campaign laid waste to their towns and countries. William Fenton has argued that &amp;quot;by the eighteenth century, the League of the Longhouse was a convenient fiction, and the Iroquois Confederacy had become the effective political institution.&amp;quot; The Haudenosaunee, today and historically, have never distinguished between the two. Fenton followed this with the conclusion that the council fire of the Confederacy itself had been extinguished with the exception of token remnants, and that &amp;quot;when a pattern of culture is shattered, a people loses its vital spark.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Fenton 1998, 710–723. Fenton’s great antipathy towards the Confederacy chiefs arose mainly from his dogged war against the repatriation of the Confederacy’s wampum belts from the New York State Museum, of which he was a trustee. He declared the wampum to be “the Elgin Marbles of New York State,” and argued that the modern Haudenosaunee were not legitimate successors to the Confederacy; that the Museum was trustee of these important artifacts for all the people of New York; and that the “young Indians” like Sostsisowah John Mohawk, Joagquisho Oren Lyons, and Hayadaha Rick Hill were disrespectful of his knowledge, which was superior to theirs, and ignorant of the meaning of the wampum. To Fenton, who had made his reputation as a scholar of Haudenosaunee history and culture, a living Confederacy was a constant challenge to his authority.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Joagquisho Oren Lyons disagrees: &amp;quot;people who argue that the Confederacy ceased to exist fail to understand the non-coercive nature of the Confederacy vis-a-vis its members and the fact that disruption is not the equivalent of cessation.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Lyons 1992, 39.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the War of 1812, the British once again called upon their allies for help. This time, the help came at first more reluctantly than ever, and ended again with the Haudenosaunee on both sides of the Niagara frontier, fighting on opposite sides, shedding their brothers&#039; blood. The Seneca chief Little Billy explained: &amp;quot;We know that neither of these powers have any regard for us. . . . Why then should we endanger our families, to enjoy their smiles only for the Day in which they need us?&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Norton 1970, 289–91. John Norton, Joseph Brant’s adopted nephew, a Scots-Cherokee Mohawk Pine Tree Chief, was interested in becoming an officer in the British Regular Army. Despite his personal commanding roles in the battles of Queenston Heights and Beaver Dams, he was ignored. Was it his age or was it racism? A little of both—but his hard work on behalf of the British was as overlooked after the war as the welfare of the Six Nations. After the war, Norton tried farming, but fled the Grand River country after a duel in which he killed a Mohawk chief who had been flirting with Norton’s wife. He may have been spotted in Laredo, Mexico, some years later, when he would have been in his sixties, but he had disappeared from the Mohawk scene.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another Seneca chief told John Norton: &amp;quot;We find ourselves in the hands of two powerful Nations, who can crush us when they please. They are the same in every respect, although they are now preparing to contend. We are ignorant of the real motives which urge them to arm,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Most of the British and Americans were also ignorant of these motives, and historians today wonder whether the war ever made any sense in the first place.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; but we are well assured that we have no interest therein, and that neither one nor the other have any real affection towards us. We know that our Blood shed in their battles will not even ensure their compassion to our Widows and Orphans.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Norton 1970, 290.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After the war, when Deputy Superintendent General of Indian Affairs William Claus met with the Crown&#039;s Indigenous allies at Burlington Bay on April 24, 1815, he explained the &amp;quot;Indian clauses&amp;quot; of the Treaty of Ghent, which restored to the Indian nations their rights as they had been before the hostilities. The war chiefs handed the conduct of the council over to the rotiyanershon, and Tekarihoken then requested British assistance in reconciliation with their brothers on the other side of the boundary line: &amp;quot;It is the sincere wish of the Six Nations and your Children of the other nations&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;It is bad etiquette in council to contradict a speaker directly. By distinguishing between the Six Nations and the “Children” of the other nations, Tekarihoken was reminding Claus, in an indirect way, of the “brothers” relationship between the Haudenosaunee and the Crown.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; that you uncover the Council Fire and request the attendance of the Americans and the Indians attached to them.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;LAC, RG8, C Series, vol. 258, pt. 1, 60–70a. See also Benn 1999.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of August 1815, the council of reconciliation took place at Niagara. On the &amp;quot;American side&amp;quot; of the fire were Senecas, Onondagas, and Cayugas from Buffalo Creek, Tonawanda, and Allegheny. On the &amp;quot;Canadian side&amp;quot; were people from the Grand River Territory. The council began with &amp;quot;the usual ceremonies of Condolence&amp;quot; by the Crown&#039;s representative, but the Haudenosaunee immediately took over the work of peacemaking. By the end of the process, the Haudenosaunee had &amp;quot;mixed together&amp;quot; and become &amp;quot;one people&amp;quot; once again. While the council was lengthy and officially at the &amp;quot;King&#039;s Council Fire,&amp;quot; it was a good example of internal Haudenosaunee reconciliation processes. While the British opened the council, the first day consisted of the propositions of the Grand River chiefs, and the &amp;quot;American side&amp;quot; chiefs replied the next day:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Deputy Superintendent addressed all the nations present, performing the usual ceremonies of Condolence and uncovering the King&#039;s Council Fire by presenting a Belt of White Wampum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tekarihoga, Principal Mohawk Chief, Speaker:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brothers and relations,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our Father has performed the Ceremonies which were customary with our Ancestors, and which we endeavour to continue. Our meeting is at our Father the King&#039;s Council Fire which has just been uncovered that we may proceed to deliberate upon the good work for which we are now assembled. We the several Nations residing at the Grand River salute you from the other side we are the same people with you, we are relations of the same colour, notwithstanding having been opposed to each other in the Field during the late Contest between our Father the King of England and the Americans. Our friend who has just uncovered the Council Fire has removed all obstructions, our minds are set at ease. The River which separates us is opened that we may have a free passage at all times. The roads are cleared of all briars and rubbish, that we may again renew that friendly intercourse which formerly existed between us. I now speak to you in behalf of the Indians residing on the Grand River, and I am desired to assure you that all ill will is removed from their Hearts towards you from the (illegible) American land.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Delivered a bunch of Strings of Wampum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Echo, an Onondaga Chief:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brothers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I salute you in the name of the Hurons, Shawnees and Six Nations at the King&#039;s Council Fire which has just been uncovered. I speak to the Senecas, Cayugas and Onondagas from Buffalo Creek, Tehaniwandi and Allegany who are now present at our Father&#039;s Council Fire. I also address those who are at their homes, before our Father the Deputy Supt. General, the King&#039;s Officers who are now present, and tell you that all ill blood has been removed from our hearts. What has been done, is now forgotten. We are all of the same colour and ought to be friendly towards each other.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To make our Friendship lasting, we put the Tomahawk the depth of a Pine Tree under ground; and that it may not be removed we place over it a Tree that the roots may so cover it that it cannot be found again. This ceremony was performed by our Father at Burlington last Spring in presence of the Western Nations and I will now repeat to you the speech which our Father delivered to us when he informed us of the Pacification with the Americans, and our Answer (here the proceeding of the Council at Burlington last Spring on the 24th, 26th and 27th April last was repeated). We condole with you from the bottom of our hearts for the loss of your friends, and wipe the tears from your eyes, we open your throats so no obstruction shall remain, that you may speak your mind freely and with the same friendship which formerly existed between us, as we now in the name of the Nations already mentioned address you as friends. If you will stand up we will take you by the hands. Should an idle young Man make use of any improper Language we request that you will not take any notice of it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Large bunch of Strings of black and white wampum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The American Indians stood up and the others took them by the hand repeating the assurances of friendship, after which the Old Eel, an Onondaga Chief spoke to the Deputy Supt. Genl. as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brothers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You have this day uncovered the King&#039;s Council Fire at this place where our forefathers were accustomed to assemble. I speak in behalf of the Indians who are now come here to meet our brethren from the Grand River. We salute you and wish you well. We have heard all that you have said now and last Spring, and are much pleased with it. We rejoice that the Great Spirit has brought us together to unite and be friends. Many have been the meetings at this place between the King and our Ancestors. I am an old man and have been present at many of these meetings when your Grand Father spoke to us.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Deputy Superintendent General William Claus was the grandson of Sir William Johnson, the first Imperial Superintendent General of Indian Affairs. The Imperial Indian Department remained under Johnson family control from 1755 to 1830: their strong Mohawk connections meant that British councils with the Haudenosaunee followed clear Haudenosaunee protocol, mindful of a long continuum of relations.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; We will always remember his words they are buried deep in our hearts. We look to you to be a friend to the Indians as he was. It is now late in the day, and as we are to answer you we will cover the fire and meet again tomorrow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A few Strings wampum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
September 1st&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tekarihoga&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brothers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We thank the Great Spirit for giving us a new day, and permitting us to meet again. We wait to hear what you may have to say.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red Jacket, Principal Seneca Speaker&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brothers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the name of the Indians from the other side of the River. I now address myself to the King, the Commg. Officers, and Colonel Claus our head, and to the Six Nations, Wyandots and Shawanese.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Strings wampum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brothers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I am happy now to meet you in the usual friendly manner, and you may be assured that what has happened was not from any animosity towards our ancient Father and friends. We are a poor people. We cannot do as we would. We are as Prisoners. But the fetters are now off and we are at liberty to communicate freely with our friends. We are not of the same Nations only, but of the same Families also. We therefore ought to be united and become one Body.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Strings of Wampum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brother&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You have informed us that the King&#039;s Council Fire is again uncovered. We are also informed that the United States have done the same. We seriously recommend that your people will now attend to your usual occupations of hunting and agriculture and that you pay due attention to your Women, who by our ancient customs have a voice in bringing up our Young people to the practice of truth and industry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Strings of Wampum. . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Road being now open, we will be glad to have a visit from you at Buffalo Creek. Eating and drinking together may be omitted at present, our time being so short, rising and shaking hands will do as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Strings of wampum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They then mixed with each other and spoke to the Deputy Supt. General as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tekarihoga, Speaker&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brothers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You have witnessed our proceedings which it has pleased the Ruler of the World to assist us in. It has finished as we could wish, and we desire that you will immediately acquaint our Western Brethren of the work we have been doing; and that we shall soon proceed to the west to meet them and perform the same ceremony there as was agreed upon last spring in Council. We now speak to you in One Body, and we hope that we shall be allowed to travel along the road peaceably and without being insulted by the inhabitants, and that you will give us provisions to enable us to travel homewards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Deputy Superintendent General&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brothers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In compliance with your particular request expressed in your Speech of 26th April last, your Father General Drummond ordered that I should be present at this meeting, and I have now to express how much I am satisfied with the whole of your proceedings which I very earnestly recommend you to keep in remembrance. The Road has been open&#039;d and made smooth for you all. When the King of England made peace with the Americans he was particular in stipulating that no difficulties should be thrown in the road to interrupt a free intercourse between his Indian Children. I am sorry to understand that the Inhabitants have in some cases behaved improperly towards you but your young men have provoked the resentment by their own misconduct. You are all under the protection of your Great Father the King, and if you conduct yourselves peaceably towards his white children, they will not be permitted to ill treat you. Provisions will be provided for you on your return homewards. I now cover the Council Fire and wish you a safe return home.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Transcript of a council at Niagara, August 31–September 1, 1890. LAC, RG 8, vol. 258, pt. 1, 204–8.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee had required the assistance of the British to create the opportunity for reconciliation—to kindle the council fire at which this would take place—but by the end of the council (and unaccountably omitting the feast that would have firmly brought them together) they spoke across the fire to William Claus as &amp;quot;one people&amp;quot; again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Perhaps the Haudenosaunee are always at the edge of division: the bonds that link the nations, despite their strong description, are voluntary, not the result of compulsion. Recognizing the possibility of these splits, the Peacemaker built into the law the means of reconciliation. In contrast, there is no constitutional provision for secession—or rejoining—by states or provinces in the Euro-American nations. Instead, there have been Quebec referenda and court decisions, and an American Civil War.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pine Tree Chiefs ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the beginning, it was clear that there would be able leaders who were not members of the lineages of the rotiyanershon. This would be especially true of a League that was designed to bring in people of all nations, extending the longhouse. The Great Peace would require their participation and support. The Peacemaker created a new institution, the Pine Tree Chief:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereupon Dekanawidah said, &amp;quot;Now, again, I decree another thing: you chiefs of the several nations of our League, if something should happen, if ever a disruptive idea were to enter where the Great Pine is located, where the power is situated, if the chiefs are unable to agree, thereupon someone among the warriors or the people—just whoever in the crowd is able—that one shall help, assisting them at the Council, the League chiefs. This is also the one who will help the crowd, for he is able, this one, to climb their tree, Skaehetsi:kowa, Great Tall Tree, and he is able to perch on top of the tree. There upon he will look around for a place having an opening, a space for them to escape, the entire crowd, so that they may survive and also our grandchildren. Thereupon he will descend again and stand up there in front of the chiefs. Thereafter he will place in front of them his own opinion, he having observed where they can escape in order for the entire group to survive, so that the day will dawn for generations of our grandchildren.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereupon the chiefs will take it up, considering whether they can see that it will be correct, the warrior&#039;s information, that this is what will help them. After the chiefs accept it, the suggestion of the one not holding office, they will confirm it, and if it turns out well—the warrior&#039;s information concerning the great matter with which he is helping all of the people—then the chiefs will think carefully about the man, the warrior holding no office, thinking about his ability to save them, the ongoing families. Thereupon they will decide to include him where they are seated to counsel together, the chiefs of the five nations. And there they will stand him up, in front of the chiefs who will then give him a title which they will call Pine Tree Chief,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Newhouse 1885, 154, calls these people Yoh-neh-doh-da onh, “a chief by merit,” and says “the chiefs will proclaim in their assembly ‘&#039;&#039;O-ka-yon-don-tshe-rah&#039;&#039;’ that such a one has now become what is called ‘&#039;&#039;Wa-ho-di-neh-dot-hah-she&#039;&#039;’ (it means a Pine Tree has grown out from the ground for them).”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; the self-made chief, and this is because he helped the chiefs and the entire group. Moreover, actually, he has as much power as the antlered chiefs of our various nations, all of the trees being of equal height.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If it should happen that a Pine Tree Chief, a self-made one, if ever he spoils certain matters between the chiefs and the people, the chiefs will pick up the matter of the Pine Tree Chief, and if they find that he is not truthful in his dealings, then the chiefs will decide to take back his title,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Newhouse 1885, 154, says that “no one is able to put him out of the council when he does anything contrary to the Constitution of the Confederate Nations or other mischief, but his mouth can be closed.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and he will come back out from where the chiefs are located. Then it will come to happen again that he will be like the public, he no longer having a title, and we will call this they knocked the tree down again; but if the one who becomes a Pine Tree Chief is righteous, and works conscientiously—he not causing trouble for the chiefs and the people—then they will be permanent, his duties with his colleagues, which means that he will help the whole group—including the coming generations of our grandchildren—and that he should not spoil matters within the League. In fact, his duties as a chief will last as long as he lives, and when he dies, then it will end, the title, which he will take with him, so that never another should be given that title. That is how it will continue to be done among the several nations and clans of our League.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 464–72.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Pine Tree Chief, then, is an adviser to the council.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Snow 1994, 65: “The office of Pine Tree Chief was defined to accommodate men of ability who did not happen to come from clan segments that held League titles.” This is not quite accurate, since it was also designed to include men of merit whose families already had a representative (for example, in the first part of the twentieth century, William Loft held the Mohawk title Dewaserage; his brother Anadahes Frederick Loft was a Pine Tree Chief).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; His advice is of such consistently good quality that the chiefs in council may decide to raise him up themselves. As he is a &amp;quot;pine tree,&amp;quot; it is said, his roots are in the council, not in his family, so that he can be removed by the chiefs without any reference to a clan or clan mothers. At the same time, because he has been raised up by the chiefs, he is protected by them against the ill will of the people. He sits in council as an equal, in the sense that he has a right to be heard equal to other chiefs: &amp;quot;Whenever we discover a warrior who is wise and trustworthy and who will render his services for the benefit of the people and thus aid the lords of the confederacy, we will claim him into our midst and confer upon him the title &#039;He has sprung up as a Pine Tree&#039; (Eh-ka-neh-do-deh) and his title shall last only during his lifetime and shall not be hereditary and at his death it shall die with him.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Chiefs) 1916, 108.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Pine Tree Chief sits in council with the chiefs of his nation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
His title lasts only as long as his lifetime: the name is then retired, in the sense that he does not have any successor. While there is no official limit to the number of Pine Tree Chiefs, they never crowd out the rotiyanershon. They are men of exceptional ability, and there are not many of them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Teianoken (Deyanoga) was a Pine Tree Chief before he became a Mohawk title holder. When he went to England in 1710 he was known as Teyoninhokarawen. It is said that Sir William Johnson, Warraghyihagey, became a Pine Tree Chief in 1746–47 under the &amp;quot;sponsorship&amp;quot; of Theyanoguin. It is also said that Thayendenegea Joseph Brant became a Pine Tree Chief under the sponsorship of Warraghyihagey. And it is said that another Teyoninhokarawen, John Norton, Thayendenegea&#039;s adopted nephew, became a Pine Tree Chief, put forward by Thayendenegea. Through this succession of Pine Tree Chiefs, one can see the bones of a multi-generational Mohawk strategy for survival in turbulent times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At Tonawanda, it is said that Sagoyewatha (Red Jacket) was appointed chief of the Beaver Clan, but because of his actions, the title was removed not only from him but also from the clan. A gifted orator, he was speaker for the council fire at Buffalo Creek, and also occasionally for the women,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Sagoyewatha spoke for the Women at the Canandaigua Treaty in 1794 (Ganter 2006, 62).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; but there are few references to him as a chief.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Morgan says that “it would have been unwise to raise up a man of his intellectual power and extended influence to the office of sachem; as it would have concentrated in his hands too much authority” ((1851) 1995, 98). See also Stone 1841. Toriwawakon Paul Wallace, basing his statement on Seneca oral tradition, says that Red Jacket was removed as speaker and Handsome Lake was installed as a supreme chief at Buffalo Creek. The history of the Buffalo Creek council fire—the interim measure before the split between Grand River and Onondaga—has not been fully written.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Instead, he is often referred to as a speaker, and occasionally as a Pine Tree Chief.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lately, the Confederacy has been reluctant to appoint Pine Tree Chiefs.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Possibly the split at Tonawanda in the 1980s between the condoled chiefs and the men they had appointed as Pine Trees has contributed to the reluctance. Another reason, more commonly given, is that they are waiting to restore the full complement of the council before moving on to the other institutions of the Confederacy. Sometimes it is suggested that the problem of duplication of titles between communities could be resolved by the appointment of Pine Tree Chiefs to fill the needs of local councils. While this would satisfy leadership needs, it would mean using an institution for a purpose for which it was never intended, a sometimes dangerous proposition. Appointing temporary local “representatives” has been tried, with difficult results, since the representatives often later refuse to step aside, as in the Oneida and Cayuga communities in New York.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Local or Village Chiefs ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Peacemaker arrived, the leaders he met were all local or village chiefs. In creating the League, he &amp;quot;raised them up&amp;quot; to be leaders not only of their own village or nation but of all the nations together. However, it is clear that the villages were administered not as dictatorships but as democracies, with councils held among families, clans, and all the people, and also among men and women, to make necessary decisions. Each town or village had &amp;quot;chiefs&amp;quot; for specific purposes: there would be people who would be &amp;quot;chiefs&amp;quot; of certain ceremonies or societies; &amp;quot;war chiefs&amp;quot; and probably &amp;quot;chiefs&amp;quot; for fishing or hunting. Though the fifty men whose names became permanent titles of the Haudenosaunee were often called &amp;quot;the chiefs,&amp;quot; in fact the institution of &amp;quot;village chief&amp;quot; for local purposes continued.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The use of the English word &amp;quot;chief&amp;quot; to describe several quite different kinds of Haudenosaunee leaders had added a layer to the confusion. To distinguish the rotiyanershon from others, the Algonkian word &amp;quot;sachem&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Delaware &#039;&#039;sagamo&#039;&#039;, Ojibway &#039;&#039;ogima&#039;&#039;, Passamaquoddy &#039;&#039;sakima&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;sakokum.&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; began to be used in the seventeenth century. Confederacy chiefs, Pine Tree Chiefs, local chiefs, including local &amp;quot;life chiefs&amp;quot;—the actual authority of the individuals led to confusion, at first among the Europeans who met them, and eventually among the Haudenosaunee themselves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It appears that, historically, when a new village was created (as distinct from an existing village moving to a new location), a local council was created that reflected the clan and family makeup of the community. That way, every part of the community would have a voice in its council. Thus, the mainly Mohawk community of Akwesasne had nine chiefs for the three Mohawk clans (Turtle, Bear, and Wolf) from its founding in 1749 to the arrival of the Onondagas from Oswegatchie, when three more chiefs were added to reflect the Snipe and Deer clans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Morgan suggested that the local chiefs originated later than the formation of the Confederacy, but that local chiefs and Pine Tree Chiefs were similar:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the power of the Ho-de-no-sau-nee began to develop, under the new system of oligarchies within an oligarchy, there sprang up around the sachems a class of warriors, distinguished for enterprise upon the war-path and eloquence in council, who demanded some participation in the administration of public affairs. The serious objection to the enlargement of the number of rulers, involving, as it did, changes in the framework of the government, for a long period enabled the sachems to resist the encroachment. In the progress of events, this class became too powerful to be withstood, and the sachems were compelled to raise them up in the subordinate station of chiefs. The title was purely elective, and the reward of merit. Unlike the sachemships, the name was not hereditary in the tribe or family of the individual, but terminated with the chief himself; unless subsequently bestowed by the tribe upon some other person, to preserve it as one of their illustrious names. These chiefs were originally invested with very limited powers, their principal office being that of advisers and counsellors of the sachems. Having thus obtained a foothold in the government, this class, to the number of which there was no limit, gradually enlarged their influence, and from generation to generation drew nearer to an equality with the sachems themselves. By this innovation the government was liberalized, to the sensible diminution of the power of the sachems, which, at the institution of the League, was extremely arbitrary.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Morgan (1851) 1995, 95.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the institution of this office, the stability of the government was increased rather than diminished. In their own figurative enunciation of the idea, the chiefs served as braces in the Long House—an apt expression of the place they occupied in their political structure. It furnished a position and a reward for the ambitious, and the means of allaying discontent, without changing the ruling body. In this particular, the oligarchy of the Iroquois appears to have enjoyed some superiority over those of antiquity.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Morgan (1851) 1995, 96–97.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The chiefs in each gens were usually proportioned to the number of its members. Among the Seneca-Iroquois there is one chief for about every fifty persons. They now number in New York some three thousand, and have eight sachems and about sixty chiefs. There are reasons for supposing that the proportionate number is now greater than in former times.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Morgan (1871) 1997, 73. In the days when the Senecas numbered above 20,000, they still had only eight rotiyanershon. Morgan included sub-chiefs and possibly faithkeepers as “chiefs.” In some communities today, local councils include faithkeepers, who are sometimes called “chiefs,” though this raises some controversy in the communities that reserve that title for rotiyanershon. Two thoughts emerge from this discussion. First, it may be the lack of representation of all the clans and families that made the Seneca Nation especially susceptible to the pressures of government by election. Second, the small number of chiefs was probably a reflection of the many foreign nations the Senecas had adopted, none of whom would find representation in the Confederacy Council.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The same method of election and confirmation (as for a sachem) existed with respect to the office of chief, and for the same reasons. But a general council was never convened to raise up chiefs below the grade of a sachem. They awaited the time when sachems were invested.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Morgan (1871) 1997, 73. In the early twenty-first century, there has been a debate about whether Tuscarora chiefs can be condoled by the other nations. In an argument parallel to how Morgan described recognition of local chiefs, it has been suggested that the Tuscaroras should wait for a Condolence of the rotiyanershon of another nation, and then introduce their new chiefs at that ceremony, where the rest of the Confederacy will then recognize them by lining up to shake their hands.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other famous Pine Tree Chiefs include Anadahes Frederick Ogilvie Loft, a Wolf Clan Mohawk from the Grand River Territory who in 1920 founded the League of Indians of Canada and became its first president. The league was the direct ancestor of the National Indian Brotherhood and the Assembly of First Nations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Maintenance and Renewal ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A bark longhouse had a life span similar to a human generation. Towards the end of that time, it would become necessary to prop it up from the outside with poles. That was taken as a sign that it was time to begin to look for a new site for the village, and to begin clearing the land there.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Two other factors made a move desirable: the soil of the fields and gardens could be getting tired after a generation of planting, and the people would have greater distances to walk for firewood. See Engelbrecht (2003, 102–3), who also suggests that the longer walks for firewood would also be unsafe for women venturing farther from the safety of the palisades, but argues that the intercropping of maize and beans may have mitigated exhaustion of the soil.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Bark houses required maintenance and renewal: water, wind, insects, ice, and time would wear away their sturdiness and comfort.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Similarly, the League and the law required periodic renewal, to keep them fresh in the minds of the people. Newhouse made it a precise obligation: &amp;quot;Every five years the Five Nations Confederate Lords and the people shall assemble together and shall ask one another if their minds are still in the same spirit of unity for the Great Binding Law and if any of the Five Nations shall not pledge continuance and steadfastness to the pledge of unity then the Great Binding Law shall dissolve.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parker (Newhouse and Cusick) 1916, 45. Another Newhouse version states maintenance more positively, omitting the dissolution, and merely saying that “all of the Five Nations shall declare continuance and steadfastness in the unity of the pledge of the Confederacy of the Great Peace” (14th Wampum). Counter to this “dissolution theory” runs the tradition that as long as there remain three nations committed to the Great Law, the councils and government can continue.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Maintaining the longhouse, architecturally, did not mean replacing any part of its framework: the posts that formed its core remained in place throughout the life of the building. Cedar posts did not rot. The bark shingles would be replaced regularly. This made it easy for people to understand that the trappings of the constitution could be changed, while its core architecture must remain constant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Propping up the longhouse from the outside&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hayadaha Richard Hill, personal communication.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; became the metaphor for those nations that would &amp;quot;support the League&amp;quot; without coming inside it for shelter. On wampum belts, the commitment of these nations was symbolized by diagonal lines, leaning like supporting poles. Once the Tuscaroras were brought into the house, it was said that they had propped up the house from the inside—just as adding rafters would strengthen the structure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Amendment: Adding to the Rafters ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Confederacy was formed, the Senecas were the westernmost nation; the Mohawks were at the Eastern Door; the communities of each nation were not far from one another, in clusters. The population was small enough that each citizen had direct contact with the people who spoke in council.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today, the Mohawks are still at the Eastern Door—at least, those of Kahnawake, Kanehsatake, and Akwesasne are. But there are also Mohawk communities at the Bay of Quinte, the Grand River, and Wahta. The Oneidas in New York are west of the three eastern Mohawk communities—but there are also Oneidas at the Grand River, on the Thames River, and in Wisconsin. The Onondagas are evenly split between those who remain at Onondaga and those on the Grand River. The Cayugas are in New York but also on the Grand River and in Oklahoma. The Senecas are in New York, on the Grand River, and in Oklahoma.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nor are the chiefs&#039; titles spread around evenly or equitably. Some communities claim all the titles belonging to a nation; some have none.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the principle of the law is that everyone should have a voice in council, then there is room for constitutional adjustment. The Peacemaker recognized that change should be possible within the structures he had created: he called it &amp;quot;adding to the rafters&amp;quot;—indeed, amendment would be necessary as the peace expanded: &amp;quot;This is then just what should happen: namely that we should afterward join additional roof poles to the framework (&#039;&#039;hosedwawanahsdahso’den&#039;&#039;), &#039;great sooty black rafters&#039; (by amendment to the structure of our government).&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1899, para. 70.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basic principles would remain as constant as the architecture, though the size of the house might evolve.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;About 30 percent of the historic longhouses that have been excavated by archaeologists show signs of having been expanded or added to (Engelbrecht 2003, 72; Warrick 1996, 21). Because the posts at the ends of longhouses were not load bearing, they were not sunk as deeply as the side posts, and the archaeological record of adding to and subtracting from longhouses seasonally is incomplete. There are very few reliable eyewitness drawings of the exteriors of longhouses, and even fewer of the interiors.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Few versions of the Kayanerenkó:wa explain how &amp;quot;adding to the rafters&amp;quot; shall take place, but each version confirms that change is possible and contemplated.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;In Canadian law, the courts have said that “the British North America Act planted in Canada a living tree capable of growth and expansion within its natural limits” (&#039;&#039;Edwards v. A.G. Canada&#039;&#039;, (1930) A.C. 124). Chief Justice Dickson wrote that “A statute . . . is easily enacted and as easily repealed. A constitution, by contrast, is drafted with an eye to the future. Its function is to provide a continuing framework for the legitimate exercise of governmental power. . . . Once enacted, its provisions cannot be easily repealed or amended. It must, therefore, be capable of growth and development over time to meet new social, political and historical realities often unimagined to its framers” (&#039;&#039;Hunter v. Southam Inc.&#039;&#039;, (1984) 2 S.C.R. 145 at 155). While deliberate change is one way for a constitution to evolve, Canadian law also recognizes that there is a “doctrine of progressive interpretation” through which the courts and legislators can also help the constitution adapt to social change (Hogg 1997, 15–43 to 15–44; &#039;&#039;Halpern v. Canada&#039;&#039; (2003), 65 O.R. (3d) 161 at 175).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Amending a constitution is difficult enough in most nations, whether it is to be accomplished by a referendum, by high levels of approval in the legislature, or by approval from the legislature of another nation. The Peacemaker brought a message from the Creator: even while acknowledging the intention to allow change consistent with the architecture of the law, many are reluctant, as mere humans, to tamper with the details of the law. Whereas the Peacemaker had the self-confidence of an artist, modern generations of Haudenosaunee have the hesitancy and reluctance of restorers—the reticence of those who are following in the path of the great. As a result, the evolution of the Kayanerenkó:wa tends to be more organic than deliberate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furthermore, modern Haudenosaunee lawmakers tend to be conservatives. That is, they are conservative in their adherence to tradition and their resistance to change. Not only do they see Haudenosaunee principles and values as constant—they are also concerned that any change at all is likely to be a step towards assimilation into the Euro-American societies of the United States and Canada. As a result, instead of seeing change—adding to the rafters—as a vehicle for adaptation, they see maintaining tradition as a vehicle of resistance to assimilation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are those who would insist that, since the Peacemaker was a messenger from the Creator, it would take another messenger from the Creator to bring any significant constitutional change. These people are supported in their position by a view that Skanaiatariio, Handsome Lake, was just such a messenger, bringing visions and prescriptions for Haudenosaunee conduct in a time of rapid social, economic, and technological change. Since new messages are possible—indeed, many believe that a fourth and final message is due soon—tinkering with the constitution by mere humans should not be permitted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any constitution that is a &amp;quot;fixed canon&amp;quot; created in a &amp;quot;constitutional moment&amp;quot; rather than organically, over time (like the British constitution, which, while mostly written, is not contained in a single document) creates a tendency towards &amp;quot;ancestor worship,&amp;quot; a retrospective view that attributes wisdom and prescience to the founders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This resistance to change by &amp;quot;traditionalists&amp;quot; manifests itself most obviously in terms of a resistance rather than an adaptation to new technology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Four kinds of constitutional or governmental changes have swept the Haudenosaunee in the past century and a half.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One kind of change, exemplified best by the &amp;quot;Seneca Nation of Indians,&amp;quot; involves a movement within the people themselves to adopt a constitution that abandons the Kayanerenkó:wa and adopts the forms and values of the governments of the United States or Canada.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Not all traditional values have been abandoned by the Seneca Nation of Indians. Its judiciary, for example, is still called a “Peacemaker’s Court.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; In each case, though, there are people in the community who recognize and sustain the Confederacy and its laws.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A second kind of change, exemplified best by the experience at the Six Nations Grand River Territory, involves the imposition of a system of local government chosen by elections and created and authorized by external laws.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A third kind of change, reflected in the operations of the Oneida Nation of New York, maintains aspects of traditional structures (a &amp;quot;Men&#039;s Council,&amp;quot; for example) while breaking away from the Kayanerenkó:wa itself.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Without land recognized as “Indian reserve” land, the Mohawk community of Kanehsatake vacillates between an Indian Act–style elected council and a council that reflects aspects of the Kayanerenkó:wa, although there is also a separate presence of traditional Haudenosaunee government in the community. Litigation between rival groups brings Canadian courts to consider what constitutes Kanehsatake Mohawk government, but not very well.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth kind of change—apparently the hardest to accomplish—is within the law, maintaining its spirit and intent, and adapting it to reflect the needs of modern Haudenosaunee communities. The best example of this is the determination of the Grand Council in 1998 that there should be only fifty rotiyanershon in all the Confederacy, and that negotiations should occur within each of the nations to ensure that the benches were filled and that each of the communities had a clear voice in the government of the Haudenosaunee. This decision was clearly conservative: it marked a return to the original terms of the law rather than a recognition of &amp;quot;duplication of titles&amp;quot; that was leading to the existence of &amp;quot;two confederacies&amp;quot;—one in Canada, one in the United States. There had been a belief, especially among some on the American side, that a royá:ner&#039;s &amp;quot;horns got caught in the bushes at the border,&amp;quot; so that he would only be a chief in the country in which his own community was located, and this would justify duplications of titles. The Grand Council decision refuted this. As a statement of intended unity, it was consistent with the values that the Peacemaker expressed. Implementation has been more difficult than anticipated: no individual nation has resolved its issues, and allocation of titles has become a new source of friction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Prophecy: Things Will Go Wrong ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The great Haudenosaunee narratives contain predictions that may be warnings or may simply be explanations of how things will end. In the Creation story, the end of days is dire:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Long before the end, you will see that the things upon which you live will gradually decrease in quantity, all the things on earth that grow will become weaker, and finally it will happen that nothing more can grow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The same will happen to the animals and the birds. They will also grow fewer in number until at some future time you will see no more of them. And at that time awe-inspiring things will happen. There will be earthquakes and things which have great power which now abide in the earth will come forth and they will be more powerful than human beings.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Mohawk 2005a, 88–89.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Compared to those calamities, the future difficulties of the Confederacy, as predicted by the Peacemaker, seem benign:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereafter Tekanawita said: This is what else I ordain. It may happen in future that something is going to impoverish them, it wasting their land; or it may happen that perhaps someone will roll their heads somewhere, and he, walking along, a man, will observe, their heads rolling along, and thereupon the man may say, &amp;quot;Indeed, now it serves them right, they of the League,&amp;quot; and kick the heads. Thereupon he may say, &amp;quot;In the past, in our former days, they used to have power and they used to be proud of their strength.&amp;quot; Thereupon the man will pass through and he will not have gone far, before he will vomit blood, for it is still possible for it to punish him for kicking his League&#039;s head.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;“It will be hard and your grandchildren will suffer hardship. And if it may so occur that the heads of the people of the confederacy shall roll and wander away westward, if such a thing should come to pass, other nations shall see your heads rolling and wandering away and they shall say to you ‘You belong to the confederacy, you were a proud and haughty people once,’ and they shall kick the heads with scorn, and they shall go on their way, but before they shall have gone far they shall vomit up blood (Meaning that the Confederacy shall still have power enough to avenge their people).” Parker (Chiefs) 1916, 105. See also Gibson 1899, para. 124.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereupon Tekanawita said, &amp;quot;This is what it means, &#039;their heads will roll, they of the League.&#039; If the Five Nations make a mistake where they have their families, then they will disperse, some going towards the east, some going towards the west, some going towards the south, some going towards the north; thus, the families will scatter, and the several nations will live all over the Island, and nowhere can one find space to live and multiply, for they won&#039;t make space for them and give them shelter, the individual families. If it happens that they do shelter them, it won&#039;t be long before those living there will begin to abuse them, eventually forcing them to leave their settlement, and the reason why they will do this is that they have never accepted the League&#039;s Great Law and Peace; this is what they will see, our grandchildren, should it happen that they don&#039;t watch out, the chiefs of the League.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereupon, Tekanawita said, &amp;quot;Moreover, I decree that if this is what will happen to the coming generations, if they are going to be impoverished, our grandchildren, then these chiefs are to look for the very biggest tree, the large elm, which is tall and has huge branches and roots, all of them extending equally into the depths, and if they find such a large tree with long branches and roots extending equally deep, they will have good luck in generations to come, our grandchildren; in that place they will collect their heads, all of the nations of our League, all of us will place our heads there, and there we will hide our heads as long as it will last, the earth which is beneath the sun. This is where it will again be possible for them to be happy for they will continue to hold on to that which protects the group, that is, the Good Message and the Power and the Peace and the Great Law; there the fire will be rekindled, our fire of our League which will keep burning and the smoke that will keep rising, piercing the sky, and again it will be able to help them at our various smoking fireplaces whose smoke is piercing the sky, where all of us share our beliefs.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereupon Tekanawita said: &amp;quot;Now we have completed our task. This, again, will help them, the families of our League.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 478–85.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The chiefs&#039; heads rolling around is a symbol of their inability to make decisions or to bring their minds together. Another symbol used in this part of the law, with the same meaning, is that the chiefs will shuffle their feet in indecision under their benches.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is said that during the time of the American Revolution, the settlers had so crowded the Haudenosaunee, especially in the east, and had abused them so much, that the Grand River Territory was the fulfillment of the Peacemaker&#039;s prophecy—and so the fire of the League was rekindled there, with all the titles and all the families settling along the banks of the river. There they had found the Great Swamp Elm to which the Peacemaker had referred.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reality is more complex, and a crucial period of Haudenosaunee history has been poorly studied and often misinterpreted. William Fenton concluded that the council fire at Onondaga was extinguished—permanently put out—and that marked the end of the Confederacy. He viewed subsequent Haudenosaunee governments as illegitimate, and maintained that the League and Confederacy came to an end.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Fenton 1998, 710–723.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; James Deane, an enemy of the Haudenosaunee, whose instructions to negotiators at Fort Stanwix in 1784 were to intimidate and insult the chiefs, declared the Confederacy dead: &amp;quot;But as the heads of the Confederacy had now declared themselves so fully upon the subject, they now let go their Hold of peace; extinguished the Council Fire, sunk the Tree of Peace into the Earth and caused a total Darkness to overspread the Confederacy.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;James Deane to General Schuyler, January 18, 1779, &#039;&#039;Indian Affairs Papers&#039;&#039;, 181.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, Haudenosaunee tradition and action point to a different conclusion, based on resilience, pragmatism, and necessity. Samuel Kirkland, a missionary to the Oneidas, refuted this premature death: he wrote on January 19, 1776: &amp;quot;The dissolving their Body-politic, or extinguishing the Council Fire at Onondaga, is only a pretext by which they will repair to Niagara and then to renew their ancient Covenant with the British King. I apprehend it will be wise and politic for you to perform the ceremony of condolence and replace those sachems and thereby rekindle the capital fire of the Six Nations.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Indian Affairs Papers&#039;&#039;, 70. Kirkland may have been referring to the part of the ceremony of Condolence that rekindles the council fire—he would use the ceremony to reactivate the fire at Onondaga.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fire at Onondaga was &amp;quot;covered over,&amp;quot; not extinguished.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;The word “extinguishment” was chosen by United States and Canadian courts to describe transactions and laws that put an end to Aboriginal title and rights. For a people whose symbol was the fire, “extinguishment” and “genocide” are not far apart. And in Canadian law, since to establish an Aboriginal right, one must show that the practice is “an integral part of the distinctive society,” so important that “they would not be the same people without it”—the taking (“infringement”) of an Aboriginal right—after “consultation” and compensation—could meet elements of the international definition of “genocide.”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The council fire of the Confederacy was rekindled for a while—from 1784 to 1838—at Buffalo Creek. Buffalo Creek—halfway between the new Grand River Territory in Upper Canada and the remaining unsurrendered Seneca territory—was also large enough to be a central council fire. However, there was internal dissension, including an ugly confrontation between Handsome Lake on one hand and Farmer&#039;s Brother, Cornplanter, and Red Jacket on the other—and eventually the fire at Onondaga was rekindled, and an arrangement was made for what seemed to be a &amp;quot;two-headed&amp;quot; confederacy, with one part dealing with the British and one dealing with the United States. The wampums were divided according to how they would be most useful (some minor individual belts may have been &amp;quot;split&amp;quot; into two), with the belts recording agreements with the United States remaining at Onondaga, and the belts with the British at the Grand River.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Condolence has given the Haudenosaunee a means of healing rifts and hard feelings. The split in the Confederacy has occurred several times in the past two centuries, usually when the neighbours are at war and draw the warriors into the conflict. After the French capitulation at Montreal in 1760, there was a separate council at Kahnawake, in which the Mohawks who had accompanied the British Army invited the people of Kahnawake, Kanehsatake, Akwesasne, and Oswegatchie to reunite as formerly, and become one people again. The invitation was accepted, and the one Confederacy restored. The American Revolutionary War saw Oneidas side with the rebels and Mohawks side with the Tories, and eventually Seneca, Onondaga, and Cayuga communities, seeking neutrality, were attacked in the Sullivan-Clinton campaign of 1779 and sided with the British. After the war, though, there was reconciliation and reunification. In the War of 1812, there were Oneida and Tuscarora fighters on the American side, and people from the Grand River (at Queenston Heights, Chippewa, and Beaver Dams) and the eastern Mohawk communities (at Chateauguay, Chrysler&#039;s Farm, and Beaver Dams) fighting for the British. In 1815, when peace was announced, the two sides came together, condoled, and reunited. The Condolence serves as the formal record of that accord, as it serves as formal evidence that a person is indeed a royá:ner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is useful to think of Haudenosaunee communities as an archipelago, their people navigating between these islands of culture, history, ecology, language, and law. There is constant communication. As the Government of Canada learned the hard way in 1990, in a crisis, the people come together without regard to boundaries or political leanings. In dealings with other Indigenous nations and with the nation-states of the world, there is no doubt that the Haudenosaunee still exist, and that the institutions created by their laws still function. Nevertheless, there is also erosion of culture, values, institutions, and law. The Peacemaker&#039;s warnings are never far from people&#039;s minds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of what the Peacemaker did in designing the law was immediate and remedial, and dealt with the challenges of his times—yet the reference to the chiefs&#039; heads rolling around, and the people seeking the great swamp elm, is prophecy. It is also a warning: anyone who shows disrespect for the League will suffer. More literally, anyone who kicks the chiefs when they are down will vomit blood and die:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It may be that after the lapse of time, some person may come and will see this Root (or, one of these Roots) extending along, and seeing that it is a Root beautiful beyond measure, will raise his hatchet and will strike it into the Root—blood will flow from the Root, we all shall feel it. Whenever we have felt this, we shall know that he who has struck his hatchet into the Root does not desire to receive the Great Law. Then we will look and we shall see the lack of the retreating culprit, and before he has gone far something occult and supernatural will happen to him, for blood shall come forth from his mouth, and there will be yet power to repeat this mystic stroke upon him.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Hewitt 1892b, 143.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the very end, when the chiefs in council can no longer agree, when the League&#039;s affairs diminish, and when the chiefs are constantly making mistakes, a white meteor will descend and remove the Great Law as a source of dispute. The earth will open up and &amp;quot;their feet will dangle over the edge.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;This phrase is also used to describe the fate of a chief who leaves the circle of the law (Hohahes Leroy Hill, Oneida, August 2013).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; At that time, &amp;quot;the chiefs of the League no longer control their Power and Peace and it is impossible for them to save the people, and really the only one who will be able to save the people, the only one able to do it, will be the Creator, the one who has created all things on earth.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 61.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Is this dire warning a certainty? No: the Peacemaker follows it with another prediction—that the League will last as long as the matters of the natural world:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These shall last as long as the earth exists, and as long as they are going to grow, the grasses and also the various weeds, and as long as the shrubs keep growing wild, the various shrubs, and as long as they keep growing wild, the trees, all kinds of trees, and as long as springs emerge the water of the rivers will keep flowing, also the large rivers and the various lakes; and as long as the sun keeps rising and setting and the moon keeps up its phases, and in the sky the stars do the same, and the wind is stirring on the land, and heavenly bodies continue to provide light by day and by night; thus, it shall last, the task we are completing, the Great Law, and these two shall co-operate, the earthly land and the other one, the heavenly land.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 62. These words evoke two related addresses. In their order and completeness, they echo the Thanksgiving. They are clearly precursors of the words spoken of treaties between the Crown and the Haudenosaunee, and later other Indigenous nations. This is unsurprising: the speakers for the Crown, in the treaties from the 1750s to the 1830s, were often members of the Johnson family, who had been immersed in council procedure by the Haudenosaunee. “As long as the sun shall shine, the grasses grow and the waters flow” (see Denning, J. in &#039;&#039;Secretary of State (Indian Association of Alberta)&#039;&#039;, (1982) 2 All ER 118).&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nevertheless, the earth is warming. Its climate is becoming more extreme. Many of the people on the move today are not economic migrants: they are climate refugees. Their homes are being eaten by droughts and floods, and by wars that were spawned by droughts and floods. The anger and sorrow of the people of the earth are intensifying. The trees are dying from the tops down, as Haudenosaunee prophecies have warned. We all need condoling and compassion, for we are one family.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== And in the End . . . ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As a legal system, the Kayanerenkó:wa is too complex to be described in a single volume. Its principles are distinctive and pragmatic enough that they deserve study and can withstand careful scrutiny. They are not a historical curiosity: above all, they are &#039;&#039;alive.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
John Ralston Saul has suggested that the Canadian tendency to seek consensus rather than confrontation originates in an extensive colonial and Canadian experience with Indigenous peoples and processes.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Saul 2008.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; The United States Congress acknowledges a debt to the Haudenosaunee in the thinking behind its own constitution, the system of checks and balances that, it is hoped, will prevent any single branch of the government from gaining abusive power over the others. These would be significant contributions, but there are other aspects of Haudenosaunee constitutional thought that are also worth emulating. Protection for the environment; respect for women; consideration of impacts on future generations; maintaining peace through long-term relationships; a system for resolving concerns before they become disputes—all contribute to a viable alternative to short-term political confrontations. Against fierce odds, the Haudenosaunee way of thought and law has survived. Its contemporary challenges, from within and without, come in the form of individualism (David Newhouse spoke glowingly of &amp;quot;the Borg of capitalism&amp;quot;) and a desire for prosperity that tumbles into greed; of cultural, linguistic and institutional loss, the legacy of generations of deliberate and collateral assimilation policies; of simple human weaknesses. Indeed, the world is a cruel place for small peoples. Nevertheless, the &amp;quot;Confederacy culture&amp;quot; that Sotsisowah John Mohawk spoke of is more than an ember. Its carriers are convinced that their stewardship is worthwhile.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On May 6, 1993, speaking to the Canadian Royal Commission on Aboriginal Peoples, Otsitsaken:ra Charles Patton of Kahnawa:ke explained: &amp;quot;We are the ones that are living on the earth today; right at this time. We are the ones that are carrying the responsibility of our nations, of our spirituality, of our relationship with the Creator, on our shoulders. We have the mandate to carry that today, at this moment in time. Our languages, our spirituality and everything that we are was given to us and was carried before us by our ancestors, our grandparents who have passed on. When they couldn&#039;t carry it any longer and they went to join that spirit world, they handed it to us and they said: &#039;Now you are the real ones. You have to carry it.&#039; Now they are in the spirit world. They are our past. Now we have a responsibility to carry that because we hear seven generations in the future. They are our future. They are ones that are not yet born.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;RCAP 1995, 620.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the 1990s, the councils began to permit my colleagues and me to use the principles of the law in our negotiations with other governments. We were dealing with municipalities, provincial bodies, state and federal agencies. Many were unfamiliar with Haudenosaunee ways, and we often found that they were the most eager to learn, and the most open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We would give thanks together, at the beginning and end of each meeting. That would reaffirm our common humanity, and remind us of our humble place in this provident world.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When we sometimes opened our first meetings with the compassion of the Three Bare Words, more often than not those words would cause our counterparts to shed tears.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We insisted on equality and reciprocity as integral to respect. Respect, we understood, was the first element of any effective relationship. The Covenant Chain consists of three links—respect, trust, and friendship—and like any Haudenosaunee concept, there is an order to them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Across the negotiating fire, as in council, we would sincerely ask: How can we help you?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We insisted that we eat together.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We would not meet when we were tired, or after dark, or when our minds were burdened by sorrow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We sincerely sought to transform adversaries into allies, enemies into friends.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Both Nelson Mandela and Abraham Lincoln had said that “if I make my enemy my friend, have I not conquered?”&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We understood that lasting good would come from establishing relationships, not from single transactions. We would keep our eyes on the long term, and sincerely consider the impact of our work on future generations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We took care to explain the thinking that accompanies the customs, and sometimes we were able to bring out the original wampum belts that preserve the principles and commitments, to strengthen our explanations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With growing confidence, we were uplifted by the power and certainty of the law, exhilarated that it works, powerfully, as it always has, and by the knowledge that we were part of a continuum, a tradition of skén:nen, ka’nikonhrí:yo, ka’satsténshsera that originated centuries ago and, with care, will endure into the future.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Closing ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . . we have completed all matters that follow in the family through the generations,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and these shall last as long as the earth exists,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and as long as they are going to grow,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
the grasses and also the various weeds,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and as long as the shrubs keep growing wild, the various shrubs,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and as long as they keep growing wild, the trees, all kinds of trees,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and as long as springs emerge the waters of rivers will keep flowing;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
also the large rivers and the various lakes;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and as long as the sun keeps rising and setting;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and the moon keeps up its phases,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and in the sky the stars do the same,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and the wind is stirring on the land,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and heavenly bodies continue to provide light by day and by night,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
thus, it shall last.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Gibson 1912, 476–77.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Court Decisions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Almrei v. Canada (MCI)&#039;&#039;, DES-5-01 (F.C.T.D.).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Attorney General of Ontario v. Bear Island Foundation&#039;&#039;, (1985) 1 CNLR 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Benoit v. Canada (Minister of National Revenue)&#039;&#039;, 2003 FCA 236.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Blueberry River Band v. The Queen&#039;&#039;, (1995) 4 SCR 344.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Daniels v. Canada (Indian Affairs and Northern Development)&#039;&#039;, (2016) 1 SCR 99.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Delgamuukw v. Attorney General of British Columbia&#039;&#039;, (1997) 3 SCR 1010.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Doe v. Kamehameha Schools&#039;&#039;, US Court of Appeals, 9th Circuit 8921 (2005).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Doe dem. Jackson v. Wilkes&#039;&#039; (1835), 4 UCKB (OS) 142.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Edwards v. Attorney General of Canada&#039;&#039;, (1930) AC 124.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Guerin v. The Queen&#039;&#039;, (1985) 2 SCR 387.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Halpern v. Canada&#039;&#039; (2003), 65 OR (3d) 161.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Hamlet of Baker Lake v. The Queen&#039;&#039; (1980) 107 DLR (3rd) 513.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Hunter v. Southam, Inc.&#039;&#039;, (1984) 2 SCR 145.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Isaac v. Davey&#039;&#039;, (1977) 2 SCR 897.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Jones v. Meehan&#039;&#039;, 175 US 1 (1899).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Mabo v. Queensland&#039;&#039; (1992), 175 CLR 1 (Australian High Court).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Mikisew Cree First Nation v. Canada&#039;&#039;, (2005) 3 SCR 388.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Mitchell (Kanentakeron) v. Minister of National Revenue&#039;&#039;, (2001) 1 SCR 911.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Onondaga Nation v. Thacher&#039;&#039;, 189 US 306 (1903).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;People v. Neil Patterson Jr.&#039;&#039; (New York Court of Appeals, June 14, 2005).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Re Quebec Secession&#039;&#039;, (1982) 2 SCR 17.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;R. v. Adams&#039;&#039;, (1996) 3 SCR 101.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;R. v. Badger&#039;&#039;, (1996) 1 SCR 771.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;R. v. Gladstone&#039;&#039;, (1996) 2 SCR 723.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;R. v. Ireland&#039;&#039;, (1991) 1 OR 3d 577.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;R. v. Marshall&#039;&#039;, (1999) 3 SCR 456.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;R. v. Marshall; R. v. Bernard&#039;&#039;, (2005) 2 SCR 220.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;R. v. NTC Smokehouse&#039;&#039;, (1996) 2 SCR 672.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;R. v. Powley&#039;&#039;, (2003) 2 SCR 207.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;R. v. Sioui&#039;&#039;, (1990) 2 SCR 1025.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;R. v. Sparrow&#039;&#039;, (1990) 1 SCR 1075.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;R. v. Syliboy&#039;&#039;, (1929) 1 DLR 307 (Nova Scotia County Court).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;R. v. Taylor and Williams&#039;&#039;, (1981) 34 OR (2d) 360.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;R. v. Van der Peet&#039;&#039;, (1996) 2 SCR 507.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Rice v. Cayetano&#039;&#039;, 528 US 495 (2000).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Secretary of State (Indian Association of Alberta)&#039;&#039;, (1982) 2 All ER 118.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Seneca Nation v. Charles E. Appleby. Rochester Democrat &amp;amp; Chronicle&#039;&#039;, 1907. Rochester, NY: Buffalo Historical Society.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Southern Rhodesia, Re&#039;&#039;, (1919) AC 211 (JC).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Swans (The Case of)&#039;&#039;, Court of King&#039;s Bench, Trinity Term, 1592.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Worcester v. Georgia&#039;&#039;, 6 Pet. (31 US) 515 (1832).&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>The Phantom Bull</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=Library:Kayanerenk%C3%B3:wa:_The_Great_Law_of_Peace&amp;diff=91853</id>
		<title>Library:Kayanerenkó:wa: The Great Law of Peace</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=Library:Kayanerenk%C3%B3:wa:_The_Great_Law_of_Peace&amp;diff=91853"/>
		<updated>2026-07-14T17:38:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;The Phantom Bull: I created a library page for the book Kayanerenkó:wa: The Great Law of Peace by Kayanesenh Paul Williams, at the request of Charhapiti.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Library work|title=Kayanerenkó:wa: The Great Law of Peace|author=Kayanesenh Paul Williams|publisher=University of Manitoba Press|published_date=October 26, 2018|type=Book|isbn=0887558216 (ISBN-10), 978-0887558214 (ISBN-13)|source=https://annas-archive.gl/md5/ad82a96d29027a5641252ac3d8605a77}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;#&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; KAYANERENKÓ:WA: THE GREAT LAW OF PEACE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;**&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;Kayanesenh Paul Williams**&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
University of Manitoba Press&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Winnipeg, Manitoba, Canada&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Treaty 1 Territory&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
© Kayanesenh Paul Williams 2018&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All rights reserved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;ISBN 978-0-88755-821-4&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; (paper)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;ISBN 978-0-88755-193-2&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; (cloth)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;ISBN 978-0-88755-556-5&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; (pdf)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;ISBN 978-0-88755-554-1&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; (epub)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;##&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Contents&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
About Names&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ohe&#039;n:ton Karihwatékwen: Words Before All Else&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Introduction&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;**&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;PART I - Context**&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Creation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Land&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Longhouse and the Village&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clans&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Personal Names&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ceremonies&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Date of the Creation of the League&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;**&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;PART II - The Nature of the Law: Principles and Processes**&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Principles, Not Details&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Order&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Versions&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Versions, Names, and Quotations&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Language&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Oral Tradition and the Rememberers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Speakers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Power of Song: The Song of Peace&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One Family&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Helping One Another&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Structure of the Law&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Certainty and Constancy&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Confrontation Is a Last Resort&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;**&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;PART III - Bringing the Great Peace**&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Patterns and Principles in the Narrative&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Why His Name Is Not Spoken&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker Meets His Own People First&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The White Stone Canoe&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Man Without a Nation, Without a Family&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mindless Warfare&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker and the Cannibal&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Announcing Peace&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Skaniatariio John Arthur Gibson&#039;s 1899 Version&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tsikonsaseh: The Women&#039;s Side&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hiawatha: The Man of Sorrows&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The First Condolence&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Three Words: Peace, Power, and Righteousness&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From Individuals to Nations&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mohawk: Testing the Peacemaker&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tekarihoken, Hiawatha, and Satekariwate: The First Mohawk Chiefs&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Westward&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Oneida: Odatsehte&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Removing Distractions: Opening the Path and Keeping It Open&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standing and Walking&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Onondaga: Thadadaho&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Over the Woods: Haii Haii&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Pacification of Thadadaho&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thadadaho&#039;s Political Interests&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Fire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Power of Unity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cayuga&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Seneca: The Doorkeepers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One Mind: Ska&#039;níkon:ra&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unity Is Power&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;**&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;PART IV - The Constitution**&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overview&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Longhouse of One Family&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Older and Younger Brothers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Onondaga Longhouse&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Line Down the Middle of the Longhouse&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Calling Council&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Procedure in Council&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thick Skins&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mentors of the People&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Chiefs: Permanence of Titles&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Cluster: Chief, Clan Mother, Sub-Chief, Faithkeepers, Runner&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clan Mothers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Faithkeepers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Criteria for Becoming a Chief&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Raising Up Chiefs&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Women: Landholders and Clanholders&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Circle of Protection of the Law&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Leaving the Circle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Calling People Home&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Returning&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Symbols of the Law&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Tree of Peace&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Great White Wampum&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Eagle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Dish with One Spoon: Sharing the Hunting Grounds&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Linking Arms Together&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Council Fire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Rod or Staff&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Wing&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No Council after Dark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Birds in the Branches&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Considering the Coming Seven Generations&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Life Terms&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Head Chiefs?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specific Chiefs Have Specific Duties&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a Chief Dies&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Condolence&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Removing a Chief&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Right of Revolution&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
War and Peace&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Weakness of the Council&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dealing with the &amp;quot;Warriors&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Ceremonies: Spiritual Authority and Obligation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Mother&#039;s Line&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Names: Continuity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Citizenship and Immigration&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Right of Refuge&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adoption&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nations Leave, Nations Return&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pine Tree Chiefs&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Local or Village Chiefs&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Maintenance and Renewal&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Amendment: Adding to the Rafters&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prophecy: Things Will Go Wrong&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And in the End . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Closing&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bibliography&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Endnotes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Index&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;##&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; About Names&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To name something or someone is an act of power. In Genesis, God gave Adam authority to name the animals. The naming confirmed dominion over them. European explorers all over the world renamed places, mountains, and waters after their own people, eclipsing original names and the peoples who gave them. The people who provided the information and inspiration for this book often had several names in the course of their lifetimes. For the Haudenosaunee, people&#039;s personal names have coexisted with their European names for more than three centuries. Today, it is common to refer to &amp;quot;real names&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;English names,&amp;quot; using the former for some purposes and the latter for others.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use only English names would disrespect people&#039;s identities. To use only their Haudenosaunee names would lead to confusion when it came time to cite their publications or quote from historical accounts of their deeds and words.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
My solution has been to adopt the approach taken by the Haudenosaunee Documentation Committee for Haudenosaunee citizenship documents: that is, to place a person&#039;s Haudenosaunee name as that person&#039;s first name. This is consistent with the concept of the name being ón:kwe, first or original. The first reference in this text to any individual would follow this rule: Joagquisho Oren Lyons, for example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where a person has only a Haudenosaunee name or only a European name, there is no issue: Tekanissorens and Woodrow Wilson stand as they are.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where an individual becomes a royá:ner, a Confederacy chief, I deliberately use his title, which replaces his original name. Thus, Hai:wes became Deskahe Steven Jacobs. Using both the English name and the title helps to distinguish individuals and at the same time to acknowledge the continuity of titles: there have also been Deskahe Levi General, Deskahe Alexander General, and Deskahe Harvey Longboat. When referring to people who are no longer living, I have not used the traditional suffix *–ken* after their names. It would have been correct, but it would have meant further confusing those unfamiliar with Haudenosaunee customs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I had considered distinguishing between people who had been born Haudenosaunee and people who had received names through adoption. Since the law does not distinguish between them, I will not do so either. Warraghyhagey William Johnson and Dayodekane Seth Newhouse are named in the same way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Treating Haudenosaunee names as &amp;quot;first names&amp;quot; provides a solution to the issue of citations in footnotes. When an individual is mentioned for the first time, I use his or her full name. Subsequent references to the individual will use only the surname, unless it is necessary to distinguish between several individuals with the same surname.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It&#039;s complicated. It&#039;s important. It&#039;s right. You&#039;ll get used to it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;##&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Ohe&#039;n:ton Karihwatékwen: Words Before All Else&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The enduring legal systems of the world are the result of people bringing their minds together to foster order and peace. For the People of the Longhouse, the Haudenosaunee, giving thanks is the first step towards law and the beginning of any meeting of the people. Words of thanksgiving, Kanonhweratonhsera, are spoken at the opening (and closing) of every council, whether internal or with other people or nations. Viewed through the lens of Kanonhweratonhsera, the world is an orderly place: every part of the natural world has been given instructions and responsibilities, and each continues to fulfill those instructions as well as it can. This gratitude reminds us, too, that we humans are no more important than the other living parts of the world. Kanonhweratonhsera is not a recitation of a hierarchy. It is not a prayer. Giving thanks as people gathered together is the beginning of being of one mind. As they come together, our minds are &amp;quot;bundled together&amp;quot; into one: entitewahwe&#039;non:ni ne onkwa&#039;nikonikon:ra. Kanonhweratonhsera reminds us that order is the natural and intentional condition of creation, and that being of one good mind is the ideal condition of the people.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Great Power came from up in the sky, and now it is functioning,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
the Great Power that we accepted when we reached consensus.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So now our house has become complete.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, therefore, we shall give thanks, that is,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
we shall thank the Creator of the earth, that is,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
he who has planted all the kinds of weeds&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and all the varieties of shrubs&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and all the kinds of trees;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and springs,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
flowing water, such as rivers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and large bodies of water, such as lakes;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and the sun that keeps moving by day,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and by night the moon,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and where the sky is, the stars, which no one is able to count;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
moreover, the way it is on earth in relation to which&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
no one is able to tell the extent to which it is to their benefit, that is,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
the people who he created and who will continue to live on earth.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This, then, is the reason we thank him, the one with great power,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
the one who is the Creator,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
for that which will now move forward,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
the Good Message and the Power and the Peace; the Great Law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;##&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Introduction&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Several centuries ago, a new kind of law was born in the northeast of North America, or Turtle Island. The Great Law of Peace—Kayanerenkó:wa —is a message of peace, power, and righteousness. The message was carried, at first, by one inspired messenger. With immense courage, patience, and authority, he took his message of peace and law to five nations trapped in cycles of bloodshed and revenge. This Peacemaker found a way to break those bloody cycles, and to shape a legal system that would maintain peace for the future. The five nations are the Mohawk, Oneida, Onondaga, Cayuga, and Seneca, and once the law bound them together as one family in one structure, they began to call themselves Haudenosaunee, the People of the Longhouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In places shattered in the early twenty-first century by internal warfare, like Rwanda, Ethiopia, Northern Ireland, Congo, Syria, Afghanistan, and the Balkans, fostering harmony and stability for the future is at least as challenging as stopping the violence. If the causes of the bloodshed—the ill will, feelings, and factors that caused and promoted the wars—are still present, the cycles will start again as soon as the forces that restrain them leave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker understood that, for peace to exist, people must not only be rational but must also accept that other people are capable of rationality, for rational minds will seek, create, and maintain peace. The story of the making of the Great Law is thus also about ways of restoring people to rationality. It charts a map for a healthy society, not just for healthy individuals. The makers of the Great Law of Peace assumed that good-mindedness is a natural and proper state for human beings, and that a person, a family, or a nation taken to antisocial conduct by grief, anger, pain, or greed can be brought back to the right path.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the ceremony of Condolence, the Peacemaker created a compassionate way to break the cycle, clear the people&#039;s minds, and allow them to &amp;quot;put away the bones and blood that cried for revenge.&amp;quot; It became sacred and honourable as well as logical to choose peace over war and to look to the future (and consider the welfare of future generations) instead of listening to the hurt and angry voices of the past. The Condolence opened the door to peace and harmony.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Great Law also accomplished the necessary second step: it built the structure that maintained the peace. It realistically recognized that peace is never static or secure, but needs to be maintained, preserved, recovered, and spread. Peace is a process, not a state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The law was not made up completely of new ideas. It was deliberately designed for the people who embraced it. It includes many elements of the societies and governments that were already in place. Its symbols—the longhouse, the pine, the eagle—are things the people would have seen every day. For a people whose language is metaphoric, the law was a long set of metaphors. The new law was pragmatic. It kept, strengthened, and extrapolated what worked well. It discarded what was not working. It broadened useful concepts. It protected government and society against some of the people&#039;s unchangeable weaknesses and harmful tendencies. It created a democracy without the confrontations inherent in choosing leaders by voting. Some of its elements were profoundly new. It was indeed a message of peace, power, and righteousness.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the Good Mind—Ka&#039;nikonhrí:io—is a first element of the law, the next, pervasive one, woven throughout the law, is the idea of family. All the people are related. They are kin, living within a single extended longhouse. As family, they cannot shed one another&#039;s blood, and they cannot make war on one another. As family, as well, they bear an obligation to help one another. Tribal peoples all over the world carry this sense of family. It can engender a strong, aggressive sense of ethnic identity, leading to blood vengeance when provoked. Instead, the Peacemaker transformed the nature of family, allowing it to break the bonds of blood and to generously embrace strangers, to take in outsiders by adoption and by welcome. The Great White Roots of the Tree of Peace not only spread the Great Law over the earth, fostering a landscape of peace: they also encouraged the people who were touched by them to become part of the family of peace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Great Law, despite its constant references to family terms, created a civic, not an ethnic, society. &amp;quot;Family&amp;quot; meant support, responsibility, and mutual aid. If humanity follows a path from band to tribe to nation to nation-state, one might say that most Indigenous (or tribal) peoples insist on family relationships as their identifiers, while most nations define themselves by bloodlines, without insisting on family relations between their citizens, and nation-states exhibit a spectrum from ethnic groups (like Serbs) to purely civic ones (like the United States). If it can be said that the Haudenosaunee moved from tribe to nation, it must also be said that, unlike other peoples in the world, they did away with the blood requirement while maintaining family as an essential element of society. Every Haudenosaunee citizen, according to traditional law, is so because he or she is a member of a family and a clan. Adoptees are brought into families and clans. Belonging to a family brings webs of reciprocal responsibility and relations—and a social support system. Within a family, people help one another.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another crucial aspect of the Great Law is its constant closeness to the natural world. The obligation to help one another reflects how the Haudenosaunee see the natural world, as a balanced system that retains its balance through the efforts of all its components. The web and circle of life are maintained because each living thing is carrying out its own responsibilities. The natural world is a web of symbiotic relationships, of organisms that are partners, interdependent and mutually supportive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furthermore, the law, like the longhouse that is one of its enduring symbols, requires maintenance. The maintenance is cooperative and collaborative: there is no room in this legal system for institutionalized opposition, or for adversarial relationships. While the principles behind its architecture remain constant, inevitably the processes and relationships that sustain it will evolve as society changes. There is a strong sense that the law and the peace are constantly being made, and are not ever going to be completed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also constant within the law is the idea of balance. There is balance between the authority of men and that of women. There is balance in council between the &amp;quot;Elder Brothers&amp;quot; and the &amp;quot;Younger Brothers.&amp;quot; When sorrow affects people&#039;s minds, the Condolence restores balance. In constitutional terms, such a system could be said to contain &amp;quot;checks and balances,&amp;quot; yet the Haudenosaunee would stress that the checks are less important than the balances. In this sense, balance can mean harmony, but it also evokes a sense of duality. In the natural world, examples of this duality abound: night and day; male and female; young and old; forest and meadow. The two sides of the longhouse, divided by the imaginary line down the middle of the building, reflect this, and so do many aspects of the law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Several times in any account of the making of the Kayanerenkó:wa, tasks are assigned to two men—rarely to a single one. The great partners, the Peacemaker and Hiawatha, work together like the two sides, as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since it draws part of its inspiration from the way the people understand the natural world and how it works, Haudenosaunee leaders often call the Great Law &amp;quot;Natural Law.&amp;quot; The inspiration from nature leads to an obligation: as a matter of responsibility, lawmakers must constantly consider the impact of their decisions on the natural world. This concern about the environment is not an aspect of most &amp;quot;modern&amp;quot; nation-state constitutions, and has only recently become a part of most administrative systems of government, now that climate change and the degradation of the global environment have made it urgent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As people who lived and travelled by rivers, the Haudenosaunee understood that the world flows; that time and space both flow; and that relationships also flow. They sought constant relationships, ones that would remain true through change. Within that sense of flow, the Haudenosaunee see the people who are alive at any one time as simply part of a larger people, one that includes those who have gone before and those who will come after. The nature of Haudenosaunee names is a reminder of this: names belong to a clan family, were carried by many other individuals in the past, and return to the clan to be carried by other people in the future. In the law, this sense of flow also places an express responsibility on lawmakers to consider the impact of their decisions on the coming seven generations, the people downstream from us, whose faces we will never see.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Compatible with this sense of flow is a consciousness of cycles: the year consists of seasons that are repetitions of the seasons of the previous year, and the ceremonies are the same as those of the year before and the year coming. They are re-enactments of earlier cycles and events. In that sense, the Haudenosaunee understanding of the nature of time is not the same as European or Euro-American perspectives, which explain time as a line rather than a cycle, and &amp;quot;progress&amp;quot; along that line as part of a deliberate path towards a utopian ideal. Haudenosaunee history for the past four centuries can be understood not only in geopolitical and economic terms but also in terms of coping with the collisions between two very different views of humanity&#039;s purpose in the world.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s oral and written versions of the narrative of the Great Law describe first how the Peacemaker brought this message to the people, and the challenges—physical, political, and spiritual—that he faced along the way. The story of how he brought the people together, and how he overcame and transformed obstacles, is a manual for the process of creating consensus (one-mindedness—ska&#039;níkon:ra) as well as a series of demonstrations of the power of the Good Mind and Peace. The story inspires, for it is one of patience, thought, and strength.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon first reading or hearing the Great Law, one could easily conclude that the story of how the Peacemaker brought people and nations together is a pleasant legend, but not law. As a legend, it includes entertaining stories of the hero making a magical stone canoe; tricking a cannibal into changing his evil ways; surviving a great fall from a tree into raging waters; devising enchanting songs; and confronting monsters and evil wizards. These do not seem to be the stuff of law. A North American lawyer looking for the Haudenosaunee constitution might conclude that the true lawmaking only began once the Peacemaker had gathered all the chiefs and clan mothers together in one place, and began to identify and create legislative authorities and structures. It would be easy to conclude this, but it would be wrong.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Kayanerenkó:wa is all law. Every part of it is law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The story of how the Peacemaker brought the people together is not just a story. Certainly it is full of metaphors and lessons, but the story also contains many of the fundamental concepts and principles of the law. All great messages are taught by metaphor. Jesus, in his &amp;quot;Good Message&amp;quot; (which is what &amp;quot;Gospel&amp;quot; means in Middle English), resorted to &amp;quot;parables.&amp;quot; Buddha told stories (and, as the Acoma Pueblo scholar Simon Ortiz said: &amp;quot;There are no truths, only stories&amp;quot;). Centuries later, history and metaphor become mixed. The message remains constant. Metaphor—the ability of human beings to think bridges between different concepts—is essential to visualizing any legal system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The meta-narrative of the Great Law provides the tone and spirit: the determination that the bloodshed must stop, and will stop. It also delivers the vital threshold of the law: the ceremony of Condolence, an act of caring, compassion, and respect that has no duplicate in any other legal system. The Condolence is a tool to stop the killing, open the path of peace, and raise up the minds of the people. It prepares them to accept the message of peace, power, and righteousness. It stands for a crucial concept: that before it can accept peace, a mind must be healed, and must be working properly and rationally. And another: that &amp;quot;peace&amp;quot; is a combination of factors, including health (mental and physical), for a person whose mind or body are in pain will be distracted from peace. And another: there is no mind so bad that it cannot be changed and healed by the right approach and the right power. This is not mere legend. It is the foundation of a distinct approach to law. And another: for a government of good minds to work, they must help one another, not oppose one another. People must recognize their fundamental kinship, their common humanity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The story of the making of the Great Law follows deliberate paths, temporally and geographically but also thoughtfully. The Peacemaker delivers his message first to individuals, then to communities, then to nations, and finally to the entire newly formed Confederacy. The themes of transformation and transcendence are constant: the Peacemaker is able to address what is dysfunctional, or not working properly, in individuals as well as in society, and to transform the power to injure into the responsibility to protect.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In many encounters described in the making of the law, the Peacemaker is confronted by a dangerous, angry person or group of people. One aspect of his genius was to recognize that there was nevertheless a capacity for rationality in these people. He dealt with their humanity. He was able to transform them from forces of chaos into peacekeepers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a modern world where the best minds can find no way to stop the killing in its &amp;quot;hot spots,&amp;quot; the Kayanerenkó:wa stands as an example of one people&#039;s way to end the violence and embrace peace. Of course, there have been other ways: Hobbes maintained that men form commonwealths (states) with the aim of &amp;quot;getting themselves out from that miserable condition of warre . . . of every man against every man,&amp;quot; which he saw as humanity&#039;s natural condition. Nations, however, are as effective and efficient in pursuing war against others as they are in preventing internal strife. The League of Nations emerged from &amp;quot;the war to end all wars,&amp;quot; the First World War, and was unsuccessful in preventing a Second World War. Today&#039;s United Nations is intended to prevent aggression. Each of these leagues, in its statement of principles, recalls the Peacemaker&#039;s desire that the Great Peace should spread, as the white roots of the Tree of Peace would spread to the four directions. The inability of these leagues to achieve peace is often regarded as a failure of will, or a failure of true desire, on the part of the leaders of the nations for peace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A good mind will seek peace, create peace, maintain peace, and do so by uniting with other good minds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second part of the Kayanerenkó:wa is more technical and more constitutional. Chiefs—rotiyanershon—are appointed, and given specific responsibilities. Procedures are set in place to maintain checks and balances among the nations of the League. Decision-making processes are firmed up, including ways to avoid and resolve disputes. The law provides for continuity, not transition. The distinct roles of men and women are set out. The rights of nations are clarified. The rights of foreigners, and the way the League will relate to foreign nations, are stated so that they will promote the spread of the Great Peace. The symbols of the law and the people are described. Provision is made for renewing commitments, for maintaining the law, and also for future changes consistent with the architecture of the longhouse, an architecture symbolizing the functional principles of the law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is this second part, the structural part, that is said to have inspired (or influenced) the Constitution of the United States of America, a confederation of putatively equal partners, joining together voluntarily to form a government replete with checks and balances and mutual respect. Certainly at the Albany Conference in 1754, Tekarihoken Hendrick Peters encouraged the colonies to form a confederation. Some Haudenosaunee say that, in imitating the Great Law, the United States did so poorly, for their constitution neglects some of the most important aspects: peace, the Good Mind, obligations to the natural world, the importance of families, obligations to future generations, spirituality, respect for women (and, until the 1920s, women&#039;s part in government). Nevertheless, the influence of one powerful confederate system on the formation of the constitution of the other has been acknowledged, and is undeniable. Only the extent of that influence has become the subject of bitter debate among academics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee constitution and the constitution of the United States share another feature that is not the result of the influence of the former upon the latter, and seldom receives comment. Because both were created by a small group of people during a short, dramatic period (a &amp;quot;constitutional moment&amp;quot;) that has become invested with a degree of sacredness over time, and both can be read (despite United States amendments and Haudenosaunee additions to the rafters of the longhouse) as the product of the minds of the &amp;quot;founding fathers&amp;quot; and as a fixed canon, the result, in legal and social terms, has been what some British commentators have called &amp;quot;ancestor worship&amp;quot;—an inability or unwillingness to evolve. This manifests itself in U.S. courts&#039; tendency to seek the intentions of the framers of the Constitution (the &amp;quot;Founding Fathers&amp;quot;) in cases two centuries later, and in Haudenosaunee Condolence ceremonies wistfully referring to the acts of &amp;quot;my grandsires&amp;quot; as the days of greatness.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Kayanerenkó:wa establishes a democracy. It creates a system of government in which each person participates and has an effective place and voice. It does not meet the criteria of late twentieth-century participatory democracies, in which all people are theoretically absolutely equal and governments are selected in periodic elections. It answers some basic questions quite differently. It does not assume absolute equality, and instead assigns responsibility as well as authority according to ability, assuming that each person has different gifts to be fulfilled. It avoids elections, because elections divide the people into factions and parties, whereas the law seeks one-mindedness and unity. It also avoids elections because they tend to install governments whose horizon of thought and vision is the next election, whereas the Kayanerenkó:wa admonishes decision makers to cast their minds to the welfare of the coming generations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Recognition of gifts also extends to the nations: the law creates an asymmetric confederation, in which each nation has specific authority and obligations. In Haudenosaunee legal thinking, authority and responsibility are inseparable. Only the Senecas can bring into council issues coming from the west, but they, as doorkeepers, are also charged with protecting that entrance to Haudenosaunee territory. The Onondagas, as firekeepers, both maintain and protect the central council and its continued functions. In the United States and Canada, each state or province has identical and equal powers within the constitution. If the Great Law&#039;s principles were to be applied, perhaps modern Québec would become the official steward of the French language; British Columbia might be the guardian of the forests; New York could protect its nation&#039;s finances; Washington could become the preserver of salmon fisheries. Each authority is balanced by a matching responsibility, which requires a degree of unselfishness. Morgan explained that &amp;quot;the tribe was neither weakened nor impaired by the confederate compact. Each was in vigorous life within its appropriate sphere.&amp;quot; Venables takes this description several steps further: &amp;quot;The Woods are the equal responsibility of the Confederacy as a whole and, in their different locales, the responsibility of one of the five founding nations. Because there is no ultimate sovereign power, these simultaneous and equal responsibilities have no real parallel in Western law, including Western property law. These simultaneous and equal responsibilities are also what make the Confederacy a unique and delicate balance of equal responsibilities among its confederate parts.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where the Kayanerenkó:wa differs from modern Euro-American law, there are reasons for the differences. Some of those differences are the result of a different approach to law. Some are a reflection of their times and technologies. Others flow from the nature of the people themselves, for this legal system reflects the people for whom it was created. Some aspects of the law are exportable, universal, as the Peacemaker said that the Great White Roots of the Tree of Peace ought to spread over the world. Other aspects of the law make sense mainly in a Haudenosaunee context. For example, peoples who have no clan system would find no usefulness in that complex interweaving of relationships, or would have to invent their own.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nevertheless, the Great Law of Peace is intrinsically valuable. Sotsistowah John Mohawk, the pre-eminent Haudenosaunee thinker of the twentieth century, wrote: &amp;quot;The political thought of the Haudenosaunee deserves to be judged on its own merits, not as an artifact of the past. We should investigate it today, question it, expand on it, learn from it just as we would from any doctrine of political thought. It will stand against that kind of scrutiny.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There have been several efforts to reduce the Kayanerenkó:wa to writing. The first were by the Haudenosaunee themselves, as part of an effort to agree on processes, as well as to show that the governments created by the Great Law are respectable, consistent, complex, and legal. Some of these were simply an attempt to describe the system to outsiders, or to protect that system against those who claimed the Haudenosaunee had no law. Others were internal exercises in standardization. There was little written analysis. More recent writing about the Great Law has been, for the most part, by academics. In a demonstration of their own compartmentalization, each of the writers has come from a particular perspective. Anthropologist-ethnohistorians, linguists, and political scientists have each adopted anthropological, ethnohistorical, linguistic, or political approaches to the Kayanerenkó:wa.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Strangely—considering what is being analyzed and written about is, on its face, a legal system—there has been almost no *legal* writing about it. This is all the more curious since many of the people who were involved in its description, recording, and publication were lawyers, by profession or training. Morgan, Parker, Hale: the early recorders of the Great Law were lawyers. This is no coincidence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ta-ya-dao-wuk-kah Lewis Henry Morgan was a practising lawyer in western New York State in the mid-1800s. His companion on his path into the Great Law and into Haudenosaunee society was Hasanonda—later Donehogowa—Ely S. Parker, a Tonawanda Seneca teenager Morgan had met in an Albany bookstore. Morgan has been called &amp;quot;the first anthropologist&amp;quot;: his work on the kinship system of the Haudenosaunee was truly seminal for the science of understanding human societies. Morgan was also intrigued by the Great Law. He created a semi-secret white society that imitated its structures. As both lawyer and adopted Seneca, he joined the fight for the preservation of Seneca land at Tonawanda. He came close to functioning within the circle of the law, but he also retained a sense of European superiority. However, there are some indications that Morgan considered his *League of the Hau-de-no-sau-nee* as both an imperfect work and his final Iroquois effort, a way of getting the people out of his system. It has been suggested that the academic, speculative parts of the book are Morgan&#039;s ruminations on &amp;quot;man&#039;s ascent to civilization,&amp;quot; while the more informative and factual parts are in a style different enough that it is most likely that they are actually Donehogowa Ely Parker&#039;s writing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Parker himself qualified to become a lawyer in New York State. Either he chose not to present himself to the bar, because that would require him to seek U.S. citizenship, or he was refused admission to the bar because he was not a citizen, or not white. During the Civil War, as a Confederacy chief, he needed a special dispensation from his nation to be allowed to join the U.S. Army, where he became adjutant to his friend, Ulysses S. Grant. Later, when Grant became president, Parker was appointed commissioner of Indian Affairs. Long before that, though, he had become Donehogowa, one of the fifty rotiyanershon, or Lords of the Confederacy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A third recorder of parts of the Great Law, Horatio Hale (1817–96), was also a lawyer (in Clinton, Ontario) by the time he became deeply involved with the Haudenosaunee, publishing two transcripts of the entire Condolence ceremony in his *Iroquois Book of Rites.* Hale had been a member of the United States Exploring Expedition when he was twenty-one; he never ceased from exploration. He may have been what is now called an anthropologist or ethnologist—but his initial fascination was with the people and their law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
My own path, half a lifetime long, has been marked by stages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At first, with the confidence of youth and the brashness of law school, I accepted intellectually that the Great Law represented a unique constitutional structure, with a powerful legend accompanying its creation. I was quite prepared to argue in court that the Iroquois Confederacy had an organized society, a sophisticated constitution, and a detailed system of landholding. In the 1970s, that was all Canadian law required Indigenous societies to prove, in order to hold rights and to have Aboriginal title to land. I had also read enough of the history books, treaties, and treaty conferences to see that the Confederacy had dealt with the French, the Dutch, the British, and the United States as equals, as partners or enemies, to be respected or challenged as political circumstances required. There were patterns and principles to the treaties. The people I associated with—at Oneida, at the Grand River Territory, and then throughout Haudenosaunee communities—were convinced of the power of the Great Law as a way of life, and of the sovereignty of the Confederacy. In 1980, my master&#039;s thesis in law concentrated on the Covenant Chain relationship between the Iroquois Confederacy and the British Crown, and on how that relationship was reflected in the history of several distinct issues: criminal jurisdiction, border-crossing rights, land rights, and political rights. For more than two centuries, representatives of the British Crown had understood, adopted, and used Iroquois law and metaphor in treaty relations, creating a well-defined relationship within the Iroquois legal system. At the time, I sought to find parallels in the law of nations, suggesting that the treaty relationship met the definitions of a protectorate relationship in modern international law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By 1990, my perspective had matured and deepened. I understood, as the Maoris had in Aotearoa, that it is important to retain the original names for things, because English translations are never exact and often misleading. To me, the Iroquois Confederacy became the Haudenosaunee; the chiefs became rotiyanershon; and the Great Law became the Kayanerenkó:wa. By 1990, I had also been personally transformed: I was now Kayanesenh of the Wolf Clan of the Onondaga Nation, and my wife and children Mohawks of the Turtle Clan. I attended ceremonies and Condolences and councils as an insider. Seeing things from within the circle gave me a fundamentally new perspective on the law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The events of 1990 were tumultuous and traumatic. In the early part of the summer, an internal war in Akwesasne showed how bad things must have been before the coming of the law: the sorrow and anger in that community were deep and bloody. Mohawks had killed one another. There was blood on their hands. Twenty-five years later, many of the wounds remain unhealed. For me, 1990 culminated in desperate, principled, ultimately doomed autumn negotiations with Canada and Quebec as the Canadian Army encircled defiant warriors in Kanehsatake and laid siege to Kahnawake. All this caused me a great deal of soul-searching. Could we, as the Haudenosaunee negotiators, have done anything differently and remained true to the law? How much does law determine behaviour, and how much pragmatic flexibility does it allow? The warriors: were they something new, or just a modern face to an ancient challenge? How much of the original Longhouse still exists, in reality or in people&#039;s minds—or dreams?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Confederacy lives first and foremost in people&#039;s minds. It is a constant re-enactment of the way of the Peacemaker. It is as real as people are prepared to believe it is. For some, it is a shining ideal in the distance, unattainable and largely irrelevant. For others, it is something to *live*. Those who lived the Confederacy in 1990, the ones I worked with, convinced me that the dream is real.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After 1990, with Tehatkarine (Arihote) Curtis Nelson and Kanatiio Allen Gabriel, I put together what has been called Kahswénhtha, the Haudenosaunee treaty study for the Canadian Royal Commission on Aboriginal Peoples. The message of that study can be summarized in four points. First: the Haudenosaunee are a people of law, with a respectable legal system of their own. Second: the British, in their dealings with Indigenous nations, accepted and worked effectively within that legal system for the first two centuries of their presence on this continent. Third: there is a continuum of treaty relations between the Crown and the Haudenosaunee. It resembles a river flowing through time rather than a succession of events. It is based on relationships more than on details, and on principles more than on politics. It is based in the concepts and thinking of the Great Law of Peace. Fourth: the more recent history of that treaty relationship reveals a record of neglect, ignorance, and bad faith on the part of the Crown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Twenty more years passed. With new tools, I continued to turn over the Kayanerenkó:wa in my mind. The publication of the most complete version, recited by Skaniatariio John Arthur Gibson, and access to other, unpublished versions by Dayodekane Seth Newhouse, Deyonwe&#039;ton Jake Thomas, and J.N.B. Hewitt helped me see patterns where before I had seen mostly details. Long conversations with Sotsisowah John Mohawk, Deskahe Harvey Longboat, Kaientaronkwen Ernie Benedict, Hayadaha Rick Hill, Roronhiakewen Dan Longboat, and Amber Meadow Adams continued to point me towards principles and patterns. Moving out of Toronto, to the Six Nations Grand River Territory, helped change my outlook, legally, culturally, and socially. I could see and sense the natural world every day. The forest literally began to replace the trees, and I watched the river&#039;s flow every day. Where I had been learning *what* the law provided, I was now seeking to learn *why* it did so. The tone of my law practice had shifted from adversarial to conciliatory, and from seeking to win to seeking mutual benefit. There were successful, precedent-setting negotiations. I had not realized the extent to which the Great Law had influenced my approach to cases and courts. I began to recognize that one could practise the principles of that law in a pragmatic, principled, and effective way. In 2007, we negotiated a series of agreements with the City of Hamilton about the Red Hill Valley Parkway, using those principles in exciting, effective, contemporary ways. In 2009, I taught a course in Haudenosaunee law at the University of Toronto, and discussions with the students helped temper the thinking in this book. A series of repatriations from museums, of wampum and haduwi medicine masks, left nothing behind but good will and friendships. In 2016, Sakom Hugh Akagi, Kanatiio Allen Gabriel, and I arranged a reaffirmation of Peskotomuhkati (Passamaquoddy) treaty relations with the Crown. The ways of the law have tempered many of my negotiations with the Crown on behalf of Indigenous peoples. Anishinaabe and Peskotomuhkati people also find those ways compatible with their own principles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canada&#039;s laws about Indigenous peoples had also evolved. The 2015 report of the Truth and Reconciliation Commission of Canada usefully distinguished between &amp;quot;Indigenous law,&amp;quot; the legal systems of Indigenous nations, and &amp;quot;Aboriginal law,&amp;quot; the laws of Canada about Indigenous peoples. It was Aboriginal law that was evolving quickly. In 1985, for the first time in over a century, the Supreme Court of Canada in the *Guerin* case clarified that the Crown bore a fiduciary, trust-like obligation in dealing with the lands of Indigenous peoples—a duty enforceable in courts of law. It also acknowledged that principles of law emanating from medieval England might not find counterparts in Indigenous North America. In 1990, the *Sparrow* decision showed that the protection of Aboriginal rights in the 1982 Constitution Act was not simply an &amp;quot;empty box.&amp;quot; At the end of 1997, the Supreme Court overturned a woefully ignorant judgement by the Chief Judge of British Columbia to craft its *Delgam&#039;uukw* decision. For the first time, that court spoke of Indigenous &amp;quot;nations&amp;quot; and of respecting their &amp;quot;laws&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;legal systems.&amp;quot; By the turn of the century, though, with the *Donald Marshall* and *Michael Mitchell (Kanentakeron)* decisions, Canadian courts began to recede from forceful recognition of the rights of Indigenous nations. New limits and new obstacles to broad recognition of rights were being born. Generosity in allowing evidence into Canadian courts masked the way the courts had moved the goalposts. Only &amp;quot;established&amp;quot; Aboriginal title carried the same weight as actual land ownership, and the Tsilhqot&#039;in people had spent twenty years and $30 million to gain their limited victory—over part of their territory, an area where there were virtually no people but Tsilhqot&#039;ins—in 2014. Aboriginal peoples had to show their occupation and use of the land, but also prove that it met the principles of exclusivity, and was not &amp;quot;incompatible with Canadian sovereignty.&amp;quot; Recognition of the laws of Indigenous nations faded into a vague, less respectful requirement of taking &amp;quot;the Aboriginal perspective&amp;quot; into account. In *Delgam&#039;uukw,* the Supreme Court of Canada explained that Aboriginal title had to be determined as of the date of the assertion of British Crown sovereignty, because the Crown and Indigenous land law systems would have to coexist and be reconciled. In *Marshall* and *Bernard,* the Supreme Court used the term &amp;quot;European sovereignty,&amp;quot; possibly to include the French regime, moving towards a racially based, doctrine-of-discovery approach to Aboriginal title. In *Tsilhqot&#039;in,* the court affirmed that it had meant British Crown sovereignty all along—only to refer to &amp;quot;European sovereignty&amp;quot; again a few pages later. In that case, as well, the Supreme Court of Canada tempered the broad range of possible justifications for taking Aboriginal rights and land with a new requirement: that the project had to further the constitutionally mandated goal of reconciliation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The rest of the world was watching and changing, too. In Australia, the High Court had actually stated that the idea that a light-skinned people, happening upon land owned by a dark-skinned people, could take over that land was racist and had no place in a late twentieth-century world. At least, there was no place unless the concept lay at the very backbone of a nation&#039;s legal system. In Hawai&#039;i, the rights of the Kanaka Maoli, the Indigenous people, were coming under attack in ways that challenged concepts like blood quantum, culture, the sale of remaining Hawai&#039;ian lands, and Indigenous survival itself. Canada and the United States were the two last holdouts in ratifying the United Nations Declaration on the Rights of Indigenous Peoples.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canadian courts have admitted that racism has existed in the past (rejecting the *Syliboy* judgement, for example) but have avoided confronting or abandoning it in the present. In the late 1990s, they concluded that the &amp;quot;magic date&amp;quot; that determines a people&#039;s Aboriginal rights is the &amp;quot;date of first contact with Europeans.&amp;quot; It does not matter that the contact may have been with a tiny number of Europeans, or even that those Europeans merely shot at people and then ran away. What is it about Europeans that makes them so magical that they affect other peoples&#039; rights permanently, like a kind of reverse Midas touch? Why the first European? Why not the first African? Or Maya? Or Chinese? Racism is alive and well in the Canadian legal system: it just hides behind clouds of liberal language and legal sophistry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canadian courts have said that their understanding of Aboriginal title must be shaped by the legal systems of both Canada and the Indigenous people involved, and their approach to implementing and respecting treaties must be shaped by the &amp;quot;Indian understanding&amp;quot; of those treaties. In the United States, &amp;quot;land claims&amp;quot; vacillate between court and negotiated settlements, but the courts insist that &amp;quot;the Indian understanding&amp;quot; of the treaties is relevant and vital. The time is ripe for texts in both Canada and the United States explaining the Haudenosaunee legal system, since it is the one within which the &amp;quot;Indian understanding&amp;quot; of many treaties exists. It is also the system that shaped the conduct and thinking of the representatives of the British Crown and of the United States of America in their treaties with many other Indigenous nations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The treaties between the Haudenosaunee and the Crown and the United States do not exist in a vacuum. They live in a universe of Haudenosaunee law, a long series of international councils, governed by rules of process and interpretation, assisted by precedents in the Kayanerenkó:wa itself. The images, words, and even the sequences of words used in treaty councils are linked not only to all other treaty councils, but to their sources in the laws of the Confederacy. This is important not just historically but also legally: both U.S. and Canadian courts have stated unequivocally that &amp;quot;the words of the treaty must be construed . . . in the sense in which they would naturally be understood by the Indians.&amp;quot; Actually, the transaction itself must be placed within its proper &amp;quot;Indian&amp;quot; legal context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the mid-seventeenth century to the mid-eighteenth century, the Haudenosaunee were a powerful military and political force in northeastern North America. The European colonists met with the Haudenosaunee in designated locations (council fire places), and adhered to the forms and processes of Haudenosaunee councils. They did so for several reasons: because these processes were demanded by nations who were in a position to demand them; because they functioned on the basis of equality and respect, which often gave the Europeans power beyond their numbers; and because the processes were effective in accomplishing their goals. From 1755 to 1830, the British Imperial Indian Department was effectively controlled by the Johnson family, which maintained intimate ties with the Mohawks and was comfortable and familiar with Haudenosaunee processes and law. For nearly two centuries, the law that governed treaty making was Haudenosaunee law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The legal system that gave rise to the process of treaty councils also lent its forms, vocabulary, metaphors, and rules to the agreements and relationships that emerged from the treaty councils. Mutual obligations in the Covenant Chain relationship between the Haudenosaunee and the Crown are reflections of the internal obligations between the nations of the Haudenosaunee. Dispute resolution mechanisms in the treaties, including the 1664 Fort Albany Treaty with the Crown and the 1794 Canandaigua Treaty with the United States, are borrowed from the mechanisms used among Haudenosaunee families, clans, and nations. To properly understand the treaties, in their historical and legal context, one must have some grasp of Haudenosaunee law. It is the legal environment, the ecosystem, in which the treaties live and breathe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the Haudenosaunee at this crucial time, there has been no law textbook. There are history books, but almost all of them have been written by foreigners. There are cases in the courts of the United States and Canada. None of them has seriously considered Haudenosaunee law. There are written versions of the laws, but no modern Haudenosaunee law books. The written versions of the law are like the statutes in a law library. There is also a need for textbooks, jurisprudence, analysis, and journals. Otherwise, there is not enough for &amp;quot;law&amp;quot;: there is only the meat chewed endlessly by anthropologists and historians, political scientists, ethnologists, and sociologists.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a legal system based on thinking, there has been precious little written about the thought behind the laws.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee themselves are in danger of becoming immersed in arguments about the details of the various versions of the law, and missing the fundamental principles upon which the law is based.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is a Haudenosaunee law book.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is written in the humble knowledge that possibly nobody else is in the same position to do it now as I am: those who know more about the law itself lack the legal training, or the writing skills, or the time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In humility, I begin with an apology, for I truly will not do as well as my elders would have, and my understanding is not as good as theirs. I miss my teachers, deeply and sadly. Much has been lost, and there is so much I have not learned, and may never learn. I can only do my best, and hope it is enough. For us, there is only the trying.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I would like to acknowledge the help of many people who guided my path. My brothers Roronhiakewen Dan Longboat, Kanakalût Roland Chrisjohn, Odatsehte Howard Elijah, Kanatiio Allen Gabriel, Tehennakarine Curtis Nelson, Hayadaha Rick Hill, and Sotsisowah John Mohawk, with whom long conversations always led to principles explained, are examples of how humans can be governed by the Kayanerenkó:wa today. My uncles, Kaientaronkwen Ernie Benedict, who taught me patience and perspective, and Tosawentsiadases Norm Jacobs, Tekaronianeken Jake Swamp, and Sakokwenonkwas Tom Porter, who taught me sweetness. My departed chiefs, Deskahe Harvey Longboat, Kanuhkitawi Bernie Parker, Donehogowa Hubert Buck, Coleman Powless, Deyonwe&#039;ton Jake Thomas, and Orenrekowa Brian Skidders, who led and lived by example. So have Kawennokie Salli Benedict and Carol Jacobs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Amber Meadow Adams has been an editor and partner of compassion, kindness, erudition, affection, and vast thoughtfulness.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And of course, my daughters, Kahsenneyohsta Lauren and Kahyoh&#039;no Karenna continue to teach me, support me, encourage me, and, despite all my faults, love me.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All these people changed and raised up my mind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Haii, Haii.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;##&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; PART I - Context&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Creation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;. . . how she fell . . .*&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee Creation Story is as important to an understanding of the Kayanerenkó:wa as the Bible is important to an understanding of the laws of Canada and the United States. The role of the Judeo-Christian tradition is more obvious in the United States, where money bears the motto &amp;quot;In God We Trust&amp;quot; and references to the Almighty exist within the constitution of the country itself. It is equally present in Canadian law. The Constitution Act, 1982, begins: &amp;quot;Whereas Canada is founded upon principles that recognize the supremacy of God.&amp;quot; Each Canadian coin bears the words &amp;quot;Elizabeth D.G. Regina,&amp;quot; and the initials &amp;quot;D.G.&amp;quot; remind us that she is Queen *dei gratia*, &amp;quot;by the grace of God&amp;quot;—that is, by divine right. The existence of the monarchy owes its principles to a tradition that is both Christian and Biblical. Canada&#039;s national anthem, in an increasingly secular society, still proclaims that *&amp;quot;il sait porter la croix.&amp;quot;* The traditions are not irrelevant to law: they illustrate some of the basic societal assumptions that lie at the foundations of the legal system, even as both countries insist that they maintain a separation between church and state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Just as there are several versions of the Kayanerenkó:wa, there are several versions of the Creation story. While some versions are inconsistent with others, and some contain internal contradictions, the fundamental principles are in most cases the same. The most complete recital of the Creation story was provided by Skaniatariio John Arthur Gibson, and transcribed by J.N.B. Hewitt at the end of the nineteenth century. Sotsisowah John Mohawk&#039;s (2005) *Iroquois Creation Story* provides an edited version that reduces repetitiveness, updates the Victorian English, and seeks to remove Europeanizing elements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Haudenosaunee story of creation, a woman fell from the Sky World to earth. The earth was covered in water, and only water creatures were living there. The water birds, ducks and geese, saw the woman falling and slowed her descent. A great turtle allowed her to land on his back. She met with the animals and persuaded them that she needed soil. The muskrat brought up a little soil for her, and, dancing earth-wise (the direction of almost all Haudenosaunee ceremonies—counter-clockwise, like the Aeolian forces in the Northern Hemisphere), shuffling so that her feet never left the earth, she spread that soil all around Turtle Island, making the land habitable. She had grasped at the sides of the hole as she fell, and in her hands she carried the first seeds. She had been pregnant when she fell, and her daughter was born in the new land and grew quickly. They were still the only people in a cold, dark place, and they were always hungry. The daughter became pregnant in due course—but with no men around, Sky Woman was angry and suspicious. The daughter gave birth to twins. The left-handed twin, Tawiskaron (Flint), cut his way out of his mother&#039;s side, killing her. The right-handed twin, Nikarondase (Sapling), was born in the normal way. The twins are symbols of the duality, reciprocity, or two-sidedness that permeates Haudenosaunee thinking and law. Later writers would suggest that there was a &amp;quot;Good Twin&amp;quot; and an &amp;quot;Evil Twin&amp;quot;: earlier versions are not nearly so simplistic. Nikarondase was good at creating things, and he made beautiful flowers, useful trees, graceful animals, while his twin made snakes and thorny bushes, inedible and poisonous creatures. Nikarondase made waters flow both ways; his brother installed falls and rapids and caused the rivers to flow in only one direction. What emerges from classic Haudenosaunee thinking about this, though, is not only that there are always two sides, but that there is also the need for balance. Without the thorns, the rose would be defenceless. Without the mosquitoes, the songbirds would lack food. The twins may have created different-looking things, but the totality of their creation was harmonious. At a time of uncertainty and hunger, each twin made decisions to the best of his ability, and each might have been right. The right-handed twin created human beings—today he is addressed in gratitude as Shonkwaiatíson—&amp;quot;He Completed Our Bodies.&amp;quot; Where Tawiskaron made ultimately harmful creatures, Nikarondase found ways to transform them into useful parts of a harmonious whole. Mary Arquette explains: &amp;quot;It was not his nature to destroy things, even those created by his brother, the Left-Handed Twin. Instead, he found an important role for most of them and gave them special duties.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transforming or deflecting harmful forces into benevolence and benefit is typical of the strategies of the Peacemaker in forming Haudenosaunee government. That our Creator himself would have used the same principles in establishing the ecosystems of the land is both consistent and reassuring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At one point, Tawiskaron challenged Nikarondase to a gambling game. The stakes were the very highest: would life continue? The game was the Peach Stone Bowl Game: six stones, white on one side and dark on the other, are tossed into the air, landing in the bowl. The side that gets all six the same colour first wins it all. The boys&#039; grandmother, Katsisayen (Mature Flowers), better known today as Sky Woman, favoured Tawiskaron and sided with him. Nikarondase borrowed the heads of some chickadees and tossed them into the air. As they fell, turning, turning, all creation called out in support of that one throw, and the six heads all landed the same way. There would indeed be life. Tawiskaron was sent away but not killed, and his influence over darkness and winter is still with us. Today, in every longhouse at Midwinter, the two sides of the house play the same game, in commemoration of that great gamble. It remains one of the four great sacred ceremonies of the Haudenosaunee.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This story reminds us that life on earth is not a sure thing. It is a matter of chance. It is a close thing, too. It could as easily not have been, or not have been as it is. &amp;quot;Modern&amp;quot; scientists have only recently come to the same conclusion: that when those primordial strands of DNA were twisting in some lukewarm pool millions of years ago, if the sun had passed behind the clouds or a nearby volcano had erupted or a stone had rolled into the puddle, life as we know it might not have existed. Carol Jacobs, a Cayuga Bear clan mother, told the United Nations:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In one throw, supported by all the living forces of the natural world, our Creator won this bet. He won it all for us. He won it for all of us. We commemorate this each year in our Midwinter ceremonies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is not just a quaint legend. It is a reminder that, as scientists now agree, life on earth is a result of chance, as well as of intent. Life on earth is a fragile matter. That magnificent gamble could have gone the other way: life could just as easily not have been at all.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That is a reason for constantly giving thanks. We know very well how close life is to not being. The reminders are all around us.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If life is a close thing, then we must care for it, acknowledge it, and be constantly grateful for it. The words that open and close each meeting of the people, ohe&#039;n:ton karihwatékwen, the &amp;quot;words that come before all else,&amp;quot; are words of gratitude for and to each part of the natural world. An attitude of modest gratitude—atenonhwaratonhtserakon—is pervasive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gratitude is offered to the Creator for making the world a place that supports life, but in giving thanks, the Haudenosaunee also acknowledge the plants and animals that sacrifice their lives so that humans can survive. There are ceremonies to give thanks as each of the plants are harvested: maple, berries, beans, green corn, and white corn. Hunters greet the animals before hunting and thank each animal after it is taken. In thanking each part of the natural world, the Haudenosaunee are also thanking Creation itself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sostsisowah John Mohawk expanded on the traditional Haudenosaunee saying that we cannot see the Creator&#039;s face, a metaphoric reference to our inability to fully comprehend the complexity of the creative force of the universe:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the native tradition the Creator has a less specific personage, if it&#039;s even a personage at all. The Creator could be time or space or energy or all of those. The Creator could be everything there is. And the Creator could be our dream. But whatever it is, we don&#039;t know, so we ought to be humble about that. And we ought to be humble because we are really the tiniest little speck on a little star in a not-very-large galaxy, on the edge of other galaxies that may be among billions and billions of galaxies that we&#039;ve never heard of and never will.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gratitude is perhaps an inadequate way of describing the thanksgiving. Wallace Chafe explained the inadequacy of English to match the Seneca thinking that goes with the words:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The word &amp;quot;thanksgiving&amp;quot; seems no worse a choice than any other and has been used by most previous writers. When confronted with the Seneca words involved, some speakers balk at any attempt to give an English equivalent. Others translate, to some extent according to context, as &amp;quot;thank, be grateful to or for, rejoice in, bless, greet.&amp;quot; The trouble is that the Seneca concept is broader than that expressed in any simple English term, and covers not only the conventionalized amenities of both thanksgiving and greeting, but also a more general feeling of happiness over the existence of something or someone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee story of creation provides principles that shape and affect many aspects of the law. Fundamental beliefs find their way into constitutional and statutory provisions. The separation of church and state, a relatively recent occurrence in Anglo-Saxon law in North America, is not a line drawn in Haudenosaunee law. The cycle of ceremonies of gratitude is not at all the same as a European organized church, though some anthropologists assert that they have coalesced into a religion with &amp;quot;deacons&amp;quot; (the faithkeepers) and an organized structure (the annual Six Nations meetings to recite the Karihwí:iyo, the Code of Handsome Lake). By law, the rotiyanershon are responsible for helping to maintain the Four Ceremonies. They have no other religious functions. The ceremonies, Sotsisowah John Mohawk explained, are at the heart of what it means to be Haudenosaunee:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Despite all the information which came to light about the existence of an Iroquois cosmology, anthropologists … generally failed to see a connection between the cosmology and the ceremonial life of the Iroquois. This is interesting because one of the major themes of the narrative pointedly answers a central question about Haudenosaunee identity. Who are we? We are the people who carry on the tradition of ceremonials of thanksgiving. Why do we do these ceremonials? Because we recognize our great good fortune as receivers of the gifts of the Giver of Life. The people who composed this narrative did so to transmit that message to future generations. As long as there are Haudenosaunee people, the narrative tells us, they will perform the Great Gamble for Life. For as long as the Haudenosaunee exist, according to this tradition, they will remember this story.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is to questions about the meaning of existence that grand mythologies, sometimes called meta-narratives, turn their attention. Mythologies construct visions of the past which address the question about how the world came to be the way it is and, equally important, how we, as cultural beings in a certain culture, came to be the way we are.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Such a story was not intended to be a secret among a few selected individuals. It was heard by all, the young and old, together, as a group experience. In the same way that everyone who participates in modern American culture has heard of the child who was born in a manger, everyone in ancient Iroquoia heard about the woman who fell from the sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[The Creation story offers] an Haudenosaunee vision of humankind&#039;s role in the universe, and [calls] upon the bearers of the culture to join that vision, to act it out, to join in with a dream, and to form a society which reflects it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One fundamental principle that flows from the Creation story is the relationship between human beings and the natural world. The Book of Genesis gives human beings &amp;quot;dominion&amp;quot; over all parts of the natural world and suggests that everything was created to serve the needs of humanity. More recent Christian thinkers have struggled to insert the concept of &amp;quot;stewardship&amp;quot; into these words. While logic agrees with the approach, fundamentalists who see an obligation to develop and exploit wage theological war with environmentalists who feel a need to conserve. The Haudenosaunee Creation story places human beings squarely in the midst of a natural world in which they form an integral part, and in which each part has been given responsibilities. Sotsisowah explained:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee Creation Story, which we can assume predates the foundation of the League, is replete with symbols of a rational universe. In the Creation Story, the only creature with a potential for irrational thought is the human being. All the other creatures of Nature are natural, i.e. rational.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nature is depicted as a threatening and irrational aspect of existence in the West&#039;s cosmologies. The Haudenosaunee cosmology is quite different. It depicts the natural world as a rational existence while admitting that human beings possess an imperfect understanding of it. The idea that human beings have an imperfect understanding of the rational nature of existence is something of a caution to Haudenosaunee in their dealings with nature. Conversely, the idea that the natural world is disorganized and irrational has served as something of a permission in the West and may be the single cultural aspect which best explains the differences between these two societies&#039; relationships to Nature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The reason it&#039;s so important to get people to cease fearing nature is that negative emotions invade one&#039;s ability to think clearly. People who are afraid of nature have much more difficulty defending it than people who are not. All of those negative emotions give you permission to enact violence on nature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The values and principles inherent in the Creation story remain close to the day-to-day thinking and conduct of traditional Haudenosaunee today. Neil Patterson confirms:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From a Haudenosaunee perspective, there is a personal mandate from the Creation to protect Mother Earth and all that inhabit her. We should all begin to look at what personal changes we can make to reduce waste that our waters will eventually receive. . . . If there are doubts in the minds of our leaders about action like this on the Natural World, the answer is obvious. These past mistakes of history serve as a guideline for future generations: not only our grandchildren, but for the fish and everything that is in the Circle of Life. Our elders have learned from their elders these rules and guidelines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Creation story establishes relationships—family relationships—between its characters in ways that resound through Haudenosaunee society. The earth, receiving the body of our Creator&#039;s mother, becomes our mother. The moon is our grandmother (because she was formed when Nikarondase (Thaharionwakon) placed his grandmother&#039;s head in the heavens after her death). The animals and plants are our brothers and sisters. If the law is founded upon bringing disparate people into a single family, the Creation story sets the tone for doing so.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A second principle is the nature of good and evil. Christianity has wrestled with the issue of how an all-powerful God who is absolutely good could permit evil to exist and even to flourish. The Church answers: it is a mystery that we humans cannot fathom; we are told we must have faith. Haudenosaunee thinking recognizes that good and evil both exist, and have been here from the beginning. They *are*, and therefore the question is not why, but rather how to address them in our lives and societies, and how to find balance. Evil will not go away: we must continue to recognize it, understand it, and guard against it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A third principle is the relationship between the real and the spiritual, or what Wade Davis has called an &amp;quot;inner horizon.&amp;quot; In &amp;quot;scientific&amp;quot; societies, things exist if their physical presence is provable. In most Indigenous societies, a thing that is dreamed also exists. The Haudenosaunee Creation story reflects a society that recognizes (as quantum theory suggests) that beings can move between our world and the spirit world, and that each world influences the other.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is another set of lessons in the Creation story, urgently relevant to people alive today. Sky Woman, the only person the story follows through her entire lifetime, is thrust into a dark, wet, cold world. She is pregnant and alone. She survives what can only be described as catastrophic environmental change: the loss of her entire world. She and her grandsons are hungry much of the time. The ways in which they coped—how they dealt with the issues of sharing, of adapting, of making decisions—are shapers and reflections of the kind of society the Haudenosaunee developed. The Creation story is old: the world its people faced has features of an ice age.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is always friction between those who say &amp;quot;we were created here&amp;quot; and those who say &amp;quot;you&#039;re just immigrants like everyone else—your ancestors came over the ice bridge across the Bering Sea less than 25,000 years ago.&amp;quot; Those who support the &amp;quot;bridge&amp;quot; theory often use it to assert that Aboriginal title is only immigrant title; that nobody has a better claim to the land than anyone else; that human occupation of North America is not ancient. From a scientific perspective, the same accusations could be levelled at the British, since human occupation of the British Isles is no older (humans crossed to England after the last ice age). In fact, *humans* as we know them have not been around that long compared to the age of the world. We are all very recent. The Haudenosaunee do not believe (as the Bible seems to assume, in saying that we were made in God&#039;s image) that we are the ultimate beings in the world, the end of all evolution. Things change. Sotsisowah John Mohawk observed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Things flow from sources which have roots deeper than individual talents or society&#039;s gifts. They flow from nature, and the sacred beings who designed nature. If one embraces the initial premise, that human beings were extremely lucky that of all the places in the universe, they have a home just the right distance from a sun of just the right intensity, that there is enough water, grass, and enough of everything. From there, it&#039;s a small step to accept that whatever created all that is a force of unexcelled sacred dimensions and the will of that force is something people should try to cooperate with to perpetuate life. The way a group expresses its cooperation is through ceremonies which recreate the conditions present when people first came to consciousness of these things.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Humankind&#039;s relationship to nature projected in this precolonial, pre-patriarchal, pre-modern story carries a fundamental and unchanging truth, but one which subsequent generations would need to relearn over and over. Humans exist in a context of nature, and not vice versa. Everything we have ever had, everything we have, everything we will ever have—our health, our good looks, our intelligence, everything—is a product not of our own merit but of all that which created our world. That which created our world is not society, but the power of the universe. Nature, which is the context of our existence, is sacred. A significant manifestation of nature, the regenerative power of life, is also sacred, and we who walk about on the earth are not without obligations to perpetuate this system, the &amp;quot;work&amp;quot; of the Giver of Life, in the greater scheme of things.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Those who say &amp;quot;we were created here&amp;quot; may or may not be wrong in biological terms. For legal purposes, though, biological creation is irrelevant. It is enough to say &amp;quot;we were created here, *as a people*,&amp;quot; in social and legal terms. The land has shaped its societies. Given half a chance, the land will shape the people who came to the Americas from Europe, from Asia, from Africa. Haudenosaunee society is &amp;quot;Indigenous,&amp;quot; in legal terms. It exists nowhere else. The term carries two distinct legal meanings. One is that the people have a special connection to the land in which their society was formed (Gary Paul Nabhan calls Indigenous peoples &amp;quot;cultures of habitat,&amp;quot; existing effectively only within the ecosystems in which they evolved). The other is that they were here first, before all the waves of more recent immigrants—and as an Indigenous society, they have the rights that come from being first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; The Land&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As a people with a culture of habitat, the Haudenosaunee developed, over millennia, a sense of balance and comfort with the land around them. The homeland of the Haudenosaunee was not, as is sometimes assumed, a forbidding, untouched, and wild forest. Engelbrecht observed: &amp;quot;A commonly held image in need of revision is that eastern North America was covered by unbroken virgin forest before European settlement. Europeans coming from regions that had been clear-cut may have thought the environment untouched, but long human presence in the northeast had affected the distribution of plant and animal communities even before the establishment of Native American horticulture . . . the environment in which Native Americans lived is increasingly viewed as an environment that Native Americans altered, both consciously and unconsciously.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fire was a powerful tool. Deliberately set fires were a means of maintaining meadows, encouraging the natural progression from meadow to thicket to forest and back to meadow again, propagating certain trees and plants. Fire was sometimes used to drive game, but there was also an understanding of its long-term role in supporting hunting by maintaining diverse habitats and therefore biodiversity itself. There were natural meadows and prairies, so that it was not necessary to carve new village sites out of dense forests. Parker, though, explained that &amp;quot;by burning off tracts in the forest large clearings were made suitable for fields and towns.&amp;quot; Warren Johnson, visiting his brother Sir William in 1760, noted Haudenosaunee restraint in using fire as a tool: &amp;quot;When clearing land, they Set fire to the Timber, &amp;amp; burn it to ashes, which they scatter about on the ground, they make Charcoal of Wood; they never clear more Land than Serves for their Own Use.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The absence of many earthworms (introduced with European settlement in the seventeenth century) meant that the forest&#039;s understory was not mulched with the same intensity, and therefore it supported different plant life than it does today. The Haudenosaunee deliberately encouraged some trees and plants: black walnut, for example, appears in areas of settlement, well north of its &amp;quot;normal&amp;quot; Carolinian range. The forests around the villages, to the Haudenosaunee before (and after) the arrival of Europeans, were managed ecosystems, not a wild frontier. The idea of managed fields and forests blurs the sharp human/non-human line between the clearing and the woods.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Until recently, archaeologists believed that the knowledge of how to deliberately plant crops arrived in northeastern North America about ten centuries ago, spreading northward from Mexico. It is likely that knowledge of different plants came at different times, and that some knowledge was imported while other plants were domesticated locally. Corn and beans came from the south a thousand years ago; squash and gourds (cucurbits) may have been bred locally a thousand years before that. Sunflowers, other fleshy flowers (chenopods and sumpweed), Jerusalem artichoke, and nut groves (hickory nuts, walnuts, acorns, chestnuts, and hazelnuts) may have been developed in the northeast and spread from there. The people also gathered fruit: plums and cherries, strawberries and raspberries, sumac and blackberries.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The cultivation of crops transformed the way of life of the peoples of the northeast of Turtle Island. Corn, beans, and squash became known as the Three Sisters, &amp;quot;our life supporters.&amp;quot; Fields around the villages and towns of the Haudenosaunee might stretch for a mile or two in all directions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What Gayle Fritz (drawing on Maxi&#039;diwaic&#039;s commentary in *Buffalo Bird Woman&#039;s Garden*) said of Hidatsa women and the land could equally apply to the Haudenosaunee: &amp;quot;The hoe and stick digging technique was labor intensive, but the women loved their fields and pampered their crops, even singing to them, and most of the work was appreciated for the comradeship, the natural beauty, and the emotional satisfaction it afforded.&amp;quot; The earth, say the Haudenosaunee, is a mother to all of us. We must treat her as we treat our own mothers, with respect and gentleness: &amp;quot;The feeling of reverence toward the earth itself is also to be found behind some of the lingering reluctance to adopt the white man&#039;s agricultural equipment. The &#039;Old People&#039; believe that since Mother Earth nurtured her children, they should not tear at her breasts with ploughs, but rather tickle them gently with a stick or hoe.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The transformation from a society of hunter-gatherers to a society of gardeners (horticulturalists) took place gradually: &amp;quot;By A.D. 900, cucurbits, chenopod, little barley and sunflower were being grown with maize in the West Branch of the Susquehanna River basin. . . . In Europe, the time between A.D. 900 and A.D. 1200 is known as the Medieval Warm Period or neo-Atlantic climate episode. It is suggested that a similar warm period in New York facilitated the spread of farming.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It meant the people could live together in larger, more permanent settlements. These larger settlements required more permanent and sophisticated forms of government.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Not long after the growth of towns came the kinds of war that required palisades, not just to keep wild animals out, but for protection against human enemies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Physically, there were visible and conceptual boundaries in the minds of the people (as every culture provides visible boundaries). They radiated outward from the family&#039;s hearth or fire, which itself was a circle of stones. The next boundary was the walls of the longhouse. Then came the walls of the town. They represented security from danger: within those walls the land was under almost complete human control. Outside the palisades, the fields and gardens were cleared by men and cultivated by women. The fields ran to the woods&#039; edge. The woods, which could be seen in a circle around the town, were another clear boundary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Between the settlements, and between the nations, there was a network of paths and trails, both by land and water. People wishing to visit another settlement would travel along the wide paths of peace. The paths share another aspect with international relations: the more they are used, the plainer they are, and the smoother they become. Those wishing to do harm would move in swift silence through the woods. Those who came in peace would often come singing their peace songs to announce themselves. A watchful town would always have young men posted in the woods to guard against danger. Visitors would stop at the edge of the woods, and wait to be greeted. The narratives of the Kayanerenkó:wa describe several instances where individuals stop some distance from a community and light a fire, so that the smoke &amp;quot;pierces the sky.&amp;quot; This would give the people of the community a chance to investigate who the visitor is, and what is his business. In the story of the making of the law, the Peacemaker and Hiawatha consistently make fires near the woods&#039; edge, and tell the men sent to meet them to go ahead and announce that they are coming, bringing a message. In uncertain times, it is prudent to be announced, and to be invited.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The woods&#039; edge is a place of visible transition, from the shadows of the forest to the soaring sky of the clearing It is a dividing line between light and darkness.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the people know the visitors are coming, they will light the fire and wait for their arrival to perform the greeting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When he approached Hochelaga in 1534, Jacques Cartier described the broad path of peace to the town, and the greeting at the woods&#039; edge that he and his men received:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The City of Hochelaga is six miles from the riverside, and the road thither is as well-beaten and frequented as can be, leading through as fine a country as can be seen, full of fine oaks as any in France, the whole ground being strewn over with fine acorns. When we had gone four or five miles we were met by one of the great lords of the city, accompanied by a great many natives, who made us understand by signs that we must stop at a place where they had made a large fire, which we did accordingly. When we had rested there some time, the chief made a long discourse in token of welcome and friendship, showing a joyful countenance and every mark of goodwill.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nearly a century and a half later, another French visitor described a similar experience at Onondaga. By now, the French knew how to announce themselves:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is why he came two leagues to meet us, accompanied by four or five others of the Ancients, an honor which they are never accustomed to give to the other ambassadors, to meet whom they are contented to go a little eighth of a league outside of the town. . . . I walked gravely between two rows of people, who give me a thousand benedictions. . . . I kept making my cry of Ambassador while walking . . . then having returned in two words my thanks for this good welcome, I continued my journey and my cry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The woods&#039; edge is like a front door. The host has less control over the world beyond it, but a great deal of control within the house. With the visitor standing and waiting at the front door, the host has time to get the house in order and to decide how the visitor will be greeted. For the visitor, the front door is also a place of decision: to stay or to leave. That decision becomes more difficult once he is inside the house, with the door closed behind him. Being welcomed in, he leaves behind him the safety of the woods, exchanging it for the hospitality of the house, becoming a guest. Stepping past the woods&#039; edge into the clearing is an act of trust.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The visitors standing by the fire at the woods&#039; edge are able to leave if they choose: they have not made the commitment to come in; they have not yet been assured of their safety.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the triad described in the Covenant Chain relationship is respect, trust, and friendship, in that specific order, then the ceremony at the woods&#039; edge fits comfortably into the sequence. Acknowledgment, greeting, sharing the words of comfort—all are acts of respect, visible, palpable acts that demonstrate esteem and welcome. They are mutual efforts to send the message of trust that will enable the host to truly welcome the guest, and the visitor to feel safe in entering the host&#039;s domain as a friend.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1645, when the Mohawk speaker Kiotsaeton spoke to the French and Hurons at Three Rivers, he conducted the preliminaries of the treaty making from a canoe. Possibly, since the Haudenosaunee had arrived by canoe, by the water paths, standing near the water&#039;s edge was the river equivalent of standing at the woods&#039; edge. But the fact that he did not land, that he remained in the canoe, also sent a message: we are not sure of our welcome, and we do not yet have enough of a relationship, enough trust in you, to step onto the shore before being invited to do so.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today, the greeting at the woods&#039; edge is preserved in the ceremony of Condolence: the clear-minded people stop their walk some distance from the longhouse of those who are grieving, and they wait to be approached and welcomed. They have come singing the peace songs, to announce themselves, and they stop to give their friends the opportunity to prepare themselves and to be satisfied that the delegation is indeed coming in peace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Present-day Haudenosaunee territories are an archipelago in ecological as well as cultural terms. They can be seen on satellite photographs and topographical maps as containing some of the last viable Carolinian forests in Ontario and Quebec, and among the last old-growth forest in New York (much of the landscape that is similar is in national, provincial, and state parks). Today, as in centuries past, the Haudenosaunee are people of clearings, not of cleared lands like their neighbours. The forests are deliberately preserved as places for hunting, for gathering food and medicines, and for spiritual comfort and strength.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fenton maintained that the cultivated land belonged to the women, while the woods were men&#039;s territory. He wrote that this reflects the duality that men were mainly concerned with killing (animals, fish, enemies, and even the trees they would clear for the fields), while women were concerned with promoting life (the crops and the children). Men take life; women give life. This perspective misses the deeply collaborative nature of the division of labour in Haudenosaunee communities, but it acknowledges that the woods, more dangerous than the fields, were more often considered men&#039;s business. Robert Venables writes of Haudenosaunee lands as &amp;quot;gendered landscapes,&amp;quot; though he rejects any suggestion that Haudenosaunee society was imbalanced as a result of women&#039;s rights to land. Venables also recognizes that Haudenosaunee perceptions that the elements of the natural world are linked to and equal to humans result in a different attitude towards the world as a whole:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because the Haudenosaunee worldview is incorporative and seeks to balance what is perceived to be a world inhabited by spiritually equal beings, the Haudenosaunee worldview is still evident today in their spiritual perception of the non-Indians who now occupy so much of their homelands. . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is not to say, either in history or today, that the Haudenosaunee never made mistakes, for indeed they have and they still do. But when they make mistakes, they ask different questions and pose different solutions based on their worldview—a worldview, it must be stressed, that is what the Creator intended them to follow, and not simply a human invention.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One source of this balanced view is the constant contrast between the forest and the clearing. The forest is also the &amp;quot;hunting grounds,&amp;quot; a term that describes the major activity that takes place there, and one that took on additional legal significance as it became part of the vocabulary of dealings with European powers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As one moves away from one&#039;s town, one gradually moves into territory in which one has less and less control—through the territory of other settlements of one&#039;s own nation, and into the territory of other friendly nations where one remains a visitor, though the &amp;quot;Dish with One Spoon&amp;quot; provisions of the Kayanerenkó:wa allow one to hunt for food. Then one travels into the territory of less friendly or hostile nations. A journey moves one from being owner to guest to visitor to stranger.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;deep dark forest,&amp;quot; the woods beyond one&#039;s familiar territory, could be a place of danger and uncertainty. Light and darkness are important opposites in Haudenosaunee thought: day is our Creator&#039;s time, while night is said to belong to his brother (so councils are not held after sundown, when minds and bodies are tired); white wampum is the symbol of peace, as purple wampum is often associated with misfortune. The dark forest is a place of peril, populated not only by potential enemy humans but also by monsters: flying heads, stone giants, and serpents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the world&#039;s rim dwells Hadu&#039;wi, a being our Creator encountered in the early days of the world. A powerful figure, Hadu&#039;wi may symbolize all the elements of the natural world over which humans have no control. His alliance with us, arranged by the Creator, is invoked by the medicine society whose members wear the wooden masks bearing his image, and maintained by the tobacco burned for him. It is said that, in the deep woods, people can sometimes see him flitting between trees. The woods are a place of power, but it is not necessarily power that humans can command.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the forest—and the paths through it—is one dominant aspect of the landscape of the Haudenosaunee, a second important feature is the river. The people lived by both rivers and lakes—the core of the Haudenosaunee homeland is the Finger Lakes area, where it is said that the Creator scraped his fingers along the land, creating today&#039;s waters. The St. Lawrence, Susquehanna, Hudson, Mohawk, and Genesee Rivers were also crucial, as were the many smaller streams and creeks. The rivers, because they are flowing paths of communication, are a recurring metaphor in the thinking of the people and the law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Elder Brothers—the Mohawks and Senecas—sometimes refer to the Younger Brothers—the Oneidas and Cayugas—as &amp;quot;you who are downstream from us.&amp;quot; Geographically, this makes no sense. On the Mohawk River, the Oneidas are west, and upstream, from the Mohawks. To the west, the rivers flow north–south, and the Cayugas, in their homeland on Cayuga Lake, were not downstream from the Senecas on any river. But when one juxtaposes this affectionate term with its alternatives, &amp;quot;younger brothers&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;offspring,&amp;quot; one understands that the river in the Kayanerenkó:wa is not geographic and literal: it is a river of time. Like fire, a river is a process, not an event.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Understanding a river in temporal terms comes naturally to people who see and use a river every day. When you stand on the shore, an object upstream from you now will soon be downstream. For the Haudenosaunee, three centuries ago, the rivers were highways, sources of water, food, and medicine, and a constant part of their landscape.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rivers are also metaphors of life, constantly changing. &amp;quot;You can never step into the same river twice&amp;quot; is not geographic, but temporal. The river that is placid and clear today may be overflowing its banks, muddy, and brown tomorrow. Like human life, rivers are affected by storms and high winds, drought, freezing and flood. It is their flowing nature, though, that finds its way into the Great Law, into the spirit of the law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Creation story, the people&#039;s clans are revealed to them when they go for water at the river. In the narrative part of the Great Law, many events take place by rivers or small lakes. The Cannibal lives by a river; so does Tsikonsaseh; so does Hiawatha in his hermit stage. The Peacemaker is tested by the Mohawks at Cohoes Falls on the Mohawk River. In the narrative, rivers are not important except as locators. In the substantive aspects of the law, the rivers become metaphors, vehicles for principles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An underground river sweeps the weapons of war away once they have been buried under the Tree of Peace. In that metaphor, the Confederacy stays in one place, &amp;quot;on the bank,&amp;quot; as it were, while the river becomes the agent of healing, change, and removal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The river is the symbol of travel through time and life. The words and ideas contained in wampum belts are intended to flow through time, so the wampums themselves are likened to that temporal river: kahswénhtha, &amp;quot;it flows.&amp;quot; The river stands for the idea that the principles of the law, and the relationships they foster, can remain constant, even as the temporal, social, and political landscape changes. Another word for a wampum belt, kahionni, is interpreted as &amp;quot;the river formed by the hand of man.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The term kahswénhtha is often applied, nowadays, to the Tekeni teyohá:te, the Two Row (or more properly &amp;quot;Two Path&amp;quot;) Wampum. In that wampum, the canoe of the Haudenosaunee and the sailing ship of the Europeans are said to be travelling down the River of Life, side by side, neither interfering in the path of the other. They remain close to each other, bound by friendship, trust, and respect, but they also keep a respectful distance from each other. It is easy to see the flowing nature of the relationship and commitments in a wampum that uses the river itself as a symbol. The constancy within change in the law has been extrapolated to a constant relationship within changing circumstances in international relations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every wampum belt, though, includes the symbolism of the temporal river, and is thus called kahswénhtha. The Two Row is not the only wampum that flows. Every wampum that represents a relationship or a principle of law flows through time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Flowing through time&amp;quot; requires a second perspective. If the ship and the canoe are on the river together, they are moving through time at the same speed. Their relationship to each other, on the river, is constant, even as the river changes in relation to its banks and its bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Flowing through time also means flowing downstream. On a river, it means flowing with the current, not fighting against it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The nature and use of rivers lead to another powerful metaphor: on a river, going downstream, the most significant effort is not propulsion, but navigation. In the land of the Haudenosaunee, navigation meant avoiding rocks, falls, sunken logs, and fallen trees. The people were using light, quick, fragile canoes in fast-moving water. If the rivers were highways, it was important to keep them clear and safe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since the rivers were paths of communication, they—and the wampum belts that flowed—became part of symbolically keeping minds and paths open. Where the visitors to a council came on foot, both the greeting at the woods&#039; edge and the opening of the council would refer to keeping the path open and free from brambles and weeds, and removing fallen trees. Where they came by water, the concern would be to keep the rivers open. When Kiostaeton spoke to the French and Algonquins in 1645, he spoke of calming waters and opening the paths, by water and by land:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fifth [wampum &amp;quot;present&amp;quot;] was given to clear the river, and to drive away the enemy&#039;s canoes, which might impede navigation. He made use of a thousand gestures, as if he had collected the waves and had caused a calm, from Quebec to the Iroquois country.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The sixth was to smooth the rapids and waterfalls, or the strong currents, that occur in the river on which one must sail to reach their country. &amp;quot;I thought that I would perish,&amp;quot; he said, &amp;quot;in those boiling waters. This is to appease them;&amp;quot; and with his hands and arms he smoothed and arrested the torrents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The seventh was to produce a profound calm on the great Lake Saint Louys that has to be crossed. &amp;quot;Here,&amp;quot; he said, &amp;quot;is something to make it smooth as ice, to appease the winds, and to allay the anger of the waves.&amp;quot; Then, after having by his gestures rendered the route easy, he tied a collar of porcelain beads on the arm of a Frenchman, and pulled him straight across the square, to show that our canoes could go to their country without any difficulty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The eighth performed the whole journey that had to be made on land. You would have said that he felled trees; that he lopped off branches; that he pushed back the bushes; that he put earth in the deepest holes. &amp;quot;There,&amp;quot; said he, &amp;quot;is the road, quite smooth and straight.&amp;quot; He bent toward the ground, looking to see whether there were any more thorns or bushes, and whether there were any mounds over which one might stumble in walking. &amp;quot;It is all finished. We can see the smoke of our villages, from Quebec to the extremity of our country. All obstacles are removed.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Jesuit recorder of the 1645 council saw a pantomime of a literal removal of physical obstacles. Kiotsaeton intended more: a metaphorical performance of the removal of obstacles to clear-minded communication. As his final statement after removing the obstacles suggests, seeing clearly is the beginning of understanding clearly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The river is a part of the metaphor in the law for open communication and clear thought. Equally important, though, it is a metaphor for the need for constancy of principle amid the certainty of change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the forest and the river are two important landscape metaphors, the sky is the third. Haudenosaunee territory is not mountainous. Much of it is low rolling hills. Human presence would be detected, not by sight of village clearings from a distance, but by the smoke of the fires rising to the sky. The narrative of the Great Law contains dozens of references to the smoke rising—sometimes the fire a person lights at the woods&#039; edge to notify the people of the village of his presence; sometimes the stand for peace of villages unafraid to show themselves; sometimes the smoke of a fire of gratitude, of tobacco-burning. In each case, the smoke links the earth and its people to the Sky World, a constant reminder of the lessons of the Creation story.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Haudenosaunee perspective on the relationship between the people and the land was explained to the Supreme Court of Canada in *Ktunaxa Nation v. British Columbia* in 2016:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While it is dangerous to generalize about Indigenous laws, they seem to share a key difference from the common law. It is exemplified in the Haudenosaunee Creation story, when Taharonhiawakon picks up a clod of earth in his hands and says: &amp;quot;I tell you the Earth is ALIVE!&amp;quot; Compare this to the origins of Canadian property law: centuries ago, when an Englishman bought a parcel of land, the transaction was not complete until he went to the place, picked up a lump of its earth, and declared: &amp;quot;This is MINE!&amp;quot; Seisin is not far from seizure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For many Indigenous peoples, the assumption that one can &amp;quot;own&amp;quot; land is as repugnant as the idea that one can &amp;quot;own&amp;quot; other human beings (abandoned by the Crown only in 1833). The theory that open land is there for the taking, that there is a broad individual or corporate right to develop, is foreign to Indigenous legal systems in which humans hold stewardship of Earth, not dominion, and in which so many things are relatives.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The people did not own the land in some of the ways that modern Western &amp;quot;civilization&amp;quot; considers ownership. They had no practice of individual land ownership, and they also did not believe that the whole territory belonged only to the people who happened to be alive at the time. Since the Haudenosaunee see themselves as part of a continuum, to the extent that the land belongs to anyone, it is the property of everyone—past, present, and future.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In his commentary on concepts of land ownership among the Iroquois, Snyderman wrote that:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The belief that the land belonged not only to the present generation, but to all future generations was widely accepted. The present generation, it was believed, had no power to sell lands, for obviously the future generations could not express their wishes in council. The present generation acted as custodians of the land for the unborn; they could only utilize the land during the period of their actual existence. This attitude is clearly discerned in the now famous speech of Cornplanter, Halftown, and Big Tree in 1790. In one of the opening paragraphs they stated quite dramatically that: &amp;quot;We will not conceal from you that the Great God and not men, has preserved the Cornplant from the hands of his nation. For they ask continually, where is the land on which our children and their children after them are to lie down upon?&amp;quot; (Drake, S.G., 1834, p.96)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee did not &amp;quot;own&amp;quot; land the way the Europeans did. They expressed their relationship to land more in terms of their belonging to, and sharing an identity with, a specific region. Traditionally, one does not say just where one is from, but rather &amp;quot;that kind of clay I am made of&amp;quot; (niwaki&#039;taró:ten)—which means the same thing. &amp;quot;Belonging,&amp;quot; in several aspects of Haudenosaunee relations, is more important than &amp;quot;owning,&amp;quot; and being made of the clay of a place is an expression of being part of it, just as identifying oneself as being Wolf Clan is not an expression of authority, but rather of belonging. One belongs to a family, to a clan, or to a medicine society in the sense that one bears privileges and protection as a result of the relationship, but also obligations. In the same way, and because the land is provident and protective, as we protect the land, we &amp;quot;belong&amp;quot; to the land more than it belongs to us. After all, it will be here long after our bodies have returned to it. Haudenosaunee views of relations with land are often expressed in terms of stewardship, a relationship between a person and a thing he or she is looking after. This is not dissimilar to the relationship between a person and a medicine mask: he or she looks after it as a custodian, a steward, but also as a companion of a thing that is alive, rather than as an owner. European societies and their laws did not have clear concepts and words to describe what they found in the Americas 500 years ago. Nor should one forget that, 500 years ago, the societies of western Europe often treated wives and children as a form of property, and did practise slavery. Land ownership was as often the result of recent conquest as of ancient intimacy. In European society, based increasingly on private property, many more things were typically individually owned than in Haudenosaunee society at the time. It is not unexpected that land should be considered fungible and often private in Euro-American society, and considered a relative, alive and to be cared for, in the view of the Haudenosaunee.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nevertheless, there were aspects of the connection between the people and the land that would be taken by Europeans as indicators of land ownership. Along the paths into Haudenosaunee country, young men were sentinels against any invaders or intruders. Haudenosaunee law provides that the hunting grounds shall be shared between allied nations—the metaphor is that the land is like a dish with a single wooden spoon—so the Haudenosaunee would welcome guest hunters. But they would, in the most forceful terms, resist anyone seeking to take the land without their consent, or threaten the safety of their villages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since the women cultivated the fields, they had primary authority for making decisions about that land. The earth, after all, is our mother, not some male entity. Europeans, who for centuries had placed women in a subordinate position in which they rarely owned land, often found the authority of Haudenosaunee women difficult to accept. The Haudenosaunee had to explain the difference, often bluntly. Agwerondongwas, an Oneida royá:ner, stated: &amp;quot;Brothers! Our Ancestors considered it a great Transgression to reject the Counsels of their Women, particularly the female Governesses. Our Ancestors considered them the Mistresses of the Soil. Our Ancestors said who brings us forth, who cultivates our Land, who kindles our fires and boils our Pots, but the Women . . . they are the Life of the Nation.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fact that the responsibility for speaking with outsiders was a men&#039;s matter made it even more complicated—since the Europeans generally assumed that those who spoke were also the decision makers. Lafitau wrote of the chiefs that &amp;quot;it seems that they serve only to represent and aid the women in the matters in which decorum does not permit the latter to appear or act.&amp;quot; Sometimes, though, the women had to speak for themselves, to take an exceptional step to make their position clear: &amp;quot;Your sisters, the women, have taken the same into great consideration, because that you and our sachems have said so much upon it . . . [Y]ou ought to hear &amp;amp; listen to what we women shall speak, as well as the sachems, for we are the owners of the land &amp;amp; it is ours; for it is we that plant it, for our and their use. Hear us, therefore, for we speak of things that concern us &amp;amp; our children &amp;amp; you must not think hard of us while our men shall say more to you; for we have told them.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Modern Western law concerning land separates its consideration between the right of a nation or nation-state over its territory (sovereignty or jurisdiction) and the nature of land ownership within that polity. Haudenosaunee law does the same thing. Where internally, notions of stewardship, women&#039;s rights, and the concern for future generations governed land rights, a different set of considerations determined whether the land was Haudenosaunee land or the land of other nations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complicate matters further, the frequent tension between the chiefs and the warriors sometimes strayed into land issues. As constant war increased the perceived power of the warriors, they would sometimes claim to have authority for the land, too: a speaker for the warriors told the British: &amp;quot;Now Brother I let you know that our Kings having nothing to do with our Lands; for we, the Warriors fought for the Lands and so the right belongs to us &amp;amp; we will take Care of them.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Conquest? It is unclear whether there was a pre-Columbian idea of conquest, but certainly the Haudenosaunee understood the idea by 1701, when they made a &amp;quot;trust deed&amp;quot; concerning the &amp;quot;Beaver Hunting Ground&amp;quot; —the territory of southwestern Ontario &amp;quot;won by the sword&amp;quot; from the Wendat, Tiionontate, and Attiwandaronon. To the Haudenosaunee in the seventeenth century, though, conquest of territory meant a permanent military solution, not a temporary one: as the chiefs explained to the British on February 13, 1688:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The French can have no title to those places which they possesse, nay not to Cadarachqui and Mount Royall nor none of our lands toward the Ottawawas, Dionondadas, Twichtwis; for by what means can they pretend them, because they came to the Maquase country formerly and now laterly to the Sinnekes country and burnt some bark houses and cut down our corne—if that be a good title then we can claim all Canida, for we not only did soe, but subdued whole nations of Indians who liv&#039;d there, and demolished there castles in so much, that now great oake trees grow where they were built, and afterwards we plyed the French home in the warr with them, that they were not able to go over a door to pisse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Newhouse asserts that the territory of an exterminated nation becomes territory of the Haudenosaunee by right of conquest, and that conquered nations have no voice in the council.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a nation joined the Confederacy, its land came with it; its people became indistinguishable from the component nations, and the external boundaries of the Haudenosaunee were extended as a longhouse would be extended. The British opportunistically applied their own beliefs about &amp;quot;empire&amp;quot; to this, and asserted that, since the Haudenosaunee were their subjects and had an empire, it was, in effect, a British empire. Prudently, they chose not to inform their Haudenosaunee brothers of this assertion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Concepts of land ownership evolved over time and with exposure to other cultures. They also evolved as European settlement spread and nations that were allied with the Haudenosaunee were displaced westward. George Snyderman asserted that &amp;quot;land was given or loaned by the League or its members to alien people for their use during good behavior.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other nations were allowed to continue to use and occupy their lands, after being &amp;quot;subdued.&amp;quot; The Seneca chiefs Kayantwakon (Cornplanter), Halftown, and Great Tree told President Washington: &amp;quot;Many nations inhabited this country; but they had no wisdom, and, therefore, they warred together. The Six Nations were powerful, and compelled them to peace; the lands, for a greater extent, were given up to them; but the nations which were not destroyed, all continued on those lands, and claimed the protection of the Six Nations, as their brothers and their fathers.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fundamental relationship between the people and the land supplies some of the principles of the law. The law tells the people that they are part of a continuum of people who all have and share land rights; their presence on the land is not &amp;quot;ownership&amp;quot; in the sense that they may do what they wish, but a kind of stewardship, both for their own future generations and for the other living things with which they share the land. Their work with the land also finds its way into the ceremonies of thanksgiving—as they help, acknowledge, and renew the land, so it returns the stuff of life to the people.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Haudenosaunee law, ohwentsiá:ke, &amp;quot;on the earth,&amp;quot; includes the soil, the rocks, the waters, and all the parts of the world. This is different from Euro-American law, in which &amp;quot;land&amp;quot; can be separated from &amp;quot;nature&amp;quot; in order to be developed or exploited. In Euro-American law, it is possible not only to draw lines on the land as boundaries between individual properties, but also to &amp;quot;own&amp;quot; mathematically calculated shares of undivided land with other people (a &amp;quot;condominium&amp;quot;); to own the crops or fruit but not the land (a &amp;quot;usufruct&amp;quot;); to own the right to cross or use the land (an &amp;quot;easement&amp;quot;); to own land only during one&#039;s lifetime; and to subdivide the land into increasingly smaller parcels. To the Haudenosaunee, land &amp;quot;ownership&amp;quot; was communal, not individual: the community extends back through the ancestors and ahead to the coming faces. Perhaps this difference is fundamental to cultures—the holistic approach of the Haudenosaunee contrasts with the Euro-American ability to break things into distinct and independent parts. In the same way, Euro-American science and medicine use the &amp;quot;scientific method,&amp;quot; where Haudenosaunee healing sees an entire human in his environment, and tends to be more comfortable with what is now called an &amp;quot;ecosystem approach&amp;quot; to earth sciences and an &amp;quot;environmental&amp;quot; approach to medicine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Communal landholding was the Haudenosaunee way before the arrival of the Europeans, but technological change brought a change in attitudes about land. Sotsisowah John Mohawk suggested that the advent of draft animals had the most impact: now one man with a horse could plow land that it had earlier taken twenty women to prepare. Horses and oxen transformed the way the people related to the land. Just as the fur trade was dying and the homelands were filling up with European settlers, the plow made it possible for Haudenosaunee men to become farmers, and for the single-family farm to become economically and socially viable. It is not difficult to understand the Karihwí:iyo, the Code of Skaniatariio (Handsome Lake) of the 1790s, as including a pragmatic effort to maintain the principles of traditional values in the face of this rapid societal change. The Code explains that it is acceptable to have draft animals like the white people, but that one should not become too proud of them; that it is acceptable, too, to have single-family houses, but that they should be modest, painted simply in white.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today, traditional Haudenosaunee values concerning land are evident in each of the communities, manifesting themselves in an &amp;quot;ownership&amp;quot; pattern that is a combination of private landholding and community values. The sense of shared stewardship, of responsibility to the land and the natural world and to future generations, is not formally visible to outsiders, but it remains real, more than vestigial, evident in a hundred ways. Joagquisho Oren Lyons explained: &amp;quot;We are the indigenous people to this land. We are like a conscience. We are small, but not a minority. We are the landholders; we are the landkeepers; we are not a minority. For our brothers are all the natural world, and by that we are far the majority.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; The Longhouse and the Village&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are precious few surviving contemporary depictions of a Haudenosaunee bark longhouse—so few that there is no consensus whether the roof was domed or peaked, or how tall the longhouses actually were. What is known with some precision is how long they were, and how wide, and what they were made of. The framework was cedar poles, for cedar does not rot in the ground and grows straight and clean. The building&#039;s skin was massive elm bark, from trees large enough and old enough that the bark provided insulation from the weather and the cold. As compared to the habitations of other peoples, there were several defining characteristics of the Haudenosaunee longhouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The most fundamental building block of Haudenosaunee society was the fire. The hearth, within the longhouse, was not a single-family fire. There was a family on each side of the fire. This duality that people would see upon waking every day reflects the two-sidedness of every aspect of the law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The longhouse contains many fires, and they are aligned. That straight line, running from the eastern to the western door, provides coherence to the way the families live, just as a string of wampum reflects the organization of what would otherwise be scattered beads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The longhouse reflects the clan family of the women who live in it. As such, it is a constant reminder of the role of women in society and government, for the women of that house are sisters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The longhouse is capable of being extended at either end. Archaeologists have concluded that perhaps one-third of excavated longhouses show evidence of having been extended during their lifetimes. The extendability of the longhouse became the metaphor for the flexibility and generosity of the law, designed to bring new people under its protection while remaining true to the original architecture.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Not only were the bark longhouses often extended during their lifetimes: those lifetimes were relatively short. In this age of steel and concrete, we tend to forget the limited lifespan of all the structures we are creating—most residential homes are designed to last about fifty years; most office buildings might last seventy-five. The bark longhouse tended to last a single generation. Its structural integrity began to weaken at the same time as the soil of the fields was becoming tired, and at the same time as the distance to walk for firewood was becoming longer. There was a built-in signal: the walls of the longhouse needed to be propped up from the outside. The leaning poles against the walls were the sign that the men should begin to look for a new location for the town. The poles—outside the house, but needed to hold it up—became the diagonal lines on wampum belts given by other nations who wished to become allies while remaining outside the Confederacy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
People stopped living in bark longhouses 300 years ago. The spread of European technology was quick: Harmen van den Bogaert, the first Dutchman to visit Oneida and Onondaga settlements, found that iron nails and hinges had preceded him. The spread was from east to west—so that the Senecas, least exposed to the Europeans, were the last to give up the bark structures. By the mid-1700s, Mohawks were living in barn-like structures that echoed the internal layout of the bark longhouse, while incorporating European sawn lumber and post-and-beam construction. By the end of the eighteenth century, the Onondagas of Oswegatchie were living in log houses that were home to two families each, with a shared hearth that reflected the two-sided fire in the original longhouses. In Seneca country at the same time, some people were living in log houses—with a shared fireplace between two houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The palisaded village of the seventeenth century became the &amp;quot;castle&amp;quot; of the eighteenth century. Defensive designs intended to protect against men with bows and arrows gave way to the cannons of the Mohawk village of Scoharie by the latter half of that century. There were still outlying settlements that were not fortified and temporary habitations in the hunting grounds; extended use of large territories continued.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The advent of single-family farms scattered communities further during the nineteenth century. Teyawentathe Susan Hill has demonstrated that fundamental Haudenosaunee principles about the relationship between people and land remained consistent and relatively constant as technologies and settlement patterns evolved. The same principles are reflected in Haudenosaunee law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; The Haudenosaunee&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before the arrival of the Europeans in this part of the world, a man carrying a message of Peace, Power, and Righteousness brought together five nations that had been trapped in a cycle of violence and revenge. This message—also called Karihwí:iyo, the Good Message —led to the five nations uniting in a league or confederacy, governed by law, bound by spirit and commitment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each of the original five nations carries responsibility within the structure of the League: the Mohawks and Senecas are doorkeepers, responsible for working with the nations approaching the Longhouse from the east and west. The Onondagas are firekeepers, carefully weighing and balancing decisions. The Oneidas and Cayugas have taken entire nations under their wings. The nations have different functions in the house, but as a chief explained in the 1600s, &amp;quot;we are all alike respectable.&amp;quot; Equality does not require sameness.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Confederacy is sometimes called &amp;quot;the Iroquois Confederacy.&amp;quot; The word &amp;quot;Iroquois&amp;quot; is of uncertain origin—possibly a name used by the enemies of the Haudenosaunee.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The name &amp;quot;Haudenosaunee&amp;quot; refers to the longhouse, kanónhsa, the traditional extended bark-covered structure that became common after the arrival of corn (about AD 1000) and that faded after the arrival of metal axes and log and frame houses (between AD 1680 and 1720). Superficial histories assume that the name just describes the houses the people lived in. In fact, it describes the society and the law that binds it together. In some interpretations (the word changes with just a slight adjustment in sound), it is not just &amp;quot;people of the longhouse,&amp;quot; but &amp;quot;people making a longhouse&amp;quot;: an active concept, acknowledging that the work continues.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Longhouse is also geographic: from the Mohawk Eastern Door to the Seneca Western Door, the Five Nations were spread across the southern shore of Lake Ontario in a useful, deliberate way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before the coming of the Kayanerenkó:wa, the Five Nations were engaged in constant bloodshed. The Peacemaker declared them to be all one family. He used the symbol of the longhouse to describe how the five fires of the nations could exist within a single structure. Within the one house, the five fires did not become one fire: they retained their distinctness. The term &amp;quot;Haudenosaunee&amp;quot; is more of a description of the relationship between all the people than it is a reference to their housing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The political system created by the Peacemaker continues to exist. It is actively maintained today by a rather small group of people within the fifteen Haudenosaunee communities (though it is supported by many more), and it has been battered by high winds of change, war, and dispossession. Its survival—when so many other nations have been swept away by those winds—is remarkable in itself. Elements of the law that helped it work from the start have been the key to that survival.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee are a people of law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today, the Haudenosaunee live in an archipelago from Kahnawake and Kanehsatake, near Montreal, in the east, to the Oklahoma Seneca and Cayuga communities in the west. &amp;quot;Archipelago&amp;quot; is a particularly appropriate word, for Haudenosaunee communities are islands in many ways. Linguistically they are islands—places where languages are spoken that are heard nowhere else (linguists call these endangered languages &amp;quot;isolates&amp;quot;). Culturally and ethnically they are islands, surrounded by a sea of people of different cultures and origins. Ecologically, they are also islands, and most of them are visible on satellite photographs and topographical maps as the last &amp;quot;green&amp;quot; areas for miles around. Like the life forms in island ecosystems, Haudenosaunee communities are home to skills, thought, ceremonies, and ways of viewing the world that are uniquely adapted to the land, and that have evolved over centuries of challenge and experimentation. Like island life forms, too, they are vulnerable to introduced predators.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There have never been very many Haudenosaunee. Archaeologists believe that the population of what is now upper New York State did not change much as a result of the shift from hunting, fishing, and gathering to a more agricultural society. Instead, the people moved from living in small family-based camps to large, organized villages, without a change in overall population. Dennis explained:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What emerges from the archaeological reconstruction of later Owasco life [about 1000 A.D.] is a picture of increasingly localized, complexly organized, isolated, defensive and parochial people. At the same time that Owasco villages grew in size and decreased in number, they became more completely self-sufficient, because of a greater emphasis on horticulture and a declining dependence on hunting and fishing, though these subsistence activities remained important. Trade declined; in pre-Owasco times exchange networks had connected Woodland bands with the elaborate cultures of the Ohio Valley, and perhaps beyond to Cahokia in mid-America. The nature and frequency of travel changed as Owasco people settled further from waterways and developed forest routes that kept them closer to home.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like their descendants, Owasco people enjoyed abundance and prosperity in the diversity of their subsistence, and there was plenty to go around. Nevertheless, they increasingly found themselves living in a landscape of violence, a world of fear that humans, not impersonal environmental forces, had created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These were the Dark Times of bloodshed and scalping and revenge-taking, of fear and isolation. They were the times before the coming of the Peacemaker. The tradition of the Great Law of Peace does not explain the reasons for the bloodshed: it only affirms that it existed for so long that people could not recall how it had begun. The story of the arrival of peace concentrates on the peacemaking, not on the warmaking that preceded it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The nature of a people and their culture shapes the nature of their law. Wallace asserted: &amp;quot;The legend [of the founding of the Confederacy] is important . . . both for the core of truth contained in it and for the influence it exerted in its elaborated form upon subsequent Iroquois history. . . . The legend itself, with its wisdom and its poetry, seized the imagination of the Iroquois people, who took to heart the message it conveyed and derived from it a sense of national mission: to make the Tree of Peace *prevail.*&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;A sense of national mission&amp;quot;? Certainly. The Peacemaker set out that mission explicitly, in the clearest terms: &amp;quot;The law is now as young as the day when the sun is rising and lights the earth; just as it causes warmth all over the earth for all the people, we will help the people of every nation . . . This is what you will work at: everyone shall become related to one another, so that it will become a single family, consisting of every people on earth; and this is what will unite them, the Good Message and the Power and the Peace.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee have not hesitated to take that message of brotherhood to the nations of the world. In any international forum they can, their message has remained constant:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now we must all join together and know how strong we are. The Creator promised that if we followed the instructions then he would take care of us. He has proved that, because the people are still here. Mother Earth is still doing her duty, too. So we are still here and our children will be following us. Nobody can stop the generations. The important issue is how we will live. Will we live in fear and do as the authorities tell us and give us nothing in return? Or will we be strong enough to unite for the good of everybody? I say we will! We are now coming together, with all our brothers and sisters all over the world. You may not be seeing it yet, but it is happening. None of us are going to be victims anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The *Basic Call to Consciousness* that accompanied the Haudenosaunee arrival at the United Nations in Geneva in the 1970s also extended the conversation about peace to the entire human family: &amp;quot;For centuries we have known that each individual&#039;s action creates conditions and situations that affect the world. For centuries we have been careful to avoid any action unless it carried a long-range prospect of promoting harmony and peace in the world. In that context, with our brothers and sisters of the Western Hemisphere, we have journeyed here to discuss these important matters with the Family of Man.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The United Nations Declaration on the Rights of Indigenous Peoples reflects thirty years of effort by waves of Haudenosaunee delegates to the United Nations, and these people were fully aware that they were treading in the footsteps not only of Deskahe Levi General in Geneva in 1924 but of centuries of delegations to other nations in the name of peace and dignity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Clans&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee maintain that they have been visited by three great visionaries: the one who brought them the clans and the ceremonies; the Peacemaker who brought the League together; and Skaniatariio (Handsome Lake), who brought the societal reforms of the early 1800s.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One version of the way the clans were brought has the young fatherless man pointing out how the people found themselves on opposite sides of a river, and how this provided a natural way for them to accomplish their social tasks. That is, the society was two-sided, and the duality was an advantage. The clan system is a reflection of the natural world.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The clans existed, as institutions of social and ceremonial organization, before the coming of the Great Peace. In Gibson&#039;s version of the Creation story, the young man who brought the clan system also made them cousins:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now we have seen that there are many different things in the world—the shrubs, the grasses, the trees. All have exclusive duties to perform, all are alive. There are different kinds of birds and animals. They differ among themselves, and we should emulate them. Now it is time that we should form clans. We have become numerous, and we should apportion the body of people. There should be a limited number of clans, and they should call themselves cousins in the future.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So then, do you consider in what manner exist all the things which he [the Creator] has completed; he thus made them to differ in kind and that causes everything to be good, and they are all charged with different duties to perform.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Several consistent principles of Haudenosaunee law are set out in that statement. First, the components of the societal and legal system are deliberately patterned after elements or principles of the natural world. Second, as each animal has distinct attributes and duties, so each person and family is different, and has different gifts, and these ought to be acknowledged, fostered, and used effectively. Third, this part of the Creation story provides for the &amp;quot;two sides of the stream&amp;quot; in the Condolence, which reflects the two-sidedness of government and decision-making processes and institutions. Fourth, there are not just distinct clans: they are all related, and they call one another *cousins*. Fifth, all living parts of creation have specific duties to fulfill in order to maintain life.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One aspect of the genius of the Peacemaker was to work with these existing institutions as elements of a new kind of society. Seeing that clans—especially the Turtle, Wolf, and Bear Clans—crossed all the nations, he used them as another way to make everybody into relatives. The Peacemaker saw that the clan system could become a force for peace and understanding. Rather than seek to eliminate the clans, he extrapolated the clan system to the Confederacy level, so all the people would become a single family: &amp;quot;as clans are already established among the people, the several clans [shall] form relations as brothers and cousins.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The clans also provide their members closer family relationships with the natural world. For Wolf Clan people, wolves are indeed relatives, and they share attributes. The relationship with the natural world extends well beyond clan animals, though: a people who refer to &amp;quot;Mother Earth,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;our Elder Brother the Sun,&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Our Grandfathers the Thunderers&amp;quot; see all aspects of the natural world as part of the family, and that, too affects their conduct. John Mohawk observed that urban detachment from nature leads to a change in environmental values: &amp;quot;There was a time among Indians when the animals were perceived as people who live under the forest canopy and who run about on four legs. If you think of them as anything else, they ultimately become disposable. If you cling to the logic that the animals are less precious than us, then they get less and less precious, until they&#039;re not precious at all. We Indians thought of ourselves as animals. That&#039;s why we called ourselves turtles and wolves and bears and deer.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has been suggested that a person&#039;s clan is indicative of personality, though in modern form this tends to resemble horoscopes. Of the Wolf Clan, the proper or formal name is Wakathahyón:ni, &amp;quot;they make paths&amp;quot;: an old term descriptive of the habits of the wolf. Of Turtles (Wakenayáhten), it is said they are slow to anger, and thoughtful. Bears (Wakskare:wake), as the legends suggest, are hospitable. True or not, these stereotypes add a layer of expected conduct that contributes in its own way to social norms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As one moves westward through the Longhouse of the Confederacy, one finds more clans in each nation. The Mohawks and Oneidas have only Turtle (or Tortoise), Wolf, and Bear, the three clans that cross the entire Confederacy. The Onondagas add Deer, Beaver, Ball, Snipe, and Eel. The Cayugas and Senecas have the same eight clans as the Onondagas, except that the Cayugas replace the Ball clan with the Hawk, and &amp;quot;among the Senecas both Ball and Eel disappear, and are replaced by Hawk and Heron.&amp;quot; One explanation for the additional clans is the taking in of other peoples. Huron clans—Rock, Bear, Deer, and Potato —might be reflected in modern Seneca clans. Little is known about the clans of the Wenro, Erie, and Attiwandaron peoples, whose survivors were absorbed by the Haudenosaunee—especially by the Senecas. The absorption of these other nations in the seventeenth century would also explain why, though the Senecas have more clans than the other nations, they have only eight chiefs, and some of their clans have no direct representatives in the Grand Council. Venables asserts that &amp;quot;the number of clans was severely reduced by an epidemic disease accidentally introduced by the Europeans, and it is therefore unknown if each clan once existed in every one of the nations within the confederacy.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Haudenosaunee tradition, one belongs to, and is raised within, one&#039;s mother&#039;s ohwátsi&#039;re and clan. There are fifteen Haudenosaunee communities today, on both sides of the boundary between the United States and Canada, and when marriages take place between people from two different communities, a husband will often move to his wife&#039;s community, so the children may be raised in the midst of their own clan family (anthropologists would call this practice an indication of a &amp;quot;matrilocal&amp;quot; society). As many people are not involved in issues of traditional government (Sotsisowah John Mohawk would say that only a few hundred people at a time would be engaged in &amp;quot;the Confederacy culture&amp;quot;), most Haudenosaunee would be conscious of their clan identity only at ceremonies (where seating in the longhouse is determined by clan) and in matters of marriage. Even non-traditional families take seriously the rules against marrying within one&#039;s own clan. Those rules have not only promoted genetic diversity: they have encouraged links between the components of community.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the members of a clan regarded themselves as brothers and sisters, marriages among them were not allowed. This led, of course, to constant intermarriages between members of the different clans of which a nation was composed, thus binding the whole nation together. What the founders of the Iroquois League did was to extend this system of social alliances through the entire confederacy. . . . Mr. Morgan has well pointed out the wisdom shown by the Iroquois founders, in availing themselves of this powerful element of strength in the formation of their federal constitution. Their government, though politically a league of nations, was socially a combination of clans. In this way Hiawatha and Dekanawidah may be deemed to have given to the system of clanship an extension and a force which it had not previously possessed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What if one does not have a clan? That does not seem to be an obstacle to coming within the circle of the law. Odatsehte, the leading Oneida chief, explained to the Peacemaker: &amp;quot;As to us, we no longer have clans, we have lost them, indeed, the reason is this: the things going on such as the habitual slaughter among the people, that is where we lost them. Moreover, this large crowd followed us for they want to observe it progressing, the doings pertaining to the League as it gets completed in all ways.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker did not say that without clans they could not be Haudenosaunee. Instead, his response was to include them immediately by assigning them a clan:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereupon Tekanawita said, &amp;quot;Now, next, as to you Ho&#039;tatshehte, whom have you drafted to help with the League?&amp;quot; Thereupon Ho&#039;tatshehte said, &amp;quot;You two, come here, you drafted ones.&amp;quot; Thereupon they stood up there in front of the chiefs. Thereafter Tekanawaita said, &amp;quot;As to you, in fact, you are the ones not having a clan, and now they have chosen you. This, then, is what we shall call it: the Turtle clan, which will become their families&#039; clan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is an important principle here: reaching out generously and including people willing and able to join the League takes precedence over whether they can prove membership in a clan. The Peacemaker acted spontaneously and deliberately, assuming the authority to name a group of people and give them identity within society. This was not only a means of healing and weaving society back together. It was a statement of intent, an example of more than tolerance. It was an act of immediate generosity, but also of pragmatism. To function within the society he was creating, families required a clan. Given a choice between inclusion and anomaly, the Peacemaker unerringly chose inclusion. It is the spirit of the law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the clan system, there are further divisions. Thus, the Turtle Clan divides into Snapping Turtle, Painted Turtle, and Mud Turtle; the Bear Clan into large and small parts. For example, among the Mohawks, it has been said that Tekarihoken&#039;s family is the &amp;quot;Old Snapping Turtles,&amp;quot; while Hiawatha&#039;s is the &amp;quot;Younger Snapping Turtle.&amp;quot; Among the Cayugas, there is an Old Bear Clan and a Suckling Bear Clan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Many people today know their clans in a general, not subdivided, way. While in the Catholic communities of Kahnawake and Akwesasne, the Jesuits maintained clan identity within the church (in seating or in holiday processions, for example), and while in the Longhouse there are ceremonial reasons to remind one of one&#039;s clan, the clan subdivisions became less important to other people. Often an individual today will know that he is a Bear, or a Turtle, but not more than that. Genealogical research can connect the individuals with the titles of their chiefs, and through them to the parts of the clan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Personal Names&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At Midwinter and at Green Corn ceremonies each year, children are brought forward, and their names are formally announced in the longhouse. Their maternal uncle makes the announcement while carrying or walking with the child and then sings his atonwa, his personal chant of thanksgiving. The name is announced rather than given at this ceremony, because usually the name has been assigned to the child shortly after birth. The name is chosen by the women of the family, in consultation with the parents, from among the storehouse of names possessed by that ohwátsi&#039;re or clan family.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lafitau, writing about Kahnawake in the early 1700s, described how names were preserved and kept alive:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In each family a certain number of ancestral names, both men&#039;s and women&#039;s, are kept. These names are their own and known to be taken by such and such a family. Now it is the custom in each family to requicken and resuscitate, in some manner, those who, issuing from that family, have made it illustrious. They exalt thus, at the same time, the names of those who they make live again, and impose them on their grand nephews destined to represent them. The latter assume more or less importance according as those who had borne their names were more or less important themselves by their qualities, virtues and deeds. These names change with age. A child either has no name, or takes that of another child, a young man, that of a warrior and an old man, that of some elder. As soon as a person dies, the name that he bore is buried with him and it is only several years afterward that it is renewed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this sense, a name belongs to a family as much as it does to an individual. The person bearing the name knows several important things: that the name is a link to a long line of ancestors; that he or she is the only person alive today carrying that name; that there will be people in the future who will be given that name; that the name is real and has reality on several levels. When a person is ill, and someone else goes to collect medicine for them, it is that person&#039;s real name (as distinct from his &amp;quot;English name&amp;quot;) that is used to address the plants and their forces, as well as to seek help from the Creator. In ceremonies and in the longhouse in general, one&#039;s real name is the one the people and the Creator know. Names provide identity, connection, and continuity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The custom of a person having several names in the course of a lifetime has waned but not disappeared. Sometimes, an individual is given a new name as a means of honouring him or her. Historically, there have been times when a Haudenosaunee individual will give their own name to an adoptee: the accounts do not clarify whether the giver of the name then has to return to their family to be given a new name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In conversation, a person is asked &amp;quot;what are you called,&amp;quot; and answers &amp;quot;they call me . . .&amp;quot; (yonkwats). In other words, the identity that accompanies a name comes from its use by other people. The name would be irrelevant if it were not used by others. In contrast, in some versions, when the Peacemaker announced himself, he tended to state &amp;quot;I *am* Tekanawita,&amp;quot; possibly because he had grown up in isolation, so there were no people around (other than his mother and grandmother) to call him anything.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Ceremonies&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The major ceremonies of traditional Haudenosaunee are said to have been brought by the same fatherless young man who brought the clans, long before the time of the Peacemaker. The Great Law was not intended to affect the ceremonies; the Peacemaker left unchanged the aspects of the society that promoted or maintained peace: &amp;quot;The rites and festivals of each nation shall remain undisturbed and shall continue as before they were given by the people of old times as useful and necessary for the good of men.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The chiefs were given a duty in the law to help maintain the ceremonies:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It shall be the duty of the Lords of each brotherhood to confer at the approach of the time of the Midwinter Thanksgiving and to notify the people of the approaching festival. They shall hold a council over the matter and arrange its details and begin the Thanksgiving five days after the moon of Dis-ko-nah is new. The people shall assemble at the appointed place and the nephews shall notify the people of the time and place. From the beginning to the end the Lords shall preside over the Thanksgiving and address the people from time to time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The recognized festivals of thanksgiving shall be the Midwinter Thanksgiving, the Maple or Sugar-making Thanksgiving, the Raspberry Thanksgiving, the Strawberry Thanksgiving, the Corn-planting Thanksgiving, the Corn Hoeing Thanksgiving, the Little Festival of Green Corn, the Great Festival of Ripe Corn, and the complete Thanksgiving for the Harvest.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As for the ceremonies other than Midwinter, the faithkeepers are responsible for ensuring they are properly conducted. Each chief works with a male and a female faithkeeper, part of the &amp;quot;cluster&amp;quot; of government that includes the chief, clan mother, faithkeepers, sub-chief, and &amp;quot;runner&amp;quot; for each title: &amp;quot;It shall be the duty of the appointed managers of the Thanksgiving festivals to do all that is needful for carrying out the duties of the occasions. . . . When the Thanksgiving for the Green Corn comes the special managers, both the men and the women, shall give it careful attention and do their duties properly.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ceremonies predate the visions of Skaniatariio in the 1790s. Some Haudenosaunee continue to maintain and participate in the ceremonies without following the Karihwí:iyo, the Code of Handsome Lake.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The cycle of ceremonies is not unrelated to the principles of the law. Each of the thanksgiving ceremonies is a celebration that gives thanks for the food that Creation is providing and renews and acknowledges the forces that provide it. An underlying principle is *renewal,* keeping things fresh and alive in people&#039;s minds—the same principle that requires periodic renewal of the people&#039;s commitment to the law, and later would require periodic renewal of treaty relations, or &amp;quot;repolishing&amp;quot; the Silver Covenant Chain between the Haudenosaunee and the British Crown. What Wade Davis wrote of African ceremonies also applies to the Haudenosaunee: &amp;quot;The religion cannot be abstracted from the day-to-day lives of the believers . . . there is no separation between the sacred and the secular, between the holy and the profane, between the material and the spiritual. Every dance, every song, every action is but a particle of the whole, each gesture a prayer for the survival of the entire community.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In several parts of the ceremonies, the people are split into two sides of the longhouse (the anthropologists call them &amp;quot;moieties&amp;quot;). Without the two sides, the ceremonies could not be put through: as in council, having two parts of the people creates harmony rather than division. They help each other.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Helping one another is part of every Haudenosaunee medicine society, as well. Usually, a person who has been healed by a particular medicine or medicine society becomes a member of that society, with the responsibility of maintaining and renewing its medicine, and of curing or healing other people who need its help.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As John Mohawk has pointed out, the ceremonies are the way Haudenosaunee society expresses its cooperation with the will of the sacred forces that have created life, as well as its gratitude. The ceremonies &amp;quot;recreate the conditions present when people first came to consciousness of these things.&amp;quot; By maintaining the ceremonies, society is maintaining, acknowledging, and renewing its relationship to its context within the natural world: &amp;quot;Our ceremonials acknowledge that in the time of the primeval universe there was a very remote chance that a place would be created which would support life and that, given a consciousness of this, expressions of gratitude are in order. Human beings who experience life should be grateful.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Participation in the ceremonies reaffirms a person&#039;s understanding of their place in society, by reminding them where they sit in the longhouse, who they sit with, who speaks for them—and also of their place in the natural world and its cycles and inhabitants. If Haudenosaunee kinships have kept that society in place where others have been swept away, the ceremonies are an occasion for renewing the sense of &amp;quot;joined arms&amp;quot; among the people and with the natural world.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Not mentioned in most written versions of the law is the winter ceremony of Ohki:we, or the Spirit Dance, in which the spirits of the people who have passed away during the year are gathered together in one last farewell, and it is said the spirits join with the living in the all-night women&#039;s dance. This may be a descendant of the great Dead Feasts of four and five centuries ago. Concern for the dead, for their comfort and their journey, and for stilling their voices, appears in the law through the ceremony of Condolence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ohki:we is an aspect of the Haudenosaunee view of &amp;quot;the people.&amp;quot; Unlike societies that consider &amp;quot;the people&amp;quot; to be restricted to those alive at any given time, the Haudenosaunee include both those who have lived before and those who are yet unborn. From the ancestors, the living Haudenosaunee inherit names, clans, traditions, laws, land, and obligations. To the &amp;quot;coming faces,&amp;quot; the living owe a similar inheritance. People are told that they must walk softly on the earth, for the faces of the unborn generations are just below the surface of the soil. Reverence and respect for the dead and reverence and concern for the unborn are reflections of each other. These are further evinced in respect for elders, and a sense of respecting the independence and personhood of children. In a modern North American society that tends to concentrate its respect on breadwinners, and its priority on the living, the Haudenosaunee value system stands in stark contrast.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Repetition, or rather re-creation, of the ceremonies reflects a common human trait. If something has been done with power and effect, we seek to repeat that, either to regain some of the original power, or to celebrate it. This is part of how humans learn. It can be seen in something as complex as a Catholic mass, which repeats the sequence of the Last Supper, and as simple as a baseball player&#039;s wearing the same shirt or eating the same meal as the last time he hit a home run. Ceremonies and legal rituals remind us of continuity, but they also imbue us with power—the power of our predecessors, or of their actions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As Haudenosaunee ceremonies are repeated each year, partly to keep them alive and partly to keep us alive, so the periodic reaffirmation of the law is conducted in the same way, and for the same purpose. The Canadian Royal Commission on Aboriginal Peoples recognized the connection between ceremony, law, and continuity: &amp;quot;The Great Law is infused with the same good mind that inspired the founders of the Great Peace and to which the children not yet born will also have access. The grandfathers and grandmothers who have gone to the spirit world and the generations not yet born are present in the ceremonies in a powerful way, and they are even visible to some with highly developed awareness.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The cycle of ceremonies does more than renew and maintain the relationship between the Haudenosaunee and the natural world and the sacred forces that created it. The ceremonies also remind the people of their place in that world. Reminding is an essential element of the legal system, as well, and it is accomplished by some of the same paths as the ceremonies: public repetition, cooperative maintenance, individual reaffirmation. Since the ceremonies are so close in spirit to the law and its goals, it ought not to be surprising that they intersect, overlap, and complement each other. In Haudenosaunee society, church and state are not distinguishable concepts: both the spiritual practices and the governmental institutions have the same spirit and goals, and are maintained and conducted by many of the same people, so it is neither necessary nor possible to separate them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; The Date of the Creation of the League&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Euro-American scholars have been fascinated with the question of the date of the creation of the Great Law and the League it brought together. The Haudenosaunee do not share that concern. For them, it has been enough that it existed long ago, before the arrival of the Europeans, and has continued to exist ever since. Different peoples think about history (and time) in different ways, and it is likely that their understanding of the world affects their study of history and their concern about dates. For Europeans, time (and therefore history, as time past) is linear, and important dates and events are temporal landmarks, worthy of recall and often legally significant. For the Haudenosaunee, time is both linear (like a river) and cyclical (in the sense that the annual cycle of ceremonies is repeated each year in the same way), so that what is being maintained and continuing is more important than what has occurred.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The written records confirm that the Five Nations had already joined together by the early 1600s: the Jesuits among the Montagnais reported their existence in the 1630s, and Champlain mentioned them twenty years earlier. In the 1740s, the Moravian minister Christopher Pyrlaeus wrote: &amp;quot;The alliance or confederacy of the Five Nations was established, as near as can be conjectured, one age (or the length of a man&#039;s life) before the white people (the Dutch) came into the country.&amp;quot; This single statement became a focus of scholarly debate: what precise date did this suggest? Later writers took Pyrlaeus&#039;s statement to indicate between 1460 and 1579.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Daniel Richter, pointing to archaeological evidence of &amp;quot;homogenization of material culture&amp;quot; between the original five nations, suggests the political changes that led to the founding of the League would have taken place in the late 1400s.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Haudenosaunee accounts are also spread over time. Sagonaquade Albert Cusick stated grandly that the League was formed 1,000 years before Columbus. Grand River tradition places the founding three lifetimes before the arrival of Cartier, or about 1390. Morgan and Hale, working with chiefs and informants on both sides of the border, separately concluded that the mid-1400s was a likely time. In 1895, the Council at the Grand River Territory issued a commemorative medal to celebrate the 500th anniversary of the founding of the Confederacy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Schoolcraft was told by the Senecas that the League was founded about 1605, four years before Henry Hudson explored the river that bears his name today. Beauchamp reported that some Onondagas told him the date was about 1600.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another approach to the date setting began with parts of collateral tradition. It was said that there was a total eclipse of the sun at the time the Senecas were considering joining the League, at a time when the grass was knee-high or the corn was ripening. In another version, the Mohawks were about to attack a Seneca village when the corn was receiving its last tilling. When the eclipse took place, it convinced them instead that war should end. Examining the times of total solar eclipses visible in upper New York State, Barbara Mann concluded that the Senecas had adopted the law on 31 August 1142, at a place that is now a football field in Victor, New York.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Elisabeth Tooker, reviewing all these accounts, leans towards a later date because of the &amp;quot;lack of wampum in prehistoric sites&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;the statement in the traditional accounts that wampum was not used before the League was founded.&amp;quot; She suggests &amp;quot;an approximate date of 1600.&amp;quot; Her conclusion is part of &amp;quot;a line of thought which attributes the origins of all Indian confederacies to European influence. Confederacies are interpreted as tribal groupings formed to be better able to resist European intrusion. Alternatively, it is suggested that tribes living in the interior made alliances in order to break restrictive trading covenants between coastal tribes and the Europeans and to be able to participate in this trade themselves.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other hints concerning the possible date of the founding of the League come from archaeology. The cultivation of beans, then squash and then corn arrived from the south about AD 900, allowing seminomadic people living in small groups to become more sedentary. In the area south of Lake Ontario, they were living in unfortified hamlets of about 200 people. Around the mid-fifteenth century, there was a rather sudden change: while the total population of the territory remained more or less the same, the people moved into large towns of up to 3,000 people. There were still also small, unfortified hamlets, but they were clearly linked to these larger, protected places of refuge. It is as if the need for palisades came with a culture of war—the bloody Dark Times that preceded the coming of the Great Law—as well as with larger settlements that required more structured forms of government. Since archaeology can be imprecise, it is also possible to link these Dark Times to the Dark Ages in Europe, times when a mini–ice age, a change in climate, affected crops, temperatures, sunlight, and attitudes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The common traits that to archaeologists identify the Haudenosaunee—&amp;quot;the practice of horticulture, settlement in longhouses in villages, internecine warfare, burial of the dead in cemeteries, and distinctive ceramic assemblages&amp;quot;—coalesced in their homeland sometime between AD 1230 and 1375.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another possibility is that European diseases, which preceded the appearance of European humans, caused a breakdown in society. If people were dying of unknown causes, their relatives might tend to blame the death on malevolence by others, and this could have precipitated the blood feuds. Some aspects of the ceremony of Condolence seem designed to prevent revenge-taking against anyone who sent death through disease, and some Seneca trickster stories recall a time of great terror as new diseases arrived for which there was no cure. Jacques Cartier, wintering in Stadacona in 1534, mentioned that about one fifth of the Stadaconaronon died that season of disease—these were the same people who had enough knowledge of herbal medicine to cure his crew&#039;s scurvy. The Laurentian Iroquoians who had greeted Cartier were gone when the French returned two generations later. Epidemic disease certainly played a part in their disappearance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1801, Thayendenega Joseph Brant wrote, simply: &amp;quot;We can say [no] farther respecting the date that it appears by the transaction to have been a considerable time before the arrival of the Europeans.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no clinically provable date of the creation of the League. Nor does there need to be, for the purpose of the laws of the Haudenosaunee or the nations they work with. It is enough, for the purpose of Canadian and U.S. law, that the League predated European contact—and it does—and was an integral part of the people&#039;s distinctive society at the time of first contact. In a world in which most nation-states and their constitutions have existed for less than a century, and in a North America where the United States of America was created in 1776 and the Dominion of Canada in 1867, a continuous government more than 500 years old is indeed a grandmother.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;##&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; PART II - The Nature of the Law: Principles and Processes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Principles, Not Details&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To function effectively, a law preserved in memory rather than writing must place emphasis on principles rather than details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This becomes apparent when one considers the variations in the four versions of the narrative of the lawmaking. The Cannibal can be Hiawatha in one version, Thadadaho in another, Tekarihoken in a third, and just a cannibal in a fourth. But the basic message, the principle that a person who has engaged in too much killing has something wrong with his mind and spirit, and that he can be healed and return to the Good Mind, remains constant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The primacy of principle over detail is demonstrated at the opening and closing of every council and meeting: the Thanksgiving Address will be correct if it pays attention to each essential element in the proper order—it matters not how long or short it is.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some people believe literally in every part of the Kayanerenkó:wa. They believe that Thadadaho really had snakes in his hair and grotesque twists and turns in his body. Others believe that these are metaphors: that he had a powerfully twisted mind and the physical deformities make the story more forceful. Those who believe literally can visualize the chief combing the snakes from his hair, rubbing the kinks from his body, making him normal in appearance. Those who feel the story is symbolic will still agree that Thadadaho was a real person whose evil stood in the way of the peace, and who had to be persuaded to come to the side of goodness and light, and that ceremony and spirit played an essential role in bringing Thadadaho&#039;s mind to the good.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Different versions of the law have Hiawatha losing two daughters, three daughters, or seven daughters. For the purposes of the law, the number of daughters is irrelevant. What matters is that his mind was clouded with grief at the loss of his family. Whether Thadadaho had real physical deformities is irrelevant: what matters is how his powerfully twisted mind and spirit were made good again. People who take the story of the making of the law literally, and people who see parables and symbols in the story all agree that what is most important are the principles and the lessons that emerge from the law. Just as there is a spectrum of Biblical interpretation between literalists and symbolists, so are the Haudenosaunee divided about the story of the making of the law. Similarly, the people are united in recognizing that the principles and the message, not the details, are what count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker said as much: &amp;quot;I will now leave all matters in the hands of your lords and you are to work and carry out the principles of all that I have just laid before you for the welfare of your people and others, and I now place the power in your hands and to add to the rules and regulations whenever necessary.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Order&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The law was born in a time of chaos. It sometimes seems as if it is designed to constantly pull people back from the brink of falling into that same chaos. When minds are scattered and tending towards anger in times of confusion or grief, the Condolence restores order. When people need to bring their minds together in council, the Thanksgiving (like the Condolence) reminds them of the basic order of the world, and then of how they fit into that order, with responsibilities mirrored by those of every other part of this great system. Haudenosaunee society seeks and recognizes order in dozens of things, insisting that speeches, ceremonies, and thinking be carried out in the appropriate sequences.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Getting things in order often reflects pragmatism. The Condolence recognizes that one has to address and remove the physical obstacles to understanding—the ability to see, hear, and speak—before one can proceed to relieve the mental and spiritual burdens a person is carrying. The Covenant Chain recognizes that its three links have a logical order: one must respect a person before one can trust him or her; one must have trust in place before one can have friendship.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Especially for those whose introduction to Haudenosaunee culture is the Thanksgiving, there is a tendency to see hierarchy as well as order, particularly if those people are approaching the culture from a European perspective. The Thanksgiving does move gradually outward from the people and the earth to beyond the sky, and the temptation to find hierarchy in it is powerful. But the Thanksgiving is more a matter of space–time than authority. It describes how things are related and responsible to one another, rather than how some are more important than others.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
English uses &amp;quot;order&amp;quot; to mean two quite different things. One is &amp;quot;orderliness,&amp;quot; neatness. The other is sequence, getting things in the proper succession. In Haudenosaunee terms, getting matters in proper sequence helps restore the orderliness of peace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Versions&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every Haudenosaunee gathering opens and closes in the same way. The &amp;quot;opening&amp;quot; is sometimes called the &amp;quot;opening thanksgiving,&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;the words that come before all else,&amp;quot; ohe&#039;n:ton karihwatékwen:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Whenever the Confederate Lords shall assemble for the purpose of holding a council, the Onondaga Lords shall open it by expressing their gratitude to their cousin Lords and greeting them, and they shall make an address and offer thanks to the earth where men dwell, to the streams of water, the pools, the springs and the lakes, to the maize and fruits, to the medicinal herbs and trees, to the forest trees for their usefulness, to the animals that serve as food and give their pelts as clothing, to the great winds and lesser winds, to the Thunderers, to the Sun, the mighty warrior, to the moon, to the messengers of the Creator who reveal his wishes, and to the Great Creator who dwells in the heavens above, who gives all the things useful to men, and who is the source and the ruler of health and life.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unlike the Lord&#039;s Prayer, which has words so well known to Christians that entire congregations recite them together, the opening thanksgiving has no set words. It is a series of ingredients, of concepts. As long as the speaker remembers to include them all, in the right order, he has done his job. A &amp;quot;full&amp;quot; opening can take about three-quarters of an hour, and most often a much shorter version is delivered, either because time is also short or because the speaker may not have the facility or gift to do the &amp;quot;full&amp;quot; opening. But each is complete and right. There is consistency of principle over time, in the opening as in the law: &amp;quot;When Morgan published the Thanksgiving Address in the 1850s, he had heard the Address given at Midwinter ceremonies and it was written down by Ely Parker who said this was his grandfather&#039;s version, describing it as &#039;the ancient address handed down from generation to generation. . . . Sose&#039;ha&#039;wa has delivered it thus for the past twenty five years at Tonawanda.&#039;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The *Iliad* and the *Odyssey* were 1,000 years old before they were reduced to over 12,000 lines of writing. Scholars struggled with the issue of how, and how well, they could be remembered over the centuries, before they learned that &amp;quot;oral bards&amp;quot;—&amp;quot;wisdomkeepers&amp;quot;—in many societies had sophisticated techniques of recall, but did not require exact reproduction of the knowledge each time. &amp;quot;The oral bard who uses such formulaic language is not, as scholars in the nineteenth century who struggled with the problem of illiterate bards all assumed, a poet reciting from memory a fixed text. He is improvising, along known lines, relying on a huge stock of formulaic phrases, lines and even whole scenes; but he *is* improvising. And every time he sings the poem, he may do it differently. The outline remains the same, but the text, the oral text, is flexible. The poem is new every time it is performed.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The same speaker may not necessarily use the same words twice in a row, either. He is not reciting: he is &amp;quot;doing.&amp;quot; As long as the ingredients are all there and in order, he is right. He has done the best he can, and that is all that is expected:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rather than &amp;quot;memorizing&amp;quot; speeches, good memories depended on recalling the structure of what was said and filling in with expected phrases and figures of speech. The speakers were relaying what the chiefs prompted them to say, but in their own words. They were accomplished and recognized virtuosos. This is what impressed colonial observers who were struck with the good memories of the speakers. &amp;quot;Verbatim recall&amp;quot; applies then to the structure if not to the identical words of the original.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Speeches are not memorized as wholes; at the same time the data demonstrate the relatively fixed nature of the formulaic phrases.… what is important is that the speaker preserve the three-fold division of the discourse and the rules governing section segments, for it is these things that the audience pays attention to, and give them the sense of sameness.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Formulaic language&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;expected phrases&amp;quot; provide structure to any speech; they maintain consistency of principle as well as form—and &amp;quot;they were of admirable service when a man was at a loss . . . this proves they are not wholly unacquainted with the art of Rhetoric.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the different &amp;quot;versions&amp;quot; of the Kayanerenkó:wa, the details sometimes shift, while the principles remain consistent and constant. Teyoninhokarawen John Norton noticed this in the early 1800s:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this tradition, there is also some variety in the manner it is related by the different nations; but all concur in substance: And whether they were induced to form this Confederacy, the more effectually to defend themselves, or to carry on hostillities against some neighbouring Nations, no traditions remain to inform us.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These traditions, for the most part, have become imperfect and confused from the failures of the memories of some; and perhaps from the invention of others. [Norton was writing about a version of the Creation related by &amp;quot;an Onondaga chief of near a hundred years old&amp;quot;].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee pragmatically recognized that writing is also an efficient way of recording law. By the mid-1700s, while delivering the pro forma apology for possibly leaving something out, a speaker told Warraghyihagey William Johnson:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we are deficient in any manner of form, or should forget to answer in a particular manner any part of your speech, we hope you will excuse us. We only depend on our memories, and can not have recourse, as you may, to any written records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You tell us you commit your affairs to Writing which we do not and so when you look to your Books you know what passed in former times but we keep our Treaties in our heads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Not long afterward, some Haudenosaunee did learn to write, and versions of the most important parts of the law were being transcribed onto paper.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several written &amp;quot;versions&amp;quot; of the Kayanerenkó:wa. Hanni Woodbury, in her introduction to *Concerning the League,* divides them into three main groups of texts: narratives given in a European language by non-Indians; texts composed in English by native speakers of an Iroquoian language; and texts by the same people in their own languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dayedokane Seth Newhouse, a Mohawk of the Grand River Territory, wrote several versions in English (and one in Mohawk) in the late nineteenth century — including one that was edited by Sagonaquande Albert Cusick of Onondaga and published by Gawasowane Arthur Parker of Tonawanda in 1916—as one of the two versions Parker included in *The Constitution of the Five Nations.* He presented one version of his &amp;quot;rules and regulations&amp;quot; to the Council at the Grand River on 24 October 1899. Newhouse and Hewitt translated some of Newhouse&#039;s English versions into Mohawk. Partly as a reaction to problems they had with the sequence and some contents of the &amp;quot;Newhouse version,&amp;quot; the Confederacy Council at the Grand River Territory appointed a committee of rotiyanershon, who in 1900 produced a &amp;quot;Chiefs&#039; Version.&amp;quot; This was published (and probably adjusted) by Deputy Superintendent General of Indian Affairs Tahawennontye Duncan Campbell Scott in 1912 and included in Parker&#039;s publication in 1916.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One of the Newhouse versions is different from every other written version of the law in that it divides the law into numbered wampums (&amp;quot;Wampum XXVII,&amp;quot; for example). This is an obvious attempt (possibly assisted by Cusick) to make the Kayanerenkó:wa look more like British or American laws, with section numbers, to make it resemble &amp;quot;a law&amp;quot; as white readers would understand that concept. Ordered wampums were not alien to Haudenosaunee thinking—the Condolence strings are arranged in strict sequence—but Newhouse&#039;s attempt at &amp;quot;legitimizing&amp;quot; the law by making it simulate the sections and subsections of the neighbours&#039; laws was misguided and inauthentic, and the Chiefs&#039; Version does not take that path. The path has tempted others: Cusick&#039;s history of the Confederacy seeks to increase the resemblance to European histories by making Thadadaho a monarch (or pope) with numbered successors (&amp;quot;Atotarho XI&amp;quot;). Less insecure keepers of the law are careful to maintain the structure and details unchanged, without trying to validate it in the eyes of people more used to the numbering of European systems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Newhouse&#039;s Europeanized version was written after he had suffered a family tragedy, the death of his daughter, that he blamed on others, including the chiefs. This version adopts a more mandatory tone, full of prohibitions and conditions, some of them difficult to fulfill. His bitterness shows through at times: this version fares poorly when compared to the expansive generosity, vision, and courage of the more definitive 1912 Skaniatariio John Arthur Gibson version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1801, Thayendenega Joseph Brant, a Mohawk Pine Tree chief (that is, a man chosen by the council as an adviser), wrote answers to a series of questions about the Haudenosaunee system of government. Another English description came from Teyoninhokarawen John Norton, Thayendenega&#039;s secretary and adopted nephew, who also became a Mohawk Pine Tree chief.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Possibly the richest source of recorded &amp;quot;versions&amp;quot; of the Kayanerenkó:wa are the ones written in their original language, since they have not suffered from the inconsistencies of translation. Hewitt, working with Skanawati John Buck in the early 1890s, produced one such text. Skaniatariio John Arthur Gibson, a Seneca chief who had been blinded in a lacrosse accident at the age of thirty-one, and who became a skilled rememberer, also dictated a version to Hewitt in Onondaga in 1899. Toriwawakon Paul Wallace asserts that this version was &amp;quot;revised by Chiefs Abram Charles, John Buck Sr. and Joshua Buck, from 1900 to 1914.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Two generations passed before efforts to write down the oral tradition resumed. The linguist Floyd Lounsbury worked with the Oneidas, and took down the recollections of Atsyatanunta Demas Elm, who by the 1970s was over ninety years old. Michael Foster, an anthropologist and linguist, worked with Deyonwe&#039;ton Jacob &amp;quot;Jake&amp;quot; Thomas, a Snipe Clan Cayuga royá:ner, to record not only the law and the ceremonies but also aspects of council and treaty procedure. Thomas also did extensive recording—audiotape, videotape, and writing—on his own, and undertook several public recitations in Mohawk, Cayuga, and English. Some of these were recorded. In 2010, Tehahenteh Frank Miller taught a course based on one of these Mohawk versions, which provided me with additional insights into the relationship between language, thought, and law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Toriwawakon Paul A.W. Wallace, working with the 1912 Gibson version—which he felt &amp;quot;tells a more coherent story than is found in the other versions and which at the same time points the allegory with greater insight.&amp;quot; —combined that and the 1899 Gibson version with the Newhouse and Chiefs&#039; versions to produce his *White Roots of Peace* in 1946. Wallace maintained that &amp;quot;the only way to get an approximation of the original is to attempt a composite narrative,&amp;quot; using his own &amp;quot;discretion in selecting the incidents or the words that best convey the central motif.&amp;quot; In effect, Wallace added a new version to the existing ones; his picking and choosing between those earlier versions produces a consistent narrative, though some of the spirit and detail of the majestic 1912 Gibson version is lost in translation and adaptation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are also versions of the law, or parts of it, in Haudenosaunee languages. In 1782, the Kahnawake Mohawk chief Ahsareko:wa (Big Knife) died. At that time, the Mohawks who had lived at Scoharie in the Mohawk Valley were living at Lachine, near Montreal, having been displaced by the American Revolution. John Deserontyon, one of their leaders, condoled the people of Kahnawake on behalf of the Mohawks. His written text of both the Condolence and the reply was transcribed and translated by Hewitt a century later. Newhouse wrote in Mohawk as well as in English.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Minutes of councils between the French, the British, the United States, and the Haudenosaunee frequently contain elements of, or references to, the Great Law. These appear in the greetings and Condolences that begin the councils (when they are not summarized by the recorder as &amp;quot;the usual ceremonies&amp;quot;), as well as in the occasional explanations by the Haudenosaunee of the legal reasons for their actions or positions. These council records are reproduced in a variety of collections, from the *Jesuit Relations* to the *New York Colonial Documents* to the *Papers of Sir William Johnson*. The council records run from the mid-1600s to the nineteenth century, with council minutes internal to Haudenosaunee communities often continuous to the present day. The treaty councils were run by the processes of the Great Law: they provide historic explanations for, or demonstration of, aspects of the law in action. However, one must always approach these records cautiously, since it is not always possible to separate original Haudenosaunee rules from European influence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the late 1700s, &amp;quot;David of Scoharie&amp;quot; produced a Mohawk text of the parts of the law that deal with the Condolence. The text passed to a chief at the Grand River Territory who had Sakayengwaraton John Smoke Johnson copy it. The original was destroyed in a house fire in the 1830s. The copy became a central part of Horatio Hale&#039;s 1883 publication, *The* *Iroquois Book of Rites*. Hale also included a different copy of the Condolence, transcribed by John Green of the Grand River Territory in 1874, and kept by Skanawati John Buck. Horatio Hale in 1875 and 1880 and then William Beauchamp used a mainly Mohawk version that had been kept by Ha-you-wehs Daniel LaFort at Onondaga. Mrs. John A. Jones at Onondaga had a slightly different short version of part of the Condolence. Kahynodoe George Key, a Grand River chief, had written another copy of the Mohawk songs, which he provided to another of the Elder Brothers, Ho-de-gweh Orris Farmer of Onondaga. J.N.B. Hewitt transcribed several versions of the Condolence that remain among the unpublished materials in the Smithsonian American Museum of Natural History.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1883, Horatio Hale published *The Iroquois Book of Rites*. Its transcriptions of several of these earlier documents, written by Haudenosaunee, are still consulted when preparing for the Condolences today.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some differences between versions of the law are the result of time eroding memory. Other differences stem from the personal agendas and biases of the recorders. Seth Newhouse was involved in the political struggle at the Grand River Territory between the Confederacy Council and the &amp;quot;Warriors&#039; Party.&amp;quot; He supported Mohawk primacy (against the Onondagas) and above all the Haudenosaunee against intrusion by the Canadian government. Other recorders also did more than record: &amp;quot;J.N.B. Hewitt, for instance, was not above &#039;revising&#039; some of the legends in his search for a &#039;consistent historical background&#039; to the founding of the League (1931:175). For their part, Goldenweiser, Parker and Fenton have all become embroiled in the debate about the possibility of aboriginal Iroquois constitutionality, and their disagreement has colored their work.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the early twentieth century, there were personal jealousies between the people who worked with the chiefs on the different versions. Hewitt attacked Parker&#039;s publication of the Newhouse and Chiefs&#039; versions, Scott&#039;s publication of the Chiefs&#039; Version, and Beauchamp&#039;s work on condoling councils: &amp;quot;These three publications . . . severally repeat old errors and so diffuse them broadcast under the patronage of learned institutions, and so the following strictures are made on the untrustworthy character of much of their contents, lest the unwary student be led into accepting misinformation for truth. . . . It is most unfortunate for the cause of historical truth that great institutions insist on publication at the expense of study and accuracy.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alexander Goldenweiser also attacked Parker&#039;s publication, in a show of racism that would have shocked the Haudenosaunee whose company he kept: &amp;quot;[The Newhouse version] cannot justly be regarded as a genuine native product. It is, without doubt, based on a wide acquaintance, on the part of the compiler, with the beliefs, attitudes, and practices of the confederated Iroquois, but this native material has been welded into a highly formal and rationalized document, the product of a sophisticated mind, and, as such, conspicuously un-Indian in character.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Goldenweiser was interested in compiling the law in as original a form as possible. While he was right in pointing out the &amp;quot;un-Indian&amp;quot; character of parts of Newhouse&#039;s text, the discrepancy was in form—Newhouse&#039;s attempt to imitate North American statutory structure—and not in content. As for sophistication, Goldenweiser, who transcribed but apparently did not analyze, seems himself to have completely missed the depth of the Great Law as a functioning legal system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a law text, it is tempting to &amp;quot;consolidate&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;standardize&amp;quot; the several versions, to seek consistency, to choose a &amp;quot;correct&amp;quot; version. To do so would mean going beyond interpretation and into the territory of judgement. As a matter of approach, I have generally chosen the structure of the 1912 John Arthur Gibson text as the most complete, but where other versions are different, I cite the differences. In some instances, other texts contain useful information or provisions missing in the Gibson version (Newhouse provides songs; David of Canajoharie provides a more detailed text of the Condolence; Jake Thomas provides cultural context; Hewitt&#039;s many fragments contain useful information from Gibson, Abram Charles, John Buck, and others).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 2005, John Mohawk published his edited version of the *Iroquois Creation Story*, based on Gibson and Hewitt&#039;s late nineteenth-century version. In doing so, he explained an approach to &amp;quot;editing&amp;quot; Haudenosaunee narratives that set a number of important goals:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[The editor] might consciously remove the various remnants of Victorian conventions and attitudes which sometimes surface in the original text along with some elements which clearly were added following contact with Europeans or people of European descent. . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The job of editor, which could never be accomplished perfectly, was to preserve the elements of the narrative in language consistent with that used at the end of the twentieth century. It was my goal to eliminate repetitive language, preserve as much as possible the elements of the narrative such that the original authors might recognize it as their own, to avoid as much as possible changing the spirit or intent of the story, and to add very few of my own thoughts. Above all, I tried to preserve the thoughts of the ancients. Because the tradition lends itself to a contemporary interpretation, I anticipate some skepticism about possible alterations to lend it a modernist, or even postmodernist interpretation. I have tried to be transparent about my own interventions, albeit in subtle ways.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
John Mohawk was able to implement this approach because he had grown up within the culture, constantly interacting with the carriers of its knowledge, and was therefore able to distinguish between Hewitt&#039;s occasional quasi-European additions and the original, purer stream.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Chiefs&#039; Version of the law was an effort to produce a simple, authoritative, consistent, and de-Europeanized edition of the law, in the same spirit as John Mohawk&#039;s approach to the Creation story. It omits some of the details of the 1912 Gibson version and the Newhouse versions, but it contains all the essentials, in a coherent, cohesive sequence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In approaching the Kayanerenkó:wa, I have adopted several of John Mohawk&#039;s methods. Since it is a living legal system, though, it is also important to cite how exposure to Europeans may have changed the law, or its interpretation. While I have eliminated some unnecessary repetition, and have added modern interpretation and commentary, I have also struggled with the challenge of reconciling several very distinct versions of the law. Where reconciliation is not possible, I point out the differences between the versions, and occasionally suggest which one is most consistent, either with the rest of the law, with historical reality, or with rational analysis. Because this is a work about law, my personal comments are overt and declared rather than subtle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Versions, Names, and Quotations&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Though the first note in this book explained my approach to Haudenosaunee names, some additional complexities should also be addressed. Since the law has been recorded in several languages over two centuries, people&#039;s names and key concepts appear in different forms in different versions. They also differ from language to language. Especially for those who speak no Haudenosaunee language, this can be confusing. Thadadaho is the same person as Atotarho and Tatadahoh. Except where the names appear in quotations, I have deliberately used a single spelling for each such name. I have generally chosen to use modern Mohawk orthography, for several reasons. More people speak Mohawk than all the other Haudenosaunee languages combined. The spelling systems for modern Oneida, Cayuga, and Onondaga were developed by different linguists and all require special diacritical marks, inconvenient to use and difficult for occasional readers to learn. Mohawk uses a standard keyboard and simpler spelling. Mohawk is the language of council. As a matter of convenience, and in the absence of a single standard Mohawk orthography, I use the spellings used by Kanatawakon David Maracle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
My decision to put people&#039;s Haudenosaunee names before their English names also applies to nicknames, which I have decided to cite in parentheses only where the individual was best known by that nickname. Thus, I mention Sagoyewatha (Red Jacket) and Kayantwakha (Cornplanter). Some people have several names during their lifetime, and I tend in such cases to use the name by which they were best known, with others sometimes cited in parentheses or footnotes. By the 1600s, Haudenosaunee often had European names as well as their &amp;quot;real names,&amp;quot; and often they carried nicknames as well: the Onondaga chief Outrewati was also &amp;quot;Garangula&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;La Grande Gueule&amp;quot;; the Mohawk speaker Canaqueese Jan Smits also appears in history books as &amp;quot;the Flemish Bastard.&amp;quot; Theyanoguin (Teianoken) was also known by his English name (Henry Peters), his Dutch name (Hendrick Pieters), his nickname (King Hendrick), and his Mohawk chief&#039;s title, Tekarihoken. They would appear in this work as Outrewati, Canaqueese, and Teyanoken (later Tekarihoken).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It would be proper to refer to each of the nations in their own language. It would be a useful lesson in avoiding the imposition of foreign names. It would also be cumbersome, and make for difficult reading. It would be even more complex to refer to each nation by its council name, rather than its everyday name. But it is simply easier to refer to Mohawks rather than Kanienkehá:ka. On the principle of seeking the clearest communication possible, I use the usual English names for the nations, and not their names for themselves or their formal council designations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee have always enjoyed puns and double meanings in their own language—the kind of stuff that simply does not survive translation into English. If the versions of the law are full of these double meanings, that, too, says something about the attitudes of the people. English-speaking peoples also appreciate multiple meanings (although it has become common to groan at puns as a &amp;quot;lower form&amp;quot; of humour), but they take their law very seriously. In English law, and the common-law legal systems that have grown from it, and in most European law, every word has a specific, deliberate meaning, and the intent is that every word should have only one meaning, to the point that many statutes begin with pages of definitions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We are entitled to believe that the law contains a linguistic logic that also reflects its culture of origin. If we work from English versions, and with twenty-first-century survivors, we can expect the law to suffer erosion of that logic. Maintaining the languages is therefore an important aspect of understanding and maintaining the law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Language&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Laws reflect aspects of the languages in which they are embedded, just as the languages reflect the cultures in which they live. Where it might be possible to make oneself understood in English with a succession of nouns and adverbs, Haudenosaunee languages require both action and relationship. That is, a Haudenosaunee sentence, because of its structure and the language&#039;s grammar, will cause a person to consider not only the object but also its state or activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The difference between some European languages and English is instructive in explaining the differences. Latin languages require a person to consider the gender of the thing that is spoken of—and often provide few clues as to why things are assigned one gender or another. In those languages, as well, there are different forms of address for people with whom one is familiar and for those whom one respects, or does not know well. In French or Spanish, crossing the line that separates *vosotros* or *vous* from *tu* is a conscious, often delicate move. In Haudenosaunee languages, a greater number of things are considered animate than in English (the difference, in a way, between *him* and *it*). People are frequently addressed according to their relationship with the speaker. There are more precise and selective ways of addressing groups. Languages that encourage the speaker to consider his relationships with others are well suited to a legal system that is based on those relationships, and on maintaining them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Haudenosaunee languages, it is common to find interjections in speech that seek agreement or encourage consensus. Wahi, or &amp;quot;is it not so?&amp;quot; is a common interjection in everyday conversational Mohawk.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Duality, that persistent aspect of the Creation story and the Law, is also more frequent in Haudenosaunee languages than in modern European ones. Modern European languages distinguish between singular and plural, while Haudenosaunee languages have singular, dual, and plural forms (Arabic features dual forms, as did ancient Greek, and as do Gaelic, Slovenian, and some Polynesian languages). On the one hand, this requires more specificity in normal conversation (&amp;quot;the two of us&amp;quot; rather than the more indefinite &amp;quot;us&amp;quot;). On the other, it promotes thinking about things in twos.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Duality is accentuated by language structure, which adds useful prefixes to words and concepts. The prefix *te-* indicates that there are two of something involved—for example, tekká:nere, &amp;quot;me looking upon something,&amp;quot; is a reminder that we have two eyes—or that the two-ness of the matter is a question of balance—tewáton, &amp;quot;it becomes,&amp;quot; occurs in a balanced way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefixes carefully distinguish between uncertainty (for example, things that have not yet happened, and may not) and fact. The prefix *wa-* indicates that the matter being spoken of is, in the words of Tehahenteh Frank Miller, &amp;quot;an incontrovertible fact.&amp;quot; In conversations about law, this helps separate fact from opinion, and can be an indicator of which matters are firm or entrenched, a signal they are to be accommodated by the other side of the fire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The idea of a &amp;quot;matter&amp;quot; itself is quite different from the more precise English term. Orihwa can be translated as &amp;quot;matter,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;business,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;thing,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;word,&amp;quot; and as a component of &amp;quot;culture&amp;quot; (niionkwarihó:ten, our ways, or our business). The word allows a broad range of things to be considered. It also permits discussion—or, as John Mohawk would say, conversation—about matters before they must be described as disputes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Haudenosaunee languages are descriptive. Where English provides the noun &amp;quot;deer,&amp;quot; the Mohawk oskenonton can be interpreted as &amp;quot;it bears living bones,&amp;quot; a reference to the stag&#039;s antlers. When the antlers are placed on a person—the metaphor for making a man a Confederacy chief—the thought is present that the person acquires the stag&#039;s antenna-like sensitivity. &amp;quot;Car,&amp;quot; in English, becomes the Mohawk káse:re, &amp;quot;it (a created thing) drags itself.&amp;quot; Not only are the languages descriptive: in many cases the words are metaphorical, and they condition a person to more easily understand and use a legal system that is replete with symbol and metaphor. They are also active languages, and they encourage a person to think of the law as a living entity, one that is *being*, rather than as a passive or static concept. It is logical that a Mohawk would say that it is reconciling, not reconciliation, that is important.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With such differences between Haudenosaunee languages and the English that surrounds the Haudenosaunee archipelago, it is not surprising that the leaders of the Confederacy want to sustain the languages and maintain their use in council. The Kayanerenkó:wa would be a poorer, weaker law if it existed for them only in English. Much would be lost in translation, including aspects of the spirit of the law:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has been argued, and has become almost a commonplace, that Native American languages are embedded in the local landscapes of First Nations; the verbs that speak exactly the voice of the west wind as it moves over the water, colors not generic browns and reds but the loam under pine needles and sumac buds when they are ready to eat. A worldview is lost, it has been said with greater and greater urgency, when an indigenous language is not spoken. Perhaps even more is lost when indigenous oral narrative is unspoken, when these stories lie quiet as truncated text, when they are gutted by the blades of academic discipline.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Haudenosaunee languages are in dire trouble. The terms used by linguists to describe the state of languages are the same as those used by biologists to describe the state of species. Tuscarora is virtually extinct. Languages are &amp;quot;moribund&amp;quot; if they have fewer than 300 speakers, and most of the speakers are over fifty years old: Oneida, Onondaga, Cayuga, and Seneca fit into that category. Only Mohawk, with over 2,000 speakers, may have much chance of survival. Efforts are being made in many communities to revitalize the languages, but the power of English is difficult to resist, as that language gains vocabulary and technical specificity in ways that outdistance other languages, and as it becomes the tongue of commerce and international communication. At any given moment, nearly 20 percent of the conversations in English happening in the world are between two people neither of whom have English as their first language. English is omnivorous.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Haudenosaunee languages, like Haudenosaunee traditional governments, are endangered. For purposes of the law, the English versions provide information about the substance, but fail to deliver the entire bundle of knowledge and understanding that the law carries in its original languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because several of the English versions are over a century old; because several of the translators were academics, with both broad vocabularies and a lack of concern for the intelligibility of their product to average readers; and because the original languages are very different from English, several of the translations of the law contain awkward or difficult English terms: &amp;quot;besom,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;downfended,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;condole,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;verily,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;whereupon,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;thus,&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;yonder.&amp;quot; Other terms, like &amp;quot;repent,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;deacon,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;righteous,&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;sinful&amp;quot; carry powerful Christian baggage in English, and are explained quite differently by Haudenosaunee familiar with the meanings of the words used in their original languages. Using Christian terms has caused frustration and confusion, as Victorian speakers, either Anglo-American or Haudenosaunee, found no closer terms to translate essential parts of Haudenosaunee thought. Still other terms reflect the lack of colloquial English equivalents, and substitute obsolete or anthropological terms as a result: &amp;quot;moiety,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;*gens*,&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;matron.&amp;quot; Yet others reflect inadequate or awkward translations of Haudenosaunee grammar into English: &amp;quot;continually,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;repeatedly,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;presently.&amp;quot; When we read century-old translations of even older texts, we encounter linguistic difficulties not only across languages and cultures but across time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Oral Tradition and the Rememberers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;Don&#039;t forget the words he has spoken in front of us who are the elders. This is where they should rest, his words, in the bottom of our hearts, so that, whatever one&#039;s age, one will keep remembering the story that he himself, Tekanawita, has told. Thereafter the children repeated it, reminding themselves of what he said in front of them.*&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Longhouse today, there remains a prejudice against learning from tape recordings, especially recordings of sacred materials. One is supposed to learn by listening, and by practising. This is not just technophobia. There is a sound principle involved: &amp;quot;We don&#039;t want machines or paper to become our storage device. The human mind is where we keep important things.&amp;quot; It is portable, safe, flexible, reliable, and its information is easily transferred to other minds. Written materials, on the other hand, have often been misused, quoted out of context, or lost. A preference for memory as a storage device was supported, historically, by the presence of well-trained memories. As the Haudenosaunee described their ways: &amp;quot;We nevertheless have methods of transmitting from Father to Son an account of all these things, whereby you will find the rememberance of them is faithfully preserved, and our succeeding generations are made acquainted with what has passed, that it may not be forgot as long as the Earth remains.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
European observers confirmed that the Haudenosaunee had sophisticated, remarkable techniques for remembering the important things: &amp;quot;When any Foreign Ambassador comes to them &amp;amp; makes any proposal they contrive to remember every word he says: different people are appointed to learn by heart a separate sentence &amp;amp; no more; so when they come to put it together they know every word of it.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Benjamin Franklin, who had attended Haudenosaunee councils with Pennsylvania and who as a printer had reproduced several of the treaties, asserted that the women were responsible for remembering council proceedings. Venables said that this was one more respect in which the Haudenosaunee maintained gender balance: &amp;quot;The old Men sit in the foremost Ranks, the Warriors in the next, and the Women and Children in the hindmost. The Business of the Women is to take exact notice of what passes, imprint it in their Memories, for they have no Writing, and communicate it to their Children. They are the Records of the Council, and they preserve Tradition of the Stipulations in Treaties a hundred Years back, which when we compare with our Writings we always find exact.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sakokwenonkwas Tom Porter explained: &amp;quot;They believed it should never die, that if it is put into a person&#039;s head and heart, it will truly live. In a book it will sit on a shelf where dust and dirt will cover it.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Teaching a course in Haudenosaunee law at the Faculty of Law at the University of Toronto gave me an unusual opportunity. I asked the students whether any of them could recite, with some accuracy, three sections of the Constitution of Canada. None could. How about three sections of the Criminal Code? None could, either. How about the story of Goldilocks and the Three Bears? With the exception of a recent immigrant, they all knew the story, in detail. I pointed out that nobody eats porridge for supper today—that European peasants did, four centuries ago. This is an old story. And that they all knew that it was the middle-sized bowl that was &amp;quot;too cold,&amp;quot; even though that defied the laws of physics, since the little bowl should have cooled sooner. The point, though, was that, especially for a people with low literacy rates, but even for a twenty-first-century modern nation-state, it makes sense to place one&#039;s basic values in a story everybody knows, rather than in a book nobody can remember. Sakokwenonkwas was right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The oral tradition has its disadvantages. Not least of these is the fact that some of it is being lost, that fewer people are devoting their lives to learning the skills of memory and the vast materials involved, and that with the passing of some of the older people, valuable information that they kept only in their minds is gone forever. The written versions have never been complete.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This has always been the case, though: times change, and the things remembered pass down the generations in changing forms. Thus, every good speaker begins humbly, noting that we who are alive today do not possess the knowledge of our forefathers, and that we have forgotten much.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Indigenous peoples, who have a relatively short tradition of writing, memory passed down through the generations is an important aspect of knowledge. Literacy among Europeans—especially widespread literacy—is quite recent, and before literacy, there was Memory. As Daniel Boorstin observed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before the printed book, Memory ruled daily life and the occult learning . . . The Memory of individuals and of communities carried knowledge through time and space. For millennia personal Memory reigned over entertainment and information, over the perpetuation and perfection of crafts, the practice of commerce, the conduct of professions. By Memory and in Memory the fruits of education were garnered, preserved and stored. Memory was an awesome faculty which everyone had to cultivate, in ways and for reasons we have long since forgotten. In these last five hundred years we see only pitiful relics of the empire and the power of Memory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The admission that we are not going to do this as well as our grandparents would, or as the men who first set these matters down, is probably true, but it is also a statement of modesty: &amp;quot;Now at present in some way, I may perform it improperly, compared to the way he used to do it, . . . my grandfather.&amp;quot; In the Haudenosaunee world, it is as normal as clearing one&#039;s throat before speaking. It is easily misunderstood. In *R. v. Taylor and Williams,* the Ontario Supreme Court read the minutes of an 1818 treaty council with the Ojibways, in which they said: &amp;quot;Father: You see me here, I am to be pitied, I have no old men to instruct me; I am the Head Chief, but a young man. You must pity me, all the old people have gone to the other world. My hands are naked, I cannot speak as my ancestors were used to.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The court assumed that all the old chiefs had been killed in the War of 1812, and only young men were left. In fact, one would have heard chiefs in council—or, for that matter, in a ceremony of Condolence—200 years earlier making similar statements. Here are several examples:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We who are now here are but children; the ancients being deceased.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now hearken while your grandchildren cry mournfully to you, because the Great League which you established has grown old. We hope that they may hear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hail, my grandsires! You have said that sad will be the fate of those who come in the latter times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Oh, my grandsires! Even now I may have failed to perform this ceremony in the order in which they were wont to perform it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Maquase sachems who spoke formerly with you are dead, and we have not so much knowledge as they had. Nevertheless, although they are buried, yet let the old Covenant that was made with our ancestors be kept firm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Modesty or humility in opening remarks should not be taken as an admission of either ignorance or incapacity. It is a polite, proper element of a good speaker&#039;s words. It is also a recognition of the human condition. We make mistakes. We do the best we can. &amp;quot;The public stance of the speaker is one of humility. In his opening lines he should stress the fact that he has been appointed to the task; he has not taken it upon himself to rise and speak. It is also considered good form to make a formal apology for any errors of omission or commission. If he is especially confident he may invite the opposite speaker to &#039;correct&#039; his errors in the response—an opportunity, however, usually declined.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Memory has limits. Oral tradition has weaknesses. They show up in several distinct ways. People tend to remember recent events better than distant ones. People tend to remember important events better than insignificant ones. People tend to remember stories they have heard several times better than ones they have heard only once. They tend to recall the parts that affect them directly rather than the parts that describe strangers or foreigners. For the Haudenosaunee, the creation of the Confederacy and the Law is a remarkable story, often repeated: it is what John Mohawk called a meta-narrative. It is not surprising that, as an oral tradition, it remains forceful and clear in comparison to other legal knowledge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If modern institutions and practices reflect the traditions, they tend to corroborate the accuracy of the recall of the custodians of those traditions. Morgan approached the Haudenosaunee with the thinking of a lawyer as well as that of a proto-anthropologist. He sought evidence and proof of what he was told, and he confirmed that modern practices tended to confirm the oral traditions—at least as far back as the time of the Peacemaker:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Those traditions which reach beyond the formation of the League, are vague and unreliable, while all such as refer to its establishment assume a connected and distinctive form. It follows that confidence may be reposed in such inferences as are derived from these traditions, and corroborated by the internal structure of the government, and by the institutions of the League.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The present Iroquois are . . . perfectly familiar with the structure and principles of the ancient confederacy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tradition interposes its feeble light from the confusion which time has wrought on some of the leading events which preceded and marked that political organization.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee designated &amp;quot;rememberers,&amp;quot; not just for individual councils, but for specific ceremonies. An individual&#039;s gift of memory was acknowledged and cultivated: when Skaniatariio John Arthur Gibson was blinded in a lacrosse accident, the chiefs encouraged him to use and develop his powerful memory in the service of the people. In the twentieth century, the best-known Haudenosaunee ceremonial speakers were men who had avoided the Canadian education system, some to the point of illiteracy, and who had learned instead from their grandfathers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where Europeans supplemented memory with writing, the Haudenosaunee used wampum as a mnemonic device. Both sacred and permanent, the belts and strings of shell beads stood as symbols of the concepts of the law, and later as symbols and records of the promises and principles of the treaties. When wampum was not available, other objects were used to preserve words, even temporarily: history records councils in which sticks or furs were used in this way. Wampum—which was also more durable—made the commitments sacred.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Haudenosaunee tradition states clearly that the use of wampum in connection with law dates to the time of the making of the Great Law of Peace. The first legal use of wampum was the ceremony of Condolence, and other wampum records came afterward. What is important to note at this stage of thinking about the Great Law is the fact that, for centuries, strings and belts of shell beads have been used to assist human memory. Wampum is not writing. Some suggest that each individual bead in a belt has its own secret meaning, capable of being interpreted by those who have received the esoteric training associated with that belt. This is not so. In the case of the strings and belts, it is the patterns and the colours that symbolically recall the concepts that were originally associated with them. Those concepts were stated in words, and the wampum acts as a device of recall. The symbols on the belts have standard meanings. For example, a diagonal line symbolizes a nation propping up the Longhouse from the outside, as an ally. Short lines at the end of a belt can indicate the number of nations or villages that support the proposition. A square or hexagon symbolizes a fire, the expression of a nation&#039;s existence. However, a wampum belt cannot be &amp;quot;read&amp;quot; like a book.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Patterns on belts and strings often recall physical phenomena. The alternating black and white beads on a Condolence string resemble the teardrops shed by grieving eyes. On another string, the dark area in the middle evokes a fire. The connection between wampum symbols and natural phenomena is a precursor to alphabetical literacy. The Phoenician letter &amp;quot;A&amp;quot; evoked an ox&#039;s head and horns, and only much later detached itself from the image and became linked in people&#039;s minds only to sound, and then to a sound as a component of a word made of several sounds, so that &amp;quot;A&amp;quot; today means only &amp;quot;A.&amp;quot; Given time and isolation, wampum could have become a &amp;quot;literate&amp;quot; form of communication, in which its symbols would detach themselves from image.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wampum is &amp;quot;readable&amp;quot; in another sense, as well: it is a binary system, in which the two colours, white and dark, operate separately as symbols of the bright and dark sides of life, and combine to provide more subtle meanings: &amp;quot;This all white string is a sign of truth, peace and good will, this black string is a sign of hatred, of war and of a bad heart, the string with alternate beads, black and white, is a sign that peace should exist between the nations. The string with white on either end and black in the middle is a sign that wars must end and peace declared.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some say that the wampum records *are* the treaties. This is as erroneous as to say that the written documents are the treaties. Both the wampums and the documents are *evidence* of the agreements that were made. Each has its particular virtues and weaknesses—but the treaties themselves are the coming together of minds, not the physical objects that record or symbolize the agreements. For the Haudenosaunee, as well, the &amp;quot;treaty&amp;quot; is less the event at which the agreement was made, or the specific matter that was agreed upon, and more the relationship that flows from or is reaffirmed by the event.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some wampums are notorious—they have become icons. That is, they are symbols known and understood by hundreds, sometimes thousands, of people (much as the colours and symbols on national flags are broadly known). People *know* that the five shapes on the Hiawatha Belt symbolize the original Five Nations. They *know* that the tree in the middle of the five is the Tree of Peace as well as the heart of the Confederacy. They *know* that the two lines on the Two Row Wampum symbolize the Indian canoe and the white man&#039;s ship, going side by side down the River of Life, neither interfering in the course of the other. They *know* that the thirteen men on the George Washington belt are the thirteen colonies, and that the two men on either side of a house on that belt are the doorkeepers of the Confederacy, the Mohawks and Senecas—and that the meaning of the belt is that the United States&#039; arms will pass over the Longhouse without trying to get inside it. In the case of other wampums, the meaning is less well-known, but no less well recorded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several kinds of wampum, from a Haudenosaunee legal perspective. The earliest, simplest, and most powerful are the strings associated with the ceremony of Condolence, the strings symbolizing the nations bringing their minds together in ronatennikonhraroron, collective thinking, and the Circle Wampum that is the symbol of the League&#039;s government. Then there are the wampum belts that record aspects of the Great Law of Peace. Following them, chronologically, are the wampums that record treaties and relations with other nations, both Indigenous and European. Other wampum also has legal significance: there are strings of adoption wampum; there are wampums that are linked to specific ceremonies; and the rotiyanershon each carry a short string they refer to as their &amp;quot;horns.&amp;quot; Clan mothers each carry the counterparts of these short strings—longer strings symbolizing their responsibility for the chief&#039;s title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
British law—Saxon and Norman—was originally customary, and as such quite distinct from the written, codified Roman system. This customary law was allowed to develop through jurisprudence, to spread to meet additional circumstances, while keeping its principles intact. Unless replaced by statutes passed by the legislature, the &amp;quot;common law&amp;quot; of the people continued to apply and govern. The &amp;quot;common law&amp;quot; was not codified, nor reduced to writing except as revealed by court decisions. Modern British—and therefore American and Canadian—laws contain reflections of the customary and oral traditions that lie at their roots. The laws of the United States and Canada are themselves a combination of custom, memory, and writing. There are also instances in which objects and symbols rather than documents have legal significance: one has only to consider the importance of particular seals to realize that Anglo-American law also goes beyond writing. The Euro-American legal system teems with meaningful symbolism: any courtroom contains a display of heraldry, flags, and judicial robes that confirm tradition and provide a graphic display of legal principles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Haudenosaunee law is preserved in a different way. There has been more emphasis on memory, partly because literacy came later than for the settlers. It is also retained in memory because the law is a law of the mind—and if you keep your law in your mind, you will also keep it *in mind*, and it will influence your conduct. But the law is not kept only in memory. It is also preserved in action and in wampum, and for more than two centuries it has been finding its way into writing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because the relevant parts of the law would be recited or referred to at times when they were being applied, the thousands of pages of transcripts of &amp;quot;treaty councils&amp;quot; are actually a distinct source of recorded law. The people who put together the microfilmed *Iroquois Indians: A Documentary History* in the 1980s declared they were assembling the equivalent of the archives of the Iroquois Confederacy&#039;s Department of External Affairs. The council records, though, also contain numerous references to specific parts of the law. Because the relationships that the Haudenosaunee built with the French, the Dutch, the British, and the United States are themselves reflections of provisions of the Kayanerenkó:wa, and are consistent with that law and its operation, the treaty councils illuminate the operations and principles of the law, as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While oral tradition has been recognized in U.S. and Canadian courts as a means of bringing in &amp;quot;the Indian view&amp;quot; of history, it rarely travels alone. It is a primary form of preservation of the law, but far from the only one. It is supplemented by writing, by scholars, by physical evidence, by wampum. All these flesh out the law, and make it more easily accepted and understood by the newcomer nations&#039; courts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some versions of the Great Law provide that the people should meet every five years to hear the entire law recited, and to reaffirm their commitment to it. This form of regular maintenance applies not only to keeping the law fresh, but also to all other relationships that keep the peace. As Sir William Johnson wrote to Thomas Gage: &amp;quot;As it is the Way of keeping peace made use of by the Indians to meet frequently, so we can never expect a continuance of peace with them unless We have annual meetings with the Confederacies, or at least as often as may be for repeating past Transactions &amp;amp; renewing Treaties which is the way they preserve these things in rememberance.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Speakers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Haudenosaunee society tends to think of individuals according to their &amp;quot;gifts&amp;quot;: the things they are good at doing. Some people have the gift of speaking, and they are asked to speak on behalf of others. They are often speakers in the ceremonies, but they are also speakers in council, either internally or in meetings with other nations. &amp;quot;According to the Indian custom, the speaker regards himself as representing the whole party for whom he speaks, and he addresses the leader of the other party as the representative and embodiment of all who come with him. Throughout the speeches &#039;I&#039; and &#039;thou&#039; are used in the well-understood sense of &#039;we&#039; and &#039;ye.&#039; In like manner, tribes and nations are, as it were, personified.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Talented speakers can be asked to speak, on occasion, for different groups. They are careful to state for whom they speak. Thus, Deyagolasera Thomas King was sometimes a speaker for the women, and sometimes for the warriors, and sometimes for the whole Confederacy in dealings with the British or other Indigenous nations. Sakoyewatha (Red Jacket) spoke occasionally for each of those groups; he also had the opportunity to act as a &amp;quot;real&amp;quot; lawyer in the New York State murder trial of Soongise Tommy Jemmy, a Seneca who had executed a Seneca woman convicted of witchcraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Anglo-Saxon law also has a tradition of designated speakers in a legal context. Every lawyer in court is essentially a hired speaker, presenting a spoken case in ways that the client wishes he or she could.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the international political (rather than legal) context, Europeans had more difficulty with the Haudenosaunee concept of speakers. In council, speakers for the Europeans generally had executive authority, either as emissaries or negotiators or as governors themselves. They frequently had to be reminded that the person speaking to them was not a &amp;quot;chief,&amp;quot; or was not speaking as a chief, but had only been chosen because of his talent for speaking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You must not think that I am alone or that I speak for myself as I speak in the name of the whole, not only the Men, but the Women, who are here present. It seems as though you imagined that I spoke only for myself, and I assure you, I speak for the whole.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Onontio, lend me ear. I am the mouth for the whole of my country; thou listenest to all the Iroquois, in hearing my words.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What constitutes a good speaker? Haudenosaunee rhetoric, like most human arts of speaking, recognizes a sonorous voice with rich tone and volume. It involves rhythm and tone, emotion and power. A good Haudenosaunee speaker will also use meaningful and powerful phrases from the law. His attitude is one of pride and dignity without arrogance. Where the speech is a reply to a matter raised across the fire, a good speaker has the recall to address each point in the order it was received, and to repeat entire parts of the original propositions. Where it is part of a ceremony, a good speaker will sound natural, rather than as if he is reciting something memorized, but will include every part of the speech in the proper order, often including formulaic words. Haudenosaunee orators had a distinct advantage over their Euro-American counterparts, because so many aspects of their speeches were already laid out for them, and this left them more time to concentrate on the original parts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Michael Foster asserts that the Haudenosaunee distinguish between degrees of speaking talent. The distinctions range from hath&#039;a:ha (&amp;quot;he speaks&amp;quot;), an ordinary speaker, to an exceptional speaker, kekyohkwaho&#039; hath&#039;aha (&amp;quot;he speaks in crowds&amp;quot;). &amp;quot;Speakers were chosen for their ability to grasp principle and fact, for rhetorical gifts, and for retentive memory in a society in which most men and women were walking archives.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A good speaker will be clear; his words will not be &amp;quot;sharp-edged&amp;quot; or injurious; they will reflect a desire to promote conciliation, reconciliation, and arriving at one mind about the subject at hand. He will sometimes use self-deprecating humour to soften his words.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In part to ensure that the speaker delivers the speech or puts through the ceremony properly, there is often someone designated to sit beside him and remind him of any missing elements. This is more common where the speaker was less experienced, or in training, or where the matter is especially difficult or delicate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Persuasion, rather than compulsion, drove decisions in Haudenosaunee society. This made rhetoric, and convincing speaking, far more important than the announcements delivered by colonial governors, federal ministers, or presidents. A talented speaker was doing far more than delivering a message in an entertaining way. He was hoping to bring about consensus through the power of words and logic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; The Power of Song: The Song of Peace&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There was a time when a great speaker would &amp;quot;perk up the ears&amp;quot; of his audience by &amp;quot;driving it into them with a song.&amp;quot; This is rarer today.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;The hymn, or *karenna*, deserves a special notice. In every important council of the Iroquois a song or chant is considered a proper and almost essential part of the proceedings. Such official songs are mentioned in many reports of treaty councils held with them by the French and English authorities. In this greatest of all councils, a song must, of course, have a distinguished place.&amp;quot; Haudenosaunee reality is slightly more complex than Horatio Hale understood. Song may have come to humans before language. It is a distinct means of expression, and a powerful one. Virtually every religion delivers important parts of its ceremonies in song—often the *most* powerful parts. The cantor in the synagogue, the muezzin in the mosque, the chanting lama, the Christian congregation with its hymns and spirituals, all share the understanding that song is a separate and essential means of communication, both between humans and between humans and the spirit world. Modern North American society integrates song into weddings and funerals, political campaigns and advertising, but not into legislatures and courts. Haudenosaunee diplomacy and law have taken this realization to a slightly different place: a speaker wishing to deliver a message with additional force or clarity may lapse into song. This is seldom done today, except in ceremonies—just as it is rare today to see a Haudenosaunee speaker walk about while he speaks—but songs in council would not only be official songs, they would be original expressions, additional ways of communicating the ideas in the speech. &amp;quot;To our astonishment an old Oneida began to sing the message which he had for the council, in a very high tenor voice. He continued for more than half an hour.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On 15 September 1685, Canondondawe, the Mohawk speaker, used the power of song to drive the message of peace into the governors of New York and Virginia:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Oh Brethren, Corlaer and Governor of Virginia, where will I look for the peace covenant, where else will I find it but on our path, and but where will this path lead but to this house, which is a house of peace and welfare, and started a song and sang completely the covenant song . . . Let us observe and keep to what has been commanded so sharply to us. Let me drive it into you with a song. Open now your ears, and he sang a song of admonishment, and gave one belt of wampum to the Governor and one belt to the Governor of Virginia, concluding all the proposals with a song and said that they were done for this time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An individual Haudenosaunee person often has his or her own song. Today, a man&#039;s personal song—his atonwa—is sung on occasion in the Longhouse. It is ancient, one of the Four Sacred Ceremonies. An uncle sings his song before introducing his niece or nephew in a naming ceremony at Green Corn or Strawberries, and atonwa is sung by a person walking up and down with his arms linked with those of a person being adopted. A man may sing his song when renewing or joining the works of a medicine society. The song is a prayer, but also a statement of who a person is. An atonwa can be passed on from one person to another, as well, so the song does not die.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Songs are not only individual. Sung together, they are an expression of the power of a group of people, and also of their unity. For many peoples, voices joined together in hymn are thought to be a clearer message of praise to the Creator. Singing together creates solidarity, provides solace, and affirms companionship.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All these factors come together in the Song of Peace. Composed by the Peacemaker, taught by Hiawatha, learned by the people as they walked the path from Oneida to Onondaga, the Song of Peace is a song of power. It is the song that pacified the fierce, scattered mind of Thadadaho. When people together sing a song, it is another layer of their unity of mind: &amp;quot;Long House used to sing when we were in power they went on in harmony.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the written versions of the Kayanerenkó:wa treat it as a prose text. Perhaps the most important exception to this is Horatio Hale&#039;s transcription of the two Condolence texts. Hale reproduced and translated the writing of Mohawks and Onondagas a century earlier, and the format appears as verse in short lines. The Condolence is intended to be recited, even chanted. There are pauses between the lines. The written versions came long after the words had been formed into a long song, a long poem—something that was oral, not written, and to be remembered, not read. The handwritten Newhouse versions are also clear about when the narrative switches into song: the lines become shortened, and stanzas appear. As with the research into how the *Iliad* and *Odyssey* were preserved over the centuries, if one examined the Kayanerenkó:wa, one would find that the entire law, and not just the Condolence, is intended to be recited. Today&#039;s annual recitals embrace an increasing comfort with vibrant chant rather than monotone. It is therefore not unreasonable that the format of written versions of the law is better adapted to be written with a break at the end of each spoken or chanted &amp;quot;line,&amp;quot; the places where there would be real pauses in the speech. The translated Thanksgiving at the beginning of this text is my conversion of Gibson&#039;s 1912 text into a more rhythmic, poetic format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Having distinct lines leads to another element of long-remembered works: formulaic, repetitive strings of words that assist the reciter in recalling. We can see those in the law in its frequent repetition of specific groups of words: &amp;quot;Now it will end, the bloodshed, the scalping, the killing&amp;quot;; &amp;quot;the smoke pierced the sky&amp;quot;; &amp;quot;peace, power, and righteousness.&amp;quot; Why did transcribers such as Hewitt and Goldenweiser not write out the law in the &amp;quot;lines&amp;quot; in which it would be recited? Possibly because they were not hearing it in the way it would be done in public, but instead privately from a reciter in his home. Hewitt, in particular, would have an informant deliver two to six words at a time, write them down, check them again—and thus create a meticulous but not necessarily naturally flowing document. Perhaps these recorders did not see the importance of the poetic format, not being performers or poets themselves. They were transforming an oral text into a written one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If one thinks of the Kayanerenkó:wa as a recited, oral epic matter rather than as transcribed prose, it can be more easily understood as also being a periodically performed event, part of the living cycle of the people, rather than something to be used for legal reference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; One Family&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;If you are one of us you are addressed as a relative&amp;quot; —David Maybury-Lewis&#039;s summary of how tribal peoples view the issue of &amp;quot;membership&amp;quot;—is crucially important to any understanding of the Great Law. From the outset, the Peacemaker&#039;s approach was to create one family, to make everyone relatives. His predecessor, centuries earlier, had succeeded in the first step, by creating the clan system, the extended families. The Peacemaker accomplished two further steps: first, he wove the nations together by declaring that the clans were families that transcended national boundaries; second, he extrapolated the family metaphor upward, so that the nations and their leaders became a single longhouse, a single extended family.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As nations become known to the Haudenosaunee, the relationship is described in family terms: &amp;quot;our nephews&amp;quot; the Delawares; &amp;quot;our brothers&amp;quot; the Ojibways; &amp;quot;our brothers&amp;quot; the English; &amp;quot;our cousins&amp;quot; the Cherokees. Those terms have both social and legal meaning. They imply a structure of mutual respect and obligation. They imply obligations of deference (from a nephew to an uncle, for example) or equality (between brothers, though elder brothers have some privileges). They are not merely terms of affection. When one becomes a relative of the Haudenosaunee—by adoption, for example—one steps into a complex web of protection and duty, rights and obligations. Kinship provides a person with a place to stay in a distant community; with a place to sit in council or ceremonies; with providers, allies, and protectors; but also with people to whom one bears obligations; in whose presence one is ashamed if one has erred; whom one must protect and help provide for.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before one wades into the complexities and technicalities of Haudenosaunee kinship, there is one important principle to keep in mind. In a tribal society, it is *belonging* that gives a person identity, an existence as part of a collective entity rather than primarily existing as an individual. It is the opposite of the loneliness an individual feels in a globalized, homogenized society. Belonging adds a layer of security as it adds more layers of complex social relationship.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thayendenega wrote in 1801: &amp;quot;The conditions of the confederacy seem to be expressed by the titles given each other as that of brothers and sons, representing that brotherly and filial love which was to guide their conduct to each other—this was further cemented by friendships between individuals of the several nations which was held very sacred; in consequence of this they considered themselves as mutually bound to partake in each others good or bad success.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every version of the Great Law of Peace makes frequent reference to family relationships. The rotiyanershon are &amp;quot;brothers&amp;quot; to one another, and it is relevant which side of the fire are the &amp;quot;elder brothers&amp;quot; and which are the &amp;quot;younger,&amp;quot; for the elder brothers are the &amp;quot;well,&amp;quot; with the authority to introduce matters into council first. The clan mothers are the &amp;quot;sisters&amp;quot; to the rotiyanershon. People of the same clan are &amp;quot;cousins,&amp;quot; no matter which nation they come from. All the people together are a family: they constitute one longhouse. The clans, which existed before the coming of the law, are an essential part of what weaves the Confederacy together. As Sakokwenionkwas Tom Porter said at the recital of the law in 2013, &amp;quot;we are relatives and family, and family does not hurt each other. They do not make blood shed.&amp;quot; Gibson&#039;s 1912 version confirms: &amp;quot;I decree that a single family we shall become, our various nations. Furthermore, I decree that now it is at one house, from now on you shall all sit down together there, you of the five nations. Moreover, I decree, as to its name, that we shall say *Kanuhsyuni*, which means that now there is a single house and a single family, we having united.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The use of kinship terms throughout the Great Law is not just a matter of respect. It is an integral, basic part of how the people view the world in which they live. It is impossible to understand the functioning of this legal system if one ignores or underestimates the fundamental role of kinship in shaping it and keeping it together. Morgan did not turn his back on law when he putatively invented modern anthropology by publishing his study of Haudenosaunee kinship. His writing demonstrated one of the lenses through which the people were able to see and construct the world, including their legal system:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Morgan pioneered the study of kinship systems, which became an important branch of anthropology. Anthropologists discovered that tribal peoples tend to see the world through the prism of kinship. Their mental world consists of various kinds of relatives, a view that sometimes extends to encompass all of society. In other words, if you are one of us you are addressed as a relative; if you are not addressed as a relative, you are not one of us. Kinship is then a kind of mental map, a map that differs sharply from one people to another. Morgan showed that you have to be able to read these maps in order to understand how other societies think and live.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kinship systems are part of the cultural scaffolding of Haudenosaunee society. They are part of the structure an outsider must understand in order to function within the society or appreciate its laws.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When Morgan set out to explain Haudenosaunee kinship systems, he was laying the foundation for a foreigner&#039;s understanding of the Great Law. It would be pointless for anyone to study the law and remain ignorant of the meaning of the kinship terms used throughout that law—because those terms contain so much of the law&#039;s meaning, as well as its fundamental assumptions about how society works. He wrote:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon an extended examination of their institutions, it will become apparent, that the League was established upon the principles, and was designed to be but an elaboration, of the Family Relationships. These relationships are older than the notions of society or government, and are consistent alike with the hunter, the pastoral and the civilized state. The several nations of the Iroquois, united, constituted one Family, dwelling together in one Long House; and these ties of family relationship were carried throughout their civil and social system, from individuals to tribes, from tribes to nations, and from the nations to the League itself, and bound them together in one common, indissoluble brotherhood.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These relationships, so novel and original, did not exist simply in theory, but were actual, and of constant recognition, and lay at the foundation of their political as well as social organization.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The League was in effect established, and rested for its stability, upon the natural faith of kindred.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The cohesive principle of the confederacy did not spring exclusively from the benefits of an alliance for mutual protection, but had a deeper foundation in the bond of kin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Just as the Great Law of Peace was constructed by people who saw the world through the lens of kinship and family—and used that vision as a source of strength for the law itself—so treaty relationships with other nations reflect the law&#039;s basis in kinship, are consistent with the law&#039;s processes and assumptions, and must be seen through the same lens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Europeans of the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries were not prepared for their encounter with a legal system that drew its metaphors and ideals from family terms. Some were not prepared to agree that this was a legal system at all: &amp;quot;From the time of first contact between Europeans and Indians the ideology of Europeans has insisted that tribal Indians had no &#039;true&#039; government because Indians ordered their communities by kin relationships instead of the impersonal, bureaucratic European state form. Only Europeans, in this view, had &#039;civil&#039; government, so only Europeans were civilized. Because politics were assumed to be exclusively associated with the civil government that Indians supposedly lacked, Europeans assumed further that Indians had no political history.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One of the first things Morgan noticed was that the Haudenosaunee have more terms for kinship than modern Europeans used. Other, earlier writers had failed to understand the differences between specific kinship terms and used more general European near-equivalents, leading to confusion at both personal and legal levels. Fenton stated: &amp;quot;Europeans never appreciated the widespread network of kinship that encompassed the Eastern Woodlands, and they misunderstood the values that Indians gave to the terms &#039;brothers,&#039; &#039;cousins,&#039; &#039;uncles/nephews,&#039; &#039;fathers/sons,&#039; assigning these terms the meanings conventional in Europe. The English and the Iroquois had little difficulty over the reciprocal term &#039;Brethren,&#039; although they missed the nuances of &#039;elder/younger&#039; siblings that were important in Iroquois society.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What do the terms used in the law mean?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Haudenosaunee languages, a word cannot stand on its own, as it does in English. A reference to a relative must include a reference to the person who is speaking—and often to that person&#039;s gender. It makes a difference whether the relative is aunt to a male or a female person: the words change. Thus, an older brother of a male person is rohtsi&#039;a; an older brother to a female person is ronwahtsi&#039;a. The requirement for precision is such that there is no equivalent for the vague English term &amp;quot;sibling.&amp;quot; Many Haudenosaunee terms imply a sense of respect rather than power, a sense of care rather than authority.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ihst&#039;a, &amp;quot;mother,&amp;quot; is another example of how Haudenosaunee society&#039;s different approach to relationships is reflected in the terms used in the languages. Kanatawakon David Maracle explains: &amp;quot;*Ihsta&#039;a*: this term is similar to that given for &#039;aunt&#039; as it is based on the matrilineal tradition that a woman&#039;s sisters were also considered to be a mother to her children. There is the variation *Istenha* used by some speakers to differentiate between the biological mother and her sisters . . . The term *Yethi&#039;nihstenha* is often used in place of *Onkwa&#039;nistenha* in situations of ceremonial reference or importance, such as in the designation *Yethi&#039;nihstenha Onhwentsyakekha . . .* &#039;our mother earth&#039; (lit.: &#039;she is to us mother of the earth&#039;).&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Blurring the words used for &amp;quot;mother&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;aunt&amp;quot; means, even today, that there is a great deal more &amp;quot;co-mothering&amp;quot; in Haudenosaunee communities than in Anglo North America. It has meant an easy transfer from sister to sister of children when families get in trouble. Informal adoptions even today require neither ceremony nor legal formality. Babies get used to being passed from woman to woman and are comfortable in many arms. Children have many aunties and uncles, not all related by blood or clan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In societies deeply involved with kinship, with metaphoric languages, the roles of relatives are sometimes explained by their synonyms. Thus, rakenahá:a, &amp;quot;he cares for your mind,&amp;quot; is descriptive of the role of an uncle as mentor, teacher, and guide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The language of Haudenosaunee diplomacy with other nations tends to be male, because it is the men who address one another across the fire. It uses terms based on kinship rather than &amp;quot;clan-ship,&amp;quot; because the clans are internal to the Haudenosaunee, while the international family relationships are both internal and external constructs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Christian tradition, it is &amp;quot;Our Father Who Art in Heaven.&amp;quot; Some feminists maintain that the patriarchal Judeo-Christian God has replaced the Goddess of earlier, matriarchal societies, paving the way for centuries of male aggression and paternalism. In Haudenosaunee tradition, a father is not irrelevant, but he is not considered to be one&#039;s closest male relative. He is not of one&#039;s own clan. The child&#039;s closest male relative—the man who carries a child around the longhouse when the child gets a name, singing his own atonwa —is the uncle, the child&#039;s mother&#039;s brother.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Seeking simplicity, some contemporary Haudenosaunee have concluded that one&#039;s father&#039;s family was irrelevant in &amp;quot;classical&amp;quot; times, and that only one&#039;s clan relatives were considered &amp;quot;real&amp;quot; relatives. The law does not support this view. While it is clear that paternal relatives were not considered as close as maternal ones, there was a real relationship with one&#039;s father&#039;s family, part of that wide web of relationships that protected and helped each individual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The law makes explicit provision for the link between father and child. According to one of Newhouse&#039;s versions of the law, a father with great love for a child could give that child a name from his family and clan. Today, as familiarity with the law has decreased and a sense of strict matrilinearity has set in, there has been little discussion about a father giving a child a name. Does this patrilinear name replace the child&#039;s original name, or is it intended to be an additional identifier, an additional layer of connection and protection? Is there a special naming ceremony—or is it the same process as any other naming? The possibility of patrilinear names creates opportunity to provide traditional identity to people who lack clans through their mothers, a means of reunifying communities divided by conflicts between Haudenosaunee law and Canadian federal legislation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most modern Haudenosaunee, while conscious of both extended family and clan relationships, live in single-family dwellings, in nuclear families in which the father is the main breadwinner. As a result, there has been change in Haudenosaunee perceptions of family; statements of relationships in the Kayanerenkó:wa reflect the intentions and realities of a time when the people were living in matrilocal bark longhouses. Some terms used in the law often carry legal baggage that is not reflected in the current society of the people who claim to follow the law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Despite the erosion of Haudenosaunee languages, the rise of nuclear families, and economic change, there remains a strong sense of community and family. It manifests itself most strongly in times of trouble, when people pull together to help those who have suffered misfortune. *We help one another*.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Helping One Another&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is not only the human world that the Haudenosaunee see in kinship terms. Careful attention to the opening thanksgiving alerts the listener to the fact that we humans are related to the entire natural world. In acknowledging and thanking them, the earth is addressed as our mother, the moon as our grandmother, the sun as our elder brother, the animals as our brothers, and the Thunderers as our grandfathers. This social and legal web of protection and obligation acts as a prism for understanding our place, as humans and human societies, in the web of life.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When Haudenosaunee lawmakers say they follow &amp;quot;natural law,&amp;quot; it is not in the sense that philosophers and ethicists understand—that there are constant laws of the universe reflected in nature. Rather, they are saying that the inspiration for principles of the laws of the Haudenosaunee is drawn from the structures and conduct the people see in the natural world around them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the fields, the Haudenosaunee planted corn, beans, and squash together in mounds. They are called &amp;quot;the Three Sisters,&amp;quot; because they help one another. The corn supports the climbing beans. The squash spreads across the ground, and its leaves shelter the roots of the corn and beans and reduce weeds. Each of the three takes a different set of nutrients from the soil, and each gives back what is needed by the other two. They help one another.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the forests, the wolves help the deer by culling the weak and the sick, but also by keeping populations down to prevent overgrazing; the deer help the wolves by providing them sustenance. The world abounds with complex symbiotic relationships, with plants and animals that depend upon one another in the web of life. Sotsisowah wrote:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All the beings upon the Earth follow the Natural or Real ways—the ways of the Creation. And all of those beings are related in that they belong to the family of Creation. They support one another. The Oak Tree gives of its oxygen that the Rabbit may breathe, and the Rabbit gives of its flesh that the Fox may live. And the Fox, in death, returns to the Earth from which the Grasses feed, and the Grass gives of its flesh that the Rabbit may live. All things, in their real ways, support life. It is only when things leave their real ways that they cease to support Life—that they break away from the Life Cycle. It is the way of Creation that all things exist in real ways, and in the world of human beings, it is necessary that all things maintain real ways for all life to continue as we know it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In family relations with humans, in describing the way government should work, and in explaining the web of the natural world, the Haudenosaunee use several expressions to indicate that &amp;quot;they help one another.&amp;quot; Among the most fundamental is tha&#039;teioneniienawa&#039;khontie, which embodies the spirit of cooperation implicit in two people upholding something together. Other terms used include kaya&#039;takehuháhtsera, to be helping someone&#039;s body (as in assisting with physical healing) and serihwawá:se, to be helping with an issue or speech (containing orihwa, a matter, issue, or speech).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mutual aid is part of Haudenosaunee society, not just a philosophy of its government. Carol Cornelius explained Haudenosaunee land use in similar terms:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee system of land use was based on the philosophy that the land was given to the people for everyone to use and work together on the land. The cornfields were communal, but it was also allowable for individuals to plant their own individual fields, but they had to continue to do their share of work in the communal fields. A portion of the communal crops were reserved for ceremonial usage. Planting the cornfields was a community event. Parker describes how the women chose a woman leader who arranged the helpers and supervised the planting. An ordinary planting day consisted of planting the field, with the woman leader, the owner of the field, providing a feast of corn soup. All of this work was &amp;quot;accompanied by singing, laughing, joking and inoffensive repartee, and the utmost humor prevails, topped off by a splash in the water to remove dust and fatigue.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Parker refers to this communal work as a &amp;quot;mutual aid society known as *(in the) Good Rule they assist one another.*&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Helping one another&amp;quot; is a fundamental concept of the Kayanerenkó:wa, and also a fundamental concept of Haudenosaunee society. In the bark longhouse, the two families on either side of each hearth were to &amp;quot;help each other.&amp;quot; It is a relationship that every person would see in operation almost every day. The relationship is extrapolated to the council level: when an issue is brought into the council, the two sets of brothers, across the symbolic fire from each other, help each another deal with the matter. Together, they build a solution. This is in stark contrast to British-style parliaments, where a matter introduced by the government is, by definition, tested and assailed by the &amp;quot;Loyal Opposition.&amp;quot; In part, the spirit of Parliament or Congress is adversarial because the opposition parties hope to defeat the government, either in votes or in the next election, and to become the next government. Their criticism is often constructive, but it remains adversarial because it is always tinged with ambition. In the parliamentary system, cooperation is a by-product rather than a founding principle. In the councils of the Haudenosaunee, the chiefs are installed for life. The two sides have permanent places, and there is no room for partisan ambition: the Mohawks and Senecas have no desire to become the Cayugas and Oneidas, and could not do so if they tried. There is therefore more room for the spirit of mutual aid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Anthropologists and ethnohistorians have sometimes described this spirit of mutual aid as &amp;quot;reciprocity,&amp;quot; and indeed reciprocity is an important element of how it works. But the term falls far short of describing the spirit of good will that motivates and infuses helping each other at all levels of society and the law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Charles Darwin argued in 1871 that &amp;quot;a selfish and contentious people will not cohere, and without coherence nothing can be effected. A tribe rich in the above qualities (&#039;reasoning . . . and foresight . . . the habit of aiding his fellows . . . the habit of performing benevolent actions . . . social virtues . . . and social instincts&#039;) would spread and be victorious over other tribes. . . . Thus the social and moral qualities would tend slowly to advance and be diffused throughout the world.&amp;quot; Traditional Haudenosaunee, hearing these words, would immediately think of their own symbols: the coherence of the five arrows bound together, the emblem of the unity of the Five Nations; and the Great White Roots of the Tree of Peace, advancing the social and moral qualities of the Great Law of Peace to the four directions, throughout the world. They might also consider the crucial difference between coherence and coercion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beyond government, traditional Haudenosaunee society is a web of relationships within and between families and clans, creating relations and obligations of mutual aid and support. The ceremony of Condolence is the culmination of this spirit: the clear-minded ones have the obligation and responsibility to help the downcast ones in their time of need. Mutual aid and support allow society and the entire world to continue to function. Condoling the afflicted and grieving is an obligation: &amp;quot;Wherever it might be that one whose mind is left fresh and untouched shall at once readjust the several things again.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It was the families, and not the offender and the victims, who conducted the peacemaking that constituted Haudenosaunee restorative criminal law. The presentation of wampum to &amp;quot;cover the grave&amp;quot; has sometimes been called &amp;quot;compensation,&amp;quot; especially since there is a tradition that a woman&#039;s death requires twice as much wampum as a man&#039;s, but it is rather an element of pacification:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As all quarrels were generally reconciled by the relatives of the parties, long-cherished animosities, and consequently homicides, were infrequent in ancient times. The present of white wampum was not in the nature of a compensation for the life of the deceased, but of a regretful confession of the crime, with a petition for forgiveness. It was a peace-offering, the acceptance of which was pressed by mutual friends, and under such influences that a reconciliation was usually effected, except, perhaps, in aggravated cases of premeditated murder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . . if as warrior kills people, or he rapes a woman, or he steals, as to that, this is what the chiefs should do; they should deliberate carefully, and if they find him guilty, then they will pick the matter up to consider sanctions, first trying to reach agreement for a settlement in order to keep the peace; and if it is impossible to reach agreement between the families—that is the people [lineage] of the guilty one and the other side, that is the family of the person who got killed—if it is impossible to agree, then the chiefs . . . will decide if they will cover it by placing another person there who will replace the one they have lost, the people of his family.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Iroquoian societies also developed what anthropologists called &amp;quot;mutual aid societies,&amp;quot; more or less formal entities with a practical and economic spirit. Among the Cherokees, they were called *gadugis* and were an open and integral part of the way the towns functioned; when the Cherokees adopted some Euro-American technologies, the *gadugis* also evolved. Haudenosaunee mutual aid societies tended to be more informal, and certainly less visible to outsiders. Few written records of them remain, yet it is clear that they were part of what helped society run smoothly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For nearly a decade in the latter half of the seventeenth century, according to Haudenosaunee oral tradition, the Mohawks and Oneidas concentrated on fighting the French, and the Senecas and Cayugas provided the two eastern nations with food. It would not be fifty elderly men in Onondaga who would operate the sophisticated, extended network that would be required to accomplish this. It would be a complex but mostly informal system of determined people, working together, in ways that would not have been obvious or even visible to European observers. Vestiges of that system are still functioning in Haudenosaunee longhouses and communities today: they appear most overtly in crises, spontaneously and generously assisting individuals, families and communities in times of need.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; The Structure of the Law&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Kayanerenkó:wa can be conveniently divided into two quite distinct parts. The first part is the narrative that describes how the Peacemaker brought his message of peace, power, and righteousness to the people of five nations and persuaded them to abandon bloodshed and adopt peace, order, and good government as their guiding principles. The second part, the &amp;quot;legislative&amp;quot; part of the law, was formulated once the chiefs met in the first council, and describes the form and rules of the government they created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The two parts are inseparable as a description of the legal system. The narrative is not only a story: it describes how the Peacemaker achieved a rational and persuasive dialogue with people who stood in the way of peace, and his methods became living examples for later generations to use. The narrative describes the thinking behind the ceremony of Condolence, the ultimate, compassionate way to restore rationality and the threshold to any lawmaking. It sets out the principles of inclusiveness, mutual aid, generosity, and reciprocity. It confirms family as the foundation of the legal system. The narrative is also a template for the creation of consensus, unity of mind. It sets a path to be followed by Haudenosaunee government in every council and in all dealings with other nations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Those who would seek something more legalistic and less legendary ought to recall that this is a *constitution*. That is, it &amp;quot;constitutes&amp;quot; a people and a way of living. As such, it ought not to be a dry recitation of processes and divisions of power between levels of government, but instead ought to embody the people&#039;s dreams and visions, songs and hopes. It ought to reflect the people, as they were at the time of its making, and as they hope to become, within its framework.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The legislative, less narrative part of the law describes the structure and procedures of a system of government. It describes the way the fifty chiefs are divided among the five nations, and how the council functions. It provides rules for eligibility and appointment of chiefs, and the ratification of those appointments. It describes the checks and balances that protect the system against abuses of power. It sets limits to authority and provides for the removal of those who violate the rules or cannot function properly. It provides for the amendment of the constitution, in ways consistent with its original architecture. It describes how foreigners will be dealt with—both foreign individuals and foreign nations, through foreign relations, war and peace, and immigration. The constitution is a real constitution, allocating authority in an organized, thoughtful manner and creating principled governmental structures that are designed to reflect the constant values of its framers while retaining the ability to evolve to meet changing needs. Like the best constitutions in the world, it expresses not only the legal and governmental systems of the people, but also their principles and visions. Unlike most current nation-state constitutions, but consistent with the culture of a people with a sense of the constant presence of the spirit world, it contains warnings about changes and challenges to come.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Both parts of the Kayanerenkó:wa reflect the powerful vision of the Peacemaker—the desire to create a society based on peace and reason that could provide for and protect the coming generations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In some versions, once the Peacemaker and his allies establish peace, the chiefs take over finishing the law, responding to questions from the Peacemaker to create governmental structures. The dialogue reflects the process of consensus building that takes place in a Confederacy Council. In a sense, the chiefs create the protocols of council by performing them in their initial conversations. In other versions, the lawmaking around structures and processes is also the Peacemaker&#039;s work and his gift to the people.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Without the legislative part of the Great Law, the narrative would be the history of a peacemaking without the stable institutions it needed to continue. It is rare that the person who inspires the revolution is also successful in establishing a secure system of government in the revolution&#039;s wake. It is rarer that such a person shows an aptitude for governing. The Peacemaker did not govern. He left when his work was done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Certainty and Constancy&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Just as not having a good relationship with one&#039;s neighbour might cause one to consider preparing for possible confrontation, having a legal system that contains uncertain elements leaves room for doubts that can blossom into precipitate action, or vacuums in which anger, ambition, or greed can seek lodging. The Kayanerenkó:wa guards against this by providing many constant factors: known building blocks of the law. Constant and predictable factors remove risk and uncertainty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are a fixed number of core families and a fixed number of rotiyanershon. These men have constant names (titles) and constant roles. Their clan mothers and helpers are known. Each of these people knows what is expected of them. The council fire is in a fixed location. There is a permanent firekeeper: the Onondagas have fulfilled that role for centuries and know what their duties are. The nations have set roles in the procedures of council.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each time a matter is institutionalized in this way, it prevents potential problems. It removes ambition, from both individuals and nations, by limiting candidates and the pools from which they can be drawn. It clarifies expectations—so that a person knows what they must do, and other people know what to expect or require from them. It sets limits to authority.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While the possibility—even necessity—of change is built into the architecture of the Great Law, that architecture itself provides a framework, a set of constant principles to ensure that change is consistent, careful, and conducted so that the certainties are maintained. The Longhouse can be extended, but only in ways consistent with its existing architecture. In this, the symbolic and legal Longhouse reflects the structures that the people would see every day: many of the longhouses that have been examined by archaeologists show evidence of having been extended during their short lifetimes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Having a legal system brought by a messenger from the Creator, though, means that its modern practitioners are often reluctant to effect even consistent change. Traditionalists are often pessimists about the future and optimists about the past, said Mark Twain. The people who maintain the Kayanerenkó:wa are certainly traditionalists. A tendency to focus on details rather than principles, as an aspect of maintaining and protecting the law, and a great sense of conservative caution accentuate an unwillingness to risk change. Many would rather have it said of them that they were faithful to the Peacemaker&#039;s prescriptions than that the changes they made caused collapse. The very constancy and certainty that prevent controversy tend to heighten their reluctance to make necessary changes. Yet change was clearly an element of the Peacemaker&#039;s vision. After all, his greatest accomplishment was change, from a time of darkness and war to one of light and peace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Confrontation Is a Last Resort&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Great Peace emerged from a time of bloodshed and feuding, in which vengeance and confrontation were often the first means of resolving any issue. The processes and structures of the Kayanerenkó:wa changed that. They make confrontation and violence a last resort, by placing deliberate, considered steps in the path of possible confrontations. As a matter of principle, in councils and negotiations, the easiest matters are dealt with first, and the most difficult (and therefore most potentially explosive) issues are approached last, though the commitment remains that what John Mohawk called &amp;quot;the rock hard things&amp;quot; must be dealt with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker placed Thadadaho towards the end of his work, since he knew this would be the most difficult task and would require actual confrontation. He also made sure that, when the confrontation occurred, the forces of peace had become so overwhelming in their physical and spiritual power that there could be no effective response. Thadadaho was not killed: he was transformed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another example of slowing the path to anger is the three requests that are made before any extreme action is taken. An errant chief is asked formally to return to the proper path, and the requests escalate, becoming gradually more public and more urgent. Only after repeated requests is the chief removed. In the same way, foreign nations are gently and repeatedly asked to join the Confederacy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The law requires not only a good mind and deliberate thought, but also the taking of specific steps in any situation that could result in confrontation or anger. These steps deliberately slow the people down, compel careful thought, and prevent hasty or passionate actions. In assigning particular tasks or characteristics to each title holder, as well, the structure of the law makes sure that reflection and caution are imposed within the council by its own members. When, in council, one of the chiefs asks whether all sides of an issue have been considered, he may be cautious and rational, but he may also be fulfilling a role set for the man bearing his title five centuries ago. If an issue inflames passions, the council may decide to postpone a decision, putting the matter &amp;quot;under the pillow&amp;quot; until minds have cooled off. Confrontation in council can lead to the Onondagas &amp;quot;covering the fire,&amp;quot; ending the council for the day. Deliberate avoidance of internal conflict cuts both ways: it creates a legal system that avoids internal aggression, but it also makes for a slow process that sometimes avoids difficult, divisive issues. One needs to be reminded of the commitment to deal with the rock-hard things.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;##&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; PART III - Bringing the Great Peace&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Patterns and Principles in the Narrative&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most versions of the Kayanerenkó:wa can be divided into two parts, the &amp;quot;narrative&amp;quot; and the &amp;quot;legislative&amp;quot;—the first part telling the story of how the law was made, and the second describing how the details of the workings of the government were created. The narrative part of the law discloses a pattern, and the elements of the pattern are first set out in the story of the Peacemaker and the Cannibal. The Peacemaker&#039;s journey is recounted as a series of successful encounters with difficult, powerful, often irrational people. Only after overcoming those obstacles could the law be set in place. Both the narrative and legislative aspects of the story of the law reveal &amp;quot;one protracted effort of legislation.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At each obstacle in the story of the making of the law, the Peacemaker met a person who was acting irrationally. He met the Cannibal who was killing and eating people; Tsikonsaseh who was encouraging destruction and war; Thadadaho who was ruling through fear; Hiawatha who had become a hermit with his mind clouded by grief. The narrative of the Great Law is a story of the Peacemaker meeting people whose minds are, for one reason or another, not working properly. Often these people are in places that block the path to peace: Tsikonsaseh on the Warriors&#039; Path; Thadadaho at Onondaga Lake. In each case, the Peacemaker does something to create an opening, a moment of rationality. For the Cannibal, who had lost contact with reality, the Peacemaker resorts to a trick to jolt him back to his senses. For Hiawatha, who had suffered great loss, it is the compassionate ceremony of Condolence. For Tsikonsaseh, the woman who promoted war, it is simple rational persuasion and conversation. For Thadadaho, the last great obstacle to the peace, it is the Song of Peace and all the spiritual power of the united people, while transforming Thadadaho&#039;s political opposition with an offer of political authority and responsibility. To the Seneca warriors, the Peacemaker offers the opportunity to become protectors of the peace rather than its destroyers. A different device is used every time. But the template is the same: to think and observe carefully; and then to approach the irrational or fearful person and do whatever it takes to create a moment or opportunity of sanity, an opening through which the rest of the message of peace, power, and righteousness can enter and take root. In some cases, sweetness and reason are enough. In other cases, it takes trickery, demonstrations of courage, or displays of spiritual power. What is the name for a law with &amp;quot;whatever it takes&amp;quot; at its heart? Pragmatism, perhaps. The Haudenosaunee law of peace assumes that you will not achieve peace. But it assumes that you can reach enough of it to have something to work on so that you can &amp;quot;take the conflict from warfare to a place where, as they used to say, thinking can replace violence, and where the conversation about peace is ongoing.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Peacemaker met people who were behaving rationally, they were often also lost, frightened, and desperate. They had covered their fires so the smoke would not reveal their location to their enemies. They yearned for peace, but did not know how to get there. The Peacemaker provided a way to deal with the ones who were the sources of the conflict, and enlisted the help and commitment of the right-thinking, clear-minded people: Odatsehte, Tekarihoken, and the other chiefs. He also enlisted the help of the people that he personally had caused to return to their right minds, converts like Hiawatha and Tsikonsaseh.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some of the people he restored to rationality became leaders as well as walking examples of the power of the Good Message. Others, like the Cannibal, simply stopped killing, and went on their way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Great Law created both a technique and an obligation to expand the peace, using the same pragmatic, rational approach: making relatives out of strangers. It enabled and spread the structure of mutual obligation, &amp;quot;helping each other,&amp;quot; that flows from being relatives.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is the other thing the Peacemaker did—and this is a little more complex. He came into a society in which the people already believed that they were related to everything. Their entire world was capable of functioning on the basis of kinship, and kinship was inextricably linked to mutual aid. This included their relations with the natural world—every part of it can be addressed as a relative. Our Mother the Earth, our Grandmother the Moon, our Elder Brother the Sun, our brothers and sisters the animals and birds, our Grandfathers the Thunderers. Within the village, every person could be addressed as a relative. Being related, to these people, meant a dynamic, two-way relationship. It meant reciprocity. It meant, for example, that tobacco and respect would be given to the Thunderers, but they would bring the rain for the crops. The concept that would link all the natural world to all the human world is that &amp;quot;they help one another&amp;quot;—like the Three Sisters, corn, beans, and squash, help one another. Within the village, the people also experienced kinship as not only the way to peace and stability but also as cooperation. Any individual, waking up in the morning, would see another family across the fire in the longhouse from his family. This other family would be relatives, and the relationship between the two families would be that &amp;quot;they help one another.&amp;quot; The Peacemaker politically knocked down the village palisades so that the family relations were extended across the nations, so that everyone became family, the people of a single longhouse. Then, using the same concept, he created a way to extend it even further through the Great White Roots of Peace, so that any person or nation the Haudenosaunee encountered in the world would have a way to become a relative and become part of the Great Peace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In contrast to this is the uncertainty resulting from encountering people with whom one has no relationship at all. How does one relate to them? If one cannot address them as relatives, they are strangers. One does not have any way of knowing how they will behave. No rules apply to them. They are fellow humans, potential friends. They are also fair game for war, since no rules of kinship restrain either side. The edges of the landscape would always shimmer with the uncertainty and danger that came from the presence of unrelated peoples. But the Great Law, and its Great White Roots, provided the technique, the obligation, and the template for transforming unrelated peoples into relatives and for spreading the peace. It contained an explanation of the thinking, the logic, behind proceeding in this way. The narrative part of the Great Law also provided examples of the kinds of devices that would work.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In building a working legal system, the Peacemaker took the institutions that the people already had, and strengthened and expanded the ones that worked well. He spread the brotherhood of clans across all the nations. The chiefs were transformed from local and national figures into Confederacy leaders, and eventually into ambassadors to other nations. He ensured that each family had a voice in the council. He got rid of the things that were causing trouble, if he could. The hunting grounds became a shared bowl or dish instead of a source of friction or competition. He transformed other harmful things: the warriors became protectors of the Confederacy rather than a threat; Thadadaho became a guardian of the processes of peace rather than an obstacle to them. As for the harmful things he could not get rid of, he built safeguards against their influence. If gossip would never go away, he at least provided that the chiefs would have skins so thick it would not affect their thinking, and that they would be deaf to the twittering of the little birds of rumour in the branches overhead. If tempers would flare, he devised council processes to minimize their effect.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker also removed a major source of conflict by bringing a new way for people to deal with death. He had come into a society where the dead were revered and sorely missed, and where their voices called out for revenge against their killers. Mourning could lead to bloody retaliation. Death will never go away, so society needs to learn how to deal with it. With the ceremony of Condolence, he brought a way to put the dead away, out of mind, out of hearing, through a process that brings all the people together, compassionately and with an overlay of peace. Through the law, death was transformed from a source of conflict to an opportunity to reaffirm and re-enact the peacemaking.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The narrative of the making of the law also provides a template for solving social problems. The Peacemaker began by taking his message to people he believed would support it. He worked carefully to build support, and the people he had enlisted helped along the way. By the time of the confrontation with Thadadaho, he was able to call upon the political, moral, and spiritual support of all the people united. The procedure of council—building consensus by having a matter considered in a deliberate sequence, one nation at a time—reflects this approach. One meaning of &amp;quot;Haudenosaunee&amp;quot; is &amp;quot;they are people making a longhouse,&amp;quot; and this recognizes that the work, like the conversation about peace, is always ongoing, never finished. The metaphor of building is reflected in the longhouse as the symbol of the people: it takes collaboration and effort to build it, and then to maintain it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the making of the law, the result of confrontation is not victory, in which the loser is relegated to an inferior status, but unity, in which there are no longer any losers. It is transformation from strangers and enemies to friends and relatives. Where the law describes the conversion of an individual, it may be reasonable to conclude that person brought with him or her relatives and followers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The law contains its own maintenance mechanisms. It provides that it must be kept in mind in order for it to guide the people&#039;s minds, so it contains numerous opportunities for contemporary people and their leaders to re-enact and renew the original thoughts and actions that brought about the peace. Repeating the actions of the ancestors, refreshing the peacemaking, the law becomes not only theirs but ours. Symbols of the law—the fire, the longhouse, the pine tree, the eagle—were things the people would see or use every day, and these reminders would also serve as maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; The Peacemaker&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker was born on the north shore of Lake Ontario, &amp;quot;in the land which was called Tkahaa&#039;nayg&#039;n, where there are bottom lands, but which at the present time is called Ganyéngeh, at the flint place (i.e., Mohawk place), situated on the north side of the great lake, originally called Sganyadaiîyo [Ontario], &amp;quot;the beautiful great lake.&amp;quot; Most Haudenosaunee agree that the Peacemaker&#039;s birthplace was somewhere on the shores of the Bay of Quinte.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He was either a Mohawk or a Wendat (Huron). His mother Kahetehsuk (She Walks Ahead) and his grandmother Kaheto&#039;ktha&#039; (End of the Field) had gone to live apart from other people, for their own safety. Killing and scalping had become commonplace. The cycle of war seemed endless. Oren Lyons and John Mohawk describe it:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[It was] our darkest hour when the good message of how to live had been cast aside and naked power ruled, fueled by vengeance and blood lust. A great war of attrition engulfed the lands, and women and children cowered in fear of their own men. The leaders were fierce and merciless. They were fighting in blind rage. Nations, homes and families were destroyed, and the people were scattered. It was a dismal world of dark disasters where there seemed to be no hope. It was a raging proof of what inhumanity man is capable of when the laws and principles of life are thrown away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This was a time of great sorrow and terror for the Haudenosaunee. All order and safety had broken down completely and the rule of the headhunter dominated the culture. When a man or woman died, their relatives hired a soothsayer who then interpreted the death as the result of the magical charms of a specific other. The aggrieved family then sought vengeance and a member set forth with the purpose of finding the unsuspecting and arguably innocent offender and exacting revenge. That killing sparked a spiral of vengeance and reprisal which found assassins stalking the northeastern woodlands in a never-ending senseless bloodletting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The two women lived alone for several years. For them, isolation meant safety.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kahetesuk became pregnant. Kaheto&#039;ktha&#039; was angry, especially since her daughter would not name the father of the expected child. She began to mistreat her daughter, and the two women got along poorly until the old woman had a dream.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereupon she questioned her daughter, saying &amp;quot;Who, then, is the father of the child you two are going to have?&amp;quot; Then Kahetehsuk said, &amp;quot;Mother, I do not know what happened nor how it is,&amp;quot; but the old woman did not believe what she said, her daughter. Thereupon the old woman began to get angry, and said, &amp;quot;Probably, it is not true what she said, Kahetehsuk.&amp;quot; That is how it was, every day and every night the old woman got angry, it seems, when she questioned her daughter . . . that is the way it was for quite some time: both the old woman and her daughter were unhappy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This, then, is what happened when it was night and they were asleep. The old woman dreamed and she saw a man arrive where they had their house, and he said, &amp;quot;I have a message along which I shall tell you: you should stop the kinds of thoughts you are having. Indeed, your thinking is that it is probably not true what she says, your daughter. This, indeed, is the reason why it is not wholesome, your preoccupation with her confinement and her saying &#039;Indeed, I don&#039;t know where it came from nor how it is.&#039; Now I will tell you what happened to your daughter&#039;s life, for it is true that she does not know what happened. This is the reason why you should now stop: don&#039;t cause your daughter to worry. Moreover, you should ease her mind by apologizing to her. Actually, a great thing has happened, for he is appointing your daughter to be the instrument of a male child&#039;s birth. He is sending him, the one you all believe is the Ruler, and he is coming from the sky above the earth; and he will be born of Kahetehsuk herself. Moreover, when he is born, the boy, I will give him a name; you will say, Tekanawita. And when you will see him, the two of you will be kind to him, and don&#039;t bother him when, in the course of time, he becomes a man. In fact, he is going to be working here beneath and on the other side of the sun. Moreover, once he is born, Tekanawita, he will grow rapidly, and it will not be long before you two will see many unusual things. He will reveal his powers, and all of the people will acknowledge them when they see Tekanawita.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A boy without a known father is an important figure in several core narratives of the Haudenosaunee. The first of these children were the twins born of the daughter of Sky Woman (though some accounts state that Sky Woman&#039;s own pregnancy also occurred without apparent male participation). The twins then proceeded to create many of the plants and animals that surround us on earth; the &amp;quot;right-handed twin&amp;quot; created human beings. Centuries later, another fatherless child brought the clans and the ceremonies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Though a child derives its clan from its mother, Haudenosaunee meta-narratives, the Creation story and the Great Law, suggest that a person&#039;s father was important, and that fatherlessness was unusual. It would be strange for a people so fascinated with balance (between light and dark, good and evil, male and female) not to seek the balance brought by the mother and father in a family.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While the spirit announced to the grandmother that the Creator had &amp;quot;appointed&amp;quot; her daughter to be the mother of his messenger, there is no suggestion that the Creator was the child&#039;s father. The Peacemaker is not a son of God.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker stands on a long, clear path of Haudenosaunee tradition: fatherless boys have a special connection with the Creator. They are chosen to bring messages and teaching to the people.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The grandmother consumed with doubt, shame, and anger is also an archetype: in the Creation story, Sky Woman was angry at her daughter for becoming pregnant, and pressed her to identify the man who had slept with her. Like Kahetehsuk, she was not able to say who he was, and this made her mother even angrier. Is the anger the result of the fact that the girl is pregnant, or the result of the woman&#039;s sense that her daughter is not telling the truth, and thus betraying her trust? If the issue is trust and not the pregnancy, the lesson involved is different. Gibson&#039;s 1899 version makes this clear: &amp;quot;Then at that time the old woman become depressed in her mind. She said, &#039;Certainly you do not love me, and the reason is that it is impossible for you to tell me the truth about what I have asked you.&#039;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Newhouse&#039;s account, the grandmother&#039;s anger at her daughter&#039;s unexplained pregnancy moved from attitude to action after the child was born:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;You refuse to tell me the father of the child,&amp;quot; she said, &amp;quot;and how do you know that great calamity will not befall us, and our nation? You must drown the child.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So then the mother took the child to the bay and chopped a hole in the ice where she customarily drew water and thrust him in, but when night came the child was found at his mother&#039;s bosom. So then the mother took the child again and threw him in the bay but at night the child returned. Then the third time the grandmother herself took the child and drowned him but in the morning the child nestled as before on its mother&#039;s own bosom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So the grandmother marveled that the child, her grandson, could not be drowned. Then she said to her daughter: &amp;quot;Mother, now nurse your child for he may become an important man. He can not be drowned, we know, and you have borne him without having marriage with any man. Now I have never heard of such an occurrence nor has the world known of it before.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The grandmother does not try to kill the infant directly: she relies on the waters to do the job (and in other versions, the fire and the earth). But the forces of the natural world refuse to harm him, just as later the Mohawks do not lay a hand on him but rely on gravity and the churning waters below Cohoes Falls to drown him, and once again nature does not injure him.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the case of the twins in the Creation story, the grandmother, Sky Woman, continued to dislike Nikarondase, perhaps because Tawiskaron blamed his brother for his mother&#039;s death. She sided with his brother Tawiskaron in many ways, including in the crucial bowl game that decided the question of whether life would continue to exist.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the story of the Great Law, however, the grandmother repents of her hatred for the child—or of her distrust of her daughter—and begs forgiveness from her daughter. The daughter does forgive her, and harmony is restored. The story is an important precedent for the thinking behind the Law. The Law requires collaboration between two sides; neither repentance without forgiveness, nor forgiveness without repentance, will restore peace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Gibson&#039;s versions, since the grandmother took no action against the baby, she regretted only her attitude of distrust: &amp;quot;Then when the old woman awakened again she at once told her daughter, saying, &#039;I am thankful that you told me the truth concerning the thing of which you did tell me. Indeed you do not know the source of the child that you are about to bring forth. So now it has been revealed to me in a dream as a certainty. So now I repent my former attitude. Now in truth a most important responsibility has been put on you.&#039;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Chiefs&#039; Version confirms that it was the grandmother&#039;s feeling that she could not trust her daughter, and not the pregnancy itself, that was the source of the anger: &amp;quot;My daughter, I ask you to pardon me for all the ill-treatment I have given you, because I have now been satisfied that you told me the truth when you told me that you did not know how you got the child which you are about to deliver.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Repent&amp;quot; is the word used most frequently nowadays to describe an important concept in Haudenosaunee tradition: the action of a person whose mind has caused him or her to do or think something profoundly wrong, and who is now sincerely sorry. In the Christian tradition, one repents for sinful acts. &amp;quot;Sin&amp;quot; is not an aspect of Haudenosaunee law. The grandmother&#039;s repentance is the first step in an essential part of Haudenosaunee peacemaking; her daughter&#039;s acceptance of that apology is the other side of it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The prediction of the Peacemaker&#039;s future life, in his grandmother&#039;s dream, is not merely a counterpart of the Christian Annunciation. Dreams have always been important to the Haudenosaunee as a way of communicating with the spirit world.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Why His Name Is Not Spoken&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It may seem odd that a name that is known to everyone is used so seldom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the Peacemaker&#039;s work in forming the Confederacy and its government was finished, he said it was time for him to leave. According to some people, he went away to the east—and returned some years later with holes in his hands and feet, saying &amp;quot;look what they did to me over there.&amp;quot; Most accounts, though, say he went into the earth, covering himself with leaves and bark. &amp;quot;I shall now, therefore, go home, conceal and cover myself with bark.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He told the people that he would never be far away: should the darkest times come, when there seemed to be no hope, they should call his name in the bushes, and he would return:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If at any time through the negligence and carelessness of the lords, they fail to carry out the principles of the Good Tidings of Peace and Power and the rules and regulations of the Confederacy and the people are reduced to poverty and great suffering, I will return.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[Call on my name in the bushes] . . . if ever the law shall cease to function . . . then the law is nearing its end; and then again it is possible that I will stand there among your people here on earth.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Let my name never be named (as an official of the League). No one shall be appointed to succeed me, as others can advise you; but having founded the Extended-House, a work which no other person could have done, I shall be seen no more of any man.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That may be why many people tend not to use his name at all, while others use it only at particular times. It is not yet time to call his name in the bushes. It would be wrong to bring him back inadvertently. It is also bad luck to misuse his name: &amp;quot;And it shall so happen that when you hear my name mentioned disrespectfully without reason or just cause, but spoken in levity, you shall then know that you are on the verge of trouble and sorrow. And it shall be that the only time when it shall be proper for my name to be mentioned is when the Condolence ceremonies are being performed or when the Good Tidings of Peace and Power which I have established and organized are being discussed or rehearsed.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This textbook is an instance in which the law is being discussed. According to the Chiefs&#039; Version, therefore, it is probably proper to use his name in a legal text that discusses the Kayanerenkó:wa, especially when directly citing the law&#039;s various versions. Even so, I find myself reluctant to use his name, or to use it too often. . . . At the 2013 recital of the law, his name was used, and hearing the name used, in public, made it seem new and sparkling. The name had not been worn out with overuse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since the Peacemaker had not died, his name was not to be given to anyone else, and his title in council was not to be given to anyone else. He had no successor, for he did not die.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deyonwe&#039;ton Jake Thomas noted that there is &amp;quot;no Iroquois equivalent for the most often used English alias: &amp;quot;The Peacemaker.&amp;quot; Avoiding the use of the Peacemaker&#039;s name has led reciters of the law to the use of a number of substitutes: Hononhshonne:donh, &amp;quot;He constructed the house&amp;quot;; Tandaho&#039;nehshan, &amp;quot;He has no father&amp;quot;; Honekho:wanenh, &amp;quot;He has a great mind.&amp;quot; They are descriptions, not euphemisms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; The Peacemaker Meets His Own People First&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boy grew rapidly. After a while he asked his mother and grandmother to introduce him to other people, &amp;quot;to see people of our own kind.&amp;quot; The two women moved back to the nearest village, where the grandmother announced the dream she had been given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the children began walking around, and more especially, when they played, some of the children repeatedly quarrelled, and they wanted to fight. Thereupon Tekanawita prevented them, saying, &amp;quot;You will stop it because it is sinful for people to hurt one another; you especially, for you are all relatives, and so it is necessary for you to be kind to one another as well as to other people, those you know and those people you do not know; and you should respect them equally—all of the people—you should be kind to everyone.&amp;quot; Thereupon the children were amazed at what Tekanawita was saying. When they got back to where they had their homes, they repeated what he had said, Tekanawita. Thereupon the elders said, &amp;quot;Now, indeed, they are beginning, the surprising events we heard about that he foretold, Tekanawita, for never, in fact, has it been the case that we might hear someone say, &#039;It is sinful for people to hurt one another,&#039; nor has anyone ever said, &#039;You should all respect one another,&#039; nor has someone said, &#039;You should be kind to the people you know as well as to those you don&#039;t know.&#039; Now, indeed, it is coming true, this kind of thing we have heard about.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He spoke to the children, saying: &amp;quot;Now you will listen well: now it is arriving, the Good Message, also the Power and the Peace. Moreover, now it will stop, the way in which matters are proceeding here on earth beneath the sky, such that they cause pools and streams of human blood to flow. Moreover, when it stops and when all the people are kind to one another, people of the same kind, then it will stop, human beings killing one another and also scalping one another, then all are relatives, they becoming brothers, the men, and all the women becoming sisters in future days to come, so that families will continue on.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The elders of the village invited the Peacemaker to meet with them. The young man asked them to prepare a feast and to gather the people together to hear his message. The women would make cornbread and the men would bring game animals. The feast would therefore reflect the collaborative efforts of both male and female, the clearing and the forest, the plants and the animals. In the story of the making of the law, many of the important events are accompanied by people eating together, either as a prelude to bringing their minds together or as a way of confirming that consensus has been reached. In the modern Haudenosaunee world, a feast is an important part of any healing, and a meal an important part of the ceremonies in the Longhouse. Food is medicine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker&#039;s message consisted of three &amp;quot;words&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;matters.&amp;quot; First, the Good Message would stop the killing. Second, the Power would bind the nations together into one. Third, the Peace would make everyone into one related family. It was the same message that he would repeat during his travels—the three words, the Good Message, Peace, and Power. He explained to his own people:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First I will answer what it means to say, &amp;quot;Now it is arriving, the Good Message.&amp;quot; This, indeed, is what it means: when it stops, the slaughter of your own people who live here on earth, then everywhere peace will come about, by day and also by night, and it will come about that as one travels around, everyone will be related . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . . Secondly, I say &amp;quot;Now it is arriving, the power,&amp;quot; and this means that the different nations, all of the nations, will become just a single one, and the Great Law will come into being, so that now all will be related to each other, and there will come to be just a single family, and in future, in days to come, this family will continue on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now in turn, my other, my third saying, &amp;quot;Now it is arriving, the peace&amp;quot;; this means that everyone will become related, men and also women, and also the young people and the children, and when all are relatives, every nation, then there will be peace as they roam about by day and also by night. Now, also, it will become possible for them to assemble in meetings. Then there will be truthfulness, and they will uphold hope and charity, so that it is peace that will unite all of the people, indeed it will be as though they have but one mind, and they are a single person with only one body and one head and one life, which means there will be unity. Moreover, and most importantly, one is going to assemble in meetings where it will be announced that all of mankind will repent of their sins, even evil people, and in the future, they will be kind to one another, one and all. When they are functioning, the Good Message and also the Power and the Peace, moreover, these will be the principal things everybody will live by; these will be the great values among the people.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then Tekanawita said, &amp;quot;Now that I have finished my task, I will depart.&amp;quot; Thereupon the older people said, &amp;quot;We are accepting the things that we have heard about the Good Message, and Power and also Peace.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Haudenosaunee languages—reflections of Haudenosaunee thought—do not treat the future with the same precision as do European languages. The English distinction between &amp;quot;would,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;could,&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;should&amp;quot; exists as a result of the context of the statement rather than differences in wording. The future is more frequently indefinite, something that *may* happen. As the Peacemaker delivered his message, his absolute certainty—&amp;quot;now it is arriving&amp;quot;—must have taken the people aback. Nobody would normally speak that way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Newhouse asserts that the Peacemaker was abused by his people because of &amp;quot;his handsome face and his good mind. . . . [He] was a peculiar man and his people did not understand him.&amp;quot; &amp;quot;Many things conspired to drive him away for the Crooked Tongues had no love for such a man. Their hearts were bitter against a man who loved not war better than all things.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Barbara Graymont, without citing a source, adds details of her own: &amp;quot;Deganawida&#039;s ideas and actions were noticeably separating him from his people. The Wendots could not understand a man who loved peace more than war. They could not tolerate one whom they had known since childhood presenting himself to them as a prophet.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Chiefs&#039; Version, there is no mention of the Peacemaker having tried to bring his message to his own people first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Were the Wendat (Hurons) part of the Great Peace? They did form their own confederacy of four nations, on the southern shore of Lake Huron. They had similar ceremonies and governmental structures. In some historic documents, the Haudenosaunee and the Wendat acknowledge a past relationship: in 1656, for example, the Wendat were being asked for the ominous third time to reunite with the Haudenosaunee, as a Mohawk speaker stated: &amp;quot;Thou knowest, thou Huron, that formerly we were but one cabin and one country. I know not by what accident we became separated. It is time to unite again.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No matter what the version, the Peacemaker was soon done with his own people, either because they had accepted his message and would now be at peace, or because they had rejected it and he hoped to find a better reception elsewhere. He continued to live with his grandmother and mother for a while: if there had been a reliable peace, it is likely they would have moved back among their own people. That they continued to live apart suggests that the peace was not secure, and that they were safer where they had been.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; The White Stone Canoe&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker saw that it was necessary that the peace should spread:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It was not long before Deganawii&#039;dah began to travel about. At that time then his grandmother said, &amp;quot;You alone must tell the two of us whether the time has arrived for you to depart.&amp;quot; Then Deganawii&#039;dah said: &amp;quot;in fact understand that I have now already begun to make my preparations. I am looking for something with which I may construct a canoe, and I intend to have myself a fine canoe. For understand that far on lakes and many rivers I will go seeking the (council) smoke of some people, holding my course steadily toward the sunrise.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then the old woman said, &amp;quot;How long will it be, perhaps, before you return?&amp;quot; Then Deganawii&#039;dah replied saying, &amp;quot;I am not able to tell that. So then this shall take place when I shall depart, because then yonder forked tree standing there on the hill top (edge of bluff?) shall be of assistance to us. And then when I shall have gone away, if it becomes necessary for you to know for certain what my fortune is where I have gone, then you will go to that standing tree, and when you will have arrived there you will chop into it; if the blood should flow from it, immediately you shall infer that already misfortune has befallen Deganawii&#039;dah; but if blood should not flow from it, you shall then infer that Deganawii&#039;dah&#039;s luck has been favourable.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then he began to build his canoe out of a white rock . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then the grandmother said, &amp;quot;How are you going to travel since your canoe is made out of stone? It will not float.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then Dekanawideh said, &amp;quot;This will be the first sign of wonder that man will behold; a canoe made of stone will float.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . . they saw a stone boat and paddles of stone. Thereupon Tekanawita turned it right side up, the boat. Thereupon he said, &amp;quot;Examine it, and you will know what kind of a boat I have made here on earth.&amp;quot; Thereupon Kahetoɂkthaɂ and Kahetehsuk examined it, and were surprised at the kind of boat that it was. Thereupon Kahetehsuk said &amp;quot;I love you, my child, but what are you doing in launching a stone boat, for surely, indeed, it will sink beneath the water&#039;s surface, the boat?&amp;quot; Thereupon Tekanawita said: &amp;quot;If it is true that it will sink, my boat, then I also may not survive nor can my work go forward here on earth … Now, indeed, you two will help me as we drag the boat; then, into the water, we will launch it, and you will watch as I get in. You, moreover, will be the first to see this surprising accomplishment, and it is you who are to be witnesses as I take this step&amp;quot;…Thereupon his grandmother and his mother watched it depart, Tekanawita&#039;s boat, with him in it; he was in the boat, paddling swiftly when it left, and in a short time it actually disappeared as he was paddling along.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The white stone canoe reappears (in Gibson&#039;s 1912 version) when the assembled chiefs are ready to confront Thadadaho. The Peacemaker, Hiawatha, and Tsikonsaseh travel across Onondaga Lake in it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What is the significance of the white stone canoe? Its whiteness symbolizes the purity and peace of the messenger it carried. Perhaps the stone symbolizes permanence and indestructibility. Perhaps it is a statement of spiritual power, because it is a floating contradiction: stones, almost by definition, are not boat-building material, because they sink. The majority of the discussion in the versions of the law about this canoe, though, is simply that it is a remarkable thing, a memorable thing. Nobody had built a stone canoe, before or since. The coming of the man in the white stone canoe would be remembered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the watercraft ready, the young man was prepared to leave. In Gibson&#039;s 1899 text, the canoe is of bark, and the leave-taking is emotional:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then Deganawii&#039;dah said, &amp;quot;Now, then, both of you must assist me, you two must launch my canoe. So you both right this upturned canoe for me.&amp;quot; Then at that time the mother and the grandmother of Deganawii&#039;dah righted the canoe which was one of pure, white birch bark, and they dragged it and launched it on the water. Then Deganawii&#039;dah said, &amp;quot;So now indeed we three must separate. Don&#039;t you two then let your minds mourn. We shall all meet again at some future time.&amp;quot; Then again bidding them farewell he said, &amp;quot;Now!&amp;quot; (O:nénh). Just then his mother who indeed was named Djigohsaseeɂ (New Face) added, &amp;quot;Surely there where you will go, there too I will be.&amp;quot; At that time he got into the canoe; so then he now departed, holding his course toward the sunrise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the Bay of Quinte, near the place the Peacemaker is said to have been born, there is a strip of white rock near the water&#039;s edge that is said to be the underwater reminder of the place where the white stone canoe was launched. At that place, the water leaves small eddies, just like the short-lived trail that a canoe would leave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; The Man Without a Nation, Without a Family&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker grew up in isolation. He grew up without an extended family. The stories of the law do not mention his relatives, only his mother and his grandmother. Perhaps his lack of a set of cousins, the absence of uncles and aunts, had taught him how important a broad family is to survival. His plan for peace was based not on his own experience, but rather on what his own experience had shown him he lacked. Perhaps his seclusion allowed him time to think, pray, and prepare: &amp;quot;Without a tribe of his own, he was neutral. He had never been involved in any of the killing. Because no man&#039;s hand was against him, he could become a peace messenger among the tribes without disgrace or accusation of cowardice.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker had no relatives among the peoples to whom he was bringing the word. He was not implicated in seeking revenge. He had no one to mourn. His family had not been involved in the killing, so no one would seek revenge against him. As a complete outsider, he was neither a threat nor a victim. His relatives were not around him, so he had no protection—but nor could it be said that he was acting in his family&#039;s interest. The outsider, with no political or family baggage, was the ideal peacemaker. John Mohawk described all peacemakers in the same terms as this man: &amp;quot;The people who are going to manage that, who are going to lead the way out of that jungle, those people can never lie. They have to be completely honorable, all the time. They can&#039;t take sides. They have to be neutral. They have to be peacemakers. Peacemakers aren&#039;t people with an agenda. They don&#039;t come to your country to take your forest. They don&#039;t come there to kill your buffaloes. They&#039;re there to end the violence. That&#039;s all. So they have to be completely honorable, completely honest.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The outsider was also the most vulnerable person, the one whose death would result in the fewest consequences for the killers. &amp;quot;[A stranger is an enemy] Then the men said, &#039;Perhaps it would not result in good if they should see you, for possibly they would kill you on sight, because they do not know you?&#039;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a culture of revenge with no concept of forgiveness, there would have been a tendency for people to avoid travel, to avoid the risk of being killed. For a stranger to appear alone in those days would have itself been remarkable. It would have aroused curiosity. It would have created an opportunity, an opening: &amp;quot;The word *stranger* denotes a living embodiment of that which is *strange*—from the Old French, *estrange*, extraordinary. Thus, the stranger functions as an unexpected messenger who can embody or mirror what is extraordinary within us, what is possible but yet unlived.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Mindless Warfare&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Dark Times into which the Peacemaker was born involved cycles of war, bloodshed, and revenge so dark and deep that nobody could remember how, or when, or why they had begun.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker, travelling swiftly, arrived at the mouth of the Oswego River, at the southeast end of Lake Ontario. There he found a timorous hunting party: people who had left their village because of the strife there, but who were also engaged in the practical activity of gathering food. He told them to return to their settlement, to announce the good tidings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moreover he had journeyed some distance when suddenly at a distance he saw human beings moving about at the lake shore, so he directed his course there. Now in a very short time he beached his canoe there. Then he got out. Then he conversed with those men he had seen. Now then Deganawii&#039;dah said, &amp;quot;Where do the people reside.&amp;quot; The men replied saying, &amp;quot;Toward the sunrise (eastward).&amp;quot; Then Deganawii&#039;dah said, &amp;quot;Indeed then it is a fact that no people lives here?&amp;quot; Then the men replied saying, &amp;quot;No&amp;quot; [&amp;quot;there are none.&amp;quot;] Then Deganawii&#039;dah said, &amp;quot;So then what is the reason that you are stirring about here?&amp;quot; The men replied saying, &amp;quot;Actually we are fugitives.&amp;quot; Then Deganawii&#039;dah asked saying &amp;quot;What is the reason that you are running away, for surely there is nothing amiss now?&amp;quot; The men said, &amp;quot;Understand that it so happened that where we lived our village was destroyed. So really we don&#039;t know the state of affairs there.&amp;quot; Then Deganawii&#039;dah inquired, &amp;quot;Who are these people who have destroyed your village?&amp;quot; The men answered, &amp;quot;It is indeed that person who continually harms us named Dehohsaheh&#039;hwa, He whose house obstructs (the path). Then Deganawii&#039;dah said, &amp;quot;Now as for that, from now on that kind of work shall stop. Indeed understand that such an intention was not in the mind of the Creator of the earth and the sky-world. Moreover it is also my aim now to put a stop to the killing of one another, that too should cease. This is the reason that I am now traveling. So now you all must return home, go back there to the place where you all set out (which you abandoned).&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is not mere allegory. If the causes of the warfare had been known, a rational and powerful person like the Peacemaker would have sought to identify them, analyze them, and address them. Instead, he faced mindless warfare, without any discernible cause or origin. To stop the cycles of bloodshed, he could not go to their root. He had to address the symptoms first instead, to create the pause in the slaughter that would &amp;quot;allow the conversations to take place.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this time of bloodshed, the women and children were &amp;quot;made poor,&amp;quot; because the men who bore the responsibility to protect them were instead threatening their safety. The poverty is not a lack of prosperity: it is a poverty of spirit, a sadness, a loss.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; The Peacemaker and the Cannibal&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker&#039;s first challenge, after landing on the southeast shore of Lake Ontario, was his encounter with a monster—a man who had become an eater of human flesh. &amp;quot;This man was a cannibal, and had left the settlement to which he belonged for a long time and lived by himself in an isolated place.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Joseph Campbell wrote that a monster, in the mythology of most peoples on earth, is a creature that cannot distinguish what is real from what is not. Heroes, he says, do not attack the monster&#039;s strength—for monsters are endowed with great physical or spiritual power, too much for the hero to take on directly. Instead, heroes show their ingenuity and power by attacking the monster&#039;s weakness. Thus, Jack tricks the giant into falling down the beanstalk to his death. Hansel tricks the witch into thinking that the twig is his skinny finger; he tricks her again into looking into the oven, then kicks her in to her death. Rumpelstiltskin is tricked into saying his name. In Haudenosaunee myth, the Flying Head is tricked into eating hot coals, thinking they are roasted chestnuts, and the Stone Giant is tricked into drowning in the river.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Human beings have no great speed, no fangs or claws or strength. They have a great mind as their most powerful weapon. The greatest heroes, in every culture, are the ones who demonstrate how that tool is used best.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In John Arthur Gibson&#039;s 1899 version, it is Hiawatha who is the Cannibal, and after his conversion to reason he becomes the Peacemaker&#039;s collaborator. In the Chiefs&#039; Version, the Cannibal is Thadadaho, though this does not really fit into a logical sequence. After all, if the Cannibal becomes a messenger for the Good Mind, then he should not backslide and become its greatest obstacle afterwards. More detailed versions tell of Thadadaho&#039;s slow descent into madness, at the same time as his ascent to Onondaga leadership. The latter is inconsistent with him becoming a hermit cannibal. In another version, the Cannibal is Tekarihoken, who not long afterwards is encountered again as a leader of the Mohawks, and later becomes their first sachem (as, in the 1899 version, Hiawatha becomes a Mohawk leader along his path of bringing peace). This, too, is unlikely. The Cannibal may be more of a symbol than a person: unlike most other personages in the story of the peacemaking, his original name is never mentioned, and the Peacemaker does not give him a new name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Perhaps the source of the confusion is that both Hiawatha and the Cannibal had left their communities and were living alone, in isolation. If the result of the Peacemaker&#039;s contact with the Cannibal is that the man&#039;s mind is completely changed for the good, then the Cannibal is not Hiawatha, who is found by the Peacemaker living alone, trying, in his grief, to raise up his mind again. The Peacemaker does not lift up the same person&#039;s mind twice. Hewitt suggested that Hiawatha was actually two different people, the Cannibal and the mourner. Contrast this, though, with Gibson&#039;s 1899 version, in which the Cannibal is (or becomes) Hiawatha, and years later, as a Mohawk leader, suffers the tragedies that drive him alone into the forest. One problem with that is that it prolongs the Peacemaker&#039;s efforts, since in the interval between the conversion of the Cannibal and the Condolence of Hiawatha, the latter&#039;s daughters would have had to grow up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The point of this encounter is that the Cannibal&#039;s mind is *completely* changed. John Arthur Gibson&#039;s 1912 version avoids the controversy by not naming the Cannibal, and that is probably the cleanest approach. This is the first demonstration of the Peacemaker&#039;s ability and desire to cause people to abandon irrational behaviour. Hiawatha, Thadadaho, and Tekarihoken are each examples of other men converted to the Good Mind by the Peacemaker. He uses a different approach for each of them. The Cannibal, probably, is just a cannibal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Skaniatariio John Arthur Gibson&#039;s 1912 version is detailed and structured:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After Dekanawidah had departed in that direction [south] he came to a house belonging to a cannibal who had his house there. Then Dekanawidah went close to the house. Then, when he saw the man coming out, departing, sliding down the hill to the river, and dipping water, thereupon Dekanawidah hurriedly climbed onto the house to the place where there was a chimney for the smoke to escape; he lay down on his stomach and looking into the house he saw that the task of breaking up meat and piling it up had been completed. Then the man returned, and he was carrying a drum with water in it. Thereupon he poured it into a vessel, put meat into the liquid, and hung the vessel up over the fire until it boiled. Moreover, the man watched it, and when it was done, he took down the vessel, placing it near the embers. Thereupon he said &amp;quot;Now indeed it is done. Moreover, now I will eat.&amp;quot; Thereupon he set up a seat, a bench, thinking he will put it on there when he eats. Thereupon he went to where the vessel sat, intending to take the meat out of the liquid, when he saw, from inside the vessel, a man looking out. Thereupon he moved away without removing the meat, and sat down again on the long bench, for it was a surprise to him, seeing the man in the vessel. Thereupon he thought, &amp;quot;Let me look again.&amp;quot; Thereupon he, Dekanawidah, looked again from above where the smoke hole was, again causing a reflection in the vessel, and then the man, standing up again, went to where the vessel sat, looked into the vessel again, saw the man looking out, and he was handsome, he having a nice face. Thereupon the man moved away again, and he sat down again on the long bench, and he bowed his head, pondering and thinking, &amp;quot;I am exceedingly handsome and I have a nice face; it is probably not right, my habit of eating humans. So I will now stop, from now on I ought not to kill humans anymore.&amp;quot; Thereupon he stood up again, went to where the vessel sat, picked up the vessel with the meat in it, and then he went out, sliding straight down the slope beside the river and near an uprooted tree he poured out the vessel full of meat. Meanwhile Dekanawidah hurriedly climbed down again from on top of the house, and went to where he had gone, the man carrying the vessel containing human flesh. Just then, he having ascended the top of the hill, the one holding the vessel, the two met. Thereupon they both stopped, and the man said, &amp;quot;We two are meeting; where do you come from? We are strangers; what is your name?&amp;quot; Thereupon he began to speak, saying, &amp;quot;Really, it is true, we are strangers; it is the first time we have met. Now, moreover, I will tell you that the place I came from is the other side of the lake, and as to me, my name, indeed, is Dekanawidah.&amp;quot; Thereupon he said, &amp;quot;I will ask you what that is, that vessel you are holding?&amp;quot; and the man said, &amp;quot;It is surprising what happened: I was just about to take my meat out of the liquid to make a meal of it, when I examined it to see whether, indeed, it was done. And this: when I stood up next to the vessel, I looked into the vessel and I saw a man looking out. Now then, I went back to the long bench and sat down again and then I felt astonished at what was happening, for never had I looked and seen that kind of thing. Thereupon I thought &#039;I will repeat it and look again into the vessel.&#039; Thereupon I stood up again and moved over next to the vessel, and I stood looking over where the meat was cooking in the vessel, and I saw the man looking out again; he was handsome, very handsome. Thereupon I unhooked the vessel, and placed it beside the fire. Then I sat down again on the bench, pondering, and thought, &#039;It is an amazing thing that I, indeed, am handsome, very handsome.&#039; Thereupon I decided, &#039;Now I will stop eating humans, and now I will stop killing people.&#039; Thereupon I again stood up, picked up the vessel, came out of the house and went near the hill to a tree that had uprooted itself; there I poured out the human flesh; so now I am stopping that work of mine. Only this, the vessel, that is what will remain, and I will use it for cooking meals.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereupon Dekanawidah said, &amp;quot;Now I understand everything; so now you will return, going to the village to tell your people, &#039;Now it is arriving, the Good Message, and also the Power, and also the Peace.&#039; Now, indeed, you have ended your killing of humans.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker observes the Cannibal from hiding for a while, before deciding what to do. This is prudent. Dealing with a deranged murderer is always dangerous, and the times themselves were black and perilous. In several other instances—notably later in his journeys when he eavesdrops on Hiawatha&#039;s efforts to create a way to raise up grieving people&#039;s minds—the Peacemaker also seems to sneak up on people. He watches and listens and then *thinks* before acting. A man alone, a stranger without family or friends, walking unannounced into any situation, would be vulnerable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Observing before acting is not merely prudent; it is also a Haudenosaunee cultural trait. As well, it is a sign of respect: repeatedly, in the story of the making of the Kayanerenkó:wa, the Peacemaker and Hiawatha do not rush to accept an invitation, but instead smoke or deliberate or think before doing so. To react in haste would be insulting, because it would imply that the proposition was not worthy of much thought.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The encounter attests to the Peacemaker&#039;s ingenuity and power of mind (and extreme handsomeness and peacefulness of visage). Mainly, though, the story of the Cannibal serves as a metaphor, a statement of a fundamental principle of the Kayanerenkó:wa. Sotsisowah explains:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He began discussion in the bark hut of a man who was about to cut up a victim for the dinner pot. It was in that environment he offered the idea that all human beings possess the power of rational thought and that in the belief in rational thought is to be found the power to create peace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
His words required considerable thought and understandably much discussion before his first student could take ownership of the ideas. He was not saying that human beings do not possess the potential for irrational thought. He was saying that* all *human beings possess the potential for rational thought.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unless we believe that all human beings possess rational thought, we are powerless to act in any way that will bring peace short of the absolute destruction of the other. We cannot negotiate with irrational human beings. In order to negotiate with other human beings, we must believe in their rational nature. We must believe they are not suicidal or homicidal by nature, that we can reason with them. Thus the first principle that will bring us the power to act is the confidence in the belief that all people are rational human beings and that we can take measures to reach accord with them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no person, and no mind, that is so far gone that it cannot be changed by the power of the Good Message. If the person is acting irrationally, the tools that the law provides can bring reason back again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Cannibal sees the Peacemaker&#039;s serene face and thinks: &amp;quot;That could be me,&amp;quot; another fundamental principle of Haudenosaunee law and society is being enacted. The Peacemaker is, in effect, leading by example, showing the Cannibal that peace is possible, just as later generations of chiefs would set their own examples of conduct for the people.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker is also a risk taker. Other people would have avoided the Cannibal, for obvious reasons. He confronted Thadadahoh, whose ill will could have killed him. He faced Tsikonsaseh, who no doubt had her own armed guardians. To bring peace, again and again he acted with boldness. The Peacemaker&#039;s combination of personal courage and personal humility is especially admired among the Haudenosaunee.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker and the Cannibal, in Skaniatariio&#039;s 1899 version, become collaborators and close friends. It happens thus: when the Cannibal has thrown out his stew of human flesh, he meets the Peacemaker:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now he who was standing there said, &amp;quot;It is true that just now I am seeking a congenial friend.&amp;quot; Then he said, &amp;quot;Come, let&#039;s both go back inside.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At that time they both went back inside the house and now the homeowner set the pot in its accustomed place. Then the homeowner said, &amp;quot;Be seated over there across the fire, here on this side I will sit down. You who visit my house (my guest) and I shall sit with the fire between us (occupy opposite sides of the fire); and the reason that this shall occur is that I have a new experience (message) to relate. Therefore I will relate it. So as owner of the house (host) I shall begin and I will tell it clear to the end. Then you in turn shall relate your message to the end. For surely, perhaps, you must bring some message.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At that time Deganawii&#039;dah now said, &amp;quot;You and I entirely agree. Come, therefore, let it start.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this version, it is the Cannibal who describes some of the basic rules of procedure and seating of any council. Either this process was already well-known to the people who became the Haudenosaunee before the Peacemaker brought the law, or this meeting of monster and lawbringer is another instance of collaborative lawmaking. Collaborative lawmaking, between the Peacemaker and Tsikonsaseh, between the Peacemaker and the chiefs, between the Peacemaker and Thadadaho, is the hallmark of Gibson&#039;s 1899 version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Cannibal describes the events that have led to his conversion. He then turns his mind to making things right:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Then I thought I should see someone, that maybe one would visit my house and that he would tell me perhaps what I should do to make restitution to those minds I had offended by killing the people belonging to various bands (tribes), so that there might be a just peace again. Then I arose and took up the pot and went out from the house and descended the river bank, and there where there is an uprooted tree I poured out the contents of the pot I carried, namely the flesh of a dead human being. Then I climbed the bank. I was surprised now, nearby you were walking along. At once my life rejoiced when I saw you. I thought &#039;That really fulfills my mind&#039;s desire, to meet a friend&#039;. So now then I have finished. Now then in turn it rests with you. Moreover I in turn will listen to whatever message you bring.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then Deganawii&#039;dah stood up now and said, &amp;quot;Truly, what has happened this very day is indeed a wonderful story. Now you have changed the very pattern of your life. Now a new frame of mind has come to you, namely righteousness and peace. Right now you are seeking for someone to come tell you what you should do in order that peace shall prevail in the divers places in which you have done injury among mankind.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker is replying in precisely the manner in which a skilled speaker moves matters along in council. He stands up—as speakers in council do, to be seen and heard, and out of respect—and he repeats the essence of what he has heard, to acknowledge it and to confirm that he has not misunderstood its import. But, just as a speaker in council uses his reply to add another layer towards consensus, he adds to his account of what he has heard, in a way that presages his own message. In this way he links together his host&#039;s story and his own, &amp;quot;bridging&amp;quot; the thinking between them: in Hewitt&#039;s translation of Skaniatariio John Arthur Gibson, the key indicator of this is the word &amp;quot;moreover&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Now moreover I will tell you (what to do). This is the very message that I bring. I too am seeking a certain man (a friend) who would work with me, he and I would collaborate to advance the matter of Righteousness and Peace. Now indeed you and I have met, our two minds meet on the level (are quite agreed). Therefore this shall come to pass. So then you and I shall work together at preparing food. Accordingly you shall go for fresh water and you shall dip it from the river as it flows along. As for me, I will go hunt for a game animal. Moreover it is enough that when you will arrive back that you shall have the water hot by the time I shall return. Then at the same time you and I will work together at boiling the meat. At that time you and I will merge our two minds.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At that time Deganawii&#039;dah sat down again. Then the houseowner now stood up and said, &amp;quot;Exactly that is what I have in mind. Therefore it shall come about as you have outlined it.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then Deganawii&#039;dah arose and said, &amp;quot;So now in fact let us two depart. You shall go to fetch water, and I will go to hunt.&amp;quot; At that time the two set out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The two men—all alone in the lodge—are nevertheless following the process of a formal council. Nor is it insignificant that the Peacemaker assigns separate tasks for each person: that is still a typical Haudenosaunee process for getting things done between meetings. The first thing they plan together as friends is a meal. Haudenosaunee tradition requires meals: &amp;quot;feasts&amp;quot; to mark transitions in life, as an integral part of ceremonies, including healing ceremonies, and as a prelude to councils. Today, a feast shared by family and friends is an essential part of Haudenosaunee medicine, often used to assuage restless spirits, protect against those who send harm, and reconcile those who harbour hard feelings. Just as grief or fatigue are distractions to clear thinking, so is hunger. The meal is also a milestone: the Cannibal has changed what he eats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before the Dark Times, Haudenosaunee men lived by hunting. When times of war and revenge-taking came, they began to kill people; they became warriors. In that sense, the Cannibal was the ultimate warrior. When the Peacemaker taught him that he had to go back to eating venison, he was also saying that the men had to turn from war back to hunting, their proper role. It was not just a change in what he ate: it was a fundamental change in how he led his life.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker and the (former) cannibal continue to work together: their collaboration in preparing the meal and the Cannibal&#039;s repentance lead to the creation of some of the fundamental symbols and ideas of Haudenosaunee law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, the Peacemaker had killed a deer with quite large antlers. He then suggested to the former cannibal that &amp;quot;we two shall remove them and these antlers shall be placed here upon humans.&amp;quot; This would have been the beginning of the idea of deer&#039;s antlers as the emblem of chieftainship.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Together, the two men clarified some of the principles by which Haudenosaunee society lives. The Cannibal had killed and killed. Now he shared responsibility for burying the dead. Today, funerals bring the people together. So does the annual ceremony for the dead. So do the many times the ancestors are invoked, mentioned in other ceremonies and speeches. In Haudenosaunee thought, society is not only the people who are alive today, but also the dead and the unborn. By joining the Cannibal in burying the dead, the Peacemaker was providing another lesson in rejoining civil society. Through their conversation and actions, the two helped develop the role of reason and &amp;quot;changing minds&amp;quot; in bringing peace:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then Deganawii&#039;dah said: &amp;quot;Here in fact is the place where your wisdom (reasoning) lies.&amp;quot; At that time he placed his two hands on the houseowner&#039;s head and then passed them down over his face, and Deganawii&#039;dah said, One (the Master of Life) has brought you mind (reason). Now moreover you and I will look into the pot.&amp;quot; At that time the two looked into the pot, and for a fact the two men saw that their two bodies appeared identical in the reflections from the depths of the pot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then the owner of the house said, &amp;quot;It is wonderful that you and I have similar forms (appearances).&amp;quot; Then Deganawii&#039;dah said, &amp;quot;In fact it is true that he (the Master of Life) has endowed us both with reason (mind).&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As men&#039;s bodies are similar, so are they equal in their ability to reason, the Peacemaker was saying, and so are they equal in their potential to come within the peace that he was building. We are all human together, and therefore all potentially brothers and sisters. We have all been given minds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker passing his hands over the former cannibal&#039;s face presages Hiawatha&#039;s combing out Thadadaho&#039;s hair and straightening out the kinks in his body. The Peacemaker may have been removing the physical manifestations of the twisted nature of the Cannibal&#039;s mind, &amp;quot;rubbing him down.&amp;quot; By making the former cannibal look again at the reflections in the pot, the Peacemaker was both explaining the trick he had used and transforming that trick into a lesson about the nature of humanity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The story of the Peacemaker and the Cannibal is the first in a series of demonstrations of a basic principle of the law: that all humans are capable of rationality. They may be *behaving* irrationally, but if we are to have peace with them, we must find a way to address that behaviour and to restore the Good Mind in them. Otherwise, we will not have peace, since we will always have to be prepared to defend ourselves. We therefore have an obligation to help one another. When we find a person who is behaving irrationally, we have both an interest and an obligation to create peace through reason, for it is our peace as well as theirs. As Sotsisowah John Mohawk would say, we have to negotiate with their humanity. If there were any doubts that the lessons to be learned from the Peacemaker&#039;s conversion of a single demented individual could be extrapolated to address a whole people, the Peacemaker removed that doubt in their next conversation:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then the owner of the house said, &amp;quot;What do you mean when you say &#039;Justice and Peace&#039;? What will occur when these shall be accomplished?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then Deganawii&#039;dah said: &amp;quot;By these I mean that this very day you have changed the disposition of your mind. And moreover it shall come about that all mankind shall change the disposition of their minds now prevalent. That means that this reformation shall begin at once, and Justice and Peace shall increase continually.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Announcing Peace&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Peace is coming, announces the Peacemaker. The bloodshed and the warfare and the revenge-taking are ending. Peace is inevitable. It is on its way. In most versions of the law, the Peacemaker is careful not to say that *he* is making or bringing peace, but rather that peace is arriving. He is only its herald, not its author. In later accounts, and especially Euro-American accounts, this crucial humility is missed. Indeed, the word and idea of a &amp;quot;Peacemaker&amp;quot; is likely not Haudenosaunee, and not contemporaneous with the arrival of the Great Peace. Peace is coming as surely as the sunrise, Tekanawita assured the people. They had to believe it, and believe in it. Both culturally and linguistically, his use of terms of absolute certainty was part of the power of the message. To a people whose sense of the future is expressed grammatically in indefinite terms, the clarity and confidence of the words were stunning. To accentuate this certitude, he linked it to another: that the sun comes up every day:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moreover, at present it is young as the day is when the sun is rising and lights up the earth; just as it causes warmth all over the earth and for all the people, we will help the people of every nation. And just as all of the many things that grow on earth and sustain the people, the newly arriving Great Law will come to shed light on the minds of the people, the elders and the younger people, everybody, even the children, and this is what you will work at: everyone shall become related to one another, so that it will become a single family consisting of every tribe; and they will be kind to one another, all of the people; and this is what will unite them: the Good Message, and the Power, and the Peace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By staying focussed on the message of peace and the impending peace itself, rather than upon the messenger, the Haudenosaunee avoided becoming adherents to a messianic religion. Instead, the Kayanerenkó:wa, and not its bringer, became the Way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The counterpoint to this message is not a denial, but an impatient, almost pestering question: in Gibson&#039;s 1899 version, Thadadaho repeatedly asks, Is it here yet? His persistent question suggests that the people trapped in the cycle of bloodshed yearn to emerge, even as they maintain it. The question comes from the most unexpected source. The reply that it is still coming, still on its way, still being built, is part of the lesson that things take as long as they take; that one must have the patience to do things properly. It remains true that the peace is still, and will always be, being built.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Skaniatariio John Arthur Gibson&#039;s 1899 Version&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Skaniatariio John Arthur Gibson&#039;s 1899 narrative, dictated to J.N.B. Hewitt, follows a different pattern than others. The Peacemaker does not bring a complete message. He announces the Three Words, and then engages in a series of conversations and collaborations with the people he meets in his travels. His first collaboration is with Tsikonsaseh. His second and greatest is with the former cannibal Hiawatha. The constitutional aspects of the law result from later discussion among the chiefs, with the Peacemaker asking questions and the chiefs replying. It is almost like a bilateral Socratic conversation, with the Peacemaker each time guiding the flow of the discussion towards the structure he was seeking to build.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hiawatha and the Peacemaker create parts of the law through a combination of prophecy—the Peacemaker explains things to Hiawatha that will take place and then they happen—and suggestion and dialogue with the people they meet. This version reflects the back-and-forth nature of council proceedings, and also the way that Haudenosaunee decisions are not unilateral, and not one person&#039;s ideas, but rather the result of collaboration, cooperation, conversation, and thinking together. People are more likely to support and spread ideas if they believe they were among the originators of those ideas, the makers of the narrative. The Peacemaker acts as moderator as well as prophet. The Peacemaker is able to predict—but not prevent—misfortunes, and this is an indicator of his special powers. He is more of a catalyst, less of a lawbringer. He carries ideas, not stone tablets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Tsikonsaseh: The Women&#039;s Side&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker pursued a deliberate strategy of seeking out the very worst people, to show that even they could be converted to peace and goodness by the power of his message. Again and again, he is told about a person who is feared, hated, or just dangerous, and he immediately finds that person and begins the conversation of peace. Sometimes it takes several meetings, spread over months and even years.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two sides to everything—night and day, old and young, good and bad—and so there are to all things a male and a female. Once he had dealt with a male monster—the Cannibal—and the grieving man—Hiawatha—the Peacemaker then turned to the female side. A woman was keeping a house on the Warriors&#039; Path and was actively encouraging men to fight and kill one another. Her house lay along the path; just as later in the story, Thadadaho&#039;s location on the path made him an obstacle to the peace, so Tsikonsaseh&#039;s house permitted her to facilitate the conduct of war. In some traditions, though, this woman was already an influence for peace, the Peacemaker&#039;s female counterpart, even as she lent sustenance to men along their path to make war:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So then thereafter the nations of them that were Oweh called the Great Woman, Yegowaneh, but through all the generations the Great Woman&#039;s name was Ji-kon-sa-she, the Lynx. Now in the territory of the Cultivators there was no war. Bands of warriors passed from east to west and from west to east through the paths of the Cultivators and delivered peace belts to Yegowaneh. So likewise, bands of warriors passed from south to north and from north to south through the territory of the Cultivators and delivered belts of peace because the Great Woman was the Mother of Nations. She would provide food for the War Captains and then exhort them to follow the paths of peace since all men are brothers who are Oweh. It was therefore said, &amp;quot;the path of war runs through the House of Peace.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A woman living alone in a time of warfare and bloodshed probably also had strong spiritual power, perhaps even a reputation for witchcraft. She had a great power of persuasion: the Peacemaker determined to transform that power for the good:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then Dekanawidah also said . . . I shall visit the west first. I shall visit there the house of this woman, Tsikonsaseh. The reason why I shall do this (go and visit this woman first) is because the path passes there which runs from the east to the west.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then after saying these words Dekanawidah went on his way and arrived at the house of Tsikonsaseh and said to her that he had come on this path which passed her home and which led from the east to the west, and on which traveled the men of blood-thirsty and destructive nature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then he said unto her, &amp;quot;It is your custom to feed these men when they are traveling on this path on their war expeditions.&amp;quot; He then told her that she must desist from practising this custom. He then told her that the reason she was to stop this custom was that the Kariwiio or Good Tidings of Peace and Power had come.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tsikonsaseh had been encouraging, supplying, and feeding the warriors. No good reason is provided for her doing so. As in the case of the Cannibal, one issue to be addressed with the coming of the peace is that people must change what and how they eat, or what and why they feed others. There is a tradition that Tsikonsaseh tried to poison the Peacemaker. Tsikonsaseh offered the Peacemaker what appeared to be a delicious meal. What he saw in the bowl, though, was a mass of writhing worms. He refused to eat this, and asked her to prepare him a proper meal. She did so, as part of repenting her evil ways and converting to peace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Part of the transformation was of the path itself: with her acceptance of the Good Message, the great east–west path of the Longhouse changed from being the Warriors&#039; Path and became the path of peace depicted on the Hiawatha wampum, joining the nations together.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Gibson&#039;s 1912 recollection, after the Peacemaker changes the mind of the unnamed cannibal, he proceeds to reason with Tsikonsaseh:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereupon Dekanawidah departed and he arrived at the waterfalls on the easterly side of the river where she had her house, a lone female. Then Dekanawidah said, &amp;quot;As to you, I believe, this is your home.&amp;quot; Thereupon the woman said, &amp;quot;Indeed, it is I who have this house.&amp;quot; Thereupon Dekanawidah said, &amp;quot;What is your name?&amp;quot; and she said, &amp;quot;As to me, indeed, my name is Tsikonsaseh.&amp;quot; Then Dekanawidah said, &amp;quot;you are indeed the person who has done a lot of work in relation to the warpath. Furthermore a path passes through here and this is how they cross over here, the warriors. As to these, repeatedly when they show up here, you share food with them; indeed, repeatedly, when they finish eating, they go on to kill people and also to scalp them. And when these warriors return, they stop here again, and again you feed them, doing so repeatedly, and you help both sides, those living to the west and to the east. So now you will stop; now, indeed, it is coming, the Good Message, also the Power, and also the Peace. Now, moreover, you will depart and towards the east that is where you will go. On the third day, indeed, you will become a peace chief and a leader for the Good Message, the Power and the Peace.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker offered Tsikonsaseh political authority within the League (becoming &amp;quot;a peace chief and leader&amp;quot;) in exchange for her support. It was pragmatic to do so, and consistent with the approach he later used with Thadadaho and with the Seneca warriors. In each case he recognized ability, talent, and possibility, and instead of seeking to destroy a threat, he succeeded in transforming it into a power for peace. He also used the power of logic and persuasion, the power of reason and the Good Mind. She was not naturally irrational: by promoting war, she was just *behaving* irrationally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The crucial role played by Tsikonsaseh in the formation of the League illustrates the need to address both the male and the female side, and to keep them in balance. She does not travel with the Peacemaker during his work with the nations, but she reappears towards the end of his work to add her powerful voice to the conversion of Thadadaho. Without her, without the women&#039;s voice, the work of peace would have failed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Gibson&#039;s 1899 version, Tsikonsaseh is the name of the Peacemaker&#039;s mother. But in that case it is likely that there is a second Tsikonsaseh, the great clan mother, Mother of the Nations, with whom he discusses, and begins to formulate, the structure and laws that will bring peace. It is this Tsikonsaseh who helps him refine his ideas, and who suggests the women&#039;s role in the law—and the Peacemaker accepts that suggestion. By 1912, Gibson names Kahetehsuk as the Peacemaker&#039;s mother, but still refers at one point to Tsikonsaseh as his mother, as well:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At that time Deganawii&#039;dah said, &amp;quot;Now moreover I will go on [continue traveling][continue on my way].&amp;quot; The men replied saying, &amp;quot;Something which you might begin by doing is to visit the *goyaanehgoo&#039;nah*, the great matron whose house stands not far away.&amp;quot; Then Deganawii&#039;dah said, &amp;quot;Who is it? What is she named?&amp;quot; The men replied, &amp;quot;She is the one people call Djigohsa&#039;hseh.&amp;quot; Deganawii&#039;dah replied saying, &amp;quot;that is true, indeed&amp;quot; . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And so when he arrived at the place where her lodge stood he saw a woman; then he said, who is the owner of the lodge standing there? The woman responded saying, &amp;quot;I myself.&amp;quot; Then he inquired further, saying, &amp;quot;What then are you called?&amp;quot; She said, &amp;quot;Indeed, as for me, Djigonhsah&#039;seh is my name.&amp;quot; Then he said, &amp;quot;She too is the one I am looking for.&amp;quot; Djigonhsah&#039;seh now said, &amp;quot;Who then are you? From what place do you come?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then he replied saying, &amp;quot;In this direction from the north side of yonder beautiful lake I have come. As for me, I am the one who is named Deganawii&#039;dah&amp;quot; (At once now she recognized him as her own son. Truly now they both were satisfied).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then at that time Djigonhsa&#039;seh said, &amp;quot;Come, therefore, relate then the nature of the message which you bring.&amp;quot; Now then Deganawii&#039;dah said, &amp;quot;The message itself which I am bringing is—*ga:iwi&#039;yoh* (justice and righteousness); *ske:non* (peace), and *ga&#039;shasdeen&#039;shen* (civil authority).&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now the woman (his mother, *honoo&#039;ha*) said, &amp;quot;That too shall come to be, and first of all you shall stop (remain) here. And in the first place I will prepare food. And when it is cooked (I have it cooked, ready) then at that time you and I shall eat, indeed we two will eat together, and the reason for this is because the nature of the message which you bring is indeed very important and I am pleased with it.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now then Deganawii&#039;dah said, &amp;quot;I approve (accept – take hold of? –) of the inclination of your mind (proposal). I also am pleasantly surprised (pleased).&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Why would the Peacemaker be pleasantly surprised that his mother would accept his message and show him hospitality? Why did she not already know the message he was carrying, since he had explained it to her before he left home? This woman was not his biological mother, but rather someone who had declared her kinship with him because of his mission. By adopting his message, she had also adopted the man himself. &amp;quot;Mother&amp;quot; is not a term of biology, in this context, but rather an address of respect. Their stay together is an opportunity for dialogue, a two-sided, back-and-forth conversation in which the Mother of Nations provides her own ideas and support, extending her protection to the man with the message. Rather than provide food for the warriors, she is about to prepare a feast to welcome the message of peace. The good health that the good food provides reflects the spiritual health fostered by their discussions and agreements. The Peacemaker and the Mother of Nations bring their minds together to give names and form to the symbolic Longhouse:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then at that time Djigonhsa&#039;seh prepared food. When she had finished then indeed the two did eat together. When they two had finished (eating) the woman said, &amp;quot;Now surely this is fulfilled, both our minds are fully satisfied. So now I will ask you, what use will you make then of the propositions which you bring, that is, of Peace and Righteousness (justice) and the force of Law? The situation in the direction you are going is dangerous. There are dwelling in the direction you are going men who are really evil. They hunt people and kill them and they eat their flesh. A male person moreover whose house stands not far from here likewise eats humans.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then Deganawii&#039;dah said, &amp;quot;In fact understand that I am trying to have this kind of business stopped. [This is, I understand, the kind of business I am trying to have stopped.] [Nay&#039;ehseh.]&amp;quot; And then he asked, saying, &amp;quot;What then do you think (what is your opinion) of the propositions that I have brought with me? Do you yourself accept the (principles of) justice, and of peace and civil authority?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Djigonsah&#039;seh said, &amp;quot;So what is the meaning of the message, the significance of the principles, which you bring?&amp;quot; Deganawii&#039;dah said, &amp;quot;Indeed the meaning of Righteousness and of Peace and of Order is just this: that when the habitual killing of human beings shall have stopped, then peace shall prevail, and bands of people shall travel about from place to place where they reside, and also the individual maternal families (may come and go freely); all mankind shall continue peacefully to love one another.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At that time Djigonhsa&#039;seh said, &amp;quot;It is true indeed that the message which you bring is most important. So now I accept it; therefore I approve the work that you are advancing. What will you call it when it is completed?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then Deganawiid&#039;dah said, &amp;quot;I will call it *Ganonhsyo:ni*, the Extended House (the League), and also I will designate it *Gayenehsahgo:nah*, the great law or commonwealth. And the reason it shall have the name the Extended House is that in fact it shall come to resemble only a single household (*sganonh&#039;sadah*) when it is finished; and furthermore the mind or reason will become the source of law (*Gayanenhseh*), or human welfare; thinking shall replace killing and welfare eventuate; and thus we shall all be peacefully disposed in the minds of the constituent maternal families; therefore it will unite the minds, and it shall be called *gayanehsa&#039;goonah*, the great law or commonwealth. Moreover, this (institution) shall endure as long as there continues to be a single maternal family and until that time when the Holder of the Heavens will bring about a transformation of things on the earth.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At that time Djigonhsa&#039;seh now said, &amp;quot;Now apparently I understand (comprehend) the whole affair (proposition), so now I accept it (I have taken hold of it).&amp;quot; Deganawii&#039;dah said, &amp;quot;Moreover this shall come about in the future that then the women shall possess the title to chieftainship (*gayaneh&#039;dah*) [belonging to her maternal family]; and the reason for this is that you my mother were the first to approve (the principles) of Righteousness and Peace. So now then I shall move on.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Barbara Mann believes that Tsikonsaseh is even more important than the existing versions of the Kayanerenkó:wa suggest: she blames the &amp;quot;European-centered and male-centered nature of existing history&amp;quot; for largely ignoring her role in insisting on gender balance in the law. &amp;quot;It is only after the Peacemaker agrees to her terms that she throws her considerable political weight behind him. . . . She was, in short, invaluable as an ally, invincible as a foe. To succeed, the Peacemaker needed her.&amp;quot; Yet it is equally gender centred to suggest that the Peacemaker was incapable on his own to require and recognize the role of women in the constitution, and it is Tsikonsaseh&#039;s conversion to the Good Mind, rather than her &amp;quot;terms,&amp;quot; that are important to the making of the law. Mann&#039;s interpretation might please some feminists, but there is no need to assume that &amp;quot;gender balance&amp;quot; was resisted by the Peacemaker—who designed balance into all other aspects of the law—or even that the balance was not his idea. Perhaps Tsikonsaseh is the only prominent woman named in the lawmaking and peacemaking process, yet for every chief there is a woman who selects and confirms him; for every male aspect of the law there is a corresponding female side. To an outsider, and especially one who sees only the Grand Council in operation as a government, the law does seem male dominated, with the female aspects not in evidence. To an insider, the influence of Haudenosaunee women is so powerful that it must trace its roots to before the founding of the law. The Peacemaker was raised by women, in isolation. The first Creator on earth was not the twins, but rather Sky Woman, who danced the earth into being on the turtle&#039;s back and planted the first seeds. To an insider, the equal presence of men and women at the civil ceremonies of the Haudenosaunee is a powerful indication of the vitality of the women&#039;s role in society.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker acknowledges Tsikonsaseh&#039;s power and creates a corresponding authority. He transforms her from a force for war to a force for peace. This is part of his approach to lawmaking: again and again, he recognizes the abilities and capacities of the people who challenge him, and once he has persuaded them to accept his vision, he explains to them how they will take part in bringing that vision to reality. From keeper of the house of war, Tsikonsaseh is changed by the Peacemaker into a keeper of the Good Message: &amp;quot;I shall, therefore, now change your disposition and practice. . . . I now charge you that you shall be the custodian of the Good Tidings of Peace and Power, so that the human race may live in peace in the future.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He places a further burden upon her: to assist him in the final confrontation with Thadadaho: &amp;quot;You shall therefore now go east where I shall meet you at the place of danger (Onondaga) where all matters shall be finally settled and you must not fail to be there on the third day.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tsikonsaseh is like the Peacemaker, in that her name does not become a title. She becomes his female counterpart, a leader for peace (a &amp;quot;peace chief&amp;quot;) in her own right. As an Erie she would not have had a family among the Five Nations. Like the Peacemaker, she is an outsider of influence; like him, she has no successor today.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Hiawatha: The Man of Sorrows&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hiawatha, it is generally agreed, was a great man among the Onondagas who had gone to live among the Mohawks. In some versions of the Kayanerenkó:wa, the Peacemaker either does not appear at all, or is relegated to a minor role, while Hiawatha is given the credit for the idea of the League and for most of the work of bringing it together. Among the modern Haudenosaunee, though, the strongest, most consistent tradition is that the two men worked closely as partners, each drawing from the strengths and gifts of the other. In Gibson&#039;s 1899 version, Hiawatha is the reformed cannibal, who later becomes a Mohawk leader and (as predicted by the Peacemaker) suffers the loss of his entire family. In the 1912 version, the Peacemaker and Hiawatha have already worked together, and Hiawatha has taken his place as a Mohawk chief (that nation having accepted the peace), when tragedy strikes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hiawatha, married to a Mohawk woman and living among the Mohawks as a leader, is stricken by a series of calamities. Upon the death of his last daughter, he is plunged into the deepest grief. He leaves his people and goes to live by himself in the forest:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now his mind was stricken with grief and Hiawatha now said, &amp;quot;Of course I shall be unable perhaps to perform work of the mind because of the awful thing which has befallen me.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, at that time, the people resident there thought of nothing that they could do to make Hiawatha have peaceful thoughts (be well disposed thereafter). It was Satekaríwate who said, &amp;quot;It might be a good thing if we could divert the mind of our leader (great one).&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now the inhabitants assembled (got ready), and now indeed they attempted to divert his mind. But his mind refused to leave off grieving. They resorted to all those things which they thought would perhaps divert his mind . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before he can recover from this first tragedy, Hiawatha suffers the loss of the rest of his family (in some versions, his fellow Mohawk chiefs seek to console him by arranging a lacrosse game, the very sport that led to more death in Hiawatha&#039;s family):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then Hiawatha spoke, saying, &amp;quot;Awfully grave is the thing which has happened. Now, of course, the thing on which my mind depended has become extinct. Now, indeed, all my offspring have died out.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now it was that he went forth from the lodge and he stood there out of doors. At this time the company of warriors was engaged in a ball game on the flats. At this time the wife of Hiawatha too came out front and went down to the river bank there to fetch fresh water from the stream that flowed along there. So just as she turned about the crowd shouted saying &amp;quot;What kind of animal is it that is calling this way?&amp;quot; At this moment everyone ran towards it and said, &amp;quot;Come, let&#039;s grab it.&amp;quot; Then Hiawatha saw for a fact it came flying there. It fell right where she who had gone for water had been walking at the moment the men ran up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They never noticed that the wife of Hiawatha was walking there as they were all looking up at what was flying there. They trampled her under foot crushing her and as a consequence she died there. For she was then about to have a child. Thereupon Hiawatha said, &amp;quot;Now indeed I am left utterly alone—a widower. So then I shall now go away. So then also I will split the sky (go directly south). At some distant place someone may take pity on me and will wipe away my tears and also rub down my body.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sakokwenionkwas Tom Porter explained in 2013: &amp;quot;Hiawatha walked aimlessly. If he were to die in his wandering he would not care.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So it is that when the Peacemaker meets him, Hiawatha is living far to the south, alone in his grief:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . . Dekanawidah arose when Hiawatha had entered and he said: &amp;quot;My younger brother I perceive that you have suffered from some deep grief. You are a chief among your people and yet you are wandering about.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hiawatha answered: &amp;quot;That person skilled in sorcery, Osinoh, has destroyed my family of seven daughters. It was truly a great calamity and I am now very miserable. My sorrow and my rage have been bitter. I can only rove about since now I have cast myself away from my people. I am only a wanderer. I split the heavens when I went away from my house and my nation.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dekanawidah replied: &amp;quot;Dwell here with me. I will represent your sorrow to the people here dwelling.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So Hiawatha had found some one who considered his distress and he did stay. Then Dekanawidah told of his suffering and the people listened.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are other descriptions of the events leading up to this meeting, and they are all tragic. All involve Hiawatha&#039;s loss of his family through the power of magic. In one version, the culprit is a sorcerer, Oghsinou:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hiawatha had three beautiful granddaughters—a man of the name of Oghsinou desired to have the oldest, but she refused him. He is said to have possessed supernatural powers, and having transformed himself every night into an Owl, perched on a tree near the house, and intermixed with the notes of his new assumed species, dreadful to children, human speech, repeating, &amp;quot;The granddaughter of Hiawatha must admit the embraces of Oghsinou.&amp;quot; In the day time, he repeated his addresses and entreaties; but notwithstanding these or his nocturnal visits, in a borrowed form, and mysterious commands, the lovely Maid persisted in refusing him. She was seized with sickness and died. Oghsinou continuing his visits, armed with Owlish dread, afflicting with the same notes, the disconsolate family, Hiawatha seized his bow and quiver, and going under the tree whence issued the disconsolate notes of the ill omened bird of night, he took aim, and down it came tumbling, resuming the natural form of Oghsinou as he expired . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In another version, Thadadaho, angry and impatient, sends the deaths:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The power of Tadadahoh yet followed them, and caused a high soaring Eagle to fall; it happened to reach the ground at the feet of the granddaughter of Hiawatha, who was far gone in pregnancy. The youth who crowded there to obtain the choice feathers, hurt her, that she died.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The loss so affected Hiawatha, that he rejected all comfort and nourishment: he laid himself down in his Cabin; the principal people assembled there, but he could not look upon them. After some days, he began to sing; they listened, caught the air &amp;amp; joined in the chorus; the burden of the song was, &amp;quot;I am about to leave you; for the solace of my old age has been taken from me!&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When he had finished his song, he took up his pouch, and bid them farewell, recommending his niece to fill his place: he rejected all their repeated entreaties to remain.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the oral recital of this part of the story of the law, the speaker&#039;s voice drops sadly at the end of each sentence, and the speed of his speaking slows. There is sorrow, loneliness, and hopelessness in each sigh.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Baptist Thomas, an Onondaga, provided this version, which Arthur Parker edited and wrote:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a man&#039;s heart is heavy with sorrow because of death he wanders aimlessly. . . . That is why Hiawatha went away from the Mohawks. His only sister—he had only one sister—died. She was Da-si-yu and she died. She was not a comely woman but her brother loved her and so Hiawatha mourned and no one came to comfort him. Not one person came to him in his grief to comfort him, therefore his mind was clouded in darkness. His throat was dry and heavy and bitter. So he went away for he did not wish to stay among a people who had no hearts of sympathy for sorrow. The Mohawks had grown callous and so accustomed to troubled times that they did not care for the sorrows of others and even despised the tears of mourners. . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a time when another great sorrow came, some say it was because his daughters died, he again continued his journey.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hiawatha was a beloved man, one who was able to resume leadership once he returned. But Baptist Thomas&#039;s observation that death had become so commonplace that the people had become hard-hearted and unmoved by tragedy is frightening. Living among people without empathy is an additional reason for self-exile. In the Creation story, Tawiskaron admits to his brother that he feels unable to bear any pity or empathy, and he is himself saddened by that loneliness. In both stories, there is a situation in which a person becomes aware of the reasons for his own sadness but cannot find a way out. They need help. That is part of the lesson in the design of every aspect of Haudenosaunee society. We all need help, at some point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thadadaho is in every case an obstacle to the creation of the law, and a man fascinated with evil, but it may be more consistent to conclude that the person responsible for the deaths of Hiawatha&#039;s family was not Thadadaho but some other sorcerer. There were certainly enough of them around in the dark days. Perhaps the most persuasive reason for this conclusion is that Thadadaho is never asked to account for, or repent for, the killings. Hiawatha is healed by the Condolence, but Thadadaho&#039;s actions would always stand between them unless repentance had taken place. Hiawatha, who would remain in council, could forgive but never forget.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If Thadadaho had been the killer, Hiawatha was setting the great example by not seeking revenge. It is Hiawatha, not the Peacemaker, who combs the snakes from Thadadaho&#039;s hair and straightens out the kinks in his body. To perform this act of compassion for a man who had killed one&#039;s family would be powerful, transcendent. Together, they would join in &amp;quot;putting the bodies away, so they may not be seen,&amp;quot; through the ceremony of Condolence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the other hand, if another sorcerer had been responsible, this would leave unresolved murders, and evil at large in the world, a residual threat to peace. The law tends to tie up loose ends: Haudenosaunee belief recognizes that there is both good and evil in the world, and that evil never really leaves us. The continued existence of evil affirms to the historical rather than mythical side of the lawmaking&#039;s narrative.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Regardless of the version of the law, Hiawatha had suffered deeply as a result of the deaths of his close female relatives, including the unborn child of one of his daughters. He was suffering from not one death but a series of them. They were deaths in circumstances that strongly called out for revenge, but his reaction was not to urge or seek vengeance, but rather to withdraw in grief and pain. His first withdrawal was to leave his own people, the Onondagas, and move eastward, to Mohawk country, to start over. His second withdrawal, after more family deaths, was away from all other people, to live by himself in the forest. He was alone in grief, and his behaviour had become odd: &amp;quot;Hayonwatha was &#039;noticed to be always talking about something, and constantly handling belts and strings made of curious white and purple shells.&#039;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hiawatha was moving towards the use of wampum, but in some versions, he was using substitutes, as did other people, as if they were groping towards the real thing but not achieving it. In these versions, purple sumac, white basswood, and the shafts of feathers were the precursors of shell wampum. True wampum, otkó:wa, the Great Shell, has a permanence that the substitutes do not offer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He cut off a sumac branch, cored it, cut it into short lengths, and then he strung up the sticks making several short strings. Thereupon he sat down next to the embers with his head bowed . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . . they pondered the meaning of the short strands hung up in front of him, trying to understand the small basswood sticks which were cut into short lengths and cored, the sticks that were strung up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The chief of the nearby community, once he had heard what Hiawatha was doing, decided that he, too, would make short strands of beads, since he knew what the man needed: &amp;quot;The chief cut off the tips of feathers and strung them up into short strands and said, &#039;Now I am finished, the short strands are my words, and these will lead the man.&#039;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The act of putting beads in a string, for Hiawatha, was a physical manifestation of his desire to gather his scattered thoughts and feelings and to restore a sense of order. Stringing beads, as any beadworker knows, is a way to impose coherent order and direction upon chaos. It is an act of reunification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Gibson&#039;s 1899 version, typically, there is collaboration. Hiawatha&#039;s stringing of objects leads others to emulate him, and together, the mourner and the clear-minded ones who are seeking to help raise up his mind develop both the practice and the meaning of Condolence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Delos Big Kittle of Cattaraugus, in 1905, has Hiawatha already collecting and stringing the shells as he develops the principles of the law: the Peacemaker, &amp;quot;from his hiding place,&amp;quot; observes Hiawatha at work before approaching him. The first strings of wampum, in this account, are not those of the Condolence, but the beginning of the laws of peace, white for peace, black for war, black and white for the process of peacemaking. How can this be reconciled with other versions? By recognizing that the Condolence is indeed a beginning of the laws of peace:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Presently, as [the Peacemaker] lay meditating, he heard the soft spattering of water sliding from a skillful paddle and peering out from his hiding place he saw in the red light of sunset a man leaning over his canoe and dipping into the shallow water with a basket. When he raised it up it was full of shells, the shells of the periwinkles that live in shallow pools. The man pushed his canoe toward the shore and sat down on the beach where he kindled a fire. Then he began to string his shells and finishing a string would touch the shells and talk. Then, as if satisfied, he would lay it down and make another until he had a large number. Dekanawida watched the strange proceeding with wonder . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After some deliberation he called out: &amp;quot;Kwe, I am a friend!&amp;quot; and stepping out upon the same stood before the man with the shells. &amp;quot;I am Dekanawida,&amp;quot; he said, &amp;quot;and I come from the Mohawk.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;I am Haio&#039;wentha of the Onondaga,&amp;quot; came the reply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then Dekanawida inquired about the shell strings for he was very curious to know their import and Haio&#039;wentha answered, &amp;quot;They are the rules of life and laws of good government. This all white string is a sign of truth, peace and good will, this black string is a sign of hatred, of war and of a bad heart, the string with the alternate beads, black and white, is a sign that peace should exist between the nations. This string with white on either end and black in the middle is a sign that wars must end and peace declared.&amp;quot; And so Haio&#039;wentha lifted his strings and read the laws.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Gibson&#039;s 1912 version, while the movement towards restoration of rationality and health is the same, the details are quite different. Hiawatha is invited by Tekarihoken to the Mohawk village, where Tekarihoken explains to him, in an assembly of the people, what the Peacemaker has done to date, and how peace is coming. Hiawatha replies, confirming this, reciting his own sadness and misfortunes. Hiawatha agrees to stay at Tekarihoken&#039;s house, and that night the Peacemaker returns.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Peacemaker found him, Hiawatha was still in a state of deep depression, mulling over how he—and so many others who had suffered, or were suffering—would come out of it. Where many others had sought revenge, Hiawatha was seeking only solace. Where others might cause trouble—up to and including vengeful murder—with their antisocial conduct, Hiawatha withdrew from society. His choices were peaceful, where others might be vengeful. Yet his mind was so troubled, so clouded by grief, that he could not see his way clear to raising it up again. His choice of peace was more stunned, catatonic, than active. The task of restoring Hiawatha&#039;s reason, and both mental and physical health, fell to the Peacemaker, in the first demonstration that it takes two sides to raise up minds again, through the ceremony of Condolence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sotsisowah John Mohawk explains:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To bring this into contemporary thinking, if you say, &amp;quot;We don&#039;t negotiate with terrorists,&amp;quot; you have taken away your own power. You have to negotiate with them; they are the people who are trying to kill you. But to negotiate with them, you have to acknowledge they&#039;re human. Acknowledging that they are human means acknowledging that they have failings, but you don&#039;t concentrate on the failings. You concentrate on their humanity. You have to address their humanity if you are going to have any hope of stopping the blood feud. Thus, the first meeting, and subsequent meetings, begin with an acknowledgment that people on all sides have suffered loss and that their losses are traumatic ones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; The First Condolence&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker observed Hiawatha for a while before meeting him directly. He crept close enough to hear the mourning man&#039;s words (just as he had crept up on the Cannibal to listen to his mutterings). Hiawatha was trying to console and condole himself. He had the essential idea, and understood the purpose, but he could not get past the first three &amp;quot;words,&amp;quot; the need to clear one&#039;s senses so that the rest of the message would be understood.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In his efforts to create wampum, Hiawatha had been experimenting, without success, with substitutes—small tubes of purple sumac and white basswood, dark and white porcupine quills, and feather shafts. It is as if he had the idea, but was not getting things quite right, and working with an ephemeral personal concept where the Peacemaker would make it permanent and universal. The feathers and softwood were drafts, predecessors of the enduring Great Shell. The symbiosis between the two men—one who could not get things quite right, the other who was near perfection—recalls the relationship between the twins in the Creation story, except that the Peacemaker and Hiawatha forge a partnership to help each other, while the twins are partners in creation despite themselves, and end up as antagonists.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Late in the evening [Hiawatha, having gathered the wampum left by the ducks] came to a clearing and found a bark field hut. There he found a shelter and there he erected two poles, placed another across the tops and suspended three shell strings. Looking at them he said: &amp;quot;Men boast what they would do in extremity but they do not do what they say. If I should see anyone in deep grief I would remove these shell strings from the pole and console them. The strings would become words and lift away the darkness with which they are covered. Moreover, what I say I would surely do.&amp;quot; This he repeated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The chiefs deliberated over the sad events and then decided to do as Dekanawidah should say. He then should remedy the trouble. Then Dekanawidah went in perplexity to his lodge and as he came to it he heard Hiawatha say, &amp;quot;It is useless, for the people only boast what they will do, saying &#039;I would do it this way&#039;, but they do nothing at all. If what has befallen me should happen to them I would take down the three shell strings from the upright pole and I would address them and I would console them because they would be covered by heavy darkness.&amp;quot; Dekanawidah stood outside the door and heard all these words. So then Dekanawidah went forward into the house and he went up to the pole, then he said: &amp;quot;My younger brother, it has now become very plain to my eyes that your sorrow must be removed. Your griefs and your rage have been great. I shall now undertake to remove your sorrow so that your mind may be rested. Have you no more shell strings on your pole?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hiawatha replied. &amp;quot;I have no more strings but I have many shells in a tanned deer&#039;s skin.&amp;quot; So he opened his bundle and a great quantity of shells fell out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker recognized in Hiawatha a kindred soul: from the very beginning of their relationship, he addressed him as &amp;quot;my younger brother.&amp;quot; He also recognized that Hiawatha could not condole himself: that he could not, in his grieving condition, clear his own mind. He needed another person&#039;s help.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Part of the power of the Peacemaker is his generosity of spirit: he assumes the obligations and authority of kinship towards complete strangers, spontaneously, as a means of helping them. So he does to Hiawatha.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once again the Peacemaker meets a person who is behaving irrationally and brings him to the Good Mind. Each time he does so, in the narrative of the Great Law, the Peacemaker encounters a different kind of irrationality, stemming from a different source. In each case, the Peacemaker uses a different approach. In Hiawatha, the Peacemaker met an essentially good man whose mind was clouded by grief. This good man had already gone some distance towards restoring his own mind and reason, but he could not complete the task alone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hiawatha had conceived the idea of the Condolence ceremony. He had a great need to have his personal darkness lifted. In a way, he symbolized all the people, since each of them required the same attention, for they had all suffered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker was bringing the Good Message, and now understood that a powerful spiritual act was needed as the threshold of the law. People would not be prepared to accept his message unless their minds were first made good again. Where it had been enough to trick the Cannibal into rationality and to persuade Tsikonsaseh through power and reason, with Hiawatha the process reached a more powerful level. The path to restoring the rational mind was a deliberate, structured, deeply caring and compassionate ceremony, a ritual of both a spiritual and a legal character. It was necessary to learn how to deal with death. In the dark days, death was still all around.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Compassion is indeed the threshold of the Great Law of Peace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The two of them together—the clear-minded one and the grieving one whose mind was cast down on the ground—created the Condolence. This is not merely a powerful partnership: it also shows how two-sidedness—helping each other—in building law and society can be effective and right. There would be no structure without the Peacemaker&#039;s great compassion; there would be no restoration of the Good Mind without Hiawatha&#039;s decision to accept the Condolence rather than take up the path of vengeance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker was already bringing peace by addressing the irrational behaviour of individuals. He was restoring the Good Mind. Hiawatha, in his grief, had understood that an individual cannot condole or console himself. Yet he had articulated not only the need for a Condolence, but also the beginning of a technique: the first three &amp;quot;words&amp;quot; or ideas, accompanied by the strings of the ceremony. The Peacemaker took up Hiawatha&#039;s invitation and provided not only the &amp;quot;words&amp;quot; that followed, but also the reciprocity and depth of caring that made the ceremony complete. The first Condolence raises up the mind. Later, after the government is created, the ceremony is extended to raising up a chief, in political terms, as well, by adding the last two &amp;quot;words.&amp;quot; The Condolence is the product of a partnership, a brotherhood between the two remarkable men.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Together, they had also established the use of shell wampum as a lawmaking tool, a device for not only remembering, but also consecrating and ratifying the steps and decisions taken by the mind. The first Condolence is the source of sacredness of wampum today, and using wampum is, every time, a way of recalling the beginning of law and peace. Every Condolence is a re-enactment of the first one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once again, the Peacemaker has accomplished a transformation. Hiawatha&#039;s mind has been restored to health, and he has been changed from a mourning hermit to a partner in peacemaking. Compassion has brought Hiawatha back from the borderlands of death. Compassion looks at the man in sorrow, not at the chief in a time of incapacity. It is about rejoining life, not about resuming duty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker says: &amp;quot;My junior brother, your mind being cleared and you being competent to judge, we shall now make our laws.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Christopher Vecsey recognizes that the transformation of the Cannibal and the raising up of Hiawatha&#039;s mind are two sides of the same coin:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The transformation of the outsider into the peacemaker and chief is matched by the three parallel transformations, boundary-crossings, that are the heart of the legend. First, the cannibal—whether it is Hiawatha or Tadadaho does not matter—is transformed into a messenger of peace and power. The figure moves from the most depraved form of human activity to the work of nation-building, from chaotic immorality to the moral project of making political order. Second, the transformation of Hiawatha from grieving wanderer to powerful lawgiver and chief is a replication of the first. In both cases Deganawida cures a sick person—sick from killing too much, sick from too much killing, sick as aggressor, sick as victim—and transforms him into an upholder of social order. Third, the straightening of Tadadaho&#039;s mind and body repeats once again the pattern of curing and transformation in order to create an orderly state. The message of peace is repeated in these episodes and underscores the point that the Iroquois Confederacy exists in order to stop wanton killing and the mourning that produces a desire for revenge and more killing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The myth replicates its message through these transformations. The person of Hiawatha (as cannibal and as mourner) is cured twice, but it is essentially the same cure for the same disease: the disease of killing. The person of Tadadaho is cured twice (as cannibal and as monster) for the same reason. In order to stop the cycle of killing and mourning, and revenge and killing, Deganawida must cure those caught in the cycle. He must cure the cannibal from his monstrously excessive disregard for human life, and he must cure the mourner of his disastrously excessive attachment to his lost family members. The cannibal undervalues, the mourner overvalues, human life, and Deganawida must cure them both. To the cannibal he says, stop killing and form a social order. To the mourner he says, stop mourning and form a social order. The structure of the Confederacy is revealed in these transformational cures. The league exists to stop killing and to comfort the bereaved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ray John, the Oneida chief, has explained the thinking of the Condolence in more direct terms: sometimes, we feel there is nothing we can do but cry. Then, more than at any other time, we have to believe that there will be a tomorrow. We have to believe that our children still need us. It is up to our friends to help us see this. The obligation is not merely to perform the ceremony, but to truly mean it. Another current translation of the way of the Condolence is to say &amp;quot;We sit with you&amp;quot;—often in silent sympathy, for there is not much we can say.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To raise up Hiawatha&#039;s grieving mind and restore him to rationality, the Peacemaker completes the process that Hiawatha has been trying to devise. Hiawatha had been hanging the first three strings of the Condolence ceremony, the same three &amp;quot;words&amp;quot; that are repeated at the woods&#039; edge to welcome strangers. They are the first and most obvious steps to be taken to relieve grief. They address the physical symptoms, the outward manifestations, and the things that, if they continued to be obstructed, would block clear communication of the rest of the Condolence: the senses. The Condolence is sometimes called Teyonhonkwaráktha, &amp;quot;they pity them.&amp;quot; It would be more accurate in English to say &amp;quot;they have compassion for them&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now then, we say, we wipe away the tears, so that in peace you may look around you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And further, we suppose there is an obstruction in your ears. Now then, we remove the obstruction carefully from your hearing, so that we trust you will easily hear the words spoken.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And also we imagine there is an obstruction in your throat. Now, therefore, we say, we remove the obstruction, so that you may speak freely in our mutual greetings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first wampum was all white: access to the purple quahog shells from the Atlantic would come later. The first three words of the Condolence are also white: the white deerskin to wipe the tears from the eyes, the white eagle feather to remove the dust from the ears, the white or clear water to remove the obstruction from the throat. The white beads reflect the whiteness and purity of the things that are used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Three Bare Words accomplish what John Mohawk explained: they recognize people&#039;s humanity; they acknowledge their losses, and that the losses have been traumatic; and they are the doorway to the conversation that is necessary to achieve peace. They are not simply the conversation that the Peacemaker had with Hiawatha: they are adaptable and useful in dozens of contemporary contexts. For example, in addressing the people suffering deeply damaging intergenerational effects of residential schools, Kanatiio Allan Gabriel began with the same words:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is said that, as we walk the path that is our life, there are times when the way is not clear. Things happen to make us lose our way. Perhaps a loved one is sick or has died—it could be something else that troubles us. When this happens we suddenly find ourselves stumbling through the brush.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As we struggle to push our way through the underbrush, looking for the clear path, we pick up burrs and thorns which cling to our clothing, pricking our skin. We get dusty and scared. Our fear causes us to cry and our hearts pound.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is good to see that you have arrived here safely and that we may spend some time together. I know that you have come from far away and that many obstacles were placed in your way. And yet, despite these obstacles, you are able to be here. I take you by the hand as a brother or a sister. I offer you words of greeting and respect. I offer you food and drink.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because that which you carry may cause you grief, we have gathered here together. We know that as an individual you are very strong. But we also know there are times when one needs the strength of others. We understand that when one is in pain, the mind is distracted and one finds it difficult to use the power of a good mind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I speak these words so that your mind may be put at ease and your load lightened. We come together in this way because you are grieving. We come to offer our thoughts and our support. We come to lift the weight of your burden from your shoulders and to share it among us.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First, I take the finest Eagle feather I can find, and with this Eagle feather, I sweep away the dust which clings to you. I remove any burrs or thorns or twigs which may be caught on your clothing. I remove these things because they surely cause you pain and discomfort. And so, I hope this makes you feel more comfortable and more at ease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your eyes may be filled with tears because of the grief you carry. These tears blur your vision and sting your eyes. There may be a sound like roaring in your ears because of the fear, pain and anger you may be feeling. And so, taking the finest and softest deer skin I can find, I gently wipe away your tears so that you may see the beauty that is all around you, and your friends and relations who have gathered here to support and help you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Next, I wipe away any obstruction in your ears which may prevent you from hearing the good words that people speak to help ease your suffering. We offer you a place to sit so that you may rest your weary body.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, your grief, your pain and your anger may cause an obstruction in your throat. It is important to remove that obstruction so that, when you speak, your words may come loudly and clearly so that all may understand what is troubling you. And so, I offer you a drink of pure, cool water. Water is indeed one of the most powerful medicines we have, for it has the ability to give and to sustain life. The water will help to remove that which clogs your throat. It soothes your insides and quenches your thirst.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And so, with all this I hope you are now more comfortable and we have helped to ease your burden. We hope these words have helped to restore a sound mind, body and spirit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kanatiio&#039;s Three Bare Words reflect the ones that are used to greet visitors to a village—the greeting that was no doubt offered to Jacques Cartier at the woods&#039; edge at Hochelaga in 1534. In that context, it is the visitors who may be carrying grief, and the hosts who condole them. Where a chief has died in the village, though, it is the visitors who come to console, and they are the ones who deliver the words, without the greetings, the removal of dust and thorns, and the offer of food and drink.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At a Condolence for raising up a chief, these three words are delivered outside the longhouse, with the grieving people lined up with their backs to the longhouse and the clear-minded ones lined up facing them, having come singing the songs of peace along the road, and now waiting at a respectful distance, but close enough to hear and see. The speaker for the grieving ones repeats and acknowledges what has been said, returning the first three wampum strings. Then everyone goes into the longhouse for the rest of the Condolence ceremony, to repeat and then complete the sequence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Inside the longhouse, the condolers will place the strings on a horizontal rod. Their speaker will recite and recall the names of the original lords of the Haudenosaunee (this has been called the &amp;quot;roll call of chiefs&amp;quot;), walking back and forth between the wood stoves. He carries a cane for cadence, and the recitation is in a sonorous voice, with the last words of each stanza fading out, falling. The clear-minded ones also sing the Six Songs, which are solemn, yearning reminders of the great days of the power and beauty of the League.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following is a composite, but extremely short, Condolence speech in modern English words. It contains the proper &amp;quot;elements,&amp;quot; but not in the exact form delivered in either a Condolence to install chiefs or in full council with other nations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your eyes are constantly shedding tears for the ones who have departed, who have been gathered to the Creator&#039;s land. Because of these tears, you can no longer see your brothers clearly, and your ability to see the world around you has been affected. With this word we wipe the tears from your eyes, so that you may once again see clearly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The grief and sorrow you are suffering have stopped up your ears, so that you can no longer hear clearly what is being said to you. Perhaps there is a ringing or rushing sound in your ears. We take a pure white deerskin [cloth], and with this we once again open your ears, so that you can hear clearly what is being said.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your throats have been stopped up with grief, so that you are no longer able to speak. With this we once again open your throats, so that you will be able to say what you wish, without obstruction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the purest white deerskin I clean the insides of your bodies of any impurities that may have lodged there, so that you can go about your lives in comfort and peace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The memory of the people who have departed sometimes takes the form of the sight of blood on the space where you sit as Chiefs. With this we remove the bloodstains from your mat and once again prepare a safe and comfortable place for you to sit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In your sorrow and grief you sit in darkness in your mind. You cannot see your brothers who seek to raise your spirits once again. With this we remove the darkness you are seeing and feeling.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you have suffered a great loss, you sometimes cannot see the sky above you and around you; you are blind to the beauties of creation. With this word we restore the sight of the sky to your eyes, so that you can gaze about you in calm and beauty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In your sorrow and grief the sun is lost to you, and you can no longer feel his warmth and the light he casts about us. With this we restore the sun to the sky so that you can once again see the world around you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You have traveled far, and your path has been difficult. There are thorns in your feet, and you are in pain from your journey. With this we remove the thorns from your feet and once again make you comfortable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The memory of the people who have passed away is refreshed in your minds whenever you pass their graves. With this we remove the sight of the graves and level the earth over them, so that their sight no longer disturbs your peace of mind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When grief and sorrow strike the people, their fires are sometimes scattered, as their thoughts are in disarray. With this we gather together the embers of your fire and rekindle the fire so that it can once again give you warmth and light.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Not only a person&#039;s close family but all the people suffer when a respected person passes away. With this we once again raise up the minds of the women and the young men, that they may resume their responsibility of supporting and advising the Rotiianeson in their deliberations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are times when grief causes a person to behave in a way that is beyond reason, where they can injure or be injured by bad medicine. This can happen on earth, it is known to happen. With this we remove any shadow of insanity and all bad medicine from your minds, so that you can once again resume your place in our councils and our thoughts with a clear mind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a Roianer passes away, the deer horns that are the symbol of his title are said to fall from him, and fall apart. With this we put his horns back together again, so that the title may be passed on to another person who is worthy to carry that burden for the people.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the first Condolence, the Peacemaker may only have used eight strings of wampum. As time passed, the people who carried out the ceremony added others, to make the compassion more complete. Today, when the Haudenosaunee condole another people over a death, they will sometimes restrict themselves to the first three words, and occasionally go beyond to other aspects that make people&#039;s minds easy, but unless it is time to raise up a new chief, the fifteenth string or matter is not used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hayadaha Richard Hill has pointed out that dispelling the darkness is not only metaphor. In some versions of the Great Law, it is said that as one moves west, towards the sunset, the sky becomes darker, in reference not only to the Senecas&#039; ability to pile up the bones of those who approach without peace in their minds and hearts, but also to the westward journey of the dead. Death itself is called a &amp;quot;thick darkness,&amp;quot; in which the Faceless One acts as an accessory, a facilitator of Death. Dispelling the darkness, then, removes not only death but also the influence of death on our minds. That influence makes itself felt in numerous negative ways, from thoughts of revenge to thoughts of suicide. Reference in the course of the Condolence to removing the darkness and restoring the light is therefore direct reference to taking away death&#039;s negative influence on the living. In modern Haudenosaunee communities, it is said that deaths come in clusters, often in threes. This is not just a spiritual belief: it is a pragmatic recognition by Haudenosaunee psychology that death engenders depression, anger, grief, and depths of emotion and change that must be addressed. Death suppressed, death uncondoled, can bring more death.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The structure of the Condolence ceremony, like that of the thanksgiving, is deliberate, orderly, and layered. It moves from relieving the simplest physical pain—of eyes, ears, throat—to removing external reminders of death and revenge, and finally to restoring harmony, making things as they should be. It moves from the easiest to the most difficult. It moves from symptoms to causes. Only at the end does it suggest that the minds of the &amp;quot;downfended&amp;quot; people are ready to once again raise up a person to take the place of the departed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The message in this transaction is a very important one which needs attention in the area of political theory. The Peacemaker and Hiawatha seem both conscious of the fact that human beings reach places of psychological pain, or feelings of rage, or despairing of hope. They recognized that at such times it is difficult to reach clear thinking and they directed a considerable amount of attention to the pain being felt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this particular instance, the pain Hiawatha felt at the death of his daughters has led him to despair of life. On the day the Peacemaker found him sitting beside the small lake, Hiawatha&#039;s mind was clouded in grief. By countering the grief, by showing care and a commitment to brotherhood, the Peacemaker brought Hiawatha from a place of despair, eventually to a place of hope.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This encounter has powerful implications in the cultural history of the Haudenosaunee. The historical incident at which the Peacemaker recruited Hiawatha provided the model for the condolence practices in the installation of leaders, and provided some of the process by which peace treaties were to be conducted in this part of the world for a long time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By converting the Cannibal, the Peacemaker had acquired a messenger: the man was a living demonstration of the power of the Good Message and would carry that demonstration among the people and nations he met. In Hiawatha, the Peacemaker had acquired a partner, someone who would carry the message with him. From this point on in the making of the law, most versions have the two men acting as a team, the man without a nation and the Mohawk/Onondaga; the messenger from the Creator and the reconstructed grieving hermit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several possible translations for the name &amp;quot;Hiawatha.&amp;quot; Each is linked to an aspect of the law. One says the name means &amp;quot;wampum seeker&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;wampum maker,&amp;quot; recalling how he experimented with other kinds of beads and strings of beads in his attempts to construct ceremonies of Condolence before he and the Peacemaker agreed on shell wampum. Hewitt suggests that it means &amp;quot;River Seeker.&amp;quot; This could be a reference to wampum, again, since kahswénhtha, the old name given to wampum belts, can be a reference to how they flow through time like a river flows. Morgan calls him &amp;quot;He Who Combs,&amp;quot; commemorating how he would comb the snakes out of Thadadaho&#039;s hair. Skaniatariio John Arthur Gibson, in 1899, translated the name as &amp;quot;He rises early,&amp;quot; and also as &amp;quot;He Sifts.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Together, the two men devised a strategy for taking the message of peace to the five nations. They agreed that the Mohawks should receive the three words or principles of peace first. The Peacemaker approached them alone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; The Three Words: Peace, Power, and Righteousness&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker took his message to the Mohawk village first. The people were assembled. They had to wait for three of their leaders, the chief, the Great Warrior, and his deputy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For this plan to work the Peacemaker was required to convince a very skeptical audience that all human beings really did possess the potential for rational thought, that when encouraged to use rational thought they would inevitably seek peace, and that the belief in the principles would lead to the organized enactment of the vision . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker spent considerable time moving from individual to individual among the leadership of the people who much later would come to be known as the Mohawk, the Oneida, the Onondaga, the Cayuga and the Seneca nations. His mission appears to have taken time. He was interested in reaching the thinking of each of these human beings as individuals. He seemed to go right at the intended target individual to offer his hope for the future of mankind, his definition of a way of coming to power, to peace, and to a better tomorrow for all his people, indeed for all mankind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In speaking to larger groups, the Peacemaker spoke more bluntly and simply. Where with Hiawatha he engaged in a long and caring Condolence, with the Mohawks he spoke of the three basic words: those that have been translated as Peace, Power, and Righteousness.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While in the law and in councils, there is frequent reference to &amp;quot;words,&amp;quot; in fact it would be better to think of these as &amp;quot;matters&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;ideas.&amp;quot; Each is something to be considered separately and in the order it was given or proposed, but each one is also inextricably linked to the others. In council, the &amp;quot;words&amp;quot; are deliberately of a manageable, understandable size, so that once all the matters have been addressed and decided, one at a time, together they form a coherent policy. A &amp;quot;word&amp;quot; may be complex. It may be part of a sequence. But it is an idea, a whole unto itself:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then Tekanawita stood up, saying, &amp;quot;I, indeed, am arriving with the Good Message and the Power and the Peace; now it will cease, the warfare and the scalping and the shedding of human blood. This, actually, is how it is on earth: there are pools and streams of human blood. And this now will cease. This, too: you are the first whose village I am visiting with this message you are hearing now.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereupon the chief and the Great Warrior and his deputy conversed in whispers, deciding that they would ask what was the meaning of the three words. Thereupon he stood up, the chief, saying, &amp;quot;We have heard you report the message you are bringing, and we want to ask you about the three words: first, what does &amp;quot;Good Message&amp;quot; mean? Secondly, what is &amp;quot;Power&amp;quot;, and thirdly, what does it mean that &amp;quot;Peace is now arriving&amp;quot;?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then Tekanawita stood up in front of the whole group and said, &amp;quot;You shall listen well, for you wanted to ask questions so as to understand what it means, &amp;quot;Good Message&amp;quot;; this is what it means: people respect each other as though they are one person; also everybody is related among the various nations, so that now they will stop, the sins and activities of evil people; now everyone will repent, the old people and the young people; now everyone will respect one another among all of the nations; and just this is what will operate again, the good, and that is what the &amp;quot;Good Message&amp;quot; means.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Secondly, this is what &amp;quot;Power&amp;quot; means. All of the Nations will unite all their affairs, and the group of several nations will become just a single one, and their power is that they shall join hands. This, moreover, shall be the basis upon which they will survive as a group. Forming a single family, similar to being one person having one head and one life, surrounded by the Good Message. This is how peace will now come about among all of the Nations, and power will arise for families to continue from here on in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thirdly, this is what &amp;quot;Peace&amp;quot; means. Now it will stop, the massacre of humans and the scalping and bloodletting among themselves, specifically, among the people of the various nations. Now as to that, it will end, the human slaughter, because the Great Spirit never planned for humans to hurt one another nor to slaughter one another. So now it will end, the warpath, and everywhere it will become peaceful; the different nations&#039; villages are as neighbours and as to the localized families and their children, what will happen is that they will all be very close relatives; and it will come to pass that they will become just like one family which will encompass every nation and every language. And this: when everyone can travel from village to village, then it will end, the danger and terror, and then everything will be peaceful, and they will rejoice by day and by night as the family continues on, there being no end to peace; that is what it means, the Great Law of Peace, that everyone will be united.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An English translation does not accurately convey the actual meaning of the three ideas. They are more complex than the English words imply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne&#039;skén:nen means &amp;quot;peace,&amp;quot; but it has different meanings when applied to a society or a people—where it means peace, tranquility, or rest (with its opposite being war, strife, or contention)—and to a living individual, where the same word also means health, soundness, and a normal functioning condition (with their opposites being disease, illness, and possession by witchcraft). Good health—physical, mental, and spiritual—is thus an important aspect of the law. Haudenosaunee greetings carry this dual meaning, a wish for peace in a social and a personal sense. The common Seneca greeting, &amp;quot;Kanien&#039;ké:ha niyá:wen sken:nen,&amp;quot; conveys the hope that the other person is grateful for his peace and good health. The Haudenosaunee perception of health does not stop at the boundary of the human body or human society. It extends to the world around us: environmental health means both that humans thrive in an environment that is free of things that cause disease, and that humans must avoid doing things that cause harm to the natural world. The mandate or responsibility of people in the world can be seen through the lens of health, in which &amp;quot;first, do no harm&amp;quot; is a minimum standard, and restoration and maintenance of a healthy environment is an ongoing task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Karihwí:iyo, which is translated as &amp;quot;righteousness,&amp;quot; is more literally &amp;quot;the good word,&amp;quot; but &amp;quot;word&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;way&amp;quot; are blurred. Fenton asserts: &amp;quot;Its first denotation is *gospel*, wholesome doctrine, what is good to be heard, ethical teaching, values, ethics—righteousness. As its second meaning, it denotes justice, right, as formulated in the customs, manners, religion and ritualistic summations of the past experiences of the people. The first is the teaching of good doctrine; the second is the establishment of the good doctrine in institutional forms.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sotsisowah John Mohawk warned of the implications of choosing the English word &amp;quot;righteousness&amp;quot; as a translation. It has taken on both a Christian religious aura and a negative tone (when someone is accused of being &amp;quot;self-righteous&amp;quot;). He explains the pragmatism that flows from the Haudenosaunee concept: &amp;quot;Righteousness . . . is a very dangerous word in English history. But let me just give a sense of how it was used. Righteousness means that almost all of us agree that some things are right, correct, positive, which is to say that they may not all agree that some things are obviously right and wrong. But there are some things they will agree on. So those are the things you start to build on. You have your conversation and your negotiations until you hit the rock hard things.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yoyanere, the root word of the law, Kayanerenkó:wa, can be translated into English as &amp;quot;good&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;goodness,&amp;quot; but it has several other meanings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Its broad spectrum ranges from &amp;quot;correct, proper, right&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;righteous, righteousness,&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;a path, a way, a way of being,&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;welfare.&amp;quot; The concept encompasses all of these positive meanings. In its breadth, it has no English equivalent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lack of an English equivalent to yoyanere points out how ideas that are crucial in one culture can be seen, by the lack of similar words, to be less important in another culture, or to be understood with different emphasis. In Haudenosaunee terms, yoyanere is an important legal concept. In English, none of these ideas has a great deal of legal meaning. In criminal law, the ability to distinguish right and wrong is meaningful, but &amp;quot;rightness,&amp;quot; as a moral concept, is not really what the legal system is about. Rather, it is about what is legal and illegal. Yoyanere has no Anglo-American legal equivalent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other legal cultures in the world, though, do understand *law* as based on the same spectrum of meaning as yoyanere in Haudenosaunee law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One of those legal cultures is that of Hawai&#039;i. *Law*, in the Hawai&#039;ian language, is *kanawai*, a term translated as &amp;quot;responsibility for water.&amp;quot; A fundamental concept of the legal system is *pono,* which has been translated as &amp;quot;righteousness,&amp;quot; but which also carries the meanings of &amp;quot;good, proper, correct, righteous, a path, a way.&amp;quot; The concept of *pono* is important enough to have been made a part of the motto of Hawai&#039;i, created by its last king: *Ua mau* *ke ea o ha aina i ka pono,* the life of the land is perpetuated in righteousness. *Pono* is also a central concept in the criminal law system of traditional Hawai&#039;ian law, *Ho&#039;oponopono,* which centres on &amp;quot;prayer, discussion, repentance, and mutual restitution or forgiveness.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another legal culture that seems to have placed yoyanere at its core is that of ancient Rome. The *Lex Aquilia* governed loss wrongfully inflicted on property (*damnum iniuria datum*). For the first time in Roman history, a law provided a process for adjudicating disputes arising from property damage, and the most essential underlying element of this was the *wrongfulness* of the damage. *Iniuria*, &amp;quot;injury,&amp;quot; does not mean &amp;quot;physical harm.&amp;quot; It means a lack of *ius,* which is usually translated as &amp;quot;justice.&amp;quot; An injury to property, then, is wrongful because it is unjust. *Ius* is defined in the *Encyclopedic Dictionary of Roman Law* as embracing the whole of the law, &amp;quot;what is always just and fair,&amp;quot; what is right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fact that &amp;quot;law&amp;quot; is linked to following a proper path of conduct is demonstrated by the way the Romans dealt with dispute resolution and compensation. A person who has been sued, and who has denied liability and been found responsible by the court, is obliged to pay a double indemnity, twice the compensation claimed. By denying responsibility, he acted in a &amp;quot;non-Roman&amp;quot; way, unrighteously. The *Lex Aquilia* does not specify standards of conduct in detail. Roman society at the time was that of a city state, not an empire. It was coherent and cohesive enough that people *knew* what was right. The Code did not need to set out the principles of justice because they were already well-known: they were the fabric of society itself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;Halakha,* traditional Jewish law, is derived from an archaic term that describes the path that leads directly to the water hole. So is *Sharia,* traditional Islamic law. In both cases, following the correct path is the key to maintaining life in the desert that both religions lived in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Asia, the Buddha taught the *Way* to release from sorrow, the doctrine of the Eightfold Path. He spoke of right views, right aspirations, right speech, right conduct, right meditation, and right rapture. Joseph Campbell points out that &amp;quot;right,&amp;quot; in this context, is the &amp;quot;Sanskrit *samyak*, &#039;appropriate, whole, complete, correct, proper, true.&#039;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;Yoyanere. Ius. Pono. Halahka. Sharia. Samyak.* They are essentially the same broad set of concepts. The idea is that people know what is right and will recognize and implement it. There is a moral dimension to law, and it is that dimension that makes it enforceable by society. It is what one feels viscerally, in one&#039;s guts (*na&#039;au* in Hawai&#039;i). There are times when this sense is manifested in modern North American society. When some of the financial firms the federal government had bailed out persisted in giving their executives generous bonuses, Congress&#039;s 2009 clawback of the bonuses was based on a groundswell of public opinion, based not on sentiment but on a sense of *injustice*. What they did, people said, was not *right.* The danger of translating yoyanere simply as &amp;quot;goodness&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;righteousness&amp;quot; is that those words do not imply the legality, in modern English, of the concepts. Having a law with yoyanere at its core presses towards a legal system based on principle rather than detail. The key questions, as John Mohawk insisted, are consistently: *What is the thinking? Is the thinking right?*&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The third &amp;quot;word&amp;quot; or principle of the peace, Ka&#039;satsténshsera, is often translated into English as either &amp;quot;power&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;righteousness.&amp;quot; It is an imperfect translation. The concept can mean &amp;quot;the power of peace.&amp;quot; It is the power to get things done. John Mohawk explained:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He promised them power. Not military power, but the power of righteousness. Where would this power of righteousness come from? In some societies this is a negative idea because righteousness is often presumptive, unthinking, and uncaring. He defined righteousness as the result of the best thinking of collective minds operating from principles which assume that a sane world requires that we provide a safe environment for our children seven generations into the future.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Power, your power to act, depends upon your capacity to believe what it is that you set about doing can be done. In other words, you won&#039;t do what needs to be done if you think it is a futile gesture.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Simeon Gibson explained to William Fenton that the term&#039;s first meaning is &amp;quot;force, authority based on force, as expressed in the war power of the people; and its second meaning is the power, force or authority of the orenda or magic potency of the institutions of the people.&amp;quot; Both of these ideas are quite different from the thoughtful, pragmatic way John Mohawk explained the power to act.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The English word &amp;quot;power&amp;quot; derives part of its usefulness from its vagueness. It means two quite different concepts, ability and authority. Thus, when one says *The Prime Minister has the power to chair cabinet meetings* (a matter of authority), one is referring to something very different from *Superman has the power to fly* (a matter of ability). In the case of Thadadaho, the authority he ended up with in the law, as a result of the consent and consensus of the founders of the Confederacy, was quite different from the authority he had taken in his earlier form, which flowed from his &amp;quot;preternatural&amp;quot; ability to do harm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The dual meanings in Haudenosaunee languages of the Peacemaker&#039;s three basic messages were generally complementary, each word implying a range of desirable consequences, whether the peace was social or personal, a matter of health or tranquility; whether the righteousness was about justice or about religion; whether the power was the physical or the spiritual force of the people. Translated into English, the three concepts have acquired the further baggage of the English words. &amp;quot;Peace&amp;quot; tends to lose the health connotations of ne&#039;skén:nen; &amp;quot;power&amp;quot; tends to accentuate its military meaning; &amp;quot;righteousness&amp;quot; takes on its Christian connotations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
John Mohawk would translate the three concepts as &amp;quot;peace, righteousness and reason.&amp;quot; Reason, he said, &amp;quot;means that you&#039;re going to do the rock hard things&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You&#039;re not going to settle them, really, but you&#039;re going to do the best you can with them. You&#039;re going to move them as far forward on as many points as possible. The Iroquois law of peace assumes that you will not achieve peace. You will not achieve a perfect agreement between two warring sides about how the world ought to be in the future. But it also assumes that you can reach enough of it to have something to work on so that you can take the conflict from physical warfare over to a place where, as they used to say, thinking can replace violence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ability to grasp the principles of Righteousness is a spark within the individual which society must fan and nurture that it may grow. Reason is seen as the skill which humans must be encouraged to acquire, in order that the objectives of justice may be attained and no one&#039;s rights abused. The Power to enact a true Peace is the product of a unified people on the path of Righteousness and Reason—the ability to enact the principles of Peace through education, public opinion and political and, when necessary, military unity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In explaining the three great ingredients of the law and the peace as a process, John Mohawk reflected on the difference between English, which would use statutes to establish standards, and Haudenosaunee languages, which look towards processes and relationships. Peace, he says, is permanently an objective rather than an achieved state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee Environmental Health Model, a modern manifestation of the three great matters of the law, breaks these three words down into additional components:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;Kanikonhriio* is measured by assessing several areas:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;Iakorihwenton* – Commitment&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;Karihwakwenienhtshera* – Respect&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;Kaiatakweniiotsera* – Responsibility&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;Skennenkowa* is measured by assessing several areas:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;Enskarihwakwarihshion* – Ability to resolve issues&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;Kanoronhkwahthsera* – Love&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;Atenonhwaratonhtserakon* – Gratitude&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;Kasatstenhsera* is measured by assessing several areas:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;Iakotahsnienonhskon* – Generosity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;Ronatennikonhraroron* – Collective thinking&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Why three words? While they may be a reflection of the three words (eyes, ears, and throat) at the beginning of the Condolence, the words used without wampum in a greeting at the woods&#039; edge, the number three is itself significant. It recalls the three breaths that the Creator blew into the first human to give him life. Not all Haudenosaunee thinking involves duality: there are also triads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Taiaiake Gerald Alfred explains:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It starts with the rhetorical gestures that we call the &amp;quot;rare words&amp;quot;: wiping the eyes, cleansing the throat, and unblocking the ears. These are symbolic gestures to pacify grieving people, or the former adversary in a treaty process. The reason that you have to pacify these people is that they are in pain: they can&#039;t see properly, they can&#039;t hear, and they don&#039;t speak the truth. Something serious has happened to them, and the challenge for the strong-minded, the peacemakers, is to take them beyond the pain to a place of peace. What happened to bring them pain? In the ritual—and all your life, if you desire peace—you have to figure out a way of saying something to those people, doing something, or giving them something that will make them capable of seeing, hearing and speaking their way back to peace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The three concepts can also be understood as a sequence. A person hears and is persuaded by the word, the Good Message. He becomes good-minded, and this infuses him with the power of righteousness. In turn, this enables him to seek, create, and maintain the peace. The three concepts are, in a way, a mirror of the three concepts contained in the silver links of the Covenant Chain treaty relationship, made with the British Crown in 1677 and with the United States more than a century later: respect, trust, and friendship. Respect must be achieved first. Based on respect, one may build trust, and friendship may grow from that. But one cannot trust someone one does not respect, and one cannot build a friendship with someone who cannot be trusted. In each case, the three concepts have an order to them, and must be implemented in sequence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the three factors that led to the breakdown of the society of the five nations were greed, hatred, and jealousy, the three new words are their counterparts and antidotes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A constant element in the story of the making of the law is that the Cannibal, Hiawatha, and Tsikonsaseh are living alone—and the Peacemaker invites them not only to return to civil society, but also to learn to share again, for they were not only living but also eating alone. Refusing to share is selfishness, a denial of social responsibility. That is why these people share a meal with the Peacemaker once their minds accept the peace. It is a sign that they have once again accepted the proper way to live with other people. Restoring physical health, mental health, and social health are interwoven.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; From Individuals to Nations&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The building of the Great Law follows a deliberate strategy: to gather together individual minds first; to gather support and confidence; and to build from the conversion of individuals to the conversion of entire nations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker tests his tactics on the Cannibal. He tests his reason with Tsikonsaseh. He develops his compassionate and spiritual authority with Hiawatha. He tests political pragmatism on Thadadahoh. Then he begins to bring the chiefs onside, and with them their families and communities. At each step, the momentum of peace builds, gaining both detail and weight.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This strategy is later reflected in the way consensus is built in council, and even later in the way the Haudenosaunee would deal with other nations. An idea is put forward. It is stated positively but gently, tentatively, to avoid conveying any sense of aggressive or confrontational intent. The people on the other side of the fire then agree with it and add to it, equally constructively, so that, as the matter goes back and forth across the council fire, it gathers energy as it becomes more precise and focussed. Along the way, the talents and gifts of each participant are added to make the movement more effective. In negotiations as in council, the Haudenosaunee will tend to address the easiest issues first, to develop a set of agreements that will carry the parties into a mood of harmony as they develop the momentum to deal with the rock-hard things. They know the hard things are there, and are not going away. Amassing agreement on the easier things makes it more difficult to walk away from the hard ones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process of peace is also structured, in the sense that it follows a pattern, from the smaller to the larger, from the least powerful to the most powerful, and from the easiest to the most difficult.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This flow is reflected in the discussion in the law about the nature of government. That conversation, like many Haudenosaunee matters, is about the process of authority rather than its specific events. It is also about the flow of authority from the people through the chiefs and clan mothers, rather than the vesting of authority in the chiefs to make executive decisions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker&#039;s journey of bringing nations together is not simply an east-west path. Instead, he begins with the Mohawks, visits the Senecas, then moves across to the Oneidas and Cayugas, returns to the Mohawks and Senecas, and then faces the Onondagas. He criss-crosses the Finger Lakes region. This geographical path of persuasion might also be said to reflect the path of an idea or proposal in council. The path flows from the Older Brothers across the fire to the Younger Brothers, then back again and at last to the firekeepers (that is, if one does not count overcoming the Seneca warriors&#039; opposition at the very end).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Mohawk: Testing the Peacemaker&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Mohawks did not at first accept the Peacemaker&#039;s message. Naturally, it was the warriors who had the greatest hesitation, since they had the responsibility of protecting the village, but also because they had the heaviest personal stake in seeing the bloodshed continue. War was the source of their influence. They would not give it up easily. The Great Warrior issued a challenge to the Peacemaker, as diplomatically and indirectly as possible under the circumstances:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As to me, this is what I personally am questioning. What will happen if we accept the Good Message and the Power and the Peace, and the other tribes do not accept it? Subsequently this could happen: perhaps they will come to massacre us. Hence this is what I personally would say to this man who has arrived, Tekanawita . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I might believe it if he were able to climb that tree growing over there beside the river, on the high bank, and if when he sits on the top of the tree, subsequently we were to cut down the tree, which would get knocked down in the direction of the river, now if this man . . . were to pass the test, surviving until dawn tomorrow, then I will immediately accept whatever message he has along.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This test recalls the account of the Peacemaker&#039;s grandmother trying to kill him as an infant. In both cases, the actions involved near-certain death, but without anyone resorting to a weapon, or even using their hands. Burning, drowning, falling, burying, exposure: they relied on the forces of the natural world to do the killing. And the Peacemaker, like Taharonhiawakon before him, was allied with all the natural world.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The account of testing the Peacemaker shows that a good idea is often not enough: people want proof that the idea will work, that it has real, demonstrable power. Reluctance to join the peace is based on fear of what might happen if one community puts down its weapons and others do not. Their enemies may fall upon them. The fear is reasonable enough. People want peace. They just do not want to die as a result of accepting it. It is significant that, in all the versions of the law, nobody says that he rejects peace because he wants bloodshed to continue. Instead, they remain armed out of rational fear. They ask the Peacemaker for a demonstration of the power of his protection. If the power protected him, they reasoned, it would also protect them. In contrast to the Great Warrior and his deputy (for the deputy had issued the same challenge), the chief of the Mohawks fully and gladly accepted the Good Message, the Peace, and the Power on behalf of his family. This is a precursor of the difference in attitude and function of the &amp;quot;peace chiefs&amp;quot; and the &amp;quot;warriors.&amp;quot; In token of this, the Peacemaker gave the chief a new name: &amp;quot;This is now your name and they will use it to address you: Hayewatha, and all of the people will live by it, your name, and it will help them in succeeding generations to say &#039;Hayewatha.&#039;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each time a leader accepts the peace, renouncing violence, repenting for his past conduct, the Peacemaker recognizes this by giving the man a new name, a name that will become a chiefly title. It is a watershed moment, marking a personal transformation. In a way, it is as if the person who refused the peace no longer existed. He had become a new kind of person. The Peacemaker&#039;s authority is reflected in his power to rename people.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker submitted to the ordeal proposed by the warriors. He climbed the tree, and the tree was cut down and fell into the gorge, disappearing into the turbulent waters. The next day, the people saw smoke rising from a fire downstream. They went to investigate. The Peacemaker was alive and well. The Mohawks then embraced the message of peace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today, Cohoes Falls on the Mohawk River—which according to tradition is the scene of the test—is considered a sacred place by many Haudenosaunee, though its power and flow have been restrained by a hydroelectric dam.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To prove his power, the Peacemaker subjected himself to a test that was almost certain suicide. It is as if the legend of the making of the peace contains two streams: on the one hand, a rational path of teaching, preaching, and persuasion, and on the other, a series of powerful, unusual, magical demonstrations of power. In the latter path lie the white stone canoe, the test imposed by the Mohawks, and the physical &amp;quot;straightening out&amp;quot; of Thadadaho. How can they be reconciled? Do they need to be reconciled? Perhaps one can acknowledge that the Peacemaker had a variety of tools he could use, and he selected the devices according to the nature of the challenge. He carried both &amp;quot;power&amp;quot; in the sense of the authority that stems from rationality and pragmatism and &amp;quot;power&amp;quot; in the sense of the ability to do wondrous things.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In most accounts, the Mohawks had not debated whether the ideas proposed by the Peacemaker were correct, but rather whether he had sufficient power, ka&#039;satsténshsera, both physically and spiritually. When he demonstrated that power, by his survival, he then explained to the Mohawks that, by the very process of their deciding to embrace his message, they had shown that the law he was proposing worked for them, and would continue to work. They had made their decision by talking the matter over as a single family—e&#039;tho ní:yoht ne skahwá:tsire tsi ní:yoht tsi wa&#039;tesewarihwayén:ta&#039;ne. They had taken hold of the law by spontaneously engaging in the process that would make the law work, and bringing themselves together as a people in the manner that the law required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By making a correct decision as a single family, the Mohawks had demonstrated ka&#039;nikonhrí:yo, the Good Mind, in both its rational side and its moral side. By choosing peace over war, they had taken the second step, skén:nen, bringing themselves both peace and health. These two steps, taken in order, would inevitably lead to ka&#039;satsténshsera. By showing the people that he carried this power, the Peacemaker had caused them to enact the first step, accept the second, and bring about the third.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Mohawks needed yet more reassurance. What if their enemies should continue to kill them &amp;quot;now that we are letting go of protecting ourselves to survive&amp;quot;? The Peacemaker reassured them, and told them not to worry: &amp;quot;It will stop now, the entire matter of the warpath, now that the door is closing, because now it will be in operation, the Good Message, where the several villages are distributed across the bush; it will be in operation, their Power, as they unite, the several nations; and there will be Peace from this Power.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Tekarihoken, Hiawatha, and Satekariwate: The First Mohawk Chiefs&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the Peacemaker carried the message of the Three Words forward, he was constantly building the more detailed, internal structures of what would become the Haudenosaunee. The great message is constantly repeated in the various versions of the law, as the ingredients of what would become the council fall into place. With the Mohawks, the Peacemaker established the concept that a chief&#039;s title would become permanent, passed on to his successors. That is, the name of the first person to occupy a position would become the title conferred upon each person to hold that position in the future. In the case of the Mohawk chiefs, the Peacemaker gave them new names to recognize the importance of their commitment to peace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
According to Teyoninhokarawen John Norton, writing in the early 1800s, the Mohawk chiefs were given their title-names as a direct result of their commitment to the peace and their will to confront Thadadaho: &amp;quot;Tekanawitagh laid down the wampum he appropriated for the occasion: another Chief laying down his proportion said, &#039;Sadekariwa-tegh, said, &#039;tekarigkogea wakerighwageron&#039;; I put mine among the whole affair.&#039; The first was called from this experience, Satekariwategh, the other Tekarihogea.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ely Parker stated that Hiawatha enlisted Tekarihoken as his speaker and brother, while he would work in the background. In Gibson&#039;s 1899 version, Tekarihoken and Satekariwate are recruited at Hiawatha&#039;s wedding to the former&#039;s daughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At that time the chief said, &amp;quot;So what kind of names shall you and I have?&amp;quot; Hiawatha replied, &amp;quot;You of course are the proprietor of this place. You moreover gave out the information that you and your collaborators had reached a common opinion (decision). And so then, as for you, your name (title) hereafter shall be Degaaihoo&#039;geh, people shall continue to say, and now as to your particular co-worker, he is the one they shall continue to call Cha&#039;degaaiwaa&#039;de, &#039;Of the Same Opinion&#039; . . . these titles which I have bestowed upon you two shall then be confirmed by Deganawii&#039;dah when he comes here.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Gibson&#039;s 1912 version, the Great Warrior of the Mohawks had been uncertain about the authenticity of the Peacemaker&#039;s message, and that was the origin of his title: &amp;quot;You were of two minds, with one you were thinking that it is not true what you have heard about the Good Message, and with the second you were thinking that to the extent that you will see an affirmation, it might be true. So now you accept the Good Message and the Power and the Peace. Now, moreover, I will tell you that this is your name, they will say Tekaihokeɂ, and the people of all nations will be sustained by your name in future days and nights as the families continue on.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These three men became the first decision-making committee of the council of the Haudenosaunee: Tekarihoken, Satekariwate, and Hiawatha. The council of the League was being built, one piece at a time. All three titles are of the Turtle Clan. This is consistent with the historical record, in the sense that when Europeans first encountered the Mohawks, each of the three clans had a separate village.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Westward&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker&#039;s journey then took him to see the &amp;quot;Great Witch,&amp;quot; probably Thadadaho, to prepare him for the coming of peace: &amp;quot;So this is what my errand was: we two should talk, so that he might change his habits. And this: shortly, he would work for and accept the Good Message and the Power and the Peace. This, moreover, is what happened: I promised that several tribes and I would come, and that we will all co-operate with him.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process of building the confederation was slow and deliberate. Visiting a reluctant chief involved planting seeds that might grow later, leaving ideas that could germinate, and slowly accumulating trust. If a person does not accept an idea immediately, one should avoid confrontation, and instead seek to return with more persuasive evidence at some later time. The Peacemaker does not retreat from his proposals, but he may move laterally, gathering strength and support, before coming forward again. &amp;quot;We two should talk&amp;quot; indicates the need for conversation. Conversation, communication, the process, is the beginning of peacemaking.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Visiting the Great Witch alone, knowing that &amp;quot;he is the one who is able to kill; moreover, he has killed many people,&amp;quot; was an act of courage and power.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From Onondaga territory, the Peacemaker went to see the Senecas. They, too, were reluctant to embrace the Good Message, though neither did they reject it:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereupon I left again, going to where the Tionontowaneh live; I arrived at the Chief&#039;s house and talked to him, notifying him that they were arriving, the Good Message and the Great Law and the Peace, and then the chief said, &amp;quot;On the other side of the river is the house of my deputy,&amp;quot; so then we crossed over and, arriving at the chief&#039;s house, we saw him and talked about all the matters and I reported everything. Thereafter the two of them answered, saying we will consider it later. And then I said, &amp;quot;You two will be notified again when unanimity is reached.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Peacemaker returned to Mohawk country and met with Hiawatha again, the Great Peace had become a movement. It was spreading with the help of many other people, and was not relying only on the efforts of the two leaders. The movement&#039;s spread was visible in the brave white columns of smoke rising to meet the sky:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tekanawita said, &amp;quot;look half way between the East and the South,&amp;quot; and Hayewatha, looking there, saw smoke rising and piercing the sky. Thereupon Tekanawita said, &amp;quot;See the smoke rising, piercing the sky. Now as to that, they have heard about the Good Message. This also: they believe in the Power and the Peace.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The reason you see the smoke piercing the sky is because the Good Tidings of Peace and Power have come to the people of that settlement … you will now see as you turn around in every direction the columns of smoke arising.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As communities accepted the message, they would indicate their adherence with a column of white smoke, the colour of peace. In times of war and uncertainty, settlements would not advertise their presence: they would keep their fires low, smokeless, and unobtrusive. As the message gained momentum, these columns of white smoke became visible all around: reassurance, power, and themselves a Good Message, gathering strength, piercing the sky, an impetus and invitation to their neighbours to join in the peace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Oneida: Odatsehte&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Mohawks, at the eastern end of the geographic Longhouse, had embraced the message of peace and power first. East of the Mohawks lived Algonkian peoples—the Algonquins to the northeast; the Abenakis to the east; the Mahicans to the southeast. Between the Mohawks and these Algonkian peoples there were linguistic, geographic, and cultural barriers: it made more sense to work with people who were more open to the Mohawks. The Oneidas, living just west of the Mohawks, were linguistically, culturally, and geographically as close as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tekanawitagh set off for Onondagui and ascending the rapid stream of the Mohawk River, he came to Tehikaghkwetsni, now called Utica: there he met an Onida, with a wolf skin quiver. The Onida saluted him by the title of brother, cousin, friend. To all of which Tekanawitagh made no reply. He then said, &amp;quot;I salute you my father&amp;quot;—true, my son (returned Tekanawitagh) &amp;quot;for none of the trees of the forest are equal to me in age: the willows of the River&#039;s banks alone approach it.&amp;quot; He then continued, &amp;quot;where are you going my father?&amp;quot; He replied, &amp;quot;I am going to soothe the angry feelings of Thatotarho; to reform his rugged appearance, and endeavour to make him like other men.&amp;quot; He then named the Onida, Odatsheghte, or the Quiver Carrier, who replied. &amp;quot;Father, the day is now too far spent; let us remain at home this night. In the morning, if you will return, I shall throw a tree across the path to detain you a little while, and then we shall proceed together to the place where the smoke of Thadadarho&#039;s fires arise.&amp;quot; This was spoken allegorically to the season.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tekanawitagh returned home, and in the spring got ready for his embassy. They came to the abode of Odatsheghte, who entertained them kindly. The people of the Village assembled together, Odatsheghte rose and sung: &amp;quot;This is my father; he is my superior, and I will follow him.&amp;quot; Tekanawitagh interrupting him said: &amp;quot;that will not do, you must sing: &#039;My father and I shall risk together—we are the same.&#039;&amp;quot; Odatsheghte immediately complied, which satisfied him.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker had met Odatsehte beside a cornfield. The Oneida chief had been guarding the corn. He told the Peacemaker: &amp;quot;They roam about, people we don&#039;t know, and they may spoil it, or perhaps wild animals might spoil the corn field, and this is what will impoverish the people, the old people and the infants and the children. Actually, it is our sustenance, the corn.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thayendenega&#039;s 1801 version has the Peacemaker (the &amp;quot;Elder Brother&amp;quot; of two chiefs of the Mohawks) seek help from the Oneidas. He sought both their protection from Thadadaho&#039;s spiritual or magical power and their support in persuading Thadadaho to join in the peace. The story carries the flavour of the Peacemaker bringing the Oneidas into a protective alliance against the evil power of Thadadaho.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Elder Brother being grieved at the cruel disposition of the younger, resolved to go westerly and look for people, and form an alliance with them, he consequently went and met Odadseghte of the Onidas, by their conversation the Mohawk was found to be the elder, and therefore the Onida stiled him father, the Mohawk chief promised to come back the next day meaning the ensuing year and proceeded farther on the business of the confederacy. The next year he went to the Onidas according to the promise, he explained his intentions naming the nine divisions forming the Mohawk nation—it consisting of three tribes, the wolf, turtle and bear, and again were each divided into three subdivisions—the Onida got up and sang, mentioning that his father and him were united, and that his father would be the superior on this; the Mohawk stopped him, and rose, expressing by a song that it should not be so but that they both should be equal [at this the Onidas were satisfied]. Upon this being passed the Onida wished to stop him [to rest a little] saying that he would throw a tree in the way that he could not get over this the other stiled him the big tree and they are yet so called.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now that the Oneidas and Mohawks had committed themselves to the peace, the Peacemaker began to erect the structure that would sustain it. As the three Mohawk chiefs had formed a first brotherhood, so three Oneida chiefs—Odatsehte, Kanuhkwe&#039;yotu, and Teyoha&#039;kwete—would form a second. They would now cooperate in the manner of families on opposite sides of the council fire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The narrative of the making of the peace is also the narrative of the creation of the architecture of the symbolic Longhouse. With two nations committed, the Peacemaker was already able to begin describing how decision making would work, as matters would be considered by small committees first and then by the nations, and as matters would be passed across the council fire between the two groups of brothers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Removing Distractions: Opening the Path and Keeping It Open&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Haudenosaunee law and treaties, the need for open, unobstructed communication is a recurrent, persistent theme. It appears in the Condolence in the clearing of the eyes and ears and opening of the throat. It appears in treaty discussions as the removal of brambles and brush from the path of peace and communication between the nations. It appears in wampum belts that depict a straight line, the path between the nations&#039; council fires.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Maintenance, keeping the paths open, renewing commitments, repeating Condolences, are all linked to the concept that the more a path of peace is used, the plainer and smoother it will become. Relationships are not assumed: they are actively maintained.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
War is often the result of misunderstanding; misunderstanding flows from a failure to communicate; that failure results, at times, from obstacles and obstructions. The path of peace is kept open through constant vigilance and renewal. The river is kept free of rapids and rocks. Neither should the path be obscured by darkness: one Delaware wampum had &amp;quot;sticks thrust through it, as torches to light the way.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Standing and Walking&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Haudenosaunee councils and ceremonies, the speaker stands while all the people he is speaking for remain seated. Standing is a mark of respect for the people being spoken to. It is not a suggestion that he stands &amp;quot;above&amp;quot; them. It is also a rhetorical and political act: it draws attention to the speaker. Today in the Condolence, and formerly in most political councils as well, the speaker does not stand in one place: &amp;quot;*Enyonghdentyonko kanoghsakonghson*—&#039;to and fro in the house.&#039; In councils and formal receptions, it is customary for the orator to walk slowly to and fro during the intervals of his speech. Sometimes, before beginning his address, he makes a circuit of the assembly with a meditative aspect, as if collecting his thoughts. All public acts of the Indians are marked with some sign of deliberation.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Especially during long speeches, and more so in the past than the present, a speaker would walk up and down. Today, Western politicians tend to remain in one place, tethered to their prompters and microphones. Their Roman antecedents used a fixed rostrum, a pulpit adorned with the prows of defeated enemy warships, to address both the people in the Forum and the Senate. Occupying the rostrum was a sign of authority, a place of power. Different nations have their own reasons for having speakers stand in one specific location or move about as they speak. Architecture and acoustics affect the rhetorical cultures. As well, a speaker&#039;s location in council or in Parliament indicates his political identity and seniority. When a Haudenosaunee speaker would walk back and forth while speaking, he would do so on his side of the council fire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Onondaga: Thadadaho&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To the west of Oneida territory lies the land of the Onondagas, the People of the Mountain. Blocking the path to peace was the despotic leader of that nation, Thadadaho. He is presented in most accounts as the greatest obstacle to peace. It took the combined efforts of all the nations, all the people, both men and women, and both mental and spiritual power to overcome him.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no doubt that, by the time he was a mature man, Thadadaho&#039;s mind had become powerfully twisted. One legend describes how he came to be this way:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In his youth he had been gentle and mild, fond of innocent amusements and the chase, and he was beloved by his people who looked forward to the time when he would be chosen their chief and become their counsellor. But one day when hunting in the mountains he chanced to kill a strange bird which, though beautiful in plumage, was virulently poisonous. Unaware of its deadly nature, Ot-to-tar-ho, delighted with his prize, plucked its bright feathers to decorate his head and while handling them inhaled their poison which entering his brain maddened him and upon his return to the village in an insane rage, he sought to kill those whom he met. Amazed at the strange transformation the people were in great consternation and fled from him in fear. No more the gentle Ot-to-tar-ho; no more did he care for their games; no more did he care for the chase, but was sullen and morose and shunned all companionship with his people who also avoided him for he had developed a mania for killing human beings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The poisonous fire that had burned in his brain had so distorted his features that he became hideous to behold; his long glossy hair fell from his head and in its stead there grew serpents that writhed and hissed when he brushed them back from his face and coiled around his pipe in rage when he smoked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Many believed he had been witched, that some ferocious animal had taken possession of him; others that he was controlled by an evil spirit who was seeking to destroy the nation. Various were the surmises of the people but the mystery baffled them and their appeals to the medicine men were received by these wise men in silence; yet they sought by long fasting and dancing in various incantations to appease the wrath of the evil one, but their efforts were in vain for still the demon if demon it was, continued to dominate Ot-to-tar-ho, who only became more furious and violent and seemed to have endowed him with supernatural powers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
His mind had become so powerful that it could project a thought many miles through the air and kill whomsoever he desired. Developing clairvoyance of vision and prophecy, he could divine other people&#039;s thoughts and through this power came to dominate the councils, assuming a control that none dared oppose, and ruled for many years with such insane and despotic sway that he broke their hearts and the once powerful, proud and most courageous of all the nations became abject and cowardly and weak.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other versions add details, almost joyously enhancing the physical and spiritual distortions of Thadadaho:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
South of the Onondaga town there lived an evil minded man. His lodge was in a swale and his nest was made of bulrushes. His body was distorted by seven crooks and his long tangled locks were adorned by writhing living serpents. Moreover, this monster was a devourer of raw meat even of human flesh. He was also a master of wizardry and by his magic he destroyed men but he could not be destroyed. Adodarho was the name of the evil man.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A thing—a shape—that was not human but rather supernatural and deformed; for the hair of Tha-do-da-ho was composed of writhing, hissing serpents, his hands were like unto the claws of a turtle, and his feet like unto bear&#039;s claws in size and were awry like those of a tortoise, and his body was cinctured with many folds of his *membrum virile*—truly a misshapen monster.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He was a person of a frightful deformed aspect, with hissing serpents hanging from his head instead of hair.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When they beheld him &amp;quot;A-do-dar-ho&amp;quot; they were so terrified that they was going to run right out of the Long House. For he was such Superhuman looking man, and of such preternatural of his humanity which he exist, never was seen or heard off amongst the Nations. &amp;quot;His hairs on his head was all full of living snakes. His finger ends were all snake heads, and little above both or his wrists was bent or crook.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the mid-1800s, the physical twistedness of Thadadaho was recognized as a matter of metaphor and legend, an extension of his entangled mind and spirit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thadadaho drew his power—his ability—from the Dark Side, from spiritual and physical powers that complemented one another and that enabled him to threaten and injure people, both those near him and those at a distance. Through intimidation he ruled: &amp;quot;Notwithstanding the evil character of Adodarho the people of Onondaga, the Nation of Many Hills, obeyed his commands and though it cost many lives they satisfied his insane whims, so much did they fear his sorcery.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Though an element of the Dark Times was witchcraft—another contributor to the bloody revenge-taking, anger, and war—Thadadaho was exceptional, because his deformities of body and spirit, and consequent abilities, were so extreme that an entire nation was in thrall to them. To the peacemakers, he represented a true obstacle. If he could not be overcome, the peace would not be possible. As with the others that the Peacemaker met, the choice seemed to lie between changing him or removing him. In a time of uncertainty, the people working for peace recognized that there were many whose minds needed to be changed, but&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
the craziest of whom was the chief of the Onondagas . . . they found him sitting on a pile of thorned mats, with live snakes woven into his long hair. His eyes shook in horror and he could not focus them. He wanted to acquire power with murder. They offered him a chance to accept the good mind. Otherwise they would have to eliminate him. The only real threat to human survival is insanity—people unable to think clearly about other human beings. Clearly, he fit into that category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Over the Woods: Haii Haii&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Skaniatariio&#039;s 1912 version of the law, the Peacemaker and Hiawatha agree to meet in Oneida country. While Hiawatha conducts preliminary discussions with the Oneida chiefs, the Peacemaker has gone to see &amp;quot;the Great Witch,&amp;quot; the one who has the power to kill people (Oneida territory is just east of Onondaga country, Thadadaho&#039;s home). Even before the Oneidas agree to join the peace, the Peacemaker appears to have persuaded the Great Witch that the nations would work with him if he abandoned his evil ways.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The time had come to face Thadadaho. This is perhaps the only true, deliberate, face-to-face confrontation in the process of the making of the law. It required planning, preparation, and courage. The Peacemaker took the time spent on the path from Oneida to Onondaga as an opportunity to teach the people the ideas and songs they would need and use in that confrontation. The songs would give them courage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And when Dekanawita&#039;s appointed time was due for them to go to Onondaga, the Mohawk chiefs and the people assemble together in their Long House. Dekanawida appointed a war chief to sing the Pacification [Confederating] Hymn [which Dekanawida did compose it] on their journey to Onondaga. So the [war] chief commence to sing thus &amp;quot;Haii Haii Haii haii&amp;quot; &amp;amp; so on as they went out of the Long House. And while [they were] journeying through the forest, and [were] passing by a certain tree, there was a very large knot in this tree, the tree spoke and said &amp;quot;Oh-ne-kenh, Ni-ya-wen-enh-ha-tyeh&amp;quot; (the meaning of this Mohawk words, &amp;quot;What&#039;s up&amp;quot;). Then Dekanawida answered and said &amp;quot;We are on our way to Onondaga to pacify and convert the [Great Sorcerer] monstrous [and] evil spirited Thadodaho. To establish peace. In the hostile nations [that it may all be done away].&amp;quot; The foregoing verses Dekanawida did compose in &amp;quot;Confederating Hymn&amp;quot; which he used when he established the Five Nations Confederacy he called &amp;quot;[ ] wa-di-nonh-senh-deh-thah.&amp;quot; It begins as follows Haii haii. Haii haii. &amp;amp; so on. And the writer of this work succeeded in dividing it into thirty verses. And this is the hymn that Dekanawida&#039;s singer was singing on their way to Onondaga.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From here below, while Dekanawida&#039;s messenger was exploring the forests [where] to discover Thadadahoh&#039;s smoke ascending from the earth to the sky. The reader will see the &amp;quot;Pacification Hymn&amp;quot; that was sung all the way through the forest from the Mohawk River to Onondaga in the State of New York. And the said Hymn was submitted to the Mohawk Chiefs after Dekanawita composed, and confirmed by them. With the ceremony to create (Rodiyaner) Lords.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The people, led by the Peacemaker and Hiawatha, were walking the path between Oneida and Onondaga. It would not have been a terribly long path: the distance from Oneida Lake to Onondaga Lake would take a man a day at its shortest. The path may have been dangerous, and this would have been another reason for the people to announce themselves by singing as they walked. The song the Peacemaker taught them along the way is a song of dignity and power, a song unlike others. It is a slow, dignified song, with a leader who carries the main part and a response by the people as they walk. It is the song that the people sing &amp;quot;along the road&amp;quot; as they walk today to the longhouse to condole a grieving people and raise up a new chief.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As sung, it [Haii] is the most prominent feature, and is expressive of joy or sorrow according to the tone, as with some of our ejaculations. Hennepin said: &amp;quot;There was an Iroquese captain who, one day wanting his bowl, entered into the town of Montreal in Canada, crying &#039;Hai! Hai!&#039; which in their language is the sign of peace; he was received with many caresses of kindness.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While the songs themselves are probably unique to the Haudenosaunee, the use of haii haii within the songs is probably not. The sound is one of pacification, for several nations: Onondaga sentinels in the woods would have known that the walkers were coming in peace. Describing the Huron Feast of the Dead, Brebeuf wrote: &amp;quot;At the end of the feast, as a compliment to him who entertained them, they imitated, as they say, the cry of the souls, and issued from the cabin crying *haéé, haéé,* and reiterated this cry of the soul all the way. This cry, they say, comforts them greatly; otherwise this burden, though but of souls, would weigh heavily on the back, and cause them a pain in the side for the rest of their lives.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee &amp;quot;cry of the soul,&amp;quot; used in the original peacemaking, continued to be used in international councils. In 1723, meeting with representatives of Massachusetts, &amp;quot;The delegates made Three Moans, then their Speaker made a Procession thro&#039; them, lamenting and bemoaning, which continued a long time, being now and then prompted by the Tribes; The Procession and Lamentation being at an end, their Speaker took his Seat, and after some time the Delegates made another heavy Moan.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Haudenosaunee political discourse (like Haudenosaunee music) is participatory. There are appropriate times for the entire delegation to express its agreement with or support for the speaker&#039;s words, and when a ceremony is being done, there are places in the speech where the delegation joins in with song. In dealing with Thadadaho, this participation sent two messages: it gave the speaker their support at a time when he might be intimidated, and it told Thadadaho that their minds were all one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; The Pacification of Thadadaho&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The journey from Oneida country to Onondaga is different from all the earlier parts of the Peacemaker&#039;s journey: almost every other trip had been made by the Peacemaker or Hiawatha, either alone or the two of them together. Now, for the first time, all the people had gathered on a walk for peace. The song helped their unity of mind, for it was something they would learn together and sing together. The walk helped bring them together as a shared experience. Facing a great danger together—and preparing together to face that danger—added to the practical unification they were experiencing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To get to the place where Thadadaho&#039;s fire burned, the delegations had to face spiritual obstacles in the form of tangible dangers. They had to cross Onondaga Lake, and Thadadaho&#039;s evil mind controlled the waters and winds of the lake. This was an opportunity for the Peacemaker to show once again that he, too, carried spiritual power: the power of Peace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They then entered the boat and he (Dekanawideh) stood in front of the boat and Hahyonwatha sat in the stern and the rest of the lords then noticed that the boat was made of white marble. Then they embarked in this boat from the shore and they had not proceeded far on their journey when they heard a voice calling out, &amp;quot;A-soh-kek-ne—eh,&amp;quot; and as soon as this voice had called out a strong wind arose and caused the lake to become very rough and troubled and great billows formed upon its surface and more especially around the boat. Then those in the boat became frightened and said: &amp;quot;We are now going to die,&amp;quot; but Dekanawideh spoke and said: &amp;quot;There is no danger because Peace has prevailed.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then Dekanawideh further said to the wind and lake, &amp;quot;Be thou quiet, Ga-ha, and rest.&amp;quot; Then the wind and the roughness of the lake ceased. They had not gone much farther when the man across the lake called out &amp;quot;Asohkekne—eh,&amp;quot; and then the wind and roughness of the lake became still more violent. Then again Dekanawideh said: &amp;quot;you, the wind and the lake, be still, for we have not crossed the water yet.&amp;quot; Then again the lake became calm. Then Hahyonhwatha began to paddle hard and the boat went so swiftly that when they reached the shore, the boat plowed deeply into the dry land on the shore bank.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Newhouse says that part of the pacification of Thadadaho was the recital by the Peacemaker of the Three Bare Words, the &amp;quot;first three out of the thirteen strings of wampum&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1st Wampum String&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We now take the hand, and wipe the tears from off your eyes. So that you may see clearly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2nd Wampum String&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This it occurs when one of their number passes away by death. Then sorrowness and sadness is filled in their throat. Therefore we now take the sorrowness and sadness out of your throat, so you will now breathe more freely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3rd Wampum String&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This it occurs when one of their number is removed by death, it stops their ears from hearing. So now we unpluck [unplug] and clean out your ears, so you will now hear distinctly when any one address you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then and as the above three strings of wampums was read they was forwarded to the Onondaga chiefs one at a time. And was reread by them and were then brought back again to the Mohawk Chiefs. Dekanawita addresses to the chiefs of Thadadaho&#039;s attendants, and said we will finish the other part of the ceremony in your long house. The chiefs of Thadadaho&#039;s attendants left two warriors with Dekanawita, to lead him, the Mohawks and Oneidas, with their people into the Onondaga Long House.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Condolence that, for Hiawatha, was an act of compassion, transforming him from mourner to optimist, became for Thadadaho a physically, mentally, and spiritually transformative ceremony. After going through the entire Condolence ceremony, the Peacemaker suggested that the people who had come with him to Onondaga should go outside and sleep at the woods&#039; edge, because it was after dark. The Onondaga chiefs had other ideas:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And [it was now way] late in the night when this ceremony ended. Dakanawida [orator] then [announce] propose to his comrade Lords for them to depart out from the Long House and go to the edge of the bushes, and lay down to sleep. &amp;quot;Come let us go out,&amp;quot; says Dekanawida, and as they were about to depart out of the House, then one of the Lords of the opposite side of the Council fire, spoke and said, &amp;quot;wait patiently for a few moments.&amp;quot; And so it was [complied with and] in a very little time the Lords of the opposite side of the council fire spoke again and said it was decided by my lords, that we will &amp;quot;en-de-wen-na-ka-ra-nyeh.&amp;quot; And be decided in your minds. But now we let our females go, [and be easy] [only don&#039;t be too much on them]. So they did enjoy themselves by their Indian dance. For the progress [and success] did made in creating and installing new lords to a satisfactory and with joy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: of the above part of the ceremony, it is always performed accordingly, afterwards when Dekanawida completely established the confederacy. But at time he omitted on account that he had to perform that peculiar and wonderful act with a superior power. The people that were eye witness at the time had never seen before. As you will see with the foregoing his acts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dekanawida said to the Chiefs we will commence on Thadadaho and convert him from sorcery, his ferocity and evil spirit, and remedy [transform] his preternatural humanity. If we will succeed, then we will say we have accomplished our undertakings [as anticipated]. And he said to the chiefs what will we say that we all lay down minds and spirit. The chiefs sanctioned his proposition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dekanawida then took one string of wampum in his hands and addressed Thadadaho in these words. &amp;quot;All the reptiles shall now be removed from under your hair, [it will now cease the malformation of your hair] and it shall become [clean like the hair of any other human being] like any other human hair.&amp;quot; Then he laid the wampums down on the ground and he laid his hand on Thadadaho&#039;s head and rubbed it [stroke it] downwards and the reptiles immediately disappeared [the malformation which was snakes before changed] and his hair became like any other human hair.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dekanawida took another string of wampum in his hands and addressed Thadadaho in these words: &amp;quot;Your mind shall now be transformed . . . and shall become like any human mind&amp;quot; and the sorcery and evil spirit left him completely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He was seated at the further end of his house, without any clothing to cover the deformities of his body, his hair was frightful serpents. Tekanawitagh and the other chiefs approached him; they spoke, delivering wampum until they removed all his deformities; they then covered his body with a garment and put moccasins on his feet. After they thought that they had restored him to his natural state, and removed every deformity, they returned towards home . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Next summer [Tekanawitagh] again set out, taking his son Odatsehte by the hand as he passed his village. They came to the abode of Tadadahoh, who now made a more comely appearance than he did at the former meeting: he seemed to improve under their hands. The task which yet remained for them to perform was to rectify the concealed parts, to interest his heart in the welfare of the confederacy by inducing him to think, that his own interest and honour was linked to that of the public, to insinuate by this means into his mind, the seeds of brotherly love and affection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thayendenega Joseph Brant has the Mohawks and Oneidas proceed together to Onondaga:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They went together to Onondaga, they found the chief there very obstinate, they with difficulty brought him to agree the Mohawk stiling him brother, and equal in the confederacy; when they went to return home, one of the young men had forgot his maukissins and went back to look for them, as he was by the side of the house he heard the Onondaga singing that what the father and son had proposed to him did not suit him and that he could not wear it—when he overtook them he told what he had heard—in consequence of which they agreed to return next year—they did and then the Mohawk proposed to the Onondaga, that he should keep the council fire of the confederacy, and that he should carry their title—these condescensions brought him to agree.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
John Buck described the chiefs meeting Thadadaho and going through the words at the woods&#039; edge, and then doing the entire Condolence ceremony, much as it is today:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Undaunted, De-ka-na-wi-da said: &amp;quot;We are now here. We came seeking Tha-da-da-ho. Now, chiefs, unwrap again your *matters*.&amp;quot; Obedient to this command they took the wampum strings out of the pouch one by one, thirteen in number, representing as many matters of importance and moment, and they placed them in order on a horizontal rod. This done, De-ka-na-wi-da said, &amp;quot;Let us express our thanks, for this is now being competed.&amp;quot; He then sang the Six Songs . . . When these Six Songs were being sung Tha-da-da-ho listened attentively to them and even manifested a feeling of pleasure. Lastly, he raised his horrid head, an act he had never been known to do. Whereupon De-ka-na-wi-da, elated by this propitious sign of mental regeneration, exclaimed, &amp;quot;So let it come to pass. What we have undertaken is being accomplished in the manifestation of returning reason and anthropic feelings.&amp;quot; Then Tha-da-da-ho spoke and said, &amp;quot;It gave me great pleasure to hear the singing of the Six Songs.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In John Buck&#039;s 1888 version, Thadadaho is returned gradually to humanity, by song and words, step by step. The Peacemaker explains each step to him before it is performed. After the Woods&#039; Edge and the Condolence and the Six Songs, as he becomes increasingly rational, he is given his own song, which helps to &amp;quot;reconstruct and straighten out thy mind&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Hai-i, hai-i, hai-i, hai-i, hai-i, hai-i, hai-i, hai-i, a-kwe-wi&#039;-yo e-kon-he-wa-tha (my beautiful thing, [it is a] besom).&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Chiefs&#039; Version describes a gradual pacification, almost like a domestication of a wild animal:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then the man looked around and he saw these men (the lords) standing all around him, but he did not answer but kept silent. Then these lords looked at his head while he was sitting on the ground and they saw his hair moving as if it were all alive and they saw that the movements of the hair greatly resembled that of serpents, and they looked at his hands and saw that his fingers were twisting and contorting continually in all directions and in all manner of shapes, and they became impatient because he would not answer the message:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When Dekanawidah started to address this man, the man became troubled and after all of the lords finished addressing the man his sympathy was affected and he shed tears. Then Dekanawidah said: &amp;quot;We, the delegates of all the nations who have accepted the Good Tidings of Peace and Power, are now assembled here&amp;quot;. . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . . Then the twisting movements of the fingers and the snakelike movements of the hair of Thadadaho ceased.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then he spoke and said: &amp;quot;It is well. I will now answer the mission which brought you here. I now truly confirm and accept your message, the object of which brought you here.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most versions, written and oral, give Hiawatha the role of removing the snakes when Thadadaho&#039;s mind had been restored. Converse says Hiawatha combed the snakes from Thadadaho&#039;s hair with wampum. Newhouse says that the Peacemaker did the combing, and put wampum down before Thadadaho first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have now accomplished our great work and completed everything that was required with the exception of shaping and transforming him (by rubbing him down), removing the snake-like hair from him and circumcising him.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lords therefore all took part in doing this and Ohdahtshedeh was the first to rub down Thaddodahho and the others followed his example so that the appearance of Thaddodahho might be like that of other men.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
His hands we will mend and adjust, so that they will be like those of other men; his hair of living serpents we will change from its snakehood, so that his hair may be like that of other men; and his hands, awry and misshapen as they are, we will make like those of a human being; his feet, also, deformed and unnatural as they are, we will change to the shape common to those of other men, and lastly, that with which he is trussed, his *membrum virile*, we will reduce to its proper length and size—we will make it six thumb widths in length.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There had been several steps. First, Thadadaho&#039;s opposition was checked. Second, he was pacified enough to be willing to be transformed. Third, he was physically transformed. Fourth, having been changed and comforted, his mind was also made good.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Combing Thadadaho&#039;s hair has another level of symbolic meaning. Ensnarled, matted hair indicated the ferment and confusion of the mind operating in the head that carried it. Just as Shonkwaiatíson straightened the rivers, smoothed the rapids, and opened the paths of communication, and just as, at the woods&#039; edge, those paths are straightened again and the obstacles and brambles removed, so combing and straightening the powerful man&#039;s hair—and straightening his limbs, too—indicates straightening out his mind. Just as the best path to a place would be the most direct, so the best way for a mind to function is to address issues in a way that is straight, not twisted. Transforming his hair and his body meant transforming his mind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If it is Hiawatha who combs the snakes from Thadadaho&#039;s hair and smooths out his body, this carries another layer of significance. Thadadaho had killed Hiawatha&#039;s family. Instead of seeking revenge, Hiawatha becomes a healer. It is an ultimate act of spiritual strength and reconciliation. He is both the most appropriate and the most unexpected person to heal Thadadaho.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once Thadadaho had been physically transformed, and had become rational, he was ready for the pragmatic political conversation necessary to accommodate him within the structure of the law. His mind was now functioning properly: a good mind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tsikonsaseh and the Peacemaker placed the deer&#039;s antlers on Thadadaho&#039;s brow: the slender antlers of a Confederacy chief replaced the waving snakes. In doing so, she was acting as a clan mother would act. In placing the antlers on this crucial last chief, the chief responsible to all other chiefs, she was in effect acting as the clan mother for the entire Confederacy. Thadadaho became the keystone. &amp;quot;On this very day,&amp;quot; said the Peacemaker, the peace had arrived.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once it had become clear that the power of the Song of Peace and the concepts that the Peacemaker had brought would transform even Thadadaho, the people became convinced that the power of peace would indeed spread, to other nations and later generations. As Newhouse states the Peacemaker said then: &amp;quot;For it matters not how ferocious a Nation we may come in contact with. We now know it to be certain that we can always succeed and establish this Government of Peace among the hostile Nations.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thadadaho had intimidated the entire Onondaga nation into supporting and obeying him. In this, the nation had taken part in the warfare and supported the evil. The Condolence of Thadadaho may have been directed at one powerful individual, but it was certainly also aimed at raising up and clearing the minds of the people around him.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The conversion of Thadadaho demonstrates several important principles of the law:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pursuit of peace is not merely the pursuit of the absence of violence, because peace is never achieved until justice is achieved. And justice is not achieved until everyone&#039;s interests are addressed. So you will never actually finish addressing everyone&#039;s issues. There will always be unfinished business. You can&#039;t achieve peace unless it&#039;s accompanied by constant striving to address the issues of justice. It means that your job will never end.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Iroquois law of peace assumes that you will not achieve peace. You will not achieve a perfect agreement between two warring sides about how the world ought to be in the future.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To deal with a difficult problem, the nations must remain committed to working together. Their unity of mind and purpose is their greatest strength.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker had tested his ways of dealing with irrational and dangerous people quite deliberately. He began with isolated individuals—the Cannibal and Tsikonsaseh. He did not shrink from testing, but he approached nations with caution and forethought. As a matter of tactics, it is often best to begin with the easiest and most obvious and to build towards the hardest challenges; to secure the agreement of the people most likely to support the proposition and to cause the holdouts to become increasingly more isolated as a means of persuading them that joining is their only viable option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process of securing peace had taken years, as the consensus built. The legend is a lesson in persistence and patience. Haudenosaunee teachers often explain that a thing worth doing can take years. They also say: &amp;quot;it takes as long as it takes&amp;quot;: better to do things right than to do them in haste. The same idea of purposeful patience pervades the decision making of the councils, and that tends to frustrate deadline-governed business people and bureaucrats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The power of men and women must be balanced and combined. The pacification of Thadadaho did not happen—it does not matter which version one looks to—until Tsikonsaseh joined in the ceremonial effort. She provided the &amp;quot;women&#039;s side.&amp;quot; Gibson describes how Tsikonsaseh fulfilled the role of Thadadaho&#039;s clan mother: &amp;quot;Now she has arrived, our mother, the Great Matron whose name is Tsikonsaseh; now she has accepted the Good Message, and this, moreover, is what you should confirm and adopt, the Great Law, so that she may place antlers on you, our mother, and they together shall form a circle, standing alongside your body.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Thadadaho&#039;s Political Interests&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some analysts downplay the spiritual side of the pacification of Thadadaho and concentrate on the Peacemaker&#039;s astute political sense. He had offered the &amp;quot;powerful wizard&amp;quot; the &amp;quot;head chieftainship&amp;quot; of the new Confederacy. What, in fact, had been offered? And how did that translate into the practical functions of Thadadaho in the historic Confederacy?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Peacemaker met with &amp;quot;the Great Witch,&amp;quot; early in the peacemaking efforts, he reported back to Hiawatha: &amp;quot;So this is what my errand was: we two should talk, that he may change his habits. And this: shortly, he would work for and accept the Good Message and the power and the Peace. This, moreover, is what happened: I promised that several tribes [nations] and I will come, and that we will all cooperate with him.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Chiefs&#039; Version attributes the idea of granting Thadadaho special authority to Odatsehte of the Oneidas: &amp;quot;In my opinion this man may approve of our mission if we all lay our heads before him.&amp;quot; (This means that the nations here represented would be submissive to this man Tha-do-dah-ho). Then Dekanawideh and Skanyadahriyo spoke and said: &#039;We acquiesce to all that Odatshedeh has said.&#039;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the nations are committed to the peace, and the Onondagas, out of fear of Thadadaho, are seen as holdouts, the Peacemaker brings the delegation of chiefs to Thadadaho with their joint proposal to grant him special authority: &amp;quot;Moreover, everything reposes there, the minds of the several nations, and as to you, they place before you their proposition that it is you who are to be the title bearer, and Great Chief, and you are also to be fire keeper at the place where we will kindle the fire, whose rising smoke will pierce the sky.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Becoming the firekeeper involved great prestige, but also great responsibility. Virtually every aspect of Haudenosaunee law seeks this balance of authority and obligation. The power given to Thadadaho was neither unchecked nor arbitrary. It was as much a burden as it was an honour. Furthermore, the exercise of the authority required considerate and careful stewardship, the qualities that the old, irrational Thadadaho lacked. In converting Thadadaho, the Peacemaker had employed interest-based negotiations, understanding what Thadadaho and the Onondagas wanted and needed. This problem-solving technique is reflected in Haudenosaunee tactics and treaties over the following centuries.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Making the Onondagas the firekeepers was logical. Geographically, they were the central nation. Militarily, they were not numerous enough to be threatening or dominant. If their spiritual power was acknowledged, for good or evil, then their role as protectors of the council fire could become a powerful force for the good.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The combination of spiritual and political authority—and the understanding that these are separate concepts that gain further authority when they are combined—is not unique to the Haudenosaunee. The Queen of England opens Parliament as head of state and as head of the Anglican Church, in a show of vestigial spiritual authority in a secular state. However, different peoples define the separation differently, as the Maoris and *pakehas* have discovered in their differing interpretations of the effects of the Treaty of Waitangi.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are really two separate transactions with Thadahaho. Before a rational political conversation can take place, the spiritual and emotional obstacles must be removed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The beginning of the pacification of Thadadaho is accomplished through the repeated singing of the Song of Peace. In contrast, the negative power of Thadadaho is manifested in his own songs and words, by which he daunts the Peacemaker&#039;s messengers, calling up the high winds, threatening to swamp their canoes on Onondaga Lake. His power is supernatural—or rather, it is power enlisted from aspects of the natural world—but if it is spiritual power, it comes from the dark aspects of the spirit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The transformation of Thadadaho is symbolized in a number of different ways. When he is a force for harm, he has snakes in his hair: when he becomes a keeper of the council fire, one of his responsibilities is to remove any &amp;quot;crawling things&amp;quot; that might find their way near the fire. He himself becomes the remover of snakes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Good-mindedness, health, and beauty are opposed to a twisted mind and body. Thus, the Peacemaker is able to call upon his own beautiful face to shock the Cannibal into right-mindedness; his opposite, Thadadaho, is twisted in limb and mind, but can be straightened out. Another contrast between the Peacemaker and Thadadaho is the former&#039;s association with the eagle, the highest flying of the animals of the air and sky world, while Thadadaho is linked with snakes, the messengers of bad news and the underworld (once his mind is good again, he is also given a bird&#039;s wing to sweep the council area clean—usually said to be a white gull&#039;s wing for purity).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process of condoling the other rotiyanershon is that their nation proposes a person to its brother nation (Cayugas to Oneidas, for example), and then that side of the fire proposes the person to the nations on the other side of the fire. That is not the way with Thadadaho: he is proposed only by the Onondagas, without being joined by the other Older Brothers, the Mohawks and Senecas. He is proposed to all four of the other nations together, and it is up to them together to accept him. He is thus to be a chief responsible to all other chiefs. He has no clan mother. His uniqueness is accentuated by the other name he is called: Desenagehte, He Carries the Name. It is possible to see this not only as a reflection of the idea that his &amp;quot;family&amp;quot; is the entire council, but also that his clan mother was Tsikonsaseh, a woman who, like the Peacemaker, had no successor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; The Fire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For human beings all around the world, the fire is a symbol of warmth and light and protection. In many languages, &amp;quot;hearth&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;home&amp;quot; are synonyms. For the Haudenosaunee, a &amp;quot;fire&amp;quot; is also a symbol of a nation, and the symbol of the council.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most North Americans have only intermittent contact with fire—as a campfire or bonfire, an ornamental fireplace, or perhaps a wood stove. They know of the fire&#039;s destructive power from television pictures of forest fires. They do not see a fire used for warmth and light and cooking every day. For the people who made the Kayanerenkó:wa, fire was a practical constant in their lives. There was always a fire burning near their sleeping place. The fire was the focus and the symbol of the family.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As Firekeepers, the Onondagas look after not merely a symbol or thing, but also a process. Anyone who tends a fire, and anyone who spends time with a fire, is aware that it is a process of consumption and combustion, with a modest beginning and a quiet, smouldering end. Tending a fire, looking after its appetite for wood, is a matter of patience. It takes as long as it takes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fire is also potentially dangerous. Especially in a woodland environment, and in wooden or bark houses, fire can easily get out of control. Being Firekeepers, for the Onondagas, did not mean possessing control over the outcome of the councils, but rather control over the process of council. &amp;quot;Control&amp;quot; is probably the wrong word: the Onondagas carry the responsibility of ensuring that the council does not get out of control, in the sense that it should remain focussed on the work to be done, should not descend into anger or thoughtlessness, should not allow personalities or emotions to stand in the way of the good mind and its rational thought. As firekeepers, the Onondagas&#039; &amp;quot;control&amp;quot; over the council fire means protecting both the fire against attack and the council against loss of reason. It is a procedural rather than substantive responsibility. Part of that procedural responsibility is to ensure that only one issue is considered at a time. Another is to ensure that the fire does not go out before the council is over. Being hosts of the Grand Council is an honour and a burden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Great Law, fire is used for several purposes. It is mentioned briefly as the cooking fire. It is the fire by which one warms oneself. But it has three distinct purposes within the culture and eventually the law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First, in a woodland environment, fire is a way of calling attention to oneself. One could not see a village from a distance, but one could see the smoke rising from its fires, &amp;quot;piercing the sky.&amp;quot; An individual arriving at the edge of a clearing, and wanting to enter the village in peace, would probably have built a fire to announce himself. In the course of the making of the Great Law, the Peacemaker does this several times—for example, after he survives his test at Cohoes Falls. The smoke from fires to call attention to oneself always &amp;quot;pierce the sky.&amp;quot; These fires were deliberately smoky. Newhouse states: &amp;quot;This was the custom, to make a smoke so that the town might know that visitors were approaching and send word that they might enter without danger to their lives.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Second, a fire is a council fire. It has been said that the first step in all architecture was when nomadic hunter-gatherers would stop for the night and decide where to make the fire: the location of the fire determines where people cook, sleep, and eat. The council fire of the Haudenosaunee sets the places for the nations to sit: it provides the focus for the structure of the council. In the various versions of the Great Law, when the council fire is referred to, it is less frequent that it is referred to as piercing the sky. The council fire is a focus, not a distraction. As council is to be a place of unobstructed communication, it would be counterproductive to have a smoky council fire, or one that distracted through its crackling and sparks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During the making of the Great Law, the villages that supported the peace would show that support by sending brave white smoke to the sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Third, the smoke rises, and in rising, connects to the Sky World, calling the Creator&#039;s attention to what is happening at the fire. If the source of the fire is sacred, the Creator&#039;s attention is attracted even more. Thus, tobacco burning is a ceremony deliberately used for the purpose of calling upon the Creator for attention and help: the white smoke rises, and as the tobacco originated as a sacred plant of the Sky World, so the Creator notices. In modern councils, while there is a fire in the wood stove in the longhouse, the &amp;quot;council fire&amp;quot; or katsistowá:nen is a bunch of wampum strings, the symbols of the fire as well as of the nations bringing their minds together. These strings are held by one of the firekeepers during the opening thanksgiving, but then they are placed on a bench, on a pure white cloth. They are a constant visual reminder that the council has drawn all the nations together for the purpose of peace. It is said that the Creator pays attention to the symbolic smoke from the wampum fire, and that in turn is sometimes used to admonish the participants to behave properly. Just as a sacred fire calls for notice, so does the sacred wampum that symbolizes the fire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus, Sagoyewatha (Red Jacket) was able to say in council: &amp;quot;We consider ourselves in the presence of the Great Spirit, the Proprietor of us all.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; The Power of Unity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thadadaho was persuaded and transformed partly by the unity of spirit and mind with which he was confronted. He also must have been persuaded by the quality of the people who had come together as chiefs to commit themselves to the peace: &amp;quot;Hiawatha and the Peacemaker also enlisted the pressure of public opinion to win over Thadadaho. They convinced him that he alone stood in the way of a goal that the overwhelming majority of other Iroquois leaders desired. By confronting Thadadaho with the combined support of chiefs from the Mohawk, Oneida and Cayuga Nations, as well as that of many Onondaga leaders, Hiawatha and the Peacemaker severely limited Thadadaho&#039;s ability to go against public consensus.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thadadaho&#039;s conversion is also a lesson in what happens when there is a single holdout in a political or legal system that requires consensus and unanimity. In any Haudenosaunee council, it is theoretically possible for a single chief to prevent a matter from being decided. In times past, this would not happen: if he could not persuade the others, or find some compromise, the individual would give in graciously. Another aspect of Haudenosaunee unanimity is that it did not require absolute agreement, nor agreement on every detail. The chiefs were trained to recognize times when they might not agree completely, but were close enough that the matter proposed was acceptable. In the interest of unanimity, then, they offered flexibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The unanimity of the other nations helped persuade Thadadaho:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then Tyon-yonh-koh spoke and said to Thadodah-ho: &amp;quot;The Creator, the Great Ruler, created this day which is now shedding its light upon us; he also created man and he also created the earth and all things upon it. Now look up and see the delegates of the Four Nations sitting around you, you also see the chief warrior and this great woman our mother (Jikonsaseh), standing before you, all of whom have approved of this message. The lords and all the chief warriors and this great woman, our mother, have all agreed to submit the Good Tidings of Peace and Power to you, and thus if you approve and confirm the message, you will have the power to be the Fire-Keeper of our Confederate Council, and the smoke from it will arise and pierce the sky, and all the nations shall be subject to you.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereupon the man looked at Tekarioken and Hiawatha and Satekariwate [the Mohawks] and Hotatsehte [the Oneida] and Kanukweyotu [the Seneca] and Tiohaɂkwete and Hakaɂeyuk and Tsiɂnutawehe and Skanyataiyo and Tshaɂtekaehyes. Thereupon Tekanawita said: &amp;quot;Now you are looking at all of the ones who will be standing with you.&amp;quot; Thereupon the man bowed his head. Thereupon his hair stopped writhing and all of his fingers became quiet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker consistently speaks unconditionally. Peace *will* *come*. These men *will be standing with you*. These announcements are not negotiable. It is his power and nature to persuade by the sacred force of his words.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Cayuga&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the minds of many modern Haudenosaunee, the pacification of Thadadaho is the climax of the making of the law, as he was the single terrifying remaining obstacle to the peace. Therefore, they would say, all the nations had already joined together, and this one Onondaga man was all that was left in the way. However, there are other versions. To the west of the Onondagas lay Cayuga country.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thayendenega states that, after satisfying Thadadaho, the peacemakers &amp;quot;proceeded to Cayuga their chief had a big pipe, for which reason they give the nation that name [Shononenaweandwane], they stiled him their son, and brother to the Onidas.&amp;quot; This account would see the wave of peace sweeping from east to west, with one nation after another joining. It would explain how the wave did not stop with the Senecas, but continued—after the Seneca warriors joined—to absorb the nations westward to Niagara and beyond: Erie, Wenro, Attiwandaron, and eventually Tiionontate and Wendat. Today, the council name for the Cayugas commemorates that role and that first pipe, and the Cayugas supplied the pipes and tobacco that the chiefs would smoke together after council opened and closed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the bringing of the Great Peace had been pure legend, it would have been likely that each nation would represent a separate obstacle to be overcome. This is not the case: the Cayugas and Oneidas welcomed the peace, contributed to it, and supported it. Like the Mohawks, they had rational questions: what if we lay down our weapons and the other nations do not? What if, by embracing peace, we only set ourselves up to become the victims of those who are still devoted to war? They needed to be convinced, not of the rationality of peace rather than war, but of its inevitability. The accounts of the making of the law do not suggest that the Cayugas set tests for the Peacemaker, or challenged his authenticity. Instead, once they were persuaded, they welcomed the law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Seneca: The Doorkeepers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thayendenega&#039;s 1801 version explains that after bringing the Cayugas into the Confederacy, &amp;quot;from there they went on to the Senecas, there was two principal chiefs of these, Kanyadariyoh and Shadekaroinyis, they also agreed to the confederacy; in consequence of their frontier situation they called them *roninhohhont*—or the doorkeeper.&amp;quot; He asserts that while bringing together the first four nations took four years, the Senecas joined &amp;quot;some time later.&amp;quot; Though the names are different, this is consistent with the way the Seneca warrior chiefs were brought into the peace by being assigned the work of protecting the Great Black Doorway, escorting outsiders into the council longhouse and winnowing out those who meant harm to the League.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Senecas themselves explain their accession to the Confederacy more subtly. There were two Seneca towns at the time—as, historically in the eighteenth century, there were also two main towns, Kanedesaga (earlier Ganogaro), to the east, and Geneseo (on a bend on the Genesee River). While the chiefs of the eastern town were eager to join the peace, the western town faced a number of hostile nations, and its warriors were a bulwark against outside aggression. Making this town&#039;s chiefs into both rotiyanershon and war chiefs was pragmatic: it allowed the exercise of peace looking inward, while maintaining effective defence looking outward.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dayodekane Seth Newhouse asserts that the two western Seneca leaders agreed to become lords in order to avoid a blood feud between their two villages, arising from a lacrosse game.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The two Seneca doorkeepers were the leaders of the Seneca men. The law was born during a time of warfare, when to survive virtually every man had to be prepared to fight, to protect his family and his own life. They were also times of aggressive and vengeful warfare. Even so, the terms used by the Haudenosaunee today to describe the men and their duties are not terms of war. They refer instead to the obligation to protect the peace: &amp;quot;[The speaker of the Peace Hymn then] salutes the *oyenkondonh*, a term which has been rendered &#039;warriors.&#039; This rendering, however, may have a misleading effect. The word has nothing to do with war, unless in the sense that every grown man in an Indian community is supposed to be a soldier. . . . The word comprises all the men (the &#039;manhood&#039; or mankind) of the nation.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There were &amp;quot;warriors.&amp;quot; War and peace are one of the dualities reflected in the law: while its purpose was to create peace everywhere, the law is pragmatic enough to recognize that this is as impossible as creating universal goodness. There will always be war, and a rational government will be able to conduct it despite being designed to maintain and spread peace. A rational peace-based government will also avoid allowing those who conduct war to become its leaders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yet the Peacemaker and the chiefs had to acknowledge that the warriors not only existed, but were the men who could decide whether the peace survived at all. Four nations had accepted the peace, and their leaders were beginning to discuss the internal structures and processes of their confederate government. The Peacemaker had brought about this state of affairs by facing personal risk to demonstrate the power of his message to the Mohawks; by persuading Hiawatha and Tsikonsaseh to become his clear-minded allies; and by overcoming the evil and demanding Thadadaho. With four nations committed, the western Senecas remained outside the peace, both physically and politically. This became utterly, dramatically clear when the two Great Warriors arrived at the place where the Great Law was coalescing. They came with a crowd of men who immediately surrounded the chiefs in a threatening manner:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then they arrived, the two men walking together with a large crowd of warriors. Hiawatha said . . . so now we shall begin . . . so now you two shall listen well . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereupon the Great Warrior said: &amp;quot;I meanwhile will first say that they who are with me, my force, they shall surround the place where they are seated, the chiefs, and not until they are ready, shall he [Tekanawita] begin to speak, so that they can hear everything, the warriors. Thereupon they encircled the place where they were seated, the chiefs. Thereupon the Great Warrior said: &amp;quot;Now we are ready.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the benefit of the warriors, the Peacemaker explained the making of the Great Peace, and how the people will all become as one family and henceforth respect one another. Offering this alternative, he appealed to the warriors&#039; humanity. As Sotsisowah John Mohawk explains: &amp;quot;You have the power to make peace with an enemy only if you acknowledge that the enemy is human. To acknowledge that they are rational beings who want to live and who want their children to live enhances your power by giving you the capacity to speak to them. If you think they are not human, you won&#039;t have that capacity; you will have destroyed your own power to communicate with the very people you must communicate with if you are going to bring about peace.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a constant tension, historically, between the chiefs whose minds must yearn for peace, and the warriors whose bodies become the primary weapons of any war. The chiefs are slow to anger, slow to decide, while the young men are impatient. When the tension contributes to their collaboration, the young men stand behind the chiefs, sending a silent, muscular message to any other nation meeting with the Haudenosaunee: if you do not heed these wise old men, you will have to deal with us next. When the tension becomes too great, the warriors tend to act independently, often undermining the decisions of the chiefs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Faced with the danger and opportunity provided by the Senecas, the Peacemaker chose opportunity. He offered the warriors and their leaders a crucial function within the new order:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As to you and your deputy, you two Great Warriors, they the Chiefs chose you; it is you who shall guard the doors to the place of the Council Fire, of the Good Message and of the Power and the Peace. Moreover it is you who stand up in front, and the reason why it shall happen thus, is that you, as a matter of fact, shall have responsibility for the group; you shall control the warriors, that is to say all of them. And you shall be permanently in charge of the five nations&#039; warriors; moreover it shall continue on as it is at present, with you two holding the power.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Donehogowa and Kanuhkitawi, the two Seneca chiefs, had become the doorkeepers, responsible for determining the sincerity of other nations seeking to approach council, with responsibility as peace and war chiefs. In the 2013 recital of the law, it was stated that Donehogowa was responsible for disarming the visitors, while Kanuhkitawi decided whether their minds were good. One stood outside the door of the longhouse, while the other stood inside. Hayadaha Richard Hill sees the metaphor of the Great Black Door as meaning that if an individual refuses to be reconciled to the accepted behaviours of Haudenosaunee society, that individual relinquishes the right to live in that society. In some versions, some of the Senecas were added to the League as a result of the extension of the rafters, and that is when their roles were assigned: &amp;quot;And it came to pass in later times that they judged it necessary to add to the (roof) poles other great black (roof) poles: Ka-no-ke-i-da&#039;-wi and Tyo-nin-ho-ka&#039;-we, who are cousins. These two are the doorkeepers.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The tension must have been incredible. The warriors presented an immediate physical threat of violence to the chiefs. True to his earlier strategies, the Peacemaker drew them into the peace by acknowledging their abilities and authority—and then transforming them. The warriors had been a menacing and encircling body: they were transformed into a protective circle, doorkeepers, and guarantors of the safety of the chiefs and the council. By recognizing their ability and offering them a new kind of authority, the Peacemaker secured their cooperation—in much the same way he had acknowledged Thadadaho&#039;s power and given him special responsibilities within the circle of the law. The warriors had undergone a transformation even as they stood around the chiefs in their circle: &amp;quot;it is you who shall protect it,&amp;quot; said the Peacemaker.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rather than reject or confront the warriors, the Peacemaker gave them a job to do. Nevertheless, in the centuries that followed, the tension between the chiefs and the warriors has been a constant factor in Haudenosaunee history and law. Newhouse&#039;s versions of the law encapsulate that tension: the warriors were always in a position to kill the chiefs and were sometimes angry or impatient enough to do so.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The four confederate nations had become five, with the Senecas accepting specific responsibility—and authority—to protect the institutions of government.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; One Mind: Ska&#039;níkon:ra&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All along his path, the Peacemaker would show the power of the Good Mind as the first step towards peace. The concept of the Good Mind is made up of several components. A rational, right-thinking mind is not obstructed or twisted by emotions or thoughts of anger or grief. It is a mind that constantly tends towards goodness rather than evil. A mind that is rational and morally good will work towards peace. A good mind will seek to join with other good minds, for that is where the power lies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
People who join their minds together discover that, if they focus on an idea or on a state of mind together, they achieve synergy, a sum greater than the parts. Sagoyewatha (Red Jacket) spoke wistfully of how it used to be:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ancient times, when we were called to a treaty of peace, our discourse was of nothing but peace. We did not repeat misfortunes, when brightening the chain, because we put our minds on peace &amp;amp; friendship all in a heap. Now this was in old times. We not only made the chain of friendship very bright; but we locked arms, and took fast hold of each other&#039;s hands, and left the token of friendship.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, brother, I must tell you of some of our ancient rules: I believe you do not know our old customs: therefore make your mind easy. In ancient times, when we made peace, we cleared the path, and made it open both ways. Now I wish you would keep your mind easy &amp;amp; have no hard thoughts. You do not know our ancient ways, though you know the ways of the white people in doing business. When the two parties met together to make peace, we used to make it so bright that it was seen from the rising to the setting sun. Now you begin to see our way of doing business in the times of our forefathers. What we did, we did well. If any thing was bad, we did it afterwards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Keep your mind easy and have no hard thoughts&amp;quot;? Sagoyewatha chose his words carefully, drawing them from a storehouse of formulaic expressions. An &amp;quot;easy&amp;quot; mind is one that is not distracted, one that is healthy, clear, and open. An &amp;quot;uneasy&amp;quot; mind would be carrying the baggage of grief, anger, or other distractions. Making one&#039;s mind easy—at ease—was not always something one could do oneself (and therefore one could call upon one&#039;s brothers for compassion and consolation), but it was an ideal, an intentional mindset to adopt before making difficult decisions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is useful to consider the Kayanerenkó:wa not only as a law but also, as its name suggests, as a &amp;quot;path&amp;quot; or a &amp;quot;way,&amp;quot; specifically a way of thinking about things and about doing them. As Mohawk explained:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From what we know, the Indians had a tradition of law and the Iroquois are our surviving example of it. The Iroquois possessed a tradition of law, and that tradition of law is what has created them as a people. That part is definitely true, but the Iroquois tradition is not a tradition of law, exactly. The Iroquois tradition is a tradition of responsible thinking. It is not something written in paragraphs and lines because it doesn&#039;t matter whether the letter of the thing is right. The questions that have to be before the people are *What is the thinking? Is the thinking right?*&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The essence of the law is its confidence that good minds that are thinking right, using the right process, and working together will come up with the right decisions for the future generations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Unity Is Power&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a wampum that symbolizes the moment when all five nations have decided to bring their minds together as one, to form a single body. That it is made of strings, rather than woven into a belt, is testimony to its antiquity. Its simplicity is striking: it consists of five long strings, each the symbol of an individual nation. In 1722, a sixth string was added, as the Tuscaroras officially became the sixth nation of the Confederacy (the first five strings are white, the colour of peace: the sixth string is purple wampum, so that it can be distinguished from the original five). &amp;quot;We will begin now to use a single mind, and this we will do by being like a single person, working together to change the habits of the man.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today, at any Grand Council, the speaker who opens the council with the Thanksgiving holds these strings of wampum. They form a symbolic fire of the Haudenosaunee. Then, emulating the strings suspended from the pole in the Condolence, the strings are draped over a bench in the middle of the longhouse, a sign that the council is in session and the nations of the Haudenosaunee have brought their minds together.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon the convening of the council a string of white wampum beads, about a foot in length, is passed from chief to chief, each holding it in his hands for a moment; it is then laid on a table in the form of a circle, the ends touching; this signifies that the council is &amp;quot;open&amp;quot; and harmony prevails. During the session, if a &amp;quot;condolence&amp;quot; is &amp;quot;called,&amp;quot; by reason of death, a string of purple wampum is held by the side of the circled string, and so on. The &amp;quot;laying down of the wampum strings&amp;quot; one after another, each with its own significance, denotes the nature of the business or discussion of the council that is subject to consent, or rejection, by vote of the chiefs who are members thereof.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the chronology of the making of the law, the first wampum was made by the Peacemaker of strung freshwater snail shells, in the form of the strings used to condole Hiawatha. With the exception of the very short strings sent with the runners bringing word of an impending Grand Council, those short strings are also the simplest wampum that continues to be used. The first cylindrical wampum, found in &amp;quot;pre-contact&amp;quot; archaeological sites, was painstakingly made with bone and stone tools. It makes sense that the earliest, most basic wampum would be in the form of strings, because there would not be much wampum around. The five strings converging and joining into a single mind echo that simplicity. It stands to reason that they would also be among the earliest wampum symbols of the Haudenosaunee.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A similar symbol of the unity of the Haudenosaunee is a bundle of five arrows bound together. The Peacemaker received one arrow from each of the five nations, showing that these could each be broken easily. He then took five more arrows and bound them tightly in a bundle, demonstrating that together they could not be broken:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So now I will warn you (shall have warned you): the number of your united nations (the five tribes) that it will ruin the confederacy (will be inappropriate, not right) for one of the member nations to pull out its arrow, for then consequently the number of them bound together (in the bundle) would be that much less. So it would be still worse if two were withdrawn (*dondwade&#039;gwa*, less in number) (diminished by) (if the number were lessened by two), for then it might be possible for someone to bend it, perhaps even to break it. And so I shall warn (say unto) you, &amp;quot;Do not anyone of the several tribes attempt to draw out (withdraw) its arrow. It will be well if it will continue the way it is now as we have now completed (founded) it.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Symbols of unity are another way to remind the people and their leaders of their obligations and commitments. As they take on the historic patina of sacredness, they increase the burden of keeping the commitments, maintaining the ideals. Though the Peacemaker and Hiawatha had taken several years to bring the five nations together, the story of their achievement has been compressed into a single seminal narrative, becoming a single extended event—and a continuing process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;##&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; PART IV - The Constitution&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Overview&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Horatio Hale identified three significant accomplishments of those who had devised the Great Law: the continuity of titles and government; preventing murder and revenge from becoming causes of further bloodshed; and ending a fascination with death and the dead, replacing it with a ceremony of Condolence that raised up grieving minds. &amp;quot;In considering these remarkable laws, it becomes evident that the work which Hiawatha and Dekanawidah accomplished was really a Great Reformation, not merely political, but also social and religious. They desired not only to establish peace among the nations, but also to abolish or modify such usages and beliefs as in their opinion were injurious to their people.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In any overview of the Kayanerenkó:wa, it is useful to consider the way the peace was accomplished and maintained. Institutions, usages, and beliefs that promoted peace and stability were kept, and extrapolated to the level of nation and Confederacy. Injurious practices were abolished, and where this was not possible, their effects were mitigated. The laws reflected the best features of the people for whom they were designed, but they took into account and addressed their worst tendencies as well. If in any society the greatest strengths are also mirrors of the greatest weaknesses, the Peacemaker&#039;s work had been transformative, replacing anger with thought, fear with compassion, and the ring of angry warriors threatening the society&#039;s peace with a ring of protectors caring for that peace. The laws are pragmatic as well as symbolic: they indicate thought that considers the natural consequences and outcomes of any decision or strategy. The construction of the law shows the way for government to conduct itself in future.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first phase of the Peacemaker&#039;s work had been accomplished: the people had made a commitment to peace, and the chiefs had been brought together at Onondaga. The three guiding principles had been accepted by all the nations. Thadadaho had been pacified and had accepted a major role in the new order. It remained to consolidate the accomplishments and to create the institutions that would perpetuate them. The Peacemaker set the tone with a dramatic announcement in council:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I am Dekanawidah and with the Five Nations&#039; Confederate Lords I plant the Tree of the Great Peace. I plant it in your territory, Adodarho, and the Onondaga Nation, in the territory of you who are Firekeepers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I name the tree the Tree of the Great Long Leaves. Under the shade of this Tree of the Great Peace we spread the soft white feathery down of the globe thistle as seats for you, Adodarhoh, and your cousin Lords.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We place you upon those seats, spread soft with the feathery down of the globe thistle, there beneath the shade of the spreading branches of the Tree of Peace. There shall you sit and watch the Council Fire of the Confederacy of the Five Nations, and all the affairs of the Five Nations shall be transacted at this place before you, Adodarhoh, and your cousin Lords, by the Confederate Lords of the Five Nations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Roots have spread out from the Tree of the Great Peace, one to the north, one to the east, one to the south and one to the west. The name of these roots is the Great White Roots and their nature is Peace and Strength.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; The Longhouse of One Family&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today, in many Haudenosaunee communities, to speak of &amp;quot;the Longhouse&amp;quot; is to refer to a way of life that is sometimes called a religion, or to the building that the ceremonies of that traditional way of life are conducted in. This has led many people to think that &amp;quot;People of the Longhouse&amp;quot;—Haudenosaunee—includes only those people who follow that traditional way of life. That is, they have come to believe that it is a term that includes some people in the community and excludes others.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That was not the Peacemaker&#039;s intention.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker came upon a society with many institutions and a coherent way of life, but one that had become dysfunctional, its institutions struggling, its basic structure solid but its people having lost their way. He recognized that a society with internal peace and with war around its edges would still be a society at war. His plan, with the Great White Roots of the Tree of Peace gradually spreading to the four corners of the earth, was for universal peace, and that would mean that all the peoples of the world would eventually accept both the peace and the family relationships that would make it possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Morgan used the word &amp;quot;tribe&amp;quot; or *gens* to describe the clans. He recognized that the Confederacy had been built upon existing institutions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The founders of the Iroquois Confederacy did not seek to suspend the tribal divisions of the people, to introduce a different social organization; but on the contrary, they rested the League itself upon the tribes, and through them, sought to interweave the race into one political family.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . . the Confederacy was in effect a League of Tribes. With the ties of kindred as its principle of union, the whole race was interwoven into one great family, composed of tribes in its first subdivision (for the nations were counterparts of each other); and the tribes themselves, in their subdivisions, composed of many households. Without these close inter-relations, resting, as many of them do, on the strong impulses of nature, a mere alliance between the Iroquois nations would have been feeble and transitory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Older and Younger Brothers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kinship—knowing who you are by knowing who your people are—is crucial to understanding every part of the Great Law. The Peacemaker&#039;s achievement, in part, was to convince the Haudenosaunee that they were all one family, the people of a single longhouse. The same devotion to family that had fostered the desire for revenge in the dark days became the principle that brought and held the Confederacy together. The law provided the flexibility to bring in other nations as brothers, cousins, nephews, or other parts of the family. When the Europeans arrived, kinship worked in two distinct ways to protect the Haudenosaunee. One was that they were prepared to accept the Europeans as relations—to spread the roots of peace by greeting new relatives. But also the Great Law caused them to form a circle of people standing with their arms joined in brotherhood, so firmly that they could not be broken apart. This protective circle is the comfort and empathy of family. James Bradley, writing that the Onondagas had survived &amp;quot;when so many other, comparable cultural groups did not,&amp;quot; found kinship to be part of the explanation: &amp;quot;If locality served as the tangible focus for Onondaga culture, then kinship bonds were the glue that held it together. Kinship operated at several levels—family, clan, moiety, and village—and provided the definition of a person&#039;s roles and responsibilities. Taken together, these formed a social structure that was both flexible and resilient, one that was able to replenish itself through adoption and assimilation. As long as the structure of kinship was retained, Onondaga culture could (and did) accommodate a great deal of biological, ethnic, linguistic, and even material diversity and still remain coherent and functional.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In every real, effective sense, the joined arms of brotherhood, or family, were the people&#039;s protection against being swept away: &amp;quot;This is what &#039;Power&#039; means: all of the Nations will unite all their affairs, and the group of several nations will become just a single one, and their power is that they shall join hands. This, moreover, will be the basis upon which they will survive as a group, forming a single family.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Haudenosaunee languages, it is difficult to simply say &amp;quot;Brother.&amp;quot; One must be specific—younger brother or older brother. The specificity that the language requires encourages each person to think about relationships far more frequently than if they were speaking English, or even thinking in English. The practice of addressing many people, including those not related by blood, as &amp;quot;Auntie&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Mother&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Brother&amp;quot; further served to bind the people together.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Council diplomatic kinship terms are generally male: the chiefs are male, and male terms are usually used in respect of nations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Onondaga Longhouse&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Haudenosaunee longhouse, today, is multi-purpose. While it is clearly designed to put through the annual cycle of ceremonies, it is also a place of family meetings, weddings, and funerals. The same large, single-roomed log building is used for social dances. Virtually all the longhouses are built along an east-west axis running from fire to fire (wood stove to wood stove), and each has a men&#039;s door and a women&#039;s door. The exceptions are the Onondaga longhouses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two Onondaga longhouses in the world: one at Onondaga, near Syracuse, New York; the other in the Grand River Territory in Ontario. At these longhouses, councils of the Six Nations take place, and they have only one door, in the middle of the building rather than at an end. It is said that this is so that the chiefs all go in together, so that they will more likely be of one mind. The entrance to the longhouse faces east, because the morning sun encourages clear thought. The shared doorway, at the heart of the Confederacy, confirms that this is &amp;quot;the Longhouse of All the Nations.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; The Line Down the Middle of the Longhouse&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If one enters one of the modern reconstructions of historic bark longhouses, one can see immediately that a single line can be drawn from eastern to western door, passing through each firepit, each hearth.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A person living in such a longhouse would see that line every day. The line would serve as a reminder that many aspects of the world are divided in two parts: night and day, darkness and light, male and female, young and old. One family would live on each side of each fireplace, so that the people would be used to the idea of pairs of families, facing each other across the fire, living in harmony, with each family constantly instructed to help the other.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Someone walking into a modern longhouse in Haudenosaunee territories would be able to see the same line—from the men&#039;s door to a wood stove (a &amp;quot;fire&amp;quot;), to another wood stove, to the women&#039;s door.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The line down the middle of the longhouse becomes a real line in the ceremonies, when the two parts of the people (&amp;quot;moieties,&amp;quot; in anthropological terms) sit on opposite sides of the longhouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The line is also a political line, between the two sides of the fire in council: &amp;quot;we shall now have two sets of lords, one on each side of the council fire.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For modern Haudenosaunee, the two sides of the fire exist as visual realities in council and in ceremonies, and as conceptual principles in considering issues and strategies (that is, there are two sides to every matter—this being not a statement of inconsistency or confrontation but of a need to consider complexity and seek reconciliation). At the time the Great Law was being created, the two sides of the fire were part of every individual&#039;s daily family life. Duality and its companion, balance, were constant, physical presences. It seems it may have been persistent through changing technology and architecture, too: the people gave up bark longhouses for frame buildings in the late seventeenth and early eighteenth centuries, but in Seneca country and among the Onondagas at Oswegatchie, they were living in two-family log homes with shared hearths into the 1800s.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Calling Council&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unlike other lawmaking and governing bodies, the Grand Council of the Haudenosaunee meets when necessary, without an appointed schedule or set dates. It meets occasionally: there have been times when a year would go by without a Grand Council. To outsiders and many insiders, both how a decision is made that a Grand Council is necessary, and how a Grand Council is brought together, can seem confusing, even mysterious.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Morgan asserts that any of the nations has the authority to &amp;quot;summon&amp;quot; the Grand Council. Newhouse explains that the request shall go to the Onondagas, who, if they &amp;quot;find the case is worth the consideration of the Confederate Council,&amp;quot; will notify the rest of the chiefs to attend.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The modern process for convening a Grand Council flows from any individual nation through Onondaga. The nation may request that a matter be considered by the Grand Council, or Onondaga may decide to hold one of its own initiative. Runners—today travelling by car—go from Onondaga to the fireplaces of the other nations—Oneida (Ontario), Tuscarora, Akwesasne (for the Mohawks), the Grand River and Tonawanda (for the Senecas)—carrying strings of wampum and the message about the date of the council. Just as in the days of the making of the law, there are usually two runners, travelling together. The string of wampum is attached to a stick that has been notched to indicate the number of days until the council will be held. The runners must find specific chiefs, the firekeepers of their nations, to deliver the message. The wampum delivered must be returned when the council convenes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Procedure in Council&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Council is ready to begin when representatives of all the nations are present. It is also to begin at mid-morning, and given the distances that some chiefs have to travel, there is a convention that council can proceed, as a &amp;quot;meeting&amp;quot; that will discuss matters in a preliminary way, if only three nations are present. At the Grand River, there has historically been a practice of designating someone to represent an absent nation. Since opening council requires a full Thanksgiving, which can last up to half an hour, there are times when council is started, in the knowledge that the people who are still on their way may arrive late, but not so late that a true council cannot proceed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Though the basic process of nations speaking to one another across a council fire was not new to the nations, nor unique to the Haudenosaunee, the process of a Haudenosaunee council, carefully designed to promote consensus and avoid confrontation, was innovative. It is a complex, deliberate process, and as with many Haudenosaunee cultural processes, there is often concern about keeping things in the proper order and not omitting important steps. Council opens with everyone giving thanks together. The opening words of thanksgiving are delivered by an Onondaga chief. As the speaker completes each part of the speech, ending it with &amp;quot;and so our minds are one,&amp;quot; all the men present indicate their agreement with &amp;quot;yoh!&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;tho!&amp;quot; The thanksgiving opening reminds the participants in council that they are all human beings in a complex, structured world in which each part has its own responsibilities and instructions. The opening creates an atmosphere of good will, commitment, humility, and unity of mind. In a modern Haudenosaunee council, the chief who opened the meeting does so holding the &amp;quot;fire&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;mace,&amp;quot; the long strings of wampum symbolizing the nations putting their minds together. He holds it by the end at which the strings are joined, as if holding their minds together in his hand. When he has finished the opening, he places the &amp;quot;fire&amp;quot; on the bench near the secretary, to symbolize that the council is now open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is useful to think of the council, in session, as actually consisting of five separate and simultaneous circles or councils. Once an issue has been placed before the chiefs, each nation becomes like a separate committee for the purpose of considering the matter. However, within each nation, the law provides for several permanent committees—chiefs who are to consider matters together. This process allows for multiple simultaneous discussions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker first chose the chiefs as individuals. Not long afterward, when he was describing the workings of the council, he organized them into groups or committees for the purpose of their deliberations. Most of the men were already village chiefs. The Confederacy Council was a new entity, and their roles in that council would reflect the workings of a village or nation council, extrapolated to a new level. However, some aspects of the processes in the Grand Council were new: they were adjustments and designs made to take into account that many of the chiefs of this new body were strangers to one another, whose nations and communities were far apart geographically, and unfamiliar politically. The fifty rotiyanershon are also a larger body than most village councils, and needed new rules to maintain order and direction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Part of the strategy of the council&#039;s process is to have matters discussed by small, manageable groups, in which each individual has the opportunity to speak and be heard. Generally, they consist of two to four of the chiefs. The English word &amp;quot;committee&amp;quot; is most often used to describe these smaller groups within the circle of the nation. Yet &amp;quot;committee&amp;quot; does not capture the nature of these groups, these slightly formalized clusters of thinkers—and no other English word comes close.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus, when a matter is considered, the first body to think about the issue is the &amp;quot;committee&amp;quot; within a nation. The Mohawk chiefs, for example, consist of three such groups, one for each of the three clans. The wampum symbolizing the Mohawk chiefs reflects this: instead of being a string with nine separate strings hanging from it, it has three clusters of three strings each.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker did not explain why he put specific individuals in particular committees. It may have been a matter of the unique capabilities of each member of the first group of chiefs. It may have been a desire to have the chiefs of each village discuss things first, before the matter was taken to the level of the nation. It may have been a way of weaving the clans closer together. Certainly the small committees were part of the larger design—the desire to promote agreement by creating political structures that were most likely to secure and devise consensus. At the committee level, this meant small groups of men who already knew and trusted each other, who could work compatibly, and who were likely to agree.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The momentum of agreement from a committee would then carry over into the nation council. The nation council would be able to discuss the matter in a microcosm of the Grand Council.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The council also consists of three distinct sides: most of the discussion will take place as the issue is passed back and forth between the Elder Brothers, the Mohawks and Senecas, and the Younger Brothers, the Oneidas and Cayugas (and Tuscaroras). The third side of the council, the Onondagas (who are actually Elder Brothers, too), becomes directly involved only after the first two sides have reached consensus, or if they ask for help, having failed to agree.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an issue is brought forth in council, the path it must follow—from the Elder Brothers to the Younger Brothers and back, and then to the Firekeepers—is such that one might assume that the matter is discussed only after it reaches one&#039;s fire. In fact, each group continues to discuss the matter as it makes its way through the process. While each nation formally has one speaker on an issue, it is not uncommon to see the matter addressed more informally as individual chiefs cross the fire to talk things over, or go outside to &amp;quot;talk behind the bushes,&amp;quot; or seek advice from their clan mothers or members of their families, or other advisers. The spirit of council is contribution and accommodation. Opinions, when they are spoken openly, are not to be individual opinions but to reflect the thinking of groups of people: this prevents council from descending into personal attacks, and it prevents individuals from domineering by the force of their personalities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A matter coming into the longhouse is generally brought in through the Eastern or Western Door. That is, it is introduced in council by the Senecas or the Mohawks, the doorkeepers (also known as &amp;quot;the Well&amp;quot;). Once the matter has been introduced, the five circles will consider it carefully. If the Mohawks and the Senecas have reached one mind on the matter separately, they will then confer together to seek an agreement. If they agree, then a speaker stands to state the thoughts of the Elder Brothers and to &amp;quot;send it across the fire&amp;quot; to seek the views and thoughts of the Younger Brothers. Benjamin Franklin described council decorum: &amp;quot;He that would speak, rises. The rest observe a profound Silence. When he has finished and sits down, they leave him five or six Minutes to recollect, that if he has omitted any thing he intended to say, or has any thing to add, he may rise again and deliver it. To interrupt another, even in Common conversation, is reckoned highly indecent.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The relationship between the Mohawks and Senecas, on one side of the fire, and the Oneidas and Cayugas, on the other side, is described in affectionate terms, terms of virtual equality. There is never any suggestion that, within this family, anyone is subordinate, lesser or inferior: &amp;quot;This, moreover, is to be the relationship between the two sides, Tekarihoken and his [Mohawk and Seneca] colleagues [siblings – brothers] will raise issues, and when they address the other side of the fire they will say &#039;you are downstream from us,&#039; which means this: it is like saying [it means for one to say] &#039;you, our children.&#039; Next, the other side of the fire, that is, Odatsehte and his [Oneida and Cayuga] tribal colleagues [brothers] they will address them, saying &#039;our father&#039;s kinsmen&#039; [yok-ni-sho] which means this: it is like saying &#039;they are our fathers.&#039;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Oneidas and Cayugas then each consider the matter separately and then consult jointly. If they agree, their speaker explains their thoughts on the issue and sends it back to the Elder Brothers. In doing so, the speaker repeats the words of the Elder Brothers first and then either expresses agreement or adds the new elements for consideration. Repeating the words ensures that they have been understood. If in repeating the words it becomes clear there has been a misunderstanding, it is corrected gently in the reply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In modern councils, the chiefs dress modestly and comfortably, wearing their everyday clothes. Generally, an outsider&#039;s only way to recognize a person as a chief is the fact that he is sitting on a front bench. Sub-chiefs, secretaries, and ordinary people sit on the two or three rows of benches behind the chiefs. Clan mothers and other women sit at the other end of the longhouse—partly a reflection of the separation between men&#039;s and women&#039;s roles, partly as a reminder that the clan mothers take no active part in council decisions but nevertheless must watch their chiefs, advise them when the opportunity arises, and report back to their families with the chiefs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In modern councils, the Tuscarora chiefs sit with the Younger Brothers, and the speaker for that side speaks also for the Tuscaroras, who theoretically are &amp;quot;under the wing&amp;quot; of the Oneidas. In practice, the Tuscaroras are welcomed as equals and as an integral part of the decision making on the benches, but a Tuscarora chief will only speak to a matter to the entire council if there is agreement that he should. This is never denied:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereupon they refer the matter across the fire to the other moiety&#039;s side, and they themselves will let go of it. Thereupon Shakeɂsyone and his committee colleagues, now they will pick it up, consider it carefully, and when they reach consensus among themselves they will refer it back across the fire to the opposite moiety&#039;s side. Thereupon they will pick it up, placing it in front of the two firekeepers who will pick up the matter, consider it carefully, and confirm the matter; and it is this, their unanimous decision, this is what will become law where the people are.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;matter&amp;quot; is like a physical thing, as well as something that has received thought: &amp;quot;letting go if it&amp;quot; means not only &amp;quot;delivering&amp;quot; it to the other side but also detaching oneself emotionally from the decision once it has been made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Council procedure is structured to promote reason and prevent passion. Each side of the fire has a &amp;quot;speaker&amp;quot; on every issue so that one should not see many voices raised from a single bench. A matter cannot be referred back and forth indefinitely: if there is a disagreement, the Onondagas can send it back, with their recommendations for consensus. If passions are ignited—also rare—Thadadaho can close the council. In modern councils, debate moves back and forth across the fire, as well as within the benches of each nation:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First, the Mohawks, who will consider all of the issues, co-operating with their moiety colleagues, the Seneca, and reaching consensus with them. Thereupon their speaker, now he will move the issue across the fire to the other moiety where he will let go of it. Thereupon the Oneida and their moiety colleagues, the Cayuga, these will co-operate when they pick up the issue to consider it, and if they agree, they will confirm it unanimously. Thereupon their speaker, now he will move the issue back across the fire, letting it go again to where they are seated, the nation group initiating the issue. Thereupon their speaker will be the one to pick it up and he will direct his words to where their cousins, the firekeepers are seated, letting go of it in front of them, the decision of the two firesides. Thereupon their cousins, the namebearers, now they will pick it up, considering it until they decide. Thereupon their speaker, now he will give an answer for the firekeepers, and when they confirm, then the matter will be a rule of the Great Law for the various nations accepting the League. Moreover, they hold the power, the firekeepers, and if it should happen that they differ, the two moieties, if it should happen that they voice two opinions, both sides differing in the outcome of their discussions, then the firekeepers have the power from among either of the two to choose one to support, or they can throw it back for them to reconsider on both sides of the fire—the Council as a whole, the two moieties—and if these reconsider, and if the same thing happens again, then again they will place both results together before the firekeepers, and whichever one they decide for they will support that outcome.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . . each of the opposing sides first takes up the proposition in a few words and sets forth all the reasons which have been alleged pro and con by those who first expressed their opinion. He [the speaker] then states his own opinion and concludes with these words: &amp;quot;That is my thought on the subject of this, our Council.&amp;quot; After their deliberation on whatever subject it may be, there is almost no reason, for or against, which they have not seen or weighed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any matter dealt with in council is addressed in the most positive manner possible: &amp;quot;they generally begin by some compliment to the last speaker, such as for instance they have listened attentively to the words he has uttered &amp;amp; maturely considered them that they are persuaded that they proceed from a sincere heart &amp;amp; desire for promoting the welfare of the 5 Nations; any sentence calling forth the glory of the nations or their antiquity is always well received &amp;amp; especially as they frequently use brethren of the same nation, friends to the same country, &amp;amp; similar expressions, they are always sure to obtain a favourable audience.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The language of council is both decorous and indirect. It is considered deeply impolite to refer to anyone by name or to make an issue personal. Finger pointing is especially insulting (and may be associated with the ill will of medicine). Rather than present a complete position, anyone introducing a matter to council makes a point of designing it so that consensus can be built gradually and without disagreement. Where there is disagreement, it is stated carefully but respectfully—often cloaked in statements like &amp;quot;we agree, and furthermore . . .&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That People have however a Piece of Civility peculiar to themselves: for a Man would be accounted very impertinent, if he contradicted anything that was said in their Council, and if he does not approve even the greatest Absurdities therein proposed; and therefore they always answer, Niawa, that is to say, Thou art in the right, Brother; that is well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notwithstanding this seeming approbation, they believe what they please and no more; and therefore &#039;tis impossible to know when they are really persuaded of those things you have mentioned unto them, which I take to be one of the greatest Obstructions to their Conversion; for their Civility hindering them from making any Objection, or contradicting what is said unto them, they seem to approve of it, though perhaps they laugh at it in private.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To build towards agreement, a matter is sent back and forth across the fire, so that the approach to be taken by the Haudenosaunee to the matter is developed by the Mohawks and Senecas, on one hand, and by the Oneidas (and Tuscaroras) and Cayugas, on the other. If these four nations agree, the Mohawks and Senecas send the matter to the firekeepers, the Onondagas, who can either ratify the resolution or send it back for further discussion. In sending it back, the Onondagas will express the reasons for their hesitations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Seth Newhouse stirred up a political storm when he produced a version of the law that gave the Mohawks primacy, putting these words into the Peacemaker&#039;s mouth:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is provided thus: I begin by choosing you, the Mohawk Nation, to be the &amp;quot;Head and Leader&amp;quot; of the Confederate Government and Legislative Body, and Council. Therefore, you are the foundation of the Government of the &amp;quot;Great Peace&amp;quot; now hereby established. Therefore when in Council, if you disallow any proposition before the Council, or protest against any action of the Council, it shall not be lawful for the Legislative Body, or the Council to pass or the Firekeepers to confirm it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is provided thus: The Council of the Five Confederate Nations Lords shall not be opened until all the &amp;quot;nine&amp;quot; of the Mohawk Lords are present, and in case any of them are absent (it) is not lawful business can be transacted to Council; if all the three parties of Mohawk Lords are represented by one or more Lords; such Council shall not be legal except for matters of little importance; all the &amp;quot;nine&amp;quot; Lords of the Mohawks must be present forming a full Council, for transacting business or matters of importance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No other early version of the law makes the Mohawks so dominant. These clauses, as well as Newhouse&#039;s statements that the warriors had the authority to assassinate chiefs who disagreed with them, offended the council at the Grand River so deeply that the chiefs decided to produce an authoritative version of the law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In council, the Onondagas are the firekeepers, sitting by themselves at the head of the longhouse, in an arrangement that clearly has three components. In Condolences, though, they are part of the Elder Brothers, the Three Brothers, one of the two sides of the fire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is often said that decisions of the Confederacy Council must be unanimous, and that any nation or any individual chief can stop a matter in its tracks. Potentially, this is true. It amounts to an individual and a national veto. Even so, this is rarely used. A Confederacy born out of a desire to create unity of mind maintains a deep aversion to disagreement. An individual who is alone in his disagreement with a decision, and who cannot persuade the rest of the chiefs to change their minds, would be ashamed to be the reason for the council&#039;s inability to decide—even where his position reflects the views of his clan family. The Peacemaker instructed the chiefs to strive towards agreement in all things: &amp;quot;I now charge each of you Lords that you must never seriously disagree among yourselves. You are all of equal standing and of equal power, and if you seriously disagree the consequences will be most serious and this disagreement will cause you to disregard each other . . . then your grandchildren will suffer and be reduced to poverty and disgrace.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One way to avoid disagreement is to concentrate on the principles of a matter rather than its details. Details can be delegated. Another common method is to secure agreement on the easy parts first and then build gradually, with a momentum of understanding, towards agreement on the more difficult parts of an issue. One technique useful in doing this is to break a matter into components, and then to create strategies for resolving the parts about which there is certain agreement. The harder issues (John Mohawk called them &amp;quot;the rock hard parts&amp;quot;) can be left for later, or they might be left for local or community decisions, which all the nations agree to respect. If it is clear that the two sides—Mohawk and Seneca, Oneida, Cayuga and Tuscarora—disagree, it is not unusual for the Onondagas, who have been watching the matter progress, to suggest some areas for agreement, or to send the matter back to the Elder Brothers with both an idea for resolution and words of encouragement. The words of encouragement often include citing aspects of the Peacemaker&#039;s message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If tempers begin to flare, or patience begins to fray, the Onondaga chiefs may call an end to the council, or a break, to allow minds to cool off. This also allows informal discussion—&amp;quot;speaking behind the bushes&amp;quot;—to seek resolution, often on a personal level. In some cases, a temporary adjournment is necessary to recover rationality. For example, in a council with the western nations in the Ohio country in 1792, the Shawnees bluntly accused the Haudenosaunee of making secret deals with the United States, and threw a string of wampum across the fire, into the dust. The measured Haudenosaunee response came from Honeyawus (Farmer&#039;s Brother), the Seneca chief:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brothers;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We desire you all to sit still, we shall move to a little distance to consult on what answer to give you. You have talked to us a little too roughly, you have thrown us on our backs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Farmer&#039;s Brother then put the String which had been thrown down, over his head &amp;amp; hanging down his back they then moved away &amp;amp; remained an hour.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exceptionally, blunt language from an ally is answered in kind: &amp;quot;You spoke very fierce &amp;amp; roughly to us &amp;amp; we hope you&#039;ll give us the same liberty.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Sharp words&amp;quot; are capable of drawing blood, provoking violence, and breaking the peace. Just as the principle of shared hunting grounds allows no sharp edges in the Dish with One Spoon, to prevent bloodshed, so sharp words are not permitted in council. A speaker in a council between nations, after introducing himself, will often apologize in advance for anything he might say that could be taken as sharp or injurious, and explain that this is not his intention.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Haudenosaunee councils refuse to be rushed. They are the product of a time when there was always enough time to do things properly. Careful thought is unhurried, uncluttered thought and deliberate, consistent work. If a matter is not agreed upon at one council, the chiefs can &amp;quot;put it under their pillow&amp;quot; to consider it further and deal with it at a future council.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another rule that promotes agreement is a determination to consider only one issue at a time—to avoid confusion caused by a multiplicity of matters. In theory, the Onondaga chief Hononwirehton has the responsibility of keeping council&#039;s mind focussed. In former times, this principle had a physical presence in council, in the form of a visible agenda of wampum strings and belts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When Arendt van den Bogaert visited Onondaga in 1634—and he was the first European to do so—he described an unusual feature of the council house. There was a horizontal pole suspended upon two forked sticks. When there was council, the wampum that symbolized each item on the agenda was hung on this pole, each item in the order in which it was to be addressed. No matter was to be spoken of until the matter before it had been fully dealt with and removed from the pole. The mind of the council was to focus on one issue at a time, without distractions. If people began to drift on to other issues, Hononwirehton would walk over to the pole and tap one of the uprights with his cane. That would be all it took to bring the mind of the council back on track. He might also use the wing or fan to keep the council house clean of dust and distraction. This is why, in the Circle Wampum that symbolizes the council of chiefs, with its fifty strings radiating towards the centre or fire, the longest string represents not Thadadaho but Hononwirehton, for he must sit closest to the fire, in order to have easiest access to the pole.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Just as the Thanksgiving and the Condolence are recalled in part because they are set out in a logical, particular order, so matters raised in council are considered one at a time, and answered in the order in which they are originally stated. Getting things in their right order is an important aspect of planning the process of council. An intentional structure to the agenda allows for the setting of priorities—so the important matters are dealt with first and the least important (or the hard ones everyone wants to avoid) might not be dealt with before the council ends. Often outsiders are dealt with first, so they can be invited to leave as the council moves on to its internal business. Maintaining an orderly progression also requires attention to detail—a matter that is raised and not addressed is pointed out, so that nothing is left undone. Father Hennepin, in the late seventeenth century, described council procedure:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The next day the Iroquese answer&#039;d our Discourse and Presents Article by Article, having laid on the Ground several little pieces of Wood, to put them in mind of what had been said the day before in Council; their Speaker, or President, held in his hand one of these Pieces of Wood, and when he had answer&#039;d one Article of our Proposal, he laid it down, with some Presents of Black &amp;amp; White Porcelain, which they use to string upon the smallest Sinews of Beasts; and then he took up another Piece of Wood, and so all of the rest, till he had fully answer&#039;d our Speech, of which those Pieces of Wood, and our Presents, put them in Mind. When his Discourse was ended, the oldest Man of their Assembly cry&#039;d aloud for three times, Niaoua, that is to say, it is well, I thank thee; which was repeated with a full voice, and in a tuneful manner, by all the other Senators.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The aversion to disagreement can result in the Confederacy Council failing to agree at all, leaving individual nations to take action as they choose, or even allowing individual people that choice. This is accompanied by a sense of sorrow, especially since the Peacemaker warned against indecision by the chiefs at the time of the making of the law. Disagreement can result in the appointment by the council of individuals to work on the matter with the parties—for example, the Cayugas meeting with different Oneida groups—to report back to the next council. Even without a formal appointment, individual chiefs will continue to communicate and meet in small groups, seeking to resolve matters or to generate solutions that can be brought to the fire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Thick Skins&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the council to function properly, its members needed enormous patience. They would become targets in a dozen ways. Their families would seek to influence them to make short-term decisions, to satisfy immediate needs, rather than to focus on the next seven generations. They would be provoked by insults and accusations. Their gossip-prone society would ensure that ugly rumours would spread about them. Even within the council, there could be hard feelings between individuals. Every version of the law repeats the Peacemaker&#039;s admonition to the chiefs that their skins must be so thick that no barbs will be able to penetrate them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker understood that if communication and memory were strengths of Haudenosaunee society, they were also the sources of weakness: gossip was constant and rapid, and malicious gossip would never go away. This was one of the matters that he recognized he could not change, so he had to develop ways of guarding against it. He fortified the chiefs against it, in the law itself:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chiefs skin must be thick &amp;amp; have patience.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I shall therefore charge each of your lords, that your skin be of the thickness of seven spreads of the hands (from the thumb to the end of the great finger) so that no matter how sharp a cutting instrument may be used it will not penetrate the thickness of your skin. (The meaning of the great thickness of your skins is patience and forbearance, so that no matter what nature of question or business may come before you, no matter how sharp or aggravating it may be, it will not penetrate to your skins, but you will forbear with great patience and good will in all your deliberations and never disgrace yourselves by becoming angry.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will receive many scratches and the thickness of your skins shall be seven spans. You must be patient and henceforth work in unity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . . all of you yourselves shall be as standing trees where the people will rest their eyes and minds. And so this will be the system (rule) amongst the persons (body) of your chiefs; and the thickness of your skins shall be seven times the first joint of the thumb (*oyonh&#039;gaaɂ*), and the reason for this is that when you are all legislating . . . no matter if your public may employ a sharp point (shoot a magic dart) or perhaps (else) they might even stick you with it, it won&#039;t penetrate. This is what it means: thou shalt be of a strong mind, O chief! Don&#039;t carry feelings of anger (grudge) or of spite. Thus it shall come to pass when thou are considering (deliberating) the affairs of the people, always continually employ good will (*gaɂnigonii&#039;yo*) and peace as well. Do not ever consider only thyself, O Chief! And always remember the future generations of our families, the grandchildren, and those yet unborn, and even those whose faces are coming beneath the earth.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We&#039;re taught that you&#039;ve got to have skin seven layers thick. You have to develop it. There&#039;s work to it. But when your skin is thick, nobody can get at you. They can&#039;t touch you. They can&#039;t hurt your feelings or cause you to have jealousy. Money won&#039;t tempt you. If somebody works bad medicine on you, it&#039;ll never find your weakness. It&#039;ll go right back on that person who sent it your way. That&#039;s why we say you&#039;ve got to have skin seven layers thick. If something touches you a little, you&#039;ll always have another layer of skin for protection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of course, by providing additional thickness for the skins of the chiefs, the law also provided a new metaphor for the people to keep in mind: a person who insisted on passing on rumours would be reminded that this kind of thing would not be allowed to penetrate anyone&#039;s skin. While some assume that the chiefs would build up the layers of their skin by toughening them from the outside, others maintain the layers are metaphors for internal character and fortitude.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The seven handspans recall other significant uses in the law of &amp;quot;seven&amp;quot;—the seven generations to look into the future when making decisions, for example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Mentors of the People&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Europeans, emerging in the eighteenth century from a long tradition of absolute monarchies and executive authority, were often surprised at the lack of executive power that the chiefs of the Confederacy actually had. They led by example; they lived modestly and humbly. It was—and remains—a different kind of leadership: &amp;quot;Their Great Men, both Sachems and Captains, are generally poorer than the common People, for they affect to give away and distribute all the Presents or Plunder they get in their Treaties or War, so as to leave nothing to themselves. If they should once be suspected of selfishness, they would grow mean in the opinion of their Countrymen, and would consequently lose their Authority.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today, it is no longer expected that the chiefs give away their property, in part because it is also no longer the case that their extended clan families look after all their needs. There is no chiefs&#039; pension plan, and in most cases, beyond sometimes paying their travel expenses, there is no compensation for the time the chiefs put into their duties. &amp;quot;A free government for a free people,&amp;quot; Joagquisho Oren Lyons has said. While it is vital that the chiefs should lack greed or a thirst for power, perhaps the best way in English to describe the manner that is proper for a chief is *sweetness*. The duties are a burden, an honour, but not a livelihood.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Kayanerenkó:wa explains the attitude more elegantly:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Lords of the Confederacy shall be mentors of the people for all time. The thickness of their skin shall be seven spans—which is to say that they shall be proof against anger, offensive action and criticism. Their hearts shall be full of peace and good will and their minds filled with a yearning for the welfare of the people of the Confederacy. With endless patience they shall carry out their duty and their firmness shall be tempered with a tenderness for their people. Neither anger nor fury shall find lodgement in their minds and all their words and actions shall be marked with calm deliberation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Onondaga text cited in *The Iroquois Book of Rites*, care for the people was expressed in terms of both authority and obligation, the balance that runs like a current throughout the law:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The chiefs must all be honest, that they must all love one another, and that they must have a regard for their people, including the women, and also our children, and also those children whom we have not yet seen; so much they must care for, that all may be in peace, even the whole nation. It is the duty of the chiefs to do this, and they have the power to govern their people. If there is anything to be done for the good of the people it is their duty to do it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You shall be a good person, and especially you shall be kind to all people, not differentiating among them—the people who are wealthy and the poor ones, the good-natured ones and the evil ones who sin readily. All of you shall act kindly, and you shall not differentiate among them. And as to your own fireside, never consider only yourself; you must always remember them, the old people and the younger people and the children and those still in the earth, yet unborn, and you will always take into account everyone&#039;s well-being, that of the ongoing families, so that they may continue to survive, your grandchildren.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Skanawati John Buck added: &amp;quot;Permit me to say to you, apply yourselves diligently to all the duties you have taken upon yourselves; faithfully perform every responsibility, because to you is entrusted the preservation and settlement of all things.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sayenqueraghta, of the Seneca Nation, explained the role of a royá:ner in 1765: &amp;quot;a wise dispassionate man [who] *thinks much* &amp;amp; *thinks slowly*, with great caution and deliberation, before he speaks his *whole mind*.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The settler expectation of executive authority might have proceeded from the use of the word &amp;quot;chief.&amp;quot; Modern Haudenosaunee have often explained that the word is not appropriate, since it carries the wrong spirit:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The word *chief* in our language means a position or office. We call it *royaner* and if there are many of them we call them *rotiyaneson*. If we take that word apart, what does it mean?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is coming from the root word *ioánere*, which means, in English, &amp;quot;nice&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;good.&amp;quot; And then when you put *io* at the beginning of it, it means it is masculine, or a man who is of the &amp;quot;nice&amp;quot; or of the &amp;quot;good.&amp;quot; And so that is literally, when translated into English, what Iroquois people think of their leaders—those men who are of the good.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . . Those leaders are the most humble ones and they are the poorest people of all of the nation because they are always giving, always giving, always giving, both materially, psychologically, spiritually and politically of themselves to all the people of the nation; they are always giving.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Were the chiefs supposed to be like the fathers (or rather, uncles) to their families? The relationships within families were not the same as they were in European society. Children and wives were not property in any sense, and whereas in a European family of the eighteenth century the primary obligations were the child&#039;s obedience and the parent&#039;s providing, in a Haudenosaunee family that duty to obey was singularly lacking. Just as traditional Haudenosaunee government was not executive, and had no coercive power over the people, parents would not exercise authority over their children. John Long, in 1791, wrote: &amp;quot;From their infant state they endeavour to promote an independent spirit; they are never known either to beat or scold them lest the martial disposition which is to adorn their future life and character, should be weakened: on all occasions they avoid anything compulsive, that the freedom with which they wish them to think and act should not be controuled [*sic*].&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Individual Haudenosaunee citizens carried a powerful sense of personal independence. It is no accident that the participants in the Boston Tea Party, defiantly sending a message about their own rebellious independence, dressed as Mohawks: the Haudenosaunee image of individuality and freedom did inspire some aspects of the American Revolution. Balancing that independence, though, was an equally powerful sense of belonging—to family, clan, and nation. It left each individual with a need to contribute, to fulfill duties and responsibilities. While the individual was expected to make up his own mind, that mind was expected to work for the good of the community.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One way that Haudenosaunee law avoids creating expectations of executive authority is by making people stewards rather than owners, &amp;quot;keepers&amp;quot; rather than bosses. Even early European documents describing functionaries within Haudenosaunee government use the term &amp;quot;keepers&amp;quot;—firekeepers, doorkeepers, wampum-keepers, faithkeepers. The term is not domestic; it refers to stewardship and the peculiar mix of responsibility and authority that characterizes Haudenosaunee government.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; The Chiefs: Permanence of Titles&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Many of the fifty men who became the first rotiyanershon of the Haudenosaunee were given new names by the Peacemaker. The new names were a sign of their transformation, of their accession to a higher level of chieftainship. They were no longer simply village chiefs. They were Confederacy chiefs, and in some cases, their names reflected their roles in bringing the peace, or the state they were in at the time of the peacemaking. Just as the Peacemaker&#039;s work was transformative, so the new names given to individuals reflected the way that individual had accepted a new set of responsibilities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The new names were also permanent. That is, if the Chief of the Small Bear Clan of the Cayugas died, a new person would be chosen by that family to take his place, and the new person would assume that title. Not only would he assume the title: he would also be expected to carry on the special duties and characteristics of his predecessor. &amp;quot;The principle that &#039;the chief dies but the office survives&#039;—the regular transmission of rank, title and authority, by a method partly hereditary and partly elective, was the principle on which the life and strength of the Iroquois constitution depended.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a title holder dies, his name is symbolically removed from him and given to his successor. The Condolence ceremony, in that sense, is also a &amp;quot;requickening&amp;quot; or making alive again. The death and rebirth of a leader is an ancient human practice: the myths of Osiris or the Fisher King are examples of the rebirth of the leader also restoring the spirit (and fertility) of the people and the land, with the new incarnation carrying the same name as his predecessor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a way, the new person carrying the name is also the old person in a new body:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The savages have a custom of rescucitating or making their friends revive, particularly if they were men of distinction among them. They make some other bear the name of the deceased; and behold the dead man resuscitated and the grief of the relatives entirely gone. Observe that to the name given in a great assembly or feast, they add a present which is made on the part of the relatives or friends of the one whom they have revived, and he who accepts the name and the present is obliged to take care of the family of the deceased so well that the wards call him father.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is probably one of the reasons why the rotiyanershon were called &amp;quot;Confederate Lords,&amp;quot; a designation possibly originated by Seth Newhouse, who sought to show how Haudenosaunee law ought to be respected by British law, since the two systems had such similarities. The British House of Lords functions the same way with respect to hereditary peers. If the Duke of Northumberland dies, the title does not die with him; instead, his heir immediately becomes &amp;quot;Northumberland.&amp;quot; The British system is truly hereditary: the succession is automatic, passing to the eldest child, and merit and choice play no part in it. The Haudenosaunee system is not strictly hereditary: each male member of the clan family has an equal potential for becoming the successor, and merit and the choice of the family play the key roles in choosing the new title holder. Or, as Morgan explained: &amp;quot;The office of sachem was hereditary in the gens [clan], in the sense that it was filled as often as a vacancy occurred.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes the clan mother and women conclude that there is no man in the family who has the attributes needed to become its chief. In such situations, the family &amp;quot;borrows&amp;quot; a man from another family, and he is condoled into the title of the deceased chief. He holds that title for life, and once he has been condoled he is recognized by the entire Confederacy as that family&#039;s proper representative, carrying the duties within the Confederacy Council of that title. For the law to work, it is important that the family have the best representative possible, and also that his legitimacy should not be questioned.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; The Cluster: Chief, Clan Mother, Sub-Chief, Faithkeepers, Runner&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most Europeans engaged in political and legal dealings with the Haudenosaunee met with the chiefs and the warriors. While the women had authority, it was not their role to engage in negotiations with representatives of other nations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Europeans did not see that each Confederacy chief was actually the centre of a cluster of five people, often appointed and condoled at the same time. Each chief today has a clan mother, who is responsible to work with him on the women&#039;s side; a runner to carry his messages; a &amp;quot;sub-chief&amp;quot; to sit behind him in council, to learn from him, and to fill in for him when he is away; and a male and female faithkeeper to help with the ceremonies. This cluster of five people includes male and female, political and spiritual, young and old. It recognizes that the chief cannot carry the weight alone. As Morgan pointed out with Pine Tree chiefs, if authority is more widespread, it is more democratic. Alone among all the chiefs, Thadadahoh has no sub-chief and no runner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The sub-chief, according to Morgan, &amp;quot;was styled an &#039;aid.&#039; It was his duty to stand behind his superior on all occasions of ceremony, to act as his messenger, and in general to be subject to his directions. It gave to the aid the office of chief, and rendered probable his election as the successor of his principal after the decease of the latter. In their figurative language these aids of the sachems were styled &#039;Braces of the Long House,&#039; which symbolized the confederacy.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today, both in council and in ceremonies, a sub-chief often sits behind his chief, a visible support as well as an apprentice or occasional substitute. While the chief has a &amp;quot;runner&amp;quot; or messenger, this person is more often used to carry word within the clan, and the sub-chief, often a younger man, is sometimes sent with messages to other nations. While satisfactory performance as a sub-chief can indeed &amp;quot;render probable&amp;quot; his selection as future chief, unenthusiastic or mediocre performance as a sub-chief will generally ensure that the person will not become a chief at all.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Clan Mothers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Several versions of the law do not describe in detail the authority and duties of the clan mothers. Possibly this is because the institution of clans and their matrons was already in place before the coming of the law—having been brought by the fatherless young man of an earlier meta-narrative—and therefore did not need to have new provisions made for it. Less likely, it is because the versions that became public were kept and explained by men, who had a less generous view, and less knowledge, of the role of the women. Most likely, the provisions of the law about clan mothers were simply not transcribed by the anthropologists at the same time as the rest of the law. Skaniatari:io John Arthur Gibson was not hesitant in describing &amp;quot;the Law of the Woman Chief&amp;quot; to J.N.B. Hewitt in 1909, not long before he dictated the long, authoritative version of the Great Law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since the position of clan mother was now linked inextricably with that of the chief, she became a visible participant in the Condolence ceremony that raised him up; her family would be condoled in the same way upon her death; and over time, things that were done to or for chiefs came to have their parallels with clan mothers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To some outsiders, the decision about who should be a clan mother seemed simple: the position would pass to the oldest living female in the family. Chadwick described his understanding of the process at the end of the nineteenth century:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The right of nomination vests in the oldest near female relative of the deceased chief, that is, the oldest of a class composed of his maternal grandmother and great aunts, if living, but if none of those are living, then the oldest of a class composed of his mother and her sisters (daughters of the mother&#039;s mother), or if none of these, then of his sisters, daughters of his mother, and if these are also wanting, then of his nieces, daughters of his mother&#039;s daughters; and if all these fail, then the right passes to collateral relatives of his mother&#039;s totem, and if there are none of these, no nomination can be made, and the chieftainship becomes extinct. The nominator consults with the two next senior women, ascertained by the same order, and classification of the family is thus made. It does not seem very clear what occurs if the three do not agree. . . . If a chiefship fails in consequence of the family to which it belongs becoming extinct, either in the person of a nominator, or of a qualified nominee, the Great Council has power to transfer the chiefship to another family (preferably one which is, or is considered to be akin to the extinct family), in which a chief is then nominated by the senior woman and her associates, and assumes the title in the usual manner, whereupon the succession goes in that family.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choosing a clan mother is more complex than simply finding the oldest woman in the family. Such a process would make little sense—no clan mother would last very long, and one of the key attributes of the system is its stability. In many families, it is the clan mother herself who names her successor, though often this is not necessary, because the choice will be obvious, since the clan mother will have been training someone—usually one of her daughters—in the duties and knowledge required. Different families have differing degrees of cohesiveness, adherence to tradition, and even their own internal traditions. Where no person has been designated before the death of a clan mother, and especially where there is some uncertainty about which families belong with that chief&#039;s title, there are situations in which the clan mother position remains vacant for years while rival claimants assert their entitlement. Since it is a family matter, and within a nation and a community, outsiders are reluctant to interfere: &amp;quot;On modern condolences one woman often has the sole nomination of a chief, but where several are to be consulted, the subject may be canvassed up to the last moment, and thus I have seen them running from house to house.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Haudenosaunee society does not have a formalized group of &amp;quot;elders,&amp;quot; but the clan mothers are often seen as people of wisdom and experience, whatever their ages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While a chief represents his nation as well as his clan family, the same cannot be said for the clan mother. Her duties are to her family, and it is the family alone that chooses her. In contrast, because the chief needs to work with the other members of the council, his appointment must be confirmed first by the other clans of his nation; then by the other nations on his side of the fire; and finally, through the Condolence, by the nations on the other side of the fire. No similar system of checks and balances exists for a clan mother. However, when a clan mother dies, there is a &amp;quot;Small Condolence&amp;quot; for her family, and the council does not sit for ten days after her death, because the mind of the entire community has been cast down and is clouded by sorrow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The clan mother has a number of duties related to the law, and most of them are about maintaining continuity. Generally, she is responsible for keeping the clan family&#039;s personal names, so that she is consulted, along with other older women, about a choice of name for a new child. She also ensures that the new child does not take the name of a living person. If it is necessary to appoint a speaker to address women&#039;s issues, she will appoint that speaker—but she will also convene a meeting of the women to develop their position first. In consultation with the women of the clan family, she selects the successor to a deceased chief. While the chief can be removed by the women, in fact it is his clan mother to whom he remains most actively responsible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Though today the situation varies from clan to clan, generally a clan mother is the custodian of three wampum strings: a white string representing her own office; a second white wampum as the &amp;quot;horns&amp;quot; or credentials of her chief; and a purple string that is used to send notification of the death of her chief. While some clan mothers also hold strings of wampum associated with Pine Tree chiefs, those men are not appointed by or responsible to clan mothers but are appointed by and responsible to the condoled chiefs in council.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gibson describes the clan mother&#039;s responsibility to ensure that the chiefs in council are fed. The clan mothers do this today: in council at the Grand River, the responsibility for cooking for council rotates between several clan families, and the clan mothers both coordinate the cooking and take part in it. While to some this may seem menial, there are also good reasons for it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After each instance in which the Peacemaker transforms someone, or a group, from being a threat to peace into being a mainstay of peace, they eat together. Eating together is a fundamental step in Haudenosaunee society towards creating, restoring, or maintaining peace. Feasts are connected to medicine, restoring harmony, and removing harm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Food is medicine, in the Haudenosaunee understanding of the world. When the clan mother provides the meal for the chiefs in council, she is fulfilling an important role in maintaining their mental, physical, and spiritual health. Sken:nen is both health and peace. In the days when the women controlled the gardens, they were the economic mainstay of the community. Making the meals for the council was a reminder of the women&#039;s economic authority.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At council, after lunch, the chiefs always indicate their gratitude to the cooks: it is a public reaffirmation of their connection with, and debt to, the clan mothers. Yet it must be said that many people fail to understand the significance, the deep meaning, of providing the meal for the chiefs, and conclude that this practice today is a matter of subservience, a task that takes the clan mothers away from their true work of observing the chiefs in council and guiding them when they err. If some of the chiefs begin to forget why this work is important, they do begin to undervalue the role and responsibility of the clan mothers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The clan mothers are mentors, just as the chiefs are. They are consulted by the people in times of personal crisis. They take special responsibility for counselling families and for ensuring that children are properly looked after. Today, the clan mothers together have taken up some of the responsibilities of provincial or state child welfare authorities: meeting with parents who fail to look after their children properly; helping to find homes for children in need; mediating family disputes. The children are their particular concern, and they easily find themselves acting as advocates and protectors in difficult family situations. Part of the power of the clan mother is discretion: her work is conducted quietly, behind the scenes, in times when people count on her advice but hesitate to make their issues public.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Just as the chief, when he is being condoled, appears with a cluster of helpers (including the clan mother), so the clan mother, too, has an assistant. Skaniatari:io John Arthur Gibson describes the role and nature of the clan mother&#039;s principal helper: &amp;quot;the young man with no title he is stronger, also he walked around, also he is able he outwitted the game, the wild walking around in the forest, he has the power of survival of the people, whatever he was able to provide, everything will go well, they will work together, he and the Clan Mother.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Why would a woman chief have a strong young male helper, a man without a title? First of all, this is another example of gender balance in Haudenosaunee law. A chief has a clan mother. The clan mother has a male helper. Today, the chief has a male and female faithkeeper. Authority is balanced as between men and women, even as roles are differentiated. While the clan mother can count on the support and help of all the women of the clan family, her young male helper has specific duties as her spokesman, as her liaison with the men, and, in the worst case, as The Man Without Pity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Why a young man? Partly to balance the clan mother&#039;s age, so that authority and communication span generations. Partly because the young man will be able to communicate with the hunters and warriors, and they are a crucial aspect of the family&#039;s social makeup. Beginning with the Jesuit Relations, Europeans observed that the women were the ones who would urge the young men to war or peace. Konwatsitsiaienni Mary (&amp;quot;Molly&amp;quot;) Brant was said to have the ability, as a clan mother, to put hundreds of warriors into the field. Historians assert that the &amp;quot;Mourning Wars&amp;quot; of the 1600s were instigated by the women, and particularly the clan mothers, seeking to replace men who had been killed. While European observers seldom saw or knew what was happening in the councils of Haudenosaunee women, or in their dealings with the young men, the connection between the women and the warriors was functional, constant, and important. As well, a young man would have the energy to carry out many of the tasks that a clan mother needed to do, and at times he would provide the personal physical protection a clan mother might need.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Among the responsibilities of the clan mothers are ensuring that there are people in the family who can deliver all the speeches associated with the wampums and responsibilities that accompany them; ensuring that there are always qualified candidates for leadership positions; ensuring that the people of the family are given an opportunity to express their views at clan meetings; ensuring that the names within the family are properly bestowed and not duplicated; and ensuring the safety of children in the homes and stability of families.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Removing a clan mother is a process that reflects the one used to remove a chief.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The young man without a title who is the clan mother&#039;s constant helper may also be the person who, after the required number of warnings, announces the removal of a chief. That is, this young man may fulfill the role that is described as The Man Without Pity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is not quite symmetry between the way a chief is removed and the way a clan mother is removed. Once again, the primary mover in this process is her family, not outsiders. If a clan mother is not thinking or acting right, &amp;quot;at that time now the sisters of the mother now one of them will have to speak, she will remind her where her duties are.&amp;quot; If the clan mother does not agree and become remorseful for her actions, it falls to her assistant, the young man without a title, to speak with her and point out the error of her ways. If she does not listen to this, the matter passes to her entire family to discuss. If they decide to remove her, the matter is taken to the chief to be confirmed, and he will deliberate not only on the removal of the errant clan mother but also on the person the family has chosen as her replacement. If the chief agrees, &amp;quot;at that time the young man he will revoke her duties if she disregarded their word, now he will remove her, he will take her authority away at that time, and then he will stand up a new person.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The young man is placed in a complicated position: the person who selected him, and with whom he has been working closely, is now facing removal at his hands. The situation must be dire, and he would act not on his own initiative but impelled by the entire family.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Faithkeepers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Morgan suggests a less structured system of faithkeepers, with some clans appointing them more as a sign of greater devotion, and with an informal division of responsibility between women and men:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They designated the days for holding the festivals, made the necessary arrangements for their celebration, and conducted the ceremonies in conjunction with the sachems and chiefs of the tribe, who were, ex officio, &amp;quot;Keepers of the Faith.&amp;quot; With no official head, and none of the marks of a priesthood, their functions were equal. The female &amp;quot;Keepers of the Faith&amp;quot; were more especially charged with the preparation of the feast, which was provided at all councils at the close of each day for all persons in attendance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Keepers of the Faith&amp;quot; were . . . selected by the wise men and matrons of each gens. After their selection they were raised up by a council of the tribe with ceremonies adapted to the occasion. Their names were taken away and new ones belonging to this class bestowed in their place. . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It was the duty of the individuals selected to accept the office; but after a reasonable service each might relinquish it, which was done by dropping his name as a Keeper of the Faith and resuming his former name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today, it is rare that a faithkeeper would drop his or her personal name and assume a faithkeeper name. Rather than raise up faithkeepers &amp;quot;at a council of the tribe,&amp;quot; they are confirmed at the same time as their chief at a Condolence ceremony of the entire Confederacy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Faithkeepers, working together, have in practice become the managers of most longhouses, bringing together work crews for maintenance, arranging firewood, and keeping food in the cookhouses. In some anthropological works, they are referred to as &amp;quot;deacons,&amp;quot; an indication of their civilian but religious roles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the advent of the message of Handsome Lake in the 1790s—as codified in the 1830s at Tonawanda—the faithkeepers were given new additional functions, political ones, and their titles became more permanent. Today, in some communities, faithkeepers are being installed without attachment to a chief&#039;s title, allegedly for life, and in some cases attached to longhouses rather than to the family titles. The Karihwí:iyo, the Code of Handsome Lake, is recited and renewed annually, just as commitment to the law was a periodic matter. The annual autumn recitals of the Code became known as Conventions, and over time they became increasingly political. Seating in Convention is strict, not quite a mirror of Confederacy seating, since the delegations are not quite a reflection of the confederate structure, but instead represent the different longhouses. Today, they are attended by a significant number of the chiefs, though many of those who attend (they are called &amp;quot;delegates&amp;quot;) are not chiefs or faithkeepers. The creation of a process parallel to the Confederacy, one which includes the longhouses of Cattaraugus and Allegheny without their having a &amp;quot;fire,&amp;quot; a traditional government, may serve to undermine the surviving government of the Confederacy. In theory, a discussion in a Convention is then taken to the communities, and then to the Confederacy Council for a decision: in practice, some people consider a decision binding if it was made at Convention.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Criteria for Becoming a Chief&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The principle of choosing a chief is simple enough: they should be the best men, the most thoughtful and compassionate. They should be living examples of the way of life confirmed by the law: &amp;quot;When the Royaneh women, holders of a Lordship title, select one of their sons as a candidate, they shall select one who is trustworthy, of good character, one who manages his own affairs, supports his own family, if any, and who has proved a faithful man to his Nation. . . . Such a candidate shall not be the father of any Confederate Lord.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The criteria have accumulated over the years (and people have become more imperfect over time, it seems) so that it is becoming increasingly difficult to find appropriate candidates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Newhouse set out specific criteria that would disqualify a candidate, and would make a sitting chief ineligible to take part in council: &amp;quot;infancy, idiocy, blindness, deafness, dumbness and impotency, in such cases another man shall be appointed to act for him in Council meetings of the Confederacy. The above defects shall not deprive his right to be installed in case of necessity.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sakokwenionkwas Tom Porter says the right ones have been chosen by the Creator when they are born (a small step away from having their positions preordained before birth). He also says that the man must be married; should have at least three children; must speak his language fluently, or he will not be able to function in council; and must be &amp;quot;clean&amp;quot;: that is, not married to someone of the same clan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While many Haudenosaunee today believe that choosing a new chief is a matter for the women of the clan to decide, Morgan described a Seneca system in the mid-1800s that involved elections:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Indian system of consanguinity is considered, it will be found that all the male members of a gens were either brothers to each other, own or collateral, uncles or nephews, own or collateral, or collateral grandfathers and grandsons. This will explain the succession of the office of sachem which passed from brother to brother, or from uncle to nephew, and very rarely from grandfather to grandson. The choice, which was by free suffrage of both males and females of adult age, usually fell upon a brother of the deceased sachem, or upon one of the sons of a sister; an own brother, or the son of an own sister being most likely to be preferred. As between several brothers, own and collateral, on the one hand, there was no priority of right, for the reason that all the male members of the gens were equally eligible. To make a choice between them was the function of the elective principle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon the death of a sachem . . . among the Seneca-Iroquois, a council of his gentiles [clan members] was convened to name his successor. Two candidates, according to their usages, must be voted upon, both of them members of the gens. Each person of adult age was called upon to express his or her preference, and the one who received the highest number of affirmative declarations was nominated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One thing most Haudenosaunee do agree about: a person who demonstrates overt ambition for office is not likely to be chosen. It is not only that the ambitious one has shown a lack of humility: it is that if he wants a title for himself, he will probably want other things, as well, and will be selfish and prone to corruption.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Raising Up Chiefs&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every ceremony of Condolence to raise up a new chief is itself a re-enactment of the time the Peacemaker condoled Hiawatha. It has been said that when a thing is re-enacted, myth and ritual become the same thing. So, in every Condolence, all the people, in a way, become the Peacemaker.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since the making of the Confederacy would also be explained, wrote Morgan, &amp;quot;the council to raise up sachems became a teaching council, which maintained in perpetual freshness in the minds of the Iroquois the structure and principles of the Confederacy as well as the history of its formation.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The coronation of a European monarch is attended by the leadership of the nation, both political and spiritual, and by the heads of other states. It is a public legitimation of both the individual and the continuity of the state. The ceremony of Condolence, for the Haudenosaunee, fulfills some of the same functions: the presence of the leaders and the people confirms the legitimacy of the person who has been raised up. Until he is condoled, he has no security of title—he is called a &amp;quot;benchwarmer&amp;quot;—and does not receive the same respect. A &amp;quot;condoled chief&amp;quot; is a person whose identity and acceptability has been confirmed and is no longer open to question. The fact that he is condoled enables him to conduct himself with the required humility but also the required authority. He has nothing to prove.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; The Women: Landholders and Clanholders&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The duality and balance between men and women is another theme that runs through the law. While there have been suggestions that the role of women has been downplayed over the years by a Haudenosaunee society that has come under the influence of Western patriarchal values and religions, constitutionally the women&#039;s role remains strong and well defined. Just as individuals are linked to the earth and clay from which they originate, the Creation Story began the connection between women and the earth, and the law continued it. European settlers, in contrast, endowed women with a far smaller bundle of rights. While nobody in Haudenosaunee society had ownership of the land in the way the common law of England had developed feudal fee simple, to the extent that anyone had authority over the land, it was the women. Virtually every version of the law confirms this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Women shall be considered the progenitors of the Nation. They shall own the land and the soil.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . . our Mothers the Females . . . shall be the proprietors as well as the soil . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . . and the soil of our land is all of our Mothers the Women of the Five Nations. They shall be the proprietors of the same.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Mohawks of Canajoharie told Sir William Johnson on March 11, 1763: &amp;quot;Being asked whether the Women were looked upon as having any right in the disposal of the lands, he answered &#039;that they were the properest owners, being the persons who laboured on the lands and therefore were esteemed in that light.&#039;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To suggest, as William Fenton has, that the division of labour and law between men and women in Haudenosaunee society is a reflection of a duality that assigns life to women and death to men is too stark, too harsh. True, the men hunted and fished and made war, and these involve death; while the women gardened and bore children, and these involve life. But the women also gather and harvest living plants; they would join hunting expeditions; they would sometimes encourage warfare. The roles of women and men were, and remain, very different, and there are often good reasons for this, but they cannot always be boiled down to life and death. They are more often explained as reflections of the different gifts of men and women.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Though the women were the landholders, the men were responsible for dealing with other nations. Thus, it might be the men who met with the European representatives about land matters, but decisions concerning the land belonged to the women. On May 15, 1791, women of the Six Nations met with Thomas Procter, a representative of the United States, at Buffalo Creek. They told him: &amp;quot;You ought to hear and listen to what we women shall speak, as well as to the sachems, for we are the owners of this land—and it is ours; for it is we that plant it, for our and their use. Hear us, therefore, for we speak of things that concern us and our children, and you must not think hard of us, while our men shall say more to you; for we have told them.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Seven years later, Thayendenegea Joseph Brant wrote to a British official that it would be legally wrong for the women to participate in a land surrender. But it is not clear from his writing whether he was saying that the women had no authority over the land, or just that the responsibility for such dealings with other peoples fell to the men: &amp;quot;Something further which I think of a very singular nature has been suggested to us by Mr. Stewart respecting a surrender to be made of the Land by our Women. Such a measure was however considered by them and the Chiefs as too singular and foreign from the known Customs of the Five Nations.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Possibly it is because the women have the firmest connection with the clay or soil of a place that they also have authority to choose the male leaders. The life sustainers, the products of the gardens and fields, were raised by women working together, and cooperation between women, in the fields and in the longhouse, remained essential for the unity of the family. Women provided family stability, the memory of its names, and the guidance for its youngest children. To provide balance against an excess of authority being vested in the men, it made sense to have the power of nomination rest with the women: &amp;quot;This is how these matters shall continue on: these are to be the principal ones, the women controlling the title names, because it is by means of all their suffering that people are born here on earth, and it is they who raise them. . . . From now on the women shall confer antlers upon the men. Indeed, the women, our mothers, this is with whom we are co-operating. So that is how it shall be done in our several nations, this kind of matter, among our ongoing families and our grandchildren and those in earth, still unborn.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Having authority without a means of expressing it would be frustrating. While generally the women, like the rest of the family, speak through their chief, there are numerous recorded instances when they made their feelings known collectively and directly. Sagoyewatha (Red Jacket) was a speaker for the women in several of his important speeches. So was Deyagorazera (Thomas King). Thus, the women of the Seneca town of Geneseo spoke through a male speaker when they intervened to reaffirm the legitimacy of the rotiyanershon (probably after the young men had attempted to take power):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I speak now in the name of the Women of our Castle. They sincerely pity your late situation, and as they know their own power and influence, they now plant the Sachims Horns on their heads so they may be as powerful as ever, and be distinguished from all the rest.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Belt to the 5 Nations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Europeans, the rights and influence of the women were surprising but not unnatural: &amp;quot;It is very remarkable that the Women are admitted to the Council fire &amp;amp; have the liberty of speaking, which is sometimes used; when the nature of the Education of this tribe [the Mohawks] is considered, the difference of the instruction of the girls &amp;amp; boys is so small, the sources of knowledge are so inconsiderable that I see no reason why a Woman with strong natural sense should not acquit herself in the Council with general Satisfaction.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the women to have to intervene at all was considered remarkable, for when the women did make their feelings known, the men paid attention: &amp;quot;We flatter ourselves you will look upon this our speech, and take the same notice of it as all our men do, who, when they are addressed by the women, and desired to desist from any rash enterprise, they immediately give way, when, before, every body else tried to dissuade them from it, and could not prevail.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In some ways, the women stepping into a matter constituted a last step. It was a reminder that the key to bringing Thadadahoh to peace was Tsikonsaseh&#039;s intervention. It was a reminder that the women ultimately carried the authority to remove the chiefs when they failed to heed their duties.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When strangers or visitors came to the village, and waited at the woods&#039; edge, it was the young men who went out to meet them. If necessary, it was the young men who would meet the enemies in combat at the woods&#039; edge. They would bring the guests in after the preliminary greetings, to be properly welcomed in the village itself. The men took the responsibility and risk of meeting with strangers or foreigners. The women did not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Even where a matter was the women&#039;s by right to deal with, like land, and where the decision inside the circle was made by the women, it was the men who carried that decision to outsiders. The women ordinarily did not speak in council with outsiders. However, one should not think that the women&#039;s world was sealed off from contact with foreigners just because their role in government was internal. Haudenosaunee women were not shy. They were protected by the men, but they were not prevented from having contact with outsiders. The first official interpreter for the Haudenosaunee with the Dutch was Hille van Olinde, the daughter of a Mohawk woman and a Dutchman. To the Europeans, there was probably no Haudenosaunee institution more surprising than that of the clan mothers, often mistakenly called a matriarchy. To be sure, the clan mothers had distinct roles, and influence well beyond that of their European contemporaries. The proper way to consider those roles is through the lens of balance, in providing the women&#039;s perspective as a counterpart to that of the men rather than exercising control. Like the chiefs, the clan mothers wear no special marks of office. They hold the wampum strings that indicate their positions (some clan mothers carry these in their purses). Like the chiefs, the clan mothers are mentors to the people.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Just as the chiefs in council were expected to build decisions by discussing the issues in small committees first, and then nation circles, and then discussions of a &amp;quot;side&amp;quot; of the fire, before seeking council unanimity, so the women had their own forms and forums of discussion. For anyone to be a speaker for the women, there would have had to be a decision made by the women. In turn, that would indicate that the women would have met, discussed the issue, and formulated that decision.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Women&#039;s institutions would probably have usually functioned without the men present—to some extent, they still do. Men would not know their structures and functions in detail, and would tend not to explain them to outsiders anyway. The separation between &amp;quot;men&#039;s things&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;women&#039;s business&amp;quot; would mean, among other things, that it could have taken a female anthropologist speaking with a female Haudenosaunee &amp;quot;informant&amp;quot; to gather the descriptions. When Morgan, Hewitt, and Goldenweiser were receiving accounts from the men, they had no female counterparts. While this creates an imbalance of information, leaving a more complete record of the &amp;quot;men&#039;s version&amp;quot; of things, it is not deliberately sexist. The failure to fully gather and recount the women&#039;s side is indeed a failure, but it reflects the male domination of early anthropology, and probably the greater sense of privacy accorded Haudenosaunee women&#039;s work. Historically, it was the men who met and worked with outsiders and developed relationships with them, allowing the outsiders to learn about Haudenosaunee men&#039;s thinking and institutions. Haudenosaunee women had reduced contact with outsiders, and they could and did protect their knowledge and institutions, even from Haudenosaunee men.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lack of documentation by anthropologists and writers has, ironically, had a double effect. On the one hand, it has left women&#039;s business relatively untouched by the opinions and speculation of outsiders. On the other hand, it has permitted the emergence of claims about women&#039;s authority, roles, and institutions that are not supported by established tradition or any historical or written record. The women have no visible equivalent of the Kayanerenkó:wa to document their doings. That protects them from the speculations of strangers while making them vulnerable to internal abuse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; The Circle of Protection of the Law&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The image of the chiefs standing in a circle with their arms joined is simple and striking: what is inside the circle is the people—past, present, and future—and the land. The Great Law and the Great Peace, intertwined and inseparable, are the perimeter of the circle, maintaining it, describing it. Skaniatariio John Gibson stated in 1899: &amp;quot;And quite possibly it will be appropriate to encircle the body of our people (the chiefs are going to join hands and surround the public of the Five Nations), and thus we shall roll up the minds of all our society. So now let us join hands and we the federal chiefs will encircle the crowd of our people.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Encircling the people means protecting them. For the chiefs, as holders of the law, to encircle the people means that the Great Law and the Great Peace have also created that circle of protection. In this circle, there is a deliberate echo of the moment in the making of the law when the chiefs were surrounded by the Seneca warriors and the Peacemaker transformed the warriors from being a threat to the Confederacy and the peace into their protectors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Leaving the Circle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Just as creating the circle and joining the peace was a matter of a person&#039;s will, so remaining within the circle is a matter of choice. Any person has the right to leave the circle, to live elsewhere, and to live under another system of law. The Great Law of Peace is not coercive. It recognizes that to keep a free person against their will is to invite trouble, to foster hard feelings. Where a person&#039;s mind is not for peace and harmony, it is better for the community that they should be allowed to leave, either for a while or permanently.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the person choosing to leave is a title holder, though, his family cannot be left without representation. His mind is no longer within the circle, so the family becomes free to choose another representative. The family cannot be deprived of a voice in council. The metaphor for this, with respect to a chief, is that the horns of his office will catch on the elbows of his fellow chiefs, who are standing in the circle of the law with their arms joined, as a stag&#039;s antlers catch in the bushes, and the &amp;quot;horns&amp;quot; of his title will thus fall within the circle, to be given by his family to someone else:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If any one go through, his horns would fall off from his head.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . . and if any of the Confederate Lords will go outside of the confederation, his crown of the deer&#039;s horns the emblem of his Lordship, together with his birthright, will lodge on the arms of the Confederate Lords, whose hands are joined. So that his crown of deer&#039;s horns falls off from his head, and forfeits his lordship title, together with his birthright, and they will remain inside of the confederation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And so it shall surely happen in the days to come that some one person might escape beneath the circle of you chiefs around the crowd of our people. And his chiefly title shall catch its antlers there (on the arms of the chiefs) and his horns will lie there inside the circle that they surround (embrace); and so he will be stripped (*hoyaɂdo&#039;goɂ*) when he passes the circle and goes out free; and there his status (*hoiwaɂge*) will be reduced and becomes equal to that of the warriors, and he may never again hold any office.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an individual desires to leave, even a chief, he is free to do so. In other words, he leaves as an individual, so that the title can be picked up by his family and given to another individual to carry: &amp;quot;Thereupon the deaconess of the title, now she will take back the antlers. Thereupon she will choose a replacement, and this is the one on whom she will bestow the antlers, seating him instead on the former seat of the chief he is replacing.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a tradition that a chief who chooses to go to war can &amp;quot;hang up his horns,&amp;quot; or have his clan mother &amp;quot;lift his horns&amp;quot; while he is engaged in military activities. Newhouse confirms this: &amp;quot;If the Five Confederate Nations declare war and if any of the lords are desirous to take part in the war, he can do so by giving up the emblem of his Lordship Title which he has received from his women relatives, to whom the title reverts in such a case, for they are the proprietors of the Lordship title, until the war is over, when he may resume his title and seat in the Council.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a logic to this: in times of war, the council often hands over its authority to the war chiefs, who are more able to move swiftly to protect the people. With the council not sitting, the chief would have few duties, and his presence would not be missed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The two last Seneca chiefs to come into the peace, Kanuhkitawi and Donehogowa, were to be both war chiefs and peace chiefs. In Dayodekane&#039;s version, the Onondaga chief Skanawati is also told that half of his body will be Lord and half will be war chief.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What happens, though, when he engages in a war as part of someone else&#039;s army? Often, the Haudenosaunee will explain that they do so as allies, not as citizens or subjects. In the case of Donehogowa Ely Parker, according to Gawasowane Arthur Parker, there was celebration when he was granted an officer&#039;s commission in the American Civil War: &amp;quot;It was then that the Indians held a great council and asked their chief to remain to guide and protect them. A great feast was made in his honor and Do-ne-ho-ga-wa was commended to the care of the Great Spirit. A public thanksgiving was offered, thanking the Ruler of the Great-World-Above that the Keeper of the Western Door had indeed guarded it well. The &#039;Proclaimers of the Law&#039; chanted the *Adoweh* ritual and the Keepers of the Faith invoked the spirits to guard the sachem who was to go to battle.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Does a person so seated to replace a chief who has left the circle or been de-horned need to go through the ceremony of Condolence before he is recognized? There are two schools of thought: the first is that the Condolence is used only when someone has died and his family needs to be consoled, and a chief who has left the circle has not died. It would follow that even though the individual is no longer the holder of the title, his replacement would not be condoled, but would be acknowledged as sitting in that seat during the lifetime of the previous title holder. The second is that the Condolence is also necessary because it provides the necessary recognition and protection coming from the other nations of the Confederacy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Individuals are always free to return.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It appears that the same principle applies to holders of other offices: &amp;quot;A Canienga matron, becoming a Christian, left her country, with two of her children, to enjoy greater freedom in her devotions among the French. The act, writes the missionary, so offended her family that, in a public meeting of the town, &#039;they degraded her from the rank of the nobility, and took from her the title of Oyander, that is, honorable, (*considérable*)—a title which they esteem highly, and which she had inherited from her ancestors, and deserved by her good judgment, her prudence, and her excellent conduct and at the same time they installed another in her place.&#039;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In its simplest form, the law states that a citizen who takes up citizenship in another nation, or who submits to its laws and acknowledges allegiance to that nation and those laws, ceases to be a citizen of the Haudenosaunee, and is no longer considered to be &amp;quot;within the circle&amp;quot; of the law&#039;s protection. &amp;quot;And if at any time any of the Confederate Lords will submit to laws and regulations made by other people he or they are no longer in, but outside of the confederation, and shall be called &#039;Gone Through.&#039; And likewise if any of your people submit to the laws and regulations made by other people he or they shall forfeit his or their birthright, thereafter he or they shall have no interest or claim inside the Confederation.&amp;quot; An extreme interpretation of this would be that *any* obedience to other laws is an automatic loss of citizenship.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In colonial times, European powers competed for sovereignty over North America, with France and Britain claiming both ownership of territory and overlordship over its peoples. The Europeans avoided explaining their ideas of empire to their allies, and this led to a strange dichotomy. Generally, the same British and French governors who treated Indigenous peoples as allies on the ground would report to their superiors across the Atlantic that they had secured obedient subjects. There were exceptions, though. Warraghiyageh Sir William Johnson wrote bluntly, after General Braddock had taken a &amp;quot;surrender&amp;quot; from several Indigenous nations:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altho&#039; the words of the late Treaty [at Detroit, September 7–10, 1764] may at first appear extraordinary, yet, I am not at a loss to account for them, as I know it has been verry customary for many People to insinuate that the Indians call themselves Subjects, altho&#039; I am thoroughly convinced they were never so called, nor would they approve of it. Tis true when a Nation find themselves pushed, their Alliances broken, and themselves tired of a War, they are verry apt to say many civil things, and make any Submissions which are not agreeable to their Intentions, but are said merely to please those with whom they transact Affairs as they know we cannot enforce the observance of them. But you may be assured that none of the Six Nations, Western Nations &amp;amp;ca. Ever declared themselves to be Subjects, or will ever consider themselves in that light whilst they have any Men, or Open Country to retire to, the very Idea of subjection would fill them with horror.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indeed I have been just looking into the Indian records, where I find in the Minutes of 1751 that those who made ye Entry say, that Nine different Nations acknowledged themselves to be His Majestys Subjects, altho&#039; I sat at that Conference, made Entrys of all the Transactions, in which there was not a Word mentioned, which could imply a Subjection, however these Matters (notwithstanding all I have from time to time said on that subject) seem not to be well known at home, and therefore, it may prove of dangerous consequence to persuade them that the Indians have agreed to things which (had they even assented to) is so repugnant to their Principles that the attempting to enforce it, must lay the foundation of greater Calamities than ha[ve] yet been experienced in this Country.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is necessary to observe that no Nation of Indians have any word which can express, or convey the Idea of Subjection, they often say, &amp;quot;We acknowledge the Great King to be our Father, we hold him fast by the hand, and we shall do what he desires&amp;quot;; many such like words of course, for which our people too readily adopt &amp;amp; insert a Word verry different in signification, and never intended by the Indians without explaining to them what is meant by a Subjection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Imagine to yourself, Sir, how impossible it is to reduce a People to Subjection, who consider themselves Independent thereof by both Nature &amp;amp; Scituation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the case of the Haudenosaunee, independent-minded nations reflect their independent-minded citizens. Loyalty to the law leads naturally to a refusal to submit to other laws and other sovereigns. At the Six Nations Grand River Territory, in the 1950s, Haudenosaunee teachers who refused to swear the oath of allegiance required of Canadian civil servants lost their jobs. Meanwhile, as if to accentuate the difference in allegiances between the elected and traditional councils there, a person taking office in the elected band council would swear an oath not only to perform his or her duties properly but also of allegiance to Canada—an oath not sworn in other places by elected councillors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Calling People Home&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the people moved from their hunter-gatherer existence towards horticulture, they began to live in larger villages. A little more than 1,000 years ago, squash came first; then beans, corn, and sunflowers. It became possible to have towns of over 1,000 people. Archaeologists have concluded that the large towns had smaller satellite villages and hamlets, whose people would seek refuge behind the palisaded hubs in times of war and danger. At the same time, the people would often range farther from the towns in hunting season, for trapping, trading, or raiding, setting up temporary camps as they moved farther away from home.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With relatively small populations and vast territories, the people could spread out. As they became more distant from one another, communication between the groups became more difficult, and the risk of division and estrangement increased. When that distance became a problem, it would be time to call the people home. This cycle of expansion and contraction—a cycle which might take generations—reflected the cyclical nature of other aspects of Haudenosaunee life.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Calling people home&amp;quot; became an element of the law. As it was foreseen that the web of the League would be weakened as it was stretched, so the law provided a means of renewal and consolidation. Like other elements of the law, it is a way of healing things that have become injured or broken: &amp;quot;When any person or any of the people of the Five Nations emigrate and reside in a region distant from the territory of the Five Nations Confederacy, the Lords of the Five Nations at will may send a messenger carrying a broad belt of black shells and when the messenger arrives he shall call the people together or address them personally displaying the belt of shells and they shall know that this is an order for them to return to their original homes and to their council fires.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Individuals left. Families left. Entire clans and villages would move. The arrival of European settlers and missionaries brought more disruptions and attractions. In historic times, in the east, at least half the Mohawks moved to the St. Lawrence, to the settlements of Kahnawake, Kanehsatake, and Akwesasne. In the latter half of the seventeenth century, the north shore of Lake Ontario was home to numerous Seneca and Cayuga villages at its west end and Onondaga settlements at its east and. Many Onondagas, in the mid-eighteenth century, had moved to Oswegatchie on the St. Lawrence, and fifty years later were in Akwesasne.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Calling people home&amp;quot; was a matter of law, but it was also pragmatic. There would be no point in calling people who would not come—or if there were no good reason to call them home. In the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries, the British would often state their desire for the Haudenosaunee—and especially the Mohawks—to call home their people on the St. Lawrence. While the British would give their reasons as wishing the Confederacy to remain strong, it was obviously in their interest to weaken the French alliance and to increase the numbers of British allies. The Haudenosaunee strategy, while unevenly implemented, remained one of either seeking balance between competing European interests or seeking to maintain an alliance with the winners. To British requests to call people home, the answers were sometimes blunt (&amp;quot;we can&#039;t persuade them&amp;quot;), sometimes ironic (&amp;quot;if you have the influence you say you have, why don&#039;t you call them home?&amp;quot;), sometimes suggestive that it was Haudenosaunee policy to have the people on both sides of the divide. &amp;quot;As to drawing home their Indians from Canada as they were Exhorted to do by the Gov&#039;r yesterday they say, that as the Gov&#039;r has a correspondence with those of Canada he can prevail more with them then they can do &amp;amp; desire he would do his Endeavour with those of Canada to draw their Indians home to their own Country.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Consolidation was a natural reaction to attack: the Buffalo Creek reservation was such a refuge at the end of the American Revolutionary War; so was the Grand River Territory. There was strength not only in unity but in concentrated numbers. The nineteenth century was a turbulent time, with people moving under pressure from settler governments. By the 1830s, the United States had adopted an Indian Removal Policy, having concluded that moving Indian nations west of the Mississippi would provide both peace for the United States and land for the settlers. Following a series of disastrous land transactions, the Oneidas in New York bought land in Kansas but moved instead to Wisconsin. Internal differences led to a large group moving from Wisconsin to Ontario. Some Cayugas in New York had moved to Buffalo Creek. Another series of dubious land transactions left them landless, and many moved to the Grand River Territory in 1840. Others settled among the Senecas at Cattaraugus. Senecas from the Ohio country moved to Oklahoma. In the early 1800s, Mohawks from Kahnawake who had sided with the United States in the Revolutionary War moved to the &amp;quot;American side&amp;quot; of Akwesasne. Mohawk families from Kanehsatake later moved to Wahta, on southern Georgian Bay.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These large-scale movements of families and communities were the result of outside pressures: wars, government policies, economic opportunities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These movements on a larger scale were taking place while intermarriage and moving on a smaller scale continued as it always had. Intermarriage between communities was an important means of binding families and nations together, and remains so today. There are few people in any Haudenosaunee community who cannot point to ancestors from other communities. Individuals moved away, as emigration often matched immigration. The fur trade saw many men settle in trading locations—Mohawk communities in the Peace River country of northern Alberta; Michel Karihiio&#039;s community outside present-day Edmonton became &amp;quot;Michel&#039;s Band,&amp;quot; recognized under the Indian Act of Canada and enfranchised in 1954.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1954, Frank Thomas (&amp;quot;Standing Arrow&amp;quot;), moved &amp;quot;home&amp;quot; to the Mohawk Valley, partly in protest against the taking of Akwesasne land by the St. Lawrence Seaway. In 1974, after confrontations with the Quebec Provincial Police, some Mohawks in Kahnawake decided it was time for their people to return home. They circulated a broad belt of dark wampum to all Mohawk communities to announce their intention and invite the people to reassemble in traditional Mohawk territory. They had selected a former girls&#039; camp at Moss Lake in the Adirondacks and renamed the place Kanienekeh. While the Grand Council recognized the community—and it moved to a new site a few years later—the Mohawk council fire remained at Akwesasne. In 1980, Sakokwenionkwas Tom Porter announced his intention to return to the Mohawk Valley, to create a place of peace where Mohawk language and tradition would be maintained. This new community, Kanatsiohareke, has also been recognized as a Mohawk community by the Haudenosaunee.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Establishing new communities, then, does not seem remarkable to modern Haudenosaunee. It is something that has been done for centuries. It is provided for in the law—not so much in the creation of the new towns, which may have been taken for granted, as in provision for &amp;quot;calling people home&amp;quot; when those new towns become scattered too far afield, weakening communication and therefore weakening the Confederacy itself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Returning&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No matter how far away the people moved, physically or politically, they still remained, in the eyes of the Haudenosaunee, &amp;quot;our people.&amp;quot; When, during the latter half of the seventeentth century, perhaps half the Mohawks moved to the St. Lawrence, and became linked to the French, it was still common for visitors from the Mohawk Valley to come and spend weeks with them (to the frustration of the French), or for people from Kahnawake or Kanehsatake to head south to visit their relatives. The trade between Montreal and Albany used Mohawk middlemen (one judge called them &amp;quot;traders rather than merchants&amp;quot;). Both the French and the British despaired of getting Haudenosaunee to fight one another: they would instead provide intelligence about British or French intentions and strategies, and would warn one another of impending attacks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During the first half of the seventeenth century, the Haudenosaunee experienced a period of expansion. They took in nations from the east who were reeling from attacks by the colonists. They conquered and absorbed enemies, including the Andaste (Susquehannock) and Erie. They absorbed neighbours like the Wenro and Attiwandaronon. They absorbed many of the Hurons, decimated by war and disease. The north shore of Lake Ontario, from Niagara to the St. Lawrence, became settled with Haudenosaunee communities. By the early 1700s, though, there had come a sense that the Confederacy was stretched too thin. War with the Mississaugas, attacks from the French in the east, other pressure in the west, led to a decision to bring the people home, and by the 1720s there had been a consolidation back to the homelands. During the same period, there had been unsuccessful British pressure to bring home the people on the St. Lawrence, from the settlements of Kahnawake, Kanesatahke, Akwesasne, and Oswegatchie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Perhaps it is fair to consider the retention of links between apparently estranged communities as something like chewing gum or mozzarella cheese: the strands that make people family seem to be able to stretch indefinitely without breaking. The law contemplates this, and indeed it provides the mechanisms for eventual reconciliation. The first of these mechanisms is the perception that it is always possible to become one people again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Indians who live at Canada at least those of Cachnawage are part of the Five Nations and what ever Rough Treatment they receive will be resented by the Five Nations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . . the Six Nation Deputies &amp;amp; Cagnawagas spoke very smartly to the French Governor &amp;amp; told him it appeared to them that he wanted nothing more than to set them who were Friends &amp;amp; Relatives by the Ears &amp;amp; have them destroyed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[In January, 1710] a Deputation from the 5 Nations to the Commissioners at Albany that they had sent some chosen Men to the Cagnawagas at Canada to endeavor to prevail upon those Indians to return to their Native Country to live.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The most important procedural mechanism for reconciliation remains the Condolence. It is the way home: it reconciles after wars or separation, enabling people to forgive the most grievous offences. Historically, the Haudenosaunee had been split by several wars: the Seven Years&#039; War; the American Revolutionary War; the War of 1812, had each seen Haudenosaunee fighting one another. In each case, the reunification of the Confederacy was accompanied by a Condolence that would put away the bones, cover the graves, prevent the blood of the dead from calling out for revenge, and remind everyone of the great dream of peace that they shared. No matter how estranged communities and individuals might be, the Great Law provided a hope that they could reunite, become one people again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In September 1760, the British Army had taken Montreal. The Seven Nations of Canada had made a quiet arrangement with the Imperial Indian Department as early as 1757 that when the British attack came, they would remain neutral. Now, at a council in Kahnawake, the Haudenosaunee among the British forces met with the Seven Nations chiefs. Sir William Johnson confirmed earlier promises about land and peace. The Haudenosaunee proposed the reunification of the Confederacy. The Speaker for the Eight Nations replied:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brethren of the 5 Nat&#039;s.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[You] In return to your Belt of Yesterday Whereby you told us that as your Br. W&#039;y. [Sir William Johnson] had finished every thing with us, you on your part had something to say which was that as there had been during this war a division and disunion between us; and [thereby] desired us to reunite and be firm friends as heretofore, We hereby assure all present that we with pleasure agree to your friendly proposal and reunite as formerly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The reunification of the Confederacy at the end of August 1815 provides another example of reconciliation processes. The council was convened at the request of Deputy Superintendent General of Indian Affairs William Claus. On one side were the representatives from the Grand River Territory, in Canada. On the other were representatives of the Senecas, Onondagas, and Cayugas from Buffalo Creek, Tonawanda, and Allegheny. Claus opened the council with a Condolence and uncovered the fire by presenting a peace belt of white wampum. As in a normal Confederacy Council, the Mohawks put forward the matter for consideration. Significantly, the speaker was Tekarihoken: the matter was of great import. He said:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brothers and relations,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We the several Nations residing at the Grand River salute you from the other side we are the same people with you, we are relations of the same colour, notwithstanding having been opposed to each other in the Field during the late Contest between our Father the King of England and the Americans. Our friend who has just uncovered the Council Fire has removed all obstructions, our minds are set at ease. The River which separates us is opened that we may have a free passage at all times. The roads are cleared of all briars and rubbish, that we may again renew that friendly intercourse which formerly existed between us. I now speak to you in behalf of the Indians residing on the Grand River, and I am desired to assure you that all ill will is removed from their Hearts towards you from the [ ] American land.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Delivered a bunch of Strings of Wampum&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tekarihoken&#039;s words were followed by a speech by Echo, an Onondaga Chief:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brothers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I salute you in the name of the Hurons, Shawnees and Six Nations at the King&#039;s Council Fire which has just been uncovered. I speak to the Senecas, Cayugas and Onondagas from Buffalo Creek, Tehaniwandi and Allegany who are now present at our Father&#039;s Council Fire. I also address those who are at their homes, before our Father the Deputy Supt. General, the King&#039;s Officers who are now present, and tell you that all ill blood has been removed from our hearts. What has been done, is now forgotten. We are all of the same colour and ought to be friendly towards each other.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To make our Friendship lasting, we put the Tomahawk the depth of a Pine Tree under ground; and that it may not be removed we place over it a Tree that the roots may so cover it that it cannot be found again. . . . We condole with you from the bottom of our hearts for the loss of your friends, and wipe the tears from your eyes, we open your throats so no obstruction shall remain, that you may speak your mind freely and with the same friendship which formerly existed between us, as we now in the name of the Nations already mentioned address you as friends. If you will stand up we will take you by the hands. Should an idle young Man make use of any improper Language we request that you will not take any notice of it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Large bunch of Strings of black and white wampum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The American Indians stood up and the others took them by the hand repeating the assurances of friendship, after which the Old Eel, an Onondaga Chief spoke to the Deputy Supt. Genl. as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brothers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You have this day uncovered the King&#039;s Council Fire at this place where our forefathers were accustomed to assemble. I speak in behalf of the Indians who are now come here to meet our brethren from the Grand River. We salute you and wish you well. We have heard all that you have said now and last Spring, and are much pleased with it. We rejoice that the Great Spirit has brought us together to unite and be friends. Many have been the meetings at this place between the King and our Ancestors. I am an old man and have been present at many of these meetings when your Grand Father spoke to us. We will always remember his words they are buried deep in our hearts. We look to you to be a friend to the Indians as he was. It is now late in the day, and as we are to answer you we will cover the fire and meet again tomorrow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A few Strings wampum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
September 1st&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tekarihoga&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brothers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We thank the Great Spirit for giving us a new day, and permitting us to meet again. We wait to hear what you may have to say.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red Jacket, Principal Seneca Speaker&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brothers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the name of the Indians from the other side of the River. I now address myself to the King, the Commanding Officers, and Colonel Claus our head, and to the Six Nations, Wyandots and Shawanese.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Strings wampum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brothers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I am happy now to meet you in the usual friendly manner, and you may be assured that what has happened was not from any animosity towards our ancient Father and friends. We are a poor people. We cannot do as we would. We are as Prisoners. But the fetters are now off and we are at liberty to communicate freely with our friends. We are not of the same Nations only, but of the same Families also. We therefore ought to be united and become one Body.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Strings of Wampum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . . The Road being now open, we will be glad to have a visit from you at Buffalo Creek. Eating and drinking together may be omitted at present, our time being so short, rising and shaking hands will do as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Strings of wampum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They then mixed with each other and spoke to the Deputy Supt. General as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tekarihoga, Speaker&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brothers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You have witnessed our proceedings which it has pleased the Ruler of the World to assist us in. It has finished as we could wish, and we desire that you will immediately acquaint our Western Brethren of the work we have been doing; and that we shall soon proceed to the west to meet them and perform the same ceremony there as was agreed upon last spring in Council. We now speak to you in One Body, and we hope that we shall be allowed to travel along the road peaceably and without being insulted by the inhabitants, and that you will give us provisions to enable us to travel homewards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee had again become &amp;quot;one body,&amp;quot; in a council facilitated by the British. They had shaken hands and then literally &amp;quot;mixed together,&amp;quot; becoming, in effect, one side of the council fire, with the British on the other side. Tekarihoken, by council&#039;s end, was speaking for the reunited Confederacy—and as speaker for the Mohawks, was once again properly addressing the British, who had originally arrived at the Eastern Door.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Kayanerenkó:wa provides explicitly for the reunification of the Confederacy after a disruption. Estranged relatives are, after all, still family. A polity that is brought together by the yearning for peace in people&#039;s minds, and kept together by will rather than coercion, will tend to permit people to leave and to return. In anticipating this in the constitution itself, Haudenosaunee law differs deeply from that of its neighbours. Canada, threatened by Québec secession, has barely managed (through litigation) to set rules for the dismantling of the nation, and has no law concerning its reconciliation. The Civil War in the United States carved deep rifts, &amp;quot;testing whether that nation or any nation so conceived and so dedicated can long endure,&amp;quot; in the words of Abraham Lincoln&#039;s Gettysburg Address. Historians have paid little attention to the way the Haudenosaunee heal their divisions: William Fenton ignored the reunification and declared the Confederacy finished after the American Revolution. Is the weakness of the law in its inability to hold the structure together the most important feature, or is the flexibility of the law, in providing a path for reconciliation, more remarkable and more noteworthy? In truth, they are another example of the system of balances contained within the entire legal system: the inability of the law to prevent people from leaving is balanced by the explicit ways within the law itself to bring them home.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Symbols of the Law&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Kayanerenkó:wa and the speeches and councils that accompany it are full of symbols and metaphors. The metaphors both explain and remind the people of the principles of the law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While the metaphors are mostly visual, Haudenosaunee law uses several senses to convey meaning. Visual symbols include the longhouse and its extendable framework; the Tree of Peace, the eagle atop it and the Great White Roots spreading under it; and all the minor elements that assist with council.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some symbols go underground. The weapons of war are buried deep underground, in the pit created by the uprooting of the great pine tree. The blood and bones of the deceased are put away underground so that they, too, can never be seen again. In the Creation story, the terrible animals of an earlier age are also put underground, and kept there. Serpents, the companions of Thadadaho&#039;s bad-mindedness, venomous messengers, live underground. Underground means out of mind, the home of the negative.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other symbols are kept above ground, and even aloft, to be kept firmly in mind. The eagle perches atop the white pine tree. The pine itself soars above all the other trees. When wampum belts are read, they are held up. The things the people need to remember are constantly before their eyes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee use their other senses in the world that includes both law and ceremony. It is not only the smoke but the smell of tobacco that attracts the attention of the spirit world and the Creator. It is the sound of the songs in the ceremonies—ceremonies of thanksgiving, the soothing sounds of the Condolence, the powerful sound of the Great Feather Dance—that carry the power to heal, to persuade, to express gratitude. Thadadaho is rubbed down as part of the effort to restore his good mind, as the legs of visitors are symbolically rubbed to remove the thorns and burrs of the road.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yet, as with most legal systems, the symbolism is primarily visual, and the symbols themselves are things rather than concepts. Wisely, the Peacemaker chose things that the people would see often, so that in their daily lives they would be reminded of the law. What are modern Euro-American equivalents? Things that carry little practical meaning for the people themselves: eagles and crowns, coats of arms and flags. Their symbols are much more . . . well. . . symbolic. They are not part of the everyday lives of the people whose laws they represent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; The Tree of Peace&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Peacemaker chose the great white pine as the symbol of the peace, he did so deliberately, for reasons that would have been obvious to the people of his time. The pine is the tallest tree of the forest, superdominant, towering over the surrounding mixed hardwoods, projecting upward past the oak canopy. It can be ancient, living four centuries. It is used as medicine, restoring health, its purifying smoke clearing the senses. The miracle of its growth from a tiny seed mirrors the birth of the Great Peace from the dream of a single man.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the Peace and the Law were in place, the Peacemaker declared that the weapons of war should no longer be seen:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The war clubs, the killers of humans, and the tomahawks and other weapons, as to these, it will be better for us to hide them from them, so that they cannot see them again, our grandchildren.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereupon Tekanawita said: There is only one way for it to get done, for us to be able to hide the weapons from them: we will pull up our great tree, Great Tall Tree, Great Long Leaf, and it will pass right through, making a hole through the earth. Thereupon we will pick everything up and throw it down where the earth is opened up, all of the war clubs, and the strong current in the earth will carry these away. Thereupon we will replant the tree, and they will never see the war clubs again, our grandchildren. Thereupon we all will continue to think peacefully by day and by night as the families continue on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereupon the chiefs, all of them, supported the matter unanimously, the several nations saying: We will bury them, the war clubs, and then we will never again see the people shedding each other&#039;s blood.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the tallest tree, the white pine also has strong roots, deep and widespread, rather than a single taproot. The deep, wide roots indicate stability, but they also become the carriers of the metaphor for the spreading of the peace. White pines are also relatively fire-resistant: they survive most surface fires due to their thick bark, branch-free trunks, and moderately deep roots. Metaphorically, they survive the fires of war.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Europeans had their metaphorical equivalent of the Haudenosaunee white pine: the May-Tree, around which the people of the villages of western Europe would gather in a spirit of reconciliation every spring. In February 1654, a Haudenosaunee delegation met with the Governor of New France. The third wampum they delivered, explained the speaker, &amp;quot;was a May-tree, which he planted, he said, in the middle of the Great River St. Lawrence, opposite the fort of Quebec, the house of Onontio, the great Captain of the French . . . a May-tree which should rear its summit above the clouds, in order that all the Nations of the earth might be able to see it, and that it might be a rendez-vous where all the world could rest in peace under the shade of its leaves.&amp;quot; The governor said that he accepted the proposal, but that he would &amp;quot;transplant the May-tree to Montreal, in order that access to it might be easier, the latter place being on the frontier.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;May-Tree&amp;quot; is a bad translation but a good interpretation, since it is the closest European equivalent to the most important aspects of the Tree of Peace. On May Day, throughout pre-Christian western Europe, a day of reconciliation and good will was celebrated. Wrongs that had not been adjusted by that date had to be forgotten (the equivalent of throwing them into the deep pit under the Tree of Peace), as the people joined hands (just as the brotherhood of chiefs would do around the Tree of Peace).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Just as Thadadaho was the keeper of the council house at Onondaga, so wherever a council place was appointed, a keeper was also named: &amp;quot;According to our ancient custom, whenever a council-fire was kindled up, and a Tree of Peace was planted, there was some person appointed to watch it.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Tree of Peace and the Tree of Council are two different trees, though. The Tree of Peace is the great white pine, the tallest tree, closest to the Sky World. As such, it is the tree most likely to communicate with the Creator. Alone among the pines of eastern North America, it has clusters of five needles, to remind us of the original Five Nations. It is where the eagle perches, above the rest of the forest, to look out for danger coming from afar. The Tree of Council, on the other hand, is the oak. It has a canopy to shade the people meeting beneath it, and tends to shade flat, open areas. The oak is also long-lived. It resists high winds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hiding the weapons from both the children and the warriors has a parallel: the admonition, as part of the Condolence, to hide the bones of the dead from the children, whose curious minds might be upset, and from the warriors, whose minds might then tend towards anger and revenge. Were the weapons actually hidden? The history of the Haudenosaunee for the past three centuries has been one of almost incessant warfare. Putting them away, in pragmatic terms, may have come to mean reducing their visibility and their prominence. Putting the weapons away in terms of their use within the community was paramount: that the Senecas guarded the Great Black Door indicated that the weapons could still be used against external enemies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; The Great White Wampum&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first wampum records of the Haudenosaunee are the simplest. They are the short strings of the ceremony of Condolence, the five strings that symbolize the coming together of the minds of the nations, and the circle that sets out the structure of the government. The originals would have been almost completely made of white beads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another of the first wampum records of the Haudenosaunee is the &amp;quot;great mat,&amp;quot; a wampum belt of pure white beads. This wampum is associated with the Peacemaker just as other great wampums are linked to Hiawatha and Thadadaho. Perhaps the Peacemaker&#039;s wampum is a mat, connected to the earth, because he returned to the earth when his work was done. Certainly it is a &amp;quot;mat&amp;quot; because he would make people&#039;s minds comfortable by making their bodies comfortable first. The wampum recalls this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lords have unanimously decided to spread before you [Thadadaho] on the ground this great white wampum belt Ska-no-dah-ken-rah-ko-wah and Ka-yah-ne-renh-ko-wah, which respectfully signify purity and great peace. . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Article XIX:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus it shall be. I and the confederate chiefs now plant a tree of Peace or shelter, at your residence A-do-dar-hoh of the Fire Keepers the Onondagas. And this Tree of Peace or shelter I called &amp;quot;Jo-ne-rah-de-she-go-wah.&amp;quot; And in the shade of this tree of peace or shelter we spread out this &amp;quot;Jo-no-da-ken-rah-ko-wah&amp;quot; (meaning belts of white wampum is spread under the shade of the spreading branches of this tree of peace or shelter). And on this place which we prepare it for you A-do-dar-hoh, your brothers, and your cousin Chiefs will be your seats, and we do now put you A-do-dar-hoh, your brothers and your cousin chiefs on the wampums spread out under the shade of its spreading branches of this tree of peace or shelter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is said that part of this wampum was kept at the Grand River Territory. If so, part of it was returned in 1999 by the Royal Ontario Museum, where it had been since 1935. Another fragment was later returned from the National Museum of the American Indian.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; The Eagle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Haudenosaunee legend, the eagle, flying higher than all other birds, has the best chance to see and visit the Sky World. It communicates between the worlds, like tobacco smoke. The eagle causes people to look up, to be inspired by its grace and strength:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moreover, I decree that a large creature, a free one, which flies high and has long distance vision, and which is watching all over the world, that this is what we shall seat at the top of the tree, the tree we have growing, Skaetsi:kona [Great Tall Tree Trunk], as to that, it is there that we are seating it now, the one called Eagle. Moreover, it will be protecting [*holding*] our power, for it will be watching all over the world where they are settled, the many nations. And therefore it will notice things at once and it will observe when, possibly, someone will see a root growing along, of Tsyoktehhaekeaeto:kona [the Great White Roots], and possibly someone will chop into the root enough so that it will be able to cause its blood to flow. . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moreover this is what will happen in the future, in days and nights to come, and if it so happens in future days, that wherever the roots extend, the Great White Roots—all of the nations seeing where those roots are—and if someone were to chop into them, at once it will holler, the one perched at the top of the tree, Eagle, and that is what everyone will hear, it notifying them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . . So now at the very top of our standing tree, the Great Tall Pine, have I perched the Eagle (great talons) [the symbol of foresight]. And so it shall have your collective power, and the reason for this is that it shall occur that this Eagle aloft goes to and fro over the earth, which means that your work for the Great Law and for Reason shall prevail on the earth and even toward the skyworld. Both things are reserved to you federal chiefs, and you shall regulate the minds of the public, and also the individual families, and also the territories and settlements of the people amid the forests.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Eagles seek out nesting places at the tops of white pine trees that soar above the oak canopies. They seek places with open areas, where they can take off and land despite their broad wingspread. From their nesting places, they can see all around them. They are unusually alert. In choosing the eagle as a symbol, the Peacemaker was doing the same as he had done with the family, the fire and the longhouse: he had chosen something with which the people were familiar; something that would remind them of the law every time they saw it. In those days before DDT, there were many eagles in the forest, and along the rivers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Though no version of the Great Law says so, the eagle gradually became a symbol of the Confederacy itself, a symbol of the way the nations had joined together to become a single family or clan. As Yankee Spring of Tonawanda explained:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Eagle is the symbol of the Confederacy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Iroquois, or the Five Nations, began as separate entities and became known as such when they formed the League. When they learned the great natural law (Gayaneshagowa) the Creator told the people a way by which they might know each other. It should be by wearing of an eagle feather, because that bird was a far-seeing bird, and the Creator wanted his people to be far-seeing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The great mutual law was designed for the future. It did not rest upon the past. The Creator chose the eagle feather by which they might recognize each other in the future. He chose the eagle as the totem of the Iroquois as a people, and he ordained that collectively the Five Nations should belong to one clan, that of the eagle, which is called variously, oswegadage&#039;a, oshada&#039;ge&#039;a, &amp;quot;Dew Eagle,&amp;quot; or do&#039;nyonda, &amp;quot;Bald Eagle.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One feather he deemed enough for his people&#039;s headdress. In ceremonies they added to the single large whirling eagle feather by wearing a cap which had at the forehead a cluster of split feathers from which the quills had been removed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; The Dish with One Spoon: Sharing the Hunting Grounds&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker had observed that one source of bloodshed had been disputes over hunting grounds. By this provision of the Kayanerenkó:wa he removed the idea of exclusive hunting grounds, replacing it with the concept of the Dish that would feed everyone: &amp;quot;Equally will we share the animals on which we will have to live (i.e. we shall have an equal right to hunt, etc.) as Haweni&#039;yu, who dwells in the sky, has provided for us.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In some renderings of the principle, it is stated that there is a single wooden spoon in the bowl—again, an implement that will assist in feeding the people, but without sharp edges, so that there will be no risk of bloodshed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereupon Dekanawidah said: &amp;quot;it will turn out well for us to do this: we will say, &amp;quot;We promise to have only one dish among us; in it will be beaver tail and no knife will be there.&#039;&amp;quot; Thereupon the chiefs confirmed that so it shall happen. Thereupon Dekanawidah said, &amp;quot;Now we have completed the matter; we will have one dish, which means that we will all have equal shares of the game roaming about in the hunting grounds and fields, and then everything will become peaceful among all of the people, and there will be no knife near our dish, which means that if a knife were there, someone might presently get out, causing bloodshed, and this is troublesome, should it happen thus, and for this reason there should be no knife near the dish.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Lords of the Confederacy shall eat together from one bowl the feast of cooked beaver&#039;s tail. While they are eating they are to use no sharp utensils for if they should they might accidentally cut one another and bloodshed would follow. All measures must be taken to prevent the spilling of blood in any way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . . I have decreed that all of you are federal chiefs; I have rolled up your publics (constituents) into one, as well as other tribes (at random) in neighbouring territories; so then there shall be only the common dish resting there for all of us, and this will contain beaver tail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And surely this will come to pass. It will contain nothing that is sharp-edged. And this is what will happen if we should put any sharp-edged thing into that dish which we have set down, for surely it will cut somebody touching it. Then some one will surely bleed. This is what it means. When we have set down our dish of wild game, we shall all enjoy equal portions where the people have hunted (the hunting grounds amongst the several tribal territories of native lands), and all human beings shall now bear good will for one another in their travels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then Dekanawideh continued and said: &amp;quot;We have still one matter left to be considered and that is with reference to the hunting grounds of our people from which they derive their living.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They, the lords, said with reference to this matter: &amp;quot;We shall now do this: We shall have only one dish (or bowl) in which will be placed one beaver&#039;s tail and we shall all have coequal right to it, and there shall be no knife in it, for if there be a knife in it, there would be danger that it might cut someone and blood would thereby be shed.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(This one dish or bowl signified that they will make their hunting grounds one common tract and all have a coequal right to hunt within it. The knife being prohibited from being placed into the dish or bowl signifies that all danger would be removed from shedding blood by the people of these different nations of the confederacy caused by differences of the right of the hunting grounds.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Recall that in the dark days before the coming of the law, it was not uncommon for people to live alone, in isolation from one another. Examples of this in the story of making the law include the Peacemaker, living with his mother and grandmother; the Cannibal; Tsikonsaseh; and Hiawatha. Bringing them to their good minds was followed by returning them to society. The threshold to that return was the sharing of a meal. They had to learn to eat with other people again, and they had to learn to share their meals. The meals and feasts the Peacemaker had with each of these people are microcosms of the transformation of attitudes implicit in the Dish with One Spoon. Again, the Peacemaker had taken his piecemeal accomplishments and extrapolated them to an entire society.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is another aspect of the &amp;quot;no sharp edges&amp;quot; principle: it is that people will avoid using &amp;quot;cutting words&amp;quot; that might injure one another&#039;s feelings: &amp;quot;As the bowl circulated the Peacemaker said, &#039;We will drink from one common bowl. When we come here to the council, we will adopt civilized behavior. When people are here to put their minds to the problem of survival, we will be careful not to use words that cut anyone else. Our diplomacy is a version of our future as human beings.&#039;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The wampum preserving this part of the Great Law is kept at the Grand River Territory, and several documented readings of it have been by chiefs from that community. In 1862, at the council at Cattaraugus, the Grand River chiefs came to read the Great Law, to seek a reaffirmation of the Confederacy&#039;s commitment to it: &amp;quot;Canada nations presented the wampum with a dark spot in the middle represent a bowl or dish with beaver tail in it . . . represented with beaver meat in it. They should eat together—use no knife for fear they should cut and draw blood.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Why beaver tail? Because, it is said, it is the chiefs&#039; favourite dish. It is also extremely high in fats and nutrients, a delicacy in a society where meat was sometimes scarce. Another explanation is that the conflict over hunting grounds might have begun or revived with the fur trade, and the beaver was the prime object of that trade.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The idea spread as an element of the peace. That is, peace depended not only on the original Five Nations refraining from internal wars but also on removing sources of friction with other nations. It is possible that the bloodshed of the Dark Times had its origins in conflicts over scarce resources—food. The source might have been a bad year, a starving year, and the bloodshed might have kept going, as blood feuds do. The Peacemaker, by addressing this conflict, went to the source of the problem rather than the symptoms. Sharing hunting grounds was an easy concept to grasp. The number of deer that visitors would take would have little effect on the overall population, and in any event shared hunting meant reciprocity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other readings of the wampum by Skanawati John Buck have been preserved, and they are consistent, both with one another and with the original terms of the Great Law. In 1887, Augusta Gilkison of Toronto recorded:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The firekeeper told the first belt, all white except for a round purple patch in the centre. This represents all the Indians on the continent. They have entered into one great league and contract and they will all be one and have one heart. The pot in the centre is a dish of beaver, indicating that they will have one dish and what belongs to one will belong to all.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The new treaty, confirmed by the exchange of wampum-belts and by a peculiar interlocking of the right arms, which has ever since been the special sign of amity between the Iroquois and the Ojibways, was understood to make them not merely allies but brothers. As the symbol on one of the belts which is still preserved indicates, they were to be relatives who are so nearly akin that they eat from the same dish. This treaty, made two centuries ago, has ever since been religiously maintained.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like other elements of the Great Law, the sharing of hunting grounds was intended to expand, so that there would not be a territory of peace with conflict at all its edges:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The dish with one spoon referred to in this provision of the Great Law appears often in councils between the Haudenosaunee and other indigenous nations, as well as in relations with Europeans. It refers to the hunting grounds. As the dish of beaver tail stew is shared between the chiefs, the land is like a bowl to feed all the people. The wampum belt preserving this principle is white, with a round purple area as the bowl.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The concept of the dish with one spoon spread gradually, as the Great White Roots of Peace spread to other nations. . . . As treaties enshrining that principle were made with other nations, hunters would be able to use ever larger territories.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Expansion of the hunting grounds, along with the spreading of the Great White Roots, are examples of the thinking reflected in &amp;quot;adding to the rafters&amp;quot;—expanding the Longhouse to take in other peoples and their lands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Linking Arms Together&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker had extrapolated the structure of village and nation government to a new confederate level. He had used the complex terms of kinship that the people already knew as the glue to bind them together. Now he began to identify the metaphors and symbols that the people would use and recognize.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The terms of kinship did not just bind the people together—they also were the way the people related to the world around them. The thanksgiving address that begins any meeting or council has a careful structure that sets out the organization of the natural world and the place (and obligations) of people within it. Everything is related, and everything is linked. Michael Foster wrote: &amp;quot;There is a certain symmetry in the Iroquois conception of the ritual process which is an interlocking chain of obligations between man and the Creator.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If people knew who they were—as individuals, family members, clan members, citizens of nations—they felt that much more secure. If they also knew where they fit into the natural world, those links, as well, would help them avoid being swept away. The Peacemaker recognized the need for a web-like structure of obligations and relationships that reminded them of the kinship that lay at the heart of the peace. He sought consistent, uncomplicated symbols as reminders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Circle Wampum—a simple circle of two intertwined strings of white wampum, with forty-nine strings going from the circumference towards the middle, was such a symbol. Each string represents a title holder, a chief. The two intertwined white strings around the circumference represent the Great Law and the Great Peace, which are so interwoven as to be inseparable. There are three white beads between each of the strings—and these are reminders of the Peacemaker&#039;s Three Words. As with King Arthur&#039;s Round Table, the circle reminds the chiefs that they are all equal, with none higher than any other. The circle is the circle of the law around the people: it is their protection. It evokes the palisade around the town. As with many other symbols of the Haudenosaunee—including the longhouse itself—maintaining the circle of the law requires constant effort. The chiefs have formed this circle by linking arms, holding each other&#039;s arms so firmly that even if a tree fell upon them, it would not break their hold, or their resolve: &amp;quot;We therefore bind ourselves together by taking hold of each other&#039;s hands firmly and forming a circle so strong that if a tree fall prostrate upon it, it could neither shake nor break it, and thus our people and our grandchildren shall remain in the circle of security, peace and happiness.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The degrees of closeness between individuals and peoples are indicated by how they take hold of one another&#039;s arms: shaking hands in friendship; taking one another by the arm being closer; linking arms reflecting brotherhood. This gradual rapprochement was often repeated in the symbolism of the evolution of relations between the Haudenosaunee and the British:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We not only made the chain of friendship very bright; but we locked arms, and took fast hold of each other&#039;s hands, and left the token of friendship.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You, the Five Nations Confederate Lords, be firm so that if a tree falls upon your joined arms, it shall not separate you or weaken your hold. So shall the strength of the union be preserved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Holding hands, holding arms, and linking arms are three distinct acts of increasing closeness. The chiefs link their arms—the closest and firmest grasp, unbreakable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Skanatariio John Arthur Gibson also described the circle of the peace and the law: &amp;quot;This is where it burns, the Great Fire, its smoke rising and piercing the sky; where the family is, the single family we have created; where they are forming a circle, the chiefs, linking arms. Moreover this is what encircles the group: the Good Message, and the Power, and the Peace, and the Great Law; even if the wind were to rise and the tree to topple where they hold each other by the arms, the circle cannot break.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a difference in metaphor between &amp;quot;linked arms&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;joined hands.&amp;quot; The linking of arms is a sign of brotherhood, whereas shaking or joining hands is a weaker matter of friendship. Careful translation is necessary to keep the two concepts separate. In the &amp;quot;Newhouse&amp;quot; version published by Parker, the ideas are mixed: &amp;quot;There are now the Five Nations Confederate Lords standing with joined hands in a circle. This signifies and provides that should any one of the Confederate Lords leave the council and this Confederacy, his crown of deer&#039;s horns, the emblem of his Lordship title, shall lodge on the arms of the Union Lords whose hands are so joined.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Chiefs&#039; Version speaks only of joined hands: &amp;quot;And if any lord . . . shall break through this circle of unity, his horns shall become fastened in the circle, and if he persists after warning from the chief matron, he shall go through it without his horns and the horns shall remain in the circle.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gibson does not describe joined hands, only linked arms: &amp;quot;Moreover, if a chief of one of our several nations or clans, if a chief passes through the circle surrounding the crowd, his antlers will get caught where they are linking arms, and there, underneath, on the side of the encircled crowd, they will remain.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This concept of joined arms in brotherhood was later used to describe the closeness or union of nations upon their joining in treaty relations with the Haudenosaunee. Perhaps the first such recorded description is the speech of Kitsaeton of the Mohawks at Three Rivers in 1645, when he described the new relationship between the Haudenosaunee, the Algonquins, and the French:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The tenth [belt of wampum] was given to bind us all very closely together. He took hold of a Frenchman, placed his arm within his, and with his other arm he clasped that of an Algonquin. Having thus joined himself to them, &amp;quot;Here,&amp;quot; he said, &amp;quot;is the knot that binds us inseparably; nothing can part us.&amp;quot; This collar was extraordinarily beautiful. &amp;quot;Even if the lightning were to fall upon us, it could not separate us; for, if it cuts off the arm that holds you to us, we will at once seize each other by the other arm.&amp;quot; And thereupon he turned around, and caught the Frenchman and the Algonquin by their two other arms—holding them so closely that he seemed unwilling ever to leave them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In another instance: &amp;quot;the Iroquois set himself to sing and dance; he took a Frenchman on one side, an Algonquin and a Huron on the other, and holding themselves all bound with his arms, they danced in cadence and sang with a strong voice a song of peace.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the proceedings of 1645 were completed, a Huron delegate declared the result: &amp;quot;It is done. We are brothers. The conclusion has been reached; now we are all relatives—Hiroquois, Huron, Algonquins and French; we are now but one and the same people.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Linking arms together does more than recall the Kayanerenkó:wa and the circle of the rotiyanershon. It also reflects the Haudenosaunee ceremony of adoption. Today, in the Longhouse, when a person is adopted, they are walked up and down the length of the building, with their arms linked to another person on each side, while the people holding their arms sing their atonwa, and the men stamp their feet and women clap in unison, in cadence, in approval and welcome. &amp;quot;Of all the surviving Iroquois rites, the *Adonwa*, or Personal Chant ranks among the four most sacred. It is also pre-Columbian. When the Mohawk speaker took a Frenchman and a Huron on each arm, and marched them the length of the council space and return, to the accompaniment of his native auditors, he was dramatizing their adoption.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is not surprising that there is consistency between the linking arms in the Great Law, linking arms in a close treaty relationship, and linking arms in an adoption ceremony. They all deliver the same message: &amp;quot;Now we are one family. Now we are Brothers.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; The Council Fire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The council fire, in historic times, burned in the centre of the council itself. The fire is not to be made from chestnut wood, because that wood crackles and throws sparks, and could distract the minds of the chiefs. Since the council is held in daytime, the fire is not needed for light. In winter councils in today&#039;s longhouses, the fires in the wood stoves are necessary for heat. The fire is started well before the council begins, to warm the place and make it welcoming and comfortable. It is the responsibility of the Onondagas to start the fire and keep it going, and individual Onondaga men—not chiefs—add wood during council, both to the stove at the men&#039;s end of the longhouse and the one at the women&#039;s end. The fire, like the council, is a process, and as the Onondagas are stewards of the council, their care for the fire reflects their care for the council itself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is no coincidence that the root word for &amp;quot;family&amp;quot; is also the root word for &amp;quot;fire.&amp;quot; In the old bark longhouses, where the central line from east to west would pass through several hearths, there would be one nuclear family on each side of each fire. They would care for and help the family on the other side of the fire in the same way the chiefs and nations would help and care for one another.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fire is life, in the sense that it provides warmth and light. It is evidence of human presence. When the Onondagas informed the French Governor of Quebec that they were going to extirpate the military outpost at Cataraqui (present-day Kingston, Ontario), they said, &amp;quot;Onontio, your fyre shall burn no more in this place.&amp;quot; On fundamental wampum belts, the squares depicted at each end—with the path of peace and open communication between them—are the fires of the nations depicted in friendship. Thus, when Canadian courts described the removal of Aboriginal rights as &amp;quot;extinguishment,&amp;quot; they could not have chosen a more ominous word for many Indigenous nations, whose symbol of their very existence was the fire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; The Rod or Staff&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Though Thadadaho had great personal power, the lawmakers gave him some emblems and implements of authority. In each case, authority came with responsibility. Just as the eagle atop the Tree of Peace was to watch for danger from afar, Thadadaho was to be vigilant against subtle dangers from within the council itself. Metaphorically, the danger was called a &amp;quot;creeping thing,&amp;quot; both because of its subtle approach and because snakes were considered both dangerous and evil, connected to the dark underground world:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He was to have a stick when he could not do it [remove the crawling thing with the stick] he was to whoop and in less than no time the chiefs [would come]. . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then Dekanawideh said: &amp;quot;The lords of this confederacy have unanimously decided to lay by you this rod (Ska-nah-ka-res) and whenever you see any creeping thing which might have a tendency to harm our grandchildren or see a thing creeping toward the great white wampum belt (meaning the Great Peace), then you shall take this rod and pry it away with it, and if you and your colleagues fail to pry the creeping, evil thing out, you shall call out loudly that all the Confederate Nations may hear and they will come immediately to your assistance.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As a weapon against a crawling creature I lay a staff with you so that you may thrust it away from the Council Fire. If you fail to cast it out then call the rest of the United Lords to your aid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And if ye see any crawling creature approching toward the confederate council fire, and I now lay a stick by your side &amp;quot;A-do-dar-hoh&amp;quot; and you will take the stick and pitch the crawling creature away from the confederate council fire, and your brothers and cousin chiefs will act with you at time or times. Dust and the crawling creature signifies any case, to be brought before the confederate council fire which would be injurious to the confederate nations. And if ye will fail to reject, ye will call the rest of the confederate chiefs to aid ye.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thadadaho can call on the other chiefs for help. This is one of the parts of the Great Law that vests him with the authority to call a Grand Council when he perceives the Confederacy is threatened—or when there is important business that must be attended to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In June 1870, delegates from all the Haudenosaunee communities in Ontario and Quebec met at the Grand River with delegates from Ojibway communities. The purpose of this &amp;quot;general council&amp;quot; was to consider the new Canadian legislation about &amp;quot;Indians.&amp;quot; Chief John Smoke Johnson said: &amp;quot;The position of the Confederacy of the Six Nations was the firekeeper in his proper place, the door-keeper in his proper place, and the door properly tiled, yet the fire-keeper has noticed that a great monster has crept in; he finds he cannot eject the monster or whip him alone; he calls the delegates together to assist him in ejecting the imp or monster.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The crawling thing is sometimes said to be an external threat, warfare with outsiders. A close examination of the law suggests instead that it can also be internal. It is different from a confrontational disruptor: it can be subtly erosive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; The Wing&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the metaphors of the law and of council, &amp;quot;dust&amp;quot; has several meanings, all negative. The whiteness and purity of the peace must not be allowed to become stained or dirty. Dust must not be allowed to accumulate on the law: that is, the law must remain fresh and visible in people&#039;s minds, and must not be neglected. Dust swirling in the air gets in people&#039;s eyes and distracts them, and interferes with their ability to see clearly. For all these reasons, the place of council must be kept clear of dust—it is a place of purity and cleanliness, literally and symbolically. As firekeeper, this responsibility fell to Thadahaho, who was given a symbolic wing with which to take care of the area of council:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lords have laid before you this great wing, Ska-weh-yeh-seh-ko-wah, and whenever any dust or stain of any description falls upon the great belt of white wampum, then you shall take this great wing and sweep it clean. (Dust or stain means evil of any description which might have a tendency to cause trouble in the Confederate Council.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You, Atotarho, and your thirteen cousin Lords, shall faithfully keep the space about the Council Fire clean and you shall allow neither dust nor dirt to accumulate. I lay a Long Wing before you as a broom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . . will allow no dust or dirt to be seen, around the council fire, and if there is any dust or dirt to be seen. I now lay it a sea gull wing by your side &amp;quot;A-do-dar-hoh.&amp;quot; And you will take the wing and sweep the dust away from the confederate council fire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dust or darkness can also mean violent disagreement: &amp;quot;and if the place where it is situated gets dark, then he shall pick up the Great Black Wing, the Great Chief, sweeping the place where it is spread out, which means that if the argument becomes too intense—causing minds to spoil—then he shall stop it at once.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The symbol of the wing is one of the great wampums of the Haudenosaunee, the &amp;quot;Wing or Dust Fan&amp;quot; belt. Though the law contemplates great tolerance, and sees the need to take time to find consensus, nevertheless &amp;quot;spoiled&amp;quot; minds have to be removed, rather than allow their disruptions to injure the great goodness.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; No Council after Dark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;[And ye will] close the council before darkness sets in, for ye will not council after dark.*&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the people bringing their minds together are to work as well as possible, then they must guard against fatigue, because tired minds think more slowly and are quicker to anger. At sundown, the council is closed (the fire is covered). This does not mean an end to all business: often the participants will meet separately that evening to talk over the day&#039;s events. Perhaps there will be &amp;quot;talking in the bushes,&amp;quot; informal discussions between the parties to the council. The basic principle, though, is that no decisions can be made after dark. Council resumes when people can see one another clearly and when their minds are rested: &amp;quot;and if the place where [the Council] is situated gets dark, then he shall pick up the Great Black Wing, the Great Chief [Thadadaho], sweeping the place where it is spread out [the Great White Mat], which means that if the argument becomes too intense, causing minds to spoil, then he shall stop it at once.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the light is the Creator&#039;s time, the night belongs to his brother. As light is life, so darkness is death and depression, but it is also rest and regeneration. To continue council into the night would be to invite the influence of the dark side, but also to interfere with the balance between work and rest.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; The Birds in the Branches&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One problem with a culture that passes on its knowledge by word of mouth is gossip. It is a problem that the Peacemaker was aware of and that persists to this day. Nor is it something the Peacemaker felt he could do away with. Instead, the law admonishes the chiefs in council to pay no attention to it. They are told not to listen to the birds twittering in the branches overhead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In July 1764, Sir William Johnson was able to use the same metaphor in his peacemaking with the Haudenosaunee and the Western nations at Niagara: &amp;quot;All that is wanting on your parts to attain this, is that you never more listen to Stories told you by People who have nothing to do with the Management of Indian Affairs, that you shut your ears against all bad Birds, and be no longer deluded by their Whistling.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1799, rumours spread by New York State officials through Atiatoharongwen Louis Cook alleged that Thayendenega Joseph Brant and Odeserundiye John Deserontyon had sold to New York all the land claimed by the Seven Nations of Canada in that state. A council in Kahnawake between the Haudenosaunee and the Seven Nations of Canada set matters straight. The Kahnawake speaker said: &amp;quot;Brothers: On every turn along the road there is birds telling stories, our ancestors ordered that such things should not be listened to, but be cast behind our backs, let us Brethren do as our Forefathers commanded.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Why birds? Because birds, like rumours, fly quickly, lack substance, and lack much brain.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The deliberate removal of distractions from council is part of the Peacemaker&#039;s strategy: people are not going to listen to one another, and not going to focus on the issues at hand, if they carry the burdens of grief and sorrow; if they carry anger; or if their attention is diluted by outside influences. Building a fire of quiet hardwood is a message about concentration rather than distraction. Paying no attention to the little birds constitutes recognition that there will be other voices in the chiefs&#039; ears. The chiefs&#039; thick skins prevent personal barbs from penetrating their thinking. Every step is aimed at promoting civil civic engagement and helpful, focussed thinking.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Considering the Coming Seven Generations&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In weighing any decision, the rotiyanershon are instructed to consider the effects of their choices on the seven generations downstream from them. This long view is one of the arguments in favour of the stability of Haudenosaunee governments: men with a life term in office will be able to more confidently consider future generations, whereas leaders with a short election horizon will tend to be more eager to satisfy the short-term appetites and concerns of the voters:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How shall we do that our chil[dren] shall have many days. Therefore you consider carefully in regard to this matter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . . they must have a regard . . . also for those children whom we have not yet seen. . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We must look to see how it&#039;s going to affect those future generations. How are we protecting? How are we safeguarding? You have to protect those future people. They don&#039;t have anyone else to protect them. When they stand there maybe sixty or a hundred years from now in a society which may be very hostile, when they stand there looking for a house or looking for a place to live, they are going to look back at this time and say &amp;quot;Who was that who gave away my land?&amp;quot; Everyone here will be gone but the names will be there.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Why seven generations? Even the oldest and most productive among us can know and see only our great-grandchildren—four generations. We may know the people who came before us, as well. Looking forward, looking back, our perspective may span seven generations. But to consider unto the seventh generation is really to say that our thoughts must go beyond our physical capacity to see; they must go downstream and around the bend in the river. It is not an unreasonable period of time—but it is time beyond what we can see around us.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Life Terms&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;Once they have antlers on [ka-wyen-eta-ih = completed task] the length of time a man will hold the title is as long as he lives here on earth and only death will remove it from him.*&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is often said that the best person to appoint as a chief is the one who does not seek the title. Ambition is not a factor in the functioning of the Kayanerenkó:wa, neither for individuals nor for parties. In Parliament or in Congress, the governing party introduces legislation to find it immediately opposed and tested by parties whose ambition is to either defeat the government in the House, or to replace the government in the next election. In Haudenosaunee lawmaking, the people on the other side of the fire cannot seek to replace anyone, for they have no influence over who is chosen (other than to potentially reject a candidate in a Condolence), and there are no elections. The incentive to oppose the government is removed, and instead all the chiefs are part of the same government, and their obligation, instinct, and tone are directed towards helping one another.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Having no elections—having leaders who need not seek periodic approval from people whose self-interest is bound to be short-term—means that the chiefs in council can consider the far horizon and the welfare of the coming seven generations. Elected politicians must always keep an eye on the next election, and their actions and decisions are often influenced by that election well in advance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Head Chiefs?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Almost any written version of the Great Law will leave the reader with the impression that some chiefs are more important than others. Secondary sources carry this to another level: they ascribe executive authority to some of the chiefs, stating that Thadadaho became the &amp;quot;president&amp;quot; of the Confederacy; or that Tekarihoken was the &amp;quot;head chief&amp;quot; of the Mohawks. Morgan ascribes to Europeans a need to identify chief executives: &amp;quot;Thadadahoh was early seized upon by the inquisitive colonists to advance the person who held that title to the position of King of the Iroquois, but the misconception was refuted, and the institutions of the Iroquois were relieved of the burden of an impossible feature. In the general council he sat among his equals. The Confederacy had no chief magistrate.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In any written version, there are words that suggest the primacy of some chiefs. Newhouse refers to the councils of nations as &amp;quot;Tekarihoken and his brother chiefs; Deskahe and his brother chiefs.&amp;quot; Is this because they were named first by the Peacemaker, or do they have special functions and responsibilities? Today, messages to nations are passed through these particular individuals. Sometimes, they are the holders of their nations&#039; fires.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They are: Tekarihoken for the Mohawks; Odatsehte for the Oneidas, Thadadaho for the Onondagas; Deskahe for the Cayugas; and Kanuhkitawi for the Senecas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But did they have any form of executive authority? In the Thanksgiving, there is also hierarchy. The maple is head or chief of the trees; the deer for the animals; the strawberry for the berries that crawl close to the earth; the raspberry for the bush berries; the eagle for the birds; the bee for the insects. The &amp;quot;leaders&amp;quot; of the animals are reflections of the rotiyanershon: they are more like speakers for their kind than like executives.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Specific Chiefs Have Specific Duties&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some of the chiefs have specific duties with respect to the process of the council or the maintenance of the law. Thadadaho&#039;s responsibility and authority was given to him as part of his pacification. The two Seneca doorkeepers were given the power to admit or reject visitors as part of what amounted to the transformation and pacification of the warriors. There are strong suggestions that each of the fifty lords has a specific bundle of responsibilities, though none of the written versions of the law mentions many of these. Individual chiefs can explain their particular understandings of their functions, passed down through oral tradition. Sometimes those functions are suggested by their title names. It is hard to tell, today, to what extent these personal functions are indeed part of the law and which have become added over the course of the past few centuries.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;**&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;Hononwirehton** of the Onondaga Deer Clan is represented in the Circle Wampum by a string that is longer than the others. This is because (according to Shimony) he has the deciding vote among the Onondagas, and thus in any decisions of the League:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Honuwiyehti . . . he who is alone, he having two father&#039;s kinsmen [uncles on father&#039;s side] and two clans [according to Fenton] he of the Great Wolf Clan— everyone depends on him.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[The wampum belts of the Onondagas] are deposited as public records . . . and are held in safe-keeping by the guardianship sachem, Hononwenhto, the hereditary &amp;quot;keeper of wampum&amp;quot; whose office as expounder of the law, is to &amp;quot;read&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;talk&amp;quot; the wampum at all the councils.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All these national compacts were &amp;quot;talked into&amp;quot; strings of wampum, to use the Indian expression, after which these were delivered into the custody of *Ho-no-we-na-to*, the Onondaga sachem, who was made hereditary keeper of the wampum, at the institution of the League, and from him and his successors, was to be sought their interpretation from generation to generation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is his duty, as well, to bring the mind of the council back to the single matter that it is to focus upon at one time. He can do this by tapping the bench that the &amp;quot;fire&amp;quot; is resting on, with his cane.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;**&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;Kanuhkitawi** of the Snipe Clan of the Senecas had been a &amp;quot;Great Warrior.&amp;quot; Once the League was formed, he and his &amp;quot;deputy&amp;quot; (in Skaniatariio&#039;s version, the translation is more accurately &amp;quot;body-guard&amp;quot;) Deyoninhokarawen of the Wolf Clan, also formerly a great warrior, became the Keepers of the Western Door. It became their duty, when a group of people approached with a message, following the Great White Roots, to decide whether to grant them access to council (&amp;quot;on the main bench where is spread the Great White Mat&amp;quot;), or to put them to death (in &amp;quot;the place where the elm bark is spread out and shove them inside the house where bones will come to pile up&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;**&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;Deskahe** of the Older Bear Clan of the Cayugas. During the making of the law, it is said that he deliberately stood off to the side. His name comes from the time the Peacemaker asked him how many families were with him, and he replied: &amp;quot;More than eleven.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;**&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;Tekarihoken** identifies consensus among the Mohawks. His clan is the old snapping turtle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;**&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;Tehatkodons** (&amp;quot;He is two-sighted,&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;He looks both ways&amp;quot;) sits at Thadadaho&#039;s left hand. He carries a special admonition to consider both sides of any question, and to urge consideration of alternatives. He is a &amp;quot;special aid and counsellor to Thadadaho.&amp;quot; He is Beaver Clan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;**&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;Enneserarenh** is the other &amp;quot;special aid and counsellor to Thadadaho.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;**&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;Skanawati**, also, must carefully consider both sides of any issue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;**&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;Tehatkarine** is a &amp;quot;watcher of the land.&amp;quot; In conversations on the Mohawk bench, it is his duty to consider the impact of decisions on the land and environment, and to remind his fellow chiefs of that effect.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; When a Chief Dies&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a chief dies, the family meets immediately to begin the funeral process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within ten days, the chiefs come together to perform the ceremony known as the &amp;quot;Small Condolence,&amp;quot; at the house of the deceased chief (but in the absence of his body). The chiefs sit in the living room, these days, on two sets of chairs, facing each other. The speaker for the clear-minded side delivers the first twelve parts or words of the Condolence, which are carried across the room by the &amp;quot;runner&amp;quot; and delivered to his opposite number. Each string is then strung across a cane that is lying across two chairs beside the speaker, for those whose minds are cast down, the grieving ones. This cane is today&#039;s equivalent of the pole van den Bogaert saw in the council house at Onondaga in 1638, and that pole is a direct descendant of the horizontal stick on which Hiawatha was stringing the first wampum, in his efforts to condole himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The chiefs, as brothers to the deceased chief, are not only responsible for condoling his family: they have their own role to play in part of the funeral. Their encircling the grave during the burial recalls the Circle Wampum; their three shovels of earth into the grave recall the three breaths that the Creator blows into people to give them life.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After the body had been deposited in the grave the sachems and chiefs formed a circle around it for the purpose of filling it with earth. Each in turn, commencing with the senior in years, cast in three shovelfuls, a typical number in their religious system; of which the first had relation to the Great Spirit, the second to the Sun, and the third to Mother Earth. When the grave was filled the senior sachem, by a figure of speech, deposited the &amp;quot;horns&amp;quot; of the departed sachem, emblematical of his office, upon the top of the grave over his head, there to remain until his successor was installed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the Small Condolence, the grieving people sometimes announce, and install for the time being, some people to fill the seats of the one who has died and the cluster of people who are with him.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ten days following the death of any person are said to be the time when the person&#039;s spirit can remain on earth. The family is busy with many funeral duties, feasts, and songs, culminating in the Ten-Day Feast, in which all the mourners come together and the songs go all night long. One aspect of the thinking behind the funeral process is &amp;quot;letting go,&amp;quot; convincing the spirit of the dead person that his family does not cling to his memory so tightly or miss him so much that he should stay around and postpone his trip along the strawberry-lined path, the Milky Way to the Creator&#039;s world. For the ten days following the death of a royá:ner, council cannot be held.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a relative of a title holder&#039;s family dies, in some communities, all political business is suspended for ten days. In some places, a Small Condolence is held for the family. If the dead person held a function, the clan mother can announce the successor. This announcement—there is no succession ceremony—can be done at the Small Condolence, the Ten-Day Feast (at the end of the official mourning period), or at any Condolence for installing a chief.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no complete agreement on when things must happen: it is suggested that the clan mother should be ready within three days to name a successor, so that the announcement can be made at the Ten-Day Feast. However, the person so appointed must wait until the &amp;quot;other side of the fire&amp;quot; agrees to a time for a Condolence ceremony. The principle is that the family should always have a voice in council, though its permanent representative should be installed only after its minds have been cleared and raised up again:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When it has become vacated, his chiefly space, thereupon the deaconesses [yeya:kweniyo = &amp;quot;body be most important&amp;quot;], the ones from the clans and the families, they are the ones who will repossess it [*grasp – hold*], they will decide, choosing again a new one to receive the antlers, and this new one will replace him, the one who has now passed back [*through again*], this one they shall rename with the title name, which she shall again give to the new one, conferring antlers on him and seating him in the place that had become empty, for they shall always be occupied, the places where the chiefs are seated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The order of a discussion about a successor to the dead title holder follows a clear progression, from the immediate family, clan, and nation to the brother nations and then the entire Confederacy: &amp;quot;Hence at every occasion of filling vacancies, the character and merits of all the officers in the series and of all candidates, were liable to be passed upon: first, in the discussion of the families interested; secondly, in the convocation of the clans to which they belong; thirdly, in the meeting of the four clans, which occupied respectively the two ends of the council house; fourthly, by the assembled council of the particular nation; and fifthly, [by the] council at the Longhouse of the Six Nations.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The clan mother can unilaterally name a candidate: the discussion about whether this person should become the permanent representative for the family then takes place among the women. The discussion then moves to other members of the family and the nation, beyond the immediate family and the clan. Once the nation has agreed upon a candidate, it meets with the other nation or nations on its side of the fire: the Oneidas with the Cayugas; the Mohawks with the Senecas and Onondagas. In theory, the &amp;quot;other side of the fire&amp;quot; does not know who the candidate is until he is put forward in the Condolence itself. Literally, a sheet is hung in the council house, so that the people on one side of the fire do not see the candidate until he is formally announced and put forward and the sheet is pulled aside. At the time of the Condolence of a chief, the clan mother can replace the entire cluster of people around him—sub-chief and faithkeepers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There have been instances of very young men being raised up as rotiyanershon, and in those cases they also had mentors appointed to work with them, to help them. The following explanation of this process to Sir William Johnson in the 1750s also shows another phenomenon—that sometimes it was difficult to bring the nations together to install new Confederacy chiefs, so that the vacancies would accumulate, and then a group would be filled at one time. The original intention of the Kayanerenkó:wa was to have an empty seat filled at once, so that the family would not lose its voice in council, and so that the people&#039;s minds would not be burdened with a sense of absence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Raising up very young men as rotiyanershon suggests another problem, perhaps specific to Onondaga at the time, but one that has persisted: some families may have dwindled to the point where they had very few candidates:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then the Speaker Teyawarunte Spoke as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brother before the General Meeting takes place we have Judged it proper to desire this Meeting with you in order to present to You those Young Men whom we appointed Sachims to assist us in our Councils as our Sachims are now too few to manage Matters properly, our place being ye proper Council fire for all the surrounding nations our Allies &amp;amp; Dependents them presented to Sir William Seven Young Men, whose names are as follows, viz&#039;t:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Snipe: Amadagia, Bunt&#039;s Son&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beaver: Onessarakung&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Eel: Sagagare&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Eel: Oyumanis&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deer: Wahagheirong&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wolf: Ononwisaghti&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Turtle: Owigaiat&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Turtle: Tawanasaroonda&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Turtle: Tayiatquari&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bear: Wathatodarho&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Turtle: Tawaskughta&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Turtle: Tughhaghsi&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deiaquande takes ye care of one of ye new made Sachims, Gingia-quasunt, &amp;amp; Kaghniagarodo also assist in ye same. Oroondisaghti an Old Man takes care of another of ye Young Sachims—Saristageghte, &amp;amp; Geghtahare two old Men take care of two of the Young Sachims, Inayenqueraghto takes charge of another of the Young Sachims—Brother having now finished so far, we have only to wish that these new Sachims now appointed may act agreable to the Rules laid down to us by our Ancestors, &amp;amp; follow what is good &amp;amp; agreable to our Brethren the English which would give us ye utmost pleasure. Brother as You are sensible of the trouble &amp;amp; great hardships We the few Sachims now present, have had since ye trouble began, we hope you will consider it in a proper light.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Twelve young men are named, with seven older men &amp;quot;taking care&amp;quot; of them. What would &amp;quot;taking care&amp;quot; mean? That they were mentors and advisers? Or that they were more like regents, veterans from families who were not eligible to become sachems themselves, but who could wield power through their advisory positions? When would the young men emerge from the tutelage? Whether there were seven or twelve of these young sachems, the Onondagas had probably effectively doubled the size of their council (the law provides for fourteen Onondaga chiefs).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Condolence&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ceremony of Condolence to console a grieving family and raise up a new chief brings all the traditional Haudenosaunee together, even today. The ceremony is held at the community of the bereaved, so that all the downcast people can attend, and be heartened by the arrival of their clear-minded brothers and sisters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Re-enacting the trip from Oneida to Onondaga undertaken by the Peacemaker and all the chiefs, to confront and heal Thadadaho, the condolers walk in a long line, generally two by two, led by a man known as the Great Hanging Tobacco Pouch (as the warriors were sometimes referred to as &amp;quot;Tobacco Pouches&amp;quot;), who also leads the singing. They sing the same song that the Peacemaker taught the people—&amp;quot;Along the Way&amp;quot;—to announce themselves. Today, the journey takes less than half an hour for the hundreds of visitors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s Condolence procession re-enacts how the warriors would escort the chiefs from village to village, through the dangerous forest. In those days, the peace was internal, between the nations: it was not protection from external enemies. The escort stops at the woods&#039; edge: the grieving people take over responsibility for their guests&#039; safety once the condolers reach the village clearing. At the woods&#039; edge, by the thorny brush, they welcome them. There is a real role for the warriors in the Condolence and therefore in the maintenance and renewal of the League. In historical reality, it is based in true need for protection and safety. Today&#039;s song leaders and escorts recall a pragmatic need for the warriors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s Condolence ceremony fulfills a triple purpose of recall. First, it recalls the Peacemaker&#039;s raising up of Hiawatha&#039;s grieving mind—the use of the wampum strings re-enacts that first Condolence. Second, it evokes the transformation of Thadadaho—the use of the Six Songs does that. Third, it calls to mind the whole process of formation of the Great Peace, and the unity of the leaders—the &amp;quot;roll call&amp;quot; of the chiefs does that. Though the ceremony is seen by outsiders as the way to raise up and confirm new chiefs, and by insiders as that and as a means of expressing respect and consolation, it is also both a renewal of the Confederacy and a reminder to the people of the events that formed it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Condolence ceremony takes most of a day. People come from every community of the Confederacy to take part, to confirm and welcome the new leaders. The financial responsibility of the Condolence falls upon the family putting up the new chief, and it is not light. The visitors must not only be fed but feasted. Pipes must be made for all the chiefs. Sometimes, when there is more than one vacancy to be filled in a nation, two or more families will share the cost, and often the nation will contribute.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unlike other rotiyanershon, Thadadaho is chosen not by a clan mother but by the Onondaga chiefs, and his confirmation comes not from the Younger Brothers but rather from all the chiefs of the Six Nations together.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Removing a Chief&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The primary authority to remove a chief has been said to rest with his clan, through his clan mother, if the chief is straying from his duties. That is, the people whom he represents and who selected him first ought to be the people with the first right to remove him. The process involves three formal warnings, each more stiff than its predecessor. The first comes from the clan mother&#039;s assistant or faithkeeper. The second comes from the clan mother herself. The third comes from the &amp;quot;Great Warrior,&amp;quot; the young man without a title who assists the clan mother, or the chief&#039;s sub-chief, and it includes the removal of the chief—by removing his &amp;quot;horns.&amp;quot; Sometimes the person carrying out this final task is called &amp;quot;The Man Without Pity.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;But if any should refuse to come back by three time, they should take them off.&amp;quot; Several parts of the Great Law involve three warnings or statements. They are, in a way, a means of remembering that the Creator blew three times into the mouth of the first man, to give him life. Skaniatariio John Arthur Gibson describes how a chasm in the earth yawns open for the family if their chief disregards the second warning:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then again, there is another matter: &amp;quot;You, my uncle and your two nepotic relatives should continue to listen to one another for, actually, it is a serious matter if it happens thus, that you leave your path from where it ought to lead you, you chief. If this happens, she will look at you, your niece, for, actually, it is a fact that he has given her wisdom. This one, you will notice with surprise, standing in front of you, she will speak up, saying, &#039;It is an amazing matter, my uncle, you who are chief, now you are straying from your path and you are not consulting with your colleagues; over there the people are left standing while you are alone, and now you are straying from your path; so I will ask you to return to your path, my uncle, you who are chief,&#039;&amp;quot; and that is how she will do it, she will warn you and it is a dreadful thing to disregard her warning.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And this man, your nephew, he will see you, you who are chief, willingly working towards the extinction of the people. Thereupon you will notice with surprise that he is standing there in front of you; then he will speak up, saying, &amp;quot;My uncle, you who are chief, it is an amazing thing that you are working towards the extinction of the entire group, for you are the one who is alone, you are not consulting them or working together with them for the Great Law. Moreover, I ask you to return to your path, for it is your responsibility towards your colleagues.&amp;quot; Thereupon he will turn back, for it is a dreadful thing if he once more disregards the warning, for then it will be there, over the earth&#039;s edge, that all of the people will come to hang their feet. As to that, no one is able to lift them up when it happens in this way, except just this one is able to lift them up, our Father, our Creator, our Ruler.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moreover, when they see you—your nephew and niece—doing the same thing despite both of them having warned you to your face, you who are chief, they trying to cause you to return to your path, and you not having obeyed, thereupon they will summon the Great Warrior; they will all meet and you will notice them with surprise, standing up in front of you, he speaking up, the Great Warrior, saying, &amp;quot;it is amazing, my uncle, you who are chief, indeed you have not accepted their warning which was spoken by both the woman and the man, indeed, you have not accepted it. So now I am removing your antlers and hand them back to her, the deaconess of the title name. Moreover, you are free now and cannot wear antlers again; now you are an ordinary person. Now, moreover, you can go away, wherever you wish to go. Thereupon the people, the number of your followers, now they will notice that you no longer are wearing your antlers, and then they will let go of you.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The version published by Tahawannontye Duncan C. Scott provides for three warnings as well, but the order is different: first the clan mother, then a warrior of the chief&#039;s clan, then the Great Warrior:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a Lord is guilty of unwarrantably opposing the object of the decisions of the Council and in that way showing disrespect for his brother Lords by urging that his own erroneous will in these matters be carried out, he shall be approached and admonished by the Chief Matron of his family and Clan to desist from such evil practices and urged to come back and act in harmony with his brother Lords.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the Lord refuses to comply with the request of the Chief Matron of his family and Clan and still persists in his evil practices of unwarrantably opposing his brother Lords, then a Warrior of his family and clan will also approach him and admonish him to desist from pursuing his evil course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the Lord still refuses to listen and obey, then the Chief Matron and Warrior shall go together to the Chief Warrior and they inform him that they have admonished their Lord and he refused to obey. Then the Chief Warrior will arise and go there to the Lord and will say to him: Your nephew and niece have admonished you to desist from your evil course, and you have refused to obey. Then the Chief Warrior will say, I will now admonish you for the last time and if you continue to resist to accede to and obey this request, then your duties as Lord of our family and Clan will cease, and I shall take the deer&#039;s horns from off your head, and with a broad-edged stone axe I shall cut the tree down, (meaning that he shall be deposed from his position as Lord or Chief of the Confederacy). Then the Chief Warrior shall hand back the deer&#039;s horns (the emblem of power) of the deposed Lord to the Chief Matron of his family or Clan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Seth Newhouse&#039;s version provides a much shorter, though consistent, description of the removal of a chief:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Article XXX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We now finished all crowned ourselves with deer horns on our heads. We do now give this Honourable Noble and Sacred Titles and the Soil, to our Mothers the Females. They shall be the Proprietors. And if they see their Lords are gone out of the right course, and are not counciling for the interests of the people in general, then the females the relatives of the erroneous or erroneousness Lord shall come, before their Council to warn him, to return again and council for the interest of the people in general. Three times. If he disregard their warnings on the third time. They will discharge him. They will then notify the rest of the Lords of their own Nation, will sanction it. The Females then will select another one, out of the number of their sons, to fill the place of the expelled Lord, and will notify the rest of the Lords of their select to be their future Lord, and their Lords will only sanction it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system of repeated and escalating warnings is consistent with the basic assumption in the law that people are capable of reform—that they will take the opportunity offered to them to return to the good path. Just as the Cannibal and Thadadaho were brought back to the good mind, so an errant chief, with these warnings, is given the chance to return to his proper ways.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The three attempts made by the Peacemaker to bring Thadadaho to accept the Good Message may be a precursor of the three warnings—or opportunities—offered to a chief by his family.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee also offer other nations three formal opportunities to come within the Great Peace. Refusal for a third time can be a signal for war. In 1753, the Haudenosaunee gave the French three warnings to leave the Ohio country because, as Scarooyady explained, &amp;quot;the great Being who lives above, has ordered us to send Three Messages of Peace before we make War, and as the Half King had before this time delivered the third and last Message, we had nothing now to do but to strike the French.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In certain circumstances, a chief can be removed immediately by the other chiefs—for murder, rape, or theft: Gibson&#039;s 1912 version states:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moreover, this is what I now decree concerning you chiefs: whoever of you irresponsibly sins by killing a person—if this is how he performs his tasks, the chief—then his duties will get revoked, for one will remove his antlers without adjudication; the deaconess will take back the title, for it is in her power to appoint a new man—replacing the offender by bestowing the antlers on the new man—who will sit in the place of the one she removed, the former chief; and now that it is finished, as to the former chief, it is the warriors that he rejoins. It is impossible for this same person ever to carry out chiefly duties again, and it will happen in the same way if a chief forces women; it will happen in the same way in that without adjudication they will at once remove him and take his antlers from him, returning to the deaconess the title and at once she will appoint another, a new man, bestowing antlers on him, and this one will sit where he used to be seated, the one whose antlers they took back; he rejoins the warriors, and then it can never happen again, his holding a chiefly status. And if a chief steals something, then the chiefs will deliberate with care concerning him, proving whatever is the truth, and if he was responsible, then, at the council of chiefs, they will judge his case, the chief&#039;s, they will find he is responsible. Thereupon they will reach a decision to take his antlers from him, and these they will hand back to the deaconess with the title. Thereupon they will let him go again, the title will become vacated, and he will become a warrior again, it being impossible for him to assume chiefly duties again. Thereupon the matron will appoint another one, a new person, whom she will bestow antlers upon, and this is who will become chief. Thereupon he will sit in the seat, replacing the former chief.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Chiefs&#039; Version states:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a lord is found guilty of wilful murder, he shall be deposed without the warning (as shall be provided for later on) by the lords of the confederacy, and his horns (emblem of power) shall be handed back to the chief matron of his family and clan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a lord is guilty of rape, he shall be deposed without the usual warning by the lords of the confederacy, and his horns (the emblem of power) shall be handed back to the chief matron of his family and clan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a lord is found guilty of theft, he shall be deposed without the usual warning by the lords of the confederacy, and his horns (the emblem of power) shall be handed back to the chief matron of his family and clan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Newhouse, in his 1885 version, goes further: not only does the chief lose his title; so, too, does his family: it &amp;quot;forever forfeits the proprietorship of the title to the said Lordship to the other Lords of the Nation who shall transfer the proprietorship of the title of the aforesaid Lordship to a sister ahwatchira.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Morgan asserts that &amp;quot;the council of the tribe also had the power to depose both sachems and chiefs without waiting for the action of a gens, and even against its wishes.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Immediate removal of an offender prevents his continued presence from causing hard feelings or disunity. While the three warnings from a family may take days or weeks, a removal by the council—which would require a degree of unanimity—is, in effect, the removal of a kind of &amp;quot;crawling thing.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A removed chief is said to have been &amp;quot;dehorned.&amp;quot; His wampum &amp;quot;horns&amp;quot; are taken away from him, to be placed with his successor. Generally, a dehorned chief leaves the community, in some disgrace. His ability to hold any office is finished. His reputation is shattered: &amp;quot;it shall be that when a lord is deposed and the deer&#039;s horns . . . are taken from him, he shall no longer be allowed to sit in council or even hold an office again.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Elaborate as the process for removing chiefs has been, there is no agreed-upon procedure for removing a clan mother. There have been instances where individual chiefs have claimed to remove clan mothers, and others in which the chiefs of a nation have removed clan mothers. In the case of a deep disagreement between a chief and clan mother, the family generally seeks to reconcile them, though it has happened that the clash can split the family itself. Once again, detailed provision in the law for the removal of a chief, and a lack of provision with respect to clan mothers, suggests that the position of royá:ner was created by the Kayanerenkó:wa, which could therefore also create the processes for appointment and removal, while the position of clan mother antedated the making of the law, so that the law left already known processes unchanged (and unexplained).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In modern times, chiefs have been dehorned for various infractions. These have generally involved doing things without the knowledge or sanction of the council, failure to perform obligations or attend council, submission to foreign governments, failure to account financially, disruption of council, and the commission of criminal offences.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; The Right of Revolution&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alone among the versions of the Kayanerenkó:wa, Seth Newhouse&#039;s later tracts provide that the people have the right to remove—and kill—the chiefs as a body in certain circumstances. These versions appeared after the chiefs refused to support Newhouse&#039;s complaint against the doctor he alleged had contributed to his daughter&#039;s death, so they may reflect his growing animosity towards the council.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This string of wampum vests the people with the right to correct their erring Lords. In case a part or all the Lords pursue a course not vouched for by the people and heed not the third warning of their women relatives, then the matter shall be taken to the General Council of the women of the Five Nations. If the Lords notified and warned three times fail to heed, then the case falls into the hands of the men of the Five Nations. The War Chiefs shall then, by right of such power and authority, enter the open council to warn the Lord or Lords to return from their wrong course. If the Lords heed the warning they will say: &amp;quot;we will reply tomorrow.&amp;quot; If then an answer is returned in favour of justice and in accord with this Great Law, then the Lords shall individually pledge themselves again by again furnishing the necessary shells for the pledge. Then shall the War Chief or Chiefs exhort the Lords urging them to be just and true.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Should it happen that the Lords refuse to heed the third warning, then two courses are open: either the men may decide in their council to depose the Lord or Lords or to club them to death with war clubs. Should they in their council decide to take the first course the War Chief shall address the Lord or Lords, saying: &amp;quot;Since you the Lords of the Five Nations have refused to return to the procedure of the Constitution, we now declare your seats vacant; we take off your horns, the token of your Lordship, and others shall be chosen and installed in your seats, therefore vacate your seats.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Should the men in their council adopt the second course, the War Chief shall order his men to enter the council, to take positions beside the Lords, sitting between them wherever possible. When this is accomplished the War Chief holding in his outstretched hand a bunch of black wampum strings shall say to the erring Lords: &amp;quot;so now, Lords of the Five United Nations, harken to these last words from your men. You have not heeded the warnings of the women relatives, you have not heeded the warnings of the General Council of women, and you have not heeded the warnings of the men of the nations, all urging you to return to the right course of action. Since you are determined to resist and to withhold justice from your people there is only one course for us to adopt.&amp;quot; At this point the War Chief shall let drop the bunch of black wampum and the men shall spring to their feet and club the erring Lords to death. Any erring Lord may submit before the War Chief lets fall the black wampum. Then his execution is withheld.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The black wampum here used symbolizes that the power to execute is buried but that it may be raised up again by the men. It is buried but when the occasion arises they may pull it up and derive their power and authority to act as here described.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Karonhjakte Louis Hall of Kahnawake decided that this right of the &amp;quot;warriors&amp;quot; to execute the Confederacy chiefs formed the basis of a separate source of power. He advocated the summary execution of the present generation of chiefs in *The Warrior Manifesto*, a proposal for the revitalization of the Confederacy. The *Manifesto* became a reference manual for the &amp;quot;Warrior&amp;quot; movement in Kahnawake and Akwesasne in 1990. Some people came to see the work as a companion to the Kayanerenkó:wa, a guide to its interpretation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; War and Peace&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;When warriors are leaders, then you will have war. We must raise leaders of peace.*&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The purpose of the Great Law of Peace was to stop cycles of bloodshed and to establish peace. The Peacemaker understood that a house at peace within itself would still be of troubled mind if there were continued bloodshed around it. Thus, the Great White Roots of the Tree of Peace were intended to spread the message of peace to the four corners of the world, creating what has been called &amp;quot;a landscape of peace.&amp;quot; As Wallace put it:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The minimum purpose of the League was to maintain unity, strength and good will among the Five Nations, so as to make them invulnerable to attack from without and to division from within. The native philosophers who rationalized the League in later years conceived also a maximum purpose: the conversion of all mankind, so that peace and happiness should be the lot of the peoples of the whole earth, and all nations should abide by the same law and be members of the same confederacy. &amp;quot;The white roots of the Great Tree of Peace shall continue to grow,&amp;quot; the founder allegedly announced, &amp;quot;advancing the Good Mind and Righteousness and Peace, moving into territories of peoples scattered far through the forest. And when a nation, guided by the Great White Roots, shall approach the Tree, you shall welcome her here, and take her by the arm and seat her in the place of council. She will add a brace or leaning pole to the longhouse and will thus strengthen the edifice of Reason and Peace.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are some who maintain that the Great Law established internal peace within the Confederacy to enable the member nations to better defend themselves against their enemies—to wage war more effectively. Internal peace encouraged more external warfare. Indeed, Cayenderongue Cadwallader Colden stated that mutual self-defence was the main reason for the creation of the League: some Algonquins (Adirondacks) had killed some of the Five Nations out of jealousy over hunting: &amp;quot;[The Five Nations] conceiv&#039;d a vast Indignation against the Adirondacks, who being advised of the secret movements of the Five Nations, Resolv&#039;d to oblige them to submit to their Law, by force of Arms. The Five Nations apprehending their Power, retired to the Southward of Cadarackui Lake, where they now live, and defended themselves at first but faintly against the Vigorous Attacks of the Adirondacks. But afterwards becoming more expert, and more used to War, they not only made a brave Defence, but likewise made themselves masters of the great Lakes, and chased the Shawanons from thence.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Without citing any authority for his statements, Allen Trelease goes beyond defence to an assertion that war was &amp;quot;a basic principle of the league&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;In addition to self-defence the original motivation for forming the league may have included a sincere aspiration for universal peace. This ideal was, however, grounded in a tribal superiority complex. The Iroquois were convinced that they constituted a master race, and if universal peace were to be achieved, it must be done within their fold. As time passed, the eventual aim became less apparent than the actual process of reducing the gentiles to submission. One of the basic principles of the league was that its members were at war with all tribes not positively allied to it.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In contrast, others suggest that the coming of the Great Peace was the end of all warfare, and that from the time it was established there were to be no more &amp;quot;warriors.&amp;quot; Skanawati John Buck asserted: &amp;quot;And when this matter will extend itself in all directions, there may be some who will not be willing to receive it, but we shall not be reprehensible, since we have offered it to them—to the Nations of Natural Men living alongside any Great White Root of the Great Law. We have likewise laid our heads upon these Roots for mutual protection.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Newhouse proposed a coercive view of the expansion of the law: a foreign nation was to be made an offer it could not refuse (or rather, the customary three offers):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A treaty was once impending between the Mohawks and one of the western nations, the Mohawks could not make them come to any moderate terms; and disliked the threats made against them, they sent at last this Laconic message: that if the western Nation would not enter into the Alliance, it was not their fault; they had conquered many enemies and driven them from their possessions &amp;amp; that if they would come they would fight them also.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . . when warriors are ready to go on the warpath against an opposing obstinate nation that has refused to accept the Great Peace . . . one of the five War Chiefs shall be chosen by the Warriors of the Nation to lead the aforesaid war party on the war path and when that one is chosen, it shall be his duty and privilege to come forward and address a few words to the then ready and assembled Warriors and the whole tenor of his allocution to the warriors shall be to impress upon them the need and necessity of good behavior and strict obedience to all the commands of the war chiefs, enthusiastically exhorting them not to be cowards but to be brave and courageous.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Newhouse version does not fully reflect history. When the Haudenosaunee made war on other nations, they often did so for reasons other than that those nations had failed to agree to join the Great Peace. The reasons may have been economic, political, or social, and sometimes involved a struggle over territory, but they were complex and not based in the Great Law. Most frequently, other nations joined the Great Peace through persuasion, logic, diplomacy, and protection. The written record shows that the chiefs were constantly striving for peace, whatever the warriors did.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Creation story, the right-handed twin defeats his brother, but he does not kill him. He banishes him, but even that is a limited banishment, for he keeps him close by, because of his affection for him. The twins are not Good and Evil, but they are two sides of creation. Haudenosaunee government and law is full of things that have two sides: men and women, the clearing and the forest, the two sides of the council. Similarly, war and peace are two different states, neither of which will go away completely. Whether we need war or not, it will always be with us, always close by. That is why the law provides for war chiefs. Another two-sided phenomenon found its place in the law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We should not presume that Haudenosaunee warfare, after the coming of the law, was the same as European warfare during that time. Champlain intervened in an arranged, mostly ritualized skirmish between his Algonquin, Wendat, and Innu allies and a Mohawk armed force. He killed people with his overloaded arquebus: before that, there had been no casualties, only teasing and insults, and everyone was preparing to go home. Joao Brandão noted, in *Your Fyre Shall Burn No More,* that during the ninety years of the most intense warfare between the Haudenosaunee and the French, more Frenchmen were taken for adoption than were killed. The purposes, weapons, tactics, and strategy of Haudenosaunee warfare were not the same as those of their European neighbours. The warriors, standing behind the rotiyanershon in councils with other nations, sent a powerful, visual, unspoken message that there was an unpleasant alternative to the peaceful proposals coming from the Haudenosaunee.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Historical reality is a matter of shades of grey, not black and white. The Great Law did bring internal peace to the five warring nations. The result was that they were better able to defend themselves against their enemies. From the early 1600s to the late 1700s, the Haudenosaunee were engaged in constant warfare, against both European and Indigenous enemies. The warriors were real. The Haudenosaunee did absorb other nations, both by adopting refugees from other wars and by conquest. Without the warriors, the Haudenosaunee would surely have been destroyed. Yet the existence of war and warriors is not proof that a basic principle of the League was that its members were at war with everyone but their allies. That would be irrational and suicidal. Instead, as the conduct of the Haudenosaunee as recorded in their documentary history shows, the Confederacy was intent on spreading the Great Peace to all nations, through rational persuasion rather than war. The basic principle of the League was that nations who were not yet within the peace should be invited to join, so that the Great White Roots should spread. The League would defend itself vigorously against enemies but reasoned that its interests, the interests of the coming generations, were best served in a landscape of peace: &amp;quot;They employ all their industry to engage the other nations to give themselves to [the Iroquois]; they send them presents and the most able people of their nation to speak to them, and to let them know that if they do not give themselves to the Iroquois, they cannot avoid being destroyed . . . but on the other hand, if they want to give themselves up and disperse themselves among the longhouses, they will become masters of other men.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The spreading of the Great White Roots gave other nations a number of options: they could seek to come within the Longhouse, becoming Haudenosaunee. They could choose to remain outside the Longhouse while grasping and adopting the principles of the Great Peace. In those cases, it would be said that they were supporting the Longhouse from the outside, as poles would be used to prop up a longhouse that had become unsteady with age.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; The Weakness of the Council&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A system of government that depended upon unanimity, one-mindedness, was necessarily not agile. It was slow to react to threats and was often split into factions. The rotiyanershon led by example, by persuasion, and not by force or compulsion. All these factors made for a relatively weak Grand Council. Hurley, however, places this in a larger context:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Accepting the imperfection of such authority is, however, different from denying it altogether. If limited, the jurisdiction of the general Council of the Confederacy was nonetheless real. This fact was particularly apparent in its control over the accession to office of national sachems and chiefs. Further, the very raison d&#039;etre of the Iroquois Confederacy, the balanced distribution of power between the component nations and the General Council, dictated constraints upon the centralizing authority of the latter. Again, the absence of monopoly control over political power by the General Council does not equate with an absence of government in Iroquois society. Those jurisdictions not exercised by the General Council fell to other designated entities, of which the nation and clan councils were the most important.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Part of the problem with seventeenth- and eighteenth-century descriptions of the relative weakness of Haudenosaunee central government originates from the experience of the European observers themselves—since they came from societies in which executive authority was powerful and centralized, they would consider anything looser to be excessively weak. Another problem with the descriptions is the fact that they were written by outsiders, not participants, in the society. Outsiders would not often see the exercise of authority by the women. Nor would they see (or understand, if they did see) the medicine societies healing the people and binding them together. Yet the observation that where the Grand Council did not govern, other entities picked up the torch, is essentially true:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The sachems&#039; job was to prevent &amp;quot;a disuniting of their minds.&amp;quot; In a nutshell that was what the Great Peace was all about, for to Indians of seventeenth- and eighteenth-century eastern North America, &amp;quot;peace&amp;quot; was primarily a matter of the mind. Headmen could not force anyone to forgo mourning-war raids; they could only advise, persuade, cajole and invoke the obligations of kinship. . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A League sachem, a man entrusted with preserving the Great Peace, had to be of a special breed. The chiefly virtues most prized in Iroquois folklore are those associated with peace and harmony: imperturbability, patience, good will, selflessness. &amp;quot;The thickness of their skin shall be seven spans—which is to say that they will be proof against anger, offensive actions and criticism,&amp;quot; Deganawidah decreed of the League sachems. . . . A character of such restraint—even passivity—is almost by definition incapable of the kind of strong and innovative leadership that the Five Nations needed to survive the ordeals of the European invasion. Moreover, had a League sachem exercised such leadership and thus necessarily provoked political opposition, he would have ceased to be a peacemaker. . . . If the League sachems were to fulfil their traditional duties, they must remain aloof from everyday politics and diplomacy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries, the names that appear in documents as speakers and leaders of the Haudenosaunee are mostly not &amp;quot;League sachem&amp;quot; titles. This led ethnohistorians like Richter, Fenton, and Jennings to conclude that there were actually two political entities, overlapping and parallel: the League and the Confederacy. The League&#039;s function was largely ceremonial, and consisted of maintaining the internal peace and the ceremonies, while the Confederacy was an active, aggressive, agile political body, whose business was conducted by chiefs who were not sachems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Horatio Hale, working with John Smoke Johnson in the 1880s, provides a simple alternative explanation. In council, the chiefs did not address or refer to one another using their titles. They used their proper names, usually their Haudenosaunee names, but sometimes their English names. The title would have been the name of the person who first bore it, but not the name of successors—only their title. Rarely did the chiefs use their titles, though they were well known. In historic documents, some titles do appear, especially the Mohawk Turtle Clan title Tekarihoken and the Onondaga Turtle Clan title Skanawati. But the use by the chiefs of their proper names to sign documents is not evidence—as Fenton suggests it is—that the chiefs were not involved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
My own conclusion, viewing the past through the lens of a Haudenosaunee present, is that things were more complex than this (as Richter admits, it is hard to ascertain exactly what was happening from the European records: &amp;quot;Europeans *were* dense, and Indians *were* secretive&amp;quot;). Rather than two separate political entities, I suggest that the Haudenosaunee were probably less united than they wanted to be during this period of cultural, microbial, military, and political battering—but that institutions developed like &amp;quot;props&amp;quot; for the Longhouse; people came forward to provide necessary leadership; and the rotiyanershon were never out of the picture, but retained influence in ways that kept them at the core of the people&#039;s stability. If treaty councils record only a few names of &amp;quot;sachems,&amp;quot; that may be partly because the people present were using their personal names rather than their titles, and it must also be recalled that the councils were held with delegates, and that the rotiyanershon had probably directed the delegates&#039; words and strategies—generally in the form of the wampum strings and belts carried to the council by the speakers. The question is not whether the people at the council were rotiyanershon but whether they were legitimate representatives of the Haudenosaunee. There was also a flux between chiefs and sachems. Someone appearing in the records as a village chief one year might be condoled as a Confederacy chief three years later. Thus, Theyanoguin was also known as Henry Peters, &amp;quot;King Hendrick,&amp;quot; and by his Mohawk Turtle Clan title, Tekarihoken. The name he appears under in colonial records may not be his title; and the same can be said of the other forty-nine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There *were* Haudenosaunee rotiyanershon at all times, and they had respect and authority and influence. There *were* other chiefs, local chiefs, and war chiefs, and they, too, wielded authority. When the Confederacy worked, it worked because all these people—and the clan mothers and the faithkeepers and others whose functions have faded over time—fulfilled their duties and did the best they could for the survival of the people. The Grand Council never was a European-style government, especially not in the age of absolute monarchies. But neither was it a government that failed the people through weakness or niceness.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The need for formal Condolences, and for the coming together of the nations to raise up the rotiyanershon, had created a cumbersome system that worked well in times of peace but often led to vacancies—empty seats in council—in more difficult times. Thus, when the Senecas in 1764 explained that &amp;quot;we have few or no old Sachims qualified to transact business of this importance,&amp;quot; they were mentioning an extreme situation in what has been an ongoing problem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During the latter part of the seventeenth century, according to a strong Seneca oral tradition, the Mohawks and Oneidas, at the Eastern Door of the Confederacy, were forced to spend much of their time and energy fighting the French. As a result, the western nations of the Confederacy worked together to grow the crops needed to supplement whatever the Mohawks and Oneidas could grow. This required a complex logistical effort—the transportation of thousands of pounds of food over a distance of more than 500 kilometres, passing through the territories of several nations. It is impossible to believe that fifty mostly elderly men could have co-ordinated this effort. It is quite possible that the &amp;quot;mutual aid societies&amp;quot; had the complexity and concentration to pull this off—and these societies would have been almost invisible to European observers (as indeed they remain today).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Dealing with the &amp;quot;Warriors&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One of the problems associated with the issue of &amp;quot;warriors&amp;quot; is the word itself. The word does not exist in the Kayanerenkó:wa. Instead, the word sometimes translated as &amp;quot;warriors,&amp;quot; rotiskenrakéhte, is more properly translated as &amp;quot;they are upholding the House.&amp;quot; That is, they are the workers, the ones who implement the decisions of the chiefs, the rotiyanershon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The relationship between the chiefs and the &amp;quot;warriors&amp;quot; was often confusing to the Europeans:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Even in greatly agitated times, Iroquois chieftainship was two-headed. There was, on the one hand, a complex civil chieftainship, composed of male and female representatives of families, clans and nations and whose work consisted of creating a certain harmony within each social unit and between these social units. It could make decisions about war and peace, but its fundamental goal remained peace. It did not make war. Its operation rested upon discussion, consensus and the art of persuasion. It was a chieftainship founded on words that managed tranquility without coercion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There was, on the other hand, a military chieftainship, largely independent of the civil authority. It could agree with the civil authority, or dissociate itself from it. Its political role was to defend the honour and respectability of the social units from which it emerged, as well as the inviolability of the living spaces and values tending toward accommodation with the other groups. It faced exclusively toward the outside, but its viability depended on the support it received from the inside. It captured the outside to direct it inward—whether it be a person or just his scalp. When the warrior marked his capture by leaving his war-club on the spot of capture, he was also committing a political act.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The civil chieftainship played in words. The military chieftainship played in muscle. When the two were in accord, the first seemed to dominate, but the second was always watching, extremely attentively, ready to appear and present the other solution. The Europeans had a great deal of difficulty in understanding this organization. They could not understand how the civil chiefs could be acting in good faith when they councilled with them at the same time as the military chiefs were in the field. Europeans often concluded that this apparently contradictory diplomacy was a matter of bad faith, when in reality it reflected internal dissensions, conflicts of interests, and complementary visions of the universe of relations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Iroquoian warfare no longer exists, but the &amp;quot;warriors&amp;quot; are still here. Their existence raises questions: how do they attach themselves to tradition and ancient values? What is their role in modern societies? What do they represent? How to understand their evolution? What do they capture?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This confusion remained, and was accentuated by two factors. First, the degree of individual freedom in Haudenosaunee society prevented the Confederacy Council from imposing a tight peace: there were always individuals who could be persuaded to join a fight. Second, if there was constant warfare, the men who took leadership in the wars became de facto decision makers for the people, especially since war required quick decisions and the Confederacy Council was not designed for agility. War provided an outlet for ambition: &amp;quot;there are two kinds of Chieftains, the war Chief &amp;amp; the Civil Chief; the War Chief is wholly elective any amiable man remarkable for his bravery &amp;amp; courage, who has lived quietly &amp;amp; conducted himself with propriety is chosen a Chief—his good qualities render him eligible not his rank or possessions; the civil chief is nearly hereditary; they are almost always chosen from particular families tho&#039; not in what we would call regular succession; sometimes a Civil Chief [is] chosen a War Chief, &amp;amp; in this case supposing he has any talents for oratory, he has the greatest influence.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The French and British in the seventeenth century were emerging from rigid feudalism, and were used to the exercise of coercive, decisive executive power. They assumed that their &amp;quot;savage&amp;quot; counterparts would have equal authority. In fact, Haudenosaunee chiefs had only the authority of persuasion and example, coupled with an extensive duty to consult and consider. Exchanges in council that reflect the difference between the societies were common:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They said when all the sachems were convened together they would answer that Point, but a little After a Sachem rose up &amp;amp; said, as to that Matter, we desire to be excused from giving any positive Answer, because it is the Young Men that must do the Service &amp;amp; they must be consulted about it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
His Lordship replyed that he thought the Sachems had the sole Command of their Young Men without any controll.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They answered, We have often proposed something to you &amp;amp; you have told us you would write to the King our Great Master about it, which gave us satisfaction and we never importuned you any more about it, therefore pray be satisfied with what we have now answered. . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As to our Children to be sent to New York to be instructed to read &amp;amp; write, We answer, that we are not Masters or disposers of them that is a matter which relates to our Wives who are the sole disposers of our Children whilst they are under Age.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There has always been tension between the young and the old, in every society. More so, no doubt, in societies without coercion, without complex hierarchies:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We find divisions among us, the young men think to take the lead, who know nothing of our affairs, nor of what we suffered in the War.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While we are indeed sachems we cannot simply turn our backs on our soldiers, for they are our protectors, and have to fight for us since we are old people.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After generations of warfare, more and more of the conduct of the affairs of the nations was being taken by the &amp;quot;warriors.&amp;quot; In 1762 the Geneseo Senecas explained to Sir William Johnson why the chiefs were not present at a Six Nations congress: &amp;quot;The reason you do not see many of our Sachems at present here is, that the weather and roads having been very bad, they were less able than we to travel, &amp;amp; therefore, we the Warriors were made choice of to attend you, and transact business; and I beg you will consider that we, are in fact the people of consequence for managing affairs, our Sachems being generally a parcell of old people who say much, but who mean or act very little, so that we have both the power and ability to settle matters.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alliances with the Europeans accentuated the imbalance. In &amp;quot;normal&amp;quot; times, the Great Law allowed a foreign nation to meet the Haudenosaunee in council and see the wise chiefs explaining the nature of the peace, while the foreigners could also see, standing behind the chiefs, the young men who represented the alternative to peace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In times of war, the people dealing with foreigners, and especially with their foreign military counterparts, were the war chiefs. Sending warriors as speakers also sent a message about Haudenosaunee intentions. When the French occupied Cataraqui (the present Kingston, Ontario) to control access to the St. Lawrence River from Lake Ontario, the Haudenosaunee sent a delegation of warriors to express their views in no uncertain terms:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Onontio your fyre shall burn no more at Cataraqui it shall never be kindled again. You did steale that place from us &amp;amp; wee quenched the fyre with the blood of our children. You think your selfes the ancient inhabitants of this countrey &amp;amp; longest in possession yea all the Christian Inhabitants of New York &amp;amp; Cayenquiragoe thinke the same of themselves. Wee Warriours are the firste &amp;amp; the ancient people &amp;amp; greatest of you all, these parts and countrys were inhabited &amp;amp; trodd upon by us before any Christian (then stamping his foot upon the ground sayd) We shall not suffer Caderaqui to be inhabited againe. Onontio we Canonssoené do say we will never suffer you to kindle your fire at Cadaraqui. I repeat this again and again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
European desires for military allies, first in wars between the British and French, and then in the American Revolution and the War of 1812, meant a constant stream of favour to the warriors coming from outside Haudenosaunee society. European representatives would often speak with those who could help them in war, regardless of the imbalance this created within the Haudenosaunee. The tension between the chiefs and the warriors was probably constant throughout history—but the Euro-American influence turned the tension into an imbalance. By 1776, as Britain and the United States vied for the alliance or neutrality of the Haudenosaunee, reaching out to the warriors, the rotiyanershon began to despair of the changes: &amp;quot;Times are altered with us. Formerly the Warriors were governed by the wisdom of their uncles the Sachems but now they take their own way and dispose of themselves without consulting their uncles the sachems. While we wish for peace they are for war. Brothers, they must take the consequences.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While the &amp;quot;warriors&amp;quot; saw themselves as the protectors of the League in a state of extended emergency, the maintenance of a state of war was antithetical to the Great Peace and in the long run would undermine the constitution and the law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Oneidas in Wisconsin split, the people who moved to the &amp;quot;Canadian side&amp;quot; were called the &amp;quot;Chiefs&#039; Party,&amp;quot; while those who stayed in Wisconsin were the &amp;quot;Warriors&#039; Party.&amp;quot; When a group formed at the Grand River Territory after the First World War, with the objective of installing a Canadian-style democratic system of government, it called itself the &amp;quot;Warrior Society,&amp;quot; partly because many of its members were war veterans. Yet at the Grand River Territory in 1959, when the Confederacy resumed control of the territory, however briefly, the &amp;quot;Warrior Society&amp;quot; of that time was an integral part of the movement that supported the chiefs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; The Ceremonies: Spiritual Authority and Obligation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The advent of Christianity no doubt complicated Haudenosaunee government. Some of the people of every nation moved to the St. Lawrence, to join the French mission villages that became Kahnawake, Kanehsatake, Akwesasne, and Oswegatchie. While the Jesuits and Sulpicians permitted and even maintained the continuity of the clans, they also set themselves up as spiritual authorities, leaders of the communities in ways for which the chiefs had until then been the guides. To the south, the British provided Anglican missionaries and churches, and Queen Anne provided the silverware and the names for Royal Chapels for the Mohawks. Methodists made inroads by employing Indigenous preachers. Those who continued to follow traditional Haudenosaunee religion became the custodians of both the law and the ceremonies:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everything is together—spiritual and political—because when the Creator . . . made this world, he touched the world all together, and it automatically became spiritual and everything that comes from the world is spiritual and so that&#039;s what leaders are, they are both the spiritual mentors and the political mentors of the people.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everything is laid out for you. Your path is straight ahead of you. Sometimes it&#039;s invisible but it&#039;s there. You may not know where it&#039;s going, but you have to follow that path. It&#039;s the path to the Creator. It&#039;s the only path there is.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To maintain continuity in the face of this erosion of authority, the Haudenosaunee adopted several different approaches. Some people were able to practise both Christian and traditional ways. For example, Thayendenegea Joseph Brant translated two books of the New Testament into Mohawk, as a good Anglican. But his haduwi, his medicine mask, is still in existence and use. Some people considered the good messages of Jesus and the Haudenosaunee way to be essentially the same message, so they could accept both. Some today assert that Jesus and the Peacemaker were the same person. Rather than have the community divided over religion, the Grand River Chiefs declared in the 1880s that they would hang their hats at the door of the council house, so that once they sat in council, &amp;quot;we are all wearing buckskins.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With every community, as well, there is a division between those who follow the Karihwi:yo, the message that Skaniatariio (Handsome Lake) brought in the 1790s, and those who maintain that the Kayanerenkó:wa is a sufficient guide for their way of life. In Kahnawake, this has resulted in there being separate longhouses for each path. In other places, there are separate medicine societies. Today, the majority of the rotiyanershon are Handsome Lake adherents, and some opposition to traditional governments comes from people who feel that religion and government should be kept separate. &amp;quot;That is why there are faithkeepers,&amp;quot; reply some of the chiefs: while it is our responsibility to maintain the great ceremonies, and to set an example of spirituality, the faithkeepers are the ones who look after the details now. Even so, the traditional ceremonies, and respect for them, are part of the backbone of the legal system. Council is often postponed so that the major ceremonies, like Midwinter and Green Corn, can be completed (especially since the ceremonies and council take place in the same longhouses).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; The Mother&#039;s Line&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
European and Euro-American legal systems made room for women&#039;s rights and women&#039;s equality during the twentieth century, removing aspects of laws that discriminated against women on the basis of gender. One of those laws was the Indian Act of Canada, which in 1869 was amended to strip Indian women of their status as Indians if they married non-Indian men. The Indian Act was amended in 1985, and women who had lost their status were reinstated and their children recognized as Indians. In 1870, the chiefs objected to the new provisions of Canadian law because they went against established Haudenosaunee customs. In 1924, Deskahe Levi General noted that the elected system Canada sought to impose in the Grand River Territory would remove women&#039;s political rights (women were not allowed to vote or hold political office under the Canadian system until 1951). The separation of the roles of men and women in government under the Kayanerenkó:wa is profound: it would be difficult to imagine male clan mothers or female chiefs, especially in the fulfillment of spiritual obligations. The principle of passing down identity, clan, and chiefs&#039; titles through the mother&#039;s line is deeply ingrained in Haudenosaunee law:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Not the least remarkable among their institutions, was that which confined the transmission of all titles, rights and property in the female line to the exclusion of the male. It is strangely unlike the canons of descent adopted by civilized nations, but it secured several important objects. If the Deer tribe of the Cayugas, for example, received a sachemship at the original distribution of these offices, the descent of such title being limited to the female line, it could never pass out of the tribe. It thus became instrumental in giving to the tribe individuality. A still more marked result, and perhaps a leading object of this enactment, was the perpetual disinheritance of the son. Being of the tribe of his mother formed an impassable barrier against him; and he could neither succeed his father as a sachem, nor inherit from him even his medal, or his tomahawk. The inheritance, for the protection of tribal rights, was thus directed from the lineal descendants of the sachem, to his brothers, or his sisters&#039; children, or, under certain circumstances, to some individual of the tribe at large; each and all of whom were in his tribe, while his children, being in another tribe . . . were placed out of the line of succession.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is how these matters will carry on, the women controlling the title names, because it is by means of all their suffering that people are here on earth, and it is they who raise them. Moreover, their blood, this is what we have, the people, for these are our mothers, the women, and this is why the families follow according to their bloodlines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As long as their neighbours&#039; laws discriminated actively against women, the Haudenosaunee were able to maintain that their legal system was no more discriminatory than that of patriarchal, patrilocal Canada and the United States. At the beginning of the twenty-first century, most unequal treatment of women in the laws of those countries has been removed, and pressure on the Haudenosaunee to amend citizenship laws has increased.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The difficulty, for the Haudenosaunee, lies in reconciling two fundamental principles in the law. The first is that the roles of men and women are distinct and separate, but equally respectable. The second is that families must be respected. In theory, the inclusiveness and generosity of the law is the path to that reconciliation: family members excluded because their fathers rather than their mothers are their connection to the community would be brought in by adoption. However, the generosity and flexibility of the law has atrophied somewhat: adoptions, once common and often informal, have become rare.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Differing roles for men and women in traditional Indigenous societies are uncomfortable for neighbours who advocate for respect for Indigenous laws and governments. The most explicit recent statement of that discomfort is found in the report of Canada&#039;s Truth and Reconciliation Commission, which said:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As with the common law and civil law systems, Indigenous law is learned through a lifetime of work. Applying Indigenous law requires an acknowledgment that it exists in the real world and has relevance today. It is most helpful when applied to humankind&#039;s most troubling behaviours. . . . Contemporary issues concerning gender and other inequalities must necessarily be part of these laws for them to be persuasively applicable in the present day.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; The Names: Continuity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Haudenosaunee names are not simply invented. They are often ancient, and they belong to the clan and family. When a new person is born, the women of the family meet, observe the child, and choose a name that reflects the child&#039;s personality, or the people&#039;s hopes for the child:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After the birth of a child a name was selected by its mother from those not in use belonging to the gens, with the concurrence of her nearest relatives, which was then bestowed upon the infant. But the child was not fully christened until its birth and name, together with the name and gens of its mother and the name of its father, had been announced at the next ensuing council of the tribe. Upon the death of a person his name could not be used again in the life-time of his oldest surviving son without the consent of the latter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The name may also recall a person who has died recently and left the name vacant—for a name does not simply disappear: it returns to the &amp;quot;storehouse&amp;quot; of names kept by the clan. The fundamental rule is that there should be only one person alive at any one time carrying a particular name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Jesuit Relations described the Huron practice in 1644:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No name is ever lost; so when some one of the family has died, all the relatives assemble and deliberate together which among them shall bear the name of the deceased, giving his own to some other relative. He who takes a new name enters also upon the burdens which belong to it, and so he is captain, if the deceased was so.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The names now in use among the Iroquois . . . are, in the main, ancient names handed down in the gentes from time immemorial.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1724, Lafitau wrote that there was a practice of &amp;quot;requickening&amp;quot; or making alive again all the names belonging to a family. It is possible that he combined the practice of giving names from the family &amp;quot;storehouse&amp;quot; with the practice of &amp;quot;requickening&amp;quot; a chiefly title. However, it is also possible that, three centuries ago, every name brought with it the memory and honour of the people who had carried it before. Lafitau wrote:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In every family a certain number of ancestral names, both men&#039;s and women&#039;s, are kept. These names are their own and known to be taken by such and such a family. Now it is the custom in each family to requicken and resuscitate, in some manner, those who, issuing from that family, have made it illustrious. They exalt thus, at the same time, the names of those whom they make live again, and impose them on those of their grand nephews destined to represent them. The latter assume more or less importance according as those who had borne their names were more or less important themselves by their qualities, virtues and deeds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Similarly, when Cadwallader Colden was adopted:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is customary among them to make a Compliment of Naturalization into the Five Nations; and considering how highly they value themselves above all others, this must be no small Compliment. This is not done by any general Act of the Nation, but every single person has a right to it, by a Kind of Adoption. The first time I was among the Mohawks, I had this Compliment from one of their old Sachems, which he did, by giving me his own name, Cayenderongue. He had been a notable Warrior; and he told me, that now I had a Right to assume to myself all the Acts of Valour he had performed, and that now my Name would echo from Hill to Hill all over the Five Nations. . . . When about ten or twelve years afterwards, my Business led me again among them, I directed the Interpreter to say something from me to the Sachems; he was for some time at a loss to understand their Answer, till he asked me whether I had any Name among them: I found that I was really known to them by that Name, and that the old Sachem, from the time he had given me his Name, had assumed another to himself. I was adopted, at that time, into the Tribe of the Bear, and for that reason, I often afterwards had the kind Compliment of Brother Bear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
People&#039;s names can change, or be changed. Morgan, paying attention to names as well as families, explained:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Two classes of names were in use, one adapted to childhood, and the other to adult life, which were exchanged at the proper period in the same formal manner, one being taken away, to use their expression, and the other bestowed in its place. . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the age of sixteen or eighteen, the first name was taken away, usually by a chief of the gens, and one of the second class bestowed in its place. At the next council of the tribe the change of names was publicly announced, after which the person, if a male, assumed the duties of manhood. . . . After a severe illness it was not uncommon for a person, from superstitious considerations, to solicit and obtain a second change of name. It was sometimes done again in extreme old age.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lafitau adds: &amp;quot;These names change with age. A child either has no name, or takes that of another child, a young man, that of a warrior and an old man, that of some elder. As soon as a person dies, the name that he bore is buried with him and it is only several years afterward that it is renewed.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a child receives a name in the Longhouse, at the Midwinter or Green Corn Thanksgiving, it is usually his uncle who carries him, singing his atonwa, and introducing him to the people—explaining that this new person is to be known henceforth by this name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The same ceremony takes place when an adult is adopted: &amp;quot;Another Chief led Mr. Furniss to the center, giving his Seneca name, To-an-do-ah, *One First to See*, afterward leading him up and down while he chanted the war song. The Indians responded, the women keeping time by clapping hands. He was then led to his new mother in the Turtle Clan and kissed her, the clan welcoming him. . . . In adopting women, the war song is not sung as when men are received.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When William Beauchamp was adopted into the Onondaga Eel Clan in 1904, as Wah-kat-yu&#039;-ten (Beautiful Rainbow), &amp;quot;Albert Cusick or Sa-go-na-qua-de . . . led the new brother up and down, singing the customary song of thanksgiving and then introducing him to those of his new relatives who were present. The song used was . . . one of the Adonwah or thanksgiving songs.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The same ceremony, essentially, is used when a person becomes a royá:ner. His old name is no longer used for him, and he is introduced under his new title:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ceremony of induction consisted in the formal bestowal of the new name by which he was henceforth to be known. A chief placed himself on each side of the candidate, and, grasping his arms, marched him to and fro in the Council House, between the lines of the assembled senators. As they walked they proclaimed his new name and office, and recited, in a measured chant, the duties to which he was now called, the audience responding at every pause with the usual chorus of assent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In familiar intercourse and in formal salutation the American Indians address each other by the term of relationship the person spoken to sustains to the speaker. When related they salute by kin; when not related &amp;quot;my friend&amp;quot; is substituted. It would be esteemed an act of rudeness to address an Indian by his personal name, or to inquire his name directly from himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Usually, however, the Indians do not willingly hear themselves called by the name given them and an inquiry as to what that is, is a kind of affront which causes them to blush. In addressing each other, they call each other by names of kinship, brother, sister, uncle, nephew, etc. observing exactly the degrees of subordination and all the proper age relationship unless there is a real relationship by blood or adoption.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The use of names, or the reluctance to use names, is relevant to the law in several ways. A practice of salutation &amp;quot;by kin&amp;quot; is another constant reminder of the relationship between individuals, crucial in a legal system based on relationships. Using a person&#039;s name instead would be both a step back from the relationship (since one is using a non-relationship word instead of, for example, &amp;quot;my cousin&amp;quot;) and an intrusion (since one&#039;s name is the name that the Creator knows one by, and the one that is used in ceremonies). Thus, while it is important to have a name, to link one to a clan and a family, the importance of the name lies not in its use but rather in the relations that it provides.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This point is apparent in the difference between English and Haudenosaunee languages. In English, it is easy to speak with someone, or about someone, without reference to the relationship between the two of you. In Haudenosaunee languages, it is more difficult to do so. It is as if Mohawk *allows* one to speak without reference to relationship, while English *encourages* one to do so.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Names are identifiers: they provide identity. In Haudenosaunee society, they do so to identify the individual not only as an individual but also as a member of a family, clan, and nation. Even in the most mundane ways, the way a name is thought about can be different. An American will introduce himself by saying, &amp;quot;I&#039;m Bill Smith,&amp;quot; whereas a Mohawk, speaking Mohawk, will say &amp;quot;Teyanoken ne yonkyats&amp;quot;—&amp;quot;they call me Teyanoken.&amp;quot; It is the difference between defining yourself by what you call yourself and defining yourself by your relationship with other people. It is true that in both societies, names are given to children by their parents; that names identify one in terms of family relations as well as individual identity; and that often there are public namings (including christenings and First Communion). The difference is subtle, but real.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Outsiders meeting the Haudenosaunee for the first time were often given names almost immediately. This was practical and legal. It gave them not only existence but also protection and obligation. Now they had a place to stay and relatives to stay with. Now they were related to the Haudenosaunee as members of the family, and it would not be legally possible for them to be enemies, to engage in war against the Confederacy, or to disturb the peace. Often those who were given names in this way understood the honour without grasping the reciprocity and obligation involved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Citizenship and Immigration&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee have been called a matrilineal, matrilocal society. That means that people draw their identities from their mothers. They belong to their mother&#039;s clan. In the old days, it meant that upon marriage a man would move to live with his wife&#039;s people, in the longhouse of his wife and her clan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Traditionally, one&#039;s closest male relative is one&#039;s uncle: one&#039;s mother&#039;s brother. He is the person who has the responsibility of walking the new baby up and down the longhouse to introduce the new person to the people, when names are given or confirmed at Strawberries and Midwinter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alone among the versions of the law, the Newhouse version edited by Gawasowane Arthur Parker provides for passing a name and clan through the father:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The father of a child of great comeliness, learning ability or specially loved because of some circumstance may, at the will of the child&#039;s clan, select a name from his own (the father&#039;s) clan and bestow it by ceremony, such as provided. This naming is only temporary and shall be called &amp;quot;a name hung around the neck.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
David Maybury-Lewis&#039;s description of a principle of tribal peoples—that if you can be addressed as a relative you are one of us, and if you cannot be addressed as a relative you are not one of us —could have led to a narrow, xenophobic view of the Haudenosaunee world and an increasingly inbred population. Instead, the Haudenosaunee used this principle in an empowering manner, generous and open in defining how an outsider could become a relative.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; The Right of Refuge&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choosing the longhouse as the symbol of the League was a deliberate message about how the peace would be expanded. Archaeologists say that about a third of the bark longhouse sites that have been excavated show that the houses had been extended after their original construction. Hale explained that, as a symbol, the longhouse was &amp;quot;a description and an invitation&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;When the number of families inhabiting these long dwellings was increased by marriage or adoption, and a new hearth was required, the end-wall . . . was removed, an addition of the required size was made to the edifice, and the closing wall was restored. It declared that the united nations were not distinct tribes, associated by a temporary league, but one great family, clustered for convenience around separate hearths in a common dwelling; and it proclaimed their readiness to receive new members into the general household.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Historically, the Haudenosaunee increased their population by taking in people from other nations—as individuals, as families, and sometimes as entire nations. Deaths from the epidemics and from war were balanced by these immigrants. Archaeologists suggest that the surviving St. Lawrence Iroquoians were absorbed by the Hurons and Onondagas. As the British colonies pressed inland from the Atlantic, Indigenous peoples sought refuge among the Haudenosaunee. The law was already in place to permit this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And whosoever finds these roots and traces it up, and come to the &amp;quot;Tree of Peace and Shelter&amp;quot; he is welcome to take shelter under its spreading branches.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If any man or nation outside the Five Nations shall obey the laws of Great Peace and make known their disposition to the Lords of the Confederacy, they may trace the Roots to the Tree and if their minds are clean and they are obedient and promise to obey the wishes of the Confederate Council, they shall be welcomed to take shelter beneath the Tree of the Long Leaves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The welcome was not automatic, and it was not unconditional. The Peacemaker had installed the Seneca war chiefs as doorkeepers, and their function included verifying the intentions of those who arrived at the longhouse, seeking to be taken in:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the various nations&#039; inhabitants—whichever direction they may come from, according to how the roots lead them, the Great White Roots, which will bring them—arrive where we have our house; and as to these beside the door they will meet the doorkeepers (Teyoninhokarawen and Kanuhkitawi). Thereupon the two will ask what messages they have along, and if what they bring along is an evil thing; then they will consider it, the doorkeepers, and if they see that it is bothersome and that they will use it to hurt them, the people living here, they shall try to settle it peacefully to avoid trouble, but if the others do not accept, then Kanuhkitawi will invite them to the place where the elm bark is spread out and shove them inside the house, where bones will come to pile up, and it is a serious matter if it were to happen thus.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Adoption&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If other people—as individuals, families, or nations—had the right to seek refuge under the Tree of Peace, and to ask to enter the Longhouse, then ways to bring them in and include them had to be developed. The Haudenosaunee used adoption as their means to give these immigrants a place within civil society. Without a clan and a name, these people would not be accountable, and they would not know who spoke for them, who carried responsibility for them, or where to find their place in the ceremonies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Morgan states that the right of adoption belonged to the clan, not to individuals, and that adoption into a clan conferred &amp;quot;the nationality of the tribe.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adoption meant that the adoptee became, in almost all respects, a member of the family:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The person adopting a captive placed him or her in the relation of a brother or sister; if a mother adopted, in that of a son or daughter; and ever afterwards treated the person in all respects as though born in that relation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A prisoner, once adopted, was treated as if he had always been an Iroquois, and if he replaced someone who had died, he assumed all the rights and privileges of the deceased.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1654, Father Simon le Moyne visited Onondaga. He remarked: &amp;quot;One calls me brother, another uncle, another a cousin: never have I had so many kinsfolk.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adoption was crucial to the survival of the Haudenosaunee: it was used to &amp;quot;replace&amp;quot; people who had died by war or disease, to expand or increase the population of communities that had been decreased.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An adopted person is said to have his name &amp;quot;hung around his neck.&amp;quot; That is, it is not completely a part of him, and it can be removed if he misbehaves. This is not qualitatively different from the concept of a &amp;quot;landed immigrant&amp;quot; in Canadian law: it is a stage between being a foreigner and becoming a citizen. The decision to remove a &amp;quot;name hung around the neck&amp;quot; is made by the family, clan, or nation that adopted the person.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes, historically, an adopted person was not &amp;quot;completely&amp;quot; adopted but was to be shared by both his adoptive people and his original nation. This was especially true of interpreters. It was also true of Warraghyhagey Sir William Johnson, the first Imperial Superintendent General of Indian Affairs—who had a Mohawk wife and children:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Six Nations answer&#039;d. That the one half of Coll. Johnson belonged to His Excellency [the Governor of New York], and the other to them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He is of our Nation, and a member of our Council, as well as of yours. When we adopted him, we divided him into two equal parts: One we kept for our selves, and one we left for you. He has had a great deal of Trouble with us, wore out his shoes in our Messages, and dirty&#039;d his Cloaths by being amongst us, so that he is become as nasty as an Indian.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The adoption of Lewis Henry Morgan provides a clear picture of the process in 1846—the first part is a transcript by Donehogowa Ely Parker of a speech in Tonawanda Longhouse by Hasge-sa-h Jesse Spring:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;They no doubt knew the fact that, when anyone chooses to become a member of our nation by making an application to some of our leading and influential men, and providing for a feast which is always customary on such occasions as our inducement to bring the people together, [they ought not] to be scrupulous in adopting. The matter of adoption was referred to the managers and prompters, and they concluded that there was no reason why we should not adopt them. They accordingly stated to our brothers that they had agreed to grant their request, and so soon as the means wanted to be furnished for assembling the people, the arrangements would be completed. The managers at the same time referred the giving of names to the chiefs. But in this we have been disappointed. The managers have this evening been informed that the chiefs have made no arrangements so far as this is concerned, and it now becomes the duty of the tribes [clans] to which they are to respectively belong to come forward and present their proper names. The people will observe into what tribe they are adopted by watching who it is that leads the initiate around the room. The managers desire to request the warriors to keep perfect order, and to lend their aid in making the evening performances interesting. The first dance in order will be the War dance, and the second the Grand Religious [Great Feather] dance as the proper accompaniments of the occasion. These will also be for the benefit of our brothers. When these are over, we shall have the privilege of having as many more as we choose. But whether we have any more or not we want all to behave with propriety and decency.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Donehogowa continued with his own description:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The dancers then withdrew to dress for the dance. But before they withdrew, the initiation ceremony was performed. L.H. Morgan was first led around the room by John Bigfire of the Hawk tribe. Morgan therefore became a Hawk. The leader sang a Thanksgiving song [Personal Chant] while the initiate went around the room, the warriors keeping time to the song by a low guttural sound. The women also kept time by clapping together their hands. The name given to Morgan was Da-ya-da-o-wo-ko; it signifies lies across. Porter was then announced as the next person to be led around the room. The name was Da-ya-a-we; [it] signifies he is bringing or fetching. He was then also led around the room, the leader singing a Thanksgiving song. The leader was Isaac Shanks of the Wolf tribe. Consequently Porter became a Wolf de facto. The third and last person announced was Darling. The name given him was Ga-e-we-yo; [it signifies religion, good news, or glad tidings]. The leader sang a Thanksgiving song while leading him around the room. He was led by William Kennedy of the Deer tribe. Darling therefore became a Deer man to us. This closed the mere ceremony of initiation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Giving names to groups of visitors is not just a Seneca practice of the nineteenth century. When the Boundary Commission set the line between Canada and the United States through Kanatakon (St. Regis village in Akwesasne), the members of the commission were also given names: &amp;quot;The Chiefs of the village assemble at our lodgings to execute a lease. . . . They . . . christened us all with Indian names, Judge Atwater they called Ska ro ya te (Beyond the Sky), Col. Hawkins, Ga ron gon tia (the Flying Moon), myself, Ga ra give ne gen (the Rising Sun), R. C. Atwater, Ga ra giv a na (the Full Moon), Judge Richards, Ze ra go rus (the Split or Half Moon).&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When Mary Jemison was adopted, the Seneca women took her to the river and washed her down, removing the &amp;quot;whiteness&amp;quot; from her. While this was a way of further removing her former identity, it also reflects the tradition, shared with the Cherokees, of &amp;quot;going to water&amp;quot; for purification. Water, after all, is recognized as the source of all life. Later Seneca adoptions also involved the adoptee having water poured over him. Washing down also resembles the transformative rubbing down, of both Thadadaho and of visitors met at the woods&#039; edge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In more recent times, there has been unresolved discussion about the nature and consequences of adoption. One question is whether it is qualitatively different to bestow a made-up, honorary name as distinct from a name that belongs to a clan. Another discussion is whether the person who receives a name that belongs to a clan also receives all the legal rights and obligations that go with citizenship. William Fenton (Howan&#039;eyo) describes the discussion at Tonawanda:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The speaker of the longhouse, Henry Redeye, said that he opposed giving names belonging to clans to white people. In recent cases white adoptees had claimed hunting and fishing rights on the reservation by virtue of adoption as &amp;quot;Indians.&amp;quot; The longhouse officers did not wish to confer the privilege on white men. Charles Butler, who interpreted for me that morning, said he disagreed that such conveyance of status was legally possible. . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I inferred from Henry&#039;s statement that some Senecas regarded adoption, when done wholeheartedly, as conferring complete status as a member of the Seneca Nation. Still other Senecas opposed adoption on principle, in as much as they expected persons adopted to behave as Indians, which would imply rights to hunt and fish, privileges which they did not wish to convey. Other Senecas who regarded adoption as honorary did not expect full participation from those whom they honored, and they would confine the honor to an exclusive few persons who were genuinely interested.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Nations Leave, Nations Return&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One important difference between the Haudenosaunee and other confederate entities is the provision in the constitution for nations (as well as individuals) leaving and returning. No doubt the Peacemaker recognized that if the League were held together only by the desire of its members&#039; minds to be together, then it would be possible for people and nations to drift away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Against this possibility he made provision for the commitment to be renewed frequently. It was not just a means of refreshing memory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Even so, people left from time to time. A legal system without coercive force could not make them stay. Whereas the United States fought a bloody civil war upon the secession of the thirteen southern states, and Canada continues to wrestle with the spectre of Quebec secession, inventing difficult rules along a rocky path 130 years into Confederation, the Haudenosaunee provided at their Confederacy&#039;s inception for what might happen if nations or people left, and concentrated on creating ways for them to return.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The individual who &amp;quot;leaves the circle&amp;quot; does so as an individual. If the individual is a chief or clan mother, the title stays within the circle, to be given to another member of the family. There are two schools of thought about whether there is a need for a Condolence in this situation. One is that nobody has died, so there are no grieving ones to be consoled. The other is that something is necessary in order that the other nations should have the same opportunity to exercise their right of approval and acceptance (or rejection) as they had when the original chief was put forward.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a nation chooses to leave, it may do so as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In such a situation, the Condolence becomes the doorway back into the League. Once again, it serves as a means of putting sorrow, grief, anger, and hard feelings away where they cannot be brought out again. The Condolence serves as the agent of repair to seams in the Confederacy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus, William Johnson would continually advise the chiefs to &amp;quot;gather the scattered people together.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No matter where they went, they were still &amp;quot;our people,&amp;quot; connected by bonds of family. The kinship woven together through the clans was maintained no matter where people went. Mohawks from the Mohawk Valley would spend months in Kahnawake, to the confusion and frustration of the French. Kahnawake Mohawks would not fight other Mohawks in battles in which they were serving as allies to the French, and would warn other Haudenosaunee of the state of things.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The chiefs in the 1750s would accuse the French and British of causing the dispersion of the people. They were frank in their assessment of European strategies:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You are daily now making Disturbances &amp;amp; seem to forget the old Agreement. The Tree seems to be falling, let it now be put up, the Roots [——] and the leaves flourish as before. You formerly said, take this Bowl, &amp;amp; this piece of Meat, with this Spoon let us eat always friendly together out of one Dish; but now you forget &amp;amp; have separated the Indians very much as they can&#039;t well come together to eat out of this Dish, which is very hard as we have Children here &amp;amp; there scattered thro&#039; the country by your means.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The English your Brothers &amp;amp; you are the common Disturbers of this Country I say you as white people together. We term the English your Brothers as you must have some. We Indians you call Children—You both want to put us Indians a Quarrelling but we the Six Nations know better, if we begin we see nothing but an entire Ruin of us, as we should not leave off till all was gone, so we are resolved to keep Friends on both sides as long as possible &amp;amp; not meddle with the white People. Our arms shall be between you endeavouring to keep you asunder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the British took Montreal, there was a strong detachment of Haudenosaunee warriors with them. In September 1760, at Kahnawake, Sir William Johnson, the Imperial Superintendent General of Indian Affairs, invited the &amp;quot;Eight Nations,&amp;quot; including the Iroquois communities of Kahnawake, Kanehsatake, Akwesasne, and Oswegatchie, to officially take up their place within the Covenant Chain with the British. At the same council, those communities were invited back into the Confederacy, and they accepted:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brethren of the 5 Nat&#039;s.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[You] In return to your Belt of Yesterday Whereby you told us that as your Br. W&#039;y. [Sir William Johnson] had finished every thing with us, you on your part had something to say which was that as there had been during this war a division and disunion between us; and [thereby] desired us to reunite and be firm friends as heretofore, We hereby assure all present that we with pleasure agree to your friendly proposal and reunite as formerly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The American Revolution began with the Haudenosaunee determined to stay out of what they saw as a fratricidal war between their European brothers. As the war progressed, though, the Haudenosaunee were drawn in. Mohawks close to the Johnson family were impelled to defend them, encouraged by Mary Brant. Oneidas close to Samuel Kirkland joined the rebels, and the survival of the Continental Army at Valley Forge is attributed to Oneida food supplies. Senecas, Onondagas, and Cayugas who had mostly remained neutral joined the British with a vengeance after the 1779 Sullivan-Clinton campaign laid waste to their towns and countries. William Fenton has argued that &amp;quot;by the eighteenth century, the League of the Longhouse was a convenient fiction, and the Iroquois Confederacy had become the effective political institution.&amp;quot; The Haudenosaunee, today and historically, have never distinguished between the two. Fenton followed this with the conclusion that the council fire of the Confederacy itself had been extinguished with the exception of token remnants, and that &amp;quot;when a pattern of culture is shattered, a people loses its vital spark.&amp;quot; Joagquisho Oren Lyons disagrees: &amp;quot;people who argue that the Confederacy ceased to exist fail to understand the non-coercive nature of the Confederacy vis-a-vis its members and the fact that disruption is not the equivalent of cessation.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the War of 1812, the British once again called upon their allies for help. This time, the help came at first more reluctantly than ever, and ended again with the Haudenosaunee on both sides of the Niagara frontier, fighting on opposite sides, shedding their brothers&#039; blood. The Seneca chief Little Billy explained: &amp;quot;We know that neither of these powers have any regard for us. . . . Why then should we endanger our families, to enjoy their smiles only for the Day in which they need us?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another Seneca chief told John Norton: &amp;quot;We find ourselves in the hands of two powerful Nations, who can crush us when they please. They are the same in every respect, although they are now preparing to contend. We are ignorant of the real motives which urge them to arm, but we are well assured that we have no interest therein, and that neither one nor the other have any real affection towards us. We know that our Blood shed in their battles will not even ensure their compassion to our Widows and Orphans.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After the war, when Deputy Superintendent General of Indian Affairs William Claus met with the Crown&#039;s Indigenous allies at Burlington Bay on April 24, 1815, he explained the &amp;quot;Indian clauses&amp;quot; of the Treaty of Ghent, which restored to the Indian nations their rights as they had been before the hostilities. The war chiefs handed the conduct of the council over to the rotiyanershon, and Tekarihoken then requested British assistance in reconciliation with their brothers on the other side of the boundary line: &amp;quot;It is the sincere wish of the Six Nations and your Children of the other nations that you uncover the Council Fire and request the attendance of the Americans and the Indians attached to them.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of August 1815, the council of reconciliation took place at Niagara. On the &amp;quot;American side&amp;quot; of the fire were Senecas, Onondagas, and Cayugas from Buffalo Creek, Tonawanda, and Allegheny. On the &amp;quot;Canadian side&amp;quot; were people from the Grand River Territory. The council began with &amp;quot;the usual ceremonies of Condolence&amp;quot; by the Crown&#039;s representative, but the Haudenosaunee immediately took over the work of peacemaking. By the end of the process, the Haudenosaunee had &amp;quot;mixed together&amp;quot; and become &amp;quot;one people&amp;quot; once again. While the council was lengthy and officially at the &amp;quot;King&#039;s Council Fire,&amp;quot; it was a good example of internal Haudenosaunee reconciliation processes. While the British opened the council, the first day consisted of the propositions of the Grand River chiefs, and the &amp;quot;American side&amp;quot; chiefs replied the next day:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Deputy Superintendent addressed all the nations present, performing the usual ceremonies of Condolence and uncovering the King&#039;s Council Fire by presenting a Belt of White Wampum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tekarihoga, Principal Mohawk Chief, Speaker:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brothers and relations,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our Father has performed the Ceremonies which were customary with our Ancestors, and which we endeavour to continue. Our meeting is at our Father the King&#039;s Council Fire which has just been uncovered that we may proceed to deliberate upon the good work for which we are now assembled. We the several Nations residing at the Grand River salute you from the other side we are the same people with you, we are relations of the same colour, notwithstanding having been opposed to each other in the Field during the late Contest between our Father the King of England and the Americans. Our friend who has just uncovered the Council Fire has removed all obstructions, our minds are set at ease. The River which separates us is opened that we may have a free passage at all times. The roads are cleared of all briars and rubbish, that we may again renew that friendly intercourse which formerly existed between us. I now speak to you in behalf of the Indians residing on the Grand River, and I am desired to assure you that all ill will is removed from their Hearts towards you from the [illegible] American land.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Delivered a bunch of Strings of Wampum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Echo, an Onondaga Chief:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brothers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I salute you in the name of the Hurons, Shawnees and Six Nations at the King&#039;s Council Fire which has just been uncovered. I speak to the Senecas, Cayugas and Onondagas from Buffalo Creek, Tehaniwandi and Allegany who are now present at our Father&#039;s Council Fire. I also address those who are at their homes, before our Father the Deputy Supt. General, the King&#039;s Officers who are now present, and tell you that all ill blood has been removed from our hearts. What has been done, is now forgotten. We are all of the same colour and ought to be friendly towards each other.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To make our Friendship lasting, we put the Tomahawk the depth of a Pine Tree under ground; and that it may not be removed we place over it a Tree that the roots may so cover it that it cannot be found again. This ceremony was performed by our Father at Burlington last Spring in presence of the Western Nations and I will now repeat to you the speech which our Father delivered to us when he informed us of the Pacification with the Americans, and our Answer (here the proceeding of the Council at Burlington last Spring on the 24th, 26th and 27th April last was repeated). We condole with you from the bottom of our hearts for the loss of your friends, and wipe the tears from your eyes, we open your throats so no obstruction shall remain, that you may speak your mind freely and with the same friendship which formerly existed between us, as we now in the name of the Nations already mentioned address you as friends. If you will stand up we will take you by the hands. Should an idle young Man make use of any improper Language we request that you will not take any notice of it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Large bunch of Strings of black and white wampum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The American Indians stood up and the others took them by the hand repeating the assurances of friendship, after which the Old Eel, an Onondaga Chief spoke to the Deputy Supt. Genl. as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brothers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You have this day uncovered the King&#039;s Council Fire at this place where our forefathers were accustomed to assemble. I speak in behalf of the Indians who are now come here to meet our brethren from the Grand River. We salute you and wish you well. We have heard all that you have said now and last Spring, and are much pleased with it. We rejoice that the Great Spirit has brought us together to unite and be friends. Many have been the meetings at this place between the King and our Ancestors. I am an old man and have been present at many of these meetings when your Grand Father spoke to us. We will always remember his words they are buried deep in our hearts. We look to you to be a friend to the Indians as he was. It is now late in the day, and as we are to answer you we will cover the fire and meet again tomorrow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A few Strings wampum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
September 1st&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tekarihoga&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brothers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We thank the Great Spirit for giving us a new day, and permitting us to meet again. We wait to hear what you may have to say.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red Jacket, Principal Seneca Speaker&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brothers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the name of the Indians from the other side of the River. I now address myself to the King, the Commg. Officers, and Colonel Claus our head, and to the Six Nations, Wyandots and Shawanese.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Strings wampum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brothers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I am happy now to meet you in the usual friendly manner, and you may be assured that what has happened was not from any animosity towards our ancient Father and friends. We are a poor people. We cannot do as we would. We are as Prisoners. But the fetters are now off and we are at liberty to communicate freely with our friends. We are not of the same Nations only, but of the same Families also. We therefore ought to be united and become one Body.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Strings of Wampum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brother&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You have informed us that the King&#039;s Council Fire is again uncovered. We are also informed that the United States have done the same. We seriously recommend that your people will now attend to your usual occupations of hunting and agriculture and that you pay due attention to your Women, who by our ancient customs have a voice in bringing up our Young people to the practice of truth and industry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Strings of Wampum. . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Road being now open, we will be glad to have a visit from you at Buffalo Creek. Eating and drinking together may be omitted at present, our time being so short, rising and shaking hands will do as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Strings of wampum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They then mixed with each other and spoke to the Deputy Supt. General as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tekarihoga, Speaker&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brothers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You have witnessed our proceedings which it has pleased the Ruler of the World to assist us in. It has finished as we could wish, and we desire that you will immediately acquaint our Western Brethren of the work we have been doing; and that we shall soon proceed to the west to meet them and perform the same ceremony there as was agreed upon last spring in Council. We now speak to you in One Body, and we hope that we shall be allowed to travel along the road peaceably and without being insulted by the inhabitants, and that you will give us provisions to enable us to travel homewards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Deputy Superintendent General&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brothers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In compliance with your particular request expressed in your Speech of 26th April last, your Father General Drummond ordered that I should be present at this meeting, and I have now to express how much I am satisfied with the whole of your proceedings which I very earnestly recommend you to keep in remembrance. The Road has been open&#039;d and made smooth for you all. When the King of England made peace with the Americans he was particular in stipulating that no difficulties should be thrown in the road to interrupt a free intercourse between his Indian Children. I am sorry to understand that the Inhabitants have in some cases behaved improperly towards you but your young men have provoked the resentment by their own misconduct. You are all under the protection of your Great Father the King, and if you conduct yourselves peaceably towards his white children, they will not be permitted to ill treat you. Provisions will be provided for you on your return homewards. I now cover the Council Fire and wish you a safe return home.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee had required the assistance of the British to create the opportunity for reconciliation—to kindle the council fire at which this would take place—but by the end of the council (and unaccountably omitting the feast that would have firmly brought them together) they spoke across the fire to William Claus as &amp;quot;one people&amp;quot; again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Perhaps the Haudenosaunee are always at the edge of division: the bonds that link the nations, despite their strong description, are voluntary, not the result of compulsion. Recognizing the possibility of these splits, the Peacemaker built into the law the means of reconciliation. In contrast, there is no constitutional provision for secession—or rejoining—by states or provinces in the Euro-American nations. Instead, there have been Quebec referenda and court decisions, and an American Civil War.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Pine Tree Chiefs&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the beginning, it was clear that there would be able leaders who were not members of the lineages of the rotiyanershon. This would be especially true of a League that was designed to bring in people of all nations, extending the longhouse. The Great Peace would require their participation and support. The Peacemaker created a new institution, the Pine Tree Chief:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereupon Dekanawidah said, &amp;quot;Now, again, I decree another thing: you chiefs of the several nations of our League, if something should happen, if ever a disruptive idea were to enter where the Great Pine is located, where the power is situated, if the chiefs are unable to agree, thereupon someone among the warriors or the people—just whoever in the crowd is able—that one shall help, assisting them at the Council, the League chiefs. This is also the one who will help the crowd, for he is able, this one, to climb their tree, Skaehetsi:kowa, Great Tall Tree, and he is able to perch on top of the tree. There upon he will look around for a place having an opening, a space for them to escape, the entire crowd, so that they may survive and also our grandchildren. Thereupon he will descend again and stand up there in front of the chiefs. Thereafter he will place in front of them his own opinion, he having observed where they can escape in order for the entire group to survive, so that the day will dawn for generations of our grandchildren.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereupon the chiefs will take it up, considering whether they can see that it will be correct, the warrior&#039;s information, that this is what will help them. After the chiefs accept it, the suggestion of the one not holding office, they will confirm it, and if it turns out well—the warrior&#039;s information concerning the great matter with which he is helping all of the people—then the chiefs will think carefully about the man, the warrior holding no office, thinking about his ability to save them, the ongoing families. Thereupon they will decide to include him where they are seated to counsel together, the chiefs of the five nations. And there they will stand him up, in front of the chiefs who will then give him a title which they will call Pine Tree Chief, the self-made chief, and this is because he helped the chiefs and the entire group. Moreover, actually, he has as much power as the antlered chiefs of our various nations, all of the trees being of equal height.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If it should happen that a Pine Tree Chief, a self-made one, if ever he spoils certain matters between the chiefs and the people, the chiefs will pick up the matter of the Pine Tree Chief, and if they find that he is not truthful in his dealings, then the chiefs will decide to take back his title, and he will come back out from where the chiefs are located. Then it will come to happen again that he will be like the public, he no longer having a title, and we will call this they knocked the tree down again; but if the one who becomes a Pine Tree Chief is righteous, and works conscientiously—he not causing trouble for the chiefs and the people—then they will be permanent, his duties with his colleagues, which means that he will help the whole group—including the coming generations of our grandchildren—and that he should not spoil matters within the League. In fact, his duties as a chief will last as long as he lives, and when he dies, then it will end, the title, which he will take with him, so that never another should be given that title. That is how it will continue to be done among the several nations and clans of our League.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Pine Tree Chief, then, is an adviser to the council. His advice is of such consistently good quality that the chiefs in council may decide to raise him up themselves. As he is a &amp;quot;pine tree,&amp;quot; it is said, his roots are in the council, not in his family, so that he can be removed by the chiefs without any reference to a clan or clan mothers. At the same time, because he has been raised up by the chiefs, he is protected by them against the ill will of the people. He sits in council as an equal, in the sense that he has a right to be heard equal to other chiefs: &amp;quot;Whenever we discover a warrior who is wise and trustworthy and who will render his services for the benefit of the people and thus aid the lords of the confederacy, we will claim him into our midst and confer upon him the title &#039;He has sprung up as a Pine Tree&#039; (Eh-ka-neh-do-deh) and his title shall last only during his lifetime and shall not be hereditary and at his death it shall die with him.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Pine Tree Chief sits in council with the chiefs of his nation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
His title lasts only as long as his lifetime: the name is then retired, in the sense that he does not have any successor. While there is no official limit to the number of Pine Tree Chiefs, they never crowd out the rotiyanershon. They are men of exceptional ability, and there are not many of them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Teianoken (Deyanoga) was a Pine Tree Chief before he became a Mohawk title holder. When he went to England in 1710 he was known as Teyoninhokarawen. It is said that Sir William Johnson, Warraghyihagey, became a Pine Tree Chief in 1746–47 under the &amp;quot;sponsorship&amp;quot; of Theyanoguin. It is also said that Thayendenegea Joseph Brant became a Pine Tree Chief under the sponsorship of Warraghyihagey. And it is said that another Teyoninhokarawen, John Norton, Thayendenegea&#039;s adopted nephew, became a Pine Tree Chief, put forward by Thayendenegea. Through this succession of Pine Tree Chiefs, one can see the bones of a multi-generational Mohawk strategy for survival in turbulent times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At Tonawanda, it is said that Sagoyewatha (Red Jacket) was appointed chief of the Beaver Clan, but because of his actions, the title was removed not only from him but also from the clan. A gifted orator, he was speaker for the council fire at Buffalo Creek, and also occasionally for the women, but there are few references to him as a chief. Instead, he is often referred to as a speaker, and occasionally as a Pine Tree Chief.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lately, the Confederacy has been reluctant to appoint Pine Tree Chiefs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Local or Village Chiefs&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Peacemaker arrived, the leaders he met were all local or village chiefs. In creating the League, he &amp;quot;raised them up&amp;quot; to be leaders not only of their own village or nation but of all the nations together. However, it is clear that the villages were administered not as dictatorships but as democracies, with councils held among families, clans, and all the people, and also among men and women, to make necessary decisions. Each town or village had &amp;quot;chiefs&amp;quot; for specific purposes: there would be people who would be &amp;quot;chiefs&amp;quot; of certain ceremonies or societies; &amp;quot;war chiefs&amp;quot; and probably &amp;quot;chiefs&amp;quot; for fishing or hunting. Though the fifty men whose names became permanent titles of the Haudenosaunee were often called &amp;quot;the chiefs,&amp;quot; in fact the institution of &amp;quot;village chief&amp;quot; for local purposes continued.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The use of the English word &amp;quot;chief&amp;quot; to describe several quite different kinds of Haudenosaunee leaders had added a layer to the confusion. To distinguish the rotiyanershon from others, the Algonkian word &amp;quot;sachem&amp;quot; began to be used in the seventeenth century. Confederacy chiefs, Pine Tree Chiefs, local chiefs, including local &amp;quot;life chiefs&amp;quot;—the actual authority of the individuals led to confusion, at first among the Europeans who met them, and eventually among the Haudenosaunee themselves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It appears that, historically, when a new village was created (as distinct from an existing village moving to a new location), a local council was created that reflected the clan and family makeup of the community. That way, every part of the community would have a voice in its council. Thus, the mainly Mohawk community of Akwesasne had nine chiefs for the three Mohawk clans (Turtle, Bear, and Wolf) from its founding in 1749 to the arrival of the Onondagas from Oswegatchie, when three more chiefs were added to reflect the Snipe and Deer clans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Morgan suggested that the local chiefs originated later than the formation of the Confederacy, but that local chiefs and Pine Tree Chiefs were similar:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the power of the Ho-de-no-sau-nee began to develop, under the new system of oligarchies within an oligarchy, there sprang up around the sachems a class of warriors, distinguished for enterprise upon the war-path and eloquence in council, who demanded some participation in the administration of public affairs. The serious objection to the enlargement of the number of rulers, involving, as it did, changes in the framework of the government, for a long period enabled the sachems to resist the encroachment. In the progress of events, this class became too powerful to be withstood, and the sachems were compelled to raise them up in the subordinate station of chiefs. The title was purely elective, and the reward of merit. Unlike the sachemships, the name was not hereditary in the tribe or family of the individual, but terminated with the chief himself; unless subsequently bestowed by the tribe upon some other person, to preserve it as one of their illustrious names. These chiefs were originally invested with very limited powers, their principal office being that of advisers and counsellors of the sachems. Having thus obtained a foothold in the government, this class, to the number of which there was no limit, gradually enlarged their influence, and from generation to generation drew nearer to an equality with the sachems themselves. By this innovation the government was liberalized, to the sensible diminution of the power of the sachems, which, at the institution of the League, was extremely arbitrary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the institution of this office, the stability of the government was increased rather than diminished. In their own figurative enunciation of the idea, the chiefs served as braces in the Long House—an apt expression of the place they occupied in their political structure. It furnished a position and a reward for the ambitious, and the means of allaying discontent, without changing the ruling body. In this particular, the oligarchy of the Iroquois appears to have enjoyed some superiority over those of antiquity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The chiefs in each gens were usually proportioned to the number of its members. Among the Seneca-Iroquois there is one chief for about every fifty persons. They now number in New York some three thousand, and have eight sachems and about sixty chiefs. There are reasons for supposing that the proportionate number is now greater than in former times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The same method of election and confirmation [as for a sachem] existed with respect to the office of chief, and for the same reasons. But a general council was never convened to raise up chiefs below the grade of a sachem. They awaited the time when sachems were invested.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other famous Pine Tree Chiefs include Anadahes Frederick Ogilvie Loft, a Wolf Clan Mohawk from the Grand River Territory who in 1920 founded the League of Indians of Canada and became its first president. The league was the direct ancestor of the National Indian Brotherhood and the Assembly of First Nations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Maintenance and Renewal&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A bark longhouse had a life span similar to a human generation. Towards the end of that time, it would become necessary to prop it up from the outside with poles. That was taken as a sign that it was time to begin to look for a new site for the village, and to begin clearing the land there. Bark houses required maintenance and renewal: water, wind, insects, ice, and time would wear away their sturdiness and comfort.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Similarly, the League and the law required periodic renewal, to keep them fresh in the minds of the people. Newhouse made it a precise obligation: &amp;quot;Every five years the Five Nations Confederate Lords and the people shall assemble together and shall ask one another if their minds are still in the same spirit of unity for the Great Binding Law and if any of the Five Nations shall not pledge continuance and steadfastness to the pledge of unity then the Great Binding Law shall dissolve.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Maintaining the longhouse, architecturally, did not mean replacing any part of its framework: the posts that formed its core remained in place throughout the life of the building. Cedar posts did not rot. The bark shingles would be replaced regularly. This made it easy for people to understand that the trappings of the constitution could be changed, while its core architecture must remain constant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Propping up the longhouse from the outside became the metaphor for those nations that would &amp;quot;support the League&amp;quot; without coming inside it for shelter. On wampum belts, the commitment of these nations was symbolized by diagonal lines, leaning like supporting poles. Once the Tuscaroras were brought into the house, it was said that they had propped up the house from the inside—just as adding rafters would strengthen the structure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Amendment: Adding to the Rafters&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Confederacy was formed, the Senecas were the westernmost nation; the Mohawks were at the Eastern Door; the communities of each nation were not far from one another, in clusters. The population was small enough that each citizen had direct contact with the people who spoke in council.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today, the Mohawks are still at the Eastern Door—at least, those of Kahnawake, Kanehsatake, and Akwesasne are. But there are also Mohawk communities at the Bay of Quinte, the Grand River, and Wahta. The Oneidas in New York are west of the three eastern Mohawk communities—but there are also Oneidas at the Grand River, on the Thames River, and in Wisconsin. The Onondagas are evenly split between those who remain at Onondaga and those on the Grand River. The Cayugas are in New York but also on the Grand River and in Oklahoma. The Senecas are in New York, on the Grand River, and in Oklahoma.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nor are the chiefs&#039; titles spread around evenly or equitably. Some communities claim all the titles belonging to a nation; some have none.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the principle of the law is that everyone should have a voice in council, then there is room for constitutional adjustment. The Peacemaker recognized that change should be possible within the structures he had created: he called it &amp;quot;adding to the rafters&amp;quot;—indeed, amendment would be necessary as the peace expanded: &amp;quot;This is then just what should happen: namely that we should afterward join additional roof poles to the framework (*hosedwawanahsdahso&#039;den*), &#039;great sooty black rafters&#039; (by amendment to the structure of our government).&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basic principles would remain as constant as the architecture, though the size of the house might evolve.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Few versions of the Kayanerenkó:wa explain how &amp;quot;adding to the rafters&amp;quot; shall take place, but each version confirms that change is possible and contemplated. Amending a constitution is difficult enough in most nations, whether it is to be accomplished by a referendum, by high levels of approval in the legislature, or by approval from the legislature of another nation. The Peacemaker brought a message from the Creator: even while acknowledging the intention to allow change consistent with the architecture of the law, many are reluctant, as mere humans, to tamper with the details of the law. Whereas the Peacemaker had the self-confidence of an artist, modern generations of Haudenosaunee have the hesitancy and reluctance of restorers—the reticence of those who are following in the path of the great. As a result, the evolution of the Kayanerenkó:wa tends to be more organic than deliberate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furthermore, modern Haudenosaunee lawmakers tend to be conservatives. That is, they are conservative in their adherence to tradition and their resistance to change. Not only do they see Haudenosaunee principles and values as constant—they are also concerned that any change at all is likely to be a step towards assimilation into the Euro-American societies of the United States and Canada. As a result, instead of seeing change—adding to the rafters—as a vehicle for adaptation, they see maintaining tradition as a vehicle of resistance to assimilation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are those who would insist that, since the Peacemaker was a messenger from the Creator, it would take another messenger from the Creator to bring any significant constitutional change. These people are supported in their position by a view that Skanaiatariio, Handsome Lake, was just such a messenger, bringing visions and prescriptions for Haudenosaunee conduct in a time of rapid social, economic, and technological change. Since new messages are possible—indeed, many believe that a fourth and final message is due soon—tinkering with the constitution by mere humans should not be permitted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any constitution that is a &amp;quot;fixed canon&amp;quot; created in a &amp;quot;constitutional moment&amp;quot; rather than organically, over time (like the British constitution, which, while mostly written, is not contained in a single document) creates a tendency towards &amp;quot;ancestor worship,&amp;quot; a retrospective view that attributes wisdom and prescience to the founders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This resistance to change by &amp;quot;traditionalists&amp;quot; manifests itself most obviously in terms of a resistance rather than an adaptation to new technology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Four kinds of constitutional or governmental changes have swept the Haudenosaunee in the past century and a half.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One kind of change, exemplified best by the &amp;quot;Seneca Nation of Indians,&amp;quot; involves a movement within the people themselves to adopt a constitution that abandons the Kayanerenkó:wa and adopts the forms and values of the governments of the United States or Canada. In each case, though, there are people in the community who recognize and sustain the Confederacy and its laws.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A second kind of change, exemplified best by the experience at the Six Nations Grand River Territory, involves the imposition of a system of local government chosen by elections and created and authorized by external laws.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A third kind of change, reflected in the operations of the Oneida Nation of New York, maintains aspects of traditional structures (a &amp;quot;Men&#039;s Council,&amp;quot; for example) while breaking away from the Kayanerenkó:wa itself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth kind of change—apparently the hardest to accomplish—is within the law, maintaining its spirit and intent, and adapting it to reflect the needs of modern Haudenosaunee communities. The best example of this is the determination of the Grand Council in 1998 that there should be only fifty rotiyanershon in all the Confederacy, and that negotiations should occur within each of the nations to ensure that the benches were filled and that each of the communities had a clear voice in the government of the Haudenosaunee. This decision was clearly conservative: it marked a return to the original terms of the law rather than a recognition of &amp;quot;duplication of titles&amp;quot; that was leading to the existence of &amp;quot;two confederacies&amp;quot;—one in Canada, one in the United States. There had been a belief, especially among some on the American side, that a royá:ner&#039;s &amp;quot;horns got caught in the bushes at the border,&amp;quot; so that he would only be a chief in the country in which his own community was located, and this would justify duplications of titles. The Grand Council decision refuted this. As a statement of intended unity, it was consistent with the values that the Peacemaker expressed. Implementation has been more difficult than anticipated: no individual nation has resolved its issues, and allocation of titles has become a new source of friction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Prophecy: Things Will Go Wrong&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The great Haudenosaunee narratives contain predictions that may be warnings or may simply be explanations of how things will end. In the Creation story, the end of days is dire:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Long before the end, you will see that the things upon which you live will gradually decrease in quantity, all the things on earth that grow will become weaker, and finally it will happen that nothing more can grow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The same will happen to the animals and the birds. They will also grow fewer in number until at some future time you will see no more of them. And at that time awe-inspiring things will happen. There will be earthquakes and things which have great power which now abide in the earth will come forth and they will be more powerful than human beings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Compared to those calamities, the future difficulties of the Confederacy, as predicted by the Peacemaker, seem benign:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereafter Tekanawita said: This is what else I ordain. It may happen in future that something is going to impoverish them, it wasting their land; or it may happen that perhaps someone will roll their heads somewhere, and he, walking along, a man, will observe, their heads rolling along, and thereupon the man may say, &amp;quot;Indeed, now it serves them right, they of the League,&amp;quot; and kick the heads. Thereupon he may say, &amp;quot;In the past, in our former days, they used to have power and they used to be proud of their strength.&amp;quot; Thereupon the man will pass through and he will not have gone far, before he will vomit blood, for it is still possible for it to punish him for kicking his League&#039;s head.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereupon Tekanawita said, &amp;quot;This is what it means, &#039;their heads will roll, they of the League.&#039; If the Five Nations make a mistake where they have their families, then they will disperse, some going towards the east, some going towards the west, some going towards the south, some going towards the north; thus, the families will scatter, and the several nations will live all over the Island, and nowhere can one find space to live and multiply, for they won&#039;t make space for them and give them shelter, the individual families. If it happens that they do shelter them, it won&#039;t be long before those living there will begin to abuse them, eventually forcing them to leave their settlement, and the reason why they will do this is that they have never accepted the League&#039;s Great Law and Peace; this is what they will see, our grandchildren, should it happen that they don&#039;t watch out, the chiefs of the League.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereupon, Tekanawita said, &amp;quot;Moreover, I decree that if this is what will happen to the coming generations, if they are going to be impoverished, our grandchildren, then these chiefs are to look for the very biggest tree, the large elm, which is tall and has huge branches and roots, all of them extending equally into the depths, and if they find such a large tree with long branches and roots extending equally deep, they will have good luck in generations to come, our grandchildren; in that place they will collect their heads, all of the nations of our League, all of us will place our heads there, and there we will hide our heads as long as it will last, the earth which is beneath the sun. This is where it will again be possible for them to be happy for they will continue to hold on to that which protects the group, that is, the Good Message and the Power and the Peace and the Great Law; there the fire will be rekindled, our fire of our League which will keep burning and the smoke that will keep rising, piercing the sky, and again it will be able to help them at our various smoking fireplaces whose smoke is piercing the sky, where all of us share our beliefs.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereupon Tekanawita said: &amp;quot;Now we have completed our task. This, again, will help them, the families of our League.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The chiefs&#039; heads rolling around is a symbol of their inability to make decisions or to bring their minds together. Another symbol used in this part of the law, with the same meaning, is that the chiefs will shuffle their feet in indecision under their benches.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is said that during the time of the American Revolution, the settlers had so crowded the Haudenosaunee, especially in the east, and had abused them so much, that the Grand River Territory was the fulfillment of the Peacemaker&#039;s prophecy—and so the fire of the League was rekindled there, with all the titles and all the families settling along the banks of the river. There they had found the Great Swamp Elm to which the Peacemaker had referred.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reality is more complex, and a crucial period of Haudenosaunee history has been poorly studied and often misinterpreted. William Fenton concluded that the council fire at Onondaga was extinguished—permanently put out—and that marked the end of the Confederacy. He viewed subsequent Haudenosaunee governments as illegitimate, and maintained that the League and Confederacy came to an end. James Deane, an enemy of the Haudenosaunee, whose instructions to negotiators at Fort Stanwix in 1784 were to intimidate and insult the chiefs, declared the Confederacy dead: &amp;quot;But as the heads of the Confederacy had now declared themselves so fully upon the subject, they now let go their Hold of peace; extinguished the Council Fire, sunk the Tree of Peace into the Earth and caused a total Darkness to overspread the Confederacy.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, Haudenosaunee tradition and action point to a different conclusion, based on resilience, pragmatism, and necessity. Samuel Kirkland, a missionary to the Oneidas, refuted this premature death: he wrote on January 19, 1776: &amp;quot;The dissolving their Body-politic, or extinguishing the Council Fire at Onondaga, is only a pretext by which they will repair to Niagara and then to renew their ancient Covenant with the British King. I apprehend it will be wise and politic for you to perform the ceremony of condolence and replace those sachems and thereby rekindle the capital fire of the Six Nations.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fire at Onondaga was &amp;quot;covered over,&amp;quot; not extinguished. The council fire of the Confederacy was rekindled for a while—from 1784 to 1838—at Buffalo Creek. Buffalo Creek—halfway between the new Grand River Territory in Upper Canada and the remaining unsurrendered Seneca territory—was also large enough to be a central council fire. However, there was internal dissension, including an ugly confrontation between Handsome Lake on one hand and Farmer&#039;s Brother, Cornplanter, and Red Jacket on the other—and eventually the fire at Onondaga was rekindled, and an arrangement was made for what seemed to be a &amp;quot;two-headed&amp;quot; confederacy, with one part dealing with the British and one dealing with the United States. The wampums were divided according to how they would be most useful (some minor individual belts may have been &amp;quot;split&amp;quot; into two), with the belts recording agreements with the United States remaining at Onondaga, and the belts with the British at the Grand River.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Condolence has given the Haudenosaunee a means of healing rifts and hard feelings. The split in the Confederacy has occurred several times in the past two centuries, usually when the neighbours are at war and draw the warriors into the conflict. After the French capitulation at Montreal in 1760, there was a separate council at Kahnawake, in which the Mohawks who had accompanied the British Army invited the people of Kahnawake, Kanehsatake, Akwesasne, and Oswegatchie to reunite as formerly, and become one people again. The invitation was accepted, and the one Confederacy restored. The American Revolutionary War saw Oneidas side with the rebels and Mohawks side with the Tories, and eventually Seneca, Onondaga, and Cayuga communities, seeking neutrality, were attacked in the Sullivan-Clinton campaign of 1779 and sided with the British. After the war, though, there was reconciliation and reunification. In the War of 1812, there were Oneida and Tuscarora fighters on the American side, and people from the Grand River (at Queenston Heights, Chippewa, and Beaver Dams) and the eastern Mohawk communities (at Chateauguay, Chrysler&#039;s Farm, and Beaver Dams) fighting for the British. In 1815, when peace was announced, the two sides came together, condoled, and reunited. The Condolence serves as the formal record of that accord, as it serves as formal evidence that a person is indeed a royá:ner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is useful to think of Haudenosaunee communities as an archipelago, their people navigating between these islands of culture, history, ecology, language, and law. There is constant communication. As the Government of Canada learned the hard way in 1990, in a crisis, the people come together without regard to boundaries or political leanings. In dealings with other Indigenous nations and with the nation-states of the world, there is no doubt that the Haudenosaunee still exist, and that the institutions created by their laws still function. Nevertheless, there is also erosion of culture, values, institutions, and law. The Peacemaker&#039;s warnings are never far from people&#039;s minds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of what the Peacemaker did in designing the law was immediate and remedial, and dealt with the challenges of his times—yet the reference to the chiefs&#039; heads rolling around, and the people seeking the great swamp elm, is prophecy. It is also a warning: anyone who shows disrespect for the League will suffer. More literally, anyone who kicks the chiefs when they are down will vomit blood and die:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It may be that after the lapse of time, some person may come and will see this Root (or, one of these Roots) extending along, and seeing that it is a Root beautiful beyond measure, will raise his hatchet and will strike it into the Root—blood will flow from the Root, we all shall feel it. Whenever we have felt this, we shall know that he who has struck his hatchet into the Root does not desire to receive the Great Law. Then we will look and we shall see the lack of the retreating culprit, and before he has gone far something occult and supernatural will happen to him, for blood shall come forth from his mouth, and there will be yet power to repeat this mystic stroke upon him.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the very end, when the chiefs in council can no longer agree, when the League&#039;s affairs diminish, and when the chiefs are constantly making mistakes, a white meteor will descend and remove the Great Law as a source of dispute. The earth will open up and &amp;quot;their feet will dangle over the edge.&amp;quot; At that time, &amp;quot;the chiefs of the League no longer control their Power and Peace and it is impossible for them to save the people, and really the only one who will be able to save the people, the only one able to do it, will be the Creator, the one who has created all things on earth.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Is this dire warning a certainty? No: the Peacemaker follows it with another prediction—that the League will last as long as the matters of the natural world:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These shall last as long as the earth exists, and as long as they are going to grow, the grasses and also the various weeds, and as long as the shrubs keep growing wild, the various shrubs, and as long as they keep growing wild, the trees, all kinds of trees, and as long as springs emerge the water of the rivers will keep flowing, also the large rivers and the various lakes; and as long as the sun keeps rising and setting and the moon keeps up its phases, and in the sky the stars do the same, and the wind is stirring on the land, and heavenly bodies continue to provide light by day and by night; thus, it shall last, the task we are completing, the Great Law, and these two shall co-operate, the earthly land and the other one, the heavenly land.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nevertheless, the earth is warming. Its climate is becoming more extreme. Many of the people on the move today are not economic migrants: they are climate refugees. Their homes are being eaten by droughts and floods, and by wars that were spawned by droughts and floods. The anger and sorrow of the people of the earth are intensifying. The trees are dying from the tops down, as Haudenosaunee prophecies have warned. We all need condoling and compassion, for we are one family.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; And in the End . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As a legal system, the Kayanerenkó:wa is too complex to be described in a single volume. Its principles are distinctive and pragmatic enough that they deserve study and can withstand careful scrutiny. They are not a historical curiosity: above all, they are *alive.*&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
John Ralston Saul has suggested that the Canadian tendency to seek consensus rather than confrontation originates in an extensive colonial and Canadian experience with Indigenous peoples and processes. The United States Congress acknowledges a debt to the Haudenosaunee in the thinking behind its own constitution, the system of checks and balances that, it is hoped, will prevent any single branch of the government from gaining abusive power over the others. These would be significant contributions, but there are other aspects of Haudenosaunee constitutional thought that are also worth emulating. Protection for the environment; respect for women; consideration of impacts on future generations; maintaining peace through long-term relationships; a system for resolving concerns before they become disputes—all contribute to a viable alternative to short-term political confrontations. Against fierce odds, the Haudenosaunee way of thought and law has survived. Its contemporary challenges, from within and without, come in the form of individualism (David Newhouse spoke glowingly of &amp;quot;the Borg of capitalism&amp;quot;) and a desire for prosperity that tumbles into greed; of cultural, linguistic and institutional loss, the legacy of generations of deliberate and collateral assimilation policies; of simple human weaknesses. Indeed, the world is a cruel place for small peoples. Nevertheless, the &amp;quot;Confederacy culture&amp;quot; that Sotsisowah John Mohawk spoke of is more than an ember. Its carriers are convinced that their stewardship is worthwhile.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On May 6, 1993, speaking to the Canadian Royal Commission on Aboriginal Peoples, Otsitsaken:ra Charles Patton of Kahnawa:ke explained: &amp;quot;We are the ones that are living on the earth today; right at this time. We are the ones that are carrying the responsibility of our nations, of our spirituality, of our relationship with the Creator, on our shoulders. We have the mandate to carry that today, at this moment in time. Our languages, our spirituality and everything that we are was given to us and was carried before us by our ancestors, our grandparents who have passed on. When they couldn&#039;t carry it any longer and they went to join that spirit world, they handed it to us and they said: &#039;Now you are the real ones. You have to carry it.&#039; Now they are in the spirit world. They are our past. Now we have a responsibility to carry that because we hear seven generations in the future. They are our future. They are ones that are not yet born.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the 1990s, the councils began to permit my colleagues and me to use the principles of the law in our negotiations with other governments. We were dealing with municipalities, provincial bodies, state and federal agencies. Many were unfamiliar with Haudenosaunee ways, and we often found that they were the most eager to learn, and the most open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We would give thanks together, at the beginning and end of each meeting. That would reaffirm our common humanity, and remind us of our humble place in this provident world.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When we sometimes opened our first meetings with the compassion of the Three Bare Words, more often than not those words would cause our counterparts to shed tears.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We insisted on equality and reciprocity as integral to respect. Respect, we understood, was the first element of any effective relationship. The Covenant Chain consists of three links—respect, trust, and friendship—and like any Haudenosaunee concept, there is an order to them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Across the negotiating fire, as in council, we would sincerely ask: How can we help you?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We insisted that we eat together.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We would not meet when we were tired, or after dark, or when our minds were burdened by sorrow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We sincerely sought to transform adversaries into allies, enemies into friends.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We understood that lasting good would come from establishing relationships, not from single transactions. We would keep our eyes on the long term, and sincerely consider the impact of our work on future generations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We took care to explain the thinking that accompanies the customs, and sometimes we were able to bring out the original wampum belts that preserve the principles and commitments, to strengthen our explanations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With growing confidence, we were uplifted by the power and certainty of the law, exhilarated that it works, powerfully, as it always has, and by the knowledge that we were part of a continuum, a tradition of skén:nen, ka&#039;nikonhrí:yo, ka&#039;satsténshsera that originated centuries ago and, with care, will endure into the future.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Closing&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . . we have completed all matters that follow in the family through the generations,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and these shall last as long as the earth exists,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and as long as they are going to grow,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
the grasses and also the various weeds,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and as long as the shrubs keep growing wild, the various shrubs,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and as long as they keep growing wild, the trees, all kinds of trees,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and as long as springs emerge the waters of rivers will keep flowing;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
also the large rivers and the various lakes;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and as long as the sun keeps rising and setting;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and the moon keeps up its phases,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and in the sky the stars do the same,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and the wind is stirring on the land,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and heavenly bodies continue to provide light by day and by night,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
thus, it shall last.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>The Phantom Bull</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=Library:A_Basic_Call_to_Consciousness_by_the_Akwesasne_Notes_editorial_staff_of_the_Mohawk_Nation&amp;diff=91811</id>
		<title>Library:A Basic Call to Consciousness by the Akwesasne Notes editorial staff of the Mohawk Nation</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=Library:A_Basic_Call_to_Consciousness_by_the_Akwesasne_Notes_editorial_staff_of_the_Mohawk_Nation&amp;diff=91811"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T23:45:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;The Phantom Bull: I created a library page for the book A Basic Call to Consciousness by the Akwesasne Notes editorial staff of the Mohawk Nation.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Library work|title=A Basic Call to Consciousness|author=The Akwesasne Notes editorial staff of the Mohawk Nation|publisher=Summertown, TN : Book Pub. Co.|published_date=1991|type=Book|isbn=091399023X&lt;br /&gt;
9780913990230|pdf=https://vdoc.pub/documents/basic-call-to-consciouness-2fb0pk8k6hlg}}{{Foreword|foreword=The contents of this book were automatically transcribed into a docx format, which contained many incorrect glyphs and unusable formatting. DeepSeek was used to clean up the text and convert it into plaintext that could be posted on ProleWiki, so if there are any errors, please reach out to the ProleWiki editor team, so that we can correct the errors.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;#&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Basic Call to Consciousness&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;**&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;Edited by Akwesasne Notes**&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;**&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;Native Voices**&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;**&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;Summertown, Tennessee**&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;**&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;Copyright 1978, 1981, 2005 by Akwesasne Notes, Mohawk Nation, via Rooseveltown, N.Y.**&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Native Voices, a div. of Book Publishing Company&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
P. O. Box 99&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Summertown, TN 38483&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Printed in Canada&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
09 08 07 06 05 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
14 13 12 11 10&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;ISBN 1-57067-159-1&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;##&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Contents&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Introduction *John Mohawk* 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Preamble *Chief Oren Lyons* 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee: A Nation Since Time Immemorial *Segwalise* 26&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thoughts of Peace: The Great Law *Sotsisowah* 31&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deskaheh: An Iroquois Patriot&#039;s Fight for International Recognition 40&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Last Speech of Deskaheh 48&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Geneva, 1977: A Report on the Hemispheric Movement of Indigenous Peoples *José Barreiro* 55&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Basic Call to Consciousness: The Haudenosaunee Address to the Western World&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Introduction 60&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Spiritualism, the Highest Form of Political Consciousness 85&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- The Obvious Fact of Our Continuing Existence 92&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Policies of Oppression in the Name of &amp;quot;Democracy&amp;quot; 103&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our Strategy for Survival *Sotsisowah* 119&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Afterword: Indigenous into the 21st Century *José Barreiro* 126&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Acknowledgments 132&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notes 133&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sources 145&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Index 151&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;##&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Introduction&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;John Mohawk*&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It was during the era of the administration of President John F. Kennedy, an era that saw some of the highest tensions between the United States and the Soviet Union, that the issue of civil rights gained traction in American politics and opened the way for the U.S. civil rights legislation of the 1960s.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Civil Rights Movement reverberated around the world. At about the same time, American Indians began demanding rights of a somewhat different nature. African-Americans had been denied full rights as citizens, were widely segregated in ghettos, had poor access to education or job training, and suffered discriminatory hiring practices. In many places, people would not sell them housing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
American Indian nations, on the other hand, once had owned the entire continent, but had been attacked and/or swindled out of most of their properties and most of the practical rights of nationhood. They demanded &amp;quot;Indian rights,&amp;quot; which were much more collective and probably even more unpopular in white America than were the African-American demands. By the late 1960s, however, they were beginning to make headway.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indian tribes that had treaties guaranteeing them fishing rights in the Pacific Northwest challenged state laws prohibiting Indian fishing in violation of those treaties. The Columbia River became a scene of Indian demonstrations and arrests and eventually led to a court case in which Indian rights were at least somewhat upheld. This led to a backlash movement among some whites who wanted to pass legislation to end treaty rights, and the re-energized Indian movement mobilized to defend treaty rights. There was a historic demonstration at Alcatraz Island, at which Indians called attention to the centuries of abuses of their rights, and demonstrations in California, Oregon, Minnesota, and other places about land claims.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1968 in Minnesota, the American Indian Movement (AIM) was formed. It initially became a force for the rights of urban Indigenous people, but soon it gained national attention. The stated goals of AIM were to defend Indian sovereignty and advance Indian rights causes. Their constituency included people in Indian Country and in urban settings. Richard Oakes, a Mohawk college student, helped organize a demonstration occupation of an abandoned prison complex on Alcatraz Island in northern California. It garnered considerable publicity and became a touchstone for Native activists from across the continent. The occupation began on November 20, 1969, and continued for approximately nineteen months.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Around the country, Indians mounted protests and demonstrations demanding treaty rights and land returns and opposing encroachment by non-Indians on Indian land. Some of these demonstrations reached the Haudenosaunee Country where people opposed non-Indian encroachment on a trailer court at Tuscarora and, more famously, opposed widening a road at Route 81 on the Onondaga Territory. The mood in Indian Country was that there would be no further loss of land, not even a little land for widening a highway.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
American Indian Movement activists joined Indian rights activists nationally in raising an alarm that Indian ways were declining and Indian people were generally rendered powerless and in a state of abject poverty, especially on their lands. There was something of a national cultural revitalization and a concurrent complaint that there was a crisis in leadership in Indian Country, because the leaders had become co-opted by the U.S. government and non-Indian culture and could not see or act on Indian interests. Generations of colonization had taken their toll and had left Indian Country with leaders who seemed primarily interested in collecting federal grant money and not in exercising sovereignty. This was a message that came to resonate widely across Indian Country.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1972, a wide coalition of activists, including members of the American Indian Movement, organized a march on Washington to protest the treatment of Indians and to urge reforms of the Bureau of Indian Affairs. The event was dubbed the &amp;quot;Trail of Broken Treaties,&amp;quot; and hundreds of Indians initially made their way to Washington in October 1972, days before the presidential election. When building security tried to evict the demonstrators while negotiations went on in the main offices, the security forces were driven from the building and an occupation of a federal building in the capital—said to be the first since the War of 1812—ensued. The occupation lasted from November 3 to November 9, but the energy in Indian Country was rising, and during the winter of 1973, a small force of AIM supporters and local activists declared the historic village of Wounded Knee, site of a horrific massacre in 1890, as sovereign territory. The occupiers were surrounded by a military force, and an ensuing standoff lasted seventy-three days and resulted in Indian fatalities due to gunfire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1974, the International Indian Treaty Council (IITC) was organized and held its first national meeting at Wakpala on the Standing Rock Sioux Territory in North Dakota. IITC was organized to provide a platform to pursue the rights of Indigenous peoples under international law. After almost two hundred years, the United States, and most of the other nations of the Western Hemisphere, had failed to give meaningful recognition to the rights of a continued existence as a distinct people to any of the Indigenous peoples. Many who were involved in the Indian rights struggle felt that the nation states were hampered by a phenomenon known as the &amp;quot;tyranny of the majority&amp;quot; and would never be able to recognize even the rights bestowed by treaty. A partial remedy—but only one of many—would be the pursuit of the principles of indigenous rights under international law. It was acknowledged that international law had no enforcement powers, but it was felt that the so-called &amp;quot;civilized&amp;quot; nations of the world were generally embarrassed when their behaviors fell beneath the world standards for the treatment of individuals and peoples, and that the indigenous voice was an important and necessary part of the process of discussion around such principles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The IITC was one of several groups that approached the NGOs—the Non-Governmental Organizations of the United Nations—with a proposal to explore the creation of a process to recognize the rights of Indigenous nations, peoples, and individuals. It was a historic undertaking. It wasn&#039;t until early in 1977, when word reached the Grand Council of the Haudenosaunee, located at Onondaga in central New York, that the NGOs were willing to host a meeting. They had sent forward a request for response papers detailing the economic, legal, and social realities of the various Indigenous nations. Although the Iroquois Confederacy is composed of six member nations—the Mohawk, Oneida, Onondaga, Cayuga, Seneca and Tuscarora—the Confederacy acts as a single nation in response to such international requests.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The call for papers was duly discussed. Three individuals were chosen and each was asked to author one of the papers. When finished, the papers would be presented to the Haudenosaunee Grand Council, which would then make alterations and additions and produce a final draft. I was privileged to be chosen to write one of the papers. When the council reconvened, one of the other two individuals who had an assignment reported he would not be able to finish it. I had already finished the assignment I had, and the Council asked if I would be able to do the second paper. I did. The next meeting the third individual reported that he would be unable to complete his paper, and I was asked to write the third paper. Thus I authored the three position papers that appeared in *Akwesasne Notes* and later in *Basic Call to Consciousness.*&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I did not go to Geneva in 1977 because we had a newspaper to run.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Daniel Bomberry, the Cayuga-Salish man whose father came from the Grand River Country, attended the meeting and took photographs, many of which appeared in *Akwesasne Notes* and editions of *Basic Call.* José Barreiro, who was co-editor of the *Notes*, wrote an exciting account of some important moments at the meeting. When the meeting was over, and we looked at all the material we had, we realized that we had a small book. *Akwesasne Notes* had long before published a short pamphlet on the life of Deskaheh, the Cayuga chief who had gone to Europe to argue against the British military invasion and occupation and disgraceful overthrow of the traditional government at Grand River in 1924. We added the pamphlet to the other material, and a first edition of *Basic Call to Consciousness* appeared in 1978.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The book, or at least significant parts of it, has been translated into many languages. For me, the most edifying feedback was an account I heard from Indian rights activists who met in Washington, DC, in 1980. An individual approached me and explained that *Basic Call to Consciousness* had been translated into Portuguese, and a group had carried the book to Indian communities across Brazil and had read it to the rainforest Indians. He said these Indians thoroughly enjoyed hearing it and stated that it represented their own thoughts and feelings. Nothing that has happened before or since ever brought the satisfaction of that conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;##&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Preamble&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;Chief Oren Lyons*&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Why are you here?&amp;quot; a Swiss official of the customs and immigration asked. &amp;quot;Are you real red Indians?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;From the storybooks?&amp;quot; I answered with a question. He was taken aback by the thought. He was uncertain and didn&#039;t reply. We looked at each other, both for the first time. He slowly nodded in agreement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Perhaps,&amp;quot; he said. At that moment we both realized that this was going to be a long encounter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indeed we were &amp;quot;real.&amp;quot; Our presence—with our bright colors, ribbons, long hair, and feathers—at once reinforced stereotypes. At the same time, he was not prepared for the intense and intelligent challenge in our eyes. That was the context of our arrival in Europe in 1977. It was obvious to each of us that there would be a lot to learn from both camps, and so began our journey.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; How Did We Get There?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deskaheh, a Cayuga chief from the Six Nation Territory in Ohsweken, Ontario, Canada, traveled to Geneva in 1923 to register a complaint before the League of Nations. His complaint was against Canada for unilateral interference and removal of the governing body of traditional chiefs of the Haudenosaunee. His mission was blocked by Great Britain, which was the protectorate, as Canada was within the British Empire. However, Deskaheh did raise the support of other nations, and the Labor Party sponsored a public hearing in Geneva that continues to resonate even now. Deskaheh forged the trail for Indigenous nations today.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How we came to arrive in Geneva in 1977 is a long story. The stories of the many Indigenous delegations who journeyed to Geneva in 1977 are essentially the same, because our oppressors are the same and share the same institutions and purpose: to gain our lands and control their resources. We owe our survival to the political will and spiritual integrity of our grandfathers and grandmothers and Indigenous nations and peoples wherever they may be.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the Indigenous peoples of the Western Hemisphere, the landfall of Christopher Columbus brought disease, chaos, and catastrophe. Our oppression has been relentless, fueled by the greed of our brothers from Europe for God, glory, and gold. Sitting Bull, a Lakota patriot and spiritual leader, said &amp;quot;They kept but one promise. They promised to take our lands and they took them.&amp;quot; How did they accomplish this? Simply by declaration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Columbus sailed armed with not only cannons but with the Inter Caetera Bulls of Pope Nicholas V (Bulls *Dum Diversas*, 1452, and *Romanus Pontifex*, 1455) and Pope Alexander VI (1492 and *Inter Caetera*, 1493).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These Inter Caetera Bulls evolved quickly into a &amp;quot;doctrine of discovery&amp;quot; that became institutionalized into the Law of Nations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indigenous peoples native to North, Central, and South America were instantly disenfranchised by these racist declarations. We were stigmatized as &amp;quot;heathens,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;pagans,&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;barbarous infidels,&amp;quot; uncivilized and incapable of rational thought. But above all, we were not Christians. Using these self-serving declarations, the European Christians moved rapidly to establish Christian dominion over the entire Western Hemisphere. Indigenous peoples were designated as part of the flora and fauna and granted only the right of occupancy in our own lands. Because of this great conspiracy, Indigenous peoples have not been considered equals in the world of humanity. The Law of Nations decreed that any lands &amp;quot;discovered&amp;quot; by a Christian nation first secured the title. Other Christian nations must respect the right of &amp;quot;first discovery.&amp;quot; Further, if no Christians were living there, the lands were declared &amp;quot;empty,&amp;quot; *terra nullius*, open for the taking, regardless of Native populations inhabiting it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Law of Nations forever displaced Indigenous peoples in our own lands. The &amp;quot;doctrine of discovery&amp;quot; doomed us to centuries of merciless and tragic struggles that continue to the present. That&#039;s why we went to Geneva in 1977, and that&#039;s why states continue to refuse to recognize our right to self-determination today.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We came with the hope that we would find enlightened people with a sense of justice. Naively, we thought if people heard our truths that they would help correct these great injustices. We learned differently. We had exchanged one field of battle for another. We discovered that the conspiracy of 1492 continues today.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The five hundredth anniversary of the &amp;quot;discovery&amp;quot; of the Americas came and went, and the Roman Catholic Church adamantly refused to apologize to Indigenous peoples for the murders and suffering they caused in the name of God. I wonder if they at least apologized to God.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Indigenous peoples of the Americas saw the United Nations as a beacon of fairness and justice. We had read the 1948 Universal Declaration of Human Rights, and we considered ourselves human beings with those rights. We put a lot of faith in the principles espoused by the United Nations. We had great hopes and high expectations. We believed that people of authority and influence would respond to the outrages visited upon our peoples over the centuries. We didn&#039;t see the differences between invitations from the international non-governmental organizations (NGOs) and the member states of the United Nations. All we knew was that we were invited to the UN in Geneva to enter grievances and speak our minds. This news reverberated throughout Indian Country in the Americas. At last hope and the opportunity to speak on our own behalf. It was a historical moment, a watershed event that has affected millions of lives around the globe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These events did not occur in a vacuum. The sixties and seventies were decades of action in Indian Country. Drugs were a part of the war in Vietnam and the &amp;quot;scene&amp;quot; in America. The war in Vietnam was in full swing, creating an energy among young people that was enormous in scope and intensity. Peace versus war; flower children versus the establishment; the Civil Rights Movement of black America; the assassinations of John F. Kennedy, Robert Kennedy, and Martin Luther King, Jr.; the Kent State massacre of students; and the ominous and ever mounting body count of American soldiers in Vietnam. The contrary energies of the times produced hippies, great music, and counterculture heroes: Jack Kerouac, Timothy O&#039;Leary, Ram Dass, Harris Joplin, Muhammad Ali, Wavy Gravy, Santana, Pete Seeger, Jane Fonda, Jimmy Hendrix, Ina May and Stephen Gaskin, Bob Dylan, The Grateful Dead, The Doors, The Beatles, and Indians!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Images of Indians were everywhere. Indians were &amp;quot;in.&amp;quot; You saw them in many of the psychedelic posters of Bill Graham&#039;s Fillmore West. Indians were the perfect icon for the idealistic innocence and free spirit of the times. Indians represented integrity, courage, honor, and peace, and still do for that matter. Long hair was a statement of the times. Youth was on the move. They followed the music. They marched in protests and gathered at concerts like Woodstock that would be markers in the social history of America. America was on the road, challenging the direction of the U.S. military policies in Vietnam and supporting the Civil Rights Movement of American minorities. In this process they found Indian Country. This was the Age of Aquarius.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the same time, Indian Country was awash with actions and activities. The pan-Indian movement, based upon the return to the traditional values of Indian life, had morphed into the **Unity Caravan.** Iroquois and Hopi elders were the core of the campaign to reassert the importance of language; ceremony; and the values of community, service, and sharing back into our villages and nations. We challenged the hundred-year policies of the United States Bureau of Indian Affairs (BIA) and the Canadian Department of Indian Affairs (DIA), organized to destroy our languages, ceremonies, cultures, and spiritual centers. Despite these attacks—coupled with boarding schools, mission schools, and social engineering—our heathen and pagan instincts remained strong, and we clung to Mother Earth for survival. We still know who we are.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Traditional American Indian leaders became proactive. We gathered from Canada, Oklahoma, South Dakota, North Dakota, Montana, Arizona, California, Maine, Florida, New York, and Washington State. Our Unity Caravan circled the United States and parts of Canada four times from 1967 to 1971. The traditional leaders of that time were Thomas and Fermina Banyacya, David and Jack Monongye, and Mina Lansa, all from Hopi. Chief Leon Shenandoah, Cecelia and Chief Irving Powless, Sr., Audrey Shenandoah, and Chief Louie Farmer, all from Onondaga. Chief Becaman and Arlene Logan came from Seneca, Mad Bear Anderson from Tuscarora, Chief Moses Elavid and Chief Louie Thompson from Mohawk. Henry Knockwood, Mi&#039;Kmaq; Sam Sapio, Penobscot; Bill Gammanda, Algonquin; Buster McCurdy, Ute; Oscar Boland, Cherokee; Clifford Hill, Cherokee; Lame Deer, Lakota; Don McCloud and Janet McCloud, Puyallup and Tulalip; Al Bridges and Edith McCloud, Puyallup and Tulalip. Then there were the runners. That&#039;s where I was most useful. We would get directions from the elders and carry them out. My brother Lee Lyons was in that category, and a younger group was also very active. Notable among that group were Tracy and Jeanne Shenandoah, brother and sister from Onondaga, and Tom Porter, Mohawk.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There were more, but those who are named were the principal activists in the development and implementation of the Unity Caravan. My life was very much affected by those years of action and activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Indians of the Northwest Coast were embroiled in what is now known as the &amp;quot;fishing wars.&amp;quot; In the sixties and seventies, the **American Indian Movement (AIM)** developed in St. Paul and Minneapolis, Minnesota, to counteract work exploitation, discrimination, and police brutality suffered by the large American Indian population in the twin cities. Russell Means, Oglala Lakota, and Dennis Banks, Anishinabe, were co-leaders in the young activist movement that soon became a target for federal surveillance and harassment. AIM received requests for support from Indians under stress in Indian Country and urban centers in large cities across the country. The termination and relocation policies of the Eisenhower-Nixon administration were responsible for moving large American Indian populations off their native lands and territories into cities, causing great stress for the new arrivals and their neighbors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1969, Richard Oakes, a young Mohawk ironworker, led the occupation of the abandoned prison on Alcatraz Island in San Francisco Bay. This celebrated occupation gained international attention and galvanized Indian Country in support. Native youth were demanding a return to their heritage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In quick succession there was the occupation of the BIA building in Washington, DC, in 1972. Blunders by federal agencies resulted in the first occupation in Washington, DC, since the War of 1812, through no fault of the Indians. Four months later, AIM was invited to Pine Ridge, South Dakota, by the Oglala Sioux Civil Rights Organization and the traditional chiefs of the Oglala Sioux led by Chief Fools Crow. They wanted support of their fight to remove the Pine Ridge tribal chairman, Richard Wilson, who was accused of corruption and trading away Lakota land. This turned into a seventy-one-day occupation that caught the world&#039;s attention. The Lakota Treaty Council sent two representatives to the Onondaga Nation in New York to request support and advice. Larry Red Shirt and Louie Bad Wound gained that support, and in 1973 the Haudenosaunee and the Oglala Sioux made a Treaty of Peace and Mutual Support. The FBI, federal marshals, BIA tribal police, and local vigilantes had closed all access to Wounded Knee to the national and international media. Marlon Brando, who won an Oscar for playing Don Corleone in *The Godfather*, effectively broke that news blockade by sending Sasheen Little Feather to the Academy Awards in Hollywood in his place to refuse to accept the award because of the shameful behavior of United States forces at Wounded Knee. We experienced immediate relief as world attention was refocused back on Wounded Knee, South Dakota. The occupation came to a bitter end that resulted in incarceration for some and the ground end of Richard Wilson&#039;s regime. These are just a few of the incidents that led up to the trip to Geneva in 1977.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; The Decade of the Indigenous Peoples&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There were and continue to be many reasons for Indigenous peoples to be present in the halls of the United Nations. For North American Indians and other Indigenous peoples with treaties, the UN provides a forum for discussion, studies, and possible solutions to protect Native lands and territories. The UN provides a forum to finally do away with the effects of the racist &amp;quot;doctrine of discovery&amp;quot; foisted upon generations of Native peoples and secure a brighter future for the 300 million or so Indigenous peoples of the world.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have made great strides in the international forums on human rights over these past twenty-seven years. From the first discussion in 1970 by the UN Sub-Commission on the Prevention of Discrimination and Protection of Minorities on the rights of Indigenous populations and the appointment of José R. Martinez Cobo of Ecuador as Special Rapporteur for this study, to the opening of the third session of the Permanent Forum on Indigenous Issues (a subsidiary organ of the United Nations&#039; Economic and Social Council, known as ECOSOC) May 2004, there can be no doubt progress has been made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Much has taken place in between: in the halls of the United Nations; in the lands and territories of Indigenous peoples; and in world conferences on populations, social development, women, habitat, and treaties. There have been recommendations for ways to recognize and honor the needs of Indigenous peoples. Yet the central issues remain unresolved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;Basic Call to Consciousness* is essentially the report brought to Geneva in 1977 by the Haudenosaunee. Sotsisowah, John Mohawk, a Haudenosaunee scholar, was given the task of drafting our message to the world. The draft was presented to the Grand Council of the Chiefs and examined word by word. After many changes, refinements, additions, and deletions, the draft became our report to the world. Whatever the outcome of this conference would be, the Haudenosaunee Council of Chiefs were satisfied that our report was what we wanted to present at Geneva.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I was given the task to deliver the opening statement at the UN. We had discussed the importance of that message, and we decided to speak for the Natural World since they could not speak for themselves. Our message reflected our concern for the life of future generations. Their welfare is predicated on the health of the Earth. Our observation is that the message we delivered twenty-seven years ago fell upon the deaf ears of authority.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yes, our human rights have moved, almost imperceptibly, forward. Yes, the Working Group for Indigenous Populations (WGIP) was a major step forward when it was created in 1982. It provided the platform for the study by Special Rapporteur Professor Miguel Alfonso Martinez. This important study was commissioned in 1989 and completed in 1994. But you will note the treaties are between states and &amp;quot;populations&amp;quot; not peoples or nations. So the oppressive directives of the thirteenth century Papal Bulls live on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During the early years of our travels to Geneva we became increasingly aware that not only were we not recognized as peoples, which precludes us from human rights, but we had little or no rights in the eyes of the world. We were politically invisible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Working Group on Indigenous Populations made it possible to begin the task of drafting our own declaration of our rights. This evolved, after years of work, into the *Draft Declaration on the Rights of the World&#039;s Indigenous Peoples.* The draft provides a benchmark of minimum standards for Native peoples around the world. The draft declaration was adopted by the Sub-Commission on Prevention of Discrimination and Protection of Minorities in 1993. The Commission on Human Rights is now reviewing the draft. This review is dragging on; currently they have accepted only two of the forty-five articles. The draft is stuck on Article 3, which addresses self-determination:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;Indigenous peoples have the right to self-determination and can freely determine their own political status and identity.*&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
States, particularly the United States with support from Australia, have blocked the passage of this article at every session and have threatened to withdraw unless the wording is revised. So much for democracy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The voices of Indigenous peoples were strong in Rio in 1992. At this United Nations&#039; Earth Summit, which focused on Agenda 21, women, children, and Indigenous peoples were included for special concern. We fought hard to be included, but little came from it. As a matter of fact, in the ten year follow-up at the World Summit on Sustainable Development, Johannesburg, South Africa, we were virtually unmentioned in the final report. If it wasn&#039;t for a few Indigenous representatives, luckily still at the conference, lobbying hard at the last hour of the last day for our continued inclusion in the Convention on Biological Diversity, we would have been completely eliminated from any reference at all. So the conspiracy of 1492 and 1493 lives on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1989 we began lobbying the United Nations to recognize 1992 as &amp;quot;the year of the World&#039;s Indigenous People.&amp;quot; This was to coincide with the 500th anniversary of the &amp;quot;discovery&amp;quot; of the Western Hemisphere by Columbus. We knew that countries were preparing big celebrations, including the reconstruction of the Santa Maria. Spain and Italy were foremost in these celebrations, with the United States and Central and South America scheduling similar events.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We, the Indigenous peoples of the North, Central, and South Americas, were just as determined to challenge the myths and lies that passed for the history of this event. Spain, Italy, and other member states of the United Nations defeated our efforts to have the initial recognition of Indigenous peoples fall on the anniversary of the so-called &amp;quot;discovery&amp;quot; of the Americas. However, we had generated so much pressure that the United Nations proclaimed 1993 as the &amp;quot;Year of the World&#039;s Indigenous People.&amp;quot; Ultimately it worked out for us, because, by my calculations, Indigenous peoples defeated Columbus in the international field of public opinion in 1992, and our issues continued to roll on into 1993 with great momentum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following that, the General Assembly proclaimed 1995 the International Decade of the World&#039;s Indigenous People. Great. We&#039;ll take it, along with the observation that we are no longer &amp;quot;populations,&amp;quot; we are &amp;quot;people,&amp;quot; not yet &amp;quot;peoples&amp;quot; (with an &amp;quot;s&amp;quot;), but that will come if we persevere. After all, we are peoples, are we not, in the full international sense of that word. And in the eyes of the Creator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The mandates of the Decade of the World&#039;s Indigenous People have not been met, and by all assessments the decade is an abysmal failure. There seems to be no political will on the part of states to take positive action on these issues. It may take another decade for any of them to be implemented.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yet again a benchmark step was taken with the establishment of the Permanent Forum on Indigenous Issues as a subsidiary organ of ECOSOC, July 2000. Indigenous organizations may participate in the forum&#039;s work as observers. With the establishment of the Special Rapporteur on the Situation of the Human Rights and Fundamental Freedoms of Indigenous Peoples, there now is an avenue for Indigenous peoples to register complaints, an avenue that previously did not exist.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Still, this is a forum on Indigenous &amp;quot;issues&amp;quot; and not peoples. So we&#039;re here not here. And the Inter Caetera Bulls of the Medieval Church of Rome continue to be the defining law for Indigenous peoples.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Throughout this entire time of the international history of contemporary Native peoples there has been little or no discussion about nature, Mother Earth, and Natural Law, the ultimate authority regarding life on Earth. This is where &amp;quot;all the King&#039;s men&amp;quot; will not prevail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some time ago, perhaps sixteen or seventeen years back, Indian leaders were together. The stars were brilliant. A camp coffeepot was hot by the fire, and we were talking about our greedy brother from across the sea. It was the usual talk of what he was doing now to the Earth, to the people, and to himself. Louie Bad Wound stood up and cursed in disgust. He said, &amp;quot;You know what we should do? Look at how many medicine people are here. We should put our medicines together and call in the winds and storms. Flood &#039;em out! We should call in the fires and burn &#039;em out! Maybe then he&#039;ll listen.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We were surprised by Louie&#039;s outburst and we said, &amp;quot;Louie, maybe we ought to think that one over.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Louie answered and said, &amp;quot;Well, he&#039;s not going to listen any other way!&amp;quot; We settled Louie down and talked about the damage being done to Mother Earth. I remember the sparks flying into the night and how we all grew silent thinking about Louie&#039;s words.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Louie has long gone to the &amp;quot;other side camp,&amp;quot; but I think of his words often. Now I think if Louie were here he would see that our greedy brother has brought the winds and fire himself. What Louie was asking for is here. Mother Earth is in the process of bringing balance back to herself, and we will begin to suffer the consequences. This is our opportunity to make him listen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These elements will only increase in intensity, and it will be very democratic. We all live under the law of flesh, bone, and blood, and we are subject to that law. There is no place to run. Disease is on the move, outsmarting modern medicine. We&#039;re depleting the resources of the world. Water will fuel the next wars. Global warming is on the march and world leaders continue to ignore it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Economies are so fragile that natural disasters will destroy national economies. We are so dependent on energy that we are helpless without it. Climate changes and weather patterns are now in flux, yet our leaders fight wars over oil, spending enormous sums of money for military arms that could be better spent for food, shelter, medicine, and education for our future generations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We need to mobilize for peace with the same energy that we use to mobilize for war. We need to produce better leaders with values of community and sharing. We need to exercise common sense.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Great Peacemaker came among our people a thousand years ago with a message of peace. He said people must have equity and good minds and health. He instructed our leaders on governance. He said, &amp;quot;When you sit in council for the welfare of the people, think not of yourself, your family, or even your generation. Make all of your decisions on behalf of the seventh generation coming, then you yourself will have peace.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We must look back and recognize those that sacrificed for us seven generations ago so that we may have what we have today. They set high moral standards and kept the laws that respected the Earth. We prosper today because of the work of those delegates and leaders who are no longer here. We must look forward and keep firm the standards they set for us, and continue to fight for the seventh generation coming. Our work represents peace for them. When they read and experience this *Declaration on the Rights of the World Indigenous Peoples* and experience their right to self-determination, in the full sense of the word, equal to all under law, they will think kindly of us and sing songs about us, because they will know that we loved them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dhnayto. Now I am finished.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Faithkeeper Onondaga Nation Haudenosaunee&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Six Nations Iroquois Confederacy&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;##&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; The Haudenosaunee: A Nation Since Time Immemorial&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee, more commonly known as the Iroquois Confederacy, are an ancient people of North America. Our tradition states that our people originated in the northeastern woodlands of North America. There are no stories within that tradition concerning migration across frozen lands to the area we occupy. We have been and continue to be the original inhabitants of these lands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our existence in these lands has not been one of absolute peace and tranquility. We have had to work hard to develop the civilization we enjoy. There was a time when our lands were torn by conflict and death. There were times when certain individuals attempted to establish themselves as the rulers of the people through exploitation and repression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We emerged from those times to establish a strong democratic and spiritual Way of Life. The confederate state of the Haudenosaunee became the embodiment of democratic principles that continue to guide our peoples today. The Haudenosaunee became the first &amp;quot;United Nations,&amp;quot; established on a firm foundation of peace, harmony, and respect.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the Haudenosaunee, all member nations are equal, regardless of size. Within their national territories the member nations are autonomous, but all adhere to the central principles of democracy that we agreed to at the formation of the Confederacy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The national Councils of Chiefs do not govern the people; instead they act as representatives of their clans in a process that coordinates the wishes of the people. They also act as judiciary in serious disputes that people cannot resolve among themselves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The confederated Council of Chiefs, or Grand Council, acts as the coordinating body of the will and determination of the member nations. The Grand Council also has the responsibility of conducting affairs with other states and nations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All of this political activity is set in the roots of an ancient tradition of the spirituality of our peoples. This cosmology places the Haudenosaunee in a balanced, familiar relationship with the universe and the Earth. In our languages, the Earth is our Mother Earth, the sun our Eldest Brother, the moon our Grandmother, and so on. It is the belief of our people that all elements of the Natural World were created for the benefit of all living things and that we, as humans, are one of the weakest of the whole Creation, since we are totally dependent on the whole Creation for our survival.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This philosophy taught us to treat the Natural World with great care. Our institutions, practices, and technologies were developed with a careful eye to their potential for disturbing the delicate balance in which we lived.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
European peoples first made contact with Haudenosaunee peoples early during the seventeenth century. The Dutch occupation of the Hudson River, and the English colonies on the Connecticut River and in Rhode Island, resulted in conflicts that rapidly escalated to warfare and that resulted in the massacre of the Algonkian speaking peoples in those areas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The European invasion of the North American Continent brought radical and permanent changes in the nature and objectives of warfare. The very first contact between Europeans and the people of the Haudenosaunee resulted in the deaths of a number of Mohawk people at the hands of a contingent under the command of Samuel de Champlain. Within three decades our people were embroiled in a life-and-death struggle that was triggered by conflicts between two imperialist powers over trade in furs and agricultural settler colonies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During this period of colonial warfare, our country received a massive influx of refugees fleeing from the invaders. At the same time, our lands were invaded on several occasions by European armies that carried out &amp;quot;burnt earth&amp;quot; policies against our people with an intensity that had never been seen in our part of the world. The Haudenosaunee survived those attacks, and we consummated numerous international treaties of peace and friendship with Holland, England, and France.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the time of the American Revolution, the people of the Haudenosaunee had experienced over one hundred fifty years of intermittent warfare. The conclusion of the revolution brought into existence the world&#039;s first settler state, and our struggle for survival entered a new phase. In 1784, our government negotiated a treaty of peace and friendship with the newly formed United States. Almost immediately, we were faced with the establishment of illegal American settlements within the lands defined in the treaty. Scattered skirmishes and conflicts were occurring throughout our lands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At about this time, the state of New York was attempting to negotiate its own treaties with our peoples. The settlers knew that our governing councils would never relinquish lands or allow their settlements. In response, New York began the practice of negotiating with any Native person who might grant them the concessions, especially the land concessions, they wished. Dozens of state treaties were signed by people who were under the influence of alcohol at the time and who often represented no one. A number of treaties were made that bear signatures that are outright forgeries.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All of this was occurring at a time when the years of warfare and disease had taken a heavy toll within our communities. The spirit of many people had been broken, and they had taken to drinking or had sunk into states of apathy. All of this was to the advantage of unscrupulous settlers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From 1784 to 1838, most of the Haudenosaunee territory was taken under fraudulent treaty or treaties obtained through coercion. Many of our people fled to lands promised them by the British Crown, lands that are now within the area shown on European maps as Canada. A number of our people were coerced, cajoled, and otherwise forced to relocate to lands in Oklahoma, Kansas, and Wisconsin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It was during this time that a chief of the Confederacy named Handsome Lake began to articulate a vision of liberation and resistance. His words became the guiding force that saved our peoples from complete cultural destruction during a period when Native culture was on the brink of annihilation throughout northeastern North America. His teachings continue to act as a guide for our people in the work we must carry on to ensure our survival as a distinct people of the world. His vision made clear the nature of the enemy, for he explained the way in which the colonizers would use their institutions and laws, not only to gain our lands, but also our minds and our self-esteem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Throughout the 1800s and 1900s, every aspect of this vision has proven true. The initial assaults against our culture were carried out by missionaries and &amp;quot;educators.&amp;quot; The historical record provides ample proof that there was a deliberate and concerted effort during this period to destroy our laws, customs, spiritual beliefs, and languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ultimate purpose of that strategy became clear as both the United States and the Canadian governments passed laws and adopted policies that were intended to assimilate our people and our remaining territories into these countries.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1892, New York State forcibly placed an illegal government in the Mohawk territory of Akwesasne and passed laws restricting the traditional governments in our territories. Canada acted with the same strategy at about the same time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1923, one of our leaders, a Cayuga chief named Deskaheh, attempted to take our complaints to the League of Nations in Geneva, Switzerland. He was unsuccessful, although he did receive the support of many sympathetic Swiss people. He died in exile when the Canadian government refused to allow him to return to his homeland.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The next year the United States passed citizenship laws that ostensibly imposed citizenship upon Indigenous peoples. The Haudenosaunee notified both the U.S. and Canada that we would not accept citizenship and that we would remain citizens of our own country. Canada responded by sending a military contingent to the Grand River Country and erecting a military barracks there, occupying the territory and forcibly expelling the traditional government.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1934, the United States passed the Indian Reorganization Act (IRA), which was designed to destroy the traditional governments and to place Native peoples under the supervision of the secretary of the Department of the Interior.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In two separate bills passed in 1948 and 1950, the United States Congress granted New York State civil and criminal jurisdiction over the Haudenosaunee territories.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During the early 1960s, the Haudenosaunee lost thousands of acres of land to dams, water reservoirs, highways, electrical and gas lines, and the St. Lawrence Seaway.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
None of these events has occurred without resistance from our peoples. In all of our territories there have been confrontations with police forces. There have been many attempts to stop these attacks against our land base, and many court battles have been fought.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During the 1970s, a new strategy began to unfold for the Haudenosaunee. In the Onondaga territory, New York State was stopped from expanding an interstate highway. The international bridge that passes through Akwesasne was blockaded until unrestricted passage for our people was obtained. In 1974, our people undertook the reoccupation of part of our homeland that had been illegally taken by the United States.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Throughout that time, several other Haudenosaunee communities underwent a revitalization of community culture with a strong emphasis on our economic, educational, and spiritual Way of Life. Between 1979 and 1981, the Mohawk Nation at Akwesasne gained international attention as the struggle against the colonial government imposed by the United States, involving hundreds of community residents, intensified.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have consistently been aggressive in asserting that we are a state, a government, and a people who have a right to a place in the international community. In 1977, we sent a twenty-one person delegation to take part in the International Non-Governmental Organizations&#039; conference on &amp;quot;Discrimination Against the Indigenous Populations of the Americas,&amp;quot; held in Geneva, Switzerland. All twenty-one people traveled on passports issued by our government and have since visited a number of other countries with these passports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The position papers we presented at that conference are in this book and serve to underline our position. As the 1980s began, we were a people confident about our future and clear about the nature of our struggle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;##&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Thoughts of Peace: The Great Law&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Haudenosaunee oral history relates that long before the Europeans arrived, Native peoples of the northeast woodlands had reached a crisis. It is said that during this time, a man or woman might be killed or injured by his or her enemies for any slight offense, and that blood feuds between clans and villages ravaged the people until no one was safe. It was during this time that a male child was born to a woman of the Wyandot people living on the north side of Lake Ontario near the Bay of Quinte. It would become the custom of the people of the Longhouse that this person&#039;s name would never be spoken except during the recounting of this oral history in the oral fashion (some say it during the Condolence Ceremony). At other times he is addressed simply as &amp;quot;the Peacemaker.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker became one of the great original philosophers and organizers in human history. It is impossible in this short essay to discuss more than a brief outline of his ideas and accomplishments, but it should become obvious that his vision for humankind was indeed extraordinary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He concluded early in life that the system of blood feuds, as practiced by the people inhabiting the forest at that time, needed to be abolished. His ideas were rejected by the Wyandot and other Huron peoples and while a young man, he journeyed to the land of the People of the Flint located on the southeast shore of Lake Ontario and extending to the areas called today the Mohawk Valley. The People of the Flint, or Kanien&#039;keha:ka, are known to English-speaking peoples as the Mohawks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon arrival in the Mohawk Country, he began seeking out those individuals who had the reputation as being the fiercest and most fearsome destroyers of human beings. He sought them out one at a time—murderers and hunters of humans, even Cannibals—and he brought to each one his message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One by one he &amp;quot;straightened out their minds&amp;quot; as each grasped the principles that he set forth. Nine men of the Mohawks—the nine most feared men in all Mohawk Country—grasped hold of his words and became his disciples.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first principle that the Peacemaker set forth was indisputable to those who heard his words. He said that it has come to pass that in this land human beings are seen to abuse one another. He pointed to the world in which people live and said that people should consider that some force or some thing must have created this world—the River of Life—that had not intended that human beings would abuse one another. Human beings whose minds are healthy always desire peace, and humans have minds that enable them to achieve peaceful resolutions of their conflicts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From that initial explanation—that the Creator of Life (later addressed as the Great Creator) did not intend that human beings abuse one another—he proposed that human societies must form governments that will serve to prevent the abuse of human beings by other human beings and that will ensure peace among nations and peoples. Government would be established for the purpose of abolishing war and robbery among brothers and to establish peace and quietness.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He drew the Mohawks together under those principles and then went to the Oneidas, Onondagas, Cayugas, and Senecas with the same teachings. What is unique about his work is that he not only set forth the argument that government is desirable, he also set forth the principle that government is specifically organized to prevent the abuse of human beings by cultivating a spiritually healthy society and the establishment of peace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other political philosophers and organizers have come to the conclusion that governments can be formed for the purpose of establishing tranquility, but the Peacemaker went considerably further than that. He argued not for the establishment of law and order, but for the full establishment of peace. Peace was to be defined not as the simple absence of war or strife, but as the active striving of humans for the purpose of establishing universal justice. Peace was defined as the product of a society that strives to establish concepts that correlate to the English words power, reason, and righteousness.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Righteousness&amp;quot; refers to something akin to the shared ideology of the people using their purest and most unselfish minds. It occurs when the people put their minds and emotions in harmony with the flow of the universe and the intentions of the &amp;quot;Good Mind&amp;quot; or the Great Creator. The principles of righteousness demand that all thoughts of prejudice, privilege, or superiority be swept away, and that recognition be given to the reality that the creation is intended for the benefit of all equally—even the birds, animals, trees, and insects, as well as the humans. The world does not belong to humans; it is the rightful property of the Great Creator. The gifts and benefits of the world, therefore, belong to all equally. The things that humans need for survival—food, clothing, shelter, protection—are things to which all are entitled because they are gifts of the Great Creator. Nothing belongs to human beings, not even their labor or their skills, for ambition and ability are also the gifts of the Great Creator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore all people have a right to the things they need for survival, even those who do not or cannot work, and no person or people has a right to deprive others of the fruits of those gifts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Reason&amp;quot; is perceived to be the power of the human mind to make righteous decisions about complicated issues. The Peacemaker began his teachings based on the principle that human beings were given the gift of the power of reason in order that they may settle their differences without the use of force. He proposed that in every instance humans should use every effort to counsel about, arbitrate, and negotiate their differences, and that force should be resorted to only as a defense against the certain use of force. All men whose minds are healthy can desire peace, he taught, and there is an ability within all human beings, and especially in the young human beings, to grasp and hold strongly to the principles of righteousness. The ability to grasp the principles of righteousness is a spark within the individual that society must fan and nurture so that it may grow. Reason is seen as the skill that humans must be encouraged to acquire in order that the objectives of justice may be attained and no one&#039;s rights abused.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Having established the concept of righteousness and reason, the Peacemaker went on to discuss the nature of &amp;quot;power.&amp;quot; The power to enact a true peace is the product of a unified people on the path of righteousness, and reason is the ability to enact the principles of peace through education, public opinion, and political, and when necessary, military power that the Peacemaker spoke of was intended to enable the followers of the law to call upon arms and to begin a peaceful settlement of their disputes. Peace, as the Peacemaker understood it, flourished only in a garden amply fertilized with absolute and pure justice. It was the product of a spiritually conscious society using its abilities of reason that resulted in a healthy society. The power to enact peace (which requires that people cease abusing one another) was conceived to be both spiritual and political.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But it was power in all the senses of the word—the power of persuasion and reason, the power of the inherent goodwill of humans, the power of a dedicated and united people, and, when all else failed, the power of force.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The principles of law set forth by the Peacemaker sought to establish a peaceful society by eliminating the causes of conflict between individuals and between peoples. It was a law that was conceived prior to the appearance of classes, and it sought to anticipate and eliminate anything that took the appearance of group or class interest, even in the forms of clan or tribal chauvinism, especially in the area of property. The law was also based to an impressive degree on a logic that looked to nature for its rules. It is one of the few examples of a &amp;quot;Natural Law&amp;quot; that is available to modern man. It is a law that clearly precedes &amp;quot;royal law,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;mercantile law,&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;bourgeois property-interest law.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The government that is established under the Great Law provides, in effect, that the leaders or &amp;quot;chiefs&amp;quot; are the servants of the people. Everyone in the Six Nations, wherever the law prevails, has direct participation in the workings of the government. Direct democracy, when it involves tens of thousands of people, is a very complex business, and there are many rules about how meetings are conducted. But the primary rule about the flow of power and authority is clearly that the power and authority of the people lies with the people and is transmitted by them through the &amp;quot;chiefs.&amp;quot; The fact that all the people have direct participation in the decision of their governments is the key factor for the success and longevity of the Haudenosaunee.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Internally, the law was to be the power by which the people were united ideologically and administratively under a dispute settlement process to which all had agreed to submit and to remove those customs of the past that had sparked conflict and fostered disunity. The path to unity was a difficult one indeed. The territory of the People of the Longhouse had been composed of five distinct countries, and each sometimes jealously guarded their hunting lands from intrusion by the others. The Peacemaker abolished the concept of separate territories. The law unified the peoples, saying that they were distinct from one another only because they spoke different languages. He said the territories were common to all and that each individual member of any of the nations had full rights of hunting and occupation of all the lands of all the nations of the People of the Longhouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In terms of the internal affairs of the People of the Longhouse, the first and most important principle was that under the law the people of the nations were one people. Since the Haudenosaunee call themselves the People of the Longhouse, the Peacemaker&#039;s admonition was that under the law the country of the Haudenosaunee was itself a Longhouse, with the sky as its roof and the earth as its floor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The peoples were assigned to clans by the Peacemaker, and so strong was to be the feeling of kinship and oneness between them that the members of the clan of one nation were admonished not to marry members of the same clan of another nation, so closely were they now related. The law bound them together as blood relatives.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In one motion he abolished exclusive national territories and the concept of national minorities. Any member of the Five Nations was to have full rights in the country of any of the Five Nations with only one restriction: he or she did not have the right to hold high public office, though that right could be conferred upon them by the host nation if they so wished.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The idea that the nations were united as one meant that the nations who were members of the Confederacy had agreed to surrender a part of their sovereignty to the other nations of the Confederacy. The Confederacy Council was to be the forum under which foreign nations and peoples could approach the People of the Longhouse. Any decision concerning the disposition of Seneca lands must first pass through the Confederacy Council where the other nations, who also have rights in Seneca lands, can participate in the decision-making process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker envisioned that the principles under which the Five Nations were governed could be extended far beyond the borders of the Haudenosaunee to all the peoples of the world. The law of the Peacemaker provides that any nation or people may find protection under the Great Tree of Peace, which symbolized the laws of the Confederacy. He expected that the principles of the Confederacy would be well received by many nations, and that the Haudenosaunee would venture forth with the offer of a union that would be designed to prevent hostilities and lay the basis of peaceful coexistence. With that in mind, the Constitution of the Five Nations provides that any nation may seek its protection through becoming knowledgeable about the laws and agreeing to them. Many Native nations accepted that offer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Five Nations agreed among themselves that in the event of an attack they would organize a military force to repel the invader and carry on the war in the invader&#039;s country until the war was concluded. The opponent had an absolute right to a cessation of the hostilities at any time by simply calling for a truce. At that point the process of negotiation went into action. The Constitution of the Five Nations prescribes that in the event another people are conquered, the Five Nations shall not impose upon them the Five Nations&#039; religion, nor collect tribute from them, nor subject them to any form of injustice. The Five Nations would not seize their territory. What was demanded was that the offending nation or people put away their weapons of war and that they cease military aggression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any individual or group of individuals had the right, according to the Constitution, to approach the Five Nations, learn the law, and agree to abide by it. When that happened, they were to be offered the protection of the law and the People of the Longhouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The vision of the Peacemaker that all the peoples of the world would live in peace under the protection of a law that required that hostilities be outlawed and disputes offered a settlement process is yet today an exciting prospect. When the idea of a United Nations of the world was proposed toward the end of World War II, researchers were dispatched to find models in history for such an organization. For all practical purposes, the only model they found concerned the Constitution of the Five Nations, whose author had envisioned exactly that.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a way, the Peacemaker was centuries ahead of his time. He set forth a system of government organization that was a marvelously complex enactment of the concept of participatory (as opposed to representative) democracy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Under the rules of the law, councils of Women appointed men who were to act more as conduits of the will of the people than as independent representatives of the people. The society was founded on concepts of moral justice, not statute law, and the rules of the society were designed to ensure that each member&#039;s rights were absolutely protected under the law. Women not only have rights but power as a community of people composing half of the population. The power of women has never been fully articulated by Western observers and interpreters of Haudenosaunee culture.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Peoples were recognized to have a right to exist unmolested as peoples in the articles of the Constitution. Individuals were recognized as having the full right to protection under the laws of the Confederacy—even individuals who were not members of the host nation—as long as they observed the rules of nonaggression and they didn&#039;t try to create factionalism among the people. The principle was set forth (and machinery to enact it was created) that provided that all peoples have a right to occupy their lands peacefully and that no one may deny them that right. A society was socialized to the ideology that, if an injustice occurs, it is their moral duty to defend the oppressed against their oppressors. The principle was set forth that no one has a right to deprive another of the fruits of his own labor, and that no one has a right to a greater share of the wealth of society than anyone else. The Peacemaker believed that if absolute justice was established in the world, peace would naturally follow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The genius of the Peacemaker was that he not only set forth the principles, he also designed the machinery to enforce those principles. He seems to have operated on the assumption that universal justice is the product of a spiritually strong society, and many of the rules that he proposed are designed to create a strong society rather than a strong government. That is one of the ideas that has not been widely accepted in the twentieth century and certainly not in a context that the Peacemaker would have understood.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Peacemaker set out to give some order to society and to create peace among peoples and nations. The rules that he set down were called by the Mohawks the &amp;quot;Great Goodness,&amp;quot; and by the Senecas the &amp;quot;Great Law.&amp;quot; The English called that body of teachings the &amp;quot;Constitution of the Five Nations.&amp;quot; It has never been written down in English, despite allegations to the contrary by anthropologists. The versions that exist in English are highly inadequate efforts compared to the oral versions of the Great Law. This effort is no better—it does not compare in any way to the complexity, beauty, and eloquence of the Law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some people who have read the history of the Haudenosaunee will be able to point to episodes in the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries when some of the principles of this law appear to have been ignored. It is true that over nearly two centuries of intermittent warfare—warfare caused by pressures created by the expanding interests of European imperial nations—there was a considerable amount of social change and stress. French imperialist missionaries introduced the idea—an entirely foreign idea—that a divine will might guide the fortunes of people in government and in warfare. That kind of thinking was not to be found in the philosophies of the Peacemaker, but throughout history it has been an idea that has accompanied empire builders everywhere. Many ideas of European origin were adopted by different peoples of the Haudenosaunee at different times, ideas that were in conflict with the principles of the Great Law. In the almost two centuries since the beginning of the so-called &amp;quot;reservation&amp;quot; period, many more ideas that are in conflict with the principles of the Great Law have been imposed by the colonizers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of what passes as &amp;quot;Iroquois history&amp;quot; was an effort by English and French historians to discredit the Haudenosaunee and to justify the destruction of the Confederacy and the theft of Confederacy lands. There were few instances when officials of the Confederacy violated the laws of the Great Peace, although individuals in any society do violate its laws. Following the American Revolution, the United States, and especially New York State, did everything in its power to dissolve the Confederacy and to deal with the individual nations. Great Britain, Canada, Ontario, and Québec have done the same thing. Since the invasion of the Europeans, the Haudenosaunee have produced a number of patriots but few great philosophers. The outstanding Haudenosaunee philosopher and teacher of the post-contact period was also a Confederacy chief. His name was Handsome Lake, and he led a spiritual revitalization that produced an oral document called &amp;quot;The Good Word,&amp;quot; a teaching on the same level of significance and power in Haudenosaunee culture as the Great Law. Combined, the two are a powerful teaching. Against incredible odds, the Confederacy has survived and has continued to this day. Its chiefs continue to meet periodically at the capital at Onondaga, and they continue to carry the titles bestowed upon them by the Peacemaker long before written history began. The ideas of the Confederacy continue to live also, and little by little the world is being exposed to those ideas. As long as those ideas remain alive, the possibility remains that the Peacemaker&#039;s vision of a world in peace and harmony may yet be realized.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;##&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Deskaheh: An Iroquois Patriot&#039;s Fight for International Recognition&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The old chief, Clinton Rickard, lived in a little house near the Niagara County town of Sanborn on the reservation of his nation, the Tuscaroras. People of the Iroquois Confederacy will always remember that house—not merely because Clinton Rickard had done much for his people in his long lifetime, but because at his invitation, another fine man, a homeless exile, lived out his last days there. Though his name is known to few white people, no loyal Iroquois will forget Deskaheh, Chief of the Younger Bear Clan of the Cayuga Nation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deskaheh was a descendant of Mary Jemison, famous in Indian and colonial story, and he was born in Grand River Land, a reservation of the Six Nations People who fled or were driven to British lands, now Canada, from their lands below the border after the American Revolution. They chose these acres, gratefully guaranteed to them by the British through General Haldimand, because the Grand River, with its level flats, reminded them of their beloved lands taken over by New York State.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After his years of grammar school, Deskaheh, like many other Grand River people, exercised his rights, guaranteed by the Jay Treaty, to cross the U.S. boundary to become a lumberjack in the Allegheny Mountains, but after an accident, he returned to Grand River and took up farming. He married the daughter of a Cayuga mother and White father, and she bore him four daughters and five sons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By 1914, Deskaheh had reached the middle period of what white neighbors called a &amp;quot;successful reservation-Indian life.&amp;quot; His honesty, sincerity, and ability as an orator in Cayuga and English had brought him the deserved appointment as head speaker when the Canadian government, satisfied until the beginning of World War I to allow the Iroquois the status of a separate nation, decided on grounds of expediency to disregard the old treaties and assimilate the Indians, by force, if necessary. Deskaheh was the leader of the delegation that patiently explained in Ottawa, first, that the Canadian government had no jurisdiction over the little Iroquois nation, and second, that since the Indians had already volunteered in proportionately greater numbers than the people of any other nation in the World War, an enforced draft of its young men by a foreign ally would seem silly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They won this argument, but the end of the war brought other attempted encroachment. The Iroquois soon knew that the majority in the legislative halls of the Canadian Capitol planned further inroads on their rights as citizens or land. In 1921, to thwart the purposes of these schemers, Deskaheh, appointed &amp;quot;Speaker of the Six Nations Council,&amp;quot; presented as travel credentials a passport authorized by his nation and crossed the Atlantic to seek British aid. Since, as he pointed out, the treaty by which his people had their rights guaranteed was signed by George III, he asked for its confirmation by George V. The English authorities refused his request, saying that they would not deal with a Canadian domestic problem, and the Cayuga returned, disillusioned. Then the Canadian enemies grew bolder. Creation of a fifth-column party through persuasion, promises, and payments was easy. It was easier still to get the new minority to ask for a detail of the red-jacketed Royal Canadian Mounted Police to ride into the Grand River country to protect the &amp;quot;loyalist&amp;quot; Indians and &amp;quot;to keep the peace.&amp;quot; So obvious was this procedure that Deskaheh, who strongly opposed it and pleaded earnestly for arbitration, won many sympathizers among his neighbors, and through them, news of the coming raid reached him in time for a hasty flight across the border of the United States to the city of Rochester in western New York State.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The raiders arrested and jailed a number of Iroquois, and though Deskaheh was known to abstain from alcohol, they searched his house on the pretext of looking for illegal beverages. The Canadian government then ordered barracks built for the housing of their police, and Grand River was suddenly an occupied nation. Deskaheh now began to fight back desperately.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the Six Nations&#039; counsel, George P. Decker (a white, Rochester lawyer), as his companion, he again used his passport, this time to travel to Geneva to bring his peoples&#039; case before the League of Nations. He arrived in September 1923, took lodging in the Hotel des Familles, and began to work toward personally presenting to the Council of the League the petition of his people. Though he met with no success, he fought doggedly. Winter came and went, and in mid April he wrote to his wife and his sons and daughters, &amp;quot;I have no time to go anywhere, only sitting on the chair from morning till night, copying and answering letters as they come, and copying the documents, and I have many things to do.&amp;quot; May came to the city by beautiful Lake Leman, but his thoughts were with his people beside the Grand River, and like a good believer in the religion of the Longhouse, he was seeking aid through the prayer of his people to their God. To his brother Alex General, he wrote: &amp;quot;I believe it will be a good thing to have a meeting in one of the Longhouses, but you must combine all the good people and the children of the Longhouse, only those that are faithful believers in our religion and no other, and it must be very early in the morning to have this, so that our God may hear you and the children, and ask him to help us in our distress at this moment, and you must use Indian tobacco in our usual way when we ask help to our Great Spirit ... and you must have a uniform on ... and also ask God you wish the religion will keep up for a great many years to come and the Indian race also.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By June he had obtained the services of a Swiss lawyer who was preparing a statement of the case of the Six Nations in French. The money the Indians and their friends had raised in North America was almost gone, and some means of replenishing it was necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Again he wrote home from Geneva to his brother Alex: &amp;quot;And we had a meeting of the Iroquois of the Six Nations of the Grand River Land—really the committee devoted to the interests of the Six Nations—on the 27th of June, and the meeting decided to raffle off the two portrait pictures which they made and just think of it, these two pictures of myself with my costume on brought six thousand Swiss francs—it means a little over one thousand dollars of our money, and it gives me very great lift to our fight ... very strong committee, all big people, of high class people. When the meeting takes place everybody looks decent of their suit and dress very well.&amp;quot; If these informal reports written to his beloved family in unfamiliar language seem naive, the campaign Deskaheh and his good friend, George Decker, were waging was not. It was hard-hitting, simple, direct. The embarrassed officials who had to deny this representative of a small nation the right to speak before the League Council committed to the Wilsonian doctrine of autonomy for small nations. These two made the situation more awkward for the British interests by making public the prints distributed in Geneva, quotations from treaties, and documents that Canada had decided to abrogate as &amp;quot;scraps of paper.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Cayuga chief was also attracting much favorable attention as a person. To the Irish woman correspondent of the *Freeman&#039;s Journal*, he seemed a &amp;quot;good-looking, broad-shouldered man, about forty years of age (he was actually fifty-six) ... wearing ordinary dark clothes ... presenting every appearance of a well-to-do farmer with the one exception of his beautiful moccasins. She commented on the penetrating, quick glance of his dark eyes, his kindly mouth, firm chin, and finished her description with the sentence, &#039;His beautifully shaped but strong head and his clear cut features told the story of the strong man who knows his strength and believes in it, whilst his shining eyes were full of enthusiasm and idealism.&#039;&amp;quot; But in the middle of this enthusiastic and sentimental interview, the chief had persuaded her to quote from the text of a memorial address to the Grand River Indians, dated as late as December 1794, and filed by Great Britain:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;The Documents, Records, and Treaties between the British Governors in former times, and your wise Forefathers, of which, in consequence of your request, authentic copies are now transmitted to you, establish the Freedom and Independency of your Nations.*&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Time wore on and though a few Englishmen and Canadians spoke up for the Six Nation Indians, though the representatives of the Netherlands and Albania listened sympathetically and spoke of supporting his petition, Deskaheh began to suspect that his cause was lost. News from the homeland was bad. The Canadian Government had announced a &amp;quot;free election,&amp;quot; which would in effect determine whether or not the Six Nations Government of Grand River Land should be dissolved. For this vote, the Canadian Government agent had taken possession of the Six Nation Council House, surrounding it with a guard of twenty police. In protest the Indians favoring their nation&#039;s continuance did not vote.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The authorities then broke open the safe holding the records of the Six Nations and took from there a number of wampum belts, revered as sacred by the Iroquois, refusing, on demand, to return them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deskaheh wrote to the editor of a Swiss journal:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;It is the heart broken that I must affirm that since several months I am witness to the most cruel indifference. ... My appeal to the Society of Nations has not been heard, and nothing in the attitude of Governments does not leave me any hope.*&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;It is in this dreadful agony that I take the advantage to cry out that injustice, by the means of your free review, to my Brothers from all races and all religions. Too long we have suffered from the tyranny of our neighbors who tread under feet our Right and which they laugh at the Pact which binds them.*&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;I do hereby in His Majesty&#039;s name, authorize and permit the said Mohawk Nation and such others of the Six Nations Indians as wish to settle in that quarter to take possession of and settle upon the banks of the river commonly called Ouse or Grand River ... which them and their posterity are to enjoy forever.*&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then he recited the tale of the broken pledge, the raid of the Royal Mounted Police, the rummaging of his own house, the building of the police barracks, and the seizure of the sacred wampum. The story would be incredible without evidence, he said, but he had foreseen this and had the proofs with him. Then he lifted the lid of the suitcase and with care and reverence drew from within the old beaded wampum on which might be read the sworn agreements of white governments with his people.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Speaking with deep feeling, translating these documents slowly and impressively, stopping now and then to make clear the meanings of the bead colors and of the representations of the symbols, he made his entranced listeners feel that this was not the narration of the grievances of a small racial unit, but the story of all minority peoples—the tragedy of every small nation that is a neighbor to a large one. When he finished, there was a moment of silence—then the roar of a tremendous ovation. Thousands rose to their feet to cheer him, and the great hall echoed and re-echoed with their applause. Straight, unsmiling, impassive, he waited until after many minutes the sound began to wane. Then, still expressionless, he left the platform.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As if to seal its own lack of interest, the secretary of the League that had notified Deskaheh of the denial of his petition, aware of the embarrassment he had caused, now denied both Deskaheh and George Decker the floor of a plenary session, where the two friends struck their last brave blow. Deskaheh hired the *Salle Centrale*, and advertised in the press that those who would come to listen would hear Deskaheh present the case of his nation to the world. The response was amazing. The &amp;quot;Red Indian&amp;quot; had been a popular figure in Europe since the time of Columbus, and the populace, the vast majority of whom had never seen an example of the &amp;quot;noble savage&amp;quot; as popularized by translations of the works of James Fenimore Cooper and other romanticists, attended in thousands. All the Geneva Boy Scouts were present, but not a single League of Nations Official. Members of the press of many nations, sensing possibilities of a picturesque if not politically important character, occupied their reserved tables, among them the distinguished Hungarian journalist Aloys Derso, who told amusing and pathetic incidents of the occasion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;I went to the evening to see my first American Indian. He was in the dressing room already in full regalia. I drew a few sketches of him and he was a good model, sitting with the aquiline nose, not the typical Indian profile, the nose not too sharp as I had expected. His eyes were tired and there was a great melancholy in his expression.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When Deskaheh appeared before the great audience, he walked in dignity and with no self-consciousness. There were giggles because, though he wore the elaborate dress of a Chief of the Cayuga Nation, he carried an enormous yellow suitcase that he placed carefully on a table. The giggles soon ceased, however, as Deskaheh related his story simply and sincerely. His people had heard in 1914, he said, of a repulsively homely little chief of the British people. The young Indian men had formed a regiment and gone across the water to fight for world freedom and justice as the allies of the government that had once so gratefully guaranteed his nation its lands. Here he repeated a passage from the Treaty of 1784, as worded by Sir Frederick Haldimand, governor-in-chief of Québec and territories depending hereon:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;... then he recited the tale of the broken pledge...*&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before the end of 1924, the Speaker of the Six Nations Council had returned to the United States, a disillusioned and discouraged man. An exile from Canada and from the nation he thought he had failed, he found refuge with Clinton Rickard in the house of the benign old chief. There, by the Niagara River, which marks the Canadian boundary, he found that the people for whom he had fought did not think him a failure. From their northern homes in Grand River Land, they journeyed here to see him and assure him of their loyalty. Though his disheartening experience had weakened him physically, his spirit took fire from their cheers and, with never-ending courage, he kept up his battle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;##&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; The Last Speech of Deskaheh&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;as if you had tried. You might have gotten a good share of it by fair means if you got openly and fairly.*&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You young people of the United States may not believe what I am saying, but it is true. Do not take my word, but read your history. A good deal of true history about that has got into print now.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nearly everyone who is listening to me is a pale face, I suppose. I am not. My skin is not red, but that is what my people are called by others. My skin is brown, light brown, but our cheeks have a little flush and that is why we are called red skins. We don&#039;t mind that. There is no difference between us, under the skins, that any expert with a carving knife has ever discovered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
My home is on the Grand River. Until we sold off a large part, our country extended down to Lake Erie, where, one hundred forty winters ago, we had a little seashore of our own and a birch-bark navy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You would call it Canada. We do not. We call the little ten miles square we have left of the &amp;quot;Grand River Country.&amp;quot; We have the right to do that, for it is ours. We have the written pledge of George III that we should have it for ever as against him or his successors, and he promised to protect us in it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We didn&#039;t think we would ever live long enough to find that a British promise was not good. An enemy&#039;s foot is on our country, and George V knows it for I told him so, but he will not lift his finger to protect us, nor will any of his ministers. One who would take away our rights is, of course, our enemy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do you think that any government should stop to consider whether any selfish end is to be gained or lost in the keeping of its word?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In some respects, we are just like you. We like to tell our troubles. You do that. You told us you were in great trouble a few winters ago because a great big giant with a big stick was after you. We helped you whip him. Many of our young men volunteered and many gave their lives for you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You were very willing to let them fight in the front ranks in France. Now we want to tell our troubles to you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I do not mean that we are calling on your governments—we are tired of calling on the governments of pale-faced peoples in America and in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have tried that and found it was no use. They deal only in fine promises that our remaining territory can easily be gotten from us by first bribing our chiefs to sign treaties that you and your governments do not hesitate to take. Your governments of today learned that method from the British. The British have long practiced it on weaker peoples in carrying out their policy of subjugating the world, if they can, to British imperialism. Under cover of it, your lawmakers now assume to govern other peoples too weak to resist your courts. There are no three-mile limits or twelve-mile limits to strong governments who wish to do that.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
About three winters ago, the Canadian government set out to take mortgages on farms of our returned soldiers to secure loans made to them, intending to use Canadian courts to enforce these mortgages in the name of Canadian authority within our country. When Ottawa tried that, our people resented it. We knew that would mean the end of our government. Because we did so, the Canadian government began to enforce all sorts of dominion and provincial laws over us and quartered armed men among us to enforce Canadian laws and customs upon us. We appealed to Ottawa in the name of our right as a separate people and by right of our treaties, and the door was closed in our faces. We then went to London with our treaty and asked for the protection it promised and got no attention. Then we went to the League of Nations at Geneva with its covenant to protect little peoples and to enforce respect for treaties by its members, and we spent a whole year patiently waiting but got no hearing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To punish us for trying to preserve our rights, the Canadian government has now pretended to abolish our government by Royal Proclamation and has pretended to set up a Canadian-made government over us, composed of the few traitors among us who are willing to accept pay from Ottawa and do its bidding. Finally, Ottawa officials, under pretense of a friendly visit, asked to inspect our precious wampum belts, made by our Fathers centuries ago as records of our history, and when shown to them, these false-faced officials seized and carried away those belts as bandits take away your precious belongings. The only difference was that our aged wampum keeper did not put up his hands—our hands go up only when we address the Great Spirit. Yours go up, I hear, only when someone of you is going through the pockets of his own white brother. According to your newspapers, they are now up a good deal of the time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Ottawa government thought that with no wampum belts to read in the opening of our Six Nations Councils, we would give up our home rule and self-government, the victims of superstition. Any superstition of which the Grand River people have been victims are not in reverence for wampum belts, but in their trust in the honor of governments who boast of a higher civilization.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We entrusted the British, long ago, with large sums of our money to keep for us when we ceded back parts of their territory. They took $140,000 of that money seventy-five winters ago to use for their own selfish ends, and we have never been able to get it back.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your government of the United States, I hear, has just decided to take away the political liberties of all the red men you promised to protect forever, by passing such a law through your Congress in defiance of the treaties made by George Washington. That law, of course, would mean the breaking up of the tribes if enforced. Our people would rather be deprived of their money than their political liberties—so would you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I suppose some of you have never heard of my people before and that many of you, if you ever did, supposed we were all long gone to our happy hunting grounds. No! There are as many of us as there were a thousand winters ago. There are more of us than there used to be and that makes a great difference in the respect we ask of you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I ask you a question or two. Do not hurry with your answers. Do you believe—really believe—all peoples are entitled to equal protection of international law now that you are so strong? Do you believe—really believe that treaty pledges should be kept? Think these questions over and answer them to yourselves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fathers among us have been real men. They cry out now the injustice of being treated as something else and being called incompetents who must be governed by other people—which means the people who think that way about them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We are not as dependent in some ways as we were in the early days. We do not need interpreters now. We know your language and can understand your words for ourselves and we have learned to decide for ourselves what is good for us. It is bad for any people to take the advice of an alien people as to that.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You mothers, I hear you have a great deal to say about your government nowadays. Maybe you can do something to help us if you will. Our mothers have always had a hand in ours. Maybe you mothers are hard-hearted and will not, perhaps you boys and girls who are listening and who have loved to read stories about our people—the true ones, I mean—will help us when you grow up, if there are any of us left to be helped.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are found to treat us as though we were citizens under your government, then those of your people who are land-hungry will get our farms away from us by hooks and crooks under your property laws in your courts that we do not understand and do not wish to learn. We would then be homeless and have to drift into your big cities to work for wages, to buy bread, and have to pay rent, as you call it, to live on this Earth and to live in little rooms in which we would suffocate. We would then be scattered and lost to each other and lost among so many of you. Our boys and girls would then have to inter-marry with you, or not at all. If consumption (tuberculosis) took us off or if we brought no children into the world, or our children mixed with the ocean of your blood, then there would be no Iroquois left. So boys and girls, if you grow up and claim the right to live together and govern yourselves—and you ought to—and if you do not concede the same right to other peoples and you will be strong enough to have your own way—you will be tyrants, won&#039;t you? If you do not like that word, use a better one, if you find one, but don&#039;t deceive yourselves by the words you use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Boys, you respect your fathers because they are members of a free people and have a voice in the government and because they helped to make it and made it for themselves and will hand it down to you. If you knew that your fathers had nothing to do with government, but were mere subjects of other men&#039;s government, you could not look up to them and they could not look you in the face. They would not be real men then. Neither would we.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This story comes straight from Deskaheh, one of the chiefs of the Cayugas. I am the speaker of the Council of the Six Nations, the oldest League of Nations now existing. It was founded by Hiawatha. It is a league that is still alive and intends, as best it can, to defend the rights of the Iroquois to live under their own laws in their own little countries now left to them, to worship their Great Spirit in their own way, and to enjoy the rights that are as surely theirs as the white man&#039;s rights are his own.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you think the Iroquois are being wronged, write letters from Canada to your ministers of parliament, and from the United States to your congressmen and tell them so. They will listen to you, for you elect them. If they are against us, ask them to tell you when and how they got the right to govern people who have no part in your Government and do not live in your country but live in their own. They can&#039;t tell you that.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One word more so that you will be sure to remember our people. If it had not been for them you would not be here. If one hundred and sixty-six winters ago, our warriors had not helped the British at Québec, Québec would not have fallen to the British. The French would then have driven your English-speaking forefathers out of this land, bag and baggage. Their children would have been a French-speaking people here today, not you. That part of your history cannot be blotted out by the stealing of our wampum belts in which that is recorded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I could tell you much more about our people, and I may some other time, if you would like to have me.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One by one, Deskaheh told the story of those agreements solely made on the sworn good faith of each of the two big governments that had guaranteed the Indian his own land, fair treatment, and independence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sick, fever-ridden, despairing, Deskaheh raised his voice to speak his last proud message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The next morning, Deskaheh was in Rochester hospital. Eight weeks later he knew he was dying and asked to be taken back to Clinton Rickard&#039;s home on the Tuscarora Reservation. While his bed was made ready for his journey along the Milky Way to the Spirit World, his brother, wife, and children tried to cross the border at Niagara Falls to be with him, but were refused permission to do so.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On June 22, 1925, alone and with his eyes set toward the Six Nations Land he had tried to serve, he died.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;quot;Aku will not be free until the Indian walks.&amp;quot; —José Marti*&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
White Americans and white Canadians have done little to keep the story of Deskaheh alive. Few have seen the small stone that marks his grave in the burial grounds of the Cayuga Longhouse. Fewer still care to remember his words. They make the white man uncomfortable because they bear so emphatically on contemporary thinking about the Native peoples, on proposed laws in the legislative bodies of the states and the nations that would still, despite their agreements (in Deskaheh&#039;s words) &amp;quot;protect little peoples and to enforce respect for treaties,&amp;quot; regard Indians as incompetents to be governed for their own good by wiser neighbors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But the Iroquois remember. And when they speak of Deskaheh, the white people sometimes listen, wondering if they and their governments could by some unlikely chance have dealt unjustly with a great man.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;##&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Geneva, 1977: A Report on the Hemispheric Movement of Indigenous Peoples&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;José Barreiro*&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We were in a tall, cavernous room at the United Nations, and all around the wall and the doors there were people crowded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Indian delegates were all in the center, seated in rows, with long, thin tables before them, and they had earphones on. To their right and to their left, sitting on both sides of the room so that they faced each other and looked over the Indian people, were the representatives of the various governments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Segwalise of the Haudenosaunee delegation was about to speak. He was in front, facing us.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Next to him was Juan Condori, Aymara from Bolivia, and next to him was José Mendoza, Guaymi from Panama. Both had spoken. This was the last day. It had been up to them to summarize the conditions and aspirations of their Indian peoples in South and Central America, and as we had come to expect throughout that week, they had spoken out directly and well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now they had come, one hundred thirty people, representing Hopi and Lakota, Haudenosaunee and Guaymi, Misquito and Mapuche, Northern Cheyenne and Ojibway, Aymara and Muscogee, and more, and they had brought a message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The immigration guards and officials at the Geneva airport were perplexed. Twelve delegates from the Six Nation (Iroquois) Confederacy, the Haudenosaunee, were lined up, passports in hand, a little tired after a nine-hour overnight flight, but now serious and alert as one of their passports had been handed across the glass barrier and the blonde guards with caps on were turning it over in their hands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It was a small, brown book, covered in leather. On the cover: Haudenosaunee Passport.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;I don&#039;t know,&amp;quot; one guard said. &amp;quot;We have to study this.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee delegation went to sit down. &amp;quot;Well, here we go,&amp;quot; one said. &amp;quot;We may as well start here.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The men and the women sat around. One man went to the bathroom and came back. He looked over the group casually. &amp;quot;What seems to be the trouble?&amp;quot; he said, as if he didn&#039;t know, as if there was not reason. People smiled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Hey,&amp;quot; someone else said, &amp;quot;did you call the Iroquois Consulate?&amp;quot; Everyone laughed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One of the older women repeated the antics of one of the young Indian men who had gotten off the plane pretending to be an anthropologist. &amp;quot;Gee,&amp;quot; he had said, &amp;quot;this is how they live, eh? Did you get their picture?&amp;quot; That cracked everybody up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then the Swiss officials were back. They still seemed perplexed, but now they were offering a special entry permit. A young Swiss man acted as interpreter. The older Haudenosaunee chiefs and the women discussed the meanings and use of this special permit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;It seems to me,&amp;quot; one man said, &amp;quot;that this permit, by virtue of being a &#039;special&#039; permit, tends to negate the validity of our passport.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;That seems right,&amp;quot; one woman said, lifting her head. &amp;quot;And we didn&#039;t come here to be treated differently. We came here seeking recognition.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;It seems to me,&amp;quot; he told the Haudenosaunee spokesman, &amp;quot;this is not the place for a political fight.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another man smiled, nodding. &amp;quot;That is correct,&amp;quot; he said. &amp;quot;This is the whole reason that we are here.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The man looked past him silently.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;I think the important thing is to get in,&amp;quot; the young interpreter said.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;No,&amp;quot; the man said softly, &amp;quot;the important thing is not to get in—the important thing is to make sure that every step of the way our validity as Indian nations is recognized.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The young man nodded. He looked away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Swiss officials looked perplexed. They would have to consult with their superiors, they said.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Two men from the delegation wanted to know what was going on. Others began to take pictures. The young Swiss man who was interpreting looked nervous and fidgety. He kept looking at his watch. He was working with a reception committee member who had arranged for a bus to transport the delegations into Geneva. The bus was waiting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Soon, the officials came back. Once all the people gathered. It was to be this way: the permit being offered was the one regularly issued to passports from nations that had no formal relations with Switzerland. The Haudenosaunee had no formal relations with Geneva—but by this act, the Swiss were recognizing the Haudenosaunee&#039;s right to travel with their own passport.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee moved away from the officials and spoke among themselves. The procedure and explanation seemed reasonable. There was agreement to accept.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One of the Iroquois chiefs stood up, a quiet man, softly spoken. &amp;quot;Let us not forget,&amp;quot; he said, &amp;quot;that we are here as guests. In our own land we would not treat people this way. If it is the custom for these people to act in this way, let us allow them their words. It doesn&#039;t seem proper that we should travel halfway around the world seeking sympathy by insulting those very people who wish to hear us.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Soon, the Swiss officials were handing out the passports with the permits inserted. The Haudenosaunee delegation, with the chiefs leading the way, formed a single file and passed through the gate into Switzerland.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There was a large circle later—and it was of all the delegations—North, Central, and South America—and one of the Lakota, Russell Means, was standing and speaking and he was slamming down forceful words, angry words.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We had been discussing the agenda for the first day—how it was to go, how much time there was, who was to speak. There was in the room and among all of us the awareness of how much there needed to be said and explained and how important it was.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ours was a talking mission, a very complex one, and there wasn&#039;t much time. The first morning session, where a large audience and much press participation was expected, would be a crucial one. We had just become aware that the NGOs (Non-Governmental Organizations, the conference sponsors) had already scheduled several non-Indian speakers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;I am sick and tired of this,&amp;quot; Russell was saying, his arm extended, gesturing to the circle. &amp;quot;This is our conference. We came here, for the first time, to present our case to the world, and now we are told that we have to sit and give half our time to some damn white speakers to tell us how nice it is to have us here!&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Around the room there was much nodding among silent faces. Others spoke out, mostly young men.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Juan Condori, Aymara from Bolivia, stood up. He too was adamant. &amp;quot;We have heard their speeches,&amp;quot; he said. &amp;quot;All their polite words, all their empty words. No. I am here for my people. I am here to speak out, to tell what we are enduring. I don&#039;t have time to give.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A couple of people who had been working with the NGO committee then tried to explain the situation. It was customary, they said, that the hosts and the other observer groups represented would give welcoming addresses. There were about four such groups.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The young men, one by one, spoke again. They remained adamant. One spoke and then another, and as they went along, listening to each other, you could sense the rising circle of uncompromising anger taking hold.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;No, they are saying to us. Let us be heard and at least let us do that well and in that let us not give an inch.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then Kakwirakiron stood up. He was a young man with long braids. He was a spokesman and representative of Kanien:ke, a Mohawk settlement in the Adirondack Mountains. There was apprehension and that sort of expectation within an argument when a new speaker is watched carefully to see which side he will support. He spoke casually. He said that he, too, was a young man, a warrior. Then he told a little bit about Kanien:ke and the kinds of pressures that community had endured in the last four years of its existence. He spoke about the feelings one gets from living continually in a defensive stance, not knowing on many evenings whether the morning would bring an assault by the state troopers or a few shots from some rednecks. Then he spoke about the importance of those strong feelings. &amp;quot;These young men,&amp;quot; he said, &amp;quot;I understand them because they have been the ones in the last few years who have had the task of facing the enemy. This has been their job, and as such it is their duty to be suspicious. If they did it this way, they would not be fulfilling their obligations to the people.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Rut where I come from,&amp;quot; he said, &amp;quot;within the people that I represent, there are also old men and old women, and parents, and families, mothers, and there are little children. And they also have feelings which must be heard, and which we must represent here. That&#039;s what we are here for. We represent the whole people—not only the warriors, not only the angry feelings. This we must keep in our minds.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kakwirakiron sat down and around the room the people were quiet. It took a few moments, but then it seemed the anger had been focused, like the force of argument had been appropriately placed in that room.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Somehow the question of time for speakers that first day got resolved. It seemed much simpler then.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Phillip Deere sat in a straight-backed chair, with a red blanket folded on his lap. Now it was late at night and we were in the basement of a building in Geneva, and before him, sitting in a circle, were the group of six men who had been selected by all the delegates to be the principal speakers, to make the initial, unifying presentation, on that first day of the conference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There were Oren Lyons, from the Iroquois Confederacy; Juan Condori, Aymara from Bolivia; José Mendoza, Guaymi from Panama; Russell Means, Lakota from the United States; and Larry Red Shirt and Francis He Crow, both also Dakotas, pipe carriers who were to open up the first day&#039;s proceedings with a Pipe Ceremony.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Phillip had his hand up and, with his forefinger, was pointing at each of the men, and he had a light smile on his face, a sort of proud and knowing smile, a confident smile.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It had been a small but important meeting. We had come together in that room to discuss the various speeches that these men would deliver on the next day, and thus eliminate any possible repetition, and yet something much stronger, something much more telling of what had been carried to Geneva had emerged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Oren Lyons spoke first. He explained how he would address the duty of all human beings to respect not only &amp;quot;human rights,&amp;quot; but the rights of all the beings of the Creation. This he went over carefully and seriously, explaining that this was the foundation for any life that would be full and decent and that could begin to guarantee the rights of future generations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then José Mendoza spoke—and he spoke of territory, land, of the elements of the land, and how a people grew and developed according to that land and that sky, and what it offered and what it taught. He spoke of his people, the Guaymi, and of the other Indian nations, which in Panama, like in so many other countries, constituted a so called minority within the larger state. &amp;quot;But we are not a minority,&amp;quot; he said. &amp;quot;Within our territories we are simply us—the people—and it is only when we go outside of this—of our territories—that we become &#039;minorities,&#039; and then an even worse oppression begins. We become as the peasant, losing identity; family, language, representation—to be absorbed and thus hidden, manipulated, and exploited.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then Juan Condori spoke, and he knew a thing or two about exploitation. Bolivia where the Indian people are a majority—about four million in a country of five million—and he spoke about what it means to be an Indian and a peasant, because in his country, the two words can mean the same thing, because everyone has been displaced and the Indian, who live on but own no land, are considered inferior, less than human, by the controlling white minority.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He spoke about humiliation and poverty, and hunger—real hunger—where children don&#039;t eat, and grow malformed, and their minds don&#039;t work well, and where the parents work and work and produce so little, and even that is taken away, and all this, he said, all this is about to get even worse. A new migration, a new tide of racist White Rhodesians on the run from that part of the world and invited by the Bolivian government to settle a whole new region—more white settlers—sixty thousand men of a bearing age—ideologically trained in apartheid, tied into the development of the oppressive mining and the vast economic interests that control the country and everything going out, all the labor, all the minerals, the land destroyed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Russell Means spoke then. He also knew about the destruction of land, he said, referring to the Great Plains of North America. He had wanted to be last, he said, because he had a very special mission, and that was to nail the head of the monster. And the monster, the base and control of overwhelming exploitation—the force, economic and military, behind this process—this was the United States of America. It was there that the multi-nationals were based. It was there the counter-insurgency programs were generated. It was there where the sterilization programs were mapped out. It was there where the governments of Panama, Venezuela, Nicaragua, Chile, Brazil, Guatemala, Bolivia, Argentina, and Mexico got their military aid. And it was there where a society had been created that lived so richly on the destruction of other people&#039;s lands, the exploitation of their labor, the extraction and theft of their natural resources, and finally and most fundamentally, the very rape and destruction of the Natural World—the basis of all life the foundation, specifically, of everything the people represented—the sacred Mother Earth.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He wanted to make this clear, Russell said, to bring the total message back around to this, because his own people had no time left, and the Bolivians had no time left, nor the Guaymi. And in that room it became very clear as each of the men had spoken that there had emerged no repetition but instead a sort of fusion of the various arguments, and they seemed to fold together like the cloth that wraps the Sacred Pipe. Then Larry Red Shirt spoke.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He explained the meaning of the Sacred Pipe. This was his mission—to open the ceremony and to carry and offer the Pipe. He was moved, he said, by all the words he had heard, by the strength that they represented together; how it all fit, and he knew that it was good. Then he spoke of the Pipe, of the origins of the Lakota, of the power the Pipe had and of the many manifestations he had witnessed of that power, how it had been used at Wounded Knee, and at the many trials, how he had seen, over and over, the minds of men changed by the power of that prayer and what the smoke represented.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So Phillip Deere had his hand up and his forefinger was extended, and he was pointing at each of the men, and he was smiling.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;All of you men that are going to be speaking tomorrow,&amp;quot; he said, &amp;quot;you remind me of something that we do at home. And I&#039;d like to tell you about it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;At home, we have a fire-starting ceremony in which several men get around a circle, and there is some straw or hay or wood chips, something to ignite—and then each of the men will strike flint, hitting, hitting, trying to make that spark jump. But it is not going to be all of you that starts that fire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;At home, all of the young men strike the stone, over and over. Strike, strike, strike but only one makes the spark jump. And one spark ignites the fire. So it will be tomorrow. Each will strike. All of you will speak. And one spark will ignite the hearts of all those people, of the representatives of the various countries, of the NGOs, of the mass media. Your mission is to light the fire, to ignite the hearts. You remind me of those young men striking stone.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone nodded silently. Then Russell Means reached into his pocket and pulled out a butane lighter. &amp;quot;Here. Let&#039;s try this one too,&amp;quot; he said.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Phillip laughed. Juan Condori laughed too, nodding, looking pleased. He turned to the interpreter. &amp;quot;And how is it that the Lakota say to agree?&amp;quot; he asked in Spanish. Then he remembered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Ho!&amp;quot; he said loudly, &amp;quot;Ho!&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Grandfather David Monongye offered a prayer and everyone surrounded him. He was wrapped in a blanket, a short, wiry man with a face full of years. Everyone&#039;s thoughts came together on the hope that what would be said that morning would be heard. The old man looked to the Earth, and he looked to the sky, and he offered his prayer to the four directions, and he spoke as only a Hopi could speak, and then the drum sounded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
People lined up and the elders took their places, the chiefs, then everyone else—the young men drumming, their voices raised high.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There were photographers all around now (they had been restricted during the prayer) and they followed to the side and behind and some ran backwards in front, stumbling over each other. The delegations marched. Sacred Pipes leading as delegations march. The warriors carried the drum, the women held their shawls. Some of the young people half danced, half walked, and you could see many legs and feet on the hard pavement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Heya ... heya ... heya ... heya&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I remember running in front to take a few pictures running backwards too, and crouching down to shoot, and loom strong and beautiful the people looked and how they kept on coming. I ran way up ahead, trying to get a shot that would encompass them all, and through the lens of the camera there was the center leading, which was the men with the Pipes, the men carrying their Pipes very high and their serious proud faces and behind them the people spreading out, coming old, and all around them and rising behind them was the early morning light and the city of Geneva. Then I circled way around the back and by now the people were on the grounds of the Palais des Nations. Looking up over the backs of their heads at the windows of the United Nations buildings you could see many faces and heads sticking out, and out the doors were coming small crowds. It was obvious that the work of the whole place had been halted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
People smiled and a few waved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the entrance to the building the drum was silenced. Grandfather David offered a second prayer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then another song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And from the windows and doors of the United Nations&#039; buildings all those people began to clap and cheer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then the People went inside.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
North and South—the American contingent. The affluence of the North; the poverty of the South. The &amp;quot;underdevelopment&amp;quot; of the South; the &amp;quot;overdevelopment&amp;quot; of the North. And what does it all mean to Indian people?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A press conference. Many pretty words of welcome, an equal number of insulting questions. Will they ever understand that this is not a game?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Several spokesmen tried to explain it. The meaning of sovereignty. The respect for Mother Earth. The search for integrity, the circle of life.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The reporters wanted to see the medallion around Phillip Deere&#039;s neck.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Oh, very nice,&amp;quot; they said.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The next day we read the headlines: &amp;quot;INDIANS DO SCALP DANCE AT THE U.N.,&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;INDIANS HOME TO UNEARTH WAR HATCHET!&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Late at night in Geneva. Narrow European streets. Cobblestone. Eight, nine Indians walking in the dark, hands in pockets, hunched over shoulders, trying to guard off the chill.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is a drizzly night, full of shadows. Small cars race by, like miniature toys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The men walk against the wind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One throws back his head, sideways. &amp;quot;In my land I would be warm,&amp;quot; he says, the words carried by the wind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Ah-hah!&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Don&#039;t talk!&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Oh Yes!&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;And myself,&amp;quot; says another voice, &amp;quot;I would have my woman rub my neck.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Under the blanket!&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And they laugh. There&#039;s a strong wind now. Cold, cold.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the way and there is a bar restaurant. There is a glimpse through a window—vapor on the glass—and warm, light faces inside, some noise, a crowd, beer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They must go around the parked cars, spreading out once more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Just like at home. Ay!&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Walking against the wind, on the cobblestone street in Geneva very late.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;I don&#039;t know, my brothers. Sometimes it tires me—conferences, conferences—so much talk!&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Are you asking: is it worth it?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The men laugh.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;They do that, brothers, in my country. They push us to the side and drive their big cars through, through, through!&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Aymara pretends to hold a steering wheel, pushing, pushing. Now he is angry. &amp;quot;They think we are beasts!&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;They do. They do.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Indian people of Brazil could not come. There they are considered as children, minors who must travel with a guardian, a white Brazilian. &amp;quot;Do you need a guardian my brother?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;That they know already.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Oh, I see.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The men laugh sadly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;You know. In my country they call us pigs. It is the same as saying Indian!&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Brother. And will Geneva buy me a pair of shoes?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Laughter, laughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Brothers, we are here to talk. That is something. Let the words go out!&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;It makes a difference. Look, say it, let the words go out!&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Brother Constantine—it got him out of a cell.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Say enough—enough—we let it loose. It will carry itself.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;If enough of us say it together.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The nine figures are walking in a huddle in the shadows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One man sings a song—a lifting, beautiful song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Two men walk comfortably with their arms around each other&#039;s shoulders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Brothers, brothers, I love you all—but I don&#039;t want to see you again. Not here. Send someone else next time.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Send someone else!&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Yes. That is the spirit. We grow strong together. There is no doubt. We share it. Send someone else next time.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Sing another song then. Sing, will you. Sing.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Aymaras look down. But then: &amp;quot;Brothers,&amp;quot; one says, &amp;quot;if they want my picture, they can&#039;t have it.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He looks up, straight at the photographers. Under his breath he says, &amp;quot;It is going to take more than cameras to shoot me up.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And another one looks up—a dark face, with red, tired eyes. &amp;quot;They&#039;ll have to cut my heart out.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dan Bomberry, of the Haudenosaunee Delegation, is around. He too carries a camera, this one with a long lens. The Aymaras like him. He crouches down, shoots. He shoots again and again, from the sides, from the back.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The photographers shoot back at the Aymaras and at the Bolivian military attaché and his staff. They laugh at him scoffingly. Bomberry then shoots them. Stephen Gaskin, an Independent observer from the community, he is also recruited. He has a crummy, dinky camera, but wields it with flair, joining the skirmish, shooting, shooting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pretty soon the two photographers retreat. But the Bolivian military minister&#039;s face is red.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I remember a couple of tall, well-dressed, mustachioed Mexicans cornering young Natalio, a Nahuatl delegate. They loomed over him, with serious, threatening faces.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Mexican government will not have it said it mistreats &amp;quot;our&amp;quot; Indians, they said.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Furthermore,&amp;quot; one of the men said, &amp;quot;there are only eight million Indians in our country—not twelve million as your report said.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Natalio shrugged. &amp;quot;You know these figures are hard to ascertain.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Eight million!&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Natalio looked away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;And another thing we want mentioned: the Indians fought for Mexico, in many wars.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;I know,&amp;quot; Natalio said. &amp;quot;I know we did.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Nicaraguan ambassador to Geneva tried to call one of the Misquitos out of a meeting. The Indian wouldn&#039;t go.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;This is friendly,&amp;quot; the ambassador sent word.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They met for dinner one night. &amp;quot;Our position is very clear,&amp;quot; the Misquito said. &amp;quot;We are one hundred thousand people, within our territories. We are not you and you are not us.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One day the Yecuana from Venezuela looked troubled, withdrawn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;They are pressuring me,&amp;quot; he said. &amp;quot;There are threats.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And of course Bolivia—where the struggle is intensifying and the Indian people have vowed to dust off their old, hidden rifles because no longer can they tolerate the humiliation and oppression—and this is it: if the &amp;quot;Rhodesians&amp;quot; move in, apartheid becomes official.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the United States, the word is out that Russell Means will again be imprisoned—his parole broken too blatantly, too politically. The court won&#039;t tolerate it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So it goes. And some others too, that one cannot mention.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We were tired. Everyone was tired, but I don&#039;t mean tired in that way that one begins to forget things. No, rather I mean tired in that way that all your emotional reserves, your usual, everyday customary buffers have been used up, and so whatever is around you enters your being and flows through you and becomes part of what you are, and Segwalise was groping.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;As a person who has helped work to achieve this time, this first time when our people have come here as one people of the Western Hemisphere to talk to the world and try to explain the conditions that we face, that what I have seen in the past year of work on this is that there has been an organic growth, as when you put that seed into the Earth and you know that the various things of the Earth work together with that seed to bring about a good thing for the life of all the people. That cycle has been going on since the deepest concern in this work has always been that unfortunately the people who occupy our part of the world with us, for whatever reasons seem to have a vicious strain in them. It may be because their guilt is so overwhelming about how they treat us, that sometimes they have to murder us, or jail us, or assassinate our leaders, or carry on acts against our people.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;I hope that those of you who sit in this room with us, as representatives of the co-occupiers of our part of the world, you will be able to think before a little bit about our lives, our aspirations, our wants, our desires, before you send your final reports home. Before you send your reports home that may cause a ... a ... death. That may cause a death among a people that I have come to know and love. Because if one of them disappears from the face of this Earth, because they came here to speak the truth about the conditions we live in, and the things we have to face, the people who remember that man&#039;s death will be coming after you.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then he said: &amp;quot;I want to say,&amp;quot; he began slowly, and he looked toward the Bolivian government representatives. This was for them. It was from us to them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;We have a chance in the Western Hemisphere, to work together as human beings, as people. And as the Native people of this land we have come to this World Council to try to show you that even through all the things you have done to us, we still have a feeling of kindness in our hearts. If you continue, do not be surprised by the reaction the people reap upon you. What you create today, how you say it, how you feel it, how you manifest it as you walk upon the Earth, it comes back to you. It always goes in a full circle. If you find it in your heart to be human beings, to give a little bit of life, a little bit of consideration for us as human beings, then it comes back. And that&#039;s the balance of this Way of Life that we carry on our side of the world. And we always try, we always try to put it into your hearts and into your minds. Don&#039;t let your economic interests, don&#039;t let your military interests override your humanity. Because we are not going to go away, we are not going to disappear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;We are going to be here for a very long time. And every morning when you wake up, somehow, someplace, somewhere, you are going to have to face us again. So let&#039;s try in your reports home, and in our reports home, to look for ways that we can get back to the good life in the Western Hemisphere.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wild applause, everyone on their feet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Epilogue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
José Mendoza, the Guaymi delegate came back with us for a visit. This was a few days after the conference, and we were sitting in one of the hilltop cabins at Nuri. Mendoza looked up from the table and said: &amp;quot;I must confess. I am truly confused.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It was his first visit to North America. We had flown into Syracuse and after a day&#039;s rest at Onondaga, had traveled the fast, easy highways north to Akwesasne.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;This is a strange land,&amp;quot; Mendoza kept saying.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Late at night he asked the crucial question: &amp;quot;Tell me,&amp;quot; he said, &amp;quot;in this country, just how does one know who are the Indians?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A big question—a big, big question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In his country, Mendoza said, Indians don&#039;t drive pick-up trucks; Indians don&#039;t work at big money jobs. Part of that is the poverty of the Panamanian society, he said. But also, it is widely recognized in the communities that once you begin to move into that life you cease to be an Indian. This began a long discussion that night, around the table. We talked about the People—how they defined themselves, what kind of principles they lived by. Then we talked about poverty and wealth—how they were two sides of the same force, how they could be used as instruments of oppression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We talked about North and South, about the attempt to live an integral life, and we came to understand how the way of life of Indian people is just as perversely (and maybe even more thoroughly) oppressed by wealth as it is by forced poverty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The next morning there was to be a report on Geneva in the Longhouse at Akwesasne. I stayed behind in the mountains to finish up some work, but Mendoza went along.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Longhouse was crowded with people—and, after the reports, which were delivered in Mohawk, there was much dancing and singing and a feast.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mendoza came back late that night. He was smiling.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;The consciousness,&amp;quot; he said. &amp;quot;I feel good tonight. Down there, at Akwesasne.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;##&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; A Basic Call to Consciousness&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; The Haudenosaunee Address to the Western World&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;####&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Geneva, Switzerland Autumn 1977&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is impossible to overstate the power of thought that emerges from that document, today, it is almost impossible for us to recreate the scene of its birth. But centuries ago, a Natural World people gathered together at the head of a lake in the center of North America&#039;s then virgin forest, and there they counseled. The principles that emerged are unequaled in any political document that has yet emerged. They evolved a law that recognized that superbly complex organization rise internally of hierarchy, and they dedicated the organization of their society to function to prevent the abuse of humans by other humans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It was not long ago that the Haudenosaunee, or Six Nations, were a powerful people, occupying a vast territory stretching from Vermont to Ohio, and from present day Québec to Tennessee. At the period of first contact early during the seventeenth century, the Haudenosaunee occupied hundreds of towns and villages throughout the country.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Secondly, they looked into their own histories to discover the things that cause conflict among people. They saw, for times struggle over hunting territories, and they did a curious thing. They abolished the significance of such territories and guaranteed the safety of anyone entering the country of the Haudenosaunee. And they established universal laws about the treatment and taking of game, because the taking of game sometimes caused conflicts. In the country of the Haudenosaunee, the basic principle of peace went further than the simple absence of conflict. They created an ordered society that has the capability of protecting people against abuse and, at the same time, is dedicated to a containment of hierarchy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Great Tree of Peace. The Haudenosaunee sought to carry the principles of peace far from the council fires, into every dwelling in the country of the Haudenosaunee. Thus does the Great Law establish more than a code of conduct—it is also the bearing point for the modern clans. It embodies the foundations of all the explanations and messages on wampum, of assigning titles to leaders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee raised their children from the cradleboard to be participants in the culture. The ways of the Haudenosaunee have always been powerfully spiritual in nature, and it is true that the government, the economy, everything that is Haudenosaunee has deep spiritual roots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The papers that follow are the position papers that were presented by the Haudenosaunee to the Non-Governmental Organizations of the United Nations in Geneva, Switzerland, in September 1977. The Non-Governmental Organizations had called for papers that describe the conditions of oppression suffered by Native people under three subject headings, and asked that supportive statements be given to the Sub-Commissions. The Haudenosaunee, the Six Nations Council at Onondaga, sent these three papers that constitute an abbreviated summary of our history.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Natural World peoples as the clearest indicator that human beings are in trouble on this planet. It is a call to a basic consciousness that has ancient roots and ultramodern, even futuristic, manifestations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is a statement that points to the fact that humans are abusing one another, that they are abusing the planet they live on, and that they are even abusing themselves. It is a message, certainly the first ever delivered to a world body, that identifies the process of that abuse as Western civilization as a whole way of life—and acknowledges the immense complexity implied by that statement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What is presented here is nothing less audacious than a cosmology of the industrialized world presented by the most politically powerful and independent non-Western political body surviving in North America. It is, in a way, the modern world through Pleistocene eyes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scholars and casual readers alike should question the significance, in the age of the neutron bomb, Watergate, and nuclear energy plant proliferation, of a statement by a North American Indian people. But there is probably some argument to be made for the appropriateness of such a statement at this time. Most of the world&#039;s professed traditions are fairly recent in origin. Islam is perhaps fifteen hundred years old; Christianity claims a two thousand year history; Judaism is perhaps two thousand years older than Christianity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But the Native people can probably lay claim to a tradition that reaches back to at least the end of the Pleistocene, and which, in all probability, goes back much farther than that.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is some evidence that humanoid creatures have been present on the Earth for at least two million years, and that humans who looked very much like us were in evidence in the Northern Hemisphere at least as long ago as the second interglacial period. People who are familiar with the Haudenosaunee beliefs will recognize that modern scientific evidence shows that the Native customs of today are not markedly different from those practiced by ancient peoples at least seventy thousand years ago. Indeed, if an Iroquois traditionalist were to seek a career in the study of Pleistocene Man, he may find that he already knows more about the most ancient belief systems than do the modern scholars.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Be that as it may, the Haudenosaunee position is derived from a philosophy that sees The People with historical roots that extend back tens of thousands of years. It is a geological kind of perspective, which sees modern man as an infant, occupying a very short space of time in an incredibly long spectrum. It is the perspective of the oldest elder looking into the affairs of a young child and seeing that he is committing incredibly destructive folly. It is, in short, the statement of a people who are ageless but who trace their history as a people to the very beginning of life. And they are speaking, in this instance, to a world that dates back its existence from a little over five hundred years ago, and perhaps, in many cases, much more recently than that.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And it is, to our knowledge, the very first such statement to be issued by a Native nation. What follows are not research products of psychologists, historians, or anthropologists. The papers that follow are the first authentic analysis of the modern world ever committed to writing by an official body of Native people.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Spiritualism: The Highest Form of Political Consciousness&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;####&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; The Haudenosaunee Message to the Western World&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee, or the Six Nations Iroquois Confederacy, has existed on this land since the beginning of human memory. Our culture is among the most ancient, continuously existing cultures in the world. We still remember the earliest doings of human beings. We remember the original instructions of the Creators of Life on this place we call Ionkhi&#039;nisténha onhwéntsia—Mother Earth. We are the spiritual guardians of this place. We are the Onkwehon:we—the Real People.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the beginning, we were told that the human beings who walk about the Earth have been provided with all the things necessary for life. We were instructed to carry a love for one another, and to show a great respect for all the beings of this Earth. We are shown that our life exists with the tree life, that our well-being depends on the well-being of the vegetable life, that we are close relatives of the four-legged beings. In our ways, spiritual consciousness is the highest form of politics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ours is a Way of Life. We believe that all living things are spiritual beings. Spirits can be expressed as energy forms manifested in matter. A blade of grass is an energy form manifested in matter—grass matter. The spirit of the grass is that unseen force that produces the species of grass, and it is manifest to us in the form of real grass.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All things of the world are real, material things. The Creation is a true, material phenomenon, and the Creation manifests itself to us through reality. The spiritual universe, then, is manifest to man as the Creation, the Creation that supports life. We believe that man is real, a part of Creation, and that his duty is to support life in conjunction with the other beings. That is why we call ourselves Onkwehon:we—Real People.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The original instructions direct that we who walk about on the Earth are to express great respect, an affection, and a gratitude toward all the spirits that create and support the many supporters of our own lives—the corn, beans, squash, the winds, the sun. When people cease to respect and express attitude for these many things, then all life will be destroyed, and human life on this planet will come to an end.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our roots are deep in the lands where we live. We have a great love for our country, for our birthplace is there. The soil is rich from the bones of thousands of our generations. Each of us was created in those lands, and it is our duty to take great care of them, because from these lands will spring the future generations of the Onkwehon:we. We walk about with a great respect, for the Earth is a very sacred place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We are not a people who demand or ask anything of the Creators of Life; instead, we give feelings and thanks that all the forces of life are still at work. We deeply understand our relationship to all living things. To this day, the territories we still hold are filled with trees, animals, and the other gifts of the Creation. In these places we still receive our nourishment from our Mother Earth.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have seen that not all people of the Earth show the same kind of respect for this world and its beings. The Indo-European people who have colonized our lands have shown little respect for the things that create and support life. We believe that these people ceased their respect for the world a long time ago. Many thousands of years ago, all the people of the world believed in the same Way of Life, that of harmony with the universe. All lived according to the Natural Ways.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Around ten thousand years ago, peoples who spoke Indo-European languages lived in the area that today we know as the Steppes of Russia. At that time, they were a Natural World people who lived off the land. They had developed agriculture, and it is said that they had begun the practice of animal domestication. It is not known that they were the first people in the world to practice animal domestication. The hunters and gatherers who roamed the area probably acquired animals from the agricultural people and adopted an economy based on the herding and breeding of animals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Herding and breeding of animals signaled a basic alteration in the relationship of humans to other life forms. It set into motion one of the true revolutions in human history. Until herding, humans depended on nature for the reproductive powers of the animal world. With the advent of herding, humans assumed the functions that had for all time been the functions of the spirits of the animals. Sometime after this happened, history records the first appearance of the social organization known as &amp;quot;patriarchy.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The area between the Tigris and Euphrates Rivers was the homeland, in ancient times, of various peoples, many of whom spoke Semitic languages. The Semitic people were among the first in the world to develop irrigation technology. This development led to the early development of towns, and eventually cities. The manipulation of the waters, another form of spirit life, represented another way in which humans developed a technology that reproduced a function of nature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within these cultures, stratified hierarchical social organization crystallized. The ancient civilizations developed imperialism, partly because of the very nature of cities. Cities are obviously population concentrations. Most importantly though, they are places that must import the material needs of this concentration from the countryside. This means that the Natural World must be subjugated, extracted from, and exploited in the interest of the city. To give order to this process, the Semitic world developed early codes of law. They also developed the idea of monotheism to serve as a spiritual model for their material and political organization.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Much of the history of the ancient world accounts the struggles between the Indo-Europeans and the Semitic peoples. Over a period of several millennia, the two cultures clashed and blended. By the second millennium BC, some Indo-Europeans, most specifically the Greeks, had adopted the practice of building cities, thus becoming involved in the process they named &amp;quot;civilization.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Both cultures developed technologies peculiar to civilizations. The Semitic peoples invented kilns, which enabled the creation of pottery for trade and the storage of surpluses. These early kilns eventually evolved into ovens that could generate enough heat to smelt metals, notably copper, tin, and bronze. The Indo-Europeans developed a way of smelting iron.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rome fell heir to these two cultures and become the place where the final meshing occurs. Rome is also the true birth place of Christianity. The process that has become the culture of the West is historically and linguistically a Semitic/Judeo-European culture, but has been commonly termed the Judeo-Christian tradition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Christianity was an absolutely essential element in the early development of this kind of technology. Christianity advocated only one God. It was a religion that imposed itself exclusive of all other beliefs. The local people of the European forests were a people who believed in the spirits of the forests, waters, hills, and the land. Christianity attacked those beliefs and effectively despiritualized the European world. The Christian peoples, who possessed superior weaponry and a need for expansion, were able to militarily subjugate the tribal peoples of Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The availability of iron led to the development of tools that could cut down the forest, the source of charcoal to make more tools. The newly cleared land was then turned by the newly developed iron plow that was, for the first time, pulled by horses. With that technology, many fewer people would work much more land, and many other people were effectively displaced to become soldiers and landless peasants. The rise of that technology ushered in the Feudal Age and eventually made possible the rise of new cities and growing trade. It also spelled the beginning of the end of the European forest, although that process took a long time to complete.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The eventual rise of cities and the concurrent rise of the European state created the thrust of expansion and a search for markets that led men, such as Columbus, to set sail across the Atlantic. The development of sailing vessels and navigation technologies made the European &amp;quot;discovery&amp;quot; of the Americas inevitable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Americas provided Europeans a vast new area for expansion and material exploitation. Initially, the Americas provided new materials and even finished materials for the developing world economy that was based on Indo-European technologies. European civilization has a history of rising and falling as its technologies reach their material and cultural limits. The finite natural world has always provided a kind of built-in contradiction to Western expansion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Indo-Europeans attacked every aspect of North America with unparalleled zeal. The Native people were ruthlessly destroyed because they were an unassimilable element to the civilizations of the West. The forests provided materials for larger ships, the land was fresh and fertile for agricultural surpluses, and some areas provided sources of slave labor for the conquering invaders. By the time of the Industrial Revolution in the mid-nineteenth century, North America was already a leader in the area of the development of extractive technology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The hardwood forests of the Northeast were not cleared for the purpose of providing farmlands. Those forests were destroyed to create charcoal for the fires of the iron smelters and blacksmiths. By the 1890s, the West had turned to coal, a fossil fuel, to provide the energy necessary for the many new forms of machinery that had been developed. During the first half of the twentieth century, oil had replaced coal as a source of energy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Western culture has been horribly exploitative and destructive of the Natural World. Over one hundred forty species of birds and animals were utterly destroyed since the European arrival in the Americas, largely because they were unusable in the eyes of the invaders. The forests were leveled, the waters polluted, the Native people subjected to genocide. The vast herds of herbivores were reduced to mere handfuls; the buffalo nearly became extinct. Western technology and the people who have employed it have been the most amazingly destructive forces in all of human history. No natural disaster has ever destroyed as much. Not even the Ice Ages counted as many victims.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
But like the hardwood forests, the fossil fuels are also finite resources. As the second half of the twentieth century progressed, the people of the West began looking to other forms of energy to motivate their technology. Their eyes settled on atomic energy, a form of energy production that has by-products that are the most poisonous substances ever known to man.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today, man is facing the very survival of the human species. The way of life known as &amp;quot;Western Civilization&amp;quot; is on a death path, and its culture has no viable answers. When faced with the reality of its own destructiveness, Western civilization can only go forward into areas of more efficient destruction. The appearance of plutonium on this planet is the clearest of signals that our species is in trouble. It is a signal that most Westerners have chosen to ignore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The air is foul, the waters poisoned, the trees dying, the animals are disappearing. We think even the systems of weather are changing. Our ancient teaching warned us that if man interfered with the natural laws, these things would come to be. When the last of the Natural Way of Life is gone, all hope for human survival will be gone with it. And our Way of Life is fast disappearing, a victim of the destructive processes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The other position papers of the Haudenosaunee have outlined our analysis of economic and legal oppression. But our essential message to the world is a basic call to consciousness. The destruction of the Native cultures and people is the same process that has destroyed and is destroying life on this planet. The technologies and social systems that have destroyed the animals and the forest life are also destroying the Native people. And that process is Western civilization.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We know that there are many people in the world who can quickly grasp the intent of our message. But experience has taught us that there are few who are willing to seek out a method for moving toward any real change. But if there is to be a future for all beings on this planet, we must begin to seek the avenues of change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The processes of colonialism and imperialism that have affected the Haudenosaunee are but a microcosm of the processes affecting the world.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system of reservations employed against our people is a microcosm of the system of exploitation used against the whole world. Since the time of Marco Polo, the West has been refining a process that mystified the peoples of the Earth.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The majority of the world does not find its roots in Western culture or traditions. The majority of the world finds its roots in the Natural World, and it is the Natural World and the traditions of the Natural World that must prevail if we are to develop truly free and egalitarian societies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is necessary at this time to begin a process of critical analysis of the West&#039;s historical processes, to seek out the actual nature of the roots of the exploitative and oppressive conditions that are forced upon humanity. At the same time, as we gain an understanding of those processes, we must reinterpret that history to the people of the world. It is the people of the West, ultimately, who are most oppressed and exploited. They are burdened by the weight of centuries of racism, sexism, and ignorance, which has rendered their people insensitive to the true nature of their lives.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We must all consciously and continuously challenge every model, every program, and every process that the West tries to force upon us. Paulo Freire wrote in his book *Pedagogy of the Oppressed* that the oppressed imitate the oppressor, and by such actions try to gain relief from the oppressive condition. We must learn to resist that response to oppression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The people who are living on this planet need to break with the concept of human liberation and begin to see liberation as something that needs to be extended to the whole of the Natural World. What is needed is the liberation of all the things that support life—the air, the waters, the trees—all the things that support the sacred Web of Life.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We feel that the Native peoples of the Western Hemisphere can continue to contribute to the survival potential of the human species. The majority of our peoples still live in accordance with the traditions that find their roots in the Mother Earth. But the Native peoples have need of a forum where our voice can be heard. And we need alliances with other peoples of the world to assist in our struggle to regain and maintain our ancestral lands and to protect the Way of Life we follow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We know that this is a very difficult task. Many nation states may feel threatened by the position that the protection and liberation of Natural World peoples and cultures represent a progressive direction that must be integrated into the political strategies of people who seek to uphold the dignity of man. But that position is growing in strength, and it represents a necessary strategy in the evolution of progressive thought.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The traditional Native peoples hold the key to the reversal of the processes in Western civilization that hold the promise of unimaginable future suffering and destruction. Spiritualism is the highest form of political consciousness. And we, the Native peoples of the Western Hemisphere, are among the world&#039;s surviving proprietors of that kind of consciousness. We are here to impart that message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; The Obvious Fact of Our Continuing Existence&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;####&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Legal History of the Haudenosaunee&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since the beginning of human time, the Haudenosaunee have occupied the distinct territories that we call our homelands. That occupation has been both organized and continuous. We have long defined the borders of our country, have long maintained the exclusive use-right of the areas within those borders—and have used those territories as the ethnic and cultural definitions of our nation. The Haudenosaunee are a distinct people, with our own laws, customs, territories, political organization, and economy. In short, the Haudenosaunee, or Six Nations, fits in every way every definition of nationhood.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ours is one of the most complex social-political structures still functioning in the world. The Haudenosaunee Council is one of the most ancient, continuously functioning governments anywhere on this planet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our society is one of the most complex anywhere. From our social and political institutions has come inspiration for some of the institutions and political philosophies of the modern world. The philosophies of the socialist world, too, are to some extent traceable to European contact with the Haudenosaunee. Lewis Henry Morgan noted the economic structure of the Haudenosaunee, which he termed both primitive and communistic. Karl Marx used Morgan&#039;s observations for the development of a model for a classless, post capitalist society. The modern world has been greatly influenced by the fact of our existence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It may seem strange, at this time, that we are here, asserting the obvious fact of our continuing existence. For countless centuries, the fact of our existence was unquestioned, and for all honest human beings, it remains unquestioned today. We have existed since time immemorial. We have always conducted our own affairs from our territories under our own laws and customs. We have never, under those laws and customs, willingly or fairly surrendered either our territories or our freedoms. Never, in the history of the Haudenosaunee, have our people or our government sworn allegiance to a European sovereign. In that simple fact lies the roots of our oppression as a people and the purpose of our journey here before the world community.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The problems incurred in the recent &amp;quot;legal history&amp;quot; of the Haudenosaunee began long before European contact with Native people. It began, at least, with the rise of a system called feudalism in Europe, for the only law that the colonizing countries of Europe ever recognized was feudal law, a fact that they have obscured from their own people as well as from Native people for many centuries. That fact, however, remains the essential reality of the legal relationships that exist between Native peoples and European societies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Feudal society in Europe appears to have arisen as the result of a number of conditions that existed following the dissolution of the Roman Empire. It was based on a system by which rulers or warrior castes became strong enough to demand and extract fealty from warriors. There arose, generally, an administrative center, usually a castle, and around these were agricultural people who were usually protected from outside aggression by their &amp;quot;lord,&amp;quot; the sovereign of the manor. It appears likely that new technologies arose that created economies that made the feudal society both possible and perhaps even inevitable in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The feudal lord often held dictatorial power over his &amp;quot;subjects,&amp;quot; especially the peasants. Military protection was necessary because of the continuous state of &amp;quot;fending&amp;quot; among the various lords. The &amp;quot;peaceful people,&amp;quot; or peasants, were caught in the middle. The land and everything on it, including the animals, plants, and people, were under the domination or dominion of the feudal &amp;quot;lords.&amp;quot; This lord demanded loyalty and a part of the peasant&#039;s crops, as well as some of his or her labor. Feudalism could be far more brutal and humiliating than is outlined in many histories. Some feudal lords exercised what was called &amp;quot;the right of the first night&amp;quot;—a custom that referred to the right of a lord to a peasant&#039;s bride.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prior to the rise of feudalism, it is fair to state that most of the agricultural people of Europe were local tribesmen of various kinds. Feudalism imposed the concept of sovereign, dictatorial rulers whose rule was imposed by military might and gave rise to the true European peasantry. The crystallization of centralized executive power served to separate civilized societies from primitive societies. It is immaterial whether such controls are located in a feudal castle or in the executive offices of the capitals of nation states. The appearance of the hierarchical state marks the transition of food cultivators in general to the more specific definition contained in the concepts of peasantry. When the cultivator becomes dependent upon and integrated into a society in which he is subject to the demands of people who are defined by a class other than his own, he becomes appropriately termed a peasant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The state of a medieval European peasant was not a pleasant one. Peasants have no rights, save those granted by their lord. They cannot own the land as a people. Only the sovereign owns or possesses sovereignty. Peasants were often treated as chattel. They were bought, sold, and inherited with the land. They were a people who had been dispossessed of their freedom. At some points in history, the tribal peoples of Europe became peasants through a combination of forces, the most direct being military pressure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A peasant is not a member of a true community of people. His society is incomplete without the town or city. It is trade with the town or city, an economic relationship, that defines the early stages of peasantry. As trade becomes more necessary, for whatever reasons, the tribesman becomes increasingly less of a tribesman and more of a peasant. The process is neither immediate nor is it necessarily absolute, but to the degree that a tribesman becomes dependent, he becomes less of a tribesman.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To a great extent, the process by which people lost their freedom in Europe was economic in nature. The medieval castles were military forts and functioned as kinds of storehouses, but they also developed into trade centers and eventually towns. In the early stages of feudalism, the agricultural worker &amp;quot;traded&amp;quot; his freedom for security from military aggression. But increasingly, over the centuries, a primary function of the medieval town became that of the marketplace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;It is the market, in one form or another, that pulls out from the compact social relations of self-contained primitive communities some parts of men&#039;s doings and puts people into fields of economic activity that are increasingly independent of the rest of what goes on in local life. The local traditional and moral world and the wider and more impersonal world of the market are in principle distinct, and opposed to each other.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The European &amp;quot;discovery&amp;quot; of North America led to the transposition of European medieval law and customs to the Americas. To be sure, Spanish medieval law differed in some respects from that of France, and both differed in some respects from that of England, but an understanding of Medieval Europe is essential to an analysis of European-Haudenosaunee legal history and also to any analysis of the process of colonialism. Medieval Europe is the period of the rise of growing centralization and anarchy; therefore Indians did not have government at all. And THEREFORE Europeans could not have been doing anything wrong—were in fact performing a noble mission—by bringing government and civilization to the poor savages. Today, as in medieval times, the Judeo-European government follows a &amp;quot;might makes right&amp;quot; policy. Colonialism is a process often misunderstood and misinterpreted. It is a policy that has long survived the medieval period in which it was born. Many Western institutions are in fact colonial institutions of Western culture. The churches, for example, operate in virtually the same manner as did the feudal lords. First, they identify a people whose loyalty they wish to secure in an expansionist effort. Then they charter a group to conduct a &amp;quot;mission.&amp;quot; If that group is successful, they become, in effect, the spiritual sovereigns or dictators of those whose loyalty they command. That process in organized Christianity may actually be more ancient than the process of political colonialism described here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Modern multinational corporations operate in much the same manner. They identify a market or an area that has the resources they want. They obtain a charter, or some form of protection, from a Western government, and they send what amounts to a colonizing force into the area. If they successfully penetrate the area, that area becomes a sort of economic colony of the multinational. The greatest resistance to that form of penetration has been mounted by local peoples.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In North America, educational institutions operate under the same colonial process. Schools are chartered by a sovereign (such as the state, or the Bureau of Indian Affairs) to penetrate the Native community. The purpose in doing so is to integrate the Native people into society as workers and consumers, the Industrial Society&#039;s version of peasants. The sovereign recognizes, and practically allows, no other form of socializing institution for the young. As in the days of the medieval castle the sovereign demands absolute fealty. Under this peculiar legal system, the Western sovereign denies the existence of those whose allegiance he cannot obtain. Some governments have created official statuses. In the United States, the colonizer has created two categories of Native peoples: federally recognized and non-federally recognized. In more recent years, the government has taken to a policy of nonrecognition of an entity entitled &amp;quot;Urban Indians.&amp;quot; In Canada there exist four legal definitions of Native people. They are divided into &amp;quot;status,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;non-status,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;metis,&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;enfranchised.&amp;quot; Both countries carry on the policy of &amp;quot;Indians and Eskimos,&amp;quot; as though Eskimos were a separate people of the Western Hemisphere.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The United States and Canada practice blatant colonialism in the areas affecting political institutions of the Native peoples. In 1924, Canada&#039;s new Indian Act established the legal sanction for the imposition of neocolonial &amp;quot;elective system&amp;quot; governments within the Native peoples&#039; territories. In the United States, the same goal was accomplished with the passage of the 1934 Indian Reorganization Act (IRA). Both pieces of legislation provided compulsory, chartered, political colonies among Native peoples. These &amp;quot;elective systems&amp;quot; owe their existence and fealty to the United States and Canada, and not to the Native peoples. They are, by definition, colonies that create classes of political peasants. They are governments only to the degree an external social caste allows them to be governments. They are, in most places in Native peoples&#039; territories, the only forms of government recognized by the colonizers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This concept of illegitimacy is then interpreted into official government policy. The colonizing governments have consistently denied the existence of the Haudenosaunee government. They have consistently asserted that the traditional chiefs have no authority. This has been done on the grounds that the U.S. Congress cannot commit fraud and that the courts cannot question Congress&#039; political judgment, although the United States courts find congressional acts in other areas of the law to be unconstitutional regularly. Because the Haudenosaunee refused to sell the land, the United States simply refused to recognize our government. Instead, they recognized those colonized individuals who would agree to sell the land and whose loyalties lie with Washington. In 1848, the United States simply recognized an &amp;quot;elective system&amp;quot; on the Seneca Nation lands, creating a colonial government on the largest of our remaining territories in what is called by the colonizers &amp;quot;New York State.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There followed a long list of moves by the United States to exterminate the Haudenosaunee. There were treaties that entirely dispossessed, for all practical purposes, the Cayuga and Oneida Nations in their ancestral lands. There were treaties, such as the Treaty of 1797, which recognized the sale by individuals of the territory of the Kanienkehaka, an area of nine million acres of land exchanged for the sum of one thousand dollars. There were attempts from 1821 to 1842 to remove the Haudenosaunee from the territories called &amp;quot;New York&amp;quot; by the colonists to other areas now called Wisconsin and Kansas. These efforts resulted in the displacement of some of our people to those areas. In 1851, there was an attempt to evict the Seneca people from their lands at Tonawanda.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1856, there was an attempt to divide the Haudenosaunee lands into severally under the Dawes Act, an attempt that was not entirely successful. In 1924, the United States passed The Indian Citizenship Act (ICA), which attempted to give United States citizenship to all Native people. The Haudenosaunee strongly rejected the concept that we could ever be United States citizens. But the feudal laws of the colonizers have been relentless.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also in 1924, Canada militarily invaded our territories on the Grand River and forcibly installed a colonial government there. The episode was repeated by Canada in 1934 on our territories at the Thames River community of Oneida.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1948 and 1950, Congress passed laws giving civil and criminal jurisdiction to New York State, although Congress was never given such jurisdiction by the Haudenosaunee. In 1964, Congress passed Public Law 88-533, the Kinzua Dam Act, which resulted in the flooding of almost all of the habitable lands of the Seneca at Alleghany, and virtually destroyed the Native communities and culture there. That act also provided for the termination of the Seneca Nation, a process that would have ended even the colonial government there, and which would have moved the denial of our existence a little closer to reality.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first contact with a Western government came in 1609 when a French military expedition under Samuel Champlain murdered some Mohawk people along the lake that now bears his name. Later, when the Dutch came, the first treaty (or agreement) that we made with a European power was the Two Row, which clarified our position—that we are a distinct, free, and sovereign people. The Dutch accepted that agreement. But the European nations have never honored that agreement. Many times France attempted to dominate the Haudenosaunee through conquest, and England often used every means possible, including coercion, threats, and military force, to extend her sovereignty over us. Each time we resisted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The United States entered into solemn treaties with the Haudenosaunee, and each time has ignored virtually each and every provision of the treaties that guarantee our rights as a separate nation. Many sections of the treaties that refer to land cessions, fraudulently obtained, have validity in the eyes of the United States courts and governments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The soil for the colonization of the Haudenosaunee territory is found in legal fiction in the United States Constitution. That document purports to give power to &amp;quot;regulate Commerce with foreign nations and among the several States, and with Indian tribes.&amp;quot; Contrary to every principle of international law, Congress has expanded that section to an assertion of &amp;quot;plenary&amp;quot; power, a doctrine that asserts absolute authority over our territories. This assertion has been repeatedly urged upon our people, although we have never agreed to that relationship and we have never been conquered in warfare. The Haudenosaunee are vassals to no people—we are a free nation, and we have never surrendered our rights as a free people.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the beginning of its existence, the United States has conducted a policy of terror in the Haudenosaunee territory. Colonial agents entered our country between 1784 and 1842 and returned to Washington with treaties for cessions of land fraudulently obtained with persons not authorized to make land transfers. The Haudenosaunee Council, which is the only legitimate body authorized to conduct land transactions, never signed any agreements surrendering the territories. The United States occupied the lands under a pretext that there were no acts that justified war measures. When the Haudenosaunee gathered evidence to prove that the treaties were fraudulent and therefore illegal under any interpretation of law, the United States courts countered by inventing the Political Question Doctrine. This doctrine basically says that the courts cannot question Congress&#039; political judgment, although the courts find congressional acts in other areas of the law to be unconstitutional regularly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to these legal kinds of colonization, the Haudenosaunee have been subjected to every other kind of colonization imaginable. Churches, school systems, and every form of Western penetration have made political, economic, and cultural peasants of some of our populations. The continuing denial of our political existence has been accomplished by an almost overwhelming psychological, economic, and spiritual attack by the colonial institutions of the West.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For over three hundred years, our people have been under a virtual state of siege. During this entire time we have never once given up our struggle. Our strategies have, of necessity, changed. But the will and determination to continue on remains the same. Throughout these years, European historians have recorded the position of the Haudenosaunee.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During the 1920s, one of our leaders, a man named Deskaheh, came to this city to seek help for his people. At that time, the international body that existed did not truly represent the world community. Many cultures and nations were not recognized. Now, years later, we have returned, and our message remains the same.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our elders have watched the rebirth of this international institution. In 1949, a delegation of the Haudenosaunee attended the foundation ceremony for the United Nations building in New York City. In 1972, our people journeyed to Sweden to take part in an international conference on the environment and ecology. All through these times we have taken notice of the changes that have occurred within this institution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now we find ourselves in Geneva, Switzerland, once again. For those of us present, and the many at home, we have assumed the duty of carrying on our peoples&#039; struggle. Invested in the names we carry today are the lives of thousands of generations of both the past and the future. On their behalf, also, we ask that the Non-Governmental Organizations join us in our struggle to obtain our full rights and protection under the rules of international law and the World Community.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Policies of Oppression in the Name of &amp;quot;Democracy&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;####&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Economic History of the Haudenosaunee&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee, People of the Longhouse, who are known to many Europeans as the Six Nations Iroquois, have inhabited their territories since time immemorial. During the time prior to the coming of the Europeans, it is said that ours were a happy and prosperous people. Our lands provided abundantly for our needs. Our people lived long, healthy, and productive lives. Before the Europeans came, we were an affluent people, rich in the gifts of our country. We were a strong people in both our minds and bodies. Throughout most of that time, we lived in peace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prior to the arrival of the colonists, we were a people who lived by hunting and gathering, and practiced a form of agriculture that was not labor intensive. The economy of the people was an extremely healthful Way of Life, and our peoples were very healthy—among the finest athletes in the world. There were some, in those times, who lived to be one hundred twenty years and more, and our runners were unexcelled for speed and endurance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Among our people we refer to our culture as &amp;quot;Ongwe Honwekah.&amp;quot; This refers to a Way of Life that is peculiar to the Haudenosaunee. It is virtually impossible for us to recount, specifically, the history of &amp;quot;Haudenosaunee economics.&amp;quot; As will become evident, our economy, that way in which our people manage their resources and the relationship of that management to our traditional society, are processes completely bound to other aspects of our culture. Our economy is unlike that of Western peoples. We believe that the things in the world were created by what the English language forces us to call &amp;quot;Spiritual Beings,&amp;quot; including those that we call the Creator. All things in the world belong to the Creator and the spirits of the world. We also believe that we are required to live in respect of the gift of life.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In accordance with our ways, we are required to provide for our leaders, those whom the Anglo people insist are &amp;quot;chiefs,&amp;quot; and our leaders are both political and spiritual leaders. They are leaders of many feasts and ceremonies that require the distribution of great wealth. As spiritual and political leaders, they provide a kind of economic condition. To become a political leader, a person is required to be a spiritual leader; and to become a spiritual leader, a person must be extraordinarily generous in terms of material goods.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our leaders, in fact, are leaders of categories of large extended families. Those large extended families function as economic units in a Way of Life that has as its base the Domestic Mode of Production. Before the colonists came, we had our own means of production and distribution adequate to meet all the peoples&#039; needs. We would have been unable to exist as nations were it not so.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We were a people of a great forest. That forest was a source of great wealth. It was a place in which was to be found huge hardwoods, an unimaginable abundance and variety of nuts, berries, and herbs. In addition to these, the rivers teemed with fish and the forest and meadows abounded with game. It was, in fact, a kind of Utopia, a place where people were happy and healthy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our traditions were such that we were careful not to allow our populations to rise to numbers that would overtax the other forms of life. We practiced strict forms of conservation. Our culture is based on a principle that directs us to constantly think about the welfare of seven generations into the future. Our belief in this principle acts as a restraint to the suffering in the future. To this end, our people took only as many animals as were needed to meet our needs. Not until the arrival of the colonists did the wholesale slaughter of animals occur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We feel that many people will be confused when we say that ours is a spiritual Way of Life, and that our economy cannot be separated from the many aspects of our culture. The Haudenosaunee have no concept of private property. This concept would be a contradiction to a people who believe that the Earth belongs to the Creator. Property is an idea by which people can be excluded from access to lands or other means of producing a livelihood. That idea would destroy our culture, which requires that every individual live in service to the Spiritual Ways and The People. That idea (property) would produce slavery. The acceptance of the idea of property would produce leaders whose functions would favor excluding people from access to property, and they would cease to perform their functions as leaders of our societies and distributors of goods.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before the colonists came, we had no consciousness about a concept of commodities. Everything, even the things we make, belong to the Creators of Life and are to be returned ceremonially, and in reality, to the owners. Our people live a simple life, one unencumbered by the need for endless material commodities. The fact that their needs are few means that all the peoples&#039; needs are easily met. It is also true that our means of distribution is an eminently fair process, one in which all of the people share in all the material wealth all of the time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our Domestic Mode of Production has a number of definitions that are culturally specific. Our peoples&#039; economy requires a community of people and is not intended to define an economy based on the self-sufficient nuclear family. Some modern economists estimate that in most parts of the world the isolated nuclear family cannot produce enough to survive in a Domestic Mode of Production. In any case, that particular mode of subsistence, by our cultural definition, is not an economy at all.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ours was a wealthy society. No one suffered from want. All had the right to food, clothing, and shelter. All shared in the bounty of the spiritual ceremonies and the Natural World. No one stood in any material relationship of power over anyone else. No one could deny anyone access to the material goods they needed. All in all, before the colonists came, ours was a beautiful and rewarding Way of Life.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The colonists arrived with many institutions and strategies designed to destroy the Way of Life of the People of the Longhouse. In 1609, Samuel de Champlain led a French military expedition that attacked a part of the Mohawk people on the lake now named &amp;quot;Lake Champlain.&amp;quot; Champlain arrived in search of wealth and was specifically interested in generating some kind of trade in beaver pelts with the Algonquin people of the area. He demonstrated his firearms to them, letting them see, for the first time, the power of guns.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Champlain, accompanied by his newly found business partners, marched into the center of Mohawk territory. This war party encountered about two hundred Mohawks. The first volley of gunfire killed three men, and the second created such confusion that the Mohawks retreated, leaving twelve men who were taken captive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The period of warfare that followed this incident has come to be known as the &amp;quot;Beaver Wars.&amp;quot; The introduction of trade in beaver pelts inevitably triggered a long series of colonial wars. It represented the escalation of disputes among neighbors into a full-scale struggle for survival in the forests of the Native people of North America.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The European penetration affected every facet of the Native Way of Life from the very moment of contact. The natural economies, cultures, politics, and military affairs became totally altered. Nations learned that to be without firearms meant physical annihilation. To be without access to beaver pelts meant no means to buy firearms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trade in beaver pelts, and the now necessary weaponry, introduced factors never before encountered by the Native people. Trade meant that long routes over which goods were to be transported had to be secured. The only way that was possible was for the entire area to be in friendly hands. Any potential disruptor of the trade routes must either be pacified or eliminated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the introduction of firearms, war became a deadly business. It was made more deadly because the European strategy of economic penetration was to stimulate warfare among the Native nations to determine which would have the goods for trade. Out of necessity, to protect themselves from annihilation, the People of the Longhouse entered the Europeans&#039; beaver trade. The pelts were used to buy more firearms and goods that made it possible for more men to trap more beaver more efficiently. The marketplaces of France, Holland, and England were eager for the &amp;quot;New World&amp;quot; merchandise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shortly after the encounter on Lake Champlain, the Haudenosaunee began trading with Holland, which had established posts along the Hudson River. A large part of the trade involved firearms. French historians recount that the People of the Longhouse were very skillful at the strategies of battle, and within a short time the Algonquin people were defeated. Their defeat was aided by the fact that the French had not taken seriously their pledges of aid to the Algonquin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So intense became the need for European goods, especially firearms, that by 1640 the beaver were becoming scarce in the Haudenosaunee territories. Pressure from the newly created European frontiers was steadily increasing. Warfare was also common between the various Colonizers. The Haudenosaunee were well aware of what was occurring to the east. The Dutch, shortly after their arrival, began a series of genocidal wars that ended in the utter annihilation of the Native peoples of the Lower Hudson River Valley. In New England, the Pequot Nation was nearly obliterated by the Puritan and English colonists there.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Knowledge of these massacres greatly influenced Haudenosaunee defense policy. To the east were the Dutch and English, whose presence was necessary as a source of firearms. Yet, they represented a constant potential of movement of their frontiers westward into the Longhouse. To the north was the colony of France, which was supplying arms to the western Native nations. France also threatened to gain a monopoly over the beaver trade, which was increasingly centered to the north and west of Lake Erie and Lake Ontario.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
France made repeated attempts to send missionaries, especially Jesuits, among the nations of the Haudenosaunee. These missions were the major tool of propaganda for the European nations. Missionaries then, as today, were expected to carry more than the message of Christianity. They served as lay ambassadors of their culture, splitting off individuals from families, families from villages, and villages from nations, one by one. Some priests even served as the leaders of troops going into battle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The missionaries made persistent attacks on the economic structures of the People of the Longhouse. They specifically attacked the spiritual ceremonies as &amp;quot;pagan&amp;quot; and thereby sought to end the practice of giveaways and public feasts. In addition, they sought to break the power of the clans by causing a division that would split the people into nuclear households. The churches, especially in colonial practice, take on their feudal roles as economic institutions. Among Natural World people, they are the most dangerous agents of destruction. They invariably seek to destroy the spiritual/economic bonds of the people to the forests, land, and animals. They spread both ideologies and technologies that make people slaves to the extractive system that defines colonialism.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1704, the first Anglican missionaries were sent by England to the Mohawks living along the Mohawk River. In 1710, a delegation of Mohawk chiefs received an invitation from Queen Anne. But the missionaries also brought beyond chapel, gifts they needed a fort, and to propagate the faith, they needed a school. The warlike European kingdoms were constantly fighting among themselves. There were three wars during the eighteenth century just between France and England: Queen Anne&#039;s War (1702-1713), King George&#039;s War (1744 to 1748), and the French and Indian War, known to the European world as the War of the Spanish Succession (1759 to 1763). It is clear from the records of the time that the People of the Longhouse remained neutral throughout these conflicts, although individuals on the road to assimilation, such as the Anglicized Mohawk who had been coerced into roles as British peasants, could be called on to aid the colonizers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If France was unsuccessful in her attempts at military penetration of the territory of the Longhouse, England was far more successful in her social and religious colonization of the eastern part of our territories. William Johnson was an Irish immigrant who became famous for his influence over certain Mohawks. As agent of the British Crown, he maintained an embassy as an operation base close to the Mohawk country. He took several Native women as concubines and had several children by them, none of whom he ever recognized as his heirs. His position was known as British Superintendent of Indian Affairs for the Northern Department. He is widely credited, by European historians, as a successful manipulator of events and developments on the frontier during his tenure. In today&#039;s context, Johnson would be working as an ambassador to a foreign country, executing simultaneously diplomatic, military, intelligence, and foreign trade operations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During his tenure, he engineered the establishment of a beachhead from which the colony could move westward to broaden the colony.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Throughout this period, many other Native peoples had been moving into our territories to gain some respite from the colonial onslaught. Far to the south, in the colonized area known as the Carolinas, the Tuscarora were faced with imminent destruction. In their drive to gain some more land and economic advantage, English Colonizers were using the same techniques that were being employed in the northeast. In 1713, the dispossessed Tuscaroras withdrew from their homelands and sought protection in the territories of the Haudenosaunee. They were not the only people who were displaced. Delawares, Tuteloes, Shawnees, and others fled to the Haudenosaunee lands seeking peace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Peace, however, was not to be. At the approach of the American Revolution, the Haudenosaunee did everything possible to remain neutral. Mohawk lands along the Susquehanna and Mohawk Rivers were increasingly encroached upon by the British settlers, including Johnson himself. By the spring of 1765, the carefully managed Longhouse environment was in trouble, as ignorant and destructive peasant settlers almost eradicated deer herds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There was so much trouble with the peasant settlers that the Mohawks, who had so generously allowed them to share their lands, were actually considering moving westward into Oneida territories to gain some peace. By the spring of 1765, many Mohawks had already been displaced and were living as refugees among the other nations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
William Johnson was a master public relations man for the King. He would, on the one hand, apologize for the behavior of the frontiersmen and urge the Mohawks to be patient, and on the other hand encourage more settlers to move into the Mohawk lands. He would make a great show of protecting Haudenosaunee interests, and in that way encourage the People of the Longhouse to seek a resolution at the bargaining table, where they invariably ended up trading land to gain a temporary peace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the decline of France, and the increasing decline in the importance of trade, the settler bourgeoisie of the Anglo colonies cast an increasingly envious eye on the lands of the Longhouse. Still, our military power was formidable, and our resolve was to remain neutral.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The policy of England, however, was to involve the Haudenosaunee in the war. To accomplish this, they resorted to bribery, trickery, false propaganda, and emotional appeal. The Haudenosaunee continued its policy of neutrality throughout. Both the colonists and the &amp;quot;loyalists&amp;quot; entered our territories in search of mercenaries. The loyalist strategy was the more successful. They were able to draw some of our people into a battle with the revolting colonists.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Treaty of Paris in 1783, which ended the war, made no provision, at least in writing, for the Native nations that the British Crown had solemnly promised to protect. Thus the representatives of the People of the Longhouse held an international treaty meeting with the new federation, called the United States of America, in September of 1784. The U.S. demanded huge cessions of territory, especially from the Senecas. The warriors who had been delegated to the meeting eventually signed the treaty. However, they had not been authorized to commit the Haudenosaunee without consulting them. For a time, the terms of the treaty were not known, as the U.S. would not provide the Haudenosaunee with a copy of the document. As many Native people know, to their regret, signing a treaty and the ratification of a treaty are two separate acts, each necessary before a treaty becomes valid. Although the U.S. Congress ratified the treaty, the legislative council of the Haudenosaunee met at Buffalo Creek and renounced the agreement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Somehow the United States takes the position that the Haudenosaunee ceased to exist by the year 1784, although the Longhouse has continued to this day. There is ample evidence that all the nations continued to participate in the matters of the Great Council, the legislative body of the Confederacy. None of the nations of the League has ever declared themselves separate from the Confederation. The Oneidas, whose reputed allegiance to the United States was based on the existence of Oneida mercenaries, continued to send their delegates to the Council, and the Tuscarora remain firmly attached to the League. The Onondagas, Senecas, Cayugas, and Mohawks continue to hold their positions within the League. Although the policy of the dispossessing settler regimes began at first contact, dispossession took a number of approaches: the &amp;quot;just war&amp;quot; was a strategy by which elimination by fire and sword was justified. That was followed by the Treaty Period, in which Native nations were &amp;quot;induced&amp;quot; to sell their lands and move onward. The Treaty Period was in full swing at the beginning of the nineteenth century, and by 1815, the government of New York was agitating for the removal of Native peoples from the state for their own goods. The Trail of Tears was removal to Oklahoma. New York State was lobbying for a treaty in 1838 that was intended to remove the Haudenosaunee, who were on lands that the state wanted, away to an area that were later, the Removal Policy was eventually abandoned due in part to the bad press received during the Cherokee removal. During the process of the Cherokee removal, thousands of Cherokee men, women, children, and elders were subjected to neglect that caused them to die of exposure, starvation, and disease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1871, the U.S. Congress passed an act that included a clause that treaties would no longer be made with &amp;quot;Indian Nations.&amp;quot; It was at this point that United States policy toward Native people began to soften to a new strategy. Reports to Congress began to urge that the Native people be assimilated into U.S. society as quickly as possible. The policy of fire and sword simply began to become less popular among an increasingly significant percentage of the United States population. The principal hindrance to the assimilation of the Native people, according to its most vocal adherents, was the Indian land base. The Native land base was held in common, and this was perceived as an uncivilized and un-American practice. The assimilationists urged that if every Indian family owned its own farmstead, they could more readily acquire &amp;quot;civilized&amp;quot; traits. Thus the Dawes Act of 1887 ordered the Native nations stripped of their land base, resulting in the transfer of millions of acres to European hands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There was consistent pressure in the New York legislature to &amp;quot;civilize&amp;quot; the Haudenosaunee. To accomplish this, all vestiges of Haudenosaunee nationality needed to be destroyed. This is the nineteenth century origin of the policy to &amp;quot;educate&amp;quot; the Indian to be culturally European. It was thought that when the Indian was successfully Europeanized, he would no longer be distinct and separate, and that there would no longer be an Indigenous people with their own customs and economy. At that point, the Indian could simply be declared to have assimilated into the United States or Canadian society. The net effect would dispense with the entire concept of Native nations, and that would extinguish the claims of those nations to their lands. The report of the Whipple Committee to the New York legislature in 1858 was clear: &amp;quot;Exterminate the Tribe.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1924, the Canadian government &amp;quot;abolished&amp;quot; Haudenosaunee government at the Grand River territory. The Oneida and Akwesasne territories were invaded and occupied by Canadian troops in order to establish neocolonial &amp;quot;elective systems&amp;quot; in the name of democracy. Also in 1924, the United States government passed legislation declaring all American Indians to be United States citizens. The 1924 Citizenship Act was an attempt to deny the existence of Native nations and the rights of these Native nations to their lands. The denial of the existence of Native nations is a way of legitimizing the colonists&#039; claims to the lands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This concept is furthered by the imposition of non-Native forms of government. This also serves to fulfill the colonizer&#039;s need to destroy any semblance of sovereignty. The actual process for taking lands can be accomplished when the Native nation no longer exists in its original context—when it is less of a nation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With all semblance of a Native nation&#039;s original context destroyed, Canada and the United States can rationalize that integration has occurred. With this rationale in hand, both governments have set out to enact their final solutions to the &amp;quot;Indian Problem.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee vigorously objected to the Citizenship Act and maintains to this day that the People of the Longhouse are not citizens of Canada or the United States, but are citizens of their own nations of the League.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Termination Acts of the 1950s were efforts to simply declare that the Native nations no longer exist and to appropriate their lands. The acts were so disastrous that they caused something of a national scandal. &amp;quot;St. Regis,&amp;quot; the European name for Akwesasne, was one of our territories targeted by the Bureau of Indian Affairs (BIA) as &amp;quot;ready for integration.&amp;quot; The BIA based its recommendation on the fact that many Mohawks had acquired at least some of the material conditions that made their community outwardly indistinguishable from the white communities. In fact, however, Akwesasne was, and is, very different from the small towns in the area surrounding it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Termination submerged as an official policy in the late 1960s. But termination is simply a means to an end. The objective is the economic exploitation of a people and their lands. The taking of lands and the denial and destruction of Native nations are concrete and undeniable elements in colonization and the destruction of the culture and Native economy serve to force Native people into roles as industrial workers, just as in the nineteenth century the same processes forced Native people in the U.S. and Canada into roles as landless peasants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The effect of all these policies has been the destruction of the culture and therefore the economy of the People of the Longhouse. The traditional economy has been largely replaced by the colonial economy, which serves the interests of the colonizers. The colonial economy is one that extracts labor and materials from the people of the Haudenosaunee for the benefit of the multi-national corporate and the neocolonial elective systems all work towards these goals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today, we are an economically poor people. Few of us can afford to support the spiritual ceremonies that for centuries formed the foundations of the economy of our people. Few people can participate in the Domestic Mode of Production that defines our culture and more systematic attempts by the colonizer&#039;s education system, and by the governments on our territories, have placed neocolonial governments on some of the Haudenosaunee lands. The Canadian and United States governments have created a dependent class of potential leadership of the Haudenosaunee by administering programs and actively recruiting people away from the Domestic Mode of Production. The traditional economy is under heavy attack from many directions, and all else is the political oppression, the social oppression, the economic oppression, all have the same face. These are the tools of genocide in North America.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Genocide is alive and well in the territories of the Haudenosaunee. Its technicians are in Washington, Ottawa, and Albany, and its agents control the schools, the churches, and the neocolonial &amp;quot;elective system&amp;quot; offices found in our territories. The oppression of the Haudenosaunee has taken its toll—but the Haudenosaunee continues to meet in Council, and its members are on the rise. The Haudenosaunee, the People of the Longhouse, continue to resist the economic effects of the conditions we face. But, those strategies that we develop must be accompanied on sufficient lands within the ancient boundaries of our territories. This can only be accomplished through a revitalization of our social and political institutions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We are living in a period of time during which we expect to see great changes in the economy of the colonizers. The imperial powers of the world appear to be facing successful resistance to expansion in Africa, Asia, and other parts of the world. We will soon see the end of an economy based on the supply of cheap oil, natural gas, and other resources, and that will nearly change the face of the world.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the moment, there is more wealth, more goods and services, more automation than has ever existed in the history of mankind. The world is living in an age of manufactured affluence. But the people of the world have rarely been told the costs in terms of people&#039;s lives and the suffering that this affluence has extracted from each of us. Even the people in North America, who seemingly benefit from all these &amp;quot;advances,&amp;quot; seem to be unaware of the destruction they are experiencing. The &amp;quot;Modern Age&amp;quot; and its consumer values have altered, in very basic ways, the very structure of human society and the basic conditions of the Natural World.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The modern family is an institution that is presently under a great deal of stress. The family in Western society has undergone great changes over the last century. As the Westernization of the world continues, all peoples will be faced with similar stresses and turmoils.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We, the Haudenosaunee, have clear choices about the future. One of the choices which we have faced is whether to become Westernized, or to remain true to the Way of Life our forefathers developed for us. We have stated our understanding of the history of the changes that have created the present conditions. We have chosen to remain Haudenosaunee, and within the context of our Way of Life, to set a course of liberation for ourselves and the future generations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our liberation process is not one that is exclusive to us as humans, but also includes the other life forms that coexist and are as oppressed as we. The liberation of the Natural World is a process that is being undertaken in a most difficult environment. The people surrounding us seem to be intent on destroying themselves and every living thing on the planet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Throughout the past four hundred years, the Haudenosaunee have exerted a great influence on the lives of millions of people. Theories about democracy and a classless society have been developed from inadequate interpretations of the true nature of those ideals. This conference may be the time that begins a process that moves toward more real definitions of these concepts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In our homelands, our people are still struggling and developing strategies for survival. In the Mohawk country, our people have reoccupied lands for the purpose of revitalizing our culture and economy. This settlement, known as Kanien:ke, has been successfully held for more than three years.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Oneida people have been waging a court battle for several years to regain 250,000 acres illegally taken in the 1700s. The Cayugas have also been engaged in an effort to regain 100,000 acres taken during the same period as the theft from the Oneidas. The Onondagas and Tuscaroras have been carrying on an unceasing battle to gain control of the education that their children receive. The Senecas have been forced into a long struggle to protect the last pieces of their land still under traditional government, the lands at the Tonawanda territory. Every day of our lives finds us defending ourselves from some form of intrusion by the state of New York or the United States or Canadian governments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we are to continue to survive, we need the help of the international community. We need an external presence to bring some sort of stability to the situation of our people. We have learned, too frequently, that what is good law today can rapidly be changed into bad law. Both Canada and the United States have taught us that their legal systems are part of the political machinery that effects the oppression of our peoples.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We are nations by every definition of the term. We have been unable to obtain any semblance of justice in the court systems of the United States or Canada, and we suffer horrible legal injustices that have terrible economic and social consequences for our people. Many of our legal problems involve land and sovereignty over land, and land is the basis of our economy. We are seeking our rights in those areas under international law.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lastly, we require economic assistance in the forms of economic aid and technical assistance. We are aware that there exist various international figures who have technical expertise and who are conscious of development in the context of specific cultures. Our case is appropriate to the deliberations of the United Nations Decolonization Committee. We are engaged in a struggle to decolonize our lands and our lives, but we cannot accomplish this goal alone and unaided.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For centuries we have known that each individual&#039;s action creates conditions and situations that affect the world. For centuries we have been careful to avoid any action unless it carried a long range prospect of promoting harmony and peace in the world. In that context, with our brothers and sisters of the Western Hemisphere, we have journeyed here to discuss these important matters with the other members of the Family of Man.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;##&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Our Strategy for Survival&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The invasion of the Western Hemisphere by European powers was preceded by centuries of social development that had resulted in societies in which the interests of the few had effectively become national policies, and the interests of the many were without a voice in national affairs. In order that we might formulate a strategy for survival in the modern world, it has been necessary that we look at the forces and processes that threaten survival and begin to understand the real motivations behind those forces. With such an analysis in mind, we may then begin to create viable alternatives and strategies that will enable us to survive in a predictable future.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When history has been presented to us by colonizers, the focal elements have always been political histories. Alexander the Great&#039;s armies conquered most of the known ancient world, and when ancient history is studied, Alexander is studied. But are political histories really the correct focus? Does it make any difference in the long run whether Alexander the Great, or Nebuchadnezzar, or Akhnaton, or any other figure in political history ever lived? Other than the effect that Julius Caesar&#039;s rise to power had on some individuals in the Roman aristocracy, would history have been any different if some other general had ever dared to cross the Rubicon? Are political histories the correct focus of history in the search for what has affected the lives of billions of the Earth&#039;s population?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The really crucial developments in world history have largely been ignored by historians. The most profound changes that have taken place have been in the areas of technological change. Social history has largely been the recounting of the fortunes of the interest groups, which were committed for one reason or another to some form of technological and/or cultural movement. When we are seeking the real cultural revolutions of history, do we not find that the rise of agriculture or animal husbandry or irrigation technology was a thousand times more significant in the history of humankind than were the adventures and political fortunes of the aristocracy and rulers of European countries?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is important that we who are seeking ways of survival in the twentieth century begin by establishing new definitions and new fields of vision as we try to better understand the past. We need to look to history primarily because the past offers us a laboratory in which we can search to find that inherent process of Western Civilization that paralyzes whole societies and makes them unable to resist the process of colonization. We need to identify the process that so often leads people who are honestly seeking to resist and destroy colonization to unconsciously recreate the elements of their own oppression. And, lastly, we need to understand that within colonization are the exact elements of social organization that are leading the world today to a crisis that promises a foreseeable future of mass starvation, deprivation, and untold hopelessness.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The current crisis that the world is facing is not difficult for people to understand. In the Western Hemisphere, the United States, with six percent of the world&#039;s population, uses forty percent of the world&#039;s energy resources. The world&#039;s supply of fossil fuels is finite, and it is estimated that within thirty years, at the present rate of consumption, the peoples of the world will begin to run out of some of those sources of energy, especially petroleum and natural gas. As the planet begins to run short of cheap energy, it is predictable that the world market economy will suffer and the people of the world who are dependent on that economy will suffer likewise. When the reality of world population growth is placed beside the reality of the current relationship of energy resources and food production, it becomes obvious that worldwide famine is a real possibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The spectre of regional famine, or even worldwide famines, cannot be interpreted as the simple product of a world of scarce resources overwhelmed by the needs of expanding human populations. The situation is not that simple. In the United States, for example, a program of energy conservation—insulation of dwellings, offices, and industrial buildings—would cut back energy consumption by more than twenty-five percent in ten years. Even given growth predictions in terms of populations and economy, the U.S. would conceivably enjoy the current standard of living.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fact is that it is highly unlikely the United States will adopt a program of energy conservation that would drastically cut back consumption. The present U.S. political system is controlled by energy interests that are concerned with profit growth, and energy lobbyists are not interested in conservation. In fact, there is no sector of the U.S. economy that will move toward energy conservation as a national energy policy, even though such a policy might conceivably conserve wasted energy that could go toward food production. The problems that we are facing today, as a species that inhabits a planet of limited resources, arise not simply out of physical limitations but from political realities. It is a hard fact of life that the misery that exists in the world will be manipulated in the interests of profit. Politics and economics are intricately linked in the West, and social considerations command inferior priorities in the world&#039;s capitals. Energy conservation is not likely to become a policy in the Western countries. The acceptable alternative in the eyes of the multinational energy corporations is the plan to create much more energy through the production of nuclear power plants, especially fast breeder reactors. The predictable misery caused by increases in energy prices that push up food prices (and thus drive the poor from the food marketplace) will also provide the grist for the promotion drives of the multinationals. Nuclear reactors will be made to sound more necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Technologies have political cousins. The same people who own the oil interests have enough clout in many governments to discourage serious and broad-based efforts at energy conservation. They have the ability to command governments to support energy development schemes that will leave them in control of the world&#039;s usable energy sources and also in control of the world&#039;s marketplace. The same people constitute a class of interest in the Western world that seeks to control every aspect of the economic life of all peoples. Practically every people in the West will be dependent on their technologies for energy and food production, and all who enter the marketplace they control will be colonized.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The roots of a future world that promises misery, poverty, starvation, and chaos lie in the processes that control and destroy the locally specific cultures of the peoples of the world. To the extent that peoples and areas of the world are dependent on the giant multinational corporations that control production, distribution, and consumption patterns, and to that extent only, is the future a dark and ominous one. For this reason, the definition of colonialism needs to be expanded in the consciousness of the peoples of the planet Earth. Colonialism is a process by which Indigenous cultures are subverted and ultimately destroyed in the interests of the worldwide market economy. The interests of the worldwide market economy, quite contrary to all of the teachings of the colonists, are exactly the interests that promise to create a crisis for humanity in the decades to come.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The dialectical opposite of that process would be the rekindling, on a planetary basis, of locally based culture. Prior to the advent of colonialism, culture was defined as the way of life by which people survived within their own environment, and their own environment was defined as the area in which they lived. Thus the process of survival involved the use of locally developed technologies that met the specific needs of the area. It was mentioned earlier that technologies have political cousins, and locally developed technologies have cousins, too. Decentralized technologies that meet the needs of the people those technologies serve will necessarily give life to a different kind of political structure, and it is safe to predict that the political structure that results will be anticolonial in nature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Colonialism is at the heart of the impending world crisis. The development of liberation technologies, many of which already exist but have been largely ignored by the political movements (even the anticolonial political movements), are a necessary part of the decolonization process. Liberation technologies are those technologies that can be implemented by a specific people in a specific locality and free those people from dependency on multinational corporations and the governments that multinational corporations control. Liberation technologies are those that meet people&#039;s needs within the parameters defined by the cultures they themselves created (or create), and which have no dependency upon the world marketplace. Windmills can be a form of liberation technology, as can water wheels, solar collectors, biomass plants, woodlots, underground home construction—the list is very long.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Given the impending world crisis in the areas of food and energy, a comprehensive strategy for survival will include a concept of liberation technologies that free peoples from dependency on economies that are controlled by external interests. Liberation technologies have political cousins, just as colonizing technologies have, and those political cousins need careful consideration. Liberation technologies are accompanied by liberation political structures and liberation theologies. Of these two entities, colonized peoples in the West would be well advised to place considerable energy into the creation of true liberation theologies as a very high priority.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Liberation theologies are belief systems that challenge the assumption, widely held in the West, that the Earth is simply a commodity that can be exploited thoughtlessly by humans for the purpose of material acquisition within an ever-expanding economic framework. A liberation theology will develop in people a consciousness that all life on Earth is sacred and that the sacredness of life is the key to human freedom and survival. It will be obvious to many non-Western peoples that it is the renewable quality of Earth&#039;s ecosystems that makes life possible for human beings on this planet, and that if anything is sacred, if anything determines both the quality and future possibility of life for our species on this planet, it is that renewable quality of life.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The renewable quality—the sacredness of every living thing, which connects human beings to the place they inhabit—that quality is the single most liberating aspect of our environment. Life is renewable and all the things that support life are renewable, and they are renewed by a force greater than any Government&#039;s, greater than any living or historical thing. A consciousness of the web that holds all things together, the spiritual element that connects us to reality and the manifestation of that power to renew that is present in the existence of an eagle or a mountain snowfall, that consciousness was the first thing that was destroyed by the colonizers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A strategy for survival must include a liberation theology—call it a philosophy or cosmology if you will, but we believe it to be a theology—or humankind will simply continue to view the Earth as a commodity and will continue to seek more efficient ways to exploit that which they have not come to respect. If these processes continue unabated and unchanged at the foundation of the colonizer&#039;s ideology, our species will never be liberated from the undeniable reality that we live on a planet of limited resources, and sooner or later we will exploit our environment beyond its ability to renew itself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our strategy for survival is to create and implement liberation technologies that are consistent with and complementary to a liberation theology that arises out of our culture and is the product of the Natural World. It happens that we, the Haudenosaunee, have fallen heir to a liberation political structure that may be the oldest continuously operating governmental system in the world. We know that our traditional world view and our political structure were largely products of the technological and world view elements of our Society.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Haudenosaunee presented three papers to the Non-Governmental Organizations of the United Nations at Geneva, Switzerland, in 1977. Those papers were intended to introduce the people of the Western world to our understanding of the history of the West and the prospects for the future. We have taken many steps since the presentation of those papers to begin the process by which we may provide for the future of our people. Many of our communities are struggling against Colonialism in all of its forms. We have established food co-ops, survival schools, alternative technology projects, adult education programs, agricultural projects, and crafts programs, and serious efforts at cultural revitalization are underway.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;##&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Afterword: Indigenous into the 21st Century&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;José Barreiro*&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A victory of substantial proportions was won on the final year of the twentieth century when the United Nations Economic and Social Council adopted a resolution establishing a Permanent Forum for Indigenous peoples within the international body. Although some still wonder about the worth of international representation, it is undeniable that the effort to reach out beyond the national borders that contain them has yielded some important results for tribal peoples.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1977, on the occasion of the first major meeting of Indigenous peoples at the United Nations in Geneva, Switzerland, as documented in this new edition of the much reprinted *Basic Call to Consciousness,* few people in the world were interested in the rights of Native nations. Just five years earlier, a case in Colombia had given evidence of the level of infamy and disdain to which Indian people were being subjected. In that instance, a gang of cowboys had lured a small tribe of Indians out of the forest with the promise of a feast. As the Native guests ate, the cowboys fell upon them, killing sixteen, including women and children. This atrocious act came to the public&#039;s attention and the cowboys were charged with murder; however, they were later acquitted of their crime. &amp;quot;They did not know,&amp;quot; the cowboys&#039; lawyer argued successfully, &amp;quot;that it was wrong to kill Indians.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Brazil, Bolivia, Paraguay, Guatemala, Mexico, and every other country in the Western Hemisphere with Indigenous populations, rapid depletion of forest was eradicating tribe after tribe from ancestral lands. When this type of rapacious development was opposed by tribes, severe repression often followed, including massacres of whole villages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the United States and Canada, the scale of anti-Indian carnage was not at massacre levels; nevertheless, a major current of intolerance and racism against Indians had generated high levels of violence. In several Western states with significant Indian populations, murder of Indians by whites met with lenient sentences in the courts all too frequently. In a policy climate still bent on dispossession of lands and other tribal resources, the Native movement exploded into Alcatraz, the Trail of Broken Treaties Caravan, the challenge at Wounded Knee, and many other confrontational events and situations that signaled the need to seek strategic alliances and proper legal forums everywhere possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As co-editors of the national Indian newspaper, *Akwesasne Notes,* during those years, John Mohawk and I, along with Katsi Cook, Carol Cornelious, Daniel Thomas (Rokwaho), Mary Muñoz, with the help of many other contributors, shared the bimonthly task of assembling, editing, and writing the news and perspectives of the Native world, often while hosting delegations of chiefs, clanmothers, and Native activists and journalists from around the globe. I remember the chiefs from the various Haudenosaunee nations coming to ask John to write these pieces, and how they later showed up to have the articles read to them. They would ask about the history, because most of all they wanted to know—as old Joe Mitchell, Turtle Clan chief from Akwesasne, asked us one night—&amp;quot;What makes the white man act the way he does in the world? What in their history makes them at war with the Earth?&amp;quot; As it turned out, in Geneva the Indian elders from the Southern Hemisphere had (and continue to have) the same questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Those years were the heyday of a major movement that has been developing for two generations over the nearly thirty years since the 1977 conference. Oren Lyons has described the North American Indian &amp;quot;Unity Caravans&amp;quot; of the 1960s and 1970s. Simultaneously in Latin America, Indigenous &amp;quot;runners&amp;quot; from the southern countries had begun to come north. One runner is the Mapuche veteran Nilo Cayuqueo, who as a young man was sent out by his elders to carry their word to other Native people. (Cayuqueo, among others, carried their message to Geneva in 1977). As well, northern Native nations, prominently the Iroquois and delegations of Lakota, Pueblo, and Hopi, among others, were quietly traveling south during those years. Visionary leaders, like Reuben Snake of the Winnebago, traveled Mexico seeking contact with Native leaders there. Meetings of Maya and Mohawk elders occurred in 1975-76 that became a cornerstone of a people-to-people alliance that has lasted over a generation. In Canada, a current of outreach instigated by Chief George Manuel would become known as the &amp;quot;Fourth World&amp;quot; movement. This first early dialogue with Indigenous peoples immediately went beyond the international concept of the Third World, thus declaring the existence of a Fourth World of peoples.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prominently, the Lakota Treaty Council and the Haudenosaunee chiefs and Treaty Council were represented, and a medicine elder, Phillip Deere, became a voice for millions when, holding his medicine bundle, he declared in Geneva: &amp;quot;We, the Indigenous peoples, are the evidence of the Western Hemisphere. No matter how small we may be, each of them has the right to be who they are.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the Mohawk Nation, we monitored dozens of situations involving violations of human rights—many quite horrendous. We found that our tools of communication—whether newspapers, telephone trees, or the many traveling groups that emerged from our camps to visit universities and reservations throughout the United States, Canada, and even Central America—could be central to the survival of the tribal nations. More than a few lives were saved and several impending atrocities were circumvented due to the communications work of the Emergency Response International Network (ERIN) from 1979 to 1984. Sometimes the ideological and political debates within the Indian international movement, as was the case during the Miskito-Sandinista War—were as painful as they were deeply instructive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As peace dawned on the traumatized region in the early 1990s, most of that same movement supported and applauded the awarding of the Nobel Peace Prize for 1992 to Rigoberta Menchu Tum, the Maya activist and author. The awarding of the Nobel Prize to an Indigenous woman symbolized an opening to crucial political space for Guatemala&#039;s Maya people; after horrible suffering, they would never again be invisible or voiceless.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By 1992, the Fourth World movement had expanded to represent the more than 300 million Indigenous peoples worldwide, including at least 40 million in the Americas. That same year, Indigenous peoples&#039; cultural and practical knowledge of ecological factors in their traditional territories was recognized at the United Nations Conference on Environment and Development (UNCED). And three years later, when the United Nations opened its program of activities for the International Decade of Indigenous Peoples (1995-2004), a main objective of the Decade was the establishment of a Permanent Forum at the United Nations. The United States, once a stumbling block to international Indigenous rights, voted in full support of the forum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the South, several countries with major populations, including Mexico, Guatemala, Bolivia, Ecuador, and Peru, have seen Indian-led movements exercise significant influence on their national societies, from the Zapatista movement in Mexico, which challenged globalization with a bank, to the political upsurges in Bolivia and Ecuador that have collapsed and elected national presidents. In the North, a major economic explosion has occurred, with over two hundred tribal nations gaining rapidly on financial independence and growing power through sovereignty-protected, highly profitable gaming enterprises. Even some of the Indian leaders at Geneva in 1977, such as the New York Oneida Ray Halbritter and the Wisconsin Oneida Artley Skenandore, went on to run major tribal businesses. These two trends from the North and South are only now starting to merge as tribes from both hemispheres continue to engage in dialogues during the international meetings every May in New York City.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Proposed in 1993 at the Vienna World Conference on Human Rights and approved in 2004, the Permanent Forum now provides Indigenous peoples of the world (delegates from over seventy countries attend) with the opportunity to inject the unique voice of the Native peoples of the world into the global human discourse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Americas, certainly, borders separating Indian peoples—as psychological, as linguistic, and as legalistic as those of national frontiers—are coming down. A sense of &amp;quot;all our relations&amp;quot; is increasingly apparent in the communications between Indians throughout North America, Central America, the Caribbean, and South America. It is a refreshing trend.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I am happy to note the recent (2003) repatriation of Taino human remains from the United States&#039; Smithsonian Institution&#039;s National Museum of the American Indian to a small Indian enclave in Cuba&#039;s eastern mountains, the community of Caridad de los Indios. Navajo, Mohawk, Algonquin, Kaw, Paiute, Chicano, and other peoples, including scholars and participants from several countries, witnessed the unique ceremony, which coalesced the forces of many people to guarantee its success. The reinterment gave evidence, too, of the survival of Native traditional cultures and peoples in the most remote and unpredictable places in the Americas. For the small enclave of Taino descendants at Caridad de los Indios, high up in the mountains of Guantanamo, Cuba, to finally make themselves known and respected at an international level, after nearly five hundred years of supposed extinction, is a marvel in itself. That a repatriation of our ancestral remains could be conducted between two countries still in the throes of ideological hostility gives evidence of the growing level of direct cooperation going on among Indian peoples of the countries of Latin America and North America.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unlike the situation at the start of the twentieth century, when many considered Indians &amp;quot;the Vanishing Americans,&amp;quot; there is nothing crestfallen about the present moment for the peoples of Indian Country and the Native Americas. The Indian peoples of the Americas are relatives to each other and constitute the primary cultural and sometimes human foundation of the modern American republics. All of this is quite different now as a result of the intense Indigenous effort for self-determination over the past thirty years. These are trends that usher in a new era of possibility for Native nations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;##&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Acknowledgments&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Special thanks goes out to the numerous people who worked hard to bring this revised edition to fruition. Thank you to Tonya Gonnella Frichner (Onondaga Nation-Snipe Clan) president and founder of the American Indian Law Alliance, and the hard working folks at the American Indian Law Alliance. The American Indian Law Alliance organizes and advocates on a national and international level on behalf of and with Indigenous peoples from around the world. Thank you to Chief Oren Lyons (Onondaga—Wolf Clan), John Mohawk (Seneca), and José Barreiro (Taino Nation of the Antilles) for their new contributions. Thank you to Stefan Disko who provided valuable fact-checking, as well as careful research for the endnotes and bibliography. Jerry Hutchens coordinated efforts. Thank you to the dozens of folks who donated time and talent. This work has been a labor of love. May it bring understanding and change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;##&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Notes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; The Haudenosaunee: A Nation Since Time Immemorial&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Treaty of Fort Stanwix, October 22, 1784, U.S.-Six Nations, 7 Stat. 15. For more on the Treaty of Fort Stanwix, see G. Peter Jemison and Anna M. Schein, eds., *Treaty of Canandaigua 1794: 200 Years of Treaty Relations Between the Iroquois Confederacy and the United States* (Santa Fe: Clear Light Publishers, 2000); and Barbara Graymont, *The Iroquois in the American Revolution* (Syracuse: Syracuse University Press, 1972).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. On the New York State treaties of this period, see Laurence M. Hauptman, *Conspiracy of Interests: Iroquois Dispossession and the Rise of New York State* (Syracuse: Syracuse University Press, 1999); and Barbara Graymont, *The Iroquois in the American Revolution.*&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. See Jemison/Schein, *Treaty of Canandaigua 1794;* and Hauptman, *Conspiracy of Interests.*&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. The St. Regis Tribal Council, an &amp;quot;elected&amp;quot; entity that claims jurisdictional authority on the &amp;quot;U.S.&amp;quot; side of Akwesasne. Although members of the community at Akwesasne have consistently resisted this form of government, the St. Regis Tribal Council received federal recognition in 1972 and has become the government recognized by New York State and the U.S. federal government as the legal entity at Akwesasne. The traditional people of the Mohawk Nation continue to be represented by the Mohawk Nation Council of Chiefs, which is the connection of the Mohawk people to the Grand Council of the Haudenosaunee.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. In 1899, the government of Canada created the St. Regis Band Council (now called Mohawk Council of Akwesasne), and imposed it on the Mohawks by force of arms. The Mohawk Council of Akwesasne is an &amp;quot;elected&amp;quot; body that claims jurisdictional authority on the &amp;quot;Canadian&amp;quot; district of Akwesasne. See Doug George-Kanentiio, *Iroquois Culture and Commentary* (Santa Fe: Clear Light Publishers, 2000), 127-128, 179-180.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. *Citizenship Act of 1924,* 43 Stat. 253, 8 U.S.C. 1401(a)(2). Note, however, that by virtue of various federal statutes and treaties, a significant number of Native people had already received United States citizenship before 1924 (with or without their consent). See *General Allotment Act,* Sec. 6, 24 Stat. 388 (1887), 25 U.S.C. 331 et seq. (Indians &amp;quot;to whom allotments shall have been made&amp;quot;); *Act of August 9, 1888,* ch. 818, sec. 2, 25 Stat. 392, 25 U.S.C. 152 (&amp;quot;marriage between white men and Indian women&amp;quot;); and *Treaty with the Potawatomi,* November 15, 1867, 12 Stat. 1191, Art. 3 (&amp;quot;competent&amp;quot; male heads of families). For more on these issues, see Laurence M. Hauptman, &amp;quot;Congress, Plenary Power, and the American Indian, 1870 to 1992,&amp;quot; in Jemison/Schein, *Treaty of Canandaigua,* 321-327; and Vine Deloria, Jr. and Clifford M. Lytle, *American Indians, American Justice* (Austin: University of Texas Press, 1983), 217-222.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. In 1920, the *Canadian Indian Act* had been amended to allow the compulsory enfranchisement of (i.e. imposition of Citizenship on) &amp;quot;any Indian, male or female, over the age of twenty-one years ... fit for enfranchisement.&amp;quot; According to the amendment, enfranchised Indians were no longer to be &amp;quot;deemed ... Indians within the meaning of any laws relating to Indians,&amp;quot; and were to &amp;quot;have, possess and enjoy all the legal powers, rights and privileges of His Majesty&#039;s other subjects&amp;quot; (*An Act to amend the Indian Act,* 10-11 Geo V, 1920 c.60, assented to July 1, 1920). The amendment was repealed two years later but was reintroduced in slightly modified form in 1933, and retained until the major revision of the Indian Act in 1951. A further modification was made in 1951 (and retained until 1985) that allowed the compulsory enfranchisement of Indian women who married non-Aboriginal, Métis, Inuit, or unregistered Indian men. See Royal Commission on Aboriginal Peoples, *Report of the Royal Commission on Aboriginal Peoples* (Ottawa: Canada Communication Group, 1996), Vol. 1(2), chapter 9, para. 0.13. See also Clinton Rickard (editor, Barbara Graymont), *Fighting Tuscarora: The Autobiography of Chief Clinton Rickard,* (Syracuse: Syracuse University Press, 1973), 59.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. For more detailed accounts, see Grace Li Xiu Woo, &amp;quot;Canada&#039;s Forgotten Founders: The Modern Significance of the Haudenosaunee (Iroquois) Application for Membership in the League of Nations,&amp;quot; *Global Development Journal (GDJ) 2003 (1)* (Coventry: University of Warwick, 2003), 9-10; Laurence M. Hauptman, *The Iroquois and the New Deal* (Syracuse: Syracuse University Press, 1981), 18; and Rickard, *Autobiography,* 60-62.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9. 48 Stat. 984, 25 U.S.C. 461-470. See Deloria/Lytle, *American Indians, American Justice,* 15; Vine Deloria, Jr., *Behind the Trail of Broken Treaties: An Indian Declaration of Independence* (New York: Dell Publishing, 1974), 157-206; and Hauptman, &amp;quot;Congress, Plenary Power, and the American Indian,&amp;quot; 326-327. For a discussion of the IRA in the context of the Haudenosaunee, see Hauptman, *The Iroquois and the New Deal.*&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
10. *Act of July 2, 1948* (62 Stat. 1224; 25 U.S.C. 232) (criminal jurisdiction); *Act of September 13, 1950* (64 Stat. 845; 25 U.S.C. 233) (civil jurisdiction). These two acts predate the more general application of state jurisdiction to Native peoples embodied in Public Law 280 of August 15, 1953, which was largely based on the acts of 1948 and 1950. Public Law 280 was one of the cornerstones of the Termination Policy of the 1950s. See also Laurence M. Hauptman, *The Iroquois Struggle for Survival: World War II to Red Power* (Syracuse: Syracuse University Press, 1986), 45-64; and Chief Irving Powless Jr., &amp;quot;The Haudenosaunee, Yesterday and Today: A Conflict of Concepts and Laws,&amp;quot; in *Buffalo Law Review* 46, No. 3 (1998), 1083-1084.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
11. For more detailed accounts, see Hauptman, *The Iroquois Struggle for Survival;* John Mohawk, &amp;quot;Epilogue,&amp;quot; in Paul Wallace, *White Roots of Peace: The Iroquois Book of Life* (Santa Fe: Clear Light Publishers, 1994), 139-150; and Rickard, *Autobiography,* 138-152.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
12. See Powless, &amp;quot;The Haudenosaunee, Yesterday and Today,&amp;quot; 1086-1087.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
13. See Notes, A Basic Call to Consciousness: The Haudenosaunee Address to the Western World, Policies of Oppression in the Name of Democracy, note 16 and accompanying text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
14. The conference was held at UN facilities, but was not officially a UN conference. For reports and documents related to this conference, see *Akwesasne Notes,* Vol. 9, No. 4 (December 1977); International Indian Treaty Council, &amp;quot;The Geneva Conference—Official Report by: International Indian Treaty Council&amp;quot; (Special Issue: *Treaty Council News,* October 1977, Vol. 1, No. 7); and Institute for the Development of Indian Law, &amp;quot;International NGO Conference on Discrimination Against Indigenous Peoples in the Americas—1977,&amp;quot; in *American Indian Journal* 3 (1977). For retrospectives on the significance and impact of this Conference, see Ingrid Washinawatok, &amp;quot;International Emergence: Twenty-One Years at the United Nations,&amp;quot; in *New York City Law Review* 3 (1999), 41-57; and Sharon H. Venne, *Our Elders Understand Our Rights: Evolving International Law Regarding Indigenous Peoples* (Penticton: Theytus Books, Ltd., 1998), 107-163. On the recent establishment of a Permanent Forum for Indigenous peoples within the United Nations, see IWGIA (International Work Group for Indigenous Affairs), &amp;quot;The Permanent Forum on Indigenous Issues,&amp;quot; in IWGIA, *The Indigenous World 2001-2002* (Copenhagen: IWGIA, 2002), 444-451.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Deskaheh: An Iroquois Patriot&#039;s Fight for International Recognition&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. This is a revised version of an essay that originally appeared under the title &amp;quot;I Am a Cayuga&amp;quot; in Carl Carmer, *Dark Trees to the Wind: A Cycle of York State Years* (New York: William Sloan Associates, 1949), 105-117. It was also included in the pamphlet *Deskaheh: Iroquois Statesman and Patriot,* first published in the 1950s by Akwesasne Mohawk Counselor Organization, and later reprinted by *Akwesasne Notes* in 1976.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Haldimand Treaty/Deed, October 25, 1784. See Graymont, *The Iroquois in the American Revolution,* 293-294, 299. The rights to the lands granted by the Haldimand Treaty were further guaranteed by the Simcoe Treaty/Deed (&amp;quot;Patent&amp;quot; issued by Lieutenant-Governor J. Graves Simcoe on January 14, 1793). See Beverley K. Jacobs (Assembly of First Nations British Columbia), &amp;quot;The Effect of Delgamuukw on Treaties in Ontario&amp;quot; (January 2001), research paper posted on the Delgamuukw/Gisday&#039;wa National Process Web site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Jay Treaty (between Britain and the United States), concluded on November 19, 1794, ratified on June 24, 1795, proclaimed on February 29, 1796. Article III of the Treaty provides in part: &amp;quot;It is agreed that it shall at all times be free to His Majesty&#039;s subjects, and to the citizens of the United States, and also to the Indians dwelling on either side of the said boundary line, freely to pass and repass by land or inland navigation, into the respective territories and countries of the two parties, on the continent of America ... and to navigate all the lakes, rivers and waters thereof, and freely to carry on trade and commerce with each other ... No duty of entry shall ever be levied by either party on peltries brought by land or inland navigation into the said territories respectively, nor shall the Indians passing or repassing with their own proper goods and effects of whatever nature, pay for the same any impost or duty whatever.&amp;quot; See also Rickard, *Autobiography,* 59-69.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. During World War I (1914-1918), many Aboriginal people in Canada voluntarily enlisted in the Canadian army even before official permission for Indians to enlist was given in December 1915. At this point, formal recruiting campaigns for Aboriginal volunteers got under way, including at residential schools, which led to considerable suspicion and opposition among Aboriginal people. Then, in 1917, as general enlistment slowed and manpower needs increased, the Canadian government passed the *Military Service Act* of August 29, 1917, which provided for registration and conscription of all male British subjects from twenty to forty-five years of age, including Aboriginal people. No consideration was given to status Indians&#039; lack of citizenship or to treaty membership. The possibility of conscription was protested by Aboriginal communities and leaders, and on January 17, 1918, a provision was passed that exempted Aboriginal men from combative service (P.C. 111), on the basis that they were not qualified to vote. See Royal Commission on Aboriginal Peoples, *Report of the Royal Commission,* Vol. 1(2), chapter 12, para. 2; and R. Scott Sheffield, *A Search for Equity: A Study of the Treatment Accorded to First Nations Veterans and Their Dependents of the Second World War and the Korean War* (Report prepared for the National Roundtable on First Nations Veterans&#039; Issues, April 2000).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. See Rickard, *Autobiography,* 61; and Woo, &amp;quot;Canada&#039;s Forgotten Founders,&amp;quot; 8-10.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. See Notes, Deskaheh: An Iroquois Patriot&#039;s Fight for International Recognition, note 2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. For a detailed account of these incidents, see Woo, &amp;quot;Canada&#039;s Forgotten Founders,&amp;quot; 8-10, and Rickard, *Autobiography,* 60-62.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. See Rickard, *Autobiography,* 59.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9. Deskaheh to the League of Nations (League of Nations file 33687/28075); and *Why We Are Here Again,* London, August 1923. Both documents are contained in the George P. Decker Collection, Lavery Library, St. John Fisher College, Rochester, New York, as well as the Howard R. Berman Collection, Charles B. Sears Law Library, University of Buffalo, New York.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
10. See Rickard, *Autobiography,* 61-62; Hauptman, *The Iroquois and the New Deal,* 18; and Woo, &amp;quot;Canada&#039;s Forgotten Founders,&amp;quot; 9.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; A Basic Call to Consciousness: The Haudenosaunee Address to the Western World&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;**&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;Spiritualism, the Highest Form of Political Consciousness**&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Paulo Freire, *Pedagogy of the Oppressed* (New York: Continuum, 1970).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;**&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;The Obvious Fact of Our Continuing Existence**&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. On the influences of the Great Law of Peace on the U.S. Constitution, see Chief Oren Lyons and John Mohawk, eds., *Exiled in the Land of the Free: Democracy, Indian Nations, and the U.S. Constitution* (Santa Fe: Clear Light Publishers, 1992); Bruce E. Johansen, *Forgotten Founders: How the American Indian Helped Shape Democracy* (Harvard and Boston: The Harvard Common Press, 1982); Bruce E. Johansen, *Debating Democracy: Native American Legacy of Freedom* (Santa Fe: Clear Light Publishers, 1995); José Barreiro, ed., *Indian Roots of American Democracy* (Ithaca: Akwe:kon Press, Cornell University, 1992); and Greg Schaaf, *The Great Law of Peace and the Constitution of the United States of America* (Pamphlet published by Tree of Peace Society, 1987). See also *Senate Concurrent Resolution 76* of September 16, 1987, which recognizes and acknowledges the contribution of the Iroquois Confederacy of Nations to the development of the U.S. Constitution; and United States Congress Senate Select Committee on Indian Affairs Report 100-565, *Acknowledging the Contribution of the Iroquois Confederacy of Nations to the Development of the United States Constitution* (Washington, DC: U.S. Government Printing Office, 1988).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. See Lewis H. Morgan, *League of the Ho-de&#039;-no-sau-nee, or Iroquois* (Rochester: Sage &amp;amp; Brother, 1851).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. See Karl Marx and Lawrence Krader, eds., *The Ethnological Notebooks of Karl Marx: Studies of Morgan, Phear, Maine, Lubbock* (Assen: Van Gorcum, 1972); and Johansen, *Forgotten Founders,* 19, 121-123. See also Frederick Engels, *The Origin of the Family, Private Property and the State: In the Light of the Researches of Lewis H. Morgan* (New York: International Publishers, 1972; originally published 1884 in Hottingen-Zurich).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Eric R. Wolf, *Peasants* (Englewood Cliffs: Prentice Hall, Foundations of Modern Anthropology Series, 1966), 11. See Cyril S. Belshaw, *Traditional Exchange and Modern Markets* (Englewood Cliffs: Prentice-Hall, Modernization of Traditional Societies Series, 1965), 53-54.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Alfred L. Kroeber, *Anthropology: Race, Language, Culture, Psychology, Prehistory—Revised Edition* (New York: Harcourt, Brace and Company, 1948), 284. See Margaret Park Redfield, ed., *Human Nature and the Study of Society: The Papers of Robert Redfield, Vol. 1* (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1962), I, 287.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Robert Redfield, *Peasant Society and Culture: An Anthropological Approach to Civilization* (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1956), 46-47.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Made in 1613. The Two Row Treaty was recorded by the Haudenosaunee in the Two Row Wampum Belt (Guswenta). Guswenta is a long belt of white and purple wampum beads: two long and parallel lines of purple, separated by three rows of white. The two purple lines in the belt symbolize the distinct identity of the two peoples and a mutual promise to coexist in peace without interference in the internal affairs of the other. On the symbolism of the Guswenta, see Chief Irving Powless Jr., &amp;quot;Treaty Making,&amp;quot; in Jemison/Schein, *Treaty of Canandaigua,* 22-23; Oren R. Lyons, &amp;quot;The American Indian in the Past,&amp;quot; in Lyons/Mohawk, *Exiled in the Land of the Free,* 40-42; and Robert W. Venables, &amp;quot;Some Observations on the Treaty of Canandaigua,&amp;quot; in Jemison/Schein, *Treaty of Canandaigua,* 107-108.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. U.S. Const., Art. I, Sec. 8, cl. 3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9. See Deloria/Lytle, *American Indians, American Justice,* 40-45; Deloria, *Behind the Trail of Broken Treaties,* 141-160, and Indian Law Resource Center, &amp;quot;United States Denial of Indian Property Rights: A Study in Lawless Power and Racial Discrimination,&amp;quot; in National Lawyers Guild Committee on Native American Struggles, ed., *Reinventing Indian Law* (New Haven: The Advocate Press, 1982), 24.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
10. See Robert T. Coulter, &amp;quot;The Denial of Legal Remedies to Indian Nations Under U.S. Law,&amp;quot; in National Lawyers Guild Committee on Native American Struggles, *Reinventing Indian Law,* 103-107.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
11. See Felix S. Cohen, *Handbook of Federal Indian Law* (Washington, DC: U.S. Government Printing Office, 1942), 421 (chapter 22, section 1, F.5.a.); Laurence M. Hauptman, &amp;quot;The State&#039;s Men, the Salvation Seekers, and the Seneca: The Supplemental Treaty of Buffalo Creek, 1842,&amp;quot; in *New York History* 78, No. 1 (January 1997): 54-61.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
12. In the case of the Cayuga Nation, in particular three &amp;quot;treaties&amp;quot; with the state of New York in 1789 (*Treaty of Albany,* February 25, 1789), in 1795 (*Treaty of Albany,* August 21, 1795), and in 1807 (*Treaty of Albany,* May 30, 1807). In the case of the Oneida Nation, the &amp;quot;treaties&amp;quot; with the state of New York in 1785 (*Treaty of Otschwyler,* September 22, 1788), and a long series of about twenty-five other written &amp;quot;agreements&amp;quot; with the state of New York between 1795 and 1846. See generally, Hauptman, *Conspiracy of Interests;* and Graymont, *The Iroquois in the American Revolution.* For details about the Cayuga treaties, see Clint Halftown, &amp;quot;The Haudenosaunee Cayuga Nation Land Claim: Cayuga Nation v. New York,&amp;quot; in *Buffalo Law Review* 46, No. 3 (1998), 1091-1095; and New York State Assembly, *Report of the Special Committee to Investigate the Indian Problem of the State of New York—Appointed by the Assembly of 1888* (Albany: Troy Press, 1889) (&amp;quot;Whipple Report&amp;quot;), 216-229. For details about the Oneida treaties, see Jack Campisi, &amp;quot;The Treaty Period, 1783-1838,&amp;quot; in Jack Campisi and Laurence M. Hauptman, eds., *The Oneida Indian Experience* (Syracuse: Syracuse University Press, 1988), 48-64; Laurence M. Hauptman and L. Gordon McLester III, eds., *The Oneida Indian Journey: From New York to Wisconsin, 1784-1860* (Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1999), 38-42, 86-89, 151-170; George C. Shattuck, *The Oneida Land Claims: A Legal History* (Syracuse: Syracuse University Press, 1991); and &amp;quot;Whipple Report,&amp;quot; 234-265.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
13. Conducted in Albany, New York, on March 29, 1797. In the United States referred to as &amp;quot;Treaty with the Mohawk&amp;quot; (7 Stat. 61).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
14. See Cohen, *Handbook of Federal Indian Law,* 420-21 (chapter 22, section 1.F.); and Hauptman, *Conspiracy of Interests.* Also see Notes, A Basic Call to Consciousness: The Haudenosaunee Address to the Western World, Policies of Oppression in the Name of Democracy, note 6.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
15. *General Allotment Act,* 24 Stat. 388 (1887), 25 U.S.C. 331 et seq. See Delos Sacket Otis, *The Dawes Act and Allotment of Indian Lands* (Norman: University of Oklahoma Press, 1973); and Deloria/Lytle, *American Indians, American Justice,* 8-12. For the impact of the Dawes Act on the Iroquois, see Hauptman, *The Iroquois and the New Deal,* 5, 22, 71-72, 90-92.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
16. *Citizenship Act of 1924,* 43 Stat. 253, 8 U.S.C. 1401(a)(2). See Notes, The Haudenosaunee: A Nation Since Time Immemorial, note 6 and accompanying text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
17. See Notes, Deskaheh: An Iroquois Patriot&#039;s Fight for International Recognition, note 10.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
18. See Eileen Antone, &amp;quot;The Oneida Move to Canada,&amp;quot; in Hauptman/McLester, *The Oneida Indian Journey,* 26-33.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
19. See Notes, The Haudenosaunee: A Nation Since Time Immemorial, note 10.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
20. *Public Law 88-533* (August 31, 1964), 78 Stat. 738. For further details on the struggle around Kinzua Dam, see Joy A. Bilharz, *The Allegany Senecas and Kinzua Dam: Forced Relocation through Two Generations* (Lincoln: University of Nebraska Press, 1998); Hauptman, *The Iroquois Struggle for Survival,* 155-167; and Mohawk, &amp;quot;Epilogue,&amp;quot; 141-148.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
21. See Cohen, *Handbook of Federal Indian Law,* 420 (chapter 22, section 1, F.3.); and Reginald Horsman, &amp;quot;The Origins of Oneida Removal to Wisconsin, 1815-1822,&amp;quot; in Hauptman/McLester, *The Oneida Indian Journey,* 53-69.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
22. See Rickard, *Autobiography,* 131-132: &amp;quot;Beginning in 1948 and for several years thereafter, representatives of the Six Nations Confederacy made an annual trip to the United Nations headquarters in New York City. We brought our message of peace to this world body and reminded the delegates we met that we were the first United Nations. In 1949, a group of us from the Six Nations attended the cornerstone laying of the UN building in Manhattan. In 1950, we presented a petition to the United Nations protesting the attempts of Canada, the United States, and the state of New York to assume jurisdiction over our Six Nations Confederacy and called attention to our opposition to the attempts of these foreign powers to assimilate our people. In 1952, we petitioned the United Nations to admit the Six Nations Confederacy to membership. This petition was pigeonholed.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
23. The United Nations Conference on the Human Environment, Stockholm, June 5-12, 1972, the first major modern international gathering on human activities in relationship to the environment. The conference produced a set of principles in the Stockholm Declaration and led to the founding of the United Nations Environment Programme (UNEP). Among the Indigenous delegates attending the Conference were Alice Papineau (Onondaga), Thomas Banyacya (Hopi), John Cook (Mohawk), and George Manuel (Shuswap).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;**&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;Policies of Oppression in the Name of &amp;quot;Democracy&amp;quot;**&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. See John C. Mohawk, &amp;quot;The Canandaigua Treaty,&amp;quot; in Jemison/Schein, *Treaty of Canandaigua,* 9.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. See Notes, The Haudenosaunee: A Nation Since Time Immemorial, note 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. See Graymont, *The Iroquois in the American Revolution,* 293-294, 299.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. See Cohen, *Handbook of Federal Indian Law,* 420 (chapter 22, section 1, F.3.).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. *Treaty of Buffalo Creek* of January 15, 1838 (between the United States and &amp;quot;the New York Indians&amp;quot;), 7 Stat. 550. It is well established that the treaty was produced through bribery, coercion, and forgery, and it is generally considered fraudulent. See Morgan, *League of the Ho-de&#039;-no-sau-nee,* 52-54; Cohen, *Handbook of Federal Indian Law,* 420 (chapter 22, section 1, F.3.); Henry S. Manley, &amp;quot;The Treaty of Buffalo Creek,&amp;quot; in *New York History* 27 (July 1947), 313-328; Laurence M. Hauptman, &amp;quot;Congress, Plenary Power, and the American Indian,&amp;quot; 332-334; and Mohawk, &amp;quot;Epilogue,&amp;quot; 143-150.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Under the terms of the 1838 treaty, the Senecas ceded all of their remaining homelands in New York (the reservations at Allegany, Cattaraugus, Tonawanda, and Buffalo Creek), and relinquished their rights to Menominee lands in Wisconsin that had been purchased for them by the U.S. government. In exchange, the United States granted the Iroquois (as a whole) and the Stockbridge-Munsee rights to a 1,824,000 acre reservation in Kansas. In addition, the Indians were to receive some money from the U.S. government. However, the Senecas denounced the treaty due to its fraudulent nature and refused to move to Kansas or leave their homelands in New York. In 1842, a supplemental &amp;quot;compromise&amp;quot; treaty, the *Treaty of Buffalo Creek* of May 20, 1842 (7 Stat. 586), was concluded between the United States and the Senecas (without the consent of the Tonawanda chiefs). The Senecas regained the Allegany and Cattaraugus Reservations, but not the Buffalo Creek or Tonawanda Reservations. The Senecas on the Buffalo Creek Reservation, which was permanently lost, gradually moved to the other Seneca reservations. The Tonawanda Senecas, who did not recognize the treaties of either 1838 or 1842, still refused to move and on November 5, 1857, made another treaty with the United States (11 Stat. 735, 12 Stat. 991) that &amp;quot;allowed&amp;quot; them to repurchase part of their Reservation. See Cohen, *Handbook of Federal Indian Law,* 420 (chapter 22, section 1, F.3.); Hauptman, &amp;quot;The State&#039;s Men, the Salvation Seekers, and the Seneca: The Supplemental Treaty of Buffalo Creek, 1842,&amp;quot; 51-82.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. See Notes, The Haudenosaunee: A Nation Since Time Immemorial, note 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. *Act of March 3, 1871,* 16 Stat. 566, 25 U.S.C. 71. The whole clause reads as follows: &amp;quot;*Provided,* That hereafter no Indian nation or tribe, within the territory of the United States shall be acknowledged or recognized as an independent nation tribe, or power with whom the United States may contract by treaty: *Provided further,* That nothing herein contained shall be construed to invalidate or impair the obligation of any treaty heretofore lawfully made and ratified with any such Indian nation or tribe.&amp;quot; This provision is still in effect.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. See John Ehle, *Trail of Tears: The Rise and Fall of the Cherokee Nation* (New York: Doubleday, 1988); and Theda Purdue and Michael D. Green, *The Cherokee Removal: A Brief History with Documents* (New York: Bedford Books of St. Martin&#039;s Press, 1995).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9. *General Allotment Act,* 24 Stat. 388 (1887), 25 U.S.C. 331 et seq. See Notes, A Basic Call to Consciousness: The Haudenosaunee Address to the Western World, The Obvious Fact of Our Continued Existence, note 20.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
10. As a result of the *Dawes Act* and subsequent legislation, American Indian land holdings were reduced from 138 million to 52 million acres between 1887 and 1954. See Hauptman, &amp;quot;Congress, Plenary Power, and the American Indian,&amp;quot; 321-327; Otis, *The Dawes Act and the Allotment of Indian Lands;* and Deloria/Lytle, *American Indians, American Justice,* 8-12.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
11. See Jorge Noriega, &amp;quot;American Indian Education in the United States: Indoctrination for Subordination to Colonialism,&amp;quot; in M. Annette Jaimes, ed., *The State of Native America: Genocide, Colonization, and Resistance* (Boston: South End Press, 1992), 371-402.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
12. New York State Assembly, *Report of the Special Committee to Investigate the Indian Problem of the State of New York—Appointed by the Assembly of 1858* (Albany: Troy Press, 1859). The &amp;quot;Whipple Report&amp;quot; concluded (at page 79): &amp;quot;these Indian people have been kept as &#039;wards&#039; or children long enough. They should now be educated to be men, not Indians, and it is the earnest belief of the committee that when ... the Indians of the State are absorbed into the great mass of the American people, and not before, will the &#039;Indian problem&#039; be solved.&amp;quot; On the Whipple Committee and its report, see Laurence M. Hauptman, &amp;quot;Seneca Nation of Indians v. Christy: A Background Study,&amp;quot; in *Buffalo Law Review,* Vol. 46, No. 3 (Fall 1998), 948-953; and Hauptman, *The Iroquois in the Civil War,* 149-150.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
13. *Citizenship Act of 1924,* 43 Stat. 253, 8 U.S.C. 1401(a)(2). See Notes, The Haudenosaunee: A Nation Since Time Immemorial, note 6 and accompanying text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
14. A series of Congressional Acts between 1953 and 1958, by which federal recognition of a total of 109 Native nations, or parts of nations, was unilaterally withdrawn. Services to these nations provided by the Bureau of Indian Affairs were transferred to other federal, state, or local governmental agencies, or to the Indian nations themselves. Civil and criminal jurisdiction, to varying degrees, were transferred to the respective states. The two cornerstones of the &amp;quot;Termination Policy&amp;quot; were *House Concurrent Resolution 108* of August 1, 1953 (67 Stat. B132) and *Public Law 280* of August 15, 1953 (67 Stat. 588-590). The underlying goals of the policy were to integrate Indians, as *individuals,* into the mainstream of American society; to extinguish the collective political existence of the Indian nations; to abolish treaty rights; and to end the federal government&#039;s responsibility for Indian affairs. See Hauptman, &amp;quot;Congress, Plenary Power, and the American Indian,&amp;quot; 329-334; Deloria/Lytle, *American Indians, American Justice,* 15-21; and Rebecca L. Robbins, &amp;quot;Self-Determination and Subordination: The Past, Present, and Future of American Indian Governance,&amp;quot; in Jaimes, *The State of Native America,* 98-100. For a discussion of the Termination Policy in the context of the Haudenosaunee, see Hauptman, *The Iroquois Struggle for Survival,* 42-83.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
15. The settlement of Ganienkeh was originally established in May 1974 by a number of Mohawks who occupied an abandoned girls&#039; camp at Moss Lake in the Adirondacks in New York. In 1977, the people of Ganienkeh reached an agreement with the state of New York to resettle their community to a new site on Miner Lake near Altona, New York where it is still located today. See Greg Horn, &amp;quot;Ganienkeh celebrates 25th anniversary,&amp;quot; in *The Native Door,* Vol. 5, No. 15 (May 7, 1999); Greg Horn, &amp;quot;Ganienkeh since 1977,&amp;quot; in *The Native Door,* Vol. 5, No. 16 (May 14, 1999); Bruce E. Johansen and Barbara A. Mann, eds., *Encyclopedia of the Haudenosaunee (Iroquois Confederacy)* (Westport: Greenwood Press, 2000), 104; and Gail Landsman, *Sovereignty and Symbol: Indian-White Conflict at Ganienkeh* (Albuquerque: University of New Mexico Press, 1988).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
16. In 1970, the Oneidas filed a lawsuit in federal court challenging the validity of a 1795 &amp;quot;treaty&amp;quot; between the state of New York and the Oneida Indian Nation, based on the 1790 *Trade and Intercourse Act* (1 Stat. 137, 25 U.S.C. 177) and federal common law principles regarding the protection of Indian lands, which exclude states from making treaties with Indians. In 1974, the U.S. Supreme Court ruled in a landmark decision that &amp;quot;Indian title is a matter of federal law and can be extinguished only with federal consent,&amp;quot; and that the Oneidas could maintain a course of action in federal court pursuant to the *Trade and Intercourse Act* (*See Oneida Indian Nation v. County of Oneida,* 414 U.S. 661). The case then proceeded to trial on the merits, and in 1985 the U.S. Supreme Court held in *County of Oneida v. Oneida Indian Nation of New York* (470 U.S. 226) that the Oneidas&#039; land had been taken illegally in the 1795 &amp;quot;treaty.&amp;quot; Since then, the parties have attempted to negotiate a settlement, but so far there has not been a final resolution. For the history of the Oneida land claims, see Hauptman, *The Iroquois Struggle for Survival,* 179-203; Arlinda Locklear, &amp;quot;The Oneida Land Claims: A Legal Overview,&amp;quot; in Christopher Vecsey and William A. Starna, eds., *Iroquois Land Claims* (Syracuse: Syracuse University Press, 1988); Shattuck, *The Oneida Land Claims;* Arlinda Locklear, &amp;quot;The Buffalo Creek Treaty of 1838 and Its Legal Implications for Oneida Indian Land Claims,&amp;quot; in Hauptman/McLester, *The Oneida Indian Journey,* 85-89; and Curtis Berkey, &amp;quot;The Legal Basis for Iroquois Land Claims,&amp;quot; in *Akwesasne Journal* 16, No. 1 (Spring 1993), 23-25; and John Tahsuda, &amp;quot;The Oneida Land Claim: Yesterday and Today,&amp;quot; in *Buffalo Law Review* 46, No. 3 (1998), 1001-1009.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
17. After the U.S. Supreme Court&#039;s 1974 decision in the Oneida case (see supra note 16), the Cayuga Nation negotiated with New York State regarding two &amp;quot;treaties&amp;quot; in 1795 and 1807, in which the Cayugas ceded 64,027 acres, constituting all of their remaining homelands, to New York. Both of these &amp;quot;treaties&amp;quot; were entered into by New York State in patent violation of the 1790 *Trade and Intercourse Act,* which forbade states to make treaties with Indians. In 1979, New York State and the Cayuga Nation entered into a formal settlement agreement. However, the settlement was not approved by Congress, and in 1980 the Cayuga Nation filed a federal lawsuit against 11,000 New York State defendants for 64,027 acres of land and $350 million in damages (*Cayuga Indian Nation of New York v. Cuomo*). In 1992 the federal government joined the suit as a plaintiff-intervenor on behalf of the Cayuga Nation, which enabled the Cayugas to sue the state of New York. U.S. District judge Neal McCurn ruled that the Cayugas had a valid claim to the land because it was acquired by the state in violation of federal law, and in 2001 he found that the Cayugas are entitled to an award of $247.9 million in total damages (*Cayuga Indian Nation of New York v. Pataki,* 165 F.Supp.2d 266 N.D.N.Y. 2001). However, the state of New York as well as two counties have filed appeals, and the Cayugas filed counter appeals asking for $1.7 billion and all 64,027 acres. See Halftown, &amp;quot;The Haudenosaunee Cayuga Nation Land Claim&amp;quot;; Bob Herbert, &amp;quot;Justice, 200 Years Later,&amp;quot; in *New York Times* (column, November 26, 2001); and David L. Shaw, &amp;quot;Settlement urged in Cayuga Claim,&amp;quot; in *Syracuse Post-Standard* (October 7, 2001).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
18. One of the recommendations of the 1977 International NGO Conference on Discrimination Against Indigenous Populations in the Americas (see Notes, The Haudenosaunee: A Nation Since Time Immemorial, note 14 and accompanying text), to which this paper was originally presented, was &amp;quot;that the United Nations Special Committee on Decolonization hold hearings on all issues affecting Indigenous populations.&amp;quot; See International NGO Conference on Discrimination against Indigenous Populations in the Americas, &amp;quot;Report on Actions,&amp;quot; in International Indian Treaty Council, *The Geneva Conference,* 22-24.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;##&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Sources&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Books&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Balsdon, J. P. V. D. *The Story of the Roman Empire.* New York: McGraw Hill, 1970.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Barreiro, José ed. *Indian Roots of American Democracy.* Ithaca: Akwe:kon Press, Cornell University, 1992.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Belshaw, Cyril S. *Traditional Exchange and Modern Markets.* Englewood Cliffs: Prentice-Hall, Modernization of Traditional Societies Series, 1965.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bilharz, Joy A. *The Allegany Senecas and Kinzua Dam: Forced Relocation through Two Generations.* Lincoln: University of Nebraska Press, 1998.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Campisi, Jack and Laurence M. Hauptman, eds. *The Oneida Indian Experience.* Syracuse: Syracuse University Press, 1988.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Carmer, Carl. *Dark Trees to the Wind: A Cycle of York State Years.* New York: David McKay Company, Inc., 1949.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cohen, Felix S. *Handbook of Federal Indian Law.* Washington, DC: U.S. Government Printing Office, 1942.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deloria, Vine Jr. *Behind the Trail of Broken Treaties: An Indian Declaration of Independence.* New York: Dell Publishing, 1974.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deloria, Vine Jr. and Clifford M. Lytle. *American Indians, American Justice.* Austin: University of Texas Press, 1983.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deskaheh. *Why We Are Here Again* (pamphlet). London, August 1923.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deskaheh to the League of Nations, file 33687/28075.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ehle, John. *Trail of Tears: The Rise and Fall of the Cherokee Nation.* New York: Doubleday, 1988.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Engels, Frederick. *The Origin of the Family, Private Property and the State: In the Light of the Researches of Lewis H. Morgan.* New York: International Publishers, 1972. Originally published 1884 in Hottingen-Zurich.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Freire, Paulo. *Pedagogy of the Oppressed.* New York: Continuum, 1970.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
George-Kanentiio, Doug. *Iroquois Culture and Commentary.* Santa Fe: Clear Light Publishers, 2000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Graymont, Barbara. *The Iroquois in the American Revolution.* Syracuse: Syracuse University Press, 1972.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hanke, Louis. *The Spanish Struggle for Justice in the Conquest of America.* Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 1949.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hauptman, Laurence M. *Conspiracy of Interests: Iroquois Dispossession and the Rise of New York State.* Syracuse: Syracuse University Press, 1999.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hauptman, Laurence M. *The Iroquois and the New Deal.* Syracuse: Syracuse University Press, 1981.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hauptman, Laurence M. *The Iroquois Struggle for Survival: World War II to Red Power.* Syracuse: Syracuse University Press, 1986.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hauptman, Laurence M. *The Iroquois in the Civil War.* Syracuse: Syracuse University Press, 1993.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hauptman, Laurence M. and L. Gordon McLester III, eds. *The Oneida Indian Journey: From New York to Wisconsin, 1784-1860.* Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1999.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Heiser, Charles B., Jr. *Seed to Civilization: The Story of Man&#039;s Food.* San Francisco: W.H. Freeman, 1973.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hodges, Henry. *Technology in the Ancient World.* New York: Alfred Knopf, 1970.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
International Work Group for Indigenous Affairs (IWGIA), *The Indigenous World 2001-2002.* Copenhagen: IWGIA, 2002.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Jaimes, M. Annette ed. *The State of Native America: Genocide, Colonization, and Resistance.* Boston: South End Press, 1992.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Jennings, Francis. *The Invasion of America: Indians, Colonialism, and the Cant of Conquest.* New York: W.W. Norton &amp;amp; Company, 1976.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Johansen, Bruce E. *Debating Democracy: Native American Legacy of Freedom.* Santa Fe: Clear Light Publishers, 1995.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Johansen, Bruce E. *Forgotten Founders: How the American Indian Helped Shape Democracy.* Harvard and Boston: The Harvard Common Press, 1982.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Johansen, Bruce E. and Barbara A. Mann, eds. *Encyclopedia of the Haudenosaunee (Iroquois Confederacy).* Westport: Greenwood Press, 2000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kroeber, Alfred L. *Anthropology: Race, Language, Culture, Psychology, Prehistory—Revised Edition.* New York: Harcourt, Brace and Company, 1948.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Landsman, Gail. *Sovereignty and Symbol: Indian-White Conflict at Ganienkeh.* Albuquerque: University of New Mexico Press, 1988.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lyons, Oren R. *American Indian Sovereignty, Exiled in the Land of the Free.* Santa Fe: Clear Light Publishers, 1992.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Marx, Karl and Lawrence Krader, eds. *The Ethnological Notebooks of Karl Marx: Studies of Morgan, Phear, Maine, Lubbock.* Assen: Van Gorcum, 1972.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Morgan, Lewis Henry. *Ancient Society, or Researches in the Lines of Human Progress from Savagery, through Barbarism to Civilization.* London: Macmillan &amp;amp; Co., 1877.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Morgan, Lewis Henry. *League of the Ho-de&#039;-no-sau-nee, or Iroquois.* Rochester: Sage &amp;amp; Brother, 1851.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
National Lawyers Guild Committee on Native American Struggles, ed. *Reinventing Indian Law.* New Haven: The Advocate Press, 1982.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Newcomb, Steven. *A Matter of Religious Freedom.* Self-published essay, 1992.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Otis, Delos Sacket. *The Dawes Act and Allotment of Indian Lands.* Norman: University of Oklahoma Press, 1973.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Purdue, Theda and Michael D. Green. *The Cherokee Removal: A Brief History with Documents.* New York: Bedford Books of St. Martin&#039;s Press, 1995.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Redfield, Margaret Park, ed. *Human Nature and the Study of Society: The Papers of Robert Redfield, Vol. 1.* Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1962.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Redfield, Robert. *Peasant Society and Culture: An Anthropological Approach to Civilization.* Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1956.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rickard, Clinton (ed. Barbara Graymont). *Fighting Tuscarora: The Autobiography of Chief Clinton Rickard.* Syracuse: Syracuse University Press, 1973.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sahlins, Marshall. *Stone Age Economics.* Chicago: Aldine Press, 1972.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sauer, Carl O. *Agricultural Origins and Dispersals.* Cambridge: Massachusetts Institute of Technology Press, 1965.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Schaaf, Greg. *The Great Law of Peace and the Constitution of the United States of America.* Pamphlet published by Tree of Peace Society, 1987.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shattuck, George C. *The Oneida Land Claims: A Legal History.* Syracuse: Syracuse University Press, 1991.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tehanetorens. *Roots of the Iroquois.* Summertown, Tennessee: Native Voices, 2000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tehanetorens. *Sacred Song of the Hermit Thrush.* Summertown, Tennessee: Book Publishing Company, 1995.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tehanetorens. *Wampum Belts of the Iroquois.* Summertown, Tennessee: Book Publishing Company, 1999.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vecsey, Christopher and William A. Starna, eds. *Iroquois Land Claims.* Syracuse: Syracuse University Press, 1988.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Venne, Sharon H. *Our Elders Understand Our Rights: Evolving International Law Regarding Indigenous Peoples.* Penticton: Theytus Books, Ltd., 1998.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wagner, Sally Roesch. *Sisters in Spirit: Haudenosaunee (Iroquois) Influence on Early American Feminists.* Summertown, Tennessee: Native Voices, 2001.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wallace, Anthony F. C. *The Death and Rebirth of the Seneca.* New York: Alfred A. Knopf, 1970.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wallace, Paul. *White Roots of Peace: The Iroquois Book of Life.* Santa Fe: Clear Light Publishers, 1994.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
White, Lynn, Jr. *Medieval Technology and Social Change.* London: Oxford University Press, 1966.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wolf, Eric R. *Peasants.* Englewood Cliffs: Prentice-Hall, Foundations of Modern Anthropology Series, 1966.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Journals and Articles&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hauptman, Laurence M. &amp;quot;Four Eastern New Yorkers and Seneca Lands: A Study in Treaty Making,&amp;quot; in *New York Valley Regional Review* 13 (March 1996), 1-19.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hauptman, Laurence M. &amp;quot;The State&#039;s Men, the Salvation Seekers, and the Seneca: The Supplemental Treaty of Buffalo Creek, 1842,&amp;quot; in *New York History* 78, No. 1 (January 1997): 51-82.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Manley, Henry S. &amp;quot;The Treaty of Buffalo Creek,&amp;quot; in *New York History* 27 (July 1947), 313-328.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Powless, Irving Jr. &amp;quot;The Haudenosaunee, Yesterday and Today: A Conflict of Concepts and Laws,&amp;quot; in *Buffalo Law Review* 46, No. 3 (1998), 1083-1084.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Washinawatok, Ingrid. &amp;quot;International Emergence: Twenty-One Years at the United Nations,&amp;quot; in *New York City Law Review* 3 (1999), 41-57.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Woo, Grace Li Xiu. &amp;quot;Canada&#039;s Forgotten Founders: The Modern Significance of the Haudenosaunee (Iroquois) Application for Membership in the League of Nations,&amp;quot; in *Global Development Journal (GDJ) 2003 (1)* (Coventry: University of Warwick, 2003).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Government Publications&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
New York State Assembly, *Report of the Special Committee to Investigate the Indian Problem of the State of New York—Appointed by the Assembly of 1888.* Albany: Troy Press, 1889.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Royal Commission on Aboriginal Peoples, *Report of the Royal Commission on Aboriginal Peoples.* Ottawa: Canada Communication Group, 1996.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
United States Congress Senate Select Committee on Indian Affairs Report 100-565, *Acknowledging the Contribution of the Iroquois Confederacy of Nations to the Development of the United States Constitution.* Washington, DC: U.S. Government Printing Office, 1988.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;###&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Radio Broadcasts&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deskaheh, radio broadcast over station WHAM (Rochester, N.Y.), March 10, 1925.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;##&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Index&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Abrams, Frank, 72, 130&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Act of August 9, 1888, 134n. 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Act of March 3, 1871 (United States), 141n. 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aguilar, Juan, 20&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Akwesasne territory, 29, 30, 113, 133n. 4, 133n. 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alcatraz Island, occupation of, 9-10, 18&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Algonquin, 106, 107&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alleghany, 101&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
allotments, 134n. 6, 138n. 20&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
American Indian Movement (AIM), 10, 18&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
American Revolution, 110&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
animals, extinction rate, 89&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
assimilation policy&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Deskaheh&#039;s last speech, 49-53&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- missionaries, 107-108&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- political rationale, 97-98&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- strategy, 25, 111-114&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Termination Acts, 113, 142n. 15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aymara, 63&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bad Wound, Louie, 18, 24&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Banks, Dennis, 18&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Barreiro, José, 12&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beauvais, Thomas, 99&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bellecourt, Clyde, 20, 67&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Berman, Howard, 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bolivia&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- intimidation tactics, 73, 75&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Rhodesian settlers, 63, 74&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bomberry, Daniel, 12, 72, 75, 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Boots, Francis, 72&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brando, Marlon, 20&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Buffalo Creek, 110&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bureau of Indian Affairs (BIA) (United States), 10, 18&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canada&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- assimilation policy, 29, 42, 111&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- citizenship laws, 29, 134n. 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- colonialism of, 97, 99, 114&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- and Grand River, 29, 45, 95, 138n. 10&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Indian status, 98&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- police action, 42-43&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- and returning soldiers, 50&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- and Thames River government, 101&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- WWI draft, 42, 136n. 4&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canada Indian Act, 99, 134n. 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canadian Department of Indian Affairs (DIA), 16&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cayuga, 11, 80, 110&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- land claims, 117, 143n. 18&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- treaties, 101, 139n. 17&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cayuqueo, Nilo, 127&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Champlain, Samuel de, 100, 106&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Charlie, Rose, 20&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cherokee, 111&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Christianity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- goals of, 87-88, 98&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- missionaries, 107-108&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- and racism, 15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Roman Catholic Church, 14-15, 23, 96&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
citizenship&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Canada, 29, 134n. 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- separate, 111&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- United States, 29, 101, 112-113, 133n. 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Citizenship Act (United States) (1924), 133n. 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
clans, 35, 81, 107&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
colonialism&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- and Christianity, 107&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- decolonization process, 118, 125&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- definition, 68&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- and market economy, 98, 106-108, 111-115, 121&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- political rationale, 97-98&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- principles of, 95-97&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Columbia, Indian rights, 126&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Columbia River demonstrations, 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commission on Human Rights, 22&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Condori, Juan, 60, 62, 63, 66&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Constitution of the Five Nations, 36-39&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Constitution of the Six Nations, 92-93&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Convention on Biological Diversity, 22&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cook, Katsi, 127&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cornelious, Carol, 127&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cuba, 131&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dawes Act (United States), 101, 112, 142n. 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Decker, George P., 43&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deere, Phillip, 20, 62, 64-65, 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Delaware Indians, 110&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deskaheh&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- last speech, 48-54&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- legacy, 13, 29, 54&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- life of, 41-43&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- petition to League of Nations, 43-47&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
discovery, doctrine of, 15, 21&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
discovery of America, 14-15, 95&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- 500th anniversary of, 22-23&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Domestic Mode of Production, 104, 115&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Draft Declaration on the Rights of the World&#039;s Indigenous Peoples, 22, 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Economic and Social Council (ECOSOC), 21&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
education and assimilation, 98, 112, 114&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Elijah, Bruce, 72&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Emergency Response International Network (ERIN), 129&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
England. See Great Britain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
environmental issues&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- atomic energy, 90&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- delegates to UN conference, 102, 140n. 28&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- energy conservation, 120-121&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- extinction rate, 89&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Indian participation in, 22&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- natural resources, 85-89, 116, 120-121&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- nuclear power, 121&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- respect for Nature, 21, 23-24, 27, 86, 123&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Eskimos, 98&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
European culture. See Western Civilization&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
export crops, 122-123&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
family unit, 105, 116&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
firearms, 106-107&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
fire-starting ceremony, 64-65&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
fishing rights, 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
France, fur trade, 106-107&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Freire, Paulo, 91&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fujii, Nichidatsu, 89&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
fur trade, 106-107&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ganienkeh, 143n. 16&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gaskin, Stephen, 75&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
General Allotment Act (United States), 134n. 6, 139n. 20&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Geneva conference 1977&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- delegates to, 20, 30, 130&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- entrance procession, 66-68&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- epilogue, 77-78&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- experiences, 55-57, 69-72&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- first day agenda, 60-62&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- first day speakers, 62-66&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- intimidation tactics, 73-75&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- outcomes, 128-129&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- passport, Haudenosaunee, 57-60&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- picture taking tactics, 75&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- position papers, 11-12, 21, 81-84&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- press conference, 68-69&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- recommendation of, 144n. 19&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Segwalise&#039;s speech, 55-57, 75-77&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- status of, 135n. 14&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
genocide, 97, 115&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gilbert, Marci, 58&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
giveaways, 104, 107&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;The Good Word&amp;quot; (Handsome Lake), 40&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Grand Council of the Haudenosaunee, 11-12, 21, 27, 133n. 4&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Grand River Country&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- independence of, 42-43, 45&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- and traditional government, 29, 45, 101, 112, 138n. 10&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Great Britain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- colonial policy, 50, 100, 110, 114&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- settlers, 108-109&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Great Law of Peace, 34-39, 80-81, 92-93, 137n. 1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Great Peacemaker, the&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- legacy, 39-40, 92-93&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- principles of law, 34-39&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- teachings of, 24, 31-34, 80-81&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Great Tree of Peace, 36, 81&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Guaymi, 62-63&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Halbritter, Ray, 72, 130&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Haldimand Treaty (1784), 46-47, 135n. 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Handsome Lake, 28, 40&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Haudenosaunee&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- and assimilation, 111-115&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- attempt at international recognition, 102, 140n. 27&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- beaver trade, 106-107&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- and colonialism, 27-30, 100-102&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- the Confederacy, 110-111&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- definition, 80&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- displacement, 108-110&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- economic history, 103-118&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- and European ideas, 39&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- future of, 115-118&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Grand Council, 11-12, 21, 27, 133n. 4&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- historical roots, 80-84&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- legal history, 92-93, 98-102&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- as oppressed nation, 114&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- the Peacemaker, 24, 31-36, 39&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- political structure, 11, 26-27, 92-93&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- reoccupied lands, 116-117&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- spiritualism, 85-86, 104&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- traditional economy, 34-35, 38, 103-105, 115-116&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- traditional laws, 31-40&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- treaty period, 110-111&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He Crow, Francis, 62, 64&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Henry, Leo, 72, 130&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hiawatha. See Great Peacemaker&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hill, David, 99&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Holland, fur trade, 106-107&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Horne, Angus, 99&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
human rights&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- culture of the 1960s, 16&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- forum to register complaints, 23&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Indigenous peoples, 21-23, 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- violations, 129&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
hunting rights, 81&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
illegitimacy, in government policy, 98&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indian Act (Canada), 99, 134n. 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indian Citizenship Act (ICA) (United States), 101, 112&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indian Reorganization Act (IRA) (United States), 19, 29, 99&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indian rights movement, 9-12, 16-18, 22-23, 127-128, 129&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indian status, 98, 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indigenous peoples&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- definition, 68&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- destruction of, 63, 90-91, 126-127&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- financial independence, 129&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- future of, 126-131&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- historical roots, 83-84&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- human rights, 21-23, 125&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- international representation, 11-12, 21-23, 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- legal status, 98, 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- protection and liberation, 91, 117, 126-131&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
International Indian Treaty Council (IITC), 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
international law, 11-12, 21-23&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Iroquois Confederacy. See Haudenosaunee&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Jay Treaty, 41&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Jemison, Mary, 41&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Johnson, William, 108-109&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kakwirakiron, 61-62&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kanien:ke, 116&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kanienkehaka, 101&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kinzua Dam Act (United States), 101&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lake Champlain, 106&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lakota Treaty Council, 18&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
land, ownership&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- displacement, 101, 108-111&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- encroachment, 10, 29-30&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- lawsuits, 143n. 17, 143n. 18&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- principles of colonialism, 95-97&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- private property, 105&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- reoccupied lands, 116-117&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- tools of conquest, 113-114&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Law of Nations, 15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
leadership issues, 10, 104-105&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Leaf, Jimmy, 72, 130&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
League of Nations, 43, 46, 50&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
legal status, 98, 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
liberation technologies, 122, 123&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
liberation theology, 123, 125&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Little Feather, Sasheen, 20&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
locally based culture, 121-122&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lone Wolf, 99&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lyons, Lee, 17, 72, 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lyons, Oren, 14, 17, 20, 62, 72, 130&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Manuel, George, 127&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
market economy, 98, 115, 121, 122-123&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Martinez Cobo, José R., 21&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Marx, Karl, 92&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Maya, 71&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Means, Russell, 18, 60, 62, 63-64, 66, 74&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
media coverage&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Deskaheh in Geneva, 46-47&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Geneva conference 1977, 68-69&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Menchu Tum, Rigoberta, 129&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mendoza, José, 62, 77-78&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mexico&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- intimidation tactics, 74&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Zapatista movement, 129&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Military Service Act (Canada), 136n. 4&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Millape, Antonio, 20&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Misquito, 74&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mitchell, Joe, 127&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mohawk, 11, 110&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Akwesasne territory, 29, 30, 113, 133n. 4, 133n. 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- displacement, 108-110&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- reoccupied lands, 116-117&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mohawk, John, 21, 127&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mohawk Council of Akwesasne, 133n. 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mohawk Nation Council of Chiefs, 133n. 4&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mohawk River, 108&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Monongye, David, 66, 67, 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Montour, Art, 59, 72, 130&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Morgan, Lewis Henry, 93&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mother Earth, 23-24, 27, 85, 86&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Muñoz, Mary, 127&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Natalio, 74&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Native movement, 9-12, 16-18, 22-23, 127-128, 129&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Natural Law, 34&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
natural resources&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- depletion of, 120-121&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- history of use, 87-89, 116&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Natural World Peoples, 68, 81, 86&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
nature, respect for, 21, 23-24, 27, 86, 123&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
New York State&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- jurisdiction, 29, 101&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- obtaining of treaties, 28&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- removal policy, 111&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- treaties with, 101, 139n. 17&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NGOs (Non-Governmental Organizations), 11, 15, 60-61&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nicaragua, intimidation tactics, 74&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Oakes, Aaron, 72, 113, 130&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Oakes, Richard, 10, 18&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Oglala Sioux, 18&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Oneida, 11, 80, 110&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- land claims, 117, 143n. 17&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- treaties, 101, 139n. 17&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ongwe Honwekah. See Way of Life&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Onkwehon:we, 85, 86&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Onondaga, 11, 80, 114&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
oppressed nation, definition, 114&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Panama, 62&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
passport, Haudenosaunee (Six Nations), 42, 57-60&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Patterson, Harry, 99&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Patterson, Stuart, 72, 130&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
peace, definition, 33&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Peacemaker. See Great Peacemaker&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;Pedagogy of the Oppressed* (Freire), 91&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pequot, 107&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Permanent Forum on Indigenous Issues, 21, 23, 126, 129, 130&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
plenary power, 100&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Political Question Doctrine, 100-101&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
poverty, 63, 122&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Public Law 280 (United States), 134n. 10, 142n. 15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Public Law 88-533 (United States), 101, 140n. 25&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
racism, 15, 97&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red Shirt, Larry, 17, 18, 62, 64, 65, 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
relocation policies, 18, 28, 101&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Removal Policy, 111&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rickard, Clinton, 41, 47, 99, 140n. 27&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Roman Catholic Church&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- lack of apology, 15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- papal donation, 14-15, 23, 96&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sacred Pipe Ceremony, 62, 64, 66&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sanchez, Marie, 20&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sasheen Little Feather, 20&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
schools and assimilation, 98, 112, 114&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Segwalise, 55-57, 75-77&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
self-determination&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- decolonization process, 115, 125&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Indian rights movement, 9-12, 16-18, 22-23, 127-128, 129&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- last speech of Deskaheh, 48-54&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- minority status, 62-63&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- of political institutions, 95-102&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- right to, 22, 25, 30&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Seneca, 11, 80, 101, 110, 117&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- treaties, 111, 141n. 5, 141n. 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
seven generations, 24-25, 104&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shawnee, 110&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shenandoah, Audrey, 17, 72, 130&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shenandoah, Leon, 72, 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Simcoe Treaty, 135n. 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sitting Bull, 14&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Six Nation Confederacy. See Haudenosaunee&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Skenandore, Artley, 72&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Smithsonian Institution, Taino human remains, 130-131&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Snake, Reuben, 127&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Solomon, Art, 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
sovereignty. See self-determination&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
spiritualism, 85-86, 104&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
spirituality, 33, 120, 125&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Spotted Horse, David, 20, 65&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
St. Regis, 113. See also Akwesasne territory&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
St. Regis Tribal Council, 133n. 4&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sundown, Corbett, 72, 130&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Susquehanna River, 108&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Taino human remains, 130-131&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
technological change&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- herding of animals, 86-87&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- importance of, 119-120&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- iron, use of, 88&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
termination policies, 18, 111, 113&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Termination Acts, 113, 142n. 15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thames River community, 101&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thomas, Daniel (Rokwaho), 127&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thompson, Loran, 72, 130&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thompson, Louie, 72, 130&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tonawanda, 117, 141n. 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Trade and Intercourse Act (United States), 143n. 17, 143n. 18&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
traditional economy, 34-35, 38, 103-105, 115-116&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
traditional government&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Grand Council, 11-12, 21, 27&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- interference in, 29, 45, 99-102, 112&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- principles of, 34-39&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- structure of, 26-27, 92-93&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
traditional values&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Indian identity, 77-78&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- liberation theology, 123, 125&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- renewal of, 16, 30, 125&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- teachings of Handsome Lake, 28, 40&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Way of Life, 26, 85-86, 103-105&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Trail of Broken Treaties, 10-11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Trail of Tears, 111&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
travel, U.S./Canada, 41&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
treaties&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- dishonoring of, 114-115&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- obtaining of, 28, 141n. 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- with the U.S., 100-101, 110-111&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Treaty of Amity, Commerce and Navigation, 135n. 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Treaty of Buffalo Creek of January 15, 1838, 141n. 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Treaty of Buffalo Creek of May 20, 1842, 141n. 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Treaty of Fort Stanwix, 133n. 1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Treaty of Paris (1783), 110&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
treaty rights, demonstrations for, 9-10&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Treaty with the Mohawk (1797), 101&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Treaty with the Potawatomi, 134n. 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tree of Peace, Great, 36&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
tribal self-government, 99-102&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tuscarora, demonstration at, 10&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tuscarora nation, 11, 108&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tuteloe, 110&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Two Row Treaty (1613), 100, 138n. 12&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Two Row Wampum Belt, 138n. 12&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
United Nations&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Earth Summit 1992, 22&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- and NGOs, 11, 15, 60-61&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- role of, 15-16, 21-23&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- study of treaty rights, 22&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
United Nations Decolonization Committee, 118&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
United States&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- assimilation policy, 29&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- citizenship laws, 29, 101, 112-113, 133n. 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- colonialism of, 97, 114&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- energy policy, 120-121&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- exploitation of Indigenous peoples, 63&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Indian status, 98&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- obtaining of treaties, 28, 100-101, 110-111&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- plenary power, 100&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
United States Bureau of Indian Affairs (BIA), 10, 18, 113&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
United States Constitution, 100, 137n. 1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unity Caravan, 16, 17-18, 127&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Urban Indians, 98&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Year of the World&#039;s Indigenous People,&amp;quot; 22-23&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wapepah, Bill, 20&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
warfare&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- and the beaver trade, 106-107&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- colonial, 27, 53-54, 110&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- and the Confederacy, 37&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- European, 108&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Washinawatok, Ingrid, 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Washington, DC, march of 1972, 10&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Way of Life, 26, 85-86, 103-105&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Western Civilization&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- definition, 68&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- feudalism, 93-95&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- future of, 90-91, 116, 120&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- legal systems, 95-101&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- market economy, 98, 115, 121, 122-123&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- political histories, 119&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- rise of, 86-85&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Whipple Report, 112, 139n. 17, 142n. 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wilson, Richard, 18&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
women&#039;s rights, 38&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Working Group for Indigenous Populations (WGIP), 21, 22&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
World War I, Aboriginal volunteers, 42, 136n. 4&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wounded Knee, occupation, 11, 18, 20&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Zephier, Greg, 20&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>The Phantom Bull</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=Primitive_communism&amp;diff=91715</id>
		<title>Primitive communism</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=Primitive_communism&amp;diff=91715"/>
		<updated>2026-07-06T22:57:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;The Phantom Bull: I believe that we should depreciate the term &amp;quot;primitive communism&amp;quot; (which can be seen as a settler-colonial term that belittles native cultures), and instead use the term &amp;quot;original communism&amp;quot; (which is the term that Comrade Charhapiti uses). This art&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:Cavepaintingwomen.jpg|thumb|Cave paintings of women, circa 5000 BCE, located in modern-day Algeria]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Original communism&#039;&#039;&#039; (often referred to as &amp;quot;primitive communism&amp;quot; in the West) was the economic system that was present before the first use of [[agriculture]] and the later formation of civilization, when [[class society]] began. [[Labour|Labor]] in these societies was based on simple cooperation and [[Social class|classes]] did not exist. These societies were originally organized into matriarchal clans. &lt;br /&gt;
In original [[Communism|communist]] societies, people lived in groups of up to a few dozen and all labor was communal. Groups hunted and gathered their food, which they consumed together. They also made clothes out of animal skin and tools out of bones. Many people died from hunger or wild animals, and cannibalism also existed in this period.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:0&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{Citation|author=Economics Institute of the Academy of Sciences of the U.S.S.R|year=1954|title=Political Economy|chapter=The Primitive Communal Mode of Production|page=|pdf=https://revolutionarydemocracy.org/archive/PoliticalEconomy.pdf|city=London|publisher=Lawrence &amp;amp; Wishart|chapter-url=https://www.marxists.org/subject/economy/authors/pe/pe-ch01.htm|mia=https://www.marxists.org/subject/economy/authors/pe/index.htm}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Means of production ==&lt;br /&gt;
The [[means of production]] were very simple and therefore developed very slowly. The first tools used by humans were chipped stones and sticks. Eventually, they learned how to create fire, which they used to cook food, develop more tools, and protect themselves from wild animals. Fire also offered protection from the cold, helping humanity spread across the world. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As these tools were socially relevant for the survival of the whole group, and were also relatively easy to make, there was no reason to attach ownership to any of those tools. As such, they belonged to the whole group or tribe, and anyone could freely use them. Thus the material basis for communism existed, as the means of production were held in common, hence the term of original communism. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Even during the time of these societies, it was very likely that labour was already divided (as [[Karl Marx|Marx]] notes in the first chapter of &#039;&#039;[[The poverty of philosophy (1847)|Poverty of Philosophy]]&#039;&#039;), i.e. specialized. Some people were responsible for making tools, and others would use them to hunt or forage for plants. Thus a socially beneficial loop was created and everyone in a tribe would directly benefit from the labor of their peers. This further made the need for [[private property]] irrelevant: if anyone decided that the product of their hunt belonged to them and them only, they would likely find themselves ostracized from the group or unable to get any &amp;quot;gifts&amp;quot; from the tribe, such as foraged food or tools to hunt with. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As humanity progressed, people began combining wood and sharpened stone to make stronger tools used for hunting large animals and fishing. For hundreds of thousands of years, stone was the main material used in tools, but copper, bronze, and iron later replaced it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The bow and arrow made hunting much more efficient and led to the development of cattle breeding. Hunters began to domesticate animals, starting with the dog and then goats, cattle, pigs, and horses. They also learned that seeds could be used to grow plants, marking the beginning of [[agriculture]]. People initially tilled the ground by hand, then with sticks, and finally with hoes. As cattle and metal tools were introduced to agriculture, making it more productive, tribes created permanent homes.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:0&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Rise of class society ==&lt;br /&gt;
The development of agriculture was a major turning point in the history of human civilization. Along with it, humans also learned to make more durable earthen or clay ware with which to preserve grain and other foods. Being able to store food gave rise to two things. Firstly, higher population levels could be sustained. Secondly, these stocks and storages were the first type of private property. Therefore, a number of people who did not need to toil the earth were needed to perform more [[intellectual labour]], such as keeping count of grain stocks and managing them.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{Library citation|link=Library:How Marxism works}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; This naturally gave rise to an administrative class who later became [[King|kings]] and [[Noble|nobles]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Patriarchy]] replaced the traditional [[Matriarchy|matriarchal]] clans. Individual families began to farm their own plots of land. Chiefs of clans or tribes began to treat [[communal property]] as their own property when dealing with outside groups. This process began with the [[privatization]] of cattle and later spread to tools. The beginning of private property broke clans apart into large [[Patriarchy|patriarchal]] families that divided the original communal property. Elders, priests, and military leaders enriched themselves and formed a [[ruling class]] while passing their power to their descendants. Instead of killing prisoners, as had happened previously, wealthy families [[Slavery|enslaved]] them. Slaveholding households became richer, which increased inequality and allowed them to acquire more slaves.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:0&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Communism]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[History of humanity]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Class society]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:History]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Communism]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Modes of production]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>The Phantom Bull</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=Arghiri_Emmanuel&amp;diff=91411</id>
		<title>Arghiri Emmanuel</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=Arghiri_Emmanuel&amp;diff=91411"/>
		<updated>2026-06-21T23:31:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;The Phantom Bull: I wrote more about Emmanuel&amp;#039;s life. I will continue adding more later.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Infobox politician|name=Arghiri Emmanuel|native_name=Αργύρης Εμμανουήλ|image_size=200px|caption=Photo of Comrade Emmanuel|birth_date={{Birth date|1911|06|07}}|birth_place=Patras, Greece|death_date={{Death date and age|2001|12|14|1911|06|07}}|death_place=Paris, France|nationality=Greek/French|political_orientation=Marxism|image=File:Arghiri-Emmanuel.jpg}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Arghiri Emmanuel&#039;&#039;&#039; (June 7, 1911 – December 14, 2001) was a [[Greek]] (and later naturalized French) [[Marxist]] and economic theoretician. He is best known for founding the theory and systematic study of [[unequal exchange]]. Emmanuel was born in Patras, Greece, just one year before Greece entered the Balkan wars.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{Citation|last=Lauesen|first=Torkil|author=Torkil Lauesen|year=2025|title=Unequal Exchange: Past, Present, and Future|title-url=https://www.iskrabooks.org/books/p/ue-past-present-future|chapter=The Historical Context of the Theory of Unequal Exchange|section=Emmanuel—A Man of the 20th Century|page=4|publisher=Iskra Books|series=Anti-Imperialist Marxism (AIM) Series|volume=3}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Revolt against a right-wing government ==&lt;br /&gt;
In the 1940s, the allied powers attempted to install a right-wing Greek government in Cairo, [[Arab Republic of Egypt|Egypt]]. Emmanuel took an active part in revolting against this installation, and on April 4, 1944, he and other soldiers on five navy ships attempted a mutiny. This mutiny was ultimately unsuccessful; eleven seamen were killed, others were wounded, and some were taken prisoner, including Emmanuel. Emmanuel and his comrades were sentenced to death, but Emmanuel was granted amnesty in 1945, and he was sent to Sudan and kept in a British prison camp. While in the prison camp, Emmanuel attempted to teach his fellow prisoners about dialectical materialism. In March 1946, he was finally released, but he found it too difficult to find work in Greece, so Emmanuel returned to the Congo.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{Citation|last=Lauesen|first=Torkil|author=Torkil Lauesen|year=2025|title=Unequal Exchange: Past, Present, and Future|title-url=https://www.iskrabooks.org/books/p/ue-past-present-future|chapter=The Historical Context of the Theory of&lt;br /&gt;
Unequal Exchange|section=The Mutiny|page=5-7|series=Anti-Imperialist Marxism (AIM) Series|volume=3}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>The Phantom Bull</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=File:Arghiri-Emmanuel.jpg&amp;diff=91410</id>
		<title>File:Arghiri-Emmanuel.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=File:Arghiri-Emmanuel.jpg&amp;diff=91410"/>
		<updated>2026-06-21T23:24:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;The Phantom Bull: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;A photo of Arghiri Emmanuel sitting at a desk.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>The Phantom Bull</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=Arghiri_Emmanuel&amp;diff=91409</id>
		<title>Arghiri Emmanuel</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=Arghiri_Emmanuel&amp;diff=91409"/>
		<updated>2026-06-21T22:18:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;The Phantom Bull: I created a main article about Arghiri Emmanuel. I will elaborate upon it once it has been approved.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Arghiri Emmanuel&#039;&#039;&#039; (June 7, 1911 – December 14, 2001) was a Greek (and later naturalized French) [[Marxist]] and economic theoretician. He is best known for founding the theory and study of [[unequal exchange]].&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>The Phantom Bull</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=Michael_Parenti&amp;diff=91397</id>
		<title>Michael Parenti</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=Michael_Parenti&amp;diff=91397"/>
		<updated>2026-06-20T01:28:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;The Phantom Bull: I changed a few words that I had missed last time.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Infobox politician&lt;br /&gt;
|political_party=[[Green Mountain Peace and Justice Party|Liberty Union Party]] (1974)|website=https://www.michael-parenti.org|image=Michael Parenti.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
|name=Michael Parenti&lt;br /&gt;
|caption=Close-up portrait of Comrade Parenti|birth_date=30 September 1933&lt;br /&gt;
|birth_place=[[Manhattan]], [[New York City]], [[State of New York|New York]], [[United States of America|United States]]|death_date=24 January 2026 (aged 92)|nationality=[[Statesian]]&lt;br /&gt;
|political_orientation=[[Anti-imperialism]]&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;[[Communism]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Statesian nationalism]]}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Michael John Parenti&#039;&#039;&#039; (30 September, 1933 – 24 January, 2026)&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;[https://www.newyorkfamilyhistory.org/online-records/new-york-city-birth-index/617-19331/1 Births Reported in 1933—Borough of Manhattan. vol. 1.]&#039;&#039; New York City. [[New York City Department of Health]]. p. 241.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; was a [[Statesian]] communist, political scientist, academic historian and cultural critic who wrote on scholarly and popular subjects. He taught at US and international universities and was a guest lecturer before campus and community audiences. Michael Parenti is the father of [[Christian Parenti]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Parenti&#039;s writings covered a wide range of subjects: U.S. politics, culture, ideology, [[political economy]], [[imperialism]], [[fascism]], [[communism]], [[democratic socialism]], free-market orthodoxies, conservative judicial activism, religion, ancient history, modern history, historiography, repression in academia, news and entertainment media, technology, [[environmentalism]], [[sexism]], [[racism]], [[Venezuela]], the wars in [[Iraq War|Iraq]] and [[Yugoslav Wars|Yugoslavia]], ethnicity, and his own early life.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;webarticles&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{Web citation|title=Articles and Other Published Selections|url=http://michaelparenti.org/articles.html|access-date=25 December 2007|publisher=Michael Parenti|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20071026092449/http://michaelparenti.org/articles.html &amp;lt;!-- Bot retrieved archive --&amp;gt;|archive-date=26 October 2007}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;contrary&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{Citation|title-url=https://archive.org/details/contrarynotionsm0000pare/page/403|author=Michael Parenti|title=Contrary Notions: The Michael Parenti Reader|year=2007|publisher=City Lights Books|isbn=978-0-87286-482-5|page=403}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;webbooks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{Web citation|title=Books by Michael Parenti|url=http://michaelparenti.org/books.html|access-date=25 December 2007|publisher=Michael Parenti}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1974, Parenti ran in Vermont on the democratic socialist [[Green Mountain Peace and Justice Party|Liberty Union Party]] ticket for [[United States Congress|U.S. Congress]] and received 7.1% of the vote.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{Web citation|url=https://electionarchive.vermont.gov/elections/search/date:1974-11-05/office_id:5|website=VT Elections Database|title=Elections Results Archive}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{Citation|author=Bernie Sanders|url=https://archive.org/details/outsiderinhouse00bern|title=Outsider in the House|year=1997|chapter=You Have to Begin Somewhere}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; This run was done with [[Bernie Sanders]] who at the time was friends with Parenti. This friendship ended when [[North Atlantic Treaty Organization|NATO]] waged war on [[Federal Republic of Yugoslavia (1992–2006)|Yugoslavia]]. While Bernie stood with the [[Imperialism|imperialists]], Parenti stood with the anti-imperialists.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{Web citation|url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=OLNQEHbusSA|website YouTube|title=Michael Parenti on Bernie Sanders}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Political views ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Statesian nationalism ===&lt;br /&gt;
Parenti was a [[Statesian nationalism|Statesian patriot]].&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parenti personally identifies as a patriot:&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;Now, in contrast to the superpatriots—it begins to brighten here. I&#039;m almost finished—[in] contrast to the superpatriots are the real patriots. &#039;&#039;&#039;We&#039;&#039;&#039; who, for instance, don&#039;t want to see the good name of our nation [the United States] sullied.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;[[AfroMarxist]] (2020-04-11).: [https://youtu.be/4vKfejeruhk &amp;quot;Michael Parenti: &#039;Super Patriotism vs Real Patriotism&#039; (1988)&amp;quot;]. [[YouTube]]. Retrieved 2024-11-02.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; While he was very critical of Statesian policy (both domestic and foreign) and he acknowledged that the United States has always been imperialist since its very inception,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;The history of the United States has been one of territorial, commercial, and military expansion.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;[...]&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;As our common reading of history would have it, [...] the United States apparently developed a mighty empire while never being sullied by imperialistic practices. If imperialism is admitted, it is most often described as a kind of momentary lapse occurring sometime between the Spanish-American War and Theodore Roosevelt&#039;s &amp;quot;big stick&amp;quot; policy.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;In reality, from the very beginning of its history, the nation suffered quite overtly from expansionist pangs.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;Michael Parenti (1969).: [[Library:The Anti-Communist Impulse|&#039;&#039;The Anti-Communist Impulse&#039;&#039;]]. [[Random House]]. [[Library:The Anti-Communist Impulse#CHAPTER SIX - Virtue Faces the World|CHAPTER SIX - Virtue Faces the World]]. p. 104.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and while he criticised the patriotism of the ruling class, he nonetheless upheld the existence of the United States and advocated for Statesian patriotism.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:0&amp;quot;&amp;gt;See [[Library:Superpatriotism#Real Patriotism|this chapter]] of his 2004 book &#039;&#039;[[Library:Superpatriotism|Superpatriotism]]&#039;&#039; in which he advocates for &amp;quot;real patriotism&amp;quot; in the United States, as opposed to the &amp;quot;Superpatriotism&amp;quot; of the ruling class.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Parenti condemned [[anti-Americanism]] and the desecration of Statesian [[National symbol|national symbols]], arguing that it alienates the Statesian people and allows US leaders to brand all opposition as &amp;quot;anti-American&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Parenti, &amp;quot;Super Patriotism vs Real Patriotism&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; He called it a &amp;quot;mistake&amp;quot; to blame the United States for what was being done in its name,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parenti, &#039;&#039;Superpatriotism&#039;&#039;. [[Library:Superpatriotism#America—Love It or Leave It|&#039;&#039;America—Love It or Leave It&#039;&#039;]]. p. 14.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; even when the country is intrinsically linked to those things. Furthermore, he attributed the hatred of the US by many people in the [[New Left]] to its supposed &amp;quot;[[Anarchism|anarchist]] tendencies&amp;quot;, noting that anarchists likewise view the [[State apparatus|state]] as the problem rather than the class it serves.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:1&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Parenti tried to distinguish between the [[Jingoism|jingoistic]], [[Chauvinism|chauvinistic]], [[Imperialism|imperialistic]] [[patriotism]] of the ruling class (which he dubbed &amp;quot;superpatriotism&amp;quot;) and his brand of &amp;quot;real patriotism&amp;quot;. According to him, the &amp;quot;superpatriots&amp;quot; don&#039;t actually love their country, [[History of the United States|its history]], [[Statesians|its people]], [[Statesian culture|its culture]], or any of its supposed virtues ([[freedom]], democracy, or economic opportunity). To them, &amp;quot;America is a simplified ideological abstraction, an emotive symbol represented by other abstract symbols like the flag.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parenti, &#039;&#039;Superpatriotism.&#039;&#039; [[Library:Superpatriotism#What Does it Mean to Love Our Country?|What Does it Mean to Love Our Country?]] p. 9.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Real patriots&amp;quot; by contrast, he wrote, &amp;quot;care enough about their country to want to improve it.&amp;quot; In Parenti&#039;s opinion, &amp;quot;real patriots&amp;quot; advocate for a different United States, a United States by and for the Statesian people,&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:0&amp;quot; /&amp;gt; and &amp;quot;real patriots&amp;quot; find other things in their history to be proud of than the &amp;quot;superpatriots&amp;quot; and champion other figures.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is why, unlike many other Statesian patriots, Parenti did not glorify the [[Founding Fathers of the United States|Founding Fathers]] or figures such as [[Abraham Lincoln]] and [[Franklin D. Roosevelt|Franklin Delano Roosevelt]]. He correctly argued that those rulers, who overwhelmingly came from wealthy, affluent, propertied backgrounds, actually opposed [[Democracy|popular rule]], and that many of their supposed &amp;quot;achievements&amp;quot; (such as the [[Constitution of the United States|Constitution]], the [[United States Bill of Rights|Bill of Rights]], the reduction of [[child labour]], and the [[New Deal]]) came in whole or in part as reluctant concessions from the [[ruling class]] in light of popular agitation.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Michael Parenti (2011).: [[Library:Democracy for the Few|&#039;&#039;Democracy for the Few&#039;&#039;]]. 9th ed. [[Cengage Learning]]. pp. 5–16, 21, 25.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; However, what Parenti failed to realise is that there is no &amp;quot;other&amp;quot; United States. [[Capitalism]], [[colonialism]], and imperialism are intrinsic to the United States, and trying to remedy these issues would mean the death of the state. Patriotism in the Statesian context is not a love of the people, the culture, or of democracy, but of the [[Settler colonialism|settler colonial]] project, i.e., the state. In other words, if one loves the Statesian people and wants them to be liberated, one should seek the end of the United States.&lt;br /&gt;
== Library works by Michael Parenti ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Message box/Incomplete}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Articles ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Kozy with the Klan|Kozy with the Klan]]&#039;&#039; (1992), an excerpt from his book [[Library:America Besieged|&#039;&#039;America Besieged&#039;&#039;]] (1998) published on his website as a standalone article&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Imperialism 101|Imperialism 101]]&#039;&#039;, an excerpt from his book &#039;&#039;[[Library:Against Empire|Against Empire]]&#039;&#039; (1995) published on his website as a standalone article&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Free Speech—At a Price|Free Speech—At a Price]]&#039;&#039;, an excerpt from his book &#039;&#039;[[Library:Dirty Truths|Dirty Truths]]&#039;&#039; (1996) published on his website as a standalone article&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Hidden Holocaust, USA|Hidden Holocaust, USA]]&#039;&#039;, an excerpt from his book &#039;&#039;Dirty Truths&#039;&#039; (1996) published on his website as a standalone article&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:The JFK Assassination: Defending the Gangster State|The JFK Assassination: Defending the Gangster State]]&#039;&#039; (1996, 2013), an excerpt from his book &#039;&#039;Dirty Truths&#039;&#039; (1996) published on his website as a standalone article&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Rational Fascism|Rational Fascism]]&#039;&#039;, an excerpt from his book &#039;&#039;[[Library:Blackshirts and Reds|Blackshirts and Reds]]&#039;&#039; (1997) published on his website as a standalone article&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:The Rational Destruction of Yugoslavia|The Rational Destruction of Yugoslavia]]&#039;&#039; (1999)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Yugoslav Sojourn|Yugoslav Sojourn: Notes from the Other Side]]&#039;&#039; (2000)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:The Super Rich Are Out Of Sight|The Super Rich Are Out Of Sight]]&#039;&#039; (2000)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:The Media and their Atrocities|The Media and their Atrocities]]&#039;&#039; (2000)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Defying the Sanctions|Defying the Sanctions: A Flight to Iraq]]&#039;&#039; (2001)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Monopoly Media Manipulation|Monopoly Media Manipulation]]&#039;&#039; (2001)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Terrorism Meets Reactionism|Terrorism Meets Reactionism]]&#039;&#039; (2001)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Media Moments|Media Moments]]&#039;&#039; (2002)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:To Kill Iraq|To Kill Iraq]]&#039;&#039; (2003)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:The Demonization of Slobodan Milosevic|The Demonization of Slobodan Milosevic]]&#039;&#039; (2003)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Friendly Feudalism: The Tibet Myth|Friendly Feudalism: The Tibet Myth]]&#039;&#039; (2003, 2004, 2007)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Empires, Old and New|&#039;&#039;Empires, Old and New&#039;&#039;]] (2004)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Are Heterosexuals Worthy of Marriage?|&#039;&#039;Are Heterosexuals Worthy of Marriage?&#039;&#039;]] (2004)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Good Things Happening in Venezuela|Good Things Happening in Venezuela]]&#039;&#039; (2005)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:In the Reactionary Era of “No Alternative”|&#039;&#039;In the Reactionary Era of “No Alternative”&#039;&#039;]] (2005)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:How the Free Market Killed New Orleans|&#039;&#039;How the Free Market Killed New Orleans&#039;&#039;]] (2005)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Right-Wing Judicial Activism|&#039;&#039;Right-Wing Judicial Activism&#039;&#039;]] (2005)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Government by Giveaway|&#039;&#039;Government by Giveaway&#039;&#039;]] (2005)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Custom Against Women|&#039;&#039;Custom Against Women&#039;&#039;]], an excerpt from his book [[Library:The Culture Struggle|&#039;&#039;The Culture Struggle&#039;&#039;]] (2006) published on [[ZNetwork]] as a standalone article&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The Hidden Politics of Deficit Spending|&#039;&#039;The Hidden Politics of Deficit Spending&#039;&#039;]] (2006)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Still Soft on (Corporate) Crime|&#039;&#039;Still Soft on (Corporate) Crime&#039;&#039;]] (2006)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:The Stolen Presidential Elections|The Stolen Presidential Elections]]&#039;&#039; (2006, 2007)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Mystery: How Wealth Creates Poverty in the World|&#039;&#039;Mystery: How Wealth Creates Poverty in the World&#039;&#039;]] (2006)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The Cuban Five and US Terrorism|&#039;&#039;The Cuban Five and US Terrorism&#039;&#039;]] (2006)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Globalization and Democracy:Some Basics|Globalization and Democracy: Some Basics]]&#039;&#039; (2007)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Gender Savagery in Guatemala|Gender Savagery in Guatemala]]&#039;&#039; (2007)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Mother Teresa, John Paul II, and the Fast-Track Saints|Mother Teresa, John Paul II, and the Fast-Track Saints]]&#039;&#039; (2007)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Bad Boys, Nasty Boys: Out of the GOP&#039;s Closet|Bad Boys, Nasty Boys: Out of the GOP&#039;s Closet]]&#039;&#039; (2008)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Dubious Design|Dubious Design]]&#039;&#039; (2008)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Afghanistan, Another Untold Story|Afghanistan, Another Untold Story]]&#039;&#039; (2008)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Capitalism&#039;s Self-Inflicted Apocalypse|Capitalism&#039;s Self-Inflicted Apocalypse]]&#039;&#039; (2009)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:North Korea: &amp;quot;Sanity&amp;quot; at the Brink|North Korea: &amp;quot;Sanity&amp;quot; at the Brink]]&#039;&#039; (2009)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:The Honduras Coup: Is Obama Innocent?|The Honduras Coup: Is Obama Innocent?]]&#039;&#039; (2009)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Italian American Identity: To Be or Not To Be|Italian American Identity: To Be or Not To Be]]&#039;&#039; (2009)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:What Do Empires Do?|What Do Empires Do?]]&#039;&#039; (2010)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Cuban Prisoners, Here and There|&#039;&#039;Cuban Prisoners, Here and There&#039;&#039;]] (2010)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Pedophiles and Popes: Doing the Vatican Shuffle|Pedophiles and Popes: Doing the Vatican Shuffle]]&#039;&#039; (2010)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Death and Profits: The Utility Protection Racket|Death and Profits: The Utility Protection Racket]]&#039;&#039; (2010)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Money Is Still the Name of the Game|Money Is Still the Name of the Game]]&#039;&#039; (2010)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:The Mafia and Me|The Mafia and Me]]&#039;&#039; (2011)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Profit Pathology and Disposable Planet|Profit Pathology and Disposable Planet]]&#039;&#039; (2011)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Making the World Safe for Hypocrisy|&#039;&#039;Making the World Safe for Hypocrisy&#039;&#039;]] (2011)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Class Warfare Indeed|Class Warfare Indeed]]&#039;&#039; (2011)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Occupy America|Occupy America]]&#039;&#039; (2011)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Must We Adore Vaclav Havel?|&#039;&#039;Must We Adore Vaclav Havel?&#039;&#039;]] (2011), an excerpt from his book &#039;&#039;Blackshirts and Reds&#039;&#039; (1997) published on ZNetwork as a standalone article&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Free Market Medicine: A Personal Account|Free Market Medicine: A Personal Account]]&#039;&#039; (2011)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Free Market Health Care: True Stories|Free Market Health Care: True Stories]]&#039;&#039; (2012)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Iran and Everything Else|Iran and Everything Else]]&#039;&#039; (2012)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:The Nobel Peace Prize for War|The Nobel Peace Prize for War]]&#039;&#039; (2012)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:A Terrible Normality|A Terrible Normality]]&#039;&#039; (2013)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Eating Horses In Paris|Eating Horses In Paris]]&#039;&#039; (2013)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Requiem for a Dominatrix|Requiem for a Dominatrix]]&#039;&#039; (2013)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:I Have a Dream, a Blurred Vision|I Have a Dream, a Blurred Vision]]&#039;&#039; (2013)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Syria, Sarin, and Casus Belli|Syria, Sarin, and Casus Belli]]&#039;&#039; (2013)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:85 Billionaires and the Better Half|85 Billionaires and the Better Half]] (2014)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:What&#039;s a Slum?|&#039;&#039;What&#039;s a Slum?&#039;&#039;]] (2014), an excerpt from his book [[Library:Waiting for Yesterday|&#039;&#039;Waiting for Yesterday&#039;&#039;]] (2013) published on his website as a standalone article&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Ukraine and Regime Change|&#039;&#039;Ukraine and Regime Change&#039;&#039;]], an excerpt from [[Library:Flashpoint in Ukraine|&#039;&#039;Flashpoint in Ukraine: How the US Drive for Hegemony Risks World War III&#039;&#039;]] (2014) by [[Stephen Lendman]], published on his website as a standalone article&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:1918: On When a War Ended (Though Others Would Follow)|1918: On When a War Ended (Though Others Would Follow)]]&#039;&#039; (2014)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:A Long Time For Killing|&#039;&#039;A Long Time For Killing&#039;&#039;]] (2015)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The Lost Women|&#039;&#039;The Lost Women&#039;&#039;]] (2015)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Books ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The Anti-Communist Impulse|&#039;&#039;The Anti-Communist Impulse&#039;&#039;]] (1969)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Trends and Tragedies in American Foreign Policy|&#039;&#039;Trends and Tragedies in American Foreign Policy&#039;&#039;]] (1971)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Democracy for the Few|&#039;&#039;Democracy for the Few&#039;&#039;]] (1974, 1977, 1980, 1983, 1988, 1995, 2001, 2007, 2011)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Ethnic and Political Attitudes: A Depth Study of Italian Americans|Ethnic and Political Attitudes: A Depth Study of Italian Americans]]&#039;&#039; (1975)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Power and the Powerless|&#039;&#039;Power and the Powerless&#039;&#039;]] (1978)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Inventing Reality|&#039;&#039;Inventing Reality: The Politics of News Media&#039;&#039;]] (1986, 1993)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The Sword and the Dollar|&#039;&#039;The Sword and the Dollar: Imperialism, Revolution, and the Arms Race&#039;&#039;]] (1989)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Make-Believe Media|&#039;&#039;Make-Believe Media: The Politics of Entertainment&#039;&#039;]] (1992)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Land of Idols|&#039;&#039;Land of Idols: Political Mythology in America&#039;&#039;]] (1994)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Against Empire|&#039;&#039;Against Empire&#039;&#039;]] (1995)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Dirty Truths|&#039;&#039;Dirty Truths&#039;&#039;]] (1996)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Blackshirts and Reds|&#039;&#039;Blackshirts and Reds: Rational Fascism and the Overthrow of Communism&#039;&#039;]] (1997)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:America Besieged|&#039;&#039;America Besieged&#039;&#039;]] (1998)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:History as Mystery|&#039;&#039;History as Mystery&#039;&#039;]] (1999)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:To Kill a Nation|&#039;&#039;To Kill a Nation: The Attack on Yugoslavia&#039;&#039;]] (2001)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The Terrorism Trap|&#039;&#039;The Terrorism Trap: September 11 and Beyond&#039;&#039;]] (2002)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The Assassination of Julius Caesar|&#039;&#039;The Assassination of Julius Caesar: A People&#039;s History of Ancient Rome&#039;&#039;]] (2003)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Superpatriotism|&#039;&#039;Superpatriotism&#039;&#039;]] (2004)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The Culture Struggle|&#039;&#039;The Culture Struggle&#039;&#039;]] (2006)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Contrary Notions|&#039;&#039;Contrary Notions: The Michael Parenti Reader&#039;&#039;]] (2007)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:God and His Demons|&#039;&#039;God and His Demons&#039;&#039;]] (2010)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The Face of Imperialism|&#039;&#039;The Face of Imperialism&#039;&#039;]] (2011)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Waiting for Yesterday|&#039;&#039;Waiting for Yesterday: Pages from a Street Kid&#039;s Life&#039;&#039;]] (2013)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Profit Pathology and Other Indecencies|&#039;&#039;Profit Pathology and Other Indecencies&#039;&#039;]] (2015)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Interviews ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Exposing the Terrorism Trap|&#039;&#039;Exposing the Terrorism Trap&#039;&#039;]] (2002)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Interviewing Michael Parenti about The Culture Struggle|&#039;&#039;Interviewing Michael Parenti about The Culture Struggle&#039;&#039;]] (2006)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The Shape of Things to Come in Libya|&#039;&#039;The Shape of Things to Come in Libya: Interview with Michael Parenti&#039;&#039;]] (2011)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Reflections on Politics and Academia|Reflections on Politics and Academia: An Interview with Michael Parenti]]&#039;&#039; (2012)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The Corporate University: An E-interview with Dave Hill, Alpesh Maisuria, Anthony Nocella, and Michael Parenti|&#039;&#039;The Corporate University: An E-interview with Dave Hill, Alpesh Maisuria, Anthony Nocella, and Michael Parenti&#039;&#039;]] (2015)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Journal articles ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Review of A New Survey of the Social Sciences|&#039;&#039;Review of A New Survey of the Social Sciences&#039;&#039;]] (1964)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Political Values and Religious Cultures|Political Values and Religious Cultures: Jews, Catholics, and Protestants]]&#039;&#039; (1967)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Ethnic Politics and the Persistence of Ethnic Identification|&#039;&#039;Ethnic Politics and the Persistence of Ethnic Identification&#039;&#039;]] (1967)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Review of Maximum Feasible Misunderstanding|&#039;&#039;Review of Maximum Feasible Misunderstanding&#039;&#039;]] (1970)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The Possibilities for Political Change|&#039;&#039;The Possibilities for Political Change&#039;&#039;]] (1970)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Power and Pluralism|&#039;&#039;Power and Pluralism&#039;&#039;]] (1970)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Repression in Academia|&#039;&#039;Repression in Academia: A Report from the Field&#039;&#039;]] (1971)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Review of The New Socialist Revolution|Review of The New Socialist Revolution]]&#039;&#039; (1973)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Reviewing the Reviewers|Reviewing the Reviewers: Ideological Bias in the APSR Book Section]]&#039;&#039; (1974)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The Blessings of Private Enterprise|&#039;&#039;The Blessings of Private Enterprise&#039;&#039;]] (1974, 1996)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:A Third Party Emerges in Vermont|A Third Party Emerges in Vermont]]&#039;&#039; (1975)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Rocco&#039;s Life|Rocco&#039;s Life: A Documentary, Circa 1940]]&#039;&#039; (1981)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The Untold Story of the Greensboro Massacre|&#039;&#039;The Untold Story of the Greensboro Massacre&#039;&#039;]] (1981)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The State of the Discipline|&#039;&#039;The State of the Discipline: One Interpretation of Everyone&#039;s Favorite Controversy&#039;&#039;]] (1983)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Socialism, Capitalism, and Militarism|Socialism, Capitalism, and Militarism: A Reply to Dye and Zeigler]]&#039;&#039; (1990)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Rejoinder to Dye and Zeigler|Rejoinder to Dye and Zeigler]]&#039;&#039; (1990)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Serving the Few|&#039;&#039;Serving the Few&#039;&#039;]] (1995)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The Increasing Relevance of Marxism|&#039;&#039;The Increasing Relevance of Marxism&#039;&#039;]] (1998)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Reflections on the Politics of Culture|&#039;&#039;Reflections on the Politics of Culture&#039;&#039;]] (1999)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Another View of Chomsky|&#039;&#039;Another View of Chomsky&#039;&#039;]] (1999)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Patricians, Professionals, and Political Science|&#039;&#039;Patricians, Professionals, and Political Science&#039;&#039;]] (2006)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Letters ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Letter from Parenti and Meranto to the Editor of The Daily Illini|&#039;&#039;Witnesses&#039;&#039;]] (1970)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Newfound &#039;Brutality&#039; in Iran|Newfound &#039;Brutality&#039; in Iran]]&#039;&#039; (1979)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:What If Communists Had Links to Dr. King?|&#039;&#039;What If Communists Had Links to Dr. King?&#039;&#039;]] (1983)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Presidential Slander Of a U.S. Multitude|&#039;&#039;Presidential Slander Of a U.S. Multitude&#039;&#039;]] (1984)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:What Reagan Means by Judicial Responsibility|&#039;&#039;What Reagan Means by Judicial Responsibility&#039;&#039;]] (1985)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Politics of the Press|Politics of the Press]]&#039;&#039; (1986)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:In Spirit of Glasnost, a Half-Toast to Perestroika|&#039;&#039;In Spirit of Glasnost, a Half-Toast to Perestroika&#039;&#039;]] (1989)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Limitation on Incumbency|Limitation on Incumbency]]&#039;&#039; (1991)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Morte d&#039;Arthur (Parenti letter)|&#039;&#039;Morte d&#039;Arthur&#039;&#039;]] (1992)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Magazine articles ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:The Bogey of Revolution|The Bogey of Revolution]]&#039;&#039; (1968)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:The High Cost of Empire|The High Cost of Empire]]&#039;&#039; (1981)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Is Nicaragua More Democratic Than the United States?|Is Nicaragua More Democratic Than the United States?]]&#039;&#039; (1986)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Bush&#039;s Splendid Little War|Bush&#039;s Splendid Little War]]&#039;&#039; (1991)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Global Rollback After Communism|Global Rollback After Communism]]&#039;&#039; (2002)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Newspaper articles ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Is It Really Freedom of Speech?|&#039;&#039;Is It Really Freedom of Speech? Millions of Americans Cannot Be Heard&#039;&#039;]] (1975)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:A &#039;Double Standard&#039; in Reporting News From Portugal|&#039;&#039;A &#039;Double Standard&#039; in Reporting News From Portugal&#039;&#039;]] (1976)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The Lies of William Colby|&#039;&#039;The Lies of William Colby&#039;&#039;]] (1976)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Housing Disinterest Has Damaging Impact on Life|&#039;&#039;Housing Disinterest Has Damaging Impact on Life&#039;&#039;]] (1978)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Winging It In Politics|&#039;&#039;Winging It In Politics&#039;&#039;]] (1980)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Foreign-Policy Immorality Has No Excuse|&#039;&#039;Foreign-Policy Immorality Has No Excuse&#039;&#039;]] (1984)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:In &amp;quot;Defence&amp;quot; of &amp;quot;Star Wars&amp;quot;|In &amp;quot;Defence&amp;quot; of &amp;quot;Star Wars&amp;quot;]]&#039;&#039; (1986)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Image is Everything|&#039;&#039;Image is Everything&#039;&#039;]] (1991)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Athletic jingoism|Athletic jingoism]]&#039;&#039; (1999)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Speeches ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:US Interventionism, the Third World, and the USSR|&#039;&#039;US Interventionism, the Third World, and the USSR&#039;&#039;]] (1986)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Misc ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Propaganda, Inc.#Introduction|&#039;&#039;Introduction&#039;&#039;]] in [[Library:Propaganda, Inc.|&#039;&#039;Propaganda, Inc.: Selling America&#039;s Culture to the World&#039;&#039;]] (1998) by [[Nancy Snow]]&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Class and Virtue|Class and Virtue]]&#039;&#039; in &#039;&#039;[[Library:Signs of Life in the USA|Signs of Life in the USA: Readings on Popular Culture for Writers]]&#039;&#039; (1999) by [[Sonia Maasik]] and [[James F. Solomon|Jack Solomon]]&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:The Logic of U.S. Intervention|The Logic of U.S. Interventionism]]&#039;&#039; in &#039;&#039;[[Library:Masters of War: Militarism and Blowback in the Era of American Empire|Masters of War: Militarism and Blowback in the Era of American Empire]]&#039;&#039; (2003) by [[Carl Boggs]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:American Foreign Policy: A Tragic &amp;quot;Success&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;American Foreign Policy: A Tragic &amp;quot;Success&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;]] in [[Patriotism, Democracy and Common Sense|&#039;&#039;Patriotism, Democracy and Common Sense: Restoring America&#039;s Promise At Home and Abroad&#039;&#039;]] (2004) by [[Alan Curtis (author)|Alan Curtis]]&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Reel Power#Foreword|Foreword]]&#039;&#039; in &#039;&#039;[[Library:Reel Power|Reel Power: Hollywood Cinema and American Supremacy]]&#039;&#039; (2010) by [[Matthew Alford]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Recordings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* 1986:  [https://youtu.be/7mW4ic0Iu2M &#039;&#039;Monopoly Culture and Academic Freedom&#039;&#039;] at the University of Vermont, 9 April 1986&lt;br /&gt;
* 1986:  [https://youtu.be/xP8CzlFhc14 &#039;&#039;US Interventionism, the Third World, and the USSR&#039;&#039;] at the University of Colorado Boulder, 15 April 1986&lt;br /&gt;
* 1986:  [https://youtu.be/VKg1Jj3AjfM &#039;&#039;Michael Parenti at Loyola University&#039;&#039;] at Loyola University New Orleans, 23 April 1986&lt;br /&gt;
* 1986:  [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=FUWrgLpazwE &#039;&#039;Anti-Sovietism in the Media&#039;&#039;] at the University of Massachusetts Amherst, 20 November 1986&lt;br /&gt;
* 1987:  [https://youtu.be/QIFMB2NW3WY &#039;&#039;The Political Uses of Religion&#039;&#039;] in Denver, Colorado, 18 April 1987&lt;br /&gt;
* 1988:  [https://youtu.be/4vKfejeruhk &#039;&#039;Superpatriotism and the Importance of Being Number One&#039;&#039;] in Boulder, Colorado, 1 August 1988&lt;br /&gt;
* 1989:  [https://youtu.be/4YZK7JCWtYI &#039;&#039;The Sword and the Dollar&#039;&#039;] in Thunder Bay, Ontario, 27 October 1989&lt;br /&gt;
* 1990:  [https://youtu.be/MfDnQPtijjc &#039;&#039;Human Nature and Politics&#039;&#039;] in Los Angeles, California, May 1990&lt;br /&gt;
* 1991:  [https://youtu.be/5Bz1s3CM9zs &#039;&#039;Corporatism and the U.S. Political Scene&#039;&#039;], 1991&lt;br /&gt;
* 1993:  [https://youtu.be/nKwypf9qPto &#039;&#039;Conspiracy and State Power&#039;&#039;] at the University of Vermont, 21 April 1993&lt;br /&gt;
* 1993:  [https://youtu.be/9g3kRHo_vpQ &#039;&#039;Inventing Reality&#039;&#039;], 17 October 1993&lt;br /&gt;
* 1997:  [https://youtu.be/d9Zkw2oUWlY &#039;&#039;The Hidden Ideology of the News Media&#039;&#039;] at the University of Vermont, Burlington, 9 April 1997&lt;br /&gt;
* 1999:  &#039;&#039;[https://vimeo.com/753160661 The U.S. Empire and the War against Yugoslavia]&#039;&#039; at St. Joseph the Worker Catholic Church, Berkeley, 1999&lt;br /&gt;
* 1999:  [https://vimeo.com/758356846 &#039;&#039;Berkeley Mother&#039;s Day for Peace 1999&#039;&#039;] at the Martin Luther King, Jr. Civic Center Park, Berkeley, 9 May 1999&lt;br /&gt;
* 1999:  &#039;&#039;[https://youtu.be/GEzOgpMWnVs The U.S. War on Yugoslavia]&#039;&#039; in Seattle, Washington, 16 May 1999&lt;br /&gt;
* 2002:  [https://youtu.be/V_PNyYPR46E &#039;&#039;The Corporate War Against Democracy&#039;&#039;] at Portland State University, 14 September 2002&lt;br /&gt;
* 2002:  [https://youtu.be/_aJArigViMU &#039;&#039;Terrorism, Globalism, and Conspiracy&#039;&#039;] at St. Andrew&#039;s-Wesley United Church, Vancouver, 9 October 2002&lt;br /&gt;
* 2003:  [https://youtu.be/ikZ4ChX1WAo &#039;&#039;The Assassination of Julius Caesar&#039;&#039;] in Venice, Colorado, 29 June 2003&lt;br /&gt;
* 2004:  &#039;&#039;[https://youtu.be/FZqwlNpXelg Creating a Sustainable Economy]&#039;&#039; at the Unitarian Universalist Church of Long Beach, California, 24 June 2004&lt;br /&gt;
* 2005:  [https://youtu.be/wpAOZkH09C8 &#039;&#039;Michael Parenti on Penn &amp;amp; Teller: Bullshit! (2005)&#039;&#039;], 23 May 2005&lt;br /&gt;
* 2005:  [https://youtu.be/MufGs0MQrPg &#039;&#039;Iraq and the Future of US Foreign Policy&#039;&#039;] at Wesleyan University, Connecticut, 18 April 2005&lt;br /&gt;
* 2005: &#039;&#039;[https://youtu.be/OOF56wYTl1w The Darker Myths of Empire: Heart of Darkness Series]&#039;&#039; at the College of DuPage, 16 November 2005&lt;br /&gt;
* 2007:  [https://youtu.be/8a2lisF4XGg &#039;&#039;Lies, Wars, &amp;amp; Empire&#039;&#039;] at Binghamton University, 9 October 2007&lt;br /&gt;
* 2010:  [https://youtu.be/GEzOgpMWnVs &#039;&#039;Deep Ideology: How Reactionary Agendas Shape Political Awareness&#039;&#039;] at the University Inn &amp;amp; Conference Center, Santa Cruz, 14–16 May 2010&lt;br /&gt;
* 2011:  [https://youtu.be/QTWbnHsE2ow &#039;&#039;The Face of Imperialism and The 99% Solution&#039;&#039;] at the University of Guelph, 2 November 2011&lt;br /&gt;
* 2012:  [https://youtu.be/wheMfMqu-H4 &#039;&#039;Democracy and the Pathology of Wealth&#039;&#039;] at the La Peña Cultural Center, Berkeley, 6 January 2012&lt;br /&gt;
* 2013:  [https://youtu.be/bHUDfF2ztEg &#039;&#039;Michael Parenti on the Threat of US Imperialism&#039;&#039;] in Vancouver, British Columbia, November 2013&lt;br /&gt;
* 2015:  [https://youtu.be/fcImfx8tunI &#039;&#039;Capitalism vs. Reality&#039;&#039;] in Springfield, Illinois, 6 October 2015&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Statesian communists]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Statesian Marxists]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Statesians of Italian descent]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:1933 births]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:2026 deaths]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>The Phantom Bull</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=Michael_Parenti&amp;diff=91361</id>
		<title>Michael Parenti</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=Michael_Parenti&amp;diff=91361"/>
		<updated>2026-06-19T01:10:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;The Phantom Bull: I adjusted the grammar to be more consistently in the past tense where necessary, alongside some miscellaneous elaborations made for clarity.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Infobox politician&lt;br /&gt;
|political_party=[[Green Mountain Peace and Justice Party|Liberty Union Party]] (1974)|website=https://www.michael-parenti.org|image=Michael Parenti.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
|name=Michael Parenti&lt;br /&gt;
|caption=Close-up portrait of Comrade Parenti|birth_date=30 September 1933&lt;br /&gt;
|birth_place=[[Manhattan]], [[New York City]], [[State of New York|New York]], [[United States of America|United States]]|death_date=24 January 2026 (aged 92)|nationality=[[Statesian]]&lt;br /&gt;
|political_orientation=[[Anti-imperialism]]&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;[[Communism]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Statesian nationalism]]}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Michael John Parenti&#039;&#039;&#039; (30 September, 1933 – 24 January, 2026)&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;[https://www.newyorkfamilyhistory.org/online-records/new-york-city-birth-index/617-19331/1 Births Reported in 1933—Borough of Manhattan. vol. 1.]&#039;&#039; New York City. [[New York City Department of Health]]. p. 241.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; was a [[Statesian]] communist, political scientist, academic historian and cultural critic who wrote on scholarly and popular subjects. He taught at US and international universities and was a guest lecturer before campus and community audiences. Michael Parenti is the father of [[Christian Parenti]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Parenti&#039;s writings covered a wide range of subjects: U.S. politics, culture, ideology, [[political economy]], [[imperialism]], [[fascism]], [[communism]], [[democratic socialism]], free-market orthodoxies, conservative judicial activism, religion, ancient history, modern history, historiography, repression in academia, news and entertainment media, technology, [[environmentalism]], [[sexism]], [[racism]], [[Venezuela]], the wars in [[Iraq War|Iraq]] and [[Yugoslav Wars|Yugoslavia]], ethnicity, and his own early life.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;webarticles&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{Web citation|title=Articles and Other Published Selections|url=http://michaelparenti.org/articles.html|access-date=25 December 2007|publisher=Michael Parenti|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20071026092449/http://michaelparenti.org/articles.html &amp;lt;!-- Bot retrieved archive --&amp;gt;|archive-date=26 October 2007}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;contrary&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{Citation|title-url=https://archive.org/details/contrarynotionsm0000pare/page/403|author=Michael Parenti|title=Contrary Notions: The Michael Parenti Reader|year=2007|publisher=City Lights Books|isbn=978-0-87286-482-5|page=403}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;webbooks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{Web citation|title=Books by Michael Parenti|url=http://michaelparenti.org/books.html|access-date=25 December 2007|publisher=Michael Parenti}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1974, Parenti ran in Vermont on the democratic socialist [[Green Mountain Peace and Justice Party|Liberty Union Party]] ticket for [[United States Congress|U.S. Congress]] and received 7.1% of the vote.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{Web citation|url=https://electionarchive.vermont.gov/elections/search/date:1974-11-05/office_id:5|website=VT Elections Database|title=Elections Results Archive}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{Citation|author=Bernie Sanders|url=https://archive.org/details/outsiderinhouse00bern|title=Outsider in the House|year=1997|chapter=You Have to Begin Somewhere}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; This run was done with [[Bernie Sanders]] who at the time was friends with Parenti. This friendship ended when [[North Atlantic Treaty Organization|NATO]] waged war on [[Federal Republic of Yugoslavia (1992–2006)|Yugoslavia]]. While Bernie stood with the [[Imperialism|imperialists]], Parenti stood with the anti-imperialists.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{Web citation|url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=OLNQEHbusSA|website YouTube|title=Michael Parenti on Bernie Sanders}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Political views ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Statesian nationalism ===&lt;br /&gt;
Parenti was a [[Statesian nationalism|Statesian patriot]].&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parenti personally identifies as a patriot:&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;Now, in contrast to the superpatriots—it begins to brighten here. I&#039;m almost finished—[in] contrast to the superpatriots are the real patriots. &#039;&#039;&#039;We&#039;&#039;&#039; who, for instance, don&#039;t want to see the good name of our nation [the United States] sullied.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;[[AfroMarxist]] (2020-04-11).: [https://youtu.be/4vKfejeruhk &amp;quot;Michael Parenti: &#039;Super Patriotism vs Real Patriotism&#039; (1988)&amp;quot;]. [[YouTube]]. Retrieved 2024-11-02.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; While he was very critical of Statesian policy (both domestic and foreign) and he acknowledged that the United States has always been imperialist since its very inception,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;The history of the United States has been one of territorial, commercial, and military expansion.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;[...]&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;As our common reading of history would have it, [...] the United States apparently developed a mighty empire while never being sullied by imperialistic practices. If imperialism is admitted, it is most often described as a kind of momentary lapse occurring sometime between the Spanish-American War and Theodore Roosevelt&#039;s &amp;quot;big stick&amp;quot; policy.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;In reality, from the very beginning of its history, the nation suffered quite overtly from expansionist pangs.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;Michael Parenti (1969).: [[Library:The Anti-Communist Impulse|&#039;&#039;The Anti-Communist Impulse&#039;&#039;]]. [[Random House]]. [[Library:The Anti-Communist Impulse#CHAPTER SIX - Virtue Faces the World|CHAPTER SIX - Virtue Faces the World]]. p. 104.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and while he criticised the patriotism of the ruling class, he nonetheless upheld the existence of the United States and advocates for Statesian patriotism.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:0&amp;quot;&amp;gt;See [[Library:Superpatriotism#Real Patriotism|this chapter]] of his 2004 book &#039;&#039;[[Library:Superpatriotism|Superpatriotism]]&#039;&#039; in which he advocates for &amp;quot;real patriotism&amp;quot; in the United States, as opposed to the &amp;quot;Superpatriotism&amp;quot; of the ruling class.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Parenti condemned [[anti-Americanism]] and the desecration of Statesian [[National symbol|national symbols]], arguing that it alienates the Statesian people and allows US leaders to brand all opposition as &amp;quot;anti-American&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Parenti, &amp;quot;Super Patriotism vs Real Patriotism&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; He called it a &amp;quot;mistake&amp;quot; to blame the United States for what was being done in its name,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parenti, &#039;&#039;Superpatriotism&#039;&#039;. [[Library:Superpatriotism#America—Love It or Leave It|&#039;&#039;America—Love It or Leave It&#039;&#039;]]. p. 14.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; even when the country is intrinsically linked to those things. Furthermore, he attributed the hatred of the US by many people in the [[New Left]] to its supposed &amp;quot;[[Anarchism|anarchist]] tendencies&amp;quot;, noting that anarchists likewise view the [[State apparatus|state]] as the problem rather than the class it serves.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:1&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Parenti tried to distinguish between the [[Jingoism|jingoistic]], [[Chauvinism|chauvinistic]], [[Imperialism|imperialistic]] [[patriotism]] of the ruling class which he dubs &amp;quot;superpatriotism&amp;quot; and his brand of &amp;quot;real patriotism&amp;quot;. According to him, the &amp;quot;superpatriots&amp;quot; don&#039;t actually love their country, [[History of the United States|its history]], [[Statesians|its people]], [[Statesian culture|its culture]], or any of its supposed virtues ([[freedom]], democracy, or economic opportunity). To them, &amp;quot;America is a simplified ideological abstraction, an emotive symbol represented by other abstract symbols like the flag.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parenti, &#039;&#039;Superpatriotism.&#039;&#039; [[Library:Superpatriotism#What Does it Mean to Love Our Country?|What Does it Mean to Love Our Country?]] p. 9.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Real patriots&amp;quot; by contrast, he writes, &amp;quot;care enough about their country to want to improve it.&amp;quot; In Parenti&#039;s opinion, &amp;quot;real patriots&amp;quot; advocate for a different United States, a United States by and for the Statesian people,&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:0&amp;quot; /&amp;gt; and &amp;quot;real patriots&amp;quot; find other things in their history to be proud of than the &amp;quot;superpatriots&amp;quot; and champion other figures.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is why, unlike many other Statesian patriots, Parenti did not glorify the [[Founding Fathers of the United States|Founding Fathers]] or figures such as [[Abraham Lincoln]] and [[Franklin D. Roosevelt|Franklin Delano Roosevelt]]. He correctly argued that those rulers, who overwhelmingly came from wealthy, affluent, propertied backgrounds, actually opposed [[Democracy|popular rule]], and that many of their supposed &amp;quot;achievements&amp;quot; (such as the [[Constitution of the United States|Constitution]], the [[United States Bill of Rights|Bill of Rights]], the reduction of [[child labour]], and the [[New Deal]]) came in whole or in part as reluctant concessions from the [[ruling class]] in light of popular agitation.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Michael Parenti (2011).: [[Library:Democracy for the Few|&#039;&#039;Democracy for the Few&#039;&#039;]]. 9th ed. [[Cengage Learning]]. pp. 5–16, 21, 25.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; However, what Parenti failed to realise is that there is no &amp;quot;other&amp;quot; United States. [[Capitalism]], [[colonialism]], and imperialism are intrinsic to the United States, and trying to remedy these issues would mean the death of the state. Patriotism in the Statesian context is not a love of the people, the culture, or of democracy, but of the [[Settler colonialism|settler colonial]] project, i.e., the state. In other words, if one loves the Statesian people, one should seek the end of the United States.&lt;br /&gt;
== Library works by Michael Parenti ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Message box/Incomplete}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Articles ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Kozy with the Klan|Kozy with the Klan]]&#039;&#039; (1992), an excerpt from his book [[Library:America Besieged|&#039;&#039;America Besieged&#039;&#039;]] (1998) published on his website as a standalone article&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Imperialism 101|Imperialism 101]]&#039;&#039;, an excerpt from his book &#039;&#039;[[Library:Against Empire|Against Empire]]&#039;&#039; (1995) published on his website as a standalone article&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Free Speech—At a Price|Free Speech—At a Price]]&#039;&#039;, an excerpt from his book &#039;&#039;[[Library:Dirty Truths|Dirty Truths]]&#039;&#039; (1996) published on his website as a standalone article&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Hidden Holocaust, USA|Hidden Holocaust, USA]]&#039;&#039;, an excerpt from his book &#039;&#039;Dirty Truths&#039;&#039; (1996) published on his website as a standalone article&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:The JFK Assassination: Defending the Gangster State|The JFK Assassination: Defending the Gangster State]]&#039;&#039; (1996, 2013), an excerpt from his book &#039;&#039;Dirty Truths&#039;&#039; (1996) published on his website as a standalone article&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Rational Fascism|Rational Fascism]]&#039;&#039;, an excerpt from his book &#039;&#039;[[Library:Blackshirts and Reds|Blackshirts and Reds]]&#039;&#039; (1997) published on his website as a standalone article&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:The Rational Destruction of Yugoslavia|The Rational Destruction of Yugoslavia]]&#039;&#039; (1999)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Yugoslav Sojourn|Yugoslav Sojourn: Notes from the Other Side]]&#039;&#039; (2000)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:The Super Rich Are Out Of Sight|The Super Rich Are Out Of Sight]]&#039;&#039; (2000)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:The Media and their Atrocities|The Media and their Atrocities]]&#039;&#039; (2000)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Defying the Sanctions|Defying the Sanctions: A Flight to Iraq]]&#039;&#039; (2001)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Monopoly Media Manipulation|Monopoly Media Manipulation]]&#039;&#039; (2001)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Terrorism Meets Reactionism|Terrorism Meets Reactionism]]&#039;&#039; (2001)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Media Moments|Media Moments]]&#039;&#039; (2002)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:To Kill Iraq|To Kill Iraq]]&#039;&#039; (2003)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:The Demonization of Slobodan Milosevic|The Demonization of Slobodan Milosevic]]&#039;&#039; (2003)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Friendly Feudalism: The Tibet Myth|Friendly Feudalism: The Tibet Myth]]&#039;&#039; (2003, 2004, 2007)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Empires, Old and New|&#039;&#039;Empires, Old and New&#039;&#039;]] (2004)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Are Heterosexuals Worthy of Marriage?|&#039;&#039;Are Heterosexuals Worthy of Marriage?&#039;&#039;]] (2004)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Good Things Happening in Venezuela|Good Things Happening in Venezuela]]&#039;&#039; (2005)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:In the Reactionary Era of “No Alternative”|&#039;&#039;In the Reactionary Era of “No Alternative”&#039;&#039;]] (2005)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:How the Free Market Killed New Orleans|&#039;&#039;How the Free Market Killed New Orleans&#039;&#039;]] (2005)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Right-Wing Judicial Activism|&#039;&#039;Right-Wing Judicial Activism&#039;&#039;]] (2005)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Government by Giveaway|&#039;&#039;Government by Giveaway&#039;&#039;]] (2005)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Custom Against Women|&#039;&#039;Custom Against Women&#039;&#039;]], an excerpt from his book [[Library:The Culture Struggle|&#039;&#039;The Culture Struggle&#039;&#039;]] (2006) published on [[ZNetwork]] as a standalone article&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The Hidden Politics of Deficit Spending|&#039;&#039;The Hidden Politics of Deficit Spending&#039;&#039;]] (2006)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Still Soft on (Corporate) Crime|&#039;&#039;Still Soft on (Corporate) Crime&#039;&#039;]] (2006)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:The Stolen Presidential Elections|The Stolen Presidential Elections]]&#039;&#039; (2006, 2007)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Mystery: How Wealth Creates Poverty in the World|&#039;&#039;Mystery: How Wealth Creates Poverty in the World&#039;&#039;]] (2006)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The Cuban Five and US Terrorism|&#039;&#039;The Cuban Five and US Terrorism&#039;&#039;]] (2006)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Globalization and Democracy:Some Basics|Globalization and Democracy: Some Basics]]&#039;&#039; (2007)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Gender Savagery in Guatemala|Gender Savagery in Guatemala]]&#039;&#039; (2007)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Mother Teresa, John Paul II, and the Fast-Track Saints|Mother Teresa, John Paul II, and the Fast-Track Saints]]&#039;&#039; (2007)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Bad Boys, Nasty Boys: Out of the GOP&#039;s Closet|Bad Boys, Nasty Boys: Out of the GOP&#039;s Closet]]&#039;&#039; (2008)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Dubious Design|Dubious Design]]&#039;&#039; (2008)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Afghanistan, Another Untold Story|Afghanistan, Another Untold Story]]&#039;&#039; (2008)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Capitalism&#039;s Self-Inflicted Apocalypse|Capitalism&#039;s Self-Inflicted Apocalypse]]&#039;&#039; (2009)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:North Korea: &amp;quot;Sanity&amp;quot; at the Brink|North Korea: &amp;quot;Sanity&amp;quot; at the Brink]]&#039;&#039; (2009)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:The Honduras Coup: Is Obama Innocent?|The Honduras Coup: Is Obama Innocent?]]&#039;&#039; (2009)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Italian American Identity: To Be or Not To Be|Italian American Identity: To Be or Not To Be]]&#039;&#039; (2009)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:What Do Empires Do?|What Do Empires Do?]]&#039;&#039; (2010)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Cuban Prisoners, Here and There|&#039;&#039;Cuban Prisoners, Here and There&#039;&#039;]] (2010)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Pedophiles and Popes: Doing the Vatican Shuffle|Pedophiles and Popes: Doing the Vatican Shuffle]]&#039;&#039; (2010)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Death and Profits: The Utility Protection Racket|Death and Profits: The Utility Protection Racket]]&#039;&#039; (2010)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Money Is Still the Name of the Game|Money Is Still the Name of the Game]]&#039;&#039; (2010)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:The Mafia and Me|The Mafia and Me]]&#039;&#039; (2011)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Profit Pathology and Disposable Planet|Profit Pathology and Disposable Planet]]&#039;&#039; (2011)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Making the World Safe for Hypocrisy|&#039;&#039;Making the World Safe for Hypocrisy&#039;&#039;]] (2011)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Class Warfare Indeed|Class Warfare Indeed]]&#039;&#039; (2011)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Occupy America|Occupy America]]&#039;&#039; (2011)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Must We Adore Vaclav Havel?|&#039;&#039;Must We Adore Vaclav Havel?&#039;&#039;]] (2011), an excerpt from his book &#039;&#039;Blackshirts and Reds&#039;&#039; (1997) published on ZNetwork as a standalone article&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Free Market Medicine: A Personal Account|Free Market Medicine: A Personal Account]]&#039;&#039; (2011)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Free Market Health Care: True Stories|Free Market Health Care: True Stories]]&#039;&#039; (2012)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Iran and Everything Else|Iran and Everything Else]]&#039;&#039; (2012)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:The Nobel Peace Prize for War|The Nobel Peace Prize for War]]&#039;&#039; (2012)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:A Terrible Normality|A Terrible Normality]]&#039;&#039; (2013)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Eating Horses In Paris|Eating Horses In Paris]]&#039;&#039; (2013)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Requiem for a Dominatrix|Requiem for a Dominatrix]]&#039;&#039; (2013)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:I Have a Dream, a Blurred Vision|I Have a Dream, a Blurred Vision]]&#039;&#039; (2013)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Syria, Sarin, and Casus Belli|Syria, Sarin, and Casus Belli]]&#039;&#039; (2013)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:85 Billionaires and the Better Half|85 Billionaires and the Better Half]] (2014)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:What&#039;s a Slum?|&#039;&#039;What&#039;s a Slum?&#039;&#039;]] (2014), an excerpt from his book [[Library:Waiting for Yesterday|&#039;&#039;Waiting for Yesterday&#039;&#039;]] (2013) published on his website as a standalone article&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Ukraine and Regime Change|&#039;&#039;Ukraine and Regime Change&#039;&#039;]], an excerpt from [[Library:Flashpoint in Ukraine|&#039;&#039;Flashpoint in Ukraine: How the US Drive for Hegemony Risks World War III&#039;&#039;]] (2014) by [[Stephen Lendman]], published on his website as a standalone article&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:1918: On When a War Ended (Though Others Would Follow)|1918: On When a War Ended (Though Others Would Follow)]]&#039;&#039; (2014)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:A Long Time For Killing|&#039;&#039;A Long Time For Killing&#039;&#039;]] (2015)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The Lost Women|&#039;&#039;The Lost Women&#039;&#039;]] (2015)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Books ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The Anti-Communist Impulse|&#039;&#039;The Anti-Communist Impulse&#039;&#039;]] (1969)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Trends and Tragedies in American Foreign Policy|&#039;&#039;Trends and Tragedies in American Foreign Policy&#039;&#039;]] (1971)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Democracy for the Few|&#039;&#039;Democracy for the Few&#039;&#039;]] (1974, 1977, 1980, 1983, 1988, 1995, 2001, 2007, 2011)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Ethnic and Political Attitudes: A Depth Study of Italian Americans|Ethnic and Political Attitudes: A Depth Study of Italian Americans]]&#039;&#039; (1975)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Power and the Powerless|&#039;&#039;Power and the Powerless&#039;&#039;]] (1978)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Inventing Reality|&#039;&#039;Inventing Reality: The Politics of News Media&#039;&#039;]] (1986, 1993)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The Sword and the Dollar|&#039;&#039;The Sword and the Dollar: Imperialism, Revolution, and the Arms Race&#039;&#039;]] (1989)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Make-Believe Media|&#039;&#039;Make-Believe Media: The Politics of Entertainment&#039;&#039;]] (1992)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Land of Idols|&#039;&#039;Land of Idols: Political Mythology in America&#039;&#039;]] (1994)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Against Empire|&#039;&#039;Against Empire&#039;&#039;]] (1995)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Dirty Truths|&#039;&#039;Dirty Truths&#039;&#039;]] (1996)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Blackshirts and Reds|&#039;&#039;Blackshirts and Reds: Rational Fascism and the Overthrow of Communism&#039;&#039;]] (1997)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:America Besieged|&#039;&#039;America Besieged&#039;&#039;]] (1998)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:History as Mystery|&#039;&#039;History as Mystery&#039;&#039;]] (1999)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:To Kill a Nation|&#039;&#039;To Kill a Nation: The Attack on Yugoslavia&#039;&#039;]] (2001)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The Terrorism Trap|&#039;&#039;The Terrorism Trap: September 11 and Beyond&#039;&#039;]] (2002)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The Assassination of Julius Caesar|&#039;&#039;The Assassination of Julius Caesar: A People&#039;s History of Ancient Rome&#039;&#039;]] (2003)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Superpatriotism|&#039;&#039;Superpatriotism&#039;&#039;]] (2004)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The Culture Struggle|&#039;&#039;The Culture Struggle&#039;&#039;]] (2006)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Contrary Notions|&#039;&#039;Contrary Notions: The Michael Parenti Reader&#039;&#039;]] (2007)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:God and His Demons|&#039;&#039;God and His Demons&#039;&#039;]] (2010)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The Face of Imperialism|&#039;&#039;The Face of Imperialism&#039;&#039;]] (2011)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Waiting for Yesterday|&#039;&#039;Waiting for Yesterday: Pages from a Street Kid&#039;s Life&#039;&#039;]] (2013)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Profit Pathology and Other Indecencies|&#039;&#039;Profit Pathology and Other Indecencies&#039;&#039;]] (2015)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Interviews ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Exposing the Terrorism Trap|&#039;&#039;Exposing the Terrorism Trap&#039;&#039;]] (2002)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Interviewing Michael Parenti about The Culture Struggle|&#039;&#039;Interviewing Michael Parenti about The Culture Struggle&#039;&#039;]] (2006)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The Shape of Things to Come in Libya|&#039;&#039;The Shape of Things to Come in Libya: Interview with Michael Parenti&#039;&#039;]] (2011)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Reflections on Politics and Academia|Reflections on Politics and Academia: An Interview with Michael Parenti]]&#039;&#039; (2012)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The Corporate University: An E-interview with Dave Hill, Alpesh Maisuria, Anthony Nocella, and Michael Parenti|&#039;&#039;The Corporate University: An E-interview with Dave Hill, Alpesh Maisuria, Anthony Nocella, and Michael Parenti&#039;&#039;]] (2015)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Journal articles ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Review of A New Survey of the Social Sciences|&#039;&#039;Review of A New Survey of the Social Sciences&#039;&#039;]] (1964)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Political Values and Religious Cultures|Political Values and Religious Cultures: Jews, Catholics, and Protestants]]&#039;&#039; (1967)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Ethnic Politics and the Persistence of Ethnic Identification|&#039;&#039;Ethnic Politics and the Persistence of Ethnic Identification&#039;&#039;]] (1967)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Review of Maximum Feasible Misunderstanding|&#039;&#039;Review of Maximum Feasible Misunderstanding&#039;&#039;]] (1970)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The Possibilities for Political Change|&#039;&#039;The Possibilities for Political Change&#039;&#039;]] (1970)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Power and Pluralism|&#039;&#039;Power and Pluralism&#039;&#039;]] (1970)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Repression in Academia|&#039;&#039;Repression in Academia: A Report from the Field&#039;&#039;]] (1971)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Review of The New Socialist Revolution|Review of The New Socialist Revolution]]&#039;&#039; (1973)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Reviewing the Reviewers|Reviewing the Reviewers: Ideological Bias in the APSR Book Section]]&#039;&#039; (1974)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The Blessings of Private Enterprise|&#039;&#039;The Blessings of Private Enterprise&#039;&#039;]] (1974, 1996)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:A Third Party Emerges in Vermont|A Third Party Emerges in Vermont]]&#039;&#039; (1975)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Rocco&#039;s Life|Rocco&#039;s Life: A Documentary, Circa 1940]]&#039;&#039; (1981)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The Untold Story of the Greensboro Massacre|&#039;&#039;The Untold Story of the Greensboro Massacre&#039;&#039;]] (1981)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The State of the Discipline|&#039;&#039;The State of the Discipline: One Interpretation of Everyone&#039;s Favorite Controversy&#039;&#039;]] (1983)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Socialism, Capitalism, and Militarism|Socialism, Capitalism, and Militarism: A Reply to Dye and Zeigler]]&#039;&#039; (1990)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Rejoinder to Dye and Zeigler|Rejoinder to Dye and Zeigler]]&#039;&#039; (1990)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Serving the Few|&#039;&#039;Serving the Few&#039;&#039;]] (1995)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The Increasing Relevance of Marxism|&#039;&#039;The Increasing Relevance of Marxism&#039;&#039;]] (1998)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Reflections on the Politics of Culture|&#039;&#039;Reflections on the Politics of Culture&#039;&#039;]] (1999)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Another View of Chomsky|&#039;&#039;Another View of Chomsky&#039;&#039;]] (1999)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Patricians, Professionals, and Political Science|&#039;&#039;Patricians, Professionals, and Political Science&#039;&#039;]] (2006)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Letters ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Letter from Parenti and Meranto to the Editor of The Daily Illini|&#039;&#039;Witnesses&#039;&#039;]] (1970)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Newfound &#039;Brutality&#039; in Iran|Newfound &#039;Brutality&#039; in Iran]]&#039;&#039; (1979)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:What If Communists Had Links to Dr. King?|&#039;&#039;What If Communists Had Links to Dr. King?&#039;&#039;]] (1983)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Presidential Slander Of a U.S. Multitude|&#039;&#039;Presidential Slander Of a U.S. Multitude&#039;&#039;]] (1984)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:What Reagan Means by Judicial Responsibility|&#039;&#039;What Reagan Means by Judicial Responsibility&#039;&#039;]] (1985)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Politics of the Press|Politics of the Press]]&#039;&#039; (1986)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:In Spirit of Glasnost, a Half-Toast to Perestroika|&#039;&#039;In Spirit of Glasnost, a Half-Toast to Perestroika&#039;&#039;]] (1989)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Limitation on Incumbency|Limitation on Incumbency]]&#039;&#039; (1991)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Morte d&#039;Arthur (Parenti letter)|&#039;&#039;Morte d&#039;Arthur&#039;&#039;]] (1992)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Magazine articles ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:The Bogey of Revolution|The Bogey of Revolution]]&#039;&#039; (1968)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:The High Cost of Empire|The High Cost of Empire]]&#039;&#039; (1981)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Is Nicaragua More Democratic Than the United States?|Is Nicaragua More Democratic Than the United States?]]&#039;&#039; (1986)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Bush&#039;s Splendid Little War|Bush&#039;s Splendid Little War]]&#039;&#039; (1991)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Global Rollback After Communism|Global Rollback After Communism]]&#039;&#039; (2002)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Newspaper articles ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Is It Really Freedom of Speech?|&#039;&#039;Is It Really Freedom of Speech? Millions of Americans Cannot Be Heard&#039;&#039;]] (1975)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:A &#039;Double Standard&#039; in Reporting News From Portugal|&#039;&#039;A &#039;Double Standard&#039; in Reporting News From Portugal&#039;&#039;]] (1976)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The Lies of William Colby|&#039;&#039;The Lies of William Colby&#039;&#039;]] (1976)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Housing Disinterest Has Damaging Impact on Life|&#039;&#039;Housing Disinterest Has Damaging Impact on Life&#039;&#039;]] (1978)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Winging It In Politics|&#039;&#039;Winging It In Politics&#039;&#039;]] (1980)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Foreign-Policy Immorality Has No Excuse|&#039;&#039;Foreign-Policy Immorality Has No Excuse&#039;&#039;]] (1984)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:In &amp;quot;Defence&amp;quot; of &amp;quot;Star Wars&amp;quot;|In &amp;quot;Defence&amp;quot; of &amp;quot;Star Wars&amp;quot;]]&#039;&#039; (1986)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Image is Everything|&#039;&#039;Image is Everything&#039;&#039;]] (1991)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Athletic jingoism|Athletic jingoism]]&#039;&#039; (1999)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Speeches ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:US Interventionism, the Third World, and the USSR|&#039;&#039;US Interventionism, the Third World, and the USSR&#039;&#039;]] (1986)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Misc ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Propaganda, Inc.#Introduction|&#039;&#039;Introduction&#039;&#039;]] in [[Library:Propaganda, Inc.|&#039;&#039;Propaganda, Inc.: Selling America&#039;s Culture to the World&#039;&#039;]] (1998) by [[Nancy Snow]]&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Class and Virtue|Class and Virtue]]&#039;&#039; in &#039;&#039;[[Library:Signs of Life in the USA|Signs of Life in the USA: Readings on Popular Culture for Writers]]&#039;&#039; (1999) by [[Sonia Maasik]] and [[James F. Solomon|Jack Solomon]]&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:The Logic of U.S. Intervention|The Logic of U.S. Interventionism]]&#039;&#039; in &#039;&#039;[[Library:Masters of War: Militarism and Blowback in the Era of American Empire|Masters of War: Militarism and Blowback in the Era of American Empire]]&#039;&#039; (2003) by [[Carl Boggs]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:American Foreign Policy: A Tragic &amp;quot;Success&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;American Foreign Policy: A Tragic &amp;quot;Success&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;]] in [[Patriotism, Democracy and Common Sense|&#039;&#039;Patriotism, Democracy and Common Sense: Restoring America&#039;s Promise At Home and Abroad&#039;&#039;]] (2004) by [[Alan Curtis (author)|Alan Curtis]]&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Reel Power#Foreword|Foreword]]&#039;&#039; in &#039;&#039;[[Library:Reel Power|Reel Power: Hollywood Cinema and American Supremacy]]&#039;&#039; (2010) by [[Matthew Alford]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Recordings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* 1986:  [https://youtu.be/7mW4ic0Iu2M &#039;&#039;Monopoly Culture and Academic Freedom&#039;&#039;] at the University of Vermont, 9 April 1986&lt;br /&gt;
* 1986:  [https://youtu.be/xP8CzlFhc14 &#039;&#039;US Interventionism, the Third World, and the USSR&#039;&#039;] at the University of Colorado Boulder, 15 April 1986&lt;br /&gt;
* 1986:  [https://youtu.be/VKg1Jj3AjfM &#039;&#039;Michael Parenti at Loyola University&#039;&#039;] at Loyola University New Orleans, 23 April 1986&lt;br /&gt;
* 1986:  [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=FUWrgLpazwE &#039;&#039;Anti-Sovietism in the Media&#039;&#039;] at the University of Massachusetts Amherst, 20 November 1986&lt;br /&gt;
* 1987:  [https://youtu.be/QIFMB2NW3WY &#039;&#039;The Political Uses of Religion&#039;&#039;] in Denver, Colorado, 18 April 1987&lt;br /&gt;
* 1988:  [https://youtu.be/4vKfejeruhk &#039;&#039;Superpatriotism and the Importance of Being Number One&#039;&#039;] in Boulder, Colorado, 1 August 1988&lt;br /&gt;
* 1989:  [https://youtu.be/4YZK7JCWtYI &#039;&#039;The Sword and the Dollar&#039;&#039;] in Thunder Bay, Ontario, 27 October 1989&lt;br /&gt;
* 1990:  [https://youtu.be/MfDnQPtijjc &#039;&#039;Human Nature and Politics&#039;&#039;] in Los Angeles, California, May 1990&lt;br /&gt;
* 1991:  [https://youtu.be/5Bz1s3CM9zs &#039;&#039;Corporatism and the U.S. Political Scene&#039;&#039;], 1991&lt;br /&gt;
* 1993:  [https://youtu.be/nKwypf9qPto &#039;&#039;Conspiracy and State Power&#039;&#039;] at the University of Vermont, 21 April 1993&lt;br /&gt;
* 1993:  [https://youtu.be/9g3kRHo_vpQ &#039;&#039;Inventing Reality&#039;&#039;], 17 October 1993&lt;br /&gt;
* 1997:  [https://youtu.be/d9Zkw2oUWlY &#039;&#039;The Hidden Ideology of the News Media&#039;&#039;] at the University of Vermont, Burlington, 9 April 1997&lt;br /&gt;
* 1999:  &#039;&#039;[https://vimeo.com/753160661 The U.S. Empire and the War against Yugoslavia]&#039;&#039; at St. Joseph the Worker Catholic Church, Berkeley, 1999&lt;br /&gt;
* 1999:  [https://vimeo.com/758356846 &#039;&#039;Berkeley Mother&#039;s Day for Peace 1999&#039;&#039;] at the Martin Luther King, Jr. Civic Center Park, Berkeley, 9 May 1999&lt;br /&gt;
* 1999:  &#039;&#039;[https://youtu.be/GEzOgpMWnVs The U.S. War on Yugoslavia]&#039;&#039; in Seattle, Washington, 16 May 1999&lt;br /&gt;
* 2002:  [https://youtu.be/V_PNyYPR46E &#039;&#039;The Corporate War Against Democracy&#039;&#039;] at Portland State University, 14 September 2002&lt;br /&gt;
* 2002:  [https://youtu.be/_aJArigViMU &#039;&#039;Terrorism, Globalism, and Conspiracy&#039;&#039;] at St. Andrew&#039;s-Wesley United Church, Vancouver, 9 October 2002&lt;br /&gt;
* 2003:  [https://youtu.be/ikZ4ChX1WAo &#039;&#039;The Assassination of Julius Caesar&#039;&#039;] in Venice, Colorado, 29 June 2003&lt;br /&gt;
* 2004:  &#039;&#039;[https://youtu.be/FZqwlNpXelg Creating a Sustainable Economy]&#039;&#039; at the Unitarian Universalist Church of Long Beach, California, 24 June 2004&lt;br /&gt;
* 2005:  [https://youtu.be/wpAOZkH09C8 &#039;&#039;Michael Parenti on Penn &amp;amp; Teller: Bullshit! (2005)&#039;&#039;], 23 May 2005&lt;br /&gt;
* 2005:  [https://youtu.be/MufGs0MQrPg &#039;&#039;Iraq and the Future of US Foreign Policy&#039;&#039;] at Wesleyan University, Connecticut, 18 April 2005&lt;br /&gt;
* 2005: &#039;&#039;[https://youtu.be/OOF56wYTl1w The Darker Myths of Empire: Heart of Darkness Series]&#039;&#039; at the College of DuPage, 16 November 2005&lt;br /&gt;
* 2007:  [https://youtu.be/8a2lisF4XGg &#039;&#039;Lies, Wars, &amp;amp; Empire&#039;&#039;] at Binghamton University, 9 October 2007&lt;br /&gt;
* 2010:  [https://youtu.be/GEzOgpMWnVs &#039;&#039;Deep Ideology: How Reactionary Agendas Shape Political Awareness&#039;&#039;] at the University Inn &amp;amp; Conference Center, Santa Cruz, 14–16 May 2010&lt;br /&gt;
* 2011:  [https://youtu.be/QTWbnHsE2ow &#039;&#039;The Face of Imperialism and The 99% Solution&#039;&#039;] at the University of Guelph, 2 November 2011&lt;br /&gt;
* 2012:  [https://youtu.be/wheMfMqu-H4 &#039;&#039;Democracy and the Pathology of Wealth&#039;&#039;] at the La Peña Cultural Center, Berkeley, 6 January 2012&lt;br /&gt;
* 2013:  [https://youtu.be/bHUDfF2ztEg &#039;&#039;Michael Parenti on the Threat of US Imperialism&#039;&#039;] in Vancouver, British Columbia, November 2013&lt;br /&gt;
* 2015:  [https://youtu.be/fcImfx8tunI &#039;&#039;Capitalism vs. Reality&#039;&#039;] in Springfield, Illinois, 6 October 2015&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Statesian communists]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Statesian Marxists]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Statesians of Italian descent]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:1933 births]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:2026 deaths]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>The Phantom Bull</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=Michael_Parenti&amp;diff=91351</id>
		<title>Michael Parenti</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=Michael_Parenti&amp;diff=91351"/>
		<updated>2026-06-17T15:38:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;The Phantom Bull: I added a caption to Parenti&amp;#039;s picture.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Infobox politician&lt;br /&gt;
|political_party=[[Green Mountain Peace and Justice Party|Liberty Union Party]] (1974)|website=https://www.michael-parenti.org|image=Michael Parenti.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
|name=Michael Parenti&lt;br /&gt;
|caption=Close-up portrait of Comrade Parenti|birth_date=30 September 1933&lt;br /&gt;
|birth_place=[[Manhattan]], [[New York City]], [[State of New York|New York]], [[United States of America|United States]]|death_date=24 January 2026 (aged 92)|nationality=[[Statesian]]&lt;br /&gt;
|political_orientation=[[Anti-imperialism]]&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;[[Communism]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Statesian nationalism]]}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Michael John Parenti&#039;&#039;&#039; (30 September, 1933 – 24 January, 2026)&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;[https://www.newyorkfamilyhistory.org/online-records/new-york-city-birth-index/617-19331/1 Births Reported in 1933—Borough of Manhattan. vol. 1.]&#039;&#039; New York City. [[New York City Department of Health]]. p. 241.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; was a Statesian political scientist, academic historian and cultural critic who wrote on scholarly and popular subjects. He taught at US and international universities and was a guest lecturer before campus and community audiences. Michael Parenti is the father of [[Christian Parenti]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Parenti&#039;s writings covered a wide range of subjects: U.S. politics, culture, ideology, [[political economy]], [[imperialism]], [[fascism]], [[communism]], [[democratic socialism]], free-market orthodoxies, conservative judicial activism, religion, ancient history, modern history, historiography, repression in academia, news and entertainment media, technology, [[environmentalism]], [[sexism]], [[racism]], [[Venezuela]], the wars in [[Iraq War|Iraq]] and [[Yugoslav Wars|Yugoslavia]], ethnicity, and his own early life.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;webarticles&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{Web citation|title=Articles and Other Published Selections|url=http://michaelparenti.org/articles.html|access-date=25 December 2007|publisher=Michael Parenti|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20071026092449/http://michaelparenti.org/articles.html &amp;lt;!-- Bot retrieved archive --&amp;gt;|archive-date=26 October 2007}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;contrary&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{Citation|title-url=https://archive.org/details/contrarynotionsm0000pare/page/403|author=Michael Parenti|title=Contrary Notions: The Michael Parenti Reader|year=2007|publisher=City Lights Books|isbn=978-0-87286-482-5|page=403}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;webbooks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{Web citation|title=Books by Michael Parenti|url=http://michaelparenti.org/books.html|access-date=25 December 2007|publisher=Michael Parenti}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1974, Parenti ran in Vermont on the democratic socialist [[Green Mountain Peace and Justice Party|Liberty Union Party]] ticket for [[United States Congress|U.S. Congress]] and received 7.1% of the vote.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{Web citation|url=https://electionarchive.vermont.gov/elections/search/date:1974-11-05/office_id:5|website=VT Elections Database|title=Elections Results Archive}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{Citation|author=Bernie Sanders|url=https://archive.org/details/outsiderinhouse00bern|title=Outsider in the House|year=1997|chapter=You Have to Begin Somewhere}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; This run was done with [[Bernie Sanders]] who at the time was friends with Parenti. This friendship ended when [[North Atlantic Treaty Organization|NATO]] waged war on [[Federal Republic of Yugoslavia (1992–2006)|Yugoslavia]]. While Bernie stood with the [[Imperialism|imperialists]], Parenti stood with the anti-imperialists.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{Web citation|url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=OLNQEHbusSA|website YouTube|title=Michael Parenti on Bernie Sanders}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Political views ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Statesian nationalism ===&lt;br /&gt;
Parenti was a [[Statesian nationalism|Statesian patriot]].&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parenti personally identifies as a patriot:&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;Now, in contrast to the superpatriots—it begins to brighten here. I&#039;m almost finished—[in] contrast to the superpatriots are the real patriots. &#039;&#039;&#039;We&#039;&#039;&#039; who, for instance, don&#039;t want to see the good name of our nation [the United States] sullied.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;[[AfroMarxist]] (2020-04-11).: [https://youtu.be/4vKfejeruhk &amp;quot;Michael Parenti: &#039;Super Patriotism vs Real Patriotism&#039; (1988)&amp;quot;]. [[YouTube]]. Retrieved 2024-11-02.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; While he is very critical of Statesian policy (both domestic and foreign) and he acknowledged that the United States has always been imperialist since its very inception,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;The history of the United States has been one of territorial, commercial, and military expansion.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;[...]&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;As our common reading of history would have it, [...] the United States apparently developed a mighty empire while never being sullied by imperialistic practices. If imperialism is admitted, it is most often described as a kind of momentary lapse occurring sometime between the Spanish-American War and Theodore Roosevelt&#039;s &amp;quot;big stick&amp;quot; policy.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;In reality, from the very beginning of its history, the nation suffered quite overtly from expansionist pangs.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;Michael Parenti (1969).: [[Library:The Anti-Communist Impulse|&#039;&#039;The Anti-Communist Impulse&#039;&#039;]]. [[Random House]]. [[Library:The Anti-Communist Impulse#CHAPTER SIX - Virtue Faces the World|CHAPTER SIX - Virtue Faces the World]]. p. 104.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; and while he criticised the patriotism of the ruling class, he nonetheless upheld the existence of the United States and advocates for Statesian patriotism.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:0&amp;quot;&amp;gt;See [[Library:Superpatriotism#Real Patriotism|this chapter]] of his 2004 book &#039;&#039;[[Library:Superpatriotism|Superpatriotism]]&#039;&#039; in which he advocates for &amp;quot;real patriotism&amp;quot; in the United States, as opposed to the &amp;quot;Superpatriotism&amp;quot; of the ruling class.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Parenti condemned [[anti-Americanism]] and the desecration of Statesian [[National symbol|national symbols]], arguing that it alienates the Statesian people and allows US leaders to brand all opposition as &amp;quot;anti-American&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Parenti, &amp;quot;Super Patriotism vs Real Patriotism&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; He called it a &amp;quot;mistake&amp;quot; to blame the United States for what was being done in its name,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parenti, &#039;&#039;Superpatriotism&#039;&#039;. [[Library:Superpatriotism#America—Love It or Leave It|&#039;&#039;America—Love It or Leave It&#039;&#039;]]. p. 14.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; even when the country is intrinsically linked to those things. Furthermore, he attributed the hatred of the US by many people in the [[New Left]] to its supposed &amp;quot;[[Anarchism|anarchist]] tendencies&amp;quot;, noting that anarchists likewise view the [[State apparatus|state]] as the problem rather than the class it serves.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:1&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Parenti tried to distinguish between the [[Jingoism|jingoistic]], [[Chauvinism|chauvinistic]], [[Imperialism|imperialistic]] [[patriotism]] of the ruling class which he dubs &amp;quot;superpatriotism&amp;quot; and his brand of &amp;quot;real patriotism&amp;quot;. According to him, the &amp;quot;superpatriots&amp;quot; don&#039;t actually love their country, [[History of the United States|its history]], [[Statesians|its people]], [[Statesian culture|its culture]], or any of its supposed virtues ([[freedom]], democracy, or economic opportunity). To them, &amp;quot;America is a simplified ideological abstraction, an emotive symbol represented by other abstract symbols like the flag.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Parenti, &#039;&#039;Superpatriotism.&#039;&#039; [[Library:Superpatriotism#What Does it Mean to Love Our Country?|What Does it Mean to Love Our Country?]] p. 9.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Real patriots&amp;quot; by contrast, he writes, &amp;quot;care enough about their country to want to improve it.&amp;quot; &amp;quot;Real patriots&amp;quot; advocate for a different United States, a United States by and for the Statesian people.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:0&amp;quot; /&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Real patriots&amp;quot; find other things in their history to be proud of than the &amp;quot;superpatriots&amp;quot; and champion other figures.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is why unlike many other Statesian patriots, Parenti does not glorify the [[Founding Fathers of the United States|Founding Fathers]] or figures such as [[Abraham Lincoln]] and [[Franklin D. Roosevelt|Franklin Delano Roosevelt]]. He argues that those rulers, who overwhelmingly came from wealthy, affluent, propertied backgrounds, actually opposed [[Democracy|popular rule]], and that many of their supposed &amp;quot;achievements&amp;quot; (such as the [[Constitution of the United States|Constitution]], the [[United States Bill of Rights|Bill of Rights]], the reduction of [[child labour]], and the [[New Deal]]) came in whole or in part as reluctant concessions from the [[ruling class]] in light of popular agitation.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Michael Parenti (2011).: [[Library:Democracy for the Few|&#039;&#039;Democracy for the Few&#039;&#039;]]. 9th ed. [[Cengage Learning]]. pp. 5–16, 21, 25.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What Parenti failed to realise is that there is no other United States. [[Capitalism]], [[colonialism]], and imperialism are intrinsic to the United States, and trying to remedy these issues would mean the death of the state. Patriotism in the Statesian context is not a love of the people, the culture, or of democracy, but of the [[Settler colonialism|settler colonial]] project, i.e., the state. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Library works by Michael Parenti ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Message box/Incomplete}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Articles ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Kozy with the Klan|Kozy with the Klan]]&#039;&#039; (1992), an excerpt from his book [[Library:America Besieged|&#039;&#039;America Besieged&#039;&#039;]] (1998) published on his website as a standalone article&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Imperialism 101|Imperialism 101]]&#039;&#039;, an excerpt from his book &#039;&#039;[[Library:Against Empire|Against Empire]]&#039;&#039; (1995) published on his website as a standalone article&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Free Speech—At a Price|Free Speech—At a Price]]&#039;&#039;, an excerpt from his book &#039;&#039;[[Library:Dirty Truths|Dirty Truths]]&#039;&#039; (1996) published on his website as a standalone article&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Hidden Holocaust, USA|Hidden Holocaust, USA]]&#039;&#039;, an excerpt from his book &#039;&#039;Dirty Truths&#039;&#039; (1996) published on his website as a standalone article&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:The JFK Assassination: Defending the Gangster State|The JFK Assassination: Defending the Gangster State]]&#039;&#039; (1996, 2013), an excerpt from his book &#039;&#039;Dirty Truths&#039;&#039; (1996) published on his website as a standalone article&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Rational Fascism|Rational Fascism]]&#039;&#039;, an excerpt from his book &#039;&#039;[[Library:Blackshirts and Reds|Blackshirts and Reds]]&#039;&#039; (1997) published on his website as a standalone article&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:The Rational Destruction of Yugoslavia|The Rational Destruction of Yugoslavia]]&#039;&#039; (1999)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Yugoslav Sojourn|Yugoslav Sojourn: Notes from the Other Side]]&#039;&#039; (2000)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:The Super Rich Are Out Of Sight|The Super Rich Are Out Of Sight]]&#039;&#039; (2000)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:The Media and their Atrocities|The Media and their Atrocities]]&#039;&#039; (2000)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Defying the Sanctions|Defying the Sanctions: A Flight to Iraq]]&#039;&#039; (2001)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Monopoly Media Manipulation|Monopoly Media Manipulation]]&#039;&#039; (2001)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Terrorism Meets Reactionism|Terrorism Meets Reactionism]]&#039;&#039; (2001)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Media Moments|Media Moments]]&#039;&#039; (2002)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:To Kill Iraq|To Kill Iraq]]&#039;&#039; (2003)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:The Demonization of Slobodan Milosevic|The Demonization of Slobodan Milosevic]]&#039;&#039; (2003)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Friendly Feudalism: The Tibet Myth|Friendly Feudalism: The Tibet Myth]]&#039;&#039; (2003, 2004, 2007)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Empires, Old and New|&#039;&#039;Empires, Old and New&#039;&#039;]] (2004)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Are Heterosexuals Worthy of Marriage?|&#039;&#039;Are Heterosexuals Worthy of Marriage?&#039;&#039;]] (2004)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Good Things Happening in Venezuela|Good Things Happening in Venezuela]]&#039;&#039; (2005)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:In the Reactionary Era of “No Alternative”|&#039;&#039;In the Reactionary Era of “No Alternative”&#039;&#039;]] (2005)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:How the Free Market Killed New Orleans|&#039;&#039;How the Free Market Killed New Orleans&#039;&#039;]] (2005)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Right-Wing Judicial Activism|&#039;&#039;Right-Wing Judicial Activism&#039;&#039;]] (2005)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Government by Giveaway|&#039;&#039;Government by Giveaway&#039;&#039;]] (2005)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Custom Against Women|&#039;&#039;Custom Against Women&#039;&#039;]], an excerpt from his book [[Library:The Culture Struggle|&#039;&#039;The Culture Struggle&#039;&#039;]] (2006) published on [[ZNetwork]] as a standalone article&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The Hidden Politics of Deficit Spending|&#039;&#039;The Hidden Politics of Deficit Spending&#039;&#039;]] (2006)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Still Soft on (Corporate) Crime|&#039;&#039;Still Soft on (Corporate) Crime&#039;&#039;]] (2006)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:The Stolen Presidential Elections|The Stolen Presidential Elections]]&#039;&#039; (2006, 2007)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Mystery: How Wealth Creates Poverty in the World|&#039;&#039;Mystery: How Wealth Creates Poverty in the World&#039;&#039;]] (2006)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The Cuban Five and US Terrorism|&#039;&#039;The Cuban Five and US Terrorism&#039;&#039;]] (2006)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Globalization and Democracy:Some Basics|Globalization and Democracy: Some Basics]]&#039;&#039; (2007)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Gender Savagery in Guatemala|Gender Savagery in Guatemala]]&#039;&#039; (2007)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Mother Teresa, John Paul II, and the Fast-Track Saints|Mother Teresa, John Paul II, and the Fast-Track Saints]]&#039;&#039; (2007)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Bad Boys, Nasty Boys: Out of the GOP&#039;s Closet|Bad Boys, Nasty Boys: Out of the GOP&#039;s Closet]]&#039;&#039; (2008)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Dubious Design|Dubious Design]]&#039;&#039; (2008)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Afghanistan, Another Untold Story|Afghanistan, Another Untold Story]]&#039;&#039; (2008)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Capitalism&#039;s Self-Inflicted Apocalypse|Capitalism&#039;s Self-Inflicted Apocalypse]]&#039;&#039; (2009)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:North Korea: &amp;quot;Sanity&amp;quot; at the Brink|North Korea: &amp;quot;Sanity&amp;quot; at the Brink]]&#039;&#039; (2009)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:The Honduras Coup: Is Obama Innocent?|The Honduras Coup: Is Obama Innocent?]]&#039;&#039; (2009)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Italian American Identity: To Be or Not To Be|Italian American Identity: To Be or Not To Be]]&#039;&#039; (2009)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:What Do Empires Do?|What Do Empires Do?]]&#039;&#039; (2010)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Cuban Prisoners, Here and There|&#039;&#039;Cuban Prisoners, Here and There&#039;&#039;]] (2010)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Pedophiles and Popes: Doing the Vatican Shuffle|Pedophiles and Popes: Doing the Vatican Shuffle]]&#039;&#039; (2010)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Death and Profits: The Utility Protection Racket|Death and Profits: The Utility Protection Racket]]&#039;&#039; (2010)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Money Is Still the Name of the Game|Money Is Still the Name of the Game]]&#039;&#039; (2010)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:The Mafia and Me|The Mafia and Me]]&#039;&#039; (2011)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Profit Pathology and Disposable Planet|Profit Pathology and Disposable Planet]]&#039;&#039; (2011)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Making the World Safe for Hypocrisy|&#039;&#039;Making the World Safe for Hypocrisy&#039;&#039;]] (2011)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Class Warfare Indeed|Class Warfare Indeed]]&#039;&#039; (2011)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Occupy America|Occupy America]]&#039;&#039; (2011)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Must We Adore Vaclav Havel?|&#039;&#039;Must We Adore Vaclav Havel?&#039;&#039;]] (2011), an excerpt from his book &#039;&#039;Blackshirts and Reds&#039;&#039; (1997) published on ZNetwork as a standalone article&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Free Market Medicine: A Personal Account|Free Market Medicine: A Personal Account]]&#039;&#039; (2011)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Free Market Health Care: True Stories|Free Market Health Care: True Stories]]&#039;&#039; (2012)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Iran and Everything Else|Iran and Everything Else]]&#039;&#039; (2012)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:The Nobel Peace Prize for War|The Nobel Peace Prize for War]]&#039;&#039; (2012)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:A Terrible Normality|A Terrible Normality]]&#039;&#039; (2013)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Eating Horses In Paris|Eating Horses In Paris]]&#039;&#039; (2013)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Requiem for a Dominatrix|Requiem for a Dominatrix]]&#039;&#039; (2013)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:I Have a Dream, a Blurred Vision|I Have a Dream, a Blurred Vision]]&#039;&#039; (2013)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Syria, Sarin, and Casus Belli|Syria, Sarin, and Casus Belli]]&#039;&#039; (2013)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:85 Billionaires and the Better Half|85 Billionaires and the Better Half]] (2014)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:What&#039;s a Slum?|&#039;&#039;What&#039;s a Slum?&#039;&#039;]] (2014), an excerpt from his book [[Library:Waiting for Yesterday|&#039;&#039;Waiting for Yesterday&#039;&#039;]] (2013) published on his website as a standalone article&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Ukraine and Regime Change|&#039;&#039;Ukraine and Regime Change&#039;&#039;]], an excerpt from [[Library:Flashpoint in Ukraine|&#039;&#039;Flashpoint in Ukraine: How the US Drive for Hegemony Risks World War III&#039;&#039;]] (2014) by [[Stephen Lendman]], published on his website as a standalone article&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:1918: On When a War Ended (Though Others Would Follow)|1918: On When a War Ended (Though Others Would Follow)]]&#039;&#039; (2014)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:A Long Time For Killing|&#039;&#039;A Long Time For Killing&#039;&#039;]] (2015)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The Lost Women|&#039;&#039;The Lost Women&#039;&#039;]] (2015)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Books ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The Anti-Communist Impulse|&#039;&#039;The Anti-Communist Impulse&#039;&#039;]] (1969)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Trends and Tragedies in American Foreign Policy|&#039;&#039;Trends and Tragedies in American Foreign Policy&#039;&#039;]] (1971)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Democracy for the Few|&#039;&#039;Democracy for the Few&#039;&#039;]] (1974, 1977, 1980, 1983, 1988, 1995, 2001, 2007, 2011)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Ethnic and Political Attitudes: A Depth Study of Italian Americans|Ethnic and Political Attitudes: A Depth Study of Italian Americans]]&#039;&#039; (1975)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Power and the Powerless|&#039;&#039;Power and the Powerless&#039;&#039;]] (1978)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Inventing Reality|&#039;&#039;Inventing Reality: The Politics of News Media&#039;&#039;]] (1986, 1993)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The Sword and the Dollar|&#039;&#039;The Sword and the Dollar: Imperialism, Revolution, and the Arms Race&#039;&#039;]] (1989)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Make-Believe Media|&#039;&#039;Make-Believe Media: The Politics of Entertainment&#039;&#039;]] (1992)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Land of Idols|&#039;&#039;Land of Idols: Political Mythology in America&#039;&#039;]] (1994)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Against Empire|&#039;&#039;Against Empire&#039;&#039;]] (1995)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Dirty Truths|&#039;&#039;Dirty Truths&#039;&#039;]] (1996)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Blackshirts and Reds|&#039;&#039;Blackshirts and Reds: Rational Fascism and the Overthrow of Communism&#039;&#039;]] (1997)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:America Besieged|&#039;&#039;America Besieged&#039;&#039;]] (1998)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:History as Mystery|&#039;&#039;History as Mystery&#039;&#039;]] (1999)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:To Kill a Nation|&#039;&#039;To Kill a Nation: The Attack on Yugoslavia&#039;&#039;]] (2001)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The Terrorism Trap|&#039;&#039;The Terrorism Trap: September 11 and Beyond&#039;&#039;]] (2002)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The Assassination of Julius Caesar|&#039;&#039;The Assassination of Julius Caesar: A People&#039;s History of Ancient Rome&#039;&#039;]] (2003)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Superpatriotism|&#039;&#039;Superpatriotism&#039;&#039;]] (2004)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The Culture Struggle|&#039;&#039;The Culture Struggle&#039;&#039;]] (2006)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Contrary Notions|&#039;&#039;Contrary Notions: The Michael Parenti Reader&#039;&#039;]] (2007)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:God and His Demons|&#039;&#039;God and His Demons&#039;&#039;]] (2010)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The Face of Imperialism|&#039;&#039;The Face of Imperialism&#039;&#039;]] (2011)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Waiting for Yesterday|&#039;&#039;Waiting for Yesterday: Pages from a Street Kid&#039;s Life&#039;&#039;]] (2013)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Profit Pathology and Other Indecencies|&#039;&#039;Profit Pathology and Other Indecencies&#039;&#039;]] (2015)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Interviews ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Exposing the Terrorism Trap|&#039;&#039;Exposing the Terrorism Trap&#039;&#039;]] (2002)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Interviewing Michael Parenti about The Culture Struggle|&#039;&#039;Interviewing Michael Parenti about The Culture Struggle&#039;&#039;]] (2006)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The Shape of Things to Come in Libya|&#039;&#039;The Shape of Things to Come in Libya: Interview with Michael Parenti&#039;&#039;]] (2011)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Reflections on Politics and Academia|Reflections on Politics and Academia: An Interview with Michael Parenti]]&#039;&#039; (2012)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The Corporate University: An E-interview with Dave Hill, Alpesh Maisuria, Anthony Nocella, and Michael Parenti|&#039;&#039;The Corporate University: An E-interview with Dave Hill, Alpesh Maisuria, Anthony Nocella, and Michael Parenti&#039;&#039;]] (2015)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Journal articles ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Review of A New Survey of the Social Sciences|&#039;&#039;Review of A New Survey of the Social Sciences&#039;&#039;]] (1964)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Political Values and Religious Cultures|Political Values and Religious Cultures: Jews, Catholics, and Protestants]]&#039;&#039; (1967)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Ethnic Politics and the Persistence of Ethnic Identification|&#039;&#039;Ethnic Politics and the Persistence of Ethnic Identification&#039;&#039;]] (1967)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Review of Maximum Feasible Misunderstanding|&#039;&#039;Review of Maximum Feasible Misunderstanding&#039;&#039;]] (1970)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The Possibilities for Political Change|&#039;&#039;The Possibilities for Political Change&#039;&#039;]] (1970)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Power and Pluralism|&#039;&#039;Power and Pluralism&#039;&#039;]] (1970)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Repression in Academia|&#039;&#039;Repression in Academia: A Report from the Field&#039;&#039;]] (1971)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Review of The New Socialist Revolution|Review of The New Socialist Revolution]]&#039;&#039; (1973)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Reviewing the Reviewers|Reviewing the Reviewers: Ideological Bias in the APSR Book Section]]&#039;&#039; (1974)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The Blessings of Private Enterprise|&#039;&#039;The Blessings of Private Enterprise&#039;&#039;]] (1974, 1996)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:A Third Party Emerges in Vermont|A Third Party Emerges in Vermont]]&#039;&#039; (1975)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Rocco&#039;s Life|Rocco&#039;s Life: A Documentary, Circa 1940]]&#039;&#039; (1981)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The Untold Story of the Greensboro Massacre|&#039;&#039;The Untold Story of the Greensboro Massacre&#039;&#039;]] (1981)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The State of the Discipline|&#039;&#039;The State of the Discipline: One Interpretation of Everyone&#039;s Favorite Controversy&#039;&#039;]] (1983)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Socialism, Capitalism, and Militarism|Socialism, Capitalism, and Militarism: A Reply to Dye and Zeigler]]&#039;&#039; (1990)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Rejoinder to Dye and Zeigler|Rejoinder to Dye and Zeigler]]&#039;&#039; (1990)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Serving the Few|&#039;&#039;Serving the Few&#039;&#039;]] (1995)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The Increasing Relevance of Marxism|&#039;&#039;The Increasing Relevance of Marxism&#039;&#039;]] (1998)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Reflections on the Politics of Culture|&#039;&#039;Reflections on the Politics of Culture&#039;&#039;]] (1999)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Another View of Chomsky|&#039;&#039;Another View of Chomsky&#039;&#039;]] (1999)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Patricians, Professionals, and Political Science|&#039;&#039;Patricians, Professionals, and Political Science&#039;&#039;]] (2006)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Letters ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Letter from Parenti and Meranto to the Editor of The Daily Illini|&#039;&#039;Witnesses&#039;&#039;]] (1970)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Newfound &#039;Brutality&#039; in Iran|Newfound &#039;Brutality&#039; in Iran]]&#039;&#039; (1979)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:What If Communists Had Links to Dr. King?|&#039;&#039;What If Communists Had Links to Dr. King?&#039;&#039;]] (1983)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Presidential Slander Of a U.S. Multitude|&#039;&#039;Presidential Slander Of a U.S. Multitude&#039;&#039;]] (1984)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:What Reagan Means by Judicial Responsibility|&#039;&#039;What Reagan Means by Judicial Responsibility&#039;&#039;]] (1985)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Politics of the Press|Politics of the Press]]&#039;&#039; (1986)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:In Spirit of Glasnost, a Half-Toast to Perestroika|&#039;&#039;In Spirit of Glasnost, a Half-Toast to Perestroika&#039;&#039;]] (1989)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Limitation on Incumbency|Limitation on Incumbency]]&#039;&#039; (1991)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Morte d&#039;Arthur (Parenti letter)|&#039;&#039;Morte d&#039;Arthur&#039;&#039;]] (1992)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Magazine articles ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:The Bogey of Revolution|The Bogey of Revolution]]&#039;&#039; (1968)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:The High Cost of Empire|The High Cost of Empire]]&#039;&#039; (1981)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Is Nicaragua More Democratic Than the United States?|Is Nicaragua More Democratic Than the United States?]]&#039;&#039; (1986)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Bush&#039;s Splendid Little War|Bush&#039;s Splendid Little War]]&#039;&#039; (1991)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Global Rollback After Communism|Global Rollback After Communism]]&#039;&#039; (2002)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Newspaper articles ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Is It Really Freedom of Speech?|&#039;&#039;Is It Really Freedom of Speech? Millions of Americans Cannot Be Heard&#039;&#039;]] (1975)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:A &#039;Double Standard&#039; in Reporting News From Portugal|&#039;&#039;A &#039;Double Standard&#039; in Reporting News From Portugal&#039;&#039;]] (1976)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:The Lies of William Colby|&#039;&#039;The Lies of William Colby&#039;&#039;]] (1976)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Housing Disinterest Has Damaging Impact on Life|&#039;&#039;Housing Disinterest Has Damaging Impact on Life&#039;&#039;]] (1978)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Winging It In Politics|&#039;&#039;Winging It In Politics&#039;&#039;]] (1980)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Foreign-Policy Immorality Has No Excuse|&#039;&#039;Foreign-Policy Immorality Has No Excuse&#039;&#039;]] (1984)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:In &amp;quot;Defence&amp;quot; of &amp;quot;Star Wars&amp;quot;|In &amp;quot;Defence&amp;quot; of &amp;quot;Star Wars&amp;quot;]]&#039;&#039; (1986)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Image is Everything|&#039;&#039;Image is Everything&#039;&#039;]] (1991)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Athletic jingoism|Athletic jingoism]]&#039;&#039; (1999)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Speeches ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:US Interventionism, the Third World, and the USSR|&#039;&#039;US Interventionism, the Third World, and the USSR&#039;&#039;]] (1986)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Misc ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:Propaganda, Inc.#Introduction|&#039;&#039;Introduction&#039;&#039;]] in [[Library:Propaganda, Inc.|&#039;&#039;Propaganda, Inc.: Selling America&#039;s Culture to the World&#039;&#039;]] (1998) by [[Nancy Snow]]&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Class and Virtue|Class and Virtue]]&#039;&#039; in &#039;&#039;[[Library:Signs of Life in the USA|Signs of Life in the USA: Readings on Popular Culture for Writers]]&#039;&#039; (1999) by [[Sonia Maasik]] and [[James F. Solomon|Jack Solomon]]&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:The Logic of U.S. Intervention|The Logic of U.S. Interventionism]]&#039;&#039; in &#039;&#039;[[Library:Masters of War: Militarism and Blowback in the Era of American Empire|Masters of War: Militarism and Blowback in the Era of American Empire]]&#039;&#039; (2003) by [[Carl Boggs]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Library:American Foreign Policy: A Tragic &amp;quot;Success&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;American Foreign Policy: A Tragic &amp;quot;Success&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;]] in [[Patriotism, Democracy and Common Sense|&#039;&#039;Patriotism, Democracy and Common Sense: Restoring America&#039;s Promise At Home and Abroad&#039;&#039;]] (2004) by [[Alan Curtis (author)|Alan Curtis]]&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Reel Power#Foreword|Foreword]]&#039;&#039; in &#039;&#039;[[Library:Reel Power|Reel Power: Hollywood Cinema and American Supremacy]]&#039;&#039; (2010) by [[Matthew Alford]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Recordings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* 1986:  [https://youtu.be/7mW4ic0Iu2M &#039;&#039;Monopoly Culture and Academic Freedom&#039;&#039;] at the University of Vermont, 9 April 1986&lt;br /&gt;
* 1986:  [https://youtu.be/xP8CzlFhc14 &#039;&#039;US Interventionism, the Third World, and the USSR&#039;&#039;] at the University of Colorado Boulder, 15 April 1986&lt;br /&gt;
* 1986:  [https://youtu.be/VKg1Jj3AjfM &#039;&#039;Michael Parenti at Loyola University&#039;&#039;] at Loyola University New Orleans, 23 April 1986&lt;br /&gt;
* 1986:  [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=FUWrgLpazwE &#039;&#039;Anti-Sovietism in the Media&#039;&#039;] at the University of Massachusetts Amherst, 20 November 1986&lt;br /&gt;
* 1987:  [https://youtu.be/QIFMB2NW3WY &#039;&#039;The Political Uses of Religion&#039;&#039;] in Denver, Colorado, 18 April 1987&lt;br /&gt;
* 1988:  [https://youtu.be/4vKfejeruhk &#039;&#039;Superpatriotism and the Importance of Being Number One&#039;&#039;] in Boulder, Colorado, 1 August 1988&lt;br /&gt;
* 1989:  [https://youtu.be/4YZK7JCWtYI &#039;&#039;The Sword and the Dollar&#039;&#039;] in Thunder Bay, Ontario, 27 October 1989&lt;br /&gt;
* 1990:  [https://youtu.be/MfDnQPtijjc &#039;&#039;Human Nature and Politics&#039;&#039;] in Los Angeles, California, May 1990&lt;br /&gt;
* 1991:  [https://youtu.be/5Bz1s3CM9zs &#039;&#039;Corporatism and the U.S. Political Scene&#039;&#039;], 1991&lt;br /&gt;
* 1993:  [https://youtu.be/nKwypf9qPto &#039;&#039;Conspiracy and State Power&#039;&#039;] at the University of Vermont, 21 April 1993&lt;br /&gt;
* 1993:  [https://youtu.be/9g3kRHo_vpQ &#039;&#039;Inventing Reality&#039;&#039;], 17 October 1993&lt;br /&gt;
* 1997:  [https://youtu.be/d9Zkw2oUWlY &#039;&#039;The Hidden Ideology of the News Media&#039;&#039;] at the University of Vermont, Burlington, 9 April 1997&lt;br /&gt;
* 1999:  &#039;&#039;[https://vimeo.com/753160661 The U.S. Empire and the War against Yugoslavia]&#039;&#039; at St. Joseph the Worker Catholic Church, Berkeley, 1999&lt;br /&gt;
* 1999:  [https://vimeo.com/758356846 &#039;&#039;Berkeley Mother&#039;s Day for Peace 1999&#039;&#039;] at the Martin Luther King, Jr. Civic Center Park, Berkeley, 9 May 1999&lt;br /&gt;
* 1999:  &#039;&#039;[https://youtu.be/GEzOgpMWnVs The U.S. War on Yugoslavia]&#039;&#039; in Seattle, Washington, 16 May 1999&lt;br /&gt;
* 2002:  [https://youtu.be/V_PNyYPR46E &#039;&#039;The Corporate War Against Democracy&#039;&#039;] at Portland State University, 14 September 2002&lt;br /&gt;
* 2002:  [https://youtu.be/_aJArigViMU &#039;&#039;Terrorism, Globalism, and Conspiracy&#039;&#039;] at St. Andrew&#039;s-Wesley United Church, Vancouver, 9 October 2002&lt;br /&gt;
* 2003:  [https://youtu.be/ikZ4ChX1WAo &#039;&#039;The Assassination of Julius Caesar&#039;&#039;] in Venice, Colorado, 29 June 2003&lt;br /&gt;
* 2004:  &#039;&#039;[https://youtu.be/FZqwlNpXelg Creating a Sustainable Economy]&#039;&#039; at the Unitarian Universalist Church of Long Beach, California, 24 June 2004&lt;br /&gt;
* 2005:  [https://youtu.be/wpAOZkH09C8 &#039;&#039;Michael Parenti on Penn &amp;amp; Teller: Bullshit! (2005)&#039;&#039;], 23 May 2005&lt;br /&gt;
* 2005:  [https://youtu.be/MufGs0MQrPg &#039;&#039;Iraq and the Future of US Foreign Policy&#039;&#039;] at Wesleyan University, Connecticut, 18 April 2005&lt;br /&gt;
* 2005: &#039;&#039;[https://youtu.be/OOF56wYTl1w The Darker Myths of Empire: Heart of Darkness Series]&#039;&#039; at the College of DuPage, 16 November 2005&lt;br /&gt;
* 2007:  [https://youtu.be/8a2lisF4XGg &#039;&#039;Lies, Wars, &amp;amp; Empire&#039;&#039;] at Binghamton University, 9 October 2007&lt;br /&gt;
* 2010:  [https://youtu.be/GEzOgpMWnVs &#039;&#039;Deep Ideology: How Reactionary Agendas Shape Political Awareness&#039;&#039;] at the University Inn &amp;amp; Conference Center, Santa Cruz, 14–16 May 2010&lt;br /&gt;
* 2011:  [https://youtu.be/QTWbnHsE2ow &#039;&#039;The Face of Imperialism and The 99% Solution&#039;&#039;] at the University of Guelph, 2 November 2011&lt;br /&gt;
* 2012:  [https://youtu.be/wheMfMqu-H4 &#039;&#039;Democracy and the Pathology of Wealth&#039;&#039;] at the La Peña Cultural Center, Berkeley, 6 January 2012&lt;br /&gt;
* 2013:  [https://youtu.be/bHUDfF2ztEg &#039;&#039;Michael Parenti on the Threat of US Imperialism&#039;&#039;] in Vancouver, British Columbia, November 2013&lt;br /&gt;
* 2015:  [https://youtu.be/fcImfx8tunI &#039;&#039;Capitalism vs. Reality&#039;&#039;] in Springfield, Illinois, 6 October 2015&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Statesian communists]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Statesian Marxists]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Statesians of Italian descent]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:1933 births]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:2026 deaths]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>The Phantom Bull</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=Anarchism&amp;diff=91354</id>
		<title>Anarchism</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=Anarchism&amp;diff=91354"/>
		<updated>2026-06-17T15:34:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;The Phantom Bull: I generalized the statement about anarchism being maliciously used to slander socialism.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:Anarchism.png|thumb|The letter A in a circle, a common anarchist symbol]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Anarchism&#039;&#039;&#039; is political philosophy which is skeptical of authority and rejects coercive hierarchies, including the very existence of a [[state]]. While Marxists also advocate for a stateless society (a [[Communism|communist society]]), Marxists tend to criticize anarchism as [[Utopian socialism|utopian]] and unscientific for rejecting the transitionary phase of the [[dictatorship of the proletariat]]. The philosophical basis of anarchism is [[individualism]], [[subjectivism]] and [[voluntarism]], which can be categorized as [[Petty-bourgeoisie|petty-bourgeois]] deviations from [[Proletariat|proletarian]] struggle.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:0&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Rosental, M.; e Iudin, P. (1973): &#039;&#039;Diccionario filosófico&#039;&#039; (p. 13). Buenos Aires: Universo, 1973.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{Citation|author=G. N. Komoliets, V. V. Aleksandrov, N. M. Pirumova|year=1970|chapter=Anarchism|chapter-url=https://encyclopedia2.thefreedictionary.com/Anarchism|title=[[Great Soviet Encyclopedia]] (3rd ed.)|volume=1|page=573-574|city=Moscow|pdf=https://ia804601.us.archive.org/2/items/B-001-032-507-748-ALL/БСЭ_3изд_т01_728.pdf|trans-title=Boljšaja sovjetskaja enciklopjedija|trans-lang=Russian}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Anarchism is a part of the broader trend of [[libertarian socialism]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Origin==&lt;br /&gt;
Anarchism emerged in Europe and parts of Latin America between the 1840s and 1870s.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:1&amp;quot; /&amp;gt; The advent of anarchism is tied to the names of Schmidt ([[Max Stirner|Stirner]]), [[Pierre-Joseph Proudhon|Proudhon]], and [[Mikhail Bakunin|Bakunin]], whose utopian theories were subjected to criticism in the works of [[Marx]] and [[Engels]]. In the nineteenth century, anarchism spread through France, Italy and Spain.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:0&amp;quot; /&amp;gt; The social bases of anarchism are the petty bourgeoisie and the [[Lumpenproletariat]], with some strata of the revolutionary working class.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:1&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Due to anarchism&#039;s attacks against all forms of authority, regardless of its class character, anarchist views are sometimes pushed and encouraged by the bourgeoisie as a means of discrediting [[Actually Existing Socialism|actually existing socialism]], thus destabilizing what would otherwise be effective anti-imperialist movements. One example of this is a series of anarchist underground publications (titled &amp;quot;The Workshop&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Armageddon News&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;The Longhorn Tale&amp;quot;, and &amp;quot;Chevara News&amp;quot; respectively) that were created and planted in [[United States of America|Statesian]] universities by the [[Federal Bureau of Investigation]] in the 1960s, which were used to slander the [[Democratic Republic of Vietnam (1945–1975)|Democratic Republic of Vietnam]] and the [[Union of Soviet Socialist Republics (1922–1991)|Union of Soviet Socialist Republics]].&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{Web citation|author=Ben Norton|newspaper=Geopolitical Economy Report|title=In COINTELPRO, FBI used anarchism to ‘disrupt left’, attack Vietnam &amp;amp; USSR|date=2021-10-15|url=https://geopoliticaleconomy.com/2021/10/15/cointelpro-fbi-anarchism-disrupt-left/|retrieved=2026-06-15}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Variations of anarchism ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Collectivist anarchism ===&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Anarcho-communism]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Anarcho-syndicalism]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Mutualism]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Individualist anarchism ===&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Anarcho-capitalism]] (in name only){{refn|group=note|name=ancap|Contrary to its name, anarcho-capitalism is based in [[Right-libertarianism|right-libertarian]] principles and has nothing to do with anarchism. The leading theoretician and founder of anarcho-capitalism, Murray Rothbard, denied any identification with anarchism.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{Web citation| author = Murray N. Rothbard| newspaper = Mises Institute&lt;br /&gt;
| title = Are Libertarians &amp;quot;Anarchists&amp;quot;?| date = July 4th, 2022| url = https://mises.org/library/are-libertarians-anarchists| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20230310021514/https://mises.org/library/are-libertarians-anarchists| quote = We must therefore turn to history for enlightenment; here we find that none of the proclaimed anarchist groups correspond to the libertarian position, that even the best of them have unrealistic and socialistic elements in their doctrines. Furthermore, we find that all of the current anarchists are irrational collectivists, and therefore at opposite poles from our position. We must therefore conclude that we are not anarchists, and that those who call us anarchists are not on firm etymological ground, and are being completely unhistorical.}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Anarchists, libertarian socialists, and libertarian communists tend to associate with each other, whilst avoiding association with anarcho-capitalists.}}&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Egoism]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Market anarchism]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[National anarchism]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Post-classical and modern anarchism ===&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Anarcha-feminism]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Anarcho-pacifism]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Anarcho-primitivism]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Anarcho-transhumanism]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Post-leftism]]{{refn|group=note|name=postleft|Post-leftism and post-anarchism reject political philosophy altogether as a reactionary force, but they practically advocate for anarchism.}}&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Post-anarchism]]{{refn|group=note|name=postleft}}&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Queer anarchism]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Characteristics ==&lt;br /&gt;
Anarchism does not go beyond general phrases against exploitation, it does not understand what the causes of exploitation are, nor the [[class struggle]] as a creative force for the realization of [[socialism]]. The anarchist denial of political struggle contributes objectively to the subordination of the [[Proletariat|working class]] to [[Bourgeoisie|bourgeois]] politics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The most essential thing in the struggle against anarchism lies in the problem of how the [[revolution]] should proceed in relation to the [[State]] and in the problem of the State in general. Anarchists advocate for the immediate annihilation of the State. They do not recognize that it is possible to take advantage of the bourgeois State to prepare the proletariat for the revolution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After 1917, anarchism in Russia became a [[counter-revolutionary]] tendency. Historically, Anarchism saw brief surges in popularity in [[Anarchist Catalonia (1936–1939)|Catalonia]], the [[Ukrainian Free Territory|Free Territory]] in [[Ukraine]] and in the Korean Peninsula. Today, it enjoys a certain influence in the United States and Europe.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:0&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Distinctions between Marxists and Anarchists==&lt;br /&gt;
The essential distinctions in the criteria of Marxists and anarchists were reduced by [[Lenin]] to three fundamental points:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*In that the first, whose end is the complete withering away of the State, acknowledge that this end can only be achieved after the socialist revolution has abolished classes as a result of the establishment of [[socialism]]. The latter, on the other hand, want to completely destroy the State overnight, without understanding the conditions in which this destruction can take place.&lt;br /&gt;
*They first acknowledge the need for the [[proletariat]], after conquering political power, to totally destroy the former State machine, replacing it with a new one. The latter advocate the destruction of the state machine and have an absolutely confused idea of what the proletariat must replace the machine with and how it will exercise revolutionary power. Anarchists reject even the use of state power by the revolutionary proletariat, their revolutionary dictatorship.&lt;br /&gt;
* The first demand that the proletariat prepare for revolution by taking advantage of the modern State, while anarchists reject it.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Rumiántsev, A. (1981): &#039;&#039;Comunismo científico&#039;&#039; (diccionario), p. 14-17. Moscú: Progreso, 1981.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In the [[State &amp;amp; Revolution]], it has been clearly laid further when Marx emphasised of the &amp;quot;revolutionary and transient form&amp;quot; of the state that the proletariat still needs. Instead of immediately abolishing the state as the anarchists desire, the Marxist stance remains that the proletariat still needs the state as well as the resources and methods of state power to use against the oppressor class or exploiters. The keypoint here is &amp;quot;temporary&amp;quot;, for eventually, the state will eventually wither away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Examples of anarchist experiments ==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capitol Hill Autonomous Zone]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Ukrainian Free Territory]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Anarchist Catalonia]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Korean People&#039;s Association in Manchuria]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Left-wing libertarianism]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Right-wing libertarianism]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Idealism]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Further reading ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Anarchism or socialism?|Anarchism or Socialism?]]&#039;&#039; ([[Joseph Stalin]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Notes==&lt;br /&gt;
{{reflist|group=note}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Left-wing ideologies]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Utopian socialism]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>The Phantom Bull</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=Mental_illness&amp;diff=91350</id>
		<title>Mental illness</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=Mental_illness&amp;diff=91350"/>
		<updated>2026-06-17T14:26:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;The Phantom Bull: I mentioned the particularly low mental illness rates of Vietnam and Laos.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:Mental illness statistics.png|thumb|Source: National Alliance on Mental Illness (2022)&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:0&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{Web citation|author=Princess Harmony|newspaper=[[Workers World]]|title=Newsom’s reactionary approach to mental illness|date=2024-01-05|url=https://www.workers.org/2024/01/76032/|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240106032119/https://www.workers.org/2024/01/76032/|archive-date=2024-01-06}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Mental illness&#039;&#039;&#039; is a wide range of distressing behavioural or mental patterns that negatively impact one&#039;s quality of life. The severity and duration of mental illness symptoms varies from individual to individual, and mental illness is not always obvious to others.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{Web citation|newspaper=Avid Counseling Services|title=The Invisible Illnesses: Understanding Anxiety, Depression, and Beyond|url=https://www.avidcounseling.org/the-invisible-illnesses-understanding-anxiety-depression-and-beyond/|retrieved=2026-06-16|quote=Many individuals live with mental health challenges while appearing fine to others. They might go to work, attend social events, and smile through the pain.}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== History ==&lt;br /&gt;
Hundreds of years ago, due to the superstition of the time, people believed that mental illness was caused by demonic possession. Society later viewed mentally ill people as criminals and forced them into [[Prison|prisons]] and asylums. [[Dorothea Dix]] (1802–1887) was one of the first people who saw mental illness as an illness and not a crime and supported investment in mental hospitals in the [[United States of America|USA]] and [[Europe]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Doctors often treated mental illness with a lobotomy, which destroyed the patient&#039;s personality but made them easier to control. The [[Union of Soviet Socialist Republics (1922–1991)|USSR]] was the first country to recognize the inhumanity of psychosurgery. In the 1960s, [[John F. Kennedy]] signed the Community Mental Health Act, which freed many mentally ill people from asylums. Chlorpromazine (Thorazine), first developed in the 1950s, treated schizophrenia and led to some people being freed from asylums.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:0&amp;quot; /&amp;gt; However, many people with severe mental illnesses ended up in prison by the late 20th century.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{Web citation|author=Sue Harris|newspaper=[[Workers World]]|title=Treatment of severe mental illness in the U.S. and Cuba – a comparison|date=2023-09-26|url=https://www.workers.org/2023/09/73532/|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20231216054831/https://www.workers.org/2023/09/73532/|archive-date=2023-12-16}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Mental health in capitalist countries ==&lt;br /&gt;
Within the [[imperial core]], mental illness is a more prevalent source of disability than any physical illness.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{Web citation|author=William C. Reeves et al|newspaper=The Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC)|title=Mental Illness Surveillance Among Adults in the United States|date=2011-09-02|url=https://www.cdc.gov/mmwr/preview/mmwrhtml/su6003a1.htm|retrieved=2026-06-16|quote=Mental illnesses account for a larger proportion of disability in developed countries than any other group of illnesses, including cancer and heart disease.}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Despite the prevalence of mental illness, capitalist countries only spend an average of 3.44% of their healthcare budgets on treating mental illness, with some spending as little as 0.01% of their healthcare budgets on treating mental illness.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{Web citation|author=The Global Health Observatory (GHO)|newspaper=World Health Organization|title=Mental health governance: government expenditures on mental health as a percentage of total government expenditures on health (%)|date=2013-10-10|url=https://www.who.int/data/gho/data/indicators/indicator-details/GHO/government-expenditures-on-mental-health-as-a-percentage-of-total-government-expenditures-on-health-(-)|retrieved=2026-06-16}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; According to bourgeois sources, the [[Republic of Finland]] is the happiest capitalist country,&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{Web citation|newspaper=World Population Review|title=Happiest Countries in the World|url=https://worldpopulationreview.com/country-rankings/happiest-countries-in-the-world|retrieved=2026-06-17}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; yet 13.7% of its population was diagnosed with a mental illness in 2023.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:2&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{Web citation|newspaper=Our World In Data|title=Share of population with mental health disorders|date=2026-02-07|url=https://ourworldindata.org/grapher/share-with-mental-and-substance-disorders|retrieved=2026-06-17}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Mental health in socialist countries ==&lt;br /&gt;
In 2023, the [[People&#039;s Republic of China]], the [[Lao People&#039;s Democratic Republic]], the [[Socialist Republic of Vietnam]], and the [[Democratic People&#039;s Republic of Korea]] each had lower rates of mental illness than Finland, with Vietnam and Laos having the lowest and third-lowest rates of mental illness in the world, respectively.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:2&amp;quot; /&amp;gt; In 2025, China integrated extensive mental health treatment measures into primary and secondary schools.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{Web citation|author=Chao Song and Wei-Hong Zhang|newspaper=The Lancet Psychiatry|title=From policy to practice: implementing China&#039;s measures to strengthen student mental health|date=2026-01-25|url=https://www.thelancet.com/journals/lanpsy/article/PIIS2215-0366(25)00401-8/abstract|retrieved=2026-06-17}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Also in 2025, the National Health Commission of the People&#039;s Republic of China designated the years 2025, 2026, and 2027 as pediatrics and mental health service years, alongside launching a new mental health assistance hotline in 18 regions.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{Web citation|title=China launches hotlines, awareness campaigns to bolster mental health services|date=2025-02-14|url=https://en.nhc.gov.cn/2025-02/14/c_86392.htm|retrieved=2026-06-17}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Current status by country ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Cuba ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Republic of Cuba|Cuba]] has eight physicians per 1,000 citizens, the highest ratio in the world and twice as high as the USA. Community doctors and nurses visit people at home once a year throughout their lives. If informed by a family member of a mental problem, treatment begins early and is free.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:1&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== United States ===&lt;br /&gt;
In 44 of 50 U.S. states, a jail or prison held more mentally ill people than the largest state psychiatric hospital in 2014. These prisoners are often forced into solitary confinement, which can lead to suicide. People with severe mental illnesses commit half of prison suicides despite being only 15 to 20% of the prison population.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:1&amp;quot; /&amp;gt; In 2023, 18% of the entire U.S. population were diagnosed with a mental illness.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:2&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Psychiatry]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Anti-psychiatry]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;link rel=&amp;quot;mw:PageProp/Category&amp;quot; href=&amp;quot;./Category:Disability&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>The Phantom Bull</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=Mental_illness&amp;diff=91344</id>
		<title>Mental illness</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=Mental_illness&amp;diff=91344"/>
		<updated>2026-06-17T00:30:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;The Phantom Bull: I elaborated on the lede of the article, and added a section about mental health in capitalist countries.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:Mental illness statistics.png|thumb|Source: National Alliance on Mental Illness (2022)&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:0&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{Web citation|author=Princess Harmony|newspaper=[[Workers World]]|title=Newsom’s reactionary approach to mental illness|date=2024-01-05|url=https://www.workers.org/2024/01/76032/|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240106032119/https://www.workers.org/2024/01/76032/|archive-date=2024-01-06}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Mental illness&#039;&#039;&#039; is a wide range of distressing behavioural or mental patterns that negatively impact one&#039;s quality of life. The severity and duration of mental illness symptoms varies from individual to individual, and mental illness is not always obvious to others.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{Web citation|newspaper=Avid Counseling Services|title=The Invisible Illnesses: Understanding Anxiety, Depression, and Beyond|url=https://www.avidcounseling.org/the-invisible-illnesses-understanding-anxiety-depression-and-beyond/|retrieved=2026-06-16|quote=Many individuals live with mental health challenges while appearing fine to others. They might go to work, attend social events, and smile through the pain.}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== History ==&lt;br /&gt;
Hundreds of years ago, due to the superstition of the time, people believed that mental illness was caused by demonic possession. Society later viewed mentally ill people as criminals and forced them into [[Prison|prisons]] and asylums. [[Dorothea Dix]] (1802–1887) was one of the first people who saw mental illness as an illness and not a crime and supported investment in mental hospitals in the [[United States of America|USA]] and [[Europe]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Doctors often treated mental illness with a lobotomy, which destroyed the patient&#039;s personality but made them easier to control. The [[Union of Soviet Socialist Republics (1922–1991)|USSR]] was the first country to recognize the inhumanity of psychosurgery. In the 1960s, [[John F. Kennedy]] signed the Community Mental Health Act, which freed many mentally ill people from asylums. Chlorpromazine (Thorazine), first developed in the 1950s, treated schizophrenia and led to some people being freed from asylums.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:0&amp;quot; /&amp;gt; However, many people with severe mental illnesses ended up in prison by the late 20th century.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{Web citation|author=Sue Harris|newspaper=[[Workers World]]|title=Treatment of severe mental illness in the U.S. and Cuba – a comparison|date=2023-09-26|url=https://www.workers.org/2023/09/73532/|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20231216054831/https://www.workers.org/2023/09/73532/|archive-date=2023-12-16}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Mental health in capitalist countries ==&lt;br /&gt;
Within the [[imperial core]], mental illness is a more prevalent source of disability than any physical illness.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{Web citation|author=William C. Reeves et al|newspaper=The Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC)|title=Mental Illness Surveillance Among Adults in the United States|date=2011-09-02|url=https://www.cdc.gov/mmwr/preview/mmwrhtml/su6003a1.htm|retrieved=2026-06-16|quote=Mental illnesses account for a larger proportion of disability in developed countries than any other group of illnesses, including cancer and heart disease.}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Despite the prevalence of mental illness, capitalist countries only spend an average of 3.44% of their healthcare budgets on treating mental illness, with some spending as little as 0.01% of their healthcare budgets on treating mental illness.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{Web citation|author=The Global Health Observatory (GHO)|newspaper=World Health Organization|title=Mental health governance: government expenditures on mental health as a percentage of total government expenditures on health (%)|date=2013-10-10|url=https://www.who.int/data/gho/data/indicators/indicator-details/GHO/government-expenditures-on-mental-health-as-a-percentage-of-total-government-expenditures-on-health-(-)|retrieved=2026-06-16}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Current status by country ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Cuba ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Republic of Cuba|Cuba]] has eight physicians per 1,000 citizens, the highest ratio in the world and twice as high as the USA. Community doctors and nurses visit people at home once a year throughout their lives. If informed by a family member of a mental problem, treatment begins early and is free.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:1&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== United States ===&lt;br /&gt;
In 44 of 50 U.S. states, a jail or prison held more mentally ill people than the largest state psychiatric hospital in 2014. These prisoners are often forced into solitary confinement, which can lead to suicide. People with severe mental illnesses commit half of prison suicides despite being only 15 to 20% of the prison population.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:1&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Psychiatry]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Anti-psychiatry]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Disability]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>The Phantom Bull</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=Anarchism&amp;diff=91342</id>
		<title>Anarchism</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=Anarchism&amp;diff=91342"/>
		<updated>2026-06-16T22:54:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;The Phantom Bull: Adjusted the FBI-plant paragraph to be a little more precise.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:Anarchism.png|thumb|The letter A in a circle, a common anarchist symbol]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Anarchism&#039;&#039;&#039; is political philosophy which is skeptical of authority and rejects coercive hierarchies, including the very existence of a [[state]]. While Marxists also advocate for a stateless society (a [[Communism|communist society]]), Marxists tend to criticize anarchism as [[Utopian socialism|utopian]] and unscientific for rejecting the transitionary phase of the [[dictatorship of the proletariat]]. The philosophical basis of anarchism is [[individualism]], [[subjectivism]] and [[voluntarism]], which can be categorized as [[Petty-bourgeoisie|petty-bourgeois]] deviations from [[Proletariat|proletarian]] struggle.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:0&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Rosental, M.; e Iudin, P. (1973): &#039;&#039;Diccionario filosófico&#039;&#039; (p. 13). Buenos Aires: Universo, 1973.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{Citation|author=G. N. Komoliets, V. V. Aleksandrov, N. M. Pirumova|year=1970|chapter=Anarchism|chapter-url=https://encyclopedia2.thefreedictionary.com/Anarchism|title=[[Great Soviet Encyclopedia]] (3rd ed.)|volume=1|page=573-574|city=Moscow|pdf=https://ia804601.us.archive.org/2/items/B-001-032-507-748-ALL/БСЭ_3изд_т01_728.pdf|trans-title=Boljšaja sovjetskaja enciklopjedija|trans-lang=Russian}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Anarchism is a part of the broader trend of [[libertarian socialism]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Origin==&lt;br /&gt;
Anarchism emerged in Europe and parts of Latin America between the 1840s and 1870s.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:1&amp;quot; /&amp;gt; The advent of anarchism is tied to the names of Schmidt ([[Max Stirner|Stirner]]), [[Pierre-Joseph Proudhon|Proudhon]], and [[Mikhail Bakunin|Bakunin]], whose utopian theories were subjected to criticism in the works of [[Marx]] and [[Engels]]. In the nineteenth century, anarchism spread through France, Italy and Spain.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:0&amp;quot; /&amp;gt; The social bases of anarchism are the petty bourgeoisie and the [[Lumpenproletariat]], with some strata of the revolutionary working class.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:1&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Due to anarchism&#039;s attacks against all forms of authority, regardless of its class character, anarchist views are sometimes pushed and encouraged by the bourgeoisie as a means of discrediting socialist states and destabilizing anti-imperialist movements. One example of this is a series of anarchist underground publications (each titled &amp;quot;The Workshop&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Armageddon News&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;The Longhorn Tale&amp;quot;, and &amp;quot;Chevara News&amp;quot;) that were created and planted in [[United States of America|Statesian]] universities by the [[Federal Bureau of Investigation]] in the 1960s, which were used to slander the [[Democratic Republic of Vietnam (1945–1975)|Democratic Republic of Vietnam]] and the [[Union of Soviet Socialist Republics (1922–1991)|Union of Soviet Socialist Republics]].&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{Web citation|author=Ben Norton|newspaper=Geopolitical Economy Report|title=In COINTELPRO, FBI used anarchism to ‘disrupt left’, attack Vietnam &amp;amp; USSR|date=2021-10-15|url=https://geopoliticaleconomy.com/2021/10/15/cointelpro-fbi-anarchism-disrupt-left/|retrieved=2026-06-15}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Variations of anarchism ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Collectivist anarchism ===&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Anarcho-communism]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Anarcho-syndicalism]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Mutualism]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Individualist anarchism ===&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Anarcho-capitalism]] (in name only){{refn|group=note|name=ancap|Contrary to its name, anarcho-capitalism is based in [[Right-libertarianism|right-libertarian]] principles and has nothing to do with anarchism. The leading theoretician and founder of anarcho-capitalism, Murray Rothbard, denied any identification with anarchism.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{Web citation| author = Murray N. Rothbard| newspaper = Mises Institute&lt;br /&gt;
| title = Are Libertarians &amp;quot;Anarchists&amp;quot;?| date = July 4th, 2022| url = https://mises.org/library/are-libertarians-anarchists| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20230310021514/https://mises.org/library/are-libertarians-anarchists| quote = We must therefore turn to history for enlightenment; here we find that none of the proclaimed anarchist groups correspond to the libertarian position, that even the best of them have unrealistic and socialistic elements in their doctrines. Furthermore, we find that all of the current anarchists are irrational collectivists, and therefore at opposite poles from our position. We must therefore conclude that we are not anarchists, and that those who call us anarchists are not on firm etymological ground, and are being completely unhistorical.}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Anarchists, libertarian socialists, and libertarian communists tend to associate with each other, whilst avoiding association with anarcho-capitalists.}}&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Egoism]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Market anarchism]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[National anarchism]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Post-classical and modern anarchism ===&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Anarcha-feminism]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Anarcho-pacifism]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Anarcho-primitivism]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Anarcho-transhumanism]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Post-leftism]]{{refn|group=note|name=postleft|Post-leftism and post-anarchism reject political philosophy altogether as a reactionary force, but they practically advocate for anarchism.}}&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Post-anarchism]]{{refn|group=note|name=postleft}}&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Queer anarchism]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Characteristics ==&lt;br /&gt;
Anarchism does not go beyond general phrases against exploitation, it does not understand what the causes of exploitation are, nor the [[class struggle]] as a creative force for the realization of [[socialism]]. The anarchist denial of political struggle contributes objectively to the subordination of the [[Proletariat|working class]] to [[Bourgeoisie|bourgeois]] politics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The most essential thing in the struggle against anarchism lies in the problem of how the [[revolution]] should proceed in relation to the [[State]] and in the problem of the State in general. Anarchists advocate for the immediate annihilation of the State. They do not recognize that it is possible to take advantage of the bourgeois State to prepare the proletariat for the revolution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After 1917, anarchism in Russia became a [[counter-revolutionary]] tendency. Historically, Anarchism saw brief surges in popularity in [[Anarchist Catalonia (1936–1939)|Catalonia]], the [[Ukrainian Free Territory|Free Territory]] in [[Ukraine]] and in the Korean Peninsula. Today, it enjoys a certain influence in the United States and Europe.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:0&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Distinctions between Marxists and Anarchists==&lt;br /&gt;
The essential distinctions in the criteria of Marxists and anarchists were reduced by [[Lenin]] to three fundamental points:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*In that the first, whose end is the complete withering away of the State, acknowledge that this end can only be achieved after the socialist revolution has abolished classes as a result of the establishment of [[socialism]]. The latter, on the other hand, want to completely destroy the State overnight, without understanding the conditions in which this destruction can take place.&lt;br /&gt;
*They first acknowledge the need for the [[proletariat]], after conquering political power, to totally destroy the former State machine, replacing it with a new one. The latter advocate the destruction of the state machine and have an absolutely confused idea of what the proletariat must replace the machine with and how it will exercise revolutionary power. Anarchists reject even the use of state power by the revolutionary proletariat, their revolutionary dictatorship.&lt;br /&gt;
* The first demand that the proletariat prepare for revolution by taking advantage of the modern State, while anarchists reject it.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Rumiántsev, A. (1981): &#039;&#039;Comunismo científico&#039;&#039; (diccionario), p. 14-17. Moscú: Progreso, 1981.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In the [[State &amp;amp; Revolution]], it has been clearly laid further when Marx emphasised of the &amp;quot;revolutionary and transient form&amp;quot; of the state that the proletariat still needs. Instead of immediately abolishing the state as the anarchists desire, the Marxist stance remains that the proletariat still needs the state as well as the resources and methods of state power to use against the oppressor class or exploiters. The keypoint here is &amp;quot;temporary&amp;quot;, for eventually, the state will eventually wither away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Examples of anarchist experiments ==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capitol Hill Autonomous Zone]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Ukrainian Free Territory]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Anarchist Catalonia]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Korean People&#039;s Association in Manchuria]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Left-wing libertarianism]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Right-wing libertarianism]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Idealism]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Further reading ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Anarchism or socialism?|Anarchism or Socialism?]]&#039;&#039; ([[Joseph Stalin]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Notes==&lt;br /&gt;
{{reflist|group=note}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Left-wing ideologies]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Utopian socialism]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>The Phantom Bull</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=Anarchism&amp;diff=91332</id>
		<title>Anarchism</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://prole.wiki/w/index.php?title=Anarchism&amp;diff=91332"/>
		<updated>2026-06-15T23:19:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;The Phantom Bull: Added a reference to the fact that anarchism is sometimes pushed by the bourgeoisie.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:Anarchism.png|thumb|The letter A in a circle, a common anarchist symbol]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Anarchism&#039;&#039;&#039; is political philosophy which is skeptical of authority and rejects coercive hierarchies, including the very existence of a [[state]]. While Marxists also advocate for a stateless society (a [[Communism|communist society]]), Marxists tend to criticize anarchism as [[Utopian socialism|utopian]] and unscientific for rejecting the transitionary phase of the [[dictatorship of the proletariat]]. The philosophical basis of anarchism is [[individualism]], [[subjectivism]] and [[voluntarism]], which can be categorized as [[Petty-bourgeoisie|petty-bourgeois]] deviations from [[Proletariat|proletarian]] struggle.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:0&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Rosental, M.; e Iudin, P. (1973): &#039;&#039;Diccionario filosófico&#039;&#039; (p. 13). Buenos Aires: Universo, 1973.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{Citation|author=G. N. Komoliets, V. V. Aleksandrov, N. M. Pirumova|year=1970|chapter=Anarchism|chapter-url=https://encyclopedia2.thefreedictionary.com/Anarchism|title=[[Great Soviet Encyclopedia]] (3rd ed.)|volume=1|page=573-574|city=Moscow|pdf=https://ia804601.us.archive.org/2/items/B-001-032-507-748-ALL/БСЭ_3изд_т01_728.pdf|trans-title=Boljšaja sovjetskaja enciklopjedija|trans-lang=Russian}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Anarchism is a part of the broader trend of [[libertarian socialism]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Origin==&lt;br /&gt;
Anarchism emerged in Europe and parts of Latin America between the 1840s and 1870s.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:1&amp;quot; /&amp;gt; The advent of anarchism is tied to the names of Schmidt ([[Max Stirner|Stirner]]), [[Pierre-Joseph Proudhon|Proudhon]], and [[Mikhail Bakunin|Bakunin]], whose utopian theories were subjected to criticism in the works of [[Marx]] and [[Engels]]. In the nineteenth century, anarchism spread through France, Italy and Spain.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:0&amp;quot; /&amp;gt; The social bases of anarchism are the petty bourgeoisie and the [[Lumpenproletariat]], with some strata of the revolutionary working class.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:1&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Due to anarchism&#039;s attacks against all forms of authority, regardless of its class character, anarchist views are sometimes pushed by the bourgeoisie as a means of discrediting socialist states and destabilizing anti-imperialist movements. One example of this is a series of anarchist underground publications (each titled &amp;quot;The Workshop&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Armageddon News&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;The Longhorn Tale&amp;quot;, and &amp;quot;Chevara News&amp;quot;) that were created and planted by the [[United States of America|Statesian]] [[Federal Bureau of Investigation]], which were used to slander the [[Democratic Republic of Vietnam (1945–1975)|Democratic Republic of Vietnam]] and the [[Union of Soviet Socialist Republics (1922–1991)|Union of Soviet Socialist Republics]].&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{Web citation|author=Ben Norton|newspaper=Geopolitical Economy Report|title=In COINTELPRO, FBI used anarchism to ‘disrupt left’, attack Vietnam &amp;amp; USSR|date=2021-10-15|url=https://geopoliticaleconomy.com/2021/10/15/cointelpro-fbi-anarchism-disrupt-left/|retrieved=2026-06-15}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Variations of anarchism ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Collectivist anarchism ===&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Anarcho-communism]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Anarcho-syndicalism]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Mutualism]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Individualist anarchism ===&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Anarcho-capitalism]] (in name only){{refn|group=note|name=ancap|Contrary to its name, anarcho-capitalism is based in [[Right-libertarianism|right-libertarian]] principles and has nothing to do with anarchism. The leading theoretician and founder of anarcho-capitalism, Murray Rothbard, denied any identification with anarchism.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;{{Web citation| author = Murray N. Rothbard| newspaper = Mises Institute&lt;br /&gt;
| title = Are Libertarians &amp;quot;Anarchists&amp;quot;?| date = July 4th, 2022| url = https://mises.org/library/are-libertarians-anarchists| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20230310021514/https://mises.org/library/are-libertarians-anarchists| quote = We must therefore turn to history for enlightenment; here we find that none of the proclaimed anarchist groups correspond to the libertarian position, that even the best of them have unrealistic and socialistic elements in their doctrines. Furthermore, we find that all of the current anarchists are irrational collectivists, and therefore at opposite poles from our position. We must therefore conclude that we are not anarchists, and that those who call us anarchists are not on firm etymological ground, and are being completely unhistorical.}}&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt; Anarchists, libertarian socialists, and libertarian communists tend to associate with each other, whilst avoiding association with anarcho-capitalists.}}&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Egoism]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Market anarchism]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[National anarchism]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Post-classical and modern anarchism ===&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Anarcha-feminism]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Anarcho-pacifism]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Anarcho-primitivism]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Anarcho-transhumanism]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Post-leftism]]{{refn|group=note|name=postleft|Post-leftism and post-anarchism reject political philosophy altogether as a reactionary force, but they practically advocate for anarchism.}}&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Post-anarchism]]{{refn|group=note|name=postleft}}&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Queer anarchism]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Characteristics ==&lt;br /&gt;
Anarchism does not go beyond general phrases against exploitation, it does not understand what the causes of exploitation are, nor the [[class struggle]] as a creative force for the realization of [[socialism]]. The anarchist denial of political struggle contributes objectively to the subordination of the [[Proletariat|working class]] to [[Bourgeoisie|bourgeois]] politics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The most essential thing in the struggle against anarchism lies in the problem of how the [[revolution]] should proceed in relation to the [[State]] and in the problem of the State in general. Anarchists advocate for the immediate annihilation of the State. They do not recognize that it is possible to take advantage of the bourgeois State to prepare the proletariat for the revolution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After 1917, anarchism in Russia became a [[counter-revolutionary]] tendency. Historically, Anarchism saw brief surges in popularity in [[Anarchist Catalonia (1936–1939)|Catalonia]], the [[Ukrainian Free Territory|Free Territory]] in [[Ukraine]] and in the Korean Peninsula. Today, it enjoys a certain influence in the United States and Europe.&amp;lt;ref name=&amp;quot;:0&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Distinctions between Marxists and Anarchists==&lt;br /&gt;
The essential distinctions in the criteria of Marxists and anarchists were reduced by [[Lenin]] to three fundamental points:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*In that the first, whose end is the complete withering away of the State, acknowledge that this end can only be achieved after the socialist revolution has abolished classes as a result of the establishment of [[socialism]]. The latter, on the other hand, want to completely destroy the State overnight, without understanding the conditions in which this destruction can take place.&lt;br /&gt;
*They first acknowledge the need for the [[proletariat]], after conquering political power, to totally destroy the former State machine, replacing it with a new one. The latter advocate the destruction of the state machine and have an absolutely confused idea of what the proletariat must replace the machine with and how it will exercise revolutionary power. Anarchists reject even the use of state power by the revolutionary proletariat, their revolutionary dictatorship.&lt;br /&gt;
* The first demand that the proletariat prepare for revolution by taking advantage of the modern State, while anarchists reject it.&amp;lt;ref&amp;gt;Rumiántsev, A. (1981): &#039;&#039;Comunismo científico&#039;&#039; (diccionario), p. 14-17. Moscú: Progreso, 1981.&amp;lt;/ref&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In the [[State &amp;amp; Revolution]], it has been clearly laid further when Marx emphasised of the &amp;quot;revolutionary and transient form&amp;quot; of the state that the proletariat still needs. Instead of immediately abolishing the state as the anarchists desire, the Marxist stance remains that the proletariat still needs the state as well as the resources and methods of state power to use against the oppressor class or exploiters. The keypoint here is &amp;quot;temporary&amp;quot;, for eventually, the state will eventually wither away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Examples of anarchist experiments ==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capitol Hill Autonomous Zone]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Ukrainian Free Territory]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Anarchist Catalonia]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Korean People&#039;s Association in Manchuria]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Left-wing libertarianism]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Right-wing libertarianism]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Idealism]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Further reading ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;[[Library:Anarchism or socialism?|Anarchism or Socialism?]]&#039;&#039; ([[Joseph Stalin]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Notes==&lt;br /&gt;
{{reflist|group=note}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;references /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Left-wing ideologies]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Utopian socialism]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>The Phantom Bull</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>